diff --git a/apps/api/documents/api.js b/apps/api/documents/api.js index a5f318bbd..abe0c0325 100644 --- a/apps/api/documents/api.js +++ b/apps/api/documents/api.js @@ -48,7 +48,8 @@ comment: // default = edit, modifyFilter: // default = true modifyContentControl: // default = true - fillForms: // default = edit || review + fillForms: // default = edit || review, + copy: // default = true } }, editorConfig: { @@ -75,14 +76,14 @@ { title: 'document title', url: 'document url', - folder: 'path to document' + folder: 'path to document', }, ... ], templates: [ { - name: 'template name', - icon: 'template icon url', + title: 'template name', // name - is deprecated + image: 'template icon url', url: 'http://...' }, ... @@ -133,7 +134,10 @@ spellcheck: true, compatibleFeatures: false, unit: 'cm' // cm, pt, inch, - mentionShare : true // customize tooltip for mention + mentionShare : true // customize tooltip for mention, + macros: true // can run macros in document + plugins: true // can run plugins in document + macrosMode: 'warn' // warn about automatic macros, 'enable', 'disable', 'warn' }, plugins: { autostart: ['asc.{FFE1F462-1EA2-4391-990D-4CC84940B754}'], @@ -212,7 +216,9 @@ _config.editorConfig.canRequestMailMergeRecipients = _config.events && !!_config.events.onRequestMailMergeRecipients; _config.editorConfig.canRequestCompareFile = _config.events && !!_config.events.onRequestCompareFile; _config.editorConfig.canRequestSharingSettings = _config.events && !!_config.events.onRequestSharingSettings; + _config.editorConfig.canRequestCreateNew = _config.events && !!_config.events.onRequestCreateNew; _config.frameEditorId = placeholderId; + _config.parentOrigin = window.location.origin; var onMouseUp = function (evt) { _processMouse(evt); @@ -394,6 +400,10 @@ if (target && _checkConfigParams()) { iframe = createIframe(_config); + if (iframe.src) { + var pathArray = iframe.src.split('/'); + this.frameOrigin = pathArray[0] + '//' + pathArray[2]; + } target.parentNode && target.parentNode.replaceChild(iframe, target); var _msgDispatcher = new MessageDispatcher(_onMessage, this); } @@ -682,7 +692,7 @@ var _onMessage = function(msg) { // TODO: check message origin - if (msg && window.JSON) { + if (msg && window.JSON && _scope.frameOrigin==msg.origin ) { try { var msg = window.JSON.parse(msg.data); @@ -762,7 +772,9 @@ if ( typeof(customization) == 'object' && ( customization.toolbarNoTabs || (config.editorConfig.targetApp!=='desktop') && (customization.loaderName || customization.loaderLogo))) { index = "/index_loader.html"; - } + } else if (config.editorConfig.mode == 'editdiagram' || config.editorConfig.mode == 'editmerge') + index = "/index_internal.html"; + } path += index; return path; @@ -805,6 +817,9 @@ if (config.editorConfig && config.editorConfig.customization && (config.editorConfig.customization.toolbar===false)) params += "&toolbar=false"; + if (config.parentOrigin) + params += "&parentOrigin=" + config.parentOrigin; + return params; } diff --git a/apps/common/Gateway.js b/apps/common/Gateway.js index ec542cb31..e36822565 100644 --- a/apps/common/Gateway.js +++ b/apps/common/Gateway.js @@ -135,6 +135,8 @@ if (Common === undefined) { var _onMessage = function(msg) { // TODO: check message origin + if (msg.origin !== window.parentOrigin && msg.origin !== window.location.origin) return; + var data = msg.data; if (Object.prototype.toString.apply(data) !== '[object String]' || !window.JSON) { return; @@ -304,8 +306,8 @@ if (Common === undefined) { _postMessage({event:'onRequestSendNotify', data: emails}); }, - requestInsertImage: function () { - _postMessage({event:'onRequestInsertImage'}); + requestInsertImage: function (command) { + _postMessage({event:'onRequestInsertImage', data: {c: command}}); }, requestMailMergeRecipients: function () { @@ -320,6 +322,10 @@ if (Common === undefined) { _postMessage({event:'onRequestSharingSettings'}); }, + requestCreateNew: function () { + _postMessage({event:'onRequestCreateNew'}); + }, + on: function(event, handler){ var localHandler = function(event, data){ handler.call(me, data) diff --git a/apps/common/locale.js b/apps/common/locale.js index d954165fc..7990b2c8d 100644 --- a/apps/common/locale.js +++ b/apps/common/locale.js @@ -74,6 +74,9 @@ Common.Locale = new(function() { var res = ''; if (l10n && scope && scope.name) { res = l10n[scope.name + '.' + prop]; + + if ( !res && scope.default ) + res = scope.default; } return res || (scope ? eval(scope.name).prototype[prop] : ''); diff --git a/apps/common/main/lib/component/Button.js b/apps/common/main/lib/component/Button.js index 12eb656b7..50c2c4020 100644 --- a/apps/common/main/lib/component/Button.js +++ b/apps/common/main/lib/component/Button.js @@ -313,7 +313,8 @@ define([ if (me.options.el) { me.render(); - } + } else if (me.options.parentEl) + me.render(me.options.parentEl); }, render: function(parentEl) { @@ -646,8 +647,14 @@ define([ oldCls = this.iconCls; this.iconCls = cls; - btnIconEl.removeClass(oldCls); - btnIconEl.addClass(cls || ''); + if (/svgicon/.test(this.iconCls)) { + var icon = /svgicon\s(\S+)/.exec(this.iconCls); + btnIconEl.find('use.zoom-int').attr('xlink:href', icon && icon.length>1 ? '#' + icon[1]: ''); + btnIconEl.find('use.zoom-grit').attr('xlink:href', icon && icon.length>1 ? '#' + icon[1] + '-150' : ''); + } else { + btnIconEl.removeClass(oldCls); + btnIconEl.addClass(cls || ''); + } }, changeIcon: function(opts) { diff --git a/apps/common/main/lib/component/Calendar.js b/apps/common/main/lib/component/Calendar.js index 71b282a13..2304ab1f5 100644 --- a/apps/common/main/lib/component/Calendar.js +++ b/apps/common/main/lib/component/Calendar.js @@ -91,17 +91,17 @@ define([ me.currentDate = me.options.date || new Date(); me.btnPrev = new Common.UI.Button({ + parentEl: me.cmpEl.find('#prev-arrow'), cls: '', iconCls: 'arrow-prev img-commonctrl' }); - me.btnPrev.render(me.cmpEl.find('#prev-arrow')); me.btnPrev.on('click', _.bind(me.onClickPrev, me)); me.btnNext = new Common.UI.Button({ + parentEl: me.cmpEl.find('#next-arrow'), cls: '', iconCls: 'arrow-next img-commonctrl' }); - me.btnNext.render(me.cmpEl.find('#next-arrow')); me.btnNext.on('click', _.bind(me.onClickNext, me)); me.cmpEl.on('keydown', function(e) { diff --git a/apps/common/main/lib/component/CheckBox.js b/apps/common/main/lib/component/CheckBox.js index c42f26253..354046ecb 100644 --- a/apps/common/main/lib/component/CheckBox.js +++ b/apps/common/main/lib/component/CheckBox.js @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ define([ value : 'unchecked', template : _.template(''), initialize : function(options) { Common.UI.BaseView.prototype.initialize.call(this, options); diff --git a/apps/common/main/lib/component/ColorButton.js b/apps/common/main/lib/component/ColorButton.js index da3e9cb64..c01bcd325 100644 --- a/apps/common/main/lib/component/ColorButton.js +++ b/apps/common/main/lib/component/ColorButton.js @@ -34,11 +34,12 @@ if (Common === undefined) var Common = {}; define([ - 'common/main/lib/component/Button' + 'common/main/lib/component/Button', + 'common/main/lib/component/ThemeColorPalette' ], function () { 'use strict'; - Common.UI.ColorButton = Common.UI.Button.extend({ + Common.UI.ColorButton = Common.UI.Button.extend(_.extend({ options : { hint: false, enableToggle: false, @@ -49,25 +50,85 @@ define([ '
', '', '
' ].join('')), + initialize : function(options) { + if (!options.menu && options.menu !== false) {// menu==null or undefined + // set default menu + var me = this; + options.menu = me.getMenu(options); + me.on('render:after', function(btn) { + me.getPicker(options.color); + }); + } + + Common.UI.Button.prototype.initialize.call(this, options); + }, + + render: function(parentEl) { + Common.UI.Button.prototype.render.call(this, parentEl); + + if (this.options.color!==undefined) + this.setColor(this.options.color); + }, + + onColorSelect: function(picker, color) { + this.setColor(color); + this.trigger('color:select', this, color); + }, + setColor: function(color) { - var border_color, clr, - span = $(this.cmpEl).find('button span'); + var span = $(this.cmpEl).find('button span:nth-child(1)'); this.color = color; - if ( color== 'transparent' ) { - border_color = '#BEBEBE'; - clr = color; - span.addClass('color-transparent'); - } else { - border_color = 'transparent'; - clr = (typeof(color) == 'object') ? '#'+color.color : '#'+color; - span.removeClass('color-transparent'); + span.toggleClass('color-transparent', color=='transparent'); + span.css({'background-color': (color=='transparent') ? color : ((typeof(color) == 'object') ? '#'+color.color : '#'+color)}); + }, + + getPicker: function(color) { + if (!this.colorPicker) { + this.colorPicker = new Common.UI.ThemeColorPalette({ + el: this.cmpEl.find('#' + this.menu.id + '-color-menu'), + transparent: this.options.transparent, + value: color + }); + this.colorPicker.on('select', _.bind(this.onColorSelect, this)); + this.cmpEl.find('#' + this.menu.id + '-color-new').on('click', _.bind(this.addNewColor, this)); } - span.css({'background-color': clr, 'border-color': border_color}); - } - }); + return this.colorPicker; + }, + + getMenu: function(options) { + if (typeof this.menu !== 'object') { + options = options || this.options; + var id = Common.UI.getId(), + menu = new Common.UI.Menu({ + id: id, + additionalAlign: options.additionalAlign, + items: (options.additionalItems ? options.additionalItems : []).concat([ + { template: _.template('
') }, + { template: _.template('' + this.textNewColor + '') } + ]) + }); + return menu; + } + return this.menu; + }, + + setMenu: function (m) { + m = m || this.getMenu(); + Common.UI.Button.prototype.setMenu.call(this, m); + this.getPicker(this.options.color); + }, + + addNewColor: function() { + this.colorPicker && this.colorPicker.addNewColor((typeof(this.color) == 'object') ? this.color.color : this.color); + }, + + textNewColor: 'Add New Custom Color' + + }, Common.UI.ColorButton || {})); }); \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/common/main/lib/component/ComboBorderSize.js b/apps/common/main/lib/component/ComboBorderSize.js index 8f01b7071..f7c7ef6b4 100644 --- a/apps/common/main/lib/component/ComboBorderSize.js +++ b/apps/common/main/lib/component/ComboBorderSize.js @@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ define([ if (record.get('value')>0) { formcontrol[0].innerHTML = ''; formcontrol.removeClass('text').addClass('image'); - formcontrol.css('background-position', '0 -' + record.get('offsety') + 'px'); + formcontrol.css('background-position', '10px -' + record.get('offsety') + 'px'); } else { formcontrol[0].innerHTML = this.txtNoBorders; formcontrol.removeClass('image').addClass('text'); @@ -229,7 +229,7 @@ define([ '', '', @@ -344,7 +344,7 @@ define([ onApiChangeFontInternal: function(font) { if (this.inFormControl) return; - var name = (_.isFunction(font.get_Name) ? font.get_Name() : font.asc_getName()); + var name = (_.isFunction(font.get_Name) ? font.get_Name() : font.asc_getFontName()); if (this.getRawValue() !== name) { var record = this.store.findWhere({ @@ -380,7 +380,7 @@ define([ onInsertItem: function(item) { $(this.el).find('ul').prepend(_.template([ '
  • ', - '', + '', '
  • ' ].join(''))({ item: item.attributes, diff --git a/apps/common/main/lib/component/ComboDataView.js b/apps/common/main/lib/component/ComboDataView.js index ff31ae0aa..7c0d31c99 100644 --- a/apps/common/main/lib/component/ComboDataView.js +++ b/apps/common/main/lib/component/ComboDataView.js @@ -459,6 +459,13 @@ define([ this.menuPicker.selectByIndex(index); }, + selectRecord: function(record) { + if (!record) + this.fieldPicker.deselectAll(); + + this.menuPicker.selectRecord(record); + }, + setItemWidth: function(width) { if (this.itemWidth != width) this.itemWidth = window.devicePixelRatio > 1 ? width / 2 : width; diff --git a/apps/common/main/lib/component/DataView.js b/apps/common/main/lib/component/DataView.js index dc309e1d1..766d9dcd4 100644 --- a/apps/common/main/lib/component/DataView.js +++ b/apps/common/main/lib/component/DataView.js @@ -575,8 +575,8 @@ define([ var div_top = div.offset().top, div_first = $(this.dataViewItems[0].el), - div_first_top = (div_first.length>0) ? div_first[0].offsetTop : 0; - if (div_top < inner_top + div_first_top || div_top+div.outerHeight() > inner_top + innerEl.height()) { + div_first_top = (div_first.length>0) ? div_first[0].clientTop : 0; + if (div_top < inner_top + div_first_top || div_top+div.outerHeight()*0.9 > inner_top + div_first_top + innerEl.height()) { if (this.scroller && this.allowScrollbar) { this.scroller.scrollTop(innerEl.scrollTop() + div_top - inner_top - div_first_top, 0); } else { diff --git a/apps/common/main/lib/component/InputField.js b/apps/common/main/lib/component/InputField.js index 952dbe54b..df8164441 100644 --- a/apps/common/main/lib/component/InputField.js +++ b/apps/common/main/lib/component/InputField.js @@ -53,7 +53,8 @@ if (Common === undefined) define([ 'common/main/lib/component/BaseView', - 'common/main/lib/component/Tooltip' + 'common/main/lib/component/Tooltip', + 'common/main/lib/component/Button' ], function () { 'use strict'; Common.UI.InputField = Common.UI.BaseView.extend((function() { @@ -87,7 +88,7 @@ define([ 'placeholder="<%= placeHolder %>" ', 'value="<%= value %>"', '>', - '', + '', '' ].join('')), @@ -379,4 +380,136 @@ define([ } } })()); + + Common.UI.InputFieldBtn = Common.UI.InputField.extend((function() { + return { + options : { + id : null, + cls : '', + style : '', + value : '', + type : 'text', + name : '', + validation : null, + allowBlank : true, + placeHolder : '', + blankError : null, + spellcheck : false, + maskExp : '', + validateOnChange: false, + validateOnBlur: true, + disabled: false, + editable: true, + iconCls: 'btn-select-range', + btnHint: '' + }, + + template: _.template([ + '
    ', + '', + '', + '
    ' + + '' + + '
    ', + '
    ' + ].join('')), + + render : function(parentEl) { + var me = this; + + if (!me.rendered) { + this.cmpEl = $(this.template({ + id : this.id, + cls : this.cls, + style : this.style, + value : this.value, + type : this.type, + name : this.name, + placeHolder : this.placeHolder, + spellcheck : this.spellcheck, + iconCls : this.options.iconCls, + scope : me + })); + + if (parentEl) { + this.setElement(parentEl, false); + parentEl.html(this.cmpEl); + } else { + this.$el.html(this.cmpEl); + } + } else { + this.cmpEl = this.$el; + } + + if (!me.rendered) { + var el = this.cmpEl; + + this._button = new Common.UI.Button({ + el: this.cmpEl.find('button'), + hint: this.options.btnHint || '' + }); + this._button.on('click', _.bind(this.onButtonClick, this)); + + this._input = this.cmpEl.find('input').addBack().filter('input'); + + if (this.editable) { + this._input.on('blur', _.bind(this.onInputChanged, this)); + this._input.on('keypress', _.bind(this.onKeyPress, this)); + this._input.on('keydown', _.bind(this.onKeyDown, this)); + this._input.on('keyup', _.bind(this.onKeyUp, this)); + if (this.validateOnChange) this._input.on('input', _.bind(this.onInputChanging, this)); + if (this.maxLength) this._input.attr('maxlength', this.maxLength); + } + + this.setEditable(this.editable); + + if (this.disabled) + this.setDisabled(this.disabled); + + if (this._input.closest('.asc-window').length>0) + var onModalClose = function() { + var errorTip = el.find('.input-error').data('bs.tooltip'); + if (errorTip) errorTip.tip().remove(); + Common.NotificationCenter.off({'modal:close': onModalClose}); + }; + Common.NotificationCenter.on({'modal:close': onModalClose}); + } + + me.rendered = true; + + return this; + }, + + onButtonClick: function(btn, e) { + this.trigger('button:click', this, e); + }, + + setDisabled: function(disabled) { + this.disabled = disabled; + $(this.el).toggleClass('disabled', disabled); + disabled + ? this._input.attr('disabled', true) + : this._input.removeAttr('disabled'); + this._button.setDisabled(disabled); + }, + + setBtnDisabled: function(disabled) { + this._button.setDisabled(disabled); + }, + + updateBtnHint: function(hint) { + this.options.hint = hint; + + if (!this.rendered) return; + this._button.updateHint(this.options.hint); + } + } + })()); }); \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/common/main/lib/component/LoadMask.js b/apps/common/main/lib/component/LoadMask.js index 2d5801b6e..b9973a33b 100644 --- a/apps/common/main/lib/component/LoadMask.js +++ b/apps/common/main/lib/component/LoadMask.js @@ -68,10 +68,6 @@ define([ 'use strict'; Common.UI.LoadMask = Common.UI.BaseView.extend((function() { - var ownerEl, - maskeEl, - loaderEl; - return { options : { cls : '', @@ -91,10 +87,17 @@ define([ Common.UI.BaseView.prototype.initialize.call(this, options); this.template = this.options.template || this.template; - this.cls = this.options.cls; - this.style = this.options.style; this.title = this.options.title; - this.owner = this.options.owner; + + this.ownerEl = (this.options.owner instanceof Common.UI.BaseView) ? $(this.options.owner.el) : $(this.options.owner); + this.loaderEl = $(this.template({ + id : this.id, + cls : this.options.cls, + style : this.options.style, + title : this.title + })); + this.maskeEl = $('
    '); + this.timerId = 0; }, render: function() { @@ -102,66 +105,75 @@ define([ }, show: function(){ - if (maskeEl || loaderEl) - return; - - ownerEl = (this.owner instanceof Common.UI.BaseView) ? $(this.owner.el) : $(this.owner); + // if (maskeEl || loaderEl) + // return; // The owner is already masked - if (ownerEl.hasClass('masked')) + var ownerEl = this.ownerEl, + loaderEl = this.loaderEl, + maskeEl = this.maskeEl; + if (!!ownerEl.ismasked) return this; + ownerEl.ismasked = true; + var me = this; + if (me.title != me.options.title) { + me.options.title = me.title; + $('.asc-loadmask-title', loaderEl).html(me.title); + } - maskeEl = $('
    '); - loaderEl = $(this.template({ - id : me.id, - cls : me.cls, - style : me.style, - title : me.title - })); + // show mask after 500 ms if it wont be hided + me.timerId = setTimeout(function () { + ownerEl.append(maskeEl); + ownerEl.append(loaderEl); - ownerEl.addClass('masked'); - ownerEl.append(maskeEl); - ownerEl.append(loaderEl); + loaderEl.css({ + top : Math.round(ownerEl.height() / 2 - (loaderEl.height() + parseInt(loaderEl.css('padding-top')) + parseInt(loaderEl.css('padding-bottom'))) / 2) + 'px', + left: Math.round(ownerEl.width() / 2 - (loaderEl.width() + parseInt(loaderEl.css('padding-left')) + parseInt(loaderEl.css('padding-right'))) / 2) + 'px' + }); + // if (ownerEl.height()<1 || ownerEl.width()<1) + // loaderEl.css({visibility: 'hidden'}); - loaderEl.css({ - top : Math.round(ownerEl.height() / 2 - (loaderEl.height() + parseInt(loaderEl.css('padding-top')) + parseInt(loaderEl.css('padding-bottom'))) / 2) + 'px', - left: Math.round(ownerEl.width() / 2 - (loaderEl.width() + parseInt(loaderEl.css('padding-left')) + parseInt(loaderEl.css('padding-right'))) / 2) + 'px' - - }); - if (ownerEl.height()<1 || ownerEl.width()<1) - loaderEl.css({visibility: 'hidden'}); - - Common.util.Shortcuts.suspendEvents(); + if (ownerEl && ownerEl.closest('.asc-window.modal').length==0) + Common.util.Shortcuts.suspendEvents(); + },500); return this; }, hide: function() { - ownerEl && ownerEl.removeClass('masked'); - maskeEl && maskeEl.remove(); - loaderEl && loaderEl.remove(); - maskeEl = null; - loaderEl = null; - Common.util.Shortcuts.resumeEvents(); + var ownerEl = this.ownerEl; + if (this.timerId) { + clearTimeout(this.timerId); + this.timerId = 0; + } + if (ownerEl && ownerEl.ismasked) { + if (ownerEl.closest('.asc-window.modal').length==0 && !Common.Utils.ModalWindow.isVisible()) + Common.util.Shortcuts.resumeEvents(); + + this.maskeEl && this.maskeEl.remove(); + this.loaderEl && this.loaderEl.remove(); + } + delete ownerEl.ismasked; }, setTitle: function(title) { this.title = title; - if (ownerEl && ownerEl.hasClass('masked') && loaderEl){ - $('.asc-loadmask-title', loaderEl).html(title); + if (this.ownerEl && this.ownerEl.ismasked && this.loaderEl){ + $('.asc-loadmask-title', this.loaderEl).html(title); } - }, isVisible: function() { - return !_.isEmpty(loaderEl); + return !!this.ownerEl.ismasked; }, updatePosition: function() { - if (ownerEl && ownerEl.hasClass('masked') && loaderEl){ + var ownerEl = this.ownerEl, + loaderEl = this.loaderEl; + if (ownerEl && ownerEl.ismasked && loaderEl){ loaderEl.css({ top : Math.round(ownerEl.height() / 2 - (loaderEl.height() + parseInt(loaderEl.css('padding-top')) + parseInt(loaderEl.css('padding-bottom'))) / 2) + 'px', left: Math.round(ownerEl.width() / 2 - (loaderEl.width() + parseInt(loaderEl.css('padding-left')) + parseInt(loaderEl.css('padding-right'))) / 2) + 'px' diff --git a/apps/common/main/lib/component/Menu.js b/apps/common/main/lib/component/Menu.js index e5ee14ebc..e528612c6 100644 --- a/apps/common/main/lib/component/Menu.js +++ b/apps/common/main/lib/component/Menu.js @@ -571,6 +571,8 @@ define([ } } } else { + var cg = Common.Utils.croppedGeometry(); + docH = cg.height - 10; if (top + menuH > docH) { if (fixedAlign && typeof fixedAlign == 'string') { // how to align if menu height > window height m = fixedAlign.match(/^([a-z]+)-([a-z]+)/); @@ -579,13 +581,18 @@ define([ top = docH - menuH; } - if (top < 0) - top = 0; + + if (top < cg.top) + top = cg.top; } if (this.options.additionalAlign) this.options.additionalAlign.call(this, menuRoot, left, top); - else - menuRoot.css({left: Math.ceil(left), top: Math.ceil(top)}); + else { + var _css = {left: Math.ceil(left), top: Math.ceil(top)}; + if (!(menuH < docH)) _css['margin-top'] = 0; + + menuRoot.css(_css); + } }, clearAll: function() { diff --git a/apps/common/main/lib/component/MetricSpinner.js b/apps/common/main/lib/component/MetricSpinner.js index 81cf96b1d..b90673569 100644 --- a/apps/common/main/lib/component/MetricSpinner.js +++ b/apps/common/main/lib/component/MetricSpinner.js @@ -262,10 +262,10 @@ define([ this.lastValue = this.value; if ( typeof value === 'undefined' || value === ''){ this.value = ''; - } else if (this.options.allowAuto && (Math.abs(parseFloat(value)+1.)<0.0001 || value==this.options.autoText)) { + } else if (this.options.allowAuto && (Math.abs(Common.Utils.String.parseFloat(value)+1.)<0.0001 || value==this.options.autoText)) { this.value = this.options.autoText; } else { - var number = this._add(parseFloat(value), 0, (this.options.allowDecimal) ? 3 : 0); + var number = this._add(Common.Utils.String.parseFloat(value), 0, (this.options.allowDecimal) ? 3 : 0); if ( typeof value === 'undefined' || isNaN(number)) { number = this.oldValue; showError = true; @@ -448,12 +448,12 @@ define([ var val = me.options.step; if (me._fromKeyDown) { val = this.getRawValue(); - val = _.isEmpty(val) ? me.oldValue : parseFloat(val); + val = _.isEmpty(val) ? me.oldValue : Common.Utils.String.parseFloat(val); } else if(me.getValue() !== '') { if (me.options.allowAuto && me.getValue()==me.options.autoText) { val = me.options.minValue-me.options.step; } else - val = parseFloat(me.getValue()); + val = Common.Utils.String.parseFloat(me.getValue()); if (isNaN(val)) val = this.oldValue; } else { @@ -469,12 +469,12 @@ define([ var val = me.options.step; if (me._fromKeyDown) { val = this.getRawValue(); - val = _.isEmpty(val) ? me.oldValue : parseFloat(val); + val = _.isEmpty(val) ? me.oldValue : Common.Utils.String.parseFloat(val); } else if(me.getValue() !== '') { if (me.options.allowAuto && me.getValue()==me.options.autoText) { val = me.options.minValue; } else - val = parseFloat(me.getValue()); + val = Common.Utils.String.parseFloat(me.getValue()); if (isNaN(val)) val = this.oldValue; diff --git a/apps/common/main/lib/component/Mixtbar.js b/apps/common/main/lib/component/Mixtbar.js index 6e48e4261..7a40660a8 100644 --- a/apps/common/main/lib/component/Mixtbar.js +++ b/apps/common/main/lib/component/Mixtbar.js @@ -61,7 +61,11 @@ define([ }; function onTabDblclick(e) { - this.fireEvent('change:compact', [$(e.target).data('tab')]); + var tab = $(e.currentTarget).find('> a[data-tab]').data('tab'); + if ( this.dblclick_el == tab ) { + this.fireEvent('change:compact', [tab]); + this.dblclick_el = undefined; + } } function onShowFullviewPanel(state) { @@ -233,25 +237,35 @@ define([ onTabClick: function (e) { var me = this; - var $target = $(e.currentTarget); var tab = $target.find('> a[data-tab]').data('tab'); - var islone = $target.hasClass('x-lone'); - if ( me.isFolded ) { - if ( $target.hasClass('x-lone') ) { - me.collapse(); - // me.fireEvent('') - } else - if ( $target.hasClass('active') ) { - me.collapse(); - } else { - me.setTab(tab); - me.processPanelVisible(null, true); - } + if ($target.hasClass('x-lone')) { + me.isFolded && me.collapse(); } else { - if ( !$target.hasClass('active') && !islone ) { + if ( $target.hasClass('active') ) { + if (!me._timerSetTab) { + me.dblclick_el = tab; + if ( me.isFolded ) { + me.collapse(); + setTimeout(function(){ + me.dblclick_el = undefined; + }, 500); + } + } + } else { + me._timerSetTab = true; + setTimeout(function(){ + me._timerSetTab = false; + }, 500); me.setTab(tab); me.processPanelVisible(null, true); + if ( !me.isFolded ) { + if ( me.dblclick_timer ) clearTimeout(me.dblclick_timer); + me.dblclick_timer = setTimeout(function () { + me.dblclick_el = tab; + delete me.dblclick_timer; + },500); + } } } }, @@ -286,6 +300,7 @@ define([ if ( $tp.length ) { $tp.addClass('active'); } + this.fireEvent('tab:active', [tab]); } }, @@ -365,20 +380,68 @@ define([ if ( $active && $active.length ) { var _maxright = $active.parents('.box-controls').width(); var data = $active.data(), - _rightedge = data.rightedge; + _rightedge = data.rightedge, + _btns = data.buttons, + _flex = data.flex; if ( !_rightedge ) { _rightedge = $active.get(0).getBoundingClientRect().right; } + if ( !_btns ) { + _btns = []; + _.each($active.find('.btn-slot .x-huge'), function(item) { + _btns.push($(item).closest('.btn-slot')); + }); + data.buttons = _btns; + } + if (!_flex) { + _flex = []; + _.each($active.find('.group.flex'), function(item) { + var el = $(item); + _flex.push({el: el, width: el.attr('data-group-width') || el.attr('max-width')}); //save flex element and it's initial width + }); + data.flex = _flex; + } - if ( _rightedge > _maxright ) { - if ( !$active.hasClass('compactwidth') ) { - $active.addClass('compactwidth'); - data.rightedge = _rightedge; + if ( _rightedge > _maxright) { + if (_flex.length>0) { + for (var i=0; i<_flex.length; i++) { + var item = _flex[i].el; + if (item.outerWidth() > parseInt(item.css('min-width'))) + return; + else + item.css('width', item.css('min-width')); + } } + for (var i=_btns.length-1; i>=0; i--) { + var btn = _btns[i]; + if ( !btn.hasClass('compactwidth') ) { + btn.addClass('compactwidth'); + _rightedge = $active.get(0).getBoundingClientRect().right; + if (_rightedge <= _maxright) + break; + } + } + data.rightedge = _rightedge; } else { - if ($active.hasClass('compactwidth')) { - $active.removeClass('compactwidth'); + for (var i=0; i<_btns.length; i++) { + var btn = _btns[i]; + if ( btn.hasClass('compactwidth') ) { + btn.removeClass('compactwidth'); + _rightedge = $active.get(0).getBoundingClientRect().right; + if ( _rightedge > _maxright) { + btn.addClass('compactwidth'); + _rightedge = $active.get(0).getBoundingClientRect().right; + break; + } + } + } + data.rightedge = _rightedge; + if (_flex.length>0 && $active.find('.btn-slot.compactwidth').length<1) { + for (var i=0; i<_flex.length; i++) { + var item = _flex[i]; + item.el.css('width', item.width); + } } } } @@ -406,8 +469,10 @@ define([ }, setVisible: function (tab, visible) { - if ( tab && this.$tabs ) + if ( tab && this.$tabs ) { this.$tabs.find('> a[data-tab=' + tab + ']').parent().css('display', visible ? '' : 'none'); + this.onResize(); + } } }; }())); diff --git a/apps/common/main/lib/component/RadioBox.js b/apps/common/main/lib/component/RadioBox.js index b26e23aa8..1c9a6c360 100644 --- a/apps/common/main/lib/component/RadioBox.js +++ b/apps/common/main/lib/component/RadioBox.js @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ define([ rendered : false, template : _.template(''), initialize : function(options) { Common.UI.BaseView.prototype.initialize.call(this, options); diff --git a/apps/common/main/lib/component/SynchronizeTip.js b/apps/common/main/lib/component/SynchronizeTip.js index 57a203492..9ddedf973 100644 --- a/apps/common/main/lib/component/SynchronizeTip.js +++ b/apps/common/main/lib/component/SynchronizeTip.js @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ define([ '
    ', '
    ', '
    ', - '
    <%= scope.text %>
    ', + '
    <%= scope.text %>
    ', '
    ', '
    ', '<% if ( scope.showLink ) { %>', @@ -105,6 +105,10 @@ define([ applyPlacement: function () { var showxy = this.target.offset(), innerHeight = Common.Utils.innerHeight(); + + if (this.placement == 'document') { + // this.cmpEl.css('top', $('#editor_sdk').offset().top); + } else if (this.placement == 'top') this.cmpEl.css({bottom : innerHeight - showxy.top + 'px', right: Common.Utils.innerWidth() - showxy.left - this.target.width()/2 + 'px'}); else {// left or right @@ -124,7 +128,7 @@ define([ }, textDontShow : 'Don\'t show this message again', - textSynchronize : 'The document has been changed by another user.
    Please click to save your changes and reload the updates.' + textSynchronize : 'The document has been changed by another user.
    Please click to save your changes and reload the updates.' } })(), Common.UI.SynchronizeTip || {})); }); diff --git a/apps/common/main/lib/component/Tab.js b/apps/common/main/lib/component/Tab.js index 2ecf3a621..5d61c243a 100644 --- a/apps/common/main/lib/component/Tab.js +++ b/apps/common/main/lib/component/Tab.js @@ -51,8 +51,9 @@ define([ this.active = false; this.label = 'Tab'; this.cls = ''; - this.template = _.template(['
  • ', - '<%- label %>', + this.index = -1; + this.template = _.template(['
  • ', + '<%- label %>', '
  • '].join('')); this.initialize.call(this, opts); @@ -124,7 +125,7 @@ define([ }, setCaption: function(text) { - this.$el.find('> a').text(text); + this.$el.find('> span').text(text); } }); diff --git a/apps/common/main/lib/component/TabBar.js b/apps/common/main/lib/component/TabBar.js index f85ea421c..bcab1e0b8 100644 --- a/apps/common/main/lib/component/TabBar.js +++ b/apps/common/main/lib/component/TabBar.js @@ -142,8 +142,10 @@ define([ me.bar.$bar.scrollLeft(me.scrollLeft); me.bar.scrollX = undefined; } + me.bar.checkInvisible(); me.drag = undefined; + me.bar.trigger('tab:drop', this); } } function dragMove (event) { @@ -187,6 +189,7 @@ define([ $(document).off('mouseup.tabbar'); $(document).off('mousemove.tabbar', dragMove); }); + this.bar.trigger('tab:drag', this.bar.selectTabs); } } } @@ -219,10 +222,16 @@ define([ this.bar.trigger('tab:manual', this.bar, this.bar.tabs.indexOf(tab), tab); } else { tab.changeState(); + if (this.bar.isEditFormula) + setTimeout(function(){ + $('#ce-cell-content').focus(); + var $cellContent = $('#ce-cell-content')[0]; + $cellContent.selectionStart = $cellContent.selectionEnd = $cellContent.value.length; + }, 500); } } } - !tab.disabled && Common.NotificationCenter.trigger('edit:complete', this.bar); + !tab.disabled && Common.NotificationCenter.trigger('edit:complete', 'tab'); }, this), dblclick: $.proxy(function() { this.trigger('tab:dblclick', this, this.tabs.indexOf(tab), tab); @@ -231,14 +240,82 @@ define([ this.trigger('tab:contextmenu', this, this.tabs.indexOf(tab), tab, this.selectTabs); }, this.bar), mousedown: $.proxy(function (e) { - if (this.bar.options.draggable && !_.isUndefined(dragHelper) && (3 !== e.which)) { - if (!tab.isLockTheDrag) { - if (!e.ctrlKey && !e.metaKey && !e.shiftKey) { - tab.changeState(); - dragHelper.setHookTabs(e, this.bar, this.bar.selectTabs); + if ((3 !== e.which) && !e.ctrlKey && !e.metaKey && !e.shiftKey) { + var lockDrag = tab.isLockTheDrag; + this.bar.selectTabs.forEach(function (item) { + if (item.isLockTheDrag) { + lockDrag = true; } + }); + if (this.bar.selectTabs.length === this.bar.tabs.length || this.bar.tabs.length === 1 || this.bar.isEditFormula) { + lockDrag = true; } + this.bar.$el.find('ul > li > span').attr('draggable', !lockDrag); + if (!lockDrag) + tab.changeState(); + } else { + this.bar.$el.find('ul > li > span').attr('draggable', 'false'); } + if ($('#ce-cell-content').is(':focus')) + if (!this.bar.isEditFormula) { + $('#ce-cell-content').blur(); + } else { + setTimeout(function () { + $('#ce-cell-content').focus(); + }, 500) + } + }, this) + }); + tab.$el.children().on( + {dragstart: $.proxy(function (e) { + var event = e.originalEvent, + img = document.createElement('div'); + event.dataTransfer.setDragImage(img, 0, 0); + event.dataTransfer.effectAllowed = 'move'; + this.bar.trigger('tab:dragstart', event.dataTransfer, this.bar.selectTabs); + }, this), + dragenter: $.proxy(function (e) { + var event = e.originalEvent; + if (!this.bar.isEditFormula) { + this.bar.$el.find('.mousemove').removeClass('mousemove right'); + $(e.currentTarget).parent().addClass('mousemove'); + var data = event.dataTransfer.getData("onlyoffice"); + event.dataTransfer.dropEffect = data ? 'move' : 'none'; + } else { + event.dataTransfer.dropEffect = 'none'; + } + }, this), + dragover: $.proxy(function (e) { + var event = e.originalEvent; + if (event.preventDefault) { + event.preventDefault(); // Necessary. Allows us to drop. + } + if (!this.bar.isEditFormula) { + this.bar.$el.find('.mousemove').removeClass('mousemove right'); + $(e.currentTarget).parent().addClass('mousemove'); + } else { + event.dataTransfer.dropEffect = 'none'; + } + return false; + }, this), + dragleave: $.proxy(function (e) { + $(e.currentTarget).parent().removeClass('mousemove right'); + }, this), + dragend: $.proxy(function (e) { + var event = e.originalEvent; + if (event.dataTransfer.dropEffect === 'move') { + this.bar.trigger('tab:dragend', true); + } else { + this.bar.trigger('tab:dragend', false); + } + this.bar.$el.find('.mousemove').removeClass('mousemove right'); + }, this), + drop: $.proxy(function (e) { + var event = e.originalEvent, + index = $(event.currentTarget).data('index'); + this.bar.$el.find('.mousemove').removeClass('mousemove right'); + this.bar.trigger('tab:drop', event.dataTransfer, index); + this.bar.isDrop = true; }, this) }); }; @@ -255,7 +332,7 @@ define([ }, tabs: [], - template: _.template(' +
    + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/apps/common/mobile/lib/view/Collaboration.js b/apps/common/mobile/lib/view/Collaboration.js index a9d54cd89..9a90b9cc4 100644 --- a/apps/common/mobile/lib/view/Collaboration.js +++ b/apps/common/mobile/lib/view/Collaboration.js @@ -116,6 +116,9 @@ define([ if (this.layout) { var $layour = this.layout.find('#collaboration-root-view'), isPhone = Common.SharedSettings.get('phone'); + if (!this.canViewComments) { + $layour.find('#item-comments').remove(); + } return $layour.html(); } @@ -146,7 +149,86 @@ define([ } }, + //Comments + + sliceQuote: function(text) { + if (text) { + var sliced = text.slice(0, 100); + if (sliced.length < text.length) { + sliced += '...'; + return sliced; + } + return text; + } + }, + + renderViewComments: function(comments, indCurComment) { + var isAndroid = Framework7.prototype.device.android === true; + var me = this; + if ($('.page-view-comments .page-content').length > 0) { + var template = ''; + if (comments && comments.length > 0) { + template = '
    ' + + '
      '; + var comment = comments[indCurComment]; + template += '
    • ' + + '
      ' + + '
      '; + if (isAndroid) { + template += '
      ' + comment.userInitials + '
      '; + } + template += '
      ' + comment.username + '
      ' + + '
      ' + comment.date + '
      '; + if (isAndroid) { + template += '
      '; + } + template += '
      '; + if (comment.editable && !me.viewmode) { + template += '
      ' + + '
      ' + + '
      ' + + '
      '; + } + template += '
      '; + + if (comment.quote) template += '
      ' + me.sliceQuote(comment.quote) + '
      '; + template += '
      ' + comment.comment + '
      '; + if (comment.replys.length > 0) { + template += '
        '; + _.each(comment.replys, function (reply) { + template += '
      • ' + + '
        ' + + '
        '; + if (isAndroid) { + template += '
        ' + reply.userInitials + '
        ' + } + template += '
        ' + reply.username + '
        ' + + '
        ' + reply.date + '
        ' + + '
        '; + if (isAndroid) { + template += '
        '; + } + if (reply.editable && !me.viewmode) { + template += '
        '; + } + template += '
        ' + + '
        ' + reply.reply + '
        ' + + '
      • '; + }); + template += '
      ' + } + + template += '
      ' + + '
    • '; + template += '
    '; + $('.page-view-comments .page-content').html(template); + } + } + Common.Utils.addScrollIfNeed('.page-view-comments.page', '.page-view-comments .page-content'); + }, + renderComments: function (comments) { + var me = this; var $pageComments = $('.page-comments .page-content'); if (!comments) { if ($('.comment').length > 0) { @@ -158,25 +240,46 @@ define([ if ($('#no-comments').length > 0) { $('#no-comments').remove(); } + var sortComments = _.sortBy(comments, 'time').reverse(); var $listComments = $('#comments-list'), items = []; - _.each(comments, function (comment) { + _.each(sortComments, function (comment) { var itemTemplate = [ - '
  • ', + '
  • ', '
    ', - '

    <%= item.username %>

    ', - '

    <%= item.date %>

    ', - '<% if(item.quote) {%>', - '

    <%= item.quote %>

    ', + '
    ', + '<% if (android) { %>
    <%= item.userInitials %>
    <% } %>', + '
    <%= item.username %>
    ', + '
    <%= item.date %>
    ', + '<% if (android) { %>
    <% } %>', + '
    ', + '<% if (item.editable && !viewmode) { %>', + '
    ', + '
    ', + '
    ', + '
    ', '<% } %>', - '

    <%= item.comment %>

    ', + '
    ', + '<% if(item.quote) {%>', + '
    <%= quote %>
    ', + '<% } %>', + '
    <%= item.comment %>
    ', '<% if(replys > 0) {%>', '
      ', '<% _.each(item.replys, function (reply) { %>', - '
    • ', - '

      <%= reply.username %>

      ', - '

      <%= reply.date %>

      ', - '

      <%= reply.reply %>

      ', + '
    • ', + '
      ', + '
      ', + '<% if (android) { %>
      <%= reply.userInitials %>
      <% } %>', + '
      <%= reply.username %>
      ', + '
      <%= reply.date %>
      ', + '
      ', + '<% if (android) { %>
      <% } %>', + '<% if (reply.editable && !viewmode) { %>', + '
      ', + '<% } %>', + '
      ', + '
      <%= reply.reply %>
      ', '
    • ', '<% }); %>', '
    ', @@ -188,13 +291,163 @@ define([ android: Framework7.prototype.device.android, item: comment, replys: comment.replys.length, + viewmode: me.viewmode, + quote: me.sliceQuote(comment.quote) })); }); - $listComments.html(items); + $listComments.html(items.join('')); } }, + renderEditComment: function(comment) { + var $pageEdit = $('.page-edit-comment .page-content'); + var isAndroid = Framework7.prototype.device.android === true; + var template = '
    ' + + (isAndroid ? '
    ' + comment.userInitials + '
    ' : '') + + '
    ' + comment.username + '
    ' + + '
    ' + comment.date + '
    ' + + (isAndroid ? '
    ' : '') + + '
    ' + + '
    '; + $pageEdit.html(_.template(template)); + }, + renderAddReply: function(name, color, initials, date) { + var $pageAdd = $('.page-add-reply .page-content'); + var isAndroid = Framework7.prototype.device.android === true; + var template = '
    ' + + (isAndroid ? '
    ' + initials + '
    ' : '') + + '
    ' + name + '
    ' + + '
    ' + date + '
    ' + + (isAndroid ? '
    ' : '') + + '
    ' + + '
    '; + $pageAdd.html(_.template(template)); + }, + + renderEditReply: function(reply) { + var $pageEdit = $('.page-edit-reply .page-content'); + var isAndroid = Framework7.prototype.device.android === true; + var template = '
    ' + + (isAndroid ? '
    ' + reply.userInitials + '
    ' : '') + + '
    ' + reply.username + '
    ' + + '
    ' + reply.date + '
    ' + + (isAndroid ? '
    ' : '') + + '
    ' + + '
    '; + $pageEdit.html(_.template(template)); + }, + + //view comments + getTemplateAddReplyPopup: function(name, color, initial, date) { + var isAndroid = Framework7.prototype.device.android === true; + var template = ''; + return template; + }, + + getTemplateContainerViewComments: function() { + var template = '
    ' + + '
    ' + + '
    ' + + (!this.viewmode ? '' + this.textAddReply + '' : '') + + '
    ' + + '
    ' + + '' + + '' + + '
    ' + + '
    ' + + '
    ' + + '
    ' + + '
    ' + + '
    ' + + '
    ' + + '
    ' + + '
    '; + return template; + }, + + getTemplateEditCommentPopup: function(comment) { + var isAndroid = Framework7.prototype.device.android === true; + var template = ''; + return template; + }, + + getTemplateEditReplyPopup: function(reply) { + var isAndroid = Framework7.prototype.device.android === true; + var template = ''; + return template; + }, + + renderChangeReview: function(change) { + var isAndroid = Framework7.prototype.device.android === true; + var template = (isAndroid ? '
    ' + change.initials + '
    ' : '') + + '
    ' + change.user + '
    ' + + '
    ' + change.date + '
    ' + + (isAndroid ? '
    ' : '') + + '
    ' + change.text + '
    '; + $('#current-change').html(_.template(template)); + }, textCollaboration: 'Collaboration', textReviewing: 'Review', @@ -209,7 +462,17 @@ define([ textOriginal: 'Original', textChange: 'Review Change', textEditUsers: 'Users', - textNoComments: "This document doesn\'t contain comments" + textNoComments: 'This document doesn\'t contain comments', + textEditСomment: 'Edit Comment', + textDone: 'Done', + textAddReply: 'Add Reply', + textEditReply: 'Edit Reply', + textCancel: 'Cancel', + textAllChangesEditing: 'All changes (Editing)', + textAllChangesAcceptedPreview: 'All changes accepted (Preview)', + textAllChangesRejectedPreview: 'All changes rejected (Preview)', + textAccept: 'Accept', + textReject: 'Reject' } })(), Common.Views.Collaboration || {})) }); \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/common/mobile/resources/less/ios/_collaboration.less b/apps/common/mobile/resources/less/ios/_collaboration.less index 37361bc8e..d958e12f4 100644 --- a/apps/common/mobile/resources/less/ios/_collaboration.less +++ b/apps/common/mobile/resources/less/ios/_collaboration.less @@ -1,4 +1,5 @@ .page-change { + background-color: #FFFFFF; .block-description { background-color: #fff; padding-top: 15px; @@ -28,23 +29,44 @@ margin-top: 10px; } .block-btn, .content-block.block-btn:first-child { + position: absolute; + bottom: 0; display: flex; flex-direction: row; - justify-content: space-around; - margin: 26px 0; + justify-content: space-between; + margin: 0; + width: 100%; + height: 44px; + align-items: center; + box-shadow: 0px 1px 10px rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.2); - #btn-next-change, #btn-reject-change { + #btn-reject-change { margin-left: 20px; } #btn-goto-change { - margin-right: 20px; + margin-left: 10px; } - .right-buttons { + .change-buttons, .accept-reject { display: flex; } - .link { - display: inline-block; + .next-prev { + display: flex; + .link { + width: 44px; + } } + .link { + position: relative; + display: flex; + justify-content: center; + align-items: center; + font-size: 17px; + height: 44px; + min-width: 44px; + } + } + #no-changes { + padding: 16px; } } .navbar .center-collaboration { @@ -61,6 +83,21 @@ } } +//Display mode +.page-display-mode[data-page="display-mode-view"] { + .list-block { + li.media-item { + .item-title { + font-weight: normal; + } + .item-subtitle { + font-size: 14px; + color: @gray; + } + } + } +} + //Edit users @initialEditUser: #373737; @@ -92,14 +129,28 @@ } //Comments -.page-comments { +.page-comments, .add-comment, .page-view-comments, .container-edit-comment, .container-add-reply, .page-edit-comment, .page-add-reply, .page-edit-reply { + .header-comment { + display: flex; + justify-content: space-between; + padding-right: 16px; + .comment-right { + display: flex; + justify-content: space-between; + width: 70px; + } + } .list-block .item-inner { display: block; padding: 16px 0; word-wrap: break-word; } - p { - margin: 0; + + .list-reply { + padding-left: 26px; + } + .reply-textarea, .comment-textarea, .edit-reply-textarea { + resize: vertical; } .user-name { font-size: 17px; @@ -109,7 +160,7 @@ font-weight: bold; } .comment-date, .reply-date { - font-size: 12px; + font-size: 13px; line-height: 18px; color: #6d6d72; margin: 0; @@ -122,11 +173,20 @@ margin: 0; max-width: 100%; padding-right: 15px; + pre { + white-space: pre-wrap; + } } .reply-item { margin-top: 15px; + padding-right: 16px; + padding-top: 13px; + .header-reply { + display: flex; + justify-content: space-between; + } .user-name { - padding-top: 16px; + padding-top: 3px; } &:before { content: ''; @@ -148,10 +208,253 @@ color: @themeColor; border-left: 1px solid @themeColor; padding-left: 10px; + padding-right: 16px; margin: 5px 0; font-size: 15px; } + + .wrap-comment, .wrap-reply { + padding: 16px 24px 0 16px; + } + .comment-textarea, .reply-textarea, .edit-reply-textarea { + margin-top: 10px; + background:transparent; + outline:none; + width: 100%; + font-size: 17px; + border: none; + border-radius: 3px; + min-height: 100px; + } } .settings.popup .list-block ul.list-reply:last-child:after, .settings.popover .list-block ul.list-reply:last-child:after { display: none; -} \ No newline at end of file +} + +.container-edit-comment { + .page { + background-color: #FFFFFF; + } +} + +//view comment +.container-view-comment { + position: fixed; + -webkit-transition: height 100ms; + transition: height 120ms; + background-color: #FFFFFF; + border-top-left-radius: 4px; + border-top-right-radius: 4px; + height: 50%; + box-shadow: 0px 1px 10px rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.2), 0px 4px 5px rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.12); + .pages { + background-color: #FFFFFF; + } + .page-view-comments { + background-color: #FFFFFF; + .list-block { + margin-bottom: 100px; + ul:before, ul:after { + content: none; + } + .item-inner { + padding: 0; + } + } + + } + .toolbar { + position: fixed; + background-color: #FFFFFF; + box-shadow: 0px 1px 10px rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.2), 0px 4px 5px rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.12), 0px 2px 4px rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.14); + &:before { + content: none; + } + .toolbar-inner { + display: flex; + justify-content: space-between; + padding: 0 16px; + .button-left { + min-width: 80px; + } + .button-right { + min-width: 62px; + display: flex; + justify-content: space-between; + a { + padding: 0 12px; + } + } + } + } + .swipe-container { + display: flex; + justify-content: center; + height: 40px; + .icon-swipe { + margin-top: 8px; + width: 40px; + height: 4px; + background: rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.12); + border-radius: 2px; + } + } + .list-block { + margin-top: 0; + } + &.popover { + position: absolute; + border-radius: 4px; + min-height: 170px; + height: 400px; + max-height: 600px; + + .toolbar { + position: absolute; + border-radius: 0 0 4px 4px; + .toolbar-inner { + padding-right: 0; + } + } + + .pages { + position: absolute; + + .page { + border-radius: 13px; + + .page-content { + padding: 16px; + padding-bottom: 80px; + + .list-block { + margin-bottom: 0px; + + .item-content { + padding-left: 0; + + .header-comment, .reply-item { + padding-right: 0; + } + } + } + + .block-reply { + margin-top: 10px; + + .reply-textarea { + min-height: 70px; + width: 278px; + border: 1px solid #c4c4c4; + border-radius: 6px; + padding: 5px; + } + } + + .edit-reply-textarea { + min-height: 60px; + width: 100%; + border: 1px solid #c4c4c4; + border-radius: 6px; + padding: 5px; + height: 60px; + margin-top: 10px; + } + + .comment-text { + padding-right: 0; + + .comment-textarea { + border: 1px solid #c4c4c4; + border-radius: 6px; + padding: 8px; + min-height: 80px; + height: 80px; + } + } + } + } + } + + } +} + +#done-comment { + color: @themeColor; +} +.page-add-comment { + background-color: #FFFFFF; + .wrap-comment, .wrap-reply { + padding: 16px 24px 0 16px; + .header-comment { + justify-content: flex-start; + } + .user-name { + font-weight: bold; + font-size: 17px; + padding-left: 5px; + } + .comment-date { + font-size: 13px; + color: #6d6d72; + padding-left: 5px; + } + .wrap-textarea { + margin-top: 16px; + padding-right: 6px; + .comment-textarea { + font-size: 17px; + border: none; + margin-top: 0; + min-height: 100px; + border-radius: 4px; + width: 100%; + padding-left: 5px; + &::placeholder { + color: @gray; + font-size: 17px; + } + } + } + } +} +.container-add-reply { + height: 100%; + .navbar { + a.link i + span { + margin-left: 0; + } + } + .page { + background-color: #FFFFFF; + } +} + +.actions-modal-button.color-red { + color: @red; +} + +.page-edit-comment, .page-add-reply, .page-edit-reply { + background-color: #FFFFFF; + .header-comment { + justify-content: flex-start; + } + .navbar { + .right { + height: 100%; + #add-reply, #edit-comment, #edit-reply { + display: flex; + align-items: center; + padding-left: 16px; + padding-right: 16px; + height: 100%; + } + } + } +} + +.container-edit-comment { + position: fixed; + +} + diff --git a/apps/common/mobile/resources/less/ios/_container.less b/apps/common/mobile/resources/less/ios/_container.less index de81509ef..3d1885edf 100644 --- a/apps/common/mobile/resources/less/ios/_container.less +++ b/apps/common/mobile/resources/less/ios/_container.less @@ -97,4 +97,21 @@ .popover-inner { height: 400px; } +} + +.container-add { + .categories { + > .buttons-row { + .button { + &.active { + i.icon { + background-color: transparent; + } + } + display: flex; + justify-content: center; + align-items: center; + } + } + } } \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/common/mobile/resources/less/material/_collaboration.less b/apps/common/mobile/resources/less/material/_collaboration.less index ea3cdf0f0..58fe43f98 100644 --- a/apps/common/mobile/resources/less/material/_collaboration.less +++ b/apps/common/mobile/resources/less/material/_collaboration.less @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ word-wrap: break-word; } #user-name { - font-size: 17px; + font-size: 16px; line-height: 22px; color: #000000; margin: 0; @@ -28,26 +28,54 @@ margin-top: 10px; } .block-btn { + position: absolute; + bottom: 0; display: flex; flex-direction: row; - justify-content: space-around; + justify-content: space-between; margin: 0; - padding: 26px 0; - background-color: #EFEFF4; + width: 100%; + height: 56px; + align-items: center; + box-shadow: 0px 1px 10px rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.2); - #btn-next-change, #btn-reject-change { - margin-left: 20px; + #btn-reject-change { + margin-left: 15px; } - #btn-goto-change { - margin-right: 20px; - } - .right-buttons { + .change-buttons, .accept-reject, .next-prev { display: flex; } .link { - display: inline-block; + position: relative; + display: flex; + justify-content: center; + align-items: center; + font-size: 14px; + text-transform: uppercase; + font-weight: 500; + height: 56px; + min-width: 48px; } } + .header-change { + display: flex; + justify-content: flex-start; + padding-right: 16px; + .initials-change { + height: 40px; + width: 40px; + border-radius: 50px; + color: #FFFFFF; + display: flex; + justify-content: center; + align-items: center; + margin-right: 16px; + font-size: 18px; + } + } + #no-changes { + padding: 16px; + } } .container-collaboration { .navbar .right.close-collaboration { @@ -59,6 +87,15 @@ } } +//Display mode +.page-display-mode { + .list-block { + .item-subtitle { + font-size: 14px; + color: @gray; + } + } +} //Edit users @initialEditUser: #373737; @@ -89,23 +126,34 @@ } } - //Comments -.page-comments { - .list-block .item-inner { - display: block; - padding: 16px 0; - word-wrap: break-word; +.page-comments, .page-add-comment, .page-view-comments, .container-edit-comment, .container-add-reply, .page-edit-comment, .page-add-reply, .page-edit-reply { + .list-block { + ul { + &:before, &:after { + content: none; + } + } + .item-inner { + display: block; + padding: 16px 0; + word-wrap: break-word; + &:after { + content: none; + } + } } - p { - margin: 0; + .list-reply { + padding-left: 26px; + } + .reply-textarea, .comment-textarea, .edit-reply-textarea { + resize: vertical; } .user-name { - font-size: 17px; + font-size: 16px; line-height: 22px; color: #000000; margin: 0; - font-weight: bold; } .comment-date, .reply-date { font-size: 12px; @@ -121,36 +169,338 @@ margin: 0; max-width: 100%; padding-right: 15px; + pre { + white-space: pre-wrap; + } } .reply-item { - margin-top: 15px; - .user-name { - padding-top: 16px; + padding-right: 16px; + padding-top: 13px; + .header-reply { + display: flex; + justify-content: space-between; } - &:before { - content: ''; - position: absolute; - left: auto; - bottom: 0; - right: auto; - top: 0; - height: 1px; - width: 100%; - background-color: @listBlockBorderColor; - display: block; - z-index: 15; - -webkit-transform-origin: 50% 100%; - transform-origin: 50% 100%; + .user-name { + padding-top: 3px; } } .comment-quote { color: @themeColor; border-left: 1px solid @themeColor; padding-left: 10px; + padding-right: 16px; margin: 5px 0; font-size: 15px; } + + .wrap-comment, .wrap-reply { + padding: 16px 24px 0 16px; + } + .comment-textarea, .reply-textarea, .edit-reply-textarea { + margin-top: 10px; + background:transparent; + outline:none; + width: 100%; + font-size: 15px; + border: none; + border-radius: 3px; + min-height: 100px; + } + + .header-comment { + display: flex; + justify-content: space-between; + padding-right: 16px; + .comment-right { + display: flex; + justify-content: space-between; + width: 70px; + } + .comment-left { + display: flex; + justify-content: space-between; + } + .initials-comment { + height: 40px; + width: 40px; + border-radius: 50px; + color: #FFFFFF; + display: flex; + justify-content: center; + align-items: center; + margin-right: 16px; + font-size: 18px; + } + } + .header-reply { + .reply-left { + display: flex; + justify-content: space-between; + align-items: flex-start; + } + .initials-reply { + width: 24px; + height: 24px; + color: #FFFFFF; + font-size: 11px; + display: flex; + justify-content: center; + align-items: center; + margin-right: 16px; + border-radius: 50px; + margin-top: 5px; + } + } } .settings.popup .list-block ul.list-reply:last-child:after, .settings.popover .list-block ul.list-reply:last-child:after { display: none; +} + +//view comment +.container-view-comment { + position: fixed; + -webkit-transition: height 100ms; + transition: height 100ms; + background-color: #FFFFFF; + border-top-left-radius: 4px; + border-top-right-radius: 4px; + height: 50%; + box-shadow: 0px 1px 10px rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.2), 0px 4px 5px rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.12), 0px 2px 4px rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.14); + .page-view-comments { + background-color: #FFFFFF; + .list-block { + margin-bottom: 120px; + ul:before, ul:after { + content: none; + } + .item-inner { + padding: 0; + } + } + + } + .toolbar { + position: fixed; + background-color: #FFFFFF; + box-shadow: 0px 1px 10px rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.2), 0px 4px 5px rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.12), 0px 2px 4px rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.14); + &.toolbar-bottom { + top: auto; + } + &:before { + content: none; + } + a { + &.link { + color: @themeColor; + font-size: 16px; + } + } + .toolbar-inner { + display: flex; + justify-content: space-between; + padding: 0 16px; + .button-left { + min-width: 80px; + } + .button-right { + min-width: 62px; + display: flex; + justify-content: space-between; + a { + padding: 0 8px; + } + } + } + } + .swipe-container { + display: flex; + justify-content: center; + height: 40px; + .icon-swipe { + margin-top: 8px; + width: 40px; + height: 4px; + background: rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.12); + border-radius: 2px; + } + } + .list-block { + margin-top: 0; + } + &.popover { + position: absolute; + border-radius: 4px; + min-height: 170px; + height: 400px; + max-height: 600px; + + .toolbar { + position: absolute; + border-radius: 0 0 4px 4px; + .toolbar-inner { + padding-right: 0; + } + } + + .pages { + position: absolute; + + .page { + border-radius: 13px; + + .page-content { + padding: 16px; + padding-bottom: 80px; + + .list-block { + margin-bottom: 0px; + + .item-content { + padding-left: 0; + + .header-comment, .reply-item { + padding-right: 0; + } + } + } + + .block-reply { + margin-top: 10px; + + .reply-textarea { + min-height: 70px; + width: 278px; + border: 1px solid #c4c4c4; + border-radius: 6px; + padding: 5px; + } + } + + .edit-reply-textarea { + min-height: 60px; + width: 100%; + border: 1px solid #c4c4c4; + border-radius: 6px; + padding: 5px; + height: 60px; + margin-top: 10px; + } + + .comment-text { + padding-right: 0; + + .comment-textarea { + border: 1px solid #c4c4c4; + border-radius: 6px; + padding: 8px; + min-height: 80px; + height: 80px; + } + } + } + } + } + + } +} + +#done-comment { + padding: 0 16px; +} +.page-add-comment { + .wrap-comment, .wrap-reply { + padding: 16px 24px 0 16px; + .header-comment { + justify-content: flex-start; + } + .user-name { + font-size: 17px; + font-weight: bold; + } + .comment-date { + font-size: 13px; + color: #6d6d72; + } + .wrap-textarea { + margin-top: 16px; + padding-right: 6px; + .comment-textarea { + font-size: 17px; + border: none; + margin-top: 0; + min-height: 100px; + border-radius: 4px; + &::placeholder { + color: @gray; + font-size: 17px; + } + } + } + } +} + +.container-edit-comment, .container-add-reply { + height: 100%; + .navbar { + &:after { + content: ''; + position: absolute; + left: 0; + bottom: 0; + right: auto; + top: auto; + height: 1px; + width: 100%; + background-color: #c4c4c4; + display: block; + z-index: 15; + -webkit-transform-origin: 50% 100%; + transform-origin: 50% 100%; + } + .navbar-inner { + justify-content: space-between; + } + a.link i + span { + margin-left: 0; + } + .center { + font-size: 18px; + } + .right { + margin-left: 0; + } + } + .page-add-comment { + background-color: #FFFFFF; + } + .header-comment { + justify-content: flex-start; + } +} + +.actions-modal-button.color-red { + color: @red; +} + +.page-edit-comment, .page-add-reply, .page-edit-reply { + background-color: #FFFFFF; + .header-comment { + justify-content: flex-start; + } + .navbar { + .right { + height: 100%; + #add-new-reply, #edit-comment, #edit-reply { + display: flex; + align-items: center; + padding-left: 16px; + padding-right: 16px; + height: 100%; + } + } + } +} + +.container-edit-comment { + position: fixed; } \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/embed/index.html b/apps/documenteditor/embed/index.html index 619b74394..d0dec3118 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/embed/index.html +++ b/apps/documenteditor/embed/index.html @@ -162,6 +162,7 @@ logo = params["headerlogo"] ? encodeUrlParam(params["headerlogo"]) : null; window.frameEditorId = params["frameEditorId"]; + window.parentOrigin = params["parentOrigin"]; var elem = document.querySelector('.loading-logo'); if (elem && logo) { diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/embed/index.html.deploy b/apps/documenteditor/embed/index.html.deploy index 878fc7fa8..58ccf6c9d 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/embed/index.html.deploy +++ b/apps/documenteditor/embed/index.html.deploy @@ -155,6 +155,7 @@ logo = params["headerlogo"] ? encodeUrlParam(params["headerlogo"]) : null; window.frameEditorId = params["frameEditorId"]; + window.parentOrigin = params["parentOrigin"]; var elem = document.querySelector('.loading-logo'); if (elem && logo) { elem.style.backgroundImage= 'none'; diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/embed/index_loader.html b/apps/documenteditor/embed/index_loader.html index 82e2fa3bf..eca7003ab 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/embed/index_loader.html +++ b/apps/documenteditor/embed/index_loader.html @@ -240,6 +240,7 @@ logo = params["logo"] ? ((params["logo"] !== 'none') ? ('') : '') : null; window.frameEditorId = params["frameEditorId"]; + window.parentOrigin = params["parentOrigin"]; if ( lang == 'de') loading = 'Ladevorgang...'; else if ( lang == 'es') loading = 'Cargando...'; diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/embed/index_loader.html.deploy b/apps/documenteditor/embed/index_loader.html.deploy index bac45e2be..306417012 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/embed/index_loader.html.deploy +++ b/apps/documenteditor/embed/index_loader.html.deploy @@ -232,6 +232,7 @@ logo = params["logo"] ? ((params["logo"] !== 'none') ? ('') : '') : null; window.frameEditorId = params["frameEditorId"]; + window.parentOrigin = params["parentOrigin"]; if ( lang == 'de') loading = 'Ladevorgang...'; else if ( lang == 'es') loading = 'Cargando...'; diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/embed/js/ApplicationController.js b/apps/documenteditor/embed/js/ApplicationController.js index dffc44187..8eef26616 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/embed/js/ApplicationController.js +++ b/apps/documenteditor/embed/js/ApplicationController.js @@ -99,6 +99,12 @@ DE.ApplicationController = new(function(){ docInfo.put_VKey(docConfig.vkey); docInfo.put_Token(docConfig.token); docInfo.put_Permissions(_permissions); + docInfo.put_EncryptedInfo(config.encryptionKeys); + + var enable = !config.customization || (config.customization.macros!==false); + docInfo.asc_putIsEnabledMacroses(!!enable); + enable = !config.customization || (config.customization.plugins!==false); + docInfo.asc_putIsEnabledPlugins(!!enable); var type = /^(?:(pdf|djvu|xps))$/.exec(docConfig.fileType); if (type && typeof type[1] === 'string') { @@ -107,6 +113,7 @@ DE.ApplicationController = new(function(){ if (api) { api.asc_registerCallback('asc_onGetEditorPermissions', onEditorPermissions); + api.asc_registerCallback('asc_onRunAutostartMacroses', onRunAutostartMacroses); api.asc_setDocInfo(docInfo); api.asc_getEditorPermissions(config.licenseUrl, config.customerId); api.asc_enableKeyEvents(true); @@ -481,6 +488,11 @@ DE.ApplicationController = new(function(){ if (api) api.asc_DownloadAs(new Asc.asc_CDownloadOptions(Asc.c_oAscFileType.DOCX, true)); } + function onRunAutostartMacroses() { + if (!config.customization || (config.customization.macros!==false)) + if (api) api.asc_runAutostartMacroses(); + } + // Helpers // ------------------------- diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/embed/locale/da.json b/apps/documenteditor/embed/locale/da.json new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0952af834 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/embed/locale/da.json @@ -0,0 +1,30 @@ +{ + "common.view.modals.txtCopy": "Kopier", + "common.view.modals.txtEmbed": "Indlejre", + "common.view.modals.txtHeight": "Højde", + "common.view.modals.txtShare": "Del link", + "common.view.modals.txtWidth": "Bredde", + "DE.ApplicationController.convertationErrorText": "Samtale fejlede.", + "DE.ApplicationController.convertationTimeoutText": "Konverteringstidsfrist er overskredet", + "DE.ApplicationController.criticalErrorTitle": "Fejl", + "DE.ApplicationController.downloadErrorText": "Download fejlet.", + "DE.ApplicationController.downloadTextText": "Hent dokument...", + "DE.ApplicationController.errorAccessDeny": "Du forsøger at foretage en handling, som du ikke har rettighederne til.
    venligst kontakt din Document Server administrator.", + "DE.ApplicationController.errorDefaultMessage": "Fejlkode: %1", + "DE.ApplicationController.errorFilePassProtect": "Dokumentet er beskyttet af et kodeord og kunne ikke åbnes.", + "DE.ApplicationController.errorFileSizeExceed": "Filens størrelse overgår begrænsningen, som er sat for din server.
    Kontakt venligst til dokumentserver administrator for detaljer.", + "DE.ApplicationController.errorUpdateVersionOnDisconnect": "Internetforbindelsen er blevet genoprettet, og filversionen er blevet ændret.
    Før du kan fortsætte arbejdet, skal du hente filen eller kopiere indholdet for at sikre, at intet vil blive tabt - og derefter genindlæse denne side.", + "DE.ApplicationController.errorUserDrop": "Der kan ikke opnås adgang til filen lige nu. ", + "DE.ApplicationController.notcriticalErrorTitle": "Advarsel", + "DE.ApplicationController.scriptLoadError": "Forbindelsen er for langsom, og nogle komponenter kunne ikke indlæses. Indlæs siden igen.", + "DE.ApplicationController.textLoadingDocument": "Indlæser dokument", + "DE.ApplicationController.textOf": "af", + "DE.ApplicationController.txtClose": "Luk", + "DE.ApplicationController.unknownErrorText": "Ukendt fejl.", + "DE.ApplicationController.unsupportedBrowserErrorText": "Din browser understøttes ikke.", + "DE.ApplicationController.waitText": "Vent venligst...", + "DE.ApplicationView.txtDownload": "Hent", + "DE.ApplicationView.txtEmbed": "Indlejre", + "DE.ApplicationView.txtFullScreen": "Fuld skærm", + "DE.ApplicationView.txtShare": "Del" +} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/embed/locale/ja.json b/apps/documenteditor/embed/locale/ja.json index e3dfc777e..b75c89fab 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/embed/locale/ja.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/embed/locale/ja.json @@ -1,21 +1,30 @@ { + "common.view.modals.txtCopy": "クリップボードにコピー", + "common.view.modals.txtEmbed": "埋め込み", "common.view.modals.txtHeight": "高さ", + "common.view.modals.txtShare": "共有リンク", "common.view.modals.txtWidth": "幅", "DE.ApplicationController.convertationErrorText": "変換に失敗しました", "DE.ApplicationController.convertationTimeoutText": "変換のタイムアウトを超過しました。", "DE.ApplicationController.criticalErrorTitle": "エラー", "DE.ApplicationController.downloadErrorText": "ダウンロードに失敗しました", "DE.ApplicationController.downloadTextText": "ドキュメントのダウンロード中...", + "DE.ApplicationController.errorAccessDeny": "利用権限がない操作をしようとしました。
    Documentサーバー管理者に連絡してください。", "DE.ApplicationController.errorDefaultMessage": "エラー コード: %1", "DE.ApplicationController.errorFilePassProtect": "ドキュメントがパスワードで保護されているため開くことができません", + "DE.ApplicationController.errorFileSizeExceed": "ファイルサイズがサーバーで設定された制限を超過しています。
    Documentサーバー管理者に詳細を問い合わせてください。", + "DE.ApplicationController.errorUpdateVersionOnDisconnect": "インターネット接続が復旧し、ファイルのバージョンが更新されています。
    作業を継続する前に、ファイルをダウンロードするか内容をコピーして、変更が消えてしまわないようにしてからページを再読み込みしてください。", "DE.ApplicationController.errorUserDrop": "今、ファイルにアクセスすることはできません。", "DE.ApplicationController.notcriticalErrorTitle": "警告", + "DE.ApplicationController.scriptLoadError": "接続が非常に遅いため、いくつかのコンポーネントはロードされませんでした。ページを再読み込みしてください。", "DE.ApplicationController.textLoadingDocument": "ドキュメントを読み込んでいます", "DE.ApplicationController.textOf": "から", "DE.ApplicationController.txtClose": "閉じる", "DE.ApplicationController.unknownErrorText": "不明なエラー", "DE.ApplicationController.unsupportedBrowserErrorText": "お使いのブラウザがサポートされていません。", + "DE.ApplicationController.waitText": "少々お待ちください...", "DE.ApplicationView.txtDownload": "ダウンロード", + "DE.ApplicationView.txtEmbed": "埋め込み", "DE.ApplicationView.txtFullScreen": "全画面表示", "DE.ApplicationView.txtShare": "シェア" } \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/embed/locale/ko.json b/apps/documenteditor/embed/locale/ko.json index bbafcc9f6..4ba731456 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/embed/locale/ko.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/embed/locale/ko.json @@ -1,28 +1,30 @@ { "common.view.modals.txtCopy": "클립보드로 복사", - "common.view.modals.txtEmbed": "퍼가기", + "common.view.modals.txtEmbed": "개체 삽입", "common.view.modals.txtHeight": "높이", "common.view.modals.txtShare": "링크 공유", "common.view.modals.txtWidth": "너비", - "DE.ApplicationController.convertationErrorText": "변환 실패", - "DE.ApplicationController.convertationTimeoutText": "전환 시간 초과를 초과했습니다.", + "DE.ApplicationController.convertationErrorText": "변환 실패 ", + "DE.ApplicationController.convertationTimeoutText": "변환 시간을 초과했습니다.", "DE.ApplicationController.criticalErrorTitle": "오류", - "DE.ApplicationController.downloadErrorText": "다운로드하지 못했습니다.", - "DE.ApplicationController.downloadTextText": "문서 다운로드 중 ...", + "DE.ApplicationController.downloadErrorText": "다운로드 실패", + "DE.ApplicationController.downloadTextText": "문서 다운로드 중...", "DE.ApplicationController.errorAccessDeny": "권한이없는 작업을 수행하려고합니다.
    Document Server 관리자에게 문의하십시오.", - "DE.ApplicationController.errorDefaultMessage": "오류 코드 : %1", + "DE.ApplicationController.errorDefaultMessage": "오류 코드: %1", "DE.ApplicationController.errorFilePassProtect": "이 문서는 암호로 보호되어있어 열 수 없습니다.", + "DE.ApplicationController.errorFileSizeExceed": "파일의 크기가 서버에서 정해진 범위를 초과 했습니다. 문서 서버 관리자에게 해당 내용에 대한 자세한 안내를 받아 보시기 바랍니다.", + "DE.ApplicationController.errorUpdateVersionOnDisconnect": "인터넷 연결이 복구 되었으며 파일에 수정 사항이 발생되었습니다. 작업을 계속 하시기 전에 반드시 기존의 파일을 다운로드하거나 내용을 복사해서 작업 내용을 잃어 버리는 일이 없도록 한 후에 이 페이지를 새로 고침(reload) 해 주시기 바랍니다.", "DE.ApplicationController.errorUserDrop": "파일에 지금 액세스 할 수 없습니다.", "DE.ApplicationController.notcriticalErrorTitle": "경고", "DE.ApplicationController.scriptLoadError": "연결 속도가 느려, 일부 요소들이 로드되지 않았습니다. 페이지를 다시 새로 고침해주세요.", - "DE.ApplicationController.textLoadingDocument": "문서로드 중", - "DE.ApplicationController.textOf": "중", - "DE.ApplicationController.txtClose": "완료", + "DE.ApplicationController.textLoadingDocument": "문서 로드 중", + "DE.ApplicationController.textOf": "의", + "DE.ApplicationController.txtClose": "닫기", "DE.ApplicationController.unknownErrorText": "알 수없는 오류.", "DE.ApplicationController.unsupportedBrowserErrorText": "사용중인 브라우저가 지원되지 않습니다.", "DE.ApplicationController.waitText": "잠시만 기달려주세요...", - "DE.ApplicationView.txtDownload": "다운로드", - "DE.ApplicationView.txtEmbed": "퍼가기", + "DE.ApplicationView.txtDownload": "다운로드 ", + "DE.ApplicationView.txtEmbed": "개체 삽입", "DE.ApplicationView.txtFullScreen": "전체 화면", "DE.ApplicationView.txtShare": "공유" } \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/embed/locale/nl.json b/apps/documenteditor/embed/locale/nl.json index 93c687f69..176a84c49 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/embed/locale/nl.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/embed/locale/nl.json @@ -1,7 +1,10 @@ { "common.view.modals.txtCopy": "Kopieer naar klembord", + "common.view.modals.txtEmbed": "Invoegen", "common.view.modals.txtHeight": "Hoogte", + "common.view.modals.txtShare": "Link delen", "common.view.modals.txtWidth": "Breedte", + "DE.ApplicationController.convertationErrorText": "Conversie is mislukt", "DE.ApplicationController.convertationTimeoutText": "Time-out voor conversie overschreden.", "DE.ApplicationController.criticalErrorTitle": "Fout", "DE.ApplicationController.downloadErrorText": "Download mislukt.", @@ -9,6 +12,8 @@ "DE.ApplicationController.errorAccessDeny": "U probeert een actie uit te voeren waarvoor u geen rechten hebt.
    Neem contact op met de beheerder van de documentserver.", "DE.ApplicationController.errorDefaultMessage": "Foutcode: %1", "DE.ApplicationController.errorFilePassProtect": "Het bestand is beschermd met een wachtwoord en kan niet worden geopend.", + "DE.ApplicationController.errorFileSizeExceed": "De bestandsgrootte overschrijdt de limiet die is ingesteld voor uw server.
    Neem contact op met uw Document Server-beheerder voor details.", + "DE.ApplicationController.errorUpdateVersionOnDisconnect": "De internetverbinding is hersteld en de bestandsversie is gewijzigd.
    Voordat u verder kunt werken, moet u het bestand downloaden of de inhoud kopiëren om er zeker van te zijn dat er niets verloren gaat, en deze pagina vervolgens opnieuw laden.", "DE.ApplicationController.errorUserDrop": "Toegang tot het bestand is op dit moment niet mogelijk.", "DE.ApplicationController.notcriticalErrorTitle": "Waarschuwing", "DE.ApplicationController.scriptLoadError": "De verbinding is te langzaam, sommige componenten konden niet geladen worden. Laad de pagina opnieuw.", @@ -17,7 +22,9 @@ "DE.ApplicationController.txtClose": "Sluiten", "DE.ApplicationController.unknownErrorText": "Onbekende fout.", "DE.ApplicationController.unsupportedBrowserErrorText": "Uw browser wordt niet ondersteund.", + "DE.ApplicationController.waitText": "Een moment geduld", "DE.ApplicationView.txtDownload": "Downloaden", + "DE.ApplicationView.txtEmbed": "Invoegen", "DE.ApplicationView.txtFullScreen": "Volledig scherm", "DE.ApplicationView.txtShare": "Delen" } \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/embed/locale/sk.json b/apps/documenteditor/embed/locale/sk.json index c28aa45a6..82d9dbfb4 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/embed/locale/sk.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/embed/locale/sk.json @@ -1,7 +1,10 @@ { "common.view.modals.txtCopy": "Skopírovať do schránky", + "common.view.modals.txtEmbed": "Vložiť", "common.view.modals.txtHeight": "Výška", + "common.view.modals.txtShare": "Zdieľať odkaz", "common.view.modals.txtWidth": "Šírka", + "DE.ApplicationController.convertationErrorText": "Konverzia zlyhala.", "DE.ApplicationController.convertationTimeoutText": "Prekročený čas konverzie.", "DE.ApplicationController.criticalErrorTitle": "Chyba", "DE.ApplicationController.downloadErrorText": "Sťahovanie zlyhalo.", @@ -9,8 +12,11 @@ "DE.ApplicationController.errorAccessDeny": "Pokúšate sa vykonať akciu, na ktorú nemáte práva.
    Prosím, kontaktujte svojho správcu dokumentového servera.", "DE.ApplicationController.errorDefaultMessage": "Kód chyby: %1", "DE.ApplicationController.errorFilePassProtect": "Dokument je chránený heslom a nie je možné ho otvoriť.", + "DE.ApplicationController.errorFileSizeExceed": "Veľkosť súboru prekračuje limity vášho servera.
    Kontaktujte prosím vášho správcu dokumentového servera o ďalšie podrobnosti.", + "DE.ApplicationController.errorUpdateVersionOnDisconnect": "Internetové spojenie bolo obnovené a verzia súboru bola zmenená.
    Predtým, než budete pokračovať v práci, potrebujete si stiahnuť súbor alebo kópiu jeho obsahu, aby sa nič nestratilo. Potom znovu načítajte stránku.", "DE.ApplicationController.errorUserDrop": "K súboru nie je možné práve teraz získať prístup.", "DE.ApplicationController.notcriticalErrorTitle": "Upozornenie", + "DE.ApplicationController.scriptLoadError": "Spojenie je príliš pomalé, niektoré komponenty nemožno nahrať. Obnovte prosím stránku.", "DE.ApplicationController.textLoadingDocument": "Načítavanie dokumentu", "DE.ApplicationController.textOf": "z", "DE.ApplicationController.txtClose": "Zatvoriť", @@ -18,6 +24,7 @@ "DE.ApplicationController.unsupportedBrowserErrorText": "Váš prehliadač nie je podporovaný.", "DE.ApplicationController.waitText": "Prosím čakajte...", "DE.ApplicationView.txtDownload": "Stiahnuť", + "DE.ApplicationView.txtEmbed": "Vložiť", "DE.ApplicationView.txtFullScreen": "Celá obrazovka", "DE.ApplicationView.txtShare": "Zdieľať" } \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/embed/locale/sl.json b/apps/documenteditor/embed/locale/sl.json index 16f100dfc..6564e9534 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/embed/locale/sl.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/embed/locale/sl.json @@ -1,21 +1,30 @@ { "common.view.modals.txtCopy": "Kopiraj v odložišče", + "common.view.modals.txtEmbed": "Vdelano", "common.view.modals.txtHeight": "Višina", + "common.view.modals.txtShare": "Deli povezavo", "common.view.modals.txtWidth": "Širina", - "DE.ApplicationController.convertationErrorText": "Pretvorba ni uspela.", + "DE.ApplicationController.convertationErrorText": "Pogovor ni uspel.", "DE.ApplicationController.convertationTimeoutText": "Pretvorbena prekinitev presežena.", "DE.ApplicationController.criticalErrorTitle": "Napaka", "DE.ApplicationController.downloadErrorText": "Prenos ni uspel.", - "DE.ApplicationController.downloadTextText": "Prenašanje dokumenta...", + "DE.ApplicationController.downloadTextText": "Prenašanje dokumenta ...", + "DE.ApplicationController.errorAccessDeny": "Poskušate izvesti dejanje, za katerega nimate pravic.
    Obrnite se na skrbnika strežnika dokumentov.", "DE.ApplicationController.errorDefaultMessage": "Koda napake: %1", "DE.ApplicationController.errorFilePassProtect": "Dokument je zaščiten z geslom in ga ni mogoče odpreti.", + "DE.ApplicationController.errorFileSizeExceed": "Velikost datoteke presega omejitev, nastavljeno za vaš strežnik.
    Za podrobnosti se obrnite na skrbnika strežnika dokumentov.", + "DE.ApplicationController.errorUpdateVersionOnDisconnect": "Povezava s spletom je bila obnovljena in spremenjena je različica datoteke.
    Preden nadaljujete z delom, morate datoteko prenesti ali kopirati njeno vsebino, da se prepričate, da se nič ne izgubi, in nato znova naložite to stran.", "DE.ApplicationController.errorUserDrop": "Do datoteke v tem trenutku ni možno dostopati.", "DE.ApplicationController.notcriticalErrorTitle": "Opozorilo", + "DE.ApplicationController.scriptLoadError": "Povezava je počasna, nekatere komponente niso pravilno naložene.Prosimo osvežite stran.", "DE.ApplicationController.textLoadingDocument": "Nalaganje dokumenta", "DE.ApplicationController.textOf": "od", "DE.ApplicationController.txtClose": "Zapri", "DE.ApplicationController.unknownErrorText": "Neznana napaka.", "DE.ApplicationController.unsupportedBrowserErrorText": "Vaš brskalnik ni podprt.", + "DE.ApplicationController.waitText": "Prosimo počakajte ...", "DE.ApplicationView.txtDownload": "Prenesi", + "DE.ApplicationView.txtEmbed": "Vdelano", + "DE.ApplicationView.txtFullScreen": "Celozaslonski", "DE.ApplicationView.txtShare": "Deli" } \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/embed/locale/uk.json b/apps/documenteditor/embed/locale/uk.json index 51db5f43e..9970b4f0c 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/embed/locale/uk.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/embed/locale/uk.json @@ -1,7 +1,10 @@ { "common.view.modals.txtCopy": "Копіювати в буфер обміну", + "common.view.modals.txtEmbed": "Вставити", "common.view.modals.txtHeight": "Висота", + "common.view.modals.txtShare": "Поділитися посиланням", "common.view.modals.txtWidth": "Ширина", + "DE.ApplicationController.convertationErrorText": "Не вдалося поспілкуватися.", "DE.ApplicationController.convertationTimeoutText": "Термін переходу перевищено.", "DE.ApplicationController.criticalErrorTitle": "Помилка", "DE.ApplicationController.downloadErrorText": "Завантаження не вдалося", @@ -9,14 +12,19 @@ "DE.ApplicationController.errorAccessDeny": "Ви намагаєтеся виконати дію, на яку у вас немає прав.
    Будь ласка, зв'яжіться з адміністратором вашого Сервера документів.", "DE.ApplicationController.errorDefaultMessage": "Код помилки: %1", "DE.ApplicationController.errorFilePassProtect": "Документ захищений паролем і його неможливо відкрити.", + "DE.ApplicationController.errorFileSizeExceed": "Розмір файлу перевищує обмеження, встановлені для вашого сервера.
    Для детальної інформації зверніться до адміністратора сервера документів.", + "DE.ApplicationController.errorUpdateVersionOnDisconnect": "Підключення до Інтернету було відновлено, а версія файлу змінена.
    Перш ніж продовжувати роботу, потрібно завантажити файл або скопіювати його вміст, щоб переконатися, що нічого не втрачено, а потім перезавантажити цю сторінку.", "DE.ApplicationController.errorUserDrop": "На даний момент файл не доступний.", "DE.ApplicationController.notcriticalErrorTitle": "Застереження", + "DE.ApplicationController.scriptLoadError": "З'єднання занадто повільне, деякі компоненти не вдалося завантажити. Перезавантажте сторінку.", "DE.ApplicationController.textLoadingDocument": "Завантаження документа", "DE.ApplicationController.textOf": "з", "DE.ApplicationController.txtClose": "Закрити", "DE.ApplicationController.unknownErrorText": "Невідома помилка.", "DE.ApplicationController.unsupportedBrowserErrorText": "Ваш браузер не підтримується", + "DE.ApplicationController.waitText": "Будь ласка, зачекайте...", "DE.ApplicationView.txtDownload": "Завантажити", + "DE.ApplicationView.txtEmbed": "Вставити", "DE.ApplicationView.txtFullScreen": "Повноекранний режим", "DE.ApplicationView.txtShare": "Доступ" } \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/app/controller/LeftMenu.js b/apps/documenteditor/main/app/controller/LeftMenu.js index e0d5c80d9..ef762b511 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/app/controller/LeftMenu.js +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/app/controller/LeftMenu.js @@ -490,6 +490,10 @@ define([ value = Common.localStorage.getBool("de-settings-spellcheck", true); Common.Utils.InternalSettings.set("de-settings-spellcheck", value); this.api.asc_setSpellCheck(value); + + value = parseInt(Common.localStorage.getItem("de-settings-paste-button")); + Common.Utils.InternalSettings.set("de-settings-paste-button", value); + this.api.asc_setVisiblePasteButton(!!value); } this.api.put_ShowSnapLines(Common.Utils.InternalSettings.get("de-settings-showsnaplines")); @@ -499,8 +503,12 @@ define([ onCreateNew: function(menu, type) { if ( !Common.Controllers.Desktop.process('create:new') ) { - var newDocumentPage = window.open(type == 'blank' ? this.mode.createUrl : type, "_blank"); - if (newDocumentPage) newDocumentPage.focus(); + if (this.mode.canRequestCreateNew) + Common.Gateway.requestCreateNew(); + else { + var newDocumentPage = window.open(type == 'blank' ? this.mode.createUrl : type, "_blank"); + if (newDocumentPage) newDocumentPage.focus(); + } } if (menu) { diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/app/controller/Links.js b/apps/documenteditor/main/app/controller/Links.js index 1d7a88ee7..64cdb0c9c 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/app/controller/Links.js +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/app/controller/Links.js @@ -167,6 +167,9 @@ define([ need_disable = in_header || rich_edit_lock || plain_edit_lock || rich_del_lock || plain_del_lock; this.view.btnsContents.setDisabled(need_disable); + + need_disable = in_header; + this.view.btnCaption.setDisabled(need_disable); }, onApiCanAddHyperlink: function(value) { @@ -296,7 +299,7 @@ define([ primary: 'yes', callback: _.bind(function (btn) { if (btn == 'yes') { - this.api.asc_RemoveAllFootnotes(); + this.api.asc_RemoveAllFootnotes(true, false); } Common.NotificationCenter.trigger('edit:complete', this.toolbar); }, this) diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/app/controller/Main.js b/apps/documenteditor/main/app/controller/Main.js index dd73446d6..c8c8b4566 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/app/controller/Main.js +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/app/controller/Main.js @@ -137,7 +137,9 @@ define([ "Error! Main Document Only.": this.txtMainDocOnly, "Error! Not a valid bookmark self-reference.": this.txtNotValidBookmark, "Error! No text of specified style in document.": this.txtNoText, - "Choose an item.": this.txtChoose + "Choose an item.": this.txtChoose, + "Enter a date.": this.txtEnterDate, + "Type equation here.": this.txtTypeEquation }; styleNames.forEach(function(item){ translate[item] = me['txtStyle_' + item.replace(/ /g, '_')] || item; @@ -155,7 +157,7 @@ define([ this._state = {isDisconnected: false, usersCount: 1, fastCoauth: true, lostEditingRights: false, licenseType: false}; this.languages = null; - this.isModalShowed = 0; + // Initialize viewport if (!Common.Utils.isBrowserSupported()){ @@ -225,15 +227,15 @@ define([ if (/msg-reply/.test(e.target.className)) { me.dontCloseDummyComment = true; me.beforeShowDummyComment = me.beforeCloseDummyComment = false; - } else if (/chat-msg-text/.test(e.target.id)) - me.dontCloseChat = true; - else if (!me.isModalShowed && /form-control/.test(e.target.className)) + } else if (/textarea-control/.test(e.target.className)) + me.inTextareaControl = true; + else if (!Common.Utils.ModalWindow.isVisible() && /form-control/.test(e.target.className)) me.inFormControl = true; } }); $(document.body).on('blur', 'input, textarea', function(e) { - if (!me.isModalShowed) { + if (!Common.Utils.ModalWindow.isVisible()) { if (/form-control/.test(e.target.className)) me.inFormControl = false; if (me.getApplication().getController('LeftMenu').getView('LeftMenu').getMenu('file').isVisible()) @@ -253,8 +255,8 @@ define([ else me.beforeCloseDummyComment = true; } - else if (/chat-msg-text/.test(e.target.id)) - me.dontCloseChat = false; + else if (/textarea-control/.test(e.target.className)) + me.inTextareaControl = false; } } }).on('dragover', function(e) { @@ -281,31 +283,31 @@ define([ Common.NotificationCenter.on({ 'modal:show': function(){ - me.isModalShowed++; + Common.Utils.ModalWindow.show(); me.api.asc_enableKeyEvents(false); }, 'modal:close': function(dlg) { - me.isModalShowed--; - if (!me.isModalShowed) + Common.Utils.ModalWindow.close(); + if (!Common.Utils.ModalWindow.isVisible()) me.api.asc_enableKeyEvents(true); }, 'modal:hide': function(dlg) { - me.isModalShowed--; - if (!me.isModalShowed) + Common.Utils.ModalWindow.close(); + if (!Common.Utils.ModalWindow.isVisible()) me.api.asc_enableKeyEvents(true); }, 'settings:unitschanged':_.bind(this.unitsChanged, this), 'dataview:focus': function(e){ }, 'dataview:blur': function(e){ - if (!me.isModalShowed) { + if (!Common.Utils.ModalWindow.isVisible()) { me.api.asc_enableKeyEvents(true); } }, 'menu:show': function(e){ }, 'menu:hide': function(e, isFromInputControl){ - if (!me.isModalShowed && !isFromInputControl) + if (!Common.Utils.ModalWindow.isVisible() && !isFromInputControl) me.api.asc_enableKeyEvents(true); }, 'edit:complete': _.bind(me.onEditComplete, me) @@ -337,11 +339,12 @@ define([ this.editorConfig.user = this.appOptions.user = Common.Utils.fillUserInfo(this.editorConfig.user, this.editorConfig.lang, this.textAnonymous); this.appOptions.isDesktopApp = this.editorConfig.targetApp == 'desktop'; - this.appOptions.canCreateNew = !_.isEmpty(this.editorConfig.createUrl); + this.appOptions.canCreateNew = this.editorConfig.canRequestCreateNew || !_.isEmpty(this.editorConfig.createUrl); this.appOptions.canOpenRecent = this.editorConfig.recent !== undefined && !this.appOptions.isDesktopApp; this.appOptions.templates = this.editorConfig.templates; this.appOptions.recent = this.editorConfig.recent; this.appOptions.createUrl = this.editorConfig.createUrl; + this.appOptions.canRequestCreateNew = this.editorConfig.canRequestCreateNew; this.appOptions.lang = this.editorConfig.lang; this.appOptions.location = (typeof (this.editorConfig.location) == 'string') ? this.editorConfig.location.toLowerCase() : ''; this.appOptions.sharingSettingsUrl = this.editorConfig.sharingSettingsUrl; @@ -384,6 +387,14 @@ define([ $('#editor-container').append('
    ' + '
    '.repeat(20) + '
    '); } + var value = Common.localStorage.getItem("de-macros-mode"); + if (value === null) { + value = this.editorConfig.customization ? this.editorConfig.customization.macrosMode : 'warn'; + value = (value == 'enable') ? 1 : (value == 'disable' ? 2 : 0); + } else + value = parseInt(value); + Common.Utils.InternalSettings.set("de-macros-mode", value); + Common.Controllers.Desktop.init(this.appOptions); }, @@ -415,6 +426,11 @@ define([ docInfo.put_Token(data.doc.token); docInfo.put_Permissions(_permissions); docInfo.put_EncryptedInfo(this.editorConfig.encryptionKeys); + + var enable = !this.editorConfig.customization || (this.editorConfig.customization.macros!==false); + docInfo.asc_putIsEnabledMacroses(!!enable); + enable = !this.editorConfig.customization || (this.editorConfig.customization.plugins!==false); + docInfo.asc_putIsEnabledPlugins(!!enable); // docInfo.put_Review(this.permissions.review); var type = /^(?:(pdf|djvu|xps))$/.exec(data.doc.fileType); @@ -425,6 +441,7 @@ define([ this.api.asc_registerCallback('asc_onGetEditorPermissions', _.bind(this.onEditorPermissions, this)); this.api.asc_registerCallback('asc_onLicenseChanged', _.bind(this.onLicenseChanged, this)); + this.api.asc_registerCallback('asc_onRunAutostartMacroses', _.bind(this.onRunAutostartMacroses, this)); this.api.asc_setDocInfo(docInfo); this.api.asc_getEditorPermissions(this.editorConfig.licenseUrl, this.editorConfig.customerId); @@ -755,7 +772,7 @@ define([ if ( type == Asc.c_oAscAsyncActionType.BlockInteraction && (!this.getApplication().getController('LeftMenu').dlgSearch || !this.getApplication().getController('LeftMenu').dlgSearch.isVisible()) && (!this.getApplication().getController('Toolbar').dlgSymbolTable || !this.getApplication().getController('Toolbar').dlgSymbolTable.isVisible()) && - !((id == Asc.c_oAscAsyncAction['LoadDocumentFonts'] || id == Asc.c_oAscAsyncAction['ApplyChanges']) && (this.dontCloseDummyComment || this.dontCloseChat || this.isModalShowed || this.inFormControl)) ) { + !((id == Asc.c_oAscAsyncAction['LoadDocumentFonts'] || id == Asc.c_oAscAsyncAction['ApplyChanges'] || id == Asc.c_oAscAsyncAction['DownloadAs']) && (this.dontCloseDummyComment || this.inTextareaControl || Common.Utils.ModalWindow.isVisible() || this.inFormControl)) ) { // this.onEditComplete(this.loadMask); //если делать фокус, то при принятии чужих изменений, заканчивается свой композитный ввод this.api.asc_enableKeyEvents(true); } @@ -901,6 +918,8 @@ define([ me.hidePreloader(); me.onLongActionEnd(Asc.c_oAscAsyncActionType['BlockInteraction'], LoadingDocument); + Common.Utils.InternalSettings.set("de-settings-datetime-default", Common.localStorage.getItem("de-settings-datetime-default")); + /** coauthoring begin **/ this.isLiveCommenting = Common.localStorage.getBool("de-settings-livecomment", true); Common.Utils.InternalSettings.set("de-settings-livecomment", this.isLiveCommenting); @@ -1032,6 +1051,11 @@ define([ me.api.asc_setIsForceSaveOnUserSave(me.appOptions.forcesave); } + value = Common.localStorage.getItem("de-settings-paste-button"); + if (value===null) value = '1'; + Common.Utils.InternalSettings.set("de-settings-paste-button", parseInt(value)); + me.api.asc_setVisiblePasteButton(!!parseInt(value)); + if (me.needToUpdateVersion) Common.NotificationCenter.trigger('api:disconnect'); var timer_sl = setInterval(function(){ @@ -1201,7 +1225,7 @@ define([ this.appOptions.canChat = this.appOptions.canLicense && !this.appOptions.isOffline && !((typeof (this.editorConfig.customization) == 'object') && this.editorConfig.customization.chat===false); this.appOptions.canEditStyles = this.appOptions.canLicense && this.appOptions.canEdit; this.appOptions.canPrint = (this.permissions.print !== false); - this.appOptions.canRename = this.editorConfig.canRename && !!this.permissions.rename; + this.appOptions.canRename = this.editorConfig.canRename && (this.permissions.rename!==false); this.appOptions.buildVersion = params.asc_getBuildVersion(); this.appOptions.canForcesave = this.appOptions.isEdit && !this.appOptions.isOffline && (typeof (this.editorConfig.customization) == 'object' && !!this.editorConfig.customization.forcesave); this.appOptions.forcesave = this.appOptions.canForcesave; @@ -1262,6 +1286,8 @@ define([ if (this.permissions.changeHistory !== undefined) console.warn("Obsolete: The changeHistory parameter of the document permission section is deprecated. Please use onRequestRestore event instead."); + if (this.permissions.rename !== undefined) + console.warn("Obsolete: The rename parameter of the document permission section is deprecated. Please use onRequestRename event instead."); }, applyModeCommonElements: function() { @@ -1345,6 +1371,7 @@ define([ /** coauthoring begin **/ me.api.asc_registerCallback('asc_onCollaborativeChanges', _.bind(me.onCollaborativeChanges, me)); me.api.asc_registerCallback('asc_OnTryUndoInFastCollaborative',_.bind(me.onTryUndoInFastCollaborative, me)); + me.api.asc_registerCallback('asc_onConvertEquationToMath',_.bind(me.onConvertEquationToMath, me)); /** coauthoring end **/ if (me.stackLongActions.exist({id: ApplyEditRights, type: Asc.c_oAscAsyncActionType['BlockInteraction']})) { @@ -1548,10 +1575,14 @@ define([ config.maxwidth = 600; break; - case Asc.c_oAscError.ID.DirectUrl: + case Asc.c_oAscError.ID.DirectUrl: config.msg = this.errorDirectUrl; break; + case Asc.c_oAscError.ID.CannotCompareInCoEditing: + config.msg = this.errorCompare; + break; + default: config.msg = (typeof id == 'string') ? id : this.errorDefaultMessage.replace('%1', id); break; @@ -1567,7 +1598,7 @@ define([ config.closable = false; if (this.appOptions.canBackToFolder && !this.appOptions.isDesktopApp && typeof id !== 'string') { - config.msg += '

    ' + this.criticalErrorExtText; + config.msg += '

    ' + this.criticalErrorExtText; config.callback = function(btn) { if (btn == 'ok') Common.NotificationCenter.trigger('goback', true); @@ -1614,10 +1645,12 @@ define([ }, this); } - if (id !== Asc.c_oAscError.ID.ForceSaveTimeout) - Common.UI.alert(config); + if (id !== Asc.c_oAscError.ID.ForceSaveTimeout) { + if (!Common.Utils.ModalWindow.isVisible() || $('.asc-window.modal.alert[data-value=' + id + ']').length<1) + Common.UI.alert(config).$window.attr('data-value', id); + } - Common.component.Analytics.trackEvent('Internal Error', id.toString()); + (id!==undefined) && Common.component.Analytics.trackEvent('Internal Error', id.toString()); }, onCoAuthoringDisconnect: function() { @@ -2135,7 +2168,7 @@ define([ }, onPrint: function() { - if (!this.appOptions.canPrint || this.isModalShowed) return; + if (!this.appOptions.canPrint || Common.Utils.ModalWindow.isVisible()) return; if (this.api) this.api.asc_Print(new Asc.asc_CDownloadOptions(null, Common.Utils.isChrome || Common.Utils.isSafari || Common.Utils.isOpera)); // if isChrome or isSafari or isOpera == true use asc_onPrintUrl event @@ -2190,6 +2223,79 @@ define([ this.appOptions.canUseHistory = false; }, + onConvertEquationToMath: function(equation) { + var me = this, + win; + var msg = this.textConvertEquation + '

    ' + this.textLearnMore + ''; + win = Common.UI.warning({ + width: 500, + msg: msg, + buttons: ['yes', 'cancel'], + primary: 'yes', + dontshow: true, + textDontShow: this.textApplyAll, + callback: _.bind(function(btn, dontshow){ + if (btn == 'yes') { + this.api.asc_ConvertEquationToMath(equation, dontshow); + } + this.onEditComplete(); + }, this) + }); + win.$window.find('#id-equation-convert-help').on('click', function (e) { + win && win.close(); + me.getApplication().getController('LeftMenu').getView('LeftMenu').showMenu('file:help', 'UsageInstructions\/InsertEquation.htm#convertequation'); + }) + }, + + warningDocumentIsLocked: function() { + var me = this; + var _disable_ui = function (disable) { + me.disableEditing(disable); + var app = me.getApplication(); + app.getController('DocumentHolder').getView().SetDisabled(disable, true); + app.getController('Navigation') && app.getController('Navigation').SetDisabled(disable); + + var leftMenu = app.getController('LeftMenu'); + leftMenu.leftMenu.getMenu('file').getButton('protect').setDisabled(disable); + leftMenu.setPreviewMode(disable); + + var comments = app.getController('Common.Controllers.Comments'); + if (comments) comments.setPreviewMode(disable); + }; + + Common.Utils.warningDocumentIsLocked({disablefunc: _disable_ui}); + }, + + onRunAutostartMacroses: function() { + var me = this, + enable = !this.editorConfig.customization || (this.editorConfig.customization.macros!==false); + if (enable) { + var value = Common.Utils.InternalSettings.get("de-macros-mode"); + if (value==1) + this.api.asc_runAutostartMacroses(); + else if (value === 0) { + Common.UI.warning({ + msg: this.textHasMacros + '
    ', + buttons: ['yes', 'no'], + primary: 'yes', + dontshow: true, + textDontShow: this.textRemember, + callback: function(btn, dontshow){ + if (dontshow) { + Common.Utils.InternalSettings.set("de-macros-mode", (btn == 'yes') ? 1 : 2); + Common.localStorage.setItem("de-macros-mode", (btn == 'yes') ? 1 : 2); + } + if (btn == 'yes') { + setTimeout(function() { + me.api.asc_runAutostartMacroses(); + }, 1); + } + } + }); + } + } + }, + leavePageText: 'You have unsaved changes in this document. Click \'Stay on this Page\' then \'Save\' to save them. Click \'Leave this Page\' to discard all the unsaved changes.', criticalErrorTitle: 'Error', notcriticalErrorTitle: 'Warning', @@ -2535,7 +2641,15 @@ define([ errorUpdateVersionOnDisconnect: 'Internet connection has been restored, and the file version has been changed.
    Before you can continue working, you need to download the file or copy its content to make sure nothing is lost, and then reload this page.', txtChoose: 'Choose an item.', errorDirectUrl: 'Please verify the link to the document.
    This link must be a direct link to the file for downloading.', - txtStyle_Caption: 'Caption' + txtStyle_Caption: 'Caption', + errorCompare: 'The Compare documents feature is not available in the co-editing mode.', + textConvertEquation: 'This equation was created with an old version of equation editor which is no longer supported. Converting this equation to Office Math ML format will make it editable.
    Do you want to convert this equation?', + textApplyAll: 'Apply to all equations', + textLearnMore: 'Learn More', + txtEnterDate: 'Enter a date.', + txtTypeEquation: 'Type equation here.', + textHasMacros: 'The file contains automatic macros.
    Do you want to run macros?', + textRemember: 'Remember my choice' } })(), DE.Controllers.Main || {})) }); \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/app/controller/Toolbar.js b/apps/documenteditor/main/app/controller/Toolbar.js index 9104cedc2..fdfc7eab1 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/app/controller/Toolbar.js +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/app/controller/Toolbar.js @@ -59,7 +59,8 @@ define([ 'documenteditor/main/app/view/ControlSettingsDialog', 'documenteditor/main/app/view/WatermarkSettingsDialog', 'documenteditor/main/app/view/CompareSettingsDialog', - 'documenteditor/main/app/view/ListSettingsDialog' + 'documenteditor/main/app/view/ListSettingsDialog', + 'documenteditor/main/app/view/DateTimeDialog' ], function () { 'use strict'; @@ -322,6 +323,7 @@ define([ toolbar.btnMailRecepients.on('click', _.bind(this.onSelectRecepientsClick, this)); toolbar.mnuPageNumberPosPicker.on('item:click', _.bind(this.onInsertPageNumberClick, this)); toolbar.btnEditHeader.menu.on('item:click', _.bind(this.onEditHeaderFooterClick, this)); + toolbar.btnInsDateTime.on('click', _.bind(this.onInsDateTimeClick, this)); toolbar.mnuPageNumCurrentPos.on('click', _.bind(this.onPageNumCurrentPosClick, this)); toolbar.mnuInsertPageCount.on('click', _.bind(this.onInsertPageCountClick, this)); toolbar.btnBlankPage.on('click', _.bind(this.onBtnBlankPageClick, this)); @@ -390,6 +392,8 @@ define([ Common.NotificationCenter.on('fonts:change', _.bind(this.onApiChangeFont, this)); this.api.asc_registerCallback('asc_onTableDrawModeChanged', _.bind(this.onTableDraw, this)); this.api.asc_registerCallback('asc_onTableEraseModeChanged', _.bind(this.onTableErase, this)); + Common.NotificationCenter.on('storage:image-load', _.bind(this.openImageFromStorage, this)); + Common.NotificationCenter.on('storage:image-insert', _.bind(this.insertImageFromStorage, this)); } else if (this.mode.isRestrictedEdit) { this.api.asc_registerCallback('asc_onFocusObject', _.bind(this.onApiFocusObjectRestrictedEdit, this)); this.api.asc_registerCallback('asc_onCoAuthoringDisconnect', _.bind(this.onApiCoAuthoringDisconnect, this)); @@ -420,7 +424,7 @@ define([ }, onApiChangeFont: function(font) { - !this.getApplication().getController('Main').isModalShowed && this.toolbar.cmbFontName.onApiChangeFont(font); + !Common.Utils.ModalWindow.isVisible() && this.toolbar.cmbFontName.onApiChangeFont(font); }, onApiFontSize: function(size) { @@ -827,12 +831,12 @@ define([ need_disable = toolbar.mnuPageNumCurrentPos.isDisabled() && toolbar.mnuPageNumberPosPicker.isDisabled() || control_plain; toolbar.mnuInsertPageNum.setDisabled(need_disable); - var in_footnote = this.api.asc_IsCursorInFootnote(); - need_disable = paragraph_locked || header_locked || in_header || in_image || in_equation && !btn_eq_state || in_footnote || in_control || rich_edit_lock || plain_edit_lock || rich_del_lock; + var in_footnote = this.api.asc_IsCursorInFootnote() || this.api.asc_IsCursorInEndnote(); + need_disable = paragraph_locked || header_locked || in_header || in_image || in_equation && !btn_eq_state || in_footnote || in_control || rich_edit_lock || plain_edit_lock || rich_del_lock || plain_del_lock; toolbar.btnsPageBreak.setDisabled(need_disable); toolbar.btnBlankPage.setDisabled(need_disable); - need_disable = paragraph_locked || header_locked || in_equation || control_plain || content_locked; + need_disable = paragraph_locked || header_locked || in_equation || control_plain || content_locked || in_footnote; toolbar.btnInsertShape.setDisabled(need_disable); toolbar.btnInsertText.setDisabled(need_disable); @@ -852,6 +856,7 @@ define([ toolbar.btnInsertEquation.setDisabled(need_disable); toolbar.btnInsertSymbol.setDisabled(!in_para || paragraph_locked || header_locked || rich_edit_lock || plain_edit_lock || rich_del_lock || plain_del_lock); + toolbar.btnInsDateTime.setDisabled(!in_para || paragraph_locked || header_locked || rich_edit_lock || plain_edit_lock || rich_del_lock || plain_del_lock); need_disable = paragraph_locked || header_locked || in_equation || rich_edit_lock || plain_edit_lock; toolbar.btnSuperscript.setDisabled(need_disable); @@ -1231,7 +1236,7 @@ define([ onFontNameSelect: function(combo, record) { if (this.api) { if (record.isNewFont) { - !this.getApplication().getController('Main').isModalShowed && + !Common.Utils.ModalWindow.isVisible() && Common.UI.warning({ width: 500, closable: false, @@ -1283,7 +1288,7 @@ define([ }); if (!item) { - value = /^\+?(\d*\.?\d+)$|^\+?(\d+\.?\d*)$/.exec(record.value); + value = /^\+?(\d*(\.|,)?\d+)$|^\+?(\d+(\.|,)?\d*)$/.exec(record.value); if (!value) { value = this._getApiTextSize(); @@ -1304,7 +1309,7 @@ define([ } } } else { - value = parseFloat(record.value); + value = Common.Utils.String.parseFloat(record.value); value = value > 100 ? 100 : value < 1 @@ -1505,26 +1510,36 @@ define([ } })).show(); } else if (item.value === 'storage') { - if (this.toolbar.mode.canRequestInsertImage) { - Common.Gateway.requestInsertImage(); - } else { - (new Common.Views.SelectFileDlg({ - fileChoiceUrl: this.toolbar.mode.fileChoiceUrl.replace("{fileExt}", "").replace("{documentType}", "ImagesOnly") - })).on('selectfile', function(obj, file){ - me.insertImage(file); - }).show(); - } + Common.NotificationCenter.trigger('storage:image-load', 'add'); } }, - insertImage: function(data) { - if (data && data.url) { + openImageFromStorage: function(type) { + var me = this; + if (this.toolbar.mode.canRequestInsertImage) { + Common.Gateway.requestInsertImage(type); + } else { + (new Common.Views.SelectFileDlg({ + fileChoiceUrl: this.toolbar.mode.fileChoiceUrl.replace("{fileExt}", "").replace("{documentType}", "ImagesOnly") + })).on('selectfile', function(obj, file){ + file && (file.c = type); + me.insertImage(file); + }).show(); + } + }, + + insertImageFromStorage: function(data) { + if (data && data.url && (!data.c || data.c=='add')) { this.toolbar.fireEvent('insertimage', this.toolbar); this.api.AddImageUrl(data.url, undefined, data.token);// for loading from storage Common.component.Analytics.trackEvent('ToolBar', 'Image'); } }, + insertImage: function(data) { // gateway + Common.NotificationCenter.trigger('storage:image-insert', data); + }, + onBtnInsertTextClick: function(btn, e) { if (this.api) this._addAutoshape(btn.pressed, 'textRect'); @@ -1813,16 +1828,29 @@ define([ } } } else { + var isnew = (item.value.indexOf('new-')==0), + oPr, oFormPr; + if (isnew) { + oFormPr = new AscCommon.CSdtFormPr(); + } if (item.value == 'plain' || item.value == 'rich') this.api.asc_AddContentControl((item.value=='plain') ? Asc.c_oAscSdtLevelType.Inline : Asc.c_oAscSdtLevelType.Block); - else if (item.value == 'picture') - this.api.asc_AddContentControlPicture(); - else if (item.value == 'checkbox') - this.api.asc_AddContentControlCheckBox(); - else if (item.value == 'date') + else if (item.value.indexOf('picture')>=0) + this.api.asc_AddContentControlPicture(oFormPr); + else if (item.value.indexOf('checkbox')>=0 || item.value.indexOf('radiobox')>=0) { + if (isnew) { + oPr = new AscCommon.CSdtCheckBoxPr(); + (item.value.indexOf('radiobox')>=0) && oPr.put_GroupKey('Group 1'); + } + this.api.asc_AddContentControlCheckBox(oPr, oFormPr); + } else if (item.value == 'date') this.api.asc_AddContentControlDatePicker(); - else if (item.value == 'combobox' || item.value == 'dropdown') - this.api.asc_AddContentControlList(item.value == 'combobox'); + else if (item.value.indexOf('combobox')>=0 || item.value.indexOf('dropdown')>=0) + this.api.asc_AddContentControlList(item.value.indexOf('combobox')>=0, oPr, oFormPr); + else if (item.value == 'new-field') { + oPr = new AscCommon.CSdtTextFormPr(); + this.api.asc_AddContentControlTextForm(oPr, oFormPr); + } Common.component.Analytics.trackEvent('ToolBar', 'Add Content Control'); } @@ -1858,7 +1886,7 @@ define([ if (this.api) { if (item.value == 'advanced') { - var win, props = this.api.asc_GetSectionProps(), + var win, me = this; win = new DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog({ handler: function(dlg, result) { @@ -2052,6 +2080,7 @@ define([ props: me.api.asc_GetWatermarkProps(), api: me.api, lang: me.mode.lang, + storage: me.mode.canRequestInsertImage || me.mode.fileChoiceUrl && me.mode.fileChoiceUrl.indexOf("{documentType}")>-1, fontStore: me.fontstore, handler: function(result, value) { if (result == 'ok') { @@ -2561,17 +2590,19 @@ define([ lang: me.mode.lang, modal: false, type: 1, + special: true, + showShortcutKey: true, buttons: [{value: 'ok', caption: this.textInsert}, 'close'], handler: function(dlg, result, settings) { if (result == 'ok') { - me.api.asc_insertSymbol(settings.font, settings.code); + me.api.asc_insertSymbol(settings.font ? settings.font : me.api.get_TextProps().get_TextPr().get_FontFamily().get_Name(), settings.code, settings.special); } else Common.NotificationCenter.trigger('edit:complete', me.toolbar); } }); me.dlgSymbolTable.show(); me.dlgSymbolTable.on('symbol:dblclick', function(cmp, result, settings) { - me.api.asc_insertSymbol(settings.font, settings.code); + me.api.asc_insertSymbol(settings.font ? settings.font : me.api.get_TextProps().get_TextPr().get_FontFamily().get_Name(), settings.code, settings.special); }); } }, @@ -3033,6 +3064,23 @@ define([ this._state.lang = langId; }, + onInsDateTimeClick: function() { + //insert date time + var me = this; + (new DE.Views.DateTimeDialog({ + api: this.api, + lang: this._state.lang, + handler: function(result, value) { + if (result == 'ok') { + if (me.api) { + me.api.asc_addDateTime(value); + } + } + Common.NotificationCenter.trigger('edit:complete', me.toolbar); + } + })).show(); + }, + textEmptyImgUrl : 'You need to specify image URL.', textWarning : 'Warning', textFontSizeErr : 'The entered value is incorrect.
    Please enter a numeric value between 1 and 100', diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/app/template/ControlSettingsDialog.template b/apps/documenteditor/main/app/template/ControlSettingsDialog.template index 23880858e..278ead730 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/app/template/ControlSettingsDialog.template +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/app/template/ControlSettingsDialog.template @@ -7,6 +7,12 @@
    + + + +
    + + @@ -77,7 +83,7 @@ -
    +
    @@ -105,7 +111,7 @@ -
    +
    @@ -142,4 +148,70 @@
    - \ No newline at end of file + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    + +
    +
    + +
    +
    + +
    +
    + + +
    +
    +
    +
    +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +
    +
    +
    +
    + + + +
    + +
    +
    +
    +
    diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/app/template/FileMenu.template b/apps/documenteditor/main/app/template/FileMenu.template index 35378e635..8bb022a44 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/app/template/FileMenu.template +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/app/template/FileMenu.template @@ -1,37 +1,37 @@
    -
  • -
  • -
  • -
  • -
  • -
  • -
  • -
  • -
  • -
  • -
  • -
  • -
  • -
  • -
  • -
  • -
  • -
  • -
  • -
  • -
  • -
  • -
  • -
  • +
  • +
  • +
  • +
  • +
  • +
  • +
  • +
  • +
  • +
  • +
  • +
  • +
  • +
  • +
  • +
  • +
  • +
  • +
  • +
  • +
  • +
  • +
  • +
  • -
    -
    -
    -
    -
    -
    -
    -
    -
    +
    +
    +
    +
    +
    +
    +
    +
    +
    \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/app/template/ImageSettings.template b/apps/documenteditor/main/app/template/ImageSettings.template index 9fae4b54e..2b7db5d82 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/app/template/ImageSettings.template +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/app/template/ImageSettings.template @@ -75,20 +75,12 @@ - - - - - - - - - +
    - + diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/app/template/ImageSettingsAdvanced.template b/apps/documenteditor/main/app/template/ImageSettingsAdvanced.template index 3b1df3d24..b549d867e 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/app/template/ImageSettingsAdvanced.template +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/app/template/ImageSettingsAdvanced.template @@ -327,7 +327,25 @@
    + + + + + + + +
    + +
    +
    +
    +
    + + + ', '
    + +
    diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/app/template/LeftMenu.template b/apps/documenteditor/main/app/template/LeftMenu.template index 2466925d3..96827d295 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/app/template/LeftMenu.template +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/app/template/LeftMenu.template @@ -12,10 +12,10 @@
    -
    ', - '
    ', + '
    ', '
    ', '
    ', '', @@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ define([ '
    ', '
    ', '
    ', - '
    ' + '
    ' ].join('') }, options); diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/app/view/TableSettings.js b/apps/documenteditor/main/app/view/TableSettings.js index ad6354d56..6f4814961 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/app/view/TableSettings.js +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/app/view/TableSettings.js @@ -148,8 +148,7 @@ define([ this.fireEvent('editcomplete', this); }, - onColorsBackSelect: function(picker, color) { - this.btnBackColor.setColor(color); + onColorsBackSelect: function(btn, color) { this.CellColor = {Value: 1, Color: color}; if (this.api) { @@ -171,14 +170,6 @@ define([ this.fireEvent('editcomplete', this); }, - addNewColor: function(picker, btn) { - picker.addNewColor((typeof(btn.color) == 'object') ? btn.color.color : btn.color); - }, - - onColorsBorderSelect: function(picker, color) { - this.btnBorderColor.setColor(color); - }, - onBtnBordersClick: function(btn, eOpts){ this._UpdateBordersStyle(btn.options.strId, true); if (this.api) { @@ -307,12 +298,12 @@ define([ this._btnsBorderPosition = []; _.each(_arrBorderPosition, function(item, index, list){ var _btn = new Common.UI.Button({ + parentEl: $('#'+item[2]), cls: 'btn-toolbar borders--small', iconCls: item[1], strId :item[0], hint: item[3] }); - _btn.render( $('#'+item[2])) ; _btn.on('click', _.bind(this.onBtnBordersClick, this)); this._btnsBorderPosition.push( _btn ); this.lockedControls.push(_btn); @@ -328,6 +319,7 @@ define([ this.lockedControls.push(this.cmbBorderSize); this.btnEdit = new Common.UI.Button({ + parentEl: $('#table-btn-edit'), cls: 'btn-icon-default', iconCls: 'btn-edit-table', menu : new Common.UI.Menu({ @@ -352,7 +344,6 @@ define([ ] }) }); - this.btnEdit.render( $('#table-btn-edit')) ; this.mnuMerge = this.btnEdit.menu.items[this.btnEdit.menu.items.length-2]; this.mnuSplit = this.btnEdit.menu.items[this.btnEdit.menu.items.length-1]; @@ -648,40 +639,19 @@ define([ if (!this.btnBackColor) { // create color buttons this.btnBorderColor = new Common.UI.ColorButton({ - style: "width:45px;", - menu : new Common.UI.Menu({ - items: [ - { template: _.template('
    ') }, - { template: _.template('' + this.textNewColor + '') } - ] - }) + parentEl: $('#table-border-color-btn'), + color: '000000' }); - this.btnBorderColor.render( $('#table-border-color-btn')); - this.btnBorderColor.setColor('000000'); this.lockedControls.push(this.btnBorderColor); - this.borderColor = new Common.UI.ThemeColorPalette({ - el: $('#table-border-color-menu') - }); - this.borderColor.on('select', _.bind(this.onColorsBorderSelect, this)); - this.btnBorderColor.menu.items[1].on('click', _.bind(this.addNewColor, this, this.borderColor, this.btnBorderColor)); + this.borderColor = this.btnBorderColor.getPicker(); this.btnBackColor = new Common.UI.ColorButton({ - style: "width:45px;", - menu : new Common.UI.Menu({ - items: [ - { template: _.template('
    ') }, - { template: _.template('' + this.textNewColor + '') } - ] - }) - }); - this.btnBackColor.render( $('#table-back-color-btn')); - this.lockedControls.push(this.btnBackColor); - this.colorsBack = new Common.UI.ThemeColorPalette({ - el: $('#table-back-color-menu'), + parentEl: $('#table-back-color-btn'), transparent: true }); - this.colorsBack.on('select', _.bind(this.onColorsBackSelect, this)); - this.btnBackColor.menu.items[1].on('click', _.bind(this.addNewColor, this, this.colorsBack, this.btnBackColor)); + this.lockedControls.push(this.btnBackColor); + this.colorsBack = this.btnBackColor.getPicker(); + this.btnBackColor.on('color:select', _.bind(this.onColorsBackSelect, this)); } this.colorsBack.updateColors(Common.Utils.ThemeColor.getEffectColors(), Common.Utils.ThemeColor.getStandartColors()); this.borderColor.updateColors(Common.Utils.ThemeColor.getEffectColors(), Common.Utils.ThemeColor.getStandartColors()); @@ -842,7 +812,6 @@ define([ textSelectBorders : 'Select borders that you want to change', textAdvanced : 'Show advanced settings', txtNoBorders : 'No borders', - textNewColor : 'Add New Custom Color', textTemplate : 'Select From Template', textRows : 'Rows', textColumns : 'Columns', diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/app/view/TableSettingsAdvanced.js b/apps/documenteditor/main/app/view/TableSettingsAdvanced.js index ad16dda1d..581ef0d1c 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/app/view/TableSettingsAdvanced.js +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/app/view/TableSettingsAdvanced.js @@ -505,6 +505,7 @@ define([ 'text!documenteditor/main/app/template/TableSettingsAdvanced.templat // Wrapping this.btnWrapNone = new Common.UI.Button({ + parentEl: $('#tableadv-button-wrap-none'), cls: 'btn-options huge', iconCls: 'icon-right-panel btn-wrap-none', posId: c_tableWrap.TABLE_WRAP_NONE, @@ -513,10 +514,10 @@ define([ 'text!documenteditor/main/app/template/TableSettingsAdvanced.templat allowDepress: false, toggleGroup : 'advtablewrapGroup' }); - this.btnWrapNone.render( $('#tableadv-button-wrap-none')) ; this.btnWrapNone.on('click', _.bind(this.onBtnInlineWrapClick, this)); this.btnWrapParallel = new Common.UI.Button({ + parentEl: $('#tableadv-button-wrap-parallel'), cls: 'btn-options huge', iconCls: 'icon-right-panel btn-wrap-parallel', posId: c_tableWrap.TABLE_WRAP_PARALLEL, @@ -525,10 +526,10 @@ define([ 'text!documenteditor/main/app/template/TableSettingsAdvanced.templat allowDepress: false, toggleGroup : 'advtablewrapGroup' }); - this.btnWrapParallel.render( $('#tableadv-button-wrap-parallel')) ; this.btnWrapParallel.on('click', _.bind(this.onBtnFlowWrapClick, this)); this.btnAlignLeft = new Common.UI.Button({ + parentEl: $('#tableadv-button-align-left'), cls: 'btn-options huge', iconCls: 'icon-right-panel btn-table-align-left', posId: c_tableAlign.TABLE_ALIGN_LEFT, @@ -537,7 +538,6 @@ define([ 'text!documenteditor/main/app/template/TableSettingsAdvanced.templat allowDepress: false, toggleGroup : 'advtablealignGroup' }); - this.btnAlignLeft.render( $('#tableadv-button-align-left')) ; this.btnAlignLeft.on('click', _.bind(function(btn){ if (this._changedProps && btn.pressed) { this._changedProps.put_TableAlignment(btn.options.posId); @@ -548,6 +548,7 @@ define([ 'text!documenteditor/main/app/template/TableSettingsAdvanced.templat }, this)); this.btnAlignCenter = new Common.UI.Button({ + parentEl: $('#tableadv-button-align-center'), cls: 'btn-options huge', iconCls: 'icon-right-panel btn-table-align-center', posId: c_tableAlign.TABLE_ALIGN_CENTER, @@ -556,7 +557,6 @@ define([ 'text!documenteditor/main/app/template/TableSettingsAdvanced.templat allowDepress: false, toggleGroup : 'advtablealignGroup' }); - this.btnAlignCenter.render( $('#tableadv-button-align-center')) ; this.btnAlignCenter.on('click', _.bind(function(btn){ if (this._changedProps && btn.pressed) { this._changedProps.put_TableAlignment(btn.options.posId); @@ -567,6 +567,7 @@ define([ 'text!documenteditor/main/app/template/TableSettingsAdvanced.templat }, this)); this.btnAlignRight = new Common.UI.Button({ + parentEl: $('#tableadv-button-align-right'), cls: 'btn-options huge', iconCls: 'icon-right-panel btn-table-align-right', posId: c_tableAlign.TABLE_ALIGN_RIGHT, @@ -575,7 +576,6 @@ define([ 'text!documenteditor/main/app/template/TableSettingsAdvanced.templat allowDepress: false, toggleGroup : 'advtablealignGroup' }); - this.btnAlignRight.render( $('#tableadv-button-align-right')) ; this.btnAlignRight.on('click', _.bind(function(btn){ if (this._changedProps && btn.pressed) { this._changedProps.put_TableAlignment(btn.options.posId); @@ -879,67 +879,28 @@ define([ 'text!documenteditor/main/app/template/TableSettingsAdvanced.templat this.cmbBorderSize.on('selected', _.bind(this.onBorderSizeSelect, this)); this.btnBorderColor = new Common.UI.ColorButton({ - style: "width:45px;", - menu : new Common.UI.Menu({ - additionalAlign: this.menuAddAlign, - items: [ - { template: _.template('
    ') }, - { template: _.template('' + me.textNewColor + '') } - ] - }) + parentEl: $('#tableadv-border-color-btn'), + additionalAlign: this.menuAddAlign, + color: '000000' }); - - this.btnBorderColor.on('render:after', function(btn) { - me.colorsBorder = new Common.UI.ThemeColorPalette({ - el: $('#tableadv-border-color-menu') - }); - me.colorsBorder.on('select', _.bind(me.onColorsBorderSelect, me)); - }); - this.btnBorderColor.render( $('#tableadv-border-color-btn')); - this.btnBorderColor.setColor('000000'); - $('#tableadv-border-color-new').on('click', _.bind(this.addNewColor, this, this.colorsBorder, this.btnBorderColor)); + this.btnBorderColor.on('color:select', _.bind(me.onColorsBorderSelect, me)); + this.colorsBorder = this.btnBorderColor.getPicker(); this.btnBackColor = new Common.UI.ColorButton({ - style: "width:45px;", - menu : new Common.UI.Menu({ - additionalAlign: this.menuAddAlign, - items: [ - { template: _.template('
    ') }, - { template: _.template('' + me.textNewColor + '') } - ] - }) + parentEl: $('#tableadv-button-back-color'), + additionalAlign: this.menuAddAlign, + transparent: true }); - - this.btnBackColor.on('render:after', function(btn) { - me.colorsBack = new Common.UI.ThemeColorPalette({ - el: $('#tableadv-back-color-menu'), - transparent: true - }); - me.colorsBack.on('select', _.bind(me.onColorsBackSelect, me)); - }); - this.btnBackColor.render( $('#tableadv-button-back-color')); - $('#tableadv-back-color-new').on('click', _.bind(this.addNewColor, this, this.colorsBack, this.btnBackColor)); + this.btnBackColor.on('color:select', _.bind(this.onColorsBackSelect, this)); + this.colorsBack = this.btnBackColor.getPicker(); this.btnTableBackColor = new Common.UI.ColorButton({ - style: "width:45px;", - menu : new Common.UI.Menu({ - additionalAlign: this.menuAddAlign, - items: [ - { template: _.template('
    ') }, - { template: _.template('' + me.textNewColor + '') } - ] - }) + parentEl: $('#tableadv-button-table-back-color'), + additionalAlign: this.menuAddAlign, + transparent: true }); - - this.btnTableBackColor.on('render:after', function(btn) { - me.colorsTableBack = new Common.UI.ThemeColorPalette({ - el: $('#tableadv-table-back-color-menu'), - transparent: true - }); - me.colorsTableBack.on('select', _.bind(me.onColorsTableBackSelect, me)); - }); - this.btnTableBackColor.render( $('#tableadv-button-table-back-color')); - $('#tableadv-table-back-color-new').on('click', _.bind(this.addNewColor, this, this.colorsTableBack, this.btnTableBackColor)); + this.btnTableBackColor.on('color:select', _.bind(this.onColorsTableBackSelect, this)); + this.colorsTableBack = this.btnTableBackColor.getPicker(); this.tableBordersImageSpacing = new Common.UI.TableStyler({ el: $('#id-detablestyler-spacing'), @@ -969,13 +930,13 @@ define([ 'text!documenteditor/main/app/template/TableSettingsAdvanced.templat this._btnsBorderPosition = []; _.each(_arrBorderPresets, function(item, index, list){ var _btn = new Common.UI.Button({ + parentEl: $('#'+item[2]), style: 'margin-left: 5px; margin-bottom: 4px;', cls: 'btn-options large', iconCls: item[1], strId :item[0], hint: item[3] }); - _btn.render( $('#'+item[2])) ; _btn.on('click', _.bind(this._ApplyBorderPreset, this)); this._btnsBorderPosition.push( _btn ); }, this); @@ -995,6 +956,7 @@ define([ 'text!documenteditor/main/app/template/TableSettingsAdvanced.templat this._btnsTableBorderPosition = []; _.each(_arrTableBorderPresets, function(item, index, list){ var _btn = new Common.UI.Button({ + parentEl: $('#'+item[3]), style: 'margin-left: 5px; margin-bottom: 4px;', cls: 'btn-options large', iconCls: item[2], @@ -1002,7 +964,6 @@ define([ 'text!documenteditor/main/app/template/TableSettingsAdvanced.templat strTableId :item[1], hint: item[4] }); - _btn.render( $('#'+item[3])) ; _btn.on('click', _.bind(this._ApplyBorderPreset, this)); this._btnsTableBorderPosition.push( _btn ); }, this); @@ -1688,19 +1649,13 @@ define([ 'text!documenteditor/main/app/template/TableSettingsAdvanced.templat this.tableBordersImageSpacing.setVirtualBorderSize( this.BorderSize.pxValue ); }, - addNewColor: function(picker, btn) { - picker.addNewColor((typeof(btn.color) == 'object') ? btn.color.color : btn.color); - }, - - onColorsBorderSelect: function(picker, color) { - this.btnBorderColor.setColor(color); + onColorsBorderSelect: function(btn, color) { var colorstr = (typeof(color) == 'object') ? color.color : color; this.tableBordersImage.setVirtualBorderColor(colorstr); this.tableBordersImageSpacing.setVirtualBorderColor(colorstr); }, - onColorsBackSelect: function(picker, color) { - this.btnBackColor.setColor(color); + onColorsBackSelect: function(btn, color) { this.CellColor = {Value: 1, Color: color}; if (this._cellBackground === null) @@ -1719,8 +1674,7 @@ define([ 'text!documenteditor/main/app/template/TableSettingsAdvanced.templat this.tableBordersImage.setCellsColor(colorstr); }, - onColorsTableBackSelect: function(picker, color) { - this.btnTableBackColor.setColor(color); + onColorsTableBackSelect: function(btn, color) { this.TableColor.Color = color; if (this._changedProps) { @@ -2132,7 +2086,6 @@ define([ 'text!documenteditor/main/app/template/TableSettingsAdvanced.templat textBorderDesc: 'Click on diagramm or use buttons to select borders', textTableBackColor: 'Table Background', txtNoBorders: 'No borders', - textNewColor: 'Add New Custom Color', textCenter: 'Center', textMargin: 'Margin', textPage: 'Page', diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/app/view/TextArtSettings.js b/apps/documenteditor/main/app/view/TextArtSettings.js index 603dfc809..9d07d7922 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/app/view/TextArtSettings.js +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/app/view/TextArtSettings.js @@ -193,8 +193,7 @@ define([ this.fireEvent('editcomplete', this); }, - onColorsBackSelect: function(picker, color) { - this.btnBackColor.setColor(color); + onColorsBackSelect: function(btn, color) { this.ShapeColor = {Value: 1, Color: color}; if (this.api && !this._noApply) { @@ -217,10 +216,6 @@ define([ this.fireEvent('editcomplete', this); }, - addNewColor: function(picker, btn) { - picker.addNewColor((typeof(btn.color) == 'object') ? btn.color.color : btn.color); - }, - onNumTransparencyChange: function(field, newValue, oldValue, eOpts){ this.sldrTransparency.setValue(field.getNumberValue(), true); if (this.api) { @@ -347,8 +342,7 @@ define([ this.fireEvent('editcomplete', this); }, - onColorsGradientSelect: function(picker, color) { - this.btnGradColor.setColor(color); + onColorsGradientSelect: function(btn, color) { this.GradColor.colors[this.GradColor.currentIdx] = color; this.sldrGradient.setColorValue(Common.Utils.String.format('#{0}', (typeof(color) == 'object') ? color.color : color)); @@ -436,7 +430,7 @@ define([ }, applyBorderSize: function(value) { - value = parseFloat(value); + value = Common.Utils.String.parseFloat(value); value = isNaN(value) ? 0 : Math.max(0, Math.min(1584, value)); this.BorderSize = value; @@ -510,8 +504,7 @@ define([ this.fireEvent('editcomplete', this); }, - onColorsBorderSelect: function(picker, color) { - this.btnBorderColor.setColor(color); + onColorsBorderSelect: function(btn, color) { this.BorderColor = {Value: 1, Color: color}; if (this.api && this.BorderSize>0 && !this._noApply) { var props = new Asc.asc_TextArtProperties(); @@ -1100,62 +1093,29 @@ define([ if (this._initSettings) return; if (!this.btnBackColor) { this.btnBorderColor = new Common.UI.ColorButton({ - style: "width:45px;", - menu : new Common.UI.Menu({ - items: [ - { template: _.template('
    ') }, - { template: _.template('' + this.textNewColor + '') } - ] - }) + parentEl: $('#textart-border-color-btn'), + color: '000000' }); - this.btnBorderColor.render( $('#textart-border-color-btn')); - this.btnBorderColor.setColor('000000'); this.lockedControls.push(this.btnBorderColor); - this.colorsBorder = new Common.UI.ThemeColorPalette({ - el: $('#textart-border-color-menu'), - value: '000000' - }); - this.colorsBorder.on('select', _.bind(this.onColorsBorderSelect, this)); - this.btnBorderColor.menu.items[1].on('click', _.bind(this.addNewColor, this, this.colorsBorder, this.btnBorderColor)); + this.colorsBorder = this.btnBorderColor.getPicker(); + this.btnBorderColor.on('color:select', _.bind(this.onColorsBorderSelect, this)); this.btnGradColor = new Common.UI.ColorButton({ - style: "width:45px;", - menu : new Common.UI.Menu({ - items: [ - { template: _.template('
    ') }, - { template: _.template('' + this.textNewColor + '') } - ] - }) + parentEl: $('#textart-gradient-color-btn'), + color: '000000' }); - this.btnGradColor.render( $('#textart-gradient-color-btn')); - this.btnGradColor.setColor('000000'); this.lockedControls.push(this.btnGradColor); - this.colorsGrad = new Common.UI.ThemeColorPalette({ - el: $('#textart-gradient-color-menu'), - value: '000000' - }); - this.colorsGrad.on('select', _.bind(this.onColorsGradientSelect, this)); - this.btnGradColor.menu.items[1].on('click', _.bind(this.addNewColor, this, this.colorsGrad, this.btnGradColor)); + this.colorsGrad = this.btnGradColor.getPicker(); + this.btnGradColor.on('color:select', _.bind(this.onColorsGradientSelect, this)); this.btnBackColor = new Common.UI.ColorButton({ - style: "width:45px;", - menu : new Common.UI.Menu({ - items: [ - { template: _.template('
    ') }, - { template: _.template('' + this.textNewColor + '') } - ] - }) + parentEl: $('#textart-back-color-btn'), + transparent: true, + color: 'transparent' }); - this.btnBackColor.render( $('#textart-back-color-btn')); - this.btnBackColor.setColor('transparent'); this.lockedControls.push(this.btnBackColor); - this.colorsBack = new Common.UI.ThemeColorPalette({ - el: $('#textart-back-color-menu'), - value: 'transparent', - transparent: true - }); - this.colorsBack.on('select', _.bind(this.onColorsBackSelect, this)); - this.btnBackColor.menu.items[1].on('click', _.bind(this.addNewColor, this, this.colorsBack, this.btnBackColor)); + this.colorsBack = this.btnBackColor.getPicker(); + this.btnBackColor.on('color:select', _.bind(this.onColorsBackSelect, this)); } this.colorsBorder.updateColors(Common.Utils.ThemeColor.getEffectColors(), Common.Utils.ThemeColor.getStandartColors()); this.colorsBack.updateColors(Common.Utils.ThemeColor.getEffectColors(), Common.Utils.ThemeColor.getStandartColors()); @@ -1197,7 +1157,6 @@ define([ strSize : 'Size', strFill : 'Fill', textColor : 'Color Fill', - textNewColor : 'Add New Custom Color', strTransparency : 'Opacity', textNoFill : 'No Fill', textSelectTexture : 'Select', diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/app/view/Toolbar.js b/apps/documenteditor/main/app/view/Toolbar.js index 6e65604b8..ab0b1862f 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/app/view/Toolbar.js +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/app/view/Toolbar.js @@ -515,6 +515,14 @@ define([ this.paragraphControls.push(this.mnuInsertPageCount); this.toolbarControls.push(this.btnEditHeader); + this.btnInsDateTime = new Common.UI.Button({ + id: 'id-toolbar-btn-datetime', + cls: 'btn-toolbar x-huge icon-top', + iconCls: 'toolbar__icon btn-datetime', + caption: me.capBtnDateTime + }); + this.paragraphControls.push(this.btnInsDateTime); + this.btnBlankPage = new Common.UI.Button({ id: 'id-toolbar-btn-blankpage', cls: 'btn-toolbar x-huge icon-top', @@ -635,6 +643,31 @@ define([ value: 'checkbox' }, {caption: '--'}, + // { + // caption: this.textNewFieldControl, + // value: 'new-field' + // }, + // { + // caption: this.textNewPictureControl, + // value: 'new-picture' + // }, + // { + // caption: this.textNewComboboxControl, + // value: 'new-combobox' + // }, + // { + // caption: this.textNewDropdownControl, + // value: 'new-dropdown' + // }, + // { + // caption: this.textNewCheckboxControl, + // value: 'new-checkbox' + // }, + // { + // caption: this.textNewRadioboxControl, + // value: 'new-radiobox' + // }, + // {caption: '--'}, { caption: this.textRemoveControl, // iconCls: 'menu__icon cc-remove', @@ -1129,12 +1162,12 @@ define([ this.listStyles.fieldPicker.itemTemplate = _.template([ '
    ', - '
    ', + '
    ', '
    ' ].join('')); this.listStyles.menuPicker.itemTemplate = _.template([ '
    ', - '
    ', + '
    ', '
    ' ].join('')); this.paragraphControls.push(this.listStyles); @@ -1309,6 +1342,7 @@ define([ _injectComponent('#slot-btn-controls', this.btnContentControls); _injectComponent('#slot-btn-columns', this.btnColumns); _injectComponent('#slot-btn-editheader', this.btnEditHeader); + _injectComponent('#slot-btn-datetime', this.btnInsDateTime); _injectComponent('#slot-btn-blankpage', this.btnBlankPage); _injectComponent('#slot-btn-insshape', this.btnInsertShape); _injectComponent('#slot-btn-insequation', this.btnInsertEquation); @@ -1589,6 +1623,7 @@ define([ this.btnInsertText.updateHint(this.tipInsertText); this.btnInsertTextArt.updateHint(this.tipInsertTextArt); this.btnEditHeader.updateHint(this.tipEditHeader); + this.btnInsDateTime.updateHint(this.tipDateTime); this.btnBlankPage.updateHint(this.tipBlankPage); this.btnInsertShape.updateHint(this.tipInsertShape); this.btnInsertEquation.updateHint(this.tipInsertEquation); @@ -1681,7 +1716,7 @@ define([ this.paragraphControls.push(this.mnuInsertPageCount); this.btnInsertChart.setMenu( new Common.UI.Menu({ - style: 'width: 435px;', + style: 'width: 364px;', items: [ {template: _.template('')} ] @@ -1695,7 +1730,7 @@ define([ restoreHeight: 421, groups: new Common.UI.DataViewGroupStore(Common.define.chartData.getChartGroupData(true)), store: new Common.UI.DataViewStore(Common.define.chartData.getChartData()), - itemTemplate: _.template('
    ') + itemTemplate: _.template('
    \">
    ') }); picker.on('item:click', function (picker, item, record, e) { if (record) @@ -2309,7 +2344,15 @@ define([ tipInsertSymbol: 'Insert symbol', mniDrawTable: 'Draw Table', mniEraseTable: 'Erase Table', - textListSettings: 'List Settings' + textListSettings: 'List Settings', + capBtnDateTime: 'Date & Time', + tipDateTime: 'Insert current date and time', + textNewFieldControl: 'New text field', + textNewPictureControl: 'New picture', + textNewComboboxControl: 'New combo box', + textNewCheckboxControl: 'New check box', + textNewRadioboxControl: 'New radio box', + textNewDropdownControl: 'New drop-down list' } })(), DE.Views.Toolbar || {})); }); diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/app/view/WatermarkSettingsDialog.js b/apps/documenteditor/main/app/view/WatermarkSettingsDialog.js index af9070933..9422d514f 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/app/view/WatermarkSettingsDialog.js +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/app/view/WatermarkSettingsDialog.js @@ -104,6 +104,7 @@ define(['text!documenteditor/main/app/template/WatermarkSettings.template', this.props = options.props; this.fontStore = options.fontStore; this.api = options.api; + this.storage = !!options.storage; this.textControls = []; this.imageControls = []; this.fontName = 'Arial'; @@ -165,19 +166,25 @@ define(['text!documenteditor/main/app/template/WatermarkSettings.template', }, this)); // Image watermark - this.btnFromFile = new Common.UI.Button({ - el: $('#watermark-from-file') + this.btnSelectImage = new Common.UI.Button({ + parentEl: $('#watermark-select-image'), + cls: 'btn-text-menu-default', + caption: this.textSelect, + style: 'width: 142px;', + menu: new Common.UI.Menu({ + style: 'min-width: 142px;', + maxHeight: 200, + additionalAlign: this.menuAddAlign, + items: [ + {caption: this.textFromFile, value: 0}, + {caption: this.textFromUrl, value: 1}, + {caption: this.textFromStorage, value: 2} + ] + }) }); - this.btnFromFile.on('click', _.bind(function(btn){ - this.props.showFileDialog(); - }, this)); - this.imageControls.push(this.btnFromFile); - - this.btnFromUrl = new Common.UI.Button({ - el: $('#watermark-from-url') - }); - this.btnFromUrl.on('click', _.bind(this.insertFromUrl, this)); - this.imageControls.push(this.btnFromUrl); + this.imageControls.push(this.btnSelectImage); + this.btnSelectImage.menu.on('item:click', _.bind(this.onImageSelect, this)); + this.btnSelectImage.menu.items[2].setVisible(this.storage); this._arrScale = [ {displayValue: this.textAuto, value: -1}, @@ -190,7 +197,7 @@ define(['text!documenteditor/main/app/template/WatermarkSettings.template', this.cmbScale = new Common.UI.ComboBox({ el : $('#watermark-combo-scale'), cls : 'input-group-nr', - menuStyle : 'min-width: 90px;', + menuStyle : 'min-width: 142px;', data : this._arrScale }).on('selected', _.bind(function(combo, record) { }, this)); @@ -265,39 +272,39 @@ define(['text!documenteditor/main/app/template/WatermarkSettings.template', this.textControls.push(this.cmbFontSize); this.btnBold = new Common.UI.Button({ + parentEl: $('#watermark-bold'), cls: 'btn-toolbar', iconCls: 'toolbar__icon btn-bold', enableToggle: true, hint: this.textBold }); - this.btnBold.render($('#watermark-bold')) ; this.textControls.push(this.btnBold); this.btnItalic = new Common.UI.Button({ + parentEl: $('#watermark-italic'), cls: 'btn-toolbar', iconCls: 'toolbar__icon btn-italic', enableToggle: true, hint: this.textItalic }); - this.btnItalic.render($('#watermark-italic')) ; this.textControls.push(this.btnItalic); this.btnUnderline = new Common.UI.Button({ + parentEl: $('#watermark-underline'), cls : 'btn-toolbar', iconCls : 'toolbar__icon btn-underline', enableToggle: true, hint: this.textUnderline }); - this.btnUnderline.render($('#watermark-underline')) ; this.textControls.push(this.btnUnderline); this.btnStrikeout = new Common.UI.Button({ + parentEl: $('#watermark-strikeout'), cls: 'btn-toolbar', iconCls: 'toolbar__icon btn-strikeout', enableToggle: true, hint: this.textStrikeout }); - this.btnStrikeout.render($('#watermark-strikeout')) ; this.textControls.push(this.btnStrikeout); var initNewColor = function(btn, picker_el) { @@ -317,6 +324,7 @@ define(['text!documenteditor/main/app/template/WatermarkSettings.template', return picker; }; this.btnTextColor = new Common.UI.Button({ + parentEl: $('#watermark-textcolor'), cls : 'btn-toolbar', iconCls : 'toolbar__icon btn-fontcolor', hint : this.textColor, @@ -333,7 +341,6 @@ define(['text!documenteditor/main/app/template/WatermarkSettings.template', ] }) }); - this.btnTextColor.render($('#watermark-textcolor')); this.mnuTextColorPicker = initNewColor(this.btnTextColor, "#watermark-menu-textcolor"); $('#watermark-auto-color').on('click', _.bind(this.onAutoColor, this)); this.textControls.push(this.btnTextColor); @@ -410,8 +417,17 @@ define(['text!documenteditor/main/app/template/WatermarkSettings.template', me.btnOk.setDisabled(false); }; this.api.asc_registerCallback('asc_onWatermarkImageLoaded', onApiWMLoaded); + + var insertImageFromStorage = function(data) { + if (data && data.url && data.c=='watermark') { + me.props.put_ImageUrl(data.url, data.token); + } + }; + Common.NotificationCenter.on('storage:image-insert', insertImageFromStorage); + this.on('close', function(obj){ me.api.asc_unregisterCallback('asc_onWatermarkImageLoaded', onApiWMLoaded); + Common.NotificationCenter.off('storage:image-insert', insertImageFromStorage); }); }, @@ -482,18 +498,24 @@ define(['text!documenteditor/main/app/template/WatermarkSettings.template', return item ? item.get('displayValue') : null; }, - insertFromUrl: function() { - var me = this; - (new Common.Views.ImageFromUrlDialog({ - handler: function(result, value) { - if (result == 'ok') { - var checkUrl = value.replace(/ /g, ''); - if (!_.isEmpty(checkUrl)) { - me.props.put_ImageUrl(checkUrl); + onImageSelect: function(menu, item) { + if (item.value==1) { + var me = this; + (new Common.Views.ImageFromUrlDialog({ + handler: function(result, value) { + if (result == 'ok') { + var checkUrl = value.replace(/ /g, ''); + if (!_.isEmpty(checkUrl)) { + me.props.put_ImageUrl(checkUrl); + } } } - } - })).show(); + })).show(); + } else if (item.value==2) { + Common.NotificationCenter.trigger('storage:image-load', 'watermark'); + } else { + this.props.showFileDialog(); + } }, _setDefaults: function (props) { @@ -581,8 +603,9 @@ define(['text!documenteditor/main/app/template/WatermarkSettings.template', var val = this.props.get_Type(); if (val == Asc.c_oAscWatermarkType.Image) { - val = this.cmbScale.getValue(); - val = props.put_Scale((val<0) ? val : val/100); + val = parseInt(this.cmbScale.getValue()); + isNaN(val) && (val = -1); + props.put_Scale((val<0) ? val : val/100); } else { props.put_Text(this.cmbText.getValue()); props.put_IsDiagonal(this.radioDiag.getValue()); @@ -672,7 +695,9 @@ define(['text!documenteditor/main/app/template/WatermarkSettings.template', textHor: 'Horizontal', textColor: 'Text color', textNewColor: 'Add New Custom Color', - textLanguage: 'Language' + textLanguage: 'Language', + textFromStorage: 'From Storage', + textSelect: 'Select Image' }, DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog || {})) }); \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/index.html b/apps/documenteditor/main/index.html index fdd2df9c0..033f6c1e3 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/index.html +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/index.html @@ -144,7 +144,9 @@ @@ -258,6 +264,7 @@ + @@ -267,7 +274,9 @@ - + + + diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/index_loader.html b/apps/documenteditor/main/index_loader.html index 3872b757e..1f8891dff 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/index_loader.html +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/index_loader.html @@ -212,6 +212,7 @@ loading = 'Loading...', logo = params["logo"] ? ((params["logo"] !== 'none') ? ('') : '') : null; window.frameEditorId = params["frameEditorId"]; + window.parentOrigin = params["parentOrigin"]; if ( lang == 'de') loading = 'Ladevorgang...'; else if ( lang == 'es') loading = 'Cargando...'; else if ( lang == 'fr') loading = 'Chargement en cours...'; @@ -259,6 +260,7 @@ + @@ -268,7 +270,9 @@ - + + + diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/bg.json b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/bg.json index b5e7022e9..fba7a3cb9 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/bg.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/bg.json @@ -10,8 +10,8 @@ "Common.Controllers.ExternalMergeEditor.warningText": "Обектът е деактивиран, защото се редактира от друг потребител.", "Common.Controllers.ExternalMergeEditor.warningTitle": "Внимание", "Common.Controllers.History.notcriticalErrorTitle": "Внимание", - "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textAtLeast": "поне", - "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textAuto": "автоматичен", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textAtLeast": "Поне", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textAuto": "Автоматичен", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textBaseline": "Изходна", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textBold": "Получер", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textBreakBefore": "Страницата е прекъсната преди", @@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textDeleted": "Изтрито:", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textDStrikeout": "Двойно зачертаване", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textEquation": "Уравнение", - "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textExact": "точно", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textExact": "Точно", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textFirstLine": "Първа линия", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textFontSize": "Размер на шрифта", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textFormatted": "Форматиран", @@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textKeepNext": "Продължете със следващия", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textLeft": "Подравняване вляво", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textLineSpacing": "Разстояние между редовете: ", - "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textMultiple": "многократни", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textMultiple": "Многократни", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textNoBreakBefore": "Няма прекъсване на страница преди това", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textNoContextual": "Добави интервал между", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textNoKeepLines": "Не поддържайте линиите заедно", @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textSuperScript": "Горен индекс", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textTableChanged": "Промените в табличните настройки", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textTableRowsAdd": "Редовете на таблиците се добавят", - "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textTableRowsDel": "Таблици са изтрити", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textTableRowsDel": "Таблици са изтрити", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textTabs": "Промяна на разделите", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textUnderline": "Подчертавам", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textWidow": "Управление на вдовицата", @@ -78,6 +78,28 @@ "Common.define.chartData.textPoint": "XY (точкова)", "Common.define.chartData.textStock": "Борсова", "Common.define.chartData.textSurface": "Повърхност", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textApril": "Април", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textAugust": "Август", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textDecember": "Декември", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textFebruary": "Февруари", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textJanuary": "Януари", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textJuly": "Юли", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textJune": "Юни", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textMarch": "Март", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textMay": "Май", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textNovember": "Ноември", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textSeptember": "Септември", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortApril": "Апр", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortAugust": "Авг", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortDecember": "Дек", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortFebruary": "Февр", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortJanuary": "Ян", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortJuly": "Юли", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortJune": "Юни", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortMarch": "Март", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortMay": "Май", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortNovember": "Ноем", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortSeptember": "Септ", "Common.UI.ComboBorderSize.txtNoBorders": "Няма граници", "Common.UI.ComboBorderSizeEditable.txtNoBorders": "Няма граници", "Common.UI.ComboDataView.emptyComboText": "Няма стилове", @@ -118,7 +140,7 @@ "Common.Views.About.txtLicensor": "НОСИТЕЛЯТ", "Common.Views.About.txtMail": "електронна поща:", "Common.Views.About.txtPoweredBy": "Задвижвани от", - "Common.Views.About.txtTel": "тел .: ", + "Common.Views.About.txtTel": "тел.: ", "Common.Views.About.txtVersion": "Версия ", "Common.Views.Chat.textSend": "Изпращам", "Common.Views.Comments.textAdd": "Добави", @@ -223,6 +245,9 @@ "Common.Views.RenameDialog.txtInvalidName": "Името на файла не може да съдържа нито един от следните знаци: ", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.hintNext": "За следващата промяна", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.hintPrev": "Към предишна промяна", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.mniFromFile": "Документ от Файл", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.mniFromStorage": "Документ от Хранилище", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.mniFromUrl": "Документ от URL", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.strFast": "Бърз", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.strFastDesc": "Съвместно редактиране в реално време. Всички промени се запазват автоматично.", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.strStrict": "Стриктен", @@ -306,6 +331,7 @@ "Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textShowDate": "Покажете датата на знака в реда за подпис", "Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textTitle": "Настройка на подпис", "Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.txtEmpty": "Това поле е задължително", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textFont": "Шрифт", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.leavePageText": "Всички незапазени промени в този документ ще бъдат загубени.
    Кликнете върху „Отказ“ и след това върху „Запазване“, за да ги запазите. Кликнете върху „ОК“, за да отхвърлите всички незапазени промени.", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.newDocumentTitle": "Неназован документ", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.notcriticalErrorTitle": "Внимание", @@ -401,7 +427,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.textPaidFeature": "Платена функция", "DE.Controllers.Main.textShape": "Форма", "DE.Controllers.Main.textStrict": "Строг режим", - "DE.Controllers.Main.textTryUndoRedo": "Функциите за отмяна / възстановяване са деактивирани за режима Бързо съвместно редактиране.
    Кликнете върху бутона „Строг режим“, за да превключите в режим на стриктно съвместно редактиране, за да редактирате файла без намеса на други потребители и да изпращате промените само след като ги запазите тях. Можете да превключвате между режимите за съвместно редактиране с помощта на редактора Разширени настройки.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textTryUndoRedo": "Функциите за отмяна/възстановяване са деактивирани за режима Бързо съвместно редактиране.
    Кликнете върху бутона „Строг режим“, за да превключите в режим на стриктно съвместно редактиране, за да редактирате файла без намеса на други потребители и да изпращате промените само след като ги запазите тях. Можете да превключвате между режимите за съвместно редактиране с помощта на редактора Разширени настройки.", "DE.Controllers.Main.titleLicenseExp": "Лицензът е изтекъл", "DE.Controllers.Main.titleServerVersion": "Редакторът е актуализиран", "DE.Controllers.Main.titleUpdateVersion": "Версията е променена", @@ -417,6 +443,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.txtDiagramTitle": "Заглавие на диаграмата", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtEditingMode": "Задаване на режим на редактиране ...", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtEndOfFormula": "Неочакван край на формулата", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtEnterDate": "Въведете дата.", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtErrorLoadHistory": "Неуспешно зареждане на историята", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtEvenPage": "Дори страница", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtFiguredArrows": "Фигурни стрели", @@ -638,6 +665,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.txtZeroDivide": "Нула дивизия", "DE.Controllers.Main.unknownErrorText": "Неизвестна грешка.", "DE.Controllers.Main.unsupportedBrowserErrorText": "Вашият браузър не се поддържа.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.uploadDocExtMessage": "Непознат формат на документ.", "DE.Controllers.Main.uploadImageExtMessage": "Неизвестен формат на изображението.", "DE.Controllers.Main.uploadImageFileCountMessage": "Няма качени изображения.", "DE.Controllers.Main.uploadImageSizeMessage": "Превишено е максималното ограничение на размера на изображението.", @@ -1008,6 +1036,13 @@ "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textSort": "Сортиране по", "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textTitle": "Отбелязани", "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.txtInvalidName": "Името на отметката може да съдържа само букви, цифри и долни черти и трябва да започва с буквата", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textAdd": "Добави етикет", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textDelete": "Изтрий етикета", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textEquation": "Уравнение", + "DE.Views.CellsAddDialog.textUp": "Над курсора", + "DE.Views.CellsRemoveDialog.textCol": "Изтрий цялата колона", + "DE.Views.CellsRemoveDialog.textRow": "Изтрий целия ред", + "DE.Views.CellsRemoveDialog.textTitle": "Изтрий клетки", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textAdvanced": "Показване на разширените настройки", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textChartType": "Промяна на типа на диаграмата", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textEditData": "Редактиране на данни", @@ -1017,7 +1052,7 @@ "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textStyle": "Стил", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textUndock": "Откачете от панела", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textWidth": "Ширина", - "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textWrap": "Стил на опаковане", + "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textWrap": "Стил на преливане", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.txtBehind": "Зад", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.txtInFront": "Отпред", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.txtInline": "В текста", @@ -1026,13 +1061,16 @@ "DE.Views.ChartSettings.txtTight": "Стегнат", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.txtTitle": "Диаграма", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.txtTopAndBottom": "Отгоре и отдолу", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textAdd": "Добави", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textAppearance": "Външен вид", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textApplyAll": "Прилага за всички", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textBox": "Ограничителна кутия", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textChange": "Редактирай", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textColor": "Цвят", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textDelete": "Изтрий", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textLang": "Език", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textLock": "Заключване", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textName": "Заглавие", - "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textNewColor": "Нов потребителски цвят", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textNone": "Нито един", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textShowAs": "Покажете като", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textSystemColor": "Система", @@ -1044,6 +1082,7 @@ "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textSeparator": "Разделител на колони", "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textSpacing": "Разстояние между колоните", "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textTitle": "Колони", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textLang": "Език", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.aboveText": "Над", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.addCommentText": "Добави коментар", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.advancedFrameText": "Разширени настройки", @@ -1162,8 +1201,9 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textUpdateAll": "Обновете цялата таблица", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textUpdatePages": "Обновете само номерата на страниците", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textUpdateTOC": "Обновяване на съдържанието", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textWrap": "Стил на опаковане", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textWrap": "Стил на преливане", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.tipIsLocked": "Понастоящем този елемент се редактира от друг потребител.", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.toDictionaryText": "Добави към речника", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtAddBottom": "Добавяне на долната граница", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtAddFractionBar": "Добавете лента за фракции", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtAddHor": "Добавете хоризонтална линия", @@ -1277,7 +1317,6 @@ "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textLeft": "Наляво", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textMargin": "Марж", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textMove": "Преместване с текст", - "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "Нов потребителски цвят", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textNone": "Нито един", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textPage": "Страница", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textParagraph": "Параграф", @@ -1317,6 +1356,7 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.CreateNew.newDescriptionText": "Създайте нов празен текстов документ, който ще можете да форматирате и форматирате, след като бъде създаден по време на редактирането. Или изберете един от шаблоните, за да стартирате документ от определен тип или цел, където някои стилове вече са били предварително приложени.", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.CreateNew.newDocumentText": "Нов текстов документ", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.CreateNew.noTemplatesText": "Няма шаблони", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtAddAuthor": "Добави автор", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtAppName": "Приложение", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtAuthor": "Автор", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtBtnAccessRights": "Промяна на правото за достъп", @@ -1438,7 +1478,7 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textRotation": "Завъртане", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textSize": "Размер", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textWidth": "Ширина", - "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textWrap": "Стил на опаковане", + "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textWrap": "Стил на преливане", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.txtBehind": "Зад", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.txtInFront": "Отпред", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.txtInline": "В текста", @@ -1510,7 +1550,7 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textVertically": "Вертикално", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textWeightArrows": "Теглилки и стрелки", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textWidth": "Ширина", - "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textWrap": "Стил на опаковане", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textWrap": "Стил на преливане", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textWrapBehindTooltip": "Зад", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textWrapInFrontTooltip": "Отпред", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textWrapInlineTooltip": "В текста", @@ -1647,7 +1687,6 @@ "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textAuto": "Многократни", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textBackColor": "Цвят на фона", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textExact": "Точно", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textNewColor": "Нов потребителски цвят", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.txtAutoText": "Автоматичен", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.noTabs": "Посочените раздели ще се появят в това поле", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strAllCaps": "Всички шапки", @@ -1664,6 +1703,7 @@ "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strParagraphIndents": "Отстъп и разположение", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strParagraphPosition": "Поставяне", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strSmallCaps": "Малки букви", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strSomeParagraphSpace": "Не добавяй интервал между параграфи от същия стил", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strStrike": "Зачеркнато", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strSubscript": "Долен", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strSuperscript": "Горен индекс", @@ -1679,7 +1719,6 @@ "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textEffects": "Ефекти", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textLeader": "Водач", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textLeft": "Наляво", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "Нов потребителски цвят", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textNone": "Нито един", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textPosition": "Позиция", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textRemove": "Премахване", @@ -1737,7 +1776,6 @@ "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textHintFlipV": "Отрязване по вертикала", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textImageTexture": "Картина или текстура", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textLinear": "Линеен", - "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textNewColor": "Нов потребителски цвят", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textNoFill": "Без попълване", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textPatternFill": "Модел", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textRadial": "Радиален", @@ -1748,7 +1786,7 @@ "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textStyle": "Стил", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textTexture": "От текстура", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textTile": "Плочка", - "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textWrap": "Стил на опаковане", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textWrap": "Стил на преливане", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.txtBehind": "Зад", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.txtBrownPaper": "Кафява хартия", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.txtCanvas": "Платно", @@ -1851,7 +1889,6 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettings.textHeader": "Заглавие", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textHeight": "Височина", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textLast": "Последно", - "DE.Views.TableSettings.textNewColor": "Нов потребителски цвят", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textRows": "Редове", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textSelectBorders": "Изберете граници, които искате да промените, като използвате избрания по-горе стил", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textTemplate": "Изберете от шаблон", @@ -1868,6 +1905,7 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettings.tipRight": "Задайте само външна дясна граница", "DE.Views.TableSettings.tipTop": "Задайте само външна горна граница", "DE.Views.TableSettings.txtNoBorders": "Няма граници", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_Accent": "Акцент", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlign": "Подравняване", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlignment": "Подравняване", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAllowSpacing": "Разстояние между клетките", @@ -1900,7 +1938,6 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMargins": "Маржове на клетките", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMeasure": "Измерете инча", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMove": "Преместване на обект с текст", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "Нов потребителски цвят", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOnlyCells": "Само за избрани клетки", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOptions": "Настроики", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOverlap": "Разрешаване на припокриване", @@ -1924,7 +1961,7 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textWrap": "Опаковане на текст", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textWrapNoneTooltip": "Вградена таблица", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textWrapParallelTooltip": "Таблица на потока", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textWrappingStyle": "Стил на опаковане", + "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textWrappingStyle": "Стил на преливане", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textWrapText": "Преливане на текст", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.tipAll": "Задайте външната граница и всички вътрешни линии", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.tipCellAll": "Задайте граници само за вътрешните клетки", @@ -1953,7 +1990,6 @@ "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textGradient": "Градиент", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textGradientFill": "Градиентно запълване", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textLinear": "Линеен", - "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textNewColor": "Нов потребителски цвят", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textNoFill": "Без попълване", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textRadial": "Радиален", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textSelectTexture": "Изберете", @@ -1961,6 +1997,7 @@ "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textTemplate": "Шаблон", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textTransform": "Трансформирайте", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.txtNoBorders": "Няма линия", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnAddComment": "Добави коментар", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnBlankPage": "Празна страница", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnColumns": "Колони", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnComment": "Коментар", @@ -1978,11 +2015,12 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnMargins": "Полета", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnPageOrient": "Ориентация", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnPageSize": "Размер", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnWatermark": "Воден знак", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capImgAlign": "Изравнете", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capImgBackward": "Изпращане назад", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capImgForward": "Изведи напред", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capImgGroup": "Група", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.capImgWrapping": "Опаковане", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capImgWrapping": "Преливане", "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniCustomTable": "Персонализирана таблица", "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniEditControls": "Настройки за управление", "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniEditDropCap": "Пуснете настройките на капачката", @@ -2135,5 +2173,8 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme6": "Стечение", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme7": "Справедливост", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme8": "Поток", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme9": "леярна" + "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme9": "Леярна", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textFont": "Шрифт", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textLanguage": "Език", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textTitle": "Настройки на воден знак" } \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/cs.json b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/cs.json index 31733f83f..f49e9e155 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/cs.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/cs.json @@ -80,6 +80,7 @@ "Common.define.chartData.textPoint": "Bodový graf", "Common.define.chartData.textStock": "Burzovní graf", "Common.define.chartData.textSurface": "Povrch", + "Common.Translation.warnFileLocked": "Dokument je používán jinou aplikací. Můžete pokračovat v úpravách a uložit je jako kopii.", "Common.UI.Calendar.textApril": "duben", "Common.UI.Calendar.textAugust": "srpen", "Common.UI.Calendar.textDecember": "prosinec", @@ -113,6 +114,7 @@ "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortTuesday": "út", "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortWednesday": "st", "Common.UI.Calendar.textYears": "Let", + "Common.UI.ColorButton.textNewColor": "Přidat novou uživatelsky určenou barvu", "Common.UI.ComboBorderSize.txtNoBorders": "Bez ohraničení", "Common.UI.ComboBorderSizeEditable.txtNoBorders": "Bez ohraničení", "Common.UI.ComboDataView.emptyComboText": "Žádné styly", @@ -357,11 +359,27 @@ "Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textShowDate": "Na řádek s podpisem zobrazit datum podpisu", "Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textTitle": "Nastavení podpisu", "Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.txtEmpty": "Tuto kolonku je třeba vyplnit", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textCharacter": "Znak", "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textCode": "Unicode HEX hodnota", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textCopyright": "Znak autorských práv", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textDCQuote": "Uzavírací dvojitá uvozovka", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textDOQuote": "Otevírací dvojitá uvozovka", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textEllipsis": "Vodorovná výpustka", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textEmDash": "Spojovník", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textEmSpace": "Dlouhá mezera", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textEnDash": "Pomlčka", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textEnSpace": "Mezera", "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textFont": "Písmo", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textNBHyphen": "Nezalomitelný spojovník", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textNBSpace": "Nezalomitelná mezera", "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textRange": "Rozsah", "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textRecent": "Nedávno použité symboly", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSCQuote": "Uzavírací jednoduchá uvozovka", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSOQuote": "Otevírací jednoduchá uvozovka", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSpecial": "Speciální znaky", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSymbols": "Symboly", "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textTitle": "Symbol", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textTradeMark": "Znak registrované obchodní značky", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.leavePageText": "Všechny neuložené změny v tomto dokumentu budou ztraceny. Pokud o ně nechcete přijít, klikněte na „Storno“, poté na „Uložit“. V opačném případě klikněte na „OK“ a všechny neuložené změny budou zahozeny.", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.newDocumentTitle": "Nepojmenovaný dokument", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.notcriticalErrorTitle": "Varování", @@ -387,6 +405,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.errorAccessDeny": "Pokoušíte se provést akci, na kterou nemáte oprávnění.
    Obraťte se na správce vámi využívaného dokumentového serveru.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorBadImageUrl": "Adresa URL obrázku je nesprávná", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorCoAuthoringDisconnect": "Spojení se serverem ztraceno. Dokument nyní nelze upravovat.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorCompare": "Funkce pro porovnávání dokumentů není dostupná při úpravách vícero uživateli naráz.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorConnectToServer": "Dokument nelze uložit. Prosím, zkontrolujte nastavení vašeho připojení nebo kontaktujte vašeho administrátora.
    Při kliknutí na tlačítko \"OK\" budete vyzváni ke stažení dokumentu.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorDatabaseConnection": "Externí chyba.
    Chyba spojení s databází. Prosím kontaktujte podporu, pokud chyba přetrvává.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorDataEncrypted": "Obdrženy šifrované změny – bez hesla je není možné zobrazit.", @@ -450,12 +469,15 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.splitMaxColsErrorText": "Je třeba, aby počet sloupců byl nižší než %1.", "DE.Controllers.Main.splitMaxRowsErrorText": "Počet řádků musí být menší než %1.", "DE.Controllers.Main.textAnonymous": "Anonymní", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textApplyAll": "Uplatnit na všechny rovnice", "DE.Controllers.Main.textBuyNow": "Navštívit webovou stránku", "DE.Controllers.Main.textChangesSaved": "Všechny změny uloženy", "DE.Controllers.Main.textClose": "Zavřít", "DE.Controllers.Main.textCloseTip": "Tip zavřete kliknutím", "DE.Controllers.Main.textContactUs": "Obraťte se na obchodní oddělení", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textConvertEquation": "Tato rovnice byla vytvořena starou verzí editoru rovnic, která už není podporovaná. Pro její upravení, převeďte rovnici do formátu Office Math ML.
    Převést nyní?", "DE.Controllers.Main.textCustomLoader": "Mějte na paměti, že dle podmínek licence nejste oprávněni měnit načítač.
    Pro získání nabídky se obraťte na naše obchodní oddělení.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textLearnMore": "Více informací", "DE.Controllers.Main.textLoadingDocument": "Načítání dokumentu", "DE.Controllers.Main.textNoLicenseTitle": "omezení na %1 spojení", "DE.Controllers.Main.textPaidFeature": "Placená funkce", @@ -478,6 +500,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.txtDiagramTitle": "Nadpis grafu", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtEditingMode": "Nastavit režim úprav…", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtEndOfFormula": "Neočekávaný konec vzorce", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtEnterDate": "Zadejte datum.", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtErrorLoadHistory": "Načítání historie se nezdařilo", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtEvenPage": "Sudá stránka", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtFiguredArrows": "Orientační šipky", @@ -697,6 +720,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.txtTableInd": "Pořadové číslo tabulky nemůže být nula", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtTableOfContents": "Obsah", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtTooLarge": "Číslo je příliš velké na to, aby ho bylo možné formátovat", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtTypeEquation": "Rovnici zadejte sem", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtUndefBookmark": "Nedefinovaná záložka", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtXAxis": "Osa X", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtYAxis": "Osa Y", @@ -1153,8 +1177,8 @@ "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textLang": "Jazyk", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textLock": "Zamykání", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textName": "Nadpis", - "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textNewColor": "Přidat novou uživatelsky určenou barvu", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textNone": "Žádné", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textPlaceholder": "Výplň", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textShowAs": "Zobrazit jako", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textSystemColor": "Systémové", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textTag": "Značka", @@ -1169,6 +1193,12 @@ "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textSeparator": "Oddělovač sloupců", "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textSpacing": "Vzdálenost mezi sloupci", "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textTitle": "Sloupce", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.confirmDefault": "Nastavit výchozí formát pro {0}: „{1}“", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textDefault": "Nastavit jako výchozí", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textFormat": "Formáty", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textLang": "Jazyk", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textUpdate": "Aktualizovat automaticky", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.txtTitle": "Datum a čas", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.aboveText": "Nad", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.addCommentText": "Přidat komentář", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.advancedFrameText": "Pokročilá nastavení rámečku", @@ -1408,7 +1438,6 @@ "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textLeft": "Vlevo", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textMargin": "Okraj", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textMove": "Přemístit s textem", - "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "Přidat novou uživatelsky určenou barvu", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textNone": "Žádný", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textPage": "Stránka", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textParagraph": "Odstavec", @@ -1604,6 +1633,7 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Úhel", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textArrows": "Šipky", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAspectRatio": "Zachovat poměr stran", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAutofit": "Automatické přizpůsobení", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBeginSize": "Velikost začátku", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBeginStyle": "Styl začátku", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBelow": "pod", @@ -1649,6 +1679,7 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textShape": "Nastavení tvaru", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textSize": "Velikost", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textSquare": "Čtverec", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTextBox": "Textové pole", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTitle": "Obrázek – pokročilá nastavení", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTitleChart": "Graf – pokročilá nastavení", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTitleShape": "Tvar – pokročilá nastavení", @@ -1701,7 +1732,6 @@ "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textCenter": "Na střed", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textLeft": "Vlevo", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textLevel": "Úroveň", - "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textNewColor": "Přidat novou uživatelsky určenou barvu", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textPreview": "Náhled", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textRight": "Vpravo", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtAlign": "Zarovnání", @@ -1826,7 +1856,6 @@ "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textAuto": "Násobky", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textBackColor": "Barva pozadí", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textExact": "Přesně", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textNewColor": "Přidat novou uživatelsky určenou barvu", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.txtAutoText": "Automaticky", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.noTabs": "Specifikované tabulátory se objeví v tomto poli", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strAllCaps": "Všechno velkými", @@ -1876,7 +1905,6 @@ "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textLeader": "Vodítko", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textLeft": "Vlevo", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textLevel": "Úroveň", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "Přidat novou uživatelsky určenou barvu", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textNone": "Žádné", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textNoneSpecial": "(žádné)", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textPosition": "Pozice", @@ -1937,7 +1965,6 @@ "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textHintFlipV": "Převrátit svisle", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textImageTexture": "Obrázek nebo textura", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textLinear": "Lineární", - "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textNewColor": "Přidat novou uživatelsky určenou barvu", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textNoFill": "Bez výplně", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textPatternFill": "Vzor", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textRadial": "Kruhový", @@ -2019,6 +2046,7 @@ "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.txtClassic": "Klasické", "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.txtCurrent": "Stávající", "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.txtModern": "Moderní", + "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.txtOnline": "Online", "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.txtSimple": "Jednoduché", "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.txtStandard": "Standardní", "DE.Views.TableSettings.deleteColumnText": "Smazat sloupec", @@ -2052,7 +2080,6 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettings.textHeader": "Záhlaví", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textHeight": "Výška", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textLast": "Poslední", - "DE.Views.TableSettings.textNewColor": "Přidat novou uživatelsky určenou barvu", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textRows": "Řádky", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textSelectBorders": "Vyberte ohraničení, na které chcete použít styl vybraný výše.", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textTemplate": "Vybrat ze šablony", @@ -2109,7 +2136,6 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMargins": "Okraje buňky", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMeasure": "Měřit v", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMove": "Přemístit objekt s textem", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "Přidat novou uživatelsky určenou barvu", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOnlyCells": "Pouze pro vybrané buňky", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOptions": "Možnosti", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOverlap": "Povolit překrývání", @@ -2162,7 +2188,6 @@ "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textGradient": "Přechod", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textGradientFill": "Výplň přechodem", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textLinear": "Lineární", - "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textNewColor": "Přidat novou uživatelsky určenou barvu", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textNoFill": "Bez výplně", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textRadial": "Kruhový", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textSelectTexture": "Vybrat", @@ -2174,6 +2199,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnBlankPage": "Prázdná stránka", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnColumns": "Sloupce", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnComment": "Komentář", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnDateTime": "Datum a čas", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsChart": "Graf", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsControls": "Ovládací prvky obsahu", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsDropcap": "Iniciála", @@ -2290,6 +2316,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipControls": "Vložit ovládací prvek obsahu", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipCopy": "Kopírovat", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipCopyStyle": "Zkopírovat styl", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipDateTime": "Vložit aktuální datum a čas", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipDecFont": "Zmenšit velikost písma", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipDecPrLeft": "Zmenšit odsazení", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipDropCap": "Vložit iniciálu", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/da.json b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/da.json index c28328acf..653024d37 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/da.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/da.json @@ -10,6 +10,7 @@ "Common.Controllers.ExternalMergeEditor.warningText": "Objektet er slået fra da det bliver redigeret af en anden bruger. ", "Common.Controllers.ExternalMergeEditor.warningTitle": "Advarsel", "Common.Controllers.History.notcriticalErrorTitle": "Advarsel", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textAcceptBeforeCompare": "For at sammenligne dokumenter vil alle noterede ændringer i dokumenterne opfattes som godkendt. Ønsker du at fortsætte?", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textAtLeast": "Mindst", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textAuto": "automatisk", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textBaseline": "basislinier", @@ -49,6 +50,9 @@ "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textParaDeleted": "Afsnit slettet", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textParaFormatted": "Afsnit formatteret", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textParaInserted": "Afsnit sat ind", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textParaMoveFromDown": "Flyttet ned:", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textParaMoveFromUp": "Flyttet op:", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textParaMoveTo": "Flyttet:", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textPosition": "Position", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textRight": "Tilpas til højre", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textShape": "Form", @@ -60,9 +64,57 @@ "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textStrikeout": "Strikethrough", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textSubScript": "Subscript", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textSuperScript": "Superscript", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textTableChanged": "Tabel indstillinger ændret", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textTableRowsAdd": "Tabel-rækker tilføjet", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textTableRowsDel": "Tabel rækker slettet", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textTabs": "Skift faner", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textUnderline": "Understreg", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textUrl": "Indsæt et dokument-URL", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textWidow": "Enke kontrol", + "Common.define.chartData.textArea": "Område", + "Common.define.chartData.textBar": "Linje", + "Common.define.chartData.textCharts": "Diagrammer", + "Common.define.chartData.textColumn": "Kolonne", + "Common.define.chartData.textLine": "Linie", + "Common.define.chartData.textPie": "Cirkeldiagram", + "Common.define.chartData.textPoint": "XY (Spredning)", + "Common.define.chartData.textStock": "Aktie", + "Common.define.chartData.textSurface": "Overflade", + "Common.Translation.warnFileLocked": "Dokumentet er i brug af en anden applikation. Du kan fortsætte med at redigere og gemme som en kopi.", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textApril": "April", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textAugust": "August", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textDecember": "December", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textFebruary": "Februar", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textJanuary": "Januar", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textJuly": "Juli", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textJune": "Juni", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textMarch": "Marts", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textMay": "Maj", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textMonths": "måneder", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textNovember": "November", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textOctober": "Oktober", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textSeptember": "September", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortApril": "Apr", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortAugust": "Aug", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortDecember": "Dec", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortFebruary": "Feb", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortFriday": "Fre", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortJanuary": "Jan", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortJuly": "Jul", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortJune": "Jun", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortMarch": "Mar", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortMay": "Maj", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortMonday": "Ma", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortNovember": "Nov", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortOctober": "Okt", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortSaturday": "Lø", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortSeptember": "Sep", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortSunday": "Sø", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortThursday": "To", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortTuesday": "Ti", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortWednesday": "Ons", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textYears": "år", + "Common.UI.ColorButton.textNewColor": "Tilføj ny brugerdefineret farve", "Common.UI.ComboBorderSize.txtNoBorders": "Ingen rammer", "Common.UI.ComboBorderSizeEditable.txtNoBorders": "Ingen rammer", "Common.UI.ComboDataView.emptyComboText": "Ingen stilarter", @@ -153,6 +205,7 @@ "Common.Views.Header.tipRedo": "Fortryd", "Common.Views.Header.tipSave": "Gem", "Common.Views.Header.tipUndo": "Fortryd", + "Common.Views.Header.tipUndock": "Lås af i seperat vindue", "Common.Views.Header.tipViewSettings": "Vis indstillinger", "Common.Views.Header.tipViewUsers": "Vis brugere og håndter dokumentrettighederne ", "Common.Views.Header.txtAccessRights": "Skift adgangsrettigheder", @@ -208,12 +261,19 @@ "Common.Views.RenameDialog.txtInvalidName": "Filnavnet må ikke indeholde nogle af følgende tegn:", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.hintNext": "Til næste ændring", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.hintPrev": "Til forrige ændring", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.mniFromFile": "Dokument fra fil", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.mniFromStorage": "Dokument fra opbevaring", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.mniFromUrl": "Dokument fra URL", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.mniSettings": "Sammenligningsindstillinger", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.strFast": "Hurtig", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.strFastDesc": "Realtids co-redigering. Alle ændringer bliver gemt automatisk", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.strStrict": "Striks", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.strStrictDesc": "Brug \"gem\" knappen for at synkronisere ændringer du og andre laver. ", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipAcceptCurrent": "Acceptér nuværende ændring", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipCoAuthMode": "Aktiver samredigeringstilstanden", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipCommentRem": "Fjern kommentarer", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipCommentRemCurrent": "Fjern nuværende kommentarer", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipCompare": "Sammenlign nuværende dokument med et andet", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipHistory": "Vis versionshistorik", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipRejectCurrent": "Afvis nuværende ændring", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipReview": "Spor ændringer", @@ -228,6 +288,12 @@ "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtChat": "Chat", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtClose": "Luk", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCoAuthMode": "Fællesredigeringstilstand", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCommentRemAll": "Fjern alle kommentarer", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCommentRemCurrent": "Fjern nuværende kommentarer", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCommentRemMy": "Fjern mine kommentarer", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCommentRemMyCurrent": "Fjern mine nuværende kommentarer", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCommentRemove": "Fjern", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCompare": "Sammenlign", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtDocLang": "Sprog", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtFinal": "Alle ændringer accepteret (Forhåndsvisning)", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtFinalCap": "Endelig", @@ -260,9 +326,16 @@ "Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textCancel": "Annuller", "Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textClose": "Luk", "Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textEdit": "OK", + "Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textFollowMove": "Følg bevægelse", + "Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textMention": "+mention vil give adgang til dokumentet og sende en e-mail", + "Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textMentionNotify": "+mention vil notificere brugeren via e-mail", "Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textOpenAgain": "Åben igen", "Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textReply": "Svar", "Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textResolve": "Løs", + "Common.Views.SaveAsDlg.textLoading": "Indlæser", + "Common.Views.SaveAsDlg.textTitle": "Mappe til at gemme", + "Common.Views.SelectFileDlg.textLoading": "Indlæser", + "Common.Views.SelectFileDlg.textTitle": "Vælg datakilde", "Common.Views.SignDialog.textBold": "Fed", "Common.Views.SignDialog.textCertificate": "Certifikat", "Common.Views.SignDialog.textChange": "Ændre", @@ -286,6 +359,33 @@ "Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textShowDate": "Vis tegndato i signaturlinjen", "Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textTitle": "underskrifts opsætning", "Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.txtEmpty": "Dette felt skal udfyldes", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textCharacter": "Karakter", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textCode": "Unicode HEX-værdi", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textCopyright": "Ophavsret Symbol", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textDCQuote": "Dobbeltlukket citat", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textDOQuote": "Dobbeltåbent citat", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textEllipsis": "Vandret ellipse", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textEmDash": "Em bindestreg", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textEmSpace": "Em mellemrum", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textEnDash": "En bindestreg", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textEnSpace": "En mellemrum", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textFont": "Skrifttype", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textNBHyphen": "Ubrudt bindestreg", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textNBSpace": "Ingen-brud mellemrum", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textPilcrow": "Afsnitstegn", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textQEmSpace": "1/4 Em mellemrum", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textRange": "Rækkevidde", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textRecent": "Senest anvendte symboler", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textRegistered": "Registreret tegn", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSCQuote": "Enkelt lukket citat", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSection": "Sektion tegn", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textShortcut": "Genvejstast", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSHyphen": "Blød bindestreg", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSOQuote": "Enkelt åben kvote", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSpecial": "Specielle tegn", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSymbols": "Symboler", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textTitle": "Symbol", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textTradeMark": "Varemærke tegn", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.leavePageText": "Alle ikke gemte ændringer i dette dokument vil blive tabt.
    Tryk \"Afbryd\" og derefter \"gem\" for at gemme dem. Klik \"OK\" for at slette ikke gemte ændringer. ", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.newDocumentTitle": "Unavngivet dokument", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.notcriticalErrorTitle": "Advarsel", @@ -294,6 +394,8 @@ "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.textNoTextFound": "Dataen du har søgt, kunne ikke findes. Venligst ændre dine søgerkriterier.", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.textReplaceSkipped": "Erstatningen er blevet oprettet. {0} gentagelser blev sprunget over.", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.textReplaceSuccess": "Søgningen er blevet gennemført. Forekomster erstattet: {0}", + "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.txtCompatible": "Dokumentet bliver gemt i nyt format. Det vil tillade dig at bruge alle redigeringsfunktioner, men det kan påvirke dokumentlayoutet.
    Brug \"kompatibilitet\" indstillingen fra avancerede indstillinger hvis du ønsker at gøre filer kompatible med ældre MS Word versioner.", + "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.txtUntitled": "Unavngivet", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.warnDownloadAs": "Hvis du fortsætter med at gemme i dette format, vil alle funktioner på nær teksten blive tabt.
    Er du sikker på at du vil fortsætte?", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.warnDownloadAsRTF": "Hvis du fortsætter med at gemme i dette format, kan noget af den nuværende formattering gå tabt.
    Er du sikker på at du vil fortsætte?", "DE.Controllers.Main.applyChangesTextText": "Indlæser ændringerne", @@ -309,12 +411,18 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.errorAccessDeny": "Du forsøger at foretage en handling, som du ikke har rettighederne til.
    venligst kontakt din Document Servar administrator.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorBadImageUrl": "Billede URL er forkert", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorCoAuthoringDisconnect": "Server forbindelse tabt. Dokumentet kan ikke redigeres lige nu.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorCompare": "Sammenlign Dokumenter-funktionen er ikke tilgængelig i co-redigerings tilstand", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorConnectToServer": "Dokumentet kunne ikke gemmes. Check venligst din netværksforbindelse eller kontakt din administrator.
    Når du klikker på 'OK' knappen, vil du blive bedt om at downloade dokumentet.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorDatabaseConnection": "Ekstern fejl.
    Database forbindelses fejl. Kontakt venligst support hvis fejlen bliver ved med at være der. ", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorDataEncrypted": "Krypterede ændringer er blevet modtaget, men de kan ikke dekrypteres. ", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorDataRange": "Forkert datainterval", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorDefaultMessage": "Fejlkode: %1", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorDirectUrl": "Bekræft venligst linket til dokumentet.
    Dette link skal være et direkte link til filen til download.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorEditingDownloadas": "Der opstod en fejl under arbejdet med dokumentet.
    Brug \"download som...\" valgmuligheden for at gemme en sikkerhedsversion til din computers harddisk.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorEditingSaveas": "Der opstod en fejl under arbejdet med dokumentet.
    Brug \"gem som...\" valgmuligheden for at gemme en sikkerhedsversion til din computers harddisk.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorEmailClient": "Ingen e-mail klient fundet.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorFilePassProtect": "Dokumentet er beskyttet af et kodeord og kunne ikke åbnes.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorFileSizeExceed": "Filens størrelse overgår begrænsningen, som er sat for din server.
    Kontakt venligst til dokumentserver administrator for detaljer.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorForceSave": "Der skete en fejl under gemning af filen. Brug venligst 'Download som' for at gemme filen på din computers harddisk eller prøv igen senere.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorKeyEncrypt": "Ukendte nøgle descriptor", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorKeyExpire": "Nøgle beskrivelse udløbet", @@ -329,6 +437,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.errorToken": "Dokumentets sikkerhedstoken er ikke lavet korrekt.
    Kontakt venligst din administrator på Document Server.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorTokenExpire": "Dokumentets sikkerhedstoken er udløbet.
    Kontakt venligst din administrator på Document Server. ", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorUpdateVersion": "Filversionen er blevet ændret. Siden vil blive genindlæst.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorUpdateVersionOnDisconnect": "Internetforbindelsen er blevet genoprettet, og filversionen er blevet ændret.
    Før du kan fortsætte arbejdet, skal du hente filen eller kopiere indholdet for at sikre, at intet vil blive tabt - og derefter genindlæse denne side.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorUserDrop": "Der kan ikke opnås adgang til filen lige nu. ", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorUsersExceed": "Det maksimale antal af brugere tilladt i din aftale er nået. ", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorViewerDisconnect": "Forbindesen er tabt. Du kan stadig se dokumentet,
    men du vil ikke være i stand til at downloade eller printe det indtil forbindelsen er genetableret. ", @@ -366,11 +475,15 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.splitMaxColsErrorText": "Antallet af kolonner skal være mindre end %1.", "DE.Controllers.Main.splitMaxRowsErrorText": "Antallet af rækker skal være mindre end %1.", "DE.Controllers.Main.textAnonymous": "Anonym", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textApplyAll": "Anvend på alle ligninger", "DE.Controllers.Main.textBuyNow": "Besøg hjemmeside", "DE.Controllers.Main.textChangesSaved": "Alle ændringer er blevet gemt", "DE.Controllers.Main.textClose": "Luk", "DE.Controllers.Main.textCloseTip": "Klik for at lukke tippet", "DE.Controllers.Main.textContactUs": "Kontakt salg", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textConvertEquation": "Denne ligning er skabt med en ældre version af programmet, som ikke længere understøttes. Omdannelse af denne ligning til Office Math ML format vil gøre den redigerbar.
    Ønsker du at omdanne denne ligning?", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textCustomLoader": "Bemærk, at du i henhold til licensbetingelserne ikke har ret til at skifte loaderen.
    Kontakt venligt vores salgsafdeling for at få en kvote.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textLearnMore": "Lær mere", "DE.Controllers.Main.textLoadingDocument": "Indlæser dokument", "DE.Controllers.Main.textNoLicenseTitle": "ONLYOFFICE forbindelsesbegrænsning", "DE.Controllers.Main.textPaidFeature": "Betalt funktion", @@ -386,28 +499,212 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.txtBelow": "Under", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtBookmarkError": "Fejl! Bogmærke er ikke defineret", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtButtons": "Knapper", - "DE.Controllers.Main.txtCallouts": "Billedtekster", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtCallouts": "Talebobler", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtCharts": "Diagram", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtChoose": "Vælg en vare.", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtCurrentDocument": "Nuværende dokument", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtDiagramTitle": "Diagram titel", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtEditingMode": "Vælg redigeringstilstand...", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtEndOfFormula": "Uvententet slutning på formular", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtEnterDate": "Indtast en dato", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtErrorLoadHistory": "Fejl ved indlæsningen af historik", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtEvenPage": "Lige side", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtFiguredArrows": "Pile figure", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtFirstPage": "Første side", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtFooter": "Sidefod", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtFormulaNotInTable": "Formularen ikke i tabellen", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtHeader": "Sidehoved", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtHyperlink": "Hyperlink", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtIndTooLarge": "Indeks for stort", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtLines": "Linie", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtMainDocOnly": "Fejl! Kun hoveddokument.", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtMath": "Matematik", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtMissArg": "Manglende argument", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtMissOperator": "Manglende operatør", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtNeedSynchronize": "Du har opdateringer", - "DE.Controllers.Main.txtNoTableOfContents": "Ingen tilføjelser til indholdsfortegnelsen", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtNoTableOfContents": "Der er ingen overskrifter i dokumentet. Anvend en overskriftstil på teksten, så den vises i indholdsfortegnelsen.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtNoText": "Fejl! Ingen tekst af den specificerede type i dokumentet.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtNotInTable": "Er ikke i tabel", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtNotValidBookmark": "Fejl! Ikke en gyldig bogmærke selv-reference", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtOddPage": "Ulige side", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtOnPage": "På siden", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtRectangles": "Rektangel", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtSameAsPrev": "Magen til tidligere", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtSection": "-Sektion", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtSeries": "Serie", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_accentBorderCallout1": "Linje talebobbel 1 (Omrids og Accent Bar)", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_accentBorderCallout2": "Linje talebobbel 2 (Omrids og Accent Bar)", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_accentBorderCallout3": "Linje talebobbel 3 (Omrids og Accent Bar)", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_accentCallout1": "Linje talebobbel 1 (Accent Bar)", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_accentCallout2": "Linje talebobbel 2 (Accent Bar)", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_accentCallout3": "Linje talebobbel 3 (Accent Bar)", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_actionButtonBackPrevious": "Tilbage eller Forudgående knap", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_actionButtonBeginning": "Begyndende knap", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_actionButtonBlank": "Blank knap", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_actionButtonDocument": "Dokument knap", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_actionButtonEnd": "Slut knap", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_actionButtonForwardNext": "Frem eller næste-knap", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_actionButtonHelp": "Hjælp-knap", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_actionButtonHome": "Hjem-knap", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_actionButtonInformation": "Informations-knap", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_actionButtonMovie": "Film-knap", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_actionButtonReturn": "Tilbage-knap", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_actionButtonSound": "Lyd-knap", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_arc": "Bue", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_bentArrow": "Buet pil", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_bentConnector5": "Albue-forbindelse", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_bentConnector5WithArrow": "Albue-pil forbindelse", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_bentConnector5WithTwoArrows": "Albue dobbelt-pil forbindelse", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_bentUpArrow": "Pil buet opad", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_bevel": "Facet", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_blockArc": "Blokeringsbue", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_borderCallout1": "Linje Talebobbel 1", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_borderCallout2": "Linje Talebobbel 2", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_borderCallout3": "Linje Talebobbel 3", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_bracePair": "Dobbelt bøjle", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_callout1": "Linje Talebobbel 1 (Ingen grænse)", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_callout2": "Linje Talebobbel 2 (Ingen Grænse", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_callout3": "Linje Talebobbel 3 (Ingen grænse)", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_can": "Kan", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_chevron": "Sparre", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_chord": "Ledning", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_circularArrow": "Cirkulær pil", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_cloud": "Sky", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_cloudCallout": "Talebobbel (Sky)", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_corner": "Hjørne", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_cube": "Terning", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_curvedConnector3": "Buet konnektor", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_curvedConnector3WithArrow": "Buet pil med konnektor", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_curvedConnector3WithTwoArrows": "Buet dobbelt-pil", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_curvedDownArrow": "Buet nedadgående pil", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_curvedLeftArrow": "Buet pil til venstre", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_curvedRightArrow": "Buet pil til højre", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_curvedUpArrow": "Buet til opad", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_decagon": "Tikant", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_diagStripe": "Diagonal stribe", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_diamond": "Diamant", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_dodecagon": "Tolvkant", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_donut": "Donut", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_doubleWave": "Dobbeltbølge", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_downArrow": "Pil nedad", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_downArrowCallout": "Talebobbel (Pil ned)", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_ellipse": "Ellipse", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_ellipseRibbon": "Buet nedadgående sløjfe", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_ellipseRibbon2": "Buet sløjfe opad", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartAlternateProcess": "Flowdiagram: Alternativ process", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartCollate": "Flowdiagram: Kollationer", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartConnector": "Flowdiagram: Konnektor", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartDecision": "Flowdiagram: Valg", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartDelay": "Flowdiagram: Forsink", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartDisplay": "Flowdiagram: Vis", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartDocument": "Flowdiagram: Dokument", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartExtract": "Flowdiagram: Udtræk", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartInputOutput": "Flowdiagram: Data", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartInternalStorage": "Flowdiagram: Intern opbevaring", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartMagneticDisk": "Flowdiagram: Magnetisk Disk", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartMagneticDrum": "Flowdiagram: Direkte adgang opbevaring", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartMagneticTape": "Flowdiagram: Opbevaring af sekventiel adgang", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartManualInput": "Flowdiagram: Manuelt Input", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartManualOperation": "Flowdiagram: Manuel Operation", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartMerge": "Flowdiagram: Sammenflet", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartMultidocument": "Flowdiagram: Multidokument", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartOffpageConnector": "Flowdiagram: Af-side forbindelse", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartOnlineStorage": "Flowdiagram: Opbevaret Data", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartOr": "Flowdiagram: Eller", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartPredefinedProcess": "Flowdiagram: Forudbestemt Process", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartPreparation": "Flowdiagram: Forberedelse", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartProcess": "Flowdiagram: Process", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartPunchedCard": "Flowdiagram: Kort", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartPunchedTape": "Flowdiagram: Hullet bånd", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartSort": "Flowdiagram: Sorter", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartSummingJunction": "Flowdiagram: Opsummerende knudepunkt", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartTerminator": "Flowdiagram: Terminator", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_foldedCorner": "Foldet Hjørne", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_frame": "Ramme", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_halfFrame": "Halv ramme", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_heart": "Hjerte", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_heptagon": "Syvkant", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_hexagon": "Sekskant", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_homePlate": "Femkant", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_horizontalScroll": "Vandret rul", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_irregularSeal1": "Eksplosion 1", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_irregularSeal2": "Eksplosion 2", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_leftArrow": "Venstre pil", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_leftArrowCallout": "Talebobbel (Pil venstre)", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_leftBrace": "Venstre bøjle", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_leftBracket": "Venstre parantes", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_leftRightArrow": "Venstre højre pil", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_leftRightArrowCallout": "Talebobbel (Pil højre/venstre)", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_leftRightUpArrow": "Venstre-højre-op pil", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_leftUpArrow": "Venstre-op pil", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_lightningBolt": "Lyn", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_line": "Linie", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_lineWithArrow": "Pil", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_lineWithTwoArrows": "Dobbeltpil", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_mathDivide": "Opdeling", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_mathEqual": "Lig med", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_mathMinus": "Minus", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_mathMultiply": "Gange", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_mathNotEqual": "Ikke lig", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_mathPlus": "Plus", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_moon": "Måne", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_noSmoking": "\"Nej\" symbol", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_notchedRightArrow": "Hakket højre-pil", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_octagon": "Oktagon", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_parallelogram": "Parallelogram", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_pentagon": "Femkant", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_pie": "Cirkeldiagram", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_plaque": "Skilt", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_plus": "Plus", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_polyline1": "Skrible", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_polyline2": "Fri form", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_quadArrow": "Firedobbelt pil", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_quadArrowCallout": "Talebobbel (Firedobbelt pil)", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_rect": "Rektangel", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_ribbon": "Sløjfe nedad", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_ribbon2": "Op-sløjfe", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_rightArrow": "Højre pil", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_rightArrowCallout": "Talebobbel (Højre pil)", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_rightBrace": "Højre parantes", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_rightBracket": "Højre parantes", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_round1Rect": "Rund et-hjørnet rektangel", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_round2DiagRect": "Rund diagonal hjørne rektangel", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_round2SameRect": "Rund samme-sidet hjørnerektangel", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_roundRect": "Rektangel med rundt hjørne", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_rtTriangle": "Højre trekant", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_smileyFace": "Smiley", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_snip1Rect": "Klip enkelt hjørne rektangel", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_snip2DiagRect": "Klip diagonal hjørne rektangel", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_snip2SameRect": "Klip samme-side hjørnet rektangel", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_snipRoundRect": "Klip og rundt et-hjørnet rektangel", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_spline": "Kurve", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star10": "10-Point Stjerne", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star12": "12-Points Stjerne", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star16": "16-Points Stjerne", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star24": "24-Points Stjerne", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star32": "32-Points Stjerne", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star4": "4-Points Stjerne", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star5": "5-Points Stjerne", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star6": "6-Points Stjerne", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star7": "7-Points Stjerne", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star8": "8-Points Stjerne", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_stripedRightArrow": "Stribet højre-pil", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_sun": "Sol", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_teardrop": "Dråbe", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_textRect": "Tekstboks", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_trapezoid": "Trapez", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_triangle": "Trekant", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_upArrow": "Op pil", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_upArrowCallout": "Talebobbel (Pil op)", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_upDownArrow": "Op-ned pil", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_uturnArrow": "U-vendings pil", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_verticalScroll": "Lodret rul", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_wave": "Bølge", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_wedgeEllipseCallout": "Oval Talebobbel ", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_wedgeRectCallout": "Rektangulær Talebobbel ", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_wedgeRoundRectCallout": "Afrundet Rektangulær Talebobbel ", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtStarsRibbons": "Stjerner og bånd", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_Caption": "Overskrift", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_footnote_text": "Fodnote tekst", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_Heading_1": "Overskrift 1", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_Heading_2": "Overskrift 2", @@ -425,16 +722,26 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_Quote": "Citat", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_Subtitle": "Undertitel", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_Title": "Titel", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtSyntaxError": "Syntax-fejl", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtTableInd": "Tabel-index kan ikke være 0", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtTableOfContents": "Indholdsfortegnelse", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtTooLarge": "Tallet er for stort til formatering", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtTypeEquation": "Indtast ligning her.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtUndefBookmark": "Udefineret bogmærke", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtXAxis": "X akse", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtYAxis": "Y akse", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtZeroDivide": "Nul division", "DE.Controllers.Main.unknownErrorText": "Ukendt fejl.", "DE.Controllers.Main.unsupportedBrowserErrorText": "Din browser understøttes ikke", + "DE.Controllers.Main.uploadDocExtMessage": "Ukendt dokumentformat.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.uploadDocFileCountMessage": "Ingen dokumenter uploadet.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.uploadDocSizeMessage": "Maksimal dokumentstørrelse overskredet.", "DE.Controllers.Main.uploadImageExtMessage": "Ukendt billedeformat.", "DE.Controllers.Main.uploadImageFileCountMessage": "Ingen billeder uploadet", "DE.Controllers.Main.uploadImageSizeMessage": "Maksimum billedstørrelse begrænsning", "DE.Controllers.Main.uploadImageTextText": "Overføre billede...", "DE.Controllers.Main.uploadImageTitleText": "Overfør billede", + "DE.Controllers.Main.waitText": "Vent venligst...", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnBrowserIE9": "Programmet har dårlig kompatibilitet med Internet Explorer 9. Brug i stedet Internet Explorer 10 eller højere", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnBrowserZoom": "Din browsers nuværende zoom indstilling er ikke understøttet. Venligst genddan til normal forstørrelse ved at trykke Ctrl+0.", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExceeded": "Antallet af samtidige forbindelser til dokument serveren er oversteget det maksimale antal, og dokumentet vil blive åbnet i visningstilstand.
    Kontakt venligst din administrator for mere information. ", @@ -457,6 +764,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.textFontSizeErr": "Den indtastede værdi er ikke korrekt.
    Venligst indtast en numerisk værdi mellem 1 og 100", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.textFraction": "Fraktioner", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.textFunction": "Funktioner", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.textInsert": "indsæt", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.textIntegral": "Integraler", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.textLargeOperator": "Store operatører ", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.textLimitAndLog": "Afgrænsninger og logaritmer", @@ -786,10 +1094,14 @@ "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_zeta": "Zeta", "DE.Controllers.Viewport.textFitPage": "Tilpas til side", "DE.Controllers.Viewport.textFitWidth": "Tilpas til bredde", + "DE.Views.AddNewCaptionLabelDialog.textLabel": "Etiket:", + "DE.Views.AddNewCaptionLabelDialog.textLabelError": "Etiket kan ikke være tom.", "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textAdd": "Tilføj", "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textBookmarkName": "Bogmærke navn", "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textClose": "Luk", + "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textCopy": "Kopier", "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textDelete": "Slet", + "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textGetLink": "Få link", "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textGoto": "Gå til", "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textHidden": "Skjulte bogmærker", "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textLocation": "Lokation", @@ -797,11 +1109,44 @@ "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textSort": "Arrangér efter", "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textTitle": "Bogmærker", "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.txtInvalidName": "Bogmærke navn må kun indeholde bogstaver, tal eller understregninger, og skal begynde med et bogstav", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textAdd": "Tilføj etiket", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textAfter": "efter", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textBefore": "Før", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textCaption": "Overskrift", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textChapter": "Kapitler starter med stil", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textChapterInc": "Inkluder kapitelnummer", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textColon": "Kolon", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textDash": "bindestreg", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textDelete": "Slet etiket", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textEquation": "Formel", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textExamples": "Eksempler: Tabel 2-A, billede 1.IV", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textExclude": "Udeluk etiket fra overskrift", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textFigure": "Figur", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textHyphen": "bindestreg", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textInsert": "indsæt", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textLabel": "Etiket", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textLongDash": "Lang bindestreg", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textNumbering": "Nummerering", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textPeriod": "Periode", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textSeparator": "Brug adskiller", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textTable": "Tabel", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textTitle": "Indsæt billedtekst", + "DE.Views.CellsAddDialog.textCol": "Kolonner", + "DE.Views.CellsAddDialog.textDown": "Under markøren", + "DE.Views.CellsAddDialog.textLeft": "Til venstre", + "DE.Views.CellsAddDialog.textRight": "Til højre", + "DE.Views.CellsAddDialog.textRow": "Rækker", + "DE.Views.CellsAddDialog.textTitle": "Indsæt flere", + "DE.Views.CellsAddDialog.textUp": "Over markøren", + "DE.Views.CellsRemoveDialog.textCol": "Slet hele kolonnen", + "DE.Views.CellsRemoveDialog.textLeft": "Ryk celler til venstre", + "DE.Views.CellsRemoveDialog.textRow": "Slet hele rækken", + "DE.Views.CellsRemoveDialog.textTitle": "Slet celler", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textAdvanced": "Vis avancerede indstillinger", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textChartType": "Skift diagramtype", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textEditData": "Rediger data", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textHeight": "Højde", - "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textOriginalSize": "Standard størrelse", + "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textOriginalSize": "Faktisk størrelse", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textSize": "Størrelse", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textStyle": "Stilart", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textUndock": "Fjern fra panel", @@ -815,23 +1160,51 @@ "DE.Views.ChartSettings.txtTight": "Stram", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.txtTitle": "Diagram", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.txtTopAndBottom": "Top og bund", + "DE.Views.CompareSettingsDialog.textChar": "Tegn-niveau", + "DE.Views.CompareSettingsDialog.textShow": "Vis ændringer på", + "DE.Views.CompareSettingsDialog.textTitle": "Sammenligningsindstillinger", + "DE.Views.CompareSettingsDialog.textWord": "Ord niveau", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.strGeneral": "Generel", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textAdd": "Tilføj", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textAppearance": "Udseende", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textApplyAll": "Anvend på alle", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textBox": "Afgrænsningsboks", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textChange": "Rediger", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textCheckbox": "Afkrydsningsfelt", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textChecked": "Flueben", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textColor": "Farve", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textCombobox": "Kombinationskasse", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textDate": "Datoformat", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textDelete": "Slet", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textDisplayName": "Visningsnavn", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textDown": "Ned", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textDropDown": "Rulleliste", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textFormat": "Vis datoen således", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textLang": "Sprog", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textLock": "Låsning", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textName": "Titel", - "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textNewColor": "Tilføj ny brugerdefineret farve", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textNone": "Ingen", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textPlaceholder": "Pladsholder", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textShowAs": "Vis som", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textSystemColor": "System", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textTag": "Mærke", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textTitle": "Indholdskontrol indstillinger", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textUnchecked": "Ikke-afkrydset", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textUp": "Op", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textValue": "Værdi", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.tipChange": "Skift symbol", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.txtLockDelete": "Indholdskontrol kan ikke slettes", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.txtLockEdit": "Indhold kan ikke redigeres", "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textColumns": "Antal kolonner", "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textSeparator": "Kolonnedeler", "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textSpacing": "Afstand mellem kolonner", "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textTitle": "Kolonner", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.confirmDefault": "Indstil standardformat for {0}: \"{1}\"", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textDefault": "Indstil som standard", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textFormat": "Formater", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textLang": "Sprog", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textUpdate": "Opdater automatisk", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.txtTitle": "Dato og tid", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.aboveText": "Over", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.addCommentText": "Tilføj kommentar", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.advancedFrameText": "Ramme avancerede indstillinger", @@ -878,7 +1251,7 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.mergeCellsText": "Fusioner celler", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.moreText": "Flere varianter...", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.noSpellVariantsText": "Ingen varianter", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.originalSizeText": "Standard størrelse", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.originalSizeText": "Faktisk størrelse", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.paragraphText": "Afsnit", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.removeHyperlinkText": "Slet Hyperlink", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.rightText": "Højre", @@ -905,14 +1278,21 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textArrangeBackward": "Ryk tilbage", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textArrangeForward": "Ryk frem", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textArrangeFront": "Før til forgrunden", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textCells": "Celler", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textContentControls": "Indholdskontrol", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textContinueNumbering": "Fortsæt nummering", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textCopy": "Kopier", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textCrop": "Beskær", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textCropFill": "Fyld", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textCropFit": "Tilpas", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textCut": "Klip", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textDistributeCols": "Fordel kolonner", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textDistributeRows": "Fordel rækker", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textEditControls": "Indholdskontrol indstillinger", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textEditWrapBoundary": "Rediger ombrydningsgrænse", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFlipH": "Vend vandret", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFlipV": "Vend lodret", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFollow": "Følg bevægelse", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFromFile": "Fra fil", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFromUrl": "Fra URL", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textJoinList": "Sammensæt med tidligere liste", @@ -925,9 +1305,13 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textRemove": "Fjern", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textRemoveControl": "Fjern indholdskontrol", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textReplace": "Erstat billede", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textRotate": "Roter", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textRotate270": "Roter 90° mod uret", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textRotate90": "Roter 90° med uret", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textSeparateList": "Separat liste", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textSettings": "Indstillinger", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textShapeAlignBottom": "Tilpas knap", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textSeveral": "Flere rækker/kolonner", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textShapeAlignBottom": "Tilpas bund", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textShapeAlignCenter": "Tilpas til midten", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textShapeAlignLeft": "Tilpas til venstre", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textShapeAlignMiddle": "Tilpas til midten", @@ -943,6 +1327,7 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textUpdateTOC": "Genindlæs indholdsfortegnelse", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textWrap": "Ombrydningsstil", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.tipIsLocked": "Elementet bliver redigeret af en anden bruger.", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.toDictionaryText": "Tilføj til Ordbog", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtAddBottom": "Tilføj nederste ramme ", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtAddFractionBar": "Tilføj fraktionsbar", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtAddHor": "Tilføj horisontal linie", @@ -952,7 +1337,7 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtAddRight": "Tilføj højre ramme", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtAddTop": "Tilføj øverste ramme", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtAddVer": "Tilføj lodret linie", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtAlignToChar": "Tilpas til karakterer ", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtAlignToChar": "Tilpas til tegn", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtBehind": "Bagved", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtBorderProps": "Ramme indstillinger", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtBottom": "Bund", @@ -965,6 +1350,9 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtDeleteEq": "Slet ligning", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtDeleteGroupChar": "Slet tegn", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtDeleteRadical": "slet radikal", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtDistribHor": "Fordel vandret", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtDistribVert": "Fordel lodret", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtEmpty": "(Tom)", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtFractionLinear": "Skift til linær fraktion", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtFractionSkewed": "Skift til skæv fraktion", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtFractionStacked": "Skift til stablet fraktion", @@ -991,6 +1379,7 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtInsertArgAfter": "Indsæt argument efter", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtInsertArgBefore": "Indsæt argument før", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtInsertBreak": "Indsæt manuelt skift", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtInsertCaption": "Indsæt billedtekst", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtInsertEqAfter": "Indsæt ligning efter", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtInsertEqBefore": "Indsæt ligning før", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtKeepTextOnly": "Behold kun teksten", @@ -1003,6 +1392,7 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtOverwriteCells": "Overskriv celler", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtPasteSourceFormat": "Behold oprindelig formattering", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtPressLink": "Tryk CTRL og klik på linket", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtPrintSelection": "Printer-valg", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtRemFractionBar": "Fjern fraktionsbar", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtRemLimit": "Slet begrænsning", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtRemoveAccentChar": "Fjern accent tegn", @@ -1054,7 +1444,6 @@ "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textLeft": "Venstre", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textMargin": "margen", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textMove": "Flyt med tekst", - "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "Tilføj ny brugerdefineret farve", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textNone": "Ingen", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textPage": "Side", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textParagraph": "Afsnit", @@ -1070,6 +1459,10 @@ "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textWidth": "Bredde", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.tipFontName": "Skrifttype", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.txtNoBorders": "Ingen rammer", + "DE.Views.EditListItemDialog.textDisplayName": "Visningsnavn", + "DE.Views.EditListItemDialog.textNameError": "Visningsnavn må ikke være tom", + "DE.Views.EditListItemDialog.textValue": "Værdi", + "DE.Views.EditListItemDialog.textValueError": "En genstand med samme værdi findes allerede.", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnBackCaption": "Gå til dokumenter", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnCloseMenuCaption": "Luk menu", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnCreateNewCaption": "Opret ny", @@ -1085,6 +1478,7 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnRightsCaption": "Adgangsrettigheder...", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnSaveAsCaption": "Gem som", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnSaveCaption": "Gem", + "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnSaveCopyAsCaption": "Gem kopi som...", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnSettingsCaption": "Avancerede indstillinger...", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnToEditCaption": "Rediger dokument", "DE.Views.FileMenu.textDownload": "Hent", @@ -1093,17 +1487,28 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.CreateNew.newDescriptionText": "Lav et nyt blankt tekst dokument, som di vil være i stand til at kunne formattere efter det er oprettet under redigeringen. Eller vælg en af skabelonerne til at oprette et dokument af en bestemt type som allerede har en bestemt formattering tilføjet. ", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.CreateNew.newDocumentText": "Nyt tekst dokument", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.CreateNew.noTemplatesText": "Der er ikke nogle skabeloner", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.okButtonText": "Anvend", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtAddAuthor": "Tilføj forfatter", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtAddText": "Tilføj tekst", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtAppName": "Applikation", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtAuthor": "Forfatter", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtBtnAccessRights": "Skift adgangsrettigheder", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtComment": "Kommentar", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtCreated": "Oprettet", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtLoading": "Indlæser...", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtModifyBy": "Sidst redigeret af", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtModifyDate": "Sidst redigeret", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtOwner": "Ejer", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtPages": "Sider", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtParagraphs": "Afsnit", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtPlacement": "Lokation", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtRights": "Personer der har rettigheder", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtSpaces": "Symboler med mellemrum", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtStatistics": "Statistikker", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtSubject": "Emne", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtSymbols": "Symboler", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtTitle": "Dokument titel", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtUploaded": "Overført", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtWords": "Ord", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentRights.txtBtnAccessRights": "Skift adgangsrettigheder", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentRights.txtRights": "Personer der har rettigheder", @@ -1143,10 +1548,13 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textAlignGuides": "Tilpasningsguide", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textAutoRecover": "Automatisk gendannelse", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textAutoSave": "Gem automatisk", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textCompatible": "Kompabilitet", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textDisabled": "deaktiveret", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textForceSave": "Gem til server", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textMinute": "Hvert minut", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textOldVersions": "Lav filerne kompatible med ældre MS Word-versionen, når de gemmes som DOCX", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtAll": "Se alle", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtCacheMode": "Standard cache tilstand", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtCm": "Centimeter", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtFitPage": "Tilpas til side", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtFitWidth": "Tilpas til bredde", @@ -1193,14 +1601,24 @@ "DE.Views.HyperlinkSettingsDialog.txtHeadings": "Overskrifter", "DE.Views.HyperlinkSettingsDialog.txtNotUrl": "Feltet skal være en URL i \"http://www.example.com\" formatet", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textAdvanced": "Vis avancerede indstillinger", + "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textCrop": "Beskær", + "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textCropFill": "Fyld", + "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textCropFit": "Tilpas", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textEdit": "Rediger", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textEditObject": "Rediger objekt", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFitMargins": "Tilpas til margen", + "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFlip": "Vend", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFromFile": "Fra fil", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFromUrl": "Fra URL", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textHeight": "Højde", + "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textHint270": "Roter 90° mod uret", + "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textHint90": "Roter 90° med uret", + "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textHintFlipH": "Vend vandret", + "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textHintFlipV": "Vend lodret", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textInsert": "Erstat billede", - "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textOriginalSize": "Standard størrelse", + "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textOriginalSize": "Faktisk størrelse", + "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textRotate90": "Roter 90°", + "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textRotation": "Rotation", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textSize": "Størrelse", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textWidth": "Bredde", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textWrap": "Ombrydningsstil", @@ -1218,8 +1636,10 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Beskrivelse", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Den alternative tekstbaserede repræsentation af det visuelle objekt, som vil blive læst til folk med syns- eller læringsudfordringer for at hjælpe dem til at forstå den information der kan findes i et billede, autoshape, diagram eller tabel", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Titel", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Vinkel", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textArrows": "Pile", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAspectRatio": "Lås billedformat", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAutofit": "AutoTilpas", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBeginSize": "Begynd størrelse", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBeginStyle": "Begynd stil", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBelow": "Under", @@ -1235,8 +1655,10 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textEndSize": "Afslutning størrelse", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textEndStyle": "Afslutning formattering", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textFlat": "Flad", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textFlipped": "Vendt", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textHeight": "Højde", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textHorizontal": "Vandret", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textHorizontally": "Vandret", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textJoinType": "Join Type", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textKeepRatio": "Konstante proportioner", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textLeft": "Venstre", @@ -1247,7 +1669,7 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textMiter": "Miter", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textMove": "Flyt okbjekt med tekst", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textOptions": "Indstillinger", - "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textOriginalSize": "Standard størrelse", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textOriginalSize": "Faktisk størrelse", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textOverlap": "Tillad overlapning", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textPage": "Side", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textParagraph": "Afsnit", @@ -1255,19 +1677,23 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textPositionPc": "Relativ position", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textRelative": "Relativt til", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textRelativeWH": "Relativt", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textResizeFit": "Ændr størrelse på form for at tilpasse tekst", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textRight": "Højre", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textRightMargin": "Højre margen", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textRightOf": "Til højre for", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textRotation": "Rotation", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textRound": "Rund", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textShape": "Form indstillinger", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textSize": "Størrelse", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textSquare": "Firkant", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTextBox": "Tekstboks", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTitle": "Billede - avancerede indstillinger", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTitleChart": "Diagram - avancerede indstillinger", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTitleShape": "Form - avancerede indstillinger", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTop": "Top", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTopMargin": "Top margen", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textVertical": "Lodret", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textVertically": "Lodret", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textWeightArrows": "Vægte og pile", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textWidth": "Bredde", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textWrap": "Ombrydningsstil", @@ -1289,6 +1715,7 @@ "DE.Views.LeftMenu.txtDeveloper": "Udviklingstilstand", "DE.Views.LeftMenu.txtTrial": "Prøvetilstand", "DE.Views.Links.capBtnBookmarks": "Bogmærke", + "DE.Views.Links.capBtnCaption": "Overskrift", "DE.Views.Links.capBtnContentsUpdate": "Genindlæs", "DE.Views.Links.capBtnInsContents": "Indholdsfortegnelse", "DE.Views.Links.capBtnInsFootnote": "Fodnote", @@ -1303,10 +1730,28 @@ "DE.Views.Links.textUpdateAll": "Genindlæs hele tabellen", "DE.Views.Links.textUpdatePages": "Genindlæs kun sidetal", "DE.Views.Links.tipBookmarks": "Lav et bogmærke", + "DE.Views.Links.tipCaption": "Indsæt billedtekst", "DE.Views.Links.tipContents": "Indsæt indholdsfortegnelse", "DE.Views.Links.tipContentsUpdate": "Genindlæs indholdsfortegnelse", "DE.Views.Links.tipInsertHyperlink": "Tilføj Hyperlink", "DE.Views.Links.tipNotes": "Indsæt eller rediger fodnote", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textAuto": "Automatisk", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textCenter": "Centrum", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textLeft": "Venstre", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textLevel": "Niveau", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textPreview": "Forhåndvisning", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textRight": "Højre", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtAlign": "Tilpasning", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtBullet": "Kugle", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtColor": "Farve", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtFont": "Skrifttype og symbol", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtLikeText": "Som en tekst", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtNewBullet": "Nyt punkt", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtNone": "ingen", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtSize": "Størrelse", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtSymbol": "Symbol", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtTitle": "Liste-indstillinger", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtType": "Type", "DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.filePlaceholder": "PDF", "DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.okButtonText": "Send", "DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.subjectPlaceholder": "Tema", @@ -1356,7 +1801,7 @@ "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.warnProcessMailMerge": "Begyndelsesfletning fejlet", "DE.Views.Navigation.txtCollapse": "Sammenklap alt", "DE.Views.Navigation.txtDemote": "Degrader", - "DE.Views.Navigation.txtEmpty": "Dokumentet indeholder ingen overskrifter", + "DE.Views.Navigation.txtEmpty": "Der er ingen overskrifter i dokumentet.
    Anvend en overskriftstil på teksten, så den vises i indholdsfortegnelsen.", "DE.Views.Navigation.txtEmptyItem": "Tom overskrift", "DE.Views.Navigation.txtExpand": "Expander alle", "DE.Views.Navigation.txtExpandToLevel": "Udvid til niveu", @@ -1385,7 +1830,18 @@ "DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textTitle": "Noteindstillinger", "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.notcriticalErrorTitle": "Advarsel", "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textBottom": "Bund", + "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textGutter": "Rende", + "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textGutterPosition": "Rende position", + "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textInside": "Indeni", + "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textLandscape": "Landskab", "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textLeft": "Venstre", + "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textMirrorMargins": "Spejlmargener", + "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textMultiplePages": "Flere sider", + "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textNormal": "Normal", + "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textOrientation": "Orientering", + "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textOutside": "Udenfor", + "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textPortrait": "Portræt", + "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textPreview": "Forhåndvisning", "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textRight": "Højre", "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textTitle": "Margener", "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textTop": "Top", @@ -1407,39 +1863,55 @@ "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textAuto": "Flere", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textBackColor": "Baggrundsfarve", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textExact": "Præcis", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textNewColor": "Tilføj ny brugerdefineret farve", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.txtAutoText": "Automatisk", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.noTabs": "De specificerende faner vil blive vist i dette felt. ", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strAllCaps": "All caps", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strBorders": "Rammer og fyld", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strBreakBefore": "Sideskift før", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strDoubleStrike": "Dobbelt gennemstregning", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strIndent": "Led", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strIndentsLeftText": "Venstre", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strIndentsLineSpacing": "Linje afstand", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strIndentsOutlinelevel": "Omrids niveau", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strIndentsRightText": "Højre", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strIndentsSpacingAfter": "efter", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strIndentsSpacingBefore": "Før", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strIndentsSpecial": "Speciel", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strKeepLines": "Hold linierne sammen", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strKeepNext": "Behold med næste", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strMargins": "Fyld", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strOrphan": "Horeunge kontrol", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strParagraphFont": "Skrifttype", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strParagraphIndents": "Indrykninger og placeringer", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strParagraphLine": "Linje & side mellemrum", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strParagraphPosition": "Placering", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strSmallCaps": "Small caps", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strSomeParagraphSpace": "Tilføj ikke intervaller imellem afsnit af samme type", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strSpacing": "Afstand", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strStrike": "Strikethrough", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strSubscript": "Subscript", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strSuperscript": "Superscript", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strTabs": "Faner", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textAlign": "Tilpasning", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textAtLeast": "Mindst", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textAuto": "Flere", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textBackColor": "Baggrundsfarve", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textBodyText": "Basal Tekst", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textBorderColor": "Rammefarve", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textBorderDesc": "Klik på diagrammet eller brug knapperne til at vælge rammer og anvend den valgte formatering på dem", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textBorderWidth": "Rammestørrelse", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textBottom": "Bund", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textCentered": "Centreret", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textCharacterSpacing": "Karakter afstand", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textDefault": "Standard fane", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textEffects": "Effekter", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textExact": "Præcis", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textFirstLine": "Første linie", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textHanging": "Hængende", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textJustified": "berettiget", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textLeader": "Leder", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textLeft": "Venstre", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "Tilføj ny brugerdefineret farve", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textLevel": "Niveau", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textNone": "Ingen", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textNoneSpecial": "(ingen)", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textPosition": "Position", @@ -1462,6 +1934,7 @@ "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.tipOuter": "Vælg kun ydre rammer", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.tipRight": "Vælg kun højre ramme", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.tipTop": "Vælg kun øverste ramme", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.txtAutoText": "automatisk", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.txtNoBorders": "Ingen rammer", "DE.Views.RightMenu.txtChartSettings": "Diagram indstillinger", "DE.Views.RightMenu.txtHeaderFooterSettings": "Sidehoved- og sidefodsinstillinger", @@ -1478,6 +1951,7 @@ "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strFill": "Fyld", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strForeground": "Forgrundsfarve", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strPattern": "Mønster", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strShadow": "Vis skygge", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strSize": "Størrelse", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strStroke": "Strøg", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strTransparency": "Gennemsigtighed", @@ -1487,16 +1961,22 @@ "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textColor": "Farvefyld", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textDirection": "Retning", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textEmptyPattern": "Intet mynster", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textFlip": "Vend", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textFromFile": "Fra fil", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textFromUrl": "Fra URL", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textGradient": "Gradient", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textGradientFill": "Gradient udfyldning", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textHint270": "Roter 90° mod uret", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textHint90": "Roter 90° med uret", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textHintFlipH": "Vend vandret", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textHintFlipV": "Vend lodret", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textImageTexture": "Billede eller struktur", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textLinear": "Linær", - "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textNewColor": "Tilføj ny brugerdefineret farve", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textNoFill": "Intet fyld", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textPatternFill": "Mønster", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textRadial": "Radial", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textRotate90": "Roter 90°", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textRotation": "Rotation", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textSelectTexture": "Vælg", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textStretch": "Stræk", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textStyle": "Stilart", @@ -1551,6 +2031,12 @@ "DE.Views.StyleTitleDialog.textTitle": "Titel", "DE.Views.StyleTitleDialog.txtEmpty": "Dette felt er nødvendigt", "DE.Views.StyleTitleDialog.txtNotEmpty": "Felt må ikke være tomt", + "DE.Views.StyleTitleDialog.txtSameAs": "Samme som nyskabt tema", + "DE.Views.TableFormulaDialog.textBookmark": "Indsæt bogmærke", + "DE.Views.TableFormulaDialog.textFormat": "Tal format", + "DE.Views.TableFormulaDialog.textFormula": "Formular", + "DE.Views.TableFormulaDialog.textInsertFunction": "Indsæt funktion", + "DE.Views.TableFormulaDialog.textTitle": "Formular indstillinger", "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.strAlign": "Højre juster sidetal", "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.strLinks": "Formatter indholdsfortegnelse", "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.strShowPages": "Vis sidetal", @@ -1567,6 +2053,7 @@ "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.txtClassic": "Klassisk", "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.txtCurrent": "Nuværende", "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.txtModern": "Moderne", + "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.txtOnline": "Online", "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.txtSimple": "Simpel", "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.txtStandard": "Standard", "DE.Views.TableSettings.deleteColumnText": "Slet kolonne", @@ -1584,6 +2071,7 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettings.splitCellsText": "Split celle...", "DE.Views.TableSettings.splitCellTitleText": "Split celle", "DE.Views.TableSettings.strRepeatRow": "Gentag som række i sidehovedet øverst på hver side", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.textAddFormula": "Tilføj formel", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textAdvanced": "Vis avancerede indstillinger", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textBackColor": "Baggrundsfarve", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textBanded": "Sammensluttet", @@ -1599,7 +2087,6 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettings.textHeader": "Sidehoved", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textHeight": "Højde", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textLast": "sidste", - "DE.Views.TableSettings.textNewColor": "Tilføj ny brugerdefineret farve", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textRows": "Rækker", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textSelectBorders": "Vælg rammer som du vil ændre til stilarten valgt ovenover", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textTemplate": "Vælg fra skabelon", @@ -1616,6 +2103,14 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettings.tipRight": "Vælg kun højre ramme", "DE.Views.TableSettings.tipTop": "Vælg kun ydre øverste ramme", "DE.Views.TableSettings.txtNoBorders": "Ingen rammer", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_Accent": "Accent", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_Colorful": "Farverig", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_Dark": "Mørk", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_GridTable": "Gitter tabel", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_Light": "Lys", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_ListTable": "Liste tabel", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_PlainTable": "Almindelig tabel", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_TableGrid": "Tabel-gitter", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlign": "Tilpasning", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlignment": "Tilpasning", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAllowSpacing": "Afstand mellem celler", @@ -1648,7 +2143,6 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMargins": "Cellemargener", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMeasure": "Mål i", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMove": "Flyt okbjekt med tekst", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "Tilføj ny brugerdefineret farve", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOnlyCells": "Kun for valgte celler", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOptions": "Indstillinger", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOverlap": "Tillad overlapning", @@ -1701,7 +2195,6 @@ "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textGradient": "Gradient", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textGradientFill": "Gradient udfyldning", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textLinear": "Linær", - "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textNewColor": "Tilføj ny brugerdefineret farve", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textNoFill": "Intet fyld", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textRadial": "Radial", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textSelectTexture": "Vælg", @@ -1709,8 +2202,11 @@ "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textTemplate": "Skabelon", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textTransform": "Transformer", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.txtNoBorders": "Ingen linie", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnAddComment": "Tilføj kommentar", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnBlankPage": "Blank side", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnColumns": "Kolonner", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnComment": "Kommenter", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnDateTime": "Dato og tid", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsChart": "Diagram", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsControls": "Indholdsindstillinger", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsDropcap": "Drop cap", @@ -1719,38 +2215,48 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsImage": "Billede", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsPagebreak": "Brud", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsShape": "Form", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsSymbol": "Symbol", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsTable": "Tabel", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsTextart": "Tekst art", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsTextbox": "Tekstboks", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnMargins": "Margener", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnPageOrient": "Orientering", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnPageSize": "Størrelse", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnWatermark": "Vandmærke", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capImgAlign": "Tilpas", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capImgBackward": "Send tilbage", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capImgForward": "Ryk frem", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capImgGroup": "Gruppe", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capImgWrapping": "Ombrydning", "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniCustomTable": "Indsæt brugerdefineret tabel", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniDrawTable": "Tegn tabel", "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniEditControls": "Kontrolindstillinger", "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniEditDropCap": "Drop Cap indstillinger", "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniEditFooter": "Rediger sidefod", "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniEditHeader": "Rediger overskrift", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniEraseTable": "Slet tabel", "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniHiddenBorders": "Skjulte tabelrammer", "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniHiddenChars": "Ikkeprintende tegn", "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniHighlightControls": "Fremhæv indstillinger", "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniImageFromFile": "Billede fra fil", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniImageFromStorage": "Billede fra opbevaring", "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniImageFromUrl": "Billede fra URL", "DE.Views.Toolbar.strMenuNoFill": "Intet fyld", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textAutoColor": "Automatisk", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textBold": "Fed", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textBottom": "Nederst:", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textCheckboxControl": "Afkrydsningsfelt", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textColumnsCustom": "Tilpassede kolonner", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textColumnsLeft": "Venstre", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textColumnsOne": "En", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textColumnsRight": "Højre", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textColumnsThree": "Tre", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textColumnsTwo": "To", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textComboboxControl": "Kombinationskasse", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textContPage": "kontinuerlig side", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textDateControl": "Dato", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textDropdownControl": "Rulleliste", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textEditWatermark": "Brugerdefineret vandmærke", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textEvenPage": "Lige side", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textInMargin": "I margenen", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textInsColumnBreak": "Indsæt kolonne skift", @@ -1762,6 +2268,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.textItalic": "Kursiv", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textLandscape": "Landskab", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textLeft": "Venstre: ", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textListSettings": "Liste-indstillinger", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textMarginsLast": "Sidste brugerdefinerede", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textMarginsModerate": "Moderat", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textMarginsNarrow": "Smal", @@ -1775,9 +2282,11 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.textOddPage": "Ulige side", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textPageMarginsCustom": "Tilpassede margener", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textPageSizeCustom": "Tilpasset side størrelse", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textPictureControl": "Billede", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textPlainControl": "Indsæt enkelt tekstindholdskontrol", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textPortrait": "Potræt", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textRemoveControl": "Fjern indholdskontrol", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textRemWatermark": "Fjern vandmærke", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textRichControl": "Indsæt rigtekstindholdskontrol", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textRight": "Højre:", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textStrikeout": "Strikethrough", @@ -1806,6 +2315,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipAlignLeft": "Tilpas til venstre", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipAlignRight": "Tilpas til højre", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipBack": "Tilbage", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipBlankPage": "Indsæt tom side", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipChangeChart": "Skift diagramtype", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipClearStyle": "Ryd formatering", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipColorSchemas": "Skift farveskema", @@ -1813,6 +2323,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipControls": "Indsæt indholdskontrol", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipCopy": "Kopier", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipCopyStyle": "Kopier formatering", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipDateTime": "Indsæt nuværende dato og tid", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipDecFont": "Formindsk skriftstørrelsen", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipDecPrLeft": "Formindsk indrykning", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipDropCap": "Indsæt Drop cap", @@ -1821,7 +2332,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipFontName": "Skrifttype", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipFontSize": "Skriftstørrelse", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipHighlightColor": "Fremhæv farve", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipImgAlign": "Juster objekter", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipImgAlign": "Tilpas genstande", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipImgGroup": "Saml objekter", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipImgWrapping": "Ombryd tekst", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipIncFont": "Forøg skriftstørrelse", @@ -1831,6 +2342,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertImage": "Indsæt billede", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertNum": "Indsæt sidetal", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Indsæt automatisk form", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSymbol": "Indsæt symbol", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertTable": "Indsæt tabel", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertText": "Indsæt tekst", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertTextArt": "Indsæt Text art", @@ -1855,6 +2367,12 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipShowHiddenChars": "Ikkeprintende tegn", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipSynchronize": "Dokumentet er blevet ændret af en anden bruger. Venligst tryk for at gemme dine ændringer og genindlæs opdateringerne. ", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipUndo": "Fortryd", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipWatermark": "Rediger vandmærke", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtDistribHor": "Fordel vandret", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtDistribVert": "Fordel lodret", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtMarginAlign": "Tilpas til margen", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtObjectsAlign": "Tilpas valgte genstande", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtPageAlign": "Tilpas til side", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme1": "Kontor", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme10": "median", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme11": "Metro", @@ -1875,5 +2393,28 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme6": "sammenfald", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme7": "Egenkapital", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme8": "Flow", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme9": "Støberi" + "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme9": "Støberi", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textAuto": "automatisk", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textBold": "Fed", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textColor": "Tekstfarve", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textDiagonal": "Diagonal", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textFont": "Skrifttype", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textFromFile": "Fra fil", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textFromUrl": "Fra URL", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textHor": "Vandret", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textImageW": "Billede-vandmærke", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textItalic": "Kursiv", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textLanguage": "Sprog", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textLayout": "Layout", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textNewColor": "Tilføj ny brugerdefineret farve", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textNone": "ingen", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textScale": "Størrelse", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textStrikeout": "Overstreg", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textText": "Tekst", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textTextW": "Tekst vandmærke", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textTitle": "Vandmærke-indstillinger", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textTransparency": "Halvgennemsigtig", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textUnderline": "Understreg", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.tipFontName": "Skrifttypenavn", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.tipFontSize": "Skriftstørrelse" } \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/de.json b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/de.json index 663012a0e..ea1bd926c 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/de.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/de.json @@ -113,6 +113,7 @@ "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortTuesday": "Di", "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortWednesday": "Mi", "Common.UI.Calendar.textYears": "Jahre", + "Common.UI.ColorButton.textNewColor": "Benutzerdefinierte Farbe", "Common.UI.ComboBorderSize.txtNoBorders": "Keine Rahmen", "Common.UI.ComboBorderSizeEditable.txtNoBorders": "Keine Rahmen", "Common.UI.ComboDataView.emptyComboText": "Keine Formate", @@ -232,7 +233,7 @@ "Common.Views.OpenDialog.txtPassword": "Kennwort", "Common.Views.OpenDialog.txtPreview": "Vorschau", "Common.Views.OpenDialog.txtProtected": "Sobald Sie das Passwort eingegeben und die Datei geöffnet haben, wird das aktuelle Passwort für die Datei zurückgesetzt.", - "Common.Views.OpenDialog.txtTitle": "%1-Optionen wählen", + "Common.Views.OpenDialog.txtTitle": "Wähle %1 Optionen", "Common.Views.OpenDialog.txtTitleProtected": "Geschützte Datei", "Common.Views.PasswordDialog.txtDescription": "Legen Sie ein Passwort fest, um dieses Dokument zu schützen", "Common.Views.PasswordDialog.txtIncorrectPwd": "Bestätigungseingabe ist nicht identisch", @@ -537,11 +538,11 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_callout2": "Legende mit Linie 2 (ohne Rahmen)", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_callout3": "Legende mit Linie 3 (ohne Rahmen)", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_can": "Zylinder", - "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_chevron": "Chevron", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_chevron": "Winkel", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_chord": "Akkord", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_circularArrow": "Gebogener Pfeil", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_cloud": "Cloud", - "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_cloudCallout": "Wolkenförmige Legende", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_cloudCallout": "Cloud Legende", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_corner": "Ecke", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_cube": "Cube", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_curvedConnector3": "Gekrümmte Verbindung", @@ -714,8 +715,8 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.waitText": "Bitte warten...", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnBrowserIE9": "Die Applkation hat geringte Fähigkeiten in IE9. Nutzen Sie IE10 oder höher.", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnBrowserZoom": "Die aktuelle Zoom-Einstellung Ihres Webbrowsers wird nicht völlig unterstützt. Bitte stellen Sie die Standardeinstellung mithilfe der Tastenkombination Strg+0 wieder her.", - "DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExp": "Ihre Lizenz ist abgelaufen.
    Bitte aktualisieren Sie Ihre Lizenz und laden Sie die Seite neu.", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExceeded": "Sie haben das Limit für gleichzeitige Verbindungen in %1-Editoren erreicht. Dieses Dokument wird nur zum Anzeigen geöffnet.
    Bitte wenden Sie sich an Ihren Administrator, um weitere Informationen zu erhalten.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExp": "Ihre Lizenz ist abgelaufen.
    Bitte aktualisieren Sie Ihre Lizenz und laden Sie die Seite neu.", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseUsersExceeded": "Sie haben das Benutzerlimit für %1-Editoren erreicht. Bitte wenden Sie sich an Ihren Administrator, um weitere Informationen zu erhalten.", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnNoLicense": "Sie haben das Limit für gleichzeitige Verbindungen in %1-Editoren erreicht. Dieses Dokument wird nur zum Anzeigen geöffnet.
    Bitte kontaktieren Sie unser Verkaufsteam, um persönliche Upgrade-Bedingungen zu erhalten.", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnNoLicenseUsers": "Sie haben das Benutzerlimit für %1-Editoren erreicht. Bitte kontaktieren Sie unser Verkaufsteam, um persönliche Upgrade-Bedingungen zu erhalten.", @@ -1153,7 +1154,6 @@ "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textLang": "Sprache", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textLock": "Sperrung", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textName": "Titel", - "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textNewColor": "Benutzerdefinierte Farbe", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textNone": "Kein", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textShowAs": "Anzeigen als", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textSystemColor": "System", @@ -1408,7 +1408,6 @@ "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textLeft": "Links", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textMargin": "Rand", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textMove": "Mit Text verschieben", - "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "Benutzerdefinierte Farbe", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textNone": "Kein", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textPage": "Seite", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textParagraph": "Absatz", @@ -1492,7 +1491,7 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strAlignGuides": "Ausrichtungslinien einschalten", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strAutoRecover": "AutoWiederherstellen einschalten ", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strAutosave": "AutoSpeichern einschalten", - "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strCoAuthMode": " Modus \"Gemeinsame Bearbeitung\"", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strCoAuthMode": "Modus \"Gemeinsame Bearbeitung\"", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strCoAuthModeDescFast": "Andere Benutzer werden Ihre Änderungen gleichzeitig sehen", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strCoAuthModeDescStrict": "Sie müssen die Änderungen annehmen, bevor Sie diese sehen können", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strFast": "Schnell", @@ -1611,7 +1610,7 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBottom": "Unten", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBottomMargin": "Unterer Rand", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBtnWrap": "Textumbruch", - "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textCapType": "Abschlusstyp", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textCapType": "Zierbuchstabe", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textCenter": "Zentriert", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textCharacter": "Zeichen", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textColumn": "Spalte", @@ -1701,7 +1700,6 @@ "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textCenter": "Zentriert", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textLeft": "Links", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textLevel": "Ebene", - "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textNewColor": "Benutzerdefinierte Farbe", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textPreview": "Vorschau", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textRight": "Rechts", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtAlign": "Ausrichtung", @@ -1826,7 +1824,6 @@ "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textAuto": "Mehrfach", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textBackColor": "Hintergrundfarbe", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textExact": "Genau", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textNewColor": "Benutzerdefinierte Farbe", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.txtAutoText": "Auto", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.noTabs": "Die festgelegten Registerkarten werden in diesem Feld erscheinen", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strAllCaps": "Alle Großbuchstaben", @@ -1876,7 +1873,6 @@ "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textLeader": "Füllzeichen", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textLeft": "Links", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textLevel": "Ebene", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "Benutzerdefinierte Farbe", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textNone": "Kein", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textNoneSpecial": "(kein)", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textPosition": "Position", @@ -1937,7 +1933,6 @@ "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textHintFlipV": "Vertikal kippen", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textImageTexture": "Bild oder Textur", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textLinear": "Linear", - "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textNewColor": "Benutzerdefinierte Farbe", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textNoFill": "Keine Füllung", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textPatternFill": "Muster", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textRadial": "Radial", @@ -1951,7 +1946,7 @@ "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textWrap": "Textumbruch", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.txtBehind": "Hinten", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.txtBrownPaper": "Kraftpapier", - "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.txtCanvas": "Canvas", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.txtCanvas": "Leinwand", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.txtCarton": "Pappe", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.txtDarkFabric": "Dunkler Stoff", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.txtGrain": "Korn", @@ -2053,7 +2048,6 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettings.textHeader": "Kopfzeile", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textHeight": "Höhe", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textLast": "Letzte", - "DE.Views.TableSettings.textNewColor": "Benutzerdefinierte Farbe", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textRows": "Zeilen", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textSelectBorders": "Wählen Sie Rahmenlinien, auf die ein anderer Stil angewandt wird", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textTemplate": "Vorlage auswählen", @@ -2110,7 +2104,6 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMargins": "Zellenränder", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMeasure": "Maßeinheit in", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMove": "Objekt mit Text verschieben", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "Benutzerdefinierte Farbe", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOnlyCells": "Nur für gewählte Zellen", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOptions": "Optionen", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOverlap": "Überlappung zulassen", @@ -2163,7 +2156,6 @@ "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textGradient": "Farbverlauf", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textGradientFill": "Füllung mit Farbverlauf", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textLinear": "Linear", - "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textNewColor": "Benutzerdefinierte Farbe", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textNoFill": "Keine Füllung", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textRadial": "Radial", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textSelectTexture": "Auswählen", @@ -2271,7 +2263,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabHome": "Startseite", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabInsert": "Einfügen", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabLayout": "Layout", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabLinks": "Quellenangaben", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabLinks": "Verweise", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabProtect": "Schutz", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabReview": "Review", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTitleError": "Fehler", @@ -2356,7 +2348,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme21": "Telesto", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme3": "Apex", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme4": "Aspekt ", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme5": "Cronus", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme5": "bürgerlich", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme6": "Deimos", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme7": "Dactylos", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme8": "Bewegungsart", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/en.json b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/en.json index 8ac8e5c82..e7af61c77 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/en.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/en.json @@ -65,8 +65,8 @@ "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textSubScript": "Subscript", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textSuperScript": "Superscript", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textTableChanged": "Table Settings Changed", - "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textTableRowsAdd": "Table Rows Added", - "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textTableRowsDel": "Table Rows Deleted", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textTableRowsAdd": "Table Rows Added", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textTableRowsDel": "Table Rows Deleted", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textTabs": "Change tabs", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textUnderline": "Underline", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textUrl": "Paste a document URL", @@ -80,6 +80,7 @@ "Common.define.chartData.textPoint": "XY (Scatter)", "Common.define.chartData.textStock": "Stock", "Common.define.chartData.textSurface": "Surface", + "Common.Translation.warnFileLocked": "The file is being edited in another app. You can continue editing and save it as a copy.", "Common.UI.Calendar.textApril": "April", "Common.UI.Calendar.textAugust": "August", "Common.UI.Calendar.textDecember": "December", @@ -113,6 +114,7 @@ "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortTuesday": "Tu", "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortWednesday": "We", "Common.UI.Calendar.textYears": "Years", + "Common.UI.ColorButton.textNewColor": "Add New Custom Color", "Common.UI.ComboBorderSize.txtNoBorders": "No borders", "Common.UI.ComboBorderSizeEditable.txtNoBorders": "No borders", "Common.UI.ComboDataView.emptyComboText": "No styles", @@ -133,7 +135,7 @@ "Common.UI.SearchDialog.txtBtnReplace": "Replace", "Common.UI.SearchDialog.txtBtnReplaceAll": "Replace All", "Common.UI.SynchronizeTip.textDontShow": "Don't show this message again", - "Common.UI.SynchronizeTip.textSynchronize": "The document has been changed by another user.
    Please click to save your changes and reload the updates.", + "Common.UI.SynchronizeTip.textSynchronize": "The document has been changed by another user.
    Please click to save your changes and reload the updates.", "Common.UI.ThemeColorPalette.textStandartColors": "Standard Colors", "Common.UI.ThemeColorPalette.textThemeColors": "Theme Colors", "Common.UI.Window.cancelButtonText": "Cancel", @@ -155,6 +157,10 @@ "Common.Views.About.txtPoweredBy": "Powered by", "Common.Views.About.txtTel": "tel.: ", "Common.Views.About.txtVersion": "Version ", + "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textBy": "By:", + "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textMathCorrect": "Math AutoCorrect", + "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textReplace": "Replace:", + "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textTitle": "AutoCorrect", "Common.Views.Chat.textSend": "Send", "Common.Views.Comments.textAdd": "Add", "Common.Views.Comments.textAddComment": "Add Comment", @@ -357,11 +363,33 @@ "Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textShowDate": "Show sign date in signature line", "Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textTitle": "Signature Setup", "Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.txtEmpty": "This field is required", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textCharacter": "Character", "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textCode": "Unicode HEX value", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textCopyright": "Copyright Sign", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textDCQuote": "Closing Double Quote", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textDOQuote": "Opening Double Quote", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textEllipsis": "Horizontal Ellipsis", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textEmDash": "Em Dash", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textEmSpace": "Em Space", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textEnDash": "En Dash", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textEnSpace": "En Space", "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textFont": "Font", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textNBHyphen": "Non-breaking Hyphen", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textNBSpace": "No-break Space", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textPilcrow": "Pilcrow Sign", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textQEmSpace": "1/4 Em Space", "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textRange": "Range", "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textRecent": "Recently used symbols", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textRegistered": "Registered Sign", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSCQuote": "Closing Single Quote", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSection": "Section Sign", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textShortcut": "Shortcut Key", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSHyphen": "Soft Hyphen", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSOQuote": "Opening Single Quote", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSpecial": "Special characters", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSymbols": "Symbols", "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textTitle": "Symbol", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textTradeMark": "Trademark Symbol ", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.leavePageText": "All unsaved changes in this document will be lost.
    Click \"Cancel\" then \"Save\" to save them. Click \"OK\" to discard all the unsaved changes.", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.newDocumentTitle": "Unnamed document", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.notcriticalErrorTitle": "Warning", @@ -387,6 +415,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.errorAccessDeny": "You are trying to perform an action you do not have rights for.
    Please contact your Document Server administrator.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorBadImageUrl": "Image URL is incorrect", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorCoAuthoringDisconnect": "Server connection lost. The document cannot be edited right now.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorCompare": "The Compare Documents feature is not available while co-editing. ", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorConnectToServer": "The document could not be saved. Please check connection settings or contact your administrator.
    When you click the 'OK' button, you will be prompted to download the document.

    Find more information about connecting Document Server here", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorDatabaseConnection": "External error.
    Database connection error. Please contact support in case the error persists.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorDataEncrypted": "Encrypted changes have been received, they cannot be deciphered.", @@ -403,6 +432,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.errorKeyExpire": "Key descriptor expired", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorMailMergeLoadFile": "Loading the document failed. Please select a different file.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorMailMergeSaveFile": "Merge failed.", + "del_DE.Controllers.Main.errorPasteSlicerError": "Table slicers cannot be copied from one workbook to another.
    Try again by selecting the entire table and the slicers.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorProcessSaveResult": "Saving failed.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorServerVersion": "The editor version has been updated. The page will be reloaded to apply the changes.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorSessionAbsolute": "The document editing session has expired. Please reload the page.", @@ -450,15 +480,20 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.splitMaxColsErrorText": "The number of columns must be less than %1.", "DE.Controllers.Main.splitMaxRowsErrorText": "The number of rows must be less than %1.", "DE.Controllers.Main.textAnonymous": "Anonymous", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textApplyAll": "Apply to all equations", "DE.Controllers.Main.textBuyNow": "Visit website", "DE.Controllers.Main.textChangesSaved": "All changes saved", "DE.Controllers.Main.textClose": "Close", "DE.Controllers.Main.textCloseTip": "Click to close the tip", "DE.Controllers.Main.textContactUs": "Contact sales", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textConvertEquation": "This equation was created with an old version of the equation editor which is no longer supported. To edit it, convert the equation to the Office Math ML format.
    Convert now?", "DE.Controllers.Main.textCustomLoader": "Please note that according to the terms of the license you are not entitled to change the loader.
    Please contact our Sales Department to get a quote.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textHasMacros": "The file contains automatic macros.
    Do you want to run macros?", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textLearnMore": "Learn More", "DE.Controllers.Main.textLoadingDocument": "Loading document", "DE.Controllers.Main.textNoLicenseTitle": "License limit reached", "DE.Controllers.Main.textPaidFeature": "Paid feature", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textRemember": "Remember my choice", "DE.Controllers.Main.textShape": "Shape", "DE.Controllers.Main.textStrict": "Strict mode", "DE.Controllers.Main.textTryUndoRedo": "The Undo/Redo functions are disabled for the Fast co-editing mode.
    Click the 'Strict mode' button to switch to the Strict co-editing mode to edit the file without other users interference and send your changes only after you save them. You can switch between the co-editing modes using the editor Advanced settings.", @@ -478,6 +513,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.txtDiagramTitle": "Chart Title", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtEditingMode": "Set editing mode...", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtEndOfFormula": "Unexpected End of Formula", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtEnterDate": "Enter a date.", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtErrorLoadHistory": "History loading failed", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtEvenPage": "Even Page", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtFiguredArrows": "Figured Arrows", @@ -697,6 +733,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.txtTableInd": "Table Index Cannot be Zero", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtTableOfContents": "Table of Contents", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtTooLarge": "Number Too Large To Format", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtTypeEquation": "Type an equation here.", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtUndefBookmark": "Undefined Bookmark", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtXAxis": "X Axis", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtYAxis": "Y Axis", @@ -714,11 +751,11 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.waitText": "Please, wait...", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnBrowserIE9": "The application has low capabilities on IE9. Use IE10 or higher", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnBrowserZoom": "Your browser current zoom setting is not fully supported. Please reset to the default zoom by pressing Ctrl+0.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExceeded": "You've reached the limit for simultaneous connections to %1 editors. This document will be opened for viewing only.
    Contact your administrator to learn more.", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExp": "Your license has expired.
    Please update your license and refresh the page.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseUsersExceeded": "You've reached the user limit for %1 editors. Contact your administrator to learn more.", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnNoLicense": "You've reached the limit for simultaneous connections to %1 editors. This document will be opened for viewing only.
    Contact %1 sales team for personal upgrade terms.", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnNoLicenseUsers": "You've reached the user limit for %1 editors. Contact %1 sales team for personal upgrade terms.", - "DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExceeded": "You've reached the limit for simultaneous connections to %1 editors. This document will be opened for viewing only.
    Contact your administrator to learn more.", - "DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseUsersExceeded": "You've reached the user limit for %1 editors. Contact your administrator to learn more.", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnProcessRightsChange": "You have been denied the right to edit the file.", "DE.Controllers.Navigation.txtBeginning": "Beginning of document", "DE.Controllers.Navigation.txtGotoBeginning": "Go to the beginning of the document", @@ -1153,8 +1190,8 @@ "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textLang": "Language", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textLock": "Locking", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textName": "Title", - "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textNewColor": "Add New Custom Color", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textNone": "None", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textPlaceholder": "Placeholder", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textShowAs": "Show as", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textSystemColor": "System", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textTag": "Tag", @@ -1169,6 +1206,12 @@ "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textSeparator": "Column divider", "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textSpacing": "Spacing between columns", "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textTitle": "Columns", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.confirmDefault": "Set default format for {0}: \"{1}\"", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textDefault": "Set as default", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textFormat": "Formats", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textLang": "Language", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textUpdate": "Update automatically", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.txtTitle": "Date & Time", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.aboveText": "Above", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.addCommentText": "Add Comment", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.advancedFrameText": "Frame Advanced Settings", @@ -1258,6 +1301,7 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFlipV": "Flip Vertically", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFollow": "Follow move", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFromFile": "From File", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFromStorage": "From Storage", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFromUrl": "From URL", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textJoinList": "Join to previous list", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textNest": "Nest table", @@ -1408,7 +1452,6 @@ "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textLeft": "Left", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textMargin": "Margin", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textMove": "Move with text", - "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "Add New Custom Color", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textNone": "None", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textPage": "Page", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textParagraph": "Paragraph", @@ -1485,8 +1528,8 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtEditWarning": "Editing will remove the signatures from the document.
    Are you sure you want to continue?", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtEncrypted": "This document has been protected with password", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtRequestedSignatures": "This document needs to be signed.", - "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtSigned": "Valid signatures has been added to the document. The document is protected from editing.", - "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtSignedInvalid": "Some of the digital signatures in document are invalid or could not be verified. The document is protected from editing.", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtSigned": "Valid signatures have been added to the document. The document is protected from editing.", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtSignedInvalid": "Some of the digital signatures in the document are invalid or could not be verified. The document is protected from editing.", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtView": "View signatures", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.okButtonText": "Apply", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strAlignGuides": "Turn on alignment guides", @@ -1500,6 +1543,9 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strForcesave": "Always save to server (otherwise save to server on document close)", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strInputMode": "Turn on hieroglyphs", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strLiveComment": "Turn on display of the comments", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strMacrosSettings": "Macros Settings", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strPaste": "Cut, copy and paste", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strPasteButton": "Show the Paste Options button when the content is pasted", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strResolvedComment": "Turn on display of the resolved comments", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strShowChanges": "Real-time Collaboration Changes", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strSpellCheckMode": "Turn on spell checking option", @@ -1519,6 +1565,7 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textMinute": "Every Minute", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textOldVersions": "Make the files compatible with older MS Word versions when saved as DOCX", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtAll": "View All", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtAutoCorrect": "AutoCorrect options...", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtCacheMode": "Default cache mode", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtCm": "Centimeter", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtFitPage": "Fit to Page", @@ -1530,8 +1577,15 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtMac": "as OS X", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtNative": "Native", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtNone": "View None", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtProofing": "Proofing", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtPt": "Point", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtRunMacros": "Enable All", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtRunMacrosDesc": "Enable all macros without a notification", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtSpellCheck": "Spell Checking", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtStopMacros": "Disable All", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtStopMacrosDesc": "Disable all macros without a notification", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtWarnMacros": "Show Notification", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtWarnMacrosDesc": "Disable all macros with a notification", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtWin": "as Windows", "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textBottomCenter": "Bottom center", "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textBottomLeft": "Bottom left", @@ -1574,6 +1628,7 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFitMargins": "Fit to Margin", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFlip": "Flip", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFromFile": "From File", + "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFromStorage": "From Storage", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFromUrl": "From URL", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textHeight": "Height", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textHint270": "Rotate 90° Counterclockwise", @@ -1599,11 +1654,12 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAlignment": "Alignment", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Alternative Text", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Description", - "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "The alternative text-based representation of the visual object information, which will be read to the people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information there is in the image, autoshape, chart or table.", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "The alternative text-based representation of the visual object information, which will be read to the people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information there is in the image, autoshape, chart, or table.", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Title", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Angle", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textArrows": "Arrows", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAspectRatio": "Lock aspect ratio", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAutofit": "AutoFit", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBeginSize": "Begin Size", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBeginStyle": "Begin Style", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBelow": "below", @@ -1641,6 +1697,7 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textPositionPc": "Relative position", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textRelative": "relative to", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textRelativeWH": "Relative", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textResizeFit": "Resize shape to fit text", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textRight": "Right", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textRightMargin": "Right Margin", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textRightOf": "to the right of", @@ -1649,6 +1706,7 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textShape": "Shape Settings", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textSize": "Size", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textSquare": "Square", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTextBox": "Text Box", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTitle": "Image - Advanced Settings", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTitleChart": "Chart - Advanced Settings", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTitleShape": "Shape - Advanced Settings", @@ -1701,7 +1759,6 @@ "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textCenter": "Center", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textLeft": "Left", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textLevel": "Level", - "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textNewColor": "Add New Custom Color", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textPreview": "Preview", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textRight": "Right", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtAlign": "Alignment", @@ -1826,7 +1883,6 @@ "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textAuto": "Multiple", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textBackColor": "Background color", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textExact": "Exactly", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textNewColor": "Add New Custom Color", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.txtAutoText": "Auto", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.noTabs": "The specified tabs will appear in this field", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strAllCaps": "All caps", @@ -1876,7 +1932,6 @@ "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textLeader": "Leader", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textLeft": "Left", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textLevel": "Level", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "Add New Custom Color", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textNone": "None", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textNoneSpecial": "(none)", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textPosition": "Position", @@ -1907,7 +1962,7 @@ "DE.Views.RightMenu.txtMailMergeSettings": "Mail merge settings", "DE.Views.RightMenu.txtParagraphSettings": "Paragraph settings", "DE.Views.RightMenu.txtShapeSettings": "Shape settings", - "DE.Views.RightMenu.txtSignatureSettings": "Signature Settings", + "DE.Views.RightMenu.txtSignatureSettings": "Signature settings", "DE.Views.RightMenu.txtTableSettings": "Table settings", "DE.Views.RightMenu.txtTextArtSettings": "Text Art settings", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strBackground": "Background color", @@ -1928,6 +1983,7 @@ "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textEmptyPattern": "No Pattern", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textFlip": "Flip", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textFromFile": "From File", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textFromStorage": "From Storage", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textFromUrl": "From URL", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textGradient": "Gradient", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textGradientFill": "Gradient Fill", @@ -1937,12 +1993,12 @@ "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textHintFlipV": "Flip Vertically", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textImageTexture": "Picture or Texture", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textLinear": "Linear", - "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textNewColor": "Add New Custom Color", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textNoFill": "No Fill", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textPatternFill": "Pattern", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textRadial": "Radial", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textRotate90": "Rotate 90°", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textRotation": "Rotation", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textSelectImage": "Select Picture", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textSelectTexture": "Select", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textStretch": "Stretch", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textStyle": "Style", @@ -1981,8 +2037,8 @@ "DE.Views.SignatureSettings.txtContinueEditing": "Edit anyway", "DE.Views.SignatureSettings.txtEditWarning": "Editing will remove the signatures from the document.
    Are you sure you want to continue?", "DE.Views.SignatureSettings.txtRequestedSignatures": "This document needs to be signed.", - "DE.Views.SignatureSettings.txtSigned": "Valid signatures has been added to the document. The document is protected from editing.", - "DE.Views.SignatureSettings.txtSignedInvalid": "Some of the digital signatures in document are invalid or could not be verified. The document is protected from editing.", + "DE.Views.SignatureSettings.txtSigned": "Valid signatures have been added to the document. The document is protected from editing.", + "DE.Views.SignatureSettings.txtSignedInvalid": "Some of the digital signatures in the document are invalid or could not be verified. The document is protected from editing.", "DE.Views.Statusbar.goToPageText": "Go to Page", "DE.Views.Statusbar.pageIndexText": "Page {0} of {1}", "DE.Views.Statusbar.tipFitPage": "Fit to page", @@ -2043,7 +2099,7 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettings.textBanded": "Banded", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textBorderColor": "Color", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textBorders": "Borders Style", - "DE.Views.TableSettings.textCellSize": "Rows & columns size", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.textCellSize": "Rows & Columns Size", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textColumns": "Columns", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textDistributeCols": "Distribute columns", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textDistributeRows": "Distribute rows", @@ -2053,7 +2109,6 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettings.textHeader": "Header", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textHeight": "Height", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textLast": "Last", - "DE.Views.TableSettings.textNewColor": "Add New Custom Color", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textRows": "Rows", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textSelectBorders": "Select borders you want to change applying style chosen above", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textTemplate": "Select From Template", @@ -2083,7 +2138,7 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAllowSpacing": "Spacing between cells", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Alternative Text", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Description", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "The alternative text-based representation of the visual object information, which will be read to the people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information there is in the image, autoshape, chart or table.", + "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "The alternative text-based representation of the visual object information, which will be read to the people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information there is in the image, autoshape, chart, or table.", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Title", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAnchorText": "Text", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAutofit": "Automatically resize to fit contents", @@ -2110,7 +2165,6 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMargins": "Cell Margins", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMeasure": "Measure in", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMove": "Move object with text", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "Add New Custom Color", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOnlyCells": "For selected cells only", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOptions": "Options", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOverlap": "Allow overlap", @@ -2163,7 +2217,6 @@ "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textGradient": "Gradient", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textGradientFill": "Gradient Fill", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textLinear": "Linear", - "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textNewColor": "Add New Custom Color", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textNoFill": "No Fill", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textRadial": "Radial", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textSelectTexture": "Select", @@ -2175,6 +2228,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnBlankPage": "Blank Page", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnColumns": "Columns", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnComment": "Comment", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnDateTime": "Date & Time", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsChart": "Chart", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsControls": "Content Controls", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsDropcap": "Drop Cap", @@ -2291,6 +2345,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipControls": "Insert content controls", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipCopy": "Copy", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipCopyStyle": "Copy style", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipDateTime": "Insert current date and time", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipDecFont": "Decrement font size", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipDecPrLeft": "Decrease indent", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipDropCap": "Insert drop cap", @@ -2367,6 +2422,7 @@ "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textDiagonal": "Diagonal", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textFont": "Font", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textFromFile": "From File", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textFromStorage": "From Storage", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textFromUrl": "From URL", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textHor": "Horizontal", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textImageW": "Image watermark", @@ -2376,6 +2432,7 @@ "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textNewColor": "Add New Custom Color", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textNone": "None", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textScale": "Scale", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textSelect": "Select Image", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textStrikeout": "Strikeout", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textText": "Text", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textTextW": "Text watermark", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/es.json b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/es.json index 75e1f4b28..0f724e1e5 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/es.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/es.json @@ -80,6 +80,7 @@ "Common.define.chartData.textPoint": "XY (Dispersión)", "Common.define.chartData.textStock": "De cotizaciones", "Common.define.chartData.textSurface": "Superficie", + "Common.Translation.warnFileLocked": "El archivo está siendo editado en otra aplicación. Puede continuar editándolo y guardarlo como una copia.", "Common.UI.Calendar.textApril": "Abril", "Common.UI.Calendar.textAugust": "Agosto", "Common.UI.Calendar.textDecember": "Diciembre", @@ -113,6 +114,7 @@ "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortTuesday": "ma.", "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortWednesday": "mi.", "Common.UI.Calendar.textYears": "Años", + "Common.UI.ColorButton.textNewColor": "Color personalizado", "Common.UI.ComboBorderSize.txtNoBorders": "Sin bordes", "Common.UI.ComboBorderSizeEditable.txtNoBorders": "Sin bordes", "Common.UI.ComboDataView.emptyComboText": "Sin estilo", @@ -155,6 +157,10 @@ "Common.Views.About.txtPoweredBy": "Desarrollado por", "Common.Views.About.txtTel": "tel.: ", "Common.Views.About.txtVersion": "Versión ", + "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textBy": "Por:", + "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textMathCorrect": "Autocorrección matemática", + "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textReplace": "Reemplazar:", + "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textTitle": "Autocorrección", "Common.Views.Chat.textSend": "Enviar", "Common.Views.Comments.textAdd": "Añadir", "Common.Views.Comments.textAddComment": "Añadir", @@ -357,11 +363,33 @@ "Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textShowDate": "Presentar fecha de la firma", "Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textTitle": "Preparación de la firma", "Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.txtEmpty": "Este campo es obligatorio", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textCharacter": "Carácter", "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textCode": "Valor HEX de Unicode", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textCopyright": "Signo de Copyright", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textDCQuote": "Comillas dobles de cierre", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textDOQuote": "Comillas dobles de apertura", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textEllipsis": "Elipsis horizontal", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textEmDash": "Guión largo", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textEmSpace": "Espacio largo", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textEnDash": "Guión corto", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textEnSpace": "Espacio corto", "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textFont": "Letra ", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textNBHyphen": "Guión sin ruptura", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textNBSpace": "Espacio de no separación", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textPilcrow": "Signo de antígrafo", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textQEmSpace": "1/4 Espacio largo", "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textRange": "Rango", "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textRecent": "Símbolos utilizados recientemente", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textRegistered": "Signo de marca registrada", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSCQuote": "Comillas simples de cierre", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSection": "Signo de sección", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textShortcut": "Tecla de método abreviado", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSHyphen": "Guión virtual", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSOQuote": "Comillas simples de apertura", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSpecial": "Caracteres especiales", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSymbols": "Símbolos", "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textTitle": "Símbolo", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textTradeMark": "Símbolo de marca comercial", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.leavePageText": "Todos los cambios no guardados de este documento se perderán.
    Pulse \"Cancelar\" después \"Guardar\" para guardarlos. Pulse \"OK\" para deshacer todos los cambios no guardados.", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.newDocumentTitle": "Documento sin título", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.notcriticalErrorTitle": "Aviso", @@ -387,6 +415,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.errorAccessDeny": "Usted no tiene permisos para realizar la acción que está intentando hacer.
    Por favor, contacte con el Administrador del Servidor de Documentos.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorBadImageUrl": "URL de imagen es incorrecto", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorCoAuthoringDisconnect": "Se ha perdido la conexión con servidor. El documento no puede ser editado ahora.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorCompare": "La característica de comparación de documentos no está disponible durante la coedición.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorConnectToServer": "No se consiguió guardar el documento. Por favor, compruebe los ajustes de conexión o póngase en contacto con su administrador.
    Al hacer clic en el botón 'OK' se le solicitará que descargue el documento.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorDatabaseConnection": "Error externo.
    Error de conexión de base de datos. Por favor póngase en contacto con soporte si el error se mantiene.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorDataEncrypted": "Se han recibido cambios cifrados, ellos no pueden ser descifrados.", @@ -403,6 +432,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.errorKeyExpire": "Descriptor de clave ha expirado", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorMailMergeLoadFile": "La carga del documento ha fallado. Por favor, seleccione un archivo diferente.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorMailMergeSaveFile": "Error de fusión.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorPasteSlicerError": "Las segmentaciones de tabla no pueden ser copiadas de un libro a otro.
    Inténtalo de nuevo al seleccionar toda la tabla y las segmentaciones.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorProcessSaveResult": "Problemas al guardar", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorServerVersion": "La versión del editor ha sido actualizada. La página será recargada para aplicar los cambios.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorSessionAbsolute": "Sesión de editar el documento ha expirado. Por favor, recargue la página.", @@ -450,15 +480,20 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.splitMaxColsErrorText": "El número de columnas debe ser menos que %1.", "DE.Controllers.Main.splitMaxRowsErrorText": "El número de filas debe ser menos que %1.", "DE.Controllers.Main.textAnonymous": "Anónimo", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textApplyAll": "Aplicar a todas las ecuaciones", "DE.Controllers.Main.textBuyNow": "Visitar sitio web", "DE.Controllers.Main.textChangesSaved": "Todos los cambios son guardados", "DE.Controllers.Main.textClose": "Cerrar", "DE.Controllers.Main.textCloseTip": "Pulse para cerrar el consejo", "DE.Controllers.Main.textContactUs": "Contactar con equipo de ventas", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textConvertEquation": "Esta ecuación fue creada con una versión antigua del editor de ecuaciones que ya no es compatible. Para editarla, convierta la ecuación al formato ML de Office Math.
    ¿Convertir ahora?", "DE.Controllers.Main.textCustomLoader": "Note, por favor, que según los términos de la licencia Usted no tiene derecho a cambiar el cargador.
    Por favor, póngase en contacto con nuestro Departamento de Ventas para obtener una cotización.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textHasMacros": "El archivo contiene macros automáticas.
    ¿Quiere ejecutar macros?", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textLearnMore": "Más información", "DE.Controllers.Main.textLoadingDocument": "Cargando documento", - "DE.Controllers.Main.textNoLicenseTitle": "%1 limitación de conexiones", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textNoLicenseTitle": "Se ha alcanzado el límite de licencias", "DE.Controllers.Main.textPaidFeature": "Función de pago", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textRemember": "Recordar mi elección", "DE.Controllers.Main.textShape": "Forma", "DE.Controllers.Main.textStrict": "Modo estricto", "DE.Controllers.Main.textTryUndoRedo": "Las funciones Anular/Rehacer se desactivan para el modo co-edición rápido.
    Haga Clic en el botón \"modo estricto\" para cambiar al modo de co-edición estricta para editar el archivo sin la interferencia de otros usuarios y enviar sus cambios sólo después de guardarlos. Se puede cambiar entre los modos de co-edición usando los ajustes avanzados de edición.", @@ -478,6 +513,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.txtDiagramTitle": "Título de diagrama", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtEditingMode": "Establecer el modo de edición...", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtEndOfFormula": "Fin de fórmula inesperado", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtEnterDate": "Introducir una fecha", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtErrorLoadHistory": "Historia de carga falló", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtEvenPage": "Página par", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtFiguredArrows": "Formas de flecha", @@ -697,6 +733,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.txtTableInd": "El índice de la tabla no puede ser cero", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtTableOfContents": "Tabla de contenidos", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtTooLarge": "El número es demasiado grande para darle formato", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtTypeEquation": "Escribir una ecuación aquí.", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtUndefBookmark": "Marcador no definido", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtXAxis": "Eje X", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtYAxis": "Eje Y", @@ -714,11 +751,11 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.waitText": "Por favor, espere...", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnBrowserIE9": "Este aplicación tiene baja capacidad en IE9. Utilice IE10 o superior", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnBrowserZoom": "La configuración actual de zoom de su navegador no está soportada por completo. Por favor restablezca zoom predeterminado pulsando Ctrl+0.", - "DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExceeded": "Se ha excedido el número permitido de las conexiones simultáneas al servidor de documentos, y el documento se abrirá para sólo lectura.
    Por favor, contacte con su administrador para recibir más información.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExceeded": "Usted ha alcanzado el límite de conexiones simultáneas con %1 editores. Este documento se abrirá sólo para su visualización.
    Por favor, contacte con su administrador para recibir más información.", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExp": "Su licencia ha expirado.
    Por favor, actualice su licencia y después recargue la página.", - "DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseUsersExceeded": "Se ha excedido el número permitido de los usuarios simultáneos, y el documento se abrirá para sólo lectura.
    Por favor, contacte con su administrador para recibir más información.", - "DE.Controllers.Main.warnNoLicense": "Esta versión de los editores %1 tiene ciertas limitaciones para el número de conexiones simultáneas al servidor de documentos.
    Si necesita más, por favor, considere comprar una licencia comercial.", - "DE.Controllers.Main.warnNoLicenseUsers": "Esta versión de editores %1 tiene ciertas limitaciones para usuarios simultáneos.
    Si necesita más, por favor, considere comprar una licencia comercial.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseUsersExceeded": "Usted ha alcanzado el límite de usuarios para los editores de %1. Por favor, contacte con su administrador para recibir más información.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.warnNoLicense": "Usted ha alcanzado el límite de conexiones simultáneas con %1 editores. Este documento se abrirá sólo para su visualización.
    Contacte con el equipo de ventas de %1 para conocer los términos de actualización personal.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.warnNoLicenseUsers": "Usted ha alcanzado el límite de usuarios para los editores de %1. Contacte con el equipo de ventas de %1 para conocer los términos de actualización personal.", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnProcessRightsChange": "El derecho de edición del archivo es denegado", "DE.Controllers.Navigation.txtBeginning": "Principio del documento", "DE.Controllers.Navigation.txtGotoBeginning": "Ir al principio de", @@ -1153,8 +1190,8 @@ "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textLang": "Idioma", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textLock": "Cerrando", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textName": "Título", - "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textNewColor": "Color personalizado", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textNone": "Ninguno", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textPlaceholder": "Marcador de posición", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textShowAs": "Mostrar como", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textSystemColor": "Sistema", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textTag": "Etiqueta", @@ -1169,6 +1206,12 @@ "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textSeparator": "Divisor de columnas", "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textSpacing": "Espacio entre columnas", "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textTitle": "Columnas", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.confirmDefault": "Establecer formato predeterminado para {0}: \"{1}\"", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textDefault": "Establecer como predeterminado", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textFormat": "Formatos", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textLang": "Idioma", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textUpdate": "Actualizar automáticamente", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.txtTitle": "Fecha y hora", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.aboveText": "Arriba", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.addCommentText": "Añadir comentario", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.advancedFrameText": "Ajustes avanzados de marco", @@ -1258,6 +1301,7 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFlipV": "Voltear verticalmente", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFollow": "Seguir movimiento", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFromFile": "De archivo", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFromStorage": "Desde almacenamiento", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFromUrl": "De URL", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textJoinList": "Juntar con lista anterior", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textNest": "Tabla nido", @@ -1408,7 +1452,6 @@ "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textLeft": "Izquierdo", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textMargin": "Margen", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textMove": "Desplazar con texto", - "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "Color personalizado", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textNone": "Ningún", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textPage": "Página", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textParagraph": "Párrafo", @@ -1485,8 +1528,8 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtEditWarning": "La edición eliminará", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtEncrypted": "Este documento ha sido", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtRequestedSignatures": "Este documento necesita", - "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtSigned": "Las firmas válidas han sido", - "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtSignedInvalid": "Algunos de los digitales", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtSigned": "Se han añadido firmas válidas al documento. El documento está protegido frente a la edición.", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtSignedInvalid": "Algunas de las firmas digitales del documento no son válidas o no han podido ser verificadas. El documento está protegido frente a la edición.", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtView": "Ver firmas", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.okButtonText": "Aplicar", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strAlignGuides": "Activar guías de alineación", @@ -1500,6 +1543,9 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strForcesave": "Siempre guardar en el servidor (de lo contrario guardar en el servidor al cerrar documento)", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strInputMode": "Activar jeroglíficos", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strLiveComment": "Activar opción de demostración de comentarios", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strMacrosSettings": "Ajustes de macros", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strPaste": "Cortar, copiar y pegar", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strPasteButton": "Mostrar el botón Opciones de pegado cuando se pegue contenido", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strResolvedComment": "Activar la visualización de los comentarios resueltos", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strShowChanges": "Cambios de colaboración en tiempo real", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strSpellCheckMode": "Activar corrección ortográfica", @@ -1519,6 +1565,7 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textMinute": "Cada minuto", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textOldVersions": "Hacer que los archivos sean compatibles con versiones anteriores de MS Word cuando se guarden como DOCX", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtAll": "Ver todo", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtAutoCorrect": "Opciones de autocorrección", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtCacheMode": "Modo de caché predeterminado", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtCm": "Centímetro", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtFitPage": "Ajustar a la página", @@ -1530,8 +1577,15 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtMac": "como OS X", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtNative": "Nativo", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtNone": "Ver Ningunos", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtProofing": "Revisión", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtPt": "Punto", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtRunMacros": "Habilitar todo", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtRunMacrosDesc": "Habilitar todas las macros sin notificación ", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtSpellCheck": "Сorrección ortográfica", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtStopMacros": "Deshabilitar todo", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtStopMacrosDesc": "Deshabilitar todas las macros sin notificación", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtWarnMacros": "Mostrar notificación", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtWarnMacrosDesc": "Deshabilitar todas las macros con notificación", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtWin": "como Windows", "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textBottomCenter": "Inferior centro", "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textBottomLeft": "Inferior izquierdo", @@ -1574,6 +1628,7 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFitMargins": "Ajustar al margen", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFlip": "Volteo", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFromFile": "De archivo", + "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFromStorage": "Desde almacenamiento", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFromUrl": "De URL", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textHeight": "Altura", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textHint270": "Girar 90° a la izquierda", @@ -1604,6 +1659,7 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Ángulo", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textArrows": "Flechas", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAspectRatio": "Bloquear relación de aspecto", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAutofit": "Autoajustar", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBeginSize": "Tamaño inicial", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBeginStyle": "Estilo inicial", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBelow": "abajo", @@ -1641,6 +1697,7 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textPositionPc": "Posición Relativa", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textRelative": "en relación a", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textRelativeWH": "Relativo", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textResizeFit": "Ajustar tamaño de la forma al texto", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textRight": "Derecho", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textRightMargin": "Margen derecho", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textRightOf": "a la derecha de", @@ -1649,6 +1706,7 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textShape": "Ajustes de forma", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textSize": "Tamaño", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textSquare": "Cuadrado", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTextBox": "Cuadro de texto", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTitle": "Imagen - Ajustes avanzados", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTitleChart": "Gráfico- Ajustes avanzados", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTitleShape": "Forma - ajustes avanzados", @@ -1701,7 +1759,6 @@ "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textCenter": "Al centro", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textLeft": "Izquierda", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textLevel": "Nivel", - "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textNewColor": "Añadir Nuevo Color Personalizado", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textPreview": "Vista previa", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textRight": "A la derecha", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtAlign": "Alineación", @@ -1826,7 +1883,6 @@ "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textAuto": "Múltiple", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textBackColor": "Color de fondo", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textExact": "Exacto", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textNewColor": "Color personalizado", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.txtAutoText": "Auto", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.noTabs": "Las pestañas especificadas aparecerán en este campo", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strAllCaps": "Mayúsculas", @@ -1876,7 +1932,6 @@ "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textLeader": "Director", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textLeft": "Izquierdo", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textLevel": "Nivel", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "Color personalizado", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textNone": "Ninguno", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textNoneSpecial": "(ninguno)", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textPosition": "Posición", @@ -1928,6 +1983,7 @@ "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textEmptyPattern": "Sin patrón", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textFlip": "Volteo", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textFromFile": "De archivo", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textFromStorage": "Desde almacenamiento", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textFromUrl": "De URL", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textGradient": "Gradiente", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textGradientFill": "Relleno degradado", @@ -1937,12 +1993,12 @@ "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textHintFlipV": "Volteo Vertical", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textImageTexture": "Imagen o textura", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textLinear": "Lineal", - "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textNewColor": "Color personalizado", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textNoFill": "Sin relleno", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textPatternFill": "Patrón", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textRadial": "Radial", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textRotate90": "Girar 90°", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textRotation": "Rotación", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textSelectImage": "Seleccionar imagen", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textSelectTexture": "Seleccionar", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textStretch": "Estirar", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textStyle": "Estilo", @@ -1981,8 +2037,8 @@ "DE.Views.SignatureSettings.txtContinueEditing": "Editar de todas maneras", "DE.Views.SignatureSettings.txtEditWarning": "La edición eliminará", "DE.Views.SignatureSettings.txtRequestedSignatures": "Este documento necesita", - "DE.Views.SignatureSettings.txtSigned": "Las firmas válidas han sido", - "DE.Views.SignatureSettings.txtSignedInvalid": "Algunos de los digitales", + "DE.Views.SignatureSettings.txtSigned": "Se han añadido firmas válidas al documento. El documento está protegido frente a la edición.", + "DE.Views.SignatureSettings.txtSignedInvalid": "Algunas de las firmas digitales del documento no son válidas o no han podido ser verificadas. El documento está protegido frente a la edición.", "DE.Views.Statusbar.goToPageText": "Ir a página", "DE.Views.Statusbar.pageIndexText": "Página {0} de {1}", "DE.Views.Statusbar.tipFitPage": "Ajustar a la página", @@ -2053,7 +2109,6 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettings.textHeader": "Encabezado", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textHeight": "Altura", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textLast": "Última", - "DE.Views.TableSettings.textNewColor": "Color personalizado", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textRows": "Filas", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textSelectBorders": "Seleccione bordes que usted desea cambiar aplicando estilo seleccionado", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textTemplate": "Seleccionar de plantilla", @@ -2110,7 +2165,6 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMargins": "Márgenes de celda", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMeasure": "medir en", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMove": "Desplazar objeto con texto", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "Color personalizado", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOnlyCells": "Sólo para celdas seleccionadas", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOptions": "Opciones", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOverlap": "Superposición", @@ -2163,7 +2217,6 @@ "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textGradient": "Gradiente", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textGradientFill": "Relleno degradado", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textLinear": "Lineal", - "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textNewColor": "Color personalizado", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textNoFill": "Sin relleno", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textRadial": "Radial", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textSelectTexture": "Seleccionar", @@ -2175,6 +2228,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnBlankPage": "Página en blanco", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnColumns": "Columnas", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnComment": "Comentario", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnDateTime": "Fecha y hora", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsChart": "Diagram", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsControls": "Controles de contenido", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsDropcap": "Quitar capitlización", @@ -2253,7 +2307,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.textPictureControl": "Imagen", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textPlainControl": "Texto sin formato", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textPortrait": "Vertical", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.textRemoveControl": "Elimine el control de contenido", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textRemoveControl": "Eliminar control de contenido", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textRemWatermark": "Quitar marca de agua", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textRichControl": "Texto enriquecido", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textRight": "Derecho: ", @@ -2291,6 +2345,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipControls": "Insertar controles de contenido", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipCopy": "Copiar", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipCopyStyle": "Copiar estilo", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipDateTime": "Insertar la fecha y hora actuales", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipDecFont": "Reducir tamaño de letra", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipDecPrLeft": "Reducir sangría", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipDropCap": "Insertar letra capital", @@ -2367,15 +2422,17 @@ "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textDiagonal": "Diagonal", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textFont": "Fuente", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textFromFile": "De archivo", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textFromStorage": "Desde almacenamiento", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textFromUrl": "De URL", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textHor": "Horizontal ", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textImageW": "Marca de agua de imagen", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textItalic": "Cursiva", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textLanguage": "Idioma", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textLayout": "Disposición", - "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textNewColor": "Añadir nuevo color personalizado", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textNewColor": "Color personalizado", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textNone": "Ninguno", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textScale": "Escala", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textSelect": "Seleccionar Imagen", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textStrikeout": "Tachado", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textText": "Texto", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textTextW": "Marca de agua de texto", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/fi.json b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/fi.json index 7da94b7ad..df029c8d6 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/fi.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/fi.json @@ -795,9 +795,9 @@ "DE.Views.ChartSettings.txtTight": "Tiukka", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.txtTitle": "Kaavio", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.txtTopAndBottom": "Ylä- ja alaosa", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textAdd": "Lisää", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textColor": "Väri", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textName": "Otsikko", - "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textNewColor": "Lisää uusi väri", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textNone": "Ei mitään", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textTag": "Tunniste", "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textColumns": "Sarakkeiden määrä", @@ -1002,7 +1002,6 @@ "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textLeft": "Vasen", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textMargin": "Marginaali", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textMove": "Siirrä tekstillä", - "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "Lisää uusi mukautettu väri", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textNone": "Ei mitään", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textPage": "Sivu", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textParagraph": "Kappale", @@ -1041,6 +1040,7 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.CreateNew.newDescriptionText": "Luo uusi, tyhjä tekstiasiakirja, ja voit sitten vaihtaa tyyliä ja muotoa muokkauksen aikana. Tai valitse mallipohja tietynlaisen asiakirjan luomiseen tai tiettyyn tarkoitukseen, missä tietyt tyylit ovat jo ennakolta valittu.", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.CreateNew.newDocumentText": "Uusi tekstiasiakirja", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.CreateNew.noTemplatesText": "Ei ole mallipohjia", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtAddText": "Lisää teksti", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtAuthor": "Kirjoittaja", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtBtnAccessRights": "Muuta pääsyoikeuksia", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtLoading": "Ladataan...", @@ -1311,7 +1311,6 @@ "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textAuto": "Moninkertainen", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textBackColor": "Taustan väri", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textExact": "Täsmälleen", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textNewColor": "Lisää uusi mukautettu väri", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.txtAutoText": "Automaattinen", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.noTabs": "Määritellyt välilehdet ilmaantuvat tässä kentässä", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strAllCaps": "Kaikki isoilla kirjaimilla", @@ -1342,7 +1341,6 @@ "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textDefault": "Oletus välilehti", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textEffects": "Efektit", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textLeft": "Vasen", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "Lisää uusi mukautettu väri", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textNone": "Ei mitään", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textPosition": "Asema", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textRemove": "Poista", @@ -1394,7 +1392,6 @@ "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textGradientFill": "Kalteva täyttö", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textImageTexture": "Kuva tai pintarakenne", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textLinear": "Lineaarinen", - "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textNewColor": "Lisää uusi mukautettu väri", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textNoFill": "Ei täyttöä", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textPatternFill": "Kuvio", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textRadial": "Säteittäinen", @@ -1463,6 +1460,7 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettings.splitCellsText": "Jaa solu...", "DE.Views.TableSettings.splitCellTitleText": "Jaa solu", "DE.Views.TableSettings.strRepeatRow": "Toista ylätunnisteen rivinä jokaisen sivun huipulla", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.textAddFormula": "Lisää kaava", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textAdvanced": "Näytä laajennetut asetukset", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textBackColor": "Taustan väri", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textBanded": "Niputettu", @@ -1476,7 +1474,6 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettings.textHeader": "Ylävyöhyke", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textHeight": "Korkeus", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textLast": "Viimeinen", - "DE.Views.TableSettings.textNewColor": "Lisää uusi mukautettu väri", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textRows": "Rivit", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textSelectBorders": "Valitse reunukset, jotka haluat muuttaa käyttämällä ylläolevaa tyyliä", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textTemplate": "Valitse mallipohjasta", @@ -1523,7 +1520,6 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMargins": "Solun marginaalit", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMeasure": "Mittaa:", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMove": "Siirrä tekstiobjektia", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "Lisää uusi mukautettu väri", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOnlyCells": "Vain valituille soluille", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOptions": "Vaihtoehdot", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOverlap": "Salli päällekkäisyys", @@ -1576,7 +1572,6 @@ "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textGradient": "Kalteva", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textGradientFill": "Kalteva täyttö", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textLinear": "Lineaarinen", - "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textNewColor": "Lisää uusi mukautettu väri", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textNoFill": "Ei täyttöä", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textRadial": "Säteittäinen", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textSelectTexture": "Valitse", @@ -1584,6 +1579,7 @@ "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textTemplate": "Mallipohja", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textTransform": "Muunna", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.txtNoBorders": "Ei viivaa", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnAddComment": "Lisää kommentti", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnColumns": "Sarakkeet", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnComment": "Kommentti", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsChart": "Kaavio", @@ -1634,6 +1630,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.textMarginsUsNormal": "US normaali", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textMarginsWide": "Leveä", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textNewColor": "Lisää uusi mukautettu väri", + "Common.UI.ColorButton.textNewColor": "Lisää uusi mukautettu väri", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textNextPage": "Seuraava sivu", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textNone": "Ei mitään", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textOddPage": "Pariton sivu", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/fr.json b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/fr.json index 49e021863..001857090 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/fr.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/fr.json @@ -80,6 +80,7 @@ "Common.define.chartData.textPoint": "Nuages de points (XY)", "Common.define.chartData.textStock": "Boursier", "Common.define.chartData.textSurface": "Surface", + "Common.Translation.warnFileLocked": "Ce fichier a été modifié avec une autre application. Vous pouvez continuer à le modifier et l'enregistrer comme une copi.", "Common.UI.Calendar.textApril": "avril", "Common.UI.Calendar.textAugust": "août", "Common.UI.Calendar.textDecember": "décembre", @@ -113,6 +114,7 @@ "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortTuesday": "mar.", "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortWednesday": "mer.", "Common.UI.Calendar.textYears": "années", + "Common.UI.ColorButton.textNewColor": "Couleur personnalisée", "Common.UI.ComboBorderSize.txtNoBorders": "Pas de bordures", "Common.UI.ComboBorderSizeEditable.txtNoBorders": "Pas de bordures", "Common.UI.ComboDataView.emptyComboText": "Aucun style", @@ -127,12 +129,12 @@ "Common.UI.SearchDialog.textReplaceDef": "Saisissez le texte de remplacement", "Common.UI.SearchDialog.textSearchStart": "Entrez votre texte ici", "Common.UI.SearchDialog.textTitle": "Rechercher et remplacer", - "Common.UI.SearchDialog.textTitle2": "Trouver", + "Common.UI.SearchDialog.textTitle2": "Rechercher", "Common.UI.SearchDialog.textWholeWords": "Seulement les mots entiers", "Common.UI.SearchDialog.txtBtnHideReplace": "Cacher Remplacer", "Common.UI.SearchDialog.txtBtnReplace": "Remplacer", "Common.UI.SearchDialog.txtBtnReplaceAll": "Remplacer tout", - "Common.UI.SynchronizeTip.textDontShow": "N'afficher plus ce message", + "Common.UI.SynchronizeTip.textDontShow": "Ne plus afficher ce message", "Common.UI.SynchronizeTip.textSynchronize": "Le document a été modifié par un autre utilisateur.
    Cliquez pour enregistrer vos modifications et recharger les mises à jour.", "Common.UI.ThemeColorPalette.textStandartColors": "Couleurs standard", "Common.UI.ThemeColorPalette.textThemeColors": "Couleurs de thème", @@ -141,7 +143,7 @@ "Common.UI.Window.noButtonText": "Non", "Common.UI.Window.okButtonText": "OK", "Common.UI.Window.textConfirmation": "Confirmation", - "Common.UI.Window.textDontShow": "N'afficher plus ce message", + "Common.UI.Window.textDontShow": "Ne plus afficher ce message", "Common.UI.Window.textError": "Erreur", "Common.UI.Window.textInformation": "Information", "Common.UI.Window.textWarning": "Avertissement", @@ -155,6 +157,9 @@ "Common.Views.About.txtPoweredBy": "Powered by", "Common.Views.About.txtTel": "tél.: ", "Common.Views.About.txtVersion": "Version ", + "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textBy": "Par:", + "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textReplace": "Remplacer:", + "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textTitle": "Correction automatique", "Common.Views.Chat.textSend": "Envoyer", "Common.Views.Comments.textAdd": "Ajouter", "Common.Views.Comments.textAddComment": "Ajouter", @@ -171,7 +176,7 @@ "Common.Views.Comments.textReply": "Répondre", "Common.Views.Comments.textResolve": "Résoudre", "Common.Views.Comments.textResolved": "Résolu", - "Common.Views.CopyWarningDialog.textDontShow": "N'afficher plus ce message", + "Common.Views.CopyWarningDialog.textDontShow": "Ne plus afficher ce message", "Common.Views.CopyWarningDialog.textMsg": "Vous pouvez réaliser les actions de copier, couper et coller en utilisant les boutons de la barre d'outils et à l'aide du menu contextuel à partir de cet onglet uniquement.

    Pour copier ou coller de / vers les applications en dehors de l'onglet de l'éditeur, utilisez les combinaisons de touches suivantes :", "Common.Views.CopyWarningDialog.textTitle": "Fonctions de Copier, Couper et Coller", "Common.Views.CopyWarningDialog.textToCopy": "pour Copier", @@ -357,10 +362,21 @@ "Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textShowDate": "Afficher la date de signature à côté de la signature", "Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textTitle": "Mise en place de la signature", "Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.txtEmpty": "Ce champ est obligatoire.", - "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textCode": "Valeur Unicode HEX", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textCharacter": "Caractère", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textCode": "Valeur hexadécimale Unicode", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textCopyright": "Signe Copyright", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textDCQuote": "Fermer les guillemets", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textDOQuote": "Ouvrir les guillemets", "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textFont": "Police", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textNBHyphen": "tiret insécable", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textNBSpace": "Espace insécable", "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textRange": "Plage", "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textRecent": "Caractères spéciaux récemment utilisés", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textRegistered": "Signe 'Registred'", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSCQuote": "Fermer l'apostrophe", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSection": "Signe de Section ", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSOQuote": "Ouvrir l'apostrophe", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSpecial": "symboles spéciaux", "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textTitle": "Symbole", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.leavePageText": "Toutes les modifications non enregistrées dans ce document seront perdus.
    Cliquez sur \"Annuler\", puis \"Enregistrer\" pour les sauver. Cliquez sur \"OK\" pour annuler toutes les modifications non enregistrées.", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.newDocumentTitle": "Document sans nom", @@ -408,7 +424,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.errorSessionAbsolute": "Votre session a expiré. Veuillez recharger la page.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorSessionIdle": "Le document n'a pas été modifié depuis trop longtemps. Veuillez recharger la page.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorSessionToken": "La connexion au serveur a été interrompue. Veuillez recharger la page.", - "DE.Controllers.Main.errorStockChart": "Ordre des lignes est incorrect. Pour créer un graphique boursier organisez vos données sur la feuille de calcul dans l'ordre suivant:
    cours à l'ouverture, cours maximal, cours minimal, cours à la clôture.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorStockChart": "Ordre lignes incorrect. Pour créer un diagramme boursier, positionnez les données sur la feuille de calcul dans l'ordre suivant :
    cours à l'ouverture, cours maximal, cours minimal, cours à la clôture.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorToken": "Le jeton de sécurité du document n’était pas formé correctement.
    Veuillez contacter l'administrateur de Document Server.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorTokenExpire": "Le jeton de sécurité du document a expiré.
    Veuillez contactez l'administrateur de votre Document Server.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorUpdateVersion": "La version du fichier a été changée. La page sera rechargée.", @@ -450,15 +466,18 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.splitMaxColsErrorText": "Le nombre de colonnes doivent être inférieure à %1.", "DE.Controllers.Main.splitMaxRowsErrorText": "Le nombre de lignes doit être inférieure à %1.", "DE.Controllers.Main.textAnonymous": "Anonyme", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textApplyAll": "Appliquer à toutes les équations", "DE.Controllers.Main.textBuyNow": "Visiter le site web", "DE.Controllers.Main.textChangesSaved": "Toutes les modifications ont été enregistrées", "DE.Controllers.Main.textClose": "Fermer", "DE.Controllers.Main.textCloseTip": "Cliquez pour fermer le conseil", "DE.Controllers.Main.textContactUs": "Contacter l'équipe de ventes", "DE.Controllers.Main.textCustomLoader": "Veuillez noter que conformément aux clauses du contrat de licence vous n'êtes pas autorisé à changer le chargeur.
    Veuillez contacter notre Service des Ventes pour obtenir le devis.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textLearnMore": "En savoir plus", "DE.Controllers.Main.textLoadingDocument": "Chargement du document", "DE.Controllers.Main.textNoLicenseTitle": "La limite de la licence est atteinte", "DE.Controllers.Main.textPaidFeature": "Fonction payée", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textRemember": "Se souvenir de mon choix", "DE.Controllers.Main.textShape": "Forme", "DE.Controllers.Main.textStrict": "Mode strict", "DE.Controllers.Main.textTryUndoRedo": "Les fonctions annuler/rétablir sont désactivées pour le mode de co-édition rapide.
    Cliquez sur le bouton \"Mode strict\" pour passer au mode de la co-édition stricte pour modifier le fichier sans interférence d'autres utilisateurs et envoyer vos modifications seulement après que vous les enregistrez. Vous pouvez basculer entre les modes de co-édition à l'aide de paramètres avancés d'éditeur.", @@ -478,6 +497,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.txtDiagramTitle": "Titre du graphique", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtEditingMode": "Définissez le mode d'édition...", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtEndOfFormula": "Fin de Formule Inattendue.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtEnterDate": "Entrer une date.", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtErrorLoadHistory": "Chargement de histoire a échoué", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtEvenPage": "Page paire", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtFiguredArrows": "Flèches figurées", @@ -714,8 +734,8 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.waitText": "Veuillez patienter...", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnBrowserIE9": "L'application est peu compatible avec IE9. Utilisez IE10 ou version plus récente", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnBrowserZoom": "Le paramètre actuel de zoom de votre navigateur n'est pas accepté. Veuillez rétablir le niveau de zoom par défaut en appuyant sur Ctrl+0.", - "DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExp": "Votre licence a expiré.
    Veuillez mettre à jour votre licence et actualisez la page.", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExceeded": "Vous avez dépassé le nombre maximal de connexions simultanées aux éditeurs %1. Ce document sera ouvert à la lecture seulement.
    Contactez votre administrateur pour en savoir davantage.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExp": "Votre licence a expiré.
    Veuillez mettre à jour votre licence et actualisez la page.", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseUsersExceeded": "Vous avez dépassé le nombre maximal d’utilisateurs des éditeurs %1. Contactez votre administrateur pour en savoir davantage.", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnNoLicense": "Vous avez dépassé le nombre maximal de connexions simultanées aux éditeurs %1. Ce document sera ouvert à la lecture seulement.
    Contactez l’équipe des ventes %1 pour mettre à jour les termes de la licence.", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnNoLicenseUsers": "Vous avez dépassé le nombre maximal d’utilisateurs des éditeurs %1. Contactez l’équipe des ventes %1 pour mettre à jour les termes de la licence.", @@ -1153,7 +1173,6 @@ "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textLang": "Langue", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textLock": "Verrouillage ", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textName": "Titre", - "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textNewColor": "Couleur personnalisée", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textNone": "Aucun", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textShowAs": "Afficher comme ", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textSystemColor": "Système", @@ -1169,6 +1188,11 @@ "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textSeparator": "Diviseur de colonne", "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textSpacing": "Espacement entre les colonnes", "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textTitle": "Colonnes", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textDefault": "Définir par défaut", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textFormat": "Formats", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textLang": "Langue", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textUpdate": "Mettre à jour automatiquement", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.txtTitle": "Date et heure", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.aboveText": "Au-dessus", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.addCommentText": "Ajouter un commentaire", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.advancedFrameText": "Paramètres avancés du cadre", @@ -1258,6 +1282,7 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFlipV": "Retourner verticalement", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFollow": "Suivre le mouvement", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFromFile": "D'un fichier", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFromStorage": "A partir de l'espace de stockage", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFromUrl": "D'une URL", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textJoinList": "Rejoindre la liste précédente. ", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textNest": "Tableau imbriqué", @@ -1408,7 +1433,6 @@ "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textLeft": "A gauche", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textMargin": "Marge", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textMove": "Déplacer avec le texte", - "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "Couleur personnalisée", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textNone": "Aucune", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textPage": "Page", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textParagraph": "Paragraphe", @@ -1500,6 +1524,8 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strForcesave": "Toujours enregistrer sur le serveur ( sinon enregistrer sur le serveur lors de la fermeture du document )", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strInputMode": "Activer des hiéroglyphes", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strLiveComment": "Activer l'affichage des commentaires", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strMacrosSettings": "Réglages macros", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strPaste": "Couper,copier et coller", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strResolvedComment": "Activer l'affichage des commentaires résolus", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strShowChanges": "Visibilité des modifications en co-édition", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strSpellCheckMode": "Activer la vérification de l'orthographe", @@ -1519,6 +1545,7 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textMinute": "Chaque minute", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textOldVersions": "Rendre les fichiers compatibles avec les anciennes versions de MS Word lorsqu'ils sont enregistrés au format DOCX", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtAll": "Surligner toutes les modifications", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtAutoCorrect": "Options de correction automatique", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtCacheMode": "Mise en cache par défaut", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtCm": "Centimètre", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtFitPage": "Ajuster à la page", @@ -1531,7 +1558,11 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtNative": "Natif", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtNone": "Surligner aucune modification", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtPt": "Point", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtRunMacrosDesc": "Activer toutes les macros sans notification", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtSpellCheck": "Vérification de l'orthographe", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtStopMacros": "Désactiver tout", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtStopMacrosDesc": "Désactiver toutes les macros sans notification", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtWarnMacrosDesc": "Désactiver toutes les macros avec notification", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtWin": "comme Windows", "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textBottomCenter": "En bas au centre", "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textBottomLeft": "En bas à gauche", @@ -1574,6 +1605,7 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFitMargins": "Ajuster aux marges", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFlip": "Retournement", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFromFile": "Depuis un fichier", + "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFromStorage": "A partir de l'espace de stockage", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFromUrl": "D'une URL", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textHeight": "Hauteur", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textHint270": "Faire pivoter à gauche de 90°", @@ -1641,6 +1673,7 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textPositionPc": "Position relative", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textRelative": "par rapport à", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textRelativeWH": "Relatif", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textResizeFit": "Redimensionner la forme pour contenir le texte", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textRight": "A droite", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textRightMargin": "Marge droite", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textRightOf": "à droite de", @@ -1649,6 +1682,7 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textShape": "Paramètres de la forme", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textSize": "Taille", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textSquare": "Carré", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTextBox": "Zone de texte", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTitle": "Image - Paramètres avancés", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTitleChart": "Graphique - Paramètres avancés", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTitleShape": "Forme - Paramètres avancés", @@ -1701,7 +1735,6 @@ "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textCenter": "Au centre", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textLeft": "A gauche", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textLevel": "Niveau", - "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textNewColor": "Ajouter une nouvelle couleur personnalisée", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textPreview": "Aperçu", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textRight": "A droite", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtAlign": "Alignement", @@ -1826,7 +1859,6 @@ "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textAuto": "Plusieurs", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textBackColor": "Couleur d'arrière-plan", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textExact": "Exactement", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textNewColor": "Couleur personnalisée", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.txtAutoText": "Auto", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.noTabs": "Les onglets spécifiés s'affichent dans ce champ", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strAllCaps": "Toutes en majuscules", @@ -1846,7 +1878,7 @@ "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strMargins": "Marges intérieures", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strOrphan": "Éviter orphelines", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strParagraphFont": "Police", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strParagraphIndents": "Retraits et emplacement", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strParagraphIndents": "Retraits et espacement", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strParagraphLine": "Enchaînements", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strParagraphPosition": "Emplacement", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strSmallCaps": "Petites majuscules", @@ -1876,7 +1908,6 @@ "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textLeader": "Guide", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textLeft": "A gauche", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textLevel": "Niveau", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "Couleur personnalisée", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textNone": "Aucune", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textNoneSpecial": "(aucun)", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textPosition": "Position", @@ -1928,6 +1959,7 @@ "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textEmptyPattern": "Pas de modèles", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textFlip": "Retournement", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textFromFile": "Depuis un fichier", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textFromStorage": "A partir de l'espace de stockage", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textFromUrl": "D'une URL", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textGradient": "Dégradé", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textGradientFill": "Remplissage en dégradé", @@ -1937,12 +1969,12 @@ "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textHintFlipV": "Retourner verticalement", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textImageTexture": "Image ou texture", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textLinear": "Linéaire", - "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textNewColor": "Couleur personnalisée", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textNoFill": "Pas de remplissage", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textPatternFill": "Modèle", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textRadial": "Radial", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textRotate90": "Faire pivoter de 90°", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textRotation": "Rotation", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textSelectImage": "Sélectionner l'image", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textSelectTexture": "Sélectionner", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textStretch": "Étirement", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textStyle": "Style", @@ -2053,7 +2085,6 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettings.textHeader": "En-tête", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textHeight": "Hauteur", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textLast": "Dernier", - "DE.Views.TableSettings.textNewColor": "Couleur personnalisée", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textRows": "Lignes", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textSelectBorders": "Sélectionnez les bordures à modifier en appliquant le style choisi ci-dessus", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textTemplate": "Sélectionner à partir d'un modèle", @@ -2110,7 +2141,6 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMargins": "Marges de la cellule", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMeasure": "Mesure en", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMove": "Déplacer avec le texte", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "Couleur personnalisée", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOnlyCells": "Seulement pour des cellules sélectionnées", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOptions": "Options", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOverlap": "Autoriser le chevauchement", @@ -2163,7 +2193,6 @@ "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textGradient": "Dégradé", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textGradientFill": "Remplissage en dégradé", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textLinear": "Linéaire", - "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textNewColor": "Couleur personnalisée", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textNoFill": "Pas de remplissage", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textRadial": "Radial", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textSelectTexture": "Sélectionner", @@ -2175,6 +2204,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnBlankPage": "Page Blanche ", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnColumns": "Colonnes", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnComment": "Commentaire", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnDateTime": "Date et heure", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsChart": "Graphique", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsControls": "Contrôles de contenu", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsDropcap": "Lettrine", @@ -2291,6 +2321,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipControls": "Insérer des contrôles de contenu", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipCopy": "Copier", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipCopyStyle": "Copier le style", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipDateTime": "Inserer la date et l'heure actuelle", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipDecFont": "Réduire la taille de la police", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipDecPrLeft": "Réduire le retrait", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipDropCap": "Insérer une lettrine", @@ -2367,19 +2398,21 @@ "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textDiagonal": "Diagonale", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textFont": "Police", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textFromFile": "Depuis un fichier", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textFromStorage": "A partir de l'espace de stockage", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textFromUrl": "D'une URL", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textHor": "Horizontal", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textImageW": "Image en filigrane", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textItalic": "Italique", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textLanguage": "Langue", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textLayout": "Mise en page", - "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textNewColor": "Ajouter une nouvelle couleur personnalisée", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textNewColor": "Couleur personnalisée", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textNone": "Aucun", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textScale": "Échelle", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textSelect": "Sélectionner une image", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textStrikeout": "Barré", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textText": "Texte", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textTextW": "Filigrane de texte", - "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textTitle": "Paramètres de filigrane", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textTitle": "Paramètres du filigrane", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textTransparency": "Semi-transparent", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textUnderline": "Souligné", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.tipFontName": "Nom de la police", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/hu.json b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/hu.json index 1167da7e4..6ae52ac2e 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/hu.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/hu.json @@ -1153,7 +1153,6 @@ "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textLang": "Nyelv", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textLock": "Rögzítés", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textName": "Cím", - "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textNewColor": "Új egyedi szín hozzáadása", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textNone": "nincs", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textShowAs": "Megjelenít mint", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textSystemColor": "Rendszer", @@ -1408,7 +1407,6 @@ "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textLeft": "Bal", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textMargin": "Margó", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textMove": "Szöveggel mozgat", - "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "Új egyedi szín hozzáadása", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textNone": "nincs", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textPage": "Oldal", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textParagraph": "Bekezdés", @@ -1631,7 +1629,7 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textLineStyle": "Vonal stílus", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textMargin": "Margó", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textMiter": "Szög", - "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textMove": "Objektum és szöveggel áthelyezése", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textMove": "Objektum mozgatása a szöveggel", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textOptions": "Beállítások", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textOriginalSize": "Valódi méret", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textOverlap": "Átfedés engedélyezése", @@ -1701,7 +1699,6 @@ "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textCenter": "Közép", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textLeft": "Bal", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textLevel": "Szint", - "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textNewColor": "Új egyéni szín hozzáadása", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textPreview": "Előnézet", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textRight": "Jobb", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtAlign": "Elrendezés", @@ -1826,7 +1823,6 @@ "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textAuto": "Többszörös", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textBackColor": "Háttérszín", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textExact": "Pontosan", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textNewColor": "Új egyedi szín hozzáadása", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.txtAutoText": "Auto", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.noTabs": "A megadott lapok ezen a területen jelennek meg.", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strAllCaps": "Minden nagybetű", @@ -1876,7 +1872,6 @@ "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textLeader": "Vezető", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textLeft": "Bal", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textLevel": "Szint", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "Új egyedi szín hozzáadása", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textNone": "nincs", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textNoneSpecial": "(nincs)", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textPosition": "Pozíció", @@ -1937,7 +1932,6 @@ "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textHintFlipV": "Függőlegesen tükröz", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textImageTexture": "Kép vagy textúra", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textLinear": "Egyenes", - "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textNewColor": "Új egyedi szín hozzáadása", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textNoFill": "Nincs kitöltés", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textPatternFill": "Minta", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textRadial": "Sugárirányú", @@ -2053,7 +2047,6 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettings.textHeader": "Fejléc", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textHeight": "Magasság", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textLast": "Utolsó", - "DE.Views.TableSettings.textNewColor": "Új egyedi szín hozzáadása", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textRows": "Sorok", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textSelectBorders": "Válassza ki a szegélyeket, amelyeket módosítani szeretne, a fenti stílus kiválasztásával", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textTemplate": "Választás a sablonokból", @@ -2109,8 +2102,7 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMargin": "Margó", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMargins": "Cella margók", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMeasure": "Measure in", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMove": "Objektum és szöveggel áthelyezése", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "Új egyedi szín hozzáadása", + "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMove": "Objektum mozgatása a szöveggel", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOnlyCells": "Csak a kiválasztott cellákra", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOptions": "Beállítások", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOverlap": "Átfedés engedélyezése", @@ -2163,7 +2155,6 @@ "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textGradient": "Színátmenet", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textGradientFill": "Színátmenetes kitöltés", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textLinear": "Egyenes", - "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textNewColor": "Új egyedi szín hozzáadása", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textNoFill": "Nincs kitöltés", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textRadial": "Sugárirányú", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textSelectTexture": "Kiválaszt", @@ -2244,6 +2235,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.textMarginsUsNormal": "Normál (US)", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textMarginsWide": "Széles", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textNewColor": "Új egyedi szín hozzáadása", + "Common.UI.ColorButton.textNewColor": "Új egyedi szín hozzáadása", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textNextPage": "Következő oldal", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textNoHighlight": "Nincs kiemelés", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textNone": "Nincs", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/id.json b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/id.json index b8392654c..44885af0b 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/id.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/id.json @@ -793,7 +793,6 @@ "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textLeft": "Kiri", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textMargin": "Margin", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textMove": "Pindah bersama teks", - "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "Tambahkan Warna Khusus Baru", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textNone": "Tidak ada", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textPage": "Halaman", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textParagraph": "Paragraf", @@ -1047,7 +1046,6 @@ "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textAuto": "Banyak", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textBackColor": "Warna latar", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textExact": "Persis", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textNewColor": "Tambahkan Warna Khusus Baru", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.txtAutoText": "Otomatis", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.noTabs": "Tab yang ditentukan akan muncul pada bagian ini", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strAllCaps": "Huruf kapital semua", @@ -1078,7 +1076,6 @@ "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textDefault": "Tab Standar", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textEffects": "Efek", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textLeft": "Kiri", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "Tambahkan Warna Khusus Baru", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textPosition": "Posisi", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textRemove": "Hapus", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textRemoveAll": "Hapus Semua", @@ -1128,7 +1125,6 @@ "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textGradientFill": "Isian Gradien", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textImageTexture": "Gambar atau Tekstur", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textLinear": "Linier", - "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textNewColor": "Tambahkan Warna Khusus Baru", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textNoFill": "Tidak ada Isian", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textPatternFill": "Pola", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textRadial": "Radial", @@ -1197,7 +1193,6 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettings.textFirst": "Pertama", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textHeader": "Header", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textLast": "Terakhir", - "DE.Views.TableSettings.textNewColor": "Tambahkan Warna Khusus Baru", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textRows": "Baris", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textSelectBorders": "Pilih pembatas yang ingin Anda ubah dengan menerarpkan model yang telah dipilih di atas", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textTemplate": "Pilih Dari Template", @@ -1238,7 +1233,6 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMargin": "Margin", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMargins": "Margin Sel", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMove": "Pindah obyek bersama teks", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "Tambahkan Warna Khusus Baru", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOnlyCells": "Hanya untuk sel yang dipilih", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOptions": "Pilihan", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOverlap": "Ijinkan menumpuk", @@ -1280,7 +1274,6 @@ "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textGradient": "Gradient", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textGradientFill": "Gradient Fill", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textLinear": "Linear", - "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textNewColor": "Add New Custom Color", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textNoFill": "No Fill", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textRadial": "Radial", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textSelectTexture": "Select", @@ -1321,6 +1314,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.textMarginsNormal": "Normal", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textMarginsWide": "Wide", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textNewColor": "Tambahkan Warna Khusus Baru", + "Common.UI.ColorButton.textNewColor": "Tambahkan Warna Khusus Baru", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textNextPage": "Halaman Selanjutnya", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textNone": "Tidak ada", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textOddPage": "Halaman Ganjil", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/it.json b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/it.json index ee2fb093c..39f879e0f 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/it.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/it.json @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ { "Common.Controllers.Chat.notcriticalErrorTitle": "Avviso", - "Common.Controllers.Chat.textEnterMessage": "Scrivi il tuo messaggio qui", + "Common.Controllers.Chat.textEnterMessage": "Inserisci il tuo messaggio qui", "Common.Controllers.ExternalDiagramEditor.textAnonymous": "Anonimo", "Common.Controllers.ExternalDiagramEditor.textClose": "Chiudi", - "Common.Controllers.ExternalDiagramEditor.warningText": "L'oggetto è disabilitato perché si sta modificando da un altro utente.", + "Common.Controllers.ExternalDiagramEditor.warningText": "L'oggetto è disabilitato perché un altro utente lo sta modificando.", "Common.Controllers.ExternalDiagramEditor.warningTitle": "Avviso", "Common.Controllers.ExternalMergeEditor.textAnonymous": "Anonimo", "Common.Controllers.ExternalMergeEditor.textClose": "Chiudi", @@ -11,67 +11,67 @@ "Common.Controllers.ExternalMergeEditor.warningTitle": "Avviso", "Common.Controllers.History.notcriticalErrorTitle": "Avviso", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textAcceptBeforeCompare": "Al fine di confrontare i documenti, tutte le modifiche rilevate verranno considerate accettate. Vuoi continuare?", - "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textAtLeast": "almeno", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textAtLeast": "Minima", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textAuto": "auto", - "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textBaseline": "Baseline", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textBaseline": "Linea guida", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textBold": "Grassetto", - "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textBreakBefore": "Page break before", - "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textCaps": "Maiuscole", - "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textCenter": "Align center", - "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textChart": "Chart", - "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textColor": "Font color", - "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textContextual": "Don't add interval between paragraphs of the same style", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textBreakBefore": "Anteponi Interruzione di pagina", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textCaps": "Tutto maiuscolo", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textCenter": "Allinea al centro", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textChart": "Grafico", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textColor": "Colore caratteri", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textContextual": "Non aggiungere intervallo tra paragrafi dello stesso stile", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textDeleted": "Eliminato:", - "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textDStrikeout": "Double strikeout", - "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textEquation": "Equation", - "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textExact": "exactly", - "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textFirstLine": "First line", - "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textFontSize": "Font size", - "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textFormatted": "Formatted", - "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textHighlight": "Highlight color", - "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textImage": "Image", - "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textIndentLeft": "Indent left", - "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textIndentRight": "Indent right", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textDStrikeout": "Barrato doppio", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textEquation": "Equazione", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textExact": "Esatto", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textFirstLine": "Prima riga", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textFontSize": "Dimensione carattere", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textFormatted": "Formattato", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textHighlight": "Colore evidenziatore", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textImage": "Immagine", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textIndentLeft": "Rientro a sinistra", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textIndentRight": "Rientro a destra", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textInserted": "Inserito:", - "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textItalic": "Italic", - "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textJustify": "Align justify", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textItalic": "Corsivo", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textJustify": "Giustificato", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textKeepLines": "Mantieni assieme le righe", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textKeepNext": "Mantieni con il successivo", - "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textLeft": "Align left", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textLeft": "Allinea a sinistra", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textLineSpacing": "Line Spacing: ", - "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textMultiple": "multiple", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textMultiple": "multiplo", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textNoBreakBefore": "Nessuna interruzione di pagina prima", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textNoContextual": "Aggiungi intervallo tra paragrafi dello stesso stile", - "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textNoKeepLines": "Don't keep lines together", - "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textNoKeepNext": "Don't keep with next", - "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textNot": "Not ", - "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textNoWidow": "No widow control", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textNoKeepLines": "Non tenere insieme le linee", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textNoKeepNext": "Non tenere dal prossimo", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textNot": "Non", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textNoWidow": "Non controllare righe isolate", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textNum": "Modifica numerazione", - "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textParaDeleted": "Paragrafo Eliminato", - "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textParaFormatted": "Paragraph Formatted", - "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textParaInserted": "Paragrafo Inserito", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textParaDeleted": "Paragrafo eliminato ", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textParaFormatted": "Paragrafo formattato", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textParaInserted": "Paragrafo inserito ", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textParaMoveFromDown": "Spostato in basso:", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textParaMoveFromUp": "Spostato in alto:", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textParaMoveTo": "Spostato:", - "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textPosition": "Position", - "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textRight": "Align right", - "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textShape": "Shape", - "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textShd": "Background color", - "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textSmallCaps": "Small caps", - "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textSpacing": "Spacing", - "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textSpacingAfter": "Spacing after", - "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textSpacingBefore": "Spacing before", - "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textStrikeout": "Strikeout", - "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textSubScript": "Subscript", - "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textSuperScript": "Superscript", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textPosition": "Posizione", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textRight": "Allinea a destra", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textShape": "Forma", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textShd": "Colore sfondo", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textSmallCaps": "Maiuscoletto", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textSpacing": "Spaziatura", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textSpacingAfter": "Spaziatura dopo", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textSpacingBefore": "Spaziatura prima", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textStrikeout": "Barrato", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textSubScript": "Pedice", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textSuperScript": "Apice", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textTableChanged": "Impostazioni tabella modificate", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textTableRowsAdd": "Righe tabella aggiunte", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textTableRowsDel": "Righe tabella eliminate", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textTabs": "Modifica Schede", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textUnderline": "Sottolineato", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textUrl": "Incolla l'URL di un documento", - "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textWidow": "Widow control", - "Common.define.chartData.textArea": "Aerogramma", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textWidow": "Controllare righe isolate", + "Common.define.chartData.textArea": "Area", "Common.define.chartData.textBar": "A barre", "Common.define.chartData.textCharts": "Grafici", "Common.define.chartData.textColumn": "Istogramma", @@ -80,6 +80,7 @@ "Common.define.chartData.textPoint": "XY (A dispersione)", "Common.define.chartData.textStock": "Azionario", "Common.define.chartData.textSurface": "Superficie", + "Common.Translation.warnFileLocked": "Il documento è utilizzato da un'altra app. È possibile continuare a modificarlo e salvarlo come copia.", "Common.UI.Calendar.textApril": "Aprile", "Common.UI.Calendar.textAugust": "Agosto", "Common.UI.Calendar.textDecember": "Dicembre", @@ -99,12 +100,12 @@ "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortFebruary": "Feb", "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortFriday": "Ven", "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortJanuary": "Gen", - "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortJuly": "Giu", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortJuly": "Lug", "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortJune": "Giu", "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortMarch": "Mar", - "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortMay": "Maggio", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortMay": "Mag", "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortMonday": "Lun", - "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortNovember": "Nov", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortNovember": "Novembre", "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortOctober": "Ott", "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortSaturday": "Sab", "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortSeptember": "Set", @@ -113,6 +114,7 @@ "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortTuesday": "Mar", "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortWednesday": "Mer", "Common.UI.Calendar.textYears": "Anni", + "Common.UI.ColorButton.textNewColor": "Aggiungi Colore personalizzato", "Common.UI.ComboBorderSize.txtNoBorders": "Nessun bordo", "Common.UI.ComboBorderSizeEditable.txtNoBorders": "Nessun bordo", "Common.UI.ComboDataView.emptyComboText": "Nessuno stile", @@ -132,7 +134,7 @@ "Common.UI.SearchDialog.txtBtnHideReplace": "Nascondi Sostituzione", "Common.UI.SearchDialog.txtBtnReplace": "Sostituisci", "Common.UI.SearchDialog.txtBtnReplaceAll": "Sostituisci tutto", - "Common.UI.SynchronizeTip.textDontShow": "Non visualizzare più questo messaggio", + "Common.UI.SynchronizeTip.textDontShow": "Non mostrare più questo messaggio", "Common.UI.SynchronizeTip.textSynchronize": "Il documento è stato modificato da un altro utente.
    Clicca per salvare le modifiche e ricaricare gli aggiornamenti.", "Common.UI.ThemeColorPalette.textStandartColors": "Colori standard", "Common.UI.ThemeColorPalette.textThemeColors": "Colori del tema", @@ -141,9 +143,9 @@ "Common.UI.Window.noButtonText": "No", "Common.UI.Window.okButtonText": "OK", "Common.UI.Window.textConfirmation": "Conferma", - "Common.UI.Window.textDontShow": "Non visualizzare più questo messaggio", + "Common.UI.Window.textDontShow": "Non mostrare più questo messaggio", "Common.UI.Window.textError": "Errore", - "Common.UI.Window.textInformation": "Informazione", + "Common.UI.Window.textInformation": "Informazioni", "Common.UI.Window.textWarning": "Avviso", "Common.UI.Window.yesButtonText": "Sì", "Common.Utils.Metric.txtCm": "cm", @@ -155,9 +157,13 @@ "Common.Views.About.txtPoweredBy": "Con tecnologia", "Common.Views.About.txtTel": "tel.: ", "Common.Views.About.txtVersion": "Versione ", + "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textBy": "Di:", + "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textMathCorrect": "Correzione automatica matematica", + "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textReplace": "Sostituisci:", + "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textTitle": "Correzione automatica", "Common.Views.Chat.textSend": "Invia", "Common.Views.Comments.textAdd": "Aggiungi", - "Common.Views.Comments.textAddComment": "Aggiungi", + "Common.Views.Comments.textAddComment": "Aggiungi commento", "Common.Views.Comments.textAddCommentToDoc": "Aggiungi commento al documento", "Common.Views.Comments.textAddReply": "Aggiungi risposta", "Common.Views.Comments.textAnonym": "Ospite", @@ -165,30 +171,30 @@ "Common.Views.Comments.textClose": "Chiudi", "Common.Views.Comments.textComments": "Commenti", "Common.Views.Comments.textEdit": "OK", - "Common.Views.Comments.textEnterCommentHint": "Inserisci il commento qui", + "Common.Views.Comments.textEnterCommentHint": "Inserisci commento qui", "Common.Views.Comments.textHintAddComment": "Aggiungi commento", "Common.Views.Comments.textOpenAgain": "Apri di nuovo", "Common.Views.Comments.textReply": "Rispondi", - "Common.Views.Comments.textResolve": "Chiudi", + "Common.Views.Comments.textResolve": "Risolvere", "Common.Views.Comments.textResolved": "Chiuso", - "Common.Views.CopyWarningDialog.textDontShow": "Don't show this message again", - "Common.Views.CopyWarningDialog.textMsg": "Le operazioni di copia, taglia ed incolla per mezzo dei pulsanti dell'editor e le operazioni del menu contestuale sono effettuate solo in questa scheda.

    Per copiare/incollare a/da un'applicazione al di fuori della scheda dell'editor utilizza la tastiera:", + "Common.Views.CopyWarningDialog.textDontShow": "Non mostrare più questo messaggio", + "Common.Views.CopyWarningDialog.textMsg": "Le azioni di copia, taglia e incolla utilizzando i pulsanti della barra degli strumenti dell'editor e le azioni del menu di scelta rapida verranno eseguite solo all'interno di questa scheda dell'editor.

    Per copiare o incollare in o da applicazioni esterne alla scheda dell'editor, utilizzare le seguenti combinazioni di tasti:", "Common.Views.CopyWarningDialog.textTitle": "Funzioni copia/taglia/incolla", "Common.Views.CopyWarningDialog.textToCopy": "per copiare", - "Common.Views.CopyWarningDialog.textToCut": "for Cut", + "Common.Views.CopyWarningDialog.textToCut": "per tagliare", "Common.Views.CopyWarningDialog.textToPaste": "per incollare", "Common.Views.DocumentAccessDialog.textLoading": "Caricamento in corso...", "Common.Views.DocumentAccessDialog.textTitle": "Impostazioni di condivisione", "Common.Views.ExternalDiagramEditor.textClose": "Chiudi", "Common.Views.ExternalDiagramEditor.textSave": "Salva ed esci", - "Common.Views.ExternalDiagramEditor.textTitle": "Modifica grafico", + "Common.Views.ExternalDiagramEditor.textTitle": "Editor di grafici", "Common.Views.ExternalMergeEditor.textClose": "Chiudi", - "Common.Views.ExternalMergeEditor.textSave": "Save & Exit", - "Common.Views.ExternalMergeEditor.textTitle": "Mail Merge Recipients", + "Common.Views.ExternalMergeEditor.textSave": "Salva ed esci", + "Common.Views.ExternalMergeEditor.textTitle": "Destinatari Stampa unione", "Common.Views.Header.labelCoUsersDescr": "Utenti che stanno modificando il file:", "Common.Views.Header.textAdvSettings": "Impostazioni avanzate", "Common.Views.Header.textBack": "Apri percorso file", - "Common.Views.Header.textCompactView": "Mostra barra degli strumenti compatta", + "Common.Views.Header.textCompactView": "Nascondi barra degli strumenti", "Common.Views.Header.textHideLines": "Nascondi righelli", "Common.Views.Header.textHideStatusBar": "Nascondi barra di stato", "Common.Views.Header.textSaveBegin": "Salvataggio in corso...", @@ -215,8 +221,8 @@ "Common.Views.History.textShow": "Espandi", "Common.Views.History.textShowAll": "Mostra modifiche dettagliate", "Common.Views.History.textVer": "ver.", - "Common.Views.ImageFromUrlDialog.textUrl": "Incolla URL immagine:", - "Common.Views.ImageFromUrlDialog.txtEmpty": "Questo campo è richiesto", + "Common.Views.ImageFromUrlDialog.textUrl": "Incolla l'URL di un'immagine:", + "Common.Views.ImageFromUrlDialog.txtEmpty": "Campo obbligatorio", "Common.Views.ImageFromUrlDialog.txtNotUrl": "Il formato URL richiesto è \"http://www.example.com\"", "Common.Views.InsertTableDialog.textInvalidRowsCols": "Specifica il numero di righe e colonne valido.", "Common.Views.InsertTableDialog.txtColumns": "Numero di colonne", @@ -227,15 +233,15 @@ "Common.Views.InsertTableDialog.txtTitleSplit": "Dividi cella", "Common.Views.LanguageDialog.labelSelect": "Seleziona la lingua del documento", "Common.Views.OpenDialog.closeButtonText": "Chiudi File", - "Common.Views.OpenDialog.txtEncoding": "Codificazione", + "Common.Views.OpenDialog.txtEncoding": "Codifica", "Common.Views.OpenDialog.txtIncorrectPwd": "Password errata", "Common.Views.OpenDialog.txtPassword": "Password", "Common.Views.OpenDialog.txtPreview": "Anteprima", "Common.Views.OpenDialog.txtProtected": "Una volta inserita la password e aperto il file, verrà ripristinata la password corrente sul file.", "Common.Views.OpenDialog.txtTitle": "Seleziona parametri %1", "Common.Views.OpenDialog.txtTitleProtected": "File protetto", - "Common.Views.PasswordDialog.txtDescription": "É richiesta la password per proteggere il documento", - "Common.Views.PasswordDialog.txtIncorrectPwd": "la password di conferma non corrisponde", + "Common.Views.PasswordDialog.txtDescription": "Impostare una password per proteggere questo documento", + "Common.Views.PasswordDialog.txtIncorrectPwd": "La password di conferma non corrisponde", "Common.Views.PasswordDialog.txtPassword": "Password", "Common.Views.PasswordDialog.txtRepeat": "Ripeti password", "Common.Views.PasswordDialog.txtTitle": "Imposta password", @@ -243,7 +249,7 @@ "Common.Views.Plugins.groupCaption": "Plugin", "Common.Views.Plugins.strPlugins": "Plugin", "Common.Views.Plugins.textLoading": "Caricamento", - "Common.Views.Plugins.textStart": "Avvio", + "Common.Views.Plugins.textStart": "Inizia", "Common.Views.Plugins.textStop": "Termina", "Common.Views.Protection.hintAddPwd": "Crittografa con password", "Common.Views.Protection.hintPwd": "Modifica o rimuovi password", @@ -254,7 +260,7 @@ "Common.Views.Protection.txtEncrypt": "Crittografare", "Common.Views.Protection.txtInvisibleSignature": "Aggiungi firma digitale", "Common.Views.Protection.txtSignature": "Firma", - "Common.Views.Protection.txtSignatureLine": "Riga della firma", + "Common.Views.Protection.txtSignatureLine": "Aggiungi riga di firma", "Common.Views.RenameDialog.textName": "Nome del file", "Common.Views.RenameDialog.txtInvalidName": "Il nome del file non può contenere nessuno dei seguenti caratteri:", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.hintNext": "Alla modifica successiva", @@ -265,7 +271,7 @@ "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.mniSettings": "Impostazioni di confronto", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.strFast": "Rapido", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.strFastDesc": "co-editing in teampo reale. Tutte le modifiche vengono salvate automaticamente.", - "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.strStrict": "Necessita di conferma", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.strStrict": "Rigorosa", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.strStrictDesc": "Usa il pulsante 'Salva' per sincronizzare le tue modifiche con quelle effettuate da altri.", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipAcceptCurrent": "Accetta la modifica corrente", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipCoAuthMode": "Imposta modalità co-editing", @@ -276,8 +282,8 @@ "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipRejectCurrent": "Annulla la modifica attuale", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipReview": "Traccia cambiamenti", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipReviewView": "Selezionare il modo in cui si desidera visualizzare le modifiche", - "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipSetDocLang": "Imposta la lingua del documento", - "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipSetSpelling": "Controllo ortografia", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipSetDocLang": "Imposta lingua del documento", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipSetSpelling": "Controllo ortografico", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipSharing": "Gestisci i diritti di accesso al documento", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtAccept": "Accetta", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtAcceptAll": "Accetta tutte le modifiche", @@ -291,32 +297,32 @@ "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCommentRemMy": "Rimuovi i miei commenti", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCommentRemMyCurrent": "Rimuovi i miei commenti attuali", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCommentRemove": "Elimina", - "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCompare": "Confrontare", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCompare": "Confronta", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtDocLang": "Lingua", - "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtFinal": "Tutti i cambiamenti accettati (anteprima)", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtFinal": "Tutti le modifiche accettate (anteprima)", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtFinalCap": "Finale", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtHistory": "Cronologia delle versioni", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtMarkup": "Tutte le modifiche (Modifica)", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtMarkupCap": "Marcatura", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtNext": "Successivo", - "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtOriginal": "Tutti i cambiamenti sono rifiutati (Anteprima)", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtOriginal": "Tutti le modifiche rifiutate (Anteprima)", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtOriginalCap": "Originale", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtPrev": "Precedente", - "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtReject": "Reject", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtReject": "Rifiuta", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtRejectAll": "Annulla tutte le modifiche", - "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtRejectChanges": "Rifiuta modifiche", - "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtRejectCurrent": "Annulla le modifiche attuali", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtRejectChanges": "Annulla modifiche", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtRejectCurrent": "Annulla la modifica attuale", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtSharing": "Condivisione", - "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtSpelling": "Controllo ortografia", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtSpelling": "Controllo ortografico", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtTurnon": "Traccia cambiamenti", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtView": "Modalità Visualizzazione", - "Common.Views.ReviewChangesDialog.textTitle": "Cambi di Revisione", + "Common.Views.ReviewChangesDialog.textTitle": "Rivedi modifiche", "Common.Views.ReviewChangesDialog.txtAccept": "Accetta", "Common.Views.ReviewChangesDialog.txtAcceptAll": "Accetta tutte le modifiche", "Common.Views.ReviewChangesDialog.txtAcceptCurrent": "Accetta la modifica corrente", "Common.Views.ReviewChangesDialog.txtNext": "Alla modifica successiva", "Common.Views.ReviewChangesDialog.txtPrev": "Alla modifica precedente", - "Common.Views.ReviewChangesDialog.txtReject": "Respingi", + "Common.Views.ReviewChangesDialog.txtReject": "Rifiuta", "Common.Views.ReviewChangesDialog.txtRejectAll": "Annulla tutte le modifiche", "Common.Views.ReviewChangesDialog.txtRejectCurrent": "Annulla la modifica attuale", "Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textAdd": "Aggiungi", @@ -344,11 +350,11 @@ "Common.Views.SignDialog.textSelectImage": "Seleziona Immagine", "Common.Views.SignDialog.textSignature": "La firma appare come", "Common.Views.SignDialog.textTitle": "Firma Documento", - "Common.Views.SignDialog.textUseImage": "oppure clicca 'Scegli immagine' per utilizzare u'immagine come firma", + "Common.Views.SignDialog.textUseImage": "oppure clicca 'Scegli immagine' per utilizzare un'immagine come firma", "Common.Views.SignDialog.textValid": "Valido dal %1 al %2", "Common.Views.SignDialog.tipFontName": "Nome carattere", "Common.Views.SignDialog.tipFontSize": "Dimensione carattere", - "Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textAllowComment": "Consenti al firmatario di aggiungere commenti nella finestra di firma", + "Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textAllowComment": "Consenti al firmatario di aggiungere commenti nella finestra di dialogo della firma", "Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textInfo": "Informazioni sul Firmatario", "Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textInfoEmail": "E-mail", "Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textInfoName": "Nome", @@ -357,65 +363,88 @@ "Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textShowDate": "Mostra la data nella riga di Firma", "Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textTitle": "Impostazioni firma", "Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.txtEmpty": "Campo obbligatorio", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textCharacter": "Carattere", "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textCode": "valore Unicode HEX", - "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textFont": "Carattere", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textCopyright": "Segno di copyright", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textDCQuote": "Chiudi virgolette alte doppie", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textDOQuote": "Apri virgolette alte doppie", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textEllipsis": "Ellissi orizzontale", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textEmDash": "Lineetta emme", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textEmSpace": "Spazio emme", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textEnDash": "Lineetta enne", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textEnSpace": "Spazio enne", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textFont": "Tipo di carattere", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textNBHyphen": "Trattino senza interruzioni", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textNBSpace": "Spazio senza interruzioni", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textPilcrow": "Piede di mosca", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textQEmSpace": "1/4 spazio emme", "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textRange": "Intervallo", "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textRecent": "Simboli usati di recente", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textRegistered": "Firma registarta", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSCQuote": "Chiudi virgolette alte singole", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSection": "Sezione firma", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textShortcut": "Tasto di scelta rapida", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSHyphen": "Trattino morbido", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSOQuote": "Apri virgolette alte singole", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSpecial": "Caratteri speciali", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSymbols": "Simboli", "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textTitle": "Simbolo", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textTradeMark": "Simbolo del marchio", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.leavePageText": "Tutte le modifiche non salvate nel documento verranno perse.
    Clicca \"Annulla\" e poi \"Salva\" per salvarle. Clicca \"OK\" per annullare tutte le modifiche non salvate.", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.newDocumentTitle": "Documento senza nome", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.notcriticalErrorTitle": "Avviso", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.requestEditRightsText": "Richiesta di autorizzazione di modifica...", - "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.textLoadHistory": "Caricamento Cronologia....", + "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.textLoadHistory": "Caricamento Cronologia in corso....", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.textNoTextFound": "I dati da cercare non sono stati trovati. Modifica i parametri di ricerca.", - "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.textReplaceSkipped": "La sostituzione è stata effettuata. {0} occorrenze sono state saltate.", - "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.textReplaceSuccess": "La ricerca è stata effettuata. Occorrenze sostituite: {0}", + "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.textReplaceSkipped": "La sostituzione è stata effettuata. {0} casi sono stati saltati.", + "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.textReplaceSuccess": "La ricerca è stata effettuata. Casi sostituiti: {0}", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.txtCompatible": "Il documento verrà salvato nel nuovo formato questo consentirà di utilizzare tutte le funzionalità dell'editor, ma potrebbe influire sul layout del documento.
    Utilizzare l'opzione \"Compatibilità\" nelle impostazioni avanzate se si desidera rendere i file compatibili con le versioni precedenti di MS Word.", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.txtUntitled": "Senza titolo", - "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.warnDownloadAs": "Se continua a salvare in questo formato tutte le caratteristiche tranne il testo saranno perse.
    Sei sicuro di voler continuare?", - "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.warnDownloadAsRTF": "Se si continua a salvare in questo formato, parte della formattazione potrebbe andare persa.
    Vuoi continuare?", + "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.warnDownloadAs": "Se continui a salvare in questo formato tutte le funzioni eccetto il testo andranno perse.
    Sei sicuro di voler continuare?", + "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.warnDownloadAsRTF": "Se continui a salvare in questo formato, parte della formattazione potrebbe andare persa.
    Sei sicuro di voler continuare?", "DE.Controllers.Main.applyChangesTextText": "Caricamento delle modifiche in corso...", "DE.Controllers.Main.applyChangesTitleText": "Caricamento delle modifiche", - "DE.Controllers.Main.convertationTimeoutText": "E' stato superato il tempo limite della conversione.", - "DE.Controllers.Main.criticalErrorExtText": "Clicca su \"OK\" per ritornare all'elenco dei documenti", + "DE.Controllers.Main.convertationTimeoutText": "È stato superato il tempo limite della conversione.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.criticalErrorExtText": "Clicca su \"OK\" per ritornare all'elenco dei documenti.", "DE.Controllers.Main.criticalErrorTitle": "Errore", - "DE.Controllers.Main.downloadErrorText": "Download fallito.", - "DE.Controllers.Main.downloadMergeText": "Downloading...", - "DE.Controllers.Main.downloadMergeTitle": "Downloading", - "DE.Controllers.Main.downloadTextText": "Download del documento in corso...", - "DE.Controllers.Main.downloadTitleText": "Download del documento", + "DE.Controllers.Main.downloadErrorText": "Scaricamento fallito.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.downloadMergeText": "Scaricamento in corso...", + "DE.Controllers.Main.downloadMergeTitle": "Scaricamento", + "DE.Controllers.Main.downloadTextText": "Scaricamento del documento in corso...", + "DE.Controllers.Main.downloadTitleText": "Scaricamento del documento", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorAccessDeny": "Stai tentando di eseguire un'azione per la quale non disponi di permessi sufficienti.
    Si prega di contattare l'amministratore del Server dei Documenti.", - "DE.Controllers.Main.errorBadImageUrl": "URL dell'immagine non corretto", - "DE.Controllers.Main.errorCoAuthoringDisconnect": "Connessione al server persa. Impossibile modificare il documento.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorBadImageUrl": "URL dell'immagine errato", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorCoAuthoringDisconnect": "Connessione al server persa. Il documento non può essere modificato in questo momento.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorCompare": "La funzione Confronta documenti non è disponibile durante la modifica in co-editing. ", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorConnectToServer": "Il documento non può essere salvato. Controllare le impostazioni di rete o contatta l'Amministratore.
    Quando clicchi 'OK' Ti verrà richiesto di scaricare il documento.", - "DE.Controllers.Main.errorDatabaseConnection": "Errore esterno.
    Errore di connessione a banca dati. Si prega di contattare l'assistenza tecnica nel caso in cui l'errore persiste.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorDatabaseConnection": "Errore esterno.
    Errore di connessione al database. Si prega di contattare l'assistenza nel caso in cui l'errore persista.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorDataEncrypted": "Le modifiche crittografate sono state ricevute, non possono essere decifrate.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorDataRange": "Intervallo di dati non corretto.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorDefaultMessage": "Codice errore: %1", - "DE.Controllers.Main.errorDirectUrl": "Verifica il link al documento.
    Questo link deve essere un link diretto al file per il download.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorDirectUrl": "Si prega di verificare il link al documento.
    Questo collegamento deve essere un collegamento diretto al file da scaricare.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorEditingDownloadas": "Si è verificato un errore durante il lavoro con il documento.
    Utilizzare l'opzione 'Scarica come ...' per salvare la copia di backup del file sul disco rigido del computer.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorEditingSaveas": "Si è verificato un errore durante il lavoro con il documento.
    Utilizzare l'opzione 'Salva come ...' per salvare la copia di backup del file sul disco rigido del computer.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorEmailClient": "Non è stato trovato nessun client di posta elettronica.", - "DE.Controllers.Main.errorFilePassProtect": "Il file è protetto da una password. Impossibile aprirlo.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorFilePassProtect": "Il file è protetto da password e non può essere aperto.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorFileSizeExceed": "La dimensione del file supera la limitazione impostata per il tuo server.
    Per i dettagli, contatta l'amministratore del Document server.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorForceSave": "Si è verificato un errore durante il salvataggio del file. Utilizzare l'opzione 'Scarica come' per salvare il file sul disco rigido del computer o riprovare più tardi.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorKeyEncrypt": "Descrittore di chiave sconosciuto", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorKeyExpire": "Descrittore di chiave scaduto", - "DE.Controllers.Main.errorMailMergeLoadFile": "Caricamento del documento non riuscito. Seleziona un altro file.", - "DE.Controllers.Main.errorMailMergeSaveFile": "Merge failed.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorMailMergeLoadFile": "Caricamento del documento non riuscito. Si prega di selezionare un altro file.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorMailMergeSaveFile": "Unione non riuscita", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorProcessSaveResult": "Salvataggio non riuscito", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorServerVersion": "La versione dell'editor è stata aggiornata. La pagina verrà ricaricata per applicare le modifiche.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorSessionAbsolute": "La sessione di modifica del documento è scaduta. Si prega di ricaricare la pagina.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorSessionIdle": "È passato troppo tempo dall'ultima modifica apportata al documento. Si prega di ricaricare la pagina.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorSessionToken": "La connessione al server è stata interrotta. Si prega di ricaricare la pagina.", - "DE.Controllers.Main.errorStockChart": "Ordine di righe scorretto. Per creare o grafico in pila posiziona i dati nel foglio nel seguente ordine:
    prezzo di apertura, prezzo massimo, prezzo minimo, prezzo di chiusura.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorStockChart": "Righe ordinate in modo errato. Per creare un grafico azionario posizionare i dati sul foglio nel seguente ordine:
    prezzo di apertura, prezzo massimo, prezzo minimo, prezzo di chiusura.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorToken": "Il token di sicurezza del documento non è stato creato correttamente.
    Si prega di contattare l'amministratore del Server dei Documenti.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorTokenExpire": "Il token di sicurezza del documento è scaduto.
    Si prega di contattare l'amministratore del Server dei Documenti.", - "DE.Controllers.Main.errorUpdateVersion": "La versione file è stata moificata. La pagina verrà ricaricata.", - "DE.Controllers.Main.errorUpdateVersionOnDisconnect": "La connessione Internet è stata ripristinata e la versione del file è stata modificata.
    Prima di poter continuare a lavorare, è necessario scaricare il file o copiarne il contenuto per assicurarsi che non vada perso nulla, successivamente ricaricare questa pagina.", - "DE.Controllers.Main.errorUserDrop": "Impossibile accedere al file subito.", - "DE.Controllers.Main.errorUsersExceed": "E' stato superato il numero di utenti consentito dal piano tariffario", - "DE.Controllers.Main.errorViewerDisconnect": "La connessione è stata persa. Puoi ancora vedere il documento,
    ma non puoi scaricarlo o stamparlo fino a che la connessione non sarà ripristinata.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorUpdateVersion": "La versione del file è stata modificata. La pagina verrà ricaricata.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorUpdateVersionOnDisconnect": "La connessione Internet è stata ripristinata e la versione del file è stata modificata.
    Prima di poter continuare a lavorare, è necessario scaricare il file o copiarne il contenuto per assicurarsi che non vada perso nulla, quindi ricaricare questa pagina.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorUserDrop": "Impossibile accedere al file in questo momento.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorUsersExceed": "È stato superato il numero di utenti consentito dal piano tariffario", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorViewerDisconnect": "La connessione è stata persa. È ancora possibile visualizzare il documento,
    ma non sarà possibile scaricarlo o stamparlo fino a quando la connessione non sarà ripristinata e la pagina sarà ricaricata.", "DE.Controllers.Main.leavePageText": "Ci sono delle modifiche non salvate in questo documento. Clicca su 'Rimani in questa pagina', poi su 'Salva' per salvarle. Clicca su 'Esci da questa pagina' per scartare tutte le modifiche non salvate.", "DE.Controllers.Main.loadFontsTextText": "Caricamento dei dati in corso...", "DE.Controllers.Main.loadFontsTitleText": "Caricamento dei dati", @@ -427,38 +456,43 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.loadImageTitleText": "Caricamento dell'immagine", "DE.Controllers.Main.loadingDocumentTextText": "Caricamento del documento in corso...", "DE.Controllers.Main.loadingDocumentTitleText": "Caricamento del documento", - "DE.Controllers.Main.mailMergeLoadFileText": "Loading Data Source...", - "DE.Controllers.Main.mailMergeLoadFileTitle": "Loading Data Source", + "DE.Controllers.Main.mailMergeLoadFileText": "Caricamento origine dati in corso...", + "DE.Controllers.Main.mailMergeLoadFileTitle": "Caricamento origine dati", "DE.Controllers.Main.notcriticalErrorTitle": "Avviso", - "DE.Controllers.Main.openErrorText": "Si è verificato un errore all'apertura del file", + "DE.Controllers.Main.openErrorText": "Si è verificato un errore durante l'apertura del file", "DE.Controllers.Main.openTextText": "Apertura del documento in corso...", "DE.Controllers.Main.openTitleText": "Apertura del documento", "DE.Controllers.Main.printTextText": "Stampa del documento in corso...", "DE.Controllers.Main.printTitleText": "Stampa del documento", "DE.Controllers.Main.reloadButtonText": "Ricarica pagina", - "DE.Controllers.Main.requestEditFailedMessageText": "Qualcuno sta modificando questo documento. Si prega di provare più tardi.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.requestEditFailedMessageText": "Qualcuno sta modificando questo documento in questo momento. Si prega di provare più tardi.", "DE.Controllers.Main.requestEditFailedTitleText": "Accesso negato", - "DE.Controllers.Main.saveErrorText": "Si è verificato un errore al salvataggio del file", + "DE.Controllers.Main.saveErrorText": "Si è verificato un errore durante il salvataggio del file", "DE.Controllers.Main.savePreparingText": "Preparazione al salvataggio ", - "DE.Controllers.Main.savePreparingTitle": "Preparazione al salvataggio. Si prega di aspettare...", + "DE.Controllers.Main.savePreparingTitle": "Preparazione al salvataggio. Si prega di attendere...", "DE.Controllers.Main.saveTextText": "Salvataggio del documento in corso...", "DE.Controllers.Main.saveTitleText": "Salvataggio del documento", "DE.Controllers.Main.scriptLoadError": "La connessione è troppo lenta, alcuni componenti non possono essere caricati. Si prega di ricaricare la pagina.", - "DE.Controllers.Main.sendMergeText": "Sending Merge...", - "DE.Controllers.Main.sendMergeTitle": "Sending Merge", + "DE.Controllers.Main.sendMergeText": "Invio unione in corso...", + "DE.Controllers.Main.sendMergeTitle": "Invio unione", "DE.Controllers.Main.splitDividerErrorText": "Il numero di righe deve essere un divisore di %1.", "DE.Controllers.Main.splitMaxColsErrorText": "Il numero di colonne deve essere inferiore a %1.", "DE.Controllers.Main.splitMaxRowsErrorText": "Il numero di righe deve essere inferiore a %1.", "DE.Controllers.Main.textAnonymous": "Anonimo", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textApplyAll": "Applica a tutte le equazioni", "DE.Controllers.Main.textBuyNow": "Visita il sito web", "DE.Controllers.Main.textChangesSaved": "Tutte le modifiche sono state salvate", "DE.Controllers.Main.textClose": "Chiudi", - "DE.Controllers.Main.textCloseTip": "Clicca per chiudere il consiglio", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textCloseTip": "Fai clic per chiudere il consiglio", "DE.Controllers.Main.textContactUs": "Contatta il team di vendite", - "DE.Controllers.Main.textCustomLoader": "Si noti che in base ai termini della licenza non si ha il diritto di cambiare il caricatore.
    Si prega di contattare il nostro ufficio vendite per ottenere un preventivo.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textConvertEquation": "Questa equazione è stata creata con una vecchia versione dell'editor di equazioni che non è più supportata.Per modificarla, convertire l'equazione nel formato ML di Office Math.
    Convertire ora?", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textCustomLoader": "Si prega di notare che, in base ai termini della licenza, non si ha il diritto di modificare il caricatore.
    Si prega di contattare il nostro reparto vendite per ottenere un preventivo.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textHasMacros": "Il file contiene macro automatiche.
    Vuoi eseguire le macro?", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textLearnMore": "Per saperne di più", "DE.Controllers.Main.textLoadingDocument": "Caricamento del documento", "DE.Controllers.Main.textNoLicenseTitle": "Limite di licenza raggiunto", - "DE.Controllers.Main.textPaidFeature": "Caratteristica a pagamento", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textPaidFeature": "Funzionalità a pagamento", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textRemember": "Ricorda la mia scelta", "DE.Controllers.Main.textShape": "Forma", "DE.Controllers.Main.textStrict": "Modalità Rigorosa", "DE.Controllers.Main.textTryUndoRedo": "Le funzioni Annulla/Ripristina sono disabilitate per la Modalità di Co-editing Veloce.
    Clicca il pulsante 'Modalità Rigorosa' per passare alla Modalità di Co-editing Rigorosa per poter modificare il file senza l'interferenza di altri utenti e inviare le modifiche solamente dopo averle salvate. Puoi passare da una modalità all'altra di co-editing utilizzando le Impostazioni avanzate dell'editor.", @@ -467,20 +501,21 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.titleUpdateVersion": "Versione Modificata", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtAbove": "Sopra", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtArt": "Il tuo testo qui", - "DE.Controllers.Main.txtBasicShapes": "Figure di base", - "DE.Controllers.Main.txtBelow": "sotto", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtBasicShapes": "Forme di base", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtBelow": "al di sotto", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtBookmarkError": "Errore! Segnalibro non definito.", - "DE.Controllers.Main.txtButtons": "Bottoni", - "DE.Controllers.Main.txtCallouts": "Callout", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtButtons": "Pulsanti", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtCallouts": "Chiamate", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtCharts": "Grafici", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtChoose": "Scegli un oggetto.", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtCurrentDocument": "Documento Corrente", - "DE.Controllers.Main.txtDiagramTitle": "Titolo diagramma", - "DE.Controllers.Main.txtEditingMode": "Impostazione modo di modifica...", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtDiagramTitle": "Titolo grafico", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtEditingMode": "Imposta la modalità di modifica...", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtEndOfFormula": "Fine inaspettata della formula", - "DE.Controllers.Main.txtErrorLoadHistory": "History loading failed", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtEnterDate": "Inserisci una data", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtErrorLoadHistory": "Caricamento della cronologia non riuscito", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtEvenPage": "Pagina pari", - "DE.Controllers.Main.txtFiguredArrows": "Frecce decorate", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtFiguredArrows": "Frecce figurate", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtFirstPage": "Prima Pagina", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtFooter": "Piè di pagina", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtFormulaNotInTable": "La formula non in tabella", @@ -525,7 +560,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_bentArrow": "Freccia piegata", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_bentConnector5": "Connettore a gomito", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_bentConnector5WithArrow": "Connettore freccia a gomito", - "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_bentConnector5WithTwoArrows": "Connettore doppia freccia a gomito", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_bentConnector5WithTwoArrows": "Connettore a doppia freccia a gomito", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_bentUpArrow": "Freccia curva in alto", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_bevel": "Smussato", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_blockArc": "Arco a tutto sesto", @@ -550,20 +585,20 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_curvedDownArrow": "Freccia curva in basso", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_curvedLeftArrow": "Freccia curva a sinistra", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_curvedRightArrow": "Freccia curva a destra", - "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_curvedUpArrow": "Freccia curva in su", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_curvedUpArrow": "Freccia curva in alto", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_decagon": "Decagono", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_diagStripe": "Striscia diagonale", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_diamond": "Diamante", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_dodecagon": "dodecagono", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_donut": "Ciambella", - "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_doubleWave": "Onda doppia", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_doubleWave": "Doppia onda", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_downArrow": "Freccia in giù", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_downArrowCallout": "Callout Freccia in basso", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_ellipse": "Ellisse", - "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_ellipseRibbon": "Nastro curvo e inclinato in basso", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_ellipseRibbon": "Nastro curvo in basso", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_ellipseRibbon2": "Nastro curvato in alto", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartAlternateProcess": "Diagramma di flusso: processo alternativo", - "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartCollate": "Diagramma di flusso: Fascicolazione", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartCollate": "Diagramma di flusso: Fascicolo", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartConnector": "Diagramma di flusso: Connettore", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartDecision": "Diagramma di flusso: Decisione", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartDelay": "Diagramma di flusso: Ritardo", @@ -607,7 +642,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_leftRightArrow": "Freccia bidirezionale sinistra destra", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_leftRightArrowCallout": "Callout Freccia bidirezionane sinistra destra", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_leftRightUpArrow": "Freccia tridirezionale sinistra destra alto", - "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_leftUpArrow": "Freccia bidirezionale sinistra alto", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_leftUpArrow": "Freccia in alto a sinistra", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_lightningBolt": "Fulmine", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_line": "Linea", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_lineWithArrow": "Freccia", @@ -624,7 +659,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_octagon": "Ottagono", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_parallelogram": "Parallelogramma", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_pentagon": "Pentagono", - "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_pie": "Torta", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_pie": "A torta", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_plaque": "Firma", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_plus": "Più", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_polyline1": "Bozza", @@ -664,7 +699,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_teardrop": "Goccia", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_textRect": "Casella di testo", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_trapezoid": "Trapezio", - "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_triangle": "Triangolo isoscele", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_triangle": "Triangolo", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_upArrow": "Freccia su", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_upArrowCallout": "Callout Freccia in alto", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_upDownArrow": "Freccia bidirezionale su giù", @@ -697,6 +732,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.txtTableInd": "L'indice della tabella non può essere zero", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtTableOfContents": "Sommario", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtTooLarge": "Numero troppo grande per essere formattato", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtTypeEquation": "Digitare un'equazione qui.", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtUndefBookmark": "Segnalibro indefinito", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtXAxis": "Asse X", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtYAxis": "Asse Y", @@ -707,22 +743,22 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.uploadDocFileCountMessage": "Nessun documento caricato.", "DE.Controllers.Main.uploadDocSizeMessage": "Il limite massimo delle dimensioni del documento è stato superato.", "DE.Controllers.Main.uploadImageExtMessage": "Formato immagine sconosciuto.", - "DE.Controllers.Main.uploadImageFileCountMessage": "Nessun immagine caricata.", - "DE.Controllers.Main.uploadImageSizeMessage": "E' stata superata la dimensione massima.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.uploadImageFileCountMessage": "Nessuna immagine caricata.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.uploadImageSizeMessage": "È stata superata la dimensione massima dell'immagine.", "DE.Controllers.Main.uploadImageTextText": "Caricamento immagine in corso...", "DE.Controllers.Main.uploadImageTitleText": "Caricamento dell'immagine", "DE.Controllers.Main.waitText": "Per favore, attendi...", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnBrowserIE9": "L'applicazione è poco compatibile con IE9. Usa IE10 o più recente", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnBrowserZoom": "Le impostazioni correnti di zoom del tuo browser non sono completamente supportate. Per favore, ritorna allo zoom predefinito premendo Ctrl+0.", - "DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExp": "La tua licenza è scaduta.
    Si prega di aggiornare la licenza e ricaricare la pagina.", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExceeded": "Hai raggiunto il limite per le connessioni simultanee agli editor %1. Questo documento verrà aperto in sola lettura.
    Contatta l’amministratore per saperne di più.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExp": "La tua licenza è scaduta.
    Si prega di aggiornare la licenza e ricaricare la pagina.", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseUsersExceeded": "Hai raggiunto il limite per gli utenti con accesso agli editor %1. Contatta l’amministratore per saperne di più.", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnNoLicense": "Hai raggiunto il limite per le connessioni simultanee agli editor %1. Questo documento verrà aperto in sola lettura.
    Contatta il team di vendita di %1 per i termini di aggiornamento personali.", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnNoLicenseUsers": "Hai raggiunto il limite per gli utenti con accesso agli editor %1. Contatta il team di vendita di %1 per i termini di aggiornamento personali.", - "DE.Controllers.Main.warnProcessRightsChange": "Ci stato negato il diritto alla modifica del file.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.warnProcessRightsChange": "Ti è stato negato il diritto di modificare il file.", "DE.Controllers.Navigation.txtBeginning": "Inizio del documento", "DE.Controllers.Navigation.txtGotoBeginning": "Vai all'inizio del documento", - "DE.Controllers.Statusbar.textHasChanges": "Sono state tracciate nuove modifiche", + "DE.Controllers.Statusbar.textHasChanges": "Sono state rilevate nuove modifiche", "DE.Controllers.Statusbar.textTrackChanges": "Il documento è aperto in modalità Traccia Revisioni attivata", "DE.Controllers.Statusbar.tipReview": "Traccia cambiamenti", "DE.Controllers.Statusbar.zoomText": "Zoom {0}%", @@ -733,26 +769,26 @@ "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.textEmptyImgUrl": "Specifica URL immagine.", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.textFontSizeErr": "Il valore inserito non è corretto.
    Inserisci un valore numerico compreso tra 1 e 100", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.textFraction": "Frazioni", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.textFunction": "Functions", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.textFunction": "Funzioni", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.textInsert": "Inserisci", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.textIntegral": "Integrali", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.textLargeOperator": "Large Operators", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.textLimitAndLog": "Limits And Logarithms", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.textMatrix": "Matrixes", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.textOperator": "Operators", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.textRadical": "Radicals", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.textScript": "Scripts", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.textSymbols": "Symbols", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.textLargeOperator": "Operatori di grandi dimensioni", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.textLimitAndLog": "Limiti e Logaritmi", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.textMatrix": "Matrici", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.textOperator": "Operatori", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.textRadical": "Radicali", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.textScript": "Script", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.textSymbols": "Simboli", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.textWarning": "Avviso", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtAccent_Accent": "Acuto", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtAccent_ArrowD": "Right-Left Arrow Above", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtAccent_ArrowL": "Leftwards Arrow Above", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtAccent_ArrowR": "Rightwards Arrow Above", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtAccent_Bar": "Bar", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtAccent_ArrowD": "Freccia Destra-Sinistra in alto", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtAccent_ArrowL": "Freccia verso sinistra sopra", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtAccent_ArrowR": "Freccia a destra alta", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtAccent_Bar": "A barre", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtAccent_BarBot": "Barra inferiore", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtAccent_BarTop": "barra sopra", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtAccent_BorderBox": "Boxed Formula (With Placeholder)", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtAccent_BorderBoxCustom": "Boxed Formula(Example)", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtAccent_BorderBox": "Formula racchiusa (con segnaposto)", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtAccent_BorderBoxCustom": "Formula racchiusa (Esempio)", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtAccent_Check": "Controlla", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtAccent_CurveBracketBot": "sottoparentesi", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtAccent_CurveBracketTop": "Overbrace", @@ -760,108 +796,108 @@ "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtAccent_Custom_2": "ABC con barra superiore", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtAccent_Custom_3": "x XOR y con barra sopra", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtAccent_DDDot": "Punto triplo", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtAccent_DDot": "Double Dot", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtAccent_DDot": "Doppio punto", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtAccent_Dot": "Dot", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtAccent_DoubleBar": "Double Overbar", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtAccent_DoubleBar": "Doppia barra superiore", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtAccent_Grave": "Grave", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtAccent_GroupBot": "Grouping Character Below", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtAccent_GroupTop": "Grouping Character Above", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtAccent_HarpoonL": "Leftwards Harpoon Above", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtAccent_HarpoonR": "Rightwards Harpoon Above", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtAccent_Hat": "Hat", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtAccent_Smile": "Breve", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtAccent_GroupBot": "Raggruppamento carattere sotto", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtAccent_GroupTop": "Raggruppamento carattere sopra", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtAccent_HarpoonL": "Arpione verso sinistra sopra", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtAccent_HarpoonR": "Arpione verso destra sopra", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtAccent_Hat": "Circonflesso", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtAccent_Smile": "Accento Breve", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtAccent_Tilde": "Tilde", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Angle": "Parentesi", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Angle_Delimiter_2": "Parentesi con separatori", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Angle_Delimiter_3": "Parentesi con separatori", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Angle_NoneOpen": "Single Bracket", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Angle_OpenNone": "Single Bracket", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Angle_NoneOpen": "Parentesi quadra singola", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Angle_OpenNone": "Parentesi quadra singola", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Curve": "Parentesi", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Curve_Delimiter_2": "Parentesi con separatori", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Curve_NoneOpen": "Single Bracket", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Curve_OpenNone": "Single Bracket", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Curve_NoneOpen": "Parentesi quadra singola", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Curve_OpenNone": "Parentesi quadra singola", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Custom_1": "Casi (due condizioni)", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Custom_2": "Casi (tre condizioni)", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Custom_3": "Stack Object", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Custom_4": "Stack Object", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Custom_3": "Impila oggetto", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Custom_4": "Impila oggetto", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Custom_5": "Esempio di casi", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Custom_6": "Coefficiente binomiale", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Custom_7": "Coefficiente binomiale", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Line": "Parentesi", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Line_NoneOpen": "Single Bracket", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Line_OpenNone": "Single Bracket", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Line_NoneOpen": "Parentesi quadra singola", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Line_OpenNone": "Parentesi quadra singola", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_LineDouble": "Parentesi", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_LineDouble_NoneOpen": "Single Bracket", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_LineDouble_OpenNone": "Single Bracket", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_LineDouble_NoneOpen": "Parentesi quadra singola", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_LineDouble_OpenNone": "Parentesi quadra singola", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_LowLim": "Parentesi", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_LowLim_NoneNone": "Single Bracket", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_LowLim_OpenNone": "Single Bracket", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_LowLim_NoneNone": "Parentesi quadra singola", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_LowLim_OpenNone": "Parentesi quadra singola", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Round": "Parentesi", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Round_Delimiter_2": "Parentesi con separatori", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Round_NoneOpen": "Single Bracket", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Round_OpenNone": "Single Bracket", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Round_NoneOpen": "Parentesi quadra singola", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Round_OpenNone": "Parentesi quadra singola", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Square": "Parentesi", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Square_CloseClose": "Parentesi", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Square_CloseOpen": "Parentesi", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Square_NoneOpen": "Single Bracket", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Square_OpenNone": "Single Bracket", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Square_NoneOpen": "Parentesi quadra singola", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Square_OpenNone": "Parentesi quadra singola", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Square_OpenOpen": "Parentesi", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_SquareDouble": "Parentesi", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_SquareDouble_NoneOpen": "Single Bracket", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_SquareDouble_OpenNone": "Single Bracket", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_SquareDouble_NoneOpen": "Parentesi quadra singola", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_SquareDouble_OpenNone": "Parentesi quadra singola", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_UppLim": "Parentesi", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_UppLim_NoneOpen": "Single Bracket", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_UppLim_OpenNone": "Single Bracket", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_UppLim_NoneOpen": "Parentesi quadra singola", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_UppLim_OpenNone": "Parentesi quadra singola", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFractionDiagonal": "Frazione obliqua", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFractionDifferential_1": "Differential", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFractionDifferential_2": "Differential", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFractionDifferential_3": "Differential", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFractionDifferential_1": "Differenziale", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFractionDifferential_2": "Differenziale", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFractionDifferential_3": "Differenziale", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFractionDifferential_4": "Differential", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFractionHorizontal": "Frazione lineare", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFractionPi_2": "Pi Over 2", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFractionPi_2": "Pi diviso 2", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFractionSmall": "Frazione piccola", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFractionVertical": "Frazione impilata", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFunction_1_Cos": "Funzione di coseno inversa", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFunction_1_Cosh": "Hyperbolic Inverse Cosine Function", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFunction_1_Cot": "Funzione di cotangente inversa", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFunction_1_Coth": "Hyperbolic Inverse Cotangent Function", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFunction_1_Csc": "Funzione di cosecante inversa", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFunction_1_Csch": "Hyperbolic Inverse Cosecant Function", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFunction_1_Sec": "Funzione di secante inversa", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFunction_1_Sech": "Hyperbolic Inverse Secant Function", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFunction_1_Sin": "Funzione di seno inversa", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFunction_1_Sinh": "Hyperbolic Inverse Sine Function", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFunction_1_Tan": "Funzione di tangente inversa", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFunction_1_Tanh": "Hyperbolic Inverse Tangent Function", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFunction_Cos": "Cosine Function", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFunction_1_Cos": "Funzione coseno inversa", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFunction_1_Cosh": "Funzione coseno iperbolica inversa", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFunction_1_Cot": "Funzione cotangente inversa", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFunction_1_Coth": "Funzione cotangente iperbolica inversa", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFunction_1_Csc": "Funzione cosecante inversa", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFunction_1_Csch": "Funzione cosecante iperbolica inversa ", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFunction_1_Sec": "Funzione secante inversa", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFunction_1_Sech": "Funziono secante iperbolica inversa", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFunction_1_Sin": "Funzione seno inversa", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFunction_1_Sinh": "Funzione seno iperbolica inversa", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFunction_1_Tan": "Funzione tangente inversa", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFunction_1_Tanh": "Funzione tangente iperbolica inversa", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFunction_Cos": "Funzione Coseno", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFunction_Cosh": "Funzione coseno iperbolica", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFunction_Cot": "Cotangent Function", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFunction_Coth": "Cotangente iperbolica", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFunction_Cot": "Funzione Cotangente", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFunction_Coth": "Funzione cotangente iperbolica", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFunction_Csc": "Funzione cosecante", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFunction_Csch": "Funzione cosecante iperbolica", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFunction_Custom_1": "Sine theta", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFunction_Custom_1": "Seno theta", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFunction_Custom_2": "Cos 2x", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFunction_Custom_3": "Tangent formula", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFunction_Custom_3": "Formula Tangente", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFunction_Sec": "Funzione secante", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFunction_Sech": "Hyperbolic Secant Function", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFunction_Sech": "Funzione secante iperbolica inversa", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFunction_Sin": "Funzione seno", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFunction_Sinh": "Hyperbolic Sine Function", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFunction_Sinh": "Funzione seno iperbolica", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFunction_Tan": "Funzione tangente", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFunction_Tanh": "Hyperbolic Tangent Function", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFunction_Tanh": "Funzione tangente iperbolica", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtIntegral": "Integrale", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtIntegral_dtheta": "Differential theta", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtIntegral_dx": "Differential x", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtIntegral_dy": "Differential y", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtIntegral_dtheta": "Differenziale theta", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtIntegral_dx": "Differenziale x", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtIntegral_dy": "Differenziale y", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtIntegralCenterSubSup": "Integrale", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtIntegralDouble": "Double Integral", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtIntegralDoubleCenterSubSup": "Double Integral", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtIntegralDoubleSubSup": "Double Integral", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtIntegralOriented": "Contour Integral", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtIntegralOrientedCenterSubSup": "Contour Integral", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtIntegralOrientedDouble": "Surface Integral", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtIntegralOrientedDoubleCenterSubSup": "Surface Integral", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtIntegralOrientedDoubleSubSup": "Surface Integral", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtIntegralOrientedSubSup": "Contour Integral", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtIntegralDouble": "Doppio integrale", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtIntegralDoubleCenterSubSup": "Doppio integrale", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtIntegralDoubleSubSup": "Doppio integrale", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtIntegralOriented": "Integrazione di contorno", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtIntegralOrientedCenterSubSup": "Integrazione di contorno", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtIntegralOrientedDouble": "Superficie Integrale", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtIntegralOrientedDoubleCenterSubSup": "Superficie Integrale", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtIntegralOrientedDoubleSubSup": "Superficie Integrale", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtIntegralOrientedSubSup": "Integrazione di contorno", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtIntegralOrientedTriple": "Volume Integrale", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtIntegralOrientedTripleCenterSubSup": "Volume Integrale", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtIntegralOrientedTripleSubSup": "Volume Integrale", @@ -869,20 +905,20 @@ "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtIntegralTriple": "Triplo Integrale", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtIntegralTripleCenterSubSup": "Triplo Integrale", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtIntegralTripleSubSup": "Triplo Integrale", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Conjunction": "Wedge", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Conjunction_CenterSub": "Wedge", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Conjunction_CenterSubSup": "Wedge", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Conjunction_Sub": "Wedge", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Conjunction_SubSup": "Wedge", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Conjunction": "Cuneo", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Conjunction_CenterSub": "Cuneo", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Conjunction_CenterSubSup": "Cuneo", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Conjunction_Sub": "Cuneo", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Conjunction_SubSup": "Cuneo", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_CoProd": "Co-Prodotto", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_CoProd_CenterSub": "Co-Prodotto", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_CoProd_CenterSubSup": "Co-Prodotto", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_CoProd_Sub": "Co-Prodotto", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_CoProd_SubSup": "Co-Prodotto", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Custom_1": "Summation", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Custom_2": "Summation", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Custom_3": "Summation", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Custom_4": "Product", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Custom_1": "Somma", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Custom_2": "Somma", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Custom_3": "Somma", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Custom_4": "Prodotto", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Custom_5": "Unione", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Disjunction": "Vee", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Disjunction_CenterSub": "Vee", @@ -894,16 +930,16 @@ "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Intersection_CenterSubSup": "Intersezione", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Intersection_Sub": "Intersezione", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Intersection_SubSup": "Intersezione", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Prod": "Product", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Prod_CenterSub": "Product", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Prod_CenterSubSup": "Product", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Prod_Sub": "Product", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Prod_SubSup": "Product", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Sum": "Summation", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Sum_CenterSub": "Summation", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Sum_CenterSubSup": "Summation", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Sum_Sub": "Summation", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Sum_SubSup": "Summation", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Prod": "Prodotto", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Prod_CenterSub": "Prodotto", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Prod_CenterSubSup": "Prodotto", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Prod_Sub": "Prodotto", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Prod_SubSup": "Prodotto", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Sum": "Somma", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Sum_CenterSub": "Somma", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Sum_CenterSubSup": "Somma", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Sum_Sub": "Somma", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Sum_SubSup": "Somma", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Union": "Unione", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Union_CenterSub": "Unione", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Union_CenterSubSup": "Unione", @@ -911,73 +947,73 @@ "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_Union_SubSup": "Unione", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLimitLog_Custom_1": "Esempio limite", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLimitLog_Custom_2": "Esempio Massimo", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLimitLog_Lim": "Limit", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLimitLog_Ln": "Natural Logarithm", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLimitLog_Log": "Logarithm", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLimitLog_LogBase": "Logarithm", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLimitLog_Max": "Maximum", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLimitLog_Lim": "Limite", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLimitLog_Ln": "Logaritmo Naturale", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLimitLog_Log": "Logaritmo", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLimitLog_LogBase": "Logaritmo", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLimitLog_Max": "Massimo", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLimitLog_Min": "Minimo", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtMarginsH": "I margini superiore e inferiore sono troppo alti per una determinata altezza di pagina", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtMarginsW": "Left and right margins are too wide for a given page width", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtMarginsW": "I margini sinistro e destro sono troppo larghi per una determinata larghezza di pagina", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtMatrix_1_2": "1x2 Matrice Vuota", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtMatrix_1_3": "1x3 Matrice Vuota", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtMatrix_2_1": "2x1 Matrice Vuota", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtMatrix_2_2": "2x2 Matrice Vuota", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtMatrix_2_2_DLineBracket": "Empty Matrix with Brackets", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtMatrix_2_2_LineBracket": "Empty Matrix with Brackets", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtMatrix_2_2_RoundBracket": "Empty Matrix with Brackets", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtMatrix_2_2_SquareBracket": "Empty Matrix with Brackets", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtMatrix_2_2_DLineBracket": "Matrice vuota con parentesi", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtMatrix_2_2_LineBracket": "Matrice vuota con parentesi", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtMatrix_2_2_RoundBracket": "Matrice vuota con parentesi", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtMatrix_2_2_SquareBracket": "Matrice vuota con parentesi", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtMatrix_2_3": "2x3 Matrice Vuota", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtMatrix_3_1": "3x1 Matrice Vuota", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtMatrix_3_2": "3x2 Matrice Vuota", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtMatrix_3_3": "3x3 Matrice Vuota", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtMatrix_Dots_Baseline": "Baseline Dots", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtMatrix_Dots_Center": "Midline Dots", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtMatrix_Dots_Diagonal": "Diagonal Dots", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtMatrix_Dots_Vertical": "Vertical Dots", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtMatrix_Flat_Round": "Sparse Matrix", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtMatrix_Flat_Square": "Sparse Matrix", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtMatrix_Dots_Baseline": "Punti di base", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtMatrix_Dots_Center": "Punti linea mediana", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtMatrix_Dots_Diagonal": "Punti diagonali", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtMatrix_Dots_Vertical": "Punti verticali", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtMatrix_Flat_Round": "Matrice sparsa", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtMatrix_Flat_Square": "Matrice sparsa", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtMatrix_Identity_2": "2x2 Matrice di identità", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtMatrix_Identity_2_NoZeros": "3x3 Matrice di identità", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtMatrix_Identity_3": "3x3 Matrice di identità", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtMatrix_Identity_3_NoZeros": "3x3 Matrice di identità", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtOperator_ArrowD_Bot": "Right-Left Arrow Below", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtOperator_ArrowD_Top": "Right-Left Arrow Above", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtOperator_ArrowL_Bot": "Leftwards Arrow Below", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtOperator_ArrowL_Top": "Leftwards Arrow Above", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtOperator_ArrowR_Bot": "Rightwards Arrow Below", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtOperator_ArrowR_Top": "Rightwards Arrow Above", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtOperator_ArrowD_Bot": "Freccia Destra-Sinistra in basso", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtOperator_ArrowD_Top": "Freccia Destra-Sinistra in alto", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtOperator_ArrowL_Bot": "Freccia verso sinistra sotto", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtOperator_ArrowL_Top": "Freccia verso sinistra sopra", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtOperator_ArrowR_Bot": "Freccia a destra bassa", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtOperator_ArrowR_Top": "Freccia a destra alta", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtOperator_ColonEquals": "Due punti uguali", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtOperator_Custom_1": "Rendimenti", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtOperator_Custom_2": "Delta Yields", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtOperator_Definition": "Equal to By Definition", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtOperator_Custom_2": "Rendimenti delta", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtOperator_Definition": "Uguale a Per definizione", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtOperator_DeltaEquals": "Delta uguale a", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtOperator_DoubleArrowD_Bot": "Right-Left Arrow Below", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtOperator_DoubleArrowD_Top": "Right-Left Arrow Above", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtOperator_DoubleArrowL_Bot": "Leftwards Arrow Below", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtOperator_DoubleArrowL_Top": "Leftwards Arrow Above", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtOperator_DoubleArrowR_Bot": "Rightwards Arrow Below", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtOperator_DoubleArrowR_Top": "Rightwards Arrow Above", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtOperator_EqualsEquals": "Equal Equal", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtOperator_DoubleArrowD_Bot": "Freccia Destra-Sinistra in basso", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtOperator_DoubleArrowD_Top": "Freccia Destra-Sinistra in alto", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtOperator_DoubleArrowL_Bot": "Freccia verso sinistra sotto", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtOperator_DoubleArrowL_Top": "Freccia verso sinistra sopra", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtOperator_DoubleArrowR_Bot": "Freccia a destra bassa", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtOperator_DoubleArrowR_Top": "Freccia a destra alta", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtOperator_EqualsEquals": "Uguale Uguale", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtOperator_MinusEquals": "Meno uguale", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtOperator_PlusEquals": "Plus Equal", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtOperator_UnitOfMeasure": "Measured By", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtRadicalCustom_1": "Radical", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtOperator_PlusEquals": "Più Uguale", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtOperator_UnitOfMeasure": "Misurato con", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtRadicalCustom_1": "Radicale", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtRadicalCustom_2": "Radical", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtRadicalRoot_2": "Square Root With Degree", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtRadicalRoot_3": "Cubic Root", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtRadicalRoot_n": "Radical With Degree", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtRadicalSqrt": "Square Root", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtRadicalRoot_2": "Radice quadrata con Grado", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtRadicalRoot_3": "Radice Cubica", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtRadicalRoot_n": "Radicale con grado", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtRadicalSqrt": "Radice Quadrata", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtScriptCustom_1": "Script", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtScriptCustom_2": "Script", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtScriptCustom_3": "Script", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtScriptCustom_4": "Script", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtScriptSub": "Subscript", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtScriptSubSup": "Subscript-Superscript", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtScriptSubSupLeft": "LeftSubscript-Superscript", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtScriptSup": "Superscript", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtScriptSub": "Pedice", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtScriptSubSup": "Pedice-Apice", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtScriptSubSupLeft": "Pedice-Apice sinistro", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtScriptSup": "Apice", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_about": "Approssimativamente", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_additional": "Complement", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_additional": "Complemento", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_aleph": "Alef", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_alpha": "Alfa", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_approx": "Quasi uguale a", @@ -986,80 +1022,80 @@ "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_beth": "Bet", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_bullet": "Operatore elenco puntato", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_cap": "Intersezione", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_cbrt": "Cube Root", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_cdots": "Ellissi orizzontale di linea media", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_cbrt": "Radice cubica", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_cdots": "Ellissi orizzontale di linea mediana", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_celsius": "Gradi Celsius", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_chi": "Chi", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_cong": "Approssimativamente uguale a", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_cup": "Unione", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_ddots": "Down Right Diagonal Ellipsis", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_ddots": "Ellissi diagonale in basso a destra", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_degree": "Gradi", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_delta": "Delta", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_div": "Division Sign", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_downarrow": "Down Arrow", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_emptyset": "Empty Set", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_div": "Segno di divisione", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_downarrow": "Freccia in giù", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_emptyset": "Insieme vuoto", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_epsilon": "Epsilon", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_equals": "Equal", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_equiv": "Identical To", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_equals": "Uguale", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_equiv": "Identico a", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_eta": "Eta", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_exists": "Esiste", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_factorial": "Factorial", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_factorial": "Fattoriale", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_fahrenheit": "Gradi Fahrenheit", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_forall": "For All", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_forall": "Per tutti", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_gamma": "Gamma", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_geq": "Greater Than or Equal To", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_gg": "Much Greater Than", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_greater": "Greater Than", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_in": "Element Of", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_inc": "Increment", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_infinity": "Infinity", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_geq": "Maggiore o uguale a", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_gg": "Molto più grande di", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_greater": "Più grande di", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_in": "Elemento Di", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_inc": "Incremento", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_infinity": "Infinito", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_iota": "Iota", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_kappa": "Kappa", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_lambda": "Lambda", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_leftarrow": "Left Arrow", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_leftrightarrow": "Left-Right Arrow", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_leq": "Less Than or Equal To", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_less": "Less Than", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_ll": "Much Less Than", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_leftarrow": "Freccia Sinistra", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_leftrightarrow": "Freccia sinistra-destra", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_leq": "Minore o uguale a ", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_less": "Meno di", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_ll": "Molto meno di", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_minus": "Meno", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_mp": "Meno più", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_mu": "Mu", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_nabla": "Nabla", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_neq": "Not Equal To", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_ni": "Contains as Member", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_not": "Not Sign", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_neq": "Diverso da", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_ni": "Contiene come Membro", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_not": "Segno no", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_notexists": "Non esiste", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_nu": "Nu", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_o": "Omicron", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_omega": "Omega", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_partial": "Differenziale Parziale", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_percent": "Percentage", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_percent": "Percentuale", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_phi": "Phi", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_pi": "Pi", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_plus": "Plus", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_pm": "Plus Minus", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_propto": "Proportional To", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_plus": "Più", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_pm": "Più Meno", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_propto": "Proporzionale a", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_psi": "Psi", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_qdrt": "Fourth Root", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_qed": "End of Proof", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_rddots": "Ellissi in diagonale alto destra", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_qdrt": "Radice Quarta", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_qed": "Fine della dimostrazione", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_rddots": "Ellissi diagonale in alto a destra", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_rho": "Rho", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_rightarrow": "Right Arrow", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_rightarrow": "Freccia destra", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_sigma": "Sigma", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_sqrt": "Radical Sign", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_sqrt": "Simbolo Radicale", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_tau": "Tau", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_therefore": "Dunque", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_theta": "Theta", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_times": "Multiplication Sign", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_times": "Segno di moltiplicazione", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_uparrow": "Freccia su", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_upsilon": "Upsilon", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_varepsilon": "Epsilon Variant", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_varphi": "Phi Variant", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_varpi": "Pi Variant", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_varrho": "Rho Variant", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_varsigma": "Sigma Variant", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_vartheta": "Theta Variant", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_vdots": "Vertical Ellipsis", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_varepsilon": "Variante Epsilon", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_varphi": "Variante Phi", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_varpi": "Variante Pi", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_varrho": "Variante Rho", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_varsigma": "Variante Sigma", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_vartheta": "Variante Theta", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_vdots": "Ellissi verticale", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_xsi": "Xi", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_zeta": "Zeta", "DE.Controllers.Viewport.textFitPage": "Adatta alla pagina", @@ -1079,7 +1115,7 @@ "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textSort": "Ordina per", "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textTitle": "Segnalibri", "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.txtInvalidName": "il nome del Segnalibro può contenere solo lettere, numeri e underscore, e dovrebbe iniziare con la lettera", - "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textAdd": "Aggiungi", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textAdd": "Aggiungi etichetta", "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textAfter": "Dopo", "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textBefore": "Prima", "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textCaption": "Didascalia", @@ -1087,7 +1123,7 @@ "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textChapterInc": "Includi il numero del capitolo", "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textColon": "due punti", "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textDash": "trattino", - "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textDelete": "Elimina", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textDelete": "Elimina etichetta", "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textEquation": "Equazione", "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textExamples": "Esempi: Tabella 2-A, Immagine 1.IV", "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textExclude": "Escludere l'etichetta dalla didascalia", @@ -1108,12 +1144,12 @@ "DE.Views.CellsAddDialog.textRow": "Righe", "DE.Views.CellsAddDialog.textTitle": "Inserisci alcuni", "DE.Views.CellsAddDialog.textUp": "Sopra il cursore", - "DE.Views.CellsRemoveDialog.textCol": "Elimina colonna", + "DE.Views.CellsRemoveDialog.textCol": "Elimina l'intera colonna", "DE.Views.CellsRemoveDialog.textLeft": "Sposta celle a sinistra", - "DE.Views.CellsRemoveDialog.textRow": "Elimina riga", + "DE.Views.CellsRemoveDialog.textRow": "Elimina l'intera riga", "DE.Views.CellsRemoveDialog.textTitle": "Elimina celle", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textAdvanced": "Mostra impostazioni avanzate", - "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textChartType": "Cambia tipo grafico", + "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textChartType": "Cambia tipo di grafico", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textEditData": "Modifica dati", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textHeight": "Altezza", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textOriginalSize": "Dimensione reale", @@ -1153,8 +1189,8 @@ "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textLang": "Lingua", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textLock": "Blocca", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textName": "Titolo", - "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textNewColor": "Colore personalizzato", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textNone": "Nessuno", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textPlaceholder": "Segnaposto", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textShowAs": "Mostra come", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textSystemColor": "Sistema", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textTag": "Etichetta", @@ -1169,6 +1205,12 @@ "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textSeparator": "Divisore Colonna", "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textSpacing": "spaziatura fra le colonne", "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textTitle": "Colonne", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.confirmDefault": "Imposta formato predefinito per {0}: \"{1}\"", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textDefault": "Imposta come predefinito", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textFormat": "Formati", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textLang": "Lingua", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textUpdate": "Aggiorna automaticamente", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.txtTitle": "Data e ora", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.aboveText": "Al di sopra", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.addCommentText": "Aggiungi commento", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.advancedFrameText": "Impostazioni avanzate della cornice", @@ -1177,12 +1219,12 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.advancedText": "Impostazioni avanzate", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.alignmentText": "Allineamento", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.belowText": "Al di sotto", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.breakBeforeText": "Anteponi interruzione", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.bulletsText": "Elenco puntato e Numerato", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.cellAlignText": "Allineamento verticale celle", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.breakBeforeText": "Anteponi Interruzione di pagina", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.bulletsText": "Elenchi puntati e Numerati", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.cellAlignText": "Allineamento verticale cella", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.cellText": "Cella", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.centerText": "Al centro", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.chartText": "Impostazioni grafico avanzate", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.chartText": "Impostazioni avanzate grafico", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.columnText": "Colonna", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.deleteColumnText": "Elimina colonna", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.deleteRowText": "Elimina riga", @@ -1228,13 +1270,13 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.selectText": "Seleziona", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.shapeText": "Impostazioni avanzate forma", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.spellcheckText": "Controllo ortografia", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.splitCellsText": "Dividi cella...", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.splitCellsText": "Divisione cella in corso...", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.splitCellTitleText": "Dividi cella", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.strDelete": "Rimuovi Firma", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.strDetails": "Dettagli firma", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.strSetup": "Impostazioni firma", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.strSign": "Firma", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.styleText": "Formatta come stile", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.styleText": "Formattazione come stile", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.tableText": "Tabella", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textAlign": "Allinea", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textArrange": "Disponi", @@ -1258,11 +1300,12 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFlipV": "Capovolgi verticalmente", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFollow": "Segui mossa", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFromFile": "Da file", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFromStorage": "Da spazio di archiviazione", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFromUrl": "Da URL", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textJoinList": "Iscriviti alla lista precedente", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textNest": "Tabella nidificata", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textNextPage": "Pagina successiva", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textNumberingValue": "Numerazione valore", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textNumberingValue": "Valore di numerazione", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textPaste": "Incolla", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textPrevPage": "Pagina precedente", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textRefreshField": "Aggiorna campo", @@ -1270,8 +1313,8 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textRemoveControl": "Rimuovi il controllo del contenuto", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textReplace": "Sostituisci immagine", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textRotate": "Ruota", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textRotate270": "Ruota 90° a sinistra", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textRotate90": "Ruota 90° a destra", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textRotate270": "Ruota di 90 ° in senso antiorario", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textRotate90": "Ruota di 90 ° in senso orario", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textSeparateList": "Elenco separato", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textSettings": "Impostazioni", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textSeveral": "Alcune righe/colonne", @@ -1290,7 +1333,7 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textUpdatePages": "Aggiorna solo numeri di pagina", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textUpdateTOC": "Aggiorna Sommario", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textWrap": "Stile di disposizione testo", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.tipIsLocked": "Questo elemento sta modificando da un altro utente.", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.tipIsLocked": "Questo elemento è attualmente in fase di modifica da un altro utente.", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.toDictionaryText": "Aggiungi al Dizionario", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtAddBottom": "Aggiungi bordo inferiore", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtAddFractionBar": "Aggiungi barra di frazione", @@ -1303,17 +1346,17 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtAddVer": "Aggiungi linea verticale", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtAlignToChar": "Allinea al carattere", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtBehind": "Dietro al testo", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtBorderProps": "Border properties", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtBorderProps": "Proprietà bordo", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtBottom": "In basso", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtColumnAlign": "Column alignment", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtColumnAlign": "Allineamento colonna", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtDecreaseArg": "Diminuisci dimensione argomento", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtDeleteArg": "Elimina argomento", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtDeleteBreak": "Elimina interruzione manuale", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtDeleteChars": "Rimuovi caratteri allegati", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtDeleteCharsAndSeparators": "Rimuovi caratteri allegati e separatori", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtDeleteChars": "Elimina i caratteri racchiusi", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtDeleteCharsAndSeparators": "Elimina caratteri e separatori inclusi", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtDeleteEq": "Elimina equazione", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtDeleteGroupChar": "Elimina char", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtDeleteRadical": "Rimuovi radicale", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtDeleteRadical": "Elimina radicale", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtDistribHor": "Distribuisci orizzontalmente", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtDistribVert": "Distribuisci verticalmente", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtEmpty": "(Vuoto)", @@ -1325,62 +1368,62 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtGroupCharUnder": "Char sotto il testo", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtHideBottom": "Nascondi il bordo inferiore", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtHideBottomLimit": "Nascondi il limite inferiore", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtHideCloseBracket": "Hide closing bracket", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtHideDegree": "Hide degree", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtHideCloseBracket": "Nascondi parentesi chiusa", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtHideDegree": "Nascondi grado", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtHideHor": "Nascondi linea orizzontale", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtHideLB": "Nascondi linea inferiore sinistra", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtHideLeft": "Nascondi bordo sinistro", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtHideLT": "Nascondi linea superiore sinistra", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtHideOpenBracket": "Hide opening bracket", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtHidePlaceholder": "Nascondi marcatore di posizione", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtHideOpenBracket": "Nascondi parentesi aperta", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtHidePlaceholder": "Nascondi segnaposto", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtHideRight": "Nascondi bordo destro", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtHideTop": "Nascondi bordo superiore", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtHideTopLimit": "Nascondi limite superiore", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtHideVer": "Nascondi linea verticale", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtIncreaseArg": "Increase argument size", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtIncreaseArg": "Aumenta dimensione argomento", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtInFront": "Davanti al testo", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtInline": "In linea", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtInsertArgAfter": "Insert argument after", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtInsertArgBefore": "Insert argument before", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtInsertBreak": "Insert manual break", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtInsertArgAfter": "Inserisci argomento dopo", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtInsertArgBefore": "Inserisci argomento prima", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtInsertBreak": "Inserisci interruzione manuale", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtInsertCaption": "Inserisci didascalia", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtInsertEqAfter": "Insert equation after", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtInsertEqBefore": "Insert equation before", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtInsertEqAfter": "Inserisci Equazione dopo", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtInsertEqBefore": "Inserisci Equazione prima", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtKeepTextOnly": "Mantieni solo il testo", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtLimitChange": "Modifica posizione dei limiti", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtLimitOver": "Limit over text", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtLimitUnder": "Limit under text", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtMatchBrackets": "Match brackets to argument height", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtMatrixAlign": "Matrix alignment", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtLimitOver": "Limite sul testo", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtLimitUnder": "Limite sotto il testo", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtMatchBrackets": "Adatta le parentesi all'altezza dell'argomento", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtMatrixAlign": "Allineamento Matrice", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtOverbar": "Barra sopra al testo", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtOverwriteCells": "Sovrascrivi celle", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtPasteSourceFormat": "Mantieni la formattazione sorgente", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtPressLink": "Premi CTRL e clicca sul collegamento", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtPrintSelection": "Stampa Selezione", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtRemFractionBar": "Rimuovi la barra di frazione", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtRemLimit": "Remove limit", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtRemoveAccentChar": "Remove accent character", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtRemoveBar": "Remove bar", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtRemScripts": "Remove scripts", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtRemSubscript": "Remove subscript", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtRemSuperscript": "Remove superscript", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtScriptsAfter": "Scripts after text", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtScriptsBefore": "Scripts before text", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtShowBottomLimit": "Show bottom limit", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtShowCloseBracket": "Show closing bracket", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtShowDegree": "Show degree", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtShowOpenBracket": "Show opening bracket", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtShowPlaceholder": "Show placeholder", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtShowTopLimit": "Show top limit", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtRemLimit": "Rimuovi limite", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtRemoveAccentChar": "Rimuovi accento carattere", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtRemoveBar": "Elimina barra", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtRemScripts": "Rimuovi gli script", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtRemSubscript": "Elimina pedice", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtRemSuperscript": "Elimina apice", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtScriptsAfter": "Script dopo il testo", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtScriptsBefore": "Script prima del testo", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtShowBottomLimit": "Mostra limite inferiore", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtShowCloseBracket": "Mostra parentesi quadra di chiusura", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtShowDegree": "Mostra grado", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtShowOpenBracket": "Mostra parentesi quadra di apertura", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtShowPlaceholder": "Mostra segnaposto", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtShowTopLimit": "Mostra limite superiore", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtSquare": "Quadrato", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtStretchBrackets": "Stretch brackets", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtStretchBrackets": "Allunga Parentesi", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtThrough": "All'interno", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtTight": "Ravvicinato", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtTop": "Top", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtTop": "In alto", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtTopAndBottom": "Sopra e sotto", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtUnderbar": "Barra sotto al testo", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtUngroup": "Separa", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.updateStyleText": "Aggiorna stile %1", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.updateStyleText": "Aggiorna %1 stile", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.vertAlignText": "Allineamento verticale", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.strBorders": "Bordi e riempimento", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.strDropcap": "Capolettera", @@ -1396,7 +1439,7 @@ "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textCenter": "Al centro", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textColumn": "Colonna", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textDistance": "Distanza dal testo", - "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textExact": "Esatta", + "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textExact": "Esatto", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textFlow": "Cornice dinamica", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textFont": "Tipo di carattere", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textFrame": "Cornice", @@ -1406,9 +1449,8 @@ "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textInMargin": "Nel margine", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textInText": "Nel testo", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textLeft": "A sinistra", - "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textMargin": "Margini", + "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textMargin": "Margine", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textMove": "Sposta col testo", - "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "Colore personalizzato", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textNone": "Nessuno", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textPage": "Pagina", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textParagraph": "Paragrafo", @@ -1430,18 +1472,18 @@ "DE.Views.EditListItemDialog.textValueError": "Un elemento con lo stesso valore esiste già.", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnBackCaption": "Apri percorso file", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnCloseMenuCaption": "Chiudi il menù", - "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnCreateNewCaption": "Crea nuovo oggetto", - "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnDownloadCaption": "Scarica in...", + "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnCreateNewCaption": "Crea una nuova didascalia", + "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnDownloadCaption": "Scarica come...", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnHelpCaption": "Guida...", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnHistoryCaption": "Cronologia delle versioni", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnInfoCaption": "Informazioni documento...", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnPrintCaption": "Stampa", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnProtectCaption": "Proteggi", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnRecentFilesCaption": "Apri recenti...", - "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnRenameCaption": "Rinomina...", + "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnRenameCaption": "Rinomina in corso...", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnReturnCaption": "Torna al documento", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnRightsCaption": "Diritti di accesso...", - "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnSaveAsCaption": "Salva con Nome", + "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnSaveAsCaption": "Salva come", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnSaveCaption": "Salva", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnSaveCopyAsCaption": "Salva copia come...", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnSettingsCaption": "Impostazioni avanzate...", @@ -1457,7 +1499,7 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtAddText": "Aggiungi testo", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtAppName": "Applicazione", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtAuthor": "Autore", - "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtBtnAccessRights": "Cambia diritti di accesso", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtBtnAccessRights": "Modifica diritti di accesso", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtComment": "Commento", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtCreated": "Creato", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtLoading": "Caricamento in corso...", @@ -1467,7 +1509,7 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtPages": "Pagine", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtParagraphs": "Paragrafi", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtPlacement": "Percorso", - "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtRights": "Persone con diritti", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtRights": "Persone che hanno diritti", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtSpaces": "Simboli con spazi", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtStatistics": "Statistiche", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtSubject": "Oggetto", @@ -1475,14 +1517,14 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtTitle": "Titolo documento", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtUploaded": "Caricato", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtWords": "Parole", - "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentRights.txtBtnAccessRights": "Cambia diritti di accesso", - "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentRights.txtRights": "Persone con diritti", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentRights.txtBtnAccessRights": "Modifica diritti di accesso", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentRights.txtRights": "Persone che hanno diritti", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.notcriticalErrorTitle": "Avviso", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.strEncrypt": "con Password", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.strProtect": "Proteggi Documento", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.strSignature": "con Firma", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtEdit": "Modifica documento", - "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtEditWarning": "la modifica eliminerà le firme dal documento.
    Sei sicuro di voler continuare?", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtEditWarning": "La modifica eliminerà le firme dal documento.
    Sei sicuro di voler continuare?", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtEncrypted": "Questo documento è protetto con password", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtRequestedSignatures": "Questo documento necessita di essere firmato", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtSigned": "Le firme valide sono state aggiunte al documento. Il documento è protetto dalla modifica.", @@ -1493,17 +1535,20 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strAutoRecover": "Attiva il ripristino automatico", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strAutosave": "Attiva salvataggio automatico", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strCoAuthMode": "Modalità di co-editing", - "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strCoAuthModeDescFast": "Gli altri utenti vedranno immediatamente i tuoi cambiamenti", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strCoAuthModeDescFast": "Gli altri utenti vedranno le tue modifiche contemporaneamente", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strCoAuthModeDescStrict": "Dovrai accettare i cambiamenti prima di poterli visualizzare.", - "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strFast": "Fast", - "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strFontRender": "Hinting dei caratteri", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strFast": "Rapido", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strFontRender": "Suggerimento per i caratteri", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strForcesave": "Salva sempre sul server (altrimenti salva sul server alla chiusura del documento)", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strInputMode": "Attiva geroglifici", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strLiveComment": "Attivare visualizzazione dei commenti", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strMacrosSettings": "Impostazioni macro", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strPaste": "Taglia, copia e incolla", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strPasteButton": "Mostra pulsante Incolla opzioni quando il contenuto viene incollato", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strResolvedComment": "Attiva la visualizzazione dei commenti risolti", - "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strShowChanges": "Evidenzia modifiche di collaborazione", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strShowChanges": "Evidenzia modifiche di collaborazione in tempo reale", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strSpellCheckMode": "Attiva controllo ortografia", - "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strStrict": "Strict", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strStrict": "Rigorosa", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strUnit": "Unità di misura", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strZoom": "Valore di zoom predefinito", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.text10Minutes": "Ogni 10 minuti", @@ -1519,6 +1564,7 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textMinute": "Ogni minuto", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textOldVersions": "Rendi i file compatibili con le versioni precedenti di MS Word quando vengono salvati come DOCX", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtAll": "Tutte", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtAutoCorrect": "Opzioni di correzione automatica ...", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtCacheMode": "Modalità cache predefinita", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtCm": "Centimetro", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtFitPage": "Adatta alla pagina", @@ -1530,8 +1576,15 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtMac": "come su OS X", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtNative": "Nativo", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtNone": "Niente", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtProofing": "Correzione", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtPt": "Punto", - "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtSpellCheck": "Controllo ortografia", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtRunMacros": "Abilita tutto", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtRunMacrosDesc": "Abilita tutte le macro senza notifica", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtSpellCheck": "Controllo ortografico", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtStopMacros": "Disabilita tutto", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtStopMacrosDesc": "Disabilita tutte le macro senza notifica", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtWarnMacros": "Mostra notifica", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtWarnMacrosDesc": "Disabilita tutte le macro con notifica", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtWin": "come su Windows", "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textBottomCenter": "In basso al centro", "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textBottomLeft": "In basso a sinistra", @@ -1548,12 +1601,12 @@ "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textPageNumbering": "Numerazione pagina", "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textPosition": "Posizione", "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textPrev": "Continua dalla selezione precedente", - "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textSameAs": "Collega a precedente", + "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textSameAs": "Collega al precedente", "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textTopCenter": "In alto al centro", "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textTopLeft": "In alto a sinistra", "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textTopPage": "Inizio pagina", "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textTopRight": "In alto a destra", - "DE.Views.HyperlinkSettingsDialog.textDefault": "Testo selezionato", + "DE.Views.HyperlinkSettingsDialog.textDefault": "Frammento di testo selezionato", "DE.Views.HyperlinkSettingsDialog.textDisplay": "Visualizza", "DE.Views.HyperlinkSettingsDialog.textExternal": "Collegamento esterno", "DE.Views.HyperlinkSettingsDialog.textInternal": "Inserisci nel documento", @@ -1562,7 +1615,7 @@ "DE.Views.HyperlinkSettingsDialog.textUrl": "Collega a", "DE.Views.HyperlinkSettingsDialog.txtBeginning": "Inizio del documento", "DE.Views.HyperlinkSettingsDialog.txtBookmarks": "Segnalibri", - "DE.Views.HyperlinkSettingsDialog.txtEmpty": "Questo campo è richiesto", + "DE.Views.HyperlinkSettingsDialog.txtEmpty": "Campo obbligatorio", "DE.Views.HyperlinkSettingsDialog.txtHeadings": "Intestazioni", "DE.Views.HyperlinkSettingsDialog.txtNotUrl": "Il formato URL richiesto è \"http://www.example.com\"", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textAdvanced": "Mostra impostazioni avanzate", @@ -1574,10 +1627,11 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFitMargins": "Adatta al margine", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFlip": "Capovolgere", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFromFile": "Da file", + "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFromStorage": "Da spazio di archiviazione", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFromUrl": "Da URL", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textHeight": "Altezza", - "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textHint270": "Ruota 90° a sinistra", - "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textHint90": "Ruota 90° a destra", + "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textHint270": "Ruota di 90 ° in senso antiorario", + "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textHint90": "Ruota di 90 ° in senso orario", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textHintFlipH": "Capovolgi orizzontalmente", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textHintFlipV": "Capovolgi verticalmente", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textInsert": "Sostituisci immagine", @@ -1604,6 +1658,7 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Angolo", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textArrows": "Frecce", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAspectRatio": "Blocca proporzioni", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAutofit": "Adatta", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBeginSize": "Dimensioni inizio", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBeginStyle": "Stile inizio", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBelow": "al di sotto", @@ -1616,8 +1671,8 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textCharacter": "Carattere", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textColumn": "Colonna", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textDistance": "Distanza dal testo", - "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textEndSize": "Dimensioni fine", - "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textEndStyle": "Stile fine", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textEndSize": "Dimensione finale", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textEndStyle": "Stile finale", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textFlat": "Uniforme", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textFlipped": "Capovolto", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textHeight": "Altezza", @@ -1629,7 +1684,7 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textLeftMargin": "Margine sinistro", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textLine": "Linea", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textLineStyle": "Stile linea", - "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textMargin": "Margini", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textMargin": "Margine", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textMiter": "Acuto", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textMove": "Sposta oggetto con testo", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textOptions": "Opzioni", @@ -1641,6 +1696,7 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textPositionPc": "Posizione relativa", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textRelative": "rispetto a", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textRelativeWH": "Relativo", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textResizeFit": "Ridimensiona forma per adattarla al testo", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textRight": "A destra", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textRightMargin": "Margine destro", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textRightOf": "a destra di", @@ -1649,6 +1705,7 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textShape": "Impostazioni forma", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textSize": "Dimensione", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textSquare": "Quadrato", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTextBox": "Casella di testo", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTitle": "Immagine - Impostazioni avanzate", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTitleChart": "Grafico - Impostazioni avanzate", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTitleShape": "Forma - Impostazioni avanzate", @@ -1672,7 +1729,7 @@ "DE.Views.LeftMenu.tipNavigation": "Navigazione", "DE.Views.LeftMenu.tipPlugins": "Plugin", "DE.Views.LeftMenu.tipSearch": "Ricerca", - "DE.Views.LeftMenu.tipSupport": "Feedback & Support", + "DE.Views.LeftMenu.tipSupport": "Feedback & Supporto", "DE.Views.LeftMenu.tipTitles": "Titoli", "DE.Views.LeftMenu.txtDeveloper": "MODALITÀ SVILUPPATORE", "DE.Views.LeftMenu.txtTrial": "Modalità di prova", @@ -1698,61 +1755,61 @@ "DE.Views.Links.tipInsertHyperlink": "Aggiungi collegamento ipertestuale", "DE.Views.Links.tipNotes": "Inserisci o modifica Note a piè di pagina", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textAuto": "Automatico", - "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textCenter": "Centrato", - "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textLeft": "Sinistra", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textCenter": "Al centro", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textLeft": "A sinistra", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textLevel": "Livello", - "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textNewColor": "Aggiungi Colore personalizzato", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textPreview": "Anteprima", - "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textRight": "Destra", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textRight": "A destra", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtAlign": "Allineamento", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtBullet": "Elenco puntato", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtColor": "Colore", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtFont": "Carattere e simbolo.", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtLikeText": "Come un testo", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtNewBullet": "Nuovo elenco puntato", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtNone": "Nessuno", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtSize": "Dimensioni", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtSymbol": "Simbolo", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtTitle": "Impostazioni elenco", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtType": "Tipo", "DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.filePlaceholder": "PDF", - "DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.okButtonText": "Send", + "DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.okButtonText": "Invia", "DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.subjectPlaceholder": "Tema", "DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.textAttachDocx": "Allega come DOCX", "DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.textAttachPdf": "Allega come PDF", - "DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.textFileName": "File name", - "DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.textFormat": "Mail format", + "DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.textFileName": "Nome del file", + "DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.textFormat": "Formato mail", "DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.textFrom": "Da", "DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.textHTML": "HTML", "DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.textMessage": "Messaggio", - "DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.textSubject": "Subject Line", - "DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.textTitle": "Send to Email", + "DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.textSubject": "Linea soggetto", + "DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.textTitle": "Invia a e-mail", "DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.textTo": "A", "DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.textWarning": "Avviso!", - "DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.textWarningMsg": "Please note that mailing cannot be stopped once your click the 'Send' button.", + "DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.textWarningMsg": "Si prega di notare che l'invio non può essere interrotto una volta che si fa clic sul pulsante 'Invia'.", "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.downloadMergeTitle": "Unione", - "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.errorMailMergeSaveFile": "Merge failed.", + "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.errorMailMergeSaveFile": "Unione non riuscita", "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.notcriticalErrorTitle": "Avviso", - "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textAddRecipients": "Add some recipients to the list first", - "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textAll": "All records", - "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textCurrent": "Current record", - "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textDataSource": "Data Source", + "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textAddRecipients": "Per prima cosa aggiungi dei destinatari alla lista", + "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textAll": "Tutti le registrazioni", + "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textCurrent": "Registrazione corrente", + "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textDataSource": "Origine dati", "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textDocx": "Docx", "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textDownload": "Scarica", "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textEditData": "Modificare la lista dei destinatari", "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textEmail": "Email", "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textFrom": "Da", "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textGoToMail": "Va' alla Posta", - "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textHighlight": "Highlight merge fields", - "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textInsertField": "Insert Merge Field", - "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textMaxRecepients": "Max 100 recipients.", - "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textMerge": "Merge", - "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textMergeFields": "Merge Fields", + "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textHighlight": "Evidenziare i campi unione", + "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textInsertField": "Inserisci campo unione", + "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textMaxRecepients": "Massimo 100 destinatari.", + "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textMerge": "Unisci", + "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textMergeFields": "Unisci campi", "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textMergeTo": "Unisci a", "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textPdf": "PDF", - "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textPortal": "Save", + "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textPortal": "Salva", "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textPreview": "Anteprima dei risultati", - "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textReadMore": "Read more", - "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textSendMsg": "Tutti i messaggi mail sono pronti e saranno spediti in poco tempo.
    La velocità di invio dipende dal tuo servizio mail.
    Puoi continuare a lavorare con il documento o chiuderlo. Ti verrà recapitata una notifica all'indirizzo email di registrazione al completamento dell'operazione.", + "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textReadMore": "Ulteriori informazioni", + "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textSendMsg": "Tutti i messaggi di posta elettronica sono pronti e saranno inviati in poco tempo.
    La velocità di invio dipende dal tuo servizio mail.
    Puoi continuare a lavorare con il documento o chiuderlo. Al termine dell'operazione, ti verrà recapitata una notifica all'indirizzo email di registrazione.", "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textTo": "A", "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.txtFirst": "Al primo record", "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.txtFromToError": "Il valore \"Da\" deve essere minore del valore \"A\"", @@ -1760,7 +1817,7 @@ "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.txtNext": "Al record successivo", "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.txtPrev": "al record precedente", "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.txtUntitled": "Senza titolo", - "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.warnProcessMailMerge": "Starting merge failed", + "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.warnProcessMailMerge": "Avvio unione non riuscito", "DE.Views.Navigation.txtCollapse": "Comprimi tutto", "DE.Views.Navigation.txtDemote": "Retrocedere", "DE.Views.Navigation.txtEmpty": "Non ci sono titoli nel documento.
    Applica uno stile di titolo al testo in modo che appaia nel sommario.", @@ -1782,9 +1839,9 @@ "DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textFootnote": "Nota a piè di pagina", "DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textFormat": "Formato", "DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textInsert": "Inserisci", - "DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textLocation": "Posizione", + "DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textLocation": "Percorso", "DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textNumbering": "Numerazione", - "DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textNumFormat": "Formato del numero", + "DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textNumFormat": "Formato numero", "DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textPageBottom": "Fondo pagina", "DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textSection": "Sezione attiva", "DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textStart": "Inizia da", @@ -1792,9 +1849,11 @@ "DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textTitle": "Impostazioni delle note", "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.notcriticalErrorTitle": "Avviso", "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textBottom": "In basso", + "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textGutter": "Margine interno", + "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textGutterPosition": "Posizione margine interno", "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textInside": "Dentro", "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textLandscape": "Orizzontale", - "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textLeft": "Left", + "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textLeft": "A sinistra", "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textMirrorMargins": "Margini speculari", "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textMultiplePages": "Più pagine", "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textNormal": "Normale", @@ -1802,14 +1861,14 @@ "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textOutside": "Fuori", "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textPortrait": "Verticale", "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textPreview": "Anteprima", - "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textRight": "Right", - "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textTitle": "Margins", - "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textTop": "Top", + "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textRight": "A destra", + "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textTitle": "Margini", + "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textTop": "In alto", "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.txtMarginsH": "I margini superiore e inferiore sono troppo alti per una determinata altezza di pagina", - "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.txtMarginsW": "Left and right margins are too wide for a given page width", - "DE.Views.PageSizeDialog.textHeight": "Height", + "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.txtMarginsW": "I margini sinistro e destro sono troppo larghi per una determinata larghezza di pagina", + "DE.Views.PageSizeDialog.textHeight": "Altezza", "DE.Views.PageSizeDialog.textPreset": "Preimpostazione", - "DE.Views.PageSizeDialog.textTitle": "Page Size", + "DE.Views.PageSizeDialog.textTitle": "Dimensione pagina", "DE.Views.PageSizeDialog.textWidth": "Larghezza", "DE.Views.PageSizeDialog.txtCustom": "Personalizzato", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.strLineHeight": "Interlinea", @@ -1822,18 +1881,17 @@ "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textAtLeast": "Minima", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textAuto": "Multipla", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textBackColor": "Colore sfondo", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textExact": "Esatta", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textNewColor": "Colore personalizzato", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textExact": "Esatto", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.txtAutoText": "Auto", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.noTabs": "Le schede specificate appariranno in questo campo", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strAllCaps": "Maiuscole", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strAllCaps": "Tutto maiuscolo", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strBorders": "Bordi e riempimento", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strBreakBefore": "Anteponi interruzione", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strBreakBefore": "Anteponi Interruzione di pagina", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strDoubleStrike": "Barrato doppio", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strIndent": "Rientri", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strIndentsLeftText": "A sinistra", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strIndentsLineSpacing": "Interlinea", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strIndentsOutlinelevel": "Livello del contorno", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strIndentsOutlinelevel": "Livello di struttura", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strIndentsRightText": "A destra", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strIndentsSpacingAfter": "Dopo", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strIndentsSpacingBefore": "Prima", @@ -1846,7 +1904,7 @@ "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strParagraphIndents": "Rientri e spaziatura", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strParagraphLine": "Interruzioni di riga e di pagina", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strParagraphPosition": "Posizionamento", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strSmallCaps": "Minuscole", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strSmallCaps": "Maiuscoletto", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strSomeParagraphSpace": "Non aggiungere intervallo tra paragrafi dello stesso stile", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strSpacing": "Spaziatura", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strStrike": "Barrato", @@ -1864,16 +1922,15 @@ "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textBottom": "In basso", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textCentered": "Centrato", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textCharacterSpacing": "Spaziatura caratteri", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textDefault": "Predefinita", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textDefault": "Scheda predefinita", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textEffects": "Effetti", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textExact": "Esatta", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textExact": "Esatto", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textFirstLine": "Prima riga", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textHanging": "Sospensione", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textJustified": "Giustificato", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textLeader": "Leader", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textLeft": "A sinistra", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textLevel": "Livello", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "Colore personalizzato", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textNone": "Nessuno", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textNoneSpecial": "(nessuna)", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textPosition": "Posizione", @@ -1884,7 +1941,7 @@ "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textSpacing": "Spaziatura", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textTabCenter": "Al centro", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textTabLeft": "A sinistra", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textTabPosition": "Posizione", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textTabPosition": "Posizione della scheda", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textTabRight": "A destra", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textTitle": "Paragrafo - Impostazioni avanzate", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textTop": "In alto", @@ -1901,14 +1958,14 @@ "DE.Views.RightMenu.txtChartSettings": "Impostazioni grafico", "DE.Views.RightMenu.txtHeaderFooterSettings": "Impostazioni intestazione e piè di pagina", "DE.Views.RightMenu.txtImageSettings": "Impostazioni immagine", - "DE.Views.RightMenu.txtMailMergeSettings": "Mail Merge Settings", + "DE.Views.RightMenu.txtMailMergeSettings": "Impostazioni Stampa unione", "DE.Views.RightMenu.txtParagraphSettings": "Impostazioni paragrafo", "DE.Views.RightMenu.txtShapeSettings": "Impostazioni forma", "DE.Views.RightMenu.txtSignatureSettings": "Impostazioni della Firma", "DE.Views.RightMenu.txtTableSettings": "Impostazioni tabella", "DE.Views.RightMenu.txtTextArtSettings": "Impostazioni Text Art", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strBackground": "Colore sfondo", - "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Cambia forma", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Modifica forma automatica", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strColor": "Colore", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strFill": "Riempimento", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strForeground": "Colore primo piano", @@ -1925,21 +1982,22 @@ "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textEmptyPattern": "Nessun modello", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textFlip": "Capovolgere", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textFromFile": "Da file", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textFromStorage": "Da spazio di archiviazione", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textFromUrl": "Da URL", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textGradient": "Sfumatura", - "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textGradientFill": "Sfumatura", - "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textHint270": "Ruota 90° a sinistra", - "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textHint90": "Ruota 90° a destra", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textGradientFill": "Riempimento sfumato", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textHint270": "Ruota di 90 ° in senso antiorario", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textHint90": "Ruota di 90 ° in senso orario", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textHintFlipH": "Capovolgi orizzontalmente", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textHintFlipV": "Capovolgi verticalmente", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textImageTexture": "Immagine o trama", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textLinear": "Lineare", - "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textNewColor": "Colore personalizzato", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textNoFill": "Nessun riempimento", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textPatternFill": "Modello", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textRadial": "Radiale", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textRotate90": "Ruota di 90°", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textRotation": "Rotazione", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textSelectImage": "Seleziona immagine", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textSelectTexture": "Seleziona", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textStretch": "Estendi", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textStyle": "Stile", @@ -1948,7 +2006,7 @@ "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textWrap": "Stile di disposizione testo", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.txtBehind": "Dietro al testo", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.txtBrownPaper": "Carta da pacchi", - "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.txtCanvas": "Tappeto", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.txtCanvas": "Tela", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.txtCarton": "Cartone", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.txtDarkFabric": "Tessuto scuro", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.txtGrain": "Grano", @@ -1976,7 +2034,7 @@ "DE.Views.SignatureSettings.strSigner": "Firmatario", "DE.Views.SignatureSettings.strValid": "Firme valide", "DE.Views.SignatureSettings.txtContinueEditing": "Modifica comunque", - "DE.Views.SignatureSettings.txtEditWarning": "la modifica eliminerà le firme dal documento.
    Sei sicuro di voler continuare?", + "DE.Views.SignatureSettings.txtEditWarning": "La modifica eliminerà le firme dal documento.
    Sei sicuro di voler continuare?", "DE.Views.SignatureSettings.txtRequestedSignatures": "Questo documento necessita di essere firmato", "DE.Views.SignatureSettings.txtSigned": "Le firme valide sono state aggiunte al documento. Il documento è protetto dalla modifica.", "DE.Views.SignatureSettings.txtSignedInvalid": "Alcune delle firme digitali preseti nel documento non sono valide o non possono essere verificate. Il documento è protetto dalla modifica.", @@ -1984,21 +2042,21 @@ "DE.Views.Statusbar.pageIndexText": "Pagina {0} di {1}", "DE.Views.Statusbar.tipFitPage": "Adatta alla pagina", "DE.Views.Statusbar.tipFitWidth": "Adatta alla larghezza", - "DE.Views.Statusbar.tipSetLang": "Seleziona lingua del testo", + "DE.Views.Statusbar.tipSetLang": "Imposta lingua del testo", "DE.Views.Statusbar.tipZoomFactor": "Ingrandimento", "DE.Views.Statusbar.tipZoomIn": "Zoom avanti", "DE.Views.Statusbar.tipZoomOut": "Zoom indietro", "DE.Views.Statusbar.txtPageNumInvalid": "Numero pagina non valido", "DE.Views.StyleTitleDialog.textHeader": "Crea nuovo stile", - "DE.Views.StyleTitleDialog.textNextStyle": "Next paragraph style", + "DE.Views.StyleTitleDialog.textNextStyle": "Stile paragrafo successivo", "DE.Views.StyleTitleDialog.textTitle": "Title", "DE.Views.StyleTitleDialog.txtEmpty": "Campo obbligatorio", - "DE.Views.StyleTitleDialog.txtNotEmpty": "Field must not be empty", + "DE.Views.StyleTitleDialog.txtNotEmpty": "Il campo non deve essere vuoto", "DE.Views.StyleTitleDialog.txtSameAs": "Come il nuovo stile creato", - "DE.Views.TableFormulaDialog.textBookmark": "Incolla il segnalibro", - "DE.Views.TableFormulaDialog.textFormat": "Formato del numero", + "DE.Views.TableFormulaDialog.textBookmark": "Incolla segnalibro", + "DE.Views.TableFormulaDialog.textFormat": "Formato numero", "DE.Views.TableFormulaDialog.textFormula": "Formula", - "DE.Views.TableFormulaDialog.textInsertFunction": "Incolla la funzione", + "DE.Views.TableFormulaDialog.textInsertFunction": "Incolla funzione", "DE.Views.TableFormulaDialog.textTitle": "Impostazioni della formula", "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.strAlign": "Numeri di pagina allineati a destra", "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.strLinks": "Formato Sommario come collegamenti", @@ -2008,7 +2066,7 @@ "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.textLevel": "Livello", "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.textLevels": "Livelli", "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.textNone": "Nessuno", - "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.textRadioLevels": "Livelli di tratteggio", + "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.textRadioLevels": "Livelli di struttura", "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.textRadioStyles": "Stili selezionati", "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.textStyle": "Stile", "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.textStyles": "Stili", @@ -2016,7 +2074,7 @@ "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.txtClassic": "Classico", "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.txtCurrent": "Attuale", "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.txtModern": "Moderno", - "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.txtOnline": "Online", + "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.txtOnline": "In linea", "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.txtSimple": "Semplice", "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.txtStandard": "Standard", "DE.Views.TableSettings.deleteColumnText": "Elimina colonna", @@ -2031,13 +2089,13 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettings.selectColumnText": "Seleziona colonna", "DE.Views.TableSettings.selectRowText": "Seleziona riga", "DE.Views.TableSettings.selectTableText": "Seleziona tabella", - "DE.Views.TableSettings.splitCellsText": "Dividi cella...", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.splitCellsText": "Divisione cella in corso...", "DE.Views.TableSettings.splitCellTitleText": "Dividi cella", "DE.Views.TableSettings.strRepeatRow": "Ripeti come riga di intestazione in ogni pagina", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textAddFormula": "Aggiungi formula", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textAdvanced": "Mostra impostazioni avanzate", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textBackColor": "Colore sfondo", - "DE.Views.TableSettings.textBanded": "Altera", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.textBanded": "A strisce", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textBorderColor": "Colore", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textBorders": "Stile bordo", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textCellSize": "Dimensioni di righe e colonne", @@ -2050,7 +2108,6 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettings.textHeader": "Intestazione", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textHeight": "Altezza", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textLast": "Ultima", - "DE.Views.TableSettings.textNewColor": "Colore personalizzato", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textRows": "Righe", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textSelectBorders": "Seleziona i bordi che desideri modificare applicando lo stile scelto sopra", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textTemplate": "Seleziona da modello", @@ -2103,11 +2160,10 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textIndLeft": "Rientro da sinistra", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textLeft": "A sinistra", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textLeftTooltip": "A sinistra", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMargin": "Margini", + "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMargin": "Margine", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMargins": "Margini cella", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMeasure": "Misura in", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMove": "Sposta oggetto con testo", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "Colore personalizzato", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOnlyCells": "Solo per celle selezionate", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOptions": "Opzioni", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOverlap": "Consenti sovrapposizione", @@ -2150,34 +2206,34 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.txtPt": "Punto", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.strColor": "Colore", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.strFill": "Riempimento", - "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.strSize": "Size", - "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.strStroke": "Stroke", - "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.strTransparency": "Opacity", + "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.strSize": "Dimensione", + "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.strStroke": "Tratto", + "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.strTransparency": "Opacità", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.strType": "Tipo", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textBorderSizeErr": "Il valore inserito non è corretto.
    Inserisci un valore tra 0 pt e 1584 pt.", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textColor": "Colore di riempimento", - "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textDirection": "Direction", - "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textGradient": "Gradient", - "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textGradientFill": "Gradient Fill", - "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textLinear": "Linear", - "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textNewColor": "Colore personalizzato", + "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textDirection": "Direzione", + "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textGradient": "Sfumatura", + "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textGradientFill": "Riempimento sfumato", + "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textLinear": "Lineare", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textNoFill": "Nessun riempimento", - "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textRadial": "Radial", - "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textSelectTexture": "Select", - "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textStyle": "Style", - "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textTemplate": "Template", - "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textTransform": "Transform", + "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textRadial": "Radiale", + "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textSelectTexture": "Seleziona", + "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textStyle": "Stile", + "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textTemplate": "Modello", + "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textTransform": "Trasformazione", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.txtNoBorders": "Nessuna linea", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnAddComment": "Aggiungi commento", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnBlankPage": "Pagina Vuota", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnColumns": "Colonne", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnComment": "Commento", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnDateTime": "Data e ora", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsChart": "Grafico", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsControls": "Controlli del contenuto", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsDropcap": "Capolettera", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsEquation": "Equazione", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsHeader": "Inntestazioni/Piè di pagina", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsImage": "Foto", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsImage": "Immagine", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsPagebreak": "Interruzione di pagina", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsShape": "Forma", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsSymbol": "Simbolo", @@ -2202,21 +2258,21 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniEraseTable": "Cancella Tabella", "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniHiddenBorders": "Bordi tabella nascosti", "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniHiddenChars": "Caratteri non stampabili", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniHighlightControls": "selezionare impostazioni", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniHighlightControls": "Evidenzia Impostazioni", "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniImageFromFile": "Immagine da file", "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniImageFromStorage": "Immagine dallo spazio di archiviazione", "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniImageFromUrl": "Immagine da URL", "DE.Views.Toolbar.strMenuNoFill": "Nessun riempimento", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textAutoColor": "Automatico", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textBold": "Grassetto", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.textBottom": "Bottom: ", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textBottom": "In basso: ", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textCheckboxControl": "Casella di controllo", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textColumnsCustom": "Colonne personalizzate", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.textColumnsLeft": "Left", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.textColumnsOne": "One", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.textColumnsRight": "Right", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textColumnsLeft": "A sinistra", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textColumnsOne": "Uno", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textColumnsRight": "A destra", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textColumnsThree": "Tre", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.textColumnsTwo": "Two", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textColumnsTwo": "Due", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textComboboxControl": "Casella combinata", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textContPage": "Pagina continua", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textDateControl": "Data", @@ -2224,7 +2280,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.textEditWatermark": "Filigrana personalizzata", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textEvenPage": "Pagina pari", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textInMargin": "Nel margine", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.textInsColumnBreak": "Insert Column Break", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textInsColumnBreak": "Inserisci interruzione di colonna", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textInsertPageCount": "Inserisci numero delle pagine", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textInsertPageNumber": "Inserisci numero di pagina", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textInsPageBreak": "Inserisci interruzione di pagina", @@ -2232,34 +2288,34 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.textInText": "Nel testo", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textItalic": "Corsivo", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textLandscape": "Orizzontale", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.textLeft": "Left: ", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textLeft": "Sinistra:", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textListSettings": "Impostazioni elenco", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.textMarginsLast": "Last Custom", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textMarginsLast": "Ultima personalizzazione", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textMarginsModerate": "Moderare", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.textMarginsNarrow": "Narrow", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.textMarginsNormal": "Normal", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.textMarginsUsNormal": "US Normal", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.textMarginsWide": "Wide", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.textNewColor": "Colore personalizzato", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textMarginsNarrow": "Stretto", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textMarginsNormal": "Normale", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textMarginsUsNormal": "Normale USA", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textMarginsWide": "Larghezza", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textNewColor": "Aggiungi Colore personalizzato", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textNextPage": "Pagina successiva", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textNoHighlight": "Nessuna evidenziazione", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textNone": "Nessuno", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textOddPage": "Pagina dispari", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.textPageMarginsCustom": "Custom margins", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.textPageSizeCustom": "Custom Page Size", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.textPictureControl": "Foto", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textPageMarginsCustom": "Margini personalizzati", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textPageSizeCustom": "Dimensioni pagina personalizzate", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textPictureControl": "Immagine", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textPlainControl": "Inserisci il controllo del contenuto in testo normale", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textPortrait": "Verticale", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textRemoveControl": "Rimuovi il controllo del contenuto", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textRemWatermark": "Rimuovi filigrana", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textRichControl": "RTF", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.textRight": "Right: ", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textRight": "Destra:", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textStrikeout": "Barrato", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textStyleMenuDelete": "Elimina stile", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textStyleMenuDeleteAll": "Elimina tutti gli stili personalizzati", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textStyleMenuNew": "Nuovo stile da selezione", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.textStyleMenuRestore": "Restore to default", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.textStyleMenuRestoreAll": "Restore all to default styles", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textStyleMenuRestore": "Ripristina ai valori predefiniti", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textStyleMenuRestoreAll": "Ripristina tutti gli stili predefiniti", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textStyleMenuUpdate": "Aggiorna da selezione", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textSubscript": "Pedice", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textSuperscript": "Apice", @@ -2276,7 +2332,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTop": "in alto:", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textUnderline": "Sottolineato", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipAlignCenter": "Allinea al centro", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipAlignJust": "Giustifica", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipAlignJust": "Giustificato", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipAlignLeft": "Allinea a sinistra", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipAlignRight": "Allinea a destra", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipBack": "Indietro", @@ -2284,10 +2340,11 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipChangeChart": "Cambia tipo di grafico", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipClearStyle": "Cancella stile", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipColorSchemas": "Cambia combinazione colori", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipColumns": "Insert columns", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipColumns": "Inserisci colonne", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipControls": "Inserisci i controlli del contenuto", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipCopy": "Copia", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipCopyStyle": "Copia stile", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipDateTime": "Inserisci data e ora correnti", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipDecFont": "Riduci dimensione caratteri", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipDecPrLeft": "Riduci rientro", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipDropCap": "Inserisci capolettera", @@ -2302,21 +2359,21 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipIncFont": "Aumenta dimensione caratteri ", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipIncPrLeft": "Aumenta rientro", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertChart": "Inserisci grafico", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertEquation": "Insert Equation", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertEquation": "Inserisci Equazione", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertImage": "Inserisci immagine", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertNum": "Inserisci numero di pagina", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Inserisci forma", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Inserisci forma automatica", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSymbol": "Inserisci Simbolo", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertTable": "Inserisci tabella", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertText": "Inserisci casella di testo", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertTextArt": "Inserisci Text Art", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipLineSpace": "Interlinea tra i paragrafi", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipMailRecepients": "Unione della Corrispondenza", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipLineSpace": "Interlinea paragrafo", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipMailRecepients": "Stampa unione", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipMarkers": "Elenchi puntati", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipMultilevels": "Struttura", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipNumbers": "Elenchi numerati", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipPageBreak": "Inserisci interruzione di pagina o di sezione", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipPageMargins": "Page Margins", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipPageMargins": "Margini della pagina", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipPageOrient": "Orientamento pagina", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipPageSize": "Dimensione pagina", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipParagraphStyle": "Stile paragrafo", @@ -2342,7 +2399,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme11": "Metro", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme12": "Modulo", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme13": "Mito", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme14": "Loggia", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme14": "Oriel", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme15": "Satellite", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme16": "Carta", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme17": "Solstizio", @@ -2353,26 +2410,28 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme21": "Verve", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme3": "Vertice", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme4": "Aspetto", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme5": "Città", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme5": "Civico", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme6": "Viale", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme7": "Universo", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme7": "Azionario", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme8": "Flusso", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme9": "Galassia", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme9": "Fonderia", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textAuto": "Auto", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textBold": "Grassetto", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textColor": "Colore del testo", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textDiagonal": "Diagonale", - "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textFont": "Carattere", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textFont": "Tipo di carattere", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textFromFile": "Da file", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textFromStorage": "Da spazio di archiviazione", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textFromUrl": "Da URL", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textHor": "Orizzontale", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textImageW": "Immagine filigrana", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textItalic": "Corsivo", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textLanguage": "Lingua", - "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textLayout": "Layout", - "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textNewColor": "Colore personalizzato", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textLayout": "Layout di Pagina", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textNewColor": "Aggiungi Colore personalizzato", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textNone": "Nessuno", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textScale": "Ridimensiona", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textSelect": "Seleziona Immagine", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textStrikeout": "Barrato", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textText": "Testo", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textTextW": "Testo filigrana", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/ja.json b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/ja.json index 97550f996..5c7d06ee0 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/ja.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/ja.json @@ -10,12 +10,13 @@ "Common.Controllers.ExternalMergeEditor.warningText": "他のユーザは編集しているのためオブジェクトが無効になります。", "Common.Controllers.ExternalMergeEditor.warningTitle": "警告", "Common.Controllers.History.notcriticalErrorTitle": "警告", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textAcceptBeforeCompare": "文書を比較するために、文書内のすべての変更履歴が承認されたと見なされます。続行しますか?", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textAtLeast": "最小", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textAuto": "自動", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textBaseline": "ベースライン", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textBold": "太字", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textBreakBefore": "前に改ページ", - "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textCaps": "全てのキャップ", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textCaps": "全ての英大文字", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textCenter": "中央揃え", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textChart": "グラフ", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textColor": "フォントの色", @@ -25,9 +26,9 @@ "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textEquation": "数式", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textExact": "固定値", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textFirstLine": "最初の行", - "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textFontSize": "フォントサイズ", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textFontSize": "フォントのサイズ", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textFormatted": "書式付き", - "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textHighlight": "蛍光ペンの色", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textHighlight": "強調表示の色", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textImage": "画像", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textIndentLeft": "左インデント", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textIndentRight": "右インデント", @@ -40,36 +41,80 @@ "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textLineSpacing": "行間:", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textMultiple": "複数", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textNoBreakBefore": "前にページ区切りなし", - "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textNoContextual": "同じなスタイルの段落の間に間隔の追加", - "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textNoKeepLines": "行や段落の途中で改ページされる", - "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textNoKeepNext": "行や段落の途中で改ページされる", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textNoContextual": "同じなスタイルの段落の間に間隔を追加する", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textNoKeepLines": "段落を分割する", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textNoKeepNext": "次の段落と分離する", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textNot": "ありません", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textNoWidow": "改ページ時1行残して段落を区切らないを制御しない。", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textNum": "番号設定の変更", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textParaDeleted": "段落が削除されました", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textParaFormatted": "段落の書式変更", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textParaInserted": "段落が挿入されました", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textParaMoveFromDown": "下に移動された:", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textParaMoveFromUp": "上に移動された:", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textParaMoveTo": "移動された:", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textPosition": "位置", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textRight": "右揃え", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textShape": "図形", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textShd": "背景色", - "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textSmallCaps": "小型英大文字\t", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textSmallCaps": "小型英大文字", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textSpacing": "間隔", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textSpacingAfter": "段落の後の行間", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textSpacingBefore": "段落の前の行間", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textStrikeout": "取り消し線", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textSubScript": "下付き", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textSuperScript": "上付き文字", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textTableChanged": "テーブル設定が変更されました", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textTableRowsAdd": "テーブルに行が追加されました", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textTableRowsDel": "テーブル行が削除されました", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textTabs": "タブの変更", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textUnderline": "下線", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textUrl": "文書へのURLリンクの貼り付け", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textWidow": "改ページ時1行残して段落を区切らないを制御する。", "Common.define.chartData.textArea": "面グラフ", "Common.define.chartData.textBar": "横棒グラフ", + "Common.define.chartData.textCharts": "グラフ", "Common.define.chartData.textColumn": "縦棒グラフ", "Common.define.chartData.textLine": "折れ線グラフ", "Common.define.chartData.textPie": "円グラフ", "Common.define.chartData.textPoint": "点グラフ", "Common.define.chartData.textStock": "株価チャート", + "Common.define.chartData.textSurface": "表面", + "Common.Translation.warnFileLocked": "文書が別のアプリで使用されています。編集を続けて、コピーとして保存できます。", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textApril": "四月", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textAugust": "八月", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textDecember": "十二月", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textFebruary": "二月", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textJanuary": "一月", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textJuly": "七月", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textJune": "六月", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textMarch": "三月", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textMay": "五月", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textMonths": "月", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textNovember": "十一月", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textOctober": "十月", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textSeptember": "九月", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortApril": "四月", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortAugust": "八月", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortDecember": "十二月", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortFebruary": "二月", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortFriday": "金", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortJanuary": "一月", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortJuly": "七月", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortJune": "六月", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortMarch": "三月", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortMay": "五月", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortMonday": "月", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortNovember": "十一月", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortOctober": "十月", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortSaturday": "土", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortSeptember": "九月", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortSunday": "日", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortThursday": "木", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortTuesday": "火", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortWednesday": "水", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textYears": "年", + "Common.UI.ColorButton.textNewColor": "カスタム色を追加", "Common.UI.ComboBorderSize.txtNoBorders": "罫線なし", "Common.UI.ComboBorderSizeEditable.txtNoBorders": "罫線なし", "Common.UI.ComboDataView.emptyComboText": "スタイルなし", @@ -91,6 +136,8 @@ "Common.UI.SearchDialog.txtBtnReplaceAll": "全ての置き換え", "Common.UI.SynchronizeTip.textDontShow": "今後このメッセージを表示しない", "Common.UI.SynchronizeTip.textSynchronize": "ドキュメントは他のユーザーによって変更されました。
    変更を保存するためにここでクリックし、アップデートを再ロードしてください。", + "Common.UI.ThemeColorPalette.textStandartColors": "標準の色", + "Common.UI.ThemeColorPalette.textThemeColors": "テーマ色", "Common.UI.Window.cancelButtonText": "キャンセル", "Common.UI.Window.closeButtonText": "閉じる", "Common.UI.Window.noButtonText": "いいえ", @@ -110,6 +157,9 @@ "Common.Views.About.txtPoweredBy": "Powered by", "Common.Views.About.txtTel": "電話番号:", "Common.Views.About.txtVersion": "バージョン", + "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textMathCorrect": "数式オートコレクト", + "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textReplace": "置き換える:", + "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textTitle": "オートコレクト", "Common.Views.Chat.textSend": "送信", "Common.Views.Comments.textAdd": "追加", "Common.Views.Comments.textAddComment": "コメントの追加", @@ -121,6 +171,7 @@ "Common.Views.Comments.textComments": "コメント", "Common.Views.Comments.textEdit": "編集", "Common.Views.Comments.textEnterCommentHint": "コメントをここに挿入する", + "Common.Views.Comments.textHintAddComment": "コメントを追加", "Common.Views.Comments.textOpenAgain": "もう一度開きます", "Common.Views.Comments.textReply": "返信", "Common.Views.Comments.textResolve": "解決", @@ -139,8 +190,34 @@ "Common.Views.ExternalMergeEditor.textClose": "閉じる", "Common.Views.ExternalMergeEditor.textSave": "保存&終了", "Common.Views.ExternalMergeEditor.textTitle": "差し込み印刷の宛先", - "Common.Views.Header.textBack": "ドキュメントに移動", - "Common.Views.ImageFromUrlDialog.textUrl": "画像のURLの貼り付け", + "Common.Views.Header.textAdvSettings": "詳細設定", + "Common.Views.Header.textBack": "ファイルのURLを開く", + "Common.Views.Header.textCompactView": "ツールバーを隠す", + "Common.Views.Header.textHideLines": "ルーラを隠す", + "Common.Views.Header.textHideStatusBar": "ステータス・バーを隠す", + "Common.Views.Header.textSaveBegin": "保存中", + "Common.Views.Header.textSaveChanged": "更新された", + "Common.Views.Header.textSaveEnd": "変更が保存された", + "Common.Views.Header.textSaveExpander": "変更が保存された", + "Common.Views.Header.textZoom": "拡大図", + "Common.Views.Header.tipAccessRights": "文書のアクセス許可のの管理", + "Common.Views.Header.tipDownload": "ファイルをダウンロード", + "Common.Views.Header.tipGoEdit": "現在のファイルを編集する", + "Common.Views.Header.tipPrint": "印刷", + "Common.Views.Header.tipRedo": "やり直す", + "Common.Views.Header.tipSave": "保存する", + "Common.Views.Header.tipUndo": "元に戻す", + "Common.Views.Header.tipViewSettings": "設定の表示", + "Common.Views.Header.tipViewUsers": "ユーザーの表示と文書のアクセス権の管理", + "Common.Views.Header.txtAccessRights": "アクセス権限の変更", + "Common.Views.Header.txtRename": "名前の変更", + "Common.Views.History.textCloseHistory": "履歴を閉じる", + "Common.Views.History.textHide": "縮小する", + "Common.Views.History.textHideAll": "詳細な変更を隠す", + "Common.Views.History.textRestore": "復元する", + "Common.Views.History.textShow": "展開する", + "Common.Views.History.textShowAll": "詳細な変更を表示する", + "Common.Views.ImageFromUrlDialog.textUrl": "画像URLの貼り付け", "Common.Views.ImageFromUrlDialog.txtEmpty": "このフィールドは必須項目です", "Common.Views.ImageFromUrlDialog.txtNotUrl": "このフィールドは「http://www.example.com」の形式のURLである必要があります。", "Common.Views.InsertTableDialog.textInvalidRowsCols": "有効な行と列の数を指定する必要があります。", @@ -149,17 +226,156 @@ "Common.Views.InsertTableDialog.txtMinText": "このフィールドの最小値は{0}です。", "Common.Views.InsertTableDialog.txtRows": "行数", "Common.Views.InsertTableDialog.txtTitle": "表のサイズ", + "Common.Views.LanguageDialog.labelSelect": "文書の言語を選択する", + "Common.Views.OpenDialog.closeButtonText": "ファイルを閉じる", "Common.Views.OpenDialog.txtEncoding": "エンコード", + "Common.Views.OpenDialog.txtIncorrectPwd": "パスワードが正しくありません。", + "Common.Views.OpenDialog.txtPassword": "パスワード", + "Common.Views.OpenDialog.txtPreview": "下見", + "Common.Views.OpenDialog.txtProtected": "パスワードを入力してファイルを開くと、ファイルの既存のパスワードがリセットされます。", "Common.Views.OpenDialog.txtTitle": "%1オプションの選択", + "Common.Views.OpenDialog.txtTitleProtected": "保護ファイル", + "Common.Views.PasswordDialog.txtDescription": "この文書を保護するためのパスワードを設定してください", + "Common.Views.PasswordDialog.txtIncorrectPwd": "先に入力したパスワードと一致しません。", + "Common.Views.PasswordDialog.txtPassword": "パスワード", + "Common.Views.PasswordDialog.txtRepeat": "パスワードを再入力", + "Common.Views.PasswordDialog.txtTitle": "パスワードの設定", + "Common.Views.PluginDlg.textLoading": "読み込み中", + "Common.Views.Plugins.groupCaption": "プラグイン", + "Common.Views.Plugins.strPlugins": "プラグイン", + "Common.Views.Plugins.textLoading": "読み込み中", + "Common.Views.Plugins.textStart": "スタート", + "Common.Views.Plugins.textStop": "停止", + "Common.Views.Protection.hintAddPwd": "パスワードを使用して暗号化", + "Common.Views.Protection.hintPwd": "パスワードを変更か削除する", + "Common.Views.Protection.hintSignature": "デジタル署名かデジタル署名行を追加", + "Common.Views.Protection.txtAddPwd": "パスワードの追加", + "Common.Views.Protection.txtChangePwd": "パスワードを変更する", + "Common.Views.Protection.txtDeletePwd": "パスワード削除", + "Common.Views.Protection.txtEncrypt": "暗号化する", + "Common.Views.Protection.txtInvisibleSignature": "デジタル署名を追加", + "Common.Views.Protection.txtSignature": "サイン", + "Common.Views.Protection.txtSignatureLine": "署名欄の追加", + "Common.Views.RenameDialog.textName": "ファイル名", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.hintNext": "次の変更箇所", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.mniFromFile": "ファイルからの文書", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.mniFromStorage": "ストレージからの文書", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.mniFromUrl": "URLからの文書", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.mniSettings": "比較設定", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.strFast": "ファスト", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.strFastDesc": "リアルタイムの共同編集です。すべての変更は自動的に保存されます。", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipAcceptCurrent": "今の変更を反映する", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipCoAuthMode": "共同編集モードを設定する", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipCommentRem": "コメントを削除する", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipCommentRemCurrent": "現在のコメントを削除する", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipCompare": "現在の文書を別の文書と比較する", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipHistory": "バージョン履歴を表示する", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipRejectCurrent": "現在の変更を元に戻します。", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipReview": "変更履歴", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipReviewView": "変更を表示するモードを選択してください", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipSetDocLang": "文書の言語を設定する", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipSetSpelling": "スペル チェック", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipSharing": "文書のアクセス許可のの管理", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtAccept": "同意する", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtAcceptAll": "すべての変更を反映する", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtAcceptChanges": "変更を反映", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtAcceptCurrent": "今の変更を反映する", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtChat": "チャット", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtClose": "閉じる", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCoAuthMode": "共同編集のモード", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCommentRemAll": "全てのコメントを削除する", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCommentRemCurrent": "現在のコメントを削除する", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCommentRemMy": "私のコメントを削除する", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCommentRemMyCurrent": "私の現在のコメントを削除する", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCommentRemove": "削除する", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCompare": "比較", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtDocLang": "言語", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtFinal": "変更は承認", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtFinalCap": "最終版", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtHistory": "バージョン履歴", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtMarkup": "全ての変更(編集)", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtMarkupCap": "マークアップ", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtNext": "次の変更箇所", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtOriginal": "変更は拒否(下見)", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtOriginalCap": "原本", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtPrev": "前の​​変更箇所", - "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtReject": "変更前に戻す", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtReject": "拒否する", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtRejectAll": "すべての変更を元に戻す", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtRejectChanges": "変更を拒否する", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtRejectCurrent": "現在の変更を元に戻します。", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtSharing": "共有する", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtSpelling": "スペル チェック", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtTurnon": "変更履歴", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtView": "表示モード", + "Common.Views.ReviewChangesDialog.textTitle": "変更の確認", + "Common.Views.ReviewChangesDialog.txtAccept": "同意する", + "Common.Views.ReviewChangesDialog.txtAcceptAll": "すべての変更を反映する", + "Common.Views.ReviewChangesDialog.txtAcceptCurrent": "今の変更を反映する", + "Common.Views.ReviewChangesDialog.txtNext": "次の変更箇所", + "Common.Views.ReviewChangesDialog.txtReject": "拒否する", + "Common.Views.ReviewChangesDialog.txtRejectAll": "すべての変更を元に戻す", + "Common.Views.ReviewChangesDialog.txtRejectCurrent": "現在の変更を元に戻します。", + "Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textAdd": "追加", + "Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textAddReply": "返信する", + "Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textCancel": "キャンセル", + "Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textClose": "閉じる", + "Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textEdit": "OK", + "Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textFollowMove": "移動する", + "Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textMention": "+言及されるユーザーは文書にアクセスのメール通知を取得します", + "Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textMentionNotify": "+言及されるユーザーはメールで通知されます", + "Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textOpenAgain": "もう一度開きます", + "Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textReply": "返事する", + "Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textResolve": "解決", + "Common.Views.SaveAsDlg.textLoading": "読み込み中", + "Common.Views.SaveAsDlg.textTitle": "保存先のフォルダ", + "Common.Views.SelectFileDlg.textLoading": "読み込み中", + "Common.Views.SelectFileDlg.textTitle": "データ・ソースを選択する", + "Common.Views.SignDialog.textBold": "太字", + "Common.Views.SignDialog.textCertificate": "証明書", + "Common.Views.SignDialog.textChange": "変更する", + "Common.Views.SignDialog.textInputName": "署名者の名前を入力", + "Common.Views.SignDialog.textItalic": "斜体", + "Common.Views.SignDialog.textPurpose": "この文書にサインする目的", + "Common.Views.SignDialog.textSelect": "選択", + "Common.Views.SignDialog.textSelectImage": "画像を選択する", + "Common.Views.SignDialog.textSignature": "署名は次のようになります", + "Common.Views.SignDialog.textTitle": "文書のサイン", + "Common.Views.SignDialog.textUseImage": "または画像を署名として使用するため、「画像の選択」をクリックしてください", + "Common.Views.SignDialog.tipFontName": "フォント名", + "Common.Views.SignDialog.tipFontSize": "フォントのサイズ", + "Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textAllowComment": " 署名者が署名ダイアログにコメントを追加できるようにする", + "Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textInfo": "署名者情報", + "Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textInfoEmail": "メール", + "Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textInfoName": "名前", + "Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textInfoTitle": "署名者の役職", + "Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textInstructions": "署名者への説明", + "Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textShowDate": "署名欄に署名日を表示する", + "Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textTitle": "署名の設定", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textCharacter": "文字", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textCopyright": "著作権マーク", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textDCQuote": "閉じ二重引用符", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textDOQuote": "二重の左引用符", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textEllipsis": "水平の省略記号", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textEmDash": "全角ダッシュ", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textEmSpace": "全角スペース", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textEnDash": "半角ダッシュ", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textEnSpace": "半角スペース", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textFont": "フォント", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textNBHyphen": "保護されたハイフン", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textNBSpace": "保護されたスペース", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textPilcrow": "段落記号", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textQEmSpace": "1/4全角スペース", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textRange": "範囲", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textRecent": "最近使用した記号", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textRegistered": "商標記号", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSCQuote": "閉じ一重引用符", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSection": "節記号", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textShortcut": "ショートカットキー", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSOQuote": "開始単一引用符", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSpecial": "特殊文字", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSymbols": "記号", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textTitle": "記号", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textTradeMark": "商標記号", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.leavePageText": "変更を保存しないでドキュメントを閉じると変更が失われます。
    保存するために「キャンセル 」、後に「保存」をクリックします。保存していないすべての変更を破棄するために、「OK」をクリックします。", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.newDocumentTitle": "名前が付けられていないドキュメント", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.notcriticalErrorTitle": "警告", @@ -169,6 +385,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.textReplaceSkipped": "置換が行われました。スキップされた発生回数は{0}です。", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.textReplaceSuccess": "検索が行われました。変更された発生回数は{0}です。", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.warnDownloadAs": "この形式で保存し続ける場合は、テキスト以外のすべての機能が失われます。
    続行してもよろしいですか?", + "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.warnDownloadAsRTF": "この形式で保存を続けると、一部の書式が失われる可能性があります。
    続行しますか?", "DE.Controllers.Main.applyChangesTextText": "変更の読み込み中...", "DE.Controllers.Main.applyChangesTitleText": "変更の読み込み中", "DE.Controllers.Main.convertationTimeoutText": "変換のタイムアウトを超過しました。", @@ -179,12 +396,20 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.downloadMergeTitle": "ダウンロード中", "DE.Controllers.Main.downloadTextText": "ドキュメントのダウンロード中...", "DE.Controllers.Main.downloadTitleText": "ドキュメントのダウンロード中", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorAccessDeny": "権限のない操作をしようとしています。
    ドキュメント・サーバー管理者に連絡してください。", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorBadImageUrl": "画像のURLが正しくありません", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorCoAuthoringDisconnect": "サーバーとの接続が失われました。今、文書を編集することができません。", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorConnectToServer": "文書を保存できませんでした。接続設定を確認するか、管理者にお問い合わせください。
    OKボタンをクリックするとドキュメントをダウンロードするように求められます。", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorDatabaseConnection": "外部エラーです。
    データベース接続エラーです。この問題は解決しない場合は、サポートにお問い合わせください。", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorDataEncrypted": "暗号化された変更を受信しました。残念ながら解読できません。", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorDataRange": "データ範囲が正しくありません", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorDefaultMessage": "エラー コード:%1", - "DE.Controllers.Main.errorFilePassProtect": "ドキュメントがパスワードで保護されているため開くことができません", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorDirectUrl": "文書へのリンクを確認してください。
    このリンクは、ダウンロードしたいファイルへの直接なリンクであるのは必要です。", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorEditingDownloadas": "文書の処理中にエラーが発生しました。
    PCにファイルのバックアップを保存するように「としてダウンロード」を使用してください。", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorEditingSaveas": "文書の処理中にエラーが発生しました。
    PCにファイルのバックアップを保存するように「名前を付けて保存」を使用してください。", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorEmailClient": "メールクライアントが見つかりませんでした。", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorFilePassProtect": "文書がパスワードで保護されているため開くことができません", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorForceSave": "文書の保存中にエラーが発生しました。PCにファイルを保存するように「としてダウンロード」を使用し、または後で再試行してください。", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorKeyEncrypt": "不明なキーの記述子", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorKeyExpire": "署名キーは期限切れました。", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorMailMergeLoadFile": "読み込みの失敗", @@ -192,22 +417,25 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.errorProcessSaveResult": "保存に失敗しました", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorStockChart": "行の順序が正しくありません。この株価チャートを作成するには、
    始値、高値、安値、終値の順でシートのデータを配置してください。", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorUpdateVersion": "ファイルのバージョンが変更されました。ページが再ロードされます。", - "DE.Controllers.Main.errorUserDrop": "今、ファイルにアクセスすることはできません。", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorUpdateVersionOnDisconnect": "インターネット接続が復旧し、ファイルのバージョンが更新されています。
    作業を継続する前に、ファイルをダウンロードするか内容をコピーして、変更が消えてしまわないようにしてからページを再読み込みしてください。", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorUserDrop": "ファイルにアクセスできません", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorUsersExceed": "料金プランによってユーザ数を超過しています。", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorViewerDisconnect": "接続が切断された。文書を表示が可能ですが、
    接続を復旧し、ページを再読み込む前に、ダウンロード・印刷できません。", "DE.Controllers.Main.leavePageText": "この文書の保存されていない変更があります。保存するために「このページにとどまる」、「保存」をクリックしてください。全ての保存しない変更をキャンサルするために「このページを離れる」をクリックしてください。", "DE.Controllers.Main.loadFontsTextText": "データを読み込んでいます", "DE.Controllers.Main.loadFontsTitleText": "データを読み込んでいます", "DE.Controllers.Main.loadFontTextText": "データを読み込んでいます", "DE.Controllers.Main.loadFontTitleText": "データを読み込んでいます", - "DE.Controllers.Main.loadImagesTextText": "イメージの読み込み中...", - "DE.Controllers.Main.loadImagesTitleText": "イメージの読み込み中", - "DE.Controllers.Main.loadImageTextText": "イメージの読み込み中...", - "DE.Controllers.Main.loadImageTitleText": "イメージの読み込み中", + "DE.Controllers.Main.loadImagesTextText": "画像の読み込み中...", + "DE.Controllers.Main.loadImagesTitleText": "画像の読み込み中", + "DE.Controllers.Main.loadImageTextText": "画像の読み込み中...", + "DE.Controllers.Main.loadImageTitleText": "画像の読み込み中", "DE.Controllers.Main.loadingDocumentTextText": "ドキュメントを読み込んでいます…", "DE.Controllers.Main.loadingDocumentTitleText": "ドキュメントを読み込んでいます…", "DE.Controllers.Main.mailMergeLoadFileText": "データ ソースを読み込んでいます...", "DE.Controllers.Main.mailMergeLoadFileTitle": "データ ソースを読み込んでいます", "DE.Controllers.Main.notcriticalErrorTitle": "警告", + "DE.Controllers.Main.openErrorText": "ファイルを開く中にエラーが発生しました", "DE.Controllers.Main.openTextText": "ドキュメントを開いています...", "DE.Controllers.Main.openTitleText": "ドキュメントを開いています", "DE.Controllers.Main.printTextText": "印刷ドキュメント中...", @@ -215,6 +443,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.reloadButtonText": "ページの再読み込み", "DE.Controllers.Main.requestEditFailedMessageText": "この文書は他のユーザによって編集しています。後で編集してください。", "DE.Controllers.Main.requestEditFailedTitleText": "アクセスが拒否されました", + "DE.Controllers.Main.saveErrorText": "ファイル保存中にエラーが発生しました", "DE.Controllers.Main.savePreparingText": "保存の準備中", "DE.Controllers.Main.savePreparingTitle": "保存の準備中です。お待ちください。", "DE.Controllers.Main.saveTextText": "ドキュメントを保存しています...", @@ -225,40 +454,265 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.splitMaxColsErrorText": "列の数は%1より小さくなければなりません。", "DE.Controllers.Main.splitMaxRowsErrorText": "行数は%1より小さくなければなりません。", "DE.Controllers.Main.textAnonymous": "匿名", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textApplyAll": "全ての数式に適用する", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textBuyNow": "ウェブサイトを訪問する", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textChangesSaved": "変更が保存された", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textClose": "閉じる", "DE.Controllers.Main.textCloseTip": "ヒントを閉じるためにクリックください", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textContactUs": "営業部を連絡する", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textCustomLoader": "ライセンスの条件によっては、ローダーを変更する権利がないことにご注意ください。
    見積もりについては、営業部門にお問い合わせください。", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textLearnMore": "詳細はこちら", "DE.Controllers.Main.textLoadingDocument": "ドキュメントを読み込んでいます", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textNoLicenseTitle": "%1 接続の制限", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textPaidFeature": "有料機能", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textRemember": "選択内容を保存", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textShape": "図形", "DE.Controllers.Main.textStrict": "厳格モード", "DE.Controllers.Main.textTryUndoRedo": "ファスト共同編集モードに元に戻す/やり直しの機能は無効になります。
    他のユーザーの干渉なし編集するために「厳密なモード」をクリックして、厳密な共同編集モードに切り替えてください。保存した後にのみ、変更を送信してください。編集の詳細設定を使用して共同編集モードを切り替えることができます。", + "DE.Controllers.Main.titleLicenseExp": "ライセンス期限を過ぎました", + "DE.Controllers.Main.titleServerVersion": "エディターが更新された", "DE.Controllers.Main.titleUpdateVersion": "バージョンを変更しました。", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtAbove": "上", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtArt": "あなたのテキストはここです。", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtBasicShapes": "基本図形", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtBelow": "下", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtBookmarkError": "エラー! ブックマークが定義されていません。", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtButtons": "ボタン", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtCallouts": "引き出し", - "DE.Controllers.Main.txtCharts": "チャート", - "DE.Controllers.Main.txtDiagramTitle": "グラフのタイトル", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtCharts": "グラフ", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtChoose": "アイテムを選択してください。", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtCurrentDocument": "現在文書", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtDiagramTitle": "グラフ名", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtEditingMode": "編集モードを設定します。", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtEnterDate": "日付を入力します。", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtErrorLoadHistory": "履歴の読み込みに失敗しました。", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtEvenPage": "偶数ページ", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtFiguredArrows": "形の矢印", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtFirstPage": "最初のページ", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtFooter": "フッター", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtHeader": "ヘッダー", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtHyperlink": "ハイパーリンク", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtIndTooLarge": "インデックス番号が大きすぎます", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtLines": "行", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtMainDocOnly": "エラー!メイン文書のみ。", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtMath": "数学", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtMissArg": "引数がありません", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtMissOperator": "演算子がありません ", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtNeedSynchronize": "更新があります。", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtNoText": "エラー!文書に指定されたスタイルのテキストがありません。", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtNotInTable": "テーブルにありません", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtNotValidBookmark": "エラー!ブックマークセルフリファレンスが無効です。", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtOddPage": "奇数ページ", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtOnPage": "ページで", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtRectangles": "四角形", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtSeries": "系列", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_accentBorderCallout1": "線吹き出し 1(枠付きと強調線)", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_accentBorderCallout2": "線吹き出し 2 (枠付きと強調線)", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_accentBorderCallout3": "線吹き出し 3(枠付きと強調線)", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_accentCallout1": "線吹き出し 1(強調線)", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_accentCallout2": "線吹き出し 2 (強調線)", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_accentCallout3": "線吹き出し 3(強調線)", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_actionButtonBackPrevious": "[戻る]ボタン", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_actionButtonBeginning": "[始めに戻る]ボタン", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_actionButtonBlank": "空白ボタン", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_actionButtonDocument": "文書ボタン", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_actionButtonEnd": "[最後]ボタン", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_actionButtonForwardNext": "[次へ]のボタン", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_actionButtonHelp": "[ヘルプ]のボタン", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_actionButtonHome": "ホームボタン", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_actionButtonInformation": "[情報]ボタン", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_actionButtonMovie": "[ムービー]ボタン", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_actionButtonReturn": "[戻る]ボタン", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_actionButtonSound": "音のボタン", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_arc": "円弧", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_bentArrow": "曲げ矢印", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_bentConnector5": "カギ線コネクタ", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_bentConnector5WithArrow": "カギ線矢印コネクター", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_bentConnector5WithTwoArrows": "カギ線の二重矢印コネクタ", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_bentUpArrow": "屈折矢印", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_bevel": "面取り", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_blockArc": "アーチ", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_borderCallout1": "線吹き出し 1 ", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_borderCallout2": "線吹き出し 2", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_borderCallout3": "線吹き出し 3", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_bracePair": "中かっこ", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_callout1": "線吹き出し 1(枠付き無し)", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_callout2": "線吹き出し 2(枠付き無し)", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_callout3": "線吹き出し 3(枠付き無し)", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_can": "円筒", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_chevron": "シェブロン", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_chord": "コード", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_circularArrow": "円弧の矢印", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_cloud": "雲形", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_cloudCallout": "雲形吹き出し", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_corner": "角", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_cube": "立方体", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_curvedConnector3": "曲線コネクタ", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_curvedConnector3WithArrow": "曲線矢印コネクタ", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_curvedConnector3WithTwoArrows": "曲線の二重矢印コネクタ", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_curvedDownArrow": "曲線の下向きの矢印", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_curvedLeftArrow": "曲線の左矢印", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_curvedRightArrow": "曲線の右矢印", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_curvedUpArrow": "曲線の上矢印", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_decagon": "十角形", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_diagStripe": "斜めストライプ", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_diamond": "ダイヤモンド", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_dodecagon": "12角形", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_donut": "ドーナツ", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_doubleWave": "小波", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_downArrow": "下矢印", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_downArrowCallout": "下矢印吹き出し", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_ellipse": "楕円", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_ellipseRibbon": "湾曲したリボン", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_ellipseRibbon2": "上カーブ リボン", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartAlternateProcess": "フローチャート:代替処理", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartCollate": "フローチャート:照合", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartConnector": "フローチャート: 結合子", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartDecision": "フローチャート: 判断", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartDelay": "フローチャート: 遅延", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartDisplay": "フローチャート: 表示", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartDocument": "フローチャート: 文書", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartExtract": "フローチャート: 抜き出し", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartInputOutput": "フローチャート: データ", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartInternalStorage": "フローチャート: 内部ストレージ", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartMagneticDisk": "フローチャート: 磁気ディスク", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartMagneticDrum": "フローチャート: 直接アクセスのストレージ", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartMagneticTape": "フローチャート: 順次アクセス記憶", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartManualInput": "フローチャート: 手操作入力", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartManualOperation": "フローチャート: 手作業", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartMerge": "フローチャート: 組合せ", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartMultidocument": "フローチャート: 複数文書", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartOffpageConnector": "フローチャート: 他ページ結合子", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartOnlineStorage": "フローチャート: 記憶データ", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartOr": "フローチャート: 論理和", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartPredefinedProcess": "フローチャート: 事前定義されたプロセス", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartPreparation": "フローチャート: 準備", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartProcess": "フローチャート: 処理", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartPunchedCard": "フローチャート:カード", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartPunchedTape": "フローチャート: せん孔テープ", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartSort": "フローチャート: 分類", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartSummingJunction": "フローチャート: 和接合", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartTerminator": "フローチャート:  端子", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_foldedCorner": "折り曲げコーナー", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_frame": "フレーム", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_halfFrame": "半フレーム", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_heart": "心", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_heptagon": "七角形", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_hexagon": "六角形", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_homePlate": "五角形", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_horizontalScroll": "水平スクロール", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_irregularSeal1": "爆発 1", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_irregularSeal2": "爆発 2", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_leftArrow": "左矢印", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_leftArrowCallout": "左矢印吹き出し", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_leftBrace": "左ブレース", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_leftBracket": "左かっこ", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_leftRightArrow": "左右矢印", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_leftRightArrowCallout": "左右矢印吹き出し", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_leftRightUpArrow": "三方向矢印", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_leftUpArrow": "左上矢印", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_lightningBolt": "稲妻", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_line": "ライン", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_lineWithArrow": "矢印", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_lineWithTwoArrows": "二重矢印", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_mathDivide": "分割", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_mathEqual": "等号", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_mathMinus": "マイナス", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_mathMultiply": "乗算する", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_mathNotEqual": "不等号", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_mathPlus": "プラス", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_moon": "月形", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_noSmoking": "\"禁止\"マーク", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_notchedRightArrow": "切り欠き右矢印", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_octagon": "八角形", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_parallelogram": "平行四辺形", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_pentagon": "五角形", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_pie": "円グラフ", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_plus": "プラス", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_polyline2": "フリーフォーム", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_quadArrow": "クワッド矢印", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_quadArrowCallout": "四角矢印の吹き出し", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_rect": "長方形", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_ribbon": "ダウンリボン", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_ribbon2": "上リボン", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_rightArrow": "右矢印", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_rightArrowCallout": "右矢印吹き出し", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_rightBrace": "右ブレース", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_rightBracket": "右かっこ", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_round1Rect": "1つの角を丸めた四角形", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_round2DiagRect": "円形対角長方形", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_round2SameRect": "同じ辺の角を丸める矩形", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_roundRect": "角丸四角形", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_rtTriangle": "直角三角形", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_smileyFace": "絵文字", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_spline": "曲線", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star10": "十芒星", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star12": "十二芒星", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star16": "十六芒星", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star24": "二十四芒星", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star32": "三十二芒星", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star4": "四芒星", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star5": "五芒星", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star6": "六芒星", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star7": "七芒星", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star8": "八芒星", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_sun": "太陽形", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_textRect": "テキストボックス", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_trapezoid": "台形", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_triangle": "三角形", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_upArrow": "上矢印", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_upArrowCallout": "上矢印吹き出し", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_upDownArrow": "上下の矢印", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_verticalScroll": "縦スクロール", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_wave": "波", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_wedgeEllipseCallout": "円形吹き出し", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_wedgeRectCallout": "長方形の吹き出し", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_wedgeRoundRectCallout": "角丸長方形の吹き出し", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtStarsRibbons": "スター&リボン", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_Caption": "図表番号", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_footnote_text": "脚注テキスト", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_Heading_1": "見出し1", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_Heading_2": "見出し2", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_Heading_3": "見出し3", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_Heading_4": "見出し4", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_Heading_5": "見出し5", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_Heading_6": "見出し6", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_Heading_7": "見出し7", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_Heading_8": "見出し8", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_Heading_9": "見出し9", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_Intense_Quote": "強調表示され引用", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_List_Paragraph": "箇条書き", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_No_Spacing": "間隔無し", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_Normal": "正常", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_Quote": "引用", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_Subtitle": "小見出し", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_Title": "タイトル", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtSyntaxError": "構文間違い", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtTableOfContents": "目次", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtTooLarge": "数値が大きすぎて書式設定できません。", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtTypeEquation": "こちらで数式を入力してください", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtXAxis": "X 軸", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtYAxis": "Y 軸", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtZeroDivide": "ゼロ除算", "DE.Controllers.Main.unknownErrorText": "不明なエラー", "DE.Controllers.Main.unsupportedBrowserErrorText": "お使いのブラウザがサポートされていません。", - "DE.Controllers.Main.uploadImageExtMessage": "不明なイメージ形式です", - "DE.Controllers.Main.uploadImageFileCountMessage": "アップロードした画像なし", + "DE.Controllers.Main.uploadDocFileCountMessage": "アップロードされた文書がありません", + "DE.Controllers.Main.uploadDocSizeMessage": "文書の最大サイズ制限を超えました", + "DE.Controllers.Main.uploadImageExtMessage": "不明な画像形式", + "DE.Controllers.Main.uploadImageFileCountMessage": "アップロードされた画像がない", "DE.Controllers.Main.uploadImageSizeMessage": "最大イメージサイズの極限を超えました。", - "DE.Controllers.Main.uploadImageTextText": "アップロード画像...", - "DE.Controllers.Main.uploadImageTitleText": "イメージをアップロードしています", + "DE.Controllers.Main.uploadImageTextText": "画像がアップロード中...", + "DE.Controllers.Main.uploadImageTitleText": "画像がアップロード中", + "DE.Controllers.Main.waitText": "少々お待ちください...", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnBrowserIE9": "IE9にアプリケーションの機能のレベルが低いです。IE10または次のバージョンを使ってください。", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnBrowserZoom": "お使いのブラウザの現在のズームの設定は完全にサポートされていません。Ctrl+0を押して、デフォルトのズームにリセットしてください。", + "DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExp": "ライセンスの期限が切れました。
    ライセンスを更新して、ページをリロードしてください。", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnProcessRightsChange": "ファイルを編集する権限を拒否されています。", + "DE.Controllers.Navigation.txtBeginning": "文書の先頭", + "DE.Controllers.Navigation.txtGotoBeginning": "文書の先頭に移動します", "DE.Controllers.Statusbar.textHasChanges": "新しい変更が追跡された。", "DE.Controllers.Statusbar.textTrackChanges": "有効な変更履歴のモードにドキュメントがドキュメントが開かれました。", + "DE.Controllers.Statusbar.tipReview": "変更履歴", "DE.Controllers.Statusbar.zoomText": "ズーム{0}%", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.confirmAddFontName": "保存しようとしているフォントを現在のデバイスで使用することができません。
    システムフォントを使って、テキストのスタイルが表示されます。利用できます時、保存されたフォントが使用されます。
    続行しますか。", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.notcriticalErrorTitle": "警告", @@ -268,6 +722,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.textFontSizeErr": "入力された値が正しくありません。
    1〜100の数値を入力してください。", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.textFraction": "分数", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.textFunction": "関数", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.textInsert": "挿入する", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.textIntegral": "積分", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.textLargeOperator": "大型演算子", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.textLimitAndLog": "制限と対数", @@ -595,11 +1050,60 @@ "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_vdots": "垂直線の省略記号", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_xsi": "グザイ", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_zeta": "ゼータ", + "DE.Controllers.Viewport.textFitPage": "ページに合わせる", + "DE.Controllers.Viewport.textFitWidth": "幅を合わせる", + "DE.Views.AddNewCaptionLabelDialog.textLabel": "ラベル:", + "DE.Views.AddNewCaptionLabelDialog.textLabelError": "ラベルは空白にできません", + "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textAdd": "追加", + "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textBookmarkName": "ブックマーク名", + "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textClose": "閉じる", + "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textCopy": "コピー", + "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textDelete": "削除する", + "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textGetLink": "リンクを受ける", + "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textGoto": "移動", + "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textHidden": "隠しブックマーク", + "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textLocation": "位置", + "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textName": "名前", + "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textSort": "並べ替え", + "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textTitle": "ブックマーク", + "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.txtInvalidName": "ブックマーク名には、文字、数字、アンダースコアのみを使用でき、先頭は文字である必要があります", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textAdd": "ラベルを追加", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textAfter": "後に", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textBefore": "前", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textCaption": "図表番号", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textChapter": "章タイトルのスタイル", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textChapterInc": "章番号を含める", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textColon": "コロン", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textDash": "ダッシュ", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textDelete": "ラベル削除", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textEquation": "数式", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textExamples": " 例:表 2-A 、図 1.IV", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textExclude": "ラベルを図表番号から除外する", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textFigure": "図形", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textHyphen": "ハイフン", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textInsert": "挿入する", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textLabel": "ラベル", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textLongDash": "長いダッシュ", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textNumbering": "番号付け", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textPeriod": "期間", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textTable": "表", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textTitle": "図表番号の挿入", + "DE.Views.CellsAddDialog.textCol": "列", + "DE.Views.CellsAddDialog.textDown": "カーソルより下", + "DE.Views.CellsAddDialog.textLeft": "左に", + "DE.Views.CellsAddDialog.textRight": "右に", + "DE.Views.CellsAddDialog.textRow": "行", + "DE.Views.CellsAddDialog.textTitle": "複数を挿入する", + "DE.Views.CellsAddDialog.textUp": "カーソルより上", + "DE.Views.CellsRemoveDialog.textCol": "列全体を削除", + "DE.Views.CellsRemoveDialog.textLeft": "左方向にシフト", + "DE.Views.CellsRemoveDialog.textRow": "行全体を削除", + "DE.Views.CellsRemoveDialog.textTitle": "セルを削除する", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textAdvanced": "詳細設定の表示", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textChartType": "グラフの種類の変更", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textEditData": "データの編集", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textHeight": "高さ", - "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textOriginalSize": "既定のサイズ", + "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textOriginalSize": "実際のサイズ", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textSize": "サイズ", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textStyle": "スタイル", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textUndock": "パネルからのドッキング解除", @@ -613,16 +1117,60 @@ "DE.Views.ChartSettings.txtTight": "外周", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.txtTitle": "グラフ", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.txtTopAndBottom": "上と下", + "DE.Views.CompareSettingsDialog.textChar": "文字レベル", + "DE.Views.CompareSettingsDialog.textShow": "変更を表示する", + "DE.Views.CompareSettingsDialog.textTitle": "比較設定", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.strGeneral": "一般的", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textAdd": "追加", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textAppearance": "外観", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textApplyAll": "全てに適用する", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textBox": "境界ボックス", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textChange": "編集する", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textCheckbox": "チェックボックス", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textChecked": "[チェックした]記号", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textColor": "色", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textCombobox": "コンボボックス", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textDate": "日付形式", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textDelete": "削除する", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textDisplayName": "表示名", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textDown": "下", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textDropDown": "ドロップダウン リスト", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textFormat": "日付の表示形式", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textLang": "言語", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textLock": "ロック", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textName": "タイトル", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textNone": "なし", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textPlaceholder": "プレースホルダ", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textShowAs": "として示す", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textSystemColor": "システム", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textTag": "タグ", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textTitle": "コンテンツ コントロール設定", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textUnchecked": "[チェックしない]記号", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textUp": "上", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.tipChange": "記号の変更", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.txtLockDelete": "コンテンツ コントロールの削除不可", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.txtLockEdit": "コンテンツの編集不可", + "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textColumns": "列数", + "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textSeparator": "列の区切り線", + "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textSpacing": "列の間隔", + "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textTitle": "列", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.confirmDefault": "{0}に既定の形式を設定:\"{1}\"", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textDefault": "既定に設定", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textFormat": "形式", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textLang": "言語", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textUpdate": "自動的に更新", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.txtTitle": "日付&時刻", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.aboveText": "上", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.addCommentText": "コメントの追加", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.advancedFrameText": "フレームの詳細設定", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.advancedParagraphText": "段落の詳細設定", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.advancedTableText": "テーブルの詳細設定", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.advancedText": "詳細設定", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.alignmentText": "配置", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.alignmentText": "整列", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.belowText": "下", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.breakBeforeText": "前に改ページ", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.cellAlignText": "セルの縦方向の配置", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.bulletsText": "箇条書きと段落番号", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.cellAlignText": "セルの縦方向の整列", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.cellText": "セル", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.centerText": "中央揃え", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.chartText": "グラフの詳細設定", @@ -634,7 +1182,7 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.direct270Text": "270度回転", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.direct90Text": "90度回転", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.directHText": "水平", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.directionText": "文字の方向", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.directionText": "文字列の方向", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.editChartText": "データ バーの編集", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.editFooterText": "フッターの編集", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.editHeaderText": "ヘッダーの編集", @@ -658,7 +1206,7 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.mergeCellsText": "セルの結合", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.moreText": "以上のバリエーション...", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.noSpellVariantsText": "バリエーションなし", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.originalSizeText": "既定のサイズ", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.originalSizeText": "実際のサイズ", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.paragraphText": "段落", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.removeHyperlinkText": "ハイパーリンクの削除", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.rightText": "右揃え", @@ -673,28 +1221,69 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.spellcheckText": "スペル チェック", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.splitCellsText": "セルの分割...", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.splitCellTitleText": "セルの分割", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.strDelete": "署名の削除", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.strDetails": "サインの詳細", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.strSetup": "署名の設定", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.strSign": "サイン", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.styleText": "スタイルようにフォーマッティングする", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.tableText": "テーブル", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textAlign": "配置する", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textAlign": "整列", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textArrange": "整列", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textArrangeBack": "背景へ移動", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textArrangeBackward": "背面へ移動", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textArrangeForward": "前面へ移動", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textArrangeFront": "前景に移動", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textCells": "セル", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textContentControls": "コンテンツ コントロール", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textContinueNumbering": "番号付けを続行", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textCopy": "コピー", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textCrop": "トリミング", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textCropFill": "塗りつぶし", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textCropFit": "収める", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textCut": "切り取り", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textDistributeCols": "列間を平均にする", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textDistributeRows": "行間を平均にする", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textEditControls": "コンテンツ コントロール設定", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textEditWrapBoundary": "折り返し点の編集", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFlipH": "左右に反転", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFlipV": "上下に反転", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFollow": "移動する", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFromFile": "ファイルから", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFromStorage": "ストレージから", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFromUrl": "URLから", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textJoinList": "前のリストに結合", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textNest": "ネスト表", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textNextPage": "次のページ", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textNumberingValue": "番号", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textPaste": "貼り付け", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textPrevPage": "前のページ", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textRefreshField": "再表示フィールド", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textRemove": "削除する", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textRemoveControl": "コンテンツ コントロールを削除する", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textReplace": "画像の置き換え", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textRotate": "回転させる", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textRotate270": "逆時計方向に90度回転", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textRotate90": "時計方向に90度回転", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textSeparateList": "リストの分離", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textSettings": "設定", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textSeveral": "複数の行/列", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textShapeAlignBottom": "下揃え", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textShapeAlignCenter": "中央揃え", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textShapeAlignLeft": "左揃え", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textShapeAlignMiddle": "上下中央揃え", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textShapeAlignRight": "右揃え", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textShapeAlignTop": "上揃え", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textStartNewList": "新しいリストを開始する", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textStartNumberingFrom": "計数値の設定", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textTOC": "目次", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textTOCSettings": "目次設定", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textUndo": "元に戻す", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textUpdateAll": "テーブル全体の更新", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textUpdatePages": "ページ番号の変更のみ", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textUpdateTOC": "目次を更新する", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textWrap": "折り返しの種類と配置", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.tipIsLocked": "今、この要素が他のユーザによって編集されています。", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.toDictionaryText": "辞書に追加", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtAddBottom": "下罫線の追加", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtAddFractionBar": "分数罫の追加", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtAddHor": "水平線の追加", @@ -704,11 +1293,11 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtAddRight": "右罫線の追加", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtAddTop": "上罫線の追加", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtAddVer": "縦線の追加", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtAlignToChar": "数式の配置", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtAlignToChar": "文字の整列", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtBehind": "背面", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtBorderProps": "罫線の​​プロパティ", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtBottom": "下", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtColumnAlign": "列の配置", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtColumnAlign": "列の整列", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtDecreaseArg": "引数のサイズの縮小", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtDeleteArg": "引数の削除", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtDeleteBreak": "任意指定の改行を削除", @@ -717,6 +1306,9 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtDeleteEq": "数式の削除", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtDeleteGroupChar": "文字の削除", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtDeleteRadical": "べき乗根の削除", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtDistribHor": "左右に整列", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtDistribVert": "上下に整列", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtEmpty": "(空白)", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtFractionLinear": "分数(横)に変更", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtFractionSkewed": "分数(斜め)に変更", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtFractionStacked": "分数(縦)に変更\t", @@ -743,15 +1335,20 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtInsertArgAfter": "後に引数を挿入", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtInsertArgBefore": "前に引数を挿入", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtInsertBreak": "任意指定の改行を挿入", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtInsertCaption": "図表番号の挿入", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtInsertEqAfter": "後に数式の挿入", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtInsertEqBefore": "前に数式の挿入", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtKeepTextOnly": "テキスト保存のみ", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtLimitChange": "極限の位置を変更します。", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtLimitOver": "テキストの上に限定する", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtLimitUnder": "テキストの下に限定する", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtMatchBrackets": "かっこを引数の高さに合わせる", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtMatrixAlign": "行列の配置", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtMatrixAlign": "行列の整列", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtOverbar": "テキストの上のバー", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtOverwriteCells": "セルを上書きする", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtPasteSourceFormat": "元の書式付けを保存する", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtPressLink": "リンクをクリックしてCTRLを押してください。 ", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtPrintSelection": "選択範囲の印刷", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtRemFractionBar": "分数罫の削除", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtRemLimit": "極限の削除", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtRemoveAccentChar": "アクセント記号の削除", @@ -776,15 +1373,15 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtUnderbar": "テキストの下のバー", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtUngroup": "グループ化解除", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.updateStyleText": "%1スタイルの更新", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.vertAlignText": "垂直方向の配置", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.vertAlignText": "垂直方向の整列", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.strBorders": "罫線と塗りつぶし", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.strDropcap": "ドロップ キャップ", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.strMargins": "余白", - "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textAlign": "配置", + "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textAlign": "整列", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textAtLeast": "最小", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textAuto": "自動", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textBackColor": "背景色", - "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textBorderColor": "罫線の色", + "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textBorderColor": "ボーダー色", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textBorderDesc": "罫線を選択するためにダイアグラムをクリックします。または、ボタンを使うことができます。", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textBorderWidth": "罫線のサイズ", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textBottom": "下", @@ -803,7 +1400,6 @@ "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textLeft": "左", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textMargin": "余白", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textMove": "文字列と一緒に移動する", - "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "ユーザー設定の色の追加", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textNone": "なし", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textPage": "ページ", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textParagraph": "段落", @@ -817,20 +1413,27 @@ "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textTop": "トップ", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textVertical": "縦", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textWidth": "幅", - "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.tipFontName": "フォント名", + "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.tipFontName": "フォント", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.txtNoBorders": "罫線なし", - "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnBackCaption": "ドキュメントに移動", + "DE.Views.EditListItemDialog.textDisplayName": "表示名", + "DE.Views.EditListItemDialog.textNameError": "表示名は空白にできません。", + "DE.Views.EditListItemDialog.textValueError": " 同じ値の項目がすでに存在します。", + "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnBackCaption": "ファイルのURLを開く", + "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnCloseMenuCaption": "(←戻る)", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnCreateNewCaption": "新規作成", - "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnDownloadCaption": "ダウンロード...", + "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnDownloadCaption": "としてダウンロード", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnHelpCaption": "ヘルプ...", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnHistoryCaption": "バージョン履歴", - "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnInfoCaption": "ファイル情報...", + "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnInfoCaption": "ファイル情報", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnPrintCaption": "印刷", - "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnRecentFilesCaption": "最近使用した...", + "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnProtectCaption": "保護する", + "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnRecentFilesCaption": "最近使ったファイル", + "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnRenameCaption": "名前変更", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnReturnCaption": "文書に戻る", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnRightsCaption": "アクセス許可...", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnSaveAsCaption": "名前を付けて保存", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnSaveCaption": "保存", + "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnSaveCopyAsCaption": "別名で保存...", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnSettingsCaption": "詳細設定...", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnToEditCaption": "ドキュメントの編集", "DE.Views.FileMenu.textDownload": "ダウンロード", @@ -839,20 +1442,38 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.CreateNew.newDescriptionText": "編集の間スタイルを適用し、フォルマットすることができる新しい空白のテキストドキュメンを作成します。または特定の種類や目的のテキストドキュメンを開始するためにすでにスタイルを適用したテンプレートを選択してください。", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.CreateNew.newDocumentText": "新しいテキスト ドキュメント\t", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.CreateNew.noTemplatesText": "テンプレートなし", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.okButtonText": "適用する", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtAddAuthor": "著者を追加", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtAddText": "テキストの追加", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtAppName": "アプリ", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtAuthor": "作成者", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtBtnAccessRights": "アクセス許可の変更", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtComment": "コメント", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtCreated": "作成された", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtLoading": "読み込み中...", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtModifyBy": "最終更新者", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtModifyDate": "最終更新", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtOwner": "所有者", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtPages": "ページ", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtParagraphs": "段落", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtPlacement": "場所", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtRights": "権利を持っている者", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtSpaces": "スペースを含む記号です。", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtStatistics": "統計", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtSubject": "件名", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtSymbols": "記号", - "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtTitle": "ドキュメント タイトル", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtTitle": "タイトル", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtWords": "文字数", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentRights.txtBtnAccessRights": "アクセス許可の変更", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentRights.txtRights": "権利を持っている者", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.notcriticalErrorTitle": "警告", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.strEncrypt": "パスワードを使って", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.strProtect": "文書を保護", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.strSignature": "サインを使って", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtEdit": "文書を編集する", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtEditWarning": "編集すると、文書から署名が削除されます。
    続行しますか?", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtSignedInvalid": "文書のデジタル署名の一部が無効であるか、検証できませんでした。 文書は編集できないように保護されています。", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtView": "署名の表示", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.okButtonText": "適用", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strAlignGuides": "配置ガイドターンにします。", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strAutoRecover": "自動バックアップをターンにします。", @@ -862,8 +1483,11 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strCoAuthModeDescStrict": "変更を見れる前に、変更を受け入れる必要があります。", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strFast": "ファスト", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strFontRender": "フォントのヒント", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strForcesave": "常にサーバーに保存する(もしくは、文書をを閉じる後、サーバーに保存)", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strInputMode": "漢字をターンにします。", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strLiveComment": "テキストコメントの表示をターンにします。", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strMacrosSettings": "マクロの設定", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strPaste": "切り取り、コピー、貼り付け", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strShowChanges": "リアルタイム共同編集の変更を表示します。", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strSpellCheckMode": "スペル チェックの機能をターンにします。", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strStrict": "高レベル", @@ -873,13 +1497,20 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.text30Minutes": "30 分ごと", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.text5Minutes": "5 分ごと", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.text60Minutes": "1 時間ごと", - "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textAlignGuides": "配置ガイド", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textAlignGuides": "整列ガイド", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textAutoRecover": "自動バックアップ", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textAutoSave": "自動保存", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textCompatible": "互換性", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textDisabled": "無効", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textForceSave": "サーバーに保存する", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textMinute": "1 分ごと", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textOldVersions": " DOCXとして保存する場合は、MS Wordの古いバージョンと互換性のあるファイルにします", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtAll": "全ての表示", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtAutoCorrect": "オートコレクト設定", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtCacheMode": "既定のキャッシュ モード", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtCm": "センチ", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtFitPage": "ページに合わせる", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtFitWidth": "幅を合わせる", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtInch": "インチ", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtInput": "代替入力", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtLast": "最後の", @@ -887,36 +1518,68 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtMac": "OS Xのような", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtNative": "ネイティブ", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtNone": "表示なし", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtProofing": "校正", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtPt": "ポイント", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtRunMacros": "全てを有効にする", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtRunMacrosDesc": "マクロを有効にして、通知しない", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtSpellCheck": "スペル チェック", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtStopMacros": "全てを無効にする", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtStopMacrosDesc": "マクロを無効にして、通知しない", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtWarnMacros": "通知を表示する", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtWarnMacrosDesc": "マクロを無効にして、通知する", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtWin": "Windowsのような", "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textBottomCenter": "左下", "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textBottomLeft": "左下", + "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textBottomPage": "ページの下部", "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textBottomRight": "右下", "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textDiffFirst": "先頭ページのみ別指定\t", "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textDiffOdd": "奇数/偶数ページ別指定", + "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textFrom": "から始まる", "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textHeaderFromBottom": "下からのフッター位置", "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textHeaderFromTop": "上からのヘッダー位置", + "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textInsertCurrent": "現在の位置に挿入", "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textOptions": "オプション", "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textPageNum": "ページ番号の挿入", + "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textPageNumbering": "ページ番号", "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textPosition": "位置", + "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textPrev": "前のセクションから継続", "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textSameAs": "前と同じ​​ヘッダー/フッター", "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textTopCenter": "上中央", "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textTopLeft": "左上", + "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textTopPage": "ページの上部", "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textTopRight": "右上", "DE.Views.HyperlinkSettingsDialog.textDefault": "テキスト フラグメントの選択", "DE.Views.HyperlinkSettingsDialog.textDisplay": "ディスプレイ", + "DE.Views.HyperlinkSettingsDialog.textExternal": "外部リンク", + "DE.Views.HyperlinkSettingsDialog.textInternal": "文書内の場所", "DE.Views.HyperlinkSettingsDialog.textTitle": "ハイパーリンクの設定", "DE.Views.HyperlinkSettingsDialog.textTooltip": "ヒントのテキスト:", "DE.Views.HyperlinkSettingsDialog.textUrl": "リンク", + "DE.Views.HyperlinkSettingsDialog.txtBeginning": "文書の先頭", + "DE.Views.HyperlinkSettingsDialog.txtBookmarks": "ブックマーク", "DE.Views.HyperlinkSettingsDialog.txtEmpty": "このフィールドは必須項目です", + "DE.Views.HyperlinkSettingsDialog.txtHeadings": "見出し", "DE.Views.HyperlinkSettingsDialog.txtNotUrl": "このフィールドは「http://www.example.com」の形式のURLである必要があります。", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textAdvanced": "詳細設定の表示", - "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFromFile": " ファイルから", + "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textCrop": "トリミング", + "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textCropFill": "塗りつぶし", + "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textCropFit": "収める", + "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textEdit": "編集する", + "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textEditObject": "オブジェクトを編集する", + "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFitMargins": "余白内に収まる", + "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFlip": "反転する", + "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFromFile": "ファイルから", + "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFromStorage": "ストレージから", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFromUrl": "URLから", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textHeight": "高さ", - "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textInsert": "画像の置き換え", - "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textOriginalSize": "既定のサイズ", + "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textHint270": "逆時計方向に90度回転", + "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textHint90": "時計方向に90度回転", + "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textHintFlipH": "左右に反転", + "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textHintFlipV": "上下に反転", + "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textInsert": "画像を置き換える", + "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textOriginalSize": "実際のサイズ", + "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textRotate90": "90度回転", + "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textRotation": "回転", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textSize": "サイズ", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textWidth": "幅", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textWrap": "折り返しの種類と配置", @@ -929,9 +1592,14 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettings.txtTopAndBottom": "上と下", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.strMargins": "テキストの埋め込み文字", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAbsoluteWH": "アブソリュート", - "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAlignment": "配置", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAlignment": "整列", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "代替テキスト", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "説明", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "タイトル", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "角", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textArrows": "矢印", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAspectRatio": "縦横比の一定", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAutofit": "自動調整", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBeginSize": "始点のサイズ", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBeginStyle": "始点のスタイル", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBelow": "下", @@ -947,8 +1615,10 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textEndSize": "終点のサイズ", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textEndStyle": "終了スタイル", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textFlat": "フラット", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textFlipped": "反転された", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textHeight": "高さ", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textHorizontal": "水平", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textHorizontally": "水平に", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textJoinType": "結合の種類", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textKeepRatio": "比例の一定", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textLeft": "左", @@ -959,7 +1629,7 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textMiter": "角", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textMove": "文字列と一緒に移動する", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textOptions": "オプション", - "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textOriginalSize": "既定のサイズ", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textOriginalSize": "実際のサイズ", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textOverlap": "オーバーラップさせる", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textPage": "ページ", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textParagraph": "段落", @@ -967,19 +1637,24 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textPositionPc": "相対位置", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textRelative": "相対", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textRelativeWH": "相対的な", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textResizeFit": "テキストに合わせて図形を調整", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textRight": "右に", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textRightMargin": "右余白", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textRightOf": "の右に", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textRotation": "回転", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textRound": "ラウンド", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textShape": "図形の設定", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textSize": "サイズ", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textSquare": "四角の", - "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTitle": "画像の詳細設定", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTextBox": "テキストボックス", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTitle": "画像 - 詳細設定", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTitleChart": "グラフー詳細設定", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTitleShape": "図形 - 詳細設定", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTop": "トップ", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTopMargin": "上余白", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textVertical": "縦", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textVertically": "縦に", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textWeightArrows": "線&矢印", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textWidth": "幅", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textWrap": "折り返しの種類と配置", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textWrapBehindTooltip": "背面", @@ -992,9 +1667,51 @@ "DE.Views.LeftMenu.tipAbout": "詳細情報", "DE.Views.LeftMenu.tipChat": "チャット", "DE.Views.LeftMenu.tipComments": "コメント", + "DE.Views.LeftMenu.tipNavigation": "ナビゲーション", + "DE.Views.LeftMenu.tipPlugins": "プラグイン", "DE.Views.LeftMenu.tipSearch": "検索", "DE.Views.LeftMenu.tipSupport": "フィードバック&サポート", "DE.Views.LeftMenu.tipTitles": "タイトル", + "DE.Views.LeftMenu.txtDeveloper": "開発者モード", + "DE.Views.LeftMenu.txtTrial": "試用版", + "DE.Views.Links.capBtnBookmarks": "ブックマーク", + "DE.Views.Links.capBtnCaption": "図表番号", + "DE.Views.Links.capBtnContentsUpdate": "更新", + "DE.Views.Links.capBtnInsContents": "目次", + "DE.Views.Links.capBtnInsFootnote": "脚注", + "DE.Views.Links.capBtnInsLink": "ハイパーリンク", + "DE.Views.Links.confirmDeleteFootnotes": "すべての脚注を削除しますか?", + "DE.Views.Links.mniDelFootnote": "すべての脚注を削除する", + "DE.Views.Links.mniInsFootnote": "フットノートの挿入", + "DE.Views.Links.mniNoteSettings": "ノートの設定", + "DE.Views.Links.textContentsRemove": "目次の削除", + "DE.Views.Links.textContentsSettings": "設定", + "DE.Views.Links.textGotoFootnote": "脚注へ移動", + "DE.Views.Links.textUpdateAll": "テーブル全体の更新", + "DE.Views.Links.textUpdatePages": "ページ番号の変更のみ", + "DE.Views.Links.tipBookmarks": "ブックマークの作成", + "DE.Views.Links.tipCaption": "図表番号の挿入", + "DE.Views.Links.tipContents": "目次を挿入", + "DE.Views.Links.tipContentsUpdate": "目次を更新する", + "DE.Views.Links.tipInsertHyperlink": "ハイパーリンクの追加", + "DE.Views.Links.tipNotes": "フットノートを挿入か編集", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textAuto": "自動", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textCenter": "中央揃え", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textLeft": "左", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textLevel": "レベル", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textPreview": "下見", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textRight": "右揃え", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtAlign": "整列", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtBullet": "行頭文字", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtColor": "色", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtFont": "フォントと記号", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtLikeText": "テキストのように", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtNewBullet": "新しい行頭文字", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtNone": "なし", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtSize": "サイズ", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtSymbol": "記号", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtTitle": "リストの設定", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtType": "タイプ", "DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.filePlaceholder": "PDF", "DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.okButtonText": "送信", "DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.subjectPlaceholder": "テーマ", @@ -1031,7 +1748,7 @@ "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textMergeTo": "マージ", "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textPdf": "PDF", "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textPortal": "保存", - "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textPreview": "プレビューの結果", + "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textPreview": "結果のプレビュー", "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textReadMore": "続きを読む", "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textSendMsg": "すべての電子メールの準備ができました。 しばらく時間にメールメッセージが送信されます。
    配信速度はメールサーバに依存します。
    ドキュメントの作業を続行するか、閉じることができます。メッセージが送信されると、送信者はメッセージが開封されると送信される通知です。", "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textTo": "へ", @@ -1042,19 +1759,60 @@ "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.txtPrev": "前のレコード", "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.txtUntitled": "無題", "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.warnProcessMailMerge": "マージの開始に失敗しました", + "DE.Views.Navigation.txtCollapse": "すべてを縮小する", + "DE.Views.Navigation.txtDemote": "下げる", + "DE.Views.Navigation.txtEmptyItem": "空白の見出し", + "DE.Views.Navigation.txtExpand": "すべてを展開", + "DE.Views.Navigation.txtExpandToLevel": "レベルまでに展開する", + "DE.Views.Navigation.txtHeadingAfter": "後の新しい見出し", + "DE.Views.Navigation.txtHeadingBefore": "前の新しい見出し", + "DE.Views.Navigation.txtNewHeading": "小見出し", + "DE.Views.Navigation.txtPromote": "レベルアップ", + "DE.Views.Navigation.txtSelect": "コンテンツの選択", + "DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textApply": "適用する", + "DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textApplyTo": "変更適用", + "DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textContinue": "継続的", + "DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textCustom": "ユーザー設定のマーク", + "DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textDocument": "全ての文書", + "DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textEachPage": "ページごとに振り直し", + "DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textEachSection": "セクションごとに振り直し", + "DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textFootnote": "脚注", + "DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textFormat": "形式", + "DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textInsert": "挿入する", + "DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textLocation": "位置", + "DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textNumbering": "番号付け", + "DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textNumFormat": "数の書式", + "DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textPageBottom": "ページの下部", + "DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textSection": "現在のセクション", + "DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textStart": "から始まる", + "DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textTextBottom": "テキストより下", + "DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textTitle": "ノートの設定", "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.notcriticalErrorTitle": "警告", "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textBottom": "下", + "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textGutter": "とじしろ", + "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textGutterPosition": "とじしろの位置", + "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textInside": "内部", + "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textLandscape": "横向き", "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textLeft": "左", + "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textMirrorMargins": "左右対称の余白", + "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textMultiplePages": "複数ページ", + "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textNormal": "正常", + "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textOrientation": "印刷の向き", + "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textOutside": "外面的", + "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textPortrait": "縦向き", + "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textPreview": "下見", "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textRight": "右", "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textTitle": "余白", "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textTop": "トップ", "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.txtMarginsH": "指定されたページの高さのために上下の余白は高すぎます。", "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.txtMarginsW": "左右の余白の合計がページの幅を超えています。", "DE.Views.PageSizeDialog.textHeight": "高さ", - "DE.Views.PageSizeDialog.textTitle": "ページ サイズ", + "DE.Views.PageSizeDialog.textPreset": "プレセット", + "DE.Views.PageSizeDialog.textTitle": "ページのサイズ", "DE.Views.PageSizeDialog.textWidth": "幅", + "DE.Views.PageSizeDialog.txtCustom": "ユーザー設定", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.strLineHeight": "行間", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.strParagraphSpacing": "段落の間隔", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.strParagraphSpacing": "段落間隔", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.strSomeParagraphSpace": "同じスタイルの場合は、段落間に間隔を追加しません。", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.strSpacingAfter": "後", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.strSpacingBefore": "前", @@ -1064,38 +1822,56 @@ "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textAuto": "複数", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textBackColor": "背景色", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textExact": "固定値", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textNewColor": "ユーザー設定の色の追加", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.txtAutoText": "自動", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.noTabs": "指定されたタブは、このフィールドに表示されます。", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strAllCaps": "全てのキャップ", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strAllCaps": "全ての英大文字", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strBorders": "罫線と塗りつぶし", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strBreakBefore": "前に改ページ", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strDoubleStrike": "二重取り消し線", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strIndent": "インデント", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strIndentsLeftText": "左", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strIndentsLineSpacing": "行間", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strIndentsOutlinelevel": "アウトライン・レベル", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strIndentsRightText": "右に", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strIndentsSpacingAfter": "後に", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strIndentsSpacingBefore": "前", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strKeepLines": "段落を分割しない", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strKeepNext": "次の段落と分離しない", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strMargins": "埋め込み文字", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strOrphan": "改ページ時1行残して段落を区切らないを制御する", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strParagraphFont": "フォント", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strParagraphIndents": "インデント&配置", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strParagraphIndents": "インデントと間隔", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strParagraphLine": "改行や改ページ", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strParagraphPosition": "位置", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strSmallCaps": "小型英大文字\t", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strSmallCaps": "小型英大文字", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strSomeParagraphSpace": "同じスタイルの場合は、段落間に間隔を追加しません。", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strSpacing": "間隔", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strStrike": "取り消し線", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strSubscript": "下付き", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strSuperscript": "上付き文字", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strTabs": "タブ", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textAlign": "配置", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textAlign": "整列", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textAtLeast": "最小", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textAuto": "複数", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textBackColor": "背景色", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textBorderColor": "罫線の色", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textBodyText": "基本的なテキスト", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textBorderColor": "ボーダー色", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textBorderDesc": "罫線の選択と枠線に選択されたスタイルの適用のためにダイアグラムをクリックします。または、ボタンを使うことができます。", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textBorderWidth": "罫線のサイズ", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textBottom": "下", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textCharacterSpacing": "文字間のスペース", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textCentered": "中央揃え", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textCharacterSpacing": "文字間隔", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textDefault": "既定のタブ", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textEffects": "効果", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textExact": "固定値", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textFirstLine": "最初の行", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textHanging": "ぶら下がり", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textJustified": "両端揃え", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textLeader": "埋め草文字", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textLeft": "左", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "ユーザー設定の色の追加", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textLevel": "レベル", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textNone": "なし", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textNoneSpecial": "(なし)", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textPosition": "位置", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textRemove": "削除", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textRemoveAll": "全ての削除", @@ -1116,13 +1892,15 @@ "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.tipOuter": "外部の罫線だけを設定します。", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.tipRight": "右罫線だけを設定します。", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.tipTop": "上罫線だけを設定します。", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.txtAutoText": "自動", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.txtNoBorders": "罫線なし", - "DE.Views.RightMenu.txtChartSettings": "グラフの設定", + "DE.Views.RightMenu.txtChartSettings": "グラフ設定", "DE.Views.RightMenu.txtHeaderFooterSettings": "ヘッダーとフッターの設定", "DE.Views.RightMenu.txtImageSettings": "画像の設定", "DE.Views.RightMenu.txtMailMergeSettings": "差し込み印刷の設定", "DE.Views.RightMenu.txtParagraphSettings": "段落の設定", "DE.Views.RightMenu.txtShapeSettings": "図形の設定", + "DE.Views.RightMenu.txtSignatureSettings": "サインの設定", "DE.Views.RightMenu.txtTableSettings": "表の設定", "DE.Views.RightMenu.txtTextArtSettings": "テキストアートの設定", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strBackground": "背景色", @@ -1131,24 +1909,34 @@ "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strFill": "塗りつぶし", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strForeground": "前景色", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strPattern": "パターン", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strShadow": "影を表示する", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strSize": "サイズ", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strStroke": "画数", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strTransparency": "不透明度", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strType": "タイプ", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textAdvanced": "詳細設定の表示", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textBorderSizeErr": "入力された値が正しくありません。
    0〜1584の数値を入力してください。", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textColor": "色で塗りつぶし", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textDirection": "方向", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textEmptyPattern": "パターンなし", - "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textFromFile": " ファイルから", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textFlip": "反転する", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textFromFile": "ファイルから", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textFromStorage": "ストレージから", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textFromUrl": "URLから", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textGradient": "グラデーション", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textGradientFill": "塗りつぶし (グラデーション)", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textHint270": "逆時計方向に90度回転", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textHint90": "時計方向に90度回転", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textHintFlipH": "左右に反転", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textHintFlipV": "上下に反転", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textImageTexture": "図またはテクスチャ", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textLinear": "線形", - "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textNewColor": "ユーザー設定の色の追加", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textNoFill": "塗りつぶしなし", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textPatternFill": "パターン", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textRadial": "放射状", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textRotate90": "90度回転", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textRotation": "回転", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textSelectImage": "画像の選択", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textSelectTexture": "選択", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textStretch": "ストレッチ", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textStyle": "スタイル", @@ -1174,12 +1962,24 @@ "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.txtTight": "外周", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.txtTopAndBottom": "上と下", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.txtWood": "木", + "DE.Views.SignatureSettings.notcriticalErrorTitle": "警告", + "DE.Views.SignatureSettings.strDelete": "署名の削除", + "DE.Views.SignatureSettings.strDetails": "署名の詳細", + "DE.Views.SignatureSettings.strInvalid": "不正な署名", + "DE.Views.SignatureSettings.strRequested": "必要な署名", + "DE.Views.SignatureSettings.strSetup": "署名の設定", + "DE.Views.SignatureSettings.strSign": "サイン", + "DE.Views.SignatureSettings.strSignature": "サイン", + "DE.Views.SignatureSettings.strSigner": "署名者", + "DE.Views.SignatureSettings.txtContinueEditing": "無視して編集する", + "DE.Views.SignatureSettings.txtEditWarning": "編集すると、文書から署名が削除されます。
    続行しますか?", + "DE.Views.SignatureSettings.txtSignedInvalid": "文書のデジタル署名の一部が無効であるか、検証できませんでした。 文書は編集できないように保護されています。", "DE.Views.Statusbar.goToPageText": "ページに移動", "DE.Views.Statusbar.pageIndexText": "{1}から​​{0}ページ", "DE.Views.Statusbar.tipFitPage": "ページに合わせる", "DE.Views.Statusbar.tipFitWidth": "幅を合わせる", "DE.Views.Statusbar.tipSetLang": "テキストの言語を設定します。", - "DE.Views.Statusbar.tipZoomFactor": "拡大図", + "DE.Views.Statusbar.tipZoomFactor": "ズーム", "DE.Views.Statusbar.tipZoomIn": "拡大", "DE.Views.Statusbar.tipZoomOut": "縮小", "DE.Views.Statusbar.txtPageNumInvalid": "ページ番号が正しくありません。", @@ -1188,6 +1988,30 @@ "DE.Views.StyleTitleDialog.textTitle": "タイトル", "DE.Views.StyleTitleDialog.txtEmpty": "このフィールドは必須項目です", "DE.Views.StyleTitleDialog.txtNotEmpty": "フィールドは空にできません。", + "DE.Views.TableFormulaDialog.textBookmark": "ブックマークの貼り付け", + "DE.Views.TableFormulaDialog.textFormat": "数の書式", + "DE.Views.TableFormulaDialog.textFormula": "数式", + "DE.Views.TableFormulaDialog.textInsertFunction": "関数の貼り付け", + "DE.Views.TableFormulaDialog.textTitle": "数式設定", + "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.strAlign": "ページ番号の右揃え", + "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.strLinks": "目次をリンクとして書式設定する", + "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.strShowPages": "ページ番号の表示", + "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.textBuildTable": "目次の作成要素:", + "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.textLeader": "埋め草文字", + "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.textLevel": "レベル", + "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.textLevels": "レベル", + "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.textNone": "なし", + "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.textRadioLevels": "アウトライン・レベル", + "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.textRadioStyles": "選択されたスタイル", + "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.textStyle": "スタイル", + "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.textStyles": "スタイル", + "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.textTitle": "目次", + "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.txtClassic": "クラシック", + "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.txtCurrent": "現在", + "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.txtModern": "現代", + "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.txtOnline": "オンライン", + "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.txtSimple": "簡単な", + "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.txtStandard": "標準", "DE.Views.TableSettings.deleteColumnText": "列の削除", "DE.Views.TableSettings.deleteRowText": "行の削除", "DE.Views.TableSettings.deleteTableText": "表の削除", @@ -1203,22 +2027,27 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettings.splitCellsText": "セルの分割...", "DE.Views.TableSettings.splitCellTitleText": "セルの分割", "DE.Views.TableSettings.strRepeatRow": "毎ページの上に見出し行として繰り返す", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.textAddFormula": "式を追加", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textAdvanced": "詳細設定の表示", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textBackColor": "背景色", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textBanded": "縞模様", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textBorderColor": "色", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textBorders": "罫線のスタイル", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.textCellSize": "行と列のサイズ", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textColumns": "列", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.textDistributeCols": "列間を平均にする", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.textDistributeRows": "行間を平均にする", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textEdit": "行/列", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textEmptyTemplate": "テンプレートなし", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textFirst": "最初の", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textHeader": "ヘッダー", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.textHeight": "高さ", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textLast": "最後", - "DE.Views.TableSettings.textNewColor": "ユーザー設定の色の追加", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textRows": "行", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textSelectBorders": "選択したスタイルを適用する罫線を選択してください。 ", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textTemplate": "テンプレートから選択する", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textTotal": "合計", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.textWidth": "幅", "DE.Views.TableSettings.tipAll": "外部の罫線と全ての内部の線", "DE.Views.TableSettings.tipBottom": "外部の罫線(下)だけを設定します。", "DE.Views.TableSettings.tipInner": "内部の線だけを設定します。", @@ -1230,14 +2059,24 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettings.tipRight": "外部の罫線(右)だけを設定します。", "DE.Views.TableSettings.tipTop": "外部の罫線(上)だけを設定します。", "DE.Views.TableSettings.txtNoBorders": "罫線なし", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlign": "配置", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlignment": "配置", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_Accent": "アクセント", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_Colorful": "カラフル", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_Dark": "暗い", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_GridTable": "グリッドテーブル", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_Light": "明るい", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_ListTable": "リスト表", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_PlainTable": "通常のテーブル", + "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlign": "整列", + "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlignment": "整列", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAllowSpacing": "セルの間隔を指定する", + "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "代替テキスト", + "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "説明", + "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "タイトル", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAnchorText": "テキスト", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAutofit": "自動的にセルのサイズを変更する", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textBackColor": "セルの背景色", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textBelow": "下", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textBorderColor": "罫線の色", + "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textBorderColor": "ボーダー色", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textBorderDesc": "罫線の選択と枠線に選択されたスタイルの適用のためにダイアグラムをクリックします。または、ボタンを使うことができます。", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textBordersBackgroung": "罫線と背景", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textBorderWidth": "罫線のサイズ", @@ -1258,14 +2097,13 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMargins": "セル内の配置", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMeasure": "測定", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMove": "文字列と一緒に移動する", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "ユーザー設定の色の追加", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOnlyCells": "選択されたセルだけのため", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOptions": "オプション", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOverlap": "オーバーラップさせる", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textPage": "ページ", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textPosition": "位置", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textPrefWidth": "幅", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textPreview": "プレビュー", + "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textPreview": "下見", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textRelative": "相対", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textRight": "右に", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textRightOf": "の右に", @@ -1280,7 +2118,7 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textWidth": "幅", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textWidthSpaces": "幅&スペース", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textWrap": "テキストの折り返し\t", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textWrapNoneTooltip": "表の挿入", + "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textWrapNoneTooltip": "表形式", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textWrapParallelTooltip": "フローの表", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textWrappingStyle": "折り返しの種類と配置", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textWrapText": "左右の折り返し", @@ -1304,13 +2142,13 @@ "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.strSize": "サイズ", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.strStroke": "画数", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.strTransparency": "不透明度", + "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.strType": "タイプ", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textBorderSizeErr": "入力された値が正しくありません。
    0〜1584の数値を入力してください。", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textColor": "色で塗りつぶし", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textDirection": "方向", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textGradient": "グラデーション", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textGradientFill": "塗りつぶし (グラデーション)", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textLinear": "線形", - "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textNewColor": "ユーザー設定の色の追加", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textNoFill": "塗りつぶしなし", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textRadial": "放射状", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textSelectTexture": "選択", @@ -1318,45 +2156,92 @@ "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textTemplate": "テンプレート", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textTransform": "変換", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.txtNoBorders": "線なし", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnAddComment": "コメントを追加", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnBlankPage": "空白ページ", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnColumns": "列", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnComment": "コメント", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnDateTime": "日付&時刻", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsChart": "グラフ", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsControls": "コンテンツ コントロール", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsDropcap": "ドロップ キャップ", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsEquation": "数式", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsHeader": "ヘッダー/フッター", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsImage": "画像", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsPagebreak": "区切り", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsShape": "図形", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsSymbol": "記号", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsTable": "表", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsTextart": "ワードアート", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsTextbox": "テキストボックス", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnMargins": "余白", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnPageOrient": "印刷の向き", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnPageSize": "サイズ", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnWatermark": "透かし", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capImgAlign": "整列", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capImgBackward": "背面へ移動", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capImgForward": "前面へ移動", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capImgGroup": "グループ", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capImgWrapping": "折り返し", "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniCustomTable": "ユーザー設定​​の表の挿入", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniDrawTable": "罫線を引く", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniEditControls": "コントロールの設定", "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniEditDropCap": "ドロップ キャップの設定", "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniEditFooter": "フッターの編集", "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniEditHeader": "ヘッダーの編集", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniEraseTable": "テーブルの削除", "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniHiddenBorders": "隠しテーブルの罫線", "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniHiddenChars": "編集記号の表示", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniHighlightControls": "強調表示設定", "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniImageFromFile": "ファイルからの画像", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniImageFromUrl": "ファイルからのURL", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniImageFromStorage": "ストレージから画像を読み込む", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniImageFromUrl": "URLからのファイル", "DE.Views.Toolbar.strMenuNoFill": "塗りつぶしなし", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textAutoColor": "自動", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textBold": "太字", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textBottom": "下:", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textCheckboxControl": "チェックボックス", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textColumnsCustom": "ユーザー設定の列", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textColumnsLeft": "左", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textColumnsOne": "1", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textColumnsRight": "右に", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textColumnsThree": "三", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textColumnsTwo": "二", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textComboboxControl": "コンボボックス", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textContPage": "連続ページ表示", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textDateControl": "日付", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textDropdownControl": "ドロップダウン リスト", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textEditWatermark": "ユーザー設定の透かし", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textEvenPage": "偶数ページから開始", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textInMargin": "余白", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textInsColumnBreak": "段区切りの挿入", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textInsertPageCount": "ページ数を挿入する", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textInsertPageNumber": "ページ番号の挿入", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textInsPageBreak": "改ページの挿入", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textInsSectionBreak": "セクション区切りの挿入", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textInText": "テキスト", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textItalic": "斜体", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textLandscape": "横向き", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textLeft": "左:", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textListSettings": "リストの設定", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textMarginsLast": "最後に適用したユーザー", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textMarginsModerate": "標準", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textMarginsNarrow": "狭い", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textMarginsNormal": "標準", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textMarginsUsNormal": "ノーマル(アメリカの標準)", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textMarginsWide": "広い", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.textNewColor": "ユーザー設定の色の追加", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textNewColor": "カスタム色を追加", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textNextPage": "次のページ", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textNoHighlight": "強調表示なし", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textNone": "なし", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textOddPage": "奇数ページから開始", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.textPageMarginsCustom": "カスタム マージン", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textPageMarginsCustom": "ユーザー設定の余白", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textPageSizeCustom": "ユーザー設定のページ サイズ", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textPictureControl": "画像", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textPlainControl": "プレーンテキスト", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textPortrait": "縦向き", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textRemoveControl": "コンテンツ コントロールを削除する", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textRemWatermark": "透かしの削除", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textRichControl": "リッチテキスト", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textRight": "右:", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textStrikeout": "取り消し線", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textStyleMenuDelete": "スタイルの削除", @@ -1367,6 +2252,14 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.textStyleMenuUpdate": "選択からの更新", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textSubscript": "下付き", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textSuperscript": "上付き文字", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabCollaboration": "共同編集", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabFile": "ファイル", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabHome": "ホーム", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabInsert": "挿入", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabLayout": "レイアウト", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabLinks": "参考資料", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabProtect": "保護", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabReview": "見直し", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTitleError": "エラー", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textToCurrent": "現在の場所", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTop": "トップ:", @@ -1376,19 +2269,26 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipAlignLeft": "左揃え", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipAlignRight": "右揃え", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipBack": "戻る", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipBlankPage": "空白ページの挿入", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipChangeChart": "グラフの種類の変更", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipClearStyle": "スタイルのクリア", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipColorSchemas": "配色の変更", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipColumns": "列の挿入", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipControls": "コンテンツ コントロールの挿入", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipCopy": "コピー", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipCopyStyle": "スタイルのコピー", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipDateTime": " 現在の日付と時刻を挿入", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipDecFont": "フォントのサイズの減分", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipDecPrLeft": "インデント解除", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipDecPrLeft": "インデントを減らす", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipDropCap": "ドロップ キャップの挿入", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipEditHeader": "ヘッダーやフッターの編集", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipFontColor": "フォントの色", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipFontName": "フォント名", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipFontSize": "フォントサイズ", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipHighlightColor": "蛍光ペンの色", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipFontName": "フォント", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipFontSize": "フォントのサイズ", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipHighlightColor": "強調表示の色", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipImgAlign": "オブジェクトを配置する", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipImgGroup": "グループ・オブジェクト", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipImgWrapping": "文字列の折り返し", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipIncFont": "フォントサイズの増分", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipIncPrLeft": "インデントを増やす", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertChart": "グラフの挿入", @@ -1396,27 +2296,37 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertImage": "画像の挿入", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertNum": "ページ番号の挿入", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "オートシェイプの挿入", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertTable": "テーブルの挿入", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertText": "テキストの挿入", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSymbol": "記号の挿入", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertTable": "表の挿入", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertText": "テキスト ボックスの挿入", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertTextArt": "テキスト アートの挿入", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipLineSpace": "段落の行間", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipMailRecepients": "差し込み印刷", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipMarkers": "箇条書き", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipMultilevels": "複数レベルのリスト", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipNumbers": "番号設定", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipPageBreak": "ページの挿入またはセクション区切り", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipPageMargins": "余白", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipPageMargins": "ページ余白", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipPageOrient": "ページの向き", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipPageSize": "ページ サイズ", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipPageSize": "ページのサイズ", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipParagraphStyle": "段落のスタイル", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipPaste": "貼り付け", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipPrColor": "段落の背景の色", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipPrColor": "段落の背景色", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipPrint": "印刷", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipRedo": "やり直し", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipSave": "保存", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipSaveCoauth": "他のユーザが変更を見れるために変更を保存します。", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipSendBackward": "背面へ移動", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipSendForward": "前面へ移動", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipShowHiddenChars": "編集記号の表示", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipSynchronize": "ドキュメントは他のユーザーによって変更されました。変更を保存するためにここでクリックし、アップデートを再ロードしてください。", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipUndo": "元に戻す", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipWatermark": "透かしを編集する", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtDistribHor": "左右に整列", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtDistribVert": "上下に整列", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtMarginAlign": "マージンに揃え", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtObjectsAlign": "選択したオブジェクトを整列する", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtPageAlign": "ページに揃え", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme1": "オフィス", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme10": "デザート", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme11": "メトロ", @@ -1437,5 +2347,29 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme6": "ビジネス", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme7": "株主資本", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme8": "フロー", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme9": "エコロジー" + "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme9": "エコロジー", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textAuto": "自動", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textBold": "太字", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textColor": "テキスト色", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textDiagonal": "斜め", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textFont": "フォント", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textFromFile": "ファイルから", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textFromStorage": "ストレージから", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textFromUrl": "URLから", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textHor": "水平", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textImageW": "画像透かし", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textItalic": "斜体", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textLanguage": "言語", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textLayout": "レイアウト", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textNewColor": "カスタム色を追加", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textNone": "なし", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textScale": "規模", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textSelect": "画像を選択", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textText": "テキスト", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textTextW": "テキスト透かし", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textTitle": "透かし設定", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textTransparency": "半透明", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textUnderline": "下線", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.tipFontName": "フォント名", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.tipFontSize": "フォントのサイズ" } \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/ko.json b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/ko.json index 91a855a33..7cb3d1620 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/ko.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/ko.json @@ -1019,7 +1019,6 @@ "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textLeft": "왼쪽", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textMargin": "여백", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textMove": "텍스트와 함께 이동", - "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "새 사용자 지정 색 추가", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textNone": "없음", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textPage": "페이지", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textParagraph": "단락", @@ -1367,7 +1366,6 @@ "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textAuto": "Multiple", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textBackColor": "배경색", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textExact": "정확히", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textNewColor": "새 사용자 지정 색 추가", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.txtAutoText": "Auto", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.noTabs": "지정된 탭이이 필드에 나타납니다", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strAllCaps": "모든 대문자", @@ -1399,7 +1397,6 @@ "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textEffects": "효과", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textLeader": "리더", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textLeft": "왼쪽", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "새 맞춤 색상 추가", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textNone": "없음", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textPosition": "위치", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textRemove": "제거", @@ -1452,7 +1449,6 @@ "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textGradientFill": "그라데이션 채우기", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textImageTexture": "그림 또는 질감", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textLinear": "선형", - "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textNewColor": "새 사용자 지정 색 추가", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textNoFill": "채우기 없음", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textPatternFill": "패턴", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textRadial": "방사형", @@ -1558,7 +1554,6 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettings.textHeader": "머리글", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textHeight": "높이", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textLast": "Last", - "DE.Views.TableSettings.textNewColor": "새 사용자 지정 색 추가", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textRows": "행", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textSelectBorders": "위에서 선택한 스타일 적용을 변경하려는 테두리 선택", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textTemplate": "템플릿에서 선택", @@ -1607,7 +1602,6 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMargins": "셀 여백", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMeasure": "측정", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMove": "텍스트가있는 객체 이동", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "새로운 맞춤 색상 추가", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOnlyCells": "선택한 셀만 해당", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOptions": "옵션", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOverlap": "중복 허용", @@ -1660,7 +1654,6 @@ "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textGradient": "그라디언트", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textGradientFill": "그라데이션 채우기", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textLinear": "선형", - "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textNewColor": "새 사용자 지정 색 추가", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textNoFill": "채우기 없음", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textRadial": "방사형", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textSelectTexture": "선택", @@ -1727,6 +1720,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.textMarginsUsNormal": "US Normal", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textMarginsWide": "Wide", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textNewColor": "새로운 사용자 정의 색 추가", + "Common.UI.ColorButton.textNewColor": "새로운 사용자 정의 색 추가", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textNextPage": "다음 페이지", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textNone": "없음", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textOddPage": "홀수 페이지", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/lv.json b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/lv.json index 8564775dc..2dad17bb2 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/lv.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/lv.json @@ -1016,7 +1016,6 @@ "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textLeft": "Left", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textMargin": "Margin", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textMove": "Move with text", - "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "Add New Custom Color", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textNone": "None", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textPage": "Page", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textParagraph": "Paragraph", @@ -1364,7 +1363,6 @@ "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textAuto": "Vairāki", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textBackColor": "Background color", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textExact": "Tieši", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textNewColor": "Pievienot jauno krāsu", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.txtAutoText": "Auto", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.noTabs": "The specified tabs will appear in this field", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strAllCaps": "All caps", @@ -1396,7 +1394,6 @@ "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textEffects": "Effects", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textLeader": "Vadītājs", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textLeft": "Left", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "Pievienot jauno krāsu", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textNone": "Neviens", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textPosition": "Position", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textRemove": "Remove", @@ -1449,7 +1446,6 @@ "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textGradientFill": "Gradient Fill", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textImageTexture": "Picture or Texture", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textLinear": "Linear", - "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textNewColor": "Pievienot jauno krāsu", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textNoFill": "No Fill", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textPatternFill": "Pattern", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textRadial": "Radial", @@ -1555,7 +1551,6 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettings.textHeader": "Header", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textHeight": "Augstums", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textLast": "Last", - "DE.Views.TableSettings.textNewColor": "Pievienot jauno krāsu", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textRows": "Rows", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textSelectBorders": "Apmales stilu piemerošanai", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textTemplate": "Select From Template", @@ -1604,7 +1599,6 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMargins": "Šunu piemales", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMeasure": "Mērīt", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMove": "Move object with text", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "Pievienot jauno krāsu", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOnlyCells": "Tikai atlasīam šūnam", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOptions": "Options", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOverlap": "Allow overlap", @@ -1657,7 +1651,6 @@ "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textGradient": "Gradient", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textGradientFill": "Gradient Fill", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textLinear": "Linear", - "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textNewColor": "Add New Custom Color", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textNoFill": "No Fill", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textRadial": "Radial", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textSelectTexture": "Select", @@ -1724,6 +1717,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.textMarginsUsNormal": "Parastie (ASV standarts)", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textMarginsWide": "Wide", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textNewColor": "Pievienot jauno krāsu", + "Common.UI.ColorButton.textNewColor": "Pievienot jauno krāsu", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textNextPage": "Next Page", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textNone": "None", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textOddPage": "Odd Page", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/nb.json b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/nb.json index 602d14286..f72ce2390 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/nb.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/nb.json @@ -24,15 +24,28 @@ "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textRight": "Still opp høyre", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textShd": "Bakgrunnsfarge", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textTabs": "Bytt faner", + "Common.define.chartData.textArea": "Areal", + "Common.define.chartData.textBar": "Søyle", + "Common.define.chartData.textCharts": "Diagrammer", + "Common.define.chartData.textColumn": "Kolonne", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textApril": "april", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textAugust": "august", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textDecember": "desember", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortApril": "apr", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortAugust": "Aug", + "Common.UI.ColorButton.textNewColor": "Legg til ny egendefinert farge", "Common.UI.ExtendedColorDialog.addButtonText": "Legg til", "Common.UI.ExtendedColorDialog.textCurrent": "Nåværende", "Common.UI.SearchDialog.textMatchCase": "Følsom for store og små bokstaver", "Common.UI.Window.cancelButtonText": "Avbryt", "Common.UI.Window.closeButtonText": "Lukk", + "Common.UI.Window.textConfirmation": "Bekreftelse", "Common.UI.Window.textError": "Feil", "Common.UI.Window.textWarning": "Advarsel", "Common.Utils.Metric.txtCm": "cm", "Common.Views.About.txtAddress": "adresse:", + "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textBy": "Av:", + "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textTitle": "Autokorrektur", "Common.Views.Comments.textAdd": "Legg til", "Common.Views.Comments.textAddComment": "Tilføy", "Common.Views.Comments.textAddCommentToDoc": "Tilføy kommentar til", @@ -41,6 +54,7 @@ "Common.Views.Comments.textClose": "Lukk", "Common.Views.Comments.textComments": "Kommentarer", "Common.Views.Comments.textHintAddComment": "Legg til kommentar", + "Common.Views.CopyWarningDialog.textTitle": "Handlinger for Kopier, Klipp ut og Lim inn", "Common.Views.ExternalDiagramEditor.textClose": "Lukk", "Common.Views.ExternalDiagramEditor.textTitle": "Diagramredigering", "Common.Views.ExternalMergeEditor.textClose": "Lukk", @@ -52,8 +66,10 @@ "Common.Views.Header.tipViewUsers": "Vis brukere og administrer tilgangsrettigheter", "Common.Views.Header.txtAccessRights": "Endre tilgangsrettigheter", "Common.Views.History.textCloseHistory": "Lukk loggen", + "Common.Views.History.textHide": "Lukk", "Common.Views.OpenDialog.closeButtonText": "Lukk filen", "Common.Views.OpenDialog.txtTitle": "Velg %1 alternativer", + "Common.Views.PasswordDialog.txtIncorrectPwd": "Bekreftet passord er ikke identisk", "Common.Views.Protection.hintPwd": "Endre eller slett passord", "Common.Views.Protection.hintSignature": "Legg til digital signatur eller signaturlinje", "Common.Views.Protection.txtAddPwd": "Angi passord", @@ -62,14 +78,17 @@ "Common.Views.Protection.txtInvisibleSignature": "Legg til digital signatur", "Common.Views.Protection.txtSignatureLine": "Legg til signaturlinje", "Common.Views.RenameDialog.textName": "Filnavn", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.mniSettings": "Innstillinger for sammenlikning", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.strFast": "Hurtig", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipAcceptCurrent": "Godta endringen", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipCompare": "Sammenlikn dette dokumentet med et annet", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtAccept": "Godta", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtAcceptAll": "Godta alle endringer", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtAcceptChanges": "Godta endringer", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtAcceptCurrent": "Godta endringen", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtChat": "Chat", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtClose": "Lukk", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCompare": "Sammenlikn", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtFinal": "Alle endringer er godtatt", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtMarkup": "Alle endringer (Redigering)", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtOriginal": "Alle endringer er avvist (Forhåndsvisning)", @@ -85,6 +104,7 @@ "Common.Views.SignDialog.textCertificate": "Sertifikat", "Common.Views.SignDialog.textChange": "Endre", "Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textAllowComment": "Tillat at den som signerer legger til en kommentar i signaturdialogen", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textCharacter": "Bokstav", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.leavePageText": "Alle ulagrede endringer i dokumentet vil ikke bli lagret.
    Klikk \"Avbryt\" og så \"Lagre\" for å lagre endringene. Klikk \"OK\" for å forkaste alle ulagrede endringer.", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.notcriticalErrorTitle": "Advarsel", "DE.Controllers.Main.criticalErrorTitle": "Feil", @@ -92,15 +112,18 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.errorEditingDownloadas": "Det oppstod en feil ved arbeid med dokumentet.
    Bruk 'Last ned som...' opsjonen til å lagre en kopi av dokumentet til din lokale datamaskin.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorEditingSaveas": "Det oppstod en feil ved arbeid med dokumentet.
    Bruk opsjonen 'Lagre som...' til å lagre en kopi av dokumentet til din lokale datamaskin.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorForceSave": "Det skjedde en feil ved lagring av filen. Bruk opsjonen 'Lagre som...' til å lagre filen til din lokale datamaskin eller prøv igjen senere.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorViewerDisconnect": "Mistet nettverksforbindelse. Du kan fremdeles se dokumentet,
    men vil ikke kunne laste ned eller skrive det ut før nettverksforbindelsen er gjenopprettet og siden oppdatert.", "DE.Controllers.Main.notcriticalErrorTitle": "Advarsel", "DE.Controllers.Main.openErrorText": "Det har skjedd en feil ved åpning av filen", "DE.Controllers.Main.requestEditFailedTitleText": "Tilgang nektet", "DE.Controllers.Main.saveErrorText": "Det har skjedd en feil ved lagring av filen", "DE.Controllers.Main.textAnonymous": "Anonym", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textApplyAll": "Bruk på alle likninger", "DE.Controllers.Main.textBuyNow": "Besøk webside", "DE.Controllers.Main.textChangesSaved": "Alle endringer er lagret", "DE.Controllers.Main.textClose": "Lukk", "DE.Controllers.Main.textCloseTip": "Klikk for å lukke tipset", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textContactUs": "Kontakt salgsavdelingen", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtAbove": "over", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtBasicShapes": "Basisformer", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtBelow": "under", @@ -108,11 +131,30 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.txtButtons": "Knapper", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtCallouts": "Henvisninger", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtCharts": "Diagram", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtChoose": "Velg et punkt.", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtCurrentDocument": "Gjeldende dokument", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtDiagramTitle": "Diagramtittel", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtEvenPage": "Partallside", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtFiguredArrows": "Pilfigurer", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtSection": "-Seksjon", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_actionButtonBackPrevious": "Tilbake- eller forrigeknapp", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_actionButtonBeginning": "Startknapp", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_actionButtonBlank": "Tom knapp", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_arc": "Bue", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_bentArrow": "Buet pil", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_bentUpArrow": "Oppadbuet pil", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_bevel": "Skrå", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_can": "Kan", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_chevron": "Vinkel", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_circularArrow": "Sirkulær pil", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_cloud": "Sky", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_corner": "Hjørne", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_cube": "Kube", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_diagStripe": "Diagonal linje", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_diamond": "Diamant", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_lineWithArrow": "Pil", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_spline": "Kurve", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_Caption": "Bildetekst", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtTableOfContents": "Innholdsfortegnelse", "DE.Controllers.Navigation.txtBeginning": "Starten av dokumentet", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.notcriticalErrorTitle": "Advarsel", @@ -148,11 +190,21 @@ "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_Square_OpenOpen": "Klammeparantes", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_SquareDouble": "Klammeparantes", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtBracket_UppLim": "Klammeparantes", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFractionDifferential_1": "Differensial", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFractionDifferential_2": "Differensial", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFractionDifferential_3": "Differensial", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFractionDifferential_4": "Differensial", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFunction_Cos": "cosinus funksjon", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFunction_Cot": "Cotangens funksjon", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtFunction_Custom_2": "Cos 2x", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtIntegralDouble": "Dobbeltintegral", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtIntegralDoubleCenterSubSup": "Dobbeltintegral", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtIntegralDoubleSubSup": "Dobbeltintegral", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_CoProd": "Samprodukt", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_CoProd_CenterSub": "Samprodukt", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_CoProd_CenterSubSup": "Samprodukt", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_CoProd_Sub": "Samprodukt", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLargeOperator_CoProd_SubSup": "Samprodukt", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtLimitLog_Ln": "Naturlig logaritme", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtMatrix_1_2": "1x2 tom matrise", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtMatrix_1_3": "1x3 tom matrise", @@ -171,6 +223,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtOperator_DeltaEquals": "Delta er lik", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtRadicalRoot_3": "Kubikkrot", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_about": "Omtrent", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_additional": "Komplement", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_aleph": "Alef", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_alpha": "Alfa", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_approx": "Nesten lik", @@ -190,19 +243,45 @@ "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textAdd": "Legg til", "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textBookmarkName": "Bokmerk navnet", "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textClose": "Lukk", + "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textCopy": "Kopier", "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textDelete": "Slett", "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textTitle": "Bokmerker", "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.txtInvalidName": "Bokmerkets navn kan bare inneholde bokstaver, tall og streker, og skal begynne med bokstaven", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textAdd": "Legg til merkelapp", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textAfter": "Etter", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textBefore": "Før", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textCaption": "Bildetekst", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textChapter": "Kapittel starter med stil", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textColon": "kolon", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textDash": "tankestrek", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textDelete": "Slett merkelapp", + "DE.Views.CellsAddDialog.textCol": "Kolonner", + "DE.Views.CellsAddDialog.textDown": "Under markøren", + "DE.Views.CellsAddDialog.textUp": "Over markøren", + "DE.Views.CellsRemoveDialog.textCol": "Slett hele kolonnen", + "DE.Views.CellsRemoveDialog.textRow": "Slett raden", + "DE.Views.CellsRemoveDialog.textTitle": "Slett celler", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textChartType": "Endre diagramtype", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textEditData": "Rediger data", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textOriginalSize": "Standard størrelse", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.txtBehind": "Bak", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.txtInFront": "Foran", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.txtTitle": "Diagram", + "DE.Views.CompareSettingsDialog.textChar": "Bokstavnivå", + "DE.Views.CompareSettingsDialog.textTitle": "Innstillinger for sammenlikning", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textAdd": "Legg til", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textAppearance": "Utseende", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textApplyAll": "Bruk på alle", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textBox": "Avgrensningsboks", - "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textNewColor": "Legg til ny egendefinert farge", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textCheckbox": "Avkrysningsboks", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textColor": "Farge", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textDate": "Datoformat", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textDelete": "Slett", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textTitle": "Innstillinger for innholdskontroll", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.tipChange": "Endre symbol", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.txtLockDelete": "Innholdskontroll kan ikke slettes", + "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textTitle": "Kolonner", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.txtTitle": "Dato og tidspunkt", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.aboveText": "Over", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.addCommentText": "Tilføy kommentar", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.advancedTableText": "Avanserte tabell-innstillinger", @@ -231,10 +310,14 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textArrange": "Ordne", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textArrangeForward": "Flytt fremover", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textArrangeFront": "Plasser fremst", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textCells": "Celler", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textContentControls": "Innholdskontroll", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textContinueNumbering": "Fortsett nummerering", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textCopy": "Kopier", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textCrop": "Beskjære", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textCut": "Klipp ut", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textDistributeRows": "Fordel rader", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textEditControls": "Innstillinger for innholdskontroll", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textEditWrapBoundary": "Rediger ombrytningsgrense", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textShapeAlignBottom": "Still opp bunn", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textShapeAlignCenter": "Still opp senter", @@ -244,6 +327,7 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textShapeAlignTop": "Still opp topp", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textTOC": "Innholdsfortegnelse", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textTOCSettings": "Innstillinger for innholdsfortegnelsen", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.toDictionaryText": "Legg til ordbok", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtAddBottom": "Legg til bunnramme", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtAddFractionBar": "Legg til brøkstrek", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtAddHor": "Legg til horisontal linje", @@ -264,6 +348,7 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtDeleteCharsAndSeparators": "Slett de omsluttende tegnene og seperatorer", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtDeleteEq": "Slett ligning", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtDeleteGroupChar": "Slett bokstav", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtEmpty": "(Tomt)", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtFractionLinear": "Endre til lineær brøk", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtFractionSkewed": "Endre til skjev brøk", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtFractionStacked": "Endre til stablet brøk", @@ -286,16 +371,21 @@ "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textColumn": "Kolonne", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textExact": "Nøyaktig", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textLeft": "Venstre", - "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "Legg til ny egendefinert farge", + "DE.Views.EditListItemDialog.textValueError": "Det finnes allerede en gjenstand med samme verdi.", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnCloseMenuCaption": "Lukk menyen", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnCreateNewCaption": "Opprett ny", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnReturnCaption": "Tilbake til dokument", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnRightsCaption": "Tilgangsrettigheter...", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnSettingsCaption": "Avanserte innstillinger...", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnToEditCaption": "Rediger dokument", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.okButtonText": "Bruk", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtAddAuthor": "Legg til forfatter", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtAddText": "Legg til tekst", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtAppName": "Applikasjon", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtAuthor": "Forfatter", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtBtnAccessRights": "Endre tilgangsrettigheter", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtComment": "Kommentar", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtCreated": "Opprettet", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtSymbols": "Symboler", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentRights.txtBtnAccessRights": "Endre tilgangsrettigheter", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.strSignature": "Med signatur", @@ -304,6 +394,7 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.okButtonText": "Bruk", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strFast": "Hurtig", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strForcesave": "Lagre alltid til tjeneren (eller lagre til tjeneren når dokumentet lukkes)", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strPaste": "Klipp ut, kopier og lim inn", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strZoom": "Standard zoom-verdi", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.text10Minutes": "Hvert 10. minutt", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.text30Minutes": "Hvert 30. minutt", @@ -312,21 +403,31 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textAlignGuides": "Hjelpelinjer", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textAutoRecover": "Automatisk gjenoppretting", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textAutoSave": "Autolagre", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textCompatible": "Kompatibilitet", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textDisabled": "Deaktivert", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textMinute": "Hvert minutt", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtAll": "Vis alt", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtAutoCorrect": "Alternativer for autokorrektur...", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtCm": "Centimeter", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtInch": "Tomme", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtInput": "Alternativ inndata", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtMac": "som OS X", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtRunMacrosDesc": "Aktiver alle makroer uten varsling", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtStopMacros": "Deaktiver alt", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtStopMacrosDesc": "Deaktiver alle makroer uten varsling", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtWarnMacros": "Vis varsling", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtWarnMacrosDesc": "Deaktiver alle makroer med et varsel", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtWin": "som Windows", "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textBottomCenter": "Bunn senter", "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textBottomLeft": "Margin bunn", "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textBottomPage": "Nederst på siden", "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textBottomRight": "Bunn høyre", + "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textDiffFirst": "Ulik førsteside", + "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textDiffOdd": "Ulike odde- og parsider", "DE.Views.HyperlinkSettingsDialog.textDisplay": "Vis", "DE.Views.HyperlinkSettingsDialog.txtBeginning": "Starten av dokumentet", "DE.Views.HyperlinkSettingsDialog.txtBookmarks": "Bokmerker", + "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textCrop": "Beskjære", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textEdit": "Rediger", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textEditObject": "Rediger objekt", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textOriginalSize": "Standard størrelse", @@ -338,6 +439,7 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Beskrivelse", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Vinkel", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textArrows": "Piler", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAutofit": "Autotilpass", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBeginSize": "Startstørrelse", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBeginStyle": "Startstil", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBelow": "under", @@ -348,6 +450,7 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textCenter": "Senter", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textCharacter": "Tegn", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textColumn": "Kolonne", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textKeepRatio": "Konstant størrelsesforhold", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textLeft": "Venstre", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textOriginalSize": "Standard størrelse", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textOverlap": "Tillat overlapping", @@ -362,10 +465,16 @@ "DE.Views.LeftMenu.tipSupport": "Tilbakemelding og støtte", "DE.Views.LeftMenu.txtDeveloper": "UTVIKLERMODUS", "DE.Views.Links.capBtnBookmarks": "Lag bokmerke", + "DE.Views.Links.capBtnCaption": "Bildetekst", "DE.Views.Links.capBtnInsContents": "Innholdsfortegnelse", "DE.Views.Links.mniDelFootnote": "Slett alle fotnoter", "DE.Views.Links.tipBookmarks": "Opprett et bokmerke", "DE.Views.Links.tipInsertHyperlink": "Tilføy lenke", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textAuto": "Automatisk", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textCenter": "Senter", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtAlign": "Justering", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtBullet": "Punkt", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtColor": "Farge", "DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.textAttachDocx": "Legg ved som DOCX", "DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.textAttachPdf": "Legg ved som PDF", "DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.textFileName": "Filnavn", @@ -377,6 +486,7 @@ "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textEditData": "Rediger mottagerliste", "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textSendMsg": "Alle meldinger er klargjort og vil bli sendt innen kort tid.
    Dette vil avhenge av hastigheten på din epost-tjener.
    Du kan fortsette å jobbe med dokumentet eller lukke det. Når oppgaven er fullført vil du få en melding om dette på din registrerte epost-adresse.", "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.txtFromToError": "\"Fra\"-verdien må være mindre enn \"Til\"-verdien", + "DE.Views.Navigation.txtCollapse": "Lukk alt", "DE.Views.Navigation.txtDemote": "Degrader", "DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textApply": "Bruk", "DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textApplyTo": "Bruk endringer på", @@ -395,29 +505,35 @@ "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textAuto": "Flere", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textBackColor": "Bakgrunnsfarge", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textExact": "Nøyaktig", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textNewColor": "Legg til ny egendefinert farge", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.txtAutoText": "Auto", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strAllCaps": "Store bokstaver", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strBorders": "Linjer & Fyll", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strIndentsLeftText": "Venstre", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strIndentsSpacingAfter": "Etter", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strIndentsSpacingBefore": "Før", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textAlign": "Oppstilling", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textAtLeast": "Minst", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textBackColor": "Bakgrunnsfarge", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textBodyText": "Grunnleggende tekst", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textBorderColor": "Linjefarge", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textBorderDesc": "Trykk på diagram eller bruk knappene for å velge kanter og bruke valgt stil på dem", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textBorderWidth": "Linjestørrelse", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textBottom": "Bunn", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textCentered": "Sentrert", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textCharacterSpacing": "Tegnavstand", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textDefault": "Standard fane", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textLeft": "Venstre", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "Legg til ny egendefinert farge", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textNoneSpecial": "(ingen)", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textTabCenter": "Senter", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textTabLeft": "Venstre", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textTabPosition": "Tabulator posisjon", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.txtAutoText": "Auto", "DE.Views.RightMenu.txtChartSettings": "Diagram innstillinger", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strBackground": "Bakgrunnsfarge", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Endre autofigur", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strColor": "Farge", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textColor": "Fyllfarge", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textDirection": "Retning", - "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textNewColor": "Legg til ny egendefinert farge", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.txtBehind": "Bak", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.txtBrownPaper": "Gråpapir", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.txtCanvas": "Lerret", @@ -434,13 +550,17 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettings.deleteColumnText": "Slett kolonne", "DE.Views.TableSettings.deleteRowText": "Slett rad", "DE.Views.TableSettings.deleteTableText": "Slett tabell", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.textAddFormula": "Legg til formel", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textBackColor": "Bakgrunnsfarge", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textBanded": "Bundet", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textBorderColor": "Farge", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textBorders": "Linjestil", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textCellSize": "Cellestørrelse", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.textColumns": "Kolonner", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textDistributeRows": "Fordel rader", - "DE.Views.TableSettings.textNewColor": "Legg til ny egendefinert farge", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_Accent": "Lesetegn", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_Colorful": "Fargerik", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_Dark": "Mørk", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlign": "Oppstilling", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlignment": "Oppstilling", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAllowSpacing": "Tillat avstand mellom cellene", @@ -450,6 +570,7 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textBackColor": "Bakgrunnsfarge", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textBelow": "under", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textBorderColor": "Linjefarge", + "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textBorderDesc": "Trykk på diagram eller bruk knappene for å velge kanter og bruke valgt stil på dem", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textBordersBackgroung": "Linjer & Bakgrunn", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textBorderWidth": "Linjestørrelse", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textBottom": "Bunn", @@ -462,7 +583,6 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textLeft": "Venstre", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textLeftTooltip": "Venstre", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMargins": "Cellemarginer", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "Legg til ny egendefinert farge", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOverlap": "Tillat overlapping", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textTable": "Tabell", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textTableBackColor": "Tabell-bakgrunn", @@ -470,10 +590,15 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.txtCm": "Centimeter", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.txtInch": "Tomme", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.strColor": "Farge", + "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textColor": "Fyllfarge", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textDirection": "Retning", - "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textNewColor": "Legg til ny egendefinert farge", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnAddComment": "Legg til kommentar", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnBlankPage": "Tom side", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnColumns": "Kolonner", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnComment": "Kommentar", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnDateTime": "Dato og tidspunkt", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsChart": "Diagram", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsControls": "Innholdskontroller", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsImage": "Bilde", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsPagebreak": "Brudd", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsTable": "Tabell", @@ -484,8 +609,12 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.textAutoColor": "Automatisk", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textBold": "Fet", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textBottom": "Bunn:", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textCheckboxControl": "Avkrysningsboks", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textColumnsCustom": "Egendefinerte kolonner", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textColumnsLeft": "Venstre", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textContPage": "Sammenhengende side", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textDateControl": "Dato", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textEditWatermark": "Egendefinert vannmerke", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textEvenPage": "Partallside", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textMarginsNarrow": "Smal", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textNewColor": "Legg til ny egendefinert farge", @@ -493,6 +622,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.textPageSizeCustom": "Egendefinert sidestørrelse", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textStyleMenuDelete": "Slett stil", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textStyleMenuDeleteAll": "Slett alle brukerdefinerte formateringer", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabCollaboration": "Samarbeid", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabFile": "Fil", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTitleError": "Feil", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipAlignCenter": "Still opp senter", @@ -503,13 +633,22 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipClearStyle": "Fjern formatering", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipColorSchemas": "Endre fargeoppsett", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipCopy": "Kopier", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipCopyStyle": "Kopier stil", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipDecFont": "Reduser skriftstørrelsen", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipDecPrLeft": "Reduser innrykk", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipEditHeader": "Rediger topptekst eller bunntekst", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipImgAlign": "Still opp objekter", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipMarkers": "Kulepunkt", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipSendForward": "Flytt fremover", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtMarginAlign": "Juster i forhold til marg", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtObjectsAlign": "Juster valgte objekter", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtPageAlign": "Juster i forhold til side", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme3": "Spiss", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme4": "Aspekt", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme5": "Borgerlig" + "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme5": "Borgerlig", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme6": "Mengde", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textAuto": "Auto", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textBold": "Fet", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textDiagonal": "Diagonal", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textNewColor": "Legg til ny egendefinert farge" } \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/nl.json b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/nl.json index 7ba45291d..c39c261fe 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/nl.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/nl.json @@ -10,6 +10,7 @@ "Common.Controllers.ExternalMergeEditor.warningText": "Het object is gedeactiveerd omdat het wordt bewerkt door een andere gebruiker.", "Common.Controllers.ExternalMergeEditor.warningTitle": "Waarschuwing", "Common.Controllers.History.notcriticalErrorTitle": "Waarschuwing", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textAcceptBeforeCompare": "Om documenten te vergelijken, worden alle bijgehouden wijzigingen als geaccepteerd beschouwd. Wil u doorgaan?", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textAtLeast": "ten minste", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textAuto": "automatisch", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textBaseline": "Basislijn", @@ -68,15 +69,52 @@ "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textTableRowsDel": "Tabel Rijen verwijderd", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textTabs": "Tabs wijzigen", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textUnderline": "Onderstrepen", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textUrl": "Plak een document-URL", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textWidow": "Zwevende regels voorkomen", "Common.define.chartData.textArea": "Vlak", "Common.define.chartData.textBar": "Staaf", + "Common.define.chartData.textCharts": "Grafieken", "Common.define.chartData.textColumn": "Kolom", "Common.define.chartData.textLine": "Lijn", "Common.define.chartData.textPie": "Cirkel", "Common.define.chartData.textPoint": "Spreiding", "Common.define.chartData.textStock": "Voorraad", "Common.define.chartData.textSurface": "Oppervlak", + "Common.Translation.warnFileLocked": "Het bestand wordt bewerkt in een andere app. U kunt doorgaan met bewerken en als kopie opslaan.", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textApril": "april", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textAugust": "augustus", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textDecember": "december", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textFebruary": "februari", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textJanuary": "januari", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textJuly": "juli", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textJune": "juni", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textMarch": "maart", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textMay": "mei", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textMonths": "Maand", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textNovember": "november", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textOctober": "oktober", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textSeptember": "september", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortApril": "apr", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortAugust": "aug", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortDecember": "dec", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortFebruary": "feb", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortFriday": "vri", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortJanuary": "jan", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortJuly": "jul", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortJune": "jun", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortMarch": "maa", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortMay": "mei", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortMonday": "ma", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortNovember": "nov", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortOctober": "okt", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortSaturday": "za", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortSeptember": "sep", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortSunday": "zo", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortThursday": "do", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortTuesday": "di", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortWednesday": "wo", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textYears": "jaren", + "Common.UI.ColorButton.textNewColor": "Nieuwe aangepaste kleur toevoegen", "Common.UI.ComboBorderSize.txtNoBorders": "Geen randen", "Common.UI.ComboBorderSizeEditable.txtNoBorders": "Geen randen", "Common.UI.ComboDataView.emptyComboText": "Geen stijlen", @@ -119,6 +157,10 @@ "Common.Views.About.txtPoweredBy": "Aangedreven door", "Common.Views.About.txtTel": "Tel.:", "Common.Views.About.txtVersion": "Versie", + "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textBy": "Door:", + "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textMathCorrect": "Wiskundige autocorrectie", + "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textReplace": "Vervangen:", + "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textTitle": "Automatische spellingscontrole", "Common.Views.Chat.textSend": "Verzenden", "Common.Views.Comments.textAdd": "Toevoegen", "Common.Views.Comments.textAddComment": "Opmerking toevoegen", @@ -167,6 +209,7 @@ "Common.Views.Header.tipRedo": "Opnieuw", "Common.Views.Header.tipSave": "Opslaan", "Common.Views.Header.tipUndo": "Ongedaan maken", + "Common.Views.Header.tipUndock": "Ontkoppel in een apart venster", "Common.Views.Header.tipViewSettings": "Weergave-instellingen", "Common.Views.Header.tipViewUsers": "Gebruikers weergeven en toegangsrechten voor documenten beheren", "Common.Views.Header.txtAccessRights": "Toegangsrechten wijzigen", @@ -177,6 +220,7 @@ "Common.Views.History.textRestore": "Herstellen", "Common.Views.History.textShow": "Uitvouwen", "Common.Views.History.textShowAll": "Details wijzigingen tonen", + "Common.Views.History.textVer": "ver.", "Common.Views.ImageFromUrlDialog.textUrl": "URL van een afbeelding plakken:", "Common.Views.ImageFromUrlDialog.txtEmpty": "Dit veld is vereist", "Common.Views.ImageFromUrlDialog.txtNotUrl": "Dit veld moet een URL in de notatie \"http://www.voorbeeld.com\" bevatten", @@ -193,6 +237,7 @@ "Common.Views.OpenDialog.txtIncorrectPwd": "Wachtwoord is niet juist", "Common.Views.OpenDialog.txtPassword": "Wachtwoord", "Common.Views.OpenDialog.txtPreview": "Voorbeeld", + "Common.Views.OpenDialog.txtProtected": "Nadat u het wachtwoord heeft ingevoerd en het bestand heeft geopend, wordt het huidige wachtwoord voor het bestand gereset.", "Common.Views.OpenDialog.txtTitle": "Opties voor %1 kiezen", "Common.Views.OpenDialog.txtTitleProtected": "Beschermd bestand", "Common.Views.PasswordDialog.txtDescription": "Pas een wachtwoord toe om dit document te beveiligen", @@ -220,12 +265,19 @@ "Common.Views.RenameDialog.txtInvalidName": "De bestandsnaam mag geen van de volgende tekens bevatten:", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.hintNext": "Naar Volgende Wijziging", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.hintPrev": "Naar Vorige Wijziging", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.mniFromFile": "Document van bestand", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.mniFromStorage": "Document van opslag", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.mniFromUrl": "Document van URL", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.mniSettings": "Vergelijking instellingen", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.strFast": "Snel", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.strFastDesc": "Real-time samenwerken. Alle wijzigingen worden automatisch opgeslagen.", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.strStrict": "Strikt", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.strStrictDesc": "Gebruik de 'Opslaan' knop om de wijzigingen van u en andere te synchroniseren.", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipAcceptCurrent": "Huidige wijziging accepteren", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipCoAuthMode": "Zet samenwerkings modus", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipCommentRem": "Alle opmerkingen verwijderen", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipCommentRemCurrent": "Verwijder huidige opmerking", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipCompare": "Vergelijk huidig document met een ander document.", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipHistory": "Toon versie geschiedenis", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipRejectCurrent": "Huidige wijziging afwijzen", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipReview": "Wijzigingen Bijhouden", @@ -240,6 +292,12 @@ "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtChat": "Chat", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtClose": "Sluiten", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCoAuthMode": "Modus Gezamenlijk bewerken", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCommentRemAll": "Alle commentaar verwijderen", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCommentRemCurrent": "Verwijder huidige opmerking", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCommentRemMy": "Verwijder al mijn commentaar", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCommentRemMyCurrent": "Verwijder mijn huidige opmerkingen", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCommentRemove": "Verwijderen", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCompare": "Vergelijken", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtDocLang": "Taal", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtFinal": "Alle veranderingen geaccepteerd (Voorbeeld)", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtFinalCap": "Einde", @@ -272,6 +330,9 @@ "Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textCancel": "Annuleren", "Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textClose": "Sluiten", "Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textEdit": "OK", + "Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textFollowMove": "Track verplaatsen", + "Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textMention": "+vermelding zal de gebruiker toegang geven tot het document en een email sturen", + "Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textMentionNotify": "+genoemde zal de gebruiker via email melden", "Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textOpenAgain": "Opnieuw openen", "Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textReply": "Beantwoorden", "Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textResolve": "Oplossen", @@ -302,6 +363,33 @@ "Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textShowDate": "Toon signeer datum in handtekening regel", "Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textTitle": "Handtekening opzet", "Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.txtEmpty": "Dit veld is vereist", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textCharacter": "Character", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textCode": "Unicode HEX-waarde", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textCopyright": "Copyright teken", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textDCQuote": "Aanhalingsteken sluiten", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textDOQuote": "Dubbel aanhalingsteken openen", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textEllipsis": "Horizontale ellips", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textEmDash": "streep", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textEmSpace": "Spatie", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textEnDash": "Korte streep", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textEnSpace": "Korte spatie", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textFont": "Lettertype", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textNBHyphen": "Niet-afbrekenden koppelteken", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textNBSpace": "niet-afbrekende spatie", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textPilcrow": "Alineateken", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textQEmSpace": "1/4 Em spatie", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textRange": "Bereik", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textRecent": "Recent gebruikte symbolen", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textRegistered": "Geregistreerd teken", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSCQuote": "Enkele aanhalingsteken sluiten", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSection": "Sectie Teken", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textShortcut": "Sneltoets", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSHyphen": "Zacht koppelteken", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSOQuote": "Een enkel citaat openen", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSpecial": "speciale karakters", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSymbols": "Symbolen", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textTitle": "symbool", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textTradeMark": "Handelsmerk symbool", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.leavePageText": "Alle niet-opgeslagen wijzigingen in dit document zullen verloren gaan.
    Klik op \"Annuleren\" en dan op \"Opslaan\" om de wijzigingen op te slaan. Klik \"OK\" om de wijzigingen te negeren.", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.newDocumentTitle": "Naamloos document", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.notcriticalErrorTitle": "Waarschuwing", @@ -310,8 +398,10 @@ "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.textNoTextFound": "De gegevens waarnaar u zoekt, zijn niet gevonden. Pas uw zoekopties aan.", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.textReplaceSkipped": "De vervanging is uitgevoerd. {0} gevallen zijn overgeslagen.", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.textReplaceSuccess": "De zoekactie is uitgevoerd. Vervangen items: {0}", + "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.txtCompatible": "Het document wordt opgeslagen in het nieuwe formaat. Het maakt het mogelijk om alle editor functies te gebruiken, maar kan de lay-out van het document beïnvloeden.
    Gebruik de optie 'Compatibiliteit' van de geavanceerde instellingen als u de bestanden compatibel wilt maken met oudere MS Word-versies.", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.txtUntitled": "Naamloos", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.warnDownloadAs": "Als u doorgaat met opslaan in deze indeling, gaan alle kenmerken verloren en blijft alleen de tekst behouden.
    Wilt u doorgaan?", + "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.warnDownloadAsRTF": "Als u doorgaat met opslaan in deze indeling, kan een deel van de opmaak verloren gaan.
    Weet u zeker dat u wilt doorgaan?", "DE.Controllers.Main.applyChangesTextText": "Wijzigingen worden geladen...", "DE.Controllers.Main.applyChangesTitleText": "Wijzigingen worden geladen", "DE.Controllers.Main.convertationTimeoutText": "Time-out voor conversie overschreden.", @@ -325,13 +415,18 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.errorAccessDeny": "U probeert een actie uit te voeren waarvoor u geen rechten hebt.
    Neem contact op met de beheerder van de documentserver.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorBadImageUrl": "URL afbeelding is onjuist", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorCoAuthoringDisconnect": "Verbinding met server is verbroken. Het document kan op dit moment niet worden bewerkt.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorCompare": "De functie Documenten vergelijken is niet beschikbaar tijdens gezamenlijk bewerken.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorConnectToServer": "Het document kan niet worden opgeslagen. Controleer de verbindingsinstellingen of neem contact op met de beheerder.
    Wanneer u op de knop 'OK' klikt, wordt u gevraagd het document te downloaden.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorDatabaseConnection": "Externe fout.
    Fout in databaseverbinding. Neem contact op met Support als deze fout zich blijft voordoen.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorDataEncrypted": "Versleutelde aanpassingen zijn ontvangen, deze kunnen niet ontsleuteld worden.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorDataRange": "Onjuist gegevensbereik.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorDefaultMessage": "Foutcode: %1", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorDirectUrl": "Controleer de link naar het document.
    Deze link moet een directe link naar het bestand zijn om te downloaden.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorEditingDownloadas": "Er is een fout ontstaan tijdens het werken met het document.
    Gebruik de 'Opslaan als...' optie om het bestand als backup op te slaan op uw computer.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorEditingSaveas": "Er is een fout ontstaan tijdens het werken met het document.
    Gebruik de 'Opslaan als...' optie om het bestand als backup op te slaan op uw computer.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorEmailClient": "Er is geen e-mail client gevonden.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorFilePassProtect": "Het bestand is beschermd met een wachtwoord en kan niet worden geopend.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorFileSizeExceed": "De bestandsgrootte overschrijdt de limiet die is ingesteld voor uw server.
    Neem contact op met uw Document Server-beheerder voor details.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorForceSave": "Er is een fout ontstaan bij het opslaan van het bestand. Gebruik de 'Download als' knop om het bestand op te slaan op uw computer of probeer het later nog eens.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorKeyEncrypt": "Onbekende sleuteldescriptor", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorKeyExpire": "Sleuteldescriptor vervallen", @@ -346,6 +441,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.errorToken": "Het token voor de documentbeveiliging heeft niet de juiste indeling.
    Neem contact op met de beheerder van de documentserver.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorTokenExpire": "Het token voor de documentbeveiliging is vervallen.
    Neem contact op met de beheerder van de documentserver.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorUpdateVersion": "De bestandsversie is gewijzigd. De pagina wordt opnieuw geladen.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorUpdateVersionOnDisconnect": "De internetverbinding is hersteld en de bestandsversie is gewijzigd.
    Voordat u verder kunt werken, moet u het bestand downloaden of de inhoud kopiëren om er zeker van te zijn dat er niets verloren gaat, en deze pagina vervolgens opnieuw laden.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorUserDrop": "Toegang tot het bestand is op dit moment niet mogelijk.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorUsersExceed": "Het onder het prijsplan toegestane aantal gebruikers is overschreden", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorViewerDisconnect": "Verbinding is verbroken. U kunt het document nog wel bekijken,
    maar u kunt het pas downloaden of afdrukken als de verbinding is hersteld.", @@ -383,15 +479,20 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.splitMaxColsErrorText": "Het aantal kolommen moet kleiner zijn dan %1.", "DE.Controllers.Main.splitMaxRowsErrorText": "Het aantal rijen moet minder zijn dan %1.", "DE.Controllers.Main.textAnonymous": "Anoniem", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textApplyAll": "Toepassen op alle vergelijkingen", "DE.Controllers.Main.textBuyNow": "Website bezoeken", "DE.Controllers.Main.textChangesSaved": "Alle wijzigingen zijn opgeslagen", "DE.Controllers.Main.textClose": "Sluiten", "DE.Controllers.Main.textCloseTip": "Klik om de tip te sluiten", "DE.Controllers.Main.textContactUs": "Contact opnemen met Verkoop", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textConvertEquation": "Deze vergelijking is gemaakt met een oude versie van de vergelijkingseditor die niet langer wordt ondersteund. Om deze te bewerken, converteert u de vergelijking naar de Office Math ML-indeling.
    Nu converteren?", "DE.Controllers.Main.textCustomLoader": "Volgens de voorwaarden van de licentie heeft u geen recht om de lader aan te passen.
    Neem contact op met onze verkoopafdeling voor een offerte.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textHasMacros": "Het bestand bevat automatische macro's.
    Wilt u macro's uitvoeren?", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textLearnMore": "Meer informatie", "DE.Controllers.Main.textLoadingDocument": "Document wordt geladen", "DE.Controllers.Main.textNoLicenseTitle": "Only Office verbindingslimiet", "DE.Controllers.Main.textPaidFeature": "Betaalde optie", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textRemember": "Onthoud voorkeur", "DE.Controllers.Main.textShape": "Vorm", "DE.Controllers.Main.textStrict": "Strikte modus", "DE.Controllers.Main.textTryUndoRedo": "De functies Ongedaan maken/Opnieuw worden uitgeschakeld in de modus Snel gezamenlijk bewerken.
    Klik op de knop 'Strikte modus' om over te schakelen naar de strikte modus voor gezamenlijk bewerken. U kunt het bestand dan zonder interferentie van andere gebruikers bewerken en uw wijzigingen verzenden wanneer u die opslaat. U kunt schakelen tussen de modi voor gezamenlijke bewerking via Geavanceerde instellingen van de editor.", @@ -404,57 +505,145 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.txtBelow": "Onder", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtBookmarkError": "Fout! Bladwijzer is niet gedefinieerd.", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtButtons": "Knoppen", - "DE.Controllers.Main.txtCallouts": "Callouts", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtCallouts": "Legenda", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtCharts": "Grafieken", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtChoose": "Kies een item", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtCurrentDocument": "Huidig document", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtDiagramTitle": "Grafiektitel", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtEditingMode": "Bewerkmodus instellen...", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtEndOfFormula": "Onverwacht einde van de formule", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtEnterDate": "Vul een datum in", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtErrorLoadHistory": "Laden historie mislukt", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtEvenPage": "Even pagina", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtFiguredArrows": "Pijlvormen", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtFirstPage": "Eerste pagina", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtFooter": "Voettekst", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtFormulaNotInTable": "De formule in niet in het tabel", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtHeader": "Koptekst", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtHyperlink": "Hyperlink", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtIndTooLarge": "Index te groot", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtLines": "Lijnen", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtMainDocOnly": "Fout! alleen hoofddocument", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtMath": "Wiskunde", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtMissArg": "Missende parameter", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtMissOperator": "Ontbrekende operator", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtNeedSynchronize": "U hebt updates", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtNoTableOfContents": "Geen regels voor de inhoudsopgave gevonden", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtNoText": "Fout! Geen gespecificeerde tekst in document", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtNotInTable": "Is niet in tabel", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtNotValidBookmark": "Fout! Geen geldige zelf referentie voor bladwijzers.", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtOddPage": "Oneven pagina", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtOnPage": "op pagina", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtRectangles": "Rechthoeken", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtSameAsPrev": "Zelfde als vorige", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtSection": "-Sectie", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtSeries": "Serie", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_accentBorderCallout1": "Legenda met lijn 1 (Rand en Accentbalk)", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_accentBorderCallout2": "Legenda met lijn 2 (Rand met accentbalk)", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_accentBorderCallout3": "Legenda met lijn 3 (Rand met accent balk)", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_accentCallout1": "Legenda met lijn 1 (accentbalk)", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_accentCallout2": "Legenda met lijn 1(accentbalk)", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_accentCallout3": "Legenda met lijn 3 (accent balk)", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_actionButtonBackPrevious": "Terug of vorige button", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_actionButtonBeginning": "Begin button", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_actionButtonBlank": "Lege button", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_actionButtonDocument": "Document knop", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_actionButtonEnd": "Beëindigen", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_actionButtonForwardNext": "'Volgende' knop", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_actionButtonHelp": "Help knop", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_actionButtonHome": "Start knop", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_actionButtonInformation": "Informatieknop", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_actionButtonMovie": "Film knop", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_actionButtonReturn": "Return-knop", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_actionButtonSound": "Geluid knop", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_arc": "Boog", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_bentArrow": "Gebogen pijl", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_bentConnector5": "Rechthoekige verbinding", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_bentConnector5WithArrow": "Rechthoekige verbinding met peil", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_bentConnector5WithTwoArrows": "Rechthoekige verbinding met dubbele peilen", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_bentUpArrow": "Naar boven gebogen pijl", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_bevel": "Schuin", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_blockArc": "Blokboog", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_borderCallout1": "Legenda met lijn 1", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_borderCallout2": "Legenda met lijn 2", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_borderCallout3": "Legenda met lijn 3", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_bracePair": "Dubbele accolades", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_callout1": "Legenda met lijn 1 (Geen rand)", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_callout2": "Legenda met lijn 2 (geen rand)", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_callout3": "Legenda met lijn 3 (Geen rand)", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_can": "Emmer", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_chevron": "Chevron", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_chord": "Akkoord", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_circularArrow": "Ronde pijl", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_cloud": "Cloud", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_cloudCallout": "Cloud legenda", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_corner": "Hoek", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_cube": "Kubus", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_curvedConnector3": "Gebogen verbinding", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_curvedConnector3WithArrow": "Gebogen verbinding met pijlen", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_curvedConnector3WithTwoArrows": "Gebogen verbinding met dubbele peilen", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_curvedDownArrow": "Gebogen pijl naar beneden", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_curvedLeftArrow": "Gebogen pijl naar links", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_curvedRightArrow": "Gebogen pijl naar rechts", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_curvedUpArrow": "Gebogen pijl naar boven", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_decagon": "Tienhoek", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_diagStripe": "Diagonale Strepen", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_diamond": "Diamant", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_dodecagon": "Twaalfhoek", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_donut": "Donut", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_doubleWave": "Dubbele golf", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_downArrow": "Pijl omlaag", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_downArrowCallout": "Legenda met peil naar beneden", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_ellipse": "Ovaal", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_ellipseRibbon": "Gebogen lint naar beneden", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_ellipseRibbon2": "Gebogen lint naar boven", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartAlternateProcess": "Alternatief proces stroomdiagram ", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartCollate": "Stroomdiagram: Sorteren", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartConnector": "Stroomdiagram: Verbinden", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartDecision": "Stroomdiagram: Beslissingen", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartDelay": "Stroomdiagram: Vertraging", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartDisplay": "Stroomdiagram: Beeldscherm", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartDocument": "Stroomdiagram: Document", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartExtract": "Stroomdiagram: Extractie", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartInputOutput": "Stroomdiagram: gegevens", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartInternalStorage": "Stroomdiagram: Interne opslag", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartMagneticDisk": "Stroomdiagram: Magnetische schijf", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartMagneticDrum": "Stroomdiagram: Opslag met directe toegang", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartMagneticTape": "Stroomdiagram: Sequentiële toegang", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartManualInput": "Stroomdiagram: Handmatige invoer", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartManualOperation": "Stroomdiagram: Handmatige bewerking", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartMerge": "Stroomdiagram: Samenvoegen", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartMultidocument": "Stroomdiagram: Meerdere documenten", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartOffpageConnector": "Stroomdiagram: Verbinding naar andere pagina", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartOnlineStorage": "Stroomdiagram: Opgeslagen gegevens", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartOr": "Stroomdiagram: Of", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartPredefinedProcess": "Stroomdiagram: Voorgedefinieerd", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartPreparation": "Stroomdiagram: Voorbereiding", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartProcess": "Stroomdiagram: Proces", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartPunchedCard": "Kaartdiagram", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartPunchedTape": "Stroomdiagram: Ponsband", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartSort": "Stroomdiagram: Sorteren", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartSummingJunction": "Stroomdiagram: Samenvoeging", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartTerminator": "Stroomdiagram: Beëindigen ", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_foldedCorner": "Ezelsoor", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_frame": "Kader", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_halfFrame": "Half kader", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_heart": "Hart", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_heptagon": "Zevenhoek", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_hexagon": "zeshoek", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_homePlate": "Vijfhoek", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_horizontalScroll": "Horizontaal scrollen", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_irregularSeal1": "Explosie 1", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_irregularSeal2": "Explosie 2", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_leftArrow": "Pijl links", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_leftArrowCallout": "Legenda met peil naar links", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_leftBrace": "Haakje links", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_leftBracket": "Links hoekige haak", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_leftRightArrow": "Peil naar links en rechts", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_leftRightArrowCallout": "Legenda met peil naar rechts", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_leftRightUpArrow": "Peil naar links, rechts en boven", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_leftUpArrow": "Peil naar links en boven", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_lightningBolt": "Bliksemschicht", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_line": "Lijn", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_lineWithArrow": "Pijl", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_lineWithTwoArrows": "Dubbele pijl", @@ -466,14 +655,34 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_mathPlus": "Plus", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_moon": "Maan", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_noSmoking": "\"Nee\" Symbool", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_notchedRightArrow": "Pijl naar rechts met kerf", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_octagon": "Achthoek", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_parallelogram": "Parallellogram", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_pentagon": "Vijfhoek", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_pie": "Cirkel", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_plaque": "Onderteken", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_plus": "Plus", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_polyline1": "Krabbel", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_polyline2": "vrije vorm", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_quadArrow": "Peil in vier richtingen", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_quadArrowCallout": "Legenda met pijl in vier richtingen", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_rect": "Vierhoek", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_ribbon": "Lint naar beneden", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_ribbon2": "Lint naar boven", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_rightArrow": "Pijl rechts", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_rightArrowCallout": "Legenda met pijl naar rechts", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_rightBrace": "Haak Rechts", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_rightBracket": "accolade rechts", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_round1Rect": "Ronde enkele rechthoek", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_round2DiagRect": "Ronde diagonale rechthoek", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_round2SameRect": "Ronde rechthoek met dezelfde zijhoek", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_roundRect": "Afgeronde driehoek", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_rtTriangle": "Driehoek naar rechts", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_smileyFace": "Smiley", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_snip1Rect": "Snip Single Corner Rectangle", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_snip2DiagRect": "Knip Diagonale Hoek Rechthoek", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_snip2SameRect": "Knip Rechthoek in hoek aan dezelfde zijde", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_snipRoundRect": "Knip en rond enkele hoek rechthoek", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_spline": "Kromming", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star10": "10-Punt ster", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star12": "12-Punt ster", @@ -485,13 +694,23 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star6": "6-Punt ster", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star7": "7-Punt ster", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star8": "8-Punt ster", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_stripedRightArrow": "Pijl naar rechts met strepen", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_sun": "Zon", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_teardrop": "Traan", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_textRect": "Tekstvak", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_trapezoid": "Trapezium", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_triangle": "Driehoek", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_upArrow": "Pijl omhoog", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_upArrowCallout": "Legenda met peil omhoog", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_upDownArrow": "Peil naar boven en beneden", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_uturnArrow": "U-bocht pijl", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_verticalScroll": "Verticale scrolling", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_wave": "Golf", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_wedgeEllipseCallout": "Ovale legenda", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_wedgeRectCallout": "Rechthoekige legenda", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_wedgeRoundRectCallout": "Afgeronde rechthoekige Legenda", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtStarsRibbons": "Sterren en linten", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_Caption": "Onderschrift", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_footnote_text": "Voetnoot tekst", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_Heading_1": "Kop 1", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_Heading_2": "Kop 2", @@ -510,20 +729,30 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_Subtitle": "Subtitel", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_Title": "Titel", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtSyntaxError": "Syntax error", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtTableInd": "Tabelindex mag niet nul zijn", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtTableOfContents": "Inhoudsopgave", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtTooLarge": "te groot getal om te formatteren", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtTypeEquation": "Typ hier een vergelijking.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtUndefBookmark": "Ongedefinieerde bladwijzer", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtXAxis": "X-as", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtYAxis": "Y-as", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtZeroDivide": "Nul delen", "DE.Controllers.Main.unknownErrorText": "Onbekende fout.", "DE.Controllers.Main.unsupportedBrowserErrorText": "Uw browser wordt niet ondersteund.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.uploadDocExtMessage": "Onbekend documentformaat.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.uploadDocFileCountMessage": "Geen documenten ge-upload", + "DE.Controllers.Main.uploadDocSizeMessage": "Maximale documentgrootte overschreden.", "DE.Controllers.Main.uploadImageExtMessage": "Onbekende afbeeldingsindeling.", "DE.Controllers.Main.uploadImageFileCountMessage": "Geen afbeeldingen geüpload.", "DE.Controllers.Main.uploadImageSizeMessage": "Maximale afbeeldingsgrootte overschreden.", "DE.Controllers.Main.uploadImageTextText": "Afbeelding wordt geüpload...", "DE.Controllers.Main.uploadImageTitleText": "Afbeelding wordt geüpload", + "DE.Controllers.Main.waitText": "Een moment...", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnBrowserIE9": "Met IE9 heeft de toepassing beperkte mogelijkheden. Gebruik IE10 of hoger.", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnBrowserZoom": "De huidige zoominstelling van uw browser wordt niet ondersteund. Zet de zoominstelling terug op de standaardwaarde door op Ctrl+0 te drukken.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExceeded": "Het aantal gelijktijdige verbindingen met de document server heeft het maximum overschreven. Het document zal geopend worden in een alleen-lezen modus.
    Neem contact op met de beheerder voor meer informatie.", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExp": "Uw licentie is vervallen.
    Werk uw licentie bij en vernieuw de pagina.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseUsersExceeded": "U heeft de gebruikerslimiet voor %1 editors bereikt. Neem contact op met uw beheerder voor meer informatie.", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnNoLicense": "Deze versie van %1 bevat limieten voor het aantal gelijktijdige gebruikers.
    Indien meer nodig is, upgrade dan de huidige licentie of schaf een commerciële licentie aan.", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnNoLicenseUsers": "Deze versie van %1 bevat limieten voor het aantal gelijktijdige gebruikers.
    Indien meer nodig is, upgrade dan de huidige licentie of schaf een commerciële licentie aan.", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnProcessRightsChange": "Het recht om het bestand te bewerken is u ontzegd.", @@ -541,6 +770,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.textFontSizeErr": "De ingevoerde waarde is onjuist.
    Voer een waarde tussen 1 en 100 in", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.textFraction": "Breuken", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.textFunction": "Functies", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.textInsert": "Invoegen", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.textIntegral": "Integralen", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.textLargeOperator": "Grote operators", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.textLimitAndLog": "Limieten en logaritmen", @@ -870,17 +1100,54 @@ "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_zeta": "Zeta", "DE.Controllers.Viewport.textFitPage": "Aan pagina aanpassen", "DE.Controllers.Viewport.textFitWidth": "Aan breedte aanpassen", + "DE.Views.AddNewCaptionLabelDialog.textLabel": "Label:", + "DE.Views.AddNewCaptionLabelDialog.textLabelError": "Label mag niet leeg zijn", "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textAdd": "Toevoegen", "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textBookmarkName": "Bladwijzer naam", "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textClose": "Sluiten", "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textCopy": "Kopiëren", "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textDelete": "Verwijder", + "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textGetLink": "Link ophalen", "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textGoto": "Ga naar", "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textHidden": "Verborgen bladwijzers", "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textLocation": "Locatie", "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textName": "Naam", "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textSort": "Sorteren op", "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textTitle": "Bladwijzers", + "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.txtInvalidName": "De naam van de bladwijzer mag alleen letters, cijfers en onderstrepingstekens bevatten en moet beginnen met de letter", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textAdd": "Toevoegen label", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textAfter": "Na", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textBefore": "Voor", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textCaption": "Selectiekader", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textChapter": "Hoofdstuk begint met stijl", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textChapterInc": "Inclusief hoofdstuknummer", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textColon": "Dubbele punt", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textDash": "Streepje", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textDelete": "verwijder label", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textEquation": "Vergelijking", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textExamples": "Voorbeelden: tabel 2-A, afbeelding 1.IV", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textExclude": "Label uitsluiten van bijschrift", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textFigure": "Figuur", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textHyphen": "Koppelteken", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textInsert": "Invoegen", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textLabel": "Label", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textLongDash": "lange streep", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textNumbering": "Nummering", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textPeriod": "Punt", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textSeparator": "Gebruik een scheidingsteken", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textTable": "Tabel", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textTitle": "Bijschrift invoegen", + "DE.Views.CellsAddDialog.textCol": "Kolommen", + "DE.Views.CellsAddDialog.textDown": "Onder de cursor", + "DE.Views.CellsAddDialog.textLeft": "Naar links", + "DE.Views.CellsAddDialog.textRight": "Naar rechts", + "DE.Views.CellsAddDialog.textRow": "Rijen", + "DE.Views.CellsAddDialog.textTitle": "Meerdere invoegen", + "DE.Views.CellsAddDialog.textUp": "Boven de cursor", + "DE.Views.CellsRemoveDialog.textCol": "verwijder volledig kolom ", + "DE.Views.CellsRemoveDialog.textLeft": "Verplaats cellen naar links", + "DE.Views.CellsRemoveDialog.textRow": "verwijder volledige rij", + "DE.Views.CellsRemoveDialog.textTitle": "verwijder cellen", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textAdvanced": "Geavanceerde instellingen tonen", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textChartType": "Grafiektype wijzigen", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textEditData": "Gegevens bewerken", @@ -899,23 +1166,51 @@ "DE.Views.ChartSettings.txtTight": "Strak", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.txtTitle": "Grafiek", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.txtTopAndBottom": "Boven en onder", + "DE.Views.CompareSettingsDialog.textChar": "Lettertype niveau", + "DE.Views.CompareSettingsDialog.textShow": "Wijzigingen weergeven op", + "DE.Views.CompareSettingsDialog.textTitle": "Vergelijking instellingen", + "DE.Views.CompareSettingsDialog.textWord": "Woordniveau", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.strGeneral": "Algemeen", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textAdd": "Toevoegen", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textAppearance": "Verschijning", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textApplyAll": "Op alles toepassen", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textBox": "Selectiekader", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textChange": "Bewerken", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textCheckbox": "Selectievak", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textChecked": "Geselecteerd symbool", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textColor": "Kleur", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textCombobox": "Keuzelijst", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textDate": "Formaat datum", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textDelete": "Verwijderen", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textDisplayName": "Naam weergeven", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textDown": "Onder", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textDropDown": "Keuzelijst", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textFormat": "Geef de datum als volgt weer", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textLang": "Taal", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textLock": "Vergrendeling", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textName": "Titel", - "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textNewColor": "Nieuwe aangepaste kleur toevoegen", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textNone": "Geen", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textPlaceholder": "Tijdelijke aanduiding", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textShowAs": "Tonen als", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textSystemColor": "Systeem", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textTag": "Tag", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textTitle": "Inhoud beheer instellingen", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textUnchecked": "Niet aangevinkt symbool", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textUp": "Omhoog", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textValue": "Waarde", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.tipChange": "Verander symbool", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.txtLockDelete": "Inhoud beheer kan niet verwijderd worden", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.txtLockEdit": "Inhoud kan niet aangepast worden", "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textColumns": "Aantal kolommen", "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textSeparator": "Scheidingsmarkering kolommen", "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textSpacing": "Afstand tussen kolommen", "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textTitle": "Kolommen", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.confirmDefault": "Stel de standaardindeling in voor {0}: \"{1}\"", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textDefault": "stel in als standaard", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textFormat": "Formaat", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textLang": "Taal", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textUpdate": "Automatisch updaten", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.txtTitle": "Datum & Tijd", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.aboveText": "Boven", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.addCommentText": "Opmerking toevoegen", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.advancedFrameText": "Geavanceerde frame-instellingen", @@ -989,10 +1284,13 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textArrangeBackward": "Naar Achteren Verplaatsen", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textArrangeForward": "Naar Voren Verplaatsen", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textArrangeFront": "Naar voorgrond brengen", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textCells": "cells", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textContentControls": "Inhoud beheer", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textContinueNumbering": "Voortzetten nummering", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textCopy": "Kopiëren", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textCrop": "Uitsnijden", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textCropFill": "Vulling", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textCropFit": "Aanpassen", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textCut": "Knippen", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textDistributeCols": "Kolommen verdelen", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textDistributeRows": "Rijen verdelen", @@ -1000,10 +1298,14 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textEditWrapBoundary": "Rand tekstterugloop bewerken", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFlipH": "Horizontaal omdraaien", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFlipV": "Verticaal omdraaien", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFollow": "Track verplaatsen", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFromFile": "Van bestand", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFromStorage": "Van Opslag", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFromUrl": "Van URL", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textJoinList": "aan vorige lijst verbinden", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textNest": "Geneste tabel", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textNextPage": "Volgende pagina", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textNumberingValue": "Nummeringswaarde", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textPaste": "Plakken", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textPrevPage": "Vorige pagina", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textRefreshField": "Ververs veld", @@ -1013,7 +1315,9 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textRotate": "Draaien", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textRotate270": "Draaien 90° linksom", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textRotate90": "Draaien 90° rechtsom", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textSeparateList": "Afzonderlijke lijst", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textSettings": "Instellingen", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textSeveral": "Meerdere rijen / kolommen", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textShapeAlignBottom": "Onder uitlijnen", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textShapeAlignCenter": "Midden uitlijnen", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textShapeAlignLeft": "Links uitlijnen", @@ -1021,6 +1325,7 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textShapeAlignRight": "Rechts uitlijnen", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textShapeAlignTop": "Boven uitlijnen", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textStartNewList": "Start nieuwe lijst", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textStartNumberingFrom": "Nummeringswaarde instellen", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textTOC": "Inhoudsopgave", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textTOCSettings": "Inhoudsopgave instellingen", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textUndo": "Ongedaan maken", @@ -1029,6 +1334,7 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textUpdateTOC": "Inhoudsopgave verversen", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textWrap": "Terugloopstijl", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.tipIsLocked": "Dit element wordt op dit moment bewerkt door een andere gebruiker.", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.toDictionaryText": "Toevoegen aan woordenboek", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtAddBottom": "Onderrand toevoegen", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtAddFractionBar": "Deelteken toevoegen", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtAddHor": "Horizontale lijn toevoegen", @@ -1053,6 +1359,7 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtDeleteRadical": "Wortel verwijderen", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtDistribHor": "Horizontaal verdelen", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtDistribVert": "Verticaal verdelen", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtEmpty": "(Leeg)", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtFractionLinear": "Wijzigen in Lineaire breuk", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtFractionSkewed": "Wijzigen in Schuine breuk", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtFractionStacked": "Wijzigen in Gestapelde breuk", @@ -1079,6 +1386,7 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtInsertArgAfter": "Argument invoegen na", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtInsertArgBefore": "Argument invoegen vóór", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtInsertBreak": "Handmatig einde invoegen", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtInsertCaption": "Bijschrift invoegen", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtInsertEqAfter": "Vergelijking invoegen na", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtInsertEqBefore": "Vergelijking invoegen vóór", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtKeepTextOnly": "Alleen tekst behouden", @@ -1091,6 +1399,7 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtOverwriteCells": "Cellen overschrijven", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtPasteSourceFormat": "Behoud bronopmaak", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtPressLink": "Druk op Ctrl en klik op koppeling", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtPrintSelection": "Selectie afdrukken", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtRemFractionBar": "Deelteken verwijderen", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtRemLimit": "Limiet verwijderen", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtRemoveAccentChar": "Accentteken verwijderen", @@ -1142,7 +1451,6 @@ "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textLeft": "Links", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textMargin": "Marge", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textMove": "Met tekst verplaatsen", - "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "Nieuwe aangepaste kleur toevoegen", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textNone": "Geen", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textPage": "Pagina", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textParagraph": "Alinea", @@ -1158,6 +1466,10 @@ "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textWidth": "Breedte", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.tipFontName": "Lettertype", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.txtNoBorders": "Geen randen", + "DE.Views.EditListItemDialog.textDisplayName": "Naam weergeven", + "DE.Views.EditListItemDialog.textNameError": "Weergaven naam mag niet leeg zijn", + "DE.Views.EditListItemDialog.textValue": "Waarde", + "DE.Views.EditListItemDialog.textValueError": "Er bestaat al een item met dezelfde waarde.", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnBackCaption": "Naar documenten", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnCloseMenuCaption": "Menu sluiten", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnCreateNewCaption": "Nieuw maken", @@ -1182,18 +1494,28 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.CreateNew.newDescriptionText": "Maak een nieuw leeg tekstdocument waarop u stijlen kunt toepassen en dat u in bewerksessies kunt opmaken nadat het is gemaakt. Of kies een van de sjablonen om een document van een bepaald type of met een bepaald doel te starten. In de sjabloon zijn sommige stijlen al toegepast.", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.CreateNew.newDocumentText": "Nieuw tekstdocument", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.CreateNew.noTemplatesText": "Er zijn geen sjablonen", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.okButtonText": "Toepassen", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtAddAuthor": "Voeg auteur toe", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtAddText": "Tekst toevoegen", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtAppName": "Applicatie", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtAuthor": "Auteur", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtBtnAccessRights": "Toegangsrechten wijzigen", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtComment": "Opmerking", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtCreated": "Aangemaakt", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtLoading": "Laden...", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtModifyBy": "Laatst aangepast door", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtModifyDate": "Laatst aangepast", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtOwner": "Eigenaar", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtPages": "Pagina's", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtParagraphs": "Alinea's", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtPlacement": "Locatie", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtRights": "Personen met rechten", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtSpaces": "Symbolen met spaties", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtStatistics": "Statistieken", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtSubject": "Onderwerp", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtSymbols": "Symbolen", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtTitle": "Titel document", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtUploaded": "Geupload", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtWords": "Woorden", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentRights.txtBtnAccessRights": "Toegangsrechten wijzigen", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentRights.txtRights": "Personen met rechten", @@ -1220,6 +1542,9 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strForcesave": "Altijd op server opslaan (anders op server opslaan bij sluiten document)", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strInputMode": "Hiërogliefen inschakelen", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strLiveComment": "Weergave van opmerkingen inschakelen", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strMacrosSettings": "Macro instellingen", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strPaste": "Knippen, kopiëren en plakken", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strPasteButton": "Toon de knop Plakopties wanneer de inhoud is geplakt", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strResolvedComment": "Weergave van opgeloste opmerkingen inschakelen", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strShowChanges": "Wijzigingen in realtime samenwerking", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strSpellCheckMode": "Optie voor spellingcontrole inschakelen", @@ -1233,10 +1558,14 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textAlignGuides": "Uitlijningshulplijnen", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textAutoRecover": "AutoHerstel", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textAutoSave": "Automatisch opslaan", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textCompatible": "compatibiliteit", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textDisabled": "Gedeactiveerd", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textForceSave": "Opslaan op server", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textMinute": "Elke minuut", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textOldVersions": "Maak de bestanden compatibel met oudere MS Word-versies wanneer ze worden opgeslagen als DOCX", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtAll": "Alles weergeven", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtAutoCorrect": "Instellingen automatische spellingscontrole", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtCacheMode": "standaard cache modus", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtCm": "Centimeter", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtFitPage": "Aan pagina aanpassen", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtFitWidth": "Aan breedte aanpassen", @@ -1247,8 +1576,15 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtMac": "als OS X", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtNative": "Native", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtNone": "Geen weergeven", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtProofing": "Controlleren", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtPt": "Punt", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtRunMacros": "Alles inschakelen", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtRunMacrosDesc": "Schakel alle macro's in zonder een notificatie", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtSpellCheck": "Spellingcontrole", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtStopMacros": "Alles uitschakelen", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtStopMacrosDesc": "Schakel alle macro's uit zonder melding", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtWarnMacros": "Weergeef notificatie", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtWarnMacrosDesc": "Schakel alle macro's uit met een melding", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtWin": "als Windows", "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textBottomCenter": "Middenonder", "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textBottomLeft": "Linksonder", @@ -1285,10 +1621,13 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textAdvanced": "Geavanceerde instellingen tonen", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textCrop": "Uitsnijden", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textCropFill": "Vulling", + "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textCropFit": "Aanpassen", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textEdit": "Bewerken", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textEditObject": "Object bewerken", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFitMargins": "Aan Marge Aanpassen", + "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFlip": "Draaien", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFromFile": "Van bestand", + "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFromStorage": "Van Opslag", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFromUrl": "Van URL", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textHeight": "Hoogte", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textHint270": "Draaien 90° linksom", @@ -1298,6 +1637,7 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textInsert": "Afbeelding vervangen", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textOriginalSize": "Standaardgrootte", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textRotate90": "Draaien 90°", + "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textRotation": "Draaien", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textSize": "Grootte", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textWidth": "Breedte", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textWrap": "Terugloopstijl", @@ -1318,6 +1658,7 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Hoek", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textArrows": "Pijlen", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAspectRatio": "Hoogte-breedteverhouding vergrendelen", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAutofit": "Automatisch passend maken", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBeginSize": "Begingrootte", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBeginStyle": "Beginstijl", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBelow": "onder", @@ -1333,8 +1674,10 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textEndSize": "Eindgrootte", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textEndStyle": "Eindstijl", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textFlat": "Plat", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textFlipped": "Gedraaid", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textHeight": "Hoogte", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textHorizontal": "Horizontaal", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textHorizontally": "Horizontaal", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textJoinType": "Type join", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textKeepRatio": "Constante verhoudingen", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textLeft": "Links", @@ -1353,19 +1696,23 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textPositionPc": "Relatieve positie", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textRelative": "ten opzichte van", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textRelativeWH": "Relatief", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textResizeFit": "Formaat aanpassen aan tekst", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textRight": "Rechts", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textRightMargin": "Rechtermarge", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textRightOf": "rechts van", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textRotation": "Draaien", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textRound": "Rond", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textShape": "Vorminstellingen", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textSize": "Grootte", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textSquare": "Vierkant", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTextBox": "Tekstvak", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTitle": "Afbeelding - Geavanceerde instellingen", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTitleChart": "Grafiek - Geavanceerde instellingen", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTitleShape": "Vorm - Geavanceerde instellingen", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTop": "Boven", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTopMargin": "Bovenmarge", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textVertical": "Verticaal", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textVertically": "Verticaal ", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textWeightArrows": "Gewichten & Pijlen", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textWidth": "Breedte", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textWrap": "Terugloopstijl", @@ -1387,6 +1734,7 @@ "DE.Views.LeftMenu.txtDeveloper": "ONTWIKKELAARSMODUS", "DE.Views.LeftMenu.txtTrial": "TEST MODUS", "DE.Views.Links.capBtnBookmarks": "Bladwijzer", + "DE.Views.Links.capBtnCaption": "Onderschrift", "DE.Views.Links.capBtnContentsUpdate": "Verversen", "DE.Views.Links.capBtnInsContents": "Inhoudsopgave", "DE.Views.Links.capBtnInsFootnote": "Voetnoot", @@ -1401,10 +1749,28 @@ "DE.Views.Links.textUpdateAll": "Volledige tabel verversen", "DE.Views.Links.textUpdatePages": "Alleen paginanummers verversen", "DE.Views.Links.tipBookmarks": "Maak een bladwijzer", + "DE.Views.Links.tipCaption": "Bijschrift invoegen", "DE.Views.Links.tipContents": "Inhoudsopgave toevoegen", "DE.Views.Links.tipContentsUpdate": "Inhoudsopgave verversen", "DE.Views.Links.tipInsertHyperlink": "Hyperlink toevoegen", "DE.Views.Links.tipNotes": "Voetnoten invoegen of bewerken", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textAuto": "Automatisch", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textCenter": "Midden", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textLeft": "Links", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textLevel": "Niveau", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textPreview": "Voorbeeld", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textRight": "Rechts", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtAlign": "Uitlijning", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtBullet": "punt", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtColor": "Kleur", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtFont": "Lettertype en symbool", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtLikeText": "Als een text", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtNewBullet": "Nieuw opsommingsteken", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtNone": "geen", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtSize": "Grootte", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtSymbol": "symbool", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtTitle": "Lijst instellingen", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtType": "Type", "DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.filePlaceholder": "PDF", "DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.okButtonText": "Verzenden", "DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.subjectPlaceholder": "Thema", @@ -1483,13 +1849,25 @@ "DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textTitle": "Instellingen voor notities", "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.notcriticalErrorTitle": "Waarschuwing", "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textBottom": "Onder", + "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textGutter": "Goot", + "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textGutterPosition": "Goot positie", + "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textInside": "binnenin", + "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textLandscape": "Liggend", "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textLeft": "Links", + "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textMirrorMargins": "Gespiegelde marges", + "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textMultiplePages": "Meerdere pagina's", + "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textNormal": "Normaal", + "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textOrientation": "Oriëntatie ", + "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textOutside": "Buiten", + "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textPortrait": "Staand", + "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textPreview": "Voorbeeld", "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textRight": "Rechts", "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textTitle": "Marges", "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textTop": "Boven", "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.txtMarginsH": "Boven- en ondermarges zijn te hoog voor de opgegeven paginahoogte", "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.txtMarginsW": "Linker- en rechtermarge zijn te breed voor opgegeven paginabreedte", "DE.Views.PageSizeDialog.textHeight": "Hoogte", + "DE.Views.PageSizeDialog.textPreset": "Voorinstelling", "DE.Views.PageSizeDialog.textTitle": "Paginaformaat", "DE.Views.PageSizeDialog.textWidth": "Breedte", "DE.Views.PageSizeDialog.txtCustom": "Aangepast", @@ -1504,40 +1882,57 @@ "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textAuto": "Meerdere", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textBackColor": "Achtergrondkleur", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textExact": "Exact", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textNewColor": "Nieuwe aangepaste kleur toevoegen", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.txtAutoText": "Automatisch", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.noTabs": "De opgegeven tabbladen worden in dit veld weergegeven", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strAllCaps": "Allemaal hoofdletters", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strBorders": "Randen & opvulling", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strBreakBefore": "Pagina-einde vóór", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strDoubleStrike": "Dubbel doorhalen", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strIndent": "Inspringen", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strIndentsLeftText": "Links", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strIndentsLineSpacing": "Regelafstand", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strIndentsOutlinelevel": "Omlijningsdikte", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strIndentsRightText": "Rechts", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strIndentsSpacingAfter": "Na", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strIndentsSpacingBefore": "Voor", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strIndentsSpecial": "Speciaal", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strKeepLines": "Regels bijeenhouden", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strKeepNext": "Bij volgende alinea houden", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strMargins": "Opvulling", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strOrphan": "Zwevende regels voorkomen", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strParagraphFont": "Lettertype", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strParagraphIndents": "Inspringingen en plaatsing", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strParagraphLine": "alinea- en pagina-einde", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strParagraphPosition": "Plaatsing", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strSmallCaps": "Kleine hoofdletters", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strSomeParagraphSpace": "Voeg geen interval toe tussen alinea's met dezelfde stijl", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strSpacing": "Afstand", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strStrike": "Doorhalen", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strSubscript": "Subscript", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strSuperscript": "Superscript", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strTabs": "Tab", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textAlign": "Uitlijning", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textAtLeast": "ten minste", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textAuto": "Meerdere", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textBackColor": "Achtergrondkleur", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textBodyText": "basistext", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textBorderColor": "Randkleur", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textBorderDesc": "Klik op het diagram of gebruik de knoppen om randen te selecteren en er de gekozen stijl op toe te passen", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textBorderWidth": "Randgrootte", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textBottom": "Onder", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textCentered": "Gecentreerd", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textCharacterSpacing": "Tekenafstand", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textDefault": "Standaardtabblad", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textEffects": "Effecten", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textExact": "exact", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textFirstLine": "Eerste alinea", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textHanging": "Hangend", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textJustified": "Uitgevuld", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textLeader": "Leader", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textLeft": "Links", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "Nieuwe aangepaste kleur toevoegen", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textLevel": "Niveau", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textNone": "Geen", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textNoneSpecial": "(geen)", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textPosition": "Positie", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textRemove": "Verwijderen", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textRemoveAll": "Alles verwijderen", @@ -1558,6 +1953,7 @@ "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.tipOuter": "Alleen buitenrand instellen", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.tipRight": "Alleen rechterrand instellen", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.tipTop": "Alleen bovenrand instellen", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.txtAutoText": "Automatisch", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.txtNoBorders": "Geen randen", "DE.Views.RightMenu.txtChartSettings": "Grafiekinstellingen", "DE.Views.RightMenu.txtHeaderFooterSettings": "Instellingen kop- en voettekst", @@ -1574,6 +1970,7 @@ "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strFill": "Vulling", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strForeground": "Voorgrondkleur", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strPattern": "Patroon", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strShadow": "Weergeef schaduw", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strSize": "Grootte", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strStroke": "Streek", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strTransparency": "Ondoorzichtigheid", @@ -1583,7 +1980,9 @@ "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textColor": "Kleuropvulling", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textDirection": "Richting", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textEmptyPattern": "Geen patroon", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textFlip": "Draaien", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textFromFile": "Van bestand", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textFromStorage": "Van Opslag", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textFromUrl": "Van URL", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textGradient": "Kleurovergang", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textGradientFill": "Vulling met kleurovergang", @@ -1593,11 +1992,12 @@ "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textHintFlipV": "Verticaal omdraaien", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textImageTexture": "Afbeelding of textuur", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textLinear": "Lineair", - "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textNewColor": "Nieuwe aangepaste kleur toevoegen", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textNoFill": "Geen vulling", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textPatternFill": "Patroon", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textRadial": "Radiaal", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textRotate90": "Draaien 90°", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textRotation": "Draaien", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textSelectImage": "selecteer afbeelding", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textSelectTexture": "Selecteren", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textStretch": "Uitrekken", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textStyle": "Stijl", @@ -1652,7 +2052,11 @@ "DE.Views.StyleTitleDialog.textTitle": "Titel", "DE.Views.StyleTitleDialog.txtEmpty": "Dit veld is vereist", "DE.Views.StyleTitleDialog.txtNotEmpty": "Veld mag niet leeg zijn", + "DE.Views.StyleTitleDialog.txtSameAs": "Hetzelfde als een nieuwe stijl gemaakt", + "DE.Views.TableFormulaDialog.textBookmark": "Bladwijzer plakken", + "DE.Views.TableFormulaDialog.textFormat": "Getalnotatie", "DE.Views.TableFormulaDialog.textFormula": "Formule", + "DE.Views.TableFormulaDialog.textInsertFunction": "Plak functie", "DE.Views.TableFormulaDialog.textTitle": "Formule instellingen", "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.strAlign": "Paginanummers rechts uitlijnen", "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.strLinks": "Inhoudsopgave als link gebruiken", @@ -1670,6 +2074,7 @@ "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.txtClassic": "Klassiek", "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.txtCurrent": "Huidig", "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.txtModern": "Modern", + "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.txtOnline": "Online", "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.txtSimple": "Simpel", "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.txtStandard": "Standaard", "DE.Views.TableSettings.deleteColumnText": "Kolom verwijderen", @@ -1703,7 +2108,6 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettings.textHeader": "Koptekst", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textHeight": "Hoogte", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textLast": "Laatste", - "DE.Views.TableSettings.textNewColor": "Nieuwe aangepaste kleur toevoegen", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textRows": "Rijen", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textSelectBorders": "Selecteer de randen die u wilt wijzigen door de hierboven gekozen stijl toe te passen", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textTemplate": "Selecteren uit sjabloon", @@ -1720,6 +2124,14 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettings.tipRight": "Alleen buitenrand rechts instellen", "DE.Views.TableSettings.tipTop": "Alleen buitenrand boven instellen", "DE.Views.TableSettings.txtNoBorders": "Geen randen", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_Accent": "Accent", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_Colorful": "Kleurrijk", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_Dark": "Donker", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_GridTable": "Rastertafel", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_Light": "licht", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_ListTable": "Lijst tafel", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_PlainTable": "Leeg tabel", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_TableGrid": "Tabel raster", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlign": "Uitlijning", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlignment": "Uitlijning", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAllowSpacing": "Afstand tussen cellen", @@ -1752,7 +2164,6 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMargins": "Celmarges", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMeasure": "Meten in", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMove": "Object met tekst verplaatsen", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "Nieuwe aangepaste kleur toevoegen", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOnlyCells": "Alleen voor geselecteerde cellen", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOptions": "Opties", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOverlap": "Overlapping toestaan", @@ -1805,7 +2216,6 @@ "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textGradient": "Kleurovergang", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textGradientFill": "Vulling met kleurovergang", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textLinear": "Lineair", - "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textNewColor": "Nieuwe aangepaste kleur toevoegen", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textNoFill": "Geen vulling", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textRadial": "Radiaal", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textSelectTexture": "Selecteren", @@ -1813,9 +2223,11 @@ "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textTemplate": "Sjabloon", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textTransform": "Transformeren", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.txtNoBorders": "Geen lijn", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnAddComment": "Opmerking toevoegen", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnBlankPage": "Lege pagina", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnColumns": "Kolommen", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnComment": "Opmerking", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnDateTime": "Datum & Tijd", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsChart": "Grafiek", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsControls": "Inhoud beheer", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsDropcap": "Initiaal", @@ -1824,37 +2236,48 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsImage": "Afbeelding", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsPagebreak": "Pagina-eindes", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsShape": "Vorm", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsSymbol": "symbool", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsTable": "Tabel", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsTextart": "Text Art", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsTextbox": "Tekstvak", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnMargins": "Marges", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnPageOrient": "Oriëntatie ", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnPageSize": "Grootte", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnWatermark": "Watermerk", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capImgAlign": "Uitlijnen", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capImgBackward": "Naar achteren verplaatsen", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capImgForward": "Naar voren verplaatsen", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capImgGroup": "Groep", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capImgWrapping": "Tekstterugloop", "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniCustomTable": "Aangepaste tabel invoegen", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniDrawTable": "Teken Tabel", "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniEditControls": "Beheer instellingen", "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniEditDropCap": "Instellingen decoratieve initiaal", "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniEditFooter": "Voettekst bewerken", "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniEditHeader": "Koptekst bewerken", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniEraseTable": "Tabel wissen", "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniHiddenBorders": "Verborgen tabelranden", "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniHiddenChars": "Niet-afdrukbare tekens", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniHighlightControls": "Markeer Instellingen", "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniImageFromFile": "Afbeelding uit bestand", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniImageFromStorage": "Afbeelding van opslag", "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniImageFromUrl": "Afbeelding van URL", "DE.Views.Toolbar.strMenuNoFill": "Geen vulling", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textAutoColor": "Automatisch", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textBold": "Vet", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textBottom": "Onder:", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textCheckboxControl": "Selectievak", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textColumnsCustom": "Aangepaste kolommen", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textColumnsLeft": "Links", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textColumnsOne": "Eén", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textColumnsRight": "Rechts", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textColumnsThree": "Drie", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textColumnsTwo": "Twee", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textComboboxControl": "Keuzelijst", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textContPage": "Doorlopende pagina", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textDateControl": "Datum", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textDropdownControl": "Keuzelijst", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textEditWatermark": "Aangepast watermerk", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textEvenPage": "Even pagina", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textInMargin": "In marge", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textInsColumnBreak": "Invoegen kolomeinde", @@ -1866,6 +2289,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.textItalic": "Cursief", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textLandscape": "Liggend", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textLeft": "Links:", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textListSettings": "Lijst instellingen", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textMarginsLast": "Laatste aangepaste", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textMarginsModerate": "Gemiddeld", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textMarginsNarrow": "Smal", @@ -1874,13 +2298,16 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.textMarginsWide": "Breed", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textNewColor": "Nieuwe aangepaste kleur toevoegen", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textNextPage": "Volgende pagina", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textNoHighlight": "Geen accentuering", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textNone": "Geen", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textOddPage": "Oneven pagina", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textPageMarginsCustom": "Aangepaste marges", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textPageSizeCustom": "Aangepast paginaformaat", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textPictureControl": "Afbeelding", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textPlainControl": "Platte tekst inhoud beheer toevoegen", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textPortrait": "Staand", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textRemoveControl": "Inhoud beheer verwijderen", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textRemWatermark": "Watermerk verwijderen", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textRichControl": "Uitgebreide tekst inhoud beheer toevoegen", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textRight": "Rechts:", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textStrikeout": "Doorhalen", @@ -1909,6 +2336,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipAlignLeft": "Links uitlijnen", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipAlignRight": "Rechts uitlijnen", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipBack": "Terug", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipBlankPage": "Invoegen nieuwe pagina", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipChangeChart": "Grafiektype wijzigen", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipClearStyle": "Stijl wissen", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipColorSchemas": "Kleurenschema wijzigen", @@ -1916,6 +2344,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipControls": "Inhoud beheer toevoegen", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipCopy": "Kopiëren", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipCopyStyle": "Stijl kopiëren", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipDateTime": "Invoegen huidige datum en tijd", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipDecFont": "Tekengrootte verminderen", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipDecPrLeft": "Inspringing verkleinen", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipDropCap": "Decoratieve initiaal invoegen", @@ -1934,6 +2363,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertImage": "Afbeelding invoegen", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertNum": "Paginanummer invoegen", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "AutoVorm invoegen", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSymbol": "Invoegen symbool", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertTable": "Tabel invoegen", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertText": "Tekstvak invoegen", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertTextArt": "Text Art Invoegen", @@ -1958,6 +2388,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipShowHiddenChars": "Niet-afdrukbare tekens", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipSynchronize": "Het document is gewijzigd door een andere gebruiker. Klik om uw wijzigingen op te slaan en de updates opnieuw te laden.", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipUndo": "Ongedaan maken", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipWatermark": "Bewerken watermerk", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtDistribHor": "Horizontaal verdelen", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtDistribVert": "Verticaal verdelen", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtMarginAlign": "Uitlijnen naar marge", @@ -1983,5 +2414,30 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme6": "Concours", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme7": "Vermogen", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme8": "Stroom", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme9": "Gieterij" + "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme9": "Gieterij", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textAuto": "Automatisch", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textBold": "Vet", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textColor": "Tekstkleur", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textDiagonal": "Diagonaal", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textFont": "Lettertype", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textFromFile": "Van bestand", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textFromStorage": "Van Opslag", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textFromUrl": "Van URL", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textHor": "Horizontaal", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textImageW": "Afbeelding watermerk", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textItalic": "Cursief", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textLanguage": "Taal", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textLayout": "Indeling", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textNewColor": "Nieuwe aangepaste kleur toevoegen", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textNone": "geen", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textScale": "Schaal", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textSelect": "Selecteer afbeelding", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textStrikeout": "Doorhalen", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textText": "Tekst", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textTextW": "Tekst watermerk", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textTitle": "Watermerk Instellingen", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textTransparency": "semi-transparant", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textUnderline": "Onderstreept", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.tipFontName": "Lettertype", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.tipFontSize": "Tekengrootte" } \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/pl.json b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/pl.json index 8b347460d..649a3b749 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/pl.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/pl.json @@ -803,7 +803,6 @@ "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textAppearance": "Wygląd", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textApplyAll": "Zastosuj wszędzie", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textColor": "Kolor", - "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textNewColor": "Nowy niestandardowy kolor", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textNone": "Brak", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textShowAs": "Pokaż jako", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textTitle": "Ustawienia kontroli treści", @@ -1022,7 +1021,6 @@ "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textLeft": "Lewy", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textMargin": "Margines", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textMove": "Poruszaj się tekstem", - "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "Nowy niestandardowy kolor", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textNone": "Żaden", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textPage": "Strona", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textParagraph": "Akapit", @@ -1361,7 +1359,6 @@ "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textAuto": "Mnożnik", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textBackColor": "Kolor tła", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textExact": "Dokładnie", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textNewColor": "Nowy niestandardowy kolor", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.txtAutoText": "Automatyczny", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.noTabs": "W tym polu zostaną wyświetlone określone karty", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strAllCaps": "Wszystkie duże litery", @@ -1397,7 +1394,6 @@ "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textDefault": "Domyślna zakładka", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textEffects": "Efekty", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textLeft": "Lewy", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "Nowy niestandardowy kolor", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textNone": "Brak", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textNoneSpecial": "(brak)", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textPosition": "Pozycja", @@ -1454,7 +1450,6 @@ "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textHintFlipV": "Odwróć w pionie", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textImageTexture": "Obraz lub tekstura", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textLinear": "Liniowy", - "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textNewColor": "Nowy niestandardowy kolor", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textNoFill": "Brak wypełnienia", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textPatternFill": "Wzór", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textRadial": "Promieniowy", @@ -1538,7 +1533,6 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettings.textFirst": "Pierwszy", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textHeader": "Nagłówek", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textLast": "Ostatni", - "DE.Views.TableSettings.textNewColor": "Nowy niestandardowy kolor", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textRows": "Wiersze", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textSelectBorders": "Wybierz obramowania, które chcesz zmienić stosując styl wybrany powyżej", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textTemplate": "Wybierz z szablonu", @@ -1586,7 +1580,6 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMargins": "Marginesy komórki", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMeasure": "Zmierz w", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMove": "Przesuń obiekt z tekstem", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "Nowy niestandardowy kolor", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOnlyCells": "Tylko dla wybranych komórek", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOptions": "Opcje", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOverlap": "Włącz nakładkę", @@ -1639,7 +1632,6 @@ "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textGradient": "Gradient", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textGradientFill": "Wypełnienie gradientem", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textLinear": "Liniowy", - "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textNewColor": "Nowy niestandardowy kolor", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textNoFill": "Brak wypełnienia", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textRadial": "Promieniowy", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textSelectTexture": "Wybierz", @@ -1707,6 +1699,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.textMarginsUsNormal": "Normalny US", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textMarginsWide": "Szeroki", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textNewColor": "Nowy niestandardowy kolor", + "Common.UI.ColorButton.textNewColor": "Nowy niestandardowy kolor", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textNextPage": "Następna strona", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textNoHighlight": "Brak wyróżnienia", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textNone": "Żaden", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/pt.json b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/pt.json index 3d1a01a63..cb96326aa 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/pt.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/pt.json @@ -111,6 +111,7 @@ "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortTuesday": "Ter", "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortWednesday": "Qua", "Common.UI.Calendar.textYears": "Anos", + "Common.UI.ColorButton.textNewColor": "Adicionar nova cor personalizada", "Common.UI.ComboBorderSize.txtNoBorders": "Sem bordas", "Common.UI.ComboBorderSizeEditable.txtNoBorders": "Sem bordas", "Common.UI.ComboDataView.emptyComboText": "Sem estilos", @@ -195,7 +196,7 @@ "Common.Views.Header.textSaveExpander": "Todas as alterações foram salvas", "Common.Views.Header.textZoom": "Zoom", "Common.Views.Header.tipAccessRights": "Gerenciar direitos de acesso ao documento", - "Common.Views.Header.tipDownload": "Transferir arquivo", + "Common.Views.Header.tipDownload": "Baixar arquivo", "Common.Views.Header.tipGoEdit": "Editar arquivo atual", "Common.Views.Header.tipPrint": "Imprimir arquivo", "Common.Views.Header.tipRedo": "Refazer", @@ -318,6 +319,8 @@ "Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textCancel": "Cancelar", "Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textClose": "Fechar", "Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textEdit": "OK", + "Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textMention": "+menção fornecerá acesso ao documento e enviará um e-mail", + "Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textMentionNotify": "+menção notificará o usuário por e-mail", "Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textOpenAgain": "Abrir Novamente", "Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textReply": "Responder", "Common.Views.SelectFileDlg.textTitle": "Selecionar Fonte de Dados", @@ -343,6 +346,7 @@ "Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textTitle": "Configurações da Assinatura", "Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.txtEmpty": "O campo é obrigatório", "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textFont": "Fonte", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textQEmSpace": "1/4 Em Espaço", "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textTitle": "Símbolo", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.leavePageText": "All unsaved changes in this document will be lost.
    Click \"Cancel\" then \"Save\" to save them. Click \"OK\" to discard all the unsaved changes.", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.newDocumentTitle": "Documento sem nome", @@ -361,26 +365,26 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.convertationTimeoutText": "Tempo limite de conversão excedido.", "DE.Controllers.Main.criticalErrorExtText": "Pressione \"OK\" para voltar para a lista de documentos.", "DE.Controllers.Main.criticalErrorTitle": "Erro", - "DE.Controllers.Main.downloadErrorText": "Transferência falhou.", - "DE.Controllers.Main.downloadMergeText": "Transferindo...", - "DE.Controllers.Main.downloadMergeTitle": "Transferindo", - "DE.Controllers.Main.downloadTextText": "Transferindo documento...", - "DE.Controllers.Main.downloadTitleText": "Transferindo documento", + "DE.Controllers.Main.downloadErrorText": "Erro ao baixar arquivo.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.downloadMergeText": "Baixando...", + "DE.Controllers.Main.downloadMergeTitle": "Baixando", + "DE.Controllers.Main.downloadTextText": "Baixando documento...", + "DE.Controllers.Main.downloadTitleText": "Baixando documento", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorAccessDeny": "Você está tentando executar uma ação que você não tem direitos.
    Contate o administrador do Servidor de Documentos.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorBadImageUrl": "URL de imagem está incorreta", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorCoAuthoringDisconnect": "Conexão com servidor perdida. O documento não pode ser editado neste momento.", - "DE.Controllers.Main.errorConnectToServer": "O documento não pode ser gravado. Verifique as configurações de conexão ou entre em contato com o administrador.
    Quando você clicar no botão 'OK', você será solicitado a transferir o documento.

    Saiba mais com seu Servidor de Documentos here", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorConnectToServer": "O documento não pode ser gravado. Verifique as configurações de conexão ou entre em contato com o administrador.
    Quando você clicar no botão 'OK', você será solicitado ao baixar o documento.

    Saiba mais com seu Servidor de Documentos here", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorDatabaseConnection": "Erro externo.
    Erro de conexão ao banco de dados. Entre em contato com o suporte caso o erro persista.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorDataEncrypted": "Alterações criptografadas foram recebidas, e não podem ser decifradas.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorDataRange": "Intervalo de dados incorreto.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorDefaultMessage": "Código do erro: %1", - "DE.Controllers.Main.errorDirectUrl": "Por favor, verifique o link para o documento.
    Este link deve ser o link direto para transferir o arquivo.", - "DE.Controllers.Main.errorEditingDownloadas": "Ocorreu um erro.
    Use a opção 'Transferir como...' para gravar a cópia de backup em seu computador.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorDirectUrl": "Por favor, verifique o link para o documento.
    Este link deve ser o link direto para baixar o arquivo.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorEditingDownloadas": "Ocorreu um erro.
    Use a opção 'Baixar como...' para gravar a cópia de backup em seu computador.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorEditingSaveas": "Ocorreu um erro.
    Use a opção \"Gravar como...\" para gravar uma cópia de backup em seu computador.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorEmailClient": "Nenhum cliente de e-mail foi encontrado.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorFilePassProtect": "O documento é protegido por senha e não pode ser aberto.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorFileSizeExceed": "O tamanho do arquivo excede o limite de seu servidor.
    Por favor, contate seu administrador de Servidor de Documentos para detalhes.", - "DE.Controllers.Main.errorForceSave": "Ocorreu um erro na gravação. Favor utilizar a opção 'Transferir como' para gravar o arquivo em seu computador ou tente novamente mais tarde.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorForceSave": "Ocorreu um erro na gravação. Favor utilizar a opção 'Baixar como' para gravar o arquivo em seu computador ou tente novamente mais tarde.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorKeyEncrypt": "Descritor de chave desconhecido", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorKeyExpire": "Descritor de chave expirado", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorMailMergeLoadFile": "Loading failed", @@ -394,10 +398,10 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.errorToken": "O token de segurança do documento não foi formado corretamente.
    Entre em contato com o administrador do Document Server.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorTokenExpire": "O token de segurança do documento expirou.
    Entre em contato com o administrador do Document Server.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorUpdateVersion": "A versão do arquivo foi alterada. A página será recarregada.", - "DE.Controllers.Main.errorUpdateVersionOnDisconnect": "A conexão a internet foi restaurada, e a versão do arquivo foi alterada.
    Antes de continuar seu trabalho, transfira o arquivo ou copie seu conteúdo para assegurar que nada seja perdido, e então, recarregue esta página.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorUpdateVersionOnDisconnect": "A conexão a internet foi restaurada, e a versão do arquivo foi alterada.
    Antes de continuar seu trabalho, baixe o arquivo ou copie seu conteúdo para assegurar que nada seja perdido, e então, recarregue esta página.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorUserDrop": "O arquivo não pode ser acessado agora.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorUsersExceed": "O número de usuários permitidos pelo plano de preços foi excedido", - "DE.Controllers.Main.errorViewerDisconnect": "Perda de conexão. Você ainda pode exibir o documento,
    mas não pode fazer a transferência ou imprimir até que a conexão seja restaurada.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorViewerDisconnect": "Perda de conexão. Você ainda pode exibir o documento,
    mas não pode fazer o download ou imprimir até que a conexão seja restaurada.", "DE.Controllers.Main.leavePageText": "Você não salvou as alterações neste documento. Clique em \"Permanecer nesta página\", em seguida, clique em \"Salvar\" para salvá-las. Clique em \"Sair desta página\" para descartar todas as alterações não salvas.", "DE.Controllers.Main.loadFontsTextText": "Carregando dados...", "DE.Controllers.Main.loadFontsTitleText": "Carregando dados", @@ -431,6 +435,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.splitMaxColsErrorText": "O número de colunas deve ser inferior a %1.", "DE.Controllers.Main.splitMaxRowsErrorText": "O número de linhas deve ser inferior a %1.", "DE.Controllers.Main.textAnonymous": "Anônimo", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textApplyAll": "Aplicar a todas as equações", "DE.Controllers.Main.textBuyNow": "Visitar website", "DE.Controllers.Main.textChangesSaved": "Todas as alterações foram salvas", "DE.Controllers.Main.textClose": "Fechar", @@ -503,6 +508,16 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_rect": "Retângulo", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_rightArrow": "Seta para direita", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_spline": "Curva", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star10": "Estrela de 10 pontos", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star12": "Estrela de 12 pontos", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star16": "Estrela de 16 pontos", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star24": "Estrela de 24 pontos", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star32": "Estrela de 32 pontos", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star4": "Estrela de 4 pontos", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star5": "Estrela de 5 pontos", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star6": "Estrela de 6 pontos", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star7": "Estrela de 7 pontos", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star8": "Estrela de 8 pontos", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_sun": "Sol", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_textRect": "Caixa de texto", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_triangle": "Triângulo", @@ -545,8 +560,8 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.waitText": "Aguarde...", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnBrowserIE9": "O aplicativo tem baixa capacidade no IE9. Usar IE10 ou superior", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnBrowserZoom": "A configuração de zoom atual de seu navegador não é completamente suportada. Redefina para o zoom padrão pressionando Ctrl+0.", - "DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExp": "Sua licença expirou.
    Atualize sua licença e refresque a página.", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExceeded": "Você atingiu o limite de conexões simultâneas para editores %1. Este documento será aberto apenas para visualização.
    Entre em contato com seu administrador para saber mais.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExp": "Sua licença expirou.
    Atualize sua licença e refresque a página.", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseUsersExceeded": "Você atingiu o limite de usuários para editores %1. Entre em contato com seu administrador para saber mais.", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnNoLicense": "Você atingiu o limite de conexões simultâneas para editores %1. Este documento será aberto apenas para visualização.
    Entre em contato com a equipe de vendas da %1 para obter os termos de atualização pessoais.", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnNoLicenseUsers": "Você atingiu o limite de usuários para editores %1.
    Entre em contato com a equipe de vendas da %1 para obter os termos de atualização pessoais.", @@ -960,7 +975,6 @@ "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textLang": "Idioma", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textLock": "Travar", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textName": "Título", - "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textNewColor": "Adicionar Nova Cor Personalizada", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textNone": "Nenhum", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textShowAs": "Exibir como", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textSystemColor": "Sistema", @@ -1203,7 +1217,6 @@ "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textLeft": "Esquerda", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textMargin": "Margem", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textMove": "Mover com texto", - "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "Adicionar nova cor personalizada", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textNone": "Nenhum", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textPage": "Página", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textParagraph": "Parágrafo", @@ -1224,7 +1237,7 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnBackCaption": "Ir para Documentos", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnCloseMenuCaption": "Fechar menu", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnCreateNewCaption": "Criar novo", - "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnDownloadCaption": "Transferir como...", + "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnDownloadCaption": "Baixar como...", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnHelpCaption": "Ajuda...", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnHistoryCaption": "Histórico de Versão", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnInfoCaption": "Informações do documento...", @@ -1239,7 +1252,7 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnSaveCopyAsCaption": "Gravar cópia como...", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnSettingsCaption": "Configurações avançadas...", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnToEditCaption": "Editar documento", - "DE.Views.FileMenu.textDownload": "Transferir", + "DE.Views.FileMenu.textDownload": "Baixar", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.CreateNew.fromBlankText": "Do branco", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.CreateNew.fromTemplateText": "Do Modelo", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.CreateNew.newDescriptionText": "Crie um novo documento de texto em branco que você será capaz de nomear e formatar após ele ser criado durante a edição. Ou escolha um dos modelos para iniciar um documento de um tipo ou propósito determinado onde alguns estilos já foram pré-aplicados.", @@ -1388,6 +1401,7 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Ângulo", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textArrows": "Setas", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAspectRatio": "Bloquear proporção", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAutofit": "Ajuste automático", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBeginSize": "Tamanho inicial", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBeginStyle": "Estilo inicial", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBelow": "abaixo", @@ -1480,7 +1494,6 @@ "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textAuto": "Automático", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textCenter": "Centro", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textLeft": "Esquerda", - "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textNewColor": "Adicionar Nova Cor Personalizada", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textRight": "Direita", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtAlign": "Alinhamento", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtColor": "Cor", @@ -1512,7 +1525,7 @@ "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textCurrent": "Current record", "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textDataSource": "Data Source", "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textDocx": "Docx", - "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textDownload": "Transferir", + "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textDownload": "Baixar", "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textEditData": "Editar lista de destinatário", "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textEmail": "Email", "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textFrom": "From", @@ -1593,7 +1606,6 @@ "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textAuto": "Múltiplo", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textBackColor": "Cor do plano de fundo", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textExact": "Exatamente", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textNewColor": "Adicionar nova cor personalizada", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.txtAutoText": "Automático", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.noTabs": "As abas especificadas aparecerão neste campo", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strAllCaps": "Todas maiúsculas", @@ -1635,7 +1647,6 @@ "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textJustified": "Justificado", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textLeader": "Guia", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textLeft": "Esquerda", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "Adicionar nova cor personalizada", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textNone": "Nenhum", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textNoneSpecial": "(nenhum)", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textPosition": "Posição", @@ -1693,7 +1704,6 @@ "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textHint90": "Girar 90º no sentido horário", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textImageTexture": "Imagem ou Textura", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textLinear": "Linear", - "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textNewColor": "Adicionar nova cor personalizada", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textNoFill": "Sem preenchimento", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textPatternFill": "Padrão", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textRadial": "Radial", @@ -1803,7 +1813,6 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettings.textHeader": "Cabeçalho", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textHeight": "Altura", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textLast": "Último", - "DE.Views.TableSettings.textNewColor": "Adicionar nova cor personalizada", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textRows": "Linhas", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textSelectBorders": "Selecione as bordas que você deseja alterar aplicando o estilo escolhido acima", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textTemplate": "Selecionar a partir do modelo", @@ -1820,6 +1829,7 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettings.tipRight": "Definir apenas borda direita externa", "DE.Views.TableSettings.tipTop": "Definir apenas borda superior externa", "DE.Views.TableSettings.txtNoBorders": "Sem bordas", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_Accent": "Acentuação", "DE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_Dark": "Escuro", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlign": "Alinhamento", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlignment": "Alinhamento", @@ -1853,7 +1863,6 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMargins": "Margens da célula", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMeasure": "Medir em", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMove": "Mover objeto com texto", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "Adicionar nova cor personalizada", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOnlyCells": "Apenas para as células selecionadas", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOptions": "Opções", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOverlap": "Permitir sobreposição", @@ -1906,7 +1915,6 @@ "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textGradient": "Gradient", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textGradientFill": "Gradient Fill", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textLinear": "Linear", - "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textNewColor": "Add New Custom Color", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textNoFill": "No Fill", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textRadial": "Radial", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textSelectTexture": "Select", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/ru.json b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/ru.json index 893315ff8..693d85077 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/ru.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/ru.json @@ -80,6 +80,7 @@ "Common.define.chartData.textPoint": "Точечная", "Common.define.chartData.textStock": "Биржевая", "Common.define.chartData.textSurface": "Поверхность", + "Common.Translation.warnFileLocked": "Файл редактируется в другом приложении. Вы можете продолжить редактирование и сохранить его как копию.", "Common.UI.Calendar.textApril": "Апрель", "Common.UI.Calendar.textAugust": "Август", "Common.UI.Calendar.textDecember": "Декабрь", @@ -113,6 +114,7 @@ "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortTuesday": "Вт", "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortWednesday": "Ср", "Common.UI.Calendar.textYears": "Годы", + "Common.UI.ColorButton.textNewColor": "Пользовательский цвет", "Common.UI.ComboBorderSize.txtNoBorders": "Без границ", "Common.UI.ComboBorderSizeEditable.txtNoBorders": "Без границ", "Common.UI.ComboDataView.emptyComboText": "Без стилей", @@ -155,6 +157,10 @@ "Common.Views.About.txtPoweredBy": "Разработано", "Common.Views.About.txtTel": "тел.: ", "Common.Views.About.txtVersion": "Версия ", + "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textBy": "На:", + "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textMathCorrect": "Автозамена математическими символами", + "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textReplace": "Заменить:", + "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textTitle": "Автозамена", "Common.Views.Chat.textSend": "Отправить", "Common.Views.Comments.textAdd": "Добавить", "Common.Views.Comments.textAddComment": "Добавить", @@ -357,11 +363,33 @@ "Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textShowDate": "Показывать дату подписи в строке подписи", "Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textTitle": "Настройка подписи", "Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.txtEmpty": "Это поле необходимо заполнить", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textCharacter": "Символ", "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textCode": "Код знака из Юникод (шестн.)", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textCopyright": "Знак авторского права", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textDCQuote": "Закрывающая двойная кавычка", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textDOQuote": "Открывающая двойная кавычка", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textEllipsis": "Горизонтальное многоточие", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textEmDash": "Длинное тире", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textEmSpace": "Длинный пробел", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textEnDash": "Короткое тире", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textEnSpace": "Короткий пробел", "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textFont": "Шрифт", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textNBHyphen": "Неразрывный дефис", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textNBSpace": "Неразрывный пробел", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textPilcrow": "Знак абзаца", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textQEmSpace": "1/4 пробела", "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textRange": "Набор", "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textRecent": "Ранее использовавшиеся символы", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textRegistered": "Зарегистрированный товарный знак", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSCQuote": "Закрывающая одинарная кавычка", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSection": "Знак раздела", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textShortcut": "Сочетание клавиш", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSHyphen": "Мягкий дефис", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSOQuote": "Открывающая одинарная кавычка", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSpecial": "Специальные символы", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSymbols": "Символы", "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textTitle": "Символ", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textTradeMark": "Символ товарного знака", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.leavePageText": "Все несохраненные изменения в этом документе будут потеряны.
    Нажмите кнопку \"Отмена\", а затем нажмите кнопку \"Сохранить\", чтобы сохранить их. Нажмите кнопку \"OK\", чтобы сбросить все несохраненные изменения.", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.newDocumentTitle": "Документ без имени", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.notcriticalErrorTitle": "Внимание", @@ -387,6 +415,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.errorAccessDeny": "Вы пытаетесь выполнить действие, на которое у вас нет прав.
    Пожалуйста, обратитесь к администратору Сервера документов.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorBadImageUrl": "Неправильный URL-адрес изображения", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorCoAuthoringDisconnect": "Потеряно соединение с сервером. В данный момент нельзя отредактировать документ.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorCompare": "Функция сравнения документов недоступна в режиме совместного редактирования.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorConnectToServer": "Не удается сохранить документ. Проверьте параметры подключения или обратитесь к вашему администратору.
    Когда вы нажмете на кнопку 'OK', вам будет предложено скачать документ.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorDatabaseConnection": "Внешняя ошибка.
    Ошибка подключения к базе данных. Если ошибка повторяется, пожалуйста, обратитесь в службу поддержки.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorDataEncrypted": "Получены зашифрованные изменения, их нельзя расшифровать.", @@ -450,15 +479,20 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.splitMaxColsErrorText": "Число столбцов должно быть меньше, чем %1.", "DE.Controllers.Main.splitMaxRowsErrorText": "Число строк должно быть меньше, чем %1.", "DE.Controllers.Main.textAnonymous": "Аноним", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textApplyAll": "Применить ко всем уравнениям", "DE.Controllers.Main.textBuyNow": "Перейти на сайт", "DE.Controllers.Main.textChangesSaved": "Все изменения сохранены", "DE.Controllers.Main.textClose": "Закрыть", "DE.Controllers.Main.textCloseTip": "Щелкните, чтобы закрыть эту подсказку", "DE.Controllers.Main.textContactUs": "Связаться с отделом продаж", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textConvertEquation": "Это уравнение создано в старой версии редактора уравнений, которая больше не поддерживается. Чтобы изменить это уравнение, его необходимо преобразовать в формат Office Math ML.
    Преобразовать сейчас?", "DE.Controllers.Main.textCustomLoader": "Обратите внимание, что по условиям лицензии у вас нет прав изменять экран, отображаемый при загрузке.
    Пожалуйста, обратитесь в наш отдел продаж, чтобы сделать запрос.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textHasMacros": "Файл содержит автозапускаемые макросы.
    Хотите запустить макросы?", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textLearnMore": "Подробнее", "DE.Controllers.Main.textLoadingDocument": "Загрузка документа", "DE.Controllers.Main.textNoLicenseTitle": "Лицензионное ограничение", "DE.Controllers.Main.textPaidFeature": "Платная функция", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textRemember": "Запомнить мой выбор", "DE.Controllers.Main.textShape": "Фигура", "DE.Controllers.Main.textStrict": "Строгий режим", "DE.Controllers.Main.textTryUndoRedo": "Функции отмены и повтора действий отключены в Быстром режиме совместного редактирования.
    Нажмите на кнопку 'Строгий режим' для переключения в Строгий режим совместного редактирования, чтобы редактировать файл без вмешательства других пользователей и отправлять изменения только после того, как вы их сохраните. Переключаться между режимами совместного редактирования можно с помощью Дополнительных параметров редактора.", @@ -478,6 +512,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.txtDiagramTitle": "Заголовок диаграммы", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtEditingMode": "Установка режима редактирования...", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtEndOfFormula": "Непредвиденное завершение формулы", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtEnterDate": "Введите дату.", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtErrorLoadHistory": "Не удалось загрузить историю", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtEvenPage": "Четная страница", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtFiguredArrows": "Фигурные стрелки", @@ -697,6 +732,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.txtTableInd": "Индекс таблицы не может быть нулевым", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtTableOfContents": "Оглавление", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtTooLarge": "Число слишком большое для форматирования", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtTypeEquation": "Место для уравнения.", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtUndefBookmark": "Закладка не определена", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtXAxis": "Ось X", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtYAxis": "Ось Y", @@ -714,8 +750,8 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.waitText": "Пожалуйста, подождите...", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnBrowserIE9": "В IE9 приложение имеет низкую производительность. Используйте IE10 или более позднюю версию.", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnBrowserZoom": "Текущее значение масштаба страницы в браузере поддерживается не полностью. Вернитесь к масштабу по умолчанию, нажав Ctrl+0.", - "DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExp": "Истек срок действия лицензии.
    Обновите лицензию, а затем обновите страницу.", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExceeded": "Вы достигли лимита на одновременные подключения к редакторам %1. Этот документ будет открыт только на просмотр.
    Свяжитесь с администратором, чтобы узнать больше.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExp": "Истек срок действия лицензии.
    Обновите лицензию, а затем обновите страницу.", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseUsersExceeded": "Вы достигли лимита на количество пользователей редакторов %1.
    Свяжитесь с администратором, чтобы узнать больше.", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnNoLicense": "Вы достигли лимита на одновременные подключения к редакторам %1. Этот документ будет открыт на просмотр.
    Напишите в отдел продаж %1, чтобы обсудить индивидуальные условия лицензирования.", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnNoLicenseUsers": "Вы достигли лимита на одновременные подключения к редакторам %1.
    Напишите в отдел продаж %1, чтобы обсудить индивидуальные условия лицензирования.", @@ -1153,8 +1189,8 @@ "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textLang": "Язык", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textLock": "Блокировка", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textName": "Заголовок", - "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textNewColor": "Пользовательский цвет", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textNone": "Без рамки", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textPlaceholder": "Заполнитель", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textShowAs": "Отображать", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textSystemColor": "Системный", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textTag": "Тег", @@ -1169,6 +1205,12 @@ "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textSeparator": "Разделитель", "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textSpacing": "Интервал между колонками", "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textTitle": "Колонки", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.confirmDefault": "Задать формат по умолчанию для {0}: \"{1}\"", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textDefault": "Установить по умолчанию", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textFormat": "Форматы", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textLang": "Язык", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textUpdate": "Обновлять автоматически", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.txtTitle": "Дата и время", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.aboveText": "Выше", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.addCommentText": "Добавить комментарий", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.advancedFrameText": "Дополнительные параметры рамки", @@ -1258,6 +1300,7 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFlipV": "Отразить сверху вниз", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFollow": "Перейти на прежнее место", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFromFile": "Из файла", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFromStorage": "Из хранилища", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFromUrl": "По URL", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textJoinList": "Объединить с предыдущим списком", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textNest": "Вставить как вложенную таблицу", @@ -1408,7 +1451,6 @@ "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textLeft": "Слева", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textMargin": "Поля", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textMove": "Перемещать с текстом", - "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "Пользовательский цвет", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textNone": "Нет", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textPage": "Страницы", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textParagraph": "Абзаца", @@ -1500,6 +1542,9 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strForcesave": "Всегда сохранять на сервере (в противном случае сохранять на сервере при закрытии документа)", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strInputMode": "Включить иероглифы", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strLiveComment": "Включить отображение комментариев в тексте", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strMacrosSettings": "Настройки макросов", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strPaste": "Вырезание, копирование и вставка", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strPasteButton": "Показывать кнопку Параметры вставки при вставке содержимого", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strResolvedComment": "Включить отображение решенных комментариев", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strShowChanges": "Отображать изменения при совместной работе", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strSpellCheckMode": "Включить проверку орфографии", @@ -1519,6 +1564,7 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textMinute": "Каждую минуту", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textOldVersions": "Сделать файлы совместимыми с более старыми версиями MS Word при сохранении как DOCX", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtAll": "Все", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtAutoCorrect": "Параметры автозамены...", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtCacheMode": "Режим кэширования по умолчанию", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtCm": "Сантиметр", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtFitPage": "По размеру страницы", @@ -1530,8 +1576,15 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtMac": "как OS X", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtNative": "Собственный", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtNone": "Никакие", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtProofing": "Правописание", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtPt": "Пункт", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtRunMacros": "Включить все", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtRunMacrosDesc": "Включить все макросы без уведомления", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtSpellCheck": "Проверка орфографии", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtStopMacros": "Отключить все", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtStopMacrosDesc": "Отключить все макросы без уведомления", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtWarnMacros": "Показывать уведомление", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtWarnMacrosDesc": "Отключить все макросы с уведомлением", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtWin": "как Windows", "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textBottomCenter": "Снизу по центру", "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textBottomLeft": "Снизу слева", @@ -1574,6 +1627,7 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFitMargins": "Вписать", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFlip": "Отразить", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFromFile": "Из файла", + "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFromStorage": "Из хранилища", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFromUrl": "По URL", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textHeight": "Высота", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textHint270": "Повернуть на 90° против часовой стрелки", @@ -1604,6 +1658,7 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Угол", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textArrows": "Стрелки", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAspectRatio": "Сохранять пропорции", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAutofit": "Автоподбор", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBeginSize": "Начальный размер", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBeginStyle": "Начальный стиль", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBelow": "ниже", @@ -1641,6 +1696,7 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textPositionPc": "Относительное положение", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textRelative": "относительно", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textRelativeWH": "Относительная", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textResizeFit": "Подгонять размер фигуры под текст", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textRight": "Справа", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textRightMargin": "Правого поля", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textRightOf": "справа от", @@ -1649,6 +1705,7 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textShape": "Параметры фигуры", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textSize": "Размер", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textSquare": "Квадратный", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTextBox": "Текстовое поле", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTitle": "Изображение - дополнительные параметры", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTitleChart": "Диаграмма - дополнительные параметры", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTitleShape": "Фигура - дополнительные параметры", @@ -1701,7 +1758,6 @@ "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textCenter": "По центру", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textLeft": "По левому краю", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textLevel": "Уровень", - "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textNewColor": "Пользовательский цвет", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textPreview": "Просмотр", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textRight": "По правому краю", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtAlign": "Выравнивание", @@ -1826,7 +1882,6 @@ "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textAuto": "Множитель", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textBackColor": "Цвет фона", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textExact": "Точно", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textNewColor": "Пользовательский цвет", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.txtAutoText": "Авто", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.noTabs": "В этом поле появятся позиции табуляции, которые вы зададите", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strAllCaps": "Все прописные", @@ -1876,7 +1931,6 @@ "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textLeader": "Заполнитель", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textLeft": "Слева", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textLevel": "Уровень", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "Пользовательский цвет", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textNone": "Нет", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textNoneSpecial": "(нет)", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textPosition": "Положение", @@ -1928,6 +1982,7 @@ "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textEmptyPattern": "Без узора", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textFlip": "Отразить", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textFromFile": "Из файла", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textFromStorage": "Из хранилища", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textFromUrl": "По URL", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textGradient": "Градиент", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textGradientFill": "Градиентная заливка", @@ -1937,12 +1992,12 @@ "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textHintFlipV": "Отразить сверху вниз", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textImageTexture": "Изображение или текстура", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textLinear": "Линейный", - "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textNewColor": "Пользовательский цвет", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textNoFill": "Без заливки", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textPatternFill": "Узор", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textRadial": "Радиальный", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textRotate90": "Повернуть на 90°", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textRotation": "Поворот", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textSelectImage": "Выбрать изображение", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textSelectTexture": "Выбрать", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textStretch": "Растяжение", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textStyle": "Стиль", @@ -2053,7 +2108,6 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettings.textHeader": "Заголовок", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textHeight": "Высота", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textLast": "Последний", - "DE.Views.TableSettings.textNewColor": "Пользовательский цвет", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textRows": "Строки", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textSelectBorders": "Выберите границы, к которым надо применить выбранный стиль", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textTemplate": "По шаблону", @@ -2110,7 +2164,6 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMargins": "Поля ячейки", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMeasure": "Единицы", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMove": "Перемещать с текстом", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "Пользовательский цвет", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOnlyCells": "Только для выбранных ячеек", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOptions": "Параметры", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOverlap": "Разрешить перекрытие", @@ -2163,7 +2216,6 @@ "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textGradient": "Градиент", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textGradientFill": "Градиентная заливка", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textLinear": "Линейный", - "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textNewColor": "Пользовательский цвет", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textNoFill": "Без заливки", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textRadial": "Радиальный", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textSelectTexture": "Выбрать", @@ -2175,6 +2227,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnBlankPage": "Пустая страница", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnColumns": "Колонки", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnComment": "Комментарий", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnDateTime": "Дата и время", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsChart": "Диаграмма", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsControls": "Элементы управления содержимым", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsDropcap": "Буквица", @@ -2291,6 +2344,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipControls": "Вставить элемент управления содержимым", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipCopy": "Копировать", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipCopyStyle": "Копировать стиль", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipDateTime": "Вставить текущую дату и время", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipDecFont": "Уменьшить размер шрифта", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipDecPrLeft": "Уменьшить отступ", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipDropCap": "Вставить буквицу", @@ -2367,6 +2421,7 @@ "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textDiagonal": "По диагонали", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textFont": "Шрифт", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textFromFile": "Из файла", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textFromStorage": "Из хранилища", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textFromUrl": "По URL", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textHor": "По горизонтали", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textImageW": "Графическая подложка", @@ -2376,6 +2431,7 @@ "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textNewColor": "Пользовательский цвет", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textNone": "Нет", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textScale": "Масштаб", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textSelect": "Выбрать изображение", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textStrikeout": "Зачеркнутый", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textText": "Текст", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textTextW": "Текстовая подложка", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/sk.json b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/sk.json index 6c05ef05a..9b5a91215 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/sk.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/sk.json @@ -49,6 +49,9 @@ "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textParaDeleted": "Odstránený odsek", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textParaFormatted": "Formátovaný odsek", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textParaInserted": "Vložený odsek", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textParaMoveFromDown": "Presunuté nadol:", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textParaMoveFromUp": "Presunuté nahor:", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textParaMoveTo": "Presunuté:", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textPosition": "Pozícia", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textRight": "Zarovnať doprava", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textShape": "Tvar", @@ -60,17 +63,53 @@ "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textStrikeout": "Prečiarknuť", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textSubScript": "Dolný index", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textSuperScript": "Horný index", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textTableChanged": "Nastavenia tabuľky zmenené", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textTableRowsAdd": "Riadky tabuľky pridané", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textTableRowsDel": "Riadky tabuľky odstránené", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textTabs": "Zmeniť tabuľky", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textUnderline": "Podčiarknuť", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textWidow": "Ovládanie okien", "Common.define.chartData.textArea": "Plošný graf", "Common.define.chartData.textBar": "Pruhový graf", + "Common.define.chartData.textCharts": "Grafy", "Common.define.chartData.textColumn": "Stĺpec", "Common.define.chartData.textLine": "Čiara/líniový graf", "Common.define.chartData.textPie": "Koláčový graf", "Common.define.chartData.textPoint": "Bodový graf", "Common.define.chartData.textStock": "Akcie/burzový graf", "Common.define.chartData.textSurface": "Povrch", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textApril": "apríl", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textAugust": "august", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textDecember": "december", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textFebruary": "február", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textJanuary": "január", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textJuly": "júl", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textJune": "jún", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textMarch": "marec", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textMay": "máj", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textNovember": "november", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textOctober": "október", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textSeptember": "september", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortApril": "apr.", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortAugust": "aug.", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortDecember": "dec.", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortFebruary": "feb.", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortFriday": "pi", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortJanuary": "jan.", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortJuly": "júl", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortJune": "jún", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortMarch": "mar.", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortMay": "máj", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortMonday": "po", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortNovember": "nov.", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortOctober": "okt.", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortSaturday": "so", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortSeptember": "sep.", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortSunday": "ne", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortThursday": "št", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortTuesday": "út", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortWednesday": "st", + "Common.UI.ColorButton.textNewColor": "Pridať novú vlastnú farbu", "Common.UI.ComboBorderSize.txtNoBorders": "Bez orámovania", "Common.UI.ComboBorderSizeEditable.txtNoBorders": "Bez orámovania", "Common.UI.ComboDataView.emptyComboText": "Žiadne štýly", @@ -113,6 +152,8 @@ "Common.Views.About.txtPoweredBy": "Poháňaný ", "Common.Views.About.txtTel": "tel.:", "Common.Views.About.txtVersion": "Verzia", + "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textBy": "Od:", + "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textTitle": "Automatická oprava", "Common.Views.Chat.textSend": "Poslať", "Common.Views.Comments.textAdd": "Pridať", "Common.Views.Comments.textAddComment": "Pridať komentár", @@ -143,9 +184,9 @@ "Common.Views.ExternalMergeEditor.textClose": "Zatvoriť", "Common.Views.ExternalMergeEditor.textSave": "Uložiť a Zatvoriť", "Common.Views.ExternalMergeEditor.textTitle": "Príjemcovia hromadnej korešpondencie", - "Common.Views.Header.labelCoUsersDescr": "Dokument v súčasnosti upravuje niekoľko používateľov.", + "Common.Views.Header.labelCoUsersDescr": "Používatelia, ktorí súbor práve upravujú:", "Common.Views.Header.textAdvSettings": "Pokročilé nastavenia", - "Common.Views.Header.textBack": "Prejsť do Dokumentov", + "Common.Views.Header.textBack": "Otvoriť umiestnenie súboru", "Common.Views.Header.textSaveBegin": "Ukladanie...", "Common.Views.Header.textSaveChanged": "Modifikovaný", "Common.Views.Header.textSaveEnd": "Všetky zmeny boli uložené", @@ -176,6 +217,7 @@ "Common.Views.InsertTableDialog.txtTitle": "Veľkosť tabuľky", "Common.Views.InsertTableDialog.txtTitleSplit": "Rozdeliť bunku", "Common.Views.LanguageDialog.labelSelect": "Vybrať jazyk dokumentu", + "Common.Views.OpenDialog.closeButtonText": "Zatvoriť súbor", "Common.Views.OpenDialog.txtEncoding": "Kódovanie", "Common.Views.OpenDialog.txtIncorrectPwd": "Heslo je nesprávne.", "Common.Views.OpenDialog.txtPassword": "Heslo", @@ -189,18 +231,27 @@ "Common.Views.Plugins.textLoading": "Nahrávanie", "Common.Views.Plugins.textStart": "Začať/začiatok", "Common.Views.Plugins.textStop": "Stop", + "Common.Views.Protection.hintAddPwd": "Šifrovať heslom", "Common.Views.Protection.hintPwd": "Zmeniť alebo odstrániť heslo", "Common.Views.Protection.hintSignature": "Pridajte riadok digitálneho podpisu alebo podpisu", "Common.Views.Protection.txtAddPwd": "Pridajte heslo", "Common.Views.Protection.txtChangePwd": "Zmeniť heslo", "Common.Views.Protection.txtDeletePwd": "Odstrániť heslo", + "Common.Views.Protection.txtEncrypt": "Šifrovať", "Common.Views.Protection.txtInvisibleSignature": "Pridajte digitálny podpis", "Common.Views.Protection.txtSignature": "Podpis", + "Common.Views.Protection.txtSignatureLine": "Pridať riadok na podpis", "Common.Views.RenameDialog.textName": "Názov súboru", "Common.Views.RenameDialog.txtInvalidName": "Názov súboru nemôže obsahovať žiadny z nasledujúcich znakov:", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.hintNext": "K ďalšej zmene", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.hintPrev": "K predošlej zmene", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.mniFromFile": "Dokument zo súboru", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.mniFromStorage": "Dokument z úložiska", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.mniFromUrl": "Dokument z URL", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.mniSettings": "Nastavenia porovnávania", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.strFast": "Rýchly", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipAcceptCurrent": "Akceptovať aktuálnu zmenu", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipCompare": "Porovnať súčasný dokument s iným", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipRejectCurrent": "Odmietnuť aktuálnu zmenu", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipReview": "Sledovať zmeny", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipReviewView": "Vyberte režim, v ktorom chcete zobraziť zmeny", @@ -210,11 +261,15 @@ "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtAcceptAll": "Akceptovať všetky zmeny", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtAcceptChanges": "Akceptovať zmeny", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtAcceptCurrent": "Akceptovať aktuálnu zmenu", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtChat": "Rozhovor", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtClose": "Zatvoriť", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCoAuthMode": "Režim spoločnej úpravy", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCompare": "Porovnať", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtDocLang": "Jazyk", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtFinal": "Všetky zmeny prijaté (ukážka)", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtFinalCap": "Posledný", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtMarkup": "Všetky zmeny (upravované)", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtMarkupCap": "Vyznačenie", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtNext": "Nasledujúci", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtOriginal": "Všetky zmeny boli zamietnuté (ukážka)", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtPrev": "Predchádzajúci", @@ -239,6 +294,9 @@ "Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textCancel": "Zrušiť", "Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textClose": "Zatvoriť", "Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textEdit": "OK", + "Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textOpenAgain": "Znova otvoriť", + "Common.Views.SaveAsDlg.textLoading": "Načítavanie", + "Common.Views.SelectFileDlg.textLoading": "Načítavanie", "Common.Views.SignDialog.textBold": "Tučné", "Common.Views.SignDialog.textCertificate": "Certifikát", "Common.Views.SignDialog.textChange": "Zmeniť", @@ -260,8 +318,14 @@ "Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textInfoTitle": "Názov signatára", "Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textInstructions": "Pokyny pre signatára", "Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textShowDate": "Zobraziť dátum podpisu v riadku podpisu", - "Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textTitle": "Nastavenia Podpisu", + "Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textTitle": "Nastavenia podpisu", "Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.txtEmpty": "Toto pole sa vyžaduje", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textCharacter": "Symbol", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textCopyright": "Znak autorských práv", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textDCQuote": "Uzatvárajúca úvodzovka", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textFont": "Písmo", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textQEmSpace": "Medzera 1/4 Em", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSCQuote": "Uzatvárajúca úvodzovka", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.leavePageText": "Všetky neuložené zmeny v tomto dokumente sa stratia.
    Kliknutím na tlačidlo \"Zrušiť\" a potom na \"Uložiť\" ich uložíte. Kliknutím na \"OK\" zahodíte všetky neuložené zmeny.", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.newDocumentTitle": "Nepomenovaný dokument", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.notcriticalErrorTitle": "Upozornenie", @@ -271,6 +335,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.textReplaceSkipped": "Nahradenie bolo uskutočnené. {0} výskytov bolo preskočených.", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.textReplaceSuccess": "Vyhľadávanie bolo uskutočnené. Nahradené udalosti: {0}", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.warnDownloadAs": "Ak budete pokračovať v ukladaní v tomto formáte, všetky funkcie okrem textu sa stratia.
    Ste si istý, že chcete pokračovať?", + "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.warnDownloadAsRTF": "Ak budete pokračovať v ukladaní tohto formátu, časť z formátovania sa môže stratiť.
    Ste si istí, že chcete pokračovať?", "DE.Controllers.Main.applyChangesTextText": "Načítavanie zmien...", "DE.Controllers.Main.applyChangesTitleText": "Načítavanie zmien", "DE.Controllers.Main.convertationTimeoutText": "Prekročený čas konverzie.", @@ -286,13 +351,16 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.errorCoAuthoringDisconnect": "Serverové pripojenie sa stratilo. Práve teraz nie je možné dokument upravovať.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorConnectToServer": "Dokument sa nepodarilo uložiť. Prosím, skontrolujte nastavenia pripojenia alebo kontaktujte správcu.
    Po kliknutí na tlačidlo 'OK' sa zobrazí výzva na prevzatie dokumentu.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorDatabaseConnection": "Externá chyba.
    Chyba spojenia databázy. Prosím, kontaktujte podporu ak chyba pretrváva. ", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorDataEncrypted": "Boli prijaté zašifrované zmeny, nemožno ich dekódovať.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorDataRange": "Nesprávny rozsah údajov.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorDefaultMessage": "Kód chyby: %1", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorEditingDownloadas": "Pri práci s dokumentom došlo k chybe.
    Použite voľbu \"Stiahnuť ako...\" a uložte si záložnú kópiu súboru na svoj počítač.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorEditingSaveas": "Pri práci s dokumentom došlo k chybe.
    Použite voľbu \"Uložiť ako...\" a uložte si záložnú kópiu súboru na svoj počítač.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorFilePassProtect": "Dokument je chránený heslom a nie je možné ho otvoriť.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorForceSave": "Pri ukladaní súboru sa vyskytla chyba. Ak chcete súbor uložiť na pevný disk počítača, použite možnosť 'Prevziať ako' alebo to skúste znova neskôr.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorKeyEncrypt": "Neznámy kľúč deskriptoru", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorKeyExpire": "Kľúč deskriptora vypršal", - "DE.Controllers.Main.errorMailMergeLoadFile": "Načítavanie zlyhalo", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorMailMergeLoadFile": "Načítavanie zlyhalo. Vyberte iný súbor.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorMailMergeSaveFile": "Zlúčenie zlyhalo.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorProcessSaveResult": "Ukladanie zlyhalo.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorServerVersion": "Verzia editora bola aktualizovaná. Stránka sa opätovne načíta, aby sa vykonali zmeny.", @@ -339,13 +407,15 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.splitMaxColsErrorText": "Počet stĺpcov musí byť menší ako %1.", "DE.Controllers.Main.splitMaxRowsErrorText": "Počet riadkov musí byť menší ako %1.", "DE.Controllers.Main.textAnonymous": "Anonymný", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textApplyAll": "Použiť na všetky rovnice", "DE.Controllers.Main.textBuyNow": "Navštíviť webovú stránku", "DE.Controllers.Main.textChangesSaved": "Všetky zmeny boli uložené", "DE.Controllers.Main.textClose": "Zatvoriť", "DE.Controllers.Main.textCloseTip": "Kliknutím zavrite tip", "DE.Controllers.Main.textContactUs": "Kontaktujte predajcu", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textLearnMore": "Viac informácií", "DE.Controllers.Main.textLoadingDocument": "Načítavanie dokumentu", - "DE.Controllers.Main.textNoLicenseTitle": "ONLYOFFICE obmedzenie pripojenia", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textNoLicenseTitle": "Bol dosiahnutý limit licencie", "DE.Controllers.Main.textShape": "Tvar", "DE.Controllers.Main.textStrict": "Prísny režim", "DE.Controllers.Main.textTryUndoRedo": "Funkcie späť/zopakovať sú vypnuté pre rýchly spolueditačný režim.
    Kliknite na tlačítko \"Prísny režim\", aby ste prešli do prísneho spolueditačného režimu a aby ste upravovali súbor bez rušenia ostatných užívateľov a odosielali vaše zmeny iba po ich uložení. Pomocou Rozšírených nastavení editoru môžete prepínať medzi spolueditačnými režimami.", @@ -360,24 +430,95 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.txtButtons": "Tlačidlá", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtCallouts": "Popisky obrázku", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtCharts": "Grafy", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtChoose": "Zvolte položku.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtCurrentDocument": "Aktuálny dokument", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtDiagramTitle": "Názov grafu", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtEditingMode": "Nastaviť režim úprav ...", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtEnterDate": "Zadajte dátum.", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtErrorLoadHistory": "Načítavanie histórie zlyhalo", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtEvenPage": "Párna stránka", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtFiguredArrows": "Šipky", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtFirstPage": "Prvá strana", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtFooter": "Päta stránky", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtHeader": "Hlavička", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtHyperlink": "Hypertextový odkaz", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtLines": "Riadky", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtMainDocOnly": "Chyba! Iba hlavný dokument.", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtMath": "Matematika", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtNeedSynchronize": "Máte aktualizácie", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtNoText": "Chyba! V dokumente nie je žiaden text špecifikovaného štýlu.", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtOddPage": "Nepárna strana", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtOnPage": "na strane", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtRectangles": "Obdĺžniky", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtSameAsPrev": "Rovnaký ako predchádzajúci", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtSection": "-Sekcia", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtSeries": "Rady", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_actionButtonBackPrevious": "Tlačítko Späť alebo Predchádzajúci", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_actionButtonBeginning": "Tlačítko Začiatok", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_actionButtonBlank": "Prázdne tlačítko", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_actionButtonDocument": "Tlačítko Dokument", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_actionButtonEnd": "Tlačítko Koniec", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_actionButtonHelp": "Tlačítko Nápoveda", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_arc": "Oblúk", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_bentArrow": "Ohnutá šípka", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_bentUpArrow": "Šípka ohnutá hore", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_bevel": "Skosenie", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_blockArc": "Časť kruhu", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_bracePair": "Dvojitá zátvorka", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_can": "Môže", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_chevron": "Chevron", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_circularArrow": "okrúhla šípka", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_cloud": "Cloud", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_corner": "Roh", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_cube": "Kocka", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_curvedConnector3": "Zakrivený konektor", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_curvedConnector3WithArrow": "Konektor v tvare zakrivenej šípky", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_curvedConnector3WithTwoArrows": "Konektor v tvare zakrivenej dvojitej šípky", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_curvedDownArrow": "Šípka zahnutá nadol", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_curvedLeftArrow": "Šípka zahnutá doľava", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_curvedRightArrow": "Šípka zahnutá doprava", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_curvedUpArrow": "Šípka zahnutá nahor", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_decagon": "Desaťuhoľník", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_diagStripe": "Priečny prúžok", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_diamond": "Diamant", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_dodecagon": "Dvanásťuhoľník", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_donut": "Šiška", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_doubleWave": "Dvojitá vlnovka", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_downArrow": "Šípka dole", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_ellipse": "Elipsa", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_ellipseRibbon": "Pruh zahnutý nadol", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_ellipseRibbon2": "Pruh zahnutý nahor", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartAlternateProcess": "Vývojový diagram: Vystriedať proces", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_flowChartPunchedCard": "Vývojový diagram: Karta", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_frame": "Rámček", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_heart": "Srdce", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_irregularSeal1": "Výbuch 1", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_irregularSeal2": "Výbuch 2", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_leftArrow": "Ľavá šípka", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_line": "Čiara", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_lineWithArrow": "Šípka", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_lineWithTwoArrows": "Dvojitá šípka", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_mathDivide": "Rozdelenie", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_mathEqual": "Rovná sa", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_mathMinus": "Mínus", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_mathNotEqual": "Nerovná sa", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_noSmoking": "Symbol \"Nie\"", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_ribbon": "Spodný pruh", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_spline": "Krivka", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star10": "10-cípa hviezda", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star12": "12-cípa hviezda", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star16": "16-cípa hviezda", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star24": "24-cípa hviezda", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star32": "32-cípa hviezda", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star4": "4-cípa hviezda", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star5": "5-cípa hviezda", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star6": "6-cípa hviezda", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star7": "7-cípa hviezda", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star8": "8-cípa hviezda", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_sun": "Slnko", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtStarsRibbons": "Hviezdy a stuhy", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_Caption": "Popis", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_footnote_text": "Poznámka pod čiarou", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_Heading_1": "Nadpis 1", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_Heading_2": "Nadpis 2", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_Heading_3": "Nadpis 3", @@ -408,6 +549,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExp": "Vaša licencia vypršala.
    Prosím, aktualizujte si svoju licenciu a obnovte stránku.", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnNoLicense": "Táto verzia aplikácie %1 editors má určité obmedzenia pre súbežné pripojenia k dokumentovému serveru.
    Ak potrebujete viac, zvážte aktualizáciu aktuálnej licencie alebo zakúpenie komerčnej.", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnProcessRightsChange": "Bolo vám zamietnuté právo upravovať súbor.", + "DE.Controllers.Navigation.txtBeginning": "Začiatok dokumentu", "DE.Controllers.Statusbar.textHasChanges": "Boli sledované nové zmeny", "DE.Controllers.Statusbar.textTrackChanges": "Dokument je otvorený so zapnutým režimom sledovania zmien.", "DE.Controllers.Statusbar.tipReview": "Sledovať zmeny", @@ -420,6 +562,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.textFontSizeErr": "Zadaná hodnota je nesprávna.
    Prosím, zadajte číselnú hodnotu medzi 1 a 100.", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.textFraction": "Zlomky", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.textFunction": "Funkcie", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.textInsert": "Vložiť", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.textIntegral": "Integrály", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.textLargeOperator": "Veľké operátory", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.textLimitAndLog": "Limity a logaritmy", @@ -749,11 +892,37 @@ "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_zeta": "Zéta", "DE.Controllers.Viewport.textFitPage": "Prispôsobiť na stranu", "DE.Controllers.Viewport.textFitWidth": "Prispôsobiť na šírku", + "DE.Views.AddNewCaptionLabelDialog.textLabel": "Štítok:", "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textAdd": "Pridať", "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textBookmarkName": "Názov záložky", "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textClose": "Zatvoriť", + "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textCopy": "Kopírovať", "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textDelete": "Vymazať", + "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textGetLink": "Získať odkaz", + "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textGoto": "Ísť na", + "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textLocation": "Umiestnenie", "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textTitle": "Záložky", + "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.txtInvalidName": "Názov záložky môže obsahovať iba písmená, číslice a podčiarknutia a mal by začínať písmenom", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textAdd": "Pridať štítok", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textAfter": "Za", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textBefore": "Pred", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textCaption": "Popis", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textChapter": "Kapitola začína so štýlom", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textColon": "Dvojbodka ", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textDash": "spojovník", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textDelete": "Vymaž označenie", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textEquation": "Rovnica", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textExamples": "Príklady: Tabuľka 2-A, Obrázok 1.IV", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textExclude": "Vylúčiť značku z titulku", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textFigure": "Pozícia", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textInsert": "Vložiť", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textLabel": "Štítok", + "DE.Views.CellsAddDialog.textCol": "Stĺpce", + "DE.Views.CellsAddDialog.textDown": "Pod kurzorom", + "DE.Views.CellsAddDialog.textUp": "Nad kurzorom", + "DE.Views.CellsRemoveDialog.textCol": "Vymaž celý stĺpec", + "DE.Views.CellsRemoveDialog.textRow": "Vymaž celý riadok", + "DE.Views.CellsRemoveDialog.textTitle": "Odstrániť bunky", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textAdvanced": "Zobraziť pokročilé nastavenia", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textChartType": "Zmeniť typ grafu", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textEditData": "Upravovať dáta", @@ -772,11 +941,37 @@ "DE.Views.ChartSettings.txtTight": "Tesný", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.txtTitle": "Graf", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.txtTopAndBottom": "Hore a dole", - "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textNewColor": "Pridať novú vlastnú farbu", + "DE.Views.CompareSettingsDialog.textChar": "Úroveň grafického symbolu", + "DE.Views.CompareSettingsDialog.textTitle": "Nastavenia porovnávania", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.strGeneral": "Všeobecné", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textAdd": "Pridať", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textAppearance": "Vzhľad", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textApplyAll": "Použiť na všetko", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textBox": "Ohraničovací rámik", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textChange": "Upraviť", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textCheckbox": "Zaškrtávacie políčko", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textChecked": "Zaškrtnutý symbol", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textColor": "Farba", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textCombobox": "Zmiešaná schránka", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textDate": "Formát dátumu", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textDelete": "Odstrániť", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textDisplayName": "Meno/názov na zobrazenie", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textDown": "Dole", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textDropDown": "Rozbaľovací zoznam", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textFormat": "Zobraz dátum takto", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textLang": "Jazyk", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textNone": "žiadny", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textTitle": "Nastavenia kontroly obsahu", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.tipChange": "Zmeniť symbol", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.txtLockDelete": "Kontrolu obsahu nemožno vymazať", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.txtLockEdit": "Obsah nie je možné upravovať", "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textColumns": "Počet stĺpcov", "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textSeparator": "Rozdeľovač stĺpcov", "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textSpacing": "Medzera medzi stĺpcami", "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textTitle": "Stĺpce", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textFormat": "Formáty", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textLang": "Jazyk", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.txtTitle": "Dátum a čas", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.aboveText": "Nad", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.addCommentText": "Pridať komentár", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.advancedFrameText": "Pokročilé nastavenia rámčeka", @@ -786,6 +981,7 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.alignmentText": "Zarovnanie", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.belowText": "pod", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.breakBeforeText": "Zlom strany pred", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.bulletsText": "Odrážky a číslovanie", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.cellAlignText": "Vertikálne zarovnanie bunky", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.cellText": "Bunka", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.centerText": "Stred", @@ -846,10 +1042,22 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textArrangeBackward": "Posunúť späť", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textArrangeForward": "Posunúť vpred", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textArrangeFront": "Premiestniť do popredia", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textCells": "Bunky", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textContentControls": "Kontrola obsahu", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textContinueNumbering": "Pokračovať v číslovaní", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textCopy": "Kopírovať", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textCrop": "Orezať", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textCropFill": "Vyplniť", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textCropFit": "Prispôsobiť", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textCut": "Vystrihnúť", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textDistributeCols": "Rozdeliť stĺpce", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textDistributeRows": "Rozložiť riadky", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textEditControls": "Nastavenia kontroly obsahu", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textEditWrapBoundary": "Upraviť okrajovú obálku", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFlipH": "Prevrátiť horizontálne", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFlipV": "Prevrátiť vertikálne", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFromFile": "Zo súboru", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFromStorage": "Z úložiska", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFromUrl": "Z URL adresy ", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textNextPage": "Ďalšia stránka", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textPaste": "Vložiť", @@ -864,6 +1072,7 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textUndo": "Krok späť", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textWrap": "Obtekanie textu", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.tipIsLocked": "Túto časť momentálne upravuje iný používateľ.", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.toDictionaryText": "Pridať do slovníka", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtAddBottom": "Pridať spodné orámovanie", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtAddFractionBar": "Pridať lištu zlomkov", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtAddHor": "Pridať vodorovnú čiaru", @@ -886,6 +1095,9 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtDeleteEq": "Odstrániť rovnicu", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtDeleteGroupChar": "Odstrániť znak", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtDeleteRadical": "Odstrániť odmocninu", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtDistribHor": "Rozložiť horizontálne", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtDistribVert": "Rozložiť vertikálne", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtEmpty": "(Prázdne)", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtFractionLinear": "Zmeniť na lineárny zlomok", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtFractionSkewed": "Zmeniť na skosený zlomok", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtFractionStacked": "Zmeniť na zložený zlomok", @@ -973,7 +1185,6 @@ "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textLeft": "Vľavo", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textMargin": "Okraj", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textMove": "Presunúť s textom", - "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "Pridať novú vlastnú farbu", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textNone": "Žiadny", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textPage": "Stránka", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textParagraph": "Odsek", @@ -989,7 +1200,10 @@ "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textWidth": "Šírka", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.tipFontName": "Písmo", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.txtNoBorders": "Bez orámovania", - "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnBackCaption": "Prejsť do Dokumentov", + "DE.Views.EditListItemDialog.textDisplayName": "Meno/názov na zobrazenie", + "DE.Views.EditListItemDialog.textNameError": "Názov na zobrazenie nesmie byť prázdny.", + "DE.Views.EditListItemDialog.textValueError": "Položka s rovnakou hodnotou už existuje.", + "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnBackCaption": "Otvoriť umiestnenie súboru", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnCloseMenuCaption": "Zatvoriť menu", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnCreateNewCaption": "Vytvoriť nový", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnDownloadCaption": "Stiahnuť ako...", @@ -997,7 +1211,7 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnHistoryCaption": "História verzií", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnInfoCaption": "Informácie o dokumente...", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnPrintCaption": "Tlačiť", - "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnProtectCaption": "Ochrániť/podpísať", + "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnProtectCaption": "Ochrániť", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnRecentFilesCaption": "Otvoriť nedávne...", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnRenameCaption": "Premenovať ..", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnReturnCaption": "Späť k Dokumentu", @@ -1012,23 +1226,34 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.CreateNew.newDescriptionText": "Vytvorte nový prázdny textový dokument, ktorý budete môcť štýlovať a formátovať po jeho vytvorení počas úpravy. Alebo si vyberte jednu zo šablón na spustenie dokumentu určitého typu alebo účelu, kde už niektoré štýly boli predbežne aplikované.", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.CreateNew.newDocumentText": "Nový textový dokument", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.CreateNew.noTemplatesText": "Neexistujú žiadne šablóny", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.okButtonText": "Použiť", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtAddAuthor": "Pridať autora", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtAddText": "Pridať text", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtAppName": "Aplikácia", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtAuthor": "Autor", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtBtnAccessRights": "Zmeniť prístupové práva", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtComment": "Komentár", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtCreated": "Vytvorené", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtLoading": "Nahrávanie...", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtModifyBy": "Naposledy upravil(a) ", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtModifyDate": "Naposledy upravené", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtOwner": "Vlastník", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtPages": "Strany", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtParagraphs": "Odseky", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtPlacement": "Umiestnenie", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtRights": "Osoby s oprávneniami", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtSpaces": "Symboly s medzerami", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtStatistics": "Štatistiky", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtSubject": "Predmet", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtSymbols": "Symboly", - "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtTitle": "Názov dokumentu", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtTitle": "Názov", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtWords": "Slová", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentRights.txtBtnAccessRights": "Zmeniť prístupové práva", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentRights.txtRights": "Osoby s oprávneniami", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.strProtect": "Ochrániť dokument", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.strSignature": "Podpis", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtEdit": "Upraviť dokument", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtEditWarning": "Upravovanie odstráni z dokumentu podpisy
    Ste si istí, že chcete pokračovať?", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.okButtonText": "Použiť", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strAlignGuides": "Zapnúť tipy zarovnávania", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strAutoRecover": "Zapnúť automatickú obnovu", @@ -1041,6 +1266,7 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strForcesave": "Vždy uložiť na server (inak uložiť na server pri zatvorení dokumentu)", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strInputMode": "Zapnúť hieroglyfy", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strLiveComment": "Zapnúť zobrazovanie komentárov", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strPaste": "Vystrihni, skopíruj a vlep", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strResolvedComment": "Zapnúť zobrazenie vyriešených komentárov", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strShowChanges": "Zmeny spolupráce v reálnom čase", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strSpellCheckMode": "Zapnúť kontrolu pravopisu", @@ -1054,10 +1280,13 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textAlignGuides": "Nápoveda zarovnania", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textAutoRecover": "Automatická obnova", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textAutoSave": "Automatické ukladanie", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textCompatible": "Kompatibilita", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textDisabled": "Zakázané", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textForceSave": "Uložiť na Server", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textMinute": "Každú minútu", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtAll": "Zobraziť všetko", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtAutoCorrect": "Možnosti automatickej opravy...", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtCacheMode": "Prednastavený mód cache", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtCm": "Centimeter", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtFitPage": "Prispôsobiť na stranu", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtFitWidth": "Prispôsobiť na šírku", @@ -1069,7 +1298,12 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtNative": "Pôvodný", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtNone": "Zobraziť žiadne", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtPt": "Bod", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtRunMacros": "Povoliť všetko", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtRunMacrosDesc": "Povoliť všetky makrá bez oznámenia", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtSpellCheck": "Kontrola pravopisu", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtStopMacros": "Zablokovať všetko", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtStopMacrosDesc": "Zablokovať všetky makrá bez upozornenia", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtWarnMacrosDesc": "Zablokovať všetky makrá s upozornením", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtWin": "ako Windows", "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textBottomCenter": "Dole v strede", "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textBottomLeft": "Dole vľavo", @@ -1081,7 +1315,9 @@ "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textHeaderFromTop": "Hlavička/Záhlavie od vrchu", "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textOptions": "Možnosti", "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textPageNum": "Vložiť číslo stránky", + "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textPageNumbering": "Číslovanie strany", "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textPosition": "Pozícia", + "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textPrev": "Pokračovať z predošlej sekcie", "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textSameAs": "Odkaz na predchádzajúci", "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textTopCenter": "Hore v strede", "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textTopLeft": "Hore vľavo", @@ -1092,16 +1328,24 @@ "DE.Views.HyperlinkSettingsDialog.textTitle": "Nastavenie hypertextového odkazu", "DE.Views.HyperlinkSettingsDialog.textTooltip": "Popis", "DE.Views.HyperlinkSettingsDialog.textUrl": "Odkaz na", + "DE.Views.HyperlinkSettingsDialog.txtBeginning": "Začiatok dokumentu", "DE.Views.HyperlinkSettingsDialog.txtBookmarks": "Záložky", "DE.Views.HyperlinkSettingsDialog.txtEmpty": "Toto pole sa vyžaduje", "DE.Views.HyperlinkSettingsDialog.txtNotUrl": "Toto pole by malo byť vo formáte 'http://www.example.com'", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textAdvanced": "Zobraziť pokročilé nastavenia", + "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textCrop": "Orezať", + "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textCropFill": "Vyplniť", + "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textCropFit": "Prispôsobiť", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textEdit": "Upraviť", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textEditObject": "Upraviť objekt", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFitMargins": "Prispôsobiť na okraj", + "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFlip": "Prevrátiť", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFromFile": "Zo súboru", + "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFromStorage": "Z úložiska", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFromUrl": "Z URL adresy ", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textHeight": "Výška", + "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textHintFlipH": "Prevrátiť horizontálne", + "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textHintFlipV": "Prevrátiť vertikálne", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textInsert": "Nahradiť obrázok", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textOriginalSize": "Predvolená veľkosť", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textSize": "Veľkosť", @@ -1121,8 +1365,10 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Popis", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Alternatívne textové zobrazenie informácií o vizuálnych objektoch, ktoré sa prečítajú ľuďom s poruchou videnia alebo kognitívnymi poruchami, aby sa im pomohlo lepšie porozumieť, aké informácie sú na obrázku, automatickom tvarovaní, grafe alebo tabuľke. ", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Názov", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Uhol", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textArrows": "Šípky", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAspectRatio": "Uzamknúť/zaistiť pomer strán ", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAutofit": "Automatické prispôsobenie", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBeginSize": "Veľkosť začiatku", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBeginStyle": "Štýl začiatku", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBelow": "pod", @@ -1138,6 +1384,7 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textEndSize": "Veľkosť konca", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textEndStyle": "Štýl konca", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textFlat": "Plochý", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textFlipped": "Prevrátený", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textHeight": "Výška", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textHorizontal": "Vodorovný", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textJoinType": "Typ pripojenia", @@ -1191,10 +1438,25 @@ "DE.Views.LeftMenu.txtDeveloper": "VÝVOJÁRSKY REŽIM", "DE.Views.LeftMenu.txtTrial": "Skúšobný režim", "DE.Views.Links.capBtnBookmarks": "Záložka", + "DE.Views.Links.capBtnCaption": "Popis", "DE.Views.Links.capBtnInsFootnote": "Poznámka pod čiarou", + "DE.Views.Links.capBtnInsLink": "Hypertextový odkaz", + "DE.Views.Links.confirmDeleteFootnotes": "Chcete odstrániť všetky poznámky pod čiarou?", "DE.Views.Links.mniDelFootnote": "Odstrániť všetky poznámky pod čiarou", + "DE.Views.Links.mniInsFootnote": "Vložiť poznámku pod čiarou", "DE.Views.Links.textContentsSettings": "Nastavenia", + "DE.Views.Links.textGotoFootnote": "Prejdite na Poznámky pod čiarou", + "DE.Views.Links.tipBookmarks": "Vytvoriť záložku", "DE.Views.Links.tipInsertHyperlink": "Pridať odkaz", + "DE.Views.Links.tipNotes": "Vložiť alebo editovať poznámky pod čiarou", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textAuto": "Automaticky", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textCenter": "Stred", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textLeft": "Vľavo", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textLevel": "Úroveň", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtAlign": "Zarovnanie", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtBullet": "Odrážka", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtColor": "Farba", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtNone": "žiadne", "DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.filePlaceholder": "PDF", "DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.okButtonText": "Poslať", "DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.subjectPlaceholder": "Téma", @@ -1242,7 +1504,10 @@ "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.txtPrev": "K predchádzajúcemu záznamu", "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.txtUntitled": "Neoznačený", "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.warnProcessMailMerge": "Spustenie zlúčenia zlyhalo", + "DE.Views.Navigation.txtCollapse": "Zbaliť všetko", + "DE.Views.Navigation.txtEmptyItem": "Prázdne záhlavie", "DE.Views.Navigation.txtExpand": "Rozbaliť všetko", + "DE.Views.Navigation.txtExpandToLevel": "Rozšíriť na úroveň", "DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textApply": "Použiť", "DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textApplyTo": "Použiť zmeny na", "DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textContinue": "Nepretržitý", @@ -1263,7 +1528,10 @@ "DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textTitle": "Nastavenia poznámok", "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.notcriticalErrorTitle": "Upozornenie", "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textBottom": "Dole", + "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textLandscape": "Na šírku", "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textLeft": "Vľavo", + "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textNormal": "Normálny", + "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textOrientation": "Orientácia", "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textRight": "Vpravo", "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textTitle": "Okraje", "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textTop": "Hore", @@ -1272,6 +1540,7 @@ "DE.Views.PageSizeDialog.textHeight": "Výška", "DE.Views.PageSizeDialog.textTitle": "Veľkosť stránky", "DE.Views.PageSizeDialog.textWidth": "Šírka", + "DE.Views.PageSizeDialog.txtCustom": "Vlastný", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.strLineHeight": "Riadkovanie", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.strParagraphSpacing": "Riadkovanie medzi odstavcami", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.strSomeParagraphSpace": "Nepridávať medzeru medzi odseky s rovnakým štýlom", @@ -1283,7 +1552,6 @@ "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textAuto": "Násobky", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textBackColor": "Farba pozadia", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textExact": "Presne", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textNewColor": "Pridať novú vlastnú farbu", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.txtAutoText": "Automaticky", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.noTabs": "Špecifikované tabulátory sa objavia v tomto poli", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strAllCaps": "Všetko veľkým", @@ -1291,7 +1559,10 @@ "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strBreakBefore": "Zlom strany pred", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strDoubleStrike": "Dvojité prečiarknutie", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strIndentsLeftText": "Vľavo", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strIndentsLineSpacing": "Riadkovanie", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strIndentsRightText": "Vpravo", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strIndentsSpacingAfter": "Za", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strIndentsSpacingBefore": "Pred", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strKeepLines": "Zviazať riadky dohromady", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strKeepNext": "Zviazať s nasledujúcim", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strMargins": "Vnútorné osadenie", @@ -1300,21 +1571,31 @@ "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strParagraphIndents": "Odsadenie a umiestnenie", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strParagraphPosition": "Umiestnenie", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strSmallCaps": "Malé písmená", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strSomeParagraphSpace": "Nepridávať medzeru medzi odseky s rovnakým štýlom", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strStrike": "Prečiarknutie", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strSubscript": "Dolný index", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strSuperscript": "Horný index", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strTabs": "Tabulátor", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textAlign": "Zarovnanie", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textAtLeast": "Najmenej", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textBackColor": "Farba pozadia", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textBodyText": "Základný text", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textBorderColor": "Farba orámovania", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textBorderDesc": "Kliknutím na diagram alebo pomocou tlačidiel vyberte orámovanie a aplikujte zvolený štýl", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textBorderWidth": "Veľkosť orámovania", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textBottom": "Dole", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textCentered": "Vycentrované", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textCharacterSpacing": "Medzery medzi písmenami", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textDefault": "Predvolený tabulátor", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textEffects": "Efekty", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textExact": "presne", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textFirstLine": "Prvý riadok", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textJustified": "Podľa okrajov", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textLeader": "Vodítko", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textLeft": "Vľavo", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "Pridať novú vlastnú farbu", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textLevel": "Úroveň", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textNone": "žiadny", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textNoneSpecial": "(žiadne)", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textPosition": "Pozícia", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textRemove": "Odstrániť", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textRemoveAll": "Odstrániť všetko", @@ -1335,6 +1616,7 @@ "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.tipOuter": "Nastaviť len vonkajšie orámovanie", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.tipRight": "Nastaviť len pravé orámovanie", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.tipTop": "Nastaviť len horné orámovanie", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.txtAutoText": "Automaticky", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.txtNoBorders": "Bez orámovania", "DE.Views.RightMenu.txtChartSettings": "Nastavenia grafu", "DE.Views.RightMenu.txtHeaderFooterSettings": "Nastavenie hlavičky a päty", @@ -1360,13 +1642,16 @@ "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textColor": "Vyplniť farbou", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textDirection": "Smer", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textEmptyPattern": "Bez vzoru", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textFlip": "Prevrátiť", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textFromFile": "Zo súboru", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textFromStorage": "Z úložiska", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textFromUrl": "Z URL adresy ", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textGradient": "Prechod", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textGradientFill": "Výplň prechodom", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textHintFlipH": "Prevrátiť horizontálne", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textHintFlipV": "Prevrátiť vertikálne", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textImageTexture": "Obrázok alebo textúra", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textLinear": "Lineárny/čiarový", - "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textNewColor": "Pridať novú vlastnú farbu", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textNoFill": "Bez výplne", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textPatternFill": "Vzor", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textRadial": "Kruhový/hviezdicovitý", @@ -1400,6 +1685,8 @@ "DE.Views.SignatureSettings.strSign": "Podpísať", "DE.Views.SignatureSettings.strSignature": "Podpis", "DE.Views.SignatureSettings.strValid": "Platné podpisy", + "DE.Views.SignatureSettings.txtContinueEditing": "Aj tak uprav", + "DE.Views.SignatureSettings.txtEditWarning": "Upravovanie odstráni z dokumentu podpisy
    Ste si istí, že chcete pokračovať?", "DE.Views.Statusbar.goToPageText": "Ísť na stranu", "DE.Views.Statusbar.pageIndexText": "Strana {0} z {1}", "DE.Views.Statusbar.tipFitPage": "Prispôsobiť na stranu", @@ -1414,7 +1701,16 @@ "DE.Views.StyleTitleDialog.textTitle": "Názov", "DE.Views.StyleTitleDialog.txtEmpty": "Toto pole sa vyžaduje", "DE.Views.StyleTitleDialog.txtNotEmpty": "Pole nesmie byť prázdne", + "DE.Views.TableFormulaDialog.textFormula": "Vzorec", + "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.textBuildTable": "Zostaviť tabuľku obsahu z", + "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.textLeader": "Vodítko", + "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.textLevel": "Stupeň", + "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.textLevels": "Stupne", + "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.textNone": "žiadny", "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.textStyle": "Štýl", + "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.txtClassic": "Klasický", + "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.txtCurrent": "Aktuálny", + "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.txtOnline": "Online", "DE.Views.TableSettings.deleteColumnText": "Odstrániť stĺpec", "DE.Views.TableSettings.deleteRowText": "Odstrániť riadok", "DE.Views.TableSettings.deleteTableText": "Odstrániť tabuľku", @@ -1430,6 +1726,7 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettings.splitCellsText": "Rozdeliť bunku...", "DE.Views.TableSettings.splitCellTitleText": "Rozdeliť bunku", "DE.Views.TableSettings.strRepeatRow": "Opakovať ako riadok hlavičky v hornej časti každej stránky", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.textAddFormula": "Pridať vzorec", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textAdvanced": "Zobraziť pokročilé nastavenia", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textBackColor": "Farba pozadia", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textBanded": "Pruhovaný/pásikovaný", @@ -1437,12 +1734,14 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettings.textBorders": "Štýl orámovania", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textCellSize": "Veľkosť bunky", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textColumns": "Stĺpce", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.textDistributeCols": "Rozdeliť stĺpce", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.textDistributeRows": "Rozložiť riadky", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textEdit": "Riadky a stĺpce", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textEmptyTemplate": "Žiadne šablóny", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textFirst": "Prvý", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textHeader": "Hlavička", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.textHeight": "Výška", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textLast": "Trvať/posledný", - "DE.Views.TableSettings.textNewColor": "Pridať novú vlastnú farbu", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textRows": "Riadky", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textSelectBorders": "Vyberte orámovanie, ktoré chcete zmeniť podľa vyššie uvedeného štýlu", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textTemplate": "Vybrať zo šablóny", @@ -1458,6 +1757,9 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettings.tipRight": "Nastaviť len pravé vonkajšie orámovanie", "DE.Views.TableSettings.tipTop": "Nastaviť len horné vonkajšie orámovanie", "DE.Views.TableSettings.txtNoBorders": "Bez orámovania", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_Accent": "Akcent", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_Colorful": "Farebné", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_Dark": "Tmavý", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlign": "Zarovnanie", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlignment": "Zarovnanie", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAllowSpacing": "Medzera medzi bunkami", @@ -1490,7 +1792,6 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMargins": "Okraje bunky", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMeasure": "Merať v", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMove": "Presunúť objekt s textom", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "Pridať novú vlastnú farbu", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOnlyCells": "Len pre vybrané bunky", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOptions": "Možnosti", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOverlap": "Povoliť prekrývanie", @@ -1543,7 +1844,6 @@ "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textGradient": "Prechod", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textGradientFill": "Výplň prechodom", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textLinear": "Lineárny/čiarový", - "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textNewColor": "Pridať novú vlastnú farbu", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textNoFill": "Bez výplne", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textRadial": "Kruhový/hviezdicovitý", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textSelectTexture": "Vybrať", @@ -1551,9 +1851,13 @@ "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textTemplate": "Šablóna", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textTransform": "Transformovať", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.txtNoBorders": "Bez čiary", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnAddComment": "Pridať komentár", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnBlankPage": "Prázdná stránka", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnColumns": "Stĺpce", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnComment": "Komentár", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnDateTime": "Dátum a čas", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsChart": "Graf", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsControls": "Kontroly obsahu", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsDropcap": "Iniciála", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsEquation": "Rovnica", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsHeader": "Záhlavie/päta", @@ -1572,9 +1876,12 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.capImgGroup": "Skupina", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capImgWrapping": "Obal", "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniCustomTable": "Vložiť vlastnú tabuľku", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniDrawTable": "Nakresli tabuľku", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniEditControls": "Nastavenia ovládacieho prvku", "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniEditDropCap": "Nastavenie Iniciály", "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniEditFooter": "Upraviť pätu", "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniEditHeader": "Upraviť hlavičku", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniEraseTable": "Vymazať tabuľku", "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniHiddenBorders": "Skryté orámovania tabuľky", "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniHiddenChars": "Formátovacie značky", "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniImageFromFile": "Obrázok zo súboru", @@ -1583,13 +1890,18 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.textAutoColor": "Automaticky", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textBold": "Tučné", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textBottom": "Dole", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textCheckboxControl": "Zaškrtávacie políčko", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textColumnsCustom": "Vlastné stĺpce", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textColumnsLeft": "Vľavo", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textColumnsOne": "Jeden", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textColumnsRight": "Vpravo", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textColumnsThree": "Tri", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textColumnsTwo": "Dva", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textComboboxControl": "Zmiešaná schránka", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textContPage": "Súvislá/neprerušovaná strana", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textDateControl": "Dátum", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textDropdownControl": "Rozbaľovací zoznam", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textEditWatermark": "Vlastný vodoznak", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textEvenPage": "Párna stránka", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textInMargin": "V okraji", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textInsColumnBreak": "Vložiť stĺpcové zalomenie ", @@ -1624,6 +1936,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.textStyleMenuUpdate": "Aktualizovať z výberu", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textSubscript": "Dolný index", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textSuperscript": "Horný index", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabCollaboration": "Spolupráca", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabFile": "Súbor", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabHome": "Hlavná stránka", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabInsert": "Vložiť", @@ -1662,6 +1975,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertImage": "Vložiť obrázok", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertNum": "Vložiť číslo stránky", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Vložiť automatický tvar", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSymbol": "Vložiť symbol", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertTable": "Vložiť tabuľku", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertText": "Vložiť text", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertTextArt": "Vložiť Text Art", @@ -1686,6 +2000,12 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipShowHiddenChars": "Formátovacie značky", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipSynchronize": "Dokument bol zmenený ďalším používateľom. Prosím, kliknite na uloženie zmien a opätovne načítajte aktualizácie.", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipUndo": "Krok späť", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipWatermark": "Uprav vodoznak", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtDistribHor": "Rozložiť horizontálne", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtDistribVert": "Rozložiť vertikálne", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtMarginAlign": "Zarovnať k okraju", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtObjectsAlign": "Zarovnať označené objekty", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtPageAlign": "Zarovnať ku strane", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme1": "Kancelária", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme10": "Medián", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme11": "Metro", @@ -1706,5 +2026,21 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme6": "Dav", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme7": "Spravodlivosť", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme8": "Prietok", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme9": "Zlieváreň" + "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme9": "Zlieváreň", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textAuto": "Automaticky", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textBold": "Tučné", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textDiagonal": "Diagonálny", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textFont": "Písmo", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textFromFile": "Zo súboru", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textFromStorage": "Z úložiska", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textFromUrl": "Z URL adresy ", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textHor": "Vodorovný", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textImageW": "Vodoznak na obrázku", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textItalic": "Kurzíva", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textLanguage": "Jazyk", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textLayout": "Rozloženie", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textNewColor": "Pridať novú vlastnú farbu", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textNone": "žiadny", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.tipFontName": "Názov písma", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.tipFontSize": "Veľkosť písma" } \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/sl.json b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/sl.json index c0f1f4f83..ec6bb5f4c 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/sl.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/sl.json @@ -49,6 +49,9 @@ "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textParaDeleted": "Paragraph Deleted", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textParaFormatted": "Paragraph Formatted", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textParaInserted": "Paragraph Inserted", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textParaMoveFromDown": "Premaknjeno navzdol:", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textParaMoveFromUp": "Premakni se navzgor", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textParaMoveTo": "Premakni se:", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textPosition": "Position", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textRight": "Align right", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textShape": "Shape", @@ -60,16 +63,40 @@ "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textStrikeout": "Strikeout", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textSubScript": "Subscript", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textSuperScript": "Superscript", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textTableChanged": "Nastavitve tabele so se spremenile ", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textTableRowsAdd": "Dodan stolpec v tabelo", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textTableRowsDel": "Vrstica tabele je izbrisana", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textTabs": "Change tabs", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textUnderline": "Underline", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textUrl": "Vnesite URL naslov dokumenta", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textWidow": "Widow control", "Common.define.chartData.textArea": "Ploščinski grafikon", "Common.define.chartData.textBar": "Stolpični grafikon", + "Common.define.chartData.textCharts": "Grafi", "Common.define.chartData.textColumn": "Stolpični grafikon", "Common.define.chartData.textLine": "Vrstični grafikon", "Common.define.chartData.textPie": "Tortni grafikon", "Common.define.chartData.textPoint": "Točkovni grafikon", "Common.define.chartData.textStock": "Založni grafikon", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textApril": "April", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textDecember": "December", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textFebruary": "Februar", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textJanuary": "Januar", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textJuly": "Julij", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textJune": "Junij", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textMarch": "Marec", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textMay": "Maj", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textNovember": "November", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textSeptember": "September", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortFebruary": "Feb", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortJanuary": "Jan", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortJuly": "Jul", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortJune": "Jun", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortMarch": "Mar", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortMay": "Maj", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortNovember": "Nov", + "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortSeptember": "Sep", + "Common.UI.ColorButton.textNewColor": "Dodaj novo barvo po meri", "Common.UI.ComboBorderSize.txtNoBorders": "Ni mej", "Common.UI.ComboBorderSizeEditable.txtNoBorders": "Ni mej", "Common.UI.ComboDataView.emptyComboText": "Ni slogov", @@ -100,6 +127,7 @@ "Common.UI.Window.textInformation": "Informacija", "Common.UI.Window.textWarning": "Opozorilo", "Common.UI.Window.yesButtonText": "Da", + "Common.Utils.Metric.txtPt": "pt", "Common.Views.About.txtAddress": "naslov:", "Common.Views.About.txtLicensee": "LICENCE", "Common.Views.About.txtLicensor": "DAJALEC LICENCE", @@ -107,6 +135,8 @@ "Common.Views.About.txtPoweredBy": "Poganja", "Common.Views.About.txtTel": "tel.: ", "Common.Views.About.txtVersion": "Različica", + "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textBy": "Od:", + "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textReplace": "Zamenjaj:", "Common.Views.Chat.textSend": "Pošlji", "Common.Views.Comments.textAdd": "Dodaj", "Common.Views.Comments.textAddComment": "Dodaj", @@ -118,6 +148,7 @@ "Common.Views.Comments.textComments": "Komentarji", "Common.Views.Comments.textEdit": "Uredi", "Common.Views.Comments.textEnterCommentHint": "Svoj komentar vnesite tu", + "Common.Views.Comments.textHintAddComment": "Dodaj komentar", "Common.Views.Comments.textOpenAgain": "Ponovno odpri", "Common.Views.Comments.textReply": "Odgovori", "Common.Views.Comments.textResolve": "Razreši", @@ -136,7 +167,19 @@ "Common.Views.ExternalMergeEditor.textClose": "Close", "Common.Views.ExternalMergeEditor.textSave": "Save & Exit", "Common.Views.ExternalMergeEditor.textTitle": "Mail Merge Recipients", + "Common.Views.Header.textAdvSettings": "Dodatne nastavitve", "Common.Views.Header.textBack": "Pojdi v dokumente", + "Common.Views.Header.textSaveBegin": "Shranjevanje ...", + "Common.Views.Header.textSaveEnd": "Vse spremembe shranjene", + "Common.Views.Header.textSaveExpander": "Vse spremembe shranjene", + "Common.Views.Header.tipGoEdit": "Uredi trenutno datoteko", + "Common.Views.Header.tipPrint": "Natisni datoteko", + "Common.Views.Header.tipSave": "Shrani", + "Common.Views.Header.tipUndo": "Razveljavi", + "Common.Views.Header.txtAccessRights": "Spremeni pravice dostopa", + "Common.Views.Header.txtRename": "Preimenuj", + "Common.Views.History.textCloseHistory": "Zapri zgodovino", + "Common.Views.History.textRestore": "Obnovi", "Common.Views.ImageFromUrlDialog.textUrl": "Prilepi URL slike:", "Common.Views.ImageFromUrlDialog.txtEmpty": "To polje je obvezno", "Common.Views.ImageFromUrlDialog.txtNotUrl": "To polje mora biti URL v \"http://www.example.com\" formatu", @@ -146,17 +189,87 @@ "Common.Views.InsertTableDialog.txtMinText": "Minimalna vrednost za to polje je {0}.", "Common.Views.InsertTableDialog.txtRows": "Število vrstic", "Common.Views.InsertTableDialog.txtTitle": "Velikost tabele", + "Common.Views.OpenDialog.closeButtonText": "Zapri datoteko", "Common.Views.OpenDialog.txtEncoding": "Encoding ", + "Common.Views.OpenDialog.txtIncorrectPwd": "Geslo je napačno", + "Common.Views.OpenDialog.txtPassword": "Geslo", + "Common.Views.OpenDialog.txtPreview": "Predogled", "Common.Views.OpenDialog.txtTitle": "Choose %1 options", + "Common.Views.OpenDialog.txtTitleProtected": "Zaščitena datoteka", + "Common.Views.PasswordDialog.txtIncorrectPwd": "Potrditev gesla se ne ujema", + "Common.Views.PasswordDialog.txtPassword": "Geslo", + "Common.Views.PasswordDialog.txtRepeat": "Ponovite geslo", + "Common.Views.PasswordDialog.txtTitle": "Nastavi geslo", + "Common.Views.PluginDlg.textLoading": "Nalaganje", + "Common.Views.Plugins.groupCaption": "Razširitve", + "Common.Views.Plugins.strPlugins": "Razširitve", + "Common.Views.Plugins.textLoading": "Nalaganje", + "Common.Views.Plugins.textStart": "Začni", + "Common.Views.Protection.hintAddPwd": "Šifriraj z geslom", + "Common.Views.Protection.hintPwd": "Spremeni ali odstrani geslo", + "Common.Views.Protection.hintSignature": "Dodaj digitalni podpid ali podpisno črto", + "Common.Views.Protection.txtAddPwd": "Dodaj geslo", + "Common.Views.Protection.txtChangePwd": "Spremeni geslo", + "Common.Views.Protection.txtDeletePwd": "Odstrani geslo", + "Common.Views.Protection.txtEncrypt": "Šifriraj", + "Common.Views.Protection.txtInvisibleSignature": "Dodaj digitalni podpis", + "Common.Views.Protection.txtSignature": "Podpis", + "Common.Views.Protection.txtSignatureLine": "Dodaj podpisno črto", + "Common.Views.RenameDialog.textName": "Ime datoteke", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.mniSettings": "Nastavitve primerjave", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipCommentRem": "Odstrani komentarje", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipCommentRemCurrent": "Odstrani trenutni komentar", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipCompare": "Primerjaj trenutni dokument z drugim", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtAccept": "Accept", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtAcceptAll": "Accept All Changes", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtAcceptChanges": "Sprejmi spremembe", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtAcceptCurrent": "Accept Current Changes", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtChat": "Pogovor", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtClose": "Close", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCommentRemAll": "Odstrani vse komentarje", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCommentRemove": "Odstrani", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCompare": "Primerjaj", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtDocLang": "Jezik", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtFinal": "Vse spremembe so sprejete (Predogled)", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtNext": "To Next Change", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtOriginal": "Vse spremembe zavrnjene (Predogled)", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtPrev": "To Previous Change", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtReject": "Reject", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtRejectAll": "Reject All Changes", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtRejectChanges": "Zavrni spremembe", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtRejectCurrent": "Reject Current Changes", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtView": "Način pogleda", + "Common.Views.ReviewChangesDialog.txtAccept": "Sprejmi", + "Common.Views.ReviewChangesDialog.txtAcceptAll": "Sprejmi vse spremembe", + "Common.Views.ReviewChangesDialog.txtReject": "Zavrni", + "Common.Views.ReviewChangesDialog.txtRejectAll": "Zavrni vse spremembe", + "Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textAdd": "Dodaj", + "Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textAddReply": "Dodaj odgovor", + "Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textCancel": "Prekliči", + "Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textClose": "Zapri", + "Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textEdit": "V redu", + "Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textMention": "+omemba bo dodelila uporabniku dostop do datoteke in poslano bo e-poštno sporočilo", + "Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textMentionNotify": "+omemba bo obvestila uporabnika preko e-pošte", + "Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textOpenAgain": "Ponovno odpri", + "Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textReply": "Odgovori", + "Common.Views.SaveAsDlg.textLoading": "Nalaganje", + "Common.Views.SelectFileDlg.textLoading": "Nalaganje", + "Common.Views.SignDialog.textBold": "Krepko", + "Common.Views.SignDialog.textCertificate": "Certifikat", + "Common.Views.SignDialog.textChange": "Spremeni", + "Common.Views.SignDialog.textItalic": "Poševno", + "Common.Views.SignDialog.textSelect": "Izberi", + "Common.Views.SignDialog.textSelectImage": "Izberi sliko", + "Common.Views.SignDialog.textTitle": "Podpiši dokument", + "Common.Views.SignDialog.textValid": "Velja od% 1 do% 2", + "Common.Views.SignDialog.tipFontName": "Ime pisave", + "Common.Views.SignDialog.tipFontSize": "Velikost pisave", + "Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textInfoEmail": "Elektronski naslov", + "Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textInfoName": "Ime", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textCharacter": "Znak", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textCopyright": "Znak za Copyright ©", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textFont": "Ime pisave", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textQEmSpace": "1/4 prostora", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.leavePageText": "All unsaved changes in this document will be lost.
    Click \"Cancel\" then \"Save\" to save them. Click \"OK\" to discard all the unsaved changes.", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.newDocumentTitle": "Neimenovan dokument", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.notcriticalErrorTitle": "Warning", @@ -176,6 +289,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.downloadMergeTitle": "Downloading", "DE.Controllers.Main.downloadTextText": "Prenašanje dokumenta...", "DE.Controllers.Main.downloadTitleText": "Prenašanje dokumenta", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorBadImageUrl": "URL slike je nepravilen", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorCoAuthoringDisconnect": "Povezava s strežnikom izgubljena. Dokument v tem trenutku ne more biti urejen.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorConnectToServer": "The document could not be saved. Please check connection settings or contact your administrator.
    When you click the 'OK' button, you will be prompted to download the document.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorDatabaseConnection": "Zunanja napaka.
    Napaka povezave baze podatkov. V primeru, da napaka ni odpravljena, prosim kontaktirajte ekipo za pomoč.", @@ -205,6 +319,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.mailMergeLoadFileText": "Loading Data Source...", "DE.Controllers.Main.mailMergeLoadFileTitle": "Loading Data Source", "DE.Controllers.Main.notcriticalErrorTitle": "Opozorilo", + "DE.Controllers.Main.openErrorText": "Prišlo je do težave med odpiranjem datoteke.", "DE.Controllers.Main.openTextText": "Odpiranje dokumenta...", "DE.Controllers.Main.openTitleText": "Odpiranje dokumenta", "DE.Controllers.Main.printTextText": "Tiskanje dokumenta...", @@ -212,6 +327,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.reloadButtonText": "Osveži stran", "DE.Controllers.Main.requestEditFailedMessageText": "Nekdo v tem trenutku ureja ta dokument. Prosim ponovno poskusite kasneje.", "DE.Controllers.Main.requestEditFailedTitleText": "Dostop zavrnjen", + "DE.Controllers.Main.saveErrorText": "Prišlo je do težave med shranjevanjem datoteke.", "DE.Controllers.Main.savePreparingText": "Priprava za shranjevanje", "DE.Controllers.Main.savePreparingTitle": "Priprava za shranjevanje. Prosim počakajte...", "DE.Controllers.Main.saveTextText": "Shranjevanje dokumenta...", @@ -222,26 +338,80 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.splitMaxColsErrorText": "Število stolpcev mora biti manj kot 1%.", "DE.Controllers.Main.splitMaxRowsErrorText": "Število vrstic mora biti manj kot %1.", "DE.Controllers.Main.textAnonymous": "Anonimno", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textChangesSaved": "Vse spremembe shranjene", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textClose": "Zapri", "DE.Controllers.Main.textCloseTip": "Pritisni za zapiranje namiga", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textContactUs": "Kontaktirajte oddelek za prodajo", "DE.Controllers.Main.textLoadingDocument": "Nalaganje dokumenta", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textNoLicenseTitle": "%1 omejitev povezave", "DE.Controllers.Main.textStrict": "Strict mode", "DE.Controllers.Main.textTryUndoRedo": "The Undo/Redo functions are disabled for the Fast co-editing mode.
    Click the 'Strict mode' button to switch to the Strict co-editing mode to edit the file without other users interference and send your changes only after you save them. You can switch between the co-editing modes using the editor Advanced settings.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.titleServerVersion": "Urednik je bil posodobljen", "DE.Controllers.Main.titleUpdateVersion": "Različica spremenjena", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtAbove": "Nad", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtArt": "Your text here", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtBasicShapes": "Osnovne oblike", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtBookmarkError": "Težava! Zaznamek ni definiran", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtButtons": "Gumbi", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtCallouts": "Oblački", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtCharts": "Grafi", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtDiagramTitle": "Naslov diagrama", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtEditingMode": "Nastavi način urejanja...", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtEnterDate": "Vnesite datum", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtErrorLoadHistory": "History loading failed", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtEvenPage": "Soda stran", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtFiguredArrows": "Figurirane puščice", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtFirstPage": "Prva stran", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtFooter": "Noga", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtHyperlink": "Hiperpovezava", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtLines": "Vrste", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtMath": "Matematika", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtNeedSynchronize": "Imate posodobitve", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtOddPage": "Liha stran", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtOnPage": "na strani", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtRectangles": "Pravokotniki", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtSeries": "Serije", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_actionButtonBlank": "Prazen gumb", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_actionButtonEnd": "Dodaj gumb", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_actionButtonHelp": "Gumb za pomoč", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_actionButtonHome": "Gumb Domov", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_actionButtonMovie": "Gumb za film", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_cloud": "Oblak", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_heart": "Srce", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_leftArrow": "Leva puščica", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_lineWithArrow": "Puščica", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_mathEqual": "Enak", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_mathMinus": "Minus", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_mathPlus": "Plus", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_noSmoking": "\"Ni\" simbol", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_pie": "Tortni grafikon", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_plaque": "Podpiši", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_plus": "Plus", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star10": "10-kraka zvezda", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star12": "12-kraka zvezda", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star16": "16-kraka zvezda", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star24": "24-kraka zvezda", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star32": "32-kraka zvezda", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star4": "4-kraka zvezda", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star5": "5-kraka zvezda", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star6": "6-kraka zvezda", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star7": "7-kraka zvezda", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_star8": "8-kraka zvezda", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_sun": "Sonce", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_textRect": "Polje z besedilom", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_upArrow": "Puščica: gor", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtStarsRibbons": "Zvezde & Trakovi", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_Heading_1": "Naslov 1", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_Heading_2": "Naslov 2", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_Heading_3": "Naslov 3", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_Heading_4": "Naslov 4", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_Heading_5": "Naslov 5", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_Heading_6": "Naslov 6", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_Heading_7": "Naslov 7", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_Heading_8": "Naslov 8", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_Heading_9": "Naslov 9", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_Normal": "Normalno", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtTypeEquation": "Tukaj vnesite enačbo", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtXAxis": "X os", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtYAxis": "Y os", "DE.Controllers.Main.unknownErrorText": "Neznana napaka.", @@ -265,6 +435,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.textFontSizeErr": "Vnesena vrednost je nepravilna.
    Prosim vnesite numerično vrednost med 1 in 100", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.textFraction": "Frakcije", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.textFunction": "Funkcije", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.textInsert": "Vstavi", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.textIntegral": "Integrali", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.textLargeOperator": "Veliki operatorji", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.textLimitAndLog": "Limiti in logaritmi", @@ -592,11 +763,36 @@ "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_vdots": "Vertikalne elipse", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_xsi": "Xi", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_zeta": "Zeta", + "DE.Views.AddNewCaptionLabelDialog.textLabel": "Oznaka:", + "DE.Views.AddNewCaptionLabelDialog.textLabelError": "Oznaka ne more biti prazna", + "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textAdd": "Dodaj", + "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textBookmarkName": "Ime zaznamka", + "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textClose": "Zapri", + "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textCopy": "Kopiraj", + "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textDelete": "Izbriši", + "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textGetLink": "Pridobi povezavo", + "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textGoto": "Pojdi na", + "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textLocation": "Lokacija", + "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textName": "Ime", + "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textTitle": "Zaznamki", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textAdd": "Dodaj oznako", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textAfter": "po", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textBefore": "Pred", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textDelete": "Izbriši oznako", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textInsert": "Vstavi", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textLabel": "Oznaka", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textPeriod": "Obdobje", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textTable": "Tabela", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textTitle": "Vstavi citat", + "DE.Views.CellsAddDialog.textCol": "Stolpci", + "DE.Views.CellsAddDialog.textRow": "Vrstice", + "DE.Views.CellsAddDialog.textUp": "Nad kazalcem", + "DE.Views.CellsRemoveDialog.textTitle": "Izbriši celice", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textAdvanced": "Prikaži napredne nastavitve", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textChartType": "Spremeni vrsto razpredelnice", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textEditData": "Uredi podatke", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textHeight": "Višina", - "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textOriginalSize": "Privzeta velikost", + "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textOriginalSize": "Dejanska velikost", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textSize": "Velikost", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textStyle": "Slog", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textUndock": "Odklopi s plošče", @@ -610,6 +806,25 @@ "DE.Views.ChartSettings.txtTight": "Tesen", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.txtTitle": "Graf", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.txtTopAndBottom": "Vrh in Dno", + "DE.Views.CompareSettingsDialog.textTitle": "Nastavitve primerjave", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.strGeneral": "Splošno", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textAdd": "Dodaj", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textApplyAll": "Uporabi za vse", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textChange": "Uredi", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textColor": "Barva", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textDate": "Format datuma", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textDelete": "Izbriši", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textDisplayName": "Prikaz imena", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textLang": "Jezik", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textNone": "Nič", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.tipChange": "Zamenjaj simbol", + "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textColumns": "Število stolpcev", + "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textTitle": "Stolpci", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textDefault": "Nastavi kot prevzeto", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textFormat": "Formati", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textLang": "Jezik", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textUpdate": "Samodejno posodobi", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.txtTitle": "Datum & Ura", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.aboveText": "Nad", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.addCommentText": "Dodaj komentar", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.advancedFrameText": "Napredne nastavitve okvirja", @@ -655,7 +870,7 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.mergeCellsText": "Združi celice", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.moreText": "Več variant...", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.noSpellVariantsText": "Ni variant", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.originalSizeText": "Privzeta velikost", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.originalSizeText": "Dejanska velikost", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.paragraphText": "Odstavek", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.removeHyperlinkText": "Odstrani hiperpovezavo", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.rightText": "Desno", @@ -670,6 +885,8 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.spellcheckText": "Preverjanje črkovanja", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.splitCellsText": "Razdeli celico...", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.splitCellTitleText": "Razdeli celico", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.strDelete": "Odstrani podpis", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.strSign": "Podpiši", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.styleText": "Formatting as Style", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.tableText": "Tabela", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textAlign": "Poravnaj", @@ -679,19 +896,30 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textArrangeForward": "Premakni naprej", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textArrangeFront": "Premakni v ospredje", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textCopy": "Kopiraj", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textCropFill": "Dopolni", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textCut": "Izreži", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textEditWrapBoundary": "Uredi mejo ukrivljanja", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFromFile": "Iz datoteke", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFromStorage": "Iz shrambe", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFromUrl": "z URL naslova", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textJoinList": "Pojdi na prejšno stran", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textNextPage": "Naslednja stran", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textPaste": "Prilepi", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textPrevPage": "Prejšnja stran", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textRemove": "Odstrani", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textReplace": "Zamenjaj sliko", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textRotate": "Zavrti", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textSettings": "Nastavitve", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textShapeAlignBottom": "Poravnaj dno", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textShapeAlignCenter": "Poravnaj središče", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textShapeAlignLeft": "Poravnaj levo", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textShapeAlignMiddle": "Poravnaj sredino", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textShapeAlignRight": "Poravnaj desno", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textShapeAlignTop": "Poravnaj vrh", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textUndo": "Razveljavi", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textWrap": "Slog zavijanja", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.tipIsLocked": "Ta element trenutno ureja drug uporabnik.", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.toDictionaryText": "Dodaj v slovar", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtAddBottom": "Add bottom border", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtAddFractionBar": "Add fraction bar", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtAddHor": "Add horizontal line", @@ -714,6 +942,7 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtDeleteEq": "Delete equation", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtDeleteGroupChar": "Delete char", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtDeleteRadical": "Delete radical", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtEmpty": "(Prazno)", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtFractionLinear": "Change to linear fraction", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtFractionSkewed": "Change to skewed fraction", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtFractionStacked": "Change to stacked fraction", @@ -740,15 +969,19 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtInsertArgAfter": "Insert argument after", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtInsertArgBefore": "Insert argument before", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtInsertBreak": "Insert manual break", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtInsertCaption": "Vstavi citat", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtInsertEqAfter": "Insert equation after", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtInsertEqBefore": "Insert equation before", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtKeepTextOnly": "Ohrani le besedilo", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtLimitChange": "Change limits location", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtLimitOver": "Limit over text", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtLimitUnder": "Limit under text", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtMatchBrackets": "Match brackets to argument height", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtMatrixAlign": "Matrix alignment", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtOverbar": "Bar over text", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtPasteSourceFormat": "Ohrani izvorno oblikovanje", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtPressLink": "Pritisnite CTRL in pritisnite povezavo", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtPrintSelection": "Nastisni izbor", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtRemFractionBar": "Remove fraction bar", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtRemLimit": "Remove limit", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtRemoveAccentChar": "Remove accent character", @@ -800,7 +1033,6 @@ "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textLeft": "Levo", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textMargin": "Meja", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textMove": "Premakni z besedilom", - "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "Dodaj novo barvo po meri", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textNone": "nič", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textPage": "Stran", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textParagraph": "Odstavek", @@ -814,20 +1046,25 @@ "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textTop": "Vrh", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textVertical": "Vertikalen", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textWidth": "Širina", - "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.tipFontName": "Ime pisave", + "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.tipFontName": "Pisava", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.txtNoBorders": "Ni mej", + "DE.Views.EditListItemDialog.textDisplayName": "Prikaz imena", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnBackCaption": "Pojdi v dokumente", + "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnCloseMenuCaption": "Zapri meni", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnCreateNewCaption": "Ustvari nov", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnDownloadCaption": "Prenesi kot...", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnHelpCaption": "Pomoč...", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnHistoryCaption": "Version History", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnInfoCaption": "Informacije dokumenta...", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnPrintCaption": "Natisni", + "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnProtectCaption": "Zaščiti", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnRecentFilesCaption": "Odpri nedavno...", + "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnRenameCaption": "Preimenuj ...", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnReturnCaption": "Nazaj v dokument", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnRightsCaption": "Uporabniške pravice...", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnSaveAsCaption": "Save as", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnSaveCaption": "Shrani", + "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnSaveCopyAsCaption": "Shrani kot", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnSettingsCaption": "Napredne nastavitve...", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnToEditCaption": "Uredi dokument", "DE.Views.FileMenu.textDownload": "Download", @@ -836,9 +1073,16 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.CreateNew.newDescriptionText": "Ustvari nov prazen besedilni dokument, ki ga boste lahko oblikovali med urejanjem ko je že ustvarjen. Ali pa uporabite eno izmed predlog za ustvarjanje dokumenta določene vrste ali namena, kjer so nekateri slogi že pred-uporabljeni.", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.CreateNew.newDocumentText": "Nov besedilni dokument", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.CreateNew.noTemplatesText": "Ni predlog", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.okButtonText": "Uporabi", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtAddAuthor": "Dodaj avtorja", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtAddText": "Dodaj besedilo", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtAuthor": "Avtor", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtBtnAccessRights": "Spremeni pravice dostopa", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtComment": "Komentar", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtCreated": "Ustvarjeno", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtLoading": "Nalaganje...", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtModifyBy": "Nazadnje spremenjenil/a", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtModifyDate": "Nazadnje spremenjeno", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtPages": "Strani", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtParagraphs": "Odstavki", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtPlacement": "Lokacija", @@ -847,9 +1091,15 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtStatistics": "Statistika", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtSymbols": "Simboli", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtTitle": "Naslov dokumenta", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtUploaded": "Naloženo", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtWords": "Besede", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentRights.txtBtnAccessRights": "Spremeni pravice dostopa", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentRights.txtRights": "Osebe, ki imajo pravice", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.notcriticalErrorTitle": "Opozorilo", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.strEncrypt": "Z geslom", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.strProtect": "Zaščiti dokument", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.strSignature": "S podpisom", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.ProtectDoc.txtEdit": "Uredi dokument", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.okButtonText": "Uporabi", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strAlignGuides": "Vključi vodnike poravnave", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strAutosave": "Vključi samodejno shranjevanje", @@ -860,6 +1110,7 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strFontRender": "Namigovanje pisave", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strInputMode": "Vključi hieroglife", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strLiveComment": "Vključi možnost živega komentiranja", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strPaste": "Izreži, kopiraj in prilepi", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strShowChanges": "Sprotne spremembe sodelovanja", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strSpellCheckMode": "Vključi možnost preverjanja črkovanja", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strStrict": "Strict", @@ -872,9 +1123,11 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textAlignGuides": "Navodila poravnave", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textAutoSave": "Samodejno shranjevanje", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textDisabled": "Onemogočeno", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textForceSave": "Shrani na strežnik", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textMinute": "Vsako minuto", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtAll": "Poglej vse", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtCm": "Centimeter", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtInch": "Palec", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtInput": "Nadomestni vhod", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtLast": "Poglej zadnjega", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtLiveComment": "Živo komentiranje", @@ -882,10 +1135,13 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtNative": "Domači", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtNone": "Poglej nobenega", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtPt": "Točka", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtRunMacros": "Omogoči vse", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtSpellCheck": "Preverjanje črkovanja", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtStopMacros": "Onemogoči vse", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtWin": "kot Windows", "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textBottomCenter": "Središče dna", "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textBottomLeft": "Spodaj levo", + "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textBottomPage": "Konec strani", "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textBottomRight": "Spodaj desno", "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textDiffFirst": "Različna prva stran", "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textDiffOdd": "Različne sode in lihe strani", @@ -903,14 +1159,20 @@ "DE.Views.HyperlinkSettingsDialog.textTitle": "Nastavitve hiperpovezave", "DE.Views.HyperlinkSettingsDialog.textTooltip": "Besedila zaslonskega tipa", "DE.Views.HyperlinkSettingsDialog.textUrl": "Povezava k", + "DE.Views.HyperlinkSettingsDialog.txtBookmarks": "Zaznamki", "DE.Views.HyperlinkSettingsDialog.txtEmpty": "To polje je obvezno", + "DE.Views.HyperlinkSettingsDialog.txtHeadings": "Naslovi", "DE.Views.HyperlinkSettingsDialog.txtNotUrl": "To polje mora biti URL v \"http://www.example.com\" formatu", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textAdvanced": "Prikaži napredne nastavitve", + "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textCropFill": "Dopolni", + "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textEdit": "Uredi", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFromFile": "z datoteke", + "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFromStorage": "Iz shrambe", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFromUrl": "z URL", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textHeight": "Višina", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textInsert": "Zamenjaj sliko", - "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textOriginalSize": "Privzeta velikost", + "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textOriginalSize": "Dejanska velikost", + "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textRotate90": "Zavrti 90°", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textSize": "Velikost", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textWidth": "Širina", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textWrap": "Slog zavijanja", @@ -922,6 +1184,7 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettings.txtTight": "Tesen", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.txtTopAndBottom": "Vrh in Dno", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.strMargins": "Oblazinjenje besedila", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAbsoluteWH": "Absolutno", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAlignment": "Poravnava", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textArrows": "Puščice", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBeginSize": "Začetna velikost", @@ -951,7 +1214,7 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textMiter": "Mitre", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textMove": "Premakni objekt z besedilom", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textOptions": "Možnosti", - "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textOriginalSize": "Privzeta velikost", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textOriginalSize": "Dejanska velikost", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textOverlap": "Dovoli prekrivanje", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textPage": "Stran", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textParagraph": "Odstavek", @@ -964,6 +1227,7 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textShape": "Nastavitve oblike", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textSize": "Velikost", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textSquare": "Kvadrat", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTextBox": "Polje z besedilom", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTitle": "Slika - napredne nastavitve", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTitleChart": "Graf - Napredne nastavitve", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTitleShape": "Oblika - Napredne nastavitve", @@ -982,9 +1246,28 @@ "DE.Views.LeftMenu.tipAbout": "O programu", "DE.Views.LeftMenu.tipChat": "Pogovor", "DE.Views.LeftMenu.tipComments": "Komentarji", + "DE.Views.LeftMenu.tipNavigation": "Navigacija", + "DE.Views.LeftMenu.tipPlugins": "Razširitve", "DE.Views.LeftMenu.tipSearch": "Iskanje", "DE.Views.LeftMenu.tipSupport": "Povratne informacije & Pomoč", "DE.Views.LeftMenu.tipTitles": "Naslovi", + "DE.Views.LeftMenu.txtDeveloper": "RAZVIJALSKI NAČIN", + "DE.Views.Links.capBtnBookmarks": "Zaznamek", + "DE.Views.Links.capBtnInsLink": "Hiperpovezava", + "DE.Views.Links.textContentsRemove": "Odstrani kazalo", + "DE.Views.Links.textContentsSettings": "Nastavitve", + "DE.Views.Links.tipBookmarks": "Ustvari zaznamek", + "DE.Views.Links.tipCaption": "Vstavi citat", + "DE.Views.Links.tipContents": "Vstavi kazalo", + "DE.Views.Links.tipInsertHyperlink": "Dodaj povezavo(link)", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textAuto": "Avtomatsko", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textLeft": "Levo", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textPreview": "Predogled", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textRight": "Desno", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtColor": "Barva", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtNone": "Nič", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtSize": "Velikost", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtType": "Tip", "DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.filePlaceholder": "PDF", "DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.okButtonText": "Send", "DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.subjectPlaceholder": "Theme", @@ -1032,9 +1315,19 @@ "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.txtPrev": "To previous record", "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.txtUntitled": "Untitled", "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.warnProcessMailMerge": "Starting merge failed", + "DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textApply": "Uporabi", + "DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textFormat": "Format", + "DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textInsert": "Vstavi", + "DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textLocation": "Lokacija", + "DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textNumFormat": "Format števila", + "DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textPageBottom": "Konec strani", "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.notcriticalErrorTitle": "Warning", "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textBottom": "Bottom", "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textLeft": "Left", + "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textNormal": "Normalno", + "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textOrientation": "Usmerjenost", + "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textPortrait": "Portret", + "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textPreview": "Predogled", "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textRight": "Right", "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textTitle": "Margins", "DE.Views.PageMarginsDialog.textTop": "Top", @@ -1043,6 +1336,7 @@ "DE.Views.PageSizeDialog.textHeight": "Height", "DE.Views.PageSizeDialog.textTitle": "Page Size", "DE.Views.PageSizeDialog.textWidth": "Width", + "DE.Views.PageSizeDialog.txtCustom": "Po meri", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.strLineHeight": "Razmik med vrsticami", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.strParagraphSpacing": "Razmik", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.strSomeParagraphSpace": "Med odstavke enakega sloga ne dodaj intervalov", @@ -1054,7 +1348,6 @@ "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textAuto": "Večkratno", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textBackColor": "Barva ozadja", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textExact": "Točno", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textNewColor": "Dodaj novo barvo po meri", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.txtAutoText": "Samodejno", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.noTabs": "Določeni zavihki se bodo pojavili v tem polju", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strAllCaps": "Vse z veliko", @@ -1063,6 +1356,8 @@ "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strDoubleStrike": "Dvojno prečrtanje", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strIndentsLeftText": "Levo", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strIndentsRightText": "Desno", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strIndentsSpacingAfter": "po", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strIndentsSpacingBefore": "Pred", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strKeepLines": "Linije ohrani skupaj", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strKeepNext": "Ohrani z naslednjim", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strMargins": "Blazinice", @@ -1076,6 +1371,7 @@ "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strSuperscript": "Nadpis", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strTabs": "Zavihek", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textAlign": "Poravnava", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textAuto": "Večkratno", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textBackColor": "Barva ozadja", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textBorderColor": "Barva obrobe", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textBorderDesc": "Pritisni na diagram, ali pa uporabi gumbe za izbiro mej in potrditev njihovega izbranega stila", @@ -1084,8 +1380,11 @@ "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textCharacterSpacing": "Razmak znaka", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textDefault": "Prevzeti zavihek", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textEffects": "Učinki", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textFirstLine": "Prva vrstica", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textJustified": "Upravičena", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textLeft": "Levo", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "Dodaj novo barvo po meri", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textNone": "Nič", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textNoneSpecial": "(nič)", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textPosition": "Položaj", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textRemove": "Odstrani", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textRemoveAll": "Odstrani vse", @@ -1124,21 +1423,24 @@ "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strSize": "Velikost", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strStroke": "Črta", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strTransparency": "Motnost", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strType": "Tip", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textAdvanced": "Prikaži napredne nastavitve", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textBorderSizeErr": "Vnesena vrednost je nepravilna.
    Prosim vnesite vrednost med 0 pt in 1584 pt.", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textColor": "Barvna izpolnitev", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textDirection": "Smer", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textEmptyPattern": "Ni vzorcev", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textFromFile": "z datoteke", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textFromStorage": "Iz shrambe", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textFromUrl": "z URL", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textGradient": "Gradient", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textGradientFill": "Polnjenje gradienta", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textImageTexture": "Slika ali tekstura", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textLinear": "Linearna", - "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textNewColor": "Dodaj novo barvo po meri", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textNoFill": "Ni polnila", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textPatternFill": "Vzorec", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textRadial": "Radial", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textRotate90": "Zavrti 90°", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textSelectImage": "Izberi sliko", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textSelectTexture": "Izberi", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textStretch": "Raztegni", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textStyle": "Slog", @@ -1164,20 +1466,35 @@ "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.txtTight": "Tesen", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.txtTopAndBottom": "Vrh in Dno", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.txtWood": "Les", + "DE.Views.SignatureSettings.notcriticalErrorTitle": "Opozorilo", + "DE.Views.SignatureSettings.strDelete": "Odstrani podpis", + "DE.Views.SignatureSettings.strRequested": "Zahtevaj podpis", + "DE.Views.SignatureSettings.strSign": "Podpiši", + "DE.Views.SignatureSettings.strSignature": "Podpis", + "DE.Views.SignatureSettings.strValid": "Veljaven podpis", "DE.Views.Statusbar.goToPageText": "Pojdi na stran", "DE.Views.Statusbar.pageIndexText": "Stran {0} od {1}", "DE.Views.Statusbar.tipFitPage": "Prilagodi stran", "DE.Views.Statusbar.tipFitWidth": "Prilagodi širino", "DE.Views.Statusbar.tipSetLang": "Nastavi jezik besedila", "DE.Views.Statusbar.tipZoomFactor": "Povečava", - "DE.Views.Statusbar.tipZoomIn": "Približaj", - "DE.Views.Statusbar.tipZoomOut": "Oddalji", + "DE.Views.Statusbar.tipZoomIn": "Povečaj", + "DE.Views.Statusbar.tipZoomOut": "Pomanjšaj", "DE.Views.Statusbar.txtPageNumInvalid": "številka strani nepravilna", "DE.Views.StyleTitleDialog.textHeader": "Create New Style", "DE.Views.StyleTitleDialog.textNextStyle": "Next paragraph style", "DE.Views.StyleTitleDialog.textTitle": "Title", "DE.Views.StyleTitleDialog.txtEmpty": "This field is required", "DE.Views.StyleTitleDialog.txtNotEmpty": "Field must not be empty", + "DE.Views.TableFormulaDialog.textBookmark": "Prilepi zaznamek", + "DE.Views.TableFormulaDialog.textFormat": "Format števila", + "DE.Views.TableFormulaDialog.textFormula": "Formula", + "DE.Views.TableFormulaDialog.textInsertFunction": "Prilepi funkcijo", + "DE.Views.TableFormulaDialog.textTitle": "Nastavitve formule", + "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.textNone": "Nič", + "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.textStyle": "Slog", + "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.txtOnline": "Vpisan", + "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.txtSimple": "Preprosto", "DE.Views.TableSettings.deleteColumnText": "Izbriši stolpec", "DE.Views.TableSettings.deleteRowText": "Izbriši vrsto", "DE.Views.TableSettings.deleteTableText": "Izbriši tabelo", @@ -1193,18 +1510,20 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettings.splitCellsText": "Razdeli celico...", "DE.Views.TableSettings.splitCellTitleText": "Razdeli celico", "DE.Views.TableSettings.strRepeatRow": "Ponovi kot vrstico glave na vrhu vsake strani", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.textAddFormula": "Dodaj formulo", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textAdvanced": "Prikaži napredne nastavitve", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textBackColor": "Barva ozadja", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textBanded": "Odvisen", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textBorderColor": "Barva", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textBorders": "Stil obrob", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.textCellSize": "Velikost vrstic in stolpcev", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textColumns": "Stolpci", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textEdit": "Vrste & Stolpci", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textEmptyTemplate": "Ni predlog", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textFirst": "prvi", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textHeader": "Glava", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.textHeight": "Višina", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textLast": "zadnji", - "DE.Views.TableSettings.textNewColor": "Dodaj novo barvo po meri", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textRows": "Vrste", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textSelectBorders": "Izberite meje katere želite spremeniti z uporabo zgoraj izbranega sloga", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textTemplate": "Izberi z predloge", @@ -1220,6 +1539,9 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettings.tipRight": "Nastavi le zunanjo desno mejo", "DE.Views.TableSettings.tipTop": "Nastavi le zunanjo zgornjo mejo", "DE.Views.TableSettings.txtNoBorders": "Ni mej", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_Accent": "Preglas", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_Colorful": "Pisano", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_Dark": "Temen", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlign": "Poravnava", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlignment": "Poravnava", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAllowSpacing": "Dovoli razmak med celicami", @@ -1245,7 +1567,6 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMargin": "Meja", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMargins": "Meje celice", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMove": "Premakni objekt z besedilom", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "Dodaj novo barvo po meri", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOnlyCells": "le za izbrane celice", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOptions": "Možnosti", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOverlap": "Dovoli prekrivanje", @@ -1256,6 +1577,7 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textRight": "Desno", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textRightOf": "desno od", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textRightTooltip": "Desno", + "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textTable": "Tabela", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textTableBackColor": "Ozadje tabele", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textTitle": "Tabela - Napredne nastavitve", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textTop": "Vrh", @@ -1275,19 +1597,23 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.tipTableOuterCellAll": "Nastavi zunanjo mejo in meje za vse notranje celice", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.tipTableOuterCellInner": "Nastavi zunanjo mejo in vertikalne ter horizontalne črte za notranje celice", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.tipTableOuterCellOuter": "Nastavi zunanjo mejo tabele in zunanje meje za notranje celice", + "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.txtCm": "Centimeter", + "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.txtInch": "Palec", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.txtNoBorders": "Ni mej", + "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.txtPercent": "Odstotek", + "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.txtPt": "Točka", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.strColor": "Color", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.strFill": "Fill", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.strSize": "Size", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.strStroke": "Stroke", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.strTransparency": "Opacity", + "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.strType": "Tip", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textBorderSizeErr": "The entered value is incorrect.
    Please enter a value between 0 pt and 1584 pt.", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textColor": "Color Fill", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textDirection": "Direction", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textGradient": "Gradient", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textGradientFill": "Gradient Fill", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textLinear": "Linear", - "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textNewColor": "Add New Custom Color", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textNoFill": "No Fill", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textRadial": "Radial", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textSelectTexture": "Select", @@ -1295,6 +1621,21 @@ "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textTemplate": "Template", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textTransform": "Transform", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.txtNoBorders": "No Line", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnAddComment": "Dodaj komentar", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnBlankPage": "Prazna stran", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnColumns": "Stolpci", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnComment": "Komentar", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnDateTime": "Datum & Ura", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsChart": "Graf", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsImage": "Slika", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsTable": "Tabela", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsTextbox": "Polje z besedilom", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnPageOrient": "Usmerjenost", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnPageSize": "Velikost", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnWatermark": "Vodni žig", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capImgAlign": "Poravnava", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capImgBackward": "Premakni v ozadje", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capImgGroup": "Skupina", "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniCustomTable": "Vstavi tabelo po more", "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniEditDropCap": "Nastavitve spustnega pokrovčka", "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniEditFooter": "Uredi nogo", @@ -1313,6 +1654,8 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.textColumnsThree": "Three", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textColumnsTwo": "Two", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textContPage": "Neprekinjena stran", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textDateControl": "Datum", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textEditWatermark": "Vodni žig po meri", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textEvenPage": "Tudi stran", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textInMargin": "v Meji", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textInsColumnBreak": "Insert Column Break", @@ -1331,8 +1674,13 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.textNextPage": "Naslednja stran", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textNone": "nič", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textOddPage": "Čudna stran", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.textPageMarginsCustom": "Custom margins", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textPageMarginsCustom": "Robovi po meri", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textPageSizeCustom": "Custom Page Size", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textPictureControl": "Slika", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textPlainControl": "Golo besedilo", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textPortrait": "Portret", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textRemWatermark": "Odstrani vodni žig", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textRichControl": "Golo besedilo", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textRight": "Right: ", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textStrikeout": "Prečrtaj", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textStyleMenuDelete": "Delete style", @@ -1343,6 +1691,13 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.textStyleMenuUpdate": "Update from selection", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textSubscript": "Pripis", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textSuperscript": "Nadpis", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabCollaboration": "Skupinsko delo", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabFile": "Datoteka", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabHome": "Domov", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabInsert": "Vstavi", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabLayout": "Postavitev", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabProtect": "Zaščita", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabReview": "Pregled", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTitleError": "Napaka", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textToCurrent": "Do trenutnega položaja", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTop": "Top: ", @@ -1352,6 +1707,8 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipAlignLeft": "Poravnaj levo", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipAlignRight": "Poravnaj desno", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipBack": "Nazaj", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipBlankPage": "Vstavi prazno stran", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipChangeChart": "Spremeni vrsto razpredelnice", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipClearStyle": "Počisti stil", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipColorSchemas": "Spremeni barvno shemo", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipColumns": "Insert columns", @@ -1362,7 +1719,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipDropCap": "Vstavi spustno kapo", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipEditHeader": "Uredi glavo ali nogo", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipFontColor": "Barva pisave", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipFontName": "Ime pisave", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipFontName": "Pisava", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipFontSize": "Velikost pisave", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipHighlightColor": "Označi barvo", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipIncFont": "Prirastek velikosti pisave", @@ -1372,6 +1729,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertImage": "Vstavi sliko", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertNum": "Vstavi številko strani", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertShape": "Vstavi samodejno obliko", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertSymbol": "Vstavi simbol", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertTable": "Vstavi tabelo", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertText": "Vstavi besedilo", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipLineSpace": "Razmik črt odstavka", @@ -1390,9 +1748,11 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipRedo": "Ponovite", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipSave": "Shrani", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipSaveCoauth": "Shranite svoje spremembe, da jih drugi uporabniki lahko vidijo.", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipSendBackward": "Premakni v ozadje", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipShowHiddenChars": "Nenatisljivi znaki", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipSynchronize": "Dokument je spremenil drug uporabnik. Prosim pritisnite za shranjevanje svojih sprememb in osvežitev posodobitev.", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipUndo": "Razveljavi", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipWatermark": "Uredi vodni žig", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme1": "Pisarna", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme10": "Mediana", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme11": "Metro", @@ -1413,5 +1773,25 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme6": "Avla", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme7": "Kapital", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme8": "Tok", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme9": "Livarna" + "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme9": "Livarna", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textBold": "Krepko", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textColor": "Barva besedila", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textDiagonal": "Diagonala", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textFont": "Ime pisave", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textFromFile": "Iz datoteke", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textFromStorage": "Iz shrambe", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textFromUrl": "z URL naslova", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textHor": "Horizontalen", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textImageW": "Slika vodnega žiga", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textItalic": "Poševno", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textLanguage": "Jezik", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textLayout": "Postavitev", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textNewColor": "Dodaj lastno barvo", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textNone": "Nič", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textSelect": "Izberi sliko", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textText": "Besedilo", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textTextW": "Besedilo vodnega žiga", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textTitle": "Nastavitve vodnega žiga", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.tipFontName": "Ime pisave", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.tipFontSize": "Velikost pisave" } \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/sv.json b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/sv.json index 07fe6b071..c68b8c9e0 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/sv.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/sv.json @@ -110,6 +110,7 @@ "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortTuesday": "Tis", "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortWednesday": "Ons", "Common.UI.Calendar.textYears": "År", + "Common.UI.ColorButton.textNewColor": "Lägg till ny egen färg", "Common.UI.ComboBorderSize.txtNoBorders": "Inga ramar", "Common.UI.ComboBorderSizeEditable.txtNoBorders": "Inga ramar", "Common.UI.ComboDataView.emptyComboText": "Ingen stil", @@ -321,6 +322,8 @@ "Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textCancel": "Avbryt", "Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textClose": "Stäng", "Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textEdit": "OK", + "Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textMention": "+omnämnande ger åtkomst till dokumentet och skickar ett e-postmeddelande", + "Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textMentionNotify": "+omnämning meddelar användaren via e-post", "Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textOpenAgain": "Öppna igen", "Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textReply": "Svara", "Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textResolve": "Lös", @@ -380,6 +383,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.errorAccessDeny": "Du försöker utföra en åtgärd som du inte har rättighet till.
    Vänligen kontakta din systemadministratör.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorBadImageUrl": "Bildens URL är felaktig", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorCoAuthoringDisconnect": "Serveranslutning förlorade. Dokumentet kan inte redigeras just nu.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorCompare": "Funktionen jämför dokument är inte tillgänglig vid samredigering.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorConnectToServer": "Dokumentet kunde inte sparas. Kontrollera anslutningsinställningarna eller kontakta administratören
    När du klickar på \"OK\"-knappen, kommer du att bli ombedd att ladda ner dokumentet", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorDatabaseConnection": "Externt fel.
    Databasen gick inte att koppla. Kontakta support om felet består.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorDataEncrypted": "Krypterade ändringar har tagits emot, de kan inte avkodas.", @@ -448,6 +452,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.textClose": "Stäng", "DE.Controllers.Main.textCloseTip": "Klicka för att stänga tipset", "DE.Controllers.Main.textContactUs": "Kontakta säljare", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textLearnMore": "Lär dig mer", "DE.Controllers.Main.textLoadingDocument": "Laddar dokument", "DE.Controllers.Main.textNoLicenseTitle": "ONLYOFFICE anslutningsbegränsning", "DE.Controllers.Main.textPaidFeature": "Betald funktion", @@ -469,6 +474,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.txtCurrentDocument": "Aktuellt dokument", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtDiagramTitle": "Diagram titel", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtEditingMode": "Ställ in redigeringsläge", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtEnterDate": "Ange ett datum.", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtErrorLoadHistory": "Gick inte ladda historik", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtEvenPage": "Jämn sida", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtFiguredArrows": "Figurpilar", @@ -479,10 +485,13 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.txtHyperlink": "Hyperlänk", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtIndTooLarge": "Index för stort", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtLines": "Rader", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtMainDocOnly": "Fel! Endast huvuddokument.", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtMath": "Matte", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtNeedSynchronize": "Du har uppdateringar", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtNoTableOfContents": "Inga innehållsförteckningar hittades.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtNoText": "Fel! Ingen text med angiven stil i dokumentet.", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtNotInTable": "Är inte i tabellen", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtNotValidBookmark": "Fel! Inte en giltig självreferens för bokmärke.", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtOddPage": "Ojämn sida", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtOnPage": "på sida", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtRectangles": "Rektanglar", @@ -979,6 +988,7 @@ "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textColon": "kolon", "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textDelete": "Radera etiketten", "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textEquation": "Ekvation", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textExamples": "Exempel: Tabell 2-A, Bild 1.IV", "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textFigure": "Figur", "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textHyphen": "bindestreck", "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textInsert": "Infoga", @@ -1036,7 +1046,6 @@ "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textLang": "Språk", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textLock": "Låsning", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textName": "Titel", - "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textNewColor": "Lägg till ny egen färg", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textNone": "Ingen", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textShowAs": "Visa som", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textSystemColor": "System", @@ -1044,12 +1053,17 @@ "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textTitle": "Inställningar för innehållskontroll", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textUp": "Upp", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textValue": "Värde", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.tipChange": "Ändra symbol", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.txtLockDelete": "Innehållskontroll kan inte raderas", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.txtLockEdit": "Innehållet kan inte redigeras", "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textColumns": "Antal kolumner", "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textSeparator": "Kolumndelare", "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textSpacing": "Avstånd mellan kolumner", "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textTitle": "Kolumner", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textDefault": "Ange som standard", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textFormat": "Format", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textLang": "Språk", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.txtTitle": "Datum & Tid", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.aboveText": "Ovan", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.addCommentText": "Lägg till kommentar", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.advancedFrameText": "Ram avancerade inställningar", @@ -1288,7 +1302,6 @@ "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textLeft": "Vänster", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textMargin": "Marginal", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textMove": "Flytta med text", - "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "Lägg till ny egen färg", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textNone": "Ingen", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textPage": "Sida", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textParagraph": "Stycke", @@ -1527,6 +1540,7 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textShape": "Form inställningar", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textSize": "Storlek", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textSquare": "Fyrkant", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTextBox": "Textruta", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTitle": "Bild - avancerade inställningar", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTitleChart": "Diagram - avancerade inställningar", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTitleShape": "Form - avancerad inställning", @@ -1579,7 +1593,6 @@ "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textCenter": "Centrera", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textLeft": "Vänster", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textLevel": "Nivå", - "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textNewColor": "Lägg till ny egen färg", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textPreview": "Förhandsgranska", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textRight": "Höger", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtAlign": "Justering", @@ -1696,7 +1709,6 @@ "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textAuto": "Flera", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textBackColor": "Bakgrundsfärg", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textExact": "Exakt", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textNewColor": "Lägg till ny egen färg", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.txtAutoText": "auto", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.noTabs": "De angivna flikarna kommer att visas i det här fältet", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strAllCaps": "Alla versaler", @@ -1746,7 +1758,6 @@ "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textLeader": "Ledare", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textLeft": "Vänster", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textLevel": "Nivå", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "Lägg till ny egen färg", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textNone": "Ingen", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textNoneSpecial": "(inget)", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textPosition": "Position", @@ -1807,7 +1818,6 @@ "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textHintFlipV": "Vänd vertikalt", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textImageTexture": "Bild eller mönster", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textLinear": "Linjär", - "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textNewColor": "Lägg till ny egen färg", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textNoFill": "Ingen fyllning", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textPatternFill": "Mönster", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textRadial": "Radiell", @@ -1922,7 +1932,6 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettings.textHeader": "Sidhuvud", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textHeight": "Höjd", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textLast": "Senaste", - "DE.Views.TableSettings.textNewColor": "Lägg till ny egen färg", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textRows": "Rader", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textSelectBorders": "Välj ramar du vill ändra tillämpningen av stil valt ovan", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textTemplate": "Välj från mall", @@ -1977,7 +1986,6 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMargins": "Cell marginal", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMeasure": "Mäta i", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMove": "Flytta objektet med texten", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "Lägg till ny egen färg", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOnlyCells": "För valda celler enbart", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOptions": "Alternativ", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOverlap": "Tillåt överlappning", @@ -2030,7 +2038,6 @@ "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textGradient": "Fyllning", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textGradientFill": "Fyllning", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textLinear": "Linjär", - "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textNewColor": "Lägg till ny egen färg", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textNoFill": "Ingen fyllning", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textRadial": "Radiell", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textSelectTexture": "Välj", @@ -2042,6 +2049,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnBlankPage": "Tom sida", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnColumns": "Kolumner", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnComment": "Kommentar", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnDateTime": "Datum & Tid", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsChart": "Diagram", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsControls": "Innehållskontroller", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsDropcap": "Anfang", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/tr.json b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/tr.json index 022bf5589..c46cb0664 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/tr.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/tr.json @@ -949,7 +949,6 @@ "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textLeft": "Sol", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textMargin": "Kenar boşluğu", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textMove": "Metinle taşı", - "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "Yeni Özel Renk Ekle", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textNone": "hiçbiri", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textPage": "Sayfa", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textParagraph": "Paragraf", @@ -1253,7 +1252,6 @@ "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textAuto": "Çoklu", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textBackColor": "Arka plan rengi", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textExact": "Tam olarak", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textNewColor": "Yeni Özel Renk Ekle", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.txtAutoText": "Otomatik", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.noTabs": "Belirtilen sekmeler bu alanda görünecektir", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strAllCaps": "Tüm başlıklar", @@ -1285,7 +1283,6 @@ "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textEffects": "Efektler", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textLeader": "Lider", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textLeft": "Sol", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "Yeni Özel Renk Ekle", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textPosition": "Pozisyon", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textRemove": "Kaldır", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textRemoveAll": "Hepsini Kaldır", @@ -1338,7 +1335,6 @@ "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textHint90": "Döndür 90° Saatyönü", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textImageTexture": "Resim yada Doldurma Deseni", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textLinear": "Doğrusal", - "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textNewColor": "Yeni Özel Renk Ekle", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textNoFill": "Dolgu Yok", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textPatternFill": "Desen", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textRadial": "Radyal", @@ -1413,7 +1409,6 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettings.textFirst": "ilk", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textHeader": "Üst Başlık", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textLast": "Son", - "DE.Views.TableSettings.textNewColor": "Yeni Özel Renk Ekle", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textRows": "Satırlar", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textSelectBorders": "Yukarıda seçilen stili uygulayarak değiştirmek istediğiniz sınırları seçin", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textTemplate": "Şablondan Seç", @@ -1462,7 +1457,6 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMargins": "Hücre Kenar Boşluğu", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMeasure": "Birim seç", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMove": "Objeyi metinle taşı", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "Yeni Özel Renk Ekle", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOnlyCells": "Sadece seçilen hücreler için", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOptions": "Seçenekler", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOverlap": "Çakışmaya izin ver", @@ -1515,7 +1509,6 @@ "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textGradient": "Gradient", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textGradientFill": "Gradient Fill", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textLinear": "Linear", - "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textNewColor": "Add New Custom Color", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textNoFill": "No Fill", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textRadial": "Radial", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textSelectTexture": "Select", @@ -1580,6 +1573,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.textMarginsUsNormal": "US Normal", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textMarginsWide": "Wide", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textNewColor": "Yeni Özel Renk Ekle", + "Common.UI.ColorButton.textNewColor": "Yeni Özel Renk Ekle", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textNextPage": "Sonraki Sayfa", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textNone": "hiçbiri", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textOddPage": "Tek Sayfa", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/uk.json b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/uk.json index ca27332e4..01f3661b7 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/uk.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/uk.json @@ -13,27 +13,27 @@ "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textAtLeast": "принаймн", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textAuto": "Авто", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textBaseline": "Базова лінія", - "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textBold": "Жирний", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textBold": "Грубий", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textBreakBefore": "розрив сторінки", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textCaps": "Усі великі", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textCenter": "Вирівняти центр", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textChart": "Діаграма", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textColor": "Колір шрифту", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textContextual": "Не додавайте інтервал між абзацами того ж стилю", - "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textDeleted": "Видалено:", - "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textDStrikeout": "Подвійне викреслення", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textDeleted": "Вилучено:", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textDStrikeout": "Подвійне перекреслення", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textEquation": "Рівняння", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textExact": "Точно", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textFirstLine": "Перша лінія", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textFontSize": "Розмір шрифта", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textFormatted": "Форматований", - "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textHighlight": "Виділити колір", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textHighlight": "Колір позначення", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textImage": "Зображення", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textIndentLeft": "Відступ зліва", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textIndentRight": "Відступ зправа", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textInserted": "Вставлено", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textItalic": "Курсив", - "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textJustify": "Вирівняти обгрунтування", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textJustify": "Вирівняти по ширині", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textKeepLines": "Тримайте лінії разом", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textKeepNext": "Зберегати з текстом", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textLeft": "Вирівняти зліва", @@ -46,18 +46,18 @@ "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textNot": "Не", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textNoWidow": "Немає лишнього контролю", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textNum": "Зміна нумерації", - "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textParaDeleted": "Параграф видалено", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textParaDeleted": "Параграф вилучено", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textParaFormatted": "Абзац форматований", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textParaInserted": "Вставлений абзац", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textPosition": "Посада", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textRight": "Вирівняти справа", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textShape": "Форма", - "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textShd": "Колір фону", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textShd": "Колір тла", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textSmallCaps": "Зменшені великі", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textSpacing": "інтервал", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textSpacingAfter": "Інтервал після", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textSpacingBefore": "інтервал перед", - "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textStrikeout": "Викреслити", + "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textStrikeout": "Перекреслений", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textSubScript": "Підрядковий", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textSuperScript": "Надрядковий", "Common.Controllers.ReviewChanges.textTabs": "Змінити вкладки", @@ -71,6 +71,7 @@ "Common.define.chartData.textPoint": "XY (розсіювання)", "Common.define.chartData.textStock": "Запас", "Common.define.chartData.textSurface": "Поверхня", + "Common.UI.ColorButton.textNewColor": "Додати новий власний колір", "Common.UI.ComboBorderSize.txtNoBorders": "Немає кордонів", "Common.UI.ComboBorderSizeEditable.txtNoBorders": "Немає кордонів", "Common.UI.ComboDataView.emptyComboText": "Немає стилів", @@ -93,11 +94,11 @@ "Common.UI.SynchronizeTip.textDontShow": "Не показувати це повідомлення знову", "Common.UI.SynchronizeTip.textSynchronize": "Документ був змінений іншим користувачем.
    Будь ласка, натисніть, щоб зберегти зміни та завантажити оновлення.", "Common.UI.ThemeColorPalette.textStandartColors": "Стандартні кольори", - "Common.UI.ThemeColorPalette.textThemeColors": "Кольорові теми", + "Common.UI.ThemeColorPalette.textThemeColors": "Колірна тема", "Common.UI.Window.cancelButtonText": "Скасувати", "Common.UI.Window.closeButtonText": "Закрити", "Common.UI.Window.noButtonText": "Немає", - "Common.UI.Window.okButtonText": "Ок", + "Common.UI.Window.okButtonText": "Гаразд", "Common.UI.Window.textConfirmation": "Підтвердження видалення", "Common.UI.Window.textDontShow": "Не показувати це повідомлення знову", "Common.UI.Window.textError": "Помилка", @@ -109,7 +110,7 @@ "Common.Views.About.txtAddress": "адреса:", "Common.Views.About.txtLicensee": "ЛІЦЕНЗІЯ", "Common.Views.About.txtLicensor": "Ліцензіар", - "Common.Views.About.txtMail": "пошта:", + "Common.Views.About.txtMail": "ел.пошта:", "Common.Views.About.txtPoweredBy": "Під керуванням", "Common.Views.About.txtTel": "Тел.:", "Common.Views.About.txtVersion": "Версія", @@ -130,7 +131,7 @@ "Common.Views.Comments.textResolve": "Вирішити", "Common.Views.Comments.textResolved": "Вирішено", "Common.Views.CopyWarningDialog.textDontShow": "Не показувати це повідомлення знову", - "Common.Views.CopyWarningDialog.textMsg": "Копіювання, вирізання та вставлення дій за допомогою кнопок панелі інструментів редактора та дій контекстного меню буде виконуватися тільки на цій вкладці редактора.

    Щоб скопіювати або вставити до або з додатків за межами вкладки редактора, використовуйте такі комбінації клавіш:", + "Common.Views.CopyWarningDialog.textMsg": "Копіювання, вирізання та вставлення дій за допомогою кнопок панелі інструментів редактора та дій контекстного меню буде виконуватися тільки на цій вкладці редактора.

    Щоб скопіювати або вставити до або із застосунку за межами вкладки редактора, використовуйте такі комбінації клавіш:", "Common.Views.CopyWarningDialog.textTitle": "Копіювати, вирізати та вставити дії", "Common.Views.CopyWarningDialog.textToCopy": "Для копії", "Common.Views.CopyWarningDialog.textToCut": "для вирізання", @@ -142,17 +143,24 @@ "Common.Views.ExternalDiagramEditor.textTitle": "редагування діаграми", "Common.Views.ExternalMergeEditor.textClose": "Закрити", "Common.Views.ExternalMergeEditor.textSave": "Зберегти і вийти", - "Common.Views.ExternalMergeEditor.textTitle": "Одержувачі поштового з'єднання", + "Common.Views.ExternalMergeEditor.textTitle": "Отримувачі ел.поштою", "Common.Views.Header.labelCoUsersDescr": "В даний час документ редагується кількома користувачами.", + "Common.Views.Header.textAdvSettings": "Додаткові налаштування", "Common.Views.Header.textBack": "Перейти до документів", + "Common.Views.Header.textCompactView": "Сховати панель інструментів", + "Common.Views.Header.textHideLines": "Сховати лінійки", + "Common.Views.Header.textHideStatusBar": "Сховати панель стану", "Common.Views.Header.textSaveBegin": "Збереження ...", "Common.Views.Header.textSaveChanged": "Модифікований", "Common.Views.Header.textSaveEnd": "Усі зміни збережено", "Common.Views.Header.textSaveExpander": "Усі зміни збережено", + "Common.Views.Header.textZoom": "Масштаб", "Common.Views.Header.tipAccessRights": "Управління правами доступу до документів", - "Common.Views.Header.tipDownload": "Завантажити файл", + "Common.Views.Header.tipDownload": "Звантажити файл", "Common.Views.Header.tipGoEdit": "Редагувати поточний файл", "Common.Views.Header.tipPrint": "Роздрукувати файл", + "Common.Views.Header.tipRedo": "Повторити", + "Common.Views.Header.tipUndo": "Скасувати", "Common.Views.Header.tipViewSettings": "Налаштування перегляду", "Common.Views.Header.tipViewUsers": "Переглядайте користувачів та керуйте правами доступу до документів", "Common.Views.Header.txtAccessRights": "Змінити права доступу", @@ -172,8 +180,9 @@ "Common.Views.InsertTableDialog.txtMinText": "Мінімальне значення для цього поля - {0}.", "Common.Views.InsertTableDialog.txtRows": "Номер рядків", "Common.Views.InsertTableDialog.txtTitle": "Розмір таблиці", - "Common.Views.InsertTableDialog.txtTitleSplit": "Розщеплені клітини", + "Common.Views.InsertTableDialog.txtTitleSplit": "Розділити комірки", "Common.Views.LanguageDialog.labelSelect": "Виберіть мову документа", + "Common.Views.OpenDialog.closeButtonText": "Закрити файл", "Common.Views.OpenDialog.txtEncoding": "Кодування", "Common.Views.OpenDialog.txtPassword": "Пароль", "Common.Views.OpenDialog.txtTitle": "Виберіть параметри% 1", @@ -184,14 +193,21 @@ "Common.Views.Plugins.textLoading": "Завантаження", "Common.Views.Plugins.textStart": "Початок", "Common.Views.Plugins.textStop": "Зупинитись", + "Common.Views.Protection.txtAddPwd": "Додати пароль", + "Common.Views.Protection.txtInvisibleSignature": "Додати цифровий підпис", "Common.Views.RenameDialog.textName": "Ім'я файлу", "Common.Views.RenameDialog.txtInvalidName": "Ім'я файлу не може містити жодного з наступних символів:", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.hintNext": "До наступної зміни", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.hintPrev": "До попередньої зміни", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.mniSettings": "Налаштування порівняння", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipAcceptCurrent": "Прийняти поточну зміну", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipCoAuthMode": "Встановити режим спільного редагування", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipCommentRem": "Вилучити коментарі", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipCommentRemCurrent": "Вилучити поточні коментарі", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipCompare": "Порівняти поточний документ з іншим", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipRejectCurrent": "Відхилити поточну зміну", - "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipReview": "Відслідковувати зміни", - "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipReviewView": "Виберіть режим за вашим бажанням, в якому будуть відображатися зміни", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipReview": "Відстежувати зміни", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipReviewView": "Виберіть режим показу змін", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipSetDocLang": "Виберіть мову документу", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.tipSetSpelling": "Перевірка орфографії", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtAccept": "Прийняти", @@ -199,11 +215,18 @@ "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtAcceptChanges": "Прийняти зміни", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtAcceptCurrent": "Прийняти поточну зміну", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtClose": "Закрити", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCoAuthMode": "Спільне редагування", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCommentRemAll": "Вилучити усі коментарі", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCommentRemCurrent": "Вилучити поточні коментарі", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCommentRemMy": "Вилучити мої коментарі", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCommentRemMyCurrent": "Вилучити мій поточний коментар", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCommentRemove": "Вилучити", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtCompare": "Порівняти", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtDocLang": "Мова", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtFinal": "Усі зміни прийняті (попередній перегляд)", - "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtFinalCap": "Фінальний", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtFinalCap": "Фіналізований", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtMarkup": "Усі зміни (редагування)", - "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtMarkupCap": "Зміни", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtMarkupCap": "Чернетка", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtNext": "Наступний", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtOriginal": "Усі зміни відхилено (попередній перегляд)", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtOriginalCap": "Початковий", @@ -213,8 +236,8 @@ "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtRejectChanges": "Відхилити зміни", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtRejectCurrent": "Відхилити поточну зміну", "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtSpelling": "Перевірка орфографії", - "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtTurnon": "Відслідковувати зміни", - "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtView": "Режим відображення", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtTurnon": "Відстежувати зміни", + "Common.Views.ReviewChanges.txtView": "Режим показу", "Common.Views.ReviewChangesDialog.textTitle": "Переглянути зміни", "Common.Views.ReviewChangesDialog.txtAccept": "Прийняти", "Common.Views.ReviewChangesDialog.txtAcceptAll": "Прийняти усі зміни", @@ -224,7 +247,16 @@ "Common.Views.ReviewChangesDialog.txtReject": "Відхилити", "Common.Views.ReviewChangesDialog.txtRejectAll": "Відхилити усі зміни", "Common.Views.ReviewChangesDialog.txtRejectCurrent": "Відхилити поточну зміну", - "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.leavePageText": "Всі незбережені зміни в цьому документі будуть втрачені.
    Натисніть \"Скасувати\", потім \"Зберегти\", щоб зберегти їх. Натисніть \"OK\", щоб відхилити всі незбережені зміни.", + "Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textAdd": "Додати", + "Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textAddReply": "Додати відповідь", + "Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textCancel": "Скасувати", + "Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textClose": "Закрити", + "Common.Views.ReviewPopover.textEdit": "Гаразд", + "Common.Views.SignDialog.textBold": "Грубий", + "Common.Views.SignDialog.textItalic": "Курсив", + "Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textAllowComment": "Дозволити автору додавати коментар у вікні діалогу додавання підпису", + "Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textInfoEmail": "Ел.пошта", + "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.leavePageText": "Усі незбережені зміни в цьому документі будуть втрачені.
    Клацніть \"Скасувати\", потім \"Зберегти\", щоб зберегти їх. Натисніть \"Гаразд\", щоб відхилити усі незбережені зміни.", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.newDocumentTitle": "Документ без назви", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.notcriticalErrorTitle": "Застереження", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.requestEditRightsText": "Запит на права редагування ...", @@ -232,25 +264,30 @@ "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.textNoTextFound": "Не вдалося знайти дані, які ви шукали. Будь ласка, налаштуйте параметри пошуку.", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.textReplaceSkipped": "Заміна була зроблена. {0} угоди були пропущені.", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.textReplaceSuccess": "Пошук виконано. Угоди замінено: {0}", + "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.txtCompatible": "Документ буде збережено у новому форматі. Це дозволить використовувати усі можливості редактора, проте це може вплинути на макет документу.
    Використовуйте параметр \"Сумісність\" додаткових налаштувань, якщо ви хочете забезпечити сумісність зі старими версіями MS Word.", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.warnDownloadAs": "Якщо ви продовжите збереження в цьому форматі, всі функції, окрім тексту, буде втрачено.
    Ви впевнені, що хочете продовжити?", "DE.Controllers.Main.applyChangesTextText": "Завантаження змін...", "DE.Controllers.Main.applyChangesTitleText": "Завантаження змін", "DE.Controllers.Main.convertationTimeoutText": "Термін переходу перевищено.", - "DE.Controllers.Main.criticalErrorExtText": "Натисніть \"OK\", щоб повернутися до списку документів.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.criticalErrorExtText": "Клацніть \"Гаразд\", щоб повернутися до списку документів.", "DE.Controllers.Main.criticalErrorTitle": "Помилка", - "DE.Controllers.Main.downloadErrorText": "Завантаження не вдалося", - "DE.Controllers.Main.downloadMergeText": "Завантаження...", - "DE.Controllers.Main.downloadMergeTitle": "Завантаження", + "DE.Controllers.Main.downloadErrorText": "Звантаження не вдалося", + "DE.Controllers.Main.downloadMergeText": "Звантаження...", + "DE.Controllers.Main.downloadMergeTitle": "Звантаження", "DE.Controllers.Main.downloadTextText": "Завантаження документу...", - "DE.Controllers.Main.downloadTitleText": "Завантаження документу", + "DE.Controllers.Main.downloadTitleText": "Звантаження документу", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorAccessDeny": "Ви намагаєтеся виконати дію, у якої у вас немає прав.
    Будь ласка, зв'яжіться з адміністратором вашого Сервера документів.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorBadImageUrl": "URL-адреса зображення невірна", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorCoAuthoringDisconnect": "З'єднання з сервером втрачено. Документ не можна редагувати прямо зараз.", - "DE.Controllers.Main.errorConnectToServer": "Не вдалося зберегти документ. Будь ласка, перевірте налаштування з'єднання або зверніться до свого адміністратора.
    Після натискання кнопки «ОК» вам буде запропоновано завантажити документ.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorCompare": "Функція порівняння документів недоступна під час спільного редагування.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorConnectToServer": "Не вдалося зберегти документ. Будь ласка, перевірте налаштування з'єднання або сконтактуйте з адміністратором.
    Після натискання на кнопку \"Гаразд\" ви зможете звантажити документ.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorDatabaseConnection": "Зовнішня помилка.
    Помилка підключення до бази даних. Будь ласка, зв'яжіться зі службою підтримки, якщо помилка не зникне.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorDataRange": "Неправильний діапазон даних.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorDefaultMessage": "Код помилки: %1 ", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorDirectUrl": "Будь ласка, перевірте посилання на документ.
    Це посилання має бути прямим лінком на файл для звантаження.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorEditingDownloadas": "Помилка під час роботи з документом.
    Будь ласка, скористайтеся пунктом \"Завантажити як...\" для збереження резервної копії на ваш локальний диск.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorFilePassProtect": "Документ захищений паролем і його неможливо відкрити.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorForceSave": "Помилка під час збереження файлу. Будь ласка, скористайтеся пунктом \"Звантажити як\" для збереження файлу на ваш диск або спробуйте пізніше.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorKeyEncrypt": "Невідомий дескриптор ключа", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorKeyExpire": "Ключовий дескриптор закінчився", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorMailMergeLoadFile": "Завантаження не вдалося", @@ -261,8 +298,8 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.errorSessionIdle": "Цей документ не редагувався протягом тривалого часу. Перезавантажте сторінку.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorSessionToken": "З'єднання з сервером було перервано. Перезавантажте сторінку", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorStockChart": "Невірний порядок рядків. Щоб побудувати фондову діаграму, помістіть дані на аркуші в наступному порядку: ціна відкриття, максимальна ціна, мінімальна ціна, ціна закриття.", - "DE.Controllers.Main.errorToken": "Токен безпеки документа не правильно сформовано.
    Будь ласка, зв'яжіться з адміністратором вашого Сервера документів.", - "DE.Controllers.Main.errorTokenExpire": "Термін дії токену безпеки документа закінчився.
    Будь ласка, зв'яжіться зі своїм адміністратором сервера документів.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorToken": "Токен безпеки документа не правильно сформовано.
    Будь ласка, сконтактуйте з адміністратором вашого сервера документів.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorTokenExpire": "Термін дії токену безпеки документа закінчився.
    Будь ласка, сконтактуйте з адміністратором сервера документів.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorUpdateVersion": "Версія файлу була змінена. Сторінка буде перезавантажена.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorUserDrop": "На даний момент файл не доступний.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorUsersExceed": "Перевищено кількість користувачів, дозволених планом ціноутворення", @@ -302,13 +339,14 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.textAnonymous": "Гість", "DE.Controllers.Main.textBuyNow": "Відвідати сайт", "DE.Controllers.Main.textChangesSaved": "Усі зміни збережено", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textClose": "Закрити", "DE.Controllers.Main.textCloseTip": "Натисніть, щоб закрити підказку", "DE.Controllers.Main.textContactUs": "Зв'язатися з відділом продажів", "DE.Controllers.Main.textLoadingDocument": "Завантаження документа", "DE.Controllers.Main.textNoLicenseTitle": "ONLYOFFICE відкрита версія", "DE.Controllers.Main.textShape": "Форма", "DE.Controllers.Main.textStrict": "суворий режим", - "DE.Controllers.Main.textTryUndoRedo": "Функції Undo / Redo відключені для режиму швидкого редагування.
    Натисніть кнопку \"Суворий режим\", щоб перейти до режиму суворого редагування, щоб редагувати файл без втручання інших користувачів та відправляти зміни лише після збереження. Ви можете переключатися між режимами спільного редагування за допомогою редактора Додаткові параметри.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textTryUndoRedo": "Функції Скасування/Повторення дій вимкнено у режимі швидкого спільного редагування.
    Клацніть на кнопку \"Суворий режим\", щоб перейти до режиму суворого спільного редагування, який означатиме, що інші користувачі зможуть внести правки після того, яки ви збережете документ. Між режимами спільного редагування можна перемикатися у \"Додаткових параметрах\" редактора.", "DE.Controllers.Main.titleLicenseExp": "Термін дії ліцензії закінчився", "DE.Controllers.Main.titleServerVersion": "Редактор оновлено", "DE.Controllers.Main.titleUpdateVersion": "Версію змінено", @@ -317,16 +355,26 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.txtButtons": "Кнопки", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtCallouts": "Виноски", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtCharts": "Діаграми", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtCurrentDocument": "Поточний документ", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtDiagramTitle": "Назва діграми", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtEditingMode": "Встановити режим редагування ...", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtErrorLoadHistory": "Помилка завантаження історії", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtFiguredArrows": "Фігурні стрілки", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtHyperlink": "Гіперпосилання", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtLines": "Рядки", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtMath": "Математика", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtNeedSynchronize": "У вас є оновлення", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtNoTableOfContents": "У документі відсутні заголовки. Застосуйте стиль заголовків до тексту, щоби він з'явився у змісті.", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtRectangles": "Прямокутники", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtSeries": "Серії", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_actionButtonHome": "Кнопка Домівка", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_arc": "Дуга", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_cloud": "Хмара", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_corner": "Кут", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_cube": "Куб", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtShape_spline": "Крива", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtStarsRibbons": "Зірки та стрічки", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_footnote_text": "Текст виноски", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_Heading_1": "Заголовок 1", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_Heading_2": "Заголовок 2", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_Heading_3": "Заголовок 3", @@ -343,25 +391,28 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_Quote": "Цитувати", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_Subtitle": "Субтитри", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtStyle_Title": "Заголовок", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtTableOfContents": "Зміст", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtUndefBookmark": "Невизначена закладка", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtXAxis": "X Ось", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtYAxis": "Y ось", "DE.Controllers.Main.unknownErrorText": "Невідома помилка.", "DE.Controllers.Main.unsupportedBrowserErrorText": "Ваш браузер не підтримується", + "DE.Controllers.Main.uploadDocFileCountMessage": "Жодного документу не завантажено.", "DE.Controllers.Main.uploadImageExtMessage": "Невідомий формат зображення.", - "DE.Controllers.Main.uploadImageFileCountMessage": "Не завантажено жодного зображення.", + "DE.Controllers.Main.uploadImageFileCountMessage": "Жодного зображення не завантажено.", "DE.Controllers.Main.uploadImageSizeMessage": "Максимальний розмір зображення перевищено.", "DE.Controllers.Main.uploadImageTextText": "Завантаження зображення...", "DE.Controllers.Main.uploadImageTitleText": "Завантаження зображення", - "DE.Controllers.Main.warnBrowserIE9": "Програма має низькі можливості для IE9. Використовувати IE10 або вище", + "DE.Controllers.Main.warnBrowserIE9": "Застосунок має низьку ефективність при роботі з-під IE9. Використовувати IE10 або вище", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnBrowserZoom": "Налаштування масштабу вашого браузера не підтримується повністю. Змініть стандартний масштаб, натиснувши Ctrl + 0.", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnLicenseExp": "Термін дії вашої ліцензії минув.
    Будь ласка, оновіть свою ліцензію та оновіть сторінку.", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnNoLicense": "Ви використовуєте відкриту версію %1. Ця версія має обмеження для одночасного підключення до сервера документів (20 підключень за один раз).
    Якщо вам потрібно більше, подумайте про придбання комерційної ліцензії.", "DE.Controllers.Main.warnProcessRightsChange": "Вам відмовлено у наданні права редагувати файл.", "DE.Controllers.Statusbar.textHasChanges": "Нові зміни були відстежені", "DE.Controllers.Statusbar.textTrackChanges": "Документ відкривається за допомогою режиму відстеження змін", - "DE.Controllers.Statusbar.tipReview": "Відслідковувати зміни", + "DE.Controllers.Statusbar.tipReview": "Відстежувати зміни", "DE.Controllers.Statusbar.zoomText": "Збільшити {0}%", - "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.confirmAddFontName": "Шрифт, який ви збираєтеся зберегти, недоступний на поточному пристрої.
    Текстовий стиль відображатиметься за допомогою одного з системних шрифтів, збережений шрифт буде використовуватися, коли він буде доступний.
    Ви хочете продовжити ?", + "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.confirmAddFontName": "Шрифт, який ви збираєтеся зберегти, недоступний на поточному пристрої.
    Стиль тексту відображатиметься за допомогою одного з системних шрифтів, збережений шрифт буде використовуватися, коли він стане доступний.
    Продовжити?", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.notcriticalErrorTitle": "Застереження", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.textAccent": "Акценти", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.textBracket": "дужки", @@ -696,6 +747,22 @@ "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_vdots": "Вертикальний Еліпсіс", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_xsi": "ксі", "DE.Controllers.Toolbar.txtSymbol_zeta": "Зета", + "DE.Controllers.Viewport.textFitPage": "За розміром сторінки", + "DE.Controllers.Viewport.textFitWidth": "По ширині", + "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textAdd": "Додати", + "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textBookmarkName": "Назва закладки", + "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textClose": "Закрити", + "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textCopy": "Копіювати", + "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textDelete": "Вилучити", + "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textGoto": "Перейти", + "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textHidden": "Приховані закладки", + "DE.Views.BookmarksDialog.textTitle": "Закладки", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textAdd": "Додати мітку", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textAfter": "Після", + "DE.Views.CaptionDialog.textDash": "тире", + "DE.Views.CellsAddDialog.textUp": "Над курсором", + "DE.Views.CellsRemoveDialog.textLeft": "Пересунути комірки ліворуч", + "DE.Views.CellsRemoveDialog.textTitle": "Вилучити комірки", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textAdvanced": "Показати додаткові налаштування", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textChartType": "Змінити тип діаграми", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.textEditData": "Редагувати дату", @@ -714,10 +781,20 @@ "DE.Views.ChartSettings.txtTight": "Тісно", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.txtTitle": "Діаграма", "DE.Views.ChartSettings.txtTopAndBottom": "Верх і низ", + "DE.Views.CompareSettingsDialog.textTitle": "Налаштування порівняння", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textAdd": "Додати", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textApplyAll": "Застосувати до всього", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textChange": "Редагувати", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textColor": "Колір", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textDelete": "Вилучити", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textDisplayName": "Ім'я для показу", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textFormat": "Показувати дату як", "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textColumns": "Номер стовпчиків", "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textSeparator": "Дільник колонки", "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textSpacing": "Розміщення між стовпцями", "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textTitle": "Колонки", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.confirmDefault": "Встановити типовий формат для {0}: \"{1}\"", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textDefault": "Встановити типовим", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.aboveText": "Вище", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.addCommentText": "Добавити коментар", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.advancedFrameText": "Рамка розширені налаштування", @@ -727,15 +804,15 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.alignmentText": "Вирівнювання", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.belowText": "Нижче", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.breakBeforeText": "Розрив сторінки перед", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.cellAlignText": "Вертикальне вирівнювання клітини", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.cellText": "Клітинка", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.cellAlignText": "Вертикальне вирівнювання комірки", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.cellText": "Комірка", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.centerText": "Центр", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.chartText": "Діаграма Розширені налаштування", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.columnText": "Колона", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.deleteColumnText": "Видалити колону", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.deleteRowText": "Видалити рядок", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.deleteTableText": "Видалити таблицю", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.deleteText": "Видалити", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.deleteColumnText": "Вилучити стовпчик", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.deleteRowText": "Вилучити рядок", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.deleteTableText": "Вилучити таблицю", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.deleteText": "Вилучити", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.direct270Text": "Повернути текст вгору", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.direct90Text": "Повернути текст вниз", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.directHText": "Горізонтальний", @@ -745,7 +822,7 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.editHeaderText": "Редагувати заголовок", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.editHyperlinkText": "Редагувати гіперпосилання", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.guestText": "Гість", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.hyperlinkText": "Гіперсилка", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.hyperlinkText": "Гіперпосилання", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.ignoreAllSpellText": "Ігнорувати все", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.ignoreSpellText": "Ігнорувати", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.imageText": "Зображення розширені налаштування", @@ -760,24 +837,25 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.langText": "Виберіть мову", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.leftText": "Лівий", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.loadSpellText": "Завантаження варіантів...", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.mergeCellsText": "Об'єднати клітинки", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.mergeCellsText": "Об'єднати комірки", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.moreText": "Більше варіантів...", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.noSpellVariantsText": "Немає варіантів", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.originalSizeText": "За замовчуванням", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.paragraphText": "Параграф", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.removeHyperlinkText": "Видалити гіперпосилання", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.removeHyperlinkText": "Вилучити гіперпосилання", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.rightText": "Право", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.rowText": "Рядок", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.saveStyleText": "Створити новий стиль", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.selectCellText": "Виберіть клітинку", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.selectCellText": "Виберіть комірку", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.selectColumnText": "Виберіть колонку", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.selectRowText": "Виберіть рядок", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.selectTableText": "Виберіть таблицю", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.selectText": "Обрати", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.shapeText": "Форма розширені налаштування", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.spellcheckText": "Перевірка орфографії", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.splitCellsText": "Розщеплені клітини...", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.splitCellTitleText": "Розщеплені клітини", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.splitCellsText": "Розділити комірки...", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.splitCellTitleText": "Розділити комірки", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.strDelete": "Вилучити підпис", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.styleText": "Форматування в стилі", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.tableText": "Таблиця", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textAlign": "Вирівняти", @@ -786,19 +864,30 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textArrangeBackward": "Відправити назад", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textArrangeForward": "Висувати", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textArrangeFront": "Перенести на передній план", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textCells": "Комірки", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textCopy": "Копіювати", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textCrop": "Обрізати", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textCropFit": "Вмістити", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textCut": "Вирізати", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textEditWrapBoundary": "Редагувати обтікання кордону", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textNextPage": "Наступна сторінка", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textPaste": "Вставити", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textPrevPage": "Попередня сторінка", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textRefreshField": "Оновити поле", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textRemove": "Вилучити", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textRemoveControl": "Вилучити контроль вмісту", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textShapeAlignBottom": "Вирівняти знизу", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textShapeAlignCenter": "Вирівняти центр", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textShapeAlignLeft": "Вирівняти зліва", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textShapeAlignMiddle": "Вирівняти посередині", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textShapeAlignRight": "Вирівняти справа", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textShapeAlignTop": "Вирівняти догори", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textTOC": "Зміст", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textTOCSettings": "Налаштування змісту", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textUndo": "Скасувати", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textUpdateAll": "Оновити всю таблицю", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textUpdatePages": "Оновити лише номери сторінок", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textUpdateTOC": "Оновити зміст", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textWrap": "Стиль упаковки", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.tipIsLocked": "Цей елемент в даний час редагує інший користувач.", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtAddBottom": "Додати нижню межу", @@ -816,13 +905,14 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtBottom": "Внизу", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtColumnAlign": "Вирівнювання колонки", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtDecreaseArg": "Зменшити розмір документу", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtDeleteArg": "Видалити аргумент", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtDeleteBreak": "видалити розрив", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtDeleteChars": "Видалити супутні символи", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtDeleteCharsAndSeparators": "Видалити окремі символи та розділювачі", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtDeleteEq": "Видалити рівняння", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtDeleteGroupChar": "Видалити символ", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtDeleteRadical": "Видалити радикал", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtDeleteArg": "Вилучити аргумент", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtDeleteBreak": "Вилучити ручний розрив", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtDeleteChars": "Вилучити супутні символи", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtDeleteCharsAndSeparators": "Вилучити окремі символи та розділювачі", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtDeleteEq": "Вилучити рівняння", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtDeleteGroupChar": "Вилучити символ", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtDeleteRadical": "Вилучити корінь", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtEmpty": "(Пусто)", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtFractionLinear": "Зміна до лінійної фракції", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtFractionSkewed": "Зміна перекошеної фракції", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtFractionStacked": "Зміна складеної фракції", @@ -833,7 +923,7 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtHideBottomLimit": "Сховати нижню межу", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtHideCloseBracket": "Сховати закриваючу дужку", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtHideDegree": "Сховати ступінь", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtHideHor": "Сховати горизонтальну лінію", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtHideHor": "Сховати горизонтальну лінійку", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtHideLB": "Сховати лівий нижній рядок", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtHideLeft": "Сховати лівий край", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtHideLT": "Сховати лівий верхній рядок", @@ -842,7 +932,7 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtHideRight": "Приховати праву межу", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtHideTop": "Приховати верхню межу", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtHideTopLimit": "Сховати верхню межу", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtHideVer": "Сховати вертикальну лінію", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtHideVer": "Сховати вертикальну лінійку", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtIncreaseArg": "Збільшити розмір аргументів", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtInFront": "Попереду", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtInline": "Вбудований", @@ -858,14 +948,15 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtMatchBrackets": "Відповідність дужок до висоти аргументів", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtMatrixAlign": "Вирівнювання матриці", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtOverbar": "Вставте текст", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtOverwriteCells": "Перезаписати комірки", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtPressLink": "Натисніть CTRL та натисніть посилання", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtRemFractionBar": "Видалити фракційну стрічку", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtRemLimit": "Видалити ліміт", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtRemoveAccentChar": "видалити наголоси", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtRemoveBar": "Видалити панель", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtRemScripts": "Видалити скрипти", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtRemSubscript": "Видалити підписку", - "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtRemSuperscript": "Видалити верхній індекс", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtRemLimit": "Вилучити обмеження", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtRemoveAccentChar": "Вилучити знак наголосу", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtRemoveBar": "Вилучити панель", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtRemScripts": "Вилучити скрипти", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtRemSubscript": "Вилучити нижній індекс", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtRemSuperscript": "Вилучити верхній індекс", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtScriptsAfter": "Рукописи після тексту", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtScriptsBefore": "Рукописи перед текстом", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.txtShowBottomLimit": "Показати нижню межу", @@ -890,8 +981,8 @@ "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textAlign": "Вирівнювання", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textAtLeast": "принаймн", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textAuto": "Авто", - "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textBackColor": "Колір фону", - "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textBorderColor": "Колір кордону", + "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textBackColor": "Колір тла", + "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textBorderColor": "Колір меж", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textBorderDesc": "Натисніть на діаграму або скористайтеся кнопками, щоб вибрати кордони", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textBorderWidth": "Розмір кордону", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textBottom": "Внизу", @@ -910,7 +1001,6 @@ "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textLeft": "Лівий", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textMargin": "Грань", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textMove": "Перемістити з текстом", - "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "Додати новий спеціальний колір", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textNone": "Жоден", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textPage": "Сторінка", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textParagraph": "Параграф", @@ -926,10 +1016,12 @@ "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textWidth": "Ширина", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.tipFontName": "Шрифт", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.txtNoBorders": "Немає кордонів", + "DE.Views.EditListItemDialog.textDisplayName": "Ім'я для показу", + "DE.Views.EditListItemDialog.textNameError": "Ім'я для показу не може бути порожнім", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnBackCaption": "Перейти до документів", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnCloseMenuCaption": "Закрити меню", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnCreateNewCaption": "Додати", - "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnDownloadCaption": "Завантажити як...", + "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnDownloadCaption": "Звантажити як...", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnHelpCaption": "Допомога...", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnHistoryCaption": "Історія версій", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnInfoCaption": "Інформація про документ...", @@ -940,21 +1032,25 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnRightsCaption": "Права доступу ...", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnSaveAsCaption": "Зберегти як", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnSaveCaption": "Зберегти", + "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnSaveCopyAsCaption": "Зберегти копію як...", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnSettingsCaption": "Розширені налаштування...", "DE.Views.FileMenu.btnToEditCaption": "Редагувати документ", - "DE.Views.FileMenu.textDownload": "Скачати", + "DE.Views.FileMenu.textDownload": "Звантажити", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.CreateNew.fromBlankText": "З бланку", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.CreateNew.fromTemplateText": "З шаблону", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.CreateNew.newDescriptionText": "Створіть новий порожній текстовий документ, який ви зможете стильувати та форматувати після його створення під час редагування. Або виберіть один із шаблонів, щоб запустити документ певного типу або мети, де деякі стилі вже були попередньо застосовані.", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.CreateNew.newDocumentText": "Новий текстовий документ", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.CreateNew.noTemplatesText": "Немає шаблонів", - "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtAppName": "Додаток", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.okButtonText": "Застосувати", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtAddAuthor": "Додати автора", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtAddText": "Додати текст", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtAppName": "Застосунок", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtAuthor": "Автор", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtBtnAccessRights": "Змінити права доступу", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtComment": "Коментар", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtCreated": "Створено", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtLoading": "Завантаження...", - "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtModifyBy": "Змінив", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtModifyBy": "Змінено", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtModifyDate": "Змінено", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtPages": "Сторінки", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtParagraphs": "Параграфи", @@ -965,6 +1061,7 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtSubject": "Тема", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtSymbols": "Символи", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtTitle": "Назва документу", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtUploaded": "Завантажено", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentInfo.txtWords": "Слова", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentRights.txtBtnAccessRights": "Змінити права доступу", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.DocumentRights.txtRights": "Особи, які мають права", @@ -972,20 +1069,20 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strAlignGuides": "Увімкніть посібники для вирівнювання", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strAutoRecover": "Увімкніть автозапуск", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strAutosave": "Увімкніть автоматичне збереження", - "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strCoAuthMode": "Режим спільного редагування", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strCoAuthMode": "Спільне редагування", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strCoAuthModeDescFast": "Інші користувачі побачать ваші зміни одразу", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strCoAuthModeDescStrict": "Вам потрібно буде прийняти зміни, перш ніж побачити їх", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strFast": "Швидко", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strFontRender": "Підказки шрифта", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strForcesave": "Завжди зберігати на сервері (в іншому випадку зберегти на сервері закритий документ)", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strInputMode": "Увімкніть ієрогліфи", - "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strLiveComment": "Увімкніть показ коментарів", - "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strResolvedComment": "Увімкніть відображення усунених зауважень", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strLiveComment": "Показувати коментарі", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strResolvedComment": "Показувати вирішені зауваження", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strShowChanges": "Зміни у співпраці в реальному часі", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strSpellCheckMode": "Увімкніть параметр перевірки орфографії", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strStrict": "Суворий", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strUnit": "Одиниця виміру", - "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strZoom": "Зменшити значення за замовчуванням", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strZoom": "Типовий масштаб", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.text10Minutes": "Кожні 10 хвилин", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.text30Minutes": "Кожні 30 хвилин", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.text5Minutes": "Кожні 5 хвилин", @@ -993,17 +1090,20 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textAlignGuides": "Посібники з вирівнювання", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textAutoRecover": "Автовідновлення", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textAutoSave": "Автозбереження", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textCompatible": "Сумісність", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textDisabled": "Заблокований", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textForceSave": "Зберегти на сервері", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textMinute": "Кожну хвилину", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textOldVersions": "Підтримка сумісності зі старими версіями MS Work при збереженні у форматі DOCX", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtAll": "Показати усе", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtCacheMode": "Типовий режим кешу", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtCm": "Сантиметр", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtFitPage": "За розміром сторінки", - "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtFitWidth": "Придатний до ширини", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtFitWidth": "По ширині", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtInch": "Дюйм", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtInput": "Альтернативний ввід", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtLast": "Переглянути останнє", - "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtLiveComment": "Дісплей коментування", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtLiveComment": "Показ коментарів", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtMac": "як OS X", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtNative": "Рідний", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtNone": "Не переглядувати нічого", @@ -1025,16 +1125,19 @@ "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textTopLeft": "Верх зліва", "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textTopRight": "Верх справа", "DE.Views.HyperlinkSettingsDialog.textDefault": "Виберіть текстовий фрагмент", - "DE.Views.HyperlinkSettingsDialog.textDisplay": "Дісплей", - "DE.Views.HyperlinkSettingsDialog.textTitle": "Налаштування гіперсилки", + "DE.Views.HyperlinkSettingsDialog.textDisplay": "Показ", + "DE.Views.HyperlinkSettingsDialog.textTitle": "Налаштування гіперпосилання", "DE.Views.HyperlinkSettingsDialog.textTooltip": "Текст ScreenTip", "DE.Views.HyperlinkSettingsDialog.textUrl": "З'єднатися з", + "DE.Views.HyperlinkSettingsDialog.txtBookmarks": "Закладки", "DE.Views.HyperlinkSettingsDialog.txtEmpty": "Це поле є обов'язковим", "DE.Views.HyperlinkSettingsDialog.txtNotUrl": "Це поле має бути URL-адресою у форматі \"http://www.example.com\"", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textAdvanced": "Показати додаткові налаштування", + "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textCrop": "Обрізати", + "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textCropFit": "Вмістити", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textEdit": "Редагувати", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textEditObject": "Редагувати об'єкт", - "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFitMargins": "За розміром кордонів", + "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFitMargins": "За розміром меж", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFromFile": "З файлу", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFromUrl": "З URL", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textHeight": "Висота", @@ -1061,6 +1164,7 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "Нахил", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textArrows": "Стрілки", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAspectRatio": "Блокування співвідношення сторін", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAutofit": "Автоматично", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBeginSize": "Початковий розмір", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBeginStyle": "Початок стилю", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBelow": "Нижче", @@ -1098,6 +1202,7 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textPositionPc": "Відносна позиція", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textRelative": "відносний до", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textRelativeWH": "Відносний", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textResizeFit": "Вмістити текст у фігурі", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textRight": "Право", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textRightMargin": "праве поле", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textRightOf": "праворуч від", @@ -1126,23 +1231,42 @@ "DE.Views.LeftMenu.tipAbout": "Про", "DE.Views.LeftMenu.tipChat": "Чат", "DE.Views.LeftMenu.tipComments": "Коментарі", + "DE.Views.LeftMenu.tipNavigation": "Структура", "DE.Views.LeftMenu.tipPlugins": "Плагіни", "DE.Views.LeftMenu.tipSearch": "Пошук", "DE.Views.LeftMenu.tipSupport": "Відгуки і підтримка", "DE.Views.LeftMenu.tipTitles": "Назви", "DE.Views.LeftMenu.txtDeveloper": "Режим розробника", + "DE.Views.Links.capBtnBookmarks": "Закладка", + "DE.Views.Links.capBtnContentsUpdate": "Оновити", + "DE.Views.Links.capBtnInsContents": "Зміст", + "DE.Views.Links.capBtnInsFootnote": "Виноска", + "DE.Views.Links.capBtnInsLink": "Гіперпосилання", + "DE.Views.Links.confirmDeleteFootnotes": "Дійсно вилучити усі виноски?", + "DE.Views.Links.mniDelFootnote": "Вилучити усі виноски", + "DE.Views.Links.mniInsFootnote": "Вставити виноску", + "DE.Views.Links.textContentsRemove": "Вилучити зміст", + "DE.Views.Links.textGotoFootnote": "Перейти до виносок", + "DE.Views.Links.textUpdateAll": "Оновити всю таблицю", + "DE.Views.Links.textUpdatePages": "Оновити лише номери сторінок", + "DE.Views.Links.tipBookmarks": "Додати закладку", + "DE.Views.Links.tipContents": "Вставити зміст", + "DE.Views.Links.tipContentsUpdate": "Оновити зміст", + "DE.Views.Links.tipInsertHyperlink": "Додати гіперпосилання", + "DE.Views.Links.tipNotes": "Вставити або відредагувати виноски", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtColor": "Колір", "DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.filePlaceholder": "PDF", "DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.okButtonText": "Надіслати", "DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.subjectPlaceholder": "Тема", "DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.textAttachDocx": "Приєднати як DOCX", "DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.textAttachPdf": "Приєднати як PDF", "DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.textFileName": "Ім'я файлу", - "DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.textFormat": "Формат пошти", + "DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.textFormat": "Формат ел.пошти", "DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.textFrom": "Від", "DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.textHTML": "HTML", "DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.textMessage": "Повідомлення", "DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.textSubject": "Тема рядка", - "DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.textTitle": "Надіслати до пошти", + "DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.textTitle": "Надіслати ел.поштою", "DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.textTo": "до", "DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.textWarning": "Увага!", "DE.Views.MailMergeEmailDlg.textWarningMsg": "Зверніть увагу, що відправлення неможливо зупинити після натискання кнопки \"Надіслати\".", @@ -1154,9 +1278,9 @@ "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textCurrent": "Поточний запис", "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textDataSource": "Джерело даних", "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textDocx": "Docx", - "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textDownload": "Скачати", + "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textDownload": "Звантажити", "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textEditData": "Редагувати список одержувачів", - "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textEmail": "Пошта", + "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textEmail": "Ел.пошта", "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textFrom": "Від", "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textGoToMail": "Перейти до пошти", "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textHighlight": "Виділіть поля злиття", @@ -1173,11 +1297,12 @@ "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.textTo": "до", "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.txtFirst": "Для першого запису", "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.txtFromToError": "Значення \"Від\" має бути меншим, ніж значення \"До\"", - "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.txtLast": "Для останнього запису", + "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.txtLast": "До останнього запису", "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.txtNext": "До наступної зміни", "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.txtPrev": "До попередньої зміни", "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.txtUntitled": "Без назви", "DE.Views.MailMergeSettings.warnProcessMailMerge": "Початок злиття не вдався", + "DE.Views.Navigation.txtEmpty": "У документі відсутні заголовки.
    Застосуйте стиль заголовків до тексту, щоби він з'явився у змісті.", "DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textApply": "Застосувати", "DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textApplyTo": "Застосувати зміни до", "DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textContinue": "Безперервний", @@ -1185,7 +1310,7 @@ "DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textDocument": "Весь документ", "DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textEachPage": "Перезапустити кожну сторінку", "DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textEachSection": "Перезапустити кожну секцію", - "DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textFootnote": "Виноски", + "DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textFootnote": "Виноска", "DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textFormat": "Формат", "DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textInsert": "Вставити", "DE.Views.NoteSettingsDialog.textLocation": "Місцезнаходження", @@ -1216,9 +1341,8 @@ "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textAt": "в", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textAtLeast": "принаймні", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textAuto": "Багаторазовий", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textBackColor": "Колір фону", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textBackColor": "Колір тла", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textExact": "Точно", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textNewColor": "Додати новий спеціальний колір", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.txtAutoText": "Авто", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.noTabs": "Вказані вкладки з'являться в цьому полі", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strAllCaps": "Усі великі", @@ -1227,6 +1351,8 @@ "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strDoubleStrike": "Подвійне перекреслення", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strIndentsLeftText": "Лівий", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strIndentsRightText": "Право", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strIndentsSpacingAfter": "Після", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strIndentsSpacingBefore": "Перед", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strKeepLines": "Тримайте лінії разом", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strKeepNext": "Зберегати з текстом", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strMargins": "Набивання", @@ -1235,24 +1361,23 @@ "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strParagraphIndents": "Відступи та розміщення", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strParagraphPosition": "Розміщення", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strSmallCaps": "Зменшені великі", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strStrike": "Перекреслення", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strStrike": "Перекреслений", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strSubscript": "Підрядковий", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strSuperscript": "Надрядковий", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strTabs": "Вкладка", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textAlign": "Вирівнювання", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textBackColor": "Колір фону", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textBorderColor": "Колір кордону", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textBackColor": "Колір тла", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textBorderColor": "Колір меж", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textBorderDesc": "Клацніть по діаграмі або використовуйте кнопки, щоб вибрати кордони та застосувати до них вибраний стиль", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textBorderWidth": "Розмір кордону", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textBottom": "Внизу", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textCharacterSpacing": "Пробіл між символами", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textDefault": "Вкладка за умовчанням", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textDefault": "Типова вкладка", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textEffects": "Ефекти", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textLeft": "Лівий", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "Додати новий спеціальний колір", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textPosition": "Позиція", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textRemove": "Видалити", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textRemoveAll": "Видалити усе", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textRemove": "Вилучити", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textRemoveAll": "Вилучити все", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textRight": "Право", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textSet": "Вказати", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textSpacing": "інтервал", @@ -1270,16 +1395,17 @@ "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.tipOuter": "Встановити лише зовнішній край", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.tipRight": "Встановити лише праву межу", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.tipTop": "Встановити лише верхню межу", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.txtAutoText": "Авто", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.txtNoBorders": "Немає кордонів", "DE.Views.RightMenu.txtChartSettings": "Налаштування діаграми", "DE.Views.RightMenu.txtHeaderFooterSettings": "Параметри заголовка та нижнього колонтитула", "DE.Views.RightMenu.txtImageSettings": "Налаштування зображення", - "DE.Views.RightMenu.txtMailMergeSettings": "Параметри злиття пошти", + "DE.Views.RightMenu.txtMailMergeSettings": "Параметри надсилання ел.поштою", "DE.Views.RightMenu.txtParagraphSettings": "Налаштування параграфа", "DE.Views.RightMenu.txtShapeSettings": "Параметри форми", "DE.Views.RightMenu.txtTableSettings": "Налаштування таблиці", "DE.Views.RightMenu.txtTextArtSettings": "Налаштування текст Art", - "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strBackground": "Колір фону", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strBackground": "Колір тла", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strChange": "Змінити автофігуру", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strColor": "Колір", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strFill": "Заповнити", @@ -1291,7 +1417,7 @@ "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strType": "Тип", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textAdvanced": "Показати додаткові налаштування", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textBorderSizeErr": "Введене значення невірно.
    Будь ласка, введіть значення від 0 pt до 1584 pt.", - "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textColor": "Заповнити колір", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textColor": "Колір заповнення", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textDirection": "Напрямок", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textEmptyPattern": "Немає шаблону", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textFromFile": "З файлу", @@ -1300,7 +1426,6 @@ "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textGradientFill": "Заповнити градієнт", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textImageTexture": "Зображення або текстура", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textLinear": "Лінійний", - "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textNewColor": "Додати новий спеціальний колір", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textNoFill": "Немає заповнення", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textPatternFill": "Візерунок", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textRadial": "Радіальний", @@ -1330,12 +1455,13 @@ "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.txtTight": "Тісно", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.txtTopAndBottom": "Верх і низ", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.txtWood": "Дерево", + "DE.Views.SignatureSettings.strDelete": "Вилучити підпис", "DE.Views.Statusbar.goToPageText": "Перейти до сторінки", "DE.Views.Statusbar.pageIndexText": "Сторінка {0} з {1}", "DE.Views.Statusbar.tipFitPage": "За розміром сторінки", - "DE.Views.Statusbar.tipFitWidth": "Придатний до ширини", + "DE.Views.Statusbar.tipFitWidth": "По ширині", "DE.Views.Statusbar.tipSetLang": "вибрати мову тексту", - "DE.Views.Statusbar.tipZoomFactor": "Збільшити", + "DE.Views.Statusbar.tipZoomFactor": "Масштаб", "DE.Views.Statusbar.tipZoomIn": "Збільшити зображення", "DE.Views.Statusbar.tipZoomOut": "Зменшити зображення", "DE.Views.Statusbar.txtPageNumInvalid": "Номер сторінки недійсний", @@ -1344,23 +1470,27 @@ "DE.Views.StyleTitleDialog.textTitle": "Назва", "DE.Views.StyleTitleDialog.txtEmpty": "Це поле є обов'язковим", "DE.Views.StyleTitleDialog.txtNotEmpty": "Поля не повинні бути пустими", - "DE.Views.TableSettings.deleteColumnText": "Видалити колону", - "DE.Views.TableSettings.deleteRowText": "Видалити рядок", + "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.strLinks": "Форматувати зміст за допомогою посилань", + "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.textBuildTable": "Побудувати зміст з", + "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.textTitle": "Зміст", + "DE.Views.TableOfContentsSettings.txtCurrent": "Поточний", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.deleteColumnText": "Вилучити стовпчик", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.deleteRowText": "Вилучити рядок", "DE.Views.TableSettings.deleteTableText": "Видалити таблицю", "DE.Views.TableSettings.insertColumnLeftText": "Вставити стопчик зліва", "DE.Views.TableSettings.insertColumnRightText": "Вставити стопчик справа", "DE.Views.TableSettings.insertRowAboveText": "Вставити рядок вище", "DE.Views.TableSettings.insertRowBelowText": "Вставити рядок нижче", - "DE.Views.TableSettings.mergeCellsText": "Об'єднати клітинки", - "DE.Views.TableSettings.selectCellText": "Виберіть клітинку", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.mergeCellsText": "Об'єднати комірки", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.selectCellText": "Виберіть комірку", "DE.Views.TableSettings.selectColumnText": "Виберіть колонку", "DE.Views.TableSettings.selectRowText": "Виберіть рядок", "DE.Views.TableSettings.selectTableText": "Виберіть таблицю", - "DE.Views.TableSettings.splitCellsText": "Розщеплені клітини...", - "DE.Views.TableSettings.splitCellTitleText": "Розщеплені клітини", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.splitCellsText": "Розділити комірки...", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.splitCellTitleText": "Розділити комірки", "DE.Views.TableSettings.strRepeatRow": "Повторити як рядок заголовка у верхній частині кожної сторінки", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textAdvanced": "Показати додаткові налаштування", - "DE.Views.TableSettings.textBackColor": "Колір фону", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.textBackColor": "Колір тла", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textBanded": "У смужку", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textBorderColor": "Колір", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textBorders": "Стиль меж", @@ -1370,7 +1500,6 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettings.textFirst": "перший", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textHeader": "Заголовок", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textLast": "Останній", - "DE.Views.TableSettings.textNewColor": "Додати новий спеціальний колір", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textRows": "Рядки", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textSelectBorders": "Виберіть кордони, які ви хочете змінити, застосувавши обраний вище стиль", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textTemplate": "Виберіть з шаблону", @@ -1386,40 +1515,41 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettings.tipRight": "Встановити лише зовнішній правий кордон", "DE.Views.TableSettings.tipTop": "Встановити лише зовнішній верхній край", "DE.Views.TableSettings.txtNoBorders": "Немає кордонів", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_Colorful": "Кольоровий", + "DE.Views.TableSettings.txtTable_Dark": "Темний", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlign": "Вирівнювання", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlignment": "Вирівнювання", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAllowSpacing": "Розміщення між клітинами", + "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAllowSpacing": "Відстань між комірками", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAlt": "Альтернативний текст", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltDescription": "Опис", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTip": "Альтернативне текстове представлення інформації про візуальний об'єкт, яке може бути прочитано людям із порушеннями зору або когнітивними дисфункціями, щоб вони могли краще зрозуміти, яка інформація знаходиться в зображенні, автошопі, діаграмі або таблиці.", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAltTitle": "Назва", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAnchorText": "Текст", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textAutofit": "Автоматично змінювати розмір відповідно до вмісту", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textBackColor": "Задній фон клітинки", + "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textBackColor": "Тло комірки", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textBelow": "Нижче", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textBorderColor": "Колір кордону", + "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textBorderColor": "Колір меж", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textBorderDesc": "Клацніть по діаграмі або використовуйте кнопки, щоб вибрати кордони та застосувати до них вибраний стиль", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textBordersBackgroung": "Кордони та задній фон", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textBorderWidth": "Розмір кордону", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textBottom": "Внизу", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textCellOptions": "Опції клітини", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textCellProps": "Клітинка", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textCellSize": "Розмір клітини", + "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textCellOptions": "Параметри комірки", + "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textCellProps": "Комірка", + "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textCellSize": "Розмір комірки", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textCenter": "Центр", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textCenterTooltip": "Центр", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textCheckMargins": "Використовувати поля за замовчуванням", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textDefaultMargins": "Поля клітинки за умовчанням", + "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textCheckMargins": "Використовувати типові поля", + "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textDefaultMargins": "Типові поля комірки", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textDistance": "Відстань від тексту", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textHorizontal": "Горізонтальний", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textIndLeft": "Відступ зліва", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textLeft": "Лівий", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textLeftTooltip": "Лівий", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMargin": "Грань", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMargins": "Поля клітини", + "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMargins": "Поля комірки", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMeasure": "Вимірювати в", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMove": "Перемістити об'єкт з текстом", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "Додати новий спеціальний колір", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOnlyCells": "Тільки для вибраних клітин", + "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOnlyCells": "Тільки для вибраних комірок", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOptions": "Опції", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOverlap": "Дозволити перекриття", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textPage": "Сторінка", @@ -1445,15 +1575,15 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textWrappingStyle": "Стиль упаковки", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textWrapText": "Обернути текст", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.tipAll": "Встановити зовнішній край та всі внутрішні лінії", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.tipCellAll": "Встановити кордони лише для внутрішніх осередків", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.tipCellInner": "Встановити вертикальні та горизонтальні лінії лише для внутрішніх осередків", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.tipCellOuter": "Встановити зовнішні межі лише для внутрішніх осередків", + "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.tipCellAll": "Встановити межі лише для внутрішніх комірок", + "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.tipCellInner": "Встановити вертикальні та горизонтальні межі лише для внутрішніх комірок", + "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.tipCellOuter": "Встановити зовнішні межі лише для внутрішніх комірок", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.tipInner": "Встановити лише внутрішні лінії", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.tipNone": "Встановити без кордонів", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.tipOuter": "Встановити лише зовнішній край", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.tipTableOuterCellAll": "Встановити зовнішній край та межі для всіх внутрішніх осередків", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.tipTableOuterCellInner": "Встановити зовнішній кордон, вертикальні та горизонтальні лінії для внутрішніх осередків", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.tipTableOuterCellOuter": "Встановіть таблицю зовнішніх та зовнішніх меж для внутрішніх осередків", + "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.tipTableOuterCellAll": "Встановити зовнішній край та межі для всіх внутрішніх комірок", + "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.tipTableOuterCellInner": "Встановити зовнішній край, вертикальні та горизонтальні межі для внутрішніх комірок", + "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.tipTableOuterCellOuter": "Встановіть зовнішні краї та межі для внутрішніх комірок таблиці", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.txtCm": "Сантиметр", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.txtInch": "Дюйм", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.txtNoBorders": "Немає кордонів", @@ -1466,12 +1596,11 @@ "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.strTransparency": "Непрозорість", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.strType": "Тип", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textBorderSizeErr": "Введене значення невірно.
    Будь ласка, введіть значення від 0 pt до 1584 pt.", - "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textColor": "Заповнити колір", + "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textColor": "Колір заповнення", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textDirection": "Напрямок", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textGradient": "Градієнт", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textGradientFill": "Заповнити градієнт", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textLinear": "Лінійний", - "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textNewColor": "Додати новий спеціальний колір", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textNoFill": "Немає заповнення", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textRadial": "Радіальний", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textSelectTexture": "Обрати", @@ -1479,8 +1608,10 @@ "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textTemplate": "Шаблон", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textTransform": "Перетворення", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.txtNoBorders": "Немає лінії", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnAddComment": "Додати коментар", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnColumns": "Колонки", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnComment": "Коментар", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnDateTime": "Дата та час", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsChart": "Діаграма", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsDropcap": "Буквиця", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsEquation": "Рівняння", @@ -1509,7 +1640,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.mniImageFromUrl": "Зображення з URL", "DE.Views.Toolbar.strMenuNoFill": "Немає заповнення", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textAutoColor": "Автоматично", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.textBold": "Жирний", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textBold": "Грубий", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textBottom": "Внизу:", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textColumnsCustom": "Спеціальні стовпці", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textColumnsLeft": "Лівий", @@ -1518,6 +1649,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.textColumnsThree": "Три", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textColumnsTwo": "Два", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textContPage": "Неперервна Сторінка", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textDateControl": "Дата", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textEvenPage": "Навіть сторінка", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textInMargin": "на полях", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textInsColumnBreak": "Вставити розрив стовпчика", @@ -1535,26 +1667,28 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.textMarginsNormal": "Нормальний", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textMarginsUsNormal": "Нормальний US", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textMarginsWide": "Широкий", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.textNewColor": "Додати новий спеціальний колір", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textNewColor": "Додати новий власний колір", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textNextPage": "Наступна сторінка", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textNone": "Жоден", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textOddPage": "Непарна сторінка", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textPageMarginsCustom": "Користувацькі поля", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textPageSizeCustom": "Спеціальний розмір сторінки", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textPortrait": "Портрет", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textRemoveControl": "Вилучити контроль вмісту", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textRemWatermark": "Вилучити водяний знак", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textRight": "Право:", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.textStrikeout": "Викреслити", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.textStyleMenuDelete": "Видалити стиль", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.textStyleMenuDeleteAll": "Видалити всі власні стилі", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textStrikeout": "Перекреслений", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textStyleMenuDelete": "Вилучити стиль", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textStyleMenuDeleteAll": "Вилучити усі власні стилі", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textStyleMenuNew": "Новий стиль від вибору", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.textStyleMenuRestore": "Відновити по умовчанню", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.textStyleMenuRestoreAll": "Відновити всі стилі за умовчанням", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textStyleMenuRestore": "Відновити типово", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textStyleMenuRestoreAll": "Відновити усі стилі типово", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textStyleMenuUpdate": "Оновлення від вибору", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textSubscript": "Підрядковий", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textSuperscript": "Надрядковий", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabCollaboration": "Співпраця", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabFile": "Файл", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabHome": "Головна", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabHome": "Домівка", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabInsert": "Вставити", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabLayout": "Макет", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textTabLinks": "Посилання", @@ -1571,7 +1705,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipBlankPage": "Вставити чисту сторінку", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipChangeChart": "Змінити тип діаграми", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipClearStyle": "Очистити стиль", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipColorSchemas": "Змінити кольорову схему", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipColorSchemas": "Змінити колірну схему", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipColumns": "Вставити стопчики", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipCopy": "Копіювати", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipCopyStyle": "Копіювати стиль", @@ -1582,7 +1716,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipFontColor": "Колір шрифту", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipFontName": "Шрифт", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipFontSize": "Розмір шрифта", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipHighlightColor": "Виділити колір", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipHighlightColor": "Колір позначення", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipImgAlign": "Вирівняти об'єкти", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipImgGroup": "Група об'єктів", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipImgWrapping": "Обернути текст", @@ -1597,7 +1731,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertText": "Вставити текст", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipInsertTextArt": "Вставити текст Art", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipLineSpace": "Розмітка міжрядкових інтервалів", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipMailRecepients": "Поле пошти", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipMailRecepients": "Надіслати ел.поштою", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipMarkers": "Кулі", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipMultilevels": "Багаторівневий список", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipNumbers": "Нумерація", @@ -1607,9 +1741,9 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipPageSize": "Розмір сторінки", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipParagraphStyle": "Стиль параграфу", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipPaste": "Вставити", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipPrColor": "Параметр кольору фону", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipPrColor": "Колір заливки", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipPrint": "Роздрукувати", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipRedo": "Переробити", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipRedo": "Повторити", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipSave": "Зберегти", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipSaveCoauth": "Збережіть свої зміни, щоб інші користувачі могли їх переглянути.", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipSendBackward": "Відправити назад", @@ -1617,6 +1751,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipShowHiddenChars": "недруковані символи", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipSynchronize": "Документ був змінений іншим користувачем. Будь ласка, натисніть, щоб зберегти зміни та перезавантажити оновлення.", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipUndo": "Скасувати", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtMarginAlign": "Вирівняти відносно поля", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme1": "Офіс", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme10": "Медіана", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme11": "Метро", @@ -1637,5 +1772,11 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme6": "Скупчення", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme7": "Власний", "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme8": "Розпливатися", - "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme9": "Ливарня" + "DE.Views.Toolbar.txtScheme9": "Ливарня", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textAuto": "Авто", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textBold": "Грубий", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textColor": "Колір тексту", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textItalic": "Курсив", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textNewColor": "Додати новий власний колір", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textStrikeout": "Викреслений" } \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/vi.json b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/vi.json index d1a254163..2c23bea96 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/vi.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/vi.json @@ -907,7 +907,6 @@ "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textLeft": "Trái", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textMargin": "Lề", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textMove": "Di chuyển cùng văn bản", - "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "Thêm màu tùy chỉnh mới", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textNone": "Không", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textPage": "Trang", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textParagraph": "Đoạn văn bản", @@ -1203,7 +1202,6 @@ "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textAuto": "Nhiều", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textBackColor": "Màu nền", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textExact": "Chính xác", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textNewColor": "Thêm màu tùy chỉnh mới", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.txtAutoText": "Tự động", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.noTabs": "Các tab được chỉ định sẽ xuất hiện trong trường này", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strAllCaps": "Tất cả Drop cap", @@ -1234,7 +1232,6 @@ "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textDefault": "Tab mặc định", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textEffects": "Hiệu ứng", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textLeft": "Trái", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "Thêm màu tùy chỉnh mới", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textPosition": "Vị trí", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textRemove": "Xóa", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textRemoveAll": "Xóa tất cả", @@ -1285,7 +1282,6 @@ "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textGradientFill": "Đổ màu Gradient", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textImageTexture": "Hình ảnh hoặc Texture", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textLinear": "Tuyến tính", - "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textNewColor": "Thêm màu tùy chỉnh mới", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textNoFill": "Không đổ màu", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textPatternFill": "Hoa văn", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textRadial": "Tỏa tròn", @@ -1354,7 +1350,6 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettings.textFirst": "Đầu tiên", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textHeader": "Header", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textLast": "Cuối cùng", - "DE.Views.TableSettings.textNewColor": "Thêm màu tùy chỉnh mới", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textRows": "Hàng", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textSelectBorders": "Chọn đường viền bạn muốn thay đổi áp dụng kiểu đã chọn ở trên", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textTemplate": "Chọn từ Template", @@ -1402,7 +1397,6 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMargins": "Lề của ô", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMeasure": "Đo trong", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMove": "Di chuyển đối tượng cùng văn bản", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "Thêm màu tùy chỉnh mới", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOnlyCells": "Chỉ cho các ô đã chọn", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOptions": "Tùy chọn", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOverlap": "Cho phép chồng chéo", @@ -1455,7 +1449,6 @@ "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textGradient": "Gradient", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textGradientFill": "Đổ màu Gradient", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textLinear": "Tuyến tính", - "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textNewColor": "Thêm màu tùy chỉnh mới", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textNoFill": "Không đổ màu", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textRadial": "Tỏa tròn", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textSelectTexture": "Chọn", @@ -1520,6 +1513,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.textMarginsUsNormal": "Mỹ Thường", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textMarginsWide": "Rộng", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textNewColor": "Thêm màu tùy chỉnh mới", + "Common.UI.ColorButton.textNewColor": "Thêm màu tùy chỉnh mới", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textNextPage": "Trang tiếp theo", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textNone": "Không", "DE.Views.Toolbar.textOddPage": "Trang lẻ", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/zh.json b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/zh.json index 541b73daf..4f1f6a4f0 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/zh.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/locale/zh.json @@ -80,6 +80,7 @@ "Common.define.chartData.textPoint": "XY(散射)", "Common.define.chartData.textStock": "股票", "Common.define.chartData.textSurface": "平面", + "Common.Translation.warnFileLocked": "另一个应用正在编辑本文件。你仍然可以继续编辑此文件,你可以将你的编辑保存成另一个拷贝。", "Common.UI.Calendar.textApril": "四月", "Common.UI.Calendar.textAugust": "八月", "Common.UI.Calendar.textDecember": "十二月", @@ -113,6 +114,7 @@ "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortTuesday": "星期二", "Common.UI.Calendar.textShortWednesday": "我们", "Common.UI.Calendar.textYears": "年", + "Common.UI.ColorButton.textNewColor": "添加新的自定义颜色", "Common.UI.ComboBorderSize.txtNoBorders": "没有边框", "Common.UI.ComboBorderSizeEditable.txtNoBorders": "没有边框", "Common.UI.ComboDataView.emptyComboText": "没有风格", @@ -155,6 +157,10 @@ "Common.Views.About.txtPoweredBy": "技术支持", "Common.Views.About.txtTel": "电话:", "Common.Views.About.txtVersion": "版本", + "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textBy": "依据", + "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textMathCorrect": "数学自动修正", + "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textReplace": "替换:", + "Common.Views.AutoCorrectDialog.textTitle": "自动修正", "Common.Views.Chat.textSend": "发送", "Common.Views.Comments.textAdd": "添加", "Common.Views.Comments.textAddComment": "发表评论", @@ -357,11 +363,30 @@ "Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textShowDate": "在签名行中显示签名日期", "Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.textTitle": "签名设置", "Common.Views.SignSettingsDialog.txtEmpty": "这是必填栏", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textCharacter": "字符", "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textCode": "Unicode十六进制值", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textCopyright": "版权所有标识", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textDCQuote": "后双引号", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textDOQuote": "前双引号", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textEllipsis": "横向省略号", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textEmDash": "破折号", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textEnDash": "半破折号", "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textFont": "字体 ", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textNBHyphen": "不换行连词符", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textNBSpace": "不换行空格", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textPilcrow": "段落标识", "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textRange": "范围", "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textRecent": "最近使用的符号", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textRegistered": "注册商标标识", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSCQuote": "后单引号", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSection": "章节标识", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textShortcut": "快捷键", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSHyphen": "软连词符", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSOQuote": "前单引号", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSpecial": "特殊字符", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textSymbols": "符号", "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textTitle": "符号", + "Common.Views.SymbolTableDialog.textTradeMark": "商标标识", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.leavePageText": "本文档中的所有未保存的更改都将丢失。
    单击“取消”,然后单击“保存”保存。单击“确定”以放弃所有未保存的更改。", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.newDocumentTitle": "未命名的文档", "DE.Controllers.LeftMenu.notcriticalErrorTitle": "警告", @@ -387,6 +412,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.errorAccessDeny": "您正在尝试执行您没有权限的操作。
    请联系您的文档服务器管理员.", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorBadImageUrl": "图片地址不正确", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorCoAuthoringDisconnect": "服务器连接丢失。该文档现在无法编辑", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorCompare": "协作编辑状态下,无法使用文件比对功能。", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorConnectToServer": "这份文件无法保存。请检查连接设置或联系您的管理员。
    当你点击“OK”按钮,系统将提示您下载文档。", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorDatabaseConnection": "外部错误。
    数据库连接错误。如果错误仍然存​​在,请联系支持人员。", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorDataEncrypted": "加密更改已收到,无法对其解密。", @@ -403,6 +429,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.errorKeyExpire": "密钥过期", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorMailMergeLoadFile": "加载失败", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorMailMergeSaveFile": "合并失败", + "DE.Controllers.Main.errorPasteSlicerError": "无法将表格分法从一个工作表中复制到另一个。
    请再试一次。可尝试选取整个表格和分法。", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorProcessSaveResult": "保存失败", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorServerVersion": "该编辑版本已经更新。该页面将被重新加载以应用更改。", "DE.Controllers.Main.errorSessionAbsolute": "文档编辑会话已过期。请重新加载页面。", @@ -450,15 +477,20 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.splitMaxColsErrorText": "列数必须小于%1。", "DE.Controllers.Main.splitMaxRowsErrorText": "行数必须小于%1。", "DE.Controllers.Main.textAnonymous": "匿名", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textApplyAll": "应用到所有公式", "DE.Controllers.Main.textBuyNow": "访问网站", "DE.Controllers.Main.textChangesSaved": "所有更改已保存", "DE.Controllers.Main.textClose": "关闭", "DE.Controllers.Main.textCloseTip": "点击关闭提示", "DE.Controllers.Main.textContactUs": "联系销售", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textConvertEquation": "这个公式是由一个早期版本的公式编辑器创建的。这个版本现在不受支持了。要想编辑这个公式,你需要将其转换成 Office Math ML 格式.
    现在转换吗?", "DE.Controllers.Main.textCustomLoader": "请注意,根据许可条款您无权更改加载程序。
    请联系我们的销售部门获取报价。", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textHasMacros": "这个文件带有自动宏。
    是否要运行宏?", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textLearnMore": "了解更多", "DE.Controllers.Main.textLoadingDocument": "文件加载中…", "DE.Controllers.Main.textNoLicenseTitle": "ONLYOFFICE开源版本", "DE.Controllers.Main.textPaidFeature": "付费功能", + "DE.Controllers.Main.textRemember": "记住我的选择", "DE.Controllers.Main.textShape": "形状", "DE.Controllers.Main.textStrict": "严格模式", "DE.Controllers.Main.textTryUndoRedo": "对于快速的协同编辑模式,取消/重做功能是禁用的。< br >单击“严格模式”按钮切换到严格co-editing模式编辑该文件没有其他用户干扰和发送您的更改只后你拯救他们。您可以使用编辑器高级设置在编辑模式之间切换。", @@ -478,6 +510,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.txtDiagramTitle": "图表标题", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtEditingMode": "设置编辑模式..", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtEndOfFormula": "意外的公式结尾", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtEnterDate": "输入日期。", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtErrorLoadHistory": "历史加载失败", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtEvenPage": "偶数页", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtFiguredArrows": "图形箭头", @@ -697,6 +730,7 @@ "DE.Controllers.Main.txtTableInd": "表格索引不能为零", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtTableOfContents": "目录", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtTooLarge": "数字太大,无法设定格式", + "DE.Controllers.Main.txtTypeEquation": "在这里输入公式。", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtUndefBookmark": "未定义书签", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtXAxis": "X轴", "DE.Controllers.Main.txtYAxis": "Y轴", @@ -1153,8 +1187,8 @@ "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textLang": "语言", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textLock": "锁定", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textName": "标题", - "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textNewColor": "添加新的自定义颜色", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textNone": "无", + "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textPlaceholder": "占位符", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textShowAs": "显示为", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textSystemColor": "系统", "DE.Views.ControlSettingsDialog.textTag": "标签", @@ -1169,6 +1203,12 @@ "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textSeparator": "列分隔符", "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textSpacing": "列之间的间距", "DE.Views.CustomColumnsDialog.textTitle": "列", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.confirmDefault": "设置{0}:{1}的默认格式", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textDefault": "设为默认", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textFormat": "格式", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textLang": "语言", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.textUpdate": "自动更新", + "DE.Views.DateTimeDialog.txtTitle": "日期、时间", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.aboveText": "以上", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.addCommentText": "发表评论", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.advancedFrameText": "框架高级设置", @@ -1258,6 +1298,7 @@ "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFlipV": "垂直翻转", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFollow": "跟随移动", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFromFile": "从文件导入", + "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFromStorage": "来自存储设备", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textFromUrl": "从URL", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textJoinList": "联接上一个列表", "DE.Views.DocumentHolder.textNest": "下一个表格", @@ -1408,7 +1449,6 @@ "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textLeft": "左", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textMargin": "边", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textMove": "文字移动", - "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "添加新的自定义颜色", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textNone": "没有", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textPage": "页面", "DE.Views.DropcapSettingsAdvanced.textParagraph": "段", @@ -1500,6 +1540,9 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strForcesave": "始终保存到服务器(否则在文档关闭时保存到服务器)", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strInputMode": "该又是象形文字", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strLiveComment": "打开评论的显示", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strMacrosSettings": "宏设置", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strPaste": "剪切、拷贝、黏贴", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strPasteButton": "在执行粘贴操作后显示“粘贴选项”按钮", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strResolvedComment": "打开已解决的注释的显示", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strShowChanges": "实时协作变更", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.strSpellCheckMode": "打开拼写检查选项", @@ -1519,6 +1562,7 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textMinute": "每一分钟", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.textOldVersions": "将文件保存为DOCX时,使其与较旧的MS-Word版本兼容", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtAll": "查看全部", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtAutoCorrect": "自动修正选项...", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtCacheMode": "默认缓存模式", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtCm": "厘米", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtFitPage": "适合页面", @@ -1530,8 +1574,15 @@ "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtMac": "作为OS X", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtNative": "本地", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtNone": "无查看", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtProofing": "审订", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtPt": "点", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtRunMacros": "启动所有项目", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtRunMacrosDesc": "启动所有不带通知的宏", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtSpellCheck": "拼写检查", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtStopMacros": "解除所有项目", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtStopMacrosDesc": "解除所有不带通知的宏", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtWarnMacros": "显示通知", + "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtWarnMacrosDesc": "解除所有带通知的宏", "DE.Views.FileMenuPanels.Settings.txtWin": "作为Windows", "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textBottomCenter": "底部中心", "DE.Views.HeaderFooterSettings.textBottomLeft": "左下", @@ -1574,6 +1625,7 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFitMargins": "适合边距", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFlip": "翻转", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFromFile": "从文件导入", + "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFromStorage": "来自存储设备", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textFromUrl": "从URL", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textHeight": "高度", "DE.Views.ImageSettings.textHint270": "逆时针旋转90°", @@ -1604,6 +1656,7 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAngle": "角度", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textArrows": "箭头", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAspectRatio": "锁定宽高比", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textAutofit": "自动适应", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBeginSize": "初始大小", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBeginStyle": "初始风格", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textBelow": "下面", @@ -1641,6 +1694,7 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textPositionPc": "相对位置", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textRelative": "关系到", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textRelativeWH": "相对的", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textResizeFit": "调整形状以适应文本", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textRight": "对", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textRightMargin": "右页边距", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textRightOf": "在 - 的右边", @@ -1649,6 +1703,7 @@ "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textShape": "形状设置", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textSize": "大小", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textSquare": "正方形", + "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTextBox": "文本框", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTitle": "图片 - 高级设置", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTitleChart": "图 - 高级设置", "DE.Views.ImageSettingsAdvanced.textTitleShape": "形状 - 高级设置", @@ -1701,13 +1756,14 @@ "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textCenter": "中心", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textLeft": "左", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textLevel": "级别", - "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textNewColor": "添加新的自定义颜色", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textPreview": "预览", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.textRight": "右", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtAlign": "校准", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtBullet": "项目点", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtColor": "颜色", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtFont": "字体和符号", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtLikeText": "像文字一样", + "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtNewBullet": "添加一个新的项目点", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtNone": "无", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtSize": "大小", "DE.Views.ListSettingsDialog.txtSymbol": "符号", @@ -1824,7 +1880,6 @@ "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textAuto": "多", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textBackColor": "背景颜色", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textExact": "精确地", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.textNewColor": "添加新的自定义颜色", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettings.txtAutoText": "自动", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.noTabs": "指定的选项卡将显示在此字段中", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.strAllCaps": "全部大写", @@ -1869,11 +1924,11 @@ "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textEffects": "效果", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textExact": "精确", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textFirstLine": "第一行", + "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textHanging": "悬挂", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textJustified": "正当", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textLeader": "前导符", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textLeft": "左", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textLevel": "级别", - "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "添加新的自定义颜色", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textNone": "没有", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textNoneSpecial": "(无)", "DE.Views.ParagraphSettingsAdvanced.textPosition": "位置", @@ -1915,7 +1970,7 @@ "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strPattern": "模式", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strShadow": "显示阴影", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strSize": "大小", - "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strStroke": "撞击", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strStroke": "边框", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strTransparency": "不透明度", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.strType": "类型", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textAdvanced": "显示高级设置", @@ -1925,6 +1980,7 @@ "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textEmptyPattern": "无图案", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textFlip": "翻转", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textFromFile": "从文件导入", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textFromStorage": "来自存储设备", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textFromUrl": "从URL", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textGradient": "渐变", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textGradientFill": "渐变填充", @@ -1934,12 +1990,12 @@ "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textHintFlipV": "垂直翻转", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textImageTexture": "图片或纹理", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textLinear": "线性", - "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textNewColor": "添加新的自定义颜色", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textNoFill": "没有填充", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textPatternFill": "模式", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textRadial": "径向", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textRotate90": "旋转90°", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textRotation": "旋转", + "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textSelectImage": "选取图片", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textSelectTexture": "请选择", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textStretch": "伸展", "DE.Views.ShapeSettings.textStyle": "类型", @@ -2050,7 +2106,6 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettings.textHeader": "头", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textHeight": "高度", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textLast": "最后", - "DE.Views.TableSettings.textNewColor": "添加新的自定义颜色", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textRows": "行", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textSelectBorders": "选择您要更改应用样式的边框", "DE.Views.TableSettings.textTemplate": "从模板中选择", @@ -2107,7 +2162,6 @@ "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMargins": "元数据边缘", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMeasure": "测量", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textMove": "用文本移动对象", - "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textNewColor": "添加新的自定义颜色", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOnlyCells": "仅适用于选定的单元格", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOptions": "选项", "DE.Views.TableSettingsAdvanced.textOverlap": "允许重叠", @@ -2151,7 +2205,7 @@ "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.strColor": "颜色", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.strFill": "填满", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.strSize": "大小", - "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.strStroke": "撞击", + "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.strStroke": "边框", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.strTransparency": "不透明度", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.strType": "类型", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textBorderSizeErr": "输入的值不正确。
    请输入介于0 pt和1584 pt之间的值。", @@ -2160,7 +2214,6 @@ "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textGradient": "渐变", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textGradientFill": "渐变填充", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textLinear": "线性", - "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textNewColor": "添加新的自定义颜色", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textNoFill": "没有填充", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textRadial": "径向", "DE.Views.TextArtSettings.textSelectTexture": "请选择", @@ -2172,6 +2225,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnBlankPage": "空白页", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnColumns": "列", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnComment": "批注", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnDateTime": "日期、时间", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsChart": "图表", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsControls": "内容控件", "DE.Views.Toolbar.capBtnInsDropcap": "下沉", @@ -2288,6 +2342,7 @@ "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipControls": "插入内容控件", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipCopy": "复制", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipCopyStyle": "复制样式", + "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipDateTime": "插入当前日期和时间", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipDecFont": "递减字体大小", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipDecPrLeft": "减少缩进", "DE.Views.Toolbar.tipDropCap": "插入下沉", @@ -2364,6 +2419,7 @@ "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textDiagonal": " 斜线的", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textFont": "字体 ", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textFromFile": "从文件导入", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textFromStorage": "来自存储设备", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textFromUrl": "从URL导入", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textHor": "水平的", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textImageW": "图像水印", @@ -2373,6 +2429,7 @@ "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textNewColor": "添加新的自定义颜色", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textNone": "无", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textScale": "规模", + "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textSelect": "选择图像", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textStrikeout": "删除线", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textText": "文本", "DE.Views.WatermarkSettingsDialog.textTextW": "文本水印", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/Contents.json b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/Contents.json index c76ecbbd2..f231b63cc 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/Contents.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/Contents.json @@ -22,7 +22,7 @@ }, { "src": "ProgramInterface/ReferencesTab.htm", - "name": "Registerkarte Referenzen" + "name": "Registerkarte Verweise" }, { "src": "ProgramInterface/ReviewTab.htm", @@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ }, { "src": "UsageInstructions/CopyPasteUndoRedo.htm", - "name": "Textpassagen kopieren/einfügen, Aktionen rückgängig machen/wiederholen" + "name": "Textpassagen kopieren/einfügen, Vorgänge rückgängig machen/wiederholen" }, { "src": "UsageInstructions/ChangeColorScheme.htm", @@ -70,6 +70,11 @@ "src": "UsageInstructions/InsertFootnotes.htm", "name": "Fußnoten einfügen" }, + { + "src": "UsageInstructions/InsertBookmarks.htm", + "name": "Lesezeichen hinzufügen" + }, + {"src": "UsageInstructions/AddWatermark.htm", "name": "Wasserzeichen hinzufügen"}, { "src": "UsageInstructions/AlignText.htm", "name": "Text in einem Absatz ausrichten", @@ -93,7 +98,7 @@ }, { "src": "UsageInstructions/AddBorders.htm", - "name": "Rahmen hinzufügen" + "name": "Rahmenlinien hinzufügen" }, { "src": "UsageInstructions/SetTabStops.htm", @@ -133,6 +138,10 @@ "name": "Tabellen einfügen", "headername": "Objekte bearbeiten" }, + { + "src": "UsageInstructions/AddFormulasInTables.htm", + "name": "Formeln in Tabellen verwenden" + }, { "src": "UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm", "name": "Bilder einfügen" @@ -220,6 +229,6 @@ }, { "src": "HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm", - "name": "Tastenkombinationen" + "name": "Tastaturkürzel" } ] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/HelpfulHints/About.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/HelpfulHints/About.htm index 45c184bdf..c24598250 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/HelpfulHints/About.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/HelpfulHints/About.htm @@ -15,8 +15,8 @@

    Über den Dokumenteneditor

    Der Dokumenteneditor ist eine Online-Anwendung, mit der Sie Ihre Dokumente direkt in Ihrem Browser betrachten und bearbeiten können.

    -

    Mit dem Dokumenteneditor können Sie Editiervorgänge durchführen, wie bei einem beliebigen Desktopeditor, editierte Dokumente unter Beibehaltung aller Formatierungsdetails drucken oder sie auf der Festplatte Ihres Rechners als DOCX-, PDF-, TXT-, ODT-, RTF- oder HTML-Dateien speichern.

    -

    Wenn Sie mehr über die aktuelle Softwareversion und den Lizenzgeber erfahren möchten, klicken Sie auf das Über Symbol in der linken Seitenleiste.

    +

    Mit dem Dokumenteneditor können Sie Editiervorgänge durchführen, wie bei einem beliebigen Desktopeditor, editierte Dokumente unter Beibehaltung aller Formatierungsdetails drucken oder sie auf der Festplatte Ihres Rechners als DOCX-, PDF-, TXT-, ODT-, DOXT, PDF/A, OTF, RTF- oder HTML-Dateien speichern.

    +

    Wenn Sie in der Online-Version mehr über die aktuelle Softwareversion und den Lizenzgeber erfahren möchten, klicken Sie auf das Symbol Über in der linken Seitenleiste. Wenn Sie in der Desktop-Version mehr über die aktuelle Softwareversion und den Lizenzgeber erfahren möchten, wählen Sie das Menü Über in der linken Seitenleiste des Hauptfensters.

    \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm index 79223605d..c8128b6a4 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm @@ -14,19 +14,19 @@

    Erweiterte Einstellungen des Dokumenteneditors

    -

    Über die Funktion erweiterten Einstellungen können Sie die Grundeinstellungen im Dokumenteneditor ändern. Klicken Sie dazu in der oberen Menüleiste auf die Registerkarte Datei und wählen Sie die Option Erweiterte Einstellungen.... Sie können auch das Symbol Erweiterte Einstellungen Symbol in der rechten oberen Ecke der Registerkarte Start anklicken.

    +

    Über die Funktion erweiterten Einstellungen können Sie die Grundeinstellungen im Dokumenteneditor ändern. Klicken Sie dazu in der oberen Symbolleiste auf die Registerkarte Datei und wählen Sie die Option Erweiterte Einstellungen.... Sie können auch auf das Symbol Einstellungen anzeigen Einstellungen anzeigen rechts neben der Kopfzeile des Editors klicken und die Option Erweiterte Einstellungen auswählen.

    Die erweiterten Einstellungen umfassen:

    • Kommentaranzeige - zum Ein-/Ausschalten der Option Live-Kommentar:
      • Anzeige von Kommentaren aktivieren - wenn Sie diese Funktion deaktivieren, werden die kommentierten Passagen nur hervorgehoben, wenn Sie auf das Symbol Kommentare Kommentare in der linken Seitenleiste klicken.
      • -
      • Anzeige der aufgelösten Kommentare aktivieren - wenn Sie diese Funktion deaktivieren, werden die aufgelösten Kommentare im Dokumenttext verborgen. Sie können diese Kommentare nur ansehen, wenn Sie in der linken Seitenleiste auf das Symbol Kommentare Kommentare klicken.
      • +
      • Anzeige der aufgelösten Kommentare aktivieren - diese Funktion ist standardmäßig deaktiviert, sodass die aufgelösten Kommentare im Dokumententext verborgen werden. Sie können diese Kommentare nur ansehen, wenn Sie in der linken Seitenleiste auf das Symbol Kommentare Kommentare klicken. Wenn die aufgelösten Kommentare im Dokument angezeigt werden sollen, müssen Sie diese Option aktivieren.
    • Rechtschreibprüfung - Ein-/Ausschalten der automatischen Rechtschreibprüfung.
    • Erweiterte Eingabe - Ein-/Auszuschalten von Hieroglyphen.
    • Hilfslinien - Aktivieren/Deaktivieren von Ausrichtungshilfslinien, die Ihnen dabei helfen Objekte präzise auf der Seite zu positionieren.
    • -
    • Automatische Sicherung - automatische Speichern von Änderungen während der Bearbeitung ein-/ausschalten.
    • -
    • Co-Bearbeitung - anzeige der während der Co-Bearbeitung vorgenommenen Änderungen:
        +
      • Über AutoSpeichern können Sie in der Online-Version die Funktion zum automatischen Speichern von Änderungen während der Bearbeitung ein-/ausschalten. Über Wiederherstellen können Sie in der Desktop-Version die Funktion zum automatischen Wiederherstellen von Dokumenten für den Fall eines unerwarteten Programmabsturzes ein-/ausschalten.
      • +
      • Co-Bearbeitung - Anzeige der während der Co-Bearbeitung vorgenommenen Änderungen:
        • Standardmäßig ist der Schnellmodus aktiviert. Die Benutzer, die das Dokuments gemeinsam bearbeiten, sehen die Änderungen in Echtzeit, sobald sie von anderen Benutzern vorgenommen wurden.
        • Wenn Sie die Änderungen von anderen Benutzern nicht einsehen möchten (um Störungen zu vermeiden oder aus einem anderen Grund), wählen Sie den Modus Strikt und alle Änderungen werden erst angezeigt, nachdem Sie auf das Symbol Speichern Speichern geklickt haben, dass Sie darüber informiert, dass Änderungen von anderen Benutzern vorliegen.
        diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/HelpfulHints/CollaborativeEditing.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/HelpfulHints/CollaborativeEditing.htm index f97e81bd1..7aebb462d 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/HelpfulHints/CollaborativeEditing.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/HelpfulHints/CollaborativeEditing.htm @@ -20,15 +20,25 @@
      • visuelle Markierung von Textabschnitten, die aktuell von anderen Benutzern bearbeitet werden
      • Anzeige von Änderungen in Echtzeit oder Synchronisierung von Änderungen mit einem Klick.
      • Chat zum Austauschen von Ideen zu bestimmten Abschnitten des Dokuments
      • -
      • Kommentare mit der Beschreibung von Aufgaben oder Problemen, die Folgehandlungen erforderlich machen.
      • +
      • Kommentare mit der Beschreibung von Aufgaben oder Problemen, die Folgehandlungen erforderlich machen (es ist auch möglich, im Offline-Modus mit Kommentaren zu arbeiten, ohne eine Verbindung zur Online-Version herzustellen).
      +
      +

      Verbindung mit der Online-Version herstellen

      +

      Öffnen Sie im Desktop-Editor die Option mit Cloud verbinden in der linken Seitenleiste des Hauptprogrammfensters. Geben Sie Ihren Anmeldenamen und Ihr Passwort an und stellen Sie eine Verbindung zu Ihrem Cloud Office her.

      +

      Co-Bearbeitung

      -

      Im Dokumenteneditor stehen die folgenden Modelle für die Co-Bearbeitung zur Verfügung. Standardmäßig ist der Schnellmodus aktiviert. Die Änderungen von anderen Benutzern werden in Echtzeit angezeigt. Im Modus Strikt werden die Änderungen von anderen Nutzern verborgen, bis Sie auf das Symbol Speichern Speichern klicken, um Ihre eigenen Änderungen zu speichern und die Änderungen von anderen anzunehmen. Der Modus kann unter Erweiterte Einstellungen festgelegt werden. Sie können den gewünschten Modus auch in der Registerkarte Zusammenarbeit in der oberen Symbolleiste festlegen, klicken Sie dazu einfach auf das Symbol Co-Bearbeitung Co-Bearbeitung.

      -

      Menü Co-Bearbeitung

      +

      Im Dokumenteneditor stehen die folgenden Modelle für die Co-Bearbeitung zur Verfügung.

      +
        +
      • Standardmäßig ist der Schnellmodus aktiviert. Die Änderungen von anderen Benutzern werden in Echtzeit angezeigt.
      • +
      • Im Modus Strikt werden die Änderungen von anderen Nutzern verborgen, bis Sie auf das Symbol Speichern Speichern klicken, um Ihre eigenen Änderungen zu speichern und die Änderungen von anderen anzunehmen.
      • +
      +

      Der Modus kann unter Erweiterte Einstellungen festgelegt werden. Sie können den gewünschten Modus auch in der Registerkarte Zusammenarbeit in der oberen Symbolleiste festlegen, klicken Sie dazu einfach auf das Symbol Co-Bearbeitung Co-Bearbeitung.

      +

      Menü Co-Bearbeitung

      +

      Hinweis: Wenn Sie ein Dokument im Modus Schnell gemeinsam bearbeiten, ist die Option letzten rückgängig gemachten Vorgang wiederherstellen nicht verfügbar.

      Wenn ein Dokument im Modus Strikt von mehreren Benutzern gleichzeitig bearbeitet wird, werden die bearbeiteten Textpassagen mit gestrichelten Linien in verschiedenen Farben markiert. Wenn Sie den Mauszeiger über eine der bearbeiteten Passagen bewegen, wird der Name des Benutzers angezeigt, der diese Passage aktuell bearbeitet. Im Schnellmodus werden die Aktionen und die Namen der Co-Editoren angezeigt, sobald sie eine Textstelle bearbeitet haben.

      Die Anzahl der Benutzer, die am aktuellen Dokument arbeiten, wird in der linken unteren Ecke auf der Statusleiste angegeben - Anzahl der Benutzer. Wenn Sie sehen möchten wer die Datei aktuell bearbeitet, können Sie auf dieses Symbol klicken oder den Bereich Chat öffnen, der eine vollständige Liste aller Benutzer enthält.

      -

      Wenn niemand die Datei anzeigt oder bearbeitet, sieht das Symbol in der Kopfzeile des Editors folgendermaßen aus: Zugriffsrechte verwalten über dieses Symbol können Sie die Benutzer verwalten, die direkt aus dem Dokument auf die Datei zugreifen können; neue Benutzer einladen und ihnen die Berechtigung zum Bearbeiten, Lesen oder Überprüfen erteilen oder Benutzern Zugriffsrechte für die Datei verweigern. Klicken Sie auf dieses Symbol Anzahl der Benutzer, um den Zugriff auf die Datei zu verwalten. Sie können die Datei auch verwalten, wenn andere Benutzer aktuell mit der Bearbeitung oder Anzeige des Dokuments beschäftigt sind. Sie können die Zugriffsrechte auch in der Registerkarte Zusammenarbeit in der oberen Symbolleiste festlegen, klicken Sie dazu einfach auf das Symbol Teilen Teilen.

      +

      Wenn kein Benutzer die Datei anzeigt oder bearbeitet, sieht das Symbol in der Kopfzeile des Editors folgendermaßen aus: Zugriffsrechte verwalten - über dieses Symbol können Sie die Benutzer verwalten, die direkt aus dem Dokument auf die Datei zugreifen können; neue Benutzer einladen und ihnen die Berechtigung zum Bearbeiten, Lesen, Kommentieren, Ausfüllen von Formularen oder Betrachten des Dokuments erteilen oder Benutzern Zugriffsrechte für die Datei verweigern. Klicken Sie auf dieses Symbol Anzahl der Benutzer, um den Zugriff auf die Datei zu verwalten. Sie können die Datei auch verwalten, wenn andere Benutzer aktuell mit der Bearbeitung oder Anzeige des Dokuments beschäftigt sind. Sie können die Zugriffsrechte auch in der Registerkarte Zusammenarbeit in der oberen Symbolleiste festlegen, klicken Sie dazu einfach auf das Symbol Teilen Teilen.

      Sobald einer der Benutzer Änderungen durch Klicken auf das Symbol Speichern speichert, sehen die anderen Benutzer in der Statusleiste eine Notiz über vorliegende Aktualisierungen. Um Ihre eigenen Änderungen zu speichern, so dass diese auch von den anderen Benutzern eingesehen werden können und um die Aktualisierungen Ihrer Co-Editoren einzusehen, klicken Sie in der oberen linken Ecke der oberen Symbolleiste auf Speichern. Die Updates werden hervorgehoben, damit Sie nachvollziehen können, was genau geändert wurde.

      Sie können festlegen, welche Änderungen bei der Co-Bearbeitung hervorgehoben werden sollen: Klicken Sie dazu in der Registerkarte Datei auf die Option Erweiterte Einstellungen und wählen Sie zwischen keine, alle und letzte Änderungen in Echtzeit. Wenn Sie die Option Alle anzeigen auswählen, werden alle während der aktuellen Sitzung vorgenommenen Änderungen hervorgehoben. Wenn Sie die Option Letzte anzeigen auswählen, werden alle Änderungen hervorgehoben, die Sie vorgenommen haben, seit Sie das letzte Mal das Symbol Speichern Speichern angeklickt haben. Wenn Sie die Option Keine anzeigen auswählen, werden die während der aktuellen Sitzung vorgenommenen Änderungen nicht hervorgehoben.

      Chat

      @@ -44,10 +54,11 @@

      Um die Leiste mit den Chat-Nachrichten zu schließen, klicken Sie in der linken Seitenleiste auf das Symbol Chat oder klicken Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste erneut auf Chat Chat.

      Kommentare

      +

      Es ist möglich, im Offline-Modus mit Kommentaren zu arbeiten, ohne eine Verbindung zur Online-Version herzustellen).

      Einen Kommentar hinterlassen:

      1. Wählen Sie einen Textabschnitt, der Ihrer Meinung nach einen Fehler oder ein Problem enthält.
      2. -
      3. Wechseln Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste in die Registerkarte Einfügen oder Zusammenarbeit und klicken Sie in der rechten Seitenleiste auf Kommentar Kommentare, oder
        nutzen Sie das Kommentare Symbol in der linken Seitenleiste, um das Kommentarfeld zu öffnen, klicken Sie anschließend auf Kommentar hinzufügen oder
        klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste auf den gewünschten Textabschnitt und wählen Sie die Option Kommentar hinzufügen aus dem Kontextmenü aus.
      4. +
      5. Wechseln Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste in die Registerkarte Einfügen oder Zusammenarbeit und klicken Sie in der rechten Seitenleiste auf Kommentar Kommentare oder
        nutzen Sie das Kommentare Symbol in der linken Seitenleiste, um das Kommentarfeld zu öffnen, klicken Sie anschließend auf Kommentar hinzufügen oder
        klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste auf den gewünschten Textabschnitt und wählen Sie die Option Kommentar hinzufügen aus dem Kontextmenü aus.
      6. Geben Sie den gewünschten Text ein.
      7. Klicken Sie auf Kommentar hinzufügen/Hinzufügen.
      @@ -57,7 +68,7 @@
      • bearbeiten - klicken Sie dazu auf Bearbeiten
      • löschen - klicken Sie dazu auf Löschen
      • -
      • die Diskussion schließen - klicken Sie dazu auf Gelöst, wenn die im Kommentar angegebene Aufgabe oder das Problem gelöst wurde. Danach erhält die Diskussion, die Sie mit Ihrem Kommentar geöffnet haben, den Status aufgelöst. Um die Diskussion wieder zu öffnen, klicken Sie auf Erneut öffnen. Wenn Sie diese Funktion deaktivieren möchten, wechseln Sie in die Registerkarte Datei, wählen Sie die Option Erweiterte Einstellungen... und deaktivieren Sie das Kästchen Gelöste Kommentare einblenden, klicken Sie anschließend auf Anwenden. In diesem Fall werden die kommentierten Abschnitte nur markiert, wenn Sie auf Kommentare klicken.
      • +
      • Diskussion schließen - klicken Sie dazu auf Gelöst, wenn die im Kommentar angegebene Aufgabe oder das Problem gelöst wurde. Danach erhält die Diskussion, die Sie mit Ihrem Kommentar geöffnet haben, den Status aufgelöst. Um die Diskussion wieder zu öffnen, klicken Sie auf Erneut öffnen. Wenn Sie diese Funktion deaktivieren möchten, wechseln Sie in die Registerkarte Datei, wählen Sie die Option Erweiterte Einstellungen... und deaktivieren Sie das Kästchen Gelöste Kommentare einblenden, klicken Sie anschließend auf Anwenden. In diesem Fall werden die kommentierten Abschnitte nur markiert, wenn Sie auf Kommentare klicken.

      Wenn Sie im Modus Strikt arbeiten, werden neue Kommentare, die von den anderen Benutzern hinzugefügt wurden, erst eingeblendet, wenn Sie in der linken oberen Ecke der oberen Symbolleiste auf Speichern geklickt haben.

      Um die Leiste mit den Kommentaren zu schließen, klicken Sie in der linken Seitenleiste erneut auf Kommentare.

      diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm index a32985126..326d9251e 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm @@ -1,347 +1,656 @@  - Tastenkombinationen + Tastaturkürzel - + + +
      -

      Tastenkombinationen

      - +

      Tastaturkürzel

      +
        +
      • Windows/Linux
      • Mac OS
      • +
      +
      - + - - - + + + + - - - + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + - + + - - + + + - - + + + - - + + + - + + - - - + + + + - + + - - + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + - + - + + - + + - + + - + + + + + + + + + + + + + + - + + - + + - + + - + + - - + + + - - + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + - + - + + - + + - - + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + - + + - + + - + - + + - + + - + - + + - + + - + + - + + - - + + + - - + + + - + - - + + + - - + + + - + + - + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + - + - + + - + + - + + - + + - + + - - + + + - + + - + + - + + - - + + + - + + - + + - + + - + + - + + - + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + - + + - + + - - + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + - + - - + + + - + + - - - + + + + + + + + + + - - + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
      Ein Dokument bearbeitenEin Dokument bearbeiten
      Dateimenü öffnenALT+FÜber das Dateimenü können Sie das aktuelle Dokument speichern, drucken, herunterladen, Informationen einsehen, ein neues Dokument erstellen oder ein vorhandenes öffnen, auf die Hilfefunktion zugreifen oder die erweiterten Einstellungen öffnen.Dateimenü öffnenALT+F⌥ Option+FÜber das Dateimenü können Sie das aktuelle Dokument speichern, drucken, herunterladen, Informationen einsehen, ein neues Dokument erstellen oder ein vorhandenes öffnen, auf die Hilfefunktion zugreifen oder die erweiterten Einstellungen öffnen.
      Suchmaske öffnenSTRG+FÜber die Suchmaske können Sie im aktuellen Dokument nach Zeichen/Wörtern/Phrasen suchen.Dialogbox Suchen und Ersetzen öffnenSTRG+F^ STRG+F,
      ⌘ Cmd+F
      Über das Dialogfeld Suchen und Finden können Sie im aktuell bearbeiteten Dokument nach Zeichen/Wörtern/Phrasen suchen.
      Dialogbox „Suchen und Ersetzen“ mit dem Ersetzungsfeld öffnenSTRG+H^ STRG+HÖffnen Sie das Fenster Suchen und Ersetzen, um ein oder mehrere Ergebnisse der gefundenen Zeichen zu ersetzen.
      Letzten Suchvorgang wiederholen⇧ UMSCHALT+F4⇧ UMSCHALT+F4,
      ⌘ Cmd+G,
      ⌘ Cmd+⇧ UMSCHALT+F4
      Wiederholung des Suchvorgangs der vor dem Drücken der Tastenkombination ausgeführt wurde.
      Kommentarleiste öffnenSTRG+UMSCHALT+HSTRG+⇧ UMSCHALT+H^ STRG+⇧ UMSCHALT+H,
      ⌘ Cmd+⇧ UMSCHALT+H
      Über die Kommentarleiste können Sie Kommentare hinzufügen oder auf bestehende Kommentare antworten.
      Kommentarfeld öffnenALT+HÖffnet ein Textfeld zum Hinzufügen eines Kommentars.ALT+H⌥ Option+HEin Textfeld zum Eingeben eines Kommentars öffnen.
      Chatleiste öffnenALT+QÖffnet die Leiste Chat zum Senden einer Nachricht.ALT+Q⌥ Option+QChatleiste öffnen, um eine Nachricht zu senden.
      Dokument speichernSTRG+SSpeichert alle Änderungen im aktuellen Dokument.STRG+S^ STRG+S,
      ⌘ Cmd+S
      Speichert alle Änderungen im aktuellen Dokument. Die aktive Datei wird mit dem aktuellen Dateinamen, Speicherort und Dateiformat gespeichert.
      Dokument druckenSTRG+PSTRG+P^ STRG+P,
      ⌘ Cmd+P
      Ausdrucken mit einem verfügbaren Drucker oder speichern als Datei.
      Speichern unter...Strg+Unschalt+SDas Dokument wird in einem der unterstützten Dateiformate auf der Festplatte gespeichert: DOCX, PDF, TXT, ODT, RTF, HTML.Herunterladen als...STRG+⇧ UMSCHALT+S^ STRG+⇧ UMSCHALT+S,
      ⌘ Cmd+⇧ UMSCHALT+S
      Öffnen Sie das Menü Herunterladen als, um das aktuell bearbeitete Dokument in einem der unterstützten Dateiformate auf der Festplatte speichern: DOCX, PDF, ODT, TXT, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, HTML.
      VollbildF11F11 Dokumenteneditor wird an Ihren Bildschirm angepasst und im Vollbildmodus ausgeführt.
      Hilfe-MenüF1HilfemenüF1F1 Das Hilfe-Menü wird geöffnet.
      Vorhandene Datei öffnen (Desktop-Editoren)STRG+OAuf der Registerkarte Lokale Datei öffnen unter Desktop-Editoren wird das Standarddialogfeld geöffnet, in dem Sie eine vorhandene Datei auswählen können.
      Datei schließen (Desktop-Editoren)STRG+W,
      STRG+F4
      ^ STRG+W,
      ⌘ Cmd+W
      Das aktuelle Fenster in Desktop-Editoren schließen.
      Element-Kontextmenü⇧ UMSCHALT+F10⇧ UMSCHALT+F10Öffnen des ausgewählten Element-Kontextmenüs.
      NavigationNavigation
      Zum Anfang einer Zeile springenPOS1POS1POS1 Der Cursor wird an den Anfang der aktuellen Zeile verschoben.
      Zum Anfang eines Dokuments springenSTRG+POS1STRG+POS1^ STRG+POS1 Der Cursor wird an den Anfang des aktuellen Dokuments verschoben.
      Zum Ende der Zeile springenENDEENDEENDE Der Cursor wird an das Ende der aktuellen Zeile verschoben.
      Zum Ende des Dokuments springenSTRG+ENDESTRG+ENDE^ STRG+ENDE Der Cursor wird an das Ende der Dokuments verschoben.
      Zum Anfang der vorherigen Seite springenALT+STRG+BILD obenDer Cursor wird an den Anfang der Seite verschoben, die der aktuell bearbeiteten Seite vorausgeht.
      Zum Anfang der nächsten Seite springenALT+STRG+BILD unten⌥ Option+⌘ Cmd+⇧ UMSCHALT+BILD untenDer Cursor wird an den Anfang der Seite verschoben, die auf die aktuell bearbeitete Seite folgt.
      Nach unten scrollenBILD untenBILD untenBILD unten,
      ⌥ Option+Fn+
      Wechsel zum Ende der Seite.
      Nach oben scrollenBILD obenBILD obenBILD oben,
      ⌥ Option+Fn+
      Wechsel zum Anfang der Seite.
      Nächste SeiteALT+BILD untenALT+BILD unten⌥ Option+BILD unten Geht zur nächsten Seite im aktuellen Dokument über.
      Vorherige SeiteALT+BILD obenALT+BILD oben⌥ Option+BILD oben Geht zur vorherigen Seite im aktuellen Dokument über.
      VergrößernSTRG+Plus (+)Vergrößert die Ansicht des aktuellen Dokuments.STRG++^ STRG+=,
      ⌘ Cmd+=
      Die Ansicht des aktuellen Dokuments wird vergrößert.
      VerkleinernSTRG+Minus (-)Verkleinert die Ansicht des aktuellen Dokuments.STRG+-^ STRG+-,
      ⌘ Cmd+-
      Die Ansicht des aktuellen Dokuments wird verkleinert.
      Ein Zeichen nach links bewegenDer Mauszeiger bewegt sich ein Zeichen nach links.
      Ein Zeichen nach rechts bewegenDer Mauszeiger bewegt sich ein Zeichen nach rechts.
      Zum Anfang eines Wortes oder ein Wort nach links bewegenSTRG+^ STRG+,
      ⌘ Cmd+
      Der Mauszeiger wird zum Anfang eines Wortes oder ein Wort nach links verschoben.
      Ein Wort nach rechts bewegenSTRG+^ STRG+,
      ⌘ Cmd+
      Der Mauszeiger bewegt sich ein Wort nach rechts.
      Eine Reihe nach obenDer Mauszeiger wird eine Reihe nach oben verschoben.
      Eine Reihe nach untenDer Mauszeiger wird eine Reihe nach unten verschoben.
      SchreibenSchreiben
      Absatz beendenEingabetaste↵ Eingabetaste↵ Zurück Endet den aktuellen und beginnt einen neuen Absatz.
      Zeilenumbruch einfügenUMSCHALT+Eingabetaste⇧ UMSCHALT+↵ Eingabetaste⇧ UMSCHALT+↵ Zurück Fügt einen Zeilenumbruch ein, ohne einen neuen Absatz zu beginnen.
      ENTFRÜCKTASTE, ENTFLöscht ein Zeichen links (RÜCKTASTE) oder rechts (ENTF) vom Cursor.← Rücktaste,
      ENTF
      ← Rücktaste,
      ENTF
      Ein Zeichen nach links löschen (← Rücktaste) oder nach rechts (ENTF) vom Mauszeiger.
      Das Wort links neben dem Mauszeiger löschenSTRG+← Rücktaste^ STRG+← Rücktaste,
      ⌘ Cmd+← Rücktaste
      Das Wort links neben dem Mauszeiger wird gelöscht.
      Das Wort rechts neben dem Mauszeiger löschenSTRG+ENTF^ STRG+ENTF,
      ⌘ Cmd+ENTF
      Das Wort rechts neben dem Mauszeiger wird gelöscht.
      Geschütztes Leerzeichen erstellenSTRG+UMSCHALT+LEERTASTESTRG+⇧ UMSCHALT+␣ Leertaste^ STRG+⇧ UMSCHALT+␣ Leertaste Erstellt ein Leerzeichen zwischen den Zeichen, das nicht zum Anfang einer neuen Zeile führt.
      Geschützten Bindestrich erstellenSTRG+UMSCHALT+BINDESTRICHSTRG+⇧ UMSCHALT+Viertelgeviertstrich^ STRG+⇧ UMSCHALT+Viertelgeviertstrich Erstellt einen Bindestrich zwischen den Zeichen, der nicht zum Anfang einer neuen Zeile führt.
      Rückgängig machen und WiederholenRückgängig machen und Wiederholen
      Rückgängig machenSTRG+ZSTRG+Z^ STRG+Z,
      ⌘ Cmd+Z
      Die zuletzt durchgeführte Aktion wird rückgängig gemacht.
      WiederholenSTRG+YSTRG+J^ STRG+J,
      ⌘ Cmd+J,
      ⌘ Cmd+⇧ UMSCHALT+Z
      Die zuletzt durchgeführte Aktion wird wiederholt.
      Ausschneiden, Kopieren, EinfügenAusschneiden, Kopieren, Einfügen
      AusschneidenSTRG+X, UMSCHALT+ENTFSTRG+X,
      ⇧ UMSCHALT+ENTF
      ⌘ Cmd+X,
      ⇧ UMSCHALT+ENTF
      Der gewählte Textabschnitt wird gelöscht und in der Zwischenablage des Rechners abgelegt. Der kopierte Text kann später an einer anderen Stelle in demselben Dokument, in einem anderen Dokument oder einem anderen Programm eingefügt werden.
      KopierenSTRG+C, UMSCHALT+EINFGSTRG+C,
      STRG+EINFG
      ⌘ Cmd+C Der gewählte Textabschnitt wird in der Zwischenablage des Rechners abgelegt. Der kopierte Text kann später an einer anderen Stelle in demselben Dokument, in einem anderen Dokument oder einem anderen Programm eingefügt werden.
      EinfügenSTRG+V, UMSCHALT+EINFGSTRG+V,
      ⇧ UMSCHALT+EINFG
      ⌘ Cmd+V Der vorher kopierte Textabschnitt wird aus der Zwischenablage des Rechners an der aktuellen Cursorposition eingefügt. Der Text kann aus demselben Dokument, aus einem anderen Dokument bzw. Programm kopiert werden.
      Hyperlink einfügenSTRG+KSTRG+K⌘ Cmd+K Fügt einen Hyperlink ein, der einen Übergang beispielsweise zu einer Webadresse ermöglicht.
      Format übertragenSTRG+UMSCHALT+CKopiert die Formatierung des gewählten Textabschnitts. Die kopierte Formatierung kann später auf einen anderen Textabschnitt in demselben Dokument angewandt werden.STRG+⇧ UMSCHALT+C⌘ Cmd+⇧ UMSCHALT+CDie Formatierung des gewählten Textabschnitts wird kopiert. Die kopierte Formatierung kann später auf einen anderen Textabschnitt in demselben Dokument angewandt werden.
      Format anwendenSTRG+UMSCHALT+VFormat übertragenSTRG+⇧ UMSCHALT+V⌘ Cmd+⇧ UMSCHALT+V Wendet die vorher kopierte Formatierung auf den Text im aktuellen Dokument an.
      TextauswahlTextauswahl
      Alles wählenSTRG+AAlles auswählenSTRG+A⌘ Cmd+A Der gesamte Text wird ausgewählt, einschließlich Tabellen und Bildern.
      Fragment wählenUMSCHALT+PfeilWählen Sie Text Zeichen für Zeichen aus.⇧ UMSCHALT+ ⇧ UMSCHALT+ Den Text Zeichen für Zeichen auswählen.
      Von der aktuellen Cursorposition bis zum Zeilenanfang auswählenUMSCHALT+POS1⇧ UMSCHALT+POS1⇧ UMSCHALT+POS1 Einen Textabschnitt von der aktuellen Cursorposition bis zum Anfang der aktuellen Zeile auswählen.
      Von der Cursorposition bis zum Zeilenende auswählenUMSCHALT+ENDE⇧ UMSCHALT+ENDE⇧ UMSCHALT+ENDE Einen Textabschnitt von der aktuellen Cursorposition bis zum Ende der aktuellen Zeile auswählen.
      Ein Zeichen nach rechts auswählen⇧ UMSCHALT+⇧ UMSCHALT+Das Zeichen rechts neben dem Mauszeiger wird ausgewählt.
      Ein Zeichen nach links auswählen⇧ UMSCHALT+⇧ UMSCHALT+Das Zeichen links neben dem Mauszeiger wird ausgewählt.
      Bis zum Wortende auswählenSTRG+⇧ UMSCHALT+Einen Textfragment vom Cursor bis zum Ende eines Wortes wird ausgewählt.
      Bis zum Wortanfang auswählenSTRG+⇧ UMSCHALT+Einen Textfragment vom Cursor bis zum Anfang eines Wortes wird ausgewählt.
      Eine Reihe nach oben auswählen⇧ UMSCHALT+⇧ UMSCHALT+Eine Reihe nach oben auswählen (mit dem Cursor am Zeilenanfang).
      Eine Reihe nach unten auswählen⇧ UMSCHALT+⇧ UMSCHALT+Eine Reihe nach unten auswählen (mit dem Cursor am Zeilenanfang).
      Eine Seite nach oben auswählen⇧ UMSCHALT+BILD oben⇧ UMSCHALT+BILD obenDie Seite wird von der aktuellen Position des Mauszeigers bis zum oberen Teil des Bildschirms ausgewählt.
      Eine Seite nach unten auswählen⇧ UMSCHALT+BILD unten⇧ UMSCHALT+BILD untenDie Seite wird von der aktuellen Position des Mauszeigers bis zum unteren Teil des Bildschirms ausgewählt.
      TextformatierungTextformatierung
      FettSTRG+BSTRG+B^ STRG+B,
      ⌘ Cmd+B
      Zuweisung der Formatierung Fett im gewählten Textabschnitt.
      KursivSTRG+ISTRG+I^ STRG+I,
      ⌘ Cmd+I
      Zuweisung der Formatierung Kursiv im gewählten Textabschnitt.
      UnterstrichenSTRG+USTRG+U^ STRG+U,
      ⌘ Cmd+U
      Der gewählten Textabschnitt wird mit einer Linie unterstrichen.
      DurchgestrichenSTRG+5STRG+5^ STRG+5,
      ⌘ Cmd+5
      Der gewählte Textabschnitt wird durchgestrichen.
      TiefgestelltSTRG+. (Punkt)STRG+.^ STRG+⇧ UMSCHALT+>,
      ⌘ Cmd+⇧ UMSCHALT+>
      Der gewählte Textabschnitt wird verkleinert und tiefgestellt.
      HochgestelltSTRG+, (Komma)Der gewählte Textabschnitt wird vergrößert und hochgestellt.STRG+,^ STRG+⇧ UMSCHALT+<,
      ⌘ Cmd+⇧ UMSCHALT+<
      Der gewählte Textabschnitt wird verkleinert und hochgestellt wie z. B. in Bruchzahlen.
      Überschrift 1ALT+1 (Windows und Linux)
      ALT+UMSCHALT+1 (Mac)
      ALT+1⌥ Option+^ STRG+1 Dem gewählten Textabschnitt wird die Überschriftenformatvorlage Überschrift 1 zugwiesen.
      Überschrift 2ALT+2 (Windows und Linux)
      ALT+UMSCHALT+2 (Mac)
      ALT+2⌥ Option+^ STRG+2 Dem gewählten Textabschnitt wird die Überschriftenformatvorlage Überschrift 2 zugwiesen.
      Überschrift 3ALT+3 (Windows und Linux)
      ALT+UMSCHALT+3 (Mac)
      ALT+3⌥ Option+^ STRG+3 Dem gewählten Textabschnitt wird die Überschriftenformatvorlage Überschrift 3 zugwiesen.
      AufzählungslisteSTRG+UMSCHALT+LErstellt eine Aufzählungsliste anhand des gewählten Textabschnitts oder beginnt eine neue Liste.STRG+⇧ UMSCHALT+L^ STRG+⇧ UMSCHALT+L,
      ⌘ Cmd+⇧ UMSCHALT+L
      Baiserend auf dem gewählten Textabschnitt wird eine Aufzählungsliste erstellt oder eine neue Liste begonnen.
      Formatierung entfernenSTRG+LEERTASTESTRG+␣ Leertaste Entfernt die Formatierung im gewählten Textabschnitt.
      Schrift vergrößernSTRG+]STRG+]⌘ Cmd+] Vergrößert die Schrift des gewählten Textabschnitts um 1 Punkt.
      Schrift verkleinernSTRG+[STRG+[⌘ Cmd+[ Verkleinert die Schrift des gewählten Textabschnitts um 1 Punkt.
      Zentriert/linksbündig ausrichtenSTRG+ESTRG+E^ STRG+E,
      ⌘ Cmd+E
      Wechselt die Ausrichtung des Absatzes von zentriert auf linksbündig.
      Blocksatz/linksbündig ausrichtenSTRG+J, STRG+LSTRG+J,
      STRG+L
      ^ STRG+J,
      ⌘ Cmd+J
      Wechselt die Ausrichtung des Absatzes von Blocksatz auf linksbündig.
      Rechtsbündig/linksbündig ausrichtenSTRG+RSTRG+R^ STRG+R Wechselt die Ausrichtung des Absatzes von rechtsbündig auf linksbündig.
      Text tiefstellen (automatischer Abstand)STRG+=Das ausgewählte Textfragment wird tiefgestellt.
      Text hochstellen (automatischer Abstand)STRG+⇧ UMSCHALT++Das ausgewählte Textfragment wird hochgestellt.
      Seitenumbruch einfügenSTRG+↵ Eingabetaste^ STRG+↵ ZurückEinfügen eines Seitenumbruchs an der aktuellen Cursorposition.
      Einzug vergrößernSTRG+MSTRG+M^ STRG+M Vergrößert den linken Einzug des Absatzes schrittweise.
      Einzug verkleinernSTRG+UMSCHALT+MSTRG+⇧ UMSCHALT+M^ STRG+⇧ UMSCHALT+M Verkleinert den linken Einzug des Absatzes schrittweise.
      Seitenzahl einfügenSTRG+UMSCHALT+PDie aktuelle Seitenzahl wird im Text oder in der Fußnote eingefügt.STRG+⇧ UMSCHALT+P^ STRG+⇧ UMSCHALT+PDie aktuelle Seitennummer wird an der aktuellen Cursorposition hinzugefügt.
      FormatierungszeichenSTRG+⇧ UMSCHALT+Num8Ein- oder Ausblenden von nicht druckbaren Zeichen.
      Ein Zeichen nach links löschen← Rücktaste← RücktasteDas Zeichen links neben dem Mauszeiger wird gelöscht.
      Ein Zeichen nach rechts löschenENTFENTFDas Zeichen rechts neben dem Mauszeiger wird gelöscht.
      Bearbeiten von ObjektenObjekte ändern
      Verschiebung begrenzenUMSCHALT+ziehenBegrenzt die Verschiebung des gewählten Objekts horizontal oder vertikal.⇧ UMSCHALT + ziehen⇧ UMSCHALT + ziehenDie Verschiebung des gewählten Objekts wird horizontal oder vertikal begrenzt.
      15-Grad-Drehung einschaltenUMSCHALT+ziehen (beim Drehen)⇧ UMSCHALT + ziehen (beim Drehen)⇧ UMSCHALT + ziehen (beim Drehen) Begrenzt den Drehungswinkel auf 15-Grad-Stufen.
      Seitenverhältnis beibehaltenUMSCHALT+ziehen (beim Ändern der Größe)Behält den Seitenverhältnis des gewählten Objekts bei der Größenänderung bei.Seitenverhältnis sperren⇧ UMSCHALT + ziehen (beim Ändern der Größe)⇧ UMSCHALT + ziehen (beim Ändern der Größe)Das Seitenverhältnis des gewählten Objekts wird bei der Größenänderung beibehalten.
      Gerade Linie oder Pfeil zeichnen⇧ UMSCHALT + ziehen (beim Ziehen von Linien/Pfeilen)⇧ UMSCHALT + ziehen (beim Ziehen von Linien/Pfeilen)Zeichnen einer geraden vertikalen/horizontalen/45-Grad Linie oder eines solchen Pfeils.
      Bewegung in 1-Pixel-StufenSTRGHalten Sie die STRG-Taste gedrückt und nutzen Sie die Pfeile auf der Tastatur, um das gewählte Objekt um ein Pixel auf einmal zu verschieben.STRG+ Halten Sie die Taste STRG gedrückt und nutzen Sie die Pfeile auf der Tastatur, um das gewählte Objekt jeweils um ein Pixel zu verschieben.
      Tabellen bearbeiten
      Zur nächsten Zelle in einer Zeile übergeghen↹ Tab↹ TabZur nächsten Zelle in einer Zeile wechseln.
      Zur nächsten Zelle in einer Tabellenzeile wechseln.⇧ UMSCHALT+↹ Tab⇧ UMSCHALT+↹ TabZur vorherigen Zelle in einer Zeile wechseln.
      Zur nächsten Zeile wechselnZur nächsten Zeile in einer Tabelle wechseln.
      Zur vorherigen Zeile wechselnZur vorherigen Zeile in einer Tabelle wechseln.
      Neuen Abstz beginnen↵ Eingabetaste↵ ZurückEinen neuen Absatz in einer Zelle beginnen.
      Neue Zeile einfügen↹ Tab in der unteren rechten Tabellenzelle.↹ Tab in der unteren rechten Tabellenzelle.Eine neue Zeile am Ende der Tabelle einfügen.
      Sonderzeichen einfügen
      Formel einfügenALT+=Einfügen einer Formel an der aktuellen Cursorposition.
      diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm index 92be9dd2f..686578503 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@  - Einstellungen und Navigationswerkzeuge anzeigen + Ansichtseinstellungen und Navigationswerkzeuge @@ -13,22 +13,22 @@
      -

      Einstellungen und Navigationswerkzeuge anzeigen

      +

      Ansichtseinstellungen und Navigationswerkzeuge

      Der Dokumenteneditor bietet mehrere Werkzeuge, um Ihnen die Navigation durch Ihr Dokument zu erleichtern: Lineale, Zoom, Seitenzahlen usw.

      -

      Anzeigeeinstellungen anpassen

      -

      Um die Standardanzeigeeinstellung anzupassen und den günstigsten Modus für die Arbeit mit dem Dokument festzulegen, wechseln Sie in die Registerkarte Start, klicken auf das Symbol Ansichtseinstellungen Ansichtseinstellungen und wählen Sie, welche Oberflächenelemente ein- oder ausgeblendet werden sollen. Folgende Optionen stehen Ihnen im Menü Ansichtseinstellungen zur Verfügung:

      +

      Ansichtseinstellungen anpassen

      +

      Um die Standardanzeigeeinstellung anzupassen und den günstigsten Modus für die Arbeit mit dem Dokument festzulegen, klicken Sie auf das Symbol Ansichtseinstellungen Einstellungen anzeigen im rechten Bereich der Kopfzeile des Editors und wählen Sie, welche Oberflächenelemente ein- oder ausgeblendet werden sollen. Folgende Optionen stehen Ihnen im Menü Ansichtseinstellungen zur Verfügung:

        -
      • Symbolleiste ausblenden - die obere Symbolleiste und die zugehörigen Befehle werden ausgeblendet, während die Registerkarten weiterhin angezeigt werden. Ist diese Option aktiviert, können Sie jede beliebige Registerkarte anklicken, um die Symbolleiste anzuzeigen. Die Symbolleiste wird angezeigt bis Sie in einen Bereich außerhalb der Leiste klicken.
        Um den Modus zu deaktivieren, wechseln Sie in die Registerkarte Start, klicken Sie auf das Symbol Ansichtseinstellungen Ansichtseinstellungen und klicken Sie erneut auf Symbolleiste ausblenden. Die Symbolleiste ist wieder fixiert.

        Hinweis: Alternativ können Sie einen Doppelklick auf einer beliebigen Registerkarte ausführen, um die obere Symbolleiste zu verbergen oder wieder einzublenden.

        +
      • Symbolleiste ausblenden - die obere Symbolleiste und die zugehörigen Befehle werden ausgeblendet, während die Registerkarten weiterhin angezeigt werden. Ist diese Option aktiviert, können Sie jede beliebige Registerkarte anklicken, um die Symbolleiste anzuzeigen. Die Symbolleiste wird angezeigt bis Sie in einen Bereich außerhalb der Leiste klicken.
        Um den Modus zu deaktivieren, klicken Sie auf das Symbol Ansichtseinstellungen Einstellungen anzeigen und klicken Sie erneut auf Symbolleiste ausblenden. Die Symbolleiste ist wieder fixiert.

        Hinweis: Alternativ können Sie einen Doppelklick auf einer beliebigen Registerkarte ausführen, um die obere Symbolleiste zu verbergen oder wieder einzublenden.

      • -
      • Statusleiste ausblenden - die unterste Leiste wird ausgeblendet, auf der sich die Optionen Seitenzahlen und Zoom befinden. Um die ausgeblendete Statusleiste wieder einzublenden, klicken Sie erneut auf diese Option.
      • +
      • Statusleiste ausblenden - die unterste Leiste, auf der sich die Optionen Seitenzahlen und Zoom befinden, wird ausgeblendet. Um die ausgeblendete Statusleiste wieder einzublenden, klicken Sie erneut auf diese Option.
      • Lineale ausblenden - die Lineale, die das Ausrichten von Text und anderen Elementen in einem Dokument sowie das Festlegen von Rändern, Tabstopps und Absatzeinzügen ermöglichen, werden ausgeblendet. Um die ausgeblendeten Lineale wieder anzuzeigen, klicken Sie erneut auf diese Option.

      Die rechte Seitenleiste ist standartmäßig verkleinert. Um sie zu erweitern, wählen Sie ein beliebiges Objekt (z. B. Bild, Diagramm, Form) oder eine Textpassage aus und klicken Sie auf das Symbol des aktuell aktivierten Tabs auf der rechten Seite. Um die Seitenleiste wieder zu minimieren, klicken Sie erneut auf das Symbol.

      -

      Wenn die Felder Kommentare oder Chat geöffnet sind, wird die Breite der linken Seitenleiste durch einfaches Ziehen und Loslassen angepasst: Bewegen Sie den Mauszeiger über den Rand der linken Seitenleiste, so dass dieser sich in den bidirektionalen Pfeil verwandelt und ziehen Sie den Rand nach rechts, um die Seitenleiste zu erweitern. Um die ursprüngliche Breite wiederherzustellen, ziehen Sie den Rand nach links.

      +

      Wenn die Felder Kommentare oder Chat geöffnet sind, wird die Breite der linken Seitenleiste durch einfaches Ziehen und Loslassen angepasst: Bewegen Sie den Mauszeiger über den Rand der linken Seitenleiste, so dass dieser sich in den bidirektionalen Pfeil verwandelt und ziehen Sie den Rand nach rechts, um die Seitenleiste zu erweitern. Um die ursprüngliche Breite wiederherzustellen, ziehen Sie den Rand nach links.

      Verwendung der Navigationswerkzeuge

      Mithilfe der folgenden Werkzeuge können Sie durch Ihr Dokument navigieren:

      -

      Die Zoom-Funktion befindet sich in der rechten unteren Ecke und dient zum Vergrößern und Verkleinern des aktuellen Dokuments. Um den in Prozent angezeigten aktuellen Zoomwert zu ändern, klicken Sie darauf und wählen Sie einen der verfügbaren Zoomoptionen aus der Liste oder klicken Sie auf Vergrößern Vergrößern oder Verkleinern Verkleinern. Klicken Sie auf das Symbol Eine Seite, Eine Seite um die ganze Seite im Fenster anzuzeigen. Um das ganze Dokument an den sichtbaren Teil des Arbeitsbereichs anzupassen, klicken Sie auf das Symbol Seitenbreite Seitenbreite anpassen. Die Zoom-Einstellungen sind auch in der Gruppe Ansichtseinstellungen Ansichtseinstellungen verfügbar, das kann nützlich sein, wenn Sie die Statusleiste ausblenden möchten.

      -

      Die Seitenzahlanzeige stellt die aktuelle Seite als Teil aller Seiten im aktuellen Dokument dar (Seite „n“ von „nn“). Klicken Sie auf die Seitenzahlanzeige, um ein Fenster zu öffnen, wo Sie eine Seitenzahl eingeben können und schnell zu dieser Nummer wechseln können.

      +

      Die Zoom-Funktion befindet sich in der rechten unteren Ecke und dient zum Vergrößern und Verkleinern des aktuellen Dokuments. Um den in Prozent angezeigten aktuellen Zoomwert zu ändern, klicken Sie darauf und wählen Sie eine der verfügbaren Zoomoptionen aus der Liste oder klicken Sie auf Vergrößern Vergrößern oder Verkleinern Verkleinern. Klicken Sie auf das Symbol Eine Seite, Eine Seite um die ganze Seite im Fenster anzuzeigen. Um das ganze Dokument an den sichtbaren Teil des Arbeitsbereichs anzupassen, klicken Sie auf das Symbol Seitenbreite Seitenbreite anpassen. Die Zoom-Einstellungen sind auch in der Gruppe Ansichtseinstellungen Einstellungen anzeigen verfügbar, das kann nützlich sein, wenn Sie die Statusleiste ausblenden möchten.

      +

      Die Seitenzahlanzeige stellt die aktuelle Seite als Teil aller Seiten im aktuellen Dokument dar (Seite „n“ von „nn“). Klicken Sie auf die Seitenzahlanzeige, um ein Fenster zu öffnen, anschließend können Sie eine Seitenzahl eingeben und direkt zu dieser Seite wechseln.

    \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm index 85a5dc8c0..0392898dd 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm @@ -17,17 +17,17 @@

    Elektronische Dokumente stellen die am meisten benutzte Computerdateien dar. Dank des inzwischen hoch entwickelten Computernetzwerks ist es bequemer anstatt von gedruckten Dokumenten elektronische Dokumente zu verbreiten. Aufgrund der Vielfältigkeit der Geräte, die für die Anzeige der Dokumente verwendet werden, gibt es viele proprietäre und offene Dateiformate. Der Dokumenteneditor unterstützt die geläufigsten Formate.

    - + - - + + - + @@ -37,6 +37,13 @@ + + + + + + + @@ -44,6 +51,13 @@ + + + + + + + @@ -60,17 +74,24 @@ - + + + + + + + + - - + + diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm index 8e4024cb5..aa5116c30 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm @@ -15,16 +15,24 @@

    Registerkarte Datei

    Über die Registerkarte Datei können Sie einige grundlegende Vorgänge in der aktuellen Datei durchführen.

    -

    Registerkarte Datei

    -

    Über diese Registerkarte können Sie:

    +
    +

    Dialogbox Online-Dokumenteneditor:

    +

    Registerkarte Datei

    +
    +
    +

    Dialogbox Desktop-Dokumenteneditor:

    +

    Registerkarte Datei

    +
    +

    Sie können:

      -
    • die aktuelle Datei speichern (wenn die Option automatische Sicherung deaktiviert ist), runterladen, drucken oder umbenennen,
    • -
    • ein neues Dokument erstellen oder eine kürzlich bearbeitete Datei öffnen,
    • +
    • In der Online-Version können Sie die aktuelle Datei speichern (falls die Option Automatisch speichern deaktiviert ist), herunterladen als (Speichern des Dokuments im ausgewählten Format auf der Festplatte des Computers), eine Kopie speichern als (Speichern einer Kopie des Dokuments im Portal im ausgewählten Format), drucken oder umbenennen. In der Desktop-version können Sie die aktuelle Datei mit der Option Speichern unter Beibehaltung des aktuellen Dateiformats und Speicherorts speichern oder Sie können die aktuelle Datei unter einem anderen Namen, Speicherort oder Format speichern. Nutzen Sie dazu die Option Speichern als. Weiter haben Sie die Möglichkeit die Datei zu drucken.
    • +
    • Sie können die Datei auch mit einem Passwort schützen oder ein Passwort ändern oder entfernen (diese Funktion steht nur in der Desktop-Version zur Verfügung).
    • +
    • Weiter können Sie ein neues Dokument erstellen oder eine kürzlich bearbeitete Datei öffnen, (nur in der Online-Version verfügbar,
    • allgemeine Informationen zum Dokument einsehen,
    • -
    • Zugangsrechte verwalten,
    • -
    • die Versionshistorie verfolgen,
    • -
    • auf die Erweiterten Einstellungen des Dokumenteneditors zugreifen und
    • -
    • in die Dokumentenliste zurückkehren.
    • +
    • Zugriffsrechte verwalten (nur in der Online-Version verfügbar,
    • +
    • Versionsverläufe nachverfolgen (nur in der Online-Version verfügbar,
    • +
    • auf die Erweiterten Einstellungen des Editors zugreifen und
    • +
    • in der Desktiop-Version den Ordner öffnen wo die Datei gespeichert ist; nutzen Sie dazu das Fenster Datei-Explorer. In der Online-Version haben Sie außerdem die Möglichkeit den Ordner des Moduls Dokumente, in dem die Datei gespeichert ist, in einem neuen Browser-Fenster zu öffnen.
    diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/ProgramInterface/HomeTab.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/ProgramInterface/HomeTab.htm index bf1d23897..8b2869a89 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/ProgramInterface/HomeTab.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/ProgramInterface/HomeTab.htm @@ -14,23 +14,29 @@

    Registerkarte Start

    -

    Die Registerkarte Start wird standardmäßig geöffnet, wenn Sie ein beliebiges Dokument öffnen. Über diese Registerkarte können Sie Schriftart und Absätze formatieren. Auch einige andere Optionen sind hier verfügbar, wie Seriendruck, Farbschemata und Ansichtseinstellungen.

    -

    Registerkarte Start

    -

    Über diese Registerkarte können Sie:

    +

    Die Registerkarte Start wird standardmäßig geöffnet, wenn Sie ein beliebiges Dokument öffnen. Über diese Registerkarte können Sie Schriftart und Absätze formatieren. Auch einige andere Optionen sind hier verfügbar, wie Seriendruck und Farbschemata.

    +
    +

    Dialogbox Online-Dokumenteneditor:

    +

    Registerkarte Start

    +
    +
    +

    Dialogbox Desktop-Dokumenteneditor:

    +

    Registerkarte Start

    +
    +

    Sie können:

    diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/ProgramInterface/InsertTab.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/ProgramInterface/InsertTab.htm index 63d9d1108..58526ba8d 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/ProgramInterface/InsertTab.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/ProgramInterface/InsertTab.htm @@ -15,12 +15,20 @@

    Registerkarte Einfügen

    Die Registerkarte Einfügen ermöglicht das Hinzufügen einiger Seitenformatierungselemente sowie visueller Objekte und Kommentare.

    -

    Registerkarte Einfügen

    +
    +

    Dialogbox Online-Dokumenteneditor:

    +

    Registerkarte Einfügen

    +
    +
    +

    Dialogbox Desktop-Dokumenteneditor:

    +

    Registerkarte Einfügen

    +

    Sie können:

    diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/ProgramInterface/LayoutTab.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/ProgramInterface/LayoutTab.htm index 7d101c457..c81711f0b 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/ProgramInterface/LayoutTab.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/ProgramInterface/LayoutTab.htm @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ Registerkarte Layout - + @@ -14,15 +14,23 @@

    Registerkarte Layout

    -

    Über die Registerkarte Layout, können Sie die Darstellung des Dokuments ändern: Legen Sie die Seitenparameter fest und definieren Sie die Anordnung der visuellen Elemente.

    -

    Registerkarte Layout

    -

    Über diese Registerkarte können Sie:

    +

    Über die Registerkarte Layout, können Sie die Darstellung des Dokuments ändern: Legen Sie die Seiteneinstellungen fest und definieren Sie die Anordnung der visuellen Elemente.

    +
    +

    Dialogbox Online-Dokumenteneditor:

    +

    Registerkarte Layout

    +
    +
    +

    Dialogbox Desktop-Dokumenteneditor:

    +

    Registerkarte Layout

    +
    +

    Sie können:

    diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm index 545a0c606..137cadc81 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ Registerkarte Plug-ins - + @@ -15,19 +15,29 @@

    Registerkarte Plug-ins

    Die Registerkarte Plug-ins ermöglicht den Zugriff auf erweiterte Bearbeitungsfunktionen mit verfügbaren Komponenten von Drittanbietern. Unter dieser Registerkarte können Sie auch Makros festlegen, um Routinevorgänge zu vereinfachen.

    -

    Registerkarte Plug-ins

    +
    +

    Dialogbox Online-Dokumenteneditor:

    +

    Registerkarte Plug-ins

    +
    +
    +

    Dialogbox Desktop-Dokumenteneditor:

    +

    Registerkarte Plug-ins

    +
    +

    Durch Anklicken der Schaltfläche Einstellungen öffnet sich das Fenster, in dem Sie alle installierten Plugins anzeigen und verwalten sowie eigene Plugins hinzufügen können.

    Durch Anklicken der Schaltfläche Makros öffnet sich ein Fenster in dem Sie Ihre eigenen Makros erstellen und ausführen können. Um mehr über Makros zu erfahren lesen Sie bitte unsere API-Dokumentation.

    -

    Derzeit stehen folgende standardmäßig folgende Plug-ins zur Verfügung:

    +

    Derzeit stehen standardmäßig folgende Plug-ins zur Verfügung:

      -
    • ClipArt ermöglicht das Hinzufügen von Bildern aus der ClipArt-Sammlung.
    • -
    • OCR ermöglicht es, in einem Bild enthaltene Texte zu erkennen und in den Dokumenttext einzufügen.
    • -
    • PhotoEditor - Bearbeitung von Bildern: Zuschneiden, Größe ändern, Effekte anwenden usw.
    • -
    • Speech ermöglicht es, ausgewählten Text in Sprache zu konvertieren.
    • -
    • Symbol Table - Einfügen von speziellen Symbolen in Ihren Text.
    • -
    • Translator - Übersetzen von ausgewählten Textabschnitten in andere Sprachen.
    • -
    • YouTube ermöglicht das Einbetten von YouTube-Videos in Ihrem Dokument.
    • +
    • Senden erlaubt das versenden des Dokumentes durch das Standard Desktop Email Programm (nur in der Desktop-Version verfügbar).
    • +
    • Code hervorheben - Hervorhebung der Syntax des Codes durch Auswahl der erforderlichen Sprache, des Stils, der Hintergrundfarbe.
    • +
    • OCR ermöglicht es, in einem Bild enthaltene Texte zu erkennen und es in den Dokumenttext einzufügen.
    • +
    • PhotoEditor - Bearbeitung von Bildern: zuschneiden, umlegen, rotieren, Linien und Formen zeichnen, Icons und Text einzufügen, eine Bildmaske zu laden und verschiedene Filter anzuwenden, wie zum Beispiel Grauskala, Invertiert, Verschwimmen, Verklaren, Emboss, usw.
    • +
    • Speech ermöglicht es, ausgewählten Text in Sprache zu konvertieren.
    • +
    • Tabellensymbole - erlaubt es spezielle Symbole in Ihren Text einzufügen (nur in der Desktop version verfügbar).
    • +
    • Thesaurus - erlaubt es nach Synonymen und Antonymen eines Wortes zu suchen und es durch das ausgewählte Wort zu ersetzen.
    • +
    • Translator - erlaubt es den ausgewählten Textabschnitten in andere Sprachen zu übersetzen.
    • +
    • YouTube erlaubt es YouTube-Videos in Ihr Dokument einzubinden.
    -

    Die Plug-ins Wordpress und EasyBib können verwendet werden, wenn Sie die entsprechenden Dienste in Ihren Portaleinstellungen einrichten. Sie können die folgenden Anleitungen für die Serverversion oder für die SaaS-Version verwenden.

    +

    Die Plug-ins Wordpress und EasyBib können verwendet werden, wenn Sie die entsprechenden Dienste in Ihren Portaleinstellungen einrichten. Sie können die folgenden Anleitungen für die Serverversion oder für die SaaS-Version verwenden.

    Um mehr über Plug-ins zu erfahren lesen Sie bitte unsere API-Dokumentation. Alle derzeit als Open-Source verfügbaren Plug-in-Beispiele sind auf GitHub verfügbar.

    diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm index 494a67538..cfd039a60 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm @@ -15,19 +15,38 @@

    Einführung in die Benutzeroberfläche des Dokumenteneditors

    Der Dokumenteneditor verfügt über eine Benutzeroberfläche mit Registerkarten, in der Bearbeitungsbefehle nach Funktionalität in Registerkarten gruppiert sind.

    -

    Editor

    +
    +

    Dialogbox Online-Dokumenteneditor:

    +

    Dialogbox Online-Dokumenteneditor

    +
    +
    +

    Dialogbox Desktop-Dokumenteneditor:

    +

    Dialogbox Desktop-Dokumenteneditor

    +

    Die Oberfläche des Editors besteht aus folgenden Hauptelementen:

      -
    1. In der Kopfzeile des Editors werden das Logo, die Menü-Registerkarten und der Name des Dokuments angezeigt sowie drei Symbole auf der rechten Seite, über die Sie Zugriffsrechte festlegen, zur Dokumentenliste zurückkehren, Einstellungen anzeigen und auf die Erweiterten Einstellungen des Editors zugreifen können.

      Symbole in der Kopfzeile des Editors

      +
    2. In der Kopfzeile des Editors werden das Logo, geöffnete Dokumente, der Name des Dokuments und die Menü-Registerkarten angezeigt.

      Im linken Bereich der Kopfzeile des Editors finden Sie die Schaltflächen Speichern, Datei drucken, Rückgängig machen und Wiederholen.

      +

      Symbole in der Kopfzeile des Editors

      +

      Im rechten Bereich der Kopfzeile des Editors werden der Benutzername und die folgenden Symbole angezeigt:

      +
        +
      • Dateispeicherort öffnen Dateispeicherort öffnen - In der Desktiop-Version können Sie den Ordner öffnen in dem die Datei gespeichert ist; nutzen Sie dazu das Fenster Datei-Explorer. In der Online-Version haben Sie außerdem die Möglichkeit den Ordner des Moduls Dokumente, in dem die Datei gespeichert ist, in einem neuen Browser-Fenster zu öffnen.
      • +
      • Einstellungen anzeigen - hier können Sie die Ansichtseinstellungen anpassen und auf die Erweiterten Einstellungen des Editors zugreifen.
      • +
      • Zugriffsrechte verwalten Zugriffsrechte verwalten (nur in der Online-Version verfügbar - Zugriffsrechte für die in der Cloud gespeicherten Dokumente festlegen.
      • +
    3. -
    4. Abhängig von der ausgewählten Registerkarte werden in der oberen Symbolleiste eine Reihe von Bearbeitungsbefehlen angezeigt. Aktuell stehen die folgenden Registerkarten zur Verfügung: Datei, Start, Einfügen, Layout, Referenzen, Zusammenarbeit, Plug-ins.

      Die Befehle Drucken, Speichern, Kopieren, Einfügen, Rückgängig machen und Wiederholen stehen unabhängig von der ausgewählten Registerkarte jederzeit im linken Teil der oberen Menüleiste zur Verfügung.

      -

      Symbole in der oberen Menüleiste

      +
    5. Abhängig von der ausgewählten Registerkarte werden in der oberen Symbolleiste eine Reihe von Bearbeitungsbefehlen angezeigt. Aktuell stehen die folgenden Registerkarten zur Verfügung: Datei, Start, Einfügen, Layout, Referenzen, Zusammenarbeit, Schützen, Plug-ins.

      Die Befehle Kopieren Kopieren und Einfügen Einfügen stehen unabhängig von der ausgewählten Registerkarte jederzeit im linken Teil der oberen Menüleiste zur Verfügung.

    6. In der Statusleiste am unteren Rand des Editorfensters finden Sie die Anzeige der Seitennummer und Benachrichtigungen vom System (wie beispielsweise „Alle Änderungen wurden gespeichert" etc.), außerdem können Sie die Textsprache festlegen und die Rechtschreibprüfung aktivieren, den Modus Änderungen nachverfolgen einschalten und den Zoom anpassen.
    7. -
    8. Über die Symbole der linken Seitenleiste können Sie die Funktion Suchen und Ersetzen nutzen, Kommentare, Chats und die Navigation öffnen, unser Support-Team kontaktieren und Informationen über das Programm einsehen.
    9. +
    10. Symbole in der linken Seitenleiste: +
    11. Über die rechte Seitenleiste können zusätzliche Parameter von verschiedenen Objekten angepasst werden. Wenn Sie im Text ein bestimmtes Objekt auswählen, wird das entsprechende Symbol in der rechten Seitenleiste aktiviert. Klicken Sie auf dieses Symbol, um die rechte Seitenleiste zu erweitern.
    12. Horizontale und vertikale Lineale ermöglichen das Ausrichten von Text und anderen Elementen in einem Dokument sowie das Festlegen von Rändern, Tabstopps und Absatzeinzügen.
    13. -
    14. Über den Arbeitsbereich können Sie den Dokumentinhalt anzeigen und Daten eingeben und bearbeiten.
    15. +
    16. Über den Arbeitsbereich können Sie den Dokumenteninhalt anzeigen und Daten eingeben und bearbeiten.
    17. Über die Scroll-Leiste auf der rechten Seite können Sie mehrseitige Dokumente nach oben oder unten scrollen.

    Zur Vereinfachung können Sie bestimmte Komponenten verbergen und bei Bedarf erneut anzeigen. Weitere Informationen zum Anpassen der Ansichtseinstellungen finden Sie auf dieser Seite.

    diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/ProgramInterface/ReferencesTab.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/ProgramInterface/ReferencesTab.htm index a1d7abd7c..0f77ce564 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/ProgramInterface/ReferencesTab.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/ProgramInterface/ReferencesTab.htm @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@  - Registerkarte Referenzen + Registerkarte Verweise - + @@ -13,14 +13,23 @@
    -

    Registerkarte Referenzen

    -

    Unter der Registerkarte Referenzen, können Sie verschiedene Arten von Referenzen verwalten: Inhaltsverzeichnis erstellen und aktualisieren, Fußnoten erstellen und bearbeiten, Links einfügen.

    -

    Registerkarte Referenzen

    -

    Unter dieser Registerkarte können Sie:

    +

    Registerkarte Verweise

    +

    Unter der Registerkarte Verweise, können Sie verschiedene Arten von Verweisen verwalten: ein Inhaltsverzeichnis erstellen und aktualisieren, Fußnoten erstellen und bearbeiten, als auch Verknüpfungen einfügen.

    +
    +

    Dialogbox Online-Dokumenteneditor:

    +

    Registerkarte Verweise

    +
    +
    +

    Dialogbox Desktop-Dokumenteneditor:

    +

    Registerkarte Verweise

    +
    +

    Auf dieser Registerkarte können Sie:

    diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/ProgramInterface/ReviewTab.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/ProgramInterface/ReviewTab.htm index 82070bbcd..395a8fd2b 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/ProgramInterface/ReviewTab.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/ProgramInterface/ReviewTab.htm @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ Registerkarte Zusammenarbeit - + @@ -14,18 +14,26 @@

    Registerkarte Zusammenarbeit

    -

    Unter der Registerkarte Zusammenarbeit können Sie die Zusammenarbeit im Dokument organisieren: die Datei teilen, einen Co-Bearbeitungsmodus auswählen, Kommentare verwalten, vorgenommene Änderungen verfolgen, alle Versionen und Revisionen einsehen.

    -

    Registerkarte Zusammenarbeit

    -

    Sie können:

    +

    Unter der Registerkarte Zusammenarbeit können Sie die Zusammenarbeit im Dokument organisieren. In der Online-Version können Sie die Datei mit jemanden teilen, einen gleichzeitigen Bearbeitungsmodus auswählen, Kommentare verwalten, von einem Zugriffsberechtigtem vorgenommene Änderungen nachverfolgen und alle Versionen und Überarbeitungen einsehen. In der Desktop-Version können Sie Kommentare verwalten und die Funktion ‘Änderungen nachverfolgen’ nutzen.

    +
    +

    Dialogbox Online-Dokumenteneditor:

    +

    Registerkarte Zusammenarbeit

    +
    +
    +

    Dialogbox Desktop-Dokumenteneditor:

    +

    Registerkarte Zusammenarbeit

    +
    +

    Auf dieser Registerkarte können Sie:

    diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/AddFormulasInTables.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/AddFormulasInTables.htm new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5e8d6ceae --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/AddFormulasInTables.htm @@ -0,0 +1,166 @@ + + + + Formeln in Tabellen verwenden + + + + + + + +
    +
    + +
    +

    Formeln in Tabellen verwenden

    +

    Fügen Sie eine Formel ein

    +

    Sie können einfache Berechnungen für Daten in Tabellenzellen durchführen, indem Sie Formeln hinzufügen. So fügen Sie eine Formel in eine Tabellenzelle ein:

    +
      +
    1. Platzieren Sie den Zeiger in der Zelle, in der Sie das Ergebnis anzeigen möchten.
    2. +
    3. Klicken Sie in der rechten Seitenleiste auf die Schaltfläche Formel hinzufügen.
    4. +
    5. Geben Sie im sich öffnenden Fenster Formeleinstellungen die erforderliche Formel in das Feld Formel ein.

      Sie können eine benötigte Formel manuell eingeben, indem Sie die allgemeinen mathematischen Operatoren (+, -, *, /) verwenden, z. B. =A1*B2 oder verwenden Sie die Dropdown-Liste Funktion einfügen, um eine der eingebetteten Funktionen auszuwählen, z. B. =PRODUKT (A1, B2).

      +

      Formel einfügen

      +
    6. +
    7. Geben Sie die erforderlichen Argumente manuell in den Klammern im Feld Formel an. Wenn die Funktion mehrere Argumente erfordert, müssen diese durch Kommas getrennt werden.
    8. +
    9. Verwenden Sie die Dropdown-Liste Zahlenformat, wenn Sie das Ergebnis in einem bestimmten Zahlenformat anzeigen möchten.
    10. +
    11. OK klicken.
    12. +
    +

    Das Ergebnis wird in der ausgewählten Zelle angezeigt.

    +

    Um die hinzugefügte Formel zu bearbeiten, wählen Sie das Ergebnis in der Zelle aus und klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche Formel hinzufügen in der rechten Seitenleiste, nehmen Sie die erforderlichen Änderungen im Fenster Formeleinstellungen vor und klicken Sie auf OK.

    +
    +

    Verweise auf Zellen hinzufügen

    +

    Mit den folgenden Argumenten können Sie schnell Verweise auf Zellbereiche hinzufügen:

    +
      +
    • OBEN - Ein Verweis auf alle Zellen in der Spalte über der ausgewählten Zelle
    • +
    • LINKS - Ein Verweis auf alle Zellen in der Zeile links von der ausgewählten Zelle
    • +
    • UNTEN - Ein Verweis auf alle Zellen in der Spalte unter der ausgewählten Zelle
    • +
    • RECHTS - Ein Verweis auf alle Zellen in der Zeile rechts von der ausgewählten Zelle
    • +
    +

    Diese Argumente können mit Funktionen AVERAGE, COUNT, MAX, MIN, PRODUCT und SUM (MITTELWERT, ANZAHL, MAX, MIN, PRODUKT, SUMME) verwendet werden.

    +

    Sie können auch manuell Verweise auf eine bestimmte Zelle (z. B. A1) oder einen Zellbereich (z. B. A1: B3) eingeben.

    +

    Verwenden Sie Lesezeichen

    +

    Wenn Sie bestimmten Zellen in Ihrer Tabelle Lesezeichen hinzugefügt haben, können Sie diese Lesezeichen als Argumente bei der Eingabe von Formeln verwenden.

    +

    Platzieren Sie im Fenster Formeleinstellungen den Mauszeiger in den Klammern im Eingabefeld Formel, in dem das Argument hinzugefügt werden soll, und wählen Sie in der Dropdown-Liste Lesezeichen einfügen eines der zuvor hinzugefügten Lesezeichen aus.

    +

    Formelergebnisse aktualisieren

    +

    Wenn Sie einige Werte in den Tabellenzellen ändern, müssen Sie die Formelergebnisse manuell aktualisieren:

    +
      +
    • Um ein einzelnes Formelergebnis zu aktualisieren, wählen Sie das gewünschte Ergebnis aus und drücken Sie F9 oder klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste auf das Ergebnis und verwenden Sie die Option Feld aktualisieren im Menü.
    • +
    • Um mehrere Formelergebnisse zu aktualisieren, wählen Sie die erforderlichen Zellen oder die gesamte Tabelle aus und drücken Sie F9.
    • +
    +
    +

    Eingebettete Funktionen

    +

    Sie können die folgenden mathematischen, statistischen und logischen Standardfunktionen verwenden:

    +
    FormatFormate BeschreibungAnzeigenBearbeitenAnzeigeBearbeitung Download
    DOC Dateierweiterung für Textverarbeitungsdokumente, die mit Microsoft Word erstellt werden ++
    + +
    DOTXWord Open XML Dokumenten-Vorlage
    Gezipptes, XML-basiertes, von Microsoft für Dokumentenvorlagen entwickeltes Dateiformat. Eine DOTX-Vorlage enthält Formatierungseinstellungen, Stile usw. und kann zum Erstellen mehrerer Dokumente mit derselben Formatierung verwendet werden.
    +++
    ODT Textverarbeitungsformat von OpenDocument, ein offener Standard für elektronische Dokumente+ +
    OTTOpenDocument-Dokumentenvorlage
    OpenDocument-Dateiformat für Dokumentenvorlagen. Eine OTT-Vorlage enthält Formatierungseinstellungen, Stile usw. und kann zum Erstellen mehrerer Dokumente mit derselben Formatierung verwendet werden.
    +++
    RTF Rich Text Format
    Plattformunabhängiges Datei- und Datenaustauschformat von Microsoft für formatierte Texte
    PDFPortable Document Format
    Dateiformat, mit dem Dokumente unabhängig vom ursprünglichen Anwendungsprogramm, Betriebssystem und der Hardware originalgetreu wiedergegeben werden können
    Portable Document Format
    Dateiformat, mit dem Dokumente unabhängig vom ursprünglichen Anwendungsprogramm, Betriebssystem und der Hardware originalgetreu wiedergegeben werden können.
    + +
    PDF/APortable Document Format / A
    Eine ISO-standardisierte Version des Portable Document Format (PDF), die auf die Archivierung und Langzeitbewahrung elektronischer Dokumente spezialisiert ist.
    ++
    HTML HyperText Markup Language
    Hauptauszeichnungssprache für Webseiten
    ++Online-Version
    EPUB
    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    KategorieFunktionBeschreibungBeispiel
    MathematischesABS(x)Mit dieser Funktion wird der Absolutwert einer Zahl zurückgegeben.=ABS(-10)
    Rückgabe 10
    LogischesAND(logisch1, logisch2, ...) (UND)Mit dieser Funktion wird überprüft, ob der von Ihnen eingegebene logische Wert WAHR oder FALSCH ist. Die Funktion gibt 1 (WAHR) zurück, wenn alle Argumente WAHR sind.=AND (1>0,1>3)
    Rückgabe 0
    StatistischesAVERAGE (MITTELWERT) (Argumentliste) Mit dieser Funktion wird der Datenbereich analysiert und der Durchschnittswert ermittelt.=AVERAGE (4,10)
    Rückgabe 7
    StatistischesCOUNT (ANZAHL) (Argumentliste)Mit dieser Funktion wird die Anzahl der ausgewählten Zellen gezählt, die Zahlen enthalten, wobei leere Zellen oder den Text ignorieren werden.=COUNT(A1: B3)
    Rückgabe 6
    LogischesDEFINED () (DEFINIERT)Die Funktion wertet aus, ob ein Wert in der Zelle definiert ist. Die Funktion gibt 1 zurück, wenn der Wert fehlerfrei definiert und berechnet wurde, und 0, wenn der Wert nicht fehlerhaft definiert oder berechnet wurde.=DEFINED(A1)
    LogischesFALSE () (FALSCH) Die Funktion gibt 0 (FALSCH) zurück und benötigt kein Argument.=FALSE
    Rückgabe 0
    MathematischesINT (x) (GANZZAHL)Mit dieser Funktion wird der ganzzahlige Teil der angegebenen Zahl analysiert und zurückgegeben.=INT(2,5)
    Rückgabe 2
    StatistischesMAX (Nummer1, Nummer2, ...)Mit dieser Funktion wird der Datenbereich analysiert und die größte Anzahl ermittelt.=MAX(15,18,6)
    Rückgabe 18
    StatistischesMIN(Nummer1, Nummer2,...)Mit dieser Funktion wird der Datenbereich analysiert und die kleinste Nummer ermittelt.=MIN(15,18,6)
    Rückgabe 6
    MathematischesMOD (x, y) (REST)Mit dieser Funktion wird der Rest nach der Division einer Zahl durch den angegebenen Divisor zurückgegeben.=MOD (6,3)
    Rückgabe 0
    LogischesNOT (NICHT) (logisch)Mit dieser Funktion wird überprüft, ob der von Ihnen eingegebene logische Wert WAHR oder FALSCH ist. Die Funktion gibt 1 (WAHR) zurück, wenn das Argument FALSCH ist, und 0 (FALSCH), wenn das Argument WAHR ist.=NOT(2<5)
    Rückgabe 0
    LogischesODER OR(logisch1, logisch2, ...) (ODER)Mit dieser Funktion wird überprüft, ob der von Ihnen eingegebene logische Wert WAHR oder FALSCH ist. Die Funktion gibt 0 (FALSCH) zurück, wenn alle Argumente FALSCH sind.=OR(1>0,1>3)
    Rückgabe 1
    MathematischesPRODUCT (PRODUKT) (Argumentliste) Mit dieser Funktion werden alle Zahlen im ausgewählten Zellbereich multipliziert und das Produkt zurückgegeben.=PRODUKT(2,5)
    Rückgabe 10
    MathematischesROUND(x, num_digits) (RUNDEN) Mit dieser Funktion wird die Zahl auf die gewünschte Anzahl von Stellen gerundet.=ROUND(2,25,1)
    Rückgabe 2.3
    MathematischesSIGN(x) (VORZEICHEN)Mit dieser Funktion wird das Vorzeichen einer Zahl zurückgegeben. Wenn die Zahl positiv ist, gibt die Funktion 1 zurück. Wenn die Zahl negativ ist, gibt die Funktion -1 zurück. Wenn die Zahl 0 ist, gibt die Funktion 0 zurück.SIGN(-12)
    Rückgabe -1
    MathematischesSUM (SUMME) (Argumentliste)Mit dieser Funktion werden alle Zahlen im ausgewählten Zellenbereich addiert und das Ergebnis zurückgegeben.=SUM(5,3,2)
    Rückgabe 10
    LogischesTRUE() (WAHR)Die Funktion gibt 1 (WAHR) zurück und benötigt kein Argument.=TRUE
    gibt 1 zurück
    +
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/AddWatermark.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/AddWatermark.htm new file mode 100644 index 000000000..483b45c96 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/AddWatermark.htm @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + Wasserzeichen hinzufügen + + + + + + + +
    +
    + +
    +

    Wasserzeichen hinzufügen

    +

    Ein Wasserzeichen ist ein Text oder Bild, welches unter dem Haupttextbereich platziert ist. Text-Wasserzeichen erlaubt Ihnen Ihr Dokument mit einem Status zu versehen (bspw. Vertraulich, Entwurf usw.). Bild-Wasserzeichen erlaubt Ihnen ein Bild hinzuzufügen, bspw. Ihr Firmenlogo.

    +

    Um ein Wasserzeichen in ein Dokument einzufügen:

    +
      +
    1. Wechseln Sie zum Layout-Tab in der Hauptmenüleiste.
    2. +
    3. Klicken Sie das Wasserzeichen Wasserzeichen  Symbol in der Menüleiste und wählen Sie die Option Benutzerdefiniertes Wasserzeichen aus dem Menü. Danach erscheint das Fenster mit den Wasserzeichen-Einstellungen.
    4. +
    5. Wählen Sie die Art des Wasserzeichens: +
        +
      • Benutzen Sie die Option Text-Wasserzeichen und passen Sie die Parameter an: +

        Wasserzeichen-Einstellungen

        +
          +
        • Sprache - wählen Sie eine Sprache aus der Liste.
        • +
        • Text - wählen Sie einen verfügbaren Text der gewählten Sprache aus. Für Deutsch sind die folgenden Text-Optionen verfügbar: BEISPIEL, DRINGEND, ENTWURF, KOPIE, NICHT KOPIEREN, ORIGINAL, PERSÖNLICH, VERTRAULICH, STRENG VERTRAULICH.
        • +
        • Schriftart - wählen Sie die Schriftart und Größe aus der entsprechenden Drop-Down-Liste. Benutzen Sie die Symbole rechts daneben, um Farbe und Schriftdekoration zu setzen: Fett, Kursiv, Unterstrichen, Durchgestrichen,
        • +
        • Halbtransparent - benutzen Sie diese Option, um Transparenz anzuwenden.
        • +
        • Layout - wählen Sie Diagonal oder Horizontal.
        • +
        +
      • +
      • Benutzen Sie die Option Bild-Wasserzeichen und passen Sie die Parameter an: +

        Wasserzeichen-Einstellungen

        +
          +
        • Wählen Sie die Bild-Datei aus einer der beiden Optionen: Aus Datei oder Aus URL - das Bild wird als Vorschau rechts in dem Fenster dargestellt.
        • +
        • Maßstab - wählen Sie die notwendige Skalierung aus: Automatisch, 500%, 200%, 150%, 100%, 50%.
        • +
        +
      • +
      +
    6. +
    7. Bestätigen Sie die Einstellungen mit OK.
    8. +
    +

    Um ein Wasserzeichen zu bearbeiten, öffnen Sie das Fenster mit den Wasserzeichen-Einstellungen wie oben beschrieben, ändern Sie die benötigten Parameter und speichern dies mit OK.

    +

    Um ein Wasserzeichen zu löschen, klicken Sie das Wasserzeichen Symbol Wasserzeichen  Symbol in der Menüleiste und wählen Sie die Option Wasserzeichen entfernen aus dem Menü. Sie können auch die Option Kein aus dem Fenster mit den Wasserzeichen-Einstellungen benutzen.

    + +
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/AlignArrangeObjects.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/AlignArrangeObjects.htm index bd38259ae..9f0435233 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/AlignArrangeObjects.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/AlignArrangeObjects.htm @@ -14,36 +14,66 @@

    Objekte auf einer Seite anordnen und ausrichten

    -

    Die hinzugefügten Autoformen, Bilder, Diagramme und Textboxen können auf einer Seite ausgerichtet, gruppiert und angeordnet werden. Um eine dieser Aktionenauszuführen, wählen Sie zuerst ein einzelnes Objekt oder mehrere Objekte auf der Seite aus. Um mehrere Objekte zu wählen, halten Sie die Taste STRG gedrückt und klicken Sie auf die gewünschten Objekte. Um ein Textfeld auszuwählen, klicken Sie auf den Rahmen und nicht auf den darin befindlichen Text. Danach können Sie über Symbole in der Registerkarte Layout navigieren, die nachstehend beschrieben werden, oder die entsprechenden Optionen aus dem Rechtsklickmenü nutzen.

    +

    Die hinzugefügten Autoformen, Bilder, Diagramme und Textboxen können auf einer Seite ausgerichtet, gruppiert und angeordnet werden. Um eine dieser Aktionen auszuführen, wählen Sie zuerst ein einzelnes Objekt oder mehrere Objekte auf der Seite aus. Um mehrere Objekte zu wählen, halten Sie die Taste STRG gedrückt und klicken Sie auf die gewünschten Objekte. Um ein Textfeld auszuwählen, klicken Sie auf den Rahmen und nicht auf den darin befindlichen Text. Danach können Sie über Symbole in der Registerkarte Layout navigieren, die nachstehend beschrieben werden, oder die entsprechenden Optionen aus dem Rechtsklickmenü nutzen.

    Objekte ausrichten

    -

    Um das/die ausgewählte(n) Objekt(e) auszurichten, klicken Sie auf das Symbol Ausrichten Ausrichten in der Registerkarte Layout und wählen Sie den gewünschten Ausrichtungstyp aus der Liste aus:

    -
      -
    • Linksbündig ausrichten Linksbündig ausrichten - um Objekte horizontal am linken Seitenrand auszurichten.
    • -
    • Mittig ausrichten Zentrieren - um Objekte horizontal zentriert auf der Seite auszurichten.
    • -
    • Rechtsbündig ausrichten Rechtsbündig ausrichten - um Objekte horizontal am rechten Seitenrand auszurichten.
    • -
    • Oben ausrichten Oben ausrichten - um Objekte vertikal am oberen Seitenrand auszurichten.
    • -
    • Vertikal zentrieren Mittig ausrichten - um Objekte vertikal zentriert auf der Seite auszurichten
    • -
    • Unten ausrichten Unten ausrichten - um Objekte vertikal am unteren Seitenrand auszurichten.
    • -
    -

    Objekte gruppieren

    -

    Um zwei oder mehr Objekte zu gruppieren oder die Gruppierung aufzuheben, klicken Sie auf das Symbol Gruppieren Gruppieren in der Registerkarte Layout und wählen Sie die gewünschte Option aus der Liste aus:

    +

    Ausrichten von zwei oder mehr ausgewählten Objekten:

    +
      +
    1. Klicken Sie auf das Symbol Ausrichten ausrichten auf der oberen Symbolleiste in der Registerkarte Layout und wählen Sie eine der verfügbaren Optionen:
        +
      • An Seite ausrichten, um Objekte relativ zu den Rändern der Seite auszurichten.
      • +
      • Am Seitenrand ausrichten, um Objekte relativ zu den Seitenrändern auszurichten.
      • +
      • Ausgewählte Objekte ausrichten (diese Option ist standardmäßig ausgewählt), um Objekte im Verhältnis zueinander auszurichten.
      • +
      +
    2. +
    3. Klicken Sie erneut auf das Symbol Ausrichten ausrichten und wählen Sie den gewünschten Ausrichtungstyp aus der Liste aus:
        +
      • Linksbündig ausrichten Linksbündig ausrichten - Objekte horizontal am linken Rand des am weitesten links befindlichen Objekts/linken Rand der Seite/linken Seitenrands ausrichten.
      • +
      • Mittig ausrichten Zentriert ausrichten - Objekte horizontal an ihrer Mitte/der Seitenmitte/der Mitte des Abstands zwischen dem linken und rechten Seitenrand ausrichten.
      • +
      • Rechtsbündig ausrichten Rechtsbündig ausrichten - Objekte horizontal am rechten Rand des am weitesten rechts befindlichen Objekts/rechten Rand der Seite/rechten Seitenrands ausrichten.
      • +
      • Oben ausrichten Oben ausrichten - Objekte vertikal an der Oberkante des obersten Objekts/der Oberkante der Seite/des oberen Seitenrands ausrichten.
      • +
      • Mitte ausrichten Mittig ausrichten - Objekte vertikal an ihrer Mitte/Seitenmitte/ Zwischenraummitte zwischen dem oberen und unteren Seitenrand ausrichten.
      • +
      • Unten ausrichten Unten ausrichten - Objekte vertikal an der Unterkante des unteresten Objekts/der Unterkante der Seite/des unteren Seitenrands ausrichten.
      • +
      +
    4. +
    +

    Alternativ können Sie mit der rechten Maustaste auf die ausgewählten Objekte klicken, wählen Sie anschließend im Kontextmenü die Option Ausrichten aus und nutzen Sie dann eine der verfügbaren Ausrichtungsoptionen.

    +

    Wenn Sie ein einzelnes Objekt ausrichten möchten, kann es relativ zu den Rändern des Blatts oder zu den Seitenrändern ausgerichtet werden. Die Option An Rand ausrichten ist in diesem Fall standardmäßig ausgewählt.

    +

    Objekte verteilen

    +

    Drei oder mehr ausgewählte Objekte horizontal oder vertikal so verteilen, dass der gleiche Abstand zwischen ihnen angezeigt wird:

    +
      +
    1. Klicken Sie auf das Symbol Ausrichten ausrichten auf der oberen Symbolleiste in der Registerkarte Layout und wählen Sie eine der verfügbaren Optionen:
        +
      • An Seite ausrichten, um Objekte zwischen den Rändern der Seite zu verteilen.
      • +
      • An Seitenrand ausrichten, um Objekte zwischen den Seitenrändern zu verteilen.
      • +
      • Ausgewählte Objekte ausrichten (diese Option ist standardmäßig ausgewählt), um Objekte zwischen zwei ausgewählten äußersten Objekten zu verteilen.
      • +
      +
    2. +
    3. Klicken Sie erneut auf das Symbol Ausrichten Ausrichten und wählen Sie den gewünschten Verteilungstyp aus der Liste aus:
        +
      • Horizontal verteilen Horizontal verteilen - um Objekte gleichmäßig zwischen den am weitesten links und rechts liegenden ausgewählten Objekten/dem linken und rechten Seitenrand zu verteilen.
      • +
      • Vertikal verteilen Vertikal verteilen - um Objekte gleichmäßig zwischen den am weitesten oben und unten liegenden ausgewählten Objekten / dem oberen und unteren Rand der Seite zu verteilen.
      • +
      +
    4. +
    +

    Alternativ können Sie mit der rechten Maustaste auf die ausgewählten Objekte klicken, wählen Sie anschließend im Kontextmenü die Option Ausrichten aus und nutzen Sie dann eine der verfügbaren Verteilungsoptionen.

    +

    Hinweis: Die Verteilungsoptionen sind deaktiviert, wenn Sie weniger als drei Objekte auswählen.

    +

    Objekte gruppieren

    +

    Um zwei oder mehr Objekte zu gruppieren oder die Gruppierung aufzuheben, klicken Sie auf den Pfeil links neben dem Symbol Gruppieren Gruppieren in der Registerkarte Layout und wählen Sie die gewünschte Option aus der Liste aus:

      -
    • Gruppierung Gruppieren - um mehrere Objekte zu einer Gruppe zusammenzufügen, so dass sie gleichzeitig rotiert, verschoben, skaliert, ausgerichtet, angeordnet, kopiert, eingefügt und formatiert werden können, wie ein einzelnes Objekt.
    • -
    • Gruppierung aufheben Gruppierung aufheben - um die gewählte Gruppe der vorher vereinigten Objekte aufzulösen.
    • +
    • Gruppieren Gruppieren - um mehrere Objekte zu einer Gruppe zusammenzufügen, so dass sie gleichzeitig gedreht, verschoben, skaliert, ausgerichtet, angeordnet, kopiert, eingefügt und formatiert werden können, wie ein einzelnes Objekt.
    • +
    • Gruppierung aufheben Gruppierung aufheben - um die ausgewählte Gruppe der zuvor gruppierten Objekte aufzulösen.

    Alternativ können Sie mit der rechten Maustaste auf die ausgewählten Objekte klicken, wählen Sie anschließend im Kontextmenü die Option Anordnung aus und nutzen Sie dann die Optionen Gruppieren oder Gruppierung aufheben.

    +

    Hinweis: Die Option Gruppieren ist deaktiviert, wenn Sie weniger als zwei Objekte auswählen. Die Option Gruppierung aufheben ist nur verfügbar, wenn Sie eine zuvor gruppierte Objektgruppe auswählen.

    Objekte anordnen

    Um Objekte anzuordnen (z.B. die Reihenfolge bei einer Überlappung zu ändern), klicken Sie auf die Smbole Eine Ebene nach vorne eine Ebene nach vorne und Eine Ebene nach hinten eine Ebene nach hinten in der Registerkarte Layout und wählen Sie die gewünschte Anordnung aus der Liste aus.

    Um das/die ausgewählte(n) Objekt(e) nach vorne zu bringen, klicken Sie auf das Symbol Eine Ebene nach vorne Eine Ebene nach vorne in der Registerkarte Layout und wählen Sie den gewünschten Ausrichtungstyp aus der Liste aus:

      -
    • In den Vordergrund In den Vordergrund - ein Objekte in den Vordergrund schieben,
    • -
    • Eine Ebene nach vorne Eine Ebene nach vorne - um die Objekte eine Ebene nach vorne zu schieben.
    • +
    • In den Vordergrund In den Vordergrund - Objekt(e) in den Vordergrund bringen.
    • +
    • Eine Ebene nach vorne Eine Ebene nach vorne - um ausgewählte Objekte eine Ebene nach vorne zu schieben.

    Um das/die ausgewählte(n) Objekt(e) nach hinten zu verschieben, klicken Sie auf den Pfeil Eine Ebene nach hinten nach hinten verschieben in der Registerkarte Layout und wählen Sie den gewünschten Ausrichtungstyp aus der Liste aus:

      -
    • In den Hintergrunde In den Hintergrund um ein Objekt/Objekte in den Hintergrund zu schieben.
    • +
    • In den Hintergrund In den Hintergrund - um ein Objekt/Objekte in den Hintergrund zu schieben.
    • Eine Ebene nach hinten Eine Ebene nach hinten - um ausgewählte Objekte nur eine Ebene nach hinten zu schieben.
    +

    Alternativ können Sie mit der rechten Maustaste auf die ausgewählten Objekte klicken, wählen Sie anschließend im Kontextmenü die Option Anordnen aus und nutzen Sie dann eine der verfügbaren Optionen.

    \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/AlignText.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/AlignText.htm index f14058400..ce821b60c 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/AlignText.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/AlignText.htm @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ Text in einem Absatz ausrichten - + @@ -14,18 +14,26 @@

    Text in einem Absatz ausrichten

    -

    Üblicherweise unterscheidet man zwischen vier verschiedenen Textausrichtungen: linksbündig, rechtsbündig, Blocksatz, zentriert. Text ausrichten:

    -
      -
    1. Bewegen Sie den Cursor an die Stelle an der Sie den Text ausrichten möchten (dabei kann es sich um eine neue Zeile oder um bereits eingegebenen Text handeln).
    2. +

      Üblicherweise unterscheidet man zwischen vier verschiedenen Textausrichtungen: linksbündig, rechtsbündig, Blocksatz, zentriert. Text ausrichten. Sie müssen dazu:

      +
        +
      1. Bewegen Sie den Zeiger an die Stelle an der Sie den Text ausrichten möchten (dabei kann es sich um eine neue Zeile oder um bereits eingegebenen Text handeln).
      2. Wechseln Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf die Registerkarte Start.
      3. -
      4. Wählen Sie den gewünschten Ausrichtungstyp:
          -
        • Um den Text linksbündig auszurichten (der linke Textrand wird am linken Seitenrand ausgerichtet, der rechte Textrand bleibt wie vorher), klicken Sie aufs Symbol Linksbündig Linksbündig ausrichten auf der oberen Symbolleiste.
        • -
        • Um den Text zentriert auszurichten (rechter und linker Textrand bleiben ungleichmäßig), klicken Sie aufs Symbol Zentriert Zentrieren auf der oberen Symbolleiste.
        • -
        • Um den Text rechtsbündig auszurichten (der rechte Textrand verläuft parallel zum rechten Seitenrand, der linke Textrand bleibt ungleichmäßig), klicken Sie auf der oberen Symbolleiste auf das Symbol Rechtsbündig Rechtsbündig ausrichten.
        • -
        • Um den Text im Blocksatz auszurichten (der Text wird gleichmäßig ausgerichtet, dazu werden zusätzliche Leerräume im Text eingefügt), klicken Sie aufs Symbol Blocksatz Blocksatz auf der oberen Symbolleiste.
        • -
        -
      5. -
      +
    3. + Wählen Sie den gewünschten Ausrichtungstyp:
        +
      • Um den Text linksbündig auszurichten (der linke Textrand wird am linken Seitenrand ausgerichtet, der rechte Textrand bleibt wie vorher), klicken Sie aufs Symbol Linksbündig Linksbündig ausrichten auf der oberen Symbolleiste.
      • +
      • Um den Text zentriert auszurichten (rechter und linker Textrand bleiben ungleichmäßig), klicken Sie aufs Symbol Zentriert Zentrieren auf der oberen Symbolleiste.
      • +
      • Um den Text rechtsbündig auszurichten (der rechte Textrand verläuft parallel zum rechten Seitenrand, der linke Textrand bleibt ungleichmäßig), klicken Sie auf der oberen Symbolleiste auf das Symbol Rechtsbündig Rechtsbündig ausrichten.
      • +
      • Um den Text im Blocksatz auszurichten (der Text wird gleichmäßig ausgerichtet, dazu werden zusätzliche Leerräume im Text eingefügt), klicken Sie aufs Symbol Blocksatz Blocksatz auf der oberen Symbolleiste.
      • +
      +
    +

    Die Ausrichtungparameter sind im Paragraph - Erweiterte Einstellungen verfügbar.

    +
      +
    1. Klicken sie die rechte Maustaste und wählen Sie die Option Paragraph erweiterte Einstellungen von dem Rechts-Klick Menu oder benutzen Sie die Option Zeige erweiterte Einstellungen von der rechten Seitenleiste,
    2. +
    3. Im Paragraph erweiterte Einstellungen, wechseln Sie zur Registrierkarte Einzug & Abstand,
    4. +
    5. Selektieren Sie den Ausrichtungstypen von der Ausrichtungsliste: Links, Zentriert, Rechts, Blocksatz,
    6. +
    7. Klicken Sie den OK Button um die Auswahlen zu bestätigen.
    8. +
    +

    Absatzeinzüge einfügen

    \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/ChangeColorScheme.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/ChangeColorScheme.htm index bbfa9c71b..cc4408b9e 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/ChangeColorScheme.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/ChangeColorScheme.htm @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ Farbschema ändern - + @@ -14,15 +14,15 @@

    Farbschema ändern

    -

    Farbschemata werden auf das gesamte Dokument angewendet. Sie werden verwendet, um das Layout Ihres Dokuments zu verändern und definieren die Palette der Designfarben für Dokumentenelemente (Schrift, Hintergrund, Tabellen, AutoFormen, Diagramme). Wenn Sie bestimmte Designfarben auf Dokumentenelemente angewendet haben und dann ein anderes Farbschema auswählen, ändern sich die Farben in Ihrem Dokument entsprechend.

    -

    Um ein Farbschema zu ändern, klicken Sie auf den Abwärtspfeil neben dem Symbol Farbschema ändern Farbschema ändern in der Registerkarte Start und wählen Sie aus den verfügbaren Vorgaben das gewünschte Farbschema aus: Office, Graustufen, Apex, Aspect, Civic, Concourse, Equity, Flow, Foundry, Median, Metro, Module, Odulent, Oriel, Origin, Paper, Solstice, Technic, Trek, Urban, Verve.

    +

    Farbschemata werden auf das gesamte Dokument angewendet. Sie werden verwendet, um das Aussehen Ihres Dokuments zu verändern, da sie die Palette der Designfarben für Dokumentenelemente (Schrift, Hintergrund, Tabellen, AutoFormen, Diagramme). Wenn Sie bestimmte Designfarben auf Dokumentenelemente angewendet haben und dann ein anderes Farbschema auswählen, ändern sich die Farben in Ihrem Dokument entsprechend.

    +

    Um ein Farbschema zu ändern, klicken Sie auf den Abwärtspfeil neben dem Symbol Farbschema ändern Farbschema ändern in der Registerkarte Start auf der Haupt-Symbolleiste und wählen Sie aus den verfügbaren Vorgaben das gewünschte Farbschema aus: Office, Graustufen, Apex, Aspect, Civic, Concourse, Equity, Flow, Foundry, Median, Metro, Module, Odulent, Oriel, Origin, Paper, Solstice, Technic, Trek, Urban, Verve. Das ausgewählte Farbschema wird in der Liste hervorgehoben.

    Farbschemata

    -

    Wenn Sie das gewünschte Farbschema ausgewählt haben, können Sie im Fenster Farbpalette die Farben für das jeweilige Dokumentelement auswählen, auf das Sie die Farbe anwenden möchten. Bei den meisten Dokumentelementen können Sie auf das Fenster mit der Farbpalette zugreifen, indem Sie das gewünschte Element markieren und in der rechten Seitenleiste auf das farbige Feld klicken. Für die Schriftfarbe kann dieses Fenster über den Abwärtspfeil neben dem Symbol Schriftfarbe Schriftfarbe in der Registerkarte Start geöffnet werden. Folgende Auswahlmöglichkeiten stehen zur Verfügung:

    +

    Wenn Sie das gewünschte Farbschema ausgewählt haben, können Sie im Fenster Farbpalette die Farben für das jeweilige Dokumentelement auswählen, auf das Sie die Farbe anwenden möchten. Bei den meisten Dokumentelementen können Sie auf das Fenster mit der Farbpalette zugreifen, indem Sie das gewünschte Element markieren und in der rechten Seitenleiste auf das farbige Feld klicken. Für die Schriftfarbe kann dieses Fenster über den Abwärtspfeil neben dem Symbol Schriftfarbe Schriftfarbe in der Registerkarte Start geöffnet werden. Folgende Farbauswahlmöglichkeiten stehen zur Verfügung:

    Palette

    • Designfarben - die Farben, die dem gewählten Farbschema der Tabelle entsprechen.
    • Standardfarben - die festgelegten Standardfarben. Werden durch das gewählte Farbschema nicht beeinflusst.
    • -
    • Benutzerdefinierte Farbe - klicken Sie auf diese Option, wenn Ihre gewünschte Farbe nicht in der Palette mit verfügbaren Farben enthalten ist. Wählen Sie den gewünschten Farbbereich aus, indem Sie den vertikalen Farbregler verschieben und die entsprechende Farbe festlegen, indem Sie den Farbwähler innerhalb des großen quadratischen Farbfelds ziehen. Sobald Sie eine Farbe mit dem Farbwähler bestimmt haben, werden die entsprechenden RGB- und sRGB-Farbwerte in den Feldern auf der rechten Seite angezeigt. Sie können eine Farbe auch anhand des RGB-Farbmodells bestimmen, indem Sie die gewünschten nummerischen Werte in den Feldern R, G, B (Rot, Grün, Blau) festlegen oder den sRGB-Hexadezimalcode in das Feld mit dem #-Zeichen eingeben. Die gewählte Farbe erscheint im Vorschaufeld Neu. Wenn das Objekt vorher mit einer benutzerdefinierten Farbe gefüllt war, wird diese Farbe im Feld Aktuell angezeigt, so dass Sie die Originalfarbe und die Zielfarbe vergleichen könnten. Wenn Sie die Farbe festgelegt haben, klicken Sie auf Hinzufügen.

      Palette - Benutzerdefinierte Farbe

      +
    • Benutzerdefinierte Farbe - klicken Sie auf diese Option, wenn Ihre gewünschte Farbe nicht in der Palette mit verfügbaren Farben enthalten ist. Wählen Sie den gewünschten Farbbereich aus, in dem Sie den vertikalen Farbregler verschieben und die entsprechende Farbe festlegen, in dem Sie den Farbwähler innerhalb des großen quadratischen Farbfelds ziehen. Sobald Sie eine Farbe mit dem Farbwähler bestimmt haben, werden die entsprechenden RGB- und sRGB-Farbwerte in den Feldern auf der rechten Seite angezeigt. Sie können eine Farbe auch anhand des RGB-Farbmodells bestimmen, indem Sie die gewünschten nummerischen Werte in den Feldern R, G, B (Rot, Grün, Blau) festlegen oder den sRGB-Hexadezimalcode in das Feld mit dem #-Zeichen eingeben. Die gewählte Farbe erscheint im Vorschaufeld Neu. Wenn das Objekt vorher mit einer benutzerdefinierten Farbe gefüllt war, wird diese Farbe im Feld Aktuell angezeigt, so dass Sie die Originalfarbe und die Zielfarbe vergleichen könnten. Wenn Sie die Farbe festgelegt haben, klicken Sie auf Hinzufügen.

      Palette - Benutzerdefinierte Farbe

      Die benutzerdefinierte Farbe wird auf das ausgewählte Element angewendet und zur Palette Benutzerdefinierte Farbe hinzugefügt.

    diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/CopyPasteUndoRedo.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/CopyPasteUndoRedo.htm index 5ff2d7eff..c504e45e7 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/CopyPasteUndoRedo.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/CopyPasteUndoRedo.htm @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@  - Textpassagen kopieren/einfügen, Aktionen rückgängig machen/wiederholen + Textpassagen kopieren/einfügen, Vorgänge rückgängig machen/wiederholen @@ -13,23 +13,23 @@
    -

    Textpassagen kopieren/einfügen, Aktionen rückgängig machen/wiederholen

    +

    Textpassagen kopieren/einfügen, Vorgänge rückgängig machen/wiederholen

    Zwischenablage verwenden

    Um Textpassagen und eingefügte Objekte (AutoFormen, Bilder, Diagramme) innerhalb des aktuellen Dokuments auszuschneiden, zu kopieren und einzufügen, verwenden Sie die entsprechenden Optionen aus dem Rechtsklickmenü oder die Symbole, die auf jeder Registerkarte der oberen Symbolleiste verfügbar sind:

      -
    • Ausschneiden - wählen Sie eine Textpassage oder ein Objekt aus und nutzen Sie die Option Ausschneiden im Rechtsklickmenü, um die Auswahl zu löschen und in der Zwischenablage des Rechners zu speichern. Die ausgeschnittenen Daten können später an einer anderen Stelle im selben Dokument wieder eingefügt werden.
    • -
    • Kopieren – wählen Sie eine Textpassage oder ein Objekt aus und nutzen Sie die Option Kopieren im Rechtsklickmenü oder das Symbol Kopieren Kopieren in der oberen Symbolleiste, um die Auswahl in der Zwischenablage des Rechners zu speichern. Die kopierten Daten können später an einer anderen Stelle im selben Dokument wieder eingefügt werden.
    • -
    • Einfügen – platzieren Sie den Cursor an der Stelle im Dokument, an der Sie den zuvor kopierten Text/das Objekt einfügen möchten und wählen Sie im Rechtsklickmenü die Option Einfügen oder klicken Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf Einfügen Einfügen. Der Text/das Objekt wird an der aktuellen Cursorposition eingefügt. Die Daten können vorher aus demselben Dokument kopiert werden oder auch aus einem anderen Dokument oder Programm oder von einer Webseite.
    • +
    • Ausschneiden - wählen Sie eine Textpassage oder ein Objekt aus und nutzen Sie die Option Ausschneiden im Rechtsklickmenü, um die Auswahl zu löschen und in der Zwischenablage des Rechners zu speichern. Die ausgeschnittenen Daten können später an einer anderen Stelle im selben Dokument wieder eingefügt werden.
    • +
    • Kopieren – wählen Sie eine Textpassage oder ein Objekt aus und nutzen Sie die Option Kopieren im Rechtsklickmenü oder das Symbol Kopieren Kopieren in der oberen Symbolleiste, um die Auswahl in der Zwischenablage des Rechners zu speichern. Die kopierten Daten können später an einer anderen Stelle im selben Dokument wieder eingefügt werden.
    • +
    • Einfügen – platzieren Sie den Cursor an der Stelle im Dokument, an der Sie den zuvor kopierten Text/das Objekt einfügen möchten und wählen Sie im Rechtsklickmenü die Option Einfügen oder klicken Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf Einfügen Einfügen. Der Text/das Objekt wird an der aktuellen Cursorposition eingefügt. Die Daten können vorher aus demselben Dokument kopiert werden oder auch aus einem anderen Dokument oder Programm oder von einer Webseite.
    -

    Alternativ können Sie auch die folgenden Tastenkombinationen verwenden, um Daten aus einem anderen Dokument oder Programm zu kopieren oder einzufügen:

    +

    In der Online-Version können nur die folgenden Tastenkombinationen zum Kopieren oder Einfügen von Daten aus/in ein anderes Dokument oder ein anderes Programm verwendet werden. In der Desktop-Version können sowohl die entsprechenden Schaltflächen/Menüoptionen als auch Tastenkombinationen für alle Kopier-/Einfügevorgänge verwendet werden:

      -
    • STRG+X - Ausschneiden
    • -
    • STRG+C - Kopieren
    • -
    • STRG+V - Einfügen
    • +
    • STRG+X - Ausschneiden;
    • +
    • STRG+C - Kopieren;
    • +
    • STRG+V - Einfügen.

    Hinweis: Anstatt Text innerhalb desselben Dokuments auszuschneiden und einzufügen, können Sie die erforderliche Textpassage einfach auswählen und an die gewünschte Position ziehen und ablegen.

    Inhalte einfügen mit Optionen

    -

    Nachdem der kopierte Text eingefügt wurde, erscheint neben der eingefügten Textpassage das Menü Einfügeoptionen Einfügen mit Sonderoptionen. Klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche, um die gewünschte Einfügeoption auszuwählen.

    +

    Nachdem der kopierte Text eingefügt wurde, erscheint neben der eingefügten Textpassage das Menü Einfügeoptionen Einfügen mit Sonderoptionen. Klicken Sie auf diese Schaltfläche, um die gewünschte Einfügeoption auszuwählen.

    Zum Einfügen von Textsegmenten oder Text in Verbindung mit AutoFormen sind folgende Optionen verfügbar:

    • Ursprüngliche Formatierung beibehalten - der kopierte Text wird in Originalformatierung eingefügt.
    • @@ -41,12 +41,13 @@
    • Geschachtelt die kopierte Tabelle wird als geschachtelte Tabelle in die ausgewählte Zelle der vorhandenen Tabelle eingefügt.
    • Nur den Text übernehmen - die Tabelleninhalte werden als Textwerte eingefügt, die durch das Tabulatorzeichen getrennt sind.
    -

    Aktionen rückgängig machen/wiederholen

    -

    Um Aktionen rückgängig zu machen/zu wiederholen, nutzen Sie die entsprechenden Symbole auf den Registerkarten in der oberen Symbolleiste oder alternativ die folgenden Tastenkombinationen:

    +

    Vorgänge rückgängig machen/wiederholen

    +

    Verwenden Sie die entsprechenden Symbole, um Vorgänge rückgängig zu machen/zu wiederholen oder nutzen Sie die entsprechenden Tastenkombinationen:

      -
    • Rückgängig – klicken Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf das Symbol Rückgängig Rückgängig oder verwenden Sie die Tastenkombination STRG+Z, um die zuletzt durchgeführte Aktion rückgängig zu machen.
    • -
    • Wiederholen – klicken Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf das Symbol Wiederholen Wiederholen oder verwenden Sie die Tastenkombination STRG+Y, um die zuletzt durchgeführte Aktion zu wiederholen.
    • +
    • Rückgängig – klicken Sie im linken Teil der Kopfzeile des Editors auf das Symbol Rückgängig Rückgängig machen oder verwenden Sie die Tastenkombination STRG+Z, um die zuletzt durchgeführte Aktion rückgängig zu machen.
    • +
    • Wiederholen – klicken Sie im linken Teil der Kopfzeile des Editors auf das Symbol Wiederholen Wiederholen oder verwenden Sie die Tastenkombination STRG+Y, um die zuletzt durchgeführte Aktion zu wiederholen.
    +

    Hinweis: Wenn Sie ein Dokument im Modus Schnell gemeinsam bearbeiten, ist die Option letzten rückgängig gemachten Vorgang wiederherstellen nicht verfügbar.

    \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/CreateLists.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/CreateLists.htm index 15c8bb1fe..3a5f23ff3 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/CreateLists.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/CreateLists.htm @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ Listen erstellen - + @@ -14,51 +14,93 @@

    Listen erstellen

    -

    Liste in einem Dokument erstellen:

    +

    Um eine Liste in Ihrem Dokument zu erstellen,

      -
    1. Bewegen Sie den Cursor an die Stelle, wo Sie die Liste beginnen möchten (dabei kann es sich um eine neue Zeile handeln oder eine bereits vorhandene).
    2. -
    3. Wechseln Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf die Registerkarte Start.
    4. -
    5. Wählen Sie den gewünschten Listentyp aus:
        -
      • Aufzählung mit Markern - klicken Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf das Symbol Aufzählungszeichen Aufzählungszeichen
      • -
      • Nummerierte Liste mit Zahlen oder Buchstaben - klicken Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf das Symbol Nummerierte Liste Nummerierte Liste

        Hinweis: Mit dem schwarzen Pfeil neben dem Symbol Aufzählungszeichen oder Nummerierung, können Sie das Format der Liste näher bestimmen.

        +
      • Plazieren Sie den Zeiger an der Stelle, an der eine Liste gestartet wird (dies kann eine neue Zeile oder der bereits eingegebene Text sein).
      • +
      • Wechseln Sie zur Registerkarte Startseite der oberen Symbolleiste.
      • +
      • Wählen Sie den Listentyp aus, den Sie starten möchten:
          +
        • Eine ungeordnete Liste mit Markierungen wird mithilfe des Aufzählungssymbols Aufzählungszeichen in der oberen Symbolleiste erstellt
        • +
        • Die geordnete Liste mit Ziffern oder Buchstaben wird mithilfe des Nummerierungssymbols Nummerierte Liste in der oberen Symbolleiste erstellt

          Hinweis: Klicken Sie auf den Abwärtspfeil neben dem Symbol Aufzählungszeichen oder Nummerierung, um auszuwählen, wie die Liste aussehen soll.

      • -
      • Jedes Mal, wenn Sie nun am Zeilenende die Eingabetaste drücken, erscheint eine neue Aufzählung oder eine neue Position der nummerierten Liste. Um die Liste zu beenden, drücken Sie die Rücktaste und fahren Sie mit einem üblichen Textabsatz fort.
      • +
      • Jedes Mal, wenn Sie die Eingabetaste am Ende der Zeile drücken, wird ein neues geordnetes oder ungeordnetes Listenelement angezeigt. Um dies zu stoppen, drücken Sie die Rücktaste und fahren Sie mit dem allgemeinen Textabsatz fort.
    -

    Das Programm erstellt automatisch nummerierte Listen, wenn Sie die Ziffer 1 mit einem Punkt oder einer Klammer und einem Leerzeichen eingeben: 1., 1). Listen mit Aufzählungszeichen können automatisch erstellt werden, wenn Sie die Zeichen -, * mit einem nachfolgenden Leerzeichen eingeben.

    -

    Sie können den Texteinzug in den Listen und die dazugehörigen Verschachtelung ändern. Klicken Sie dazu auf in der oberen Symbolleiste auf der Registerkarte Start auf Mehrstufige Liste Mehrstufige Liste, Einzung verkleinern Einzug verkleinern und Einzug vergrößern Einzug vergrößern.

    -

    Hinweis: Die zusätzlichen Einzugs- und Abstandparameter können im rechten Seitenbereich und im Fenster mit den erweiterten Einstellungen geändert werden. Weitere Informationen dazu erhalten Sie in den Abschnitten Absatzeinzüge ändern und Zeilenabstand festlegen.

    +

    Das Programm erstellt auch automatisch nummerierte Listen, wenn Sie Ziffer 1 mit einem Punkt oder einer Klammer und einem Leerzeichen danach eingeben: 1., 1). Listen mit Aufzählungszeichen können automatisch erstellt werden, wenn Sie die Zeichen -, * und ein Leerzeichen danach eingeben.

    +

    Sie können den Texteinzug in den Listen und ihre Verschachtelung auch mithilfe der Symbole Mehrstufige Liste Mehrstufige Liste, Einzug verringern Einzug verkleinern und Einzug vergrößern Einzug vergrößern auf der Registerkarte Startseite der oberen Symbolleiste ändern..

    +

    Hinweis: Die zusätzlichen Einrückungs- und Abstandsparameter können in der rechten Seitenleiste und im Fenster mit den erweiterten Einstellungen geändert werden. Weitere Informationen finden Sie im Abschnitt Ändern von Absatzeinzügen und Festlegen des Absatzzeilenabstands.

    Listen verbinden und trennen

    -

    Eine Liste mit der vorherigen Liste zusammenfügen:

    +

    So verbinden Sie eine Liste mit der vorhergehenden:

      -
    1. Klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste auf den ersten Eintrag der zweiten Liste.
    2. -
    3. Wählen Sie im Kontextmenü die Option Mit vorheriger Liste verbinden.
    4. +
    5. Klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste auf das erste Element der zweiten Liste,
    6. +
    7. Verwenden Sie die Option Mit vorheriger Liste verbinden aus dem Kontextmenü.

    Die Listen werden zusammengefügt und die Nummerierung wird gemäß der ersten Listennummerierung fortgesetzt.

    -

    Eine Liste trennen:

    +

    So trennen Sie eine Liste:

    1. Klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste auf das Listenelement, mit dem Sie eine neue Liste beginnen möchten.
    2. -
    3. Wählen Sie im Kontextmenü die Option Liste trennen.
    4. +
    5. Verwenden Sie die Option Liste trennen aus dem Kontextmenü.
    -

    Die Liste wird getrennt und die Nummerierung in der zweiten Liste beginnt von vorne.

    +

    Die Liste wird getrennt und die Nummerierung in der zweiten Liste beginnt von neuem.

    Nummerierung ändern

    -

    So können Sie die fortlaufende Nummerierung in der zweiten Liste gemäß der vorherigen Listennummerierung fortsetzen:

    +

    So setzen Sie die fortlaufende Nummerierung in der zweiten Liste gemäß der vorherigen Listennummerierung fort:

      -
    1. Klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste auf den ersten Eintrag der zweiten Liste.
    2. -
    3. Wählen Sie im Kontextmenü die Option Fortlaufende Nummerierung.
    4. +
    5. Klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste auf das erste Element der zweiten Liste.
    6. +
    7. Verwenden Sie die Option Nummerierung fortsetzen im Kontextmenü.

    Die Nummerierung wird gemäß der ersten Listennummerierung fortgesetzt.

    -

    Einen individuellen Anfangswert für die Nummerierung festlegen:

    +

    So legen Sie einen bestimmten Nummerierungsanfangswert fest:

      -
    1. Klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste auf das Listenelement, dem Sie einen neuen Nummerierungswert zuweisen möchten.
    2. -
    3. Wählen Sie im Kontextmenü die Option Nummerierungswert festlegen.
    4. -
    5. Legen Sie im sich nun öffnenden Fester den gewünschten Zahlenwert fest und klicken Sie dann auf OK.
    6. +
    7. Klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste auf das Listenelement, auf das Sie einen neuen Nummerierungswert anwenden möchten.
    8. +
    9. Verwenden Sie die Option Nummerierungswert festlegen aus dem Kontextmenü.
    10. +
    11. Stellen Sie in einem neuen Fenster, das geöffnet wird, den erforderlichen numerischen Wert ein und klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche OK.
    +

    Ändern Sie die Listeneinstellungen

    +

    So ändern Sie die Listeneinstellungen mit Aufzählungszeichen oder nummerierten Listen, z. B. Aufzählungszeichen / Nummerntyp, Ausrichtung, Größe und Farbe:

    +
      +
    1. Klicken Sie auf ein vorhandenes Listenelement oder wählen Sie den Text aus, den Sie als Liste formatieren möchten.
    2. +
    3. Klicken Sie auf der Registerkarte Startseite der oberen Symbolleiste auf das Symbol Aufzählungszeichen Aufzählungszeichen oder Nummerierung Nummerierte Liste.
    4. +
    5. Wählen Sie die Option Listeneinstellungen.
    6. +
    7. Das Fenster Listeneinstellungen wird geöffnet. Das Fenster mit den Listen mit Aufzählungszeichen sieht folgendermaßen aus: +

      Listeinstellungen

      +

      Das Fenster mit den nummerierten Listeneinstellungen sieht folgendermaßen aus:

      +

      Nummerierte Liste

      +

      Für die Liste mit Aufzählungszeichen können Sie ein Zeichen auswählen, das als Aufzählungszeichen verwendet wird, während Sie für die nummerierte Liste den Nummerierungstyp auswählen können. Die Optionen Ausrichtung, Größe und Farbe sind sowohl für die Listen mit Aufzählungszeichen als auch für die nummerierten Listen gleich.

      +
        +
      • Aufzählungszeichen - Ermöglicht die Auswahl des erforderlichen Zeichens für die Aufzählungsliste. Wenn Sie auf das Feld Schriftart und Symbol klicken, wird das Symbolfenster geöffnet, in dem Sie eines der verfügbaren Zeichen auswählen können. Weitere Informationen zum Arbeiten mit Symbolen finden Sie in diesem Artikel.
      • +
      • Typ - Ermöglicht die Auswahl des erforderlichen Nummerierungstyps für die nummerierte Liste. Folgende Optionen stehen zur Verfügung: Keine, 1, 2, 3, ..., a, b, c, ..., A, B, C, ..., i, ii, iii, ..., I, II, III, ....
      • +
      • Ausrichtung - Ermöglicht die Auswahl des erforderlichen Typs für die Ausrichtung von Aufzählungszeichen / Zahlen, mit dem Aufzählungszeichen / Zahlen horizontal innerhalb des dafür vorgesehenen Bereichs ausgerichtet werden. Folgende Ausrichtungstypen stehen zur Verfügung: Links, Mitte, Rechts.
      • +
      • Größe - Ermöglicht die Auswahl der erforderlichen Aufzählungszeichen- / Zahlengröße. Die Option Wie ein Text ist standardmäßig ausgewählt. Wenn diese Option ausgewählt ist, entspricht die Aufzählungszeichen- oder Zahlengröße der Textgröße. Sie können eine der vordefinierten Größen von 8 bis 96 auswählen.
      • +
      • Farbe - Ermöglicht die Auswahl der erforderlichen Aufzählungszeichen- / Zahlenfarbe. Die Option Wie ein Text ist standardmäßig ausgewählt. Wenn diese Option ausgewählt ist, entspricht die Aufzählungszeichen- oder Zahlenfarbe der Textfarbe. Sie können die Option Automatisch auswählen, um die automatische Farbe anzuwenden, oder eine der Themenfarben oder Standardfarben in der Palette auswählen oder eine benutzerdefinierte Farbe angeben.
      • +
      +

      Alle Änderungen werden im Feld Vorschau angezeigt.

      +
    8. +
    9. Klicken Sie auf OK, um die Änderungen zu übernehmen und das Einstellungsfenster zu schließen.
    10. +
    +

    So ändern Sie die Einstellungen für mehrstufige Listen:

    +
      +
    1. Klicken Sie auf ein Listenelement.
    2. +
    3. Klicken Sie auf der Registerkarte Startseite der oberen Symbolleiste auf das Symbol Mehrstufige Liste Mehrstufige Liste.
    4. +
    5. Wählen Sie die Option Listeneinstellungen.
    6. +
    7. + Das Fenster Listeneinstellungen wird geöffnet. Das Fenster mit den Einstellungen für mehrstufige Listen sieht folgendermaßen aus: +

      Mehrstufige Liste

      +

      Wählen Sie die gewünschte Ebene der Liste im Feld Ebene links aus und passen Sie das Aufzählungszeichen oder die Zahl mit den Schaltflächen oben an Aussehen für die ausgewählte Ebene:

      +
        +
      • Typ - Ermöglicht die Auswahl des erforderlichen Nummerierungstyps für die nummerierte Liste oder des erforderlichen Zeichens für die Liste mit Aufzählungszeichen. Für die nummerierte Liste stehen folgende Optionen zur Verfügung: Keine, 1, 2, 3, ..., a, b, c, ..., A, B, C, ..., i, ii, iii, .. ., I, II, III, .... Für die Liste mit Aufzählungszeichen können Sie eines der Standardsymbole auswählen oder die Option Neues Aufzählungszeichen verwenden. Wenn Sie auf diese Option klicken, wird das Symbolfenster geöffnet, in dem Sie eines der verfügbaren Zeichen auswählen können. Weitere Informationen zum Arbeiten mit Symbolen finden Sie in diesem Artikel.
      • +
      • Ausrichtung - Ermöglicht die Auswahl des erforderlichen Typs für die Ausrichtung von Aufzählungszeichen / Zahlen, mit dem Aufzählungszeichen / Zahlen horizontal innerhalb des am Anfang des Absatzes dafür vorgesehenen Bereichs ausgerichtet werden. Folgende Ausrichtungstypen stehen zur Verfügung: Links, Mitte, Rechts.
      • +
      • Größe - Ermöglicht die Auswahl der erforderlichen Aufzählungszeichen- / Zahlengröße. Die Option Wie ein Text ist standardmäßig ausgewählt. Sie können eine der vordefinierten Größen von 8 bis 96 auswählen.
      • +
      • Farbe - Ermöglicht die Auswahl der erforderlichen Aufzählungszeichen- / Zahlenfarbe. Die Option Wie ein Text ist standardmäßig ausgewählt. Wenn diese Option ausgewählt ist, entspricht die Aufzählungszeichen- oder Zahlenfarbe der Textfarbe. Sie können die Option Automatisch auswählen, um die automatische Farbe anzuwenden, oder eine der Themenfarben oder Standardfarben in der Palette auswählen oder eine benutzerdefinierte Farbe angeben.
      • +
      +

      Alle Änderungen werden im Feld Vorschau angezeigt.

      +
    8. +
    9. Klicken Sie auf OK, um die Änderungen zu übernehmen und das Einstellungsfenster zu schließen. +
    10. +
    \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/DecorationStyles.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/DecorationStyles.htm index a8ec253d2..6cb6e1ecd 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/DecorationStyles.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/DecorationStyles.htm @@ -20,45 +20,46 @@ Fett Fett - Dient dazu eine Textstelle durch fette Schrift hervorzuheben. + Der gewählte Textabschnitt wird durch fette Schrift hervorgehoben. Kursiv Kursiv - Dient dazu eine Textstelle durch die Schrägstellung der Zeichen hervorzuheben. + Der gewählte Textabschnitt wird durch die Schrägstellung der Zeichen hervorgehoben. Unterstrichen Unterstrichen - Wird verwendet, um den gewählten Textabschnitt mit einer Linie zu unterstreichen. + Der gewählten Textabschnitt wird mit einer Linie unterstrichen. Durchgestrichen Durchgestrichen - Wird verwendet, um den gewählten Textabschnitt mit einer Linie durchzustreichen. + Der gewählten Textabschnitt wird mit einer Linie durchgestrichen. Hochgestellt Hochgestellt - Wird verwendet, um den gewählten Textabschnitt kleiner zu machen und ihn im oberen Teil der Textzeile unterzubringen, wie in Brüchen. + Der gewählte Textabschnitt wird verkleinert und im oberen Teil der Textzeile platziert z.B. in Bruchzahlen. Tiefgestellt Tiefgestellt - Wird verwendet, um den gewählten Textabschnitt kleiner zu machen und ihn im unteren Teil der Textzeile unterzubringen, wie beispielsweise in chemischen Formeln. + Der gewählte Textabschnitt wird verkleinert und im unteren Teil der Textzeile platziert z.B. in chemischen Formeln.

    Um auf erweiterte Schrifteinstellungen zuzugreifen, klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste und wählen Sie die Option Absatz - Erweiterte Einstellungen im Menü oder nutzen Sie den Link Erweiterte Einstellungen anzeigen in der rechten Seitenleiste. Das Fenster Absatz - Erweiterte Einstellungen öffnet sich, wechseln sie nun in die Registerkarte Schriftart.

    Hier stehen Ihnen die folgenden Deckoschriften und Einstellungen zur Verfügung:

      -
    • Durchgestrichen - durchstreichen einer Textstelle mithilfe einer Linie
    • -
    • Doppelt durchgestrichen - durchstreichen einer Textstelle mithilfe einer doppelten Linie
    • -
    • Hochgestellt - Textstellen verkleinern und hochstellen, wie beispielsweise in Brüchen
    • -
    • Tiefgestellt - Textstellen verkleinern und tiefstellen, wie beispielsweise in chemischen Formeln
    • -
    • Kapitälchen - erzeugen von Großbuchstaben in Höhe von Kleinbuchstaben
    • -
    • Großbuchstaben - alle Buchstaben als Großbuchstaben schreiben
    • -
    • Abstand - Abstand zwischen den einzelnen Zeichen einstellen
    • -
    • Position - Position der Zeichen in einer Zeile zu bestimmen
    • +
    • Durchgestrichen - durchstreichen einer Textstelle mithilfe einer Linie.
    • +
    • Doppelt durchgestrichen - durchstreichen einer Textstelle mithilfe einer doppelten Linie.
    • +
    • Hochgestellt - Textstellen verkleinern und hochstellen, wie beispielsweise in Brüchen.
    • +
    • Tiefgestellt - Textstellen verkleinern und tiefstellen, wie beispielsweise in chemischen Formeln.
    • +
    • Kapitälchen - erzeugt Großbuchstaben in Höhe von Kleinbuchstaben.
    • +
    • Großbuchstaben - alle Buchstaben als Großbuchstaben schreiben.
    • +
    • Abstand - Abstand zwischen den einzelnen Zeichen einstellen. Erhöhen Sie den Standardwert für den Abstand Erweitert oder verringern Sie den Standardwert für den Abstand Verkürzt. Nutzen Sie die Pfeiltasten oder geben Sie den erforderlichen Wert in das dafür vorgesehene Feld ein.
    • +
    • Position - Zeichenposition (vertikaler Versatz) in der Zeile festlegen. Erhöhen Sie den Standardwert, um Zeichen nach oben zu verschieben, oder verringern Sie den Standardwert, um Zeichen nach unten zu verschieben. Nutzen Sie die Pfeiltasten oder geben Sie den erforderlichen Wert in das dafür vorgesehene Feld ein.

      Alle Änderungen werden im Feld Vorschau unten angezeigt.

      +

    Absatz - Erweiterte Einstellungen: Schriftart

    diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/FontTypeSizeColor.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/FontTypeSizeColor.htm index 6c4f8f914..899b55060 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/FontTypeSizeColor.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/FontTypeSizeColor.htm @@ -20,12 +20,12 @@ Schriftart Schriftart - Wird verwendet, um eine Schriftart aus der Liste mit den verfügbaren Schriftarten zu wählen. + Wird verwendet, um eine Schriftart aus der Liste mit den verfügbaren Schriftarten zu wählen. Wenn eine gewünschte Schriftart nicht in der Liste verfügbar ist, können Sie diese runterladen und in Ihrem Betriebssystem speichern. Anschließend steht Ihnen diese Schrift in der Desktop-Version zur Nutzung zur Verfügung. Schriftgröße Schriftgröße - Wird verwendet, um eine Schriftgröße aus der Liste zu wählen oder manuell einzugeben. + Über diese Option kann der gewünschte Wert für die Schriftgröße aus der Dropdown-List ausgewählt werden (die Standardwerte sind: 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 36, 48, 72 und 96). Sie können auch manuell einen Wert in das Feld für die Schriftgröße eingeben und anschließend die Eingabetaste drücken. Schrift vergrößern diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm index b3a8c5ef1..626bc02f1 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ AutoFormen einfügen - + @@ -14,160 +14,178 @@

    AutoFormen einfügen

    -

    Eine AutoForm einfügen

    -

    Eine AutoForm in einem Dokument einfügen:

    +

    Fügen Sie eine automatische Form ein

    +

    So fügen Sie Ihrem Dokument eine automatische Form hinzu:

      -
    1. Wechseln Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf die Registerkarte Einfügen.
    2. -
    3. Klicken Sie auf der oberen Symbolleiste auf das Symbol Form Form
    4. -
    5. Wählen Sie eine der verfügbaren Gruppen für AutoFormen aus: Standardformen, geformte Pfeile, Mathe, Diagramme, Sterne und Bänder, Legenden, Schaltflächen, Rechtecke, Linien.
    6. -
    7. Klicken Sie auf in der gewählten Gruppe auf die gewünschte AutoForm.
    8. -
    9. Positionieren Sie den Mauszeiger an der Stelle, an der Sie eine Form einfügen möchten.
    10. -
    11. Sobald die AutoForm hinzugefügt wurde, können Sie Größe, Position und Eigenschaften ändern.

      Hinweis: Um der AutoForm eine Beschriftung hinzuzufügen, wählen Sie die Form auf der Seite aus und geben Sie den gewünschten Text ein. Ein solcher Text wird Bestandteil der AutoForm (wenn Sie die AutoForm verschieben oder drehen, wird der Text ebenfalls verschoben oder gedreht).

      +
    12. Wechseln Sie zur Registerkarte Einfügen in der oberen Symbolleiste.
    13. +
    14. Klicken Sie auf das Formsymbol Form in der oberen Symbolleiste.
    15. +
    16. Wählen Sie eine der verfügbaren Autoshape-Gruppen aus: Grundformen, figürliche Pfeile, Mathematik, Diagramme, Sterne und Bänder, Beschriftungen, Schaltflächen, Rechtecke, Linien,
    17. +
    18. Klicken Sie auf die erforderliche automatische Form innerhalb der ausgewählten Gruppe.
    19. +
    20. Platzieren Sie den Mauszeiger an der Stelle, an der die Form plaziert werden soll.
    21. +
    22. Sobald die automatische Form hinzugefügt wurde, können Sie ihre Größe, Position und Eigenschaften ändern.

      Hinweis: Um eine Beschriftung innerhalb der automatischen Form hinzuzufügen, stellen Sie sicher, dass die Form auf der Seite ausgewählt ist, und geben Sie Ihren Text ein. Der auf diese Weise hinzugefügte Text wird Teil der automatischen Form (wenn Sie die Form verschieben oder drehen, wird der Text mit verschoben oder gedreht).

    -

    AutoFormen bewegen und die Größe ändern

    -

    AutoForm umgestaltenUm die Formgröße zu ändern, ziehen Sie die kleinen Quadrate Quadrat an den Kanten der Formen. Um die ursprünglichen Proportionen der ausgewählten AutoFormen während der Größenänderung beizubehalten, halten Sie Taste UMSCHALT gedrückt und ziehen Sie eines der Ecksymbole. -

    Bei der Änderung einiger Formen, z.B. geformte Pfeile oder Legenden, ist auch ein gelbes diamantartiges Symbol Gelber Diamant verfügbar. Über dieses Symbol können verschiedene Aspekte einer Form geändert werden, z.B. die Länge des Pfeilkopfes.

    -

    Um die Formposition zu ändern, nutzen Sie das Pfeil Symbol, das eingeblendet wird, wenn Sie mit dem Mauszeiger über die AutoForm fahren. Ziehen Sie die Form in die gewünschten Position, ohne die Maustaste loszulassen. Wenn Sie die AutoForm verschieben, werden Hilfslinien angezeigt, damit Sie das Objekt auf der Seite präzise positionieren können (wenn ein anderer Umbruchstil als mit Text in Zeile ausgewählt haben). Um die AutoForm in 1-Pixel-Stufen zu verschieben, halten Sie die Taste STRG gedrückt und verwenden Sie die Pfeile auf der Tastatur. Um die AutoForm streng horizontal/vertikal zu verschieben und sie in perpendikulare Richtung nicht rutschen zu lassen, halten Sie die UMSCHALT-Taste beim Drehen gedrückt.

    -

    Um die Form zu drehen, richten Sie den Mauszeiger auf den Drehpunkt Drehpunkt und ziehen Sie ihn im Uhrzeigersinn oder gegen Uhrzeigersinn. Um die Drehung in 15-Grad-Stufen durchzuführen, halten Sie die UMSCHALT-Taste bei der Drehung gedrückt.

    -
    -

    AutoFormeinstellungen anpassen

    -

    Nutzen Sie zum ausrichten und anordnen von AutoFormen das Rechtsklickmenü. Die Menüoptionen sind:

    +

    Es ist auch möglich, der automatischen Form eine Beschriftung hinzuzufügen. Weitere Informationen zum Arbeiten mit Untertiteln für Autoformen finden Sie in diesem Artikel.

    +

    Verschieben und ändern Sie die Größe von Autoformen

    +

    Form einer AutoForm ändernUm die Größe der automatischen Form zu ändern, ziehen Sie kleine Quadrate Quadrat an den Formkanten. Halten Sie die Umschalttaste gedrückt und ziehen Sie eines der Eckensymbole, um die ursprünglichen Proportionen der ausgewählten automatischen Form während der Größenänderung beizubehalten.

    +

    Wenn Sie einige Formen ändern, z. B. abgebildete Pfeile oder Beschriftungen, ist auch das gelbe rautenförmige Symbol Gelber Diamant verfügbar. Hier können Sie einige Aspekte der Form anpassen, z. B. die Länge der Pfeilspitze.

    +

    Verwenden Sie zum Ändern der Position für die automatische Form das Pfeil Symbol, das angezeigt wird, nachdem Sie den Mauszeiger über die automatische Form bewegt haben. Ziehen Sie die automatische Form an die gewünschte Position, ohne die Maustaste loszulassen. Wenn Sie die automatische Form verschieben, werden Hilfslinien angezeigt, mit denen Sie das Objekt präzise auf der Seite positionieren können (wenn ein anderer Umbruchstil als Inline ausgewählt ist). Um die automatische Form in Schritten von einem Pixel zu verschieben, halten Sie die Strg-Taste gedrückt und verwenden Sie die Tastenkombinationen. Halten Sie beim Ziehen die Umschalttaste gedrückt, um die automatische Form streng horizontal / vertikal zu verschieben und zu verhindern, dass sie sich senkrecht bewegt.

    +

    Um die automatische Form zu drehen, bewegen Sie den Mauszeiger über den Drehgriff Drehpunkt und ziehen Sie ihn im oder gegen den Uhrzeigersinn. Halten Sie die Umschalttaste gedrückt, um den Drehwinkel auf Schritte von 15 Grad zu beschränken.

    +

    Hinweis: Die Liste der Tastaturkürzel, die beim Arbeiten mit Objekten verwendet werden können, finden Sie hier.

    +
    +

    Passen Sie die Autoshape-Einstellungen an

    +

    Verwenden Sie das Rechtsklick-Menü, um Autoshapes auszurichten und anzuordnen. Die Menüoptionen sind:

      -
    • Ausschneiden, Kopieren, Einfügen - Standardoptionen zum Ausschneiden oder Kopieren ausgewählter Textpassagen/Objekte und zum Einfügen von zuvor ausgeschnittenen/kopierten Textstellen oder Objekten an der aktuellen Cursorposition.
    • -
    • Anordnen - um eine ausgewählte Form in den Vordergrund bzw. Hintergrund oder eine Ebene nach vorne bzw. hinten zu verschieben sowie Formen zu gruppieren und die Gruppierung aufzuheben (um diese wie ein einzelnes Objekt behandeln zu können). Weitere Informationen zum Anordnen von Objekten finden Sie auf dieser Seite.
    • -
    • Ausrichten - um eine Form linksbündig, zentriert, rechtsbündig, oben, mittig oder unten auszurichten. Weitere Informationen zum Ausrichten von Objekten finden Sie auf dieser Seite.
    • -
    • Textumbruch - der Stil für den Textumbruch wird aus den verfügbaren Vorlagen ausgewählt: Mit Text in Zeile, Quadrat, Eng, Transparent, Oben und unten, Vorne, Hinten (für weitere Information lesen Sie die folgende Beschreibung der erweiterten Einstellungen). Die Option Umbruchsgrenze bearbeiten ist nur verfügbar, wenn Sie einen anderen Umbruchstil als „Mit Text in Zeile“ auswählen. Ziehen Sie die Umbruchpunkte, um die Grenze benutzerdefiniert anzupassen. Um einen neuen Rahmenpunkt zu erstellen, klicken Sie auf eine beliebige Stelle auf der roten Linie und ziehen Sie diese an die gewünschte Position. Umbruchsgrenze bearbeiten
    • -
    • Form - Erweiterte Einstellungen wird verwendet, um das Fenster „Absatz - Erweiterte Einstellungen“ zu öffnen.
    • +
    • Ausschneiden, Kopieren, Einfügen - Standardoptionen, mit denen ein ausgewählter Text / ein ausgewähltes Objekt ausgeschnitten oder kopiert und eine zuvor ausgeschnittene / kopierte Textpassage oder ein Objekt an die aktuelle Zeigerposition eingefügt wird.
    • +
    • Anordnen wird verwendet, um die ausgewählte automatische Form in den Vordergrund zu bringen, in den Hintergrund zu senden, vorwärts oder rückwärts zu bewegen sowie Formen zu gruppieren oder die Gruppierung aufzuheben, um Operationen mit mehreren von ihnen gleichzeitig auszuführen. Weitere Informationen zum Anordnen von Objekten finden Sie auf dieser Seite.
    • +
    • Ausrichten wird verwendet, um die Form links, mittig, rechts, oben, Mitte, unten auszurichten. Weitere Informationen zum Ausrichten von Objekten finden Sie auf dieser Seite.
    • +
    • Der Umbruchstil wird verwendet, um einen Textumbruchstil aus den verfügbaren auszuwählen - inline, quadratisch, eng, durch, oben und unten, vorne, hinten - oder um die Umbruchgrenze zu bearbeiten. Die Option Wrap-Grenze bearbeiten ist nur verfügbar, wenn Sie einen anderen Wrap-Stil als Inline auswählen. Ziehen Sie die Umbruchpunkte, um die Grenze anzupassen. Um einen neuen Umbruchpunkt zu erstellen, klicken Sie auf eine beliebige Stelle auf der roten Linie und ziehen Sie sie an die gewünschte Position. Umbruchgrenze bearbeiten
    • +
    • Drehen wird verwendet, um die Form um 90 Grad im oder gegen den Uhrzeigersinn zu drehen sowie um die Form horizontal oder vertikal zu drehen.
    • +
    • Mit den Erweiterten Einstellungen der Form wird das Fenster "Form - Erweiterte Einstellungen" geöffnet.

    -

    Einige Eigenschaften der AutoFormen können in der Registerkarte Formeinstellungen in der rechten Seitenleiste geändert werden. Klicken Sie dazu auf die Form und wählen Sie das Symbol Formeinstellungen Formeinstellungen in der rechten Seitenleiste aus. Die folgenden Eigenschaften können geändert werden:

    +

    Einige der Einstellungen für die automatische Form können über die Registerkarte Formeinstellungen in der rechten Seitenleiste geändert werden. Um es zu aktivieren, klicken Sie auf die Form und wählen Sie rechts das Symbol Formeinstellungen Formeinstellungen. Hier können Sie folgende Eigenschaften ändern:

      -
    • Füllung - zum Ändern der Füllung einer AutoForm. Folgende Optionen stehen Ihnen zur Verfügung:
        -
      • Einfarbige Füllung - wählen Sie diese Option, um die Volltonfarbe festzulegen, mit der Sie die innere Fläche der ausgewählten Autoform ausfüllen möchten.

        Einfarbige Füllung

        -

        Klicken Sie auf das Farbfeld unten und wählen Sie die gewünschte Farbe aus den verfügbaren Farbpaletten aus oder legen Sie eine beliebige Farbe fest:

        +
      • Füllen - Verwenden Sie diesen Abschnitt, um die automatische Formfüllung auszuwählen. Sie können folgende Optionen auswählen:
          +
        • Farbfüllung - Wählen Sie diese Option aus, um die Volltonfarbe anzugeben, mit der Sie den Innenraum der ausgewählten Autoform füllen möchten.

          Einfarbige Füllung

          +

          Klicken Sie auf das farbige Feld unten und wählen Sie die gewünschte Farbe aus den verfügbaren Farbsätzen aus oder geben Sie eine beliebige Farbe an:

        • -
        • Farbverlauf - Wählen Sie diese Option, um die Form mit zwei Farben zu füllen, die sich sanft von einer zur anderen ändern.

          Farbverlauf

          +
        • Verlaufsfüllung - Wählen Sie diese Option, um die Form mit zwei Farben zu füllen, die sich reibungslos von einer zur anderen ändern.

          Füllung mit Farbverlauf

            -
          • Stil - wählen Sie eine der verfügbaren Optionen: Linear (Farben ändern sich linear, d.h. entlang der horizontalen/vertikalen Achse oder diagonal in einem 45-Grad Winkel) oder Radial (Farben ändern sich kreisförmig vom Zentrum zu den Kanten).
          • -
          • Richtung - wählen Sie eine Vorlage aus dem Menü aus. Wenn der Farbverlauf Linear ausgewählt ist, sind die folgenden Richtungen verfügbar: von oben links nach unten rechts, von oben nach unten, von oben rechts nach unten links, von rechts nach links, von unten rechts nach oben links, von unten nach oben, von unten links nach oben rechts, von links nach rechts. Wenn der Farbverlauf Radial ausgewählt ist, steht nur eine Vorlage zur Verfügung.
          • -
          • Farbverlauf - klicken Sie auf den linken Schieberegler Schieberegler unter der Farbverlaufsleiste, um das Farbfeld für die erste Farbe zu aktivieren. Klicken Sie auf das Farbfeld auf der rechten Seite, um die erste Farbe in der Farbpalette auszuwählen. Nutzen Sie den rechten Schieberegler unter der Farbverlaufsleiste, um den Wechselpunkt festzulegen, an dem eine Farbe in die andere übergeht. Nutzen Sie den rechten Schieberegler unter der Farbverlaufsleiste, um die zweite Farbe anzugeben und den Wechselpunkt festzulegen.
          • +
          • Stil - Wählen Sie eine der verfügbaren Optionen: Linear (Farben ändern sich in einer geraden Linie, d. H. Entlang einer horizontalen / vertikalen Achse oder diagonal in einem Winkel von 45 Grad) oder Radial (Farben ändern sich in einer Kreisbahn von der Mitte zu den Kanten).
          • +
          • Richtung - Wählen Sie eine Vorlage aus dem Menü. Wenn der lineare Verlauf ausgewählt ist, stehen folgende Richtungen zur Verfügung: von oben links nach unten rechts, von oben nach unten, von oben rechts nach unten links, von rechts nach links, von unten rechts nach oben links, von unten nach oben, unten -links nach rechts oben, von links nach rechts. Wenn der radiale Farbverlauf ausgewählt ist, ist nur eine Vorlage verfügbar.
          • +
          • Farbverlauf - klicken Sie auf den linken Schieberegler Schieberegler unter der Verlaufsleiste, um das Farbfeld zu aktivieren, das der ersten Farbe entspricht. Klicken Sie auf das Farbfeld rechtsum die erste Farbe in der Palette zu wählen. Ziehen Sie den Schieberegler, um den Verlaufsstopp festzulegen, d. H. Den Punkt, an dem sich eine Farbe in eine andere ändert. Verwenden Sie den rechten Schieberegler unter der Verlaufsleiste, um die zweite Farbe festzulegen und den Verlaufsstopp festzulegen.
        • -
        • Bild- oder Texturfüllung - wählen Sie diese Option, um ein Bild oder eine vorgegebene Textur als Formhintergrund zu benutzen.

          Bild- oder Texturfüllung

          +
        • Bild oder Textur - Wählen Sie diese Option, um ein Bild oder eine vordefinierte Textur als Formhintergrund zu verwenden.

          Bild- oder Texturfüllung

            -
          • Wenn Sie ein Bild als Hintergrund für eine Form verwenden möchten, können Sie ein Bild aus Datei einfügen, indem Sie über das geöffnete Fenstern den Speicherort auf Ihrem Computer auswählen, oder aus URL, indem Sie die entsprechende URL-Adresse ins geöffnete Fenster einfügen.
          • -
          • Wenn Sie eine Textur als Hintergrund für eine Form nutzen möchten, öffnen Sie das Menü Textur und wählen Sie die gewünschte Texturvoreinstellung aus.

            Momentan sind die folgenden Texturen vorhanden: Leinwand, Karton, dunkler Stoff, Korn, Granit, graues Papier, stricken, Leder, braunes Papier, Papyrus, Holz.

            +
          • Wenn Sie ein Bild als Hintergrund für die Form verwenden möchten, können Sie ein Bild aus der Datei hinzufügen, indem Sie es auf der Festplatte Ihres Computers auswählen, oder aus der URL, indem Sie die entsprechende URL-Adresse in das geöffnete Fenster einfügen.
          • +
          • Wenn Sie eine Textur als Hintergrund für die Form verwenden möchten, öffnen Sie das Menü Von Textur und wählen Sie die gewünschte Texturvoreinstellung aus.

            Derzeit sind folgende Texturen verfügbar: Leinwand, Karton, dunkler Stoff, Maserung, Granit, graues Papier, Strick, Leder, braunes Papier, Papyrus, Holz.

            -
          • Wenn das gewählte Bild kleiner oder größer als die AutoForm ist, können Sie die Option Strecken oder Kacheln aus dem Listenmenü auswählen.

            Die Option Strecken ermöglicht Ihnen die Größe des Bildes so anzupassen, dass es den kompletten Bereich der AutoForm füllen kann.

            -

            Die Option Kacheln ermöglicht Ihnen nur einen Teil eines größeren Bildes zu verwenden und die Originalgröße beizubehalten oder ein kleines Bild unter Beibehaltung der Originalgröße zu wiederholen und durch diese Wiederholungen die gesamte Fläche der AutoForm auszufüllen.

            -

            Hinweis: Jede Voreinstellung für Texturfüllungen ist dahingehend festgelegt, den gesamten Bereich auszufüllen, aber Sie können nach Bedarf auch den Effekt Strecken anwenden.

            +
          • Falls das ausgewählte Bild weniger oder mehr Abmessungen als die automatische Form hat, können Sie die Einstellung Dehnen oder Kacheln aus der Dropdown-Liste auswählen.

            +

            Mit der Option Kacheln können Sie nur einen Teil des größeren Bilds anzeigen, wobei die ursprünglichen Abmessungen beibehalten werden, oder das kleinere Bild wiederholen, wobei die ursprünglichen Abmessungen über der Oberfläche der automatischen Form beibehalten werden, sodass der Raum vollständig ausgefüllt werden kann.

            +

            Hinweis: Jede ausgewählte Texturvoreinstellung füllt den Raum vollständig aus. Sie können jedoch bei Bedarf den Dehnungseffekt anwenden.

        • -
        • Muster - wählen Sie diese Option, um die Form mit einem zweifarbigen Design zu füllen, dass aus regelmäßig wiederholten Elementen besteht.

          Füllungsmuster

          +
        • Muster - Wählen Sie diese Option, um die Form mit einem zweifarbigen Design zu füllen, das aus regelmäßig wiederholten Elementen besteht.

          Füllungsmuster

            -
          • Muster - wählen Sie eine der Designvorgaben aus dem Menü aus.
          • -
          • Vordergrundfarbe - klicken Sie auf dieses Farbfeld, um die Farbe der Musterelemente zu ändern.
          • -
          • Hintergrundfarbe - klicken Sie auf dieses Farbfeld, um die Farbe des Hintergrundmusters zu ändern.
          • +
          • Muster - Wählen Sie eines der vordefinierten Designs aus dem Menü.
          • +
          • Vordergrundfarbe - Klicken Sie auf dieses Farbfeld, um die Farbe der Musterelemente zu ändern.
          • +
          • Hintergrundfarbe - Klicken Sie auf dieses Farbfeld, um die Farbe des Musterhintergrunds zu ändern.
        • Keine Füllung - wählen Sie diese Option, wenn Sie keine Füllung verwenden möchten.
      -

      Gruppe Einstellungen AutoFom

      +

      Registerkarte Einstellungen AutoFom

        -
      • Transparenz - hier können Sie den Grad der gewünschten Transparenz auswählen, bringen Sie dazu den Schieberegler in die gewünschte Position oder geben Sie manuell einen Prozentwert ein. Der Standardwert beträgt 100%. Also volle Deckkraft. Der Wert 0% steht für vollständige Transparenz.
      • -
      • Strich - nutzen Sie diese Sektion, um die Konturbreite und -farbe der AutoForm zu ändern.
          -
        • Um die Strichstärke zu ändern, wählen Sie eine der verfügbaren Optionen im Listenmenü Größe aus. Die verfügbaren Optionen sind: 0,5 Pt., 1 Pt., 1,5 Pt., 2,25 Pt., 3 Pt., 4,5 Pt., 6 Pt. Alternativ können Sie die Option Keine Linie auswählen, wenn Sie keine Umrandung wünschen.
        • -
        • Um die Konturfarbe zu ändern, klicken Sie auf das farbige Feld und wählen Sie die gewünschte Farbe aus.
        • -
        • Um den Stil der Kontur zu ändern, wählen Sie die gewünschte Option aus der entsprechenden Dropdown-Liste aus (standardmäßig wird eine durchgezogene Linie verwendet, diese können Sie in eine der verfügbaren gestrichelten Linien ändern).
        • +
        • Deckkraft - Verwenden Sie diesen Abschnitt, um eine Deckkraftstufe festzulegen, indem Sie den Schieberegler ziehen oder den Prozentwert manuell eingeben. Der Standardwert ist 100%. Es entspricht der vollen Deckkraft. Der Wert 0% entspricht der vollen Transparenz.
        • +
        • Strich - Verwenden Sie diesen Abschnitt, um die Breite, Farbe oder den Typ des Strichs für die automatische Formgebung zu ändern.
            +
          • Um die Strichbreite zu ändern, wählen Sie eine der verfügbaren Optionen aus der Dropdown-Liste Größe. Die verfügbaren Optionen sind: 0,5 pt, 1 pt, 1,5 pt, 2,25 pt, 3 pt, 4,5 pt, 6 pt. Alternativ können Sie die Option Keine Linie auswählen, wenn Sie keinen Strich verwenden möchten.
          • +
          • Um die Strichfarbe zu ändern, klicken Sie auf das farbige Feld unten und wählen Sie die gewünschte Farbe aus.
          • +
          • Um den Strich-Typ zu ändern, wählen Sie die erforderliche Option aus der entsprechenden Dropdown-Liste aus (standardmäßig wird eine durchgezogene Linie angewendet, Sie können sie in eine der verfügbaren gestrichelten Linien ändern).
        • -
        • Textumbruch - wählen Sie den Stil für den Textumbruch aus den verfügbaren Stilen aus: Mit Text verschieben, Quadrat, Eng, Transparent, Oben und unten, Vorne, Hinten (weitere Informationen finden Sie in der nachfolgenden Beschreibung der erweiterten Einstellungen).
        • -
        • AutoForm ändern - ersetzen Sie die aktuelle AutoForm durch eine andere, die Sie im Listenmenü wählen können.
        • +
        • Die Drehung wird verwendet, um die Form um 90 Grad im oder gegen den Uhrzeigersinn zu drehen sowie um die Form horizontal oder vertikal zu drehen. Klicken Sie auf eine der Schaltflächen:
            +
          • Gegen den Uhrzeigersinn drehen um die Form um 90 Grad gegen den Uhrzeigersinn zu drehen
          • +
          • Im Uhrzeigersinn drehen um die Form um 90 Grad im Uhrzeigersinn zu drehen
          • +
          • Horizontal spiegeln um die Form horizontal zu drehen (von links nach rechts)
          • +
          • Vertikal spiegeln um die Form vertikal zu drehen (verkehrt herum)
          • +
          +
        • +
        • Umbruchstil - Verwenden Sie diesen Abschnitt, um einen Textumbruchstil aus den verfügbaren auszuwählen - inline, quadratisch, eng, durch, oben und unten, vorne, hinten (weitere Informationen finden Sie in der Beschreibung der erweiterten Einstellungen unten).
        • +
        • Autoshape ändern - Verwenden Sie diesen Abschnitt, um die aktuelle Autoshape durch eine andere zu ersetzen, die aus der Dropdown-Liste ausgewählt wurde.
        • +
        • Schatten anzeigen - Aktivieren Sie diese Option, um die Form mit Schatten anzuzeigen.

        -

        Um die erweiterte Einstellungen der AutoForm zu ändern, klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste auf die Form und wählen Sie die Option Erweiterte Einstellungen im Menü aus, oder klicken Sie in der rechten Seitenleiste auf die Verknüpfung Erweiterte Einstellungen anzeigen. Das Fenster „Form - Erweiterte Einstellungen“ wird geöffnet:

        +

        Passen Sie die erweiterten Einstellungen für die automatische Form an

        +

        Um die erweiterten Einstellungen der automatischen Form zu ändern, klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste darauf und wählen Sie die Option Erweiterte Einstellungen im Menü oder verwenden Sie den Link Erweiterte Einstellungen anzeigen in der rechten Seitenleiste. Das Fenster 'Form - Erweiterte Einstellungen' wird geöffnet:

        Form - Erweiterte Einstellungen

        Die Registerkarte Größe enthält die folgenden Parameter:

          -
        • Breite - ändern Sie die Breite der AutoForm mit den verfügbaren Optionen.
            -
          • Absolut - geben Sie einen exakten Wert in absoluten Einheiten an, wie Zentimeter/Punkte/Zoll (abhängig von der Voreinstellung in der Registerkarte Datei -> Erweiterte Einstellungen...).
          • -
          • Relativ - geben Sie einen Prozentwert an, gemessen von linker Seitenrandbreite, Seitenrand (der Abstand zwischen dem linken und rechten Seitenrand), Seitenbreite oder der rechten Seitenrandbreite.
          • +
          • Breite - Verwenden Sie eine dieser Optionen, um die automatische Formbreite zu ändern.
              +
            • Absolut - Geben Sie einen genauen Wert an, der in absoluten Einheiten gemessen wird, d. H. Zentimeter / Punkte / Zoll (abhängig von der auf der Registerkarte Datei -> Erweiterte Einstellungen ... angegebenen Option).
            • +
            • Relativ - Geben Sie einen Prozentsatz relativ zur linken Randbreite, dem Rand (d. H. Dem Abstand zwischen dem linken und rechten Rand), der Seitenbreite oder der rechten Randbreite an.
          • -
          • Höhe - ändern Sie die Höhe der AutoForm.
              -
            • Absolut - geben Sie einen exakten Wert in absoluten Einheiten an, wie Zentimeter/Punkte/Zoll (abhängig von der Voreinstellung in der Registerkarte Datei -> Erweiterte Einstellungen...).
            • -
            • Relativ - geben Sie einen Prozentwert an, gemessen vom Seitenrand (der Abstand zwischen dem linken und rechten Seitenrand), der unteren Randhöhe, der Seitenhöhe oder der oberen Randhöhe.
            • +
            • Höhe - Verwenden Sie eine dieser Optionen, um die Höhe der automatischen Form zu ändern.
                +
              • Absolut - Geben Sie einen genauen Wert an, der in absoluten Einheiten gemessen wird, d. H. Zentimeter / Punkte / Zoll (abhängig von der auf der Registerkarte Datei -> Erweiterte Einstellungen ... angegebenen Option).
              • +
              • Relativ - Geben Sie einen Prozentsatz relativ zum Rand (d. H. Dem Abstand zwischen dem oberen und unteren Rand), der Höhe des unteren Randes, der Seitenhöhe oder der Höhe des oberen Randes an.
            • -
            • Wenn die Funktion Seitenverhältnis sperren aktivieren ist, werden Breite und Höhe gleichmäßig geändert und das ursprünglichen Seitenverhältnis wird beibehalten.
            • +
            • Wenn die Option Seitenverhältnis sperren aktiviert ist, werden Breite und Höhe zusammen geändert, wobei das ursprüngliche Seitenverhältnis beibehalten wird.
            +

            Form - Erweiterte Einstellungen

            +

            Die Registerkarte Rotation enthält die folgenden Parameter:

            +
              +
            • Winkel - Verwenden Sie diese Option, um die Form um einen genau festgelegten Winkel zu drehen. Geben Sie den erforderlichen Wert in Grad in das Feld ein oder passen Sie ihn mit den Pfeilen rechts an.
            • +
            • Gekippt - Aktivieren Sie das Kontrollkästchen Horizontal, um die Form horizontal umzudrehen (von links nach rechts), oder aktivieren Sie das Kontrollkästchen Vertikal, um die Form vertikal zu spiegeln (verkehrt herum).
            • +

            Form - Erweiterte Einstellungen

            Die Registerkarte Textumbruch enthält die folgenden Parameter:

              -
            • Textumbruch - legen Sie fest, wie die Form im Verhältnis zum Text positioniert wird: entweder als Teil des Textes (wenn Sie die Option „Mit Text verschieben“ auswählen) oder an allen Seiten von Text umgeben (wenn Sie einen anderen Stil wählen).
                -
              • Textumbruch - Mit Text verschieben Mit Text verschieben - die Form wird Teil des Textes (wie ein Zeichen) und wenn der Text verschoben wird, wird auch die Form verschoben. In diesem Fall sind die Positionsoptionen nicht verfügbar.

                -

                Ist eine der folgenden Umbrucharten ausgewählt, kann die Form unabhängig vom Text verschoben und auf der Seite positioniert werden:

                +
              • Umbruchstil - Verwenden Sie diese Option, um die Position der Form relativ zum Text zu ändern: Sie ist entweder Teil des Textes (falls Sie den Inline-Stil auswählen) oder wird von allen Seiten umgangen (wenn Sie einen auswählen) die anderen Stile).
                  +
                • Textumbruch - Mit Text verschieben Inline - Die Form wird wie ein Zeichen als Teil des Textes betrachtet. Wenn sich der Text bewegt, bewegt sich auch die Form. In diesem Fall sind die Positionierungsoptionen nicht zugänglich.

                  +

                  Wenn einer der folgenden Stile ausgewählt ist, kann die Form unabhängig vom Text verschoben und genau auf der Seite positioniert werden:

                • -
                • Textumbruch - Quadrat Quadrat - der Text bricht um den rechteckigen Kasten, der die Form umgibt.

                • -
                • Textumbruch - Eng Eng - der Text bricht um die Formkanten herum.

                • -
                • Textumbruch - Transparent Transparent - der Text bricht um die Formkanten herum und füllt den offenen weißen Leerraum innerhalb der Form. Wählen Sie für diesen Effekt die Option Umbruchsgrenze bearbeiten aus dem Rechtsklickmenü aus.

                • -
                • Textumbruch - Oben und unten Oben und unten - der Text ist nur oberhalb und unterhalb der Form.

                • -
                • Textumbruch - Vorne Vorne - die Form überlappt mit dem Text.

                • -
                • Textumbruch - Hinten Hinten - der Text überlappt mit der Form.

                • +
                • Textumbruch - Quadrat Quadratisch - Der Text umschließt das rechteckige Feld, das die Form begrenzt.

                • +
                • Textumbruch - Eng Eng - Der Text umschließt die tatsächlichen Formkanten.

                • +
                • Textumbruch - Transparent Durch - Der Text wird um die Formkanten gewickelt und füllt den offenen weißen Bereich innerhalb der Form aus. Verwenden Sie die Option Umbruchgrenze bearbeiten im Kontextmenü, damit der Effekt angezeigt wird.

                • +
                • Textumbruch - Oben und unten Oben und unten - der Text befindet sich nur über und unter der Form.

                • +
                • Textumbruch - Vorne Vorne - die Form überlappt den Text.

                • +
                • Textumbruch - Hinten Dahinter - der Text überlappt die Form.

              -

              Wenn Sie die Stile Quadrat, Eng, Transparent oder Oben und unten auswählen, haben Sie die Möglichkeit zusätzliche Parameter einzugeben - Abstand vom Text auf allen Seiten (oben, unten, links, rechts).

              +

              Wenn Sie den quadratischen, engen, durchgehenden oder oberen und unteren Stil auswählen, können Sie einige zusätzliche Parameter festlegen - Abstand zum Text an allen Seiten (oben, unten, links, rechts).

              Form - Erweiterte Einstellungen

              -

              Die Registerkarte Position ist nur verfügbar, wenn Sie einen anderen Umbruchstil als „Mit Text in Zeile“ auswählen. Hier können Sie abhängig vom gewählten Format des Textumbruchs die folgenden Parameter festlegen:

              +

              Die Registerkarte Position ist nur verfügbar, wenn Sie einen anderen Umbruchstil als Inline auswählen. Diese Registerkarte enthält die folgenden Parameter, die je nach ausgewähltem Verpackungsstil variieren:

                -
              • In der Gruppe Horizontal, können Sie eine der folgenden drei AutoFormpositionierungstypen auswählen:
                  -
                • Ausrichtung (links, zentriert, rechts) gemessen an Zeichen, Spalte, linker Seitenrand, Seitenrand, Seite oder rechter Seitenrand.
                • -
                • Absolute Position, gemessen in absoluten Einheiten wie Zentimeter/Punkte/Zoll (abhängig von der Voreinstellung in Datei -> Erweiterte Einstellungen...), rechts von Zeichen, Spalte, linker Seitenrand, Seitenrand, Seite oder rechter Seitenrand.
                • -
                • Relative Position in Prozent, gemessen von linker Seitenrand, Seitenrand, Seite oder rechter Seitenrand.
                • +
                • Im horizontalen Bereich können Sie einen der folgenden drei Positionierungstypen für die automatische Form auswählen:
                    +
                  • Ausrichtung (links, Mitte, rechts) relativ zu Zeichen, Spalte, linkem Rand, Rand, Seite oder rechtem Rand,
                  • +
                  • Absolute Position, gemessen in absoluten Einheiten, d. H. Zentimeter/Punkte/Zoll (abhängig von der auf der Registerkarte Datei -> Erweiterte Einstellungen... angegebenen Option), rechts neben Zeichen, Spalte, linkem Rand, Rand, Seite oder rechtem Rand.
                  • +
                  • Relative Position gemessen in Prozent relativ zum linken Rand, Rand, Seite oder rechten Rand.
                • -
                • In der Gruppe Vertikal, können Sie eine der folgenden drei AutoFormpositionierungstypen auswählen:
                    -
                  • Ausrichtung (oben, zentriert, unten) gemessen von Zeile, Seitenrand, unterer Rand, Abschnitt, Seite oder oberer Rand.
                  • -
                  • Absolute Position, gemessen in absoluten Einheiten wie Zentimeter/Punkte/Zoll (abhängig von der Voreinstellung in Datei -> Erweiterte Einstellungen...), unterhalb Zeile, Seitenrand, unterer Seitenrand, Absatz, Seite oder oberer Seitenrand.
                  • -
                  • Relative Position in Prozent, gemessen von Seitenrand, unterer Seitenrand, Seite oder oberer Seitenrand.
                  • +
                  • Im vertikalen Bereich können Sie einen der folgenden drei Positionierungstypen für die automatische Form auswählen:
                      +
                    • Ausrichtung (oben, Mitte, unten) relativ zu Linie, Rand, unterem Rand, Absatz, Seite oder oberem Rand,
                    • +
                    • Absolute Position gemessen in absoluten Einheiten, d. H. Zentimeter / Punkte / Zoll (abhängig von der auf der Registerkarte Datei -> Erweiterte Einstellungen... angegebenen Option), unter Linie, Rand, unterem Rand, Absatz, Seite oder oberem Rand,
                    • +
                    • Relative Position gemessen in Prozent relativ zum Rand, unteren Rand, Seite oder oberen Rand.
                  • -
                  • Im Kontrollkästchen Objekt mit Text verschieben können Sie festlegen, ob sich die AutoForm zusammen mit dem Text bewegen lässt, mit dem sie verankert wurde.
                  • -
                  • Überlappen zulassen bestimmt, ob zwei AutoFormen einander überlagern können oder nicht, wenn Sie diese auf einer Seite dicht aneinander bringen.
                  • +
                  • Objekt mit Text verschieben steuert, ob sich die automatische Form so bewegt, wie sich der Text bewegt, an dem sie verankert ist.
                  • +
                  • Überlappungssteuerung zulassen steuert, ob sich zwei automatische Formen überlappen oder nicht, wenn Sie sie auf der Seite nebeneinander ziehen

                  Form - Erweiterte Einstellungen

                  -

                  Die Registerkarte Formeinstellungen enthält die folgenden Parameter:

                  +

                  Die Registerkarte Gewichte und Pfeile enthält die folgenden Parameter:

                    -
                  • Linienart - in dieser Gruppe können Sie die folgenden Parameter bestimmen:
                      -
                    • Abschlusstyp - legen Sie den Stil für den Abschluss der Linie fest, diese Option besteht nur bei Formen mit offener Kontur wie Linien, Polylinien usw.:
                        -
                      • Flach - flacher Abschluss
                      • -
                      • Rund - runder Abschluss
                      • -
                      • Quadratisch - quadratisches Linienende
                      • +
                      • Linienstil - In dieser Optionsgruppe können die folgenden Parameter angegeben werden:
                          +
                        • Kappentyp - Mit dieser Option können Sie den Stil für das Ende der Linie festlegen. Daher kann er nur auf Formen mit offenem Umriss angewendet werden, z. B. Linien, Polylinien usw.:
                            +
                          • Flach - Die Endpunkte sind flach.
                          • +
                          • Runden - Die Endpunkte werden gerundet.
                          • +
                          • Quadrat - Die Endpunkte sind quadratisch.
                        • -
                        • Anschlusstyp - legen Sie die Art der Verknüpfung von zwei Linien fest, z.B. kann diese Option auf Polylinien oder die Ecken von Dreiecken bzw. Vierecken angewendet werden:
                            -
                          • Rund - abgerundete Ecke
                          • -
                          • Schräge Kante - die Ecke wird schräg abgeschnitten
                          • -
                          • Winkel - spitze Ecke Dieser Typ passt gut bei AutoFormen mit spitzen Winkeln.
                          • +
                          • Verbindungstyp - Mit dieser Option können Sie den Stil für den Schnittpunkt zweier Linien festlegen. Dies kann sich beispielsweise auf eine Polylinie oder die Ecken des Dreiecks oder Rechteckumrisses auswirken:
                              +
                            • Rund - die Ecke wird abgerundet.
                            • +
                            • Abschrägung - die Ecke wird eckig abgeschnitten.
                            • +
                            • Gehrung - die Ecke wird spitz. Es passt gut zu Formen mit scharfen Winkeln.
                            -

                            Hinweis: Der Effekt wird auffälliger, wenn Sie eine hohe Konturbreite verwenden.

                            +

                            Hinweis: Der Effekt macht sich stärker bemerkbar, wenn Sie eine große Umrissbreite verwenden.

                        • -
                        • Pfeile - Gruppe ist verfügbar, wenn eine Form aus der Gruppe Linien ausgewählt wurde. Dadurch können Sie die Form von Startpfeil und Endpfeil festlegen und die jeweilige Größe bestimmen. Wählen Sie dazu einfach die gewünschte Option aus der Liste aus.
                        • +
                        • Pfeile - Diese Optionsgruppe ist verfügbar, wenn eine Form aus der Formgruppe Linien ausgewählt ist. Sie können den Pfeil Start- und Endstil und -größe festlegen, indem Sie die entsprechende Option aus den Dropdown-Listen auswählen.

                        Form - Erweiterte Einstellungen

                        -

                        Über die Registerkarte Textränder können Sie die oberen, unteren, linken und rechten inneren Ränder der AutoForm ändern (also den Abstand zwischen dem Text innerhalb der Form und dem Rahmen der AutoForm).

                        -

                        Hinweis: diese Registerkarte ist nur verfügbar, wenn der AutoForm ein Text hinzugefügt wurde, ansonsten wird die Registerkarte ausgeblendet.

                        +

                        Auf der Registerkarte Textauffüllung können Sie die inneren Ränder der oberen, unteren, linken und rechten Form der automatischen Form ändern (d. H. Den Abstand zwischen dem Text innerhalb der Form und den Rahmen der automatischen Form).

                        +

                        Hinweis: Diese Registerkarte ist nur verfügbar, wenn Text innerhalb der automatischen Form hinzugefügt wird. Andernfalls ist die Registerkarte deaktiviert.

                        Form - Erweiterte Einstellungen

                        -

                        Die Registerkarte Alternativtext ermöglicht die Eingabe eines Titels und einer Beschreibung die Personen mit Sehbehinderungen oder kognitiven Beeinträchtigungen vorgelesen werden kann damit sie besser verstehen können, welche Informationen in der Form vorhanden sind.

                        +

                        Auf der Registerkarte Alternativer Text können Sie einen Titel und eine Beschreibung angeben, die Personen mit Seh- oder kognitiven Beeinträchtigungen vorgelesen werden, damit sie besser verstehen, welche Informationen in der Form enthalten sind.

                        \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/InsertBookmarks.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/InsertBookmarks.htm index 428b996a8..c82dc55dd 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/InsertBookmarks.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/InsertBookmarks.htm @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ Lesezeichen hinzufügen - + @@ -17,7 +17,11 @@

                        Lesezeichen ermöglichen den schnellen Wechsel zu einer bestimmten Position im aktuellen Dokument oder das Hinzufügen eines Links an dieser Position im Dokument.

                        Einfügen eines Lesezeichens:

                          -
                        1. Positionieren Sie den Mauszeiger an den Anfang der Textpassage, in die das Lesezeichen eingefügt werden soll.
                        2. +
                        3. Legen Sie die Position fest, an der das Lesezeichen eingefügt werden soll:
                            +
                          • Positionieren Sie den Mauszeiger am Beginn der gewünschten Textstelle oder
                          • +
                          • wählen Sie die gewünschte Textpassage aus.
                          • +
                          +
                        4. Wechseln Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf die Registerkarte Verweise.
                        5. Klicken Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf das Symbol Lesezeichen Lesezeichen.
                        6. Geben Sie im sich öffnenden Fenster Lesezeichen den Namen des Lesezeichens ein und klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche Hinzufügen - das Lesezeichen wird der unten angezeigten Lesezeichenliste hinzugefügt.

                          Hinweis: Der Name des Lesezeichens sollte mit einem Buchstaben beginnen, er kann jedoch auch Zahlen enthalten. Der Name des Lesezeichens darf keine Leerzeichen enthalten, ein Unterstrich "_" ist jedoch möglich.

                          @@ -26,11 +30,15 @@

                        So wechseln Sie zu einem der hinzugefügten Lesezeichen im Dokumenttext:

                          -
                        1. Klicken Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste unter der Registerkarte Verweise auf das Symbol Lesezeichen Lesezeichen.
                        2. +
                        3. Klicken Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste in der Registerkarte Verweise auf das Symbol Lesezeichen Lesezeichen.
                        4. Wählen Sie im sich öffnenden Fenster Lesezeichen das Lesezeichen aus, zu dem Sie springen möchten. Um das erforderliche Lesezeichen in der Liste zu finden, können Sie die Liste nach Name oder Position eines Lesezeichens im Dokumenttext sortieren.
                        5. Aktivieren Sie die Option Versteckte Lesezeichen, um ausgeblendete Lesezeichen in der Liste anzuzeigen (z. B. die vom Programm automatisch erstellten Lesezeichen, wenn Sie Verweise auf einen bestimmten Teil des Dokuments hinzufügen. Wenn Sie beispielsweise einen Hyperlink zu einer bestimmten Überschrift innerhalb des Dokuments erstellen, erzeugt der Dokumenteditor automatisch ein ausgeblendetes Lesezeichen für das Ziel dieses Links).
                        6. -
                        7. Klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche Gehe zu - der Cursor wird an der Stelle innerhalb des Dokuments positioniert, an der das ausgewählte Lesezeichen hinzugefügt wurde,
                        8. -
                        9. klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche Schließen, um das Dialogfenster zu schließen.
                        10. +
                        11. Klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche Gehe zu - der Zeiger wird an der Stelle innerhalb des Dokuments positioniert, an der das ausgewählte Lesezeichen hinzugefügt wurde oder es wird die entsprechende Textpassage ausgewählt.
                        12. +
                        13. Klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche Link bekommen und ein neues Fenster öffnet sich wo Sie den Copy Schaltfläche drücken koennen um den Link zu der Datei zu kopieren, welches die Buckmarkierungstelle im Dokument spezifiziert. +

                          Fenster Lesezeichen

                          +

                          Hinweis: Um den Link mit anderen Benutzern zu teilen, muss auch die entsprechende Zugangskontrolle zu dieser Datei gesetzt werden. Benutzen Sie dazu die Teilen Funktion in die Schaltfläche Zusammenarbeit. +

                        14. +
                        15. Klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche Schließen, um das Dialogfenster zu schließen.

                        Um ein Lesezeichen zu löschen, wählen Sie den entsprechenden Namen aus der Liste der Lesezeichen aus und klicken Sie auf Löschen.

                        Informationen zum Verwenden von Lesezeichen beim Erstellen von Links finden Sie im Abschnitt Hyperlinks hinzufügen.

                        diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm index aafa44fe2..368d5e70d 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ Diagramme einfügen - + @@ -14,210 +14,217 @@

                        Diagramme einfügen

                        -

                        Diagramm einfügen

                        -

                        Einfügen eines Diagramms

                        +

                        Fügen Sie ein Diagramm ein

                        +

                        Um ein Diagramm in Ihr Dokument einzufügen,

                          -
                        1. Positionieren Sie den Cursor an der Stelle, an der Sie ein Diagramm einfügen möchten.
                        2. -
                        3. Wechseln Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf die Registerkarte Einfügen.
                        4. -
                        5. Klicken Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf das Symbol Diagramm Diagramm.
                        6. -
                        7. Wählen Sie den gewünschten Diagrammtyp aus den verfügbaren Vorlagen aus - Säule, Linie, Kreis, Balken, Fläche, Punkt (XY) oder Strich.

                          Hinweis: Die Diagrammtypen Säule, Linie, Kreis und Balken stehen auch im 3D-Format zur Verfügung.

                          +
                        8. Setzen Sie den Zeiger an die Stelle, an der Sie ein Diagramm hinzufügen möchten.
                        9. +
                        10. Wechseln Sie zur Registerkarte Einfügen in der oberen Symbolleiste.
                        11. +
                        12. Klicken Sie auf das Diagrammsymbol Diagramm in der oberen Symbolleiste.
                        13. +
                        14. Wählen Sie den gewünschten Diagrammtyp aus den verfügbaren aus - Spalte, Linie, Kreis, Balken, Fläche, XY (Streuung) oder Bestand, +

                          Hinweis: Für Spalten-, Linien-, Kreis- oder Balkendiagramme ist auch ein 3D-Format verfügbar.

                        15. -
                        16. Wenn Sie Ihre Auswahl getroffen haben, öffnet sich das Fenster Diagramm bearbeiten und Sie können die gewünschten Daten mithilfe der folgenden Steuerelemente in die Zellen eingeben:
                            -
                          • Kopieren und Einfügen - Kopieren und Einfügen der kopierten Daten.
                          • -
                          • Rückgängig machen und Wiederholen - Aktionen Rückgängig machen und Wiederholen.
                          • -
                          • Funktion einfügen - Einfügen einer Funktion
                          • -
                          • Dezimalstelle löschen und Dezimalstelle hinzufügen - Löschen und Hinzufügen von Dezimalstellen.
                          • -
                          • Zahlenformat - Zahlenformat ändern, d.h. das Format in dem die eingegebenen Zahlen in den Zellen dargestellt werden
                          • +
                          • Danach erscheint das Fenster Diagrammeditor, in dem Sie die erforderlichen Daten mit den folgenden Steuerelementen in die Zellen eingeben können:
                              +
                            • Kopieren und Einfügen zum Kopieren und Einfügen der kopierten Daten.
                            • +
                            • Rückgängig machen und Wiederholen zum Rückgängigmachen und Wiederherstellen von Aktionen
                            • +
                            • Funktion einfügen zum Einfügen einer Funktion
                            • +
                            • Dezimalstelle löschen und Dezimalstelle hinzufügen zum Verringern und Erhöhen von Dezimalstellen
                            • +
                            • Zahlenformat zum Ändern des Zahlenformats, d. h. der Art und Weise, wie die von Ihnen eingegebenen Zahlen in Zellen angezeigt werden

                            Fenster Diagramm bearbeiten

                          • -
                          • Die Diagrammeinstellungen ändern Sie durch Anklicken der Schaltfläche Diagramm bearbeiten im Fenster Diagramme. Das Fenster Diagramme - Erweiterte Einstellungen wird geöffnet.

                            Diagramme - Erweiterte Einstellungen

                            -

                            Auf der Registerkarte Diagrammtyp und Daten können Sie den Diagrammtyp sowie die Daten ändern, die Sie zum Erstellen eines Diagramms verwenden möchten.

                            +
                          • Ändern Sie die Diagrammeinstellungen, indem Sie im Fenster Diagrammeditor auf die Schaltfläche Diagramm bearbeiten klicken. Das Fenster Diagramm - Erweiterte Einstellungen wird geöffnet.

                            Diagramme - Erweiterte Einstellungen

                            +

                            Auf der Registerkarte Typ & Daten können Sie den Diagrammtyp sowie die Daten ändern, die Sie zum Erstellen eines Diagramms verwenden möchten.

                              -
                            • Wählen Sie den gewünschten Diagrammtyp aus: Säule, Linie, Kreis, Balken, Fläche, Punkt (XY) oder Strich.
                            • -
                            • Überprüfen Sie den ausgewählten Datenbereich und ändern Sie diesen ggf. durch Anklicken der Schaltfläche Daten auswählen; geben Sie den gewünschten Datenbereich im folgenden Format ein: Sheet1!A1:B4.
                            • -
                            • Wählen Sie aus, wie die Daten angeordnet werden sollen. Für die Datenreihen die auf die X-Achse angewendet werden sollen, können Sie wählen zwischen: Datenreihen in Zeilen oder in Spalten.
                            • +
                            • Wählen Sie einen Diagrammtyp aus, den Sie anwenden möchten: Spalte, Linie, Kreis, Balken, Fläche, XY (Streuung) oder Bestand.
                            • +
                            • Überprüfen Sie den ausgewählten Datenbereich und ändern Sie ihn gegebenenfalls, indem Sie auf die Schaltfläche Daten auswählen klicken und den gewünschten Datenbereich im folgenden Format eingeben: Blatt1! A1: B4.
                            • +
                            • Wählen Sie die Art und Weise, wie die Daten angeordnet werden sollen. Sie können entweder die Datenreihe auswählen, die auf der X-Achse verwendet werden soll: in Zeilen oder in Spalten.

                            Diagramme - Erweiterte Einstellungen

                            Auf der Registerkarte Layout können Sie das Layout von Diagrammelementen ändern.

                              -
                            • Wählen Sie die gewünschte Position der Diagrammbezeichnung aus der Dropdown-Liste aus:
                                -
                              • Keine - es wird keine Diagrammbezeichnung angezeigt.
                              • -
                              • Überlagerung - der Titel wird zentriert und im Diagrammbereich angezeigt.
                              • -
                              • Keine Überlagerung - der Titel wird über dem Diagramm angezeigt.
                              • +
                              • Geben Sie die Position des Diagrammtitels in Bezug auf Ihr Diagramm an und wählen Sie die erforderliche Option aus der Dropdown-Liste aus:
                                  +
                                • Keine, um keinen Diagrammtitel anzuzeigen,
                                • +
                                • Überlagern, um einen Titel auf dem Plotbereich zu überlagern und zu zentrieren.
                                • +
                                • Keine Überlagerung, um den Titel über dem Plotbereich anzuzeigen.
                              • -
                              • Wählen Sie die gewünschte Position der Legende aus der Menüliste aus:
                                  -
                                • Keine - es wird keine Legende angezeigt
                                • -
                                • Unten - die Legende wird unterhalb des Diagramms angezeigt
                                • -
                                • Oben - die Legende wird oberhalb des Diagramms angezeigt
                                • -
                                • Rechts - die Legende wird rechts vom Diagramm angezeigt
                                • -
                                • Links - die Legende wird links vom Diagramm angezeigt
                                • -
                                • Überlappung links - die Legende wird im linken Diagrammbereich mittig dargestellt
                                • -
                                • Überlappung rechts - die Legende wird im rechten Diagrammbereich mittig dargestellt
                                • +
                                • Geben Sie die Position der Legende in Bezug auf Ihr Diagramm an und wählen Sie die erforderliche Option aus der Dropdown-Liste aus: +
                                    +
                                  • Keine, um keine Legende anzuzeigen,
                                  • +
                                  • Unten, um die Legende anzuzeigen und am unteren Rand des Plotbereichs auszurichten.
                                  • +
                                  • Oben, um die Legende anzuzeigen und am oberen Rand des Plotbereichs auszurichten.
                                  • +
                                  • Rechts, um die Legende anzuzeigen und rechts vom Plotbereich auszurichten,
                                  • +
                                  • Links, um die Legende anzuzeigen und links vom Plotbereich auszurichten.
                                  • +
                                  • Linke Überlagerung zum Überlagern und Zentrieren der Legende links im Plotbereich.
                                  • +
                                  • Rechte Überlagerung zum Überlagern und Zentrieren der Legende rechts im Plotbereich.
                                • -
                                • Legen Sie Datenbeschriftungen fest (Titel für genaue Werte von Datenpunkten):
                                    -
                                  • Wählen Sie die gewünschte Position der Datenbeschriftungen aus der Menüliste aus: Die verfügbaren Optionen variieren je nach Diagrammtyp.
                                      -
                                    • Für Säulen-/Balkendiagramme haben Sie die folgenden Optionen: Keine, zentriert, unterer Innenbereich, oberer Innenbereich, oberer Außenbereich.
                                    • -
                                    • Für Linien-/Punktdiagramme (XY)/Strichdarstellungen haben Sie die folgenden Optionen: Keine, zentriert, links, rechts, oben, unten.
                                    • -
                                    • Für Kreisdiagramme stehen Ihnen folgende Optionen zur Verfügung: Keine, zentriert, an Breite anpassen, oberer Innenbereich, oberer Außenbereich.
                                    • -
                                    • Für Flächendiagramme sowie für 3D-Diagramme, Säulen- Linien- und Balkendiagramme, stehen Ihnen folgende Optionen zur Verfügung: Keine, zentriert.
                                    • +
                                    • Geben Sie die Parameter für Datenbeschriftungen (d. H. Textbeschriftungen, die exakte Werte von Datenpunkten darstellen) an:
                                        +
                                      • Geben Sie die Position der Datenbeschriftungen relativ zu den Datenpunkten an und wählen Sie die erforderliche Option aus der Dropdown-Liste aus. Die verfügbaren Optionen variieren je nach ausgewähltem Diagrammtyp.
                                          +
                                        • Für Spalten- / Balkendiagramme können Sie die folgenden Optionen auswählen: Keine, Mitte, Innen unten, Innen oben, Außen oben.
                                        • +
                                        • Für Linien- / XY- (Streu-) / Aktien-Diagramme können Sie die folgenden Optionen auswählen: Keine, Mitte, Links, Rechts, Oben, Unten.
                                        • +
                                        • Für Kreisdiagramme können Sie die folgenden Optionen auswählen: Keine, Mitte, An Breite anpassen, Innen oben, Außen oben.
                                        • +
                                        • Für Flächendiagramme sowie für 3D-Spalten-, Linien- und Balkendiagramme können Sie die folgenden Optionen auswählen: Keine, Mitte.
                                      • -
                                      • Wählen Sie die Daten aus, für die Sie eine Bezeichnung erstellen möchten, indem Sie die entsprechenden Felder markieren: Reihenname, Kategorienname, Wert.
                                      • -
                                      • Geben Sie das Zeichen (Komma, Semikolon etc.) in das Feld Trennzeichen Datenbeschriftung ein, dass Sie zum Trennen der Beschriftungen verwenden möchten.
                                      • +
                                      • Wählen Sie die Daten aus, die Sie in Ihre Etiketten aufnehmen möchten, und aktivieren Sie die entsprechenden Kontrollkästchen: Serienname, Kategorienname, Wert.
                                      • +
                                      • Geben Sie ein Zeichen (Komma, Semikolon etc.) , das Sie zum Trennen mehrerer Beschriftungen verwenden möchten, in das Eingabefeld Datenetiketten-Trennzeichen ein.
                                    • -
                                    • Linien - Einstellen der Linienart für Liniendiagramme/Punktdiagramme (XY). Die folgenden Optionen stehen Ihnen zur Verfügung: Gerade, um gerade Linien zwischen Datenpunkten zu verwenden, glatt um glatte Kurven zwischen Datenpunkten zu verwenden oder keine, um keine Linien anzuzeigen.
                                    • -
                                    • Markierungen - über diese Funktion können Sie festlegen, ob die Marker für Liniendiagramme/ Punktdiagramme (XY) angezeigt werden sollen (Kontrollkästchen aktiviert) oder nicht (Kontrollkästchen deaktiviert).

                                      Hinweis: Die Optionen Linien und Marker stehen nur für Liniendiagramme und Punktdiagramm (XY) zur Verfügung.

                                      +
                                    • Linien - wird verwendet, um einen Linienstil für Linien- / XY-Diagramme (Streudiagramme) auszuwählen. Sie können eine der folgenden Optionen auswählen: Gerade, um gerade Linien zwischen Datenpunkten zu verwenden, Glätten, um glatte Kurven zwischen Datenpunkten zu verwenden, oder Keine, um keine Linien anzuzeigen.
                                    • +
                                    • Markierungen - wird verwendet, um anzugeben, ob die Markierungen für Linien- / XY-Diagramme (Streuung) angezeigt werden sollen (wenn das Kontrollkästchen aktiviert ist) oder nicht (wenn das Kontrollkästchen deaktiviert ist).

                                      Hinweis: Die Optionen Linien und Markierungen sind nur für Liniendiagramme und XY-Diagramme (Streudiagramme) verfügbar.

                                    • -
                                    • Im Abschnitt Achseneinstellungen können Sie auswählen, ob die horizontalen/vertikalen Achsen angezeigt werden sollen oder nicht. Wählen Sie dazu einfach einblenden oder ausblenden aus der Menüliste aus. Außerdem können Sie auch die Parameter für horizontale/vertikale Achsenbeschriftung festlegen:
                                        -
                                      • Legen Sie fest, ob der horizontale Achsentitel angezeigt werden soll oder nicht. Wählen Sie dazu einfach die entsprechende Option aus der Menüliste aus:
                                          -
                                        • Keinen - der Titel der horizontalen Achse wird nicht angezeigt.
                                        • -
                                        • Keine Überlappung - der Titel wird oberhalb der horizontalen Achse angezeigt.
                                        • +
                                        • Im Abschnitt Achseneinstellungen können Sie festlegen, ob die horizontale/vertikale Achse anzeigen möchten oder nichtdie Option Anzeigen oder Ausblenden aus der Dropdown-Liste auswählen. Sie können auch Parameter für den Titel der horizontalen / vertikalen Achse angeben: +
                                            +
                                          • Geben Sie an, ob Sie den Titel der horizontalen Achse anzeigen möchten oder nicht die erforderliche Option aus der Dropdown-Liste auswählen möchten:
                                              +
                                            • Keine, um keinen Titel der horizontalen Achse anzuzeigen,
                                            • +
                                            • Keine Überlagerung, um den Titel unterhalb der horizontalen Achse anzuzeigen.
                                          • -
                                          • Wählen Sie die gewünschte Position des vertikalen Achsentitels aus der Menüliste aus:
                                              -
                                            • Keinen - der Titel der vertikalen Achse wird nicht angezeigt.
                                            • -
                                            • Gedreht - der Titel wird links von der vertikalen Achse von unten nach oben angezeigt.
                                            • -
                                            • Horizontal - der Titel wird links von der vertikalen Achse von links nach rechts angezeigt.
                                            • +
                                            • Geben Sie die Ausrichtung des Titels der vertikalen Achse an und wählen Sie die erforderliche Option aus der Dropdown-Liste aus:
                                                +
                                              • Keine, um keinen vertikalen Achsentitel anzuzeigen,
                                              • +
                                              • Gedreht, um den Titel von unten nach oben links von der vertikalen Achse anzuzeigen.
                                              • +
                                              • Horizontal, um den Titel horizontal links von der vertikalen Achse anzuzeigen.
                                          • -
                                          • Im Abschnitt Gitternetzlinien, können Sie festlegen, welche der horizontalen/vertikalen Gitternetzlinien angezeigt werden sollen. Wählen Sie dazu einfach die entsprechende Option aus der Menüliste aus: Hauptgitternetz, Hilfsgitternetz oder Alle. Wenn Sie alle Gitternetzlinien ausblenden wollen, wählen Sie die Option Keine.

                                            Hinweis: Die Abschnitte Achseneinstellungen und Gitternetzlinien sind für Kreisdiagramme deaktiviert, da bei diesem Diagrammtyp keine Achsen oder Gitternetze vorhanden sind.

                                            +
                                          • Im Abschnitt Gitterlinien können Sie angeben, welche der horizontalen/vertikalen Gitterlinien Sie angezeigt möchten, indem Sie die erforderliche Option aus der Dropdown-Liste auswählen: Major, Minor oder Major und Minor. Sie können die Gitterlinien überhaupt mit der Option Keine ausblenden.

                                            Hinweis: Die Abschnitte Achseneinstellungen und Gitterlinien werden für Kreisdiagramme deaktiviert, da Diagramme dieses Typs keine Achsen und Gitterlinien haben.

                                          Diagramme - Erweiterte Einstellungen

                                          -

                                          Hinweis: Die Registerkarte vertikale/horizontale Achsen ist für Kreisdiagramme deaktiviert, da bei diesem Diagrammtyp keine Achsen vorhanden sind.

                                          -

                                          Auf der Registerkarte Vertikale Achse können Sie die Parameter der vertikalen Achse ändern, die auch als Werteachse oder Y-Achse bezeichnet wird und die numerische Werte anzeigt. Beachten Sie, dass bei Balkendiagrammen die vertikale Achse die Rubrikenachse ist, an der die Textbeschriftungen anzeigt werden, daher entsprechen in diesem Fall die Optionen in der Registerkarte Vertikale Achse den im nächsten Abschnitt beschriebenen Optionen. Für Punktdiagramme (XY) sind beide Achsen Wertachsen.

                                          +

                                          Hinweis: Die Registerkarte Vertikale / Horizontale Achse sind für Kreisdiagramme deaktiviert, da Diagramme dieser Art keine Achsen haben.

                                          +

                                          Auf der Registerkarte Vertikale Achse können Sie die Parameter der vertikalen Achse ändern, die auch als Werteachse oder y-Achse bezeichnet wird und numerische Werte anzeigt. Beachten Sie, dass die vertikale Achse die Kategorieachse ist, auf der Textbeschriftungen für die Balkendiagramme anzeigt werden. In diesem Fall entsprechen die Optionen auf der Registerkarte Vertikale Achse den im nächsten Abschnitt beschriebenen. Für XY-Diagramme (Streudiagramme) sind beide Achsen Wertachsen.

                                            -
                                          • Im Abschnitt Achsenoptionen können die folgenden Parameter festgelegt werden:
                                              -
                                            • Mindestwert - der niedrigste Wert, der am Anfang der vertikalen Achse angezeigt wird. Standardmäßig ist die Option Automatisch ausgewählt. In diesem Fall wird der Mindestwert automatisch abhängig vom ausgewählten Datenbereich berechnet. Alternativ können Sie die Option Festlegen aus der Menüliste auswählen und den gewünschten Wert in das dafür vorgesehene Feld eingeben.
                                            • -
                                            • Höchstwert - der höchste Wert, der am Ende der vertikalen Achse angezeigt wird. Standardmäßig ist die Option Automatisch ausgewählt. In diesem Fall wird der Höchstwert automatisch abhängig vom ausgewählten Datenbereich berechnet. Alternativ können Sie die Option Festlegen aus der Menüliste auswählen und den gewünschten Wert in das dafür vorgesehene Feld eingeben.
                                            • -
                                            • Schnittstelle - bestimmt den Punkt auf der vertikalen Achse, an dem die horizontale Achse die vertikale Achse kreuzt. Standardmäßig ist die Option Automatisch ausgewählt. In diesem Fall wird der Wert für die Schnittstelle automatisch abhängig vom ausgewählten Datenbereich berechnet. Alternativ können Sie die Option Wert aus der Menüliste auswählen und einen anderen Wert in das dafür vorgesehene Feld eingeben oder Sie legen den Achsenschnittpunkt am Mindest-/Höchstwert auf der vertikalen Achse fest.
                                            • -
                                            • Einheiten anzeigen - Festlegung der numerischen Werte, die auf der vertikalen Achse angezeigt werden sollen. Diese Option kann nützlich sein, wenn Sie mit großen Zahlen arbeiten und die Werte auf der Achse kompakter und lesbarer anzeigen wollen (Sie können z.B. 50.000 als 50 anzeigen, indem Sie die Anzeigeeinheit in Tausendern auswählen). Wählen Sie die gewünschten Einheiten aus der Menüliste aus: In Hundertern, in Tausendern, 10 000, 100 000, in Millionen, 10.000.000, 100.000.000, in Milliarden, in Trillionen, oder Sie wählen die Option Keine, um zu den Standardeinheiten zurückzukehren.
                                            • -
                                            • Werte in umgekehrter Reihenfolge - die Werte werden in absteigender Reihenfolge angezeigt. Wenn das Kontrollkästchen deaktiviert ist, wird der niedrigste Wert unten und der höchste Wert oben auf der Achse angezeigt. Wenn das Kontrollkästchen aktiviert ist, werden die Werte in absteigender Reihenfolge angezeigt.
                                            • +
                                            • Im Abschnitt Achsenoptionen können Sie die folgenden Parameter einstellen:
                                                +
                                              • Minimalwert - wird verwendet, um einen niedrigsten Wert anzugeben, der am Start der vertikalen Achse angezeigt wird. Die Option Auto ist standardmäßig ausgewählt. In diesem Fall wird der Mindestwert abhängig vom ausgewählten Datenbereich automatisch berechnet. Sie können die Option Fest aus der Dropdown-Liste auswählen und im Eingabefeld rechts einen anderen Wert angeben.
                                              • +
                                              • Maximalwert - wird verwendet, um einen höchsten Wert anzugeben, der am Ende der vertikalen Achse angezeigt wird. Die Option Auto ist standardmäßig ausgewählt. In diesem Fall wird der Maximalwert abhängig vom ausgewählten Datenbereich automatisch berechnet. Sie können die Option Fest aus der Dropdown-Liste auswählen und im Eingabefeld rechts einen anderen Wert angeben.
                                              • +
                                              • Achsenkreuze - wird verwendet, um einen Punkt auf der vertikalen Achse anzugeben, an dem die horizontale Achse ihn kreuzen soll. Die Option Auto ist standardmäßig ausgewählt. In diesem Fall wird der Achsenschnittpunktwert abhängig vom ausgewählten Datenbereich automatisch berechnet. Sie können die Option Wert aus der Dropdown-Liste auswählen und im Eingabefeld rechts einen anderen Wert angeben oder den Achsenschnittpunkt auf den minimalen / maximalen Wert auf der vertikalen Achse setzen.
                                              • +
                                              • Anzeigeeinheiten - wird verwendet, um eine Darstellung der numerischen Werte entlang der vertikalen Achse zu bestimmen. Diese Option kann nützlich sein, wenn Sie mit großen Zahlen arbeiten und möchten, dass die Werte auf der Achse kompakter und lesbarer angezeigt werden (z. B. können Sie 50.000 als 50 darstellen, indem Sie die Anzeigeeinheiten für Tausende verwenden). Wählen Sie die gewünschten Einheiten aus der Dropdown-Liste aus: Hunderte, Tausende, 10.000, 100.000, in Millionen, 10.000.000, 100.000.000, Milliarden, Billionen, oder wählen Sie die Option Keine, um zu den Standardeinheiten zurückzukehren.
                                              • +
                                              • Werte in umgekehrter Reihenfolge - wird verwendet, um Werte in entgegengesetzter Richtung anzuzeigen. Wenn das Kontrollkästchen deaktiviert ist, befindet sich der niedrigste Wert unten und der höchste Wert oben auf der Achse. Wenn das Kontrollkästchen aktiviert ist, werden die Werte von oben nach unten sortiert.
                                            • -
                                            • Im Abschnitt Skalierung können Sie die Darstellung von Teilstrichen auf der vertikalen Achse anpassen. Die größeren Teilstriche bilden die Hauptintervalle der Skalenteilung und dienen der Darstellung von nummerischen Werten. Kleine Teilstriche bilden Hilfsintervalle und haben keine Beschriftungen. Skalenstriche legen auch fest, an welcher Stelle Gitterlinien angezeigt werden können, sofern die entsprechende Option in der Registerkarte Layout aktiviert ist. In der Menüliste für Hauptintervalle/Hilfsintervalle stehen folgende Optionen für die Positionierung zur Verfügung:
                                                -
                                              • Keine - es werden keine Skalenstriche angezeigt.
                                              • -
                                              • Beidseitig - auf beiden Seiten der Achse werden Skalenstriche angezeigt.
                                              • -
                                              • Innen - die Skalenstriche werden auf der Innenseite der Achse angezeigt.
                                              • -
                                              • Außen - die Skalenstriche werden auf der Außenseite der Achse angezeigt.
                                              • +
                                              • Im Abschnitt Häkchenoptionen können Sie das Erscheinungsbild von Häkchen auf der vertikalen Skala anpassen. Hauptmarkierungen sind die größeren Teilungen, bei denen Beschriftungen numerische Werte anzeigen können. Kleinere Häkchen sind die Skalenunterteilungen, die zwischen den großen Häkchen platziert werden und keine Beschriftungen haben. Häkchen definieren auch, wo Gitterlinien angezeigt werden können, wenn die entsprechende Option auf der Registerkarte Layout festgelegt ist. Die Dropdown-Listen Major / Minor Type enthalten die folgenden Platzierungsoptionen:
                                                  +
                                                • Keine, um keine Haupt- / Nebenmarkierungen anzuzeigen,
                                                • +
                                                • Kreuzen Sie, um auf beiden Seiten der Achse Haupt- / Nebenmarkierungen anzuzeigen.
                                                • +
                                                • In, um Haupt- / Nebenmarkierungen innerhalb der Achse anzuzeigen,
                                                • +
                                                • Out, um Haupt- / Nebenmarkierungen außerhalb der Achse anzuzeigen.
                                              • -
                                              • Im Abschnitt Beschriftungsoptionen können Sie die Darstellung von Hauptintervallen, die Werte anzeigen, anpassen. Um die Anzeigeposition in Bezug auf die vertikale Achse festzulegen, wählen Sie die gewünschte Option aus der Menüliste aus:
                                                  -
                                                • Keine - es werden keine Skalenbeschriftungen angezeigt.
                                                • -
                                                • Tief - die Skalenbeschriftung wird links vom Diagrammbereich angezeigt.
                                                • -
                                                • Hoch - die Skalenbeschriftung wird rechts vom Diagrammbereich angezeigt.
                                                • -
                                                • Neben der Achse - die Skalenbeschriftung wird neben der Achse angezeigt.
                                                • +
                                                • Im Abschnitt Beschriftungsoptionen können Sie das Erscheinungsbild der wichtigsten Häkchenbeschriftungen anpassen, auf denen Werte angezeigt werden. Um eine Beschriftungsposition in Bezug auf die vertikale Achse festzulegen, wählen Sie die erforderliche Option aus der Dropdown-Liste aus:
                                                    +
                                                  • Keine, um keine Häkchenbeschriftungen anzuzeigen,
                                                  • +
                                                  • Niedrig, um Markierungsbeschriftungen links vom Plotbereich anzuzeigen.
                                                  • +
                                                  • Hoch, um Markierungsbeschriftungen rechts vom Plotbereich anzuzeigen.
                                                  • +
                                                  • Neben der Achse, um Markierungsbezeichnungen neben der Achse anzuzeigen.

                                                Diagramme - Erweiterte Einstellungen

                                                -

                                                Auf der Registerkarte Horizontale Achse können Sie die Parameter der horizontalen Achse ändern, die auch als Werteachse oder X-Achse bezeichnet wird und die Textbeschriftungen anzeigt. Beachten Sie, dass bei Balkendiagrammen die horizontale Achse die Rubrikenachse ist an der die nummerischen Werte anzeigt werden, daher entsprechen in diesem Fall die Optionen in der Registerkarte Horizontale Achse den im nächsten Abschnitt beschriebenen Optionen. Für Punktdiagramme (XY) sind beide Achsen Wertachsen.

                                                +

                                                Auf der Registerkarte Horizontale Achse können Sie die Parameter der horizontalen Achse ändern, die auch als Kategorieachse oder x-Achse bezeichnet wird und Textbeschriftungen anzeigt. Beachten Sie, dass die horizontale Achse die Werteachse ist, auf der numerische Werte für die Balkendiagramme angezeigt werden. In diesem Fall entsprechen die Optionen auf der Registerkarte Horizontale Achse in diesem Fall den im vorherigen Abschnitt beschriebenen. Für die XY-Diagramme (Streudiagramme) sind beide Achsen Wertachsen.

                                                  -
                                                • Im Abschnitt Achsenoptionen können die folgenden Parameter festgelegt werden:
                                                    -
                                                  • Schnittstelle - bestimmt den Punkt auf der horizontalen Achse, an dem die vertikale Achse die horizontale Achse kreuzt. Standardmäßig ist die Option Automatisch ausgewählt. In diesem Fall wird der Wert für die Schnittstelle automatisch abhängig vom ausgewählten Datenbereich berechnet. Alternativ können Sie die Option Wert aus der Menüliste auswählen und einen anderen Wert in das dafür vorgesehene Feld eingeben oder Sie legen den Achsenschnittpunkt am Mindest-/Höchstwert (der Wert, welcher der ersten und letzten Kategorie entspricht) auf der horizontalen Achse fest.
                                                  • -
                                                  • Achsenposition - legt fest, wo die Achsenbeschriftungen positioniert werden sollen: An den Skalenstrichen oder Zwischen den Skalenstrichen.
                                                  • -
                                                  • Werte in umgekehrter Reihenfolge - die Kategorien werden in umgekehrter Reihenfolge angezeigt. Wenn das Kästchen deaktiviert ist, werden die Kategorien von links nach rechts angezeigt. Wenn das Kontrollkästchen aktiviert ist, werden die Kategorien von rechts nach links angezeigt.
                                                  • +
                                                  • Im Abschnitt Achsenoptionen können die folgenden Parameter einstellen:
                                                      +
                                                    • Achsenkreuze - wird verwendet, um einen Punkt auf der horizontalen Achse anzugeben, an dem die vertikale Achse ihn kreuzen soll. Die Option Auto ist standardmäßig ausgewählt. In diesem Fall wird der Achsenschnittpunktwert abhängig vom ausgewählten Datenbereich automatisch berechnet. Sie können die Option Wert aus der Dropdown-Liste auswählen und im Eingabefeld rechts einen anderen Wert angeben oder den Achsenschnittpunkt auf den minimalen / maximalen Wert (der der ersten und letzten Kategorie entspricht) in der Horizontalen setzen Achse.
                                                    • +
                                                    • Achsenposition - wird verwendet, um anzugeben, wo die Achsentextbeschriftungen platziert werden sollen: Auf Häkchen oder Zwischen Häkchen.
                                                    • +
                                                    • Werte in umgekehrter Reihenfolge - wird verwendet, um Kategorien in entgegengesetzter Richtung anzuzeigen. Wenn das Kontrollkästchen deaktiviert ist, werden Kategorien von links nach rechts angezeigt. Wenn das Kontrollkästchen aktiviert ist, werden die Kategorien von rechts nach links sortiert.
                                                  • -
                                                  • Im Abschnitt Skalierung können Sie die Darstellung von Teilstrichen auf der horizontalen Skala anpassen. Die größeren Teilstriche bilden die Hauptintervalle der Skalenteilung und dienen der Darstellung von Kategorien. Kleine Teilstriche werden zwischen den Hauptintervallen eingefügt und bilden Hilfsintervalle ohne Beschriftungen. Skalenstriche legen auch fest, an welcher Stelle Gitterlinien angezeigt werden können, sofern die entsprechende Option in der Registerkarte Layout aktiviert ist. Sie können die folgenden Parameter für die Skalenstriche anpassen:
                                                      -
                                                    • Hauptintervalle/Hilfsintervalle - legt fest wo die Teilstriche positioniert werden sollen, dazu stehen Ihnen folgende Optionen zur Verfügung: Keine - es werden keine Skalenstriche angezeigt, Beidseitig - auf beiden Seiten der Achse werden Skalenstriche angezeigt, Innen - die Skalenstriche werden auf der Innenseite der Achse angezeigt, Außen - die Skalenstriche werden auf der Außenseite der Achse angezeigt.
                                                    • -
                                                    • Intervalle zwischen Teilstrichen - legt fest, wie viele Kategorien zwischen zwei benachbarten Teilstrichen angezeigt werden sollen.
                                                    • +
                                                    • Im Abschnitt Häkchenoptionen können Sie die Anzeige anpassen Anzahl der Häkchen auf der horizontalen Skala. Wichtige Häkchen sind die größeren Bereiche, in denen Beschriftungen Kategoriewerte anzeigen können. Kleinere Häkchen sind die kleineren Unterteilungen, die zwischen den großen Häkchen stehen und keine Beschriftungen haben. Häkchen definieren auch, wo Gitterlinien angezeigt werden können, wenn die entsprechende Option auf der Registerkarte Layout festgelegt ist. Sie können die folgenden Häkchenparameter anpassen:
                                                        +
                                                      • Haupt- / Neben-Typ - wird verwendet, um die folgenden Platzierungsoptionen anzugeben: Keine, um Haupt- / Neben-Häkchen nicht anzuzeigen, Kreuz, um Haupt- / Neben-Häkchen auf beiden Seiten der Achse anzuzeigen, In, um Haupt- / Neben-Häkchen innerhalb der Achse anzuzeigen , Out, um Haupt- / Nebenmarkierungen außerhalb der Achse anzuzeigen.
                                                      • +
                                                      • Intervall zwischen Markierungen - Hiermit wird festgelegt, wie viele Kategorien zwischen zwei benachbarten Häkchen angezeigt werden sollen.
                                                    • -
                                                    • Im Abschnitt Beschriftungsoptionen können Sie die Darstellung von Beschriftungen für Kategorien anpassen.
                                                        -
                                                      • Beschriftungsposition - legt fest, wo die Beschriftungen in Bezug auf die horizontale Achse positioniert werden sollen: Wählen Sie die gewünschte Position aus der Dropdown-Liste aus: Keine - es wird keine Achsenbeschriftung angezeigt, Tief - die Kategorien werden im unteren Diagrammbereich angezeigt, Hoch - die Kategorien werden im oberen Diagrammbereich angezeigt, Neben der Achse - die Kategorien werden neben der Achse angezeigt.
                                                      • -
                                                      • Abstand Achsenbeschriftung - legt fest, wie dicht die Achsenbeschriftung an der Achse positioniert wird. Sie können den gewünschten Wert im dafür vorgesehenen Eingabefeld festlegen. Je höher der eingegebene Wert, desto größer der Abstand zwischen der Achse und der Achsenbeschriftung.
                                                      • -
                                                      • Intervalle zwischen Achsenbeschriftungen - legt fest, wie viele Kategorien auf der Achse angezeigt werden sollen. Standardmäßig ist die Option Automatisch ausgewählt. In diesem Fall werden alle Kategorien auf der Achse angezeigt. Alternativ können Sie die Option Manuell aus der Menüliste auswählen und den gewünschten Wert in das dafür vorgesehene Feld eingeben. Geben Sie zum Beispiel die Zahl 2 an, dann wird jede zweite Kategorie auf der Achse angezeigt usw.
                                                      • +
                                                      • Im Abschnitt Beschriftungsoptionen können Sie das Erscheinungsbild von Beschriftungen anpassen, in denen Kategorien angezeigt werden.
                                                          +
                                                        • Beschriftungsposition - wird verwendet, um anzugeben, wo die Beschriftungen in Bezug auf die horizontale Achse platziert werden sollen. Wählen Sie die gewünschte Option aus der Dropdown-Liste aus: Keine, um keine Kategoriebeschriftungen anzuzeigen, Niedrig, um Kategoriebeschriftungen am unteren Rand des Plotbereichs anzuzeigen, Hoch, um Kategoriebeschriftungen am oberen Rand des Plotbereichs anzuzeigen, Neben der Achse, um die Kategorie anzuzeigen Beschriftungen neben der Achse.
                                                        • +
                                                        • Achsenbeschriftungsabstand - wird verwendet, um festzulegen, wie eng die Beschriftungen an der Achse platziert werden sollen. Den erforderlichen Wert können Sie im Eingabefeld angeben. Je mehr Wert Sie einstellen, desto größer ist der Abstand zwischen Achse und Beschriftung.
                                                        • +
                                                        • Intervall zwischen Beschriftungen - wird verwendet, um anzugeben, wie oft die Beschriftungen angezeigt werden sollen. Die Option Auto ist standardmäßig ausgewählt. In diesem Fall werden für jede Kategorie Beschriftungen angezeigt. Sie können die Option Manuell aus der Dropdown-Liste auswählen und den erforderlichen Wert im Eingabefeld rechts angeben. Geben Sie beispielsweise 2 ein, um Beschriftungen für jede andere Kategorie usw. anzuzeigen.

                                                      Diagramm - Erweiterte Einstellungen

                                                      -

                                                      Die Registerkarte Alternativtext ermöglicht die Eingabe eines Titels und einer Beschreibung, die Personen mit Sehbehinderungen oder kognitiven Beeinträchtigungen vorgelesen werden kann, damit sie besser verstehen können, welche Informationen in dem Diagramm enthalten sind.

                                                      +

                                                      Auf der Registerkarte Alternativer Text können Sie einen Titel und eine Beschreibung angeben, die Personen mit Seh- oder kognitiven Beeinträchtigungen vorgelesen werden, damit sie besser verstehen, welche Informationen in der Tabelle enthalten sind.


                        -

                        Diagramme verschieben und Diagrammgröße ändern

                        -

                        Diagramm verschiebenWenn Sie ein Diagramm hinzugefügt haben, können Sie Größe und Position beliebig ändern. Um die Diagrammgröße zu ändern, ziehen Sie mit der Maus an den kleinen Quadraten Quadrat die an den Ecken eingeblendet werden. Um das Originalseitenverhältnis des gewählten Diagramms bei der Größenänderung zu behalten, halten Sie die UMSCHALT-Taste gedrückt und ziehen Sie eines der Symbole an den Ecken.

                        -

                        Um die Diagrammposition zu ändern, nutzen Sie das Symbol Pfeil, das erscheint, wenn Sie mit Ihrem Mauszeiger über das Diagramm fahren. Ziehen Sie das Diagramm an die gewünschten Position, ohne die Maustaste loszulassen. Wenn Sie die Diagramm Bild verschieben, werden Hilfslinien angezeigt, damit Sie das Objekt präzise auf der Seite positionieren können (wenn Sie einen anderen Umbruchstil als mit Text in Zeile ausgewählt haben).

                        -
                        +

                        Verschieben und Ändern der Größe von Diagrammen

                        +

                        Diagramm verschiebenSobald das Diagramm hinzugefügt wurde, können Sie seine Größe und Position ändern. Um die Diagrammgröße zu ändern, ziehen Sie kleine Quadrate Quadrat an den Rändern. Halten Sie die Umschalttaste gedrückt und ziehen Sie eines der Eckensymbole, um die ursprünglichen Proportionen des ausgewählten Diagramms während der Größenänderung beizubehalten.

                        +

                        Verwenden Sie zum Ändern der Diagrammposition das Symbol Pfeil, das angezeigt wird, nachdem Sie den Mauszeiger über das Diagramm bewegt haben. Ziehen Sie das Diagramm an die gewünschte Position, ohne die Maustaste loszulassen. Wenn Sie das Diagramm verschieben, werden Hilfslinien angezeigt, mit denen Sie das Objekt präzise auf der Seite positionieren können (wenn ein anderer Umbruchstil als Inline ausgewählt ist).

                        +

                        Hinweis: Die Liste der Tastaturkürzel, die beim Arbeiten mit Objekten verwendet werden können, finden Sie hier

                        +

                        Diagrammelemente bearbeiten

                        -

                        Um den Diagrammtitel zu bearbeiten, wählen Sie den Standardtext mit der Maus aus und geben Sie stattdessen Ihren eigenen Text ein.

                        -

                        Um die Schriftformatierung innerhalb von Textelementen, wie beispielsweise Diagrammtitel, Achsentitel, Legendeneinträge, Datenbeschriftungen etc. zu ändern, wählen Sie das gewünschte Textelement durch Klicken mit der linken Maustaste aus. Wechseln Sie in die Registerkarte Start und nutzen Sie die in der Menüleiste angezeigten Symbole, um Schriftart, Schriftgröße und Schriftfarbe oder DekoStile zu bearbeiten.

                        -

                        Um ein Diagrammelement zu löschen, wählen Sie es mit der linken Maustaste aus und drücken Sie die Taste Entfernen auf Ihrer Tastatur.

                        -

                        Sie haben die Möglichkeit 3D-Diagramme mithilfe der Maus zu drehen. Klicken Sie mit der linken Maustaste in den Diagrammbereich und halten Sie die Maustaste gedrückt. Um die 3D-Diagrammausrichtung zu ändern, ziehen Sie den Mauszeiger in die gewünschte Richtung ohne die Maustaste loszulassen.

                        +

                        Um den Diagrammtitel zu bearbeiten, wählen Sie den Standardtext mit der Maus aus und geben Sie stattdessen Ihren eigenen ein.

                        +

                        Um die Schriftformatierung in Textelementen wie Diagrammtitel, Achsentiteln, Legendeneinträgen, Datenbeschriftungen usw. zu ändern, wählen Sie das gewünschte Textelement aus, indem Sie mit der linken Maustaste darauf klicken. Verwenden Sie dann die Symbole auf der Registerkarte Start der oberen Symbolleiste, um den Schrifttyp, die Größe, die Farbe oder den Dekorationsstil zu ändern.

                        +

                        Wenn das Diagramm ausgewählt ist, ist rechts auch das Symbol für die Formeinstellungen Formeinstellungen verfügbar, da eine Form als Hintergrund für das Diagramm verwendet wird. Sie können auf dieses Symbol klicken, um die Registerkarte Formeinstellungen in der rechten Seitenleiste zu öffnen und die Form Füll-, Strich- und Umhüllungsstil anzupassen. Beachten Sie, dass Sie den Formtyp nicht ändern können.

                        +

                        Über die Registerkarte Formeinstellungen im rechten Bereich können Sie nicht nur den Diagrammbereich selbst anpassen, sondern auch die Diagrammelemente wie Plotbereich, Datenreihen, Diagrammtitel, Legende usw. ändern und verschiedene Füllarten auf sie anwenden. Wählen Sie das Diagrammelement aus, indem Sie mit der linken Maustaste darauf klicken, und wählen Sie den bevorzugten Fülltyp aus: Volltonfarbe, Verlauf, Textur oder Bild, Muster. Geben Sie die Füllparameter an und legen Sie gegebenenfalls die Deckkraftstufe fest. Wenn Sie eine vertikale oder horizontale Achse oder Gitterlinien auswählen, sind die Stricheinstellungen nur auf der Registerkarte Formeinstellungen verfügbar: Farbe, Breite und Typ. Weitere Informationen zum Arbeiten mit Formfarben, Füllungen und Strichen finden Sie auf dieser Seite.

                        +

                        Hinweis: Die Option Schatten anzeigen ist auch auf der Registerkarte Formeinstellungen verfügbar, für Diagrammelemente jedoch deaktiviert.

                        +

                        Um ein Diagrammelement zu löschen, wählen Sie es mit der linken Maustaste aus und drücken Sie die Entf-Taste auf der Tastatur.

                        +

                        Sie können 3D-Diagramme auch mit der Maus drehen. Klicken Sie mit der linken Maustaste in den Plotbereich und halten Sie die Maustaste gedrückt. Ziehen Sie den Zeiger, ohne die Maustaste loszulassen, um die Ausrichtung des 3D-Diagramms zu ändern.

                        3D-Diagramm


                        -

                        Diagrammeinstellungen anpassen

                        +

                        Passen Sie die Diagrammeinstellungen an

                        Registerkarte Diagrammeinstellungen

                        -

                        Einige Diagrammeigenschaften können mithilfe der Registerkarte Diagrammeinstellungen in der rechten Seitenleiste geändert werden. Um das Menü zu aktivieren, klicken Sie auf das Diagramm und wählen Sie rechts das Symbol Diagrammeinstellungen Diagrammeinstellungen aus. Hier können die folgenden Eigenschaften geändert werden:

                        +

                        Einige Diagrammeigenschaften können über der Registerkarte Diagrammeinstellungen in der rechten Seitenleiste geändert werden. Um es zu aktivieren, klicken Sie auf das Diagramm und wählen Sie rechts das Symbol Diagrammeinstellungen Diagrammeinstellungen. Hier können die folgenden Eigenschaften ändern:

                          -
                        • Größe - zeigt die aktuelle Breite und Höhe des Diagramms an.
                        • -
                        • Textumbruch - der Stil für den Textumbruch wird aus den verfügbaren Vorlagen ausgewählt: Mit Text in Zeile, Quadrat, Eng, Transparent, Oben und unten, Vorne, Hinten (für weitere Information lesen Sie die folgende Beschreibung der erweiterten Einstellungen).
                        • -
                        • Diagrammtyp ändern - ändern Sie den ausgewählten Diagrammtyp bzw. -stil.

                          Um den gewünschten Diagrammstil auszuwählen, verwenden Sie im Abschnitt Diagrammtyp ändern die zweite Auswahlliste.

                          +
                        • Größe wird verwendet, um die aktuelle Diagrammbreite und -höhe anzuzeigen.
                        • +
                        • Umbruchstil wird verwendet, um einen Textumbruchstil auszuwählen - inline, quadratisch, eng, durch, oben und unten, vorne, hinten (weitere Informationen finden Sie in der Beschreibung der erweiterten Einstellungen unten).
                        • +
                        • Diagrammtyp ändern wird verwendet, um den ausgewählten Diagrammtyp und / oder -stil zu ändern.

                          +

                          Verwenden Sie zum Auswählen des erforderlichen Diagrammstils das zweite Dropdown-Menü im Abschnitt Diagrammtyp ändern.

                        • -
                        • Daten bearbeiten - das Fenster „Diagrammtools“ wird geöffnet.

                          Hinweis: Wenn Sie einen Doppelklick auf einem in Ihrem Dokument enthaltenen Diagramm ausführen, öffnet sich das Fenster „Diagrammtools“.

                          +
                        • Daten bearbeiten wird verwendet, um das Fenster 'Diagrammeditor' zu öffnen.

                          Hinweis: Um das Fenster Diagrammeditor schnell zu öffnen, können Sie auch auf das Diagramm im Dokument doppelklicken.

                        -

                        Einige dieser Optionen finden Sie auch im Rechtsklickmenü. Die Menüoptionen sind:

                        +

                        Einige dieser Optionen finden Sie auch im Kontextmenu. Die Menüoptionen sind:

                          -
                        • Ausschneiden, Kopieren, Einfügen - Standardoptionen zum Ausschneiden oder Kopieren ausgewählter Textpassagen/Objekte und zum Einfügen von zuvor ausgeschnittenen/kopierten Textstellen oder Objekten an der aktuellen Cursorposition.
                        • -
                        • Anordnen - um das ausgewählte Diagramm in den Vordergrund bzw. Hintergrund oder eine Ebene nach vorne bzw. hinten zu verschieben sowie Formen zu gruppieren und die Gruppierung aufzuheben (um diese wie ein einzelnes Objekt behandeln zu können). Weitere Informationen zum Anordnen von Objekten finden Sie auf dieser Seite.
                        • -
                        • Ausrichten wird verwendet, um das Diagramm linksbündig, zentriert, rechtsbündig, oben, mittig oder unten auszurichten. Weitere Informationen zum Ausrichten von Objekten finden Sie auf dieser Seite.
                        • -
                        • Textumbruch - der Stil für den Textumbruch wird aus den verfügbaren Vorlagen ausgewählt: Mit Text in Zeile, Quadrat, Eng, Transparent, Oben und unten, Vorne, Hinten. Die Option Umbruchsgrenze bearbeiten ist für Diagramme nicht verfügbar.
                        • -
                        • Daten bearbeiten - das Fenster „Diagrammtools“ wird geöffnet.
                        • -
                        • Erweiterte Diagrammeinstellungen - das Fenster „Diagramme - Erweiterte Einstellungen“ wird geöffnet.
                        • +
                        • Ausschneiden, Kopieren, Einfügen - Standardoptionen mit denen ein ausgewählter Text / ein ausgewähltes Objekt ausgeschnitten oder kopiert und eine zuvor ausgeschnittene / kopierte Textpassage oder ein Objekt an die aktuelle Zeigerposition eingefügt wird.
                        • +
                        • Anordnen wird verwendet, um das ausgewählte Diagramm in den Vordergrund zu bringen, in den Hintergrund zu senden, vorwärts oder rückwärts zu bewegen sowie Diagramme zu gruppieren oder die Gruppierung aufzuheben, um Operationen mit mehreren von ihnen gleichzeitig auszuführen. Weitere Informationen zum Anordnen von Objekten finden Sie auf dieser Seite.
                        • +
                        • Ausrichten wird verwendet, um das Diagramm links, in der Mitte, rechts, oben, in der Mitte und unten auszurichten. Weitere Informationen zum Ausrichten von Objekten finden Sie auf dieser Seite.
                        • +
                        • Der Umbruchstil wird verwendet, um einen Textumbruchstil aus den verfügbaren auszuwählen - Inline, Quadrat, Eng, Durch, Oben und Unten, vorne, hinten. Die Option Wrap-Grenze bearbeiten ist für Diagramme nicht verfügbar.
                        • +
                        • Daten bearbeiten wird verwendet, um das Fenster,Diagrammeditor zu öffnen.
                        • +
                        • Mit den Erweiterten Karteneinstellungen wird das Fenster „Diagramme - Erweiterte Einstellungen“ geöffnet.
                        -

                        Wenn das Diagramm ausgewählt ist, ist rechts auch das Symbol Formeinstellungen Formeinstellungen verfügbar, da eine Form als Hintergrund für das Diagramm verwendet wird. Klicken Sie auf dieses Symbol, um die Registerkarte Formeinstellungen in der rechten Seitenleisten zu öffnen und passen sie Form Füllung, Linienstärke und Umbruchart. Beachten Sie, dass Sie den Formtyp nicht ändern können.


                        -

                        Um die erweiterten Diagrammeinstellungen zu ändern, klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste auf das Diagramm und wählen Sie die Option Diagramm - Erweiterte Einstellungen im Rechtsklickmenü aus oder klicken Sie in der rechten Seitenleiste einfach auf den Link Erweiterte Einstellungen anzeigen. Das Fenster mit den Tabelleneigenschaften wird geöffnet:

                        +

                        Um die erweiterten Diagrammeinstellungen zu ändern, klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste auf das gewünschte Diagramm und wählen Sie im Kontextmenü die Option Erweiterte Einstellungen des Diagramms aus, oder klicken Sie einfach auf den Link Erweiterte Einstellungen anzeigen in der rechten Seitenleiste. Das Fenster mit den Diagrammeigenschaften wird geöffnet:

                        Diagramme - Erweiterte Einstellungen: Größe

                        Die Registerkarte Größe enthält die folgenden Parameter:

                          -
                        • Breite und Höhe - nutzen Sie diese Optionen, um die Breite und/oder Höhe des Diagramms zu ändern. Wenn Sie die Funktion Seitenverhältnis sperren Seitenverhältnis sperren aktivieren (in diesem Fall sieht das Symbol so aus Symbol Seitenverhältnis sperren aktiviert), werden Breite und Höhe gleichmäßig geändert und das ursprüngliche Seitenverhältnis des Diagramms wird beibehalten.
                        • +
                        • Breite und Höhe - Verwenden Sie diese Optionen, um die Diagrammbreite und / oder -höhe zu ändern. Wenn Sie auf die Schaltfläche Konstante Proportionen Seitenverhältnis sperren klicken (in diesem Fall sieht es so aus Symbol Seitenverhältnis sperren aktiviert), werden Breite und Höhe zusammen geändert, wobei das ursprüngliche Diagrammseitenverhältnis beibehalten wird.

                        Diagramme - Erweiterte Einstellungen: Textumbruch

                        Die Registerkarte Textumbruch enthält die folgenden Parameter:

                          -
                        • Textumbruch - legen Sie fest, wie das Diagramm im Verhältnis zum Text positioniert wird: entweder als Teil des Textes (wenn Sie die Option „Mit Text verschieben“ auswählen) oder an allen Seiten von Text umgeben (wenn Sie einen anderen Stil auswählen).
                            -
                          • Textumbruch - Mit Text verschieben Mit Text verschieben - das Diagramm wird Teil des Textes (wie ein Zeichen) und wenn der Text verschoben wird, wird auch das Diagramm verschoben. In diesem Fall sind die Positionsoptionen nicht verfügbar.

                            -

                            Ist eine der folgenden Umbrucharten ausgewählt, kann das Diagramm unabhängig vom Text verschoben und präzise auf der Seite positioniert werden:

                            +
                          • Umbruchstil - Verwenden Sie diese Option, um die Position des Diagramms relativ zum Text zu ändern: Es ist entweder Teil des Textes (falls Sie den Inline-Stil auswählen) oder wird von allen Seiten umgangen (wenn Sie einen auswählen) die anderen Stile).
                              +
                            • Textumbruch - Mit Text verschieben Inline - Das Diagramm wird wie ein Zeichen als Teil des Textes betrachtet. Wenn sich der Text bewegt, bewegt sich auch das Diagramm. In diesem Fall sind die Positionierungsoptionen nicht zugänglich.

                              +

                              Wenn einer der folgenden Stile ausgewählt ist, kann das Diagramm unabhängig vom Text verschoben und genau auf der Seite positioniert werden:

                            • -
                            • Textumbruch - Quadrat Quadrat - der Text bricht um den rechteckigen Kasten herum, der das Diagramm begrenzt.

                            • -
                            • Textumbruch - Eng Eng - der Text bricht um die Bildkanten herum.

                            • -
                            • Textumbruch - Transparent Transparent - der Text bricht um die Diagrammkanten herum und füllt den offenen weißen Leerraum innerhalb des Diagramms.

                            • -
                            • Textumbruch - Oben und unten Oben und unten - der Text ist nur oberhalb und unterhalb des Diagramms.

                            • -
                            • Textumbruch - Vorne Vorne - das Diagramm überlappt mit dem Text.

                            • -
                            • Textumbruch - Hinten Hinten - der Text überlappt sich mit dem Diagramm.

                            • +
                            • Textumbruch - Quadrat Quadratisch - Der Text umschließt das rechteckige Feld, das das Diagramm begrenzt.

                            • +
                            • Textumbruch - Eng Eng - Der Text umschließt die tatsächlichen Diagrammkanten.

                            • +
                            • Textumbruch - Transparent Durch - Der Text wird um die Diagrammkanten gewickelt und füllt den offenen weißen Bereich innerhalb des Diagramms aus.

                            • +
                            • Textumbruch - Oben und unten Oben und unten - Der Text befindet sich nur über und unter dem Diagramm.

                            • +
                            • Textumbruch - Vorne Vorne - das Diagramm überlappt dem Text.

                            • +
                            • Textumbruch - Hinten Dahinter - der Text überlappt das Diagramm.

                          -

                          Wenn Sie die Stile Quadrat, Eng, Transparent oder Oben und unten auswählen, haben Sie die Möglichkeit zusätzliche Parameter einzugeben - Abstand vom Text auf allen Seiten (oben, unten, links, rechts).

                          +

                          Wenn Sie den quadratischen, engen, durchgehenden oder oberen und unteren Stil auswählen, können Sie einige zusätzliche Parameter festlegen - Abstand zum Text an allen Seiten (oben, unten, links, rechts).

                          Diagramme - Erweiterte Einstellungen: Position

                          -

                          Die Registerkarte Position ist nur verfügbar, wenn Sie einen anderen Umbruchstil als „Mit Text in Zeile“ auswählen. Hier können Sie abhängig vom gewählten Format des Textumbruchs die folgenden Parameter festlegen:

                          +

                          Die Registerkarte Position ist nur verfügbar, wenn Sie einen anderen Umbruchstil als Inline auswählen. Diese Registerkarte enthält die folgenden Parameter, die je nach ausgewähltem Verpackungsstil variieren:

                            -
                          • In der Gruppe Horizontal, können Sie eine der folgenden drei Bildpositionierungstypen auswählen:
                              -
                            • Ausrichtung (links, zentriert, rechts) gemessen an Zeichen, Spalte, linker Seitenrand, Seitenrand, Seite oder rechter Seitenrand.
                            • -
                            • Absolute Position, gemessen in absoluten Einheiten wie Zentimeter/Punkte/Zoll (abhängig von der Voreinstellung in Datei -> Erweiterte Einstellungen...), rechts von Zeichen, Spalte, linker Seitenrand, Seitenrand, Seite oder rechter Seitenrand.
                            • -
                            • Relative Position in Prozent, gemessen von linker Seitenrand, Seitenrand, Seite oder rechter Seitenrand.
                            • +
                            • Im horizontalen Bereich können Sie einen der folgenden drei Diagrammpositionierungstypen auswählen:
                                +
                              • Ausrichtung (links, Mitte, rechts) relativ zu Zeichen, Spalte, linkem Rand, Rand, Seite oder rechtem Rand.
                              • +
                              • Absolute Position, gemessen in absoluten Einheiten, d. H. Zentimeter/Punkte/Zoll (abhängig von der auf der Registerkarte Datei -> Erweiterte Einstellungen...angegebenen Option), rechts neben Zeichen, Spalte, linkem Rand, Rand, Seite oder rechtem Rand,
                              • +
                              • Relative Position gemessen in in Prozent relativ zum linken Rand, Rand, Seite oder rechten Rand
                            • -
                            • In der Gruppe Vertikal, können Sie eine der folgenden drei Bildpositionierungstypen auswählen:
                                -
                              • Ausrichtung (oben, zentriert, unten) gemessen von Zeile, Seitenrand, unterer Rand, Abschnitt, Seite oder oberer Rand.
                              • -
                              • Absolute Position, gemessen in absoluten Einheiten wie Zentimeter/Punkte/Zoll (abhängig von der Voreinstellung in Datei -> Erweiterte Einstellungen...), unterhalb Zeile, Seitenrand, unterer Seitenrand, Absatz, Seite oder oberer Seitenrand.
                              • -
                              • Relative Position in Prozent, gemessen von Seitenrand, unterer Seitenrand, Seite oder oberer Seitenrand.
                              • +
                              • Im vertikalen Bereich können Sie einen der folgenden drei Diagrammpositionierungstypen auswählen:
                                  +
                                • Ausrichtung (oben, Mitte, unten) relativ zu Linie, Rand, unterem Rand, Absatz, Seite oder oberem Rand,
                                • +
                                • Absolute Position, gemessen in absoluten Einheiten, d. H. Zentimeter/Punkte/Zoll (abhängig von der auf der Registerkarte Datei -> Erweiterte Einstellungen...angegebenen Option) unter Linie, Rand, unterem Rand, Absatz, Seite oder oberem Rand,
                                • +
                                • Relative Position gemessen in Prozent relativ zum Rand, unteren Rand, Seite oder oberen Rand.
                              • -
                              • Im Kontrollkästchen Objekt mit Text verschieben können Sie festlegen, ob sich das Diagramm zusammen mit dem Text bewegen lässt, mit dem es verankert wurde.
                              • -
                              • Überlappung zulassen legt fest, ob zwei Diagramme einander überlagern können oder nicht, wenn Sie diese auf einer Seite dicht aneinander bringen.
                              • +
                              • Objekt mit Text verschieben steuert, ob sich das Diagramm so bewegt, wie sich der Text bewegt, an dem es verankert ist.
                              • +
                              • Überlappungssteuerung zulassen steuert, ob sich zwei Diagramme überlappen oder nicht, wenn Sie sie auf der Seite nebeneinander ziehen.

                              Diagramm - Erweiterte Einstellungen

                              -

                              Die Registerkarte Alternativtext ermöglicht die Eingabe eines Titels und einer Beschreibung, die Personen mit Sehbehinderungen oder kognitiven Beeinträchtigungen vorgelesen werden kann, damit sie besser verstehen können, welche Informationen in dem Diagramm enthalten sind.

                              +

                              Auf der Registerkarte Alternativer Text können Sie einen Titel und eine Beschreibung angeben, die Personen mit Seh- oder kognitiven Beeinträchtigungen vorgelesen werden, damit sie besser verstehen, welche Informationen in der Tabelle enthalten sind.

                              \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/InsertContentControls.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/InsertContentControls.htm index da1829cec..a2b9e94de 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/InsertContentControls.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/InsertContentControls.htm @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@

                              Inhaltssteuerelemente hinzufügen

                              Neues Inhaltssteuerelement für einfachen Text erstellen:

                                -
                              1. Positionieren Sie den Einfügepunkt innerhalb einer Textzeile, in die das Steuerelement eingefügt werden soll
                                oder wählen Sie eine Textpassage aus, die Sie zum Steuerungsinhalt machen wollen.
                              2. +
                              3. Positionieren Sie den Einfügepunkt innerhalb einer Textzeile, in die das Steuerelement eingefügt werden soll
                                oder wählen Sie eine Textpassage aus, die Sie zum Steuerungsinhalt machen wollen.
                              4. Wechseln Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf die Registerkarte Einfügen.
                              5. Klicken Sie auf den Pfeil neben dem Symbol Inhaltssteuerelemente Inhaltssteuerelemente.
                              6. Wählen sie die Option Inhaltssteuerelement für einfachen Text einfügen aus dem Menü aus.
                              7. @@ -27,12 +27,12 @@

                                Neues Inhaltssteuerelement für einfachen Text

                                Neues Inhaltssteuerelement für Rich-Text erstellen:

                                  -
                                1. Positionieren Sie die Einfügemarke am Ende eines Absatzes, nach dem das Steuerelement hinzugefügt werden soll
                                  oder wählen Sie einen oder mehrere der vorhandenen Absätze aus die Sie zum Steuerungsinhalt machen wollen.
                                2. +
                                3. Positionieren Sie die Einfügemarke am Ende eines Absatzes, nach dem das Steuerelement hinzugefügt werden soll
                                  oder wählen Sie einen oder mehrere der vorhandenen Absätze aus, die Sie zum Steuerungsinhalt machen wollen.
                                4. Wechseln Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf die Registerkarte Einfügen.
                                5. Klicken Sie auf den Pfeil neben dem Symbol Inhaltssteuerelemente Inhaltssteuerelemente.
                                6. Wählen sie die Option Inhaltssteuerelement für Rich-Text einfügen aus dem Menü aus.
                                -

                                Das Steuerungselement wird in einem neuen Paragraphen eingefügt. Rich-Text-Inhaltssteuerelemente ermöglichen das Hinzufügen von Zeilenumbrüchen und Sie können multiple Absätze sowie auch Objekte enthalten, z. B. Bilder, Tabellen, andere Inhaltssteuerelemente usw.

                                +

                                Das Steuerungselement wird in einem neuen Paragraphen eingefügt. Rich-Text-Inhaltssteuerelemente ermöglichen das Hinzufügen von Zeilenumbrüchen und Sie können multiple Absätze sowie auch Objekte enthalten z. B. Bilder, Tabellen, andere Inhaltssteuerelemente usw.

                                Inhaltssteuerelement für Rich-Text:

                                Hinweis: Der Rahmen des Textfelds für das Inhaltssteuerelement ist nur sichtbar, wenn das Steuerelement ausgewählt ist. In der gedruckten Version sind die Ränder nicht zu sehen.

                                Inhaltssteuerelemente verschieben

                                @@ -45,14 +45,14 @@

                                Einstellungen für Inhaltssteuerelemente ändern

                                Die Einstellungen für Inhaltssteuerelemente öffnen Sie wie folgt:

                                  -
                                • Wählen Sie das gewünschte Inhaltssteuerelement aus und klicken Sie auf den Pfeil neben dem Symbol Inhaltssteuerelemente Inhaltssteuerelemente in der oberen Symbolleiste und wählen Sie dann die Option Einstellungen Steuerelemente aus dem Menü aus.
                                • +
                                • Wählen Sie das gewünschte Inhaltssteuerelement aus und klicken Sie auf den Pfeil neben dem Symbol Inhaltssteuerelemente Inhaltssteuerelemente in der oberen Symbolleiste und wählen Sie dann die Option Einstellungen Inhaltssteuerelemente aus dem Menü aus.
                                • Klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste auf eine beliebige Stelle im Inhaltssteuerelement und nutzen Sie die Option Einstellungen Steuerungselement im Kontextmenü.

                                Im sich nun öffnenden Fenstern können Sie die folgenden Parameter festlegen:

                                Fenster Einstellungen für Inhaltssteuerelemente

                                • Legen Sie in den entsprechenden Feldern Titel oder Tag des Steuerelements fest. Der Titel wird angezeigt, wenn das Steuerelement im Dokument ausgewählt wird. Tags werden verwendet, um Inhaltssteuerelemente zu identifizieren, damit Sie im Code darauf verweisen können.
                                • -
                                • Wählen Sie aus, ob Sie Steuerelemente mit einem Begrenzungsrahmen anzeigen möchten oder nicht. Wählen Sie die Option Keine, um das Steuerelement ohne Begrenzungsrahmen anzuzeigen. Wenn Sie die Option Begrenzungsrahmen auswählen, können Sie die Feldfarbe im untenstehenden Feld auswählen.
                                • +
                                • Wählen Sie aus, ob Sie Steuerelemente mit einem Begrenzungsrahmen anzeigen möchten oder nicht. Wählen Sie die Option Keine, um das Steuerelement ohne Begrenzungsrahmen anzuzeigen. Über die Option Begrenzungsrahmen können Sie die Feldfarbe im untenstehenden Feld auswählen. Klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche Auf alle anwenden, um die festgelegten Darstellungseinstellungen auf alle Inhaltssteuerelemente im Dokument anzuwenden.
                                • Im Abschnitt Sperren können Sie das Inhaltssteuerelement mit der entsprechenden Option vor ungewolltem Löschen oder Bearbeiten schützen:
                                  • Inhaltssteuerelement kann nicht gelöscht werden - Aktivieren Sie dieses Kontrollkästchen, um ein Löschen des Steuerelements zu verhindern.
                                  • Inhaltssteuerelement kann nicht bearbeitet werden - Aktivieren Sie dieses Kontrollkästchen, um ein Bearbeiten des Steuerelements zu verhindern.
                                  • @@ -60,16 +60,16 @@

                                  Klicken Sie im Fenster Einstellungen auf OK, um die Änderungen zu bestätigen.

                                  -

                                  Es ist auch möglich, Inhaltssteuerelemente mit einer bestimmten Farbe hervorzuheben. Inhaltssteuerelemente farblich hervorheben:

                                  +

                                  Es ist auch möglich Inhaltssteuerelemente mit einer bestimmten Farbe hervorzuheben. Inhaltssteuerelemente farblich hervorheben:

                                  1. Klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche links neben dem Rahmen des Steuerelements, um das Steuerelement auszuwählen.
                                  2. Klicken Sie auf der oberen Symbolleiste auf den Pfeil neben dem Symbol Inhaltssteuerelemente Inhaltssteuerelemente.
                                  3. Wählen Sie die Option Einstellungen hervorheben aus dem Menü aus.
                                  4. -
                                  5. Wählen Sie die gewünschte Farbe auf den verfügbaren Paletten aus: Themenfarben, Standardfarben oder neue benutzerdefinierte Farbe angeben. Um zuvor angewendete Farbmarkierungen zu entfernen, verwenden Sie die Option Keine Markierung.
                                  6. +
                                  7. Wählen Sie die gewünschte Farbe aus den verfügbaren Paletten aus: Themenfarben, Standardfarben oder neue benutzerdefinierte Farbe angeben. Um zuvor angewendete Farbmarkierungen zu entfernen, verwenden Sie die Option Keine Markierung.

                                  Die ausgewählten Hervorhebungsoptionen werden auf alle Inhaltssteuerelemente im Dokument angewendet.

                                  Inhaltssteuerelemente entfernen

                                  -

                                  Um ein Steuerelement zu entfernen ohne den Inhalt zu löschen, klicken Sie auf das entsprechende Ssteuerelement und gehen Sie vor wie folgt:

                                  +

                                  Um ein Steuerelement zu entfernen ohne den Inhalt zu löschen, klicken Sie auf das entsprechende Steuerelement und gehen Sie vor wie folgt:

                                  • Klicken Sie auf den Pfeil neben dem Symbol Inhaltssteuerelemente Inhaltssteuerelemente in der oberen Symbolleiste und wählen Sie dann die Option Steuerelement entfernen aus dem Menü aus.
                                  • Klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste auf das Steuerelement und wählen Sie die Option Steuerungselement entfernen im Kontextmenü aus.
                                  • diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm index 7780193b2..6d137f466 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ Bilder einfügen - + @@ -14,89 +14,122 @@

                                    Bilder einfügen

                                    -

                                    Im Dokumenteneditor können Sie Bilder in den gängigen Formaten in Ihr Dokument einfügen. Die folgenden Formate werden unterstützt: BMP, GIF, JPEG, JPG, PNG.

                                    -

                                    Ein Bild einfügen

                                    -

                                    Ein Bild in das aktuelle Dokument einfügen:

                                    +

                                    Im Dokumenteditor können Sie Bilder in den gängigsten Formaten in Ihr Dokument einfügen. Die folgenden Bildformate werden unterstützt: BMP, GIF, JPEG, JPG, PNG.

                                    +

                                    Fügen Sie ein Bild ein

                                    +

                                    Um ein Bild in den Dokumenttext einzufügen,

                                      -
                                    1. Positionieren Sie den Cursor an der Stelle, an der Sie das Bild einfügen möchten.
                                    2. -
                                    3. Wechseln Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf die Registerkarte Einfügen.
                                    4. -
                                    5. Klicken Sie auf das Symbol Bild Bild in der oberen Symbolleiste.
                                    6. -
                                    7. Wählen Sie eine der folgenden Optionen um das Bild hochzuladen:
                                        -
                                      • Mit der Option Bild aus Datei öffnen Sie das Standarddialogfenster zur Dateiauswahl. Durchsuchen Sie die Festplatte Ihres Computers nach der gewünschten Bilddatei und klicken Sie auf Öffnen.
                                      • -
                                      • Mit der Option Bild aus URL öffnen Sie das Fenster zum Eingeben der erforderlichen Webadresse, wenn Sie die Adresse eingegeben haben, klicken Sie auf OK.
                                      • +
                                      • Plazieren Sie den Zeiger an der Stelle, an der das Bild platziert werden soll.
                                      • +
                                      • Wechseln Sie zur Registerkarte Einfügen in der oberen Symbolleiste.
                                      • +
                                      • Klicken Sie auf das Bild Bildsymbol in der oberen Symbolleiste.
                                      • +
                                      • Wählen Sie eine der folgenden Optionen, um das Bild zu laden:
                                          +
                                        • Die Option Bild aus Datei öffnet das Standarddialogfenster für die Dateiauswahl. Durchsuchen Sie das Festplattenlaufwerk Ihres Computers nach der erforderlichen Date und klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche Öffnen.
                                        • +
                                        • Die Option Bild von URL öffnet das Fenster, in dem Sie die erforderliche Bild-Webadresse eingeben und auf die Schaltfläche OK klicken können.
                                        • +
                                        • Die Option Bild aus Speicher öffnet das Fenster Datenquelle auswählen. Wählen Sie ein in Ihrem Portal gespeichertes Bild aus und klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche OK.
                                      • -
                                      • Wenn Sie das Bild hinzugefügt haben, können Sie Größe, Eigenschaften und Position ändern.
                                      • +
                                      • Sobald das Bild hinzugefügt wurde, können Sie seine Größe, Eigenschaften und Position ändern.

                                        +

                                        Es ist auch möglich, dem Bild eine Beschriftung hinzuzufügen. Weitere Informationen zum Arbeiten mit Bildunterschriften finden Sie in diesem Artikel.

                                    -

                                    Bilder bewegen und die Größe ändern

                                    -

                                    Um die Bild verschiebenBildgröße zu ändern, ziehen Sie die kleine Quadrate Quadrat an den Rändern. Um das Originalseitenverhältnis des gewählten Bildes bei der Größenänderung beizubehalten, halten Sie die UMSCHALT-Taste gedrückt und ziehen Sie an einem der Ecksymbole.

                                    -

                                    Verwenden Sie zum Ändern der Bildposition das Symbol Pfeil, das angezeigt wird, wenn Sie den Mauszeiger über das Bild bewegen. Ziehen Sie das Bild an die gewünschte Position, ohne die Maustaste loszulassen.

                                    -

                                    Wenn Sie die das Bild verschieben, werden Hilfslinien angezeigt, damit Sie das Objekt präzise auf der Seite positionieren können (wenn Sie einen anderen Umbruchstil als mit Text in Zeile ausgewählt haben).

                                    -

                                    Um das Bild zu drehen, bewegen Sie den Mauszeiger über den Drehpunkt Drehpunkt und ziehen Sie das Bild im oder gegen den Uhrzeigersinn. Um ein Objekt in 15-Grad-Stufen zu drehen, halten Sie die UMSCHALT-Taste bei der Drehung gedrückt.

                                    -

                                    Hinweis: Hier finden Sie eine Übersicht über die gängigen Tastenkombinationen für die Arbeit mit Objekten.

                                    +

                                    Verschieben und ändern Sie die Größe von Bildern

                                    +

                                    Um die Bild verschiebenBildgröße zu ändern, ziehen Sie kleine Quadrate Quadrat an den Rändern. Halten Sie die Umschalttaste gedrückt und ziehen Sie eines der Eckensymbole, um die ursprünglichen Proportionen des ausgewählten Bilds während der Größenänderung beizubehalten.

                                    +

                                    Verwenden Sie zum Ändern der Bildposition das Symbol Pfeil, das angezeigt wird, nachdem Sie den Mauszeiger über das Bild bewegt haben. Ziehen Sie das Bild an die gewünschte Position, ohne die Maustaste loszulassen.

                                    +

                                    Wenn Sie das Bild verschieben, werden Hilfslinien angezeigt, mit denen Sie das Objekt präzise auf der Seite positionieren können (wenn ein anderer Umbruchstil als Inline ausgewählt ist).

                                    +

                                    Um das Bild zu drehen, bewegen Sie den Mauszeiger über den Drehgriff Drehpunkt und ziehen Sie ihn im oder gegen den Uhrzeigersinn. Halten Sie die Umschalttaste gedrückt, um den Drehwinkel auf Schritte von 15 Grad zu beschränken.

                                    +

                                    Hinweis: Die Liste der Tastaturkürzel, die beim Arbeiten mit Objekten verwendet werden können, finden Sie hier


                                    -

                                    Bildeinstellungen anpassen

                                    -

                                    Registerkarte BildeinstellungenEinige der Bildeinstellungen können mithilfe der Registerkarte Bildeinstellungen auf der rechten Seitenleiste geändert werden. Um diese zu aktivieren, klicken Sie auf das Bild und wählen Sie rechts das Symbol Bildeinstellungen Bildeinstellungen aus. Hier können die folgenden Eigenschaften geändert werden:

                                    +

                                    Passen Sie die Bildeinstellungen an

                                    +

                                    Registerkarte BildeinstellungenEinige der Bildeinstellungen können über die Registerkarte Bildeinstellungen in der rechten Seitenleiste geändert werden. Um es zu aktivieren, klicken Sie auf das Bild und wählen Sie rechts das Symbol Bildeinstellungen Bildeinstellungen. Hier können Sie folgende Eigenschaften ändern:

                                      -
                                    • Größe - wird genutzt, um Breite und Höhe des aktuellen Bildes einzusehen. Bei Bedarf können Sie die Standardbildgröße wiederherstellen, indem Sie auf die Schaltfläche Standardgröße klicken. An Seitenränder anpassen - ändern Sie die Bildgröße und passen Sie das Bild an den linken und rechten Seitenrand an.
                                    • -
                                    • Textumbruch - der Stil für den Textumbruch wird aus den verfügbaren Vorlagen ausgewählt: Mit Text in Zeile, Quadrat, Eng, Transparent, Oben und unten, Vorne, Hinten (für weitere Information lesen Sie die folgende Beschreibung der erweiterten Einstellungen).
                                    • -
                                    • Bild ersetzen - um das aktuelle Bild durch ein anderes Bild aus Datei oder Onlinebilder zu ersetzen.
                                    • +
                                    • Größe wird verwendet, um die aktuelle Bildbreite und -höhe anzuzeigen. Bei Bedarf können Sie die tatsächliche Bildgröße wiederherstellen, indem Sie auf die Schaltfläche Tatsächliche Größe klicken. Mit der Schaltfläche An Rand anpassen können Sie die Größe des Bilds so ändern, dass es den gesamten Abstand zwischen dem linken und rechten Seitenrand einnimmt.

                                      Mit der Schaltfläche Zuschneiden können Sie das Bild zuschneiden. Klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche Zuschneiden, um die Beschneidungsgriffe zu aktivieren, die an den Bildecken und in der Mitte jeder Seite angezeigt werden. Ziehen Sie die Ziehpunkte manuell, um den Zuschneidebereich festzulegen. Sie können den Mauszeiger über den Rand des Zuschneidebereichs bewegen, sodass er zum Pfeil Symbol wird, und den Bereich ziehen.

                                      +
                                        +
                                      • Um eine einzelne Seite zuzuschneiden, ziehen Sie den Griff in der Mitte dieser Seite.
                                      • +
                                      • Ziehen Sie einen der Eckgriffe, um zwei benachbarte Seiten gleichzeitig zuzuschneiden.
                                      • +
                                      • Um zwei gegenüberliegende Seiten des Bildes gleichermaßen zuzuschneiden, halten Sie die Strg-Taste gedrückt, wenn Sie den Griff in die Mitte einer dieser Seiten ziehen.
                                      • +
                                      • Um alle Seiten des Bildes gleichmäßig zuzuschneiden, halten Sie die Strg-Taste gedrückt, wenn Sie einen der Eckgriffe ziehen.
                                      • +
                                      +

                                      Wenn der Zuschneidebereich angegeben ist, klicken Sie erneut auf die Schaltfläche Zuschneiden oder drücken Sie die Esc-Taste oder klicken Sie auf eine beliebige Stelle außerhalb des Zuschneidebereichs, um die Änderungen zu übernehmen.

                                      +

                                      Nachdem der Zuschneidebereich ausgewählt wurde, können Sie auch die Optionen Ausfüllen und Anpassen verwenden, die im Dropdown-Menü Zuschneiden verfügbar sind. Klicken Sie erneut auf die Schaltfläche Zuschneiden und wählen Sie die gewünschte Option aus:

                                      +
                                        +
                                      • Wenn Sie die Option Füllen auswählen, bleibt der zentrale Teil des Originalbilds erhalten und wird zum Füllen des ausgewählten Zuschneidebereichs verwendet, während andere Teile des Bildes entfernt werden.
                                      • +
                                      • Wenn Sie die Option Anpassen auswählen, wird die Größe des Bilds so angepasst, dass es der Höhe oder Breite des Zuschneidebereichs entspricht. Es werden keine Teile des Originalbilds entfernt, es können jedoch leere Bereiche innerhalb des ausgewählten Zuschneidebereichs angezeigt werden.
                                      • +
                                      +
                                    • +
                                    • Durch Drehen wird das Bild um 90 Grad im oder gegen den Uhrzeigersinn gedreht sowie das Bild horizontal oder vertikal gespiegelt. Klicken Sie auf eine der Schaltflächen:
                                        +
                                      • Gegen den Uhrzeigersinn drehen um das Bild um 90 Grad gegen den Uhrzeigersinn zu drehen
                                      • +
                                      • Im Uhrzeigersinn drehen um das Bild um 90 Grad im Uhrzeigersinn zu drehen
                                      • +
                                      • Horizontal spiegeln um das Bild horizontal zu drehen (von links nach rechts)
                                      • +
                                      • Vertikal spiegeln um das Bild vertikal zu drehen (verkehrt herum)
                                      • +
                                      +
                                    • +
                                    • Der Umbruchstil wird verwendet, um einen Textumbruchstil aus den verfügbaren auszuwählen - Inline, Quadrat, Eng, Durch, Oben und Unten, vorne, hinten (weitere Informationen finden Sie in der Beschreibung der erweiterten Einstellungen unten).
                                    • +
                                    • Bild ersetzen wird verwendet, um das aktuelle Bild zu ersetzen, das ein anderes aus Datei oder Von URL lädt.
                                    -

                                    Einige dieser Optionen finden Sie auch im Rechtsklickmenü. Die Menüoptionen sind:

                                    +

                                    Einige dieser Optionen finden Sie auch im Kontextmenü. Die Menüoptionen sind:

                                      -
                                    • Ausschneiden, Kopieren, Einfügen - Standardoptionen zum Ausschneiden oder Kopieren ausgewählter Textpassagen/Objekte und zum Einfügen von zuvor ausgeschnittenen/kopierten Textstellen oder Objekten an der aktuellen Cursorposition.
                                    • -
                                    • Anordnen - um das ausgewählte Bild in den Vordergrund bzw. Hintergrund oder eine Ebene nach vorne bzw. hinten zu verschieben sowie Bilder zu gruppieren und die Gruppierung aufzuheben (um diese wie ein einzelnes Objekt behandeln zu können). Weitere Informationen zum Anordnen von Objekten finden Sie auf dieser Seite.
                                    • -
                                    • Ausrichten wird verwendet, um das Bild linksbündig, zentriert, rechtsbündig, oben, mittig oder unten auszurichten. Weitere Informationen zum Ausrichten von Objekten finden Sie auf dieser Seite.
                                    • -
                                    • Textumbruch - der Stil für den Textumbruch wird aus den verfügbaren Vorlagen ausgewählt: Mit Text in Zeile, Quadrat, Eng, Transparent, Oben und unten, Vorne, Hinten (für weitere Information lesen Sie die folgende Beschreibung der erweiterten Einstellungen). Die Option Umbruchgrenze bearbeiten ist nur verfügbar, wenn Sie einen anderen Umbruchstil als „Mit Text in Zeile“ auswählen. Ziehen Sie die Umbruchpunkte, um die Grenze benutzerdefiniert anzupassen. Um einen neuen Rahmenpunkt zu erstellen, klicken Sie auf eine beliebige Stelle auf der roten Linie und ziehen Sie diese an die gewünschte Position. Umbruchgrenze bearbeiten
                                    • -
                                    • Standardgröße - die aktuelle Bildgröße auf die Standardgröße ändern.
                                    • -
                                    • Bild ersetzen - um das aktuelle Bild durch ein anderes Bild aus Datei oder Onlinebilder zu ersetzen.
                                    • -
                                    • Erweiterte Einstellungen - das Fenster „Bild - Erweiterte Einstellungen“ öffnen.
                                    • +
                                    • Ausschneiden, Kopieren, Einfügen - Standardoptionen, mit denen ein ausgewählter Text / ein ausgewähltes Objekt ausgeschnitten oder kopiert und eine zuvor ausgeschnittene / kopierte Textpassage oder ein Objekt an die aktuelle Zeigerposition eingefügt wird.
                                    • +
                                    • Anordnen wird verwendet, um das ausgewählte Bild in den Vordergrund zu bringen, in den Hintergrund zu senden, vorwärts oder rückwärts zu bewegen sowie Bilder zu gruppieren oder die Gruppierung aufzuheben, um Operationen mit sieben auszuführen von ihnen sofort. Weitere Informationen zum Anordnen von Objekten finden Sie auf dieser Seite.
                                    • +
                                    • Ausrichten wird verwendet, um das Bild links, in der Mitte, rechts, oben, in der Mitte und unten auszurichten. Weitere Informationen zum Ausrichten von Objekten finden Sie auf dieser Seite.
                                    • +
                                    • Der Umbruchstil wird verwendet, um einen Textumbruchstil aus den verfügbaren auszuwählen - inline, quadratisch, eng, durch, oben und unten, vorne, hinten - oder um die Umbruchgrenze zu bearbeiten. Die Option Wrap-Grenze bearbeiten ist nur verfügbar, wenn Sie einen anderen Wrap-Stil als Inline auswählen. Ziehen Sie die Umbruchpunkte, um die Grenze anzupassen. Um einen neuen Umbruchpunkt zu erstellen, klicken Sie auf eine beliebige Stelle auf der roten Linie und ziehen Sie sie an die gewünschte Position. Umbruchgrenze bearbeiten
                                    • +
                                    • Drehen wird verwendet, um das Bild um 90 Grad im oder gegen den Uhrzeigersinn zu drehen sowie um das Bild horizontal oder vertikal zu spiegeln.
                                    • +
                                    • Zuschneiden wird verwendet, um eine der Zuschneideoptionen anzuwenden: Zuschneiden, Füllen oder Anpassen. Wählen Sie im Untermenü die Option Zuschneiden, ziehen Sie dann die Zuschneidegriffe, um den Zuschneidebereich festzulegen, und klicken Sie im Untermenü erneut auf eine dieser drei Optionen, um die Änderungen zu übernehmen.
                                    • +
                                    • Die Tatsächliche Größe wird verwendet, um die aktuelle Bildgröße in die tatsächliche zu ändern.
                                    • +
                                    • Bild ersetzen wird verwendet, um das aktuelle Bild zu ersetzen, das ein anderes aus Datei oder Von URL lädt.
                                    • +
                                    • Mit den Erweiterte Einstellungen des Bildes wird das Fenster "Bild - Erweiterte Einstellungen" geöffnet.
                                    -

                                    Registerkarte Formeinstellungen Ist das Bild ausgewählt, ist rechts auch das Symbol Formeinstellungen Formeinstellungen verfügbar. Klicken Sie auf dieses Symbol, um die Registerkarte Formeinstellungen in der rechten Seitenleiste zu öffnen und passen Sie Form, Linientyp, Größe und Farbe an oder ändern Sie die Form und wählen Sie im Menü AutoForm ändern eine neue Form aus. Die Form des Bildes ändert sich entsprechend Ihrer Auswahl.

                                    +

                                    Registerkarte Formeinstellungen Wenn das Bild ausgewählt ist, ist rechts auch das Symbol für die Formeinstellungen Formeinstellungen verfügbar. Sie können auf dieses Symbol klicken, um die Registerkarte Formeinstellungen in der rechten Seitenleiste zu öffnen und die Form anzupassen. Strichart, -größe und -farbe sowie den Formtyp ändern, indem Sie im Menü Autoshape ändern eine andere Form auswählen. Die Form des Bildes ändert sich entsprechend.

                                    +

                                    Auf der Registerkarte Formeinstellungen können Sie auch die Option Schatten anzeigen verwenden, um dem Bild einen Schatten hinzuzufügen. +


                                    -

                                    Um die erweiterte Einstellungen des Bildes zu ändern, klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste auf das Bild und wählen Sie die Option Bild - Erweiterte Einstellungen im Rechtsklickmenü oder klicken Sie einfach in der rechten Seitenleiste auf Erweiterte Einstellungen anzeigen. Das Fenster mit den Bildeigenschaften wird geöffnet:

                                    +

                                    Passen Sie die erweiterten Bildeinstellungen an

                                    +

                                    Um die erweiterte Einstellungen des Bildes zu ändern, klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste auf das Bild und wählen Sie im Kontextmenü die Option Bild - Erweiterte Einstellungen oder klicken Sie einfach auf den Link Erweiterte Einstellungen anzeigen in der rechten Seitenleiste. Das Fenster mit den Bildeigenschaften wird geöffnet:

                                    Bild - Erweiterte Einstellungen: Größe

                                    Die Registerkarte Größe enthält die folgenden Parameter:

                                      -
                                    • Breite und Höhe - mit diesen Optionen können Sie die Breite bzw. Höhe des Bildes ändern. Wenn Sie die Funktion Seitenverhältnis sperren Seitenverhältnis sperren aktivieren (in diesem Fall sieht das Symbol so aus Symbol Seitenverhältnis sperren aktiviert), werden Breite und Höhe gleichmäßig geändert und das ursprüngliche Bildseitenverhältnis wird beibehalten. Um die Standardgröße des hinzugefügten Bildes wiederherzustellen, klicken Sie auf Standardgröße.
                                    • +
                                    • Breite und Höhe - Verwenden Sie diese Optionen, um die Bildbreite und / oder -höhe zu ändern. Wenn Sie auf die Schaltfläche Konstante Proportionen Seitenverhältnis sperren klicken (in diesem Fall sieht es so aus Symbol Seitenverhältnis sperren aktiviert), werden Breite und Höhe zusammen geändert, wobei das ursprüngliche Bildseitenverhältnis beibehalten wird. Klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche Tatsächliche Größe, um die tatsächliche Größe des hinzugefügten Bilds wiederherzustellen.
                                    +

                                    Bild - Erweiterte Einstellungen: Drehen

                                    +

                                    Die Registerkarte Rotation enthält die folgenden Parameter:

                                    +
                                      +
                                    • Winkel - Verwenden Sie diese Option, um das Bild um einen genau festgelegten Winkel zu drehen. Geben Sie den erforderlichen Wert in Grad in das Feld ein oder passen Sie ihn mit den Pfeilen rechts an.
                                    • +
                                    • Spiegeln - Aktivieren Sie das Kontrollkästchen Horizontal, um das Bild horizontal zu spiegeln (von links nach rechts), oder aktivieren Sie das Kontrollkästchen Vertikal, um das Bild vertikal zu spiegeln (verkehrt herum).
                                    • +

                                    Bild - Erweiterte Einstellungen: Textumbruch

                                    Die Registerkarte Textumbruch enthält die folgenden Parameter:

                                      -
                                    • Textumbruch - legen Sie fest, wie das Bild im Verhältnis zum Text positioniert wird: entweder als Teil des Textes (wenn Sie die Option „Mit Text in Zeile“ auswählen) oder an allen Seiten von Text umgeben (wenn Sie einen anderen Stil auswählen).
                                        -
                                      • Textumbruch - Mit Text verschieben Mit Text verschieben - das Bild wird Teil des Textes (wie ein Zeichen) und wenn der Text verschoben wird, wird auch das Bild verschoben. In diesem Fall sind die Positionsoptionen nicht verfügbar.

                                        -

                                        Ist eine der folgenden Umbrucharten ausgewählt, kann das Bild unabhängig vom Text verschoben und auf der Seite positioniert werden:

                                        +
                                      • Umbruchstil - Verwenden Sie diese Option, um die Position des Bilds relativ zum Text zu ändern: Es ist entweder Teil des Textes (falls Sie den Inline-Stil auswählen) oder wird von allen Seiten umgangen (wenn Sie einen auswählen) die anderen Stile).
                                          +
                                        • Textumbruch - Mit Text verschieben Inline - Das Bild wird wie ein Zeichen als Teil des Textes betrachtet. Wenn sich der Text bewegt, bewegt sich auch das Bild. In diesem Fall sind die Positionierungsoptionen nicht zugänglich.

                                          +

                                          Wenn einer der folgenden Stile ausgewählt ist, kann das Bild unabhängig vom Text verschoben und genau auf der Seite positioniert werden:

                                        • -
                                        • Textumbruch - Quadrat Quadrat - der Text bricht um den rechteckigen Kasten herum, der das Bild begrenzt.

                                        • -
                                        • Textumbruch - Eng Eng - der Text bricht um die Bildkanten herum.

                                        • -
                                        • Textumbruch - Transparent Transparent - der Text bricht um die Bildkanten herum und füllt den offenen weißen Leerraum innerhalb des Bildes. Wählen Sie für diesen Effekt die Option Umbruchsgrenze bearbeiten aus dem Rechtsklickmenü aus.

                                        • -
                                        • Textumbruch - Oben und unten Oben und unten - der Text ist nur oberhalb und unterhalb des Bildes.

                                        • -
                                        • Textumbruch - Vorne Vorne - das Bild überlappt mit dem Text.

                                        • -
                                        • Textumbruch - Hinten Hinten - der Text überlappt sich mit dem Bild.

                                        • +
                                        • Textumbruch - Quadrat Quadratisch - Der Text umschließt das rechteckige Feld, das das Bild begrenzt.

                                        • +
                                        • Textumbruch - Eng Eng - Der Text umschließt die eigentlichen Bildkanten.

                                        • +
                                        • Textumbruch - Transparent Durch - Der Text wird um die Bildränder gewickelt und füllt den offenen weißen Bereich innerhalb des Bildes aus. Verwenden Sie die Option Umbruchgrenze bearbeiten im Kontextmenü, damit der Effekt angezeigt wird.

                                        • +
                                        • Textumbruch - Oben und unten Oben und unten - der Text befindet sich nur über und unter dem Bild.

                                        • +
                                        • Textumbruch - Vorne Vorne - das Bild überlappt den Text.

                                        • +
                                        • Textumbruch - Hinten Dahinter - der Text überlappt das Bild.

                                      -

                                      Wenn Sie die Formate Quadrat, Eng, Transparent oder Oben und unten auswählen, haben Sie die Möglichkeit zusätzliche Parameter festzulegen - Abstand vom Text auf allen Seiten (oben, unten, links, rechts).

                                      +

                                      Wenn Sie den quadratischen, engen, durchgehenden oder oberen und unteren Stil auswählen, können Sie einige zusätzliche Parameter festlegen - Abstand zum Text an allen Seiten (oben, unten, links, rechts).

                                      Bild - Erweiterte Einstellungen: Position

                                      -

                                      Die Registerkarte Position ist nur verfügbar, wenn Sie einen anderen Umbruchstil als „Mit Text in Zeile“ auswählen. Hier können Sie abhängig vom gewählten Format des Textumbruchs die folgenden Parameter festlegen:

                                      +

                                      Die Registerkarte Position ist nur verfügbar, wenn Sie einen anderen Umbruchstil als Inline auswählen. Diese Registerkarte enthält die folgenden Parameter, die je nach ausgewähltem Verpackungsstil variieren:

                                        -
                                      • In der Gruppe Horizontal, können Sie eine der folgenden drei Bildpositionierungstypen auswählen:
                                          -
                                        • Ausrichtung (links, zentriert, rechts) gemessen an Zeichen, Spalte, linker Seitenrand, Seitenrand, Seite oder rechter Seitenrand.
                                        • -
                                        • Absolute Position, gemessen in absoluten Einheiten wie Zentimeter/Punkte/Zoll (abhängig von der Voreinstellung in Datei -> Erweiterte Einstellungen...), rechts von Zeichen, Spalte, linker Seitenrand, Seitenrand, Seite oder rechter Seitenrand.
                                        • -
                                        • Relative Position in Prozent, gemessen von linker Seitenrand, Seitenrand, Seite oder rechter Seitenrand.
                                        • +
                                        • Im horizontalen Bereich können Sie einen der folgenden drei Bildpositionierungstypen auswählen:
                                            +
                                          • Ausrichtung (links, Mitte, rechts) relativ zu Zeichen, Spalte, linkem Rand, Rand, Seite oder rechtem Rand,
                                          • +
                                          • Absolute Position gemessen in absoluten Einheiten, d. H. Zentimeter / Punkte / Zoll (abhängig von der auf der Registerkarte Datei -> Erweiterte Einstellungen... angegebenen Option), rechts neben Zeichen, Spalte, linkem Rand, Rand, Seite oder rechtem Rand,
                                          • +
                                          • Relative Position gemessen in Prozent relativ zum linken Rand, Rand, Seite oder rechten Rand.
                                        • -
                                        • In der Gruppe Vertikal, können Sie eine der folgenden drei Bildpositionierungstypen auswählen:
                                            -
                                          • Ausrichtung (oben, zentriert, unten) gemessen von Zeile, Seitenrand, unterer Rand, Abschnitt, Seite oder oberer Rand.
                                          • -
                                          • Absolute Position, gemessen in absoluten Einheiten wie Zentimeter/Punkte/Zoll (abhängig von der Voreinstellung in Datei -> Erweiterte Einstellungen...), unterhalb Zeile, Seitenrand, unterer Seitenrand, Absatz, Seite oder oberer Seitenrand.
                                          • -
                                          • Relative Position in Prozent, gemessen von Seitenrand, unterer Seitenrand, Seite oder oberer Seitenrand.
                                          • +
                                          • Im vertikalen Bereich können Sie einen der folgenden drei Bildpositionierungstypen auswählen:
                                              +
                                            • Ausrichtung (oben, Mitte, unten) relativ zu Linie, Rand, unterem Rand, Absatz, Seite oder oberem Rand,
                                            • +
                                            • Absolute Position gemessen in absoluten Einheiten, d. H. Zentimeter / Punkte / Zoll (abhängig von der auf der Registerkarte Datei -> Erweiterte Einstellungen... angegebenen Option) unter Zeile, Rand, unterem Rand, Absatz, Seite oder oberem Rand,
                                            • +
                                            • Relative Position gemessen in Prozent relativ zum Rand, unteren Rand, Seite oder oberen Rand.
                                          • -
                                          • Im Kontrollkästchen Objekt mit Text verschieben können Sie festlegen, ob sich das Bild zusammen mit dem Text bewegen lässt, mit dem es verankert wurde.
                                          • -
                                          • Überlappen zulassen legt fest, ob zwei Bilder einander überlagern können oder nicht, wenn Sie diese auf einer Seite dicht aneinander bringen.
                                          • +
                                          • Objekt mit Text verschieben steuert, ob sich das Bild bewegt, während sich der Text, an dem es verankert ist, bewegt.
                                          • +
                                          • Überlappungssteuerung zulassen steuert, ob sich zwei Bilder überlappen oder nicht, wenn Sie sie auf der Seite nebeneinander ziehen.

                                          Bild - Erweiterte Einstellungen

                                          -

                                          Die Registerkarte Alternativtext ermöglicht die Eingabe eines Titels und einer Beschreibung, die Personen mit Sehbehinderungen oder kognitiven Beeinträchtigungen vorgelesen werden kann, damit sie besser verstehen können, welche Informationen im Bild enthalten sind.

                                          +

                                          Auf der Registerkarte Alternativer Text können Sie einen Titel und eine Beschreibung angeben, die Personen mit Seh- oder kognitiven Beeinträchtigungen vorgelesen werden, damit sie besser verstehen, welche Informationen im Bild enthalten sind.

                                          \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/InsertPageNumbers.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/InsertPageNumbers.htm index fe7f941b1..f0102f401 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/InsertPageNumbers.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/InsertPageNumbers.htm @@ -3,49 +3,56 @@ Seitenzahlen einfügen - + -
                                          -
                                          - -
                                          -

                                          Seitenzahlen einfügen

                                          -

                                          Seitenzahlen in ein Dokument einfügen:

                                          -
                                            -
                                          1. Wechseln Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf die Registerkarte Einfügen.
                                          2. -
                                          3. Klicken Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf das Symbol Kopf- und Fußzeile bearbeiten Kopf-/Fußzeile bearbeiten.
                                          4. -
                                          5. Klicken Sie auf Seitenzahl einfügen.
                                          6. -
                                          7. Wählen Sie eine der folgenden Optionen:
                                              -
                                            • Wählen Sie die Position der Seitenzahl aus, um zu jeder Dokumentseite eine Seitenzahl hinzuzufügen.
                                            • -
                                            • Um an der aktuellen Cursorposition eine Seitenzahl einzufügen, wählen Sie die Option An aktueller Position.
                                            • -
                                            -
                                          8. -
                                          -

                                          Anzahl der Seiten einfügen (z.B. wenn Sie den Eintrag Seite X von Y erstellen möchten):

                                          +
                                          +
                                          + +
                                          +

                                          Seitenzahlen einfügen

                                          +

                                          Um Seitenzahlen in ein Dokument einfügen:

                                            -
                                          1. Platzieren Sie den Cursor an die Position an der Sie die Anzahl der Seiten einfügen wollen.
                                          2. +
                                          3. Wechseln Sie zu der oberen Symbolleiste auf die Registerkarte Einfügen.
                                          4. +
                                          5. Klicken Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf das Symbol Kopf- und Fußzeile bearbeiten Kopf-/Fußzeile bearbeiten.
                                          6. +
                                          7. Klicken Sie auf Seitenzahl einfügen.
                                          8. +
                                          9. + Wählen Sie eine der folgenden Optionen: +
                                              +
                                            • Wählen Sie die Position der Seitenzahl aus, um zu jeder Dokumentseite eine Seitenzahl hinzuzufügen.
                                            • +
                                            • Um an der aktuellen Zeigerposition eine Seitenzahl einzufügen, wählen Sie die Option An aktueller Position. +

                                              + Hinweis: Um in der aktuellen Seite an der derzeitigen Position eine Seitennummer einzufügen, kann die Tastenkombination STRG+UMSCHALT+P benutzt werden. +

                                              +
                                            • +
                                            +
                                          10. +
                                          +

                                          Um die Anzahl der Seiten einfügen (z.B. wenn Sie den Eintrag Seite X von Y erstellen möchten):

                                          +
                                            +
                                          1. Platzieren Sie den Zeiger an die Position an der Sie die Anzahl der Seiten einfügen wollen.
                                          2. Klicken Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf das Symbol Kopf- und Fußzeile bearbeiten Kopf-/Fußzeile bearbeiten.
                                          3. Wählen Sie die Option Anzahl der Seiten einfügen.
                                          -
                                          -

                                          Einstellungen der Seitenzahlen ändern:

                                          -
                                            -
                                          1. Klicken Sie zweimal auf die hinzugefügte Seitenzahl.
                                          2. -
                                          3. Ändern Sie die aktuellen Parameter in der rechten Seitenleiste:

                                            Rechte Seitenleiste - Kopf- und Fußzeileneinstellungen

                                            -
                                              -
                                            • Legen Sie die aktuelle Position der Seitenzahlen auf der Seite sowie im Verhältnis zum oberen und unteren Teil der Seite fest.
                                            • -
                                            • Wenn Sie der ersten Seite eine andere Zahl zuweisen wollen oder als dem restlichen Dokument oder keine Seitenzahl auf der ersten Seite einfügen wollen, aktivieren Sie die Option Erste Seite anders.
                                            • -
                                            • Wenn Sie geraden und ungeraden Seiten unterschiedliche Seitenzahlen hinzufügen wollen, aktivieren Sie die Option Gerade & ungerade Seiten unterschiedlich.
                                            • -
                                            • Die Option Mit vorheriger verknüpfen ist verfügbar, wenn Sie zuvor Abschnitte in Ihr Dokument eingefügt haben. Sind keine Abschnitte vorhanden, ist die Option ausgeblendet. Außerdem ist diese Option auch für den allerersten Abschnitt nicht verfügbar (oder wenn eine Kopf- oder Fußzeile ausgewählt ist, die zu dem ersten Abschnitt gehört). Standardmäßig ist dieses Kontrollkästchen aktiviert, sodass auf alle Abschnitte die vereinheitlichte Nummerierung angewendet wird. Wenn Sie einen Kopf- oder Fußzeilenbereich auswählen, sehen Sie, dass der Bereich mit der Verlinkung Wie vorherige markiert ist. Deaktivieren Sie das Kontrollkästchen Wie vorherige, um in jedem Abschnitt des Dokuments eine andere Seitennummerierung anzuwenden. Die Markierung Wie vorherige wird nicht mehr angezeigt.
                                            • -
                                            -

                                            Wie vorherige Markierung

                                            -
                                          4. -
                                          -

                                          Um zur Dokumentbearbeitung zurückzukehren, führen Sie einen Doppelklick im Arbeitsbereich aus.

                                          -
                                          +
                                          +

                                          Einstellungen der Seitenzahlen ändern:

                                          +
                                            +
                                          1. Klicken Sie zweimal auf die hinzugefügte Seitenzahl.
                                          2. +
                                          3. + Ändern Sie die aktuellen Parameter in der rechten Seitenleiste:

                                            Rechte Seitenleiste - Kopf- und Fußzeileneinstellungen

                                            +
                                              +
                                            • Legen Sie die aktuelle Position der Seitenzahlen auf der Seite sowie im Verhältnis zum oberen und unteren Teil der Seite fest.
                                            • +
                                            • Wenn Sie der ersten Seite eine andere Zahl zuweisen wollen oder als dem restlichen Dokument oder keine Seitenzahl auf der ersten Seite einfügen wollen, aktivieren Sie die Option Erste Seite anders.
                                            • +
                                            • Wenn Sie geraden und ungeraden Seiten unterschiedliche Seitenzahlen hinzufügen wollen, aktivieren Sie die Option Gerade & ungerade Seiten unterschiedlich.
                                            • +
                                            • Die Option Mit vorheriger verknüpfen ist verfügbar, wenn Sie zuvor Abschnitte in Ihr Dokument eingefügt haben. Sind keine Abschnitte vorhanden, ist die Option ausgeblendet. Außerdem ist diese Option auch für den allerersten Abschnitt nicht verfügbar (oder wenn eine Kopf- oder Fußzeile ausgewählt ist, die zu dem ersten Abschnitt gehört). Standardmäßig ist dieses Kontrollkästchen aktiviert, sodass auf alle Abschnitte die vereinheitlichte Nummerierung angewendet wird. Wenn Sie einen Kopf- oder Fußzeilenbereich auswählen, sehen Sie, dass der Bereich mit der Verlinkung Wie vorherige markiert ist. Deaktivieren Sie das Kontrollkästchen Wie vorherige, um in jedem Abschnitt des Dokuments eine andere Seitennummerierung anzuwenden. Die Markierung Wie vorherige wird nicht mehr angezeigt.
                                            • +
                                            +

                                            Wie vorherige Markierung

                                            +
                                          4. +
                                          +

                                          Um zur Dokumentbearbeitung zurückzukehren, führen Sie einen Doppelklick im Arbeitsbereich aus.

                                          +
                                          \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/InsertTables.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/InsertTables.htm index b55f99e4e..1fcb6b9e9 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/InsertTables.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/InsertTables.htm @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ Tabellen einfügen - + @@ -14,141 +14,158 @@

                                          Tabellen einfügen

                                          -

                                          Eine Tabelle einfügen

                                          -

                                          Einfügen einer Tabelle im aktuellen Dokument:

                                          +

                                          Fügen Sie eine Tabelle ein

                                          +

                                          So fügen Sie eine Tabelle in den Dokumenttext ein:

                                            -
                                          1. Positionieren Sie den Cursor an der Stelle, an der Sie eine Tabelle einfügen möchten.
                                          2. -
                                          3. Wechseln Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf die Registerkarte Einfügen.
                                          4. -
                                          5. Klicken Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf das Symbol Tabelle Tabelle.
                                          6. -
                                          7. Wählen Sie die gewünschte Option für die Erstellung einer Tabelle:
                                              -
                                            • Tabelle mit einer vordefinierten Zellenanzahl (maximal 10 x 8 Zellen)

                                              -

                                              Wenn Sie schnell eine Tabelle erstellen möchten, wählen Sie einfach die Anzahl der Zeilen (maximal 8) und Spalten (maximal 10) aus.

                                            • -
                                            • Benutzerdefinierte Tabelle

                                              -

                                              Wenn Sie eine Tabelle mit mehr als 10 x 8 Zellen benötigen, wählen Sie die Option Benutzerdefinierte Tabelle einfügen. Geben Sie nun im geöffneten Fenster die gewünschte Anzahl der Zeilen und Spalten an und klicken Sie anschließend auf OK.

                                              -

                                              Benutzerdefinierte Tabelle

                                              -
                                            • -
                                            -
                                          8. -
                                          9. Wenn Sie eine Tabelle eingefügt haben, können Sie Eigenschaften, Größe und Position verändern.
                                          10. +
                                          11. Plazieren Sie den Zeiger an der Stelle, an der die Tabelle plaziert werden soll.
                                          12. +
                                          13. Wechseln Sie zur Registerkarte Einfügen in der oberen Symbolleiste.
                                          14. +
                                          15. Klicken Sie auf das Tabellensymbol Tabelle in der oberen Symbolleiste.
                                          16. +
                                          17. Wählen Sie die Option zum Erstellen einer Tabelle aus:
                                              +
                                            • +

                                              entweder eine Tabelle mit einer vordefinierten Anzahl von Zellen (maximal 10 mal 8 Zellen)

                                              +

                                              Wenn Sie schnell eine Tabelle hinzufügen möchten, wählen Sie einfach die Anzahl der Zeilen (maximal 8) und Spalten (maximal 10).

                                              +
                                            • +
                                            • +

                                              oder eine benutzerdefinierte Tabelle

                                              +

                                              Wenn Sie mehr als 10 x 8 Zellen benötigen, wählen Sie die Option Benutzerdefinierte Tabelle einfügen, um das Fenster zu öffnen, in dem Sie die erforderliche Anzahl von Zeilen bzw. Spalten eingeben können, und klicken Sie dann auf die Schaltfläche OK.

                                              +

                                              Benutzerdefinierte Tabelle

                                              +
                                            • +
                                            • + Wenn Sie eine Tabelle mit der Maus zeichnen möchten, wählen Sie die Option Tabelle zeichnen. Dies kann nützlich sein, wenn Sie eine Tabelle mit Zeilen und Spalten unterschiedlicher Größe erstellen möchten. Der Mauszeiger verwandelt sich in einen Bleistift Mouse Cursor when drawing a table. Zeichnen Sie eine rechteckige Form, in der Sie eine Tabelle hinzufügen möchten, und fügen Sie dann Zeilen hinzu, indem Sie horizontale Linien und Spalten zeichnen, indem Sie vertikale Linien innerhalb der Tabellengrenze zeichnen. +
                                            • +
                                            +
                                          18. +
                                          19. Sobald die Tabelle hinzugefügt wurde, können Sie ihre Eigenschaften, Größe und Position ändern.
                                          -

                                          Um die Größe einer Tabelle zu ändern, bewegen Sie den Mauszeiger über das Symbol Quadrat in der unteren rechten Ecke und ziehen Sie an der Fläche, bis die Tabelle die gewünschte Größe aufweist.

                                          +

                                          Um die Größe einer Tabelle zu ändern, bewegen Sie den Mauszeiger über den Griff Quadrat in der unteren rechten Ecke und ziehen Sie ihn, bis die Tabelle die erforderliche Größe erreicht hat.

                                          Tabellengröße ändern

                                          -

                                          Sie können die Breite einer bestimmten Spalte oder die Höhe einer Zeile auch manuell ändern. Bewegen Sie den Mauszeiger über den rechten Rand der Spalte, so dass der Cursor in den bidirektionalen Pfeil Cursor bei der Änderung der Spaltenbreite wechselt und ziehen Sie den Rand nach links oder rechts, um die gewünschte Breite festzulegen. Um die Höhe einer einzelnen Zeile manuell zu ändern, bewegen Sie den Mauszeiger über den unteren Rand der Zeile, so dass der Cursor in den bidirektionalen Pfeil Cursor bei der Änderung der Zeilenhöhe wechselt und ziehen Sie den Rand nach oben oder nach unten.

                                          -

                                          Um eine Tabelle zu verschieben, halten Sie mit dem Cursor das Symbol Tabellen-Handle auswählen fest und ziehen Sie die Tabelle an die gewünschte Stelle im Dokument.

                                          +

                                          Sie können die Breite einer bestimmten Spalte oder die Höhe einer Zeile auch manuell ändern. Bewegen Sie den Mauszeiger über den rechten Rand der Spalte, sodass sich der Zeiger in einen bidirektionalen Pfeil Cursor bei der Änderung der Spaltenbreite verwandelt, und ziehen Sie den Rand nach links oder rechts, um die erforderliche Breite festzulegen. Um die Höhe einer einzelnen Zeile manuell zu ändern, bewegen Sie den Mauszeiger über den unteren Rand der Zeile, sodass sich der Zeiger in den bidirektionalen Pfeil Cursor bei der Änderung der Zeilenhöhe verwandelt, und ziehen Sie den Rand nach oben oder nach unten.

                                          +

                                          Um eine Tabelle zu verschieben, halten Sie den Griff Tabellen-Handle auswählen in der oberen linken Ecke gedrückt und ziehen Sie ihn an die gewünschte Stelle im Dokument.

                                          +

                                          Es ist auch möglich, der Tabelle eine Beschriftung hinzuzufügen. Weitere Informationen zum Arbeiten mit Beschriftungen für Tabellen finden Sie in diesem Artikel.


                                          -

                                          Eine Tabelle oder Tabelleninhalte auswählen

                                          -

                                          Um eine ganze Tabelle auszuwählen, klicken Sie auf das Tabellen-Handle auswählen Handle in der oberen linken Ecke.

                                          -

                                          Um eine bestimmte Zelle auszuwählen, bewegen Sie den Mauszeiger zur linken Seite der gewünschten Zelle, so dass der Cursor zum schwarzen Pfeil Zelle auswählen wird und klicken Sie dann mit der linken Maustaste.

                                          -

                                          Um eine bestimmte Zeile auszuwählen, bewegen Sie den Mauszeiger zum linken Rand der gewünschten Zeile, so dass der Cursor zum horizontalen schwarzen Pfeil Zeile auswählen wird und klicken Sie dann mit der linken Maustaste.

                                          -

                                          Um eine bestimmte Spalte auszuwählen, bewegen Sie den Mauszeiger zum oberen Rand der gewünschten Spalte, so dass der Cursor zum nach unten gerichteten schwarzen Pfeil Spalte auswählen wird und klicken Sie dann mit der linken Maustaste.

                                          -

                                          Es ist auch möglich, eine Zelle, Zeile, Spalte oder Tabelle mithilfe von Optionen aus dem Kontextmenü oder aus dem Abschnit Zeilen und Spalten in der rechten Seitenleiste auszuwählen.

                                          +

                                          Wählen Sie eine Tabelle oder deren Teil aus

                                          +

                                          Um eine gesamtee Tabelle auszuwählen, klicken Sie auf den Tabellen-Handle auswählen Griff in der oberen linken Ecke.

                                          +

                                          Um eine bestimmte Zelle auszuwählen, bewegen Sie den Mauszeiger auf die linke Seite der gewünschten Zelle, sodass sich der Zeiger in den schwarzen Pfeil Zelle auswählen verwandelt, und klicken Sie dann mit der linken Maustaste.

                                          +

                                          Um eine bestimmte Zeile auszuwählen, bewegen Sie den Mauszeiger an den linken Rand der Tabelle neben der erforderlichen Zeile, sodass sich der Zeiger in den horizontalen schwarzen Pfeil Zeile auswählen verwandelt, und klicken Sie dann mit der linken Maustaste.

                                          +

                                          Um eine bestimmte Spalte auszuwählen, bewegen Sie den Mauszeiger an den oberen Rand der erforderlichen Spalte, sodass sich der Zeiger in den schwarzen Pfeil Spalte auswählen nach unten verwandelt, und klicken Sie dann mit der linken Maustaste.

                                          +

                                          Es ist auch möglich, eine Zelle, Zeile, Spalte oder Tabelle mithilfe von Optionen aus dem Kontextmenü oder aus dem Abschnitt Zeilen und Spalten in der rechten Seitenleiste auszuwählen.

                                          +

                                          Hinweis: Um sich in einer Tabelle zu bewegen, können Sie Tastaturkürzel verwenden.


                                          -

                                          Tabelleneinstellungen anpassen

                                          -

                                          Einige der Tabelleneigenschaften sowie die Struktur können mithilfe des Rechtsklickmenüs verändert werden. Die Menüoptionen sind:

                                          +

                                          Passen Sie die Tabelleneinstellungen an

                                          +

                                          Einige der Tabelleneigenschaften sowie deren Struktur können über das Kontextmenü geändert werden. Die Menüoptionen sind:

                                            -
                                          • Ausschneiden, Kopieren, Einfügen - Standardoptionen zum Ausschneiden oder Kopieren ausgewählter Textpassagen/Objekte und zum Einfügen von zuvor ausgeschnittenen/kopierten Textstellen oder Objekten an der aktuellen Cursorposition.
                                          • -
                                          • Auswählen - um eine Zeile, Spalte, Zelle oder Tabelle auszuwählen.
                                          • -
                                          • Einfügen - um eine Zeile oberhalb oder unterhalb bzw. eine Spalte rechts oder links von der Zeile einzufügen, in der sich der Cursor aktuell befindet.
                                          • -
                                          • Löschen - um eine Zeile, Spalte oder Tabelle zu löschen.
                                          • -
                                          • Zellen verbinden - auswählen von zwei oder mehr Zellen, die in einer Zelle zusammengeführt werden sollen.
                                          • -
                                          • Zelle teilen... - in einem neuen Fenster können Sie die gewünschte Anzahl der Spalten und Zeilen auswählen, in die die Zelle geteilt wird.
                                          • -
                                          • Zeilen verteilen - die ausgewählten Zellen werden so angepasst, dass sie dieselbe Höhe haben, ohne dass die Gesamthöhe der Tabelle geändert wird.
                                          • -
                                          • Spalten verteilen - die ausgewählten Zellen werden so angepasst, dass sie dieselbe Breite haben, ohne dass die Gesamtbreite der Tabelle geändert wird.
                                          • -
                                          • Vertikale Ausrichtung in Zellen - den Text in der gewählten Zelle am oberen, unteren Rand oder zentriert ausrichten.
                                          • -
                                          • Textrichtung - Textrichtung in einer Zelle festlegen Sie können den Text horizontal platzieren und vertikal von oben nach unten ausrichten (Text um 90° drehen) oder vertikal von unten nach oben ausrichten (Text um 270° drehen).
                                          • -
                                          • Tabelle - Erweiterte Einstellungen - öffnen Sie das Fenster „Tabelle - Erweiterte Einstellungen“.
                                          • -
                                          • Hyperlink - einen Hyperlink einfügen.
                                          • -
                                          • Erweiterte Absatzeinstellungen - das Fenster „Erweiterte Absatzeinstellungen“ wird geöffnet.
                                          • +
                                          • Ausschneiden, Kopieren, Einfügen - Standardoptionen, mit denen ein ausgewählter Text / ein ausgewähltes Objekt ausgeschnitten oder kopiert und eine zuvor ausgeschnittene / kopierte Textpassage oder ein Objekt an die aktuelle Cursorposition eingefügt wird.
                                          • +
                                          • Mit Auswahl können Sie eine Zeile, Spalte, Zelle oder Tabelle auswählen.
                                          • +
                                          • Einfügen wird verwendet, um eine Zeile über oder unter der Zeile einzufügen, in der sich der Cursor befindet, sowie um eine Spalte links oder rechts von der Spalte einzufügen, in der sich der Cursor befindet.

                                            +

                                            Es ist auch möglich, mehrere Zeilen oder Spalten einzufügen. Wenn Sie die Option Mehrere Zeilen / Spalten auswählen, wird das Fenster Mehrere Zeilen einfügen geöffnet. Wählen Sie die Option Zeilen oder Spalten aus der Liste aus, geben Sie die Anzahl der Zeilen / Spalten an, die Sie hinzufügen möchten, wählen Sie aus, wo sie hinzugefügt werden sollen: Über dem Cursor oder Unter dem Cursor und klicken Sie auf OK.

                                            +
                                          • +
                                          • Löschen wird verwendet, um eine Zeile, Spalte, Tabelle oder Zellen zu löschen. Wenn Sie die Option Zellen auswählen, wird das Fenster Zellen löschen geöffnet, in dem Sie auswählen können, ob Sie Zellen nach links verschieben, die gesamte Zeile löschen oder die gesamte Spalte löschen möchten.
                                          • +
                                          • Zellen zusammenführen ist verfügbar, wenn zwei oder mehr Zellen ausgewählt sind, und wird zum Zusammenführen verwendet.

                                            +

                                            Es ist auch möglich, Zellen zusammenzuführen, indem mit dem Radiergummi eine Grenze zwischen ihnen gelöscht wird. Klicken Sie dazu in der oberen Symbolleiste auf das Tabellensymbol Tabelle und wählen Sie die Option Tabelle löschen. Der Mauszeiger wird zum Radiergummi Radiergummi. Bewegen Sie den Mauszeiger über den Rand zwischen den Zellen, die Sie zusammenführen und löschen möchten. +

                                          • +
                                          • Zelle teilen... wird verwendet, um ein Fenster zu öffnen, in dem Sie die erforderliche Anzahl von Spalten und Zeilen auswählen können, in die die Zelle aufgeteilt werden soll.

                                            +

                                            Sie können eine Zelle auch teilen, indem Sie mit dem Bleistiftwerkzeug Zeilen oder Spalten zeichnen. Klicken Sie dazu in der oberen Symbolleiste auf das Tabellensymbol Tabelle und wählen Sie die Option Tabelle zeichnen. Der Mauszeiger verwandelt sich in einen Bleistift Bleistift. Zeichnen Sie eine horizontale Linie, um eine Zeile zu erstellen, oder eine vertikale Linie, um eine Spalte zu erstellen. +

                                          • +
                                          • Mit Zeilen verteilen werden die ausgewählten Zellen so angepasst, dass sie dieselbe Höhe haben, ohne die Gesamthöhe der Tabelle zu ändern..
                                          • +
                                          • Mit Spalten verteilen werden die ausgewählten Zellen so angepasst, dass sie dieselbe Breite haben, ohne die Gesamtbreite der Tabelle zu ändern.
                                          • +
                                          • Die vertikale Ausrichtung der Zelle wird verwendet, um den Text oben, in der Mitte oder unten auszurichten in der ausgewählten Zelle.
                                          • +
                                          • Textrichtung - wird verwendet, um die Textausrichtung in einer Zelle zu ändern. Sie können den Text horizontal, vertikal von oben nach unten (Text nach unten drehen) oder vertikal von unten nach oben (Text nach oben drehen) platzieren.
                                          • +
                                          • Mit Tabelle - Erweiterte Einstellungen wird das Fenster Tabelle - Erweiterte Einstellungen" geöffnet.
                                          • +
                                          • Hyperlink wird verwendet, um einen Hyperlink einzufügen.
                                          • +
                                          • Mit den erweiterten Absatzeinstellungen wird das Fenster "Absatz - Erweiterte Einstellungen" geöffnet.

                                          Rechte Seitenleiste - Tabelleneinstellungen

                                          -

                                          Sie können die Tabelleneigenschaften auch in der rechten Seitenleiste ändern:

                                          +

                                          Sie können auch die Tabelleneigenschaften in der rechten Seitenleiste ändern:

                                            -
                                          • Zeilen und Spalten - wählen Sie die Tabellenabschnitte aus, die Sie hervorheben möchten.

                                            +
                                          • Zeilen und Spalten werden verwendet, um die Tabellenteile auszuwählen, die hervorgehoben werden sollen.

                                            Für Zeilen:

                                            • Kopfzeile - um die erste Zeile hervorzuheben
                                            • -
                                            • Letzte - um die letzte Zeile hervorzuheben
                                            • -
                                            • Zusammengebunden - um jede zweite Zeile hervorzuheben
                                            • +
                                            • Insgesamt - um die letzte Zeile hervorzuheben
                                            • +
                                            • Gestreift - um jede zweite Zeile hervorzuheben

                                            Für Spalten:

                                            • Erste - um die erste Spalte hervorzuheben
                                            • Letzte - um die letzte Spalte hervorzuheben
                                            • -
                                            • Zusammengebunden - um jede zweite Spalte hervorzuheben
                                            • +
                                            • Gestreift - um jede andere Spalte hervorzuheben
                                          • -
                                          • Aus Vorlage auswählen - wählen Sie eine verfügbare Tabellenvorlage aus.

                                          • -
                                          • Rahmenstil - Linienstärke, -farbe, Rahmenstil und Hintergrundfarbe bestimmen.

                                          • -
                                          • Zeilen & Spalten - auswählen, löschen und einfügen von Zeilen und Spalten, Zellen verbinden und teilen.

                                          • -
                                          • Zellengröße - anpassen von Breite und Höhe der aktuell ausgewählten Zelle. In diesem Abschnitt können Sie auch Zeilen verteilen auswählen, so dass alle ausgewählten Zellen die gleiche Höhe haben oder "Spalten verteilen, so dass alle ausgewählten Zellen die gleiche Breite haben.

                                          • -
                                          • Gleiche Kopfzeile auf jeder Seite wiederholen - in langen Tabellen wird am Anfang jeder neuen Seite die gleiche Kopfzeile eingefügt.

                                          • -
                                          • Erweiterte Einstellungen anzeigen - öffnet das Fenster „Tabelle - Erweiterte Einstellungen“

                                          • +
                                          • Aus Vorlage auswählen wird verwendet, um eine Tabellenvorlage aus den verfügbaren auszuwählen.

                                          • +
                                          • Rahmenstil wird verwendet, um die Rahmengröße, Farbe, den Stil sowie die Hintergrundfarbe auszuwählen.

                                          • +
                                          • Zeilen & Spalten werden verwendet, um einige Operationen mit der Tabelle auszuführen: Auswählen, Löschen, Einfügen von Zeilen und Spalten, Zusammenführen von Zellen, Teilen einer Zelle.

                                          • +
                                          • Zeilen- und Spaltengröße wird verwendet, um die Breite und Höhe der aktuell ausgewählten Zelle anzupassen. In diesem Abschnitt können Sie auch Zeilen so verteilen, dass alle ausgewählten Zellen die gleiche Höhe haben, oder Spalten so verteilen, dass alle ausgewählten Zellen die gleiche Breite haben.

                                          • +
                                          • Formel hinzufügen wird verwendet, um eine Formel in die ausgewählte Tabellenzelle einzufügen.

                                          • +
                                          • Gleiche Kopfzeile auf jeder Seite wiederholen wird verwendet, um dieselbe Kopfzeile oben auf jeder Seite in lange Tabellen einzufügen.

                                          • +
                                          • Erweiterte Einstellungen anzeigen wird verwendet, um das Fenster "Tabelle - Erweiterte Einstellungen" zu öffnen.

                                          -
                                          -

                                          Um die erweiterten Tabelleneinstellungen zu ändern, klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste auf die Tabelle und wählen Sie die Option Tabelle - Erweiterte Einstellungen im Rechtsklickmenü aus oder klicken Sie in der rechten Seitenleiste auf die Verknüpfung Erweiterte Einstellungen anzeigen. Das Fenster mit den Tabelleneigenschaften wird geöffnet:

                                          +
                                          +

                                          Passen Sie die erweiterten Tabelleneinstellungen an

                                          +

                                          Um die Eigenschaften der erweiterten Tabelle zu ändern, klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste auf die Tabelle und wählen Sie im Kontextmenü die Option Erweiterte Tabelleneinstellungen aus, oder verwenden Sie den Link Erweiterte Einstellungen anzeigen in der rechten Seitenleiste. Das Fenster mit den Tabelleneigenschaften wird geöffnet:

                                          Tabelle - Erweiterte Einstellungen

                                          -

                                          In der Registerkarte Tabelle können die Tabelleneigenschaften der gesamten Tabelle geändert werden.

                                          +

                                          Auf der Registerkarte Tabelle können Sie die Eigenschaften der gesamten Tabelle ändern.

                                            -
                                          • Die Registerkarte Größe enthält die folgenden Parameter:
                                              -
                                            • Breite - Standardmäßig wird die Tabellenbreite automatisch an die Seitenbreite angepasst (die Tabelle belegt den gesamten Abstand zwischen dem linken und rechten Seitenrand). Sie können das Kontrollkästchen aktivieren und die gewünschte Tabellenbreite manuell eingeben.
                                            • -
                                            • Gemessen in - legen Sie fest, ob Sie die Tabellenbreite in absoluten Einheiten angeben wollen, wie Zentimeter/Punkte/Zoll (abhängig von der Voreinstellung in der Registerkarte Datei -> Erweiterte Einstellungen...) oder als Prozentsatz der gesamten Tabellenbreite.

                                              Hinweis: Sie können die Tabellengröße auch manuell anpassen, indem Sie Zeilenhöhe und Spaltenbreite ändern. Bewegen Sie den Mauszeiger über einen Zeilen-/Spaltenrand, bis dieser zum bidirektionalen Pfeil wird und ziehen Sie den Rahmen in die gewünschte Position. Sie können auch die Tabelle - Markierung Spaltenbreite Markierungen auf dem horizontalen Lineal verwenden, um die Spaltenbreite zu ändern bzw. die Tabelle - Markierung Zeilenhöhe Markierungen auf dem vertikalen Lineal, um die Zeilenhöhe zu ändern.

                                              +
                                            • Der Abschnitt Tabellengröße enthält die folgenden Parameter:
                                                +
                                              • Breite - Standardmäßig wird die Tabellenbreite automatisch an die Seitenbreite angepasst, d. H. Die Tabelle nimmt den gesamten Raum zwischen dem linken und rechten Seitenrand ein. Sie können dieses Kontrollkästchen aktivieren und die erforderliche Tabellenbreite manuell angeben.
                                              • +
                                              • Messen in - Ermöglicht die Angabe, ob Sie die Tabellenbreite in absoluten Einheiten festlegen möchten, d. H. Zentimeter / Punkte / Zoll (abhängig von der auf der Registerkarte Datei -> Erweiterte Einstellungen...angegebenen Option) oder in Prozent der Gesamtseitenbreite.

                                                Hinweis: Sie können die Tabellengröße auch manuell anpassen, indem Sie die Zeilenhöhe und Spaltenbreite ändern. Bewegen Sie den Mauszeiger über einen Zeilen- / Spaltenrand, bis er sich in einen bidirektionalen Pfeil verwandelt, und ziehen Sie den Rand. Sie können auch die Tabelle - Markierung Spaltenbreite Markierungen auf dem horizontalen Lineal verwenden, um die Spaltenbreite zu ändern, und die Tabelle - Markierung Zeilenhöhe Markierungen auf dem vertikalen Lineal, um die Zeilenhöhe zu ändern.

                                              • -
                                              • Automatische Anpassung der Größe an den Inhalt - die automatische Änderung jeder Spaltenbreite gemäß dem jeweiligen Text innerhalb der Zellen wird aktiviert.
                                              • +
                                              • Automatische Größenanpassung an den Inhalt - Ermöglicht die automatische Änderung jeder Spaltenbreite entsprechend dem Text in den Zellen.
                                            • -
                                            • Im Abschnitt Standardzellenbegrenzungen können Sie den Abstand zwischen dem Text innerhalb der Zellen und den standardmäßig verwendeten Zellenbegrenzungen angeben.
                                            • -
                                            • Im Abschnitt Optionen können Sie die folgenden Parameter ändern:
                                                -
                                              • Abstand zwischen Zellen - der Zellenabstand, der mit der Hintergrundfarbe der Tabelle gefüllt wird.
                                              • +
                                              • Im Abschnitt Standardzellenränder können Sie den Abstand zwischen dem Text innerhalb der Zellen und dem standardmäßig verwendeten Zellenrand ändern.
                                              • +
                                              • Im Abschnitt Optionen können Sie den folgenden Parameter ändern:
                                                  +
                                                • Abstand zwischen Zellen - Der Zellenabstand, der mit der Farbe des Tabellenhintergrunds gefüllt wird.

                                              Tabelle - Erweiterte Einstellungen

                                              -

                                              In der Gruppe Zelle können Sie die Eigenschaften von einzelnen Zellen ändern. Wählen Sie zunächst die Zelle aus, die Sie ändern wollen oder markieren Sie die gesamte Tabelle, um die Eigenschaften aller Zellen zu ändern.

                                              +

                                              Auf der Registerkarte Zelle können Sie die Eigenschaften einzelner Zellen ändern. Zuerst müssen Sie die Zelle auswählen, auf die Sie die Änderungen anwenden möchten, oder die gesamte Tabelle auswählen, um die Eigenschaften aller Zellen zu ändern.

                                                -
                                              • Die Registerkarte Zellengröße enthält die folgenden Parameter:
                                                  -
                                                • Bevorzugte Breite - legen Sie Ihre gewünschte Zellenbreite fest. Alle Zellen werden nach diesem Wert ausgerichtet, allerdings kann es in Einzelfällen vorkommen, dass es nicht möglich ist eine bestimmte Zelle auf genau diesen Wert anzupassen. Wenn der Text innerhalb einer Zelle beispielsweise die angegebene Breite überschreitet, wird er in die nächste Zeile aufgeteilt, sodass die bevorzugte Zellenbreite unverändert bleibt. Fügen Sie jedoch eine neue Spalte ein, wird die bevorzugte Breite reduziert.
                                                • -
                                                • Gemessen in - legen Sie fest, ob Sie die Zellenbreite in absoluten Einheiten angeben wollen, wie Zentimeter/Punkte/Zoll (abhängig von der Voreinstellung in der Registerkarte Datei -> Erweiterte Einstellungen...) oder als Prozentsatz der gesamten Tabellenbreite.

                                                  Hinweis: Sie können die Zellengröße auch manuell anpassen. Wenn Sie eine einzelne Zelle in einer Spalte kleiner oder größer als die Spaltenbreite machen wollen, bewegen Sie den Mauszeiger über den rechten Rand der gewünschten Zelle, bis dieser zum bidirektionalen Pfeil wird und ziehen Sie den Rahmen in die gewünschte Position. Verwenden Sie die Tabelle - Markierung Spaltenbreite Markierungen auf dem horizontalen Lineal, um die Spaltenbreite zu ändern.

                                                  +
                                                • Der Abschnitt Zellengröße enthält die folgenden Parameter:
                                                    +
                                                  • Bevorzugte Breite - Ermöglicht das Festlegen einer bevorzugten Zellenbreite. Dies ist die Größe, an die eine Zelle angepasst werden soll. In einigen Fällen ist es jedoch möglicherweise nicht möglich, genau an diesen Wert anzupassen. Wenn der Text in einer Zelle beispielsweise die angegebene Breite überschreitet, wird er in die nächste Zeile aufgeteilt, sodass die bevorzugte Zellenbreite unverändert bleibt. Wenn Sie jedoch eine neue Spalte einfügen, wird die bevorzugte Breite verringert.
                                                  • +
                                                  • Messen in - ermöglicht die Angabe, ob Sie die Zellenbreite in absoluten Einheiten festlegen möchten, d. H. Zentimeter / Punkte / Zoll (abhängig von der auf der Registerkarte Datei -> Erweiterte Einstellungen... angegebenen Option) oder in Prozent der gesamten Tabellenbreite.

                                                    Hinweis: Sie können die Zellenbreite auch manuell anpassen. Um eine einzelne Zelle in einer Spalte breiter oder schmaler als die gesamte Spaltenbreite zu machen, wählen Sie die gewünschte Zelle aus und bewegen Sie den Mauszeiger über den rechten Rand, bis sie sich in den bidirektionalen Pfeil verwandelt. Ziehen Sie dann den Rand. Um die Breite aller Zellen in einer Spalte zu ändern, verwenden Sie die Tabelle - Markierung Spaltenbreite Markierungen auf dem horizontalen Lineal, um die Spaltenbreite zu ändern.

                                                • -
                                                • Im Abschnitt Zellenbegrenzungen können Sie den Abstand zwischen dem Text in den Zellen und der Zellenbegrenzung anpassen. Wenn Sie keine Auswahl treffen, werden Standardwerte verwendet (diese können in der Registerkarte Tabelle geändert werden), Sie können jedoch das Kontrollkästchen Standardbegrenzungen deaktivieren und die gewünschten Werte manuell eingeben.
                                                • -
                                                • Im Abschnitt Zelloptionen können Sie die folgenden Parameter ändern:
                                                    -
                                                  • Die Option Zeilenumbruch ist standardmäßig aktiviert. Wenn der Text innerhalb einer Zeile länger ist als die vorhandene Zellenbreite, erfolgt ein automatischer Umbruch, so wird die Zelle zwar Höher aber die Spaltenbreite bleibt gleich.
                                                  • +
                                                  • Im Abschnitt Zellenränder können Sie den Abstand zwischen dem Text innerhalb der Zellen und dem Zellenrand anpassen. Standardmäßig werden Standardwerte verwendet (die Standardwerte können auch auf der Registerkarte Tabelle geändert werden). Sie können jedoch das Kontrollkästchen Standardränder verwenden deaktivieren und die erforderlichen Werte manuell eingeben.
                                                  • +
                                                  • Im Abschnitt Zellenoptionen können Sie den folgenden Parameter ändern:
                                                      +
                                                    • Die Option Text umbrechen ist standardmäßig aktiviert. Es erlaubts, um Text in eine Zelle, die ihre Breite überschreitet, in die nächste Zeile zu umbrechen, um die Zeilenhöhe zu erweitern und die Spaltenbreite unverändert zu lassen.

                                                  Tabelle - Erweiterte Einstellungen

                                                  Die Registerkarte Rahmen & Hintergrund enthält die folgenden Parameter:

                                                    -
                                                  • Rahmeneinstellungen (Größe, Farbe und An- oder Abwesenheit) - legen Sie Linienstärke, Farbe und Ansichtstyp fest.

                                                    Hinweis: Wenn Sie den Tabellenrahmen unsichtbar machen, indem Sie auf die Schaltfläche Kein Rahmen klicken oder alle Rahmenlinien in der Tabelle manuell deaktivieren, werden diese im Dokument mit einer gepunkteten Linie angedeutet. Um die Rahmenlinien vollständig auszublenden, klicken Sie auf das Symbol Formatierungszeichen Formatierungszeichen in der Registerkarte Start und wählen Sie die Option Tabellenrahmen ausblenden.

                                                    +
                                                  • Rahmenparameter (Größe, Farbe und Vorhandensein oder Nichtvorhandensein) - Legen Sie die Rahmengröße fest, wählen Sie die Farbe aus und legen Sie fest, wie sie in den Zellen angezeigt werden soll.

                                                    Hinweis: Wenn Sie festlegen, dass Tabellenränder nicht angezeigt werden, indem Sie auf die Schaltfläche Kein Rahmen klicken oder alle Ränder manuell im Diagramm deaktivieren, werden sie im Dokument durch eine gepunktete Linie angezeigt. Um sie überhaupt verschwinden zu lassen, klicken Sie auf der Registerkarte Startseite der oberen Symbolleiste auf das Symbol Nicht druckbare Zeichen Formatierungszeichen und wählen Sie die Option Versteckte Tabellenränder.

                                                  • -
                                                  • Zellenhintergrund - dem Zellenhintergrund eine Farbe zuweisen (nur verfügbar, wenn eine oder mehrere Zellen gewählt sind oder die Option Abstand zwischen Zellen zulassen auf der Registerkarte Breite & Abstand aktiviert ist).
                                                  • -
                                                  • Tabellenhintergrund - der Tabelle wird eine Hintergrundfarbe zugewiesen bzw. die Abstände zwischen den Zellen werden farblich markiert, wenn die Option Abstand zwischen Zellen zulassen auf der Registerkarte Breite & Abstand aktiviert ist.
                                                  • +
                                                  • Zellenhintergrund - Die Farbe für den Hintergrund innerhalb der Zellen (nur verfügbar, wenn eine oder mehrere Zellen ausgewählt sind oder die Option Abstand zwischen Zellen zulassen auf der Registerkarte Tabelle ausgewählt ist).
                                                  • +
                                                  • Tabellenhintergrund - Die Farbe für den Tabellenhintergrund oder den Abstand zwischen den Zellen, falls auf der Registerkarte Tabelle die Option Abstand zwischen Zellen zulassen ausgewählt ist.

                                                  Tabelle - Erweiterte Einstellungen

                                                  -

                                                  Die Registerkarte Position ist nur verfügbar, wenn die Option Umgebend auf der Registerkarte Textumbruch ausgewählt ist, und enthält die folgenden Parameter:

                                                  +

                                                  Die Registerkarte Tabellenposition ist nur verfügbar, wenn die Option Flusstabelle auf der Registerkarte Textumbruch ausgewählt ist und die folgenden Parameter enthält:

                                                    -
                                                  • Die Parameter Horizontal beinhalten die Ausrichtung der Tabelle (linksbündig, zentriert, rechtsbündig) im Verhältnis zu Rand, Seite oder Text sowie die Tabellenposition rechts von Rand, Seite oder Text.
                                                  • -
                                                  • Die Parameter Vertikal beinhalten die Ausrichtung der Tabelle (oben, zentriert, unten) im Verhältnis zu Rand, Seite oder Text sowie die Tabellenposition unterhalb des Randes, der Seite oder des Textes.
                                                  • -
                                                  • Über die Registerkarte Rahmen können die folgenden Parameter festgelegt werden:
                                                      -
                                                    • Im Kontrollkästchen Objekt mit Text verschieben können Sie festlegen, ob sich die Tabelle zusammen mit dem Text bewegen lässt, mit dem sie verankert wurde.
                                                    • -
                                                    • Überlappung zulassen bestimmt, ob zwei Tabellen in einer großen Tabelle verbunden werden oder überlappen, wenn Sie diese auf einer Seite dicht aneinander bringen.
                                                    • +
                                                    • Zu den horizontalen Parametern gehören die Tabellenausrichtung (links, Mitte, rechts) relativ zu Rand, Seite oder Text sowie die Tabellenposition rechts von Rand, Seite oder Text.
                                                    • +
                                                    • Zu den vertikalen Parametern gehören die Tabellenausrichtung (oben, Mitte, unten) relativ zu Rand, Seite oder Text sowie die Tabellenposition unter Rand, Seite oder Text.
                                                    • +
                                                    • Im Abschnitt Optionen können Sie die folgenden Parameter ändern:
                                                        +
                                                      • Objekt mit Text verschieben steuert, ob die Tabelle verschoben wird, während sich der Text, in den sie eingefügt wird, bewegt.
                                                      • +
                                                      • Überlappungssteuerung zulassen steuert, ob zwei Tabellen zu einer großen Tabelle zusammengeführt werden oder überlappen, wenn Sie sie auf der Seite nebeneinander ziehen.

                                                    Tabelle - Erweiterte Einstellungen

                                                    Die Registerkarte Textumbruch enthält die folgenden Parameter:

                                                      -
                                                    • Umbruchstil - Mit Text verschieben oder Umgebend. Legen Sie fest, wie die Tabelle im Verhältnis zum Text positioniert wird: entweder als Teil des Textes (wenn Sie die Option „Mit Text in Zeile“ auswählen) oder an allen Seiten von Text umgeben (im Format „Umgebend“).
                                                    • -
                                                    • Wenn Sie den Umbruchstil ausgewählt haben, können die zusätzlichen Umbruchparameter für beide Umbruchformate festlegen.
                                                        -
                                                      • Für den Stil „Mit Text in Zeile“ können Sie die Ausrichtung und den linken Einzug der Tabelle festlegen.
                                                      • -
                                                      • Im Format „umgebend“ können Sie in der Gruppe Tabellenposition den Abstand zum Text sowie die Position der Tabelle festlegen.
                                                      • +
                                                      • Textumbruchstil - Inline-Tabelle oder Flow-Tabelle. Verwenden Sie die erforderliche Option, um die Position der Tabelle relativ zum Text zu ändern: Sie ist entweder Teil des Textes (falls Sie die Inline-Tabelle auswählen) oder wird von allen Seiten umgangen (wenn Sie die Flusstabelle auswählen).
                                                      • +
                                                      • Nachdem Sie den Umbruchstil ausgewählt haben, können die zusätzlichen Umbruchparameter sowohl für Inline- als auch für Flusstabellen festgelegt werden:
                                                          +
                                                        • Für die Inline-Tabelle können Sie die Tabellenausrichtung und den Einzug von links angeben.
                                                        • +
                                                        • Für die Flusstabelle können Sie den Abstand von Text und Tabellenposition auf der Registerkarte Tabellenposition angeben

                                                      Tabelle - Erweiterte Einstellungen

                                                      -

                                                      Die Registerkarte Alternativtext ermöglicht die Eingabe eines Titels und einer Beschreibung, die Personen mit Sehbehinderungen oder kognitiven Beeinträchtigungen vorgelesen werden kann, damit sie besser verstehen können, welche Informationen in der Tabelle enthalten sind.

                                                      +

                                                      Auf der Registerkarte Alternativer Text können Sie einen Titel und eine Beschreibung angeben, die Personen mit Seh- oder kognitiven Beeinträchtigungen vorgelesen werden, damit sie besser verstehen, welche Informationen in der Tabelle enthalten sind. +

                                                      diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/InsertTextObjects.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/InsertTextObjects.htm index 035e37f95..bc756f4db 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/InsertTextObjects.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/InsertTextObjects.htm @@ -16,35 +16,35 @@

                                                      Textobjekte einfügen

                                                      Um Ihren Text lesbarer zu gestalten und die Aufmerksamkeit auf einen bestimmten Teil des Dokuments zu lenken, können Sie ein Textfeld (rechteckigen Rahmen, in den ein Text eingegeben werden kann) oder ein TextArt-Textfeld (Textfeld mit einer vordefinierten Schriftart und Farbe, das die Anwendung von Texteffekten ermöglicht) einfügen.

                                                      Textobjekt einfügen

                                                      -

                                                      Sie können überall auf der Seite ein Textobjekt einfügen. Folgen Sie dafür den folgenden Schritten:

                                                      +

                                                      Sie können überall auf der Seite ein Textobjekt einfügen. Textobjekt einfügen:

                                                      1. Wechseln Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf die Registerkarte Einfügen.
                                                      2. Wählen Sie das gewünschten Textobjekt aus:
                                                          -
                                                        • Um ein Textfeld hinzuzufügen, klicken Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf das Symbol Textfeld Textfeld und dann auf die Stelle, an der Sie das Textfeld einfügen möchten. Halten Sie die Maustaste gedrückt, und ziehen Sie den Rahmen des Textfelds in die gewünschte Größe. Wenn Sie die Maustaste loslassen, erscheint die Einfügemarke im hinzugefügten Textfeld und Sie können Ihren Text eingeben.

                                                          Hinweis: alternativ können Sie ein Textfeld einfügen, in dem Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf Form Form klicken und das Symbol Textautoform einfügen aus der Gruppe Standardformen auswählen.

                                                          +
                                                        • Um ein Textfeld hinzuzufügen, klicken Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf das Symbol Textfeld Textfeld und dann auf die Stelle, an der Sie das Textfeld einfügen möchten. Halten Sie die Maustaste gedrückt, und ziehen Sie den Rahmen des Textfelds in die gewünschte Größe. Wenn Sie die Maustaste loslassen, erscheint die Einfügemarke im hinzugefügten Textfeld und Sie können Ihren Text eingeben.

                                                          Hinweis: alternativ können Sie ein Textfeld einfügen, indem Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf Form Form klicken und das Symbol Text-AutoForm einfügen aus der Gruppe Standardformen auswählen.

                                                        • Um ein TextArt-Objekt einzufügen, klicken Sie auf das Symbol TextArt TextArt in der oberen Symbolleiste und klicken Sie dann auf die gewünschte Stilvorlage - das TextArt-Objekt wird an der aktuellen Cursorposition eingefügt. Markieren Sie den Standardtext innerhalb des Textfelds mit der Maus und ersetzen Sie diesen durch Ihren eigenen Text.
                                                      3. Klicken Sie in einen Bereich außerhalb des Text-Objekts, um die Änderungen anzuwenden und zum Dokument zurückzukehren.
                                                      -

                                                      Der auf solcher Weise hinzugefügte Text wird Bestandteil der AutoForm (wenn Sie die AutoForm verschieben oder drehen, wird der Text mit ihr verschoben oder gedreht).

                                                      +

                                                      Der Text innerhalb des Textfelds ist Bestandteil der AutoForm (wenn Sie die AutoForm verschieben oder drehen, wird der Text mit ihr verschoben oder gedreht).

                                                      Da ein eingefügtes Textobjekt einen rechteckigen Rahmen mit Text darstellt (TextArt-Objekte haben standardmäßig unsichtbare Rahmen) und dieser Rahmen eine allgemeine AutoForm ist, können Sie sowohl die Form als auch die Texteigenschaften ändern.

                                                      -

                                                      Um das hinzugefügte Text-Objekt zu löschen, klicken Sie auf den Rand des Textfelds und drücken Sie die Taste ENTF auf der Tastatur. Dadurch wird auch der Text im Textfeld gelöscht.

                                                      +

                                                      Um das hinzugefügte Textobjekt zu löschen, klicken Sie auf den Rand des Textfelds und drücken Sie die Taste ENTF auf der Tastatur. Dadurch wird auch der Text im Textfeld gelöscht.

                                                      Textfeld formatieren

                                                      -

                                                      Wählen Sie das entsprechende Textfeld durch anklicken der Rahmenlinien aus, um die Eigenschaften zu verändern. Wenn das Textfeld markiert ist, werden alle Rahmenlinien als durchgezogene Linien und nicht gestrichelt angezeigt.

                                                      +

                                                      Wählen Sie das entsprechende Textfeld durch Anklicken der Rahmenlinien aus, um die Eigenschaften zu verändern. Wenn das Textfeld markiert ist, werden alle Rahmenlinien als durchgezogene Linien (nicht gestrichelt) angezeigt.

                                                      Markiertes Textfeld

                                                      • Sie können das Textfeld mithilfe der speziellen Ziehpunkte an den Ecken der Form verschieben, drehen und die Größe ändern.
                                                      • Um das Textfeld zu bearbeiten mit einer Füllung zu versehen, Rahmenlinien zu ändern, den Textumbruch zu formatieren oder das rechteckige Feld mit einer anderen Form zu ersetzen, klicken Sie in der rechten Seitenleiste auf Formeinstellungen Formeinstellungen und nutzen Sie die entsprechenden Optionen.
                                                      • -
                                                      • Um das Textfeld auf der Seite auszurichten, Textfelder mit andern Objekten zu verknüpfen, den Umbruchstil zu ändern oder auf Formen - Erweiterte Einstellungen zuzugreifen, klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste auf den Feldrand und öffnen Sie so das Kontextmenü. Weitere Informationen zum Ausrichten und Anordnen von Objekten finden Sie auf dieser Seite.
                                                      • +
                                                      • Um das Textfeld auf der Seite auszurichten, Textfelder mit andern Objekten zu verknüpfen, ein Textfeld zu rotieren oder umzudrehen, den Umbruchstil zu ändern oder auf Formen - Erweiterte Einstellungen zuzugreifen, klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste auf den Feldrand und öffnen Sie so das Kontextmenü. Weitere Informationen zum Ausrichten und Anordnen von Objekten finden Sie auf dieser Seite.

                                                      Text im Textfeld formatieren

                                                      -

                                                      Markieren Sie den Text im Textfeld, um die Eigenschaften zu verändern. Wenn der Text markiert ist, werden alle Rahmenlinien als durchgezogene Linien angezeigt.

                                                      +

                                                      Markieren Sie den Text im Textfeld, um die Eigenschaften zu verändern. Wenn der Text markiert ist, werden alle Rahmenlinien als gestrichelte Linien angezeigt.

                                                      Markierter Text

                                                      -

                                                      Hinweis: Es ist auch möglich, die Textformatierung zu ändern, wenn das Textfeld (nicht der Text selbst) ausgewählt ist. In einem solchen Fall werden alle Änderungen auf den gesamten Text im Textfeld angewandt. Einige Schriftformatierungsoptionen (Schriftart, -größe, -farbe und -stile) können separat auf einen zuvor ausgewählten Teil des Textes angewendet werden.

                                                      -

                                                      Um den Text innerhalb des Textfeldes zu drehen, klicken Sie mit der rechten Maus auf den Text, klicken Sie auf Textausrichtung und wählen Sie eine der verfügbaren Optionen: Horizontal (Standardeinstellung), Text um 90° drehen (vertikale Ausrichtung von oben nach unten) oder Text um 270° drehen (vertikale Ausrichtung von unten nach oben).

                                                      -

                                                      Um den Text innerhalb des Textfeldes vertikal auszurichten, klicken Sie mit der rechten Maus auf den Text, wählen Sie die Option vertikale Textausrichtung und klicken Sie auf eine der verfügbaren Optionen: Oben ausrichten, Zentriert ausrichten oder Unten ausrichten.

                                                      -

                                                      Die andere Formatierungsoptionen, die Ihnen zur Verfügung stehen, sind die gleichen wie für normalen Text. Bitte lesen Sie die entsprechenden Hilfeabschnitte, um mehr über die erforderlichen Vorgänge zu erfahren. Sie können:

                                                      +

                                                      Hinweis: Es ist auch möglich die Textformatierung zu ändern, wenn das Textfeld (nicht der Text selbst) ausgewählt ist. In einem solchen Fall werden alle Änderungen auf den gesamten Text im Textfeld angewandt. Einige Schriftformatierungsoptionen (Schriftart, -größe, -farbe und -stile) können separat auf einen zuvor ausgewählten Teil des Textes angewendet werden.

                                                      +

                                                      Um den Text innerhalb des Textfeldes zu drehen, klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste auf den Text, klicken Sie auf Textausrichtung und wählen Sie eine der verfügbaren Optionen: Horizontal (Standardeinstellung), Text um 180° drehen (vertikale Ausrichtung von oben nach unten) oder Text um 270° drehen (vertikale Ausrichtung von unten nach oben).

                                                      +

                                                      Um den Text innerhalb des Textfeldes vertikal auszurichten, klicken Sie mit der rechten Maus auf den Text, wählen Sie die Option vertikale Textausrichtung und klicken Sie auf eine der verfügbaren Optionen: Oben ausrichten, Zentrieren oder Unten ausrichten.

                                                      +

                                                      Die andere Formatierungsoptionen, die Ihnen zur Verfügung stehen sind die gleichen wie für normalen Text. Bitte lesen Sie die entsprechenden Hilfeabschnitte, um mehr über die erforderlichen Vorgänge zu erfahren. Sie können:

                                                      • den Text im Textfeld horizontal ausrichten
                                                      • Schriftart, Größe und Farbe festlegen und DekoSchriften und Formatierungsvorgaben anwenden
                                                      • @@ -54,14 +54,14 @@

                                                        Sie können auch in der rechten Seitenleiste auf das Symbol TextArt-Einstellungen TextArt-Einstellungen klicken und die gewünschten Stilparameter ändern.

                                                        TextArt-Stil bearbeiten

                                                        Wählen Sie ein Textobjekt aus und klicken Sie in der rechten Seitenleiste auf das Symbol TextArt-Einstellungen TextArt-Einstellungen.

                                                        -

                                                        Gruppe TextArt-Einstellungen

                                                        -

                                                        Ändern Sie den angewandten Textstil, indem Sie eine neue Vorlage aus der Galerie auswählen. Sie können den Grundstil außerdem ändern, indem Sie eine andere Schriftart, Größe usw. auswählen.

                                                        +

                                                        Registerkarte TextArt-Einstellungen

                                                        +

                                                        Ändern Sie den angewandten Textstil, indem Sie eine neue Vorlage aus der Galerie auswählen. Sie können den Grundstil außerdem ändern, indem Sie eine andere Schriftart, -größe usw. auswählen.

                                                        Füllung der Schriftart ändern. Folgende Optionen stehen Ihnen zur Verfügung:

                                                        • Farbfüllung - wählen Sie die Volltonfarbe für den Innenbereich der Buchstaben aus.

                                                          Einfarbige Füllung

                                                          Klicken Sie auf das Farbfeld unten und wählen Sie die gewünschte Farbe aus den verfügbaren Farbpaletten aus oder legen Sie eine beliebige Farbe fest:

                                                        • -
                                                        • Farbverlauf - wählen Sie diese Option, um die Buchstaben mit zwei Farben zu füllen, die sanft ineinander übergehen.

                                                          Farbverlauf

                                                          +
                                                        • Farbverlauf - wählen Sie diese Option, um die Buchstaben mit zwei Farben zu füllen, die sanft ineinander übergehen.

                                                          Füllung mit Farbverlauf

                                                          • Stil - wählen Sie eine der verfügbaren Optionen: Linear (Farben ändern sich linear, d.h. entlang der horizontalen/vertikalen Achse oder diagonal in einem 45-Grad Winkel) oder Radial (Farben ändern sich kreisförmig vom Zentrum zu den Kanten).
                                                          • Richtung - wählen Sie eine Vorlage aus dem Menü aus. Wenn der Farbverlauf Linear ausgewählt ist, sind die folgenden Richtungen verfügbar: von oben links nach unten rechts, von oben nach unten, von oben rechts nach unten links, von rechts nach links, von unten rechts nach oben links, von unten nach oben, von unten links nach oben rechts, von links nach rechts. Wenn der Farbverlauf Radial ausgewählt ist, steht nur eine Vorlage zur Verfügung.
                                                          • @@ -73,11 +73,11 @@

                                                          Schriftstärke, -farbe und -stil anpassen.

                                                            -
                                                          • Um die Strichstärke zu ändern, wählen Sie eine der verfügbaren Optionen im Listenmenü Größe aus. Die verfügbaren Optionen sind: 0,5 Pt., 1 Pt., 1,5 Pt., 2,25 Pt., 3 Pt., 4,5 Pt., 6 Pt. Alternativ können Sie die Option Keine Linie auswählen, wenn Sie keine Umrandung wünschen.
                                                          • -
                                                          • Um die Konturfarbe zu ändern, klicken Sie auf das farbige Feld und wählen Sie die gewünschte Farbe aus.
                                                          • +
                                                          • Um die Strichstärke zu ändern, wählen Sie eine der verfügbaren Optionen im Listenmenü Größe aus. Die folgenden Optionen stehen Ihnen zur Verfügung: 0,5 Pt., 1 Pt., 1,5 Pt., 2,25 Pt., 3 Pt., 4,5 Pt., 6 Pt. Alternativ können Sie die Option Keine Linie auswählen, wenn Sie keine Umrandung wünschen.
                                                          • +
                                                          • Um die Konturfarbe zu ändern, klicken Sie auf das farbige Feld und wählen Sie die gewünschte Farbe aus.
                                                          • Um den Stil der Kontur zu ändern, wählen Sie die gewünschte Option aus der entsprechenden Dropdown-Liste aus (standardmäßig wird eine durchgezogene Linie verwendet, diese können Sie in eine der verfügbaren gestrichelten Linien ändern).
                                                          -

                                                          Wenden Sie einen Texteffekt an, indem Sie aus der Galerie mit den verfügbaren Vorlagen die gewünschte Formatierung auswählen. Sie können den Grad der Textverzerrung anpassen, indem Sie den rosafarbenen, rautenförmigen Griff in die gewünschte Position ziehen.

                                                          +

                                                          Wenden Sie einen Texteffekt an, indem Sie aus der Galerie mit den verfügbaren Vorlagen die gewünschte Formatierung auswählen. Sie können den Grad der Textverzerrung anpassen, indem Sie den rosafarbenen, rautenförmigen Ziehpunkt in die gewünschte Position ziehen.

                                                          Texteffekte

                                                          diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/LineSpacing.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/LineSpacing.htm index c8437d8a3..640c8b245 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/LineSpacing.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/LineSpacing.htm @@ -3,34 +3,46 @@ Zeilenabstand in Absätzen festlegen - + -
                                                          -
                                                          - -
                                                          -

                                                          Zeilenabstand in Absätzen festlegen

                                                          -

                                                          Der Dokumenteneditor ermöglicht Ihnen die Zeilenhöhe für die Textzeilen innerhalb des Absatzes sowie die Abstände zwischen den einzelnen Absätzen festzulegen.

                                                          -

                                                          Gehen Sie dazu wie folgt vor:

                                                          -
                                                            -
                                                          1. Postitionieren Sie den Cursor innerhalb des gewünschten Absatzes oder wählen Sie mehrere Absätze mit der Maus aus oder markieren Sie den gesamten Text mithilfe der Tastenkombination STRG+A.
                                                          2. -
                                                          3. Nutzen Sie die entsprechenden Felder in der rechten Seitenleiste, um das gewünschte Ergebnis zu erzielen:
                                                              -
                                                            • Zeilenabstand - Zeilenhöhe für die Textzeilen im Absatz festlegen Sie haben drei Optionen zur Auswahl: mindestens (mithilfe dieser Option wird der für das größte Schriftzeichen oder eine Grafik auf einer Zeile erforderliche Mindestabstand zwischen den Zeilen festgelegt), mehrfach (mithilfe dieser Option wird der Zeilenabstand in Zahlen größer als 1 festgelegt), genau (unabhängig von der Größe der eingegebenen Zeichen oder Objekte wird der voreingestellte Abstandswert genau eingehalten). Sie können den gewünschten Wert im Feld rechts angeben.
                                                            • -
                                                            • Absatzabstand - Auswählen wie groß die Absätze sind, die zwischen Textzeilen und Abständen angezeigt werden.
                                                                -
                                                              • Vor - Abstand vor dem Absatz.
                                                              • -
                                                              • Nach - Abstand nach dem Absatz.
                                                              • -
                                                              • Kein Abstand zwischen Absätzen gleicher Formatierung - aktivieren Sie dieses Feld, wenn Sie keinen zusätzlichen Abstand zwischen Absätzen gleicher Formatierung einfügen möchten.

                                                                Rechte Seitenleiste - Absatzeinstellungen

                                                                +
                                                                +
                                                                + +
                                                                +

                                                                Zeilenabstand in Absätzen festlegen

                                                                +

                                                                Im Dokumenteditor können Sie die Zeilenhöhe für die Textzeilen innerhalb des Absatzes sowie die Ränder zwischen dem aktuellen und dem vorhergehenden oder dem nachfolgenden Absatz festlegen.

                                                                +

                                                                Um das zu tun,

                                                                +
                                                                  +
                                                                1. setzen Sie den Zeiger in den gewünschten Absatz oder wählen Sie mehrere Absätze mit der Maus oder selektieren Sie den gesamten Text im Dokument aus, indem Sie die Tastenkombination STRG + A drücken.
                                                                2. +
                                                                3. + verwenden Sie die entsprechenden Felder in der rechten Seitenleiste, um die gewünschten Ergebnisse zu erzielen: +
                                                                    +
                                                                  • + Zeilenabstand - Legen Sie die Zeilenhöhe für die Textzeilen innerhalb des Absatzes fest. Sie können zwischen drei Optionen wählen:
                                                                      +
                                                                    • mindestens (legt den minimalen Zeilenabstand fest, der für die größte Schriftart oder Grafik auf der Zeile erforderlich ist),
                                                                    • +
                                                                    • mehrfach (legt den Zeilenabstand fest, der in Zahlen größer als 1 ausgedrückt werden kann),
                                                                    • +
                                                                    • genau (setzt fest Zeilenabstand). Den erforderlichen Wert können Sie im Feld rechts angeben. +
                                                                    +
                                                                  • +
                                                                  • + Absatzabstand - Legen Sie den Abstand zwischen den Absätzen fest.
                                                                      +
                                                                    • Vorher - Legen Sie den Platz vor dem Absatz fest.
                                                                    • +
                                                                    • Nachher - Legen Sie den Platz nach dem Absatz.
                                                                    • +
                                                                    • + Fügen Sie kein Intervall zwischen Absätzen desselben Stils hinzu. - Aktivieren Sie dieses Kontrollkästchen, falls Sie keinen Abstand zwischen Absätzen desselben Stils benötigen.

                                                                      Rechte Seitenleiste - Absatzeinstellungen

                                                                    -
                                                                  • -
                                                                  -
                                                                4. -
                                                                -

                                                                Um den aktuellen Zeilenabstand zu ändern, können Sie auch auf der Registerkarte Start das Symbol Zeilenabstand Zeilenabstand anklicken und den gewünschten Wert aus der Liste auswählen: 1,0; 1,15; 1,5; 2,0; 2,5; oder 3,0.

                                                                -
                                                                +
                                                              • +
                                                              +
                                                            • +
                                                          +

                                                          Diese Parameter finden Sie auch im Fenster Absatz - Erweiterte Einstellungen. Um das Fenster Absatz - Erweiterte Einstellungen zu öffnen, klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste auf den Text und wählen Sie im Menü die Option Erweiterte Absatzeinstellungen oder verwenden Sie die Option Erweiterte Einstellungen anzeigen in der rechten Seitenleiste. Wechseln Sie dann zur Registerkarte Einrückungen und Abstände und gehen Sie zum Abschnitt Abstand.

                                                          +

                                                          Absatz Erweiterte Einstellungen

                                                          +

                                                          Um den aktuellen Absatzzeilenabstand schnell zu ändern, können Sie auch das Symbol für den Absatzzeilenabstand Zeilenabstand verwenden. Wählen Sie auf der Registerkarte Startseite in der oberen Symbolleiste das Symbol für den Absatzwert aus der Liste aus: 1,0; 1,15; 1,5; 2,0; 2,5; oder 3,0.

                                                          +
                                                          \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/OpenCreateNew.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/OpenCreateNew.htm index 0efbec879..78838a5d3 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/OpenCreateNew.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/OpenCreateNew.htm @@ -14,19 +14,52 @@

                                                          Ein neues Dokument erstellen oder ein vorhandenes öffnen

                                                          -

                                                          Nachdem Sie die Arbeit an einem Dokument abgeschlossen haben, können Sie sofort zu einem vorhandenen Dokument übergehen, dass Sie kürzlich bearbeitet haben, ein neues Dokument erstellen oder die Liste mit den vorhandenen Dokumenten öffnen.

                                                          -

                                                          Erstellen eines neuen Dokuments:

                                                          -
                                                            -
                                                          1. Klicken Sie in der oberen Menüleiste auf die Registerkarte Datei.
                                                          2. -
                                                          3. Wählen Sie die Option Neues Dokument erstellen.
                                                          4. -
                                                          -

                                                          Öffnen eines kürzlich bearbeiteten Dokuments:

                                                          -
                                                            -
                                                          1. Klicken Sie in der oberen Menüleiste auf die Registerkarte Datei.
                                                          2. -
                                                          3. Wählen Sie die Option Zuletzt benutzte öffnen.
                                                          4. -
                                                          5. Wählen Sie das gewünschte Dokument aus der Liste mit den zuletzt bearbeiteten Dokumenten aus.
                                                          6. -
                                                          -

                                                          Um zu der Liste der vorhandenen Dokumenten zurückzukehren, klicken Sie rechts auf der Menüleiste des Editors auf Vorhandene Dokumente Vorhandene Dokumente. Alternativ können Sie in der oberen Menüleiste auf die Registerkarte Datei wechseln und die Option Vorhandene Dokumente auswählen.

                                                          - +
                                                          Ein neues Dokument erstellen:
                                                          +
                                                          +

                                                          Online-Editor

                                                          +
                                                            +
                                                          1. Klicken Sie in der oberen Menüleiste auf die Registerkarte Datei.
                                                          2. +
                                                          3. Wählen Sie die Option Neu erstellen.
                                                          4. +
                                                          +
                                                          +
                                                          +

                                                          Desktop-Editor

                                                          +
                                                            +
                                                          1. Wählen Sie im Hauptfenster des Programms das Menü Dokument im Abschnitt Neu erstellen der linken Seitenleiste aus - eine neue Datei wird in einer neuen Registerkarte geöffnet.
                                                          2. +
                                                          3. Wenn Sie alle gewünschten Änderungen durchgeführt haben, klicken Sie auf das Symbol Speichern Speichern in der oberen linken Ecke oder wechseln Sie in die Registerkarte Datei und wählen Sie das Menü Speichern als aus.
                                                          4. +
                                                          5. Wählen Sie im Fenster Dateiverwaltung den Speicherort, geben Sie den Namen an, wählen Sie das Format aus in dem Sie das Dokument speichern möchten (DOCX, Dokumentvorlage (DOTX), ODT, OTT, RTF, TXT, PDF oder PDFA) und klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche Speichern.
                                                          6. +
                                                          +
                                                          + +
                                                          +
                                                          Ein vorhandenes Dokument öffnen:
                                                          +

                                                          Desktop-Editor

                                                          +
                                                            +
                                                          1. Wählen Sie in der linken Seitenleiste im Hauptfenster des Programms den Menüpunkt Lokale Datei öffnen.
                                                          2. +
                                                          3. Wählen Sie im Fenster Dateiverwaltung das gewünschte Dokument aus und klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche Öffnen.
                                                          4. +
                                                          +

                                                          Sie können auch im Fenster Dateiverwaltung mit der rechten Maustaste auf das gewünschte Dokument klicken, die Option Öffnen mit auswählen und die gewünschte Anwendung aus dem Menü auswählen. Wenn die Office-Dokumentdateien mit der Anwendung verknüpft sind, können Sie Dokumente auch öffnen, indem Sie im Datei-Explorer-Fenster auf den Dateinamen doppelklicken.

                                                          +

                                                          Alle Verzeichnisse, auf die Sie mit dem Desktop-Editor zugegriffen haben, werden in der Liste Aktuelle Ordner angezeigt, um Ihnen einen schnellen Zugriff zu ermöglichen. Klicken Sie auf den gewünschten Ordner, um eine der darin gespeicherten Dateien auszuwählen.

                                                          +
                                                          + +
                                                          Öffnen eines kürzlich bearbeiteten Dokuments:
                                                          +
                                                          +

                                                          Online-Editor

                                                          +
                                                            +
                                                          1. Klicken Sie in der oberen Menüleiste auf die Registerkarte Datei.
                                                          2. +
                                                          3. Wählen Sie die Option Zuletzt verwendet....
                                                          4. +
                                                          5. Wählen Sie das gewünschte Dokument aus der Liste mit den zuletzt bearbeiteten Dokumenten aus.
                                                          6. +
                                                          +
                                                          +
                                                          +

                                                          Desktop-Editor

                                                          +
                                                            +
                                                          1. Wählen Sie in der linken Seitenleiste im Hauptfenster des Programms den Menüpunkt Aktuelle Dateien.
                                                          2. +
                                                          3. Wählen Sie das gewünschte Dokument aus der Liste mit den zuletzt bearbeiteten Dokumenten aus.
                                                          4. +
                                                          +
                                                          + +

                                                          Um den Ordner in dem die Datei gespeichert ist in der Online-Version in einem neuen Browser-Tab oder in der Desktop-Version im Fenster Datei-Explorer zu öffnen, klicken Sie auf der rechten Seite des Editor-Hauptmenüs auf das Symbol Dateispeicherort öffnen Dateispeicherort öffnen. Alternativ können Sie in der oberen Menüleiste auf die Registerkarte Datei wechseln und die Option Dateispeicherort öffnen auswählen.

                                                          + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/PageBreaks.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/PageBreaks.htm index e4a1aa374..c514fc143 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/PageBreaks.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/PageBreaks.htm @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ Seitenumbrüche einfügen - + @@ -14,24 +14,25 @@

                                                          Seitenumbrüche einfügen

                                                          -

                                                          Im Dokumenteneditor können Sie einen Seitenumbruch einfügen, um eine neue Seite zu beginnen und die Optionen der Seitennummerierung einzustellen.

                                                          -

                                                          Um an der aktuellen Cursorposition einen Seitenumbruch einzufügen, klicken Sie in der oberen Menüleiste auf das Symbol Umbrüche Umbrüche in den Registerkarten Einfügen oder Layout oder klicken Sie auf den Pfeil neben diesem Symbol und wählen Sie die Option Seitenumbruch einfügen aus dem Menü aus.

                                                          -

                                                          Einen Seitenumbruch vor einem ausgewählten Absatz einfügen (der Absatz beginnt erst am Anfang der neuen Seite):

                                                          +

                                                          Im Dokumenteditor können Sie einen Seitenumbruch hinzufügen, um eine neue Seite zu starten, eine leere Seite einzufügen und die Paginierungsoptionen anzupassen.

                                                          +

                                                          Um einen Seitenumbruch an der aktuellen Zeigerposition einzufügen, klicken Sie auf das Symbol Umbrüche Unterbrechungen auf der Registerkarte Einfügen oder Layout der oberen Symbolleiste oder klicken Sie auf den Pfeil neben diesem Symbol und wählen Sie im Menu die Option Seitenumbruch einfügen. Sie können auch die Tastenkombination Strg + Eingabetaste verwenden.

                                                          +

                                                          Um eine leere Seite einzufügen, klicken Sie auf das Symbol Leere Seite Leere Seite auf der Registerkarte Einfügen der oberen Symbolleiste. Dadurch werden zwei Seitenumbrüche eingefügt, wodurch eine leere Seite erstellt wird.

                                                          +

                                                          Um einen Seitenumbruch vor dem ausgewählten Absatz einzufügen, d. H. um diesen Absatz oben auf einer neuen Seite zu beginnen:

                                                            -
                                                          • Klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste und wählen Sie im Kontextmenü die Option Seitenumbruch oberhalb oder
                                                          • -
                                                          • klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste und wählen Sie im Kontextmenü die Option Absatz - Erweiterte Einstellungen im Menü aus oder nutzen Sie den Link Erweiterte Einstellungen anzeigen in der rechten Seitenleiste und aktivieren Sie im geöffneten Fenster Absatz - Erweiterte Einstellungen das Kästchen Seitenumbruch oberhalb.
                                                          • +
                                                          • Klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste und wählen Sie im Menü die Option Seitenumbruch vor oder
                                                          • +
                                                          • Klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste, wählen Sie im Menü die Option Absatz - Erweiterte Einstellungen oder verwenden Sie den Link Erweiterte Einstellungen anzeigen in der rechten Seitenleiste, und aktivieren Sie das Kontrollkästchen Seitenumbruch davor auf der Registerkarte Zeilen- und Seitenumbrüche des geöffneten Fensters Absatz - Erweiterte Einstellungen.
                                                          -

                                                          Zeilen zusammenhalten, so dass nur ganze Absätze auf die neue Seite verschoben werden (d.h. kein Seitenumbruch zwischen den Zeilen eines einzelnen Absatzes):

                                                          +

                                                          Um die Zeilen so zusammenzuhalten, dass nur ganze Absätze auf die neue Seite verschoben werden (d. H. Es gibt keinen Seitenumbruch zwischen den Zeilen innerhalb eines einzelnen Absatzes),

                                                            -
                                                          • Klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste und wählen Sie die Option Absatz zusammenhalten im Menü aus oder
                                                          • -
                                                          • klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste und wählen Sie die Option Absatz - Erweiterte Einstellungen oder nutzen Sie den Link Erweiterte Einstellungen anzeigen in der rechten Seitenleiste und aktivieren Sie das Feld Absatz zusammenhalten im geöffneten Fenster Absatz - Erweiterte Einstellungen.
                                                          • +
                                                          • Klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste und wählen Sie im Menü die Option Linien zusammenhalten oder
                                                          • +
                                                          • Klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste, wählen Sie im Menü die Option Erweiterte Absatzeinstellungen aus, oder verwenden Sie den Link Erweiterte Einstellungen anzeigen in der rechten Seitenleiste, und aktivieren Sie das Kontrollkästchen Absatz zusammenhalten unter Zeilen- und Seitenumbrüche im geöffneten Fenster Absatz - Erweiterte Einstellungen.
                                                          -

                                                          Im Fenster Absatz - Erweiterte Einstellungen gibt es noch zwei weitere Optionen für Seitenumbrüche:

                                                          +

                                                          Auf der Registerkarte Zeilen- und Seitenumbrüche des Fensters Absatz - Erweiterte Einstellungen können Sie zwei weitere Paginierungsoptionen festlegen:

                                                            -
                                                          • Nicht vom nächsten trennen - der gewählte und der nachfolgende Absatz werden zusammengehalten und der Umbruch erfolgt erst nach dem nächsten Absatz.
                                                          • -
                                                          • Absatzkontrolle - ist standardmäßig ausgewählt und wird genutzt, um zu vermeiden, dass eine einzelne Zeile aus einem Abschnitt (die erste oder die letzte) an den Anfang oder das Ende einer anderen Seite verschoben werden.
                                                          • +
                                                          • Mit dem nächsten zusammen - wird verwendet, um einen Seitenumbruch zwischen dem ausgewählten und dem nächsten Absatz zu verhindern.
                                                          • +
                                                          • Verwaiste Steuerung - ist standardmäßig ausgewählt und wird verwendet, um zu verhindern, dass eine einzelne Zeile des Absatzes (die erste oder letzte) oben oder unten auf der Seite angezeigt wird.
                                                          -

                                                          Absatz - Erweiterte Einstellungen: Einzüge & Position

                                                          +

                                                          Absatz - Erweiterte Einstellungen: Einzüge & Position

                                                          \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/ParagraphIndents.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/ParagraphIndents.htm index ed90b21c9..9f4bb8fb0 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/ParagraphIndents.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/ParagraphIndents.htm @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ Absatzeinzüge ändern - + @@ -17,9 +17,13 @@

                                                          Im Document Editor können Sie den Einzug der ersten Zeile vom linken Seitenrand sowie die Absatzeinzüge von links und rechts einstellen.

                                                          Ändern der Absatzeinzüge:

                                                            -
                                                          1. Postitionieren Sie den Cursor innerhalb des gewünschten Absatzes oder wählen Sie mehrere Absätze mit der Maus aus oder markieren Sie den gesamten Text mithilfe der Tastenkombination Strg+A.
                                                          2. -
                                                          3. Klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste und wählen Sie im Kontextmenü die Option Erweiterte Absatzeinstellungen aus oder nutzen Sie die Verknüpfung Erweiterte Einstellungen anzeigen in der rechten Seitenleiste.
                                                          4. -
                                                          5. Legen Sie nun unter Absatz - Erweiterte Einstellungen den gewünschten Einzug für die erste Zeile fest sowie den Abstand zum linken und rechten Seitenrand.
                                                          6. +
                                                          7. Postitionieren Sie den Zeiger innerhalb des gewünschten Absatzes oder wählen Sie mehrere Absätze mit der Maus aus oder markieren Sie den gesamten Text mithilfe der Tastenkombination Strg+A.
                                                          8. +
                                                          9. Klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste und wählen Sie im Kontextmenü die Option Absatz - Erweiterte Einstellungen aus oder nutzen Sie die Verknüpfung Erweiterte Einstellungen anzeigen in der rechten Seitenleiste.
                                                          10. +
                                                          11. Im Fenster Absatz - Erweiterte Einstellungen wechseln Sie zu Einzug & Abstand und setzen Sie die notwendigen Parameter für die Einzug-Sektion:
                                                            1. +
                                                            2. Links - setzen Sie den Paragraphen-Versatz von der linken Seite mit einem numerischen Wert.
                                                            3. +
                                                            4. Rechts - setzen Sie den Paragraphen-Versatz von der rechten Seite mit einem numerishcen Wert.
                                                            5. +
                                                            6. Spezial - setzen Sie den Einzug der ersten Linie des Paragraphs: Selektieren Sie den entsprechenden Menueintrag: ((Nichts), Erste Linie, Hängend) und wechseln Sie den Standard numerischen Wert spezifisch fuer die erste Linie oder Hängend.
                                                            7. +
                                                          12. Klicken Sie auf OK.

                                                            Absatz - Erweiterte Einstellungen: Einzüge & Position

                                                          diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm index 2c323bc1a..3605cad92 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm @@ -14,28 +14,48 @@

                                                          Dokument speichern/runterladen/drucken

                                                          -

                                                          Standardmäßig speichert der Dokumenteneditor Ihre Datei während der Bearbeitung automatisch alle 2 Sekunden, um Datenverluste im Falle eines unerwarteten Programmabschlusses zu verhindern. Wenn Sie die Datei im Schnellmodus bearbeiten, fordert der Timer 25 Mal pro Sekunde Aktualisierungen an und speichert vorgenommene Änderungen. Wenn Sie die Datei im Modus Strikt bearbeiten, werden Änderungen automatisch alle 10 Minuten gespeichert. Sie können den bevorzugten Co-Bearbeitungs-Modus nach Belieben auswählen oder die Funktion AutoSave auf der Seite Erweiterte Einstellungen deaktivieren.

                                                          -

                                                          Aktuelles Dokument manuell speichern:

                                                          +

                                                          Speichern

                                                          +

                                                          Standardmäßig speichert der Online-Dokumenteneditor Ihre Datei während der Bearbeitung automatisch alle 2 Sekunden, um Datenverluste im Falle eines unerwarteten Progammabsturzes zu verhindern. Wenn Sie die Datei im Schnellmodus co-editieren, fordert der Timer 25 Mal pro Sekunde Aktualisierungen an und speichert vorgenommene Änderungen. Wenn Sie die Datei im Modus Strikt co-editieren, werden Änderungen automatisch alle 10 Minuten gespeichert. Sie können den bevorzugten Co-Modus nach Belieben auswählen oder die Funktion AutoSpeichern auf der Seite Erweiterte Einstellungen deaktivieren.

                                                          +

                                                          Aktuelles Dokument manuell im aktuellen Format im aktuellen Verzeichnis speichern:

                                                            -
                                                          • Klicken Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf das Symbol Speichern Speichern oder
                                                          • -
                                                          • nutzen Sie die Tastenkombination STRG+S oder
                                                          • -
                                                          • wechseln Sie die Registerkarte Datei und wählen Sie die Option Speichern.
                                                          • +
                                                          • Verwenden Sie das Symbol Speichern Speichern im linken Bereich der Kopfzeile des Editors oder
                                                          • +
                                                          • drücken Sie die Tasten STRG+S oder
                                                          • +
                                                          • wechseln Sie in der oberen Menüleiste in die Registerkarte Datei und wählen Sie die Option Speichern.
                                                          +

                                                          Hinweis: um Datenverluste durch ein unerwartetes Schließen des Programms zu verhindern, können Sie in der Desktop-Version die Option AutoWiederherstellen auf der Seite Erweiterte Einstellungen aktivieren.

                                                          +
                                                          +

                                                          In der Desktop-Version können Sie das Dokument unter einem anderen Namen, an einem neuen Speicherort oder in einem anderen Format speichern.

                                                          +
                                                            +
                                                          1. Klicken Sie in der oberen Menüleiste auf die Registerkarte Datei.
                                                          2. +
                                                          3. Wählen Sie die Option Speichern als....
                                                          4. +
                                                          5. Wählen Sie das gewünschte Format aus: DOCX, ODT, RTF, TXT, PDF, PDFA. Sie können die Option Dokumentenvorlage (DOTX oder OTT) auswählen.
                                                          6. +
                                                          +
                                                          -

                                                          Aktuelles Dokument auf dem PC speichern

                                                          +

                                                          Download

                                                          +

                                                          In der Online-Version können Sie das daraus resultierende Dokument auf der Festplatte Ihres Computers speichern.

                                                          1. Klicken Sie in der oberen Menüleiste auf die Registerkarte Datei.
                                                          2. -
                                                          3. Wählen Sie die Option Herunterladen als.
                                                          4. -
                                                          5. Wählen Sie nach Bedarf eines der verfügbaren Formate aus: DOCX, PDF, TXT, ODT, RTF, HTML.
                                                          6. +
                                                          7. Wählen Sie die Option Herunterladen als....
                                                          8. +
                                                          9. Wählen Sie das gewünschte Format aus: DOCX, PDF, ODT, TXT, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, HTML.
                                                          +

                                                          Kopie speichern

                                                          +

                                                          In der Online-Version können Sie die eine Kopie der Datei in Ihrem Portal speichern.

                                                          +
                                                            +
                                                          1. Klicken Sie in der oberen Menüleiste auf die Registerkarte Datei.
                                                          2. +
                                                          3. Wählen Sie die Option Kopie Speichern als....
                                                          4. +
                                                          5. Wählen Sie das gewünschte Format aus: DOCX, PDF, ODT, TXT, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, HTML.
                                                          6. +
                                                          7. Wählen Sie den gewünschten Speicherort auf dem Portal aus und klicken Sie Speichern.
                                                          8. +
                                                          +

                                                          Drucken

                                                          Aktuelles Dokument drucken

                                                            -
                                                          • Klicken Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf das Symbol Drucken Drucken oder
                                                          • +
                                                          • Klicken Sie auf das Symbol Drucken Drucken im linken Bereich der Kopfzeile des Editors oder
                                                          • nutzen Sie die Tastenkombination STRG+P oder
                                                          • wechseln Sie in der oberen Menüleiste in die Registerkarte Datei und wählen Sie die Option Drucken.
                                                          -

                                                          Danach wird basierend auf dem Dokument eine PDF-Datei erstellt. Diese können Sie öffnen und drucken oder auf der Festplatte des Computers oder einem Wechseldatenträger speichern und später drucken.

                                                          +

                                                          In der Desktop-Version wird die Datei direkt gedruckt.In der Online-Version wird basierend auf dem Dokument eine PDF-Datei erstellt. Diese können Sie öffnen und drucken oder auf der Festplatte des Computers oder einem Wechseldatenträger speichern und später drucken. Einige Browser (z. B. Chrome und Opera) unterstützen Direktdruck.

                                                          \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/SetPageParameters.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/SetPageParameters.htm index a2612a7ba..1654f33fe 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/SetPageParameters.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/SetPageParameters.htm @@ -3,21 +3,21 @@ Seitenparameter festlegen - + -
                                                          -
                                                          - -
                                                          -

                                                          Seitenparameter festlegen

                                                          -

                                                          Um das Seitenlayout zu ändern, d. H. Seitenausrichtung und Seitengröße festzulegen, die Ränder anzupassen und Spalten einzufügen, verwenden Sie die entsprechenden Symbole auf der Registerkarte Layout der oberen Symbolleiste.

                                                          +
                                                          +
                                                          + +
                                                          +

                                                          Seitenparameter festlegen

                                                          +

                                                          Um das Seitenlayout zu ändern, d. H. Seitenausrichtung und Seitengröße festzulegen, die Ränder anzupassen und Spalten einzufügen, verwenden Sie die entsprechenden Symbole auf der Registerkarte Layout der oberen Symbolleiste.

                                                          Hinweis: alle festgelegten Parameter werden auf das gesamte Dokument angewendet. Wie Sie für einzelnen Teile Ihres Dokuments unterschiedliche Seitenränder, Ausrichtungen, Größen oder Spaltenanzahlen festlegen, lesen Sie bitte auf dieser Seite nach.

                                                          -

                                                          Seitenausrichtung

                                                          -

                                                          Die aktuelle Seitenausrichtung ändern Sie mit einem Klick auf das Symbol Ausrichtung Seitenausrichtung. Die Standardeinstellung ist Hochformat. Diese kann jedoch auf Querformat gewechselt werden.

                                                          +

                                                          Seitenausrichtung

                                                          +

                                                          Die aktuelle Seitenausrichtung ändern Sie mit einem Klick auf das Symbol Ausrichtung Seitenausrichtung. Die Standardeinstellung ist Hochformat. Diese kann auf das Querformat umgewechselt werden.

                                                          Seitengröße

                                                          Das A4-Standardformat ändern Sie, indem Sie das Symbol Größe Größe anklicken und das gewünschte Format aus der Liste auswählen. Die verfügbaren Formate sind:

                                                            @@ -35,11 +35,17 @@
                                                          • Umschlag Choukei 3 (11,99 cm x 23,49 cm)
                                                          • Super B/A3 (33,02 cm x 48,25 cm)
                                                          -

                                                          Sie können die Seitengröße auch individuell festlegen, wählen Sie dazu die Option Benutzerdefinierte Seitengröße aus der Liste aus. Das Fenster Seitengröße öffnet sich und Sie können die gewünschte Voreinstellung auswählen (US Letter, US Legal, A4, A5, B5, Umschlag #10, Umschlag DL, Tabloid, A3, Tabloid Übergröße, ROC 16K, Umschlag Choukei 3, Super B/A3, A0, A1, A2, A6) oder benutzerdefinierte Werte für Breite und Höhe festlegen. Geben Sie Ihre gewünschten Werte in die Eingabefelder ein oder passen Sie die vorhandenen Werte über die Pfeile an. Wenn Sie fertig sind, klicken Sie auf OK, um die Änderungen anzuwenden.

                                                          +

                                                          Sie können die Seitengröße auch individuell festlegen, in dem Sie die Option Benutzerdefinierte Seitengröße aus der Liste auswählen. Das Fenster Seitengröße öffnet sich und Sie können die gewünschte Voreinstellung auswählen (US Letter, US Legal, A4, A5, B5, Umschlag #10, Umschlag DL, Tabloid, A3, Tabloid Übergröße, ROC 16K, Umschlag Choukei 3, Super B/A3, A0, A1, A2, A6) oder benutzerdefinierte Werte für Breite und Höhe festlegen. Geben Sie Ihre gewünschten Werte in die Eingabefelder ein oder passen Sie die vorhandenen Werte über die Pfeile an. Wenn Sie fertig sind, klicken Sie auf OK, um die Änderungen anzuwenden.

                                                          Benutzerdefinierte Seitengröße

                                                          Seitenränder

                                                          -

                                                          Ändern Sie die Standardränder, also den Abstand zwischen den linken, rechten, oberen und unteren Seitenkanten und dem Absatztext, klicken Sie dazu auf das Symbol Ränder Ränder und wählen Sie eine der verfügbaren Voreinstellungen aus: Normal, US Normal, Schmal, Mittel, Breit. Sie können auch die Option Benutzerdefinierte Seitenränder verwenden, um Ihre eigenen Werte im geöffneten Fenster Ränder einzugeben. Geben Sie Ihre gewünschten Werte für die Oberen, Unteren, Linken und Rechten Seitenränder in die Eingabefelder ein oder passen Sie die vorhandenen Werte über die Pfeile an. Wenn Sie fertig sind, klicken Sie auf OK. Die benutzerdefinierten Ränder werden auf das aktuelle Dokument angewendet. In der Liste Ränder Ränder wird die Option letzte benutzerdefinierte Einstellung mit den entsprechenden Parametern angezeigt, so dass Sie diese auf alle gewünschten anderen Dokumente anwenden können.

                                                          +

                                                          Ändern Sie die Standardränder, d.H. den Abstand zwischen den linken, rechten, oberen und unteren Seitenkanten und dem Absatztext, in dem Sie auf das Symbol Ränder Ränder klicken und Sie eine der verfügbaren Voreinstellungen auswählen: Normal, US Normal, Schmal, Mittel, Breit. Sie können auch die Option Benutzerdefinierte Seitenränder verwenden, um Ihre eigenen Werte im geöffneten Fenster Ränder einzugeben. Geben Sie Ihre gewünschten Werte für die Oberen, Unteren, Linken und Rechten Seitenränder in die Eingabefelder ein oder passen Sie die vorhandenen Werte über die Pfeile an. Wenn Sie fertig sind, klicken Sie auf OK. Die benutzerdefinierten Ränder werden auf das aktuelle Dokument angewendet. In der Liste Ränder Ränder wird die Option letzte benutzerdefinierte Einstellung mit den entsprechenden Parametern angezeigt, so dass Sie diese auf alle gewünschten anderen Dokumente anwenden können.

                                                          Benutzerdefinierte Seitenränder

                                                          +

                                                          Gutterposition wird benutzt um zusätzlichen Raum auf der linken oder oberen Seite des Dokumentes zu erstellen. Die Gutteroption kann sehr hilfreich sein um beim Buchbinden zu vermeiden das der Text überlegt wird. Im Fenster fuer Ränder geben Sie die notwendige Gutterposition in die Eingabefelder ein und wählen Sie aus wo diese plaziert werden sollen.

                                                          +

                                                          Hinweis: Die Gutterpositionfunktion kann nicht benutzt werden, wenn die Option Spiegelränder angeschaltet ist.

                                                          +

                                                          In der Auswahl ‘Meherer Seiten’, wählen Sie die Spiegelränderoption aus, um die gegenüberliegenden Seiten eines doppelseitigen Dokumentes anzustellen. Mit dieser Option ausgewählt, Linke und Rechte Ränder wechseln zu Inneren und Äusseren Rändern.

                                                          +

                                                          In der Auswahl ‘Orientierung’ wählen Sie zwischen Hoch- oder Querformat aus.

                                                          +

                                                          Alle angewendeten Änderungen werden in dem Vorschaufenster angezeigt.

                                                          +

                                                          Wenn Sie fertig sind, selektieren Sie OK. Die Benutzerdefinierten Ränder werden auf das aktuelle Dokument angewendet die ‘letzte Spezial’-Option mit den erstellten Parametern wird in der Ränderliste Ränder angezeigt, so das diese auch für andere Dokumente verwendet werden kann.

                                                          Sie können die Seitenränder auch manuell ändern, indem Sie die Ränder zwischen den grauen und weißen Bereichen der Lineale verschieben (die grauen Bereiche der Lineale weisen auf Seitenränder hin):

                                                          Seitenränder anpassen

                                                          Spalten

                                                          @@ -52,11 +58,11 @@

                                                        Wenn Sie die Spalteneinstellungen anpassen wollen, wählen Sie die Option Benutzerdefinierte Spalten aus der Liste aus. Das Fenster Spalten öffnet sich und Sie können die gewünschte Spaltenanzahl und den Abstand zwischen den Spalten festlegen (es ist möglich bis zu 12 Spalten einzufügen). Geben Sie Ihre gewünschten Werte in die Eingabefelder ein oder passen Sie die vorhandenen Werte über die Pfeile an. Aktivieren Sie das Kontrollkästchen Spaltentrennung, um eine vertikale Linie zwischen den Spalten einzufügen. Wenn Sie fertig sind, klicken Sie auf OK, um die Änderungen anzuwenden.

                                                        Benutzerdefinierte Spalten

                                                        -

                                                        Wenn Sie genau festlegen wollen, wo eine neue Spalte beginnt, positionieren Sie den Cursor vor dem Text, den Sie in eine neue Spalte verschieben wollen, klicken Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf das Symbol Umbrüche Umbrüche und wählen Sie die Option Spaltenumbruch einfügen. Der Text wird in die nächste Spalte verschoben.

                                                        +

                                                        Wenn Sie genau festlegen wollen, wo eine neue Spalte beginnt, positionieren Sie den Zeiger vor dem Text, den Sie in eine neue Spalte verschieben wollen, klicken Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf das Symbol Umbrüche Umbrüche und wählen Sie die Option Spaltenumbruch einfügen. Der Text wird in die nächste Spalte verschoben.

                                                        Spaltenumbrüche werden in Ihrem Dokument durch eine gepunktete Linie angezeigt: Spaltenumbruch. Wenn die eingefügten Spaltenumbrüche nicht angezeigt werden, klicken Sie in der Registerkarte Start auf das SymbolFormatierungssymbole. Um einen Spaltenumbruch zu entfernen, wählen Sie diesen mit der Maus aus und drücken Sie die Taste ENTF.

                                                        Um die Spaltenbreite und den Abstand manuell zu ändern, können Sie das horizontale Lineal verwenden.

                                                        Spaltenabstand

                                                        -

                                                        Um Spalten zu entfernen und zu einem normalen einspaltigen Layout zurückzukehren, klicken Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf das Symbol Spalten Spalten und wählen Sie die Option Eine Eine Spalte aus der angezeigten Liste aus.

                                                        - +

                                                        Um Spalten zu entfernen und zu einem normalen einspaltigen Layout zurückzukehren, klicken Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf das Symbol Spalten Spalten und wählen Sie die Option Eine Eine Spalte aus der angezeigten Liste aus.

                                                        + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/UseMailMerge.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/UseMailMerge.htm index 5811d3923..f52c7ae91 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/UseMailMerge.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/UseMailMerge.htm @@ -14,14 +14,14 @@

                                                        Seriendruck verwenden

                                                        -

                                                        Hinweis: Diese Option ist nur in der bezahlten Version verfügbar.

                                                        +

                                                        Hinweis: diese Option ist nur in der Online-Version verfügbar.

                                                        Mit der Funktion Seriendruck ist es möglich eine Reihe von Dokumenten zu erstellen, die einen gemeinsamen Inhalt aus einem Textdokument sowie einige individuelle Komponenten (Variablen, wie Namen, Begrüßungen usw.) aus einer Tabelle (z. B. eine Kundenliste) kombinieren. Das kann sehr nützlich sein, um eine Vielzahl von personalisierten Briefen zu erstellen und an Empfänger zu senden.

                                                        Die Funktion Seriendruck verwenden.

                                                        1. Erstellen Sie ein Datenquelle und laden Sie diese in das Hauptdokument.
                                                          1. Bei einer für den Seriendruck verwendeten Datenquelle muss es sich um eine .xlsx-Tabelle handeln, die in Ihrem Portal gespeichert ist. Öffnen Sie eine vorhandene Tabelle oder erstellen Sie eine neue und stellen Sie sicher, dass diese die folgenden Anforderungen erfüllt:

                                                            Die Tabelle muss eine Kopfzeile mit Spaltentiteln enthalten, da Werte in der ersten Zelle jeder Spalte die Felder für die Zusammenführung bestimmen (Variablen, die Sie in den Text einfügen können). Jede Spalte sollte eine Reihe von tatsächlichen Werten für eine Variable enthalten. Jede Zeile in der Tabelle sollte einem separaten Datensatz entsprechen (einem Satz von Werten, der zu einem bestimmten Empfänger gehört). Während der Zusammenführung wird für jeden Datensatz eine Kopie des Hauptdokuments erstellt und jedes in den Haupttext eingefügte Zusammenführungsfeld wird durch einen tatsächlichen Wert aus der entsprechenden Spalte ersetzt. Wenn Sie Ergebnisse per E-Mail senden möchten, muss die Tabelle auch eine Spalte mit den E-Mail-Adressen der Empfänger enthalten.

                                                          2. -
                                                          3. Öffnen Sie ein vorhandenes Dokument oder erstellen Sie ein neues. Dieses Dokument muss den Haupttext enthalten, der für jede Version des Seriendruckdokuments identisch ist. Klicken Sie auf der oberen Symbolleiste, unter der Registerkarte Start auf das Symbol Seriendruck Seriendruck.
                                                          4. +
                                                          5. Öffnen Sie ein vorhandenes Dokument oder erstellen Sie ein neues. Dieses Dokument muss den Haupttext enthalten, der für jede Version des Seriendruckdokuments identisch ist. Klicken Sie auf das Symbol Seriendruck Seriendruck auf der oberen Symbolleiste, in der Registerkarte Start.
                                                          6. Das Fenster Datenquelle auswählen wird geöffnet. Es wird eine Liste all Ihrer .xlsx-Tabellen angezeigt, die im Abschnitt Meine Dokumente gespeichert sind. Um zwischen anderen Modulabschnitten zu wechseln, verwenden Sie das Menü im linken Teil des Fensters. Wählen Sie die gewünschte Datei aus und klicken Sie auf OK.

                                                          Sobald die Datenquelle geladen ist, wird die Registerkarte Einstellungen für das Zusammenführen in der rechten Seitenleiste angezeigt.

                                                          @@ -32,7 +32,7 @@
                                                        2. Hier können Sie bei Bedarf neue Informationen hinzufügen bzw. vorhandene Daten bearbeiten oder löschen. Um das Arbeiten mit Daten zu vereinfachen, können Sie die Symbole oben im Fenster verwenden:
                                                          • Kopieren und Einfügen - zum Kopieren und Einfügen der kopierten Daten.
                                                          • -
                                                          • Rückgängig machen und Wiederholen - um Aktionen rückgängig zu machen und zu wiederholen.
                                                          • +
                                                          • Rückgängig machen und Wiederholen - um Aktionen rückgängig zu machen und zu wiederholen.
                                                          • Aufsteigend sortieren und Absteigend sortieren - um Ihre Daten in einem Zellenbereich in aufsteigender oder absteigender Reihenfolge zu sortieren.
                                                          • Filter - um den Filter für den zuvor ausgewählten Zellenbereich zu aktivieren oder den aktuellen Filter zu entfernen.
                                                          • Filter löschen - um alle angewendeten Filterparameter zu löschen.

                                                            Hinweis: Weitere Informationen zur Verwendung des Filters finden Sie im Abschnitt Sortieren und Filtern von Daten im Hilfemenü des Tabelleneditors.

                                                            @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@
                                                          -
                                                        • Um ein eingefügtes Feld zu löschen, deaktivieren sie den Modus Ergebnisvorschau, wählen Sie das entsprechende Feld mit der Maus aus und drücken Sie die Taste Entfernen auf der Tastatur.
                                                        • +
                                                        • Um ein eingefügtes Feld zu löschen, deaktivieren sie den Modus Ergebnisvorschau, wählen Sie das entsprechende Feld mit der Maus aus und drücken Sie die Taste Entf auf der Tastatur.
                                                        • Um ein eingefügtes Feld zu ersetzen, deaktivieren sie den Modus Ergebnisvorschau, wählen Sie das entsprechende Feld mit der Maus aus, klicken Sie in der rechten Seitenleiste auf die Schaltfläche Seriendruckfeld einfügen und wählen Sie ein neues Feld aus der Liste aus.
                                                        @@ -62,14 +62,14 @@
                                                        • PDF - um ein einzelnes Dokument im PDF-Format zu erstellen, das alle zusammengeführten Kopien enthält, damit Sie diese später drucken können
                                                        • DOCX - um ein einzelnes Dokument im DOCX-Format zu erstellen, das alle zusammengeführten Kopien enthält, damit Sie diese später bearbeiten können
                                                        • -
                                                        • E-Mail - um die Ergebnisse als E-Mail an die Empfänger zu senden

                                                          Note: Die E-Mail-Adressen der Empfänger müssen in der geladenen Datenquelle angegeben werden und Sie müssen mindestens ein E-Mail-Konto im Mail-Modul in Ihrem Portal hinterlegt haben.

                                                          +
                                                        • E-Mail - um die Ergebnisse als E-Mail an die Empfänger zu senden

                                                          Hiweis: Die E-Mail-Adressen der Empfänger müssen in der geladenen Datenquelle angegeben werden und Sie müssen mindestens ein E-Mail-Konto im Mail-Modul in Ihrem Portal hinterlegt haben.

                                                      • Wählen Sie die Datensätze aus, auf die Sie die Zusammenführung anwenden möchten:
                                                        • Alle Datensätze - (diese Option ist standardmäßig ausgewählt) - um zusammengeführte Dokumente für alle Datensätze aus der geladenen Datenquelle zu erstellen
                                                        • Aktueller Datensatz - zum Erstellen eines zusammengeführten Dokuments für den aktuell angezeigten Datensatz
                                                        • -
                                                        • Von... Bis - um ein zusammengeführtes Dokument für eine Reihe von Datensätzen zu erstellen (in diesem Fall müssen Sie zwei Werte angeben: die Werte für den ersten und den letzten Datensatz im gewünschten Bereich)

                                                          Note: Es können maximal 100 Empfänger angegeben werden. Wenn Sie mehr als 100 Empfänger in Ihrer Datenquelle haben, führen Sie den Seriendruck schrittweise aus: Geben Sie die Werte von 1 bis 100 ein, warten Sie, bis der Serienbriefprozess abgeschlossen ist, und wiederholen Sie den Vorgang mit den Werten von 101 bis N.

                                                          +
                                                        • Von... Bis - um ein zusammengeführtes Dokument für eine Reihe von Datensätzen zu erstellen (in diesem Fall müssen Sie zwei Werte angeben: die Werte für den ersten und den letzten Datensatz im gewünschten Bereich)

                                                          Hinweis: Es können maximal 100 Empfänger angegeben werden. Wenn Sie mehr als 100 Empfänger in Ihrer Datenquelle haben, führen Sie den Seriendruck schrittweise aus: Geben Sie die Werte von 1 bis 100 ein, warten Sie, bis der Serienbriefprozess abgeschlossen ist, und wiederholen Sie den Vorgang mit den Werten von 101 bis N.

                                                      • diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/ViewDocInfo.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/ViewDocInfo.htm index 40d75006a..58728b08e 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/ViewDocInfo.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/UsageInstructions/ViewDocInfo.htm @@ -16,17 +16,19 @@

                                                        Dokumenteigenschaften anzeigen

                                                        Um detaillierte Informationen über das aktuelle Dokument einzusehen, wechseln Sie in die Registerkarte Datei und wählen Sie die Option Dokumenteigenschaften....

                                                        Allgemeine Eigenschaften

                                                        -

                                                        Die allgemeinen Dokumenteigenschaften beinhalten den Titel, Autor, Speicherort, das Erstelldatum und die folgenden Statistiken: Anzahl der Seiten, Absätze, Wörter, Zeichen, Buchstaben (mit Leerzeichen).

                                                        +

                                                        Die Dokumenteigenschaften beinhalten den Titel, die Anwendung mit der das Dokument erstellt wurde und die folgenden Statistiken: Anzahl der Seiten, Absätze, Wörter, Zeichen, Zeichen (mit Leerzeichen). In der Online-Version werden zusätzlich die folgenden Informationen angezeigt: Autor, Ort, Erstellungsdatum.

                                                        Hinweis: Sie können den Namen des Dokuments direkt über die Oberfläche des Editors ändern. Klicken Sie dazu in der oberen Menüleiste auf die Registerkarte Datei und wählen Sie die Option Umbenennen..., geben Sie den neuen Dateinamen an und klicken Sie auf OK.

                                                        Zugriffsrechte

                                                        +

                                                        In der Online-Version können Sie die Informationen zu Berechtigungen für die in der Cloud gespeicherten Dateien einsehen.

                                                        Hinweis: Diese Option steht im schreibgeschützten Modus nicht zur Verfügung.

                                                        Um einzusehen, wer das Recht hat, das Dokument anzuzeigen oder zu bearbeiten, wählen Sie die Option Zugriffsrechte... in der linken Seitenleiste.

                                                        Sie können die aktuell ausgewählten Zugriffsrechte auch ändern, klicken Sie dazu im Abschnitt Personen mit Berechtigungen auf die Schaltfläche Zugriffsrechte ändern.

                                                        Versionsverlauf

                                                        -

                                                        Hinweis: Diese Option steht für kostenlose Konten und im schreibgeschützten Modus nicht zur Verfügung.

                                                        +

                                                        In der Online-Version können Sie den Versionsverlauf für die in der Cloud gespeicherten Dateien einsehen.

                                                        +

                                                        Hinweis: Diese Option steht im schreibgeschützten Modus nicht zur Verfügung.

                                                        Um alle Änderungen an diesem Dokument anzuzeigen, wählen Sie die Option Versionsverlauf in der linken Seitenleiste. Sie können den Versionsverlauf auch über das Symbol Versionsverlauf Versionsverlauf in der Registerkarte Zusammenarbeit öffnen. Sie sehen eine Liste mit allen Dokumentversionen (Hauptänderungen) und Revisionen (geringfügige Änderungen), unter Angabe aller jeweiligen Autoren sowie Erstellungsdatum und -zeit. Für Dokumentversionen wird auch die Versionsnummer angegeben (z.B. Ver. 2). Für eine detaillierte Anzeige der jeweiligen Änderungen in jeder einzelnen Version/Revision, können Sie die gewünschte Version anzeigen, indem Sie in der linken Seitenleiste darauf klicken. Die vom Autor der Version/Revision vorgenommenen Änderungen sind mit der Farbe markiert, die neben dem Autorennamen in der linken Seitenleiste angezeigt wird. Über den unterhalb der gewählten Version/Revision angezeigten Link Wiederherstellen, gelangen Sie in die jeweilige Version.

                                                        Versionsverlauf

                                                        Um zur aktuellen Version des Dokuments zurückzukehren, klicken Sie oben in der Liste mit Versionen auf Verlauf schließen.

                                                        diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/editor.css b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/editor.css index 465b9fbe1..cbedb7bef 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/editor.css +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/editor.css @@ -149,6 +149,7 @@ text-decoration: none; .search-field { display: block; float: right; + margin-top: 10px; } .search-field input { width: 250px; diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/blankpage.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/blankpage.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..11180c591 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/blankpage.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/bookmark.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/bookmark.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7339d3f35 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/bookmark.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/bookmark_window.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/bookmark_window.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ce2a17a77 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/bookmark_window.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/bookmark_window2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/bookmark_window2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..798b3fbc8 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/bookmark_window2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/bulletedlistsettings.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/bulletedlistsettings.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d45645a84 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/bulletedlistsettings.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/bullets.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/bullets.png index 386c7011c..244784ff2 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/bullets.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/bullets.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/ccsettingswindow.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/ccsettingswindow.png index 6ab4c4dc2..8e01e3345 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/ccsettingswindow.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/ccsettingswindow.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/changecolorscheme.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/changecolorscheme.png index f9464e5f4..9ef44daaf 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/changecolorscheme.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/changecolorscheme.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/custommargins.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/custommargins.png index fd4a32dcb..91a7fe920 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/custommargins.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/custommargins.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/custompagesize.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/custompagesize.png index ff053d425..b52c4f56f 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/custompagesize.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/custompagesize.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/customtable.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/customtable.png index ff3cd595f..7acedf1e8 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/customtable.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/customtable.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/distributehorizontally.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/distributehorizontally.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8e33a0c28 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/distributehorizontally.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/distributevertically.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/distributevertically.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1e5f39011 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/distributevertically.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/document_language_window.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/document_language_window.png index 476c603a4..ce1d5035e 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/document_language_window.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/document_language_window.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/eraser_tool.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/eraser_tool.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a626da579 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/eraser_tool.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/fill_color.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/fill_color.png index f7bb71c1d..35606380f 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/fill_color.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/fill_color.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/fill_gradient.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/fill_gradient.png index 88e73bb97..32dae36fa 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/fill_gradient.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/fill_gradient.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/fill_pattern.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/fill_pattern.png index 272831544..3772ce900 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/fill_pattern.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/fill_pattern.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/fill_picture.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/fill_picture.png index 4b8a257ee..f2acb4039 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/fill_picture.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/fill_picture.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/fliplefttoright.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/fliplefttoright.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b6babc560 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/fliplefttoright.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/flipupsidedown.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/flipupsidedown.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b8ce45f8f Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/flipupsidedown.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/fontcolor.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/fontcolor.png index 611a90afa..73ee99c17 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/fontcolor.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/fontcolor.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/formula_settings.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/formula_settings.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9d2669a9d Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/formula_settings.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/headerfooter.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/headerfooter.png index 70e89b5bb..550a98117 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/headerfooter.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/headerfooter.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/hyperlinkwindow.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/hyperlinkwindow.png index 0460b3aba..639ae6d59 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/hyperlinkwindow.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/hyperlinkwindow.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/hyperlinkwindow1.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/hyperlinkwindow1.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..27d3a16cb Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/hyperlinkwindow1.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/image.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/image.png index a94916449..c692a2074 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/image.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/image.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/image_properties.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/image_properties.png index 1c805c775..38bfef5a9 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/image_properties.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/image_properties.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/image_properties_1.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/image_properties_1.png index a7a267788..33893214a 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/image_properties_1.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/image_properties_1.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/image_properties_2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/image_properties_2.png index 2a620d6d2..57dcd3849 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/image_properties_2.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/image_properties_2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/image_properties_3.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/image_properties_3.png index 497267f7e..603bfb647 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/image_properties_3.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/image_properties_3.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/image_properties_4.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/image_properties_4.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3983e3563 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/image_properties_4.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/image_settings_icon.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/image_settings_icon.png index 7bcb03f2e..2693e9fc1 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/image_settings_icon.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/image_settings_icon.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/insertautoshape.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/insertautoshape.png index 03d49c6b0..35a44bae4 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/insertautoshape.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/insertautoshape.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/insertchart.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/insertchart.png index 10d247f7b..b0b965c50 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/insertchart.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/insertchart.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/insertcolumns.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/insertcolumns.png index 195a08a34..17fecd7ce 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/insertcolumns.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/insertcolumns.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/interface/desktop_editorwindow.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/interface/desktop_editorwindow.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..eef4a6169 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/interface/desktop_editorwindow.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/interface/desktop_filetab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/interface/desktop_filetab.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d5279a30d Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/interface/desktop_filetab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/interface/desktop_hometab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/interface/desktop_hometab.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..dce598b1b Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/interface/desktop_hometab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/interface/desktop_inserttab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/interface/desktop_inserttab.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6d043b21b Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/interface/desktop_inserttab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/interface/desktop_layouttab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/interface/desktop_layouttab.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4fc7d62f8 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/interface/desktop_layouttab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/interface/desktop_pluginstab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/interface/desktop_pluginstab.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4bb6ecbeb Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/interface/desktop_pluginstab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/interface/desktop_protectiontab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/interface/desktop_protectiontab.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d01c331b0 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/interface/desktop_protectiontab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/interface/desktop_referencestab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/interface/desktop_referencestab.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9fdc57f5e Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/interface/desktop_referencestab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/interface/desktop_reviewtab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/interface/desktop_reviewtab.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..757498ea5 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/interface/desktop_reviewtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/interface/editorwindow.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/interface/editorwindow.png index d35f69146..c7589e570 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/interface/editorwindow.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/interface/editorwindow.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/interface/filetab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/interface/filetab.png index 0478f7cf9..4aa32006c 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/interface/filetab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/interface/filetab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/interface/hometab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/interface/hometab.png index 1d235a46b..a77b9d694 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/interface/hometab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/interface/hometab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/interface/inserttab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/interface/inserttab.png index 2d75581dc..31e0a435a 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/interface/inserttab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/interface/inserttab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/interface/layouttab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/interface/layouttab.png index 0249972b2..76b25cd91 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/interface/layouttab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/interface/layouttab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/interface/leftpart.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/interface/leftpart.png index f3f1306f3..6b2f27f47 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/interface/leftpart.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/interface/leftpart.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/interface/pluginstab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/interface/pluginstab.png index b0bc81fe3..a3e64fa6e 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/interface/pluginstab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/interface/pluginstab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/interface/referencestab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/interface/referencestab.png index 7c7279274..8b76c5f6c 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/interface/referencestab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/interface/referencestab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/interface/reviewtab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/interface/reviewtab.png index e219def41..2c35f7f11 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/interface/reviewtab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/interface/reviewtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/leftcolumn.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/leftcolumn.png index ee3cd7ac6..ae7288952 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/leftcolumn.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/leftcolumn.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/multilevellistsettings.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/multilevellistsettings.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ab6171ba3 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/multilevellistsettings.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/numbering.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/numbering.png index c637c9272..7975aee90 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/numbering.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/numbering.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/onecolumn.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/onecolumn.png index 28c6f038b..9714d5f78 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/onecolumn.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/onecolumn.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/orderedlistsettings.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/orderedlistsettings.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..30d993a75 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/orderedlistsettings.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/orientation.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/orientation.png index e800cc47b..6296a359a 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/orientation.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/orientation.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/pagesize.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/pagesize.png index bffdbaaa0..d6b212540 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/pagesize.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/pagesize.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/paradvsettings_breaks.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/paradvsettings_breaks.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..11f674fac Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/paradvsettings_breaks.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/paradvsettings_indents.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/paradvsettings_indents.png index 6e5fc8733..809ea293d 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/paradvsettings_indents.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/paradvsettings_indents.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/pencil_tool.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/pencil_tool.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6e006637a Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/pencil_tool.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/print.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/print.png index 03fd49783..d05c08b29 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/print.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/print.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/redo.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/redo.png index 5002b4109..d71647013 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/redo.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/redo.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/redo1.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/redo1.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e44b47cbf Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/redo1.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/right_autoshape.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/right_autoshape.png index 80b4e1f11..b5f918b87 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/right_autoshape.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/right_autoshape.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/right_chart.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/right_chart.png index 2eb7048b1..d9157852c 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/right_chart.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/right_chart.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/right_headerfooter.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/right_headerfooter.png index 21fb6c43e..9cba4b7cb 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/right_headerfooter.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/right_headerfooter.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/right_image.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/right_image.png index ea8b8bc02..7c0f68c5f 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/right_image.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/right_image.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/right_image_shape.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/right_image_shape.png index 2964507a3..56c51fff7 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/right_image_shape.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/right_image_shape.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/right_paragraph.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/right_paragraph.png index 36b8f2f81..0aa3b9940 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/right_paragraph.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/right_paragraph.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/right_table.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/right_table.png index e031898a6..545227a72 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/right_table.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/right_table.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/rightcolumn.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/rightcolumn.png index 2290b9e3e..6f0d91762 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/rightcolumn.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/rightcolumn.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/rotateclockwise.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/rotateclockwise.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b985f3052 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/rotateclockwise.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/rotatecounterclockwise.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/rotatecounterclockwise.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..63c313bdb Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/rotatecounterclockwise.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/save.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/save.png index e6a82d6ac..bef90f537 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/save.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/save.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/saveupdate.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/saveupdate.png index 022b31529..d4e58e825 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/saveupdate.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/saveupdate.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/savewhilecoediting.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/savewhilecoediting.png index a62d2c35d..a3defd211 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/savewhilecoediting.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/savewhilecoediting.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/shape_properties.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/shape_properties.png index 906a070da..ba79c1621 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/shape_properties.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/shape_properties.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/shape_properties_1.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/shape_properties_1.png index f19e3937a..3c42d1f65 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/shape_properties_1.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/shape_properties_1.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/shape_properties_2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/shape_properties_2.png index 68eddadd8..71359218c 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/shape_properties_2.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/shape_properties_2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/shape_properties_3.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/shape_properties_3.png index 6ca64b195..72f1ddaba 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/shape_properties_3.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/shape_properties_3.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/shape_properties_4.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/shape_properties_4.png index 4a252585f..f0dd52612 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/shape_properties_4.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/shape_properties_4.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/shape_properties_5.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/shape_properties_5.png index 003ee97f0..7fc9a7985 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/shape_properties_5.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/shape_properties_5.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/shape_properties_6.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/shape_properties_6.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e7c118508 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/shape_properties_6.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/shape_settings_icon.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/shape_settings_icon.png index c7f91b715..63fd3063d 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/shape_settings_icon.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/shape_settings_icon.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/spellcheckactivated.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/spellcheckactivated.png index 14d99736a..65e7ed85c 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/spellcheckactivated.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/spellcheckactivated.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/spellcheckdeactivated.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/spellcheckdeactivated.png index f55473551..2f324b661 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/spellcheckdeactivated.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/spellcheckdeactivated.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/spellchecking_language.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/spellchecking_language.png index 8ff8fcdb0..7aaa0d61b 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/spellchecking_language.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/spellchecking_language.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/table.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/table.png index dd883315b..373854ac8 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/table.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/table.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/threecolumns.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/threecolumns.png index 109060750..c51b78990 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/threecolumns.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/threecolumns.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/twocolumns.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/twocolumns.png index 2905d32f1..859789aae 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/twocolumns.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/twocolumns.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/undo.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/undo.png index bb7f9407d..68978e596 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/undo.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/undo.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/undo1.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/undo1.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..595e2a582 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/undo1.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/watermark.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/watermark.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..03a568c03 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/watermark.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/watermark_settings.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/watermark_settings.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..400394a46 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/watermark_settings.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/watermark_settings2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/watermark_settings2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4761da6dc Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/images/watermark_settings2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/search/indexes.js b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/search/indexes.js index 9752a3f68..858a7d7db 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/search/indexes.js +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/de/search/indexes.js @@ -3,27 +3,27 @@ var indexes = { "id": "HelpfulHints/About.htm", "title": "Über den Dokumenteneditor", - "body": "Der Dokumenteneditor ist eine Online- Anwendung, mit der Sie Ihre Dokumente direkt in Ihrem Browser betrachten und bearbeiten können. Mit dem Dokumenteneditor können Sie Editiervorgänge durchführen, wie bei einem beliebigen Desktopeditor, editierte Dokumente unter Beibehaltung aller Formatierungsdetails drucken oder sie auf der Festplatte Ihres Rechners als DOCX-, PDF-, TXT-, ODT-, RTF- oder HTML-Dateien speichern. Wenn Sie mehr über die aktuelle Softwareversion und den Lizenzgeber erfahren möchten, klicken Sie auf das Symbol in der linken Seitenleiste." + "body": "Der Dokumenteneditor ist eine Online- Anwendung, mit der Sie Ihre Dokumente direkt in Ihrem Browser betrachten und bearbeiten können. Mit dem Dokumenteneditor können Sie Editiervorgänge durchführen, wie bei einem beliebigen Desktopeditor, editierte Dokumente unter Beibehaltung aller Formatierungsdetails drucken oder sie auf der Festplatte Ihres Rechners als DOCX-, PDF-, TXT-, ODT-, DOXT, PDF/A, OTF, RTF- oder HTML-Dateien speichern. Wenn Sie in der Online-Version mehr über die aktuelle Softwareversion und den Lizenzgeber erfahren möchten, klicken Sie auf das Symbol in der linken Seitenleiste. Wenn Sie in der Desktop-Version mehr über die aktuelle Softwareversion und den Lizenzgeber erfahren möchten, wählen Sie das Menü Über in der linken Seitenleiste des Hauptfensters." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm", "title": "Erweiterte Einstellungen des Dokumenteneditors", - "body": "Über die Funktion erweiterten Einstellungen können Sie die Grundeinstellungen im Dokumenteneditor ändern. Klicken Sie dazu in der oberen Menüleiste auf die Registerkarte Datei und wählen Sie die Option Erweiterte Einstellungen.... Sie können auch das Symbol in der rechten oberen Ecke der Registerkarte Start anklicken. Die erweiterten Einstellungen umfassen: Kommentaranzeige - zum Ein-/Ausschalten der Option Live-Kommentar: Anzeige von Kommentaren aktivieren - wenn Sie diese Funktion deaktivieren, werden die kommentierten Passagen nur hervorgehoben, wenn Sie auf das Symbol Kommentare in der linken Seitenleiste klicken. Anzeige der aufgelösten Kommentare aktivieren - wenn Sie diese Funktion deaktivieren, werden die aufgelösten Kommentare im Dokumenttext verborgen. Sie können diese Kommentare nur ansehen, wenn Sie in der linken Seitenleiste auf das Symbol Kommentare klicken. Rechtschreibprüfung - Ein-/Ausschalten der automatischen Rechtschreibprüfung. Erweiterte Eingabe - Ein-/Auszuschalten von Hieroglyphen. Hilfslinien - Aktivieren/Deaktivieren von Ausrichtungshilfslinien, die Ihnen dabei helfen Objekte präzise auf der Seite zu positionieren. Automatische Sicherung - automatische Speichern von Änderungen während der Bearbeitung ein-/ausschalten. Co-Bearbeitung - anzeige der während der Co-Bearbeitung vorgenommenen Änderungen: Standardmäßig ist der Schnellmodus aktiviert. Die Benutzer, die das Dokuments gemeinsam bearbeiten, sehen die Änderungen in Echtzeit, sobald sie von anderen Benutzern vorgenommen wurden. Wenn Sie die Änderungen von anderen Benutzern nicht einsehen möchten (um Störungen zu vermeiden oder aus einem anderen Grund), wählen Sie den Modus Strikt und alle Änderungen werden erst angezeigt, nachdem Sie auf das Symbol Speichern geklickt haben, dass Sie darüber informiert, dass Änderungen von anderen Benutzern vorliegen. Echtzeit-Änderungen bei gemeinsamer Bearbeitung - legt fest, welche Änderungen bei der Co-Bearbeitung hervorgehoben werden sollen: Wenn Sie die Option Keine anzeigen auswählen, werden die während der aktuellen Sitzung vorgenommenen Änderungen nicht hervorgehoben. Wenn Sie die Option Alle anzeigen auswählen, werden alle während der aktuellen Sitzung vorgenommenen Änderungen hervorgehoben. Wenn Sie die Option Letzte anzeigen auswählen, werden alle Änderungen hervorgehoben, die Sie vorgenommen haben, seit Sie das letzte Mal das Symbol Speichern angeklickt haben. Diese Option ist nur verfügbar, wenn Sie in der Co-Bearbeitung den Modus Strikt ausgewählt haben. Standard-Zoomwert - Einrichten des Standard-Zoomwerts aus der Liste der verfügbaren Optionen von 50 % bis 200 %. Sie können auch die Option Auf Seite anpassen oder Auf Breite anpassen auswählen. Hinting - Auswahl der Schriftartdarstellung im Dokumenteneditor: Wählen Sie Wie Windows, wenn Ihnen die Art gefällt, wie die Schriftarten unter Windows gewöhnlich angezeigt werden, d.h. mit Windows-artigen Hints. Wählen Sie Wie OS X, wenn Ihnen die Art gefällt, wie die Schriftarten auf einem Mac gewöhnlich angezeigt werden, d.h. ohne Hints. Wählen Sie Eingebettet, wenn Sie möchten, dass Ihr Text mit den Hints angezeigt wird, die in Schriftartdateien eingebettet sind. Maßeinheiten - geben Sie an, welche Einheiten auf den Linealen und in Eigenschaftenfenstern verwendet werden, um Elemente wie Breite, Höhe, Abstand, Ränder usw. zu messen. Sie können die Optionen Zentimeter, Punkt, oder Zoll wählen. Um die vorgenommenen Änderungen zu speichern, klicken Sie auf Übernehmen." + "body": "Über die Funktion erweiterten Einstellungen können Sie die Grundeinstellungen im Dokumenteneditor ändern. Klicken Sie dazu in der oberen Symbolleiste auf die Registerkarte Datei und wählen Sie die Option Erweiterte Einstellungen.... Sie können auch auf das Symbol Einstellungen anzeigen rechts neben der Kopfzeile des Editors klicken und die Option Erweiterte Einstellungen auswählen. Die erweiterten Einstellungen umfassen: Kommentaranzeige - zum Ein-/Ausschalten der Option Live-Kommentar: Anzeige von Kommentaren aktivieren - wenn Sie diese Funktion deaktivieren, werden die kommentierten Passagen nur hervorgehoben, wenn Sie auf das Symbol Kommentare in der linken Seitenleiste klicken. Anzeige der aufgelösten Kommentare aktivieren - diese Funktion ist standardmäßig deaktiviert, sodass die aufgelösten Kommentare im Dokumententext verborgen werden. Sie können diese Kommentare nur ansehen, wenn Sie in der linken Seitenleiste auf das Symbol Kommentare klicken. Wenn die aufgelösten Kommentare im Dokument angezeigt werden sollen, müssen Sie diese Option aktivieren. Rechtschreibprüfung - Ein-/Ausschalten der automatischen Rechtschreibprüfung. Erweiterte Eingabe - Ein-/Auszuschalten von Hieroglyphen. Hilfslinien - Aktivieren/Deaktivieren von Ausrichtungshilfslinien, die Ihnen dabei helfen Objekte präzise auf der Seite zu positionieren. Über AutoSpeichern können Sie in der Online-Version die Funktion zum automatischen Speichern von Änderungen während der Bearbeitung ein-/ausschalten. Über Wiederherstellen können Sie in der Desktop-Version die Funktion zum automatischen Wiederherstellen von Dokumenten für den Fall eines unerwarteten Programmabsturzes ein-/ausschalten. Co-Bearbeitung - Anzeige der während der Co-Bearbeitung vorgenommenen Änderungen: Standardmäßig ist der Schnellmodus aktiviert. Die Benutzer, die das Dokuments gemeinsam bearbeiten, sehen die Änderungen in Echtzeit, sobald sie von anderen Benutzern vorgenommen wurden. Wenn Sie die Änderungen von anderen Benutzern nicht einsehen möchten (um Störungen zu vermeiden oder aus einem anderen Grund), wählen Sie den Modus Strikt und alle Änderungen werden erst angezeigt, nachdem Sie auf das Symbol Speichern geklickt haben, dass Sie darüber informiert, dass Änderungen von anderen Benutzern vorliegen. Echtzeit-Änderungen bei gemeinsamer Bearbeitung - legt fest, welche Änderungen bei der Co-Bearbeitung hervorgehoben werden sollen: Wenn Sie die Option Keine anzeigen auswählen, werden die während der aktuellen Sitzung vorgenommenen Änderungen nicht hervorgehoben. Wenn Sie die Option Alle anzeigen auswählen, werden alle während der aktuellen Sitzung vorgenommenen Änderungen hervorgehoben. Wenn Sie die Option Letzte anzeigen auswählen, werden alle Änderungen hervorgehoben, die Sie vorgenommen haben, seit Sie das letzte Mal das Symbol Speichern angeklickt haben. Diese Option ist nur verfügbar, wenn Sie in der Co-Bearbeitung den Modus Strikt ausgewählt haben. Standard-Zoomwert - Einrichten des Standard-Zoomwerts aus der Liste der verfügbaren Optionen von 50 % bis 200 %. Sie können auch die Option Auf Seite anpassen oder Auf Breite anpassen auswählen. Hinting - Auswahl der Schriftartdarstellung im Dokumenteneditor: Wählen Sie Wie Windows, wenn Ihnen die Art gefällt, wie die Schriftarten unter Windows gewöhnlich angezeigt werden, d.h. mit Windows-artigen Hints. Wählen Sie Wie OS X, wenn Ihnen die Art gefällt, wie die Schriftarten auf einem Mac gewöhnlich angezeigt werden, d.h. ohne Hints. Wählen Sie Eingebettet, wenn Sie möchten, dass Ihr Text mit den Hints angezeigt wird, die in Schriftartdateien eingebettet sind. Maßeinheiten - geben Sie an, welche Einheiten auf den Linealen und in Eigenschaftenfenstern verwendet werden, um Elemente wie Breite, Höhe, Abstand, Ränder usw. zu messen. Sie können die Optionen Zentimeter, Punkt, oder Zoll wählen. Um die vorgenommenen Änderungen zu speichern, klicken Sie auf Übernehmen." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/CollaborativeEditing.htm", "title": "Gemeinsame Bearbeitung von Dokumenten", - "body": "Im Dokumenteneditor haben Sie die Möglichkeit, gemeinsam mit anderen Nutzern an einem Dokument zu arbeiten. Diese Funktion umfasst: gleichzeitiger Zugriff von mehreren Benutzern auf das bearbeitete Dokument visuelle Markierung von Textabschnitten, die aktuell von anderen Benutzern bearbeitet werden Anzeige von Änderungen in Echtzeit oder Synchronisierung von Änderungen mit einem Klick. Chat zum Austauschen von Ideen zu bestimmten Abschnitten des Dokuments Kommentare mit der Beschreibung von Aufgaben oder Problemen, die Folgehandlungen erforderlich machen. Co-Bearbeitung Im Dokumenteneditor stehen die folgenden Modelle für die Co-Bearbeitung zur Verfügung. Standardmäßig ist der Schnellmodus aktiviert. Die Änderungen von anderen Benutzern werden in Echtzeit angezeigt. Im Modus Strikt werden die Änderungen von anderen Nutzern verborgen, bis Sie auf das Symbol Speichern klicken, um Ihre eigenen Änderungen zu speichern und die Änderungen von anderen anzunehmen. Der Modus kann unter Erweiterte Einstellungen festgelegt werden. Sie können den gewünschten Modus auch in der Registerkarte Zusammenarbeit in der oberen Symbolleiste festlegen, klicken Sie dazu einfach auf das Symbol Co-Bearbeitung. Wenn ein Dokument im Modus Strikt von mehreren Benutzern gleichzeitig bearbeitet wird, werden die bearbeiteten Textpassagen mit gestrichelten Linien in verschiedenen Farben markiert. Wenn Sie den Mauszeiger über eine der bearbeiteten Passagen bewegen, wird der Name des Benutzers angezeigt, der diese Passage aktuell bearbeitet. Im Schnellmodus werden die Aktionen und die Namen der Co-Editoren angezeigt, sobald sie eine Textstelle bearbeitet haben. Die Anzahl der Benutzer, die am aktuellen Dokument arbeiten, wird in der linken unteren Ecke auf der Statusleiste angegeben - . Wenn Sie sehen möchten wer die Datei aktuell bearbeitet, können Sie auf dieses Symbol klicken oder den Bereich Chat öffnen, der eine vollständige Liste aller Benutzer enthält. Wenn niemand die Datei anzeigt oder bearbeitet, sieht das Symbol in der Kopfzeile des Editors folgendermaßen aus: über dieses Symbol können Sie die Benutzer verwalten, die direkt aus dem Dokument auf die Datei zugreifen können; neue Benutzer einladen und ihnen die Berechtigung zum Bearbeiten, Lesen oder Überprüfen erteilen oder Benutzern Zugriffsrechte für die Datei verweigern. Klicken Sie auf dieses Symbol , um den Zugriff auf die Datei zu verwalten. Sie können die Datei auch verwalten, wenn andere Benutzer aktuell mit der Bearbeitung oder Anzeige des Dokuments beschäftigt sind. Sie können die Zugriffsrechte auch in der Registerkarte Zusammenarbeit in der oberen Symbolleiste festlegen, klicken Sie dazu einfach auf das Symbol Teilen. Sobald einer der Benutzer Änderungen durch Klicken auf das Symbol speichert, sehen die anderen Benutzer in der Statusleiste eine Notiz über vorliegende Aktualisierungen. Um Ihre eigenen Änderungen zu speichern, so dass diese auch von den anderen Benutzern eingesehen werden können und um die Aktualisierungen Ihrer Co-Editoren einzusehen, klicken Sie in der oberen linken Ecke der oberen Symbolleiste auf . Die Updates werden hervorgehoben, damit Sie nachvollziehen können, was genau geändert wurde. Sie können festlegen, welche Änderungen bei der Co-Bearbeitung hervorgehoben werden sollen: Klicken Sie dazu in der Registerkarte Datei auf die Option Erweiterte Einstellungen und wählen Sie zwischen keine, alle und letzte Änderungen in Echtzeit. Wenn Sie die Option Alle anzeigen auswählen, werden alle während der aktuellen Sitzung vorgenommenen Änderungen hervorgehoben. Wenn Sie die Option Letzte anzeigen auswählen, werden alle Änderungen hervorgehoben, die Sie vorgenommen haben, seit Sie das letzte Mal das Symbol Speichern angeklickt haben. Wenn Sie die Option Keine anzeigen auswählen, werden die während der aktuellen Sitzung vorgenommenen Änderungen nicht hervorgehoben. Chat Mit diesem Tool können Sie die Co-Bearbeitung spontan bei Bedarf koordinieren, beispielsweise um mit Ihren Mitarbeitern zu vereinbaren, wer was macht, welchen Absatz Sie jetzt bearbeiten usw. Die Chat-Nachrichten werden nur während einer aktiven Sitzung gespeichert. Um den Inhalt der Präsentation zu besprechen, ist es besser die Kommentarfunktion zu verwenden, da Kommentare bis zum Löschen gespeichert werden. Chat nutzen und Nachrichten für andere Benutzer erstellen: Klicken Sie im linken Seitenbereich auf das Symbol oder wechseln Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste in die Registerkarte Zusammenarbeit und klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche Chat. Geben Sie Ihren Text in das entsprechende Feld unten ein. klicken Sie auf Senden. Alle Nachrichten, die von Benutzern hinterlassen wurden, werden links in der Leiste angezeigt. Liegen ungelesene neue Nachrichten vor, sieht das Chat-Symbol wie folgt aus - . Um die Leiste mit den Chat-Nachrichten zu schließen, klicken Sie in der linken Seitenleiste auf das Symbol oder klicken Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste erneut auf Chat. Kommentare Einen Kommentar hinterlassen: Wählen Sie einen Textabschnitt, der Ihrer Meinung nach einen Fehler oder ein Problem enthält. Wechseln Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste in die Registerkarte Einfügen oder Zusammenarbeit und klicken Sie in der rechten Seitenleiste auf Kommentare, oder nutzen Sie das Symbol in der linken Seitenleiste, um das Kommentarfeld zu öffnen, klicken Sie anschließend auf Kommentar hinzufügen oder klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste auf den gewünschten Textabschnitt und wählen Sie die Option Kommentar hinzufügen aus dem Kontextmenü aus. Geben Sie den gewünschten Text ein. Klicken Sie auf Kommentar hinzufügen/Hinzufügen. Der Kommentar wird im linken Seitenbereich angezeigt. Alle Nutzer können nun auf hinzugefügte Kommentare antworten, Fragen stellen oder über durchgeführte Aktionen berichten. Klicken Sie dazu einfach in das Feld Antworten, direkt unter dem Kommentar. Der von Ihnen kommentierte Textabschnitt wird im Dokument markiert. Um den Kommentar einzusehen, klicken Sie einfach auf den entsprechenden Abschnitt. Wenn Sie diese Funktion deaktivieren möchten, wechseln Sie in die Registerkarte Datei, wählen Sie die Option Erweiterte Einstellungen... und deaktivieren Sie das Kästchen Live-Kommentare einblenden. In diesem Fall werden die kommentierten Abschnitte nur markiert, wenn Sie auf klicken. Hinzugefügte Kommentare verwalten: bearbeiten - klicken Sie dazu auf löschen - klicken Sie dazu auf die Diskussion schließen - klicken Sie dazu auf , wenn die im Kommentar angegebene Aufgabe oder das Problem gelöst wurde. Danach erhält die Diskussion, die Sie mit Ihrem Kommentar geöffnet haben, den Status aufgelöst. Um die Diskussion wieder zu öffnen, klicken Sie auf . Wenn Sie diese Funktion deaktivieren möchten, wechseln Sie in die Registerkarte Datei, wählen Sie die Option Erweiterte Einstellungen... und deaktivieren Sie das Kästchen Gelöste Kommentare einblenden, klicken Sie anschließend auf Anwenden. In diesem Fall werden die kommentierten Abschnitte nur markiert, wenn Sie auf klicken. Wenn Sie im Modus Strikt arbeiten, werden neue Kommentare, die von den anderen Benutzern hinzugefügt wurden, erst eingeblendet, wenn Sie in der linken oberen Ecke der oberen Symbolleiste auf geklickt haben. Um die Leiste mit den Kommentaren zu schließen, klicken Sie in der linken Seitenleiste erneut auf ." + "body": "Im Dokumenteneditor haben Sie die Möglichkeit, gemeinsam mit anderen Nutzern an einem Dokument zu arbeiten. Diese Funktion umfasst: gleichzeitiger Zugriff von mehreren Benutzern auf das bearbeitete Dokument visuelle Markierung von Textabschnitten, die aktuell von anderen Benutzern bearbeitet werden Anzeige von Änderungen in Echtzeit oder Synchronisierung von Änderungen mit einem Klick. Chat zum Austauschen von Ideen zu bestimmten Abschnitten des Dokuments Kommentare mit der Beschreibung von Aufgaben oder Problemen, die Folgehandlungen erforderlich machen (es ist auch möglich, im Offline-Modus mit Kommentaren zu arbeiten, ohne eine Verbindung zur Online-Version herzustellen). Verbindung mit der Online-Version herstellen Öffnen Sie im Desktop-Editor die Option mit Cloud verbinden in der linken Seitenleiste des Hauptprogrammfensters. Geben Sie Ihren Anmeldenamen und Ihr Passwort an und stellen Sie eine Verbindung zu Ihrem Cloud Office her. Co-Bearbeitung Im Dokumenteneditor stehen die folgenden Modelle für die Co-Bearbeitung zur Verfügung. Standardmäßig ist der Schnellmodus aktiviert. Die Änderungen von anderen Benutzern werden in Echtzeit angezeigt. Im Modus Strikt werden die Änderungen von anderen Nutzern verborgen, bis Sie auf das Symbol Speichern klicken, um Ihre eigenen Änderungen zu speichern und die Änderungen von anderen anzunehmen. Der Modus kann unter Erweiterte Einstellungen festgelegt werden. Sie können den gewünschten Modus auch in der Registerkarte Zusammenarbeit in der oberen Symbolleiste festlegen, klicken Sie dazu einfach auf das Symbol Co-Bearbeitung. Hinweis: Wenn Sie ein Dokument im Modus Schnell gemeinsam bearbeiten, ist die Option letzten rückgängig gemachten Vorgang wiederherstellen nicht verfügbar. Wenn ein Dokument im Modus Strikt von mehreren Benutzern gleichzeitig bearbeitet wird, werden die bearbeiteten Textpassagen mit gestrichelten Linien in verschiedenen Farben markiert. Wenn Sie den Mauszeiger über eine der bearbeiteten Passagen bewegen, wird der Name des Benutzers angezeigt, der diese Passage aktuell bearbeitet. Im Schnellmodus werden die Aktionen und die Namen der Co-Editoren angezeigt, sobald sie eine Textstelle bearbeitet haben. Die Anzahl der Benutzer, die am aktuellen Dokument arbeiten, wird in der linken unteren Ecke auf der Statusleiste angegeben - . Wenn Sie sehen möchten wer die Datei aktuell bearbeitet, können Sie auf dieses Symbol klicken oder den Bereich Chat öffnen, der eine vollständige Liste aller Benutzer enthält. Wenn kein Benutzer die Datei anzeigt oder bearbeitet, sieht das Symbol in der Kopfzeile des Editors folgendermaßen aus: - über dieses Symbol können Sie die Benutzer verwalten, die direkt aus dem Dokument auf die Datei zugreifen können; neue Benutzer einladen und ihnen die Berechtigung zum Bearbeiten, Lesen, Kommentieren, Ausfüllen von Formularen oder Betrachten des Dokuments erteilen oder Benutzern Zugriffsrechte für die Datei verweigern. Klicken Sie auf dieses Symbol , um den Zugriff auf die Datei zu verwalten. Sie können die Datei auch verwalten, wenn andere Benutzer aktuell mit der Bearbeitung oder Anzeige des Dokuments beschäftigt sind. Sie können die Zugriffsrechte auch in der Registerkarte Zusammenarbeit in der oberen Symbolleiste festlegen, klicken Sie dazu einfach auf das Symbol Teilen. Sobald einer der Benutzer Änderungen durch Klicken auf das Symbol speichert, sehen die anderen Benutzer in der Statusleiste eine Notiz über vorliegende Aktualisierungen. Um Ihre eigenen Änderungen zu speichern, so dass diese auch von den anderen Benutzern eingesehen werden können und um die Aktualisierungen Ihrer Co-Editoren einzusehen, klicken Sie in der oberen linken Ecke der oberen Symbolleiste auf . Die Updates werden hervorgehoben, damit Sie nachvollziehen können, was genau geändert wurde. Sie können festlegen, welche Änderungen bei der Co-Bearbeitung hervorgehoben werden sollen: Klicken Sie dazu in der Registerkarte Datei auf die Option Erweiterte Einstellungen und wählen Sie zwischen keine, alle und letzte Änderungen in Echtzeit. Wenn Sie die Option Alle anzeigen auswählen, werden alle während der aktuellen Sitzung vorgenommenen Änderungen hervorgehoben. Wenn Sie die Option Letzte anzeigen auswählen, werden alle Änderungen hervorgehoben, die Sie vorgenommen haben, seit Sie das letzte Mal das Symbol Speichern angeklickt haben. Wenn Sie die Option Keine anzeigen auswählen, werden die während der aktuellen Sitzung vorgenommenen Änderungen nicht hervorgehoben. Chat Mit diesem Tool können Sie die Co-Bearbeitung spontan bei Bedarf koordinieren, beispielsweise um mit Ihren Mitarbeitern zu vereinbaren, wer was macht, welchen Absatz Sie jetzt bearbeiten usw. Die Chat-Nachrichten werden nur während einer aktiven Sitzung gespeichert. Um den Inhalt der Präsentation zu besprechen, ist es besser die Kommentarfunktion zu verwenden, da Kommentare bis zum Löschen gespeichert werden. Chat nutzen und Nachrichten für andere Benutzer erstellen: Klicken Sie im linken Seitenbereich auf das Symbol oder wechseln Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste in die Registerkarte Zusammenarbeit und klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche Chat. Geben Sie Ihren Text in das entsprechende Feld unten ein. klicken Sie auf Senden. Alle Nachrichten, die von Benutzern hinterlassen wurden, werden links in der Leiste angezeigt. Liegen ungelesene neue Nachrichten vor, sieht das Chat-Symbol wie folgt aus - . Um die Leiste mit den Chat-Nachrichten zu schließen, klicken Sie in der linken Seitenleiste auf das Symbol oder klicken Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste erneut auf Chat. Kommentare Es ist möglich, im Offline-Modus mit Kommentaren zu arbeiten, ohne eine Verbindung zur Online-Version herzustellen). Einen Kommentar hinterlassen: Wählen Sie einen Textabschnitt, der Ihrer Meinung nach einen Fehler oder ein Problem enthält. Wechseln Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste in die Registerkarte Einfügen oder Zusammenarbeit und klicken Sie in der rechten Seitenleiste auf Kommentare oder nutzen Sie das Symbol in der linken Seitenleiste, um das Kommentarfeld zu öffnen, klicken Sie anschließend auf Kommentar hinzufügen oder klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste auf den gewünschten Textabschnitt und wählen Sie die Option Kommentar hinzufügen aus dem Kontextmenü aus. Geben Sie den gewünschten Text ein. Klicken Sie auf Kommentar hinzufügen/Hinzufügen. Der Kommentar wird im linken Seitenbereich angezeigt. Alle Nutzer können nun auf hinzugefügte Kommentare antworten, Fragen stellen oder über durchgeführte Aktionen berichten. Klicken Sie dazu einfach in das Feld Antworten, direkt unter dem Kommentar. Der von Ihnen kommentierte Textabschnitt wird im Dokument markiert. Um den Kommentar einzusehen, klicken Sie einfach auf den entsprechenden Abschnitt. Wenn Sie diese Funktion deaktivieren möchten, wechseln Sie in die Registerkarte Datei, wählen Sie die Option Erweiterte Einstellungen... und deaktivieren Sie das Kästchen Live-Kommentare einblenden. In diesem Fall werden die kommentierten Abschnitte nur markiert, wenn Sie auf klicken. Hinzugefügte Kommentare verwalten: bearbeiten - klicken Sie dazu auf löschen - klicken Sie dazu auf Diskussion schließen - klicken Sie dazu auf , wenn die im Kommentar angegebene Aufgabe oder das Problem gelöst wurde. Danach erhält die Diskussion, die Sie mit Ihrem Kommentar geöffnet haben, den Status aufgelöst. Um die Diskussion wieder zu öffnen, klicken Sie auf . Wenn Sie diese Funktion deaktivieren möchten, wechseln Sie in die Registerkarte Datei, wählen Sie die Option Erweiterte Einstellungen... und deaktivieren Sie das Kästchen Gelöste Kommentare einblenden, klicken Sie anschließend auf Anwenden. In diesem Fall werden die kommentierten Abschnitte nur markiert, wenn Sie auf klicken. Wenn Sie im Modus Strikt arbeiten, werden neue Kommentare, die von den anderen Benutzern hinzugefügt wurden, erst eingeblendet, wenn Sie in der linken oberen Ecke der oberen Symbolleiste auf geklickt haben. Um die Leiste mit den Kommentaren zu schließen, klicken Sie in der linken Seitenleiste erneut auf ." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm", - "title": "Tastenkombinationen", - "body": "Ein Dokument bearbeiten Dateimenü öffnen ALT+F Über das Dateimenü können Sie das aktuelle Dokument speichern, drucken, herunterladen, Informationen einsehen, ein neues Dokument erstellen oder ein vorhandenes öffnen, auf die Hilfefunktion zugreifen oder die erweiterten Einstellungen öffnen. Suchmaske öffnen STRG+F Über die Suchmaske können Sie im aktuellen Dokument nach Zeichen/Wörtern/Phrasen suchen. Kommentarleiste öffnen STRG+UMSCHALT+H Über die Kommentarleiste können Sie Kommentare hinzufügen oder auf bestehende Kommentare antworten. Kommentarfeld öffnen ALT+H Öffnet ein Textfeld zum Hinzufügen eines Kommentars. Chatleiste öffnen ALT+Q Öffnet die Leiste Chat zum Senden einer Nachricht. Dokument speichern STRG+S Speichert alle Änderungen im aktuellen Dokument. Dokument drucken STRG+P Ausdrucken mit einem verfügbaren Drucker oder speichern als Datei. Speichern unter... Strg+Unschalt+S Das Dokument wird in einem der unterstützten Dateiformate auf der Festplatte gespeichert: DOCX, PDF, TXT, ODT, RTF, HTML. Vollbild F11 Dokumenteneditor wird an Ihren Bildschirm angepasst und im Vollbildmodus ausgeführt. Hilfe-Menü F1 Das Hilfe-Menü wird geöffnet. Navigation Zum Anfang einer Zeile springen POS1 Der Cursor wird an den Anfang der aktuellen Zeile verschoben. Zum Anfang eines Dokuments springen STRG+POS1 Der Cursor wird an den Anfang des aktuellen Dokuments verschoben. Zum Ende der Zeile springen ENDE Der Cursor wird an das Ende der aktuellen Zeile verschoben. Zum Ende des Dokuments springen STRG+ENDE Der Cursor wird an das Ende der Dokuments verschoben. Nach unten scrollen BILD unten Wechsel zum Ende der Seite. Nach oben scrollen BILD oben Wechsel zum Anfang der Seite. Nächste Seite ALT+BILD unten Geht zur nächsten Seite im aktuellen Dokument über. Vorherige Seite ALT+BILD oben Geht zur vorherigen Seite im aktuellen Dokument über. Vergrößern STRG+Plus (+) Vergrößert die Ansicht des aktuellen Dokuments. Verkleinern STRG+Minus (-) Verkleinert die Ansicht des aktuellen Dokuments. Schreiben Absatz beenden Eingabetaste Endet den aktuellen und beginnt einen neuen Absatz. Zeilenumbruch einfügen UMSCHALT+Eingabetaste Fügt einen Zeilenumbruch ein, ohne einen neuen Absatz zu beginnen. ENTF RÜCKTASTE, ENTF Löscht ein Zeichen links (RÜCKTASTE) oder rechts (ENTF) vom Cursor. Geschütztes Leerzeichen erstellen STRG+UMSCHALT+LEERTASTE Erstellt ein Leerzeichen zwischen den Zeichen, das nicht zum Anfang einer neuen Zeile führt. Geschützten Bindestrich erstellen STRG+UMSCHALT+BINDESTRICH Erstellt einen Bindestrich zwischen den Zeichen, der nicht zum Anfang einer neuen Zeile führt. Rückgängig machen und Wiederholen Rückgängig machen STRG+Z Die zuletzt durchgeführte Aktion wird rückgängig gemacht. Wiederholen STRG+Y Die zuletzt durchgeführte Aktion wird wiederholt. Ausschneiden, Kopieren, Einfügen Ausschneiden STRG+X, UMSCHALT+ENTF Der gewählte Textabschnitt wird gelöscht und in der Zwischenablage des Rechners abgelegt. Der kopierte Text kann später an einer anderen Stelle in demselben Dokument, in einem anderen Dokument oder einem anderen Programm eingefügt werden. Kopieren STRG+C, UMSCHALT+EINFG Der gewählte Textabschnitt wird in der Zwischenablage des Rechners abgelegt. Der kopierte Text kann später an einer anderen Stelle in demselben Dokument, in einem anderen Dokument oder einem anderen Programm eingefügt werden. Einfügen STRG+V, UMSCHALT+EINFG Der vorher kopierte Textabschnitt wird aus der Zwischenablage des Rechners an der aktuellen Cursorposition eingefügt. Der Text kann aus demselben Dokument, aus einem anderen Dokument bzw. Programm kopiert werden. Hyperlink einfügen STRG+K Fügt einen Hyperlink ein, der einen Übergang beispielsweise zu einer Webadresse ermöglicht. Format übertragen STRG+UMSCHALT+C Kopiert die Formatierung des gewählten Textabschnitts. Die kopierte Formatierung kann später auf einen anderen Textabschnitt in demselben Dokument angewandt werden. Format anwenden STRG+UMSCHALT+V Wendet die vorher kopierte Formatierung auf den Text im aktuellen Dokument an. Textauswahl Alles wählen STRG+A Der gesamte Text wird ausgewählt, einschließlich Tabellen und Bildern. Fragment wählen UMSCHALT+Pfeil Wählen Sie Text Zeichen für Zeichen aus. Von der aktuellen Cursorposition bis zum Zeilenanfang auswählen UMSCHALT+POS1 Einen Textabschnitt von der aktuellen Cursorposition bis zum Anfang der aktuellen Zeile auswählen. Von der Cursorposition bis zum Zeilenende auswählen UMSCHALT+ENDE Einen Textabschnitt von der aktuellen Cursorposition bis zum Ende der aktuellen Zeile auswählen. Textformatierung Fett STRG+B Zuweisung der Formatierung Fett im gewählten Textabschnitt. Kursiv STRG+I Zuweisung der Formatierung Kursiv im gewählten Textabschnitt. Unterstrichen STRG+U Der gewählten Textabschnitt wird mit einer Linie unterstrichen. Durchgestrichen STRG+5 Der gewählte Textabschnitt wird durchgestrichen. Tiefgestellt STRG+. (Punkt) Der gewählte Textabschnitt wird verkleinert und tiefgestellt. Hochgestellt STRG+, (Komma) Der gewählte Textabschnitt wird vergrößert und hochgestellt. Überschrift 1 ALT+1 (Windows und Linux) ALT+UMSCHALT+1 (Mac) Dem gewählten Textabschnitt wird die Überschriftenformatvorlage Überschrift 1 zugwiesen. Überschrift 2 ALT+2 (Windows und Linux) ALT+UMSCHALT+2 (Mac) Dem gewählten Textabschnitt wird die Überschriftenformatvorlage Überschrift 2 zugwiesen. Überschrift 3 ALT+3 (Windows und Linux) ALT+UMSCHALT+3 (Mac) Dem gewählten Textabschnitt wird die Überschriftenformatvorlage Überschrift 3 zugwiesen. Aufzählungsliste STRG+UMSCHALT+L Erstellt eine Aufzählungsliste anhand des gewählten Textabschnitts oder beginnt eine neue Liste. Formatierung entfernen STRG+LEERTASTE Entfernt die Formatierung im gewählten Textabschnitt. Schrift vergrößern STRG+] Vergrößert die Schrift des gewählten Textabschnitts um 1 Punkt. Schrift verkleinern STRG+[ Verkleinert die Schrift des gewählten Textabschnitts um 1 Punkt. Zentriert/linksbündig ausrichten STRG+E Wechselt die Ausrichtung des Absatzes von zentriert auf linksbündig. Blocksatz/linksbündig ausrichten STRG+J, STRG+L Wechselt die Ausrichtung des Absatzes von Blocksatz auf linksbündig. Rechtsbündig/linksbündig ausrichten STRG+R Wechselt die Ausrichtung des Absatzes von rechtsbündig auf linksbündig. Einzug vergrößern STRG+M Vergrößert den linken Einzug des Absatzes schrittweise. Einzug verkleinern STRG+UMSCHALT+M Verkleinert den linken Einzug des Absatzes schrittweise. Seitenzahl einfügen STRG+UMSCHALT+P Die aktuelle Seitenzahl wird im Text oder in der Fußnote eingefügt. Bearbeiten von Objekten Verschiebung begrenzen UMSCHALT+ziehen Begrenzt die Verschiebung des gewählten Objekts horizontal oder vertikal. 15-Grad-Drehung einschalten UMSCHALT+ziehen (beim Drehen) Begrenzt den Drehungswinkel auf 15-Grad-Stufen. Seitenverhältnis beibehalten UMSCHALT+ziehen (beim Ändern der Größe) Behält den Seitenverhältnis des gewählten Objekts bei der Größenänderung bei. Bewegung in 1-Pixel-Stufen STRG Halten Sie die STRG-Taste gedrückt und nutzen Sie die Pfeile auf der Tastatur, um das gewählte Objekt um ein Pixel auf einmal zu verschieben." + "title": "Tastaturkürzel", + "body": "Windows/LinuxMac OS Ein Dokument bearbeiten Dateimenü öffnen ALT+F ⌥ Option+F Über das Dateimenü können Sie das aktuelle Dokument speichern, drucken, herunterladen, Informationen einsehen, ein neues Dokument erstellen oder ein vorhandenes öffnen, auf die Hilfefunktion zugreifen oder die erweiterten Einstellungen öffnen. Dialogbox Suchen und Ersetzen öffnen STRG+F ^ STRG+F, ⌘ Cmd+F Über das Dialogfeld Suchen und Finden können Sie im aktuell bearbeiteten Dokument nach Zeichen/Wörtern/Phrasen suchen. Dialogbox „Suchen und Ersetzen“ mit dem Ersetzungsfeld öffnen STRG+H ^ STRG+H Öffnen Sie das Fenster Suchen und Ersetzen, um ein oder mehrere Ergebnisse der gefundenen Zeichen zu ersetzen. Letzten Suchvorgang wiederholen ⇧ UMSCHALT+F4 ⇧ UMSCHALT+F4, ⌘ Cmd+G, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ UMSCHALT+F4 Wiederholung des Suchvorgangs der vor dem Drücken der Tastenkombination ausgeführt wurde. Kommentarleiste öffnen STRG+⇧ UMSCHALT+H ^ STRG+⇧ UMSCHALT+H, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ UMSCHALT+H Über die Kommentarleiste können Sie Kommentare hinzufügen oder auf bestehende Kommentare antworten. Kommentarfeld öffnen ALT+H ⌥ Option+H Ein Textfeld zum Eingeben eines Kommentars öffnen. Chatleiste öffnen ALT+Q ⌥ Option+Q Chatleiste öffnen, um eine Nachricht zu senden. Dokument speichern STRG+S ^ STRG+S, ⌘ Cmd+S Speichert alle Änderungen im aktuellen Dokument. Die aktive Datei wird mit dem aktuellen Dateinamen, Speicherort und Dateiformat gespeichert. Dokument drucken STRG+P ^ STRG+P, ⌘ Cmd+P Ausdrucken mit einem verfügbaren Drucker oder speichern als Datei. Herunterladen als... STRG+⇧ UMSCHALT+S ^ STRG+⇧ UMSCHALT+S, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ UMSCHALT+S Öffnen Sie das Menü Herunterladen als, um das aktuell bearbeitete Dokument in einem der unterstützten Dateiformate auf der Festplatte speichern: DOCX, PDF, ODT, TXT, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, HTML. Vollbild F11 Dokumenteneditor wird an Ihren Bildschirm angepasst und im Vollbildmodus ausgeführt. Hilfemenü F1 F1 Das Hilfe-Menü wird geöffnet. Vorhandene Datei öffnen (Desktop-Editoren) STRG+O Auf der Registerkarte Lokale Datei öffnen unter Desktop-Editoren wird das Standarddialogfeld geöffnet, in dem Sie eine vorhandene Datei auswählen können. Datei schließen (Desktop-Editoren) STRG+W, STRG+F4 ^ STRG+W, ⌘ Cmd+W Das aktuelle Fenster in Desktop-Editoren schließen. Element-Kontextmenü ⇧ UMSCHALT+F10 ⇧ UMSCHALT+F10 Öffnen des ausgewählten Element-Kontextmenüs. Navigation Zum Anfang einer Zeile springen POS1 POS1 Der Cursor wird an den Anfang der aktuellen Zeile verschoben. Zum Anfang eines Dokuments springen STRG+POS1 ^ STRG+POS1 Der Cursor wird an den Anfang des aktuellen Dokuments verschoben. Zum Ende der Zeile springen ENDE ENDE Der Cursor wird an das Ende der aktuellen Zeile verschoben. Zum Ende des Dokuments springen STRG+ENDE ^ STRG+ENDE Der Cursor wird an das Ende der Dokuments verschoben. Zum Anfang der vorherigen Seite springen ALT+STRG+BILD oben Der Cursor wird an den Anfang der Seite verschoben, die der aktuell bearbeiteten Seite vorausgeht. Zum Anfang der nächsten Seite springen ALT+STRG+BILD unten ⌥ Option+⌘ Cmd+⇧ UMSCHALT+BILD unten Der Cursor wird an den Anfang der Seite verschoben, die auf die aktuell bearbeitete Seite folgt. Nach unten scrollen BILD unten BILD unten, ⌥ Option+Fn+↑ Wechsel zum Ende der Seite. Nach oben scrollen BILD oben BILD oben, ⌥ Option+Fn+↓ Wechsel zum Anfang der Seite. Nächste Seite ALT+BILD unten ⌥ Option+BILD unten Geht zur nächsten Seite im aktuellen Dokument über. Vorherige Seite ALT+BILD oben ⌥ Option+BILD oben Geht zur vorherigen Seite im aktuellen Dokument über. Vergrößern STRG++ ^ STRG+=, ⌘ Cmd+= Die Ansicht des aktuellen Dokuments wird vergrößert. Verkleinern STRG+- ^ STRG+-, ⌘ Cmd+- Die Ansicht des aktuellen Dokuments wird verkleinert. Ein Zeichen nach links bewegen ← ← Der Mauszeiger bewegt sich ein Zeichen nach links. Ein Zeichen nach rechts bewegen → → Der Mauszeiger bewegt sich ein Zeichen nach rechts. Zum Anfang eines Wortes oder ein Wort nach links bewegen STRG+← ^ STRG+←, ⌘ Cmd+← Der Mauszeiger wird zum Anfang eines Wortes oder ein Wort nach links verschoben. Ein Wort nach rechts bewegen STRG+→ ^ STRG+→, ⌘ Cmd+→ Der Mauszeiger bewegt sich ein Wort nach rechts. Eine Reihe nach oben ↑ ↑ Der Mauszeiger wird eine Reihe nach oben verschoben. Eine Reihe nach unten ↓ ↓ Der Mauszeiger wird eine Reihe nach unten verschoben. Schreiben Absatz beenden ↵ Eingabetaste ↵ Zurück Endet den aktuellen und beginnt einen neuen Absatz. Zeilenumbruch einfügen ⇧ UMSCHALT+↵ Eingabetaste ⇧ UMSCHALT+↵ Zurück Fügt einen Zeilenumbruch ein, ohne einen neuen Absatz zu beginnen. ENTF ← Rücktaste, ENTF ← Rücktaste, ENTF Ein Zeichen nach links löschen (← Rücktaste) oder nach rechts (ENTF) vom Mauszeiger. Das Wort links neben dem Mauszeiger löschen STRG+← Rücktaste ^ STRG+← Rücktaste, ⌘ Cmd+← Rücktaste Das Wort links neben dem Mauszeiger wird gelöscht. Das Wort rechts neben dem Mauszeiger löschen STRG+ENTF ^ STRG+ENTF, ⌘ Cmd+ENTF Das Wort rechts neben dem Mauszeiger wird gelöscht. Geschütztes Leerzeichen erstellen STRG+⇧ UMSCHALT+␣ Leertaste ^ STRG+⇧ UMSCHALT+␣ Leertaste Erstellt ein Leerzeichen zwischen den Zeichen, das nicht zum Anfang einer neuen Zeile führt. Geschützten Bindestrich erstellen STRG+⇧ UMSCHALT+Viertelgeviertstrich ^ STRG+⇧ UMSCHALT+Viertelgeviertstrich Erstellt einen Bindestrich zwischen den Zeichen, der nicht zum Anfang einer neuen Zeile führt. Rückgängig machen und Wiederholen Rückgängig machen STRG+Z ^ STRG+Z, ⌘ Cmd+Z Die zuletzt durchgeführte Aktion wird rückgängig gemacht. Wiederholen STRG+J ^ STRG+J, ⌘ Cmd+J, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ UMSCHALT+Z Die zuletzt durchgeführte Aktion wird wiederholt. Ausschneiden, Kopieren, Einfügen Ausschneiden STRG+X, ⇧ UMSCHALT+ENTF ⌘ Cmd+X, ⇧ UMSCHALT+ENTF Der gewählte Textabschnitt wird gelöscht und in der Zwischenablage des Rechners abgelegt. Der kopierte Text kann später an einer anderen Stelle in demselben Dokument, in einem anderen Dokument oder einem anderen Programm eingefügt werden. Kopieren STRG+C, STRG+EINFG ⌘ Cmd+C Der gewählte Textabschnitt wird in der Zwischenablage des Rechners abgelegt. Der kopierte Text kann später an einer anderen Stelle in demselben Dokument, in einem anderen Dokument oder einem anderen Programm eingefügt werden. Einfügen STRG+V, ⇧ UMSCHALT+EINFG ⌘ Cmd+V Der vorher kopierte Textabschnitt wird aus der Zwischenablage des Rechners an der aktuellen Cursorposition eingefügt. Der Text kann aus demselben Dokument, aus einem anderen Dokument bzw. Programm kopiert werden. Hyperlink einfügen STRG+K ⌘ Cmd+K Fügt einen Hyperlink ein, der einen Übergang beispielsweise zu einer Webadresse ermöglicht. Format übertragen STRG+⇧ UMSCHALT+C ⌘ Cmd+⇧ UMSCHALT+C Die Formatierung des gewählten Textabschnitts wird kopiert. Die kopierte Formatierung kann später auf einen anderen Textabschnitt in demselben Dokument angewandt werden. Format übertragen STRG+⇧ UMSCHALT+V ⌘ Cmd+⇧ UMSCHALT+V Wendet die vorher kopierte Formatierung auf den Text im aktuellen Dokument an. Textauswahl Alles auswählen STRG+A ⌘ Cmd+A Der gesamte Text wird ausgewählt, einschließlich Tabellen und Bildern. Fragment wählen ⇧ UMSCHALT+→ ← ⇧ UMSCHALT+→ ← Den Text Zeichen für Zeichen auswählen. Von der aktuellen Cursorposition bis zum Zeilenanfang auswählen ⇧ UMSCHALT+POS1 ⇧ UMSCHALT+POS1 Einen Textabschnitt von der aktuellen Cursorposition bis zum Anfang der aktuellen Zeile auswählen. Von der Cursorposition bis zum Zeilenende auswählen ⇧ UMSCHALT+ENDE ⇧ UMSCHALT+ENDE Einen Textabschnitt von der aktuellen Cursorposition bis zum Ende der aktuellen Zeile auswählen. Ein Zeichen nach rechts auswählen ⇧ UMSCHALT+→ ⇧ UMSCHALT+→ Das Zeichen rechts neben dem Mauszeiger wird ausgewählt. Ein Zeichen nach links auswählen ⇧ UMSCHALT+← ⇧ UMSCHALT+← Das Zeichen links neben dem Mauszeiger wird ausgewählt. Bis zum Wortende auswählen STRG+⇧ UMSCHALT+→ Einen Textfragment vom Cursor bis zum Ende eines Wortes wird ausgewählt. Bis zum Wortanfang auswählen STRG+⇧ UMSCHALT+← Einen Textfragment vom Cursor bis zum Anfang eines Wortes wird ausgewählt. Eine Reihe nach oben auswählen ⇧ UMSCHALT+↑ ⇧ UMSCHALT+↑ Eine Reihe nach oben auswählen (mit dem Cursor am Zeilenanfang). Eine Reihe nach unten auswählen ⇧ UMSCHALT+↓ ⇧ UMSCHALT+↓ Eine Reihe nach unten auswählen (mit dem Cursor am Zeilenanfang). Eine Seite nach oben auswählen ⇧ UMSCHALT+BILD oben ⇧ UMSCHALT+BILD oben Die Seite wird von der aktuellen Position des Mauszeigers bis zum oberen Teil des Bildschirms ausgewählt. Eine Seite nach unten auswählen ⇧ UMSCHALT+BILD unten ⇧ UMSCHALT+BILD unten Die Seite wird von der aktuellen Position des Mauszeigers bis zum unteren Teil des Bildschirms ausgewählt. Textformatierung Fett STRG+B ^ STRG+B, ⌘ Cmd+B Zuweisung der Formatierung Fett im gewählten Textabschnitt. Kursiv STRG+I ^ STRG+I, ⌘ Cmd+I Zuweisung der Formatierung Kursiv im gewählten Textabschnitt. Unterstrichen STRG+U ^ STRG+U, ⌘ Cmd+U Der gewählten Textabschnitt wird mit einer Linie unterstrichen. Durchgestrichen STRG+5 ^ STRG+5, ⌘ Cmd+5 Der gewählte Textabschnitt wird durchgestrichen. Tiefgestellt STRG+. ^ STRG+⇧ UMSCHALT+>, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ UMSCHALT+> Der gewählte Textabschnitt wird verkleinert und tiefgestellt. Hochgestellt STRG+, ^ STRG+⇧ UMSCHALT+<, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ UMSCHALT+< Der gewählte Textabschnitt wird verkleinert und hochgestellt wie z. B. in Bruchzahlen. Überschrift 1 ALT+1 ⌥ Option+^ STRG+1 Dem gewählten Textabschnitt wird die Überschriftenformatvorlage Überschrift 1 zugwiesen. Überschrift 2 ALT+2 ⌥ Option+^ STRG+2 Dem gewählten Textabschnitt wird die Überschriftenformatvorlage Überschrift 2 zugwiesen. Überschrift 3 ALT+3 ⌥ Option+^ STRG+3 Dem gewählten Textabschnitt wird die Überschriftenformatvorlage Überschrift 3 zugwiesen. Aufzählungsliste STRG+⇧ UMSCHALT+L ^ STRG+⇧ UMSCHALT+L, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ UMSCHALT+L Baiserend auf dem gewählten Textabschnitt wird eine Aufzählungsliste erstellt oder eine neue Liste begonnen. Formatierung entfernen STRG+␣ Leertaste Entfernt die Formatierung im gewählten Textabschnitt. Schrift vergrößern STRG+] ⌘ Cmd+] Vergrößert die Schrift des gewählten Textabschnitts um 1 Punkt. Schrift verkleinern STRG+[ ⌘ Cmd+[ Verkleinert die Schrift des gewählten Textabschnitts um 1 Punkt. Zentriert/linksbündig ausrichten STRG+E ^ STRG+E, ⌘ Cmd+E Wechselt die Ausrichtung des Absatzes von zentriert auf linksbündig. Blocksatz/linksbündig ausrichten STRG+J, STRG+L ^ STRG+J, ⌘ Cmd+J Wechselt die Ausrichtung des Absatzes von Blocksatz auf linksbündig. Rechtsbündig/linksbündig ausrichten STRG+R ^ STRG+R Wechselt die Ausrichtung des Absatzes von rechtsbündig auf linksbündig. Text tiefstellen (automatischer Abstand) STRG+= Das ausgewählte Textfragment wird tiefgestellt. Text hochstellen (automatischer Abstand) STRG+⇧ UMSCHALT++ Das ausgewählte Textfragment wird hochgestellt. Seitenumbruch einfügen STRG+↵ Eingabetaste ^ STRG+↵ Zurück Einfügen eines Seitenumbruchs an der aktuellen Cursorposition. Einzug vergrößern STRG+M ^ STRG+M Vergrößert den linken Einzug des Absatzes schrittweise. Einzug verkleinern STRG+⇧ UMSCHALT+M ^ STRG+⇧ UMSCHALT+M Verkleinert den linken Einzug des Absatzes schrittweise. Seitenzahl einfügen STRG+⇧ UMSCHALT+P ^ STRG+⇧ UMSCHALT+P Die aktuelle Seitennummer wird an der aktuellen Cursorposition hinzugefügt. Formatierungszeichen STRG+⇧ UMSCHALT+Num8 Ein- oder Ausblenden von nicht druckbaren Zeichen. Ein Zeichen nach links löschen ← Rücktaste ← Rücktaste Das Zeichen links neben dem Mauszeiger wird gelöscht. Ein Zeichen nach rechts löschen ENTF ENTF Das Zeichen rechts neben dem Mauszeiger wird gelöscht. Objekte ändern Verschiebung begrenzen ⇧ UMSCHALT + ziehen ⇧ UMSCHALT + ziehen Die Verschiebung des gewählten Objekts wird horizontal oder vertikal begrenzt. 15-Grad-Drehung einschalten ⇧ UMSCHALT + ziehen (beim Drehen) ⇧ UMSCHALT + ziehen (beim Drehen) Begrenzt den Drehungswinkel auf 15-Grad-Stufen. Seitenverhältnis sperren ⇧ UMSCHALT + ziehen (beim Ändern der Größe) ⇧ UMSCHALT + ziehen (beim Ändern der Größe) Das Seitenverhältnis des gewählten Objekts wird bei der Größenänderung beibehalten. Gerade Linie oder Pfeil zeichnen ⇧ UMSCHALT + ziehen (beim Ziehen von Linien/Pfeilen) ⇧ UMSCHALT + ziehen (beim Ziehen von Linien/Pfeilen) Zeichnen einer geraden vertikalen/horizontalen/45-Grad Linie oder eines solchen Pfeils. Bewegung in 1-Pixel-Stufen STRG+← → ↑ ↓ Halten Sie die Taste STRG gedrückt und nutzen Sie die Pfeile auf der Tastatur, um das gewählte Objekt jeweils um ein Pixel zu verschieben. Tabellen bearbeiten Zur nächsten Zelle in einer Zeile übergeghen ↹ Tab ↹ Tab Zur nächsten Zelle in einer Zeile wechseln. Zur nächsten Zelle in einer Tabellenzeile wechseln. ⇧ UMSCHALT+↹ Tab ⇧ UMSCHALT+↹ Tab Zur vorherigen Zelle in einer Zeile wechseln. Zur nächsten Zeile wechseln ↓ ↓ Zur nächsten Zeile in einer Tabelle wechseln. Zur vorherigen Zeile wechseln ↑ ↑ Zur vorherigen Zeile in einer Tabelle wechseln. Neuen Abstz beginnen ↵ Eingabetaste ↵ Zurück Einen neuen Absatz in einer Zelle beginnen. Neue Zeile einfügen ↹ Tab in der unteren rechten Tabellenzelle. ↹ Tab in der unteren rechten Tabellenzelle. Eine neue Zeile am Ende der Tabelle einfügen. Sonderzeichen einfügen Formel einfügen ALT+= Einfügen einer Formel an der aktuellen Cursorposition." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm", - "title": "Einstellungen und Navigationswerkzeuge anzeigen", - "body": "Der Dokumenteneditor bietet mehrere Werkzeuge, um Ihnen die Navigation durch Ihr Dokument zu erleichtern: Lineale, Zoom, Seitenzahlen usw. Anzeigeeinstellungen anpassen Um die Standardanzeigeeinstellung anzupassen und den günstigsten Modus für die Arbeit mit dem Dokument festzulegen, wechseln Sie in die Registerkarte Start, klicken auf das Symbol Ansichtseinstellungen und wählen Sie, welche Oberflächenelemente ein- oder ausgeblendet werden sollen. Folgende Optionen stehen Ihnen im Menü Ansichtseinstellungen zur Verfügung: Symbolleiste ausblenden - die obere Symbolleiste und die zugehörigen Befehle werden ausgeblendet, während die Registerkarten weiterhin angezeigt werden. Ist diese Option aktiviert, können Sie jede beliebige Registerkarte anklicken, um die Symbolleiste anzuzeigen. Die Symbolleiste wird angezeigt bis Sie in einen Bereich außerhalb der Leiste klicken. Um den Modus zu deaktivieren, wechseln Sie in die Registerkarte Start, klicken Sie auf das Symbol Ansichtseinstellungen und klicken Sie erneut auf Symbolleiste ausblenden. Die Symbolleiste ist wieder fixiert.Hinweis: Alternativ können Sie einen Doppelklick auf einer beliebigen Registerkarte ausführen, um die obere Symbolleiste zu verbergen oder wieder einzublenden. Statusleiste ausblenden - die unterste Leiste wird ausgeblendet, auf der sich die Optionen Seitenzahlen und Zoom befinden. Um die ausgeblendete Statusleiste wieder einzublenden, klicken Sie erneut auf diese Option. Lineale ausblenden - die Lineale, die das Ausrichten von Text und anderen Elementen in einem Dokument sowie das Festlegen von Rändern, Tabstopps und Absatzeinzügen ermöglichen, werden ausgeblendet. Um die ausgeblendeten Lineale wieder anzuzeigen, klicken Sie erneut auf diese Option. Die rechte Seitenleiste ist standartmäßig verkleinert. Um sie zu erweitern, wählen Sie ein beliebiges Objekt (z. B. Bild, Diagramm, Form) oder eine Textpassage aus und klicken Sie auf das Symbol des aktuell aktivierten Tabs auf der rechten Seite. Um die Seitenleiste wieder zu minimieren, klicken Sie erneut auf das Symbol. Wenn die Felder Kommentare oder Chat geöffnet sind, wird die Breite der linken Seitenleiste durch einfaches Ziehen und Loslassen angepasst: Bewegen Sie den Mauszeiger über den Rand der linken Seitenleiste, so dass dieser sich in den bidirektionalen Pfeil verwandelt und ziehen Sie den Rand nach rechts, um die Seitenleiste zu erweitern. Um die ursprüngliche Breite wiederherzustellen, ziehen Sie den Rand nach links. Verwendung der Navigationswerkzeuge Mithilfe der folgenden Werkzeuge können Sie durch Ihr Dokument navigieren: Die Zoom-Funktion befindet sich in der rechten unteren Ecke und dient zum Vergrößern und Verkleinern des aktuellen Dokuments. Um den in Prozent angezeigten aktuellen Zoomwert zu ändern, klicken Sie darauf und wählen Sie einen der verfügbaren Zoomoptionen aus der Liste oder klicken Sie auf Vergrößern oder Verkleinern . Klicken Sie auf das Symbol Eine Seite, um die ganze Seite im Fenster anzuzeigen. Um das ganze Dokument an den sichtbaren Teil des Arbeitsbereichs anzupassen, klicken Sie auf das Symbol Seitenbreite . Die Zoom-Einstellungen sind auch in der Gruppe Ansichtseinstellungen verfügbar, das kann nützlich sein, wenn Sie die Statusleiste ausblenden möchten. Die Seitenzahlanzeige stellt die aktuelle Seite als Teil aller Seiten im aktuellen Dokument dar (Seite „n“ von „nn“). Klicken Sie auf die Seitenzahlanzeige, um ein Fenster zu öffnen, wo Sie eine Seitenzahl eingeben können und schnell zu dieser Nummer wechseln können." + "title": "Ansichtseinstellungen und Navigationswerkzeuge", + "body": "Der Dokumenteneditor bietet mehrere Werkzeuge, um Ihnen die Navigation durch Ihr Dokument zu erleichtern: Lineale, Zoom, Seitenzahlen usw. Ansichtseinstellungen anpassen Um die Standardanzeigeeinstellung anzupassen und den günstigsten Modus für die Arbeit mit dem Dokument festzulegen, klicken Sie auf das Symbol Ansichtseinstellungen im rechten Bereich der Kopfzeile des Editors und wählen Sie, welche Oberflächenelemente ein- oder ausgeblendet werden sollen. Folgende Optionen stehen Ihnen im Menü Ansichtseinstellungen zur Verfügung: Symbolleiste ausblenden - die obere Symbolleiste und die zugehörigen Befehle werden ausgeblendet, während die Registerkarten weiterhin angezeigt werden. Ist diese Option aktiviert, können Sie jede beliebige Registerkarte anklicken, um die Symbolleiste anzuzeigen. Die Symbolleiste wird angezeigt bis Sie in einen Bereich außerhalb der Leiste klicken. Um den Modus zu deaktivieren, klicken Sie auf das Symbol Ansichtseinstellungen und klicken Sie erneut auf Symbolleiste ausblenden. Die Symbolleiste ist wieder fixiert.Hinweis: Alternativ können Sie einen Doppelklick auf einer beliebigen Registerkarte ausführen, um die obere Symbolleiste zu verbergen oder wieder einzublenden. Statusleiste ausblenden - die unterste Leiste, auf der sich die Optionen Seitenzahlen und Zoom befinden, wird ausgeblendet. Um die ausgeblendete Statusleiste wieder einzublenden, klicken Sie erneut auf diese Option. Lineale ausblenden - die Lineale, die das Ausrichten von Text und anderen Elementen in einem Dokument sowie das Festlegen von Rändern, Tabstopps und Absatzeinzügen ermöglichen, werden ausgeblendet. Um die ausgeblendeten Lineale wieder anzuzeigen, klicken Sie erneut auf diese Option. Die rechte Seitenleiste ist standartmäßig verkleinert. Um sie zu erweitern, wählen Sie ein beliebiges Objekt (z. B. Bild, Diagramm, Form) oder eine Textpassage aus und klicken Sie auf das Symbol des aktuell aktivierten Tabs auf der rechten Seite. Um die Seitenleiste wieder zu minimieren, klicken Sie erneut auf das Symbol. Wenn die Felder Kommentare oder Chat geöffnet sind, wird die Breite der linken Seitenleiste durch einfaches Ziehen und Loslassen angepasst: Bewegen Sie den Mauszeiger über den Rand der linken Seitenleiste, so dass dieser sich in den bidirektionalen Pfeil verwandelt und ziehen Sie den Rand nach rechts, um die Seitenleiste zu erweitern. Um die ursprüngliche Breite wiederherzustellen, ziehen Sie den Rand nach links. Verwendung der Navigationswerkzeuge Mithilfe der folgenden Werkzeuge können Sie durch Ihr Dokument navigieren: Die Zoom-Funktion befindet sich in der rechten unteren Ecke und dient zum Vergrößern und Verkleinern des aktuellen Dokuments. Um den in Prozent angezeigten aktuellen Zoomwert zu ändern, klicken Sie darauf und wählen Sie eine der verfügbaren Zoomoptionen aus der Liste oder klicken Sie auf Vergrößern oder Verkleinern . Klicken Sie auf das Symbol Eine Seite, um die ganze Seite im Fenster anzuzeigen. Um das ganze Dokument an den sichtbaren Teil des Arbeitsbereichs anzupassen, klicken Sie auf das Symbol Seitenbreite . Die Zoom-Einstellungen sind auch in der Gruppe Ansichtseinstellungen verfügbar, das kann nützlich sein, wenn Sie die Statusleiste ausblenden möchten. Die Seitenzahlanzeige stellt die aktuelle Seite als Teil aller Seiten im aktuellen Dokument dar (Seite „n“ von „nn“). Klicken Sie auf die Seitenzahlanzeige, um ein Fenster zu öffnen, anschließend können Sie eine Seitenzahl eingeben und direkt zu dieser Seite wechseln." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/Review.htm", @@ -43,67 +43,77 @@ var indexes = { "id": "HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm", "title": "Unterstützte Formate von elektronischen Dokumenten", - "body": "Elektronische Dokumente stellen die am meisten benutzte Computerdateien dar. Dank des inzwischen hoch entwickelten Computernetzwerks ist es bequemer anstatt von gedruckten Dokumenten elektronische Dokumente zu verbreiten. Aufgrund der Vielfältigkeit der Geräte, die für die Anzeige der Dokumente verwendet werden, gibt es viele proprietäre und offene Dateiformate. Der Dokumenteneditor unterstützt die geläufigsten Formate. Format Beschreibung Anzeigen Bearbeiten Download DOC Dateierweiterung für Textverarbeitungsdokumente, die mit Microsoft Word erstellt werden + DOCX Office Open XML Gezipptes, XML-basiertes, von Microsoft entwickeltes Dateiformat zur Präsentation von Kalkulationstabellen, Diagrammen, Präsentationen und Textverarbeitungsdokumenten + + + ODT Textverarbeitungsformat von OpenDocument, ein offener Standard für elektronische Dokumente + + + RTF Rich Text Format Plattformunabhängiges Datei- und Datenaustauschformat von Microsoft für formatierte Texte + + + TXT Dateierweiterung reiner Textdateien mit wenig Formatierung + + + PDF Portable Document Format Dateiformat, mit dem Dokumente unabhängig vom ursprünglichen Anwendungsprogramm, Betriebssystem und der Hardware originalgetreu wiedergegeben werden können + + HTML HyperText Markup Language Hauptauszeichnungssprache für Webseiten + EPUB Electronic Publication Offener Standard für E-Books vom International Digital Publishing Forum + XPS Open XML Paper Specification Offenes, lizenzfreies Dokumentenformat von Microsoft mit festem Layout + DjVu Dateiformat, das hauptsächlich zur Speicherung gescannter Dokumente (vor allem solcher mit Text, Rastergrafiken und Fotos) konzipiert wurde +" + "body": "Elektronische Dokumente stellen die am meisten benutzte Computerdateien dar. Dank des inzwischen hoch entwickelten Computernetzwerks ist es bequemer anstatt von gedruckten Dokumenten elektronische Dokumente zu verbreiten. Aufgrund der Vielfältigkeit der Geräte, die für die Anzeige der Dokumente verwendet werden, gibt es viele proprietäre und offene Dateiformate. Der Dokumenteneditor unterstützt die geläufigsten Formate. Formate Beschreibung Anzeige Bearbeitung Download DOC Dateierweiterung für Textverarbeitungsdokumente, die mit Microsoft Word erstellt werden + + DOCX Office Open XML Gezipptes, XML-basiertes, von Microsoft entwickeltes Dateiformat zur Präsentation von Kalkulationstabellen, Diagrammen, Präsentationen und Textverarbeitungsdokumenten + + + DOTX Word Open XML Dokumenten-Vorlage Gezipptes, XML-basiertes, von Microsoft für Dokumentenvorlagen entwickeltes Dateiformat. Eine DOTX-Vorlage enthält Formatierungseinstellungen, Stile usw. und kann zum Erstellen mehrerer Dokumente mit derselben Formatierung verwendet werden. + + + ODT Textverarbeitungsformat von OpenDocument, ein offener Standard für elektronische Dokumente + + + OTT OpenDocument-Dokumentenvorlage OpenDocument-Dateiformat für Dokumentenvorlagen. Eine OTT-Vorlage enthält Formatierungseinstellungen, Stile usw. und kann zum Erstellen mehrerer Dokumente mit derselben Formatierung verwendet werden. + + + RTF Rich Text Format Plattformunabhängiges Datei- und Datenaustauschformat von Microsoft für formatierte Texte + + + TXT Dateierweiterung reiner Textdateien mit wenig Formatierung + + + PDF Portable Document Format Dateiformat, mit dem Dokumente unabhängig vom ursprünglichen Anwendungsprogramm, Betriebssystem und der Hardware originalgetreu wiedergegeben werden können. + + PDF/A Portable Document Format / A Eine ISO-standardisierte Version des Portable Document Format (PDF), die auf die Archivierung und Langzeitbewahrung elektronischer Dokumente spezialisiert ist. + + HTML HyperText Markup Language Hauptauszeichnungssprache für Webseiten + + Online-Version EPUB Electronic Publication Offener Standard für E-Books vom International Digital Publishing Forum + XPS Open XML Paper Specification Offenes, lizenzfreies Dokumentenformat von Microsoft mit festem Layout + DjVu Dateiformat, das hauptsächlich zur Speicherung gescannter Dokumente (vor allem solcher mit Text, Rastergrafiken und Fotos) konzipiert wurde +" }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm", "title": "Registerkarte Datei", - "body": "Über die Registerkarte Datei können Sie einige grundlegende Vorgänge in der aktuellen Datei durchführen. Über diese Registerkarte können Sie: die aktuelle Datei speichern (wenn die Option automatische Sicherung deaktiviert ist), runterladen, drucken oder umbenennen, ein neues Dokument erstellen oder eine kürzlich bearbeitete Datei öffnen, allgemeine Informationen zum Dokument einsehen, Zugangsrechte verwalten, die Versionshistorie verfolgen, auf die Erweiterten Einstellungen des Dokumenteneditors zugreifen und in die Dokumentenliste zurückkehren." + "body": "Über die Registerkarte Datei können Sie einige grundlegende Vorgänge in der aktuellen Datei durchführen. Dialogbox Online-Dokumenteneditor: Dialogbox Desktop-Dokumenteneditor: Sie können: In der Online-Version können Sie die aktuelle Datei speichern (falls die Option Automatisch speichern deaktiviert ist), herunterladen als (Speichern des Dokuments im ausgewählten Format auf der Festplatte des Computers), eine Kopie speichern als (Speichern einer Kopie des Dokuments im Portal im ausgewählten Format), drucken oder umbenennen. In der Desktop-version können Sie die aktuelle Datei mit der Option Speichern unter Beibehaltung des aktuellen Dateiformats und Speicherorts speichern oder Sie können die aktuelle Datei unter einem anderen Namen, Speicherort oder Format speichern. Nutzen Sie dazu die Option Speichern als. Weiter haben Sie die Möglichkeit die Datei zu drucken. Sie können die Datei auch mit einem Passwort schützen oder ein Passwort ändern oder entfernen (diese Funktion steht nur in der Desktop-Version zur Verfügung). Weiter können Sie ein neues Dokument erstellen oder eine kürzlich bearbeitete Datei öffnen, (nur in der Online-Version verfügbar, allgemeine Informationen zum Dokument einsehen, Zugriffsrechte verwalten (nur in der Online-Version verfügbar, Versionsverläufe nachverfolgen (nur in der Online-Version verfügbar, auf die Erweiterten Einstellungen des Editors zugreifen und in der Desktiop-Version den Ordner öffnen wo die Datei gespeichert ist; nutzen Sie dazu das Fenster Datei-Explorer. In der Online-Version haben Sie außerdem die Möglichkeit den Ordner des Moduls Dokumente, in dem die Datei gespeichert ist, in einem neuen Browser-Fenster zu öffnen." }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/HomeTab.htm", "title": "Registerkarte Start", - "body": "Die Registerkarte Start wird standardmäßig geöffnet, wenn Sie ein beliebiges Dokument öffnen. Über diese Registerkarte können Sie Schriftart und Absätze formatieren. Auch einige andere Optionen sind hier verfügbar, wie Seriendruck, Farbschemata und Ansichtseinstellungen. Über diese Registerkarte können Sie: Schriftart, -größe und -farbe anpassen, Schriftzüge dekorieren und stylen, die Hintergrundfarbe für einen Absatz auswählen, Aufzählungszeichen und nummerierte Listen erstellen, Absatzeinzüge ändern, den Zeilenabstand in den Absätzen einstellen, Ihren Text in der Zeile oder im Absatz ausrichten, Formatierungszeichen ein- und ausblenden, die Textformatierung Kopieren/entfernen, das Farbschema ändern, Seriendrucke verwenden, Stile verwalten und Ansichtseinstellungen anpassen und auf die Erweiterten Einstellungen des Dokumenteneditors zugreifen." + "body": "Die Registerkarte Start wird standardmäßig geöffnet, wenn Sie ein beliebiges Dokument öffnen. Über diese Registerkarte können Sie Schriftart und Absätze formatieren. Auch einige andere Optionen sind hier verfügbar, wie Seriendruck und Farbschemata. Dialogbox Online-Dokumenteneditor: Dialogbox Desktop-Dokumenteneditor: Sie können: Schriftart, -größe und -farbe anpassen, Dekostile anwenden, die Hintergrundfarbe für einen Absatz auswählen, Aufzählungszeichen und nummerierte Listen erstellen, Absatzeinzüge ändern, den Zeilenabstand in den Absätzen einstellen, Ihren Text in der Zeile oder im Absatz ausrichten, Formatierungszeichen ein- und ausblenden, die Textformatierung kopieren/entfernen, das Farbschema ändern, Seriendruck anwenden (nur in der Online-Version verfügbar, Stile verwalten." }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/InsertTab.htm", "title": "Registerkarte Einfügen", - "body": "Die Registerkarte Einfügen ermöglicht das Hinzufügen einiger Seitenformatierungselemente sowie visueller Objekte und Kommentare. Sie können: Seitenumbrüche, Abschnittsumbrüche und Spaltenumbrüche einfügen, Kopf- und Fußzeilen und Seitenzahlen einfügen, Tabellen, Bilder, Diagramme und Formen einfügen Hyperlinks und Kommentare einfügen, Textboxen und TextArt Objekte, Gleichungen, Initialbuchstaben und Inhaltskontrollen einfügen." + "body": "Die Registerkarte Einfügen ermöglicht das Hinzufügen einiger Seitenformatierungselemente sowie visueller Objekte und Kommentare. Dialogbox Online-Dokumenteneditor: Dialogbox Desktop-Dokumenteneditor: Sie können: eine leere Seite einfügen, Seitenumbrüche, Abschnittsumbrüche und Spaltenumbrüche einfügen, Kopf- und Fußzeilen und Seitenzahlen einfügen, Tabellen, Bilder, Diagramme und Formen einfügen, Hyperlinks und Kommentare einfügen, Textboxen und TextArt Objekte, Gleichungen, Initialbuchstaben und Inhaltskontrollen einfügen." }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/LayoutTab.htm", "title": "Registerkarte Layout", - "body": "Über die Registerkarte Layout, können Sie die Darstellung des Dokuments ändern: Legen Sie die Seitenparameter fest und definieren Sie die Anordnung der visuellen Elemente. Über diese Registerkarte können Sie: Seitenränder, Seitenausrichtung und Seitengröße anpassen, Spalten hinzufügen, Seitenumbrüche, Abschnittsumbrüche und Spaltenumbrüche einfügen, Objekte ausrichten und anordnen (Tabellen, Bilder, Diagramme, Formen), die Umbruchart ändern." + "body": "Über die Registerkarte Layout, können Sie die Darstellung des Dokuments ändern: Legen Sie die Seiteneinstellungen fest und definieren Sie die Anordnung der visuellen Elemente. Dialogbox Online-Dokumenteneditor: Dialogbox Desktop-Dokumenteneditor: Sie können: Seitenränder, Seitenausrichtung und Seitengröße anpassen, Spalten hinzufügen, Seitenumbrüche, Abschnittsumbrüche und Spaltenumbrüche einfügen, Objekte ausrichten und anordnen (Tabellen, Bilder, Diagramme, Formen), die Umbruchart ändern. ein Wasserzeichen hinzufügen" }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm", "title": "Registerkarte Plug-ins", - "body": "Die Registerkarte Plug-ins ermöglicht den Zugriff auf erweiterte Bearbeitungsfunktionen mit verfügbaren Komponenten von Drittanbietern. Unter dieser Registerkarte können Sie auch Makros festlegen, um Routinevorgänge zu vereinfachen. Durch Anklicken der Schaltfläche Makros öffnet sich ein Fenster in dem Sie Ihre eigenen Makros erstellen und ausführen können. Um mehr über Makros zu erfahren lesen Sie bitte unsere API-Dokumentation. Derzeit stehen folgende standardmäßig folgende Plug-ins zur Verfügung: ClipArt ermöglicht das Hinzufügen von Bildern aus der ClipArt-Sammlung. OCR ermöglicht es, in einem Bild enthaltene Texte zu erkennen und in den Dokumenttext einzufügen. PhotoEditor - Bearbeitung von Bildern: Zuschneiden, Größe ändern, Effekte anwenden usw. Speech ermöglicht es, ausgewählten Text in Sprache zu konvertieren. Symbol Table - Einfügen von speziellen Symbolen in Ihren Text. Translator - Übersetzen von ausgewählten Textabschnitten in andere Sprachen. YouTube ermöglicht das Einbetten von YouTube-Videos in Ihrem Dokument. Die Plug-ins Wordpress und EasyBib können verwendet werden, wenn Sie die entsprechenden Dienste in Ihren Portaleinstellungen einrichten. Sie können die folgenden Anleitungen für die Serverversion oder für die SaaS-Version verwenden. Um mehr über Plug-ins zu erfahren lesen Sie bitte unsere API-Dokumentation. Alle derzeit als Open-Source verfügbaren Plug-in-Beispiele sind auf GitHub verfügbar." + "body": "Die Registerkarte Plug-ins ermöglicht den Zugriff auf erweiterte Bearbeitungsfunktionen mit verfügbaren Komponenten von Drittanbietern. Unter dieser Registerkarte können Sie auch Makros festlegen, um Routinevorgänge zu vereinfachen. Dialogbox Online-Dokumenteneditor: Dialogbox Desktop-Dokumenteneditor: Durch Anklicken der Schaltfläche Einstellungen öffnet sich das Fenster, in dem Sie alle installierten Plugins anzeigen und verwalten sowie eigene Plugins hinzufügen können. Durch Anklicken der Schaltfläche Makros öffnet sich ein Fenster in dem Sie Ihre eigenen Makros erstellen und ausführen können. Um mehr über Makros zu erfahren lesen Sie bitte unsere API-Dokumentation. Derzeit stehen standardmäßig folgende Plug-ins zur Verfügung: Senden erlaubt das versenden des Dokumentes durch das Standard Desktop Email Programm (nur in der Desktop-Version verfügbar). Code hervorheben - Hervorhebung der Syntax des Codes durch Auswahl der erforderlichen Sprache, des Stils, der Hintergrundfarbe. OCR ermöglicht es, in einem Bild enthaltene Texte zu erkennen und es in den Dokumenttext einzufügen. PhotoEditor - Bearbeitung von Bildern: zuschneiden, umlegen, rotieren, Linien und Formen zeichnen, Icons und Text einzufügen, eine Bildmaske zu laden und verschiedene Filter anzuwenden, wie zum Beispiel Grauskala, Invertiert, Verschwimmen, Verklaren, Emboss, usw. Speech ermöglicht es, ausgewählten Text in Sprache zu konvertieren. Tabellensymbole - erlaubt es spezielle Symbole in Ihren Text einzufügen (nur in der Desktop version verfügbar). Thesaurus - erlaubt es nach Synonymen und Antonymen eines Wortes zu suchen und es durch das ausgewählte Wort zu ersetzen. Translator - erlaubt es den ausgewählten Textabschnitten in andere Sprachen zu übersetzen. YouTube erlaubt es YouTube-Videos in Ihr Dokument einzubinden. Die Plug-ins Wordpress und EasyBib können verwendet werden, wenn Sie die entsprechenden Dienste in Ihren Portaleinstellungen einrichten. Sie können die folgenden Anleitungen für die Serverversion oder für die SaaS-Version verwenden. Um mehr über Plug-ins zu erfahren lesen Sie bitte unsere API-Dokumentation. Alle derzeit als Open-Source verfügbaren Plug-in-Beispiele sind auf GitHub verfügbar." }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm", "title": "Einführung in die Benutzeroberfläche des Dokumenteneditors", - "body": "Der Dokumenteneditor verfügt über eine Benutzeroberfläche mit Registerkarten, in der Bearbeitungsbefehle nach Funktionalität in Registerkarten gruppiert sind. Die Oberfläche des Editors besteht aus folgenden Hauptelementen: In der Kopfzeile des Editors werden das Logo, die Menü-Registerkarten und der Name des Dokuments angezeigt sowie drei Symbole auf der rechten Seite, über die Sie Zugriffsrechte festlegen, zur Dokumentenliste zurückkehren, Einstellungen anzeigen und auf die Erweiterten Einstellungen des Editors zugreifen können. Abhängig von der ausgewählten Registerkarte werden in der oberen Symbolleiste eine Reihe von Bearbeitungsbefehlen angezeigt. Aktuell stehen die folgenden Registerkarten zur Verfügung: Datei, Start, Einfügen, Layout, Referenzen, Zusammenarbeit, Plug-ins.Die Befehle Drucken, Speichern, Kopieren, Einfügen, Rückgängig machen und Wiederholen stehen unabhängig von der ausgewählten Registerkarte jederzeit im linken Teil der oberen Menüleiste zur Verfügung. In der Statusleiste am unteren Rand des Editorfensters finden Sie die Anzeige der Seitennummer und Benachrichtigungen vom System (wie beispielsweise „Alle Änderungen wurden gespeichert\" etc.), außerdem können Sie die Textsprache festlegen und die Rechtschreibprüfung aktivieren, den Modus Änderungen nachverfolgen einschalten und den Zoom anpassen. Über die Symbole der linken Seitenleiste können Sie die Funktion Suchen und Ersetzen nutzen, Kommentare, Chats und die Navigation öffnen, unser Support-Team kontaktieren und Informationen über das Programm einsehen. Über die rechte Seitenleiste können zusätzliche Parameter von verschiedenen Objekten angepasst werden. Wenn Sie im Text ein bestimmtes Objekt auswählen, wird das entsprechende Symbol in der rechten Seitenleiste aktiviert. Klicken Sie auf dieses Symbol, um die rechte Seitenleiste zu erweitern. Horizontale und vertikale Lineale ermöglichen das Ausrichten von Text und anderen Elementen in einem Dokument sowie das Festlegen von Rändern, Tabstopps und Absatzeinzügen. Über den Arbeitsbereich können Sie den Dokumentinhalt anzeigen und Daten eingeben und bearbeiten. Über die Scroll-Leiste auf der rechten Seite können Sie mehrseitige Dokumente nach oben oder unten scrollen. Zur Vereinfachung können Sie bestimmte Komponenten verbergen und bei Bedarf erneut anzeigen. Weitere Informationen zum Anpassen der Ansichtseinstellungen finden Sie auf dieser Seite." + "body": "Der Dokumenteneditor verfügt über eine Benutzeroberfläche mit Registerkarten, in der Bearbeitungsbefehle nach Funktionalität in Registerkarten gruppiert sind. Dialogbox Online-Dokumenteneditor: Dialogbox Desktop-Dokumenteneditor: Die Oberfläche des Editors besteht aus folgenden Hauptelementen: In der Kopfzeile des Editors werden das Logo, geöffnete Dokumente, der Name des Dokuments und die Menü-Registerkarten angezeigt.Im linken Bereich der Kopfzeile des Editors finden Sie die Schaltflächen Speichern, Datei drucken, Rückgängig machen und Wiederholen. Im rechten Bereich der Kopfzeile des Editors werden der Benutzername und die folgenden Symbole angezeigt: Dateispeicherort öffnen - In der Desktiop-Version können Sie den Ordner öffnen in dem die Datei gespeichert ist; nutzen Sie dazu das Fenster Datei-Explorer. In der Online-Version haben Sie außerdem die Möglichkeit den Ordner des Moduls Dokumente, in dem die Datei gespeichert ist, in einem neuen Browser-Fenster zu öffnen. - hier können Sie die Ansichtseinstellungen anpassen und auf die Erweiterten Einstellungen des Editors zugreifen. Zugriffsrechte verwalten (nur in der Online-Version verfügbar - Zugriffsrechte für die in der Cloud gespeicherten Dokumente festlegen. Abhängig von der ausgewählten Registerkarte werden in der oberen Symbolleiste eine Reihe von Bearbeitungsbefehlen angezeigt. Aktuell stehen die folgenden Registerkarten zur Verfügung: Datei, Start, Einfügen, Layout, Referenzen, Zusammenarbeit, Schützen , Plug-ins.Die Befehle Kopieren und Einfügen stehen unabhängig von der ausgewählten Registerkarte jederzeit im linken Teil der oberen Menüleiste zur Verfügung. In der Statusleiste am unteren Rand des Editorfensters finden Sie die Anzeige der Seitennummer und Benachrichtigungen vom System (wie beispielsweise „Alle Änderungen wurden gespeichert\" etc.), außerdem können Sie die Textsprache festlegen und die Rechtschreibprüfung aktivieren, den Modus Änderungen nachverfolgen einschalten und den Zoom anpassen. Symbole in der linken Seitenleiste: - die Funktion Suchen und Ersetzen, - Kommentarfunktion öffnen, - Navigationsfenster aufrufen, um Überschriften zu verwalten, (nur in der Online-Version verfügbar) - hier können Sie das Chatfenster öffnen, unser Support-Team kontaktieren und die Programminformationen einsehen. Über die rechte Seitenleiste können zusätzliche Parameter von verschiedenen Objekten angepasst werden. Wenn Sie im Text ein bestimmtes Objekt auswählen, wird das entsprechende Symbol in der rechten Seitenleiste aktiviert. Klicken Sie auf dieses Symbol, um die rechte Seitenleiste zu erweitern. Horizontale und vertikale Lineale ermöglichen das Ausrichten von Text und anderen Elementen in einem Dokument sowie das Festlegen von Rändern, Tabstopps und Absatzeinzügen. Über den Arbeitsbereich können Sie den Dokumenteninhalt anzeigen und Daten eingeben und bearbeiten. Über die Scroll-Leiste auf der rechten Seite können Sie mehrseitige Dokumente nach oben oder unten scrollen. Zur Vereinfachung können Sie bestimmte Komponenten verbergen und bei Bedarf erneut anzeigen. Weitere Informationen zum Anpassen der Ansichtseinstellungen finden Sie auf dieser Seite." }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/ReferencesTab.htm", - "title": "Registerkarte Referenzen", - "body": "Unter der Registerkarte Referenzen, können Sie verschiedene Arten von Referenzen verwalten: Inhaltsverzeichnis erstellen und aktualisieren, Fußnoten erstellen und bearbeiten, Links einfügen. Unter dieser Registerkarte können Sie: Ein Inhaltsverzeichnis erstellen und aktualisieren. Fußnoten einfügen. Links einfügen." + "title": "Registerkarte Verweise", + "body": "Unter der Registerkarte Verweise, können Sie verschiedene Arten von Verweisen verwalten: ein Inhaltsverzeichnis erstellen und aktualisieren, Fußnoten erstellen und bearbeiten, als auch Verknüpfungen einfügen. Dialogbox Online-Dokumenteneditor: Dialogbox Desktop-Dokumenteneditor: Auf dieser Registerkarte können Sie: Ein Inhaltsverzeichnis erstellen und aktualisieren, Fußnoten einfügen, Verknüpfungen einfügen, Lesezeichen hinzufügen, Bildbeschriftungen hinzufügen." }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/ReviewTab.htm", "title": "Registerkarte Zusammenarbeit", - "body": "Unter der Registerkarte Zusammenarbeit können Sie die Zusammenarbeit im Dokument organisieren: die Datei teilen, einen Co-Bearbeitungsmodus auswählen, Kommentare verwalten, vorgenommene Änderungen verfolgen, alle Versionen und Revisionen einsehen. Sie können: Freigabeeinstellungen festlegen, zwischen den verfügbaren Modi für die Co-Bearbeitung wechseln, Strikt und Schnell, Kommentare zum Dokument hinzufügen, die Funktion Änderungen nachverfolgen aktivieren, Änderungen anzeigen lassen, die vorgeschlagenen Änderungen verwalten, die Chatleiste öffnen, und die Versionshistorie verfolgen." + "body": "Unter der Registerkarte Zusammenarbeit können Sie die Zusammenarbeit im Dokument organisieren. In der Online-Version können Sie die Datei mit jemanden teilen, einen gleichzeitigen Bearbeitungsmodus auswählen, Kommentare verwalten, von einem Zugriffsberechtigtem vorgenommene Änderungen nachverfolgen und alle Versionen und Überarbeitungen einsehen. In der Desktop-Version können Sie Kommentare verwalten und die Funktion ‘Änderungen nachverfolgen’ nutzen . Dialogbox Online-Dokumenteneditor: Dialogbox Desktop-Dokumenteneditor: Auf dieser Registerkarte können Sie: Freigabeeinstellungen festlegen (nur in der Online-Version verfügbar), zwischen den gleichzeitigen Bearbeitung-Modi Strikt und Schnell wechseln (nur in der Online-Version verfügbar), Kommentare zum Dokument hinzufügen, die Funktion ’Änderungen nachverfolgen’ aktivieren, Änderungen anzeigen lassen, die vorgeschlagenen Änderungen verwalten, ein Dokument zum vergleich laden (nur in der Online-Version verfügbar), die Diskussions-Leiste öffnen (nur in der Online-Version verfügbar), Versionsverläufe nachverfolgen (nur in der Online-Version verfügbar)." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/AddBorders.htm", "title": "Rahmen hinzufügen", "body": "Hinzufügen eines Rahmens in einen Absatz eine Seite oder das ganze Dokument: Postitionieren Sie den Cursor innerhalb des gewünschten Absatzes oder wählen Sie mehrere Absätze mit der Maus aus oder markieren Sie den gesamten Text mithilfe der Tastenkombination Strg+A. Klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste und wählen Sie im Kontextmenü die Option Erweiterte Absatzeinstellungen aus oder nutzen Sie die Verknüpfung Erweiterte Einstellungen anzeigen in der rechten Seitenleiste. Wechseln Sie nun im Fenster Erweiterte Absatzeinstellungen in die Registerkarte Rahmen & Füllung. Geben Sie den gewünschten Wert für die Linienstärke an und wählen Sie eine Linienfarbe aus. Klicken Sie nun in das verfügbare Diagramm oder gestalten Sie Ihre Ränder über die entsprechenden Schaltflächen. Klicken Sie auf OK. Nach dem Hinzufügen von Rahmen können Sie die Innenabstände festlegen, d.h. den Abstand zwischen den rechten, linken, oberen und unteren Rahmen und dem darin befindlichen Text. Um die gewünschten Werte einzustellen, wechseln Sie im Fenster Erweiterte Absatzeinstellungen in die Registerkarte Innenabstände:" }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/AddFormulasInTables.htm", + "title": "Formeln in Tabellen verwenden", + "body": "Fügen Sie eine Formel ein Sie können einfache Berechnungen für Daten in Tabellenzellen durchführen, indem Sie Formeln hinzufügen. So fügen Sie eine Formel in eine Tabellenzelle ein: Platzieren Sie den Zeiger in der Zelle, in der Sie das Ergebnis anzeigen möchten. Klicken Sie in der rechten Seitenleiste auf die Schaltfläche Formel hinzufügen. Geben Sie im sich öffnenden Fenster Formeleinstellungen die erforderliche Formel in das Feld Formel ein.Sie können eine benötigte Formel manuell eingeben, indem Sie die allgemeinen mathematischen Operatoren (+, -, *, /) verwenden, z. B. =A1*B2 oder verwenden Sie die Dropdown-Liste Funktion einfügen, um eine der eingebetteten Funktionen auszuwählen, z. B. =PRODUKT (A1, B2). Geben Sie die erforderlichen Argumente manuell in den Klammern im Feld Formel an. Wenn die Funktion mehrere Argumente erfordert, müssen diese durch Kommas getrennt werden. Verwenden Sie die Dropdown-Liste Zahlenformat, wenn Sie das Ergebnis in einem bestimmten Zahlenformat anzeigen möchten. OK klicken. Das Ergebnis wird in der ausgewählten Zelle angezeigt. Um die hinzugefügte Formel zu bearbeiten, wählen Sie das Ergebnis in der Zelle aus und klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche Formel hinzufügen in der rechten Seitenleiste, nehmen Sie die erforderlichen Änderungen im Fenster Formeleinstellungen vor und klicken Sie auf OK. Verweise auf Zellen hinzufügen Mit den folgenden Argumenten können Sie schnell Verweise auf Zellbereiche hinzufügen: OBEN - Ein Verweis auf alle Zellen in der Spalte über der ausgewählten Zelle LINKS - Ein Verweis auf alle Zellen in der Zeile links von der ausgewählten Zelle UNTEN - Ein Verweis auf alle Zellen in der Spalte unter der ausgewählten Zelle RECHTS - Ein Verweis auf alle Zellen in der Zeile rechts von der ausgewählten Zelle Diese Argumente können mit Funktionen AVERAGE, COUNT, MAX, MIN, PRODUCT und SUM (MITTELWERT, ANZAHL, MAX, MIN, PRODUKT, SUMME) verwendet werden. Sie können auch manuell Verweise auf eine bestimmte Zelle (z. B. A1) oder einen Zellbereich (z. B. A1: B3) eingeben. Verwenden Sie Lesezeichen Wenn Sie bestimmten Zellen in Ihrer Tabelle Lesezeichen hinzugefügt haben, können Sie diese Lesezeichen als Argumente bei der Eingabe von Formeln verwenden. Platzieren Sie im Fenster Formeleinstellungen den Mauszeiger in den Klammern im Eingabefeld Formel, in dem das Argument hinzugefügt werden soll, und wählen Sie in der Dropdown-Liste Lesezeichen einfügen eines der zuvor hinzugefügten Lesezeichen aus. Formelergebnisse aktualisieren Wenn Sie einige Werte in den Tabellenzellen ändern, müssen Sie die Formelergebnisse manuell aktualisieren: Um ein einzelnes Formelergebnis zu aktualisieren, wählen Sie das gewünschte Ergebnis aus und drücken Sie F9 oder klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste auf das Ergebnis und verwenden Sie die Option Feld aktualisieren im Menü. Um mehrere Formelergebnisse zu aktualisieren, wählen Sie die erforderlichen Zellen oder die gesamte Tabelle aus und drücken Sie F9. Eingebettete Funktionen Sie können die folgenden mathematischen, statistischen und logischen Standardfunktionen verwenden: Kategorie Funktion Beschreibung Beispiel Mathematisches ABS(x) Mit dieser Funktion wird der Absolutwert einer Zahl zurückgegeben. =ABS(-10) Rückgabe 10 Logisches AND(logisch1, logisch2, ...) (UND) Mit dieser Funktion wird überprüft, ob der von Ihnen eingegebene logische Wert WAHR oder FALSCH ist. Die Funktion gibt 1 (WAHR) zurück, wenn alle Argumente WAHR sind. =AND (1>0,1>3) Rückgabe 0 Statistisches AVERAGE (MITTELWERT) (Argumentliste) Mit dieser Funktion wird der Datenbereich analysiert und der Durchschnittswert ermittelt. =AVERAGE (4,10) Rückgabe 7 Statistisches COUNT (ANZAHL) (Argumentliste) Mit dieser Funktion wird die Anzahl der ausgewählten Zellen gezählt, die Zahlen enthalten, wobei leere Zellen oder den Text ignorieren werden. =COUNT(A1: B3) Rückgabe 6 Logisches DEFINED () (DEFINIERT) Die Funktion wertet aus, ob ein Wert in der Zelle definiert ist. Die Funktion gibt 1 zurück, wenn der Wert fehlerfrei definiert und berechnet wurde, und 0, wenn der Wert nicht fehlerhaft definiert oder berechnet wurde. =DEFINED(A1) Logisches FALSE () (FALSCH) Die Funktion gibt 0 (FALSCH) zurück und benötigt kein Argument. =FALSE Rückgabe 0 Mathematisches INT (x) (GANZZAHL) Mit dieser Funktion wird der ganzzahlige Teil der angegebenen Zahl analysiert und zurückgegeben. =INT(2,5) Rückgabe 2 Statistisches MAX (Nummer1, Nummer2, ...) Mit dieser Funktion wird der Datenbereich analysiert und die größte Anzahl ermittelt. =MAX(15,18,6) Rückgabe 18 Statistisches MIN(Nummer1, Nummer2,...) Mit dieser Funktion wird der Datenbereich analysiert und die kleinste Nummer ermittelt. =MIN(15,18,6) Rückgabe 6 Mathematisches MOD (x, y) (REST) Mit dieser Funktion wird der Rest nach der Division einer Zahl durch den angegebenen Divisor zurückgegeben. =MOD (6,3) Rückgabe 0 Logisches NOT (NICHT) (logisch) Mit dieser Funktion wird überprüft, ob der von Ihnen eingegebene logische Wert WAHR oder FALSCH ist. Die Funktion gibt 1 (WAHR) zurück, wenn das Argument FALSCH ist, und 0 (FALSCH), wenn das Argument WAHR ist. =NOT(2<5) Rückgabe 0 Logisches ODER OR(logisch1, logisch2, ...) (ODER) Mit dieser Funktion wird überprüft, ob der von Ihnen eingegebene logische Wert WAHR oder FALSCH ist. Die Funktion gibt 0 (FALSCH) zurück, wenn alle Argumente FALSCH sind. =OR(1>0,1>3) Rückgabe 1 Mathematisches PRODUCT (PRODUKT) (Argumentliste) Mit dieser Funktion werden alle Zahlen im ausgewählten Zellbereich multipliziert und das Produkt zurückgegeben. =PRODUKT(2,5) Rückgabe 10 Mathematisches ROUND(x, num_digits) (RUNDEN) Mit dieser Funktion wird die Zahl auf die gewünschte Anzahl von Stellen gerundet. =ROUND(2,25,1) Rückgabe 2.3 Mathematisches SIGN(x) (VORZEICHEN) Mit dieser Funktion wird das Vorzeichen einer Zahl zurückgegeben. Wenn die Zahl positiv ist, gibt die Funktion 1 zurück. Wenn die Zahl negativ ist, gibt die Funktion -1 zurück. Wenn die Zahl 0 ist, gibt die Funktion 0 zurück. SIGN(-12) Rückgabe -1 Mathematisches SUM (SUMME) (Argumentliste) Mit dieser Funktion werden alle Zahlen im ausgewählten Zellenbereich addiert und das Ergebnis zurückgegeben. =SUM(5,3,2) Rückgabe 10 Logisches TRUE() (WAHR) Die Funktion gibt 1 (WAHR) zurück und benötigt kein Argument. =TRUE gibt 1 zurück" + }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/AddHyperlinks.htm", "title": "Hyperlink einfügen", "body": "Einfügen eines Hyperlinks: Platzieren Sie Ihren Mauszeiger an der Position wo der Hyperlink eingefügt werden soll. Wechseln Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf die Registerkarte Einfügen oder Verweise. Klicken Sie auf das Symbol Hyperlink in der oberen Symbolleiste. Im sich nun öffnenden Fenster Einstellungen Hyperlink können Sie die Parameter für den Hyperlink festlegen: Wählen Sie den gewünschten Linktyp aus:Wenn Sie einen Hyperlink einfügen möchten, der auf eine externe Website verweist, wählen Sie Website und geben Sie eine URL im Format http://www.example.com in das Feld Link zu ein. Wenn Sie einen Hyperlink einfügen möchten, der zu einer bestimmten Stelle im gleichen Dokument führt, dann wählen Sie die Option In Dokument einfügen, wählen Sie dann eine der vorhandenen Überschriften im Dokumenttext oder eines der zuvor hinzugefügten Lesezeichen aus. Angezeigter Text - geben Sie den klickbaren Text ein, der zu der im oberen Feld angegebenen Webadresse führt. Infobox - geben Sie einen Text ein, der in einem Dialogfenster angezeigt wird und den Nutzer über den Inhalt des Verweises informiert. Klicken Sie auf OK. Um einen Hyperlink einzufügen können Sie auch die Tastenkombination STRG+K nutzen oder klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste an die Stelle an der Sie den Hyperlink einfügen möchten und wählen Sie die Option Hyperlink im Rechtsklickmenü aus. Hinweis: Es ist auch möglich, ein Zeichen, Wort, eine Wortverbindung oder einen Textabschnitt mit der Maus oder über die Tastatur auszuwählen. Öffnen Sie anschließend das Menü für die Hyperlink-Einstellungen wie zuvor beschrieben. In diesem Fall erscheint im Feld Angezeigter Text der ausgewählte Textabschnitt. Wenn Sie den Mauszeiger über den eingefügten Hyperlink bewegen, wird der von Ihnen im Feld QuickInfo eingebene Text angezeigt. Sie können dem Link folgen, indem Sie die Taste STRG drücken und dann auf den Link in Ihrem Dokument klicken. Um den hinzugefügten Hyperlink zu bearbeiten oder zu entfernen, klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste auf den Link, wählen Sie dann das Optionsmenü für den Hyperlink aus und klicken Sie anschließend auf Hyperlink bearbeiten oder Hyperlink entfernen." }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/AddWatermark.htm", + "title": "Wasserzeichen hinzufügen", + "body": "Ein Wasserzeichen ist ein Text oder Bild, welches unter dem Haupttextbereich platziert ist. Text-Wasserzeichen erlaubt Ihnen Ihr Dokument mit einem Status zu versehen (bspw. Vertraulich, Entwurf usw.). Bild-Wasserzeichen erlaubt Ihnen ein Bild hinzuzufügen, bspw. Ihr Firmenlogo. Um ein Wasserzeichen in ein Dokument einzufügen: Wechseln Sie zum Layout-Tab in der Hauptmenüleiste. Klicken Sie das Wasserzeichen  Symbol in der Menüleiste und wählen Sie die Option Benutzerdefiniertes Wasserzeichen aus dem Menü. Danach erscheint das Fenster mit den Wasserzeichen-Einstellungen. Wählen Sie die Art des Wasserzeichens: Benutzen Sie die Option Text-Wasserzeichen und passen Sie die Parameter an: Sprache - wählen Sie eine Sprache aus der Liste. Text - wählen Sie einen verfügbaren Text der gewählten Sprache aus. Für Deutsch sind die folgenden Text-Optionen verfügbar: BEISPIEL, DRINGEND, ENTWURF, KOPIE, NICHT KOPIEREN, ORIGINAL, PERSÖNLICH, VERTRAULICH, STRENG VERTRAULICH. Schriftart - wählen Sie die Schriftart und Größe aus der entsprechenden Drop-Down-Liste. Benutzen Sie die Symbole rechts daneben, um Farbe und Schriftdekoration zu setzen: Fett, Kursiv, Unterstrichen, Durchgestrichen, Halbtransparent - benutzen Sie diese Option, um Transparenz anzuwenden. Layout - wählen Sie Diagonal oder Horizontal. Benutzen Sie die Option Bild-Wasserzeichen und passen Sie die Parameter an: Wählen Sie die Bild-Datei aus einer der beiden Optionen: Aus Datei oder Aus URL - das Bild wird als Vorschau rechts in dem Fenster dargestellt. Maßstab - wählen Sie die notwendige Skalierung aus: Automatisch, 500%, 200%, 150%, 100%, 50%. Bestätigen Sie die Einstellungen mit OK. Um ein Wasserzeichen zu bearbeiten, öffnen Sie das Fenster mit den Wasserzeichen-Einstellungen wie oben beschrieben, ändern Sie die benötigten Parameter und speichern dies mit OK. Um ein Wasserzeichen zu löschen, klicken Sie das Wasserzeichen  Symbol in der Menüleiste und wählen Sie die Option Wasserzeichen entfernen aus dem Menü. Sie können auch die Option Kein aus dem Fenster mit den Wasserzeichen-Einstellungen benutzen." + }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/AlignArrangeObjects.htm", "title": "Objekte auf einer Seite anordnen und ausrichten", - "body": "Die hinzugefügten Autoformen, Bilder, Diagramme und Textboxen können auf einer Seite ausgerichtet, gruppiert und angeordnet werden. Um eine dieser Aktionenauszuführen, wählen Sie zuerst ein einzelnes Objekt oder mehrere Objekte auf der Seite aus. Um mehrere Objekte zu wählen, halten Sie die Taste STRG gedrückt und klicken Sie auf die gewünschten Objekte. Um ein Textfeld auszuwählen, klicken Sie auf den Rahmen und nicht auf den darin befindlichen Text. Danach können Sie über Symbole in der Registerkarte Layout navigieren, die nachstehend beschrieben werden, oder die entsprechenden Optionen aus dem Rechtsklickmenü nutzen. Objekte ausrichten Um das/die ausgewählte(n) Objekt(e) auszurichten, klicken Sie auf das Symbol Ausrichten in der Registerkarte Layout und wählen Sie den gewünschten Ausrichtungstyp aus der Liste aus: Linksbündig ausrichten - um Objekte horizontal am linken Seitenrand auszurichten. Mittig ausrichten - um Objekte horizontal zentriert auf der Seite auszurichten. Rechtsbündig ausrichten - um Objekte horizontal am rechten Seitenrand auszurichten. Oben ausrichten - um Objekte vertikal am oberen Seitenrand auszurichten. Vertikal zentrieren - um Objekte vertikal zentriert auf der Seite auszurichten Unten ausrichten - um Objekte vertikal am unteren Seitenrand auszurichten. Objekte gruppieren Um zwei oder mehr Objekte zu gruppieren oder die Gruppierung aufzuheben, klicken Sie auf das Symbol Gruppieren in der Registerkarte Layout und wählen Sie die gewünschte Option aus der Liste aus: Gruppierung - um mehrere Objekte zu einer Gruppe zusammenzufügen, so dass sie gleichzeitig rotiert, verschoben, skaliert, ausgerichtet, angeordnet, kopiert, eingefügt und formatiert werden können, wie ein einzelnes Objekt. Gruppierung aufheben - um die gewählte Gruppe der vorher vereinigten Objekte aufzulösen. Alternativ können Sie mit der rechten Maustaste auf die ausgewählten Objekte klicken, wählen Sie anschließend im Kontextmenü die Option Anordnung aus und nutzen Sie dann die Optionen Gruppieren oder Gruppierung aufheben. Objekte anordnen Um Objekte anzuordnen (z.B. die Reihenfolge bei einer Überlappung zu ändern), klicken Sie auf die Smbole eine Ebene nach vorne und eine Ebene nach hinten in der Registerkarte Layout und wählen Sie die gewünschte Anordnung aus der Liste aus. Um das/die ausgewählte(n) Objekt(e) nach vorne zu bringen, klicken Sie auf das Symbol Eine Ebene nach vorne in der Registerkarte Layout und wählen Sie den gewünschten Ausrichtungstyp aus der Liste aus: In den Vordergrund - ein Objekte in den Vordergrund schieben, Eine Ebene nach vorne - um die Objekte eine Ebene nach vorne zu schieben. Um das/die ausgewählte(n) Objekt(e) nach hinten zu verschieben, klicken Sie auf den Pfeil nach hinten verschieben in der Registerkarte Layout und wählen Sie den gewünschten Ausrichtungstyp aus der Liste aus: In den Hintergrunde um ein Objekt/Objekte in den Hintergrund zu schieben. Eine Ebene nach hinten - um ausgewählte Objekte nur eine Ebene nach hinten zu schieben." + "body": "Die hinzugefügten Autoformen, Bilder, Diagramme und Textboxen können auf einer Seite ausgerichtet, gruppiert und angeordnet werden. Um eine dieser Aktionen auszuführen, wählen Sie zuerst ein einzelnes Objekt oder mehrere Objekte auf der Seite aus. Um mehrere Objekte zu wählen, halten Sie die Taste STRG gedrückt und klicken Sie auf die gewünschten Objekte. Um ein Textfeld auszuwählen, klicken Sie auf den Rahmen und nicht auf den darin befindlichen Text. Danach können Sie über Symbole in der Registerkarte Layout navigieren, die nachstehend beschrieben werden, oder die entsprechenden Optionen aus dem Rechtsklickmenü nutzen. Objekte ausrichten Ausrichten von zwei oder mehr ausgewählten Objekten: Klicken Sie auf das Symbol ausrichten auf der oberen Symbolleiste in der Registerkarte Layout und wählen Sie eine der verfügbaren Optionen: An Seite ausrichten, um Objekte relativ zu den Rändern der Seite auszurichten. Am Seitenrand ausrichten, um Objekte relativ zu den Seitenrändern auszurichten. Ausgewählte Objekte ausrichten (diese Option ist standardmäßig ausgewählt), um Objekte im Verhältnis zueinander auszurichten. Klicken Sie erneut auf das Symbol ausrichten und wählen Sie den gewünschten Ausrichtungstyp aus der Liste aus: Linksbündig ausrichten - Objekte horizontal am linken Rand des am weitesten links befindlichen Objekts/linken Rand der Seite/linken Seitenrands ausrichten. Mittig ausrichten - Objekte horizontal an ihrer Mitte/der Seitenmitte/der Mitte des Abstands zwischen dem linken und rechten Seitenrand ausrichten. Rechtsbündig ausrichten - Objekte horizontal am rechten Rand des am weitesten rechts befindlichen Objekts/rechten Rand der Seite/rechten Seitenrands ausrichten. Oben ausrichten - Objekte vertikal an der Oberkante des obersten Objekts/der Oberkante der Seite/des oberen Seitenrands ausrichten. Mitte ausrichten - Objekte vertikal an ihrer Mitte/Seitenmitte/ Zwischenraummitte zwischen dem oberen und unteren Seitenrand ausrichten. Unten ausrichten - Objekte vertikal an der Unterkante des unteresten Objekts/der Unterkante der Seite/des unteren Seitenrands ausrichten. Alternativ können Sie mit der rechten Maustaste auf die ausgewählten Objekte klicken, wählen Sie anschließend im Kontextmenü die Option Ausrichten aus und nutzen Sie dann eine der verfügbaren Ausrichtungsoptionen. Wenn Sie ein einzelnes Objekt ausrichten möchten, kann es relativ zu den Rändern des Blatts oder zu den Seitenrändern ausgerichtet werden. Die Option An Rand ausrichten ist in diesem Fall standardmäßig ausgewählt. Objekte verteilen Drei oder mehr ausgewählte Objekte horizontal oder vertikal so verteilen, dass der gleiche Abstand zwischen ihnen angezeigt wird: Klicken Sie auf das Symbol ausrichten auf der oberen Symbolleiste in der Registerkarte Layout und wählen Sie eine der verfügbaren Optionen: An Seite ausrichten, um Objekte zwischen den Rändern der Seite zu verteilen. An Seitenrand ausrichten, um Objekte zwischen den Seitenrändern zu verteilen. Ausgewählte Objekte ausrichten (diese Option ist standardmäßig ausgewählt), um Objekte zwischen zwei ausgewählten äußersten Objekten zu verteilen. Klicken Sie erneut auf das Symbol Ausrichten und wählen Sie den gewünschten Verteilungstyp aus der Liste aus: Horizontal verteilen - um Objekte gleichmäßig zwischen den am weitesten links und rechts liegenden ausgewählten Objekten/dem linken und rechten Seitenrand zu verteilen. Vertikal verteilen - um Objekte gleichmäßig zwischen den am weitesten oben und unten liegenden ausgewählten Objekten / dem oberen und unteren Rand der Seite zu verteilen. Alternativ können Sie mit der rechten Maustaste auf die ausgewählten Objekte klicken, wählen Sie anschließend im Kontextmenü die Option Ausrichten aus und nutzen Sie dann eine der verfügbaren Verteilungsoptionen. Hinweis: Die Verteilungsoptionen sind deaktiviert, wenn Sie weniger als drei Objekte auswählen. Objekte gruppieren Um zwei oder mehr Objekte zu gruppieren oder die Gruppierung aufzuheben, klicken Sie auf den Pfeil links neben dem Symbol Gruppieren in der Registerkarte Layout und wählen Sie die gewünschte Option aus der Liste aus: Gruppieren - um mehrere Objekte zu einer Gruppe zusammenzufügen, so dass sie gleichzeitig gedreht, verschoben, skaliert, ausgerichtet, angeordnet, kopiert, eingefügt und formatiert werden können, wie ein einzelnes Objekt. Gruppierung aufheben - um die ausgewählte Gruppe der zuvor gruppierten Objekte aufzulösen. Alternativ können Sie mit der rechten Maustaste auf die ausgewählten Objekte klicken, wählen Sie anschließend im Kontextmenü die Option Anordnung aus und nutzen Sie dann die Optionen Gruppieren oder Gruppierung aufheben. Hinweis: Die Option Gruppieren ist deaktiviert, wenn Sie weniger als zwei Objekte auswählen. Die Option Gruppierung aufheben ist nur verfügbar, wenn Sie eine zuvor gruppierte Objektgruppe auswählen. Objekte anordnen Um Objekte anzuordnen (z.B. die Reihenfolge bei einer Überlappung zu ändern), klicken Sie auf die Smbole eine Ebene nach vorne und eine Ebene nach hinten in der Registerkarte Layout und wählen Sie die gewünschte Anordnung aus der Liste aus. Um das/die ausgewählte(n) Objekt(e) nach vorne zu bringen, klicken Sie auf das Symbol Eine Ebene nach vorne in der Registerkarte Layout und wählen Sie den gewünschten Ausrichtungstyp aus der Liste aus: In den Vordergrund - Objekt(e) in den Vordergrund bringen. Eine Ebene nach vorne - um ausgewählte Objekte eine Ebene nach vorne zu schieben. Um das/die ausgewählte(n) Objekt(e) nach hinten zu verschieben, klicken Sie auf den Pfeil nach hinten verschieben in der Registerkarte Layout und wählen Sie den gewünschten Ausrichtungstyp aus der Liste aus: In den Hintergrund - um ein Objekt/Objekte in den Hintergrund zu schieben. Eine Ebene nach hinten - um ausgewählte Objekte nur eine Ebene nach hinten zu schieben. Alternativ können Sie mit der rechten Maustaste auf die ausgewählten Objekte klicken, wählen Sie anschließend im Kontextmenü die Option Anordnen aus und nutzen Sie dann eine der verfügbaren Optionen." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/AlignText.htm", "title": "Text in einem Absatz ausrichten", - "body": "Üblicherweise unterscheidet man zwischen vier verschiedenen Textausrichtungen: linksbündig, rechtsbündig, Blocksatz, zentriert. Text ausrichten: Bewegen Sie den Cursor an die Stelle an der Sie den Text ausrichten möchten (dabei kann es sich um eine neue Zeile oder um bereits eingegebenen Text handeln). Wechseln Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf die Registerkarte Start. Wählen Sie den gewünschten Ausrichtungstyp: Um den Text linksbündig auszurichten (der linke Textrand wird am linken Seitenrand ausgerichtet, der rechte Textrand bleibt wie vorher), klicken Sie aufs Symbol Linksbündig auf der oberen Symbolleiste. Um den Text zentriert auszurichten (rechter und linker Textrand bleiben ungleichmäßig), klicken Sie aufs Symbol Zentriert auf der oberen Symbolleiste. Um den Text rechtsbündig auszurichten (der rechte Textrand verläuft parallel zum rechten Seitenrand, der linke Textrand bleibt ungleichmäßig), klicken Sie auf der oberen Symbolleiste auf das Symbol Rechtsbündig . Um den Text im Blocksatz auszurichten (der Text wird gleichmäßig ausgerichtet, dazu werden zusätzliche Leerräume im Text eingefügt), klicken Sie aufs Symbol Blocksatz auf der oberen Symbolleiste." + "body": "Üblicherweise unterscheidet man zwischen vier verschiedenen Textausrichtungen: linksbündig, rechtsbündig, Blocksatz, zentriert. Text ausrichten. Sie müssen dazu: Bewegen Sie den Zeiger an die Stelle an der Sie den Text ausrichten möchten (dabei kann es sich um eine neue Zeile oder um bereits eingegebenen Text handeln). Wechseln Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf die Registerkarte Start. Wählen Sie den gewünschten Ausrichtungstyp: Um den Text linksbündig auszurichten (der linke Textrand wird am linken Seitenrand ausgerichtet, der rechte Textrand bleibt wie vorher), klicken Sie aufs Symbol Linksbündig auf der oberen Symbolleiste. Um den Text zentriert auszurichten (rechter und linker Textrand bleiben ungleichmäßig), klicken Sie aufs Symbol Zentriert auf der oberen Symbolleiste. Um den Text rechtsbündig auszurichten (der rechte Textrand verläuft parallel zum rechten Seitenrand, der linke Textrand bleibt ungleichmäßig), klicken Sie auf der oberen Symbolleiste auf das Symbol Rechtsbündig . Um den Text im Blocksatz auszurichten (der Text wird gleichmäßig ausgerichtet, dazu werden zusätzliche Leerräume im Text eingefügt), klicken Sie aufs Symbol Blocksatz auf der oberen Symbolleiste. Die Ausrichtungparameter sind im Paragraph - Erweiterte Einstellungen verfügbar. Klicken sie die rechte Maustaste und wählen Sie die Option Paragraph erweiterte Einstellungen von dem Rechts-Klick Menu oder benutzen Sie die Option Zeige erweiterte Einstellungen von der rechten Seitenleiste, Im Paragraph erweiterte Einstellungen, wechseln Sie zur Registrierkarte Einzug & Abstand, Selektieren Sie den Ausrichtungstypen von der Ausrichtungsliste: Links, Zentriert, Rechts, Blocksatz, Klicken Sie den OK Button um die Auswahlen zu bestätigen." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/BackgroundColor.htm", @@ -113,7 +123,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/ChangeColorScheme.htm", "title": "Farbschema ändern", - "body": "Farbschemata werden auf das gesamte Dokument angewendet. Sie werden verwendet, um das Layout Ihres Dokuments zu verändern und definieren die Palette der Designfarben für Dokumentenelemente (Schrift, Hintergrund, Tabellen, AutoFormen, Diagramme). Wenn Sie bestimmte Designfarben auf Dokumentenelemente angewendet haben und dann ein anderes Farbschema auswählen, ändern sich die Farben in Ihrem Dokument entsprechend. Um ein Farbschema zu ändern, klicken Sie auf den Abwärtspfeil neben dem Symbol Farbschema ändern in der Registerkarte Start und wählen Sie aus den verfügbaren Vorgaben das gewünschte Farbschema aus: Office, Graustufen, Apex, Aspect, Civic, Concourse, Equity, Flow, Foundry, Median, Metro, Module, Odulent, Oriel, Origin, Paper, Solstice, Technic, Trek, Urban, Verve. Wenn Sie das gewünschte Farbschema ausgewählt haben, können Sie im Fenster Farbpalette die Farben für das jeweilige Dokumentelement auswählen, auf das Sie die Farbe anwenden möchten. Bei den meisten Dokumentelementen können Sie auf das Fenster mit der Farbpalette zugreifen, indem Sie das gewünschte Element markieren und in der rechten Seitenleiste auf das farbige Feld klicken. Für die Schriftfarbe kann dieses Fenster über den Abwärtspfeil neben dem Symbol Schriftfarbe in der Registerkarte Start geöffnet werden. Folgende Auswahlmöglichkeiten stehen zur Verfügung: Designfarben - die Farben, die dem gewählten Farbschema der Tabelle entsprechen. Standardfarben - die festgelegten Standardfarben. Werden durch das gewählte Farbschema nicht beeinflusst. Benutzerdefinierte Farbe - klicken Sie auf diese Option, wenn Ihre gewünschte Farbe nicht in der Palette mit verfügbaren Farben enthalten ist. Wählen Sie den gewünschten Farbbereich aus, indem Sie den vertikalen Farbregler verschieben und die entsprechende Farbe festlegen, indem Sie den Farbwähler innerhalb des großen quadratischen Farbfelds ziehen. Sobald Sie eine Farbe mit dem Farbwähler bestimmt haben, werden die entsprechenden RGB- und sRGB-Farbwerte in den Feldern auf der rechten Seite angezeigt. Sie können eine Farbe auch anhand des RGB-Farbmodells bestimmen, indem Sie die gewünschten nummerischen Werte in den Feldern R, G, B (Rot, Grün, Blau) festlegen oder den sRGB-Hexadezimalcode in das Feld mit dem #-Zeichen eingeben. Die gewählte Farbe erscheint im Vorschaufeld Neu. Wenn das Objekt vorher mit einer benutzerdefinierten Farbe gefüllt war, wird diese Farbe im Feld Aktuell angezeigt, so dass Sie die Originalfarbe und die Zielfarbe vergleichen könnten. Wenn Sie die Farbe festgelegt haben, klicken Sie auf Hinzufügen. Die benutzerdefinierte Farbe wird auf das ausgewählte Element angewendet und zur Palette Benutzerdefinierte Farbe hinzugefügt." + "body": "Farbschemata werden auf das gesamte Dokument angewendet. Sie werden verwendet, um das Aussehen Ihres Dokuments zu verändern, da sie die Palette der Designfarben für Dokumentenelemente (Schrift, Hintergrund, Tabellen, AutoFormen, Diagramme). Wenn Sie bestimmte Designfarben auf Dokumentenelemente angewendet haben und dann ein anderes Farbschema auswählen, ändern sich die Farben in Ihrem Dokument entsprechend. Um ein Farbschema zu ändern, klicken Sie auf den Abwärtspfeil neben dem Symbol Farbschema ändern in der Registerkarte Start auf der Haupt-Symbolleiste und wählen Sie aus den verfügbaren Vorgaben das gewünschte Farbschema aus: Office, Graustufen, Apex, Aspect, Civic, Concourse, Equity, Flow, Foundry, Median, Metro, Module, Odulent, Oriel, Origin, Paper, Solstice, Technic, Trek, Urban, Verve. Das ausgewählte Farbschema wird in der Liste hervorgehoben. Wenn Sie das gewünschte Farbschema ausgewählt haben, können Sie im Fenster Farbpalette die Farben für das jeweilige Dokumentelement auswählen, auf das Sie die Farbe anwenden möchten. Bei den meisten Dokumentelementen können Sie auf das Fenster mit der Farbpalette zugreifen, indem Sie das gewünschte Element markieren und in der rechten Seitenleiste auf das farbige Feld klicken. Für die Schriftfarbe kann dieses Fenster über den Abwärtspfeil neben dem Symbol Schriftfarbe in der Registerkarte Start geöffnet werden. Folgende Farbauswahlmöglichkeiten stehen zur Verfügung: Designfarben - die Farben, die dem gewählten Farbschema der Tabelle entsprechen. Standardfarben - die festgelegten Standardfarben. Werden durch das gewählte Farbschema nicht beeinflusst. Benutzerdefinierte Farbe - klicken Sie auf diese Option, wenn Ihre gewünschte Farbe nicht in der Palette mit verfügbaren Farben enthalten ist. Wählen Sie den gewünschten Farbbereich aus, in dem Sie den vertikalen Farbregler verschieben und die entsprechende Farbe festlegen, in dem Sie den Farbwähler innerhalb des großen quadratischen Farbfelds ziehen. Sobald Sie eine Farbe mit dem Farbwähler bestimmt haben, werden die entsprechenden RGB- und sRGB-Farbwerte in den Feldern auf der rechten Seite angezeigt. Sie können eine Farbe auch anhand des RGB-Farbmodells bestimmen, indem Sie die gewünschten nummerischen Werte in den Feldern R, G, B (Rot, Grün, Blau) festlegen oder den sRGB-Hexadezimalcode in das Feld mit dem #-Zeichen eingeben. Die gewählte Farbe erscheint im Vorschaufeld Neu. Wenn das Objekt vorher mit einer benutzerdefinierten Farbe gefüllt war, wird diese Farbe im Feld Aktuell angezeigt, so dass Sie die Originalfarbe und die Zielfarbe vergleichen könnten. Wenn Sie die Farbe festgelegt haben, klicken Sie auf Hinzufügen. Die benutzerdefinierte Farbe wird auf das ausgewählte Element angewendet und zur Palette Benutzerdefinierte Farbe hinzugefügt." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/ChangeWrappingStyle.htm", @@ -127,13 +137,13 @@ var indexes = }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/CopyPasteUndoRedo.htm", - "title": "Textpassagen kopieren/einfügen, Aktionen rückgängig machen/wiederholen", - "body": "Zwischenablage verwenden Um Textpassagen und eingefügte Objekte (AutoFormen, Bilder, Diagramme) innerhalb des aktuellen Dokuments auszuschneiden, zu kopieren und einzufügen, verwenden Sie die entsprechenden Optionen aus dem Rechtsklickmenü oder die Symbole, die auf jeder Registerkarte der oberen Symbolleiste verfügbar sind: Ausschneiden - wählen Sie eine Textpassage oder ein Objekt aus und nutzen Sie die Option Ausschneiden im Rechtsklickmenü, um die Auswahl zu löschen und in der Zwischenablage des Rechners zu speichern. Die ausgeschnittenen Daten können später an einer anderen Stelle im selben Dokument wieder eingefügt werden. Kopieren – wählen Sie eine Textpassage oder ein Objekt aus und nutzen Sie die Option Kopieren im Rechtsklickmenü oder das Symbol Kopieren in der oberen Symbolleiste, um die Auswahl in der Zwischenablage des Rechners zu speichern. Die kopierten Daten können später an einer anderen Stelle im selben Dokument wieder eingefügt werden. Einfügen – platzieren Sie den Cursor an der Stelle im Dokument, an der Sie den zuvor kopierten Text/das Objekt einfügen möchten und wählen Sie im Rechtsklickmenü die Option Einfügen oder klicken Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf Einfügen . Der Text/das Objekt wird an der aktuellen Cursorposition eingefügt. Die Daten können vorher aus demselben Dokument kopiert werden oder auch aus einem anderen Dokument oder Programm oder von einer Webseite. Alternativ können Sie auch die folgenden Tastenkombinationen verwenden, um Daten aus einem anderen Dokument oder Programm zu kopieren oder einzufügen: STRG+X - Ausschneiden STRG+C - Kopieren STRG+V - Einfügen Hinweis: Anstatt Text innerhalb desselben Dokuments auszuschneiden und einzufügen, können Sie die erforderliche Textpassage einfach auswählen und an die gewünschte Position ziehen und ablegen. Inhalte einfügen mit Optionen Nachdem der kopierte Text eingefügt wurde, erscheint neben der eingefügten Textpassage das Menü Einfügeoptionen . Klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche, um die gewünschte Einfügeoption auszuwählen. Zum Einfügen von Textsegmenten oder Text in Verbindung mit AutoFormen sind folgende Optionen verfügbar: Ursprüngliche Formatierung beibehalten - der kopierte Text wird in Originalformatierung eingefügt. Nur den Text übernehmen - der kopierte Text wird in an die vorhandene Formatierung angepasst. Wenn Sie die kopierte Tabelle in eine vorhandene Tabelle einfügen, sind die folgenden Optionen verfügbar: Zellen überschreiben - vorhandenen Tabelleninhalt durch die eingefügten Daten ersetzen. Diese Option ist standardmäßig ausgewählt. Geschachtelt die kopierte Tabelle wird als geschachtelte Tabelle in die ausgewählte Zelle der vorhandenen Tabelle eingefügt. Nur den Text übernehmen - die Tabelleninhalte werden als Textwerte eingefügt, die durch das Tabulatorzeichen getrennt sind. Aktionen rückgängig machen/wiederholen Um Aktionen rückgängig zu machen/zu wiederholen, nutzen Sie die entsprechenden Symbole auf den Registerkarten in der oberen Symbolleiste oder alternativ die folgenden Tastenkombinationen: Rückgängig – klicken Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf das Symbol Rückgängig oder verwenden Sie die Tastenkombination STRG+Z, um die zuletzt durchgeführte Aktion rückgängig zu machen. Wiederholen – klicken Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf das Symbol Wiederholen oder verwenden Sie die Tastenkombination STRG+Y, um die zuletzt durchgeführte Aktion zu wiederholen." + "title": "Textpassagen kopieren/einfügen, Vorgänge rückgängig machen/wiederholen", + "body": "Zwischenablage verwenden Um Textpassagen und eingefügte Objekte (AutoFormen, Bilder, Diagramme) innerhalb des aktuellen Dokuments auszuschneiden, zu kopieren und einzufügen, verwenden Sie die entsprechenden Optionen aus dem Rechtsklickmenü oder die Symbole, die auf jeder Registerkarte der oberen Symbolleiste verfügbar sind: Ausschneiden - wählen Sie eine Textpassage oder ein Objekt aus und nutzen Sie die Option Ausschneiden im Rechtsklickmenü, um die Auswahl zu löschen und in der Zwischenablage des Rechners zu speichern. Die ausgeschnittenen Daten können später an einer anderen Stelle im selben Dokument wieder eingefügt werden. Kopieren – wählen Sie eine Textpassage oder ein Objekt aus und nutzen Sie die Option Kopieren im Rechtsklickmenü oder das Symbol Kopieren in der oberen Symbolleiste, um die Auswahl in der Zwischenablage des Rechners zu speichern. Die kopierten Daten können später an einer anderen Stelle im selben Dokument wieder eingefügt werden. Einfügen – platzieren Sie den Cursor an der Stelle im Dokument, an der Sie den zuvor kopierten Text/das Objekt einfügen möchten und wählen Sie im Rechtsklickmenü die Option Einfügen oder klicken Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf Einfügen . Der Text/das Objekt wird an der aktuellen Cursorposition eingefügt. Die Daten können vorher aus demselben Dokument kopiert werden oder auch aus einem anderen Dokument oder Programm oder von einer Webseite. In der Online-Version können nur die folgenden Tastenkombinationen zum Kopieren oder Einfügen von Daten aus/in ein anderes Dokument oder ein anderes Programm verwendet werden. In der Desktop-Version können sowohl die entsprechenden Schaltflächen/Menüoptionen als auch Tastenkombinationen für alle Kopier-/Einfügevorgänge verwendet werden: STRG+X - Ausschneiden; STRG+C - Kopieren; STRG+V - Einfügen. Hinweis: Anstatt Text innerhalb desselben Dokuments auszuschneiden und einzufügen, können Sie die erforderliche Textpassage einfach auswählen und an die gewünschte Position ziehen und ablegen. Inhalte einfügen mit Optionen Nachdem der kopierte Text eingefügt wurde, erscheint neben der eingefügten Textpassage das Menü Einfügeoptionen . Klicken Sie auf diese Schaltfläche, um die gewünschte Einfügeoption auszuwählen. Zum Einfügen von Textsegmenten oder Text in Verbindung mit AutoFormen sind folgende Optionen verfügbar: Ursprüngliche Formatierung beibehalten - der kopierte Text wird in Originalformatierung eingefügt. Nur den Text übernehmen - der kopierte Text wird in an die vorhandene Formatierung angepasst. Wenn Sie die kopierte Tabelle in eine vorhandene Tabelle einfügen, sind die folgenden Optionen verfügbar: Zellen überschreiben - vorhandenen Tabelleninhalt durch die eingefügten Daten ersetzen. Diese Option ist standardmäßig ausgewählt. Geschachtelt die kopierte Tabelle wird als geschachtelte Tabelle in die ausgewählte Zelle der vorhandenen Tabelle eingefügt. Nur den Text übernehmen - die Tabelleninhalte werden als Textwerte eingefügt, die durch das Tabulatorzeichen getrennt sind. Vorgänge rückgängig machen/wiederholen Verwenden Sie die entsprechenden Symbole, um Vorgänge rückgängig zu machen/zu wiederholen oder nutzen Sie die entsprechenden Tastenkombinationen: Rückgängig – klicken Sie im linken Teil der Kopfzeile des Editors auf das Symbol Rückgängig oder verwenden Sie die Tastenkombination STRG+Z, um die zuletzt durchgeführte Aktion rückgängig zu machen. Wiederholen – klicken Sie im linken Teil der Kopfzeile des Editors auf das Symbol Wiederholen oder verwenden Sie die Tastenkombination STRG+Y, um die zuletzt durchgeführte Aktion zu wiederholen. Hinweis: Wenn Sie ein Dokument im Modus Schnell gemeinsam bearbeiten, ist die Option letzten rückgängig gemachten Vorgang wiederherstellen nicht verfügbar." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/CreateLists.htm", "title": "Listen erstellen", - "body": "Liste in einem Dokument erstellen: Bewegen Sie den Cursor an die Stelle, wo Sie die Liste beginnen möchten (dabei kann es sich um eine neue Zeile handeln oder eine bereits vorhandene). Wechseln Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf die Registerkarte Start. Wählen Sie den gewünschten Listentyp aus: Aufzählung mit Markern - klicken Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf das Symbol Aufzählungszeichen Nummerierte Liste mit Zahlen oder Buchstaben - klicken Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf das Symbol Nummerierte Liste Hinweis: Mit dem schwarzen Pfeil neben dem Symbol Aufzählungszeichen oder Nummerierung, können Sie das Format der Liste näher bestimmen. Jedes Mal, wenn Sie nun am Zeilenende die Eingabetaste drücken, erscheint eine neue Aufzählung oder eine neue Position der nummerierten Liste. Um die Liste zu beenden, drücken Sie die Rücktaste und fahren Sie mit einem üblichen Textabsatz fort. Das Programm erstellt automatisch nummerierte Listen, wenn Sie die Ziffer 1 mit einem Punkt oder einer Klammer und einem Leerzeichen eingeben: 1., 1). Listen mit Aufzählungszeichen können automatisch erstellt werden, wenn Sie die Zeichen -, * mit einem nachfolgenden Leerzeichen eingeben. Sie können den Texteinzug in den Listen und die dazugehörigen Verschachtelung ändern. Klicken Sie dazu auf in der oberen Symbolleiste auf der Registerkarte Start auf Mehrstufige Liste , Einzung verkleinern und Einzug vergrößern . Hinweis: Die zusätzlichen Einzugs- und Abstandparameter können im rechten Seitenbereich und im Fenster mit den erweiterten Einstellungen geändert werden. Weitere Informationen dazu erhalten Sie in den Abschnitten Absatzeinzüge ändern und Zeilenabstand festlegen. Listen verbinden und trennen Eine Liste mit der vorherigen Liste zusammenfügen: Klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste auf den ersten Eintrag der zweiten Liste. Wählen Sie im Kontextmenü die Option Mit vorheriger Liste verbinden. Die Listen werden zusammengefügt und die Nummerierung wird gemäß der ersten Listennummerierung fortgesetzt. Eine Liste trennen: Klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste auf das Listenelement, mit dem Sie eine neue Liste beginnen möchten. Wählen Sie im Kontextmenü die Option Liste trennen. Die Liste wird getrennt und die Nummerierung in der zweiten Liste beginnt von vorne. Nummerierung ändern So können Sie die fortlaufende Nummerierung in der zweiten Liste gemäß der vorherigen Listennummerierung fortsetzen: Klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste auf den ersten Eintrag der zweiten Liste. Wählen Sie im Kontextmenü die Option Fortlaufende Nummerierung. Die Nummerierung wird gemäß der ersten Listennummerierung fortgesetzt. Einen individuellen Anfangswert für die Nummerierung festlegen: Klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste auf das Listenelement, dem Sie einen neuen Nummerierungswert zuweisen möchten. Wählen Sie im Kontextmenü die Option Nummerierungswert festlegen. Legen Sie im sich nun öffnenden Fester den gewünschten Zahlenwert fest und klicken Sie dann auf OK." + "body": "Um eine Liste in Ihrem Dokument zu erstellen, Plazieren Sie den Zeiger an der Stelle, an der eine Liste gestartet wird (dies kann eine neue Zeile oder der bereits eingegebene Text sein). Wechseln Sie zur Registerkarte Startseite der oberen Symbolleiste. Wählen Sie den Listentyp aus, den Sie starten möchten: Eine ungeordnete Liste mit Markierungen wird mithilfe des Aufzählungssymbols in der oberen Symbolleiste erstellt Die geordnete Liste mit Ziffern oder Buchstaben wird mithilfe des Nummerierungssymbols in der oberen Symbolleiste erstellt Hinweis: Klicken Sie auf den Abwärtspfeil neben dem Symbol Aufzählungszeichen oder Nummerierung, um auszuwählen, wie die Liste aussehen soll. Jedes Mal, wenn Sie die Eingabetaste am Ende der Zeile drücken, wird ein neues geordnetes oder ungeordnetes Listenelement angezeigt. Um dies zu stoppen, drücken Sie die Rücktaste und fahren Sie mit dem allgemeinen Textabsatz fort. Das Programm erstellt auch automatisch nummerierte Listen, wenn Sie Ziffer 1 mit einem Punkt oder einer Klammer und einem Leerzeichen danach eingeben: 1., 1). Listen mit Aufzählungszeichen können automatisch erstellt werden, wenn Sie die Zeichen -, * und ein Leerzeichen danach eingeben. Sie können den Texteinzug in den Listen und ihre Verschachtelung auch mithilfe der Symbole Mehrstufige Liste , Einzug verringern und Einzug vergrößern auf der Registerkarte Startseite der oberen Symbolleiste ändern.. Hinweis: Die zusätzlichen Einrückungs- und Abstandsparameter können in der rechten Seitenleiste und im Fenster mit den erweiterten Einstellungen geändert werden. Weitere Informationen finden Sie im Abschnitt Ändern von Absatzeinzügen und Festlegen des Absatzzeilenabstands. Listen verbinden und trennen So verbinden Sie eine Liste mit der vorhergehenden: Klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste auf das erste Element der zweiten Liste, Verwenden Sie die Option Mit vorheriger Liste verbinden aus dem Kontextmenü. Die Listen werden zusammengefügt und die Nummerierung wird gemäß der ersten Listennummerierung fortgesetzt. So trennen Sie eine Liste: Klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste auf das Listenelement, mit dem Sie eine neue Liste beginnen möchten. Verwenden Sie die Option Liste trennen aus dem Kontextmenü. Die Liste wird getrennt und die Nummerierung in der zweiten Liste beginnt von neuem. Nummerierung ändern So setzen Sie die fortlaufende Nummerierung in der zweiten Liste gemäß der vorherigen Listennummerierung fort: Klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste auf das erste Element der zweiten Liste. Verwenden Sie die Option Nummerierung fortsetzen im Kontextmenü. Die Nummerierung wird gemäß der ersten Listennummerierung fortgesetzt. So legen Sie einen bestimmten Nummerierungsanfangswert fest: Klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste auf das Listenelement, auf das Sie einen neuen Nummerierungswert anwenden möchten. Verwenden Sie die Option Nummerierungswert festlegen aus dem Kontextmenü. Stellen Sie in einem neuen Fenster, das geöffnet wird, den erforderlichen numerischen Wert ein und klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche OK. Ändern Sie die Listeneinstellungen So ändern Sie die Listeneinstellungen mit Aufzählungszeichen oder nummerierten Listen, z. B. Aufzählungszeichen / Nummerntyp, Ausrichtung, Größe und Farbe: Klicken Sie auf ein vorhandenes Listenelement oder wählen Sie den Text aus, den Sie als Liste formatieren möchten. Klicken Sie auf der Registerkarte Startseite der oberen Symbolleiste auf das Symbol Aufzählungszeichen oder Nummerierung . Wählen Sie die Option Listeneinstellungen. Das Fenster Listeneinstellungen wird geöffnet. Das Fenster mit den Listen mit Aufzählungszeichen sieht folgendermaßen aus: Das Fenster mit den nummerierten Listeneinstellungen sieht folgendermaßen aus: Für die Liste mit Aufzählungszeichen können Sie ein Zeichen auswählen, das als Aufzählungszeichen verwendet wird, während Sie für die nummerierte Liste den Nummerierungstyp auswählen können. Die Optionen Ausrichtung, Größe und Farbe sind sowohl für die Listen mit Aufzählungszeichen als auch für die nummerierten Listen gleich. Aufzählungszeichen - Ermöglicht die Auswahl des erforderlichen Zeichens für die Aufzählungsliste. Wenn Sie auf das Feld Schriftart und Symbol klicken, wird das Symbolfenster geöffnet, in dem Sie eines der verfügbaren Zeichen auswählen können. Weitere Informationen zum Arbeiten mit Symbolen finden Sie in diesem Artikel. Typ - Ermöglicht die Auswahl des erforderlichen Nummerierungstyps für die nummerierte Liste. Folgende Optionen stehen zur Verfügung: Keine, 1, 2, 3, ..., a, b, c, ..., A, B, C, ..., i, ii, iii, ..., I, II, III, .... Ausrichtung - Ermöglicht die Auswahl des erforderlichen Typs für die Ausrichtung von Aufzählungszeichen / Zahlen, mit dem Aufzählungszeichen / Zahlen horizontal innerhalb des dafür vorgesehenen Bereichs ausgerichtet werden. Folgende Ausrichtungstypen stehen zur Verfügung: Links, Mitte, Rechts. Größe - Ermöglicht die Auswahl der erforderlichen Aufzählungszeichen- / Zahlengröße. Die Option Wie ein Text ist standardmäßig ausgewählt. Wenn diese Option ausgewählt ist, entspricht die Aufzählungszeichen- oder Zahlengröße der Textgröße. Sie können eine der vordefinierten Größen von 8 bis 96 auswählen. Farbe - Ermöglicht die Auswahl der erforderlichen Aufzählungszeichen- / Zahlenfarbe. Die Option Wie ein Text ist standardmäßig ausgewählt. Wenn diese Option ausgewählt ist, entspricht die Aufzählungszeichen- oder Zahlenfarbe der Textfarbe. Sie können die Option Automatisch auswählen, um die automatische Farbe anzuwenden, oder eine der Themenfarben oder Standardfarben in der Palette auswählen oder eine benutzerdefinierte Farbe angeben. Alle Änderungen werden im Feld Vorschau angezeigt. Klicken Sie auf OK, um die Änderungen zu übernehmen und das Einstellungsfenster zu schließen. So ändern Sie die Einstellungen für mehrstufige Listen: Klicken Sie auf ein Listenelement. Klicken Sie auf der Registerkarte Startseite der oberen Symbolleiste auf das Symbol Mehrstufige Liste . Wählen Sie die Option Listeneinstellungen. Das Fenster Listeneinstellungen wird geöffnet. Das Fenster mit den Einstellungen für mehrstufige Listen sieht folgendermaßen aus: Wählen Sie die gewünschte Ebene der Liste im Feld Ebene links aus und passen Sie das Aufzählungszeichen oder die Zahl mit den Schaltflächen oben an Aussehen für die ausgewählte Ebene: Typ - Ermöglicht die Auswahl des erforderlichen Nummerierungstyps für die nummerierte Liste oder des erforderlichen Zeichens für die Liste mit Aufzählungszeichen. Für die nummerierte Liste stehen folgende Optionen zur Verfügung: Keine, 1, 2, 3, ..., a, b, c, ..., A, B, C, ..., i, ii, iii, .. ., I, II, III, .... Für die Liste mit Aufzählungszeichen können Sie eines der Standardsymbole auswählen oder die Option Neues Aufzählungszeichen verwenden. Wenn Sie auf diese Option klicken, wird das Symbolfenster geöffnet, in dem Sie eines der verfügbaren Zeichen auswählen können. Weitere Informationen zum Arbeiten mit Symbolen finden Sie in diesem Artikel. Ausrichtung - Ermöglicht die Auswahl des erforderlichen Typs für die Ausrichtung von Aufzählungszeichen / Zahlen, mit dem Aufzählungszeichen / Zahlen horizontal innerhalb des am Anfang des Absatzes dafür vorgesehenen Bereichs ausgerichtet werden. Folgende Ausrichtungstypen stehen zur Verfügung: Links, Mitte, Rechts. Größe - Ermöglicht die Auswahl der erforderlichen Aufzählungszeichen- / Zahlengröße. Die Option Wie ein Text ist standardmäßig ausgewählt. Sie können eine der vordefinierten Größen von 8 bis 96 auswählen. Farbe - Ermöglicht die Auswahl der erforderlichen Aufzählungszeichen- / Zahlenfarbe. Die Option Wie ein Text ist standardmäßig ausgewählt. Wenn diese Option ausgewählt ist, entspricht die Aufzählungszeichen- oder Zahlenfarbe der Textfarbe. Sie können die Option Automatisch auswählen, um die automatische Farbe anzuwenden, oder eine der Themenfarben oder Standardfarben in der Palette auswählen oder eine benutzerdefinierte Farbe angeben. Alle Änderungen werden im Feld Vorschau angezeigt. Klicken Sie auf OK, um die Änderungen zu übernehmen und das Einstellungsfenster zu schließen." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/CreateTableOfContents.htm", @@ -143,12 +153,12 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/DecorationStyles.htm", "title": "Dekoschriften anwenden", - "body": "Das Symbol für Dekoschriften finden sie unter der Registerkarte Start in der oberen Symbolleiste. Hinweis: Wenn Sie die Formatierung auf Text anwenden möchten, der bereits im Dokument vorhanden ist, wählen Sie diesen mit der Maus oder mithilfe der Tastatur aus und legen Sie die gewünschte Formatierung fest. Fett Dient dazu eine Textstelle durch fette Schrift hervorzuheben. Kursiv Dient dazu eine Textstelle durch die Schrägstellung der Zeichen hervorzuheben. Unterstrichen Wird verwendet, um den gewählten Textabschnitt mit einer Linie zu unterstreichen. Durchgestrichen Wird verwendet, um den gewählten Textabschnitt mit einer Linie durchzustreichen. Hochgestellt Wird verwendet, um den gewählten Textabschnitt kleiner zu machen und ihn im oberen Teil der Textzeile unterzubringen, wie in Brüchen. Tiefgestellt Wird verwendet, um den gewählten Textabschnitt kleiner zu machen und ihn im unteren Teil der Textzeile unterzubringen, wie beispielsweise in chemischen Formeln. Um auf erweiterte Schrifteinstellungen zuzugreifen, klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste und wählen Sie die Option Absatz - Erweiterte Einstellungen im Menü oder nutzen Sie den Link Erweiterte Einstellungen anzeigen in der rechten Seitenleiste. Das Fenster Absatz - Erweiterte Einstellungen öffnet sich, wechseln sie nun in die Registerkarte Schriftart. Hier stehen Ihnen die folgenden Deckoschriften und Einstellungen zur Verfügung: Durchgestrichen - durchstreichen einer Textstelle mithilfe einer Linie Doppelt durchgestrichen - durchstreichen einer Textstelle mithilfe einer doppelten Linie Hochgestellt - Textstellen verkleinern und hochstellen, wie beispielsweise in Brüchen Tiefgestellt - Textstellen verkleinern und tiefstellen, wie beispielsweise in chemischen Formeln Kapitälchen - erzeugen von Großbuchstaben in Höhe von Kleinbuchstaben Großbuchstaben - alle Buchstaben als Großbuchstaben schreiben Abstand - Abstand zwischen den einzelnen Zeichen einstellen Position - Position der Zeichen in einer Zeile zu bestimmen" + "body": "Das Symbol für Dekoschriften finden sie unter der Registerkarte Start in der oberen Symbolleiste. Hinweis: Wenn Sie die Formatierung auf Text anwenden möchten, der bereits im Dokument vorhanden ist, wählen Sie diesen mit der Maus oder mithilfe der Tastatur aus und legen Sie die gewünschte Formatierung fest. Fett Der gewählte Textabschnitt wird durch fette Schrift hervorgehoben. Kursiv Der gewählte Textabschnitt wird durch die Schrägstellung der Zeichen hervorgehoben. Unterstrichen Der gewählten Textabschnitt wird mit einer Linie unterstrichen. Durchgestrichen Der gewählten Textabschnitt wird mit einer Linie durchgestrichen. Hochgestellt Der gewählte Textabschnitt wird verkleinert und im oberen Teil der Textzeile platziert z.B. in Bruchzahlen. Tiefgestellt Der gewählte Textabschnitt wird verkleinert und im unteren Teil der Textzeile platziert z.B. in chemischen Formeln. Um auf erweiterte Schrifteinstellungen zuzugreifen, klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste und wählen Sie die Option Absatz - Erweiterte Einstellungen im Menü oder nutzen Sie den Link Erweiterte Einstellungen anzeigen in der rechten Seitenleiste. Das Fenster Absatz - Erweiterte Einstellungen öffnet sich, wechseln sie nun in die Registerkarte Schriftart. Hier stehen Ihnen die folgenden Deckoschriften und Einstellungen zur Verfügung: Durchgestrichen - durchstreichen einer Textstelle mithilfe einer Linie. Doppelt durchgestrichen - durchstreichen einer Textstelle mithilfe einer doppelten Linie. Hochgestellt - Textstellen verkleinern und hochstellen, wie beispielsweise in Brüchen. Tiefgestellt - Textstellen verkleinern und tiefstellen, wie beispielsweise in chemischen Formeln. Kapitälchen - erzeugt Großbuchstaben in Höhe von Kleinbuchstaben. Großbuchstaben - alle Buchstaben als Großbuchstaben schreiben. Abstand - Abstand zwischen den einzelnen Zeichen einstellen. Erhöhen Sie den Standardwert für den Abstand Erweitert oder verringern Sie den Standardwert für den Abstand Verkürzt. Nutzen Sie die Pfeiltasten oder geben Sie den erforderlichen Wert in das dafür vorgesehene Feld ein. Position - Zeichenposition (vertikaler Versatz) in der Zeile festlegen. Erhöhen Sie den Standardwert, um Zeichen nach oben zu verschieben, oder verringern Sie den Standardwert, um Zeichen nach unten zu verschieben. Nutzen Sie die Pfeiltasten oder geben Sie den erforderlichen Wert in das dafür vorgesehene Feld ein.Alle Änderungen werden im Feld Vorschau unten angezeigt." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/FontTypeSizeColor.htm", "title": "Schriftart, -größe und -farbe festlegen", - "body": "Sie können Schriftart, Größe und Farbe der Schrift mithilfe der entsprechenden Symbole in der Registerkarte Start auf der oberen Symbolleiste festlegen. Hinweis: Wenn Sie die Formatierung auf Text anwenden möchten, der bereits im Dokument vorhanden ist, wählen Sie diesen mit der Maus oder mithilfe der Tastatur aus und legen Sie die gewünschte Formatierung fest. Schriftart Wird verwendet, um eine Schriftart aus der Liste mit den verfügbaren Schriftarten zu wählen. Schriftgröße Wird verwendet, um eine Schriftgröße aus der Liste zu wählen oder manuell einzugeben. Schrift vergrößern Wird verwendet, um die Schriftgröße mit jedem Klicken auf das Symbol um einen Punkt zu vergrößern. Schrift verkleinern Wird verwendet, um die Schriftgröße mit jedem Klicken auf das Symbol um einen Punkt zu verkleinern. Texthervorhebungsfarbe Wird verwendet, um den Hintergrund für einzelne Sätze, Phrasen, Wörter oder sogar Zeichen durch Hinzufügen eines Farbbandes zu markieren, das den Effekt eines Textmarker um den Text herum imitiert. Wählen Sie dazu den gewünschten Text aus und klicken Sie anschließend auf den Abwärtspfeil neben dem Symbol, um eine Farbe auf der Palette auszuwählen (diese Farbeinstellung ist unabhängig vom ausgewählten Farbschema und enthält 16 Farben) - die Farbe wird auf den ausgewählten Text angewendet. Alternativ können Sie zuerst eine Hervorhebungsfarbe auswählen und dann den Text mit der Maus auswählen - der Mauszeiger sieht in diesem Fall so aus und Sie können mehrere verschiedene Teile Ihres Textes nacheinander markieren. Um die Hervorhebung zu beenden, klicken Sie einfach erneut auf das Symbol. Um die Markierungsfarbe zu löschen, klicken Sie auf die Option Keine Füllung. Bei Hervorhebungen werden nur die Zeichen hinterlegt, im Gegensatz zu Hintergrundfarbe, die auf den gesamten Absatz angewendet wird und auch Leerräume im Absatz farblich hinterlegt. Schriftfarbe Wird verwendet, um die Farbe der Buchstaben/Zeichen im Text zu ändern. Standardmäßig wird die Schriftfarbe in einem neuen leeren Dokument automatisch festgelegt, als schwarze Schrift auf weißem Hintergrund. Wenn Sie die Hintergrundfarbe auf schwarz ändern, wechselt die Schriftfarbe automatisch auf weiß, damit sie weiter zu erkennen ist. Um eine andere Farbe auszuwählen, klicken Sie auf den Abwärtspfeil neben dem Symbol und wählen Sie eine Farbe aus den verfügbaren Paletten aus (die angezeigten Designfarben sind abhängig vom ausgewählten Farbschema. Wenn Sie die Standardschriftfarbe geändert haben, können Sie die Standardfarbe für die ausgewählte Textpassage über die Option Automatisch in der Gruppe Farbpaletten wiederherstellen. Hinweis: Weitere Informationen zum Umgang mit Farbpaletten finden Sie auf dieser Seite." + "body": "Sie können Schriftart, Größe und Farbe der Schrift mithilfe der entsprechenden Symbole in der Registerkarte Start auf der oberen Symbolleiste festlegen. Hinweis: Wenn Sie die Formatierung auf Text anwenden möchten, der bereits im Dokument vorhanden ist, wählen Sie diesen mit der Maus oder mithilfe der Tastatur aus und legen Sie die gewünschte Formatierung fest. Schriftart Wird verwendet, um eine Schriftart aus der Liste mit den verfügbaren Schriftarten zu wählen. Wenn eine gewünschte Schriftart nicht in der Liste verfügbar ist, können Sie diese runterladen und in Ihrem Betriebssystem speichern. Anschließend steht Ihnen diese Schrift in der Desktop-Version zur Nutzung zur Verfügung. Schriftgröße Über diese Option kann der gewünschte Wert für die Schriftgröße aus der Dropdown-List ausgewählt werden (die Standardwerte sind: 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 36, 48, 72 und 96). Sie können auch manuell einen Wert in das Feld für die Schriftgröße eingeben und anschließend die Eingabetaste drücken. Schrift vergrößern Wird verwendet, um die Schriftgröße mit jedem Klicken auf das Symbol um einen Punkt zu vergrößern. Schrift verkleinern Wird verwendet, um die Schriftgröße mit jedem Klicken auf das Symbol um einen Punkt zu verkleinern. Texthervorhebungsfarbe Wird verwendet, um den Hintergrund für einzelne Sätze, Phrasen, Wörter oder sogar Zeichen durch Hinzufügen eines Farbbandes zu markieren, das den Effekt eines Textmarker um den Text herum imitiert. Wählen Sie dazu den gewünschten Text aus und klicken Sie anschließend auf den Abwärtspfeil neben dem Symbol, um eine Farbe auf der Palette auszuwählen (diese Farbeinstellung ist unabhängig vom ausgewählten Farbschema und enthält 16 Farben) - die Farbe wird auf den ausgewählten Text angewendet. Alternativ können Sie zuerst eine Hervorhebungsfarbe auswählen und dann den Text mit der Maus auswählen - der Mauszeiger sieht in diesem Fall so aus und Sie können mehrere verschiedene Teile Ihres Textes nacheinander markieren. Um die Hervorhebung zu beenden, klicken Sie einfach erneut auf das Symbol. Um die Markierungsfarbe zu löschen, klicken Sie auf die Option Keine Füllung. Bei Hervorhebungen werden nur die Zeichen hinterlegt, im Gegensatz zu Hintergrundfarbe, die auf den gesamten Absatz angewendet wird und auch Leerräume im Absatz farblich hinterlegt. Schriftfarbe Wird verwendet, um die Farbe der Buchstaben/Zeichen im Text zu ändern. Standardmäßig wird die Schriftfarbe in einem neuen leeren Dokument automatisch festgelegt, als schwarze Schrift auf weißem Hintergrund. Wenn Sie die Hintergrundfarbe auf schwarz ändern, wechselt die Schriftfarbe automatisch auf weiß, damit sie weiter zu erkennen ist. Um eine andere Farbe auszuwählen, klicken Sie auf den Abwärtspfeil neben dem Symbol und wählen Sie eine Farbe aus den verfügbaren Paletten aus (die angezeigten Designfarben sind abhängig vom ausgewählten Farbschema. Wenn Sie die Standardschriftfarbe geändert haben, können Sie die Standardfarbe für die ausgewählte Textpassage über die Option Automatisch in der Gruppe Farbpaletten wiederherstellen. Hinweis: Weitere Informationen zum Umgang mit Farbpaletten finden Sie auf dieser Seite." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/FormattingPresets.htm", @@ -158,22 +168,22 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm", "title": "AutoFormen einfügen", - "body": "Eine AutoForm einfügen Eine AutoForm in einem Dokument einfügen: Wechseln Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf die Registerkarte Einfügen. Klicken Sie auf der oberen Symbolleiste auf das Symbol Form Wählen Sie eine der verfügbaren Gruppen für AutoFormen aus: Standardformen, geformte Pfeile, Mathe, Diagramme, Sterne und Bänder, Legenden, Schaltflächen, Rechtecke, Linien. Klicken Sie auf in der gewählten Gruppe auf die gewünschte AutoForm. Positionieren Sie den Mauszeiger an der Stelle, an der Sie eine Form einfügen möchten. Sobald die AutoForm hinzugefügt wurde, können Sie Größe, Position und Eigenschaften ändern.Hinweis: Um der AutoForm eine Beschriftung hinzuzufügen, wählen Sie die Form auf der Seite aus und geben Sie den gewünschten Text ein. Ein solcher Text wird Bestandteil der AutoForm (wenn Sie die AutoForm verschieben oder drehen, wird der Text ebenfalls verschoben oder gedreht). AutoFormen bewegen und die Größe ändern Um die Formgröße zu ändern, ziehen Sie die kleinen Quadrate an den Kanten der Formen. Um die ursprünglichen Proportionen der ausgewählten AutoFormen während der Größenänderung beizubehalten, halten Sie Taste UMSCHALT gedrückt und ziehen Sie eines der Ecksymbole. Bei der Änderung einiger Formen, z.B. geformte Pfeile oder Legenden, ist auch ein gelbes diamantartiges Symbol verfügbar. Über dieses Symbol können verschiedene Aspekte einer Form geändert werden, z.B. die Länge des Pfeilkopfes. Um die Formposition zu ändern, nutzen Sie das Symbol, das eingeblendet wird, wenn Sie mit dem Mauszeiger über die AutoForm fahren. Ziehen Sie die Form in die gewünschten Position, ohne die Maustaste loszulassen. Wenn Sie die AutoForm verschieben, werden Hilfslinien angezeigt, damit Sie das Objekt auf der Seite präzise positionieren können (wenn ein anderer Umbruchstil als mit Text in Zeile ausgewählt haben). Um die AutoForm in 1-Pixel-Stufen zu verschieben, halten Sie die Taste STRG gedrückt und verwenden Sie die Pfeile auf der Tastatur. Um die AutoForm streng horizontal/vertikal zu verschieben und sie in perpendikulare Richtung nicht rutschen zu lassen, halten Sie die UMSCHALT-Taste beim Drehen gedrückt. Um die Form zu drehen, richten Sie den Mauszeiger auf den Drehpunkt und ziehen Sie ihn im Uhrzeigersinn oder gegen Uhrzeigersinn. Um die Drehung in 15-Grad-Stufen durchzuführen, halten Sie die UMSCHALT-Taste bei der Drehung gedrückt. AutoFormeinstellungen anpassen Nutzen Sie zum ausrichten und anordnen von AutoFormen das Rechtsklickmenü. Die Menüoptionen sind: Ausschneiden, Kopieren, Einfügen - Standardoptionen zum Ausschneiden oder Kopieren ausgewählter Textpassagen/Objekte und zum Einfügen von zuvor ausgeschnittenen/kopierten Textstellen oder Objekten an der aktuellen Cursorposition. Anordnen - um eine ausgewählte Form in den Vordergrund bzw. Hintergrund oder eine Ebene nach vorne bzw. hinten zu verschieben sowie Formen zu gruppieren und die Gruppierung aufzuheben (um diese wie ein einzelnes Objekt behandeln zu können). Weitere Informationen zum Anordnen von Objekten finden Sie auf dieser Seite. Ausrichten - um eine Form linksbündig, zentriert, rechtsbündig, oben, mittig oder unten auszurichten. Weitere Informationen zum Ausrichten von Objekten finden Sie auf dieser Seite. Textumbruch - der Stil für den Textumbruch wird aus den verfügbaren Vorlagen ausgewählt: Mit Text in Zeile, Quadrat, Eng, Transparent, Oben und unten, Vorne, Hinten (für weitere Information lesen Sie die folgende Beschreibung der erweiterten Einstellungen). Die Option Umbruchsgrenze bearbeiten ist nur verfügbar, wenn Sie einen anderen Umbruchstil als „Mit Text in Zeile“ auswählen. Ziehen Sie die Umbruchpunkte, um die Grenze benutzerdefiniert anzupassen. Um einen neuen Rahmenpunkt zu erstellen, klicken Sie auf eine beliebige Stelle auf der roten Linie und ziehen Sie diese an die gewünschte Position. Form - Erweiterte Einstellungen wird verwendet, um das Fenster „Absatz - Erweiterte Einstellungen“ zu öffnen. Einige Eigenschaften der AutoFormen können in der Registerkarte Formeinstellungen in der rechten Seitenleiste geändert werden. Klicken Sie dazu auf die Form und wählen Sie das Symbol Formeinstellungen in der rechten Seitenleiste aus. Die folgenden Eigenschaften können geändert werden: Füllung - zum Ändern der Füllung einer AutoForm. Folgende Optionen stehen Ihnen zur Verfügung: Einfarbige Füllung - wählen Sie diese Option, um die Volltonfarbe festzulegen, mit der Sie die innere Fläche der ausgewählten Autoform ausfüllen möchten. Klicken Sie auf das Farbfeld unten und wählen Sie die gewünschte Farbe aus den verfügbaren Farbpaletten aus oder legen Sie eine beliebige Farbe fest: Farbverlauf - Wählen Sie diese Option, um die Form mit zwei Farben zu füllen, die sich sanft von einer zur anderen ändern. Stil - wählen Sie eine der verfügbaren Optionen: Linear (Farben ändern sich linear, d.h. entlang der horizontalen/vertikalen Achse oder diagonal in einem 45-Grad Winkel) oder Radial (Farben ändern sich kreisförmig vom Zentrum zu den Kanten). Richtung - wählen Sie eine Vorlage aus dem Menü aus. Wenn der Farbverlauf Linear ausgewählt ist, sind die folgenden Richtungen verfügbar: von oben links nach unten rechts, von oben nach unten, von oben rechts nach unten links, von rechts nach links, von unten rechts nach oben links, von unten nach oben, von unten links nach oben rechts, von links nach rechts. Wenn der Farbverlauf Radial ausgewählt ist, steht nur eine Vorlage zur Verfügung. Farbverlauf - klicken Sie auf den linken Schieberegler unter der Farbverlaufsleiste, um das Farbfeld für die erste Farbe zu aktivieren. Klicken Sie auf das Farbfeld auf der rechten Seite, um die erste Farbe in der Farbpalette auszuwählen. Nutzen Sie den rechten Schieberegler unter der Farbverlaufsleiste, um den Wechselpunkt festzulegen, an dem eine Farbe in die andere übergeht. Nutzen Sie den rechten Schieberegler unter der Farbverlaufsleiste, um die zweite Farbe anzugeben und den Wechselpunkt festzulegen. Bild- oder Texturfüllung - wählen Sie diese Option, um ein Bild oder eine vorgegebene Textur als Formhintergrund zu benutzen. Wenn Sie ein Bild als Hintergrund für eine Form verwenden möchten, können Sie ein Bild aus Datei einfügen, indem Sie über das geöffnete Fenstern den Speicherort auf Ihrem Computer auswählen, oder aus URL, indem Sie die entsprechende URL-Adresse ins geöffnete Fenster einfügen. Wenn Sie eine Textur als Hintergrund für eine Form nutzen möchten, öffnen Sie das Menü Textur und wählen Sie die gewünschte Texturvoreinstellung aus.Momentan sind die folgenden Texturen vorhanden: Leinwand, Karton, dunkler Stoff, Korn, Granit, graues Papier, stricken, Leder, braunes Papier, Papyrus, Holz. Wenn das gewählte Bild kleiner oder größer als die AutoForm ist, können Sie die Option Strecken oder Kacheln aus dem Listenmenü auswählen.Die Option Strecken ermöglicht Ihnen die Größe des Bildes so anzupassen, dass es den kompletten Bereich der AutoForm füllen kann. Die Option Kacheln ermöglicht Ihnen nur einen Teil eines größeren Bildes zu verwenden und die Originalgröße beizubehalten oder ein kleines Bild unter Beibehaltung der Originalgröße zu wiederholen und durch diese Wiederholungen die gesamte Fläche der AutoForm auszufüllen. Hinweis: Jede Voreinstellung für Texturfüllungen ist dahingehend festgelegt, den gesamten Bereich auszufüllen, aber Sie können nach Bedarf auch den Effekt Strecken anwenden. Muster - wählen Sie diese Option, um die Form mit einem zweifarbigen Design zu füllen, dass aus regelmäßig wiederholten Elementen besteht. Muster - wählen Sie eine der Designvorgaben aus dem Menü aus. Vordergrundfarbe - klicken Sie auf dieses Farbfeld, um die Farbe der Musterelemente zu ändern. Hintergrundfarbe - klicken Sie auf dieses Farbfeld, um die Farbe des Hintergrundmusters zu ändern. Keine Füllung - wählen Sie diese Option, wenn Sie keine Füllung verwenden möchten. Transparenz - hier können Sie den Grad der gewünschten Transparenz auswählen, bringen Sie dazu den Schieberegler in die gewünschte Position oder geben Sie manuell einen Prozentwert ein. Der Standardwert beträgt 100%. Also volle Deckkraft. Der Wert 0% steht für vollständige Transparenz. Strich - nutzen Sie diese Sektion, um die Konturbreite und -farbe der AutoForm zu ändern. Um die Strichstärke zu ändern, wählen Sie eine der verfügbaren Optionen im Listenmenü Größe aus. Die verfügbaren Optionen sind: 0,5 Pt., 1 Pt., 1,5 Pt., 2,25 Pt., 3 Pt., 4,5 Pt., 6 Pt. Alternativ können Sie die Option Keine Linie auswählen, wenn Sie keine Umrandung wünschen. Um die Konturfarbe zu ändern, klicken Sie auf das farbige Feld und wählen Sie die gewünschte Farbe aus. Um den Stil der Kontur zu ändern, wählen Sie die gewünschte Option aus der entsprechenden Dropdown-Liste aus (standardmäßig wird eine durchgezogene Linie verwendet, diese können Sie in eine der verfügbaren gestrichelten Linien ändern). Textumbruch - wählen Sie den Stil für den Textumbruch aus den verfügbaren Stilen aus: Mit Text verschieben, Quadrat, Eng, Transparent, Oben und unten, Vorne, Hinten (weitere Informationen finden Sie in der nachfolgenden Beschreibung der erweiterten Einstellungen). AutoForm ändern - ersetzen Sie die aktuelle AutoForm durch eine andere, die Sie im Listenmenü wählen können. Um die erweiterte Einstellungen der AutoForm zu ändern, klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste auf die Form und wählen Sie die Option Erweiterte Einstellungen im Menü aus, oder klicken Sie in der rechten Seitenleiste auf die Verknüpfung Erweiterte Einstellungen anzeigen. Das Fenster „Form - Erweiterte Einstellungen“ wird geöffnet: Die Registerkarte Größe enthält die folgenden Parameter: Breite - ändern Sie die Breite der AutoForm mit den verfügbaren Optionen. Absolut - geben Sie einen exakten Wert in absoluten Einheiten an, wie Zentimeter/Punkte/Zoll (abhängig von der Voreinstellung in der Registerkarte Datei -> Erweiterte Einstellungen...). Relativ - geben Sie einen Prozentwert an, gemessen von linker Seitenrandbreite, Seitenrand (der Abstand zwischen dem linken und rechten Seitenrand), Seitenbreite oder der rechten Seitenrandbreite. Höhe - ändern Sie die Höhe der AutoForm. Absolut - geben Sie einen exakten Wert in absoluten Einheiten an, wie Zentimeter/Punkte/Zoll (abhängig von der Voreinstellung in der Registerkarte Datei -> Erweiterte Einstellungen...). Relativ - geben Sie einen Prozentwert an, gemessen vom Seitenrand (der Abstand zwischen dem linken und rechten Seitenrand), der unteren Randhöhe, der Seitenhöhe oder der oberen Randhöhe. Wenn die Funktion Seitenverhältnis sperren aktivieren ist, werden Breite und Höhe gleichmäßig geändert und das ursprünglichen Seitenverhältnis wird beibehalten. Die Registerkarte Textumbruch enthält die folgenden Parameter: Textumbruch - legen Sie fest, wie die Form im Verhältnis zum Text positioniert wird: entweder als Teil des Textes (wenn Sie die Option „Mit Text verschieben“ auswählen) oder an allen Seiten von Text umgeben (wenn Sie einen anderen Stil wählen). Mit Text verschieben - die Form wird Teil des Textes (wie ein Zeichen) und wenn der Text verschoben wird, wird auch die Form verschoben. In diesem Fall sind die Positionsoptionen nicht verfügbar. Ist eine der folgenden Umbrucharten ausgewählt, kann die Form unabhängig vom Text verschoben und auf der Seite positioniert werden: Quadrat - der Text bricht um den rechteckigen Kasten, der die Form umgibt. Eng - der Text bricht um die Formkanten herum. Transparent - der Text bricht um die Formkanten herum und füllt den offenen weißen Leerraum innerhalb der Form. Wählen Sie für diesen Effekt die Option Umbruchsgrenze bearbeiten aus dem Rechtsklickmenü aus. Oben und unten - der Text ist nur oberhalb und unterhalb der Form. Vorne - die Form überlappt mit dem Text. Hinten - der Text überlappt mit der Form. Wenn Sie die Stile Quadrat, Eng, Transparent oder Oben und unten auswählen, haben Sie die Möglichkeit zusätzliche Parameter einzugeben - Abstand vom Text auf allen Seiten (oben, unten, links, rechts). Die Registerkarte Position ist nur verfügbar, wenn Sie einen anderen Umbruchstil als „Mit Text in Zeile“ auswählen. Hier können Sie abhängig vom gewählten Format des Textumbruchs die folgenden Parameter festlegen: In der Gruppe Horizontal, können Sie eine der folgenden drei AutoFormpositionierungstypen auswählen: Ausrichtung (links, zentriert, rechts) gemessen an Zeichen, Spalte, linker Seitenrand, Seitenrand, Seite oder rechter Seitenrand. Absolute Position, gemessen in absoluten Einheiten wie Zentimeter/Punkte/Zoll (abhängig von der Voreinstellung in Datei -> Erweiterte Einstellungen...), rechts von Zeichen, Spalte, linker Seitenrand, Seitenrand, Seite oder rechter Seitenrand. Relative Position in Prozent, gemessen von linker Seitenrand, Seitenrand, Seite oder rechter Seitenrand. In der Gruppe Vertikal, können Sie eine der folgenden drei AutoFormpositionierungstypen auswählen: Ausrichtung (oben, zentriert, unten) gemessen von Zeile, Seitenrand, unterer Rand, Abschnitt, Seite oder oberer Rand. Absolute Position, gemessen in absoluten Einheiten wie Zentimeter/Punkte/Zoll (abhängig von der Voreinstellung in Datei -> Erweiterte Einstellungen...), unterhalb Zeile, Seitenrand, unterer Seitenrand, Absatz, Seite oder oberer Seitenrand. Relative Position in Prozent, gemessen von Seitenrand, unterer Seitenrand, Seite oder oberer Seitenrand. Im Kontrollkästchen Objekt mit Text verschieben können Sie festlegen, ob sich die AutoForm zusammen mit dem Text bewegen lässt, mit dem sie verankert wurde. Überlappen zulassen bestimmt, ob zwei AutoFormen einander überlagern können oder nicht, wenn Sie diese auf einer Seite dicht aneinander bringen. Die Registerkarte Formeinstellungen enthält die folgenden Parameter: Linienart - in dieser Gruppe können Sie die folgenden Parameter bestimmen: Abschlusstyp - legen Sie den Stil für den Abschluss der Linie fest, diese Option besteht nur bei Formen mit offener Kontur wie Linien, Polylinien usw.: Flach - flacher Abschluss Rund - runder Abschluss Quadratisch - quadratisches Linienende Anschlusstyp - legen Sie die Art der Verknüpfung von zwei Linien fest, z.B. kann diese Option auf Polylinien oder die Ecken von Dreiecken bzw. Vierecken angewendet werden: Rund - abgerundete Ecke Schräge Kante - die Ecke wird schräg abgeschnitten Winkel - spitze Ecke Dieser Typ passt gut bei AutoFormen mit spitzen Winkeln. Hinweis: Der Effekt wird auffälliger, wenn Sie eine hohe Konturbreite verwenden. Pfeile - Gruppe ist verfügbar, wenn eine Form aus der Gruppe Linien ausgewählt wurde. Dadurch können Sie die Form von Startpfeil und Endpfeil festlegen und die jeweilige Größe bestimmen. Wählen Sie dazu einfach die gewünschte Option aus der Liste aus. Über die Registerkarte Textränder können Sie die oberen, unteren, linken und rechten inneren Ränder der AutoForm ändern (also den Abstand zwischen dem Text innerhalb der Form und dem Rahmen der AutoForm). Hinweis: diese Registerkarte ist nur verfügbar, wenn der AutoForm ein Text hinzugefügt wurde, ansonsten wird die Registerkarte ausgeblendet. Die Registerkarte Alternativtext ermöglicht die Eingabe eines Titels und einer Beschreibung die Personen mit Sehbehinderungen oder kognitiven Beeinträchtigungen vorgelesen werden kann damit sie besser verstehen können, welche Informationen in der Form vorhanden sind." + "body": "Fügen Sie eine automatische Form ein So fügen Sie Ihrem Dokument eine automatische Form hinzu: Wechseln Sie zur Registerkarte Einfügen in der oberen Symbolleiste. Klicken Sie auf das Formsymbol in der oberen Symbolleiste. Wählen Sie eine der verfügbaren Autoshape-Gruppen aus: Grundformen, figürliche Pfeile, Mathematik, Diagramme, Sterne und Bänder, Beschriftungen, Schaltflächen, Rechtecke, Linien, Klicken Sie auf die erforderliche automatische Form innerhalb der ausgewählten Gruppe. Platzieren Sie den Mauszeiger an der Stelle, an der die Form plaziert werden soll. Sobald die automatische Form hinzugefügt wurde, können Sie ihre Größe, Position und Eigenschaften ändern.Hinweis: Um eine Beschriftung innerhalb der automatischen Form hinzuzufügen, stellen Sie sicher, dass die Form auf der Seite ausgewählt ist, und geben Sie Ihren Text ein. Der auf diese Weise hinzugefügte Text wird Teil der automatischen Form (wenn Sie die Form verschieben oder drehen, wird der Text mit verschoben oder gedreht). Es ist auch möglich, der automatischen Form eine Beschriftung hinzuzufügen. Weitere Informationen zum Arbeiten mit Untertiteln für Autoformen finden Sie in diesem Artikel. Verschieben und ändern Sie die Größe von Autoformen Um die Größe der automatischen Form zu ändern, ziehen Sie kleine Quadrate an den Formkanten. Halten Sie die Umschalttaste gedrückt und ziehen Sie eines der Eckensymbole, um die ursprünglichen Proportionen der ausgewählten automatischen Form während der Größenänderung beizubehalten. Wenn Sie einige Formen ändern, z. B. abgebildete Pfeile oder Beschriftungen, ist auch das gelbe rautenförmige Symbol verfügbar. Hier können Sie einige Aspekte der Form anpassen, z. B. die Länge der Pfeilspitze. Verwenden Sie zum Ändern der Position für die automatische Form das Symbol, das angezeigt wird, nachdem Sie den Mauszeiger über die automatische Form bewegt haben. Ziehen Sie die automatische Form an die gewünschte Position, ohne die Maustaste loszulassen. Wenn Sie die automatische Form verschieben, werden Hilfslinien angezeigt, mit denen Sie das Objekt präzise auf der Seite positionieren können (wenn ein anderer Umbruchstil als Inline ausgewählt ist). Um die automatische Form in Schritten von einem Pixel zu verschieben, halten Sie die Strg-Taste gedrückt und verwenden Sie die Tastenkombinationen. Halten Sie beim Ziehen die Umschalttaste gedrückt, um die automatische Form streng horizontal / vertikal zu verschieben und zu verhindern, dass sie sich senkrecht bewegt. Um die automatische Form zu drehen, bewegen Sie den Mauszeiger über den Drehgriff und ziehen Sie ihn im oder gegen den Uhrzeigersinn. Halten Sie die Umschalttaste gedrückt, um den Drehwinkel auf Schritte von 15 Grad zu beschränken. Hinweis: Die Liste der Tastaturkürzel, die beim Arbeiten mit Objekten verwendet werden können, finden Sie hier. Passen Sie die Autoshape-Einstellungen an Verwenden Sie das Rechtsklick-Menü, um Autoshapes auszurichten und anzuordnen. Die Menüoptionen sind: Ausschneiden, Kopieren, Einfügen - Standardoptionen, mit denen ein ausgewählter Text / ein ausgewähltes Objekt ausgeschnitten oder kopiert und eine zuvor ausgeschnittene / kopierte Textpassage oder ein Objekt an die aktuelle Zeigerposition eingefügt wird. Anordnen wird verwendet, um die ausgewählte automatische Form in den Vordergrund zu bringen, in den Hintergrund zu senden, vorwärts oder rückwärts zu bewegen sowie Formen zu gruppieren oder die Gruppierung aufzuheben, um Operationen mit mehreren von ihnen gleichzeitig auszuführen. Weitere Informationen zum Anordnen von Objekten finden Sie auf dieser Seite. Ausrichten wird verwendet, um die Form links, mittig, rechts, oben, Mitte, unten auszurichten. Weitere Informationen zum Ausrichten von Objekten finden Sie auf dieser Seite. Der Umbruchstil wird verwendet, um einen Textumbruchstil aus den verfügbaren auszuwählen - inline, quadratisch, eng, durch, oben und unten, vorne, hinten - oder um die Umbruchgrenze zu bearbeiten. Die Option Wrap-Grenze bearbeiten ist nur verfügbar, wenn Sie einen anderen Wrap-Stil als Inline auswählen. Ziehen Sie die Umbruchpunkte, um die Grenze anzupassen. Um einen neuen Umbruchpunkt zu erstellen, klicken Sie auf eine beliebige Stelle auf der roten Linie und ziehen Sie sie an die gewünschte Position. Drehen wird verwendet, um die Form um 90 Grad im oder gegen den Uhrzeigersinn zu drehen sowie um die Form horizontal oder vertikal zu drehen. Mit den Erweiterten Einstellungen der Form wird das Fenster \"Form - Erweiterte Einstellungen\" geöffnet. Einige der Einstellungen für die automatische Form können über die Registerkarte Formeinstellungen in der rechten Seitenleiste geändert werden. Um es zu aktivieren, klicken Sie auf die Form und wählen Sie rechts das Symbol Formeinstellungen . Hier können Sie folgende Eigenschaften ändern: Füllen - Verwenden Sie diesen Abschnitt, um die automatische Formfüllung auszuwählen. Sie können folgende Optionen auswählen: Farbfüllung - Wählen Sie diese Option aus, um die Volltonfarbe anzugeben, mit der Sie den Innenraum der ausgewählten Autoform füllen möchten. Klicken Sie auf das farbige Feld unten und wählen Sie die gewünschte Farbe aus den verfügbaren Farbsätzen aus oder geben Sie eine beliebige Farbe an: Verlaufsfüllung - Wählen Sie diese Option, um die Form mit zwei Farben zu füllen, die sich reibungslos von einer zur anderen ändern. Stil - Wählen Sie eine der verfügbaren Optionen: Linear (Farben ändern sich in einer geraden Linie, d. H. Entlang einer horizontalen / vertikalen Achse oder diagonal in einem Winkel von 45 Grad) oder Radial (Farben ändern sich in einer Kreisbahn von der Mitte zu den Kanten). Richtung - Wählen Sie eine Vorlage aus dem Menü. Wenn der lineare Verlauf ausgewählt ist, stehen folgende Richtungen zur Verfügung: von oben links nach unten rechts, von oben nach unten, von oben rechts nach unten links, von rechts nach links, von unten rechts nach oben links, von unten nach oben, unten -links nach rechts oben, von links nach rechts. Wenn der radiale Farbverlauf ausgewählt ist, ist nur eine Vorlage verfügbar. Farbverlauf - klicken Sie auf den linken Schieberegler unter der Verlaufsleiste, um das Farbfeld zu aktivieren, das der ersten Farbe entspricht. Klicken Sie auf das Farbfeld rechtsum die erste Farbe in der Palette zu wählen. Ziehen Sie den Schieberegler, um den Verlaufsstopp festzulegen, d. H. Den Punkt, an dem sich eine Farbe in eine andere ändert. Verwenden Sie den rechten Schieberegler unter der Verlaufsleiste, um die zweite Farbe festzulegen und den Verlaufsstopp festzulegen. Bild oder Textur - Wählen Sie diese Option, um ein Bild oder eine vordefinierte Textur als Formhintergrund zu verwenden. Wenn Sie ein Bild als Hintergrund für die Form verwenden möchten, können Sie ein Bild aus der Datei hinzufügen, indem Sie es auf der Festplatte Ihres Computers auswählen, oder aus der URL, indem Sie die entsprechende URL-Adresse in das geöffnete Fenster einfügen. Wenn Sie eine Textur als Hintergrund für die Form verwenden möchten, öffnen Sie das Menü Von Textur und wählen Sie die gewünschte Texturvoreinstellung aus.Derzeit sind folgende Texturen verfügbar: Leinwand, Karton, dunkler Stoff, Maserung, Granit, graues Papier, Strick, Leder, braunes Papier, Papyrus, Holz. Falls das ausgewählte Bild weniger oder mehr Abmessungen als die automatische Form hat, können Sie die Einstellung Dehnen oder Kacheln aus der Dropdown-Liste auswählen.

                                                        Mit der Option Kacheln können Sie nur einen Teil des größeren Bilds anzeigen, wobei die ursprünglichen Abmessungen beibehalten werden, oder das kleinere Bild wiederholen, wobei die ursprünglichen Abmessungen über der Oberfläche der automatischen Form beibehalten werden, sodass der Raum vollständig ausgefüllt werden kann. Hinweis: Jede ausgewählte Texturvoreinstellung füllt den Raum vollständig aus. Sie können jedoch bei Bedarf den Dehnungseffekt anwenden. Muster - Wählen Sie diese Option, um die Form mit einem zweifarbigen Design zu füllen, das aus regelmäßig wiederholten Elementen besteht. Muster - Wählen Sie eines der vordefinierten Designs aus dem Menü. Vordergrundfarbe - Klicken Sie auf dieses Farbfeld, um die Farbe der Musterelemente zu ändern. Hintergrundfarbe - Klicken Sie auf dieses Farbfeld, um die Farbe des Musterhintergrunds zu ändern. Keine Füllung - wählen Sie diese Option, wenn Sie keine Füllung verwenden möchten. Deckkraft - Verwenden Sie diesen Abschnitt, um eine Deckkraftstufe festzulegen, indem Sie den Schieberegler ziehen oder den Prozentwert manuell eingeben. Der Standardwert ist 100%. Es entspricht der vollen Deckkraft. Der Wert 0% entspricht der vollen Transparenz. Strich - Verwenden Sie diesen Abschnitt, um die Breite, Farbe oder den Typ des Strichs für die automatische Formgebung zu ändern. Um die Strichbreite zu ändern, wählen Sie eine der verfügbaren Optionen aus der Dropdown-Liste Größe. Die verfügbaren Optionen sind: 0,5 pt, 1 pt, 1,5 pt, 2,25 pt, 3 pt, 4,5 pt, 6 pt. Alternativ können Sie die Option Keine Linie auswählen, wenn Sie keinen Strich verwenden möchten. Um die Strichfarbe zu ändern, klicken Sie auf das farbige Feld unten und wählen Sie die gewünschte Farbe aus. Um den Strich-Typ zu ändern, wählen Sie die erforderliche Option aus der entsprechenden Dropdown-Liste aus (standardmäßig wird eine durchgezogene Linie angewendet, Sie können sie in eine der verfügbaren gestrichelten Linien ändern). Die Drehung wird verwendet, um die Form um 90 Grad im oder gegen den Uhrzeigersinn zu drehen sowie um die Form horizontal oder vertikal zu drehen. Klicken Sie auf eine der Schaltflächen: um die Form um 90 Grad gegen den Uhrzeigersinn zu drehen um die Form um 90 Grad im Uhrzeigersinn zu drehen um die Form horizontal zu drehen (von links nach rechts) um die Form vertikal zu drehen (verkehrt herum) Umbruchstil - Verwenden Sie diesen Abschnitt, um einen Textumbruchstil aus den verfügbaren auszuwählen - inline, quadratisch, eng, durch, oben und unten, vorne, hinten (weitere Informationen finden Sie in der Beschreibung der erweiterten Einstellungen unten). Autoshape ändern - Verwenden Sie diesen Abschnitt, um die aktuelle Autoshape durch eine andere zu ersetzen, die aus der Dropdown-Liste ausgewählt wurde. Schatten anzeigen - Aktivieren Sie diese Option, um die Form mit Schatten anzuzeigen. Passen Sie die erweiterten Einstellungen für die automatische Form an Um die erweiterten Einstellungen der automatischen Form zu ändern, klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste darauf und wählen Sie die Option Erweiterte Einstellungen im Menü oder verwenden Sie den Link Erweiterte Einstellungen anzeigen in der rechten Seitenleiste. Das Fenster 'Form - Erweiterte Einstellungen' wird geöffnet: Die Registerkarte Größe enthält die folgenden Parameter: Breite - Verwenden Sie eine dieser Optionen, um die automatische Formbreite zu ändern. Absolut - Geben Sie einen genauen Wert an, der in absoluten Einheiten gemessen wird, d. H. Zentimeter / Punkte / Zoll (abhängig von der auf der Registerkarte Datei -> Erweiterte Einstellungen ... angegebenen Option). Relativ - Geben Sie einen Prozentsatz relativ zur linken Randbreite, dem Rand (d. H. Dem Abstand zwischen dem linken und rechten Rand), der Seitenbreite oder der rechten Randbreite an. Höhe - Verwenden Sie eine dieser Optionen, um die Höhe der automatischen Form zu ändern. Absolut - Geben Sie einen genauen Wert an, der in absoluten Einheiten gemessen wird, d. H. Zentimeter / Punkte / Zoll (abhängig von der auf der Registerkarte Datei -> Erweiterte Einstellungen ... angegebenen Option). Relativ - Geben Sie einen Prozentsatz relativ zum Rand (d. H. Dem Abstand zwischen dem oberen und unteren Rand), der Höhe des unteren Randes, der Seitenhöhe oder der Höhe des oberen Randes an. Wenn die Option Seitenverhältnis sperren aktiviert ist, werden Breite und Höhe zusammen geändert, wobei das ursprüngliche Seitenverhältnis beibehalten wird. Die Registerkarte Rotation enthält die folgenden Parameter: Winkel - Verwenden Sie diese Option, um die Form um einen genau festgelegten Winkel zu drehen. Geben Sie den erforderlichen Wert in Grad in das Feld ein oder passen Sie ihn mit den Pfeilen rechts an. Gekippt - Aktivieren Sie das Kontrollkästchen Horizontal, um die Form horizontal umzudrehen (von links nach rechts), oder aktivieren Sie das Kontrollkästchen Vertikal, um die Form vertikal zu spiegeln (verkehrt herum). Die Registerkarte Textumbruch enthält die folgenden Parameter: Umbruchstil - Verwenden Sie diese Option, um die Position der Form relativ zum Text zu ändern: Sie ist entweder Teil des Textes (falls Sie den Inline-Stil auswählen) oder wird von allen Seiten umgangen (wenn Sie einen auswählen) die anderen Stile). Inline - Die Form wird wie ein Zeichen als Teil des Textes betrachtet. Wenn sich der Text bewegt, bewegt sich auch die Form. In diesem Fall sind die Positionierungsoptionen nicht zugänglich. Wenn einer der folgenden Stile ausgewählt ist, kann die Form unabhängig vom Text verschoben und genau auf der Seite positioniert werden: Quadratisch - Der Text umschließt das rechteckige Feld, das die Form begrenzt. Eng - Der Text umschließt die tatsächlichen Formkanten. Durch - Der Text wird um die Formkanten gewickelt und füllt den offenen weißen Bereich innerhalb der Form aus. Verwenden Sie die Option Umbruchgrenze bearbeiten im Kontextmenü, damit der Effekt angezeigt wird. Oben und unten - der Text befindet sich nur über und unter der Form. Vorne - die Form überlappt den Text. Dahinter - der Text überlappt die Form. Wenn Sie den quadratischen, engen, durchgehenden oder oberen und unteren Stil auswählen, können Sie einige zusätzliche Parameter festlegen - Abstand zum Text an allen Seiten (oben, unten, links, rechts). Die Registerkarte Position ist nur verfügbar, wenn Sie einen anderen Umbruchstil als Inline auswählen. Diese Registerkarte enthält die folgenden Parameter, die je nach ausgewähltem Verpackungsstil variieren: Im horizontalen Bereich können Sie einen der folgenden drei Positionierungstypen für die automatische Form auswählen: Ausrichtung (links, Mitte, rechts) relativ zu Zeichen, Spalte, linkem Rand, Rand, Seite oder rechtem Rand, Absolute Position, gemessen in absoluten Einheiten, d. H. Zentimeter/Punkte/Zoll (abhängig von der auf der Registerkarte Datei -> Erweiterte Einstellungen... angegebenen Option), rechts neben Zeichen, Spalte, linkem Rand, Rand, Seite oder rechtem Rand. Relative Position gemessen in Prozent relativ zum linken Rand, Rand, Seite oder rechten Rand. Im vertikalen Bereich können Sie einen der folgenden drei Positionierungstypen für die automatische Form auswählen: Ausrichtung (oben, Mitte, unten) relativ zu Linie, Rand, unterem Rand, Absatz, Seite oder oberem Rand, Absolute Position gemessen in absoluten Einheiten, d. H. Zentimeter / Punkte / Zoll (abhängig von der auf der Registerkarte Datei -> Erweiterte Einstellungen... angegebenen Option), unter Linie, Rand, unterem Rand, Absatz, Seite oder oberem Rand, Relative Position gemessen in Prozent relativ zum Rand, unteren Rand, Seite oder oberen Rand. Objekt mit Text verschieben steuert, ob sich die automatische Form so bewegt, wie sich der Text bewegt, an dem sie verankert ist. Überlappungssteuerung zulassen steuert, ob sich zwei automatische Formen überlappen oder nicht, wenn Sie sie auf der Seite nebeneinander ziehen Die Registerkarte Gewichte und Pfeile enthält die folgenden Parameter: Linienstil - In dieser Optionsgruppe können die folgenden Parameter angegeben werden: Kappentyp - Mit dieser Option können Sie den Stil für das Ende der Linie festlegen. Daher kann er nur auf Formen mit offenem Umriss angewendet werden, z. B. Linien, Polylinien usw.: Flach - Die Endpunkte sind flach. Runden - Die Endpunkte werden gerundet. Quadrat - Die Endpunkte sind quadratisch. Verbindungstyp - Mit dieser Option können Sie den Stil für den Schnittpunkt zweier Linien festlegen. Dies kann sich beispielsweise auf eine Polylinie oder die Ecken des Dreiecks oder Rechteckumrisses auswirken: Rund - die Ecke wird abgerundet. Abschrägung - die Ecke wird eckig abgeschnitten. Gehrung - die Ecke wird spitz. Es passt gut zu Formen mit scharfen Winkeln. Hinweis: Der Effekt macht sich stärker bemerkbar, wenn Sie eine große Umrissbreite verwenden. Pfeile - Diese Optionsgruppe ist verfügbar, wenn eine Form aus der Formgruppe Linien ausgewählt ist. Sie können den Pfeil Start- und Endstil und -größe festlegen, indem Sie die entsprechende Option aus den Dropdown-Listen auswählen. Auf der Registerkarte Textauffüllung können Sie die inneren Ränder der oberen, unteren, linken und rechten Form der automatischen Form ändern (d. H. Den Abstand zwischen dem Text innerhalb der Form und den Rahmen der automatischen Form). Hinweis: Diese Registerkarte ist nur verfügbar, wenn Text innerhalb der automatischen Form hinzugefügt wird. Andernfalls ist die Registerkarte deaktiviert. Auf der Registerkarte Alternativer Text können Sie einen Titel und eine Beschreibung angeben, die Personen mit Seh- oder kognitiven Beeinträchtigungen vorgelesen werden, damit sie besser verstehen, welche Informationen in der Form enthalten sind." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertBookmarks.htm", "title": "Lesezeichen hinzufügen", - "body": "Lesezeichen ermöglichen den schnellen Wechsel zu einer bestimmten Position im aktuellen Dokument oder das Hinzufügen eines Links an dieser Position im Dokument. Einfügen eines Lesezeichens: Positionieren Sie den Mauszeiger an den Anfang der Textpassage, in die das Lesezeichen eingefügt werden soll. Wechseln Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf die Registerkarte Verweise. Klicken Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf das Symbol Lesezeichen. Geben Sie im sich öffnenden Fenster Lesezeichen den Namen des Lesezeichens ein und klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche Hinzufügen - das Lesezeichen wird der unten angezeigten Lesezeichenliste hinzugefügt.Hinweis: Der Name des Lesezeichens sollte mit einem Buchstaben beginnen, er kann jedoch auch Zahlen enthalten. Der Name des Lesezeichens darf keine Leerzeichen enthalten, ein Unterstrich \"_\" ist jedoch möglich. So wechseln Sie zu einem der hinzugefügten Lesezeichen im Dokumenttext: Klicken Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste unter der Registerkarte Verweise auf das Symbol Lesezeichen. Wählen Sie im sich öffnenden Fenster Lesezeichen das Lesezeichen aus, zu dem Sie springen möchten. Um das erforderliche Lesezeichen in der Liste zu finden, können Sie die Liste nach Name oder Position eines Lesezeichens im Dokumenttext sortieren. Aktivieren Sie die Option Versteckte Lesezeichen, um ausgeblendete Lesezeichen in der Liste anzuzeigen (z. B. die vom Programm automatisch erstellten Lesezeichen, wenn Sie Verweise auf einen bestimmten Teil des Dokuments hinzufügen. Wenn Sie beispielsweise einen Hyperlink zu einer bestimmten Überschrift innerhalb des Dokuments erstellen, erzeugt der Dokumenteditor automatisch ein ausgeblendetes Lesezeichen für das Ziel dieses Links). Klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche Gehe zu - der Cursor wird an der Stelle innerhalb des Dokuments positioniert, an der das ausgewählte Lesezeichen hinzugefügt wurde, klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche Schließen, um das Dialogfenster zu schließen. Um ein Lesezeichen zu löschen, wählen Sie den entsprechenden Namen aus der Liste der Lesezeichen aus und klicken Sie auf Löschen. Informationen zum Verwenden von Lesezeichen beim Erstellen von Links finden Sie im Abschnitt Hyperlinks hinzufügen." + "body": "Lesezeichen ermöglichen den schnellen Wechsel zu einer bestimmten Position im aktuellen Dokument oder das Hinzufügen eines Links an dieser Position im Dokument. Einfügen eines Lesezeichens: Legen Sie die Position fest, an der das Lesezeichen eingefügt werden soll: Positionieren Sie den Mauszeiger am Beginn der gewünschten Textstelle oder wählen Sie die gewünschte Textpassage aus. Wechseln Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf die Registerkarte Verweise. Klicken Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf das Symbol Lesezeichen. Geben Sie im sich öffnenden Fenster Lesezeichen den Namen des Lesezeichens ein und klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche Hinzufügen - das Lesezeichen wird der unten angezeigten Lesezeichenliste hinzugefügt.Hinweis: Der Name des Lesezeichens sollte mit einem Buchstaben beginnen, er kann jedoch auch Zahlen enthalten. Der Name des Lesezeichens darf keine Leerzeichen enthalten, ein Unterstrich \"_\" ist jedoch möglich. So wechseln Sie zu einem der hinzugefügten Lesezeichen im Dokumenttext: Klicken Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste in der Registerkarte Verweise auf das Symbol Lesezeichen. Wählen Sie im sich öffnenden Fenster Lesezeichen das Lesezeichen aus, zu dem Sie springen möchten. Um das erforderliche Lesezeichen in der Liste zu finden, können Sie die Liste nach Name oder Position eines Lesezeichens im Dokumenttext sortieren. Aktivieren Sie die Option Versteckte Lesezeichen, um ausgeblendete Lesezeichen in der Liste anzuzeigen (z. B. die vom Programm automatisch erstellten Lesezeichen, wenn Sie Verweise auf einen bestimmten Teil des Dokuments hinzufügen. Wenn Sie beispielsweise einen Hyperlink zu einer bestimmten Überschrift innerhalb des Dokuments erstellen, erzeugt der Dokumenteditor automatisch ein ausgeblendetes Lesezeichen für das Ziel dieses Links). Klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche Gehe zu - der Zeiger wird an der Stelle innerhalb des Dokuments positioniert, an der das ausgewählte Lesezeichen hinzugefügt wurde oder es wird die entsprechende Textpassage ausgewählt. Klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche Link bekommen und ein neues Fenster öffnet sich wo Sie den Copy Schaltfläche drücken koennen um den Link zu der Datei zu kopieren, welches die Buckmarkierungstelle im Dokument spezifiziert. Hinweis: Um den Link mit anderen Benutzern zu teilen, muss auch die entsprechende Zugangskontrolle zu dieser Datei gesetzt werden. Benutzen Sie dazu die Teilen Funktion in die Schaltfläche Zusammenarbeit. Klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche Schließen, um das Dialogfenster zu schließen. Um ein Lesezeichen zu löschen, wählen Sie den entsprechenden Namen aus der Liste der Lesezeichen aus und klicken Sie auf Löschen. Informationen zum Verwenden von Lesezeichen beim Erstellen von Links finden Sie im Abschnitt Hyperlinks hinzufügen." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm", "title": "Diagramme einfügen", - "body": "Diagramm einfügen Einfügen eines Diagramms Positionieren Sie den Cursor an der Stelle, an der Sie ein Diagramm einfügen möchten. Wechseln Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf die Registerkarte Einfügen. Klicken Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf das Symbol Diagramm. Wählen Sie den gewünschten Diagrammtyp aus den verfügbaren Vorlagen aus - Säule, Linie, Kreis, Balken, Fläche, Punkt (XY) oder Strich.Hinweis: Die Diagrammtypen Säule, Linie, Kreis und Balken stehen auch im 3D-Format zur Verfügung. Wenn Sie Ihre Auswahl getroffen haben, öffnet sich das Fenster Diagramm bearbeiten und Sie können die gewünschten Daten mithilfe der folgenden Steuerelemente in die Zellen eingeben: und - Kopieren und Einfügen der kopierten Daten. und - Aktionen Rückgängig machen und Wiederholen. - Einfügen einer Funktion und - Löschen und Hinzufügen von Dezimalstellen. - Zahlenformat ändern, d.h. das Format in dem die eingegebenen Zahlen in den Zellen dargestellt werden Die Diagrammeinstellungen ändern Sie durch Anklicken der Schaltfläche Diagramm bearbeiten im Fenster Diagramme. Das Fenster Diagramme - Erweiterte Einstellungen wird geöffnet. Auf der Registerkarte Diagrammtyp und Daten können Sie den Diagrammtyp sowie die Daten ändern, die Sie zum Erstellen eines Diagramms verwenden möchten. Wählen Sie den gewünschten Diagrammtyp aus: Säule, Linie, Kreis, Balken, Fläche, Punkt (XY) oder Strich. Überprüfen Sie den ausgewählten Datenbereich und ändern Sie diesen ggf. durch Anklicken der Schaltfläche Daten auswählen; geben Sie den gewünschten Datenbereich im folgenden Format ein: Sheet1!A1:B4. Wählen Sie aus, wie die Daten angeordnet werden sollen. Für die Datenreihen die auf die X-Achse angewendet werden sollen, können Sie wählen zwischen: Datenreihen in Zeilen oder in Spalten. Auf der Registerkarte Layout können Sie das Layout von Diagrammelementen ändern. Wählen Sie die gewünschte Position der Diagrammbezeichnung aus der Dropdown-Liste aus: Keine - es wird keine Diagrammbezeichnung angezeigt. Überlagerung - der Titel wird zentriert und im Diagrammbereich angezeigt. Keine Überlagerung - der Titel wird über dem Diagramm angezeigt. Wählen Sie die gewünschte Position der Legende aus der Menüliste aus: Keine - es wird keine Legende angezeigt Unten - die Legende wird unterhalb des Diagramms angezeigt Oben - die Legende wird oberhalb des Diagramms angezeigt Rechts - die Legende wird rechts vom Diagramm angezeigt Links - die Legende wird links vom Diagramm angezeigt Überlappung links - die Legende wird im linken Diagrammbereich mittig dargestellt Überlappung rechts - die Legende wird im rechten Diagrammbereich mittig dargestellt Legen Sie Datenbeschriftungen fest (Titel für genaue Werte von Datenpunkten): Wählen Sie die gewünschte Position der Datenbeschriftungen aus der Menüliste aus: Die verfügbaren Optionen variieren je nach Diagrammtyp. Für Säulen-/Balkendiagramme haben Sie die folgenden Optionen: Keine, zentriert, unterer Innenbereich, oberer Innenbereich, oberer Außenbereich. Für Linien-/Punktdiagramme (XY)/Strichdarstellungen haben Sie die folgenden Optionen: Keine, zentriert, links, rechts, oben, unten. Für Kreisdiagramme stehen Ihnen folgende Optionen zur Verfügung: Keine, zentriert, an Breite anpassen, oberer Innenbereich, oberer Außenbereich. Für Flächendiagramme sowie für 3D-Diagramme, Säulen- Linien- und Balkendiagramme, stehen Ihnen folgende Optionen zur Verfügung: Keine, zentriert. Wählen Sie die Daten aus, für die Sie eine Bezeichnung erstellen möchten, indem Sie die entsprechenden Felder markieren: Reihenname, Kategorienname, Wert. Geben Sie das Zeichen (Komma, Semikolon etc.) in das Feld Trennzeichen Datenbeschriftung ein, dass Sie zum Trennen der Beschriftungen verwenden möchten. Linien - Einstellen der Linienart für Liniendiagramme/Punktdiagramme (XY). Die folgenden Optionen stehen Ihnen zur Verfügung: Gerade, um gerade Linien zwischen Datenpunkten zu verwenden, glatt um glatte Kurven zwischen Datenpunkten zu verwenden oder keine, um keine Linien anzuzeigen. Markierungen - über diese Funktion können Sie festlegen, ob die Marker für Liniendiagramme/ Punktdiagramme (XY) angezeigt werden sollen (Kontrollkästchen aktiviert) oder nicht (Kontrollkästchen deaktiviert).Hinweis: Die Optionen Linien und Marker stehen nur für Liniendiagramme und Punktdiagramm (XY) zur Verfügung. Im Abschnitt Achseneinstellungen können Sie auswählen, ob die horizontalen/vertikalen Achsen angezeigt werden sollen oder nicht. Wählen Sie dazu einfach einblenden oder ausblenden aus der Menüliste aus. Außerdem können Sie auch die Parameter für horizontale/vertikale Achsenbeschriftung festlegen: Legen Sie fest, ob der horizontale Achsentitel angezeigt werden soll oder nicht. Wählen Sie dazu einfach die entsprechende Option aus der Menüliste aus: Keinen - der Titel der horizontalen Achse wird nicht angezeigt. Keine Überlappung - der Titel wird oberhalb der horizontalen Achse angezeigt. Wählen Sie die gewünschte Position des vertikalen Achsentitels aus der Menüliste aus: Keinen - der Titel der vertikalen Achse wird nicht angezeigt. Gedreht - der Titel wird links von der vertikalen Achse von unten nach oben angezeigt. Horizontal - der Titel wird links von der vertikalen Achse von links nach rechts angezeigt. Im Abschnitt Gitternetzlinien, können Sie festlegen, welche der horizontalen/vertikalen Gitternetzlinien angezeigt werden sollen. Wählen Sie dazu einfach die entsprechende Option aus der Menüliste aus: Hauptgitternetz, Hilfsgitternetz oder Alle. Wenn Sie alle Gitternetzlinien ausblenden wollen, wählen Sie die Option Keine.Hinweis: Die Abschnitte Achseneinstellungen und Gitternetzlinien sind für Kreisdiagramme deaktiviert, da bei diesem Diagrammtyp keine Achsen oder Gitternetze vorhanden sind. Hinweis: Die Registerkarte vertikale/horizontale Achsen ist für Kreisdiagramme deaktiviert, da bei diesem Diagrammtyp keine Achsen vorhanden sind. Auf der Registerkarte Vertikale Achse können Sie die Parameter der vertikalen Achse ändern, die auch als Werteachse oder Y-Achse bezeichnet wird und die numerische Werte anzeigt. Beachten Sie, dass bei Balkendiagrammen die vertikale Achse die Rubrikenachse ist, an der die Textbeschriftungen anzeigt werden, daher entsprechen in diesem Fall die Optionen in der Registerkarte Vertikale Achse den im nächsten Abschnitt beschriebenen Optionen. Für Punktdiagramme (XY) sind beide Achsen Wertachsen. Im Abschnitt Achsenoptionen können die folgenden Parameter festgelegt werden: Mindestwert - der niedrigste Wert, der am Anfang der vertikalen Achse angezeigt wird. Standardmäßig ist die Option Automatisch ausgewählt. In diesem Fall wird der Mindestwert automatisch abhängig vom ausgewählten Datenbereich berechnet. Alternativ können Sie die Option Festlegen aus der Menüliste auswählen und den gewünschten Wert in das dafür vorgesehene Feld eingeben. Höchstwert - der höchste Wert, der am Ende der vertikalen Achse angezeigt wird. Standardmäßig ist die Option Automatisch ausgewählt. In diesem Fall wird der Höchstwert automatisch abhängig vom ausgewählten Datenbereich berechnet. Alternativ können Sie die Option Festlegen aus der Menüliste auswählen und den gewünschten Wert in das dafür vorgesehene Feld eingeben. Schnittstelle - bestimmt den Punkt auf der vertikalen Achse, an dem die horizontale Achse die vertikale Achse kreuzt. Standardmäßig ist die Option Automatisch ausgewählt. In diesem Fall wird der Wert für die Schnittstelle automatisch abhängig vom ausgewählten Datenbereich berechnet. Alternativ können Sie die Option Wert aus der Menüliste auswählen und einen anderen Wert in das dafür vorgesehene Feld eingeben oder Sie legen den Achsenschnittpunkt am Mindest-/Höchstwert auf der vertikalen Achse fest. Einheiten anzeigen - Festlegung der numerischen Werte, die auf der vertikalen Achse angezeigt werden sollen. Diese Option kann nützlich sein, wenn Sie mit großen Zahlen arbeiten und die Werte auf der Achse kompakter und lesbarer anzeigen wollen (Sie können z.B. 50.000 als 50 anzeigen, indem Sie die Anzeigeeinheit in Tausendern auswählen). Wählen Sie die gewünschten Einheiten aus der Menüliste aus: In Hundertern, in Tausendern, 10 000, 100 000, in Millionen, 10.000.000, 100.000.000, in Milliarden, in Trillionen, oder Sie wählen die Option Keine, um zu den Standardeinheiten zurückzukehren. Werte in umgekehrter Reihenfolge - die Werte werden in absteigender Reihenfolge angezeigt. Wenn das Kontrollkästchen deaktiviert ist, wird der niedrigste Wert unten und der höchste Wert oben auf der Achse angezeigt. Wenn das Kontrollkästchen aktiviert ist, werden die Werte in absteigender Reihenfolge angezeigt. Im Abschnitt Skalierung können Sie die Darstellung von Teilstrichen auf der vertikalen Achse anpassen. Die größeren Teilstriche bilden die Hauptintervalle der Skalenteilung und dienen der Darstellung von nummerischen Werten. Kleine Teilstriche bilden Hilfsintervalle und haben keine Beschriftungen. Skalenstriche legen auch fest, an welcher Stelle Gitterlinien angezeigt werden können, sofern die entsprechende Option in der Registerkarte Layout aktiviert ist. In der Menüliste für Hauptintervalle/Hilfsintervalle stehen folgende Optionen für die Positionierung zur Verfügung: Keine - es werden keine Skalenstriche angezeigt. Beidseitig - auf beiden Seiten der Achse werden Skalenstriche angezeigt. Innen - die Skalenstriche werden auf der Innenseite der Achse angezeigt. Außen - die Skalenstriche werden auf der Außenseite der Achse angezeigt. Im Abschnitt Beschriftungsoptionen können Sie die Darstellung von Hauptintervallen, die Werte anzeigen, anpassen. Um die Anzeigeposition in Bezug auf die vertikale Achse festzulegen, wählen Sie die gewünschte Option aus der Menüliste aus: Keine - es werden keine Skalenbeschriftungen angezeigt. Tief - die Skalenbeschriftung wird links vom Diagrammbereich angezeigt. Hoch - die Skalenbeschriftung wird rechts vom Diagrammbereich angezeigt. Neben der Achse - die Skalenbeschriftung wird neben der Achse angezeigt. Auf der Registerkarte Horizontale Achse können Sie die Parameter der horizontalen Achse ändern, die auch als Werteachse oder X-Achse bezeichnet wird und die Textbeschriftungen anzeigt. Beachten Sie, dass bei Balkendiagrammen die horizontale Achse die Rubrikenachse ist an der die nummerischen Werte anzeigt werden, daher entsprechen in diesem Fall die Optionen in der Registerkarte Horizontale Achse den im nächsten Abschnitt beschriebenen Optionen. Für Punktdiagramme (XY) sind beide Achsen Wertachsen. Im Abschnitt Achsenoptionen können die folgenden Parameter festgelegt werden: Schnittstelle - bestimmt den Punkt auf der horizontalen Achse, an dem die vertikale Achse die horizontale Achse kreuzt. Standardmäßig ist die Option Automatisch ausgewählt. In diesem Fall wird der Wert für die Schnittstelle automatisch abhängig vom ausgewählten Datenbereich berechnet. Alternativ können Sie die Option Wert aus der Menüliste auswählen und einen anderen Wert in das dafür vorgesehene Feld eingeben oder Sie legen den Achsenschnittpunkt am Mindest-/Höchstwert (der Wert, welcher der ersten und letzten Kategorie entspricht) auf der horizontalen Achse fest. Achsenposition - legt fest, wo die Achsenbeschriftungen positioniert werden sollen: An den Skalenstrichen oder Zwischen den Skalenstrichen. Werte in umgekehrter Reihenfolge - die Kategorien werden in umgekehrter Reihenfolge angezeigt. Wenn das Kästchen deaktiviert ist, werden die Kategorien von links nach rechts angezeigt. Wenn das Kontrollkästchen aktiviert ist, werden die Kategorien von rechts nach links angezeigt. Im Abschnitt Skalierung können Sie die Darstellung von Teilstrichen auf der horizontalen Skala anpassen. Die größeren Teilstriche bilden die Hauptintervalle der Skalenteilung und dienen der Darstellung von Kategorien. Kleine Teilstriche werden zwischen den Hauptintervallen eingefügt und bilden Hilfsintervalle ohne Beschriftungen. Skalenstriche legen auch fest, an welcher Stelle Gitterlinien angezeigt werden können, sofern die entsprechende Option in der Registerkarte Layout aktiviert ist. Sie können die folgenden Parameter für die Skalenstriche anpassen: Hauptintervalle/Hilfsintervalle - legt fest wo die Teilstriche positioniert werden sollen, dazu stehen Ihnen folgende Optionen zur Verfügung: Keine - es werden keine Skalenstriche angezeigt, Beidseitig - auf beiden Seiten der Achse werden Skalenstriche angezeigt, Innen - die Skalenstriche werden auf der Innenseite der Achse angezeigt, Außen - die Skalenstriche werden auf der Außenseite der Achse angezeigt. Intervalle zwischen Teilstrichen - legt fest, wie viele Kategorien zwischen zwei benachbarten Teilstrichen angezeigt werden sollen. Im Abschnitt Beschriftungsoptionen können Sie die Darstellung von Beschriftungen für Kategorien anpassen. Beschriftungsposition - legt fest, wo die Beschriftungen in Bezug auf die horizontale Achse positioniert werden sollen: Wählen Sie die gewünschte Position aus der Dropdown-Liste aus: Keine - es wird keine Achsenbeschriftung angezeigt, Tief - die Kategorien werden im unteren Diagrammbereich angezeigt, Hoch - die Kategorien werden im oberen Diagrammbereich angezeigt, Neben der Achse - die Kategorien werden neben der Achse angezeigt. Abstand Achsenbeschriftung - legt fest, wie dicht die Achsenbeschriftung an der Achse positioniert wird. Sie können den gewünschten Wert im dafür vorgesehenen Eingabefeld festlegen. Je höher der eingegebene Wert, desto größer der Abstand zwischen der Achse und der Achsenbeschriftung. Intervalle zwischen Achsenbeschriftungen - legt fest, wie viele Kategorien auf der Achse angezeigt werden sollen. Standardmäßig ist die Option Automatisch ausgewählt. In diesem Fall werden alle Kategorien auf der Achse angezeigt. Alternativ können Sie die Option Manuell aus der Menüliste auswählen und den gewünschten Wert in das dafür vorgesehene Feld eingeben. Geben Sie zum Beispiel die Zahl 2 an, dann wird jede zweite Kategorie auf der Achse angezeigt usw. Die Registerkarte Alternativtext ermöglicht die Eingabe eines Titels und einer Beschreibung, die Personen mit Sehbehinderungen oder kognitiven Beeinträchtigungen vorgelesen werden kann, damit sie besser verstehen können, welche Informationen in dem Diagramm enthalten sind. Diagramme verschieben und Diagrammgröße ändern Wenn Sie ein Diagramm hinzugefügt haben, können Sie Größe und Position beliebig ändern. Um die Diagrammgröße zu ändern, ziehen Sie mit der Maus an den kleinen Quadraten die an den Ecken eingeblendet werden. Um das Originalseitenverhältnis des gewählten Diagramms bei der Größenänderung zu behalten, halten Sie die UMSCHALT-Taste gedrückt und ziehen Sie eines der Symbole an den Ecken. Um die Diagrammposition zu ändern, nutzen Sie das Symbol , das erscheint, wenn Sie mit Ihrem Mauszeiger über das Diagramm fahren. Ziehen Sie das Diagramm an die gewünschten Position, ohne die Maustaste loszulassen. Wenn Sie die Diagramm Bild verschieben, werden Hilfslinien angezeigt, damit Sie das Objekt präzise auf der Seite positionieren können (wenn Sie einen anderen Umbruchstil als mit Text in Zeile ausgewählt haben). Diagrammelemente bearbeiten Um den Diagrammtitel zu bearbeiten, wählen Sie den Standardtext mit der Maus aus und geben Sie stattdessen Ihren eigenen Text ein. Um die Schriftformatierung innerhalb von Textelementen, wie beispielsweise Diagrammtitel, Achsentitel, Legendeneinträge, Datenbeschriftungen etc. zu ändern, wählen Sie das gewünschte Textelement durch Klicken mit der linken Maustaste aus. Wechseln Sie in die Registerkarte Start und nutzen Sie die in der Menüleiste angezeigten Symbole, um Schriftart, Schriftgröße und Schriftfarbe oder DekoStile zu bearbeiten. Um ein Diagrammelement zu löschen, wählen Sie es mit der linken Maustaste aus und drücken Sie die Taste Entfernen auf Ihrer Tastatur. Sie haben die Möglichkeit 3D-Diagramme mithilfe der Maus zu drehen. Klicken Sie mit der linken Maustaste in den Diagrammbereich und halten Sie die Maustaste gedrückt. Um die 3D-Diagrammausrichtung zu ändern, ziehen Sie den Mauszeiger in die gewünschte Richtung ohne die Maustaste loszulassen. Diagrammeinstellungen anpassen Einige Diagrammeigenschaften können mithilfe der Registerkarte Diagrammeinstellungen in der rechten Seitenleiste geändert werden. Um das Menü zu aktivieren, klicken Sie auf das Diagramm und wählen Sie rechts das Symbol Diagrammeinstellungen aus. Hier können die folgenden Eigenschaften geändert werden: Größe - zeigt die aktuelle Breite und Höhe des Diagramms an. Textumbruch - der Stil für den Textumbruch wird aus den verfügbaren Vorlagen ausgewählt: Mit Text in Zeile, Quadrat, Eng, Transparent, Oben und unten, Vorne, Hinten (für weitere Information lesen Sie die folgende Beschreibung der erweiterten Einstellungen). Diagrammtyp ändern - ändern Sie den ausgewählten Diagrammtyp bzw. -stil.Um den gewünschten Diagrammstil auszuwählen, verwenden Sie im Abschnitt Diagrammtyp ändern die zweite Auswahlliste. Daten bearbeiten - das Fenster „Diagrammtools“ wird geöffnet.Hinweis: Wenn Sie einen Doppelklick auf einem in Ihrem Dokument enthaltenen Diagramm ausführen, öffnet sich das Fenster „Diagrammtools“. Einige dieser Optionen finden Sie auch im Rechtsklickmenü. Die Menüoptionen sind: Ausschneiden, Kopieren, Einfügen - Standardoptionen zum Ausschneiden oder Kopieren ausgewählter Textpassagen/Objekte und zum Einfügen von zuvor ausgeschnittenen/kopierten Textstellen oder Objekten an der aktuellen Cursorposition. Anordnen - um das ausgewählte Diagramm in den Vordergrund bzw. Hintergrund oder eine Ebene nach vorne bzw. hinten zu verschieben sowie Formen zu gruppieren und die Gruppierung aufzuheben (um diese wie ein einzelnes Objekt behandeln zu können). Weitere Informationen zum Anordnen von Objekten finden Sie auf dieser Seite. Ausrichten wird verwendet, um das Diagramm linksbündig, zentriert, rechtsbündig, oben, mittig oder unten auszurichten. Weitere Informationen zum Ausrichten von Objekten finden Sie auf dieser Seite. Textumbruch - der Stil für den Textumbruch wird aus den verfügbaren Vorlagen ausgewählt: Mit Text in Zeile, Quadrat, Eng, Transparent, Oben und unten, Vorne, Hinten. Die Option Umbruchsgrenze bearbeiten ist für Diagramme nicht verfügbar. Daten bearbeiten - das Fenster „Diagrammtools“ wird geöffnet. Erweiterte Diagrammeinstellungen - das Fenster „Diagramme - Erweiterte Einstellungen“ wird geöffnet. Wenn das Diagramm ausgewählt ist, ist rechts auch das Symbol Formeinstellungen verfügbar, da eine Form als Hintergrund für das Diagramm verwendet wird. Klicken Sie auf dieses Symbol, um die Registerkarte Formeinstellungen in der rechten Seitenleisten zu öffnen und passen sie Form Füllung, Linienstärke und Umbruchart. Beachten Sie, dass Sie den Formtyp nicht ändern können. Um die erweiterten Diagrammeinstellungen zu ändern, klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste auf das Diagramm und wählen Sie die Option Diagramm - Erweiterte Einstellungen im Rechtsklickmenü aus oder klicken Sie in der rechten Seitenleiste einfach auf den Link Erweiterte Einstellungen anzeigen. Das Fenster mit den Tabelleneigenschaften wird geöffnet: Die Registerkarte Größe enthält die folgenden Parameter: Breite und Höhe - nutzen Sie diese Optionen, um die Breite und/oder Höhe des Diagramms zu ändern. Wenn Sie die Funktion Seitenverhältnis sperren aktivieren (in diesem Fall sieht das Symbol so aus ), werden Breite und Höhe gleichmäßig geändert und das ursprüngliche Seitenverhältnis des Diagramms wird beibehalten. Die Registerkarte Textumbruch enthält die folgenden Parameter: Textumbruch - legen Sie fest, wie das Diagramm im Verhältnis zum Text positioniert wird: entweder als Teil des Textes (wenn Sie die Option „Mit Text verschieben“ auswählen) oder an allen Seiten von Text umgeben (wenn Sie einen anderen Stil auswählen). Mit Text verschieben - das Diagramm wird Teil des Textes (wie ein Zeichen) und wenn der Text verschoben wird, wird auch das Diagramm verschoben. In diesem Fall sind die Positionsoptionen nicht verfügbar. Ist eine der folgenden Umbrucharten ausgewählt, kann das Diagramm unabhängig vom Text verschoben und präzise auf der Seite positioniert werden: Quadrat - der Text bricht um den rechteckigen Kasten herum, der das Diagramm begrenzt. Eng - der Text bricht um die Bildkanten herum. Transparent - der Text bricht um die Diagrammkanten herum und füllt den offenen weißen Leerraum innerhalb des Diagramms. Oben und unten - der Text ist nur oberhalb und unterhalb des Diagramms. Vorne - das Diagramm überlappt mit dem Text. Hinten - der Text überlappt sich mit dem Diagramm. Wenn Sie die Stile Quadrat, Eng, Transparent oder Oben und unten auswählen, haben Sie die Möglichkeit zusätzliche Parameter einzugeben - Abstand vom Text auf allen Seiten (oben, unten, links, rechts). Die Registerkarte Position ist nur verfügbar, wenn Sie einen anderen Umbruchstil als „Mit Text in Zeile“ auswählen. Hier können Sie abhängig vom gewählten Format des Textumbruchs die folgenden Parameter festlegen: In der Gruppe Horizontal, können Sie eine der folgenden drei Bildpositionierungstypen auswählen: Ausrichtung (links, zentriert, rechts) gemessen an Zeichen, Spalte, linker Seitenrand, Seitenrand, Seite oder rechter Seitenrand. Absolute Position, gemessen in absoluten Einheiten wie Zentimeter/Punkte/Zoll (abhängig von der Voreinstellung in Datei -> Erweiterte Einstellungen...), rechts von Zeichen, Spalte, linker Seitenrand, Seitenrand, Seite oder rechter Seitenrand. Relative Position in Prozent, gemessen von linker Seitenrand, Seitenrand, Seite oder rechter Seitenrand. In der Gruppe Vertikal, können Sie eine der folgenden drei Bildpositionierungstypen auswählen: Ausrichtung (oben, zentriert, unten) gemessen von Zeile, Seitenrand, unterer Rand, Abschnitt, Seite oder oberer Rand. Absolute Position, gemessen in absoluten Einheiten wie Zentimeter/Punkte/Zoll (abhängig von der Voreinstellung in Datei -> Erweiterte Einstellungen...), unterhalb Zeile, Seitenrand, unterer Seitenrand, Absatz, Seite oder oberer Seitenrand. Relative Position in Prozent, gemessen von Seitenrand, unterer Seitenrand, Seite oder oberer Seitenrand. Im Kontrollkästchen Objekt mit Text verschieben können Sie festlegen, ob sich das Diagramm zusammen mit dem Text bewegen lässt, mit dem es verankert wurde. Überlappung zulassen legt fest, ob zwei Diagramme einander überlagern können oder nicht, wenn Sie diese auf einer Seite dicht aneinander bringen. Die Registerkarte Alternativtext ermöglicht die Eingabe eines Titels und einer Beschreibung, die Personen mit Sehbehinderungen oder kognitiven Beeinträchtigungen vorgelesen werden kann, damit sie besser verstehen können, welche Informationen in dem Diagramm enthalten sind." + "body": "Fügen Sie ein Diagramm ein Um ein Diagramm in Ihr Dokument einzufügen, Setzen Sie den Zeiger an die Stelle, an der Sie ein Diagramm hinzufügen möchten. Wechseln Sie zur Registerkarte Einfügen in der oberen Symbolleiste. Klicken Sie auf das Diagrammsymbol in der oberen Symbolleiste. Wählen Sie den gewünschten Diagrammtyp aus den verfügbaren aus - Spalte, Linie, Kreis, Balken, Fläche, XY (Streuung) oder Bestand, Hinweis: Für Spalten-, Linien-, Kreis- oder Balkendiagramme ist auch ein 3D-Format verfügbar. Danach erscheint das Fenster Diagrammeditor, in dem Sie die erforderlichen Daten mit den folgenden Steuerelementen in die Zellen eingeben können: und zum Kopieren und Einfügen der kopierten Daten. und zum Rückgängigmachen und Wiederherstellen von Aktionen zum Einfügen einer Funktion und zum Verringern und Erhöhen von Dezimalstellen zum Ändern des Zahlenformats, d. h. der Art und Weise, wie die von Ihnen eingegebenen Zahlen in Zellen angezeigt werden Ändern Sie die Diagrammeinstellungen, indem Sie im Fenster Diagrammeditor auf die Schaltfläche Diagramm bearbeiten klicken. Das Fenster Diagramm - Erweiterte Einstellungen wird geöffnet. Auf der Registerkarte Typ & Daten können Sie den Diagrammtyp sowie die Daten ändern, die Sie zum Erstellen eines Diagramms verwenden möchten. Wählen Sie einen Diagrammtyp aus, den Sie anwenden möchten: Spalte, Linie, Kreis, Balken, Fläche, XY (Streuung) oder Bestand. Überprüfen Sie den ausgewählten Datenbereich und ändern Sie ihn gegebenenfalls, indem Sie auf die Schaltfläche Daten auswählen klicken und den gewünschten Datenbereich im folgenden Format eingeben: Blatt1! A1: B4. Wählen Sie die Art und Weise, wie die Daten angeordnet werden sollen. Sie können entweder die Datenreihe auswählen, die auf der X-Achse verwendet werden soll: in Zeilen oder in Spalten. Auf der Registerkarte Layout können Sie das Layout von Diagrammelementen ändern. Geben Sie die Position des Diagrammtitels in Bezug auf Ihr Diagramm an und wählen Sie die erforderliche Option aus der Dropdown-Liste aus: Keine, um keinen Diagrammtitel anzuzeigen, Überlagern, um einen Titel auf dem Plotbereich zu überlagern und zu zentrieren. Keine Überlagerung, um den Titel über dem Plotbereich anzuzeigen. Geben Sie die Position der Legende in Bezug auf Ihr Diagramm an und wählen Sie die erforderliche Option aus der Dropdown-Liste aus: Keine, um keine Legende anzuzeigen, Unten, um die Legende anzuzeigen und am unteren Rand des Plotbereichs auszurichten. Oben, um die Legende anzuzeigen und am oberen Rand des Plotbereichs auszurichten. Rechts, um die Legende anzuzeigen und rechts vom Plotbereich auszurichten, Links, um die Legende anzuzeigen und links vom Plotbereich auszurichten. Linke Überlagerung zum Überlagern und Zentrieren der Legende links im Plotbereich. Rechte Überlagerung zum Überlagern und Zentrieren der Legende rechts im Plotbereich. Geben Sie die Parameter für Datenbeschriftungen (d. H. Textbeschriftungen, die exakte Werte von Datenpunkten darstellen) an: Geben Sie die Position der Datenbeschriftungen relativ zu den Datenpunkten an und wählen Sie die erforderliche Option aus der Dropdown-Liste aus. Die verfügbaren Optionen variieren je nach ausgewähltem Diagrammtyp. Für Spalten- / Balkendiagramme können Sie die folgenden Optionen auswählen: Keine, Mitte, Innen unten, Innen oben, Außen oben. Für Linien- / XY- (Streu-) / Aktien-Diagramme können Sie die folgenden Optionen auswählen: Keine, Mitte, Links, Rechts, Oben, Unten. Für Kreisdiagramme können Sie die folgenden Optionen auswählen: Keine, Mitte, An Breite anpassen, Innen oben, Außen oben. Für Flächendiagramme sowie für 3D-Spalten-, Linien- und Balkendiagramme können Sie die folgenden Optionen auswählen: Keine, Mitte. Wählen Sie die Daten aus, die Sie in Ihre Etiketten aufnehmen möchten, und aktivieren Sie die entsprechenden Kontrollkästchen: Serienname, Kategorienname, Wert. Geben Sie ein Zeichen (Komma, Semikolon etc.) , das Sie zum Trennen mehrerer Beschriftungen verwenden möchten, in das Eingabefeld Datenetiketten-Trennzeichen ein. Linien - wird verwendet, um einen Linienstil für Linien- / XY-Diagramme (Streudiagramme) auszuwählen. Sie können eine der folgenden Optionen auswählen: Gerade, um gerade Linien zwischen Datenpunkten zu verwenden, Glätten, um glatte Kurven zwischen Datenpunkten zu verwenden, oder Keine, um keine Linien anzuzeigen. Markierungen - wird verwendet, um anzugeben, ob die Markierungen für Linien- / XY-Diagramme (Streuung) angezeigt werden sollen (wenn das Kontrollkästchen aktiviert ist) oder nicht (wenn das Kontrollkästchen deaktiviert ist).Hinweis: Die Optionen Linien und Markierungen sind nur für Liniendiagramme und XY-Diagramme (Streudiagramme) verfügbar. Im Abschnitt Achseneinstellungen können Sie festlegen, ob die horizontale/vertikale Achse anzeigen möchten oder nichtdie Option Anzeigen oder Ausblenden aus der Dropdown-Liste auswählen. Sie können auch Parameter für den Titel der horizontalen / vertikalen Achse angeben: Geben Sie an, ob Sie den Titel der horizontalen Achse anzeigen möchten oder nicht die erforderliche Option aus der Dropdown-Liste auswählen möchten: Keine, um keinen Titel der horizontalen Achse anzuzeigen, Keine Überlagerung, um den Titel unterhalb der horizontalen Achse anzuzeigen. Geben Sie die Ausrichtung des Titels der vertikalen Achse an und wählen Sie die erforderliche Option aus der Dropdown-Liste aus: Keine, um keinen vertikalen Achsentitel anzuzeigen, Gedreht, um den Titel von unten nach oben links von der vertikalen Achse anzuzeigen. Horizontal, um den Titel horizontal links von der vertikalen Achse anzuzeigen. Im Abschnitt Gitterlinien können Sie angeben, welche der horizontalen/vertikalen Gitterlinien Sie angezeigt möchten, indem Sie die erforderliche Option aus der Dropdown-Liste auswählen: Major, Minor oder Major und Minor. Sie können die Gitterlinien überhaupt mit der Option Keine ausblenden.Hinweis: Die Abschnitte Achseneinstellungen und Gitterlinien werden für Kreisdiagramme deaktiviert, da Diagramme dieses Typs keine Achsen und Gitterlinien haben. Hinweis: Die Registerkarte Vertikale / Horizontale Achse sind für Kreisdiagramme deaktiviert, da Diagramme dieser Art keine Achsen haben. Auf der Registerkarte Vertikale Achse können Sie die Parameter der vertikalen Achse ändern, die auch als Werteachse oder y-Achse bezeichnet wird und numerische Werte anzeigt. Beachten Sie, dass die vertikale Achse die Kategorieachse ist, auf der Textbeschriftungen für die Balkendiagramme anzeigt werden. In diesem Fall entsprechen die Optionen auf der Registerkarte Vertikale Achse den im nächsten Abschnitt beschriebenen. Für XY-Diagramme (Streudiagramme) sind beide Achsen Wertachsen. Im Abschnitt Achsenoptionen können Sie die folgenden Parameter einstellen: Minimalwert - wird verwendet, um einen niedrigsten Wert anzugeben, der am Start der vertikalen Achse angezeigt wird. Die Option Auto ist standardmäßig ausgewählt. In diesem Fall wird der Mindestwert abhängig vom ausgewählten Datenbereich automatisch berechnet. Sie können die Option Fest aus der Dropdown-Liste auswählen und im Eingabefeld rechts einen anderen Wert angeben. Maximalwert - wird verwendet, um einen höchsten Wert anzugeben, der am Ende der vertikalen Achse angezeigt wird. Die Option Auto ist standardmäßig ausgewählt. In diesem Fall wird der Maximalwert abhängig vom ausgewählten Datenbereich automatisch berechnet. Sie können die Option Fest aus der Dropdown-Liste auswählen und im Eingabefeld rechts einen anderen Wert angeben. Achsenkreuze - wird verwendet, um einen Punkt auf der vertikalen Achse anzugeben, an dem die horizontale Achse ihn kreuzen soll. Die Option Auto ist standardmäßig ausgewählt. In diesem Fall wird der Achsenschnittpunktwert abhängig vom ausgewählten Datenbereich automatisch berechnet. Sie können die Option Wert aus der Dropdown-Liste auswählen und im Eingabefeld rechts einen anderen Wert angeben oder den Achsenschnittpunkt auf den minimalen / maximalen Wert auf der vertikalen Achse setzen. Anzeigeeinheiten - wird verwendet, um eine Darstellung der numerischen Werte entlang der vertikalen Achse zu bestimmen. Diese Option kann nützlich sein, wenn Sie mit großen Zahlen arbeiten und möchten, dass die Werte auf der Achse kompakter und lesbarer angezeigt werden (z. B. können Sie 50.000 als 50 darstellen, indem Sie die Anzeigeeinheiten für Tausende verwenden). Wählen Sie die gewünschten Einheiten aus der Dropdown-Liste aus: Hunderte, Tausende, 10.000, 100.000, in Millionen, 10.000.000, 100.000.000, Milliarden, Billionen, oder wählen Sie die Option Keine, um zu den Standardeinheiten zurückzukehren. Werte in umgekehrter Reihenfolge - wird verwendet, um Werte in entgegengesetzter Richtung anzuzeigen. Wenn das Kontrollkästchen deaktiviert ist, befindet sich der niedrigste Wert unten und der höchste Wert oben auf der Achse. Wenn das Kontrollkästchen aktiviert ist, werden die Werte von oben nach unten sortiert. Im Abschnitt Häkchenoptionen können Sie das Erscheinungsbild von Häkchen auf der vertikalen Skala anpassen. Hauptmarkierungen sind die größeren Teilungen, bei denen Beschriftungen numerische Werte anzeigen können. Kleinere Häkchen sind die Skalenunterteilungen, die zwischen den großen Häkchen platziert werden und keine Beschriftungen haben. Häkchen definieren auch, wo Gitterlinien angezeigt werden können, wenn die entsprechende Option auf der Registerkarte Layout festgelegt ist. Die Dropdown-Listen Major / Minor Type enthalten die folgenden Platzierungsoptionen: Keine, um keine Haupt- / Nebenmarkierungen anzuzeigen, Kreuzen Sie, um auf beiden Seiten der Achse Haupt- / Nebenmarkierungen anzuzeigen. In, um Haupt- / Nebenmarkierungen innerhalb der Achse anzuzeigen, Out, um Haupt- / Nebenmarkierungen außerhalb der Achse anzuzeigen. Im Abschnitt Beschriftungsoptionen können Sie das Erscheinungsbild der wichtigsten Häkchenbeschriftungen anpassen, auf denen Werte angezeigt werden. Um eine Beschriftungsposition in Bezug auf die vertikale Achse festzulegen, wählen Sie die erforderliche Option aus der Dropdown-Liste aus: Keine, um keine Häkchenbeschriftungen anzuzeigen, Niedrig, um Markierungsbeschriftungen links vom Plotbereich anzuzeigen. Hoch, um Markierungsbeschriftungen rechts vom Plotbereich anzuzeigen. Neben der Achse, um Markierungsbezeichnungen neben der Achse anzuzeigen. Auf der Registerkarte Horizontale Achse können Sie die Parameter der horizontalen Achse ändern, die auch als Kategorieachse oder x-Achse bezeichnet wird und Textbeschriftungen anzeigt. Beachten Sie, dass die horizontale Achse die Werteachse ist, auf der numerische Werte für die Balkendiagramme angezeigt werden. In diesem Fall entsprechen die Optionen auf der Registerkarte Horizontale Achse in diesem Fall den im vorherigen Abschnitt beschriebenen. Für die XY-Diagramme (Streudiagramme) sind beide Achsen Wertachsen. Im Abschnitt Achsenoptionen können die folgenden Parameter einstellen: Achsenkreuze - wird verwendet, um einen Punkt auf der horizontalen Achse anzugeben, an dem die vertikale Achse ihn kreuzen soll. Die Option Auto ist standardmäßig ausgewählt. In diesem Fall wird der Achsenschnittpunktwert abhängig vom ausgewählten Datenbereich automatisch berechnet. Sie können die Option Wert aus der Dropdown-Liste auswählen und im Eingabefeld rechts einen anderen Wert angeben oder den Achsenschnittpunkt auf den minimalen / maximalen Wert (der der ersten und letzten Kategorie entspricht) in der Horizontalen setzen Achse. Achsenposition - wird verwendet, um anzugeben, wo die Achsentextbeschriftungen platziert werden sollen: Auf Häkchen oder Zwischen Häkchen. Werte in umgekehrter Reihenfolge - wird verwendet, um Kategorien in entgegengesetzter Richtung anzuzeigen. Wenn das Kontrollkästchen deaktiviert ist, werden Kategorien von links nach rechts angezeigt. Wenn das Kontrollkästchen aktiviert ist, werden die Kategorien von rechts nach links sortiert. Im Abschnitt Häkchenoptionen können Sie die Anzeige anpassen Anzahl der Häkchen auf der horizontalen Skala. Wichtige Häkchen sind die größeren Bereiche, in denen Beschriftungen Kategoriewerte anzeigen können. Kleinere Häkchen sind die kleineren Unterteilungen, die zwischen den großen Häkchen stehen und keine Beschriftungen haben. Häkchen definieren auch, wo Gitterlinien angezeigt werden können, wenn die entsprechende Option auf der Registerkarte Layout festgelegt ist. Sie können die folgenden Häkchenparameter anpassen: Haupt- / Neben-Typ - wird verwendet, um die folgenden Platzierungsoptionen anzugeben: Keine, um Haupt- / Neben-Häkchen nicht anzuzeigen, Kreuz, um Haupt- / Neben-Häkchen auf beiden Seiten der Achse anzuzeigen, In, um Haupt- / Neben-Häkchen innerhalb der Achse anzuzeigen , Out, um Haupt- / Nebenmarkierungen außerhalb der Achse anzuzeigen. Intervall zwischen Markierungen - Hiermit wird festgelegt, wie viele Kategorien zwischen zwei benachbarten Häkchen angezeigt werden sollen. Im Abschnitt Beschriftungsoptionen können Sie das Erscheinungsbild von Beschriftungen anpassen, in denen Kategorien angezeigt werden. Beschriftungsposition - wird verwendet, um anzugeben, wo die Beschriftungen in Bezug auf die horizontale Achse platziert werden sollen. Wählen Sie die gewünschte Option aus der Dropdown-Liste aus: Keine, um keine Kategoriebeschriftungen anzuzeigen, Niedrig, um Kategoriebeschriftungen am unteren Rand des Plotbereichs anzuzeigen, Hoch, um Kategoriebeschriftungen am oberen Rand des Plotbereichs anzuzeigen, Neben der Achse, um die Kategorie anzuzeigen Beschriftungen neben der Achse. Achsenbeschriftungsabstand - wird verwendet, um festzulegen, wie eng die Beschriftungen an der Achse platziert werden sollen. Den erforderlichen Wert können Sie im Eingabefeld angeben. Je mehr Wert Sie einstellen, desto größer ist der Abstand zwischen Achse und Beschriftung. Intervall zwischen Beschriftungen - wird verwendet, um anzugeben, wie oft die Beschriftungen angezeigt werden sollen. Die Option Auto ist standardmäßig ausgewählt. In diesem Fall werden für jede Kategorie Beschriftungen angezeigt. Sie können die Option Manuell aus der Dropdown-Liste auswählen und den erforderlichen Wert im Eingabefeld rechts angeben. Geben Sie beispielsweise 2 ein, um Beschriftungen für jede andere Kategorie usw. anzuzeigen. Auf der Registerkarte Alternativer Text können Sie einen Titel und eine Beschreibung angeben, die Personen mit Seh- oder kognitiven Beeinträchtigungen vorgelesen werden, damit sie besser verstehen, welche Informationen in der Tabelle enthalten sind. Verschieben und Ändern der Größe von Diagrammen Sobald das Diagramm hinzugefügt wurde, können Sie seine Größe und Position ändern. Um die Diagrammgröße zu ändern, ziehen Sie kleine Quadrate an den Rändern. Halten Sie die Umschalttaste gedrückt und ziehen Sie eines der Eckensymbole, um die ursprünglichen Proportionen des ausgewählten Diagramms während der Größenänderung beizubehalten. Verwenden Sie zum Ändern der Diagrammposition das Symbol , das angezeigt wird, nachdem Sie den Mauszeiger über das Diagramm bewegt haben. Ziehen Sie das Diagramm an die gewünschte Position, ohne die Maustaste loszulassen. Wenn Sie das Diagramm verschieben, werden Hilfslinien angezeigt, mit denen Sie das Objekt präzise auf der Seite positionieren können (wenn ein anderer Umbruchstil als Inline ausgewählt ist). Hinweis: Die Liste der Tastaturkürzel, die beim Arbeiten mit Objekten verwendet werden können, finden Sie hier Diagrammelemente bearbeiten Um den Diagrammtitel zu bearbeiten, wählen Sie den Standardtext mit der Maus aus und geben Sie stattdessen Ihren eigenen ein. Um die Schriftformatierung in Textelementen wie Diagrammtitel, Achsentiteln, Legendeneinträgen, Datenbeschriftungen usw. zu ändern, wählen Sie das gewünschte Textelement aus, indem Sie mit der linken Maustaste darauf klicken. Verwenden Sie dann die Symbole auf der Registerkarte Start der oberen Symbolleiste, um den Schrifttyp, die Größe, die Farbe oder den Dekorationsstil zu ändern. Wenn das Diagramm ausgewählt ist, ist rechts auch das Symbol für die Formeinstellungen verfügbar, da eine Form als Hintergrund für das Diagramm verwendet wird. Sie können auf dieses Symbol klicken, um die Registerkarte Formeinstellungen in der rechten Seitenleiste zu öffnen und die Form Füll-, Strich- und Umhüllungsstil anzupassen. Beachten Sie, dass Sie den Formtyp nicht ändern können. Über die Registerkarte Formeinstellungen im rechten Bereich können Sie nicht nur den Diagrammbereich selbst anpassen, sondern auch die Diagrammelemente wie Plotbereich, Datenreihen, Diagrammtitel, Legende usw. ändern und verschiedene Füllarten auf sie anwenden. Wählen Sie das Diagrammelement aus, indem Sie mit der linken Maustaste darauf klicken, und wählen Sie den bevorzugten Fülltyp aus: Volltonfarbe, Verlauf, Textur oder Bild, Muster. Geben Sie die Füllparameter an und legen Sie gegebenenfalls die Deckkraftstufe fest. Wenn Sie eine vertikale oder horizontale Achse oder Gitterlinien auswählen, sind die Stricheinstellungen nur auf der Registerkarte Formeinstellungen verfügbar: Farbe, Breite und Typ. Weitere Informationen zum Arbeiten mit Formfarben, Füllungen und Strichen finden Sie auf dieser Seite. Hinweis: Die Option Schatten anzeigen ist auch auf der Registerkarte Formeinstellungen verfügbar, für Diagrammelemente jedoch deaktiviert. Um ein Diagrammelement zu löschen, wählen Sie es mit der linken Maustaste aus und drücken Sie die Entf-Taste auf der Tastatur. Sie können 3D-Diagramme auch mit der Maus drehen. Klicken Sie mit der linken Maustaste in den Plotbereich und halten Sie die Maustaste gedrückt. Ziehen Sie den Zeiger, ohne die Maustaste loszulassen, um die Ausrichtung des 3D-Diagramms zu ändern. Passen Sie die Diagrammeinstellungen an Einige Diagrammeigenschaften können über der Registerkarte Diagrammeinstellungen in der rechten Seitenleiste geändert werden. Um es zu aktivieren, klicken Sie auf das Diagramm und wählen Sie rechts das Symbol Diagrammeinstellungen . Hier können die folgenden Eigenschaften ändern: Größe wird verwendet, um die aktuelle Diagrammbreite und -höhe anzuzeigen. Umbruchstil wird verwendet, um einen Textumbruchstil auszuwählen - inline, quadratisch, eng, durch, oben und unten, vorne, hinten (weitere Informationen finden Sie in der Beschreibung der erweiterten Einstellungen unten). Diagrammtyp ändern wird verwendet, um den ausgewählten Diagrammtyp und / oder -stil zu ändern. Verwenden Sie zum Auswählen des erforderlichen Diagrammstils das zweite Dropdown-Menü im Abschnitt Diagrammtyp ändern. Daten bearbeiten wird verwendet, um das Fenster 'Diagrammeditor' zu öffnen.Hinweis: Um das Fenster Diagrammeditor schnell zu öffnen, können Sie auch auf das Diagramm im Dokument doppelklicken. Einige dieser Optionen finden Sie auch im Kontextmenu. Die Menüoptionen sind: Ausschneiden, Kopieren, Einfügen - Standardoptionen mit denen ein ausgewählter Text / ein ausgewähltes Objekt ausgeschnitten oder kopiert und eine zuvor ausgeschnittene / kopierte Textpassage oder ein Objekt an die aktuelle Zeigerposition eingefügt wird. Anordnen wird verwendet, um das ausgewählte Diagramm in den Vordergrund zu bringen, in den Hintergrund zu senden, vorwärts oder rückwärts zu bewegen sowie Diagramme zu gruppieren oder die Gruppierung aufzuheben, um Operationen mit mehreren von ihnen gleichzeitig auszuführen. Weitere Informationen zum Anordnen von Objekten finden Sie auf dieser Seite. Ausrichten wird verwendet, um das Diagramm links, in der Mitte, rechts, oben, in der Mitte und unten auszurichten. Weitere Informationen zum Ausrichten von Objekten finden Sie auf dieser Seite. Der Umbruchstil wird verwendet, um einen Textumbruchstil aus den verfügbaren auszuwählen - Inline, Quadrat, Eng, Durch, Oben und Unten, vorne, hinten. Die Option Wrap-Grenze bearbeiten ist für Diagramme nicht verfügbar. Daten bearbeiten wird verwendet, um das Fenster,Diagrammeditor zu öffnen. Mit den Erweiterten Karteneinstellungen wird das Fenster „Diagramme - Erweiterte Einstellungen“ geöffnet. Um die erweiterten Diagrammeinstellungen zu ändern, klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste auf das gewünschte Diagramm und wählen Sie im Kontextmenü die Option Erweiterte Einstellungen des Diagramms aus, oder klicken Sie einfach auf den Link Erweiterte Einstellungen anzeigen in der rechten Seitenleiste. Das Fenster mit den Diagrammeigenschaften wird geöffnet: Die Registerkarte Größe enthält die folgenden Parameter: Breite und Höhe - Verwenden Sie diese Optionen, um die Diagrammbreite und / oder -höhe zu ändern. Wenn Sie auf die Schaltfläche Konstante Proportionen klicken (in diesem Fall sieht es so aus ), werden Breite und Höhe zusammen geändert, wobei das ursprüngliche Diagrammseitenverhältnis beibehalten wird. Die Registerkarte Textumbruch enthält die folgenden Parameter: Umbruchstil - Verwenden Sie diese Option, um die Position des Diagramms relativ zum Text zu ändern: Es ist entweder Teil des Textes (falls Sie den Inline-Stil auswählen) oder wird von allen Seiten umgangen (wenn Sie einen auswählen) die anderen Stile). Inline - Das Diagramm wird wie ein Zeichen als Teil des Textes betrachtet. Wenn sich der Text bewegt, bewegt sich auch das Diagramm. In diesem Fall sind die Positionierungsoptionen nicht zugänglich. Wenn einer der folgenden Stile ausgewählt ist, kann das Diagramm unabhängig vom Text verschoben und genau auf der Seite positioniert werden: Quadratisch - Der Text umschließt das rechteckige Feld, das das Diagramm begrenzt. Eng - Der Text umschließt die tatsächlichen Diagrammkanten. Durch - Der Text wird um die Diagrammkanten gewickelt und füllt den offenen weißen Bereich innerhalb des Diagramms aus. Oben und unten - Der Text befindet sich nur über und unter dem Diagramm. Vorne - das Diagramm überlappt dem Text. Dahinter - der Text überlappt das Diagramm. Wenn Sie den quadratischen, engen, durchgehenden oder oberen und unteren Stil auswählen, können Sie einige zusätzliche Parameter festlegen - Abstand zum Text an allen Seiten (oben, unten, links, rechts). Die Registerkarte Position ist nur verfügbar, wenn Sie einen anderen Umbruchstil als Inline auswählen. Diese Registerkarte enthält die folgenden Parameter, die je nach ausgewähltem Verpackungsstil variieren: Im horizontalen Bereich können Sie einen der folgenden drei Diagrammpositionierungstypen auswählen: Ausrichtung (links, Mitte, rechts) relativ zu Zeichen, Spalte, linkem Rand, Rand, Seite oder rechtem Rand. Absolute Position, gemessen in absoluten Einheiten, d. H. Zentimeter/Punkte/Zoll (abhängig von der auf der Registerkarte Datei -> Erweiterte Einstellungen...angegebenen Option), rechts neben Zeichen, Spalte, linkem Rand, Rand, Seite oder rechtem Rand, Relative Position gemessen in in Prozent relativ zum linken Rand, Rand, Seite oder rechten Rand Im vertikalen Bereich können Sie einen der folgenden drei Diagrammpositionierungstypen auswählen: Ausrichtung (oben, Mitte, unten) relativ zu Linie, Rand, unterem Rand, Absatz, Seite oder oberem Rand, Absolute Position, gemessen in absoluten Einheiten, d. H. Zentimeter/Punkte/Zoll (abhängig von der auf der Registerkarte Datei -> Erweiterte Einstellungen...angegebenen Option) unter Linie, Rand, unterem Rand, Absatz, Seite oder oberem Rand, Relative Position gemessen in Prozent relativ zum Rand, unteren Rand, Seite oder oberen Rand. Objekt mit Text verschieben steuert, ob sich das Diagramm so bewegt, wie sich der Text bewegt, an dem es verankert ist. Überlappungssteuerung zulassen steuert, ob sich zwei Diagramme überlappen oder nicht, wenn Sie sie auf der Seite nebeneinander ziehen. Auf der Registerkarte Alternativer Text können Sie einen Titel und eine Beschreibung angeben, die Personen mit Seh- oder kognitiven Beeinträchtigungen vorgelesen werden, damit sie besser verstehen, welche Informationen in der Tabelle enthalten sind." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertContentControls.htm", "title": "Inhaltssteuerelemente einfügen", - "body": "Mithilfe von Inhaltssteuerelementen können Sie ein Formular mit Eingabefeldern erstellen, die von anderen Benutzern ausgefüllt werden können; oder Sie können Teile des Dokuments davor schützen, bearbeitet oder gelöscht zu werden. Inhaltssteuerelemente sind Objekte die Text enthalten, der formatiert werden kann. Inhaltssteuerelemente für einfachen Text können nur einen Absatz enthalten, während Steuerelemente für Rich-Text-Inhalte mehrere Absätze, Listen und Objekte (Bilder, Formen, Tabellen usw.) enthalten können. Inhaltssteuerelemente hinzufügen Neues Inhaltssteuerelement für einfachen Text erstellen: Positionieren Sie den Einfügepunkt innerhalb einer Textzeile, in die das Steuerelement eingefügt werden soll oder wählen Sie eine Textpassage aus, die Sie zum Steuerungsinhalt machen wollen. Wechseln Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf die Registerkarte Einfügen. Klicken Sie auf den Pfeil neben dem Symbol Inhaltssteuerelemente. Wählen sie die Option Inhaltssteuerelement für einfachen Text einfügen aus dem Menü aus. Das Steuerelement wird an der Einfügemarke innerhalb einer Zeile des vorhandenen Texts eingefügt. Bei Steuerelementen für einfachen Text können keine Zeilenumbrüche hinzugefügt werden und sie dürfen keine anderen Objekte wie Bilder, Tabellen usw. enthalten. Neues Inhaltssteuerelement für Rich-Text erstellen: Positionieren Sie die Einfügemarke am Ende eines Absatzes, nach dem das Steuerelement hinzugefügt werden soll oder wählen Sie einen oder mehrere der vorhandenen Absätze aus die Sie zum Steuerungsinhalt machen wollen. Wechseln Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf die Registerkarte Einfügen. Klicken Sie auf den Pfeil neben dem Symbol Inhaltssteuerelemente. Wählen sie die Option Inhaltssteuerelement für Rich-Text einfügen aus dem Menü aus. Das Steuerungselement wird in einem neuen Paragraphen eingefügt. Rich-Text-Inhaltssteuerelemente ermöglichen das Hinzufügen von Zeilenumbrüchen und Sie können multiple Absätze sowie auch Objekte enthalten, z. B. Bilder, Tabellen, andere Inhaltssteuerelemente usw. Hinweis: Der Rahmen des Textfelds für das Inhaltssteuerelement ist nur sichtbar, wenn das Steuerelement ausgewählt ist. In der gedruckten Version sind die Ränder nicht zu sehen. Inhaltssteuerelemente verschieben Steuerelemente können an eine andere Stelle im Dokument verschoben werden: Klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche links neben dem Rahmen des Steuerelements, um das Steuerelement auszuwählen, und ziehen Sie es bei gedrückter Maustaste an die gewünschte Position. Sie können Inhaltssteuerelemente auch kopieren und einfügen: wählen Sie das entsprechende Steuerelement aus und verwenden Sie die Tastenkombinationen STRG+C/STRG+V. Inhaltssteuerelemente bearbeiten Ersetzen Sie den Standardtext im Steuerelement („Text eingeben\") durch Ihren eigenen Text: Wählen Sie den Standardtext aus und geben Sie einen neuen Text ein oder kopieren Sie eine beliebige Textpassage und fügen Sie diese in das Inhaltssteuerelement ein. Der Text im Inhaltssteuerelement eines beliebigen Typs (für einfachen Text und Rich-Text) kann mithilfe der Symbole in der oberen Symbolleiste formatiert werden: Sie können Schriftart, -größe und -farbe anpassen und DekoSchriften und Formatierungsvorgaben anwenden. Es ist auch möglich die Texteigenschaften im Fenster Paragraph - Erweiterte Einstellungen zu ändern, das Ihnen im Kontextmenü oder in der rechten Seitenleiste zur Verfügung steht. Text in Rich-Text-Inhaltssteuerelementen kann wie normaler Dokumententext formatiert werden, Sie können beispielsweise den Zeilenabstand festlegen, Absatzeinzüge ändern oder Tab-Stopps anpassen. Einstellungen für Inhaltssteuerelemente ändern Die Einstellungen für Inhaltssteuerelemente öffnen Sie wie folgt: Wählen Sie das gewünschte Inhaltssteuerelement aus und klicken Sie auf den Pfeil neben dem Symbol Inhaltssteuerelemente in der oberen Symbolleiste und wählen Sie dann die Option Einstellungen Steuerelemente aus dem Menü aus. Klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste auf eine beliebige Stelle im Inhaltssteuerelement und nutzen Sie die Option Einstellungen Steuerungselement im Kontextmenü. Im sich nun öffnenden Fenstern können Sie die folgenden Parameter festlegen: Legen Sie in den entsprechenden Feldern Titel oder Tag des Steuerelements fest. Der Titel wird angezeigt, wenn das Steuerelement im Dokument ausgewählt wird. Tags werden verwendet, um Inhaltssteuerelemente zu identifizieren, damit Sie im Code darauf verweisen können. Wählen Sie aus, ob Sie Steuerelemente mit einem Begrenzungsrahmen anzeigen möchten oder nicht. Wählen Sie die Option Keine, um das Steuerelement ohne Begrenzungsrahmen anzuzeigen. Wenn Sie die Option Begrenzungsrahmen auswählen, können Sie die Feldfarbe im untenstehenden Feld auswählen. Im Abschnitt Sperren können Sie das Inhaltssteuerelement mit der entsprechenden Option vor ungewolltem Löschen oder Bearbeiten schützen: Inhaltssteuerelement kann nicht gelöscht werden - Aktivieren Sie dieses Kontrollkästchen, um ein Löschen des Steuerelements zu verhindern. Inhaltssteuerelement kann nicht bearbeitet werden - Aktivieren Sie dieses Kontrollkästchen, um ein Bearbeiten des Steuerelements zu verhindern. Klicken Sie im Fenster Einstellungen auf OK, um die Änderungen zu bestätigen. Es ist auch möglich, Inhaltssteuerelemente mit einer bestimmten Farbe hervorzuheben. Inhaltssteuerelemente farblich hervorheben: Klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche links neben dem Rahmen des Steuerelements, um das Steuerelement auszuwählen. Klicken Sie auf der oberen Symbolleiste auf den Pfeil neben dem Symbol Inhaltssteuerelemente. Wählen Sie die Option Einstellungen hervorheben aus dem Menü aus. Wählen Sie die gewünschte Farbe auf den verfügbaren Paletten aus: Themenfarben, Standardfarben oder neue benutzerdefinierte Farbe angeben. Um zuvor angewendete Farbmarkierungen zu entfernen, verwenden Sie die Option Keine Markierung. Die ausgewählten Hervorhebungsoptionen werden auf alle Inhaltssteuerelemente im Dokument angewendet. Inhaltssteuerelemente entfernen Um ein Steuerelement zu entfernen ohne den Inhalt zu löschen, klicken Sie auf das entsprechende Ssteuerelement und gehen Sie vor wie folgt: Klicken Sie auf den Pfeil neben dem Symbol Inhaltssteuerelemente in der oberen Symbolleiste und wählen Sie dann die Option Steuerelement entfernen aus dem Menü aus. Klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste auf das Steuerelement und wählen Sie die Option Steuerungselement entfernen im Kontextmenü aus. Um ein Steuerelement einschließlich Inhalt zu entfernen, wählen Sie das entsprechende Steuerelement aus und drücken Sie die Taste Löschen auf der Tastatur." + "body": "Mithilfe von Inhaltssteuerelementen können Sie ein Formular mit Eingabefeldern erstellen, die von anderen Benutzern ausgefüllt werden können; oder Sie können Teile des Dokuments davor schützen, bearbeitet oder gelöscht zu werden. Inhaltssteuerelemente sind Objekte die Text enthalten, der formatiert werden kann. Inhaltssteuerelemente für einfachen Text können nur einen Absatz enthalten, während Steuerelemente für Rich-Text-Inhalte mehrere Absätze, Listen und Objekte (Bilder, Formen, Tabellen usw.) enthalten können. Inhaltssteuerelemente hinzufügen Neues Inhaltssteuerelement für einfachen Text erstellen: Positionieren Sie den Einfügepunkt innerhalb einer Textzeile, in die das Steuerelement eingefügt werden soll oder wählen Sie eine Textpassage aus, die Sie zum Steuerungsinhalt machen wollen. Wechseln Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf die Registerkarte Einfügen. Klicken Sie auf den Pfeil neben dem Symbol Inhaltssteuerelemente. Wählen sie die Option Inhaltssteuerelement für einfachen Text einfügen aus dem Menü aus. Das Steuerelement wird an der Einfügemarke innerhalb einer Zeile des vorhandenen Texts eingefügt. Bei Steuerelementen für einfachen Text können keine Zeilenumbrüche hinzugefügt werden und sie dürfen keine anderen Objekte wie Bilder, Tabellen usw. enthalten. Neues Inhaltssteuerelement für Rich-Text erstellen: Positionieren Sie die Einfügemarke am Ende eines Absatzes, nach dem das Steuerelement hinzugefügt werden soll oder wählen Sie einen oder mehrere der vorhandenen Absätze aus, die Sie zum Steuerungsinhalt machen wollen. Wechseln Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf die Registerkarte Einfügen. Klicken Sie auf den Pfeil neben dem Symbol Inhaltssteuerelemente. Wählen sie die Option Inhaltssteuerelement für Rich-Text einfügen aus dem Menü aus. Das Steuerungselement wird in einem neuen Paragraphen eingefügt. Rich-Text-Inhaltssteuerelemente ermöglichen das Hinzufügen von Zeilenumbrüchen und Sie können multiple Absätze sowie auch Objekte enthalten z. B. Bilder, Tabellen, andere Inhaltssteuerelemente usw. Hinweis: Der Rahmen des Textfelds für das Inhaltssteuerelement ist nur sichtbar, wenn das Steuerelement ausgewählt ist. In der gedruckten Version sind die Ränder nicht zu sehen. Inhaltssteuerelemente verschieben Steuerelemente können an eine andere Stelle im Dokument verschoben werden: Klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche links neben dem Rahmen des Steuerelements, um das Steuerelement auszuwählen, und ziehen Sie es bei gedrückter Maustaste an die gewünschte Position. Sie können Inhaltssteuerelemente auch kopieren und einfügen: wählen Sie das entsprechende Steuerelement aus und verwenden Sie die Tastenkombinationen STRG+C/STRG+V. Inhaltssteuerelemente bearbeiten Ersetzen Sie den Standardtext im Steuerelement („Text eingeben\") durch Ihren eigenen Text: Wählen Sie den Standardtext aus und geben Sie einen neuen Text ein oder kopieren Sie eine beliebige Textpassage und fügen Sie diese in das Inhaltssteuerelement ein. Der Text im Inhaltssteuerelement eines beliebigen Typs (für einfachen Text und Rich-Text) kann mithilfe der Symbole in der oberen Symbolleiste formatiert werden: Sie können Schriftart, -größe und -farbe anpassen und DekoSchriften und Formatierungsvorgaben anwenden. Es ist auch möglich die Texteigenschaften im Fenster Paragraph - Erweiterte Einstellungen zu ändern, das Ihnen im Kontextmenü oder in der rechten Seitenleiste zur Verfügung steht. Text in Rich-Text-Inhaltssteuerelementen kann wie normaler Dokumententext formatiert werden, Sie können beispielsweise den Zeilenabstand festlegen, Absatzeinzüge ändern oder Tab-Stopps anpassen. Einstellungen für Inhaltssteuerelemente ändern Die Einstellungen für Inhaltssteuerelemente öffnen Sie wie folgt: Wählen Sie das gewünschte Inhaltssteuerelement aus und klicken Sie auf den Pfeil neben dem Symbol Inhaltssteuerelemente in der oberen Symbolleiste und wählen Sie dann die Option Einstellungen Inhaltssteuerelemente aus dem Menü aus. Klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste auf eine beliebige Stelle im Inhaltssteuerelement und nutzen Sie die Option Einstellungen Steuerungselement im Kontextmenü. Im sich nun öffnenden Fenstern können Sie die folgenden Parameter festlegen: Legen Sie in den entsprechenden Feldern Titel oder Tag des Steuerelements fest. Der Titel wird angezeigt, wenn das Steuerelement im Dokument ausgewählt wird. Tags werden verwendet, um Inhaltssteuerelemente zu identifizieren, damit Sie im Code darauf verweisen können. Wählen Sie aus, ob Sie Steuerelemente mit einem Begrenzungsrahmen anzeigen möchten oder nicht. Wählen Sie die Option Keine, um das Steuerelement ohne Begrenzungsrahmen anzuzeigen. Über die Option Begrenzungsrahmen können Sie die Feldfarbe im untenstehenden Feld auswählen. Klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche Auf alle anwenden, um die festgelegten Darstellungseinstellungen auf alle Inhaltssteuerelemente im Dokument anzuwenden. Im Abschnitt Sperren können Sie das Inhaltssteuerelement mit der entsprechenden Option vor ungewolltem Löschen oder Bearbeiten schützen: Inhaltssteuerelement kann nicht gelöscht werden - Aktivieren Sie dieses Kontrollkästchen, um ein Löschen des Steuerelements zu verhindern. Inhaltssteuerelement kann nicht bearbeitet werden - Aktivieren Sie dieses Kontrollkästchen, um ein Bearbeiten des Steuerelements zu verhindern. Klicken Sie im Fenster Einstellungen auf OK, um die Änderungen zu bestätigen. Es ist auch möglich Inhaltssteuerelemente mit einer bestimmten Farbe hervorzuheben. Inhaltssteuerelemente farblich hervorheben: Klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche links neben dem Rahmen des Steuerelements, um das Steuerelement auszuwählen. Klicken Sie auf der oberen Symbolleiste auf den Pfeil neben dem Symbol Inhaltssteuerelemente. Wählen Sie die Option Einstellungen hervorheben aus dem Menü aus. Wählen Sie die gewünschte Farbe aus den verfügbaren Paletten aus: Themenfarben, Standardfarben oder neue benutzerdefinierte Farbe angeben. Um zuvor angewendete Farbmarkierungen zu entfernen, verwenden Sie die Option Keine Markierung. Die ausgewählten Hervorhebungsoptionen werden auf alle Inhaltssteuerelemente im Dokument angewendet. Inhaltssteuerelemente entfernen Um ein Steuerelement zu entfernen ohne den Inhalt zu löschen, klicken Sie auf das entsprechende Steuerelement und gehen Sie vor wie folgt: Klicken Sie auf den Pfeil neben dem Symbol Inhaltssteuerelemente in der oberen Symbolleiste und wählen Sie dann die Option Steuerelement entfernen aus dem Menü aus. Klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste auf das Steuerelement und wählen Sie die Option Steuerungselement entfernen im Kontextmenü aus. Um ein Steuerelement einschließlich Inhalt zu entfernen, wählen Sie das entsprechende Steuerelement aus und drücken Sie die Taste Löschen auf der Tastatur." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertDropCap.htm", @@ -198,27 +208,27 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm", "title": "Bilder einfügen", - "body": "Im Dokumenteneditor können Sie Bilder in den gängigen Formaten in Ihr Dokument einfügen. Die folgenden Formate werden unterstützt: BMP, GIF, JPEG, JPG, PNG. Ein Bild einfügen Ein Bild in das aktuelle Dokument einfügen: Positionieren Sie den Cursor an der Stelle, an der Sie das Bild einfügen möchten. Wechseln Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf die Registerkarte Einfügen. Klicken Sie auf das Symbol Bild in der oberen Symbolleiste. Wählen Sie eine der folgenden Optionen um das Bild hochzuladen: Mit der Option Bild aus Datei öffnen Sie das Standarddialogfenster zur Dateiauswahl. Durchsuchen Sie die Festplatte Ihres Computers nach der gewünschten Bilddatei und klicken Sie auf Öffnen. Mit der Option Bild aus URL öffnen Sie das Fenster zum Eingeben der erforderlichen Webadresse, wenn Sie die Adresse eingegeben haben, klicken Sie auf OK. Wenn Sie das Bild hinzugefügt haben, können Sie Größe, Eigenschaften und Position ändern. Bilder bewegen und die Größe ändern Um die Bildgröße zu ändern, ziehen Sie die kleine Quadrate an den Rändern. Um das Originalseitenverhältnis des gewählten Bildes bei der Größenänderung beizubehalten, halten Sie die UMSCHALT-Taste gedrückt und ziehen Sie an einem der Ecksymbole. Verwenden Sie zum Ändern der Bildposition das Symbol , das angezeigt wird, wenn Sie den Mauszeiger über das Bild bewegen. Ziehen Sie das Bild an die gewünschte Position, ohne die Maustaste loszulassen. Wenn Sie die das Bild verschieben, werden Hilfslinien angezeigt, damit Sie das Objekt präzise auf der Seite positionieren können (wenn Sie einen anderen Umbruchstil als mit Text in Zeile ausgewählt haben). Um das Bild zu drehen, bewegen Sie den Mauszeiger über den Drehpunkt und ziehen Sie das Bild im oder gegen den Uhrzeigersinn. Um ein Objekt in 15-Grad-Stufen zu drehen, halten Sie die UMSCHALT-Taste bei der Drehung gedrückt. Hinweis: Hier finden Sie eine Übersicht über die gängigen Tastenkombinationen für die Arbeit mit Objekten. Bildeinstellungen anpassen Einige der Bildeinstellungen können mithilfe der Registerkarte Bildeinstellungen auf der rechten Seitenleiste geändert werden. Um diese zu aktivieren, klicken Sie auf das Bild und wählen Sie rechts das Symbol Bildeinstellungen aus. Hier können die folgenden Eigenschaften geändert werden: Größe - wird genutzt, um Breite und Höhe des aktuellen Bildes einzusehen. Bei Bedarf können Sie die Standardbildgröße wiederherstellen, indem Sie auf die Schaltfläche Standardgröße klicken. An Seitenränder anpassen - ändern Sie die Bildgröße und passen Sie das Bild an den linken und rechten Seitenrand an. Textumbruch - der Stil für den Textumbruch wird aus den verfügbaren Vorlagen ausgewählt: Mit Text in Zeile, Quadrat, Eng, Transparent, Oben und unten, Vorne, Hinten (für weitere Information lesen Sie die folgende Beschreibung der erweiterten Einstellungen). Bild ersetzen - um das aktuelle Bild durch ein anderes Bild aus Datei oder Onlinebilder zu ersetzen. Einige dieser Optionen finden Sie auch im Rechtsklickmenü. Die Menüoptionen sind: Ausschneiden, Kopieren, Einfügen - Standardoptionen zum Ausschneiden oder Kopieren ausgewählter Textpassagen/Objekte und zum Einfügen von zuvor ausgeschnittenen/kopierten Textstellen oder Objekten an der aktuellen Cursorposition. Anordnen - um das ausgewählte Bild in den Vordergrund bzw. Hintergrund oder eine Ebene nach vorne bzw. hinten zu verschieben sowie Bilder zu gruppieren und die Gruppierung aufzuheben (um diese wie ein einzelnes Objekt behandeln zu können). Weitere Informationen zum Anordnen von Objekten finden Sie auf dieser Seite. Ausrichten wird verwendet, um das Bild linksbündig, zentriert, rechtsbündig, oben, mittig oder unten auszurichten. Weitere Informationen zum Ausrichten von Objekten finden Sie auf dieser Seite. Textumbruch - der Stil für den Textumbruch wird aus den verfügbaren Vorlagen ausgewählt: Mit Text in Zeile, Quadrat, Eng, Transparent, Oben und unten, Vorne, Hinten (für weitere Information lesen Sie die folgende Beschreibung der erweiterten Einstellungen). Die Option Umbruchgrenze bearbeiten ist nur verfügbar, wenn Sie einen anderen Umbruchstil als „Mit Text in Zeile“ auswählen. Ziehen Sie die Umbruchpunkte, um die Grenze benutzerdefiniert anzupassen. Um einen neuen Rahmenpunkt zu erstellen, klicken Sie auf eine beliebige Stelle auf der roten Linie und ziehen Sie diese an die gewünschte Position. Standardgröße - die aktuelle Bildgröße auf die Standardgröße ändern. Bild ersetzen - um das aktuelle Bild durch ein anderes Bild aus Datei oder Onlinebilder zu ersetzen. Erweiterte Einstellungen - das Fenster „Bild - Erweiterte Einstellungen“ öffnen. Ist das Bild ausgewählt, ist rechts auch das Symbol Formeinstellungen verfügbar. Klicken Sie auf dieses Symbol, um die Registerkarte Formeinstellungen in der rechten Seitenleiste zu öffnen und passen Sie Form, Linientyp, Größe und Farbe an oder ändern Sie die Form und wählen Sie im Menü AutoForm ändern eine neue Form aus. Die Form des Bildes ändert sich entsprechend Ihrer Auswahl. Um die erweiterte Einstellungen des Bildes zu ändern, klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste auf das Bild und wählen Sie die Option Bild - Erweiterte Einstellungen im Rechtsklickmenü oder klicken Sie einfach in der rechten Seitenleiste auf Erweiterte Einstellungen anzeigen. Das Fenster mit den Bildeigenschaften wird geöffnet: Die Registerkarte Größe enthält die folgenden Parameter: Breite und Höhe - mit diesen Optionen können Sie die Breite bzw. Höhe des Bildes ändern. Wenn Sie die Funktion Seitenverhältnis sperren aktivieren (in diesem Fall sieht das Symbol so aus ), werden Breite und Höhe gleichmäßig geändert und das ursprüngliche Bildseitenverhältnis wird beibehalten. Um die Standardgröße des hinzugefügten Bildes wiederherzustellen, klicken Sie auf Standardgröße. Die Registerkarte Textumbruch enthält die folgenden Parameter: Textumbruch - legen Sie fest, wie das Bild im Verhältnis zum Text positioniert wird: entweder als Teil des Textes (wenn Sie die Option „Mit Text in Zeile“ auswählen) oder an allen Seiten von Text umgeben (wenn Sie einen anderen Stil auswählen). Mit Text verschieben - das Bild wird Teil des Textes (wie ein Zeichen) und wenn der Text verschoben wird, wird auch das Bild verschoben. In diesem Fall sind die Positionsoptionen nicht verfügbar. Ist eine der folgenden Umbrucharten ausgewählt, kann das Bild unabhängig vom Text verschoben und auf der Seite positioniert werden: Quadrat - der Text bricht um den rechteckigen Kasten herum, der das Bild begrenzt. Eng - der Text bricht um die Bildkanten herum. Transparent - der Text bricht um die Bildkanten herum und füllt den offenen weißen Leerraum innerhalb des Bildes. Wählen Sie für diesen Effekt die Option Umbruchsgrenze bearbeiten aus dem Rechtsklickmenü aus. Oben und unten - der Text ist nur oberhalb und unterhalb des Bildes. Vorne - das Bild überlappt mit dem Text. Hinten - der Text überlappt sich mit dem Bild. Wenn Sie die Formate Quadrat, Eng, Transparent oder Oben und unten auswählen, haben Sie die Möglichkeit zusätzliche Parameter festzulegen - Abstand vom Text auf allen Seiten (oben, unten, links, rechts). Die Registerkarte Position ist nur verfügbar, wenn Sie einen anderen Umbruchstil als „Mit Text in Zeile“ auswählen. Hier können Sie abhängig vom gewählten Format des Textumbruchs die folgenden Parameter festlegen: In der Gruppe Horizontal, können Sie eine der folgenden drei Bildpositionierungstypen auswählen: Ausrichtung (links, zentriert, rechts) gemessen an Zeichen, Spalte, linker Seitenrand, Seitenrand, Seite oder rechter Seitenrand. Absolute Position, gemessen in absoluten Einheiten wie Zentimeter/Punkte/Zoll (abhängig von der Voreinstellung in Datei -> Erweiterte Einstellungen...), rechts von Zeichen, Spalte, linker Seitenrand, Seitenrand, Seite oder rechter Seitenrand. Relative Position in Prozent, gemessen von linker Seitenrand, Seitenrand, Seite oder rechter Seitenrand. In der Gruppe Vertikal, können Sie eine der folgenden drei Bildpositionierungstypen auswählen: Ausrichtung (oben, zentriert, unten) gemessen von Zeile, Seitenrand, unterer Rand, Abschnitt, Seite oder oberer Rand. Absolute Position, gemessen in absoluten Einheiten wie Zentimeter/Punkte/Zoll (abhängig von der Voreinstellung in Datei -> Erweiterte Einstellungen...), unterhalb Zeile, Seitenrand, unterer Seitenrand, Absatz, Seite oder oberer Seitenrand. Relative Position in Prozent, gemessen von Seitenrand, unterer Seitenrand, Seite oder oberer Seitenrand. Im Kontrollkästchen Objekt mit Text verschieben können Sie festlegen, ob sich das Bild zusammen mit dem Text bewegen lässt, mit dem es verankert wurde. Überlappen zulassen legt fest, ob zwei Bilder einander überlagern können oder nicht, wenn Sie diese auf einer Seite dicht aneinander bringen. Die Registerkarte Alternativtext ermöglicht die Eingabe eines Titels und einer Beschreibung, die Personen mit Sehbehinderungen oder kognitiven Beeinträchtigungen vorgelesen werden kann, damit sie besser verstehen können, welche Informationen im Bild enthalten sind." + "body": "Im Dokumenteditor können Sie Bilder in den gängigsten Formaten in Ihr Dokument einfügen. Die folgenden Bildformate werden unterstützt: BMP, GIF, JPEG, JPG, PNG. Fügen Sie ein Bild ein Um ein Bild in den Dokumenttext einzufügen, Plazieren Sie den Zeiger an der Stelle, an der das Bild platziert werden soll. Wechseln Sie zur Registerkarte Einfügen in der oberen Symbolleiste. Klicken Sie auf das Bildsymbol in der oberen Symbolleiste. Wählen Sie eine der folgenden Optionen, um das Bild zu laden: Die Option Bild aus Datei öffnet das Standarddialogfenster für die Dateiauswahl. Durchsuchen Sie das Festplattenlaufwerk Ihres Computers nach der erforderlichen Date und klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche Öffnen. Die Option Bild von URL öffnet das Fenster, in dem Sie die erforderliche Bild-Webadresse eingeben und auf die Schaltfläche OK klicken können. Die Option Bild aus Speicher öffnet das Fenster Datenquelle auswählen. Wählen Sie ein in Ihrem Portal gespeichertes Bild aus und klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche OK. Sobald das Bild hinzugefügt wurde, können Sie seine Größe, Eigenschaften und Position ändern. Es ist auch möglich, dem Bild eine Beschriftung hinzuzufügen. Weitere Informationen zum Arbeiten mit Bildunterschriften finden Sie in diesem Artikel. Verschieben und ändern Sie die Größe von Bildern Um die Bildgröße zu ändern, ziehen Sie kleine Quadrate an den Rändern. Halten Sie die Umschalttaste gedrückt und ziehen Sie eines der Eckensymbole, um die ursprünglichen Proportionen des ausgewählten Bilds während der Größenänderung beizubehalten. Verwenden Sie zum Ändern der Bildposition das Symbol , das angezeigt wird, nachdem Sie den Mauszeiger über das Bild bewegt haben. Ziehen Sie das Bild an die gewünschte Position, ohne die Maustaste loszulassen. Wenn Sie das Bild verschieben, werden Hilfslinien angezeigt, mit denen Sie das Objekt präzise auf der Seite positionieren können (wenn ein anderer Umbruchstil als Inline ausgewählt ist). Um das Bild zu drehen, bewegen Sie den Mauszeiger über den Drehgriff und ziehen Sie ihn im oder gegen den Uhrzeigersinn. Halten Sie die Umschalttaste gedrückt, um den Drehwinkel auf Schritte von 15 Grad zu beschränken. Hinweis: Die Liste der Tastaturkürzel, die beim Arbeiten mit Objekten verwendet werden können, finden Sie hier Passen Sie die Bildeinstellungen an Einige der Bildeinstellungen können über die Registerkarte Bildeinstellungen in der rechten Seitenleiste geändert werden. Um es zu aktivieren, klicken Sie auf das Bild und wählen Sie rechts das Symbol Bildeinstellungen . Hier können Sie folgende Eigenschaften ändern: Größe wird verwendet, um die aktuelle Bildbreite und -höhe anzuzeigen. Bei Bedarf können Sie die tatsächliche Bildgröße wiederherstellen, indem Sie auf die Schaltfläche Tatsächliche Größe klicken. Mit der Schaltfläche An Rand anpassen können Sie die Größe des Bilds so ändern, dass es den gesamten Abstand zwischen dem linken und rechten Seitenrand einnimmt.Mit der Schaltfläche Zuschneiden können Sie das Bild zuschneiden. Klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche Zuschneiden, um die Beschneidungsgriffe zu aktivieren, die an den Bildecken und in der Mitte jeder Seite angezeigt werden. Ziehen Sie die Ziehpunkte manuell, um den Zuschneidebereich festzulegen. Sie können den Mauszeiger über den Rand des Zuschneidebereichs bewegen, sodass er zum Symbol wird, und den Bereich ziehen. Um eine einzelne Seite zuzuschneiden, ziehen Sie den Griff in der Mitte dieser Seite. Ziehen Sie einen der Eckgriffe, um zwei benachbarte Seiten gleichzeitig zuzuschneiden. Um zwei gegenüberliegende Seiten des Bildes gleichermaßen zuzuschneiden, halten Sie die Strg-Taste gedrückt, wenn Sie den Griff in die Mitte einer dieser Seiten ziehen. Um alle Seiten des Bildes gleichmäßig zuzuschneiden, halten Sie die Strg-Taste gedrückt, wenn Sie einen der Eckgriffe ziehen. Wenn der Zuschneidebereich angegeben ist, klicken Sie erneut auf die Schaltfläche Zuschneiden oder drücken Sie die Esc-Taste oder klicken Sie auf eine beliebige Stelle außerhalb des Zuschneidebereichs, um die Änderungen zu übernehmen. Nachdem der Zuschneidebereich ausgewählt wurde, können Sie auch die Optionen Ausfüllen und Anpassen verwenden, die im Dropdown-Menü Zuschneiden verfügbar sind. Klicken Sie erneut auf die Schaltfläche Zuschneiden und wählen Sie die gewünschte Option aus: Wenn Sie die Option Füllen auswählen, bleibt der zentrale Teil des Originalbilds erhalten und wird zum Füllen des ausgewählten Zuschneidebereichs verwendet, während andere Teile des Bildes entfernt werden. Wenn Sie die Option Anpassen auswählen, wird die Größe des Bilds so angepasst, dass es der Höhe oder Breite des Zuschneidebereichs entspricht. Es werden keine Teile des Originalbilds entfernt, es können jedoch leere Bereiche innerhalb des ausgewählten Zuschneidebereichs angezeigt werden. Durch Drehen wird das Bild um 90 Grad im oder gegen den Uhrzeigersinn gedreht sowie das Bild horizontal oder vertikal gespiegelt. Klicken Sie auf eine der Schaltflächen: um das Bild um 90 Grad gegen den Uhrzeigersinn zu drehen um das Bild um 90 Grad im Uhrzeigersinn zu drehen um das Bild horizontal zu drehen (von links nach rechts) um das Bild vertikal zu drehen (verkehrt herum) Der Umbruchstil wird verwendet, um einen Textumbruchstil aus den verfügbaren auszuwählen - Inline, Quadrat, Eng, Durch, Oben und Unten, vorne, hinten (weitere Informationen finden Sie in der Beschreibung der erweiterten Einstellungen unten). Bild ersetzen wird verwendet, um das aktuelle Bild zu ersetzen, das ein anderes aus Datei oder Von URL lädt. Einige dieser Optionen finden Sie auch im Kontextmenü. Die Menüoptionen sind: Ausschneiden, Kopieren, Einfügen - Standardoptionen, mit denen ein ausgewählter Text / ein ausgewähltes Objekt ausgeschnitten oder kopiert und eine zuvor ausgeschnittene / kopierte Textpassage oder ein Objekt an die aktuelle Zeigerposition eingefügt wird. Anordnen wird verwendet, um das ausgewählte Bild in den Vordergrund zu bringen, in den Hintergrund zu senden, vorwärts oder rückwärts zu bewegen sowie Bilder zu gruppieren oder die Gruppierung aufzuheben, um Operationen mit sieben auszuführen von ihnen sofort. Weitere Informationen zum Anordnen von Objekten finden Sie auf dieser Seite. Ausrichten wird verwendet, um das Bild links, in der Mitte, rechts, oben, in der Mitte und unten auszurichten. Weitere Informationen zum Ausrichten von Objekten finden Sie auf dieser Seite. Der Umbruchstil wird verwendet, um einen Textumbruchstil aus den verfügbaren auszuwählen - inline, quadratisch, eng, durch, oben und unten, vorne, hinten - oder um die Umbruchgrenze zu bearbeiten. Die Option Wrap-Grenze bearbeiten ist nur verfügbar, wenn Sie einen anderen Wrap-Stil als Inline auswählen. Ziehen Sie die Umbruchpunkte, um die Grenze anzupassen. Um einen neuen Umbruchpunkt zu erstellen, klicken Sie auf eine beliebige Stelle auf der roten Linie und ziehen Sie sie an die gewünschte Position. Drehen wird verwendet, um das Bild um 90 Grad im oder gegen den Uhrzeigersinn zu drehen sowie um das Bild horizontal oder vertikal zu spiegeln. Zuschneiden wird verwendet, um eine der Zuschneideoptionen anzuwenden: Zuschneiden, Füllen oder Anpassen. Wählen Sie im Untermenü die Option Zuschneiden, ziehen Sie dann die Zuschneidegriffe, um den Zuschneidebereich festzulegen, und klicken Sie im Untermenü erneut auf eine dieser drei Optionen, um die Änderungen zu übernehmen. Die Tatsächliche Größe wird verwendet, um die aktuelle Bildgröße in die tatsächliche zu ändern. Bild ersetzen wird verwendet, um das aktuelle Bild zu ersetzen, das ein anderes aus Datei oder Von URL lädt. Mit den Erweiterte Einstellungen des Bildes wird das Fenster \"Bild - Erweiterte Einstellungen\" geöffnet. Wenn das Bild ausgewählt ist, ist rechts auch das Symbol für die Formeinstellungen verfügbar. Sie können auf dieses Symbol klicken, um die Registerkarte Formeinstellungen in der rechten Seitenleiste zu öffnen und die Form anzupassen. Strichart, -größe und -farbe sowie den Formtyp ändern, indem Sie im Menü Autoshape ändern eine andere Form auswählen. Die Form des Bildes ändert sich entsprechend. Auf der Registerkarte Formeinstellungen können Sie auch die Option Schatten anzeigen verwenden, um dem Bild einen Schatten hinzuzufügen. Passen Sie die erweiterten Bildeinstellungen an Um die erweiterte Einstellungen des Bildes zu ändern, klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste auf das Bild und wählen Sie im Kontextmenü die Option Bild - Erweiterte Einstellungen oder klicken Sie einfach auf den Link Erweiterte Einstellungen anzeigen in der rechten Seitenleiste. Das Fenster mit den Bildeigenschaften wird geöffnet: Die Registerkarte Größe enthält die folgenden Parameter: Breite und Höhe - Verwenden Sie diese Optionen, um die Bildbreite und / oder -höhe zu ändern. Wenn Sie auf die Schaltfläche Konstante Proportionen klicken (in diesem Fall sieht es so aus ), werden Breite und Höhe zusammen geändert, wobei das ursprüngliche Bildseitenverhältnis beibehalten wird. Klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche Tatsächliche Größe, um die tatsächliche Größe des hinzugefügten Bilds wiederherzustellen. Die Registerkarte Rotation enthält die folgenden Parameter: Winkel - Verwenden Sie diese Option, um das Bild um einen genau festgelegten Winkel zu drehen. Geben Sie den erforderlichen Wert in Grad in das Feld ein oder passen Sie ihn mit den Pfeilen rechts an. Spiegeln - Aktivieren Sie das Kontrollkästchen Horizontal, um das Bild horizontal zu spiegeln (von links nach rechts), oder aktivieren Sie das Kontrollkästchen Vertikal, um das Bild vertikal zu spiegeln (verkehrt herum). Die Registerkarte Textumbruch enthält die folgenden Parameter: Umbruchstil - Verwenden Sie diese Option, um die Position des Bilds relativ zum Text zu ändern: Es ist entweder Teil des Textes (falls Sie den Inline-Stil auswählen) oder wird von allen Seiten umgangen (wenn Sie einen auswählen) die anderen Stile). Inline - Das Bild wird wie ein Zeichen als Teil des Textes betrachtet. Wenn sich der Text bewegt, bewegt sich auch das Bild. In diesem Fall sind die Positionierungsoptionen nicht zugänglich. Wenn einer der folgenden Stile ausgewählt ist, kann das Bild unabhängig vom Text verschoben und genau auf der Seite positioniert werden: Quadratisch - Der Text umschließt das rechteckige Feld, das das Bild begrenzt. Eng - Der Text umschließt die eigentlichen Bildkanten. Durch - Der Text wird um die Bildränder gewickelt und füllt den offenen weißen Bereich innerhalb des Bildes aus. Verwenden Sie die Option Umbruchgrenze bearbeiten im Kontextmenü, damit der Effekt angezeigt wird. Oben und unten - der Text befindet sich nur über und unter dem Bild. Vorne - das Bild überlappt den Text. Dahinter - der Text überlappt das Bild. Wenn Sie den quadratischen, engen, durchgehenden oder oberen und unteren Stil auswählen, können Sie einige zusätzliche Parameter festlegen - Abstand zum Text an allen Seiten (oben, unten, links, rechts). Die Registerkarte Position ist nur verfügbar, wenn Sie einen anderen Umbruchstil als Inline auswählen. Diese Registerkarte enthält die folgenden Parameter, die je nach ausgewähltem Verpackungsstil variieren: Im horizontalen Bereich können Sie einen der folgenden drei Bildpositionierungstypen auswählen: Ausrichtung (links, Mitte, rechts) relativ zu Zeichen, Spalte, linkem Rand, Rand, Seite oder rechtem Rand, Absolute Position gemessen in absoluten Einheiten, d. H. Zentimeter / Punkte / Zoll (abhängig von der auf der Registerkarte Datei -> Erweiterte Einstellungen... angegebenen Option), rechts neben Zeichen, Spalte, linkem Rand, Rand, Seite oder rechtem Rand, Relative Position gemessen in Prozent relativ zum linken Rand, Rand, Seite oder rechten Rand. Im vertikalen Bereich können Sie einen der folgenden drei Bildpositionierungstypen auswählen: Ausrichtung (oben, Mitte, unten) relativ zu Linie, Rand, unterem Rand, Absatz, Seite oder oberem Rand, Absolute Position gemessen in absoluten Einheiten, d. H. Zentimeter / Punkte / Zoll (abhängig von der auf der Registerkarte Datei -> Erweiterte Einstellungen... angegebenen Option) unter Zeile, Rand, unterem Rand, Absatz, Seite oder oberem Rand, Relative Position gemessen in Prozent relativ zum Rand, unteren Rand, Seite oder oberen Rand. Objekt mit Text verschieben steuert, ob sich das Bild bewegt, während sich der Text, an dem es verankert ist, bewegt. Überlappungssteuerung zulassen steuert, ob sich zwei Bilder überlappen oder nicht, wenn Sie sie auf der Seite nebeneinander ziehen. Auf der Registerkarte Alternativer Text können Sie einen Titel und eine Beschreibung angeben, die Personen mit Seh- oder kognitiven Beeinträchtigungen vorgelesen werden, damit sie besser verstehen, welche Informationen im Bild enthalten sind." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertPageNumbers.htm", "title": "Seitenzahlen einfügen", - "body": "Seitenzahlen in ein Dokument einfügen: Wechseln Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf die Registerkarte Einfügen. Klicken Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf das Symbol Kopf- und Fußzeile bearbeiten . Klicken Sie auf Seitenzahl einfügen. Wählen Sie eine der folgenden Optionen: Wählen Sie die Position der Seitenzahl aus, um zu jeder Dokumentseite eine Seitenzahl hinzuzufügen. Um an der aktuellen Cursorposition eine Seitenzahl einzufügen, wählen Sie die Option An aktueller Position. Anzahl der Seiten einfügen (z.B. wenn Sie den Eintrag Seite X von Y erstellen möchten): Platzieren Sie den Cursor an die Position an der Sie die Anzahl der Seiten einfügen wollen. Klicken Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf das Symbol Kopf- und Fußzeile bearbeiten . Wählen Sie die Option Anzahl der Seiten einfügen. Einstellungen der Seitenzahlen ändern: Klicken Sie zweimal auf die hinzugefügte Seitenzahl. Ändern Sie die aktuellen Parameter in der rechten Seitenleiste: Legen Sie die aktuelle Position der Seitenzahlen auf der Seite sowie im Verhältnis zum oberen und unteren Teil der Seite fest. Wenn Sie der ersten Seite eine andere Zahl zuweisen wollen oder als dem restlichen Dokument oder keine Seitenzahl auf der ersten Seite einfügen wollen, aktivieren Sie die Option Erste Seite anders. Wenn Sie geraden und ungeraden Seiten unterschiedliche Seitenzahlen hinzufügen wollen, aktivieren Sie die Option Gerade & ungerade Seiten unterschiedlich. Die Option Mit vorheriger verknüpfen ist verfügbar, wenn Sie zuvor Abschnitte in Ihr Dokument eingefügt haben. Sind keine Abschnitte vorhanden, ist die Option ausgeblendet. Außerdem ist diese Option auch für den allerersten Abschnitt nicht verfügbar (oder wenn eine Kopf- oder Fußzeile ausgewählt ist, die zu dem ersten Abschnitt gehört). Standardmäßig ist dieses Kontrollkästchen aktiviert, sodass auf alle Abschnitte die vereinheitlichte Nummerierung angewendet wird. Wenn Sie einen Kopf- oder Fußzeilenbereich auswählen, sehen Sie, dass der Bereich mit der Verlinkung Wie vorherige markiert ist. Deaktivieren Sie das Kontrollkästchen Wie vorherige, um in jedem Abschnitt des Dokuments eine andere Seitennummerierung anzuwenden. Die Markierung Wie vorherige wird nicht mehr angezeigt. Um zur Dokumentbearbeitung zurückzukehren, führen Sie einen Doppelklick im Arbeitsbereich aus." + "body": "Um Seitenzahlen in ein Dokument einfügen: Wechseln Sie zu der oberen Symbolleiste auf die Registerkarte Einfügen. Klicken Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf das Symbol Kopf- und Fußzeile bearbeiten . Klicken Sie auf Seitenzahl einfügen. Wählen Sie eine der folgenden Optionen: Wählen Sie die Position der Seitenzahl aus, um zu jeder Dokumentseite eine Seitenzahl hinzuzufügen. Um an der aktuellen Zeigerposition eine Seitenzahl einzufügen, wählen Sie die Option An aktueller Position. Hinweis: Um in der aktuellen Seite an der derzeitigen Position eine Seitennummer einzufügen, kann die Tastenkombination STRG+UMSCHALT+P benutzt werden. Um die Anzahl der Seiten einfügen (z.B. wenn Sie den Eintrag Seite X von Y erstellen möchten): Platzieren Sie den Zeiger an die Position an der Sie die Anzahl der Seiten einfügen wollen. Klicken Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf das Symbol Kopf- und Fußzeile bearbeiten . Wählen Sie die Option Anzahl der Seiten einfügen. Einstellungen der Seitenzahlen ändern: Klicken Sie zweimal auf die hinzugefügte Seitenzahl. Ändern Sie die aktuellen Parameter in der rechten Seitenleiste: Legen Sie die aktuelle Position der Seitenzahlen auf der Seite sowie im Verhältnis zum oberen und unteren Teil der Seite fest. Wenn Sie der ersten Seite eine andere Zahl zuweisen wollen oder als dem restlichen Dokument oder keine Seitenzahl auf der ersten Seite einfügen wollen, aktivieren Sie die Option Erste Seite anders. Wenn Sie geraden und ungeraden Seiten unterschiedliche Seitenzahlen hinzufügen wollen, aktivieren Sie die Option Gerade & ungerade Seiten unterschiedlich. Die Option Mit vorheriger verknüpfen ist verfügbar, wenn Sie zuvor Abschnitte in Ihr Dokument eingefügt haben. Sind keine Abschnitte vorhanden, ist die Option ausgeblendet. Außerdem ist diese Option auch für den allerersten Abschnitt nicht verfügbar (oder wenn eine Kopf- oder Fußzeile ausgewählt ist, die zu dem ersten Abschnitt gehört). Standardmäßig ist dieses Kontrollkästchen aktiviert, sodass auf alle Abschnitte die vereinheitlichte Nummerierung angewendet wird. Wenn Sie einen Kopf- oder Fußzeilenbereich auswählen, sehen Sie, dass der Bereich mit der Verlinkung Wie vorherige markiert ist. Deaktivieren Sie das Kontrollkästchen Wie vorherige, um in jedem Abschnitt des Dokuments eine andere Seitennummerierung anzuwenden. Die Markierung Wie vorherige wird nicht mehr angezeigt. Um zur Dokumentbearbeitung zurückzukehren, führen Sie einen Doppelklick im Arbeitsbereich aus." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertTables.htm", "title": "Tabellen einfügen", - "body": "Eine Tabelle einfügen Einfügen einer Tabelle im aktuellen Dokument: Positionieren Sie den Cursor an der Stelle, an der Sie eine Tabelle einfügen möchten. Wechseln Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf die Registerkarte Einfügen. Klicken Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf das Symbol Tabelle. Wählen Sie die gewünschte Option für die Erstellung einer Tabelle: Tabelle mit einer vordefinierten Zellenanzahl (maximal 10 x 8 Zellen) Wenn Sie schnell eine Tabelle erstellen möchten, wählen Sie einfach die Anzahl der Zeilen (maximal 8) und Spalten (maximal 10) aus. Benutzerdefinierte Tabelle Wenn Sie eine Tabelle mit mehr als 10 x 8 Zellen benötigen, wählen Sie die Option Benutzerdefinierte Tabelle einfügen. Geben Sie nun im geöffneten Fenster die gewünschte Anzahl der Zeilen und Spalten an und klicken Sie anschließend auf OK. Wenn Sie eine Tabelle eingefügt haben, können Sie Eigenschaften, Größe und Position verändern. Um die Größe einer Tabelle zu ändern, bewegen Sie den Mauszeiger über das Symbol in der unteren rechten Ecke und ziehen Sie an der Fläche, bis die Tabelle die gewünschte Größe aufweist. Sie können die Breite einer bestimmten Spalte oder die Höhe einer Zeile auch manuell ändern. Bewegen Sie den Mauszeiger über den rechten Rand der Spalte, so dass der Cursor in den bidirektionalen Pfeil wechselt und ziehen Sie den Rand nach links oder rechts, um die gewünschte Breite festzulegen. Um die Höhe einer einzelnen Zeile manuell zu ändern, bewegen Sie den Mauszeiger über den unteren Rand der Zeile, so dass der Cursor in den bidirektionalen Pfeil wechselt und ziehen Sie den Rand nach oben oder nach unten. Um eine Tabelle zu verschieben, halten Sie mit dem Cursor das Symbol fest und ziehen Sie die Tabelle an die gewünschte Stelle im Dokument. Eine Tabelle oder Tabelleninhalte auswählen Um eine ganze Tabelle auszuwählen, klicken Sie auf das Handle in der oberen linken Ecke. Um eine bestimmte Zelle auszuwählen, bewegen Sie den Mauszeiger zur linken Seite der gewünschten Zelle, so dass der Cursor zum schwarzen Pfeil wird und klicken Sie dann mit der linken Maustaste. Um eine bestimmte Zeile auszuwählen, bewegen Sie den Mauszeiger zum linken Rand der gewünschten Zeile, so dass der Cursor zum horizontalen schwarzen Pfeil wird und klicken Sie dann mit der linken Maustaste. Um eine bestimmte Spalte auszuwählen, bewegen Sie den Mauszeiger zum oberen Rand der gewünschten Spalte, so dass der Cursor zum nach unten gerichteten schwarzen Pfeil wird und klicken Sie dann mit der linken Maustaste. Es ist auch möglich, eine Zelle, Zeile, Spalte oder Tabelle mithilfe von Optionen aus dem Kontextmenü oder aus dem Abschnit Zeilen und Spalten in der rechten Seitenleiste auszuwählen. Tabelleneinstellungen anpassen Einige der Tabelleneigenschaften sowie die Struktur können mithilfe des Rechtsklickmenüs verändert werden. Die Menüoptionen sind: Ausschneiden, Kopieren, Einfügen - Standardoptionen zum Ausschneiden oder Kopieren ausgewählter Textpassagen/Objekte und zum Einfügen von zuvor ausgeschnittenen/kopierten Textstellen oder Objekten an der aktuellen Cursorposition. Auswählen - um eine Zeile, Spalte, Zelle oder Tabelle auszuwählen. Einfügen - um eine Zeile oberhalb oder unterhalb bzw. eine Spalte rechts oder links von der Zeile einzufügen, in der sich der Cursor aktuell befindet. Löschen - um eine Zeile, Spalte oder Tabelle zu löschen. Zellen verbinden - auswählen von zwei oder mehr Zellen, die in einer Zelle zusammengeführt werden sollen. Zelle teilen... - in einem neuen Fenster können Sie die gewünschte Anzahl der Spalten und Zeilen auswählen, in die die Zelle geteilt wird. Zeilen verteilen - die ausgewählten Zellen werden so angepasst, dass sie dieselbe Höhe haben, ohne dass die Gesamthöhe der Tabelle geändert wird. Spalten verteilen - die ausgewählten Zellen werden so angepasst, dass sie dieselbe Breite haben, ohne dass die Gesamtbreite der Tabelle geändert wird. Vertikale Ausrichtung in Zellen - den Text in der gewählten Zelle am oberen, unteren Rand oder zentriert ausrichten. Textrichtung - Textrichtung in einer Zelle festlegen Sie können den Text horizontal platzieren und vertikal von oben nach unten ausrichten (Text um 90° drehen) oder vertikal von unten nach oben ausrichten (Text um 270° drehen). Tabelle - Erweiterte Einstellungen - öffnen Sie das Fenster „Tabelle - Erweiterte Einstellungen“. Hyperlink - einen Hyperlink einfügen. Erweiterte Absatzeinstellungen - das Fenster „Erweiterte Absatzeinstellungen“ wird geöffnet. Sie können die Tabelleneigenschaften auch in der rechten Seitenleiste ändern: Zeilen und Spalten - wählen Sie die Tabellenabschnitte aus, die Sie hervorheben möchten. Für Zeilen: Kopfzeile - um die erste Zeile hervorzuheben Letzte - um die letzte Zeile hervorzuheben Zusammengebunden - um jede zweite Zeile hervorzuheben Für Spalten: Erste - um die erste Spalte hervorzuheben Letzte - um die letzte Spalte hervorzuheben Zusammengebunden - um jede zweite Spalte hervorzuheben Aus Vorlage auswählen - wählen Sie eine verfügbare Tabellenvorlage aus. Rahmenstil - Linienstärke, -farbe, Rahmenstil und Hintergrundfarbe bestimmen. Zeilen & Spalten - auswählen, löschen und einfügen von Zeilen und Spalten, Zellen verbinden und teilen. Zellengröße - anpassen von Breite und Höhe der aktuell ausgewählten Zelle. In diesem Abschnitt können Sie auch Zeilen verteilen auswählen, so dass alle ausgewählten Zellen die gleiche Höhe haben oder \"Spalten verteilen, so dass alle ausgewählten Zellen die gleiche Breite haben. Gleiche Kopfzeile auf jeder Seite wiederholen - in langen Tabellen wird am Anfang jeder neuen Seite die gleiche Kopfzeile eingefügt. Erweiterte Einstellungen anzeigen - öffnet das Fenster „Tabelle - Erweiterte Einstellungen“ Um die erweiterten Tabelleneinstellungen zu ändern, klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste auf die Tabelle und wählen Sie die Option Tabelle - Erweiterte Einstellungen im Rechtsklickmenü aus oder klicken Sie in der rechten Seitenleiste auf die Verknüpfung Erweiterte Einstellungen anzeigen. Das Fenster mit den Tabelleneigenschaften wird geöffnet: In der Registerkarte Tabelle können die Tabelleneigenschaften der gesamten Tabelle geändert werden. Die Registerkarte Größe enthält die folgenden Parameter: Breite - Standardmäßig wird die Tabellenbreite automatisch an die Seitenbreite angepasst (die Tabelle belegt den gesamten Abstand zwischen dem linken und rechten Seitenrand). Sie können das Kontrollkästchen aktivieren und die gewünschte Tabellenbreite manuell eingeben. Gemessen in - legen Sie fest, ob Sie die Tabellenbreite in absoluten Einheiten angeben wollen, wie Zentimeter/Punkte/Zoll (abhängig von der Voreinstellung in der Registerkarte Datei -> Erweiterte Einstellungen...) oder als Prozentsatz der gesamten Tabellenbreite.Hinweis: Sie können die Tabellengröße auch manuell anpassen, indem Sie Zeilenhöhe und Spaltenbreite ändern. Bewegen Sie den Mauszeiger über einen Zeilen-/Spaltenrand, bis dieser zum bidirektionalen Pfeil wird und ziehen Sie den Rahmen in die gewünschte Position. Sie können auch die Markierungen auf dem horizontalen Lineal verwenden, um die Spaltenbreite zu ändern bzw. die Markierungen auf dem vertikalen Lineal, um die Zeilenhöhe zu ändern. Automatische Anpassung der Größe an den Inhalt - die automatische Änderung jeder Spaltenbreite gemäß dem jeweiligen Text innerhalb der Zellen wird aktiviert. Im Abschnitt Standardzellenbegrenzungen können Sie den Abstand zwischen dem Text innerhalb der Zellen und den standardmäßig verwendeten Zellenbegrenzungen angeben. Im Abschnitt Optionen können Sie die folgenden Parameter ändern: Abstand zwischen Zellen - der Zellenabstand, der mit der Hintergrundfarbe der Tabelle gefüllt wird. In der Gruppe Zelle können Sie die Eigenschaften von einzelnen Zellen ändern. Wählen Sie zunächst die Zelle aus, die Sie ändern wollen oder markieren Sie die gesamte Tabelle, um die Eigenschaften aller Zellen zu ändern. Die Registerkarte Zellengröße enthält die folgenden Parameter: Bevorzugte Breite - legen Sie Ihre gewünschte Zellenbreite fest. Alle Zellen werden nach diesem Wert ausgerichtet, allerdings kann es in Einzelfällen vorkommen, dass es nicht möglich ist eine bestimmte Zelle auf genau diesen Wert anzupassen. Wenn der Text innerhalb einer Zelle beispielsweise die angegebene Breite überschreitet, wird er in die nächste Zeile aufgeteilt, sodass die bevorzugte Zellenbreite unverändert bleibt. Fügen Sie jedoch eine neue Spalte ein, wird die bevorzugte Breite reduziert. Gemessen in - legen Sie fest, ob Sie die Zellenbreite in absoluten Einheiten angeben wollen, wie Zentimeter/Punkte/Zoll (abhängig von der Voreinstellung in der Registerkarte Datei -> Erweiterte Einstellungen...) oder als Prozentsatz der gesamten Tabellenbreite.Hinweis: Sie können die Zellengröße auch manuell anpassen. Wenn Sie eine einzelne Zelle in einer Spalte kleiner oder größer als die Spaltenbreite machen wollen, bewegen Sie den Mauszeiger über den rechten Rand der gewünschten Zelle, bis dieser zum bidirektionalen Pfeil wird und ziehen Sie den Rahmen in die gewünschte Position. Verwenden Sie die Markierungen auf dem horizontalen Lineal, um die Spaltenbreite zu ändern. Im Abschnitt Zellenbegrenzungen können Sie den Abstand zwischen dem Text in den Zellen und der Zellenbegrenzung anpassen. Wenn Sie keine Auswahl treffen, werden Standardwerte verwendet (diese können in der Registerkarte Tabelle geändert werden), Sie können jedoch das Kontrollkästchen Standardbegrenzungen deaktivieren und die gewünschten Werte manuell eingeben. Im Abschnitt Zelloptionen können Sie die folgenden Parameter ändern: Die Option Zeilenumbruch ist standardmäßig aktiviert. Wenn der Text innerhalb einer Zeile länger ist als die vorhandene Zellenbreite, erfolgt ein automatischer Umbruch, so wird die Zelle zwar Höher aber die Spaltenbreite bleibt gleich. Die Registerkarte Rahmen & Hintergrund enthält die folgenden Parameter: Rahmeneinstellungen (Größe, Farbe und An- oder Abwesenheit) - legen Sie Linienstärke, Farbe und Ansichtstyp fest.Hinweis: Wenn Sie den Tabellenrahmen unsichtbar machen, indem Sie auf die Schaltfläche klicken oder alle Rahmenlinien in der Tabelle manuell deaktivieren, werden diese im Dokument mit einer gepunkteten Linie angedeutet. Um die Rahmenlinien vollständig auszublenden, klicken Sie auf das Symbol Formatierungszeichen in der Registerkarte Start und wählen Sie die Option Tabellenrahmen ausblenden. Zellenhintergrund - dem Zellenhintergrund eine Farbe zuweisen (nur verfügbar, wenn eine oder mehrere Zellen gewählt sind oder die Option Abstand zwischen Zellen zulassen auf der Registerkarte Breite & Abstand aktiviert ist). Tabellenhintergrund - der Tabelle wird eine Hintergrundfarbe zugewiesen bzw. die Abstände zwischen den Zellen werden farblich markiert, wenn die Option Abstand zwischen Zellen zulassen auf der Registerkarte Breite & Abstand aktiviert ist. Die Registerkarte Position ist nur verfügbar, wenn die Option Umgebend auf der Registerkarte Textumbruch ausgewählt ist, und enthält die folgenden Parameter: Die Parameter Horizontal beinhalten die Ausrichtung der Tabelle (linksbündig, zentriert, rechtsbündig) im Verhältnis zu Rand, Seite oder Text sowie die Tabellenposition rechts von Rand, Seite oder Text. Die Parameter Vertikal beinhalten die Ausrichtung der Tabelle (oben, zentriert, unten) im Verhältnis zu Rand, Seite oder Text sowie die Tabellenposition unterhalb des Randes, der Seite oder des Textes. Über die Registerkarte Rahmen können die folgenden Parameter festgelegt werden: Im Kontrollkästchen Objekt mit Text verschieben können Sie festlegen, ob sich die Tabelle zusammen mit dem Text bewegen lässt, mit dem sie verankert wurde. Überlappung zulassen bestimmt, ob zwei Tabellen in einer großen Tabelle verbunden werden oder überlappen, wenn Sie diese auf einer Seite dicht aneinander bringen. Die Registerkarte Textumbruch enthält die folgenden Parameter: Umbruchstil - Mit Text verschieben oder Umgebend. Legen Sie fest, wie die Tabelle im Verhältnis zum Text positioniert wird: entweder als Teil des Textes (wenn Sie die Option „Mit Text in Zeile“ auswählen) oder an allen Seiten von Text umgeben (im Format „Umgebend“). Wenn Sie den Umbruchstil ausgewählt haben, können die zusätzlichen Umbruchparameter für beide Umbruchformate festlegen. Für den Stil „Mit Text in Zeile“ können Sie die Ausrichtung und den linken Einzug der Tabelle festlegen. Im Format „umgebend“ können Sie in der Gruppe Tabellenposition den Abstand zum Text sowie die Position der Tabelle festlegen. Die Registerkarte Alternativtext ermöglicht die Eingabe eines Titels und einer Beschreibung, die Personen mit Sehbehinderungen oder kognitiven Beeinträchtigungen vorgelesen werden kann, damit sie besser verstehen können, welche Informationen in der Tabelle enthalten sind." + "body": "Fügen Sie eine Tabelle ein So fügen Sie eine Tabelle in den Dokumenttext ein: Plazieren Sie den Zeiger an der Stelle, an der die Tabelle plaziert werden soll. Wechseln Sie zur Registerkarte Einfügen in der oberen Symbolleiste. Klicken Sie auf das Tabellensymbol in der oberen Symbolleiste. Wählen Sie die Option zum Erstellen einer Tabelle aus: entweder eine Tabelle mit einer vordefinierten Anzahl von Zellen (maximal 10 mal 8 Zellen) Wenn Sie schnell eine Tabelle hinzufügen möchten, wählen Sie einfach die Anzahl der Zeilen (maximal 8) und Spalten (maximal 10). oder eine benutzerdefinierte Tabelle Wenn Sie mehr als 10 x 8 Zellen benötigen, wählen Sie die Option Benutzerdefinierte Tabelle einfügen, um das Fenster zu öffnen, in dem Sie die erforderliche Anzahl von Zeilen bzw. Spalten eingeben können, und klicken Sie dann auf die Schaltfläche OK. Wenn Sie eine Tabelle mit der Maus zeichnen möchten, wählen Sie die Option Tabelle zeichnen. Dies kann nützlich sein, wenn Sie eine Tabelle mit Zeilen und Spalten unterschiedlicher Größe erstellen möchten. Der Mauszeiger verwandelt sich in einen Bleistift . Zeichnen Sie eine rechteckige Form, in der Sie eine Tabelle hinzufügen möchten, und fügen Sie dann Zeilen hinzu, indem Sie horizontale Linien und Spalten zeichnen, indem Sie vertikale Linien innerhalb der Tabellengrenze zeichnen. Sobald die Tabelle hinzugefügt wurde, können Sie ihre Eigenschaften, Größe und Position ändern. Um die Größe einer Tabelle zu ändern, bewegen Sie den Mauszeiger über den Griff in der unteren rechten Ecke und ziehen Sie ihn, bis die Tabelle die erforderliche Größe erreicht hat. Sie können die Breite einer bestimmten Spalte oder die Höhe einer Zeile auch manuell ändern. Bewegen Sie den Mauszeiger über den rechten Rand der Spalte, sodass sich der Zeiger in einen bidirektionalen Pfeil verwandelt, und ziehen Sie den Rand nach links oder rechts, um die erforderliche Breite festzulegen. Um die Höhe einer einzelnen Zeile manuell zu ändern, bewegen Sie den Mauszeiger über den unteren Rand der Zeile, sodass sich der Zeiger in den bidirektionalen Pfeil verwandelt, und ziehen Sie den Rand nach oben oder nach unten. Um eine Tabelle zu verschieben, halten Sie den Griff in der oberen linken Ecke gedrückt und ziehen Sie ihn an die gewünschte Stelle im Dokument. Es ist auch möglich, der Tabelle eine Beschriftung hinzuzufügen. Weitere Informationen zum Arbeiten mit Beschriftungen für Tabellen finden Sie in diesem Artikel. Wählen Sie eine Tabelle oder deren Teil aus Um eine gesamtee Tabelle auszuwählen, klicken Sie auf den Griff in der oberen linken Ecke. Um eine bestimmte Zelle auszuwählen, bewegen Sie den Mauszeiger auf die linke Seite der gewünschten Zelle, sodass sich der Zeiger in den schwarzen Pfeil verwandelt, und klicken Sie dann mit der linken Maustaste. Um eine bestimmte Zeile auszuwählen, bewegen Sie den Mauszeiger an den linken Rand der Tabelle neben der erforderlichen Zeile, sodass sich der Zeiger in den horizontalen schwarzen Pfeil verwandelt, und klicken Sie dann mit der linken Maustaste. Um eine bestimmte Spalte auszuwählen, bewegen Sie den Mauszeiger an den oberen Rand der erforderlichen Spalte, sodass sich der Zeiger in den schwarzen Pfeil nach unten verwandelt, und klicken Sie dann mit der linken Maustaste. Es ist auch möglich, eine Zelle, Zeile, Spalte oder Tabelle mithilfe von Optionen aus dem Kontextmenü oder aus dem Abschnitt Zeilen und Spalten in der rechten Seitenleiste auszuwählen. Hinweis: Um sich in einer Tabelle zu bewegen, können Sie Tastaturkürzel verwenden. Passen Sie die Tabelleneinstellungen an Einige der Tabelleneigenschaften sowie deren Struktur können über das Kontextmenü geändert werden. Die Menüoptionen sind: Ausschneiden, Kopieren, Einfügen - Standardoptionen, mit denen ein ausgewählter Text / ein ausgewähltes Objekt ausgeschnitten oder kopiert und eine zuvor ausgeschnittene / kopierte Textpassage oder ein Objekt an die aktuelle Cursorposition eingefügt wird. Mit Auswahl können Sie eine Zeile, Spalte, Zelle oder Tabelle auswählen. Einfügen wird verwendet, um eine Zeile über oder unter der Zeile einzufügen, in der sich der Cursor befindet, sowie um eine Spalte links oder rechts von der Spalte einzufügen, in der sich der Cursor befindet. Es ist auch möglich, mehrere Zeilen oder Spalten einzufügen. Wenn Sie die Option Mehrere Zeilen / Spalten auswählen, wird das Fenster Mehrere Zeilen einfügen geöffnet. Wählen Sie die Option Zeilen oder Spalten aus der Liste aus, geben Sie die Anzahl der Zeilen / Spalten an, die Sie hinzufügen möchten, wählen Sie aus, wo sie hinzugefügt werden sollen: Über dem Cursor oder Unter dem Cursor und klicken Sie auf OK. Löschen wird verwendet, um eine Zeile, Spalte, Tabelle oder Zellen zu löschen. Wenn Sie die Option Zellen auswählen, wird das Fenster Zellen löschen geöffnet, in dem Sie auswählen können, ob Sie Zellen nach links verschieben, die gesamte Zeile löschen oder die gesamte Spalte löschen möchten. Zellen zusammenführen ist verfügbar, wenn zwei oder mehr Zellen ausgewählt sind, und wird zum Zusammenführen verwendet. Es ist auch möglich, Zellen zusammenzuführen, indem mit dem Radiergummi eine Grenze zwischen ihnen gelöscht wird. Klicken Sie dazu in der oberen Symbolleiste auf das Tabellensymbol und wählen Sie die Option Tabelle löschen. Der Mauszeiger wird zum Radiergummi . Bewegen Sie den Mauszeiger über den Rand zwischen den Zellen, die Sie zusammenführen und löschen möchten. Zelle teilen... wird verwendet, um ein Fenster zu öffnen, in dem Sie die erforderliche Anzahl von Spalten und Zeilen auswählen können, in die die Zelle aufgeteilt werden soll. Sie können eine Zelle auch teilen, indem Sie mit dem Bleistiftwerkzeug Zeilen oder Spalten zeichnen. Klicken Sie dazu in der oberen Symbolleiste auf das Tabellensymbol und wählen Sie die Option Tabelle zeichnen. Der Mauszeiger verwandelt sich in einen Bleistift . Zeichnen Sie eine horizontale Linie, um eine Zeile zu erstellen, oder eine vertikale Linie, um eine Spalte zu erstellen. Mit Zeilen verteilen werden die ausgewählten Zellen so angepasst, dass sie dieselbe Höhe haben, ohne die Gesamthöhe der Tabelle zu ändern.. Mit Spalten verteilen werden die ausgewählten Zellen so angepasst, dass sie dieselbe Breite haben, ohne die Gesamtbreite der Tabelle zu ändern. Die vertikale Ausrichtung der Zelle wird verwendet, um den Text oben, in der Mitte oder unten auszurichten in der ausgewählten Zelle. Textrichtung - wird verwendet, um die Textausrichtung in einer Zelle zu ändern. Sie können den Text horizontal, vertikal von oben nach unten (Text nach unten drehen) oder vertikal von unten nach oben (Text nach oben drehen) platzieren. Mit Tabelle - Erweiterte Einstellungen wird das Fenster Tabelle - Erweiterte Einstellungen\" geöffnet. Hyperlink wird verwendet, um einen Hyperlink einzufügen. Mit den erweiterten Absatzeinstellungen wird das Fenster \"Absatz - Erweiterte Einstellungen\" geöffnet. Sie können auch die Tabelleneigenschaften in der rechten Seitenleiste ändern: Zeilen und Spalten werden verwendet, um die Tabellenteile auszuwählen, die hervorgehoben werden sollen. Für Zeilen: Kopfzeile - um die erste Zeile hervorzuheben Insgesamt - um die letzte Zeile hervorzuheben Gestreift - um jede zweite Zeile hervorzuheben Für Spalten: Erste - um die erste Spalte hervorzuheben Letzte - um die letzte Spalte hervorzuheben Gestreift - um jede andere Spalte hervorzuheben Aus Vorlage auswählen wird verwendet, um eine Tabellenvorlage aus den verfügbaren auszuwählen. Rahmenstil wird verwendet, um die Rahmengröße, Farbe, den Stil sowie die Hintergrundfarbe auszuwählen. Zeilen & Spalten werden verwendet, um einige Operationen mit der Tabelle auszuführen: Auswählen, Löschen, Einfügen von Zeilen und Spalten, Zusammenführen von Zellen, Teilen einer Zelle. Zeilen- und Spaltengröße wird verwendet, um die Breite und Höhe der aktuell ausgewählten Zelle anzupassen. In diesem Abschnitt können Sie auch Zeilen so verteilen, dass alle ausgewählten Zellen die gleiche Höhe haben, oder Spalten so verteilen, dass alle ausgewählten Zellen die gleiche Breite haben. Formel hinzufügen wird verwendet, um eine Formel in die ausgewählte Tabellenzelle einzufügen. Gleiche Kopfzeile auf jeder Seite wiederholen wird verwendet, um dieselbe Kopfzeile oben auf jeder Seite in lange Tabellen einzufügen. Erweiterte Einstellungen anzeigen wird verwendet, um das Fenster \"Tabelle - Erweiterte Einstellungen\" zu öffnen. Passen Sie die erweiterten Tabelleneinstellungen an Um die Eigenschaften der erweiterten Tabelle zu ändern, klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste auf die Tabelle und wählen Sie im Kontextmenü die Option Erweiterte Tabelleneinstellungen aus, oder verwenden Sie den Link Erweiterte Einstellungen anzeigen in der rechten Seitenleiste. Das Fenster mit den Tabelleneigenschaften wird geöffnet: Auf der Registerkarte Tabelle können Sie die Eigenschaften der gesamten Tabelle ändern. Der Abschnitt Tabellengröße enthält die folgenden Parameter: Breite - Standardmäßig wird die Tabellenbreite automatisch an die Seitenbreite angepasst, d. H. Die Tabelle nimmt den gesamten Raum zwischen dem linken und rechten Seitenrand ein. Sie können dieses Kontrollkästchen aktivieren und die erforderliche Tabellenbreite manuell angeben. Messen in - Ermöglicht die Angabe, ob Sie die Tabellenbreite in absoluten Einheiten festlegen möchten, d. H. Zentimeter / Punkte / Zoll (abhängig von der auf der Registerkarte Datei -> Erweiterte Einstellungen...angegebenen Option) oder in Prozent der Gesamtseitenbreite.Hinweis: Sie können die Tabellengröße auch manuell anpassen, indem Sie die Zeilenhöhe und Spaltenbreite ändern. Bewegen Sie den Mauszeiger über einen Zeilen- / Spaltenrand, bis er sich in einen bidirektionalen Pfeil verwandelt, und ziehen Sie den Rand. Sie können auch die Markierungen auf dem horizontalen Lineal verwenden, um die Spaltenbreite zu ändern, und die Markierungen auf dem vertikalen Lineal, um die Zeilenhöhe zu ändern. Automatische Größenanpassung an den Inhalt - Ermöglicht die automatische Änderung jeder Spaltenbreite entsprechend dem Text in den Zellen. Im Abschnitt Standardzellenränder können Sie den Abstand zwischen dem Text innerhalb der Zellen und dem standardmäßig verwendeten Zellenrand ändern. Im Abschnitt Optionen können Sie den folgenden Parameter ändern: Abstand zwischen Zellen - Der Zellenabstand, der mit der Farbe des Tabellenhintergrunds gefüllt wird. Auf der Registerkarte Zelle können Sie die Eigenschaften einzelner Zellen ändern. Zuerst müssen Sie die Zelle auswählen, auf die Sie die Änderungen anwenden möchten, oder die gesamte Tabelle auswählen, um die Eigenschaften aller Zellen zu ändern. Der Abschnitt Zellengröße enthält die folgenden Parameter: Bevorzugte Breite - Ermöglicht das Festlegen einer bevorzugten Zellenbreite. Dies ist die Größe, an die eine Zelle angepasst werden soll. In einigen Fällen ist es jedoch möglicherweise nicht möglich, genau an diesen Wert anzupassen. Wenn der Text in einer Zelle beispielsweise die angegebene Breite überschreitet, wird er in die nächste Zeile aufgeteilt, sodass die bevorzugte Zellenbreite unverändert bleibt. Wenn Sie jedoch eine neue Spalte einfügen, wird die bevorzugte Breite verringert. Messen in - ermöglicht die Angabe, ob Sie die Zellenbreite in absoluten Einheiten festlegen möchten, d. H. Zentimeter / Punkte / Zoll (abhängig von der auf der Registerkarte Datei -> Erweiterte Einstellungen... angegebenen Option) oder in Prozent der gesamten Tabellenbreite.Hinweis: Sie können die Zellenbreite auch manuell anpassen. Um eine einzelne Zelle in einer Spalte breiter oder schmaler als die gesamte Spaltenbreite zu machen, wählen Sie die gewünschte Zelle aus und bewegen Sie den Mauszeiger über den rechten Rand, bis sie sich in den bidirektionalen Pfeil verwandelt. Ziehen Sie dann den Rand. Um die Breite aller Zellen in einer Spalte zu ändern, verwenden Sie die Markierungen auf dem horizontalen Lineal, um die Spaltenbreite zu ändern. Im Abschnitt Zellenränder können Sie den Abstand zwischen dem Text innerhalb der Zellen und dem Zellenrand anpassen. Standardmäßig werden Standardwerte verwendet (die Standardwerte können auch auf der Registerkarte Tabelle geändert werden). Sie können jedoch das Kontrollkästchen Standardränder verwenden deaktivieren und die erforderlichen Werte manuell eingeben. Im Abschnitt Zellenoptionen können Sie den folgenden Parameter ändern: Die Option Text umbrechen ist standardmäßig aktiviert. Es erlaubts, um Text in eine Zelle, die ihre Breite überschreitet, in die nächste Zeile zu umbrechen, um die Zeilenhöhe zu erweitern und die Spaltenbreite unverändert zu lassen. Die Registerkarte Rahmen & Hintergrund enthält die folgenden Parameter: Rahmenparameter (Größe, Farbe und Vorhandensein oder Nichtvorhandensein) - Legen Sie die Rahmengröße fest, wählen Sie die Farbe aus und legen Sie fest, wie sie in den Zellen angezeigt werden soll.Hinweis: Wenn Sie festlegen, dass Tabellenränder nicht angezeigt werden, indem Sie auf die Schaltfläche klicken oder alle Ränder manuell im Diagramm deaktivieren, werden sie im Dokument durch eine gepunktete Linie angezeigt. Um sie überhaupt verschwinden zu lassen, klicken Sie auf der Registerkarte Startseite der oberen Symbolleiste auf das Symbol Nicht druckbare Zeichen und wählen Sie die Option Versteckte Tabellenränder. Zellenhintergrund - Die Farbe für den Hintergrund innerhalb der Zellen (nur verfügbar, wenn eine oder mehrere Zellen ausgewählt sind oder die Option Abstand zwischen Zellen zulassen auf der Registerkarte Tabelle ausgewählt ist). Tabellenhintergrund - Die Farbe für den Tabellenhintergrund oder den Abstand zwischen den Zellen, falls auf der Registerkarte Tabelle die Option Abstand zwischen Zellen zulassen ausgewählt ist. Die Registerkarte Tabellenposition ist nur verfügbar, wenn die Option Flusstabelle auf der Registerkarte Textumbruch ausgewählt ist und die folgenden Parameter enthält: Zu den horizontalen Parametern gehören die Tabellenausrichtung (links, Mitte, rechts) relativ zu Rand, Seite oder Text sowie die Tabellenposition rechts von Rand, Seite oder Text. Zu den vertikalen Parametern gehören die Tabellenausrichtung (oben, Mitte, unten) relativ zu Rand, Seite oder Text sowie die Tabellenposition unter Rand, Seite oder Text. Im Abschnitt Optionen können Sie die folgenden Parameter ändern: Objekt mit Text verschieben steuert, ob die Tabelle verschoben wird, während sich der Text, in den sie eingefügt wird, bewegt. Überlappungssteuerung zulassen steuert, ob zwei Tabellen zu einer großen Tabelle zusammengeführt werden oder überlappen, wenn Sie sie auf der Seite nebeneinander ziehen. Die Registerkarte Textumbruch enthält die folgenden Parameter: Textumbruchstil - Inline-Tabelle oder Flow-Tabelle. Verwenden Sie die erforderliche Option, um die Position der Tabelle relativ zum Text zu ändern: Sie ist entweder Teil des Textes (falls Sie die Inline-Tabelle auswählen) oder wird von allen Seiten umgangen (wenn Sie die Flusstabelle auswählen). Nachdem Sie den Umbruchstil ausgewählt haben, können die zusätzlichen Umbruchparameter sowohl für Inline- als auch für Flusstabellen festgelegt werden: Für die Inline-Tabelle können Sie die Tabellenausrichtung und den Einzug von links angeben. Für die Flusstabelle können Sie den Abstand von Text und Tabellenposition auf der Registerkarte Tabellenposition angeben Auf der Registerkarte Alternativer Text können Sie einen Titel und eine Beschreibung angeben, die Personen mit Seh- oder kognitiven Beeinträchtigungen vorgelesen werden, damit sie besser verstehen, welche Informationen in der Tabelle enthalten sind." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertTextObjects.htm", "title": "Textobjekte einfügen", - "body": "Um Ihren Text lesbarer zu gestalten und die Aufmerksamkeit auf einen bestimmten Teil des Dokuments zu lenken, können Sie ein Textfeld (rechteckigen Rahmen, in den ein Text eingegeben werden kann) oder ein TextArt-Textfeld (Textfeld mit einer vordefinierten Schriftart und Farbe, das die Anwendung von Texteffekten ermöglicht) einfügen. Textobjekt einfügen Sie können überall auf der Seite ein Textobjekt einfügen. Folgen Sie dafür den folgenden Schritten: Wechseln Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf die Registerkarte Einfügen. Wählen Sie das gewünschten Textobjekt aus: Um ein Textfeld hinzuzufügen, klicken Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf das Symbol Textfeld und dann auf die Stelle, an der Sie das Textfeld einfügen möchten. Halten Sie die Maustaste gedrückt, und ziehen Sie den Rahmen des Textfelds in die gewünschte Größe. Wenn Sie die Maustaste loslassen, erscheint die Einfügemarke im hinzugefügten Textfeld und Sie können Ihren Text eingeben.Hinweis: alternativ können Sie ein Textfeld einfügen, in dem Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf Form klicken und das Symbol aus der Gruppe Standardformen auswählen. Um ein TextArt-Objekt einzufügen, klicken Sie auf das Symbol TextArt in der oberen Symbolleiste und klicken Sie dann auf die gewünschte Stilvorlage - das TextArt-Objekt wird an der aktuellen Cursorposition eingefügt. Markieren Sie den Standardtext innerhalb des Textfelds mit der Maus und ersetzen Sie diesen durch Ihren eigenen Text. Klicken Sie in einen Bereich außerhalb des Text-Objekts, um die Änderungen anzuwenden und zum Dokument zurückzukehren. Der auf solcher Weise hinzugefügte Text wird Bestandteil der AutoForm (wenn Sie die AutoForm verschieben oder drehen, wird der Text mit ihr verschoben oder gedreht). Da ein eingefügtes Textobjekt einen rechteckigen Rahmen mit Text darstellt (TextArt-Objekte haben standardmäßig unsichtbare Rahmen) und dieser Rahmen eine allgemeine AutoForm ist, können Sie sowohl die Form als auch die Texteigenschaften ändern. Um das hinzugefügte Text-Objekt zu löschen, klicken Sie auf den Rand des Textfelds und drücken Sie die Taste ENTF auf der Tastatur. Dadurch wird auch der Text im Textfeld gelöscht. Textfeld formatieren Wählen Sie das entsprechende Textfeld durch anklicken der Rahmenlinien aus, um die Eigenschaften zu verändern. Wenn das Textfeld markiert ist, werden alle Rahmenlinien als durchgezogene Linien und nicht gestrichelt angezeigt. Sie können das Textfeld mithilfe der speziellen Ziehpunkte an den Ecken der Form verschieben, drehen und die Größe ändern. Um das Textfeld zu bearbeiten mit einer Füllung zu versehen, Rahmenlinien zu ändern, den Textumbruch zu formatieren oder das rechteckige Feld mit einer anderen Form zu ersetzen, klicken Sie in der rechten Seitenleiste auf Formeinstellungen und nutzen Sie die entsprechenden Optionen. Um das Textfeld auf der Seite auszurichten, Textfelder mit andern Objekten zu verknüpfen, den Umbruchstil zu ändern oder auf Formen - Erweiterte Einstellungen zuzugreifen, klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste auf den Feldrand und öffnen Sie so das Kontextmenü. Weitere Informationen zum Ausrichten und Anordnen von Objekten finden Sie auf dieser Seite. Text im Textfeld formatieren Markieren Sie den Text im Textfeld, um die Eigenschaften zu verändern. Wenn der Text markiert ist, werden alle Rahmenlinien als durchgezogene Linien angezeigt. Hinweis: Es ist auch möglich, die Textformatierung zu ändern, wenn das Textfeld (nicht der Text selbst) ausgewählt ist. In einem solchen Fall werden alle Änderungen auf den gesamten Text im Textfeld angewandt. Einige Schriftformatierungsoptionen (Schriftart, -größe, -farbe und -stile) können separat auf einen zuvor ausgewählten Teil des Textes angewendet werden. Um den Text innerhalb des Textfeldes zu drehen, klicken Sie mit der rechten Maus auf den Text, klicken Sie auf Textausrichtung und wählen Sie eine der verfügbaren Optionen: Horizontal (Standardeinstellung), Text um 90° drehen (vertikale Ausrichtung von oben nach unten) oder Text um 270° drehen (vertikale Ausrichtung von unten nach oben). Um den Text innerhalb des Textfeldes vertikal auszurichten, klicken Sie mit der rechten Maus auf den Text, wählen Sie die Option vertikale Textausrichtung und klicken Sie auf eine der verfügbaren Optionen: Oben ausrichten, Zentriert ausrichten oder Unten ausrichten. Die andere Formatierungsoptionen, die Ihnen zur Verfügung stehen, sind die gleichen wie für normalen Text. Bitte lesen Sie die entsprechenden Hilfeabschnitte, um mehr über die erforderlichen Vorgänge zu erfahren. Sie können: den Text im Textfeld horizontal ausrichten Schriftart, Größe und Farbe festlegen und DekoSchriften und Formatierungsvorgaben anwenden Zeilenabstände festlegen, Absatzeinzüge ändern und die Tabulatoren für den mehrzeiligen Text innerhalb des Textfelds anpassen einen Hyperlink einfügen Sie können auch in der rechten Seitenleiste auf das Symbol TextArt-Einstellungen klicken und die gewünschten Stilparameter ändern. TextArt-Stil bearbeiten Wählen Sie ein Textobjekt aus und klicken Sie in der rechten Seitenleiste auf das Symbol TextArt-Einstellungen . Ändern Sie den angewandten Textstil, indem Sie eine neue Vorlage aus der Galerie auswählen. Sie können den Grundstil außerdem ändern, indem Sie eine andere Schriftart, Größe usw. auswählen. Füllung der Schriftart ändern. Folgende Optionen stehen Ihnen zur Verfügung: Farbfüllung - wählen Sie die Volltonfarbe für den Innenbereich der Buchstaben aus. Klicken Sie auf das Farbfeld unten und wählen Sie die gewünschte Farbe aus den verfügbaren Farbpaletten aus oder legen Sie eine beliebige Farbe fest: Farbverlauf - wählen Sie diese Option, um die Buchstaben mit zwei Farben zu füllen, die sanft ineinander übergehen. Stil - wählen Sie eine der verfügbaren Optionen: Linear (Farben ändern sich linear, d.h. entlang der horizontalen/vertikalen Achse oder diagonal in einem 45-Grad Winkel) oder Radial (Farben ändern sich kreisförmig vom Zentrum zu den Kanten). Richtung - wählen Sie eine Vorlage aus dem Menü aus. Wenn der Farbverlauf Linear ausgewählt ist, sind die folgenden Richtungen verfügbar: von oben links nach unten rechts, von oben nach unten, von oben rechts nach unten links, von rechts nach links, von unten rechts nach oben links, von unten nach oben, von unten links nach oben rechts, von links nach rechts. Wenn der Farbverlauf Radial ausgewählt ist, steht nur eine Vorlage zur Verfügung. Farbverlauf - klicken Sie auf den linken Schieberegler unter der Farbverlaufsleiste, um das Farbfeld für die erste Farbe zu aktivieren. Klicken Sie auf das Farbfeld auf der rechten Seite, um die erste Farbe in der Farbpalette auszuwählen. Nutzen Sie den rechten Schieberegler unter der Farbverlaufsleiste, um den Wechselpunkt festzulegen, an dem eine Farbe in die andere übergeht. Nutzen Sie den rechten Schieberegler unter der Farbverlaufsleiste, um die zweite Farbe anzugeben und den Wechselpunkt festzulegen. Hinweis: Ist eine dieser beiden Optionen ausgewählt, haben Sie zusätzlich die Wahl, die Transparenz der Füllung festzulegen, ziehen Sie dazu den Schieberegler in die gewünschte Position oder geben Sie den Prozentwert manuell ein. Der Standardwert beträgt 100%. Also volle Deckkraft. Der Wert 0% steht für vollständige Transparenz. Keine Füllung - wählen Sie diese Option, wenn Sie keine Füllung verwenden möchten. Schriftstärke, -farbe und -stil anpassen. Um die Strichstärke zu ändern, wählen Sie eine der verfügbaren Optionen im Listenmenü Größe aus. Die verfügbaren Optionen sind: 0,5 Pt., 1 Pt., 1,5 Pt., 2,25 Pt., 3 Pt., 4,5 Pt., 6 Pt. Alternativ können Sie die Option Keine Linie auswählen, wenn Sie keine Umrandung wünschen. Um die Konturfarbe zu ändern, klicken Sie auf das farbige Feld und wählen Sie die gewünschte Farbe aus. Um den Stil der Kontur zu ändern, wählen Sie die gewünschte Option aus der entsprechenden Dropdown-Liste aus (standardmäßig wird eine durchgezogene Linie verwendet, diese können Sie in eine der verfügbaren gestrichelten Linien ändern). Wenden Sie einen Texteffekt an, indem Sie aus der Galerie mit den verfügbaren Vorlagen die gewünschte Formatierung auswählen. Sie können den Grad der Textverzerrung anpassen, indem Sie den rosafarbenen, rautenförmigen Griff in die gewünschte Position ziehen." + "body": "Um Ihren Text lesbarer zu gestalten und die Aufmerksamkeit auf einen bestimmten Teil des Dokuments zu lenken, können Sie ein Textfeld (rechteckigen Rahmen, in den ein Text eingegeben werden kann) oder ein TextArt-Textfeld (Textfeld mit einer vordefinierten Schriftart und Farbe, das die Anwendung von Texteffekten ermöglicht) einfügen. Textobjekt einfügen Sie können überall auf der Seite ein Textobjekt einfügen. Textobjekt einfügen: Wechseln Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf die Registerkarte Einfügen. Wählen Sie das gewünschten Textobjekt aus: Um ein Textfeld hinzuzufügen, klicken Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf das Symbol Textfeld und dann auf die Stelle, an der Sie das Textfeld einfügen möchten. Halten Sie die Maustaste gedrückt, und ziehen Sie den Rahmen des Textfelds in die gewünschte Größe. Wenn Sie die Maustaste loslassen, erscheint die Einfügemarke im hinzugefügten Textfeld und Sie können Ihren Text eingeben.Hinweis: alternativ können Sie ein Textfeld einfügen, indem Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf Form klicken und das Symbol aus der Gruppe Standardformen auswählen. Um ein TextArt-Objekt einzufügen, klicken Sie auf das Symbol TextArt in der oberen Symbolleiste und klicken Sie dann auf die gewünschte Stilvorlage - das TextArt-Objekt wird an der aktuellen Cursorposition eingefügt. Markieren Sie den Standardtext innerhalb des Textfelds mit der Maus und ersetzen Sie diesen durch Ihren eigenen Text. Klicken Sie in einen Bereich außerhalb des Text-Objekts, um die Änderungen anzuwenden und zum Dokument zurückzukehren. Der Text innerhalb des Textfelds ist Bestandteil der AutoForm (wenn Sie die AutoForm verschieben oder drehen, wird der Text mit ihr verschoben oder gedreht). Da ein eingefügtes Textobjekt einen rechteckigen Rahmen mit Text darstellt (TextArt-Objekte haben standardmäßig unsichtbare Rahmen) und dieser Rahmen eine allgemeine AutoForm ist, können Sie sowohl die Form als auch die Texteigenschaften ändern. Um das hinzugefügte Textobjekt zu löschen, klicken Sie auf den Rand des Textfelds und drücken Sie die Taste ENTF auf der Tastatur. Dadurch wird auch der Text im Textfeld gelöscht. Textfeld formatieren Wählen Sie das entsprechende Textfeld durch Anklicken der Rahmenlinien aus, um die Eigenschaften zu verändern. Wenn das Textfeld markiert ist, werden alle Rahmenlinien als durchgezogene Linien (nicht gestrichelt) angezeigt. Sie können das Textfeld mithilfe der speziellen Ziehpunkte an den Ecken der Form verschieben, drehen und die Größe ändern. Um das Textfeld zu bearbeiten mit einer Füllung zu versehen, Rahmenlinien zu ändern, den Textumbruch zu formatieren oder das rechteckige Feld mit einer anderen Form zu ersetzen, klicken Sie in der rechten Seitenleiste auf Formeinstellungen und nutzen Sie die entsprechenden Optionen. Um das Textfeld auf der Seite auszurichten, Textfelder mit andern Objekten zu verknüpfen, ein Textfeld zu rotieren oder umzudrehen, den Umbruchstil zu ändern oder auf Formen - Erweiterte Einstellungen zuzugreifen, klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste auf den Feldrand und öffnen Sie so das Kontextmenü. Weitere Informationen zum Ausrichten und Anordnen von Objekten finden Sie auf dieser Seite. Text im Textfeld formatieren Markieren Sie den Text im Textfeld, um die Eigenschaften zu verändern. Wenn der Text markiert ist, werden alle Rahmenlinien als gestrichelte Linien angezeigt. Hinweis: Es ist auch möglich die Textformatierung zu ändern, wenn das Textfeld (nicht der Text selbst) ausgewählt ist. In einem solchen Fall werden alle Änderungen auf den gesamten Text im Textfeld angewandt. Einige Schriftformatierungsoptionen (Schriftart, -größe, -farbe und -stile) können separat auf einen zuvor ausgewählten Teil des Textes angewendet werden. Um den Text innerhalb des Textfeldes zu drehen, klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste auf den Text, klicken Sie auf Textausrichtung und wählen Sie eine der verfügbaren Optionen: Horizontal (Standardeinstellung), Text um 180° drehen (vertikale Ausrichtung von oben nach unten) oder Text um 270° drehen (vertikale Ausrichtung von unten nach oben). Um den Text innerhalb des Textfeldes vertikal auszurichten, klicken Sie mit der rechten Maus auf den Text, wählen Sie die Option vertikale Textausrichtung und klicken Sie auf eine der verfügbaren Optionen: Oben ausrichten, Zentrieren oder Unten ausrichten. Die andere Formatierungsoptionen, die Ihnen zur Verfügung stehen sind die gleichen wie für normalen Text. Bitte lesen Sie die entsprechenden Hilfeabschnitte, um mehr über die erforderlichen Vorgänge zu erfahren. Sie können: den Text im Textfeld horizontal ausrichten Schriftart, Größe und Farbe festlegen und DekoSchriften und Formatierungsvorgaben anwenden Zeilenabstände festlegen, Absatzeinzüge ändern und die Tabulatoren für den mehrzeiligen Text innerhalb des Textfelds anpassen einen Hyperlink einfügen Sie können auch in der rechten Seitenleiste auf das Symbol TextArt-Einstellungen klicken und die gewünschten Stilparameter ändern. TextArt-Stil bearbeiten Wählen Sie ein Textobjekt aus und klicken Sie in der rechten Seitenleiste auf das Symbol TextArt-Einstellungen . Ändern Sie den angewandten Textstil, indem Sie eine neue Vorlage aus der Galerie auswählen. Sie können den Grundstil außerdem ändern, indem Sie eine andere Schriftart, -größe usw. auswählen. Füllung der Schriftart ändern. Folgende Optionen stehen Ihnen zur Verfügung: Farbfüllung - wählen Sie die Volltonfarbe für den Innenbereich der Buchstaben aus. Klicken Sie auf das Farbfeld unten und wählen Sie die gewünschte Farbe aus den verfügbaren Farbpaletten aus oder legen Sie eine beliebige Farbe fest: Farbverlauf - wählen Sie diese Option, um die Buchstaben mit zwei Farben zu füllen, die sanft ineinander übergehen. Stil - wählen Sie eine der verfügbaren Optionen: Linear (Farben ändern sich linear, d.h. entlang der horizontalen/vertikalen Achse oder diagonal in einem 45-Grad Winkel) oder Radial (Farben ändern sich kreisförmig vom Zentrum zu den Kanten). Richtung - wählen Sie eine Vorlage aus dem Menü aus. Wenn der Farbverlauf Linear ausgewählt ist, sind die folgenden Richtungen verfügbar: von oben links nach unten rechts, von oben nach unten, von oben rechts nach unten links, von rechts nach links, von unten rechts nach oben links, von unten nach oben, von unten links nach oben rechts, von links nach rechts. Wenn der Farbverlauf Radial ausgewählt ist, steht nur eine Vorlage zur Verfügung. Farbverlauf - klicken Sie auf den linken Schieberegler unter der Farbverlaufsleiste, um das Farbfeld für die erste Farbe zu aktivieren. Klicken Sie auf das Farbfeld auf der rechten Seite, um die erste Farbe in der Farbpalette auszuwählen. Nutzen Sie den rechten Schieberegler unter der Farbverlaufsleiste, um den Wechselpunkt festzulegen, an dem eine Farbe in die andere übergeht. Nutzen Sie den rechten Schieberegler unter der Farbverlaufsleiste, um die zweite Farbe anzugeben und den Wechselpunkt festzulegen. Hinweis: Ist eine dieser beiden Optionen ausgewählt, haben Sie zusätzlich die Wahl, die Transparenz der Füllung festzulegen, ziehen Sie dazu den Schieberegler in die gewünschte Position oder geben Sie den Prozentwert manuell ein. Der Standardwert beträgt 100%. Also volle Deckkraft. Der Wert 0% steht für vollständige Transparenz. Keine Füllung - wählen Sie diese Option, wenn Sie keine Füllung verwenden möchten. Schriftstärke, -farbe und -stil anpassen. Um die Strichstärke zu ändern, wählen Sie eine der verfügbaren Optionen im Listenmenü Größe aus. Die folgenden Optionen stehen Ihnen zur Verfügung: 0,5 Pt., 1 Pt., 1,5 Pt., 2,25 Pt., 3 Pt., 4,5 Pt., 6 Pt. Alternativ können Sie die Option Keine Linie auswählen, wenn Sie keine Umrandung wünschen. Um die Konturfarbe zu ändern, klicken Sie auf das farbige Feld und wählen Sie die gewünschte Farbe aus. Um den Stil der Kontur zu ändern, wählen Sie die gewünschte Option aus der entsprechenden Dropdown-Liste aus (standardmäßig wird eine durchgezogene Linie verwendet, diese können Sie in eine der verfügbaren gestrichelten Linien ändern). Wenden Sie einen Texteffekt an, indem Sie aus der Galerie mit den verfügbaren Vorlagen die gewünschte Formatierung auswählen. Sie können den Grad der Textverzerrung anpassen, indem Sie den rosafarbenen, rautenförmigen Ziehpunkt in die gewünschte Position ziehen." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/LineSpacing.htm", "title": "Zeilenabstand in Absätzen festlegen", - "body": "Der Dokumenteneditor ermöglicht Ihnen die Zeilenhöhe für die Textzeilen innerhalb des Absatzes sowie die Abstände zwischen den einzelnen Absätzen festzulegen. Gehen Sie dazu wie folgt vor: Postitionieren Sie den Cursor innerhalb des gewünschten Absatzes oder wählen Sie mehrere Absätze mit der Maus aus oder markieren Sie den gesamten Text mithilfe der Tastenkombination STRG+A. Nutzen Sie die entsprechenden Felder in der rechten Seitenleiste, um das gewünschte Ergebnis zu erzielen: Zeilenabstand - Zeilenhöhe für die Textzeilen im Absatz festlegen Sie haben drei Optionen zur Auswahl: mindestens (mithilfe dieser Option wird der für das größte Schriftzeichen oder eine Grafik auf einer Zeile erforderliche Mindestabstand zwischen den Zeilen festgelegt), mehrfach (mithilfe dieser Option wird der Zeilenabstand in Zahlen größer als 1 festgelegt), genau (unabhängig von der Größe der eingegebenen Zeichen oder Objekte wird der voreingestellte Abstandswert genau eingehalten). Sie können den gewünschten Wert im Feld rechts angeben. Absatzabstand - Auswählen wie groß die Absätze sind, die zwischen Textzeilen und Abständen angezeigt werden. Vor - Abstand vor dem Absatz. Nach - Abstand nach dem Absatz. Kein Abstand zwischen Absätzen gleicher Formatierung - aktivieren Sie dieses Feld, wenn Sie keinen zusätzlichen Abstand zwischen Absätzen gleicher Formatierung einfügen möchten. Um den aktuellen Zeilenabstand zu ändern, können Sie auch auf der Registerkarte Start das Symbol Zeilenabstand anklicken und den gewünschten Wert aus der Liste auswählen: 1,0; 1,15; 1,5; 2,0; 2,5; oder 3,0." + "body": "Im Dokumenteditor können Sie die Zeilenhöhe für die Textzeilen innerhalb des Absatzes sowie die Ränder zwischen dem aktuellen und dem vorhergehenden oder dem nachfolgenden Absatz festlegen. Um das zu tun, setzen Sie den Zeiger in den gewünschten Absatz oder wählen Sie mehrere Absätze mit der Maus oder selektieren Sie den gesamten Text im Dokument aus, indem Sie die Tastenkombination STRG + A drücken. verwenden Sie die entsprechenden Felder in der rechten Seitenleiste, um die gewünschten Ergebnisse zu erzielen: Zeilenabstand - Legen Sie die Zeilenhöhe für die Textzeilen innerhalb des Absatzes fest. Sie können zwischen drei Optionen wählen: mindestens (legt den minimalen Zeilenabstand fest, der für die größte Schriftart oder Grafik auf der Zeile erforderlich ist), mehrfach (legt den Zeilenabstand fest, der in Zahlen größer als 1 ausgedrückt werden kann), genau (setzt fest Zeilenabstand). Den erforderlichen Wert können Sie im Feld rechts angeben. Absatzabstand - Legen Sie den Abstand zwischen den Absätzen fest. Vorher - Legen Sie den Platz vor dem Absatz fest. Nachher - Legen Sie den Platz nach dem Absatz. Fügen Sie kein Intervall zwischen Absätzen desselben Stils hinzu. - Aktivieren Sie dieses Kontrollkästchen, falls Sie keinen Abstand zwischen Absätzen desselben Stils benötigen. Diese Parameter finden Sie auch im Fenster Absatz - Erweiterte Einstellungen. Um das Fenster Absatz - Erweiterte Einstellungen zu öffnen, klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste auf den Text und wählen Sie im Menü die Option Erweiterte Absatzeinstellungen oder verwenden Sie die Option Erweiterte Einstellungen anzeigen in der rechten Seitenleiste. Wechseln Sie dann zur Registerkarte Einrückungen und Abstände und gehen Sie zum Abschnitt Abstand. Um den aktuellen Absatzzeilenabstand schnell zu ändern, können Sie auch das Symbol für den Absatzzeilenabstand verwenden. Wählen Sie auf der Registerkarte Startseite in der oberen Symbolleiste das Symbol für den Absatzwert aus der Liste aus: 1,0; 1,15; 1,5; 2,0; 2,5; oder 3,0." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/NonprintingCharacters.htm", @@ -228,22 +238,22 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/OpenCreateNew.htm", "title": "Ein neues Dokument erstellen oder ein vorhandenes öffnen", - "body": "Nachdem Sie die Arbeit an einem Dokument abgeschlossen haben, können Sie sofort zu einem vorhandenen Dokument übergehen, dass Sie kürzlich bearbeitet haben, ein neues Dokument erstellen oder die Liste mit den vorhandenen Dokumenten öffnen. Erstellen eines neuen Dokuments: Klicken Sie in der oberen Menüleiste auf die Registerkarte Datei. Wählen Sie die Option Neues Dokument erstellen. Öffnen eines kürzlich bearbeiteten Dokuments: Klicken Sie in der oberen Menüleiste auf die Registerkarte Datei. Wählen Sie die Option Zuletzt benutzte öffnen. Wählen Sie das gewünschte Dokument aus der Liste mit den zuletzt bearbeiteten Dokumenten aus. Um zu der Liste der vorhandenen Dokumenten zurückzukehren, klicken Sie rechts auf der Menüleiste des Editors auf Vorhandene Dokumente. Alternativ können Sie in der oberen Menüleiste auf die Registerkarte Datei wechseln und die Option Vorhandene Dokumente auswählen." + "body": "Ein neues Dokument erstellen: Online-Editor Klicken Sie in der oberen Menüleiste auf die Registerkarte Datei. Wählen Sie die Option Neu erstellen. Desktop-Editor Wählen Sie im Hauptfenster des Programms das Menü Dokument im Abschnitt Neu erstellen der linken Seitenleiste aus - eine neue Datei wird in einer neuen Registerkarte geöffnet. Wenn Sie alle gewünschten Änderungen durchgeführt haben, klicken Sie auf das Symbol Speichern in der oberen linken Ecke oder wechseln Sie in die Registerkarte Datei und wählen Sie das Menü Speichern als aus. Wählen Sie im Fenster Dateiverwaltung den Speicherort, geben Sie den Namen an, wählen Sie das Format aus in dem Sie das Dokument speichern möchten (DOCX, Dokumentvorlage (DOTX), ODT, OTT, RTF, TXT, PDF oder PDFA) und klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche Speichern. Ein vorhandenes Dokument öffnen: Desktop-Editor Wählen Sie in der linken Seitenleiste im Hauptfenster des Programms den Menüpunkt Lokale Datei öffnen. Wählen Sie im Fenster Dateiverwaltung das gewünschte Dokument aus und klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche Öffnen. Sie können auch im Fenster Dateiverwaltung mit der rechten Maustaste auf das gewünschte Dokument klicken, die Option Öffnen mit auswählen und die gewünschte Anwendung aus dem Menü auswählen. Wenn die Office-Dokumentdateien mit der Anwendung verknüpft sind, können Sie Dokumente auch öffnen, indem Sie im Datei-Explorer-Fenster auf den Dateinamen doppelklicken. Alle Verzeichnisse, auf die Sie mit dem Desktop-Editor zugegriffen haben, werden in der Liste Aktuelle Ordner angezeigt, um Ihnen einen schnellen Zugriff zu ermöglichen. Klicken Sie auf den gewünschten Ordner, um eine der darin gespeicherten Dateien auszuwählen. Öffnen eines kürzlich bearbeiteten Dokuments: Online-Editor Klicken Sie in der oberen Menüleiste auf die Registerkarte Datei. Wählen Sie die Option Zuletzt verwendet.... Wählen Sie das gewünschte Dokument aus der Liste mit den zuletzt bearbeiteten Dokumenten aus. Desktop-Editor Wählen Sie in der linken Seitenleiste im Hauptfenster des Programms den Menüpunkt Aktuelle Dateien. Wählen Sie das gewünschte Dokument aus der Liste mit den zuletzt bearbeiteten Dokumenten aus. Um den Ordner in dem die Datei gespeichert ist in der Online-Version in einem neuen Browser-Tab oder in der Desktop-Version im Fenster Datei-Explorer zu öffnen, klicken Sie auf der rechten Seite des Editor-Hauptmenüs auf das Symbol Dateispeicherort öffnen. Alternativ können Sie in der oberen Menüleiste auf die Registerkarte Datei wechseln und die Option Dateispeicherort öffnen auswählen." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/PageBreaks.htm", "title": "Seitenumbrüche einfügen", - "body": "Im Dokumenteneditor können Sie einen Seitenumbruch einfügen, um eine neue Seite zu beginnen und die Optionen der Seitennummerierung einzustellen. Um an der aktuellen Cursorposition einen Seitenumbruch einzufügen, klicken Sie in der oberen Menüleiste auf das Symbol Umbrüche in den Registerkarten Einfügen oder Layout oder klicken Sie auf den Pfeil neben diesem Symbol und wählen Sie die Option Seitenumbruch einfügen aus dem Menü aus. Einen Seitenumbruch vor einem ausgewählten Absatz einfügen (der Absatz beginnt erst am Anfang der neuen Seite): Klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste und wählen Sie im Kontextmenü die Option Seitenumbruch oberhalb oder klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste und wählen Sie im Kontextmenü die Option Absatz - Erweiterte Einstellungen im Menü aus oder nutzen Sie den Link Erweiterte Einstellungen anzeigen in der rechten Seitenleiste und aktivieren Sie im geöffneten Fenster Absatz - Erweiterte Einstellungen das Kästchen Seitenumbruch oberhalb. Zeilen zusammenhalten, so dass nur ganze Absätze auf die neue Seite verschoben werden (d.h. kein Seitenumbruch zwischen den Zeilen eines einzelnen Absatzes): Klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste und wählen Sie die Option Absatz zusammenhalten im Menü aus oder klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste und wählen Sie die Option Absatz - Erweiterte Einstellungen oder nutzen Sie den Link Erweiterte Einstellungen anzeigen in der rechten Seitenleiste und aktivieren Sie das Feld Absatz zusammenhalten im geöffneten Fenster Absatz - Erweiterte Einstellungen. Im Fenster Absatz - Erweiterte Einstellungen gibt es noch zwei weitere Optionen für Seitenumbrüche: Nicht vom nächsten trennen - der gewählte und der nachfolgende Absatz werden zusammengehalten und der Umbruch erfolgt erst nach dem nächsten Absatz. Absatzkontrolle - ist standardmäßig ausgewählt und wird genutzt, um zu vermeiden, dass eine einzelne Zeile aus einem Abschnitt (die erste oder die letzte) an den Anfang oder das Ende einer anderen Seite verschoben werden." + "body": "Im Dokumenteditor können Sie einen Seitenumbruch hinzufügen, um eine neue Seite zu starten, eine leere Seite einzufügen und die Paginierungsoptionen anzupassen. Um einen Seitenumbruch an der aktuellen Zeigerposition einzufügen, klicken Sie auf das Symbol Unterbrechungen auf der Registerkarte Einfügen oder Layout der oberen Symbolleiste oder klicken Sie auf den Pfeil neben diesem Symbol und wählen Sie im Menu die Option Seitenumbruch einfügen. Sie können auch die Tastenkombination Strg + Eingabetaste verwenden. Um eine leere Seite einzufügen, klicken Sie auf das Symbol Leere Seite auf der Registerkarte Einfügen der oberen Symbolleiste. Dadurch werden zwei Seitenumbrüche eingefügt, wodurch eine leere Seite erstellt wird. Um einen Seitenumbruch vor dem ausgewählten Absatz einzufügen, d. H. um diesen Absatz oben auf einer neuen Seite zu beginnen: Klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste und wählen Sie im Menü die Option Seitenumbruch vor oder Klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste, wählen Sie im Menü die Option Absatz - Erweiterte Einstellungen oder verwenden Sie den Link Erweiterte Einstellungen anzeigen in der rechten Seitenleiste, und aktivieren Sie das Kontrollkästchen Seitenumbruch davor auf der Registerkarte Zeilen- und Seitenumbrüche des geöffneten Fensters Absatz - Erweiterte Einstellungen. Um die Zeilen so zusammenzuhalten, dass nur ganze Absätze auf die neue Seite verschoben werden (d. H. Es gibt keinen Seitenumbruch zwischen den Zeilen innerhalb eines einzelnen Absatzes), Klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste und wählen Sie im Menü die Option Linien zusammenhalten oder Klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste, wählen Sie im Menü die Option Erweiterte Absatzeinstellungen aus, oder verwenden Sie den Link Erweiterte Einstellungen anzeigen in der rechten Seitenleiste, und aktivieren Sie das Kontrollkästchen Absatz zusammenhalten unter Zeilen- und Seitenumbrüche im geöffneten Fenster Absatz - Erweiterte Einstellungen. Auf der Registerkarte Zeilen- und Seitenumbrüche des Fensters Absatz - Erweiterte Einstellungen können Sie zwei weitere Paginierungsoptionen festlegen: Mit dem nächsten zusammen - wird verwendet, um einen Seitenumbruch zwischen dem ausgewählten und dem nächsten Absatz zu verhindern. Verwaiste Steuerung - ist standardmäßig ausgewählt und wird verwendet, um zu verhindern, dass eine einzelne Zeile des Absatzes (die erste oder letzte) oben oder unten auf der Seite angezeigt wird." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/ParagraphIndents.htm", "title": "Absatzeinzüge ändern", - "body": "Im Document Editor können Sie den Einzug der ersten Zeile vom linken Seitenrand sowie die Absatzeinzüge von links und rechts einstellen. Ändern der Absatzeinzüge: Postitionieren Sie den Cursor innerhalb des gewünschten Absatzes oder wählen Sie mehrere Absätze mit der Maus aus oder markieren Sie den gesamten Text mithilfe der Tastenkombination Strg+A. Klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste und wählen Sie im Kontextmenü die Option Erweiterte Absatzeinstellungen aus oder nutzen Sie die Verknüpfung Erweiterte Einstellungen anzeigen in der rechten Seitenleiste. Legen Sie nun unter Absatz - Erweiterte Einstellungen den gewünschten Einzug für die erste Zeile fest sowie den Abstand zum linken und rechten Seitenrand. Klicken Sie auf OK. Um den Abstand zum linken Seitenrand zu ändern, können Sie auch die entsprechenden Symbole in der Registerkarte Start auf der oberen Symbolleiste benutzen: Einzug verkleinern und Einzug vergrößern . Sie können auch das horizontale Lineal nutzen, um Einzüge festzulegen.Wählen Sie den gewünschten Absatz (Absätze) und ziehen Sie die Einzugsmarken auf dem Lineal in die gewünschte Position. Mit der Markierung für den Erstzeileneinzug lässt sich der Versatz des Absatzes vom linken Seitenbereich für die erste Zeile eines Absatzes festlegen. Mit der Einzugsmarke für den hängenden Einzug lässt sich der Versatz vom linken Seitenrand für die zweite Zeile sowie alle Folgezeilen eines Absatzes festlegen. Mit der linken Einzugsmarke lässt sich der Versatz des Absatzes vom linken Seitenrand festlegen. Mit der rechten Einzugsmarke lässt sich der Versatz des Absatzes vom rechten Seitenrand festlegen." + "body": "Im Document Editor können Sie den Einzug der ersten Zeile vom linken Seitenrand sowie die Absatzeinzüge von links und rechts einstellen. Ändern der Absatzeinzüge: Postitionieren Sie den Zeiger innerhalb des gewünschten Absatzes oder wählen Sie mehrere Absätze mit der Maus aus oder markieren Sie den gesamten Text mithilfe der Tastenkombination Strg+A. Klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste und wählen Sie im Kontextmenü die Option Absatz - Erweiterte Einstellungen aus oder nutzen Sie die Verknüpfung Erweiterte Einstellungen anzeigen in der rechten Seitenleiste. Im Fenster Absatz - Erweiterte Einstellungen wechseln Sie zu Einzug & Abstand und setzen Sie die notwendigen Parameter für die Einzug-Sektion: Links - setzen Sie den Paragraphen-Versatz von der linken Seite mit einem numerischen Wert. Rechts - setzen Sie den Paragraphen-Versatz von der rechten Seite mit einem numerishcen Wert. Spezial - setzen Sie den Einzug der ersten Linie des Paragraphs: Selektieren Sie den entsprechenden Menueintrag: ((Nichts), Erste Linie, Hängend) und wechseln Sie den Standard numerischen Wert spezifisch fuer die erste Linie oder Hängend. Klicken Sie auf OK. Um den Abstand zum linken Seitenrand zu ändern, können Sie auch die entsprechenden Symbole in der Registerkarte Start auf der oberen Symbolleiste benutzen: Einzug verkleinern und Einzug vergrößern . Sie können auch das horizontale Lineal nutzen, um Einzüge festzulegen.Wählen Sie den gewünschten Absatz (Absätze) und ziehen Sie die Einzugsmarken auf dem Lineal in die gewünschte Position. Mit der Markierung für den Erstzeileneinzug lässt sich der Versatz des Absatzes vom linken Seitenbereich für die erste Zeile eines Absatzes festlegen. Mit der Einzugsmarke für den hängenden Einzug lässt sich der Versatz vom linken Seitenrand für die zweite Zeile sowie alle Folgezeilen eines Absatzes festlegen. Mit der linken Einzugsmarke lässt sich der Versatz des Absatzes vom linken Seitenrand festlegen. Mit der rechten Einzugsmarke lässt sich der Versatz des Absatzes vom rechten Seitenrand festlegen." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm", "title": "Dokument speichern/runterladen/drucken", - "body": "Dokument speichern/runterladen /drucken Standardmäßig speichert der Dokumenteneditor Ihre Datei während der Bearbeitung automatisch alle 2 Sekunden, um Datenverluste im Falle eines unerwarteten Programmabschlusses zu verhindern. Wenn Sie die Datei im Schnellmodus bearbeiten, fordert der Timer 25 Mal pro Sekunde Aktualisierungen an und speichert vorgenommene Änderungen. Wenn Sie die Datei im Modus Strikt bearbeiten, werden Änderungen automatisch alle 10 Minuten gespeichert. Sie können den bevorzugten Co-Bearbeitungs-Modus nach Belieben auswählen oder die Funktion AutoSave auf der Seite Erweiterte Einstellungen deaktivieren. Aktuelles Dokument manuell speichern: Klicken Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf das Symbol Speichern oder nutzen Sie die Tastenkombination STRG+S oder wechseln Sie die Registerkarte Datei und wählen Sie die Option Speichern. Aktuelles Dokument auf dem PC speichern Klicken Sie in der oberen Menüleiste auf die Registerkarte Datei. Wählen Sie die Option Herunterladen als. Wählen Sie nach Bedarf eines der verfügbaren Formate aus: DOCX, PDF, TXT, ODT, RTF, HTML. Aktuelles Dokument drucken Klicken Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf das Symbol Drucken oder nutzen Sie die Tastenkombination STRG+P oder wechseln Sie in der oberen Menüleiste in die Registerkarte Datei und wählen Sie die Option Drucken. Danach wird basierend auf dem Dokument eine PDF-Datei erstellt. Diese können Sie öffnen und drucken oder auf der Festplatte des Computers oder einem Wechseldatenträger speichern und später drucken." + "body": "Dokument speichern/runterladen /drucken Speichern Standardmäßig speichert der Online-Dokumenteneditor Ihre Datei während der Bearbeitung automatisch alle 2 Sekunden, um Datenverluste im Falle eines unerwarteten Progammabsturzes zu verhindern. Wenn Sie die Datei im Schnellmodus co-editieren, fordert der Timer 25 Mal pro Sekunde Aktualisierungen an und speichert vorgenommene Änderungen. Wenn Sie die Datei im Modus Strikt co-editieren, werden Änderungen automatisch alle 10 Minuten gespeichert. Sie können den bevorzugten Co-Modus nach Belieben auswählen oder die Funktion AutoSpeichern auf der Seite Erweiterte Einstellungen deaktivieren. Aktuelles Dokument manuell im aktuellen Format im aktuellen Verzeichnis speichern: Verwenden Sie das Symbol Speichern im linken Bereich der Kopfzeile des Editors oder drücken Sie die Tasten STRG+S oder wechseln Sie in der oberen Menüleiste in die Registerkarte Datei und wählen Sie die Option Speichern. Hinweis: um Datenverluste durch ein unerwartetes Schließen des Programms zu verhindern, können Sie in der Desktop-Version die Option AutoWiederherstellen auf der Seite Erweiterte Einstellungen aktivieren. In der Desktop-Version können Sie das Dokument unter einem anderen Namen, an einem neuen Speicherort oder in einem anderen Format speichern. Klicken Sie in der oberen Menüleiste auf die Registerkarte Datei. Wählen Sie die Option Speichern als.... Wählen Sie das gewünschte Format aus: DOCX, ODT, RTF, TXT, PDF, PDFA. Sie können die Option Dokumentenvorlage (DOTX oder OTT) auswählen. Download In der Online-Version können Sie das daraus resultierende Dokument auf der Festplatte Ihres Computers speichern. Klicken Sie in der oberen Menüleiste auf die Registerkarte Datei. Wählen Sie die Option Herunterladen als.... Wählen Sie das gewünschte Format aus: DOCX, PDF, ODT, TXT, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, HTML. Kopie speichern In der Online-Version können Sie die eine Kopie der Datei in Ihrem Portal speichern. Klicken Sie in der oberen Menüleiste auf die Registerkarte Datei. Wählen Sie die Option Kopie Speichern als.... Wählen Sie das gewünschte Format aus: DOCX, PDF, ODT, TXT, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, HTML. Wählen Sie den gewünschten Speicherort auf dem Portal aus und klicken Sie Speichern. Drucken Aktuelles Dokument drucken Klicken Sie auf das Symbol Drucken im linken Bereich der Kopfzeile des Editors oder nutzen Sie die Tastenkombination STRG+P oder wechseln Sie in der oberen Menüleiste in die Registerkarte Datei und wählen Sie die Option Drucken. In der Desktop-Version wird die Datei direkt gedruckt. In der Online-Version wird basierend auf dem Dokument eine PDF-Datei erstellt. Diese können Sie öffnen und drucken oder auf der Festplatte des Computers oder einem Wechseldatenträger speichern und später drucken. Einige Browser (z. B. Chrome und Opera) unterstützen Direktdruck." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/SectionBreaks.htm", @@ -253,7 +263,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/SetPageParameters.htm", "title": "Seitenparameter festlegen", - "body": "Um das Seitenlayout zu ändern, d. H. Seitenausrichtung und Seitengröße festzulegen, die Ränder anzupassen und Spalten einzufügen, verwenden Sie die entsprechenden Symbole auf der Registerkarte Layout der oberen Symbolleiste. Hinweis: alle festgelegten Parameter werden auf das gesamte Dokument angewendet. Wie Sie für einzelnen Teile Ihres Dokuments unterschiedliche Seitenränder, Ausrichtungen, Größen oder Spaltenanzahlen festlegen, lesen Sie bitte auf dieser Seite nach. Seitenausrichtung Die aktuelle Seitenausrichtung ändern Sie mit einem Klick auf das Symbol Seitenausrichtung. Die Standardeinstellung ist Hochformat. Diese kann jedoch auf Querformat gewechselt werden. Seitengröße Das A4-Standardformat ändern Sie, indem Sie das Symbol Größe anklicken und das gewünschte Format aus der Liste auswählen. Die verfügbaren Formate sind: US Letter (21,59 cm x 27,94 cm) US Legal (21,59 cm x 35,56 cm) A4 (21 cm x 29,7 cm) A5 (14,81cm x 20,99cm) B5 (17,6cm x 25,01cm) Umschlag #10 (10,48 cm x 24,13 cm) Umschlag DL (11,01 cm x 22,01 cm) Tabloid (27,94 cm x 43,17 cm) AЗ (29,7 cm x 42,01 cm) Tabloid Übergröße (30,48 cm x 45,71 cm) ROC 16K (19,68 cm x 27,3 cm) Umschlag Choukei 3 (11,99 cm x 23,49 cm) Super B/A3 (33,02 cm x 48,25 cm) Sie können die Seitengröße auch individuell festlegen, wählen Sie dazu die Option Benutzerdefinierte Seitengröße aus der Liste aus. Das Fenster Seitengröße öffnet sich und Sie können die gewünschte Voreinstellung auswählen (US Letter, US Legal, A4, A5, B5, Umschlag #10, Umschlag DL, Tabloid, A3, Tabloid Übergröße, ROC 16K, Umschlag Choukei 3, Super B/A3, A0, A1, A2, A6) oder benutzerdefinierte Werte für Breite und Höhe festlegen. Geben Sie Ihre gewünschten Werte in die Eingabefelder ein oder passen Sie die vorhandenen Werte über die Pfeile an. Wenn Sie fertig sind, klicken Sie auf OK, um die Änderungen anzuwenden. Seitenränder Ändern Sie die Standardränder, also den Abstand zwischen den linken, rechten, oberen und unteren Seitenkanten und dem Absatztext, klicken Sie dazu auf das Symbol Ränder und wählen Sie eine der verfügbaren Voreinstellungen aus: Normal, US Normal, Schmal, Mittel, Breit. Sie können auch die Option Benutzerdefinierte Seitenränder verwenden, um Ihre eigenen Werte im geöffneten Fenster Ränder einzugeben. Geben Sie Ihre gewünschten Werte für die Oberen, Unteren, Linken und Rechten Seitenränder in die Eingabefelder ein oder passen Sie die vorhandenen Werte über die Pfeile an. Wenn Sie fertig sind, klicken Sie auf OK. Die benutzerdefinierten Ränder werden auf das aktuelle Dokument angewendet. In der Liste Ränder wird die Option letzte benutzerdefinierte Einstellung mit den entsprechenden Parametern angezeigt, so dass Sie diese auf alle gewünschten anderen Dokumente anwenden können. Sie können die Seitenränder auch manuell ändern, indem Sie die Ränder zwischen den grauen und weißen Bereichen der Lineale verschieben (die grauen Bereiche der Lineale weisen auf Seitenränder hin): Spalten Sie können Ihren Text in zwei oder mehr Spalten aufteilen, klicken Sie dazu auf das Symbol Spalten und wählen Sie die gewünschte Spaltenzahl aus der Liste aus. Folgende Optionen stehen zur Verfügung: Zwei - Zwei Spalten mit der gleichen Breite hinzufügen. Drei - Drei Spalten mit der gleichen Breite hinzufügen. Links - zwei Spalten hinzufügen: eine schmale auf der linken Seite und eine breite auf der rechten. Rechts - zwei Spalten hinzufügen: eine schmale auf der rechten Seite und eine breite auf der linken. Wenn Sie die Spalteneinstellungen anpassen wollen, wählen Sie die Option Benutzerdefinierte Spalten aus der Liste aus. Das Fenster Spalten öffnet sich und Sie können die gewünschte Spaltenanzahl und den Abstand zwischen den Spalten festlegen (es ist möglich bis zu 12 Spalten einzufügen). Geben Sie Ihre gewünschten Werte in die Eingabefelder ein oder passen Sie die vorhandenen Werte über die Pfeile an. Aktivieren Sie das Kontrollkästchen Spaltentrennung, um eine vertikale Linie zwischen den Spalten einzufügen. Wenn Sie fertig sind, klicken Sie auf OK, um die Änderungen anzuwenden. Wenn Sie genau festlegen wollen, wo eine neue Spalte beginnt, positionieren Sie den Cursor vor dem Text, den Sie in eine neue Spalte verschieben wollen, klicken Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf das Symbol Umbrüche und wählen Sie die Option Spaltenumbruch einfügen. Der Text wird in die nächste Spalte verschoben. Spaltenumbrüche werden in Ihrem Dokument durch eine gepunktete Linie angezeigt: . Wenn die eingefügten Spaltenumbrüche nicht angezeigt werden, klicken Sie in der Registerkarte Start auf das Symbol. Um einen Spaltenumbruch zu entfernen, wählen Sie diesen mit der Maus aus und drücken Sie die Taste ENTF. Um die Spaltenbreite und den Abstand manuell zu ändern, können Sie das horizontale Lineal verwenden. Um Spalten zu entfernen und zu einem normalen einspaltigen Layout zurückzukehren, klicken Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf das Symbol Spalten und wählen Sie die Option Eine aus der angezeigten Liste aus." + "body": "Um das Seitenlayout zu ändern, d. H. Seitenausrichtung und Seitengröße festzulegen, die Ränder anzupassen und Spalten einzufügen, verwenden Sie die entsprechenden Symbole auf der Registerkarte Layout der oberen Symbolleiste. Hinweis: alle festgelegten Parameter werden auf das gesamte Dokument angewendet. Wie Sie für einzelnen Teile Ihres Dokuments unterschiedliche Seitenränder, Ausrichtungen, Größen oder Spaltenanzahlen festlegen, lesen Sie bitte auf dieser Seite nach. Seitenausrichtung Die aktuelle Seitenausrichtung ändern Sie mit einem Klick auf das Symbol Seitenausrichtung. Die Standardeinstellung ist Hochformat. Diese kann auf das Querformat umgewechselt werden. Seitengröße Das A4-Standardformat ändern Sie, indem Sie das Symbol Größe anklicken und das gewünschte Format aus der Liste auswählen. Die verfügbaren Formate sind: US Letter (21,59 cm x 27,94 cm) US Legal (21,59 cm x 35,56 cm) A4 (21 cm x 29,7 cm) A5 (14,81cm x 20,99cm) B5 (17,6cm x 25,01cm) Umschlag #10 (10,48 cm x 24,13 cm) Umschlag DL (11,01 cm x 22,01 cm) Tabloid (27,94 cm x 43,17 cm) AЗ (29,7 cm x 42,01 cm) Tabloid Übergröße (30,48 cm x 45,71 cm) ROC 16K (19,68 cm x 27,3 cm) Umschlag Choukei 3 (11,99 cm x 23,49 cm) Super B/A3 (33,02 cm x 48,25 cm) Sie können die Seitengröße auch individuell festlegen, in dem Sie die Option Benutzerdefinierte Seitengröße aus der Liste auswählen. Das Fenster Seitengröße öffnet sich und Sie können die gewünschte Voreinstellung auswählen (US Letter, US Legal, A4, A5, B5, Umschlag #10, Umschlag DL, Tabloid, A3, Tabloid Übergröße, ROC 16K, Umschlag Choukei 3, Super B/A3, A0, A1, A2, A6) oder benutzerdefinierte Werte für Breite und Höhe festlegen. Geben Sie Ihre gewünschten Werte in die Eingabefelder ein oder passen Sie die vorhandenen Werte über die Pfeile an. Wenn Sie fertig sind, klicken Sie auf OK, um die Änderungen anzuwenden. Seitenränder Ändern Sie die Standardränder, d.H. den Abstand zwischen den linken, rechten, oberen und unteren Seitenkanten und dem Absatztext, in dem Sie auf das Symbol Ränder klicken und Sie eine der verfügbaren Voreinstellungen auswählen: Normal, US Normal, Schmal, Mittel, Breit. Sie können auch die Option Benutzerdefinierte Seitenränder verwenden, um Ihre eigenen Werte im geöffneten Fenster Ränder einzugeben. Geben Sie Ihre gewünschten Werte für die Oberen, Unteren, Linken und Rechten Seitenränder in die Eingabefelder ein oder passen Sie die vorhandenen Werte über die Pfeile an. Wenn Sie fertig sind, klicken Sie auf OK. Die benutzerdefinierten Ränder werden auf das aktuelle Dokument angewendet. In der Liste Ränder wird die Option letzte benutzerdefinierte Einstellung mit den entsprechenden Parametern angezeigt, so dass Sie diese auf alle gewünschten anderen Dokumente anwenden können. Gutterposition wird benutzt um zusätzlichen Raum auf der linken oder oberen Seite des Dokumentes zu erstellen. Die Gutteroption kann sehr hilfreich sein um beim Buchbinden zu vermeiden das der Text überlegt wird. Im Fenster fuer Ränder geben Sie die notwendige Gutterposition in die Eingabefelder ein und wählen Sie aus wo diese plaziert werden sollen. Hinweis: Die Gutterpositionfunktion kann nicht benutzt werden, wenn die Option Spiegelränder angeschaltet ist. In der Auswahl ‘Meherer Seiten’, wählen Sie die Spiegelränderoption aus, um die gegenüberliegenden Seiten eines doppelseitigen Dokumentes anzustellen. Mit dieser Option ausgewählt, Linke und Rechte Ränder wechseln zu Inneren und Äusseren Rändern. In der Auswahl ‘Orientierung’ wählen Sie zwischen Hoch- oder Querformat aus. Alle angewendeten Änderungen werden in dem Vorschaufenster angezeigt. Wenn Sie fertig sind, selektieren Sie OK. Die Benutzerdefinierten Ränder werden auf das aktuelle Dokument angewendet die ‘letzte Spezial’-Option mit den erstellten Parametern wird in der Ränderliste angezeigt, so das diese auch für andere Dokumente verwendet werden kann. Sie können die Seitenränder auch manuell ändern, indem Sie die Ränder zwischen den grauen und weißen Bereichen der Lineale verschieben (die grauen Bereiche der Lineale weisen auf Seitenränder hin): Spalten Sie können Ihren Text in zwei oder mehr Spalten aufteilen, klicken Sie dazu auf das Symbol Spalten und wählen Sie die gewünschte Spaltenzahl aus der Liste aus. Folgende Optionen stehen zur Verfügung: Zwei - Zwei Spalten mit der gleichen Breite hinzufügen. Drei - Drei Spalten mit der gleichen Breite hinzufügen. Links - zwei Spalten hinzufügen: eine schmale auf der linken Seite und eine breite auf der rechten. Rechts - zwei Spalten hinzufügen: eine schmale auf der rechten Seite und eine breite auf der linken. Wenn Sie die Spalteneinstellungen anpassen wollen, wählen Sie die Option Benutzerdefinierte Spalten aus der Liste aus. Das Fenster Spalten öffnet sich und Sie können die gewünschte Spaltenanzahl und den Abstand zwischen den Spalten festlegen (es ist möglich bis zu 12 Spalten einzufügen). Geben Sie Ihre gewünschten Werte in die Eingabefelder ein oder passen Sie die vorhandenen Werte über die Pfeile an. Aktivieren Sie das Kontrollkästchen Spaltentrennung, um eine vertikale Linie zwischen den Spalten einzufügen. Wenn Sie fertig sind, klicken Sie auf OK, um die Änderungen anzuwenden. Wenn Sie genau festlegen wollen, wo eine neue Spalte beginnt, positionieren Sie den Zeiger vor dem Text, den Sie in eine neue Spalte verschieben wollen, klicken Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf das Symbol Umbrüche und wählen Sie die Option Spaltenumbruch einfügen. Der Text wird in die nächste Spalte verschoben. Spaltenumbrüche werden in Ihrem Dokument durch eine gepunktete Linie angezeigt: . Wenn die eingefügten Spaltenumbrüche nicht angezeigt werden, klicken Sie in der Registerkarte Start auf das Symbol. Um einen Spaltenumbruch zu entfernen, wählen Sie diesen mit der Maus aus und drücken Sie die Taste ENTF. Um die Spaltenbreite und den Abstand manuell zu ändern, können Sie das horizontale Lineal verwenden. Um Spalten zu entfernen und zu einem normalen einspaltigen Layout zurückzukehren, klicken Sie in der oberen Symbolleiste auf das Symbol Spalten und wählen Sie die Option Eine aus der angezeigten Liste aus." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/SetTabStops.htm", @@ -263,11 +273,11 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/UseMailMerge.htm", "title": "Seriendruck verwenden", - "body": "Hinweis: Diese Option ist nur in der bezahlten Version verfügbar. Mit der Funktion Seriendruck ist es möglich eine Reihe von Dokumenten zu erstellen, die einen gemeinsamen Inhalt aus einem Textdokument sowie einige individuelle Komponenten (Variablen, wie Namen, Begrüßungen usw.) aus einer Tabelle (z. B. eine Kundenliste) kombinieren. Das kann sehr nützlich sein, um eine Vielzahl von personalisierten Briefen zu erstellen und an Empfänger zu senden. Die Funktion Seriendruck verwenden. Erstellen Sie ein Datenquelle und laden Sie diese in das Hauptdokument. Bei einer für den Seriendruck verwendeten Datenquelle muss es sich um eine .xlsx-Tabelle handeln, die in Ihrem Portal gespeichert ist. Öffnen Sie eine vorhandene Tabelle oder erstellen Sie eine neue und stellen Sie sicher, dass diese die folgenden Anforderungen erfüllt:Die Tabelle muss eine Kopfzeile mit Spaltentiteln enthalten, da Werte in der ersten Zelle jeder Spalte die Felder für die Zusammenführung bestimmen (Variablen, die Sie in den Text einfügen können). Jede Spalte sollte eine Reihe von tatsächlichen Werten für eine Variable enthalten. Jede Zeile in der Tabelle sollte einem separaten Datensatz entsprechen (einem Satz von Werten, der zu einem bestimmten Empfänger gehört). Während der Zusammenführung wird für jeden Datensatz eine Kopie des Hauptdokuments erstellt und jedes in den Haupttext eingefügte Zusammenführungsfeld wird durch einen tatsächlichen Wert aus der entsprechenden Spalte ersetzt. Wenn Sie Ergebnisse per E-Mail senden möchten, muss die Tabelle auch eine Spalte mit den E-Mail-Adressen der Empfänger enthalten. Öffnen Sie ein vorhandenes Dokument oder erstellen Sie ein neues. Dieses Dokument muss den Haupttext enthalten, der für jede Version des Seriendruckdokuments identisch ist. Klicken Sie auf der oberen Symbolleiste, unter der Registerkarte Start auf das Symbol Seriendruck . Das Fenster Datenquelle auswählen wird geöffnet. Es wird eine Liste all Ihrer .xlsx-Tabellen angezeigt, die im Abschnitt Meine Dokumente gespeichert sind. Um zwischen anderen Modulabschnitten zu wechseln, verwenden Sie das Menü im linken Teil des Fensters. Wählen Sie die gewünschte Datei aus und klicken Sie auf OK. Sobald die Datenquelle geladen ist, wird die Registerkarte Einstellungen für das Zusammenführen in der rechten Seitenleiste angezeigt. Empfängerliste verifizieren oder ändern Klicken Sie in der rechten Seitenleiste auf die Schaltfläche Empfängerliste bearbeiten, um das Fenster Empfänger Seriendruck zu öffnen, in dem der Inhalt der ausgewählten Datenquelle angezeigt wird. Hier können Sie bei Bedarf neue Informationen hinzufügen bzw. vorhandene Daten bearbeiten oder löschen. Um das Arbeiten mit Daten zu vereinfachen, können Sie die Symbole oben im Fenster verwenden: und - zum Kopieren und Einfügen der kopierten Daten. und - um Aktionen rückgängig zu machen und zu wiederholen. und - um Ihre Daten in einem Zellenbereich in aufsteigender oder absteigender Reihenfolge zu sortieren. - um den Filter für den zuvor ausgewählten Zellenbereich zu aktivieren oder den aktuellen Filter zu entfernen. - um alle angewendeten Filterparameter zu löschen.Hinweis: Weitere Informationen zur Verwendung des Filters finden Sie im Abschnitt Sortieren und Filtern von Daten im Hilfemenü des Tabelleneditors. - um nach einem bestimmten Wert zu suchen und ihn gegebenenfalls durch einen anderen zu ersetzen.Hinweis: Weitere Informationen zur Verwendung des Werkzeugs Suchen und Ersetzen finden Sie im Abschnitt Suchen und Ersetzen von Funktionen im Hilfemenü des Tabelleneditors. Wenn Sie alle notwendigen Änderungen durchgeführt haben, klicken Sie auf Speichern & Schließen. Um die Änderungen zu verwerfen, klicken Sie auf Schließen. Einfügen von Seriendruckfeldern und überprüfen der Ergebnisse Positionieren Sie den Mauszeiger im Text des Hauptdokuments an der Stelle an der Sie ein Seriendruckfeld einfügen möchten, klicken Sie in der rechten Seitenleiste auf die Schaltfläche Seriendruckfeld einfügen und wählen Sie das erforderliche Feld aus der Liste aus Die verfügbaren Felder entsprechen den Daten in der ersten Zelle jeder Spalte der ausgewählten Datenquelle. Fügen Sie alle benötigten Felder an beliebiger Stelle im Dokument ein. Aktivieren Sie in der rechten Seitenleiste den Schalter Seriendruckfelder hervorheben, um die eingefügten Felder im Text deutlicher zu kennzeichnen. Aktivieren Sie in der rechten Seitenleiste den Schalter Ergebnisvorschau, um den Dokumenttext mit den aus der Datenquelle eingesetzten tatsächlichen Werten anzuzeigen. Verwenden Sie die Pfeiltasten, um für jeden Datensatz eine Vorschau des zusammengeführten Dokuments anzuzeigen. Um ein eingefügtes Feld zu löschen, deaktivieren sie den Modus Ergebnisvorschau, wählen Sie das entsprechende Feld mit der Maus aus und drücken Sie die Taste Entfernen auf der Tastatur. Um ein eingefügtes Feld zu ersetzen, deaktivieren sie den Modus Ergebnisvorschau, wählen Sie das entsprechende Feld mit der Maus aus, klicken Sie in der rechten Seitenleiste auf die Schaltfläche Seriendruckfeld einfügen und wählen Sie ein neues Feld aus der Liste aus. Parameter für den Seriendruck festlegen Wählen Sie den Zusammenführungstyp aus. Sie können den Massenversand beginnen oder das Ergebnis als Datei im PDF- oder Docx-Format speichern und es später drucken oder bearbeiten. Wählen Sie die gewünschte Option aus der Liste Zusammenführen als aus: PDF - um ein einzelnes Dokument im PDF-Format zu erstellen, das alle zusammengeführten Kopien enthält, damit Sie diese später drucken können DOCX - um ein einzelnes Dokument im DOCX-Format zu erstellen, das alle zusammengeführten Kopien enthält, damit Sie diese später bearbeiten können E-Mail - um die Ergebnisse als E-Mail an die Empfänger zu sendenNote: Die E-Mail-Adressen der Empfänger müssen in der geladenen Datenquelle angegeben werden und Sie müssen mindestens ein E-Mail-Konto im Mail-Modul in Ihrem Portal hinterlegt haben. Wählen Sie die Datensätze aus, auf die Sie die Zusammenführung anwenden möchten: Alle Datensätze - (diese Option ist standardmäßig ausgewählt) - um zusammengeführte Dokumente für alle Datensätze aus der geladenen Datenquelle zu erstellen Aktueller Datensatz - zum Erstellen eines zusammengeführten Dokuments für den aktuell angezeigten Datensatz Von... Bis - um ein zusammengeführtes Dokument für eine Reihe von Datensätzen zu erstellen (in diesem Fall müssen Sie zwei Werte angeben: die Werte für den ersten und den letzten Datensatz im gewünschten Bereich)Note: Es können maximal 100 Empfänger angegeben werden. Wenn Sie mehr als 100 Empfänger in Ihrer Datenquelle haben, führen Sie den Seriendruck schrittweise aus: Geben Sie die Werte von 1 bis 100 ein, warten Sie, bis der Serienbriefprozess abgeschlossen ist, und wiederholen Sie den Vorgang mit den Werten von 101 bis N. Serienbrief abschließen Wenn Sie sich entschieden haben, die Ergebnisse der Zusammenführung als Datei zu speichern, klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche Herunterladen als, um die Datei an einem beliebigen Ort auf Ihrem PC zu speichern. Sie finden die Datei in Ihrem Standardordner für Downloads. Klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche Speichern, um die Datei in Ihrem Portal zu speichern. Im Fenster Speichern unter können Sie den Dateinamen ändern und den Ort angeben, an dem Sie die Datei speichern möchten. Sie können auch das Kontrollkästchen Zusammengeführtes Dokument in neuem Tab öffnen aktivieren, um das Ergebnis zu überprüfen, sobald der Serienbriefprozess abgeschlossen ist. Klicken Sie zum Schluss im Fenster Speichern unter auf Speichern. Wenn Sie die Option E-Mail ausgewählt haben, erscheint in der rechten Seitenleiste die Schaltfläche Teilen. Wenn Sie auf die Schaltfläche klicken, öffnet sich das Fenster An E-Mail senden: Wenn Sie mehrere Konten mit Ihrem Mail-Modul verbunden haben, wählen Sie in der Liste Von das E-Mail-Konto aus, das Sie zum Senden der E-Mails verwenden möchten. Wählen Sie in der Liste An das Seriendruckfeld aus, das den E-Mail-Adressen der Empfänger entspricht, falls es nicht automatisch ausgewählt wurde. Geben Sie den Betreff Ihrer Nachricht in die Betreffzeile ein. Wählen sie das Mailformat aus der Liste aus: HTML, als DOCX anhängen oder als PDF anhängen. Wenn eine der beiden letzteren Optionen ausgewählt ist, müssen Sie auch den Dateinamen für Anhänge angeben und die Nachricht eingeben (der Text Ihres Briefes, der an die Empfänger gesendet wird). Klicken Sie auf Senden. Sobald das Mailing abgeschlossen ist, erhalten Sie an die im Feld Von angegebene E-Mail-Adresse eine Benachrichtigung." + "body": "Hinweis: diese Option ist nur in der Online-Version verfügbar. Mit der Funktion Seriendruck ist es möglich eine Reihe von Dokumenten zu erstellen, die einen gemeinsamen Inhalt aus einem Textdokument sowie einige individuelle Komponenten (Variablen, wie Namen, Begrüßungen usw.) aus einer Tabelle (z. B. eine Kundenliste) kombinieren. Das kann sehr nützlich sein, um eine Vielzahl von personalisierten Briefen zu erstellen und an Empfänger zu senden. Die Funktion Seriendruck verwenden. Erstellen Sie ein Datenquelle und laden Sie diese in das Hauptdokument. Bei einer für den Seriendruck verwendeten Datenquelle muss es sich um eine .xlsx-Tabelle handeln, die in Ihrem Portal gespeichert ist. Öffnen Sie eine vorhandene Tabelle oder erstellen Sie eine neue und stellen Sie sicher, dass diese die folgenden Anforderungen erfüllt:Die Tabelle muss eine Kopfzeile mit Spaltentiteln enthalten, da Werte in der ersten Zelle jeder Spalte die Felder für die Zusammenführung bestimmen (Variablen, die Sie in den Text einfügen können). Jede Spalte sollte eine Reihe von tatsächlichen Werten für eine Variable enthalten. Jede Zeile in der Tabelle sollte einem separaten Datensatz entsprechen (einem Satz von Werten, der zu einem bestimmten Empfänger gehört). Während der Zusammenführung wird für jeden Datensatz eine Kopie des Hauptdokuments erstellt und jedes in den Haupttext eingefügte Zusammenführungsfeld wird durch einen tatsächlichen Wert aus der entsprechenden Spalte ersetzt. Wenn Sie Ergebnisse per E-Mail senden möchten, muss die Tabelle auch eine Spalte mit den E-Mail-Adressen der Empfänger enthalten. Öffnen Sie ein vorhandenes Dokument oder erstellen Sie ein neues. Dieses Dokument muss den Haupttext enthalten, der für jede Version des Seriendruckdokuments identisch ist. Klicken Sie auf das Symbol Seriendruck auf der oberen Symbolleiste, in der Registerkarte Start. Das Fenster Datenquelle auswählen wird geöffnet. Es wird eine Liste all Ihrer .xlsx-Tabellen angezeigt, die im Abschnitt Meine Dokumente gespeichert sind. Um zwischen anderen Modulabschnitten zu wechseln, verwenden Sie das Menü im linken Teil des Fensters. Wählen Sie die gewünschte Datei aus und klicken Sie auf OK. Sobald die Datenquelle geladen ist, wird die Registerkarte Einstellungen für das Zusammenführen in der rechten Seitenleiste angezeigt. Empfängerliste verifizieren oder ändern Klicken Sie in der rechten Seitenleiste auf die Schaltfläche Empfängerliste bearbeiten, um das Fenster Empfänger Seriendruck zu öffnen, in dem der Inhalt der ausgewählten Datenquelle angezeigt wird. Hier können Sie bei Bedarf neue Informationen hinzufügen bzw. vorhandene Daten bearbeiten oder löschen. Um das Arbeiten mit Daten zu vereinfachen, können Sie die Symbole oben im Fenster verwenden: und - zum Kopieren und Einfügen der kopierten Daten. und - um Aktionen rückgängig zu machen und zu wiederholen. und - um Ihre Daten in einem Zellenbereich in aufsteigender oder absteigender Reihenfolge zu sortieren. - um den Filter für den zuvor ausgewählten Zellenbereich zu aktivieren oder den aktuellen Filter zu entfernen. - um alle angewendeten Filterparameter zu löschen.Hinweis: Weitere Informationen zur Verwendung des Filters finden Sie im Abschnitt Sortieren und Filtern von Daten im Hilfemenü des Tabelleneditors. - um nach einem bestimmten Wert zu suchen und ihn gegebenenfalls durch einen anderen zu ersetzen.Hinweis: Weitere Informationen zur Verwendung des Werkzeugs Suchen und Ersetzen finden Sie im Abschnitt Suchen und Ersetzen von Funktionen im Hilfemenü des Tabelleneditors. Wenn Sie alle notwendigen Änderungen durchgeführt haben, klicken Sie auf Speichern & Schließen. Um die Änderungen zu verwerfen, klicken Sie auf Schließen. Einfügen von Seriendruckfeldern und überprüfen der Ergebnisse Positionieren Sie den Mauszeiger im Text des Hauptdokuments an der Stelle an der Sie ein Seriendruckfeld einfügen möchten, klicken Sie in der rechten Seitenleiste auf die Schaltfläche Seriendruckfeld einfügen und wählen Sie das erforderliche Feld aus der Liste aus Die verfügbaren Felder entsprechen den Daten in der ersten Zelle jeder Spalte der ausgewählten Datenquelle. Fügen Sie alle benötigten Felder an beliebiger Stelle im Dokument ein. Aktivieren Sie in der rechten Seitenleiste den Schalter Seriendruckfelder hervorheben, um die eingefügten Felder im Text deutlicher zu kennzeichnen. Aktivieren Sie in der rechten Seitenleiste den Schalter Ergebnisvorschau, um den Dokumenttext mit den aus der Datenquelle eingesetzten tatsächlichen Werten anzuzeigen. Verwenden Sie die Pfeiltasten, um für jeden Datensatz eine Vorschau des zusammengeführten Dokuments anzuzeigen. Um ein eingefügtes Feld zu löschen, deaktivieren sie den Modus Ergebnisvorschau, wählen Sie das entsprechende Feld mit der Maus aus und drücken Sie die Taste Entf auf der Tastatur. Um ein eingefügtes Feld zu ersetzen, deaktivieren sie den Modus Ergebnisvorschau, wählen Sie das entsprechende Feld mit der Maus aus, klicken Sie in der rechten Seitenleiste auf die Schaltfläche Seriendruckfeld einfügen und wählen Sie ein neues Feld aus der Liste aus. Parameter für den Seriendruck festlegen Wählen Sie den Zusammenführungstyp aus. Sie können den Massenversand beginnen oder das Ergebnis als Datei im PDF- oder Docx-Format speichern und es später drucken oder bearbeiten. Wählen Sie die gewünschte Option aus der Liste Zusammenführen als aus: PDF - um ein einzelnes Dokument im PDF-Format zu erstellen, das alle zusammengeführten Kopien enthält, damit Sie diese später drucken können DOCX - um ein einzelnes Dokument im DOCX-Format zu erstellen, das alle zusammengeführten Kopien enthält, damit Sie diese später bearbeiten können E-Mail - um die Ergebnisse als E-Mail an die Empfänger zu sendenHiweis: Die E-Mail-Adressen der Empfänger müssen in der geladenen Datenquelle angegeben werden und Sie müssen mindestens ein E-Mail-Konto im Mail-Modul in Ihrem Portal hinterlegt haben. Wählen Sie die Datensätze aus, auf die Sie die Zusammenführung anwenden möchten: Alle Datensätze - (diese Option ist standardmäßig ausgewählt) - um zusammengeführte Dokumente für alle Datensätze aus der geladenen Datenquelle zu erstellen Aktueller Datensatz - zum Erstellen eines zusammengeführten Dokuments für den aktuell angezeigten Datensatz Von... Bis - um ein zusammengeführtes Dokument für eine Reihe von Datensätzen zu erstellen (in diesem Fall müssen Sie zwei Werte angeben: die Werte für den ersten und den letzten Datensatz im gewünschten Bereich)Hinweis: Es können maximal 100 Empfänger angegeben werden. Wenn Sie mehr als 100 Empfänger in Ihrer Datenquelle haben, führen Sie den Seriendruck schrittweise aus: Geben Sie die Werte von 1 bis 100 ein, warten Sie, bis der Serienbriefprozess abgeschlossen ist, und wiederholen Sie den Vorgang mit den Werten von 101 bis N. Serienbrief abschließen Wenn Sie sich entschieden haben, die Ergebnisse der Zusammenführung als Datei zu speichern, klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche Herunterladen als, um die Datei an einem beliebigen Ort auf Ihrem PC zu speichern. Sie finden die Datei in Ihrem Standardordner für Downloads. Klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche Speichern, um die Datei in Ihrem Portal zu speichern. Im Fenster Speichern unter können Sie den Dateinamen ändern und den Ort angeben, an dem Sie die Datei speichern möchten. Sie können auch das Kontrollkästchen Zusammengeführtes Dokument in neuem Tab öffnen aktivieren, um das Ergebnis zu überprüfen, sobald der Serienbriefprozess abgeschlossen ist. Klicken Sie zum Schluss im Fenster Speichern unter auf Speichern. Wenn Sie die Option E-Mail ausgewählt haben, erscheint in der rechten Seitenleiste die Schaltfläche Teilen. Wenn Sie auf die Schaltfläche klicken, öffnet sich das Fenster An E-Mail senden: Wenn Sie mehrere Konten mit Ihrem Mail-Modul verbunden haben, wählen Sie in der Liste Von das E-Mail-Konto aus, das Sie zum Senden der E-Mails verwenden möchten. Wählen Sie in der Liste An das Seriendruckfeld aus, das den E-Mail-Adressen der Empfänger entspricht, falls es nicht automatisch ausgewählt wurde. Geben Sie den Betreff Ihrer Nachricht in die Betreffzeile ein. Wählen sie das Mailformat aus der Liste aus: HTML, als DOCX anhängen oder als PDF anhängen. Wenn eine der beiden letzteren Optionen ausgewählt ist, müssen Sie auch den Dateinamen für Anhänge angeben und die Nachricht eingeben (der Text Ihres Briefes, der an die Empfänger gesendet wird). Klicken Sie auf Senden. Sobald das Mailing abgeschlossen ist, erhalten Sie an die im Feld Von angegebene E-Mail-Adresse eine Benachrichtigung." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/ViewDocInfo.htm", "title": "Dokumenteigenschaften anzeigen", - "body": "Um detaillierte Informationen über das aktuelle Dokument einzusehen, wechseln Sie in die Registerkarte Datei und wählen Sie die Option Dokumenteigenschaften.... Allgemeine Eigenschaften Die allgemeinen Dokumenteigenschaften beinhalten den Titel, Autor, Speicherort, das Erstelldatum und die folgenden Statistiken: Anzahl der Seiten, Absätze, Wörter, Zeichen, Buchstaben (mit Leerzeichen). Hinweis: Sie können den Namen des Dokuments direkt über die Oberfläche des Editors ändern. Klicken Sie dazu in der oberen Menüleiste auf die Registerkarte Datei und wählen Sie die Option Umbenennen..., geben Sie den neuen Dateinamen an und klicken Sie auf OK. Zugriffsrechte Hinweis: Diese Option steht im schreibgeschützten Modus nicht zur Verfügung. Um einzusehen, wer das Recht hat, das Dokument anzuzeigen oder zu bearbeiten, wählen Sie die Option Zugriffsrechte... in der linken Seitenleiste. Sie können die aktuell ausgewählten Zugriffsrechte auch ändern, klicken Sie dazu im Abschnitt Personen mit Berechtigungen auf die Schaltfläche Zugriffsrechte ändern. Versionsverlauf Hinweis: Diese Option steht für kostenlose Konten und im schreibgeschützten Modus nicht zur Verfügung. Um alle Änderungen an diesem Dokument anzuzeigen, wählen Sie die Option Versionsverlauf in der linken Seitenleiste. Sie können den Versionsverlauf auch über das Symbol Versionsverlauf in der Registerkarte Zusammenarbeit öffnen. Sie sehen eine Liste mit allen Dokumentversionen (Hauptänderungen) und Revisionen (geringfügige Änderungen), unter Angabe aller jeweiligen Autoren sowie Erstellungsdatum und -zeit. Für Dokumentversionen wird auch die Versionsnummer angegeben (z.B. Ver. 2). Für eine detaillierte Anzeige der jeweiligen Änderungen in jeder einzelnen Version/Revision, können Sie die gewünschte Version anzeigen, indem Sie in der linken Seitenleiste darauf klicken. Die vom Autor der Version/Revision vorgenommenen Änderungen sind mit der Farbe markiert, die neben dem Autorennamen in der linken Seitenleiste angezeigt wird. Über den unterhalb der gewählten Version/Revision angezeigten Link Wiederherstellen, gelangen Sie in die jeweilige Version. Um zur aktuellen Version des Dokuments zurückzukehren, klicken Sie oben in der Liste mit Versionen auf Verlauf schließen. Um das Fenster Datei zu schließen und zur Dokumentbearbeitung zurückzukehren, klicken sie auf Menü schließen." + "body": "Um detaillierte Informationen über das aktuelle Dokument einzusehen, wechseln Sie in die Registerkarte Datei und wählen Sie die Option Dokumenteigenschaften.... Allgemeine Eigenschaften Die Dokumenteigenschaften beinhalten den Titel, die Anwendung mit der das Dokument erstellt wurde und die folgenden Statistiken: Anzahl der Seiten, Absätze, Wörter, Zeichen, Zeichen (mit Leerzeichen). In der Online-Version werden zusätzlich die folgenden Informationen angezeigt: Autor, Ort, Erstellungsdatum. Hinweis: Sie können den Namen des Dokuments direkt über die Oberfläche des Editors ändern. Klicken Sie dazu in der oberen Menüleiste auf die Registerkarte Datei und wählen Sie die Option Umbenennen..., geben Sie den neuen Dateinamen an und klicken Sie auf OK. Zugriffsrechte In der Online-Version können Sie die Informationen zu Berechtigungen für die in der Cloud gespeicherten Dateien einsehen. Hinweis: Diese Option steht im schreibgeschützten Modus nicht zur Verfügung. Um einzusehen, wer das Recht hat, das Dokument anzuzeigen oder zu bearbeiten, wählen Sie die Option Zugriffsrechte... in der linken Seitenleiste. Sie können die aktuell ausgewählten Zugriffsrechte auch ändern, klicken Sie dazu im Abschnitt Personen mit Berechtigungen auf die Schaltfläche Zugriffsrechte ändern. Versionsverlauf In der Online-Version können Sie den Versionsverlauf für die in der Cloud gespeicherten Dateien einsehen. Hinweis: Diese Option steht im schreibgeschützten Modus nicht zur Verfügung. Um alle Änderungen an diesem Dokument anzuzeigen, wählen Sie die Option Versionsverlauf in der linken Seitenleiste. Sie können den Versionsverlauf auch über das Symbol Versionsverlauf in der Registerkarte Zusammenarbeit öffnen. Sie sehen eine Liste mit allen Dokumentversionen (Hauptänderungen) und Revisionen (geringfügige Änderungen), unter Angabe aller jeweiligen Autoren sowie Erstellungsdatum und -zeit. Für Dokumentversionen wird auch die Versionsnummer angegeben (z.B. Ver. 2). Für eine detaillierte Anzeige der jeweiligen Änderungen in jeder einzelnen Version/Revision, können Sie die gewünschte Version anzeigen, indem Sie in der linken Seitenleiste darauf klicken. Die vom Autor der Version/Revision vorgenommenen Änderungen sind mit der Farbe markiert, die neben dem Autorennamen in der linken Seitenleiste angezeigt wird. Über den unterhalb der gewählten Version/Revision angezeigten Link Wiederherstellen, gelangen Sie in die jeweilige Version. Um zur aktuellen Version des Dokuments zurückzukehren, klicken Sie oben in der Liste mit Versionen auf Verlauf schließen. Um das Fenster Datei zu schließen und zur Dokumentbearbeitung zurückzukehren, klicken sie auf Menü schließen." } ] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/Contents.json b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/Contents.json index fa06325cc..87cb63d90 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/Contents.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/Contents.json @@ -13,7 +13,8 @@ {"src": "UsageInstructions/SetPageParameters.htm", "name": "Set page parameters", "headername": "Page formatting"}, {"src": "UsageInstructions/NonprintingCharacters.htm", "name": "Show/hide nonprinting characters" }, {"src": "UsageInstructions/SectionBreaks.htm", "name": "Insert section breaks" }, - {"src": "UsageInstructions/InsertHeadersFooters.htm", "name": "Insert headers and footers"}, + { "src": "UsageInstructions/InsertHeadersFooters.htm", "name": "Insert headers and footers" }, + {"src": "UsageInstructions/InsertDateTime.htm", "name": "Insert date and time"}, {"src": "UsageInstructions/InsertPageNumbers.htm", "name": "Insert page numbers"}, { "src": "UsageInstructions/InsertFootnotes.htm", "name": "Insert footnotes" }, { "src": "UsageInstructions/InsertBookmarks.htm", "name": "Add bookmarks" }, @@ -46,7 +47,8 @@ {"src": "UsageInstructions/InsertContentControls.htm", "name": "Insert content controls" }, {"src": "UsageInstructions/CreateTableOfContents.htm", "name": "Create table of contents" }, {"src": "UsageInstructions/UseMailMerge.htm", "name": "Use mail merge", "headername": "Mail Merge"}, - {"src": "UsageInstructions/InsertEquation.htm", "name": "Insert equations", "headername": "Math equations" }, + { "src": "UsageInstructions/InsertEquation.htm", "name": "Insert equations", "headername": "Math equations" }, + {"src": "UsageInstructions/MathAutoCorrect.htm", "name": "Use Math AutoCorrect" }, {"src": "HelpfulHints/CollaborativeEditing.htm", "name": "Collaborative document editing", "headername": "Document co-editing"}, { "src": "HelpfulHints/Review.htm", "name": "Document Review" }, {"src": "HelpfulHints/Comparison.htm", "name": "Compare documents"}, diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/About.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/About.htm index 4eb3a18d1..f91959e39 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/About.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/About.htm @@ -13,13 +13,13 @@
                                                        -

                                                        About Document Editor

                                                        -

                                                        Document Editor is an online application that lets you look through +

                                                        About the Document Editor

                                                        +

                                                        The Document Editor is an online application that allows you to view through and edit documents directly in your browser.

                                                        -

                                                        Using Document Editor, you can perform various editing operations like in any desktop editor, +

                                                        Using the Document Editor, you can perform various editing operations like in any desktop editor, print the edited documents keeping all the formatting details or download them onto your computer hard disk drive - as DOCX, PDF, ODT, TXT, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, HTML files.

                                                        -

                                                        To view the current software version and licensor details in the online version, click the About icon icon at the left sidebar. To view the current software version and licensor details in the desktop version, select the About menu item at the left sidebar of the main program window.

                                                        + of your computer as DOCX, PDF, ODT, TXT, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, HTML files.

                                                        +

                                                        To view the current software version and licensor details in the online version, click the About icon icon on the left sidebar. To view the current software version and licensor details in the desktop version, select the About menu item on the left sidebar of the main program window.

                                                        \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm index 28f7267c1..5491f2729 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm @@ -13,22 +13,23 @@
                                                        -

                                                        Advanced Settings of Document Editor

                                                        -

                                                        Document Editor lets you change its advanced settings. To access them, open the File tab at the top toolbar and select the Advanced Settings... option. You can also click the View settings View settings icon icon on the right side of the editor header and select the Advanced settings option.

                                                        +

                                                        Advanced Settings of the Document Editor

                                                        +

                                                        The Document Editor allows you to change its advanced settings. To access them, open the File tab on the top toolbar and select the Advanced Settings... option. You can also click the View settings View settings icon icon on the right side of the editor header and select the Advanced settings option.

                                                        The advanced settings are:

                                                        • Commenting Display is used to turn on/off the live commenting option:
                                                            -
                                                          • Turn on display of the comments - if you disable this feature, the commented passages will be highlighted only if you click the Comments Comments icon icon at the left sidebar.
                                                          • -
                                                          • Turn on display of the resolved comments - this feature is disabled by default so that the resolved comments were hidden in the document text. You can view such comments only if you click the Comments Comments icon icon at the left sidebar. Enable this option if you want to display resolved comments in the document text.
                                                          • +
                                                          • Turn on display of the comments - if you disable this feature, the commented passages will be highlighted only if you click the Comments Comments icon icon on the left sidebar.
                                                          • +
                                                          • Turn on display of the resolved comments - this feature is disabled by default so that the resolved comments were hidden in the document text. You can view such comments only if you click the Comments Comments icon icon on the left sidebar. Enable this option if you want to display resolved comments in the document text.
                                                        • Spell Checking is used to turn on/off the spell checking option.
                                                        • +
                                                        • Proofing - used to automatically replace word or symbol typed in the Replace: box or chosen from the list by a new word or symbol displayed in the By: box.
                                                        • Alternate Input is used to turn on/off hieroglyphs.
                                                        • Alignment Guides is used to turn on/off alignment guides that appear when you move objects and allow you to position them on the page precisely.
                                                        • Compatibility is used to make the files compatible with older MS Word versions when saved as DOCX.
                                                        • Autosave is used in the online version to turn on/off automatic saving of changes you make while editing.
                                                        • -
                                                        • Autorecover - is used in the desktop version to turn on/off the option that allows to automatically recover documents in case of the unexpected program closing.
                                                        • +
                                                        • Autorecover - is used in the desktop version to turn on/off the option that allows automatically recovering documents in case the program closes unexpectedly.
                                                        • Co-editing Mode is used to select the display of the changes made during the co-editing:
                                                          • By default the Fast mode is selected, the users who take part in the document co-editing will see the changes in real time once they are made by other users.
                                                          • @@ -45,7 +46,7 @@
                                                          • Default Zoom Value is used to set the default zoom value selecting it in the list of available options from 50% to 200%. You can also choose the Fit to Page or Fit to Width option.
                                                          • - Font Hinting is used to select the type a font is displayed in Document Editor: + Font Hinting is used to select the type a font is displayed in the Document Editor:
                                                            • Choose As Windows if you like the way fonts are usually displayed on Windows, i.e. using Windows font hinting.
                                                            • Choose As OS X if you like the way fonts are usually displayed on a Mac, i.e. without any font hinting at all.
                                                            • @@ -53,7 +54,7 @@
                                                          • Default cache mode - used to select the cache mode for the font characters. It’s not recommended to switch it without any reason. It can be helpful in some cases only, for example, when an issue in the Google Chrome browser with the enabled hardware acceleration occurs. -

                                                            Document Editor has two cache modes:

                                                            +

                                                            The Document Editor has two cache modes:

                                                            1. In the first cache mode, each letter is cached as a separate picture.
                                                            2. In the second cache mode, a picture of a certain size is selected where letters are placed dynamically and a mechanism of allocating/removing memory in this picture is also implemented. If there is not enough memory, a second picture is created, etc.
                                                            3. @@ -65,6 +66,14 @@
                                                        • Unit of Measurement is used to specify what units are used on the rulers and in properties windows for measuring elements parameters such as width, height, spacing, margins etc. You can select the Centimeter, Point, or Inch option.
                                                        • +
                                                        • Cut, copy and paste - used to show the Paste Options button when content is pasted. Check the box to enable this feature.
                                                        • +
                                                        • Macros Settings - used to set macros display with a notification. +
                                                            +
                                                          • Choose Disable all to disable all macros within the document;
                                                          • +
                                                          • Show notification to receive notifications about macros within the document;
                                                          • +
                                                          • Enable all to automatically run all macros within the document.
                                                          • +
                                                          +

                                                        To save the changes you made, click the Apply button.

                                                        diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/CollaborativeEditing.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/CollaborativeEditing.htm index ee9f71841..4229ad2fd 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/CollaborativeEditing.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/CollaborativeEditing.htm @@ -14,13 +14,13 @@

                                                        Collaborative Document Editing

                                                        -

                                                        Document Editor offers you the possibility to work at a document collaboratively with other users. This feature includes:

                                                        +

                                                        The Document Editor allows you to collaboratively work on a document with other users. This feature includes:

                                                          -
                                                        • simultaneous multi-user access to the edited document
                                                        • +
                                                        • simultaneous multi-user access to the document to be edited
                                                        • visual indication of passages that are being edited by other users
                                                        • -
                                                        • real-time changes display or synchronization of changes with one button click
                                                        • -
                                                        • chat to share ideas concerning particular document parts
                                                        • -
                                                        • comments containing the description of a task or problem that should be solved (it's also possible to work with comments in the offline mode, without connecting to the online version)
                                                        • +
                                                        • real-time display of changes or synchronization of changes with one button click
                                                        • +
                                                        • chat to share ideas concerning particular parts of the document
                                                        • +
                                                        • comments with the description of a task or problem that should be solved (it's also possible to work with comments in the offline mode, without connecting to the online version)

                                                        Connecting to the online version

                                                        @@ -28,34 +28,34 @@

                                                        Co-editing

                                                        -

                                                        Document Editor allows to select one of the two available co-editing modes:

                                                        +

                                                        The Document Editor allows you to select one of the two available co-editing modes:

                                                        • Fast is used by default and shows the changes made by other users in real time.
                                                        • -
                                                        • Strict is selected to hide other user changes until you click the Save Save icon icon to save your own changes and accept the changes made by others.
                                                        • +
                                                        • Strict is selected to hide changes made by other users until you click the Save Save icon icon to save your own changes and accept the changes made by co-authors.
                                                        -

                                                        The mode can be selected in the Advanced Settings. It's also possible to choose the necessary mode using the Co-editing Mode icon Co-editing Mode icon at the Collaboration tab of the top toolbar:

                                                        +

                                                        The mode can be selected in the Advanced Settings. It's also possible to choose the required mode using the Co-editing Mode icon Co-editing Mode icon on the Collaboration tab of the top toolbar:

                                                        Co-editing Mode menu

                                                        Note: when you co-edit a document in the Fast mode, the possibility to Redo the last undone operation is not available.

                                                        -

                                                        When a document is being edited by several users simultaneously in the Strict mode, the edited text passages are marked with dashed lines of different colors. By hovering the mouse cursor over one of the edited passages, the name of the user who is editing it at the moment is displayed. The Fast mode will show the actions and the names of the co-editors once they are editing the text.

                                                        -

                                                        The number of users who are working at the current document is specified on the right side of the editor header - Number of users icon. If you want to see who exactly are editing the file now, you can click this icon or open the Chat panel with the full list of the users.

                                                        +

                                                        When a document is being edited by several users simultaneously in the Strict mode, the edited text passages are marked with dashed lines of different colors. By hovering the mouse cursor over one of the edited passages, the name of the user who is editing it at the moment is displayed. The Fast mode will show the actions and the names of the co-editors when they are editing the text.

                                                        +

                                                        The number of users who are working on the current document is displayed on the right side of the editor header - Number of users icon. If you want to see who exactly is editing the file now, you can click this icon or open the Chat panel with the full list of the users.

                                                        When no users are viewing or editing the file, the icon in the editor header will look like Manage document access rights icon allowing you to manage the users who have access to the file right from the document: invite new users giving them permissions to edit, read, comment, fill forms or review the document, or deny some users access rights to the file. Click this icon to manage the access to the file; this can be done both when there are no other users who view or co-edit the document at the moment and when there are other users and the icon looks like Number of users icon. It's also possible to set access rights using the Sharing icon Sharing icon at the Collaboration tab of the top toolbar.

                                                        As soon as one of the users saves his/her changes by clicking the Save icon icon, the others will see a note within the status bar stating that they have updates. To save the changes you made, so that other users can view them, and get the updates saved by your co-editors, click the Save icon icon in the left upper corner of the top toolbar. The updates will be highlighted for you to check what exactly has been changed.

                                                        -

                                                        You can specify what changes you want to be highlighted during co-editing if you click the File tab at the top toolbar, select the Advanced Settings... option and choose between none, all and last real-time collaboration changes. Selecting View all changes, all the changes made during the current session will be highlighted. Selecting View last changes, only the changes made since you last time clicked the Save icon icon will be highlighted. Selecting View None changes, changes made during the current session will not be highlighted.

                                                        +

                                                        You can specify what changes you want to be highlighted during co-editing if you click the File tab on the top toolbar, select the Advanced Settings... option and choose between none, all and last real-time collaboration changes. Selecting View all changes, all the changes made during the current session will be highlighted. Selecting View last changes, only the changes made since you last time clicked the Save icon icon will be highlighted. Selecting View None changes, changes made during the current session will not be highlighted.

                                                        Chat

                                                        -

                                                        You can use this tool to coordinate the co-editing process on-the-fly, for example, to arrange with your collaborators about who is doing what, which paragraph you are going to edit now etc.

                                                        -

                                                        The chat messages are stored during one session only. To discuss the document content it is better to use comments which are stored until you decide to delete them.

                                                        +

                                                        You can use this tool to coordinate the co-editing process on-the-fly, for example, to distribute tasks and paragraphs to be edited by the collaborators, etc.

                                                        +

                                                        The chat messages are stored during one session only. To discuss the document content, it is better to use comments which are stored until they are deleted.

                                                        To access the chat and leave a message for other users,

                                                          -
                                                        1. click the Chat icon icon at the left sidebar, or
                                                          +
                                                        2. click the Chat icon icon on the left sidebar, or
                                                          switch to the Collaboration tab of the top toolbar and click the Chat icon Chat button,
                                                        3. enter your text into the corresponding field below,
                                                        4. press the Send button.

                                                        All the messages left by users will be displayed on the panel on the left. If there are new messages you haven't read yet, the chat icon will look like this - Chat icon.

                                                        -

                                                        To close the panel with chat messages, click the Chat icon icon at the left sidebar or the Chat icon Chat button at the top toolbar once again.

                                                        +

                                                        To close the panel with chat messages, click the Chat icon icon on the left sidebar or the Chat icon Chat button at the top toolbar once again.

                                                        Comments

                                                        It's possible to work with comments in the offline mode, without connecting to the online version.

                                                        @@ -64,37 +64,37 @@
                                                      • select a text passage where you think there is an error or problem,
                                                      • switch to the Insert or Collaboration tab of the top toolbar and click the Comment icon Comment button, or
                                                        - use the Comments icon icon at the left sidebar to open the Comments panel and click the Add Comment to Document link, or
                                                        + use the Comments icon icon on the left sidebar to open the Comments panel and click the Add Comment to Document link, or
                                                        right-click the selected text passage and select the Add Сomment option from the contextual menu,
                                                      • -
                                                      • enter the needed text,
                                                      • +
                                                      • enter the required text,
                                                      • click the Add Comment/Add button.
                              -

                              The comment will be seen on the Comments panel on the left. Any other user can answer to the added comment asking questions or reporting on the work he/she has done. For this purpose, click the Add Reply link situated under the comment, type in your reply text in the entry field and press the Reply button.

                              +

                              The comment will be seen on the Comments panel on the left. Any other user can answer the added comment asking questions or reporting on the work he/she has done. For this purpose, click the Add Reply link situated under the comment, type in your reply in the entry field and press the Reply button.

                              If you are using the Strict co-editing mode, new comments added by other users will become visible only after you click the Save icon icon in the left upper corner of the top toolbar.

                              The text passage you commented will be highlighted in the document. To view the comment, just click within the passage. If you need to disable this feature, click the File tab at the top toolbar, select the Advanced Settings... option and uncheck the Turn on display of the comments box. In this case the commented passages will be highlighted only if you click the Comments icon icon.

                              -

                              You can manage the added comments using the icons in the comment balloon or at the Comments panel on the left:

                              +

                              You can manage the added comments using the icons in the comment balloon or on the Comments panel on the left:

                              • edit the currently selected comment by clicking the Edit icon icon,
                              • delete the currently selected comment by clicking the Delete icon icon,
                              • -
                              • close the currently selected discussion by clicking the Resolve icon icon if the task or problem you stated in your comment was solved, after that the discussion you opened with your comment gets the resolved status. To open it again, click the Open again icon icon. If you want to hide resolved comments, click the File tab at the top toolbar, select the Advanced Settings... option, uncheck the Turn on display of the resolved comments box and click Apply. In this case the resolved comments will be highlighted only if you click the Comments icon icon.
                              • +
                              • close the currently selected discussion by clicking the Resolve icon icon if the task or problem you stated in your comment was solved, after that the discussion you opened with your comment gets the resolved status. To open it again, click the Open again icon icon. If you want to hide resolved comments, click the File tab on the top toolbar, select the Advanced Settings... option, uncheck the Turn on display of the resolved comments box and click Apply. In this case the resolved comments will be highlighted only if you click the Comments icon icon.

                              Adding mentions

                              -

                              When entering comments, you can use the mentions feature that allows to attract somebody's attention to the comment and send a notification to the mentioned user via email and Talk.

                              +

                              When entering comments, you can use the mentions feature that allows you to attract somebody's attention to the comment and send a notification to the mentioned user via email and Talk.

                              To add a mention enter the "+" or "@" sign anywhere in the comment text - a list of the portal users will open. To simplify the search process, you can start typing a name in the comment field - the user list will change as you type. Select the necessary person from the list. If the file has not yet been shared with the mentioned user, the Sharing Settings window will open. Read only access type is selected by default. Change it if necessary and click OK.

                              The mentioned user will receive an email notification that he/she has been mentioned in a comment. If the file has been shared, the user will also receive a corresponding notification.

                              To remove comments,

                                -
                              1. click the Remove comment icon Remove button at the Collaboration tab of the top toolbar,
                              2. +
                              3. click the Remove comment icon Remove button on the Collaboration tab of the top toolbar,
                              4. select the necessary option from the menu:
                                  -
                                • Remove Current Comments - to remove the currently selected comment. If some replies have beed added to the comment, all its replies will be removed as well.
                                • -
                                • Remove My Comments - to remove comments you added without removing comments added by other users. If some replies have beed added to your comment, all its replies will be removed as well.
                                • +
                                • Remove Current Comments - to remove the currently selected comment. If some replies have been added to the comment, all its replies will be removed as well.
                                • +
                                • Remove My Comments - to remove comments you added without removing comments added by other users. If some replies have been added to your comment, all its replies will be removed as well.
                                • Remove All Comments - to remove all the comments in the document that you and other users added.
                              -

                              To close the panel with comments, click the Comments icon icon at the left sidebar once again.

                              +

                              To close the panel with comments, click the Comments icon icon on the left sidebar once again.

                              \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Comparison.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Comparison.htm index 39dc6b608..857497b92 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Comparison.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Comparison.htm @@ -15,33 +15,33 @@

                              Compare documents

                              Note: this option is available in the paid online version only starting from Document Server v. 5.5.

                              -

                              If you need to compare and merge two documents, you can use the document Compare feature. It allows to display the differences between two documents and merge the documents by accepting the changes one by one or all at once.

                              +

                              If you need to compare and merge two documents, you can use the document Compare feature. It allows displaying the differences between two documents and merge the documents by accepting the changes one by one or all at once.

                              After comparing and merging two documents, the result will be stored on the portal as a new version of the original file.

                              If you do not need to merge documents which are being compared, you can reject all the changes so that the original document remains unchanged.

                              Choose a document for comparison

                              To compare two documents, open the original document that you need to compare and select the second document for comparison:

                                -
                              1. switch to the Collaboration tab at the top toolbar and press the Compare button Compare button,
                              2. +
                              3. switch to the Collaboration tab on the top toolbar and press the Compare button Compare button,
                              4. select one of the following options to load the document:
                                • the Document from File option will open the standard dialog window for file selection. Browse your computer hard disk drive for the necessary .docx file and click the Open button.
                                • the Document from URL option will open the window where you can enter a link to the file stored in a third-party web storage (for example, Nextcloud) if you have corresponding access rights to it. The link must be a direct link for downloading the file. When the link is specified, click the OK button. -

                                  Note: The direct link allows to download the file directly without opening it in a web browser. For example, to get a direct link in Nextcloud, find the necessary document in the file list, select the Details option from the file menu. Click the Copy direct link (only works for users who have access to this file/folder) icon to the right of the file name at the details panel. To find out how to get a direct link for downloading the file in a different third-party web storage, please refer to the corresponding third-party service documentation.

                                  +

                                  Note: The direct link allows downloading the file directly without opening it in a web browser. For example, to get a direct link in Nextcloud, find the necessary document in the file list, select the Details option from the file menu. Click the Copy direct link (only works for users who have access to this file/folder) icon on the right of the file name on the details panel. To find out how to get a direct link for downloading the file in a different third-party web storage, please refer to the corresponding third-party service documentation.

                                • -
                                • the Document from Storage option will open the Select Data Source window. It displays the list of all the .docx documents stored on your portal you have corresponding access rights to. To navigate between the Documents module sections use the menu in the left part of the window. Select the necessary .docx document and click the OK button.
                                • +
                                • the Document from Storage option will open the Select Data Source window. It displays the list of all the .docx documents stored on your portal you have corresponding access rights to. To navigate through the sections of the Documents module, use the menu on the left part of the window. Select the necessary .docx document and click the OK button.

                              When the second document for comparison is selected, the comparison process will start and the document will look as if it was opened in the Review mode. All the changes are highlighted with a color, and you can view the changes, navigate between them, accept or reject them one by one or all the changes at once. It's also possible to change the display mode and see how the document looks before comparison, in the process of comparison, or how it will look after comparison if you accept all changes.

                              Choose the changes display mode

                              -

                              Click the Display Mode button Display Mode button at the top toolbar and select one of the available modes from the list:

                              +

                              Click the Display Mode button Display Mode button on the top toolbar and select one of the available modes from the list:

                              • - Markup - this option is selected by default. It is used to display the document in the process of comparison. This mode allows both to view the changes and edit the document. + Markup - this option is selected by default. It is used to display the document in the process of comparison. This mode allows both viewing the changes and editing the document.

                                Compare documents - Markup

                              • @@ -55,24 +55,24 @@

                              Accept or reject changes

                              -

                              Use the To Previous Change button Previous and the To Next Change button Next buttons at the top toolbar to navigate among the changes.

                              -

                              To accept the currently selected change you can:

                              +

                              Use the To Previous Change button Previous and the To Next Change button Next buttons on the top toolbar to navigate through the changes.

                              +

                              To accept the currently selected change, you can:

                                -
                              • click the Accept button Accept button at the top toolbar, or
                              • +
                              • click the Accept button Accept button on the top toolbar, or
                              • click the downward arrow below the Accept button and select the Accept Current Change option (in this case, the change will be accepted and you will proceed to the next change), or
                              • -
                              • click the Accept Accept button button of the change notification.
                              • +
                              • click the Accept Accept button button of the change pop-up window.

                              To quickly accept all the changes, click the downward arrow below the Accept button Accept button and select the Accept All Changes option.

                              To reject the current change you can:

                                -
                              • click the Reject button Reject button at the top toolbar, or
                              • +
                              • click the Reject button Reject button on the top toolbar, or
                              • click the downward arrow below the Reject button and select the Reject Current Change option (in this case, the change will be rejected and you will move on to the next available change), or
                              • -
                              • click the Reject Reject button button of the change notification.
                              • +
                              • click the Reject Reject button button of the change pop-up window.

                              To quickly reject all the changes, click the downward arrow below the Reject button Reject button and select the Reject All Changes option.

                              Additional info on the comparison feature

                              -
                              Method of the comparison
                              +
                              Method of comparison

                              Documents are compared by words. If a word contains a change of at least one character (e.g. if a character was removed or replaced), in the result, the difference will be displayed as the change of the entire word, not the character.

                              The image below illustrates the case when the original file contains the word 'Characters' and the document for comparison contains the word 'Character'.

                              Compare documents - method

                              diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm index baa6f8176..52b32ca02 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm @@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ Open 'File' panel Alt+F ⌥ Option+F - Open the File panel to save, download, print the current document, view its info, create a new document or open an existing one, access Document Editor help or advanced settings. + Open the File panel panel to save, download, print the current document, view its info, create a new document or open an existing one, access the Document Editor Help Center or advanced settings. Open 'Find and Replace' dialog box @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ Repeat the last 'Find' action ⇧ Shift+F4 ⇧ Shift+F4,
                              ⌘ Cmd+G,
                              ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+F4 - Repeat the Find action which has been performed before the key combination press. + Repeat the previous Find performed before the key combination was pressed. Open 'Comments' panel @@ -70,49 +70,55 @@ Save document Ctrl+S ^ Ctrl+S,
                              ⌘ Cmd+S - Save all the changes to the document currently edited with Document Editor. The active file will be saved with its current file name, location, and file format. + Save all the changes to the document currently edited with The Document Editor. The active file will be saved with its current file name, location, and file format. Print document Ctrl+P ^ Ctrl+P,
                              ⌘ Cmd+P - Print the document with one of the available printers or save it to a file. + Print the document with one of the available printers or save it as a file. Download As... Ctrl+⇧ Shift+S ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+S,
                              ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+S - Open the Download as... panel to save the currently edited document to the computer hard disk drive in one of the supported formats: DOCX, PDF, ODT, TXT, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, HTML. + Open the Download as... panel to save the currently edited document to the hard disk drive of your computer in one of the supported formats: DOCX, PDF, ODT, TXT, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, HTML. Full screen F11 - Switch to the full screen view to fit Document Editor into your screen. + Switch to the full screen view to fit the Document Editor into your screen. Help menu F1 F1 - Open Document Editor Help menu. + Open the Document Editor Help menu. Open existing file (Desktop Editors) Ctrl+O - On the Open local file tab in Desktop Editors, opens the standard dialog box that allows to select an existing file. + On the Open local file tab in the Desktop Editors, opens the standard dialog box that allows to select an existing file. Close file (Desktop Editors) Ctrl+W,
                              Ctrl+F4 ^ Ctrl+W,
                              ⌘ Cmd+W - Close the current document window in Desktop Editors. + Close the current document window in the Desktop Editors. Element contextual menu ⇧ Shift+F10 ⇧ Shift+F10 Open the selected element contextual menu. + + + Reset the ‘Zoom’ parameter + Ctrl+0 + ^ Ctrl+0 or ⌘ Cmd+0 + Reset the ‘Zoom’ parameter of the current document to a default 100%. Navigation @@ -276,7 +282,7 @@ Create nonbreaking hyphen - Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Hyphen + Ctrl+⇧ Shift+_ ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Hyphen Create a hyphen between characters which cannot be used to start a new line. @@ -416,25 +422,25 @@ Bold Ctrl+B ^ Ctrl+B,
                              ⌘ Cmd+B - Make the font of the selected text fragment bold giving it more weight. + Make the font of the selected text fragment darker and heavier than normal. Italic Ctrl+I ^ Ctrl+I,
                              ⌘ Cmd+I - Make the font of the selected text fragment italicized giving it some right side tilt. + Make the font of the selected text fragment italicized and slightly slanted. Underline Ctrl+U ^ Ctrl+U,
                              ⌘ Cmd+U - Make the selected text fragment underlined with the line going under the letters. + Make the selected text fragment underlined with a line going below the letters. Strikeout Ctrl+5 ^ Ctrl+5,
                              ⌘ Cmd+5 - Make the selected text fragment struck out with the line going through the letters. + Make the selected text fragment struck out with a line going through the letters. Subscript @@ -658,6 +664,24 @@ Alt+= Insert a formula at the current cursor position. + + + Insert an em dash + Alt+Ctrl+Num- + + Insert an em dash ‘—’ within the current document and to the right of the cursor. + + + Insert a non-breaking hyphen + Ctrl+⇧ Shift+_ + ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Hyphen + Insert a non-breaking hyphen ‘-’ within the current document and to the right of the cursor. + + + Insert a no-break space + Ctrl+⇧ Shift+␣ Spacebar + ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+␣ Spacebar + Insert a no-break space ‘o’ within the current document and to the right of the cursor. diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm index f8d603c2e..41e6ee35b 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm @@ -14,7 +14,7 @@

                              View Settings and Navigation Tools

                              -

                              Document Editor offers several tools to help you view and navigate through your document: zoom, page number indicator etc.

                              +

                              The Document Editor offers several tools to help you view and navigate through your document: zoom, page number indicator etc.

                              Adjust the View Settings

                              To adjust default view settings and set the most convenient mode to work with the document, click the View settings View settings icon icon on the right side of the editor header and select which interface elements you want to be hidden or shown. You can select the following options from the View settings drop-down list: @@ -28,8 +28,10 @@

                            • Hide Rulers - hides rulers which are used to align text, graphics, tables, and other elements in a document, set up margins, tab stops, and paragraph indents. To show the hidden Rulers click this option once again.

                            The right sidebar is minimized by default. To expand it, select any object (e.g. image, chart, shape) or text passage and click the icon of the currently activated tab on the right. To minimize the right sidebar, click the icon once again.

                            -

                            When the Comments or Chat panel is opened, the left sidebar width is adjusted by simple drag-and-drop: - move the mouse cursor over the left sidebar border so that it turns into the bidirectional arrow and drag the border to the right to extend the sidebar width. To restore its original width move the border to the left.

                            +

                            + When the Comments or Chat panel is opened, the width of the left sidebar is adjusted by simple drag-and-drop: + move the mouse cursor over the left sidebar border so that it turns into the bidirectional arrow and drag the border to the right to extend the width of the sidebar. To restore its original width, move the border to the left. +

                            Use the Navigation Tools

                            To navigate through your document, use the following tools:

                            The Zoom buttons are situated in the right lower corner and are used to zoom in and out the current document. diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Review.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Review.htm index 7e46ee77f..f6e3c5129 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Review.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Review.htm @@ -14,40 +14,46 @@

                            Document Review

                            -

                            When somebody shares a file with you that has review permissions, you need to use the document Review feature.

                            -

                            If you are the reviewer, then you can use the Review option to review the document, change the sentences, phrases and other page elements, correct spelling, and do other things to the document without actually editing it. All your changes will be recorded and shown to the person who sent the document to you.

                            -

                            If you are the person who sends the file for the review, you will need to display all the changes which were made to it, view and either accept or reject them.

                            +

                            When somebody shares a file with you using the review permissions, you need to apply the document Review feature.

                            +

                            As a reviewer, you can use the Review option to review the document, change the sentences, phrases and other page elements, correct spelling, etc. without actually editing it. All your changes will be recorded and shown to the person who sent you the document.

                            +

                            If you send the file for review, you will need to display all the changes which were made to it, view and either accept or reject them.

                            Enable the Track Changes feature

                            To see changes suggested by a reviewer, enable the Track Changes option in one of the following ways:

                              -
                            • click the Track changes button button in the right lower corner at the status bar, or
                            • -
                            • switch to the Collaboration tab at the top toolbar and press the Track Changes button Track Changes button.
                            • +
                            • click the Track changes button button in the right lower corner on the status bar, or
                            • +
                            • switch to the Collaboration tab on the top toolbar and press the Track Changes button Track Changes button.

                            Note: it is not necessary for the reviewer to enable the Track Changes option. It is enabled by default and cannot be disabled when the document is shared with review only access rights.

                            +

                            View changes

                            +

                            Changes made by a user are highlighted with a specific color in the document text. When you click on the changed text, a pop-up window opens which displays the user name, the date and time when the change has been made, and the change description. The pop-up window also contains icons used to accept or reject the current change.

                            +

                            Pop-up window

                            +

                            If you drag and drop a piece of text to some other place in the document, the text in a new position will be underlined with the double line. The text in the original position will be double-crossed. This will count as a single change.

                            +

                            Click the double-crossed text in the original position and use the Follow Move button arrow in the change pop-up window to go to the new location of the text.

                            +

                            Click the double-underlined text in the new position and use the Follow Move button arrow in the change pop-up window to go to to the original location of the text.

                            Choose the changes display mode

                            -

                            Click the Display Mode button Display Mode button at the top toolbar and select one of the available modes from the list:

                            +

                            Click the Display Mode button Display Mode button on the top toolbar and select one of the available modes from the list:

                              -
                            • Markup - this option is selected by default. It allows both to view suggested changes and edit the document.
                            • +
                            • Markup - this option is selected by default. It allows both viewing the suggested changes and editing the document.
                            • Final - this mode is used to display all the changes as if they were accepted. This option does not actually accept all changes, it only allows you to see how the document will look like after you accept all the changes. In this mode, you cannot edit the document.
                            • Original - this mode is used to display all the changes as if they were rejected. This option does not actually reject all changes, it only allows you to view the document without changes. In this mode, you cannot edit the document.

                            Accept or reject changes

                            -

                            Use the To Previous Change button Previous and the To Next Change button Next buttons at the top toolbar to navigate among the changes.

                            +

                            Use the To Previous Change button Previous and the To Next Change button Next buttons on the top toolbar to navigate through the changes.

                            To accept the currently selected change you can:

                              -
                            • click the Accept button Accept button at the top toolbar, or
                            • +
                            • click the Accept button Accept button on the top toolbar, or
                            • click the downward arrow below the Accept button and select the Accept Current Change option (in this case, the change will be accepted and you will proceed to the next change), or
                            • -
                            • click the Accept Accept button button of the change notification.
                            • +
                            • click the Accept Accept button button of the change pop-up window.

                            To quickly accept all the changes, click the downward arrow below the Accept button Accept button and select the Accept All Changes option.

                            To reject the current change you can:

                              -
                            • click the Reject button Reject button at the top toolbar, or
                            • +
                            • click the Reject button Reject button on the top toolbar, or
                            • click the downward arrow below the Reject button and select the Reject Current Change option (in this case, the change will be rejected and you will move on to the next available change), or
                            • -
                            • click the Reject Reject button button of the change notification.
                            • +
                            • click the Reject Reject button button of the change pop-up window.

                            To quickly reject all the changes, click the downward arrow below the Reject button Reject button and select the Reject All Changes option.

                            -

                            Note: if you review the document the Accept and Reject options are not available for you. You can delete your changes using the Delete change button icon within the change balloon.

                            +

                            Note: if you review the document, the Accept and Reject options are not available for you. You can delete your changes using the Delete change button icon within the change balloon.

                            \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Search.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Search.htm index 60f27953b..031a3912c 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Search.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Search.htm @@ -14,16 +14,16 @@

                            Search and Replace Function

                            -

                            To search for the needed characters, words or phrases used in the currently edited document, - click the Search icon icon situated at the left sidebar or use the Ctrl+F key combination.

                            +

                            To search for the required characters, words or phrases used in the currently edited document, + click the Search icon icon situated on the left sidebar or use the Ctrl+F key combination.

                            The Find and Replace window will open:

                            Find and Replace Window

                            1. Type in your inquiry into the corresponding data entry field.
                            2. Specify search parameters by clicking the Search options icon icon and checking the necessary options:
                                -
                              • Case sensitive - is used to find only the occurrences typed in the same case as your inquiry (e.g. if your inquiry is 'Editor' and this option is selected, such words as 'editor' or 'EDITOR' etc. will not be found). To disable this option click it once again.
                              • -
                              • Highlight results - is used to highlight all found occurrences at once. To disable this option and remove the highlight click the option once again.
                              • +
                              • Case sensitive - is used to find only the occurrences typed in the same case as your inquiry (e.g. if your inquiry is 'Editor' and this option is selected, such words as 'editor' or 'EDITOR' etc. will not be found). To disable this option, click it once again.
                              • +
                              • Highlight results - is used to highlight all found occurrences at once. To disable this option and remove the highlight, click the option once again.
                            3. Click one of the arrow buttons at the bottom right corner of the window. @@ -32,7 +32,7 @@

                            The first occurrence of the required characters in the selected direction will be highlighted on the page. If it is not the word you are looking for, click the selected button again to find the next occurrence of the characters you entered.

                            -

                            To replace one or more occurrences of the found characters click the Replace link below the data entry field or use the Ctrl+H key combination. The Find and Replace window will change:

                            +

                            To replace one or more occurrences of the found characters, click the Replace link below the data entry field or use the Ctrl+H key combination. The Find and Replace window will change:

                            Find and Replace Window

                            1. Type in the replacement text into the bottom data entry field.
                            2. diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/SpellChecking.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/SpellChecking.htm index db7f80f86..adb6e6c5a 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/SpellChecking.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/SpellChecking.htm @@ -14,16 +14,16 @@

                              Spell-checking

                              -

                              Document Editor allows you to check the spelling of your text in a certain language and correct mistakes while editing. In the desktop version, it's also possible to add words into a custom dictionary which is common for all three editors.

                              -

                              First of all, choose a language for your document. Click the Set Document Language icon Set Document Language icon at the status bar. In the window that appears, select the necessary language and click OK. The selected language will be applied to the whole document.

                              +

                              The Document Editor allows you to check the spelling of your text in a certain language and correct mistakes while editing. In the desktop version, it's also possible to add words into a custom dictionary which is common for all three editors.

                              +

                              First of all, choose a language for your document. Click the Set Document Language icon Set Document Language icon on the status bar. In the opened window, select the required language and click OK. The selected language will be applied to the whole document.

                              Set Document Language window

                              -

                              To choose a different language for any piece of text within the document, select the necessary text passage with the mouse and use the Spell-checking - Text Language selector menu at the status bar.

                              +

                              To choose a different language for any piece within the document, select the necessary text passage with the mouse and use the Spell-checking - Text Language selector menu on the status bar.

                              To enable the spell checking option, you can:

                                -
                              • click the Spell checking deactivated icon Spell checking icon at the status bar, or
                              • +
                              • click the Spell checking deactivated icon Spell checking icon on the status bar, or
                              • open the File tab of the top toolbar, select the Advanced Settings... option, check the Turn on spell checking option box and click the Apply button.
                              -

                              Incorrectly spelled words will be underlined by a red line.

                              +

                              all misspelled words will be underlined by a red line.

                              Right click on the necessary word to activate the menu and:

                              • choose one of the suggested similar words spelled correctly to replace the misspelled word with the suggested one. If too many variants are found, the More variants... option appears in the menu;
                              • @@ -34,7 +34,7 @@

                                Spell-checking

                                To disable the spell checking option, you can:

                                  -
                                • click the Spell checking activated icon Spell checking icon at the status bar, or
                                • +
                                • click the Spell checking activated icon Spell checking icon on the status bar, or
                                • open the File tab of the top toolbar, select the Advanced Settings... option, uncheck the Turn on spell checking option box and click the Apply button.
                                diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm index 9fe5f8a15..c601541c3 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm @@ -14,10 +14,12 @@

                                Supported Formats of Electronic Documents

                                -

                                Electronic documents represent one of the most commonly used computer files. - Thanks to the computer network highly developed nowadays, it's possible and more convenient to distribute electronic documents than printed ones. - Due to the variety of devices used for document presentation, there are a lot of proprietary and open file formats. - Document Editor handles the most popular of them.

                                +

                                + An electronic document is one of the most commonly used computer. + Due to the highly developed modern computer network, it's more convenient to distribute electronic documents than printed ones. + Nowadays, a lot of devices are used for document presentation, so there are plenty of proprietary and open file formats. + The Document Editor handles the most popular of them. +

                                @@ -77,7 +79,7 @@ - + diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm index cbc037a3f..1ef17e55e 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm @@ -14,27 +14,27 @@

                                File tab

                                -

                                The File tab allows to perform some basic operations on the current file.

                                +

                                The File tab allows performing some basic operations.

                                -

                                Online Document Editor window:

                                +

                                The corresponding window of the Online Document Editor:

                                File tab

                                -

                                Desktop Document Editor window:

                                +

                                The corresponding window of the Desktop Document Editor:

                                File tab

                                -

                                Using this tab, you can:

                                +

                                With this tab, you can use the following options:

                                  -
                                • in the online version, save the current file (in case the Autosave option is disabled), download as (save the document in the selected format to the computer hard disk drive), save copy as (save a copy of the document in the selected format to the portal documents), print or rename it, - in the desktop version, save the current file keeping the current format and location using the Save option or save the current file with a different name, location or format using the Save as option, print the file. +
                                • in the online version: save the current file (in case the Autosave option is disabled), save it in the required format on the hard disk drive of your computer with the Download as option, save a copy of the file in the selected format to the portal documents with the Save copy as option, print or rename the current file. + in the desktop version: save the current file without changing its format and location using the Save option, save it changing its name, location or format using the Save as option or print the current file.
                                • protect the file using a password, change or remove the password (available in the desktop version only);
                                • create a new document or open a recently edited one (available in the online version only),
                                • view general information about the document or change some file properties,
                                • manage access rights (available in the online version only),
                                • track version history (available in the online version only),
                                • -
                                • access the editor Advanced Settings,
                                • -
                                • in the desktop version, open the folder where the file is stored in the File explorer window. In the online version, open the folder of the Documents module where the file is stored in a new browser tab.
                                • +
                                • access the Advanced Settings of the editor,
                                • +
                                • in the desktop version, open the folder, where the file is stored, in the File explorer window. In the online version, open the folder of the Documents module, where the file is stored, in a new browser tab.
                                diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/HomeTab.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/HomeTab.htm index faa3d620f..e7bd23b51 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/HomeTab.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/HomeTab.htm @@ -14,27 +14,27 @@

                                Home tab

                                -

                                The Home tab opens by default when you open a document. It allows to format font and paragraphs. Some other options are also available here, such as Mail Merge and color schemes.

                                +

                                The Home tab appears by default when you open a document. It also allows formating fonts and paragraphs. Some other options are also available here, such as Mail Merge and color schemes.

                                -

                                Online Document Editor window:

                                +

                                The corresponding window of the Online Document Editor:

                                Home tab

                                -

                                Desktop Document Editor window:

                                +

                                The corresponding window of the Desktop Document Editor:

                                Home tab

                                Using this tab, you can:

                                diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/InsertTab.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/InsertTab.htm index 2047bb360..a7c052566 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/InsertTab.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/InsertTab.htm @@ -14,22 +14,22 @@

                                Insert tab

                                -

                                The Insert tab allows to add some page formatting elements, as well as visual objects and comments.

                                +

                                The Insert tab allows adding some page formatting elements as well as visual objects and comments.

                                -

                                Online Document Editor window:

                                +

                                The corresponding window of the Online Document Editor:

                                Insert tab

                                -

                                Desktop Document Editor window:

                                +

                                The corresponding window of the Desktop Document Editor:

                                Insert tab

                                Using this tab, you can:

                                diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/LayoutTab.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/LayoutTab.htm index 6fb759ba8..9b8b04c6c 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/LayoutTab.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/LayoutTab.htm @@ -14,22 +14,22 @@

                                Layout tab

                                -

                                The Layout tab allows to change the document appearance: set up page parameters and define the arrangement of visual elements.

                                +

                                The Layout tab allows changing the appearance of a document: setting up page parameters and defining the arrangement of visual elements.

                                -

                                Online Document Editor window:

                                +

                                The corresponding window of the Online Document Editor:

                                Layout tab

                                -

                                Desktop Document Editor window:

                                +

                                corresponding window of the Desktop Document Editor:

                                Layout tab

                                Using this tab, you can:

                                diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm index b26b05d71..3da29402a 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm @@ -14,31 +14,32 @@

                                Plugins tab

                                -

                                The Plugins tab allows to access advanced editing features using available third-party components. Here you can also use macros to simplify routine operations.

                                +

                                The Plugins tab allows accessing the advanced editing features using the available third-party components. This tab also makes it possible to use macros to simplify routine operations.

                                -

                                Online Document Editor window:

                                +

                                The corresponding window of the Online Document Editor:

                                Plugins tab

                                -

                                Desktop Document Editor window:

                                +

                                The corresponding window of the Desktop Document Editor:

                                Plugins tab

                                -

                                The Settings button allows to open the window where you can view and manage all installed plugins and add your own ones.

                                -

                                The Macros button allows to open the window where you can create your own macros and run them. To learn more about macros you can refer to our API Documentation.

                                +

                                The Settings button allows viewing and managing all the installed plugins as well as adding new ones.

                                +

                                The Macros button allows you to create and run your own macros. To learn more about macros, please refer to our API Documentation.

                                Currently, the following plugins are available by default:

                                  -
                                • Send allows to send the document via email using the default desktop mail client (available in the desktop version only),
                                • -
                                • Highlight code allows to highlight syntax of the code selecting the necessary language, style, background color,
                                • -
                                • OCR allows to recognize text included into a picture and insert it into the document text,
                                • -
                                • PhotoEditor allows to edit images: crop, flip, rotate them, draw lines and shapes, add icons and text, load a mask and apply filters such as Grayscale, Invert, Sepia, Blur, Sharpen, Emboss, etc.,
                                • -
                                • Speech allows to convert the selected text into speech,
                                • -
                                • Symbol Table allows to insert special symbols into your text (available in the desktop version only),
                                • -
                                • Thesaurus allows to search for synonyms and antonyms of a word and replace it with the selected one,
                                • -
                                • Translator allows to translate the selected text into other languages,
                                • -
                                • YouTube allows to embed YouTube videos into your document.
                                • +
                                • Send allows sending a document via email using the default desktop mail client (available in the desktop version only),
                                • +
                                • Highlight code allows highlighting the code syntax selecting the required language, style and background color,
                                • +
                                • OCR recognizing text in any picture and inserting the recognized text to the document,
                                • +
                                • PhotoEditor allows editing images: cropping, flipping, rotating, drawing lines and shapes, adding icons and text, loading a mask and applying filters such as Grayscale, Invert, Sepia, Blur, Sharpen, Emboss, etc.,
                                • +
                                • Speech allows converting the selected text to speech (available in the online version only),
                                • +
                                • Thesaurus allows finding synonyms and antonyms for the selected word and replacing it with the chosen one,
                                • +
                                • Translator allows translating the selected text into other languages,
                                • +
                                • YouTube allows embedding YouTube videos into the document,
                                • +
                                • Mendeley allows managing papers researches and generating bibliographies for scholarly articles,
                                • +
                                • Zotero allows managing bibliographic data and related research materials.

                                The Wordpress and EasyBib plugins can be used if you connect the corresponding services in your portal settings. You can use the following instructions for the server version or for the SaaS version.

                                -

                                To learn more about plugins please refer to our API Documentation. All the currently existing open source plugin examples are available on GitHub.

                                +

                                To learn more about plugins, please refer to our API Documentation. All the existing examples of open source plugins are currently available on GitHub.

                                \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm index a3a7d211e..48b7bce43 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm @@ -13,46 +13,49 @@
                                -

                                Introducing the Document Editor user interface

                                -

                                Document Editor uses a tabbed interface where editing commands are grouped into tabs by functionality.

                                +

                                Introducing the user interface of the Document Editor

                                +

                                The Document Editor uses a tabbed interface where editing commands are grouped into tabs by functionality.

                                -

                                Online Document Editor window:

                                +

                                Main window of the Online Document Editor:

                                Online Document Editor window

                                -

                                Desktop Document Editor window:

                                +

                                Main window of the Desktop Document Editor:

                                Desktop Document Editor window

                                The editor interface consists of the following main elements:

                                  -
                                1. Editor header displays the logo, opened documents tabs, document name and menu tabs. -

                                  In the left part of the Editor header there are the Save, Print file, Undo and Redo buttons.

                                  +
                                2. + The Editor header displays the ONLYOFFICE logo, tabs for all opened documents with their names and menu tabs. +

                                  On the left side of the Editor header the Save, Print file, Undo and Redo buttons are located

                                  Icons in the editor header

                                  -

                                  In the right part of the Editor header the user name is displayed as well as the following icons:

                                  +

                                  On the right side of the Editor header along with the user name the following icons are displayed:

                                    -
                                  • Open file location Open file location - in the desktop version, it allows to open the folder where the file is stored in the File explorer window. In the online version, it allows to open the folder of the Documents module where the file is stored in a new browser tab.
                                  • -
                                  • View Settings icon - allows to adjust View Settings and access the editor Advanced Settings.
                                  • -
                                  • Manage document access rights icon Manage document access rights - (available in the online version only) allows to set access rights for the documents stored in the cloud.
                                  • -
                                  -
                                3. -
                                4. Top toolbar displays a set of editing commands depending on the selected menu tab. Currently, the following tabs are available: File, Home, Insert, Layout, References, Collaboration, Protection, Plugins. -

                                  The Copy icon Copy and Paste icon Paste options are always available at the left part of the Top toolbar regardless of the selected tab.

                                  -
                                5. -
                                6. Status bar at the bottom of the editor window contains the page number indicator, displays some notifications (such as "All changes saved" etc.), allows to set text language, enable spell checking, turn on the track changes mode, adjust zoom.
                                7. -
                                8. Left sidebar contains the following icons: -
                                    -
                                  • Search icon - allows to use the Search and Replace tool,
                                  • -
                                  • Comments icon - allows to open the Comments panel,
                                  • -
                                  • Navigation icon - allows to go to the Navigation panel and manage headings,
                                  • -
                                  • Chat icon - (available in the online version only) allows to open the Chat panel, as well as the icons that allow to contact our support team and view the information about the program.
                                  • +
                                  • Open file location Open file location. In the desktop version, it allows opening the folder, where the file is stored, in the File explorer window. In the online version, it allows to opening the folder of the Documents module, where the file is stored in a new browser tab.
                                  • +
                                  • View Settings icon It allows adjusting the View Settings and access the Advanced Settings of the editor.
                                  • +
                                  • Manage document access rights icon Manage document access rights (available in the online version only). It allows adjusting access rights for the documents stored in the cloud.
                                9. -
                                10. Right sidebar allows to adjust additional parameters of different objects. When you select a particular object in the text, the corresponding icon is activated at the right sidebar. Click this icon to expand the right sidebar.
                                11. -
                                12. Horizontal and vertical Rulers allow to align text and other elements in a document, set up margins, tab stops, and paragraph indents.
                                13. -
                                14. Working area allows to view document content, enter and edit data.
                                15. -
                                16. Scroll bar on the right allows to scroll up and down multi-page documents.
                                17. +
                                18. The Top toolbar displays a set of editing commands depending on the selected menu tab. Currently, the following tabs are available: File, Home, Insert, Layout, References, Collaboration, Protection, Plugins. +

                                  The Copy icon Copy and Paste icon Paste options are always available at the left part on the left side of the Top toolbar regardless of the selected tab.

                                  +
                                19. +
                                20. The Status bar located at the bottom of the editor window indicates the page number and displays some notifications (for example, "All changes saved", etc.). It also allows setting the text language, enabling spell checking, turning on the track changes mode and adjusting zoom.
                                21. +
                                22. The Left sidebar contains the following icons: +
                                    +
                                  • Search icon - allows using the Search and Replace tool,
                                  • +
                                  • Comments icon - allows opening the Comments panel,
                                  • +
                                  • Navigation icon - allows going to the Navigation panel and managing headings,
                                  • +
                                  • Chat icon - (available in the online version only) allows opening the Chat panel,
                                  • +
                                  • Feedback and Support icon - (available in the online version only) allows to contact our support team,
                                  • +
                                  • About icon - (available in the online version only) allows to view the information about the program.
                                  • +
                                  +
                                23. +
                                24. The Right sidebar allows to adjusting additional parameters of different objects. When you select a particular object in the text, the corresponding icon is activated on the Right sidebar. Click the icon to expand the Right sidebar.
                                25. +
                                26. The Horizontal and vertical Rulers makes it possible to align the text and other elements in a document, set up margins, tab stops, and paragraph indents.
                                27. +
                                28. The Working area allows viewing document content, entering and editing data.
                                29. +
                                30. The Scroll bar on the right allows scrolling up and down multi-page documents.
                                -

                                For your convenience you can hide some components and display them again when it is necessary. To learn more on how to adjust view settings please refer to this page.

                                +

                                For your convenience, you can hide some components and display them again when them when necessary. To learn more about adjusting view settings, please refer to this page.

                                diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/ReferencesTab.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/ReferencesTab.htm index bcd86df85..e08af8156 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/ReferencesTab.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/ReferencesTab.htm @@ -14,13 +14,13 @@

                                References tab

                                -

                                The References tab allows to manage different types of references: add and refresh a table of contents, create and edit footnotes, insert hyperlinks.

                                +

                                The References tab allows managing different types of references: adding and refreshing tables of contents, creating and editing footnotes, inserting hyperlinks.

                                -

                                Online Document Editor window:

                                +

                                The corresponding window of the Online Document Editor:

                                References tab

                                -

                                Desktop Document Editor window:

                                +

                                The corresponding window of the Desktop Document Editor:

                                References tab

                                Using this tab, you can:

                                diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/ReviewTab.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/ReviewTab.htm index 7bde96af6..96151da0f 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/ReviewTab.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/ReviewTab.htm @@ -14,18 +14,18 @@

                                Collaboration tab

                                -

                                The Collaboration tab allows to organize collaborative work on the document. In the online version, you can share the file, select a co-editing mode, manage comments, track changes made by a reviewer, view all versions and revisions. In the commenting mode, you can add and remove comments, navigate between tracked changes, use chat and view version history. In the desktop version, you can manage comments and use the Track Changes feature.

                                +

                                The Collaboration tab allows collaborating on documents. In the online version, you can share the file, select the required co-editing mode, manage comments, track changes made by a reviewer, view all versions and revisions. In the commenting mode, you can add and remove comments, navigate between the tracked changes, use the built-in chat and view the version history. In the desktop version, you can manage comments and use the Track Changes feature.

                                -

                                Online Document Editor window:

                                +

                                The corresponding window of the Online Document Editor:

                                Collaboration tab

                                -

                                Desktop Document Editor window:

                                +

                                The corresponding window of the Desktop Document Editor:

                                Collaboration tab

                                Using this tab, you can:

                                diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/AddBorders.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/AddBorders.htm index d64076c78..3cff2453f 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/AddBorders.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/AddBorders.htm @@ -16,15 +16,15 @@

                                Add borders

                                To add borders to a paragraph, page, or the whole document,

                                  -
                                1. put the cursor within the paragraph you need, or select several paragraphs with the mouse or all the text in the document by pressing the Ctrl+A key combination,
                                2. -
                                3. click the right mouse button and select the Paragraph Advanced Settings option from the menu or use the Show advanced settings link at the right sidebar,
                                4. +
                                5. place the cursor within the required paragraph, or select several paragraphs with the mouse or the whole text by pressing the Ctrl+A key combination,
                                6. +
                                7. click the right mouse button and select the Paragraph Advanced Settings option from the menu or use the Show advanced settings link on the right sidebar,
                                8. switch to the Borders & Fill tab in the opened Paragraph - Advanced Settings window,
                                9. set the needed value for Border Size and select a Border Color,
                                10. click within the available diagram or use buttons to select borders and apply the chosen style to them,
                                11. click the OK button.

                                Paragraph Advanced Settings - Borders & Fill

                                -

                                After you add borders, you can also set paddings i.e. distances between the right, left, top and bottom borders and the paragraph text within them.

                                +

                                After adding the borders, you can also set paddings i.e. distances between the right, left, top and bottom borders and the paragraph.

                                To set the necessary values, switch to the Paddings tab of the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window:

                                Paragraph Advanced Settings - Paddings

                                diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/AddCaption.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/AddCaption.htm index f14f9ce55..d6f76f0ad 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/AddCaption.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/AddCaption.htm @@ -13,15 +13,15 @@
                                -

                                Add caption

                                -

                                The Caption is a numbered label that you can apply to objects, such as equations, tables, figures and images within your documents.

                                -

                                This makes it easy to reference within your text as there is an easily recognizable label on your object.

                                -

                                To add the caption to an object:

                                +

                                Add captions

                                +

                                A caption is a numbered label that can be applied to objects, such as equations, tables, figures and images in the document.

                                +

                                A caption allows making a reference in the text - an easily recognizable label on an object.

                                +

                                To add a caption to an object:

                                  -
                                • select the object which one to apply a caption;
                                • +
                                • select the required object to apply a caption;
                                • switch to the References tab of the top toolbar;
                                • - click the Rich text content control Caption icon at the top toolbar or right lick o nthe object and select the Insert Caption option to open the Insert Caption dialogue box + click the Rich text content control Caption icon on the top toolbar or right click on the object and select the Insert Caption option to open the Insert Caption dialogue box
                                  • choose the label to use for your caption by clicking the label drop-down and choosing the object. or
                                  • create a new label by clicking the Add label button to open the Add label dialogue box. Enter a name for the label into the label text box. Then click the OK button to add a new label into the label list;
                                  • @@ -39,23 +39,23 @@

                                    Formatting captions

                                    As soon as you add a caption, a new style for captions is automatically added to the styles section. In order to change the style for all captions throughout the document, you should follow these steps:

                                      -
                                    • select the text a new Caption style will be copied from;
                                    • -
                                    • search for the Caption style (highlighted in blue by default) in the styles gallery which you may find on Home tab of the top toolbar;
                                    • +
                                    • select the text to copy a new Caption style;
                                    • +
                                    • search for the Caption style (highlighted in blue by default) in the styles gallery on the Home tab of the top toolbar;
                                    • right click on it and choose the Update from selection option.

                                    Content Control settings window

                                    Grouping captions up

                                    -

                                    If you want to be able to move the object and the caption as one unit, you need to group the object and the caption together

                                    +

                                    To move the object and the caption as one unit, you need to group the object and the caption together:

                                    • select the object;
                                    • select one of the Wrapping styles using the right sidebar;
                                    • add the caption as it is mentioned above;
                                    • -
                                    • hold down Shift and select the items you want to group up;
                                    • -
                                    • right click on either item and choose Arrange > Group.
                                    • +
                                    • hold down Shift and select the items to be grouped up;
                                    • +
                                    • right click item and choose Arrange > Group.
                                    -

                                    Content Control settings window

                                    +

                                    Content Control settings window

                                    Now both items will move simultaneously if you drag them somewhere else in the document.

                                    -

                                    To unbind the objects click on Arrange > Ungroup respectively.

                                    +

                                    To unbind the objects, click on Arrange > Ungroup respectively.

                                    \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/AddFormulasInTables.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/AddFormulasInTables.htm index a70d2bd2a..6d531671a 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/AddFormulasInTables.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/AddFormulasInTables.htm @@ -18,17 +18,17 @@

                                    You can perform simple calculations on data in table cells by adding formulas. To insert a formula into a table cell,

                                    1. place the cursor within the cell where you want to display the result,
                                    2. -
                                    3. click the Add formula button at the right sidebar,
                                    4. -
                                    5. in the Formula Settings window that opens, enter the necessary formula into the Formula field. -

                                      You can enter a needed formula manually using the common mathematical operators (+, -, *, /), e.g. =A1*B2 or use the Paste Function drop-down list to select one of the embedded functions, e.g. =PRODUCT(A1,B2).

                                      +
                                    6. click the Add formula button on the right sidebar,
                                    7. +
                                    8. in the opened Formula Settings window, enter the required formula into the Formula field. +

                                      You can enter the required formula manually using the common mathematical operators (+, -, *, /), e.g. =A1*B2 or use the Paste Function drop-down list to select one of the embedded functions, e.g. =PRODUCT(A1,B2).

                                      Add formula

                                    9. -
                                    10. manually specify necessary arguments within the parentheses in the Formula field. If the function requires several arguments, they must be separated by commas.
                                    11. +
                                    12. manually specify the required arguments within the parentheses in the Formula field. If the function requires several arguments, they must be separated by commas.
                                    13. use the Number Format drop-down list if you want to display the result in a certain number format,
                                    14. click OK.

                                    The result will be displayed in the selected cell.

                                    -

                                    To edit the added formula, select the result in the cell and click the Add formula button at the right sidebar, make the necessary changes in the Formula Settings window and click OK.

                                    +

                                    To edit the added formula, select the result in the cell and click the Add formula button on the right sidebar, make the required changes in the Formula Settings window and click OK.


                                    Add references to cells

                                    You can use the following arguments to quickly add references to cell ranges:

                                    @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@

                                    If you have added some bookmarks to certain cells within your table, you can use these bookmarks as arguments when entering formulas.

                                    In the Formula Settings window, place the cursor within the parentheses in the Formula entry field where you want the argument to be added and use the Paste Bookmark drop-down list to select one of the previously added bookmarks.

                                    Update formula results

                                    -

                                    If you change some values in the table cells, you will need to manually update formula results:

                                    +

                                    If you change some values in the table cells, you will need to manually update the formula results:

                                    • To update a single formula result, select the necessary result and press F9 or right-click the result and use the Update field option from the menu.
                                    • To update several formula results, select the necessary cells or the entire table and press F9.
                                    • @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@
                                - + @@ -95,6 +95,12 @@ + + + + + + @@ -122,13 +128,13 @@ - + - + diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/AddHyperlinks.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/AddHyperlinks.htm index 45d6139d1..4a3114102 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/AddHyperlinks.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/AddHyperlinks.htm @@ -16,21 +16,21 @@

                                Add hyperlinks

                                To add a hyperlink,

                                  -
                                1. place the cursor to a position where a hyperlink will be added,
                                2. +
                                3. place the cursor in the text that you want to display as a hyperlink,
                                4. switch to the Insert or References tab of the top toolbar,
                                5. -
                                6. click the Hyperlink icon Hyperlink icon at the top toolbar,
                                7. -
                                8. after that the Hyperlink Settings window will appear where you can specify the hyperlink parameters: -
                                    -
                                  • - Select a link type you wish to insert: -

                                    Use the External Link option and enter a URL in the format http://www.example.com in the Link to field below if you need to add a hyperlink leading to an external website.

                                    -

                                    Hyperlink Settings window

                                    -

                                    Use the Place in Document option and select one of the existing headings in the document text or one of previously added bookmarks if you need to add a hyperlink leading to a certain place in the same document.

                                    -

                                    Hyperlink Settings window

                                    -
                                  • -
                                  • Display - enter a text that will get clickable and lead to the address specified in the upper field.
                                  • -
                                  • ScreenTip text - enter a text that will become visible in a small pop-up window that provides a brief note or label pertaining to the hyperlink being pointed to.
                                  • -
                                  +
                                9. click the Hyperlink icon Hyperlink icon on the top toolbar,
                                10. +
                                11. after that the Hyperlink Settings window will appear, and you will be able to specify the hyperlink parameters: +
                                    +
                                  • + Select a link type you wish to insert: +

                                    Use the External Link option and enter a URL in the format http://www.example.com in the Link to field below if you need to add a hyperlink leading to an external website.

                                    +

                                    Hyperlink Settings window

                                    +

                                    Use the Place in Document option and select one of the existing headings in the document text or one of previously added bookmarks if you need to add a hyperlink leading to a certain place in the same document.

                                    +

                                    Hyperlink Settings window

                                    +
                                  • +
                                  • Display - enter a text that will get clickable and lead to the address specified in the upper field.
                                  • +
                                  • ScreenTip text - enter a text that will become visible in a small pop-up window with a brief note or label pertaining to the hyperlink to be pointed.
                                  • +
                                12. Click the OK button.
                                diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/AddWatermark.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/AddWatermark.htm index 44659ec1f..26957523c 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/AddWatermark.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/AddWatermark.htm @@ -13,19 +13,19 @@
                                -

                                Add watermark

                                -

                                Watermark is a text or image placed below the main text layer. Text watermarks allow to indicate your document status (for example, confidential, draft etc.), image watermarks allow to add an image, for example your company logo.

                                -

                                To add a watermark within a document:

                                +

                                Add watermarks

                                +

                                A watermark is a text or image placed under the main text layer. Text watermarks allow indicating the status of your document (for example, confidential, draft etc.). Image watermarks allow adding an image, for example, the logo of your company.

                                +

                                To add a watermark in a document:

                                1. Switch to the Layout tab of the top toolbar.
                                2. -
                                3. Click the Watermark icon Watermark icon at the top toolbar and choose the Custom Watermark option from the menu. After that the Watermark Settings window will appear.
                                4. +
                                5. Click the Watermark icon Watermark icon on the top toolbar and choose the Custom Watermark option from the menu. After that the Watermark Settings window will appear.
                                6. Select a watermark type you wish to insert:
                                  • Use the Text watermark option and adjust the available parameters:

                                    Watermark Settings window

                                    • Language - select one of the available languages from the list,
                                    • -
                                    • Text - select one of the available text examples on the selected language. For English, the following watermark texts are available: ASAP, CONFIDENTIAL, COPY, DO NOT COPY, DRAFT, ORIGINAL, PERSONAL, SAMPLE, TOP SECRET, URGENT.
                                    • +
                                    • Text - select one of the available text examples in the selected language. For English, the following watermark texts are available: ASAP, CONFIDENTIAL, COPY, DO NOT COPY, DRAFT, ORIGINAL, PERSONAL, SAMPLE, TOP SECRET, URGENT.
                                    • Font - select the font name and size from the corresponding drop-down lists. Use the icons on the right to set the font color or apply one of the font decoration styles: Bold, Italic, Underline, Strikeout,
                                    • Semitransparent - check this box if you want to apply transparency,
                                    • Layout - select the Diagonal or Horizontal option.
                                    • @@ -34,7 +34,7 @@
                                    • Use the Image watermark option and adjust the available parameters:

                                      Watermark Settings window

                                        -
                                      • Choose the image file source using one of the buttons: From File or From URL - the image will be displayed in the preview window on the right,
                                      • +
                                      • Choose the image file source using one of the options from the drop-down list: From File, From URL or From Storage - the image will be displayed in the preview window on the right,
                                      • Scale - select the necessary scale value from the available ones: Auto, 500%, 200%, 150%, 100%, 50%.
                                    • @@ -43,7 +43,7 @@
                                    • Click the OK button.

                                To edit the added watermark, open the Watermark Settings window as described above, change the necessary parameters and click OK.

                                -

                                To delete the added watermark click the Watermark icon Watermark icon at the Layout tab of the top toolbar and choose the Remove Watermark option from the menu. It's also possible to use the None option in the Watermark Settings window.

                                +

                                To delete the added watermark click the Watermark icon Watermark icon on the Layout tab of the top toolbar and choose the Remove Watermark option from the menu. It's also possible to use the None option in the Watermark Settings window.

                                diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/AlignArrangeObjects.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/AlignArrangeObjects.htm index 464482ca9..c6d864ba0 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/AlignArrangeObjects.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/AlignArrangeObjects.htm @@ -13,12 +13,12 @@
                                -

                                Align and arrange objects on a page

                                -

                                The added autoshapes, images, charts or text boxes can be aligned, grouped and ordered on a page. To perform any of these actions, first select a separate object or several objects on the page. To select several objects, hold down the Ctrl key and left-click the necessary objects. To select a text box, click on its border, not the text within it. After that you can use either the icons at the Layout tab of the top toolbar described below or the analogous options from the right-click menu.

                                +

                                Align and arrange objects on the page

                                +

                                The added autoshapes, images, charts or text boxes can be aligned, grouped and ordered on the page. To perform any of these actions, first select a separate object or several objects on the page. To select several objects, hold down the Ctrl key and left-click the required objects. To select a text box, click on its border, not the text within it. After that you can use either the icons on the Layout tab of the top toolbar described below or the corresponding options from the right-click menu.

                                Align objects

                                To align two or more selected objects,

                                  -
                                1. Click the Align icon Align icon at the Layout tab of the top toolbar and select one of the following options: +
                                2. Click the Align icon Align icon on the Layout tab of the top toolbar and select one of the following options:
                                  • Align to Page to align objects relative to the edges of the page,
                                  • Align to Margin to align objects relative to the page margins,
                                  • @@ -39,10 +39,10 @@

                                    Alternatively, you can right-click the selected objects, choose the Align option from the contextual menu and then use one of the available alignment options.

                                    If you want to align a single object, it can be aligned relative to the edges of the page or to the page margins. The Align to Margin option is selected by default in this case.

                                    Distribute objects

                                    -

                                    To distribute three or more selected objects horizontally or vertically so that the equal distance appears between them,

                                    +

                                    To distribute three or more selected objects horizontally or vertically so that there is equal space between them,

                                    1. - Click the Align icon Align icon at the Layout tab of the top toolbar and select one of the following options: + Click the Align icon Align icon on the Layout tab of the top toolbar and select one of the following options:
                                      • Align to Page to distribute objects between the edges of the page,
                                      • Align to Margin to distribute objects between the page margins,
                                      • @@ -60,21 +60,21 @@

                                        Alternatively, you can right-click the selected objects, choose the Align option from the contextual menu and then use one of the available distribution options.

                                        Note: the distribution options are disabled if you select less than three objects.

                                        Group objects

                                        -

                                        To group two or more selected objects or ungroup them, click the arrow next to the Group icon Group icon at the Layout tab of the top toolbar and select the necessary option from the list:

                                        +

                                        To group two or more selected objects or ungroup them, click the arrow next to the Group icon Group icon at the Layout tab on the top toolbar and select the necessary option from the list:

                                          -
                                        • Group Group icon - to join several objects into a group so that they can be simultaneously rotated, moved, resized, aligned, arranged, copied, pasted, formatted like a single object.
                                        • -
                                        • Ungroup Ungroup icon - to ungroup the selected group of the previously joined objects.
                                        • +
                                        • Group Group icon - to combine several objects into a group so that they can be simultaneously rotated, moved, resized, aligned, arranged, copied, pasted, formatted like a single object.
                                        • +
                                        • Ungroup Ungroup icon - to ungroup the selected group of the previously combined objects.

                                        Alternatively, you can right-click the selected objects, choose the Arrange option from the contextual menu and then use the Group or Ungroup option.

                                        -

                                        Note: the Group option is disabled if you select less than two objects. The Ungroup option is available only when a group of the previously joined objects is selected.

                                        +

                                        Note: the Group option is disabled if you select less than two objects. The Ungroup option is available only when a group of the previously combined objects is selected.

                                        Arrange objects

                                        -

                                        To arrange objects (i.e. to change their order when several objects overlap each other), you can use the Bring Forward icon Bring Forward and Send Backward icon Send Backward icons at the Layout tab of the top toolbar and select the necessary arrangement type from the list.

                                        -

                                        To move the selected object(s) forward, click the arrow next to the Bring Forward icon Bring Forward icon at the Layout tab of the top toolbar and select the necessary arrangement type from the list:

                                        +

                                        To arrange objects (i.e. to change their order when several objects overlap each other), you can use the Bring Forward icon Bring Forward and Send Backward icon Send Backward icons on the Layout tab of the top toolbar and select the required arrangement type from the list.

                                        +

                                        To move the selected object(s) forward, click the arrow next to the Bring Forward icon Bring Forward icon on the Layout tab of the top toolbar and select the required arrangement type from the list:

                                        • Bring To Foreground Bring To Foreground icon - to move the object(s) in front of all other objects,
                                        • Bring Forward Bring Forward icon - to move the selected object(s) by one level forward as related to other objects.
                                        -

                                        To move the selected object(s) backward, click the arrow next to the Send Backward icon Send Backward icon at the Layout tab of the top toolbar and select the necessary arrangement type from the list:

                                        +

                                        To move the selected object(s) backward, click the arrow next to the Send Backward icon Send Backward icon on the Layout tab of the top toolbar and select the required arrangement type from the list:

                                        • Send To Background Send To Background icon - to move the object(s) behind all other objects,
                                        • Send Backward Send Backward icon - to move the selected object(s) by one level backward as related to other objects.
                                        • diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/AlignText.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/AlignText.htm index 1261b64b7..0b53401ee 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/AlignText.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/AlignText.htm @@ -14,25 +14,25 @@

                                          Align your text in a paragraph

                                          -

                                          The text is commonly aligned in four ways: left, right, center or justified. To do that,

                                          +

                                          The text is commonly aligned in four ways: left-aligned text, right-aligned text, centered text or justified text. To align the text,

                                          1. place the cursor to the position where you want the alignment to be applied (this can be a new line or already entered text),
                                          2. switch to the Home tab of the top toolbar,
                                          3. select the alignment type you would like to apply:
                                              -
                                            • Left alignment with the text lined up by the left side of the page (the right side remains unaligned) is done with the Align left Align left icon icon situated at the top toolbar.
                                            • -
                                            • Center alignment with the text lined up by the center of the page (the right and the left sides remains unaligned) is done with the Align center Align center icon icon situated at the top toolbar.
                                            • -
                                            • Right alignment with the text lined up by the right side of the page (the left side remains unaligned) is done with the Align right Align right icon icon situated at the top toolbar.
                                            • -
                                            • Justified alignment with the text lined up by both the left and the right sides of the page (additional spacing is added where necessary to keep the alignment) is done with the Justified Justify icon icon situated at the top toolbar.
                                            • +
                                            • Left alignment (when the text is lined up to the left side of the page with the right side remaining unaligned) is done by clicking the Align left Align left icon icon on the top toolbar.
                                            • +
                                            • Center alignment (when the text is lined up in the center of the page with the right and the left sides remaining unaligned) is done by clicking the Align center Align center icon icon on the top toolbar.
                                            • +
                                            • Right alignment (when the text is lined up to the right side of the page with the left side remaining unaligned) is done by clicking the Align right Align right icon icon on the top toolbar.
                                            • +
                                            • Justified alignment (when the text is lined up to both the left and the right sides of the page, and additional spacing is added where necessary to keep the alignment) is done by clicking the Justified Justify icon icon on the top toolbar.
                                          -

                                          The alignment parameters are also available at the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window.

                                          +

                                          The alignment parameters are also available in the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window.

                                            -
                                          1. right-click the text and choose the Paragraph Advanced Settings option from the contextual menu or use the Show advanced settings option at the right sidebar,
                                          2. +
                                          3. right-click the text and choose the Paragraph - Advanced Settings option from the contextual menu or use the Show advanced settings option on the right sidebar,
                                          4. open the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window, switch to the Indents & Spacing tab,
                                          5. select one of the alignment types from the Alignment list: Left, Center, Right, Justified,
                                          6. -
                                          7. click the OK button, to apply the changes.
                                          8. +
                                          9. click the OK button to apply the changes.

                                          Paragraph Advanced Settings - Indents & Spacing

                                          diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/BackgroundColor.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/BackgroundColor.htm index 66ae17d19..4e3a15b08 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/BackgroundColor.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/BackgroundColor.htm @@ -13,27 +13,27 @@
                                          -

                                          Select background color for a paragraph

                                          -

                                          Background color is applied to the whole paragraph and completely fills all the paragraph space from the left page margin to the right page margin.

                                          +

                                          Select a background color for a paragraph

                                          +

                                          A background color is applied to the whole paragraph and completely fills all the paragraph space from the left page margin to the right page margin.

                                          To apply a background color to a certain paragraph or change the current one,

                                            -
                                          1. select a color scheme for your document from the available ones clicking the Change color scheme Change color scheme icon at the Home tab of the top toolbar
                                          2. -
                                          3. put the cursor within the paragraph you need, or select several paragraphs with the mouse or the whole text using the Ctrl+A key combination
                                          4. +
                                          5. select a color scheme for your document from the available ones clicking the Change color scheme Change color scheme icon at the Home tab on the top toolbar
                                          6. +
                                          7. place the cursor within the required paragraph, or select several paragraphs with the mouse or the whole text using the Ctrl+A key combination
                                          8. open the color palettes window. You can access it in one of the following ways:
                                              -
                                            • click the downward arrow next to the Paragraph background color Icon icon at the Home tab of the top toolbar, or
                                            • -
                                            • click the color field next to the Background Color caption at the right sidebar, or
                                            • -
                                            • click the 'Show advanced settings' link at the right sidebar or select the 'Paragraph Advanced Settings' option in the right-click menu, then switch to the 'Borders & Fill' tab within the 'Paragraph - Advanced Settings' window and click the color field next to the Background Color caption.
                                            • +
                                            • click the downward arrow next to the Paragraph background color Icon icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar, or
                                            • +
                                            • click the color field next to the Background Color caption on the right sidebar, or
                                            • +
                                            • click the 'Show advanced settings' link on the right sidebar or select the 'Paragraph Advanced Settings' option on the right-click menu, then switch to the 'Borders & Fill' tab within the 'Paragraph - Advanced Settings' window and click the color field next to the Background Color caption.
                                          9. -
                                          10. select any color in the available palettes
                                          11. +
                                          12. select any color among the available palettes
                                          -

                                          After you select the necessary color using the Paragraph background color Icon icon, you'll be able to apply this color to any selected paragraph just clicking the Selected paragraph background color icon (it displays the selected color), without the necessity to choose this color on the palette again. If you use the Background Color option at the right sidebar or within the 'Paragraph - Advanced Settings' window, remember that the selected color is not retained for quick access. (These options can be useful if you wish to select a different background color for a specific paragraph, while you are also using some general color selected with the help of the Paragraph background color Icon icon).

                                          +

                                          After you select the required color by using the Paragraph background color Icon icon, you'll be able to apply this color to any selected paragraph just by clicking the Selected paragraph background color icon (it displays the selected color), without having to choose this color in the palette again. If you use the Background Color option on the right sidebar or within the 'Paragraph - Advanced Settings' window, remember that the selected color is not retained for quick access. (These options can be useful if you wish to select a different background color for a specific paragraph and if you are also using some general color selected by clicking the Paragraph background color Icon icon).


                                          -

                                          To clear the background color of a certain paragraph,

                                          +

                                          To remove the background color from a certain paragraph,

                                            -
                                          1. put the cursor within the paragraph you need, or select several paragraphs with the mouse or the whole text using the Ctrl+A key combination
                                          2. -
                                          3. open the color palettes window clicking the color field next to the Background Color caption at the right sidebar
                                          4. +
                                          5. place the cursor within the required paragraph, or select several paragraphs with the mouse or the whole text using the Ctrl+A key combination
                                          6. +
                                          7. open the color palettes window by clicking the color field next to the Background Color caption on the right sidebar
                                          8. select the No Fill icon.
                                          diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ChangeColorScheme.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ChangeColorScheme.htm index 4a9c4db8b..7c7d02a97 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ChangeColorScheme.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ChangeColorScheme.htm @@ -14,17 +14,18 @@

                                          Change color scheme

                                          -

                                          Color schemes are applied to the whole document. They are used to quickly change the appearance of your document, since they are define the Theme Colors palette for document elements (font, background, tables, autoshapes, charts). If you've applied some Theme Colors to document elements and then selected a different Color Scheme, the applied colors in your document change correspondingly.

                                          -

                                          To change a color scheme, click the downward arrow next to the Change color scheme Change color scheme icon at the Home tab of the top toolbar and select the necessary color scheme from the available ones: Office, Grayscale, Apex, Aspect, Civic, Concourse, Equity, Flow, Foundry, Median, Metro, Module, Odulent, Oriel, Origin, Paper, Solstice, Technic, Trek, Urban, Verve. The selected color scheme will be highlighted in the list.

                                          +

                                          Color schemes are applied to the whole document. They are used to quickly change the appearance of your document because they define the Theme Colors palette for different document elements (font, background, tables, autoshapes, charts). If you applied some Theme Colors to the document elements and then select a different Color Scheme, the applied colors in your document will change correspondingly.

                                          +

                                          To change a color scheme, click the downward arrow next to the Change color scheme Change color scheme icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar and select the required color scheme from the list: Office, Grayscale, Apex, Aspect, Civic, Concourse, Equity, Flow, Foundry, Median, Metro, Module, Odulent, Oriel, Origin, Paper, Solstice, Technic, Trek, Urban, Verve. The selected color scheme will be highlighted in the list.

                                          Color Schemes

                                          -

                                          Once you select the preferred color scheme, you can select colors in a color palettes window that corresponds to the document element you want to apply the color to. For most of the document elements, the color palettes window can be accessed by clicking the colored box at the right sidebar when the necessary element is selected. For the font, this window can be opened using the downward arrow next to the Font color Font color icon at the Home tab of the top toolbar. The following palettes are available:

                                          +

                                          Once you select the preferred color scheme, you can select other colors in the color palettes window that corresponds to the document element you want to apply the color to. For most document elements, the color palettes window can be accessed by clicking the colored box on the right sidebar when the required element is selected. For the font, this window can be opened using the downward arrow next to the Font color Font color icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar. The following palettes are available:

                                          Palette

                                          • Theme Colors - the colors that correspond to the selected color scheme of the document.
                                          • -
                                          • Standard Colors - the default colors set. The selected color scheme does not affect them.
                                          • -
                                          • Custom Color - click this caption if there is no needed color in the available palettes. Select the necessary colors range moving the vertical color slider and set the specific color dragging the color picker within the large square color field. Once you select a color with the color picker, the appropriate RGB and sRGB color values will be displayed in the fields on the right. You can also specify a color on the base of the RGB color model entering the necessary numeric values into the R, G, B (red, green, blue) fields or enter the sRGB hexadecimal code into the field marked with the # sign. The selected color appears in the New preview box. If the object was previously filled with any custom color, this color is displayed in the Current box so you can compare the original and modified colors. When the color is specified, click the Add button: -

                                            Palette - Custom Color

                                            -

                                            The custom color will be applied to the selected element and added to the Custom color palette.

                                            +
                                          • Standard Colors - a set of default colors. The selected color scheme does not affect them.
                                          • +
                                          • + Custom Color - click this caption if the required color is missing among the available palettes. Select the necessary colors range moving the vertical color slider and set a specific color dragging the color picker within the large square color field. Once you select a color with the color picker, the appropriate RGB and sRGB color values will be displayed in the fields on the right. You can also define a color on the base of the RGB color model by entering the corresponding numeric values into the R, G, B (red, green, blue) fields or enter the sRGB hexadecimal code into the field marked with the # sign. The selected color appears in the New preview box. If the object was previously filled with any custom color, this color is displayed in the Current box so you can compare the original and modified colors. When the color is defined, click the Add button: +

                                            Palette - Custom Color

                                            +

                                            The custom color will be applied to the selected element and added to the Custom color palette.

                                          diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ChangeWrappingStyle.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ChangeWrappingStyle.htm index 1954f7bce..f59d30422 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ChangeWrappingStyle.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ChangeWrappingStyle.htm @@ -13,12 +13,12 @@
                                          -

                                          Change text wrapping

                                          +

                                          Change the text wrapping

                                          The Wrapping Style option determines the way the object is positioned relative to the text. You can change the text wrapping style for inserted objects, such as shapes, images, charts, text boxes or tables.

                                          Change text wrapping for shapes, images, charts, text boxes

                                          To change the currently selected wrapping style:

                                            -
                                          1. select a separate object on the page left-clicking it. To select a text box, click on its border, not the text within it.
                                          2. +
                                          3. left-click a separate object to select it. To select a text box, click on its border, not the text within it.
                                          4. open the text wrapping settings:
                                            • switch to the the Layout tab of the top toolbar and click the arrow next to the Wrapping icon Wrapping icon, or
                                            • @@ -30,20 +30,20 @@
                                              • Wrapping Style - Inline Inline - the object is considered to be a part of the text, like a character, so when the text moves, the object moves as well. In this case the positioning options are inaccessible.

                                                -

                                                If one of the following styles is selected, the object can be moved independently of the text and positioned on the page exactly:

                                                +

                                                If one of the following styles is selected, the object can be moved independently of the text and precisely positioned on the page:

                                              • Wrapping Style - Square Square - the text wraps the rectangular box that bounds the object.

                                              • Wrapping Style - Tight Tight - the text wraps the actual object edges.

                                              • -
                                              • Wrapping Style - Through Through - the text wraps around the object edges and fills in the open white space within the object. So that the effect can appear, use the Edit Wrap Boundary option from the right-click menu.

                                              • +
                                              • Wrapping Style - Through Through - the text wraps around the object edges and fills the open white space within the object. To apply this effect, use the Edit Wrap Boundary option from the right-click menu.

                                              • Wrapping Style - Top and bottom Top and bottom - the text is only above and below the object.

                                              • Wrapping Style - In front In front - the object overlaps the text.

                                              • Wrapping Style - Behind Behind - the text overlaps the object.

                                          -

                                          If you select the Square, Tight, Through, or Top and bottom style, you will be able to set up some additional parameters - Distance from Text at all sides (top, bottom, left, right). To access these parameters, right-click the object, select the Advanced Settings option and switch to the Text Wrapping tab of the object Advanced Settings window. Set the necessary values and click OK.

                                          +

                                          If you select the Square, Tight, Through, or Top and bottom style, you will be able to set up some additional parameters - Distance from Text at all sides (top, bottom, left, right). To access these parameters, right-click the object, select the Advanced Settings option and switch to the Text Wrapping tab of the object Advanced Settings window. Set the required values and click OK.

                                          If you select a wrapping style other than Inline, the Position tab is also available in the object Advanced Settings window. To learn more on these parameters, please refer to the corresponding pages with the instructions on how to work with shapes, images or charts.

                                          -

                                          If you select a wrapping style other than Inline, you can also edit the wrap boundary for images or shapes. Right-click the object, select the Wrapping Style option from the contextual menu and click the Edit Wrap Boundary option. Drag wrap points to customize the boundary. To create a new wrap point, click anywhere on the red line and drag it to the necessary position. Editing Wrap Boundary

                                          +

                                          If you select a wrapping style other than Inline, you can also edit the wrap boundary for images or shapes. Right-click the object, select the Wrapping Style option from the contextual menu and click the Edit Wrap Boundary option. Drag wrap points to customize the boundary. To create a new wrap point, click anywhere on the red line and drag it to the required position. Editing Wrap Boundary

                                          Change text wrapping for tables

                                          For tables, the following two wrapping styles are available: Inline table and Flow table.

                                          To change the currently selected wrapping style:

                                          @@ -59,10 +59,10 @@
                                    -

                                    Using the Text Wrapping tab of the Table - Advanced Settings window you can also set up the following additional parameters:

                                    +

                                    Using the Text Wrapping tab of the Table - Advanced Settings window, you can also set up the following additional parameters:

                                    • For inline tables, you can set the table Alignment type (left, center or right) and Indent from left.
                                    • -
                                    • For floating tables, you can set the Distance from text and the table position at the Table Position tab.
                                    • +
                                    • For floating tables, you can set the Distance from text and the table position on the Table Position tab.
                                    diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/CopyClearFormatting.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/CopyClearFormatting.htm index dcf74785a..39809b778 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/CopyClearFormatting.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/CopyClearFormatting.htm @@ -16,21 +16,21 @@

                                    Copy/clear text formatting

                                    To copy a certain text formatting,

                                      -
                                    1. select the text passage which formatting you need to copy with the mouse or using the keyboard,
                                    2. -
                                    3. click the Copy style Copy style icon at the Home tab of the top toolbar (the mouse pointer will look like this Mouse pointer while pasting style),
                                    4. -
                                    5. select the text passage you want to apply the same formatting to.
                                    6. +
                                    7. select the text passage whose formatting you need to copy with the mouse or using the keyboard,
                                    8. +
                                    9. click the Copy style Copy style icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar (the mouse pointer will look like this Mouse pointer while pasting style),
                                    10. +
                                    11. select the required text passage to apply the same formatting.

                                    To apply the copied formatting to multiple text passages,

                                      -
                                    1. select the text passage which formatting you need to copy with the mouse or using the keyboard,
                                    2. -
                                    3. double-click the Copy style Copy style icon at the Home tab of the top toolbar (the mouse pointer will look like this Mouse pointer while pasting style and the Copy style icon will remain selected: Multiple copying style),
                                    4. +
                                    5. select the text passage whose formatting you need to copy with the mouse or use the keyboard,
                                    6. +
                                    7. double-click the Copy style Copy style icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar (the mouse pointer will look like this Mouse pointer while pasting style and the Copy style icon will remain selected: Multiple copying style),
                                    8. select the necessary text passages one by one to apply the same formatting to each of them,
                                    9. to exit this mode, click the Copy style Multiple copying style icon once again or press the Esc key on the keyboard.

                                    To quickly remove the applied formatting from your text,

                                      -
                                    1. select the text passage which formatting you want to remove,
                                    2. -
                                    3. click the Clear style Clear style icon at the Home tab of the top toolbar.
                                    4. +
                                    5. select the text passage whose formatting you want to remove,
                                    6. +
                                    7. click the Clear style Clear style icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar.
                                    diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/CopyPasteUndoRedo.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/CopyPasteUndoRedo.htm index 5279b54dc..f22b4dc4c 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/CopyPasteUndoRedo.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/CopyPasteUndoRedo.htm @@ -15,38 +15,40 @@

                                    Copy/paste text passages, undo/redo your actions

                                    Use basic clipboard operations

                                    -

                                    To cut, copy and paste text passages and inserted objects (autoshapes, images, charts) within the current document use the corresponding options from the right-click menu or icons available at any tab of the top toolbar:

                                    +

                                    To cut, copy and paste text passages and inserted objects (autoshapes, images, charts) in the current document, select the corresponding options from the right-click menu or click the icons located on any tab of the top toolbar:

                                      -
                                    • Cut – select a text fragment or an object and use the Cut option from the right-click menu to delete the selection and send it to the computer clipboard memory. The cut data can be later inserted to another place in the same document.
                                    • -
                                    • Copy – select a text fragment or an object and use the Copy option from the right-click menu, or the Copy Copy icon icon at the top toolbar to copy the selection to the computer clipboard memory. The copied data can be later inserted to another place in the same document.
                                    • -
                                    • Paste – find the place in your document where you need to paste the previously copied text fragment/object and use the Paste option from the right-click menu, or the Paste Paste icon icon at the top toolbar. - The text/object will be inserted at the current cursor position. The data can be previously copied from the same document.
                                    • +
                                    • Cut – select a text fragment or an object and use the Cut option from the right-click menu to delete the selected text and send it to the computer clipboard memory. The cut text can be later inserted to another place in the same document.
                                    • +
                                    • Copy – select a text fragment or an object and use the Copy option from the right-click menu, or the Copy Copy icon icon on the top toolbar to copy the selected text to the computer clipboard memory. The copied text can be later inserted to another place in the same document.
                                    • +
                                    • Paste – find the place in your document where you need to paste the previously copied text fragment/object and use the the Paste option from the right-click menu, or the Paste Paste icon icon on the top toolbar. + The copied text/object will be inserted to the current cursor position. The data can be previously copied from the same document. +
                                    -

                                    In the online version, the following key combinations are only used to copy or paste data from/into another document or some other program, in the desktop version, both the corresponding buttons/menu options and key combinations can be used for any copy/paste operations:

                                    +

                                    In the online version, the key combinations below are only used to copy or paste data from/into another document or a program. In the desktop version, both corresponding buttons/menu options and key combinations can be used for any copy/paste operations:

                                    • Ctrl+X key combination for cutting;
                                    • Ctrl+C key combination for copying;
                                    • Ctrl+V key combination for pasting.
                                    -

                                    Note: instead of cutting and pasting text within the same document you can just select the necessary text passage and drag and drop it to the necessary position.

                                    +

                                    Note: instead of cutting and pasting text fragments in the same document, you can just select the required text passage and drag and drop it to the necessary position.

                                    Use the Paste Special feature

                                    Once the copied text is pasted, the Paste Special Paste Special button appears next to the inserted text passage. Click this button to select the necessary paste option.

                                    -

                                    When pasting the paragraph text or some text within autoshapes, the following options are available:

                                    +

                                    When pasting a text paragraph or some text within autoshapes, the following options are available:

                                      -
                                    • Paste - allows to paste the copied text keeping its original formatting.
                                    • -
                                    • Keep text only - allows to paste the text without its original formatting.
                                    • +
                                    • Paste - allows pasting the copied text keeping its original formatting.
                                    • +
                                    • Keep text only - allows pasting the text without its original formatting.
                                    -

                                    If you paste the copied table into an existing table, the following options are available:

                                    +

                                    If you copy a table and paste it into an already existing table, the following options are available:

                                      -
                                    • Overwrite cells - allows to replace the existing table contents with the pasted data. This option is selected by default.
                                    • -
                                    • Nest table - allows to paste the copied table as a nested table into the selected cell of the existing table.
                                    • -
                                    • Keep text only - allows to paste the table contents as text values separated by the tab character.
                                    • +
                                    • Overwrite cells - allows replacing the contents of the existing table with the copied data. This option is selected by default.
                                    • +
                                    • Nest table - allows pasting the copied table as a nested table into the selected cell of the existing table.
                                    • +
                                    • Keep text only - allows pasting the table contents as text values separated by the tab character.
                                    +

                                    To enable / disable the automatic appearance of the Paste Special button after pasting, go to the File tab > Advanced Settings... and check / uncheck the Cut, copy and paste checkbox.

                                    Undo/redo your actions

                                    -

                                    To perform the undo/redo operations, use the corresponding icons in the editor header or keyboard shortcuts:

                                    +

                                    To perform undo/redo operations, click the corresponding icons in the editor header or use the following keyboard shortcuts:

                                      -
                                    • Undo – use the Undo Undo icon icon at the left part of the editor header or the Ctrl+Z key combination to undo the last operation you performed.
                                    • -
                                    • Redo – use the Redo Redo icon icon at the left part of the editor header or the Ctrl+Y key combination to redo the last undone operation.
                                    • +
                                    • Undo – use the Undo Undo icon icon on the left side of the editor header or the Ctrl+Z key combination to undo the last operation you performed.
                                    • +
                                    • Redo – use the Redo Redo icon icon on the left part of the editor header or the Ctrl+Y key combination to redo the last undone operation.

                                    Note: when you co-edit a document in the Fast mode, the possibility to Redo the last undone operation is not available. diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/CreateLists.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/CreateLists.htm index c285bc369..49adb6c61 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/CreateLists.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/CreateLists.htm @@ -21,21 +21,21 @@

                                  • select the list type you would like to start:
                                      -
                                    • Unordered list with markers is created using the Bullets Unordered List icon icon situated at the top toolbar
                                    • +
                                    • Unordered list with markers is created using the Bullets Unordered List icon icon on the top toolbar
                                    • - Ordered list with digits or letters is created using the Numbering Ordered List icon icon situated at the top toolbar + Ordered list with digits or letters is created using the Numbering Ordered List icon icon on the top toolbar

                                      Note: click the downward arrow next to the Bullets or Numbering icon to select how the list is going to look like.

                                  • -
                                  • now each time you press the Enter key at the end of the line a new ordered or unordered list item will appear. To stop that, press the Backspace key and continue with the common text paragraph.
                                  • +
                                  • each time you press the Enter key at the end of the line, a new ordered or unordered list item will appear. To stop that, press the Backspace key and keep on typing common text paragraphs.

                                The program also creates numbered lists automatically when you enter digit 1 with a dot or a bracket and a space after it: 1., 1). Bulleted lists can be created automatically when you enter the -, * characters and a space after them.

                                -

                                You can also change the text indentation in the lists and their nesting using the Multilevel list Multilevel list icon, Decrease indent Decrease indent icon, and Increase indent Increase indent icon icons at the Home tab of the top toolbar.

                                -

                                Note: the additional indentation and spacing parameters can be changed at the right sidebar and in the advanced settings window. To learn more about it, read the Change paragraph indents and Set paragraph line spacing section.

                                +

                                You can also change the text indentation in the lists and their nesting by clicking the Multilevel list Multilevel list icon, Decrease indent Decrease indent icon, and Increase indent Increase indent icon icons on the Home tab of the top toolbar.

                                +

                                Note: the additional indentation and spacing parameters can be changed on the right sidebar and in the advanced settings window. To learn more about it, read the Change paragraph indents and Set paragraph line spacing section.

                                -

                                Join and separate lists

                                -

                                To join a list to the preceding one:

                                +

                                Combine and separate lists

                                +

                                To combine a list with the previous one:

                                1. click the first item of the second list with the right mouse button,
                                2. use the Join to previous list option from the contextual menu.
                                3. @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@
                                4. click the list item where you want to begin a new list with the right mouse button,
                                5. use the Separate list option from the contextual menu.
                                -

                                The list will be separated, and the numbering in the second list will begin anew.

                                +

                                The lists will be combined, and the numbering will continue in accordance with the first list numbering.

                                Change numbering

                                To continue sequential numbering in the second list according to the previous list numbering:

                                @@ -61,14 +61,14 @@
                                1. click the list item where you want to apply a new numbering value with the right mouse button,
                                2. use the Set numbering value option from the contextual menu,
                                3. -
                                4. in a new window that opens, set the necessary numeric value and click the OK button.
                                5. +
                                6. in the new opened window, set the required numeric value and click the OK button.

                                Change the list settings

                                To change the bulleted or numbered list settings, such as a bullet/number type, alignment, size and color:

                                1. click an existing list item or select the text you want to format as a list,
                                2. -
                                3. click the Bullets Unordered List icon or Numbering Ordered List icon icon at the Home tab of the top toolbar,
                                4. +
                                5. click the Bullets Unordered List icon or Numbering Ordered List icon icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar,
                                6. select the List Settings option,
                                7. the List Settings window will open. The bulleted list settings window looks like this: @@ -77,11 +77,11 @@

                                  Numbered List Settings window

                                  For the bulleted list, you can choose a character used as a bullet, while for the numbered list you can choose the numbering type. The Alignment, Size and Color options are the same both for the bulleted and numbered lists.

                                    -
                                  • Bullet - allows to select the necessary character used for the bulleted list. When you click on the Font and Symbol field, the Symbol window opens that allows to choose one of the available characters. To learn more on how to work with symbols, you can refer to this article.
                                  • -
                                  • Type - allows to select the necessary numbering type used for the numbered list. The following options are available: None, 1, 2, 3,..., a, b, c,..., A, B, C,..., i, ii, iii,..., I, II, III,....
                                  • -
                                  • Alignment - allows to select the necessary bullet/number alignment type that is used to align bullets/numbers horizontally within the space designated for them. The available alignment types are the following: Left, Center, Right.
                                  • -
                                  • Size - allows to select the necessary bullet/number size. The Like a text option is selected by default. When this option is selected, the bullet or number size corresponds to the text size. You can choose one of the predefined sizes from 8 to 96.
                                  • -
                                  • Color - allows to select the necessary bullet/number color. The Like a text option is selected by default. When this option is selected, the bullet or number color corresponds to the text color. You can choose the Automatic option to apply the automatic color, or select one of the theme colors, or standard colors on the palette, or specify a custom color.
                                  • +
                                  • Bullet allows selecting the required character used for the bulleted list. When you click on the Font and Symbol field, the Symbol window will appear, and you will be able to choose one of the available characters. To learn more on how to work with symbols, please refer to this article.
                                  • +
                                  • Type allows selecting the required numbering type used for the numbered list. The following options are available: None, 1, 2, 3,..., a, b, c,..., A, B, C,..., i, ii, iii,..., I, II, III,....
                                  • +
                                  • Alignment allows selecting the required bullet/number alignment type that is used to align bullets/numbers horizontally. The following alignment types are available: Left, Center, Right.
                                  • +
                                  • Size allows selecting the required bullet/number size. The Like a text option is selected by default. When this option is selected, the bullet or number size corresponds to the text size. You can choose one of the predefined sizes ranging from 8 to 96.
                                  • +
                                  • Color allows selecting the required bullet/number color. The Like a text option is selected by default. When this option is selected, the bullet or number color corresponds to the text color. You can choose the Automatic option to apply the automatic color, or select one of the theme colors, or standard colors in the palette, or specify a custom color.

                                  All the changes are displayed in the Preview field.

                                8. @@ -90,17 +90,17 @@

                                  To change the multilevel list settings,

                                  1. click a list item,
                                  2. -
                                  3. click the Multilevel list Multilevel list icon icon at the Home tab of the top toolbar,
                                  4. +
                                  5. click the Multilevel list Multilevel list icon icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar,
                                  6. select the List Settings option,
                                  7. the List Settings window will open. The multilevel list settings window looks like this:

                                    Multilevel List Settings window

                                    Choose the necessary level of the list in the Level field on the left, then use the buttons on the top to adjust the bullet or number appearance for the selected level:

                                      -
                                    • Type - allows to select the necessary numbering type used for the numbered list or the necessary character used for the bulleted list. The following options are available for the numbered list: None, 1, 2, 3,..., a, b, c,..., A, B, C,..., i, ii, iii,..., I, II, III,.... For the bulleted list, you can choose one of the default symbols or use the New bullet option. When you click this option, the Symbol window opens that allows to choose one of the available characters. To learn more on how to work with symbols, you can refer to this article.
                                    • -
                                    • Alignment - allows to select the necessary bullet/number alignment type that is used to align bullets/numbers horizontally within the space designated for them at the beginning of the paragraph. The available alignment types are the following: Left, Center, Right.
                                    • -
                                    • Size - allows to select the necessary bullet/number size. The Like a text option is selected by default. You can choose one of the predefined sizes from 8 to 96.
                                    • -
                                    • Color - allows to select the necessary bullet/number color. The Like a text option is selected by default. When this option is selected, the bullet or number color corresponds to the text color. You can choose the Automatic option to apply the automatic color, or select one of the theme colors, or standard colors on the palette, or specify a custom color.
                                    • +
                                    • Type allows selecting the required numbering type used for the numbered list or the required character used for the bulleted list. The following options are available for the numbered list: None, 1, 2, 3,..., a, b, c,..., A, B, C,..., i, ii, iii,..., I, II, III,.... For the bulleted list, you can choose one of the default symbols or use the New bullet option. When you click this option, the Symbol window will appear, and you will be able to choose one of the available characters. To learn more on how to work with symbols, please refer to this article.
                                    • +
                                    • Alignment allows selecting the required bullet/number alignment type that is used to align bullets/numbers horizontally at the beginning of the paragraph. The following alignment types are available: Left, Center, Right.
                                    • +
                                    • Size allows selecting the required bullet/number size. The Like a text option is selected by default. You can choose one of the predefined sizes ranging from 8 to 96.
                                    • +
                                    • Color allows selecting the required bullet/number color. The Like a text option is selected by default. When this option is selected, the bullet or number color corresponds to the text color. You can choose the Automatic option to apply the automatic color, or select one of the theme colors, or standard colors on the palette, or specify a custom color.

                                    All the changes are displayed in the Preview field.

                                  8. diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/CreateTableOfContents.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/CreateTableOfContents.htm index dc4d4346f..fe6d4ddd2 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/CreateTableOfContents.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/CreateTableOfContents.htm @@ -14,19 +14,19 @@

                                    Create a Table of Contents

                                    -

                                    A table of contents contains a list of all chapters (sections etc.) in a document and displays the numbers of the pages where each chapter is started. This allows to easily navigate through a multi-page document quickly switching to the necessary part of the text. The table of contents is generated automatically on the base of the document headings formatted using built-in styles. This makes it easy to update the created table of contents without the necessity to edit headings and change page numbers manually if the document text has been changed.

                                    +

                                    A table of contents contains a list of all the chapters (sections, etc.) in a document and displays the numbers of the pages where each chapter begins. It allows easily navigating through a multi-page document and quickly switching to the required part of the text. The table of contents is generated automatically on the basis of the document headings formatted using built-in styles. This makes it easy to update the created table of contents without having to edit the headings and change the page numbers manually if the text of the document has been changed.

                                    Define the heading structure

                                    Format headings

                                    -

                                    First of all, format headings in you document using one of the predefined styles. To do that,

                                    +

                                    First of all, format the headings in your document using one of the predefined styles. To do that,

                                    1. Select the text you want to include into the table of contents.
                                    2. Open the style menu on the right side of the Home tab at the top toolbar.
                                    3. -
                                    4. Click the style you want to apply. By default, you can use the Heading 1 - Heading 9 styles. -

                                      Note: if you want to use other styles (e.g. Title, Subtitle etc.) to format headings that will be included into the table of contents, you will need to adjust the table of contents settings first (see the corresponding section below). To learn more about available formatting styles, you can refer to this page.

                                      +
                                    5. Click the required style to be applied. By default, you can use the Heading 1 - Heading 9 styles. +

                                      Note: if you want to use other styles (e.g. Title, Subtitle etc.) to format headings that will be included into the table of contents, you will need to adjust the table of contents settings first (see the corresponding section below). To learn more about available formatting styles, please refer to this page.

                                    -

                                    Once the headings are formatted, you can click the Navigation icon Navigation icon at the left sidebar to open the panel that displays the list of all headings with corresponding nesting levels. This panel allows to easily navigate between headings in the document text as well as manage the heading structure.

                                    +

                                    Once the headings are formatted, you can click the Navigation icon Navigation icon on the left sidebar to open the panel that displays the list of all headings with corresponding nesting levels. This panel allows easily navigating between headings in the document text as well as managing the heading structure.

                                    Right-click on a heading in the list and use one of the available options from the menu:

                                    Navigation panel

                                      @@ -43,13 +43,13 @@
                                    • Expand to level - to expand the heading structure to the selected level. E.g. if you select level 3, then levels 1, 2 and 3 will be expanded, while level 4 and all lower levels will be collapsed.

                                    To manually expand or collapse separate heading levels, use the arrows to the left of the headings.

                                    -

                                    To close the Navigation panel, click the Navigation icon Navigation icon at the left sidebar once again.

                                    +

                                    To close the Navigation panel, click the Navigation icon Navigation icon on the left sidebar once again.

                                    Insert a Table of Contents into the document

                                    To insert a table of contents into your document:

                                      -
                                    1. Position the insertion point where you want to add the table of contents.
                                    2. +
                                    3. Position the insertion point where the table of contents should be added.
                                    4. Switch to the References tab of the top toolbar.
                                    5. -
                                    6. Click the Table of Contents icon Table of Contents icon at the top toolbar, or
                                      +
                                    7. Click the Table of Contents icon Table of Contents icon on the top toolbar, or
                                      click the arrow next to this icon and select the necessary layout option from the menu. You can select the table of contents that displays headings, page numbers and leaders, or headings only.

                                      Table of Contents options

                                      Note: the table of content appearance can be adjusted later via the table of contents settings.

                                      @@ -60,8 +60,8 @@

                                      To navigate between headings, press the Ctrl key and click the necessary heading within the table of contents field. You will go to the corresponding page.

                                      Adjust the created Table of Contents

                                      Refresh the Table of Contents

                                      -

                                      After the table of contents is created, you may continue editing your text by adding new chapters, changing their order, removing some paragraphs, or expanding the text related to a heading so that the page numbers that correspond to the preceding or subsequent section may change. In this case, use the Refresh option to automatically apply all changes to the table of contents.

                                      -

                                      Click the arrow next to the Refresh icon Refresh icon at the References tab of the top toolbar and select the necessary option from the menu:

                                      +

                                      After the table of contents is created, you can continue editing your text by adding new chapters, changing their order, removing some paragraphs, or expanding the text related to a heading so that the page numbers that correspond to the previous or the following section may change. In this case, use the Refresh option to automatically apply all changes to the table of contents.

                                      +

                                      Click the arrow next to the Refresh icon Refresh icon on the References tab of the top toolbar and select the necessary option from the menu:

                                      • Refresh entire table - to add the headings that you added to the document, remove the ones you deleted from the document, update the edited (renamed) headings as well as update page numbers.
                                      • Refresh page numbers only - to update page numbers without applying changes to the headings.
                                      • @@ -73,30 +73,33 @@

                                        Adjust the Table of Contents settings

                                        To open the table of contents settings, you can proceed in the following ways:

                                          -
                                        • Click the arrow next to the Table of Contents icon Table of Contents icon at the top toolbar and select the Settings option from the menu.
                                        • +
                                        • Click the arrow next to the Table of Contents icon Table of Contents icon on the top toolbar and select the Settings option from the menu.
                                        • Select the table of contents in the document text, click the arrow next to the table of contents field title and select the Settings option from the menu.

                                          Table of Contents options

                                        • Right-click anywhere within the table of contents and use the Table of contents settings option from the contextual menu.
                                        -

                                        A new window will open where you can adjust the following settings:

                                        +

                                        A new window will open, and you will be able to adjust the following settings:

                                        Table of Contents settings window

                                          -
                                        • Show page numbers - this option allows to choose if you want to display page numbers or not.
                                        • -
                                        • Right align page numbers - this option allows to choose if you want to align page numbers by the right side of the page or not.
                                        • -
                                        • Leader - this option allows to choose the leader type you want to use. A leader is a line of characters (dots or hyphens) that fills the space between a heading and a corresponding page number. It's also possible to select the None option if you do not want to use leaders.
                                        • +
                                        • Show page numbers - this option allows displaying the page numbers.
                                        • +
                                        • Right align page numbers - this option allows aligning the page numbers on the right side of the page.
                                        • +
                                        • Leader - this option allows choose the required leader type. A leader is a line of characters (dots or hyphens) that fills the space between a heading and the corresponding page number. It's also possible to select the None option if you do not want to use leaders.
                                        • Format Table of Contents as links - this option is checked by default. If you uncheck it, you will not be able to switch to the necessary chapter by pressing Ctrl and clicking the corresponding heading.
                                        • -
                                        • Build table of contents from - this section allows to specify the necessary number of outline levels as well as the default styles that will be used to create the table of contents. Check the necessary radio button: -
                                            -
                                          • Outline levels - when this option is selected, you will be able to adjust the number of hierarchical levels used in the table of contents. Click the arrows in the Levels field to decrease or increase the number of levels (the values from 1 to 9 are available). E.g., if you select the value of 3, headings that have levels 4 - 9 will not be included into the table of contents. -
                                          • -
                                          • Selected styles - when this option is selected, you can specify additional styles that can be used to build the table of contents and assign a corresponding outline level to each of them. Specify the desired level value in the field to the right of the style. Once you save the settings, you will be able to use this style when creating the table of contents. -

                                            Table of Contents settings window

                                            -
                                          • -
                                          +
                                        • Build table of contents from - this section allows specifying the necessary number of outline levels as well as the default styles that will be used to create the table of contents. Check the necessary radio button: +
                                            +
                                          • + Outline levels - when this option is selected, you will be able to adjust the number of hierarchical levels used in the table of contents. Click the arrows in the Levels field to decrease or increase the number of levels (the values from 1 to 9 are available). E.g., if you select the value of 3, headings that have levels 4 - 9 will not be included into the table of contents. +
                                          • +
                                          • + Selected styles - when this option is selected, you can specify additional styles that can be used to build the table of contents and assign the corresponding outline level to each of them. Specify the desired level value in the field on the right of the style. Once you save the settings, you will be able to use this style when creating a table of contents. +

                                            Table of Contents settings window

                                            +
                                          • +
                                        • -
                                        • Styles - this options allows to select the desired appearance of the table of contents. Select the necessary style from the drop-down list. The preview field above displays how the table of contents should look like. -

                                          The following four default styles are available: Simple, Standard, Modern, Classic. The Current option is used if you customize the table of contents style.

                                          +
                                        • + Styles - this options allows selecting the desired appearance of the table of contents. Select the necessary style from the drop-down list. The preview field above displays how the table of contents should look like. +

                                          The following four default styles are available: Simple, Standard, Modern, Classic. The Current option is used if you customize the table of contents style.

                                        Click the OK button within the settings window to apply the changes.

                                        @@ -113,7 +116,7 @@

                                        Remove the Table of Contents

                                        To remove the table of contents from the document:

                                          -
                                        • click the arrow next to the Table of Contents icon Table of Contents icon at the top toolbar and use the Remove table of contents option,
                                        • +
                                        • click the arrow next to the Table of Contents icon Table of Contents icon on the top toolbar and use the Remove table of contents option,
                                        • or click the arrow next to the table of contents content control title and use the Remove table of contents option.
                                        diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/DecorationStyles.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/DecorationStyles.htm index bdf90b6cb..5f2b3aec9 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/DecorationStyles.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/DecorationStyles.htm @@ -14,47 +14,47 @@

                                        Apply font decoration styles

                                        -

                                        You can apply various font decoration styles using the corresponding icons situated at the Home tab of the top toolbar.

                                        -

                                        Note: in case you want to apply the formatting to the text already present in the document, select it with the mouse or using the keyboard and apply the formatting.

                                        +

                                        You can apply various font decoration styles using the corresponding icons on the Home tab of the top toolbar.

                                        +

                                        Note: in case you want to apply the formatting to the already existing text in the document, select it with the mouse or use the keyboard and apply the formatting.

                                Formats
                                PDFPortable Document Format
                                File format used to represent documents in a manner independent of application software, hardware, and operating systems
                                Portable Document Format
                                File format used to represent documents regardless of the used software, hardware, and operating systems
                                + +
                                Logical AND(logical1, logical2, ...)The function is used to check if the logical value you enter is TRUE or FALSE. The function returns 1 (TRUE) if all the arguments are TRUE.The function is used to check if the logical value you entered is TRUE or FALSE. The function returns 1 (TRUE) if all the arguments are TRUE. =AND(1>0,1>3)
                                Returns 0
                                The function returns 0 (FALSE) and does not require any argument. =FALSE
                                Returns 0
                                LogicalIF(logical_test, value_if_true, value_if_false)The function is used to check the logical expression and return one value if it is TRUE, or another if it is FALSE.=IF(3>1,1,0)
                                Returns 1
                                Mathematical INT(x)
                                Logical NOT(logical)The function is used to check if the logical value you enter is TRUE or FALSE. The function returns 1 (TRUE) if the argument is FALSE and 0 (FALSE) if the argument is TRUE.The function is used to check if the logical value you entered is TRUE or FALSE. The function returns 1 (TRUE) if the argument is FALSE and 0 (FALSE) if the argument is TRUE. =NOT(2<5)
                                Returns 0
                                Logical OR(logical1, logical2, ...)The function is used to check if the logical value you enter is TRUE or FALSE. The function returns 0 (FALSE) if all the arguments are FALSE.The function is used to check if the logical value you entered is TRUE or FALSE. The function returns 0 (FALSE) if all the arguments are FALSE. =OR(1>0,1>3)
                                Returns 1
                                - + - + - + - + - + - +
                                Bold BoldIs used to make the font bold giving it more weight.Used to make the font bold giving it a heavier appearance.
                                Italic ItalicIs used to make the font italicized giving it some right side tilt.Used to make the font slightly slanted to the right.
                                Underline UnderlineIs used to make the text underlined with the line going under the letters.Used to make the text underlined with a line going under the letters.
                                Strikeout StrikeoutIs used to make the text struck out with the line going through the letters.Used to make the text struck out with a line going through the letters.
                                Superscript SuperscriptIs used to make the text smaller and place it to the upper part of the text line, e.g. as in fractions.Used to make the text smaller placing it in the upper part of the text line, e.g. as in fractions.
                                Subscript SubscriptIs used to make the text smaller and place it to the lower part of the text line, e.g. as in chemical formulas.Used to make the text smaller placing it in the lower part of the text line, e.g. as in chemical formulas.
                                -

                                To access advanced font settings, click the right mouse button and select the Paragraph Advanced Settings option from the menu or use the Show advanced settings link at the right sidebar. Then the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window will open where you need to switch to the Font tab.

                                +

                                To access the advanced font settings, click the right mouse button and select the Paragraph Advanced Settings option from the menu or use the Show advanced settings link on the right sidebar. Then the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window will appear, and you will need to switch to the Font tab.

                                Here you can use the following font decoration styles and settings:

                                  -
                                • Strikethrough is used to make the text struck out with the line going through the letters.
                                • -
                                • Double strikethrough is used to make the text struck out with the double line going through the letters.
                                • -
                                • Superscript is used to make the text smaller and place it to the upper part of the text line, e.g. as in fractions.
                                • -
                                • Subscript is used to make the text smaller and place it to the lower part of the text line, e.g. as in chemical formulas.
                                • +
                                • Strikethrough is used to make the text struck out with a line going through the letters.
                                • +
                                • Double strikethrough is used to make the text struck out with a double line going through the letters.
                                • +
                                • Superscript is used to make the text smaller placing it in the upper part of the text line, e.g. as in fractions.
                                • +
                                • Subscript is used to make the text smaller placing it in the lower part of the text line, e.g. as in chemical formulas.
                                • Small caps is used to make all letters lower case.
                                • All caps is used to make all letters upper case.
                                • Spacing is used to set the space between the characters. Increase the default value to apply the Expanded spacing, or decrease the default value to apply the Condensed spacing. Use the arrow buttons or enter the necessary value in the box.
                                • diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/FontTypeSizeColor.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/FontTypeSizeColor.htm index aeef0c97d..3c7ba59a0 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/FontTypeSizeColor.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/FontTypeSizeColor.htm @@ -13,42 +13,42 @@
                                  -

                                  Set font type, size, and color

                                  -

                                  You can select the font type, its size and color using the corresponding icons situated at the Home tab of the top toolbar.

                                  -

                                  Note: in case you want to apply the formatting to the text already present in the document, select it with the mouse or using the keyboard and apply the formatting.

                                  +

                                  Set the font type, size, and color

                                  +

                                  You can select the font type, its size and color using the corresponding icons on the Home tab of the top toolbar.

                                  +

                                  Note: in case you want to apply the formatting to the already existing text in the document, select it with the mouse or use the keyboard and apply the formatting.

                                  - + - + - + - + - + - +
                                  Font FontIs used to select one of the fonts from the list of the available ones. If a required font is not available in the list, you can download and install it on your operating system, after that the font will be available for use in the desktop version.Used to select a font from the list of the the available fonts. If the required font is not available in the list, you can download and install it on your operating system, and the font will be available in the desktop version.
                                  Font size Font sizeIs used to select among the preset font size values from the dropdown list (the default values are: 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 36, 48, 72 and 96). It's also possible to manually enter a custom value to the font size field and then press Enter.Used to choose from the preset font size values in the dropdown list (the default values are: 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 36, 48, 72 and 96). It's also possible to manually enter a custom value in the font size field and then press Enter.
                                  Increment font size Increment font sizeIs used to change the font size making it larger one point each time the button is pressed.Used to change the font size making it one point bigger each time the button is pressed.
                                  Decrement font size Decrement font sizeIs used to change the font size making it smaller one point each time the button is pressed.Used to change the font size making it one point smaller each time the button is pressed.
                                  Highlight color Highlight colorIs used to mark separate sentences, phrases, words, or even characters by adding a color band that imitates highlighter pen effect around the text. You can select the necessary part of the text and then click the downward arrow next to the icon to select a color on the palette (this color set does not depend on the selected Color scheme and includes 16 colors) - the color will be applied to the text selection. Alternatively, you can first choose a highlight color and then start selecting the text with the mouse - the mouse pointer will look like this Mouse pointer while highlighting and you'll be able to highlight several different parts of your text sequentially. To stop highlighting just click the icon once again. To clear the highlight color, choose the No Fill option. Highlight color is different from the Background color Paragraph background color icon as the latter is applied to the whole paragraph and completely fills all the paragraph space from the left page margin to the right page margin.Used to mark separate sentences, phrases, words, or even characters by adding a color band that imitates the highlighter pen effect throughout the text. You can select the required part of the text and click the downward arrow next to the icon to select a color in the palette (this color set does not depend on the selected Color scheme and includes 16 colors) - the color will be applied to the selected text. Alternatively, you can first choose a highlight color and then start selecting the text with the mouse - the mouse pointer will look like this Mouse pointer while highlighting and you'll be able to highlight several different parts of your text sequentially. To stop highlighting, just click the icon once again. To delete the highlight color, choose the No Fill option. The Highlight color is different from the Background color Paragraph background color icon as the latter is applied to the whole paragraph and completely fills all the paragraph space from the left page margin to the right page margin.
                                  Font color Font colorIs used to change the color of the letters/characters in the text. By default, the automatic font color is set in a new blank document. It is displayed as a black font on the white background. If you change the background color into black, the font color will automatically change into white to keep the text clearly visible. To choose a different color, click the downward arrow next to the icon and select a color from the available palettes (the colors on the Theme Colors palette depend on the selected color scheme). After you change the default font color, you can use the Automatic option in the color palettes window to quickly restore the automatic color for the selected text passage.Used to change the color of the letters/characters in the text. By default, the automatic font color is set in a new blank document. It is displayed as a black font on the white background. If you change the background color to black, the font color will automatically change to white to keep the text clearly visible. To choose a different color, click the downward arrow next to the icon and select a color from the available palettes (the colors in the Theme Colors palette depend on the selected color scheme). After you change the default font color, you can use the Automatic option in the color palettes window to quickly restore the automatic color for the selected text passage.
                                  -

                                  Note: to learn more about the work with color palettes, please refer to this page.

                                  +

                                  Note: to learn more about color palettes, please refer to this page.

                                  \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/FormattingPresets.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/FormattingPresets.htm index d04ad8b0b..92a233693 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/FormattingPresets.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/FormattingPresets.htm @@ -14,13 +14,13 @@

                                  Apply formatting styles

                                  -

                                  Each formatting style is a set of predefined formatting options: (font size, color, line spacing, alignment etc.). The styles allow you to quickly format different parts of the document (headings, subheadings, lists, normal text, quotes) instead of applying several formatting options individually each time. This also ensures a consistent appearance throughout the entire document.

                                  -

                                  Style application depends on whether a style is a paragraph style (normal, no spacing, headings, list paragraph etc.), or the text style (based on the font type, size, color), as well as on whether a text passage is selected, or the mouse cursor is positioned within a word. In some cases you might need to select the necessary style from the style library twice so that it can be applied correctly: when you click the style at the style panel for the first time, the paragraph style properties are applied. When you click it for the second time, the text properties are applied.

                                  +

                                  Each formatting style is a set of predefined formatting options: (font size, color, line spacing, alignment etc.). The styles allow you to quickly format different parts of the document (headings, subheadings, lists, normal text, quotes) instead of applying several formatting options individually each time. This also ensures the consistent appearance of the whole document.

                                  +

                                  Applying a style depends on whether this style is a paragraph style (normal, no spacing, headings, list paragraph etc.), or a text style (based on the font type, size, color). It also depends on whether a text passage is selected, or the mouse cursor is placed on a word. In some cases you might need to select the required style from the style library twice, so that it can be applied correctly: when you click the style in the style panel for the first time, the paragraph style properties are applied. When you click it for the second time, the text properties are applied.

                                  Use default styles

                                  To apply one of the available text formatting styles,

                                    -
                                  1. place the cursor within the paragraph you need, or select several paragraphs you want to apply one of the formatting styles to,
                                  2. -
                                  3. select the needed style from the style gallery on the right at the Home tab of the top toolbar.
                                  4. +
                                  5. place the cursor within the required paragraph, or select several paragraphs,
                                  6. +
                                  7. select the required style from the style gallery on the right on the Home tab of the top toolbar.

                                  The following formatting styles are available: normal, no spacing, heading 1-9, title, subtitle, quote, intense quote, list paragraph, footer, header, footnote text.

                                  Formatting styles

                                  @@ -36,7 +36,7 @@
                            -

                            Once the style is modified, all the paragraphs within the document formatted using this style will change their appearance correspondingly.

                            +

                            Once the style is modified, all the paragraphs in the document formatted with this style will change their appearance correspondingly.

                            To create a completely new style:

                            1. Format a text passage as you need.
                            2. @@ -46,13 +46,13 @@
                            3. or select the edited text passage with the mouse, drop-down the style gallery and click the New style from selection option.
                        • -
                        • Set the new style parameters in the Create New Style window that opens: -

                          Create New Style window

                          -
                            -
                          • Specify the new style name in the text entry field.
                          • -
                          • Select the desired style for the subsequent paragraph from the Next paragraph style list. It's also possible to choose the Same as created new style option.
                          • -
                          • Click the OK button.
                          • -
                          +
                        • Set the new style parameters in the opened Create New Style window: +

                          Create New Style window

                          +
                            +
                          • Specify the new style name in the text entry field.
                          • +
                          • Select the desired style for the subsequent paragraph from the Next paragraph style list. It's also possible to choose the Same as created new style option.
                          • +
                          • Click the OK button.
                          • +
                        • The created style will be added to the style gallery.

                          diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm index 8dd444ab3..bf37d125e 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm @@ -18,22 +18,24 @@

                          To add an autoshape to your document,

                          1. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar,
                          2. -
                          3. click the Shape icon Shape icon at the top toolbar,
                          4. +
                          5. click the Shape icon Shape icon on the top toolbar,
                          6. select one of the available autoshape groups: basic shapes, figured arrows, math, charts, stars & ribbons, callouts, buttons, rectangles, lines,
                          7. click the necessary autoshape within the selected group,
                          8. -
                          9. place the mouse cursor where you want the shape to be put,
                          10. -
                          11. once the autoshape is added you can change its size, position and properties. -

                            Note: to add a caption within the autoshape make sure the shape is selected on the page and start typing your text. The text you add in this way becomes a part of the autoshape (when you move or rotate the shape, the text moves or rotates with it).

                            +
                          12. place the mouse cursor where the shape should be added,
                          13. +
                          14. once the autoshape is added, you can change its size, position and properties. +

                            Note: to add a caption to an autoshape, make sure the required shape is selected on the page and start typing your text. The added text becomes a part of the autoshape (when you move or rotate the shape, the text moves or rotates with it).

                          It's also possible to add a caption to the autoshape. To learn more on how to work with captions for autoshapes, you can refer to this article.

                          Move and resize autoshapes

                          -

                          Reshaping autoshapeTo change the autoshape size, drag small squares Square icon situated on the shape edges. To maintain the original proportions of the selected autoshape while resizing, hold down the Shift key and drag one of the corner icons. +

                          Reshaping autoshapeTo change the autoshape size, drag small squares Square icon situated on the shape edges. To maintain the original proportions of the selected autoshape while resizing, hold down the Shift key and drag one of the corner icons.

                          When modifying some shapes, for example figured arrows or callouts, the yellow diamond-shaped Yellow diamond icon icon is also available. It allows you to adjust some aspects of the shape, for example, the length of the head of an arrow.

                          -

                          To alter the autoshape position, use the Arrow icon that appears after hovering your mouse cursor over the autoshape. Drag the autoshape to the necessary position without releasing the mouse button. - When you move the autoshape, guide lines are displayed to help you position the object on the page precisely (if a wrapping style other than inline is selected). - To move the autoshape by one-pixel increments, hold down the Ctrl key and use the keybord arrows. - To move the autoshape strictly horizontally/vertically and prevent it from moving in a perpendicular direction, hold down the Shift key when dragging.

                          +

                          + To alter the autoshape position, use the Arrow icon that appears after hovering your mouse cursor over the autoshape. Drag the autoshape to the required position without releasing the mouse button. + When you move the autoshape, the guide lines are displayed to help you precisely position the object on the page (if the selected wrapping style is not inline). + To move the autoshape by one-pixel increments, hold down the Ctrl key and use the keybord arrows. + To move the autoshape strictly horizontally/vertically and prevent it from moving in a perpendicular direction, hold down the Shift key when dragging. +

                          To rotate the autoshape, hover the mouse cursor over the rotation handle Rotation handle and drag it clockwise or counterclockwise. To constrain the rotation angle to 15 degree increments, hold down the Shift key while rotating.

                          Note: the list of keyboard shortcuts that can be used when working with objects is available here. @@ -42,9 +44,9 @@

                          Adjust autoshape settings

                          To align and arrange autoshapes, use the right-click menu. The menu options are:

                            -
                          • Cut, Copy, Paste - standard options which are used to cut or copy a selected text/object and paste a previously cut/copied text passage or object to the current cursor position.
                          • -
                          • Arrange is used to bring the selected autoshape to foreground, send to background, move forward or backward as well as group or ungroup shapes to perform operations with several of them at once. To learn more on how to arrange objects you can refer to this page.
                          • -
                          • Align is used to align the shape left, center, right, top, middle, bottom. To learn more on how to align objects you can refer to this page.
                          • +
                          • Cut, Copy, Paste - standard options which are used to cut or copy the selected text/object and paste the previously cut/copied text passage or object to the current cursor position.
                          • +
                          • Arrange is used to bring the selected autoshape to foreground, send it to background, move forward or backward as well as group or ungroup shapes to perform operations with several of them at once. To learn more on how to arrange objects, please refer to this page.
                          • +
                          • Align is used to align the shape to the left, in the center, to the right, at the top, in the middle, at the bottom. To learn more on how to align objects, please refer to this page.
                          • Wrapping Style is used to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind - or edit the wrap boundary. The Edit Wrap Boundary option is available only if you select a wrapping style other than Inline. Drag wrap points to customize the boundary. To create a new wrap point, click anywhere on the red line and drag it to the necessary position. Editing Wrap Boundary
                          • Rotate is used to rotate the shape by 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise as well as to flip the shape horizontally or vertically.
                          • Shape Advanced Settings is used to open the 'Shape - Advanced Settings' window.
                          • @@ -54,9 +56,9 @@
                            • Fill - use this section to select the autoshape fill. You can choose the following options:
                                -
                              • Color Fill - select this option to specify the solid color you want to fill the inner space of the selected autoshape with. -

                                Color Fill

                                -

                                Click the colored box below and select the necessary color from the available color sets or specify any color you like:

                                +
                              • Color Fill - select this option to specify the solid color to fill the inner space of the selected autoshape. +

                                Color Fill

                                +

                                Click the colored box below and select the necessary color from the available color sets or specify any color you like:

                              • Gradient Fill - select this option to fill the shape with two colors which smoothly change from one to another.

                                Gradient Fill

                                @@ -69,7 +71,7 @@
                              • Picture or Texture - select this option to use an image or a predefined texture as the shape background.

                                Picture or Texture Fill

                                  -
                                • If you wish to use an image as a background for the shape, you can add an image From File selecting it on your computer HDD or From URL inserting the appropriate URL address into the opened window.
                                • +
                                • If you wish to use an image as a background for the shape, you can add an image From File by selecting it on your computer hard disc drive, From URL by inserting the appropriate URL address into the opened window, or From Storage by selecting the required image stored on your portal.
                                • If you wish to use a texture as a background for the shape, open the From Texture menu and select the necessary texture preset.

                                  Currently, the following textures are available: canvas, carton, dark fabric, grain, granite, grey paper, knit, leather, brown paper, papyrus, wood.

                                • @@ -114,23 +116,23 @@
                                • Wrapping Style - use this section to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind (for more information see the advanced settings description below).
                                • Change Autoshape - use this section to replace the current autoshape with another one selected from the dropdown list.
                                • -
                                • Show shadow - check this option to display shape with shadow.
                                • +
                                • Show shadow - check this option to display the shape with a shadow.

                                Adjust autoshape advanced settings

                                -

                                To change the advanced settings of the autoshape, right-click it and select the Advanced Settings option in the menu or use the Show advanced settings link at the right sidebar. The 'Shape - Advanced Settings' window will open:

                                +

                                To change the advanced settings of the autoshape, right-click it and select the Advanced Settings option in the menu or use the Show advanced settings link on the right sidebar. The 'Shape - Advanced Settings' window will open:

                                Shape - Advanced Settings

                                The Size tab contains the following parameters:

                                • Width - use one of these options to change the autoshape width.
                                    -
                                  • Absolute - specify an exact value measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified at the File -> Advanced Settings... tab).
                                  • +
                                  • Absolute - specify an exact value measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified on the File -> Advanced Settings... tab).
                                  • Relative - specify a percentage relative to the left margin width, the margin (i.e. the distance between the left and right margins), the page width, or the right margin width.
                                • Height - use one of these options to change the autoshape height.
                                    -
                                  • Absolute - specify an exact value measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified at the File -> Advanced Settings... tab).
                                  • +
                                  • Absolute - specify an exact value measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified on the File -> Advanced Settings... tab).
                                  • Relative - specify a percentage relative to the margin (i.e. the distance between the top and bottom margins), the bottom margin height, the page height, or the top margin height.
                                • @@ -159,15 +161,15 @@
                              -

                              If you select the square, tight, through, or top and bottom style you will be able to set up some additional parameters - distance from text at all sides (top, bottom, left, right).

                              +

                              If you select the square, tight, through, or top and bottom styles, you will be able to set up some additional parameters - distance from text at all sides (top, bottom, left, right).

                              Shape - Advanced Settings

                              -

                              The Position tab is available only if you select a wrapping style other than inline. This tab contains the following parameters that vary depending on the selected wrapping style:

                              +

                              The Position tab is available only if the selected wrapping style is not inline. This tab contains the following parameters that vary depending on the selected wrapping style:

                              • The Horizontal section allows you to select one of the following three autoshape positioning types:
                                • Alignment (left, center, right) relative to character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin,
                                • -
                                • Absolute Position measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified at the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) to the right of character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin,
                                • +
                                • Absolute Position measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified on the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) to the right of character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin,
                                • Relative position measured in percent relative to the left margin, margin, page or right margin.
                              • @@ -175,42 +177,44 @@ The Vertical section allows you to select one of the following three autoshape positioning types:
                                • Alignment (top, center, bottom) relative to line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin,
                                • -
                                • Absolute Position measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified at the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) below line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin,
                                • +
                                • Absolute Position measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified on the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) below line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin,
                                • Relative position measured in percent relative to the margin, bottom margin, page or top margin.
                                -
                              • Move object with text controls whether the autoshape moves as the text to which it is anchored moves.
                              • -
                              • Allow overlap controls whether two autoshapes overlap or not if you drag them near each other on the page.
                              • +
                              • Move object with text ensures that the autoshape moves along with the text to which it is anchored.
                              • +
                              • Allow overlap makes it possible for two autoshapes to overlap if you drag them near each other on the page.

                              Shape - Advanced Settings

                              The Weights & Arrows tab contains the following parameters:

                                -
                              • Line Style - this option group allows to specify the following parameters: -
                                  -
                                • Cap Type - this option allows to set the style for the end of the line, therefore it can be applied only to the shapes with the open outline, such as lines, polylines etc.: +
                                • Line Style - this option group allows specifying the following parameters:
                                    -
                                  • Flat - the end points will be flat.
                                  • -
                                  • Round - the end points will be rounded.
                                  • -
                                  • Square - the end points will be square.
                                  • +
                                  • + Cap Type - this option allows setting the style for the end of the line, therefore it can be applied only to the shapes with the open outline, such as lines, polylines etc.: +
                                      +
                                    • Flat - the end points will be flat.
                                    • +
                                    • Round - the end points will be rounded.
                                    • +
                                    • Square - the end points will be square.
                                    • +
                                    +
                                  • +
                                  • + Join Type - this option allows setting the style for the intersection of two lines, for example, it can affect a polyline or the corners of the triangle or rectangle outline: +
                                      +
                                    • Round - the corner will be rounded.
                                    • +
                                    • Bevel - the corner will be cut off angularly.
                                    • +
                                    • Miter - the corner will be pointed. It goes well to shapes with sharp angles.
                                    • +
                                    +

                                    Note: the effect will be more noticeable if you use a large outline width.

                                    +
                                • -
                                • Join Type - this option allows to set the style for the intersection of two lines, for example, it can affect a polyline or the corners of the triangle or rectangle outline: -
                                    -
                                  • Round - the corner will be rounded.
                                  • -
                                  • Bevel - the corner will be cut off angularly.
                                  • -
                                  • Miter - the corner will be pointed. It goes well to shapes with sharp angles.
                                  • -
                                  -

                                  Note: the effect will be more noticeable if you use a large outline width.

                                  -
                                • -
                                -
                              • -
                              • Arrows - this option group is available if a shape from the Lines shape group is selected. It allows to set the arrow Start and End Style and Size by selecting the appropriate option from the dropdown lists.
                              • +
                              • Arrows - this option group is available if a shape from the Lines shape group is selected. It allows setting the arrow Start and End Style and Size by selecting the appropriate option from the dropdown lists.

                              Shape - Advanced Settings

                              -

                              The Text Padding tab allows to change the autoshape Top, Bottom, Left and Right internal margins (i.e. the distance between the text within the shape and the autoshape borders).

                              +

                              The Text Padding tab allows changing the Top, Bottom, Left and Right internal margins of the autoshape (i.e. the distance between the text within the shape and the autoshape borders).

                              Note: this tab is only available if text is added within the autoshape, otherwise the tab is disabled.

                              Shape - Advanced Settings

                              -

                              The Alternative Text tab allows to specify a Title and Description which will be read to the people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information there is in the shape.

                              +

                              The Alternative Text tab allows specifying a Title and Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information the shape contains.

                              \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertBookmarks.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertBookmarks.htm index 2cf4b15ba..4d896ab5e 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertBookmarks.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertBookmarks.htm @@ -14,8 +14,8 @@

                              Add bookmarks

                              -

                              Bookmarks allow to quickly jump to a certain position in the current document or add a link to this location within the document.

                              -

                              To add a bookmark within a document:

                              +

                              Bookmarks allow quickly access a certain part of the text or add a link to its location in the document.

                              +

                              To add a bookmark in a document:

                              1. specify the place where you want the bookmark to be added:
                                  @@ -24,26 +24,26 @@
                              2. switch to the References tab of the top toolbar,
                              3. -
                              4. click the Bookmark icon Bookmark icon at the top toolbar,
                              5. -
                              6. in the Bookmarks window that opens, enter the Bookmark name and click the Add button - a bookmark will be added to the bookmark list displayed below, -

                                Note: the bookmark name should begin wish a letter, but it can also contain numbers. The bookmark name cannot contain spaces, but can include the underscore character "_".

                                +
                              7. click the Bookmark icon Bookmark icon on the top toolbar,
                              8. +
                              9. in the Bookmarks window, enter the Bookmark name and click the Add button - a bookmark will be added to the bookmark list displayed below, +

                                Note: the bookmark name should begin with a letter, but it can also contain numbers. The bookmark name cannot contain spaces, but can include the underscore character "_".

                                Bookmarks window

                              -

                              To go to one of the added bookmarks within the document text:

                              +

                              To access one of the added bookmarks within in the text:

                                -
                              1. click the Bookmark icon Bookmark icon at the References tab of the top toolbar,
                              2. -
                              3. in the Bookmarks window that opens, select the bookmark you want to jump to. To easily find the necessary bookmark in the list you can sort the list by bookmark Name or by Location of a bookmark within the document text,
                              4. +
                              5. click the Bookmark icon Bookmark icon on the References tab of the top toolbar,
                              6. +
                              7. in the Bookmarks window, select the bookmark you want to access. To easily find the required bookmark in the list, you can sort the list of bookmarks by Name or by Location in the text,
                              8. check the Hidden bookmarks option to display hidden bookmarks in the list (i.e. the bookmarks automatically created by the program when adding references to a certain part of the document. For example, if you create a hyperlink to a certain heading within the document, the document editor automatically creates a hidden bookmark to the target of this link).
                              9. -
                              10. click the Go to button - the cursor will be positioned in the location within the document where the selected bookmark was added, or the corresponding text passage will be selected,
                              11. +
                              12. click the Go to button - the cursor will be positioned where the selected bookmark was added to the text, or the corresponding text passage will be selected,
                              13. - click the Get Link button - a new window will open where you can press the Copy button to copy the link to the file which specifyes the bookmark location in the document. When you paste this link in a browser address bar and press Enter, the document will open in the location where the selected bookmark was added. + click the Get Link button - a new window will open where you can press the Copy button to copy the link to the file which specifyes the bookmark location in the document. When you paste this link in a browser address bar and press Enter, the document will be opened where the selected bookmark was added.

                                Bookmarks window

                                -

                                Note: if you want to share this link with other users, you'll also need to provide corresponding access rights to the file for certain users using the Sharing option at the Collaboration tab.

                                +

                                Note: if you want to share this link with other users, you'll need to provide them with the corresponding access rights using the Sharing option on the Collaboration tab.

                              14. click the Close button to close the window.
                              -

                              To delete a bookmark select it in the bookmark list and use the Delete button.

                              +

                              To delete a bookmark, select it in the bookmark list and click the Delete button.

                              To find out how to use bookmarks when creating links please refer to the Add hyperlinks section.

                              diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm index 8c6f2546f..8e05b847a 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm @@ -17,9 +17,9 @@

                              Insert a chart

                              To insert a chart into your document,

                                -
                              1. put the cursor at the place where you want to add a chart,
                              2. +
                              3. place the cursor where the chart should be added,
                              4. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar,
                              5. -
                              6. click the Chart icon Chart icon at the top toolbar,
                              7. +
                              8. click the Chart icon Chart icon on the top toolbar,
                              9. select the needed chart type from the available ones - Column, Line, Pie, Bar, Area, XY (Scatter), or Stock,

                                Note: for Column, Line, Pie, or Bar charts, a 3D format is also available.

                              10. @@ -33,13 +33,17 @@

                            Chart Editor window

                            -
                          • change the chart settings clicking the Edit Chart button situated in the Chart Editor window. The Chart - Advanced Settings window will open. +
                          • change the chart settings by clicking the Edit Chart button situated in the Chart Editor window. The Chart - Advanced Settings window will open.

                            Chart - Advanced Settings window

                            The Type & Data tab allows you to change the chart type as well as the data you wish to use to create a chart.

                            • Select a chart Type you wish to apply: Column, Line, Pie, Bar, Area, XY (Scatter), or Stock.
                            • -
                            • Check the selected Data Range and modify it, if necessary, clicking the Select Data button and entering the desired data range in the following format: Sheet1!A1:B4.
                            • -
                            • Choose the way to arrange the data. You can either select the Data series to be used on the X axis: in rows or in columns.
                            • +
                            • + Check the selected Data Range and modify it, if necessary. To do that, click the Source data range icon icon. +

                              Select Data Range window

                              +

                              In the Select Data Range window, enter the necessary data range in the following format: Sheet1!$A$1:$E$10. You can also select the necessary cell range in the sheet using the mouse. When ready, click OK.

                              +
                            • +
                            • Choose the way to arrange the data. You can select the Data series to be used on the X axis: in rows or in columns.

                            Chart - Advanced Settings window

                            The Layout tab allows you to change the layout of chart elements.

                            @@ -85,17 +89,17 @@

                            Note: the Lines and Markers options are available for Line charts and XY (Scatter) charts only.

                          • - The Axis Settings section allows to specify if you wish to display Horizontal/Vertical Axis or not selecting the Show or Hide option from the drop-down list. You can also specify Horizontal/Vertical Axis Title parameters: + The Axis Settings section allows specifying whether to display Horizontal/Vertical Axis or not by selecting the Show or Hide option from the drop-down list. You can also specify Horizontal/Vertical Axis Title parameters:
                            • - Specify if you wish to display the Horizontal Axis Title or not selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: + Specify if you wish to display the Horizontal Axis Title or not by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list:
                              • None to not display a horizontal axis title,
                              • No Overlay to display the title below the horizontal axis.
                            • - Specify the Vertical Axis Title orientation selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: + Specify the Vertical Axis Title orientation by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list:
                              • None to not display a vertical axis title,
                              • Rotated to display the title from bottom to top to the left of the vertical axis,
                              • @@ -105,7 +109,7 @@
                            • - The Gridlines section allows to specify which of the Horizontal/Vertical Gridlines you wish to display selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: Major, Minor, or Major and Minor. You can hide the gridlines at all using the None option. + The Gridlines section allows specifying which of the Horizontal/Vertical Gridlines you wish to display by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: Major, Minor, or Major and Minor. You can hide the gridlines at all using the None option.

                              Note: the Axis Settings and Gridlines sections will be disabled for Pie charts since charts of this type have no axes and gridlines.

                            @@ -113,58 +117,60 @@

                            Note: the Vertical/Horizontal Axis tabs will be disabled for Pie charts since charts of this type have no axes.

                            The Vertical Axis tab allows you to change the parameters of the vertical axis also referred to as the values axis or y-axis which displays numeric values. Note that the vertical axis will be the category axis which displays text labels for the Bar charts, therefore in this case the Vertical Axis tab options will correspond to the ones described in the next section. For the XY (Scatter) charts, both axes are value axes.

                              -
                            • The Axis Options section allows to set the following parameters: +
                            • The Axis Options section allows setting the following parameters:
                                -
                              • Minimum Value - is used to specify a lowest value displayed at the vertical axis start. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the minimum value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Fixed option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right.
                              • -
                              • Maximum Value - is used to specify a highest value displayed at the vertical axis end. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the maximum value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Fixed option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right.
                              • +
                              • Minimum Value - is used to specify the lowest value displayed at the vertical axis start. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the minimum value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Fixed option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right.
                              • +
                              • Maximum Value - is used to specify the highest value displayed at the vertical axis end. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the maximum value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Fixed option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right.
                              • Axis Crosses - is used to specify a point on the vertical axis where the horizontal axis should cross it. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the axes intersection point value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Value option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right, or set the axes intersection point at the Minimum/Maximum Value on the vertical axis.
                              • -
                              • Display Units - is used to determine a representation of the numeric values along the vertical axis. This option can be useful if you're working with great numbers and wish the values on the axis to be displayed in more compact and readable way (e.g. you can represent 50 000 as 50 by using the Thousands display units). Select desired units from the drop-down list: Hundreds, Thousands, 10 000, 100 000, Millions, 10 000 000, 100 000 000, Billions, Trillions, or choose the None option to return to the default units.
                              • -
                              • Values in reverse order - is used to display values in an opposite direction. When the box is unchecked, the lowest value is at the bottom and the highest value is at the top of the axis. When the box is checked, the values are ordered from top to bottom.
                              • +
                              • Display Units - is used to determine the representation of the numeric values along the vertical axis. This option can be useful if you're working with great numbers and wish the values on the axis to be displayed in a more compact and readable way (e.g. you can represent 50 000 as 50 by using the Thousands display units). Select desired units from the drop-down list: Hundreds, Thousands, 10 000, 100 000, Millions, 10 000 000, 100 000 000, Billions, Trillions, or choose the None option to return to the default units.
                              • +
                              • Values in reverse order - is used to display values in the opposite direction. When the box is unchecked, the lowest value is at the bottom and the highest value is at the top of the axis. When the box is checked, the values are ordered from top to bottom.
                            • -
                            • The Tick Options section allows to adjust the appearance of tick marks on the vertical scale. Major tick marks are the larger scale divisions which can have labels displaying numeric values. Minor tick marks are the scale subdivisions which are placed between the major tick marks and have no labels. Tick marks also define where gridlines can be displayed, if the corresponding option is set at the Layout tab. The Major/Minor Type drop-down lists contain the following placement options: -
                                +
                              • + The Tick Options section allows adjusting the appearance of tick marks on the vertical scale. Major tick marks are the larger scale divisions which can have labels displaying numeric values. Minor tick marks are the scale subdivisions which are placed between the major tick marks and have no labels. Tick marks also define where gridlines can be displayed if the corresponding option is set on the Layout tab. The Major/Minor Type drop-down lists contain the following placement options: +
                                • None to not display major/minor tick marks,
                                • Cross to display major/minor tick marks on both sides of the axis,
                                • In to display major/minor tick marks inside the axis,
                                • -
                                • Out to display major/minor tick marks outside the axis.
                                • -
                                +
                              • Out to display major/minor tick marks outside the axis.
                              • +
                            • -
                            • The Label Options section allows to adjust the appearance of major tick mark labels which display values. To specify a Label Position in regard to the vertical axis, select the necessary option from the drop-down list: -
                                -
                              • None to not display tick mark labels,
                              • -
                              • Low to display tick mark labels to the left of the plot area,
                              • -
                              • High to display tick mark labels to the right of the plot area,
                              • -
                              • Next to axis to display tick mark labels next to the axis.
                              • -
                              +
                            • The Label Options section allows adjusting the appearance of major tick mark labels which display values. To specify a Label Position in regard to the vertical axis, select the necessary option from the drop-down list: +
                                +
                              • None to not display tick mark labels,
                              • +
                              • Low to display tick mark labels to the left of the plot area,
                              • +
                              • High to display tick mark labels to the right of the plot area,
                              • +
                              • Next to axis to display tick mark labels next to the axis.
                              • +

                            Chart - Advanced Settings window

                            The Horizontal Axis tab allows you to change the parameters of the horizontal axis also referred to as the categories axis or x-axis which displays text labels. Note that the horizontal axis will be the value axis which displays numeric values for the Bar charts, therefore in this case the Horizontal Axis tab options will correspond to the ones described in the previous section. For the XY (Scatter) charts, both axes are value axes.

                              -
                            • The Axis Options section allows to set the following parameters: +
                            • The Axis Options section allows setting the following parameters:
                              • Axis Crosses - is used to specify a point on the horizontal axis where the vertical axis should cross it. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the axes intersection point value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Value option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right, or set the axes intersection point at the Minimum/Maximum Value (that corresponds to the first and last category) on the horizontal axis.
                              • Axis Position - is used to specify where the axis text labels should be placed: On Tick Marks or Between Tick Marks.
                              • -
                              • Values in reverse order - is used to display categories in an opposite direction. When the box is unchecked, categories are displayed from left to right. When the box is checked, the categories are ordered from right to left.
                              • +
                              • Values in reverse order - is used to display categories in the opposite direction. When the box is unchecked, categories are displayed from left to right. When the box is checked, the categories are ordered from right to left.
                            • -
                            • The Tick Options section allows to adjust the appearance of tick marks on the horizontal scale. Major tick marks are the larger divisions which can have labels displaying category values. Minor tick marks are the smaller divisions which are placed between the major tick marks and have no labels. Tick marks also define where gridlines can be displayed, if the corresponding option is set at the Layout tab. You can adjust the following tick mark parameters: +
                            • + The Tick Options section allows adjusting the appearance of tick marks on the horizontal scale. Major tick marks are the larger divisions which can have labels displaying category values. Minor tick marks are the smaller divisions which are placed between the major tick marks and have no labels. Tick marks also define where gridlines can be displayed if the corresponding option is set on the Layout tab. You can adjust the following tick mark parameters:
                              • Major/Minor Type - is used to specify the following placement options: None to not display major/minor tick marks, Cross to display major/minor tick marks on both sides of the axis, In to display major/minor tick marks inside the axis, Out to display major/minor tick marks outside the axis.
                              • Interval between Marks - is used to specify how many categories should be displayed between two adjacent tick marks.
                            • -
                            • The Label Options section allows to adjust the appearance of labels which display categories. -
                                -
                              • Label Position - is used to specify where the labels should be placed in regard to the horizontal axis. Select the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to not display category labels, Low to display category labels at the bottom of the plot area, High to display category labels at the top of the plot area, Next to axis to display category labels next to the axis.
                              • -
                              • Axis Label Distance - is used to specify how closely the labels should be placed to the axis. You can specify the necessary value in the entry field. The more the value you set, the more the distance between the axis and labels is.
                              • -
                              • Interval between Labels - is used to specify how often the labels should be displayed. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case labels are displayed for every category. You can select the Manual option from the drop-down list and specify the necessary value in the entry field on the right. For example, enter 2 to display labels for every other category etc.
                              • -
                              +
                            • The Label Options section allows adjusting the appearance of labels which display categories. +
                                +
                              • Label Position - is used to specify where the labels should be placed in regard to the horizontal axis. Select the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to not display category labels, Low to display category labels at the bottom of the plot area, High to display category labels at the top of the plot area, Next to axis to display category labels next to the axis.
                              • +
                              • Axis Label Distance - is used to specify how closely the labels should be placed to the axis. You can specify the necessary value in the entry field. The more the value you set, the more the distance between the axis and labels is.
                              • +
                              • Interval between Labels - is used to specify how often the labels should be displayed. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case labels are displayed for every category. You can select the Manual option from the drop-down list and specify the necessary value in the entry field on the right. For example, enter 2 to display labels for every other category etc.
                              • +

                            Chart - Advanced Settings

                            -

                            The Alternative Text tab allows to specify a Title and Description which will be read to the people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information there is in the chart.

                            +

                            The Alternative Text tab allows specifying a Title and Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information the chart contains.


                          • @@ -176,14 +182,18 @@


                            Edit chart elements

                            -

                            To edit the chart Title, select the default text with the mouse and type in your own one instead.

                            -

                            To change the font formatting within text elements, such as the chart title, axes titles, legend entries, data labels etc., select the necessary text element by left-clicking it. Then use icons at the Home tab of the top toolbar to change the font type, size, color or its decoration style.

                            -

                            When the chart is selected, the Shape settings Shape settings icon icon is also available on the right, since a shape is used as a background for the chart. You can click this icon to open the Shape settings tab at the right sidebar and adjust the shape Fill, Stroke and Wrapping Style. Note that you cannot change the shape type.

                            +

                            To edit the chart Title, select the default text with the mouse and type the required text.

                            +

                            To change the font formatting within text elements, such as the chart title, axes titles, legend entries, data labels etc., select the necessary text element by left-clicking it. Then use the corresponding icons on the Home tab of the top toolbar to change the font type, size, color or its decoration style.

                            +

                            When the chart is selected, the Shape settings Shape settings icon icon is also available on the right, since a shape is used as a background for the chart. You can click this icon to open the Shape settings tab on the right sidebar and adjust Fill, Stroke and Wrapping Style of the shape. Note that you cannot change the shape type.

                            - Using the Shape Settings tab at the right panel you can not only adjust the chart area itself, but also change the chart elements, such as plot area, data series, chart title, legend etc and apply different fill types to them. Select the chart element clicking it with the left mouse button and choose the preferred fill type: solid color, gradient, texture or picture, pattern. Specify the fill parameters and set the Opacity level if necessary. + Using the Shape Settings tab on the right panel, you can both adjust the chart area itself and change the chart elements, such as plot area, data series, chart title, legend etc and apply different fill types to them. Select the chart element clicking it with the left mouse button and choose the preferred fill type: solid color, gradient, texture or picture, pattern. Specify the fill parameters and set the Opacity level if necessary. When you select a vertical or horizontal axis or gridlines, the stroke settings are only available at the Shape Settings tab: color, width and type. For more details on how to work with shape colors, fills and stroke, you can refer to this page.

                            Note: the Show shadow option is also available at the Shape settings tab, but it is disabled for chart elements.

                            +

                            If you need to resize chart elements, left-click to select the needed element and drag one of 8 white squares Square icon located along the perimeter of the element.

                            +

                            Resize chart elements

                            +

                            To change the position of the element, left-click on it, make sure your cursor changed to Arrow, hold the left mouse button and drag the element to the needed position.

                            +

                            Move chart elements

                            To delete a chart element, select it by left-clicking and press the Delete key on the keyboard.

                            You can also rotate 3D charts using the mouse. Left-click within the plot area and hold the mouse button. Drag the cursor without releasing the mouse button to change the 3D chart orientation.

                            3D chart

                            @@ -192,7 +202,7 @@

                            Chart Settings tab

                            Some of the chart settings can be altered using the Chart settings tab of the right sidebar. To activate it click the chart and choose the Chart settings Chart settings icon icon on the right. Here you can change the following properties:

                              -
                            • Size is used to view the current chart Width and Height.
                            • +
                            • Size is used to view the Width and Height of the current chart.
                            • Wrapping Style is used to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind (for more information see the advanced settings description below).
                            • Change Chart Type is used to change the selected chart type and/or style.

                              To select the necessary chart Style, use the second drop-down menu in the Change Chart Type section.

                              @@ -201,21 +211,21 @@

                              Note: to quickly open the 'Chart Editor' window you can also double-click the chart in the document.

                            -

                            Some of these options you can also find in the right-click menu. The menu options are:

                            +

                            You can also find some of these options in the right-click menu. The menu options are:

                              -
                            • Cut, Copy, Paste - standard options which are used to cut or copy a selected text/object and paste a previously cut/copied text passage or object to the current cursor position.
                            • -
                            • Arrange is used to bring the selected chart to foreground, send to background, move forward or backward as well as group or ungroup charts to perform operations with several of them at once. To learn more on how to arrange objects you can refer to this page.
                            • +
                            • Cut, Copy, Paste - standard options which are used to cut or copy the selected text/object and paste the previously cut/copied text passage or object to the current cursor position.
                            • +
                            • Arrange is used to bring the selected chart to foreground, send it to the background, move forward or backward as well as group or ungroup charts to perform operations with several of them at once. To learn more on how to arrange objects, please refer to this page.
                            • Align is used to align the chart left, center, right, top, middle, bottom. To learn more on how to align objects you can refer to this page.
                            • Wrapping Style is used to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind. The Edit Wrap Boundary option is unavailable for charts.
                            • Edit Data is used to open the 'Chart Editor' window.
                            • Chart Advanced Settings is used to open the 'Chart - Advanced Settings' window.

                            -

                            To change the chart advanced settings, click the needed chart with the right mouse button and select Chart Advanced Settings from the right-click menu or just click the Show advanced settings link at the right sidebar. The chart properties window will open:

                            +

                            To change the chart advanced settings, click the needed chart with the right mouse button and select Chart Advanced Settings from the right-click menu or just click the Show advanced settings link on the right sidebar. The chart properties window will open:

                            Chart - Advanced Settings: Size

                            The Size tab contains the following parameters:

                              -
                            • Width and Height - use these options to change the chart width and/or height. If the Constant Proportions Constant Proportions icon button is clicked (in this case it looks like this Constant Proportions icon activated), the width and height will be changed together preserving the original chart aspect ratio.
                            • +
                            • Width and Height - use these options to change the width and/or height of the chart. If the Constant Proportions Constant Proportions icon button is clicked (in this case it looks like this Constant Proportions icon activated), the width and height will be changed together preserving the original chart aspect ratio.

                            Chart - Advanced Settings: Text Wrapping

                            The Text Wrapping tab contains the following parameters:

                            @@ -234,15 +244,15 @@
                        -

                        If you select the square, tight, through, or top and bottom style you will be able to set up some additional parameters - distance from text at all sides (top, bottom, left, right).

                        +

                        If you select the square, tight, through, or top and bottom styles, you will be able to set up some additional parameters - distance from text at all sides (top, bottom, left, right).

                        Chart - Advanced Settings: Position

                        -

                        The Position tab is available only if you select a wrapping style other than inline. This tab contains the following parameters that vary depending on the selected wrapping style:

                        +

                        The Position tab is available only if the selected wrapping style is not inline. This tab contains the following parameters that vary depending on the selected wrapping style:

                        • The Horizontal section allows you to select one of the following three chart positioning types:
                          • Alignment (left, center, right) relative to character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin,
                          • -
                          • Absolute Position measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified at the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) to the right of character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin,
                          • +
                          • Absolute Position measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified on the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) to the right of character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin,
                          • Relative position measured in percent relative to the left margin, margin, page or right margin.
                        • @@ -250,15 +260,15 @@ The Vertical section allows you to select one of the following three chart positioning types:
                          • Alignment (top, center, bottom) relative to line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin,
                          • -
                          • Absolute Position measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified at the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) below line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin,
                          • +
                          • Absolute Position measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified on the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) below line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin,
                          • Relative position measured in percent relative to the margin, bottom margin, page or top margin.
                          -
                        • Move object with text controls whether the chart moves as the text to which it is anchored moves.
                        • -
                        • Allow overlap controls whether two charts overlap or not if you drag them near each other on the page.
                        • +
                        • Move object with text ensures that the chart moves along with the text to which it is anchored.
                        • +
                        • Allow overlap makes it possible for two charts to overlap if you drag them near each other on the page.

                        Chart - Advanced Settings

                        -

                        The Alternative Text tab allows to specify a Title and Description which will be read to the people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information there is in the chart.

                        +

                        The Alternative Text tab allows specifying a Title and Description which will be read to the people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information the chart contains.

                        \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertContentControls.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertContentControls.htm index d2a6e1496..bb55fe798 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertContentControls.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertContentControls.htm @@ -14,31 +14,31 @@

                        Insert content controls

                        -

                        Content controls are objects containing different types of contents, such as text, objects etc. Depending on the selected content control type, you can create a form with input fields that can be filled in by other users, or protect some parts of the document from being edited or deleted etc.

                        -

                        Note: the possibility to add new content controls is available in the paid version only. In the open source version, you can edit existing content controls, as well as copy and paste them.

                        +

                        Content controls are objects containing different types of contents, such as text, objects etc. Depending on the selected content control type, you can create a form with input fields that can be filled in by other users, or protect some parts of the document from being edited or deleted, etc.

                        +

                        Note: the feature to add new content controls is available in the paid version only. In the free Community version, you can edit existing content controls, as well as copy and paste them.

                        Currently, you can add the following types of content controls: Plain Text, Rich Text, Picture, Combo box, Drop-down list, Date, Check box.

                          -
                        • Plain Text is an object containing text that can be formatted. Plain text content controls cannot contain more than one paragraph.
                        • +
                        • Plain Text is an object containing text that cannot be formatted. Plain text content controls cannot contain more than one paragraph.
                        • Rich Text is an object containing text that can be formatted. Rich text content controls can contain several paragraphs, lists, and objects (images, shapes, tables etc.).
                        • Picture is an object containing a single image.
                        • -
                        • Combo box is an object containing a drop-down list with a set of choices. It allows to choose one of the predefined values from the list and edit the selected value if necessary.
                        • -
                        • Drop-down list is an object containing a drop-down list with a set of choices. It allows to choose one of the predefined values from the list. The selected value cannot be edited.
                        • -
                        • Date is an object containing a calendar that allows to choose a date.
                        • -
                        • Check box is an object that allows to display two states: check box is selected and check box is cleared.
                        • +
                        • Combo box is an object containing a drop-down list with a set of choices. It allows choosing one of the predefined values from the list and edit the selected value if necessary.
                        • +
                        • Drop-down list is an object containing a drop-down list with a set of choices. It allows choosing one of the predefined values from the list. The selected value cannot be edited.
                        • +
                        • Date is an object containing a calendar that allows choosing a date.
                        • +
                        • Check box is an object that allows displaying two states: the check box is selected and the check box is cleared.

                        Adding content controls

                        Create a new Plain Text content control
                          -
                        1. position the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the control to be added,
                          or select a text passage you want to become the control contents.
                        2. +
                        3. position the insertion point within the text line where the content control should be added,
                          or select a text passage to transform it into a content control.
                        4. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar.
                        5. click the arrow next to the Content Controls icon Content Controls icon.
                        6. choose the Plain Text option from the menu.
                        -

                        The control will be inserted at the insertion point within a line of the existing text. Replace the default text within the control ("Your text here") with your own one: select the default text, and type in a new text or copy a text passage from anywhere and paste it into the content control. Plain text content controls do not allow adding line breaks and cannot contain other objects such as images, tables etc.

                        +

                        The content control will be inserted at the insertion point within existing text line. Replace the default text within the content control ("Your text here") with your own text: select the default text, and type in a new text or copy a text passage from anywhere and paste it into the content control. The Plain text content controls do not allow adding line breaks and cannot contain other objects such as images, tables, etc.

                        New plain text content control

                        Create a new Rich Text content control
                          -
                        1. position the insertion point at the end of a paragraph after which you want the control to be added,
                          or select one or more of the existing paragraphs you want to become the control contents.
                        2. +
                        3. position the insertion point within the text line where the content control should be added,
                          or select one or more of the existing paragraphs you want to become the control contents.
                        4. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar.
                        5. click the arrow next to the Content Controls icon Content Controls icon.
                        6. choose the Rich Text option from the menu.
                        7. @@ -50,24 +50,24 @@
                        8. position the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the control to be added.
                        9. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar.
                        10. click the arrow next to the Content Controls icon Content Controls icon.
                        11. -
                        12. choose the Picture option from the menu - the control will be inserted at the insertion point.
                        13. +
                        14. choose the Picture option from the menu - the content control will be inserted at the insertion point.
                        15. click the Insert image icon image icon in the button above the content control border - a standard file selection window will open. Choose an image stored on your computer and click Open.

                        The selected image will be displayed within the content control. To replace the image, click the Insert image icon image icon in the button above the content control border and select another image.

                        New picture content control

                        Create a new Combo box or Drop-down list content control
                        -

                        The Combo box and Drop-down list content controls contain a drop-down list with a set of choices. They can be created in nearly the same way. The main difference between them is that the selected value in the drop-down list cannot be edited, while the selected value in the combo box can be replaced with your own one.

                        +

                        The Combo box and Drop-down list content controls contain a drop-down list with a set of choices. They can be created amost in the same way. The main difference between them is that the selected value in the drop-down list cannot be edited, while the selected value in the combo box can be replaced.

                        1. position the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the control to be added.
                        2. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar.
                        3. click the arrow next to the Content Controls icon Content Controls icon.
                        4. choose the Combo box or Drop-down list option from the menu - the control will be inserted at the insertion point.
                        5. right-click the added control and choose the Content control settings option from the contextual menu.
                        6. -
                        7. in the the Content Control Settings window that opens switch to the Combo box or Drop-down list tab, depending on the selected content control type. +
                        8. in the the opened Content Control Settings window, switch to the Combo box or Drop-down list tab, depending on the selected content control type.

                          Combo box settings window

                        9. - to add a new list item, click the Add button and fill in the available fields in the window that opens: + to add a new list item, click the Add button and fill in the available fields in the the opened window:

                          Combo box - adding value

                          1. specify the necessary text in the Display name field, e.g. Yes, No, Other. This text will be displayed in the content control within the document.
                          2. @@ -79,17 +79,17 @@
                          3. when all the necessary choices are set, click the OK button to save the settings and close the window.

                          New combo box content control

                          -

                          You can click the arrow button in the right part of the added Combo box or Drop-down list content control to open the item list and choose the necessary one. Once the necessary item is selected from the Combo box, you can edit the displayed text replacing it with your own one entirely or partially. The Drop-down list does not allow to edit the selected item.

                          +

                          You can click the arrow button in the right part of the added Combo box or Drop-down list content control to open the item list and choose the necessary one. Once the necessary item is selected from the Combo box, you can edit the displayed text by replacing it with your text entirely or partially. The Drop-down list does not allow editing the selected item.

                          Combo box content control

                          Create a new Date content control
                            -
                          1. position the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the control to be added.
                          2. +
                          3. position the insertion point within the text where content control should be added.
                          4. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar.
                          5. click the arrow next to the Content Controls icon Content Controls icon.
                          6. -
                          7. choose the Date option from the menu - the control with the current date will be inserted at the insertion point.
                          8. -
                          9. right-click the added control and choose the Content control settings option from the contextual menu.
                          10. +
                          11. choose the Date option from the menu - the content control with the current date will be inserted at the insertion point.
                          12. +
                          13. right-click the added content control and choose the Content control settings option from the contextual menu.
                          14. - in the the Content Control Settings window that opens switch to the Date format tab. + in the opened Content Control Settings window, switch to the Date format tab.

                            Date settings window

                          15. choose the necessary Language and select the necessary date format in the Display the date like this list.
                          16. @@ -100,16 +100,16 @@

                            Date content control

                            Create a new Check box content control
                              -
                            1. position the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the control to be added.
                            2. +
                            3. position the insertion point within the text line where the content control should be added.
                            4. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar.
                            5. click the arrow next to the Content Controls icon Content Controls icon.
                            6. -
                            7. choose the Check box option from the menu - the control will be inserted at the insertion point.
                            8. -
                            9. right-click the added control and choose the Content control settings option from the contextual menu.
                            10. +
                            11. choose the Check box option from the menu - the content control will be inserted at the insertion point.
                            12. +
                            13. right-click the added content control and choose the Content control settings option from the contextual menu.
                            14. - in the the Content Control Settings window that opens switch to the Check box tab. + in the opened Content Control Settings window, switch to the Check box tab.

                              Check box settings window

                            15. -
                            16. click the Checked symbol button to specify the necessary symbol for the selected check box or the Unchecked symbol to select how the cleared check box should look like. The Symbol window will open. To learn more on how to work with symbols, you can refer to this article.
                            17. +
                            18. click the Checked symbol button to specify the necessary symbol for the selected check box or the Unchecked symbol to select how the cleared check box should look like. The Symbol window will open. To learn more on how to work with symbols, please refer to this article.
                            19. when the symbols are specified, click the OK button to save the settings and close the window.

                            The added check box is displayed in the unchecked mode.

                            @@ -117,49 +117,49 @@

                            If you click the added check box it will be checked with the symbol selected in the Checked symbol list.

                            Check box content control

                            -

                            Note: The content control border is visible when the control is selected only. The borders do not appear on a printed version.

                            +

                            Note: The content control border is only visible when the control is selected. The borders do not appear on a printed version.

                            Moving content controls

                            -

                            Controls can be moved to another place in the document: click the button to the left of the control border to select the control and drag it without releasing the mouse button to another position in the document text.

                            +

                            Content controls can be moved to another place in the document: click the button on the left of the control border to select the control and drag it without releasing the mouse button to another position in the text.

                            Moving content control

                            You can also copy and paste content controls: select the necessary control and use the Ctrl+C/Ctrl+V key combinations.

                            Editing plain text and rich text content controls

                            -

                            Text within the plain text and rich text content controls can be formatted using the icons on the top toolbar: you can adjust the font type, size, color, apply decoration styles and formatting presets. It's also possible to use the Paragraph - Advanced settings window accessible from the contextual menu or from the right sidebar to change the text properties. Text within rich text content controls can be formatted like a regular text of the document, i.e. you can set line spacing, change paragraph indents, adjust tab stops.

                            +

                            Text within plain text and rich text content controls can be formatted by using the icons on the top toolbar: you can adjust the font type, size, color, apply decoration styles and formatting presets. It's also possible to use the Paragraph - Advanced settings window accessible from the contextual menu or from the right sidebar to change the text properties. Text within rich text content controls can be formatted like a regular text, i.e. you can set line spacing, change paragraph indents, adjust tab stops, etc.

                            Changing content control settings

                            No matter which type of content controls is selected, you can change the content control settings in the General and Locking sections of the Content Control Settings window.

                            To open the content control settings, you can proceed in the following ways:

                              -
                            • Select the necessary content control, click the arrow next to the Content Controls icon Content Controls icon at the top toolbar and select the Control Settings option from the menu.
                            • +
                            • Select the necessary content control, click the arrow next to the Content Controls icon Content Controls icon on the top toolbar and select the Control Settings option from the menu.
                            • Right-click anywhere within the content control and use the Content control settings option from the contextual menu.
                            -

                            A new window will open. At the General tab, you can adjust the following settings:

                            +

                            A new window will open. Ot the General tab, you can adjust the following settings:

                            Content Control settings window - General

                              -
                            • Specify the content control Title or Tag in the corresponding fields. The title will be displayed when the control is selected in the document. Tags are used to identify content controls so that you can make reference to them in your code.
                            • -
                            • Choose if you want to display the content control with a Bounding box or not. Use the None option to display the control without the bounding box. If you select the Bounding box option, you can choose this box Color using the field below. Click the Apply to All button to apply the specified Appearance settings to all the content controls in the document.
                            • +
                            • Specify the content control Title, Placeholder, or Tag in the corresponding fields. The title will be displayed when the control is selected. The placeholder is the main text displayed within the content control element. Tags are used to identify content controls so that you can make a reference to them in your code.
                            • +
                            • Choose if you want to display the content control with a Bounding box or not. Use the None option to display the control without the bounding box. If you select the Bounding box option, you can choose the Color of this box using the field below. Click the Apply to All button to apply the specified Appearance settings to all the content controls in the document.
                            -

                            At the Locking tab, you can protect the content control from being deleted or edited using the following settings:

                            +

                            On the Locking tab, you can protect the content control from being deleted or edited using the following settings:

                            Content Control settings window - Locking

                            • Content control cannot be deleted - check this box to protect the content control from being deleted.
                            • Contents cannot be edited - check this box to protect the contents of the content control from being edited.
                            -

                            For certain types of content controls, the third tab is also available that contains the settings specific for the selected content control type only: Combo box, Drop-down list, Date, Check box. These settings are described above in the sections about adding the corresponding content controls.

                            +

                            For certain types of content controls, the third tab that contains the specific settings for the selected content control type is also available: Combo box, Drop-down list, Date, Check box. These settings are described above in the sections about adding the corresponding content controls.

                            Click the OK button within the settings window to apply the changes.

                            It's also possible to highlight content controls with a certain color. To highlight controls with a color:

                              -
                            1. Click the button to the left of the control border to select the control,
                            2. -
                            3. Click the arrow next to the Content Controls icon Content Controls icon at the top toolbar,
                            4. +
                            5. Click the button on the left of the control border to select the control,
                            6. +
                            7. Click the arrow next to the Content Controls icon Content Controls icon on the top toolbar,
                            8. Select the Highlight Settings option from the menu,
                            9. -
                            10. Select the necessary color on the available palettes: Theme Colors, Standard Colors or specify a new Custom Color. To remove previously applied color highlighting, use the No highlighting option.
                            11. +
                            12. Choose the required color from the available palettes: Theme Colors, Standard Colors or specify a new Custom Color. To remove previously applied color highlighting, use the No highlighting option.

                            The selected highlight options will be applied to all the content controls in the document.

                            Removing content controls

                            -

                            To remove a control and leave all its contents, click the content control to select it, then proceed in one of the following ways:

                            +

                            To remove a content control and leave all its contents, select a content control, then proceed in one of the following ways:

                              -
                            • Click the arrow next to the Content Controls icon Content Controls icon at the top toolbar and select the Remove content control option from the menu.
                            • +
                            • Click the arrow next to the Content Controls icon Content Controls icon on the top toolbar and select the Remove content control option from the menu.
                            • Right-click the content control and use the Remove content control option from the contextual menu.

                            To remove a control and all its contents, select the necessary control and press the Delete key on the keyboard.

                            diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertDateTime.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertDateTime.htm new file mode 100644 index 000000000..77a6e0e0a --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertDateTime.htm @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + + + Insert date and time + + + + + + + +
                            +
                            + +
                            +

                            Insert date and time

                            +

                            To isnert Date and time into your document,

                            +
                              +
                            1. put the cursor where you want to insert Date and time,
                            2. +
                            3. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar,
                            4. +
                            5. click the Date & time Date and time icon icon on the top toolbar,
                            6. +
                            7. + in the Date & time window that will appear, specify the following parameters: +
                                +
                              • Select the required language.
                              • +
                              • Select one of the suggested formats.
                              • +
                              • + Check the Update automatically checkbox to let the date & time update automatically based on the current state. +

                                + Note: you can also update the date and time manually by using the Refresh field option from the contextual menu. +

                                +
                              • +
                              • Click the Set as default button to make the current format the default for this language.
                              • +
                              +
                            8. +
                            9. Click the OK button.
                            10. +
                            +

                            Date and time window

                            +
                            + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertDropCap.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertDropCap.htm index c113e67bc..2188c0b0e 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertDropCap.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertDropCap.htm @@ -14,12 +14,12 @@

                            Insert a drop cap

                            -

                            A Drop cap is the first letter of a paragraph that is much larger than others and takes up several lines in height.

                            +

                            A drop cap is a large capital letter used at the beginning of a paragraph or section. The size of a drop cap is usually several lines.

                            To add a drop cap,

                              -
                            1. put the cursor within the paragraph you need,
                            2. +
                            3. place the cursor within the required paragraph,
                            4. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar,
                            5. -
                            6. click the Drop Cap icon Drop Cap icon at the top toolbar,
                            7. +
                            8. click the Drop Cap icon Drop Cap icon on the top toolbar,
                            9. in the opened drop-down list select the option you need:
                              • In Text Insert Drop Cap - In Text - to place the drop cap within the paragraph.
                              • @@ -28,40 +28,40 @@

                            Drop Cap exampleThe first character of the selected paragraph will be transformed into a drop cap. If you need the drop cap to include some more characters, add them manually: select the drop cap and type in other letters you need.

                            -

                            To adjust the drop cap appearance (i.e. font size, type, decoration style or color), select the letter and use the corresponding icons at the Home tab of the top toolbar.

                            +

                            To adjust the drop cap appearance (i.e. font size, type, decoration style or color), select the letter and use the corresponding icons on the Home tab of the top toolbar.

                            When the drop cap is selected, it's surrounded by a frame (a container used to position the drop cap on the page). You can quickly change the frame size dragging its borders or change its position using the Arrow icon that appears after hovering your mouse cursor over the frame.

                            -

                            To delete the added drop cap, select it, click the Drop Cap icon Drop Cap icon at the Insert tab of the top toolbar and choose the None Insert Drop Cap - None option from the drop-down list.

                            +

                            To delete the added drop cap, select it, click the Drop Cap icon Drop Cap icon on the Insert tab of the top toolbar and choose the None Insert Drop Cap - None option from the drop-down list.


                            -

                            To adjust the added drop cap parameters, select it, click the Drop Cap icon Drop Cap icon at the Insert tab of the top toolbar and choose the Drop Cap Settings option from the drop-down list. The Drop Cap - Advanced Settings window will open:

                            +

                            To adjust the added drop cap parameters, select it, click the Drop Cap icon Drop Cap icon at the Insert tab of the top toolbar and choose the Drop Cap Settings option from the drop-down list. The Drop Cap - Advanced Settings window will appear:

                            Drop Cap - Advanced Settings

                            -

                            The Drop Cap tab allows to set the following parameters:

                            +

                            The Drop Cap tab allows adjusting the following parameters:

                              -
                            • Position - is used to change the drop cap placement. Select the In Text or In Margin option, or click None to delete the drop cap.
                            • -
                            • Font - is used to select one of the fonts from the list of the available ones.
                            • -
                            • Height in rows - is used to specify how many lines the drop cap should span. It's possible to select a value from 1 to 10.
                            • -
                            • Distance from text - is used to specify the amount of space between the text of the paragraph and the right border of the frame that surrounds the drop cap.
                            • +
                            • Position is used to change the placement of a drop cap. Select the In Text or In Margin option, or click None to delete the drop cap.
                            • +
                            • Font is used to select a font from the list of the available fonts.
                            • +
                            • Height in rows is used to define how many lines a drop cap should span. It's possible to select a value from 1 to 10.
                            • +
                            • Distance from text is used to specify the amount of spacing between the text of the paragraph and the right border of the drop cap frame.

                            Drop Cap - Advanced Settings

                            -

                            The Borders & Fill tab allows to add a border around the drop cap and adjust its parameters. They are the following:

                            +

                            The Borders & Fill tab allows adding a border around a drop cap and adjusting its parameters. They are the following:

                            • Border parameters (size, color and presence or absence) - set the border size, select its color and choose the borders (top, bottom, left, right or their combination) you want to apply these settings to.
                            • Background color - choose the color for the drop cap background.

                            Drop Cap - Advanced Settings

                            -

                            The Margins tab allows to set the distance between the drop cap and the Top, Bottom, Left and Right borders around it (if the borders have previously been added).

                            +

                            The Margins tab allows setting the distance between the drop cap and the Top, Bottom, Left and Right borders around it (if the borders have previously been added).


                            Once the drop cap is added you can also change the Frame parameters. To access them, right click within the frame and select the Frame Advanced Settings from the menu. The Frame - Advanced Settings window will open:

                            Frame - Advanced Settings

                            -

                            The Frame tab allows to set the following parameters:

                            +

                            The Frame tab allows adjusting the following parameters:

                              -
                            • Position - is used to select the Inline or Flow wrapping style. Or you can click None to delete the frame.
                            • -
                            • Width and Height - are used to change the frame dimensions. The Auto option allows to automatically adjust the frame size to fit the drop cap in it. The Exactly option allows to specify fixed values. The At least option is used to set the minimum height value (if you change the drop cap size, the frame height changes accordingly, but it cannot be less than the specified value).
                            • -
                            • Horizontal parameters are used either to set the frame exact position in the selected units of measurement relative to a margin, page or column, or to align the frame (left, center or right) relative to one of these reference points. You can also set the horizontal Distance from text i.e. the amount of space between the vertical frame borders and the text of the paragraph.
                            • -
                            • Vertical parameters are used either to set the frame exact position in the selected units of measurement relative to a margin, page or paragraph, or to align the frame (top, center or bottom) relative to one of these reference points. You can also set the vertical Distance from text i.e. the amount of space between the horizontal frame borders and the text of the paragraph.
                            • -
                            • Move with text - controls whether the frame moves as the paragraph to which it is anchored moves.
                            • +
                            • Position is used to select the Inline or Flow wrapping style. You can also click None to delete the frame.
                            • +
                            • Width and Height are used to change the frame dimensions. The Auto option allows automatically adjusting the frame size to fit the drop cap. The Exactly option allows specifying fixed values. The At least option is used to set the minimum height value (if you change the drop cap size, the frame height changes accordingly, but it cannot be less than the specified value).
                            • +
                            • Horizontal parameters are used either to set the exact position of the frame in the selected units of measurement with respect to a margin, page or column, or to align the frame (left, center or right) with respect to one of these reference points. You can also set the horizontal Distance from text i.e. the amount of space between the vertical frame borders and the text of the paragraph.
                            • +
                            • Vertical parameters are used either to set the exact position of the frame is the selected units of measurement with respect to a margin, page or paragraph, or to align the frame (top, center or bottom) with respect to one of these reference points. You can also set the vertical Distance from text i.e. the amount of space between the horizontal frame borders and the text of the paragraph.
                            • +
                            • Move with text is used to make sure that the frame moves as the paragraph to which it is anchored.
                            -

                            The Borders & Fill and Margins tabs allow to set just the same parameters as at the tabs of the same name in the Drop Cap - Advanced Settings window.

                            +

                            The Borders & Fill and Margins allow adjusting the same parameters as the corresponding tabs in the Drop Cap - Advanced Settings window.

                            diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertEquation.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertEquation.htm index 1215cca6b..9b1b355ad 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertEquation.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertEquation.htm @@ -14,29 +14,29 @@

                            Insert equations

                            -

                            Document Editor allows you to build equations using the built-in templates, edit them, insert special characters (including mathematical operators, Greek letters, accents etc.).

                            +

                            The Document Editor allows you to build equations using the built-in templates, edit them, insert special characters (including mathematical operators, Greek letters, accents, etc.).

                            Add a new equation

                            To insert an equation from the gallery,

                            1. put the cursor within the necessary line ,
                            2. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar,
                            3. -
                            4. click the arrow next to the Equation icon Equation icon at the top toolbar,
                            5. +
                            6. click the arrow next to the Equation icon Equation icon on the top toolbar,
                            7. in the opened drop-down list select the equation category you need. The following categories are currently available: Symbols, Fractions, Scripts, Radicals, Integrals, Large Operators, Brackets, Functions, Accents, Limits and Logarithms, Operators, Matrices,
                            8. click the certain symbol/equation in the corresponding set of templates.
                            -

                            The selected symbol/equation box will be inserted at the cursor position. If the selected line is empty, the equation will be centered. To align such an equation left or right, click on the equation box and use the Align Left icon or Align Right icon icon at the Home tab of the top toolbar.

                            +

                            The selected symbol/equation box will be inserted at the cursor position. If the selected line is empty, the equation will be centered. To align such an equation to the left or to the right, click on the equation box and use the Align Left icon or Align Right icon icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar.

                            Inserted Equation -

                            Each equation template represents a set of slots. Slot is a position for each element that makes up the equation. An empty slot (also called as a placeholder) has a dotted outline Equation Placeholder. You need to fill in all the placeholders specifying the necessary values.

                            +

                            Each equation template represents a set of slots. A slot is a position for each element that makes up the equation. An empty slot (also called as a placeholder) has a dotted outline Equation Placeholder. You need to fill in all the placeholders specifying the necessary values.

                            Note: to start creating an equation, you can also use the Alt + = keyboard shortcut.

                            -

                            It's also possible to add a caption to the equation. To learn more on how to work with captions for equations, you can refer to this article.

                            +

                            It's also possible to add a caption to the equation. To learn more on how to work with captions for equations, please refer to this article.

                            Enter values

                            -

                            The insertion point specifies where the next character you enter will appear. To position the insertion point precisely, click within a placeholder and use the keyboard arrows to move the insertion point by one character left/right or one line up/down.

                            +

                            The insertion point specifies where the next character will appear. To position the insertion point precisely, click within the placeholder and use the keyboard arrows to move the insertion point by one character left/right or one line up/down.

                            If you need to create a new placeholder below the slot with the insertion point within the selected template, press Enter.

                            Edited Equation

                            Once the insertion point is positioned, you can fill in the placeholder:

                            • enter the desired numeric/literal value using the keyboard,
                            • -
                            • insert a special character using the Symbols palette from the Equation icon Equation menu at the Insert tab of the top toolbar,
                            • +
                            • insert a special character using the Symbols palette from the Equation icon Equation menu on the Insert tab of the top toolbar or typing them from the keyboard (see the Math AutoСorrect option description),
                            • add another equation template from the palette to create a complex nested equation. The size of the primary equation will be automatically adjusted to fit its content. The size of the nested equation elements depends on the primary equation placeholder size, but it cannot be smaller than the sub-subscript size.

                            @@ -49,18 +49,18 @@

                      Note: currently, equations cannot be entered using the linear format, i.e. \sqrt(4&x^3).

                      When entering the values of the mathematical expressions, you do not need to use Spacebar as the spaces between the characters and signs of operations are set automatically.

                      -

                      If the equation is too long and does not fit to a single line, automatic line breaking occurs as you type. You can also insert a line break in a specific position by right-clicking on a mathematical operator and selecting the Insert manual break option from the menu. The selected operator will start a new line. Once the manual line break is added, you can press the Tab key to align the new line to any math operator of the previous line. To delete the added manual line break, right-click on the mathematical operator that starts a new line and select the Delete manual break option.

                      +

                      If the equation is too long and does not fit a single line, automatic line breaking occurs while typing. You can also insert a line break in a specific position by right-clicking on a mathematical operator and selecting the Insert manual break option from the menu. The selected operator will start a new line. Once the manual line break is added, you can press the Tab key to align the new line to any math operator of the previous line. To delete the added manual line break, right-click on the mathematical operator that starts a new line and select the Delete manual break option.

                      Format equations

                      -

                      To increase or decrease the equation font size, click anywhere within the equation box and use the Increment font size and Decrement font size buttons at the Home tab of the top toolbar or select the necessary font size from the list. All the equation elements will change correspondingly.

                      -

                      The letters within the equation are italicized by default. If necessary, you can change the font style (bold, italic, strikeout) or color for a whole equation or its part. The underlined style can be applied to the entire equation only, not to individual characters. Select the necessary part of the equation by clicking and dragging. The selected part will be highlighted blue. Then use the necessary buttons at the Home tab of the top toolbar to format the selection. For example, you can remove the italic format for ordinary words that are not variables or constants.

                      +

                      To increase or decrease the equation font size, click anywhere within the equation box and use the Increment font size and Decrement font size buttons on the Home tab of the top toolbar or select the necessary font size from the list. All the equation elements will change correspondingly.

                      +

                      The letters within the equation are italicized by default. If necessary, you can change the font style (bold, italic, strikeout) or color for a whole equation or its part. The underlined style can be applied to the entire equation only, not to individual characters. Select the necessary part of the equation by clicking and dragging it. The selected part will be highlighted in blue. Then use the necessary buttons on the Home tab of the top toolbar to format the selected part. For example, you can remove the italic format for ordinary words that are not variables or constants.

                      Edited Equation -

                      To modify some equation elements you can also use the right-click menu options:

                      +

                      To modify some equation elements, you can also use the right-click menu options:

                      • To change the Fractions format, you can right-click on a fraction and select the Change to skewed/linear/stacked fraction option from the menu (the available options differ depending on the selected fraction type).
                      • To change the Scripts position relating to text, you can right-click on the equation that includes scripts and select the Scripts before/after text option from the menu.
                      • To change the argument size for Scripts, Radicals, Integrals, Large Operators, Limits and Logarithms, Operators as well as for overbraces/underbraces and templates with grouping characters from the Accents group, you can right-click on the argument you want to change and select the Increase/Decrease argument size option from the menu.
                      • To specify whether an empty degree placeholder should be displayed or not for a Radical, you can right-click on the radical and select the Hide/Show degree option from the menu.
                      • To specify whether an empty limit placeholder should be displayed or not for an Integral or Large Operator, you can right-click on the equation and select the Hide/Show top/bottom limit option from the menu.
                      • -
                      • To change the limits position relating to the integral or operator sign for Integrals or Large Operators, you can right-click on the equation and select the Change limits location option from the menu. The limits can be displayed to the right of the operator sign (as subscripts and superscripts) or directly above and below the operator sign.
                      • +
                      • To change the limits position relating to the integral or operator sign for Integrals or Large Operators, you can right-click on the equation and select the Change limits location option from the menu. The limits can be displayed on the right of the operator sign (as subscripts and superscripts) or directly above and below the operator sign.
                      • To change the limits position relating to text for Limits and Logarithms and templates with grouping characters from the Accents group, you can right-click on the equation and select the Limit over/under text option from the menu.
                      • To choose which of the Brackets should be displayed, you can right-click on the expression within them and select the Hide/Show opening/closing bracket option from the menu.
                      • To control the Brackets size, you can right-click on the expression within them. The Stretch brackets option is selected by default so that the brackets can grow according to the expression within them, but you can deselect this option to prevent brackets from stretching. When this option is activated, you can also use the Match brackets to argument height option.
                      • @@ -75,11 +75,11 @@
                      • To align elements within a Matrix column horizontally, you can right-click on a placeholder within the column, select the Column Alignment option from the menu, then select the alignment type: Left, Center, or Right.

                      Delete equation elements

                      -

                      To delete a part of the equation, select the part you want to delete by dragging the mouse or holding down the Shift key and using the arrow buttons, then press the Delete key on the keyboard.

                      +

                      To delete a part of the equation, select it by dragging the mouse or holding down the Shift key and using the arrow buttons, then press the Delete key on the keyboard.

                      A slot can only be deleted together with the template it belongs to.

                      To delete the entire equation, select it completely by dragging the mouse or double-clicking on the equation box and press the Delete key on the keyboard.

                      Delete Equation -

                      To delete some equation elements you can also use the right-click menu options:

                      +

                      To delete some equation elements, you can also use the right-click menu options:

                      • To delete a Radical, you can right-click on it and select the Delete radical option from the menu.
                      • To delete a Subscript and/or Superscript, you can right-click on the expression that contains them and select the Remove subscript/superscript option from the menu. If the expression contains scripts that go before text, the Remove scripts option is available.
                      • @@ -90,6 +90,12 @@
                      • To delete an Accent, you can right-click on it and select the Remove accent character, Delete char or Remove bar option from the menu (the available options differ depending on the selected accent).
                      • To delete a row or a column of a Matrix, you can right-click on the placeholder within the row/column you need to delete, select the Delete option from the menu, then select Delete Row/Column.
                      +

                      Convert equations

                      +

                      If you open an existing document containing equations which were created with an old version of equation editor (for example, with MS Office versions before 2007), you need to convert these equations to the Office Math ML format to be able to edit them.

                      +

                      To convert an equation, double-click it. The warning window will appear:

                      +

                      Convert equation

                      +

                      To convert the selected equation only, click the Yes button in the warning window. To convert all equations in this document, check the Apply to all equations box and click Yes.

                      +

                      Once the equation is converted, you can edit it.

                      \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertFootnotes.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertFootnotes.htm index c41ae5ef0..7871eb8f1 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertFootnotes.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertFootnotes.htm @@ -14,14 +14,14 @@

                      Insert footnotes

                      -

                      You can add footnotes to provide explanations or comments for certain sentences or terms used in your text, make references to the sources etc.

                      +

                      You can insert footnotes to add explanations or comments for certain sentences or terms used in your text, make references to the sources, etc.

                      To insert a footnote into your document,

                        -
                      1. position the insertion point at the end of the text passage that you want to add a footnote to,
                      2. +
                      3. position the insertion point at the end of the text passage that you want to add the footnote to,
                      4. switch to the References tab of the top toolbar,
                      5. -
                      6. click the Footnote icon Footnote icon at the top toolbar, or
                        +
                      7. click the Footnote icon Footnote icon on the top toolbar, or
                        click the arrow next to the Footnote icon Footnote icon and select the Insert Footnote option from the menu, -

                        The footnote mark (i.e. the superscript character that indicates a footnote) appears in the document text and the insertion point moves to the bottom of the current page.

                        +

                        The footnote mark (i.e. the superscript character that indicates a footnote) appears in the text of the document, and the insertion point moves to the bottom of the current page.

                      8. type in the footnote text.
                      @@ -29,17 +29,17 @@

                      Footnotes

                      If you hover the mouse pointer over the footnote mark in the document text, a small pop-up window with the footnote text appears.

                      Footnote text

                      -

                      To easily navigate between the added footnotes within the document text,

                      +

                      To easily navigate through the added footnotes in the text of the document,

                        -
                      1. click the arrow next to the Footnote icon Footnote icon at the References tab of the top toolbar,
                      2. +
                      3. click the arrow next to the Footnote icon Footnote icon on the References tab of the top toolbar,
                      4. in the Go to Footnotes section, use the Previous footnote icon arrow to go to the previous footnote or the Next footnote icon arrow to go to the next footnote.

                      To edit the footnotes settings,

                        -
                      1. click the arrow next to the Footnote icon Footnote icon at the References tab of the top toolbar,
                      2. +
                      3. click the arrow next to the Footnote icon Footnote icon on the References tab of the top toolbar,
                      4. select the Notes Settings option from the menu,
                      5. -
                      6. change the current parameters in the Notes Settings window that opens: +
                      7. change the current parameters in the Notes Settings window that will appear:

                        Footnotes Settings window

                        • Set the Location of footnotes on the page selecting one of the available options: @@ -55,26 +55,26 @@
                        • Numbering - select a way to number your footnotes:
                          • Continuous - to number footnotes sequentially throughout the document,
                          • -
                          • Restart each section - to start footnote numbering with the number 1 (or some other specified character) at the beginning of each section,
                          • -
                          • Restart each page - to start footnote numbering with the number 1 (or some other specified character) at the beginning of each page.
                          • +
                          • Restart each section - to start footnote numbering with 1 (or another specified character) at the beginning of each section,
                          • +
                          • Restart each page - to start footnote numbering with 1 (or another specified character) at the beginning of each page.
                        • Custom Mark - set a special character or a word you want to use as the footnote mark (e.g. * or Note1). Enter the necessary character/word into the text entry field and click the Insert button at the bottom of the Notes Settings window.
                      8. -
                      9. Use the Apply changes to drop-down list to select if you want to apply the specified notes settings to the Whole document or the Current section only. -

                        Note: to use different footnotes formatting in separate parts of the document, you need to add section breaks first.

                        +
                      10. Use the Apply changes to drop-down list if you want to apply the specified notes settings to the Whole document or the Current section only. +

                        Note: to use different footnotes formatting in separate parts of the document, you need to add section breaks first.

                  • -
                  • When ready, click the Apply button.
                  • +
                  • When you finish, click the Apply button.

                  • -

                    To remove a single footnote, position the insertion point directly before the footnote mark in the document text and press Delete. Other footnotes will be renumbered automatically.

                    +

                    To remove a single footnote, position the insertion point directly before the footnote mark in the text and press Delete. Other footnotes will be renumbered automatically.

                    To delete all the footnotes in the document,

                      -
                    1. click the arrow next to the Footnote icon Footnote icon at the References tab of the top toolbar,
                    2. +
                    3. click the arrow next to the Footnote icon Footnote icon on the References tab of the top toolbar,
                    4. select the Delete All Footnotes option from the menu.
                    diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertHeadersFooters.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertHeadersFooters.htm index 3ce7b066c..7adaf8bab 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertHeadersFooters.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertHeadersFooters.htm @@ -14,28 +14,28 @@

                    Insert headers and footers

                    -

                    To add a header or footer to your document or edit the existing one,

                    +

                    To add a new header or footer to your document or edit one that already exists,

                    1. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar,
                    2. -
                    3. click the Header/Footer icon Header/Footer icon at the top toolbar,
                    4. +
                    5. click the Header/Footer icon Header/Footer icon on the top toolbar,
                    6. select one of the following options:
                      • Edit Header to insert or edit the header text.
                      • Edit Footer to insert or edit the footer text.
                    7. -
                    8. change the current parameters for headers or footers at the right sidebar: -

                      Right Sidebar - Header and Footer Settings

                      -
                        -
                      • Set the Position of text relative to the top (for headers) or bottom (for footers) of the page.
                      • -
                      • Check the Different first page box to apply a different header or footer to the very first page or in case you don't want to add any header/ footer to it at all.
                      • -
                      • Use the Different odd and even pages box to add different headers/footer for odd and even pages.
                      • -
                      • The Link to Previous option is available in case you've previously added sections into your document. If not, it will be grayed out. Moreover, this option is also unavailable for the very first section (i.e. when a header or footer that belongs to the first section is selected). By default, this box is checked, so that the same headers/footers are applied to all the sections. If you select a header or footer area, you will see that the area is marked with the Same as Previous label. Uncheck the Link to Previous box to use different headers/footers for each section of the document. The Same as Previous label will no longer be displayed.
                      • -
                      +
                    9. change the current parameters for headers or footers on the right sidebar: +

                      Right Sidebar - Header and Footer Settings

                      +
                        +
                      • Set the Position of the text: to the top for headers or to the bottom for footers.
                      • +
                      • Check the Different first page box to apply a different header or footer to the very first page or in case you don't want to add any header/ footer to it at all.
                      • +
                      • Use the Different odd and even pages box to add different headers/footer for odd and even pages.
                      • +
                      • The Link to Previous option is available in case you've previously added sections into your document. If not, it will be grayed out. Moreover, this option is also unavailable for the very first section (i.e. when a header or footer that belongs to the first section is selected). By default, this box is checked, so that the same headers/footers are applied to all the sections. If you select a header or footer area, you will see that the area is marked with the Same as Previous label. Uncheck the Link to Previous box to use different headers/footers for each section of the document. The Same as Previous label will no longer be displayed.
                      • +

                      Same as previous label

                    -

                    To enter a text or edit the already entered text and adjust the header or footer settings, you can also double-click within the upper or lower part of a page or click with the right mouse button there and select the only menu option - Edit Header or Edit Footer.

                    +

                    To enter a text or edit the already entered text and adjust the header or footer settings, you can also double-click anywhere on the top or bottom margin of your document or click with the right mouse button there and select the only menu option - Edit Header or Edit Footer.

                    To switch to the document body, double-click within the working area. The text you use as a header or footer will be displayed in gray.

                    Note: please refer to the Insert page numbers section to learn how to add page numbers to your document.

                    diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm index dd13fd09a..ea862dfae 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm @@ -14,27 +14,27 @@

                    Insert images

                    -

                    In Document Editor, you can insert images in the most popular formats into your document. The following image formats are supported: BMP, GIF, JPEG, JPG, PNG.

                    +

                    In the Document Editor, you can insert images in the most popular formats into your document. The following image formats are supported: BMP, GIF, JPEG, JPG, PNG.

                    Insert an image

                    To insert an image into the document text,

                    1. place the cursor where you want the image to be put,
                    2. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar,
                    3. -
                    4. click the Image icon Image icon at the top toolbar,
                    5. +
                    6. click the Image icon Image icon on the top toolbar,
                    7. select one of the following options to load the image:
                        -
                      • the Image from File option will open the standard dialog window for file selection. Browse your computer hard disk drive for the necessary file and click the Open button
                      • -
                      • the Image from URL option will open the window where you can enter the necessary image web address and click the OK button
                      • +
                      • the Image from File option will open a standard dialog window for to select a file. Browse your computer hard disk drive for the necessary file and click the Open button
                      • +
                      • the Image from URL option will open the window where you can enter the web address of the requiredimage, and click the OK button
                      • the Image from Storage option will open the Select data source window. Select an image stored on your portal and click the OK button
                    8. -
                    9. once the image is added you can change its size, properties, and position.
                    10. +
                    11. once the image is added, you can change its size, properties, and position.

                    It's also possible to add a caption to the image. To learn more on how to work with captions for images, you can refer to this article.

                    Move and resize images

                    Moving imageTo change the image size, drag small squares Square icon situated on its edges. To maintain the original proportions of the selected image while resizing, hold down the Shift key and drag one of the corner icons.

                    To alter the image position, use the Arrow icon that appears after hovering your mouse cursor over the image. Drag the image to the necessary position without releasing the mouse button.

                    -

                    When you move the image, guide lines are displayed to help you position the object on the page precisely (if a wrapping style other than inline is selected).

                    +

                    When you move the image, the guide lines are displayed to help you precisely position the object on the page (if the selected wrapping style is different from the inline).

                    To rotate the image, hover the mouse cursor over the rotation handle Rotation handle and drag it clockwise or counterclockwise. To constrain the rotation angle to 15 degree increments, hold down the Shift key while rotating.

                    Note: the list of keyboard shortcuts that can be used when working with objects is available here. @@ -43,20 +43,20 @@

                    Adjust image settings

                    Image Settings tabSome of the image settings can be altered using the Image settings tab of the right sidebar. To activate it click the image and choose the Image settings Image settings icon icon on the right. Here you can change the following properties:

                      -
                    • Size is used to view the current image Width and Height. If necessary, you can restore the actual image size clicking the Actual Size button. The Fit to Margin button allows to resize the image, so that it occupies all the space between the left and right page margin. -

                      The Crop button is used to crop the image. Click the Crop button to activate cropping handles which appear on the image corners and in the center of each its side. Manually drag the handles to set the cropping area. You can move the mouse cursor over the cropping area border so that it turns into the Arrow icon and drag the area.

                      -
                        -
                      • To crop a single side, drag the handle located in the center of this side.
                      • -
                      • To simultaneously crop two adjacent sides, drag one of the corner handles.
                      • -
                      • To equally crop two opposite sides of the image, hold down the Ctrl key when dragging the handle in the center of one of these sides.
                      • -
                      • To equally crop all sides of the image, hold down the Ctrl key when dragging any of the corner handles.
                      • -
                      +
                    • Size is used to view the Width and Height of the current image. If necessary, you can restore the actual image size clicking the Actual Size button. The Fit to Margin button allows you to resize the image, so that it occupies all the space between the left and right page margin. +

                      The Crop button is used to crop the image. Click the Crop button to activate cropping handles which appear on the image corners and in the center of each its side. Manually drag the handles to set the cropping area. You can move the mouse cursor over the cropping area border so that it turns into the Arrow icon and drag the area.

                      +
                        +
                      • To crop a single side, drag the handle located in the center of this side.
                      • +
                      • To simultaneously crop two adjacent sides, drag one of the corner handles.
                      • +
                      • To equally crop the two opposite sides of the image, hold down the Ctrl key when dragging the handle in the center of one of these sides.
                      • +
                      • To equally crop all sides of the image, hold down the Ctrl key when dragging any of the corner handles.
                      • +

                      When the cropping area is specified, click the Crop button once again, or press the Esc key, or click anywhere outside of the cropping area to apply the changes.

                      After the cropping area is selected, it's also possible to use the Fill and Fit options available from the Crop drop-down menu. Click the Crop button once again and select the option you need:

                      -
                        -
                      • If you select the Fill option, the central part of the original image will be preserved and used to fill the selected cropping area, while other parts of the image will be removed.
                      • -
                      • If you select the Fit option, the image will be resized so that it fits the cropping area height or width. No parts of the original image will be removed, but empty spaces may appear within the selected cropping area.
                      • -
                      +
                        +
                      • If you select the Fill option, the central part of the original image will be preserved and used to fill the selected cropping area, while the other parts of the image will be removed.
                      • +
                      • If you select the Fit option, the image will be resized so that it fits the height and the width of the cropping area. No parts of the original image will be removed, but empty spaces may appear within the selected cropping area.
                      • +
                    • Rotation is used to rotate the image by 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise as well as to flip the image horizontally or vertically. Click one of the buttons:
                        @@ -67,29 +67,29 @@
                    • Wrapping Style is used to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind (for more information see the advanced settings description below).
                    • -
                    • Replace Image is used to replace the current image loading another one From File or From URL.
                    • +
                    • Replace Image is used to replace the current image by loading another one From File, From Storage, or From URL.
                    -

                    Some of these options you can also find in the right-click menu. The menu options are:

                    +

                    You can also find some of these options in the right-click menu. The menu options are:

                      -
                    • Cut, Copy, Paste - standard options which are used to cut or copy a selected text/object and paste a previously cut/copied text passage or object to the current cursor position.
                    • -
                    • Arrange is used to bring the selected image to foreground, send to background, move forward or backward as well as group or ungroup images to perform operations with several of them at once. To learn more on how to arrange objects you can refer to this page.
                    • -
                    • Align is used to align the image left, center, right, top, middle, bottom. To learn more on how to align objects you can refer to this page.
                    • -
                    • Wrapping Style is used to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind - or edit the wrap boundary. The Edit Wrap Boundary option is available only if you select a wrapping style other than Inline. Drag wrap points to customize the boundary. To create a new wrap point, click anywhere on the red line and drag it to the necessary position. Editing Wrap Boundary
                    • +
                    • Cut, Copy, Paste - standard options which are used to cut or copy the selected text/object and paste the previously cut/copied text passage or object to the current cursor position.
                    • +
                    • Arrange is used to bring the selected image to foreground, send it to background, move forward or backward as well as group or ungroup images to perform operations with several of them at once. To learn more on how to arrange objects, please refer to this page.
                    • +
                    • Align is used to align the image to the left, in the center, to the right, at the top, in the middle or at the bottom. To learn more on how to align objects, please refer to this page.
                    • +
                    • Wrapping Style is used to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind - or edit the wrap boundary. The Edit Wrap Boundary option is available only if the selected wrapping style is not inline. Drag wrap points to customize the boundary. To create a new wrap point, click anywhere on the red line and drag it to the necessary position. Editing Wrap Boundary
                    • Rotate is used to rotate the image by 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise as well as to flip the image horizontally or vertically.
                    • Crop is used to apply one of the cropping options: Crop, Fill or Fit. Select the Crop option from the submenu, then drag the cropping handles to set the cropping area, and click one of these three options from the submenu once again to apply the changes.
                    • Actual Size is used to change the current image size to the actual one.
                    • -
                    • Replace image is used to replace the current image loading another one From File or From URL.
                    • +
                    • Replace image is used to replace the current image by loading another one From File or From URL.
                    • Image Advanced Settings is used to open the 'Image - Advanced Settings' window.
                    -

                    Shape Settings tab When the image is selected, the Shape settings Shape settings icon icon is also available on the right. You can click this icon to open the Shape settings tab at the right sidebar and adjust the shape Stroke type, size and color as well as change the shape type selecting another shape from the Change Autoshape menu. The shape of the image will change correspondingly.

                    -

                    At the Shape Settings tab, you can also use the Show shadow option to add a shadow to the image.

                    +

                    Shape Settings tab When the image is selected, the Shape settings Shape settings icon icon is also available on the right. You can click this icon to open the Shape settings tab on the right sidebar and adjust the shape Stroke type, size and color as well as change the shape type selecting another shape from the Change Autoshape menu. The shape of the image will change correspondingly.

                    +

                    On the Shape Settings tab, you can also use the Show shadow option to add a shadow to the image.


                    Adjust image advanced settings

                    -

                    To change the image advanced settings, click the image with the right mouse button and select the Image Advanced Settings option from the right-click menu or just click the Show advanced settings link at the right sidebar. The image properties window will open:

                    +

                    To change the image advanced settings, click the image with the right mouse button and select the Image Advanced Settings option from the right-click menu or just click the Show advanced settings link on the right sidebar. The image properties window will open:

                    Image - Advanced Settings: Size

                    The Size tab contains the following parameters:

                      -
                    • Width and Height - use these options to change the image width and/or height. If the Constant proportions Constant proportions icon button is clicked (in this case it looks like this Constant proportions icon activated), the width and height will be changed together preserving the original image aspect ratio. To restore the actual size of the added image, click the Actual Size button.
                    • +
                    • Width and Height - use these options to change the width and/or height. If the Constant proportions Constant proportions icon button is clicked (in this case it looks like this Constant proportions icon activated), the width and height will be changed together preserving the original image aspect ratio. To restore the actual size of the added image, click the Actual Size button.

                    Image - Advanced Settings: Rotation

                    The Rotation tab contains the following parameters:

                    @@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ The Horizontal section allows you to select one of the following three image positioning types:
                    • Alignment (left, center, right) relative to character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin,
                    • -
                    • Absolute Position measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified at the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) to the right of character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin,
                    • +
                    • Absolute Position measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified on the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) to the right of character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin,
                    • Relative position measured in percent relative to the left margin, margin, page or right margin.
                    @@ -130,15 +130,15 @@ The Vertical section allows you to select one of the following three image positioning types:
                    • Alignment (top, center, bottom) relative to line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin,
                    • -
                    • Absolute Position measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified at the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) below line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin,
                    • +
                    • Absolute Position measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified on the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) below line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin,
                    • Relative position measured in percent relative to the margin, bottom margin, page or top margin.
                    -
                  • Move object with text controls whether the image moves as the text to which it is anchored moves.
                  • -
                  • Allow overlap controls whether two images overlap or not if you drag them near each other on the page.
                  • +
                  • Move object with text ensures that the image moves along with the text to which it is anchored.
                  • +
                  • Allow overlap makes is possible for two images to overlap if you drag them near each other on the page.

                  Image - Advanced Settings

                  -

                  The Alternative Text tab allows to specify a Title and Description which will be read to the people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information there is in the image.

                  +

                  The Alternative Text tab allows specifying a Title and Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information the image contains.

                  \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertPageNumbers.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertPageNumbers.htm index 9200aa93e..57283cd96 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertPageNumbers.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertPageNumbers.htm @@ -17,11 +17,11 @@

                  To insert page numbers into your document,

                  1. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar,
                  2. -
                  3. click the Header/Footer Header/Footer icon icon at the top toolbar,
                  4. +
                  5. click the Header/Footer Header/Footer icon icon on the top toolbar,
                  6. choose the Insert Page Number submenu,
                  7. select one of the following options:
                      -
                    • To put a page number to each page of your document, select the page number position on the page.
                    • +
                    • To add a page number to each page of your document, select the page number position on the page.
                    • To insert a page number at the current cursor position, select the To Current Position option.

                      Note: to insert a current page number at the current cursor position you can also use the Ctrl+Shift+P key combination. @@ -33,17 +33,17 @@

                      To insert the total number of pages in your document (e.g. if you want to create the Page X of Y entry):

                      1. put the cursor where you want to insert the total number of pages,
                      2. -
                      3. click the Header/Footer Header/Footer icon icon at the top toolbar,
                      4. +
                      5. click the Header/Footer Header/Footer icon icon on the top toolbar,
                      6. select the Insert number of pages option.

                      To edit the page number settings,

                      1. double-click the page number added,
                      2. -
                      3. change the current parameters at the right sidebar: +
                      4. change the current parameters on the right sidebar:

                        Right Sidebar - Header and Footer Settings

                          -
                        • Set the Position of page numbers on the page as well as relative to the top and bottom of the page.
                        • +
                        • Set the Position of page numbers on the page accordingly to the top and bottom of the page.
                        • Check the Different first page box to apply a different page number to the very first page or in case you don't want to add any number to it at all.
                        • Use the Different odd and even pages box to insert different page numbers for odd and even pages.
                        • The Link to Previous option is available in case you've previously added sections into your document. @@ -51,9 +51,10 @@ By default, this box is checked, so that unified numbering is applied to all the sections. If you select a header or footer area, you will see that the area is marked with the Same as Previous label. Uncheck the Link to Previous box to use different page numbering for each section of the document. The Same as Previous label will no longer be displayed.

                          Same as previous label

                        • -
                        • The Page Numbering section allows to adjust page numbering options across different sections of the document. - The Continue from previous section option is selected by default and allows to keep continuous page numbering after a section break. - If you want to start page numbering with a specific number in the current section of the document, select the Start at radio button and enter the necessary starting value in the field on the right.
                        • +
                        • The Page Numbering section allows adjusting page numbering options throughout different sections of the document. + The Continue from previous section option is selected by default and makes it possible to keep continuous page numbering after a section break. + If you want to start page numbering with a specific number in the current section of the document, select the Start at radio button and enter the required starting value in the field on the right. +
                      diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertSymbols.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertSymbols.htm index 82ee6b96e..0c11ae511 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertSymbols.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertSymbols.htm @@ -14,32 +14,34 @@

                      Insert symbols and characters

                      -

                      During working process you may need to insert a symbol which is not on your keyboard. To insert such symbols into your document, use the Symbol table iconInsert symbol option and follow these simple steps:

                      +

                      To insert a special symbol which can not be typed on the keybord, use the Symbol table icon Insert symbol option and follow these simple steps:

                        -
                      • place the cursor at the location where a special symbol has to be inserted,
                      • +
                      • place the cursor where a special symbol should be inserted,
                      • switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar,
                      • - click the Symbol table iconSymbol, + click the Symbol table icon Symbol,

                        Insert symbol sidebar

                      • -
                      • The Symbol dialog box appears from which you can select the appropriate symbol,
                      • +
                      • The Symbol dialog box will appear, and you will be able to select the required symbol,
                      • use the Range section to quickly find the nesessary symbol. All symbols are divided into specific groups, for example, select 'Currency Symbols' if you want to insert a currency character.

                        -

                        If this character is not in the set, select a different font. Many of them also have characters other than the standard set.

                        -

                        Or, enter the Unicode hex value of the symbol you want into the Unicode hex value field. This code can be found in the Character map.

                        -

                        Previously used symbols are also displayed in the Recently used symbols field,

                        +

                        If the required character is not in the set, select a different font. Many of them also have characters which differ from the standard set.

                        +

                        Or enter the Unicode hex value of the required symbol you want into the Unicode hex value field. This code can be found in the Character map.

                        +

                        You can also use the Special characters tab to choose a special character from the list.

                        +

                        Insert symbol sidebar

                        +

                        The previously used symbols are also displayed in the Recently used symbols field,

                      • click Insert. The selected character will be added to the document.

                      Insert ASCII symbols

                      -

                      ASCII table is also used to add characters.

                      -

                      To do this, hold down ALT key and use the numeric keypad to enter the character code.

                      +

                      The ASCII table is also used to add characters.

                      +

                      To do this, hold down the ALT key and use the numeric keypad to enter the character code.

                      Note: be sure to use the numeric keypad, not the numbers on the main keyboard. To enable the numeric keypad, press the Num Lock key.

                      -

                      For example, to add a paragraph character (§), press and hold down ALT while typing 789, and then release ALT key.

                      +

                      For example, to add a paragraph character (§), press and hold down ALT while typing 789, and then release the ALT key.

                      -

                      Insert symbols using Unicode table

                      -

                      Additional charachters and symbols might also be found via Windows symbol table. To open this table, do one of the following:

                      +

                      Insert symbols using the Unicode table

                      +

                      Additional charachters and symbols can also be found in the Windows symbol table. To open this table, do of the following:

                      • in the Search field write 'Character table' and open it,
                      • @@ -47,7 +49,7 @@

                        Insert symbol windpow

                      -

                      In the opened Character Map, select one of the Character sets, Groups and Fonts. Next, click on the nesessary characters, copy them to clipboard and paste in the right place of the document.

                      +

                      In the opened Character Map, select one of the Character sets, Groups and Fonts. Next, click on the required characters, copy them to the clipboard and paste where necessary.

                      \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertTables.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertTables.htm index bb9f6c350..00c5c6569 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertTables.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertTables.htm @@ -17,9 +17,9 @@

                      Insert a table

                      To insert a table into the document text,

                        -
                      1. place the cursor where you want the table to be put,
                      2. +
                      3. place the cursor where the table should be added,
                      4. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar,
                      5. -
                      6. click the Table icon Table icon at the top toolbar,
                      7. +
                      8. click the Table icon Table icon on the top toolbar,
                      9. select the option to create a table:
                        • either a table with predefined number of cells (10 by 8 cells maximum)

                          @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@

                          To select a certain cell, move the mouse cursor to the left side of the necessary cell so that the cursor turns into the black arrow Select cell, then left-click.

                          To select a certain row, move the mouse cursor to the left border of the table next to the necessary row so that the cursor turns into the horizontal black arrow Select row, then left-click.

                          To select a certain column, move the mouse cursor to the top border of the necessary column so that the cursor turns into the downward black arrow Select column, then left-click.

                          -

                          It's also possible to select a cell, row, column or table using options from the contextual menu or from the Rows & Columns section at the right sidebar.

                          +

                          It's also possible to select a cell, row, column or table using options from the contextual menu or from the Rows & Columns section on the right sidebar.

                          Note: to move around in a table you can use keyboard shortcuts.

                          @@ -52,20 +52,20 @@

                          Adjust table settings

                          Some of the table properties as well as its structure can be altered using the right-click menu. The menu options are:

                            -
                          • Cut, Copy, Paste - standard options which are used to cut or copy a selected text/object and paste a previously cut/copied text passage or object to the current cursor position.
                          • +
                          • Cut, Copy, Paste - standard options which are used to cut or copy the selected text/object and paste the previously cut/copied text passage or object to the current cursor position.
                          • Select is used to select a row, column, cell, or table.
                          • Insert is used to insert a row above or row below the row where the cursor is placed as well as to insert a column at the left or right side from the column where the cursor is placed. -

                            It's also possible to insert several rows or columns. If you select the Several Rows/Columns option, the Insert Several window opens. Select the Rows or Columns option from the list, specify the number of rows/column you want to add, choose where they should be added: Above the cursor or Below the cursor and click OK.

                            +

                            It's also possible to insert several rows or columns. If you select the Several Rows/Columns option, the Insert Several window will appear. Select the Rows or Columns option from the list, specify the number of rows/column you want to add, choose where they should be added: Above the cursor or Below the cursor and click OK.

                          • Delete is used to delete a row, column, table or cells. If you select the Cells option, the Delete Cells window will open, where you can select if you want to Shift cells left, Delete entire row, or Delete entire column.
                          • Merge Cells is available if two or more cells are selected and is used to merge them.

                            - It's also possible to merge cells by erasing a boundary between them using the eraser tool. To do this, click the Table icon Table icon at the top toolbar, choose the Erase Table option. The mouse cursor will turn into the eraser Mouse Cursor when erasing borders. Move the mouse cursor over the border between the cells you want to merge and erase it. + It's also possible to merge cells by erasing a boundary between them using the eraser tool. To do this, click the Table icon Table icon on the top toolbar, choose the Erase Table option. The mouse cursor will turn into the eraser Mouse Cursor when erasing borders. Move the mouse cursor over the border between the cells you want to merge and erase it.

                          • Split Cell... is used to open a window where you can select the needed number of columns and rows the cell will be split in.

                            - It's also possible to split a cell by drawing rows or columns using the pencil tool. To do this, click the Table icon Table icon at the top toolbar, choose the Draw Table option. The mouse cursor will turn into the pencil Mouse Cursor when drawing a table. Draw a horizontal line to create a row or a vertical line to create a column. + It's also possible to split a cell by drawing rows or columns using the pencil tool. To do this, click the Table icon Table icon on the top toolbar, choose the Draw Table option. The mouse cursor will turn into the pencil Mouse Cursor when drawing a table. Draw a horizontal line to create a row or a vertical line to create a column.

                          • Distribute rows is used to adjust the selected cells so that they have the same height without changing the overall table height.
                          • @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@

                          Right Sidebar - Table Settings

                          -

                          You can also change the table properties at the right sidebar:

                          +

                          You can also change the table properties on the right sidebar:

                          • Rows and Columns are used to select the table parts that you want to be highlighted.

                            For rows:

                            @@ -104,45 +104,45 @@

                          Adjust table advanced settings

                          -

                          To change the advanced table properties, click the table with the right mouse button and select the Table Advanced Settings option from the right-click menu or use the Show advanced settings link at the right sidebar. The table properties window will open:

                          +

                          To change the advanced table properties, click the table with the right mouse button and select the Table Advanced Settings option from the right-click menu or use the Show advanced settings link on the right sidebar. The table properties window will open:

                          Table - Advanced Settings

                          -

                          The Table tab allows to change properties of the entire table.

                          +

                          The Table tab allows changing the properties of the entire table.

                          • The Table Size section contains the following parameters:
                            • Width - by default, the table width is automatically adjusted to fit the page width, i.e. the table occupies all the space between the left and right page margin. You can check this box and specify the necessary table width manually.
                            • -
                            • Measure in - allows to specify if you want to set the table width in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified at the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) or in Percent of the overall page width. +
                            • Measure in allows specifying the table width in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified on the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) or in Percent of the overall page width.

                              Note: you can also adjust the table size manually changing the row height and column width. Move the mouse cursor over a row/column border until it turns into the bidirectional arrow and drag the border. You can also use the Table - Column Width Marker markers on the horizontal ruler to change the column width and the Table - Row Height Marker markers on the vertical ruler to change the row height.

                            • -
                            • Automatically resize to fit contents - enables automatic change of each column width in accordance with the text within its cells.
                            • +
                            • Automatically resize to fit contents - allows automatically change the width of each column in accordance with the text within its cells.
                          • -
                          • The Default Cell Margins section allows to change the space between the text within the cells and the cell border used by default.
                          • -
                          • The Options section allows to change the following parameter: -
                              -
                            • Spacing between cells - the cell spacing which will be filled with the Table Background color.
                            • -
                            +
                          • The Default Cell Margins section allows changing the space between the text within the cells and the cell border used by default.
                          • +
                          • The Options section allows changing the following parameter: +
                              +
                            • Spacing between cells - the cell spacing which will be filled with the Table Background color.
                            • +

                          Table - Advanced Settings

                          -

                          The Cell tab allows to change properties of individual cells. First you need to select the cell you want to apply the changes to or select the entire table to change properties of all its cells.

                          +

                          The Cell tab allows changing the properties of individual cells. First you need to select the required cell or select the entire table to change the properties of all its cells.

                          • The Cell Size section contains the following parameters:
                              -
                            • Preferred width - allows to set a preferred cell width. This is the size that a cell strives to fit to, but in some cases it may not be possible to fit to this exact value. For example, if the text within a cell exceeds the specified width, it will be broken into the next line so that the preferred cell width remains unchanged, but if you insert a new column, the preferred width will be reduced.
                            • -
                            • Measure in - allows to specify if you want to set the cell width in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified at the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) or in Percent of the overall table width. +
                            • Preferred width - allows setting the preferred cell width. This is the size that a cell strives to fit, but in some cases, it may not be possible to fit this exact value. For example, if the text within a cell exceeds the specified width, it will be broken into the next line so that the preferred cell width remains unchanged, but if you insert a new column, the preferred width will be reduced.
                            • +
                            • Measure in - allows specifying the cell width in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified on the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) or in Percent of the overall table width.

                              Note: you can also adjust the cell width manually. To make a single cell in a column wider or narrower than the overall column width, select the necessary cell and move the mouse cursor over its right border until it turns into the bidirectional arrow, then drag the border. To change the width of all the cells in a column, use the Table - Column Width Marker markers on the horizontal ruler to change the column width.

                          • -
                          • The Cell Margins section allows to adjust the space between the text within the cells and the cell border. By default, standard values are used (the default values can also be altered at the Table tab), but you can uncheck the Use default margins box and enter the necessary values manually.
                          • +
                          • The Cell Margins allows adjusting the space between the text within the cells and the cell border. By default, the standard values are used (the default, these values can also be altered on the Table tab), but you can uncheck the Use default margins box and enter the necessary values manually.
                          • - The Cell Options section allows to change the following parameter: + The Cell Options section allows changing the following parameter:
                              -
                            • The Wrap text option is enabled by default. It allows to wrap text within a cell that exceeds its width onto the next line expanding the row height and keeping the column width unchanged.
                            • +
                            • The Wrap text option is enabled by default. It allows wrapping the text within a cell that exceeds its width onto the next line expanding the row height and keeping the column width unchanged.
                          @@ -152,21 +152,21 @@
                        • Border parameters (size, color and presence or absence) - set the border size, select its color and choose the way it will be displayed in the cells.

                          - Note: in case you select not to show table borders clicking the No borders button or deselecting all the borders manually on the diagram, they will be indicated by a dotted line in the document. - To make them disappear at all, click the Nonprinting characters Nonprinting characters icon at the Home tab of the top toolbar and select the Hidden Table Borders option. + Note: in case you choose not to show the table borders by clicking the No borders button or deselecting all the borders manually on the diagram, they will be indicated with a dotted line in the document. + To make them disappear at all, click the Nonprinting characters Nonprinting characters icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar and select the Hidden Table Borders option.

                        • Cell Background - the color for the background within the cells (available only if one or more cells are selected or the Allow spacing between cells option is selected at the Table tab).
                        • -
                        • Table Background - the color for the table background or the space background between the cells in case the Allow spacing between cells option is selected at the Table tab.
                        • +
                        • Table Background - the color for the table background or the space background between the cells in case the Allow spacing between cells option is selected on the Table tab.

                        Table - Advanced Settings

                        -

                        The Table Position tab is available only if the Flow table option at the Text Wrapping tab is selected and contains the following parameters:

                        +

                        The Table Position tab is available only if the Flow table option on the Text Wrapping tab is selected and contains the following parameters:

                        • Horizontal parameters include the table alignment (left, center, right) relative to margin, page or text as well as the table position to the right of margin, page or text.
                        • Vertical parameters include the table alignment (top, center, bottom) relative to margin, page or text as well as the table position below margin, page or text.
                        • -
                        • The Options section allows to change the following parameters: +
                        • The Options section allows changing the following parameters:
                            -
                          • Move object with text controls whether the table moves as the text into which it is inserted moves.
                          • +
                          • Move object with text ensures that the table moves with the text.
                          • Allow overlap controls whether two tables are merged into one large table or overlap if you drag them near each other on the page.
                        • @@ -179,12 +179,12 @@ After you select the wrapping style, the additional wrapping parameters can be set both for inline and flow tables:
                          • For the inline table, you can specify the table alignment and indent from left.
                          • -
                          • For the flow table, you can specify the distance from text and table position at the Table Position tab.
                          • +
                          • For the flow table, you can specify the distance from text and table position on the Table Position tab.

                        Table - Advanced Settings

                        -

                        The Alternative Text tab allows to specify a Title and Description which will be read to the people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information there is in the table.

                        +

                        The Alternative Text tab allows specifying the Title and Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand the contents of the table.

                        diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertTextObjects.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertTextObjects.htm index 125a06ce4..c3f8cb5a6 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertTextObjects.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertTextObjects.htm @@ -14,36 +14,37 @@

                        Insert text objects

                        -

                        To make your text more emphatic and draw attention to a specific part of the document, you can insert a text box (a rectangular frame that allows to enter text within it) or a Text Art object (a text box with a predefined font style and color that allows to apply some text effects).

                        +

                        To make your text more emphatic and draw attention to a specific part of the document, you can insert a text box (a rectangular frame that allows entering text within it) or a Text Art object (a text box with a predefined font style and color that allows applying some effects to the text).

                        Add a text object

                        You can add a text object anywhere on the page. To do that:

                        1. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar,
                        2. select the necessary text object type:
                            -
                          • to add a text box, click the Text Box icon Text Box icon at the top toolbar, then click where you want to insert the text box, hold the mouse button and drag the text box border to specify its size. When you release the mouse button, the insertion point will appear in the added text box, allowing you to enter your text. -

                            Note: it's also possible to insert a text box by clicking the Shape icon Shape icon at the top toolbar and selecting the Insert Text autoshape shape from the Basic Shapes group.

                            +
                          • + to add a text box, click the Text Box icon Text Box icon on the top toolbar, then click where the text box should be added, hold the mouse button and drag the text box border to specify its size. When you release the mouse button, the insertion point will appear in the added text box, allowing you to enter your text. +

                            Note: it's also possible to insert a text box by clicking the Shape icon Shape icon on the top toolbar and selecting the Insert Text autoshape shape from the Basic Shapes group.

                          • -
                          • to add a Text Art object, click the Text Art icon Text Art icon at the top toolbar, then click on the desired style template – the Text Art object will be added at the current cursor position. Select the default text within the text box with the mouse and replace it with your own text.
                          • +
                          • to add a Text Art object, click the Text Art icon Text Art icon on the top toolbar, then click on the desired style template – the Text Art object will be added at the current cursor position. Select the default text within the text box with the mouse and replace it with your own text.
                        3. click outside of the text object to apply the changes and return to the document.

                        The text within the text object is a part of the latter (when you move or rotate the text object, the text moves or rotates with it).

                        -

                        As an inserted text object represents a rectangular frame with text in it (Text Art objects have invisible text box borders by default) and this frame is a common autoshape, you can change both the shape and text properties.

                        +

                        As the inserted text object represents a rectangular frame with text in it (Text Art objects have invisible text box borders by default), and this frame is a common autoshape, you can change both the shape and text properties.

                        To delete the added text object, click on the text box border and press the Delete key on the keyboard. The text within the text box will also be deleted.

                        Format a text box

                        -

                        Select the text box clicking on its border to be able to change its properties. When the text box is selected, its borders are displayed as solid (not dashed) lines.

                        +

                        Select the text box by clicking on its border to be able to change its properties. When the text box is selected, its borders are displayed as solid (not dashed) lines.

                        Text box selected

                          -
                        • to resize, move, rotate the text box use the special handles on the edges of the shape.
                        • +
                        • to resize, move, rotate the text box, use the special handles on the edges of the shape.
                        • to edit the text box fill, stroke, wrapping style or replace the rectangular box with a different shape, click the Shape settings Shape settings icon icon on the right sidebar and use the corresponding options.
                        • -
                        • to align the text box on the page, arrange text boxes as related to other objects, rotate or flip a text box, change a wrapping style or access the shape advanced settings, right-click on the text box border and use the contextual menu options. To learn more on how to arrange and align objects you can refer to this page.
                        • +
                        • to align the text box on the page, arrange text boxes as related to other objects, rotate or flip a text box, change a wrapping style or access the shape advanced settings, right-click on the text box border and use the contextual menu options. To learn more on how to arrange and align objects, please refer to this page.

                        Format the text within the text box

                        -

                        Click the text within the text box to be able to change its properties. When the text is selected, the text box borders are displayed as dashed lines.

                        +

                        Click the text within the text box to change its properties. When the text is selected, the text box borders are displayed as dashed lines.

                        Text selected

                        -

                        Note: it's also possible to change text formatting when the text box (not the text itself) is selected. In such a case, any changes will be applied to all the text within the text box. Some font formatting options (font type, size, color and decoration styles) can be applied to a previously selected portion of the text separately.

                        +

                        Note: it's also possible to change the text formatting when the text box (not the text itself) is selected. In thus case, any changes will be applied to all the text within the text box. Some font formatting options (font type, size, color and decoration styles) can be applied to the previously selected text fragment separately.

                        To rotate the text within the text box, right-click the text, select the Text Direction option and then choose one of the available options: Horizontal (is selected by default), Rotate Text Down (sets a vertical direction, from top to bottom) or Rotate Text Up (sets a vertical direction, from bottom to top).

                        To align the text vertically within the text box, right-click the text, select the Vertical Alignment option and then choose one of the available options: Align Top, Align Center or Align Bottom.

                        Other formatting options that you can apply are the same as the ones for regular text. Please refer to the corresponding help sections to learn more about the necessary operation. You can:

                        @@ -57,11 +58,11 @@

                        Edit a Text Art style

                        Select a text object and click the Text Art settings Text Art settings icon icon on the right sidebar.

                        Text Art setting tab

                        -

                        Change the applied text style selecting a new Template from the gallery. You can also change the basic style additionally by selecting a different font type, size etc.

                        +

                        Change the applied text style by selecting a new Template from the gallery. You can also change the basic style by selecting a different font type, size etc.

                        Change the font Fill. You can choose the following options:

                        • - Color Fill - select this option to specify the solid color you want to fill the inner space of letters with. + Color Fill - select this option to specify the solid color to fill the inner space of letters.

                          Color Fill

                          Click the colored box below and select the necessary color from the available color sets or specify any color you like:

                        • diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/LineSpacing.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/LineSpacing.htm index eecb97add..5419486e0 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/LineSpacing.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/LineSpacing.htm @@ -14,29 +14,29 @@

                          Set paragraph line spacing

                          -

                          In Document Editor, you can set the line height for the text lines within the paragraph as well as the margins between the current and the preceding or the subsequent paragraph.

                          +

                          In the Document Editor, you can set the line height for the text lines within the paragraph as well as the margins between the current paragraph and the previous one or the subsequent paragraphs.

                          To do that,

                            -
                          1. put the cursor within the paragraph you need, or select several paragraphs with the mouse or all the text in the document by pressing the Ctrl+A key combination,
                          2. -
                          3. use the corresponding fields at the right sidebar to achieve the desired results: +
                          4. place the cursor within the required paragraph, or select several paragraphs with the mouse or the whole text by pressing the Ctrl+A key combination,
                          5. +
                          6. use the corresponding fields on the right sidebar to achieve the desired results:
                              -
                            • Line Spacing - set the line height for the text lines within the paragraph. You can select among three options: at least (sets the minimum line spacing that is needed to fit the largest font or graphic on the line), multiple (sets line spacing that can be expressed in numbers greater than 1), exactly (sets fixed line spacing). You can specify the necessary value in the field on the right.
                            • -
                            • Paragraph Spacing - set the amount of space between paragraphs. -
                                -
                              • Before - set the amount of space before the paragraph.
                              • -
                              • After - set the amount of space after the paragraph.
                              • -
                              • - Don't add interval between paragraphs of the same style - check this box in case you don't need any space between paragraphs of the same style. -

                                Right Sidebar - Paragraph Settings

                                -
                              • -
                              -
                            • +
                            • Line Spacing - set the line height for the text lines within the paragraph. You can select among three options: at least (sets the minimum line spacing that is needed to fit the largest font or graphic in the line), multiple (sets line spacing that can be expressed in numbers greater than 1), exactly (sets fixed line spacing). You can specify the necessary value in the field on the right.
                            • +
                            • Paragraph Spacing defines the amount of spacing between paragraphs. +
                                +
                              • Before defines the amount of spacing before the paragraph.
                              • +
                              • After defines the amount of spacing after the paragraph.
                              • +
                              • + Don't add interval between paragraphs of the same style - please check this box if you don't need any spacing between paragraphs of the same style. +

                                Right Sidebar - Paragraph Settings

                                +
                              • +
                              +
                          -

                          These parameters can also be found in the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window. To open the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window, right-click the text and choose the Paragraph Advanced Settings option from the menu or use the Show advanced settings option at the right sidebar. Then switch to the Indents & Spacing tab and go to the Spacing section.

                          +

                          These parameters can also be found in the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window. To open the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window, right-click the text and choose the Paragraph Advanced Settings option from the menu or use the Show advanced settings option on the right sidebar. Then switch to the Indents & Spacing tab and go to the Spacing section.

                          Paragraph Advanced Settings - Indents & Spacing

                          -

                          To quickly change the current paragraph line spacing, you can also use the Paragraph line spacing Paragraph line spacing icon at the Home tab of the top toolbar selecting the needed value from the list: 1.0, 1.15, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5, or 3.0 lines.

                          +

                          To quickly change the current paragraph line spacing, you can also use the Paragraph line spacing Paragraph line spacing icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar selecting the required value from the list: 1.0, 1.15, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5, or 3.0 lines.

                          \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/MathAutoCorrect.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/MathAutoCorrect.htm new file mode 100644 index 000000000..43326e9d7 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/MathAutoCorrect.htm @@ -0,0 +1,2506 @@ + + + + Use Math AutoCorrect + + + + + + + +
                          +
                          + +
                          +

                          Use Math AutoCorrect

                          +

                          When working with equations, you can insert a lot of symbols, accents and mathematical operation signs typing them on the keyboard instead of choosing a template from the gallery.

                          +

                          In the equation editor, place the insertion point within the necessary placeholder, type a math autocorrect code, then press Spacebar. The entered code will be converted into the corresponding symbol, and the space will be eliminated.

                          +

                          Note: The codes are case sensitive.

                          +

                          The table below contains all the currently supported codes available in the Document Editor. The full list of the supported codes can also be found on the File tab in the Advanced Settings... -> Proofing section.

                          +

                          AutoCorrect window

                          + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
                          CodeSymbolCategory
                          !!Double factorialSymbols
                          ...Horizontal ellipsisDots
                          ::Double colonOperators
                          :=Colon equalOperators
                          /<Not less thanRelational operators
                          />Not greater thanRelational operators
                          /=Not equalRelational operators
                          \aboveSymbolAbove/Below scripts
                          \acuteSymbolAccents
                          \alephSymbolHebrew letters
                          \alphaSymbolGreek letters
                          \AlphaSymbolGreek letters
                          \amalgSymbolBinary operators
                          \angleSymbolGeometry notation
                          \aointSymbolIntegrals
                          \approxSymbolRelational operators
                          \asmashSymbolArrows
                          \astAsteriskBinary operators
                          \asympSymbolRelational operators
                          \atopSymbolOperators
                          \barSymbolOver/Underbar
                          \BarSymbolAccents
                          \becauseSymbolRelational operators
                          \beginSymbolDelimiters
                          \belowSymbolAbove/Below scripts
                          \betSymbolHebrew letters
                          \betaSymbolGreek letters
                          \BetaSymbolGreek letters
                          \bethSymbolHebrew letters
                          \bigcapSymbolLarge operators
                          \bigcupSymbolLarge operators
                          \bigodotSymbolLarge operators
                          \bigoplusSymbolLarge operators
                          \bigotimesSymbolLarge operators
                          \bigsqcupSymbolLarge operators
                          \biguplusSymbolLarge operators
                          \bigveeSymbolLarge operators
                          \bigwedgeSymbolLarge operators
                          \binomialSymbolEquations
                          \botSymbolLogic notation
                          \bowtieSymbolRelational operators
                          \boxSymbolSymbols
                          \boxdotSymbolBinary operators
                          \boxminusSymbolBinary operators
                          \boxplusSymbolBinary operators
                          \braSymbolDelimiters
                          \breakSymbolSymbols
                          \breveSymbolAccents
                          \bulletSymbolBinary operators
                          \capSymbolBinary operators
                          \cbrtSymbolSquare roots and radicals
                          \casesSymbolSymbols
                          \cdotSymbolBinary operators
                          \cdotsSymbolDots
                          \checkSymbolAccents
                          \chiSymbolGreek letters
                          \ChiSymbolGreek letters
                          \circSymbolBinary operators
                          \closeSymbolDelimiters
                          \clubsuitSymbolSymbols
                          \cointSymbolIntegrals
                          \congSymbolRelational operators
                          \coprodSymbolMath operators
                          \cupSymbolBinary operators
                          \daletSymbolHebrew letters
                          \dalethSymbolHebrew letters
                          \dashvSymbolRelational operators
                          \ddSymbolDouble-struck letters
                          \DdSymbolDouble-struck letters
                          \ddddotSymbolAccents
                          \dddotSymbolAccents
                          \ddotSymbolAccents
                          \ddotsSymbolDots
                          \defeqSymbolRelational operators
                          \degcSymbolSymbols
                          \degfSymbolSymbols
                          \degreeSymbolSymbols
                          \deltaSymbolGreek letters
                          \DeltaSymbolGreek letters
                          \DeltaeqSymbolOperators
                          \diamondSymbolBinary operators
                          \diamondsuitSymbolSymbols
                          \divSymbolBinary operators
                          \dotSymbolAccents
                          \doteqSymbolRelational operators
                          \dotsSymbolDots
                          \doubleaSymbolDouble-struck letters
                          \doubleASymbolDouble-struck letters
                          \doublebSymbolDouble-struck letters
                          \doubleBSymbolDouble-struck letters
                          \doublecSymbolDouble-struck letters
                          \doubleCSymbolDouble-struck letters
                          \doubledSymbolDouble-struck letters
                          \doubleDSymbolDouble-struck letters
                          \doubleeSymbolDouble-struck letters
                          \doubleESymbolDouble-struck letters
                          \doublefSymbolDouble-struck letters
                          \doubleFSymbolDouble-struck letters
                          \doublegSymbolDouble-struck letters
                          \doubleGSymbolDouble-struck letters
                          \doublehSymbolDouble-struck letters
                          \doubleHSymbolDouble-struck letters
                          \doubleiSymbolDouble-struck letters
                          \doubleISymbolDouble-struck letters
                          \doublejSymbolDouble-struck letters
                          \doubleJSymbolDouble-struck letters
                          \doublekSymbolDouble-struck letters
                          \doubleKSymbolDouble-struck letters
                          \doublelSymbolDouble-struck letters
                          \doubleLSymbolDouble-struck letters
                          \doublemSymbolDouble-struck letters
                          \doubleMSymbolDouble-struck letters
                          \doublenSymbolDouble-struck letters
                          \doubleNSymbolDouble-struck letters
                          \doubleoSymbolDouble-struck letters
                          \doubleOSymbolDouble-struck letters
                          \doublepSymbolDouble-struck letters
                          \doublePSymbolDouble-struck letters
                          \doubleqSymbolDouble-struck letters
                          \doubleQSymbolDouble-struck letters
                          \doublerSymbolDouble-struck letters
                          \doubleRSymbolDouble-struck letters
                          \doublesSymbolDouble-struck letters
                          \doubleSSymbolDouble-struck letters
                          \doubletSymbolDouble-struck letters
                          \doubleTSymbolDouble-struck letters
                          \doubleuSymbolDouble-struck letters
                          \doubleUSymbolDouble-struck letters
                          \doublevSymbolDouble-struck letters
                          \doubleVSymbolDouble-struck letters
                          \doublewSymbolDouble-struck letters
                          \doubleWSymbolDouble-struck letters
                          \doublexSymbolDouble-struck letters
                          \doubleXSymbolDouble-struck letters
                          \doubleySymbolDouble-struck letters
                          \doubleYSymbolDouble-struck letters
                          \doublezSymbolDouble-struck letters
                          \doubleZSymbolDouble-struck letters
                          \downarrowSymbolArrows
                          \DownarrowSymbolArrows
                          \dsmashSymbolArrows
                          \eeSymbolDouble-struck letters
                          \ellSymbolSymbols
                          \emptysetSymbolSet notations
                          \emspSpace characters
                          \endSymbolDelimiters
                          \enspSpace characters
                          \epsilonSymbolGreek letters
                          \EpsilonSymbolGreek letters
                          \eqarraySymbolSymbols
                          \equivSymbolRelational operators
                          \etaSymbolGreek letters
                          \EtaSymbolGreek letters
                          \existsSymbolLogic notations
                          \forallSymbolLogic notations
                          \frakturaSymbolFraktur letters
                          \frakturASymbolFraktur letters
                          \frakturbSymbolFraktur letters
                          \frakturBSymbolFraktur letters
                          \frakturcSymbolFraktur letters
                          \frakturCSymbolFraktur letters
                          \frakturdSymbolFraktur letters
                          \frakturDSymbolFraktur letters
                          \fraktureSymbolFraktur letters
                          \frakturESymbolFraktur letters
                          \frakturfSymbolFraktur letters
                          \frakturFSymbolFraktur letters
                          \frakturgSymbolFraktur letters
                          \frakturGSymbolFraktur letters
                          \frakturhSymbolFraktur letters
                          \frakturHSymbolFraktur letters
                          \frakturiSymbolFraktur letters
                          \frakturISymbolFraktur letters
                          \frakturkSymbolFraktur letters
                          \frakturKSymbolFraktur letters
                          \frakturlSymbolFraktur letters
                          \frakturLSymbolFraktur letters
                          \frakturmSymbolFraktur letters
                          \frakturMSymbolFraktur letters
                          \frakturnSymbolFraktur letters
                          \frakturNSymbolFraktur letters
                          \frakturoSymbolFraktur letters
                          \frakturOSymbolFraktur letters
                          \frakturpSymbolFraktur letters
                          \frakturPSymbolFraktur letters
                          \frakturqSymbolFraktur letters
                          \frakturQSymbolFraktur letters
                          \frakturrSymbolFraktur letters
                          \frakturRSymbolFraktur letters
                          \fraktursSymbolFraktur letters
                          \frakturSSymbolFraktur letters
                          \frakturtSymbolFraktur letters
                          \frakturTSymbolFraktur letters
                          \frakturuSymbolFraktur letters
                          \frakturUSymbolFraktur letters
                          \frakturvSymbolFraktur letters
                          \frakturVSymbolFraktur letters
                          \frakturwSymbolFraktur letters
                          \frakturWSymbolFraktur letters
                          \frakturxSymbolFraktur letters
                          \frakturXSymbolFraktur letters
                          \frakturySymbolFraktur letters
                          \frakturYSymbolFraktur letters
                          \frakturzSymbolFraktur letters
                          \frakturZSymbolFraktur letters
                          \frownSymbolRelational operators
                          \funcapplyBinary operators
                          \GSymbolGreek letters
                          \gammaSymbolGreek letters
                          \GammaSymbolGreek letters
                          \geSymbolRelational operators
                          \geqSymbolRelational operators
                          \getsSymbolArrows
                          \ggSymbolRelational operators
                          \gimelSymbolHebrew letters
                          \graveSymbolAccents
                          \hairspSpace characters
                          \hatSymbolAccents
                          \hbarSymbolSymbols
                          \heartsuitSymbolSymbols
                          \hookleftarrowSymbolArrows
                          \hookrightarrowSymbolArrows
                          \hphantomSymbolArrows
                          \hsmashSymbolArrows
                          \hvecSymbolAccents
                          \identitymatrixSymbolMatrices
                          \iiSymbolDouble-struck letters
                          \iiintSymbolIntegrals
                          \iintSymbolIntegrals
                          \iiiintSymbolIntegrals
                          \ImSymbolSymbols
                          \imathSymbolSymbols
                          \inSymbolRelational operators
                          \incSymbolSymbols
                          \inftySymbolSymbols
                          \intSymbolIntegrals
                          \integralSymbolIntegrals
                          \iotaSymbolGreek letters
                          \IotaSymbolGreek letters
                          \itimesMath operators
                          \jSymbolSymbols
                          \jjSymbolDouble-struck letters
                          \jmathSymbolSymbols
                          \kappaSymbolGreek letters
                          \KappaSymbolGreek letters
                          \ketSymbolDelimiters
                          \lambdaSymbolGreek letters
                          \LambdaSymbolGreek letters
                          \langleSymbolDelimiters
                          \lbbrackSymbolDelimiters
                          \lbraceSymbolDelimiters
                          \lbrackSymbolDelimiters
                          \lceilSymbolDelimiters
                          \ldivSymbolFraction slashes
                          \ldivideSymbolFraction slashes
                          \ldotsSymbolDots
                          \leSymbolRelational operators
                          \leftSymbolDelimiters
                          \leftarrowSymbolArrows
                          \LeftarrowSymbolArrows
                          \leftharpoondownSymbolArrows
                          \leftharpoonupSymbolArrows
                          \leftrightarrowSymbolArrows
                          \LeftrightarrowSymbolArrows
                          \leqSymbolRelational operators
                          \lfloorSymbolDelimiters
                          \lhvecSymbolAccents
                          \limitSymbolLimits
                          \llSymbolRelational operators
                          \lmoustSymbolDelimiters
                          \LongleftarrowSymbolArrows
                          \LongleftrightarrowSymbolArrows
                          \LongrightarrowSymbolArrows
                          \lrharSymbolArrows
                          \lvecSymbolAccents
                          \mapstoSymbolArrows
                          \matrixSymbolMatrices
                          \medspSpace characters
                          \midSymbolRelational operators
                          \middleSymbolSymbols
                          \modelsSymbolRelational operators
                          \mpSymbolBinary operators
                          \muSymbolGreek letters
                          \MuSymbolGreek letters
                          \nablaSymbolSymbols
                          \naryandSymbolOperators
                          \nbspSpace characters
                          \neSymbolRelational operators
                          \nearrowSymbolArrows
                          \neqSymbolRelational operators
                          \niSymbolRelational operators
                          \normSymbolDelimiters
                          \notcontainSymbolRelational operators
                          \notelementSymbolRelational operators
                          \notinSymbolRelational operators
                          \nuSymbolGreek letters
                          \NuSymbolGreek letters
                          \nwarrowSymbolArrows
                          \oSymbolGreek letters
                          \OSymbolGreek letters
                          \odotSymbolBinary operators
                          \ofSymbolOperators
                          \oiiintSymbolIntegrals
                          \oiintSymbolIntegrals
                          \ointSymbolIntegrals
                          \omegaSymbolGreek letters
                          \OmegaSymbolGreek letters
                          \ominusSymbolBinary operators
                          \openSymbolDelimiters
                          \oplusSymbolBinary operators
                          \otimesSymbolBinary operators
                          \overSymbolDelimiters
                          \overbarSymbolAccents
                          \overbraceSymbolAccents
                          \overbracketSymbolAccents
                          \overlineSymbolAccents
                          \overparenSymbolAccents
                          \overshellSymbolAccents
                          \parallelSymbolGeometry notation
                          \partialSymbolSymbols
                          \pmatrixSymbolMatrices
                          \perpSymbolGeometry notation
                          \phantomSymbolSymbols
                          \phiSymbolGreek letters
                          \PhiSymbolGreek letters
                          \piSymbolGreek letters
                          \PiSymbolGreek letters
                          \pmSymbolBinary operators
                          \pppprimeSymbolPrimes
                          \ppprimeSymbolPrimes
                          \pprimeSymbolPrimes
                          \precSymbolRelational operators
                          \preceqSymbolRelational operators
                          \primeSymbolPrimes
                          \prodSymbolMath operators
                          \proptoSymbolRelational operators
                          \psiSymbolGreek letters
                          \PsiSymbolGreek letters
                          \qdrtSymbolSquare roots and radicals
                          \quadraticSymbolSquare roots and radicals
                          \rangleSymbolDelimiters
                          \RangleSymbolDelimiters
                          \ratioSymbolRelational operators
                          \rbraceSymbolDelimiters
                          \rbrackSymbolDelimiters
                          \RbrackSymbolDelimiters
                          \rceilSymbolDelimiters
                          \rddotsSymbolDots
                          \ReSymbolSymbols
                          \rectSymbolSymbols
                          \rfloorSymbolDelimiters
                          \rhoSymbolGreek letters
                          \RhoSymbolGreek letters
                          \rhvecSymbolAccents
                          \rightSymbolDelimiters
                          \rightarrowSymbolArrows
                          \RightarrowSymbolArrows
                          \rightharpoondownSymbolArrows
                          \rightharpoonupSymbolArrows
                          \rmoustSymbolDelimiters
                          \rootSymbolSymbols
                          \scriptaSymbolScripts
                          \scriptASymbolScripts
                          \scriptbSymbolScripts
                          \scriptBSymbolScripts
                          \scriptcSymbolScripts
                          \scriptCSymbolScripts
                          \scriptdSymbolScripts
                          \scriptDSymbolScripts
                          \scripteSymbolScripts
                          \scriptESymbolScripts
                          \scriptfSymbolScripts
                          \scriptFSymbolScripts
                          \scriptgSymbolScripts
                          \scriptGSymbolScripts
                          \scripthSymbolScripts
                          \scriptHSymbolScripts
                          \scriptiSymbolScripts
                          \scriptISymbolScripts
                          \scriptkSymbolScripts
                          \scriptKSymbolScripts
                          \scriptlSymbolScripts
                          \scriptLSymbolScripts
                          \scriptmSymbolScripts
                          \scriptMSymbolScripts
                          \scriptnSymbolScripts
                          \scriptNSymbolScripts
                          \scriptoSymbolScripts
                          \scriptOSymbolScripts
                          \scriptpSymbolScripts
                          \scriptPSymbolScripts
                          \scriptqSymbolScripts
                          \scriptQSymbolScripts
                          \scriptrSymbolScripts
                          \scriptRSymbolScripts
                          \scriptsSymbolScripts
                          \scriptSSymbolScripts
                          \scripttSymbolScripts
                          \scriptTSymbolScripts
                          \scriptuSymbolScripts
                          \scriptUSymbolScripts
                          \scriptvSymbolScripts
                          \scriptVSymbolScripts
                          \scriptwSymbolScripts
                          \scriptWSymbolScripts
                          \scriptxSymbolScripts
                          \scriptXSymbolScripts
                          \scriptySymbolScripts
                          \scriptYSymbolScripts
                          \scriptzSymbolScripts
                          \scriptZSymbolScripts
                          \sdivSymbolFraction slashes
                          \sdivideSymbolFraction slashes
                          \searrowSymbolArrows
                          \setminusSymbolBinary operators
                          \sigmaSymbolGreek letters
                          \SigmaSymbolGreek letters
                          \simSymbolRelational operators
                          \simeqSymbolRelational operators
                          \smashSymbolArrows
                          \smileSymbolRelational operators
                          \spadesuitSymbolSymbols
                          \sqcapSymbolBinary operators
                          \sqcupSymbolBinary operators
                          \sqrtSymbolSquare roots and radicals
                          \sqsubseteqSymbolSet notation
                          \sqsuperseteqSymbolSet notation
                          \starSymbolBinary operators
                          \subsetSymbolSet notation
                          \subseteqSymbolSet notation
                          \succSymbolRelational operators
                          \succeqSymbolRelational operators
                          \sumSymbolMath operators
                          \supersetSymbolSet notation
                          \superseteqSymbolSet notation
                          \swarrowSymbolArrows
                          \tauSymbolGreek letters
                          \TauSymbolGreek letters
                          \thereforeSymbolRelational operators
                          \thetaSymbolGreek letters
                          \ThetaSymbolGreek letters
                          \thickspSpace characters
                          \thinspSpace characters
                          \tildeSymbolAccents
                          \timesSymbolBinary operators
                          \toSymbolArrows
                          \topSymbolLogic notation
                          \tvecSymbolArrows
                          \ubarSymbolAccents
                          \UbarSymbolAccents
                          \underbarSymbolAccents
                          \underbraceSymbolAccents
                          \underbracketSymbolAccents
                          \underlineSymbolAccents
                          \underparenSymbolAccents
                          \uparrowSymbolArrows
                          \UparrowSymbolArrows
                          \updownarrowSymbolArrows
                          \UpdownarrowSymbolArrows
                          \uplusSymbolBinary operators
                          \upsilonSymbolGreek letters
                          \UpsilonSymbolGreek letters
                          \varepsilonSymbolGreek letters
                          \varphiSymbolGreek letters
                          \varpiSymbolGreek letters
                          \varrhoSymbolGreek letters
                          \varsigmaSymbolGreek letters
                          \varthetaSymbolGreek letters
                          \vbarSymbolDelimiters
                          \vdashSymbolRelational operators
                          \vdotsSymbolDots
                          \vecSymbolAccents
                          \veeSymbolBinary operators
                          \vertSymbolDelimiters
                          \VertSymbolDelimiters
                          \VmatrixSymbolMatrices
                          \vphantomSymbolArrows
                          \vthickspSpace characters
                          \wedgeSymbolBinary operators
                          \wpSymbolSymbols
                          \wrSymbolBinary operators
                          \xiSymbolGreek letters
                          \XiSymbolGreek letters
                          \zetaSymbolGreek letters
                          \ZetaSymbolGreek letters
                          \zwnjSpace characters
                          \zwspSpace characters
                          ~=Is congruent toRelational operators
                          -+Minus or plusBinary operators
                          +-Plus or minusBinary operators
                          <<SymbolRelational operators
                          <=Less than or equal toRelational operators
                          ->SymbolArrows
                          >=Greater than or equal toRelational operators
                          >>SymbolRelational operators
                          +
                          + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/NonprintingCharacters.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/NonprintingCharacters.htm index a57a3793d..4b2bf19e6 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/NonprintingCharacters.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/NonprintingCharacters.htm @@ -14,64 +14,64 @@

                          Show/hide nonprinting characters

                          -

                          Nonprinting characters help you edit a document. They indicate the presence of various types of formatting, but they do not print with the document, even when they are displayed on the screen.

                          -

                          To show or hide nonprinting characters, click the Nonprinting characters Nonprinting characters icon at the Home tab of the top toolbar. Alternatively, you can use the Ctrl+Shift+Num8 key combination.

                          +

                          Nonprinting characters help you edit a document. They indicate the presence of various types of formatting elements, but they cannot be printed with the document even if they are displayed on the screen.

                          +

                          To show or hide nonprinting characters, click the Nonprinting characters Nonprinting characters icon at the Home tab on the top toolbar. Alternatively, you can use the Ctrl+Shift+Num8 key combination.

                          Nonprinting characters include:

                          - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - +
                          Spaces SpaceInserted when you press the Spacebar on the keyboard. It creates a space between characters.Inserted when you press the Spacebar on the keyboard. They create a space between characters.
                          Tabs TabInserted when you press the Tab key. It's used to advance the cursor to the next tab stop.Inserted when you press the Tab key. They are used to advance the cursor to the next tab stop.
                          Paragraph marks (i.e. hard returns) Hard returnInserted when you press the Enter key. It ends a paragraph and adds a bit of space after it. It contains information about the paragraph formatting.Inserted when you press the Enter key. They ends a paragraph and adds a bit of space after it. They also contain information about the paragraph formatting.
                          Line breaks (i.e. soft returns) Soft returnInserted when you use the Shift+Enter key combination. It breaks the current line and puts lines of text close together. Soft return is primarily used in titles and headings.Inserted when you use the Shift+Enter key combination. They break the current line and put the text lines close together. Soft return are primarily used in titles and headings.
                          Nonbreaking spaces Nonbreaking spaceInserted when you use the Ctrl+Shift+Spacebar key combination. It creates a space between characters which can't be used to start a new line.Inserted when you use the Ctrl+Shift+Spacebar key combination. They create a space between characters which can't be used to start a new line.
                          Page breaks Page breakInserted when you use the Breaks icon Breaks icon at the Insert or Layout tab of the top toolbar and then select the Insert Page Break option, or select the Page break before option in the right-click menu or advanced settings window.Inserted when you use the Breaks icon Breaks icon on the Insert or Layout tabs of the top toolbar and then select one of the Insert Page Break submenu options (the section break indicator differs depending on which option is selected: Next Page, Continuous Page, Even Page or Odd Page).
                          Section breaks Section breakInserted when you use the Breaks icon Breaks icon at the Insert or Layout tab of the top toolbar and then select one of the Insert Section Break submenu options (the section break indicator differs depending on which option is selected: Next Page, Continuous Page, Even Page or Odd Page).Inserted when you use the Breaks icon Breaks icon on the Insert or Layout tab of the top toolbar and then select one of the Insert Section Break submenu options (the section break indicator differs depending on which option is selected: Next Page, Continuous Page, Even Page or Odd Page).
                          Column breaks Column breakInserted when you use the Breaks icon Breaks icon at the Insert or Layout tab of the top toolbar and then select the Insert Column Break option.Inserted when you use the Breaks icon Breaks icon on the Insert or Layout tab of the top toolbar and then select the Insert Column Break option.
                          End-of-cell and end-of row markers in tables Markers in tablesThese markers contain formatting codes for the individual cell and row, respectively.Contain formatting codes for an individual cell and a row, respectively.
                          Small black square in the margin to the left of a paragraph Black squareIt indicates that at least one of the paragraph options was applied, e.g. Keep lines together, Page break before.Indicates that at least one of the paragraph options was applied, e.g. Keep lines together, Page break before.
                          Anchor symbols Anchor symbolThey indicate the position of floating objects (those with a wrapping style other than Inline), e.g. images, autoshapes, charts. You should select an object to make its anchor visible.Indicate the position of floating objects (objects whose wrapping style is different from Inline), e.g. images, autoshapes, charts. You should select an object to make its anchor visible.
                          diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/OpenCreateNew.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/OpenCreateNew.htm index 65d48525b..3bfa8549c 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/OpenCreateNew.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/OpenCreateNew.htm @@ -18,16 +18,16 @@

                          In the online editor

                            -
                          1. click the File tab of the top toolbar,
                          2. +
                          3. click the File tab on the top toolbar,
                          4. select the Create New option.

                          In the desktop editor

                            -
                          1. in the main program window, select the Document menu item from the Create new section of the left sidebar - a new file will open in a new tab,
                          2. +
                          3. in the main program window, select the Document menu item from the Create new section on the left sidebar - a new file will open in a new tab,
                          4. when all the necessary changes are made, click the Save Save icon icon in the upper left corner or switch to the File tab and choose the Save as menu item.
                          5. -
                          6. in the file manager window, select the file location, specify its name, choose the format you want to save the document to (DOCX, Document template (DOTX), ODT, OTT, RTF, TXT, PDF or PDFA) and click the Save button.
                          7. +
                          8. in the file manager window, select the file location, specify its name, choose the required format for saving (DOCX, Document template (DOTX), ODT, OTT, RTF, TXT, PDF or PDFA) and click the Save button.
                          @@ -35,18 +35,18 @@

                          To open an existing document

                          In the desktop editor

                            -
                          1. in the main program window, select the Open local file menu item at the left sidebar,
                          2. -
                          3. choose the necessary document from the file manager window and click the Open button.
                          4. +
                          5. in the main program window, select the Open local file menu item on the left sidebar,
                          6. +
                          7. choose the required document from the file manager window and click the Open button.
                          -

                          You can also right-click the necessary document in the file manager window, select the Open with option and choose the necessary application from the menu. If the office documents files are associated with the application, you can also open documents by double-clicking the file name in the file explorer window.

                          -

                          All the directories that you have accessed using the desktop editor will be displayed in the Recent folders list so that you can quickly access them afterwards. Click the necessary folder to select one of the files stored in it.

                          +

                          You can also right-click the required document in the file manager window, select the Open with option and choose the necessary application from the menu. If text documents are associated with the application you need, you can also open them by double-clicking the file name in the file explorer window.

                          +

                          All the directories that you have navigated through using the desktop editor will be displayed in the Recent folders list so that you can quickly access them afterwards. Click the required folder to select one of the files stored there.

                          To open a recently edited document

                          In the online editor

                            -
                          1. click the File tab of the top toolbar,
                          2. +
                          3. click the File tab on the top toolbar,
                          4. select the Open Recent... option,
                          5. choose the document you need from the list of recently edited documents.
                          @@ -54,12 +54,12 @@

                          In the desktop editor

                            -
                          1. in the main program window, select the Recent files menu item at the left sidebar,
                          2. +
                          3. in the main program window, select the Recent files menu item on the left sidebar,
                          4. choose the document you need from the list of recently edited documents.
                          -

                          To open the folder where the file is stored in a new browser tab in the online version, in the file explorer window in the desktop version, click the Open file location Open file location icon on the right side of the editor header. Alternatively, you can switch to the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Open file location option.

                          +

                          To open the folder, where the file is stored, in a new browser tab in the online editor in the file explorer window in the desktop editor, click the Open file location Open file location icon on the right side of the editor header. Alternatively, you can switch to the File tab on the top toolbar and select the Open file location option.

                          \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/PageBreaks.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/PageBreaks.htm index 763754cf5..1ca243696 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/PageBreaks.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/PageBreaks.htm @@ -14,19 +14,19 @@

                          Insert page breaks

                          -

                          In Document Editor, you can add a page break to start a new page, insert a blank page and adjust pagination options.

                          -

                          To insert a page break at the current cursor position click the Breaks icon Breaks icon at the Insert or Layout tab of the top toolbar or click the arrow next to this icon and select the Insert Page Break option from the menu. You can also use the Ctrl+Enter key combination.

                          -

                          To insert a blank page at the current cursor position click the Blank page icon Blank Page icon at the Insert tab of the top toolbar. This inserts two page breaks that creates a blank page.

                          +

                          In the Document Editor, you can add a page break to start a new page, insert a blank page and adjust pagination options.

                          +

                          To insert a page break at the current cursor position click the Breaks icon Breaks icon on the Insert or Layout tab of the top toolbar or click the arrow next to this icon and select the Insert Page Break option from the menu. You can also use the Ctrl+Enter key combination.

                          +

                          To insert a blank page at the current cursor position click the Blank page icon Blank Page icon on the Insert tab of the top toolbar. This action inserts two page breaks that create a blank page.

                          To insert a page break before the selected paragraph i.e. to start this paragraph at the top of a new page:

                          • click the right mouse button and select the Page break before option in the menu, or
                          • -
                          • click the right mouse button, select the Paragraph Advanced Settings option in the menu or use the Show advanced settings link at the right sidebar, and check the Page break before box at the Line & Page Breaks tab of the opened Paragraph - Advanced Settings window. +
                          • click the right mouse button, select the Paragraph Advanced Settings option in the menu or use the Show advanced settings link on the right sidebar, and check the Page break before box at the Line & Page Breaks tab of the opened Paragraph - Advanced Settings window.

                          To keep lines together so that only whole paragraphs will be moved to the new page (i.e. there will be no page break between the lines within a single paragraph),

                          • click the right mouse button and select the Keep lines together option in the menu, or
                          • -
                          • click the right mouse button, select the Paragraph Advanced Settings option in the menu or use the Show advanced settings link at the right sidebar, and check the Keep lines together box at the Line & Page Breaks in the opened Paragraph - Advanced Settings window.
                          • +
                          • click the right mouse button, select the Paragraph Advanced Settings option on the menu or use the Show advanced settings link at the right sidebar, and check the Keep lines together box at the Line & Page Breaks in the opened Paragraph - Advanced Settings window.

                          The Line & Page Breaks tab of the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window allows you to set two more pagination options:

                            diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ParagraphIndents.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ParagraphIndents.htm index 504e84d0d..13bfd9fd2 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ParagraphIndents.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ParagraphIndents.htm @@ -14,11 +14,11 @@

                            Change paragraph indents

                            -

                            In Document Editor, you can change the first line offset from the left part of the page as well as the paragraph offset from the left and right sides of the page.

                            +

                            the Document Editor, you can change the first line offset from the left side of the page as well as the paragraph offset from the left and right sides of the page.

                            To do that,

                              -
                            1. put the cursor within the paragraph you need, or select several paragraphs with the mouse or all the text in the document by pressing the Ctrl+A key combination,
                            2. -
                            3. click the right mouse button and select the Paragraph Advanced Settings option from the menu or use the Show advanced settings link at the right sidebar,
                            4. +
                            5. place the cursor within the required paragraph, or select several paragraphs with the mouse or the whole text by pressing the Ctrl+A key combination,
                            6. +
                            7. click the right mouse button and select the Paragraph Advanced Settings option from the menu or use the Show advanced settings link on the right sidebar,
                            8. in the opened Paragraph - Advanced Settings window, switch to the Indents & Spacing tab and set the necessary parameters in the Indents section:
                              • Left - set the paragraph offset from the left side of the page specifying the necessary numeric value,
                              • @@ -30,15 +30,15 @@

                                Paragraph Advanced Settings - Indents & Spacing

                            -

                            To quickly change the paragraph offset from the left side of the page, you can also use the respective icons at the Home tab of the top toolbar: Decrease indent Decrease indent and Increase indent Increase indent.

                            +

                            To quickly change the paragraph offset from the left side of the page, you can also use the corresponding icons on the Home tab of the top toolbar: Decrease indent Decrease indent and Increase indent Increase indent.

                            You can also use the horizontal ruler to set indents.

                            Ruler - Indent markers

                            Select the necessary paragraph(s) and drag the indent markers along the ruler.

                              -
                            • First Line Indent marker First Line Indent marker is used to set the offset from the left side of the page for the first line of the paragraph.
                            • -
                            • Hanging Indent marker Hanging Indent marker is used to set the offset from the left side of the page for the second line and all the subsequent lines of the paragraph.
                            • -
                            • Left Indent marker Left Indent marker is used to set the entire paragraph offset from the left side of the page.
                            • -
                            • Right Indent marker Right Indent marker is used to set the paragraph offset from the right side of the page.
                            • +
                            • The First Line Indent marker First Line Indent marker is used to set an offset from the left side of the page for the first line of the paragraph.
                            • +
                            • The Hanging Indent marker Hanging Indent marker is used to set an offset from the left side of the page for the second line and all the subsequent lines of the paragraph.
                            • +
                            • The Left Indent marker Left Indent marker is used to set an offset for the entire paragraph from the left side of the page.
                            • +
                            • The Right Indent marker Right Indent marker is used to set a paragraph offset from the right side of the page.
                            diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm index 07332ba92..c5dc53d6f 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm @@ -15,14 +15,14 @@

                            Save/download/print your document

                            Saving

                            -

                            By default, online Document Editor automatically saves your file each 2 seconds when you work on it preventing your data loss in case of the unexpected program closing. If you co-edit the file in the Fast mode, the timer requests for updates 25 times a second and saves the changes if they have been made. When the file is being co-edited in the Strict mode, changes are automatically saved at 10-minute intervals. If you need, you can easily select the preferred co-editing mode or disable the Autosave feature on the Advanced Settings page.

                            +

                            By default, online Document Editor automatically saves your file each 2 seconds when you work on it to prevent your data loss in case the program closes unexpectedly. If you co-edit the file in the Fast mode, the timer requests for updates 25 times a second and saves the changes if they have been made. When the file is being co-edited in the Strict mode, changes are automatically saved at 10-minute intervals. If necessary, you can easily select the preferred co-editing mode or disable the Autosave feature on the Advanced Settings page.

                            To save your current document manually in the current format and location,

                            • press the Save Save icon icon in the left part of the editor header, or
                            • use the Ctrl+S key combination, or
                            • click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Save option.
                            -

                            Note: in the desktop version, to prevent data loss in case of the unexpected program closing you can turn on the Autorecover option at the Advanced Settings page.

                            +

                            Note: in the desktop version, to prevent data from loss in case program closes unexpectedly, you can turn on the Autorecover option on the Advanced Settings page.

                            In the desktop version, you can save the document with another name, in a new location or format,

                              @@ -55,8 +55,8 @@
                            1. use the Ctrl+P key combination, or
                            2. click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Print option.
                          -

                          It's also possible to print a selected text passage using the Print Selection option from the contextual menu.

                          -

                          In the desktop version, the file will be printed directly.In the online version, a PDF file will be generated on the basis of the document. You can open and print it out, or save onto your computer hard disk drive or removable medium to print it out later. Some browsers (e.g. Chrome and Opera) support direct printing.

                          +

                          It's also possible to print a selected text passage using the Print Selection option from the contextual menu both in the Edit and View modes (Right Mouse Button Click and choose option Print selection).

                          +

                          In the desktop version, the file will be printed directly. In the online version, a PDF file will be generated on the basis of the document. You can open and print it out, or save onto your computer hard disk drive or removable medium to print it out later. Some browsers (e.g. Chrome and Opera) support direct printing.

                          \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/SectionBreaks.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/SectionBreaks.htm index 385e9642e..f1c10a906 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/SectionBreaks.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/SectionBreaks.htm @@ -14,24 +14,24 @@

                          Insert section breaks

                          -

                          Section breaks allow you to apply a different layout or formatting for the certain parts of your document. For example, you can use individual headers and footers, page numbering, footnotes format, margins, size, orientation, or column number for each separate section.

                          +

                          Section breaks allow you to apply different layouts or formatting styles to a certain part of your document. For example, you can use individual headers and footers, page numbering, footnotes format, margins, size, orientation, or column number for each separate section.

                          Note: an inserted section break defines formatting of the preceding part of the document.

                          To insert a section break at the current cursor position:

                            -
                          1. click the Breaks icon Breaks icon at the Insert or Layout tab of the top toolbar,
                          2. +
                          3. click the Breaks icon Breaks icon on the Insert or Layout tab of the top toolbar,
                          4. select the Insert Section Break submenu
                          5. select the necessary section break type:
                            • Next Page - to start a new section from the next page
                            • -
                            • Continuous Page - to start a new section at the current page
                            • +
                            • Continuous Page - to start a new section on the current page
                            • Even Page - to start a new section from the next even page
                            • Odd Page - to start a new section from the next odd page
                          -

                          Added section breaks are indicated in your document by a double dotted line: Section break

                          -

                          If you do not see the inserted section breaks, click the Nonprinting Characters icon icon at the Home tab of the top toolbar to display them.

                          -

                          To remove a section break select it with the mouse and press the Delete key. Since a section break defines formatting of the preceding section, when you remove a section break, this section formatting will also be deleted. The document part that preceded the removed section break acquires the formatting of the part that followed it.

                          +

                          The added section breaks are indicated in your document with a double dotted line: Section break

                          +

                          If you do not see the inserted section breaks, click the Nonprinting Characters icon icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar to display them.

                          +

                          To remove a section break, select it with the mouse and press the Delete key. Since a section break defines formatting of the previous section, when you remove a section break, this section formatting will also be deleted. When you delete a section break, the text before and after the break is combined into one section. The new combined section will use the formatting from the section that followed the section break.

                          \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/SetOutlineLevel.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/SetOutlineLevel.htm index f1b4fe5e4..59c78c896 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/SetOutlineLevel.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/SetOutlineLevel.htm @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@  - Set up paragraph outline level + Set up a paragraph outline level @@ -15,10 +15,10 @@

                          Set up paragraph outline level

                          -

                          Outline level means the paragraph level in the document structure. The following levels are available: Basic Text, Level 1 - Level 9. Outline level can be specified in different ways, for example, by using heading styles: once you assign a heading style (Heading 1 - Heading 9) to a paragraph, it acquires a corresponding outline level. If you assign a level to a paragraph using the paragraph advanced settings, the paragraph acquires the structure level only while its style remains unchanged. The outline level can also be changed at the Navigation panel on the left using the contextual menu options.

                          +

                          An outline level is the paragraph level in the document structure. The following levels are available: Basic Text, Level 1 - Level 9. The outline level can be specified in different ways, for example, by using heading styles: once you assign a heading style (Heading 1 - Heading 9) to a paragraph, it acquires yje corresponding outline level. If you assign a level to a paragraph using the paragraph advanced settings, the paragraph acquires the structure level only while its style remains unchanged. The outline level can be also changed in the Navigation panel on the left using the contextual menu options.

                          To change a paragraph outline level using the paragraph advanced settings,

                            -
                          1. right-click the text and choose the Paragraph Advanced Settings option from the contextual menu or use the Show advanced settings option at the right sidebar,
                          2. +
                          3. right-click the text and choose the Paragraph Advanced Settings option from the contextual menu or use the Show advanced settings option on the right sidebar,
                          4. open the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window, switch to the Indents & Spacing tab,
                          5. select the necessary outline level from the Outline level list.
                          6. click the OK button to apply the changes.
                          7. diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/SetPageParameters.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/SetPageParameters.htm index aca632087..21d661a44 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/SetPageParameters.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/SetPageParameters.htm @@ -14,12 +14,12 @@

                            Set page parameters

                            -

                            To change page layout, i.e. set page orientation and size, adjust margins and insert columns, use the corresponding icons at the Layout tab of the top toolbar.

                            +

                            To change page layout, i.e. set page orientation and size, adjust margins and insert columns, use the corresponding icons on the Layout tab of the top toolbar.

                            Note: all these parameters are applied to the entire document. If you need to set different page margins, orientation, size, or column number for the separate parts of your document, please refer to this page.

                            Page Orientation

                            -

                            Change the current orientation type clicking the Orientation icon Orientation icon. The default orientation type is Portrait that can be switched to Album.

                            +

                            Change the current orientation by type clicking the Orientation icon Orientation icon. The default orientation type is Portrait that can be switched to Album.

                            Page Size

                            -

                            Change the default A4 format clicking the Size icon Size icon and selecting the needed one from the list. The available preset sizes are:

                            +

                            Change the default A4 format by clicking the Size icon Size icon and selecting the required format from the list. The following preset sizes are available:

                            • US Letter (21,59cm x 27,94cm)
                            • US Legal (21,59cm x 35,56cm)
                            • @@ -35,34 +35,34 @@
                            • Envelope Choukei 3 (11,99cm x 23,49cm)
                            • Super B/A3 (33,02cm x 48,25cm)
                            -

                            You can also set a special page size by selecting the Custom Page Size option from the list. The Page Size window will open where you'll be able to select the necessary Preset (US Letter, US Legal, A4, A5, B5, Envelope #10, Envelope DL, Tabloid, AЗ, Tabloid Oversize, ROC 16K, Envelope Choukei 3, Super B/A3, A0, A1, A2, A6) or set custom Width and Height values. Enter your new values into the entry fields or adjust the existing values using arrow buttons. When ready, click OK to apply the changes.

                            +

                            You can also set a special page size by selecting the Custom Page Size option from the list. The Page Size window will open where you'll be able to select the required Preset (US Letter, US Legal, A4, A5, B5, Envelope #10, Envelope DL, Tabloid, AЗ, Tabloid Oversize, ROC 16K, Envelope Choukei 3, Super B/A3, A0, A1, A2, A6) or set custom Width and Height values. Enter new values into the entry fields or adjust the existing values using the arrow buttons. When you finish, click OK to apply the changes.

                            Custom Page Size

                            Page Margins

                            -

                            Change default margins, i.e. the blank space between the left, right, top and bottom page edges and the paragraph text, clicking the Margins icon Margins icon and selecting one of the available presets: Normal, US Normal, Narrow, Moderate, Wide. You can also use the Custom Margins option to set your own values in the Margins window that opens. Enter the necessary Top, Bottom, Left and Right page margin values into the entry fields or adjust the existing values using arrow buttons.

                            +

                            Change the default margins, i.e. the blank space between the left, right, top and bottom page edges and the paragraph text, by clicking the Margins icon Margins icon and selecting one of the available presets: Normal, US Normal, Narrow, Moderate, Wide. You can also use the Custom Margins option to set your own values in the Margins window. Enter the required Top, Bottom, Left and Right page margin values into the entry fields or adjust the existing values using arrow buttons.

                            Custom Margins

                            -

                            Gutter position is used to set up additional space on the left or top of the document. Gutter option might come in handy to make sure bookbinding does not cover text. In Margins window enter the necessary gutter position into the entry fields and choose where it should be placed in.

                            -

                            Note: Gutter position function cannot be used when Mirror margins option is checked.

                            -

                            In Multiple pages drop-down menu choose Mirror margins option to to set up facing pages for double-sided documents. With this option checked, Left and Right margins turn into Inside and Outside margins respectively.

                            +

                            Gutter position is used to set up additional space on the left side of the document or at its top. The Gutter option is helpful to make sure that bookbinding does not cover the text. In the Margins enter the required gutter position into the entry fields and choose where it should be placed in.

                            +

                            Note: the Gutter position cannot be used when the Mirror margins option is checked.

                            +

                            In the Multiple pages drop-down menu, choose the Mirror margins option to set up facing pages for double-sided documents. With this option checked, Left and Right margins turn into Inside and Outside margins respectively.

                            In Orientation drop-down menu choose from Portrait and Landscape options.

                            All applied changes to the document will be displayed in the Preview window.

                            -

                            When ready, click OK. The custom margins will be applied to the current document and the Last Custom option with the specified parameters will appear in the Margins icon Margins list so that you can apply them to some other documents.

                            +

                            When you finish, click OK. The custom margins will be applied to the current document and the Last Custom option with the specified parameters will appear in the Margins icon Margins list so that you will be able to apply them to other documents.

                            You can also change the margins manually by dragging the border between the grey and white areas on the rulers (the grey areas of the rulers indicate page margins):

                            Margins Adjustment

                            Columns

                            -

                            Apply a multi-column layout clicking the Columns icon Columns icon and selecting the necessary column type from the drop-down list. The following options are available:

                            +

                            Apply a multi-column layout by clicking the Columns icon Columns icon and selecting the necessary column type from the drop-down list. The following options are available:

                            • Two Two columns icon - to add two columns of the same width,
                            • Three Three columns icon - to add three columns of the same width,
                            • Left Left column icon - to add two columns: a narrow column on the left and a wide column on the right,
                            • Right Right column icon - to add two columns: a narrow column on the right and a wide column on the left.
                            -

                            If you want to adjust column settings, select the Custom Columns option from the list. The Columns window will open where you'll be able to set necessary Number of columns (it's possible to add up to 12 columns) and Spacing between columns. Enter your new values into the entry fields or adjust the existing values using arrow buttons. Check the Column divider box to add a vertical line between the columns. When ready, click OK to apply the changes.

                            +

                            If you want to adjust column settings, select the Custom Columns option from the list. The Columns window will appear, and you'll be able to set the required Number of columns (you can add up to 12 columns) and Spacing between columns. Enter your new values into the entry fields or adjust the existing values using arrow buttons. Check the Column divider box to add a vertical line between the columns. When you finish, click OK to apply the changes.

                            Custom Columns

                            -

                            To exactly specify where a new column should start, place the cursor before the text that you want to move into the new column, click the Breaks icon Breaks icon at the top toolbar and then select the Insert Column Break option. The text will be moved to the next column.

                            -

                            Added column breaks are indicated in your document by a dotted line: Column break. If you do not see the inserted column breaks, click the Nonprinting Characters icon icon at the Home tab of the top toolbar to display them. To remove a column break select it with the mouse and press the Delete key.

                            +

                            To exactly specify where a new column should start, place the cursor before the text that you want to move to the new column, click the Breaks icon Breaks icon on the top toolbar and then select the Insert Column Break option. The text will be moved to the next column.

                            +

                            The inserted column breaks are indicated in your document with a dotted line: Column break. If you do not see the inserted column breaks, click the Nonprinting Characters icon icon at the Home tab on the top toolbar to make them visible. To remove a column break select it with the mouse and press the Delete key.

                            To manually change the column width and spacing, you can use the horizontal ruler.

                            Column spacing

                            -

                            To cancel columns and return to a regular single-column layout, click the Columns icon Columns icon at the top toolbar and select the One One column icon option from the list.

                            +

                            To cancel columns and return to a regular single-column layout, click the Columns icon Columns icon on the top toolbar and select the One One column icon option from the list.

                            \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/SetTabStops.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/SetTabStops.htm index eef56e15f..fe607a099 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/SetTabStops.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/SetTabStops.htm @@ -14,14 +14,14 @@

                            Set tab stops

                            -

                            In Document Editor, you can change tab stops i.e. the position the cursor advances to when you press the Tab key on the keyboard.

                            +

                            In the Document Editor, you can change tab stops. A tab stop is a term used to describe the location where the cursor stops after the Tab key is pressed.

                            To set tab stops you can use the horizontal ruler:

                              -
                            1. Select the necessary tab stop type clicking the Left Tab Stop button button in the upper left corner of the working area. The following three tab types are available: +
                            2. Select the necessary tab stop type by clicking the Left Tab Stop button button in the upper left corner of the working area. The following three tab types are available:
                                -
                              • Left Left Tab Stop button - lines up your text by the left side at the tab stop position; the text moves to the right from the tab stop as you type. Such a tab stop will be indicated on the horizontal ruler by the Left Tab Stop marker marker.
                              • -
                              • Center Center Tab Stop button - centers the text at the tab stop position. Such a tab stop will be indicated on the horizontal ruler by the Center Tab Stop marker marker.
                              • -
                              • Right Right Tab Stop button - lines up your text by the right side at the tab stop position; the text moves to the left from the tab stop as you type. Such a tab stop will be indicated on the horizontal ruler by the Right Tab Stop marker marker.
                              • +
                              • Left Tab Stop Left Tab Stop button lines up the text to the left side at the tab stop position; the text moves to the right from the tab stop while you type. Such a tab stop will be indicated on the horizontal ruler with the Left Tab Stop marker Left Tab Stop marker.
                              • +
                              • Center Tab Stop Center Tab Stop button centers the text at the tab stop position. Such a tab stop will be indicated on the horizontal ruler with the Center Tab Stop marker Center Tab Stop marker.
                              • +
                              • Right Tab Stop Right Tab Stop button lines up the text to the right side at the tab stop position; the text moves to the left from the tab stop while you type. Such a tab stop will be indicated on the horizontal ruler with the Right Tab Stop marker Right Tab Stop marker.
                            3. Click on the bottom edge of the ruler where you want to place the tab stop. Drag it along the ruler to change its position. To remove the added tab stop drag it out of the ruler. @@ -29,16 +29,17 @@

                            -

                            You can also use the paragraph properties window to adjust tab stops. Click the right mouse button, select the Paragraph Advanced Settings option in the menu or use the Show advanced settings link at the right sidebar, and switch to the Tabs tab in the opened Paragraph - Advanced Settings window.

                            +

                            You can also use the paragraph properties window to adjust tab stops. Click the right mouse button, select the Paragraph Advanced Settings option in the menu or use the Show advanced settings link on the right sidebar, and switch to the Tabs tab in the opened Paragraph - Advanced Settings window.

                            Paragraph Properties - Tabs tab

                            You can set the following parameters:

                              -
                            • Default Tab is set at 1.25 cm. You can decrease or increase this value using the arrow buttons or enter the necessary one in the box.
                            • -
                            • Tab Position - is used to set custom tab stops. Enter the necessary value in this box, adjust it more precisely using the arrow buttons and press the Specify button. Your custom tab position will be added to the list in the field below. If you've previously added some tab stops using the ruler, all these tab positions will also be displayed in the list.
                            • +
                            • Default Tab is set at 1.25 cm. You can decrease or increase this value by using the arrow buttons or entering the required value in the box.
                            • +
                            • Tab Position is used to set custom tab stops. Enter the required value in this box, adjust it more precisely by using the arrow buttons and press the Specify button. Your custom tab position will be added to the list in the field below. If you've previously added some tab stops using the ruler, all these tab positions will also be displayed in the list.
                            • Alignment - is used to set the necessary alignment type for each of the tab positions in the list above. Select the necessary tab position in the list, choose the Left, Center or Right option from the drop-down list and press the Specify button.
                            • -
                            • Leader - allows to choose a character used to create a leader for each of the tab positions. A leader is a line of characters (dots or hyphens) that fills the space between tabs. Select the necessary tab position in the list, choose the leader type from the drop-down list and press the Specify button. -

                              To delete tab stops from the list select a tab stop and press the Remove or Remove All button.

                              -
                            • +
                            • + Leader - allows choosing a character to create a leader for each tab positions. A leader is a line of characters (dots or hyphens) that fills the space between tabs. Select the necessary tab position in the list, choose the leader type from the drop-down list and press the Specify button. +

                              To delete tab stops from the list, select a tab stop and press the Remove or Remove All button.

                              +
                            diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/UseMailMerge.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/UseMailMerge.htm index 7583e0ffe..5dd183795 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/UseMailMerge.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/UseMailMerge.htm @@ -23,8 +23,8 @@
                          8. A data source used for the mail merge must be an .xlsx spreadsheet stored on your portal. Open an existing spreadsheet or create a new one and make sure that it meets the following requirements.

                            The spreadsheet should have a header row with the column titles, as values in the first cell of each column will designate merge fields (i.e. variables that you can insert into the text). Each column should contain a set of actual values for a variable. Each row in the spreadsheet should correspond to a separate record (i.e. a set of values that belongs to a certain recipient). During the merge process, a copy of the main document will be created for each record and each merge field inserted into the main text will be replaced with an actual value from the corresponding column. If you are goung to send results by email, the spreadsheet must also include a column with the recipients' email addresses.

                          9. -
                          10. Open an existing text document or create a new one. It must contain the main text which will be the same for each version of the merged document. Click the Mail Merge Mail Merge icon icon at the Home tab of the top toolbar.
                          11. -
                          12. The Select Data Source window will open. It displays the list of all your .xlsx spreadsheets stored in the My Documents section. To navigate between other Documents module sections use the menu in the left part of the window. Select the file you need and click OK.
                          13. +
                          14. Open an existing text document or create a new one. It must contain the main text which will be the same for each version of the merged document. Click the Mail Merge Mail Merge icon icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar.
                          15. +
                          16. The Select Data Source window will open. It displays the list of all your .xlsx spreadsheets stored in the My Documents section. To navigate between other Documents module sections, use the menu on the left part of the window. Select the required file and click OK.

                          Once the data source is loaded, the Mail Merge setting tab will be available on the right sidebar.

                          Mail Merge setting tab

                          @@ -34,79 +34,84 @@
                        • Click the Edit recipients list button on the top of the right sidebar to open the Mail Merge Recipients window, where the content of the selected data source is displayed.

                          Mail Merge Recipients window

                        • -
                        • Here you can add new information, edit or delete the existing data, if necessary. To simplify working with data, you can use the icons on the top of the window: -
                            -
                          • Copy and Paste - to copy and paste the copied data
                          • -
                          • Undo and Redo - to undo and redo undone actions
                          • -
                          • Sort Lowest to Highest icon and Sort Highest to Lowest icon - to sort your data within a selected range of cells in ascending or descending order
                          • -
                          • Filter icon - to enable the filter for the previously selected range of cells or to remove the applied filter
                          • -
                          • Clear Filter icon - to clear all the applied filter parameters -

                            Note: to learn more on how to use the filter you can refer to the Sort and filter data section of the Spreadsheet Editor help.

                            -
                          • -
                          • Search icon - to search for a certain value and replace it with another one, if necessary -

                            Note: to learn more on how to use the Find and Replace tool you can refer to the Search and Replace Functions section of the Spreadsheet Editor help.

                            -
                          • -
                          +
                        • + In the opened window, you can add new information, edit or delete the existing data if necessary. To simplify working with data, you can use the icons at the top of the window: +
                            +
                          • Copy and Paste - to copy and paste the copied data
                          • +
                          • Undo and Redo - to undo and redo undone actions
                          • +
                          • Sort Lowest to Highest icon and Sort Highest to Lowest icon - to sort your data within a selected range of cells in ascending or descending order
                          • +
                          • Filter icon - to enable the filter for the previously selected range of cells or to remove the applied filter
                          • +
                          • + Clear Filter icon - to clear all the applied filter parameters +

                            Note: to learn more on how to use the filter, please refer to the Sort and filter data section of the Spreadsheet Editor help.

                            +
                          • +
                          • + Search icon - to search for a certain value and replace it with another one, if necessary +

                            Note: to learn more on how to use the Find and Replace tool, please refer to the Search and Replace Functions section of the Spreadsheet Editor help.

                            +
                          • +
                        • After all the necessary changes are made, click the Save & Exit button. To discard the changes, click the Close button.
                    • Insert merge fields and check the results
                        -
                      1. Place the mouse cursor in the text of the main document where you want a merge field to be inserted, click the Insert Merge Field button at the right sidebar and select the necessary field from the list. The available fields correspond to the data in the first cell of each column of the selected data source. Add all the fields you need anywhere in the document. -

                        Merge Fields section

                        +
                      2. Place the mouse cursor where the merge field should be inserted, click the Insert Merge Field button on the right sidebar and select the necessary field from the list. The available fields correspond to the data in the first cell of each column of the selected data source. All the required fields can be added anywhere. +

                        Merge Fields section

                      3. -
                      4. Turn on the Highlight merge fields switcher at the right sidebar to make the inserted fields more noticeable in the document text. -

                        Main document with inserted fields

                        +
                      5. Turn on the Highlight merge fields switcher on the right sidebar to make the inserted fields more noticeable in the text. +

                        Main document with inserted fields

                      6. -
                      7. Turn on the Preview results switcher at the right sidebar to view the document text with the merge fields replaced with actual values from the data source. Use the arrow buttons to preview versions of the merged document for each record. -

                        Preview results

                        +
                      8. Turn on the Preview results switcher on the right sidebar to view the text with the merge fields replaced with actual values from the data source. Use the arrow buttons to preview the versions of the merged document for each record. +

                        Preview results

                      • To delete an inserted field, disable the Preview results mode, select the field with the mouse and press the Delete key on the keyboard.
                      • -
                      • To replace an inserted field, disable the Preview results mode, select the field with the mouse, click the Insert Merge Field button at the right sidebar and choose a new field from the list.
                      • +
                      • To replace an inserted field, disable the Preview results mode, select the field with the mouse, click the Insert Merge Field button on the right sidebar and choose a new field from the list.
                    • Specify the merge parameters
                        -
                      1. Select the merge type. You can start mass mailing or save the result as a file in the PDF or Docx format to be able to print or edit it later. Select the necessary option from the Merge to list: -

                        Merge type selection

                        -
                          -
                        • PDF - to create a single document in the PDF format that includes all the merged copies so that you can print them later
                        • -
                        • Docx - to create a single document in the Docx format that includes all the merged copies so that you can edit individual copies later
                        • -
                        • Email - to send the results to recipients by email -

                          Note: the recipients' email addresses must be specified in the loaded data source and you need to have at least one email account connected in the Mail module on your portal.

                          -
                        • -
                        +
                      2. Select the merge type. You can start mass mailing or save the result as a PDF or Docx file to print or edit it later. Select the necessary option from the Merge to list: +

                        Merge type selection

                        +
                          +
                        • PDF - to create a single PDF document that includes all the merged copies that can be printed later
                        • +
                        • Docx - to create a single Docx document that includes all the merged copies that can be edited individually later
                        • +
                        • + Email - to send the results to recipients by email +

                          Note: the recipients' email addresses must be specified in the loaded data source and you need to have at least one email account connected in the Mail module on your portal.

                          +
                        • +
                      3. -
                      4. Choose the records you want to apply the merge to: -
                          -
                        • All records (this option is selected by default) - to create merged documents for all records from the loaded data source
                        • -
                        • Current record - to create a merged document for the record that is currently displayed
                        • -
                        • From ... To - to create merged documents for a range of records (in this case you need to specify two values: the number of the first record and the last record in the desired range) -

                          Note: the maximum allowed quantity of recipients is 100. If you have more than 100 recipients in your data source, please, perform the mail merge by stages: specify the values from 1 to 100, wait until the mail merge process is over, then repeat the operation specifying the values from 101 to N etc.

                          -
                        • -
                        +
                      5. Choose all the required records to be applied: +
                          +
                        • All records (this option is selected by default) - to create merged documents for all records from the loaded data source
                        • +
                        • Current record - to create a merged document for the record that is currently displayed
                        • +
                        • + From ... To - to create merged documents for a range of records (in this case you need to specify two values: the number of the first record and the last record in the desired range) +

                          Note: the maximum allowed quantity of recipients is 100. If you have more than 100 recipients in your data source, please, perform the mail merge by stages: specify the values from 1 to 100, wait until the mail merge process is over, then repeat the operation specifying the values from 101 to N etc.

                          +
                        • +
                      6. Complete the merge
                        • If you've decided to save the merge results as a file,
                            -
                          • click the Download button to store the file anywhere on your PC. You'll find the downloaded file in your default Downloads folder.
                          • -
                          • click the Save button to save the file on your portal. In the Folder for save window that opens, you can change the file name and specify the folder where you want to save the file. You can also check the Open merged document in new tab box to check the result once the merge process is finished. Finally, click Save in the Folder for save window.
                          • +
                          • click the Download button to save the file on your PC. You'll find the downloaded file in your default Downloads folder.
                          • +
                          • click the Save button to save the file on your portal. In the opened Folder for save window, you can change the file name and specify the folder where you want to save the file. You can also check the Open merged document in new tab box to check the result when the merge process is finished. Finally, click Save in the Folder for save window.
                        • If you've selected the Email option, the Merge button will be available on the right sidebar. After you click it, the Send to Email window will open:

                          Send to Email window

                            -
                          • In the From list, select the mail account you want to use for sending mail, if you have several accounts connected in the Mail module.
                          • -
                          • In the To list, select the merge field corresponding to email addresses of the recipients, if it was not selected automatically.
                          • +
                          • In the From list, select the required mail account if you have several accounts connected to the Mail module.
                          • +
                          • In the To list, select the merge field corresponding to the email addresses of the recipients if this option was not selected automatically.
                          • Enter your message subject in the Subject Line field.
                          • Select the mail format from the list: HTML, Attach as DOCX or Attach as PDF. When one of the two latter options is selected, you also need to specify the File name for attachments and enter the Message (the text of your letter that will be sent to recipients).
                          • Click the Send button.
                          -

                          Once the mailing is over you'll receive a notification to your email specified in the From field.

                          +

                          Once the mailing is over, you'll receive a notification to your email specified in the From field.

                      7. diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ViewDocInfo.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ViewDocInfo.htm index d6c8f9108..3e2d78503 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ViewDocInfo.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ViewDocInfo.htm @@ -18,30 +18,30 @@

                        General Information

                        The document information includes a number of the file properties which describe the document. Some of these properties are updated automatically, and some of them can be edited.

                          -
                        • Location - the folder in the Documents module where the file is stored. Owner - the name of the user who have created the file. Uploaded - the date and time when the file has been created. These properties are available in the online version only.
                        • +
                        • Location - the folder in the Documents module where the file is stored. Owner - the name of the user who has created the file. Uploaded - the date and time when the file has been created. These properties are available in the online version only.
                        • Statistics - the number of pages, paragraphs, words, symbols, symbols with spaces.
                        • -
                        • Title, Subject, Comment - these properties allow to simplify your documents classification. You can specify the necessary text in the properties fields.
                        • +
                        • Title, Subject, Comment - these properties allow yoy to simplify your documents classification. You can specify the necessary text in the properties fields.
                        • Last Modified - the date and time when the file was last modified.
                        • -
                        • Last Modified By - the name of the user who have made the latest change in the document if a document has been shared and it can be edited by several users.
                        • -
                        • Application - the application the document was created with.
                        • -
                        • Author - the person who have created the file. You can enter the necessary name in this field. Press Enter to add a new field that allows to specify one more author.
                        • +
                        • Last Modified By - the name of the user who has made the latest change to the document. This option is available if the document has been shared and can be edited by several users.
                        • +
                        • Application - the application the document has been created with.
                        • +
                        • Author - the person who has created the file. You can enter the necessary name in this field. Press Enter to add a new field that allows you to specify one more author.

                        If you changed the file properties, click the Apply button to apply the changes.

                        -

                        Note: Online Editors allow you to change the document name directly from the editor interface. To do that, click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Rename... option, then enter the necessary File name in a new window that opens and click OK.

                        +

                        Note: The online Editors allow you to change the name of the document directly in the editor interface. To do that, click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Rename... option, then enter the necessary File name in a new window that will appear and click OK.

                        Permission Information

                        In the online version, you can view the information about permissions to the files stored in the cloud.

                        Note: this option is not available for users with the Read Only permissions.

                        -

                        To find out, who have rights to view or edit the document, select the Access Rights... option at the left sidebar.

                        +

                        To find out who have rights to view or edit the document, select the Access Rights... option on the left sidebar.

                        You can also change currently selected access rights by pressing the Change access rights button in the Persons who have rights section.

                        Version History

                        In the online version, you can view the version history for the files stored in the cloud.

                        Note: this option is not available for users with the Read Only permissions.

                        -

                        To view all the changes made to this document, select the Version History option at the left sidebar. It's also possible to open the history of versions using the Version History icon Version History icon at the Collaboration tab of the top toolbar. You'll see the list of this document versions (major changes) and revisions (minor changes) with the indication of each version/revision author and creation date and time. For document versions, the version number is also specified (e.g. ver. 2). To know exactly which changes have been made in each separate version/revision, you can view the one you need by clicking it at the left sidebar. The changes made by the version/revision author are marked with the color which is displayed next to the author name on the left sidebar. You can use the Restore link below the selected version/revision to restore it.

                        +

                        To view all the changes made to this document, select the Version History option at the left sidebar. It's also possible to open the history of versions using the Version History icon Version History icon on the Collaboration tab of the top toolbar. You'll see the list of this document versions (major changes) and revisions (minor changes) with the indication of each version/revision author and creation date and time. For document versions, the version number is also specified (e.g. ver. 2). To know exactly which changes have been made in each separate version/revision, you can view the one you need by clicking it on the left sidebar. The changes made by the version/revision author are marked with the color which is displayed next to the author's name on the left sidebar. You can use the Restore link below the selected version/revision to restore it.

                        Version History

                        -

                        To return to the document current version, use the Close History option on the top of the version list.

                        +

                        To return to the current version of the document, use the Close History option on the top of the version list.

                        To close the File panel and return to document editing, select the Close Menu option.

                        diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/abouticon.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/abouticon.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..29b5a244c Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/abouticon.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/backgroundcolor.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/backgroundcolor.png index 5929239d6..d9d5a8c21 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/backgroundcolor.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/backgroundcolor.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/backgroundcolor_selected.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/backgroundcolor_selected.png index 673b22ccf..65e027227 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/backgroundcolor_selected.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/backgroundcolor_selected.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/bulletedlistsettings.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/bulletedlistsettings.png index d360da4ab..615031824 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/bulletedlistsettings.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/bulletedlistsettings.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/ccsettingswindow.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/ccsettingswindow.png index c4a575e37..946c6dbd5 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/ccsettingswindow.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/ccsettingswindow.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/changerange.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/changerange.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..17df78932 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/changerange.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/chartsettings.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/chartsettings.png index b81b33688..6de6a6538 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/chartsettings.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/chartsettings.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/convertequation.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/convertequation.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a97a5bea2 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/convertequation.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/date_time.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/date_time.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..195286460 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/date_time.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/date_time_icon.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/date_time_icon.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..14748b290 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/date_time_icon.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/dropcap_properties_2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/dropcap_properties_2.png index 891cbd5e5..0c05f0db3 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/dropcap_properties_2.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/dropcap_properties_2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/feedbackicon.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/feedbackicon.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1734e2336 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/feedbackicon.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/fill_color.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/fill_color.png index 3d411150a..9081f4007 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/fill_color.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/fill_color.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/fill_gradient.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/fill_gradient.png index 31e87d6f4..36b959f2c 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/fill_gradient.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/fill_gradient.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/fill_pattern.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/fill_pattern.png index 06480ac11..c5aa16c1e 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/fill_pattern.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/fill_pattern.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/fill_picture.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/fill_picture.png index fbe2f71d1..2dbc49d43 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/fill_picture.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/fill_picture.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/floatingcontentcontrol.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/floatingcontentcontrol.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c374bb2ec Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/floatingcontentcontrol.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/follow_move.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/follow_move.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..496d62547 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/follow_move.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/highlightcolor.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/highlightcolor.png index 85ef0822b..ba856daf1 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/highlightcolor.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/highlightcolor.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/insert_symbol_window.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/insert_symbol_window.png index bca61c903..81058ed69 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/insert_symbol_window.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/insert_symbol_window.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/insert_symbol_window2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/insert_symbol_window2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..daf40846e Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/insert_symbol_window2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_editorwindow.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_editorwindow.png index 700ce1d87..2e4ff59fb 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_editorwindow.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_editorwindow.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_filetab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_filetab.png index 8ae663806..29951369f 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_filetab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_filetab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_hometab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_hometab.png index 6e539e753..bb360af7d 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_hometab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_hometab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_inserttab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_inserttab.png index 0cf434ed5..3b5c8e618 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_inserttab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_inserttab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_layouttab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_layouttab.png index 891961793..9cb708a23 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_layouttab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_layouttab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_pluginstab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_pluginstab.png index 12d64630d..a778601ff 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_pluginstab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_pluginstab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_protectiontab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_protectiontab.png index 4e69277cb..c7ca5677e 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_protectiontab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_protectiontab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_referencestab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_referencestab.png index 67b13d975..95a93f40c 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_referencestab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_referencestab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_reviewtab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_reviewtab.png index b6c1a66d0..5d51acb46 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_reviewtab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_reviewtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/editorwindow.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/editorwindow.png index d5fffca69..f07e9d4fb 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/editorwindow.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/editorwindow.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/filetab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/filetab.png index 3f5ea7dcc..148daf4a8 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/filetab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/filetab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/hometab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/hometab.png index ba6ce32b6..6cd4e259f 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/hometab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/hometab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/inserttab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/inserttab.png index f4f468071..59a9f9d7d 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/inserttab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/inserttab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/layouttab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/layouttab.png index a797938f6..3332ef1ef 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/layouttab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/layouttab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/pluginstab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/pluginstab.png index 72525d864..5bcd9da4c 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/pluginstab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/pluginstab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/referencestab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/referencestab.png index 2ea165c86..cb93f92ba 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/referencestab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/referencestab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/reviewtab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/reviewtab.png index 616b41d77..88b21c893 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/reviewtab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/reviewtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/larger.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/larger.png index 1a461a817..39a51760e 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/larger.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/larger.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/moveelement.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/moveelement.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..74ead64a8 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/moveelement.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/multilevellistsettings.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/multilevellistsettings.png index 1e8921519..77745ddcd 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/multilevellistsettings.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/multilevellistsettings.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/orderedlistsettings.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/orderedlistsettings.png index a20f73bcc..d16a020b8 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/orderedlistsettings.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/orderedlistsettings.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/paradvsettings_borders.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/paradvsettings_borders.png index 4344851e0..cb074cf11 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/paradvsettings_borders.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/paradvsettings_borders.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/proofing.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/proofing.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1ddcd38fe Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/proofing.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/resizeelement.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/resizeelement.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..206959166 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/resizeelement.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/review_popup.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/review_popup.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d1455200e Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/review_popup.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/right_autoshape.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/right_autoshape.png index abcb98be1..27a5a2a91 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/right_autoshape.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/right_autoshape.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/right_image.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/right_image.png index 89c5100cc..1b56cef22 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/right_image.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/right_image.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/right_image_shape.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/right_image_shape.png index 16b27052b..ede2e99c8 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/right_image_shape.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/right_image_shape.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/right_paragraph.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/right_paragraph.png index 1c307cf0c..90b45fee5 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/right_paragraph.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/right_paragraph.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/right_table.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/right_table.png index 4d1fa5d01..299e8226c 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/right_table.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/right_table.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/right_textart.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/right_textart.png index 1b30562c1..2c8ecc255 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/right_textart.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/right_textart.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/selectdata.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/selectdata.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d3f2465e7 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/selectdata.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/shape_properties.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/shape_properties.png index ac4d77834..fb4d3260f 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/shape_properties.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/shape_properties.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/shape_properties_1.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/shape_properties_1.png index 5c66ae839..fa6ea1695 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/shape_properties_1.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/shape_properties_1.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/shape_properties_2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/shape_properties_2.png index a18189199..8bf1f3ff9 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/shape_properties_2.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/shape_properties_2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/shape_properties_3.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/shape_properties_3.png index ea2b821e5..816a6ec69 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/shape_properties_3.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/shape_properties_3.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/shape_properties_4.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/shape_properties_4.png index 1fe869c2a..252241cf2 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/shape_properties_4.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/shape_properties_4.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/shape_properties_5.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/shape_properties_5.png index 3349d1153..0f89ccdfb 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/shape_properties_5.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/shape_properties_5.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/shape_properties_6.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/shape_properties_6.png index caf4a8d43..dbe7943d3 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/shape_properties_6.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/shape_properties_6.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/smaller.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/smaller.png index d24f79a22..d087549c9 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/smaller.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/smaller.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/above.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/above.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..97f2005e7 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/above.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/acute.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/acute.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..12d62abab Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/acute.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/aleph.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/aleph.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a7355dba4 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/aleph.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/alpha.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/alpha.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ca68e0fe0 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/alpha.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/alpha2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/alpha2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ea3a6aac4 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/alpha2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/amalg.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/amalg.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b66c134d5 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/amalg.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/angle.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/angle.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..de11fe22d Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/angle.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/aoint.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/aoint.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..35a228fb4 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/aoint.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/approx.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/approx.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..67b770f72 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/approx.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/arrow.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/arrow.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0df492f97 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/arrow.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/asmash.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/asmash.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..df40f9f2c Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/asmash.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/ast.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/ast.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..33be7687a Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/ast.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/asymp.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/asymp.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a7d21a268 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/asymp.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/atop.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/atop.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3d4395beb Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/atop.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/bar.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/bar.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..774a06eb3 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/bar.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/bar2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/bar2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5321fe5b6 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/bar2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/because.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/because.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3456d38c9 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/because.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/begin.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/begin.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7bd50e8ed Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/begin.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/below.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/below.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8acb835b0 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/below.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/bet.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/bet.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c219ee423 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/bet.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/beta.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/beta.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..748f2b1be Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/beta.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/beta2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/beta2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5c1ccb707 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/beta2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/beth.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/beth.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c219ee423 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/beth.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/bigcap.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/bigcap.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..af7e48ad8 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/bigcap.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/bigcup.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/bigcup.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1e27fb3bb Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/bigcup.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/bigodot.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/bigodot.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0ebddf66c Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/bigodot.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/bigoplus.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/bigoplus.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f555afb0f Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/bigoplus.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/bigotimes.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/bigotimes.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..43457dc4b Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/bigotimes.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/bigsqcup.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/bigsqcup.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..614264a01 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/bigsqcup.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/biguplus.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/biguplus.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6ec39889f Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/biguplus.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/bigvee.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/bigvee.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..57851a676 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/bigvee.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/bigwedge.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/bigwedge.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0c7cac1e1 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/bigwedge.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/binomial.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/binomial.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..72bc36e68 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/binomial.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/bot.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/bot.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2ded03e82 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/bot.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/bowtie.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/bowtie.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2ddfa28c3 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/bowtie.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/box.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/box.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..20d4a835b Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/box.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/boxdot.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/boxdot.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..222e1c7c3 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/boxdot.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/boxminus.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/boxminus.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..caf1ddddb Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/boxminus.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/boxplus.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/boxplus.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e1ee49522 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/boxplus.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/bra.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/bra.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a3c8b4c83 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/bra.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/break.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/break.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..859fbf8b4 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/break.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/breve.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/breve.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b2392724b Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/breve.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/bullet.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/bullet.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..05e268132 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/bullet.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/cap.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/cap.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..76139f161 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/cap.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/cases.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/cases.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c5a1d5ffe Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/cases.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/cbrt.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/cbrt.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..580d0d0d6 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/cbrt.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/cdot.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/cdot.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..199773081 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/cdot.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/cdots.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/cdots.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6246a1f0d Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/cdots.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/check.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/check.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9d57528ec Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/check.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/chi.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/chi.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1ee801d17 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/chi.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/chi2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/chi2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a27cce57e Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/chi2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/circ.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/circ.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9a6aa27c3 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/circ.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/close.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/close.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7438a6f0b Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/close.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/clubsuit.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/clubsuit.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0ecec4509 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/clubsuit.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/coint.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/coint.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f2f305a81 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/coint.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/colonequal.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/colonequal.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..79fb3a795 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/colonequal.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/cong.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/cong.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7d48ef05a Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/cong.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/coprod.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/coprod.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d90054fb5 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/coprod.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/cup.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/cup.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7b3915395 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/cup.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/dalet.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/dalet.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0dea5332b Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/dalet.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/daleth.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/daleth.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0dea5332b Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/daleth.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/dashv.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/dashv.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0a07ecf03 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/dashv.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/dd.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/dd.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b96137d73 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/dd.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/dd2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/dd2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..51e50c6ec Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/dd2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/ddddot.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/ddddot.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e2512dd96 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/ddddot.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/dddot.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/dddot.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8c261bdec Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/dddot.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/ddot.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/ddot.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fc158338d Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/ddot.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/ddots.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/ddots.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1b15677a9 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/ddots.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/defeq.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/defeq.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e4728e579 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/defeq.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/degc.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/degc.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f8512ce6d Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/degc.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/degf.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/degf.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9d5b4f234 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/degf.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/degree.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/degree.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..42881ff13 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/degree.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/delta.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/delta.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..14d5d2386 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/delta.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/delta2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/delta2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6541350c6 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/delta2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/deltaeq.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/deltaeq.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1dac99daf Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/deltaeq.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/diamond.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/diamond.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9e692a462 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/diamond.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/diamondsuit.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/diamondsuit.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bff5edf92 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/diamondsuit.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/div.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/div.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..059758d9c Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/div.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/dot.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/dot.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c0d4f093f Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/dot.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doteq.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doteq.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ddef5eb4d Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doteq.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/dots.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/dots.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..abf33d47a Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/dots.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublea.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublea.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b9cb5ed78 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublea.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublea2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublea2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..eee509760 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublea2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doubleb.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doubleb.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3d98b1da6 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doubleb.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doubleb2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doubleb2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3cdc8d687 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doubleb2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublec.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublec.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b4e564fdc Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublec.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublec2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublec2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b3e5ccc8a Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublec2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublecolon.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublecolon.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..56cfcafd4 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublecolon.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doubled.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doubled.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bca050ea8 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doubled.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doubled2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doubled2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6e222d501 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doubled2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublee.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublee.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e03f999a8 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublee.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublee2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublee2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6627ded4f Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublee2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublef.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublef.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c99ee88a5 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublef.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublef2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublef2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f97effdec Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublef2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublefactorial.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublefactorial.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..81a4360f2 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublefactorial.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doubleg.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doubleg.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..97ff9ceed Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doubleg.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doubleg2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doubleg2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..19f3727f8 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doubleg2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doubleh.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doubleh.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9ca4f14ca Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doubleh.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doubleh2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doubleh2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ea40b9965 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doubleh2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublei.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublei.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bb4d100de Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublei.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublei2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublei2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..313453e56 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublei2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublej.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublej.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..43de921d9 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublej.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublej2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublej2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..55063df14 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublej2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublek.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublek.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6dc9ee87c Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublek.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublek2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublek2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..aee85567c Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublek2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublel.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublel.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4e4aad8c8 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublel.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublel2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublel2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7382f3652 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublel2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublem.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublem.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8f6d8538d Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublem.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublem2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublem2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..100097a98 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublem2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublen.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublen.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2f1373128 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublen.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublen2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublen2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5ef2738aa Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublen2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doubleo.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doubleo.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a13023552 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doubleo.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doubleo2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doubleo2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..468459457 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doubleo2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublep.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublep.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8db731325 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublep.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublep2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublep2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..18bfb16ad Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublep2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doubleq.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doubleq.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fc4b77c78 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doubleq.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doubleq2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doubleq2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..25b230947 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doubleq2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doubler.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doubler.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8f0e988a3 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doubler.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doubler2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doubler2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bb6e40f2a Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doubler2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doubles.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doubles.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c05d7f9cd Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doubles.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doubles2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doubles2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d24cb2f27 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doubles2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublet.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublet.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c27fe3875 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublet.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublet2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublet2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..32f2294a7 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublet2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doubleu.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doubleu.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a0f54d440 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doubleu.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doubleu2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doubleu2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3ce700d2f Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doubleu2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublev.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublev.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a5b0cb2be Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublev.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublev2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublev2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..da1089327 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublev2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublew.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublew.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0400ddbed Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublew.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublew2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublew2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a151c1777 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublew2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublex.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublex.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..648ce4467 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublex.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublex2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublex2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4c2a1de43 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublex2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doubley.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doubley.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6ed589d6d Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doubley.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doubley2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doubley2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6e2733f6d Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doubley2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublez.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublez.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3d1061f6c Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublez.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublez2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublez2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f12b3eebb Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/doublez2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/downarrow.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/downarrow.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..71146333a Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/downarrow.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/downarrow2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/downarrow2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7f20d8728 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/downarrow2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/dsmash.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/dsmash.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..49e2e5855 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/dsmash.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/ee.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/ee.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d1c8f6b16 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/ee.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/ell.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/ell.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e28155e01 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/ell.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/emptyset.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/emptyset.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..28b0f75d5 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/emptyset.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/end.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/end.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..33d901831 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/end.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/epsilon.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/epsilon.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c7a53ad49 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/epsilon.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/epsilon2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/epsilon2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..dd54bb471 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/epsilon2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/eqarray.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/eqarray.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2dbb07eff Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/eqarray.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/equiv.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/equiv.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ac3c147eb Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/equiv.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/eta.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/eta.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bb6c37c23 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/eta.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/eta2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/eta2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..93a5f8f3e Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/eta2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/exists.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/exists.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f2e078f08 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/exists.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/forall.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/forall.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5c58ecb41 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/forall.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/fraktura.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/fraktura.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8570b166c Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/fraktura.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/fraktura2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/fraktura2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b3db328e2 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/fraktura2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturb.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturb.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e682b9c49 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturb.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturb2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturb2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..570b7daad Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturb2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturc.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturc.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3296e1bf7 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturc.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturc2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturc2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9e1c9065f Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturc2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturd.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturd.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0c29587e2 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturd.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturd2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturd2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f5afeeb59 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturd2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakture.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakture.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a56e7c5a2 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakture.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakture2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakture2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3c9236af6 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakture2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturf.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturf.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8a460b206 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturf.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturf2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturf2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f59cc1a49 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturf2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturg.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturg.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f9c71a7f9 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturg.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturg2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturg2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1a96d7939 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturg2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturh.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturh.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..afff96507 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturh.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturh2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturh2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c77ddc227 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturh2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturi.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturi.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b690840e0 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturi.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturi2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturi2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..93494c9f1 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturi2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturk.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturk.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f6ec69273 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturk.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturk2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturk2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..88b5d5dd8 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturk2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturl.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturl.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4719aa67a Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturl.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturl2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturl2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..73365c050 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturl2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturm.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturm.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a8d412077 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturm.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturm2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturm2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6823b765f Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturm2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturn.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturn.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7562b1587 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturn.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturn2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturn2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5817d5af7 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturn2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturo.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturo.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ed9ee60d6 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturo.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturo2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturo2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6becfb0d4 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturo2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturp.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturp.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d9c2ef5ed Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturp.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturp2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturp2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1fbe142a9 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturp2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturq.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturq.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..aac2cafe2 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturq.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturq2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturq2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7026dc172 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturq2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturr.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturr.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c14dc2aee Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturr.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturr2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturr2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ad6eb3a2a Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturr2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturs.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturs.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b68a51481 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturs.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturs2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturs2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..be9bce9ed Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturs2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturt.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturt.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8a274312f Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturt.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturt2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturt2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ff4ffbad5 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturt2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturu.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturu.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e3835c5e6 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturu.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturu2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturu2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b7c2dfce0 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturu2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturv.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturv.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3ae44b0d8 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturv.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturv2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturv2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..06951ec52 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturv2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturw.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturw.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..20e492dd2 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturw.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturw2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturw2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c08b19614 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturw2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturx.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturx.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7af677f4d Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturx.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturx2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturx2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9dd4eefc0 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturx2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/fraktury.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/fraktury.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ea98c092d Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/fraktury.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/fraktury2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/fraktury2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4cf8f1fb3 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/fraktury2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturz.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturz.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b44487f74 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturz.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturz2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturz2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..afd922249 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frakturz2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frown.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frown.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2fcd6e3a2 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/frown.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/g.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/g.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3aa30aaa0 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/g.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/gamma.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/gamma.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9f088aa79 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/gamma.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/gamma2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/gamma2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3aa30aaa0 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/gamma2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/ge.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/ge.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fe22252f5 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/ge.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/geq.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/geq.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fe22252f5 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/geq.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/gets.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/gets.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6ab7c9df5 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/gets.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/gg.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/gg.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c2b964579 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/gg.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/gimel.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/gimel.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4e6cccb60 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/gimel.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/grave.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/grave.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fcda94a6c Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/grave.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/greaterthanorequalto.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/greaterthanorequalto.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fe22252f5 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/greaterthanorequalto.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/hat.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/hat.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e3be83a4c Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/hat.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/hbar.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/hbar.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e6025b5d7 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/hbar.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/heartsuit.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/heartsuit.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8b26f4fe3 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/heartsuit.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/hookleftarrow.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/hookleftarrow.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..14f255fb0 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/hookleftarrow.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/hookrightarrow.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/hookrightarrow.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b22e5b07a Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/hookrightarrow.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/horizontalellipsis.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/horizontalellipsis.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bc8f0fa47 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/horizontalellipsis.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/hphantom.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/hphantom.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fb072eee0 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/hphantom.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/hsmash.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/hsmash.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ce90638d4 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/hsmash.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/hvec.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/hvec.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..38fddae5b Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/hvec.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/identitymatrix.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/identitymatrix.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3531cd2fc Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/identitymatrix.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/ii.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/ii.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e064923e7 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/ii.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/iiiint.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/iiiint.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b7b9990d1 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/iiiint.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/iiint.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/iiint.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f56aff057 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/iiint.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/iint.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/iint.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e73f05c2d Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/iint.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/im.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/im.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1470295b3 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/im.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/imath.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/imath.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e6493cfef Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/imath.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/in.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/in.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ca1f84e4d Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/in.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/inc.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/inc.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3ac8c1bcd Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/inc.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/infty.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/infty.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1fa3570fa Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/infty.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/int.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/int.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0f296cc46 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/int.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/integral.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/integral.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..65e56f23b Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/integral.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/iota.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/iota.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0aefb684e Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/iota.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/iota2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/iota2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b4341851a Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/iota2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/j.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/j.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..004b30b69 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/j.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/jj.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/jj.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5a1e11920 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/jj.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/jmath.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/jmath.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9409b6d2e Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/jmath.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/kappa.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/kappa.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..788d84c11 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/kappa.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/kappa2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/kappa2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fae000a00 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/kappa2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/ket.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/ket.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..913b1b3fe Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/ket.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/lambda.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/lambda.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f98af8017 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/lambda.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/lambda2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/lambda2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3016c6ece Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/lambda2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/langle.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/langle.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..73ccafba9 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/langle.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/lbbrack.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/lbbrack.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9dbb14049 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/lbbrack.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/lbrace.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/lbrace.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..004d22d05 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/lbrace.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/lbrack.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/lbrack.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0cf789daa Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/lbrack.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/lceil.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/lceil.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..48d4f69b1 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/lceil.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/ldiv.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/ldiv.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ba17e3ae6 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/ldiv.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/ldivide.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/ldivide.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e1071483b Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/ldivide.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/ldots.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/ldots.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..abf33d47a Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/ldots.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/le.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/le.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d839ba35d Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/le.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/left.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/left.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9f27f6310 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/left.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/leftarrow.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/leftarrow.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bafaf636c Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/leftarrow.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/leftarrow2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/leftarrow2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..60f405f7e Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/leftarrow2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/leftharpoondown.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/leftharpoondown.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d15921dc9 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/leftharpoondown.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/leftharpoonup.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/leftharpoonup.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d02cea5c4 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/leftharpoonup.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/leftrightarrow.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/leftrightarrow.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2c0305093 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/leftrightarrow.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/leftrightarrow2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/leftrightarrow2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..923152c61 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/leftrightarrow2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/leq.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/leq.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d839ba35d Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/leq.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/lessthanorequalto.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/lessthanorequalto.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d839ba35d Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/lessthanorequalto.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/lfloor.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/lfloor.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fc34c4345 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/lfloor.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/lhvec.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/lhvec.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..10407df0f Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/lhvec.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/limit.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/limit.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f5669a329 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/limit.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/ll.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/ll.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6e31ee790 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/ll.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/lmoust.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/lmoust.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3547706a8 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/lmoust.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/longleftarrow.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/longleftarrow.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c9647da6b Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/longleftarrow.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/longleftrightarrow.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/longleftrightarrow.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8e0e50d6d Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/longleftrightarrow.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/longrightarrow.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/longrightarrow.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5bed54fe7 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/longrightarrow.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/lrhar.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/lrhar.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9a54ae201 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/lrhar.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/lvec.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/lvec.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b6ab35fac Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/lvec.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/mapsto.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/mapsto.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..11e8e411a Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/mapsto.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/matrix.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/matrix.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..36dd9f3ef Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/matrix.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/mid.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/mid.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..21fca0ac1 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/mid.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/middle.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/middle.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e47884724 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/middle.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/models.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/models.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a87cdc82e Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/models.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/mp.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/mp.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2f295f402 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/mp.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/mu.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/mu.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6a4698faf Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/mu.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/mu2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/mu2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..96d5b82b7 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/mu2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/nabla.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/nabla.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9c4283a5a Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/nabla.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/naryand.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/naryand.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c43d7a980 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/naryand.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/ne.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/ne.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e55862cde Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/ne.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/nearrow.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/nearrow.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5e95d358a Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/nearrow.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/neq.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/neq.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e55862cde Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/neq.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/ni.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/ni.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b09ce8864 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/ni.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/norm.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/norm.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..915abac55 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/norm.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/notcontain.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/notcontain.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2b6ac81ce Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/notcontain.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/notelement.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/notelement.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7c5d182db Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/notelement.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/notequal.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/notequal.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e55862cde Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/notequal.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/notgreaterthan.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/notgreaterthan.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2a8af203d Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/notgreaterthan.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/notin.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/notin.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7f2abe531 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/notin.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/notlessthan.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/notlessthan.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2e9fc8ef2 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/notlessthan.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/nu.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/nu.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b32087c3d Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/nu.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/nu2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/nu2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6e0f14582 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/nu2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/nwarrow.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/nwarrow.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..35ad2ee95 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/nwarrow.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/o.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/o.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1cbbaaf6f Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/o.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/o2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/o2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..86a488451 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/o2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/odot.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/odot.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..afbd0f8b9 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/odot.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/of.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/of.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d8a2567c7 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/of.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/oiiint.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/oiiint.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c66dc2947 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/oiiint.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/oiint.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/oiint.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5587f29d5 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/oiint.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/oint.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/oint.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..30b5bbab3 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/oint.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/omega.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/omega.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a3224bcc5 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/omega.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/omega2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/omega2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6689087de Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/omega2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/ominus.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/ominus.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5a07e9ce7 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/ominus.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/open.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/open.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2874320d3 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/open.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/oplus.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/oplus.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6ab9c8d22 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/oplus.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/otimes.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/otimes.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6a2de09e2 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/otimes.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/over.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/over.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..de78bfdde Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/over.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/overbar.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/overbar.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5b3896815 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/overbar.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/overbrace.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/overbrace.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..71c7d4729 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/overbrace.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/overbracket.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/overbracket.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cbd4f3598 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/overbracket.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/overline.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/overline.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5b3896815 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/overline.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/overparen.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/overparen.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..645d88650 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/overparen.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/overshell.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/overshell.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..907e993d3 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/overshell.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/parallel.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/parallel.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3b42a5958 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/parallel.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/partial.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/partial.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bb198b44d Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/partial.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/perp.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/perp.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ecc490ff4 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/perp.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/phantom.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/phantom.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f3a11e75a Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/phantom.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/phi.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/phi.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a42a2bdea Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/phi.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/phi2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/phi2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d9f811dab Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/phi2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/pi.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/pi.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d6c5da9c4 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/pi.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/pi2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/pi2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..11486a83b Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/pi2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/pm.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/pm.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..13cccaad2 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/pm.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/pmatrix.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/pmatrix.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..37b0ed5ac Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/pmatrix.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/pppprime.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/pppprime.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4aec7dd87 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/pppprime.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/ppprime.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/ppprime.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..460f07d5d Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/ppprime.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/pprime.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/pprime.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8c60382c1 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/pprime.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/prec.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/prec.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fc174cb73 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/prec.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/preceq.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/preceq.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..185576937 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/preceq.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/prime.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/prime.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2144d9f2a Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/prime.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/prod.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/prod.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9fbe6e266 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/prod.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/propto.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/propto.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..11a52f90b Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/propto.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/psi.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/psi.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b09ce71e3 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/psi.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/psi2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/psi2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..71faedd0b Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/psi2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/qdrt.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/qdrt.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f2b8a5518 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/qdrt.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/quadratic.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/quadratic.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..26116211c Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/quadratic.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/rangle.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/rangle.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..913b1b3fe Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/rangle.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/rangle2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/rangle2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5fd0b87a0 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/rangle2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/ratio.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/ratio.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d480fe90c Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/ratio.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/rbrace.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/rbrace.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..31decded8 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/rbrace.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/rbrack.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/rbrack.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..772a722da Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/rbrack.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/rbrack2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/rbrack2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5aa46c098 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/rbrack2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/rceil.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/rceil.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c96575404 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/rceil.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/rddots.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/rddots.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..17f60c0bc Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/rddots.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/re.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/re.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..36ffb2a8e Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/re.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/rect.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/rect.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b7942dbe1 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/rect.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/rfloor.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/rfloor.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0303da681 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/rfloor.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/rho.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/rho.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c6020c1f1 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/rho.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/rho2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/rho2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7242001a4 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/rho2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/rhvec.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/rhvec.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..38fddae5b Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/rhvec.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/right.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/right.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cc933121f Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/right.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/rightarrow.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/rightarrow.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0df492f97 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/rightarrow.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/rightarrow2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/rightarrow2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..62d8b7b90 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/rightarrow2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/rightharpoondown.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/rightharpoondown.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c25b921a2 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/rightharpoondown.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/rightharpoonup.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/rightharpoonup.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a33c56ea0 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/rightharpoonup.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/rmoust.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/rmoust.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e85cdefb9 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/rmoust.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/root.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/root.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8bdcb3d60 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/root.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scripta.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scripta.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b4305bc75 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scripta.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scripta2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scripta2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4df4c10ea Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scripta2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptb.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptb.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..16801f863 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptb.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptb2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptb2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3f395bf2e Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptb2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptc.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptc.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..292f64223 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptc.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptc2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptc2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f7d64e076 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptc2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptd.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptd.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4a52adbda Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptd.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptd2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptd2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..db75ffaee Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptd2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scripte.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scripte.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e9cea6589 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scripte.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scripte2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scripte2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..908b98abf Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scripte2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptf.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptf.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..16b2839e3 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptf.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptf2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptf2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0fc78029f Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptf2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptg.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptg.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7e2b4e5c7 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptg.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptg2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptg2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..83ecfa7c3 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptg2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scripth.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scripth.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ce9052e49 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scripth.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scripth2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scripth2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b669be42d Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scripth2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scripti.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scripti.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8650af640 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scripti.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scripti2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scripti2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..35253e28d Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scripti2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptj.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptj.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..23a0b18d7 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptj.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptj2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptj2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..964ca2f83 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptj2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptk.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptk.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..605b16e12 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptk.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptk2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptk2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c34227b6a Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptk2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptl.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptl.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e28155e01 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptl.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptl2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptl2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..20327fde5 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptl2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptm.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptm.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5cdd4bc43 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptm.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptm2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptm2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b257e5e69 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptm2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptn.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptn.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..22b214f97 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptn.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptn2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptn2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3cd942d5b Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptn2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scripto.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scripto.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..64efc9545 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scripto.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scripto2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scripto2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8f8bdc904 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scripto2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptp.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptp.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ec9874130 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptp.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptp2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptp2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2df092612 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptp2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptq.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptq.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f9c07bbff Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptq.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptq2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptq2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1eb2e1182 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptq2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptr.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptr.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..49b85ae2d Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptr.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptr2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptr2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..46dea0796 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptr2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scripts.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scripts.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..74caee45b Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scripts.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scripts2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scripts2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0acf23f10 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scripts2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptt.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptt.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cb6ace16a Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptt.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptt2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptt2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9407b3372 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptt2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptu.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptu.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cffb832bc Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptu.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptu2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptu2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5f85cd60c Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptu2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptv.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptv.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d6e628a61 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptv.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptv2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptv2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..346dd8c56 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptv2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptw.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptw.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9e5d381db Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptw.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptw2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptw2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..953ee2de5 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptw2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptx.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptx.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..db732c630 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptx.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptx2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptx2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..166c889a3 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptx2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scripty.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scripty.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7784bb149 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scripty.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scripty2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scripty2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f3003ade0 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scripty2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptz.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptz.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e8d5a0cde Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptz.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptz2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptz2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8197fe515 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/scriptz2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/sdiv.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/sdiv.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0109428ac Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/sdiv.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/sdivide.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/sdivide.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0109428ac Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/sdivide.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/searrow.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/searrow.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8a7f64b14 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/searrow.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/setminus.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/setminus.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fa6c2cfee Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/setminus.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/sigma.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/sigma.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2cb2bb178 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/sigma.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/sigma2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/sigma2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..20e9f5ee7 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/sigma2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/sim.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/sim.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6a056eda0 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/sim.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/simeq.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/simeq.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..eade7ebc9 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/simeq.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/smash.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/smash.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..90896057d Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/smash.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/smile.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/smile.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..83b716c6c Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/smile.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/spadesuit.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/spadesuit.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3bdec8945 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/spadesuit.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/sqcap.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/sqcap.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4cf43990e Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/sqcap.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/sqcup.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/sqcup.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..426d02fdc Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/sqcup.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/sqrt.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/sqrt.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0acfaa8ed Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/sqrt.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/sqsubseteq.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/sqsubseteq.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..14365cc02 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/sqsubseteq.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/sqsuperseteq.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/sqsuperseteq.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6db6d42fb Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/sqsuperseteq.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/star.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/star.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1f15f019f Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/star.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/subset.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/subset.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f23368a90 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/subset.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/subseteq.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/subseteq.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d867e2df0 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/subseteq.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/succ.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/succ.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6b7c0526b Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/succ.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/succeq.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/succeq.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..22eff46c6 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/succeq.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/sum.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/sum.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..44106f72f Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/sum.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/superset.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/superset.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..67f46e1ad Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/superset.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/superseteq.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/superseteq.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..89521782c Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/superseteq.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/swarrow.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/swarrow.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..66df3fa2a Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/swarrow.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/tau.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/tau.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..abd5bf872 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/tau.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/tau2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/tau2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f15d8e443 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/tau2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/therefore.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/therefore.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d3f02aba3 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/therefore.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/theta.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/theta.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d2d89e82b Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/theta.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/theta2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/theta2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..13f05f84f Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/theta2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/tilde.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/tilde.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1b08ef3a8 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/tilde.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/times.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/times.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..da3afaf8b Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/times.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/to.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/to.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0df492f97 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/to.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/top.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/top.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..afbe5b832 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/top.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/tvec.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/tvec.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ee71f7105 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/tvec.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/ubar.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/ubar.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e27b66816 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/ubar.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/ubar2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/ubar2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..63c20216a Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/ubar2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/underbar.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/underbar.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..938c658e5 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/underbar.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/underbrace.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/underbrace.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f2c080b58 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/underbrace.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/underbracket.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/underbracket.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a78aa1cdc Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/underbracket.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/underline.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/underline.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b55100731 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/underline.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/underparen.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/underparen.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ccaac1590 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/underparen.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/uparrow.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/uparrow.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..eccaa488d Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/uparrow.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/uparrow2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/uparrow2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3cff2b9de Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/uparrow2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/updownarrow.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/updownarrow.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..65ea76252 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/updownarrow.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/updownarrow2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/updownarrow2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c10bc8fef Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/updownarrow2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/uplus.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/uplus.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..39109a95b Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/uplus.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/upsilon.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/upsilon.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e69b7226c Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/upsilon.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/upsilon2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/upsilon2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2012f0408 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/upsilon2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/varepsilon.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/varepsilon.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1788b80e9 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/varepsilon.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/varphi.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/varphi.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ebcb44f39 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/varphi.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/varpi.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/varpi.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..82e5e48bd Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/varpi.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/varrho.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/varrho.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d719b4e0c Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/varrho.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/varsigma.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/varsigma.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b154dede3 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/varsigma.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/vartheta.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/vartheta.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5e49bc074 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/vartheta.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/vbar.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/vbar.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..197c22ee5 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/vbar.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/vdash.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/vdash.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2387c2d76 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/vdash.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/vdots.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/vdots.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1220d68b5 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/vdots.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/vec.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/vec.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0a50d9fe6 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/vec.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/vee.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/vee.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..be2573ef8 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/vee.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/vert.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/vert.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..adc50b15c Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/vert.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/vert2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/vert2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..915abac55 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/vert2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/vmatrix.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/vmatrix.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e8dba6fd2 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/vmatrix.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/vphantom.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/vphantom.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fd8194604 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/vphantom.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/wedge.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/wedge.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..34e02a584 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/wedge.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/wp.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/wp.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..00c630d38 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/wp.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/wr.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/wr.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bceef6f19 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/wr.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/xi.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/xi.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f83b1dfd2 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/xi.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/xi2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/xi2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4c59fd3e2 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/xi2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/zeta.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/zeta.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..aaf47b628 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/zeta.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/zeta2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/zeta2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fb04db0ab Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/symbols/zeta2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/table_properties_3.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/table_properties_3.png index 0e17aed4c..15c3fa5a7 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/table_properties_3.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/table_properties_3.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/watermark_settings.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/watermark_settings.png index 0c7fb12db..e7e338ff3 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/watermark_settings.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/watermark_settings.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/watermark_settings2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/watermark_settings2.png index ed6786612..34a1c2cea 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/watermark_settings2.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/watermark_settings2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/search/indexes.js b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/search/indexes.js index aad48f3bb..7dbcce905 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/search/indexes.js +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/search/indexes.js @@ -3,301 +3,311 @@ var indexes = { "id": "HelpfulHints/About.htm", "title": "About Document Editor", - "body": "Document Editor is an online application that lets you look through and edit documents directly in your browser . Using Document Editor, you can perform various editing operations like in any desktop editor, print the edited documents keeping all the formatting details or download them onto your computer hard disk drive as DOCX, PDF, ODT, TXT, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, HTML files. To view the current software version and licensor details in the online version, click the icon at the left sidebar. To view the current software version and licensor details in the desktop version, select the About menu item at the left sidebar of the main program window." + "body": "About the Document Editor The Document Editor is an online application that allows you to view through and edit documents directly in your browser . Using the Document Editor, you can perform various editing operations like in any desktop editor, print the edited documents keeping all the formatting details or download them onto your computer hard disk drive of your computer as DOCX, PDF, ODT, TXT, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, HTML files. To view the current software version and licensor details in the online version, click the icon on the left sidebar. To view the current software version and licensor details in the desktop version, select the About menu item on the left sidebar of the main program window." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm", "title": "Advanced Settings of Document Editor", - "body": "Document Editor lets you change its advanced settings. To access them, open the File tab at the top toolbar and select the Advanced Settings... option. You can also click the View settings icon on the right side of the editor header and select the Advanced settings option. The advanced settings are: Commenting Display is used to turn on/off the live commenting option: Turn on display of the comments - if you disable this feature, the commented passages will be highlighted only if you click the Comments icon at the left sidebar. Turn on display of the resolved comments - this feature is disabled by default so that the resolved comments were hidden in the document text. You can view such comments only if you click the Comments icon at the left sidebar. Enable this option if you want to display resolved comments in the document text. Spell Checking is used to turn on/off the spell checking option. Alternate Input is used to turn on/off hieroglyphs. Alignment Guides is used to turn on/off alignment guides that appear when you move objects and allow you to position them on the page precisely. Compatibility is used to make the files compatible with older MS Word versions when saved as DOCX. Autosave is used in the online version to turn on/off automatic saving of changes you make while editing. Autorecover - is used in the desktop version to turn on/off the option that allows to automatically recover documents in case of the unexpected program closing. Co-editing Mode is used to select the display of the changes made during the co-editing: By default the Fast mode is selected, the users who take part in the document co-editing will see the changes in real time once they are made by other users. If you prefer not to see other user changes (so that they do not disturb you, or for some other reason), select the Strict mode and all the changes will be shown only after you click the Save icon notifying you that there are changes from other users. Real-time Collaboration Changes is used to specify what changes you want to be highlighted during co-editing: Selecting the View None option, changes made during the current session will not be highlighted. Selecting the View All option, all the changes made during the current session will be highlighted. Selecting the View Last option, only the changes made since you last time clicked the Save icon will be highlighted. This option is only available when the Strict co-editing mode is selected. Default Zoom Value is used to set the default zoom value selecting it in the list of available options from 50% to 200%. You can also choose the Fit to Page or Fit to Width option. Font Hinting is used to select the type a font is displayed in Document Editor: Choose As Windows if you like the way fonts are usually displayed on Windows, i.e. using Windows font hinting. Choose As OS X if you like the way fonts are usually displayed on a Mac, i.e. without any font hinting at all. Choose Native if you want your text to be displayed with the hinting embedded into font files. Default cache mode - used to select the cache mode for the font characters. It’s not recommended to switch it without any reason. It can be helpful in some cases only, for example, when an issue in the Google Chrome browser with the enabled hardware acceleration occurs. Document Editor has two cache modes: In the first cache mode, each letter is cached as a separate picture. In the second cache mode, a picture of a certain size is selected where letters are placed dynamically and a mechanism of allocating/removing memory in this picture is also implemented. If there is not enough memory, a second picture is created, etc. The Default cache mode setting applies two above mentioned cache modes separately for different browsers: When the Default cache mode setting is enabled, Internet Explorer (v. 9, 10, 11) uses the second cache mode, other browsers use the first cache mode. When the Default cache mode setting is disabled, Internet Explorer (v. 9, 10, 11) uses the first cache mode, other browsers use the second cache mode. Unit of Measurement is used to specify what units are used on the rulers and in properties windows for measuring elements parameters such as width, height, spacing, margins etc. You can select the Centimeter, Point, or Inch option. To save the changes you made, click the Apply button." + "body": "Advanced Settings of the Document Editor The Document Editor allows you to change its advanced settings. To access them, open the File tab on the top toolbar and select the Advanced Settings... option. You can also click the View settings icon on the right side of the editor header and select the Advanced settings option. The advanced settings are: Commenting Display is used to turn on/off the live commenting option: Turn on display of the comments - if you disable this feature, the commented passages will be highlighted only if you click the Comments icon on the left sidebar. Turn on display of the resolved comments - this feature is disabled by default so that the resolved comments were hidden in the document text. You can view such comments only if you click the Comments icon on the left sidebar. Enable this option if you want to display resolved comments in the document text. Spell Checking is used to turn on/off the spell checking option. Proofing - used to automatically replace word or symbol typed in the Replace: box or chosen from the list by a new word or symbol displayed in the By: box. Alternate Input is used to turn on/off hieroglyphs. Alignment Guides is used to turn on/off alignment guides that appear when you move objects and allow you to position them on the page precisely. Compatibility is used to make the files compatible with older MS Word versions when saved as DOCX. Autosave is used in the online version to turn on/off automatic saving of changes you make while editing. Autorecover - is used in the desktop version to turn on/off the option that allows automatically recovering documents in case the program closes unexpectedly. Co-editing Mode is used to select the display of the changes made during the co-editing: By default the Fast mode is selected, the users who take part in the document co-editing will see the changes in real time once they are made by other users. If you prefer not to see other user changes (so that they do not disturb you, or for some other reason), select the Strict mode and all the changes will be shown only after you click the Save icon notifying you that there are changes from other users. Real-time Collaboration Changes is used to specify what changes you want to be highlighted during co-editing: Selecting the View None option, changes made during the current session will not be highlighted. Selecting the View All option, all the changes made during the current session will be highlighted. Selecting the View Last option, only the changes made since you last time clicked the Save icon will be highlighted. This option is only available when the Strict co-editing mode is selected. Default Zoom Value is used to set the default zoom value selecting it in the list of available options from 50% to 200%. You can also choose the Fit to Page or Fit to Width option. Font Hinting is used to select the type a font is displayed in the Document Editor: Choose As Windows if you like the way fonts are usually displayed on Windows, i.e. using Windows font hinting. Choose As OS X if you like the way fonts are usually displayed on a Mac, i.e. without any font hinting at all. Choose Native if you want your text to be displayed with the hinting embedded into font files. Default cache mode - used to select the cache mode for the font characters. It’s not recommended to switch it without any reason. It can be helpful in some cases only, for example, when an issue in the Google Chrome browser with the enabled hardware acceleration occurs. The Document Editor has two cache modes: In the first cache mode, each letter is cached as a separate picture. In the second cache mode, a picture of a certain size is selected where letters are placed dynamically and a mechanism of allocating/removing memory in this picture is also implemented. If there is not enough memory, a second picture is created, etc. The Default cache mode setting applies two above mentioned cache modes separately for different browsers: When the Default cache mode setting is enabled, Internet Explorer (v. 9, 10, 11) uses the second cache mode, other browsers use the first cache mode. When the Default cache mode setting is disabled, Internet Explorer (v. 9, 10, 11) uses the first cache mode, other browsers use the second cache mode. Unit of Measurement is used to specify what units are used on the rulers and in properties windows for measuring elements parameters such as width, height, spacing, margins etc. You can select the Centimeter, Point, or Inch option. Cut, copy and paste - used to show the Paste Options button when content is pasted. Check the box to enable this feature. Macros Settings - used to set macros display with a notification. Choose Disable all to disable all macros within the document; Show notification to receive notifications about macros within the document; Enable all to automatically run all macros within the document. To save the changes you made, click the Apply button." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/CollaborativeEditing.htm", "title": "Collaborative Document Editing", - "body": "Document Editor offers you the possibility to work at a document collaboratively with other users. This feature includes: simultaneous multi-user access to the edited document visual indication of passages that are being edited by other users real-time changes display or synchronization of changes with one button click chat to share ideas concerning particular document parts comments containing the description of a task or problem that should be solved (it's also possible to work with comments in the offline mode, without connecting to the online version) Connecting to the online version In the desktop editor, open the Connect to cloud option of the left-side menu in the main program window. Connect to your cloud office specifying your account login and password. Co-editing Document Editor allows to select one of the two available co-editing modes: Fast is used by default and shows the changes made by other users in real time. Strict is selected to hide other user changes until you click the Save icon to save your own changes and accept the changes made by others. The mode can be selected in the Advanced Settings. It's also possible to choose the necessary mode using the Co-editing Mode icon at the Collaboration tab of the top toolbar: Note: when you co-edit a document in the Fast mode, the possibility to Redo the last undone operation is not available. When a document is being edited by several users simultaneously in the Strict mode, the edited text passages are marked with dashed lines of different colors. By hovering the mouse cursor over one of the edited passages, the name of the user who is editing it at the moment is displayed. The Fast mode will show the actions and the names of the co-editors once they are editing the text. The number of users who are working at the current document is specified on the right side of the editor header - . If you want to see who exactly are editing the file now, you can click this icon or open the Chat panel with the full list of the users. When no users are viewing or editing the file, the icon in the editor header will look like allowing you to manage the users who have access to the file right from the document: invite new users giving them permissions to edit, read, comment, fill forms or review the document, or deny some users access rights to the file. Click this icon to manage the access to the file; this can be done both when there are no other users who view or co-edit the document at the moment and when there are other users and the icon looks like . It's also possible to set access rights using the Sharing icon at the Collaboration tab of the top toolbar. As soon as one of the users saves his/her changes by clicking the icon, the others will see a note within the status bar stating that they have updates. To save the changes you made, so that other users can view them, and get the updates saved by your co-editors, click the icon in the left upper corner of the top toolbar. The updates will be highlighted for you to check what exactly has been changed. You can specify what changes you want to be highlighted during co-editing if you click the File tab at the top toolbar, select the Advanced Settings... option and choose between none, all and last real-time collaboration changes. Selecting View all changes, all the changes made during the current session will be highlighted. Selecting View last changes, only the changes made since you last time clicked the icon will be highlighted. Selecting View None changes, changes made during the current session will not be highlighted. Chat You can use this tool to coordinate the co-editing process on-the-fly, for example, to arrange with your collaborators about who is doing what, which paragraph you are going to edit now etc. The chat messages are stored during one session only. To discuss the document content it is better to use comments which are stored until you decide to delete them. To access the chat and leave a message for other users, click the icon at the left sidebar, or switch to the Collaboration tab of the top toolbar and click the Chat button, enter your text into the corresponding field below, press the Send button. All the messages left by users will be displayed on the panel on the left. If there are new messages you haven't read yet, the chat icon will look like this - . To close the panel with chat messages, click the icon at the left sidebar or the Chat button at the top toolbar once again. Comments It's possible to work with comments in the offline mode, without connecting to the online version. To leave a comment, select a text passage where you think there is an error or problem, switch to the Insert or Collaboration tab of the top toolbar and click the Comment button, or use the icon at the left sidebar to open the Comments panel and click the Add Comment to Document link, or right-click the selected text passage and select the Add Сomment option from the contextual menu, enter the needed text, click the Add Comment/Add button. The comment will be seen on the Comments panel on the left. Any other user can answer to the added comment asking questions or reporting on the work he/she has done. For this purpose, click the Add Reply link situated under the comment, type in your reply text in the entry field and press the Reply button. If you are using the Strict co-editing mode, new comments added by other users will become visible only after you click the icon in the left upper corner of the top toolbar. The text passage you commented will be highlighted in the document. To view the comment, just click within the passage. If you need to disable this feature, click the File tab at the top toolbar, select the Advanced Settings... option and uncheck the Turn on display of the comments box. In this case the commented passages will be highlighted only if you click the icon. You can manage the added comments using the icons in the comment balloon or at the Comments panel on the left: edit the currently selected comment by clicking the icon, delete the currently selected comment by clicking the icon, close the currently selected discussion by clicking the icon if the task or problem you stated in your comment was solved, after that the discussion you opened with your comment gets the resolved status. To open it again, click the icon. If you want to hide resolved comments, click the File tab at the top toolbar, select the Advanced Settings... option, uncheck the Turn on display of the resolved comments box and click Apply. In this case the resolved comments will be highlighted only if you click the icon. Adding mentions When entering comments, you can use the mentions feature that allows to attract somebody's attention to the comment and send a notification to the mentioned user via email and Talk. To add a mention enter the \"+\" or \"@\" sign anywhere in the comment text - a list of the portal users will open. To simplify the search process, you can start typing a name in the comment field - the user list will change as you type. Select the necessary person from the list. If the file has not yet been shared with the mentioned user, the Sharing Settings window will open. Read only access type is selected by default. Change it if necessary and click OK. The mentioned user will receive an email notification that he/she has been mentioned in a comment. If the file has been shared, the user will also receive a corresponding notification. To remove comments, click the Remove button at the Collaboration tab of the top toolbar, select the necessary option from the menu: Remove Current Comments - to remove the currently selected comment. If some replies have beed added to the comment, all its replies will be removed as well. Remove My Comments - to remove comments you added without removing comments added by other users. If some replies have beed added to your comment, all its replies will be removed as well. Remove All Comments - to remove all the comments in the document that you and other users added. To close the panel with comments, click the icon at the left sidebar once again." + "body": "The Document Editor allows you to collaboratively work on a document with other users. This feature includes: simultaneous multi-user access to the document to be edited visual indication of passages that are being edited by other users real-time display of changes or synchronization of changes with one button click chat to share ideas concerning particular parts of the document comments with the description of a task or problem that should be solved (it's also possible to work with comments in the offline mode, without connecting to the online version) Connecting to the online version In the desktop editor, open the Connect to cloud option of the left-side menu in the main program window. Connect to your cloud office specifying your account login and password. Co-editing The Document Editor allows you to select one of the two available co-editing modes: Fast is used by default and shows the changes made by other users in real time. Strict is selected to hide changes made by other users until you click the Save icon to save your own changes and accept the changes made by co-authors. The mode can be selected in the Advanced Settings. It's also possible to choose the required mode using the Co-editing Mode icon on the Collaboration tab of the top toolbar: Note: when you co-edit a document in the Fast mode, the possibility to Redo the last undone operation is not available. When a document is being edited by several users simultaneously in the Strict mode, the edited text passages are marked with dashed lines of different colors. By hovering the mouse cursor over one of the edited passages, the name of the user who is editing it at the moment is displayed. The Fast mode will show the actions and the names of the co-editors when they are editing the text. The number of users who are working on the current document is displayed on the right side of the editor header - . If you want to see who exactly is editing the file now, you can click this icon or open the Chat panel with the full list of the users. When no users are viewing or editing the file, the icon in the editor header will look like allowing you to manage the users who have access to the file right from the document: invite new users giving them permissions to edit, read, comment, fill forms or review the document, or deny some users access rights to the file. Click this icon to manage the access to the file; this can be done both when there are no other users who view or co-edit the document at the moment and when there are other users and the icon looks like . It's also possible to set access rights using the Sharing icon at the Collaboration tab of the top toolbar. As soon as one of the users saves his/her changes by clicking the icon, the others will see a note within the status bar stating that they have updates. To save the changes you made, so that other users can view them, and get the updates saved by your co-editors, click the icon in the left upper corner of the top toolbar. The updates will be highlighted for you to check what exactly has been changed. You can specify what changes you want to be highlighted during co-editing if you click the File tab on the top toolbar, select the Advanced Settings... option and choose between none, all and last real-time collaboration changes. Selecting View all changes, all the changes made during the current session will be highlighted. Selecting View last changes, only the changes made since you last time clicked the icon will be highlighted. Selecting View None changes, changes made during the current session will not be highlighted. Chat You can use this tool to coordinate the co-editing process on-the-fly, for example, to distribute tasks and paragraphs to be edited by the collaborators, etc. The chat messages are stored during one session only. To discuss the document content, it is better to use comments which are stored until they are deleted. To access the chat and leave a message for other users, click the icon on the left sidebar, or switch to the Collaboration tab of the top toolbar and click the Chat button, enter your text into the corresponding field below, press the Send button. All the messages left by users will be displayed on the panel on the left. If there are new messages you haven't read yet, the chat icon will look like this - . To close the panel with chat messages, click the icon on the left sidebar or the Chat button at the top toolbar once again. Comments It's possible to work with comments in the offline mode, without connecting to the online version. To leave a comment, select a text passage where you think there is an error or problem, switch to the Insert or Collaboration tab of the top toolbar and click the Comment button, or use the icon on the left sidebar to open the Comments panel and click the Add Comment to Document link, or right-click the selected text passage and select the Add Сomment option from the contextual menu, enter the required text, click the Add Comment/Add button. The comment will be seen on the Comments panel on the left. Any other user can answer the added comment asking questions or reporting on the work he/she has done. For this purpose, click the Add Reply link situated under the comment, type in your reply in the entry field and press the Reply button. If you are using the Strict co-editing mode, new comments added by other users will become visible only after you click the icon in the left upper corner of the top toolbar. The text passage you commented will be highlighted in the document. To view the comment, just click within the passage. If you need to disable this feature, click the File tab at the top toolbar, select the Advanced Settings... option and uncheck the Turn on display of the comments box. In this case the commented passages will be highlighted only if you click the icon. You can manage the added comments using the icons in the comment balloon or on the Comments panel on the left: edit the currently selected comment by clicking the icon, delete the currently selected comment by clicking the icon, close the currently selected discussion by clicking the icon if the task or problem you stated in your comment was solved, after that the discussion you opened with your comment gets the resolved status. To open it again, click the icon. If you want to hide resolved comments, click the File tab on the top toolbar, select the Advanced Settings... option, uncheck the Turn on display of the resolved comments box and click Apply. In this case the resolved comments will be highlighted only if you click the icon. Adding mentions When entering comments, you can use the mentions feature that allows you to attract somebody's attention to the comment and send a notification to the mentioned user via email and Talk. To add a mention enter the \"+\" or \"@\" sign anywhere in the comment text - a list of the portal users will open. To simplify the search process, you can start typing a name in the comment field - the user list will change as you type. Select the necessary person from the list. If the file has not yet been shared with the mentioned user, the Sharing Settings window will open. Read only access type is selected by default. Change it if necessary and click OK. The mentioned user will receive an email notification that he/she has been mentioned in a comment. If the file has been shared, the user will also receive a corresponding notification. To remove comments, click the Remove button on the Collaboration tab of the top toolbar, select the necessary option from the menu: Remove Current Comments - to remove the currently selected comment. If some replies have been added to the comment, all its replies will be removed as well. Remove My Comments - to remove comments you added without removing comments added by other users. If some replies have been added to your comment, all its replies will be removed as well. Remove All Comments - to remove all the comments in the document that you and other users added. To close the panel with comments, click the icon on the left sidebar once again." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/Comparison.htm", "title": "Compare documents", - "body": "Note: this option is available in the paid online version only starting from Document Server v. 5.5. If you need to compare and merge two documents, you can use the document Compare feature. It allows to display the differences between two documents and merge the documents by accepting the changes one by one or all at once. After comparing and merging two documents, the result will be stored on the portal as a new version of the original file. If you do not need to merge documents which are being compared, you can reject all the changes so that the original document remains unchanged. Choose a document for comparison To compare two documents, open the original document that you need to compare and select the second document for comparison: switch to the Collaboration tab at the top toolbar and press the Compare button, select one of the following options to load the document: the Document from File option will open the standard dialog window for file selection. Browse your computer hard disk drive for the necessary .docx file and click the Open button. the Document from URL option will open the window where you can enter a link to the file stored in a third-party web storage (for example, Nextcloud) if you have corresponding access rights to it. The link must be a direct link for downloading the file. When the link is specified, click the OK button. Note: The direct link allows to download the file directly without opening it in a web browser. For example, to get a direct link in Nextcloud, find the necessary document in the file list, select the Details option from the file menu. Click the Copy direct link (only works for users who have access to this file/folder) icon to the right of the file name at the details panel. To find out how to get a direct link for downloading the file in a different third-party web storage, please refer to the corresponding third-party service documentation. the Document from Storage option will open the Select Data Source window. It displays the list of all the .docx documents stored on your portal you have corresponding access rights to. To navigate between the Documents module sections use the menu in the left part of the window. Select the necessary .docx document and click the OK button. When the second document for comparison is selected, the comparison process will start and the document will look as if it was opened in the Review mode. All the changes are highlighted with a color, and you can view the changes, navigate between them, accept or reject them one by one or all the changes at once. It's also possible to change the display mode and see how the document looks before comparison, in the process of comparison, or how it will look after comparison if you accept all changes. Choose the changes display mode Click the Display Mode button at the top toolbar and select one of the available modes from the list: Markup - this option is selected by default. It is used to display the document in the process of comparison. This mode allows both to view the changes and edit the document. Final - this mode is used to display the document after comparison as if all the changes were accepted. This option does not actually accept all changes, it only allows you to see how the document will look like after you accept all the changes. In this mode, you cannot edit the document. Original - this mode is used to display the document before comparison as if all the changes were rejected. This option does not actually reject all changes, it only allows you to view the document without changes. In this mode, you cannot edit the document. Accept or reject changes Use the Previous and the Next buttons at the top toolbar to navigate among the changes. To accept the currently selected change you can: click the Accept button at the top toolbar, or click the downward arrow below the Accept button and select the Accept Current Change option (in this case, the change will be accepted and you will proceed to the next change), or click the Accept button of the change notification. To quickly accept all the changes, click the downward arrow below the Accept button and select the Accept All Changes option. To reject the current change you can: click the Reject button at the top toolbar, or click the downward arrow below the Reject button and select the Reject Current Change option (in this case, the change will be rejected and you will move on to the next available change), or click the Reject button of the change notification. To quickly reject all the changes, click the downward arrow below the Reject button and select the Reject All Changes option. Additional info on the comparison feature Method of the comparison Documents are compared by words. If a word contains a change of at least one character (e.g. if a character was removed or replaced), in the result, the difference will be displayed as the change of the entire word, not the character. The image below illustrates the case when the original file contains the word 'Characters' and the document for comparison contains the word 'Character'. Authorship of the document When the comparison process is launched, the second document for comparison is being loaded and compared to the current one. If the loaded document contains some data which is not represented in the original document, the data will be marked as added by a reviewer. If the original document contains some data which is not represented in the loaded document, the data will be marked as deleted by a reviewer. If the authors of the original and loaded documents are the same person, the reviewer is the same user. His/her name is displayed in the change balloon. If the authors of two files are different users, then the author of the second file loaded for comparison is the author of the added/removed changes. Presence of the tracked changes in the compared document If the original document contains some changes made in the review mode, they will be accepted in the comparison process. When you choose the second file for comparison, you'll see the corresponding warning message. In this case, when you choose the Original display mode, the document will not contain any changes." + "body": "Note: this option is available in the paid online version only starting from Document Server v. 5.5. If you need to compare and merge two documents, you can use the document Compare feature. It allows displaying the differences between two documents and merge the documents by accepting the changes one by one or all at once. After comparing and merging two documents, the result will be stored on the portal as a new version of the original file. If you do not need to merge documents which are being compared, you can reject all the changes so that the original document remains unchanged. Choose a document for comparison To compare two documents, open the original document that you need to compare and select the second document for comparison: switch to the Collaboration tab on the top toolbar and press the Compare button, select one of the following options to load the document: the Document from File option will open the standard dialog window for file selection. Browse your computer hard disk drive for the necessary .docx file and click the Open button. the Document from URL option will open the window where you can enter a link to the file stored in a third-party web storage (for example, Nextcloud) if you have corresponding access rights to it. The link must be a direct link for downloading the file. When the link is specified, click the OK button. Note: The direct link allows downloading the file directly without opening it in a web browser. For example, to get a direct link in Nextcloud, find the necessary document in the file list, select the Details option from the file menu. Click the Copy direct link (only works for users who have access to this file/folder) icon on the right of the file name on the details panel. To find out how to get a direct link for downloading the file in a different third-party web storage, please refer to the corresponding third-party service documentation. the Document from Storage option will open the Select Data Source window. It displays the list of all the .docx documents stored on your portal you have corresponding access rights to. To navigate through the sections of the Documents module, use the menu on the left part of the window. Select the necessary .docx document and click the OK button. When the second document for comparison is selected, the comparison process will start and the document will look as if it was opened in the Review mode. All the changes are highlighted with a color, and you can view the changes, navigate between them, accept or reject them one by one or all the changes at once. It's also possible to change the display mode and see how the document looks before comparison, in the process of comparison, or how it will look after comparison if you accept all changes. Choose the changes display mode Click the Display Mode button on the top toolbar and select one of the available modes from the list: Markup - this option is selected by default. It is used to display the document in the process of comparison. This mode allows both viewing the changes and editing the document. Final - this mode is used to display the document after comparison as if all the changes were accepted. This option does not actually accept all changes, it only allows you to see how the document will look like after you accept all the changes. In this mode, you cannot edit the document. Original - this mode is used to display the document before comparison as if all the changes were rejected. This option does not actually reject all changes, it only allows you to view the document without changes. In this mode, you cannot edit the document. Accept or reject changes Use the Previous and the Next buttons on the top toolbar to navigate through the changes. To accept the currently selected change, you can: click the Accept button on the top toolbar, or click the downward arrow below the Accept button and select the Accept Current Change option (in this case, the change will be accepted and you will proceed to the next change), or click the Accept button of the change pop-up window. To quickly accept all the changes, click the downward arrow below the Accept button and select the Accept All Changes option. To reject the current change you can: click the Reject button on the top toolbar, or click the downward arrow below the Reject button and select the Reject Current Change option (in this case, the change will be rejected and you will move on to the next available change), or click the Reject button of the change pop-up window. To quickly reject all the changes, click the downward arrow below the Reject button and select the Reject All Changes option. Additional info on the comparison feature Method of comparison Documents are compared by words. If a word contains a change of at least one character (e.g. if a character was removed or replaced), in the result, the difference will be displayed as the change of the entire word, not the character. The image below illustrates the case when the original file contains the word 'Characters' and the document for comparison contains the word 'Character'. Authorship of the document When the comparison process is launched, the second document for comparison is being loaded and compared to the current one. If the loaded document contains some data which is not represented in the original document, the data will be marked as added by a reviewer. If the original document contains some data which is not represented in the loaded document, the data will be marked as deleted by a reviewer. If the authors of the original and loaded documents are the same person, the reviewer is the same user. His/her name is displayed in the change balloon. If the authors of two files are different users, then the author of the second file loaded for comparison is the author of the added/removed changes. Presence of the tracked changes in the compared document If the original document contains some changes made in the review mode, they will be accepted in the comparison process. When you choose the second file for comparison, you'll see the corresponding warning message. In this case, when you choose the Original display mode, the document will not contain any changes." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm", "title": "Keyboard Shortcuts", - "body": "Windows/LinuxMac OS Working with Document Open 'File' panel Alt+F ⌥ Option+F Open the File panel to save, download, print the current document, view its info, create a new document or open an existing one, access Document Editor help or advanced settings. Open 'Find and Replace' dialog box Ctrl+F ^ Ctrl+F, ⌘ Cmd+F Open the Find and Replace dialog box to start searching for a character/word/phrase in the currently edited document. Open 'Find and Replace' dialog box with replacement field Ctrl+H ^ Ctrl+H Open the Find and Replace dialog box with the replacement field to replace one or more occurrences of the found characters. Repeat the last 'Find' action ⇧ Shift+F4 ⇧ Shift+F4, ⌘ Cmd+G, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+F4 Repeat the Find action which has been performed before the key combination press. Open 'Comments' panel Ctrl+⇧ Shift+H ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+H, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+H Open the Comments panel to add your own comment or reply to other users' comments. Open comment field Alt+H ⌥ Option+H Open a data entry field where you can add the text of your comment. Open 'Chat' panel Alt+Q ⌥ Option+Q Open the Chat panel and send a message. Save document Ctrl+S ^ Ctrl+S, ⌘ Cmd+S Save all the changes to the document currently edited with Document Editor. The active file will be saved with its current file name, location, and file format. Print document Ctrl+P ^ Ctrl+P, ⌘ Cmd+P Print the document with one of the available printers or save it to a file. Download As... Ctrl+⇧ Shift+S ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+S, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+S Open the Download as... panel to save the currently edited document to the computer hard disk drive in one of the supported formats: DOCX, PDF, ODT, TXT, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, HTML. Full screen F11 Switch to the full screen view to fit Document Editor into your screen. Help menu F1 F1 Open Document Editor Help menu. Open existing file (Desktop Editors) Ctrl+O On the Open local file tab in Desktop Editors, opens the standard dialog box that allows to select an existing file. Close file (Desktop Editors) Ctrl+W, Ctrl+F4 ^ Ctrl+W, ⌘ Cmd+W Close the current document window in Desktop Editors. Element contextual menu ⇧ Shift+F10 ⇧ Shift+F10 Open the selected element contextual menu. Navigation Jump to the beginning of the line Home Home Put the cursor to the beginning of the currently edited line. Jump to the beginning of the document Ctrl+Home ^ Ctrl+Home Put the cursor to the very beginning of the currently edited document. Jump to the end of the line End End Put the cursor to the end of the currently edited line. Jump to the end of the document Ctrl+End ^ Ctrl+End Put the cursor to the very end of the currently edited document. Jump to the beginning of the previous page Alt+Ctrl+Page Up Put the cursor to the very beginning of the page which preceeds the currently edited one. Jump to the beginning of the next page Alt+Ctrl+Page Down ⌥ Option+⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+Page Down Put the cursor to the very beginning of the page which follows the currently edited one. Scroll down Page Down Page Down, ⌥ Option+Fn+↑ Scroll the document approximately one visible page down. Scroll up Page Up Page Up, ⌥ Option+Fn+↓ Scroll the document approximately one visible page up. Next page Alt+Page Down ⌥ Option+Page Down Go to the next page in the currently edited document. Previous page Alt+Page Up ⌥ Option+Page Up Go to the previous page in the currently edited document. Zoom In Ctrl++ ^ Ctrl+=, ⌘ Cmd+= Zoom in the currently edited document. Zoom Out Ctrl+- ^ Ctrl+-, ⌘ Cmd+- Zoom out the currently edited document. Move one character to the left ← ← Move the cursor one character to the left. Move one character to the right → → Move the cursor one character to the right. Move to the beginning of a word or one word to the left Ctrl+← ^ Ctrl+←, ⌘ Cmd+← Move the cursor to the beginning of a word or one word to the left. Move one word to the right Ctrl+→ ^ Ctrl+→, ⌘ Cmd+→ Move the cursor one word to the right. Move one line up ↑ ↑ Move the cursor one line up. Move one line down ↓ ↓ Move the cursor one line down. Writing End paragraph ↵ Enter ↵ Return End the current paragraph and start a new one. Add line break ⇧ Shift+↵ Enter ⇧ Shift+↵ Return Add a line break without starting a new paragraph. Delete ← Backspace, Delete ← Backspace, Delete Delete one character to the left (← Backspace) or to the right (Delete) of the cursor. Delete word to the left of cursor Ctrl+← Backspace ^ Ctrl+← Backspace, ⌘ Cmd+← Backspace Delete one word to the left of the cursor. Delete word to the right of cursor Ctrl+Delete ^ Ctrl+Delete, ⌘ Cmd+Delete Delete one word to the right of the cursor. Create nonbreaking space Ctrl+⇧ Shift+␣ Spacebar ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+␣ Spacebar Create a space between characters which cannot be used to start a new line. Create nonbreaking hyphen Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Hyphen ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Hyphen Create a hyphen between characters which cannot be used to start a new line. Undo and Redo Undo Ctrl+Z ^ Ctrl+Z, ⌘ Cmd+Z Reverse the latest performed action. Redo Ctrl+Y ^ Ctrl+Y, ⌘ Cmd+Y, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+Z Repeat the latest undone action. Cut, Copy, and Paste Cut Ctrl+X, ⇧ Shift+Delete ⌘ Cmd+X, ⇧ Shift+Delete Delete the selected text fragment and send it to the computer clipboard memory. The copied text can be later inserted to another place in the same document, into another document, or into some other program. Copy Ctrl+C, Ctrl+Insert ⌘ Cmd+C Send the selected text fragment to the computer clipboard memory. The copied text can be later inserted to another place in the same document, into another document, or into some other program. Paste Ctrl+V, ⇧ Shift+Insert ⌘ Cmd+V Insert the previously copied text fragment from the computer clipboard memory to the current cursor position. The text can be previously copied from the same document, from another document, or from some other program. Insert hyperlink Ctrl+K ⌘ Cmd+K Insert a hyperlink which can be used to go to a web address. Copy style Ctrl+⇧ Shift+C ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+C Copy the formatting from the selected fragment of the currently edited text. The copied formatting can be later applied to another text fragment in the same document. Apply style Ctrl+⇧ Shift+V ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+V Apply the previously copied formatting to the text in the currently edited document. Text Selection Select all Ctrl+A ⌘ Cmd+A Select all the document text with tables and images. Select fragment ⇧ Shift+→ ← ⇧ Shift+→ ← Select the text character by character. Select from cursor to beginning of line ⇧ Shift+Home ⇧ Shift+Home Select a text fragment from the cursor to the beginning of the current line. Select from cursor to end of line ⇧ Shift+End ⇧ Shift+End Select a text fragment from the cursor to the end of the current line. Select one character to the right ⇧ Shift+→ ⇧ Shift+→ Select one character to the right of the cursor position. Select one character to the left ⇧ Shift+← ⇧ Shift+← Select one character to the left of the cursor position. Select to the end of a word Ctrl+⇧ Shift+→ Select a text fragment from the cursor to the end of a word. Select to the beginning of a word Ctrl+⇧ Shift+← Select a text fragment from the cursor to the beginning of a word. Select one line up ⇧ Shift+↑ ⇧ Shift+↑ Select one line up (with the cursor at the beginning of a line). Select one line down ⇧ Shift+↓ ⇧ Shift+↓ Select one line down (with the cursor at the beginning of a line). Select the page up ⇧ Shift+Page Up ⇧ Shift+Page Up Select the page part from the cursor position to the upper part of the screen. Select the page down ⇧ Shift+Page Down ⇧ Shift+Page Down Select the page part from the cursor position to the lower part of the screen. Text Styling Bold Ctrl+B ^ Ctrl+B, ⌘ Cmd+B Make the font of the selected text fragment bold giving it more weight. Italic Ctrl+I ^ Ctrl+I, ⌘ Cmd+I Make the font of the selected text fragment italicized giving it some right side tilt. Underline Ctrl+U ^ Ctrl+U, ⌘ Cmd+U Make the selected text fragment underlined with the line going under the letters. Strikeout Ctrl+5 ^ Ctrl+5, ⌘ Cmd+5 Make the selected text fragment struck out with the line going through the letters. Subscript Ctrl+. ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+>, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+> Make the selected text fragment smaller and place it to the lower part of the text line, e.g. as in chemical formulas. Superscript Ctrl+, ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+<, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+< Make the selected text fragment smaller and place it to the upper part of the text line, e.g. as in fractions. Heading 1 style Alt+1 ⌥ Option+^ Ctrl+1 Apply the style of the heading 1 to the selected text fragment. Heading 2 style Alt+2 ⌥ Option+^ Ctrl+2 Apply the style of the heading 2 to the selected text fragment. Heading 3 style Alt+3 ⌥ Option+^ Ctrl+3 Apply the style of the heading 3 to the selected text fragment. Bulleted list Ctrl+⇧ Shift+L ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+L, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+L Create an unordered bulleted list from the selected text fragment or start a new one. Remove formatting Ctrl+␣ Spacebar Remove formatting from the selected text fragment. Increase font Ctrl+] ⌘ Cmd+] Increase the size of the font for the selected text fragment 1 point. Decrease font Ctrl+[ ⌘ Cmd+[ Decrease the size of the font for the selected text fragment 1 point. Align center/left Ctrl+E ^ Ctrl+E, ⌘ Cmd+E Switch a paragraph between centered and left-aligned. Align justified/left Ctrl+J, Ctrl+L ^ Ctrl+J, ⌘ Cmd+J Switch a paragraph between justified and left-aligned. Align right/left Ctrl+R ^ Ctrl+R Switch a paragraph between right-aligned and left-aligned. Apply subscript formatting (automatic spacing) Ctrl+= Apply subscript formatting to the selected text fragment. Apply superscript formatting (automatic spacing) Ctrl+⇧ Shift++ Apply superscript formatting to the selected text fragment. Insert page break Ctrl+↵ Enter ^ Ctrl+↵ Return Insert a page break at the current cursor position. Increase indent Ctrl+M ^ Ctrl+M Indent a paragraph from the left incrementally. Decrease indent Ctrl+⇧ Shift+M ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+M Remove a paragraph indent from the left incrementally. Add page number Ctrl+⇧ Shift+P ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+P Add the current page number at the current cursor position. Nonprinting characters Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Num8 Show or hide the display of nonprinting characters. Delete one character to the left ← Backspace ← Backspace Delete one character to the left of the cursor. Delete one character to the right Delete Delete Delete one character to the right of the cursor. Modifying Objects Constrain movement ⇧ Shift + drag ⇧ Shift + drag Constrain the movement of the selected object horizontally or vertically. Set 15-degree rotation ⇧ Shift + drag (when rotating) ⇧ Shift + drag (when rotating) Constrain the rotation angle to 15-degree increments. Maintain proportions ⇧ Shift + drag (when resizing) ⇧ Shift + drag (when resizing) Maintain the proportions of the selected object when resizing. Draw straight line or arrow ⇧ Shift + drag (when drawing lines/arrows) ⇧ Shift + drag (when drawing lines/arrows) Draw a straight vertical/horizontal/45-degree line or arrow. Movement by one-pixel increments Ctrl+← → ↑ ↓ Hold down the Ctrl key and use the keybord arrows to move the selected object by one pixel at a time. Working with Tables Move to the next cell in a row ↹ Tab ↹ Tab Go to the next cell in a table row. Move to the previous cell in a row ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Go to the previous cell in a table row. Move to the next row ↓ ↓ Go to the next row in a table. Move to the previous row ↑ ↑ Go to the previous row in a table. Start new paragraph ↵ Enter ↵ Return Start a new paragraph within a cell. Add new row ↹ Tab in the lower right table cell. ↹ Tab in the lower right table cell. Add a new row at the bottom of the table. Inserting special characters Insert formula Alt+= Insert a formula at the current cursor position." + "body": "Windows/LinuxMac OS Working with Document Open 'File' panel Alt+F ⌥ Option+F Open the File panel panel to save, download, print the current document, view its info, create a new document or open an existing one, access the Document Editor Help Center or advanced settings. Open 'Find and Replace' dialog box Ctrl+F ^ Ctrl+F, ⌘ Cmd+F Open the Find and Replace dialog box to start searching for a character/word/phrase in the currently edited document. Open 'Find and Replace' dialog box with replacement field Ctrl+H ^ Ctrl+H Open the Find and Replace dialog box with the replacement field to replace one or more occurrences of the found characters. Repeat the last 'Find' action ⇧ Shift+F4 ⇧ Shift+F4, ⌘ Cmd+G, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+F4 Repeat the previous Find performed before the key combination was pressed. Open 'Comments' panel Ctrl+⇧ Shift+H ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+H, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+H Open the Comments panel to add your own comment or reply to other users' comments. Open comment field Alt+H ⌥ Option+H Open a data entry field where you can add the text of your comment. Open 'Chat' panel Alt+Q ⌥ Option+Q Open the Chat panel and send a message. Save document Ctrl+S ^ Ctrl+S, ⌘ Cmd+S Save all the changes to the document currently edited with The Document Editor. The active file will be saved with its current file name, location, and file format. Print document Ctrl+P ^ Ctrl+P, ⌘ Cmd+P Print the document with one of the available printers or save it as a file. Download As... Ctrl+⇧ Shift+S ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+S, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+S Open the Download as... panel to save the currently edited document to the hard disk drive of your computer in one of the supported formats: DOCX, PDF, ODT, TXT, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, HTML. Full screen F11 Switch to the full screen view to fit the Document Editor into your screen. Help menu F1 F1 Open the Document Editor Help menu. Open existing file (Desktop Editors) Ctrl+O On the Open local file tab in the Desktop Editors, opens the standard dialog box that allows to select an existing file. Close file (Desktop Editors) Ctrl+W, Ctrl+F4 ^ Ctrl+W, ⌘ Cmd+W Close the current document window in the Desktop Editors. Element contextual menu ⇧ Shift+F10 ⇧ Shift+F10 Open the selected element contextual menu. Reset the ‘Zoom’ parameter Ctrl+0 ^ Ctrl+0 or ⌘ Cmd+0 Reset the ‘Zoom’ parameter of the current document to a default 100%. Navigation Jump to the beginning of the line Home Home Put the cursor to the beginning of the currently edited line. Jump to the beginning of the document Ctrl+Home ^ Ctrl+Home Put the cursor to the very beginning of the currently edited document. Jump to the end of the line End End Put the cursor to the end of the currently edited line. Jump to the end of the document Ctrl+End ^ Ctrl+End Put the cursor to the very end of the currently edited document. Jump to the beginning of the previous page Alt+Ctrl+Page Up Put the cursor to the very beginning of the page which preceeds the currently edited one. Jump to the beginning of the next page Alt+Ctrl+Page Down ⌥ Option+⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+Page Down Put the cursor to the very beginning of the page which follows the currently edited one. Scroll down Page Down Page Down, ⌥ Option+Fn+↑ Scroll the document approximately one visible page down. Scroll up Page Up Page Up, ⌥ Option+Fn+↓ Scroll the document approximately one visible page up. Next page Alt+Page Down ⌥ Option+Page Down Go to the next page in the currently edited document. Previous page Alt+Page Up ⌥ Option+Page Up Go to the previous page in the currently edited document. Zoom In Ctrl++ ^ Ctrl+=, ⌘ Cmd+= Zoom in the currently edited document. Zoom Out Ctrl+- ^ Ctrl+-, ⌘ Cmd+- Zoom out the currently edited document. Move one character to the left ← ← Move the cursor one character to the left. Move one character to the right → → Move the cursor one character to the right. Move to the beginning of a word or one word to the left Ctrl+← ^ Ctrl+←, ⌘ Cmd+← Move the cursor to the beginning of a word or one word to the left. Move one word to the right Ctrl+→ ^ Ctrl+→, ⌘ Cmd+→ Move the cursor one word to the right. Move one line up ↑ ↑ Move the cursor one line up. Move one line down ↓ ↓ Move the cursor one line down. Writing End paragraph ↵ Enter ↵ Return End the current paragraph and start a new one. Add line break ⇧ Shift+↵ Enter ⇧ Shift+↵ Return Add a line break without starting a new paragraph. Delete ← Backspace, Delete ← Backspace, Delete Delete one character to the left (← Backspace) or to the right (Delete) of the cursor. Delete word to the left of cursor Ctrl+← Backspace ^ Ctrl+← Backspace, ⌘ Cmd+← Backspace Delete one word to the left of the cursor. Delete word to the right of cursor Ctrl+Delete ^ Ctrl+Delete, ⌘ Cmd+Delete Delete one word to the right of the cursor. Create nonbreaking space Ctrl+⇧ Shift+␣ Spacebar ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+␣ Spacebar Create a space between characters which cannot be used to start a new line. Create nonbreaking hyphen Ctrl+⇧ Shift+_ ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Hyphen Create a hyphen between characters which cannot be used to start a new line. Undo and Redo Undo Ctrl+Z ^ Ctrl+Z, ⌘ Cmd+Z Reverse the latest performed action. Redo Ctrl+Y ^ Ctrl+Y, ⌘ Cmd+Y, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+Z Repeat the latest undone action. Cut, Copy, and Paste Cut Ctrl+X, ⇧ Shift+Delete ⌘ Cmd+X, ⇧ Shift+Delete Delete the selected text fragment and send it to the computer clipboard memory. The copied text can be later inserted to another place in the same document, into another document, or into some other program. Copy Ctrl+C, Ctrl+Insert ⌘ Cmd+C Send the selected text fragment to the computer clipboard memory. The copied text can be later inserted to another place in the same document, into another document, or into some other program. Paste Ctrl+V, ⇧ Shift+Insert ⌘ Cmd+V Insert the previously copied text fragment from the computer clipboard memory to the current cursor position. The text can be previously copied from the same document, from another document, or from some other program. Insert hyperlink Ctrl+K ⌘ Cmd+K Insert a hyperlink which can be used to go to a web address. Copy style Ctrl+⇧ Shift+C ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+C Copy the formatting from the selected fragment of the currently edited text. The copied formatting can be later applied to another text fragment in the same document. Apply style Ctrl+⇧ Shift+V ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+V Apply the previously copied formatting to the text in the currently edited document. Text Selection Select all Ctrl+A ⌘ Cmd+A Select all the document text with tables and images. Select fragment ⇧ Shift+→ ← ⇧ Shift+→ ← Select the text character by character. Select from cursor to beginning of line ⇧ Shift+Home ⇧ Shift+Home Select a text fragment from the cursor to the beginning of the current line. Select from cursor to end of line ⇧ Shift+End ⇧ Shift+End Select a text fragment from the cursor to the end of the current line. Select one character to the right ⇧ Shift+→ ⇧ Shift+→ Select one character to the right of the cursor position. Select one character to the left ⇧ Shift+← ⇧ Shift+← Select one character to the left of the cursor position. Select to the end of a word Ctrl+⇧ Shift+→ Select a text fragment from the cursor to the end of a word. Select to the beginning of a word Ctrl+⇧ Shift+← Select a text fragment from the cursor to the beginning of a word. Select one line up ⇧ Shift+↑ ⇧ Shift+↑ Select one line up (with the cursor at the beginning of a line). Select one line down ⇧ Shift+↓ ⇧ Shift+↓ Select one line down (with the cursor at the beginning of a line). Select the page up ⇧ Shift+Page Up ⇧ Shift+Page Up Select the page part from the cursor position to the upper part of the screen. Select the page down ⇧ Shift+Page Down ⇧ Shift+Page Down Select the page part from the cursor position to the lower part of the screen. Text Styling Bold Ctrl+B ^ Ctrl+B, ⌘ Cmd+B Make the font of the selected text fragment darker and heavier than normal. Italic Ctrl+I ^ Ctrl+I, ⌘ Cmd+I Make the font of the selected text fragment italicized and slightly slanted. Underline Ctrl+U ^ Ctrl+U, ⌘ Cmd+U Make the selected text fragment underlined with a line going below the letters. Strikeout Ctrl+5 ^ Ctrl+5, ⌘ Cmd+5 Make the selected text fragment struck out with a line going through the letters. Subscript Ctrl+. ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+>, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+> Make the selected text fragment smaller and place it to the lower part of the text line, e.g. as in chemical formulas. Superscript Ctrl+, ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+<, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+< Make the selected text fragment smaller and place it to the upper part of the text line, e.g. as in fractions. Heading 1 style Alt+1 ⌥ Option+^ Ctrl+1 Apply the style of the heading 1 to the selected text fragment. Heading 2 style Alt+2 ⌥ Option+^ Ctrl+2 Apply the style of the heading 2 to the selected text fragment. Heading 3 style Alt+3 ⌥ Option+^ Ctrl+3 Apply the style of the heading 3 to the selected text fragment. Bulleted list Ctrl+⇧ Shift+L ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+L, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+L Create an unordered bulleted list from the selected text fragment or start a new one. Remove formatting Ctrl+␣ Spacebar Remove formatting from the selected text fragment. Increase font Ctrl+] ⌘ Cmd+] Increase the size of the font for the selected text fragment 1 point. Decrease font Ctrl+[ ⌘ Cmd+[ Decrease the size of the font for the selected text fragment 1 point. Align center/left Ctrl+E ^ Ctrl+E, ⌘ Cmd+E Switch a paragraph between centered and left-aligned. Align justified/left Ctrl+J, Ctrl+L ^ Ctrl+J, ⌘ Cmd+J Switch a paragraph between justified and left-aligned. Align right/left Ctrl+R ^ Ctrl+R Switch a paragraph between right-aligned and left-aligned. Apply subscript formatting (automatic spacing) Ctrl+= Apply subscript formatting to the selected text fragment. Apply superscript formatting (automatic spacing) Ctrl+⇧ Shift++ Apply superscript formatting to the selected text fragment. Insert page break Ctrl+↵ Enter ^ Ctrl+↵ Return Insert a page break at the current cursor position. Increase indent Ctrl+M ^ Ctrl+M Indent a paragraph from the left incrementally. Decrease indent Ctrl+⇧ Shift+M ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+M Remove a paragraph indent from the left incrementally. Add page number Ctrl+⇧ Shift+P ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+P Add the current page number at the current cursor position. Nonprinting characters Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Num8 Show or hide the display of nonprinting characters. Delete one character to the left ← Backspace ← Backspace Delete one character to the left of the cursor. Delete one character to the right Delete Delete Delete one character to the right of the cursor. Modifying Objects Constrain movement ⇧ Shift + drag ⇧ Shift + drag Constrain the movement of the selected object horizontally or vertically. Set 15-degree rotation ⇧ Shift + drag (when rotating) ⇧ Shift + drag (when rotating) Constrain the rotation angle to 15-degree increments. Maintain proportions ⇧ Shift + drag (when resizing) ⇧ Shift + drag (when resizing) Maintain the proportions of the selected object when resizing. Draw straight line or arrow ⇧ Shift + drag (when drawing lines/arrows) ⇧ Shift + drag (when drawing lines/arrows) Draw a straight vertical/horizontal/45-degree line or arrow. Movement by one-pixel increments Ctrl+← → ↑ ↓ Hold down the Ctrl key and use the keybord arrows to move the selected object by one pixel at a time. Working with Tables Move to the next cell in a row ↹ Tab ↹ Tab Go to the next cell in a table row. Move to the previous cell in a row ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Go to the previous cell in a table row. Move to the next row ↓ ↓ Go to the next row in a table. Move to the previous row ↑ ↑ Go to the previous row in a table. Start new paragraph ↵ Enter ↵ Return Start a new paragraph within a cell. Add new row ↹ Tab in the lower right table cell. ↹ Tab in the lower right table cell. Add a new row at the bottom of the table. Inserting special characters Insert formula Alt+= Insert a formula at the current cursor position. Insert an em dash Alt+Ctrl+Num- Insert an em dash ‘—’ within the current document and to the right of the cursor. Insert a non-breaking hyphen Ctrl+⇧ Shift+_ ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Hyphen Insert a non-breaking hyphen ‘-’ within the current document and to the right of the cursor. Insert a no-break space Ctrl+⇧ Shift+␣ Spacebar ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+␣ Spacebar Insert a no-break space ‘o’ within the current document and to the right of the cursor." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm", "title": "View Settings and Navigation Tools", - "body": "Document Editor offers several tools to help you view and navigate through your document: zoom, page number indicator etc. Adjust the View Settings To adjust default view settings and set the most convenient mode to work with the document, click the View settings icon on the right side of the editor header and select which interface elements you want to be hidden or shown. You can select the following options from the View settings drop-down list: Hide Toolbar - hides the top toolbar that contains commands while tabs remain visible. When this option is enabled, you can click any tab to display the toolbar. The toolbar is displayed until you click anywhere outside it. To disable this mode, click the View settings icon and click the Hide Toolbar option once again. The top toolbar will be displayed all the time. Note: alternatively, you can just double-click any tab to hide the top toolbar or display it again. Hide Status Bar - hides the bottommost bar where the Page Number Indicator and Zoom buttons are situated. To show the hidden Status Bar click this option once again. Hide Rulers - hides rulers which are used to align text, graphics, tables, and other elements in a document, set up margins, tab stops, and paragraph indents. To show the hidden Rulers click this option once again. The right sidebar is minimized by default. To expand it, select any object (e.g. image, chart, shape) or text passage and click the icon of the currently activated tab on the right. To minimize the right sidebar, click the icon once again. When the Comments or Chat panel is opened, the left sidebar width is adjusted by simple drag-and-drop: move the mouse cursor over the left sidebar border so that it turns into the bidirectional arrow and drag the border to the right to extend the sidebar width. To restore its original width move the border to the left. Use the Navigation Tools To navigate through your document, use the following tools: The Zoom buttons are situated in the right lower corner and are used to zoom in and out the current document. To change the currently selected zoom value that is displayed in percent, click it and select one of the available zoom options from the list or use the Zoom in or Zoom out buttons. Click the Fit width icon to fit the document page width to the visible part of the working area. To fit the whole document page to the visible part of the working area, click the Fit page icon. Zoom settings are also available in the View settings drop-down list that can be useful if you decide to hide the Status Bar. The Page Number Indicator shows the current page as a part of all the pages in the current document (page 'n' of 'nn'). Click this caption to open the window where you can enter the page number and quickly go to it." + "body": "The Document Editor offers several tools to help you view and navigate through your document: zoom, page number indicator etc. Adjust the View Settings To adjust default view settings and set the most convenient mode to work with the document, click the View settings icon on the right side of the editor header and select which interface elements you want to be hidden or shown. You can select the following options from the View settings drop-down list: Hide Toolbar - hides the top toolbar that contains commands while tabs remain visible. When this option is enabled, you can click any tab to display the toolbar. The toolbar is displayed until you click anywhere outside it. To disable this mode, click the View settings icon and click the Hide Toolbar option once again. The top toolbar will be displayed all the time. Note: alternatively, you can just double-click any tab to hide the top toolbar or display it again. Hide Status Bar - hides the bottommost bar where the Page Number Indicator and Zoom buttons are situated. To show the hidden Status Bar click this option once again. Hide Rulers - hides rulers which are used to align text, graphics, tables, and other elements in a document, set up margins, tab stops, and paragraph indents. To show the hidden Rulers click this option once again. The right sidebar is minimized by default. To expand it, select any object (e.g. image, chart, shape) or text passage and click the icon of the currently activated tab on the right. To minimize the right sidebar, click the icon once again. When the Comments or Chat panel is opened, the width of the left sidebar is adjusted by simple drag-and-drop: move the mouse cursor over the left sidebar border so that it turns into the bidirectional arrow and drag the border to the right to extend the width of the sidebar. To restore its original width, move the border to the left. Use the Navigation Tools To navigate through your document, use the following tools: The Zoom buttons are situated in the right lower corner and are used to zoom in and out the current document. To change the currently selected zoom value that is displayed in percent, click it and select one of the available zoom options from the list or use the Zoom in or Zoom out buttons. Click the Fit width icon to fit the document page width to the visible part of the working area. To fit the whole document page to the visible part of the working area, click the Fit page icon. Zoom settings are also available in the View settings drop-down list that can be useful if you decide to hide the Status Bar. The Page Number Indicator shows the current page as a part of all the pages in the current document (page 'n' of 'nn'). Click this caption to open the window where you can enter the page number and quickly go to it." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/Review.htm", "title": "Document Review", - "body": "When somebody shares a file with you that has review permissions, you need to use the document Review feature. If you are the reviewer, then you can use the Review option to review the document, change the sentences, phrases and other page elements, correct spelling, and do other things to the document without actually editing it. All your changes will be recorded and shown to the person who sent the document to you. If you are the person who sends the file for the review, you will need to display all the changes which were made to it, view and either accept or reject them. Enable the Track Changes feature To see changes suggested by a reviewer, enable the Track Changes option in one of the following ways: click the button in the right lower corner at the status bar, or switch to the Collaboration tab at the top toolbar and press the Track Changes button. Note: it is not necessary for the reviewer to enable the Track Changes option. It is enabled by default and cannot be disabled when the document is shared with review only access rights. Choose the changes display mode Click the Display Mode button at the top toolbar and select one of the available modes from the list: Markup - this option is selected by default. It allows both to view suggested changes and edit the document. Final - this mode is used to display all the changes as if they were accepted. This option does not actually accept all changes, it only allows you to see how the document will look like after you accept all the changes. In this mode, you cannot edit the document. Original - this mode is used to display all the changes as if they were rejected. This option does not actually reject all changes, it only allows you to view the document without changes. In this mode, you cannot edit the document. Accept or reject changes Use the Previous and the Next buttons at the top toolbar to navigate among the changes. To accept the currently selected change you can: click the Accept button at the top toolbar, or click the downward arrow below the Accept button and select the Accept Current Change option (in this case, the change will be accepted and you will proceed to the next change), or click the Accept button of the change notification. To quickly accept all the changes, click the downward arrow below the Accept button and select the Accept All Changes option. To reject the current change you can: click the Reject button at the top toolbar, or click the downward arrow below the Reject button and select the Reject Current Change option (in this case, the change will be rejected and you will move on to the next available change), or click the Reject button of the change notification. To quickly reject all the changes, click the downward arrow below the Reject button and select the Reject All Changes option. Note: if you review the document the Accept and Reject options are not available for you. You can delete your changes using the icon within the change balloon." + "body": "When somebody shares a file with you using the review permissions, you need to apply the document Review feature. As a reviewer, you can use the Review option to review the document, change the sentences, phrases and other page elements, correct spelling, etc. without actually editing it. All your changes will be recorded and shown to the person who sent you the document. If you send the file for review, you will need to display all the changes which were made to it, view and either accept or reject them. Enable the Track Changes feature To see changes suggested by a reviewer, enable the Track Changes option in one of the following ways: click the button in the right lower corner on the status bar, or switch to the Collaboration tab on the top toolbar and press the Track Changes button. Note: it is not necessary for the reviewer to enable the Track Changes option. It is enabled by default and cannot be disabled when the document is shared with review only access rights. View changes Changes made by a user are highlighted with a specific color in the document text. When you click on the changed text, a pop-up window opens which displays the user name, the date and time when the change has been made, and the change description. The pop-up window also contains icons used to accept or reject the current change. If you drag and drop a piece of text to some other place in the document, the text in a new position will be underlined with the double line. The text in the original position will be double-crossed. This will count as a single change. Click the double-crossed text in the original position and use the arrow in the change pop-up window to go to the new location of the text. Click the double-underlined text in the new position and use the arrow in the change pop-up window to go to to the original location of the text. Choose the changes display mode Click the Display Mode button on the top toolbar and select one of the available modes from the list: Markup - this option is selected by default. It allows both viewing the suggested changes and editing the document. Final - this mode is used to display all the changes as if they were accepted. This option does not actually accept all changes, it only allows you to see how the document will look like after you accept all the changes. In this mode, you cannot edit the document. Original - this mode is used to display all the changes as if they were rejected. This option does not actually reject all changes, it only allows you to view the document without changes. In this mode, you cannot edit the document. Accept or reject changes Use the Previous and the Next buttons on the top toolbar to navigate through the changes. To accept the currently selected change you can: click the Accept button on the top toolbar, or click the downward arrow below the Accept button and select the Accept Current Change option (in this case, the change will be accepted and you will proceed to the next change), or click the Accept button of the change pop-up window. To quickly accept all the changes, click the downward arrow below the Accept button and select the Accept All Changes option. To reject the current change you can: click the Reject button on the top toolbar, or click the downward arrow below the Reject button and select the Reject Current Change option (in this case, the change will be rejected and you will move on to the next available change), or click the Reject button of the change pop-up window. To quickly reject all the changes, click the downward arrow below the Reject button and select the Reject All Changes option. Note: if you review the document, the Accept and Reject options are not available for you. You can delete your changes using the icon within the change balloon." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/Search.htm", "title": "Search and Replace Function", - "body": "To search for the needed characters, words or phrases used in the currently edited document, click the icon situated at the left sidebar or use the Ctrl+F key combination. The Find and Replace window will open: Type in your inquiry into the corresponding data entry field. Specify search parameters by clicking the icon and checking the necessary options: Case sensitive - is used to find only the occurrences typed in the same case as your inquiry (e.g. if your inquiry is 'Editor' and this option is selected, such words as 'editor' or 'EDITOR' etc. will not be found). To disable this option click it once again. Highlight results - is used to highlight all found occurrences at once. To disable this option and remove the highlight click the option once again. Click one of the arrow buttons at the bottom right corner of the window. The search will be performed either towards the beginning of the document (if you click the button) or towards the end of the document (if you click the button) from the current position. Note: when the Highlight results option is enabled, use these buttons to navigate through the highlighted results. The first occurrence of the required characters in the selected direction will be highlighted on the page. If it is not the word you are looking for, click the selected button again to find the next occurrence of the characters you entered. To replace one or more occurrences of the found characters click the Replace link below the data entry field or use the Ctrl+H key combination. The Find and Replace window will change: Type in the replacement text into the bottom data entry field. Click the Replace button to replace the currently selected occurrence or the Replace All button to replace all the found occurrences. To hide the replace field, click the Hide Replace link." + "body": "To search for the required characters, words or phrases used in the currently edited document, click the icon situated on the left sidebar or use the Ctrl+F key combination. The Find and Replace window will open: Type in your inquiry into the corresponding data entry field. Specify search parameters by clicking the icon and checking the necessary options: Case sensitive - is used to find only the occurrences typed in the same case as your inquiry (e.g. if your inquiry is 'Editor' and this option is selected, such words as 'editor' or 'EDITOR' etc. will not be found). To disable this option, click it once again. Highlight results - is used to highlight all found occurrences at once. To disable this option and remove the highlight, click the option once again. Click one of the arrow buttons at the bottom right corner of the window. The search will be performed either towards the beginning of the document (if you click the button) or towards the end of the document (if you click the button) from the current position. Note: when the Highlight results option is enabled, use these buttons to navigate through the highlighted results. The first occurrence of the required characters in the selected direction will be highlighted on the page. If it is not the word you are looking for, click the selected button again to find the next occurrence of the characters you entered. To replace one or more occurrences of the found characters, click the Replace link below the data entry field or use the Ctrl+H key combination. The Find and Replace window will change: Type in the replacement text into the bottom data entry field. Click the Replace button to replace the currently selected occurrence or the Replace All button to replace all the found occurrences. To hide the replace field, click the Hide Replace link." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/SpellChecking.htm", "title": "Spell-checking", - "body": "Document Editor allows you to check the spelling of your text in a certain language and correct mistakes while editing. In the desktop version, it's also possible to add words into a custom dictionary which is common for all three editors. First of all, choose a language for your document. Click the Set Document Language icon at the status bar. In the window that appears, select the necessary language and click OK. The selected language will be applied to the whole document. To choose a different language for any piece of text within the document, select the necessary text passage with the mouse and use the menu at the status bar. To enable the spell checking option, you can: click the Spell checking icon at the status bar, or open the File tab of the top toolbar, select the Advanced Settings... option, check the Turn on spell checking option box and click the Apply button. Incorrectly spelled words will be underlined by a red line. Right click on the necessary word to activate the menu and: choose one of the suggested similar words spelled correctly to replace the misspelled word with the suggested one. If too many variants are found, the More variants... option appears in the menu; use the Ignore option to skip just that word and remove underlining or Ignore All to skip all the identical words repeated in the text; if the current word is missed in the dictionary, you can add it to the custom dictionary. This word will not be treated as a mistake next time. This option is available in the desktop version. select a different language for this word. To disable the spell checking option, you can: click the Spell checking icon at the status bar, or open the File tab of the top toolbar, select the Advanced Settings... option, uncheck the Turn on spell checking option box and click the Apply button." + "body": "The Document Editor allows you to check the spelling of your text in a certain language and correct mistakes while editing. In the desktop version, it's also possible to add words into a custom dictionary which is common for all three editors. First of all, choose a language for your document. Click the Set Document Language icon on the status bar. In the opened window, select the required language and click OK. The selected language will be applied to the whole document. To choose a different language for any piece within the document, select the necessary text passage with the mouse and use the menu on the status bar. To enable the spell checking option, you can: click the Spell checking icon on the status bar, or open the File tab of the top toolbar, select the Advanced Settings... option, check the Turn on spell checking option box and click the Apply button. all misspelled words will be underlined by a red line. Right click on the necessary word to activate the menu and: choose one of the suggested similar words spelled correctly to replace the misspelled word with the suggested one. If too many variants are found, the More variants... option appears in the menu; use the Ignore option to skip just that word and remove underlining or Ignore All to skip all the identical words repeated in the text; if the current word is missed in the dictionary, you can add it to the custom dictionary. This word will not be treated as a mistake next time. This option is available in the desktop version. select a different language for this word. To disable the spell checking option, you can: click the Spell checking icon on the status bar, or open the File tab of the top toolbar, select the Advanced Settings... option, uncheck the Turn on spell checking option box and click the Apply button." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm", "title": "Supported Formats of Electronic Documents", - "body": "Electronic documents represent one of the most commonly used computer files. Thanks to the computer network highly developed nowadays, it's possible and more convenient to distribute electronic documents than printed ones. Due to the variety of devices used for document presentation, there are a lot of proprietary and open file formats. Document Editor handles the most popular of them. Formats Description View Edit Download DOC Filename extension for word processing documents created with Microsoft Word + + DOCX Office Open XML Zipped, XML-based file format developed by Microsoft for representing spreadsheets, charts, presentations, and word processing documents + + + DOTX Word Open XML Document Template Zipped, XML-based file format developed by Microsoft for text document templates. A DOTX template contains formatting settings, styles etc. and can be used to create multiple documents with the same formatting + + + ODT Word processing file format of OpenDocument, an open standard for electronic documents + + + OTT OpenDocument Document Template OpenDocument file format for text document templates. An OTT template contains formatting settings, styles etc. and can be used to create multiple documents with the same formatting + + + RTF Rich Text Format Document file format developed by Microsoft for cross-platform document interchange + + + TXT Filename extension for text files usually containing very little formatting + + + PDF Portable Document Format File format used to represent documents in a manner independent of application software, hardware, and operating systems + + PDF/A Portable Document Format / A An ISO-standardized version of the Portable Document Format (PDF) specialized for use in the archiving and long-term preservation of electronic documents. + + HTML HyperText Markup Language The main markup language for web pages + + in the online version EPUB Electronic Publication Free and open e-book standard created by the International Digital Publishing Forum + XPS Open XML Paper Specification Open royalty-free fixed-layout document format developed by Microsoft + DjVu File format designed primarily to store scanned documents, especially those containing a combination of text, line drawings, and photographs +" + "body": "An electronic document is one of the most commonly used computer. Due to the highly developed modern computer network, it's more convenient to distribute electronic documents than printed ones. Nowadays, a lot of devices are used for document presentation, so there are plenty of proprietary and open file formats. The Document Editor handles the most popular of them. Formats Description View Edit Download DOC Filename extension for word processing documents created with Microsoft Word + + DOCX Office Open XML Zipped, XML-based file format developed by Microsoft for representing spreadsheets, charts, presentations, and word processing documents + + + DOTX Word Open XML Document Template Zipped, XML-based file format developed by Microsoft for text document templates. A DOTX template contains formatting settings, styles etc. and can be used to create multiple documents with the same formatting + + + ODT Word processing file format of OpenDocument, an open standard for electronic documents + + + OTT OpenDocument Document Template OpenDocument file format for text document templates. An OTT template contains formatting settings, styles etc. and can be used to create multiple documents with the same formatting + + + RTF Rich Text Format Document file format developed by Microsoft for cross-platform document interchange + + + TXT Filename extension for text files usually containing very little formatting + + + PDF Portable Document Format File format used to represent documents regardless of the used software, hardware, and operating systems + + PDF/A Portable Document Format / A An ISO-standardized version of the Portable Document Format (PDF) specialized for use in the archiving and long-term preservation of electronic documents. + + HTML HyperText Markup Language The main markup language for web pages + + in the online version EPUB Electronic Publication Free and open e-book standard created by the International Digital Publishing Forum + XPS Open XML Paper Specification Open royalty-free fixed-layout document format developed by Microsoft + DjVu File format designed primarily to store scanned documents, especially those containing a combination of text, line drawings, and photographs +" }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm", "title": "File tab", - "body": "The File tab allows to perform some basic operations on the current file. Online Document Editor window: Desktop Document Editor window: Using this tab, you can: in the online version, save the current file (in case the Autosave option is disabled), download as (save the document in the selected format to the computer hard disk drive), save copy as (save a copy of the document in the selected format to the portal documents), print or rename it, in the desktop version, save the current file keeping the current format and location using the Save option or save the current file with a different name, location or format using the Save as option, print the file. protect the file using a password, change or remove the password (available in the desktop version only); create a new document or open a recently edited one (available in the online version only), view general information about the document or change some file properties, manage access rights (available in the online version only), track version history (available in the online version only), access the editor Advanced Settings, in the desktop version, open the folder where the file is stored in the File explorer window. In the online version, open the folder of the Documents module where the file is stored in a new browser tab." + "body": "The File tab allows performing some basic operations. The corresponding window of the Online Document Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop Document Editor: With this tab, you can use the following options: in the online version: save the current file (in case the Autosave option is disabled), save it in the required format on the hard disk drive of your computer with the Download as option, save a copy of the file in the selected format to the portal documents with the Save copy as option, print or rename the current file. in the desktop version: save the current file without changing its format and location using the Save option, save it changing its name, location or format using the Save as option or print the current file. protect the file using a password, change or remove the password (available in the desktop version only); create a new document or open a recently edited one (available in the online version only), view general information about the document or change some file properties, manage access rights (available in the online version only), track version history (available in the online version only), access the Advanced Settings of the editor, in the desktop version, open the folder, where the file is stored, in the File explorer window. In the online version, open the folder of the Documents module, where the file is stored, in a new browser tab." }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/HomeTab.htm", "title": "Home tab", - "body": "The Home tab opens by default when you open a document. It allows to format font and paragraphs. Some other options are also available here, such as Mail Merge and color schemes. Online Document Editor window: Desktop Document Editor window: Using this tab, you can: adjust font type, size, color, apply font decoration styles, select background color for a paragraph, create bulleted and numbered lists, change paragraph indents, set paragraph line spacing, align your text in a paragraph, show/hide nonprinting characters, copy/clear text formatting, change color scheme, use Mail Merge (available in the online version only), manage styles." + "body": "The Home tab appears by default when you open a document. It also allows formating fonts and paragraphs. Some other options are also available here, such as Mail Merge and color schemes. The corresponding window of the Online Document Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop Document Editor: Using this tab, you can: adjust the font type, its size and color, apply font decoration styles, select a background color for a paragraph, create bulleted and numbered lists, change paragraph indents, set paragraph line spacing, align your text in a paragraph, show/hide non-printing characters, copy/clear text formatting, change the color scheme, use Mail Merge (available in the online version only), manage styles." }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/InsertTab.htm", "title": "Insert tab", - "body": "The Insert tab allows to add some page formatting elements, as well as visual objects and comments. Online Document Editor window: Desktop Document Editor window: Using this tab, you can: insert a blank page, insert page breaks, section breaks and column breaks, insert headers and footers and page numbers, insert tables, images, charts, shapes, insert hyperlinks, comments, insert text boxes and Text Art objects, equations, symbols, drop caps, content controls." + "body": "The Insert tab allows adding some page formatting elements as well as visual objects and comments. The corresponding window of the Online Document Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop Document Editor: Using this tab, you can: insert a blank page, insert page breaks, section breaks and column breaks, insert tables, images, charts, shapes, insert hyperlinks, comments, insert headers and footers, page numbers, date & time, insert text boxes and Text Art objects, equations, symbols, drop caps, content controls." }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/LayoutTab.htm", "title": "Layout tab", - "body": "The Layout tab allows to change the document appearance: set up page parameters and define the arrangement of visual elements. Online Document Editor window: Desktop Document Editor window: Using this tab, you can: adjust page margins, orientation, size, add columns, insert page breaks, section breaks and column breaks, align and arrange objects (tables, pictures, charts, shapes), change wrapping style, add a watermark." + "body": "The Layout tab allows changing the appearance of a document: setting up page parameters and defining the arrangement of visual elements. The corresponding window of the Online Document Editor: corresponding window of the Desktop Document Editor: Using this tab, you can: adjust page margins, orientation and size, add columns, insert page breaks, section breaks and column breaks, align and arrange objects (tables, pictures, charts, shapes), change the wrapping style, add a watermark." }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm", "title": "Plugins tab", - "body": "The Plugins tab allows to access advanced editing features using available third-party components. Here you can also use macros to simplify routine operations. Online Document Editor window: Desktop Document Editor window: The Settings button allows to open the window where you can view and manage all installed plugins and add your own ones. The Macros button allows to open the window where you can create your own macros and run them. To learn more about macros you can refer to our API Documentation. Currently, the following plugins are available by default: Send allows to send the document via email using the default desktop mail client (available in the desktop version only), Highlight code allows to highlight syntax of the code selecting the necessary language, style, background color, OCR allows to recognize text included into a picture and insert it into the document text, PhotoEditor allows to edit images: crop, flip, rotate them, draw lines and shapes, add icons and text, load a mask and apply filters such as Grayscale, Invert, Sepia, Blur, Sharpen, Emboss, etc., Speech allows to convert the selected text into speech, Symbol Table allows to insert special symbols into your text (available in the desktop version only), Thesaurus allows to search for synonyms and antonyms of a word and replace it with the selected one, Translator allows to translate the selected text into other languages, YouTube allows to embed YouTube videos into your document. The Wordpress and EasyBib plugins can be used if you connect the corresponding services in your portal settings. You can use the following instructions for the server version or for the SaaS version. To learn more about plugins please refer to our API Documentation. All the currently existing open source plugin examples are available on GitHub." + "body": "The Plugins tab allows accessing the advanced editing features using the available third-party components. This tab also makes it possible to use macros to simplify routine operations. The corresponding window of the Online Document Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop Document Editor: The Settings button allows viewing and managing all the installed plugins as well as adding new ones. The Macros button allows you to create and run your own macros. To learn more about macros, please refer to our API Documentation. Currently, the following plugins are available by default: Send allows sending a document via email using the default desktop mail client (available in the desktop version only), Highlight code allows highlighting the code syntax selecting the required language, style and background color, OCR recognizing text in any picture and inserting the recognized text to the document, PhotoEditor allows editing images: cropping, flipping, rotating, drawing lines and shapes, adding icons and text, loading a mask and applying filters such as Grayscale, Invert, Sepia, Blur, Sharpen, Emboss, etc., Speech allows converting the selected text to speech (available in the online version only), Thesaurus allows finding synonyms and antonyms for the selected word and replacing it with the chosen one, Translator allows translating the selected text into other languages, YouTube allows embedding YouTube videos into the document, Mendeley allows managing papers researches and generating bibliographies for scholarly articles, Zotero allows managing bibliographic data and related research materials. The Wordpress and EasyBib plugins can be used if you connect the corresponding services in your portal settings. You can use the following instructions for the server version or for the SaaS version. To learn more about plugins, please refer to our API Documentation. All the existing examples of open source plugins are currently available on GitHub." }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm", "title": "Introducing the Document Editor user interface", - "body": "Document Editor uses a tabbed interface where editing commands are grouped into tabs by functionality. Online Document Editor window: Desktop Document Editor window: The editor interface consists of the following main elements: Editor header displays the logo, opened documents tabs, document name and menu tabs. In the left part of the Editor header there are the Save, Print file, Undo and Redo buttons. In the right part of the Editor header the user name is displayed as well as the following icons: Open file location - in the desktop version, it allows to open the folder where the file is stored in the File explorer window. In the online version, it allows to open the folder of the Documents module where the file is stored in a new browser tab. - allows to adjust View Settings and access the editor Advanced Settings. Manage document access rights - (available in the online version only) allows to set access rights for the documents stored in the cloud. Top toolbar displays a set of editing commands depending on the selected menu tab. Currently, the following tabs are available: File, Home, Insert, Layout, References, Collaboration, Protection, Plugins. The Copy and Paste options are always available at the left part of the Top toolbar regardless of the selected tab. Status bar at the bottom of the editor window contains the page number indicator, displays some notifications (such as \"All changes saved\" etc.), allows to set text language, enable spell checking, turn on the track changes mode, adjust zoom. Left sidebar contains the following icons: - allows to use the Search and Replace tool, - allows to open the Comments panel, - allows to go to the Navigation panel and manage headings, - (available in the online version only) allows to open the Chat panel, as well as the icons that allow to contact our support team and view the information about the program. Right sidebar allows to adjust additional parameters of different objects. When you select a particular object in the text, the corresponding icon is activated at the right sidebar. Click this icon to expand the right sidebar. Horizontal and vertical Rulers allow to align text and other elements in a document, set up margins, tab stops, and paragraph indents. Working area allows to view document content, enter and edit data. Scroll bar on the right allows to scroll up and down multi-page documents. For your convenience you can hide some components and display them again when it is necessary. To learn more on how to adjust view settings please refer to this page." + "body": "Introducing the user interface of the Document Editor The Document Editor uses a tabbed interface where editing commands are grouped into tabs by functionality. Main window of the Online Document Editor: Main window of the Desktop Document Editor: The editor interface consists of the following main elements: The Editor header displays the ONLYOFFICE logo, tabs for all opened documents with their names and menu tabs. On the left side of the Editor header the Save, Print file, Undo and Redo buttons are located On the right side of the Editor header along with the user name the following icons are displayed: Open file location. In the desktop version, it allows opening the folder, where the file is stored, in the File explorer window. In the online version, it allows to opening the folder of the Documents module, where the file is stored in a new browser tab. It allows adjusting the View Settings and access the Advanced Settings of the editor. Manage document access rights (available in the online version only). It allows adjusting access rights for the documents stored in the cloud. The Top toolbar displays a set of editing commands depending on the selected menu tab. Currently, the following tabs are available: File, Home, Insert, Layout, References, Collaboration, Protection, Plugins. The Copy and Paste options are always available at the left part on the left side of the Top toolbar regardless of the selected tab. The Status bar located at the bottom of the editor window indicates the page number and displays some notifications (for example, \"All changes saved\", etc.). It also allows setting the text language, enabling spell checking, turning on the track changes mode and adjusting zoom. The Left sidebar contains the following icons: - allows using the Search and Replace tool, - allows opening the Comments panel, - allows going to the Navigation panel and managing headings, - (available in the online version only) allows opening the Chat panel, - (available in the online version only) allows to contact our support team, - (available in the online version only) allows to view the information about the program. The Right sidebar allows to adjusting additional parameters of different objects. When you select a particular object in the text, the corresponding icon is activated on the Right sidebar. Click the icon to expand the Right sidebar. The Horizontal and vertical Rulers makes it possible to align the text and other elements in a document, set up margins, tab stops, and paragraph indents. The Working area allows viewing document content, entering and editing data. The Scroll bar on the right allows scrolling up and down multi-page documents. For your convenience, you can hide some components and display them again when them when necessary. To learn more about adjusting view settings, please refer to this page." }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/ReferencesTab.htm", "title": "References tab", - "body": "The References tab allows to manage different types of references: add and refresh a table of contents, create and edit footnotes, insert hyperlinks. Online Document Editor window: Desktop Document Editor window: Using this tab, you can: create and automatically update a table of contents, insert footnotes, insert hyperlinks, add bookmarks. add captions." + "body": "The References tab allows managing different types of references: adding and refreshing tables of contents, creating and editing footnotes, inserting hyperlinks. The corresponding window of the Online Document Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop Document Editor: Using this tab, you can: create and automatically update a table of contents, insert footnotes, insert hyperlinks, add bookmarks. add captions." }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/ReviewTab.htm", "title": "Collaboration tab", - "body": "The Collaboration tab allows to organize collaborative work on the document. In the online version, you can share the file, select a co-editing mode, manage comments, track changes made by a reviewer, view all versions and revisions. In the commenting mode, you can add and remove comments, navigate between tracked changes, use chat and view version history. In the desktop version, you can manage comments and use the Track Changes feature . Online Document Editor window: Desktop Document Editor window: Using this tab, you can: specify sharing settings (available in the online version only), switch between the Strict and Fast co-editing modes (available in the online version only), add or remove comments to the document, enable the Track Changes feature, choose the changes display mode, manage the suggested changes, load a document for comparison (available in the online version only), open the Chat panel (available in the online version only), track version history (available in the online version only)." + "body": "The Collaboration tab allows collaborating on documents. In the online version, you can share the file, select the required co-editing mode, manage comments, track changes made by a reviewer, view all versions and revisions. In the commenting mode, you can add and remove comments, navigate between the tracked changes, use the built-in chat and view the version history. In the desktop version, you can manage comments and use the Track Changes feature . The corresponding window of the Online Document Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop Document Editor: Using this tab, you can: specify the sharing settings (available in the online version only), switch between the Strict and Fast co-editing modes (available in the online version only), add or remove comments to the document, enable the Track Changes feature, choose the changes display mode, manage the suggested changes, load a document for comparison (available in the online version only), open the Chat panel (available in the online version only), track the version history (available in the online version only)." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/AddBorders.htm", "title": "Add borders", - "body": "To add borders to a paragraph, page, or the whole document, put the cursor within the paragraph you need, or select several paragraphs with the mouse or all the text in the document by pressing the Ctrl+A key combination, click the right mouse button and select the Paragraph Advanced Settings option from the menu or use the Show advanced settings link at the right sidebar, switch to the Borders & Fill tab in the opened Paragraph - Advanced Settings window, set the needed value for Border Size and select a Border Color, click within the available diagram or use buttons to select borders and apply the chosen style to them, click the OK button. After you add borders, you can also set paddings i.e. distances between the right, left, top and bottom borders and the paragraph text within them. To set the necessary values, switch to the Paddings tab of the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window:" + "body": "To add borders to a paragraph, page, or the whole document, place the cursor within the required paragraph, or select several paragraphs with the mouse or the whole text by pressing the Ctrl+A key combination, click the right mouse button and select the Paragraph Advanced Settings option from the menu or use the Show advanced settings link on the right sidebar, switch to the Borders & Fill tab in the opened Paragraph - Advanced Settings window, set the needed value for Border Size and select a Border Color, click within the available diagram or use buttons to select borders and apply the chosen style to them, click the OK button. After adding the borders, you can also set paddings i.e. distances between the right, left, top and bottom borders and the paragraph. To set the necessary values, switch to the Paddings tab of the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window:" }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/AddCaption.htm", "title": "Add caption", - "body": "The Caption is a numbered label that you can apply to objects, such as equations, tables, figures and images within your documents. This makes it easy to reference within your text as there is an easily recognizable label on your object. To add the caption to an object: select the object which one to apply a caption; switch to the References tab of the top toolbar; click the Caption icon at the top toolbar or right lick o nthe object and select the Insert Caption option to open the Insert Caption dialogue box choose the label to use for your caption by clicking the label drop-down and choosing the object. or create a new label by clicking the Add label button to open the Add label dialogue box. Enter a name for the label into the label text box. Then click the OK button to add a new label into the label list; check the Include chapter number checkbox to change the numbering for your caption; in Insert drop-down menu choose Before to place the label above the object or After to place it below the object; check the Exclude label from caption checkbox to leave only a number for this particular caption in accordance with a sequence number; you can then choose how to number your caption by assigning a specific style to the caption and adding a separator; to apply the caption click the OK button. Deleting a label To delete a label you have created, choose the label from the label list within the caption dialogue box then click the Delete label button. The label you created will be immediately deleted. Note:You may delete labels you have created but you cannot delete the default labels. Formatting captions As soon as you add a caption, a new style for captions is automatically added to the styles section. In order to change the style for all captions throughout the document, you should follow these steps: select the text a new Caption style will be copied from; search for the Caption style (highlighted in blue by default) in the styles gallery which you may find on Home tab of the top toolbar; right click on it and choose the Update from selection option. Grouping captions up If you want to be able to move the object and the caption as one unit, you need to group the object and the caption together select the object; select one of the Wrapping styles using the right sidebar; add the caption as it is mentioned above; hold down Shift and select the items you want to group up; right click on either item and choose Arrange > Group. Now both items will move simultaneously if you drag them somewhere else in the document. To unbind the objects click on Arrange > Ungroup respectively." + "body": "s A caption is a numbered label that can be applied to objects, such as equations, tables, figures and images in the document. A caption allows making a reference in the text - an easily recognizable label on an object. To add a caption to an object: select the required object to apply a caption; switch to the References tab of the top toolbar; click the Caption icon on the top toolbar or right click on the object and select the Insert Caption option to open the Insert Caption dialogue box choose the label to use for your caption by clicking the label drop-down and choosing the object. or create a new label by clicking the Add label button to open the Add label dialogue box. Enter a name for the label into the label text box. Then click the OK button to add a new label into the label list; check the Include chapter number checkbox to change the numbering for your caption; in Insert drop-down menu choose Before to place the label above the object or After to place it below the object; check the Exclude label from caption checkbox to leave only a number for this particular caption in accordance with a sequence number; you can then choose how to number your caption by assigning a specific style to the caption and adding a separator; to apply the caption click the OK button. Deleting a label To delete a label you have created, choose the label from the label list within the caption dialogue box then click the Delete label button. The label you created will be immediately deleted. Note:You may delete labels you have created but you cannot delete the default labels. Formatting captions As soon as you add a caption, a new style for captions is automatically added to the styles section. In order to change the style for all captions throughout the document, you should follow these steps: select the text to copy a new Caption style; search for the Caption style (highlighted in blue by default) in the styles gallery on the Home tab of the top toolbar; right click on it and choose the Update from selection option. Grouping captions up To move the object and the caption as one unit, you need to group the object and the caption together: select the object; select one of the Wrapping styles using the right sidebar; add the caption as it is mentioned above; hold down Shift and select the items to be grouped up; right click item and choose Arrange > Group. Now both items will move simultaneously if you drag them somewhere else in the document. To unbind the objects, click on Arrange > Ungroup respectively." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/AddFormulasInTables.htm", "title": "Use formulas in tables", - "body": "Insert a formula You can perform simple calculations on data in table cells by adding formulas. To insert a formula into a table cell, place the cursor within the cell where you want to display the result, click the Add formula button at the right sidebar, in the Formula Settings window that opens, enter the necessary formula into the Formula field. You can enter a needed formula manually using the common mathematical operators (+, -, *, /), e.g. =A1*B2 or use the Paste Function drop-down list to select one of the embedded functions, e.g. =PRODUCT(A1,B2). manually specify necessary arguments within the parentheses in the Formula field. If the function requires several arguments, they must be separated by commas. use the Number Format drop-down list if you want to display the result in a certain number format, click OK. The result will be displayed in the selected cell. To edit the added formula, select the result in the cell and click the Add formula button at the right sidebar, make the necessary changes in the Formula Settings window and click OK. Add references to cells You can use the following arguments to quickly add references to cell ranges: ABOVE - a reference to all the cells in the column above the selected cell LEFT - a reference to all the cells in the row to the left of the selected cell BELOW - a reference to all the cells in the column below the selected cell RIGHT - a reference to all the cells in the row to the right of the selected cell These arguments can be used with the AVERAGE, COUNT, MAX, MIN, PRODUCT, SUM functions. You can also manually enter references to a certain cell (e.g., A1) or a range of cells (e.g., A1:B3). Use bookmarks If you have added some bookmarks to certain cells within your table, you can use these bookmarks as arguments when entering formulas. In the Formula Settings window, place the cursor within the parentheses in the Formula entry field where you want the argument to be added and use the Paste Bookmark drop-down list to select one of the previously added bookmarks. Update formula results If you change some values in the table cells, you will need to manually update formula results: To update a single formula result, select the necessary result and press F9 or right-click the result and use the Update field option from the menu. To update several formula results, select the necessary cells or the entire table and press F9. Embedded functions You can use the following standard math, statistical and logical functions: Category Function Description Example Mathematical ABS(x) The function is used to return the absolute value of a number. =ABS(-10) Returns 10 Logical AND(logical1, logical2, ...) The function is used to check if the logical value you enter is TRUE or FALSE. The function returns 1 (TRUE) if all the arguments are TRUE. =AND(1>0,1>3) Returns 0 Statistical AVERAGE(argument-list) The function is used to analyze the range of data and find the average value. =AVERAGE(4,10) Returns 7 Statistical COUNT(argument-list) The function is used to count the number of the selected cells which contain numbers ignoring empty cells or those contaning text. =COUNT(A1:B3) Returns 6 Logical DEFINED() The function evaluates if a value in the cell is defined. The function returns 1 if the value is defined and calculated without errors and returns 0 if the value is not defined or calculated with an error. =DEFINED(A1) Logical FALSE() The function returns 0 (FALSE) and does not require any argument. =FALSE Returns 0 Mathematical INT(x) The function is used to analyze and return the integer part of the specified number. =INT(2.5) Returns 2 Statistical MAX(number1, number2, ...) The function is used to analyze the range of data and find the largest number. =MAX(15,18,6) Returns 18 Statistical MIN(number1, number2, ...) The function is used to analyze the range of data and find the smallest number. =MIN(15,18,6) Returns 6 Mathematical MOD(x, y) The function is used to return the remainder after the division of a number by the specified divisor. =MOD(6,3) Returns 0 Logical NOT(logical) The function is used to check if the logical value you enter is TRUE or FALSE. The function returns 1 (TRUE) if the argument is FALSE and 0 (FALSE) if the argument is TRUE. =NOT(2<5) Returns 0 Logical OR(logical1, logical2, ...) The function is used to check if the logical value you enter is TRUE or FALSE. The function returns 0 (FALSE) if all the arguments are FALSE. =OR(1>0,1>3) Returns 1 Mathematical PRODUCT(argument-list) The function is used to multiply all the numbers in the selected range of cells and return the product. =PRODUCT(2,5) Returns 10 Mathematical ROUND(x, num_digits) The function is used to round the number to the desired number of digits. =ROUND(2.25,1) Returns 2.3 Mathematical SIGN(x) The function is used to return the sign of a number. If the number is positive, the function returns 1. If the number is negative, the function returns -1. If the number is 0, the function returns 0. =SIGN(-12) Returns -1 Mathematical SUM(argument-list) The function is used to add all the numbers in the selected range of cells and return the result. =SUM(5,3,2) Returns 10 Logical TRUE() The function returns 1 (TRUE) and does not require any argument. =TRUE Returns 1" + "body": "Insert a formula You can perform simple calculations on data in table cells by adding formulas. To insert a formula into a table cell, place the cursor within the cell where you want to display the result, click the Add formula button on the right sidebar, in the opened Formula Settings window, enter the required formula into the Formula field. You can enter the required formula manually using the common mathematical operators (+, -, *, /), e.g. =A1*B2 or use the Paste Function drop-down list to select one of the embedded functions, e.g. =PRODUCT(A1,B2). manually specify the required arguments within the parentheses in the Formula field. If the function requires several arguments, they must be separated by commas. use the Number Format drop-down list if you want to display the result in a certain number format, click OK. The result will be displayed in the selected cell. To edit the added formula, select the result in the cell and click the Add formula button on the right sidebar, make the required changes in the Formula Settings window and click OK. Add references to cells You can use the following arguments to quickly add references to cell ranges: ABOVE - a reference to all the cells in the column above the selected cell LEFT - a reference to all the cells in the row to the left of the selected cell BELOW - a reference to all the cells in the column below the selected cell RIGHT - a reference to all the cells in the row to the right of the selected cell These arguments can be used with the AVERAGE, COUNT, MAX, MIN, PRODUCT, SUM functions. You can also manually enter references to a certain cell (e.g., A1) or a range of cells (e.g., A1:B3). Use bookmarks If you have added some bookmarks to certain cells within your table, you can use these bookmarks as arguments when entering formulas. In the Formula Settings window, place the cursor within the parentheses in the Formula entry field where you want the argument to be added and use the Paste Bookmark drop-down list to select one of the previously added bookmarks. Update formula results If you change some values in the table cells, you will need to manually update the formula results: To update a single formula result, select the necessary result and press F9 or right-click the result and use the Update field option from the menu. To update several formula results, select the necessary cells or the entire table and press F9. Embedded functions You can use the following standard math, statistical and logical functions: Category Function Description Example Mathematical ABS(x) The function is used to return the absolute value of a number. =ABS(-10) Returns 10 Logical AND(logical1, logical2, ...) The function is used to check if the logical value you entered is TRUE or FALSE. The function returns 1 (TRUE) if all the arguments are TRUE. =AND(1>0,1>3) Returns 0 Statistical AVERAGE(argument-list) The function is used to analyze the range of data and find the average value. =AVERAGE(4,10) Returns 7 Statistical COUNT(argument-list) The function is used to count the number of the selected cells which contain numbers ignoring empty cells or those contaning text. =COUNT(A1:B3) Returns 6 Logical DEFINED() The function evaluates if a value in the cell is defined. The function returns 1 if the value is defined and calculated without errors and returns 0 if the value is not defined or calculated with an error. =DEFINED(A1) Logical FALSE() The function returns 0 (FALSE) and does not require any argument. =FALSE Returns 0 Logical IF(logical_test, value_if_true, value_if_false) The function is used to check the logical expression and return one value if it is TRUE, or another if it is FALSE. =IF(3>1,1,0) Returns 1 Mathematical INT(x) The function is used to analyze and return the integer part of the specified number. =INT(2.5) Returns 2 Statistical MAX(number1, number2, ...) The function is used to analyze the range of data and find the largest number. =MAX(15,18,6) Returns 18 Statistical MIN(number1, number2, ...) The function is used to analyze the range of data and find the smallest number. =MIN(15,18,6) Returns 6 Mathematical MOD(x, y) The function is used to return the remainder after the division of a number by the specified divisor. =MOD(6,3) Returns 0 Logical NOT(logical) The function is used to check if the logical value you entered is TRUE or FALSE. The function returns 1 (TRUE) if the argument is FALSE and 0 (FALSE) if the argument is TRUE. =NOT(2<5) Returns 0 Logical OR(logical1, logical2, ...) The function is used to check if the logical value you entered is TRUE or FALSE. The function returns 0 (FALSE) if all the arguments are FALSE. =OR(1>0,1>3) Returns 1 Mathematical PRODUCT(argument-list) The function is used to multiply all the numbers in the selected range of cells and return the product. =PRODUCT(2,5) Returns 10 Mathematical ROUND(x, num_digits) The function is used to round the number to the desired number of digits. =ROUND(2.25,1) Returns 2.3 Mathematical SIGN(x) The function is used to return the sign of a number. If the number is positive, the function returns 1. If the number is negative, the function returns -1. If the number is 0, the function returns 0. =SIGN(-12) Returns -1 Mathematical SUM(argument-list) The function is used to add all the numbers in the selected range of cells and return the result. =SUM(5,3,2) Returns 10 Logical TRUE() The function returns 1 (TRUE) and does not require any argument. =TRUE Returns 1" }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/AddHyperlinks.htm", "title": "Add hyperlinks", - "body": "To add a hyperlink, place the cursor to a position where a hyperlink will be added, switch to the Insert or References tab of the top toolbar, click the Hyperlink icon at the top toolbar, after that the Hyperlink Settings window will appear where you can specify the hyperlink parameters: Select a link type you wish to insert: Use the External Link option and enter a URL in the format http://www.example.com in the Link to field below if you need to add a hyperlink leading to an external website. Use the Place in Document option and select one of the existing headings in the document text or one of previously added bookmarks if you need to add a hyperlink leading to a certain place in the same document. Display - enter a text that will get clickable and lead to the address specified in the upper field. ScreenTip text - enter a text that will become visible in a small pop-up window that provides a brief note or label pertaining to the hyperlink being pointed to. Click the OK button. To add a hyperlink, you can also use the Ctrl+K key combination or click with the right mouse button at a position where a hyperlink will be added and select the Hyperlink option in the right-click menu. Note: it's also possible to select a character, word, word combination, text passage with the mouse or using the keyboard and then open the Hyperlink Settings window as described above. In this case, the Display field will be filled with the text fragment you selected. By hovering the cursor over the added hyperlink, the ScreenTip will appear containing the text you specified. You can follow the link by pressing the CTRL key and clicking the link in your document. To edit or delete the added hyperlink, click it with the right mouse button, select the Hyperlink option and then the action you want to perform - Edit Hyperlink or Remove Hyperlink." + "body": "To add a hyperlink, place the cursor in the text that you want to display as a hyperlink, switch to the Insert or References tab of the top toolbar, click the Hyperlink icon on the top toolbar, after that the Hyperlink Settings window will appear, and you will be able to specify the hyperlink parameters: Select a link type you wish to insert: Use the External Link option and enter a URL in the format http://www.example.com in the Link to field below if you need to add a hyperlink leading to an external website. Use the Place in Document option and select one of the existing headings in the document text or one of previously added bookmarks if you need to add a hyperlink leading to a certain place in the same document. Display - enter a text that will get clickable and lead to the address specified in the upper field. ScreenTip text - enter a text that will become visible in a small pop-up window with a brief note or label pertaining to the hyperlink to be pointed. Click the OK button. To add a hyperlink, you can also use the Ctrl+K key combination or click with the right mouse button at a position where a hyperlink will be added and select the Hyperlink option in the right-click menu. Note: it's also possible to select a character, word, word combination, text passage with the mouse or using the keyboard and then open the Hyperlink Settings window as described above. In this case, the Display field will be filled with the text fragment you selected. By hovering the cursor over the added hyperlink, the ScreenTip will appear containing the text you specified. You can follow the link by pressing the CTRL key and clicking the link in your document. To edit or delete the added hyperlink, click it with the right mouse button, select the Hyperlink option and then the action you want to perform - Edit Hyperlink or Remove Hyperlink." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/AddWatermark.htm", "title": "Add watermark", - "body": "Watermark is a text or image placed below the main text layer. Text watermarks allow to indicate your document status (for example, confidential, draft etc.), image watermarks allow to add an image, for example your company logo. To add a watermark within a document: Switch to the Layout tab of the top toolbar. Click the Watermark icon at the top toolbar and choose the Custom Watermark option from the menu. After that the Watermark Settings window will appear. Select a watermark type you wish to insert: Use the Text watermark option and adjust the available parameters: Language - select one of the available languages from the list, Text - select one of the available text examples on the selected language. For English, the following watermark texts are available: ASAP, CONFIDENTIAL, COPY, DO NOT COPY, DRAFT, ORIGINAL, PERSONAL, SAMPLE, TOP SECRET, URGENT. Font - select the font name and size from the corresponding drop-down lists. Use the icons on the right to set the font color or apply one of the font decoration styles: Bold, Italic, Underline, Strikeout, Semitransparent - check this box if you want to apply transparency, Layout - select the Diagonal or Horizontal option. Use the Image watermark option and adjust the available parameters: Choose the image file source using one of the buttons: From File or From URL - the image will be displayed in the preview window on the right, Scale - select the necessary scale value from the available ones: Auto, 500%, 200%, 150%, 100%, 50%. Click the OK button. To edit the added watermark, open the Watermark Settings window as described above, change the necessary parameters and click OK. To delete the added watermark click the Watermark icon at the Layout tab of the top toolbar and choose the Remove Watermark option from the menu. It's also possible to use the None option in the Watermark Settings window." + "body": "s A watermark is a text or image placed under the main text layer. Text watermarks allow indicating the status of your document (for example, confidential, draft etc.). Image watermarks allow adding an image, for example, the logo of your company. To add a watermark in a document: Switch to the Layout tab of the top toolbar. Click the Watermark icon on the top toolbar and choose the Custom Watermark option from the menu. After that the Watermark Settings window will appear. Select a watermark type you wish to insert: Use the Text watermark option and adjust the available parameters: Language - select one of the available languages from the list, Text - select one of the available text examples in the selected language. For English, the following watermark texts are available: ASAP, CONFIDENTIAL, COPY, DO NOT COPY, DRAFT, ORIGINAL, PERSONAL, SAMPLE, TOP SECRET, URGENT. Font - select the font name and size from the corresponding drop-down lists. Use the icons on the right to set the font color or apply one of the font decoration styles: Bold, Italic, Underline, Strikeout, Semitransparent - check this box if you want to apply transparency, Layout - select the Diagonal or Horizontal option. Use the Image watermark option and adjust the available parameters: Choose the image file source using one of the options from the drop-down list: From File, From URL or From Storage - the image will be displayed in the preview window on the right, Scale - select the necessary scale value from the available ones: Auto, 500%, 200%, 150%, 100%, 50%. Click the OK button. To edit the added watermark, open the Watermark Settings window as described above, change the necessary parameters and click OK. To delete the added watermark click the Watermark icon on the Layout tab of the top toolbar and choose the Remove Watermark option from the menu. It's also possible to use the None option in the Watermark Settings window." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/AlignArrangeObjects.htm", "title": "Align and arrange objects on a page", - "body": "The added autoshapes, images, charts or text boxes can be aligned, grouped and ordered on a page. To perform any of these actions, first select a separate object or several objects on the page. To select several objects, hold down the Ctrl key and left-click the necessary objects. To select a text box, click on its border, not the text within it. After that you can use either the icons at the Layout tab of the top toolbar described below or the analogous options from the right-click menu. Align objects To align two or more selected objects, Click the Align icon at the Layout tab of the top toolbar and select one of the following options: Align to Page to align objects relative to the edges of the page, Align to Margin to align objects relative to the page margins, Align Selected Objects (this option is selected by default) to align objects relative to each other, Click the Align icon once again and select the necessary alignment type from the list: Align Left - to line up the objects horizontally by the left edge of the leftmost object/left edge of the page/left page margin, Align Center - to line up the objects horizontally by their centers/center of the page/center of the space between the left and right page margins, Align Right - to line up the objects horizontally by the right edge of the rightmost object/right edge of the page/right page margin, Align Top - to line up the objects vertically by the top edge of the topmost object/top edge of the page/top page margin, Align Middle - to line up the objects vertically by their middles/middle of the page/middle of the space between the top and bottom page margins, Align Bottom - to line up the objects vertically by the bottom edge of the bottommost object/bottom edge of the page/bottom page margin. Alternatively, you can right-click the selected objects, choose the Align option from the contextual menu and then use one of the available alignment options. If you want to align a single object, it can be aligned relative to the edges of the page or to the page margins. The Align to Margin option is selected by default in this case. Distribute objects To distribute three or more selected objects horizontally or vertically so that the equal distance appears between them, Click the Align icon at the Layout tab of the top toolbar and select one of the following options: Align to Page to distribute objects between the edges of the page, Align to Margin to distribute objects between the page margins, Align Selected Objects (this option is selected by default) to distribute objects between two outermost selected objects, Click the Align icon once again and select the necessary distribution type from the list: Distribute Horizontally - to distribute objects evenly between the leftmost and rightmost selected objects/left and right edges of the page/left and right page margins. Distribute Vertically - to distribute objects evenly between the topmost and bottommost selected objects/top and bottom edges of the page/top and bottom page margins. Alternatively, you can right-click the selected objects, choose the Align option from the contextual menu and then use one of the available distribution options. Note: the distribution options are disabled if you select less than three objects. Group objects To group two or more selected objects or ungroup them, click the arrow next to the Group icon at the Layout tab of the top toolbar and select the necessary option from the list: Group - to join several objects into a group so that they can be simultaneously rotated, moved, resized, aligned, arranged, copied, pasted, formatted like a single object. Ungroup - to ungroup the selected group of the previously joined objects. Alternatively, you can right-click the selected objects, choose the Arrange option from the contextual menu and then use the Group or Ungroup option. Note: the Group option is disabled if you select less than two objects. The Ungroup option is available only when a group of the previously joined objects is selected. Arrange objects To arrange objects (i.e. to change their order when several objects overlap each other), you can use the Bring Forward and Send Backward icons at the Layout tab of the top toolbar and select the necessary arrangement type from the list. To move the selected object(s) forward, click the arrow next to the Bring Forward icon at the Layout tab of the top toolbar and select the necessary arrangement type from the list: Bring To Foreground - to move the object(s) in front of all other objects, Bring Forward - to move the selected object(s) by one level forward as related to other objects. To move the selected object(s) backward, click the arrow next to the Send Backward icon at the Layout tab of the top toolbar and select the necessary arrangement type from the list: Send To Background - to move the object(s) behind all other objects, Send Backward - to move the selected object(s) by one level backward as related to other objects. Alternatively, you can right-click the selected object(s), choose the Arrange option from the contextual menu and then use one of the available arrangement options." + "body": "Align and arrange objects on the page The added autoshapes, images, charts or text boxes can be aligned, grouped and ordered on the page. To perform any of these actions, first select a separate object or several objects on the page. To select several objects, hold down the Ctrl key and left-click the required objects. To select a text box, click on its border, not the text within it. After that you can use either the icons on the Layout tab of the top toolbar described below or the corresponding options from the right-click menu. Align objects To align two or more selected objects, Click the Align icon on the Layout tab of the top toolbar and select one of the following options: Align to Page to align objects relative to the edges of the page, Align to Margin to align objects relative to the page margins, Align Selected Objects (this option is selected by default) to align objects relative to each other, Click the Align icon once again and select the necessary alignment type from the list: Align Left - to line up the objects horizontally by the left edge of the leftmost object/left edge of the page/left page margin, Align Center - to line up the objects horizontally by their centers/center of the page/center of the space between the left and right page margins, Align Right - to line up the objects horizontally by the right edge of the rightmost object/right edge of the page/right page margin, Align Top - to line up the objects vertically by the top edge of the topmost object/top edge of the page/top page margin, Align Middle - to line up the objects vertically by their middles/middle of the page/middle of the space between the top and bottom page margins, Align Bottom - to line up the objects vertically by the bottom edge of the bottommost object/bottom edge of the page/bottom page margin. Alternatively, you can right-click the selected objects, choose the Align option from the contextual menu and then use one of the available alignment options. If you want to align a single object, it can be aligned relative to the edges of the page or to the page margins. The Align to Margin option is selected by default in this case. Distribute objects To distribute three or more selected objects horizontally or vertically so that there is equal space between them, Click the Align icon on the Layout tab of the top toolbar and select one of the following options: Align to Page to distribute objects between the edges of the page, Align to Margin to distribute objects between the page margins, Align Selected Objects (this option is selected by default) to distribute objects between two outermost selected objects, Click the Align icon once again and select the necessary distribution type from the list: Distribute Horizontally - to distribute objects evenly between the leftmost and rightmost selected objects/left and right edges of the page/left and right page margins. Distribute Vertically - to distribute objects evenly between the topmost and bottommost selected objects/top and bottom edges of the page/top and bottom page margins. Alternatively, you can right-click the selected objects, choose the Align option from the contextual menu and then use one of the available distribution options. Note: the distribution options are disabled if you select less than three objects. Group objects To group two or more selected objects or ungroup them, click the arrow next to the Group icon at the Layout tab on the top toolbar and select the necessary option from the list: Group - to combine several objects into a group so that they can be simultaneously rotated, moved, resized, aligned, arranged, copied, pasted, formatted like a single object. Ungroup - to ungroup the selected group of the previously combined objects. Alternatively, you can right-click the selected objects, choose the Arrange option from the contextual menu and then use the Group or Ungroup option. Note: the Group option is disabled if you select less than two objects. The Ungroup option is available only when a group of the previously combined objects is selected. Arrange objects To arrange objects (i.e. to change their order when several objects overlap each other), you can use the Bring Forward and Send Backward icons on the Layout tab of the top toolbar and select the required arrangement type from the list. To move the selected object(s) forward, click the arrow next to the Bring Forward icon on the Layout tab of the top toolbar and select the required arrangement type from the list: Bring To Foreground - to move the object(s) in front of all other objects, Bring Forward - to move the selected object(s) by one level forward as related to other objects. To move the selected object(s) backward, click the arrow next to the Send Backward icon on the Layout tab of the top toolbar and select the required arrangement type from the list: Send To Background - to move the object(s) behind all other objects, Send Backward - to move the selected object(s) by one level backward as related to other objects. Alternatively, you can right-click the selected object(s), choose the Arrange option from the contextual menu and then use one of the available arrangement options." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/AlignText.htm", "title": "Align your text in a paragraph", - "body": "The text is commonly aligned in four ways: left, right, center or justified. To do that, place the cursor to the position where you want the alignment to be applied (this can be a new line or already entered text), switch to the Home tab of the top toolbar, select the alignment type you would like to apply: Left alignment with the text lined up by the left side of the page (the right side remains unaligned) is done with the Align left icon situated at the top toolbar. Center alignment with the text lined up by the center of the page (the right and the left sides remains unaligned) is done with the Align center icon situated at the top toolbar. Right alignment with the text lined up by the right side of the page (the left side remains unaligned) is done with the Align right icon situated at the top toolbar. Justified alignment with the text lined up by both the left and the right sides of the page (additional spacing is added where necessary to keep the alignment) is done with the Justified icon situated at the top toolbar. The alignment parameters are also available at the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window. right-click the text and choose the Paragraph Advanced Settings option from the contextual menu or use the Show advanced settings option at the right sidebar, open the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window, switch to the Indents & Spacing tab, select one of the alignment types from the Alignment list: Left, Center, Right, Justified, click the OK button, to apply the changes." + "body": "The text is commonly aligned in four ways: left-aligned text, right-aligned text, centered text or justified text. To align the text, place the cursor to the position where you want the alignment to be applied (this can be a new line or already entered text), switch to the Home tab of the top toolbar, select the alignment type you would like to apply: Left alignment (when the text is lined up to the left side of the page with the right side remaining unaligned) is done by clicking the Align left icon on the top toolbar. Center alignment (when the text is lined up in the center of the page with the right and the left sides remaining unaligned) is done by clicking the Align center icon on the top toolbar. Right alignment (when the text is lined up to the right side of the page with the left side remaining unaligned) is done by clicking the Align right icon on the top toolbar. Justified alignment (when the text is lined up to both the left and the right sides of the page, and additional spacing is added where necessary to keep the alignment) is done by clicking the Justified icon on the top toolbar. The alignment parameters are also available in the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window. right-click the text and choose the Paragraph - Advanced Settings option from the contextual menu or use the Show advanced settings option on the right sidebar, open the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window, switch to the Indents & Spacing tab, select one of the alignment types from the Alignment list: Left, Center, Right, Justified, click the OK button to apply the changes." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/BackgroundColor.htm", "title": "Select background color for a paragraph", - "body": "Background color is applied to the whole paragraph and completely fills all the paragraph space from the left page margin to the right page margin. To apply a background color to a certain paragraph or change the current one, select a color scheme for your document from the available ones clicking the Change color scheme icon at the Home tab of the top toolbar put the cursor within the paragraph you need, or select several paragraphs with the mouse or the whole text using the Ctrl+A key combination open the color palettes window. You can access it in one of the following ways: click the downward arrow next to the icon at the Home tab of the top toolbar, or click the color field next to the Background Color caption at the right sidebar, or click the 'Show advanced settings' link at the right sidebar or select the 'Paragraph Advanced Settings' option in the right-click menu, then switch to the 'Borders & Fill' tab within the 'Paragraph - Advanced Settings' window and click the color field next to the Background Color caption. select any color in the available palettes After you select the necessary color using the icon, you'll be able to apply this color to any selected paragraph just clicking the icon (it displays the selected color), without the necessity to choose this color on the palette again. If you use the Background Color option at the right sidebar or within the 'Paragraph - Advanced Settings' window, remember that the selected color is not retained for quick access. (These options can be useful if you wish to select a different background color for a specific paragraph, while you are also using some general color selected with the help of the icon). To clear the background color of a certain paragraph, put the cursor within the paragraph you need, or select several paragraphs with the mouse or the whole text using the Ctrl+A key combination open the color palettes window clicking the color field next to the Background Color caption at the right sidebar select the icon." + "body": "Select a background color for a paragraph A background color is applied to the whole paragraph and completely fills all the paragraph space from the left page margin to the right page margin. To apply a background color to a certain paragraph or change the current one, select a color scheme for your document from the available ones clicking the Change color scheme icon at the Home tab on the top toolbar place the cursor within the required paragraph, or select several paragraphs with the mouse or the whole text using the Ctrl+A key combination open the color palettes window. You can access it in one of the following ways: click the downward arrow next to the icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar, or click the color field next to the Background Color caption on the right sidebar, or click the 'Show advanced settings' link on the right sidebar or select the 'Paragraph Advanced Settings' option on the right-click menu, then switch to the 'Borders & Fill' tab within the 'Paragraph - Advanced Settings' window and click the color field next to the Background Color caption. select any color among the available palettes After you select the required color by using the icon, you'll be able to apply this color to any selected paragraph just by clicking the icon (it displays the selected color), without having to choose this color in the palette again. If you use the Background Color option on the right sidebar or within the 'Paragraph - Advanced Settings' window, remember that the selected color is not retained for quick access. (These options can be useful if you wish to select a different background color for a specific paragraph and if you are also using some general color selected by clicking the icon). To remove the background color from a certain paragraph, place the cursor within the required paragraph, or select several paragraphs with the mouse or the whole text using the Ctrl+A key combination open the color palettes window by clicking the color field next to the Background Color caption on the right sidebar select the icon." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/ChangeColorScheme.htm", "title": "Change color scheme", - "body": "Color schemes are applied to the whole document. They are used to quickly change the appearance of your document, since they are define the Theme Colors palette for document elements (font, background, tables, autoshapes, charts). If you've applied some Theme Colors to document elements and then selected a different Color Scheme, the applied colors in your document change correspondingly. To change a color scheme, click the downward arrow next to the Change color scheme icon at the Home tab of the top toolbar and select the necessary color scheme from the available ones: Office, Grayscale, Apex, Aspect, Civic, Concourse, Equity, Flow, Foundry, Median, Metro, Module, Odulent, Oriel, Origin, Paper, Solstice, Technic, Trek, Urban, Verve. The selected color scheme will be highlighted in the list. Once you select the preferred color scheme, you can select colors in a color palettes window that corresponds to the document element you want to apply the color to. For most of the document elements, the color palettes window can be accessed by clicking the colored box at the right sidebar when the necessary element is selected. For the font, this window can be opened using the downward arrow next to the Font color icon at the Home tab of the top toolbar. The following palettes are available: Theme Colors - the colors that correspond to the selected color scheme of the document. Standard Colors - the default colors set. The selected color scheme does not affect them. Custom Color - click this caption if there is no needed color in the available palettes. Select the necessary colors range moving the vertical color slider and set the specific color dragging the color picker within the large square color field. Once you select a color with the color picker, the appropriate RGB and sRGB color values will be displayed in the fields on the right. You can also specify a color on the base of the RGB color model entering the necessary numeric values into the R, G, B (red, green, blue) fields or enter the sRGB hexadecimal code into the field marked with the # sign. The selected color appears in the New preview box. If the object was previously filled with any custom color, this color is displayed in the Current box so you can compare the original and modified colors. When the color is specified, click the Add button: The custom color will be applied to the selected element and added to the Custom color palette." + "body": "Color schemes are applied to the whole document. They are used to quickly change the appearance of your document because they define the Theme Colors palette for different document elements (font, background, tables, autoshapes, charts). If you applied some Theme Colors to the document elements and then select a different Color Scheme, the applied colors in your document will change correspondingly. To change a color scheme, click the downward arrow next to the Change color scheme icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar and select the required color scheme from the list: Office, Grayscale, Apex, Aspect, Civic, Concourse, Equity, Flow, Foundry, Median, Metro, Module, Odulent, Oriel, Origin, Paper, Solstice, Technic, Trek, Urban, Verve. The selected color scheme will be highlighted in the list. Once you select the preferred color scheme, you can select other colors in the color palettes window that corresponds to the document element you want to apply the color to. For most document elements, the color palettes window can be accessed by clicking the colored box on the right sidebar when the required element is selected. For the font, this window can be opened using the downward arrow next to the Font color icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar. The following palettes are available: Theme Colors - the colors that correspond to the selected color scheme of the document. Standard Colors - a set of default colors. The selected color scheme does not affect them. Custom Color - click this caption if the required color is missing among the available palettes. Select the necessary colors range moving the vertical color slider and set a specific color dragging the color picker within the large square color field. Once you select a color with the color picker, the appropriate RGB and sRGB color values will be displayed in the fields on the right. You can also define a color on the base of the RGB color model by entering the corresponding numeric values into the R, G, B (red, green, blue) fields or enter the sRGB hexadecimal code into the field marked with the # sign. The selected color appears in the New preview box. If the object was previously filled with any custom color, this color is displayed in the Current box so you can compare the original and modified colors. When the color is defined, click the Add button: The custom color will be applied to the selected element and added to the Custom color palette." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/ChangeWrappingStyle.htm", "title": "Change text wrapping", - "body": "The Wrapping Style option determines the way the object is positioned relative to the text. You can change the text wrapping style for inserted objects, such as shapes, images, charts, text boxes or tables. Change text wrapping for shapes, images, charts, text boxes To change the currently selected wrapping style: select a separate object on the page left-clicking it. To select a text box, click on its border, not the text within it. open the text wrapping settings: switch to the the Layout tab of the top toolbar and click the arrow next to the Wrapping icon, or right-click the object and select the Wrapping Style option from the contextual menu, or right-click the object, select the Advanced Settings option and switch to the Text Wrapping tab of the object Advanced Settings window. select the necessary wrapping style: Inline - the object is considered to be a part of the text, like a character, so when the text moves, the object moves as well. In this case the positioning options are inaccessible. If one of the following styles is selected, the object can be moved independently of the text and positioned on the page exactly: Square - the text wraps the rectangular box that bounds the object. Tight - the text wraps the actual object edges. Through - the text wraps around the object edges and fills in the open white space within the object. So that the effect can appear, use the Edit Wrap Boundary option from the right-click menu. Top and bottom - the text is only above and below the object. In front - the object overlaps the text. Behind - the text overlaps the object. If you select the Square, Tight, Through, or Top and bottom style, you will be able to set up some additional parameters - Distance from Text at all sides (top, bottom, left, right). To access these parameters, right-click the object, select the Advanced Settings option and switch to the Text Wrapping tab of the object Advanced Settings window. Set the necessary values and click OK. If you select a wrapping style other than Inline, the Position tab is also available in the object Advanced Settings window. To learn more on these parameters, please refer to the corresponding pages with the instructions on how to work with shapes, images or charts. If you select a wrapping style other than Inline, you can also edit the wrap boundary for images or shapes. Right-click the object, select the Wrapping Style option from the contextual menu and click the Edit Wrap Boundary option. Drag wrap points to customize the boundary. To create a new wrap point, click anywhere on the red line and drag it to the necessary position. Change text wrapping for tables For tables, the following two wrapping styles are available: Inline table and Flow table. To change the currently selected wrapping style: right-click the table and select the Table Advanced Settings option, switch to the Text Wrapping tab of the Table - Advanced Settings window, select one of the following options: Inline table is used to select the wrapping style when the text is broken by the table as well as to set the alignment: left, center, right. Flow table is used to select the wrapping style when the text is wrapped around the table. Using the Text Wrapping tab of the Table - Advanced Settings window you can also set up the following additional parameters: For inline tables, you can set the table Alignment type (left, center or right) and Indent from left. For floating tables, you can set the Distance from text and the table position at the Table Position tab." + "body": "Change the text wrapping The Wrapping Style option determines the way the object is positioned relative to the text. You can change the text wrapping style for inserted objects, such as shapes, images, charts, text boxes or tables. Change text wrapping for shapes, images, charts, text boxes To change the currently selected wrapping style: left-click a separate object to select it. To select a text box, click on its border, not the text within it. open the text wrapping settings: switch to the the Layout tab of the top toolbar and click the arrow next to the Wrapping icon, or right-click the object and select the Wrapping Style option from the contextual menu, or right-click the object, select the Advanced Settings option and switch to the Text Wrapping tab of the object Advanced Settings window. select the necessary wrapping style: Inline - the object is considered to be a part of the text, like a character, so when the text moves, the object moves as well. In this case the positioning options are inaccessible. If one of the following styles is selected, the object can be moved independently of the text and precisely positioned on the page: Square - the text wraps the rectangular box that bounds the object. Tight - the text wraps the actual object edges. Through - the text wraps around the object edges and fills the open white space within the object. To apply this effect, use the Edit Wrap Boundary option from the right-click menu. Top and bottom - the text is only above and below the object. In front - the object overlaps the text. Behind - the text overlaps the object. If you select the Square, Tight, Through, or Top and bottom style, you will be able to set up some additional parameters - Distance from Text at all sides (top, bottom, left, right). To access these parameters, right-click the object, select the Advanced Settings option and switch to the Text Wrapping tab of the object Advanced Settings window. Set the required values and click OK. If you select a wrapping style other than Inline, the Position tab is also available in the object Advanced Settings window. To learn more on these parameters, please refer to the corresponding pages with the instructions on how to work with shapes, images or charts. If you select a wrapping style other than Inline, you can also edit the wrap boundary for images or shapes. Right-click the object, select the Wrapping Style option from the contextual menu and click the Edit Wrap Boundary option. Drag wrap points to customize the boundary. To create a new wrap point, click anywhere on the red line and drag it to the required position. Change text wrapping for tables For tables, the following two wrapping styles are available: Inline table and Flow table. To change the currently selected wrapping style: right-click the table and select the Table Advanced Settings option, switch to the Text Wrapping tab of the Table - Advanced Settings window, select one of the following options: Inline table is used to select the wrapping style when the text is broken by the table as well as to set the alignment: left, center, right. Flow table is used to select the wrapping style when the text is wrapped around the table. Using the Text Wrapping tab of the Table - Advanced Settings window, you can also set up the following additional parameters: For inline tables, you can set the table Alignment type (left, center or right) and Indent from left. For floating tables, you can set the Distance from text and the table position on the Table Position tab." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/CopyClearFormatting.htm", "title": "Copy/clear text formatting", - "body": "To copy a certain text formatting, select the text passage which formatting you need to copy with the mouse or using the keyboard, click the Copy style icon at the Home tab of the top toolbar (the mouse pointer will look like this ), select the text passage you want to apply the same formatting to. To apply the copied formatting to multiple text passages, select the text passage which formatting you need to copy with the mouse or using the keyboard, double-click the Copy style icon at the Home tab of the top toolbar (the mouse pointer will look like this and the Copy style icon will remain selected: ), select the necessary text passages one by one to apply the same formatting to each of them, to exit this mode, click the Copy style icon once again or press the Esc key on the keyboard. To quickly remove the applied formatting from your text, select the text passage which formatting you want to remove, click the Clear style icon at the Home tab of the top toolbar." + "body": "To copy a certain text formatting, select the text passage whose formatting you need to copy with the mouse or using the keyboard, click the Copy style icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar (the mouse pointer will look like this ), select the required text passage to apply the same formatting. To apply the copied formatting to multiple text passages, select the text passage whose formatting you need to copy with the mouse or use the keyboard, double-click the Copy style icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar (the mouse pointer will look like this and the Copy style icon will remain selected: ), select the necessary text passages one by one to apply the same formatting to each of them, to exit this mode, click the Copy style icon once again or press the Esc key on the keyboard. To quickly remove the applied formatting from your text, select the text passage whose formatting you want to remove, click the Clear style icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/CopyPasteUndoRedo.htm", "title": "Copy/paste text passages, undo/redo your actions", - "body": "Use basic clipboard operations To cut, copy and paste text passages and inserted objects (autoshapes, images, charts) within the current document use the corresponding options from the right-click menu or icons available at any tab of the top toolbar: Cut – select a text fragment or an object and use the Cut option from the right-click menu to delete the selection and send it to the computer clipboard memory. The cut data can be later inserted to another place in the same document. Copy – select a text fragment or an object and use the Copy option from the right-click menu, or the Copy icon at the top toolbar to copy the selection to the computer clipboard memory. The copied data can be later inserted to another place in the same document. Paste – find the place in your document where you need to paste the previously copied text fragment/object and use the Paste option from the right-click menu, or the Paste icon at the top toolbar. The text/object will be inserted at the current cursor position. The data can be previously copied from the same document. In the online version, the following key combinations are only used to copy or paste data from/into another document or some other program, in the desktop version, both the corresponding buttons/menu options and key combinations can be used for any copy/paste operations: Ctrl+X key combination for cutting; Ctrl+C key combination for copying; Ctrl+V key combination for pasting. Note: instead of cutting and pasting text within the same document you can just select the necessary text passage and drag and drop it to the necessary position. Use the Paste Special feature Once the copied text is pasted, the Paste Special button appears next to the inserted text passage. Click this button to select the necessary paste option. When pasting the paragraph text or some text within autoshapes, the following options are available: Paste - allows to paste the copied text keeping its original formatting. Keep text only - allows to paste the text without its original formatting. If you paste the copied table into an existing table, the following options are available: Overwrite cells - allows to replace the existing table contents with the pasted data. This option is selected by default. Nest table - allows to paste the copied table as a nested table into the selected cell of the existing table. Keep text only - allows to paste the table contents as text values separated by the tab character. Undo/redo your actions To perform the undo/redo operations, use the corresponding icons in the editor header or keyboard shortcuts: Undo – use the Undo icon at the left part of the editor header or the Ctrl+Z key combination to undo the last operation you performed. Redo – use the Redo icon at the left part of the editor header or the Ctrl+Y key combination to redo the last undone operation. Note: when you co-edit a document in the Fast mode, the possibility to Redo the last undone operation is not available." + "body": "Use basic clipboard operations To cut, copy and paste text passages and inserted objects (autoshapes, images, charts) in the current document, select the corresponding options from the right-click menu or click the icons located on any tab of the top toolbar: Cut – select a text fragment or an object and use the Cut option from the right-click menu to delete the selected text and send it to the computer clipboard memory. The cut text can be later inserted to another place in the same document. Copy – select a text fragment or an object and use the Copy option from the right-click menu, or the Copy icon on the top toolbar to copy the selected text to the computer clipboard memory. The copied text can be later inserted to another place in the same document. Paste – find the place in your document where you need to paste the previously copied text fragment/object and use the the Paste option from the right-click menu, or the Paste icon on the top toolbar. The copied text/object will be inserted to the current cursor position. The data can be previously copied from the same document. In the online version, the key combinations below are only used to copy or paste data from/into another document or a program. In the desktop version, both corresponding buttons/menu options and key combinations can be used for any copy/paste operations: Ctrl+X key combination for cutting; Ctrl+C key combination for copying; Ctrl+V key combination for pasting. Note: instead of cutting and pasting text fragments in the same document, you can just select the required text passage and drag and drop it to the necessary position. Use the Paste Special feature Once the copied text is pasted, the Paste Special button appears next to the inserted text passage. Click this button to select the necessary paste option. When pasting a text paragraph or some text within autoshapes, the following options are available: Paste - allows pasting the copied text keeping its original formatting. Keep text only - allows pasting the text without its original formatting. If you copy a table and paste it into an already existing table, the following options are available: Overwrite cells - allows replacing the contents of the existing table with the copied data. This option is selected by default. Nest table - allows pasting the copied table as a nested table into the selected cell of the existing table. Keep text only - allows pasting the table contents as text values separated by the tab character. To enable / disable the automatic appearance of the Paste Special button after pasting, go to the File tab > Advanced Settings... and check / uncheck the Cut, copy and paste checkbox. Undo/redo your actions To perform undo/redo operations, click the corresponding icons in the editor header or use the following keyboard shortcuts: Undo – use the Undo icon on the left side of the editor header or the Ctrl+Z key combination to undo the last operation you performed. Redo – use the Redo icon on the left part of the editor header or the Ctrl+Y key combination to redo the last undone operation. Note: when you co-edit a document in the Fast mode, the possibility to Redo the last undone operation is not available." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/CreateLists.htm", "title": "Create lists", - "body": "To create a list in your document, place the cursor to the position where a list will be started (this can be a new line or the already entered text), switch to the Home tab of the top toolbar, select the list type you would like to start: Unordered list with markers is created using the Bullets icon situated at the top toolbar Ordered list with digits or letters is created using the Numbering icon situated at the top toolbar Note: click the downward arrow next to the Bullets or Numbering icon to select how the list is going to look like. now each time you press the Enter key at the end of the line a new ordered or unordered list item will appear. To stop that, press the Backspace key and continue with the common text paragraph. The program also creates numbered lists automatically when you enter digit 1 with a dot or a bracket and a space after it: 1., 1). Bulleted lists can be created automatically when you enter the -, * characters and a space after them. You can also change the text indentation in the lists and their nesting using the Multilevel list , Decrease indent , and Increase indent icons at the Home tab of the top toolbar. Note: the additional indentation and spacing parameters can be changed at the right sidebar and in the advanced settings window. To learn more about it, read the Change paragraph indents and Set paragraph line spacing section. Join and separate lists To join a list to the preceding one: click the first item of the second list with the right mouse button, use the Join to previous list option from the contextual menu. The lists will be joined and the numbering will continue in accordance with the first list numbering. To separate a list: click the list item where you want to begin a new list with the right mouse button, use the Separate list option from the contextual menu. The list will be separated, and the numbering in the second list will begin anew. Change numbering To continue sequential numbering in the second list according to the previous list numbering: click the first item of the second list with the right mouse button, use the Continue numbering option from the contextual menu. The numbering will continue in accordance with the first list numbering. To set a certain numbering initial value: click the list item where you want to apply a new numbering value with the right mouse button, use the Set numbering value option from the contextual menu, in a new window that opens, set the necessary numeric value and click the OK button. Change the list settings To change the bulleted or numbered list settings, such as a bullet/number type, alignment, size and color: click an existing list item or select the text you want to format as a list, click the Bullets or Numbering icon at the Home tab of the top toolbar, select the List Settings option, the List Settings window will open. The bulleted list settings window looks like this: The numbered list settings window looks like this: For the bulleted list, you can choose a character used as a bullet, while for the numbered list you can choose the numbering type. The Alignment, Size and Color options are the same both for the bulleted and numbered lists. Bullet - allows to select the necessary character used for the bulleted list. When you click on the Font and Symbol field, the Symbol window opens that allows to choose one of the available characters. To learn more on how to work with symbols, you can refer to this article. Type - allows to select the necessary numbering type used for the numbered list. The following options are available: None, 1, 2, 3,..., a, b, c,..., A, B, C,..., i, ii, iii,..., I, II, III,.... Alignment - allows to select the necessary bullet/number alignment type that is used to align bullets/numbers horizontally within the space designated for them. The available alignment types are the following: Left, Center, Right. Size - allows to select the necessary bullet/number size. The Like a text option is selected by default. When this option is selected, the bullet or number size corresponds to the text size. You can choose one of the predefined sizes from 8 to 96. Color - allows to select the necessary bullet/number color. The Like a text option is selected by default. When this option is selected, the bullet or number color corresponds to the text color. You can choose the Automatic option to apply the automatic color, or select one of the theme colors, or standard colors on the palette, or specify a custom color. All the changes are displayed in the Preview field. click OK to apply the changes and close the settings window. To change the multilevel list settings, click a list item, click the Multilevel list icon at the Home tab of the top toolbar, select the List Settings option, the List Settings window will open. The multilevel list settings window looks like this: Choose the necessary level of the list in the Level field on the left, then use the buttons on the top to adjust the bullet or number appearance for the selected level: Type - allows to select the necessary numbering type used for the numbered list or the necessary character used for the bulleted list. The following options are available for the numbered list: None, 1, 2, 3,..., a, b, c,..., A, B, C,..., i, ii, iii,..., I, II, III,.... For the bulleted list, you can choose one of the default symbols or use the New bullet option. When you click this option, the Symbol window opens that allows to choose one of the available characters. To learn more on how to work with symbols, you can refer to this article. Alignment - allows to select the necessary bullet/number alignment type that is used to align bullets/numbers horizontally within the space designated for them at the beginning of the paragraph. The available alignment types are the following: Left, Center, Right. Size - allows to select the necessary bullet/number size. The Like a text option is selected by default. You can choose one of the predefined sizes from 8 to 96. Color - allows to select the necessary bullet/number color. The Like a text option is selected by default. When this option is selected, the bullet or number color corresponds to the text color. You can choose the Automatic option to apply the automatic color, or select one of the theme colors, or standard colors on the palette, or specify a custom color. All the changes are displayed in the Preview field. click OK to apply the changes and close the settings window." + "body": "To create a list in your document, place the cursor to the position where a list will be started (this can be a new line or the already entered text), switch to the Home tab of the top toolbar, select the list type you would like to start: Unordered list with markers is created using the Bullets icon on the top toolbar Ordered list with digits or letters is created using the Numbering icon on the top toolbar Note: click the downward arrow next to the Bullets or Numbering icon to select how the list is going to look like. each time you press the Enter key at the end of the line, a new ordered or unordered list item will appear. To stop that, press the Backspace key and keep on typing common text paragraphs. The program also creates numbered lists automatically when you enter digit 1 with a dot or a bracket and a space after it: 1., 1). Bulleted lists can be created automatically when you enter the -, * characters and a space after them. You can also change the text indentation in the lists and their nesting by clicking the Multilevel list , Decrease indent , and Increase indent icons on the Home tab of the top toolbar. Note: the additional indentation and spacing parameters can be changed on the right sidebar and in the advanced settings window. To learn more about it, read the Change paragraph indents and Set paragraph line spacing section. Combine and separate lists To combine a list with the previous one: click the first item of the second list with the right mouse button, use the Join to previous list option from the contextual menu. The lists will be joined and the numbering will continue in accordance with the first list numbering. To separate a list: click the list item where you want to begin a new list with the right mouse button, use the Separate list option from the contextual menu. The lists will be combined, and the numbering will continue in accordance with the first list numbering. Change numbering To continue sequential numbering in the second list according to the previous list numbering: click the first item of the second list with the right mouse button, use the Continue numbering option from the contextual menu. The numbering will continue in accordance with the first list numbering. To set a certain numbering initial value: click the list item where you want to apply a new numbering value with the right mouse button, use the Set numbering value option from the contextual menu, in the new opened window, set the required numeric value and click the OK button. Change the list settings To change the bulleted or numbered list settings, such as a bullet/number type, alignment, size and color: click an existing list item or select the text you want to format as a list, click the Bullets or Numbering icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar, select the List Settings option, the List Settings window will open. The bulleted list settings window looks like this: The numbered list settings window looks like this: For the bulleted list, you can choose a character used as a bullet, while for the numbered list you can choose the numbering type. The Alignment, Size and Color options are the same both for the bulleted and numbered lists. Bullet allows selecting the required character used for the bulleted list. When you click on the Font and Symbol field, the Symbol window will appear, and you will be able to choose one of the available characters. To learn more on how to work with symbols, please refer to this article. Type allows selecting the required numbering type used for the numbered list. The following options are available: None, 1, 2, 3,..., a, b, c,..., A, B, C,..., i, ii, iii,..., I, II, III,.... Alignment allows selecting the required bullet/number alignment type that is used to align bullets/numbers horizontally. The following alignment types are available: Left, Center, Right. Size allows selecting the required bullet/number size. The Like a text option is selected by default. When this option is selected, the bullet or number size corresponds to the text size. You can choose one of the predefined sizes ranging from 8 to 96. Color allows selecting the required bullet/number color. The Like a text option is selected by default. When this option is selected, the bullet or number color corresponds to the text color. You can choose the Automatic option to apply the automatic color, or select one of the theme colors, or standard colors in the palette, or specify a custom color. All the changes are displayed in the Preview field. click OK to apply the changes and close the settings window. To change the multilevel list settings, click a list item, click the Multilevel list icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar, select the List Settings option, the List Settings window will open. The multilevel list settings window looks like this: Choose the necessary level of the list in the Level field on the left, then use the buttons on the top to adjust the bullet or number appearance for the selected level: Type allows selecting the required numbering type used for the numbered list or the required character used for the bulleted list. The following options are available for the numbered list: None, 1, 2, 3,..., a, b, c,..., A, B, C,..., i, ii, iii,..., I, II, III,.... For the bulleted list, you can choose one of the default symbols or use the New bullet option. When you click this option, the Symbol window will appear, and you will be able to choose one of the available characters. To learn more on how to work with symbols, please refer to this article. Alignment allows selecting the required bullet/number alignment type that is used to align bullets/numbers horizontally at the beginning of the paragraph. The following alignment types are available: Left, Center, Right. Size allows selecting the required bullet/number size. The Like a text option is selected by default. You can choose one of the predefined sizes ranging from 8 to 96. Color allows selecting the required bullet/number color. The Like a text option is selected by default. When this option is selected, the bullet or number color corresponds to the text color. You can choose the Automatic option to apply the automatic color, or select one of the theme colors, or standard colors on the palette, or specify a custom color. All the changes are displayed in the Preview field. click OK to apply the changes and close the settings window." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/CreateTableOfContents.htm", "title": "Create a Table of Contents", - "body": "A table of contents contains a list of all chapters (sections etc.) in a document and displays the numbers of the pages where each chapter is started. This allows to easily navigate through a multi-page document quickly switching to the necessary part of the text. The table of contents is generated automatically on the base of the document headings formatted using built-in styles. This makes it easy to update the created table of contents without the necessity to edit headings and change page numbers manually if the document text has been changed. Define the heading structure Format headings First of all, format headings in you document using one of the predefined styles. To do that, Select the text you want to include into the table of contents. Open the style menu on the right side of the Home tab at the top toolbar. Click the style you want to apply. By default, you can use the Heading 1 - Heading 9 styles. Note: if you want to use other styles (e.g. Title, Subtitle etc.) to format headings that will be included into the table of contents, you will need to adjust the table of contents settings first (see the corresponding section below). To learn more about available formatting styles, you can refer to this page. Manage headings Once the headings are formatted, you can click the Navigation icon at the left sidebar to open the panel that displays the list of all headings with corresponding nesting levels. This panel allows to easily navigate between headings in the document text as well as manage the heading structure. Right-click on a heading in the list and use one of the available options from the menu: Promote - to move the currently selected heading up to the higher level in the hierarchical structure, e.g. change it from Heading 2 to Heading 1. Demote - to move the currently selected heading down to the lower level in the hierarchical structure, e.g. change it from Heading 1 to Heading 2. New heading before - to add a new empty heading of the same level before the currently selected one. New heading after - to add a new empty heading of the same level after the currently selected one. New subheading - to add a new empty subheading (i.e. a heading with lower level) after the currently selected heading. When the heading or subheading is added, click on the added empty heading in the list and type in your own text. This can be done both in the document text and on the Navigation panel itself. Select content - to select the text below the current heading in the document (including the text related to all subheadings of this heading). Expand all - to expand all levels of headings at the Navigation panel. Collapse all - to collapse all levels of headings, excepting level 1, at the Navigation panel. Expand to level - to expand the heading structure to the selected level. E.g. if you select level 3, then levels 1, 2 and 3 will be expanded, while level 4 and all lower levels will be collapsed. To manually expand or collapse separate heading levels, use the arrows to the left of the headings. To close the Navigation panel, click the Navigation icon at the left sidebar once again. Insert a Table of Contents into the document To insert a table of contents into your document: Position the insertion point where you want to add the table of contents. Switch to the References tab of the top toolbar. Click the Table of Contents icon at the top toolbar, or click the arrow next to this icon and select the necessary layout option from the menu. You can select the table of contents that displays headings, page numbers and leaders, or headings only. Note: the table of content appearance can be adjusted later via the table of contents settings. The table of contents will be added at the current cursor position. To change the position of the table of contents, you can select the table of contents field (content control) and simply drag it to the desired place. To do that, click the button in the upper left corner of the table of contents field and drag it without releasing the mouse button to another position in the document text. To navigate between headings, press the Ctrl key and click the necessary heading within the table of contents field. You will go to the corresponding page. Adjust the created Table of Contents Refresh the Table of Contents After the table of contents is created, you may continue editing your text by adding new chapters, changing their order, removing some paragraphs, or expanding the text related to a heading so that the page numbers that correspond to the preceding or subsequent section may change. In this case, use the Refresh option to automatically apply all changes to the table of contents. Click the arrow next to the Refresh icon at the References tab of the top toolbar and select the necessary option from the menu: Refresh entire table - to add the headings that you added to the document, remove the ones you deleted from the document, update the edited (renamed) headings as well as update page numbers. Refresh page numbers only - to update page numbers without applying changes to the headings. Alternatively, you can select the table of contents in the document text and click the Refresh icon at the top of the table of contents field to display the above mentioned options. It's also possible to right-click anywhere within the table of contents and use the corresponding options from the contextual menu. Adjust the Table of Contents settings To open the table of contents settings, you can proceed in the following ways: Click the arrow next to the Table of Contents icon at the top toolbar and select the Settings option from the menu. Select the table of contents in the document text, click the arrow next to the table of contents field title and select the Settings option from the menu. Right-click anywhere within the table of contents and use the Table of contents settings option from the contextual menu. A new window will open where you can adjust the following settings: Show page numbers - this option allows to choose if you want to display page numbers or not. Right align page numbers - this option allows to choose if you want to align page numbers by the right side of the page or not. Leader - this option allows to choose the leader type you want to use. A leader is a line of characters (dots or hyphens) that fills the space between a heading and a corresponding page number. It's also possible to select the None option if you do not want to use leaders. Format Table of Contents as links - this option is checked by default. If you uncheck it, you will not be able to switch to the necessary chapter by pressing Ctrl and clicking the corresponding heading. Build table of contents from - this section allows to specify the necessary number of outline levels as well as the default styles that will be used to create the table of contents. Check the necessary radio button: Outline levels - when this option is selected, you will be able to adjust the number of hierarchical levels used in the table of contents. Click the arrows in the Levels field to decrease or increase the number of levels (the values from 1 to 9 are available). E.g., if you select the value of 3, headings that have levels 4 - 9 will not be included into the table of contents. Selected styles - when this option is selected, you can specify additional styles that can be used to build the table of contents and assign a corresponding outline level to each of them. Specify the desired level value in the field to the right of the style. Once you save the settings, you will be able to use this style when creating the table of contents. Styles - this options allows to select the desired appearance of the table of contents. Select the necessary style from the drop-down list. The preview field above displays how the table of contents should look like. The following four default styles are available: Simple, Standard, Modern, Classic. The Current option is used if you customize the table of contents style. Click the OK button within the settings window to apply the changes. Customize the Table of Contents style After you apply one of the default table of contents styles within the Table of Contents settings window, you can additionally modify this style so that the text within the table of contents field looks like you need. Select the text within the table of contents field, e.g. pressing the button in the upper left corner of the table of contents content control. Format table of contents items changing their font type, size, color or applying the font decoration styles. Consequently update styles for items of each level. To update the style, right-click the formatted item, select the Formatting as Style option from the contextual menu and click the Update toc N style option (toc 2 style corresponds to items that have level 2, toc 3 style corresponds to items with level 3 and so on). Refresh the table of contents. Remove the Table of Contents To remove the table of contents from the document: click the arrow next to the Table of Contents icon at the top toolbar and use the Remove table of contents option, or click the arrow next to the table of contents content control title and use the Remove table of contents option." + "body": "A table of contents contains a list of all the chapters (sections, etc.) in a document and displays the numbers of the pages where each chapter begins. It allows easily navigating through a multi-page document and quickly switching to the required part of the text. The table of contents is generated automatically on the basis of the document headings formatted using built-in styles. This makes it easy to update the created table of contents without having to edit the headings and change the page numbers manually if the text of the document has been changed. Define the heading structure Format headings First of all, format the headings in your document using one of the predefined styles. To do that, Select the text you want to include into the table of contents. Open the style menu on the right side of the Home tab at the top toolbar. Click the required style to be applied. By default, you can use the Heading 1 - Heading 9 styles. Note: if you want to use other styles (e.g. Title, Subtitle etc.) to format headings that will be included into the table of contents, you will need to adjust the table of contents settings first (see the corresponding section below). To learn more about available formatting styles, please refer to this page. Manage headings Once the headings are formatted, you can click the Navigation icon on the left sidebar to open the panel that displays the list of all headings with corresponding nesting levels. This panel allows easily navigating between headings in the document text as well as managing the heading structure. Right-click on a heading in the list and use one of the available options from the menu: Promote - to move the currently selected heading up to the higher level in the hierarchical structure, e.g. change it from Heading 2 to Heading 1. Demote - to move the currently selected heading down to the lower level in the hierarchical structure, e.g. change it from Heading 1 to Heading 2. New heading before - to add a new empty heading of the same level before the currently selected one. New heading after - to add a new empty heading of the same level after the currently selected one. New subheading - to add a new empty subheading (i.e. a heading with lower level) after the currently selected heading. When the heading or subheading is added, click on the added empty heading in the list and type in your own text. This can be done both in the document text and on the Navigation panel itself. Select content - to select the text below the current heading in the document (including the text related to all subheadings of this heading). Expand all - to expand all levels of headings at the Navigation panel. Collapse all - to collapse all levels of headings, excepting level 1, at the Navigation panel. Expand to level - to expand the heading structure to the selected level. E.g. if you select level 3, then levels 1, 2 and 3 will be expanded, while level 4 and all lower levels will be collapsed. To manually expand or collapse separate heading levels, use the arrows to the left of the headings. To close the Navigation panel, click the Navigation icon on the left sidebar once again. Insert a Table of Contents into the document To insert a table of contents into your document: Position the insertion point where the table of contents should be added. Switch to the References tab of the top toolbar. Click the Table of Contents icon on the top toolbar, or click the arrow next to this icon and select the necessary layout option from the menu. You can select the table of contents that displays headings, page numbers and leaders, or headings only. Note: the table of content appearance can be adjusted later via the table of contents settings. The table of contents will be added at the current cursor position. To change the position of the table of contents, you can select the table of contents field (content control) and simply drag it to the desired place. To do that, click the button in the upper left corner of the table of contents field and drag it without releasing the mouse button to another position in the document text. To navigate between headings, press the Ctrl key and click the necessary heading within the table of contents field. You will go to the corresponding page. Adjust the created Table of Contents Refresh the Table of Contents After the table of contents is created, you can continue editing your text by adding new chapters, changing their order, removing some paragraphs, or expanding the text related to a heading so that the page numbers that correspond to the previous or the following section may change. In this case, use the Refresh option to automatically apply all changes to the table of contents. Click the arrow next to the Refresh icon on the References tab of the top toolbar and select the necessary option from the menu: Refresh entire table - to add the headings that you added to the document, remove the ones you deleted from the document, update the edited (renamed) headings as well as update page numbers. Refresh page numbers only - to update page numbers without applying changes to the headings. Alternatively, you can select the table of contents in the document text and click the Refresh icon at the top of the table of contents field to display the above mentioned options. It's also possible to right-click anywhere within the table of contents and use the corresponding options from the contextual menu. Adjust the Table of Contents settings To open the table of contents settings, you can proceed in the following ways: Click the arrow next to the Table of Contents icon on the top toolbar and select the Settings option from the menu. Select the table of contents in the document text, click the arrow next to the table of contents field title and select the Settings option from the menu. Right-click anywhere within the table of contents and use the Table of contents settings option from the contextual menu. A new window will open, and you will be able to adjust the following settings: Show page numbers - this option allows displaying the page numbers. Right align page numbers - this option allows aligning the page numbers on the right side of the page. Leader - this option allows choose the required leader type. A leader is a line of characters (dots or hyphens) that fills the space between a heading and the corresponding page number. It's also possible to select the None option if you do not want to use leaders. Format Table of Contents as links - this option is checked by default. If you uncheck it, you will not be able to switch to the necessary chapter by pressing Ctrl and clicking the corresponding heading. Build table of contents from - this section allows specifying the necessary number of outline levels as well as the default styles that will be used to create the table of contents. Check the necessary radio button: Outline levels - when this option is selected, you will be able to adjust the number of hierarchical levels used in the table of contents. Click the arrows in the Levels field to decrease or increase the number of levels (the values from 1 to 9 are available). E.g., if you select the value of 3, headings that have levels 4 - 9 will not be included into the table of contents. Selected styles - when this option is selected, you can specify additional styles that can be used to build the table of contents and assign the corresponding outline level to each of them. Specify the desired level value in the field on the right of the style. Once you save the settings, you will be able to use this style when creating a table of contents. Styles - this options allows selecting the desired appearance of the table of contents. Select the necessary style from the drop-down list. The preview field above displays how the table of contents should look like. The following four default styles are available: Simple, Standard, Modern, Classic. The Current option is used if you customize the table of contents style. Click the OK button within the settings window to apply the changes. Customize the Table of Contents style After you apply one of the default table of contents styles within the Table of Contents settings window, you can additionally modify this style so that the text within the table of contents field looks like you need. Select the text within the table of contents field, e.g. pressing the button in the upper left corner of the table of contents content control. Format table of contents items changing their font type, size, color or applying the font decoration styles. Consequently update styles for items of each level. To update the style, right-click the formatted item, select the Formatting as Style option from the contextual menu and click the Update toc N style option (toc 2 style corresponds to items that have level 2, toc 3 style corresponds to items with level 3 and so on). Refresh the table of contents. Remove the Table of Contents To remove the table of contents from the document: click the arrow next to the Table of Contents icon on the top toolbar and use the Remove table of contents option, or click the arrow next to the table of contents content control title and use the Remove table of contents option." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/DecorationStyles.htm", "title": "Apply font decoration styles", - "body": "You can apply various font decoration styles using the corresponding icons situated at the Home tab of the top toolbar. Note: in case you want to apply the formatting to the text already present in the document, select it with the mouse or using the keyboard and apply the formatting. Bold Is used to make the font bold giving it more weight. Italic Is used to make the font italicized giving it some right side tilt. Underline Is used to make the text underlined with the line going under the letters. Strikeout Is used to make the text struck out with the line going through the letters. Superscript Is used to make the text smaller and place it to the upper part of the text line, e.g. as in fractions. Subscript Is used to make the text smaller and place it to the lower part of the text line, e.g. as in chemical formulas. To access advanced font settings, click the right mouse button and select the Paragraph Advanced Settings option from the menu or use the Show advanced settings link at the right sidebar. Then the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window will open where you need to switch to the Font tab. Here you can use the following font decoration styles and settings: Strikethrough is used to make the text struck out with the line going through the letters. Double strikethrough is used to make the text struck out with the double line going through the letters. Superscript is used to make the text smaller and place it to the upper part of the text line, e.g. as in fractions. Subscript is used to make the text smaller and place it to the lower part of the text line, e.g. as in chemical formulas. Small caps is used to make all letters lower case. All caps is used to make all letters upper case. Spacing is used to set the space between the characters. Increase the default value to apply the Expanded spacing, or decrease the default value to apply the Condensed spacing. Use the arrow buttons or enter the necessary value in the box. Position is used to set the characters position (vertical offset) in the line. Increase the default value to move characters upwards, or decrease the default value to move characters downwards. Use the arrow buttons or enter the necessary value in the box. All the changes will be displayed in the preview field below." + "body": "You can apply various font decoration styles using the corresponding icons on the Home tab of the top toolbar. Note: in case you want to apply the formatting to the already existing text in the document, select it with the mouse or use the keyboard and apply the formatting. Bold Used to make the font bold giving it a heavier appearance. Italic Used to make the font slightly slanted to the right. Underline Used to make the text underlined with a line going under the letters. Strikeout Used to make the text struck out with a line going through the letters. Superscript Used to make the text smaller placing it in the upper part of the text line, e.g. as in fractions. Subscript Used to make the text smaller placing it in the lower part of the text line, e.g. as in chemical formulas. To access the advanced font settings, click the right mouse button and select the Paragraph Advanced Settings option from the menu or use the Show advanced settings link on the right sidebar. Then the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window will appear, and you will need to switch to the Font tab. Here you can use the following font decoration styles and settings: Strikethrough is used to make the text struck out with a line going through the letters. Double strikethrough is used to make the text struck out with a double line going through the letters. Superscript is used to make the text smaller placing it in the upper part of the text line, e.g. as in fractions. Subscript is used to make the text smaller placing it in the lower part of the text line, e.g. as in chemical formulas. Small caps is used to make all letters lower case. All caps is used to make all letters upper case. Spacing is used to set the space between the characters. Increase the default value to apply the Expanded spacing, or decrease the default value to apply the Condensed spacing. Use the arrow buttons or enter the necessary value in the box. Position is used to set the characters position (vertical offset) in the line. Increase the default value to move characters upwards, or decrease the default value to move characters downwards. Use the arrow buttons or enter the necessary value in the box. All the changes will be displayed in the preview field below." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/FontTypeSizeColor.htm", "title": "Set font type, size, and color", - "body": "You can select the font type, its size and color using the corresponding icons situated at the Home tab of the top toolbar. Note: in case you want to apply the formatting to the text already present in the document, select it with the mouse or using the keyboard and apply the formatting. Font Is used to select one of the fonts from the list of the available ones. If a required font is not available in the list, you can download and install it on your operating system, after that the font will be available for use in the desktop version. Font size Is used to select among the preset font size values from the dropdown list (the default values are: 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 36, 48, 72 and 96). It's also possible to manually enter a custom value to the font size field and then press Enter. Increment font size Is used to change the font size making it larger one point each time the button is pressed. Decrement font size Is used to change the font size making it smaller one point each time the button is pressed. Highlight color Is used to mark separate sentences, phrases, words, or even characters by adding a color band that imitates highlighter pen effect around the text. You can select the necessary part of the text and then click the downward arrow next to the icon to select a color on the palette (this color set does not depend on the selected Color scheme and includes 16 colors) - the color will be applied to the text selection. Alternatively, you can first choose a highlight color and then start selecting the text with the mouse - the mouse pointer will look like this and you'll be able to highlight several different parts of your text sequentially. To stop highlighting just click the icon once again. To clear the highlight color, choose the No Fill option. Highlight color is different from the Background color as the latter is applied to the whole paragraph and completely fills all the paragraph space from the left page margin to the right page margin. Font color Is used to change the color of the letters/characters in the text. By default, the automatic font color is set in a new blank document. It is displayed as a black font on the white background. If you change the background color into black, the font color will automatically change into white to keep the text clearly visible. To choose a different color, click the downward arrow next to the icon and select a color from the available palettes (the colors on the Theme Colors palette depend on the selected color scheme). After you change the default font color, you can use the Automatic option in the color palettes window to quickly restore the automatic color for the selected text passage. Note: to learn more about the work with color palettes, please refer to this page." + "body": "Set the font type, size, and color You can select the font type, its size and color using the corresponding icons on the Home tab of the top toolbar. Note: in case you want to apply the formatting to the already existing text in the document, select it with the mouse or use the keyboard and apply the formatting. Font Used to select a font from the list of the the available fonts. If the required font is not available in the list, you can download and install it on your operating system, and the font will be available in the desktop version. Font size Used to choose from the preset font size values in the dropdown list (the default values are: 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 36, 48, 72 and 96). It's also possible to manually enter a custom value in the font size field and then press Enter. Increment font size Used to change the font size making it one point bigger each time the button is pressed. Decrement font size Used to change the font size making it one point smaller each time the button is pressed. Highlight color Used to mark separate sentences, phrases, words, or even characters by adding a color band that imitates the highlighter pen effect throughout the text. You can select the required part of the text and click the downward arrow next to the icon to select a color in the palette (this color set does not depend on the selected Color scheme and includes 16 colors) - the color will be applied to the selected text. Alternatively, you can first choose a highlight color and then start selecting the text with the mouse - the mouse pointer will look like this and you'll be able to highlight several different parts of your text sequentially. To stop highlighting, just click the icon once again. To delete the highlight color, choose the No Fill option. The Highlight color is different from the Background color as the latter is applied to the whole paragraph and completely fills all the paragraph space from the left page margin to the right page margin. Font color Used to change the color of the letters/characters in the text. By default, the automatic font color is set in a new blank document. It is displayed as a black font on the white background. If you change the background color to black, the font color will automatically change to white to keep the text clearly visible. To choose a different color, click the downward arrow next to the icon and select a color from the available palettes (the colors in the Theme Colors palette depend on the selected color scheme). After you change the default font color, you can use the Automatic option in the color palettes window to quickly restore the automatic color for the selected text passage. Note: to learn more about color palettes, please refer to this page." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/FormattingPresets.htm", "title": "Apply formatting styles", - "body": "Each formatting style is a set of predefined formatting options: (font size, color, line spacing, alignment etc.). The styles allow you to quickly format different parts of the document (headings, subheadings, lists, normal text, quotes) instead of applying several formatting options individually each time. This also ensures a consistent appearance throughout the entire document. Style application depends on whether a style is a paragraph style (normal, no spacing, headings, list paragraph etc.), or the text style (based on the font type, size, color), as well as on whether a text passage is selected, or the mouse cursor is positioned within a word. In some cases you might need to select the necessary style from the style library twice so that it can be applied correctly: when you click the style at the style panel for the first time, the paragraph style properties are applied. When you click it for the second time, the text properties are applied. Use default styles To apply one of the available text formatting styles, place the cursor within the paragraph you need, or select several paragraphs you want to apply one of the formatting styles to, select the needed style from the style gallery on the right at the Home tab of the top toolbar. The following formatting styles are available: normal, no spacing, heading 1-9, title, subtitle, quote, intense quote, list paragraph, footer, header, footnote text. Edit existing styles and create new ones To change an existing style: Apply the necessary style to a paragraph. Select the paragraph text and change all the formatting parameters you need. Save the changes made: right-click the edited text, select the Formatting as Style option and then choose the Update 'StyleName' Style option ('StyleName' corresponds to the style you've applied at the step 1), or select the edited text passage with the mouse, drop-down the style gallery, right-click the style you want to change and select the Update from selection option. Once the style is modified, all the paragraphs within the document formatted using this style will change their appearance correspondingly. To create a completely new style: Format a text passage as you need. Select an appropriate way to save the style: right-click the edited text, select the Formatting as Style option and then choose the Create new Style option, or select the edited text passage with the mouse, drop-down the style gallery and click the New style from selection option. Set the new style parameters in the Create New Style window that opens: Specify the new style name in the text entry field. Select the desired style for the subsequent paragraph from the Next paragraph style list. It's also possible to choose the Same as created new style option. Click the OK button. The created style will be added to the style gallery. Manage your custom styles: To restore the default settings of a certain style you've changed, right-click the style you want to restore and select the Restore to default option. To restore the default settings of all the styles you've changed, right-click any default style in the style gallery and select the Restore all to default styles option. To delete one of the new styles you've created, right-click the style you want to delete and select the Delete style option. To delete all the new styles you've created, right-click any new style you've created and select the Delete all custom styles option." + "body": "Each formatting style is a set of predefined formatting options: (font size, color, line spacing, alignment etc.). The styles allow you to quickly format different parts of the document (headings, subheadings, lists, normal text, quotes) instead of applying several formatting options individually each time. This also ensures the consistent appearance of the whole document. Applying a style depends on whether this style is a paragraph style (normal, no spacing, headings, list paragraph etc.), or a text style (based on the font type, size, color). It also depends on whether a text passage is selected, or the mouse cursor is placed on a word. In some cases you might need to select the required style from the style library twice, so that it can be applied correctly: when you click the style in the style panel for the first time, the paragraph style properties are applied. When you click it for the second time, the text properties are applied. Use default styles To apply one of the available text formatting styles, place the cursor within the required paragraph, or select several paragraphs, select the required style from the style gallery on the right on the Home tab of the top toolbar. The following formatting styles are available: normal, no spacing, heading 1-9, title, subtitle, quote, intense quote, list paragraph, footer, header, footnote text. Edit existing styles and create new ones To change an existing style: Apply the necessary style to a paragraph. Select the paragraph text and change all the formatting parameters you need. Save the changes made: right-click the edited text, select the Formatting as Style option and then choose the Update 'StyleName' Style option ('StyleName' corresponds to the style you've applied at the step 1), or select the edited text passage with the mouse, drop-down the style gallery, right-click the style you want to change and select the Update from selection option. Once the style is modified, all the paragraphs in the document formatted with this style will change their appearance correspondingly. To create a completely new style: Format a text passage as you need. Select an appropriate way to save the style: right-click the edited text, select the Formatting as Style option and then choose the Create new Style option, or select the edited text passage with the mouse, drop-down the style gallery and click the New style from selection option. Set the new style parameters in the opened Create New Style window: Specify the new style name in the text entry field. Select the desired style for the subsequent paragraph from the Next paragraph style list. It's also possible to choose the Same as created new style option. Click the OK button. The created style will be added to the style gallery. Manage your custom styles: To restore the default settings of a certain style you've changed, right-click the style you want to restore and select the Restore to default option. To restore the default settings of all the styles you've changed, right-click any default style in the style gallery and select the Restore all to default styles option. To delete one of the new styles you've created, right-click the style you want to delete and select the Delete style option. To delete all the new styles you've created, right-click any new style you've created and select the Delete all custom styles option." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm", "title": "Insert autoshapes", - "body": "Insert an autoshape To add an autoshape to your document, switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, click the Shape icon at the top toolbar, select one of the available autoshape groups: basic shapes, figured arrows, math, charts, stars & ribbons, callouts, buttons, rectangles, lines, click the necessary autoshape within the selected group, place the mouse cursor where you want the shape to be put, once the autoshape is added you can change its size, position and properties. Note: to add a caption within the autoshape make sure the shape is selected on the page and start typing your text. The text you add in this way becomes a part of the autoshape (when you move or rotate the shape, the text moves or rotates with it). It's also possible to add a caption to the autoshape. To learn more on how to work with captions for autoshapes, you can refer to this article. Move and resize autoshapes To change the autoshape size, drag small squares situated on the shape edges. To maintain the original proportions of the selected autoshape while resizing, hold down the Shift key and drag one of the corner icons. When modifying some shapes, for example figured arrows or callouts, the yellow diamond-shaped icon is also available. It allows you to adjust some aspects of the shape, for example, the length of the head of an arrow. To alter the autoshape position, use the icon that appears after hovering your mouse cursor over the autoshape. Drag the autoshape to the necessary position without releasing the mouse button. When you move the autoshape, guide lines are displayed to help you position the object on the page precisely (if a wrapping style other than inline is selected). To move the autoshape by one-pixel increments, hold down the Ctrl key and use the keybord arrows. To move the autoshape strictly horizontally/vertically and prevent it from moving in a perpendicular direction, hold down the Shift key when dragging. To rotate the autoshape, hover the mouse cursor over the rotation handle and drag it clockwise or counterclockwise. To constrain the rotation angle to 15 degree increments, hold down the Shift key while rotating. Note: the list of keyboard shortcuts that can be used when working with objects is available here. Adjust autoshape settings To align and arrange autoshapes, use the right-click menu. The menu options are: Cut, Copy, Paste - standard options which are used to cut or copy a selected text/object and paste a previously cut/copied text passage or object to the current cursor position. Arrange is used to bring the selected autoshape to foreground, send to background, move forward or backward as well as group or ungroup shapes to perform operations with several of them at once. To learn more on how to arrange objects you can refer to this page. Align is used to align the shape left, center, right, top, middle, bottom. To learn more on how to align objects you can refer to this page. Wrapping Style is used to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind - or edit the wrap boundary. The Edit Wrap Boundary option is available only if you select a wrapping style other than Inline. Drag wrap points to customize the boundary. To create a new wrap point, click anywhere on the red line and drag it to the necessary position. Rotate is used to rotate the shape by 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise as well as to flip the shape horizontally or vertically. Shape Advanced Settings is used to open the 'Shape - Advanced Settings' window. Some of the autoshape settings can be altered using the Shape settings tab of the right sidebar. To activate it click the shape and choose the Shape settings icon on the right. Here you can change the following properties: Fill - use this section to select the autoshape fill. You can choose the following options: Color Fill - select this option to specify the solid color you want to fill the inner space of the selected autoshape with. Click the colored box below and select the necessary color from the available color sets or specify any color you like: Gradient Fill - select this option to fill the shape with two colors which smoothly change from one to another. Style - choose one of the available options: Linear (colors change in a straight line i.e. along a horizontal/vertical axis or diagonally at a 45 degree angle) or Radial (colors change in a circular path from the center to the edges). Direction - choose a template from the menu. If the Linear gradient is selected, the following directions are available: top-left to bottom-right, top to bottom, top-right to bottom-left, right to left, bottom-right to top-left, bottom to top, bottom-left to top-right, left to right. If the Radial gradient is selected, only one template is available. Gradient - click on the left slider under the gradient bar to activate the color box which corresponds to the first color. Click on the color box on the right to choose the first color in the palette. Drag the slider to set the gradient stop i.e. the point where one color changes into another. Use the right slider under the gradient bar to specify the second color and set the gradient stop. Picture or Texture - select this option to use an image or a predefined texture as the shape background. If you wish to use an image as a background for the shape, you can add an image From File selecting it on your computer HDD or From URL inserting the appropriate URL address into the opened window. If you wish to use a texture as a background for the shape, open the From Texture menu and select the necessary texture preset. Currently, the following textures are available: canvas, carton, dark fabric, grain, granite, grey paper, knit, leather, brown paper, papyrus, wood. In case the selected Picture has less or more dimensions than the autoshape has, you can choose the Stretch or Tile setting from the dropdown list. The Stretch option allows you to adjust the image size to fit the autoshape size so that it could fill the space completely. The Tile option allows you to display only a part of the bigger image keeping its original dimensions or repeat the smaller image keeping its original dimensions over the autoshape surface so that it could fill the space completely. Note: any selected Texture preset fills the space completely, but you can apply the Stretch effect if necessary. Pattern - select this option to fill the shape with a two-colored design composed of regularly repeated elements. Pattern - select one of the predefined designs from the menu. Foreground color - click this color box to change the color of the pattern elements. Background color - click this color box to change the color of the pattern background. No Fill - select this option if you don't want to use any fill. Opacity - use this section to set an Opacity level dragging the slider or entering the percent value manually. The default value is 100%. It corresponds to the full opacity. The 0% value corresponds to the full transparency. Stroke - use this section to change the autoshape stroke width, color or type. To change the stroke width, select one of the available options from the Size dropdown list. The available options are: 0.5 pt, 1 pt, 1.5 pt, 2.25 pt, 3 pt, 4.5 pt, 6 pt. Alternatively, select the No Line option if you don't want to use any stroke. To change the stroke color, click on the colored box below and select the necessary color. To change the stroke type, select the necessary option from the corresponding dropdown list (a solid line is applied by default, you can change it to one of the available dashed lines). Rotation is used to rotate the shape by 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise as well as to flip the shape horizontally or vertically. Click one of the buttons: to rotate the shape by 90 degrees counterclockwise to rotate the shape by 90 degrees clockwise to flip the shape horizontally (left to right) to flip the shape vertically (upside down) Wrapping Style - use this section to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind (for more information see the advanced settings description below). Change Autoshape - use this section to replace the current autoshape with another one selected from the dropdown list. Show shadow - check this option to display shape with shadow. Adjust autoshape advanced settings To change the advanced settings of the autoshape, right-click it and select the Advanced Settings option in the menu or use the Show advanced settings link at the right sidebar. The 'Shape - Advanced Settings' window will open: The Size tab contains the following parameters: Width - use one of these options to change the autoshape width. Absolute - specify an exact value measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified at the File -> Advanced Settings... tab). Relative - specify a percentage relative to the left margin width, the margin (i.e. the distance between the left and right margins), the page width, or the right margin width. Height - use one of these options to change the autoshape height. Absolute - specify an exact value measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified at the File -> Advanced Settings... tab). Relative - specify a percentage relative to the margin (i.e. the distance between the top and bottom margins), the bottom margin height, the page height, or the top margin height. If the Lock aspect ratio option is checked, the width and height will be changed together preserving the original shape aspect ratio. The Rotation tab contains the following parameters: Angle - use this option to rotate the shape by an exactly specified angle. Enter the necessary value measured in degrees into the field or adjust it using the arrows on the right. Flipped - check the Horizontally box to flip the shape horizontally (left to right) or check the Vertically box to flip the shape vertically (upside down). The Text Wrapping tab contains the following parameters: Wrapping Style - use this option to change the way the shape is positioned relative to the text: it will either be a part of the text (in case you select the inline style) or bypassed by it from all sides (if you select one of the other styles). Inline - the shape is considered to be a part of the text, like a character, so when the text moves, the shape moves as well. In this case the positioning options are inaccessible. If one of the following styles is selected, the shape can be moved independently of the text and positioned on the page exactly: Square - the text wraps the rectangular box that bounds the shape. Tight - the text wraps the actual shape edges. Through - the text wraps around the shape edges and fills in the open white space within the shape. So that the effect can appear, use the Edit Wrap Boundary option from the right-click menu. Top and bottom - the text is only above and below the shape. In front - the shape overlaps the text. Behind - the text overlaps the shape. If you select the square, tight, through, or top and bottom style you will be able to set up some additional parameters - distance from text at all sides (top, bottom, left, right). The Position tab is available only if you select a wrapping style other than inline. This tab contains the following parameters that vary depending on the selected wrapping style: The Horizontal section allows you to select one of the following three autoshape positioning types: Alignment (left, center, right) relative to character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin, Absolute Position measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified at the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) to the right of character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin, Relative position measured in percent relative to the left margin, margin, page or right margin. The Vertical section allows you to select one of the following three autoshape positioning types: Alignment (top, center, bottom) relative to line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin, Absolute Position measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified at the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) below line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin, Relative position measured in percent relative to the margin, bottom margin, page or top margin. Move object with text controls whether the autoshape moves as the text to which it is anchored moves. Allow overlap controls whether two autoshapes overlap or not if you drag them near each other on the page. The Weights & Arrows tab contains the following parameters: Line Style - this option group allows to specify the following parameters: Cap Type - this option allows to set the style for the end of the line, therefore it can be applied only to the shapes with the open outline, such as lines, polylines etc.: Flat - the end points will be flat. Round - the end points will be rounded. Square - the end points will be square. Join Type - this option allows to set the style for the intersection of two lines, for example, it can affect a polyline or the corners of the triangle or rectangle outline: Round - the corner will be rounded. Bevel - the corner will be cut off angularly. Miter - the corner will be pointed. It goes well to shapes with sharp angles. Note: the effect will be more noticeable if you use a large outline width. Arrows - this option group is available if a shape from the Lines shape group is selected. It allows to set the arrow Start and End Style and Size by selecting the appropriate option from the dropdown lists. The Text Padding tab allows to change the autoshape Top, Bottom, Left and Right internal margins (i.e. the distance between the text within the shape and the autoshape borders). Note: this tab is only available if text is added within the autoshape, otherwise the tab is disabled. The Alternative Text tab allows to specify a Title and Description which will be read to the people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information there is in the shape." + "body": "Insert an autoshape To add an autoshape to your document, switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, click the Shape icon on the top toolbar, select one of the available autoshape groups: basic shapes, figured arrows, math, charts, stars & ribbons, callouts, buttons, rectangles, lines, click the necessary autoshape within the selected group, place the mouse cursor where the shape should be added, once the autoshape is added, you can change its size, position and properties. Note: to add a caption to an autoshape, make sure the required shape is selected on the page and start typing your text. The added text becomes a part of the autoshape (when you move or rotate the shape, the text moves or rotates with it). It's also possible to add a caption to the autoshape. To learn more on how to work with captions for autoshapes, you can refer to this article. Move and resize autoshapes To change the autoshape size, drag small squares situated on the shape edges. To maintain the original proportions of the selected autoshape while resizing, hold down the Shift key and drag one of the corner icons. When modifying some shapes, for example figured arrows or callouts, the yellow diamond-shaped icon is also available. It allows you to adjust some aspects of the shape, for example, the length of the head of an arrow. To alter the autoshape position, use the icon that appears after hovering your mouse cursor over the autoshape. Drag the autoshape to the required position without releasing the mouse button. When you move the autoshape, the guide lines are displayed to help you precisely position the object on the page (if the selected wrapping style is not inline). To move the autoshape by one-pixel increments, hold down the Ctrl key and use the keybord arrows. To move the autoshape strictly horizontally/vertically and prevent it from moving in a perpendicular direction, hold down the Shift key when dragging. To rotate the autoshape, hover the mouse cursor over the rotation handle and drag it clockwise or counterclockwise. To constrain the rotation angle to 15 degree increments, hold down the Shift key while rotating. Note: the list of keyboard shortcuts that can be used when working with objects is available here. Adjust autoshape settings To align and arrange autoshapes, use the right-click menu. The menu options are: Cut, Copy, Paste - standard options which are used to cut or copy the selected text/object and paste the previously cut/copied text passage or object to the current cursor position. Arrange is used to bring the selected autoshape to foreground, send it to background, move forward or backward as well as group or ungroup shapes to perform operations with several of them at once. To learn more on how to arrange objects, please refer to this page. Align is used to align the shape to the left, in the center, to the right, at the top, in the middle, at the bottom. To learn more on how to align objects, please refer to this page. Wrapping Style is used to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind - or edit the wrap boundary. The Edit Wrap Boundary option is available only if you select a wrapping style other than Inline. Drag wrap points to customize the boundary. To create a new wrap point, click anywhere on the red line and drag it to the necessary position. Rotate is used to rotate the shape by 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise as well as to flip the shape horizontally or vertically. Shape Advanced Settings is used to open the 'Shape - Advanced Settings' window. Some of the autoshape settings can be altered using the Shape settings tab of the right sidebar. To activate it click the shape and choose the Shape settings icon on the right. Here you can change the following properties: Fill - use this section to select the autoshape fill. You can choose the following options: Color Fill - select this option to specify the solid color to fill the inner space of the selected autoshape. Click the colored box below and select the necessary color from the available color sets or specify any color you like: Gradient Fill - select this option to fill the shape with two colors which smoothly change from one to another. Style - choose one of the available options: Linear (colors change in a straight line i.e. along a horizontal/vertical axis or diagonally at a 45 degree angle) or Radial (colors change in a circular path from the center to the edges). Direction - choose a template from the menu. If the Linear gradient is selected, the following directions are available: top-left to bottom-right, top to bottom, top-right to bottom-left, right to left, bottom-right to top-left, bottom to top, bottom-left to top-right, left to right. If the Radial gradient is selected, only one template is available. Gradient - click on the left slider under the gradient bar to activate the color box which corresponds to the first color. Click on the color box on the right to choose the first color in the palette. Drag the slider to set the gradient stop i.e. the point where one color changes into another. Use the right slider under the gradient bar to specify the second color and set the gradient stop. Picture or Texture - select this option to use an image or a predefined texture as the shape background. If you wish to use an image as a background for the shape, you can add an image From File by selecting it on your computer hard disc drive, From URL by inserting the appropriate URL address into the opened window, or From Storage by selecting the required image stored on your portal. If you wish to use a texture as a background for the shape, open the From Texture menu and select the necessary texture preset. Currently, the following textures are available: canvas, carton, dark fabric, grain, granite, grey paper, knit, leather, brown paper, papyrus, wood. In case the selected Picture has less or more dimensions than the autoshape has, you can choose the Stretch or Tile setting from the dropdown list. The Stretch option allows you to adjust the image size to fit the autoshape size so that it could fill the space completely. The Tile option allows you to display only a part of the bigger image keeping its original dimensions or repeat the smaller image keeping its original dimensions over the autoshape surface so that it could fill the space completely. Note: any selected Texture preset fills the space completely, but you can apply the Stretch effect if necessary. Pattern - select this option to fill the shape with a two-colored design composed of regularly repeated elements. Pattern - select one of the predefined designs from the menu. Foreground color - click this color box to change the color of the pattern elements. Background color - click this color box to change the color of the pattern background. No Fill - select this option if you don't want to use any fill. Opacity - use this section to set an Opacity level dragging the slider or entering the percent value manually. The default value is 100%. It corresponds to the full opacity. The 0% value corresponds to the full transparency. Stroke - use this section to change the autoshape stroke width, color or type. To change the stroke width, select one of the available options from the Size dropdown list. The available options are: 0.5 pt, 1 pt, 1.5 pt, 2.25 pt, 3 pt, 4.5 pt, 6 pt. Alternatively, select the No Line option if you don't want to use any stroke. To change the stroke color, click on the colored box below and select the necessary color. To change the stroke type, select the necessary option from the corresponding dropdown list (a solid line is applied by default, you can change it to one of the available dashed lines). Rotation is used to rotate the shape by 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise as well as to flip the shape horizontally or vertically. Click one of the buttons: to rotate the shape by 90 degrees counterclockwise to rotate the shape by 90 degrees clockwise to flip the shape horizontally (left to right) to flip the shape vertically (upside down) Wrapping Style - use this section to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind (for more information see the advanced settings description below). Change Autoshape - use this section to replace the current autoshape with another one selected from the dropdown list. Show shadow - check this option to display the shape with a shadow. Adjust autoshape advanced settings To change the advanced settings of the autoshape, right-click it and select the Advanced Settings option in the menu or use the Show advanced settings link on the right sidebar. The 'Shape - Advanced Settings' window will open: The Size tab contains the following parameters: Width - use one of these options to change the autoshape width. Absolute - specify an exact value measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified on the File -> Advanced Settings... tab). Relative - specify a percentage relative to the left margin width, the margin (i.e. the distance between the left and right margins), the page width, or the right margin width. Height - use one of these options to change the autoshape height. Absolute - specify an exact value measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified on the File -> Advanced Settings... tab). Relative - specify a percentage relative to the margin (i.e. the distance between the top and bottom margins), the bottom margin height, the page height, or the top margin height. If the Lock aspect ratio option is checked, the width and height will be changed together preserving the original shape aspect ratio. The Rotation tab contains the following parameters: Angle - use this option to rotate the shape by an exactly specified angle. Enter the necessary value measured in degrees into the field or adjust it using the arrows on the right. Flipped - check the Horizontally box to flip the shape horizontally (left to right) or check the Vertically box to flip the shape vertically (upside down). The Text Wrapping tab contains the following parameters: Wrapping Style - use this option to change the way the shape is positioned relative to the text: it will either be a part of the text (in case you select the inline style) or bypassed by it from all sides (if you select one of the other styles). Inline - the shape is considered to be a part of the text, like a character, so when the text moves, the shape moves as well. In this case the positioning options are inaccessible. If one of the following styles is selected, the shape can be moved independently of the text and positioned on the page exactly: Square - the text wraps the rectangular box that bounds the shape. Tight - the text wraps the actual shape edges. Through - the text wraps around the shape edges and fills in the open white space within the shape. So that the effect can appear, use the Edit Wrap Boundary option from the right-click menu. Top and bottom - the text is only above and below the shape. In front - the shape overlaps the text. Behind - the text overlaps the shape. If you select the square, tight, through, or top and bottom styles, you will be able to set up some additional parameters - distance from text at all sides (top, bottom, left, right). The Position tab is available only if the selected wrapping style is not inline. This tab contains the following parameters that vary depending on the selected wrapping style: The Horizontal section allows you to select one of the following three autoshape positioning types: Alignment (left, center, right) relative to character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin, Absolute Position measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified on the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) to the right of character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin, Relative position measured in percent relative to the left margin, margin, page or right margin. The Vertical section allows you to select one of the following three autoshape positioning types: Alignment (top, center, bottom) relative to line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin, Absolute Position measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified on the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) below line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin, Relative position measured in percent relative to the margin, bottom margin, page or top margin. Move object with text ensures that the autoshape moves along with the text to which it is anchored. Allow overlap makes it possible for two autoshapes to overlap if you drag them near each other on the page. The Weights & Arrows tab contains the following parameters: Line Style - this option group allows specifying the following parameters: Cap Type - this option allows setting the style for the end of the line, therefore it can be applied only to the shapes with the open outline, such as lines, polylines etc.: Flat - the end points will be flat. Round - the end points will be rounded. Square - the end points will be square. Join Type - this option allows setting the style for the intersection of two lines, for example, it can affect a polyline or the corners of the triangle or rectangle outline: Round - the corner will be rounded. Bevel - the corner will be cut off angularly. Miter - the corner will be pointed. It goes well to shapes with sharp angles. Note: the effect will be more noticeable if you use a large outline width. Arrows - this option group is available if a shape from the Lines shape group is selected. It allows setting the arrow Start and End Style and Size by selecting the appropriate option from the dropdown lists. The Text Padding tab allows changing the Top, Bottom, Left and Right internal margins of the autoshape (i.e. the distance between the text within the shape and the autoshape borders). Note: this tab is only available if text is added within the autoshape, otherwise the tab is disabled. The Alternative Text tab allows specifying a Title and Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information the shape contains." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertBookmarks.htm", "title": "Add bookmarks", - "body": "Bookmarks allow to quickly jump to a certain position in the current document or add a link to this location within the document. To add a bookmark within a document: specify the place where you want the bookmark to be added: put the mouse cursor at the beginning of the necessary text passage, or select the necessary text passage, switch to the References tab of the top toolbar, click the Bookmark icon at the top toolbar, in the Bookmarks window that opens, enter the Bookmark name and click the Add button - a bookmark will be added to the bookmark list displayed below, Note: the bookmark name should begin wish a letter, but it can also contain numbers. The bookmark name cannot contain spaces, but can include the underscore character \"_\". To go to one of the added bookmarks within the document text: click the Bookmark icon at the References tab of the top toolbar, in the Bookmarks window that opens, select the bookmark you want to jump to. To easily find the necessary bookmark in the list you can sort the list by bookmark Name or by Location of a bookmark within the document text, check the Hidden bookmarks option to display hidden bookmarks in the list (i.e. the bookmarks automatically created by the program when adding references to a certain part of the document. For example, if you create a hyperlink to a certain heading within the document, the document editor automatically creates a hidden bookmark to the target of this link). click the Go to button - the cursor will be positioned in the location within the document where the selected bookmark was added, or the corresponding text passage will be selected, click the Get Link button - a new window will open where you can press the Copy button to copy the link to the file which specifyes the bookmark location in the document. When you paste this link in a browser address bar and press Enter, the document will open in the location where the selected bookmark was added. Note: if you want to share this link with other users, you'll also need to provide corresponding access rights to the file for certain users using the Sharing option at the Collaboration tab. click the Close button to close the window. To delete a bookmark select it in the bookmark list and use the Delete button. To find out how to use bookmarks when creating links please refer to the Add hyperlinks section." + "body": "Bookmarks allow quickly access a certain part of the text or add a link to its location in the document. To add a bookmark in a document: specify the place where you want the bookmark to be added: put the mouse cursor at the beginning of the necessary text passage, or select the necessary text passage, switch to the References tab of the top toolbar, click the Bookmark icon on the top toolbar, in the Bookmarks window, enter the Bookmark name and click the Add button - a bookmark will be added to the bookmark list displayed below, Note: the bookmark name should begin with a letter, but it can also contain numbers. The bookmark name cannot contain spaces, but can include the underscore character \"_\". To access one of the added bookmarks within in the text: click the Bookmark icon on the References tab of the top toolbar, in the Bookmarks window, select the bookmark you want to access. To easily find the required bookmark in the list, you can sort the list of bookmarks by Name or by Location in the text, check the Hidden bookmarks option to display hidden bookmarks in the list (i.e. the bookmarks automatically created by the program when adding references to a certain part of the document. For example, if you create a hyperlink to a certain heading within the document, the document editor automatically creates a hidden bookmark to the target of this link). click the Go to button - the cursor will be positioned where the selected bookmark was added to the text, or the corresponding text passage will be selected, click the Get Link button - a new window will open where you can press the Copy button to copy the link to the file which specifyes the bookmark location in the document. When you paste this link in a browser address bar and press Enter, the document will be opened where the selected bookmark was added. Note: if you want to share this link with other users, you'll need to provide them with the corresponding access rights using the Sharing option on the Collaboration tab. click the Close button to close the window. To delete a bookmark, select it in the bookmark list and click the Delete button. To find out how to use bookmarks when creating links please refer to the Add hyperlinks section." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm", "title": "Insert charts", - "body": "Insert a chart To insert a chart into your document, put the cursor at the place where you want to add a chart, switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, click the Chart icon at the top toolbar, select the needed chart type from the available ones - Column, Line, Pie, Bar, Area, XY (Scatter), or Stock, Note: for Column, Line, Pie, or Bar charts, a 3D format is also available. after that the Chart Editor window will appear where you can enter the necessary data into the cells using the following controls: and for copying and pasting the copied data and for undoing and redoing actions for inserting a function and for decreasing and increasing decimal places for changing the number format, i.e. the way the numbers you enter appear in cells change the chart settings clicking the Edit Chart button situated in the Chart Editor window. The Chart - Advanced Settings window will open. The Type & Data tab allows you to change the chart type as well as the data you wish to use to create a chart. Select a chart Type you wish to apply: Column, Line, Pie, Bar, Area, XY (Scatter), or Stock. Check the selected Data Range and modify it, if necessary, clicking the Select Data button and entering the desired data range in the following format: Sheet1!A1:B4. Choose the way to arrange the data. You can either select the Data series to be used on the X axis: in rows or in columns. The Layout tab allows you to change the layout of chart elements. Specify the Chart Title position in regard to your chart selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to not display a chart title, Overlay to overlay and center a title on the plot area, No Overlay to display the title above the plot area. Specify the Legend position in regard to your chart selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to not display a legend, Bottom to display the legend and align it to the bottom of the plot area, Top to display the legend and align it to the top of the plot area, Right to display the legend and align it to the right of the plot area, Left to display the legend and align it to the left of the plot area, Left Overlay to overlay and center the legend to the left on the plot area, Right Overlay to overlay and center the legend to the right on the plot area. Specify the Data Labels (i.e. text labels that represent exact values of data points) parameters: specify the Data Labels position relative to the data points selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list. The available options vary depending on the selected chart type. For Column/Bar charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Inner Bottom, Inner Top, Outer Top. For Line/XY (Scatter)/Stock charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Left, Right, Top, Bottom. For Pie charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Fit to Width, Inner Top, Outer Top. For Area charts as well as for 3D Column, Line and Bar charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center. select the data you wish to include into your labels checking the corresponding boxes: Series Name, Category Name, Value, enter a character (comma, semicolon etc.) you wish to use for separating several labels into the Data Labels Separator entry field. Lines - is used to choose a line style for Line/XY (Scatter) charts. You can choose one of the following options: Straight to use straight lines between data points, Smooth to use smooth curves between data points, or None to not display lines. Markers - is used to specify whether the markers should be displayed (if the box is checked) or not (if the box is unchecked) for Line/XY (Scatter) charts. Note: the Lines and Markers options are available for Line charts and XY (Scatter) charts only. The Axis Settings section allows to specify if you wish to display Horizontal/Vertical Axis or not selecting the Show or Hide option from the drop-down list. You can also specify Horizontal/Vertical Axis Title parameters: Specify if you wish to display the Horizontal Axis Title or not selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to not display a horizontal axis title, No Overlay to display the title below the horizontal axis. Specify the Vertical Axis Title orientation selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to not display a vertical axis title, Rotated to display the title from bottom to top to the left of the vertical axis, Horizontal to display the title horizontally to the left of the vertical axis. The Gridlines section allows to specify which of the Horizontal/Vertical Gridlines you wish to display selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: Major, Minor, or Major and Minor. You can hide the gridlines at all using the None option. Note: the Axis Settings and Gridlines sections will be disabled for Pie charts since charts of this type have no axes and gridlines. Note: the Vertical/Horizontal Axis tabs will be disabled for Pie charts since charts of this type have no axes. The Vertical Axis tab allows you to change the parameters of the vertical axis also referred to as the values axis or y-axis which displays numeric values. Note that the vertical axis will be the category axis which displays text labels for the Bar charts, therefore in this case the Vertical Axis tab options will correspond to the ones described in the next section. For the XY (Scatter) charts, both axes are value axes. The Axis Options section allows to set the following parameters: Minimum Value - is used to specify a lowest value displayed at the vertical axis start. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the minimum value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Fixed option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right. Maximum Value - is used to specify a highest value displayed at the vertical axis end. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the maximum value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Fixed option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right. Axis Crosses - is used to specify a point on the vertical axis where the horizontal axis should cross it. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the axes intersection point value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Value option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right, or set the axes intersection point at the Minimum/Maximum Value on the vertical axis. Display Units - is used to determine a representation of the numeric values along the vertical axis. This option can be useful if you're working with great numbers and wish the values on the axis to be displayed in more compact and readable way (e.g. you can represent 50 000 as 50 by using the Thousands display units). Select desired units from the drop-down list: Hundreds, Thousands, 10 000, 100 000, Millions, 10 000 000, 100 000 000, Billions, Trillions, or choose the None option to return to the default units. Values in reverse order - is used to display values in an opposite direction. When the box is unchecked, the lowest value is at the bottom and the highest value is at the top of the axis. When the box is checked, the values are ordered from top to bottom. The Tick Options section allows to adjust the appearance of tick marks on the vertical scale. Major tick marks are the larger scale divisions which can have labels displaying numeric values. Minor tick marks are the scale subdivisions which are placed between the major tick marks and have no labels. Tick marks also define where gridlines can be displayed, if the corresponding option is set at the Layout tab. The Major/Minor Type drop-down lists contain the following placement options: None to not display major/minor tick marks, Cross to display major/minor tick marks on both sides of the axis, In to display major/minor tick marks inside the axis, Out to display major/minor tick marks outside the axis. The Label Options section allows to adjust the appearance of major tick mark labels which display values. To specify a Label Position in regard to the vertical axis, select the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to not display tick mark labels, Low to display tick mark labels to the left of the plot area, High to display tick mark labels to the right of the plot area, Next to axis to display tick mark labels next to the axis. The Horizontal Axis tab allows you to change the parameters of the horizontal axis also referred to as the categories axis or x-axis which displays text labels. Note that the horizontal axis will be the value axis which displays numeric values for the Bar charts, therefore in this case the Horizontal Axis tab options will correspond to the ones described in the previous section. For the XY (Scatter) charts, both axes are value axes. The Axis Options section allows to set the following parameters: Axis Crosses - is used to specify a point on the horizontal axis where the vertical axis should cross it. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the axes intersection point value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Value option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right, or set the axes intersection point at the Minimum/Maximum Value (that corresponds to the first and last category) on the horizontal axis. Axis Position - is used to specify where the axis text labels should be placed: On Tick Marks or Between Tick Marks. Values in reverse order - is used to display categories in an opposite direction. When the box is unchecked, categories are displayed from left to right. When the box is checked, the categories are ordered from right to left. The Tick Options section allows to adjust the appearance of tick marks on the horizontal scale. Major tick marks are the larger divisions which can have labels displaying category values. Minor tick marks are the smaller divisions which are placed between the major tick marks and have no labels. Tick marks also define where gridlines can be displayed, if the corresponding option is set at the Layout tab. You can adjust the following tick mark parameters: Major/Minor Type - is used to specify the following placement options: None to not display major/minor tick marks, Cross to display major/minor tick marks on both sides of the axis, In to display major/minor tick marks inside the axis, Out to display major/minor tick marks outside the axis. Interval between Marks - is used to specify how many categories should be displayed between two adjacent tick marks. The Label Options section allows to adjust the appearance of labels which display categories. Label Position - is used to specify where the labels should be placed in regard to the horizontal axis. Select the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to not display category labels, Low to display category labels at the bottom of the plot area, High to display category labels at the top of the plot area, Next to axis to display category labels next to the axis. Axis Label Distance - is used to specify how closely the labels should be placed to the axis. You can specify the necessary value in the entry field. The more the value you set, the more the distance between the axis and labels is. Interval between Labels - is used to specify how often the labels should be displayed. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case labels are displayed for every category. You can select the Manual option from the drop-down list and specify the necessary value in the entry field on the right. For example, enter 2 to display labels for every other category etc. The Alternative Text tab allows to specify a Title and Description which will be read to the people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information there is in the chart. Move and resize charts Once the chart is added, you can change its size and position. To change the chart size, drag small squares situated on its edges. To maintain the original proportions of the selected chart while resizing, hold down the Shift key and drag one of the corner icons. To alter the chart position, use the icon that appears after hovering your mouse cursor over the chart. Drag the chart to the necessary position without releasing the mouse button. When you move the chart, guide lines are displayed to help you position the object on the page precisely (if a wrapping style other than inline is selected). Note: the list of keyboard shortcuts that can be used when working with objects is available here. Edit chart elements To edit the chart Title, select the default text with the mouse and type in your own one instead. To change the font formatting within text elements, such as the chart title, axes titles, legend entries, data labels etc., select the necessary text element by left-clicking it. Then use icons at the Home tab of the top toolbar to change the font type, size, color or its decoration style. When the chart is selected, the Shape settings icon is also available on the right, since a shape is used as a background for the chart. You can click this icon to open the Shape settings tab at the right sidebar and adjust the shape Fill, Stroke and Wrapping Style. Note that you cannot change the shape type. Using the Shape Settings tab at the right panel you can not only adjust the chart area itself, but also change the chart elements, such as plot area, data series, chart title, legend etc and apply different fill types to them. Select the chart element clicking it with the left mouse button and choose the preferred fill type: solid color, gradient, texture or picture, pattern. Specify the fill parameters and set the Opacity level if necessary. When you select a vertical or horizontal axis or gridlines, the stroke settings are only available at the Shape Settings tab: color, width and type. For more details on how to work with shape colors, fills and stroke, you can refer to this page. Note: the Show shadow option is also available at the Shape settings tab, but it is disabled for chart elements. To delete a chart element, select it by left-clicking and press the Delete key on the keyboard. You can also rotate 3D charts using the mouse. Left-click within the plot area and hold the mouse button. Drag the cursor without releasing the mouse button to change the 3D chart orientation. Adjust chart settings Some of the chart settings can be altered using the Chart settings tab of the right sidebar. To activate it click the chart and choose the Chart settings icon on the right. Here you can change the following properties: Size is used to view the current chart Width and Height. Wrapping Style is used to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind (for more information see the advanced settings description below). Change Chart Type is used to change the selected chart type and/or style. To select the necessary chart Style, use the second drop-down menu in the Change Chart Type section. Edit Data is used to open the 'Chart Editor' window. Note: to quickly open the 'Chart Editor' window you can also double-click the chart in the document. Some of these options you can also find in the right-click menu. The menu options are: Cut, Copy, Paste - standard options which are used to cut or copy a selected text/object and paste a previously cut/copied text passage or object to the current cursor position. Arrange is used to bring the selected chart to foreground, send to background, move forward or backward as well as group or ungroup charts to perform operations with several of them at once. To learn more on how to arrange objects you can refer to this page. Align is used to align the chart left, center, right, top, middle, bottom. To learn more on how to align objects you can refer to this page. Wrapping Style is used to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind. The Edit Wrap Boundary option is unavailable for charts. Edit Data is used to open the 'Chart Editor' window. Chart Advanced Settings is used to open the 'Chart - Advanced Settings' window. To change the chart advanced settings, click the needed chart with the right mouse button and select Chart Advanced Settings from the right-click menu or just click the Show advanced settings link at the right sidebar. The chart properties window will open: The Size tab contains the following parameters: Width and Height - use these options to change the chart width and/or height. If the Constant Proportions button is clicked (in this case it looks like this ), the width and height will be changed together preserving the original chart aspect ratio. The Text Wrapping tab contains the following parameters: Wrapping Style - use this option to change the way the chart is positioned relative to the text: it will either be a part of the text (in case you select the inline style) or bypassed by it from all sides (if you select one of the other styles). Inline - the chart is considered to be a part of the text, like a character, so when the text moves, the chart moves as well. In this case the positioning options are inaccessible. If one of the following styles is selected, the chart can be moved independently of the text and positioned on the page exactly: Square - the text wraps the rectangular box that bounds the chart. Tight - the text wraps the actual chart edges. Through - the text wraps around the chart edges and fills in the open white space within the chart. Top and bottom - the text is only above and below the chart. In front - the chart overlaps the text. Behind - the text overlaps the chart. If you select the square, tight, through, or top and bottom style you will be able to set up some additional parameters - distance from text at all sides (top, bottom, left, right). The Position tab is available only if you select a wrapping style other than inline. This tab contains the following parameters that vary depending on the selected wrapping style: The Horizontal section allows you to select one of the following three chart positioning types: Alignment (left, center, right) relative to character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin, Absolute Position measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified at the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) to the right of character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin, Relative position measured in percent relative to the left margin, margin, page or right margin. The Vertical section allows you to select one of the following three chart positioning types: Alignment (top, center, bottom) relative to line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin, Absolute Position measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified at the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) below line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin, Relative position measured in percent relative to the margin, bottom margin, page or top margin. Move object with text controls whether the chart moves as the text to which it is anchored moves. Allow overlap controls whether two charts overlap or not if you drag them near each other on the page. The Alternative Text tab allows to specify a Title and Description which will be read to the people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information there is in the chart." + "body": "Insert a chart To insert a chart into your document, place the cursor where the chart should be added, switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, click the Chart icon on the top toolbar, select the needed chart type from the available ones - Column, Line, Pie, Bar, Area, XY (Scatter), or Stock, Note: for Column, Line, Pie, or Bar charts, a 3D format is also available. after that the Chart Editor window will appear where you can enter the necessary data into the cells using the following controls: and for copying and pasting the copied data and for undoing and redoing actions for inserting a function and for decreasing and increasing decimal places for changing the number format, i.e. the way the numbers you enter appear in cells change the chart settings by clicking the Edit Chart button situated in the Chart Editor window. The Chart - Advanced Settings window will open. The Type & Data tab allows you to change the chart type as well as the data you wish to use to create a chart. Select a chart Type you wish to apply: Column, Line, Pie, Bar, Area, XY (Scatter), or Stock. Check the selected Data Range and modify it, if necessary. To do that, click the icon. In the Select Data Range window, enter the necessary data range in the following format: Sheet1!$A$1:$E$10. You can also select the necessary cell range in the sheet using the mouse. When ready, click OK. Choose the way to arrange the data. You can select the Data series to be used on the X axis: in rows or in columns. The Layout tab allows you to change the layout of chart elements. Specify the Chart Title position in regard to your chart selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to not display a chart title, Overlay to overlay and center a title on the plot area, No Overlay to display the title above the plot area. Specify the Legend position in regard to your chart selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to not display a legend, Bottom to display the legend and align it to the bottom of the plot area, Top to display the legend and align it to the top of the plot area, Right to display the legend and align it to the right of the plot area, Left to display the legend and align it to the left of the plot area, Left Overlay to overlay and center the legend to the left on the plot area, Right Overlay to overlay and center the legend to the right on the plot area. Specify the Data Labels (i.e. text labels that represent exact values of data points) parameters: specify the Data Labels position relative to the data points selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list. The available options vary depending on the selected chart type. For Column/Bar charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Inner Bottom, Inner Top, Outer Top. For Line/XY (Scatter)/Stock charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Left, Right, Top, Bottom. For Pie charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Fit to Width, Inner Top, Outer Top. For Area charts as well as for 3D Column, Line and Bar charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center. select the data you wish to include into your labels checking the corresponding boxes: Series Name, Category Name, Value, enter a character (comma, semicolon etc.) you wish to use for separating several labels into the Data Labels Separator entry field. Lines - is used to choose a line style for Line/XY (Scatter) charts. You can choose one of the following options: Straight to use straight lines between data points, Smooth to use smooth curves between data points, or None to not display lines. Markers - is used to specify whether the markers should be displayed (if the box is checked) or not (if the box is unchecked) for Line/XY (Scatter) charts. Note: the Lines and Markers options are available for Line charts and XY (Scatter) charts only. The Axis Settings section allows specifying whether to display Horizontal/Vertical Axis or not by selecting the Show or Hide option from the drop-down list. You can also specify Horizontal/Vertical Axis Title parameters: Specify if you wish to display the Horizontal Axis Title or not by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to not display a horizontal axis title, No Overlay to display the title below the horizontal axis. Specify the Vertical Axis Title orientation by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to not display a vertical axis title, Rotated to display the title from bottom to top to the left of the vertical axis, Horizontal to display the title horizontally to the left of the vertical axis. The Gridlines section allows specifying which of the Horizontal/Vertical Gridlines you wish to display by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: Major, Minor, or Major and Minor. You can hide the gridlines at all using the None option. Note: the Axis Settings and Gridlines sections will be disabled for Pie charts since charts of this type have no axes and gridlines. Note: the Vertical/Horizontal Axis tabs will be disabled for Pie charts since charts of this type have no axes. The Vertical Axis tab allows you to change the parameters of the vertical axis also referred to as the values axis or y-axis which displays numeric values. Note that the vertical axis will be the category axis which displays text labels for the Bar charts, therefore in this case the Vertical Axis tab options will correspond to the ones described in the next section. For the XY (Scatter) charts, both axes are value axes. The Axis Options section allows setting the following parameters: Minimum Value - is used to specify the lowest value displayed at the vertical axis start. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the minimum value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Fixed option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right. Maximum Value - is used to specify the highest value displayed at the vertical axis end. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the maximum value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Fixed option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right. Axis Crosses - is used to specify a point on the vertical axis where the horizontal axis should cross it. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the axes intersection point value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Value option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right, or set the axes intersection point at the Minimum/Maximum Value on the vertical axis. Display Units - is used to determine the representation of the numeric values along the vertical axis. This option can be useful if you're working with great numbers and wish the values on the axis to be displayed in a more compact and readable way (e.g. you can represent 50 000 as 50 by using the Thousands display units). Select desired units from the drop-down list: Hundreds, Thousands, 10 000, 100 000, Millions, 10 000 000, 100 000 000, Billions, Trillions, or choose the None option to return to the default units. Values in reverse order - is used to display values in the opposite direction. When the box is unchecked, the lowest value is at the bottom and the highest value is at the top of the axis. When the box is checked, the values are ordered from top to bottom. The Tick Options section allows adjusting the appearance of tick marks on the vertical scale. Major tick marks are the larger scale divisions which can have labels displaying numeric values. Minor tick marks are the scale subdivisions which are placed between the major tick marks and have no labels. Tick marks also define where gridlines can be displayed if the corresponding option is set on the Layout tab. The Major/Minor Type drop-down lists contain the following placement options: None to not display major/minor tick marks, Cross to display major/minor tick marks on both sides of the axis, In to display major/minor tick marks inside the axis, Out to display major/minor tick marks outside the axis. The Label Options section allows adjusting the appearance of major tick mark labels which display values. To specify a Label Position in regard to the vertical axis, select the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to not display tick mark labels, Low to display tick mark labels to the left of the plot area, High to display tick mark labels to the right of the plot area, Next to axis to display tick mark labels next to the axis. The Horizontal Axis tab allows you to change the parameters of the horizontal axis also referred to as the categories axis or x-axis which displays text labels. Note that the horizontal axis will be the value axis which displays numeric values for the Bar charts, therefore in this case the Horizontal Axis tab options will correspond to the ones described in the previous section. For the XY (Scatter) charts, both axes are value axes. The Axis Options section allows setting the following parameters: Axis Crosses - is used to specify a point on the horizontal axis where the vertical axis should cross it. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the axes intersection point value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Value option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right, or set the axes intersection point at the Minimum/Maximum Value (that corresponds to the first and last category) on the horizontal axis. Axis Position - is used to specify where the axis text labels should be placed: On Tick Marks or Between Tick Marks. Values in reverse order - is used to display categories in the opposite direction. When the box is unchecked, categories are displayed from left to right. When the box is checked, the categories are ordered from right to left. The Tick Options section allows adjusting the appearance of tick marks on the horizontal scale. Major tick marks are the larger divisions which can have labels displaying category values. Minor tick marks are the smaller divisions which are placed between the major tick marks and have no labels. Tick marks also define where gridlines can be displayed if the corresponding option is set on the Layout tab. You can adjust the following tick mark parameters: Major/Minor Type - is used to specify the following placement options: None to not display major/minor tick marks, Cross to display major/minor tick marks on both sides of the axis, In to display major/minor tick marks inside the axis, Out to display major/minor tick marks outside the axis. Interval between Marks - is used to specify how many categories should be displayed between two adjacent tick marks. The Label Options section allows adjusting the appearance of labels which display categories. Label Position - is used to specify where the labels should be placed in regard to the horizontal axis. Select the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to not display category labels, Low to display category labels at the bottom of the plot area, High to display category labels at the top of the plot area, Next to axis to display category labels next to the axis. Axis Label Distance - is used to specify how closely the labels should be placed to the axis. You can specify the necessary value in the entry field. The more the value you set, the more the distance between the axis and labels is. Interval between Labels - is used to specify how often the labels should be displayed. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case labels are displayed for every category. You can select the Manual option from the drop-down list and specify the necessary value in the entry field on the right. For example, enter 2 to display labels for every other category etc. The Alternative Text tab allows specifying a Title and Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information the chart contains. Move and resize charts Once the chart is added, you can change its size and position. To change the chart size, drag small squares situated on its edges. To maintain the original proportions of the selected chart while resizing, hold down the Shift key and drag one of the corner icons. To alter the chart position, use the icon that appears after hovering your mouse cursor over the chart. Drag the chart to the necessary position without releasing the mouse button. When you move the chart, guide lines are displayed to help you position the object on the page precisely (if a wrapping style other than inline is selected). Note: the list of keyboard shortcuts that can be used when working with objects is available here. Edit chart elements To edit the chart Title, select the default text with the mouse and type the required text. To change the font formatting within text elements, such as the chart title, axes titles, legend entries, data labels etc., select the necessary text element by left-clicking it. Then use the corresponding icons on the Home tab of the top toolbar to change the font type, size, color or its decoration style. When the chart is selected, the Shape settings icon is also available on the right, since a shape is used as a background for the chart. You can click this icon to open the Shape settings tab on the right sidebar and adjust Fill, Stroke and Wrapping Style of the shape. Note that you cannot change the shape type. Using the Shape Settings tab on the right panel, you can both adjust the chart area itself and change the chart elements, such as plot area, data series, chart title, legend etc and apply different fill types to them. Select the chart element clicking it with the left mouse button and choose the preferred fill type: solid color, gradient, texture or picture, pattern. Specify the fill parameters and set the Opacity level if necessary. When you select a vertical or horizontal axis or gridlines, the stroke settings are only available at the Shape Settings tab: color, width and type. For more details on how to work with shape colors, fills and stroke, you can refer to this page. Note: the Show shadow option is also available at the Shape settings tab, but it is disabled for chart elements. If you need to resize chart elements, left-click to select the needed element and drag one of 8 white squares located along the perimeter of the element. To change the position of the element, left-click on it, make sure your cursor changed to , hold the left mouse button and drag the element to the needed position. To delete a chart element, select it by left-clicking and press the Delete key on the keyboard. You can also rotate 3D charts using the mouse. Left-click within the plot area and hold the mouse button. Drag the cursor without releasing the mouse button to change the 3D chart orientation. Adjust chart settings Some of the chart settings can be altered using the Chart settings tab of the right sidebar. To activate it click the chart and choose the Chart settings icon on the right. Here you can change the following properties: Size is used to view the Width and Height of the current chart. Wrapping Style is used to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind (for more information see the advanced settings description below). Change Chart Type is used to change the selected chart type and/or style. To select the necessary chart Style, use the second drop-down menu in the Change Chart Type section. Edit Data is used to open the 'Chart Editor' window. Note: to quickly open the 'Chart Editor' window you can also double-click the chart in the document. You can also find some of these options in the right-click menu. The menu options are: Cut, Copy, Paste - standard options which are used to cut or copy the selected text/object and paste the previously cut/copied text passage or object to the current cursor position. Arrange is used to bring the selected chart to foreground, send it to the background, move forward or backward as well as group or ungroup charts to perform operations with several of them at once. To learn more on how to arrange objects, please refer to this page. Align is used to align the chart left, center, right, top, middle, bottom. To learn more on how to align objects you can refer to this page. Wrapping Style is used to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind. The Edit Wrap Boundary option is unavailable for charts. Edit Data is used to open the 'Chart Editor' window. Chart Advanced Settings is used to open the 'Chart - Advanced Settings' window. To change the chart advanced settings, click the needed chart with the right mouse button and select Chart Advanced Settings from the right-click menu or just click the Show advanced settings link on the right sidebar. The chart properties window will open: The Size tab contains the following parameters: Width and Height - use these options to change the width and/or height of the chart. If the Constant Proportions button is clicked (in this case it looks like this ), the width and height will be changed together preserving the original chart aspect ratio. The Text Wrapping tab contains the following parameters: Wrapping Style - use this option to change the way the chart is positioned relative to the text: it will either be a part of the text (in case you select the inline style) or bypassed by it from all sides (if you select one of the other styles). Inline - the chart is considered to be a part of the text, like a character, so when the text moves, the chart moves as well. In this case the positioning options are inaccessible. If one of the following styles is selected, the chart can be moved independently of the text and positioned on the page exactly: Square - the text wraps the rectangular box that bounds the chart. Tight - the text wraps the actual chart edges. Through - the text wraps around the chart edges and fills in the open white space within the chart. Top and bottom - the text is only above and below the chart. In front - the chart overlaps the text. Behind - the text overlaps the chart. If you select the square, tight, through, or top and bottom styles, you will be able to set up some additional parameters - distance from text at all sides (top, bottom, left, right). The Position tab is available only if the selected wrapping style is not inline. This tab contains the following parameters that vary depending on the selected wrapping style: The Horizontal section allows you to select one of the following three chart positioning types: Alignment (left, center, right) relative to character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin, Absolute Position measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified on the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) to the right of character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin, Relative position measured in percent relative to the left margin, margin, page or right margin. The Vertical section allows you to select one of the following three chart positioning types: Alignment (top, center, bottom) relative to line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin, Absolute Position measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified on the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) below line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin, Relative position measured in percent relative to the margin, bottom margin, page or top margin. Move object with text ensures that the chart moves along with the text to which it is anchored. Allow overlap makes it possible for two charts to overlap if you drag them near each other on the page. The Alternative Text tab allows specifying a Title and Description which will be read to the people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information the chart contains." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertContentControls.htm", "title": "Insert content controls", - "body": "Content controls are objects containing different types of contents, such as text, objects etc. Depending on the selected content control type, you can create a form with input fields that can be filled in by other users, or protect some parts of the document from being edited or deleted etc. Note: the possibility to add new content controls is available in the paid version only. In the open source version, you can edit existing content controls, as well as copy and paste them. Currently, you can add the following types of content controls: Plain Text, Rich Text, Picture, Combo box, Drop-down list, Date, Check box. Plain Text is an object containing text that can be formatted. Plain text content controls cannot contain more than one paragraph. Rich Text is an object containing text that can be formatted. Rich text content controls can contain several paragraphs, lists, and objects (images, shapes, tables etc.). Picture is an object containing a single image. Combo box is an object containing a drop-down list with a set of choices. It allows to choose one of the predefined values from the list and edit the selected value if necessary. Drop-down list is an object containing a drop-down list with a set of choices. It allows to choose one of the predefined values from the list. The selected value cannot be edited. Date is an object containing a calendar that allows to choose a date. Check box is an object that allows to display two states: check box is selected and check box is cleared. Adding content controls Create a new Plain Text content control position the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the control to be added, or select a text passage you want to become the control contents. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar. click the arrow next to the Content Controls icon. choose the Plain Text option from the menu. The control will be inserted at the insertion point within a line of the existing text. Replace the default text within the control (\"Your text here\") with your own one: select the default text, and type in a new text or copy a text passage from anywhere and paste it into the content control. Plain text content controls do not allow adding line breaks and cannot contain other objects such as images, tables etc. Create a new Rich Text content control position the insertion point at the end of a paragraph after which you want the control to be added, or select one or more of the existing paragraphs you want to become the control contents. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar. click the arrow next to the Content Controls icon. choose the Rich Text option from the menu. The control will be inserted in a new paragraph. Replace the default text within the control (\"Your text here\") with your own one: select the default text, and type in a new text or copy a text passage from anywhere and paste it into the content control. Rich text content controls allow adding line breaks, i.e. can contain multiple paragraphs as well as some objects, such as images, tables, other content controls etc. Create a new Picture content control position the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the control to be added. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar. click the arrow next to the Content Controls icon. choose the Picture option from the menu - the control will be inserted at the insertion point. click the image icon in the button above the content control border - a standard file selection window will open. Choose an image stored on your computer and click Open. The selected image will be displayed within the content control. To replace the image, click the image icon in the button above the content control border and select another image. Create a new Combo box or Drop-down list content control The Combo box and Drop-down list content controls contain a drop-down list with a set of choices. They can be created in nearly the same way. The main difference between them is that the selected value in the drop-down list cannot be edited, while the selected value in the combo box can be replaced with your own one. position the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the control to be added. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar. click the arrow next to the Content Controls icon. choose the Combo box or Drop-down list option from the menu - the control will be inserted at the insertion point. right-click the added control and choose the Content control settings option from the contextual menu. in the the Content Control Settings window that opens switch to the Combo box or Drop-down list tab, depending on the selected content control type. to add a new list item, click the Add button and fill in the available fields in the window that opens: specify the necessary text in the Display name field, e.g. Yes, No, Other. This text will be displayed in the content control within the document. by default, the text in the Value field corresponds to the one entered in the Display name field. If you want to edit the text in the Value field, note that the entered value must be unique for each item. click the OK button. you can edit or delete the list items by using the Edit or Delete buttons on the right or change the item order using the Up and Down button. when all the necessary choices are set, click the OK button to save the settings and close the window. You can click the arrow button in the right part of the added Combo box or Drop-down list content control to open the item list and choose the necessary one. Once the necessary item is selected from the Combo box, you can edit the displayed text replacing it with your own one entirely or partially. The Drop-down list does not allow to edit the selected item. Create a new Date content control position the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the control to be added. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar. click the arrow next to the Content Controls icon. choose the Date option from the menu - the control with the current date will be inserted at the insertion point. right-click the added control and choose the Content control settings option from the contextual menu. in the the Content Control Settings window that opens switch to the Date format tab. choose the necessary Language and select the necessary date format in the Display the date like this list. click the OK button to save the settings and close the window. You can click the arrow button in the right part of the added Date content control to open the calendar and choose the necessary date. Create a new Check box content control position the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the control to be added. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar. click the arrow next to the Content Controls icon. choose the Check box option from the menu - the control will be inserted at the insertion point. right-click the added control and choose the Content control settings option from the contextual menu. in the the Content Control Settings window that opens switch to the Check box tab. click the Checked symbol button to specify the necessary symbol for the selected check box or the Unchecked symbol to select how the cleared check box should look like. The Symbol window will open. To learn more on how to work with symbols, you can refer to this article. when the symbols are specified, click the OK button to save the settings and close the window. The added check box is displayed in the unchecked mode. If you click the added check box it will be checked with the symbol selected in the Checked symbol list. Note: The content control border is visible when the control is selected only. The borders do not appear on a printed version. Moving content controls Controls can be moved to another place in the document: click the button to the left of the control border to select the control and drag it without releasing the mouse button to another position in the document text. You can also copy and paste content controls: select the necessary control and use the Ctrl+C/Ctrl+V key combinations. Editing plain text and rich text content controls Text within the plain text and rich text content controls can be formatted using the icons on the top toolbar: you can adjust the font type, size, color, apply decoration styles and formatting presets. It's also possible to use the Paragraph - Advanced settings window accessible from the contextual menu or from the right sidebar to change the text properties. Text within rich text content controls can be formatted like a regular text of the document, i.e. you can set line spacing, change paragraph indents, adjust tab stops. Changing content control settings No matter which type of content controls is selected, you can change the content control settings in the General and Locking sections of the Content Control Settings window. To open the content control settings, you can proceed in the following ways: Select the necessary content control, click the arrow next to the Content Controls icon at the top toolbar and select the Control Settings option from the menu. Right-click anywhere within the content control and use the Content control settings option from the contextual menu. A new window will open. At the General tab, you can adjust the following settings: Specify the content control Title or Tag in the corresponding fields. The title will be displayed when the control is selected in the document. Tags are used to identify content controls so that you can make reference to them in your code. Choose if you want to display the content control with a Bounding box or not. Use the None option to display the control without the bounding box. If you select the Bounding box option, you can choose this box Color using the field below. Click the Apply to All button to apply the specified Appearance settings to all the content controls in the document. At the Locking tab, you can protect the content control from being deleted or edited using the following settings: Content control cannot be deleted - check this box to protect the content control from being deleted. Contents cannot be edited - check this box to protect the contents of the content control from being edited. For certain types of content controls, the third tab is also available that contains the settings specific for the selected content control type only: Combo box, Drop-down list, Date, Check box. These settings are described above in the sections about adding the corresponding content controls. Click the OK button within the settings window to apply the changes. It's also possible to highlight content controls with a certain color. To highlight controls with a color: Click the button to the left of the control border to select the control, Click the arrow next to the Content Controls icon at the top toolbar, Select the Highlight Settings option from the menu, Select the necessary color on the available palettes: Theme Colors, Standard Colors or specify a new Custom Color. To remove previously applied color highlighting, use the No highlighting option. The selected highlight options will be applied to all the content controls in the document. Removing content controls To remove a control and leave all its contents, click the content control to select it, then proceed in one of the following ways: Click the arrow next to the Content Controls icon at the top toolbar and select the Remove content control option from the menu. Right-click the content control and use the Remove content control option from the contextual menu. To remove a control and all its contents, select the necessary control and press the Delete key on the keyboard." + "body": "Content controls are objects containing different types of contents, such as text, objects etc. Depending on the selected content control type, you can create a form with input fields that can be filled in by other users, or protect some parts of the document from being edited or deleted, etc. Note: the feature to add new content controls is available in the paid version only. In the free Community version, you can edit existing content controls, as well as copy and paste them. Currently, you can add the following types of content controls: Plain Text, Rich Text, Picture, Combo box, Drop-down list, Date, Check box. Plain Text is an object containing text that cannot be formatted. Plain text content controls cannot contain more than one paragraph. Rich Text is an object containing text that can be formatted. Rich text content controls can contain several paragraphs, lists, and objects (images, shapes, tables etc.). Picture is an object containing a single image. Combo box is an object containing a drop-down list with a set of choices. It allows choosing one of the predefined values from the list and edit the selected value if necessary. Drop-down list is an object containing a drop-down list with a set of choices. It allows choosing one of the predefined values from the list. The selected value cannot be edited. Date is an object containing a calendar that allows choosing a date. Check box is an object that allows displaying two states: the check box is selected and the check box is cleared. Adding content controls Create a new Plain Text content control position the insertion point within the text line where the content control should be added, or select a text passage to transform it into a content control. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar. click the arrow next to the Content Controls icon. choose the Plain Text option from the menu. The content control will be inserted at the insertion point within existing text line. Replace the default text within the content control (\"Your text here\") with your own text: select the default text, and type in a new text or copy a text passage from anywhere and paste it into the content control. The Plain text content controls do not allow adding line breaks and cannot contain other objects such as images, tables, etc. Create a new Rich Text content control position the insertion point within the text line where the content control should be added, or select one or more of the existing paragraphs you want to become the control contents. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar. click the arrow next to the Content Controls icon. choose the Rich Text option from the menu. The control will be inserted in a new paragraph. Replace the default text within the control (\"Your text here\") with your own one: select the default text, and type in a new text or copy a text passage from anywhere and paste it into the content control. Rich text content controls allow adding line breaks, i.e. can contain multiple paragraphs as well as some objects, such as images, tables, other content controls etc. Create a new Picture content control position the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the control to be added. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar. click the arrow next to the Content Controls icon. choose the Picture option from the menu - the content control will be inserted at the insertion point. click the image icon in the button above the content control border - a standard file selection window will open. Choose an image stored on your computer and click Open. The selected image will be displayed within the content control. To replace the image, click the image icon in the button above the content control border and select another image. Create a new Combo box or Drop-down list content control The Combo box and Drop-down list content controls contain a drop-down list with a set of choices. They can be created amost in the same way. The main difference between them is that the selected value in the drop-down list cannot be edited, while the selected value in the combo box can be replaced. position the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the control to be added. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar. click the arrow next to the Content Controls icon. choose the Combo box or Drop-down list option from the menu - the control will be inserted at the insertion point. right-click the added control and choose the Content control settings option from the contextual menu. in the the opened Content Control Settings window, switch to the Combo box or Drop-down list tab, depending on the selected content control type. to add a new list item, click the Add button and fill in the available fields in the the opened window: specify the necessary text in the Display name field, e.g. Yes, No, Other. This text will be displayed in the content control within the document. by default, the text in the Value field corresponds to the one entered in the Display name field. If you want to edit the text in the Value field, note that the entered value must be unique for each item. click the OK button. you can edit or delete the list items by using the Edit or Delete buttons on the right or change the item order using the Up and Down button. when all the necessary choices are set, click the OK button to save the settings and close the window. You can click the arrow button in the right part of the added Combo box or Drop-down list content control to open the item list and choose the necessary one. Once the necessary item is selected from the Combo box, you can edit the displayed text by replacing it with your text entirely or partially. The Drop-down list does not allow editing the selected item. Create a new Date content control position the insertion point within the text where content control should be added. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar. click the arrow next to the Content Controls icon. choose the Date option from the menu - the content control with the current date will be inserted at the insertion point. right-click the added content control and choose the Content control settings option from the contextual menu. in the opened Content Control Settings window, switch to the Date format tab. choose the necessary Language and select the necessary date format in the Display the date like this list. click the OK button to save the settings and close the window. You can click the arrow button in the right part of the added Date content control to open the calendar and choose the necessary date. Create a new Check box content control position the insertion point within the text line where the content control should be added. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar. click the arrow next to the Content Controls icon. choose the Check box option from the menu - the content control will be inserted at the insertion point. right-click the added content control and choose the Content control settings option from the contextual menu. in the opened Content Control Settings window, switch to the Check box tab. click the Checked symbol button to specify the necessary symbol for the selected check box or the Unchecked symbol to select how the cleared check box should look like. The Symbol window will open. To learn more on how to work with symbols, please refer to this article. when the symbols are specified, click the OK button to save the settings and close the window. The added check box is displayed in the unchecked mode. If you click the added check box it will be checked with the symbol selected in the Checked symbol list. Note: The content control border is only visible when the control is selected. The borders do not appear on a printed version. Moving content controls Content controls can be moved to another place in the document: click the button on the left of the control border to select the control and drag it without releasing the mouse button to another position in the text. You can also copy and paste content controls: select the necessary control and use the Ctrl+C/Ctrl+V key combinations. Editing plain text and rich text content controls Text within plain text and rich text content controls can be formatted by using the icons on the top toolbar: you can adjust the font type, size, color, apply decoration styles and formatting presets. It's also possible to use the Paragraph - Advanced settings window accessible from the contextual menu or from the right sidebar to change the text properties. Text within rich text content controls can be formatted like a regular text, i.e. you can set line spacing, change paragraph indents, adjust tab stops, etc. Changing content control settings No matter which type of content controls is selected, you can change the content control settings in the General and Locking sections of the Content Control Settings window. To open the content control settings, you can proceed in the following ways: Select the necessary content control, click the arrow next to the Content Controls icon on the top toolbar and select the Control Settings option from the menu. Right-click anywhere within the content control and use the Content control settings option from the contextual menu. A new window will open. Ot the General tab, you can adjust the following settings: Specify the content control Title, Placeholder, or Tag in the corresponding fields. The title will be displayed when the control is selected. The placeholder is the main text displayed within the content control element. Tags are used to identify content controls so that you can make a reference to them in your code. Choose if you want to display the content control with a Bounding box or not. Use the None option to display the control without the bounding box. If you select the Bounding box option, you can choose the Color of this box using the field below. Click the Apply to All button to apply the specified Appearance settings to all the content controls in the document. On the Locking tab, you can protect the content control from being deleted or edited using the following settings: Content control cannot be deleted - check this box to protect the content control from being deleted. Contents cannot be edited - check this box to protect the contents of the content control from being edited. For certain types of content controls, the third tab that contains the specific settings for the selected content control type is also available: Combo box, Drop-down list, Date, Check box. These settings are described above in the sections about adding the corresponding content controls. Click the OK button within the settings window to apply the changes. It's also possible to highlight content controls with a certain color. To highlight controls with a color: Click the button on the left of the control border to select the control, Click the arrow next to the Content Controls icon on the top toolbar, Select the Highlight Settings option from the menu, Choose the required color from the available palettes: Theme Colors, Standard Colors or specify a new Custom Color. To remove previously applied color highlighting, use the No highlighting option. The selected highlight options will be applied to all the content controls in the document. Removing content controls To remove a content control and leave all its contents, select a content control, then proceed in one of the following ways: Click the arrow next to the Content Controls icon on the top toolbar and select the Remove content control option from the menu. Right-click the content control and use the Remove content control option from the contextual menu. To remove a control and all its contents, select the necessary control and press the Delete key on the keyboard." + }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertDateTime.htm", + "title": "Insert date and time", + "body": "To isnert Date and time into your document, put the cursor where you want to insert Date and time, switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, click the Date & time icon on the top toolbar, in the Date & time window that will appear, specify the following parameters: Select the required language. Select one of the suggested formats. Check the Update automatically checkbox to let the date & time update automatically based on the current state. Note: you can also update the date and time manually by using the Refresh field option from the contextual menu. Click the Set as default button to make the current format the default for this language. Click the OK button." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertDropCap.htm", "title": "Insert a drop cap", - "body": "A Drop cap is the first letter of a paragraph that is much larger than others and takes up several lines in height. To add a drop cap, put the cursor within the paragraph you need, switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, click the Drop Cap icon at the top toolbar, in the opened drop-down list select the option you need: In Text - to place the drop cap within the paragraph. In Margin - to place the drop cap in the left margin. The first character of the selected paragraph will be transformed into a drop cap. If you need the drop cap to include some more characters, add them manually: select the drop cap and type in other letters you need. To adjust the drop cap appearance (i.e. font size, type, decoration style or color), select the letter and use the corresponding icons at the Home tab of the top toolbar. When the drop cap is selected, it's surrounded by a frame (a container used to position the drop cap on the page). You can quickly change the frame size dragging its borders or change its position using the icon that appears after hovering your mouse cursor over the frame. To delete the added drop cap, select it, click the Drop Cap icon at the Insert tab of the top toolbar and choose the None option from the drop-down list. To adjust the added drop cap parameters, select it, click the Drop Cap icon at the Insert tab of the top toolbar and choose the Drop Cap Settings option from the drop-down list. The Drop Cap - Advanced Settings window will open: The Drop Cap tab allows to set the following parameters: Position - is used to change the drop cap placement. Select the In Text or In Margin option, or click None to delete the drop cap. Font - is used to select one of the fonts from the list of the available ones. Height in rows - is used to specify how many lines the drop cap should span. It's possible to select a value from 1 to 10. Distance from text - is used to specify the amount of space between the text of the paragraph and the right border of the frame that surrounds the drop cap. The Borders & Fill tab allows to add a border around the drop cap and adjust its parameters. They are the following: Border parameters (size, color and presence or absence) - set the border size, select its color and choose the borders (top, bottom, left, right or their combination) you want to apply these settings to. Background color - choose the color for the drop cap background. The Margins tab allows to set the distance between the drop cap and the Top, Bottom, Left and Right borders around it (if the borders have previously been added). Once the drop cap is added you can also change the Frame parameters. To access them, right click within the frame and select the Frame Advanced Settings from the menu. The Frame - Advanced Settings window will open: The Frame tab allows to set the following parameters: Position - is used to select the Inline or Flow wrapping style. Or you can click None to delete the frame. Width and Height - are used to change the frame dimensions. The Auto option allows to automatically adjust the frame size to fit the drop cap in it. The Exactly option allows to specify fixed values. The At least option is used to set the minimum height value (if you change the drop cap size, the frame height changes accordingly, but it cannot be less than the specified value). Horizontal parameters are used either to set the frame exact position in the selected units of measurement relative to a margin, page or column, or to align the frame (left, center or right) relative to one of these reference points. You can also set the horizontal Distance from text i.e. the amount of space between the vertical frame borders and the text of the paragraph. Vertical parameters are used either to set the frame exact position in the selected units of measurement relative to a margin, page or paragraph, or to align the frame (top, center or bottom) relative to one of these reference points. You can also set the vertical Distance from text i.e. the amount of space between the horizontal frame borders and the text of the paragraph. Move with text - controls whether the frame moves as the paragraph to which it is anchored moves. The Borders & Fill and Margins tabs allow to set just the same parameters as at the tabs of the same name in the Drop Cap - Advanced Settings window." + "body": "A drop cap is a large capital letter used at the beginning of a paragraph or section. The size of a drop cap is usually several lines. To add a drop cap, place the cursor within the required paragraph, switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, click the Drop Cap icon on the top toolbar, in the opened drop-down list select the option you need: In Text - to place the drop cap within the paragraph. In Margin - to place the drop cap in the left margin. The first character of the selected paragraph will be transformed into a drop cap. If you need the drop cap to include some more characters, add them manually: select the drop cap and type in other letters you need. To adjust the drop cap appearance (i.e. font size, type, decoration style or color), select the letter and use the corresponding icons on the Home tab of the top toolbar. When the drop cap is selected, it's surrounded by a frame (a container used to position the drop cap on the page). You can quickly change the frame size dragging its borders or change its position using the icon that appears after hovering your mouse cursor over the frame. To delete the added drop cap, select it, click the Drop Cap icon on the Insert tab of the top toolbar and choose the None option from the drop-down list. To adjust the added drop cap parameters, select it, click the Drop Cap icon at the Insert tab of the top toolbar and choose the Drop Cap Settings option from the drop-down list. The Drop Cap - Advanced Settings window will appear: The Drop Cap tab allows adjusting the following parameters: Position is used to change the placement of a drop cap. Select the In Text or In Margin option, or click None to delete the drop cap. Font is used to select a font from the list of the available fonts. Height in rows is used to define how many lines a drop cap should span. It's possible to select a value from 1 to 10. Distance from text is used to specify the amount of spacing between the text of the paragraph and the right border of the drop cap frame. The Borders & Fill tab allows adding a border around a drop cap and adjusting its parameters. They are the following: Border parameters (size, color and presence or absence) - set the border size, select its color and choose the borders (top, bottom, left, right or their combination) you want to apply these settings to. Background color - choose the color for the drop cap background. The Margins tab allows setting the distance between the drop cap and the Top, Bottom, Left and Right borders around it (if the borders have previously been added). Once the drop cap is added you can also change the Frame parameters. To access them, right click within the frame and select the Frame Advanced Settings from the menu. The Frame - Advanced Settings window will open: The Frame tab allows adjusting the following parameters: Position is used to select the Inline or Flow wrapping style. You can also click None to delete the frame. Width and Height are used to change the frame dimensions. The Auto option allows automatically adjusting the frame size to fit the drop cap. The Exactly option allows specifying fixed values. The At least option is used to set the minimum height value (if you change the drop cap size, the frame height changes accordingly, but it cannot be less than the specified value). Horizontal parameters are used either to set the exact position of the frame in the selected units of measurement with respect to a margin, page or column, or to align the frame (left, center or right) with respect to one of these reference points. You can also set the horizontal Distance from text i.e. the amount of space between the vertical frame borders and the text of the paragraph. Vertical parameters are used either to set the exact position of the frame is the selected units of measurement with respect to a margin, page or paragraph, or to align the frame (top, center or bottom) with respect to one of these reference points. You can also set the vertical Distance from text i.e. the amount of space between the horizontal frame borders and the text of the paragraph. Move with text is used to make sure that the frame moves as the paragraph to which it is anchored. The Borders & Fill and Margins allow adjusting the same parameters as the corresponding tabs in the Drop Cap - Advanced Settings window." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertEquation.htm", "title": "Insert equations", - "body": "Document Editor allows you to build equations using the built-in templates, edit them, insert special characters (including mathematical operators, Greek letters, accents etc.). Add a new equation To insert an equation from the gallery, put the cursor within the necessary line , switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, click the arrow next to the Equation icon at the top toolbar, in the opened drop-down list select the equation category you need. The following categories are currently available: Symbols, Fractions, Scripts, Radicals, Integrals, Large Operators, Brackets, Functions, Accents, Limits and Logarithms, Operators, Matrices, click the certain symbol/equation in the corresponding set of templates. The selected symbol/equation box will be inserted at the cursor position. If the selected line is empty, the equation will be centered. To align such an equation left or right, click on the equation box and use the or icon at the Home tab of the top toolbar. Each equation template represents a set of slots. Slot is a position for each element that makes up the equation. An empty slot (also called as a placeholder) has a dotted outline . You need to fill in all the placeholders specifying the necessary values. Note: to start creating an equation, you can also use the Alt + = keyboard shortcut. It's also possible to add a caption to the equation. To learn more on how to work with captions for equations, you can refer to this article. Enter values The insertion point specifies where the next character you enter will appear. To position the insertion point precisely, click within a placeholder and use the keyboard arrows to move the insertion point by one character left/right or one line up/down. If you need to create a new placeholder below the slot with the insertion point within the selected template, press Enter. Once the insertion point is positioned, you can fill in the placeholder: enter the desired numeric/literal value using the keyboard, insert a special character using the Symbols palette from the Equation menu at the Insert tab of the top toolbar, add another equation template from the palette to create a complex nested equation. The size of the primary equation will be automatically adjusted to fit its content. The size of the nested equation elements depends on the primary equation placeholder size, but it cannot be smaller than the sub-subscript size. To add some new equation elements you can also use the right-click menu options: To add a new argument that goes before or after the existing one within Brackets, you can right-click on the existing argument and select the Insert argument before/after option from the menu. To add a new equation within Cases with several conditions from the Brackets group (or equations of other types, if you've previously added new placeholders by pressing Enter), you can right-click on an empty placeholder or entered equation within it and select the Insert equation before/after option from the menu. To add a new row or a column in a Matrix, you can right-click on a placeholder within it, select the Insert option from the menu, then select Row Above/Below or Column Left/Right. Note: currently, equations cannot be entered using the linear format, i.e. \\sqrt(4&x^3). When entering the values of the mathematical expressions, you do not need to use Spacebar as the spaces between the characters and signs of operations are set automatically. If the equation is too long and does not fit to a single line, automatic line breaking occurs as you type. You can also insert a line break in a specific position by right-clicking on a mathematical operator and selecting the Insert manual break option from the menu. The selected operator will start a new line. Once the manual line break is added, you can press the Tab key to align the new line to any math operator of the previous line. To delete the added manual line break, right-click on the mathematical operator that starts a new line and select the Delete manual break option. Format equations To increase or decrease the equation font size, click anywhere within the equation box and use the and buttons at the Home tab of the top toolbar or select the necessary font size from the list. All the equation elements will change correspondingly. The letters within the equation are italicized by default. If necessary, you can change the font style (bold, italic, strikeout) or color for a whole equation or its part. The underlined style can be applied to the entire equation only, not to individual characters. Select the necessary part of the equation by clicking and dragging. The selected part will be highlighted blue. Then use the necessary buttons at the Home tab of the top toolbar to format the selection. For example, you can remove the italic format for ordinary words that are not variables or constants. To modify some equation elements you can also use the right-click menu options: To change the Fractions format, you can right-click on a fraction and select the Change to skewed/linear/stacked fraction option from the menu (the available options differ depending on the selected fraction type). To change the Scripts position relating to text, you can right-click on the equation that includes scripts and select the Scripts before/after text option from the menu. To change the argument size for Scripts, Radicals, Integrals, Large Operators, Limits and Logarithms, Operators as well as for overbraces/underbraces and templates with grouping characters from the Accents group, you can right-click on the argument you want to change and select the Increase/Decrease argument size option from the menu. To specify whether an empty degree placeholder should be displayed or not for a Radical, you can right-click on the radical and select the Hide/Show degree option from the menu. To specify whether an empty limit placeholder should be displayed or not for an Integral or Large Operator, you can right-click on the equation and select the Hide/Show top/bottom limit option from the menu. To change the limits position relating to the integral or operator sign for Integrals or Large Operators, you can right-click on the equation and select the Change limits location option from the menu. The limits can be displayed to the right of the operator sign (as subscripts and superscripts) or directly above and below the operator sign. To change the limits position relating to text for Limits and Logarithms and templates with grouping characters from the Accents group, you can right-click on the equation and select the Limit over/under text option from the menu. To choose which of the Brackets should be displayed, you can right-click on the expression within them and select the Hide/Show opening/closing bracket option from the menu. To control the Brackets size, you can right-click on the expression within them. The Stretch brackets option is selected by default so that the brackets can grow according to the expression within them, but you can deselect this option to prevent brackets from stretching. When this option is activated, you can also use the Match brackets to argument height option. To change the character position relating to text for overbraces/underbraces or overbars/underbars from the Accents group, you can right-click on the template and select the Char/Bar over/under text option from the menu. To choose which borders should be displayed for a Boxed formula from the Accents group, you can right-click on the equation and select the Border properties option from the menu, then select Hide/Show top/bottom/left/right border or Add/Hide horizontal/vertical/diagonal line. To specify whether empty placeholders should be displayed or not for a Matrix, you can right-click on it and select the Hide/Show placeholder option from the menu. To align some equation elements you can use the right-click menu options: To align equations within Cases with several conditions from the Brackets group (or equations of other types, if you've previously added new placeholders by pressing Enter), you can right-click on an equation, select the Alignment option from the menu, then select the alignment type: Top, Center, or Bottom. To align a Matrix vertically, you can right-click on the matrix, select the Matrix Alignment option from the menu, then select the alignment type: Top, Center, or Bottom. To align elements within a Matrix column horizontally, you can right-click on a placeholder within the column, select the Column Alignment option from the menu, then select the alignment type: Left, Center, or Right. Delete equation elements To delete a part of the equation, select the part you want to delete by dragging the mouse or holding down the Shift key and using the arrow buttons, then press the Delete key on the keyboard. A slot can only be deleted together with the template it belongs to. To delete the entire equation, select it completely by dragging the mouse or double-clicking on the equation box and press the Delete key on the keyboard. To delete some equation elements you can also use the right-click menu options: To delete a Radical, you can right-click on it and select the Delete radical option from the menu. To delete a Subscript and/or Superscript, you can right-click on the expression that contains them and select the Remove subscript/superscript option from the menu. If the expression contains scripts that go before text, the Remove scripts option is available. To delete Brackets, you can right-click on the expression within them and select the Delete enclosing characters or Delete enclosing characters and separators option from the menu. If the expression within Brackets inclides more than one argument, you can right-click on the argument you want to delete and select the Delete argument option from the menu. If Brackets enclose more than one equation (i.e. Cases with several conditions), you can right-click on the equation you want to delete and select the Delete equation option from the menu. This option is also available for equations of other types if you've previously added new placeholders by pressing Enter. To delete a Limit, you can right-click on it and select the Remove limit option from the menu. To delete an Accent, you can right-click on it and select the Remove accent character, Delete char or Remove bar option from the menu (the available options differ depending on the selected accent). To delete a row or a column of a Matrix, you can right-click on the placeholder within the row/column you need to delete, select the Delete option from the menu, then select Delete Row/Column." + "body": "The Document Editor allows you to build equations using the built-in templates, edit them, insert special characters (including mathematical operators, Greek letters, accents, etc.). Add a new equation To insert an equation from the gallery, put the cursor within the necessary line , switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, click the arrow next to the Equation icon on the top toolbar, in the opened drop-down list select the equation category you need. The following categories are currently available: Symbols, Fractions, Scripts, Radicals, Integrals, Large Operators, Brackets, Functions, Accents, Limits and Logarithms, Operators, Matrices, click the certain symbol/equation in the corresponding set of templates. The selected symbol/equation box will be inserted at the cursor position. If the selected line is empty, the equation will be centered. To align such an equation to the left or to the right, click on the equation box and use the or icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar. Each equation template represents a set of slots. A slot is a position for each element that makes up the equation. An empty slot (also called as a placeholder) has a dotted outline . You need to fill in all the placeholders specifying the necessary values. Note: to start creating an equation, you can also use the Alt + = keyboard shortcut. It's also possible to add a caption to the equation. To learn more on how to work with captions for equations, please refer to this article. Enter values The insertion point specifies where the next character will appear. To position the insertion point precisely, click within the placeholder and use the keyboard arrows to move the insertion point by one character left/right or one line up/down. If you need to create a new placeholder below the slot with the insertion point within the selected template, press Enter. Once the insertion point is positioned, you can fill in the placeholder: enter the desired numeric/literal value using the keyboard, insert a special character using the Symbols palette from the Equation menu on the Insert tab of the top toolbar or typing them from the keyboard (see the Math AutoСorrect option description), add another equation template from the palette to create a complex nested equation. The size of the primary equation will be automatically adjusted to fit its content. The size of the nested equation elements depends on the primary equation placeholder size, but it cannot be smaller than the sub-subscript size. To add some new equation elements you can also use the right-click menu options: To add a new argument that goes before or after the existing one within Brackets, you can right-click on the existing argument and select the Insert argument before/after option from the menu. To add a new equation within Cases with several conditions from the Brackets group (or equations of other types, if you've previously added new placeholders by pressing Enter), you can right-click on an empty placeholder or entered equation within it and select the Insert equation before/after option from the menu. To add a new row or a column in a Matrix, you can right-click on a placeholder within it, select the Insert option from the menu, then select Row Above/Below or Column Left/Right. Note: currently, equations cannot be entered using the linear format, i.e. \\sqrt(4&x^3). When entering the values of the mathematical expressions, you do not need to use Spacebar as the spaces between the characters and signs of operations are set automatically. If the equation is too long and does not fit a single line, automatic line breaking occurs while typing. You can also insert a line break in a specific position by right-clicking on a mathematical operator and selecting the Insert manual break option from the menu. The selected operator will start a new line. Once the manual line break is added, you can press the Tab key to align the new line to any math operator of the previous line. To delete the added manual line break, right-click on the mathematical operator that starts a new line and select the Delete manual break option. Format equations To increase or decrease the equation font size, click anywhere within the equation box and use the and buttons on the Home tab of the top toolbar or select the necessary font size from the list. All the equation elements will change correspondingly. The letters within the equation are italicized by default. If necessary, you can change the font style (bold, italic, strikeout) or color for a whole equation or its part. The underlined style can be applied to the entire equation only, not to individual characters. Select the necessary part of the equation by clicking and dragging it. The selected part will be highlighted in blue. Then use the necessary buttons on the Home tab of the top toolbar to format the selected part. For example, you can remove the italic format for ordinary words that are not variables or constants. To modify some equation elements, you can also use the right-click menu options: To change the Fractions format, you can right-click on a fraction and select the Change to skewed/linear/stacked fraction option from the menu (the available options differ depending on the selected fraction type). To change the Scripts position relating to text, you can right-click on the equation that includes scripts and select the Scripts before/after text option from the menu. To change the argument size for Scripts, Radicals, Integrals, Large Operators, Limits and Logarithms, Operators as well as for overbraces/underbraces and templates with grouping characters from the Accents group, you can right-click on the argument you want to change and select the Increase/Decrease argument size option from the menu. To specify whether an empty degree placeholder should be displayed or not for a Radical, you can right-click on the radical and select the Hide/Show degree option from the menu. To specify whether an empty limit placeholder should be displayed or not for an Integral or Large Operator, you can right-click on the equation and select the Hide/Show top/bottom limit option from the menu. To change the limits position relating to the integral or operator sign for Integrals or Large Operators, you can right-click on the equation and select the Change limits location option from the menu. The limits can be displayed on the right of the operator sign (as subscripts and superscripts) or directly above and below the operator sign. To change the limits position relating to text for Limits and Logarithms and templates with grouping characters from the Accents group, you can right-click on the equation and select the Limit over/under text option from the menu. To choose which of the Brackets should be displayed, you can right-click on the expression within them and select the Hide/Show opening/closing bracket option from the menu. To control the Brackets size, you can right-click on the expression within them. The Stretch brackets option is selected by default so that the brackets can grow according to the expression within them, but you can deselect this option to prevent brackets from stretching. When this option is activated, you can also use the Match brackets to argument height option. To change the character position relating to text for overbraces/underbraces or overbars/underbars from the Accents group, you can right-click on the template and select the Char/Bar over/under text option from the menu. To choose which borders should be displayed for a Boxed formula from the Accents group, you can right-click on the equation and select the Border properties option from the menu, then select Hide/Show top/bottom/left/right border or Add/Hide horizontal/vertical/diagonal line. To specify whether empty placeholders should be displayed or not for a Matrix, you can right-click on it and select the Hide/Show placeholder option from the menu. To align some equation elements you can use the right-click menu options: To align equations within Cases with several conditions from the Brackets group (or equations of other types, if you've previously added new placeholders by pressing Enter), you can right-click on an equation, select the Alignment option from the menu, then select the alignment type: Top, Center, or Bottom. To align a Matrix vertically, you can right-click on the matrix, select the Matrix Alignment option from the menu, then select the alignment type: Top, Center, or Bottom. To align elements within a Matrix column horizontally, you can right-click on a placeholder within the column, select the Column Alignment option from the menu, then select the alignment type: Left, Center, or Right. Delete equation elements To delete a part of the equation, select it by dragging the mouse or holding down the Shift key and using the arrow buttons, then press the Delete key on the keyboard. A slot can only be deleted together with the template it belongs to. To delete the entire equation, select it completely by dragging the mouse or double-clicking on the equation box and press the Delete key on the keyboard. To delete some equation elements, you can also use the right-click menu options: To delete a Radical, you can right-click on it and select the Delete radical option from the menu. To delete a Subscript and/or Superscript, you can right-click on the expression that contains them and select the Remove subscript/superscript option from the menu. If the expression contains scripts that go before text, the Remove scripts option is available. To delete Brackets, you can right-click on the expression within them and select the Delete enclosing characters or Delete enclosing characters and separators option from the menu. If the expression within Brackets inclides more than one argument, you can right-click on the argument you want to delete and select the Delete argument option from the menu. If Brackets enclose more than one equation (i.e. Cases with several conditions), you can right-click on the equation you want to delete and select the Delete equation option from the menu. This option is also available for equations of other types if you've previously added new placeholders by pressing Enter. To delete a Limit, you can right-click on it and select the Remove limit option from the menu. To delete an Accent, you can right-click on it and select the Remove accent character, Delete char or Remove bar option from the menu (the available options differ depending on the selected accent). To delete a row or a column of a Matrix, you can right-click on the placeholder within the row/column you need to delete, select the Delete option from the menu, then select Delete Row/Column. Convert equations If you open an existing document containing equations which were created with an old version of equation editor (for example, with MS Office versions before 2007), you need to convert these equations to the Office Math ML format to be able to edit them. To convert an equation, double-click it. The warning window will appear: To convert the selected equation only, click the Yes button in the warning window. To convert all equations in this document, check the Apply to all equations box and click Yes. Once the equation is converted, you can edit it." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertFootnotes.htm", "title": "Insert footnotes", - "body": "You can add footnotes to provide explanations or comments for certain sentences or terms used in your text, make references to the sources etc. To insert a footnote into your document, position the insertion point at the end of the text passage that you want to add a footnote to, switch to the References tab of the top toolbar, click the Footnote icon at the top toolbar, or click the arrow next to the Footnote icon and select the Insert Footnote option from the menu, The footnote mark (i.e. the superscript character that indicates a footnote) appears in the document text and the insertion point moves to the bottom of the current page. type in the footnote text. Repeat the above mentioned operations to add subsequent footnotes for other text passages in the document. The footnotes are numbered automatically. If you hover the mouse pointer over the footnote mark in the document text, a small pop-up window with the footnote text appears. To easily navigate between the added footnotes within the document text, click the arrow next to the Footnote icon at the References tab of the top toolbar, in the Go to Footnotes section, use the arrow to go to the previous footnote or the arrow to go to the next footnote. To edit the footnotes settings, click the arrow next to the Footnote icon at the References tab of the top toolbar, select the Notes Settings option from the menu, change the current parameters in the Notes Settings window that opens: Set the Location of footnotes on the page selecting one of the available options: Bottom of page - to position footnotes at the bottom of the page (this option is selected by default). Below text - to position footnotes closer to the text. This option can be useful in cases when the page contains a short text. Adjust the footnotes Format: Number Format - select the necessary number format from the available ones: 1, 2, 3,..., a, b, c,..., A, B, C,..., i, ii, iii,..., I, II, III,.... Start at - use the arrows to set the number or letter you want to start numbering with. Numbering - select a way to number your footnotes: Continuous - to number footnotes sequentially throughout the document, Restart each section - to start footnote numbering with the number 1 (or some other specified character) at the beginning of each section, Restart each page - to start footnote numbering with the number 1 (or some other specified character) at the beginning of each page. Custom Mark - set a special character or a word you want to use as the footnote mark (e.g. * or Note1). Enter the necessary character/word into the text entry field and click the Insert button at the bottom of the Notes Settings window. Use the Apply changes to drop-down list to select if you want to apply the specified notes settings to the Whole document or the Current section only. Note: to use different footnotes formatting in separate parts of the document, you need to add section breaks first. When ready, click the Apply button. To remove a single footnote, position the insertion point directly before the footnote mark in the document text and press Delete. Other footnotes will be renumbered automatically. To delete all the footnotes in the document, click the arrow next to the Footnote icon at the References tab of the top toolbar, select the Delete All Footnotes option from the menu." + "body": "You can insert footnotes to add explanations or comments for certain sentences or terms used in your text, make references to the sources, etc. To insert a footnote into your document, position the insertion point at the end of the text passage that you want to add the footnote to, switch to the References tab of the top toolbar, click the Footnote icon on the top toolbar, or click the arrow next to the Footnote icon and select the Insert Footnote option from the menu, The footnote mark (i.e. the superscript character that indicates a footnote) appears in the text of the document, and the insertion point moves to the bottom of the current page. type in the footnote text. Repeat the above mentioned operations to add subsequent footnotes for other text passages in the document. The footnotes are numbered automatically. If you hover the mouse pointer over the footnote mark in the document text, a small pop-up window with the footnote text appears. To easily navigate through the added footnotes in the text of the document, click the arrow next to the Footnote icon on the References tab of the top toolbar, in the Go to Footnotes section, use the arrow to go to the previous footnote or the arrow to go to the next footnote. To edit the footnotes settings, click the arrow next to the Footnote icon on the References tab of the top toolbar, select the Notes Settings option from the menu, change the current parameters in the Notes Settings window that will appear: Set the Location of footnotes on the page selecting one of the available options: Bottom of page - to position footnotes at the bottom of the page (this option is selected by default). Below text - to position footnotes closer to the text. This option can be useful in cases when the page contains a short text. Adjust the footnotes Format: Number Format - select the necessary number format from the available ones: 1, 2, 3,..., a, b, c,..., A, B, C,..., i, ii, iii,..., I, II, III,.... Start at - use the arrows to set the number or letter you want to start numbering with. Numbering - select a way to number your footnotes: Continuous - to number footnotes sequentially throughout the document, Restart each section - to start footnote numbering with 1 (or another specified character) at the beginning of each section, Restart each page - to start footnote numbering with 1 (or another specified character) at the beginning of each page. Custom Mark - set a special character or a word you want to use as the footnote mark (e.g. * or Note1). Enter the necessary character/word into the text entry field and click the Insert button at the bottom of the Notes Settings window. Use the Apply changes to drop-down list if you want to apply the specified notes settings to the Whole document or the Current section only. Note: to use different footnotes formatting in separate parts of the document, you need to add section breaks first. When you finish, click the Apply button. To remove a single footnote, position the insertion point directly before the footnote mark in the text and press Delete. Other footnotes will be renumbered automatically. To delete all the footnotes in the document, click the arrow next to the Footnote icon on the References tab of the top toolbar, select the Delete All Footnotes option from the menu." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertHeadersFooters.htm", "title": "Insert headers and footers", - "body": "To add a header or footer to your document or edit the existing one, switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, click the Header/Footer icon at the top toolbar, select one of the following options: Edit Header to insert or edit the header text. Edit Footer to insert or edit the footer text. change the current parameters for headers or footers at the right sidebar: Set the Position of text relative to the top (for headers) or bottom (for footers) of the page. Check the Different first page box to apply a different header or footer to the very first page or in case you don't want to add any header/ footer to it at all. Use the Different odd and even pages box to add different headers/footer for odd and even pages. The Link to Previous option is available in case you've previously added sections into your document. If not, it will be grayed out. Moreover, this option is also unavailable for the very first section (i.e. when a header or footer that belongs to the first section is selected). By default, this box is checked, so that the same headers/footers are applied to all the sections. If you select a header or footer area, you will see that the area is marked with the Same as Previous label. Uncheck the Link to Previous box to use different headers/footers for each section of the document. The Same as Previous label will no longer be displayed. To enter a text or edit the already entered text and adjust the header or footer settings, you can also double-click within the upper or lower part of a page or click with the right mouse button there and select the only menu option - Edit Header or Edit Footer. To switch to the document body, double-click within the working area. The text you use as a header or footer will be displayed in gray. Note: please refer to the Insert page numbers section to learn how to add page numbers to your document." + "body": "To add a new header or footer to your document or edit one that already exists, switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, click the Header/Footer icon on the top toolbar, select one of the following options: Edit Header to insert or edit the header text. Edit Footer to insert or edit the footer text. change the current parameters for headers or footers on the right sidebar: Set the Position of the text: to the top for headers or to the bottom for footers. Check the Different first page box to apply a different header or footer to the very first page or in case you don't want to add any header/ footer to it at all. Use the Different odd and even pages box to add different headers/footer for odd and even pages. The Link to Previous option is available in case you've previously added sections into your document. If not, it will be grayed out. Moreover, this option is also unavailable for the very first section (i.e. when a header or footer that belongs to the first section is selected). By default, this box is checked, so that the same headers/footers are applied to all the sections. If you select a header or footer area, you will see that the area is marked with the Same as Previous label. Uncheck the Link to Previous box to use different headers/footers for each section of the document. The Same as Previous label will no longer be displayed. To enter a text or edit the already entered text and adjust the header or footer settings, you can also double-click anywhere on the top or bottom margin of your document or click with the right mouse button there and select the only menu option - Edit Header or Edit Footer. To switch to the document body, double-click within the working area. The text you use as a header or footer will be displayed in gray. Note: please refer to the Insert page numbers section to learn how to add page numbers to your document." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm", "title": "Insert images", - "body": "In Document Editor, you can insert images in the most popular formats into your document. The following image formats are supported: BMP, GIF, JPEG, JPG, PNG. Insert an image To insert an image into the document text, place the cursor where you want the image to be put, switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, click the Image icon at the top toolbar, select one of the following options to load the image: the Image from File option will open the standard dialog window for file selection. Browse your computer hard disk drive for the necessary file and click the Open button the Image from URL option will open the window where you can enter the necessary image web address and click the OK button the Image from Storage option will open the Select data source window. Select an image stored on your portal and click the OK button once the image is added you can change its size, properties, and position. It's also possible to add a caption to the image. To learn more on how to work with captions for images, you can refer to this article. Move and resize images To change the image size, drag small squares situated on its edges. To maintain the original proportions of the selected image while resizing, hold down the Shift key and drag one of the corner icons. To alter the image position, use the icon that appears after hovering your mouse cursor over the image. Drag the image to the necessary position without releasing the mouse button. When you move the image, guide lines are displayed to help you position the object on the page precisely (if a wrapping style other than inline is selected). To rotate the image, hover the mouse cursor over the rotation handle and drag it clockwise or counterclockwise. To constrain the rotation angle to 15 degree increments, hold down the Shift key while rotating. Note: the list of keyboard shortcuts that can be used when working with objects is available here. Adjust image settings Some of the image settings can be altered using the Image settings tab of the right sidebar. To activate it click the image and choose the Image settings icon on the right. Here you can change the following properties: Size is used to view the current image Width and Height. If necessary, you can restore the actual image size clicking the Actual Size button. The Fit to Margin button allows to resize the image, so that it occupies all the space between the left and right page margin. The Crop button is used to crop the image. Click the Crop button to activate cropping handles which appear on the image corners and in the center of each its side. Manually drag the handles to set the cropping area. You can move the mouse cursor over the cropping area border so that it turns into the icon and drag the area. To crop a single side, drag the handle located in the center of this side. To simultaneously crop two adjacent sides, drag one of the corner handles. To equally crop two opposite sides of the image, hold down the Ctrl key when dragging the handle in the center of one of these sides. To equally crop all sides of the image, hold down the Ctrl key when dragging any of the corner handles. When the cropping area is specified, click the Crop button once again, or press the Esc key, or click anywhere outside of the cropping area to apply the changes. After the cropping area is selected, it's also possible to use the Fill and Fit options available from the Crop drop-down menu. Click the Crop button once again and select the option you need: If you select the Fill option, the central part of the original image will be preserved and used to fill the selected cropping area, while other parts of the image will be removed. If you select the Fit option, the image will be resized so that it fits the cropping area height or width. No parts of the original image will be removed, but empty spaces may appear within the selected cropping area. Rotation is used to rotate the image by 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise as well as to flip the image horizontally or vertically. Click one of the buttons: to rotate the image by 90 degrees counterclockwise to rotate the image by 90 degrees clockwise to flip the image horizontally (left to right) to flip the image vertically (upside down) Wrapping Style is used to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind (for more information see the advanced settings description below). Replace Image is used to replace the current image loading another one From File or From URL. Some of these options you can also find in the right-click menu. The menu options are: Cut, Copy, Paste - standard options which are used to cut or copy a selected text/object and paste a previously cut/copied text passage or object to the current cursor position. Arrange is used to bring the selected image to foreground, send to background, move forward or backward as well as group or ungroup images to perform operations with several of them at once. To learn more on how to arrange objects you can refer to this page. Align is used to align the image left, center, right, top, middle, bottom. To learn more on how to align objects you can refer to this page. Wrapping Style is used to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind - or edit the wrap boundary. The Edit Wrap Boundary option is available only if you select a wrapping style other than Inline. Drag wrap points to customize the boundary. To create a new wrap point, click anywhere on the red line and drag it to the necessary position. Rotate is used to rotate the image by 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise as well as to flip the image horizontally or vertically. Crop is used to apply one of the cropping options: Crop, Fill or Fit. Select the Crop option from the submenu, then drag the cropping handles to set the cropping area, and click one of these three options from the submenu once again to apply the changes. Actual Size is used to change the current image size to the actual one. Replace image is used to replace the current image loading another one From File or From URL. Image Advanced Settings is used to open the 'Image - Advanced Settings' window. When the image is selected, the Shape settings icon is also available on the right. You can click this icon to open the Shape settings tab at the right sidebar and adjust the shape Stroke type, size and color as well as change the shape type selecting another shape from the Change Autoshape menu. The shape of the image will change correspondingly. At the Shape Settings tab, you can also use the Show shadow option to add a shadow to the image. Adjust image advanced settings To change the image advanced settings, click the image with the right mouse button and select the Image Advanced Settings option from the right-click menu or just click the Show advanced settings link at the right sidebar. The image properties window will open: The Size tab contains the following parameters: Width and Height - use these options to change the image width and/or height. If the Constant proportions button is clicked (in this case it looks like this ), the width and height will be changed together preserving the original image aspect ratio. To restore the actual size of the added image, click the Actual Size button. The Rotation tab contains the following parameters: Angle - use this option to rotate the image by an exactly specified angle. Enter the necessary value measured in degrees into the field or adjust it using the arrows on the right. Flipped - check the Horizontally box to flip the image horizontally (left to right) or check the Vertically box to flip the image vertically (upside down). The Text Wrapping tab contains the following parameters: Wrapping Style - use this option to change the way the image is positioned relative to the text: it will either be a part of the text (in case you select the inline style) or bypassed by it from all sides (if you select one of the other styles). Inline - the image is considered to be a part of the text, like a character, so when the text moves, the image moves as well. In this case the positioning options are inaccessible. If one of the following styles is selected, the image can be moved independently of the text and positioned on the page exactly: Square - the text wraps the rectangular box that bounds the image. Tight - the text wraps the actual image edges. Through - the text wraps around the image edges and fills in the open white space within the image. So that the effect can appear, use the Edit Wrap Boundary option from the right-click menu. Top and bottom - the text is only above and below the image. In front - the image overlaps the text. Behind - the text overlaps the image. If you select the square, tight, through, or top and bottom style, you will be able to set up some additional parameters - distance from text at all sides (top, bottom, left, right). The Position tab is available only if you select a wrapping style other than inline. This tab contains the following parameters that vary depending on the selected wrapping style: The Horizontal section allows you to select one of the following three image positioning types: Alignment (left, center, right) relative to character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin, Absolute Position measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified at the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) to the right of character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin, Relative position measured in percent relative to the left margin, margin, page or right margin. The Vertical section allows you to select one of the following three image positioning types: Alignment (top, center, bottom) relative to line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin, Absolute Position measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified at the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) below line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin, Relative position measured in percent relative to the margin, bottom margin, page or top margin. Move object with text controls whether the image moves as the text to which it is anchored moves. Allow overlap controls whether two images overlap or not if you drag them near each other on the page. The Alternative Text tab allows to specify a Title and Description which will be read to the people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information there is in the image." + "body": "In the Document Editor, you can insert images in the most popular formats into your document. The following image formats are supported: BMP, GIF, JPEG, JPG, PNG. Insert an image To insert an image into the document text, place the cursor where you want the image to be put, switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, click the Image icon on the top toolbar, select one of the following options to load the image: the Image from File option will open a standard dialog window for to select a file. Browse your computer hard disk drive for the necessary file and click the Open button the Image from URL option will open the window where you can enter the web address of the requiredimage, and click the OK button the Image from Storage option will open the Select data source window. Select an image stored on your portal and click the OK button once the image is added, you can change its size, properties, and position. It's also possible to add a caption to the image. To learn more on how to work with captions for images, you can refer to this article. Move and resize images To change the image size, drag small squares situated on its edges. To maintain the original proportions of the selected image while resizing, hold down the Shift key and drag one of the corner icons. To alter the image position, use the icon that appears after hovering your mouse cursor over the image. Drag the image to the necessary position without releasing the mouse button. When you move the image, the guide lines are displayed to help you precisely position the object on the page (if the selected wrapping style is different from the inline). To rotate the image, hover the mouse cursor over the rotation handle and drag it clockwise or counterclockwise. To constrain the rotation angle to 15 degree increments, hold down the Shift key while rotating. Note: the list of keyboard shortcuts that can be used when working with objects is available here. Adjust image settings Some of the image settings can be altered using the Image settings tab of the right sidebar. To activate it click the image and choose the Image settings icon on the right. Here you can change the following properties: Size is used to view the Width and Height of the current image. If necessary, you can restore the actual image size clicking the Actual Size button. The Fit to Margin button allows you to resize the image, so that it occupies all the space between the left and right page margin. The Crop button is used to crop the image. Click the Crop button to activate cropping handles which appear on the image corners and in the center of each its side. Manually drag the handles to set the cropping area. You can move the mouse cursor over the cropping area border so that it turns into the icon and drag the area. To crop a single side, drag the handle located in the center of this side. To simultaneously crop two adjacent sides, drag one of the corner handles. To equally crop the two opposite sides of the image, hold down the Ctrl key when dragging the handle in the center of one of these sides. To equally crop all sides of the image, hold down the Ctrl key when dragging any of the corner handles. When the cropping area is specified, click the Crop button once again, or press the Esc key, or click anywhere outside of the cropping area to apply the changes. After the cropping area is selected, it's also possible to use the Fill and Fit options available from the Crop drop-down menu. Click the Crop button once again and select the option you need: If you select the Fill option, the central part of the original image will be preserved and used to fill the selected cropping area, while the other parts of the image will be removed. If you select the Fit option, the image will be resized so that it fits the height and the width of the cropping area. No parts of the original image will be removed, but empty spaces may appear within the selected cropping area. Rotation is used to rotate the image by 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise as well as to flip the image horizontally or vertically. Click one of the buttons: to rotate the image by 90 degrees counterclockwise to rotate the image by 90 degrees clockwise to flip the image horizontally (left to right) to flip the image vertically (upside down) Wrapping Style is used to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind (for more information see the advanced settings description below). Replace Image is used to replace the current image by loading another one From File, From Storage, or From URL. You can also find some of these options in the right-click menu. The menu options are: Cut, Copy, Paste - standard options which are used to cut or copy the selected text/object and paste the previously cut/copied text passage or object to the current cursor position. Arrange is used to bring the selected image to foreground, send it to background, move forward or backward as well as group or ungroup images to perform operations with several of them at once. To learn more on how to arrange objects, please refer to this page. Align is used to align the image to the left, in the center, to the right, at the top, in the middle or at the bottom. To learn more on how to align objects, please refer to this page. Wrapping Style is used to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind - or edit the wrap boundary. The Edit Wrap Boundary option is available only if the selected wrapping style is not inline. Drag wrap points to customize the boundary. To create a new wrap point, click anywhere on the red line and drag it to the necessary position. Rotate is used to rotate the image by 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise as well as to flip the image horizontally or vertically. Crop is used to apply one of the cropping options: Crop, Fill or Fit. Select the Crop option from the submenu, then drag the cropping handles to set the cropping area, and click one of these three options from the submenu once again to apply the changes. Actual Size is used to change the current image size to the actual one. Replace image is used to replace the current image by loading another one From File or From URL. Image Advanced Settings is used to open the 'Image - Advanced Settings' window. When the image is selected, the Shape settings icon is also available on the right. You can click this icon to open the Shape settings tab on the right sidebar and adjust the shape Stroke type, size and color as well as change the shape type selecting another shape from the Change Autoshape menu. The shape of the image will change correspondingly. On the Shape Settings tab, you can also use the Show shadow option to add a shadow to the image. Adjust image advanced settings To change the image advanced settings, click the image with the right mouse button and select the Image Advanced Settings option from the right-click menu or just click the Show advanced settings link on the right sidebar. The image properties window will open: The Size tab contains the following parameters: Width and Height - use these options to change the width and/or height. If the Constant proportions button is clicked (in this case it looks like this ), the width and height will be changed together preserving the original image aspect ratio. To restore the actual size of the added image, click the Actual Size button. The Rotation tab contains the following parameters: Angle - use this option to rotate the image by an exactly specified angle. Enter the necessary value measured in degrees into the field or adjust it using the arrows on the right. Flipped - check the Horizontally box to flip the image horizontally (left to right) or check the Vertically box to flip the image vertically (upside down). The Text Wrapping tab contains the following parameters: Wrapping Style - use this option to change the way the image is positioned relative to the text: it will either be a part of the text (in case you select the inline style) or bypassed by it from all sides (if you select one of the other styles). Inline - the image is considered to be a part of the text, like a character, so when the text moves, the image moves as well. In this case the positioning options are inaccessible. If one of the following styles is selected, the image can be moved independently of the text and positioned on the page exactly: Square - the text wraps the rectangular box that bounds the image. Tight - the text wraps the actual image edges. Through - the text wraps around the image edges and fills in the open white space within the image. So that the effect can appear, use the Edit Wrap Boundary option from the right-click menu. Top and bottom - the text is only above and below the image. In front - the image overlaps the text. Behind - the text overlaps the image. If you select the square, tight, through, or top and bottom style, you will be able to set up some additional parameters - distance from text at all sides (top, bottom, left, right). The Position tab is available only if you select a wrapping style other than inline. This tab contains the following parameters that vary depending on the selected wrapping style: The Horizontal section allows you to select one of the following three image positioning types: Alignment (left, center, right) relative to character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin, Absolute Position measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified on the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) to the right of character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin, Relative position measured in percent relative to the left margin, margin, page or right margin. The Vertical section allows you to select one of the following three image positioning types: Alignment (top, center, bottom) relative to line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin, Absolute Position measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified on the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) below line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin, Relative position measured in percent relative to the margin, bottom margin, page or top margin. Move object with text ensures that the image moves along with the text to which it is anchored. Allow overlap makes is possible for two images to overlap if you drag them near each other on the page. The Alternative Text tab allows specifying a Title and Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information the image contains." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertPageNumbers.htm", "title": "Insert page numbers", - "body": "To insert page numbers into your document, switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, click the Header/Footer icon at the top toolbar, choose the Insert Page Number submenu, select one of the following options: To put a page number to each page of your document, select the page number position on the page. To insert a page number at the current cursor position, select the To Current Position option. Note: to insert a current page number at the current cursor position you can also use the Ctrl+Shift+P key combination. To insert the total number of pages in your document (e.g. if you want to create the Page X of Y entry): put the cursor where you want to insert the total number of pages, click the Header/Footer icon at the top toolbar, select the Insert number of pages option. To edit the page number settings, double-click the page number added, change the current parameters at the right sidebar: Set the Position of page numbers on the page as well as relative to the top and bottom of the page. Check the Different first page box to apply a different page number to the very first page or in case you don't want to add any number to it at all. Use the Different odd and even pages box to insert different page numbers for odd and even pages. The Link to Previous option is available in case you've previously added sections into your document. If not, it will be grayed out. Moreover, this option is also unavailable for the very first section (i.e. when a header or footer that belongs to the first section is selected). By default, this box is checked, so that unified numbering is applied to all the sections. If you select a header or footer area, you will see that the area is marked with the Same as Previous label. Uncheck the Link to Previous box to use different page numbering for each section of the document. The Same as Previous label will no longer be displayed. The Page Numbering section allows to adjust page numbering options across different sections of the document. The Continue from previous section option is selected by default and allows to keep continuous page numbering after a section break. If you want to start page numbering with a specific number in the current section of the document, select the Start at radio button and enter the necessary starting value in the field on the right. To return to the document editing, double-click within the working area." + "body": "To insert page numbers into your document, switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, click the Header/Footer icon on the top toolbar, choose the Insert Page Number submenu, select one of the following options: To add a page number to each page of your document, select the page number position on the page. To insert a page number at the current cursor position, select the To Current Position option. Note: to insert a current page number at the current cursor position you can also use the Ctrl+Shift+P key combination. To insert the total number of pages in your document (e.g. if you want to create the Page X of Y entry): put the cursor where you want to insert the total number of pages, click the Header/Footer icon on the top toolbar, select the Insert number of pages option. To edit the page number settings, double-click the page number added, change the current parameters on the right sidebar: Set the Position of page numbers on the page accordingly to the top and bottom of the page. Check the Different first page box to apply a different page number to the very first page or in case you don't want to add any number to it at all. Use the Different odd and even pages box to insert different page numbers for odd and even pages. The Link to Previous option is available in case you've previously added sections into your document. If not, it will be grayed out. Moreover, this option is also unavailable for the very first section (i.e. when a header or footer that belongs to the first section is selected). By default, this box is checked, so that unified numbering is applied to all the sections. If you select a header or footer area, you will see that the area is marked with the Same as Previous label. Uncheck the Link to Previous box to use different page numbering for each section of the document. The Same as Previous label will no longer be displayed. The Page Numbering section allows adjusting page numbering options throughout different sections of the document. The Continue from previous section option is selected by default and makes it possible to keep continuous page numbering after a section break. If you want to start page numbering with a specific number in the current section of the document, select the Start at radio button and enter the required starting value in the field on the right. To return to the document editing, double-click within the working area." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertSymbols.htm", "title": "Insert symbols and characters", - "body": "During working process you may need to insert a symbol which is not on your keyboard. To insert such symbols into your document, use the Insert symbol option and follow these simple steps: place the cursor at the location where a special symbol has to be inserted, switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, click the Symbol, The Symbol dialog box appears from which you can select the appropriate symbol, use the Range section to quickly find the nesessary symbol. All symbols are divided into specific groups, for example, select 'Currency Symbols' if you want to insert a currency character. If this character is not in the set, select a different font. Many of them also have characters other than the standard set. Or, enter the Unicode hex value of the symbol you want into the Unicode hex value field. This code can be found in the Character map. Previously used symbols are also displayed in the Recently used symbols field, click Insert. The selected character will be added to the document. Insert ASCII symbols ASCII table is also used to add characters. To do this, hold down ALT key and use the numeric keypad to enter the character code. Note: be sure to use the numeric keypad, not the numbers on the main keyboard. To enable the numeric keypad, press the Num Lock key. For example, to add a paragraph character (§), press and hold down ALT while typing 789, and then release ALT key. Insert symbols using Unicode table Additional charachters and symbols might also be found via Windows symbol table. To open this table, do one of the following: in the Search field write 'Character table' and open it, simultaneously presss Win + R, and then in the following window type charmap.exe and click OK. In the opened Character Map, select one of the Character sets, Groups and Fonts. Next, click on the nesessary characters, copy them to clipboard and paste in the right place of the document." + "body": "To insert a special symbol which can not be typed on the keybord, use the Insert symbol option and follow these simple steps: place the cursor where a special symbol should be inserted, switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, click the Symbol, The Symbol dialog box will appear, and you will be able to select the required symbol, use the Range section to quickly find the nesessary symbol. All symbols are divided into specific groups, for example, select 'Currency Symbols' if you want to insert a currency character. If the required character is not in the set, select a different font. Many of them also have characters which differ from the standard set. Or enter the Unicode hex value of the required symbol you want into the Unicode hex value field. This code can be found in the Character map. You can also use the Special characters tab to choose a special character from the list. The previously used symbols are also displayed in the Recently used symbols field, click Insert. The selected character will be added to the document. Insert ASCII symbols The ASCII table is also used to add characters. To do this, hold down the ALT key and use the numeric keypad to enter the character code. Note: be sure to use the numeric keypad, not the numbers on the main keyboard. To enable the numeric keypad, press the Num Lock key. For example, to add a paragraph character (§), press and hold down ALT while typing 789, and then release the ALT key. Insert symbols using the Unicode table Additional charachters and symbols can also be found in the Windows symbol table. To open this table, do of the following: in the Search field write 'Character table' and open it, simultaneously presss Win + R, and then in the following window type charmap.exe and click OK. In the opened Character Map, select one of the Character sets, Groups and Fonts. Next, click on the required characters, copy them to the clipboard and paste where necessary." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertTables.htm", "title": "Insert tables", - "body": "Insert a table To insert a table into the document text, place the cursor where you want the table to be put, switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, click the Table icon at the top toolbar, select the option to create a table: either a table with predefined number of cells (10 by 8 cells maximum) If you want to quickly add a table, just select the number of rows (8 maximum) and columns (10 maximum). or a custom table In case you need more than 10 by 8 cell table, select the Insert Custom Table option that will open the window where you can enter the necessary number of rows and columns respectively, then click the OK button. If you want to draw a table using the mouse, select the Draw Table option. This can be useful, if you want to create a table with rows and colums of different sizes. The mouse cursor will turn into the pencil . Draw a rectangular shape where you want to add a table, then add rows by drawing horizontal lines and columns by drawing vertical lines within the table boundary. once the table is added you can change its properties, size and position. To resize a table, hover the mouse cursor over the handle in its lower right corner and drag it until the table reaches the necessary size. You can also manually change the width of a certain column or the height of a row. Move the mouse cursor over the right border of the column so that the cursor turns into the bidirectional arrow and drag the border to the left or right to set the necessary width. To change the height of a single row manually, move the mouse cursor over the bottom border of the row so that the cursor turns into the bidirectional arrow and drag the border up or down. To move a table, hold down the handle in its upper left corner and drag it to the necessary place in the document. It's also possible to add a caption to the table. To learn more on how to work with captions for tables, you can refer to this article. Select a table or its part To select an entire table, click the handle in its upper left corner. To select a certain cell, move the mouse cursor to the left side of the necessary cell so that the cursor turns into the black arrow , then left-click. To select a certain row, move the mouse cursor to the left border of the table next to the necessary row so that the cursor turns into the horizontal black arrow , then left-click. To select a certain column, move the mouse cursor to the top border of the necessary column so that the cursor turns into the downward black arrow , then left-click. It's also possible to select a cell, row, column or table using options from the contextual menu or from the Rows & Columns section at the right sidebar. Note: to move around in a table you can use keyboard shortcuts. Adjust table settings Some of the table properties as well as its structure can be altered using the right-click menu. The menu options are: Cut, Copy, Paste - standard options which are used to cut or copy a selected text/object and paste a previously cut/copied text passage or object to the current cursor position. Select is used to select a row, column, cell, or table. Insert is used to insert a row above or row below the row where the cursor is placed as well as to insert a column at the left or right side from the column where the cursor is placed. It's also possible to insert several rows or columns. If you select the Several Rows/Columns option, the Insert Several window opens. Select the Rows or Columns option from the list, specify the number of rows/column you want to add, choose where they should be added: Above the cursor or Below the cursor and click OK. Delete is used to delete a row, column, table or cells. If you select the Cells option, the Delete Cells window will open, where you can select if you want to Shift cells left, Delete entire row, or Delete entire column. Merge Cells is available if two or more cells are selected and is used to merge them. It's also possible to merge cells by erasing a boundary between them using the eraser tool. To do this, click the Table icon at the top toolbar, choose the Erase Table option. The mouse cursor will turn into the eraser . Move the mouse cursor over the border between the cells you want to merge and erase it. Split Cell... is used to open a window where you can select the needed number of columns and rows the cell will be split in. It's also possible to split a cell by drawing rows or columns using the pencil tool. To do this, click the Table icon at the top toolbar, choose the Draw Table option. The mouse cursor will turn into the pencil . Draw a horizontal line to create a row or a vertical line to create a column. Distribute rows is used to adjust the selected cells so that they have the same height without changing the overall table height. Distribute columns is used to adjust the selected cells so that they have the same width without changing the overall table width. Cell Vertical Alignment is used to align the text top, center or bottom in the selected cell. Text Direction - is used to change the text orientation in a cell. You can place the text horizontally, vertically from top to bottom (Rotate Text Down), or vertically from bottom to top (Rotate Text Up). Table Advanced Settings is used to open the 'Table - Advanced Settings' window. Hyperlink is used to insert a hyperlink. Paragraph Advanced Settings is used to open the 'Paragraph - Advanced Settings' window. You can also change the table properties at the right sidebar: Rows and Columns are used to select the table parts that you want to be highlighted. For rows: Header - to highlight the first row Total - to highlight the last row Banded - to highlight every other row For columns: First - to highlight the first column Last - to highlight the last column Banded - to highlight every other column Select from Template is used to choose a table template from the available ones. Borders Style is used to select the border size, color, style as well as background color. Rows & Columns is used to perform some operations with the table: select, delete, insert rows and columns, merge cells, split a cell. Rows & Columns Size is used to adjust the width and height of the currently selected cell. In this section, you can also Distribute rows so that all the selected cells have equal height or Distribute columns so that all the selected cells have equal width. Add formula is used to insert a formula into the selected table cell. Repeat as header row at the top of each page is used to insert the same header row at the top of each page in long tables. Show advanced settings is used to open the 'Table - Advanced Settings' window. Adjust table advanced settings To change the advanced table properties, click the table with the right mouse button and select the Table Advanced Settings option from the right-click menu or use the Show advanced settings link at the right sidebar. The table properties window will open: The Table tab allows to change properties of the entire table. The Table Size section contains the following parameters: Width - by default, the table width is automatically adjusted to fit the page width, i.e. the table occupies all the space between the left and right page margin. You can check this box and specify the necessary table width manually. Measure in - allows to specify if you want to set the table width in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified at the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) or in Percent of the overall page width. Note: you can also adjust the table size manually changing the row height and column width. Move the mouse cursor over a row/column border until it turns into the bidirectional arrow and drag the border. You can also use the markers on the horizontal ruler to change the column width and the markers on the vertical ruler to change the row height. Automatically resize to fit contents - enables automatic change of each column width in accordance with the text within its cells. The Default Cell Margins section allows to change the space between the text within the cells and the cell border used by default. The Options section allows to change the following parameter: Spacing between cells - the cell spacing which will be filled with the Table Background color. The Cell tab allows to change properties of individual cells. First you need to select the cell you want to apply the changes to or select the entire table to change properties of all its cells. The Cell Size section contains the following parameters: Preferred width - allows to set a preferred cell width. This is the size that a cell strives to fit to, but in some cases it may not be possible to fit to this exact value. For example, if the text within a cell exceeds the specified width, it will be broken into the next line so that the preferred cell width remains unchanged, but if you insert a new column, the preferred width will be reduced. Measure in - allows to specify if you want to set the cell width in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified at the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) or in Percent of the overall table width. Note: you can also adjust the cell width manually. To make a single cell in a column wider or narrower than the overall column width, select the necessary cell and move the mouse cursor over its right border until it turns into the bidirectional arrow, then drag the border. To change the width of all the cells in a column, use the markers on the horizontal ruler to change the column width. The Cell Margins section allows to adjust the space between the text within the cells and the cell border. By default, standard values are used (the default values can also be altered at the Table tab), but you can uncheck the Use default margins box and enter the necessary values manually. The Cell Options section allows to change the following parameter: The Wrap text option is enabled by default. It allows to wrap text within a cell that exceeds its width onto the next line expanding the row height and keeping the column width unchanged. The Borders & Background tab contains the following parameters: Border parameters (size, color and presence or absence) - set the border size, select its color and choose the way it will be displayed in the cells. Note: in case you select not to show table borders clicking the button or deselecting all the borders manually on the diagram, they will be indicated by a dotted line in the document. To make them disappear at all, click the Nonprinting characters icon at the Home tab of the top toolbar and select the Hidden Table Borders option. Cell Background - the color for the background within the cells (available only if one or more cells are selected or the Allow spacing between cells option is selected at the Table tab). Table Background - the color for the table background or the space background between the cells in case the Allow spacing between cells option is selected at the Table tab. The Table Position tab is available only if the Flow table option at the Text Wrapping tab is selected and contains the following parameters: Horizontal parameters include the table alignment (left, center, right) relative to margin, page or text as well as the table position to the right of margin, page or text. Vertical parameters include the table alignment (top, center, bottom) relative to margin, page or text as well as the table position below margin, page or text. The Options section allows to change the following parameters: Move object with text controls whether the table moves as the text into which it is inserted moves. Allow overlap controls whether two tables are merged into one large table or overlap if you drag them near each other on the page. The Text Wrapping tab contains the following parameters: Text wrapping style - Inline table or Flow table. Use the necessary option to change the way the table is positioned relative to the text: it will either be a part of the text (in case you select the inline table) or bypassed by it from all sides (if you select the flow table). After you select the wrapping style, the additional wrapping parameters can be set both for inline and flow tables: For the inline table, you can specify the table alignment and indent from left. For the flow table, you can specify the distance from text and table position at the Table Position tab. The Alternative Text tab allows to specify a Title and Description which will be read to the people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information there is in the table." + "body": "Insert a table To insert a table into the document text, place the cursor where the table should be added, switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, click the Table icon on the top toolbar, select the option to create a table: either a table with predefined number of cells (10 by 8 cells maximum) If you want to quickly add a table, just select the number of rows (8 maximum) and columns (10 maximum). or a custom table In case you need more than 10 by 8 cell table, select the Insert Custom Table option that will open the window where you can enter the necessary number of rows and columns respectively, then click the OK button. If you want to draw a table using the mouse, select the Draw Table option. This can be useful, if you want to create a table with rows and colums of different sizes. The mouse cursor will turn into the pencil . Draw a rectangular shape where you want to add a table, then add rows by drawing horizontal lines and columns by drawing vertical lines within the table boundary. once the table is added you can change its properties, size and position. To resize a table, hover the mouse cursor over the handle in its lower right corner and drag it until the table reaches the necessary size. You can also manually change the width of a certain column or the height of a row. Move the mouse cursor over the right border of the column so that the cursor turns into the bidirectional arrow and drag the border to the left or right to set the necessary width. To change the height of a single row manually, move the mouse cursor over the bottom border of the row so that the cursor turns into the bidirectional arrow and drag the border up or down. To move a table, hold down the handle in its upper left corner and drag it to the necessary place in the document. It's also possible to add a caption to the table. To learn more on how to work with captions for tables, you can refer to this article. Select a table or its part To select an entire table, click the handle in its upper left corner. To select a certain cell, move the mouse cursor to the left side of the necessary cell so that the cursor turns into the black arrow , then left-click. To select a certain row, move the mouse cursor to the left border of the table next to the necessary row so that the cursor turns into the horizontal black arrow , then left-click. To select a certain column, move the mouse cursor to the top border of the necessary column so that the cursor turns into the downward black arrow , then left-click. It's also possible to select a cell, row, column or table using options from the contextual menu or from the Rows & Columns section on the right sidebar. Note: to move around in a table you can use keyboard shortcuts. Adjust table settings Some of the table properties as well as its structure can be altered using the right-click menu. The menu options are: Cut, Copy, Paste - standard options which are used to cut or copy the selected text/object and paste the previously cut/copied text passage or object to the current cursor position. Select is used to select a row, column, cell, or table. Insert is used to insert a row above or row below the row where the cursor is placed as well as to insert a column at the left or right side from the column where the cursor is placed. It's also possible to insert several rows or columns. If you select the Several Rows/Columns option, the Insert Several window will appear. Select the Rows or Columns option from the list, specify the number of rows/column you want to add, choose where they should be added: Above the cursor or Below the cursor and click OK. Delete is used to delete a row, column, table or cells. If you select the Cells option, the Delete Cells window will open, where you can select if you want to Shift cells left, Delete entire row, or Delete entire column. Merge Cells is available if two or more cells are selected and is used to merge them. It's also possible to merge cells by erasing a boundary between them using the eraser tool. To do this, click the Table icon on the top toolbar, choose the Erase Table option. The mouse cursor will turn into the eraser . Move the mouse cursor over the border between the cells you want to merge and erase it. Split Cell... is used to open a window where you can select the needed number of columns and rows the cell will be split in. It's also possible to split a cell by drawing rows or columns using the pencil tool. To do this, click the Table icon on the top toolbar, choose the Draw Table option. The mouse cursor will turn into the pencil . Draw a horizontal line to create a row or a vertical line to create a column. Distribute rows is used to adjust the selected cells so that they have the same height without changing the overall table height. Distribute columns is used to adjust the selected cells so that they have the same width without changing the overall table width. Cell Vertical Alignment is used to align the text top, center or bottom in the selected cell. Text Direction - is used to change the text orientation in a cell. You can place the text horizontally, vertically from top to bottom (Rotate Text Down), or vertically from bottom to top (Rotate Text Up). Table Advanced Settings is used to open the 'Table - Advanced Settings' window. Hyperlink is used to insert a hyperlink. Paragraph Advanced Settings is used to open the 'Paragraph - Advanced Settings' window. You can also change the table properties on the right sidebar: Rows and Columns are used to select the table parts that you want to be highlighted. For rows: Header - to highlight the first row Total - to highlight the last row Banded - to highlight every other row For columns: First - to highlight the first column Last - to highlight the last column Banded - to highlight every other column Select from Template is used to choose a table template from the available ones. Borders Style is used to select the border size, color, style as well as background color. Rows & Columns is used to perform some operations with the table: select, delete, insert rows and columns, merge cells, split a cell. Rows & Columns Size is used to adjust the width and height of the currently selected cell. In this section, you can also Distribute rows so that all the selected cells have equal height or Distribute columns so that all the selected cells have equal width. Add formula is used to insert a formula into the selected table cell. Repeat as header row at the top of each page is used to insert the same header row at the top of each page in long tables. Show advanced settings is used to open the 'Table - Advanced Settings' window. Adjust table advanced settings To change the advanced table properties, click the table with the right mouse button and select the Table Advanced Settings option from the right-click menu or use the Show advanced settings link on the right sidebar. The table properties window will open: The Table tab allows changing the properties of the entire table. The Table Size section contains the following parameters: Width - by default, the table width is automatically adjusted to fit the page width, i.e. the table occupies all the space between the left and right page margin. You can check this box and specify the necessary table width manually. Measure in allows specifying the table width in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified on the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) or in Percent of the overall page width. Note: you can also adjust the table size manually changing the row height and column width. Move the mouse cursor over a row/column border until it turns into the bidirectional arrow and drag the border. You can also use the markers on the horizontal ruler to change the column width and the markers on the vertical ruler to change the row height. Automatically resize to fit contents - allows automatically change the width of each column in accordance with the text within its cells. The Default Cell Margins section allows changing the space between the text within the cells and the cell border used by default. The Options section allows changing the following parameter: Spacing between cells - the cell spacing which will be filled with the Table Background color. The Cell tab allows changing the properties of individual cells. First you need to select the required cell or select the entire table to change the properties of all its cells. The Cell Size section contains the following parameters: Preferred width - allows setting the preferred cell width. This is the size that a cell strives to fit, but in some cases, it may not be possible to fit this exact value. For example, if the text within a cell exceeds the specified width, it will be broken into the next line so that the preferred cell width remains unchanged, but if you insert a new column, the preferred width will be reduced. Measure in - allows specifying the cell width in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified on the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) or in Percent of the overall table width. Note: you can also adjust the cell width manually. To make a single cell in a column wider or narrower than the overall column width, select the necessary cell and move the mouse cursor over its right border until it turns into the bidirectional arrow, then drag the border. To change the width of all the cells in a column, use the markers on the horizontal ruler to change the column width. The Cell Margins allows adjusting the space between the text within the cells and the cell border. By default, the standard values are used (the default, these values can also be altered on the Table tab), but you can uncheck the Use default margins box and enter the necessary values manually. The Cell Options section allows changing the following parameter: The Wrap text option is enabled by default. It allows wrapping the text within a cell that exceeds its width onto the next line expanding the row height and keeping the column width unchanged. The Borders & Background tab contains the following parameters: Border parameters (size, color and presence or absence) - set the border size, select its color and choose the way it will be displayed in the cells. Note: in case you choose not to show the table borders by clicking the button or deselecting all the borders manually on the diagram, they will be indicated with a dotted line in the document. To make them disappear at all, click the Nonprinting characters icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar and select the Hidden Table Borders option. Cell Background - the color for the background within the cells (available only if one or more cells are selected or the Allow spacing between cells option is selected at the Table tab). Table Background - the color for the table background or the space background between the cells in case the Allow spacing between cells option is selected on the Table tab. The Table Position tab is available only if the Flow table option on the Text Wrapping tab is selected and contains the following parameters: Horizontal parameters include the table alignment (left, center, right) relative to margin, page or text as well as the table position to the right of margin, page or text. Vertical parameters include the table alignment (top, center, bottom) relative to margin, page or text as well as the table position below margin, page or text. The Options section allows changing the following parameters: Move object with text ensures that the table moves with the text. Allow overlap controls whether two tables are merged into one large table or overlap if you drag them near each other on the page. The Text Wrapping tab contains the following parameters: Text wrapping style - Inline table or Flow table. Use the necessary option to change the way the table is positioned relative to the text: it will either be a part of the text (in case you select the inline table) or bypassed by it from all sides (if you select the flow table). After you select the wrapping style, the additional wrapping parameters can be set both for inline and flow tables: For the inline table, you can specify the table alignment and indent from left. For the flow table, you can specify the distance from text and table position on the Table Position tab. The Alternative Text tab allows specifying the Title and Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand the contents of the table." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertTextObjects.htm", "title": "Insert text objects", - "body": "To make your text more emphatic and draw attention to a specific part of the document, you can insert a text box (a rectangular frame that allows to enter text within it) or a Text Art object (a text box with a predefined font style and color that allows to apply some text effects). Add a text object You can add a text object anywhere on the page. To do that: switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, select the necessary text object type: to add a text box, click the Text Box icon at the top toolbar, then click where you want to insert the text box, hold the mouse button and drag the text box border to specify its size. When you release the mouse button, the insertion point will appear in the added text box, allowing you to enter your text. Note: it's also possible to insert a text box by clicking the Shape icon at the top toolbar and selecting the shape from the Basic Shapes group. to add a Text Art object, click the Text Art icon at the top toolbar, then click on the desired style template – the Text Art object will be added at the current cursor position. Select the default text within the text box with the mouse and replace it with your own text. click outside of the text object to apply the changes and return to the document. The text within the text object is a part of the latter (when you move or rotate the text object, the text moves or rotates with it). As an inserted text object represents a rectangular frame with text in it (Text Art objects have invisible text box borders by default) and this frame is a common autoshape, you can change both the shape and text properties. To delete the added text object, click on the text box border and press the Delete key on the keyboard. The text within the text box will also be deleted. Format a text box Select the text box clicking on its border to be able to change its properties. When the text box is selected, its borders are displayed as solid (not dashed) lines. to resize, move, rotate the text box use the special handles on the edges of the shape. to edit the text box fill, stroke, wrapping style or replace the rectangular box with a different shape, click the Shape settings icon on the right sidebar and use the corresponding options. to align the text box on the page, arrange text boxes as related to other objects, rotate or flip a text box, change a wrapping style or access the shape advanced settings, right-click on the text box border and use the contextual menu options. To learn more on how to arrange and align objects you can refer to this page. Format the text within the text box Click the text within the text box to be able to change its properties. When the text is selected, the text box borders are displayed as dashed lines. Note: it's also possible to change text formatting when the text box (not the text itself) is selected. In such a case, any changes will be applied to all the text within the text box. Some font formatting options (font type, size, color and decoration styles) can be applied to a previously selected portion of the text separately. To rotate the text within the text box, right-click the text, select the Text Direction option and then choose one of the available options: Horizontal (is selected by default), Rotate Text Down (sets a vertical direction, from top to bottom) or Rotate Text Up (sets a vertical direction, from bottom to top). To align the text vertically within the text box, right-click the text, select the Vertical Alignment option and then choose one of the available options: Align Top, Align Center or Align Bottom. Other formatting options that you can apply are the same as the ones for regular text. Please refer to the corresponding help sections to learn more about the necessary operation. You can: align the text horizontally within the text box adjust the font type, size, color, apply decoration styles and formatting presets set line spacing, change paragraph indents, adjust tab stops for the multi-line text within the text box insert a hyperlink You can also click the Text Art settings icon on the right sidebar and change some style parameters. Edit a Text Art style Select a text object and click the Text Art settings icon on the right sidebar. Change the applied text style selecting a new Template from the gallery. You can also change the basic style additionally by selecting a different font type, size etc. Change the font Fill. You can choose the following options: Color Fill - select this option to specify the solid color you want to fill the inner space of letters with. Click the colored box below and select the necessary color from the available color sets or specify any color you like: Gradient Fill - select this option to fill the letters with two colors which smoothly change from one to another. Style - choose one of the available options: Linear (colors change in a straight line i.e. along a horizontal/vertical axis or diagonally at a 45 degree angle) or Radial (colors change in a circular path from the center to the edges). Direction - choose a template from the menu. If the Linear gradient is selected, the following directions are available: top-left to bottom-right, top to bottom, top-right to bottom-left, right to left, bottom-right to top-left, bottom to top, bottom-left to top-right, left to right. If the Radial gradient is selected, only one template is available. Gradient - click on the left slider under the gradient bar to activate the color box which corresponds to the first color. Click on the color box on the right to choose the first color in the palette. Drag the slider to set the gradient stop i.e. the point where one color changes into another. Use the right slider under the gradient bar to specify the second color and set the gradient stop. Note: if one of these two options is selected, you can also set an Opacity level dragging the slider or entering the percent value manually. The default value is 100%. It corresponds to the full opacity. The 0% value corresponds to the full transparency. No Fill - select this option if you don't want to use any fill. Adjust the font Stroke width, color and type. To change the stroke width, select one of the available options from the Size dropdown list. The available options are: 0.5 pt, 1 pt, 1.5 pt, 2.25 pt, 3 pt, 4.5 pt, 6 pt. Alternatively, select the No Line option if you don't want to use any stroke. To change the stroke color, click on the colored box below and select the necessary color. To change the stroke type, select the necessary option from the corresponding dropdown list (a solid line is applied by default, you can change it to one of the available dashed lines). Apply a text effect by selecting the necessary text transformation type from the Transform gallery. You can adjust the degree of the text distortion by dragging the pink diamond-shaped handle." + "body": "To make your text more emphatic and draw attention to a specific part of the document, you can insert a text box (a rectangular frame that allows entering text within it) or a Text Art object (a text box with a predefined font style and color that allows applying some effects to the text). Add a text object You can add a text object anywhere on the page. To do that: switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, select the necessary text object type: to add a text box, click the Text Box icon on the top toolbar, then click where the text box should be added, hold the mouse button and drag the text box border to specify its size. When you release the mouse button, the insertion point will appear in the added text box, allowing you to enter your text. Note: it's also possible to insert a text box by clicking the Shape icon on the top toolbar and selecting the shape from the Basic Shapes group. to add a Text Art object, click the Text Art icon on the top toolbar, then click on the desired style template – the Text Art object will be added at the current cursor position. Select the default text within the text box with the mouse and replace it with your own text. click outside of the text object to apply the changes and return to the document. The text within the text object is a part of the latter (when you move or rotate the text object, the text moves or rotates with it). As the inserted text object represents a rectangular frame with text in it (Text Art objects have invisible text box borders by default), and this frame is a common autoshape, you can change both the shape and text properties. To delete the added text object, click on the text box border and press the Delete key on the keyboard. The text within the text box will also be deleted. Format a text box Select the text box by clicking on its border to be able to change its properties. When the text box is selected, its borders are displayed as solid (not dashed) lines. to resize, move, rotate the text box, use the special handles on the edges of the shape. to edit the text box fill, stroke, wrapping style or replace the rectangular box with a different shape, click the Shape settings icon on the right sidebar and use the corresponding options. to align the text box on the page, arrange text boxes as related to other objects, rotate or flip a text box, change a wrapping style or access the shape advanced settings, right-click on the text box border and use the contextual menu options. To learn more on how to arrange and align objects, please refer to this page. Format the text within the text box Click the text within the text box to change its properties. When the text is selected, the text box borders are displayed as dashed lines. Note: it's also possible to change the text formatting when the text box (not the text itself) is selected. In thus case, any changes will be applied to all the text within the text box. Some font formatting options (font type, size, color and decoration styles) can be applied to the previously selected text fragment separately. To rotate the text within the text box, right-click the text, select the Text Direction option and then choose one of the available options: Horizontal (is selected by default), Rotate Text Down (sets a vertical direction, from top to bottom) or Rotate Text Up (sets a vertical direction, from bottom to top). To align the text vertically within the text box, right-click the text, select the Vertical Alignment option and then choose one of the available options: Align Top, Align Center or Align Bottom. Other formatting options that you can apply are the same as the ones for regular text. Please refer to the corresponding help sections to learn more about the necessary operation. You can: align the text horizontally within the text box adjust the font type, size, color, apply decoration styles and formatting presets set line spacing, change paragraph indents, adjust tab stops for the multi-line text within the text box insert a hyperlink You can also click the Text Art settings icon on the right sidebar and change some style parameters. Edit a Text Art style Select a text object and click the Text Art settings icon on the right sidebar. Change the applied text style by selecting a new Template from the gallery. You can also change the basic style by selecting a different font type, size etc. Change the font Fill. You can choose the following options: Color Fill - select this option to specify the solid color to fill the inner space of letters. Click the colored box below and select the necessary color from the available color sets or specify any color you like: Gradient Fill - select this option to fill the letters with two colors which smoothly change from one to another. Style - choose one of the available options: Linear (colors change in a straight line i.e. along a horizontal/vertical axis or diagonally at a 45 degree angle) or Radial (colors change in a circular path from the center to the edges). Direction - choose a template from the menu. If the Linear gradient is selected, the following directions are available: top-left to bottom-right, top to bottom, top-right to bottom-left, right to left, bottom-right to top-left, bottom to top, bottom-left to top-right, left to right. If the Radial gradient is selected, only one template is available. Gradient - click on the left slider under the gradient bar to activate the color box which corresponds to the first color. Click on the color box on the right to choose the first color in the palette. Drag the slider to set the gradient stop i.e. the point where one color changes into another. Use the right slider under the gradient bar to specify the second color and set the gradient stop. Note: if one of these two options is selected, you can also set an Opacity level dragging the slider or entering the percent value manually. The default value is 100%. It corresponds to the full opacity. The 0% value corresponds to the full transparency. No Fill - select this option if you don't want to use any fill. Adjust the font Stroke width, color and type. To change the stroke width, select one of the available options from the Size dropdown list. The available options are: 0.5 pt, 1 pt, 1.5 pt, 2.25 pt, 3 pt, 4.5 pt, 6 pt. Alternatively, select the No Line option if you don't want to use any stroke. To change the stroke color, click on the colored box below and select the necessary color. To change the stroke type, select the necessary option from the corresponding dropdown list (a solid line is applied by default, you can change it to one of the available dashed lines). Apply a text effect by selecting the necessary text transformation type from the Transform gallery. You can adjust the degree of the text distortion by dragging the pink diamond-shaped handle." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/LineSpacing.htm", "title": "Set paragraph line spacing", - "body": "In Document Editor, you can set the line height for the text lines within the paragraph as well as the margins between the current and the preceding or the subsequent paragraph. To do that, put the cursor within the paragraph you need, or select several paragraphs with the mouse or all the text in the document by pressing the Ctrl+A key combination, use the corresponding fields at the right sidebar to achieve the desired results: Line Spacing - set the line height for the text lines within the paragraph. You can select among three options: at least (sets the minimum line spacing that is needed to fit the largest font or graphic on the line), multiple (sets line spacing that can be expressed in numbers greater than 1), exactly (sets fixed line spacing). You can specify the necessary value in the field on the right. Paragraph Spacing - set the amount of space between paragraphs. Before - set the amount of space before the paragraph. After - set the amount of space after the paragraph. Don't add interval between paragraphs of the same style - check this box in case you don't need any space between paragraphs of the same style. These parameters can also be found in the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window. To open the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window, right-click the text and choose the Paragraph Advanced Settings option from the menu or use the Show advanced settings option at the right sidebar. Then switch to the Indents & Spacing tab and go to the Spacing section. To quickly change the current paragraph line spacing, you can also use the Paragraph line spacing icon at the Home tab of the top toolbar selecting the needed value from the list: 1.0, 1.15, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5, or 3.0 lines." + "body": "In the Document Editor, you can set the line height for the text lines within the paragraph as well as the margins between the current paragraph and the previous one or the subsequent paragraphs. To do that, place the cursor within the required paragraph, or select several paragraphs with the mouse or the whole text by pressing the Ctrl+A key combination, use the corresponding fields on the right sidebar to achieve the desired results: Line Spacing - set the line height for the text lines within the paragraph. You can select among three options: at least (sets the minimum line spacing that is needed to fit the largest font or graphic in the line), multiple (sets line spacing that can be expressed in numbers greater than 1), exactly (sets fixed line spacing). You can specify the necessary value in the field on the right. Paragraph Spacing defines the amount of spacing between paragraphs. Before defines the amount of spacing before the paragraph. After defines the amount of spacing after the paragraph. Don't add interval between paragraphs of the same style - please check this box if you don't need any spacing between paragraphs of the same style. These parameters can also be found in the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window. To open the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window, right-click the text and choose the Paragraph Advanced Settings option from the menu or use the Show advanced settings option on the right sidebar. Then switch to the Indents & Spacing tab and go to the Spacing section. To quickly change the current paragraph line spacing, you can also use the Paragraph line spacing icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar selecting the required value from the list: 1.0, 1.15, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5, or 3.0 lines." + }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/MathAutoCorrect.htm", + "title": "Use Math AutoCorrect", + "body": "When working with equations, you can insert a lot of symbols, accents and mathematical operation signs typing them on the keyboard instead of choosing a template from the gallery. In the equation editor, place the insertion point within the necessary placeholder, type a math autocorrect code, then press Spacebar. The entered code will be converted into the corresponding symbol, and the space will be eliminated. Note: The codes are case sensitive. The table below contains all the currently supported codes available in the Document Editor. The full list of the supported codes can also be found on the File tab in the Advanced Settings... -> Proofing section. Code Symbol Category !! Symbols ... Dots :: Operators := Operators /< Relational operators /> Relational operators /= Relational operators \\above Above/Below scripts \\acute Accents \\aleph Hebrew letters \\alpha Greek letters \\Alpha Greek letters \\amalg Binary operators \\angle Geometry notation \\aoint Integrals \\approx Relational operators \\asmash Arrows \\ast Binary operators \\asymp Relational operators \\atop Operators \\bar Over/Underbar \\Bar Accents \\because Relational operators \\begin Delimiters \\below Above/Below scripts \\bet Hebrew letters \\beta Greek letters \\Beta Greek letters \\beth Hebrew letters \\bigcap Large operators \\bigcup Large operators \\bigodot Large operators \\bigoplus Large operators \\bigotimes Large operators \\bigsqcup Large operators \\biguplus Large operators \\bigvee Large operators \\bigwedge Large operators \\binomial Equations \\bot Logic notation \\bowtie Relational operators \\box Symbols \\boxdot Binary operators \\boxminus Binary operators \\boxplus Binary operators \\bra Delimiters \\break Symbols \\breve Accents \\bullet Binary operators \\cap Binary operators \\cbrt Square roots and radicals \\cases Symbols \\cdot Binary operators \\cdots Dots \\check Accents \\chi Greek letters \\Chi Greek letters \\circ Binary operators \\close Delimiters \\clubsuit Symbols \\coint Integrals \\cong Relational operators \\coprod Math operators \\cup Binary operators \\dalet Hebrew letters \\daleth Hebrew letters \\dashv Relational operators \\dd Double-struck letters \\Dd Double-struck letters \\ddddot Accents \\dddot Accents \\ddot Accents \\ddots Dots \\defeq Relational operators \\degc Symbols \\degf Symbols \\degree Symbols \\delta Greek letters \\Delta Greek letters \\Deltaeq Operators \\diamond Binary operators \\diamondsuit Symbols \\div Binary operators \\dot Accents \\doteq Relational operators \\dots Dots \\doublea Double-struck letters \\doubleA Double-struck letters \\doubleb Double-struck letters \\doubleB Double-struck letters \\doublec Double-struck letters \\doubleC Double-struck letters \\doubled Double-struck letters \\doubleD Double-struck letters \\doublee Double-struck letters \\doubleE Double-struck letters \\doublef Double-struck letters \\doubleF Double-struck letters \\doubleg Double-struck letters \\doubleG Double-struck letters \\doubleh Double-struck letters \\doubleH Double-struck letters \\doublei Double-struck letters \\doubleI Double-struck letters \\doublej Double-struck letters \\doubleJ Double-struck letters \\doublek Double-struck letters \\doubleK Double-struck letters \\doublel Double-struck letters \\doubleL Double-struck letters \\doublem Double-struck letters \\doubleM Double-struck letters \\doublen Double-struck letters \\doubleN Double-struck letters \\doubleo Double-struck letters \\doubleO Double-struck letters \\doublep Double-struck letters \\doubleP Double-struck letters \\doubleq Double-struck letters \\doubleQ Double-struck letters \\doubler Double-struck letters \\doubleR Double-struck letters \\doubles Double-struck letters \\doubleS Double-struck letters \\doublet Double-struck letters \\doubleT Double-struck letters \\doubleu Double-struck letters \\doubleU Double-struck letters \\doublev Double-struck letters \\doubleV Double-struck letters \\doublew Double-struck letters \\doubleW Double-struck letters \\doublex Double-struck letters \\doubleX Double-struck letters \\doubley Double-struck letters \\doubleY Double-struck letters \\doublez Double-struck letters \\doubleZ Double-struck letters \\downarrow Arrows \\Downarrow Arrows \\dsmash Arrows \\ee Double-struck letters \\ell Symbols \\emptyset Set notations \\emsp Space characters \\end Delimiters \\ensp Space characters \\epsilon Greek letters \\Epsilon Greek letters \\eqarray Symbols \\equiv Relational operators \\eta Greek letters \\Eta Greek letters \\exists Logic notations \\forall Logic notations \\fraktura Fraktur letters \\frakturA Fraktur letters \\frakturb Fraktur letters \\frakturB Fraktur letters \\frakturc Fraktur letters \\frakturC Fraktur letters \\frakturd Fraktur letters \\frakturD Fraktur letters \\frakture Fraktur letters \\frakturE Fraktur letters \\frakturf Fraktur letters \\frakturF Fraktur letters \\frakturg Fraktur letters \\frakturG Fraktur letters \\frakturh Fraktur letters \\frakturH Fraktur letters \\frakturi Fraktur letters \\frakturI Fraktur letters \\frakturk Fraktur letters \\frakturK Fraktur letters \\frakturl Fraktur letters \\frakturL Fraktur letters \\frakturm Fraktur letters \\frakturM Fraktur letters \\frakturn Fraktur letters \\frakturN Fraktur letters \\frakturo Fraktur letters \\frakturO Fraktur letters \\frakturp Fraktur letters \\frakturP Fraktur letters \\frakturq Fraktur letters \\frakturQ Fraktur letters \\frakturr Fraktur letters \\frakturR Fraktur letters \\frakturs Fraktur letters \\frakturS Fraktur letters \\frakturt Fraktur letters \\frakturT Fraktur letters \\frakturu Fraktur letters \\frakturU Fraktur letters \\frakturv Fraktur letters \\frakturV Fraktur letters \\frakturw Fraktur letters \\frakturW Fraktur letters \\frakturx Fraktur letters \\frakturX Fraktur letters \\fraktury Fraktur letters \\frakturY Fraktur letters \\frakturz Fraktur letters \\frakturZ Fraktur letters \\frown Relational operators \\funcapply Binary operators \\G Greek letters \\gamma Greek letters \\Gamma Greek letters \\ge Relational operators \\geq Relational operators \\gets Arrows \\gg Relational operators \\gimel Hebrew letters \\grave Accents \\hairsp Space characters \\hat Accents \\hbar Symbols \\heartsuit Symbols \\hookleftarrow Arrows \\hookrightarrow Arrows \\hphantom Arrows \\hsmash Arrows \\hvec Accents \\identitymatrix Matrices \\ii Double-struck letters \\iiint Integrals \\iint Integrals \\iiiint Integrals \\Im Symbols \\imath Symbols \\in Relational operators \\inc Symbols \\infty Symbols \\int Integrals \\integral Integrals \\iota Greek letters \\Iota Greek letters \\itimes Math operators \\j Symbols \\jj Double-struck letters \\jmath Symbols \\kappa Greek letters \\Kappa Greek letters \\ket Delimiters \\lambda Greek letters \\Lambda Greek letters \\langle Delimiters \\lbbrack Delimiters \\lbrace Delimiters \\lbrack Delimiters \\lceil Delimiters \\ldiv Fraction slashes \\ldivide Fraction slashes \\ldots Dots \\le Relational operators \\left Delimiters \\leftarrow Arrows \\Leftarrow Arrows \\leftharpoondown Arrows \\leftharpoonup Arrows \\leftrightarrow Arrows \\Leftrightarrow Arrows \\leq Relational operators \\lfloor Delimiters \\lhvec Accents \\limit Limits \\ll Relational operators \\lmoust Delimiters \\Longleftarrow Arrows \\Longleftrightarrow Arrows \\Longrightarrow Arrows \\lrhar Arrows \\lvec Accents \\mapsto Arrows \\matrix Matrices \\medsp Space characters \\mid Relational operators \\middle Symbols \\models Relational operators \\mp Binary operators \\mu Greek letters \\Mu Greek letters \\nabla Symbols \\naryand Operators \\nbsp Space characters \\ne Relational operators \\nearrow Arrows \\neq Relational operators \\ni Relational operators \\norm Delimiters \\notcontain Relational operators \\notelement Relational operators \\notin Relational operators \\nu Greek letters \\Nu Greek letters \\nwarrow Arrows \\o Greek letters \\O Greek letters \\odot Binary operators \\of Operators \\oiiint Integrals \\oiint Integrals \\oint Integrals \\omega Greek letters \\Omega Greek letters \\ominus Binary operators \\open Delimiters \\oplus Binary operators \\otimes Binary operators \\over Delimiters \\overbar Accents \\overbrace Accents \\overbracket Accents \\overline Accents \\overparen Accents \\overshell Accents \\parallel Geometry notation \\partial Symbols \\pmatrix Matrices \\perp Geometry notation \\phantom Symbols \\phi Greek letters \\Phi Greek letters \\pi Greek letters \\Pi Greek letters \\pm Binary operators \\pppprime Primes \\ppprime Primes \\pprime Primes \\prec Relational operators \\preceq Relational operators \\prime Primes \\prod Math operators \\propto Relational operators \\psi Greek letters \\Psi Greek letters \\qdrt Square roots and radicals \\quadratic Square roots and radicals \\rangle Delimiters \\Rangle Delimiters \\ratio Relational operators \\rbrace Delimiters \\rbrack Delimiters \\Rbrack Delimiters \\rceil Delimiters \\rddots Dots \\Re Symbols \\rect Symbols \\rfloor Delimiters \\rho Greek letters \\Rho Greek letters \\rhvec Accents \\right Delimiters \\rightarrow Arrows \\Rightarrow Arrows \\rightharpoondown Arrows \\rightharpoonup Arrows \\rmoust Delimiters \\root Symbols \\scripta Scripts \\scriptA Scripts \\scriptb Scripts \\scriptB Scripts \\scriptc Scripts \\scriptC Scripts \\scriptd Scripts \\scriptD Scripts \\scripte Scripts \\scriptE Scripts \\scriptf Scripts \\scriptF Scripts \\scriptg Scripts \\scriptG Scripts \\scripth Scripts \\scriptH Scripts \\scripti Scripts \\scriptI Scripts \\scriptk Scripts \\scriptK Scripts \\scriptl Scripts \\scriptL Scripts \\scriptm Scripts \\scriptM Scripts \\scriptn Scripts \\scriptN Scripts \\scripto Scripts \\scriptO Scripts \\scriptp Scripts \\scriptP Scripts \\scriptq Scripts \\scriptQ Scripts \\scriptr Scripts \\scriptR Scripts \\scripts Scripts \\scriptS Scripts \\scriptt Scripts \\scriptT Scripts \\scriptu Scripts \\scriptU Scripts \\scriptv Scripts \\scriptV Scripts \\scriptw Scripts \\scriptW Scripts \\scriptx Scripts \\scriptX Scripts \\scripty Scripts \\scriptY Scripts \\scriptz Scripts \\scriptZ Scripts \\sdiv Fraction slashes \\sdivide Fraction slashes \\searrow Arrows \\setminus Binary operators \\sigma Greek letters \\Sigma Greek letters \\sim Relational operators \\simeq Relational operators \\smash Arrows \\smile Relational operators \\spadesuit Symbols \\sqcap Binary operators \\sqcup Binary operators \\sqrt Square roots and radicals \\sqsubseteq Set notation \\sqsuperseteq Set notation \\star Binary operators \\subset Set notation \\subseteq Set notation \\succ Relational operators \\succeq Relational operators \\sum Math operators \\superset Set notation \\superseteq Set notation \\swarrow Arrows \\tau Greek letters \\Tau Greek letters \\therefore Relational operators \\theta Greek letters \\Theta Greek letters \\thicksp Space characters \\thinsp Space characters \\tilde Accents \\times Binary operators \\to Arrows \\top Logic notation \\tvec Arrows \\ubar Accents \\Ubar Accents \\underbar Accents \\underbrace Accents \\underbracket Accents \\underline Accents \\underparen Accents \\uparrow Arrows \\Uparrow Arrows \\updownarrow Arrows \\Updownarrow Arrows \\uplus Binary operators \\upsilon Greek letters \\Upsilon Greek letters \\varepsilon Greek letters \\varphi Greek letters \\varpi Greek letters \\varrho Greek letters \\varsigma Greek letters \\vartheta Greek letters \\vbar Delimiters \\vdash Relational operators \\vdots Dots \\vec Accents \\vee Binary operators \\vert Delimiters \\Vert Delimiters \\Vmatrix Matrices \\vphantom Arrows \\vthicksp Space characters \\wedge Binary operators \\wp Symbols \\wr Binary operators \\xi Greek letters \\Xi Greek letters \\zeta Greek letters \\Zeta Greek letters \\zwnj Space characters \\zwsp Space characters ~= Relational operators -+ Binary operators +- Binary operators << Relational operators <= Relational operators -> Arrows >= Relational operators >> Relational operators" }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/NonprintingCharacters.htm", "title": "Show/hide nonprinting characters", - "body": "Nonprinting characters help you edit a document. They indicate the presence of various types of formatting, but they do not print with the document, even when they are displayed on the screen. To show or hide nonprinting characters, click the Nonprinting characters icon at the Home tab of the top toolbar. Alternatively, you can use the Ctrl+Shift+Num8 key combination. Nonprinting characters include: Spaces Inserted when you press the Spacebar on the keyboard. It creates a space between characters. Tabs Inserted when you press the Tab key. It's used to advance the cursor to the next tab stop. Paragraph marks (i.e. hard returns) Inserted when you press the Enter key. It ends a paragraph and adds a bit of space after it. It contains information about the paragraph formatting. Line breaks (i.e. soft returns) Inserted when you use the Shift+Enter key combination. It breaks the current line and puts lines of text close together. Soft return is primarily used in titles and headings. Nonbreaking spaces Inserted when you use the Ctrl+Shift+Spacebar key combination. It creates a space between characters which can't be used to start a new line. Page breaks Inserted when you use the Breaks icon at the Insert or Layout tab of the top toolbar and then select the Insert Page Break option, or select the Page break before option in the right-click menu or advanced settings window. Section breaks Inserted when you use the Breaks icon at the Insert or Layout tab of the top toolbar and then select one of the Insert Section Break submenu options (the section break indicator differs depending on which option is selected: Next Page, Continuous Page, Even Page or Odd Page). Column breaks Inserted when you use the Breaks icon at the Insert or Layout tab of the top toolbar and then select the Insert Column Break option. End-of-cell and end-of row markers in tables These markers contain formatting codes for the individual cell and row, respectively. Small black square in the margin to the left of a paragraph It indicates that at least one of the paragraph options was applied, e.g. Keep lines together, Page break before. Anchor symbols They indicate the position of floating objects (those with a wrapping style other than Inline), e.g. images, autoshapes, charts. You should select an object to make its anchor visible." + "body": "Nonprinting characters help you edit a document. They indicate the presence of various types of formatting elements, but they cannot be printed with the document even if they are displayed on the screen. To show or hide nonprinting characters, click the Nonprinting characters icon at the Home tab on the top toolbar. Alternatively, you can use the Ctrl+Shift+Num8 key combination. Nonprinting characters include: Spaces Inserted when you press the Spacebar on the keyboard. They create a space between characters. Tabs Inserted when you press the Tab key. They are used to advance the cursor to the next tab stop. Paragraph marks (i.e. hard returns) Inserted when you press the Enter key. They ends a paragraph and adds a bit of space after it. They also contain information about the paragraph formatting. Line breaks (i.e. soft returns) Inserted when you use the Shift+Enter key combination. They break the current line and put the text lines close together. Soft return are primarily used in titles and headings. Nonbreaking spaces Inserted when you use the Ctrl+Shift+Spacebar key combination. They create a space between characters which can't be used to start a new line. Page breaks Inserted when you use the Breaks icon on the Insert or Layout tabs of the top toolbar and then select one of the Insert Page Break submenu options (the section break indicator differs depending on which option is selected: Next Page, Continuous Page, Even Page or Odd Page). Section breaks Inserted when you use the Breaks icon on the Insert or Layout tab of the top toolbar and then select one of the Insert Section Break submenu options (the section break indicator differs depending on which option is selected: Next Page, Continuous Page, Even Page or Odd Page). Column breaks Inserted when you use the Breaks icon on the Insert or Layout tab of the top toolbar and then select the Insert Column Break option. End-of-cell and end-of row markers in tables Contain formatting codes for an individual cell and a row, respectively. Small black square in the margin to the left of a paragraph Indicates that at least one of the paragraph options was applied, e.g. Keep lines together, Page break before. Anchor symbols Indicate the position of floating objects (objects whose wrapping style is different from Inline), e.g. images, autoshapes, charts. You should select an object to make its anchor visible." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/OpenCreateNew.htm", "title": "Create a new document or open an existing one", - "body": "To create a new document In the online editor click the File tab of the top toolbar, select the Create New option. In the desktop editor in the main program window, select the Document menu item from the Create new section of the left sidebar - a new file will open in a new tab, when all the necessary changes are made, click the Save icon in the upper left corner or switch to the File tab and choose the Save as menu item. in the file manager window, select the file location, specify its name, choose the format you want to save the document to (DOCX, Document template (DOTX), ODT, OTT, RTF, TXT, PDF or PDFA) and click the Save button. To open an existing document In the desktop editor in the main program window, select the Open local file menu item at the left sidebar, choose the necessary document from the file manager window and click the Open button. You can also right-click the necessary document in the file manager window, select the Open with option and choose the necessary application from the menu. If the office documents files are associated with the application, you can also open documents by double-clicking the file name in the file explorer window. All the directories that you have accessed using the desktop editor will be displayed in the Recent folders list so that you can quickly access them afterwards. Click the necessary folder to select one of the files stored in it. To open a recently edited document In the online editor click the File tab of the top toolbar, select the Open Recent... option, choose the document you need from the list of recently edited documents. In the desktop editor in the main program window, select the Recent files menu item at the left sidebar, choose the document you need from the list of recently edited documents. To open the folder where the file is stored in a new browser tab in the online version, in the file explorer window in the desktop version, click the Open file location icon on the right side of the editor header. Alternatively, you can switch to the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Open file location option." + "body": "To create a new document In the online editor click the File tab on the top toolbar, select the Create New option. In the desktop editor in the main program window, select the Document menu item from the Create new section on the left sidebar - a new file will open in a new tab, when all the necessary changes are made, click the Save icon in the upper left corner or switch to the File tab and choose the Save as menu item. in the file manager window, select the file location, specify its name, choose the required format for saving (DOCX, Document template (DOTX), ODT, OTT, RTF, TXT, PDF or PDFA) and click the Save button. To open an existing document In the desktop editor in the main program window, select the Open local file menu item on the left sidebar, choose the required document from the file manager window and click the Open button. You can also right-click the required document in the file manager window, select the Open with option and choose the necessary application from the menu. If text documents are associated with the application you need, you can also open them by double-clicking the file name in the file explorer window. All the directories that you have navigated through using the desktop editor will be displayed in the Recent folders list so that you can quickly access them afterwards. Click the required folder to select one of the files stored there. To open a recently edited document In the online editor click the File tab on the top toolbar, select the Open Recent... option, choose the document you need from the list of recently edited documents. In the desktop editor in the main program window, select the Recent files menu item on the left sidebar, choose the document you need from the list of recently edited documents. To open the folder, where the file is stored, in a new browser tab in the online editor in the file explorer window in the desktop editor, click the Open file location icon on the right side of the editor header. Alternatively, you can switch to the File tab on the top toolbar and select the Open file location option." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/PageBreaks.htm", "title": "Insert page breaks", - "body": "In Document Editor, you can add a page break to start a new page, insert a blank page and adjust pagination options. To insert a page break at the current cursor position click the Breaks icon at the Insert or Layout tab of the top toolbar or click the arrow next to this icon and select the Insert Page Break option from the menu. You can also use the Ctrl+Enter key combination. To insert a blank page at the current cursor position click the Blank Page icon at the Insert tab of the top toolbar. This inserts two page breaks that creates a blank page. To insert a page break before the selected paragraph i.e. to start this paragraph at the top of a new page: click the right mouse button and select the Page break before option in the menu, or click the right mouse button, select the Paragraph Advanced Settings option in the menu or use the Show advanced settings link at the right sidebar, and check the Page break before box at the Line & Page Breaks tab of the opened Paragraph - Advanced Settings window. To keep lines together so that only whole paragraphs will be moved to the new page (i.e. there will be no page break between the lines within a single paragraph), click the right mouse button and select the Keep lines together option in the menu, or click the right mouse button, select the Paragraph Advanced Settings option in the menu or use the Show advanced settings link at the right sidebar, and check the Keep lines together box at the Line & Page Breaks in the opened Paragraph - Advanced Settings window. The Line & Page Breaks tab of the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window allows you to set two more pagination options: Keep with next - is used to prevent a page break between the selected paragraph and the next one. Orphan control - is selected by default and used to prevent a single line of the paragraph (the first or last) from appearing at the top or bottom of the page." + "body": "In the Document Editor, you can add a page break to start a new page, insert a blank page and adjust pagination options. To insert a page break at the current cursor position click the Breaks icon on the Insert or Layout tab of the top toolbar or click the arrow next to this icon and select the Insert Page Break option from the menu. You can also use the Ctrl+Enter key combination. To insert a blank page at the current cursor position click the Blank Page icon on the Insert tab of the top toolbar. This action inserts two page breaks that create a blank page. To insert a page break before the selected paragraph i.e. to start this paragraph at the top of a new page: click the right mouse button and select the Page break before option in the menu, or click the right mouse button, select the Paragraph Advanced Settings option in the menu or use the Show advanced settings link on the right sidebar, and check the Page break before box at the Line & Page Breaks tab of the opened Paragraph - Advanced Settings window. To keep lines together so that only whole paragraphs will be moved to the new page (i.e. there will be no page break between the lines within a single paragraph), click the right mouse button and select the Keep lines together option in the menu, or click the right mouse button, select the Paragraph Advanced Settings option on the menu or use the Show advanced settings link at the right sidebar, and check the Keep lines together box at the Line & Page Breaks in the opened Paragraph - Advanced Settings window. The Line & Page Breaks tab of the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window allows you to set two more pagination options: Keep with next - is used to prevent a page break between the selected paragraph and the next one. Orphan control - is selected by default and used to prevent a single line of the paragraph (the first or last) from appearing at the top or bottom of the page." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/ParagraphIndents.htm", "title": "Change paragraph indents", - "body": "In Document Editor, you can change the first line offset from the left part of the page as well as the paragraph offset from the left and right sides of the page. To do that, put the cursor within the paragraph you need, or select several paragraphs with the mouse or all the text in the document by pressing the Ctrl+A key combination, click the right mouse button and select the Paragraph Advanced Settings option from the menu or use the Show advanced settings link at the right sidebar, in the opened Paragraph - Advanced Settings window, switch to the Indents & Spacing tab and set the necessary parameters in the Indents section: Left - set the paragraph offset from the left side of the page specifying the necessary numeric value, Right - set the paragraph offset from the right side of the page specifying the necessary numeric value, Special - set an indent for the first line of the paragraph: select the corresponding menu item ((none), First line, Hanging) and change the default numeric value specified for First Line or Hanging, click the OK button. To quickly change the paragraph offset from the left side of the page, you can also use the respective icons at the Home tab of the top toolbar: Decrease indent and Increase indent . You can also use the horizontal ruler to set indents. Select the necessary paragraph(s) and drag the indent markers along the ruler. First Line Indent marker is used to set the offset from the left side of the page for the first line of the paragraph. Hanging Indent marker is used to set the offset from the left side of the page for the second line and all the subsequent lines of the paragraph. Left Indent marker is used to set the entire paragraph offset from the left side of the page. Right Indent marker is used to set the paragraph offset from the right side of the page." + "body": "the Document Editor, you can change the first line offset from the left side of the page as well as the paragraph offset from the left and right sides of the page. To do that, place the cursor within the required paragraph, or select several paragraphs with the mouse or the whole text by pressing the Ctrl+A key combination, click the right mouse button and select the Paragraph Advanced Settings option from the menu or use the Show advanced settings link on the right sidebar, in the opened Paragraph - Advanced Settings window, switch to the Indents & Spacing tab and set the necessary parameters in the Indents section: Left - set the paragraph offset from the left side of the page specifying the necessary numeric value, Right - set the paragraph offset from the right side of the page specifying the necessary numeric value, Special - set an indent for the first line of the paragraph: select the corresponding menu item ((none), First line, Hanging) and change the default numeric value specified for First Line or Hanging, click the OK button. To quickly change the paragraph offset from the left side of the page, you can also use the corresponding icons on the Home tab of the top toolbar: Decrease indent and Increase indent . You can also use the horizontal ruler to set indents. Select the necessary paragraph(s) and drag the indent markers along the ruler. The First Line Indent marker is used to set an offset from the left side of the page for the first line of the paragraph. The Hanging Indent marker is used to set an offset from the left side of the page for the second line and all the subsequent lines of the paragraph. The Left Indent marker is used to set an offset for the entire paragraph from the left side of the page. The Right Indent marker is used to set a paragraph offset from the right side of the page." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm", "title": "Save/download/print your document", - "body": "Save/download/ print your document Saving By default, online Document Editor automatically saves your file each 2 seconds when you work on it preventing your data loss in case of the unexpected program closing. If you co-edit the file in the Fast mode, the timer requests for updates 25 times a second and saves the changes if they have been made. When the file is being co-edited in the Strict mode, changes are automatically saved at 10-minute intervals. If you need, you can easily select the preferred co-editing mode or disable the Autosave feature on the Advanced Settings page. To save your current document manually in the current format and location, press the Save icon in the left part of the editor header, or use the Ctrl+S key combination, or click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Save option. Note: in the desktop version, to prevent data loss in case of the unexpected program closing you can turn on the Autorecover option at the Advanced Settings page. In the desktop version, you can save the document with another name, in a new location or format, click the File tab of the top toolbar, select the Save as... option, choose one of the available formats depending on your needs: DOCX, ODT, RTF, TXT, PDF, PDFA. You can also choose the Document template (DOTX or OTT) option. Downloading In the online version, you can download the resulting document onto your computer hard disk drive, click the File tab of the top toolbar, select the Download as... option, choose one of the available formats depending on your needs: DOCX, PDF, ODT, TXT, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, HTML. Saving a copy In the online version, you can save a copy of the file on your portal, click the File tab of the top toolbar, select the Save Copy as... option, choose one of the available formats depending on your needs: DOCX, PDF, ODT, TXT, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, HTML, select a location of the file on the portal and press Save. Printing To print out the current document, click the Print icon in the left part of the editor header, or use the Ctrl+P key combination, or click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Print option. It's also possible to print a selected text passage using the Print Selection option from the contextual menu. In the desktop version, the file will be printed directly. In the online version, a PDF file will be generated on the basis of the document. You can open and print it out, or save onto your computer hard disk drive or removable medium to print it out later. Some browsers (e.g. Chrome and Opera) support direct printing." + "body": "Save/download/ print your document Saving By default, online Document Editor automatically saves your file each 2 seconds when you work on it to prevent your data loss in case the program closes unexpectedly. If you co-edit the file in the Fast mode, the timer requests for updates 25 times a second and saves the changes if they have been made. When the file is being co-edited in the Strict mode, changes are automatically saved at 10-minute intervals. If necessary, you can easily select the preferred co-editing mode or disable the Autosave feature on the Advanced Settings page. To save your current document manually in the current format and location, press the Save icon in the left part of the editor header, or use the Ctrl+S key combination, or click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Save option. Note: in the desktop version, to prevent data from loss in case program closes unexpectedly, you can turn on the Autorecover option on the Advanced Settings page. In the desktop version, you can save the document with another name, in a new location or format, click the File tab of the top toolbar, select the Save as... option, choose one of the available formats depending on your needs: DOCX, ODT, RTF, TXT, PDF, PDFA. You can also choose the Document template (DOTX or OTT) option. Downloading In the online version, you can download the resulting document onto your computer hard disk drive, click the File tab of the top toolbar, select the Download as... option, choose one of the available formats depending on your needs: DOCX, PDF, ODT, TXT, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, HTML. Saving a copy In the online version, you can save a copy of the file on your portal, click the File tab of the top toolbar, select the Save Copy as... option, choose one of the available formats depending on your needs: DOCX, PDF, ODT, TXT, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, HTML, select a location of the file on the portal and press Save. Printing To print out the current document, click the Print icon in the left part of the editor header, or use the Ctrl+P key combination, or click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Print option. It's also possible to print a selected text passage using the Print Selection option from the contextual menu both in the Edit and View modes (Right Mouse Button Click and choose option Print selection). In the desktop version, the file will be printed directly. In the online version, a PDF file will be generated on the basis of the document. You can open and print it out, or save onto your computer hard disk drive or removable medium to print it out later. Some browsers (e.g. Chrome and Opera) support direct printing." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/SectionBreaks.htm", "title": "Insert section breaks", - "body": "Section breaks allow you to apply a different layout or formatting for the certain parts of your document. For example, you can use individual headers and footers, page numbering, footnotes format, margins, size, orientation, or column number for each separate section. Note: an inserted section break defines formatting of the preceding part of the document. To insert a section break at the current cursor position: click the Breaks icon at the Insert or Layout tab of the top toolbar, select the Insert Section Break submenu select the necessary section break type: Next Page - to start a new section from the next page Continuous Page - to start a new section at the current page Even Page - to start a new section from the next even page Odd Page - to start a new section from the next odd page Added section breaks are indicated in your document by a double dotted line: If you do not see the inserted section breaks, click the icon at the Home tab of the top toolbar to display them. To remove a section break select it with the mouse and press the Delete key. Since a section break defines formatting of the preceding section, when you remove a section break, this section formatting will also be deleted. The document part that preceded the removed section break acquires the formatting of the part that followed it." + "body": "Section breaks allow you to apply different layouts or formatting styles to a certain part of your document. For example, you can use individual headers and footers, page numbering, footnotes format, margins, size, orientation, or column number for each separate section. Note: an inserted section break defines formatting of the preceding part of the document. To insert a section break at the current cursor position: click the Breaks icon on the Insert or Layout tab of the top toolbar, select the Insert Section Break submenu select the necessary section break type: Next Page - to start a new section from the next page Continuous Page - to start a new section on the current page Even Page - to start a new section from the next even page Odd Page - to start a new section from the next odd page The added section breaks are indicated in your document with a double dotted line: If you do not see the inserted section breaks, click the icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar to display them. To remove a section break, select it with the mouse and press the Delete key. Since a section break defines formatting of the previous section, when you remove a section break, this section formatting will also be deleted. When you delete a section break, the text before and after the break is combined into one section. The new combined section will use the formatting from the section that followed the section break." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/SetOutlineLevel.htm", - "title": "Set up paragraph outline level", - "body": "Outline level means the paragraph level in the document structure. The following levels are available: Basic Text, Level 1 - Level 9. Outline level can be specified in different ways, for example, by using heading styles: once you assign a heading style (Heading 1 - Heading 9) to a paragraph, it acquires a corresponding outline level. If you assign a level to a paragraph using the paragraph advanced settings, the paragraph acquires the structure level only while its style remains unchanged. The outline level can also be changed at the Navigation panel on the left using the contextual menu options. To change a paragraph outline level using the paragraph advanced settings, right-click the text and choose the Paragraph Advanced Settings option from the contextual menu or use the Show advanced settings option at the right sidebar, open the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window, switch to the Indents & Spacing tab, select the necessary outline level from the Outline level list. click the OK button to apply the changes." + "title": "Set up a paragraph outline level", + "body": "Set up paragraph outline level An outline level is the paragraph level in the document structure. The following levels are available: Basic Text, Level 1 - Level 9. The outline level can be specified in different ways, for example, by using heading styles: once you assign a heading style (Heading 1 - Heading 9) to a paragraph, it acquires yje corresponding outline level. If you assign a level to a paragraph using the paragraph advanced settings, the paragraph acquires the structure level only while its style remains unchanged. The outline level can be also changed in the Navigation panel on the left using the contextual menu options. To change a paragraph outline level using the paragraph advanced settings, right-click the text and choose the Paragraph Advanced Settings option from the contextual menu or use the Show advanced settings option on the right sidebar, open the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window, switch to the Indents & Spacing tab, select the necessary outline level from the Outline level list. click the OK button to apply the changes." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/SetPageParameters.htm", "title": "Set page parameters", - "body": "To change page layout, i.e. set page orientation and size, adjust margins and insert columns, use the corresponding icons at the Layout tab of the top toolbar. Note: all these parameters are applied to the entire document. If you need to set different page margins, orientation, size, or column number for the separate parts of your document, please refer to this page. Page Orientation Change the current orientation type clicking the Orientation icon. The default orientation type is Portrait that can be switched to Album. Page Size Change the default A4 format clicking the Size icon and selecting the needed one from the list. The available preset sizes are: US Letter (21,59cm x 27,94cm) US Legal (21,59cm x 35,56cm) A4 (21cm x 29,7cm) A5 (14,81cm x 20,99cm) B5 (17,6cm x 25,01cm) Envelope #10 (10,48cm x 24,13cm) Envelope DL (11,01cm x 22,01cm) Tabloid (27,94cm x 43,17cm) AЗ (29,7cm x 42,01cm) Tabloid Oversize (30,48cm x 45,71cm) ROC 16K (19,68cm x 27,3cm) Envelope Choukei 3 (11,99cm x 23,49cm) Super B/A3 (33,02cm x 48,25cm) You can also set a special page size by selecting the Custom Page Size option from the list. The Page Size window will open where you'll be able to select the necessary Preset (US Letter, US Legal, A4, A5, B5, Envelope #10, Envelope DL, Tabloid, AЗ, Tabloid Oversize, ROC 16K, Envelope Choukei 3, Super B/A3, A0, A1, A2, A6) or set custom Width and Height values. Enter your new values into the entry fields or adjust the existing values using arrow buttons. When ready, click OK to apply the changes. Page Margins Change default margins, i.e. the blank space between the left, right, top and bottom page edges and the paragraph text, clicking the Margins icon and selecting one of the available presets: Normal, US Normal, Narrow, Moderate, Wide. You can also use the Custom Margins option to set your own values in the Margins window that opens. Enter the necessary Top, Bottom, Left and Right page margin values into the entry fields or adjust the existing values using arrow buttons. Gutter position is used to set up additional space on the left or top of the document. Gutter option might come in handy to make sure bookbinding does not cover text. In Margins window enter the necessary gutter position into the entry fields and choose where it should be placed in. Note: Gutter position function cannot be used when Mirror margins option is checked. In Multiple pages drop-down menu choose Mirror margins option to to set up facing pages for double-sided documents. With this option checked, Left and Right margins turn into Inside and Outside margins respectively. In Orientation drop-down menu choose from Portrait and Landscape options. All applied changes to the document will be displayed in the Preview window. When ready, click OK. The custom margins will be applied to the current document and the Last Custom option with the specified parameters will appear in the Margins list so that you can apply them to some other documents.

                        You can also change the margins manually by dragging the border between the grey and white areas on the rulers (the grey areas of the rulers indicate page margins): Columns Apply a multi-column layout clicking the Columns icon and selecting the necessary column type from the drop-down list. The following options are available: Two - to add two columns of the same width, Three - to add three columns of the same width, Left - to add two columns: a narrow column on the left and a wide column on the right, Right - to add two columns: a narrow column on the right and a wide column on the left. If you want to adjust column settings, select the Custom Columns option from the list. The Columns window will open where you'll be able to set necessary Number of columns (it's possible to add up to 12 columns) and Spacing between columns. Enter your new values into the entry fields or adjust the existing values using arrow buttons. Check the Column divider box to add a vertical line between the columns. When ready, click OK to apply the changes. To exactly specify where a new column should start, place the cursor before the text that you want to move into the new column, click the Breaks icon at the top toolbar and then select the Insert Column Break option. The text will be moved to the next column. Added column breaks are indicated in your document by a dotted line: . If you do not see the inserted column breaks, click the icon at the Home tab of the top toolbar to display them. To remove a column break select it with the mouse and press the Delete key. To manually change the column width and spacing, you can use the horizontal ruler. To cancel columns and return to a regular single-column layout, click the Columns icon at the top toolbar and select the One option from the list." + "body": "To change page layout, i.e. set page orientation and size, adjust margins and insert columns, use the corresponding icons on the Layout tab of the top toolbar. Note: all these parameters are applied to the entire document. If you need to set different page margins, orientation, size, or column number for the separate parts of your document, please refer to this page. Page Orientation Change the current orientation by type clicking the Orientation icon. The default orientation type is Portrait that can be switched to Album. Page Size Change the default A4 format by clicking the Size icon and selecting the required format from the list. The following preset sizes are available: US Letter (21,59cm x 27,94cm) US Legal (21,59cm x 35,56cm) A4 (21cm x 29,7cm) A5 (14,81cm x 20,99cm) B5 (17,6cm x 25,01cm) Envelope #10 (10,48cm x 24,13cm) Envelope DL (11,01cm x 22,01cm) Tabloid (27,94cm x 43,17cm) AЗ (29,7cm x 42,01cm) Tabloid Oversize (30,48cm x 45,71cm) ROC 16K (19,68cm x 27,3cm) Envelope Choukei 3 (11,99cm x 23,49cm) Super B/A3 (33,02cm x 48,25cm) You can also set a special page size by selecting the Custom Page Size option from the list. The Page Size window will open where you'll be able to select the required Preset (US Letter, US Legal, A4, A5, B5, Envelope #10, Envelope DL, Tabloid, AЗ, Tabloid Oversize, ROC 16K, Envelope Choukei 3, Super B/A3, A0, A1, A2, A6) or set custom Width and Height values. Enter new values into the entry fields or adjust the existing values using the arrow buttons. When you finish, click OK to apply the changes. Page Margins Change the default margins, i.e. the blank space between the left, right, top and bottom page edges and the paragraph text, by clicking the Margins icon and selecting one of the available presets: Normal, US Normal, Narrow, Moderate, Wide. You can also use the Custom Margins option to set your own values in the Margins window. Enter the required Top, Bottom, Left and Right page margin values into the entry fields or adjust the existing values using arrow buttons. Gutter position is used to set up additional space on the left side of the document or at its top. The Gutter option is helpful to make sure that bookbinding does not cover the text. In the Margins enter the required gutter position into the entry fields and choose where it should be placed in. Note: the Gutter position cannot be used when the Mirror margins option is checked. In the Multiple pages drop-down menu, choose the Mirror margins option to set up facing pages for double-sided documents. With this option checked, Left and Right margins turn into Inside and Outside margins respectively. In Orientation drop-down menu choose from Portrait and Landscape options. All applied changes to the document will be displayed in the Preview window. When you finish, click OK. The custom margins will be applied to the current document and the Last Custom option with the specified parameters will appear in the Margins list so that you will be able to apply them to other documents. You can also change the margins manually by dragging the border between the grey and white areas on the rulers (the grey areas of the rulers indicate page margins): Columns Apply a multi-column layout by clicking the Columns icon and selecting the necessary column type from the drop-down list. The following options are available: Two - to add two columns of the same width, Three - to add three columns of the same width, Left - to add two columns: a narrow column on the left and a wide column on the right, Right - to add two columns: a narrow column on the right and a wide column on the left. If you want to adjust column settings, select the Custom Columns option from the list. The Columns window will appear, and you'll be able to set the required Number of columns (you can add up to 12 columns) and Spacing between columns. Enter your new values into the entry fields or adjust the existing values using arrow buttons. Check the Column divider box to add a vertical line between the columns. When you finish, click OK to apply the changes. To exactly specify where a new column should start, place the cursor before the text that you want to move to the new column, click the Breaks icon on the top toolbar and then select the Insert Column Break option. The text will be moved to the next column. The inserted column breaks are indicated in your document with a dotted line: . If you do not see the inserted column breaks, click the icon at the Home tab on the top toolbar to make them visible. To remove a column break select it with the mouse and press the Delete key. To manually change the column width and spacing, you can use the horizontal ruler. To cancel columns and return to a regular single-column layout, click the Columns icon on the top toolbar and select the One option from the list." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/SetTabStops.htm", "title": "Set tab stops", - "body": "In Document Editor, you can change tab stops i.e. the position the cursor advances to when you press the Tab key on the keyboard. To set tab stops you can use the horizontal ruler: Select the necessary tab stop type clicking the button in the upper left corner of the working area. The following three tab types are available: Left - lines up your text by the left side at the tab stop position; the text moves to the right from the tab stop as you type. Such a tab stop will be indicated on the horizontal ruler by the marker. Center - centers the text at the tab stop position. Such a tab stop will be indicated on the horizontal ruler by the marker. Right - lines up your text by the right side at the tab stop position; the text moves to the left from the tab stop as you type. Such a tab stop will be indicated on the horizontal ruler by the marker. Click on the bottom edge of the ruler where you want to place the tab stop. Drag it along the ruler to change its position. To remove the added tab stop drag it out of the ruler. You can also use the paragraph properties window to adjust tab stops. Click the right mouse button, select the Paragraph Advanced Settings option in the menu or use the Show advanced settings link at the right sidebar, and switch to the Tabs tab in the opened Paragraph - Advanced Settings window. You can set the following parameters: Default Tab is set at 1.25 cm. You can decrease or increase this value using the arrow buttons or enter the necessary one in the box. Tab Position - is used to set custom tab stops. Enter the necessary value in this box, adjust it more precisely using the arrow buttons and press the Specify button. Your custom tab position will be added to the list in the field below. If you've previously added some tab stops using the ruler, all these tab positions will also be displayed in the list. Alignment - is used to set the necessary alignment type for each of the tab positions in the list above. Select the necessary tab position in the list, choose the Left, Center or Right option from the drop-down list and press the Specify button. Leader - allows to choose a character used to create a leader for each of the tab positions. A leader is a line of characters (dots or hyphens) that fills the space between tabs. Select the necessary tab position in the list, choose the leader type from the drop-down list and press the Specify button. To delete tab stops from the list select a tab stop and press the Remove or Remove All button." + "body": "In the Document Editor, you can change tab stops. A tab stop is a term used to describe the location where the cursor stops after the Tab key is pressed. To set tab stops you can use the horizontal ruler: Select the necessary tab stop type by clicking the button in the upper left corner of the working area. The following three tab types are available: Left Tab Stop lines up the text to the left side at the tab stop position; the text moves to the right from the tab stop while you type. Such a tab stop will be indicated on the horizontal ruler with the Left Tab Stop marker. Center Tab Stop centers the text at the tab stop position. Such a tab stop will be indicated on the horizontal ruler with the Center Tab Stop marker. Right Tab Stop lines up the text to the right side at the tab stop position; the text moves to the left from the tab stop while you type. Such a tab stop will be indicated on the horizontal ruler with the Right Tab Stop marker. Click on the bottom edge of the ruler where you want to place the tab stop. Drag it along the ruler to change its position. To remove the added tab stop drag it out of the ruler. You can also use the paragraph properties window to adjust tab stops. Click the right mouse button, select the Paragraph Advanced Settings option in the menu or use the Show advanced settings link on the right sidebar, and switch to the Tabs tab in the opened Paragraph - Advanced Settings window. You can set the following parameters: Default Tab is set at 1.25 cm. You can decrease or increase this value by using the arrow buttons or entering the required value in the box. Tab Position is used to set custom tab stops. Enter the required value in this box, adjust it more precisely by using the arrow buttons and press the Specify button. Your custom tab position will be added to the list in the field below. If you've previously added some tab stops using the ruler, all these tab positions will also be displayed in the list. Alignment - is used to set the necessary alignment type for each of the tab positions in the list above. Select the necessary tab position in the list, choose the Left, Center or Right option from the drop-down list and press the Specify button. Leader - allows choosing a character to create a leader for each tab positions. A leader is a line of characters (dots or hyphens) that fills the space between tabs. Select the necessary tab position in the list, choose the leader type from the drop-down list and press the Specify button. To delete tab stops from the list, select a tab stop and press the Remove or Remove All button." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/UseMailMerge.htm", "title": "Use Mail Merge", - "body": "Note: this option is available in the online version only. The Mail Merge feature is used to create a set of documents combining a common content which is taken from a text document and some individual components (variables, such as names, greetings etc.) taken from a spreadsheet (for example, a customer list). It can be useful if you need to create a lot of personalized letters and send them to recipients. To start working with the Mail Merge feature, Prepare a data source and load it to the main document A data source used for the mail merge must be an .xlsx spreadsheet stored on your portal. Open an existing spreadsheet or create a new one and make sure that it meets the following requirements. The spreadsheet should have a header row with the column titles, as values in the first cell of each column will designate merge fields (i.e. variables that you can insert into the text). Each column should contain a set of actual values for a variable. Each row in the spreadsheet should correspond to a separate record (i.e. a set of values that belongs to a certain recipient). During the merge process, a copy of the main document will be created for each record and each merge field inserted into the main text will be replaced with an actual value from the corresponding column. If you are goung to send results by email, the spreadsheet must also include a column with the recipients' email addresses. Open an existing text document or create a new one. It must contain the main text which will be the same for each version of the merged document. Click the Mail Merge icon at the Home tab of the top toolbar. The Select Data Source window will open. It displays the list of all your .xlsx spreadsheets stored in the My Documents section. To navigate between other Documents module sections use the menu in the left part of the window. Select the file you need and click OK. Once the data source is loaded, the Mail Merge setting tab will be available on the right sidebar. Verify or change the recipients list Click the Edit recipients list button on the top of the right sidebar to open the Mail Merge Recipients window, where the content of the selected data source is displayed. Here you can add new information, edit or delete the existing data, if necessary. To simplify working with data, you can use the icons on the top of the window: and - to copy and paste the copied data and - to undo and redo undone actions and - to sort your data within a selected range of cells in ascending or descending order - to enable the filter for the previously selected range of cells or to remove the applied filter - to clear all the applied filter parameters Note: to learn more on how to use the filter you can refer to the Sort and filter data section of the Spreadsheet Editor help. - to search for a certain value and replace it with another one, if necessary Note: to learn more on how to use the Find and Replace tool you can refer to the Search and Replace Functions section of the Spreadsheet Editor help. After all the necessary changes are made, click the Save & Exit button. To discard the changes, click the Close button. Insert merge fields and check the results Place the mouse cursor in the text of the main document where you want a merge field to be inserted, click the Insert Merge Field button at the right sidebar and select the necessary field from the list. The available fields correspond to the data in the first cell of each column of the selected data source. Add all the fields you need anywhere in the document. Turn on the Highlight merge fields switcher at the right sidebar to make the inserted fields more noticeable in the document text. Turn on the Preview results switcher at the right sidebar to view the document text with the merge fields replaced with actual values from the data source. Use the arrow buttons to preview versions of the merged document for each record. To delete an inserted field, disable the Preview results mode, select the field with the mouse and press the Delete key on the keyboard. To replace an inserted field, disable the Preview results mode, select the field with the mouse, click the Insert Merge Field button at the right sidebar and choose a new field from the list. Specify the merge parameters Select the merge type. You can start mass mailing or save the result as a file in the PDF or Docx format to be able to print or edit it later. Select the necessary option from the Merge to list: PDF - to create a single document in the PDF format that includes all the merged copies so that you can print them later Docx - to create a single document in the Docx format that includes all the merged copies so that you can edit individual copies later Email - to send the results to recipients by email Note: the recipients' email addresses must be specified in the loaded data source and you need to have at least one email account connected in the Mail module on your portal. Choose the records you want to apply the merge to: All records (this option is selected by default) - to create merged documents for all records from the loaded data source Current record - to create a merged document for the record that is currently displayed From ... To - to create merged documents for a range of records (in this case you need to specify two values: the number of the first record and the last record in the desired range) Note: the maximum allowed quantity of recipients is 100. If you have more than 100 recipients in your data source, please, perform the mail merge by stages: specify the values from 1 to 100, wait until the mail merge process is over, then repeat the operation specifying the values from 101 to N etc. Complete the merge If you've decided to save the merge results as a file, click the Download button to store the file anywhere on your PC. You'll find the downloaded file in your default Downloads folder. click the Save button to save the file on your portal. In the Folder for save window that opens, you can change the file name and specify the folder where you want to save the file. You can also check the Open merged document in new tab box to check the result once the merge process is finished. Finally, click Save in the Folder for save window. If you've selected the Email option, the Merge button will be available on the right sidebar. After you click it, the Send to Email window will open: In the From list, select the mail account you want to use for sending mail, if you have several accounts connected in the Mail module. In the To list, select the merge field corresponding to email addresses of the recipients, if it was not selected automatically. Enter your message subject in the Subject Line field. Select the mail format from the list: HTML, Attach as DOCX or Attach as PDF. When one of the two latter options is selected, you also need to specify the File name for attachments and enter the Message (the text of your letter that will be sent to recipients). Click the Send button. Once the mailing is over you'll receive a notification to your email specified in the From field." + "body": "Note: this option is available in the online version only. The Mail Merge feature is used to create a set of documents combining a common content which is taken from a text document and some individual components (variables, such as names, greetings etc.) taken from a spreadsheet (for example, a customer list). It can be useful if you need to create a lot of personalized letters and send them to recipients. To start working with the Mail Merge feature, Prepare a data source and load it to the main document A data source used for the mail merge must be an .xlsx spreadsheet stored on your portal. Open an existing spreadsheet or create a new one and make sure that it meets the following requirements. The spreadsheet should have a header row with the column titles, as values in the first cell of each column will designate merge fields (i.e. variables that you can insert into the text). Each column should contain a set of actual values for a variable. Each row in the spreadsheet should correspond to a separate record (i.e. a set of values that belongs to a certain recipient). During the merge process, a copy of the main document will be created for each record and each merge field inserted into the main text will be replaced with an actual value from the corresponding column. If you are goung to send results by email, the spreadsheet must also include a column with the recipients' email addresses. Open an existing text document or create a new one. It must contain the main text which will be the same for each version of the merged document. Click the Mail Merge icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar. The Select Data Source window will open. It displays the list of all your .xlsx spreadsheets stored in the My Documents section. To navigate between other Documents module sections, use the menu on the left part of the window. Select the required file and click OK. Once the data source is loaded, the Mail Merge setting tab will be available on the right sidebar. Verify or change the recipients list Click the Edit recipients list button on the top of the right sidebar to open the Mail Merge Recipients window, where the content of the selected data source is displayed. In the opened window, you can add new information, edit or delete the existing data if necessary. To simplify working with data, you can use the icons at the top of the window: and - to copy and paste the copied data and - to undo and redo undone actions and - to sort your data within a selected range of cells in ascending or descending order - to enable the filter for the previously selected range of cells or to remove the applied filter - to clear all the applied filter parameters Note: to learn more on how to use the filter, please refer to the Sort and filter data section of the Spreadsheet Editor help. - to search for a certain value and replace it with another one, if necessary Note: to learn more on how to use the Find and Replace tool, please refer to the Search and Replace Functions section of the Spreadsheet Editor help. After all the necessary changes are made, click the Save & Exit button. To discard the changes, click the Close button. Insert merge fields and check the results Place the mouse cursor where the merge field should be inserted, click the Insert Merge Field button on the right sidebar and select the necessary field from the list. The available fields correspond to the data in the first cell of each column of the selected data source. All the required fields can be added anywhere. Turn on the Highlight merge fields switcher on the right sidebar to make the inserted fields more noticeable in the text. Turn on the Preview results switcher on the right sidebar to view the text with the merge fields replaced with actual values from the data source. Use the arrow buttons to preview the versions of the merged document for each record. To delete an inserted field, disable the Preview results mode, select the field with the mouse and press the Delete key on the keyboard. To replace an inserted field, disable the Preview results mode, select the field with the mouse, click the Insert Merge Field button on the right sidebar and choose a new field from the list. Specify the merge parameters Select the merge type. You can start mass mailing or save the result as a PDF or Docx file to print or edit it later. Select the necessary option from the Merge to list: PDF - to create a single PDF document that includes all the merged copies that can be printed later Docx - to create a single Docx document that includes all the merged copies that can be edited individually later Email - to send the results to recipients by email Note: the recipients' email addresses must be specified in the loaded data source and you need to have at least one email account connected in the Mail module on your portal. Choose all the required records to be applied: All records (this option is selected by default) - to create merged documents for all records from the loaded data source Current record - to create a merged document for the record that is currently displayed From ... To - to create merged documents for a range of records (in this case you need to specify two values: the number of the first record and the last record in the desired range) Note: the maximum allowed quantity of recipients is 100. If you have more than 100 recipients in your data source, please, perform the mail merge by stages: specify the values from 1 to 100, wait until the mail merge process is over, then repeat the operation specifying the values from 101 to N etc. Complete the merge If you've decided to save the merge results as a file, click the Download button to save the file on your PC. You'll find the downloaded file in your default Downloads folder. click the Save button to save the file on your portal. In the opened Folder for save window, you can change the file name and specify the folder where you want to save the file. You can also check the Open merged document in new tab box to check the result when the merge process is finished. Finally, click Save in the Folder for save window. If you've selected the Email option, the Merge button will be available on the right sidebar. After you click it, the Send to Email window will open: In the From list, select the required mail account if you have several accounts connected to the Mail module. In the To list, select the merge field corresponding to the email addresses of the recipients if this option was not selected automatically. Enter your message subject in the Subject Line field. Select the mail format from the list: HTML, Attach as DOCX or Attach as PDF. When one of the two latter options is selected, you also need to specify the File name for attachments and enter the Message (the text of your letter that will be sent to recipients). Click the Send button. Once the mailing is over, you'll receive a notification to your email specified in the From field." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/ViewDocInfo.htm", "title": "View document information", - "body": "To access the detailed information about the currently edited document, click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Document Info... option. General Information The document information includes a number of the file properties which describe the document. Some of these properties are updated automatically, and some of them can be edited. Location - the folder in the Documents module where the file is stored. Owner - the name of the user who have created the file. Uploaded - the date and time when the file has been created. These properties are available in the online version only. Statistics - the number of pages, paragraphs, words, symbols, symbols with spaces. Title, Subject, Comment - these properties allow to simplify your documents classification. You can specify the necessary text in the properties fields. Last Modified - the date and time when the file was last modified. Last Modified By - the name of the user who have made the latest change in the document if a document has been shared and it can be edited by several users. Application - the application the document was created with. Author - the person who have created the file. You can enter the necessary name in this field. Press Enter to add a new field that allows to specify one more author. If you changed the file properties, click the Apply button to apply the changes. Note: Online Editors allow you to change the document name directly from the editor interface. To do that, click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Rename... option, then enter the necessary File name in a new window that opens and click OK. Permission Information In the online version, you can view the information about permissions to the files stored in the cloud. Note: this option is not available for users with the Read Only permissions. To find out, who have rights to view or edit the document, select the Access Rights... option at the left sidebar. You can also change currently selected access rights by pressing the Change access rights button in the Persons who have rights section. Version History In the online version, you can view the version history for the files stored in the cloud. Note: this option is not available for users with the Read Only permissions. To view all the changes made to this document, select the Version History option at the left sidebar. It's also possible to open the history of versions using the Version History icon at the Collaboration tab of the top toolbar. You'll see the list of this document versions (major changes) and revisions (minor changes) with the indication of each version/revision author and creation date and time. For document versions, the version number is also specified (e.g. ver. 2). To know exactly which changes have been made in each separate version/revision, you can view the one you need by clicking it at the left sidebar. The changes made by the version/revision author are marked with the color which is displayed next to the author name on the left sidebar. You can use the Restore link below the selected version/revision to restore it. To return to the document current version, use the Close History option on the top of the version list. To close the File panel and return to document editing, select the Close Menu option." + "body": "To access the detailed information about the currently edited document, click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Document Info... option. General Information The document information includes a number of the file properties which describe the document. Some of these properties are updated automatically, and some of them can be edited. Location - the folder in the Documents module where the file is stored. Owner - the name of the user who has created the file. Uploaded - the date and time when the file has been created. These properties are available in the online version only. Statistics - the number of pages, paragraphs, words, symbols, symbols with spaces. Title, Subject, Comment - these properties allow yoy to simplify your documents classification. You can specify the necessary text in the properties fields. Last Modified - the date and time when the file was last modified. Last Modified By - the name of the user who has made the latest change to the document. This option is available if the document has been shared and can be edited by several users. Application - the application the document has been created with. Author - the person who has created the file. You can enter the necessary name in this field. Press Enter to add a new field that allows you to specify one more author. If you changed the file properties, click the Apply button to apply the changes. Note: The online Editors allow you to change the name of the document directly in the editor interface. To do that, click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Rename... option, then enter the necessary File name in a new window that will appear and click OK. Permission Information In the online version, you can view the information about permissions to the files stored in the cloud. Note: this option is not available for users with the Read Only permissions. To find out who have rights to view or edit the document, select the Access Rights... option on the left sidebar. You can also change currently selected access rights by pressing the Change access rights button in the Persons who have rights section. Version History In the online version, you can view the version history for the files stored in the cloud. Note: this option is not available for users with the Read Only permissions. To view all the changes made to this document, select the Version History option at the left sidebar. It's also possible to open the history of versions using the Version History icon on the Collaboration tab of the top toolbar. You'll see the list of this document versions (major changes) and revisions (minor changes) with the indication of each version/revision author and creation date and time. For document versions, the version number is also specified (e.g. ver. 2). To know exactly which changes have been made in each separate version/revision, you can view the one you need by clicking it on the left sidebar. The changes made by the version/revision author are marked with the color which is displayed next to the author's name on the left sidebar. You can use the Restore link below the selected version/revision to restore it. To return to the current version of the document, use the Close History option on the top of the version list. To close the File panel and return to document editing, select the Close Menu option." } ] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Contents.json b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Contents.json index 7228ee0e5..31ace0f66 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Contents.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/Contents.json @@ -2,7 +2,7 @@ { "src": "ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm", "name": "Présentation de l'interface de Document Editor", - "headername": "Interface du Programme" + "headername": "Interface du programme" }, { "src": "ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm", @@ -70,15 +70,21 @@ "src": "UsageInstructions/InsertFootnotes.htm", "name": "Insérer les notes de bas de page" }, + { + "src": "UsageInstructions/InsertBookmarks.htm", + "name": "Ajouter des marque-pages" + }, + {"src": "UsageInstructions/AddWatermark.htm", "name": "Ajouter un filigrane"}, { "src": "UsageInstructions/AlignText.htm", "name": "Alignement du texte d'un paragraphe", "headername": "Mise en forme de paragraphe" }, - { - "src": "UsageInstructions/BackgroundColor.htm", - "name": "Sélectionner la couleur d'arrière-plan pour un paragraphe" - }, + { + "src": "UsageInstructions/BackgroundColor.htm", + "name": "Sélectionner la couleur d'arrière-plan pour un paragraphe" + }, + {"src": "UsageInstructions/SetOutlineLevel.htm", "name": "Configurer le niveau hiérarchique de paragraphe"}, { "src": "UsageInstructions/ParagraphIndents.htm", "name": "Changer les retraits de paragraphe" @@ -131,7 +137,11 @@ { "src": "UsageInstructions/InsertTables.htm", "name": "Insérer des tableaux", - "headername": "Opérations sur des objets" + "headername": "Opérations sue les objets" + }, + { + "src": "UsageInstructions/AddFormulasInTables.htm", + "name": "Utiliser des formules dans les tableaux" }, { "src": "UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm", @@ -145,10 +155,12 @@ "src": "UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm", "name": "Insérer des graphiques" }, - { - "src": "UsageInstructions/InsertTextObjects.htm", - "name": "Insérer des objets textuels" - }, + { + "src": "UsageInstructions/InsertTextObjects.htm", + "name": "Insérer des objets textuels" + }, + { "src": "UsageInstructions/AddCaption.htm", "name": "Ajouter une légende" }, + { "src": "UsageInstructions/InsertSymbols.htm", "name": "Insérer des symboles et des caractères" }, { "src": "UsageInstructions/InsertContentControls.htm", "name": "Insérer des contrôles de contenu" @@ -167,7 +179,7 @@ }, { "src": "UsageInstructions/UseMailMerge.htm", - "name": "Utiliser le publipostage,", + "name": "Utiliser le publipostage", "headername": "Publipostage" }, { @@ -180,10 +192,11 @@ "name": "Édition collaborative des documents", "headername": "Édition collaborative du document" }, - { - "src": "HelpfulHints/Review.htm", - "name": "Révision du document" - }, + { + "src": "HelpfulHints/Review.htm", + "name": "Révision du document" + }, + {"src": "HelpfulHints/Comparison.htm", "name": "Comparer les documents"}, { "src": "UsageInstructions/ViewDocInfo.htm", "name": "Afficher les informations sur le document", diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/About.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/About.htm index 5261d9015..ad37ded32 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/About.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/About.htm @@ -15,8 +15,8 @@

                        À propos de Document Editor

                        Document Editor est une application en ligne qui vous permet de parcourir et de modifier des documents directement sur le portail .

                        -

                        En utilisant Document Editor, vous pouvez effectuer de différentes opérations d'édition comme en utilisant n'importe quel éditeur de bureau, imprimer les documents modifiés en gardant la mise en forme ou les télécharger sur votre disque dur au format DOCX, PDF, TXT, ODT, RTF, et HTML.

                        -

                        Pour afficher la version actuelle du logiciel et les détails de la licence, cliquez sur l'icône dans la barre latérale gauche.

                        +

                        En utilisant Document Editor, vous pouvez effectuer différentes opérations d'édition comme avec n'importe quel éditeur de bureau, imprimer les documents modifiés en gardant la mise en forme ou les télécharger sur votre disque dur au format DOCX, PDF, ODT, TXT, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, HTML.

                        +

                        Pour afficher la version actuelle du logiciel et les informations de licence dans la version en ligne, cliquez sur l'icône Icône À propos dans la barre latérale gauche. Pour afficher la version actuelle du logiciel et les informations de licence dans la version de bureau, sélectionnez l'élément de menu À propos dans la barre latérale gauche de la fenêtre principale du programme.

                        \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm index e37be6cbb..7e0e22932 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm @@ -14,21 +14,21 @@

                        Paramètres avancés de Document Editor

                        -

                        Document Editor vous permet de modifier ses paramètres avancés. Pour y accéder, cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier dans la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés.... Vous pouvez également utiliser l'icône Paramètres avancés dans le coin supérieur droit de l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure.

                        +

                        Document Editor vous permet de modifier ses paramètres avancés. Pour y accéder, ouvrez l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés.... Vous pouvez également cliquer sur l'icône Paramètres d'affichage Icône Paramètres d'affichage sur le côté droit de l'en-tête de l'éditeur et sélectionner l'option Paramètres avancés.

                        Les paramètres avancés sont les suivants :

                        • Commentaires en temps réel sert à activer / désactiver les commentaires en temps réel.
                          • Activer l'affichage des commentaires - si cette option est désactivée, les passages commentés seront mis en surbrillance uniquement si vous cliquez sur l'icône Commentaires Icône Commentaires de la barre latérale gauche.
                          • -
                          • Activer l'affichage des commentaires résolus - si vous désactivez cette fonctionnalité, les commentaires résolus seront masqués dans le texte du document. Vous ne pourrez voir ces commentaires que si vous cliquez sur l'icône Commentaires Icône Commentaires dans la barre latérale de gauche.
                          • +
                          • Activer l'affichage des commentaires résolus - cette fonction est désactivée par défaut pour que les commentaires résolus soient cachés dans le texte du document. Vous ne pourrez voir ces commentaires que si vous cliquez sur l'icône Commentaires Icône Commentaires dans la barre latérale de gauche. Activez cette option si vous voulez afficher les commentaires résolus dans le texte du document.
                        • Vérification orthographique sert à activer/désactiver la vérification orthographique.
                        • Entrée alternative sert à activer / désactiver les hiéroglyphes.
                        • Guides d'alignement est utilisé pour activer/désactiver les guides d'alignement qui apparaissent lorsque vous déplacez des objets et vous permettent de les positionner précisément sur la page.
                        • -
                        • Enregistrement automatique sert à spécifier la fréquence de l'enregistrement des changements apportés lors de l'édition.
                        • -
                        • Mode de co-édition permet de sélectionner l'affichage des modifications effectuées lors de la co-édition :
                            -
                          • Par défaut, le mode Rapide est sélectionné, les utilisateurs qui participent à la co-édition du document verront les changements en temps réel tandis qu'ils sont faits par d'autres utilisateurs.
                          • -
                          • Si vous préférez ne pas voir les changements des autres utilisateurs (pour ne pas vous déranger, ou pour toute autre raison), sélectionnez le mode Strict et tous les changements apparaîtront seulement après que vous ayez cliqué sur l'icône Enregistrer Icône Enregistrer pour vous informer que d'autres utilisateurs ont effectué des changements.
                          • +
                          • Enregistrement automatique est utilisé dans la version en ligne pour activer/désactiver l'enregistrement automatique des modifications que vous effectuez pendant l'édition. Récupération automatique - est utilisé dans la version de bureau pour activer/désactiver l'option qui permet de récupérer automatiquement les documents en cas de fermeture inattendue du programme.
                          • +
                          • Le Mode de co-édition permet de sélectionner l'affichage des modifications effectuées lors de la co-édition :
                              +
                            • Par défaut, le mode Rapide est sélectionné, les utilisateurs qui participent à la co-édition du document verront les changements en temps réel une fois qu'ils sont faits par d'autres utilisateurs.
                            • +
                            • Si vous préférez ne pas voir d'autres changements d'utilisateur (pour ne pas vous déranger, ou pour toute autre raison), sélectionnez le mode Strict et tous les changements apparaîtront seulement après avoir cliqué sur l'icône Enregistrer Icône Enregistrer pour vous informer qu'il y a des changements effectués par d'autres utilisateurs.
                          • Changements de collaboration en temps réel sert à spécifier quels sont les changements que vous souhaitez mettre en surbrillance lors de l'édition collaborative :
                              diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/CollaborativeEditing.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/CollaborativeEditing.htm index 07d03e8d9..e0cb6a78a 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/CollaborativeEditing.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/CollaborativeEditing.htm @@ -20,15 +20,25 @@
                            • indication visuelle des fragments qui sont en train d'être édités par d'autres utilisateurs
                            • affichage des changements en temps réel ou synchronisation des changements en un seul clic
                            • chat pour partager des idées concernant certaines parties du document
                            • -
                            • commentaires avec la description d'une tâche ou d'un problème à résoudre
                            • +
                            • les commentaires avec la description d'une tâche ou d'un problème à résoudre (il est également possible de travailler avec les commentaires en mode hors ligne, sans se connecter à la version en ligne)
                            +
                            +

                            Connexion à la version en ligne

                            +

                            Dans l'éditeur de bureau, ouvrez l'option Se connecter au cloud du menu de gauche dans la fenêtre principale du programme. Connectez-vous à votre bureau dans le cloud en spécifiant l’identifiant et le mot de passe de votre compte.

                            +

                            Edition collaborative

                            -

                            Document Editor permet de sélectionner l'un des deux modes de coédition disponibles. Rapide est utilisé par défaut et affiche les modifications effectuées par d'autres utilisateurs en temps réel. Strict est sélectionné pour masquer les modifications des autres utilisateurs jusqu'à ce que vous cliquiez sur l'icône Enregistrer Icône Enregistrer pour enregistrer vos propres modifications et accepter les modifications apportées par d'autres utilisateurs. Le mode peut être sélectionné dans les Paramètres avancés. Il est également possible de choisir le mode voulu à l'aide de l'icône Icône Mode de co-édition Mode de coédition dans l'onglet Collaboration de la barre d'outils supérieure:

                            -

                            Menu Mode de co-édition

                            +

                            Document Editor permet de sélectionner l'un des deux modes de co-édition disponibles :

                            +
                              +
                            • Rapide est utilisé par défaut et affiche les modifications effectuées par d'autres utilisateurs en temps réel.
                            • +
                            • Strict est sélectionné pour masquer les modifications des autres utilisateurs jusqu'à ce que vous cliquiez sur l'icône Enregistrer Icône Enregistrer pour enregistrer vos propres modifications et accepter les modifications apportées par d'autres utilisateurs.
                            • +
                            +

                            Le mode peut être sélectionné dans les Paramètres avancés. Il est également possible de choisir le mode voulu à l'aide de l'icône Icône Mode de co-édition Mode de coédition dans l'onglet Collaboration de la barre d'outils supérieure:

                            +

                            Menu Mode de co-édition

                            +

                            Remarque : lorsque vous co-éditez un document en mode Rapide, la possibilité de Rétablir la dernière opération annulée n'est pas disponible.

                            Lorsqu'un document est en cours de modification par plusieurs utilisateurs simultanément dans le mode Strict, les passages de texte modifiés sont marqués avec des lignes pointillées de couleurs différentes. Pour voir qui est en train d'éditer le fichier au présent, placez le curseur de la souris sur cette icône - les noms des utilisateurs seront affichés dans la fenêtre contextuelle. Le mode Rapide affichera les actions et les noms des co-éditeurs tandis qu'ils modifient le texte.

                            Le nombre d'utilisateurs qui travaillent sur le document actuel est spécifié sur le côté droit de l'en-tête de l'éditeur - Icône Nombre d'utilisateurs. S'il y a trop d'utilisateurs, cliquez sur cette icône pour ouvrir le panneau Chat avec la liste complète affichée.

                            -

                            Quand aucun utilisateur ne consulte ou ne modifie le fichier, l'icône dans l'en-tête de l'éditeur aura cette apparence Icône Gérer les droits d'accès au document et vous permettra de gérer les utilisateurs qui ont accès au fichier : inviter de nouveaux utilisateurs en leur donnant les permissions pour modifier, lire ou réviser le document ou refuser à certains utilisateurs des droits d'accès au fichier. Cliquez sur cette icône pour gérer l'accès au fichier ; cela peut être fait aussi bien lorsqu'il n'y a pas d'autres utilisateurs qui voient ou co-éditent le document pour le moment que quand il y a d'autres utilisateurs. L'icône ressemble à ceci Icône Nombre d'utilisateurs. Il est également possible de définir des droits d'accès à l'aide de l'icône Icône Partage Partage dans l'onglet Collaboration de la barre d'outils supérieure.

                            +

                            Lorsqu'aucun utilisateur ne visualise ou n'édite le fichier, l'icône dans l'en-tête de l'éditeur aura l'aspect suivant Icône Gérer les droits d'accès au document vous permettant de gérer les utilisateurs qui ont accès au fichier directement à partir du document : inviter de nouveaux utilisateurs leur donnant les permissions de modifier, lire, commenter, remplir des formulaires ou réviser le document, ou refuser à certains utilisateurs des droits d'accès au fichier. Cliquez sur cette icône pour gérer l'accès au fichier ; cela peut être fait aussi bien lorsqu'il n'y a pas d'autres utilisateurs qui voient ou co-éditent le document pour le moment que quand il y a d'autres utilisateurs. L'icône ressemble à ceci Icône Nombre d'utilisateurs. Il est également possible de définir des droits d'accès à l'aide de l'icône Icône Partage Partage dans l'onglet Collaboration de la barre d'outils supérieure.

                            Dès que l'un des utilisateurs enregistre ses modifications en cliquant sur l'icône Icône Enregistrer, les autres verront une note dans la barre d'état indiquant qu'il y a des mises à jour. Pour enregistrer les changements effectués et récupérer les mises à jour de vos co-éditeurs cliquez sur l'icône Icône Enregistrer dans le coin supérieur gauche de la barre supérieure. Les mises à jour seront marquées pour vous aider à controller ce qui a été exactement modifié.

                            Vous pouvez spécifier les modifications que vous souhaitez mettre en surbrillance pendant la co-édition si vous cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier dans la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés... et choisissez entre aucune, toutes et récentes modifications de collaboration en temps réel. Quand l'option Afficher toutes les modifications sélectionnée, toutes les modifications effectuées au cours de la session seront mises en surbrillance. En sélectionnant Afficher les modifications récentes, seules les modifications effectuées depuis la dernière fois que vous avez cliqué sur l'icône Icône Enregistrer seront mises en surbrillance. En sélectionnant N'afficher aucune modification, aucune des modifications effectuées au cours de la session ne sera mise en surbrillance.

                            Chat

                            @@ -44,6 +54,7 @@

                            Pour fermer le panneau avec des messages de discussion, cliquez à nouveau sur l'icône Chat dans la barre latérale gauche ou sur le bouton Chat Chat dans la barre d'outils supérieure.

                            Commentaires

                            +

                            Il est possible de travailler avec des commentaires en mode hors ligne, sans se connecter à la version en ligne.

                            Pour laisser un commentaire :

                            1. sélectionnez le fragment du texte que vous voulez commenter,
                            2. diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm index b52d9a6d4..63d7e665a 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm @@ -7,6 +7,8 @@ + +
                              @@ -14,334 +16,641 @@

                              Raccourcis clavier

                              - +
                                +
                              • Windows/Linux
                              • Mac OS
                              • +
                              +
                              - + - - - + + + + - - - + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + - - + + + - - + + + - - - + + + + - - + + + - + + - - + + + - + + - + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + - + - + + - + + - + + - + + + + + + + + + + + + + + - + + - + + - + + - + + - + + - + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + - + - + + - + + - - + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + - + + - + + - + - + + - + + - + - + + - + + - + + - + + - + + - + + - + - + + - + + - + + - + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + - + - + + - + + - + + - + + - + + - + + - + + - + + - + + - - + + + - + + - + + - + + - + + - + + - + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + - + + - + + - - + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + - + - + + - + + - + + + + + + + + - - + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
                              Traitement du documentTraitement du document
                              Ouvrir le volet 'Fichier'Alt+FOuvrir le volet Fichier pour enregistrer, télécharger, imprimer le document actuel, afficher ses informations, créer un nouveau document ou ouvrir un existant, accéder à l'aide de Document Editor ou aux paramètres avancés.Ouvrir le panneau "Fichier"Alt+F⌥ Option+FOuvrir le volet Fichier pour enregistrer, télécharger, imprimer le document actuel, afficher ses informations, créer un nouveau document ou ouvrir un existant, accéder à l'aide de Document Editor ou aux paramètres avancés.
                              Ouvrir le volet 'Recherche'Ctrl+FOuvrir le volet Recherche pour commencer la recherche d'un caractère/mot/expression dans le document en cours d'édition.Ouvrir la fenêtre "Rechercher et remplacer"Ctrl+F^ Ctrl+F,
                              ⌘ Cmd+F
                              Ouvrir la fenêtre Rechercher et remplacer pour commencer à chercher un caractère/mot/phrase dans le document actuellement édité.
                              Ouvrir la fenêtre "Rechercher et remplacer" avec le champ de remplacementCtrl+H^ Ctrl+HOuvrir la fenêtre Rechercher et remplacer avec le champ de remplacement pour remplacer une ou plusieurs occurrences des caractères trouvés.
                              Répéter la dernière action « Rechercher ».⇧ Maj+F4⇧ Maj+F4,
                              ⌘ Cmd+G,
                              ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+F4
                              Répéter l'action de Rechercher qui a été effectuée avant d'appuyer sur la combinaison de touches.
                              Ouvrir le volet 'Commentaires'Ctrl+Shift+HOuvir le panneau "Commentaires"Ctrl+⇧ Maj+H^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+H,
                              ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+H
                              Ouvrir le volet Commentaires pour ajouter votre commentaire ou pour répondre aux commentaires des autres utilisateurs.
                              Ouvrir un champ commentaireAlt+HOuvrir le champ de commentairesAlt+H⌥ Option+H Ouvrir un champ de saisie où vous pouvez ajouter le texte de votre commentaire.
                              Ouvrir le volet 'Discussion instantanée'Alt+QOuvrir le volet Chat et envoyer un message.Ouvrir le panneau "Chat"Alt+Q⌥ Option+QOuvrir le panneau Chat et envoyer un message.
                              Enregistrer le documentCtrl+SEnregistrer toutes les modifications dans le document actuellement modifié à l'aide de Document Editor.Ctrl+S^ Ctrl+S,
                              ⌘ Cmd+S
                              Enregistrer toutes les modifications dans le document actuellement modifié à l'aide de Document Editor. Le fichier actif sera enregistré avec son nom de fichier actuel, son emplacement et son format de fichier.
                              Imprimer le documentCtrl+PCtrl+P^ Ctrl+P,
                              ⌘ Cmd+P
                              Imprimer le document avec l'une des imprimantes disponibles ou l'enregistrer sous forme de fichier.
                              Enregistrer (Télécharger comme)Ctrl+Maj+SEnregistrer le document en cours d'édition sur le disque dur de l'ordinateur dans l'un des formats pris en charge: DOCX, PDF, TXT, ODT, RTF, HTML.Ctrl+⇧ Maj+S^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+S,
                              ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+S
                              Ouvrir l'onglet Télécharger comme pour enregistrer le document actuellement affiché sur le disque dur de l'ordinateur dans l'un des formats pris en charge : DOCX, PDF, ODT, TXT, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, HTML.
                              Plein écranF11F11 Passer à l'affichage plein écran pour adapter Document Editor à votre écran.
                              Menu d'aideF1F1F1 Ouvrir le menu Aide de Document Editor
                              Ouvrir un fichier existant (Desktop Editors)Ctrl+OL’onglet Ouvrir fichier local dans Desktop Editors, ouvre la boîte de dialogue standard qui permet de sélectionner un fichier existant.
                              Fermer un fichier (Desktop Editors)Ctrl+W,
                              Ctrl+F4
                              ^ Ctrl+W,
                              ⌘ Cmd+W
                              Fermer la fenêtre du document en cours de modification dans Desktop Editors.
                              Menu contextuel de l’élément⇧ Maj+F10⇧ Maj+F10Ouvrir le menu contextuel de l'élément sélectionné.
                              NavigationNavigation
                              Sauter au début de la ligneDébutDébutDébut Placer le curseur au début de la ligne en cours d'édition.
                              Sauter au début du documentCtrl+DébutCtrl+Début^ Ctrl+Début Placer le curseur au début du document en cours d'édition.
                              Sauter à la fin de la ligneFinFinFin Placer le curseur à la fin de la ligne en cours d'édition.
                              Sauter à la fin du documentCtrl+FinCtrl+Fin^ Ctrl+Fin Placer le curseur à la fin du document en cours d'édition.
                              Sauter au début de la page précédenteAlt+Ctrl+Pg. précPlacez le curseur au tout début de la page qui précède la page en cours d'édition.
                              Sauter au début de la page suivanteAlt+Ctrl+Pg. suiv⌥ Option+⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+Pg. suivPlacez le curseur au tout début de la page qui suit la page en cours d'édition.
                              Faire défiler vers le basPg. suivPg. suivPg. suiv,
                              ⌥ Option+Fn+
                              Faire défiler le document vers le bas d'une page visible.
                              Faire défiler vers le hautPg. précPg. précPg. préc,
                              ⌥ Option+Fn+
                              Faire défiler le document vers le haut d'une page visible.
                              Page suivanteAlt+Pg.suivAlt+Pg. suiv⌥ Option+Pg. suiv Passer à la page suivante du document en cours d'édition.
                              Page précédenteAlt+Pg.précAlt+Pg. préc⌥ Option+Pg. préc Passer à la page précédente du document en cours d'édition.
                              Zoom avantCtrl++Ctrl++^ Ctrl+=,
                              ⌘ Cmd+=
                              Agrandir le zoom du document en cours d'édition.
                              Zoom arrièreCtrl+-Ctrl+-^ Ctrl+-,
                              ⌘ Cmd+-
                              Réduire le zoom du document en cours d'édition.
                              Déplacer un caractère vers la gaucheDéplacer le curseur d'un caractère vers la gauche.
                              Déplacer un caractère vers la droiteDéplacer le curseur d'un caractère vers la droite.
                              Déplacer vers le début d'un mot ou un mot vers la gaucheCtrl+^ Ctrl+,
                              ⌘ Cmd+
                              Déplacer le curseur au début d'un mot ou d'un mot vers la gauche.
                              Déplacer un caractère vers la droiteCtrl+^ Ctrl+,
                              ⌘ Cmd+
                              Déplacer le curseur d'un mot vers la droite.
                              Déplacer une ligne vers le haut Déplacer le curseur d'une ligne vers le haut.
                              Déplacer une ligne vers le basDéplacer le curseur d'une ligne vers le bas.
                              ÉcritureÉcriture
                              Terminer le paragrapheEntrée↵ Entrée↵ Retour Terminer le paragraphe actuel et commencer un nouveau.
                              Ajouter un saut de ligneMaj+Entrée⇧ Maj+↵ Entrée⇧ Maj+↵ Retour Ajouter un saut de ligne sans commencer un nouveau paragraphe.
                              SupprimerRetour arrière, SupprimerEffacer un caractère à gauche (Retour arrière) ou à droite (Supprimer) du curseur.← Retour arrière,
                              Supprimer
                              ← Retour arrière,
                              Supprimer
                              Supprimer un caractère à gauche (← Retour arrière) ou vers la droite (Supprimer) du curseur.
                              Supprimer le mot à gauche du curseurCtrl+← Retour arrière^ Ctrl+← Retour arrière,
                              ⌘ Cmd+← Retour arrière
                              Supprimer un mot à gauche du curseur.
                              Supprimer le mot à droite du curseurCtrl+Supprimer^ Ctrl+Supprimer,
                              ⌘ Cmd+Supprimer
                              Supprimer un mot à droite du curseur.
                              Créer un espace insécableCtrl+Maj+Barre d'espaceCtrl+⇧ Maj+␣ Barre d'espace^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+␣ Barre d'espace Créer un espace entre les caractères qui ne peuvent pas être utilisés pour passer à la ligne suivante.
                              Créer un trait d'union insécableCtrl+Maj+Trait d'unionCtrl+⇧ Maj+Trait d'union^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+Trait d'union Créer un trait d'union entre les caractères qui ne peuvent pas être utilisés pour passer à la ligne suivante.
                              Annuler et RétablirAnnuler et Rétablir
                              AnnulerCtrl+ZCtrl+Z^ Ctrl+Z,
                              ⌘ Cmd+Z
                              Inverser la dernière action effectuée.
                              RétablirCtrl+YCtrl+Y^ Ctrl+Y,
                              ⌘ Cmd+Y,
                              ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+Z
                              Répéter la dernière action annulée.
                              Couper, Copier et CollerCouper, Copier et Coller
                              CouperCtrl+XCtrl+X,
                              ⇧ Maj+Supprimer
                              ⌘ Cmd+X,
                              ⇧ Maj+Supprimer
                              Supprimer le fragment du texte sélectionné et l'envoyer vers le presse-papiers. Le texte copié peut être inséré ensuite à un autre endroit dans le même document, dans un autre document, ou dans un autre programme.
                              CopierCtrl+C, Ctrl+InserCtrl+C,
                              Ctrl+Inser
                              ⌘ Cmd+C Envoyer le fragment du texte sélectionné et l'envoyer vers le presse-papiers. Le texte copié peut être inséré ensuite à un autre endroit dans le même document, dans un autre document, ou dans un autre programme.
                              CollerCtrl+V, Shift+InserCtrl+V,
                              ⇧ Maj+Inser
                              ⌘ Cmd+V Insérer le fragment du texte précédemment copié du presse-papiers à la position actuelle du texte. Le texte peut être copié précédemment à partir du même document, à partir d'un autre document, ou provenant d'un autre programme.
                              Insérer un lien hypertexteCtrl+KCtrl+K⌘ Cmd+K Insérer un lien hypertexte qui peut être utilisé pour accéder à une adresse web.
                              Copier le styleCtrl+Maj+CCtrl+⇧ Maj+C⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+C Copier la mise en forme du fragment sélectionné du texte en cours d'édition. La mise en forme copiée peut être ensuite appliquée à un autre texte dans le même document.
                              Appliquer le styleCtrl+Maj+VCtrl+⇧ Maj+V⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+V Appliquer la mise en forme précédemment copiée dans le texte du document en cours d'édition.
                              Sélection de texteSélection de texte
                              Sélectionner toutCtrl+ACtrl+A⌘ Cmd+A Sélectionner tout le texte du document avec des tableaux et des images.
                              Sélectionner une plageMaj+Touche de direction⇧ Maj+ ⇧ Maj+ Sélectionner le texte caractère par caractère.
                              Sélectionner depuis le curseur jusqu'au début de la ligneMaj+Début⇧ Maj+Début⇧ Maj+Début Sélectionner le fragment du texte depuis le curseur jusqu'au début de la ligne actuelle.
                              Sélectionner depuis le curseur jusqu'à la fin de la ligneMaj+Fin⇧ Maj+Fin⇧ Maj+Fin Sélectionner le fragment du texte depuis le curseur jusqu'à la fin de la ligne actuelle.
                              Sélectionner un caractère à droite⇧ Maj+⇧ Maj+Sélectionner un caractère à droite de la position du curseur.
                              Sélectionner un caractère à gauche⇧ Maj+⇧ Maj+Sélectionner un caractère à gauche de la position du curseur.
                              Sélectionner jusqu'à la fin d'un motCtrl+⇧ Maj+Sélectionner un fragment de texte depuis le curseur jusqu'à la fin d'un mot.
                              Sélectionner au début d'un motCtrl+⇧ Maj+Sélectionner un fragment de texte depuis le curseur jusqu'au début d'un mot.
                              Sélectionner une ligne vers le haut⇧ Maj+⇧ Maj+Sélectionner une ligne vers le haut (avec le curseur au début d'une ligne).
                              Sélectionner une ligne vers le bas⇧ Maj+⇧ Maj+Sélectionner une ligne vers le bas (avec le curseur au début d'une ligne).
                              Sélectionner la page vers le haut⇧ Maj+Pg. préc⇧ Maj+Pg. précSélectionner la partie de page de la position du curseur à la partie supérieure de l'écran.
                              Sélectionner la page vers le bas⇧ Maj+Pg. suiv⇧ Maj+Pg. suivSélectionner la partie de page de la position du curseur à la partie inférieure de l'écran.
                              Style de texteStyle de texte
                              GrasCtrl+BCtrl+B^ Ctrl+B,
                              ⌘ Cmd+B
                              Mettre la police du fragment de texte sélectionné en gras pour lui donner plus de poids.
                              ItaliqueCtrl+ICtrl+I^ Ctrl+I,
                              ⌘ Cmd+I
                              Mettre la police du fragment de texte sélectionné en italique pour lui donner une certaine inclinaison à droite.
                              SoulignéCtrl+UCtrl+U^ Ctrl+U,
                              ⌘ Cmd+U
                              Souligner le fragment de texte sélectionné avec la ligne qui passe sous les lettres.
                              BarréCtrl+5Ctrl+5^ Ctrl+5,
                              ⌘ Cmd+5
                              Souligner le fragment de texte sélectionné avec la ligne qui passe sous les lettres.
                              IndiceCtrl+point (.)Ctrl+.^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+>,
                              ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+>
                              Rendre le fragment du texte sélectionné plus petit et le placer à la partie inférieure de la ligne du texte, par exemple comme dans les formules chimiques.
                              ExposantCtrl+virgule (,)Ctrl+,^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+<,
                              ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+<
                              Sélectionner le fragment du texte et le placer sur la partie supérieure de la ligne de texte, par exemple comme dans les fractions.
                              Style Titre 1Alt+1 (pour les navigateurs Windows et Linux)
                              Alt+Ctrl+1 (pour les navigateurs Mac)
                              Alt+1⌥ Option+^ Ctrl+1 Appliquer le style Titre 1 au fragment du texte sélectionné.
                              Style Titre 2Alt+2 (pour les navigateurs Windows et Linux)
                              Alt+Ctrl+2 (pour les navigateurs Mac)
                              Alt+2⌥ Option+^ Ctrl+2 Appliquer le style Titre 2 au fragment du texte sélectionné.
                              Style Titre 3Alt+3 (pour les navigateurs Windows et Linux)
                              Alt+Ctrl+3 (pour les navigateurs Mac)
                              Alt+3⌥ Option+^ Ctrl+3 Appliquer le style Titre 3 au fragment du texte sélectionné.
                              Liste à pucesCtrl+Maj+LCréer une liste à puces non numérotée à partir du fragment de texte sélectionné ou créer une nouvelle liste.Ctrl+⇧ Maj+L^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+L,
                              ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+L
                              Créer une liste à puces non numérotée du fragment de texte sélectionné ou créer une nouvelle liste.
                              Supprimer la mise en formeCtrl+EspaceCtrl+␣ Barre d'espace Supprimer la mise en forme du fragment du texte sélectionné.
                              Agrandir la policeCtrl+]Ctrl+]⌘ Cmd+] Augmenter la taille de la police du fragment de texte sélectionné de 1 point.
                              Réduire la policeCtrl+[Ctrl+[⌘ Cmd+[ Réduire la taille de la police du fragment de texte sélectionné de 1 point.
                              Alignement centré/à gaucheCtrl+ECtrl+E^ Ctrl+E,
                              ⌘ Cmd+E
                              Passer de l'alignement centré à l'alignement à gauche.
                              Justifié/à gaucheCtrl+J, Ctrl+LCtrl+J,
                              Ctrl+L
                              ^ Ctrl+J,
                              ⌘ Cmd+J
                              Passer de l'alignement justifié à gauche.
                              Alignement à droite/à gaucheCtrl+RCtrl+R^ Ctrl+R Passer de l'aligné à droite à l'aligné à gauche.
                              Appliquer la mise en forme de l'indice (espacement automatique)Ctrl+=Appliquer la mise en forme d'indice au fragment de texte sélectionné.
                              Appliquer la mise en forme d’exposant (espacement automatique)Ctrl+⇧ Maj++Appliquer la mise en forme d'exposant au fragment de texte sélectionné.
                              Insérer des sauts de pageCtrl+↵ Entrée^ Ctrl+↵ RetourInsérer un saut de page à la position actuelle du curseur.
                              Augmenter le retraitCtrl+MCtrl+M^ Ctrl+M Augmenter le retrait gauche.
                              Réduire le retraitCtrl+Maj+MCtrl+⇧ Maj+M^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+M Diminuer le retrait gauche.
                              Ajouter un numéro de pageCtrl+Maj+PAjouter le numéro de la page actuelle au texte ou au pied de page.Ctrl+⇧ Maj+P^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+PAjoutez le numéro de page actuel à la position actuelle du curseur.
                              Caractères non imprimablesCtrl+⇧ Maj+Num8Afficher ou masque l'affichage des caractères non imprimables.
                              Supprimer un caractère à gauche← Retour arrière← Retour arrièreSupprimer un caractère à gauche du curseur.
                              Supprimer un caractère à droiteSupprimerSupprimerSupprimer un caractère à droite du curseur.
                              Modification des objetsModification des objets
                              Limiter le déplacementMaj+faire glisser⇧ Maj + faire glisser⇧ Maj + faire glisser Limiter le déplacement de l'objet sélectionné horizontalement ou verticalement.
                              Régler une rotation de 15 degrésMaj+faire glisser (lors de la rotation)⇧ Maj + faire glisser (lors de la rotation)⇧ Maj + faire glisser (lors de la rotation) Contraindre une rotation à un angle de 15 degrés.
                              Conserver les proportionsMaj+faire glisser (lors du redimensionnement)⇧ Maj + faire glisser (lors du redimensionnement)⇧ Maj + faire glisser (lors du redimensionnement) Conserver les proportions de l'objet sélectionné lors du redimensionnement.
                              Tracer une ligne droite ou une flèche⇧ Maj + faire glisser (lors du tracé de lignes/flèches)⇧ Maj + faire glisser (lors du tracé de lignes/flèches)Tracer une ligne droite ou une flèche verticale/horizontale/inclinée de 45 degrés.
                              Mouvement par incréments de 1 pixelCtrlMaintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée en faisant glisser et utilisez les flèches pour déplacer l'objet sélectionné d'un pixel à la fois.Ctrl+ Maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée en faisant glisser et utilisez les flèches pour déplacer l'objet sélectionné d'un pixel à la fois.
                              Utilisation des tableaux
                              Passer à la cellule suivante d’une ligne↹ Tab↹ TabAller à la cellule suivante d’une ligne de tableau.
                              Passer à la cellule précédente d’une ligne⇧ Maj+↹ Tab⇧ Maj+↹ TabAller à la cellule précédente d’une ligne de tableau.
                              Passer à la ligne suivanteAller à la ligne suivante d’un tableau.
                              Passer à la ligne précédenteAller à la ligne précédente d’un tableau.
                              Commencer un nouveau paragraphe↵ Entrée↵ RetourCommencer un nouveau paragraphe dans une cellule.
                              Ajouter une nouvelle ligne↹ Tab dans la cellule inférieure droite du tableau.↹ Tab dans la cellule inférieure droite du tableau.Ajouter une nouvelle ligne au bas du tableau.
                              Insertion des caractères spéciaux
                              Insérer une formuleAlt+=Insérer une formule à la position actuelle du curseur.
                              diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm index 41d3c19de..e05b4917c 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm @@ -16,18 +16,18 @@

                              Paramètres d'affichage et outils de navigation

                              Document Editor est doté de plusieurs outils qui vous aide à visionner et naviguer à travers votre document : les règles, le zoom, les boutons page précédente / suivante, l'affichage des numéros de page.

                              Régler les paramètres d'affichage

                              -

                              Pour régler les paramètres d'affichage par défaut et définir le mode le plus convenable pour travailler avec le document, passez à l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres d'affichage Icône Paramètres d'affichage dans le coin supérieur droit et sélectionnez les éléments de l'interface à afficher/masquer. Vous pouvez choisir une des options suivantes de la liste déroulante Paramètres d'affichage :

                              +

                              Pour ajuster les paramètres d'affichage par défaut et définir le mode le plus pratique pour travailler avec le document, cliquez sur le bouton cliquez sur l'icône Afficher les paramètres Icône Paramètres d'affichage située sur le côté droit de l'en-tête de l'éditeur et sélectionnez les éléments d'interface que vous souhaitez masquer ou afficher. Vous pouvez choisir une des options suivantes de la liste déroulante Afficher les paramètres :

                                -
                              • Masquer la barre d'outils - masque la barre d'outils supérieure contenant les commandes pendant que les onglets restent visibles. Lorsque cette option est activée, vous pouvez cliquer sur n'importe quel onglet pour afficher la barre d'outils. La barre d'outils s'affiche jusqu'à ce que vous cliquiez ailleurs.
                                Pour désactiver ce mode, passez à l'onglet Accueil, puis cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres d'affichage Icône Paramètres d'affichage et cliquez de nouveau sur l'option Masquer la barre d'outils. La barre d'outils supérieure sera affichée tout le temps.

                                Remarque : vous pouvez également double-cliquer sur un onglet pour masquer la barre d'outils supérieure ou l'afficher à nouveau.

                                +
                              • Masquer la barre d'outils - masque la barre d'outils supérieure contenant les commandes pendant que les onglets restent visibles. Lorsque cette option est activée, vous pouvez cliquer sur n'importe quel onglet pour afficher la barre d'outils. La barre d'outils s'affiche jusqu'à ce que vous cliquiez ailleurs.
                                Pour désactiver ce mode, cliquez sur l’icône Afficher les paramètres Icône Paramètres d'affichage puis cliquez de nouveau sur l'option Masquer la barre d'outils. La barre d'outils supérieure sera affichée tout le temps.

                                Remarque : vous pouvez également double-cliquer sur un onglet pour masquer la barre d'outils supérieure ou l'afficher à nouveau.

                              • Masquer la barre d'état sert à masquer la barre qui se situe tout en bas avec les boutons Affichage des numéros de page et Zoom. Pour afficher la Barre d'état masquée cliquez sur cette option encore une fois.
                              • Masquer les règles - masque les règles qui sont utilisées pour aligner le texte, les graphiques, les tableaux et d'autres éléments dans un document, définir des marges, des tabulations et des retraits de paragraphe. Pour afficher les Règles masquées cliquez sur cette option encore une fois.
                              -

                              La barre latérale droite est minimisée par défaut. Pour l'agrandir, sélectionnez un objet (par exemple, image, graphique, forme) ou un passage de texte et cliquez sur l'icône de l'onglet actuellement activé sur la droite. Pour réduire la barre latérale droite, cliquez à nouveau sur l'icône.

                              -

                              Quand le panneau Commentaires ou Chat est ouvert, vous pouvez régler la largeur de la barre gauche avec un simple glisser-déposer : placez le curseur de la souris sur la bordure gauche de la barre latérale. Pour rétablir sa largeur originale faites glisser le bord à droite.

                              +

                              La barre latérale droite est réduite par défaut. Pour l'agrandir, sélectionnez un objet (par exemple, image, graphique, forme) ou un passage de texte et cliquez sur l'icône de l'onglet actuellement activé sur la droite. Pour réduire la barre latérale droite, cliquez à nouveau sur l'icône.

                              +

                              Quand le panneau Commentaires ou Chat est ouvert, vous pouvez régler la largeur de la barre gauche avec un simple glisser-déposer : placez le curseur de la souris sur la bordure gauche de la barre latérale. Pour rétablir sa largeur originale faites glisser le bord à droite.

                              Utiliser les outils de navigation

                              Pour naviguer à travers votre document, utilisez les outils suivants :

                              -

                              Les boutons Zoom sont situés en bas à droite et sont utilisés pour faire un zoom avant et arrière dans le document actif. Pour modifier la valeur de zoom actuellement sélectionnée qui s'affiche en pourcentage, cliquez dessus et sélectionnez l'une des options de zoom disponibles à partir de la liste ou utilisez les boutons Zoom avant Bouton Zoom avant ou Zoom arrière Bouton Zoom arrière. Cliquez sur l'icône Ajuster à la largeur Bouton Ajuster à la largeur pour adapter la largeur de la page du document à la partie visible de la zone de travail. Pour adapter la page entière du document à la partie visible de la zone de travail, cliquez sur l'icône Ajuster à la page bouton Ajuster à la largeur. Les paramètres de zoom sont également disponibles dans la liste déroulante Paramètres d'affichage Icône Paramètres d'affichage ce qui peut être utile si vous décidez de masquer la Barre d'état.

                              +

                              Les boutons Zoom sont situés en bas à droite et sont utilisés pour faire un zoom avant et arrière dans le document actif. Pour modifier la valeur de zoom sélectionnée en pourcentage, cliquez dessus et sélectionnez l'une des options de zoom disponibles dans la liste ou utilisez les boutons Zoom avant Bouton Zoom avant ou Zoom arrière Bouton Zoom arrière. Cliquez sur l'icône Ajuster à la largeur Bouton Ajuster à la largeur pour adapter la largeur de la page du document à la partie visible de la zone de travail. Pour adapter la page entière du document à la partie visible de la zone de travail, cliquez sur l'icône Ajuster à la page bouton Ajuster à la largeur. Les paramètres de Zoom sont également disponibles dans la liste déroulante Paramètres d'affichage Icône Paramètres d'affichage qui peuvent être bien utiles si vous décidez de masquer la Barre d'état.

                              L'Indicateur de numéros de page affiche la page active dans l'ensemble des pages du document actif (page 'n' sur 'nn'). Cliquez sur ce libellé pour ouvrir la fenêtre où vous pouvez entrer le numéro de la page et y accéder rapidement.

                              diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm index 86206c7dc..702d7c7c4 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm @@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ DOC L'extension de nom de fichier pour les documents du traitement textuel créé avec Microsoft Word + - + + @@ -37,6 +37,13 @@ + + + + DOTX + Word Open XML Document Template
                              Format de fichier zippé, basé sur XML, développé par Microsoft pour les modèles de documents texte. Un modèle DOTX contient des paramètres de mise en forme, des styles, etc. et peut être utilisé pour créer plusieurs documents avec la même mise en forme. + + + + + + + ODT Le format de fichier du traitement textuel d'OpenDocument, le standard ouvert pour les documents électroniques @@ -44,6 +51,13 @@ + + + + OTT + OpenDocument Document Template
                              Format de fichier OpenDocument pour les modèles de document texte. Un modèle OTT contient des paramètres de mise en forme, des styles, etc. et peut être utilisé pour créer plusieurs documents avec la même mise en forme. + + + + + + + RTF Rich Text Format
                              Le format de fichier du document développé par Microsoft pour la multiplateforme d'échange des documents @@ -65,12 +79,19 @@ + + + PDF/A + Portable Document Format / A
                              Une version normalisée ISO du format PDF (Portable Document Format) conçue pour l'archivage et la conservation à long terme des documents électroniques. + + + + + + HTML HyperText Markup Language
                              Le principale langage de balisage pour les pages web - - + + + + dans la version en ligne EPUB diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm index 6c0009d45..c4efa6904 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm @@ -15,16 +15,24 @@

                              Onglet Fichier

                              L'onglet Fichier permet d'effectuer certaines opérations de base sur le fichier en cours.

                              -

                              Onglet Fichier

                              -

                              Dans cet onglet vous pouvez :

                              +
                              +

                              Fenêtre de l'éditeur en ligne Document Editor :

                              +

                              Onglet Fichier

                              +
                              +
                              +

                              Fenêtre de l'éditeur de bureau Document Editor :

                              +

                              Onglet Fichier

                              +
                              +

                              En utilisant cet onglet, vous pouvez :

                                -
                              • enregistrer le fichier actuel (au cas où l'option Sauvegarde automatique est désactivée), le télécharger, l'imprimer ou le renommer,
                              • -
                              • créer un nouveau document ou ouvrir un document récemment modifié,
                              • +
                              • dans la version en ligne, enregistrer le fichier actuel (si l'option Enregistrement automatique est désactivée), télécharger comme (enregistrer le document dans le format sélectionné sur le disque dur de l'ordinateur), enregistrer la copie sous (enregistrer une copie du document dans le format sélectionné dans les documents du portail), imprimer ou renommer le fichier actuel, dans la version bureau, enregistrer le fichier actuel en conservant le format et l'emplacement actuels à l'aide de l'option Enregistrer ou enregistrer le fichier actuel avec un nom, un emplacement ou un format différent à l'aide de l'option Enregistrer sous, imprimer le fichier.
                              • +
                              • protéger le fichier à l'aide d'un mot de passe, modifier ou supprimer le mot de passe (disponible dans la version de bureau uniquement);
                              • +
                              • créer un nouveau document ou en ouvrir un récemment édité (disponible dans la version en ligne uniquement),
                              • voir des informations générales sur le document,
                              • -
                              • gérer les droits d'accès,
                              • -
                              • suivre l'historique des versions,
                              • -
                              • accéder aux paramètres avancés de l'éditeur,
                              • -
                              • retourner à la liste des documents.
                              • +
                              • gérer les droits d'accès (disponible uniquement dans la version en ligne),
                              • +
                              • suivre l’historique des versions (disponible uniquement dans la version en ligne),
                              • +
                              • accéder aux Paramètres avancés de l'éditeur,
                              • +
                              • dans la version de bureau, ouvrez le dossier où le fichier est stocké dans la fenêtre Explorateur de fichiers. Dans la version en ligne, ouvrez le dossier du module Documents où le fichier est stocké dans un nouvel onglet du navigateur.
                              diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/HomeTab.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/HomeTab.htm index d6ddf03a9..4feacab79 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/HomeTab.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/HomeTab.htm @@ -14,9 +14,16 @@

                              Onglet Accueil

                              -

                              L'onglet Accueil s'ouvre par défaut lorsque vous ouvrez un document. Il permet de formater la police et les paragraphes. D'autres options sont également disponibles ici, telles que Publipostage, schémas de couleurs, paramètres d'affichage.

                              -

                              Onglet Accueil

                              -

                              Dans cet onglet vous pouvez :

                              +

                              L'onglet Accueil s'ouvre par défaut lorsque vous ouvrez un document. Il permet de formater la police et les paragraphes. D'autres options sont également disponibles ici, telles que Fusion et publipostage et les agencements de couleurs.

                              +
                              +

                              Fenêtre de l'éditeur en ligne Document Editor :

                              +

                              Onglet Accueil

                              +
                              +
                              +

                              Fenêtre de l'éditeur de bureau Document Editor :

                              +

                              Onglet Accueil

                              +
                              +

                              En utilisant cet onglet, vous pouvez :

                              diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/InsertTab.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/InsertTab.htm index ecd424300..e2e8f98de 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/InsertTab.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/InsertTab.htm @@ -15,9 +15,17 @@

                              Onglet Insertion

                              L'onglet Insertion permet d'ajouter des éléments de mise en page, ainsi que des objets visuels et des commentaires.

                              -

                              Onglet Insertion

                              +
                              +

                              Fenêtre de l'éditeur en ligne Document Editor :

                              +

                              Onglet Insertion

                              +
                              +
                              +

                              Fenêtre de l'éditeur de bureau Document Editor :

                              +

                              Onglet Insertion

                              +

                              En utilisant cet onglet, vous pouvez :

                                +
                              • insérer une page vierge,
                              • insérer des sauts de page, des sauts de section et des sauts de colonne,
                              • insérer des en-têtes et pieds de page et des numéros de page,
                              • insérer des tableaux, des images, des graphiques, des formes,
                              • diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/LayoutTab.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/LayoutTab.htm index 1fb6304f6..61832d345 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/LayoutTab.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/LayoutTab.htm @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@  - Onglet Disposition + Onglet Mise en page - + @@ -13,10 +13,17 @@
                                -

                                Onglet Disposition

                                -

                                L'onglet Disposition permet de modifier l'apparence du document : configurer les paramètres de la page et définir la disposition des éléments visuels.

                                -

                                Onglet Disposition

                                -

                                Dans cet onglet vous pouvez :

                                +

                                Onglet Mise en page

                                +

                                L'onglet Mise en page permet de modifier l'apparence du document : configurer les paramètres de la page et définir la disposition des éléments visuels.

                                +
                                +

                                Fenêtre de l'éditeur en ligne Document Editor :

                                +

                                Onglet Mise en page

                                +
                                +
                                +

                                Fenêtre de l'éditeur de bureau Document Editor :

                                +

                                Onglet Mise en page

                                +
                                +

                                En utilisant cet onglet, vous pouvez :

                                • ajuster les marges, l'orientation, la taille de la page,
                                • ajouter des colonnes,
                                • diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm index 204a1eea5..52ebc08c2 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm @@ -14,20 +14,30 @@

                                  Onglet Modules complémentaires

                                  -

                                  L'onglet Modules complémentaires permet d'accéder à des fonctions d'édition avancées à l'aide de composants tiers disponibles. Ici vous pouvez également utiliser des macros pour simplifier les opérations de routine.

                                  -

                                  Onglet Modules complémentaires

                                  -

                                  Le bouton Macros permet d'ouvrir la fenêtre où vous pouvez créer vos propres macros et les exécuter. Pour en savoir plus sur les macros vous pouvez vous référer à la documentation de notre API.

                                  +

                                  L'onglet Modules complémentaires permet d'accéder à des fonctions d'édition avancées à l'aide de composants tiers disponibles. Ici vous pouvez également utiliser des macros pour simplifier les opérations de routine.

                                  +
                                  +

                                  Fenêtre de l'éditeur en ligne Document Editor :

                                  +

                                  Onglet Modules complémentaires

                                  +
                                  +
                                  +

                                  Fenêtre de l'éditeur de bureau Document Editor :

                                  +

                                  Onglet Modules complémentaires

                                  +
                                  +

                                  Le bouton Paramètres permet d'ouvrir la fenêtre où vous pouvez visualiser et gérer tous les modules complémentaires installés et ajouter vos propres modules.

                                  +

                                  Le bouton Macros permet d'ouvrir la fenêtre où vous pouvez créer vos propres macros et les exécuter. Pour en savoir plus sur les macros, veuillez vous référer à la documentation de notre API.

                                  Actuellement, les modules suivants sont disponibles :

                                  • ClipArt permet d'ajouter des images de la collection clipart dans votre document,
                                  • +
                                  • Code en surbrillance permet de surligner la syntaxe du code en sélectionnant la langue, le style, la couleur de fond appropriés,
                                  • ROC permet de reconnaître le texte inclus dans une image et l'insérer dans le texte du document,
                                  • -
                                  • Éditeur photo permet d'éditer des images: recadrer, redimensionner, appliquer des effets, etc.
                                  • -
                                  • Synthèse vocale permet de convertir le texte sélectionné en paroles,
                                  • +
                                  • Éditeur photo permet d'éditer des images : recadrer, redimensionner, appliquer des effets, etc.
                                  • +
                                  • Synthèse vocale permet de convertir le texte sélectionné en paroles,
                                  • Table de symboles permet d'insérer des symboles spéciaux dans votre texte,
                                  • +
                                  • Dictionnaire des synonymes permet de rechercher les synonymes et les antonymes d'un mot et de le remplacer par le mot sélectionné,
                                  • Traducteur permet de traduire le texte sélectionné dans d'autres langues,
                                  • YouTube permet d'intégrer des vidéos YouTube dans votre document.
                                  -

                                  Les modules Wordpress et EasyBib peuvent être utilisés si vous connectez les services correspondants dans les paramètres de votre portail. Vous pouvez utiliser les instructions suivantes pour la version serveur ou pour la version SaaS.

                                  +

                                  Les modules Wordpress et EasyBib peuvent être utilisés si vous connectez les services correspondants dans les paramètres de votre portail. Vous pouvez utiliser les instructions suivantes pour la version serveur ou pour la version SaaS.

                                  Pour en savoir plus sur les modules complémentaires, veuillez vous référer à la documentation de notre API. Tous les exemples de modules open source actuellement disponibles sont disponibles sur GitHub.

                                  diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm index 4a73bdfee..ac21ac4de 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm @@ -15,16 +15,35 @@

                                  Présentation de l'interface de Document Editor

                                  Document Editor utilise une interface à onglets où les commandes d'édition sont regroupées en onglets par fonctionnalité.

                                  -

                                  Fenêtre de l'éditeur

                                  +
                                  +

                                  Fenêtre de l'éditeur en ligne Document Editor :

                                  +

                                  Fenêtre de l'éditeur en ligne Document Editor

                                  +
                                  +
                                  +

                                  Fenêtre de l'éditeur de bureau Document Editor :

                                  +

                                  Fenêtre de l'éditeur de bureau Document Editor

                                  +

                                  L'interface de l'éditeur est composée des éléments principaux suivants :

                                    -
                                  1. L'En-tête de l'éditeur affiche le logo, les onglets de menu, le nom du document ainsi que trois icônes sur la droite qui permettent de définir les droits d'accès, de revenir à la liste des documents, de modifier les Paramètres d'affichage et d’accéder aux Paramètres avancés de l'éditeur.

                                    Icônes dans l'en-tête de l'éditeur

                                    +
                                  2. L’en-tête de l'éditeur affiche le logo, les onglets des documents ouverts, le nom du document et les onglets du menu.

                                    Dans la partie gauche de l'en-tête de l'éditeur se trouvent les boutons Enregistrer, Imprimer le fichier, Annuler et Rétablir.

                                    +

                                    Icônes dans l'en-tête de l'éditeur

                                    +

                                    Dans la partie droite de l'en-tête de l'éditeur, le nom de l'utilisateur est affiché ainsi que les icônes suivantes :

                                    +
                                      +
                                    • Ouvrir l’emplacement du fichier Ouvrir l'emplacement du fichier - dans la version de bureau, elle permet d'ouvrir le dossier où le fichier est stocké dans la fenêtre de l'Explorateur de fichiers. Dans la version en ligne, elle permet d'ouvrir le dossier du module Documents où le fichier est stocké dans un nouvel onglet du navigateur.
                                    • +
                                    • Icône Paramètres d'affichage- permet d’ajuster les Paramètres d'affichage et d’accéder aux Paramètres avancés de l'éditeur.
                                    • +
                                    • Icône Gérer les droits d'accès au document Gérer les droits d'accès au document - (disponible uniquement dans la version en ligne) permet de définir les droits d'accès aux documents stockés dans le cloud.
                                    • +
                                  3. -
                                  4. La Barre d'outils supérieure affiche un ensemble de commandes d'édition en fonction de l'onglet de menu sélectionné. Actuellement, les onglets suivants sont disponibles : Fichier, Accueil, Insertion, Disposition, Références, Collaboration, Modules complémentaires.

                                    Les options Imprimer, Enregistrer, Copier, Coller, Annuler et Rétablir sont toujours disponibles dans la partie gauche de la Barre d'outils supérieure, quel que soit l'onglet sélectionné.

                                    -

                                    Icônes dans la barre d'outils supérieure

                                    +
                                  5. La Barre d'outils supérieure affiche un ensemble de commandes d'édition en fonction de l'onglet de menu sélectionné. Actuellement, les onglets suivants sont disponibles : Fichier, Accueil, Insertion, Disposition, Références, Collaboration, Protection, Modules complémentaires.

                                    Les options Icône Copier Copier, et Icône Coller Coller sont toujours disponibles dans la partie gauche de la Barre d'outils supérieure, quel que soit l'onglet sélectionné.

                                  6. La Barre d'état au bas de la fenêtre de l'éditeur contient l'indicateur du numéro de page, affiche certaines notifications (telles que "Toutes les modifications sauvegardées", etc.), permet de définir la langue du texte, activer la vérification orthographique, activer le mode suivi des modifications, régler le zoom.
                                  7. -
                                  8. La Barre latérale gauche contient des icônes qui permettent d'utiliser l'outil de Recherche, d'ouvrir les panneaux Commentaires, Discussion et Navigation, de contacter notre équipe de support et d'afficher les informations sur le programme.
                                  9. +
                                  10. La barre latérale gauche contient les icônes suivantes :
                                      +
                                    • Icône Recherche - permet d'utiliser l'outil Rechercher et remplacer,
                                    • +
                                    • Icône Commentaires - permet d'ouvrir le panneau Commentaires,
                                    • +
                                    • Icône Navigation - permet d'accéder au panneau de Navigation et de gérer les rubriques,
                                    • +
                                    • Chat - (disponible dans la version en ligne seulement) permet d'ouvrir le panneau de Chat, ainsi que les icônes qui permettent de contacter notre équipe de support et de visualiser les informations sur le programme.
                                    • +
                                    +
                                  11. La barre latérale droite permet d'ajuster les paramètres supplémentaires de différents objets. Lorsque vous sélectionnez un objet particulier dans le texte, l'icône correspondante est activée dans la barre latérale droite. Cliquez sur cette icône pour développer la barre latérale droite.
                                  12. Les Règles horizontales et verticales permettent d'aligner le texte et d'autres éléments dans un document, définir des marges, des taquets et des retraits de paragraphe.
                                  13. La Zone de travail permet d'afficher le contenu du document, d'entrer et de modifier les données.
                                  14. diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/ReferencesTab.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/ReferencesTab.htm index c69fa8c82..08b4a9879 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/ReferencesTab.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/ReferencesTab.htm @@ -15,12 +15,20 @@

                                    Onglet Références

                                    L'onglet Références permet de gérer différents types de références: ajouter et rafraîchir une table des matières, créer et éditer des notes de bas de page, insérer des hyperliens.

                                    -

                                    Onglet Références

                                    +
                                    +

                                    Fenêtre de l'éditeur en ligne Document Editor :

                                    +

                                    Onglet Références

                                    +
                                    +
                                    +

                                    Fenêtre de l'éditeur de bureau Document Editor :

                                    +

                                    Onglet Références

                                    +

                                    En utilisant cet onglet, vous pouvez :

                                    diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/ReviewTab.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/ReviewTab.htm index 3dd495d48..b5306bdab 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/ReviewTab.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/ProgramInterface/ReviewTab.htm @@ -14,18 +14,25 @@

                                    Onglet Collaboration

                                    -

                                    L'onglet Collaboration permet d'organiser le travail collaboratif sur le document: partage du fichier, sélection d'un mode de co-édition, gestion des commentaires, suivi des modifications effectuées par un réviseur, affichage de toutes les versions et révisions.

                                    -

                                    Onglet Collaboration

                                    +

                                    L'onglet Collaboration permet d'organiser le travail collaboratif sur le document. Dans la version en ligne, vous pouvez partager le fichier, sélectionner un mode de co-édition, gérer les commentaires, suivre les modifications apportées par un réviseur, visualiser toutes les versions et révisions. Dans la version de bureau, vous pouvez gérer les commentaires et utiliser la fonction Suivi des modifications.

                                    +
                                    +

                                    Fenêtre de l'éditeur en ligne Document Editor :

                                    +

                                    Onglet Collaboration

                                    +
                                    +
                                    +

                                    Fenêtre de l'éditeur de bureau Document Editor :

                                    +

                                    Onglet Collaboration

                                    +

                                    En utilisant cet onglet, vous pouvez :

                                    diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/AddCaption.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/AddCaption.htm new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1f01b64ea --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/AddCaption.htm @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + Ajouter une légende + + + + + + + +
                                    +
                                    + +
                                    +

                                    Ajouter une légende

                                    +

                                    La légende est une étiquette agrafée que vous pouvez appliquer à un objet, comme des tableaux d’équations, des figures et des images dans vos documents.

                                    +

                                    Cela facilite la référence dans votre texte car il y a une étiquette facilement reconnaissable sur votre objet.

                                    +

                                    Pour ajouter une légende à un objet:

                                    +
                                      +
                                    • Sélectionnez l’objet à appliquer une légende;
                                    • +
                                    • Passez à l’onglet Références de la barre d’outils supérieure;
                                    • +
                                    • + Cliquez sur Légende l’icône Légende sur la barre d’outils supérieure ou cliquez avec le bouton droit sur l’objet et sélectionnez l’option Insérer une légende pour ouvrir la fenêtre de dialogue Insérer une légende +
                                        +
                                      • Choisissez l’étiquette à utiliser pour votre légende en choisissant l’objet de la liste déroulante d’étiquette, ou
                                      • +
                                      • Créez une nouvelle étiquette en cliquant sur le bouton Ajouter. Saisissez un nom pour l’étiquette dans le champs. Cliquez ensuite sur le bouton OK pour ajouter une nouvelle;
                                      • +
                                      +
                                    • Cochez la case Inclure le numéro de chapitre pour modifier la numérotation de votre légende;
                                    • +
                                    • Du menu déroulant Insérer, choisissez Avant pour placer l’étiquette au-dessus de l’objet ou Après pour placer sous l’objet;
                                    • +
                                    • Cochez la case Exclure le de la légende pour n’avoir qu’un numéro pour cette légende particulière conformément à un numéro de séquence.
                                    • +
                                    • Vous pouvez ensuite choisir le numéro de votre légende en attribuant un style spécifique à la légende et en ajoutant un séparateur;
                                    • +
                                    • Pour appliquer la légende, cliquez sur le bouton OK.
                                    • +
                                    +

                                    Insérer une légende

                                    +

                                    Supprimer une étiquette

                                    +

                                    Pour supprimer une étiquette que vous avez créée, choisissez l’étiquette dans la liste des étiquettes dans la fenêtre de légende, puis cliquez sur le bouton Supprimer. L’étiquette que vous avez créée sera immédiatement supprimée.

                                    +

                                    Remarque:vous pouvez supprimer les étiquettes que vous avez créées mais vous ne pouvez pas supprimer les étiquettes par défaut.

                                    +

                                    Mettre en forme des légendes

                                    +

                                    Dès que vous ajoutez une légende, un nouveau style de légende est automatiquement ajouté à la section. Afin de changer le style de toutes les légendes dans le document, suivez ces étapes:

                                    +
                                      +
                                    • Sélectionnez le texte à partir duquel le nouveau style de Légende sera copié;
                                    • +
                                    • Recherchez le style de Légende (surligné en bleu par défaut) dans la galerie de styles que vous pouvez trouver sur l’onglet Accueil de la barre d’outils supérieure;
                                    • +
                                    • Cliquez droit et choisissez l’option Mettre à jour à partir de la sélection.
                                    • +
                                    +

                                    Sélection

                                    +

                                    Regrouper des sous-titres

                                    +

                                    Si vous souhaitez pouvoir déplacer l’objet et la légende ensemble, il est nécessaire de regrouper l’objet et la légende.

                                    +
                                      +
                                    • Sélectionnez l’objet;
                                    • +
                                    • Sélectionnez l’un des styles d’habillage à l’aide de la barre latérale droite;
                                    • +
                                    • Ajoutez la légende comme mentionnée ci-dessus;
                                    • +
                                    • Maintenez la touche Maj enfoncée et sélectionnez les éléments que vous souhaitez regrouper;
                                    • +
                                    • Faites un clic droit sur l’un des éléments, choisissez Réorganiser > Grouper.
                                    • +
                                    +

                                    Grouper

                                    +

                                    Maintenant, les deux éléments se déplaceront simultanément si vous les faites glisser quelque part ailleurs dans le texte.

                                    +

                                    Pour dissocier l’objet, cliquez respectivement sur Réorganiser > Dissocier.

                                    +
                                    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/AddFormulasInTables.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/AddFormulasInTables.htm new file mode 100644 index 000000000..29487ef84 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/AddFormulasInTables.htm @@ -0,0 +1,166 @@ + + + + Utiliser des formules dans les tableaux + + + + + + + +
                                    +
                                    + +
                                    +

                                    Utiliser des formules dans les tableaux

                                    +

                                    Insérer une formule

                                    +

                                    Vous pouvez effectuer des calculs simples sur les données des cellules de table en ajoutant des formules. Pour insérer une formule dans une cellule du tableau,

                                    +
                                      +
                                    1. placez le curseur dans la cellule où vous voulez afficher le résultat,
                                    2. +
                                    3. cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter une formule dans la barre latérale de droite,
                                    4. +
                                    5. dans la fenêtre Paramètres de formule qui s'ouvre, saisissez la formule nécessaire dans la zone Formule.

                                      Vous pouvez saisir une formule manuellement à l'aide des opérateurs mathématiques courants (+, -, *, /), par exemple =A1*B2 ou utiliser la liste déroulante Coller une fonction pour sélectionner une des fonctions intégrées, par exemple =PRODUIT(A1,B2).

                                      +

                                      Ajouter une formule

                                      +
                                    6. +
                                    7. spécifier manuellement les arguments nécessaires entre parenthèses dans le champ Formule. Si la fonction nécessite plusieurs arguments, ils doivent être séparés par des virgules.
                                    8. +
                                    9. utilisez la liste déroulante Format de nombre si vous voulez afficher le résultat dans un certain format numérique,
                                    10. +
                                    11. cliquez sur OK.
                                    12. +
                                    +

                                    Le résultat sera affiché dans la cellule sélectionnée.

                                    +

                                    Pour modifier la formule ajoutée, sélectionnez le résultat dans la cellule et cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter une formule dans la barre latérale droite, effectuez les modifications nécessaires dans la fenêtre Paramètres de formule et cliquez sur OK.

                                    +
                                    +

                                    Ajouter des références aux cellules

                                    +

                                    Vous pouvez utiliser les arguments suivants pour ajouter rapidement des références à des plages de cellules :

                                    +
                                      +
                                    • HAUT - une référence à toutes les cellules de la colonne au-dessus de la cellule sélectionnée
                                    • +
                                    • GAUCHE - une référence à toutes les cellules de la ligne située à gauche de la cellule sélectionnée
                                    • +
                                    • BAS - une référence à toutes les cellules de la colonne sous la cellule sélectionnée
                                    • +
                                    • DROITE - une référence à toutes les cellules de la ligne à droite de la cellule sélectionnée
                                    • +
                                    +

                                    Ces arguments peuvent être utilisés avec les fonctions MOYENNE, NB, MAX, MIN, PRODUIT, SOMME.

                                    +

                                    Vous pouvez également saisir manuellement des références à une cellule donnée (par exemple, A1) ou à une plage de cellules (par exemple, A1:B3).

                                    +

                                    Utiliser des marque-pages

                                    +

                                    Si vous avez ajouté des marque-pages à certaines cellules de votre tableau, vous pouvez utiliser ces marque-pages comme arguments lorsque vous saisissez des formules.

                                    +

                                    Dans la fenêtre Paramètres de formule, placez le curseur entre parenthèses dans la zone de saisie du champ Formule où vous voulez que l'argument soit ajouté et utilisez la liste déroulante Insérer le marque-pages pour sélectionner un des marque-pages préalablement ajoutés.

                                    +

                                    Mise à jour des résultats de la formule

                                    +

                                    Si vous modifiez certaines valeurs dans les cellules du tableau, vous devez mettre à jour manuellement les résultats de formule :

                                    +
                                      +
                                    • Pour mettre à jour un résultat de formule unique, sélectionnez le résultat nécessaire et appuyez sur F9 ou cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le résultat et utilisez l'option Mettre à jour un champ dans le menu.
                                    • +
                                    • Pour mettre à jour plusieurs résultats de formule, sélectionnez les cellules nécessaires ou la table entière et appuyez sur F9.
                                    • +
                                    +
                                    +

                                    Fonctions intégrées

                                    +

                                    Vous pouvez utiliser les fonctions mathématiques, statistiques et logiques standard suivantes :

                                    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
                                    CatégorieFonctionsDescriptionExemple
                                    MathématiqueABS(nombre)La fonction est utilisée pour afficher la valeur absolue d'un nombre.=ABS(-10)
                                    Renvoie 10
                                    LogiqueET(logical1, logical2, ...)La fonction sert à vérifier si la valeur logique saisie est VRAI ou FAUX. La fonction affiche 1 (VRAI) si tous les arguments sont VRAI=ET(1>0,1>3)
                                    Renvoie 0
                                    StatistiqueMOYENNE(argument-list)La fonction est utilisée pour analyser la plage de données et trouver la valeur moyenne..=MOYENNE(4,10)
                                    Renvoie 7
                                    StatistiqueNB(plage)La fonction est utilisée pour compter le nombre de cellules sélectionnées qui contiennent des nombres en ignorant les cellules vides ou avec du texte.=NB(A1:B3)
                                    Renvoie 6
                                    LogiqueDEFINED()La fonction évalue si une valeur est définie dans la cellule. La fonction renvoie 1 si la valeur est définie et calculée sans erreur et renvoie 0 si la valeur n'est pas définie ou calculée avec erreur.=DEFINED(A1)
                                    LogiqueFAUX()La fonction renvoie 0 (FAUX) et ne nécessite pas d’argument.=FAUX
                                    Renvoie 0
                                    MathématiqueENT(nombre)La fonction est utilisée pour analyser et retourner la partie entière du nombre spécifié.=ENT(2,5)
                                    Renvoie 2
                                    StatistiqueMAX(number1, number2, ...)La fonction est utilisée pour analyser la plage de données et trouver le plus grand nombre.=MAX(15,18,6)
                                    Renvoie 18
                                    StatistiqueMIN(number1, number2, ...)La fonction est utilisée pour analyser la plage de données et trouver le plus petit nombre.=MIN(15,18,3)
                                    Renvoie 6
                                    MathématiqueMOD(x, y)La fonction est utilisée pour retourner le reste après la division d'un nombre par le diviseur spécifié.=MOD(6,3)
                                    Renvoie 0
                                    LogiquePAS(logical)La fonction sert à vérifier si la valeur logique saisie est VRAI ou FAUX. La fonction retourne 1 (VRAI) si l'argument est FAUX et 0 (FAUX) si l'argument est VRAI.=PAS(2<5)
                                    Renvoie 0
                                    LogiqueOU(logical1, logical2, ...)La fonction sert à vérifier si la valeur logique saisie est VRAI ou FAUX. La fonction renvoie faux 0 (FAUX) si tous les arguments sont FAUX.=OU(1>0,1>3)
                                    Renvoie 1
                                    MathématiquePRODUIT(number1, number2, ...)La fonction est utilisée pour multiplier tous les nombres dans la plage de cellules sélectionnée et renvoyer le produit.=PRODUIT(2,5)
                                    Renvoie 10
                                    MathématiqueARRONDI(number, num_digits)La fonction est utilisée pour arrondir un nombre à un nombre de décimales spécifié.=ARRONDI(2,25,3)
                                    Renvoie 2,3
                                    MathématiqueSIGNE(number)La fonction est utilisée pour renvoyer le signe d’un nombre. Si le nombre est positif, la fonction renvoie 1. Si le nombre est négatif, la fonction renvoie -1. Si le nombre est 0, la fonction renvoie 0.=SIGNE(-12)
                                    Renvoie -1
                                    MathématiqueSOMME(number1, number2, ...)La fonction est utilisée pour additionner tous les nombres contenus dans une plage de cellules et renvoyer le résultat.=SOMME(5,3,3)
                                    Renvoie 10
                                    LogiqueVRAI()La fonction renvoie 1 (VRAI) et n'exige aucun argument.=VRAI
                                    Renvoie 1
                                    +
                                    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/AddWatermark.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/AddWatermark.htm new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bcd587abb --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/AddWatermark.htm @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + Ajouter un filigrane + + + + + + + +
                                    +
                                    + +
                                    +

                                    Ajouter un filigrane

                                    +

                                    Le filigrane est un texte ou une image placé sous le calque de texte principal. Les filigranes de texte permettent d’indiquer l’état de votre document (par exemple, confidentiel, brouillon, etc.), les filigranes d’image permettent d’ajouter une image par exemple de logo de votre entreprise.

                                    +

                                    Pour ajouter un filigrane dans un document:

                                    +
                                      +
                                    1. Basculez vers l’onglet Disposition de la barre d’outils supérieure.
                                    2. +
                                    3. Cliquez sur l’icône Filigrane Filigrane sur la barre d’outils supérieure et choisissez l’option Filigrane personnalisé du menu. Après cela, la fenêtre Paramètres du filigrane apparaîtra.
                                    4. +
                                    5. Sélectionnez le type de filigrane que vous souhaitez insérer: +
                                        +
                                      • Utilisez l’option de Filigrane de texte et ajustez les paramètres disponibles: +

                                        Paramètres du filigrane

                                        +
                                          +
                                        • Langue - Sélectionnez l’une des langues disponibles de la liste,
                                        • +
                                        • Texte - Sélectionnez l’un des exemples de texte disponibles de la langue sélectionnée. Pour le français les textes de filigrane suivants sont disponibles : BROUILLON, CONFID, COPIE, DOCUMENT INTERNE, EXEMPLE, HAUTEMENT CONFIDENTIEL, IMPORTANT, NE PAS DIFFUSER,
                                        • +
                                        • Police - Sélectionnez le nom et la taille de la police des listes déroulantes correspondantes. Utilisez les icônes à droite pour définir la couleur de la police ou appliquez l’un des styles de décoration de police: Gras, Italique, Souligné, Barré,
                                        • +
                                        • Semi-transparent - Cochez cette case si vous souhaitez appliquer la transparence,
                                        • +
                                        • Disposition - Sélectionnez l’option Diagonale ou Horizontale.
                                        • +
                                        +
                                      • +
                                      • Utilisez l’option Image en filigrane et ajustez les paramètres disponibles: +

                                        Image en filigrane

                                        +
                                          +
                                        • Choisissez la source du fichier image en utilisant l’un des boutons: Depuis un fichier ou D’une URL. L’image sera affichée dans la fenêtre à droite,
                                        • +
                                        • Échelle - sélectionnez la valeur d’échelle nécessaire parmi celles disponibles: Auto, 200%, 150%, 100%, 50%.
                                        • +
                                        +
                                      • +
                                      +
                                    6. +
                                    7. Cliquez sur le bouton OK.
                                    8. +
                                    +

                                    Pour modifier le filigrane ajouté, ouvrez la fenêtre Paramètres du filigrane comme décrit ci-dessus, modifiez les paramètres nécessaires et cliquez sur OK.

                                    +

                                    Pour supprimer le filigrane ajouté, cliquez sur l’icône de Filigrane Filigrane dans l’onglet de Disposition de la barre d’outils supérieure et choisissez l’option Supprimer le filigrane du menu. Il est également possible d’utiliser l’option Aucun dans la fenêtre des Paramètres du filigrane.

                                    + +
                                    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/AlignArrangeObjects.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/AlignArrangeObjects.htm index de8e17cbf..3ddbb0a27 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/AlignArrangeObjects.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/AlignArrangeObjects.htm @@ -14,36 +14,66 @@

                                    Aligner et organiser des objets sur une page

                                    -

                                    Les blocs de texte, les formes automatiques, les images et les graphiques ajoutés peuvent être alignés, regroupés, triés, répartis horizontalement et verticalement sur une page. Pour effectuer une de ces actions, sélectionnez d'abord un ou plusieurs objets sur la page. Pour sélectionner plusieurs objets, maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée et cliquez avec le bouton gauche sur les objets nécessaires. Pour sélectionner un bloc de texte, cliquez sur son bord, pas sur le texte à l'intérieur. Après quoi vous pouvez utiliser soit les icônes de l'onglet Disposition de la barre d'outils supérieure décrites ci-après soit les options similaires du menu contextuel.

                                    +

                                    Les blocs de texte, les formes automatiques, les images et les graphiques ajoutés peuvent être alignés, regroupés, triés, répartis horizontalement et verticalement sur une page. Pour effectuer une de ces actions, sélectionnez d'abord un ou plusieurs objets sur la page. Pour sélectionner plusieurs objets, maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée et cliquez avec le bouton gauche sur les objets nécessaires. Pour sélectionner un bloc de texte, cliquez sur son bord, pas sur le texte à l'intérieur. Après quoi vous pouvez utiliser soit les icônes de l'onglet Mise en page de la barre d'outils supérieure décrites ci-après soit les options similaires du menu contextuel.

                                    Aligner des objets

                                    -

                                    Pour aligner un ou plusieurs objets sélectionnés, cliquez sur l'icône icône Aligner Aligner dans l'onglet Disposition de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez le type d'arrangement nécessaire dans la liste :

                                    -
                                      -
                                    • Aligner à gauche icône Aligner à gauche - pour aligner les objets horizontalement sur le côté gauche de la page,
                                    • -
                                    • Aligner au centre icône Aligner au centre - pour aligner les objets horizontalement au centre de la page,
                                    • -
                                    • Aligner à droite icône Aligner à droite - pour aligner les objets horizontalement sur le côté droit de la page,
                                    • -
                                    • Aligner en haut icône Aligner en haut - pour aligner les objets verticalement sur le côté supérieur de la page,
                                    • -
                                    • Aligner au milieu icône Aligner au milieu - pour aligner les objets verticalement au milieu de la page,
                                    • -
                                    • Aligner en bas - pour aligner les objets verticalement sur le côté inférieur de la page.
                                    • -
                                    +

                                    Pour aligner deux ou plusieurs objets sélectionnés,

                                    +
                                      +
                                    1. cliquez sur l'icône icône Aligner Aligner située dans l'onglet Mise en page de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez une des options disponibles :
                                        +
                                      • Aligner sur la page pour aligner les objets par rapport aux bords de la page,
                                      • +
                                      • Aligner sur la marge pour aligner les objets par rapport aux bords de la marge,
                                      • +
                                      • Aligner les objets sélectionnés (cette option est sélectionnée par défaut) pour aligner les objets les uns par rapport aux autres,
                                      • +
                                      +
                                    2. +
                                    3. Cliquez à nouveau sur l'icône icône Aligner Aligner et sélectionnez le type d'alignement nécessaire dans la liste :
                                        +
                                      • Aligner à gauche icône Aligner à gauche - pour aligner les objets horizontalement par le bord gauche de l'objet le plus à gauche / bord gauche de la page / marge gauche de la page,
                                      • +
                                      • Aligner au centre icône Aligner au centre - pour aligner les objets horizontalement par leur centre/centre de la page/centre de l'espace entre les marges gauche et droite de la page,
                                      • +
                                      • Aligner à droite icône Aligner à droite - pour aligner les objets horizontalement par le bord droit de l'objet le plus à droite / bord droit de la page / marge droite de la page,
                                      • +
                                      • Aligner en haut icône Aligner en haut - pour aligner les objets verticalement par le bord supérieur de l'objet le plus haut/bord supérieur de la page / marge supérieure de la page,
                                      • +
                                      • Aligner au milieu icône Aligner au milieu - pour aligner les objets verticalement par leur milieu/milieu de la page/milieu de l'espace entre les marges de la page supérieure et de la page inférieure,
                                      • +
                                      • Aligner en bas icône Aligner en bas - pour aligner les objets verticalement par le bord inférieur de l'objet le plus bas/bord inférieur de la page/bord inférieur de la page.
                                      • +
                                      +
                                    4. +
                                    +

                                    Vous pouvez également cliquer avec le bouton droit sur les objets sélectionnés, choisir l'option Aligner dans le menu contextuel, puis utiliser une des options d’alignement disponibles.

                                    +

                                    Si vous voulez aligner un objet unique, il peut être aligné par rapport aux bords de la page ou aux marges de la page. L'option Aligner sur la marge est sélectionnée par défaut dans ce cas.

                                    +

                                    Distribuer des objets

                                    +

                                    Pour distribuer horizontalement ou verticalement trois objets sélectionnés ou plus de façon à ce que la même distance apparaisse entre eux,

                                    +
                                      +
                                    1. cliquez sur l'icône icône Aligner Aligner située dans l'onglet Mise en page de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez une des options disponibles :
                                        +
                                      • Aligner sur la page pour répartir les objets entre les bords de la page,
                                      • +
                                      • Aligner sur la marge pour répartir les objets entre les marges de la page,
                                      • +
                                      • Aligner les objets sélectionnés (cette option est sélectionnée par défaut) pour distribuer les objets entre les deux objets les plus externes sélectionnés,
                                      • +
                                      +
                                    2. +
                                    3. Cliquez à nouveau sur l'icône icône Aligner Aligner et sélectionnez le type de distribution nécessaire dans la liste :
                                        +
                                      • Distribuer horizontalement icône Distribuer horizontalement - pour répartir uniformément les objets entre les bords gauche et droit des objets sélectionnés/bords gauche et droit de la page/marges gauche et droite de la page.
                                      • +
                                      • Distribuer verticalement icône Distribuer verticalement - pour répartir uniformément les objets entre les objets les plus en haut et les objets les plus bas sélectionnés/bords supérieur et inférieur de la page/marges de la page/bord supérieur et inférieur de la page.
                                      • +
                                      +
                                    4. +
                                    +

                                    Vous pouvez également cliquer avec le bouton droit sur les objets sélectionnés, choisir l'option Aligner dans le menu contextuel, puis utiliser une des options de distribution disponibles.

                                    +

                                    Remarque : les options de distribution sont désactivées si vous sélectionnez moins de trois objets.

                                    Grouper plusieurs objets

                                    -

                                    Pour grouper deux ou plusieurs objets sélectionnés ou les dissocier, cliquez sur la flèche à côté de l'icône icône Grouper Grouper dans l'onglet Disposition de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option nécessaire depuis la liste :

                                    +

                                    Pour grouper deux ou plusieurs objets sélectionnés ou les dissocier, cliquez sur la flèche à côté de l'icône icône Grouper Grouper dans l'onglet Mise en page de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option nécessaire depuis la liste :

                                    • Grouper icône Grouper - pour combiner plusieurs objets de sorte que vous puissiez les faire pivoter, déplacer, redimensionner, aligner, organiser, copier, coller, mettre en forme simultanément comme un objet unique.
                                    • -
                                    • Dissocier icône Dissocier - pour dissocier le groupe sélectionné des objets préalablement combinés.
                                    • +
                                    • Dissocier icône Dissocier - pour dissocier le groupe sélectionné d'objets préalablement combinés.

                                    Vous pouvez également cliquer avec le bouton droit sur les objets sélectionnés, choisir l'option Ordonner dans le menu contextuel, puis utiliser l'option Grouper ou Dissocier.

                                    +

                                    Remarque : l'option Grouper est désactivée si vous sélectionnez moins de deux objets. L'option Dégrouper n'est disponible que lorsqu'un groupe des objets précédemment joints est sélectionné.

                                    Ordonner plusieurs objets

                                    -

                                    Pour ordonner les objets sélectionnés (c'est à dire pour modifier leur ordre lorsque plusieurs objets se chevauchent), vous pouvez utiliser les icônes icône Avancer d'un plan Avancer et icône Reculer d'un plan Reculer dans l'onglet Disposition de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionner le type d'arrangement nécessaire dans la liste.

                                    -

                                    Pour déplacer un ou plusieurs objets sélectionnés vers l'avant, cliquez sur la flèche en regard de l'icône icône Avancer d'un plan Avancer dans l'onglet Disposition de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez le type d'arrangement nécessaire dans la liste :

                                    +

                                    Pour ordonner les objets sélectionnés (c'est à dire pour modifier leur ordre lorsque plusieurs objets se chevauchent), vous pouvez utiliser les icônes icône Avancer d'un plan Avancer et icône Reculer d'un plan Reculer dans l'onglet Mise en page de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionner le type d'arrangement nécessaire dans la liste.

                                    +

                                    Pour déplacer un ou plusieurs objets sélectionnés vers l'avant, cliquez sur la flèche en regard de l'icône icône Avancer d'un plan Avancer dans l'onglet Mise en page de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez le type d'arrangement nécessaire dans la liste :

                                    • Mettre au premier plan icône Mettre au premier plan - pour déplacer les objets devant tous les autres objets,
                                    • Avancer d'un plan icône Avancer d'un plan - pour déplacer les objets d'un niveau en avant par rapport à d'autres objets.
                                    -

                                    Pour déplacer un ou plusieurs objets sélectionnés vers l'arrière, cliquez sur la flèche en regard de l'icône icône Reculer d'un plan Reculer dans l'onglet Disposition de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez le type d'arrangement nécessaire dans la liste :

                                    +

                                    Pour déplacer un ou plusieurs objets sélectionnés vers l'arrière, cliquez sur la flèche en regard de l'icône icône Reculer d'un plan Reculer dans l'onglet Mise en page de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez le type d'arrangement nécessaire dans la liste :

                                    • Mettre en arrière-plan icône Mettre en arrière-plan - pour déplacer les objets derrière tous les autres objets,
                                    • Reculer d'un plan - pour déplacer les objets d'un niveau en arrière par rapport à d'autres objets.
                                    +

                                    Vous pouvez également cliquer avec le bouton droit sur les objets sélectionnés, choisir l'option Ranger dans le menu contextuel, puis utiliser une des options de rangement disponibles.

                                    \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/CopyPasteUndoRedo.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/CopyPasteUndoRedo.htm index 51b457bea..4723659a9 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/CopyPasteUndoRedo.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/CopyPasteUndoRedo.htm @@ -14,22 +14,22 @@

                                    Copier/coller les passages de texte, annuler/rétablir vos actions

                                    -

                                    Utiliser les opérations basiques du presse-papier

                                    +

                                    Utiliser les opérations de base du presse-papiers

                                    Pour couper, copier, coller des passages de texte et des objets insérés (formes automatiques, images, graphiques) dans le document actuel utilisez les options correspondantes dans le menu contextuel ou les icônes de la barre d'outils supérieure :

                                      -
                                    • Couper – sélectionnez un fragment de texte ou un objet et utilisez l'option Couper dans le menu contextuel pour supprimer la sélection et l'envoyer dans le presse-papiers de l'ordinateur. Les données coupées peuvent être insérées plus tard dans un autre endroit dans le même document.
                                    • -
                                    • Copier – sélectionnez un fragment de texte ou un objet et utilisez l'option Copier dans le menu contextuel, ou l'icône Copier Icône Copier de la barre d'outils supérieure pour copier la sélection dans le presse-papiers de l'ordinateur. Les données coupées peuvent être insérées plus tard dans un autre endroit dans le même document.
                                    • -
                                    • Coller – trouvez l'endroit dans votre document où vous voulez coller le fragment de texte/l'objet précédemment copié et utilisez l'option Coller dans le menu contextuel, ou l'icône Coller Icône Coller de la barre d'outils supérieure. Le texte / objet sera inséré à la position actuelle du curseur. Le texte peut être copié à partir du même document.
                                    • +
                                    • Couper – sélectionnez un fragment de texte ou un objet et utilisez l'option Couper dans le menu contextuel pour supprimer la sélection et l'envoyer dans le presse-papiers de l'ordinateur. Les données coupées peuvent être insérées plus tard dans un autre endroit dans le même document.
                                    • +
                                    • Copier – sélectionnez un fragment de texte ou un objet et utilisez l'option Copier dans le menu contextuel, ou l'icône Copier Icône Copier de la barre d'outils supérieure pour copier la sélection dans le presse-papiers de l'ordinateur. Les données coupées peuvent être insérées plus tard dans un autre endroit dans le même document.
                                    • +
                                    • Coller – trouvez l'endroit dans votre document où vous voulez coller le fragment de texte/l'objet précédemment copié et utilisez l'option Coller dans le menu contextuel, ou l'icône Coller Icône Coller de la barre d'outils supérieure. Le texte / objet sera inséré à la position actuelle du curseur. Le texte peut être copié à partir du même document.
                                    -

                                    Pour copier, coller les données à partir de / dans un autre document ou autre programme, utilisez les combinaisons de touches suivantes :

                                    +

                                    Dans la version en ligne, les combinaisons de touches suivantes ne sont utilisées que pour copier ou coller des données de/vers un autre document ou un autre programme, dans la version de bureau, les boutons/options de menu et les combinaisons de touches correspondantes peuvent être utilisées pour toute opération copier/coller :

                                    • Ctrl+X pour couper ;
                                    • Ctrl+C pour copier ;
                                    • Ctrl+V pour coller.

                                    Remarque : au lieu de couper et coller du texte dans le même document, vous pouvez sélectionner le passage de texte nécessaire et le faire glisser à la position nécessaire.

                                    -

                                    Utilisez la fonctionnalité Collage spécial

                                    -

                                    Une fois le texte copié collé, le bouton Collage spécial Collage spécial apparaît à côté du passage de texte inséré. Cliquez sur ce bouton pour sélectionner l'option de collage désirée.

                                    +

                                    Utiliser la fonctionnalité Collage spécial

                                    +

                                    Une fois le texte copié collé, le bouton Collage spécial Collage spécial apparaît à côté du passage de texte inséré. Cliquez sur ce bouton pour sélectionner l'option de collage requise.

                                    Lorsque vous collez le texte de paragraphe ou du texte dans des formes automatiques, les options suivantes sont disponibles :

                                    • Coller - permet de coller le texte copié en conservant sa mise en forme d'origine.
                                    • @@ -42,11 +42,12 @@
                                    • Conserver le texte uniquement - permet de coller le contenu du tableau sous forme de valeurs de texte séparées par le caractère de tabulation.

                                    Annuler/rétablir vos actions

                                    -

                                    Pour annuler / rétablir les actions, utilisez les icônes correspondantes de la barre d'outils supérieure ou les raccourcis clavier :

                                    +

                                    Pour effectuer les opérations annuler/rétablir, utilisez les icônes correspondantes dans l'en-tête de l'éditeur ou les raccourcis clavier :

                                      -
                                    • Annuler – utilisez l'icône Annuler Icône Annuler de la barre d'outils supérieure ou la combinaison de touches Ctrl+Z pour annuler la dernière opération effectuée.
                                    • -
                                    • Rétablir – utilisez l'icône Rétablir Icône Rétablir de la barre d'outils supérieure ou la combinaison de touches Ctrl+Y pour rétablir l’opération précédemment annulée.
                                    • +
                                    • Annuler – utilisez l'icône Annuler Icône Annuler située dans la partie gauche de l'en-tête de l'éditeur ou la combinaison de touches Ctrl+Z pour annuler la dernière opération effectuée.
                                    • +
                                    • Rétablir – utilisez l'icône Rétablir Icône Rétablir située dans la partie gauche de l'en-tête de l'éditeur ou la combinaison de touches Ctrl+Y pour rétablir l’opération précédemment annulée.
                                    +

                                    Remarque : lorsque vous co-éditez un document en mode Rapide, la possibilité de Rétablir la dernière opération annulée n'est pas disponible.

                                    \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/DecorationStyles.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/DecorationStyles.htm index ca8e59cff..fd3425415 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/DecorationStyles.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/DecorationStyles.htm @@ -57,8 +57,9 @@
                                  15. Indice sert à rendre le texte plus petit et le déplacer vers la partie inférieure de la ligne du texte, par exemple comme dans les formules chimiques.
                                  16. Petites majuscules sert à mettre toutes les lettres en petite majuscule.
                                  17. Majuscules sert à mettre toutes les lettres en majuscule.
                                  18. -
                                  19. Espacement sert à définir l'espace entre les caractères.
                                  20. -
                                  21. Position sert à définir la position des caractères dans la ligne.
                                  22. +
                                  23. Espacement sert à définir l'espace entre les caractères. Augmentez la valeur par défaut pour appliquer l'espacement Étendu, ou diminuez la valeur par défaut pour appliquer l'espacement Condensé. Utilisez les touches fléchées ou entrez la valeur voulue dans la case.
                                  24. +
                                  25. Position permet de définir la position des caractères (décalage vertical) dans la ligne. Augmentez la valeur par défaut pour déplacer les caractères vers le haut ou diminuez la valeur par défaut pour les déplacer vers le bas. Utilisez les touches fléchées ou entrez la valeur voulue dans la case.

                                    Tous les changements seront affichés dans le champ de prévisualisation ci-dessous.

                                    +

                                Paramètres avancés du paragraphe - Police

                                diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/FontTypeSizeColor.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/FontTypeSizeColor.htm index 9c1b8b5ac..e9715584b 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/FontTypeSizeColor.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/FontTypeSizeColor.htm @@ -20,12 +20,12 @@ Nom de la police Nom de la police - Sert à sélectionner l'une des polices disponibles dans la liste. + Sert à sélectionner l'une des polices disponibles dans la liste. Si une police requise n'est pas disponible dans la liste, vous pouvez la télécharger et l'installer sur votre système d'exploitation, après quoi la police sera disponible pour utilisation dans la version de bureau. Taille de la police Taille de la police - Sert à sélectionner la taille de la police parmi les valeurs disponibles dans la liste déroulante, ou la saisir à la main dans le champ de la taille de police. + Sert à sélectionner la taille de la police parmi les valeurs disponibles dans la liste déroulante (les valeurs par défaut sont : 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 36, 48, 72 et 96). Il est également possible d'entrer manuellement une valeur personnalisée dans le champ de taille de police, puis d'appuyer sur Entrée. Incrémenter la taille de la police @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@ Sert à modifier la taille de la police en la randant plus grande à un point chaque fois que vous appuyez sur le bouton. - Décrémenter la taille de la police - Décrémenter la taille de la police + Décrementer la taille de la police + Décrementer la taille de la police Sert à modifier la taille de la police en la randant plus petite à un point chaque fois que vous appuyez sur le bouton. diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm index 240940b63..6e807f457 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@  - Insérer des formes automatiques + Insérer les formes automatiques @@ -13,11 +13,11 @@
                                -

                                Insérer des formes automatiques

                                +

                                Insérer les formes automatiques

                                Insérer une forme automatique

                                Pour insérer une forme automatique à votre document,

                                  -
                                1. passez à l'onglet Insérer de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                                2. +
                                3. passez à l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                                4. cliquez sur l'icône Insérer une forme automatique Forme de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                                5. sélectionnez l'un des groupes des formes automatiques disponibles : Formes de base, Flèches figurées, Maths, Graphiques, Étoiles et rubans, Légendes, Boutons, Rectangles, Lignes,
                                6. cliquez sur la forme automatique nécessaire du groupe sélectionné,
                                7. @@ -30,18 +30,20 @@

                                  Lors de la modification des formes, par exemple des flèches figurées ou les légendes, l'icône jaune en forme de diamant Icône jaune en forme de diamant est aussi disponible. Elle permet d'ajuster certains aspects de la forme, par exemple, la longueur de la pointe d'une flèche.

                                  Pour modifier la position de la forme automatique, utilisez l'icône Flèche qui apparaît si vous placez le curseur de votre souris sur la forme. Faites glisser la forme à la position nécessaire sans relâcher le bouton de la souris. Lorsque vous déplacez la forme automatique, des lignes de guidage s'affichent pour vous aider à positionner l'objet sur la page avec précision (si un style d'habillage autre que aligné est sélectionné). Pour déplacer la forme automatique de trois incréments, maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée et utilisez les flèches du clavier. Pour déplacer la forme automatique strictement horizontallement / verticallement et l'empêcher de se déplacer dans une direction perpendiculaire, maintenez la touche Maj enfoncée lors du déplacement.

                                  Pour faire pivoter la forme automatique, placez le curseur de la souris sur la poignée de rotation ronde Poignée de rotation et faites-la glisser vers la droite ou la gauche. Pour limiter la rotation de l'angle à des incréments de 15 degrés, maintenez la touche Maj enfoncée.

                                  -
                                  -

                                  Régler les paramètres de la forme automatique

                                  +

                                  Note : la liste des raccourcis clavier qui peuvent être utilisés lorsque vous travaillez avec des objets est disponible ici.

                                  +
                                  +

                                  Modifier les paramètres de la forme automatique

                                  Pour aligner et organiser les formes automatiques, utilisez le menu contextuel. Les options du menu sont les suivantes :

                                  • Couper, Copier, Coller - les options nécessaires pour couper ou coller le texte / l'objet sélectionné et coller un passage de texte précedement coupé / copié ou un objet à la position actuelle du curseur.
                                  • Organiser sert à placer la forme automatique choisie au premier plan, envoyer à fond, avancer ou reculer ainsi que grouper ou dégrouper les formes pour effectuer des opérations avec plusieurs formes à la fois. Pour en savoir plus sur l'organisation des objets, vous pouvez vous référer à cette page.
                                  • Aligner sert à aligner la forme à gauche, au centre, à droite, en haut, au milieu, en bas. Pour en savoir plus sur l'alignement des objets, vous pouvez vous référer à cette page.
                                  • Style d'habillage sert à sélectionner un des styles d'habillage - aligné sur le texte, carré, rapproché, au travers, haut et bas, devant le texte, derrière le texte - ou modifier le contour de l'habillage. L'option Modifier les limites du renvoi à la ligne n'est disponible qu'au cas où vous sélectionnez le style d'habillage autre que 'aligné sur le texte'. Faites glisser les points d'habillage pour personnaliser les limites. Pour créer un nouveau point d'habillage, cliquez sur la ligne rouge et faites-la glisser vers la position désirée. Modifier les limites du renvoi à la ligne
                                  • -
                                  • Paramètres avancés sert à ouvrir la fenêtre 'Forme - Paramètres avancés'.
                                  • +
                                  • Rotation permet de faire pivoter la forme de 90 degrés dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre ou dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre, ainsi que de retourner la forme horizontalement ou verticalement.
                                  • +
                                  • Paramètres avancés sert à ouvrir la fenêtre 'Forme - Paramètres avancés'.

                                  -

                                  Certains paramètres de la forme automatique peuvent être modifiés en utilisant l'onglet Paramètres de la forme de la barre latérale droite. Pour l'activer, sélectionnez la forme ajoutée avec la souris et sélectionnez l'icône Paramètres de la forme Paramètres de la forme à droite. Vous pouvez y modifier les paramètres suivants :

                                  +

                                  Certains paramètres de la forme automatique peuvent être modifiés en utilisant l'onglet Paramètres de la forme de la barre latérale droite. Pour l'activer, sélectionnez la forme ajoutée avec la souris et sélectionnez l'icône Paramètres de la forme Paramètres de la forme à droite. Vous pouvez y modifier les paramètres suivants :

                                  • Remplissage - utilisez cette section pour sélectionner le remplissage de la forme automatique. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes :
                                    • Couleur - sélectionnez cette option pour spécifier la couleur unie à remplir l'espace intérieur de la forme automatique sélectionnée.

                                      Couleur

                                      @@ -54,16 +56,16 @@
                                    • Dégradé - cliquez sur le curseur de dégradé gauche Curseur au-dessous de la barre de dégradé pour activer la palette de couleurs qui correspond à la première couleur. Cliquez sur la palette de couleurs à droite pour sélectionner la première couleur. Faites glisser le curseur pour définir le point de dégradé c'est-à-dire le point quand une couleur se fond dans une autre. Utilisez le curseur droit au-dessous de la barre de dégradé pour spécifier la deuxième couleur et définir le point de dégradé.
                                  • -
                                  • Image ou texture - sélectionnez cette option pour utiliser une image ou une texture prédéfinie en tant que arrière-plan de la forme.

                                    Image ou texture

                                    +
                                  • Image ou texture - sélectionnez cette option pour utiliser une image ou une texture prédéfinie en tant que arrière-plan de la forme.

                                    Remplissage avec Image ou texture

                                      -
                                    • Si vous souhaitez utiliser une image en tant que arrière-plan de la forme, vous pouvez ajouter l'image D'un fichier en la sélectionnant sur le disque dur de votre ordinateur ou D'une URL en insérant l'adresse URL appropriée dans la fenêtre ouverte.
                                    • -
                                    • Si vous souhaitez utiliser une texture en tant que arrière-plan de la forme, utilisez le menu déroulant D'une texture et sélectionnez le préréglage de la texture voulue.

                                      Actuellement, les textures suivantes sont disponibles : Toile, Carton, Tissu foncé, Grain, Granit, Papier gris, Tricot, Cuir, Papier brun, Papyrus, Bois.

                                      +
                                    • Si vous souhaitez utiliser une image en tant que l'arrière-plan de la forme, vous pouvez ajouter une image D'un fichier en la sélectionnant sur le disque dur de votre ordinateur ou D'une URL en insérant l'adresse URL appropriée dans la fenêtre ouverte.
                                    • +
                                    • Si vous souhaitez utiliser une texture en tant que arrière-plan de la forme, utilisez le menu déroulant D'une texture et sélectionnez le préréglage de la texture nécessaire.

                                      Actuellement, les textures suivantes sont disponibles : Toile, Carton, Tissu foncé, Grain, Granit, Papier gris, Tricot, Cuir, Papier brun, Papyrus, Bois.

                                      -
                                    • Si l'Image sélectionnée est plus grande ou plus petite que la forme automatique, vous pouvez choisir parmi les options : Étirement ou Mosaïque depuis la liste déroulante.

                                      L'option Étirement permet de régler la taille de l'image pour l'adapter à la taille de la forme automatique afin qu'elle puisse remplir tout l'espace uniformément.

                                      +
                                    • Si l'Image sélectionnée est plus grande ou plus petite que la forme automatique, vous pouvez profiter d'une des options : Étirement ou Mosaïque depuis la liste déroulante.

                                      L'option Étirement permet de régler la taille de l'image pour l'adapter à la taille de la forme automatique afin qu'elle puisse remplir tout l'espace uniformément.

                                      L'option Mosaïque permet d'afficher seulement une partie de l'image plus grande en gardant ses dimensions d'origine, ou de répéter l'image plus petite en conservant ses dimensions initiales sur la surface de la forme automatique afin qu'elle puisse remplir tout l'espace uniformément.

                                      -

                                      Remarque : tout préréglage Texture sélectionné remplit l'espace de façon uniforme, mais vous pouvez toujours appliquer l'effet Étirement si nécessaire.

                                      +

                                      Remarque : tout préréglage Texture sélectionné remplit l'espace de façon uniforme, mais vous pouvez toujours appliquer l'effet Étirement, si nécessaire.

                                  • @@ -74,26 +76,33 @@
                                  • Couleur d'arrière-plan - cliquez sur cette palette de couleurs pour changer de l'arrière-plan du modèle.
                                  -
                                8. Pas de remplissage - sélectionnez cette option si vous ne voulez pas utiliser de remplissage.
                                9. +
                                10. Pas de remplissage - sélectionnez cette option si vous ne voulez pas utiliser un remplissage.

                          Paramètres de la forme automatique

                          • Opacité - utilisez cette section pour régler le niveau d'Opacité des formes automatiques en faisant glisser le curseur ou en saisissant la valeur de pourcentage à la main. La valeur par défaut est 100%. Elle correspond à l'opacité complète. La valeur 0% correspond à la transparence totale.
                          • -
                          • Contour - utilisez cette section pour changer la largeur et la couleur du contour de la forme automatique.
                              -
                            • Pour modifier la largeur du trait, sélectionnez une des options disponibles depuis la liste déroulante Taille. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes : 0,5 pt, 1 pt, 1,5 pt, 2,25 pt, 3 pt, 4,5 pt, 6 pt ou Pas de ligne si vous ne voulez pas utiliser de contour.
                            • +
                            • Trait - utilisez cette section pour changer la largeur et la couleur du trait de la forme automatique.
                                +
                              • Pour modifier la largeur du trait, sélectionnez une des options disponibles depuis la liste déroulante Taille. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes : 0,5 pt, 1 pt, 1,5 pt, 2,25 pt, 3 pt, 4,5 pt, 6 pt ou Pas de ligne si vous ne voulez pas utiliser de trait.
                              • Pour changer la couleur du contour, cliquez sur la case colorée et sélectionnez la couleur voulue.
                              • Pour modifier le type de contour, sélectionnez l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante correspondante (une ligne continue est appliquée par défaut, vous pouvez la remplacer par l'une des lignes pointillées disponibles).
                            • +
                            • Rotation permet de faire pivoter la forme de 90 degrés dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre ou dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre, ainsi que de retourner la forme horizontalement ou verticalement. Cliquez sur l'un des boutons :
                                +
                              • icône Pivoter dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre pour faire pivoter la forme de 90 degrés dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre
                              • +
                              • icône Pivoter dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre pour faire pivoter la forme de 90 degrés dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre
                              • +
                              • icône Retourner horizontalement pour retourner la forme horizontalement (de gauche à droite)
                              • +
                              • icône Retourner verticalement pour retourner la forme verticalement (à l'envers)
                              • +
                              +
                            • Style d'habillage - utilisez cette section pour sélectionner un des styles d'habillage - aligné sur le texte, carré, rapproché, au travers, haut et bas, devant le texte, derrière le texte (pour en savoir plus, consultez la section des paramètres avancés ci-dessous).
                            • Modifier la forme - utilisez cette section pour remplacer la forme automatique insérée par une autre sélectionnée de la liste déroulante.

                            Pour changer les paramètres avancés de la forme automatique, cliquez sur la forme avec le bouton droit et sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés dans le menu ou utilisez le lien Afficher paramètres avancés sur la barre latérale droite. La fenêtre "Forme - Paramètres avancés" s'ouvre :

                            Forme - Paramètres avancés

                            -

                            L'onglet Taille vous permet de régler les paramètres suivants :

                            +

                            L'onglet Taille comporte les paramètres suivants :

                            • Largeur - utilisez l'une de ces options pour modifier la largeur de la forme automatique.
                              • Absolue - spécifiez une valeur exacte mesurée en unités absolues, c.-à-d. Centimètres/Points/Pouces (selon l'option spécifiée dans l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés...).
                              • @@ -107,6 +116,12 @@
                              • Si l'option Verrouiller le ratio d'aspect est cochée, la largeur et la hauteur seront modifiées en conservant le ratio d'aspect original.
                              +

                              Forme - Paramètres avancés

                              +

                              L'onglet Rotation comporte les paramètres suivants :

                              +
                                +
                              • Angle - utilisez cette option pour faire pivoter la forme d'un angle exactement spécifié. Entrez la valeur souhaitée mesurée en degrés dans le champ ou réglez-la à l'aide des flèches situées à droite.
                              • +
                              • Retourné - cochez la case Horizontalement pour retourner la forme horizontalement (de gauche à droite) ou la case Verticalement pour retourner la forme verticalement (à l'envers).
                              • +

                              Forme - Paramètres avancés

                              L'onglet Habillage du texte contient les paramètres suivants :

                                @@ -125,7 +140,7 @@

                              Si vous avez choisi le style carré, rapproché, au travers, haut et bas, vous avez la possibilité de configurer des paramètres supplémentaires - Distance du texte de tous les côtés (haut, bas, droit, gauche).

                              Forme - Paramètres avancés

                              -

                              L'onglet Position n'est disponible qu'au cas où vous choisissez le style d'habillage autre que 'aligné sur le texte'. Il contient les paramètres suivants qui varient selon le type d'habillage sélectionné :

                              +

                              L'onglet Position n'est disponible qu'au cas où vous choisissez le style d'habillage autre que 'aligné sur le texte'. Il contient les paramètres suivants qui varient selon le type d'habillage sélectionné :

                              • La section Horizontal vous permet de sélectionner l'un des trois types de positionnement de forme automatique suivants :
                                • Alignement (gauche, centre, droite) par rapport au caractère, à la colonne, à la marge de gauche, à la marge, à la page ou à la marge de droite,
                                • @@ -143,19 +158,19 @@
                                • Chevauchement détermine si deux formes automatiques sont fusionnées en une seule ou se chevauchent si vous les faites glisser les unes près des autres sur la page.

                                Forme - Paramètres avancés

                                -

                                L'onglet Paramètres de la forme contient les paramètres suivants :

                                +

                                L'onglet Poids et flèches contient les paramètres suivants :

                                  -
                                • Style de ligne - ce groupe d'options vous permet de spécifier les paramètres suivants :
                                    -
                                  • Type d'extrémité - cette option permet de définir le style de l'extrémité de la ligne, par conséquent elle peut être appliquée seulement aux formes avec un contour ouvert telles que des lignes, des polylignes etc.:
                                      +
                                    • Style de ligne - ce groupe d'options vous permet de spécifier les paramètres suivants :
                                        +
                                      • Type de litterine - cette option permet de définir le style de la fin de la ligne, ainsi elle peut être appliquée seulement aux formes avec un contour ouvert telles que des lignes, des polylignes etc.:
                                        • Plat - les points finaux seront plats.
                                        • Arrondi - les points finaux seront arrondis.
                                        • Carré - les points finaux seront carrés.
                                      • -
                                      • Type de jointure - cette option permet de définir le style de l'intersection de deux lignes : par exemple, une polyligne, les coins du triangle ou le contour du rectangle :
                                          +
                                        • Type de jointure - cette option permet de définir le style de l'intersection de deux lignes, par exemple, une polyligne, les coins du triangle ou le contour du rectangle :
                                          • Arrondi - le coin sera arrondi.
                                          • -
                                          • Biseauté - le coin sera coupé d'une manière angulaire.
                                          • -
                                          • Onglet - l'angle sera aiguisé. Bien adapté pour les formes à angles nets.
                                          • +
                                          • Plaque - le coin sera coupé d'une manière angulaire.
                                          • +
                                          • Onglet - l'angle sera aiguisé. Bien adapté pour les formes à angles vifs.

                                          Remarque : l'effet sera plus visible si vous utilisez un contour plus épais.

                                        • @@ -165,9 +180,9 @@

                                        Forme - Paramètres avancés

                                        L'onglet Marges vous permet de changer les marges internes En haut, En bas, A gauche et A droite (c'est-à-dire la distance entre le texte à l'intérieur de la forme et les bordures de la forme automatique).

                                        -

                                        Remarque : cet onglet n'est disponible que si du texte est ajouté dans la forme automatique, sinon l'onglet est désactivé.

                                        +

                                        Remarque : cet onglet n'est disponible que si tu texte est ajouté dans la forme automatique, sinon l'onglet est désactivé.

                                        Forme - Paramètres avancés

                                        -

                                        L'onglet Texte de remplacement permet de spécifier un Titre et une Description qui sera lue aux personnes avec des déficiences cognitives ou visuelles pour les aider à mieux comprendre l'information de la forme.

                                        +

                                        L'onglet Texte de remplacement permet de spécifier un Titre et une Description qui sera lue aux personnes avec des déficiences cognitives ou visuelles pour les aider à mieux comprendre l'information du tableau.

                                        \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertBookmarks.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertBookmarks.htm index ed9c85aea..30d6dc3d6 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertBookmarks.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertBookmarks.htm @@ -17,9 +17,13 @@

                                        Les marque-pages permettent d’aller rapidement à une certaine position dans le document en cours ou d'ajouter un lien vers cette position dans le document.

                                        Pour ajouter un marque-pages dans un document :

                                          -
                                        1. placez le curseur de la souris au début du passage de texte à l'endroit où vous voulez ajouter le marque-pages,
                                        2. +
                                        3. spécifiez l'endroit où vous voulez que le marque-pages soit ajouté :
                                            +
                                          • placez le curseur de la souris au début du passage de texte nécessaire, ou
                                          • +
                                          • sélectionnez le passage de texte nécessaire,
                                          • +
                                          +
                                        4. passez à l'onglet Références de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                                        5. -
                                        6. cliquez sur l'icône icône Marque-pages Marque-pages de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                                        7. +
                                        8. cliquez sur l'icône icône Marque-page Marque-pages de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                                        9. dans la fenêtre Marque-pages qui s'ouvre, entrez le Nom du marque-pages et cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter - un marque-pages sera ajouté à la liste des marque-pages affichée ci-dessous,

                                          Note : le nom du marque-pages doit commencer par une lettre, mais il peut aussi contenir des chiffres. Le nom du marque-pages ne peut pas contenir d'espaces, mais peut inclure le caractère de soulignement "_".

                                          Fenêtre Marque-pages

                                        10. @@ -29,7 +33,7 @@
                                        11. cliquez sur l'icône icône Marque-page Marque-pages dans l'onglet Références de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                                        12. dans la fenêtre Marque-pages qui s'ouvre, sélectionnez le marque-pages vers lequel vous voulez vous déplacer. Pour trouver facilement le marque-pages voulu dans la liste, vous pouvez trier la liste par Nom ou par Emplacement de marque-pages dans le texte du document,
                                        13. cochez l'option Marque-pages cachés pour afficher les marque-pages cachés dans la liste (c'est-à-dire les marque-pages automatiquement créés par le programme lors de l'ajout de références à une certaine partie du document. Par exemple, si vous créez un lien hypertexte vers un certain titre dans le document, l'éditeur de document crée automatiquement un marque-pages caché vers la cible de ce lien).
                                        14. -
                                        15. cliquez sur le bouton Aller à - le curseur sera positionné à l'endroit du document où le marque-pages sélectionné a été ajouté,
                                        16. +
                                        17. cliquez sur le bouton Aller à - le curseur sera positionné à l'endroit du document où le marque-pages sélectionné a été ajouté, ou le passage de texte correspondant sera sélectionné,
                                        18. cliquez sur le bouton Fermer pour fermer la fenêtre.

                                        Pour supprimer un marque-pages, sélectionnez-le dans la liste et cliquez sur le bouton Suppr.

                                        diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm index d4c30ad82..729ef9794 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm @@ -18,13 +18,13 @@

                                        Pour insérer un graphique dans votre document,

                                        1. placez le curseur là où vous souhaitez ajouter un graphique,
                                        2. -
                                        3. passez à l'onglet Insérer de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                                        4. +
                                        5. passez à l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                                        6. cliquez sur l'icône Insérer un graphique Insérer un graphique de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                                        7. -
                                        8. sélectionnez le type de graphique nécessaire parmi ceux qui sont disponibles - colonne, ligne, secteurs, barres, aires, graphique en points , boursier - et sélectionnez son style,

                                          Remarque: pour les graphiques en Colonne, Ligne, Camembert, ou Barre, un format 3D est aussi disponible.

                                          +
                                        9. sélectionnez le type de graphique nécessaire parmi ceux qui sont disponibles - colonne, ligne, secteurs, barres, aires, graphique en points , boursier - et sélectionnez son style,

                                          Remarque : les graphiques Colonne, Ligne, Secteur, ou Barre sont aussi disponibles au format 3D.

                                        10. après une fenêtre Éditeur de graphique s'ouvre où vous pouvez entrer les données nécessaires dans les cellules en utilisant les commandes suivantes :
                                          • Copier et Coller pour copier et coller les données copiées
                                          • -
                                          • Annuler et Rétablir pour annuler et rétablir les actions
                                          • +
                                          • Annuler et Rétablir pour annuler et rétablir les actions
                                          • Insérer une fonction pour insérer une fonction
                                          • Réduire les décimales et Ajouter une décimale pour diminuer et augmenter les décimales
                                          • Format de numéro pour changer le format de nombre, c'est à dire la façon d'afficher les chiffres dans les cellules
                                          • @@ -32,16 +32,16 @@

                                            Éditeur de graphique

                                          • modifiez les paramètres du graphique en cliquant sur le bouton Modifier graphique situé dans la fenêtre Éditeur de graphique. La fenêtre Paramètres du graphique s'ouvre.

                                            Paramètres du graphique

                                            -

                                            L'onglet Type &amp données vous permet de modifier le type de graphique ainsi que les données que vous souhaitez utiliser pour créer ce graphique.

                                            +

                                            L'onglet Type et données vous permet de sélectionner le type de graphique ainsi que les données que vous souhaitez utiliser pour créer un graphique.

                                              -
                                            • Sélectionnez le Type de graphique que vous souhaitez utiliser : Colonne, Ligne, Camembert, Barre, Zone, XY (Nuage) ou Boursier.
                                            • +
                                            • Sélectionnez le Type de graphique que vous souhaitez utiliser : Colonne, Ligne, Secteur, Barre, Aire, XY(Nuage) ou Boursier.
                                            • Vérifiez la Plage de données sélectionnée et modifiez-la, si nécessaire, en cliquant sur le bouton Sélectionner les données et en entrant la plage de données souhaitée dans le format suivant : Sheet1!A1:B4.
                                            • Choisissez la disposition des données. Vous pouvez sélectionner la Série de données à utiliser sur l'axe X : en lignes ou en colonnes.

                                            Paramètres du graphique

                                            L'onglet Disposition vous permet de modifier la disposition des éléments de graphique.

                                              -
                                            • Spécifiez la position du Titre du graphique sur votre graphique en sélectionnant l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante :
                                                +
                                              • Spécifiez la position du Titre du graphique sur votre graphique en sélectionnant l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante:
                                                • Aucun pour ne pas afficher le titre du graphique,
                                                • Superposition pour superposer et centrer le titre sur la zone de tracé,
                                                • Pas de superposition pour afficher le titre au-dessus de la zone de tracé.
                                                • @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@
                                              • Lignes - permet de choisir un style de ligne pour les graphiques en Ligne/XY(Nuage). Vous pouvez choisir parmi les options suivantes : Droite pour utiliser des lignes droites entre les points de données, Courbe pour utiliser des courbes lisses entre les points de données, ou Aucune pour ne pas afficher les lignes.
                                              • -
                                              • Marqueurs - est utilisé pour spécifier si les marqueurs doivent être affichés (si la case est cochée) ou non (si la case n'est pas cochée) pour les graphiques Ligne/XY(Nuage).

                                                Remarque : les options Lignes et Marqueurs sont disponibles uniquement pour les graphiques en Ligne et .

                                                +
                                              • Marqueurs - est utilisé pour spécifier si les marqueurs doivent être affichés (si la case est cochée) ou non (si la case n'est pas cochée) pour les graphiques Ligne/XY(Nuage).

                                                Remarque : les options Lignes et Marqueurs sont disponibles uniquement pour les graphiques en Ligne et XY(Nuage).

                                              • La section Paramètres de l'axe permet de spécifier si vous souhaitez afficher l'Axe horizontal/vertical ou non en sélectionnant l'option Afficher ou Masquer dans la liste déroulante. Vous pouvez également spécifier les paramètres de Titre d'axe horizontal/vertical :
                                                • Indiquez si vous souhaitez afficher le Titre de l'axe horizontal ou non en sélectionnant l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante :
                                                    @@ -91,13 +91,13 @@

                                                  Paramètres du graphique

                                                  Remarque : les onglets Axe Horizontal/vertical seront désactivés pour les Graphiques à secteurs, car les graphiques de ce type n'ont pas d'axes.

                                                  -

                                                  L'onglet Axe vertical vous permet de modifier les paramètres de l'axe vertical, également appelé axe des valeurs ou axe y, qui affiche des valeurs numériques. Notez que l'axe vertical sera l'axe des catégories qui affiche des étiquettes de texte pour les diagrammes en Barre, dans ce cas, les options de l'onglet Axe vertical correspondront à celles décrites dans la section suivante. Pour les diagrammes XY (Nuage), les deux axes sont des axes de valeur.

                                                  +

                                                  L'onglet Axe vertical vous permet de modifier les paramètres de l'axe vertical, également appelés axe des valeurs ou axe y, qui affiche des valeurs numériques. Notez que l'axe vertical sera l'axe des catégories qui affiche des étiquettes de texte pour les Graphiques à barres. Dans ce cas, les options de l'onglet Axe vertical correspondront à celles décrites dans la section suivante. Pour les Graphiques XY(Nuage), les deux axes sont des axes de valeur.

                                                    -
                                                  • La section Option des axes permet de modifier les paramètres suivants :
                                                      +
                                                    • La section Options des axes permet de modifier les paramètres suivants :
                                                      • Valeur minimale - sert à spécifier la valeur la plus basse affichée au début de l'axe vertical. L'option Auto est sélectionnée par défaut, dans ce cas la valeur minimale est calculée automatiquement en fonction de la plage de données sélectionnée. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Fixe dans la liste déroulante et spécifier une valeur différente dans le champ de saisie sur la droite.
                                                      • Valeur maximale - sert à spécifier la valeur la plus élevée affichée à la fin de l'axe vertical. L'option Auto est sélectionnée par défaut, dans ce cas la valeur maximale est calculée automatiquement en fonction de la plage de données sélectionnée. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Fixe dans la liste déroulante et spécifier une valeur différente dans le champ de saisie sur la droite.
                                                      • Axes croisés - est utilisé pour spécifier un point sur l'axe vertical où l'axe horizontal doit le traverser. L'option Auto est sélectionnée par défaut, dans ce cas la valeur du point d'intersection est calculée automatiquement en fonction de la plage de données sélectionnée. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Valeur dans la liste déroulante et spécifier une valeur différente dans le champ de saisie à droite, ou définir le point d'intersection des axes à la Valeur minimum/maximum sur l'axe vertical.
                                                      • -
                                                      • Unités d'affichage - est utilisé pour déterminer la représentation des valeurs numériques le long de l'axe vertical. Cette option peut être utile si vous travaillez avec de grands nombres et souhaitez que les valeurs sur l'axe soient affichées de manière plus compacte et plus lisible (par exemple, vous pouvez représenter 50 000 comme 50 en utilisant les unités d'affichage de Milliers). Sélectionnez les unités souhaitées dans la liste déroulante : Centaines, Milliers, 10 000, 100 000, Millions, 10 000 000, 100 000 000, Milliards, Billions, ou choisissez l'option pour revenir aux unités par défaut.
                                                      • +
                                                      • Unités d'affichage - est utilisé pour déterminer la représentation des valeurs numériques le long de l'axe vertical. Cette option peut être utile si vous travaillez avec de grands nombres et souhaitez que les valeurs sur l'axe soient affichées de manière plus compacte et plus lisible (par exemple, vous pouvez représenter 50 000 comme 50 en utilisant les unités d'affichage de Milliers). Sélectionnez les unités souhaitées dans la liste déroulante : Centaines, Milliers, 10 000, 100 000, Millions, 10 000 000, 100 000 000, Milliards, Billions, ou choisissez l'option Aucun pour retourner aux unités par défaut.
                                                      • Valeurs dans l'ordre inverse - est utilisé pour afficher les valeurs dans la direction opposée. Lorsque la case n'est pas cochée, la valeur la plus basse est en bas et la valeur la plus haute est en haut de l'axe. Lorsque la case est cochée, les valeurs sont triées de haut en bas.
                                                    • @@ -117,7 +117,7 @@

                                                    Paramètres du graphique

                                                    -

                                                    L'onglet Axe horizontal vous permet de modifier les paramètres de l'axe horizontal, également appelé axe des catégories ou axe x, qui affiche des étiquettes de texte. Notez que l'axe horizontal sera l'axe des valeurs qui affiche des valeurs numériques pour les diagrammes en Barre, dans ce cas, les options de l'onglet Axe horizontal correspondront à celles décrites dans la section précédente. Pour les Graphiques XY(Nuage), les deux axes sont des axes de valeur.

                                                    +

                                                    L'onglet Axe horizontal vous permet de modifier les paramètres de l'axe horizontal, également appelés axe des catégories ou axe x, qui affiche des libellés textuels. Notez que l'axe horizontal sera l'axe des valeurs qui affiche des valeurs numériques pour les Graphiques à barres. Dans ce cas, les options de l'onglet Axe horizontal correspondent à celles décrites dans la section précédente. Pour les Graphiques XY(Nuage), les deux axes sont des axes de valeur.

                                                    • La section Options des axes permet de modifier les paramètres suivants :
                                                      • Axes croisés - est utilisé pour spécifier un point sur l'axe horizontal où l'axe vertical doit le traverser. L'option Auto est sélectionnée par défaut, dans ce cas la valeur du point d'intersection est calculée automatiquement en fonction de la plage de données sélectionnée. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Valeur dans la liste déroulante et spécifier une valeur différente dans le champ de saisie à droite, ou définir le point d'intersection des axes à la Valeur minimum/maximum(qui correspond à la première/dernière catégorie) sur l'axe horizontal.
                                                      • @@ -137,7 +137,7 @@
                                                    -

                                                    Graphique - Paramètres avancés :

                                                    +

                                                    Graphique - Paramètres avancés

                                                    L'onglet Texte de remplacement permet de spécifier un Titre et une Description qui sera lue aux personnes avec des déficiences cognitives ou visuelles pour les aider à mieux comprendre l'information du graphique.

                                        @@ -145,23 +145,24 @@

                                        Déplacer et redimensionner des graphiques

                                        Déplacer un graphique une fois le graphique ajouté, vous pouvez modifier sa taille et sa position. Pour changer la taille du graphique, faites glisser les petits carreaux Icône Carreaux situés sur ses bords. Pour garder les proportions de l'objet sélectionné lors du redimensionnement, maintenez la touche Maj enfoncée et faites glisser l'une des icônes de coin.

                                        Pour modifier la position du graphique, utilisez l'icône Flèche qui apparaît si vous placez le curseur de votre souris sur l'image. Faites glisser l'objet vers la position choisie sans relâcher le bouton de la souris. Lorsque vous déplacez le graphique, des lignes de guidage s'affichent pour vous aider à positionner l'objet sur la page avec précision (si un style d'habillage autre que aligné est sélectionné).

                                        -
                                        -

                                        Modifier les éléments du graphique

                                        +

                                        Note : la liste des raccourcis clavier qui peuvent être utilisés lorsque vous travaillez avec des objets est disponible ici.

                                        +
                                        +

                                        Modifier les éléments de graphique

                                        Pour modifier le Titre du graphique, sélectionnez le texte par défaut à l'aide de la souris et saisissez le vôtre à la place.

                                        Pour modifier la mise en forme de la police dans les éléments de texte, tels que le titre du graphique, les titres des axes, les entrées de légende, les étiquettes de données, etc., sélectionnez l'élément de texte nécessaire en cliquant dessus. Utilisez ensuite les icônes de l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure pour modifier le type de police, la taille, la couleur ou le style de décoration.

                                        -

                                        Pour supprimer un élément de graphique, sélectionnez-le en cliquant sur le bouton gauche de la souris et appuyez sur la touche Suppr du clavier.

                                        -

                                        Vous pouvez également faire pivoter les graphiques 3D à l'aide de la souris. Faites un clic gauche dans la zone de tracé et maintenez le bouton de la souris enfoncé jusqu'à ce qu'une boîte pointillée bleue apparaisse. Faites glisser le curseur sans relâcher le bouton de la souris pour modifier l'orientation du graphique 3D.

                                        +

                                        Pour supprimer un élément de graphique, sélectionnez-le avec la souris et appuyez sur la touche Suppr.

                                        +

                                        Vous pouvez également faire pivoter les graphiques 3D à l'aide de la souris. Faites un clic gauche dans la zone de tracé et maintenez le bouton de la souris enfoncé. Faites glisser le curseur sans relâcher le bouton de la souris pour modifier l'orientation du graphique 3D.

                                        Graphique 3D


                                        Ajuster les paramètres du graphique

                                        Onglet Paramètres du graphique

                                        -

                                        Certains paramètres du graphique peuvent être modifiés en utilisant l'onglet Paramètres du graphique de la barre latérale droite. Pour l'activer, cliquez sur l'image et sélectionnez l'icône Paramètres du graphique Paramètres du graphique à droite. Vous pouvez y modifier les paramètres suivants :

                                        +

                                        Certains paramètres du graphique peuvent être modifiés en utilisant l'onglet Paramètres du graphique de la barre latérale droite. Pour l'activer, cliquez sur le graphique et sélectionnez l'icône Paramètres du graphique Paramètres du graphique à droite. Vous pouvez y modifier les paramètres suivants :

                                          -
                                        • Taille est utilisée pour afficher la et la du graphique actuel.
                                        • +
                                        • Taille est utilisée pour afficher la Largeur et la Hauteur du graphique actuel.
                                        • Style d'habillage sert à sélectionner un des styles d'habillage - aligné sur le texte, carré, rapproché, au travers, haut et bas, devant le texte, derrière le texte (pour en savoir plus, consultez la section des paramètres avancés ci-dessous).
                                        • -
                                        • Changer le type de graphique permet de modifier le type et/ou le style du graphique sélectionné.

                                          Pour sélectionner le Style voulu, utilisez le deuxième menu déroulant de la section Changer le type de graphique.

                                          +
                                        • Changer le type de graphique permet de modifier le type et/ou le style du graphique sélectionné.

                                          Pour sélectionner le Style de graphique nécessaire, utilisez le deuxième menu déroulant de la section Modifier le type de graphique.

                                        • -
                                        • Modifier les données est utilisé pour ouvrir la fenêtre "Éditeur de graphique".

                                          Remarque : pour ouvrir rapidement la fenêtre "Éditeur de graphiques", vous pouvez également double-cliquer sur le graphique dans le document.

                                          +
                                        • Modifier les données est utilisé pour ouvrir la fenêtre « Éditeur de graphique ».

                                          Remarque : pour ouvrir rapidement la fenêtre "Éditeur de graphiques", vous pouvez également double-cliquer sur le graphique dans le document.

                                        Certains paramètres de l'image peuvent être également modifiés en utilisant le menu contextuel. Les options du menu sont les suivantes :

                                        diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertContentControls.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertContentControls.htm index 02721676c..7c78e8a0f 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertContentControls.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertContentControls.htm @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@

                                        Fenêtre des paramètres de contrôle du contenu

                                        • Spécifiez le Titre ou l'Étiquette du contrôle de contenu dans les champs correspondants. Le titre s'affiche lorsque le contrôle est sélectionné dans le document. Les étiquettes sont utilisées pour identifier les contrôles de contenu afin que vous puissiez y faire référence dans votre code.
                                        • -
                                        • Choisissez si vous voulez afficher le contrôle de contenu avec une Zone de délimitation ou non. Utilisez l'option Aucune pour afficher le contrôle sans la zone de délimitation. Si vous sélectionnez l'option Zone de délimitation, vous pouvez choisir la Couleur de cette zone à l'aide du champ ci-dessous.
                                        • +
                                        • Choisissez si vous voulez afficher le contrôle de contenu avec une Zone de délimitation ou non. Utilisez l'option Aucune pour afficher le contrôle sans la zone de délimitation. Si vous sélectionnez l'option Zone de délimitation, vous pouvez choisir la Couleur de cette zone à l'aide du champ ci-dessous. Cliquez sur le bouton Appliquer à tous pour appliquer les paramètres d’apparence spécifiés à tous les contrôles de contenu du document.
                                        • Empêchez le contrôle de contenu d'être supprimé ou modifié en utilisant l'option de la section Verrouillage:
                                          • Le contrôle du contenu ne peut pas être supprimé - cochez cette case pour empêcher la suppression du contrôle de contenu.
                                          • Le contenu ne peut pas être modifié - cochez cette case pour protéger le contenu du contrôle de contenu contre une modification.
                                          • diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertDropCap.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertDropCap.htm index 417e83b83..a9df42c82 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertDropCap.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertDropCap.htm @@ -19,7 +19,7 @@
                                            1. placez le curseur à l'intérieur du paragraphe dans lequel vous voulez insérer une lettrine,
                                            2. passez à l'onglet Insérer de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                                            3. -
                                            4. cliquez sur l'icône Insérer une lettrine sur la barre d'outils supérieure,
                                            5. +
                                            6. cliquez sur l'icône Insérer une lettrine Insérer une lettrine sur la barre d'outils supérieure,
                                            7. sélectionnez l'option nécessaire dans la liste déroulante :
                                              • Dans le texte Insérer une lettrine - Dans le texte - pour insérer une lettrine dans le paragraphe.
                                              • Dans la marge Insérer une lettrine - Dans la marge - pour placer une lettrine dans la marge gauche.
                                              • @@ -31,7 +31,7 @@

                                                La lettrine sélectionnée est entourée par un cadre (un conteneur utilisé pour positionner la lettrine sur la page). Vous pouvez facilement changer la taille du cadre en faisant glisser ses bordures ou changer sa position en utilisant l'icône Flèche qui apparaît si vous positionnez le curseur sur le cadre.

                                                Pour supprimer la lettrine ajoutée, sélectionnez-la, cliquez sur l'icône Insérer une lettrine Insérer une lettrine de la barre d'outils supérieure et choisissez l'option Aucune Insérer une lettrine - Aucune dans la liste déroulante.


                                                -

                                                Pour modifier les paramètres de la lettrine ajoutée, sélectionnez-la, cliquez sur l'icône de la barre d'outils supérieure Insérer une lettrine et choisissez l'option Paramètres de la lettrine dans la liste déroulante. La fenêtre Lettrine - Paramètres avancés s'ouvre :

                                                +

                                                Pour modifier les paramètres de la lettrine ajoutée, sélectionnez-la, cliquez sur l'icône de la barre d'outils supérieure Insérer une lettrine Insérer une lettrine et choisissez l'option Paramètres de la lettrine dans la liste déroulante. La fenêtre Lettrine - Paramètres avancés s'ouvre :

                                                Lettrine - Paramètres avancés

                                                L'onglet Lettrine vous permet de régler les paramètres suivants :

                                                  diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm index d84c48a42..6ae8c01bb 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm @@ -24,6 +24,7 @@
                                                • sélectionnez l'une des options suivantes pour charger l'image :
                                                  • l'option Image à partir d'un fichier ouvre la fenêtre de dialogue standard pour sélectionner le fichier. Sélectionnez le fichier de votre choix sur le disque dur de votre ordinateur et cliquez sur le bouton Ouvrir
                                                  • l'option Image à partir d'une URL ouvre la fenêtre où vous pouvez saisir l'adresse Web de l'image et cliquer sur le bouton OK
                                                  • +
                                                  • l'option Image provenant du stockage ouvrira la fenêtre Sélectionner la source de données. Sélectionnez une image stockée sur votre portail et cliquez sur le bouton OK
                                                • après avoir ajouté l'image, vous pouvez modifier sa taille, ses propriétés et sa position.
                                                • @@ -38,8 +39,28 @@

                                                  Ajuster les paramètres de l'image

                                                  Onglet Paramètres de l'imageCertains paramètres de l'image peuvent être modifiés dans l'onglet Paramètres de l'image de la barre latérale droite. Pour l'activer, cliquez sur l'image et sélectionnez l'icône Paramètres de l'image Paramètres de l'image à droite. Vous pouvez y modifier les paramètres suivants :

                                                    -
                                                  • Taille est utilisée pour afficher la Largeur et la Hauteur de l'image actuelle. Si nécessaire, vous pouvez restaurer la taille d'image par défaut en cliquant sur le bouton Taille par défaut. Le bouton Ajuster à la marge permet de redimensionner l'image, de sorte qu'elle occupe tout l'espace entre les marges gauche et droite de la page.
                                                  • -
                                                  • Style d'habillage sert à sélectionner un des styles d'habillage - aligné sur le texte, carré, rapproché, au travers, haut et bas, devant le texte, derrière le texte (pour en savoir plus, consultez la section des paramètres avancés ci-dessous).
                                                  • +
                                                  • Taille est utilisée pour afficher la Largeur et la Hauteur de l'image actuelle. Si nécessaire, vous pouvez restaurer la taille d'image par défaut en cliquant sur le bouton Taille par défaut. Le bouton Ajuster à la marge permet de redimensionner l'image, de sorte qu'elle occupe tout l'espace entre les marges gauche et droite de la page.

                                                    Le bouton Rogner permet de rogner l'image. Cliquez sur le bouton Rogner pour activer les poignées de recadrage qui apparaissent sur les coins de l'image et au milieu de chaque côté. Faites glisser manuellement les poignées pour définir la zone de recadrage. Vous pouvez déplacer le curseur de la souris sur la bordure de la zone de recadrage pour qu'il se transforme en icône Flèche et faire glisser la zone.

                                                    +
                                                      +
                                                    • Pour rogner un seul côté, faites glisser la poignée située au milieu de ce côté.
                                                    • +
                                                    • Pour rogner simultanément deux côtés adjacents, faites glisser l'une des poignées d'angle.
                                                    • +
                                                    • Pour rogner également deux côtés opposés de l'image, maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée lorsque vous faites glisser la poignée au milieu de l'un de ces côtés.
                                                    • +
                                                    • Pour rogner également tous les côtés de l'image, maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée lorsque vous faites glisser l'une des poignées d'angle.
                                                    • +
                                                    +

                                                    Lorsque la zone de recadrage est définie, cliquez à nouveau sur le bouton Rogner, ou appuyez sur la touche Echap, ou cliquez n'importe où à l'extérieur de la zone de recadrage pour appliquer les modifications.

                                                    +

                                                    Une fois la zone de recadrage sélectionnée, il est également possible d'utiliser les options Remplir et Ajuster disponibles dans le menu déroulant Rogner. Cliquez de nouveau sur le bouton Rogner et sélectionnez l'option de votre choix :

                                                    +
                                                      +
                                                    • Si vous sélectionnez l'option Remplir, la partie centrale de l'image originale sera conservée et utilisée pour remplir la zone de cadrage sélectionnée, tandis que les autres parties de l'image seront supprimées.
                                                    • +
                                                    • Si vous sélectionnez l'option Ajuster, l'image sera redimensionnée pour correspondre à la hauteur ou à la largeur de la zone de recadrage. Aucune partie de l'image originale ne sera supprimée, mais des espaces vides peuvent apparaître dans la zone de recadrage sélectionnée.
                                                    • +
                                                    +
                                                  • +
                                                  • Rotation permet de faire pivoter l’image de 90 degrés dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre ou dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre, ainsi que de retourner l’image horizontalement ou verticalement. Cliquez sur l'un des boutons :
                                                      +
                                                    • icône Pivoter dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre pour faire pivoter l’image de 90 degrés dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre
                                                    • +
                                                    • icône Pivoter dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre pour faire pivoter l’image de 90 degrés dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre
                                                    • +
                                                    • icône Retourner horizontalement pour retourner l’image horizontalement (de gauche à droite)
                                                    • +
                                                    • icône Retourner verticalement pour retourner l’image verticalement (à l'envers)
                                                    • +
                                                    +
                                                  • +
                                                  • Style d'habillage sert à sélectionner un des styles d'habillage - aligné sur le texte, carré, rapproché, au travers, haut et bas, devant le texte, derrière le texte (pour en savoir plus, consultez la section des paramètres avancés ci-dessous).
                                                  • Remplacer l’image sert à remplacer l'image actuelle et charger une autre À partir d'un fichier ou À partir d'une URL.

                                                  Certains paramètres de l'image peuvent être également modifiés en utilisant le menu contextuel. Les options du menu sont les suivantes :

                                                  @@ -48,7 +69,9 @@
                                                • Organiser sert à placer l'image sélectionnée au premier plan, envoyer à fond, avancer ou reculer ainsi que grouper ou dégrouper des images pour effectuer des opérations avec plusieurs images à la fois. Pour en savoir plus sur l'organisation des objets, vous pouvez vous référer à cette page.
                                                • Aligner sert à aligner le texte à gauche, au centre, à droite, en haut, au milieu, en bas. Pour en savoir plus sur l'alignement des objets, vous pouvez vous référer à cette page.
                                                • Style d'habillage sert à sélectionner un des styles d'habillage - aligné sur le texte, carré, rapproché, au travers, haut et bas, devant le texte, derrière le texte - ou modifier le contour de l'habillage. L'option Modifier les limites du renvoi à la ligne n'est disponible qu'au cas où vous sélectionnez le style d'habillage autre que 'aligné sur le texte'. Faites glisser les points d'habillage pour personnaliser les limites. Pour créer un nouveau point d'habillage, cliquez sur la ligne rouge et faites-la glisser vers la position désirée. Modifier les limites du renvoi à la ligne
                                                • -
                                                • Taille par défaut sert à changer la taille actuelle de l'image ou rétablir la taille par défaut.
                                                • +
                                                • Faire pivoter permet de faire pivoter l’image de 90 degrés dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre ou dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre, ainsi que de retourner l’image horizontalement ou verticalement.
                                                • +
                                                • Rogner est utilisé pour appliquer l'une des options de rognage : Rogner, Remplir ou Ajuster. Sélectionnez l'option Rogner dans le sous-menu, puis faites glisser les poignées de recadrage pour définir la zone de rognage, puis cliquez à nouveau sur l'une de ces trois options dans le sous-menu pour appliquer les modifications.
                                                • +
                                                • Taille par défaut sert à changer la taille actuelle de l'image ou rétablir la taille par défaut.
                                                • Remplacer l’image sert à remplacer l'image actuelle et charger une autre À partir d'un fichier ou À partir d'une URL.
                                                • Paramètres avancés sert à ouvrir la fenêtre 'Image - Paramètres avancés'.
                                                @@ -60,6 +83,12 @@
                                                • Largeur et Hauteur - utilisez ces options pour modifier langeur / hauteur de l'image. Si le bouton Proportions constantes Icône Proportions constantes est cliqué(auquel cas il ressemble à ceci Icône Proportions constantes activée), les proportions d'image originales sera gardées lors de la modification de la largeur/hauteur. Pour rétablir la taille par défaut de l'image ajoutée, cliquez sur le bouton Par défaut.
                                                +

                                                Image - Paramètres avancés : Rotation

                                                +

                                                L'onglet Rotation comporte les paramètres suivants :

                                                +
                                                  +
                                                • Angle - utilisez cette option pour faire pivoter l’image d'un angle exactement spécifié. Entrez la valeur souhaitée mesurée en degrés dans le champ ou réglez-la à l'aide des flèches situées à droite.
                                                • +
                                                • Retourné - cochez la case Horizontalement pour retourner l’image horizontalement (de gauche à droite) ou la case Verticalement pour retourner l’image verticalement (à l'envers).
                                                • +

                                                Image - Paramètres avancés : Habillage du texte

                                                L'onglet Habillage du texte contient les paramètres suivants :

                                                  diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertPageNumbers.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertPageNumbers.htm index bf5aa9d2e..825ce78ce 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertPageNumbers.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertPageNumbers.htm @@ -17,7 +17,7 @@

                                                  Pour insérer des numéros de page dans votre document,

                                                  1. passez à l'onglet Insérer de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                                                  2. -
                                                  3. cliquez sur l'icône Modifier l'en-tête ou le pied de page de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                                                  4. +
                                                  5. cliquez sur l'icône icône Modifier l'en-tête ou le pied de page Modifier l'en-tête ou le pied de page de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                                                  6. sélectionnez l'option Insérer le numéro de page du sous-menu,
                                                  7. sélectionnez l'une des options suivantes :
                                                    • Pour mettre un numéro de page à chaque page de votre document, sélectionnez la position de numéro de page sur la page.
                                                    • @@ -28,7 +28,7 @@

                                                      Pour insérer le nombre total de pages dans votre document (par ex. si vous souhaitez créer une saisie Page X de Y):

                                                      1. placez le curseur où vous souhaitez insérer le nombre total de pages,
                                                      2. -
                                                      3. cliquez sur l'icône Modifier l'en-tête ou le pied de page de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                                                      4. +
                                                      5. cliquez sur l'icône icône Modifier l'en-tête ou le pied de page Modifier l'en-tête ou le pied de page de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                                                      6. sélectionnez l'option Insérer le nombre de pages.

                                                      diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertSymbols.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertSymbols.htm new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ee1a22f82 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertSymbols.htm @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + Insérer des symboles et des caractères + + + + + + + +
                                                      +
                                                      + +
                                                      +

                                                      Insérer des symboles et des caractères

                                                      +

                                                      Que faire si vous avez besoin de symboles ou de caractères spéciaux qui ne sont pas sur votre clavier? Pour insérer de tels symboles dans votre documents, utilisez l’option L’icône Table de symboles Insérer un symbole et suivez ces étapes simples:

                                                      +
                                                        +
                                                      • Placez le curseur là où vous voulez insérer un symbole spécial,
                                                      • +
                                                      • Basculez vers l’onglet Insérer de la barre d’outils supérieure.
                                                      • +
                                                      • + Cliquez sur L’icône Table de symbolesSymbole, +

                                                        Symbole

                                                        +
                                                      • +
                                                      • De la fenêtre Symbole qui apparaît sélectionnez le symbole approprié.
                                                      • +
                                                      • +

                                                        Utilisez la section Plage pour trouvez rapidement le symbole nécessaire. Tous les symboles sont divisés en groupes spécifiques, par exemple, sélectionnez des «symboles monétaires» spécifiques si vous souhaitez insérer un caractère monétaire.

                                                        +

                                                        Si ce caractère n’est pas dans le jeu, sélectionnez une police différente. Plusieurs d’entre elles ont également des caractères différents que ceux du jeu standard.

                                                        +

                                                        Ou, entrez la valeur hexadécimale Unicode du symbole souhaité dans le champ Valeur hexadécimale Unicode. Ce code se trouve dans la carte des Caractères.

                                                        +

                                                        Les symboles précédemment utilisés sont également affichés dans le champ des Caractères spéciaux récemment utilisés.

                                                        +
                                                      • +
                                                      • Cliquez sur Insérer. Le caractère sélectionné sera ajouté au document.
                                                      • +
                                                      + +

                                                      Insérer des symboles ASCII

                                                      +

                                                      La table ASCII est utilisée pour ajouter des caractères.

                                                      +

                                                      Pour le faire, maintenez la touche ALT enfoncée et utilisez le pavé numérique pour saisir le code de caractère.

                                                      +

                                                      Remarque: utilisez le pavé numérique, pas les chiffres du clavier principal. Pour activer le pavé numérique, appuyez sur la touche verrouillage numérique.

                                                      +

                                                      Par exemple, pour ajouter un caractère de paragraphe (§), maintenez la touche ALT tout en tapant 789, puis relâchez la touche ALT.

                                                      + +

                                                      Insérer des symboles à l’aide de la table des caractères Unicode

                                                      +

                                                      Des caractères et symboles supplémentaires peuvent également être trouvés dans la table des symboles Windows. Pour ouvrir cette table, effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes:

                                                      +
                                                        +
                                                      • Dans le champ Rechercher, tapez « table de caractères » et ouvrez –la,
                                                      • +
                                                      • + Appuyez simultanément sur Win+R, puis dans la fenêtre ouverte tapez charmap.exe et cliquez sur OK. +

                                                        Caractères

                                                        +
                                                      • +
                                                      +

                                                      Dans la Table des Caractères ouverte, sélectionnez l’un des Jeux de caractères, Groupes et Polices. Ensuite, cliquez sur le caractère nécessaire, copiéz-les dans le presse-papier et collez-les au bon endroit du document.

                                                      +
                                                      + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertTables.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertTables.htm index dc7afeac1..c801bc8fc 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertTables.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertTables.htm @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@

                                                      Pour insérer un tableau dans le texte de votre document,

                                                      1. placez le curseur à l'endroit où vous voulez insérer le tableau,
                                                      2. -
                                                      3. passez à l'onglet Insérer de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                                                      4. +
                                                      5. passez à l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                                                      6. cliquez sur l'icône Insérer un tableau icône Insérer un tableau sur la la barre d'outils supérieure,
                                                      7. sélectionnez une des options pour créer le tableau :
                                                        • soit un tableau avec le nombre prédéfini de cellules (10 par 8 cellules maximum)

                                                          @@ -42,6 +42,7 @@

                                                          Pour sélectionner une certaine ligne, déplacez le curseur de la souris sur la bordure gauche du tableau à côté de la ligne voulue pour que le curseur devienne la flèche noire horizontale Sélectionner une ligne, puis cliquez avec le bouton gauche de la souris.

                                                          Pour sélectionner une certaine colonne, déplacez le curseur de la souris sur la bordure supérieure de la colonne voulue pour que le curseur se transforme en flèche noire dirigée vers le bas Sélectionner une colonne, puis cliquez avec le bouton gauche de la souris.

                                                          Il est également possible de sélectionner une cellule, une ligne, une colonne ou un tableau à l'aide des options du menu contextuel ou de la section Lignes et colonnes de la barre latérale droite.

                                                          +

                                                          Remarque : pour vous déplacer dans un tableau, vous pouvez utiliser des raccourcis clavier.


                                                          Ajuster les paramètres du tableau

                                                          Certaines paramètres du tableau ainsi que sa structure peuvent être modifiés à l'aide du menu contextuel. Les options du menu sont les suivantes :

                                                          @@ -55,7 +56,7 @@
                                                        • Distribuer les lignes est utilisé pour ajuster les cellules sélectionnées afin qu'elles aient la même hauteur sans changer la hauteur globale du tableau.
                                                        • Distribuer les colonnes est utilisé pour ajuster les cellules sélectionnées afin qu'elles aient la même largeur sans modifier la largeur globale du tableau.
                                                        • Alignement vertical de cellule sert à aligner le texte en haut, au centre ou en bas de la cellule sélectionnée.
                                                        • -
                                                        • Orientation du texte - sert à modifier l'orientation du texte dans une cellule. Vous pouvez placer le texte horisontallement, verticallement de haut en bas (Rotation 90°), ou verticcalement de bas en haut (Rotation 270°).
                                                        • +
                                                        • Orientation du texte - sert à modifier l'orientation du texte dans une cellule. Vous pouvez placer le texte horizontalement, verticalement de haut en bas (Rotation du texte vers le bas), ou verticalement de bas en haut (Rotation du texte vers le haut).
                                                        • Paramètres avancés du tableau sert à ouvrir la fenêtre 'Tableau - Paramètres avancés'.
                                                        • Lien hypertexte sert à insérer un lien hypertexte.
                                                        • Paramètres avancés du paragraphe- sert à ouvrir la fenêtre 'Paragraphe - Paramètres avancés'.
                                                        • @@ -82,11 +83,12 @@
                                                        • Style des bordures sert à sélectionner la taille de la bordure, la couleur, le style ainsi que la couleur d'arrière-plan.

                                                        • Lignes & colonnes sert à effectuer certaines opérations avec le tableau : sélectionner, supprimer, insérer des lignes et des colonnes, fusionner des cellules, fractionner une cellule.

                                                        • Taille de cellule est utilisée pour ajuster la largeur et la hauteur de la cellule actuellement sélectionnée. Dans cette section, vous pouvez également Distribuer les lignes afin que toutes les cellules sélectionnées aient la même hauteur ou Distribuer les colonnes de sorte que toutes les cellules sélectionnées aient la même largeur.

                                                        • -
                                                        • Répéter en haut de chaque page en tant que ligne d'en-tête sert à insérer la même rangée d'en-tête en haut de chaque page dans les tableaux longs.

                                                        • +
                                                        • Ajouter une formule permet d'insérer une formule dans la cellule de tableau sélectionnée.

                                                        • +
                                                        • Répéter en haut de chaque page en tant que ligne d'en-tête sert à insérer la même rangée d'en-tête en haut de chaque page dans les tableaux longs.

                                                        • Afficher les paramètres avancés sert à ouvrir la fenêtre 'Tableau - Paramètres avancés'.


                                                        -

                                                        Pour modifier les paramètres du tableau avancés, cliquez sur le tableau avec le clic droit de la souris et sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés du tableau du menu contextuel ou utilisez le lien Afficher les paramètres avancés sur la barre latérale droite. La fenêtre Propriétés du tableau s'ouvre :

                                                        +

                                                        Pour modifier les paramètres du tableau avancés, cliquez sur le tableau avec le clic droit de la souris et sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés du tableau du menu contextuel ou utilisez le lien Afficher les paramètres avancés sur la barre latérale droite. La fenêtre Propriétés du tableau s'ouvre :

                                                        Tableau - Paramètres avancés

                                                        L'onglet Tableau permet de modifier les paramètres de tout le tableau.

                                                          diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertTextObjects.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertTextObjects.htm index 91f3e52ff..caaee2a3f 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertTextObjects.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/InsertTextObjects.htm @@ -18,31 +18,31 @@

                                                          Ajouter un objet textuel

                                                          Vous pouvez ajouter un objet texte n'importe où sur la page. Pour le faire :

                                                            -
                                                          1. passez à l'onglet Insérer de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                                                          2. -
                                                          3. sélectionnez le type d'objet textuel désiré :
                                                              -
                                                            • Pour ajouter une zone de texte, cliquez sur l'icône Icône Zone de texte Zone de texte dans la barre d'outils supérieure, puis cliquez à l'endroit où vous souhaitez insérer la zone de texte, maintenez le bouton de la souris enfoncé et faites glisser la bordure de la zone de texte pour spécifier sa taille. Lorsque vous relâchez le bouton de la souris, le point d'insertion apparaîtra dans la zone de texte ajoutée, vous permettant d'entrer votre texte.

                                                              Remarque : il est également possible d'insérer une zone de texte en cliquant sur l'icône Insérer une forme automatique Forme dans la barre d'outils supérieure et en sélectionnant la forme Insérer une forme automatique dans le groupe Formes de base.

                                                              +
                                                            • passez à l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                                                            • +
                                                            • sélectionnez le type d'objet textuel voulu :
                                                                +
                                                              • Pour ajouter une zone de texte, cliquez sur l'icône Icône Zone de texte Zone de texte de la barre d'outils supérieure, puis cliquez sur l'emplacement où vous souhaitez insérer la zone de texte, maintenez le bouton de la souris enfoncé et faites glisser la bordure pour définir sa taille. Lorsque vous relâchez le bouton de la souris, le point d'insertion apparaîtra dans la zone de texte ajoutée, vous permettant d'entrer votre texte.

                                                                Remarque: il est également possible d'insérer une zone de texte en cliquant sur l'icône Insérer une forme automatique Forme dans la barre d'outils supérieure et en sélectionnant la forme Insérer une forme automatique textuelle dans le groupe Formes de base.

                                                              • Pour ajouter un objet Text Art, cliquez sur l'icône Icône Text Art Text Art dans la barre d'outils supérieure, puis cliquez sur le modèle de style souhaité - l'objet Text Art sera ajouté à la position actuelle du curseur. Sélectionnez le texte par défaut dans la zone de texte avec la souris et remplacez-le par votre propre texte.
                                                            • cliquez en dehors de l'objet texte pour appliquer les modifications et revenir au document.
                                                          -

                                                          Le texte de l'objet textuel fait partie de celui-ci (ainsi si vous déplacez ou faites pivoter l'objet, le texte change de position lui aussi).

                                                          -

                                                          Comme un objet texte inséré représente un cadre rectangulaire contenant du texte (les objets Text Art ont des bordures de zone de texte invisibles par défaut) et que ce cadre est une forme automatique simple, vous pouvez modifier aussi bien les propriétés de forme que de texte.

                                                          -

                                                          Pour supprimer l'objet texte ajouté, cliquez sur la bordure de la zone de texte et appuyez sur la touche Suppr du clavier. Le texte dans la zone de texte sera également supprimé.

                                                          +

                                                          Le texte dans l'objet textuel fait partie de celui ci (ainsi si vous déplacez ou faites pivoter l'objet textuel, le texte change de position lui aussi).

                                                          +

                                                          Comme un objet textuel inséré représente un cadre rectangulaire (avec des bordures de zone de texte invisibles par défaut) avec du texte à l'intérieur et que ce cadre est une forme automatique commune, vous pouvez modifier aussi bien les propriétés de forme que de texte.

                                                          +

                                                          Pour supprimer l'objet textuel ajouté, cliquez sur la bordure de la zone de texte et appuyez sur la touche Suppr du clavier. Le texte dans la zone de texte sera également supprimé.

                                                          Mettre en forme une zone de texte

                                                          Sélectionnez la zone de texte en cliquant sur sa bordure pour pouvoir modifier ses propriétés. Lorsque la zone de texte est sélectionnée, ses bordures sont affichées en tant que lignes pleines (non pointillées).

                                                          Zone de texte sélectionnée

                                                          • Pour redimensionner, déplacer, faire pivoter la zone de texte, utilisez les poignées spéciales sur les bords de la forme.
                                                          • Pour modifier le remplissage, le contour, le style d'habillage de la zone de texte ou remplacer la boîte rectangulaire par une forme différente, cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres de forme Paramètres de la forme dans la barre latérale de droite et utilisez les options correspondantes.
                                                          • -
                                                          • Pour aligner la zone de texte sur la page, organiser les zones de texte en fonction d'autres objets, modifier un style d'habillage ou accéder aux paramètres avancés de forme, cliquez avec le bouton droit sur la bordure de zone de texte et utilisez les options du menu contextuel. Pour en savoir plus sur l'organisation et l'alignement des objets, vous pouvez vous référer à cette page.
                                                          • +
                                                          • pour aligner la zone de texte sur la page, organiser les zones de texte en fonction d'autres objets, pivoter ou retourner une zone de texte, modifier un style d'habillage ou accéder aux paramètres avancés de forme, cliquez avec le bouton droit sur la bordure de zone de texte et utilisez les options du menu contextuel. Pour en savoir plus sur l'organisation et l'alignement des objets, vous pouvez vous référer à cette page.

                                                          Mettre en forme le texte dans la zone de texte

                                                          Cliquez sur le texte dans la zone de texte pour pouvoir modifier ses propriétés. Lorsque le texte est sélectionné, les bordures de la zone de texte sont affichées en lignes pointillées.

                                                          Texte sélectionné

                                                          -

                                                          Remarque : il est également possible de modifier le formatage du texte lorsque la zone de texte (et non le texte lui-même) est sélectionnée. Dans ce cas, toutes les modifications seront appliquées à tout le texte dans la zone de texte. Certaines options de mise en forme de police (type de police, taille, couleur et styles de décoration) peuvent être appliquées séparément à une partie du texte sélectionnée précédemment.

                                                          -

                                                          Pour faire pivoter le texte dans la zone de texte, cliquez avec le bouton droit sur le texte, sélectionnez l'option Direction du texte, puis choisissez l'une des options disponibles : Horizontal (sélectionné par défaut), Rotation à 90° (définit une direction verticale, de haut en bas) ou Rotation à 270° (définit une direction verticale, de bas en haut).

                                                          +

                                                          Remarque : il est également possible de modifier le formatage du texte lorsque la zone de texte (et non le texte lui-même) est sélectionnée. Dans ce cas, toutes les modifications seront appliquées à tout le texte dans la zone de texte. Certaines options de mise en forme de police (type de police, taille, couleur et styles de décoration) peuvent être appliquées séparément à une partie du texte précédemment sélectionnée.

                                                          +

                                                          Pour faire pivoter le texte dans la zone de texte, cliquez avec le bouton droit sur le texte, sélectionnez l'option Direction du texte, puis choisissez l'une des options disponibles : Horizontal (sélectionné par défaut), Rotation du texte vers le bas (définit une direction verticale, de haut en bas) ou Rotation du texte vers le haut (définit une direction verticale, de bas en haut).

                                                          Pour aligner le texte verticalement dans la zone de texte, cliquez avec le bouton droit sur le texte, sélectionnez l'option Alignement vertical, puis choisissez l'une des options disponibles : Aligner en haut, Aligner au centre ou Aligner en bas.

                                                          Les autres options de mise en forme que vous pouvez appliquer sont les mêmes que celles du texte standard. Veuillez vous reporter aux sections d'aide correspondantes pour en savoir plus sur l'opération concernée. Vous pouvez :

                                                          -

                                                          Vous pouvez également cliquer sur l'icône des Paramètres du Text Art Icône Paramètres du Text Art dans la barre latérale droite et modifier certains paramètres de style.

                                                          +

                                                          Vous pouvez également cliquer sur l'icône des Paramètres du Text Art Icône Paramètres Text Art dans la barre latérale droite et modifier certains paramètres de style.

                                                          Modifier un style Text Art

                                                          -

                                                          Sélectionnez un objet texte et cliquez sur l'icône des Paramètres Text Art Icône Paramètres du Text Art dans la barre latérale de droite.

                                                          -

                                                          Onglet Paramètres du Text Art

                                                          -

                                                          Modifiez le style de texte appliqué en sélectionnant un nouveau Modèle dans la galerie. Vous pouvez également modifier le style de base en sélectionnant un type de police, une taille, etc.

                                                          +

                                                          Sélectionnez un objet texte et cliquez sur l'icône des Paramètres Text Art Icône Paramètres Text Art dans la barre latérale de droite.

                                                          +

                                                          Onglet Paramètres Text Art

                                                          +

                                                          Modifiez le style de texte appliqué en sélectionnant un nouveau Modèle dans la galerie. Vous pouvez également modifier le style de base en sélectionnant un type de police différent, une autre taille, etc.

                                                          Changer le Remplissage de la police. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes :

                                                          • Couleur - sélectionnez cette option pour spécifier la couleur unie pour le remplissage de l'espace intérieur de la forme automatique sélectionnée.

                                                            Couleur

                                                            @@ -73,12 +73,12 @@

                                                          Ajustez la largeur, la couleur et le type du Contour de la police.

                                                            -
                                                          • Pour modifier la largeur du trait, sélectionnez une des options disponibles depuis la liste déroulante Taille. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes : 0,5 pt, 1 pt, 1,5 pt, 2,25 pt, 3 pt, 4,5 pt, 6 pt ou Pas de ligne si vous ne voulez pas utiliser de contour.
                                                          • +
                                                          • Pour modifier la largeur du trait, sélectionnez une des options disponibles depuis la liste déroulante Taille. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes : 0,5 pt, 1 pt, 1,5 pt, 2,25 pt, 3 pt, 4,5 pt, 6 pt ou Pas de ligne si vous ne voulez pas utiliser de trait.
                                                          • Pour changer la couleur du contour, cliquez sur la case colorée et sélectionnez la couleur voulue.
                                                          • Pour modifier le type de contour, sélectionnez l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante correspondante (une ligne continue est appliquée par défaut, vous pouvez la remplacer par l'une des lignes pointillées disponibles).
                                                          -

                                                          Appliquez un effet de texte en sélectionnant le type de transformation de texte nécessaire dans la galerie Transformation. Vous pouvez ajuster le degré de distorsion du texte en faisant glisser la poignée en forme de diamant rose.

                                                          -

                                                          Transformation du Text Art

                                                          +

                                                          Appliquez un effet de texte en sélectionnant le type de transformation de texte voulu dans la galerie Transformation. Vous pouvez ajuster le degré de distorsion du texte en faisant glisser la poignée en forme de diamant rose.

                                                          +

                                                          Transformation de Text Art

                                                          \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/OpenCreateNew.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/OpenCreateNew.htm index 212fcba0d..ba64ea2dd 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/OpenCreateNew.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/OpenCreateNew.htm @@ -14,19 +14,52 @@

                                                          Créer un nouveau document ou ouvrir un document existant

                                                          -

                                                          Une fois que vous avez fini de travailler sur un document, vous pouvez immédiatement passer au document existant que vous avez récemment édité, créer un nouveau, ou revenir à la liste des documents existants.

                                                          -

                                                          Pour créer un nouveau document,

                                                          -
                                                            -
                                                          1. cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                                                          2. -
                                                          3. sélectionnez l'option Créer nouveau.
                                                          4. -
                                                          -

                                                          Pour ouvrir un document récemment édité dans Document Editor,

                                                          -
                                                            -
                                                          1. cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                                                          2. -
                                                          3. sélectionnez l'option Ouvrir récent,
                                                          4. -
                                                          5. sélectionnez le document nécessaire dans la liste des documents récemment édités.
                                                          6. -
                                                          -

                                                          Pour revenir à la liste des documents existants, cliquez sur l'icône l'icône Fichier Aller aux Documents sur le côté droit de l'en-tête de l'éditeur. Vous pouvez aussi passer à l'onglet Ficher de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Aller aux Documents.

                                                          - +
                                                          Pour créer un nouveau document
                                                          +
                                                          +

                                                          Dans la version en ligne

                                                          +
                                                            +
                                                          1. cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                                                          2. +
                                                          3. sélectionnez l'option Créer nouveau.
                                                          4. +
                                                          +
                                                          +
                                                          +

                                                          Dans l’éditeur de bureau

                                                          +
                                                            +
                                                          1. dans la fenêtre principale du programme, sélectionnez l'élément de menu Document dans la section Créer nouveau de la barre latérale gauche - un nouveau fichier s'ouvrira dans un nouvel onglet,
                                                          2. +
                                                          3. une fois tous les changements nécessaires effectués, cliquez sur l'icône Enregistrer Icône Enregistrer dans le coin supérieur gauche ou passez à l'onglet Fichier et choisissez l'élément de menu Enregistrer sous.
                                                          4. +
                                                          5. dans la fenêtre du gestionnaire de fichiers, sélectionnez l'emplacement du fichier, spécifiez son nom, choisissez le format dans lequel vous souhaitez enregistrer le document (DOCX, Modèle de document (DOTX), ODT, OTT, RTF, TXT, PDF ou PDFA) et cliquez sur le bouton Enregistrer.
                                                          6. +
                                                          +
                                                          + +
                                                          +
                                                          Pour ouvrir un document existant
                                                          +

                                                          Dans l’éditeur de bureau

                                                          +
                                                            +
                                                          1. dans la fenêtre principale du programme, sélectionnez l'élément de menu Ouvrir fichier local dans la barre latérale gauche,
                                                          2. +
                                                          3. choisissez le document nécessaire dans la fenêtre du gestionnaire de fichiers et cliquez sur le bouton Ouvrir.
                                                          4. +
                                                          +

                                                          Vous pouvez également cliquer avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le document nécessaire dans la fenêtre du gestionnaire de fichiers, sélectionner l'option Ouvrir avec et choisir l'application nécessaire dans le menu. Si les fichiers de documents Office sont associés à l'application, vous pouvez également ouvrir les documents en double-cliquant sur le nom du fichier dans la fenêtre d'exploration de fichiers.

                                                          +

                                                          Tous les répertoires auxquels vous avez accédé à l'aide de l'éditeur de bureau seront affichés dans la liste Dossiers récents afin que vous puissiez y accéder rapidement. Cliquez sur le dossier nécessaire pour sélectionner l'un des fichiers qui y sont stockés.

                                                          +
                                                          + +
                                                          Pour ouvrir un document récemment édité
                                                          +
                                                          +

                                                          Dans la version en ligne

                                                          +
                                                            +
                                                          1. cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                                                          2. +
                                                          3. sélectionnez l'option Ouvrir récent,
                                                          4. +
                                                          5. sélectionnez le document nécessaire dans la liste des documents récemment édités.
                                                          6. +
                                                          +
                                                          +
                                                          +

                                                          Dans l’éditeur de bureau

                                                          +
                                                            +
                                                          1. dans la fenêtre principale du programme, sélectionnez l'élément de menu Fichiers récents dans la barre latérale gauche,
                                                          2. +
                                                          3. sélectionnez le document nécessaire dans la liste des documents récemment édités.
                                                          4. +
                                                          +
                                                          + +

                                                          Pour ouvrir le dossier dans lequel le fichier est stocké dans un nouvel onglet du navigateur de la version en ligne, dans la fenêtre de l'explorateur de fichiers de la version de bureau, cliquez sur l'icône Ouvrir l’emplacement du fichier Ouvrir l’emplacement du fichier à droite de l'en-tête de l'éditeur. Vous pouvez aussi passer à l'onglet Fichier sur la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionner l'option Ouvrir l’emplacement du fichier.

                                                          + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/PageBreaks.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/PageBreaks.htm index ca48c8465..ff6d7ecbb 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/PageBreaks.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/PageBreaks.htm @@ -14,9 +14,10 @@

                                                          Insérer des sauts de page

                                                          -

                                                          En utilisant Document Editor, vous pouvez ajouter le saut de page pour commencer une nouvelle page et régler les options de pagination.

                                                          -

                                                          Pour insérer un saut de page à la position actuelle du curseur, cliquez sur l'icône Icône Sauts de page Sauts de page de l'onglet Insérer ou Disposition de la barre d'outils supérieure ou cliquez sur la flèche en regard de cette icône et sélectionnez l'option Insérer un saut de page dans le menu.

                                                          -

                                                          Pour insérer un saut de page avant le paragraphe sélectionné c'est-à-dire pour commencer ce paragraphe en haut d'une nouvelle page :

                                                          +

                                                          Dans Document Editor, vous pouvez ajouter un saut de page pour commencer une nouvelle page, insérer une page blanche et régler les options de pagination.

                                                          +

                                                          Pour insérer un saut de page à la position actuelle du curseur, cliquez sur l'icône icône Saut de section Sauts de page de l'onglet Insertion ou Mise en page de la barre d'outils supérieure ou cliquez sur la flèche en regard de cette icône et sélectionnez l'option Insérer un saut de page dans le menu. Vous pouvez également utiliser la combinaison de touches Ctrl+Entrée.

                                                          +

                                                          Pour insérer une page blanche à la position actuelle du curseur, cliquez sur l'icône Icône de page blanche Page vierge dans l'onglet Insérer de la barre d'outils supérieure. Cela insère deux sauts de page qui créent une page blanche.

                                                          +

                                                          Pour insérer un saut de page avant le paragraphe sélectionné c'est-à-dire pour commencer ce paragraphe en haut d'une nouvelle page :

                                                          • cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris et sélectionnez l'option Saut de page avant du menu contextuel, ou
                                                          • cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris, sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés du paragraphe du menu contextuel ou utilisez le lien Afficher les paramètres avancés sur la barre latérale droite et cochez la case Saut de page avant dans la fenêtre Paragraphe - Paramètres avancés ouverte.
                                                          • diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm index cc449ace6..005e5977b 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm @@ -14,28 +14,48 @@

                                                            Enregistrer / télécharger / imprimer votre document

                                                            -

                                                            Par défaut, quand vous travaillez Document Editor enregistre automatiquement votre fichier toutes les 2 secondes visant à prévenir la perte des données au cas d'une fermeture inattendue de l'éditeur. Si vous co-éditez le fichier en mode Rapide, le minuteur récupère les mises à jour 25 fois par seconde et enregistre les modifications si elles ont été effectuées. Si vous co-éditez le fichier en mode Strict, les modifications sont automatiquement enregistrées toutes les 10 minutes. Si nécessaire, vous pouvez facilement changer la périodicité de l'enregistrement automatique ou même désactiver cette fonction sur la page Paramètres avancés.

                                                            -

                                                            Pour enregistrer votre document actuel à la main,

                                                            +

                                                            Enregistrement

                                                            +

                                                            Par défaut, en ligne Document Editor enregistre automatiquement votre fichier toutes les 2 secondes afin de prévenir la perte des données en cas de fermeture inattendue de l'éditeur. Si vous co-éditez le fichier en mode Rapide, le minuteur récupère les mises à jour 25 fois par seconde et enregistre les modifications si elles ont été effectuées. Lorsque le fichier est co-édité en mode Strict, les modifications sont automatiquement sauvegardées à des intervalles de 10 minutes. Si nécessaire, vous pouvez facilement changer la périodicité de l'enregistrement automatique ou même désactiver cette fonction sur la page Paramètres avancés.

                                                            +

                                                            Pour enregistrer manuellement votre document actuel dans le format et l'emplacement actuels,

                                                              -
                                                            • cliquez sur l'icône Enregistrer icône Enregistrer sur la barre d'outils supérieure, ou
                                                            • +
                                                            • cliquez sur l'icône Enregistrer Icône Enregistrer dans la partie gauche de l'en-tête de l'éditeur, ou
                                                            • utilisez la combinaison des touches Ctrl+S, ou
                                                            • -
                                                            • Passez à l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Enregistrer.
                                                            • +
                                                            • cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Enregistrer.
                                                            +

                                                            Remarque : dans la version de bureau, pour éviter la perte de données en cas de fermeture inattendue du programme, vous pouvez activer l'option Récupération automatique sur la page Paramètres avancés.

                                                            +
                                                            +

                                                            Dans la version de bureau, vous pouvez enregistrer le document sous un autre nom, dans un nouvel emplacement ou format,

                                                            +
                                                              +
                                                            1. cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                                                            2. +
                                                            3. sélectionnez l'option Enregistrer sous...,
                                                            4. +
                                                            5. sélectionnez l'un des formats disponibles selon vos besoins : DOCX, ODT, RTF, TXT, PDF, PDFA. Vous pouvez également choisir l'option Modèle de document (DOTX ou OTT).
                                                            6. +
                                                            +
                                                            -

                                                            Pour télécharger le document courant sur le disque dur de votre ordinateur,

                                                            +

                                                            Téléchargement en cours

                                                            +

                                                            Dans la version en ligne, vous pouvez télécharger le document résultant sur le disque dur de votre ordinateur,

                                                            1. cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                                                            2. sélectionnez l'option Télécharger comme,
                                                            3. -
                                                            4. sélectionnez l'un des formats disponibles selon vos besoins : DOCX, PDF, TXT, ODT, RTF, HTML.
                                                            5. +
                                                            6. sélectionnez l'un des formats disponibles selon vos besoins : DOCX, PDF, ODT, TXT, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, HTML.
                                                            +

                                                            Enregistrer une copie

                                                            +

                                                            Dans la version en ligne, vous pouvez enregistrer une copie du fichier sur votre portail,

                                                            +
                                                              +
                                                            1. cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure,
                                                            2. +
                                                            3. sélectionnez l'option Enregistrer la copie sous...,
                                                            4. +
                                                            5. sélectionnez l'un des formats disponibles selon vos besoins : DOCX, PDF, ODT, TXT, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, HTML,
                                                            6. +
                                                            7. sélectionnez un emplacement pour le fichier sur le portail et appuyez sur Enregistrer.
                                                            8. +
                                                            +

                                                            Impression

                                                            Pour imprimer le document actif,

                                                              -
                                                            • cliquez sur l'icône Imprimer icône Imprimer sur la barre d'outils supérieure, ou
                                                            • +
                                                            • cliquez sur l'icône Imprimer Icône Imprimer dans la partie gauche de l'en-tête de l'éditeur, ou
                                                            • utilisez la combinaison des touches Ctrl+P, ou
                                                            • cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Imprimer.
                                                            -

                                                            Après cela, un fichier PDF sera généré sur la base du document édité. Vous pouvez l'ouvrir et l'imprimer, ou l'enregistrer sur le disque dur de l'ordinateur ou sur un support amovible pour l'imprimer plus tard.

                                                            +

                                                            Dans la version de bureau, le fichier sera imprimé directement.Dans la version en ligne, un fichier PDF sera généré à partir du document. Vous pouvez l'ouvrir et l'imprimer, ou l'enregistrer sur le disque dur de l'ordinateur ou sur un support amovible pour l'imprimer plus tard. Certains navigateurs (par ex. Chrome et Opera) supportent l'impression directe.

                                                            \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/SetOutlineLevel.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/SetOutlineLevel.htm new file mode 100644 index 000000000..78df50edb --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/SetOutlineLevel.htm @@ -0,0 +1,29 @@ + + + + Configurer le niveau hiérarchique de paragraphe + + + + + + + +
                                                            +
                                                            + +
                                                            +

                                                            Configurer le niveau hiérarchique de paragraphe

                                                            + +

                                                            Le niveau de plan désigne le niveau de paragraphe dans la structure du document. Les niveaux suivants sont disponibles: Texte de base, Niveau 1- - Niveau 9. Le niveau hiérarchique peut être spécifié de différentes manières, par exemple, en utilisant des styles de titre: quand vous appliquez un style de titre (Titre 1 - Titre 9) à un paragraphe, il acquiert un niveau de plan correspondant. Si vous appliquez un niveau à un paragraphe à l’aide des paramètres avancés du paragraphe, le paragraphe acquiert le niveau de structure uniquement tendis que son style reste intact. Le niveau hiérarchique peut également être modifié à l’aide du panneau de Navigation à gauche en utilisant des options contextuels du menu.

                                                            +

                                                            Pour modifier un niveau hiérarchique de paragraphe à l’aide des paramètres avancés du paragraphe:

                                                            +
                                                              +
                                                            1. Cliquez droit sur le texte et choisissez l’option Paramètres avancés du paragraphe du menu contextuel ou utilisez l’option Afficher les paramètres avancés sur la barre latérale droite,
                                                            2. +
                                                            3. Ouvrez la fenêtre Paragraphe - Paramètres avancés, passez à l’onglet Retraits et espacement,
                                                            4. +
                                                            5. Sélectionnez le niveau hiérarchique nécessaire dans la liste du niveau hiérarchique.
                                                            6. +
                                                            7. Cliquez sur le bouton OK pour appliquer les modifications.
                                                            8. +
                                                            +

                                                            Paragraphe - Paramètres avancés

                                                            +
                                                            + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/UseMailMerge.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/UseMailMerge.htm index 98e98c3fb..25ed67ac6 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/UseMailMerge.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/UseMailMerge.htm @@ -14,7 +14,7 @@

                                                            Utiliser le Publipostage

                                                            -

                                                            Remarque : cette option est disponible uniquement pour les versions payantes.

                                                            +

                                                            Remarque : cette option n'est disponible que dans la version en ligne.

                                                            La fonctionnalité Publipostage est utilisée pour créer un ensemble de documents combinant un contenu commun provenant d'un document texte et des composants individuels (variables, tels que des noms, des messages d'accueil, etc.) extraits d'une feuille de calcul (d'une liste de clients par exemple). Elle peut se révéler utile si vous devez créer beaucoup de lettres personnalisées à envoyer aux destinataires.

                                                            Pour commencer à travailler avec la fonctionnalité Publipostage,

                                                              @@ -32,12 +32,12 @@
                                                            1. Ici, vous pouvez ajouter de nouvelles informations, modifier ou supprimer les données existantes, si nécessaire. Pour simplifier l'utilisation des données, vous pouvez utiliser les icônes situées au haut de la fenêtre :
                                                              • Copier et Coller pour copier et coller les données copiées
                                                              • -
                                                              • Annuler et Rétablir pour annuler et rétablir les actions
                                                              • +
                                                              • Annuler et Rétablir pour annuler et rétablir les actions
                                                              • Icône Trier dans l'ordre croissant et Icône Trier dans l'ordre décroissant - pour trier vos données dans une plage sélectionnée de cellules dans l'ordre croissant ou décroissant
                                                              • icône Filtrer - pour activer le filtre pour la plage de cellules sélectionnée précédemment ou supprimer le filtre appliqué
                                                              • Icône Effacer les filtres - pour effacer tous les paramètres de filtre appliqués

                                                                Remarque : pour en savoir plus sur l'utilisation des filtres, reportez-vous à la section Trier et filtrer les données de l'aide de Spreadsheet Editor.

                                                              • -
                                                              • icône Recherche - pour rechercher une certaine valeur et la remplacer par une autre, si nécessaire

                                                                Remarque : pour en savoir plus sur l'utilisation de l'outil Rechercher et remplacer, reportez-vous à la section Fonctions rechercher et remplacer de l'aide de Spreadsheet Editor.

                                                                +
                                                              • Icône Recherche - pour rechercher une certaine valeur et la remplacer par une autre, si nécessaire

                                                                Remarque : pour en savoir plus sur l'utilisation de l'outil Rechercher et remplacer, reportez-vous à la section Fonctions rechercher et remplacer de l'aide de Spreadsheet Editor.

                                                            2. diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ViewDocInfo.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ViewDocInfo.htm index 827867cc4..4c654ef2d 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ViewDocInfo.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/UsageInstructions/ViewDocInfo.htm @@ -16,17 +16,19 @@

                                                              Afficher les informations sur le document

                                                              Pour accéder aux informations détaillées sur le document actuellement édité, cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Informations sur le document....

                                                              Informations générales

                                                              -

                                                              Les informations sur le document comprennent le titre du document, l'auteur, l'emplacement, la date de création et les statistiques : le nombre de pages, de paragraphes, de mots, de symboles et de symboles avec des espaces.

                                                              +

                                                              Les informations du document comprennent le titre du document, l'application avec laquelle le document a été créé et les statistiques : le nombre de pages, paragraphes, mots, symboles, symboles avec espaces. Dans la version en ligne, les informations suivantes sont également affichées : auteur, lieu, date de création.

                                                              Remarque : Les éditeurs en ligne vous permettent de modifier le titre du document directement à partir de l'interface de l'éditeur. Pour ce faire, cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Renommer..., puis entrez le Nom de fichier voulu dans la nouvelle fenêtre qui s'ouvre et cliquez sur OK.

                                                              Informations d'autorisation

                                                              +

                                                              Dans la version en ligne, vous pouvez consulter les informations sur les permissions des fichiers stockés dans le cloud.

                                                              Remarque : cette option n'est pas disponible pour les utilisateurs disposant des autorisations en Lecture seule.

                                                              Pour savoir qui a le droit d'afficher ou de modifier le document, sélectionnez l'option Droits d'accès... dans la barre latérale de gauche.

                                                              Si vous avez l'accès complet à cette présentation, vous pouvez également changer les droits d'accès actuels en cliquant sur le bouton Changer les droits d'accès dans la section Personnes qui ont des droits.

                                                              Historique des versions

                                                              -

                                                              Remarque : cette option n'est pas disponible pour les comptes gratuits ou les utilisateurs ne disposant que des autorisations en lecture seule.

                                                              +

                                                              Dans la version en ligne, vous pouvez consulter l'historique des versions des fichiers stockés dans le cloud.

                                                              +

                                                              Remarque : cette option n'est pas disponible pour les utilisateurs disposant des autorisations en Lecture seule.

                                                              Pour afficher toutes les modifications apportées à ce document, sélectionnez l'option Historique des versions dans la barre latérale de gauche. Il est également possible d'ouvrir l'historique des versions à l'aide de l'icône Icône Historique des versions Historique des versions de l'onglet Collaboration de la barre d'outils supérieure. Vous verrez la liste des versions de ce document (changements majeurs) et des révisions (modifications mineures) avec l'indication de l'auteur de chaque version/révision et la date et l'heure de création. Pour les versions de document, le numéro de version est également spécifié (par exemple ver. 2). Pour savoir exactement quels changements ont été apportés à chaque version/révision, vous pouvez voir celle qui vous intéresse en cliquant dessus dans la barre latérale de gauche. Les modifications apportées par l'auteur de la version/révision sont marquées avec la couleur qui est affichée à côté du nom de l'auteur dans la barre latérale gauche. Vous pouvez utiliser le lien Restaurer sous la version/révision sélectionnée pour la restaurer.

                                                              Historique des versions

                                                              Pour revenir à la version actuelle du document, utilisez l'option Fermer l'historique en haut de la liste des versions.

                                                              diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/editor.css b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/editor.css index 465b9fbe1..cbedb7bef 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/editor.css +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/editor.css @@ -149,6 +149,7 @@ text-decoration: none; .search-field { display: block; float: right; + margin-top: 10px; } .search-field input { width: 250px; diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/blankpage.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/blankpage.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..11180c591 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/blankpage.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/bookmark.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/bookmark.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7339d3f35 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/bookmark.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/bookmark_window.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/bookmark_window.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f2581f25b Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/bookmark_window.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/caption_icon.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/caption_icon.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fe9dcb22f Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/caption_icon.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/ccsettingswindow.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/ccsettingswindow.png index b9fe0514d..3b05c425b 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/ccsettingswindow.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/ccsettingswindow.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/compare_final.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/compare_final.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8d4d2a1fa Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/compare_final.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/compare_markup.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/compare_markup.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e86cb7ac4 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/compare_markup.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/compare_method.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/compare_method.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e2c7fc5b7 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/compare_method.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/compare_original.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/compare_original.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e716fd100 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/compare_original.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/comparebutton.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/comparebutton.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..18026984a Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/comparebutton.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/custompagesize.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/custompagesize.png index 25db6767f..bacaa5e56 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/custompagesize.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/custompagesize.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/distributehorizontally.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/distributehorizontally.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8e33a0c28 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/distributehorizontally.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/distributevertically.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/distributevertically.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1e5f39011 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/distributevertically.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/document_language_window.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/document_language_window.png index 228bed858..63fd641fa 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/document_language_window.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/document_language_window.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/fliplefttoright.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/fliplefttoright.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b6babc560 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/fliplefttoright.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/flipupsidedown.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/flipupsidedown.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b8ce45f8f Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/flipupsidedown.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/formula_settings.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/formula_settings.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..91b17daa2 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/formula_settings.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/groupup.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/groupup.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3abec648c Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/groupup.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/hyperlinkwindow.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/hyperlinkwindow.png index 09ed2f330..457179362 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/hyperlinkwindow.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/hyperlinkwindow.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/hyperlinkwindow1.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/hyperlinkwindow1.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..095707f00 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/hyperlinkwindow1.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/image_properties.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/image_properties.png index 2d3e9b0e5..e847b5bd6 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/image_properties.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/image_properties.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/image_properties_1.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/image_properties_1.png index 428fb6dc8..f59950cae 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/image_properties_1.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/image_properties_1.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/image_properties_2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/image_properties_2.png index 9f696907e..5bf64afb5 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/image_properties_2.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/image_properties_2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/image_properties_3.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/image_properties_3.png index af93af288..5238480d5 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/image_properties_3.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/image_properties_3.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/image_properties_4.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/image_properties_4.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..10a76fac4 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/image_properties_4.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/insert_symbol_window.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/insert_symbol_window.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9e3101230 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/insert_symbol_window.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/insert_symbols_windows.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/insert_symbols_windows.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b644e01f5 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/insert_symbols_windows.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/insertcaptionbox.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/insertcaptionbox.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3bb4fa621 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/insertcaptionbox.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_editorwindow.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_editorwindow.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c772750a2 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_editorwindow.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_filetab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_filetab.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..92ab00c1b Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_filetab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_hometab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_hometab.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b6a4edc90 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_hometab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_inserttab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_inserttab.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d84186df4 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_inserttab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_layouttab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_layouttab.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..196236bd0 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_layouttab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_pluginstab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_pluginstab.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..975ab38d6 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_pluginstab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_referencestab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_referencestab.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a8c67d199 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_referencestab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_reviewtab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_reviewtab.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..03ec25d1a Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/desktop_reviewtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/editorwindow.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/editorwindow.png index 129359008..ce679b604 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/editorwindow.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/editorwindow.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/filetab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/filetab.png index a1c52a192..2a61b345c 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/filetab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/filetab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/hometab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/hometab.png index 6877f9137..5c7320051 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/hometab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/hometab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/inserttab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/inserttab.png index aaf501e52..e7bf4cfa2 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/inserttab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/inserttab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/layouttab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/layouttab.png index cece00680..af261c945 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/layouttab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/layouttab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/leftpart.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/leftpart.png index f3f1306f3..e8d22566a 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/leftpart.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/leftpart.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/pluginstab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/pluginstab.png index 24db09cb7..9d1d1c57b 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/pluginstab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/pluginstab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/referencestab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/referencestab.png index d729cd020..18859633f 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/referencestab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/referencestab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/reviewtab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/reviewtab.png index a0bc9c05c..57665761c 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/reviewtab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/interface/reviewtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/paradvsettings_indents.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/paradvsettings_indents.png index 69e7c2b79..5e9e4ee93 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/paradvsettings_indents.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/paradvsettings_indents.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/print.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/print.png index 03fd49783..d05c08b29 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/print.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/print.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/redo.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/redo.png index 5002b4109..d71647013 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/redo.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/redo.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/redo1.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/redo1.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5002b4109 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/redo1.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/right_autoshape.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/right_autoshape.png index 20ad30d22..effdc8ca3 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/right_autoshape.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/right_autoshape.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/right_image.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/right_image.png index d1c033da8..899b8b528 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/right_image.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/right_image.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/right_table.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/right_table.png index 094e9a99b..30dcd2d2a 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/right_table.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/right_table.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/rotateclockwise.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/rotateclockwise.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d27f575b3 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/rotateclockwise.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/rotatecounterclockwise.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/rotatecounterclockwise.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..43e6a1064 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/rotatecounterclockwise.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/save.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/save.png index e6a82d6ac..bef90f537 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/save.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/save.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/saveupdate.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/saveupdate.png index 022b31529..d4e58e825 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/saveupdate.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/saveupdate.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/savewhilecoediting.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/savewhilecoediting.png index a62d2c35d..a3defd211 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/savewhilecoediting.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/savewhilecoediting.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/shape_properties.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/shape_properties.png index f9b77d315..250b4c6fe 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/shape_properties.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/shape_properties.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/shape_properties_1.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/shape_properties_1.png index cf9f9e6bf..04d6829f4 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/shape_properties_1.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/shape_properties_1.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/shape_properties_2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/shape_properties_2.png index 725f90ed4..035ad0991 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/shape_properties_2.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/shape_properties_2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/shape_properties_3.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/shape_properties_3.png index fd7488a19..9fc721226 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/shape_properties_3.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/shape_properties_3.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/shape_properties_4.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/shape_properties_4.png index 99e8a7c2e..15873ac6f 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/shape_properties_4.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/shape_properties_4.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/shape_properties_5.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/shape_properties_5.png index b55622f2f..aad2c5b3c 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/shape_properties_5.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/shape_properties_5.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/shape_properties_6.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/shape_properties_6.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..589823f32 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/shape_properties_6.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/spellcheckactivated.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/spellcheckactivated.png index 14d99736a..65e7ed85c 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/spellcheckactivated.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/spellcheckactivated.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/spellcheckdeactivated.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/spellcheckdeactivated.png index f55473551..2f324b661 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/spellcheckdeactivated.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/spellcheckdeactivated.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/spellchecking_language.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/spellchecking_language.png index 5dab438f2..23fe05b4d 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/spellchecking_language.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/spellchecking_language.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/undo.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/undo.png index bb7f9407d..68978e596 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/undo.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/undo.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/undo1.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/undo1.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bb7f9407d Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/undo1.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/updatefromseleciton.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/updatefromseleciton.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9d0a0db4f Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/updatefromseleciton.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/vector.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/vector.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8353e80fc Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/vector.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/watermark.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/watermark.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..03a568c03 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/watermark.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/watermark_settings.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/watermark_settings.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a42ecf3d3 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/watermark_settings.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/watermark_settings2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/watermark_settings2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ea8f40b71 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/images/watermark_settings2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/search/indexes.js b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/search/indexes.js index 7c7c78cca..4df47d0e7 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/search/indexes.js +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/fr/search/indexes.js @@ -3,27 +3,27 @@ var indexes = { "id": "HelpfulHints/About.htm", "title": "À propos de Document Editor", - "body": "Document Editor est une application en ligne qui vous permet de parcourir et de modifier des documents directement sur le portail . En utilisant Document Editor, vous pouvez effectuer de différentes opérations d'édition comme en utilisant n'importe quel éditeur de bureau, imprimer les documents modifiés en gardant la mise en forme ou les télécharger sur votre disque dur au format DOCX, PDF, TXT, ODT, RTF, et HTML. Pour afficher la version actuelle du logiciel et les détails de la licence, cliquez sur l'icône dans la barre latérale gauche." + "body": "Document Editor est une application en ligne qui vous permet de parcourir et de modifier des documents directement sur le portail . En utilisant Document Editor, vous pouvez effectuer différentes opérations d'édition comme avec n'importe quel éditeur de bureau, imprimer les documents modifiés en gardant la mise en forme ou les télécharger sur votre disque dur au format DOCX, PDF, ODT, TXT, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, HTML. Pour afficher la version actuelle du logiciel et les informations de licence dans la version en ligne, cliquez sur l'icône dans la barre latérale gauche. Pour afficher la version actuelle du logiciel et les informations de licence dans la version de bureau, sélectionnez l'élément de menu À propos dans la barre latérale gauche de la fenêtre principale du programme." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm", "title": "Paramètres avancés de Document Editor", - "body": "Document Editor vous permet de modifier ses paramètres avancés. Pour y accéder, cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier dans la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés.... Vous pouvez également utiliser l'icône dans le coin supérieur droit de l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure. Les paramètres avancés sont les suivants : Commentaires en temps réel sert à activer / désactiver les commentaires en temps réel. Activer l'affichage des commentaires - si cette option est désactivée, les passages commentés seront mis en surbrillance uniquement si vous cliquez sur l'icône Commentaires de la barre latérale gauche. Activer l'affichage des commentaires résolus - si vous désactivez cette fonctionnalité, les commentaires résolus seront masqués dans le texte du document. Vous ne pourrez voir ces commentaires que si vous cliquez sur l'icône Commentaires dans la barre latérale de gauche. Vérification orthographique sert à activer/désactiver la vérification orthographique. Entrée alternative sert à activer / désactiver les hiéroglyphes. Guides d'alignement est utilisé pour activer/désactiver les guides d'alignement qui apparaissent lorsque vous déplacez des objets et vous permettent de les positionner précisément sur la page. Enregistrement automatique sert à spécifier la fréquence de l'enregistrement des changements apportés lors de l'édition. Mode de co-édition permet de sélectionner l'affichage des modifications effectuées lors de la co-édition : Par défaut, le mode Rapide est sélectionné, les utilisateurs qui participent à la co-édition du document verront les changements en temps réel tandis qu'ils sont faits par d'autres utilisateurs. Si vous préférez ne pas voir les changements des autres utilisateurs (pour ne pas vous déranger, ou pour toute autre raison), sélectionnez le mode Strict et tous les changements apparaîtront seulement après que vous ayez cliqué sur l'icône Enregistrer pour vous informer que d'autres utilisateurs ont effectué des changements. Changements de collaboration en temps réel sert à spécifier quels sont les changements que vous souhaitez mettre en surbrillance lors de l'édition collaborative : En sélectionnant N'afficher aucune modification, aucune des modifications effectuées au cours de la session ne sera mise en surbrillance. L'option Tout sélectionnée, toutes les modifications effectuées au cours de la session seront mises en surbrillance. En sélectionnant Afficher les modifications récentes, seules les modifications effectuées depuis la dernière fois que vous avez cliqué sur l'icône Enregistrer seront mises en surbrillance. Cette option n'est disponible que lorsque le mode Strict est sélectionné. Valeur du zoom par défaut sert à définir la valeur de zoom par défaut en la sélectionnant de la liste des options disponibles de 50% à 200%. Vous pouvez également choisir l'option Ajuster à la page ou Ajuster à la largeur. Hinting sert à sélectionner le type d'affichage de la police dans Document Editor : Choisissez comme Windows si vous aimez la façon dont les polices sont habituellement affichées sous Windows, c'est à dire en utilisant la police de Windows. Choisissez comme OS X si vous aimez la façon dont les polices sont habituellement affichées sous Mac, c'est à dire sans hinting. Choisissez Natif si vous voulez que votre texte sera affiché avec les hintings intégrés dans les fichiers de polices. Unité de mesure sert à spécifier les unités de mesure utilisées sur les règles et dans les fenêtres de paramètres pour les paramètres tels que largeur, hauteur, espacement, marges etc. Vous pouvez choisir l'option Centimètre ou Point. Pour enregistrer les paramètres modifiés, cliquez sur le bouton Appliquer." + "body": "Document Editor vous permet de modifier ses paramètres avancés. Pour y accéder, ouvrez l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés.... Vous pouvez également cliquer sur l'icône Paramètres d'affichage sur le côté droit de l'en-tête de l'éditeur et sélectionner l'option Paramètres avancés. Les paramètres avancés sont les suivants : Commentaires en temps réel sert à activer / désactiver les commentaires en temps réel. Activer l'affichage des commentaires - si cette option est désactivée, les passages commentés seront mis en surbrillance uniquement si vous cliquez sur l'icône Commentaires de la barre latérale gauche. Activer l'affichage des commentaires résolus - cette fonction est désactivée par défaut pour que les commentaires résolus soient cachés dans le texte du document. Vous ne pourrez voir ces commentaires que si vous cliquez sur l'icône Commentaires dans la barre latérale de gauche. Activez cette option si vous voulez afficher les commentaires résolus dans le texte du document. Vérification orthographique sert à activer/désactiver la vérification orthographique. Entrée alternative sert à activer / désactiver les hiéroglyphes. Guides d'alignement est utilisé pour activer/désactiver les guides d'alignement qui apparaissent lorsque vous déplacez des objets et vous permettent de les positionner précisément sur la page. Enregistrement automatique est utilisé dans la version en ligne pour activer/désactiver l'enregistrement automatique des modifications que vous effectuez pendant l'édition. Récupération automatique - est utilisé dans la version de bureau pour activer/désactiver l'option qui permet de récupérer automatiquement les documents en cas de fermeture inattendue du programme. Le Mode de co-édition permet de sélectionner l'affichage des modifications effectuées lors de la co-édition : Par défaut, le mode Rapide est sélectionné, les utilisateurs qui participent à la co-édition du document verront les changements en temps réel une fois qu'ils sont faits par d'autres utilisateurs. Si vous préférez ne pas voir d'autres changements d'utilisateur (pour ne pas vous déranger, ou pour toute autre raison), sélectionnez le mode Strict et tous les changements apparaîtront seulement après avoir cliqué sur l'icône Enregistrer pour vous informer qu'il y a des changements effectués par d'autres utilisateurs. Changements de collaboration en temps réel sert à spécifier quels sont les changements que vous souhaitez mettre en surbrillance lors de l'édition collaborative : En sélectionnant N'afficher aucune modification, aucune des modifications effectuées au cours de la session ne sera mise en surbrillance. L'option Tout sélectionnée, toutes les modifications effectuées au cours de la session seront mises en surbrillance. En sélectionnant Afficher les modifications récentes, seules les modifications effectuées depuis la dernière fois que vous avez cliqué sur l'icône Enregistrer seront mises en surbrillance. Cette option n'est disponible que lorsque le mode Strict est sélectionné. Valeur du zoom par défaut sert à définir la valeur de zoom par défaut en la sélectionnant de la liste des options disponibles de 50% à 200%. Vous pouvez également choisir l'option Ajuster à la page ou Ajuster à la largeur. Hinting sert à sélectionner le type d'affichage de la police dans Document Editor : Choisissez comme Windows si vous aimez la façon dont les polices sont habituellement affichées sous Windows, c'est à dire en utilisant la police de Windows. Choisissez comme OS X si vous aimez la façon dont les polices sont habituellement affichées sous Mac, c'est à dire sans hinting. Choisissez Natif si vous voulez que votre texte sera affiché avec les hintings intégrés dans les fichiers de polices. Unité de mesure sert à spécifier les unités de mesure utilisées sur les règles et dans les fenêtres de paramètres pour les paramètres tels que largeur, hauteur, espacement, marges etc. Vous pouvez choisir l'option Centimètre ou Point. Pour enregistrer les paramètres modifiés, cliquez sur le bouton Appliquer." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/CollaborativeEditing.htm", "title": "Edition collaborative des documents", - "body": "Document Editor vous offre la possibilité de travailler sur un document simultanément avec d'autres utilisateurs. Cette fonction inclut : accès simultané au document édité par plusieurs utilisateurs indication visuelle des fragments qui sont en train d'être édités par d'autres utilisateurs affichage des changements en temps réel ou synchronisation des changements en un seul clic chat pour partager des idées concernant certaines parties du document commentaires avec la description d'une tâche ou d'un problème à résoudre Edition collaborative Document Editor permet de sélectionner l'un des deux modes de coédition disponibles. Rapide est utilisé par défaut et affiche les modifications effectuées par d'autres utilisateurs en temps réel. Strict est sélectionné pour masquer les modifications des autres utilisateurs jusqu'à ce que vous cliquiez sur l'icône Enregistrer pour enregistrer vos propres modifications et accepter les modifications apportées par d'autres utilisateurs. Le mode peut être sélectionné dans les Paramètres avancés. Il est également possible de choisir le mode voulu à l'aide de l'icône Mode de coédition dans l'onglet Collaboration de la barre d'outils supérieure: Lorsqu'un document est en cours de modification par plusieurs utilisateurs simultanément dans le mode Strict, les passages de texte modifiés sont marqués avec des lignes pointillées de couleurs différentes. Pour voir qui est en train d'éditer le fichier au présent, placez le curseur de la souris sur cette icône - les noms des utilisateurs seront affichés dans la fenêtre contextuelle. Le mode Rapide affichera les actions et les noms des co-éditeurs tandis qu'ils modifient le texte. Le nombre d'utilisateurs qui travaillent sur le document actuel est spécifié sur le côté droit de l'en-tête de l'éditeur - . S'il y a trop d'utilisateurs, cliquez sur cette icône pour ouvrir le panneau Chat avec la liste complète affichée. Quand aucun utilisateur ne consulte ou ne modifie le fichier, l'icône dans l'en-tête de l'éditeur aura cette apparence et vous permettra de gérer les utilisateurs qui ont accès au fichier : inviter de nouveaux utilisateurs en leur donnant les permissions pour modifier, lire ou réviser le document ou refuser à certains utilisateurs des droits d'accès au fichier. Cliquez sur cette icône pour gérer l'accès au fichier ; cela peut être fait aussi bien lorsqu'il n'y a pas d'autres utilisateurs qui voient ou co-éditent le document pour le moment que quand il y a d'autres utilisateurs. L'icône ressemble à ceci . Il est également possible de définir des droits d'accès à l'aide de l'icône Partage dans l'onglet Collaboration de la barre d'outils supérieure. Dès que l'un des utilisateurs enregistre ses modifications en cliquant sur l'icône , les autres verront une note dans la barre d'état indiquant qu'il y a des mises à jour. Pour enregistrer les changements effectués et récupérer les mises à jour de vos co-éditeurs cliquez sur l'icône dans le coin supérieur gauche de la barre supérieure. Les mises à jour seront marquées pour vous aider à controller ce qui a été exactement modifié. Vous pouvez spécifier les modifications que vous souhaitez mettre en surbrillance pendant la co-édition si vous cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier dans la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés... et choisissez entre aucune, toutes et récentes modifications de collaboration en temps réel. Quand l'option Afficher toutes les modifications sélectionnée, toutes les modifications effectuées au cours de la session seront mises en surbrillance. En sélectionnant Afficher les modifications récentes, seules les modifications effectuées depuis la dernière fois que vous avez cliqué sur l'icône seront mises en surbrillance. En sélectionnant N'afficher aucune modification, aucune des modifications effectuées au cours de la session ne sera mise en surbrillance. Chat Vous pouvez utiliser cet outil pour coordonner en temps réel le processus de co-édition, par exemple, pour décider avec vos collaborateurs de qui fait quoi, quel paragraphe vous allez éditer maintenant, etc. Les messages de discussion sont stockés pendant une session seulement. Pour discuter du contenu du document, il est préférable d'utiliser les commentaires qui sont stockés jusqu'à ce que vous décidiez de les supprimer. Pour accéder à Chat et envoyer un message à d'autres utilisateurs : cliquez sur l'icône dans la barre latérale gauche ou passez à l'onglet Collaboration de la barre d'outils supérieure et cliquez sur le bouton Chat, saisissez le texte dans le champ correspondant, cliquez sur le bouton Envoyer. Tous les messages envoyés par les utilisateurs seront affichés sur le panneau à gauche. S'il y a de nouveaux messages à lire, l'icône chat sera affichée de la manière suivante - . Pour fermer le panneau avec des messages de discussion, cliquez à nouveau sur l'icône dans la barre latérale gauche ou sur le bouton Chat dans la barre d'outils supérieure. Commentaires Pour laisser un commentaire : sélectionnez le fragment du texte que vous voulez commenter, passez à l'onglet Insertion ou Collaboration de la barre d'outils supérieure et cliquez sur le bouton Commentaire ou utilisez l'icône dans la barre latérale gauche pour ouvrir le panneau Commentaires et cliquez sur le lien Ajouter un commentaire au document ou cliquez avec le bouton droit sur le passage de texte sélectionné et sélectionnez l'option Ajouter un commentaire dans le menu contextuel, saisissez le texte nécessaire, cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter commentaire/Ajouter. Le commentaire sera affiché sur le panneau à gauche. Tout autre utilisateur peut répondre au commentaire ajouté en posant une question ou en faisant référance au travail fait. Pour le faire il suffit de cliquer sur le lien Ajouter une réponse situé au-dessus du commentaire. Le fragment du texte commenté sera marqué dans le document. Pour voir le commentaire, cliquez à l'intérieur du fragment. Si vous devez désactiver cette fonctionnalité, cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier dans la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés... et décochez la case Activer l'affichage des commentaires. Dans ce cas, les passages commentés ne seront mis en évidence que si vous cliquez sur l'icône . Pour gérer les commentaires ajoutés, procédez de la manière suivante : pour les modifier, cliquez sur l'icône , pour les supprimer, cliquez sur l'icône , fermez la discussion en cliquant sur l'icône si la tâche ou le problème décrit dans votre commentaire est résolu, après quoi la discussion ouverte par votre commentaire reçoit le statut résolu. Pour l'ouvrir à nouveau, cliquez sur l'icône . Si vous souhaitez masquer les commentaires résolus, cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier dans la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés..., décochez la case Activer l'affichage des commentaires résolus puis cliquez sur Appliquer. Dans ce cas, les commentaires résolus ne seront mis en évidence que si vous cliquez sur l'icône . Si vous utilisez le mode de co-édition Strict, les nouveaux commentaires ajoutés par d'autres utilisateurs ne seront visibles qu'après un clic sur l'icône dans le coin supérieur gauche de la barre supérieure. Pour fermer le panneau avec les commentaires cliquez sur l'icône encore une fois." + "body": "Document Editor vous offre la possibilité de travailler sur un document simultanément avec d'autres utilisateurs. Cette fonction inclut : accès simultané au document édité par plusieurs utilisateurs indication visuelle des fragments qui sont en train d'être édités par d'autres utilisateurs affichage des changements en temps réel ou synchronisation des changements en un seul clic chat pour partager des idées concernant certaines parties du document les commentaires avec la description d'une tâche ou d'un problème à résoudre (il est également possible de travailler avec les commentaires en mode hors ligne, sans se connecter à la version en ligne) Connexion à la version en ligne Dans l'éditeur de bureau, ouvrez l'option Se connecter au cloud du menu de gauche dans la fenêtre principale du programme. Connectez-vous à votre bureau dans le cloud en spécifiant l’identifiant et le mot de passe de votre compte. Edition collaborative Document Editor permet de sélectionner l'un des deux modes de co-édition disponibles : Rapide est utilisé par défaut et affiche les modifications effectuées par d'autres utilisateurs en temps réel. Strict est sélectionné pour masquer les modifications des autres utilisateurs jusqu'à ce que vous cliquiez sur l'icône Enregistrer pour enregistrer vos propres modifications et accepter les modifications apportées par d'autres utilisateurs. Le mode peut être sélectionné dans les Paramètres avancés. Il est également possible de choisir le mode voulu à l'aide de l'icône Mode de coédition dans l'onglet Collaboration de la barre d'outils supérieure: Remarque : lorsque vous co-éditez un document en mode Rapide, la possibilité de Rétablir la dernière opération annulée n'est pas disponible. Lorsqu'un document est en cours de modification par plusieurs utilisateurs simultanément dans le mode Strict, les passages de texte modifiés sont marqués avec des lignes pointillées de couleurs différentes. Pour voir qui est en train d'éditer le fichier au présent, placez le curseur de la souris sur cette icône - les noms des utilisateurs seront affichés dans la fenêtre contextuelle. Le mode Rapide affichera les actions et les noms des co-éditeurs tandis qu'ils modifient le texte. Le nombre d'utilisateurs qui travaillent sur le document actuel est spécifié sur le côté droit de l'en-tête de l'éditeur - . S'il y a trop d'utilisateurs, cliquez sur cette icône pour ouvrir le panneau Chat avec la liste complète affichée. Lorsqu'aucun utilisateur ne visualise ou n'édite le fichier, l'icône dans l'en-tête de l'éditeur aura l'aspect suivant vous permettant de gérer les utilisateurs qui ont accès au fichier directement à partir du document : inviter de nouveaux utilisateurs leur donnant les permissions de modifier, lire, commenter, remplir des formulaires ou réviser le document, ou refuser à certains utilisateurs des droits d'accès au fichier. Cliquez sur cette icône pour gérer l'accès au fichier ; cela peut être fait aussi bien lorsqu'il n'y a pas d'autres utilisateurs qui voient ou co-éditent le document pour le moment que quand il y a d'autres utilisateurs. L'icône ressemble à ceci . Il est également possible de définir des droits d'accès à l'aide de l'icône Partage dans l'onglet Collaboration de la barre d'outils supérieure. Dès que l'un des utilisateurs enregistre ses modifications en cliquant sur l'icône , les autres verront une note dans la barre d'état indiquant qu'il y a des mises à jour. Pour enregistrer les changements effectués et récupérer les mises à jour de vos co-éditeurs cliquez sur l'icône dans le coin supérieur gauche de la barre supérieure. Les mises à jour seront marquées pour vous aider à controller ce qui a été exactement modifié. Vous pouvez spécifier les modifications que vous souhaitez mettre en surbrillance pendant la co-édition si vous cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier dans la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés... et choisissez entre aucune, toutes et récentes modifications de collaboration en temps réel. Quand l'option Afficher toutes les modifications sélectionnée, toutes les modifications effectuées au cours de la session seront mises en surbrillance. En sélectionnant Afficher les modifications récentes, seules les modifications effectuées depuis la dernière fois que vous avez cliqué sur l'icône seront mises en surbrillance. En sélectionnant N'afficher aucune modification, aucune des modifications effectuées au cours de la session ne sera mise en surbrillance. Chat Vous pouvez utiliser cet outil pour coordonner en temps réel le processus de co-édition, par exemple, pour décider avec vos collaborateurs de qui fait quoi, quel paragraphe vous allez éditer maintenant, etc. Les messages de discussion sont stockés pendant une session seulement. Pour discuter du contenu du document, il est préférable d'utiliser les commentaires qui sont stockés jusqu'à ce que vous décidiez de les supprimer. Pour accéder à Chat et envoyer un message à d'autres utilisateurs : cliquez sur l'icône dans la barre latérale gauche ou passez à l'onglet Collaboration de la barre d'outils supérieure et cliquez sur le bouton Chat, saisissez le texte dans le champ correspondant, cliquez sur le bouton Envoyer. Tous les messages envoyés par les utilisateurs seront affichés sur le panneau à gauche. S'il y a de nouveaux messages à lire, l'icône chat sera affichée de la manière suivante - . Pour fermer le panneau avec des messages de discussion, cliquez à nouveau sur l'icône dans la barre latérale gauche ou sur le bouton Chat dans la barre d'outils supérieure. Commentaires Il est possible de travailler avec des commentaires en mode hors ligne, sans se connecter à la version en ligne. Pour laisser un commentaire : sélectionnez le fragment du texte que vous voulez commenter, passez à l'onglet Insertion ou Collaboration de la barre d'outils supérieure et cliquez sur le bouton Commentaire ou utilisez l'icône dans la barre latérale gauche pour ouvrir le panneau Commentaires et cliquez sur le lien Ajouter un commentaire au document ou cliquez avec le bouton droit sur le passage de texte sélectionné et sélectionnez l'option Ajouter un commentaire dans le menu contextuel, saisissez le texte nécessaire, cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter commentaire/Ajouter. Le commentaire sera affiché sur le panneau à gauche. Tout autre utilisateur peut répondre au commentaire ajouté en posant une question ou en faisant référance au travail fait. Pour le faire il suffit de cliquer sur le lien Ajouter une réponse situé au-dessus du commentaire. Le fragment du texte commenté sera marqué dans le document. Pour voir le commentaire, cliquez à l'intérieur du fragment. Si vous devez désactiver cette fonctionnalité, cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier dans la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés... et décochez la case Activer l'affichage des commentaires. Dans ce cas, les passages commentés ne seront mis en évidence que si vous cliquez sur l'icône . Pour gérer les commentaires ajoutés, procédez de la manière suivante : pour les modifier, cliquez sur l'icône , pour les supprimer, cliquez sur l'icône , fermez la discussion en cliquant sur l'icône si la tâche ou le problème décrit dans votre commentaire est résolu, après quoi la discussion ouverte par votre commentaire reçoit le statut résolu. Pour l'ouvrir à nouveau, cliquez sur l'icône . Si vous souhaitez masquer les commentaires résolus, cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier dans la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés..., décochez la case Activer l'affichage des commentaires résolus puis cliquez sur Appliquer. Dans ce cas, les commentaires résolus ne seront mis en évidence que si vous cliquez sur l'icône . Si vous utilisez le mode de co-édition Strict, les nouveaux commentaires ajoutés par d'autres utilisateurs ne seront visibles qu'après un clic sur l'icône dans le coin supérieur gauche de la barre supérieure. Pour fermer le panneau avec les commentaires cliquez sur l'icône encore une fois." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm", "title": "Raccourcis clavier", - "body": "Traitement du document Ouvrir le volet 'Fichier' Alt+F Ouvrir le volet Fichier pour enregistrer, télécharger, imprimer le document actuel, afficher ses informations, créer un nouveau document ou ouvrir un existant, accéder à l'aide de Document Editor ou aux paramètres avancés. Ouvrir le volet 'Recherche' Ctrl+F Ouvrir le volet Recherche pour commencer la recherche d'un caractère/mot/expression dans le document en cours d'édition. Ouvrir le volet 'Commentaires' Ctrl+Shift+H Ouvrir le volet Commentaires pour ajouter votre commentaire ou pour répondre aux commentaires des autres utilisateurs. Ouvrir un champ commentaire Alt+H Ouvrir un champ de saisie où vous pouvez ajouter le texte de votre commentaire. Ouvrir le volet 'Discussion instantanée' Alt+Q Ouvrir le volet Chat et envoyer un message. Enregistrer le document Ctrl+S Enregistrer toutes les modifications dans le document actuellement modifié à l'aide de Document Editor. Imprimer le document Ctrl+P Imprimer le document avec l'une des imprimantes disponibles ou l'enregistrer sous forme de fichier. Enregistrer (Télécharger comme) Ctrl+Maj+S Enregistrer le document en cours d'édition sur le disque dur de l'ordinateur dans l'un des formats pris en charge: DOCX, PDF, TXT, ODT, RTF, HTML. Plein écran F11 Passer à l'affichage plein écran pour adapter Document Editor à votre écran. Menu d'aide F1 Ouvrir le menu Aide de Document Editor Navigation Sauter au début de la ligne Début Placer le curseur au début de la ligne en cours d'édition. Sauter au début du document Ctrl+Début Placer le curseur au début du document en cours d'édition. Sauter à la fin de la ligne Fin Placer le curseur à la fin de la ligne en cours d'édition. Sauter à la fin du document Ctrl+Fin Placer le curseur à la fin du document en cours d'édition. Faire défiler vers le bas Pg. suiv Faire défiler le document vers le bas d'une page visible. Faire défiler vers le haut Pg. préc Faire défiler le document vers le haut d'une page visible. Page suivante Alt+Pg.suiv Passer à la page suivante du document en cours d'édition. Page précédente Alt+Pg.préc Passer à la page précédente du document en cours d'édition. Zoom avant Ctrl++ Agrandir le zoom du document en cours d'édition. Zoom arrière Ctrl+- Réduire le zoom du document en cours d'édition. Écriture Terminer le paragraphe Entrée Terminer le paragraphe actuel et commencer un nouveau. Ajouter un saut de ligne Maj+Entrée Ajouter un saut de ligne sans commencer un nouveau paragraphe. Supprimer Retour arrière, Supprimer Effacer un caractère à gauche (Retour arrière) ou à droite (Supprimer) du curseur. Créer un espace insécable Ctrl+Maj+Barre d'espace Créer un espace entre les caractères qui ne peuvent pas être utilisés pour passer à la ligne suivante. Créer un trait d'union insécable Ctrl+Maj+Trait d'union Créer un trait d'union entre les caractères qui ne peuvent pas être utilisés pour passer à la ligne suivante. Annuler et Rétablir Annuler Ctrl+Z Inverser la dernière action effectuée. Rétablir Ctrl+Y Répéter la dernière action annulée. Couper, Copier et Coller Couper Ctrl+X Supprimer le fragment du texte sélectionné et l'envoyer vers le presse-papiers. Le texte copié peut être inséré ensuite à un autre endroit dans le même document, dans un autre document, ou dans un autre programme. Copier Ctrl+C, Ctrl+Inser Envoyer le fragment du texte sélectionné et l'envoyer vers le presse-papiers. Le texte copié peut être inséré ensuite à un autre endroit dans le même document, dans un autre document, ou dans un autre programme. Coller Ctrl+V, Shift+Inser Insérer le fragment du texte précédemment copié du presse-papiers à la position actuelle du texte. Le texte peut être copié précédemment à partir du même document, à partir d'un autre document, ou provenant d'un autre programme. Insérer un lien hypertexte Ctrl+K Insérer un lien hypertexte qui peut être utilisé pour accéder à une adresse web. Copier le style Ctrl+Maj+C Copier la mise en forme du fragment sélectionné du texte en cours d'édition. La mise en forme copiée peut être ensuite appliquée à un autre texte dans le même document. Appliquer le style Ctrl+Maj+V Appliquer la mise en forme précédemment copiée dans le texte du document en cours d'édition. Sélection de texte Sélectionner tout Ctrl+A Sélectionner tout le texte du document avec des tableaux et des images. Sélectionner une plage Maj+Touche de direction Sélectionner le texte caractère par caractère. Sélectionner depuis le curseur jusqu'au début de la ligne Maj+Début Sélectionner le fragment du texte depuis le curseur jusqu'au début de la ligne actuelle. Sélectionner depuis le curseur jusqu'à la fin de la ligne Maj+Fin Sélectionner le fragment du texte depuis le curseur jusqu'à la fin de la ligne actuelle. Style de texte Gras Ctrl+B Mettre la police du fragment de texte sélectionné en gras pour lui donner plus de poids. Italique Ctrl+I Mettre la police du fragment de texte sélectionné en italique pour lui donner une certaine inclinaison à droite. Souligné Ctrl+U Souligner le fragment de texte sélectionné avec la ligne qui passe sous les lettres. Barré Ctrl+5 Souligner le fragment de texte sélectionné avec la ligne qui passe sous les lettres. Indice Ctrl+point (.) Rendre le fragment du texte sélectionné plus petit et le placer à la partie inférieure de la ligne du texte, par exemple comme dans les formules chimiques. Exposant Ctrl+virgule (,) Sélectionner le fragment du texte et le placer sur la partie supérieure de la ligne de texte, par exemple comme dans les fractions. Style Titre 1 Alt+1 (pour les navigateurs Windows et Linux) Alt+Ctrl+1 (pour les navigateurs Mac) Appliquer le style Titre 1 au fragment du texte sélectionné. Style Titre 2 Alt+2 (pour les navigateurs Windows et Linux) Alt+Ctrl+2 (pour les navigateurs Mac) Appliquer le style Titre 2 au fragment du texte sélectionné. Style Titre 3 Alt+3 (pour les navigateurs Windows et Linux) Alt+Ctrl+3 (pour les navigateurs Mac) Appliquer le style Titre 3 au fragment du texte sélectionné. Liste à puces Ctrl+Maj+L Créer une liste à puces non numérotée à partir du fragment de texte sélectionné ou créer une nouvelle liste. Supprimer la mise en forme Ctrl+Espace Supprimer la mise en forme du fragment du texte sélectionné. Agrandir la police Ctrl+] Augmenter la taille de la police du fragment de texte sélectionné de 1 point. Réduire la police Ctrl+[ Réduire la taille de la police du fragment de texte sélectionné de 1 point. Alignement centré/à gauche Ctrl+E Passer de l'alignement centré à l'alignement à gauche. Justifié/à gauche Ctrl+J, Ctrl+L Passer de l'alignement justifié à gauche. Alignement à droite/à gauche Ctrl+R Passer de l'aligné à droite à l'aligné à gauche. Augmenter le retrait Ctrl+M Augmenter le retrait gauche. Réduire le retrait Ctrl+Maj+M Diminuer le retrait gauche. Ajouter un numéro de page Ctrl+Maj+P Ajouter le numéro de la page actuelle au texte ou au pied de page. Modification des objets Limiter le déplacement Maj+faire glisser Limiter le déplacement de l'objet sélectionné horizontalement ou verticalement. Régler une rotation de 15 degrés Maj+faire glisser (lors de la rotation) Contraindre une rotation à un angle de 15 degrés. Conserver les proportions Maj+faire glisser (lors du redimensionnement) Conserver les proportions de l'objet sélectionné lors du redimensionnement. Mouvement par incréments de 1 pixel Ctrl Maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée en faisant glisser et utilisez les flèches pour déplacer l'objet sélectionné d'un pixel à la fois." + "body": "Windows/LinuxMac OS Traitement du document Ouvrir le panneau \"Fichier\" Alt+F ⌥ Option+F Ouvrir le volet Fichier pour enregistrer, télécharger, imprimer le document actuel, afficher ses informations, créer un nouveau document ou ouvrir un existant, accéder à l'aide de Document Editor ou aux paramètres avancés. Ouvrir la fenêtre \"Rechercher et remplacer\" Ctrl+F ^ Ctrl+F, ⌘ Cmd+F Ouvrir la fenêtre Rechercher et remplacer pour commencer à chercher un caractère/mot/phrase dans le document actuellement édité. Ouvrir la fenêtre \"Rechercher et remplacer\" avec le champ de remplacement Ctrl+H ^ Ctrl+H Ouvrir la fenêtre Rechercher et remplacer avec le champ de remplacement pour remplacer une ou plusieurs occurrences des caractères trouvés. Répéter la dernière action « Rechercher ». ⇧ Maj+F4 ⇧ Maj+F4, ⌘ Cmd+G, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+F4 Répéter l'action de Rechercher qui a été effectuée avant d'appuyer sur la combinaison de touches. Ouvir le panneau \"Commentaires\" Ctrl+⇧ Maj+H ^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+H, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+H Ouvrir le volet Commentaires pour ajouter votre commentaire ou pour répondre aux commentaires des autres utilisateurs. Ouvrir le champ de commentaires Alt+H ⌥ Option+H Ouvrir un champ de saisie où vous pouvez ajouter le texte de votre commentaire. Ouvrir le panneau \"Chat\" Alt+Q ⌥ Option+Q Ouvrir le panneau Chat et envoyer un message. Enregistrer le document Ctrl+S ^ Ctrl+S, ⌘ Cmd+S Enregistrer toutes les modifications dans le document actuellement modifié à l'aide de Document Editor. Le fichier actif sera enregistré avec son nom de fichier actuel, son emplacement et son format de fichier. Imprimer le document Ctrl+P ^ Ctrl+P, ⌘ Cmd+P Imprimer le document avec l'une des imprimantes disponibles ou l'enregistrer sous forme de fichier. Enregistrer (Télécharger comme) Ctrl+⇧ Maj+S ^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+S, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+S Ouvrir l'onglet Télécharger comme pour enregistrer le document actuellement affiché sur le disque dur de l'ordinateur dans l'un des formats pris en charge : DOCX, PDF, ODT, TXT, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, HTML. Plein écran F11 Passer à l'affichage plein écran pour adapter Document Editor à votre écran. Menu d'aide F1 F1 Ouvrir le menu Aide de Document Editor Ouvrir un fichier existant (Desktop Editors) Ctrl+O L’onglet Ouvrir fichier local dans Desktop Editors, ouvre la boîte de dialogue standard qui permet de sélectionner un fichier existant. Fermer un fichier (Desktop Editors) Ctrl+W, Ctrl+F4 ^ Ctrl+W, ⌘ Cmd+W Fermer la fenêtre du document en cours de modification dans Desktop Editors. Menu contextuel de l’élément ⇧ Maj+F10 ⇧ Maj+F10 Ouvrir le menu contextuel de l'élément sélectionné. Navigation Sauter au début de la ligne Début Début Placer le curseur au début de la ligne en cours d'édition. Sauter au début du document Ctrl+Début ^ Ctrl+Début Placer le curseur au début du document en cours d'édition. Sauter à la fin de la ligne Fin Fin Placer le curseur à la fin de la ligne en cours d'édition. Sauter à la fin du document Ctrl+Fin ^ Ctrl+Fin Placer le curseur à la fin du document en cours d'édition. Sauter au début de la page précédente Alt+Ctrl+Pg. préc Placez le curseur au tout début de la page qui précède la page en cours d'édition. Sauter au début de la page suivante Alt+Ctrl+Pg. suiv ⌥ Option+⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+Pg. suiv Placez le curseur au tout début de la page qui suit la page en cours d'édition. Faire défiler vers le bas Pg. suiv Pg. suiv, ⌥ Option+Fn+↑ Faire défiler le document vers le bas d'une page visible. Faire défiler vers le haut Pg. préc Pg. préc, ⌥ Option+Fn+↓ Faire défiler le document vers le haut d'une page visible. Page suivante Alt+Pg. suiv ⌥ Option+Pg. suiv Passer à la page suivante du document en cours d'édition. Page précédente Alt+Pg. préc ⌥ Option+Pg. préc Passer à la page précédente du document en cours d'édition. Zoom avant Ctrl++ ^ Ctrl+=, ⌘ Cmd+= Agrandir le zoom du document en cours d'édition. Zoom arrière Ctrl+- ^ Ctrl+-, ⌘ Cmd+- Réduire le zoom du document en cours d'édition. Déplacer un caractère vers la gauche ← ← Déplacer le curseur d'un caractère vers la gauche. Déplacer un caractère vers la droite → → Déplacer le curseur d'un caractère vers la droite. Déplacer vers le début d'un mot ou un mot vers la gauche Ctrl+← ^ Ctrl+←, ⌘ Cmd+← Déplacer le curseur au début d'un mot ou d'un mot vers la gauche. Déplacer un caractère vers la droite Ctrl+→ ^ Ctrl+→, ⌘ Cmd+→ Déplacer le curseur d'un mot vers la droite. Déplacer une ligne vers le haut ↑ ↑ Déplacer le curseur d'une ligne vers le haut. Déplacer une ligne vers le bas ↓ ↓ Déplacer le curseur d'une ligne vers le bas. Écriture Terminer le paragraphe ↵ Entrée ↵ Retour Terminer le paragraphe actuel et commencer un nouveau. Ajouter un saut de ligne ⇧ Maj+↵ Entrée ⇧ Maj+↵ Retour Ajouter un saut de ligne sans commencer un nouveau paragraphe. Supprimer ← Retour arrière, Supprimer ← Retour arrière, Supprimer Supprimer un caractère à gauche (← Retour arrière) ou vers la droite (Supprimer) du curseur. Supprimer le mot à gauche du curseur Ctrl+← Retour arrière ^ Ctrl+← Retour arrière, ⌘ Cmd+← Retour arrière Supprimer un mot à gauche du curseur. Supprimer le mot à droite du curseur Ctrl+Supprimer ^ Ctrl+Supprimer, ⌘ Cmd+Supprimer Supprimer un mot à droite du curseur. Créer un espace insécable Ctrl+⇧ Maj+␣ Barre d'espace ^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+␣ Barre d'espace Créer un espace entre les caractères qui ne peuvent pas être utilisés pour passer à la ligne suivante. Créer un trait d'union insécable Ctrl+⇧ Maj+Trait d'union ^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+Trait d'union Créer un trait d'union entre les caractères qui ne peuvent pas être utilisés pour passer à la ligne suivante. Annuler et Rétablir Annuler Ctrl+Z ^ Ctrl+Z, ⌘ Cmd+Z Inverser la dernière action effectuée. Rétablir Ctrl+Y ^ Ctrl+Y, ⌘ Cmd+Y, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+Z Répéter la dernière action annulée. Couper, Copier et Coller Couper Ctrl+X, ⇧ Maj+Supprimer ⌘ Cmd+X, ⇧ Maj+Supprimer Supprimer le fragment du texte sélectionné et l'envoyer vers le presse-papiers. Le texte copié peut être inséré ensuite à un autre endroit dans le même document, dans un autre document, ou dans un autre programme. Copier Ctrl+C, Ctrl+Inser ⌘ Cmd+C Envoyer le fragment du texte sélectionné et l'envoyer vers le presse-papiers. Le texte copié peut être inséré ensuite à un autre endroit dans le même document, dans un autre document, ou dans un autre programme. Coller Ctrl+V, ⇧ Maj+Inser ⌘ Cmd+V Insérer le fragment du texte précédemment copié du presse-papiers à la position actuelle du texte. Le texte peut être copié précédemment à partir du même document, à partir d'un autre document, ou provenant d'un autre programme. Insérer un lien hypertexte Ctrl+K ⌘ Cmd+K Insérer un lien hypertexte qui peut être utilisé pour accéder à une adresse web. Copier le style Ctrl+⇧ Maj+C ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+C Copier la mise en forme du fragment sélectionné du texte en cours d'édition. La mise en forme copiée peut être ensuite appliquée à un autre texte dans le même document. Appliquer le style Ctrl+⇧ Maj+V ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+V Appliquer la mise en forme précédemment copiée dans le texte du document en cours d'édition. Sélection de texte Sélectionner tout Ctrl+A ⌘ Cmd+A Sélectionner tout le texte du document avec des tableaux et des images. Sélectionner une plage ⇧ Maj+→ ← ⇧ Maj+→ ← Sélectionner le texte caractère par caractère. Sélectionner depuis le curseur jusqu'au début de la ligne ⇧ Maj+Début ⇧ Maj+Début Sélectionner le fragment du texte depuis le curseur jusqu'au début de la ligne actuelle. Sélectionner depuis le curseur jusqu'à la fin de la ligne ⇧ Maj+Fin ⇧ Maj+Fin Sélectionner le fragment du texte depuis le curseur jusqu'à la fin de la ligne actuelle. Sélectionner un caractère à droite ⇧ Maj+→ ⇧ Maj+→ Sélectionner un caractère à droite de la position du curseur. Sélectionner un caractère à gauche ⇧ Maj+← ⇧ Maj+← Sélectionner un caractère à gauche de la position du curseur. Sélectionner jusqu'à la fin d'un mot Ctrl+⇧ Maj+→ Sélectionner un fragment de texte depuis le curseur jusqu'à la fin d'un mot. Sélectionner au début d'un mot Ctrl+⇧ Maj+← Sélectionner un fragment de texte depuis le curseur jusqu'au début d'un mot. Sélectionner une ligne vers le haut ⇧ Maj+↑ ⇧ Maj+↑ Sélectionner une ligne vers le haut (avec le curseur au début d'une ligne). Sélectionner une ligne vers le bas ⇧ Maj+↓ ⇧ Maj+↓ Sélectionner une ligne vers le bas (avec le curseur au début d'une ligne). Sélectionner la page vers le haut ⇧ Maj+Pg. préc ⇧ Maj+Pg. préc Sélectionner la partie de page de la position du curseur à la partie supérieure de l'écran. Sélectionner la page vers le bas ⇧ Maj+Pg. suiv ⇧ Maj+Pg. suiv Sélectionner la partie de page de la position du curseur à la partie inférieure de l'écran. Style de texte Gras Ctrl+B ^ Ctrl+B, ⌘ Cmd+B Mettre la police du fragment de texte sélectionné en gras pour lui donner plus de poids. Italique Ctrl+I ^ Ctrl+I, ⌘ Cmd+I Mettre la police du fragment de texte sélectionné en italique pour lui donner une certaine inclinaison à droite. Souligné Ctrl+U ^ Ctrl+U, ⌘ Cmd+U Souligner le fragment de texte sélectionné avec la ligne qui passe sous les lettres. Barré Ctrl+5 ^ Ctrl+5, ⌘ Cmd+5 Souligner le fragment de texte sélectionné avec la ligne qui passe sous les lettres. Indice Ctrl+. ^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+>, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+> Rendre le fragment du texte sélectionné plus petit et le placer à la partie inférieure de la ligne du texte, par exemple comme dans les formules chimiques. Exposant Ctrl+, ^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+<, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+< Sélectionner le fragment du texte et le placer sur la partie supérieure de la ligne de texte, par exemple comme dans les fractions. Style Titre 1 Alt+1 ⌥ Option+^ Ctrl+1 Appliquer le style Titre 1 au fragment du texte sélectionné. Style Titre 2 Alt+2 ⌥ Option+^ Ctrl+2 Appliquer le style Titre 2 au fragment du texte sélectionné. Style Titre 3 Alt+3 ⌥ Option+^ Ctrl+3 Appliquer le style Titre 3 au fragment du texte sélectionné. Liste à puces Ctrl+⇧ Maj+L ^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+L, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Maj+L Créer une liste à puces non numérotée du fragment de texte sélectionné ou créer une nouvelle liste. Supprimer la mise en forme Ctrl+␣ Barre d'espace Supprimer la mise en forme du fragment du texte sélectionné. Agrandir la police Ctrl+] ⌘ Cmd+] Augmenter la taille de la police du fragment de texte sélectionné de 1 point. Réduire la police Ctrl+[ ⌘ Cmd+[ Réduire la taille de la police du fragment de texte sélectionné de 1 point. Alignement centré/à gauche Ctrl+E ^ Ctrl+E, ⌘ Cmd+E Passer de l'alignement centré à l'alignement à gauche. Justifié/à gauche Ctrl+J, Ctrl+L ^ Ctrl+J, ⌘ Cmd+J Passer de l'alignement justifié à gauche. Alignement à droite/à gauche Ctrl+R ^ Ctrl+R Passer de l'aligné à droite à l'aligné à gauche. Appliquer la mise en forme de l'indice (espacement automatique) Ctrl+= Appliquer la mise en forme d'indice au fragment de texte sélectionné. Appliquer la mise en forme d’exposant (espacement automatique) Ctrl+⇧ Maj++ Appliquer la mise en forme d'exposant au fragment de texte sélectionné. Insérer des sauts de page Ctrl+↵ Entrée ^ Ctrl+↵ Retour Insérer un saut de page à la position actuelle du curseur. Augmenter le retrait Ctrl+M ^ Ctrl+M Augmenter le retrait gauche. Réduire le retrait Ctrl+⇧ Maj+M ^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+M Diminuer le retrait gauche. Ajouter un numéro de page Ctrl+⇧ Maj+P ^ Ctrl+⇧ Maj+P Ajoutez le numéro de page actuel à la position actuelle du curseur. Caractères non imprimables Ctrl+⇧ Maj+Num8 Afficher ou masque l'affichage des caractères non imprimables. Supprimer un caractère à gauche ← Retour arrière ← Retour arrière Supprimer un caractère à gauche du curseur. Supprimer un caractère à droite Supprimer Supprimer Supprimer un caractère à droite du curseur. Modification des objets Limiter le déplacement ⇧ Maj + faire glisser ⇧ Maj + faire glisser Limiter le déplacement de l'objet sélectionné horizontalement ou verticalement. Régler une rotation de 15 degrés ⇧ Maj + faire glisser (lors de la rotation) ⇧ Maj + faire glisser (lors de la rotation) Contraindre une rotation à un angle de 15 degrés. Conserver les proportions ⇧ Maj + faire glisser (lors du redimensionnement) ⇧ Maj + faire glisser (lors du redimensionnement) Conserver les proportions de l'objet sélectionné lors du redimensionnement. Tracer une ligne droite ou une flèche ⇧ Maj + faire glisser (lors du tracé de lignes/flèches) ⇧ Maj + faire glisser (lors du tracé de lignes/flèches) Tracer une ligne droite ou une flèche verticale/horizontale/inclinée de 45 degrés. Mouvement par incréments de 1 pixel Ctrl+← → ↑ ↓ Maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée en faisant glisser et utilisez les flèches pour déplacer l'objet sélectionné d'un pixel à la fois. Utilisation des tableaux Passer à la cellule suivante d’une ligne ↹ Tab ↹ Tab Aller à la cellule suivante d’une ligne de tableau. Passer à la cellule précédente d’une ligne ⇧ Maj+↹ Tab ⇧ Maj+↹ Tab Aller à la cellule précédente d’une ligne de tableau. Passer à la ligne suivante ↓ ↓ Aller à la ligne suivante d’un tableau. Passer à la ligne précédente ↑ ↑ Aller à la ligne précédente d’un tableau. Commencer un nouveau paragraphe ↵ Entrée ↵ Retour Commencer un nouveau paragraphe dans une cellule. Ajouter une nouvelle ligne ↹ Tab dans la cellule inférieure droite du tableau. ↹ Tab dans la cellule inférieure droite du tableau. Ajouter une nouvelle ligne au bas du tableau. Insertion des caractères spéciaux Insérer une formule Alt+= Insérer une formule à la position actuelle du curseur." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm", "title": "Paramètres d'affichage et outils de navigation", - "body": "Document Editor est doté de plusieurs outils qui vous aide à visionner et naviguer à travers votre document : les règles, le zoom, les boutons page précédente / suivante, l'affichage des numéros de page. Régler les paramètres d'affichage Pour régler les paramètres d'affichage par défaut et définir le mode le plus convenable pour travailler avec le document, passez à l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres d'affichage dans le coin supérieur droit et sélectionnez les éléments de l'interface à afficher/masquer. Vous pouvez choisir une des options suivantes de la liste déroulante Paramètres d'affichage : Masquer la barre d'outils - masque la barre d'outils supérieure contenant les commandes pendant que les onglets restent visibles. Lorsque cette option est activée, vous pouvez cliquer sur n'importe quel onglet pour afficher la barre d'outils. La barre d'outils s'affiche jusqu'à ce que vous cliquiez ailleurs. Pour désactiver ce mode, passez à l'onglet Accueil, puis cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres d'affichage et cliquez de nouveau sur l'option Masquer la barre d'outils. La barre d'outils supérieure sera affichée tout le temps.Remarque : vous pouvez également double-cliquer sur un onglet pour masquer la barre d'outils supérieure ou l'afficher à nouveau. Masquer la barre d'état sert à masquer la barre qui se situe tout en bas avec les boutons Affichage des numéros de page et Zoom. Pour afficher la Barre d'état masquée cliquez sur cette option encore une fois. Masquer les règles - masque les règles qui sont utilisées pour aligner le texte, les graphiques, les tableaux et d'autres éléments dans un document, définir des marges, des tabulations et des retraits de paragraphe. Pour afficher les Règles masquées cliquez sur cette option encore une fois. La barre latérale droite est minimisée par défaut. Pour l'agrandir, sélectionnez un objet (par exemple, image, graphique, forme) ou un passage de texte et cliquez sur l'icône de l'onglet actuellement activé sur la droite. Pour réduire la barre latérale droite, cliquez à nouveau sur l'icône. Quand le panneau Commentaires ou Chat est ouvert, vous pouvez régler la largeur de la barre gauche avec un simple glisser-déposer : placez le curseur de la souris sur la bordure gauche de la barre latérale. Pour rétablir sa largeur originale faites glisser le bord à droite. Utiliser les outils de navigation Pour naviguer à travers votre document, utilisez les outils suivants : Les boutons Zoom sont situés en bas à droite et sont utilisés pour faire un zoom avant et arrière dans le document actif. Pour modifier la valeur de zoom actuellement sélectionnée qui s'affiche en pourcentage, cliquez dessus et sélectionnez l'une des options de zoom disponibles à partir de la liste ou utilisez les boutons Zoom avant ou Zoom arrière . Cliquez sur l'icône Ajuster à la largeur pour adapter la largeur de la page du document à la partie visible de la zone de travail. Pour adapter la page entière du document à la partie visible de la zone de travail, cliquez sur l'icône Ajuster à la page . Les paramètres de zoom sont également disponibles dans la liste déroulante Paramètres d'affichage ce qui peut être utile si vous décidez de masquer la Barre d'état. L'Indicateur de numéros de page affiche la page active dans l'ensemble des pages du document actif (page 'n' sur 'nn'). Cliquez sur ce libellé pour ouvrir la fenêtre où vous pouvez entrer le numéro de la page et y accéder rapidement." + "body": "Document Editor est doté de plusieurs outils qui vous aide à visionner et naviguer à travers votre document : les règles, le zoom, les boutons page précédente / suivante, l'affichage des numéros de page. Régler les paramètres d'affichage Pour ajuster les paramètres d'affichage par défaut et définir le mode le plus pratique pour travailler avec le document, cliquez sur le bouton cliquez sur l'icône Afficher les paramètres située sur le côté droit de l'en-tête de l'éditeur et sélectionnez les éléments d'interface que vous souhaitez masquer ou afficher. Vous pouvez choisir une des options suivantes de la liste déroulante Afficher les paramètres : Masquer la barre d'outils - masque la barre d'outils supérieure contenant les commandes pendant que les onglets restent visibles. Lorsque cette option est activée, vous pouvez cliquer sur n'importe quel onglet pour afficher la barre d'outils. La barre d'outils s'affiche jusqu'à ce que vous cliquiez ailleurs. Pour désactiver ce mode, cliquez sur l’icône Afficher les paramètres puis cliquez de nouveau sur l'option Masquer la barre d'outils. La barre d'outils supérieure sera affichée tout le temps.Remarque : vous pouvez également double-cliquer sur un onglet pour masquer la barre d'outils supérieure ou l'afficher à nouveau. Masquer la barre d'état sert à masquer la barre qui se situe tout en bas avec les boutons Affichage des numéros de page et Zoom. Pour afficher la Barre d'état masquée cliquez sur cette option encore une fois. Masquer les règles - masque les règles qui sont utilisées pour aligner le texte, les graphiques, les tableaux et d'autres éléments dans un document, définir des marges, des tabulations et des retraits de paragraphe. Pour afficher les Règles masquées cliquez sur cette option encore une fois. La barre latérale droite est réduite par défaut. Pour l'agrandir, sélectionnez un objet (par exemple, image, graphique, forme) ou un passage de texte et cliquez sur l'icône de l'onglet actuellement activé sur la droite. Pour réduire la barre latérale droite, cliquez à nouveau sur l'icône. Quand le panneau Commentaires ou Chat est ouvert, vous pouvez régler la largeur de la barre gauche avec un simple glisser-déposer : placez le curseur de la souris sur la bordure gauche de la barre latérale. Pour rétablir sa largeur originale faites glisser le bord à droite. Utiliser les outils de navigation Pour naviguer à travers votre document, utilisez les outils suivants : Les boutons Zoom sont situés en bas à droite et sont utilisés pour faire un zoom avant et arrière dans le document actif. Pour modifier la valeur de zoom sélectionnée en pourcentage, cliquez dessus et sélectionnez l'une des options de zoom disponibles dans la liste ou utilisez les boutons Zoom avant ou Zoom arrière . Cliquez sur l'icône Ajuster à la largeur pour adapter la largeur de la page du document à la partie visible de la zone de travail. Pour adapter la page entière du document à la partie visible de la zone de travail, cliquez sur l'icône Ajuster à la page . Les paramètres de Zoom sont également disponibles dans la liste déroulante Paramètres d'affichage qui peuvent être bien utiles si vous décidez de masquer la Barre d'état. L'Indicateur de numéros de page affiche la page active dans l'ensemble des pages du document actif (page 'n' sur 'nn'). Cliquez sur ce libellé pour ouvrir la fenêtre où vous pouvez entrer le numéro de la page et y accéder rapidement." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/Review.htm", @@ -43,62 +43,77 @@ var indexes = { "id": "HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm", "title": "Formats des documents électroniques pris en charge", - "body": "Les documents électroniques représentent l'un des types des fichiers les plus utilisés en informatique. Grâce à l'utilisation du réseau informatique tant développé aujourd'hui, il est possible et plus pratique de distribuer des documents électroniques que des versions imprimées. Les formats de fichier ouverts et propriétaires sont bien nombreux à cause de la variété des périphériques utilisés pour la présentation des documents. Document Editor prend en charge les formats les plus populaires. Formats Description Affichage Edition Téléchargement DOC L'extension de nom de fichier pour les documents du traitement textuel créé avec Microsoft Word + DOCX Office Open XML Le format de fichier compressé basé sur XML développé par Microsoft pour représenter des feuilles de calcul et les graphiques, les présentations et les document du traitement textuel + + + ODT Le format de fichier du traitement textuel d'OpenDocument, le standard ouvert pour les documents électroniques + + + RTF Rich Text Format Le format de fichier du document développé par Microsoft pour la multiplateforme d'échange des documents + + + TXT L'extension de nom de fichier pour les fichiers de texte contenant habituellement une mise en forme minimale + + + PDF Portable Document Format Format de fichier utilisé pour représenter les documents d'une manière indépendante du logiciel, du matériel et des systèmes d'exploitation + + HTML HyperText Markup Language Le principale langage de balisage pour les pages web + EPUB Electronic Publication Le format ebook standardisé, gratuit et ouvert créé par l'International Digital Publishing Forum + XPS Open XML Paper Specification Le format ouvert de la mise en page fixe, libre de redevance créé par Microsoft + DjVu Le format de fichier conçu principalement pour stocker les documents numérisés, en particulier ceux qui contiennent une combinaison du texte, des dessins au trait et des photographies +" + "body": "Les documents électroniques représentent l'un des types des fichiers les plus utilisés en informatique. Grâce à l'utilisation du réseau informatique tant développé aujourd'hui, il est possible et plus pratique de distribuer des documents électroniques que des versions imprimées. Les formats de fichier ouverts et propriétaires sont bien nombreux à cause de la variété des périphériques utilisés pour la présentation des documents. Document Editor prend en charge les formats les plus populaires. Formats Description Affichage Edition Téléchargement DOC L'extension de nom de fichier pour les documents du traitement textuel créé avec Microsoft Word + + DOCX Office Open XML Le format de fichier compressé basé sur XML développé par Microsoft pour représenter des feuilles de calcul et les graphiques, les présentations et les document du traitement textuel + + + DOTX Word Open XML Document Template Format de fichier zippé, basé sur XML, développé par Microsoft pour les modèles de documents texte. Un modèle DOTX contient des paramètres de mise en forme, des styles, etc. et peut être utilisé pour créer plusieurs documents avec la même mise en forme. + + + ODT Le format de fichier du traitement textuel d'OpenDocument, le standard ouvert pour les documents électroniques + + + OTT OpenDocument Document Template Format de fichier OpenDocument pour les modèles de document texte. Un modèle OTT contient des paramètres de mise en forme, des styles, etc. et peut être utilisé pour créer plusieurs documents avec la même mise en forme. + + + RTF Rich Text Format Le format de fichier du document développé par Microsoft pour la multiplateforme d'échange des documents + + + TXT L'extension de nom de fichier pour les fichiers de texte contenant habituellement une mise en forme minimale + + + PDF Portable Document Format Format de fichier utilisé pour représenter les documents d'une manière indépendante du logiciel, du matériel et des systèmes d'exploitation + + PDF/A Portable Document Format / A Une version normalisée ISO du format PDF (Portable Document Format) conçue pour l'archivage et la conservation à long terme des documents électroniques. + + HTML HyperText Markup Language Le principale langage de balisage pour les pages web + + dans la version en ligne EPUB Electronic Publication Le format ebook standardisé, gratuit et ouvert créé par l'International Digital Publishing Forum + XPS Open XML Paper Specification Le format ouvert de la mise en page fixe, libre de redevance créé par Microsoft + DjVu Le format de fichier conçu principalement pour stocker les documents numérisés, en particulier ceux qui contiennent une combinaison du texte, des dessins au trait et des photographies +" }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm", "title": "Onglet Fichier", - "body": "L'onglet Fichier permet d'effectuer certaines opérations de base sur le fichier en cours. Dans cet onglet vous pouvez : enregistrer le fichier actuel (au cas où l'option Sauvegarde automatique est désactivée), le télécharger, l'imprimer ou le renommer, créer un nouveau document ou ouvrir un document récemment modifié, voir des informations générales sur le document, gérer les droits d'accès, suivre l'historique des versions, accéder aux paramètres avancés de l'éditeur, retourner à la liste des documents." + "body": "L'onglet Fichier permet d'effectuer certaines opérations de base sur le fichier en cours. Fenêtre de l'éditeur en ligne Document Editor : Fenêtre de l'éditeur de bureau Document Editor : En utilisant cet onglet, vous pouvez : dans la version en ligne, enregistrer le fichier actuel (si l'option Enregistrement automatique est désactivée), télécharger comme (enregistrer le document dans le format sélectionné sur le disque dur de l'ordinateur), enregistrer la copie sous (enregistrer une copie du document dans le format sélectionné dans les documents du portail), imprimer ou renommer le fichier actuel, dans la version bureau, enregistrer le fichier actuel en conservant le format et l'emplacement actuels à l'aide de l'option Enregistrer ou enregistrer le fichier actuel avec un nom, un emplacement ou un format différent à l'aide de l'option Enregistrer sous, imprimer le fichier. protéger le fichier à l'aide d'un mot de passe, modifier ou supprimer le mot de passe (disponible dans la version de bureau uniquement); créer un nouveau document ou en ouvrir un récemment édité (disponible dans la version en ligne uniquement), voir des informations générales sur le document, gérer les droits d'accès (disponible uniquement dans la version en ligne), suivre l’historique des versions (disponible uniquement dans la version en ligne), accéder aux Paramètres avancés de l'éditeur, dans la version de bureau, ouvrez le dossier où le fichier est stocké dans la fenêtre Explorateur de fichiers. Dans la version en ligne, ouvrez le dossier du module Documents où le fichier est stocké dans un nouvel onglet du navigateur." }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/HomeTab.htm", "title": "Onglet Accueil", - "body": "L'onglet Accueil s'ouvre par défaut lorsque vous ouvrez un document. Il permet de formater la police et les paragraphes. D'autres options sont également disponibles ici, telles que Publipostage, schémas de couleurs, paramètres d'affichage. Dans cet onglet vous pouvez : Définir le type de police, la taille et la couleur, Appliquer les styles de police, Sélectionner la couleur d'arrière-plan pour un paragraphe, créer des listes à puces et numérotées, Changer les retraits de paragraphe, Régler l'interligne du paragraphe, Aligner le texte d'un paragraphe, Afficher/masquer les caractères non imprimables, Copier/effacer la mise en forme du texte, Modifier le jeu de couleurs, utiliser le Publipostage, gérer les styles, Ajustez les Paramètres d'affichage et accédez aux Paramètres avancés de l'éditeur." + "body": "L'onglet Accueil s'ouvre par défaut lorsque vous ouvrez un document. Il permet de formater la police et les paragraphes. D'autres options sont également disponibles ici, telles que Fusion et publipostage et les agencements de couleurs. Fenêtre de l'éditeur en ligne Document Editor : Fenêtre de l'éditeur de bureau Document Editor : En utilisant cet onglet, vous pouvez : Définir le type de police, la taille et la couleur, Appliquer les styles de police, Sélectionner la couleur d'arrière-plan pour un paragraphe, créer des listes à puces et numérotées, Changer les retraits de paragraphe, Régler l'interligne du paragraphe, Aligner le texte d'un paragraphe, Afficher/masquer les caractères non imprimables, copier/effacer la mise en forme du texte, Modifier le jeu de couleurs, utiliser Fusion et publipostage (disponible uniquement dans la version en ligne), gérer les styles." }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/InsertTab.htm", "title": "Onglet Insertion", - "body": "L'onglet Insertion permet d'ajouter des éléments de mise en page, ainsi que des objets visuels et des commentaires. En utilisant cet onglet, vous pouvez : insérer des sauts de page, des sauts de section et des sauts de colonne, insérer des en-têtes et pieds de page et des numéros de page, insérer des tableaux, des images, des graphiques, des formes, insérer des liens hypertexte, et des commentaires, insérer des des zones de texte et des objets Text Art, des équations, des lettrines, des contrôles de contenu." + "body": "L'onglet Insertion permet d'ajouter des éléments de mise en page, ainsi que des objets visuels et des commentaires. Fenêtre de l'éditeur en ligne Document Editor : Fenêtre de l'éditeur de bureau Document Editor : En utilisant cet onglet, vous pouvez : insérer une page vierge, insérer des sauts de page, des sauts de section et des sauts de colonne, insérer des en-têtes et pieds de page et des numéros de page, insérer des tableaux, des images, des graphiques, des formes, insérer des liens hypertexte, et des commentaires, insérer des des zones de texte et des objets Text Art, des équations, des lettrines, des contrôles de contenu." }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/LayoutTab.htm", - "title": "Onglet Disposition", - "body": "L'onglet Disposition permet de modifier l'apparence du document : configurer les paramètres de la page et définir la disposition des éléments visuels. Dans cet onglet vous pouvez : ajuster les marges, l'orientation, la taille de la page, ajouter des colonnes, insérer des sauts de page, des sauts de section et des sauts de colonne, aligner et organiser les objets (tableaux, images, graphiques, formes), changer le style d'habillage." + "title": "Onglet Mise en page", + "body": "L'onglet Mise en page permet de modifier l'apparence du document : configurer les paramètres de la page et définir la disposition des éléments visuels. Fenêtre de l'éditeur en ligne Document Editor : Fenêtre de l'éditeur de bureau Document Editor : En utilisant cet onglet, vous pouvez : ajuster les marges, l'orientation, la taille de la page, ajouter des colonnes, insérer des sauts de page, des sauts de section et des sauts de colonne, aligner et organiser les objets (tableaux, images, graphiques, formes), changer le style d'habillage." }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm", "title": "Onglet Modules complémentaires", - "body": "L'onglet Modules complémentaires permet d'accéder à des fonctions d'édition avancées à l'aide de composants tiers disponibles. Ici vous pouvez également utiliser des macros pour simplifier les opérations de routine. Le bouton Macros permet d'ouvrir la fenêtre où vous pouvez créer vos propres macros et les exécuter. Pour en savoir plus sur les macros vous pouvez vous référer à la documentation de notre API. Actuellement, les modules suivants sont disponibles : ClipArt permet d'ajouter des images de la collection clipart dans votre document, ROC permet de reconnaître le texte inclus dans une image et l'insérer dans le texte du document, Éditeur photo permet d'éditer des images: recadrer, redimensionner, appliquer des effets, etc. Synthèse vocale permet de convertir le texte sélectionné en paroles, Table de symboles permet d'insérer des symboles spéciaux dans votre texte, Traducteur permet de traduire le texte sélectionné dans d'autres langues, YouTube permet d'intégrer des vidéos YouTube dans votre document. Les modules Wordpress et EasyBib peuvent être utilisés si vous connectez les services correspondants dans les paramètres de votre portail. Vous pouvez utiliser les instructions suivantes pour la version serveur ou pour la version SaaS. Pour en savoir plus sur les modules complémentaires, veuillez vous référer à la documentation de notre API. Tous les exemples de modules open source actuellement disponibles sont disponibles sur GitHub." + "body": "L'onglet Modules complémentaires permet d'accéder à des fonctions d'édition avancées à l'aide de composants tiers disponibles. Ici vous pouvez également utiliser des macros pour simplifier les opérations de routine. Fenêtre de l'éditeur en ligne Document Editor : Fenêtre de l'éditeur de bureau Document Editor : Le bouton Paramètres permet d'ouvrir la fenêtre où vous pouvez visualiser et gérer tous les modules complémentaires installés et ajouter vos propres modules. Le bouton Macros permet d'ouvrir la fenêtre où vous pouvez créer vos propres macros et les exécuter. Pour en savoir plus sur les macros, veuillez vous référer à la documentation de notre API. Actuellement, les modules suivants sont disponibles : ClipArt permet d'ajouter des images de la collection clipart dans votre document, Code en surbrillance permet de surligner la syntaxe du code en sélectionnant la langue, le style, la couleur de fond appropriés, ROC permet de reconnaître le texte inclus dans une image et l'insérer dans le texte du document, Éditeur photo permet d'éditer des images : recadrer, redimensionner, appliquer des effets, etc. Synthèse vocale permet de convertir le texte sélectionné en paroles, Table de symboles permet d'insérer des symboles spéciaux dans votre texte, Dictionnaire des synonymes permet de rechercher les synonymes et les antonymes d'un mot et de le remplacer par le mot sélectionné, Traducteur permet de traduire le texte sélectionné dans d'autres langues, YouTube permet d'intégrer des vidéos YouTube dans votre document. Les modules Wordpress et EasyBib peuvent être utilisés si vous connectez les services correspondants dans les paramètres de votre portail. Vous pouvez utiliser les instructions suivantes pour la version serveur ou pour la version SaaS. Pour en savoir plus sur les modules complémentaires, veuillez vous référer à la documentation de notre API. Tous les exemples de modules open source actuellement disponibles sont disponibles sur GitHub." }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm", "title": "Présentation de l'interface de Document Editor", - "body": "Document Editor utilise une interface à onglets où les commandes d'édition sont regroupées en onglets par fonctionnalité. L'interface de l'éditeur est composée des éléments principaux suivants : L'En-tête de l'éditeur affiche le logo, les onglets de menu, le nom du document ainsi que trois icônes sur la droite qui permettent de définir les droits d'accès, de revenir à la liste des documents, de modifier les Paramètres d'affichage et d’accéder aux Paramètres avancés de l'éditeur. La Barre d'outils supérieure affiche un ensemble de commandes d'édition en fonction de l'onglet de menu sélectionné. Actuellement, les onglets suivants sont disponibles : Fichier, Accueil, Insertion, Disposition, Références, Collaboration, Modules complémentaires.Les options Imprimer, Enregistrer, Copier, Coller, Annuler et Rétablir sont toujours disponibles dans la partie gauche de la Barre d'outils supérieure, quel que soit l'onglet sélectionné. La Barre d'état au bas de la fenêtre de l'éditeur contient l'indicateur du numéro de page, affiche certaines notifications (telles que \"Toutes les modifications sauvegardées\", etc.), permet de définir la langue du texte, activer la vérification orthographique, activer le mode suivi des modifications, régler le zoom. La Barre latérale gauche contient des icônes qui permettent d'utiliser l'outil de Recherche, d'ouvrir les panneaux Commentaires, Discussion et Navigation, de contacter notre équipe de support et d'afficher les informations sur le programme. La barre latérale droite permet d'ajuster les paramètres supplémentaires de différents objets. Lorsque vous sélectionnez un objet particulier dans le texte, l'icône correspondante est activée dans la barre latérale droite. Cliquez sur cette icône pour développer la barre latérale droite. Les Règles horizontales et verticales permettent d'aligner le texte et d'autres éléments dans un document, définir des marges, des taquets et des retraits de paragraphe. La Zone de travail permet d'afficher le contenu du document, d'entrer et de modifier les données. La Barre de défilement sur la droite permet de faire défiler vers le haut et vers le bas des documents multi-page. Pour plus de commodité, vous pouvez masquer certains composants et les afficher à nouveau lorsque cela est nécessaire. Pour en savoir plus sur l'ajustement des paramètres d'affichage, reportez-vous à cette page." + "body": "Document Editor utilise une interface à onglets où les commandes d'édition sont regroupées en onglets par fonctionnalité. Fenêtre de l'éditeur en ligne Document Editor : Fenêtre de l'éditeur de bureau Document Editor : L'interface de l'éditeur est composée des éléments principaux suivants : L’en-tête de l'éditeur affiche le logo, les onglets des documents ouverts, le nom du document et les onglets du menu.Dans la partie gauche de l'en-tête de l'éditeur se trouvent les boutons Enregistrer, Imprimer le fichier, Annuler et Rétablir. Dans la partie droite de l'en-tête de l'éditeur, le nom de l'utilisateur est affiché ainsi que les icônes suivantes : Ouvrir l'emplacement du fichier - dans la version de bureau, elle permet d'ouvrir le dossier où le fichier est stocké dans la fenêtre de l'Explorateur de fichiers. Dans la version en ligne, elle permet d'ouvrir le dossier du module Documents où le fichier est stocké dans un nouvel onglet du navigateur. - permet d’ajuster les Paramètres d'affichage et d’accéder aux Paramètres avancés de l'éditeur. Gérer les droits d'accès au document - (disponible uniquement dans la version en ligne) permet de définir les droits d'accès aux documents stockés dans le cloud. La Barre d'outils supérieure affiche un ensemble de commandes d'édition en fonction de l'onglet de menu sélectionné. Actuellement, les onglets suivants sont disponibles : Fichier, Accueil, Insertion, Disposition, Références, Collaboration, Protection, Modules complémentaires.Les options Copier, et Coller sont toujours disponibles dans la partie gauche de la Barre d'outils supérieure, quel que soit l'onglet sélectionné. La Barre d'état au bas de la fenêtre de l'éditeur contient l'indicateur du numéro de page, affiche certaines notifications (telles que \"Toutes les modifications sauvegardées\", etc.), permet de définir la langue du texte, activer la vérification orthographique, activer le mode suivi des modifications, régler le zoom. La barre latérale gauche contient les icônes suivantes : - permet d'utiliser l'outil Rechercher et remplacer, - permet d'ouvrir le panneau Commentaires, - permet d'accéder au panneau de Navigation et de gérer les rubriques, - (disponible dans la version en ligne seulement) permet d'ouvrir le panneau de Chat, ainsi que les icônes qui permettent de contacter notre équipe de support et de visualiser les informations sur le programme. La barre latérale droite permet d'ajuster les paramètres supplémentaires de différents objets. Lorsque vous sélectionnez un objet particulier dans le texte, l'icône correspondante est activée dans la barre latérale droite. Cliquez sur cette icône pour développer la barre latérale droite. Les Règles horizontales et verticales permettent d'aligner le texte et d'autres éléments dans un document, définir des marges, des taquets et des retraits de paragraphe. La Zone de travail permet d'afficher le contenu du document, d'entrer et de modifier les données. La Barre de défilement sur la droite permet de faire défiler vers le haut et vers le bas des documents multi-page. Pour plus de commodité, vous pouvez masquer certains composants et les afficher à nouveau lorsque cela est nécessaire. Pour en savoir plus sur l'ajustement des paramètres d'affichage, reportez-vous à cette page." }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/ReferencesTab.htm", "title": "Onglet Références", - "body": "L'onglet Références permet de gérer différents types de références: ajouter et rafraîchir une table des matières, créer et éditer des notes de bas de page, insérer des hyperliens. En utilisant cet onglet, vous pouvez : créer et mettre à jour automatiquement une table des matières, Insérer ses notes de bas de page, Insérer des liens hypertexte." + "body": "L'onglet Références permet de gérer différents types de références: ajouter et rafraîchir une table des matières, créer et éditer des notes de bas de page, insérer des hyperliens. Fenêtre de l'éditeur en ligne Document Editor : Fenêtre de l'éditeur de bureau Document Editor : En utilisant cet onglet, vous pouvez : créer et mettre à jour automatiquement une table des matières, Insérer ses notes de bas de page, insérer des liens hypertexte, Ajouter des marque-pages." }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/ReviewTab.htm", "title": "Onglet Collaboration", - "body": "L'onglet Collaboration permet d'organiser le travail collaboratif sur le document: partage du fichier, sélection d'un mode de co-édition, gestion des commentaires, suivi des modifications effectuées par un réviseur, affichage de toutes les versions et révisions. En utilisant cet onglet, vous pouvez : spécifier les paramètres de partage, basculer entre les modes de coédition Strict et Rapide, ajouter des commentaires au document, activer la fonctionnalité Suivi des modifications, choisir le mode d'affichage des modifications, gérer les changements suggérés. Ouvrir le panneau Chat, suivre l'historique des versions." + "body": "L'onglet Collaboration permet d'organiser le travail collaboratif sur le document. Dans la version en ligne, vous pouvez partager le fichier, sélectionner un mode de co-édition, gérer les commentaires, suivre les modifications apportées par un réviseur, visualiser toutes les versions et révisions. Dans la version de bureau, vous pouvez gérer les commentaires et utiliser la fonction Suivi des modifications . Fenêtre de l'éditeur en ligne Document Editor : Fenêtre de l'éditeur de bureau Document Editor : En utilisant cet onglet, vous pouvez : spécifier les paramètres de partage (disponible uniquement dans la version en ligne), basculer entre les modes d’édition collaborative Strict et Rapide (disponible uniquement dans la version en ligne), ajouter des commentaires au document, activer la fonctionnalité Suivi des modifications, choisir le mode d'affichage des modifications, gérer les changements suggérés. ouvrir la fenêtre de Chat (disponible uniquement dans la version en ligne), suivre l’historique des versions (disponible uniquement dans la version en ligne)." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/AddBorders.htm", "title": "Ajouter des bordures", "body": "Pour ajouter des bordures à un paragraphe, à une page ou à tout le document, placez le curseur dans le paragraphe voulu, ou sélectionnez plusieurs paragraphes avec la souris ou tout le texte en utilisant la combinaison de touches Ctrl+A, cliquez sur le bouton droit de la souris et sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés du paragraphe du menu contextuel ou utilisez le lien Afficher les paramètres avancés sur la barre latérale droite, passez à l'onglet Bordures et remplissage dans la fenêtre Paragraphe - Paramètres avancés ouverte, définissez la valeur nécessaire pour la Taille de bordure et sélectionnez une Couleur de la bordure, cliquez sur le diagramme disponible ou utilisez les boutons pour sélectionner les bordures et appliquer le style choisi, cliquez sur le bouton OK . Après avoir ajouté des bordures, vous pouvez également définir les Marges intérieures c'est-à-dire la distance entre les bordures à droite, à gauche, en haut et en bas et le texte du paragraphe à l'intérieur. Pour définir les valeurs nécessaires, passez à l'onglet Marges intérieures de la fenêtre Paragraphe - Paramètres avancés :" }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/AddCaption.htm", + "title": "Ajouter une légende", + "body": "La légende est une étiquette agrafée que vous pouvez appliquer à un objet, comme des tableaux d’équations, des figures et des images dans vos documents. Cela facilite la référence dans votre texte car il y a une étiquette facilement reconnaissable sur votre objet. Pour ajouter une légende à un objet: Sélectionnez l’objet à appliquer une légende; Passez à l’onglet Références de la barre d’outils supérieure; Cliquez sur l’icône Légende sur la barre d’outils supérieure ou cliquez avec le bouton droit sur l’objet et sélectionnez l’option Insérer une légende pour ouvrir la fenêtre de dialogue Insérer une légende Choisissez l’étiquette à utiliser pour votre légende en choisissant l’objet de la liste déroulante d’étiquette, ou Créez une nouvelle étiquette en cliquant sur le bouton Ajouter. Saisissez un nom pour l’étiquette dans le champs. Cliquez ensuite sur le bouton OK pour ajouter une nouvelle; Cochez la case Inclure le numéro de chapitre pour modifier la numérotation de votre légende; Du menu déroulant Insérer, choisissez Avant pour placer l’étiquette au-dessus de l’objet ou Après pour placer sous l’objet; Cochez la case Exclure le de la légende pour n’avoir qu’un numéro pour cette légende particulière conformément à un numéro de séquence. Vous pouvez ensuite choisir le numéro de votre légende en attribuant un style spécifique à la légende et en ajoutant un séparateur; Pour appliquer la légende, cliquez sur le bouton OK. Supprimer une étiquette Pour supprimer une étiquette que vous avez créée, choisissez l’étiquette dans la liste des étiquettes dans la fenêtre de légende, puis cliquez sur le bouton Supprimer. L’étiquette que vous avez créée sera immédiatement supprimée. Remarque:vous pouvez supprimer les étiquettes que vous avez créées mais vous ne pouvez pas supprimer les étiquettes par défaut. Mettre en forme des légendes Dès que vous ajoutez une légende, un nouveau style de légende est automatiquement ajouté à la section. Afin de changer le style de toutes les légendes dans le document, suivez ces étapes: Sélectionnez le texte à partir duquel le nouveau style de Légende sera copié; Recherchez le style de Légende (surligné en bleu par défaut) dans la galerie de styles que vous pouvez trouver sur l’onglet Accueil de la barre d’outils supérieure; Cliquez droit et choisissez l’option Mettre à jour à partir de la sélection. Regrouper des sous-titres Si vous souhaitez pouvoir déplacer l’objet et la légende ensemble, il est nécessaire de regrouper l’objet et la légende. Sélectionnez l’objet; Sélectionnez l’un des styles d’habillage à l’aide de la barre latérale droite; Ajoutez la légende comme mentionnée ci-dessus; Maintenez la touche Maj enfoncée et sélectionnez les éléments que vous souhaitez regrouper; Faites un clic droit sur l’un des éléments, choisissez Réorganiser > Grouper. Maintenant, les deux éléments se déplaceront simultanément si vous les faites glisser quelque part ailleurs dans le texte. Pour dissocier l’objet, cliquez respectivement sur Réorganiser > Dissocier." + }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/AddFormulasInTables.htm", + "title": "Utiliser des formules dans les tableaux", + "body": "Insérer une formule Vous pouvez effectuer des calculs simples sur les données des cellules de table en ajoutant des formules. Pour insérer une formule dans une cellule du tableau, placez le curseur dans la cellule où vous voulez afficher le résultat, cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter une formule dans la barre latérale de droite, dans la fenêtre Paramètres de formule qui s'ouvre, saisissez la formule nécessaire dans la zone Formule.Vous pouvez saisir une formule manuellement à l'aide des opérateurs mathématiques courants (+, -, *, /), par exemple =A1*B2 ou utiliser la liste déroulante Coller une fonction pour sélectionner une des fonctions intégrées, par exemple =PRODUIT(A1,B2). spécifier manuellement les arguments nécessaires entre parenthèses dans le champ Formule. Si la fonction nécessite plusieurs arguments, ils doivent être séparés par des virgules. utilisez la liste déroulante Format de nombre si vous voulez afficher le résultat dans un certain format numérique, cliquez sur OK. Le résultat sera affiché dans la cellule sélectionnée. Pour modifier la formule ajoutée, sélectionnez le résultat dans la cellule et cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter une formule dans la barre latérale droite, effectuez les modifications nécessaires dans la fenêtre Paramètres de formule et cliquez sur OK. Ajouter des références aux cellules Vous pouvez utiliser les arguments suivants pour ajouter rapidement des références à des plages de cellules : HAUT - une référence à toutes les cellules de la colonne au-dessus de la cellule sélectionnée GAUCHE - une référence à toutes les cellules de la ligne située à gauche de la cellule sélectionnée BAS - une référence à toutes les cellules de la colonne sous la cellule sélectionnée DROITE - une référence à toutes les cellules de la ligne à droite de la cellule sélectionnée Ces arguments peuvent être utilisés avec les fonctions MOYENNE, NB, MAX, MIN, PRODUIT, SOMME. Vous pouvez également saisir manuellement des références à une cellule donnée (par exemple, A1) ou à une plage de cellules (par exemple, A1:B3). Utiliser des marque-pages Si vous avez ajouté des marque-pages à certaines cellules de votre tableau, vous pouvez utiliser ces marque-pages comme arguments lorsque vous saisissez des formules. Dans la fenêtre Paramètres de formule, placez le curseur entre parenthèses dans la zone de saisie du champ Formule où vous voulez que l'argument soit ajouté et utilisez la liste déroulante Insérer le marque-pages pour sélectionner un des marque-pages préalablement ajoutés. Mise à jour des résultats de la formule Si vous modifiez certaines valeurs dans les cellules du tableau, vous devez mettre à jour manuellement les résultats de formule : Pour mettre à jour un résultat de formule unique, sélectionnez le résultat nécessaire et appuyez sur F9 ou cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le résultat et utilisez l'option Mettre à jour un champ dans le menu. Pour mettre à jour plusieurs résultats de formule, sélectionnez les cellules nécessaires ou la table entière et appuyez sur F9. Fonctions intégrées Vous pouvez utiliser les fonctions mathématiques, statistiques et logiques standard suivantes : Catégorie Fonctions Description Exemple Mathématique ABS(nombre) La fonction est utilisée pour afficher la valeur absolue d'un nombre. =ABS(-10) Renvoie 10 Logique ET(logical1, logical2, ...) La fonction sert à vérifier si la valeur logique saisie est VRAI ou FAUX. La fonction affiche 1 (VRAI) si tous les arguments sont VRAI =ET(1>0,1>3) Renvoie 0 Statistique MOYENNE(argument-list) La fonction est utilisée pour analyser la plage de données et trouver la valeur moyenne.. =MOYENNE(4,10) Renvoie 7 Statistique NB(plage) La fonction est utilisée pour compter le nombre de cellules sélectionnées qui contiennent des nombres en ignorant les cellules vides ou avec du texte. =NB(A1:B3) Renvoie 6 Logique DEFINED() La fonction évalue si une valeur est définie dans la cellule. La fonction renvoie 1 si la valeur est définie et calculée sans erreur et renvoie 0 si la valeur n'est pas définie ou calculée avec erreur. =DEFINED(A1) Logique FAUX() La fonction renvoie 0 (FAUX) et ne nécessite pas d’argument. =FAUX Renvoie 0 Mathématique ENT(nombre) La fonction est utilisée pour analyser et retourner la partie entière du nombre spécifié. =ENT(2,5) Renvoie 2 Statistique MAX(number1, number2, ...) La fonction est utilisée pour analyser la plage de données et trouver le plus grand nombre. =MAX(15,18,6) Renvoie 18 Statistique MIN(number1, number2, ...) La fonction est utilisée pour analyser la plage de données et trouver le plus petit nombre. =MIN(15,18,3) Renvoie 6 Mathématique MOD(x, y) La fonction est utilisée pour retourner le reste après la division d'un nombre par le diviseur spécifié. =MOD(6,3) Renvoie 0 Logique PAS(logical) La fonction sert à vérifier si la valeur logique saisie est VRAI ou FAUX. La fonction retourne 1 (VRAI) si l'argument est FAUX et 0 (FAUX) si l'argument est VRAI. =PAS(2<5) Renvoie 0 Logique OU(logical1, logical2, ...) La fonction sert à vérifier si la valeur logique saisie est VRAI ou FAUX. La fonction renvoie faux 0 (FAUX) si tous les arguments sont FAUX. =OU(1>0,1>3) Renvoie 1 Mathématique PRODUIT(number1, number2, ...) La fonction est utilisée pour multiplier tous les nombres dans la plage de cellules sélectionnée et renvoyer le produit. =PRODUIT(2,5) Renvoie 10 Mathématique ARRONDI(number, num_digits) La fonction est utilisée pour arrondir un nombre à un nombre de décimales spécifié. =ARRONDI(2,25,3) Renvoie 2,3 Mathématique SIGNE(number) La fonction est utilisée pour renvoyer le signe d’un nombre. Si le nombre est positif, la fonction renvoie 1. Si le nombre est négatif, la fonction renvoie -1. Si le nombre est 0, la fonction renvoie 0. =SIGNE(-12) Renvoie -1 Mathématique SOMME(number1, number2, ...) La fonction est utilisée pour additionner tous les nombres contenus dans une plage de cellules et renvoyer le résultat. =SOMME(5,3,3) Renvoie 10 Logique VRAI() La fonction renvoie 1 (VRAI) et n'exige aucun argument. =VRAI Renvoie 1" + }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/AddHyperlinks.htm", "title": "Ajouter des liens hypertextes", "body": "Pour ajouter un lien hypertexte, placez le curseur là où vous voulez insérer un lien hypertexte, passez à l'onglet Insertion ou Références de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur l'icône Ajouter un lien hypertexte de la barre d'outils supérieure, dans la fenêtre ouverte précisez les paramètres du lien hypertexte : Sélectionnez le type de lien que vous voulez insérer :Utilisez l'option Lien externe et entrez une URL au format http://www.example.com dans le champ Lien vers si vous avez besoin d'ajouter un lien hypertexte menant vers un site externe. Utilisez l'option Emplacement dans le document et sélectionnez l'un des titres existants dans le texte du document ou l'un des marque-pages précédemment ajoutés si vous devez ajouter un lien hypertexte menant à un certain emplacement dans le même document. Afficher - entrez un texte qui sera cliquable et amènera à l'adresse Web indiquée dans le champ supérieur. Texte de l'infobulle - entrez un texte qui sera visible dans une petite fenêtre contextuelle offrant une courte note ou étiquette lorsque vous placez le curseur sur un lien hypertexte. Cliquez sur le bouton OK. Pour ajouter un lien hypertexte, vous pouvez également utiliser la combinaison des touches Ctrl+K ou cliquer avec le bouton droit à l’emplacement choisi et sélectionner l'option Lien hypertexte du menu contextuel. Note : il est également possible de sélectionner un caractère, un mot, une combinaison de mots, un passage de texte avec la souris ou en utilisant le clavier, puis d'ouvrir la fenêtre Paramètres de lien hypertexte comme décrit ci-dessus. Dans ce cas, le champ Afficher sera rempli avec le fragment de texte que vous avez sélectionné. Si vous placez le curseur sur le lien hypertexte ajouté, vous verrez l'info-bulle contenant le texte que vous avez spécifié. Pour suivre le lien appuyez sur la touche CTRL et cliquez sur le lien dans votre document. Pour modifier ou supprimer le lien hypertexte ajouté, cliquez-le droit, sélectionnez l'option Lien hypertexte et l'opération à effectuer - Modifier le lien hypertexte ou Supprimer le lien hypertexte." }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/AddWatermark.htm", + "title": "Ajouter un filigrane", + "body": "Le filigrane est un texte ou une image placé sous le calque de texte principal. Les filigranes de texte permettent d’indiquer l’état de votre document (par exemple, confidentiel, brouillon, etc.), les filigranes d’image permettent d’ajouter une image par exemple de logo de votre entreprise. Pour ajouter un filigrane dans un document: Basculez vers l’onglet Disposition de la barre d’outils supérieure. Cliquez sur l’icône Filigrane sur la barre d’outils supérieure et choisissez l’option Filigrane personnalisé du menu. Après cela, la fenêtre Paramètres du filigrane apparaîtra. Sélectionnez le type de filigrane que vous souhaitez insérer: Utilisez l’option de Filigrane de texte et ajustez les paramètres disponibles: Langue - Sélectionnez l’une des langues disponibles de la liste, Texte - Sélectionnez l’un des exemples de texte disponibles de la langue sélectionnée. Pour le français les textes de filigrane suivants sont disponibles : BROUILLON, CONFID, COPIE, DOCUMENT INTERNE, EXEMPLE, HAUTEMENT CONFIDENTIEL, IMPORTANT, NE PAS DIFFUSER, Police - Sélectionnez le nom et la taille de la police des listes déroulantes correspondantes. Utilisez les icônes à droite pour définir la couleur de la police ou appliquez l’un des styles de décoration de police: Gras, Italique, Souligné, Barré, Semi-transparent - Cochez cette case si vous souhaitez appliquer la transparence, Disposition - Sélectionnez l’option Diagonale ou Horizontale. Utilisez l’option Image en filigrane et ajustez les paramètres disponibles: Choisissez la source du fichier image en utilisant l’un des boutons: Depuis un fichier ou D’une URL. L’image sera affichée dans la fenêtre à droite, Échelle - sélectionnez la valeur d’échelle nécessaire parmi celles disponibles: Auto, 200%, 150%, 100%, 50%. Cliquez sur le bouton OK. Pour modifier le filigrane ajouté, ouvrez la fenêtre Paramètres du filigrane comme décrit ci-dessus, modifiez les paramètres nécessaires et cliquez sur OK. Pour supprimer le filigrane ajouté, cliquez sur l’icône de Filigrane dans l’onglet de Disposition de la barre d’outils supérieure et choisissez l’option Supprimer le filigrane du menu. Il est également possible d’utiliser l’option Aucun dans la fenêtre des Paramètres du filigrane." + }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/AlignArrangeObjects.htm", "title": "Aligner et organiser des objets sur une page", - "body": "Les blocs de texte, les formes automatiques, les images et les graphiques ajoutés peuvent être alignés, regroupés, triés, répartis horizontalement et verticalement sur une page. Pour effectuer une de ces actions, sélectionnez d'abord un ou plusieurs objets sur la page. Pour sélectionner plusieurs objets, maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée et cliquez avec le bouton gauche sur les objets nécessaires. Pour sélectionner un bloc de texte, cliquez sur son bord, pas sur le texte à l'intérieur. Après quoi vous pouvez utiliser soit les icônes de l'onglet Disposition de la barre d'outils supérieure décrites ci-après soit les options similaires du menu contextuel. Aligner des objets Pour aligner un ou plusieurs objets sélectionnés, cliquez sur l'icône Aligner dans l'onglet Disposition de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez le type d'arrangement nécessaire dans la liste : Aligner à gauche - pour aligner les objets horizontalement sur le côté gauche de la page, Aligner au centre - pour aligner les objets horizontalement au centre de la page, Aligner à droite - pour aligner les objets horizontalement sur le côté droit de la page, Aligner en haut - pour aligner les objets verticalement sur le côté supérieur de la page, Aligner au milieu - pour aligner les objets verticalement au milieu de la page, Aligner en bas - pour aligner les objets verticalement sur le côté inférieur de la page. Grouper plusieurs objets Pour grouper deux ou plusieurs objets sélectionnés ou les dissocier, cliquez sur la flèche à côté de l'icône Grouper dans l'onglet Disposition de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option nécessaire depuis la liste : Grouper - pour combiner plusieurs objets de sorte que vous puissiez les faire pivoter, déplacer, redimensionner, aligner, organiser, copier, coller, mettre en forme simultanément comme un objet unique. Dissocier - pour dissocier le groupe sélectionné des objets préalablement combinés. Vous pouvez également cliquer avec le bouton droit sur les objets sélectionnés, choisir l'option Ordonner dans le menu contextuel, puis utiliser l'option Grouper ou Dissocier. Ordonner plusieurs objets Pour ordonner les objets sélectionnés (c'est à dire pour modifier leur ordre lorsque plusieurs objets se chevauchent), vous pouvez utiliser les icônes Avancer et Reculer dans l'onglet Disposition de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionner le type d'arrangement nécessaire dans la liste. Pour déplacer un ou plusieurs objets sélectionnés vers l'avant, cliquez sur la flèche en regard de l'icône Avancer dans l'onglet Disposition de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez le type d'arrangement nécessaire dans la liste : Mettre au premier plan - pour déplacer les objets devant tous les autres objets, Avancer d'un plan - pour déplacer les objets d'un niveau en avant par rapport à d'autres objets. Pour déplacer un ou plusieurs objets sélectionnés vers l'arrière, cliquez sur la flèche en regard de l'icône Reculer dans l'onglet Disposition de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez le type d'arrangement nécessaire dans la liste : Mettre en arrière-plan - pour déplacer les objets derrière tous les autres objets, Reculer d'un plan - pour déplacer les objets d'un niveau en arrière par rapport à d'autres objets." + "body": "Les blocs de texte, les formes automatiques, les images et les graphiques ajoutés peuvent être alignés, regroupés, triés, répartis horizontalement et verticalement sur une page. Pour effectuer une de ces actions, sélectionnez d'abord un ou plusieurs objets sur la page. Pour sélectionner plusieurs objets, maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée et cliquez avec le bouton gauche sur les objets nécessaires. Pour sélectionner un bloc de texte, cliquez sur son bord, pas sur le texte à l'intérieur. Après quoi vous pouvez utiliser soit les icônes de l'onglet Mise en page de la barre d'outils supérieure décrites ci-après soit les options similaires du menu contextuel. Aligner des objets Pour aligner deux ou plusieurs objets sélectionnés, cliquez sur l'icône Aligner située dans l'onglet Mise en page de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez une des options disponibles : Aligner sur la page pour aligner les objets par rapport aux bords de la page, Aligner sur la marge pour aligner les objets par rapport aux bords de la marge, Aligner les objets sélectionnés (cette option est sélectionnée par défaut) pour aligner les objets les uns par rapport aux autres, Cliquez à nouveau sur l'icône Aligner et sélectionnez le type d'alignement nécessaire dans la liste : Aligner à gauche - pour aligner les objets horizontalement par le bord gauche de l'objet le plus à gauche / bord gauche de la page / marge gauche de la page, Aligner au centre - pour aligner les objets horizontalement par leur centre/centre de la page/centre de l'espace entre les marges gauche et droite de la page, Aligner à droite - pour aligner les objets horizontalement par le bord droit de l'objet le plus à droite / bord droit de la page / marge droite de la page, Aligner en haut - pour aligner les objets verticalement par le bord supérieur de l'objet le plus haut/bord supérieur de la page / marge supérieure de la page, Aligner au milieu - pour aligner les objets verticalement par leur milieu/milieu de la page/milieu de l'espace entre les marges de la page supérieure et de la page inférieure, Aligner en bas - pour aligner les objets verticalement par le bord inférieur de l'objet le plus bas/bord inférieur de la page/bord inférieur de la page. Vous pouvez également cliquer avec le bouton droit sur les objets sélectionnés, choisir l'option Aligner dans le menu contextuel, puis utiliser une des options d’alignement disponibles. Si vous voulez aligner un objet unique, il peut être aligné par rapport aux bords de la page ou aux marges de la page. L'option Aligner sur la marge est sélectionnée par défaut dans ce cas. Distribuer des objets Pour distribuer horizontalement ou verticalement trois objets sélectionnés ou plus de façon à ce que la même distance apparaisse entre eux, cliquez sur l'icône Aligner située dans l'onglet Mise en page de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez une des options disponibles : Aligner sur la page pour répartir les objets entre les bords de la page, Aligner sur la marge pour répartir les objets entre les marges de la page, Aligner les objets sélectionnés (cette option est sélectionnée par défaut) pour distribuer les objets entre les deux objets les plus externes sélectionnés, Cliquez à nouveau sur l'icône Aligner et sélectionnez le type de distribution nécessaire dans la liste : Distribuer horizontalement - pour répartir uniformément les objets entre les bords gauche et droit des objets sélectionnés/bords gauche et droit de la page/marges gauche et droite de la page. Distribuer verticalement - pour répartir uniformément les objets entre les objets les plus en haut et les objets les plus bas sélectionnés/bords supérieur et inférieur de la page/marges de la page/bord supérieur et inférieur de la page. Vous pouvez également cliquer avec le bouton droit sur les objets sélectionnés, choisir l'option Aligner dans le menu contextuel, puis utiliser une des options de distribution disponibles. Remarque : les options de distribution sont désactivées si vous sélectionnez moins de trois objets. Grouper plusieurs objets Pour grouper deux ou plusieurs objets sélectionnés ou les dissocier, cliquez sur la flèche à côté de l'icône Grouper dans l'onglet Mise en page de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option nécessaire depuis la liste : Grouper - pour combiner plusieurs objets de sorte que vous puissiez les faire pivoter, déplacer, redimensionner, aligner, organiser, copier, coller, mettre en forme simultanément comme un objet unique. Dissocier - pour dissocier le groupe sélectionné d'objets préalablement combinés. Vous pouvez également cliquer avec le bouton droit sur les objets sélectionnés, choisir l'option Ordonner dans le menu contextuel, puis utiliser l'option Grouper ou Dissocier. Remarque : l'option Grouper est désactivée si vous sélectionnez moins de deux objets. L'option Dégrouper n'est disponible que lorsqu'un groupe des objets précédemment joints est sélectionné. Ordonner plusieurs objets Pour ordonner les objets sélectionnés (c'est à dire pour modifier leur ordre lorsque plusieurs objets se chevauchent), vous pouvez utiliser les icônes Avancer et Reculer dans l'onglet Mise en page de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionner le type d'arrangement nécessaire dans la liste. Pour déplacer un ou plusieurs objets sélectionnés vers l'avant, cliquez sur la flèche en regard de l'icône Avancer dans l'onglet Mise en page de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez le type d'arrangement nécessaire dans la liste : Mettre au premier plan - pour déplacer les objets devant tous les autres objets, Avancer d'un plan - pour déplacer les objets d'un niveau en avant par rapport à d'autres objets. Pour déplacer un ou plusieurs objets sélectionnés vers l'arrière, cliquez sur la flèche en regard de l'icône Reculer dans l'onglet Mise en page de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez le type d'arrangement nécessaire dans la liste : Mettre en arrière-plan - pour déplacer les objets derrière tous les autres objets, Reculer d'un plan - pour déplacer les objets d'un niveau en arrière par rapport à d'autres objets. Vous pouvez également cliquer avec le bouton droit sur les objets sélectionnés, choisir l'option Ranger dans le menu contextuel, puis utiliser une des options de rangement disponibles." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/AlignText.htm", @@ -128,7 +143,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/CopyPasteUndoRedo.htm", "title": "Copier/coller les passages de texte, annuler/rétablir vos actions", - "body": "Utiliser les opérations basiques du presse-papier Pour couper, copier, coller des passages de texte et des objets insérés (formes automatiques, images, graphiques) dans le document actuel utilisez les options correspondantes dans le menu contextuel ou les icônes de la barre d'outils supérieure : Couper – sélectionnez un fragment de texte ou un objet et utilisez l'option Couper dans le menu contextuel pour supprimer la sélection et l'envoyer dans le presse-papiers de l'ordinateur. Les données coupées peuvent être insérées plus tard dans un autre endroit dans le même document. Copier – sélectionnez un fragment de texte ou un objet et utilisez l'option Copier dans le menu contextuel, ou l'icône Copier de la barre d'outils supérieure pour copier la sélection dans le presse-papiers de l'ordinateur. Les données coupées peuvent être insérées plus tard dans un autre endroit dans le même document. Coller – trouvez l'endroit dans votre document où vous voulez coller le fragment de texte/l'objet précédemment copié et utilisez l'option Coller dans le menu contextuel, ou l'icône Coller de la barre d'outils supérieure. Le texte / objet sera inséré à la position actuelle du curseur. Le texte peut être copié à partir du même document. Pour copier, coller les données à partir de / dans un autre document ou autre programme, utilisez les combinaisons de touches suivantes : Ctrl+X pour couper ; Ctrl+C pour copier ; Ctrl+V pour coller. Remarque : au lieu de couper et coller du texte dans le même document, vous pouvez sélectionner le passage de texte nécessaire et le faire glisser à la position nécessaire. Utilisez la fonctionnalité Collage spécial Une fois le texte copié collé, le bouton Collage spécial apparaît à côté du passage de texte inséré. Cliquez sur ce bouton pour sélectionner l'option de collage désirée. Lorsque vous collez le texte de paragraphe ou du texte dans des formes automatiques, les options suivantes sont disponibles : Coller - permet de coller le texte copié en conservant sa mise en forme d'origine. Conserver le texte uniquement - permet de coller le texte sans sa mise en forme d'origine. Si vous collez le tableau copié dans un tableau existant, les options suivantes sont disponibles: Remplacer les cellules - permet de remplacer le contenu de la table existante par les données collées. Cette option est sélectionnée par défaut. Imbriquer le tableau - permet de coller le tableau copié en tant que tableau imbriqué dans la cellule sélectionnée du tableau existant. Conserver le texte uniquement - permet de coller le contenu du tableau sous forme de valeurs de texte séparées par le caractère de tabulation. Annuler/rétablir vos actions Pour annuler / rétablir les actions, utilisez les icônes correspondantes de la barre d'outils supérieure ou les raccourcis clavier : Annuler – utilisez l'icône Annuler de la barre d'outils supérieure ou la combinaison de touches Ctrl+Z pour annuler la dernière opération effectuée. Rétablir – utilisez l'icône Rétablir de la barre d'outils supérieure ou la combinaison de touches Ctrl+Y pour rétablir l’opération précédemment annulée." + "body": "Utiliser les opérations de base du presse-papiers Pour couper, copier, coller des passages de texte et des objets insérés (formes automatiques, images, graphiques) dans le document actuel utilisez les options correspondantes dans le menu contextuel ou les icônes de la barre d'outils supérieure : Couper – sélectionnez un fragment de texte ou un objet et utilisez l'option Couper dans le menu contextuel pour supprimer la sélection et l'envoyer dans le presse-papiers de l'ordinateur. Les données coupées peuvent être insérées plus tard dans un autre endroit dans le même document. Copier – sélectionnez un fragment de texte ou un objet et utilisez l'option Copier dans le menu contextuel, ou l'icône Copier de la barre d'outils supérieure pour copier la sélection dans le presse-papiers de l'ordinateur. Les données coupées peuvent être insérées plus tard dans un autre endroit dans le même document. Coller – trouvez l'endroit dans votre document où vous voulez coller le fragment de texte/l'objet précédemment copié et utilisez l'option Coller dans le menu contextuel, ou l'icône Coller de la barre d'outils supérieure. Le texte / objet sera inséré à la position actuelle du curseur. Le texte peut être copié à partir du même document. Dans la version en ligne, les combinaisons de touches suivantes ne sont utilisées que pour copier ou coller des données de/vers un autre document ou un autre programme, dans la version de bureau, les boutons/options de menu et les combinaisons de touches correspondantes peuvent être utilisées pour toute opération copier/coller : Ctrl+X pour couper ; Ctrl+C pour copier ; Ctrl+V pour coller. Remarque : au lieu de couper et coller du texte dans le même document, vous pouvez sélectionner le passage de texte nécessaire et le faire glisser à la position nécessaire. Utiliser la fonctionnalité Collage spécial Une fois le texte copié collé, le bouton Collage spécial apparaît à côté du passage de texte inséré. Cliquez sur ce bouton pour sélectionner l'option de collage requise. Lorsque vous collez le texte de paragraphe ou du texte dans des formes automatiques, les options suivantes sont disponibles : Coller - permet de coller le texte copié en conservant sa mise en forme d'origine. Conserver le texte uniquement - permet de coller le texte sans sa mise en forme d'origine. Si vous collez le tableau copié dans un tableau existant, les options suivantes sont disponibles: Remplacer les cellules - permet de remplacer le contenu de la table existante par les données collées. Cette option est sélectionnée par défaut. Imbriquer le tableau - permet de coller le tableau copié en tant que tableau imbriqué dans la cellule sélectionnée du tableau existant. Conserver le texte uniquement - permet de coller le contenu du tableau sous forme de valeurs de texte séparées par le caractère de tabulation. Annuler/rétablir vos actions Pour effectuer les opérations annuler/rétablir, utilisez les icônes correspondantes dans l'en-tête de l'éditeur ou les raccourcis clavier : Annuler – utilisez l'icône Annuler située dans la partie gauche de l'en-tête de l'éditeur ou la combinaison de touches Ctrl+Z pour annuler la dernière opération effectuée. Rétablir – utilisez l'icône Rétablir située dans la partie gauche de l'en-tête de l'éditeur ou la combinaison de touches Ctrl+Y pour rétablir l’opération précédemment annulée. Remarque : lorsque vous co-éditez un document en mode Rapide, la possibilité de Rétablir la dernière opération annulée n'est pas disponible." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/CreateLists.htm", @@ -143,12 +158,12 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/DecorationStyles.htm", "title": "Appliquer les styles de police", - "body": "Vous pouvez appliquer différents styles de police à l'aide des icônes correspondantes situées dans l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure. Remarque : si vous voulez appliquer la mise en forme au texte déjà saisi, sélectionnez-le avec la souris ou en utilisant le clavier et appliquez la mise en forme. Gras Sert à mettre la police en gras pour lui donner plus de poids. Italique Sert à mettre la police en italique pour lui donner une certaine inclinaison à droite. Souligné Sert à souligner le texte avec la ligne qui passe sous les lettres. Barré Sert à barrer le texte par la ligne passant par les lettres. Exposant Sert à rendre le texte plus petit et le déplacer vers la partie supérieure de la ligne du texte, par exemple comme dans les fractions. Indice Sert à rendre le texte plus petit et le déplacer vers la partie inférieure de la ligne du texte, par exemple comme dans les formules chimiques. Pour accéder aux paramètres avancés de la police, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris et sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés du paragraphe du menu contextuel ou utilisez le lien Afficher les paramètres avancés sur la barre latérale droite. Dans la fenêtre Paragraphe - Paramètres avancés ouverte passez à l'onglet Police. Ici vous pouvez utiliser les styles de décoration de police et les paramètres suivants : Barré sert à barrer le texte par la ligne passant par les lettres. Barré double sert à barrer le texte par la ligne double passant par les lettres. Exposant sert à rendre le texte plus petit et le déplacer vers la partie supérieure de la ligne du texte, par exemple comme dans les fractions. Indice sert à rendre le texte plus petit et le déplacer vers la partie inférieure de la ligne du texte, par exemple comme dans les formules chimiques. Petites majuscules sert à mettre toutes les lettres en petite majuscule. Majuscules sert à mettre toutes les lettres en majuscule. Espacement sert à définir l'espace entre les caractères. Position sert à définir la position des caractères dans la ligne." + "body": "Vous pouvez appliquer différents styles de police à l'aide des icônes correspondantes situées dans l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure. Remarque : si vous voulez appliquer la mise en forme au texte déjà saisi, sélectionnez-le avec la souris ou en utilisant le clavier et appliquez la mise en forme. Gras Sert à mettre la police en gras pour lui donner plus de poids. Italique Sert à mettre la police en italique pour lui donner une certaine inclinaison à droite. Souligné Sert à souligner le texte avec la ligne qui passe sous les lettres. Barré Sert à barrer le texte par la ligne passant par les lettres. Exposant Sert à rendre le texte plus petit et le déplacer vers la partie supérieure de la ligne du texte, par exemple comme dans les fractions. Indice Sert à rendre le texte plus petit et le déplacer vers la partie inférieure de la ligne du texte, par exemple comme dans les formules chimiques. Pour accéder aux paramètres avancés de la police, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris et sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés du paragraphe du menu contextuel ou utilisez le lien Afficher les paramètres avancés sur la barre latérale droite. Dans la fenêtre Paragraphe - Paramètres avancés ouverte passez à l'onglet Police. Ici vous pouvez utiliser les styles de décoration de police et les paramètres suivants : Barré sert à barrer le texte par la ligne passant par les lettres. Barré double sert à barrer le texte par la ligne double passant par les lettres. Exposant sert à rendre le texte plus petit et le déplacer vers la partie supérieure de la ligne du texte, par exemple comme dans les fractions. Indice sert à rendre le texte plus petit et le déplacer vers la partie inférieure de la ligne du texte, par exemple comme dans les formules chimiques. Petites majuscules sert à mettre toutes les lettres en petite majuscule. Majuscules sert à mettre toutes les lettres en majuscule. Espacement sert à définir l'espace entre les caractères. Augmentez la valeur par défaut pour appliquer l'espacement Étendu, ou diminuez la valeur par défaut pour appliquer l'espacement Condensé. Utilisez les touches fléchées ou entrez la valeur voulue dans la case. Position permet de définir la position des caractères (décalage vertical) dans la ligne. Augmentez la valeur par défaut pour déplacer les caractères vers le haut ou diminuez la valeur par défaut pour les déplacer vers le bas. Utilisez les touches fléchées ou entrez la valeur voulue dans la case.Tous les changements seront affichés dans le champ de prévisualisation ci-dessous." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/FontTypeSizeColor.htm", "title": "Définir le type de police, la taille et la couleur", - "body": "Vous pouvez sélectionner le type, la taille et la couleur de police à l'aide des icônes correspondantes situées dans l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure. Remarque : si vous voulez appliquer la mise en forme au texte déjà saisi, sélectionnez-le avec la souris ou en utilisant le clavier et appliquez la mise en forme. Nom de la police Sert à sélectionner l'une des polices disponibles dans la liste. Taille de la police Sert à sélectionner la taille de la police parmi les valeurs disponibles dans la liste déroulante, ou la saisir à la main dans le champ de la taille de police. Incrémenter la taille de la police Sert à modifier la taille de la police en la randant plus grande à un point chaque fois que vous appuyez sur le bouton. Décrémenter la taille de la police Sert à modifier la taille de la police en la randant plus petite à un point chaque fois que vous appuyez sur le bouton. Couleur de surlignage Est utilisé pour marquer des phrases, des fragments, des mots ou même des caractères séparés en ajoutant une bande de couleur qui imite l'effet du surligneur sur le texte. Vous pouvez sélectionner la partie voulue du texte, puis cliquer sur la flèche vers le bas à côté de l'icône pour sélectionner une couleur dans la palette (ce jeu de couleurs ne dépend pas du Jeu de couleurs sélectionné et comprend 16 couleurs). La couleur sera appliquée à la sélection. Alternativement, vous pouvez d'abord choisir une couleur de surbrillance et ensuite commencer à sélectionner le texte avec la souris - le pointeur de la souris ressemblera à ceci et vous serez en mesure de surligner plusieurs parties différentes de votre texte de manière séquentielle. Arrêter de surligne, cliquez à nouveau sur l'icône. Pour effacer la couleur de surbrillance, choisissez l'option Pas de remplissage. La Couleur de surlignage est différente de la Couleur de fond car cette dernière est appliquée au paragraphe entier et remplit complètement l’espace du paragraphe de la marge de page gauche à la marge de page droite. Couleur de police Sert à changer la couleur des lettres /characters dans le texte. Par défaut, la couleur de police automatique est définie dans un nouveau document vide. Elle s'affiche comme la police noire sur l'arrière-plan blanc. Si vous choisissez le noir comme la couleur d'arrière-plan, la couleur de la police se change automatiquement à la couleur blanche pour que le texte soit visible. Pour choisir une autre couleur, cliquez sur la flèche vers le bas située à côté de l'icône et sélectionnez une couleur disponible dans les palettes (les couleurs de la palette Couleurs de thème dépend du jeu de couleurs sélectionné). Après avoir modifié la couleur de police par défaut, vous pouvez utiliser l'option Automatique dans la fenêtre des palettes de couleurs pour restaurer rapidement la couleur automatique pour le fragment du texte sélectionné. Remarque: pour en savoir plus sur l'utilisation des palettes de couleurs, consultez cette page." + "body": "Vous pouvez sélectionner le type, la taille et la couleur de police à l'aide des icônes correspondantes situées dans l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure. Remarque : si vous voulez appliquer la mise en forme au texte déjà saisi, sélectionnez-le avec la souris ou en utilisant le clavier et appliquez la mise en forme. Nom de la police Sert à sélectionner l'une des polices disponibles dans la liste. Si une police requise n'est pas disponible dans la liste, vous pouvez la télécharger et l'installer sur votre système d'exploitation, après quoi la police sera disponible pour utilisation dans la version de bureau. Taille de la police Sert à sélectionner la taille de la police parmi les valeurs disponibles dans la liste déroulante (les valeurs par défaut sont : 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 36, 48, 72 et 96). Il est également possible d'entrer manuellement une valeur personnalisée dans le champ de taille de police, puis d'appuyer sur Entrée. Incrémenter la taille de la police Sert à modifier la taille de la police en la randant plus grande à un point chaque fois que vous appuyez sur le bouton. Décrementer la taille de la police Sert à modifier la taille de la police en la randant plus petite à un point chaque fois que vous appuyez sur le bouton. Couleur de surlignage Est utilisé pour marquer des phrases, des fragments, des mots ou même des caractères séparés en ajoutant une bande de couleur qui imite l'effet du surligneur sur le texte. Vous pouvez sélectionner la partie voulue du texte, puis cliquer sur la flèche vers le bas à côté de l'icône pour sélectionner une couleur dans la palette (ce jeu de couleurs ne dépend pas du Jeu de couleurs sélectionné et comprend 16 couleurs). La couleur sera appliquée à la sélection. Alternativement, vous pouvez d'abord choisir une couleur de surbrillance et ensuite commencer à sélectionner le texte avec la souris - le pointeur de la souris ressemblera à ceci et vous serez en mesure de surligner plusieurs parties différentes de votre texte de manière séquentielle. Arrêter de surligne, cliquez à nouveau sur l'icône. Pour effacer la couleur de surbrillance, choisissez l'option Pas de remplissage. La Couleur de surlignage est différente de la Couleur de fond car cette dernière est appliquée au paragraphe entier et remplit complètement l’espace du paragraphe de la marge de page gauche à la marge de page droite. Couleur de police Sert à changer la couleur des lettres /characters dans le texte. Par défaut, la couleur de police automatique est définie dans un nouveau document vide. Elle s'affiche comme la police noire sur l'arrière-plan blanc. Si vous choisissez le noir comme la couleur d'arrière-plan, la couleur de la police se change automatiquement à la couleur blanche pour que le texte soit visible. Pour choisir une autre couleur, cliquez sur la flèche vers le bas située à côté de l'icône et sélectionnez une couleur disponible dans les palettes (les couleurs de la palette Couleurs de thème dépend du jeu de couleurs sélectionné). Après avoir modifié la couleur de police par défaut, vous pouvez utiliser l'option Automatique dans la fenêtre des palettes de couleurs pour restaurer rapidement la couleur automatique pour le fragment du texte sélectionné. Remarque: pour en savoir plus sur l'utilisation des palettes de couleurs, consultez cette page." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/FormattingPresets.htm", @@ -157,23 +172,23 @@ var indexes = }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm", - "title": "Insérer des formes automatiques", - "body": "Insérer une forme automatique Pour insérer une forme automatique à votre document, passez à l'onglet Insérer de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur l'icône Forme de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'un des groupes des formes automatiques disponibles : Formes de base, Flèches figurées, Maths, Graphiques, Étoiles et rubans, Légendes, Boutons, Rectangles, Lignes, cliquez sur la forme automatique nécessaire du groupe sélectionné, placez le curseur de la souris là où vous voulez insérer la forme, après avoir ajouté la forme automatique vous pouvez modifier sa taille, sa position et ses propriétés.Remarque: pour ajouter une légende à la forme, assurez-vous que la forme est sélectionnée et commencez à taper le texte. Le texte que vous ajoutez fait partie de la forme (ainsi si vous déplacez ou faites pivoter la forme, le texte change de position lui aussi). Déplacer et redimensionner des formes automatiques Pour modifier la taille de la forme automatique, faites glisser les petits carreaux situés sur les bords de la forme. Pour garder les proportions de la forme automatique sélectionnée lors du redimensionnement, maintenez la touche Maj enfoncée et faites glisser l'une des icônes de coin. Lors de la modification des formes, par exemple des flèches figurées ou les légendes, l'icône jaune en forme de diamant est aussi disponible. Elle permet d'ajuster certains aspects de la forme, par exemple, la longueur de la pointe d'une flèche. Pour modifier la position de la forme automatique, utilisez l'icône qui apparaît si vous placez le curseur de votre souris sur la forme. Faites glisser la forme à la position nécessaire sans relâcher le bouton de la souris. Lorsque vous déplacez la forme automatique, des lignes de guidage s'affichent pour vous aider à positionner l'objet sur la page avec précision (si un style d'habillage autre que aligné est sélectionné). Pour déplacer la forme automatique de trois incréments, maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée et utilisez les flèches du clavier. Pour déplacer la forme automatique strictement horizontallement / verticallement et l'empêcher de se déplacer dans une direction perpendiculaire, maintenez la touche Maj enfoncée lors du déplacement. Pour faire pivoter la forme automatique, placez le curseur de la souris sur la poignée de rotation ronde et faites-la glisser vers la droite ou la gauche. Pour limiter la rotation de l'angle à des incréments de 15 degrés, maintenez la touche Maj enfoncée. Régler les paramètres de la forme automatique Pour aligner et organiser les formes automatiques, utilisez le menu contextuel. Les options du menu sont les suivantes : Couper, Copier, Coller - les options nécessaires pour couper ou coller le texte / l'objet sélectionné et coller un passage de texte précedement coupé / copié ou un objet à la position actuelle du curseur. Organiser sert à placer la forme automatique choisie au premier plan, envoyer à fond, avancer ou reculer ainsi que grouper ou dégrouper les formes pour effectuer des opérations avec plusieurs formes à la fois. Pour en savoir plus sur l'organisation des objets, vous pouvez vous référer à cette page. Aligner sert à aligner la forme à gauche, au centre, à droite, en haut, au milieu, en bas. Pour en savoir plus sur l'alignement des objets, vous pouvez vous référer à cette page. Style d'habillage sert à sélectionner un des styles d'habillage - aligné sur le texte, carré, rapproché, au travers, haut et bas, devant le texte, derrière le texte - ou modifier le contour de l'habillage. L'option Modifier les limites du renvoi à la ligne n'est disponible qu'au cas où vous sélectionnez le style d'habillage autre que 'aligné sur le texte'. Faites glisser les points d'habillage pour personnaliser les limites. Pour créer un nouveau point d'habillage, cliquez sur la ligne rouge et faites-la glisser vers la position désirée. Paramètres avancés sert à ouvrir la fenêtre 'Forme - Paramètres avancés'. Certains paramètres de la forme automatique peuvent être modifiés en utilisant l'onglet Paramètres de la forme de la barre latérale droite. Pour l'activer, sélectionnez la forme ajoutée avec la souris et sélectionnez l'icône Paramètres de la forme à droite. Vous pouvez y modifier les paramètres suivants : Remplissage - utilisez cette section pour sélectionner le remplissage de la forme automatique. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes : Couleur - sélectionnez cette option pour spécifier la couleur unie à remplir l'espace intérieur de la forme automatique sélectionnée. Cliquez sur la case de couleur et sélectionnez la couleur voulue à partir de l'ensemble de couleurs disponibles ou spécifiez n'importe quelle couleur de votre choix : Dégradé - sélectionnez cette option pour specifier deux couleurs pour créer une transition douce entre elles et remplir la forme. Style - choisissez une des options disponibles : Linéaire (la transition se fait selon un axe horizontal/vertical ou en diagonale, sous l'angle de 45 degrés) ou Radial (la transition se fait autour d'un point, les couleurs se fondent progressivement du centre aux bords en formant un cercle). Direction - choisissez un modèle du menu. Si vous avez sélectionné le style Linéaire, vous pouvez choisir une des directions suivantes : du haut à gauche vers le bas à droite, du haut en bas, du haut à droite vers le bas à gauche, de droite à gauche, du bas à droite vers le haut à gauche, du bas en haut, du bas à gauche vers le haut à droite, de gauche à droite. Si vous avez choisi le style Radial, il n'est disponible qu'un seul modèle. Dégradé - cliquez sur le curseur de dégradé gauche au-dessous de la barre de dégradé pour activer la palette de couleurs qui correspond à la première couleur. Cliquez sur la palette de couleurs à droite pour sélectionner la première couleur. Faites glisser le curseur pour définir le point de dégradé c'est-à-dire le point quand une couleur se fond dans une autre. Utilisez le curseur droit au-dessous de la barre de dégradé pour spécifier la deuxième couleur et définir le point de dégradé. Image ou texture - sélectionnez cette option pour utiliser une image ou une texture prédéfinie en tant que arrière-plan de la forme. Si vous souhaitez utiliser une image en tant que arrière-plan de la forme, vous pouvez ajouter l'image D'un fichier en la sélectionnant sur le disque dur de votre ordinateur ou D'une URL en insérant l'adresse URL appropriée dans la fenêtre ouverte. Si vous souhaitez utiliser une texture en tant que arrière-plan de la forme, utilisez le menu déroulant D'une texture et sélectionnez le préréglage de la texture voulue.Actuellement, les textures suivantes sont disponibles : Toile, Carton, Tissu foncé, Grain, Granit, Papier gris, Tricot, Cuir, Papier brun, Papyrus, Bois. Si l'Image sélectionnée est plus grande ou plus petite que la forme automatique, vous pouvez choisir parmi les options : Étirement ou Mosaïque depuis la liste déroulante.L'option Étirement permet de régler la taille de l'image pour l'adapter à la taille de la forme automatique afin qu'elle puisse remplir tout l'espace uniformément. L'option Mosaïque permet d'afficher seulement une partie de l'image plus grande en gardant ses dimensions d'origine, ou de répéter l'image plus petite en conservant ses dimensions initiales sur la surface de la forme automatique afin qu'elle puisse remplir tout l'espace uniformément. Remarque : tout préréglage Texture sélectionné remplit l'espace de façon uniforme, mais vous pouvez toujours appliquer l'effet Étirement si nécessaire. Modèle - sélectionnez cette option pour sélectionner le modèle à deux couleurs composé des éléments répétés. Modèle - sélectionnez un des modèles prédéfinis du menu. Couleur de premier plan - cliquez sur cette palette de couleurs pour changer la couleur des éléments du modèle. Couleur d'arrière-plan - cliquez sur cette palette de couleurs pour changer de l'arrière-plan du modèle. Pas de remplissage - sélectionnez cette option si vous ne voulez pas utiliser de remplissage. Opacité - utilisez cette section pour régler le niveau d'Opacité des formes automatiques en faisant glisser le curseur ou en saisissant la valeur de pourcentage à la main. La valeur par défaut est 100%. Elle correspond à l'opacité complète. La valeur 0% correspond à la transparence totale. Contour - utilisez cette section pour changer la largeur et la couleur du contour de la forme automatique. Pour modifier la largeur du trait, sélectionnez une des options disponibles depuis la liste déroulante Taille. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes : 0,5 pt, 1 pt, 1,5 pt, 2,25 pt, 3 pt, 4,5 pt, 6 pt ou Pas de ligne si vous ne voulez pas utiliser de contour. Pour changer la couleur du contour, cliquez sur la case colorée et sélectionnez la couleur voulue. Pour modifier le type de contour, sélectionnez l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante correspondante (une ligne continue est appliquée par défaut, vous pouvez la remplacer par l'une des lignes pointillées disponibles). Style d'habillage - utilisez cette section pour sélectionner un des styles d'habillage - aligné sur le texte, carré, rapproché, au travers, haut et bas, devant le texte, derrière le texte (pour en savoir plus, consultez la section des paramètres avancés ci-dessous). Modifier la forme - utilisez cette section pour remplacer la forme automatique insérée par une autre sélectionnée de la liste déroulante. Pour changer les paramètres avancés de la forme automatique, cliquez sur la forme avec le bouton droit et sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés dans le menu ou utilisez le lien Afficher paramètres avancés sur la barre latérale droite. La fenêtre \"Forme - Paramètres avancés\" s'ouvre : L'onglet Taille vous permet de régler les paramètres suivants : Largeur - utilisez l'une de ces options pour modifier la largeur de la forme automatique. Absolue - spécifiez une valeur exacte mesurée en unités absolues, c.-à-d. Centimètres/Points/Pouces (selon l'option spécifiée dans l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés...). Relatif - spécifiez un pourcentage relatif à la largeur de la marge de gauche, la marge (c'est-à-dire la distance entre les marges gauche et droite), la largeur de la page ou la largeur de la marge de droite. Hauteur - utilisez l'une de ces options pour modifier la hauteur de la forme automatique. Absolue - spécifiez une valeur exacte mesurée en unités absolues, c.-à-d. Centimètres/Points/Pouces (selon l'option spécifiée dans l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés...). Relatif - spécifiez un pourcentage relatif à la marge (c'est-à-dire la distance entre les marges supérieure et inférieure), la hauteur de la marge inférieure, la hauteur de la page ou la hauteur de la marge supérieure. Si l'option Verrouiller le ratio d'aspect est cochée, la largeur et la hauteur seront modifiées en conservant le ratio d'aspect original. L'onglet Habillage du texte contient les paramètres suivants : Style d'habillage - utilisez cette option pour changer la façon dont la forme est positionnée par rapport au texte : elle peut faire partie du texte (si vous sélectionnez le style 'aligné sur le texte') ou être contournée par le texte de tous les côtés (si vous sélectionnez l'un des autres styles). Aligné sur le texte - la forme fait partie du texte, comme un caractère, ainsi si le texte est déplacé, la forme est déplacée elle aussi. Dans ce cas-là les options de position ne sont pas accessibles. Si vous sélectionnez un des styles suivants, vous pouvez déplacer l'image indépendamment du texte et définir sa position exacte : Carré - le texte est ajusté autour des bords de la forme. Rapproché - le texte est ajusté sur le contour de la forme. Au travers - le texte est ajusté autour des bords de la forme et occupe l'espace vide à l'intérieur d'elle. Pour créer l'effet, utilisez l'option Modifier les limites du renvoi à la ligne du menu contextuel. Haut et bas - le texte est ajusté en haut et en bas de la forme. Devant le texte - la forme est affichée sur le texte. Derrière le texte - le texte est affiché sur la forme. Si vous avez choisi le style carré, rapproché, au travers, haut et bas, vous avez la possibilité de configurer des paramètres supplémentaires - Distance du texte de tous les côtés (haut, bas, droit, gauche). L'onglet Position n'est disponible qu'au cas où vous choisissez le style d'habillage autre que 'aligné sur le texte'. Il contient les paramètres suivants qui varient selon le type d'habillage sélectionné : La section Horizontal vous permet de sélectionner l'un des trois types de positionnement de forme automatique suivants : Alignement (gauche, centre, droite) par rapport au caractère, à la colonne, à la marge de gauche, à la marge, à la page ou à la marge de droite, Position absolue mesurée en unités absolues, c.-à-d. Centimètres/Points/Pouces (selon l'option spécifiée dans l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés...) à droite du caractère, de la colonne, de la marge de gauche, de la marge, de la page ou de la marge de droite, Position relative mesurée en pourcentage par rapport à la marge gauche, à la marge, à la page ou à la marge de droite. La section Vertical vous permet de sélectionner l'un des trois types de positionnement de forme automatique suivants : Alignement (haut, centre, bas) par rapport à la ligne, à la marge, à la marge inférieure, au paragraphe, à la page ou à la marge supérieure, Position absolue mesurée en unités absolues, c.-à-d. Centimètres/Points/Pouces (selon l'option spécifiée dans l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés...) sous la ligne, la marge, la marge inférieure, le paragraphe, la page la marge supérieure, Position relative mesurée en pourcentage par rapport à la marge, à la marge inférieure, à la page ou à la marge supérieure. Déplacer avec le texte détermine si la forme automatique se déplace en même temps que le texte sur lequel elle est alignée. Chevauchement détermine si deux formes automatiques sont fusionnées en une seule ou se chevauchent si vous les faites glisser les unes près des autres sur la page. L'onglet Paramètres de la forme contient les paramètres suivants : Style de ligne - ce groupe d'options vous permet de spécifier les paramètres suivants : Type d'extrémité - cette option permet de définir le style de l'extrémité de la ligne, par conséquent elle peut être appliquée seulement aux formes avec un contour ouvert telles que des lignes, des polylignes etc.: Plat - les points finaux seront plats. Arrondi - les points finaux seront arrondis. Carré - les points finaux seront carrés. Type de jointure - cette option permet de définir le style de l'intersection de deux lignes : par exemple, une polyligne, les coins du triangle ou le contour du rectangle : Arrondi - le coin sera arrondi. Biseauté - le coin sera coupé d'une manière angulaire. Onglet - l'angle sera aiguisé. Bien adapté pour les formes à angles nets. Remarque : l'effet sera plus visible si vous utilisez un contour plus épais. Flèches - ce groupe d'options est disponible pour les formes du groupe Lignes. Il permet de définir le Style de début et Style de fin aussi bien que la Taille des flèches en sélectionnant l'option appropriée de la liste déroulante. L'onglet Marges vous permet de changer les marges internes En haut, En bas, A gauche et A droite (c'est-à-dire la distance entre le texte à l'intérieur de la forme et les bordures de la forme automatique). Remarque : cet onglet n'est disponible que si du texte est ajouté dans la forme automatique, sinon l'onglet est désactivé. L'onglet Texte de remplacement permet de spécifier un Titre et une Description qui sera lue aux personnes avec des déficiences cognitives ou visuelles pour les aider à mieux comprendre l'information de la forme." + "title": "Insérer les formes automatiques", + "body": "Insérer une forme automatique Pour insérer une forme automatique à votre document, passez à l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur l'icône Forme de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'un des groupes des formes automatiques disponibles : Formes de base, Flèches figurées, Maths, Graphiques, Étoiles et rubans, Légendes, Boutons, Rectangles, Lignes, cliquez sur la forme automatique nécessaire du groupe sélectionné, placez le curseur de la souris là où vous voulez insérer la forme, après avoir ajouté la forme automatique vous pouvez modifier sa taille, sa position et ses propriétés.Remarque: pour ajouter une légende à la forme, assurez-vous que la forme est sélectionnée et commencez à taper le texte. Le texte que vous ajoutez fait partie de la forme (ainsi si vous déplacez ou faites pivoter la forme, le texte change de position lui aussi). Déplacer et redimensionner des formes automatiques Pour modifier la taille de la forme automatique, faites glisser les petits carreaux situés sur les bords de la forme. Pour garder les proportions de la forme automatique sélectionnée lors du redimensionnement, maintenez la touche Maj enfoncée et faites glisser l'une des icônes de coin. Lors de la modification des formes, par exemple des flèches figurées ou les légendes, l'icône jaune en forme de diamant est aussi disponible. Elle permet d'ajuster certains aspects de la forme, par exemple, la longueur de la pointe d'une flèche. Pour modifier la position de la forme automatique, utilisez l'icône qui apparaît si vous placez le curseur de votre souris sur la forme. Faites glisser la forme à la position nécessaire sans relâcher le bouton de la souris. Lorsque vous déplacez la forme automatique, des lignes de guidage s'affichent pour vous aider à positionner l'objet sur la page avec précision (si un style d'habillage autre que aligné est sélectionné). Pour déplacer la forme automatique de trois incréments, maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée et utilisez les flèches du clavier. Pour déplacer la forme automatique strictement horizontallement / verticallement et l'empêcher de se déplacer dans une direction perpendiculaire, maintenez la touche Maj enfoncée lors du déplacement. Pour faire pivoter la forme automatique, placez le curseur de la souris sur la poignée de rotation ronde et faites-la glisser vers la droite ou la gauche. Pour limiter la rotation de l'angle à des incréments de 15 degrés, maintenez la touche Maj enfoncée. Note : la liste des raccourcis clavier qui peuvent être utilisés lorsque vous travaillez avec des objets est disponible ici. Modifier les paramètres de la forme automatique Pour aligner et organiser les formes automatiques, utilisez le menu contextuel. Les options du menu sont les suivantes : Couper, Copier, Coller - les options nécessaires pour couper ou coller le texte / l'objet sélectionné et coller un passage de texte précedement coupé / copié ou un objet à la position actuelle du curseur. Organiser sert à placer la forme automatique choisie au premier plan, envoyer à fond, avancer ou reculer ainsi que grouper ou dégrouper les formes pour effectuer des opérations avec plusieurs formes à la fois. Pour en savoir plus sur l'organisation des objets, vous pouvez vous référer à cette page. Aligner sert à aligner la forme à gauche, au centre, à droite, en haut, au milieu, en bas. Pour en savoir plus sur l'alignement des objets, vous pouvez vous référer à cette page. Style d'habillage sert à sélectionner un des styles d'habillage - aligné sur le texte, carré, rapproché, au travers, haut et bas, devant le texte, derrière le texte - ou modifier le contour de l'habillage. L'option Modifier les limites du renvoi à la ligne n'est disponible qu'au cas où vous sélectionnez le style d'habillage autre que 'aligné sur le texte'. Faites glisser les points d'habillage pour personnaliser les limites. Pour créer un nouveau point d'habillage, cliquez sur la ligne rouge et faites-la glisser vers la position désirée. Rotation permet de faire pivoter la forme de 90 degrés dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre ou dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre, ainsi que de retourner la forme horizontalement ou verticalement. Paramètres avancés sert à ouvrir la fenêtre 'Forme - Paramètres avancés'. Certains paramètres de la forme automatique peuvent être modifiés en utilisant l'onglet Paramètres de la forme de la barre latérale droite. Pour l'activer, sélectionnez la forme ajoutée avec la souris et sélectionnez l'icône Paramètres de la forme à droite. Vous pouvez y modifier les paramètres suivants : Remplissage - utilisez cette section pour sélectionner le remplissage de la forme automatique. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes : Couleur - sélectionnez cette option pour spécifier la couleur unie à remplir l'espace intérieur de la forme automatique sélectionnée. Cliquez sur la case de couleur et sélectionnez la couleur voulue à partir de l'ensemble de couleurs disponibles ou spécifiez n'importe quelle couleur de votre choix : Dégradé - sélectionnez cette option pour specifier deux couleurs pour créer une transition douce entre elles et remplir la forme. Style - choisissez une des options disponibles : Linéaire (la transition se fait selon un axe horizontal/vertical ou en diagonale, sous l'angle de 45 degrés) ou Radial (la transition se fait autour d'un point, les couleurs se fondent progressivement du centre aux bords en formant un cercle). Direction - choisissez un modèle du menu. Si vous avez sélectionné le style Linéaire, vous pouvez choisir une des directions suivantes : du haut à gauche vers le bas à droite, du haut en bas, du haut à droite vers le bas à gauche, de droite à gauche, du bas à droite vers le haut à gauche, du bas en haut, du bas à gauche vers le haut à droite, de gauche à droite. Si vous avez choisi le style Radial, il n'est disponible qu'un seul modèle. Dégradé - cliquez sur le curseur de dégradé gauche au-dessous de la barre de dégradé pour activer la palette de couleurs qui correspond à la première couleur. Cliquez sur la palette de couleurs à droite pour sélectionner la première couleur. Faites glisser le curseur pour définir le point de dégradé c'est-à-dire le point quand une couleur se fond dans une autre. Utilisez le curseur droit au-dessous de la barre de dégradé pour spécifier la deuxième couleur et définir le point de dégradé. Image ou texture - sélectionnez cette option pour utiliser une image ou une texture prédéfinie en tant que arrière-plan de la forme. Si vous souhaitez utiliser une image en tant que l'arrière-plan de la forme, vous pouvez ajouter une image D'un fichier en la sélectionnant sur le disque dur de votre ordinateur ou D'une URL en insérant l'adresse URL appropriée dans la fenêtre ouverte. Si vous souhaitez utiliser une texture en tant que arrière-plan de la forme, utilisez le menu déroulant D'une texture et sélectionnez le préréglage de la texture nécessaire.Actuellement, les textures suivantes sont disponibles : Toile, Carton, Tissu foncé, Grain, Granit, Papier gris, Tricot, Cuir, Papier brun, Papyrus, Bois. Si l'Image sélectionnée est plus grande ou plus petite que la forme automatique, vous pouvez profiter d'une des options : Étirement ou Mosaïque depuis la liste déroulante.L'option Étirement permet de régler la taille de l'image pour l'adapter à la taille de la forme automatique afin qu'elle puisse remplir tout l'espace uniformément. L'option Mosaïque permet d'afficher seulement une partie de l'image plus grande en gardant ses dimensions d'origine, ou de répéter l'image plus petite en conservant ses dimensions initiales sur la surface de la forme automatique afin qu'elle puisse remplir tout l'espace uniformément. Remarque : tout préréglage Texture sélectionné remplit l'espace de façon uniforme, mais vous pouvez toujours appliquer l'effet Étirement, si nécessaire. Modèle - sélectionnez cette option pour sélectionner le modèle à deux couleurs composé des éléments répétés. Modèle - sélectionnez un des modèles prédéfinis du menu. Couleur de premier plan - cliquez sur cette palette de couleurs pour changer la couleur des éléments du modèle. Couleur d'arrière-plan - cliquez sur cette palette de couleurs pour changer de l'arrière-plan du modèle. Pas de remplissage - sélectionnez cette option si vous ne voulez pas utiliser un remplissage. Opacité - utilisez cette section pour régler le niveau d'Opacité des formes automatiques en faisant glisser le curseur ou en saisissant la valeur de pourcentage à la main. La valeur par défaut est 100%. Elle correspond à l'opacité complète. La valeur 0% correspond à la transparence totale. Trait - utilisez cette section pour changer la largeur et la couleur du trait de la forme automatique. Pour modifier la largeur du trait, sélectionnez une des options disponibles depuis la liste déroulante Taille. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes : 0,5 pt, 1 pt, 1,5 pt, 2,25 pt, 3 pt, 4,5 pt, 6 pt ou Pas de ligne si vous ne voulez pas utiliser de trait. Pour changer la couleur du contour, cliquez sur la case colorée et sélectionnez la couleur voulue. Pour modifier le type de contour, sélectionnez l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante correspondante (une ligne continue est appliquée par défaut, vous pouvez la remplacer par l'une des lignes pointillées disponibles). Rotation permet de faire pivoter la forme de 90 degrés dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre ou dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre, ainsi que de retourner la forme horizontalement ou verticalement. Cliquez sur l'un des boutons : pour faire pivoter la forme de 90 degrés dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre pour faire pivoter la forme de 90 degrés dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre pour retourner la forme horizontalement (de gauche à droite) pour retourner la forme verticalement (à l'envers) Style d'habillage - utilisez cette section pour sélectionner un des styles d'habillage - aligné sur le texte, carré, rapproché, au travers, haut et bas, devant le texte, derrière le texte (pour en savoir plus, consultez la section des paramètres avancés ci-dessous). Modifier la forme - utilisez cette section pour remplacer la forme automatique insérée par une autre sélectionnée de la liste déroulante. Pour changer les paramètres avancés de la forme automatique, cliquez sur la forme avec le bouton droit et sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés dans le menu ou utilisez le lien Afficher paramètres avancés sur la barre latérale droite. La fenêtre \"Forme - Paramètres avancés\" s'ouvre : L'onglet Taille comporte les paramètres suivants : Largeur - utilisez l'une de ces options pour modifier la largeur de la forme automatique. Absolue - spécifiez une valeur exacte mesurée en unités absolues, c.-à-d. Centimètres/Points/Pouces (selon l'option spécifiée dans l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés...). Relatif - spécifiez un pourcentage relatif à la largeur de la marge de gauche, la marge (c'est-à-dire la distance entre les marges gauche et droite), la largeur de la page ou la largeur de la marge de droite. Hauteur - utilisez l'une de ces options pour modifier la hauteur de la forme automatique. Absolue - spécifiez une valeur exacte mesurée en unités absolues, c.-à-d. Centimètres/Points/Pouces (selon l'option spécifiée dans l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés...). Relatif - spécifiez un pourcentage relatif à la marge (c'est-à-dire la distance entre les marges supérieure et inférieure), la hauteur de la marge inférieure, la hauteur de la page ou la hauteur de la marge supérieure. Si l'option Verrouiller le ratio d'aspect est cochée, la largeur et la hauteur seront modifiées en conservant le ratio d'aspect original. L'onglet Rotation comporte les paramètres suivants : Angle - utilisez cette option pour faire pivoter la forme d'un angle exactement spécifié. Entrez la valeur souhaitée mesurée en degrés dans le champ ou réglez-la à l'aide des flèches situées à droite. Retourné - cochez la case Horizontalement pour retourner la forme horizontalement (de gauche à droite) ou la case Verticalement pour retourner la forme verticalement (à l'envers). L'onglet Habillage du texte contient les paramètres suivants : Style d'habillage - utilisez cette option pour changer la façon dont la forme est positionnée par rapport au texte : elle peut faire partie du texte (si vous sélectionnez le style 'aligné sur le texte') ou être contournée par le texte de tous les côtés (si vous sélectionnez l'un des autres styles). Aligné sur le texte - la forme fait partie du texte, comme un caractère, ainsi si le texte est déplacé, la forme est déplacée elle aussi. Dans ce cas-là les options de position ne sont pas accessibles. Si vous sélectionnez un des styles suivants, vous pouvez déplacer l'image indépendamment du texte et définir sa position exacte : Carré - le texte est ajusté autour des bords de la forme. Rapproché - le texte est ajusté sur le contour de la forme. Au travers - le texte est ajusté autour des bords de la forme et occupe l'espace vide à l'intérieur d'elle. Pour créer l'effet, utilisez l'option Modifier les limites du renvoi à la ligne du menu contextuel. Haut et bas - le texte est ajusté en haut et en bas de la forme. Devant le texte - la forme est affichée sur le texte. Derrière le texte - le texte est affiché sur la forme. Si vous avez choisi le style carré, rapproché, au travers, haut et bas, vous avez la possibilité de configurer des paramètres supplémentaires - Distance du texte de tous les côtés (haut, bas, droit, gauche). L'onglet Position n'est disponible qu'au cas où vous choisissez le style d'habillage autre que 'aligné sur le texte'. Il contient les paramètres suivants qui varient selon le type d'habillage sélectionné : La section Horizontal vous permet de sélectionner l'un des trois types de positionnement de forme automatique suivants : Alignement (gauche, centre, droite) par rapport au caractère, à la colonne, à la marge de gauche, à la marge, à la page ou à la marge de droite, Position absolue mesurée en unités absolues, c.-à-d. Centimètres/Points/Pouces (selon l'option spécifiée dans l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés...) à droite du caractère, de la colonne, de la marge de gauche, de la marge, de la page ou de la marge de droite, Position relative mesurée en pourcentage par rapport à la marge gauche, à la marge, à la page ou à la marge de droite. La section Vertical vous permet de sélectionner l'un des trois types de positionnement de forme automatique suivants : Alignement (haut, centre, bas) par rapport à la ligne, à la marge, à la marge inférieure, au paragraphe, à la page ou à la marge supérieure, Position absolue mesurée en unités absolues, c.-à-d. Centimètres/Points/Pouces (selon l'option spécifiée dans l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés...) sous la ligne, la marge, la marge inférieure, le paragraphe, la page la marge supérieure, Position relative mesurée en pourcentage par rapport à la marge, à la marge inférieure, à la page ou à la marge supérieure. Déplacer avec le texte détermine si la forme automatique se déplace en même temps que le texte sur lequel elle est alignée. Chevauchement détermine si deux formes automatiques sont fusionnées en une seule ou se chevauchent si vous les faites glisser les unes près des autres sur la page. L'onglet Poids et flèches contient les paramètres suivants : Style de ligne - ce groupe d'options vous permet de spécifier les paramètres suivants : Type de litterine - cette option permet de définir le style de la fin de la ligne, ainsi elle peut être appliquée seulement aux formes avec un contour ouvert telles que des lignes, des polylignes etc.: Plat - les points finaux seront plats. Arrondi - les points finaux seront arrondis. Carré - les points finaux seront carrés. Type de jointure - cette option permet de définir le style de l'intersection de deux lignes, par exemple, une polyligne, les coins du triangle ou le contour du rectangle : Arrondi - le coin sera arrondi. Plaque - le coin sera coupé d'une manière angulaire. Onglet - l'angle sera aiguisé. Bien adapté pour les formes à angles vifs. Remarque : l'effet sera plus visible si vous utilisez un contour plus épais. Flèches - ce groupe d'options est disponible pour les formes du groupe Lignes. Il permet de définir le Style de début et Style de fin aussi bien que la Taille des flèches en sélectionnant l'option appropriée de la liste déroulante. L'onglet Marges vous permet de changer les marges internes En haut, En bas, A gauche et A droite (c'est-à-dire la distance entre le texte à l'intérieur de la forme et les bordures de la forme automatique). Remarque : cet onglet n'est disponible que si tu texte est ajouté dans la forme automatique, sinon l'onglet est désactivé. L'onglet Texte de remplacement permet de spécifier un Titre et une Description qui sera lue aux personnes avec des déficiences cognitives ou visuelles pour les aider à mieux comprendre l'information du tableau." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertBookmarks.htm", "title": "Ajouter des marque-pages", - "body": "Les marque-pages permettent d’aller rapidement à une certaine position dans le document en cours ou d'ajouter un lien vers cette position dans le document. Pour ajouter un marque-pages dans un document : placez le curseur de la souris au début du passage de texte à l'endroit où vous voulez ajouter le marque-pages, passez à l'onglet Références de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur l'icône Marque-pages de la barre d'outils supérieure, dans la fenêtre Marque-pages qui s'ouvre, entrez le Nom du marque-pages et cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter - un marque-pages sera ajouté à la liste des marque-pages affichée ci-dessous,Note : le nom du marque-pages doit commencer par une lettre, mais il peut aussi contenir des chiffres. Le nom du marque-pages ne peut pas contenir d'espaces, mais peut inclure le caractère de soulignement \"_\". Pour accéder à un des marque-pages ajoutés dans le texte du document : cliquez sur l'icône Marque-pages dans l'onglet Références de la barre d'outils supérieure, dans la fenêtre Marque-pages qui s'ouvre, sélectionnez le marque-pages vers lequel vous voulez vous déplacer. Pour trouver facilement le marque-pages voulu dans la liste, vous pouvez trier la liste par Nom ou par Emplacement de marque-pages dans le texte du document, cochez l'option Marque-pages cachés pour afficher les marque-pages cachés dans la liste (c'est-à-dire les marque-pages automatiquement créés par le programme lors de l'ajout de références à une certaine partie du document. Par exemple, si vous créez un lien hypertexte vers un certain titre dans le document, l'éditeur de document crée automatiquement un marque-pages caché vers la cible de ce lien). cliquez sur le bouton Aller à - le curseur sera positionné à l'endroit du document où le marque-pages sélectionné a été ajouté, cliquez sur le bouton Fermer pour fermer la fenêtre. Pour supprimer un marque-pages, sélectionnez-le dans la liste et cliquez sur le bouton Suppr. Pour savoir comment utiliser les marque-pages lors de la création de liens, veuillez consulter la section Ajouter des liens hypertextes." + "body": "Les marque-pages permettent d’aller rapidement à une certaine position dans le document en cours ou d'ajouter un lien vers cette position dans le document. Pour ajouter un marque-pages dans un document : spécifiez l'endroit où vous voulez que le marque-pages soit ajouté : placez le curseur de la souris au début du passage de texte nécessaire, ou sélectionnez le passage de texte nécessaire, passez à l'onglet Références de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur l'icône Marque-pages de la barre d'outils supérieure, dans la fenêtre Marque-pages qui s'ouvre, entrez le Nom du marque-pages et cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter - un marque-pages sera ajouté à la liste des marque-pages affichée ci-dessous,Note : le nom du marque-pages doit commencer par une lettre, mais il peut aussi contenir des chiffres. Le nom du marque-pages ne peut pas contenir d'espaces, mais peut inclure le caractère de soulignement \"_\". Pour accéder à un des marque-pages ajoutés dans le texte du document : cliquez sur l'icône Marque-pages dans l'onglet Références de la barre d'outils supérieure, dans la fenêtre Marque-pages qui s'ouvre, sélectionnez le marque-pages vers lequel vous voulez vous déplacer. Pour trouver facilement le marque-pages voulu dans la liste, vous pouvez trier la liste par Nom ou par Emplacement de marque-pages dans le texte du document, cochez l'option Marque-pages cachés pour afficher les marque-pages cachés dans la liste (c'est-à-dire les marque-pages automatiquement créés par le programme lors de l'ajout de références à une certaine partie du document. Par exemple, si vous créez un lien hypertexte vers un certain titre dans le document, l'éditeur de document crée automatiquement un marque-pages caché vers la cible de ce lien). cliquez sur le bouton Aller à - le curseur sera positionné à l'endroit du document où le marque-pages sélectionné a été ajouté, ou le passage de texte correspondant sera sélectionné, cliquez sur le bouton Fermer pour fermer la fenêtre. Pour supprimer un marque-pages, sélectionnez-le dans la liste et cliquez sur le bouton Suppr. Pour savoir comment utiliser les marque-pages lors de la création de liens, veuillez consulter la section Ajouter des liens hypertextes." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm", "title": "Insérer des graphiques", - "body": "Insérer un graphique Pour insérer un graphique dans votre document, placez le curseur là où vous souhaitez ajouter un graphique, passez à l'onglet Insérer de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur l'icône Insérer un graphique de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez le type de graphique nécessaire parmi ceux qui sont disponibles - colonne, ligne, secteurs, barres, aires, graphique en points , boursier - et sélectionnez son style,Remarque: pour les graphiques en Colonne, Ligne, Camembert, ou Barre, un format 3D est aussi disponible. après une fenêtre Éditeur de graphique s'ouvre où vous pouvez entrer les données nécessaires dans les cellules en utilisant les commandes suivantes : et pour copier et coller les données copiées et pour annuler et rétablir les actions pour insérer une fonction et pour diminuer et augmenter les décimales pour changer le format de nombre, c'est à dire la façon d'afficher les chiffres dans les cellules modifiez les paramètres du graphique en cliquant sur le bouton Modifier graphique situé dans la fenêtre Éditeur de graphique. La fenêtre Paramètres du graphique s'ouvre. L'onglet Type &amp données vous permet de modifier le type de graphique ainsi que les données que vous souhaitez utiliser pour créer ce graphique. Sélectionnez le Type de graphique que vous souhaitez utiliser : Colonne, Ligne, Camembert, Barre, Zone, XY (Nuage) ou Boursier. Vérifiez la Plage de données sélectionnée et modifiez-la, si nécessaire, en cliquant sur le bouton Sélectionner les données et en entrant la plage de données souhaitée dans le format suivant : Sheet1!A1:B4. Choisissez la disposition des données. Vous pouvez sélectionner la Série de données à utiliser sur l'axe X : en lignes ou en colonnes. L'onglet Disposition vous permet de modifier la disposition des éléments de graphique. Spécifiez la position du Titre du graphique sur votre graphique en sélectionnant l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante : Aucun pour ne pas afficher le titre du graphique, Superposition pour superposer et centrer le titre sur la zone de tracé, Pas de superposition pour afficher le titre au-dessus de la zone de tracé. Spécifiez la position de la Légende sur votre graphique en sélectionnant l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante : Aucun pour ne pas afficher de légende, Bas pour afficher la légende et l'aligner au bas de la zone de tracé, Haut pour afficher la légende et l'aligner en haut de la zone de tracé, Droite pour afficher la légende et l'aligner à droite de la zone de tracé, Gauche pour afficher la légende et l'aligner à gauche de la zone de tracé, Superposer à gauche pour superposer et centrer la légende à gauche de la zone de tracé, Superposer à droite pour superposer et centrer la légende à droite de la zone de tracé. Spécifiez les paramètres des Étiquettes de données (c'est-à-dire les étiquettes de texte représentant les valeurs exactes des points de données) : spécifiez la position des Étiquettes de données par rapport aux points de données en sélectionnant l'option nécessaire dans la liste déroulante. Les options disponibles varient en fonction du type de graphique sélectionné. Pour les graphiques en Colonnes/Barres, vous pouvez choisir les options suivantes : Aucune, Centre, Intérieur bas,Intérieur haut, Extérieur haut. Pour les graphiques en Ligne/XY(Nuage)/Boursier, vous pouvez choisir les options suivantes : Aucune, Centre, Gauche, Droite, Haut, Bas. Pour les graphiques Secteur, vous pouvez choisir les options suivantes : Aucune, Centre, Ajusté à la largeur,Intérieur haut, Extérieur haut. Pour les graphiques en Aire ainsi que pour les graphiques 3D en Colonnes, en Lignes et en Barres, vous pouvez choisir les options suivantes : Aucun, Centre. sélectionnez les données que vous souhaitez inclure dans vos étiquettes en cochant les cases correspondantes: Nom de la série, Nom de la catégorie, Valeur, Entrez un caractère (virgule, point-virgule, etc.) que vous souhaitez utiliser pour séparer plusieurs étiquettes dans le champ de saisie Séparateur d'étiquettes de données. Lignes - permet de choisir un style de ligne pour les graphiques en Ligne/XY(Nuage). Vous pouvez choisir parmi les options suivantes : Droite pour utiliser des lignes droites entre les points de données, Courbe pour utiliser des courbes lisses entre les points de données, ou Aucune pour ne pas afficher les lignes. Marqueurs - est utilisé pour spécifier si les marqueurs doivent être affichés (si la case est cochée) ou non (si la case n'est pas cochée) pour les graphiques Ligne/XY(Nuage).Remarque : les options Lignes et Marqueurs sont disponibles uniquement pour les graphiques en Ligne et . La section Paramètres de l'axe permet de spécifier si vous souhaitez afficher l'Axe horizontal/vertical ou non en sélectionnant l'option Afficher ou Masquer dans la liste déroulante. Vous pouvez également spécifier les paramètres de Titre d'axe horizontal/vertical : Indiquez si vous souhaitez afficher le Titre de l'axe horizontal ou non en sélectionnant l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante : Aucun pour ne pas afficher le titre de l'axe horizontal, Pas de superposition pour afficher le titre en-dessous de l'axe horizontal. Indiquez si vous souhaitez afficher le Titre de l'axe vertical ou non en sélectionnant l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante : Aucun pour ne pas afficher le titre de l'axe vertical, Tourné pour afficher le titre de bas en haut à gauche de l'axe vertical, Horizontal pour afficher le titre horizontalement à gauche de l'axe vertical. La section Quadrillage permet de spécifier les lignes du Quadrillage horizontal/vertical que vous souhaitez afficher en sélectionnant l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante : Majeures, Mineures ou Majeures et mineures. Vous pouvez masquer le quadrillage à l'aide de l'option Aucun.Remarque : les sections Paramètres des axes et Quadrillage seront désactivées pour les Graphiques à secteurs, car les graphiques de ce type n'ont ni axes ni lignes de quadrillage. Remarque : les onglets Axe Horizontal/vertical seront désactivés pour les Graphiques à secteurs, car les graphiques de ce type n'ont pas d'axes. L'onglet Axe vertical vous permet de modifier les paramètres de l'axe vertical, également appelé axe des valeurs ou axe y, qui affiche des valeurs numériques. Notez que l'axe vertical sera l'axe des catégories qui affiche des étiquettes de texte pour les diagrammes en Barre, dans ce cas, les options de l'onglet Axe vertical correspondront à celles décrites dans la section suivante. Pour les diagrammes XY (Nuage), les deux axes sont des axes de valeur. La section Option des axes permet de modifier les paramètres suivants : Valeur minimale - sert à spécifier la valeur la plus basse affichée au début de l'axe vertical. L'option Auto est sélectionnée par défaut, dans ce cas la valeur minimale est calculée automatiquement en fonction de la plage de données sélectionnée. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Fixe dans la liste déroulante et spécifier une valeur différente dans le champ de saisie sur la droite. Valeur maximale - sert à spécifier la valeur la plus élevée affichée à la fin de l'axe vertical. L'option Auto est sélectionnée par défaut, dans ce cas la valeur maximale est calculée automatiquement en fonction de la plage de données sélectionnée. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Fixe dans la liste déroulante et spécifier une valeur différente dans le champ de saisie sur la droite. Axes croisés - est utilisé pour spécifier un point sur l'axe vertical où l'axe horizontal doit le traverser. L'option Auto est sélectionnée par défaut, dans ce cas la valeur du point d'intersection est calculée automatiquement en fonction de la plage de données sélectionnée. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Valeur dans la liste déroulante et spécifier une valeur différente dans le champ de saisie à droite, ou définir le point d'intersection des axes à la Valeur minimum/maximum sur l'axe vertical. Unités d'affichage - est utilisé pour déterminer la représentation des valeurs numériques le long de l'axe vertical. Cette option peut être utile si vous travaillez avec de grands nombres et souhaitez que les valeurs sur l'axe soient affichées de manière plus compacte et plus lisible (par exemple, vous pouvez représenter 50 000 comme 50 en utilisant les unités d'affichage de Milliers). Sélectionnez les unités souhaitées dans la liste déroulante : Centaines, Milliers, 10 000, 100 000, Millions, 10 000 000, 100 000 000, Milliards, Billions, ou choisissez l'option pour revenir aux unités par défaut. Valeurs dans l'ordre inverse - est utilisé pour afficher les valeurs dans la direction opposée. Lorsque la case n'est pas cochée, la valeur la plus basse est en bas et la valeur la plus haute est en haut de l'axe. Lorsque la case est cochée, les valeurs sont triées de haut en bas. La section Options de graduationspermet d'ajuster l'apparence des graduations sur l'échelle verticale. Les graduations majeures sont les divisions à plus grande échelle qui peuvent avoir des étiquettes affichant des valeurs numériques. Les graduations mineures sont les subdivisions d'échelle qui sont placées entre les graduations majeures et n'ont pas d'étiquettes. Les graduations définissent également l'endroit où le quadrillage peut être affiché, si l'option correspondante est définie dans l'onglet Disposition. Les listes déroulantes Type de majeure/mineure contiennent les options de placement suivantes : Aucune pour ne pas afficher les graduations majeures/mineures, Croix pour afficher les graduations majeures/mineures des deux côtés de l'axe, Intérieur pour afficher les graduations majeures/mineures dans l'axe, Extérieur pour afficher les graduations majeures/mineures à l'extérieur de l'axe. La section Options de libellé permet d'ajuster l'apparence des libellés de graduations majeures qui affichent des valeurs. Pour spécifier la Position du libellé par rapport à l'axe vertical, sélectionnez l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante : Aucun pour ne pas afficher les libellés de graduations, Bas pour afficher les libellés de graduations à gauche de la zone de tracé, Haut pour afficher les libellés de graduations à droite de la zone de tracé, À côté de l'axe pour afficher les libellés de graduations à côté de l'axe. L'onglet Axe horizontal vous permet de modifier les paramètres de l'axe horizontal, également appelé axe des catégories ou axe x, qui affiche des étiquettes de texte. Notez que l'axe horizontal sera l'axe des valeurs qui affiche des valeurs numériques pour les diagrammes en Barre, dans ce cas, les options de l'onglet Axe horizontal correspondront à celles décrites dans la section précédente. Pour les Graphiques XY(Nuage), les deux axes sont des axes de valeur. La section Options des axes permet de modifier les paramètres suivants : Axes croisés - est utilisé pour spécifier un point sur l'axe horizontal où l'axe vertical doit le traverser. L'option Auto est sélectionnée par défaut, dans ce cas la valeur du point d'intersection est calculée automatiquement en fonction de la plage de données sélectionnée. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Valeur dans la liste déroulante et spécifier une valeur différente dans le champ de saisie à droite, ou définir le point d'intersection des axes à la Valeur minimum/maximum(qui correspond à la première/dernière catégorie) sur l'axe horizontal. Position de l'axe - permet de spécifier où les étiquettes de texte de l'axe doivent être placées : Sur les graduations ou Entre les graduations. Valeurs dans l'ordre inverse - est utilisé pour afficher les catégories dans la direction opposée. Lorsque la case n'est pas cochée, les catégories sont affichées de gauche à droite. Lorsque la case est cochée, les catégories sont triées de droite à gauche. La section Options de graduations permet d'ajuster l'apparence des graduations sur l'échelle horizontale. Les graduations majeures sont les divisions à plus grande échelle qui peuvent avoir des étiquettes affichant les catégories. Les graduations mineures sont les divisions plus petites qui sont placées entre les graduations majeures et n'ont pas d'étiquettes. Les graduations définissent également l'endroit où le quadrillage peut être affiché, si l'option correspondante est définie dans l'onglet Disposition. Vous pouvez ajuster les paramètres de graduation suivants : Type de majeure/mineure est utilisé pour spécifier les options de placement suivantes : Aucune pour ne pas afficher les graduations majeures/mineures, Croix pour afficher les graduations majeures/mineures des deux côtés de l'axe, Intérieur pour afficher les graduations majeures/mineures dans l'axe, Extérieur pour afficher les graduations majeures/mineures à l'extérieur de l'axe. Intervalle entre les graduations - est utilisé pour spécifier le nombre de catégories à afficher entre deux marques de graduation adjacentes. La section Options de libellé permet d'ajuster l'apparence des libellés qui affichent les catégories. Position du libellé - est utilisé pour spécifier où les libellés doivent être placés par rapport à l'axe horizontal. Sélectionnez l'option souhaitée dans la liste déroulante : Aucun pour ne pas afficher les libellés de graduations, Bas pour afficher les libellés de graduations au bas de la zone de tracé, Haut pour afficher les libellés de graduations en haut de la zone de tracé, À côté de l'axe pour afficher les libellés de graduations à côté de l'axe. Distance du libellé - est utilisé pour spécifier la distance entre les libellés et l'axe. Spécifiez la valeur nécessaire dans le champ situé à droite. Plus la valeur que vous définissez est élevée, plus la distance entre l'axe et les libellés est grande. Intervalle entre les libellés - est utilisé pour spécifier la fréquence à laquelle les libellés doivent être affichés. L'option Auto est sélectionnée par défaut, dans ce cas les libellés sont affichés pour chaque catégorie. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Manuel dans la liste déroulante et spécifier la valeur voulue dans le champ de saisie sur la droite. Par exemple, entrez 2 pour afficher les libellés pour une catégorie sur deux. L'onglet Texte de remplacement permet de spécifier un Titre et une Description qui sera lue aux personnes avec des déficiences cognitives ou visuelles pour les aider à mieux comprendre l'information du graphique. Déplacer et redimensionner des graphiques une fois le graphique ajouté, vous pouvez modifier sa taille et sa position. Pour changer la taille du graphique, faites glisser les petits carreaux situés sur ses bords. Pour garder les proportions de l'objet sélectionné lors du redimensionnement, maintenez la touche Maj enfoncée et faites glisser l'une des icônes de coin. Pour modifier la position du graphique, utilisez l'icône qui apparaît si vous placez le curseur de votre souris sur l'image. Faites glisser l'objet vers la position choisie sans relâcher le bouton de la souris. Lorsque vous déplacez le graphique, des lignes de guidage s'affichent pour vous aider à positionner l'objet sur la page avec précision (si un style d'habillage autre que aligné est sélectionné). Modifier les éléments du graphique Pour modifier le Titre du graphique, sélectionnez le texte par défaut à l'aide de la souris et saisissez le vôtre à la place. Pour modifier la mise en forme de la police dans les éléments de texte, tels que le titre du graphique, les titres des axes, les entrées de légende, les étiquettes de données, etc., sélectionnez l'élément de texte nécessaire en cliquant dessus. Utilisez ensuite les icônes de l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure pour modifier le type de police, la taille, la couleur ou le style de décoration. Pour supprimer un élément de graphique, sélectionnez-le en cliquant sur le bouton gauche de la souris et appuyez sur la touche Suppr du clavier. Vous pouvez également faire pivoter les graphiques 3D à l'aide de la souris. Faites un clic gauche dans la zone de tracé et maintenez le bouton de la souris enfoncé jusqu'à ce qu'une boîte pointillée bleue apparaisse. Faites glisser le curseur sans relâcher le bouton de la souris pour modifier l'orientation du graphique 3D. Ajuster les paramètres du graphique Certains paramètres du graphique peuvent être modifiés en utilisant l'onglet Paramètres du graphique de la barre latérale droite. Pour l'activer, cliquez sur l'image et sélectionnez l'icône Paramètres du graphique à droite. Vous pouvez y modifier les paramètres suivants : Taille est utilisée pour afficher la et la du graphique actuel. Style d'habillage sert à sélectionner un des styles d'habillage - aligné sur le texte, carré, rapproché, au travers, haut et bas, devant le texte, derrière le texte (pour en savoir plus, consultez la section des paramètres avancés ci-dessous). Changer le type de graphique permet de modifier le type et/ou le style du graphique sélectionné.Pour sélectionner le Style voulu, utilisez le deuxième menu déroulant de la section Changer le type de graphique. Modifier les données est utilisé pour ouvrir la fenêtre \"Éditeur de graphique\".Remarque : pour ouvrir rapidement la fenêtre \"Éditeur de graphiques\", vous pouvez également double-cliquer sur le graphique dans le document. Certains paramètres de l'image peuvent être également modifiés en utilisant le menu contextuel. Les options du menu sont les suivantes : Couper, Copier, Coller - les options nécessaires pour couper ou coller le texte / l'objet sélectionné et coller un passage de texte précedement coupé / copié ou un objet à la position actuelle du curseur. Organiser sert à placer le graphique sélectionné au premier plan, envoyer à l'arrière-plan, avancer ou reculer ainsi que grouper ou dégrouper des graphiques pour effectuer des opérations avec plusieurs à la fois. Pour en savoir plus sur l'organisation des objets, vous pouvez vous référer à cette page. Aligner sert à aligner le texte à gauche, au centre, à droite, en haut, au milieu, en bas. Pour en savoir plus sur l'alignement des objets, vous pouvez vous référer à cette page. Style d'habillage sert à sélectionner un des styles d'habillage - aligné sur le texte, carré, rapproché, au travers, haut et bas, devant le texte, derrière le texte. L'option Modifier la limite d'habillage n'est pas disponible pour les graphiques. Modifier les données est utilisé pour ouvrir la fenêtre « Éditeur de graphique ». Paramètres avancés du graphique sert à ouvrir la fenêtre \"Graphique - Paramètres avancés\". Lorsque le graphique est sélectionné, l'icône Paramètres de forme est également disponible sur la droite, car une forme est utilisée comme arrière-plan pour le graphique. Vous pouvez cliquer sur cette icône pour ouvrir l'onglet Paramètres de forme dans la barre latérale droite et ajuster le Remplissage, le Contour et le Style d'habillage de la forme. Notez que vous ne pouvez pas modifier le type de forme. Pour modifier les paramètres avancés, cliquez sur le graphique avec le bouton droit de la souris et sélectionnez Paramètres avancés du graphique du menu contextuel ou cliquez sur le lien de la barre latérale droite Afficher paramètres avancés. La fenêtre propriétés du graphique s'ouvre : L'onglet Taille comporte les paramètres suivants : Largeur et Hauteur - utilisez ces options pour changer la largeur et/ou la hauteur du graphique. Si vous cliquez sur le bouton Proportions constantes (dans ce cas, il ressemble à ceci ), la largeur et la hauteur seront changées en même temps, le ratio d'aspect du graphique original sera préservé. L'onglet Habillage du texte contient les paramètres suivants : Style d'habillage - utilisez cette option pour changer la manière dont le graphique est positionné par rapport au texte : il peut faire partie du texte (si vous sélectionnez le style « aligné sur le texte ») ou être contourné par le texte de tous les côtés (si vous sélectionnez l'un des autres styles). Aligné sur le texte - le graphique fait partie du texte, comme un caractère, ainsi si le texte est déplacé, le graphique est déplacé lui aussi. Dans ce cas-là les options de position ne sont pas accessibles. Si vous sélectionnez un des styles suivants, vous pouvez déplacer le graphique indépendamment du texte et définir sa position exacte : Carré - le texte est ajusté autour des bords du graphique. Rapproché - le texte est ajusté sur le contour du graphique. Au travers - le texte est ajusté autour des bords du graphique et occupe l'espace vide à l'intérieur de celui-ci. Haut et bas - le texte est ajusté en haut et en bas du graphique. Devant le texte - le graphique est affiché sur le texte. Derrière le texte - le texte est affiché sur le graphique. Si vous avez choisi le style carré, rapproché, au travers, haut et bas, vous avez la possibilité de configurer des paramètres supplémentaires - Distance du texte de tous les côtés (haut, bas, droit, gauche). L'onglet Position n'est disponible qu'au cas où vous choisissez le style d'habillage autre que 'aligné sur le texte'. Il contient les paramètres suivants qui varient selon le type d'habillage sélectionné : La section Horizontal vous permet de sélectionner l'un des trois types de positionnement de graphique suivants : Alignement (gauche, centre, droite) par rapport au caractère, à la colonne, à la marge de gauche, à la marge, à la page ou à la marge de droite, Position absolue mesurée en unités absolues, c.-à-d. Centimètres/Points/Pouces (selon l'option spécifiée dans l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés...) à droite du caractère, de la colonne, de la marge de gauche, de la marge, de la page ou de la marge de droite, Position relative mesurée en pourcentage par rapport à la marge gauche, à la marge, à la page ou à la marge de droite. La section Vertical vous permet de sélectionner l'un des trois types de positionnement de graphique suivants : Alignement (haut, centre, bas) par rapport à la ligne, à la marge, à la marge inférieure, au paragraphe, à la page ou à la marge supérieure, Position absolue mesurée en unités absolues, c.-à-d. Centimètres/Points/Pouces (selon l'option spécifiée dans l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés...) sous la ligne, la marge, la marge inférieure, le paragraphe, la page la marge supérieure, Position relative mesurée en pourcentage par rapport à la marge, à la marge inférieure, à la page ou à la marge supérieure. Déplacer avec le texte détermine si le graphique se déplace en même temps que le texte sur lequel il est aligné. Chevauchement détermine si deux graphiques se chevauchent ou non si vous les faites glisser les unes près des autres sur la page. L'onglet Texte de remplacement permet de spécifier un Titre et une Description qui sera lue aux personnes avec des déficiences cognitives ou visuelles pour les aider à mieux comprendre l'information du graphique." + "body": "Insérer un graphique Pour insérer un graphique dans votre document, placez le curseur là où vous souhaitez ajouter un graphique, passez à l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur l'icône Insérer un graphique de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez le type de graphique nécessaire parmi ceux qui sont disponibles - colonne, ligne, secteurs, barres, aires, graphique en points , boursier - et sélectionnez son style,Remarque : les graphiques Colonne, Ligne, Secteur, ou Barre sont aussi disponibles au format 3D. après une fenêtre Éditeur de graphique s'ouvre où vous pouvez entrer les données nécessaires dans les cellules en utilisant les commandes suivantes : et pour copier et coller les données copiées et pour annuler et rétablir les actions pour insérer une fonction et pour diminuer et augmenter les décimales pour changer le format de nombre, c'est à dire la façon d'afficher les chiffres dans les cellules modifiez les paramètres du graphique en cliquant sur le bouton Modifier graphique situé dans la fenêtre Éditeur de graphique. La fenêtre Paramètres du graphique s'ouvre. L'onglet Type et données vous permet de sélectionner le type de graphique ainsi que les données que vous souhaitez utiliser pour créer un graphique. Sélectionnez le Type de graphique que vous souhaitez utiliser : Colonne, Ligne, Secteur, Barre, Aire, XY(Nuage) ou Boursier. Vérifiez la Plage de données sélectionnée et modifiez-la, si nécessaire, en cliquant sur le bouton Sélectionner les données et en entrant la plage de données souhaitée dans le format suivant : Sheet1!A1:B4. Choisissez la disposition des données. Vous pouvez sélectionner la Série de données à utiliser sur l'axe X : en lignes ou en colonnes. L'onglet Disposition vous permet de modifier la disposition des éléments de graphique. Spécifiez la position du Titre du graphique sur votre graphique en sélectionnant l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante: Aucun pour ne pas afficher le titre du graphique, Superposition pour superposer et centrer le titre sur la zone de tracé, Pas de superposition pour afficher le titre au-dessus de la zone de tracé. Spécifiez la position de la Légende sur votre graphique en sélectionnant l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante : Aucun pour ne pas afficher de légende, Bas pour afficher la légende et l'aligner au bas de la zone de tracé, Haut pour afficher la légende et l'aligner en haut de la zone de tracé, Droite pour afficher la légende et l'aligner à droite de la zone de tracé, Gauche pour afficher la légende et l'aligner à gauche de la zone de tracé, Superposer à gauche pour superposer et centrer la légende à gauche de la zone de tracé, Superposer à droite pour superposer et centrer la légende à droite de la zone de tracé. Spécifiez les paramètres des Étiquettes de données (c'est-à-dire les étiquettes de texte représentant les valeurs exactes des points de données) : spécifiez la position des Étiquettes de données par rapport aux points de données en sélectionnant l'option nécessaire dans la liste déroulante. Les options disponibles varient en fonction du type de graphique sélectionné. Pour les graphiques en Colonnes/Barres, vous pouvez choisir les options suivantes : Aucune, Centre, Intérieur bas,Intérieur haut, Extérieur haut. Pour les graphiques en Ligne/XY(Nuage)/Boursier, vous pouvez choisir les options suivantes : Aucune, Centre, Gauche, Droite, Haut, Bas. Pour les graphiques Secteur, vous pouvez choisir les options suivantes : Aucune, Centre, Ajusté à la largeur,Intérieur haut, Extérieur haut. Pour les graphiques en Aire ainsi que pour les graphiques 3D en Colonnes, en Lignes et en Barres, vous pouvez choisir les options suivantes : Aucun, Centre. sélectionnez les données que vous souhaitez inclure dans vos étiquettes en cochant les cases correspondantes: Nom de la série, Nom de la catégorie, Valeur, Entrez un caractère (virgule, point-virgule, etc.) que vous souhaitez utiliser pour séparer plusieurs étiquettes dans le champ de saisie Séparateur d'étiquettes de données. Lignes - permet de choisir un style de ligne pour les graphiques en Ligne/XY(Nuage). Vous pouvez choisir parmi les options suivantes : Droite pour utiliser des lignes droites entre les points de données, Courbe pour utiliser des courbes lisses entre les points de données, ou Aucune pour ne pas afficher les lignes. Marqueurs - est utilisé pour spécifier si les marqueurs doivent être affichés (si la case est cochée) ou non (si la case n'est pas cochée) pour les graphiques Ligne/XY(Nuage).Remarque : les options Lignes et Marqueurs sont disponibles uniquement pour les graphiques en Ligne et XY(Nuage). La section Paramètres de l'axe permet de spécifier si vous souhaitez afficher l'Axe horizontal/vertical ou non en sélectionnant l'option Afficher ou Masquer dans la liste déroulante. Vous pouvez également spécifier les paramètres de Titre d'axe horizontal/vertical : Indiquez si vous souhaitez afficher le Titre de l'axe horizontal ou non en sélectionnant l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante : Aucun pour ne pas afficher le titre de l'axe horizontal, Pas de superposition pour afficher le titre en-dessous de l'axe horizontal. Indiquez si vous souhaitez afficher le Titre de l'axe vertical ou non en sélectionnant l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante : Aucun pour ne pas afficher le titre de l'axe vertical, Tourné pour afficher le titre de bas en haut à gauche de l'axe vertical, Horizontal pour afficher le titre horizontalement à gauche de l'axe vertical. La section Quadrillage permet de spécifier les lignes du Quadrillage horizontal/vertical que vous souhaitez afficher en sélectionnant l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante : Majeures, Mineures ou Majeures et mineures. Vous pouvez masquer le quadrillage à l'aide de l'option Aucun.Remarque : les sections Paramètres des axes et Quadrillage seront désactivées pour les Graphiques à secteurs, car les graphiques de ce type n'ont ni axes ni lignes de quadrillage. Remarque : les onglets Axe Horizontal/vertical seront désactivés pour les Graphiques à secteurs, car les graphiques de ce type n'ont pas d'axes. L'onglet Axe vertical vous permet de modifier les paramètres de l'axe vertical, également appelés axe des valeurs ou axe y, qui affiche des valeurs numériques. Notez que l'axe vertical sera l'axe des catégories qui affiche des étiquettes de texte pour les Graphiques à barres. Dans ce cas, les options de l'onglet Axe vertical correspondront à celles décrites dans la section suivante. Pour les Graphiques XY(Nuage), les deux axes sont des axes de valeur. La section Options des axes permet de modifier les paramètres suivants : Valeur minimale - sert à spécifier la valeur la plus basse affichée au début de l'axe vertical. L'option Auto est sélectionnée par défaut, dans ce cas la valeur minimale est calculée automatiquement en fonction de la plage de données sélectionnée. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Fixe dans la liste déroulante et spécifier une valeur différente dans le champ de saisie sur la droite. Valeur maximale - sert à spécifier la valeur la plus élevée affichée à la fin de l'axe vertical. L'option Auto est sélectionnée par défaut, dans ce cas la valeur maximale est calculée automatiquement en fonction de la plage de données sélectionnée. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Fixe dans la liste déroulante et spécifier une valeur différente dans le champ de saisie sur la droite. Axes croisés - est utilisé pour spécifier un point sur l'axe vertical où l'axe horizontal doit le traverser. L'option Auto est sélectionnée par défaut, dans ce cas la valeur du point d'intersection est calculée automatiquement en fonction de la plage de données sélectionnée. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Valeur dans la liste déroulante et spécifier une valeur différente dans le champ de saisie à droite, ou définir le point d'intersection des axes à la Valeur minimum/maximum sur l'axe vertical. Unités d'affichage - est utilisé pour déterminer la représentation des valeurs numériques le long de l'axe vertical. Cette option peut être utile si vous travaillez avec de grands nombres et souhaitez que les valeurs sur l'axe soient affichées de manière plus compacte et plus lisible (par exemple, vous pouvez représenter 50 000 comme 50 en utilisant les unités d'affichage de Milliers). Sélectionnez les unités souhaitées dans la liste déroulante : Centaines, Milliers, 10 000, 100 000, Millions, 10 000 000, 100 000 000, Milliards, Billions, ou choisissez l'option Aucun pour retourner aux unités par défaut. Valeurs dans l'ordre inverse - est utilisé pour afficher les valeurs dans la direction opposée. Lorsque la case n'est pas cochée, la valeur la plus basse est en bas et la valeur la plus haute est en haut de l'axe. Lorsque la case est cochée, les valeurs sont triées de haut en bas. La section Options de graduationspermet d'ajuster l'apparence des graduations sur l'échelle verticale. Les graduations majeures sont les divisions à plus grande échelle qui peuvent avoir des étiquettes affichant des valeurs numériques. Les graduations mineures sont les subdivisions d'échelle qui sont placées entre les graduations majeures et n'ont pas d'étiquettes. Les graduations définissent également l'endroit où le quadrillage peut être affiché, si l'option correspondante est définie dans l'onglet Disposition. Les listes déroulantes Type de majeure/mineure contiennent les options de placement suivantes : Aucune pour ne pas afficher les graduations majeures/mineures, Croix pour afficher les graduations majeures/mineures des deux côtés de l'axe, Intérieur pour afficher les graduations majeures/mineures dans l'axe, Extérieur pour afficher les graduations majeures/mineures à l'extérieur de l'axe. La section Options de libellé permet d'ajuster l'apparence des libellés de graduations majeures qui affichent des valeurs. Pour spécifier la Position du libellé par rapport à l'axe vertical, sélectionnez l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante : Aucun pour ne pas afficher les libellés de graduations, Bas pour afficher les libellés de graduations à gauche de la zone de tracé, Haut pour afficher les libellés de graduations à droite de la zone de tracé, À côté de l'axe pour afficher les libellés de graduations à côté de l'axe. L'onglet Axe horizontal vous permet de modifier les paramètres de l'axe horizontal, également appelés axe des catégories ou axe x, qui affiche des libellés textuels. Notez que l'axe horizontal sera l'axe des valeurs qui affiche des valeurs numériques pour les Graphiques à barres. Dans ce cas, les options de l'onglet Axe horizontal correspondent à celles décrites dans la section précédente. Pour les Graphiques XY(Nuage), les deux axes sont des axes de valeur. La section Options des axes permet de modifier les paramètres suivants : Axes croisés - est utilisé pour spécifier un point sur l'axe horizontal où l'axe vertical doit le traverser. L'option Auto est sélectionnée par défaut, dans ce cas la valeur du point d'intersection est calculée automatiquement en fonction de la plage de données sélectionnée. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Valeur dans la liste déroulante et spécifier une valeur différente dans le champ de saisie à droite, ou définir le point d'intersection des axes à la Valeur minimum/maximum(qui correspond à la première/dernière catégorie) sur l'axe horizontal. Position de l'axe - permet de spécifier où les étiquettes de texte de l'axe doivent être placées : Sur les graduations ou Entre les graduations. Valeurs dans l'ordre inverse - est utilisé pour afficher les catégories dans la direction opposée. Lorsque la case n'est pas cochée, les catégories sont affichées de gauche à droite. Lorsque la case est cochée, les catégories sont triées de droite à gauche. La section Options de graduations permet d'ajuster l'apparence des graduations sur l'échelle horizontale. Les graduations majeures sont les divisions à plus grande échelle qui peuvent avoir des étiquettes affichant les catégories. Les graduations mineures sont les divisions plus petites qui sont placées entre les graduations majeures et n'ont pas d'étiquettes. Les graduations définissent également l'endroit où le quadrillage peut être affiché, si l'option correspondante est définie dans l'onglet Disposition. Vous pouvez ajuster les paramètres de graduation suivants : Type de majeure/mineure est utilisé pour spécifier les options de placement suivantes : Aucune pour ne pas afficher les graduations majeures/mineures, Croix pour afficher les graduations majeures/mineures des deux côtés de l'axe, Intérieur pour afficher les graduations majeures/mineures dans l'axe, Extérieur pour afficher les graduations majeures/mineures à l'extérieur de l'axe. Intervalle entre les graduations - est utilisé pour spécifier le nombre de catégories à afficher entre deux marques de graduation adjacentes. La section Options de libellé permet d'ajuster l'apparence des libellés qui affichent les catégories. Position du libellé - est utilisé pour spécifier où les libellés doivent être placés par rapport à l'axe horizontal. Sélectionnez l'option souhaitée dans la liste déroulante : Aucun pour ne pas afficher les libellés de graduations, Bas pour afficher les libellés de graduations au bas de la zone de tracé, Haut pour afficher les libellés de graduations en haut de la zone de tracé, À côté de l'axe pour afficher les libellés de graduations à côté de l'axe. Distance du libellé - est utilisé pour spécifier la distance entre les libellés et l'axe. Spécifiez la valeur nécessaire dans le champ situé à droite. Plus la valeur que vous définissez est élevée, plus la distance entre l'axe et les libellés est grande. Intervalle entre les libellés - est utilisé pour spécifier la fréquence à laquelle les libellés doivent être affichés. L'option Auto est sélectionnée par défaut, dans ce cas les libellés sont affichés pour chaque catégorie. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option Manuel dans la liste déroulante et spécifier la valeur voulue dans le champ de saisie sur la droite. Par exemple, entrez 2 pour afficher les libellés pour une catégorie sur deux. L'onglet Texte de remplacement permet de spécifier un Titre et une Description qui sera lue aux personnes avec des déficiences cognitives ou visuelles pour les aider à mieux comprendre l'information du graphique. Déplacer et redimensionner des graphiques une fois le graphique ajouté, vous pouvez modifier sa taille et sa position. Pour changer la taille du graphique, faites glisser les petits carreaux situés sur ses bords. Pour garder les proportions de l'objet sélectionné lors du redimensionnement, maintenez la touche Maj enfoncée et faites glisser l'une des icônes de coin. Pour modifier la position du graphique, utilisez l'icône qui apparaît si vous placez le curseur de votre souris sur l'image. Faites glisser l'objet vers la position choisie sans relâcher le bouton de la souris. Lorsque vous déplacez le graphique, des lignes de guidage s'affichent pour vous aider à positionner l'objet sur la page avec précision (si un style d'habillage autre que aligné est sélectionné). Note : la liste des raccourcis clavier qui peuvent être utilisés lorsque vous travaillez avec des objets est disponible ici. Modifier les éléments de graphique Pour modifier le Titre du graphique, sélectionnez le texte par défaut à l'aide de la souris et saisissez le vôtre à la place. Pour modifier la mise en forme de la police dans les éléments de texte, tels que le titre du graphique, les titres des axes, les entrées de légende, les étiquettes de données, etc., sélectionnez l'élément de texte nécessaire en cliquant dessus. Utilisez ensuite les icônes de l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure pour modifier le type de police, la taille, la couleur ou le style de décoration. Pour supprimer un élément de graphique, sélectionnez-le avec la souris et appuyez sur la touche Suppr. Vous pouvez également faire pivoter les graphiques 3D à l'aide de la souris. Faites un clic gauche dans la zone de tracé et maintenez le bouton de la souris enfoncé. Faites glisser le curseur sans relâcher le bouton de la souris pour modifier l'orientation du graphique 3D. Ajuster les paramètres du graphique Certains paramètres du graphique peuvent être modifiés en utilisant l'onglet Paramètres du graphique de la barre latérale droite. Pour l'activer, cliquez sur le graphique et sélectionnez l'icône Paramètres du graphique à droite. Vous pouvez y modifier les paramètres suivants : Taille est utilisée pour afficher la Largeur et la Hauteur du graphique actuel. Style d'habillage sert à sélectionner un des styles d'habillage - aligné sur le texte, carré, rapproché, au travers, haut et bas, devant le texte, derrière le texte (pour en savoir plus, consultez la section des paramètres avancés ci-dessous). Changer le type de graphique permet de modifier le type et/ou le style du graphique sélectionné.Pour sélectionner le Style de graphique nécessaire, utilisez le deuxième menu déroulant de la section Modifier le type de graphique. Modifier les données est utilisé pour ouvrir la fenêtre « Éditeur de graphique ».Remarque : pour ouvrir rapidement la fenêtre \"Éditeur de graphiques\", vous pouvez également double-cliquer sur le graphique dans le document. Certains paramètres de l'image peuvent être également modifiés en utilisant le menu contextuel. Les options du menu sont les suivantes : Couper, Copier, Coller - les options nécessaires pour couper ou coller le texte / l'objet sélectionné et coller un passage de texte précedement coupé / copié ou un objet à la position actuelle du curseur. Organiser sert à placer le graphique sélectionné au premier plan, envoyer à l'arrière-plan, avancer ou reculer ainsi que grouper ou dégrouper des graphiques pour effectuer des opérations avec plusieurs à la fois. Pour en savoir plus sur l'organisation des objets, vous pouvez vous référer à cette page. Aligner sert à aligner le texte à gauche, au centre, à droite, en haut, au milieu, en bas. Pour en savoir plus sur l'alignement des objets, vous pouvez vous référer à cette page. Style d'habillage sert à sélectionner un des styles d'habillage - aligné sur le texte, carré, rapproché, au travers, haut et bas, devant le texte, derrière le texte. L'option Modifier la limite d'habillage n'est pas disponible pour les graphiques. Modifier les données est utilisé pour ouvrir la fenêtre « Éditeur de graphique ». Paramètres avancés du graphique sert à ouvrir la fenêtre \"Graphique - Paramètres avancés\". Lorsque le graphique est sélectionné, l'icône Paramètres de forme est également disponible sur la droite, car une forme est utilisée comme arrière-plan pour le graphique. Vous pouvez cliquer sur cette icône pour ouvrir l'onglet Paramètres de forme dans la barre latérale droite et ajuster le Remplissage, le Contour et le Style d'habillage de la forme. Notez que vous ne pouvez pas modifier le type de forme. Pour modifier les paramètres avancés, cliquez sur le graphique avec le bouton droit de la souris et sélectionnez Paramètres avancés du graphique du menu contextuel ou cliquez sur le lien de la barre latérale droite Afficher paramètres avancés. La fenêtre propriétés du graphique s'ouvre : L'onglet Taille comporte les paramètres suivants : Largeur et Hauteur - utilisez ces options pour changer la largeur et/ou la hauteur du graphique. Si vous cliquez sur le bouton Proportions constantes (dans ce cas, il ressemble à ceci ), la largeur et la hauteur seront changées en même temps, le ratio d'aspect du graphique original sera préservé. L'onglet Habillage du texte contient les paramètres suivants : Style d'habillage - utilisez cette option pour changer la manière dont le graphique est positionné par rapport au texte : il peut faire partie du texte (si vous sélectionnez le style « aligné sur le texte ») ou être contourné par le texte de tous les côtés (si vous sélectionnez l'un des autres styles). Aligné sur le texte - le graphique fait partie du texte, comme un caractère, ainsi si le texte est déplacé, le graphique est déplacé lui aussi. Dans ce cas-là les options de position ne sont pas accessibles. Si vous sélectionnez un des styles suivants, vous pouvez déplacer le graphique indépendamment du texte et définir sa position exacte : Carré - le texte est ajusté autour des bords du graphique. Rapproché - le texte est ajusté sur le contour du graphique. Au travers - le texte est ajusté autour des bords du graphique et occupe l'espace vide à l'intérieur de celui-ci. Haut et bas - le texte est ajusté en haut et en bas du graphique. Devant le texte - le graphique est affiché sur le texte. Derrière le texte - le texte est affiché sur le graphique. Si vous avez choisi le style carré, rapproché, au travers, haut et bas, vous avez la possibilité de configurer des paramètres supplémentaires - Distance du texte de tous les côtés (haut, bas, droit, gauche). L'onglet Position n'est disponible qu'au cas où vous choisissez le style d'habillage autre que 'aligné sur le texte'. Il contient les paramètres suivants qui varient selon le type d'habillage sélectionné : La section Horizontal vous permet de sélectionner l'un des trois types de positionnement de graphique suivants : Alignement (gauche, centre, droite) par rapport au caractère, à la colonne, à la marge de gauche, à la marge, à la page ou à la marge de droite, Position absolue mesurée en unités absolues, c.-à-d. Centimètres/Points/Pouces (selon l'option spécifiée dans l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés...) à droite du caractère, de la colonne, de la marge de gauche, de la marge, de la page ou de la marge de droite, Position relative mesurée en pourcentage par rapport à la marge gauche, à la marge, à la page ou à la marge de droite. La section Vertical vous permet de sélectionner l'un des trois types de positionnement de graphique suivants : Alignement (haut, centre, bas) par rapport à la ligne, à la marge, à la marge inférieure, au paragraphe, à la page ou à la marge supérieure, Position absolue mesurée en unités absolues, c.-à-d. Centimètres/Points/Pouces (selon l'option spécifiée dans l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés...) sous la ligne, la marge, la marge inférieure, le paragraphe, la page la marge supérieure, Position relative mesurée en pourcentage par rapport à la marge, à la marge inférieure, à la page ou à la marge supérieure. Déplacer avec le texte détermine si le graphique se déplace en même temps que le texte sur lequel il est aligné. Chevauchement détermine si deux graphiques se chevauchent ou non si vous les faites glisser les unes près des autres sur la page. L'onglet Texte de remplacement permet de spécifier un Titre et une Description qui sera lue aux personnes avec des déficiences cognitives ou visuelles pour les aider à mieux comprendre l'information du graphique." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertContentControls.htm", "title": "Insérer des contrôles de contenu", - "body": "À l'aide des contrôles de contenu, vous pouvez créer un formulaire avec des champs de saisie pouvant être renseignés par d'autres utilisateurs ou protéger certaines parties du document contre l'édition ou la suppression. Les contrôles de contenu sont des objets contenant du texte pouvant être mis en forme. Les contrôles de contenu de texte brut ne peuvent pas contenir plus d'un paragraphe, tandis que les contrôles de contenu en texte enrichi peuvent contenir plusieurs paragraphes, listes et objets (images, formes, tableaux, etc.). Ajouter des contrôles de contenu Pour créer un nouveau contrôle de contenu de texte brut, positionnez le point d'insertion dans une ligne du texte où vous souhaitez ajouter le contrôle, ou sélectionnez un passage de texte que vous souhaitez transformer en contenu du contrôle. passez à l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure. cliquez sur la flèche en regard de l'icône Contrôles de contenu. choisissez l'option Insérer un contrôle de contenu de texte brut dans le menu. Le contrôle sera inséré au point d'insertion dans une ligne du texte existant. Les contrôles de contenu de texte brut ne permettent pas l'ajout de sauts de ligne et ne peuvent pas contenir d'autres objets tels que des images, des tableaux, etc. Pour créer un nouveau contrôle de contenu de texte enrichi, positionnez le point d'insertion à la fin d'un paragraphe après lequel vous voulez ajouter le contrôle, ou sélectionnez un ou plusieurs des paragraphes existants que vous voulez convertir en contenu du contrôle. passez à l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure. cliquez sur la flèche en regard de l'icône Contrôles de contenu. choisissez l'option Insérer un contrôle de contenu de texte enrichi dans le menu. Le contrôle sera inséré dans un nouveau paragraphe. Les contrôles de contenu de texte enrichi permettent d'ajouter des sauts de ligne, c'est-à-dire peuvent contenir plusieurs paragraphes ainsi que certains objets, tels que des images, des tableaux, d'autres contrôles de contenu, etc. Remarque : La bordure du contrôle de contenu est visible uniquement lorsque le contrôle est sélectionné. Les bordures n'apparaissent pas sur une version imprimée. Déplacer des contrôles de contenu Les contrôles peuvent être déplacés à un autre endroit du document: cliquez sur le bouton à gauche de la bordure de contrôle pour sélectionner le contrôle et faites-le glisser sans relâcher le bouton de la souris à un autre endroit dans le texte du document. Vous pouvez également copier et coller des contrôles de contenu: sélectionnez le contrôle voulu et utilisez les combinaisons de touches Ctrl+C/Ctrl+V. Modifier des contrôles de contenu Remplacez le texte par défaut dans le contrôle (\"Votre texte ici\") par votre propre texte: sélectionnez le texte par défaut, et tapez un nouveau texte ou copiez un passage de texte de n'importe où et collez-le dans le contrôle de contenu. Le texte contenu dans le contrôle de contenu (texte brut ou texte enrichi) peut être formaté à l'aide des icônes de la barre d'outils supérieure: vous pouvez ajuster le type, la taille, la couleur de police, appliquer des styles de décoration et les préréglages de mise en forme. Il est également possible d'utiliser la fenêtre Paragraphe - Paramètres avancés accessible depuis le menu contextuel ou depuis la barre latérale de droite pour modifier les propriétés du texte. Le texte contenu dans les contrôles de contenu de texte enrichi peut être mis en forme comme un texte normal du document, c'est-à-dire que vous pouvez définir l'interlignage, modifier les retraits de paragraphe, ajuster les taquets de tabulation. Modification des paramètres de contrôle du contenu Pour ouvrir les paramètres de contrôle du contenu, vous pouvez procéder de la manière suivante: Sélectionnez le contrôle de contenu nécessaire, cliquez sur la flèche en regard de l'icône Contrôles de contenu dans la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Paramètres de contrôle dans le menu. Cliquez avec le bouton droit n'importe où dans le contrôle de contenu et utilisez l'option Paramètres de contrôle du contenu dans le menu contextuel. Une nouvelle fenêtre s'ouvrira où vous pourrez ajuster les paramètres suivants: Spécifiez le Titre ou l'Étiquette du contrôle de contenu dans les champs correspondants. Le titre s'affiche lorsque le contrôle est sélectionné dans le document. Les étiquettes sont utilisées pour identifier les contrôles de contenu afin que vous puissiez y faire référence dans votre code. Choisissez si vous voulez afficher le contrôle de contenu avec une Zone de délimitation ou non. Utilisez l'option Aucune pour afficher le contrôle sans la zone de délimitation. Si vous sélectionnez l'option Zone de délimitation, vous pouvez choisir la Couleur de cette zone à l'aide du champ ci-dessous. Empêchez le contrôle de contenu d'être supprimé ou modifié en utilisant l'option de la section Verrouillage: Le contrôle du contenu ne peut pas être supprimé - cochez cette case pour empêcher la suppression du contrôle de contenu. Le contenu ne peut pas être modifié - cochez cette case pour protéger le contenu du contrôle de contenu contre une modification. cliquez sur le bouton OK dans la fenêtre des paramètres pour appliquer les changements. Il est également possible de surligner les contrôles de contenu avec une certaine couleur. Pour surligner les contrôles avec une couleur : Cliquez sur le bouton situé à gauche de la bordure du champ pour sélectionner le champ, Cliquez sur la flèche à côté de l'icône Contrôles de contenu dans la barre d'outils supérieure, Sélectionnez l'option Paramètres de surlignage du menu contextuel, Sélectionnez la couleur souhaitée dans les palettes disponibles : Couleurs du thème, Couleurs standard ou spécifiez une nouvelle Couleur personnalisée. Pour supprimer la surbrillance des couleurs précédemment appliquée, utilisez l'option Pas de surbrillance. Les options de surbrillance sélectionnées seront appliquées à tous les contrôles de contenu du document. Retirer des contrôles de contenu Pour supprimer un contrôle et laisser tout son contenu, cliquez sur le contrôle de contenu pour le sélectionner, puis procédez de l'une des façons suivantes: Cliquez sur la flèche en regard de l'icône Contrôles du contenu dans la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Retirer le contrôle du contenu dans le menu. Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur la sélection et choisissez l'option Supprimer le contrôle de contenu dans le menu contextuel, Pour supprimer un contrôle et tout son contenu, sélectionnez le contrôle nécessaire et appuyez sur la touche Suppr du clavier." + "body": "À l'aide des contrôles de contenu, vous pouvez créer un formulaire avec des champs de saisie pouvant être renseignés par d'autres utilisateurs ou protéger certaines parties du document contre l'édition ou la suppression. Les contrôles de contenu sont des objets contenant du texte pouvant être mis en forme. Les contrôles de contenu de texte brut ne peuvent pas contenir plus d'un paragraphe, tandis que les contrôles de contenu en texte enrichi peuvent contenir plusieurs paragraphes, listes et objets (images, formes, tableaux, etc.). Ajouter des contrôles de contenu Pour créer un nouveau contrôle de contenu de texte brut, positionnez le point d'insertion dans une ligne du texte où vous souhaitez ajouter le contrôle, ou sélectionnez un passage de texte que vous souhaitez transformer en contenu du contrôle. passez à l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure. cliquez sur la flèche en regard de l'icône Contrôles de contenu. choisissez l'option Insérer un contrôle de contenu de texte brut dans le menu. Le contrôle sera inséré au point d'insertion dans une ligne du texte existant. Les contrôles de contenu de texte brut ne permettent pas l'ajout de sauts de ligne et ne peuvent pas contenir d'autres objets tels que des images, des tableaux, etc. Pour créer un nouveau contrôle de contenu de texte enrichi, positionnez le point d'insertion à la fin d'un paragraphe après lequel vous voulez ajouter le contrôle, ou sélectionnez un ou plusieurs des paragraphes existants que vous voulez convertir en contenu du contrôle. passez à l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure. cliquez sur la flèche en regard de l'icône Contrôles de contenu. choisissez l'option Insérer un contrôle de contenu de texte enrichi dans le menu. Le contrôle sera inséré dans un nouveau paragraphe. Les contrôles de contenu de texte enrichi permettent d'ajouter des sauts de ligne, c'est-à-dire peuvent contenir plusieurs paragraphes ainsi que certains objets, tels que des images, des tableaux, d'autres contrôles de contenu, etc. Remarque : La bordure du contrôle de contenu est visible uniquement lorsque le contrôle est sélectionné. Les bordures n'apparaissent pas sur une version imprimée. Déplacer des contrôles de contenu Les contrôles peuvent être déplacés à un autre endroit du document: cliquez sur le bouton à gauche de la bordure de contrôle pour sélectionner le contrôle et faites-le glisser sans relâcher le bouton de la souris à un autre endroit dans le texte du document. Vous pouvez également copier et coller des contrôles de contenu: sélectionnez le contrôle voulu et utilisez les combinaisons de touches Ctrl+C/Ctrl+V. Modifier des contrôles de contenu Remplacez le texte par défaut dans le contrôle (\"Votre texte ici\") par votre propre texte: sélectionnez le texte par défaut, et tapez un nouveau texte ou copiez un passage de texte de n'importe où et collez-le dans le contrôle de contenu. Le texte contenu dans le contrôle de contenu (texte brut ou texte enrichi) peut être formaté à l'aide des icônes de la barre d'outils supérieure: vous pouvez ajuster le type, la taille, la couleur de police, appliquer des styles de décoration et les préréglages de mise en forme. Il est également possible d'utiliser la fenêtre Paragraphe - Paramètres avancés accessible depuis le menu contextuel ou depuis la barre latérale de droite pour modifier les propriétés du texte. Le texte contenu dans les contrôles de contenu de texte enrichi peut être mis en forme comme un texte normal du document, c'est-à-dire que vous pouvez définir l'interlignage, modifier les retraits de paragraphe, ajuster les taquets de tabulation. Modification des paramètres de contrôle du contenu Pour ouvrir les paramètres de contrôle du contenu, vous pouvez procéder de la manière suivante: Sélectionnez le contrôle de contenu nécessaire, cliquez sur la flèche en regard de l'icône Contrôles de contenu dans la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Paramètres de contrôle dans le menu. Cliquez avec le bouton droit n'importe où dans le contrôle de contenu et utilisez l'option Paramètres de contrôle du contenu dans le menu contextuel. Une nouvelle fenêtre s'ouvrira où vous pourrez ajuster les paramètres suivants: Spécifiez le Titre ou l'Étiquette du contrôle de contenu dans les champs correspondants. Le titre s'affiche lorsque le contrôle est sélectionné dans le document. Les étiquettes sont utilisées pour identifier les contrôles de contenu afin que vous puissiez y faire référence dans votre code. Choisissez si vous voulez afficher le contrôle de contenu avec une Zone de délimitation ou non. Utilisez l'option Aucune pour afficher le contrôle sans la zone de délimitation. Si vous sélectionnez l'option Zone de délimitation, vous pouvez choisir la Couleur de cette zone à l'aide du champ ci-dessous. Cliquez sur le bouton Appliquer à tous pour appliquer les paramètres d’apparence spécifiés à tous les contrôles de contenu du document. Empêchez le contrôle de contenu d'être supprimé ou modifié en utilisant l'option de la section Verrouillage: Le contrôle du contenu ne peut pas être supprimé - cochez cette case pour empêcher la suppression du contrôle de contenu. Le contenu ne peut pas être modifié - cochez cette case pour protéger le contenu du contrôle de contenu contre une modification. cliquez sur le bouton OK dans la fenêtre des paramètres pour appliquer les changements. Il est également possible de surligner les contrôles de contenu avec une certaine couleur. Pour surligner les contrôles avec une couleur : Cliquez sur le bouton situé à gauche de la bordure du champ pour sélectionner le champ, Cliquez sur la flèche à côté de l'icône Contrôles de contenu dans la barre d'outils supérieure, Sélectionnez l'option Paramètres de surlignage du menu contextuel, Sélectionnez la couleur souhaitée dans les palettes disponibles : Couleurs du thème, Couleurs standard ou spécifiez une nouvelle Couleur personnalisée. Pour supprimer la surbrillance des couleurs précédemment appliquée, utilisez l'option Pas de surbrillance. Les options de surbrillance sélectionnées seront appliquées à tous les contrôles de contenu du document. Retirer des contrôles de contenu Pour supprimer un contrôle et laisser tout son contenu, cliquez sur le contrôle de contenu pour le sélectionner, puis procédez de l'une des façons suivantes: Cliquez sur la flèche en regard de l'icône Contrôles du contenu dans la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Retirer le contrôle du contenu dans le menu. Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur la sélection et choisissez l'option Supprimer le contrôle de contenu dans le menu contextuel, Pour supprimer un contrôle et tout son contenu, sélectionnez le contrôle nécessaire et appuyez sur la touche Suppr du clavier." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertDropCap.htm", @@ -198,22 +213,27 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm", "title": "Insérer des images", - "body": "Document Editor vous permet d'insérer des images aux formats populaires. Les formats d'image pris en charge sont les suivants : BMP, GIF, JPEG, JPG, PNG. Insérer une image Pour insérer une image dans votre document de texte, placez le curseur là où vous voulez insérer l'image, passez à l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur l'icône Imagede la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'une des options suivantes pour charger l'image : l'option Image à partir d'un fichier ouvre la fenêtre de dialogue standard pour sélectionner le fichier. Sélectionnez le fichier de votre choix sur le disque dur de votre ordinateur et cliquez sur le bouton Ouvrir l'option Image à partir d'une URL ouvre la fenêtre où vous pouvez saisir l'adresse Web de l'image et cliquer sur le bouton OK après avoir ajouté l'image, vous pouvez modifier sa taille, ses propriétés et sa position. Déplacer et redimensionner des images Pour changer la taille de l'image, faites glisser les petits carreaux situés sur ses bords. Pour garder les proportions de l'image sélectionnée lors du redimensionnement, maintenez la touche Maj enfoncée et faites glisser l'une des icônes de coin. Pour modifier la position de l'image, utilisez l'icône qui apparaît si vous placez le curseur de votre souris sur l'image. Faites glisser l'image à la position nécessaire sans relâcher le bouton de la souris. Lorsque vous déplacez l'image, des lignes de guidage s'affichent pour vous aider à positionner l'objet sur la page avec précision (si un style d'habillage autre que aligné est sélectionné). Pour faire pivoter l'image, placez le curseur de la souris sur la poignée de rotation ronde et faites-la glisser vers la droite ou la gauche. Pour limiter la rotation de l'angle à des incréments de 15 degrés, maintenez la touche Maj enfoncée. Note : la liste des raccourcis clavier qui peuvent être utilisés lorsque vous travaillez avec des objets est disponible ici. Ajuster les paramètres de l'image Certains paramètres de l'image peuvent être modifiés dans l'onglet Paramètres de l'image de la barre latérale droite. Pour l'activer, cliquez sur l'image et sélectionnez l'icône Paramètres de l'image à droite. Vous pouvez y modifier les paramètres suivants : Taille est utilisée pour afficher la Largeur et la Hauteur de l'image actuelle. Si nécessaire, vous pouvez restaurer la taille d'image par défaut en cliquant sur le bouton Taille par défaut. Le bouton Ajuster à la marge permet de redimensionner l'image, de sorte qu'elle occupe tout l'espace entre les marges gauche et droite de la page. Style d'habillage sert à sélectionner un des styles d'habillage - aligné sur le texte, carré, rapproché, au travers, haut et bas, devant le texte, derrière le texte (pour en savoir plus, consultez la section des paramètres avancés ci-dessous). Remplacer l’image sert à remplacer l'image actuelle et charger une autre À partir d'un fichier ou À partir d'une URL. Certains paramètres de l'image peuvent être également modifiés en utilisant le menu contextuel. Les options du menu sont les suivantes : Couper, Copier, Coller - les options nécessaires pour couper ou coller le texte / l'objet sélectionné et coller un passage de texte précedement coupé / copié ou un objet à la position actuelle du curseur. Organiser sert à placer l'image sélectionnée au premier plan, envoyer à fond, avancer ou reculer ainsi que grouper ou dégrouper des images pour effectuer des opérations avec plusieurs images à la fois. Pour en savoir plus sur l'organisation des objets, vous pouvez vous référer à cette page. Aligner sert à aligner le texte à gauche, au centre, à droite, en haut, au milieu, en bas. Pour en savoir plus sur l'alignement des objets, vous pouvez vous référer à cette page. Style d'habillage sert à sélectionner un des styles d'habillage - aligné sur le texte, carré, rapproché, au travers, haut et bas, devant le texte, derrière le texte - ou modifier le contour de l'habillage. L'option Modifier les limites du renvoi à la ligne n'est disponible qu'au cas où vous sélectionnez le style d'habillage autre que 'aligné sur le texte'. Faites glisser les points d'habillage pour personnaliser les limites. Pour créer un nouveau point d'habillage, cliquez sur la ligne rouge et faites-la glisser vers la position désirée. Taille par défaut sert à changer la taille actuelle de l'image ou rétablir la taille par défaut. Remplacer l’image sert à remplacer l'image actuelle et charger une autre À partir d'un fichier ou À partir d'une URL. Paramètres avancés sert à ouvrir la fenêtre 'Image - Paramètres avancés'. Lorsque l'image est sélectionnée, l'icône Paramètres de forme est également disponible sur la droite. Vous pouvez cliquer sur cette icône pour ouvrir l'onglet Paramètres de forme dans la barre latérale droite et ajuster le type de contour, la taille et la couleur ainsi que le type de forme en sélectionnant une autre forme dans le menu Modifier la forme automatique. La forme de l'image changera en conséquence. Pour modifier les paramètres avancés de l’image, cliquez sur celle-ci avec le bouton droit de la souris et sélectionnez Paramètres avancés du menu contextuel ou cliquez sur le lien Afficher les paramètres avancés de la barre latérale droite. La fenêtre des propriétés de l'image sera ouverte : L'onglet Taille comporte les paramètres suivants : Largeur et Hauteur - utilisez ces options pour modifier langeur / hauteur de l'image. Si le bouton Proportions constantes est cliqué(auquel cas il ressemble à ceci ), les proportions d'image originales sera gardées lors de la modification de la largeur/hauteur. Pour rétablir la taille par défaut de l'image ajoutée, cliquez sur le bouton Par défaut. L'onglet Habillage du texte contient les paramètres suivants : Style d'habillage - utilisez cette option pour changer la manière dont l'image est positionnée par rapport au texte : elle peut faire partie du texte (si vous sélectionnez le style 'aligné sur le texte') ou être contournée par le texte de tous les côtés (si vous sélectionnez l'un des autres styles). Aligné sur le texte - l'image fait partie du texte, comme un caractère, ainsi si le texte est déplacé, l'image est déplacée elle aussi. Dans ce cas-là les options de position ne sont pas accessibles. Si vous sélectionnez un des styles suivants, vous pouvez déplacer l'image indépendamment du texte et définir sa position exacte : Carré - le texte est ajusté autour des bords de l'image. Rapproché - le texte est ajusté sur le contour de l' image. Au travers - le texte est ajusté autour des bords de l'image et occupe l'espace vide à l'intérieur d'elle. Pour créer l'effet, utilisez l'option Modifier les limites du renvoi à la ligne du menu contextuel. Haut et bas - le texte est ajusté en haut et en bas de l'image. Devant le texte - l'image est affichée sur le texte. Derrière le texte - le texte est affiché sur l'image. Si vous avez choisi le style carré, rapproché, au travers, haut et bas, vous avez la possibilité de configurer des paramètres supplémentaires - Distance du texte de tous les côtés (haut, bas, droit, gauche). L'onglet Position n'est disponible qu'au cas où vous choisissez le style d'habillage autre que 'aligné sur le texte'. Il contient les paramètres suivants qui varient selon le type d'habillage sélectionné : La section Horizontal vous permet de sélectionner l'un des trois types de positionnement d'image suivants : Alignement (gauche, centre, droite) par rapport au caractère, à la colonne, à la marge de gauche, à la marge, à la page ou à la marge de droite, Position absolue mesurée en unités absolues, c.-à-d. Centimètres/Points/Pouces (selon l'option spécifiée dans l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés...) à droite du caractère, de la colonne, de la marge de gauche, de la marge, de la page ou de la marge de droite, Position relative mesurée en pourcentage par rapport à la marge gauche, à la marge, à la page ou à la marge de droite. La section Vertical vous permet de sélectionner l'un des trois types de positionnement d'image suivants : Alignement (haut, centre, bas) par rapport à la ligne, à la marge, à la marge inférieure, au paragraphe, à la page ou à la marge supérieure, Position absolue mesurée en unités absolues, c.-à-d. Centimètres/Points/Pouces (selon l'option spécifiée dans l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés...) sous la ligne, la marge, la marge inférieure, le paragraphe, la page la marge supérieure, Position relative mesurée en pourcentage par rapport à la marge, à la marge inférieure, à la page ou à la marge supérieure. Déplacer avec le texte détermine si l'image se déplace en même temps que le texte sur lequel elle est alignée. Chevauchement détermine si deux images sont fusionnées en une seule ou se chevauchent si vous les faites glisser les unes près des autres sur la page. L'onglet Texte de remplacement permet de spécifier un Titre et une Description qui sera lue aux personnes avec des déficiences cognitives ou visuelles pour les aider à mieux comprendre l'information de l'image." + "body": "Document Editor vous permet d'insérer des images aux formats populaires. Les formats d'image pris en charge sont les suivants : BMP, GIF, JPEG, JPG, PNG. Insérer une image Pour insérer une image dans votre document de texte, placez le curseur là où vous voulez insérer l'image, passez à l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur l'icône Imagede la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'une des options suivantes pour charger l'image : l'option Image à partir d'un fichier ouvre la fenêtre de dialogue standard pour sélectionner le fichier. Sélectionnez le fichier de votre choix sur le disque dur de votre ordinateur et cliquez sur le bouton Ouvrir l'option Image à partir d'une URL ouvre la fenêtre où vous pouvez saisir l'adresse Web de l'image et cliquer sur le bouton OK l'option Image provenant du stockage ouvrira la fenêtre Sélectionner la source de données. Sélectionnez une image stockée sur votre portail et cliquez sur le bouton OK après avoir ajouté l'image, vous pouvez modifier sa taille, ses propriétés et sa position. Déplacer et redimensionner des images Pour changer la taille de l'image, faites glisser les petits carreaux situés sur ses bords. Pour garder les proportions de l'image sélectionnée lors du redimensionnement, maintenez la touche Maj enfoncée et faites glisser l'une des icônes de coin. Pour modifier la position de l'image, utilisez l'icône qui apparaît si vous placez le curseur de votre souris sur l'image. Faites glisser l'image à la position nécessaire sans relâcher le bouton de la souris. Lorsque vous déplacez l'image, des lignes de guidage s'affichent pour vous aider à positionner l'objet sur la page avec précision (si un style d'habillage autre que aligné est sélectionné). Pour faire pivoter l'image, placez le curseur de la souris sur la poignée de rotation ronde et faites-la glisser vers la droite ou la gauche. Pour limiter la rotation de l'angle à des incréments de 15 degrés, maintenez la touche Maj enfoncée. Note : la liste des raccourcis clavier qui peuvent être utilisés lorsque vous travaillez avec des objets est disponible ici. Ajuster les paramètres de l'image Certains paramètres de l'image peuvent être modifiés dans l'onglet Paramètres de l'image de la barre latérale droite. Pour l'activer, cliquez sur l'image et sélectionnez l'icône Paramètres de l'image à droite. Vous pouvez y modifier les paramètres suivants : Taille est utilisée pour afficher la Largeur et la Hauteur de l'image actuelle. Si nécessaire, vous pouvez restaurer la taille d'image par défaut en cliquant sur le bouton Taille par défaut. Le bouton Ajuster à la marge permet de redimensionner l'image, de sorte qu'elle occupe tout l'espace entre les marges gauche et droite de la page.Le bouton Rogner permet de rogner l'image. Cliquez sur le bouton Rogner pour activer les poignées de recadrage qui apparaissent sur les coins de l'image et au milieu de chaque côté. Faites glisser manuellement les poignées pour définir la zone de recadrage. Vous pouvez déplacer le curseur de la souris sur la bordure de la zone de recadrage pour qu'il se transforme en icône et faire glisser la zone. Pour rogner un seul côté, faites glisser la poignée située au milieu de ce côté. Pour rogner simultanément deux côtés adjacents, faites glisser l'une des poignées d'angle. Pour rogner également deux côtés opposés de l'image, maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée lorsque vous faites glisser la poignée au milieu de l'un de ces côtés. Pour rogner également tous les côtés de l'image, maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée lorsque vous faites glisser l'une des poignées d'angle. Lorsque la zone de recadrage est définie, cliquez à nouveau sur le bouton Rogner, ou appuyez sur la touche Echap, ou cliquez n'importe où à l'extérieur de la zone de recadrage pour appliquer les modifications. Une fois la zone de recadrage sélectionnée, il est également possible d'utiliser les options Remplir et Ajuster disponibles dans le menu déroulant Rogner. Cliquez de nouveau sur le bouton Rogner et sélectionnez l'option de votre choix : Si vous sélectionnez l'option Remplir, la partie centrale de l'image originale sera conservée et utilisée pour remplir la zone de cadrage sélectionnée, tandis que les autres parties de l'image seront supprimées. Si vous sélectionnez l'option Ajuster, l'image sera redimensionnée pour correspondre à la hauteur ou à la largeur de la zone de recadrage. Aucune partie de l'image originale ne sera supprimée, mais des espaces vides peuvent apparaître dans la zone de recadrage sélectionnée. Rotation permet de faire pivoter l’image de 90 degrés dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre ou dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre, ainsi que de retourner l’image horizontalement ou verticalement. Cliquez sur l'un des boutons : pour faire pivoter l’image de 90 degrés dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre pour faire pivoter l’image de 90 degrés dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre pour retourner l’image horizontalement (de gauche à droite) pour retourner l’image verticalement (à l'envers) Style d'habillage sert à sélectionner un des styles d'habillage - aligné sur le texte, carré, rapproché, au travers, haut et bas, devant le texte, derrière le texte (pour en savoir plus, consultez la section des paramètres avancés ci-dessous). Remplacer l’image sert à remplacer l'image actuelle et charger une autre À partir d'un fichier ou À partir d'une URL. Certains paramètres de l'image peuvent être également modifiés en utilisant le menu contextuel. Les options du menu sont les suivantes : Couper, Copier, Coller - les options nécessaires pour couper ou coller le texte / l'objet sélectionné et coller un passage de texte précedement coupé / copié ou un objet à la position actuelle du curseur. Organiser sert à placer l'image sélectionnée au premier plan, envoyer à fond, avancer ou reculer ainsi que grouper ou dégrouper des images pour effectuer des opérations avec plusieurs images à la fois. Pour en savoir plus sur l'organisation des objets, vous pouvez vous référer à cette page. Aligner sert à aligner le texte à gauche, au centre, à droite, en haut, au milieu, en bas. Pour en savoir plus sur l'alignement des objets, vous pouvez vous référer à cette page. Style d'habillage sert à sélectionner un des styles d'habillage - aligné sur le texte, carré, rapproché, au travers, haut et bas, devant le texte, derrière le texte - ou modifier le contour de l'habillage. L'option Modifier les limites du renvoi à la ligne n'est disponible qu'au cas où vous sélectionnez le style d'habillage autre que 'aligné sur le texte'. Faites glisser les points d'habillage pour personnaliser les limites. Pour créer un nouveau point d'habillage, cliquez sur la ligne rouge et faites-la glisser vers la position désirée. Faire pivoter permet de faire pivoter l’image de 90 degrés dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre ou dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre, ainsi que de retourner l’image horizontalement ou verticalement. Rogner est utilisé pour appliquer l'une des options de rognage : Rogner, Remplir ou Ajuster. Sélectionnez l'option Rogner dans le sous-menu, puis faites glisser les poignées de recadrage pour définir la zone de rognage, puis cliquez à nouveau sur l'une de ces trois options dans le sous-menu pour appliquer les modifications. Taille par défaut sert à changer la taille actuelle de l'image ou rétablir la taille par défaut. Remplacer l’image sert à remplacer l'image actuelle et charger une autre À partir d'un fichier ou À partir d'une URL. Paramètres avancés sert à ouvrir la fenêtre 'Image - Paramètres avancés'. Lorsque l'image est sélectionnée, l'icône Paramètres de forme est également disponible sur la droite. Vous pouvez cliquer sur cette icône pour ouvrir l'onglet Paramètres de forme dans la barre latérale droite et ajuster le type de contour, la taille et la couleur ainsi que le type de forme en sélectionnant une autre forme dans le menu Modifier la forme automatique. La forme de l'image changera en conséquence. Pour modifier les paramètres avancés de l’image, cliquez sur celle-ci avec le bouton droit de la souris et sélectionnez Paramètres avancés du menu contextuel ou cliquez sur le lien Afficher les paramètres avancés de la barre latérale droite. La fenêtre des propriétés de l'image sera ouverte : L'onglet Taille comporte les paramètres suivants : Largeur et Hauteur - utilisez ces options pour modifier langeur / hauteur de l'image. Si le bouton Proportions constantes est cliqué(auquel cas il ressemble à ceci ), les proportions d'image originales sera gardées lors de la modification de la largeur/hauteur. Pour rétablir la taille par défaut de l'image ajoutée, cliquez sur le bouton Par défaut. L'onglet Rotation comporte les paramètres suivants : Angle - utilisez cette option pour faire pivoter l’image d'un angle exactement spécifié. Entrez la valeur souhaitée mesurée en degrés dans le champ ou réglez-la à l'aide des flèches situées à droite. Retourné - cochez la case Horizontalement pour retourner l’image horizontalement (de gauche à droite) ou la case Verticalement pour retourner l’image verticalement (à l'envers). L'onglet Habillage du texte contient les paramètres suivants : Style d'habillage - utilisez cette option pour changer la manière dont l'image est positionnée par rapport au texte : elle peut faire partie du texte (si vous sélectionnez le style 'aligné sur le texte') ou être contournée par le texte de tous les côtés (si vous sélectionnez l'un des autres styles). Aligné sur le texte - l'image fait partie du texte, comme un caractère, ainsi si le texte est déplacé, l'image est déplacée elle aussi. Dans ce cas-là les options de position ne sont pas accessibles. Si vous sélectionnez un des styles suivants, vous pouvez déplacer l'image indépendamment du texte et définir sa position exacte : Carré - le texte est ajusté autour des bords de l'image. Rapproché - le texte est ajusté sur le contour de l' image. Au travers - le texte est ajusté autour des bords de l'image et occupe l'espace vide à l'intérieur d'elle. Pour créer l'effet, utilisez l'option Modifier les limites du renvoi à la ligne du menu contextuel. Haut et bas - le texte est ajusté en haut et en bas de l'image. Devant le texte - l'image est affichée sur le texte. Derrière le texte - le texte est affiché sur l'image. Si vous avez choisi le style carré, rapproché, au travers, haut et bas, vous avez la possibilité de configurer des paramètres supplémentaires - Distance du texte de tous les côtés (haut, bas, droit, gauche). L'onglet Position n'est disponible qu'au cas où vous choisissez le style d'habillage autre que 'aligné sur le texte'. Il contient les paramètres suivants qui varient selon le type d'habillage sélectionné : La section Horizontal vous permet de sélectionner l'un des trois types de positionnement d'image suivants : Alignement (gauche, centre, droite) par rapport au caractère, à la colonne, à la marge de gauche, à la marge, à la page ou à la marge de droite, Position absolue mesurée en unités absolues, c.-à-d. Centimètres/Points/Pouces (selon l'option spécifiée dans l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés...) à droite du caractère, de la colonne, de la marge de gauche, de la marge, de la page ou de la marge de droite, Position relative mesurée en pourcentage par rapport à la marge gauche, à la marge, à la page ou à la marge de droite. La section Vertical vous permet de sélectionner l'un des trois types de positionnement d'image suivants : Alignement (haut, centre, bas) par rapport à la ligne, à la marge, à la marge inférieure, au paragraphe, à la page ou à la marge supérieure, Position absolue mesurée en unités absolues, c.-à-d. Centimètres/Points/Pouces (selon l'option spécifiée dans l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés...) sous la ligne, la marge, la marge inférieure, le paragraphe, la page la marge supérieure, Position relative mesurée en pourcentage par rapport à la marge, à la marge inférieure, à la page ou à la marge supérieure. Déplacer avec le texte détermine si l'image se déplace en même temps que le texte sur lequel elle est alignée. Chevauchement détermine si deux images sont fusionnées en une seule ou se chevauchent si vous les faites glisser les unes près des autres sur la page. L'onglet Texte de remplacement permet de spécifier un Titre et une Description qui sera lue aux personnes avec des déficiences cognitives ou visuelles pour les aider à mieux comprendre l'information de l'image." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertPageNumbers.htm", "title": "Insérer les numéros de page", "body": "Pour insérer des numéros de page dans votre document, passez à l'onglet Insérer de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur l'icône Modifier l'en-tête ou le pied de page de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'option Insérer le numéro de page du sous-menu, sélectionnez l'une des options suivantes : Pour mettre un numéro de page à chaque page de votre document, sélectionnez la position de numéro de page sur la page. Pour insérer un numéro de page à la position actuelle du curseur, sélectionnez l'option À la position actuelle. Pour insérer le nombre total de pages dans votre document (par ex. si vous souhaitez créer une saisie Page X de Y): placez le curseur où vous souhaitez insérer le nombre total de pages, cliquez sur l'icône Modifier l'en-tête ou le pied de page de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'option Insérer le nombre de pages. Pour modifier les paramètres de la numérotation des pages, double-cliquez sur le numéro de page ajouté, modifiez les paramètres actuels en utilisant la barre latérale droite : Définissez la Position des numéros de page ainsi que la position par rapport à la partie supérieure et inférieure de la page. Cochez la case Première page différente pour appliquer un numéro différent à la première page ou si vous ne voulez pas du tout ajouter le numéro. Utilisez la case Pages paires et impaires différentes pour insérer des numéros de page différents pour les pages paires et impaires. L'option Lier au précédent est disponible si vous avez déjà ajouté des sections dans votre document. Sinon, elle sera grisée. En outre, cette option est non disponible pour toute première section (c'est-à-dire quand un en-tête ou un pied qui appartient à la première section est choisi). Par défaut, cette case est cochée, de sorte que la numérotation unifiée est appliquée à toutes les sections. Si vous sélectionnez une zone d’en-tête ou de pied de page, vous verrez que сette zone est marquée par l'étiquette Identique au précédent. Décochez la case Lier au précédent pour utiliser la numérotation des pages différente pour chaque section du document, par exemple, pour commencer la numérotation de chaque section à 1. L'étiquette Identique au précédent sera indisponible. Pour retourner à l'édition du document, double-cliquez sur la zone de travail." }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertSymbols.htm", + "title": "Insérer des symboles et des caractères", + "body": "Que faire si vous avez besoin de symboles ou de caractères spéciaux qui ne sont pas sur votre clavier? Pour insérer de tels symboles dans votre documents, utilisez l’option Insérer un symbole et suivez ces étapes simples: Placez le curseur là où vous voulez insérer un symbole spécial, Basculez vers l’onglet Insérer de la barre d’outils supérieure. Cliquez sur Symbole, De la fenêtre Symbole qui apparaît sélectionnez le symbole approprié. Utilisez la section Plage pour trouvez rapidement le symbole nécessaire. Tous les symboles sont divisés en groupes spécifiques, par exemple, sélectionnez des «symboles monétaires» spécifiques si vous souhaitez insérer un caractère monétaire. Si ce caractère n’est pas dans le jeu, sélectionnez une police différente. Plusieurs d’entre elles ont également des caractères différents que ceux du jeu standard. Ou, entrez la valeur hexadécimale Unicode du symbole souhaité dans le champ Valeur hexadécimale Unicode. Ce code se trouve dans la carte des Caractères. Les symboles précédemment utilisés sont également affichés dans le champ des Caractères spéciaux récemment utilisés. Cliquez sur Insérer. Le caractère sélectionné sera ajouté au document. Insérer des symboles ASCII La table ASCII est utilisée pour ajouter des caractères. Pour le faire, maintenez la touche ALT enfoncée et utilisez le pavé numérique pour saisir le code de caractère. Remarque: utilisez le pavé numérique, pas les chiffres du clavier principal. Pour activer le pavé numérique, appuyez sur la touche verrouillage numérique. Par exemple, pour ajouter un caractère de paragraphe (§), maintenez la touche ALT tout en tapant 789, puis relâchez la touche ALT. Insérer des symboles à l’aide de la table des caractères Unicode Des caractères et symboles supplémentaires peuvent également être trouvés dans la table des symboles Windows. Pour ouvrir cette table, effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes: Dans le champ Rechercher, tapez « table de caractères » et ouvrez –la, Appuyez simultanément sur Win+R, puis dans la fenêtre ouverte tapez charmap.exe et cliquez sur OK. Dans la Table des Caractères ouverte, sélectionnez l’un des Jeux de caractères, Groupes et Polices. Ensuite, cliquez sur le caractère nécessaire, copiéz-les dans le presse-papier et collez-les au bon endroit du document." + }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertTables.htm", "title": "Insérer des tableaux", - "body": "Insérer un tableau Pour insérer un tableau dans le texte de votre document, placez le curseur à l'endroit où vous voulez insérer le tableau, passez à l'onglet Insérer de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur l'icône Insérer un tableau sur la la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez une des options pour créer le tableau : soit un tableau avec le nombre prédéfini de cellules (10 par 8 cellules maximum) Si vous voulez ajouter rapidement un tableau, il vous suffit de sélectionner le nombre de lignes (8 au maximum) et de colonnes (10 au maximum). soit un tableau personnalisé Si vous avez besoin d'un tableau de plus de 10 par 8 cellules, sélectionnez l'option Insérer un tableau personnalisé pour ouvrir la fenêtre et spécifiez le nombre nécessaire de lignes et de colonnes, ensuite cliquez sur le bouton OK. après avoir ajouté le tableau, vous pouvez modifier ses propriétés, sa taille et sa position. Pour redimensionner un tableau, placez le curseur de la souris sur la poignée dans son coin inférieur droit et faites-la glisser jusqu'à ce que la taille du tableau soit atteinte. Vous pouvez également modifier manuellement la largeur d'une certaine colonne ou la hauteur d'une ligne. Déplacez le curseur de la souris sur la bordure droite de la colonne de sorte que le curseur se transforme en flèche bidirectionnelle et faites glisser la bordure vers la gauche ou la droite pour définir la largeur nécessaire. Pour modifier manuellement la hauteur d'une seule ligne, déplacez le curseur de la souris sur la bordure inférieure de la ligne afin que le curseur devienne la flèche bidirectionnelle et déplacez la bordure vers le haut ou le bas. Pour déplacer une table, maintenez la poignée dans son coin supérieur gauche et faites-la glisser à l'endroit voulu dans le document. Sélectionnez un tableau ou une portion de tableau Pour sélectionner un tableau entier, cliquez sur la poignée dans son coin supérieur gauche. Pour sélectionner une certaine cellule, déplacez le curseur de la souris sur le côté gauche de la cellule nécessaire pour que le curseur devienne la flèche noire , puis cliquez avec le bouton gauche de la souris. Pour sélectionner une certaine ligne, déplacez le curseur de la souris sur la bordure gauche du tableau à côté de la ligne voulue pour que le curseur devienne la flèche noire horizontale , puis cliquez avec le bouton gauche de la souris. Pour sélectionner une certaine colonne, déplacez le curseur de la souris sur la bordure supérieure de la colonne voulue pour que le curseur se transforme en flèche noire dirigée vers le bas , puis cliquez avec le bouton gauche de la souris. Il est également possible de sélectionner une cellule, une ligne, une colonne ou un tableau à l'aide des options du menu contextuel ou de la section Lignes et colonnes de la barre latérale droite. Ajuster les paramètres du tableau Certaines paramètres du tableau ainsi que sa structure peuvent être modifiés à l'aide du menu contextuel. Les options du menu sont les suivantes : Couper, Copier, Coller - les options nécessaires pour couper ou coller le texte / l'objet sélectionné et coller un passage de texte précedement coupé / copié ou un objet à la position actuelle du curseur. Sélectionner sert à sélectionner une ligne, une colonne, une cellule ou un tableau. Insérer sert à insérer une ligne au-dessus ou en dessous de la ligne où le curseur est placé ainsi qu'insérer une colonne à gauche ou à droite de la сolonne à la position actuelle du curseur. Supprimer sert à supprimer une ligne, une colonne ou un tableau. Fusionner les cellules est disponible si deux ou plusieurs cellules sont sélectionnées et est utilisé pour les fusionner. Fractionner la cellule... sert à ouvrir la fenêtre où vous pouvez sélectionner le nombre nécessaire de colonnes et de lignes de la cellule qui doit être divisée. Distribuer les lignes est utilisé pour ajuster les cellules sélectionnées afin qu'elles aient la même hauteur sans changer la hauteur globale du tableau. Distribuer les colonnes est utilisé pour ajuster les cellules sélectionnées afin qu'elles aient la même largeur sans modifier la largeur globale du tableau. Alignement vertical de cellule sert à aligner le texte en haut, au centre ou en bas de la cellule sélectionnée. Orientation du texte - sert à modifier l'orientation du texte dans une cellule. Vous pouvez placer le texte horisontallement, verticallement de haut en bas (Rotation 90°), ou verticcalement de bas en haut (Rotation 270°). Paramètres avancés du tableau sert à ouvrir la fenêtre 'Tableau - Paramètres avancés'. Lien hypertexte sert à insérer un lien hypertexte. Paramètres avancés du paragraphe- sert à ouvrir la fenêtre 'Paragraphe - Paramètres avancés'. Vous pouvez également modifier les propriétés du tableau en utilisant la barre latérale droite : Lignes et Colonnes servent à sélectionner les parties du tableau à souligner. Pour les lignes : En-tête - pour souligner la première ligne Total - pour souligner la dernière ligne À bandes - pour souligner chaque deuxième ligne Pour les colonnes : Premier - pour souligner la première colonne Dernier - pour souligner la dernière colonne À bandes - pour souligner chaque deuxième colonne Sélectionner à partir d'un modèle sert à choisir un modèle de tableau à partir de ceux qui sont disponibles. Style des bordures sert à sélectionner la taille de la bordure, la couleur, le style ainsi que la couleur d'arrière-plan. Lignes & colonnes sert à effectuer certaines opérations avec le tableau : sélectionner, supprimer, insérer des lignes et des colonnes, fusionner des cellules, fractionner une cellule. Taille de cellule est utilisée pour ajuster la largeur et la hauteur de la cellule actuellement sélectionnée. Dans cette section, vous pouvez également Distribuer les lignes afin que toutes les cellules sélectionnées aient la même hauteur ou Distribuer les colonnes de sorte que toutes les cellules sélectionnées aient la même largeur. Répéter en haut de chaque page en tant que ligne d'en-tête sert à insérer la même rangée d'en-tête en haut de chaque page dans les tableaux longs. Afficher les paramètres avancés sert à ouvrir la fenêtre 'Tableau - Paramètres avancés'. Pour modifier les paramètres du tableau avancés, cliquez sur le tableau avec le clic droit de la souris et sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés du tableau du menu contextuel ou utilisez le lien Afficher les paramètres avancés sur la barre latérale droite. La fenêtre Propriétés du tableau s'ouvre : L'onglet Tableau permet de modifier les paramètres de tout le tableau. La section Taille du tableau contient les paramètres suivants : Largeur - par défaut, la largeur du tableau est ajustée automatiquement à la largeur de la page, c-à-d le tableau occupe tout l'espace entre la marge gauche et la marge droite de la page. Vous pouvez cocher cette case et spécifier la largeur du tableau manuellement. Mesure en - permet de définir la largeur du tableau en unités absolues c-à-d Centimètres/Points/Pouces (selon l'option choisie dans l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés... tab) ou en Pour cent de la largeur totale de la page.Remarque: vous pouvez aussi ajuster la taille du tableau manuellement en changeant la hauteur des lignes et la largeur des colonnes. Déplacez le curseur de la souris sur la bordure de la ligne/ de la colonne jusqu'à ce qu'elle se transforme en flèche bidirectionnelle et faites glisser la bordure. Vous pouvez aussi utiliser les marqueurs sur la règle horizontale pour changer la largeur de la colonne et les marqueurs sur la règle verticale pour modifier la hauteur de la ligne. Redimensionner automatiquement pour ajuster au contenu - permet de changer automatiquement la largeur de chaque colonne selon le texte dans ses cellules. La section Marges des cellules par défaut permet de changer l'espace entre le texte dans les cellules et la bordure de la cellule utilisé par défaut. La section Options permet de modifier les paramètres suivants : Espacement entre les cellules - l'espacement des cellules qui sera rempli par la couleur de l'Arrière-plan de tableau. L'onglet Cellule permet de modifier les paramètres des cellules individuelles. D'abord vous devez sélectionner la cellule à appliquer les modifications ou sélectionner le tableau à modifier les propriétés de toutes ses cellules. La section Taille de la cellule contient les paramètres suivants : Largeur préférée - permet de définir la largeur de la cellule par défaut. C'est la taille à laquelle la cellule essaie de correspondre, mais dans certains cas ce n'est pas possible se s'adapter à cette valeur exacte. Par exemple, si le texte dans une cellule dépasse la largeur spécifiée, il sera rompu par la ligne suivante de sorte que la largeur de cellule préférée reste intacte, mais si vous insérez une nouvelle colonne, la largeur préférée sera réduite. Mesure en - permet de définir la largeur de la cellule en unités absolues c-à-d Centimètres/Points/Pouces (selon l'option spécifiée dans l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés...) ou en Pour cent de la largeur totale du tableau.Remarque : vous pouvez aussi définir la largeur de la cellule manuellement. Pour rendre une cellule plus large ou plus étroite dans une colonne, sélectionnez la cellule nécessaire et déplacez le curseur de la souris sur sa bordure droite jusqu'à ce qu'elle se transforme en flèche bidirectionnelle, puis faites glisser la bordure. Pour modifier la largeur de toutes les cellules d'une colonne, utilisez les marqueurs sur la règle horizontale pour modifier la largeur de la colonne. La section Marges de la cellule permet d'ajuster l'espace entre le texte dans les cellules et la bordure de la cellule. Par défaut, les valeurs standard sont utilisées (les valeurs par défaut peuvent être modifiées également en utilisant l'onglet Tableau), mais vous pouvez désactiver l'option Utiliser marges par défaut et entrer les valeurs nécessaires manuellement. La section Option de la cellule permet de modifier le paramètre suivant : L'option Envelopper le texte est activée par défaut. Il permet d'envelopper le texte dans une cellule qui dépasse sa largeur sur la ligne suivante en agrandissant la hauteur de la rangée et en gardant la largeur de la colonne inchangée. L'onglet Bordures & arrière-plan contient les paramètres suivants: Les paramètres de la Bordure (taille, couleur, présence ou absence) - définissez la taille de la bordure, sélectionnez sa couleur et choisissez la façon d'affichage dans les cellules.Remarque : si vous choisissez de ne pas afficher les bordures du tableau en cliquant sur le bouton ou en désélectionnant toutes les bordures manuellement sur le diagramme, les bordures seront indiquées par une ligne pointillée. Pour les faire disparaître, cliquez sur l'icône Caractères non imprimables sur la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Bordures du tableau cachées. Fond de la cellule - la couleur d'arrière plan dans les cellules (disponible uniquement si une ou plusieurs cellules sont sélectionnées ou l'option Espacement entre les cellules est sélectionnée dans l'onglet Tableau ). Fond du tableau - la couleur d'arrière plan du tableau ou le fond de l'espacement entre les cellules dans le cas où l'option Espacement entre les cellules est chosie dans l'onglet Tableau. L'onglet Position du tableau est disponible uniquement si l'option Flottant de l'onglet Habillage du texte est sélectionnée et contient les paramètres suivants : Horizontal sert à régler l'alignment du tableau (à gauche, au centre, à droite) par rapport à la marge, la page ou le texte aussi bien que la position à droite de la marge, la page ou le texte. Vertical sert à régler l'alignment du tableau (à gauche, au centre, à droite) par rapport à la marge, la page ou le texte aussi bien que la position en dessous de la marge, la page ou le texte. La section Options permet de modifier les paramètres suivants : Déplacer avec le texte contrôle si la tableau se déplace comme le texte dans lequel il est inséré. Autoriser le chevauchement sert à déterminer si deux tableaux sont fusionnés en un seul grand tableau ou se chevauchent si vous les faites glisser les uns près des autres sur la page. L'onglet Habillage du texte contient les paramètres suivants : Style d'habillage du texte - Tableau aligné ou Tableau flottant. Utilisez l'option voulue pour changer la façon de positionner le tableau par rapport au texte : soit il sera une partie du texte ( si vous avez choisi le style aligné), soit il sera entouré par le texte de tous les côtés (si vous avez choisi le style flottant). Après avoir sélectionné le style d'habillage, les paramètres d'habillage supplémentaires peuvent être définis pour les tableaux alignés et flottants : Pour les tableaux alignés, vous pouvez spécifier l'Alignement du tableau et le Retrait à gauche. Pour les tableaux flottants, vous pouvez spécifier la distance du texte et la position du tableau dans l'onglet Position du tableau. L'onglet Texte de remplacement permet de spécifier un Titre et une Description qui sera lue aux personnes avec des déficiences cognitives ou visuelles pour les aider à mieux comprendre l'information du tableau." + "body": "Insérer un tableau Pour insérer un tableau dans le texte de votre document, placez le curseur à l'endroit où vous voulez insérer le tableau, passez à l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure, cliquez sur l'icône Insérer un tableau sur la la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez une des options pour créer le tableau : soit un tableau avec le nombre prédéfini de cellules (10 par 8 cellules maximum) Si vous voulez ajouter rapidement un tableau, il vous suffit de sélectionner le nombre de lignes (8 au maximum) et de colonnes (10 au maximum). soit un tableau personnalisé Si vous avez besoin d'un tableau de plus de 10 par 8 cellules, sélectionnez l'option Insérer un tableau personnalisé pour ouvrir la fenêtre et spécifiez le nombre nécessaire de lignes et de colonnes, ensuite cliquez sur le bouton OK. après avoir ajouté le tableau, vous pouvez modifier ses propriétés, sa taille et sa position. Pour redimensionner un tableau, placez le curseur de la souris sur la poignée dans son coin inférieur droit et faites-la glisser jusqu'à ce que la taille du tableau soit atteinte. Vous pouvez également modifier manuellement la largeur d'une certaine colonne ou la hauteur d'une ligne. Déplacez le curseur de la souris sur la bordure droite de la colonne de sorte que le curseur se transforme en flèche bidirectionnelle et faites glisser la bordure vers la gauche ou la droite pour définir la largeur nécessaire. Pour modifier manuellement la hauteur d'une seule ligne, déplacez le curseur de la souris sur la bordure inférieure de la ligne afin que le curseur devienne la flèche bidirectionnelle et déplacez la bordure vers le haut ou le bas. Pour déplacer une table, maintenez la poignée dans son coin supérieur gauche et faites-la glisser à l'endroit voulu dans le document. Sélectionnez un tableau ou une portion de tableau Pour sélectionner un tableau entier, cliquez sur la poignée dans son coin supérieur gauche. Pour sélectionner une certaine cellule, déplacez le curseur de la souris sur le côté gauche de la cellule nécessaire pour que le curseur devienne la flèche noire , puis cliquez avec le bouton gauche de la souris. Pour sélectionner une certaine ligne, déplacez le curseur de la souris sur la bordure gauche du tableau à côté de la ligne voulue pour que le curseur devienne la flèche noire horizontale , puis cliquez avec le bouton gauche de la souris. Pour sélectionner une certaine colonne, déplacez le curseur de la souris sur la bordure supérieure de la colonne voulue pour que le curseur se transforme en flèche noire dirigée vers le bas , puis cliquez avec le bouton gauche de la souris. Il est également possible de sélectionner une cellule, une ligne, une colonne ou un tableau à l'aide des options du menu contextuel ou de la section Lignes et colonnes de la barre latérale droite. Remarque : pour vous déplacer dans un tableau, vous pouvez utiliser des raccourcis clavier. Ajuster les paramètres du tableau Certaines paramètres du tableau ainsi que sa structure peuvent être modifiés à l'aide du menu contextuel. Les options du menu sont les suivantes : Couper, Copier, Coller - les options nécessaires pour couper ou coller le texte / l'objet sélectionné et coller un passage de texte précedement coupé / copié ou un objet à la position actuelle du curseur. Sélectionner sert à sélectionner une ligne, une colonne, une cellule ou un tableau. Insérer sert à insérer une ligne au-dessus ou en dessous de la ligne où le curseur est placé ainsi qu'insérer une colonne à gauche ou à droite de la сolonne à la position actuelle du curseur. Supprimer sert à supprimer une ligne, une colonne ou un tableau. Fusionner les cellules est disponible si deux ou plusieurs cellules sont sélectionnées et est utilisé pour les fusionner. Fractionner la cellule... sert à ouvrir la fenêtre où vous pouvez sélectionner le nombre nécessaire de colonnes et de lignes de la cellule qui doit être divisée. Distribuer les lignes est utilisé pour ajuster les cellules sélectionnées afin qu'elles aient la même hauteur sans changer la hauteur globale du tableau. Distribuer les colonnes est utilisé pour ajuster les cellules sélectionnées afin qu'elles aient la même largeur sans modifier la largeur globale du tableau. Alignement vertical de cellule sert à aligner le texte en haut, au centre ou en bas de la cellule sélectionnée. Orientation du texte - sert à modifier l'orientation du texte dans une cellule. Vous pouvez placer le texte horizontalement, verticalement de haut en bas (Rotation du texte vers le bas), ou verticalement de bas en haut (Rotation du texte vers le haut). Paramètres avancés du tableau sert à ouvrir la fenêtre 'Tableau - Paramètres avancés'. Lien hypertexte sert à insérer un lien hypertexte. Paramètres avancés du paragraphe- sert à ouvrir la fenêtre 'Paragraphe - Paramètres avancés'. Vous pouvez également modifier les propriétés du tableau en utilisant la barre latérale droite : Lignes et Colonnes servent à sélectionner les parties du tableau à souligner. Pour les lignes : En-tête - pour souligner la première ligne Total - pour souligner la dernière ligne À bandes - pour souligner chaque deuxième ligne Pour les colonnes : Premier - pour souligner la première colonne Dernier - pour souligner la dernière colonne À bandes - pour souligner chaque deuxième colonne Sélectionner à partir d'un modèle sert à choisir un modèle de tableau à partir de ceux qui sont disponibles. Style des bordures sert à sélectionner la taille de la bordure, la couleur, le style ainsi que la couleur d'arrière-plan. Lignes & colonnes sert à effectuer certaines opérations avec le tableau : sélectionner, supprimer, insérer des lignes et des colonnes, fusionner des cellules, fractionner une cellule. Taille de cellule est utilisée pour ajuster la largeur et la hauteur de la cellule actuellement sélectionnée. Dans cette section, vous pouvez également Distribuer les lignes afin que toutes les cellules sélectionnées aient la même hauteur ou Distribuer les colonnes de sorte que toutes les cellules sélectionnées aient la même largeur. Ajouter une formule permet d'insérer une formule dans la cellule de tableau sélectionnée. Répéter en haut de chaque page en tant que ligne d'en-tête sert à insérer la même rangée d'en-tête en haut de chaque page dans les tableaux longs. Afficher les paramètres avancés sert à ouvrir la fenêtre 'Tableau - Paramètres avancés'. Pour modifier les paramètres du tableau avancés, cliquez sur le tableau avec le clic droit de la souris et sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés du tableau du menu contextuel ou utilisez le lien Afficher les paramètres avancés sur la barre latérale droite. La fenêtre Propriétés du tableau s'ouvre : L'onglet Tableau permet de modifier les paramètres de tout le tableau. La section Taille du tableau contient les paramètres suivants : Largeur - par défaut, la largeur du tableau est ajustée automatiquement à la largeur de la page, c-à-d le tableau occupe tout l'espace entre la marge gauche et la marge droite de la page. Vous pouvez cocher cette case et spécifier la largeur du tableau manuellement. Mesure en - permet de définir la largeur du tableau en unités absolues c-à-d Centimètres/Points/Pouces (selon l'option choisie dans l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés... tab) ou en Pour cent de la largeur totale de la page.Remarque: vous pouvez aussi ajuster la taille du tableau manuellement en changeant la hauteur des lignes et la largeur des colonnes. Déplacez le curseur de la souris sur la bordure de la ligne/ de la colonne jusqu'à ce qu'elle se transforme en flèche bidirectionnelle et faites glisser la bordure. Vous pouvez aussi utiliser les marqueurs sur la règle horizontale pour changer la largeur de la colonne et les marqueurs sur la règle verticale pour modifier la hauteur de la ligne. Redimensionner automatiquement pour ajuster au contenu - permet de changer automatiquement la largeur de chaque colonne selon le texte dans ses cellules. La section Marges des cellules par défaut permet de changer l'espace entre le texte dans les cellules et la bordure de la cellule utilisé par défaut. La section Options permet de modifier les paramètres suivants : Espacement entre les cellules - l'espacement des cellules qui sera rempli par la couleur de l'Arrière-plan de tableau. L'onglet Cellule permet de modifier les paramètres des cellules individuelles. D'abord vous devez sélectionner la cellule à appliquer les modifications ou sélectionner le tableau à modifier les propriétés de toutes ses cellules. La section Taille de la cellule contient les paramètres suivants : Largeur préférée - permet de définir la largeur de la cellule par défaut. C'est la taille à laquelle la cellule essaie de correspondre, mais dans certains cas ce n'est pas possible se s'adapter à cette valeur exacte. Par exemple, si le texte dans une cellule dépasse la largeur spécifiée, il sera rompu par la ligne suivante de sorte que la largeur de cellule préférée reste intacte, mais si vous insérez une nouvelle colonne, la largeur préférée sera réduite. Mesure en - permet de définir la largeur de la cellule en unités absolues c-à-d Centimètres/Points/Pouces (selon l'option spécifiée dans l'onglet Fichier -> Paramètres avancés...) ou en Pour cent de la largeur totale du tableau.Remarque : vous pouvez aussi définir la largeur de la cellule manuellement. Pour rendre une cellule plus large ou plus étroite dans une colonne, sélectionnez la cellule nécessaire et déplacez le curseur de la souris sur sa bordure droite jusqu'à ce qu'elle se transforme en flèche bidirectionnelle, puis faites glisser la bordure. Pour modifier la largeur de toutes les cellules d'une colonne, utilisez les marqueurs sur la règle horizontale pour modifier la largeur de la colonne. La section Marges de la cellule permet d'ajuster l'espace entre le texte dans les cellules et la bordure de la cellule. Par défaut, les valeurs standard sont utilisées (les valeurs par défaut peuvent être modifiées également en utilisant l'onglet Tableau), mais vous pouvez désactiver l'option Utiliser marges par défaut et entrer les valeurs nécessaires manuellement. La section Option de la cellule permet de modifier le paramètre suivant : L'option Envelopper le texte est activée par défaut. Il permet d'envelopper le texte dans une cellule qui dépasse sa largeur sur la ligne suivante en agrandissant la hauteur de la rangée et en gardant la largeur de la colonne inchangée. L'onglet Bordures & arrière-plan contient les paramètres suivants: Les paramètres de la Bordure (taille, couleur, présence ou absence) - définissez la taille de la bordure, sélectionnez sa couleur et choisissez la façon d'affichage dans les cellules.Remarque : si vous choisissez de ne pas afficher les bordures du tableau en cliquant sur le bouton ou en désélectionnant toutes les bordures manuellement sur le diagramme, les bordures seront indiquées par une ligne pointillée. Pour les faire disparaître, cliquez sur l'icône Caractères non imprimables sur la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Bordures du tableau cachées. Fond de la cellule - la couleur d'arrière plan dans les cellules (disponible uniquement si une ou plusieurs cellules sont sélectionnées ou l'option Espacement entre les cellules est sélectionnée dans l'onglet Tableau ). Fond du tableau - la couleur d'arrière plan du tableau ou le fond de l'espacement entre les cellules dans le cas où l'option Espacement entre les cellules est chosie dans l'onglet Tableau. L'onglet Position du tableau est disponible uniquement si l'option Flottant de l'onglet Habillage du texte est sélectionnée et contient les paramètres suivants : Horizontal sert à régler l'alignment du tableau (à gauche, au centre, à droite) par rapport à la marge, la page ou le texte aussi bien que la position à droite de la marge, la page ou le texte. Vertical sert à régler l'alignment du tableau (à gauche, au centre, à droite) par rapport à la marge, la page ou le texte aussi bien que la position en dessous de la marge, la page ou le texte. La section Options permet de modifier les paramètres suivants : Déplacer avec le texte contrôle si la tableau se déplace comme le texte dans lequel il est inséré. Autoriser le chevauchement sert à déterminer si deux tableaux sont fusionnés en un seul grand tableau ou se chevauchent si vous les faites glisser les uns près des autres sur la page. L'onglet Habillage du texte contient les paramètres suivants : Style d'habillage du texte - Tableau aligné ou Tableau flottant. Utilisez l'option voulue pour changer la façon de positionner le tableau par rapport au texte : soit il sera une partie du texte ( si vous avez choisi le style aligné), soit il sera entouré par le texte de tous les côtés (si vous avez choisi le style flottant). Après avoir sélectionné le style d'habillage, les paramètres d'habillage supplémentaires peuvent être définis pour les tableaux alignés et flottants : Pour les tableaux alignés, vous pouvez spécifier l'Alignement du tableau et le Retrait à gauche. Pour les tableaux flottants, vous pouvez spécifier la distance du texte et la position du tableau dans l'onglet Position du tableau. L'onglet Texte de remplacement permet de spécifier un Titre et une Description qui sera lue aux personnes avec des déficiences cognitives ou visuelles pour les aider à mieux comprendre l'information du tableau." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertTextObjects.htm", "title": "Insérer des objets textuels", - "body": "Pour rendre votre texte plus explicite et attirer l'attention sur une partie spécifique du document, vous pouvez insérer une zone de texte (un cadre rectangulaire qui permet de saisir du texte) ou un objet Text Art (une zone de texte avec un style de police prédéfini et couleur qui permet d'appliquer certains effets de texte). Ajouter un objet textuel Vous pouvez ajouter un objet texte n'importe où sur la page. Pour le faire : passez à l'onglet Insérer de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez le type d'objet textuel désiré : Pour ajouter une zone de texte, cliquez sur l'icône Zone de texte dans la barre d'outils supérieure, puis cliquez à l'endroit où vous souhaitez insérer la zone de texte, maintenez le bouton de la souris enfoncé et faites glisser la bordure de la zone de texte pour spécifier sa taille. Lorsque vous relâchez le bouton de la souris, le point d'insertion apparaîtra dans la zone de texte ajoutée, vous permettant d'entrer votre texte.Remarque : il est également possible d'insérer une zone de texte en cliquant sur l'icône Forme dans la barre d'outils supérieure et en sélectionnant la forme dans le groupe Formes de base. Pour ajouter un objet Text Art, cliquez sur l'icône Text Art dans la barre d'outils supérieure, puis cliquez sur le modèle de style souhaité - l'objet Text Art sera ajouté à la position actuelle du curseur. Sélectionnez le texte par défaut dans la zone de texte avec la souris et remplacez-le par votre propre texte. cliquez en dehors de l'objet texte pour appliquer les modifications et revenir au document. Le texte de l'objet textuel fait partie de celui-ci (ainsi si vous déplacez ou faites pivoter l'objet, le texte change de position lui aussi). Comme un objet texte inséré représente un cadre rectangulaire contenant du texte (les objets Text Art ont des bordures de zone de texte invisibles par défaut) et que ce cadre est une forme automatique simple, vous pouvez modifier aussi bien les propriétés de forme que de texte. Pour supprimer l'objet texte ajouté, cliquez sur la bordure de la zone de texte et appuyez sur la touche Suppr du clavier. Le texte dans la zone de texte sera également supprimé. Mettre en forme une zone de texte Sélectionnez la zone de texte en cliquant sur sa bordure pour pouvoir modifier ses propriétés. Lorsque la zone de texte est sélectionnée, ses bordures sont affichées en tant que lignes pleines (non pointillées). Pour redimensionner, déplacer, faire pivoter la zone de texte, utilisez les poignées spéciales sur les bords de la forme. Pour modifier le remplissage, le contour, le style d'habillage de la zone de texte ou remplacer la boîte rectangulaire par une forme différente, cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres de forme dans la barre latérale de droite et utilisez les options correspondantes. Pour aligner la zone de texte sur la page, organiser les zones de texte en fonction d'autres objets, modifier un style d'habillage ou accéder aux paramètres avancés de forme, cliquez avec le bouton droit sur la bordure de zone de texte et utilisez les options du menu contextuel. Pour en savoir plus sur l'organisation et l'alignement des objets, vous pouvez vous référer à cette page. Mettre en forme le texte dans la zone de texte Cliquez sur le texte dans la zone de texte pour pouvoir modifier ses propriétés. Lorsque le texte est sélectionné, les bordures de la zone de texte sont affichées en lignes pointillées. Remarque : il est également possible de modifier le formatage du texte lorsque la zone de texte (et non le texte lui-même) est sélectionnée. Dans ce cas, toutes les modifications seront appliquées à tout le texte dans la zone de texte. Certaines options de mise en forme de police (type de police, taille, couleur et styles de décoration) peuvent être appliquées séparément à une partie du texte sélectionnée précédemment. Pour faire pivoter le texte dans la zone de texte, cliquez avec le bouton droit sur le texte, sélectionnez l'option Direction du texte, puis choisissez l'une des options disponibles : Horizontal (sélectionné par défaut), Rotation à 90° (définit une direction verticale, de haut en bas) ou Rotation à 270° (définit une direction verticale, de bas en haut). Pour aligner le texte verticalement dans la zone de texte, cliquez avec le bouton droit sur le texte, sélectionnez l'option Alignement vertical, puis choisissez l'une des options disponibles : Aligner en haut, Aligner au centre ou Aligner en bas. Les autres options de mise en forme que vous pouvez appliquer sont les mêmes que celles du texte standard. Veuillez vous reporter aux sections d'aide correspondantes pour en savoir plus sur l'opération concernée. Vous pouvez : Aligner le texte horizontalement dans la zone de texte ajuster le type, la taille, la couleur de police, appliquer des styles de décoration et des préréglages de formatage définir l'interligne, modifier les retraits de paragraphe, ajuster les taquets pour le texte multiligne dans la zone de texte Insérer un lien hypertexte Vous pouvez également cliquer sur l'icône des Paramètres du Text Art dans la barre latérale droite et modifier certains paramètres de style. Modifier un style Text Art Sélectionnez un objet texte et cliquez sur l'icône des Paramètres Text Art dans la barre latérale de droite. Modifiez le style de texte appliqué en sélectionnant un nouveau Modèle dans la galerie. Vous pouvez également modifier le style de base en sélectionnant un type de police, une taille, etc. Changer le Remplissage de la police. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes : Couleur - sélectionnez cette option pour spécifier la couleur unie pour le remplissage de l'espace intérieur de la forme automatique sélectionnée. Cliquez sur la case de couleur et sélectionnez la couleur voulue à partir de l'ensemble de couleurs disponibles ou spécifiez n'importe quelle couleur de votre choix : Dégradé - sélectionnez cette option pour sélectionner deux couleurs et remplir les lettres d'une transition douce entre elles. Style - choisissez une des options disponibles : Linéaire (la transition se fait selon un axe horizontal/vertical ou en diagonale, sous l'angle de 45 degrés) ou Radial (la transition se fait autour d'un point, les couleurs se fondent progressivement du centre aux bords en formant un cercle). Direction - choisissez un modèle du menu. Si vous avez sélectionné le style Linéaire, vous pouvez choisir une des directions suivantes : du haut à gauche vers le bas à droite, du haut en bas, du haut à droite vers le bas à gauche, de droite à gauche, du bas à droite vers le haut à gauche, du bas en haut, du bas à gauche vers le haut à droite, de gauche à droite. Si vous avez choisi le style Radial, il n'est disponible qu'un seul modèle. Dégradé - cliquez sur le curseur de dégradé gauche au-dessous de la barre de dégradé pour activer la palette de couleurs qui correspond à la première couleur. Cliquez sur la palette de couleurs à droite pour sélectionner la première couleur. Faites glisser le curseur pour définir le point de dégradé c'est-à-dire le point quand une couleur se fond dans une autre. Utilisez le curseur droit au-dessous de la barre de dégradé pour spécifier la deuxième couleur et définir le point de dégradé. Remarque : si une de ces deux options est sélectionnée, vous pouvez toujours régler le niveau d'Opacité en faisant glisser le curseur ou en saisissant la valeur de pourcentage à la main. La valeur par défaut est 100%. Elle correspond à l'opacité complète. La valeur 0% correspond à la transparence totale. Pas de remplissage - sélectionnez cette option si vous ne voulez pas utiliser un remplissage. Ajustez la largeur, la couleur et le type du Contour de la police. Pour modifier la largeur du trait, sélectionnez une des options disponibles depuis la liste déroulante Taille. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes : 0,5 pt, 1 pt, 1,5 pt, 2,25 pt, 3 pt, 4,5 pt, 6 pt ou Pas de ligne si vous ne voulez pas utiliser de contour. Pour changer la couleur du contour, cliquez sur la case colorée et sélectionnez la couleur voulue. Pour modifier le type de contour, sélectionnez l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante correspondante (une ligne continue est appliquée par défaut, vous pouvez la remplacer par l'une des lignes pointillées disponibles). Appliquez un effet de texte en sélectionnant le type de transformation de texte nécessaire dans la galerie Transformation. Vous pouvez ajuster le degré de distorsion du texte en faisant glisser la poignée en forme de diamant rose." + "body": "Pour rendre votre texte plus explicite et attirer l'attention sur une partie spécifique du document, vous pouvez insérer une zone de texte (un cadre rectangulaire qui permet de saisir du texte) ou un objet Text Art (une zone de texte avec un style de police prédéfini et couleur qui permet d'appliquer certains effets de texte). Ajouter un objet textuel Vous pouvez ajouter un objet texte n'importe où sur la page. Pour le faire : passez à l'onglet Insertion de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez le type d'objet textuel voulu : Pour ajouter une zone de texte, cliquez sur l'icône Zone de texte de la barre d'outils supérieure, puis cliquez sur l'emplacement où vous souhaitez insérer la zone de texte, maintenez le bouton de la souris enfoncé et faites glisser la bordure pour définir sa taille. Lorsque vous relâchez le bouton de la souris, le point d'insertion apparaîtra dans la zone de texte ajoutée, vous permettant d'entrer votre texte.Remarque: il est également possible d'insérer une zone de texte en cliquant sur l'icône Forme dans la barre d'outils supérieure et en sélectionnant la forme dans le groupe Formes de base. Pour ajouter un objet Text Art, cliquez sur l'icône Text Art dans la barre d'outils supérieure, puis cliquez sur le modèle de style souhaité - l'objet Text Art sera ajouté à la position actuelle du curseur. Sélectionnez le texte par défaut dans la zone de texte avec la souris et remplacez-le par votre propre texte. cliquez en dehors de l'objet texte pour appliquer les modifications et revenir au document. Le texte dans l'objet textuel fait partie de celui ci (ainsi si vous déplacez ou faites pivoter l'objet textuel, le texte change de position lui aussi). Comme un objet textuel inséré représente un cadre rectangulaire (avec des bordures de zone de texte invisibles par défaut) avec du texte à l'intérieur et que ce cadre est une forme automatique commune, vous pouvez modifier aussi bien les propriétés de forme que de texte. Pour supprimer l'objet textuel ajouté, cliquez sur la bordure de la zone de texte et appuyez sur la touche Suppr du clavier. Le texte dans la zone de texte sera également supprimé. Mettre en forme une zone de texte Sélectionnez la zone de texte en cliquant sur sa bordure pour pouvoir modifier ses propriétés. Lorsque la zone de texte est sélectionnée, ses bordures sont affichées en tant que lignes pleines (non pointillées). Pour redimensionner, déplacer, faire pivoter la zone de texte, utilisez les poignées spéciales sur les bords de la forme. Pour modifier le remplissage, le contour, le style d'habillage de la zone de texte ou remplacer la boîte rectangulaire par une forme différente, cliquez sur l'icône Paramètres de forme dans la barre latérale de droite et utilisez les options correspondantes. pour aligner la zone de texte sur la page, organiser les zones de texte en fonction d'autres objets, pivoter ou retourner une zone de texte, modifier un style d'habillage ou accéder aux paramètres avancés de forme, cliquez avec le bouton droit sur la bordure de zone de texte et utilisez les options du menu contextuel. Pour en savoir plus sur l'organisation et l'alignement des objets, vous pouvez vous référer à cette page. Mettre en forme le texte dans la zone de texte Cliquez sur le texte dans la zone de texte pour pouvoir modifier ses propriétés. Lorsque le texte est sélectionné, les bordures de la zone de texte sont affichées en lignes pointillées. Remarque : il est également possible de modifier le formatage du texte lorsque la zone de texte (et non le texte lui-même) est sélectionnée. Dans ce cas, toutes les modifications seront appliquées à tout le texte dans la zone de texte. Certaines options de mise en forme de police (type de police, taille, couleur et styles de décoration) peuvent être appliquées séparément à une partie du texte précédemment sélectionnée. Pour faire pivoter le texte dans la zone de texte, cliquez avec le bouton droit sur le texte, sélectionnez l'option Direction du texte, puis choisissez l'une des options disponibles : Horizontal (sélectionné par défaut), Rotation du texte vers le bas (définit une direction verticale, de haut en bas) ou Rotation du texte vers le haut (définit une direction verticale, de bas en haut). Pour aligner le texte verticalement dans la zone de texte, cliquez avec le bouton droit sur le texte, sélectionnez l'option Alignement vertical, puis choisissez l'une des options disponibles : Aligner en haut, Aligner au centre ou Aligner en bas. Les autres options de mise en forme que vous pouvez appliquer sont les mêmes que celles du texte standard. Veuillez vous reporter aux sections d'aide correspondantes pour en savoir plus sur l'opération concernée. Vous pouvez : Aligner le texte horizontalement dans la zone de texte ajuster le type, la taille, la couleur de police, appliquer des styles de décoration et des préréglages de formatage définir l'interligne, modifier les retraits de paragraphe, ajuster les taquets pour le texte multiligne dans la zone de texte Insérer un lien hypertexte Vous pouvez également cliquer sur l'icône des Paramètres du Text Art dans la barre latérale droite et modifier certains paramètres de style. Modifier un style Text Art Sélectionnez un objet texte et cliquez sur l'icône des Paramètres Text Art dans la barre latérale de droite. Modifiez le style de texte appliqué en sélectionnant un nouveau Modèle dans la galerie. Vous pouvez également modifier le style de base en sélectionnant un type de police différent, une autre taille, etc. Changer le Remplissage de la police. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes : Couleur - sélectionnez cette option pour spécifier la couleur unie pour le remplissage de l'espace intérieur de la forme automatique sélectionnée. Cliquez sur la case de couleur et sélectionnez la couleur voulue à partir de l'ensemble de couleurs disponibles ou spécifiez n'importe quelle couleur de votre choix : Dégradé - sélectionnez cette option pour sélectionner deux couleurs et remplir les lettres d'une transition douce entre elles. Style - choisissez une des options disponibles : Linéaire (la transition se fait selon un axe horizontal/vertical ou en diagonale, sous l'angle de 45 degrés) ou Radial (la transition se fait autour d'un point, les couleurs se fondent progressivement du centre aux bords en formant un cercle). Direction - choisissez un modèle du menu. Si vous avez sélectionné le style Linéaire, vous pouvez choisir une des directions suivantes : du haut à gauche vers le bas à droite, du haut en bas, du haut à droite vers le bas à gauche, de droite à gauche, du bas à droite vers le haut à gauche, du bas en haut, du bas à gauche vers le haut à droite, de gauche à droite. Si vous avez choisi le style Radial, il n'est disponible qu'un seul modèle. Dégradé - cliquez sur le curseur de dégradé gauche au-dessous de la barre de dégradé pour activer la palette de couleurs qui correspond à la première couleur. Cliquez sur la palette de couleurs à droite pour sélectionner la première couleur. Faites glisser le curseur pour définir le point de dégradé c'est-à-dire le point quand une couleur se fond dans une autre. Utilisez le curseur droit au-dessous de la barre de dégradé pour spécifier la deuxième couleur et définir le point de dégradé. Remarque : si une de ces deux options est sélectionnée, vous pouvez toujours régler le niveau d'Opacité en faisant glisser le curseur ou en saisissant la valeur de pourcentage à la main. La valeur par défaut est 100%. Elle correspond à l'opacité complète. La valeur 0% correspond à la transparence totale. Pas de remplissage - sélectionnez cette option si vous ne voulez pas utiliser un remplissage. Ajustez la largeur, la couleur et le type du Contour de la police. Pour modifier la largeur du trait, sélectionnez une des options disponibles depuis la liste déroulante Taille. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes : 0,5 pt, 1 pt, 1,5 pt, 2,25 pt, 3 pt, 4,5 pt, 6 pt ou Pas de ligne si vous ne voulez pas utiliser de trait. Pour changer la couleur du contour, cliquez sur la case colorée et sélectionnez la couleur voulue. Pour modifier le type de contour, sélectionnez l'option voulue dans la liste déroulante correspondante (une ligne continue est appliquée par défaut, vous pouvez la remplacer par l'une des lignes pointillées disponibles). Appliquez un effet de texte en sélectionnant le type de transformation de texte voulu dans la galerie Transformation. Vous pouvez ajuster le degré de distorsion du texte en faisant glisser la poignée en forme de diamant rose." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/LineSpacing.htm", @@ -228,12 +248,12 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/OpenCreateNew.htm", "title": "Créer un nouveau document ou ouvrir un document existant", - "body": "Une fois que vous avez fini de travailler sur un document, vous pouvez immédiatement passer au document existant que vous avez récemment édité, créer un nouveau, ou revenir à la liste des documents existants. Pour créer un nouveau document, cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'option Créer nouveau. Pour ouvrir un document récemment édité dans Document Editor, cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'option Ouvrir récent, sélectionnez le document nécessaire dans la liste des documents récemment édités. Pour revenir à la liste des documents existants, cliquez sur l'icône Aller aux Documents sur le côté droit de l'en-tête de l'éditeur. Vous pouvez aussi passer à l'onglet Ficher de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Aller aux Documents." + "body": "Pour créer un nouveau document Dans la version en ligne cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'option Créer nouveau. Dans l’éditeur de bureau dans la fenêtre principale du programme, sélectionnez l'élément de menu Document dans la section Créer nouveau de la barre latérale gauche - un nouveau fichier s'ouvrira dans un nouvel onglet, une fois tous les changements nécessaires effectués, cliquez sur l'icône Enregistrer dans le coin supérieur gauche ou passez à l'onglet Fichier et choisissez l'élément de menu Enregistrer sous. dans la fenêtre du gestionnaire de fichiers, sélectionnez l'emplacement du fichier, spécifiez son nom, choisissez le format dans lequel vous souhaitez enregistrer le document (DOCX, Modèle de document (DOTX), ODT, OTT, RTF, TXT, PDF ou PDFA) et cliquez sur le bouton Enregistrer. Pour ouvrir un document existant Dans l’éditeur de bureau dans la fenêtre principale du programme, sélectionnez l'élément de menu Ouvrir fichier local dans la barre latérale gauche, choisissez le document nécessaire dans la fenêtre du gestionnaire de fichiers et cliquez sur le bouton Ouvrir. Vous pouvez également cliquer avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le document nécessaire dans la fenêtre du gestionnaire de fichiers, sélectionner l'option Ouvrir avec et choisir l'application nécessaire dans le menu. Si les fichiers de documents Office sont associés à l'application, vous pouvez également ouvrir les documents en double-cliquant sur le nom du fichier dans la fenêtre d'exploration de fichiers. Tous les répertoires auxquels vous avez accédé à l'aide de l'éditeur de bureau seront affichés dans la liste Dossiers récents afin que vous puissiez y accéder rapidement. Cliquez sur le dossier nécessaire pour sélectionner l'un des fichiers qui y sont stockés. Pour ouvrir un document récemment édité Dans la version en ligne cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'option Ouvrir récent, sélectionnez le document nécessaire dans la liste des documents récemment édités. Dans l’éditeur de bureau dans la fenêtre principale du programme, sélectionnez l'élément de menu Fichiers récents dans la barre latérale gauche, sélectionnez le document nécessaire dans la liste des documents récemment édités. Pour ouvrir le dossier dans lequel le fichier est stocké dans un nouvel onglet du navigateur de la version en ligne, dans la fenêtre de l'explorateur de fichiers de la version de bureau, cliquez sur l'icône Ouvrir l’emplacement du fichier à droite de l'en-tête de l'éditeur. Vous pouvez aussi passer à l'onglet Fichier sur la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionner l'option Ouvrir l’emplacement du fichier." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/PageBreaks.htm", "title": "Insérer des sauts de page", - "body": "En utilisant Document Editor, vous pouvez ajouter le saut de page pour commencer une nouvelle page et régler les options de pagination. Pour insérer un saut de page à la position actuelle du curseur, cliquez sur l'icône Sauts de page de l'onglet Insérer ou Disposition de la barre d'outils supérieure ou cliquez sur la flèche en regard de cette icône et sélectionnez l'option Insérer un saut de page dans le menu. Pour insérer un saut de page avant le paragraphe sélectionné c'est-à-dire pour commencer ce paragraphe en haut d'une nouvelle page : cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris et sélectionnez l'option Saut de page avant du menu contextuel, ou cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris, sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés du paragraphe du menu contextuel ou utilisez le lien Afficher les paramètres avancés sur la barre latérale droite et cochez la case Saut de page avant dans la fenêtre Paragraphe - Paramètres avancés ouverte. Pour garder les lignes solidaires de sorte que seuleument des paragraphes entiers seront placés sur la nouvelle page (c'est-à-dire il n'y aura aucun saut de page entre les lignes dans un seul paragraphe), cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris et sélectionnez l'option Lignes solidaires du menu contextuel, ou cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris, sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés du paragraphe du menu contextuel ou utilisez le lien Afficher paramètres avancés sur la barre latérale droite et cochez la case Lignes solidaires dans la fenêtre Paragraphe - Paramètres avancés ouverte. La fenêtre Paragraphe - Paramètres avancés vous permet de définir deux autres options de pagination : Paragraphes solidaires sert à empêcher l’application du saut de page entre le paragraphe sélectionné et celui-ci qui le suit. Éviter orphelines est sélectionné par défaut et sert à empêcher l’application d'une ligne (première ou dernière) d'un paragraphe en haut ou en bas d'une page." + "body": "Dans Document Editor, vous pouvez ajouter un saut de page pour commencer une nouvelle page, insérer une page blanche et régler les options de pagination. Pour insérer un saut de page à la position actuelle du curseur, cliquez sur l'icône Sauts de page de l'onglet Insertion ou Mise en page de la barre d'outils supérieure ou cliquez sur la flèche en regard de cette icône et sélectionnez l'option Insérer un saut de page dans le menu. Vous pouvez également utiliser la combinaison de touches Ctrl+Entrée. Pour insérer une page blanche à la position actuelle du curseur, cliquez sur l'icône Page vierge dans l'onglet Insérer de la barre d'outils supérieure. Cela insère deux sauts de page qui créent une page blanche. Pour insérer un saut de page avant le paragraphe sélectionné c'est-à-dire pour commencer ce paragraphe en haut d'une nouvelle page : cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris et sélectionnez l'option Saut de page avant du menu contextuel, ou cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris, sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés du paragraphe du menu contextuel ou utilisez le lien Afficher les paramètres avancés sur la barre latérale droite et cochez la case Saut de page avant dans la fenêtre Paragraphe - Paramètres avancés ouverte. Pour garder les lignes solidaires de sorte que seuleument des paragraphes entiers seront placés sur la nouvelle page (c'est-à-dire il n'y aura aucun saut de page entre les lignes dans un seul paragraphe), cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris et sélectionnez l'option Lignes solidaires du menu contextuel, ou cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris, sélectionnez l'option Paramètres avancés du paragraphe du menu contextuel ou utilisez le lien Afficher paramètres avancés sur la barre latérale droite et cochez la case Lignes solidaires dans la fenêtre Paragraphe - Paramètres avancés ouverte. La fenêtre Paragraphe - Paramètres avancés vous permet de définir deux autres options de pagination : Paragraphes solidaires sert à empêcher l’application du saut de page entre le paragraphe sélectionné et celui-ci qui le suit. Éviter orphelines est sélectionné par défaut et sert à empêcher l’application d'une ligne (première ou dernière) d'un paragraphe en haut ou en bas d'une page." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/ParagraphIndents.htm", @@ -243,13 +263,18 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm", "title": "Enregistrer / télécharger / imprimer votre document", - "body": "Par défaut, quand vous travaillez Document Editor enregistre automatiquement votre fichier toutes les 2 secondes visant à prévenir la perte des données au cas d'une fermeture inattendue de l'éditeur. Si vous co-éditez le fichier en mode Rapide, le minuteur récupère les mises à jour 25 fois par seconde et enregistre les modifications si elles ont été effectuées. Si vous co-éditez le fichier en mode Strict, les modifications sont automatiquement enregistrées toutes les 10 minutes. Si nécessaire, vous pouvez facilement changer la périodicité de l'enregistrement automatique ou même désactiver cette fonction sur la page Paramètres avancés. Pour enregistrer votre document actuel à la main, cliquez sur l'icône Enregistrer sur la barre d'outils supérieure, ou utilisez la combinaison des touches Ctrl+S, ou Passez à l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Enregistrer. Pour télécharger le document courant sur le disque dur de votre ordinateur, cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'option Télécharger comme, sélectionnez l'un des formats disponibles selon vos besoins : DOCX, PDF, TXT, ODT, RTF, HTML. Pour imprimer le document actif, cliquez sur l'icône Imprimer sur la barre d'outils supérieure, ou utilisez la combinaison des touches Ctrl+P, ou cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Imprimer. Après cela, un fichier PDF sera généré sur la base du document édité. Vous pouvez l'ouvrir et l'imprimer, ou l'enregistrer sur le disque dur de l'ordinateur ou sur un support amovible pour l'imprimer plus tard." + "body": "Enregistrement Par défaut, en ligne Document Editor enregistre automatiquement votre fichier toutes les 2 secondes afin de prévenir la perte des données en cas de fermeture inattendue de l'éditeur. Si vous co-éditez le fichier en mode Rapide, le minuteur récupère les mises à jour 25 fois par seconde et enregistre les modifications si elles ont été effectuées. Lorsque le fichier est co-édité en mode Strict, les modifications sont automatiquement sauvegardées à des intervalles de 10 minutes. Si nécessaire, vous pouvez facilement changer la périodicité de l'enregistrement automatique ou même désactiver cette fonction sur la page Paramètres avancés. Pour enregistrer manuellement votre document actuel dans le format et l'emplacement actuels, cliquez sur l'icône Enregistrer dans la partie gauche de l'en-tête de l'éditeur, ou utilisez la combinaison des touches Ctrl+S, ou cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Enregistrer. Remarque : dans la version de bureau, pour éviter la perte de données en cas de fermeture inattendue du programme, vous pouvez activer l'option Récupération automatique sur la page Paramètres avancés. Dans la version de bureau, vous pouvez enregistrer le document sous un autre nom, dans un nouvel emplacement ou format, cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'option Enregistrer sous..., sélectionnez l'un des formats disponibles selon vos besoins : DOCX, ODT, RTF, TXT, PDF, PDFA. Vous pouvez également choisir l'option Modèle de document (DOTX ou OTT). Téléchargement en cours Dans la version en ligne, vous pouvez télécharger le document résultant sur le disque dur de votre ordinateur, cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'option Télécharger comme, sélectionnez l'un des formats disponibles selon vos besoins : DOCX, PDF, ODT, TXT, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, HTML. Enregistrer une copie Dans la version en ligne, vous pouvez enregistrer une copie du fichier sur votre portail, cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'option Enregistrer la copie sous..., sélectionnez l'un des formats disponibles selon vos besoins : DOCX, PDF, ODT, TXT, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, HTML, sélectionnez un emplacement pour le fichier sur le portail et appuyez sur Enregistrer. Impression Pour imprimer le document actif, cliquez sur l'icône Imprimer dans la partie gauche de l'en-tête de l'éditeur, ou utilisez la combinaison des touches Ctrl+P, ou cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Imprimer. Dans la version de bureau, le fichier sera imprimé directement. Dans la version en ligne, un fichier PDF sera généré à partir du document. Vous pouvez l'ouvrir et l'imprimer, ou l'enregistrer sur le disque dur de l'ordinateur ou sur un support amovible pour l'imprimer plus tard. Certains navigateurs (par ex. Chrome et Opera) supportent l'impression directe." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/SectionBreaks.htm", "title": "Insérer les sauts de section", "body": "Les sauts de section vous permettent d'appliquer des mises en page et mises en formes différentes pour de certaines parties de votre document. Par exemple, vous pouvez utiliser des en-têtes et pieds de page, des numérotations des pages, des marges, la taille, l'orientation, ou le numéro de colonne individuels pour chaque section séparée. Remarque : un saut de section inséré définit la mise en page de la partie précédente du document. Pour insérer un saut de section à la position actuelle du curseur : cliquez sur l'icône Saut de section dans l'onglet Insérer ou Disposition de la barre d'outils supérieure, sélectionnez l'option Insérer un saut de section sélectionnez le type du saut de section nécessaire: Page suivante - pour commencer une nouvelle section sur la page suivante Page continue - pour commencer une nouvelle section sur la page actuelle Page paire - pour commencer une nouvelle section sur la page suivante paire Page impaire - pour commencer une nouvelle section sur la page suivante impaire Des sauts d'une section ajoutés sont indiqués dans votre document par un double trait pointillé: Si vous ne voyez pas de sauts de section insérés, cliquez sur l'icône de l'onglet Accueil sur la barre d'outils supérieure pour les afficher. Pour supprimer un saut de section, sélectionnez-le avec le souris et appuyez sur la touche Supprimer. Lorsque vous supprimez un saut de section, la mise en forme de cette section sera également supprimée, car un saut de section définit la mise en forme de la section précédente. La partie du document qui précède le saut de section supprimé acquiert la mise en forme de la partie qui la suive." }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/SetOutlineLevel.htm", + "title": "Configurer le niveau hiérarchique de paragraphe", + "body": "Le niveau de plan désigne le niveau de paragraphe dans la structure du document. Les niveaux suivants sont disponibles: Texte de base, Niveau 1- - Niveau 9. Le niveau hiérarchique peut être spécifié de différentes manières, par exemple, en utilisant des styles de titre: quand vous appliquez un style de titre (Titre 1 - Titre 9) à un paragraphe, il acquiert un niveau de plan correspondant. Si vous appliquez un niveau à un paragraphe à l’aide des paramètres avancés du paragraphe, le paragraphe acquiert le niveau de structure uniquement tendis que son style reste intact. Le niveau hiérarchique peut également être modifié à l’aide du panneau de Navigation à gauche en utilisant des options contextuels du menu. Pour modifier un niveau hiérarchique de paragraphe à l’aide des paramètres avancés du paragraphe: Cliquez droit sur le texte et choisissez l’option Paramètres avancés du paragraphe du menu contextuel ou utilisez l’option Afficher les paramètres avancés sur la barre latérale droite, Ouvrez la fenêtre Paragraphe - Paramètres avancés, passez à l’onglet Retraits et espacement, Sélectionnez le niveau hiérarchique nécessaire dans la liste du niveau hiérarchique. Cliquez sur le bouton OK pour appliquer les modifications." + }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/SetPageParameters.htm", "title": "Régler les paramètres de page", @@ -263,11 +288,11 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/UseMailMerge.htm", "title": "Utiliser le Publipostage", - "body": "Remarque : cette option est disponible uniquement pour les versions payantes. La fonctionnalité Publipostage est utilisée pour créer un ensemble de documents combinant un contenu commun provenant d'un document texte et des composants individuels (variables, tels que des noms, des messages d'accueil, etc.) extraits d'une feuille de calcul (d'une liste de clients par exemple). Elle peut se révéler utile si vous devez créer beaucoup de lettres personnalisées à envoyer aux destinataires. Pour commencer à travailler avec la fonctionnalité Publipostage, Préparer une source de données et la charger dans le document principal La source de données utilisée pour le publipostage doit être une feuille de calcul .xlsx stockée sur votre portail. Ouvrez une feuille de calcul existante ou créez-en une nouvelle et assurez-vous qu'elle réponde aux exigences suivantes.La feuille de calcul doit comporter une ligne d'en-tête avec les titres des colonnes, car les valeurs de la première cellule de chaque colonne désignent des champs de fusion (c'est-à-dire des variables que vous pouvez insérer dans le texte). Chaque colonne doit contenir un ensemble de valeurs réelles pour une variable. Chaque ligne de la feuille de calcul doit correspondre à un enregistrement distinct (c'est-à-dire un ensemble de valeurs appartenant à un destinataire donné). Pendant le processus de fusion, une copie du document principal sera créée pour chaque enregistrement et chaque champ de fusion inséré dans le texte principal sera remplacé par une valeur réelle de la colonne correspondante. Si vous devez envoyer le résultat par courrier électronique, la feuille de calcul doit également inclure une colonne avec les adresses électroniques des destinataires. Ouvrez un document texte existant ou créez-en un nouveau. Il doit contenir le texte principal qui sera le même pour chaque version du document fusionné. Cliquez sur l'icône Fusionner dans l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure. La fenêtre Sélectionner la source de données s'ouvre : Elle affiche la liste de toutes vos feuilles de calcul .xlsx stockées dans la section Mes documents. Pour naviguer entre les autres sections du module Documents, utilisez le menu dans la partie gauche de la fenêtre. Sélectionnez le fichier dont vous avez besoin et cliquez sur OK. Une fois la source de données chargée, l'onglet Paramètres de publipostage sera disponible dans la barre latérale droite. Vérifier ou modifier la liste des destinataires Cliquez sur le bouton Modifier la liste des destinataires en haut de la barre latérale droite pour ouvrir la fenêtre Fusionner les destinataires, où le contenu de la source de données sélectionnée est affiché. Ici, vous pouvez ajouter de nouvelles informations, modifier ou supprimer les données existantes, si nécessaire. Pour simplifier l'utilisation des données, vous pouvez utiliser les icônes situées au haut de la fenêtre : et pour copier et coller les données copiées et pour annuler et rétablir les actions et - pour trier vos données dans une plage sélectionnée de cellules dans l'ordre croissant ou décroissant - pour activer le filtre pour la plage de cellules sélectionnée précédemment ou supprimer le filtre appliqué - pour effacer tous les paramètres de filtre appliquésRemarque : pour en savoir plus sur l'utilisation des filtres, reportez-vous à la section Trier et filtrer les données de l'aide de Spreadsheet Editor. - pour rechercher une certaine valeur et la remplacer par une autre, si nécessaireRemarque : pour en savoir plus sur l'utilisation de l'outil Rechercher et remplacer, reportez-vous à la section Fonctions rechercher et remplacer de l'aide de Spreadsheet Editor. Une fois toutes les modifications nécessaires effectuées, cliquez sur le bouton Enregistrer et quitter. Pour annuler les modifications, cliquez sur le bouton Fermer. Insérer des champs de fusion et vérifier les résultats Placez le curseur de la souris dans le texte du document principal où vous souhaitez insérer un champ de fusion, cliquez sur le bouton Insérer un champ de fusion dans la barre latérale droite et sélectionnez le champ voulu dans la liste. Les champs disponibles correspondent aux données de la première cellule de chaque colonne de la source de données sélectionnée. Ajoutez tous les champs que vous voulez n'importe où dans le document. Activez l'option Mettre en surbrillance les champs de fusion dans la barre latérale droite pour rendre les champs insérés plus visibles dans le texte du document. Activez le sélecteur Aperçu des résultats dans la barre latérale droite pour afficher le texte du document avec les champs de fusion remplacés par les valeurs réelles de la source de données. Utilisez les boutons fléchés pour prévisualiser les versions du document fusionné pour chaque enregistrement. Pour supprimer un champ inséré, désactivez le mode Aperçu des résultats, sélectionnez le champ avec la souris et appuyez sur la touche Suppr du clavier. Pour remplacer un champ inséré, désactivez le mode Aperçu des résultats, sélectionnez le champ avec la souris, cliquez sur le bouton Insérer un champ de fusion dans la barre latérale de droite et choisissez un nouveau champ dans la liste. Spécifier les paramètres de fusion Sélectionnez le type de fusion. Vous pouvez lancer le publipostage ou enregistrer le résultat sous forme de fichier au format PDF ou Docx pour pouvoir l'imprimer ou le modifier ultérieurement. Sélectionnez l'option voulue dans la liste Fusionner vers : PDF - pour créer un document unique au format PDF qui inclut toutes les copies fusionnées afin que vous puissiez les imprimer plus tard Docx - pour créer un document unique au format Docx qui inclut toutes les copies fusionnées afin que vous puissiez éditer les copies individuelles plus tard Email - pour envoyer les résultats aux destinataires par emailRemarque : les adresses e-mail des destinataires doivent être spécifiées dans la source de données chargée et vous devez disposer d'au moins un compte de messagerie connecté dans le module Courrier de votre portail. Choisissez les enregistrements auxquels vous voulez appliquer la fusion : Tous les enregistrements (cette option est sélectionnée par défaut) - pour créer des documents fusionnés pour tous les enregistrements de la source de données chargée Enregistrement actuel - pour créer un document fusionné pour l'enregistrement actuellement affiché De ... À - pour créer des documents fusionnés pour une série d'enregistrements (dans ce cas, vous devez spécifier deux valeurs : le numéro du premier enregistrement et celui du dernier enregistrement dans la plage souhaitée)Remarque : la quantité maximale autorisée de destinataires est de 100. Si vous avez plus de 100 destinataires dans votre source de données, exécutez le publipostage par étapes : spécifiez les valeurs comprises entre 1 et 100, attendez la fin du processus de fusion, puis répétez l'opération en spécifiant les valeurs comprises entre 101 et N etc. . Terminer la fusion Si vous avez décidé d'enregistrer les résultats de la fusion sous forme de fichier, cliquez sur le bouton Télécharger pour stocker le fichier n'importe où sur votre PC. Vous trouverez le fichier téléchargé dans votre dossier Téléchargements par défaut. cliquez sur le bouton Enregistrer pour enregistrer le fichier sur votre portail. Dans la fenêtre Dossier de sauvegarde qui s'ouvre, vous pouvez modifier le nom du fichier et spécifier le dossier dans lequel vous souhaitez enregistrer le fichier. Vous pouvez également cocher la case Ouvrir le document fusionné dans un nouvel onglet pour vérifier le résultat une fois le processus de fusion terminé. Enfin, cliquez sur Enregistrer dans la fenêtre Dossier de sauvegarde. Si vous avez sélectionné l'option Email, le bouton Fusionner sera disponible dans la barre latérale droite. Après avoir cliqué dessus, la fenêtre Envoyer par Email s'ouvre : Dans la liste De, sélectionnez le compte de messagerie que vous souhaitez utiliser pour l'envoi du mail, si plusieurs comptes sont connectés dans le module Courrier. Dans la liste À, sélectionnez le champ de fusion correspondant aux adresses e-mail des destinataires, s'il n'a pas été sélectionné automatiquement. Entrez l'objet de votre message dans le champ Objet. Sélectionnez le format du mail dans la liste déroulante : HTML, Joindre en DOCX ou Joindre en PDF. Lorsque l'une des deux dernières options est sélectionnée, vous devez également spécifier le Nom du fichier pour les pièces jointes et entrer le Message (le texte qui sera envoyé aux destinataires). Cliquez sur le bouton Envoyer. Une fois l'envoi terminé, vous recevrez une notification à votre adresse e-mail spécifiée dans le champ De." + "body": "Remarque : cette option n'est disponible que dans la version en ligne. La fonctionnalité Publipostage est utilisée pour créer un ensemble de documents combinant un contenu commun provenant d'un document texte et des composants individuels (variables, tels que des noms, des messages d'accueil, etc.) extraits d'une feuille de calcul (d'une liste de clients par exemple). Elle peut se révéler utile si vous devez créer beaucoup de lettres personnalisées à envoyer aux destinataires. Pour commencer à travailler avec la fonctionnalité Publipostage, Préparer une source de données et la charger dans le document principal La source de données utilisée pour le publipostage doit être une feuille de calcul .xlsx stockée sur votre portail. Ouvrez une feuille de calcul existante ou créez-en une nouvelle et assurez-vous qu'elle réponde aux exigences suivantes.La feuille de calcul doit comporter une ligne d'en-tête avec les titres des colonnes, car les valeurs de la première cellule de chaque colonne désignent des champs de fusion (c'est-à-dire des variables que vous pouvez insérer dans le texte). Chaque colonne doit contenir un ensemble de valeurs réelles pour une variable. Chaque ligne de la feuille de calcul doit correspondre à un enregistrement distinct (c'est-à-dire un ensemble de valeurs appartenant à un destinataire donné). Pendant le processus de fusion, une copie du document principal sera créée pour chaque enregistrement et chaque champ de fusion inséré dans le texte principal sera remplacé par une valeur réelle de la colonne correspondante. Si vous devez envoyer le résultat par courrier électronique, la feuille de calcul doit également inclure une colonne avec les adresses électroniques des destinataires. Ouvrez un document texte existant ou créez-en un nouveau. Il doit contenir le texte principal qui sera le même pour chaque version du document fusionné. Cliquez sur l'icône Fusionner dans l'onglet Accueil de la barre d'outils supérieure. La fenêtre Sélectionner la source de données s'ouvre : Elle affiche la liste de toutes vos feuilles de calcul .xlsx stockées dans la section Mes documents. Pour naviguer entre les autres sections du module Documents, utilisez le menu dans la partie gauche de la fenêtre. Sélectionnez le fichier dont vous avez besoin et cliquez sur OK. Une fois la source de données chargée, l'onglet Paramètres de publipostage sera disponible dans la barre latérale droite. Vérifier ou modifier la liste des destinataires Cliquez sur le bouton Modifier la liste des destinataires en haut de la barre latérale droite pour ouvrir la fenêtre Fusionner les destinataires, où le contenu de la source de données sélectionnée est affiché. Ici, vous pouvez ajouter de nouvelles informations, modifier ou supprimer les données existantes, si nécessaire. Pour simplifier l'utilisation des données, vous pouvez utiliser les icônes situées au haut de la fenêtre : et pour copier et coller les données copiées et pour annuler et rétablir les actions et - pour trier vos données dans une plage sélectionnée de cellules dans l'ordre croissant ou décroissant - pour activer le filtre pour la plage de cellules sélectionnée précédemment ou supprimer le filtre appliqué - pour effacer tous les paramètres de filtre appliquésRemarque : pour en savoir plus sur l'utilisation des filtres, reportez-vous à la section Trier et filtrer les données de l'aide de Spreadsheet Editor. - pour rechercher une certaine valeur et la remplacer par une autre, si nécessaireRemarque : pour en savoir plus sur l'utilisation de l'outil Rechercher et remplacer, reportez-vous à la section Fonctions rechercher et remplacer de l'aide de Spreadsheet Editor. Une fois toutes les modifications nécessaires effectuées, cliquez sur le bouton Enregistrer et quitter. Pour annuler les modifications, cliquez sur le bouton Fermer. Insérer des champs de fusion et vérifier les résultats Placez le curseur de la souris dans le texte du document principal où vous souhaitez insérer un champ de fusion, cliquez sur le bouton Insérer un champ de fusion dans la barre latérale droite et sélectionnez le champ voulu dans la liste. Les champs disponibles correspondent aux données de la première cellule de chaque colonne de la source de données sélectionnée. Ajoutez tous les champs que vous voulez n'importe où dans le document. Activez l'option Mettre en surbrillance les champs de fusion dans la barre latérale droite pour rendre les champs insérés plus visibles dans le texte du document. Activez le sélecteur Aperçu des résultats dans la barre latérale droite pour afficher le texte du document avec les champs de fusion remplacés par les valeurs réelles de la source de données. Utilisez les boutons fléchés pour prévisualiser les versions du document fusionné pour chaque enregistrement. Pour supprimer un champ inséré, désactivez le mode Aperçu des résultats, sélectionnez le champ avec la souris et appuyez sur la touche Suppr du clavier. Pour remplacer un champ inséré, désactivez le mode Aperçu des résultats, sélectionnez le champ avec la souris, cliquez sur le bouton Insérer un champ de fusion dans la barre latérale de droite et choisissez un nouveau champ dans la liste. Spécifier les paramètres de fusion Sélectionnez le type de fusion. Vous pouvez lancer le publipostage ou enregistrer le résultat sous forme de fichier au format PDF ou Docx pour pouvoir l'imprimer ou le modifier ultérieurement. Sélectionnez l'option voulue dans la liste Fusionner vers : PDF - pour créer un document unique au format PDF qui inclut toutes les copies fusionnées afin que vous puissiez les imprimer plus tard Docx - pour créer un document unique au format Docx qui inclut toutes les copies fusionnées afin que vous puissiez éditer les copies individuelles plus tard Email - pour envoyer les résultats aux destinataires par emailRemarque : les adresses e-mail des destinataires doivent être spécifiées dans la source de données chargée et vous devez disposer d'au moins un compte de messagerie connecté dans le module Courrier de votre portail. Choisissez les enregistrements auxquels vous voulez appliquer la fusion : Tous les enregistrements (cette option est sélectionnée par défaut) - pour créer des documents fusionnés pour tous les enregistrements de la source de données chargée Enregistrement actuel - pour créer un document fusionné pour l'enregistrement actuellement affiché De ... À - pour créer des documents fusionnés pour une série d'enregistrements (dans ce cas, vous devez spécifier deux valeurs : le numéro du premier enregistrement et celui du dernier enregistrement dans la plage souhaitée)Remarque : la quantité maximale autorisée de destinataires est de 100. Si vous avez plus de 100 destinataires dans votre source de données, exécutez le publipostage par étapes : spécifiez les valeurs comprises entre 1 et 100, attendez la fin du processus de fusion, puis répétez l'opération en spécifiant les valeurs comprises entre 101 et N etc. . Terminer la fusion Si vous avez décidé d'enregistrer les résultats de la fusion sous forme de fichier, cliquez sur le bouton Télécharger pour stocker le fichier n'importe où sur votre PC. Vous trouverez le fichier téléchargé dans votre dossier Téléchargements par défaut. cliquez sur le bouton Enregistrer pour enregistrer le fichier sur votre portail. Dans la fenêtre Dossier de sauvegarde qui s'ouvre, vous pouvez modifier le nom du fichier et spécifier le dossier dans lequel vous souhaitez enregistrer le fichier. Vous pouvez également cocher la case Ouvrir le document fusionné dans un nouvel onglet pour vérifier le résultat une fois le processus de fusion terminé. Enfin, cliquez sur Enregistrer dans la fenêtre Dossier de sauvegarde. Si vous avez sélectionné l'option Email, le bouton Fusionner sera disponible dans la barre latérale droite. Après avoir cliqué dessus, la fenêtre Envoyer par Email s'ouvre : Dans la liste De, sélectionnez le compte de messagerie que vous souhaitez utiliser pour l'envoi du mail, si plusieurs comptes sont connectés dans le module Courrier. Dans la liste À, sélectionnez le champ de fusion correspondant aux adresses e-mail des destinataires, s'il n'a pas été sélectionné automatiquement. Entrez l'objet de votre message dans le champ Objet. Sélectionnez le format du mail dans la liste déroulante : HTML, Joindre en DOCX ou Joindre en PDF. Lorsque l'une des deux dernières options est sélectionnée, vous devez également spécifier le Nom du fichier pour les pièces jointes et entrer le Message (le texte qui sera envoyé aux destinataires). Cliquez sur le bouton Envoyer. Une fois l'envoi terminé, vous recevrez une notification à votre adresse e-mail spécifiée dans le champ De." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/ViewDocInfo.htm", "title": "Afficher les informations sur le document", - "body": "Pour accéder aux informations détaillées sur le document actuellement édité, cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Informations sur le document.... Informations générales Les informations sur le document comprennent le titre du document, l'auteur, l'emplacement, la date de création et les statistiques : le nombre de pages, de paragraphes, de mots, de symboles et de symboles avec des espaces. Remarque : Les éditeurs en ligne vous permettent de modifier le titre du document directement à partir de l'interface de l'éditeur. Pour ce faire, cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Renommer..., puis entrez le Nom de fichier voulu dans la nouvelle fenêtre qui s'ouvre et cliquez sur OK. Informations d'autorisation Remarque : cette option n'est pas disponible pour les utilisateurs disposant des autorisations en Lecture seule. Pour savoir qui a le droit d'afficher ou de modifier le document, sélectionnez l'option Droits d'accès... dans la barre latérale de gauche. Si vous avez l'accès complet à cette présentation, vous pouvez également changer les droits d'accès actuels en cliquant sur le bouton Changer les droits d'accès dans la section Personnes qui ont des droits. Historique des versions Remarque : cette option n'est pas disponible pour les comptes gratuits ou les utilisateurs ne disposant que des autorisations en lecture seule. Pour afficher toutes les modifications apportées à ce document, sélectionnez l'option Historique des versions dans la barre latérale de gauche. Il est également possible d'ouvrir l'historique des versions à l'aide de l'icône Historique des versions de l'onglet Collaboration de la barre d'outils supérieure. Vous verrez la liste des versions de ce document (changements majeurs) et des révisions (modifications mineures) avec l'indication de l'auteur de chaque version/révision et la date et l'heure de création. Pour les versions de document, le numéro de version est également spécifié (par exemple ver. 2). Pour savoir exactement quels changements ont été apportés à chaque version/révision, vous pouvez voir celle qui vous intéresse en cliquant dessus dans la barre latérale de gauche. Les modifications apportées par l'auteur de la version/révision sont marquées avec la couleur qui est affichée à côté du nom de l'auteur dans la barre latérale gauche. Vous pouvez utiliser le lien Restaurer sous la version/révision sélectionnée pour la restaurer. Pour revenir à la version actuelle du document, utilisez l'option Fermer l'historique en haut de la liste des versions. Pour fermer l'onglet Fichier et reprendre le travail sur votre document, sélectionnez l'option Retour au document." + "body": "Pour accéder aux informations détaillées sur le document actuellement édité, cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Informations sur le document.... Informations générales Les informations du document comprennent le titre du document, l'application avec laquelle le document a été créé et les statistiques : le nombre de pages, paragraphes, mots, symboles, symboles avec espaces. Dans la version en ligne, les informations suivantes sont également affichées : auteur, lieu, date de création. Remarque : Les éditeurs en ligne vous permettent de modifier le titre du document directement à partir de l'interface de l'éditeur. Pour ce faire, cliquez sur l'onglet Fichier de la barre d'outils supérieure et sélectionnez l'option Renommer..., puis entrez le Nom de fichier voulu dans la nouvelle fenêtre qui s'ouvre et cliquez sur OK. Informations d'autorisation Dans la version en ligne, vous pouvez consulter les informations sur les permissions des fichiers stockés dans le cloud. Remarque : cette option n'est pas disponible pour les utilisateurs disposant des autorisations en Lecture seule. Pour savoir qui a le droit d'afficher ou de modifier le document, sélectionnez l'option Droits d'accès... dans la barre latérale de gauche. Si vous avez l'accès complet à cette présentation, vous pouvez également changer les droits d'accès actuels en cliquant sur le bouton Changer les droits d'accès dans la section Personnes qui ont des droits. Historique des versions Dans la version en ligne, vous pouvez consulter l'historique des versions des fichiers stockés dans le cloud. Remarque : cette option n'est pas disponible pour les utilisateurs disposant des autorisations en Lecture seule. Pour afficher toutes les modifications apportées à ce document, sélectionnez l'option Historique des versions dans la barre latérale de gauche. Il est également possible d'ouvrir l'historique des versions à l'aide de l'icône Historique des versions de l'onglet Collaboration de la barre d'outils supérieure. Vous verrez la liste des versions de ce document (changements majeurs) et des révisions (modifications mineures) avec l'indication de l'auteur de chaque version/révision et la date et l'heure de création. Pour les versions de document, le numéro de version est également spécifié (par exemple ver. 2). Pour savoir exactement quels changements ont été apportés à chaque version/révision, vous pouvez voir celle qui vous intéresse en cliquant dessus dans la barre latérale de gauche. Les modifications apportées par l'auteur de la version/révision sont marquées avec la couleur qui est affichée à côté du nom de l'auteur dans la barre latérale gauche. Vous pouvez utiliser le lien Restaurer sous la version/révision sélectionnée pour la restaurer. Pour revenir à la version actuelle du document, utilisez l'option Fermer l'historique en haut de la liste des versions. Pour fermer l'onglet Fichier et reprendre le travail sur votre document, sélectionnez l'option Retour au document." } ] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/Contents.json b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/Contents.json new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a54379ed9 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/Contents.json @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ +[ + {"src": "ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm", "name": "Presentazione dell'interfaccia utente dell'Editor di Documenti", "headername": "Program Interface"}, + {"src": "ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm", "name": "Scheda File"}, + {"src": "ProgramInterface/HomeTab.htm", "name": "Scheda Home"}, + {"src": "ProgramInterface/InsertTab.htm", "name": "Scheda Inserisci"}, + {"src": "ProgramInterface/LayoutTab.htm", "name": "Scheda Layout di Pagina" }, + {"src": "ProgramInterface/ReferencesTab.htm", "name": "Scheda Riferimenti"}, + {"src": "ProgramInterface/ReviewTab.htm", "name": "Scheda Collaborazione"}, + {"src": "ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm", "name": "Scheda Plugin"}, + {"src": "UsageInstructions/OpenCreateNew.htm", "name": "Creare nuovo documento o aprire documento esistente", "headername": "Operazioni principali"}, + {"src": "UsageInstructions/CopyPasteUndoRedo.htm", "name": "Copiare/incollare testo, annullare/ripristinare azioni"}, + {"src": "UsageInstructions/ChangeColorScheme.htm", "name": "Change color scheme"}, + {"src": "UsageInstructions/SetPageParameters.htm", "name": "Impostare parametri di pagina", "headername": "Formattazione della pagina"}, + {"src": "UsageInstructions/NonprintingCharacters.htm", "name": "Visualizzare/nascondere caratteri non stampabili" }, + {"src": "UsageInstructions/SectionBreaks.htm", "name": "Inserire interruzioni di sezione" }, + {"src": "UsageInstructions/InsertHeadersFooters.htm", "name": "Inserire intestazioni e piè di pagina"}, + {"src": "UsageInstructions/InsertPageNumbers.htm", "name": "Inserire numeri di pagina"}, + { "src": "UsageInstructions/InsertFootnotes.htm", "name": "Inserire note a piè di pagina" }, + { "src": "UsageInstructions/InsertBookmarks.htm", "name": "Aggiungere segnalibri" }, + {"src": "UsageInstructions/AddWatermark.htm", "name": "Aggiungere una filigrana"}, + { "src": "UsageInstructions/AlignText.htm", "name": "Allineare testo nella riga o paragrafo", "headername": "Formattazione del paragrafo" }, + {"src": "UsageInstructions/BackgroundColor.htm", "name": "Impostare un livello di struttura del paragarfo"}, + {"src": "UsageInstructions/SetOutlineLevel.htm", "name": "Selezionare colore sfondo per un paragrafo"}, + {"src": "UsageInstructions/ParagraphIndents.htm", "name": "Modificare rientri di paragrafo"}, + {"src": "UsageInstructions/LineSpacing.htm", "name": "Impostare interlinea di paragrafo"}, + {"src": "UsageInstructions/PageBreaks.htm", "name": "Inserire interruzione di pagina"}, + {"src": "UsageInstructions/AddBorders.htm", "name": "Aggiungere bordi"}, + {"src": "UsageInstructions/SetTabStops.htm", "name": "Impostare punti di tabulazione"}, + {"src": "UsageInstructions/CreateLists.htm", "name": "Creare elenchi"}, + {"src": "UsageInstructions/FormattingPresets.htm", "name": "Applicare preset di formattazione", "headername": "Formattazione del testo"}, + {"src": "UsageInstructions/FontTypeSizeColor.htm", "name": "Impostare tipo di carattere, dimensione e colore"}, + {"src": "UsageInstructions/DecorationStyles.htm", "name": "Applicare stili di decorazione"}, + {"src": "UsageInstructions/CopyClearFormatting.htm", "name": "Copiare/cancellare formattazione" }, + {"src": "UsageInstructions/AddHyperlinks.htm", "name": "Aggiungere collegamento ipertestuale"}, + {"src": "UsageInstructions/InsertDropCap.htm", "name": "Inserire un capolettera"}, + { "src": "UsageInstructions/InsertTables.htm", "name": "Inserire tabelle", "headername": "Operazioni sugli oggetti" }, + {"src": "UsageInstructions/AddFormulasInTables.htm", "name": "Use formulas in tables"}, + {"src": "UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm", "name": "Inserire immagini"}, + {"src": "UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm", "name": "Inserire forme"}, + {"src": "UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm", "name": "Inserire grafici" }, + { "src": "UsageInstructions/InsertTextObjects.htm", "name": "Insert text objects" }, + { "src": "UsageInstructions/AddCaption.htm", "name": "Aggiungere una didascalia" }, + { "src": "UsageInstructions/InsertSymbols.htm", "name": "Inserire simboli e caratteri" }, + {"src": "UsageInstructions/AlignArrangeObjects.htm", "name": "Align and arrange objects on a page" }, + {"src": "UsageInstructions/ChangeWrappingStyle.htm", "name": "Change wrapping style" }, + {"src": "UsageInstructions/InsertContentControls.htm", "name": "Insert content controls" }, + {"src": "UsageInstructions/CreateTableOfContents.htm", "name": "Create table of contents" }, + {"src": "UsageInstructions/UseMailMerge.htm", "name": "Use mail merge", "headername": "Unione di stampa"}, + {"src": "UsageInstructions/InsertEquation.htm", "name": "Insert equations", "headername": "Equazioni matematiche" }, + {"src": "HelpfulHints/CollaborativeEditing.htm", "name": "Modifica collaborativa dei documenti", "headername": "Modifica congiunta dei documenti"}, + { "src": "HelpfulHints/Review.htm", "name": "Document Review" }, + {"src": "HelpfulHints/Comparison.htm", "name": "Compare documents"}, + {"src": "UsageInstructions/ViewDocInfo.htm", "name": "Visualizzare informazioni sul documento", "headername": "Strumenti e impostazioni"}, + {"src": "UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm", "name": "Salvare/scaricare/stampare documento" }, + {"src": "HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm", "name": "Impostazioni avanzate di Document Editor"}, + {"src": "HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm", "name": "Visualizzazione e navigazione"}, + {"src": "HelpfulHints/Search.htm", "name": "Ricerca e sostituzione"}, + {"src": "HelpfulHints/SpellChecking.htm", "name": "Controllo ortografia"}, + {"src": "HelpfulHints/About.htm", "name": "Informazioni su Document Editor", "headername": "Suggerimenti utili"}, + {"src": "HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm", "name": "Formati di documenti elettronici supportati" }, + {"src": "HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm", "name": "Tasti di scelta rapida"} +] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/HelpfulHints/About.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/HelpfulHints/About.htm new file mode 100644 index 000000000..078ddd7bf --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/HelpfulHints/About.htm @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ + + + + About Document Editor + + + + + + + +
                                                              +
                                                              + +
                                                              +

                                                              About Document Editor

                                                              +

                                                              Document Editor is an online application that lets you look through + and edit documents directly in your browser.

                                                              +

                                                              Using Document Editor, you can perform various editing operations like in any desktop editor, + print the edited documents keeping all the formatting details or download them onto your computer hard disk drive + as DOCX, PDF, ODT, TXT, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, HTML files.

                                                              +

                                                              To view the current software version and licensor details in the online version, click the About icon icon at the left sidebar. To view the current software version and licensor details in the desktop version, select the About menu item at the left sidebar of the main program window.

                                                              +
                                                              + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm new file mode 100644 index 000000000..03e1ad00e --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ + + + + Advanced Settings of Document Editor + + + + + + + +
                                                              +
                                                              + +
                                                              +

                                                              Advanced Settings of Document Editor

                                                              +

                                                              Document Editor lets you change its advanced settings. To access them, open the File tab at the top toolbar and select the Advanced Settings... option. You can also click the View settings View settings icon icon on the right side of the editor header and select the Advanced settings option.

                                                              +

                                                              The advanced settings are:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • Commenting Display is used to turn on/off the live commenting option: +
                                                                  +
                                                                • Turn on display of the comments - if you disable this feature, the commented passages will be highlighted only if you click the Comments Comments icon icon at the left sidebar.
                                                                • +
                                                                • Turn on display of the resolved comments - this feature is disabled by default so that the resolved comments were hidden in the document text. You can view such comments only if you click the Comments Comments icon icon at the left sidebar. Enable this option if you want to display resolved comments in the document text.
                                                                • +
                                                                +
                                                              • +
                                                              • Spell Checking is used to turn on/off the spell checking option.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Alternate Input is used to turn on/off hieroglyphs.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Alignment Guides is used to turn on/off alignment guides that appear when you move objects and allow you to position them on the page precisely.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Compatibility is used to make the files compatible with older MS Word versions when saved as DOCX.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Autosave is used in the online version to turn on/off automatic saving of changes you make while editing.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Autorecover - is used in the desktop version to turn on/off the option that allows to automatically recover documents in case of the unexpected program closing.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Co-editing Mode is used to select the display of the changes made during the co-editing: +
                                                                  +
                                                                • By default the Fast mode is selected, the users who take part in the document co-editing will see the changes in real time once they are made by other users.
                                                                • +
                                                                • If you prefer not to see other user changes (so that they do not disturb you, or for some other reason), select the Strict mode and all the changes will be shown only after you click the Save Save icon icon notifying you that there are changes from other users.
                                                                • +
                                                                +
                                                              • +
                                                              • + Real-time Collaboration Changes is used to specify what changes you want to be highlighted during co-editing: +
                                                                  +
                                                                • Selecting the View None option, changes made during the current session will not be highlighted.
                                                                • +
                                                                • Selecting the View All option, all the changes made during the current session will be highlighted.
                                                                • +
                                                                • Selecting the View Last option, only the changes made since you last time clicked the Save Save icon icon will be highlighted. This option is only available when the Strict co-editing mode is selected.
                                                                • +
                                                                +
                                                              • +
                                                              • Default Zoom Value is used to set the default zoom value selecting it in the list of available options from 50% to 200%. You can also choose the Fit to Page or Fit to Width option.
                                                              • +
                                                              • + Font Hinting is used to select the type a font is displayed in Document Editor: +
                                                                  +
                                                                • Choose As Windows if you like the way fonts are usually displayed on Windows, i.e. using Windows font hinting.
                                                                • +
                                                                • Choose As OS X if you like the way fonts are usually displayed on a Mac, i.e. without any font hinting at all.
                                                                • +
                                                                • Choose Native if you want your text to be displayed with the hinting embedded into font files.
                                                                • +
                                                                +
                                                              • +
                                                              • Default cache mode - used to select the cache mode for the font characters. It’s not recommended to switch it without any reason. It can be helpful in some cases only, for example, when an issue in the Google Chrome browser with the enabled hardware acceleration occurs. +

                                                                Document Editor has two cache modes:

                                                                +
                                                                  +
                                                                1. In the first cache mode, each letter is cached as a separate picture.
                                                                2. +
                                                                3. In the second cache mode, a picture of a certain size is selected where letters are placed dynamically and a mechanism of allocating/removing memory in this picture is also implemented. If there is not enough memory, a second picture is created, etc.
                                                                4. +
                                                                +

                                                                The Default cache mode setting applies two above mentioned cache modes separately for different browsers:

                                                                +
                                                                  +
                                                                • When the Default cache mode setting is enabled, Internet Explorer (v. 9, 10, 11) uses the second cache mode, other browsers use the first cache mode.
                                                                • +
                                                                • When the Default cache mode setting is disabled, Internet Explorer (v. 9, 10, 11) uses the first cache mode, other browsers use the second cache mode.
                                                                • +
                                                                +
                                                              • +
                                                              • Unit of Measurement is used to specify what units are used on the rulers and in properties windows for measuring elements parameters such as width, height, spacing, margins etc. You can select the Centimeter, Point, or Inch option.
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              To save the changes you made, click the Apply button.

                                                              +
                                                              + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/HelpfulHints/CollaborativeEditing.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/HelpfulHints/CollaborativeEditing.htm new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ecac92d36 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/HelpfulHints/CollaborativeEditing.htm @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ + + + + Collaborative Document Editing + + + + + + + +
                                                              +
                                                              + +
                                                              +

                                                              Collaborative Document Editing

                                                              +

                                                              Document Editor offers you the possibility to work at a document collaboratively with other users. This feature includes:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • simultaneous multi-user access to the edited document
                                                              • +
                                                              • visual indication of passages that are being edited by other users
                                                              • +
                                                              • real-time changes display or synchronization of changes with one button click
                                                              • +
                                                              • chat to share ideas concerning particular document parts
                                                              • +
                                                              • comments containing the description of a task or problem that should be solved (it's also possible to work with comments in the offline mode, without connecting to the online version)
                                                              • +
                                                              +
                                                              +

                                                              Connecting to the online version

                                                              +

                                                              In the desktop editor, open the Connect to cloud option of the left-side menu in the main program window. Connect to your cloud office specifying your account login and password.

                                                              +
                                                              +
                                                              +

                                                              Co-editing

                                                              +

                                                              Document Editor allows to select one of the two available co-editing modes:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • Fast is used by default and shows the changes made by other users in real time.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Strict is selected to hide other user changes until you click the Save Save icon icon to save your own changes and accept the changes made by others.
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              The mode can be selected in the Advanced Settings. It's also possible to choose the necessary mode using the Co-editing Mode icon Co-editing Mode icon at the Collaboration tab of the top toolbar:

                                                              +

                                                              Co-editing Mode menu

                                                              +

                                                              + Note: when you co-edit a document in the Fast mode, the possibility to Redo the last undone operation is not available. +

                                                              +

                                                              When a document is being edited by several users simultaneously in the Strict mode, the edited text passages are marked with dashed lines of different colors. By hovering the mouse cursor over one of the edited passages, the name of the user who is editing it at the moment is displayed. The Fast mode will show the actions and the names of the co-editors once they are editing the text.

                                                              +

                                                              The number of users who are working at the current document is specified on the right side of the editor header - Number of users icon. If you want to see who exactly are editing the file now, you can click this icon or open the Chat panel with the full list of the users.

                                                              +

                                                              When no users are viewing or editing the file, the icon in the editor header will look like Manage document access rights icon allowing you to manage the users who have access to the file right from the document: invite new users giving them permissions to edit, read, comment, fill forms or review the document, or deny some users access rights to the file. Click this icon to manage the access to the file; this can be done both when there are no other users who view or co-edit the document at the moment and when there are other users and the icon looks like Number of users icon. It's also possible to set access rights using the Sharing icon Sharing icon at the Collaboration tab of the top toolbar.

                                                              +

                                                              As soon as one of the users saves his/her changes by clicking the Save icon icon, the others will see a note within the status bar stating that they have updates. To save the changes you made, so that other users can view them, and get the updates saved by your co-editors, click the Save icon icon in the left upper corner of the top toolbar. The updates will be highlighted for you to check what exactly has been changed.

                                                              +

                                                              You can specify what changes you want to be highlighted during co-editing if you click the File tab at the top toolbar, select the Advanced Settings... option and choose between none, all and last real-time collaboration changes. Selecting View all changes, all the changes made during the current session will be highlighted. Selecting View last changes, only the changes made since you last time clicked the Save icon icon will be highlighted. Selecting View None changes, changes made during the current session will not be highlighted.

                                                              +

                                                              Chat

                                                              +

                                                              You can use this tool to coordinate the co-editing process on-the-fly, for example, to arrange with your collaborators about who is doing what, which paragraph you are going to edit now etc.

                                                              +

                                                              The chat messages are stored during one session only. To discuss the document content it is better to use comments which are stored until you decide to delete them.

                                                              +

                                                              To access the chat and leave a message for other users,

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. click the Chat icon icon at the left sidebar, or
                                                                + switch to the Collaboration tab of the top toolbar and click the Chat icon Chat button, +
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. enter your text into the corresponding field below,
                                                              4. +
                                                              5. press the Send button.
                                                              6. +
                                                              +

                                                              All the messages left by users will be displayed on the panel on the left. If there are new messages you haven't read yet, the chat icon will look like this - Chat icon.

                                                              +

                                                              To close the panel with chat messages, click the Chat icon icon at the left sidebar or the Chat icon Chat button at the top toolbar once again.

                                                              +
                                                              +

                                                              Comments

                                                              +

                                                              It's possible to work with comments in the offline mode, without connecting to the online version.

                                                              +

                                                              To leave a comment,

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. select a text passage where you think there is an error or problem,
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. + switch to the Insert or Collaboration tab of the top toolbar and click the Comment icon Comment button, or
                                                                + use the Comments icon icon at the left sidebar to open the Comments panel and click the Add Comment to Document link, or
                                                                + right-click the selected text passage and select the Add Сomment option from the contextual menu, +
                                                              4. +
                                                              5. enter the needed text,
                                                              6. +
                                                              7. click the Add Comment/Add button.
                                                              8. +
                                                              +

                                                              The comment will be seen on the Comments panel on the left. Any other user can answer to the added comment asking questions or reporting on the work he/she has done. For this purpose, click the Add Reply link situated under the comment, type in your reply text in the entry field and press the Reply button.

                                                              +

                                                              If you are using the Strict co-editing mode, new comments added by other users will become visible only after you click the Save icon icon in the left upper corner of the top toolbar.

                                                              +

                                                              The text passage you commented will be highlighted in the document. To view the comment, just click within the passage. If you need to disable this feature, click the File tab at the top toolbar, select the Advanced Settings... option and uncheck the Turn on display of the comments box. In this case the commented passages will be highlighted only if you click the Comments icon icon.

                                                              +

                                                              You can manage the added comments using the icons in the comment balloon or at the Comments panel on the left:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • edit the currently selected comment by clicking the Edit icon icon,
                                                              • +
                                                              • delete the currently selected comment by clicking the Delete icon icon,
                                                              • +
                                                              • close the currently selected discussion by clicking the Resolve icon icon if the task or problem you stated in your comment was solved, after that the discussion you opened with your comment gets the resolved status. To open it again, click the Open again icon icon. If you want to hide resolved comments, click the File tab at the top toolbar, select the Advanced Settings... option, uncheck the Turn on display of the resolved comments box and click Apply. In this case the resolved comments will be highlighted only if you click the Comments icon icon.
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              Adding mentions

                                                              +

                                                              When entering comments, you can use the mentions feature that allows to attract somebody's attention to the comment and send a notification to the mentioned user via email and Talk.

                                                              +

                                                              To add a mention enter the "+" or "@" sign anywhere in the comment text - a list of the portal users will open. To simplify the search process, you can start typing a name in the comment field - the user list will change as you type. Select the necessary person from the list. If the file has not yet been shared with the mentioned user, the Sharing Settings window will open. Read only access type is selected by default. Change it if necessary and click OK.

                                                              +

                                                              The mentioned user will receive an email notification that he/she has been mentioned in a comment. If the file has been shared, the user will also receive a corresponding notification.

                                                              +

                                                              To remove comments,

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. click the Remove comment icon Remove button at the Collaboration tab of the top toolbar,
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. select the necessary option from the menu: +
                                                                  +
                                                                • Remove Current Comments - to remove the currently selected comment. If some replies have beed added to the comment, all its replies will be removed as well.
                                                                • +
                                                                • Remove My Comments - to remove comments you added without removing comments added by other users. If some replies have beed added to your comment, all its replies will be removed as well.
                                                                • +
                                                                • Remove All Comments - to remove all the comments in the document that you and other users added.
                                                                • +
                                                                +
                                                              4. +
                                                              +

                                                              To close the panel with comments, click the Comments icon icon at the left sidebar once again.

                                                              +
                                                              + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/HelpfulHints/Comparison.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/HelpfulHints/Comparison.htm new file mode 100644 index 000000000..39dc6b608 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/HelpfulHints/Comparison.htm @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + Compare documents + + + + + + + +
                                                              +
                                                              + +
                                                              +

                                                              Compare documents

                                                              +

                                                              Note: this option is available in the paid online version only starting from Document Server v. 5.5.

                                                              +

                                                              If you need to compare and merge two documents, you can use the document Compare feature. It allows to display the differences between two documents and merge the documents by accepting the changes one by one or all at once.

                                                              +

                                                              After comparing and merging two documents, the result will be stored on the portal as a new version of the original file.

                                                              +

                                                              If you do not need to merge documents which are being compared, you can reject all the changes so that the original document remains unchanged.

                                                              + +

                                                              Choose a document for comparison

                                                              +

                                                              To compare two documents, open the original document that you need to compare and select the second document for comparison:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. switch to the Collaboration tab at the top toolbar and press the Compare button Compare button,
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. + select one of the following options to load the document: +
                                                                  +
                                                                • the Document from File option will open the standard dialog window for file selection. Browse your computer hard disk drive for the necessary .docx file and click the Open button.
                                                                • +
                                                                • + the Document from URL option will open the window where you can enter a link to the file stored in a third-party web storage (for example, Nextcloud) if you have corresponding access rights to it. The link must be a direct link for downloading the file. When the link is specified, click the OK button. +

                                                                  Note: The direct link allows to download the file directly without opening it in a web browser. For example, to get a direct link in Nextcloud, find the necessary document in the file list, select the Details option from the file menu. Click the Copy direct link (only works for users who have access to this file/folder) icon to the right of the file name at the details panel. To find out how to get a direct link for downloading the file in a different third-party web storage, please refer to the corresponding third-party service documentation.

                                                                  +
                                                                • +
                                                                • the Document from Storage option will open the Select Data Source window. It displays the list of all the .docx documents stored on your portal you have corresponding access rights to. To navigate between the Documents module sections use the menu in the left part of the window. Select the necessary .docx document and click the OK button.
                                                                • +
                                                                +
                                                              4. +
                                                              +

                                                              When the second document for comparison is selected, the comparison process will start and the document will look as if it was opened in the Review mode. All the changes are highlighted with a color, and you can view the changes, navigate between them, accept or reject them one by one or all the changes at once. It's also possible to change the display mode and see how the document looks before comparison, in the process of comparison, or how it will look after comparison if you accept all changes.

                                                              + +

                                                              Choose the changes display mode

                                                              +

                                                              Click the Display Mode button Display Mode button at the top toolbar and select one of the available modes from the list:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • + Markup - this option is selected by default. It is used to display the document in the process of comparison. This mode allows both to view the changes and edit the document. +

                                                                Compare documents - Markup

                                                                +
                                                              • +
                                                              • + Final - this mode is used to display the document after comparison as if all the changes were accepted. This option does not actually accept all changes, it only allows you to see how the document will look like after you accept all the changes. In this mode, you cannot edit the document. +

                                                                Compare documents - Final

                                                                +
                                                              • +
                                                              • + Original - this mode is used to display the document before comparison as if all the changes were rejected. This option does not actually reject all changes, it only allows you to view the document without changes. In this mode, you cannot edit the document. +

                                                                Compare documents - Original

                                                                +
                                                              • +
                                                              + +

                                                              Accept or reject changes

                                                              +

                                                              Use the To Previous Change button Previous and the To Next Change button Next buttons at the top toolbar to navigate among the changes.

                                                              +

                                                              To accept the currently selected change you can:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • click the Accept button Accept button at the top toolbar, or
                                                              • +
                                                              • click the downward arrow below the Accept button and select the Accept Current Change option (in this case, the change will be accepted and you will proceed to the next change), or
                                                              • +
                                                              • click the Accept Accept button button of the change notification.
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              To quickly accept all the changes, click the downward arrow below the Accept button Accept button and select the Accept All Changes option.

                                                              +

                                                              To reject the current change you can:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • click the Reject button Reject button at the top toolbar, or
                                                              • +
                                                              • click the downward arrow below the Reject button and select the Reject Current Change option (in this case, the change will be rejected and you will move on to the next available change), or
                                                              • +
                                                              • click the Reject Reject button button of the change notification.
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              To quickly reject all the changes, click the downward arrow below the Reject button Reject button and select the Reject All Changes option.

                                                              + +

                                                              Additional info on the comparison feature

                                                              +
                                                              Method of the comparison
                                                              +

                                                              Documents are compared by words. If a word contains a change of at least one character (e.g. if a character was removed or replaced), in the result, the difference will be displayed as the change of the entire word, not the character.

                                                              +

                                                              The image below illustrates the case when the original file contains the word 'Characters' and the document for comparison contains the word 'Character'.

                                                              +

                                                              Compare documents - method

                                                              + +
                                                              Authorship of the document
                                                              +

                                                              When the comparison process is launched, the second document for comparison is being loaded and compared to the current one.

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • If the loaded document contains some data which is not represented in the original document, the data will be marked as added by a reviewer.
                                                              • +
                                                              • If the original document contains some data which is not represented in the loaded document, the data will be marked as deleted by a reviewer.
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              If the authors of the original and loaded documents are the same person, the reviewer is the same user. His/her name is displayed in the change balloon.

                                                              +

                                                              If the authors of two files are different users, then the author of the second file loaded for comparison is the author of the added/removed changes.

                                                              + +
                                                              Presence of the tracked changes in the compared document
                                                              +

                                                              If the original document contains some changes made in the review mode, they will be accepted in the comparison process. When you choose the second file for comparison, you'll see the corresponding warning message.

                                                              +

                                                              In this case, when you choose the Original display mode, the document will not contain any changes.

                                                              +
                                                              + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b5d44b2ad --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm @@ -0,0 +1,665 @@ + + + + Keyboard Shortcuts + + + + + + + + + +
                                                              +
                                                              + +
                                                              +

                                                              Keyboard Shortcuts

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • Windows/Linux
                                                              • Mac OS
                                                              • +
                                                              + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
                                                              Working with Document
                                                              Open 'File' panelAlt+F⌥ Option+FOpen the File panel to save, download, print the current document, view its info, create a new document or open an existing one, access Document Editor help or advanced settings.
                                                              Open 'Find and Replace' dialog boxCtrl+F^ Ctrl+F,
                                                              ⌘ Cmd+F
                                                              Open the Find and Replace dialog box to start searching for a character/word/phrase in the currently edited document.
                                                              Open 'Find and Replace' dialog box with replacement fieldCtrl+H^ Ctrl+HOpen the Find and Replace dialog box with the replacement field to replace one or more occurrences of the found characters.
                                                              Repeat the last 'Find' action⇧ Shift+F4⇧ Shift+F4,
                                                              ⌘ Cmd+G,
                                                              ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+F4
                                                              Repeat the Find action which has been performed before the key combination press.
                                                              Open 'Comments' panelCtrl+⇧ Shift+H^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+H,
                                                              ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+H
                                                              Open the Comments panel to add your own comment or reply to other users' comments.
                                                              Open comment fieldAlt+H⌥ Option+HOpen a data entry field where you can add the text of your comment.
                                                              Open 'Chat' panelAlt+Q⌥ Option+QOpen the Chat panel and send a message.
                                                              Save documentCtrl+S^ Ctrl+S,
                                                              ⌘ Cmd+S
                                                              Save all the changes to the document currently edited with Document Editor. The active file will be saved with its current file name, location, and file format.
                                                              Print documentCtrl+P^ Ctrl+P,
                                                              ⌘ Cmd+P
                                                              Print the document with one of the available printers or save it to a file.
                                                              Download As...Ctrl+⇧ Shift+S^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+S,
                                                              ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+S
                                                              Open the Download as... panel to save the currently edited document to the computer hard disk drive in one of the supported formats: DOCX, PDF, ODT, TXT, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, HTML.
                                                              Full screenF11Switch to the full screen view to fit Document Editor into your screen.
                                                              Help menuF1F1Open Document Editor Help menu.
                                                              Open existing file (Desktop Editors)Ctrl+OOn the Open local file tab in Desktop Editors, opens the standard dialog box that allows to select an existing file.
                                                              Close file (Desktop Editors)Ctrl+W,
                                                              Ctrl+F4
                                                              ^ Ctrl+W,
                                                              ⌘ Cmd+W
                                                              Close the current document window in Desktop Editors.
                                                              Element contextual menu⇧ Shift+F10⇧ Shift+F10Open the selected element contextual menu.
                                                              Navigation
                                                              Jump to the beginning of the lineHomeHomePut the cursor to the beginning of the currently edited line.
                                                              Jump to the beginning of the documentCtrl+Home^ Ctrl+HomePut the cursor to the very beginning of the currently edited document.
                                                              Jump to the end of the lineEndEndPut the cursor to the end of the currently edited line.
                                                              Jump to the end of the documentCtrl+End^ Ctrl+EndPut the cursor to the very end of the currently edited document.
                                                              Jump to the beginning of the previous pageAlt+Ctrl+Page UpPut the cursor to the very beginning of the page which preceeds the currently edited one.
                                                              Jump to the beginning of the next pageAlt+Ctrl+Page Down⌥ Option+⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+Page DownPut the cursor to the very beginning of the page which follows the currently edited one.
                                                              Scroll downPage DownPage Down,
                                                              ⌥ Option+Fn+
                                                              Scroll the document approximately one visible page down.
                                                              Scroll upPage UpPage Up,
                                                              ⌥ Option+Fn+
                                                              Scroll the document approximately one visible page up.
                                                              Next pageAlt+Page Down⌥ Option+Page DownGo to the next page in the currently edited document.
                                                              Previous pageAlt+Page Up⌥ Option+Page UpGo to the previous page in the currently edited document.
                                                              Zoom InCtrl++^ Ctrl+=,
                                                              ⌘ Cmd+=
                                                              Zoom in the currently edited document.
                                                              Zoom OutCtrl+-^ Ctrl+-,
                                                              ⌘ Cmd+-
                                                              Zoom out the currently edited document.
                                                              Move one character to the leftMove the cursor one character to the left.
                                                              Move one character to the rightMove the cursor one character to the right.
                                                              Move to the beginning of a word or one word to the leftCtrl+^ Ctrl+,
                                                              ⌘ Cmd+
                                                              Move the cursor to the beginning of a word or one word to the left.
                                                              Move one word to the rightCtrl+^ Ctrl+,
                                                              ⌘ Cmd+
                                                              Move the cursor one word to the right.
                                                              Move one line upMove the cursor one line up.
                                                              Move one line downMove the cursor one line down.
                                                              Writing
                                                              End paragraph↵ Enter↵ ReturnEnd the current paragraph and start a new one.
                                                              Add line break⇧ Shift+↵ Enter⇧ Shift+↵ ReturnAdd a line break without starting a new paragraph.
                                                              Delete← Backspace,
                                                              Delete
                                                              ← Backspace,
                                                              Delete
                                                              Delete one character to the left (← Backspace) or to the right (Delete) of the cursor.
                                                              Delete word to the left of cursorCtrl+← Backspace^ Ctrl+← Backspace,
                                                              ⌘ Cmd+← Backspace
                                                              Delete one word to the left of the cursor.
                                                              Delete word to the right of cursorCtrl+Delete^ Ctrl+Delete,
                                                              ⌘ Cmd+Delete
                                                              Delete one word to the right of the cursor.
                                                              Create nonbreaking spaceCtrl+⇧ Shift+␣ Spacebar^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+␣ SpacebarCreate a space between characters which cannot be used to start a new line.
                                                              Create nonbreaking hyphenCtrl+⇧ Shift+Hyphen^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+HyphenCreate a hyphen between characters which cannot be used to start a new line.
                                                              Undo and Redo
                                                              UndoCtrl+Z^ Ctrl+Z,
                                                              ⌘ Cmd+Z
                                                              Reverse the latest performed action.
                                                              RedoCtrl+Y^ Ctrl+Y,
                                                              ⌘ Cmd+Y,
                                                              ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+Z
                                                              Repeat the latest undone action.
                                                              Cut, Copy, and Paste
                                                              CutCtrl+X,
                                                              ⇧ Shift+Delete
                                                              ⌘ Cmd+X,
                                                              ⇧ Shift+Delete
                                                              Delete the selected text fragment and send it to the computer clipboard memory. The copied text can be later inserted to another place in the same document, into another document, or into some other program.
                                                              CopyCtrl+C,
                                                              Ctrl+Insert
                                                              ⌘ Cmd+CSend the selected text fragment to the computer clipboard memory. The copied text can be later inserted to another place in the same document, into another document, or into some other program.
                                                              PasteCtrl+V,
                                                              ⇧ Shift+Insert
                                                              ⌘ Cmd+VInsert the previously copied text fragment from the computer clipboard memory to the current cursor position. The text can be previously copied from the same document, from another document, or from some other program.
                                                              Insert hyperlinkCtrl+K⌘ Cmd+KInsert a hyperlink which can be used to go to a web address.
                                                              Copy styleCtrl+⇧ Shift+C⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+CCopy the formatting from the selected fragment of the currently edited text. The copied formatting can be later applied to another text fragment in the same document.
                                                              Apply styleCtrl+⇧ Shift+V⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+VApply the previously copied formatting to the text in the currently edited document.
                                                              Text Selection
                                                              Select allCtrl+A⌘ Cmd+ASelect all the document text with tables and images.
                                                              Select fragment⇧ Shift+ ⇧ Shift+ Select the text character by character.
                                                              Select from cursor to beginning of line⇧ Shift+Home⇧ Shift+HomeSelect a text fragment from the cursor to the beginning of the current line.
                                                              Select from cursor to end of line⇧ Shift+End⇧ Shift+EndSelect a text fragment from the cursor to the end of the current line.
                                                              Select one character to the right⇧ Shift+⇧ Shift+Select one character to the right of the cursor position.
                                                              Select one character to the left⇧ Shift+⇧ Shift+Select one character to the left of the cursor position.
                                                              Select to the end of a wordCtrl+⇧ Shift+Select a text fragment from the cursor to the end of a word.
                                                              Select to the beginning of a wordCtrl+⇧ Shift+Select a text fragment from the cursor to the beginning of a word.
                                                              Select one line up⇧ Shift+⇧ Shift+Select one line up (with the cursor at the beginning of a line).
                                                              Select one line down⇧ Shift+⇧ Shift+Select one line down (with the cursor at the beginning of a line).
                                                              Select the page up⇧ Shift+Page Up⇧ Shift+Page UpSelect the page part from the cursor position to the upper part of the screen.
                                                              Select the page down⇧ Shift+Page Down⇧ Shift+Page DownSelect the page part from the cursor position to the lower part of the screen.
                                                              Text Styling
                                                              BoldCtrl+B^ Ctrl+B,
                                                              ⌘ Cmd+B
                                                              Make the font of the selected text fragment bold giving it more weight.
                                                              ItalicCtrl+I^ Ctrl+I,
                                                              ⌘ Cmd+I
                                                              Make the font of the selected text fragment italicized giving it some right side tilt.
                                                              UnderlineCtrl+U^ Ctrl+U,
                                                              ⌘ Cmd+U
                                                              Make the selected text fragment underlined with the line going under the letters.
                                                              StrikeoutCtrl+5^ Ctrl+5,
                                                              ⌘ Cmd+5
                                                              Make the selected text fragment struck out with the line going through the letters.
                                                              SubscriptCtrl+.^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+>,
                                                              ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+>
                                                              Make the selected text fragment smaller and place it to the lower part of the text line, e.g. as in chemical formulas.
                                                              SuperscriptCtrl+,^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+<,
                                                              ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+<
                                                              Make the selected text fragment smaller and place it to the upper part of the text line, e.g. as in fractions.
                                                              Heading 1 styleAlt+1⌥ Option+^ Ctrl+1Apply the style of the heading 1 to the selected text fragment.
                                                              Heading 2 styleAlt+2⌥ Option+^ Ctrl+2Apply the style of the heading 2 to the selected text fragment.
                                                              Heading 3 styleAlt+3⌥ Option+^ Ctrl+3Apply the style of the heading 3 to the selected text fragment.
                                                              Bulleted listCtrl+⇧ Shift+L^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+L,
                                                              ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+L
                                                              Create an unordered bulleted list from the selected text fragment or start a new one.
                                                              Remove formattingCtrl+␣ SpacebarRemove formatting from the selected text fragment.
                                                              Increase fontCtrl+]⌘ Cmd+]Increase the size of the font for the selected text fragment 1 point.
                                                              Decrease fontCtrl+[⌘ Cmd+[Decrease the size of the font for the selected text fragment 1 point.
                                                              Align center/leftCtrl+E^ Ctrl+E,
                                                              ⌘ Cmd+E
                                                              Switch a paragraph between centered and left-aligned.
                                                              Align justified/leftCtrl+J,
                                                              Ctrl+L
                                                              ^ Ctrl+J,
                                                              ⌘ Cmd+J
                                                              Switch a paragraph between justified and left-aligned.
                                                              Align right/leftCtrl+R^ Ctrl+RSwitch a paragraph between right-aligned and left-aligned.
                                                              Apply subscript formatting (automatic spacing)Ctrl+=Apply subscript formatting to the selected text fragment.
                                                              Apply superscript formatting (automatic spacing)Ctrl+⇧ Shift++Apply superscript formatting to the selected text fragment.
                                                              Insert page breakCtrl+↵ Enter^ Ctrl+↵ ReturnInsert a page break at the current cursor position.
                                                              Increase indentCtrl+M^ Ctrl+MIndent a paragraph from the left incrementally.
                                                              Decrease indentCtrl+⇧ Shift+M^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+MRemove a paragraph indent from the left incrementally.
                                                              Add page numberCtrl+⇧ Shift+P^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+PAdd the current page number at the current cursor position.
                                                              Nonprinting charactersCtrl+⇧ Shift+Num8Show or hide the display of nonprinting characters.
                                                              Delete one character to the left← Backspace← BackspaceDelete one character to the left of the cursor.
                                                              Delete one character to the rightDeleteDeleteDelete one character to the right of the cursor.
                                                              Modifying Objects
                                                              Constrain movement⇧ Shift + drag⇧ Shift + dragConstrain the movement of the selected object horizontally or vertically.
                                                              Set 15-degree rotation⇧ Shift + drag (when rotating)⇧ Shift + drag (when rotating)Constrain the rotation angle to 15-degree increments.
                                                              Maintain proportions⇧ Shift + drag (when resizing)⇧ Shift + drag (when resizing)Maintain the proportions of the selected object when resizing.
                                                              Draw straight line or arrow⇧ Shift + drag (when drawing lines/arrows)⇧ Shift + drag (when drawing lines/arrows)Draw a straight vertical/horizontal/45-degree line or arrow.
                                                              Movement by one-pixel incrementsCtrl+ Hold down the Ctrl key and use the keybord arrows to move the selected object by one pixel at a time.
                                                              Working with Tables
                                                              Move to the next cell in a row↹ Tab↹ TabGo to the next cell in a table row.
                                                              Move to the previous cell in a row⇧ Shift+↹ Tab⇧ Shift+↹ TabGo to the previous cell in a table row.
                                                              Move to the next rowGo to the next row in a table.
                                                              Move to the previous rowGo to the previous row in a table.
                                                              Start new paragraph↵ Enter↵ ReturnStart a new paragraph within a cell.
                                                              Add new row↹ Tab in the lower right table cell.↹ Tab in the lower right table cell.Add a new row at the bottom of the table.
                                                              Inserting special characters
                                                              Insert formulaAlt+=Insert a formula at the current cursor position.
                                                              +
                                                              + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm new file mode 100644 index 000000000..de9acbba3 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + View Settings and Navigation Tools + + + + + + + +
                                                              +
                                                              + +
                                                              +

                                                              View Settings and Navigation Tools

                                                              +

                                                              Document Editor offers several tools to help you view and navigate through your document: zoom, page number indicator etc.

                                                              +

                                                              Adjust the View Settings

                                                              +

                                                              To adjust default view settings and set the most convenient mode to work with the document, click the View settings View settings icon icon on the right side of the editor header and select which interface elements you want to be hidden or shown. + You can select the following options from the View settings drop-down list: +

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • + Hide Toolbar - hides the top toolbar that contains commands while tabs remain visible. When this option is enabled, you can click any tab to display the toolbar. The toolbar is displayed until you click anywhere outside it.
                                                                To disable this mode, click the View settings View settings icon icon and click the Hide Toolbar option once again. The top toolbar will be displayed all the time. +

                                                                Note: alternatively, you can just double-click any tab to hide the top toolbar or display it again.

                                                                +
                                                              • +
                                                              • Hide Status Bar - hides the bottommost bar where the Page Number Indicator and Zoom buttons are situated. To show the hidden Status Bar click this option once again.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Hide Rulers - hides rulers which are used to align text, graphics, tables, and other elements in a document, set up margins, tab stops, and paragraph indents. To show the hidden Rulers click this option once again.
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              The right sidebar is minimized by default. To expand it, select any object (e.g. image, chart, shape) or text passage and click the icon of the currently activated tab on the right. To minimize the right sidebar, click the icon once again.

                                                              +

                                                              When the Comments or Chat panel is opened, the left sidebar width is adjusted by simple drag-and-drop: + move the mouse cursor over the left sidebar border so that it turns into the bidirectional arrow and drag the border to the right to extend the sidebar width. To restore its original width move the border to the left.

                                                              +

                                                              Use the Navigation Tools

                                                              +

                                                              To navigate through your document, use the following tools:

                                                              +

                                                              The Zoom buttons are situated in the right lower corner and are used to zoom in and out the current document. + To change the currently selected zoom value that is displayed in percent, click it and select one of the available zoom options from the list + or use the Zoom in Zoom in button or Zoom out Zoom out button buttons. + Click the Fit width Fit width button icon to fit the document page width to the visible part of the working area. + To fit the whole document page to the visible part of the working area, click the Fit page Fit page button icon. + Zoom settings are also available in the View settings View settings icon drop-down list that can be useful if you decide to hide the Status Bar.

                                                              +

                                                              The Page Number Indicator shows the current page as a part of all the pages in the current document (page 'n' of 'nn'). + Click this caption to open the window where you can enter the page number and quickly go to it.

                                                              +
                                                              + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/HelpfulHints/Review.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/HelpfulHints/Review.htm new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3a3aabc70 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/HelpfulHints/Review.htm @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + Document Review + + + + + + + +
                                                              +
                                                              + +
                                                              +

                                                              Document Review

                                                              +

                                                              When somebody shares a file with you that has review permissions, you need to use the document Review feature.

                                                              +

                                                              If you are the reviewer, then you can use the Review option to review the document, change the sentences, phrases and other page elements, correct spelling, and do other things to the document without actually editing it. All your changes will be recorded and shown to the person who sent the document to you.

                                                              +

                                                              If you are the person who sends the file for the review, you will need to display all the changes which were made to it, view and either accept or reject them.

                                                              +

                                                              Enable the Track Changes feature

                                                              +

                                                              To see changes suggested by a reviewer, enable the Track Changes option in one of the following ways:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • click the Track changes button button in the right lower corner at the status bar, or
                                                              • +
                                                              • switch to the Collaboration tab at the top toolbar and press the Track Changes button Track Changes button.
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              Note: it is not necessary for the reviewer to enable the Track Changes option. It is enabled by default and cannot be disabled when the document is shared with review only access rights.

                                                              +

                                                              Choose the changes display mode

                                                              +

                                                              Click the Display Mode button Display Mode button at the top toolbar and select one of the available modes from the list:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • Markup - this option is selected by default. It allows both to view suggested changes and edit the document.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Final - this mode is used to display all the changes as if they were accepted. This option does not actually accept all changes, it only allows you to see how the document will look like after you accept all the changes. In this mode, you cannot edit the document.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Original - this mode is used to display all the changes as if they were rejected. This option does not actually reject all changes, it only allows you to view the document without changes. In this mode, you cannot edit the document.
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              Accept or reject changes

                                                              +

                                                              Use the To Previous Change button Previous and the To Next Change button Next buttons at the top toolbar to navigate among the changes.

                                                              +

                                                              To accept the currently selected change you can:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • click the Accept button Accept button at the top toolbar, or
                                                              • +
                                                              • click the downward arrow below the Accept button and select the Accept Current Change option (in this case, the change will be accepted and you will proceed to the next change), or
                                                              • +
                                                              • click the Accept Accept button button of the change notification.
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              To quickly accept all the changes, click the downward arrow below the Accept button Accept button and select the Accept All Changes option.

                                                              +

                                                              To reject the current change you can:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • click the Reject button Reject button at the top toolbar, or
                                                              • +
                                                              • click the downward arrow below the Reject button and select the Reject Current Change option (in this case, the change will be rejected and you will move on to the next available change), or
                                                              • +
                                                              • click the Reject Reject button button of the change notification.
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              To quickly reject all the changes, click the downward arrow below the Reject button Reject button and select the Reject All Changes option.

                                                              +

                                                              Note: if you review the document the Accept and Reject options are not available for you. You can delete your changes using the Delete change button icon within the change balloon.

                                                              +
                                                              + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/HelpfulHints/Search.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/HelpfulHints/Search.htm new file mode 100644 index 000000000..43a29ceff --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/HelpfulHints/Search.htm @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + Search and Replace Function + + + + + + + +
                                                              +
                                                              + +
                                                              +

                                                              Search and Replace Function

                                                              +

                                                              To search for the needed characters, words or phrases used in the currently edited document, + click the Search icon icon situated at the left sidebar or use the Ctrl+F key combination.

                                                              +

                                                              The Find and Replace window will open:

                                                              +

                                                              Find and Replace Window

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. Type in your inquiry into the corresponding data entry field.
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. Specify search parameters by clicking the Search options icon icon and checking the necessary options: +
                                                                  +
                                                                • Case sensitive - is used to find only the occurrences typed in the same case as your inquiry (e.g. if your inquiry is 'Editor' and this option is selected, such words as 'editor' or 'EDITOR' etc. will not be found). To disable this option click it once again.
                                                                • +
                                                                • Highlight results - is used to highlight all found occurrences at once. To disable this option and remove the highlight click the option once again.
                                                                • +
                                                                +
                                                              4. +
                                                              5. Click one of the arrow buttons at the bottom right corner of the window. + The search will be performed either towards the beginning of the document (if you click the Left arrow button button) or towards the end of the document (if you click the Right arrow button button) from the current position. +

                                                                Note: when the Highlight results option is enabled, use these buttons to navigate through the highlighted results.

                                                                +
                                                              6. +
                                                              +

                                                              The first occurrence of the required characters in the selected direction will be highlighted on the page. If it is not the word you are looking for, click the selected button again to find the next occurrence of the characters you entered.

                                                              +

                                                              To replace one or more occurrences of the found characters click the Replace link below the data entry field or use the Ctrl+H key combination. The Find and Replace window will change:

                                                              +

                                                              Find and Replace Window

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. Type in the replacement text into the bottom data entry field.
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. Click the Replace button to replace the currently selected occurrence or the Replace All button to replace all the found occurrences.
                                                              4. +
                                                              +

                                                              To hide the replace field, click the Hide Replace link.

                                                              +
                                                              + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/HelpfulHints/SpellChecking.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/HelpfulHints/SpellChecking.htm new file mode 100644 index 000000000..54141d237 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/HelpfulHints/SpellChecking.htm @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + Spell-checking + + + + + + + +
                                                              +
                                                              + +
                                                              +

                                                              Spell-checking

                                                              +

                                                              Document Editor allows you to check the spelling of your text in a certain language and correct mistakes while editing. In the desktop version, it's also possible to add words into a custom dictionary which is common for all three editors.

                                                              +

                                                              First of all, choose a language for your document. Click the Set Document Language icon Set Document Language icon at the status bar. In the window that appears, select the necessary language and click OK. The selected language will be applied to the whole document.

                                                              +

                                                              Set Document Language window

                                                              +

                                                              To choose a different language for any piece of text within the document, select the necessary text passage with the mouse and use the Spell-checking - Text Language selector menu at the status bar.

                                                              +

                                                              To enable the spell checking option, you can:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • click the Spell checking deactivated icon Spell checking icon at the status bar, or
                                                              • +
                                                              • open the File tab of the top toolbar, select the Advanced Settings... option, check the Turn on spell checking option box and click the Apply button.
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              Incorrectly spelled words will be underlined by a red line.

                                                              +

                                                              Right click on the necessary word to activate the menu and:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • choose one of the suggested similar words spelled correctly to replace the misspelled word with the suggested one. If too many variants are found, the More variants... option appears in the menu;
                                                              • +
                                                              • use the Ignore option to skip just that word and remove underlining or Ignore All to skip all the identical words repeated in the text;
                                                              • +
                                                              • if the current word is missed in the dictionary, you can add it to the custom dictionary. This word will not be treated as a mistake next time. This option is available in the desktop version.
                                                              • +
                                                              • select a different language for this word.
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              Spell-checking

                                                              +

                                                              To disable the spell checking option, you can:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • click the Spell checking activated icon Spell checking icon at the status bar, or
                                                              • +
                                                              • open the File tab of the top toolbar, select the Advanced Settings... option, uncheck the Turn on spell checking option box and click the Apply button.
                                                              • +
                                                              +
                                                              + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm new file mode 100644 index 000000000..90ca51559 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm @@ -0,0 +1,137 @@ + + + + Supported Formats of Electronic Documents + + + + + + + +
                                                              +
                                                              + +
                                                              +

                                                              Supported Formats of Electronic Documents

                                                              +

                                                              Electronic documents represent one of the most commonly used computer files. + Thanks to the computer network highly developed nowadays, it's possible and more convenient to distribute electronic documents than printed ones. + Due to the variety of devices used for document presentation, there are a lot of proprietary and open file formats. + Document Editor handles the most popular of them.

                                                              + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
                                                              FormatsDescriptionViewEditDownload
                                                              DOCFilename extension for word processing documents created with Microsoft Word++
                                                              DOCXOffice Open XML
                                                              Zipped, XML-based file format developed by Microsoft for representing spreadsheets, charts, presentations, and word processing documents
                                                              +++
                                                              DOTXWord Open XML Document Template
                                                              Zipped, XML-based file format developed by Microsoft for text document templates. A DOTX template contains formatting settings, styles etc. and can be used to create multiple documents with the same formatting
                                                              +++
                                                              ODTWord processing file format of OpenDocument, an open standard for electronic documents+++
                                                              OTTOpenDocument Document Template
                                                              OpenDocument file format for text document templates. An OTT template contains formatting settings, styles etc. and can be used to create multiple documents with the same formatting
                                                              +++
                                                              RTFRich Text Format
                                                              Document file format developed by Microsoft for cross-platform document interchange
                                                              +++
                                                              TXTFilename extension for text files usually containing very little formatting+++
                                                              PDFPortable Document Format
                                                              File format used to represent documents in a manner independent of application software, hardware, and operating systems
                                                              ++
                                                              PDF/APortable Document Format / A
                                                              An ISO-standardized version of the Portable Document Format (PDF) specialized for use in the archiving and long-term preservation of electronic documents.
                                                              ++
                                                              HTMLHyperText Markup Language
                                                              The main markup language for web pages
                                                              ++in the online version
                                                              EPUBElectronic Publication
                                                              Free and open e-book standard created by the International Digital Publishing Forum
                                                              +
                                                              XPSOpen XML Paper Specification
                                                              Open royalty-free fixed-layout document format developed by Microsoft
                                                              +
                                                              DjVuFile format designed primarily to store scanned documents, especially those containing a combination of text, line drawings, and photographs+
                                                              +
                                                              + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0cc893186 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + + + Scheda File + + + + + + + +
                                                              +
                                                              + +
                                                              +

                                                              Scheda File

                                                              +

                                                              La scheda File consente di eseguire alcune operazioni di base sul file corrente.

                                                              +
                                                              +

                                                              Finestra dell’Editor di Documenti Online:

                                                              +

                                                              Scheda File

                                                              +
                                                              +
                                                              +

                                                              Finestra dell’Editor di Documenti Desktop:

                                                              +

                                                              Scheda File

                                                              +
                                                              +

                                                              Usando questa scheda, puoi:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • nella versione online, salvare il file corrente (nel caso in cui l’opzione di Salvataggio automatico sia disabilitata), scaricare in (salva il documento nel formato selezionato sul disco fisso del computer), salvare copia come (salva una copia del documento nel formato selezionato nel portale I miei documenti), stamparlo o rinominarlo, + nella versione desktop, salvare il file corrente mantenendo il formato e la posizione correnti utilizzando l’opzione Salva o salvare il file corrente con un nome, una posizione o un formato diversi usando l’opzione Salva con Nome, stampare il file. +
                                                              • +
                                                              • proteggere il file utilizzando una password, modificare o rimuovere la password (disponibile solo nella versione desktop);
                                                              • +
                                                              • creare un nuovo documento o aprirne uno modificato di recente (disponibile solo nella versione online),
                                                              • +
                                                              • visualizzare le Informazioni documento o modificare alcune proprietà del file,
                                                              • +
                                                              • gestire i Diritti di accesso (disponibile solo nella versione online),
                                                              • +
                                                              • tracciare la Cronologia delle versioni (disponibile solo nella versione online),
                                                              • +
                                                              • accedere all’editor Impostazioni avanzate,
                                                              • +
                                                              • nella versione desktop, aprire la cartella in cui è archiviato il file nella finestra Apri percorso file. Nella versione online, aprire la cartella del modulo I miei documenti in cui è archiviato il file in una nuova scheda del browser.
                                                              • +
                                                              +
                                                              + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/ProgramInterface/HomeTab.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/ProgramInterface/HomeTab.htm new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2fed5a660 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/ProgramInterface/HomeTab.htm @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + Scheda Home + + + + + + + +
                                                              +
                                                              + +
                                                              +

                                                              Scheda Home

                                                              +

                                                              La scheda Home si apre per impostazione predefinita quando si apre un documento. Permette di formattare caratteri e paragrafi. Qui sono anche disponibili alcune altre opzioni, come Stampa unione e Cambia combinazione colori.

                                                              +
                                                              +

                                                              Finestra dell’Editor di Documenti Online:

                                                              +

                                                              Scheda Home

                                                              +
                                                              +
                                                              +

                                                              Finestra dell’editor di Documenti Desktop:

                                                              +

                                                              Scheda Home

                                                              +
                                                              +

                                                              Usando questa scheda, puoi:

                                                              + +
                                                              + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/ProgramInterface/InsertTab.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/ProgramInterface/InsertTab.htm new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ccda6094d --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/ProgramInterface/InsertTab.htm @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ + + + + Scheda Inserisci + + + + + + + +
                                                              +
                                                              + +
                                                              +

                                                              Scheda Inserisci

                                                              +

                                                              La scheda Inserisci consente di aggiungere alcuni elementi di formattazione della pagina, nonché oggetti visivi e commenti.

                                                              +
                                                              +

                                                              Finestra dell’Editor di Documenti Online:

                                                              +

                                                              Scheda Inserisci

                                                              +
                                                              +
                                                              +

                                                              Finestra dell’Editor di Documenti Desktop:

                                                              +

                                                              Scheda Inserisci

                                                              +
                                                              +

                                                              Usando questa scheda, puoi:

                                                              + +
                                                              + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/ProgramInterface/LayoutTab.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/ProgramInterface/LayoutTab.htm new file mode 100644 index 000000000..872b3ac2c --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/ProgramInterface/LayoutTab.htm @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ + + + + Scheda Layout di Pagina + + + + + + + +
                                                              +
                                                              + +
                                                              +

                                                              Scheda Layout di Pagina

                                                              +

                                                              La scheda Layout di Pagina consente di modificare l'aspetto del documento: impostare i parametri della pagina e definire la disposizione degli elementi visivi.

                                                              +
                                                              +

                                                              Finestra dell’Editor di Documenti Online:

                                                              +

                                                              Scheda Layout di Pagina

                                                              +
                                                              +
                                                              +

                                                              Finestra dell’Editor di Documenti Desktop:

                                                              +

                                                              Scheda Layout di Pagina

                                                              +
                                                              +

                                                              Usando questa scheda, puoi:

                                                              + +
                                                              + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d42d8f09e --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + Scheda Plugin + + + + + + + +
                                                              +
                                                              + +
                                                              +

                                                              Scheda Plugin

                                                              +

                                                              La scheda Plugin consente di accedere a funzionalità di modifica avanzate utilizzando i componenti di terze parti disponibili. Qui puoi anche usare le macro per semplificare le operazioni di routine.

                                                              +
                                                              +

                                                              Finestra dell’Editor di Documenti Online:

                                                              +

                                                              Scheda Plugin

                                                              +
                                                              +
                                                              +

                                                              Finestra dell’Editor di Documenti Desktop:

                                                              +

                                                              Scheda Plugin

                                                              +
                                                              +

                                                              Il pulsante Impostazioni consente di aprire la finestra in cui è possibile visualizzare e gestire tutti i plugin installati e aggiungerne di propri.

                                                              +

                                                              Il pulsante Macro consente di aprire la finestra in cui è possibile creare le proprie macro ed eseguirle. Per saperne di più sulle macro puoi fare riferimento alla nostra Documentazione API.

                                                              +

                                                              Attualmente, i seguenti plugin sono disponibili per impostazione predefinita:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • Send consente d’inviare il documento via e-mail utilizzando il cliente di posta desktop predefinito (disponibile solo nella versione desktop),
                                                              • +
                                                              • Highlight code consente di evidenziare la sintassi del codice selezionando la lingua, lo stile, il colore di sfondo necessari,
                                                              • +
                                                              • OCR consente di riconoscere il testo incluso in un'immagine e d’inserirlo nel testo del documento,
                                                              • +
                                                              • PhotoEditor consente di modificare le immagini: ritagliare, capovolgere, ruotare, disegnare linee e forme, aggiungere icone e testo, caricare una maschera e applicare filtri come Scala di grigi, Inverti, Seppia, Sfocatura, Precisione, Rilievo, ecc.,
                                                              • +
                                                              • Speech consente di convertire il testo selezionato in voce (disponibile solo nella versione online),
                                                              • +
                                                              • Thesaurus consente di cercare sinonimi e contrari di una parola e sostituirla con quella selezionata,
                                                              • +
                                                              • Translator consente di tradurre il testo selezionato in altre lingue,
                                                              • +
                                                              • YouTube consente d’incorporare video di YouTube nel tuo documento.
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              I plugin Wordpress ed EasyBib possono essere utilizzati se si collegano i servizi corrispondenti nelle impostazioni del portale. È possibile utilizzare le seguenti istruzioni per la versione server o per la versione SaaS.

                                                              +

                                                              Per saperne di più sui plugin puoi fare riferimento alla nostra Documentazione API. Tutti gli esempi di plugin open source attualmente esistenti sono disponibili su GitHub.

                                                              +
                                                              + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm new file mode 100644 index 000000000..15eaad721 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + Presentazione dell'interfaccia utente dell'Editor di Documenti + + + + + + + +
                                                              +
                                                              + +
                                                              +

                                                              Presentazione dell'interfaccia utente dell'Editor di Documenti

                                                              +

                                                              L’editor di Documenti utilizza un'interfaccia a schede in cui i comandi di modifica sono raggruppati in schede in base alla funzionalità.

                                                              +
                                                              +

                                                              Finestra dell’Editor di Documenti Online:

                                                              +

                                                              Finestra dell’Editor di Documenti Online

                                                              +
                                                              +
                                                              +

                                                              Finestra dell’Editor di Documenti Desktop:

                                                              +

                                                              Finestra dell’Editor di Documenti Desktop

                                                              +
                                                              +

                                                              L'interfaccia dell'editor è composta dai seguenti elementi principali:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. L’intestazione dell’Editor mostra il logo, le schede dei documenti aperti, il nome del documento e le schede dei menu. +

                                                                Nella parte sinistra dell’intestazione dell’Editor ci sono i pulsanti Salva, Stampa file, Annulla e Ripristina.

                                                                +

                                                                Icons in the editor header

                                                                +

                                                                Nella parte destra dell'intestazione dell'Editor vengono visualizzati il nome utente e le seguenti icone:

                                                                +
                                                                  +
                                                                • Apri percorso file Apri percorso file - nella versione desktop, consente di aprire la cartella in cui è archiviato il file nella finestra Espola file. Nella versione online, consente di aprire la cartella del modulo Documenti in cui è archiviato il file in una nuova scheda del browser.
                                                                • +
                                                                • Impostazioni di visualizzazione - consente di regolare le Impostazioni di visualizzazione e accedere all'editor Impostazioni avanzate.
                                                                • +
                                                                • Gestisci i diritti di accesso al documento Gestisci i diritti di accesso al documento - (disponibile solo nella versione online) consente d’impostare i diritti di accesso per i documenti archiviati nel cloud.
                                                                • +
                                                                +
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. La barra degli strumenti superiore visualizza una serie di comandi di modifica in base alla scheda del menu selezionata. Attualmente sono disponibili le seguenti schede: File, Home, Inserisci, Layout di Pagina, Referimenti, Collaborazione, Protezione, Plugins. +

                                                                Le opzioni Copia Copia e Incolla Incolla sono sempre disponibili nella parte sinistra della barra degli strumenti superiore, indipendentemente dalla scheda selezionata.

                                                                +
                                                              4. +
                                                              5. La barra di stato nella parte inferiore della finestra dell'editor contiene l'indicatore del numero di pagina, visualizza alcune notifiche (come "Tutte le modifiche salvate" ecc.), consente d’impostare la lingua del testo, abilitare il controllo ortografico, attivare la modalità traccia cambiamenti, regolare lo zoom.
                                                              6. +
                                                              7. La barra laterale sinistra contiene le seguenti icone: +
                                                                  +
                                                                • Trova e sostituisci - consente di usare lo strumento Trova e sostituisci,
                                                                • +
                                                                • Commenti - consente di aprire il pannello dei Commenti,
                                                                • +
                                                                • Navigazione - consente di accedere al pannello di Navigazione e gestire le intestazioni,
                                                                • +
                                                                • Chat - (disponibile solo nella versione online) consente di aprire il pannello Chat,
                                                                • +
                                                                • Feedback and Support - (disponibile solo nella versione online) consente di contattare il nostro team di supporto,
                                                                • +
                                                                • Informazioni sul programma - (disponibile solo nella versione online) consente di visualizzare le informazioni sul programma.
                                                                • +
                                                                +
                                                              8. +
                                                              9. La barra laterale destra consente di regolare parametri aggiuntivi di oggetti diversi. Quando selezioni un oggetto particolare nel testo, l'icona corrispondente viene attivata nella barra laterale destra. Fare clic su questa icona per espandere la barra laterale destra.
                                                              10. +
                                                              11. I righelli orizzontali e verticali consentono di allineare testo e altri elementi in un documento, impostare margini, tabulazioni e rientri di paragrafo.
                                                              12. +
                                                              13. L'area di lavoro consente di visualizzare il contenuto del documento, inserire e modificare i dati.
                                                              14. +
                                                              15. La barra di scorrimento a destra consente di scorrere su e giù i documenti di più pagine.
                                                              16. +
                                                              +

                                                              Per comodità, è possibile nascondere alcuni componenti e visualizzarli di nuovo quando è necessario. Per ulteriori informazioni su come regolare le impostazioni di visualizzazione, fare riferimento a questa pagina.

                                                              + +
                                                              + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/ProgramInterface/ReferencesTab.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/ProgramInterface/ReferencesTab.htm new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e9fa3554a --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/ProgramInterface/ReferencesTab.htm @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ + + + + Scheda Riferimenti + + + + + + + +
                                                              +
                                                              + +
                                                              +

                                                              Scheda Riferimenti

                                                              +

                                                              La scheda Riferimenti consente di gestire diversi tipi di riferimenti: aggiungere e aggiornare un sommario, creare e modificare note a piè di pagina, inserire collegamenti ipertestuali.

                                                              +
                                                              +

                                                              Finestra dell’Editor di Documenti Online:

                                                              +

                                                              Scheda Riferimenti

                                                              +
                                                              +
                                                              +

                                                              Finestra dell’Editor di Documenti Desktop:

                                                              +

                                                              Scheda Riferimenti

                                                              +
                                                              +

                                                              Usando questa scheda, puoi:

                                                              + +
                                                              + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/ProgramInterface/ReviewTab.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/ProgramInterface/ReviewTab.htm new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7c09c8335 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/ProgramInterface/ReviewTab.htm @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ + + + + Scheda Collaborazione + + + + + + + +
                                                              +
                                                              + +
                                                              +

                                                              Scheda Collaborazione

                                                              +

                                                              La scheda Collaborazione consente di organizzare il lavoro collaborativo sul documento. Nella versione online è possibile condividere il file, selezionare una modalità di co-editing, gestire i commenti, tenere traccia delle modifiche apportate da un revisore, visualizzare tutte le versioni e le revisioni. Nella modalità di commento, è possibile aggiungere e rimuovere commenti, navigare tra le modifiche rilevate, utilizzare la chat e visualizzare la cronologia delle versioni. Nella versione desktop è possibile gestire i commenti e utilizzare la funzione Traccia cambiamenti..

                                                              +
                                                              +

                                                              Finestra dell’Editor di Documenti Online:

                                                              +

                                                              Scheda Collaborazione

                                                              +
                                                              +
                                                              +

                                                              Finestra dell’Editor di Documenti Desktop:

                                                              +

                                                              Scheda Collaborazione

                                                              +
                                                              +

                                                              Usando questa scheda, puoi:

                                                              + +
                                                              + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/AddBorders.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/AddBorders.htm new file mode 100644 index 000000000..331700d92 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/AddBorders.htm @@ -0,0 +1,32 @@ + + + + Aggiungere bordi + + + + + + + +
                                                              +
                                                              + +
                                                              +

                                                              Aggiungere bordi

                                                              +

                                                              Per aggiungere bordi a un paragrafo, una pagina o l'intero documento,

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. posizionare il cursore all'interno del paragrafo che interessa o selezionare diversi paragrafi con il mouse o tutto il testo nel documento premendo la combinazione di tasti Ctrl+A,
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. fare clic con il pulsante destro del mouse e selezionare l'opzione Impostazioni avanzate del paragrafo dal menu o utilizzare il link Mostra impostazioni avanzate nella barra laterale destra,
                                                              4. +
                                                              5. passare alla scheda Bordi e riempimento nella finestra Paragrafo - Impostazioni avanzate aperta,
                                                              6. +
                                                              7. impostare il valore necessario per Dimensione bordo e selezionare un Colore bordo,
                                                              8. +
                                                              9. fare clic all'interno del diagramma disponibile o utilizzare i pulsanti per selezionare i bordi e applicarvi lo stile scelto,
                                                              10. +
                                                              11. fare clic sul pulsante OK.
                                                              12. +
                                                              +

                                                              Paragrafo - Bordi e riempimento

                                                              +

                                                              Dopo aver aggiunto i bordi, è anche possibile impostare le spaziature interne , ovvero le distanze tra i bordi destro, sinistro, superiore e inferiore e il testo del paragrafo al loro interno.

                                                              +

                                                              Per impostare i valori necessari, passare alla scheda Spaziatura interna della finestra Paragrafo - Impostazioni avanzate:

                                                              +

                                                              Paragrafo - Spaziature interna

                                                              +
                                                              + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/AddCaption.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/AddCaption.htm new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b77eeca9b --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/AddCaption.htm @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + Aggiungere una didascalia + + + + + + + +
                                                              +
                                                              + +
                                                              +

                                                              Aggiungere una didascalia

                                                              +

                                                              La Didascalia è un’etichetta numerata che puoi applicare ad oggetti, come equazioni, tabelle, figure e immagini all'interno dei tuoi documenti.

                                                              +

                                                              Ciò semplifica il riferimento all'interno del testo in quanto è presente un'etichetta facilmente riconoscibile sull'oggetto.

                                                              +

                                                              Per aggiungere la didascalia ad un oggetto:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • seleziona l'oggetto a cui applicare una didascalia;
                                                              • +
                                                              • passa alla scheda Riferimenti nella barra degli strumenti in alto;
                                                              • +
                                                              • + fai clic sull’icona Didascalia Didascalia nella barra degli strumenti in alto o fai clic con il pulsante destro sull’oggetto e seleziona l’opzione Inserisci didascalia per aprire la finestra di dialogo Inserisci didascalia +
                                                                  +
                                                                • scegli l'etichetta da utilizzare per la didascalia facendo clic sul menù a discesa Etichetta e selezionando l'oggetto; o
                                                                • +
                                                                • crea una nuova etichetta facendo clic sul pulsante Aggiungi per aprire la finestra di dialogo Etichetta Inserisci un nome per l’etichetta nella casella di testo, quindi fai clic sul pulsante OK per aggiungere una nova etichetta all’elenco etichette;
                                                                • +
                                                                +
                                                              • seleziona la casella di controllo Includi il numero del capitolo per modificare la numerazione della didascalia;
                                                              • +
                                                              • nel menu a discesa Inserisci, seleziona Prima per posizionare l’etichetta sopra l’oggetto o Dopo per posizionarla sotto l’oggetto;
                                                              • +
                                                              • seleziona la casella di controllo Escudere l’etichetta dalla didascalia per lasciare solo un numero per questa particolare didascalia in conformità con un numero progressivo;
                                                              • +
                                                              • puoi quindi scegliere come numerare la didascalia assegnando uno stile specifico alla didascalia e aggiungendo un separatore;
                                                              • +
                                                              • per applicare la didascalia fare clic sul pulsante OK.
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              Didascalia

                                                              +

                                                              Eliminare un’etichetta

                                                              +

                                                              Per eliminare un’etichetta creata, seleziona l’etichetta dall’elenco Etichetta nella finestra di dialogo Inserisci didascalia, quindi fai clic sul pulsante Elimina. L'etichetta creata verrà immediatamente eliminata.

                                                              +

                                                              Nota: è possibile eliminare le etichette create ma non è possibile eliminare le etichette predefinite.

                                                              +

                                                              Formattazione delle didascalie

                                                              +

                                                              Non appena aggiungi una didascalia, un nuovo stile per le didascalie viene automaticamente aggiunto alla sezione stili. Per modificare lo stile di tutte le didascalie in tutto il documento, è necessario seguire questi passaggi:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • seleziona il testo da cui verrà copiato un nuovo stile di Didascalia;
                                                              • +
                                                              • cerca lo stile Didascalia (evidenziato in blu per impostazione predefinita) nella galleria degli stili che puoi trovare nella scheda Home nella barra degli struemnti in alto;
                                                              • +
                                                              • fai clic con il tatso destro e scegli l’opzione Aggiorna da selezione.
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              Didascalia

                                                              +

                                                              Raggruppare le didascalie

                                                              +

                                                              Se si desidera poter spostare l'oggetto e la didascalia come un'unica unità, è necessario raggruppare l’oggetto e la didascalia.

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • seleziona l’oggetto;
                                                              • +
                                                              • seleziona uno degli Stili di disposizione testo usando la barra laterale destra;
                                                              • +
                                                              • aggiungi la didascalia come menzionato sopra;
                                                              • +
                                                              • tieni premuto il tasto Shift e seleziona gli elementi che desideri raggruppare;
                                                              • +
                                                              • fai clic con il tatso destro su uno degli elementi e seleziona Disponi > Ragruppa.
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              Didascalia

                                                              +

                                                              Ora entrambi gli elementi si sposteranno simultaneamente se li trascini da qualche altra parte nel documento.

                                                              +

                                                              Per separare gli oggetti fai clic rispettivamente su Disponi > Separa.

                                                              +
                                                              + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/AddFormulasInTables.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/AddFormulasInTables.htm new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a70d2bd2a --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/AddFormulasInTables.htm @@ -0,0 +1,167 @@ + + + + Use formulas in tables + + + + + + + +
                                                              +
                                                              + +
                                                              +

                                                              Use formulas in tables

                                                              +

                                                              Insert a formula

                                                              +

                                                              You can perform simple calculations on data in table cells by adding formulas. To insert a formula into a table cell,

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. place the cursor within the cell where you want to display the result,
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. click the Add formula button at the right sidebar,
                                                              4. +
                                                              5. in the Formula Settings window that opens, enter the necessary formula into the Formula field. +

                                                                You can enter a needed formula manually using the common mathematical operators (+, -, *, /), e.g. =A1*B2 or use the Paste Function drop-down list to select one of the embedded functions, e.g. =PRODUCT(A1,B2).

                                                                +

                                                                Add formula

                                                                +
                                                              6. +
                                                              7. manually specify necessary arguments within the parentheses in the Formula field. If the function requires several arguments, they must be separated by commas.
                                                              8. +
                                                              9. use the Number Format drop-down list if you want to display the result in a certain number format,
                                                              10. +
                                                              11. click OK.
                                                              12. +
                                                              +

                                                              The result will be displayed in the selected cell.

                                                              +

                                                              To edit the added formula, select the result in the cell and click the Add formula button at the right sidebar, make the necessary changes in the Formula Settings window and click OK.

                                                              +
                                                              +

                                                              Add references to cells

                                                              +

                                                              You can use the following arguments to quickly add references to cell ranges:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • ABOVE - a reference to all the cells in the column above the selected cell
                                                              • +
                                                              • LEFT - a reference to all the cells in the row to the left of the selected cell
                                                              • +
                                                              • BELOW - a reference to all the cells in the column below the selected cell
                                                              • +
                                                              • RIGHT - a reference to all the cells in the row to the right of the selected cell
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              These arguments can be used with the AVERAGE, COUNT, MAX, MIN, PRODUCT, SUM functions.

                                                              +

                                                              You can also manually enter references to a certain cell (e.g., A1) or a range of cells (e.g., A1:B3).

                                                              +

                                                              Use bookmarks

                                                              +

                                                              If you have added some bookmarks to certain cells within your table, you can use these bookmarks as arguments when entering formulas.

                                                              +

                                                              In the Formula Settings window, place the cursor within the parentheses in the Formula entry field where you want the argument to be added and use the Paste Bookmark drop-down list to select one of the previously added bookmarks.

                                                              +

                                                              Update formula results

                                                              +

                                                              If you change some values in the table cells, you will need to manually update formula results:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • To update a single formula result, select the necessary result and press F9 or right-click the result and use the Update field option from the menu.
                                                              • +
                                                              • To update several formula results, select the necessary cells or the entire table and press F9.
                                                              • +
                                                              +
                                                              +

                                                              Embedded functions

                                                              +

                                                              You can use the following standard math, statistical and logical functions:

                                                              + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
                                                              CategoryFunctionDescriptionExample
                                                              MathematicalABS(x)The function is used to return the absolute value of a number.=ABS(-10)
                                                              Returns 10
                                                              LogicalAND(logical1, logical2, ...)The function is used to check if the logical value you enter is TRUE or FALSE. The function returns 1 (TRUE) if all the arguments are TRUE.=AND(1>0,1>3)
                                                              Returns 0
                                                              StatisticalAVERAGE(argument-list)The function is used to analyze the range of data and find the average value.=AVERAGE(4,10)
                                                              Returns 7
                                                              StatisticalCOUNT(argument-list)The function is used to count the number of the selected cells which contain numbers ignoring empty cells or those contaning text.=COUNT(A1:B3)
                                                              Returns 6
                                                              LogicalDEFINED()The function evaluates if a value in the cell is defined. The function returns 1 if the value is defined and calculated without errors and returns 0 if the value is not defined or calculated with an error.=DEFINED(A1)
                                                              LogicalFALSE()The function returns 0 (FALSE) and does not require any argument.=FALSE
                                                              Returns 0
                                                              MathematicalINT(x)The function is used to analyze and return the integer part of the specified number.=INT(2.5)
                                                              Returns 2
                                                              StatisticalMAX(number1, number2, ...)The function is used to analyze the range of data and find the largest number.=MAX(15,18,6)
                                                              Returns 18
                                                              StatisticalMIN(number1, number2, ...)The function is used to analyze the range of data and find the smallest number.=MIN(15,18,6)
                                                              Returns 6
                                                              MathematicalMOD(x, y)The function is used to return the remainder after the division of a number by the specified divisor.=MOD(6,3)
                                                              Returns 0
                                                              LogicalNOT(logical)The function is used to check if the logical value you enter is TRUE or FALSE. The function returns 1 (TRUE) if the argument is FALSE and 0 (FALSE) if the argument is TRUE.=NOT(2<5)
                                                              Returns 0
                                                              LogicalOR(logical1, logical2, ...)The function is used to check if the logical value you enter is TRUE or FALSE. The function returns 0 (FALSE) if all the arguments are FALSE.=OR(1>0,1>3)
                                                              Returns 1
                                                              MathematicalPRODUCT(argument-list)The function is used to multiply all the numbers in the selected range of cells and return the product.=PRODUCT(2,5)
                                                              Returns 10
                                                              MathematicalROUND(x, num_digits)The function is used to round the number to the desired number of digits.=ROUND(2.25,1)
                                                              Returns 2.3
                                                              MathematicalSIGN(x)The function is used to return the sign of a number. If the number is positive, the function returns 1. If the number is negative, the function returns -1. If the number is 0, the function returns 0.=SIGN(-12)
                                                              Returns -1
                                                              MathematicalSUM(argument-list)The function is used to add all the numbers in the selected range of cells and return the result.=SUM(5,3,2)
                                                              Returns 10
                                                              LogicalTRUE()The function returns 1 (TRUE) and does not require any argument.=TRUE
                                                              Returns 1
                                                              +
                                                              + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/AddHyperlinks.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/AddHyperlinks.htm new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1e14af14f --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/AddHyperlinks.htm @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + Add hyperlinks + + + + + + + +
                                                              +
                                                              + +
                                                              +

                                                              Add hyperlinks

                                                              +

                                                              To add a hyperlink,

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. place the cursor to a position where a hyperlink will be added,
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. switch to the Insert or References tab of the top toolbar,
                                                              4. +
                                                              5. click the Hyperlink icon Hyperlink icon at the top toolbar,
                                                              6. +
                                                              7. after that the Hyperlink Settings window will appear where you can specify the hyperlink parameters: +
                                                                  +
                                                                • + Select a link type you wish to insert: +

                                                                  Use the External Link option and enter a URL in the format http://www.example.com in the Link to field below if you need to add a hyperlink leading to an external website.

                                                                  +

                                                                  Hyperlink Settings window

                                                                  +

                                                                  Use the Place in Document option and select one of the existing headings in the document text or one of previously added bookmarks if you need to add a hyperlink leading to a certain place in the same document.

                                                                  +

                                                                  Hyperlink Settings window

                                                                  +
                                                                • +
                                                                • Display - enter a text that will get clickable and lead to the address specified in the upper field.
                                                                • +
                                                                • ScreenTip text - enter a text that will become visible in a small pop-up window that provides a brief note or label pertaining to the hyperlink being pointed to.
                                                                • +
                                                                +
                                                              8. +
                                                              9. Click the OK button.
                                                              10. +
                                                              +

                                                              To add a hyperlink, you can also use the Ctrl+K key combination or click with the right mouse button at a position where a hyperlink will be added and select the Hyperlink option in the right-click menu.

                                                              +

                                                              Note: it's also possible to select a character, word, word combination, text passage with the mouse or using the keyboard and + then open the Hyperlink Settings window as described above. In this case, the Display field will be filled with the text fragment you selected.

                                                              +

                                                              By hovering the cursor over the added hyperlink, the ScreenTip will appear containing the text you specified. + You can follow the link by pressing the CTRL key and clicking the link in your document.

                                                              +

                                                              To edit or delete the added hyperlink, click it with the right mouse button, select the Hyperlink option and then the action you want to perform - Edit Hyperlink or Remove Hyperlink.

                                                              +
                                                              + + diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/AddWatermark.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/AddWatermark.htm new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d174d5dfc --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/AddWatermark.htm @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + Aggiungere una filigrana + + + + + + + +
                                                              +
                                                              + +
                                                              +

                                                              Aggiungere una filigrana

                                                              +

                                                              Una filigrana è un testo o un’immagine inserita sotto il livello del testo principale. Le filigrane di testo permettono d’indicare lo stato del tuo documento (per esempio, riservato, bozza etc.), le filigrane d’immagine permetto di aggiungere un’immagine, ad esempio il logo delle tua azienda.

                                                              +

                                                              Per aggiungere una filigrana all’interno di un documento:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. Passa alla scheda Layout di Pagina nella barra degli strumenti in alto.
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. Fai clic sull’icona Filigrana Filigrana nella barra degli strumenti in alto e scegli l’opzione Filigrana personalizzata dal menù. Successivamente verrà visualizzata la finestra Impostazioni Filigrana.
                                                              4. +
                                                              5. Seleziona un tipo di filigrana che desideri inserire: +
                                                                  +
                                                                • Utilizza l’opzione Testo filigrana e rogola i parametri disponibili: +

                                                                  Testo filigrana

                                                                  +
                                                                    +
                                                                  • Lingua - selezionare una delle lingue disponibili dalla lista,
                                                                  • +
                                                                  • Testo - selezionare uno degli esempi di testo disponibili nella lingua selezionata. Per l'inglese sono disponibili i seguenti testi di filigrana: ASAP, CONFIDENTIAL, COPY, DO NOT COPY, DRAFT, ORIGINAL, PERSONAL, SAMPLE, TOP SECRET, URGENT.
                                                                  • +
                                                                  • Carattere - seleziona il nome e la dimensione del carattere dagli elenchi a discesa corrispondenti. Utilizzare le icone sulla destra per impostare il colore del carattere o applicare uno degli stili di decorazione del carattere: Grassetto, Corsivo, Sotttolineato, Barrato,
                                                                  • +
                                                                  • Semitrasparente - seleziona questa casella se desideri applicare la trasparenza,
                                                                  • +
                                                                  • Layout - seleziona l’opzione Diagonale od Orizzonatale.
                                                                  • +
                                                                  +
                                                                • +
                                                                • Utilizza l’opzione Immagine filigrana e regola i parametri disponibili: +

                                                                  Immagine filigrana

                                                                  +
                                                                    +
                                                                  • Scegli l'origine del file immagine utilizzando uno dei pulsanti: Da file o Da URL - l'immagine verrà visualizzata nella finestra di anteprima a destra,
                                                                  • +
                                                                  • Ridimensiona - seleziona il valore di scala necessario tra quelli disponibili: Auto, 500%, 200%, 150%, 100%, 50%.
                                                                  • +
                                                                  +
                                                                • +
                                                                +
                                                              6. +
                                                              7. Fai clic sul pulsante OK.
                                                              8. +
                                                              +

                                                              Per modificare la filigrana aggiunta, apri la finestra Impostazioni Filigrana come descritto sopra, modifica i parametri necessari e fai clic su OK.

                                                              +

                                                              Per eleminare la filigrana aggiunta, fai clic sull’icona Filigrana Filigrana nella scheda Layout di Pagina della barra degli strumenti in alto e scegli l’opzione Rimuovi filigrana dal menù. È anche possibile utilizzare l'opzione Nessuno nella finestra Impostazioni Filigrana.

                                                              + +
                                                              + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/AlignArrangeObjects.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/AlignArrangeObjects.htm new file mode 100644 index 000000000..464482ca9 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/AlignArrangeObjects.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + Align and arrange objects on a page + + + + + + + +
                                                              +
                                                              + +
                                                              +

                                                              Align and arrange objects on a page

                                                              +

                                                              The added autoshapes, images, charts or text boxes can be aligned, grouped and ordered on a page. To perform any of these actions, first select a separate object or several objects on the page. To select several objects, hold down the Ctrl key and left-click the necessary objects. To select a text box, click on its border, not the text within it. After that you can use either the icons at the Layout tab of the top toolbar described below or the analogous options from the right-click menu.

                                                              +

                                                              Align objects

                                                              +

                                                              To align two or more selected objects,

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. Click the Align icon Align icon at the Layout tab of the top toolbar and select one of the following options: +
                                                                  +
                                                                • Align to Page to align objects relative to the edges of the page,
                                                                • +
                                                                • Align to Margin to align objects relative to the page margins,
                                                                • +
                                                                • Align Selected Objects (this option is selected by default) to align objects relative to each other,
                                                                • +
                                                                +
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. Click the Align icon Align icon once again and select the necessary alignment type from the list: +
                                                                  +
                                                                • Align Left Align Left icon - to line up the objects horizontally by the left edge of the leftmost object/left edge of the page/left page margin,
                                                                • +
                                                                • Align Center Align Center icon - to line up the objects horizontally by their centers/center of the page/center of the space between the left and right page margins,
                                                                • +
                                                                • Align Right Align Right icon - to line up the objects horizontally by the right edge of the rightmost object/right edge of the page/right page margin,
                                                                • +
                                                                • Align Top Align Top icon - to line up the objects vertically by the top edge of the topmost object/top edge of the page/top page margin,
                                                                • +
                                                                • Align Middle Align Middle icon - to line up the objects vertically by their middles/middle of the page/middle of the space between the top and bottom page margins,
                                                                • +
                                                                • Align Bottom Align Bottom icon - to line up the objects vertically by the bottom edge of the bottommost object/bottom edge of the page/bottom page margin.
                                                                • +
                                                                +
                                                              4. +
                                                              +

                                                              Alternatively, you can right-click the selected objects, choose the Align option from the contextual menu and then use one of the available alignment options.

                                                              +

                                                              If you want to align a single object, it can be aligned relative to the edges of the page or to the page margins. The Align to Margin option is selected by default in this case.

                                                              +

                                                              Distribute objects

                                                              +

                                                              To distribute three or more selected objects horizontally or vertically so that the equal distance appears between them,

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. + Click the Align icon Align icon at the Layout tab of the top toolbar and select one of the following options: +
                                                                  +
                                                                • Align to Page to distribute objects between the edges of the page,
                                                                • +
                                                                • Align to Margin to distribute objects between the page margins,
                                                                • +
                                                                • Align Selected Objects (this option is selected by default) to distribute objects between two outermost selected objects,
                                                                • +
                                                                +
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. + Click the Align icon Align icon once again and select the necessary distribution type from the list: +
                                                                  +
                                                                • Distribute Horizontally Distribute Horizontally icon - to distribute objects evenly between the leftmost and rightmost selected objects/left and right edges of the page/left and right page margins.
                                                                • +
                                                                • Distribute Vertically Distribute Vertically icon - to distribute objects evenly between the topmost and bottommost selected objects/top and bottom edges of the page/top and bottom page margins.
                                                                • +
                                                                +
                                                              4. +
                                                              +

                                                              Alternatively, you can right-click the selected objects, choose the Align option from the contextual menu and then use one of the available distribution options.

                                                              +

                                                              Note: the distribution options are disabled if you select less than three objects.

                                                              +

                                                              Group objects

                                                              +

                                                              To group two or more selected objects or ungroup them, click the arrow next to the Group icon Group icon at the Layout tab of the top toolbar and select the necessary option from the list:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • Group Group icon - to join several objects into a group so that they can be simultaneously rotated, moved, resized, aligned, arranged, copied, pasted, formatted like a single object.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Ungroup Ungroup icon - to ungroup the selected group of the previously joined objects.
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              Alternatively, you can right-click the selected objects, choose the Arrange option from the contextual menu and then use the Group or Ungroup option.

                                                              +

                                                              Note: the Group option is disabled if you select less than two objects. The Ungroup option is available only when a group of the previously joined objects is selected.

                                                              +

                                                              Arrange objects

                                                              +

                                                              To arrange objects (i.e. to change their order when several objects overlap each other), you can use the Bring Forward icon Bring Forward and Send Backward icon Send Backward icons at the Layout tab of the top toolbar and select the necessary arrangement type from the list.

                                                              +

                                                              To move the selected object(s) forward, click the arrow next to the Bring Forward icon Bring Forward icon at the Layout tab of the top toolbar and select the necessary arrangement type from the list:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • Bring To Foreground Bring To Foreground icon - to move the object(s) in front of all other objects,
                                                              • +
                                                              • Bring Forward Bring Forward icon - to move the selected object(s) by one level forward as related to other objects.
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              To move the selected object(s) backward, click the arrow next to the Send Backward icon Send Backward icon at the Layout tab of the top toolbar and select the necessary arrangement type from the list:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • Send To Background Send To Background icon - to move the object(s) behind all other objects,
                                                              • +
                                                              • Send Backward Send Backward icon - to move the selected object(s) by one level backward as related to other objects.
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              Alternatively, you can right-click the selected object(s), choose the Arrange option from the contextual menu and then use one of the available arrangement options.

                                                              +
                                                              + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/AlignText.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/AlignText.htm new file mode 100644 index 000000000..17c901935 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/AlignText.htm @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ + + + + Allineare il testo in un paragrafo + + + + + + + +
                                                              +
                                                              + +
                                                              +

                                                              Allineare il testo in un paragrafo

                                                              +

                                                              Il testo è comunemente allineato in quattro modi: sinistra, destra, centro o giustificato. Per farlo

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. posizionare il cursore nella posizione in cui si desidera applicare l'allineamento (può trattarsi di una nuova riga o di testo già immesso),
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. passare alla scheda Home della barra degli strumenti superiore,
                                                              4. +
                                                              5. selezionare il tipo di allineamento che si desidera applicare: +
                                                                  +
                                                                • L’allineamento a sinistra con il testo allineato dal lato sinistro della pagina (il lato destro rimane non allineato) viene eseguito con l'icona Allinea a sinistra Align left icon situata nella barra degli strumenti superiore.
                                                                • +
                                                                • L'allineamento al centro con il testo allineato al centro della pagina (il lato destro e il lato sinistro rimane non allineato) viene eseguito con l'icona Allinea al centro Align center icon situata nella barra degli strumenti superiore.
                                                                • +
                                                                • L'allineamento a destra con il testo allineato dal lato destro della pagina (il lato sinistro rimane non allineato) viene eseguito con l'icona Allinea a destra Align right icon situata nella barra degli strumenti superiore.
                                                                • +
                                                                • L'allineamento giustificato con il testo allineato sia dal lato sinistro che da quello destro della pagina (la spaziatura aggiuntiva viene aggiunta se necessario per mantenere l'allineamento) viene eseguita con l'icona Giustificato Justify icon situata nella barra degli strumenti superiore.
                                                                • +
                                                                +
                                                              6. +
                                                              +

                                                              I parametri di allineamento sono disponibili anche nella finestra Paragrafo - Impostazioni avanzate.

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. fare clic con il pulsante destro del mouse sul testo e scegliere l'opzione Impostazioni avanzate del paragrafo dal menu contestuale o utilizzare l'opzione Mostra impostazioni avanzate nella barra laterale destra,
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. aprire la finestra Paragrafo - Impostazioni avanzate, passare alla scheda Rientri e spaziatura
                                                              4. +
                                                              5. selezionare uno dei tipi di allineamento dall'elenco Allineamento: A sinistra, Al centro, A destra, Giustificato,
                                                              6. +
                                                              7. fare clic sul pulsante OK per applicare le modifiche.
                                                              8. +
                                                              +

                                                              Paragraph Advanced Settings - Indents & Spacing

                                                              +
                                                              + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/BackgroundColor.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/BackgroundColor.htm new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e06f8a3be --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/BackgroundColor.htm @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + + + Selezionare il colore di sfondo per un paragrafo + + + + + + + +
                                                              +
                                                              + +
                                                              +

                                                              Selezionare il colore di sfondo per un paragrafo

                                                              +

                                                              Il colore di sfondo viene applicato all'intero paragrafo e riempie completamente tutto lo spazio del paragrafo dal margine sinistro della pagina al margine destro della pagina.

                                                              +

                                                              Per applicare un colore di sfondo a un determinato paragrafo o modificare quello corrente,

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. selezionare una combinazione di colori per il documento da quelle disponibili facendo clic sull'icona Cambia combinazione colori Cambia combinazione colori nella scheda Home della barra degli strumenti superiore
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. posiziona il cursore all'interno del paragrafo che ti interessa o seleziona diversi paragrafi con il mouse o l'intero testo usando la combinazione di tasti Ctrl+A
                                                              4. +
                                                              5. aprire la finestra delle tavolozze dei colori. È possibile accedervi in uno dei seguenti modi: +
                                                                  +
                                                                • fare clic sulla freccia verso il basso accanto all'icona Paragraph background color Icon nella scheda Home della barra degli strumenti superiore, oppure
                                                                • +
                                                                • clicca sul campo del colore accanto alla didascalia Colore sfondo nella barra laterale destra, oppure
                                                                • +
                                                                • fare clic sul link "Mostra impostazioni avanzate" nella barra laterale destra o selezionare l'opzione "Impostazioni avanzate del paragrafo" nel menu di scelta rapida, quindi passa alla scheda 'Bordi e riempimento' nella finestra "Paragrafo - Impostazioni avanzate" e fare clic sul campo del colore accanto alla didascalia Colore sfondo.
                                                                • +
                                                                +
                                                              6. +
                                                              7. selezionare qualsiasi colore nelle tavolloze disponibili
                                                              8. +
                                                              +

                                                              Dopo aver selezionato il colore necessario utilizzando l'icona Paragraph background color Icon, sarai in grado di applicare questo colore a qualsiasi paragrafo selezionato semplicemente facendo clic sull'icona Selected paragraph background color (visualizza il colore selezionato), senza la necessità di scegliere nuovamente questo colore sulla tavolozza. Se utilizzi l'opzione Colore sfondo nella barra laterale destra o all'interno della finestra 'Paragrafo - Impostazioni avanzate' window, ricorda che il colore selezionato non viene mantenuto per un accesso rapido. (Queste opzioni possono essere utili se si desidera selezionare un colore di sfondo diverso per un paragrafo specifico, mentre si utilizza anche un colore generale selezionato con l'aiuto dell'icona Paragraph background color Icon icon).

                                                              +
                                                              +

                                                              Per cancellare il colore di sfondo di un determinato paragrafo,

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. posiziona il cursore all'interno del paragrafo che ti interessa o seleziona diversi paragrafi con il mouse o l'intero testo usando la combinazione di tasti Ctrl+A
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. aprire la finestra delle tavolozze dei colori facendo clic sul campo colore accanto alla didascalia Colore sfondo nella barra laterale destra
                                                              4. +
                                                              5. selezionare l'icona No Fill.
                                                              6. +
                                                              +
                                                              + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/ChangeColorScheme.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/ChangeColorScheme.htm new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ee991f38f --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/ChangeColorScheme.htm @@ -0,0 +1,32 @@ + + + + Change color scheme + + + + + + + +
                                                              +
                                                              + +
                                                              +

                                                              Change color scheme

                                                              +

                                                              Le combinazioni di colori vengono applicate all'intero documento. Vengono utilizzati per modificare rapidamente l'aspetto del documento, poiché definiscono la tavolozza Temi Colori per gli elementi del documento font, sfondo, tabelle, forme automatiche, grafici). Se hai applicato alcuni Tema Colori agli elementi del documento e poi hai selezionato una combinazione di colori, diversa, i colori applicati nel documento cambieranno di conseguenza.

                                                              +

                                                              Per modificare una combinazione di colori, fai clic sulla freccia verso il basso accanto all'icona Cambia combinazione di colori Cambia combinazione di colori nella scheda Home della barra degli strumenti in alto e seleziona la combinazione di colori necessaria tra quelle disponibili: Office, Scala di grigi, Apice, Aspetto, Civico, Concorso, Equità, Flow, Fonderia, Mediana, Metro, Modulo, Odulent, Oriel, Origine, Carta, Solstizio, Technic, Trek, Urbana, Verve. La combinazione di colori selezionata verrà evidenziata nell'elenco.

                                                              +

                                                              Color Schemes

                                                              +

                                                              Dopo aver selezionato la combinazione di colori preferita, è possibile selezionare i colori in una finestra tavolozze colori che corrisponde all'elemento del documento a cui si desidera applicare il colore. Per la maggior parte degli elementi del documento, è possibile accedere alla finestra delle tavolozze dei colori facendo clic sulla casella colorata nella barra laterale destra quando viene selezionato l'elemento necessario. Per il carattere, questa finestra può essere aperta usando la freccia verso il basso accanto all'icona Colore carattere Font color nella scheda Home della barra degli strumenti in alto. Sono disponibili le seguenti tavolozze:

                                                              +

                                                              Palette

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • Tema Colori - i colori che corrispondono alla combinazione di colori selezionata del documento.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Colori Standard - i colori predefiniti impostati. La combinazione di colori selezionata non li influenza.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Colori personalizzati - fai clic su questa voce se non è disponibile il colore desiderato nelle tavolozze a disposizione. Seleziona la gamma dei colori desiderata spostando il cursore verticale del colore e poi imposta il colore specifico trascinando il selettore colore all'interno del grande campo quadrato del colore. Dopo aver selezionato un colore con il selettore colori, i valori di colore RGB e sRGB appropriati verranno visualizzati nei campi a destra. È inoltre possibile specificare un colore sulla base del modello di colore RGB inserendo i valori numerici necessari nei campi R, G, B (rosso, verde, blu) o immettendo il codice esadecimale sRGB nel campo contrassegnato dal segno #. Il colore selezionato apparirà in anteprima nella casella Nuova. Se l'oggetto è stato precedentemente riempito con un qualsiasi colore personalizzato, questo colore verrà visualizzato nella casella Corrente , in modo da poter confrontare i colori originali con quelli modificati. Quando hai definito il colore, fai clic sul pulsante Aggiungi: +

                                                                Palette - Custom Color

                                                                +

                                                                Il colore personalizzato verrà applicato all'elemento selezionato e aggiunto alla tavolozza Colori personalizzati.

                                                                +
                                                              • +
                                                              +
                                                              + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/ChangeWrappingStyle.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/ChangeWrappingStyle.htm new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1954f7bce --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/ChangeWrappingStyle.htm @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + Change text wrapping + + + + + + + +
                                                              +
                                                              + +
                                                              +

                                                              Change text wrapping

                                                              +

                                                              The Wrapping Style option determines the way the object is positioned relative to the text. You can change the text wrapping style for inserted objects, such as shapes, images, charts, text boxes or tables.

                                                              +

                                                              Change text wrapping for shapes, images, charts, text boxes

                                                              +

                                                              To change the currently selected wrapping style:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. select a separate object on the page left-clicking it. To select a text box, click on its border, not the text within it.
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. open the text wrapping settings: +
                                                                  +
                                                                • switch to the the Layout tab of the top toolbar and click the arrow next to the Wrapping icon Wrapping icon, or
                                                                • +
                                                                • right-click the object and select the Wrapping Style option from the contextual menu, or
                                                                • +
                                                                • right-click the object, select the Advanced Settings option and switch to the Text Wrapping tab of the object Advanced Settings window.
                                                                • +
                                                                +
                                                              4. +
                                                              5. select the necessary wrapping style: +
                                                                  +
                                                                • +

                                                                  Wrapping Style - Inline Inline - the object is considered to be a part of the text, like a character, so when the text moves, the object moves as well. In this case the positioning options are inaccessible.

                                                                  +

                                                                  If one of the following styles is selected, the object can be moved independently of the text and positioned on the page exactly:

                                                                  +
                                                                • +
                                                                • Wrapping Style - Square Square - the text wraps the rectangular box that bounds the object.

                                                                • +
                                                                • Wrapping Style - Tight Tight - the text wraps the actual object edges.

                                                                • +
                                                                • Wrapping Style - Through Through - the text wraps around the object edges and fills in the open white space within the object. So that the effect can appear, use the Edit Wrap Boundary option from the right-click menu.

                                                                • +
                                                                • Wrapping Style - Top and bottom Top and bottom - the text is only above and below the object.

                                                                • +
                                                                • Wrapping Style - In front In front - the object overlaps the text.

                                                                • +
                                                                • Wrapping Style - Behind Behind - the text overlaps the object.

                                                                • +
                                                                +
                                                              6. +
                                                              +

                                                              If you select the Square, Tight, Through, or Top and bottom style, you will be able to set up some additional parameters - Distance from Text at all sides (top, bottom, left, right). To access these parameters, right-click the object, select the Advanced Settings option and switch to the Text Wrapping tab of the object Advanced Settings window. Set the necessary values and click OK.

                                                              +

                                                              If you select a wrapping style other than Inline, the Position tab is also available in the object Advanced Settings window. To learn more on these parameters, please refer to the corresponding pages with the instructions on how to work with shapes, images or charts.

                                                              +

                                                              If you select a wrapping style other than Inline, you can also edit the wrap boundary for images or shapes. Right-click the object, select the Wrapping Style option from the contextual menu and click the Edit Wrap Boundary option. Drag wrap points to customize the boundary. To create a new wrap point, click anywhere on the red line and drag it to the necessary position. Editing Wrap Boundary

                                                              +

                                                              Change text wrapping for tables

                                                              +

                                                              For tables, the following two wrapping styles are available: Inline table and Flow table.

                                                              +

                                                              To change the currently selected wrapping style:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. right-click the table and select the Table Advanced Settings option,
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. switch to the Text Wrapping tab of the Table - Advanced Settings window, +
                                                              4. +
                                                              5. + select one of the following options: +
                                                                  +
                                                                • Inline table is used to select the wrapping style when the text is broken by the table as well as to set the alignment: left, center, right.
                                                                • +
                                                                • Flow table is used to select the wrapping style when the text is wrapped around the table.
                                                                • +
                                                                +
                                                              6. +
                                                              +

                                                              Using the Text Wrapping tab of the Table - Advanced Settings window you can also set up the following additional parameters:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • For inline tables, you can set the table Alignment type (left, center or right) and Indent from left.
                                                              • +
                                                              • For floating tables, you can set the Distance from text and the table position at the Table Position tab.
                                                              • +
                                                              +
                                                              + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/CopyClearFormatting.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/CopyClearFormatting.htm new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c4c83509f --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/CopyClearFormatting.htm @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ + + + + Copy/clear text formatting + + + + + + + +
                                                              +
                                                              + +
                                                              +

                                                              Copy/clear text formatting

                                                              +

                                                              To copy a certain text formatting,

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. select the text passage which formatting you need to copy with the mouse or using the keyboard,
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. click the Copy style Copy style icon at the Home tab of the top toolbar (the mouse pointer will look like this Mouse pointer while pasting style),
                                                              4. +
                                                              5. select the text passage you want to apply the same formatting to.
                                                              6. +
                                                              +

                                                              To apply the copied formatting to multiple text passages,

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. select the text passage which formatting you need to copy with the mouse or using the keyboard,
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. double-click the Copy style Copy style icon at the Home tab of the top toolbar (the mouse pointer will look like this Mouse pointer while pasting style and the Copy style icon will remain selected: Multiple copying style),
                                                              4. +
                                                              5. select the necessary text passages one by one to apply the same formatting to each of them,
                                                              6. +
                                                              7. to exit this mode, click the Copy style Multiple copying style icon once again or press the Esc key on the keyboard.
                                                              8. +
                                                              +

                                                              To quickly remove the applied formatting from your text,

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. select the text passage which formatting you want to remove,
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. click the Clear style Clear style icon at the Home tab of the top toolbar.
                                                              4. +
                                                              +
                                                              + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/CopyPasteUndoRedo.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/CopyPasteUndoRedo.htm new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c3dadfacc --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/CopyPasteUndoRedo.htm @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + Copy/paste text passages, undo/redo your actions + + + + + + + +
                                                              +
                                                              + +
                                                              +

                                                              Copy/paste text passages, undo/redo your actions

                                                              +

                                                              Utilizza le operazioni di base negli Appunti

                                                              +

                                                              Per tagliare, copiare e incollare passaggi di testo ed oggetti inseriti (forme, immagini, grafici) all'interno del documento corrente, utilizzate le opzioni corrispondenti dal menù del tasto destro del mouse o le icone disponibili in qualsiasi scheda della barra superiore degli strumenti:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • Taglia – seleziona un frammento di testo o un oggetto ed utilizza l'opzione Taglia dal menu di scelta rapida col tasto destro del mouse per tagliare la selezione ed inviarla alla memoria degli appunti del computer. I dati tagliati potranno essere successivamente inseriti in un'altra posizione nello stesso documento.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Copia – seleziona un frammento di testo o un oggetto ed utilizza l'opzione Copia dal menu di scelta rapida del tasto destro del mouse o l'icona Copia Copy icon nella barra superiore degli strumenti per copiare la selezione nella memoria degli appunti del computer. I dati copiati potranno essere successivamente inseriti in un'altra posizione nello stesso documento.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Incolla – trova la posizione nel documento in cui è necessario incollare il frammento / l’oggetto di testo precedentemente copiato ed utilizza l'opzione Incolla dal menu di scelta rapida del tasto destro del mouse o l'icona Incolla Paste icon nella barra superiore degli strumenti. Il testo / l’oggetto verrà inserito nella posizione corrente del cursore. + I dati potranno essere precedentemente copiati dallo stesso documento.
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              Nella versione online, le seguenti combinazioni di tasti vengono utilizzate solo per copiare o incollare dati da / in un altro documento o qualche altro programma, nella versione desktop, è possibile utilizzare entrambe le corrispondenti opzioni di pulsanti / menu e combinazioni di tasti per qualsiasi operazione di copia / incolla:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • Ctrl+X combinazione di tasti per tagliare;
                                                              • +
                                                              • Ctrl+C combinazione di tasti per copiare;
                                                              • +
                                                              • Ctrl+V combinazione di tasti per incollare.
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              Nota: invece di tagliare ed incollare il testo all'interno dello stesso documento, è sufficiente selezionare il passaggio di testo desiderato e trascinarlo nella posizione voluta.

                                                              +

                                                              Usa la funzione Incolla speciale

                                                              +

                                                              Una volta che il testo incollato viene copiato, il pulsante Incolla speciale Incolla speciale apparirà accanto al passaggio di testo inserito. Fa’ clic su questo pulsante per selezionare l'opzione Incolla desiderata:

                                                              +

                                                              Quando si incolla il testo del paragrafo o del testo all'interno delle forme automatiche, sono disponibili le seguenti opzioni:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • Incolla - consente di incollare il testo copiato mantenendo la formattazione originale.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Mantieni solo testo - consente di incollare il testo senza la sua formattazione originale.
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              Se si incolla una tabella copiata in una tabella esistente, si renderanno disponibili le seguenti opzioni:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • Sovrascrivi celle - consente di sostituire il contenuto della tabella esistente con i dati incollati. Questa opzione è selezionata come impostazione predefinita.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Annida Tabella  - consente di incollare la tabella copiata come tabella nidificata nella cella selezionata della tabella esistente..
                                                              • +
                                                              • Mantieni solo testo - consente di incollare il testo senza la sua formattazione originale.
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              Annulla / ripristina le tue azioni

                                                              +

                                                              Per eseguire le operazioni di annullamento / ripristino , utilizzate le icone corrispondenti nell'intestazione dell'editor o le scorciatoie da tastiera:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • Annulla – usa l’icona Annulla Undo icon nella parte sinistra dell'intestazione dell'editor o la combinazione di tasti Ctrl+Z per annullare l'ultima operazione eseguita.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Ripristina – usa l’icona Ripristina Redo icon nella parte sinistra dell'intestazione dell'editor o la combinazione di tasti Ctrl+Y per ripristinare l'ultima operazione annullata
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              + Nota: quando si co-modifica un documento in modalità Veloce, la possibilità di ripristinare l'ultima operazione annullata non è disponibile. +

                                                              +
                                                              + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/CreateLists.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/CreateLists.htm new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b12aa7b83 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/CreateLists.htm @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ + + + + Create lists + + + + + + + +
                                                              +
                                                              + +
                                                              +

                                                              Create lists

                                                              +

                                                              To create a list in your document,

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. place the cursor to the position where a list will be started (this can be a new line or the already entered text),
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. switch to the Home tab of the top toolbar,
                                                              4. +
                                                              5. + select the list type you would like to start: +
                                                                  +
                                                                • Unordered list with markers is created using the Bullets Unordered List icon icon situated at the top toolbar
                                                                • +
                                                                • + Ordered list with digits or letters is created using the Numbering Ordered List icon icon situated at the top toolbar +

                                                                  Note: click the downward arrow next to the Bullets or Numbering icon to select how the list is going to look like.

                                                                  +
                                                                • +
                                                                +
                                                              6. +
                                                              7. now each time you press the Enter key at the end of the line a new ordered or unordered list item will appear. To stop that, press the Backspace key and continue with the common text paragraph.
                                                              8. +
                                                              +

                                                              The program also creates numbered lists automatically when you enter digit 1 with a dot or a bracket and a space after it: 1., 1). Bulleted lists can be created automatically when you enter the -, * characters and a space after them.

                                                              +

                                                              You can also change the text indentation in the lists and their nesting using the Multilevel list Multilevel list icon, Decrease indent Decrease indent icon, and Increase indent Increase indent icon icons at the Home tab of the top toolbar.

                                                              +

                                                              Note: the additional indentation and spacing parameters can be changed at the right sidebar and in the advanced settings window. To learn more about it, read the Change paragraph indents and Set paragraph line spacing section.

                                                              + +

                                                              Join and separate lists

                                                              +

                                                              To join a list to the preceding one:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. click the first item of the second list with the right mouse button,
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. use the Join to previous list option from the contextual menu.
                                                              4. +
                                                              +

                                                              The lists will be joined and the numbering will continue in accordance with the first list numbering.

                                                              + +

                                                              To separate a list:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. click the list item where you want to begin a new list with the right mouse button,
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. use the Separate list option from the contextual menu.
                                                              4. +
                                                              +

                                                              The list will be separated, and the numbering in the second list will begin anew.

                                                              + +

                                                              Change numbering

                                                              +

                                                              To continue sequential numbering in the second list according to the previous list numbering:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. click the first item of the second list with the right mouse button,
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. use the Continue numbering option from the contextual menu.
                                                              4. +
                                                              +

                                                              The numbering will continue in accordance with the first list numbering.

                                                              + +

                                                              To set a certain numbering initial value:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. click the list item where you want to apply a new numbering value with the right mouse button,
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. use the Set numbering value option from the contextual menu,
                                                              4. +
                                                              5. in a new window that opens, set the necessary numeric value and click the OK button.
                                                              6. +
                                                              + +

                                                              Change the list settings

                                                              +

                                                              To change the bulleted or numbered list settings, such as a bullet/number type, alignment, size and color:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. click an existing list item or select the text you want to format as a list,
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. click the Bullets Unordered List icon or Numbering Ordered List icon icon at the Home tab of the top toolbar,
                                                              4. +
                                                              5. select the List Settings option,
                                                              6. +
                                                              7. + the List Settings window will open. The bulleted list settings window looks like this: +

                                                                Bulleted List Settings window

                                                                +

                                                                The numbered list settings window looks like this:

                                                                +

                                                                Numbered List Settings window

                                                                +

                                                                For the bulleted list, you can choose a character used as a bullet, while for the numbered list you can choose the numbering type. The Alignment, Size and Color options are the same both for the bulleted and numbered lists.

                                                                +
                                                                  +
                                                                • Bullet - allows to select the necessary character used for the bulleted list. When you click on the Font and Symbol field, the Symbol window opens that allows to choose one of the available characters. To learn more on how to work with symbols, you can refer to this article.
                                                                • +
                                                                • Type - allows to select the necessary numbering type used for the numbered list. The following options are available: None, 1, 2, 3,..., a, b, c,..., A, B, C,..., i, ii, iii,..., I, II, III,....
                                                                • +
                                                                • Alignment - allows to select the necessary bullet/number alignment type that is used to align bullets/numbers horizontally within the space designated for them. The available alignment types are the following: Left, Center, Right.
                                                                • +
                                                                • Size - allows to select the necessary bullet/number size. The Like a text option is selected by default. When this option is selected, the bullet or number size corresponds to the text size. You can choose one of the predefined sizes from 8 to 96.
                                                                • +
                                                                • Color - allows to select the necessary bullet/number color. The Like a text option is selected by default. When this option is selected, the bullet or number color corresponds to the text color. You can choose the Automatic option to apply the automatic color, or select one of the theme colors, or standard colors on the palette, or specify a custom color.
                                                                • +
                                                                +

                                                                All the changes are displayed in the Preview field.

                                                                +
                                                              8. +
                                                              9. click OK to apply the changes and close the settings window.
                                                              10. +
                                                              +

                                                              To change the multilevel list settings,

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. click a list item,
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. click the Multilevel list Multilevel list icon icon at the Home tab of the top toolbar,
                                                              4. +
                                                              5. select the List Settings option,
                                                              6. +
                                                              7. + the List Settings window will open. The multilevel list settings window looks like this: +

                                                                Multilevel List Settings window

                                                                +

                                                                Choose the necessary level of the list in the Level field on the left, then use the buttons on the top to adjust the bullet or number appearance for the selected level:

                                                                +
                                                                  +
                                                                • Type - allows to select the necessary numbering type used for the numbered list or the necessary character used for the bulleted list. The following options are available for the numbered list: None, 1, 2, 3,..., a, b, c,..., A, B, C,..., i, ii, iii,..., I, II, III,.... For the bulleted list, you can choose one of the default symbols or use the New bullet option. When you click this option, the Symbol window opens that allows to choose one of the available characters. To learn more on how to work with symbols, you can refer to this article.
                                                                • +
                                                                • Alignment - allows to select the necessary bullet/number alignment type that is used to align bullets/numbers horizontally within the space designated for them at the beginning of the paragraph. The available alignment types are the following: Left, Center, Right.
                                                                • +
                                                                • Size - allows to select the necessary bullet/number size. The Like a text option is selected by default. You can choose one of the predefined sizes from 8 to 96.
                                                                • +
                                                                • Color - allows to select the necessary bullet/number color. The Like a text option is selected by default. When this option is selected, the bullet or number color corresponds to the text color. You can choose the Automatic option to apply the automatic color, or select one of the theme colors, or standard colors on the palette, or specify a custom color.
                                                                • +
                                                                +

                                                                All the changes are displayed in the Preview field.

                                                                +
                                                              8. +
                                                              9. click OK to apply the changes and close the settings window.
                                                              10. +
                                                              +
                                                              + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/CreateTableOfContents.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/CreateTableOfContents.htm new file mode 100644 index 000000000..dc4d4346f --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/CreateTableOfContents.htm @@ -0,0 +1,121 @@ + + + + Create a Table of Contents + + + + + + + +
                                                              +
                                                              + +
                                                              +

                                                              Create a Table of Contents

                                                              +

                                                              A table of contents contains a list of all chapters (sections etc.) in a document and displays the numbers of the pages where each chapter is started. This allows to easily navigate through a multi-page document quickly switching to the necessary part of the text. The table of contents is generated automatically on the base of the document headings formatted using built-in styles. This makes it easy to update the created table of contents without the necessity to edit headings and change page numbers manually if the document text has been changed.

                                                              +

                                                              Define the heading structure

                                                              +

                                                              Format headings

                                                              +

                                                              First of all, format headings in you document using one of the predefined styles. To do that,

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. Select the text you want to include into the table of contents.
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. Open the style menu on the right side of the Home tab at the top toolbar.
                                                              4. +
                                                              5. Click the style you want to apply. By default, you can use the Heading 1 - Heading 9 styles. +

                                                                Note: if you want to use other styles (e.g. Title, Subtitle etc.) to format headings that will be included into the table of contents, you will need to adjust the table of contents settings first (see the corresponding section below). To learn more about available formatting styles, you can refer to this page.

                                                                +
                                                              6. +
                                                              + +

                                                              Once the headings are formatted, you can click the Navigation icon Navigation icon at the left sidebar to open the panel that displays the list of all headings with corresponding nesting levels. This panel allows to easily navigate between headings in the document text as well as manage the heading structure.

                                                              +

                                                              Right-click on a heading in the list and use one of the available options from the menu:

                                                              +

                                                              Navigation panel

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • Promote - to move the currently selected heading up to the higher level in the hierarchical structure, e.g. change it from Heading 2 to Heading 1.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Demote - to move the currently selected heading down to the lower level in the hierarchical structure, e.g. change it from Heading 1 to Heading 2.
                                                              • +
                                                              • New heading before - to add a new empty heading of the same level before the currently selected one.
                                                              • +
                                                              • New heading after - to add a new empty heading of the same level after the currently selected one.
                                                              • +
                                                              • New subheading - to add a new empty subheading (i.e. a heading with lower level) after the currently selected heading. +

                                                                When the heading or subheading is added, click on the added empty heading in the list and type in your own text. This can be done both in the document text and on the Navigation panel itself.

                                                                +
                                                              • +
                                                              • Select content - to select the text below the current heading in the document (including the text related to all subheadings of this heading).
                                                              • +
                                                              • Expand all - to expand all levels of headings at the Navigation panel.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Collapse all - to collapse all levels of headings, excepting level 1, at the Navigation panel.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Expand to level - to expand the heading structure to the selected level. E.g. if you select level 3, then levels 1, 2 and 3 will be expanded, while level 4 and all lower levels will be collapsed.
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              To manually expand or collapse separate heading levels, use the arrows to the left of the headings.

                                                              +

                                                              To close the Navigation panel, click the Navigation icon Navigation icon at the left sidebar once again.

                                                              +

                                                              Insert a Table of Contents into the document

                                                              +

                                                              To insert a table of contents into your document:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. Position the insertion point where you want to add the table of contents.
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. Switch to the References tab of the top toolbar.
                                                              4. +
                                                              5. Click the Table of Contents icon Table of Contents icon at the top toolbar, or
                                                                + click the arrow next to this icon and select the necessary layout option from the menu. You can select the table of contents that displays headings, page numbers and leaders, or headings only. +

                                                                Table of Contents options

                                                                +

                                                                Note: the table of content appearance can be adjusted later via the table of contents settings.

                                                                +
                                                              6. +
                                                              +

                                                              The table of contents will be added at the current cursor position. To change the position of the table of contents, you can select the table of contents field (content control) and simply drag it to the desired place. To do that, click the Table of Contents content control button button in the upper left corner of the table of contents field and drag it without releasing the mouse button to another position in the document text.

                                                              +

                                                              Moving the table of contents

                                                              +

                                                              To navigate between headings, press the Ctrl key and click the necessary heading within the table of contents field. You will go to the corresponding page.

                                                              +

                                                              Adjust the created Table of Contents

                                                              +

                                                              Refresh the Table of Contents

                                                              +

                                                              After the table of contents is created, you may continue editing your text by adding new chapters, changing their order, removing some paragraphs, or expanding the text related to a heading so that the page numbers that correspond to the preceding or subsequent section may change. In this case, use the Refresh option to automatically apply all changes to the table of contents.

                                                              +

                                                              Click the arrow next to the Refresh icon Refresh icon at the References tab of the top toolbar and select the necessary option from the menu:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • Refresh entire table - to add the headings that you added to the document, remove the ones you deleted from the document, update the edited (renamed) headings as well as update page numbers.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Refresh page numbers only - to update page numbers without applying changes to the headings.
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              Alternatively, you can select the table of contents in the document text and click the Refresh icon Refresh icon at the top of the table of contents field to display the above mentioned options.

                                                              +

                                                              Refreshing the table of contents

                                                              +

                                                              It's also possible to right-click anywhere within the table of contents and use the corresponding options from the contextual menu.

                                                              +

                                                              Contextual menu

                                                              +

                                                              Adjust the Table of Contents settings

                                                              +

                                                              To open the table of contents settings, you can proceed in the following ways:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • Click the arrow next to the Table of Contents icon Table of Contents icon at the top toolbar and select the Settings option from the menu.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Select the table of contents in the document text, click the arrow next to the table of contents field title and select the Settings option from the menu. +

                                                                Table of Contents options

                                                                +
                                                              • +
                                                              • Right-click anywhere within the table of contents and use the Table of contents settings option from the contextual menu.
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              A new window will open where you can adjust the following settings:

                                                              +

                                                              Table of Contents settings window

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • Show page numbers - this option allows to choose if you want to display page numbers or not.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Right align page numbers - this option allows to choose if you want to align page numbers by the right side of the page or not.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Leader - this option allows to choose the leader type you want to use. A leader is a line of characters (dots or hyphens) that fills the space between a heading and a corresponding page number. It's also possible to select the None option if you do not want to use leaders.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Format Table of Contents as links - this option is checked by default. If you uncheck it, you will not be able to switch to the necessary chapter by pressing Ctrl and clicking the corresponding heading.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Build table of contents from - this section allows to specify the necessary number of outline levels as well as the default styles that will be used to create the table of contents. Check the necessary radio button: +
                                                                  +
                                                                • Outline levels - when this option is selected, you will be able to adjust the number of hierarchical levels used in the table of contents. Click the arrows in the Levels field to decrease or increase the number of levels (the values from 1 to 9 are available). E.g., if you select the value of 3, headings that have levels 4 - 9 will not be included into the table of contents. +
                                                                • +
                                                                • Selected styles - when this option is selected, you can specify additional styles that can be used to build the table of contents and assign a corresponding outline level to each of them. Specify the desired level value in the field to the right of the style. Once you save the settings, you will be able to use this style when creating the table of contents. +

                                                                  Table of Contents settings window

                                                                  +
                                                                • +
                                                                +
                                                              • +
                                                              • Styles - this options allows to select the desired appearance of the table of contents. Select the necessary style from the drop-down list. The preview field above displays how the table of contents should look like. +

                                                                The following four default styles are available: Simple, Standard, Modern, Classic. The Current option is used if you customize the table of contents style.

                                                                +
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              Click the OK button within the settings window to apply the changes.

                                                              +

                                                              Customize the Table of Contents style

                                                              +

                                                              After you apply one of the default table of contents styles within the Table of Contents settings window, you can additionally modify this style so that the text within the table of contents field looks like you need.

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. Select the text within the table of contents field, e.g. pressing the Table of Contents content control button button in the upper left corner of the table of contents content control.
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. Format table of contents items changing their font type, size, color or applying the font decoration styles.
                                                              4. +
                                                              5. Consequently update styles for items of each level. To update the style, right-click the formatted item, select the Formatting as Style option from the contextual menu and click the Update toc N style option (toc 2 style corresponds to items that have level 2, toc 3 style corresponds to items with level 3 and so on). +

                                                                Update Table of Contents style

                                                                +
                                                              6. +
                                                              7. Refresh the table of contents.
                                                              8. +
                                                              +

                                                              Remove the Table of Contents

                                                              +

                                                              To remove the table of contents from the document:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • click the arrow next to the Table of Contents icon Table of Contents icon at the top toolbar and use the Remove table of contents option,
                                                              • +
                                                              • or click the arrow next to the table of contents content control title and use the Remove table of contents option.
                                                              • +
                                                              +
                                                              + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/DecorationStyles.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/DecorationStyles.htm new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1b315857e --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/DecorationStyles.htm @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + Apply font decoration styles + + + + + + + +
                                                              +
                                                              + +
                                                              +

                                                              Apply font decoration styles

                                                              +

                                                              You can apply various font decoration styles using the corresponding icons situated at the Home tab of the top toolbar.

                                                              +

                                                              Note: in case you want to apply the formatting to the text already present in the document, select it with the mouse or using the keyboard and apply the formatting.

                                                              + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
                                                              BoldBoldIs used to make the font bold giving it more weight.
                                                              ItalicItalicIs used to make the font italicized giving it some right side tilt.
                                                              UnderlineUnderlineIs used to make the text underlined with the line going under the letters.
                                                              StrikeoutStrikeoutIs used to make the text struck out with the line going through the letters.
                                                              SuperscriptSuperscriptIs used to make the text smaller and place it to the upper part of the text line, e.g. as in fractions.
                                                              SubscriptSubscriptIs used to make the text smaller and place it to the lower part of the text line, e.g. as in chemical formulas.
                                                              +

                                                              To access advanced font settings, click the right mouse button and select the Paragraph Advanced Settings option from the menu or use the Show advanced settings link at the right sidebar. Then the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window will open where you need to switch to the Font tab.

                                                              +

                                                              Here you can use the following font decoration styles and settings:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • Strikethrough is used to make the text struck out with the line going through the letters.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Double strikethrough is used to make the text struck out with the double line going through the letters.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Superscript is used to make the text smaller and place it to the upper part of the text line, e.g. as in fractions.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Subscript is used to make the text smaller and place it to the lower part of the text line, e.g. as in chemical formulas.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Small caps is used to make all letters lower case.
                                                              • +
                                                              • All caps is used to make all letters upper case.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Spacing is used to set the space between the characters. Increase the default value to apply the Expanded spacing, or decrease the default value to apply the Condensed spacing. Use the arrow buttons or enter the necessary value in the box.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Position is used to set the characters position (vertical offset) in the line. Increase the default value to move characters upwards, or decrease the default value to move characters downwards. Use the arrow buttons or enter the necessary value in the box. +

                                                                All the changes will be displayed in the preview field below.

                                                                +
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              Paragraph Advanced Settings - Font

                                                              +
                                                              + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/FontTypeSizeColor.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/FontTypeSizeColor.htm new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0c604481e --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/FontTypeSizeColor.htm @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + Set font type, size, and color + + + + + + + +
                                                              +
                                                              + +
                                                              +

                                                              Set font type, size, and color

                                                              +

                                                              You can select the font type, its size and color using the corresponding icons situated at the Home tab of the top toolbar.

                                                              +

                                                              Note: in case you want to apply the formatting to the text already present in the document, select it with the mouse or using the keyboard and apply the formatting.

                                                              + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
                                                              FontFontIs used to select one of the fonts from the list of the available ones. If a required font is not available in the list, you can download and install it on your operating system, after that the font will be available for use in the desktop version.
                                                              Font sizeFont sizeIs used to select among the preset font size values from the dropdown list (the default values are: 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 36, 48, 72 and 96). It's also possible to manually enter a custom value to the font size field and then press Enter.
                                                              Increment font sizeIncrement font sizeIs used to change the font size making it larger one point each time the button is pressed.
                                                              Decrement font sizeDecrement font sizeIs used to change the font size making it smaller one point each time the button is pressed.
                                                              Highlight colorHighlight colorIs used to mark separate sentences, phrases, words, or even characters by adding a color band that imitates highlighter pen effect around the text. You can select the necessary part of the text and then click the downward arrow next to the icon to select a color on the palette (this color set does not depend on the selected Color scheme and includes 16 colors) - the color will be applied to the text selection. Alternatively, you can first choose a highlight color and then start selecting the text with the mouse - the mouse pointer will look like this Mouse pointer while highlighting and you'll be able to highlight several different parts of your text sequentially. To stop highlighting just click the icon once again. To clear the highlight color, choose the No Fill option. Highlight color is different from the Background color Paragraph background color icon as the latter is applied to the whole paragraph and completely fills all the paragraph space from the left page margin to the right page margin.
                                                              Font colorFont colorIs used to change the color of the letters/characters in the text. By default, the automatic font color is set in a new blank document. It is displayed as a black font on the white background. If you change the background color into black, the font color will automatically change into white to keep the text clearly visible. To choose a different color, click the downward arrow next to the icon and select a color from the available palettes (the colors on the Theme Colors palette depend on the selected color scheme). After you change the default font color, you can use the Automatic option in the color palettes window to quickly restore the automatic color for the selected text passage.
                                                              +

                                                              Note: to learn more about the work with color palettes, please refer to this page.

                                                              +
                                                              + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/FormattingPresets.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/FormattingPresets.htm new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7d1a4cd95 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/FormattingPresets.htm @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ + + + + Apply formatting styles + + + + + + + +
                                                              +
                                                              + +
                                                              +

                                                              Apply formatting styles

                                                              +

                                                              Each formatting style is a set of predefined formatting options: (font size, color, line spacing, alignment etc.). The styles allow you to quickly format different parts of the document (headings, subheadings, lists, normal text, quotes) instead of applying several formatting options individually each time. This also ensures a consistent appearance throughout the entire document.

                                                              +

                                                              Style application depends on whether a style is a paragraph style (normal, no spacing, headings, list paragraph etc.), or the text style (based on the font type, size, color), as well as on whether a text passage is selected, or the mouse cursor is positioned within a word. In some cases you might need to select the necessary style from the style library twice so that it can be applied correctly: when you click the style at the style panel for the first time, the paragraph style properties are applied. When you click it for the second time, the text properties are applied.

                                                              +

                                                              Use default styles

                                                              +

                                                              To apply one of the available text formatting styles,

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. place the cursor within the paragraph you need, or select several paragraphs you want to apply one of the formatting styles to,
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. select the needed style from the style gallery on the right at the Home tab of the top toolbar.
                                                              4. +
                                                              +

                                                              The following formatting styles are available: normal, no spacing, heading 1-9, title, subtitle, quote, intense quote, list paragraph, footer, header, footnote text.

                                                              +

                                                              Formatting styles

                                                              +

                                                              Edit existing styles and create new ones

                                                              +

                                                              To change an existing style:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. Apply the necessary style to a paragraph.
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. Select the paragraph text and change all the formatting parameters you need.
                                                              4. +
                                                              5. Save the changes made: +
                                                                  +
                                                                • right-click the edited text, select the Formatting as Style option and then choose the Update 'StyleName' Style option ('StyleName' corresponds to the style you've applied at the step 1),
                                                                • +
                                                                • or select the edited text passage with the mouse, drop-down the style gallery, right-click the style you want to change and select the Update from selection option.
                                                                • +
                                                                +
                                                              6. +
                                                              +

                                                              Once the style is modified, all the paragraphs within the document formatted using this style will change their appearance correspondingly.

                                                              +

                                                              To create a completely new style:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. Format a text passage as you need.
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. Select an appropriate way to save the style: +
                                                                  +
                                                                • right-click the edited text, select the Formatting as Style option and then choose the Create new Style option,
                                                                • +
                                                                • or select the edited text passage with the mouse, drop-down the style gallery and click the New style from selection option.
                                                                • +
                                                                +
                                                              4. +
                                                              5. Set the new style parameters in the Create New Style window that opens: +

                                                                Create New Style window

                                                                +
                                                                  +
                                                                • Specify the new style name in the text entry field.
                                                                • +
                                                                • Select the desired style for the subsequent paragraph from the Next paragraph style list. It's also possible to choose the Same as created new style option.
                                                                • +
                                                                • Click the OK button.
                                                                • +
                                                                +
                                                              6. +
                                                              +

                                                              The created style will be added to the style gallery.

                                                              +

                                                              Manage your custom styles:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • To restore the default settings of a certain style you've changed, right-click the style you want to restore and select the Restore to default option.
                                                              • +
                                                              • To restore the default settings of all the styles you've changed, right-click any default style in the style gallery and select the Restore all to default styles option. +

                                                                Edited style menu

                                                                +
                                                              • +
                                                              • To delete one of the new styles you've created, right-click the style you want to delete and select the Delete style option.
                                                              • +
                                                              • To delete all the new styles you've created, right-click any new style you've created and select the Delete all custom styles option. +

                                                                Custom style menu

                                                                +
                                                              • +
                                                              +
                                                              + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4c79fccde --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm @@ -0,0 +1,216 @@ + + + + Insert autoshapes + + + + + + + +
                                                              +
                                                              + +
                                                              +

                                                              Insert autoshapes

                                                              +

                                                              Insert an autoshape

                                                              +

                                                              To add an autoshape to your document,

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar,
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. click the Shape icon Shape icon at the top toolbar,
                                                              4. +
                                                              5. select one of the available autoshape groups: basic shapes, figured arrows, math, charts, stars & ribbons, callouts, buttons, rectangles, lines,
                                                              6. +
                                                              7. click the necessary autoshape within the selected group,
                                                              8. +
                                                              9. place the mouse cursor where you want the shape to be put,
                                                              10. +
                                                              11. once the autoshape is added you can change its size, position and properties. +

                                                                Note: to add a caption within the autoshape make sure the shape is selected on the page and start typing your text. The text you add in this way becomes a part of the autoshape (when you move or rotate the shape, the text moves or rotates with it).

                                                                +
                                                              12. +
                                                              +

                                                              It's also possible to add a caption to the autoshape. To learn more on how to work with captions for autoshapes, you can refer to this article.

                                                              +

                                                              Move and resize autoshapes

                                                              +

                                                              Reshaping autoshapeTo change the autoshape size, drag small squares Square icon situated on the shape edges. To maintain the original proportions of the selected autoshape while resizing, hold down the Shift key and drag one of the corner icons. +

                                                              When modifying some shapes, for example figured arrows or callouts, the yellow diamond-shaped Yellow diamond icon icon is also available. It allows you to adjust some aspects of the shape, for example, the length of the head of an arrow.

                                                              +

                                                              To alter the autoshape position, use the Arrow icon that appears after hovering your mouse cursor over the autoshape. Drag the autoshape to the necessary position without releasing the mouse button. + When you move the autoshape, guide lines are displayed to help you position the object on the page precisely (if a wrapping style other than inline is selected). + To move the autoshape by one-pixel increments, hold down the Ctrl key and use the keybord arrows. + To move the autoshape strictly horizontally/vertically and prevent it from moving in a perpendicular direction, hold down the Shift key when dragging.

                                                              +

                                                              To rotate the autoshape, hover the mouse cursor over the rotation handle Rotation handle and drag it clockwise or counterclockwise. To constrain the rotation angle to 15 degree increments, hold down the Shift key while rotating.

                                                              +

                                                              + Note: the list of keyboard shortcuts that can be used when working with objects is available here. +

                                                              +
                                                              +

                                                              Adjust autoshape settings

                                                              +

                                                              To align and arrange autoshapes, use the right-click menu. The menu options are:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • Cut, Copy, Paste - standard options which are used to cut or copy a selected text/object and paste a previously cut/copied text passage or object to the current cursor position.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Arrange is used to bring the selected autoshape to foreground, send to background, move forward or backward as well as group or ungroup shapes to perform operations with several of them at once. To learn more on how to arrange objects you can refer to this page.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Align is used to align the shape left, center, right, top, middle, bottom. To learn more on how to align objects you can refer to this page.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Wrapping Style is used to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind - or edit the wrap boundary. The Edit Wrap Boundary option is available only if you select a wrapping style other than Inline. Drag wrap points to customize the boundary. To create a new wrap point, click anywhere on the red line and drag it to the necessary position. Editing Wrap Boundary
                                                              • +
                                                              • Rotate is used to rotate the shape by 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise as well as to flip the shape horizontally or vertically.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Shape Advanced Settings is used to open the 'Shape - Advanced Settings' window.
                                                              • +
                                                              +
                                                              +

                                                              Some of the autoshape settings can be altered using the Shape settings tab of the right sidebar. To activate it click the shape and choose the Shape settings Shape settings icon icon on the right. Here you can change the following properties:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • Fill - use this section to select the autoshape fill. You can choose the following options: +
                                                                  +
                                                                • Color Fill - select this option to specify the solid color you want to fill the inner space of the selected autoshape with. +

                                                                  Color Fill

                                                                  +

                                                                  Click the colored box below and select the necessary color from the available color sets or specify any color you like:

                                                                  +
                                                                • +
                                                                • Gradient Fill - select this option to fill the shape with two colors which smoothly change from one to another. +

                                                                  Gradient Fill

                                                                  +
                                                                    +
                                                                  • Style - choose one of the available options: Linear (colors change in a straight line i.e. along a horizontal/vertical axis or diagonally at a 45 degree angle) or Radial (colors change in a circular path from the center to the edges).
                                                                  • +
                                                                  • Direction - choose a template from the menu. If the Linear gradient is selected, the following directions are available: top-left to bottom-right, top to bottom, top-right to bottom-left, right to left, bottom-right to top-left, bottom to top, bottom-left to top-right, left to right. If the Radial gradient is selected, only one template is available.
                                                                  • +
                                                                  • Gradient - click on the left slider Slider under the gradient bar to activate the color box which corresponds to the first color. Click on the color box on the right to choose the first color in the palette. Drag the slider to set the gradient stop i.e. the point where one color changes into another. Use the right slider under the gradient bar to specify the second color and set the gradient stop.
                                                                  • +
                                                                  +
                                                                • +
                                                                • Picture or Texture - select this option to use an image or a predefined texture as the shape background. +

                                                                  Picture or Texture Fill

                                                                  +
                                                                    +
                                                                  • If you wish to use an image as a background for the shape, you can add an image From File selecting it on your computer HDD or From URL inserting the appropriate URL address into the opened window.
                                                                  • +
                                                                  • If you wish to use a texture as a background for the shape, open the From Texture menu and select the necessary texture preset. +

                                                                    Currently, the following textures are available: canvas, carton, dark fabric, grain, granite, grey paper, knit, leather, brown paper, papyrus, wood.

                                                                    +
                                                                  • +
                                                                  +
                                                                    +
                                                                  • In case the selected Picture has less or more dimensions than the autoshape has, you can choose the Stretch or Tile setting from the dropdown list. +

                                                                    The Stretch option allows you to adjust the image size to fit the autoshape size so that it could fill the space completely.

                                                                    +

                                                                    The Tile option allows you to display only a part of the bigger image keeping its original dimensions or repeat the smaller image keeping its original dimensions over the autoshape surface so that it could fill the space completely.

                                                                    +

                                                                    Note: any selected Texture preset fills the space completely, but you can apply the Stretch effect if necessary.

                                                                    +
                                                                  • +
                                                                  +
                                                                • +
                                                                • Pattern - select this option to fill the shape with a two-colored design composed of regularly repeated elements. +

                                                                  Pattern Fill

                                                                  +
                                                                    +
                                                                  • Pattern - select one of the predefined designs from the menu.
                                                                  • +
                                                                  • Foreground color - click this color box to change the color of the pattern elements.
                                                                  • +
                                                                  • Background color - click this color box to change the color of the pattern background.
                                                                  • +
                                                                  +
                                                                • +
                                                                • No Fill - select this option if you don't want to use any fill.
                                                                • +
                                                                +
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              Autoshape Settings tab

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • Opacity - use this section to set an Opacity level dragging the slider or entering the percent value manually. The default value is 100%. It corresponds to the full opacity. The 0% value corresponds to the full transparency.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Stroke - use this section to change the autoshape stroke width, color or type. +
                                                                  +
                                                                • To change the stroke width, select one of the available options from the Size dropdown list. The available options are: 0.5 pt, 1 pt, 1.5 pt, 2.25 pt, 3 pt, 4.5 pt, 6 pt. Alternatively, select the No Line option if you don't want to use any stroke.
                                                                • +
                                                                • To change the stroke color, click on the colored box below and select the necessary color.
                                                                • +
                                                                • To change the stroke type, select the necessary option from the corresponding dropdown list (a solid line is applied by default, you can change it to one of the available dashed lines).
                                                                • +
                                                                +
                                                              • +
                                                              • Rotation is used to rotate the shape by 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise as well as to flip the shape horizontally or vertically. Click one of the buttons: +
                                                                  +
                                                                • Rotate counterclockwise icon to rotate the shape by 90 degrees counterclockwise
                                                                • +
                                                                • Rotate clockwise icon to rotate the shape by 90 degrees clockwise
                                                                • +
                                                                • Flip horizontally icon to flip the shape horizontally (left to right)
                                                                • +
                                                                • Flip vertically icon to flip the shape vertically (upside down)
                                                                • +
                                                                +
                                                              • +
                                                              • Wrapping Style - use this section to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind (for more information see the advanced settings description below).
                                                              • +
                                                              • Change Autoshape - use this section to replace the current autoshape with another one selected from the dropdown list.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Show shadow - check this option to display shape with shadow.
                                                              • +
                                                              +
                                                              +

                                                              Adjust autoshape advanced settings

                                                              +

                                                              To change the advanced settings of the autoshape, right-click it and select the Advanced Settings option in the menu or use the Show advanced settings link at the right sidebar. The 'Shape - Advanced Settings' window will open:

                                                              +

                                                              Shape - Advanced Settings

                                                              +

                                                              The Size tab contains the following parameters:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • Width - use one of these options to change the autoshape width. +
                                                                  +
                                                                • Absolute - specify an exact value measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified at the File -> Advanced Settings... tab).
                                                                • +
                                                                • Relative - specify a percentage relative to the left margin width, the margin (i.e. the distance between the left and right margins), the page width, or the right margin width.
                                                                • +
                                                                +
                                                              • +
                                                              • Height - use one of these options to change the autoshape height. +
                                                                  +
                                                                • Absolute - specify an exact value measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified at the File -> Advanced Settings... tab).
                                                                • +
                                                                • Relative - specify a percentage relative to the margin (i.e. the distance between the top and bottom margins), the bottom margin height, the page height, or the top margin height.
                                                                • +
                                                                +
                                                              • +
                                                              • If the Lock aspect ratio option is checked, the width and height will be changed together preserving the original shape aspect ratio.
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              Shape - Advanced Settings

                                                              +

                                                              The Rotation tab contains the following parameters:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • Angle - use this option to rotate the shape by an exactly specified angle. Enter the necessary value measured in degrees into the field or adjust it using the arrows on the right.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Flipped - check the Horizontally box to flip the shape horizontally (left to right) or check the Vertically box to flip the shape vertically (upside down).
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              Shape - Advanced Settings

                                                              +

                                                              The Text Wrapping tab contains the following parameters:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • Wrapping Style - use this option to change the way the shape is positioned relative to the text: it will either be a part of the text (in case you select the inline style) or bypassed by it from all sides (if you select one of the other styles). +
                                                                  +
                                                                • Wrapping Style - Inline Inline - the shape is considered to be a part of the text, like a character, so when the text moves, the shape moves as well. In this case the positioning options are inaccessible.

                                                                  +

                                                                  If one of the following styles is selected, the shape can be moved independently of the text and positioned on the page exactly:

                                                                  +
                                                                • +
                                                                • Wrapping Style - Square Square - the text wraps the rectangular box that bounds the shape.

                                                                • +
                                                                • Wrapping Style - Tight Tight - the text wraps the actual shape edges.

                                                                • +
                                                                • Wrapping Style - Through Through - the text wraps around the shape edges and fills in the open white space within the shape. So that the effect can appear, use the Edit Wrap Boundary option from the right-click menu.

                                                                • +
                                                                • Wrapping Style - Top and bottom Top and bottom - the text is only above and below the shape.

                                                                • +
                                                                • Wrapping Style - In front In front - the shape overlaps the text.

                                                                • +
                                                                • Wrapping Style - Behind Behind - the text overlaps the shape.

                                                                • +
                                                                +
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              If you select the square, tight, through, or top and bottom style you will be able to set up some additional parameters - distance from text at all sides (top, bottom, left, right).

                                                              +

                                                              Shape - Advanced Settings

                                                              +

                                                              The Position tab is available only if you select a wrapping style other than inline. This tab contains the following parameters that vary depending on the selected wrapping style:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • + The Horizontal section allows you to select one of the following three autoshape positioning types: +
                                                                  +
                                                                • Alignment (left, center, right) relative to character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin,
                                                                • +
                                                                • Absolute Position measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified at the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) to the right of character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin,
                                                                • +
                                                                • Relative position measured in percent relative to the left margin, margin, page or right margin.
                                                                • +
                                                                +
                                                              • +
                                                              • + The Vertical section allows you to select one of the following three autoshape positioning types: +
                                                                  +
                                                                • Alignment (top, center, bottom) relative to line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin,
                                                                • +
                                                                • Absolute Position measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified at the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) below line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin,
                                                                • +
                                                                • Relative position measured in percent relative to the margin, bottom margin, page or top margin.
                                                                • +
                                                                +
                                                              • +
                                                              • Move object with text controls whether the autoshape moves as the text to which it is anchored moves.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Allow overlap controls whether two autoshapes overlap or not if you drag them near each other on the page.
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              Shape - Advanced Settings

                                                              +

                                                              The Weights & Arrows tab contains the following parameters:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • Line Style - this option group allows to specify the following parameters: +
                                                                  +
                                                                • Cap Type - this option allows to set the style for the end of the line, therefore it can be applied only to the shapes with the open outline, such as lines, polylines etc.: +
                                                                    +
                                                                  • Flat - the end points will be flat.
                                                                  • +
                                                                  • Round - the end points will be rounded.
                                                                  • +
                                                                  • Square - the end points will be square.
                                                                  • +
                                                                  +
                                                                • +
                                                                • Join Type - this option allows to set the style for the intersection of two lines, for example, it can affect a polyline or the corners of the triangle or rectangle outline: +
                                                                    +
                                                                  • Round - the corner will be rounded.
                                                                  • +
                                                                  • Bevel - the corner will be cut off angularly.
                                                                  • +
                                                                  • Miter - the corner will be pointed. It goes well to shapes with sharp angles.
                                                                  • +
                                                                  +

                                                                  Note: the effect will be more noticeable if you use a large outline width.

                                                                  +
                                                                • +
                                                                +
                                                              • +
                                                              • Arrows - this option group is available if a shape from the Lines shape group is selected. It allows to set the arrow Start and End Style and Size by selecting the appropriate option from the dropdown lists.
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              Shape - Advanced Settings

                                                              +

                                                              The Text Padding tab allows to change the autoshape Top, Bottom, Left and Right internal margins (i.e. the distance between the text within the shape and the autoshape borders).

                                                              +

                                                              Note: this tab is only available if text is added within the autoshape, otherwise the tab is disabled.

                                                              +

                                                              Shape - Advanced Settings

                                                              +

                                                              The Alternative Text tab allows to specify a Title and Description which will be read to the people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information there is in the shape.

                                                              +
                                                              + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/InsertBookmarks.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/InsertBookmarks.htm new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ef4951281 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/InsertBookmarks.htm @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + Aggiungere segnalibri + + + + + + + +
                                                              +
                                                              + +
                                                              +

                                                              Aggiungere segnalibri

                                                              +

                                                              I segnalibri consentono di passare rapidamente a una determinata posizione nel documento corrente o di aggiungere un collegamento a questa posizione all'interno del documento.

                                                              +

                                                              Per aggiungere un segnalibro all'interno di un documento:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. specificare il punto in cui si desidera aggiungere il segnalibro: +
                                                                  +
                                                                • posizionare il cursore del mouse all'inizio del passaggio di testo necessario, o
                                                                • +
                                                                • selezionare il passaggio di testo necessario,
                                                                • +
                                                                +
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. passare alla scheda Riferimenti della barra degli strumenti superiore,
                                                              4. +
                                                              5. fare clic sull'icona Icona Segnalibro Segnalibro nella barra degli strumenti superiore,
                                                              6. +
                                                              7. nella finestra Segnalibri che si apre, inserire il Nome segnalibro e fare clic sul pulsante Aggiungi - verrà aggiunto un segnalibro all'elenco dei segnalibri visualizzato di seguito, +

                                                                Nota: il nome del segnalibro dovrebbe iniziare preferibilmente con una lettera, ma può anche contenere numeri. Il nome del segnalibro non può contenere spazi, ma può includere il carattere di sottolineatura "_".

                                                                +

                                                                Segnalibri

                                                                +
                                                              8. +
                                                              +

                                                              Per passare a uno dei segnalibri aggiunti all'interno del testo del documento:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. fare click sull’icona Icona Segnalibro Segnalibro nella scheda Riferimenti della barra degli strumenti superiore,
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. nella finestra Segnalibri che si apre, selezionare il segnalibro a cui si desidera passare. Per trovare facilmente il segnalibro necessario nell'elenco è possibile ordinare l'elenco per Nome o per Posizione di un segnalibro all'interno del testo del documento,
                                                              4. +
                                                              5. selezionare l'opzione Segnalibri nascosti per visualizzare i segnalibri nascosti nell'elenco (cioè i segnalibri creati automaticamente dal programma quando si aggiungono riferimenti a una determinata parte del documento. Ad esempio, se si crea un collegamento ipertestuale a un determinato titolo all'interno del documento, l'editor di documenti crea automaticamente un segnalibro nascosto alla destinazione di questo collegamento).
                                                              6. +
                                                              7. clicca sul pulsante Vai a - il cursore sarà posizionato nella posizione all'interno del documento in cui è stato aggiunto il segnalibro selezionato, o verrà selezionato il passaggio di testo corrispondente,
                                                              8. +
                                                              9. + fare clic sul pulsante Ottieni collegamento - si aprirà una nuova finestra in cui è possibile premere il pulsante Copia per copiare il collegamento al file che specifica la posizione del segnalibro nel documento. Quando si incolla questo collegamento in una barra degli indirizzi del browser e si preme INVIO, il documento verrà aperto nella posizione in cui è stato aggiunto il segnalibro selezionato. +

                                                                Segnalibri

                                                                +

                                                                Nota: Se si desidera condividere questo collegamento con altri utenti, è inoltre necessario fornire i diritti di accesso corrispondenti al file per determinati utenti utilizzando l'opzione Condivisione nella scheda Collaborazione.

                                                                +
                                                              10. +
                                                              11. fare clic sul pulsante Chiudi per chiudere la finestra.
                                                              12. +
                                                              +

                                                              Per eliminare un segnalibro, selezionarlo nell'elenco dei segnalibri e utilizzare il pulsante Elimina.

                                                              +

                                                              Per scoprire come utilizzare i segnalibri durante la creazione di collegamenti, fare riferimento alla sezione Aggiungere collegamenti ipertestuali.

                                                              + +
                                                              + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cd976a44f --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm @@ -0,0 +1,264 @@ + + + + Insert charts + + + + + + + +
                                                              +
                                                              + +
                                                              +

                                                              Insert charts

                                                              +

                                                              Insert a chart

                                                              +

                                                              To insert a chart into your document,

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. put the cursor at the place where you want to add a chart,
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar,
                                                              4. +
                                                              5. click the Chart icon Chart icon at the top toolbar,
                                                              6. +
                                                              7. select the needed chart type from the available ones - Column, Line, Pie, Bar, Area, XY (Scatter), or Stock, +

                                                                Note: for Column, Line, Pie, or Bar charts, a 3D format is also available.

                                                                +
                                                              8. +
                                                              9. after that the Chart Editor window will appear where you can enter the necessary data into the cells using the following controls: +
                                                                  +
                                                                • Copy and Paste for copying and pasting the copied data
                                                                • +
                                                                • Undo and Redo for undoing and redoing actions
                                                                • +
                                                                • Insert function for inserting a function
                                                                • +
                                                                • Decrease decimal and Increase decimal for decreasing and increasing decimal places
                                                                • +
                                                                • Number format for changing the number format, i.e. the way the numbers you enter appear in cells
                                                                • +
                                                                +

                                                                Chart Editor window

                                                                +
                                                              10. +
                                                              11. change the chart settings clicking the Edit Chart button situated in the Chart Editor window. The Chart - Advanced Settings window will open. +

                                                                Chart - Advanced Settings window

                                                                +

                                                                The Type & Data tab allows you to change the chart type as well as the data you wish to use to create a chart.

                                                                +
                                                                  +
                                                                • Select a chart Type you wish to apply: Column, Line, Pie, Bar, Area, XY (Scatter), or Stock.
                                                                • +
                                                                • Check the selected Data Range and modify it, if necessary, clicking the Select Data button and entering the desired data range in the following format: Sheet1!A1:B4.
                                                                • +
                                                                • Choose the way to arrange the data. You can either select the Data series to be used on the X axis: in rows or in columns.
                                                                • +
                                                                +

                                                                Chart - Advanced Settings window

                                                                +

                                                                The Layout tab allows you to change the layout of chart elements.

                                                                +
                                                                  +
                                                                • + Specify the Chart Title position in regard to your chart selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: +
                                                                    +
                                                                  • None to not display a chart title,
                                                                  • +
                                                                  • Overlay to overlay and center a title on the plot area,
                                                                  • +
                                                                  • No Overlay to display the title above the plot area.
                                                                  • +
                                                                  +
                                                                • +
                                                                • + Specify the Legend position in regard to your chart selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: +
                                                                    +
                                                                  • None to not display a legend,
                                                                  • +
                                                                  • Bottom to display the legend and align it to the bottom of the plot area,
                                                                  • +
                                                                  • Top to display the legend and align it to the top of the plot area,
                                                                  • +
                                                                  • Right to display the legend and align it to the right of the plot area,
                                                                  • +
                                                                  • Left to display the legend and align it to the left of the plot area,
                                                                  • +
                                                                  • Left Overlay to overlay and center the legend to the left on the plot area,
                                                                  • +
                                                                  • Right Overlay to overlay and center the legend to the right on the plot area.
                                                                  • +
                                                                  +
                                                                • +
                                                                • + Specify the Data Labels (i.e. text labels that represent exact values of data points) parameters:
                                                                  +
                                                                    +
                                                                  • specify the Data Labels position relative to the data points selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list. The available options vary depending on the selected chart type. +
                                                                      +
                                                                    • For Column/Bar charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Inner Bottom, Inner Top, Outer Top.
                                                                    • +
                                                                    • For Line/XY (Scatter)/Stock charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Left, Right, Top, Bottom.
                                                                    • +
                                                                    • For Pie charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Fit to Width, Inner Top, Outer Top.
                                                                    • +
                                                                    • For Area charts as well as for 3D Column, Line and Bar charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center.
                                                                    • +
                                                                    +
                                                                  • +
                                                                  • select the data you wish to include into your labels checking the corresponding boxes: Series Name, Category Name, Value,
                                                                  • +
                                                                  • enter a character (comma, semicolon etc.) you wish to use for separating several labels into the Data Labels Separator entry field.
                                                                  • +
                                                                  +
                                                                • +
                                                                • Lines - is used to choose a line style for Line/XY (Scatter) charts. You can choose one of the following options: Straight to use straight lines between data points, Smooth to use smooth curves between data points, or None to not display lines.
                                                                • +
                                                                • + Markers - is used to specify whether the markers should be displayed (if the box is checked) or not (if the box is unchecked) for Line/XY (Scatter) charts. +

                                                                  Note: the Lines and Markers options are available for Line charts and XY (Scatter) charts only.

                                                                  +
                                                                • +
                                                                • + The Axis Settings section allows to specify if you wish to display Horizontal/Vertical Axis or not selecting the Show or Hide option from the drop-down list. You can also specify Horizontal/Vertical Axis Title parameters: +
                                                                    +
                                                                  • + Specify if you wish to display the Horizontal Axis Title or not selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: +
                                                                      +
                                                                    • None to not display a horizontal axis title,
                                                                    • +
                                                                    • No Overlay to display the title below the horizontal axis.
                                                                    • +
                                                                    +
                                                                  • +
                                                                  • + Specify the Vertical Axis Title orientation selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: +
                                                                      +
                                                                    • None to not display a vertical axis title,
                                                                    • +
                                                                    • Rotated to display the title from bottom to top to the left of the vertical axis,
                                                                    • +
                                                                    • Horizontal to display the title horizontally to the left of the vertical axis.
                                                                    • +
                                                                    +
                                                                  • +
                                                                  +
                                                                • +
                                                                • + The Gridlines section allows to specify which of the Horizontal/Vertical Gridlines you wish to display selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: Major, Minor, or Major and Minor. You can hide the gridlines at all using the None option. +

                                                                  Note: the Axis Settings and Gridlines sections will be disabled for Pie charts since charts of this type have no axes and gridlines.

                                                                  +
                                                                • +
                                                                +

                                                                Chart - Advanced Settings window

                                                                +

                                                                Note: the Vertical/Horizontal Axis tabs will be disabled for Pie charts since charts of this type have no axes.

                                                                +

                                                                The Vertical Axis tab allows you to change the parameters of the vertical axis also referred to as the values axis or y-axis which displays numeric values. Note that the vertical axis will be the category axis which displays text labels for the Bar charts, therefore in this case the Vertical Axis tab options will correspond to the ones described in the next section. For the XY (Scatter) charts, both axes are value axes.

                                                                +
                                                                  +
                                                                • The Axis Options section allows to set the following parameters: +
                                                                    +
                                                                  • Minimum Value - is used to specify a lowest value displayed at the vertical axis start. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the minimum value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Fixed option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right.
                                                                  • +
                                                                  • Maximum Value - is used to specify a highest value displayed at the vertical axis end. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the maximum value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Fixed option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right.
                                                                  • +
                                                                  • Axis Crosses - is used to specify a point on the vertical axis where the horizontal axis should cross it. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the axes intersection point value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Value option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right, or set the axes intersection point at the Minimum/Maximum Value on the vertical axis.
                                                                  • +
                                                                  • Display Units - is used to determine a representation of the numeric values along the vertical axis. This option can be useful if you're working with great numbers and wish the values on the axis to be displayed in more compact and readable way (e.g. you can represent 50 000 as 50 by using the Thousands display units). Select desired units from the drop-down list: Hundreds, Thousands, 10 000, 100 000, Millions, 10 000 000, 100 000 000, Billions, Trillions, or choose the None option to return to the default units.
                                                                  • +
                                                                  • Values in reverse order - is used to display values in an opposite direction. When the box is unchecked, the lowest value is at the bottom and the highest value is at the top of the axis. When the box is checked, the values are ordered from top to bottom.
                                                                  • +
                                                                  +
                                                                • +
                                                                • The Tick Options section allows to adjust the appearance of tick marks on the vertical scale. Major tick marks are the larger scale divisions which can have labels displaying numeric values. Minor tick marks are the scale subdivisions which are placed between the major tick marks and have no labels. Tick marks also define where gridlines can be displayed, if the corresponding option is set at the Layout tab. The Major/Minor Type drop-down lists contain the following placement options: +
                                                                    +
                                                                  • None to not display major/minor tick marks,
                                                                  • +
                                                                  • Cross to display major/minor tick marks on both sides of the axis,
                                                                  • +
                                                                  • In to display major/minor tick marks inside the axis,
                                                                  • +
                                                                  • Out to display major/minor tick marks outside the axis.
                                                                  • +
                                                                  +
                                                                • +
                                                                • The Label Options section allows to adjust the appearance of major tick mark labels which display values. To specify a Label Position in regard to the vertical axis, select the necessary option from the drop-down list: +
                                                                    +
                                                                  • None to not display tick mark labels,
                                                                  • +
                                                                  • Low to display tick mark labels to the left of the plot area,
                                                                  • +
                                                                  • High to display tick mark labels to the right of the plot area,
                                                                  • +
                                                                  • Next to axis to display tick mark labels next to the axis.
                                                                  • +
                                                                  +
                                                                • +
                                                                +

                                                                Chart - Advanced Settings window

                                                                +

                                                                The Horizontal Axis tab allows you to change the parameters of the horizontal axis also referred to as the categories axis or x-axis which displays text labels. Note that the horizontal axis will be the value axis which displays numeric values for the Bar charts, therefore in this case the Horizontal Axis tab options will correspond to the ones described in the previous section. For the XY (Scatter) charts, both axes are value axes.

                                                                +
                                                                  +
                                                                • The Axis Options section allows to set the following parameters: +
                                                                    +
                                                                  • Axis Crosses - is used to specify a point on the horizontal axis where the vertical axis should cross it. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the axes intersection point value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Value option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right, or set the axes intersection point at the Minimum/Maximum Value (that corresponds to the first and last category) on the horizontal axis.
                                                                  • +
                                                                  • Axis Position - is used to specify where the axis text labels should be placed: On Tick Marks or Between Tick Marks.
                                                                  • +
                                                                  • Values in reverse order - is used to display categories in an opposite direction. When the box is unchecked, categories are displayed from left to right. When the box is checked, the categories are ordered from right to left.
                                                                  • +
                                                                  +
                                                                • +
                                                                • The Tick Options section allows to adjust the appearance of tick marks on the horizontal scale. Major tick marks are the larger divisions which can have labels displaying category values. Minor tick marks are the smaller divisions which are placed between the major tick marks and have no labels. Tick marks also define where gridlines can be displayed, if the corresponding option is set at the Layout tab. You can adjust the following tick mark parameters: +
                                                                    +
                                                                  • Major/Minor Type - is used to specify the following placement options: None to not display major/minor tick marks, Cross to display major/minor tick marks on both sides of the axis, In to display major/minor tick marks inside the axis, Out to display major/minor tick marks outside the axis.
                                                                  • +
                                                                  • Interval between Marks - is used to specify how many categories should be displayed between two adjacent tick marks.
                                                                  • +
                                                                  +
                                                                • +
                                                                • The Label Options section allows to adjust the appearance of labels which display categories. +
                                                                    +
                                                                  • Label Position - is used to specify where the labels should be placed in regard to the horizontal axis. Select the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to not display category labels, Low to display category labels at the bottom of the plot area, High to display category labels at the top of the plot area, Next to axis to display category labels next to the axis.
                                                                  • +
                                                                  • Axis Label Distance - is used to specify how closely the labels should be placed to the axis. You can specify the necessary value in the entry field. The more the value you set, the more the distance between the axis and labels is.
                                                                  • +
                                                                  • Interval between Labels - is used to specify how often the labels should be displayed. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case labels are displayed for every category. You can select the Manual option from the drop-down list and specify the necessary value in the entry field on the right. For example, enter 2 to display labels for every other category etc.
                                                                  • +
                                                                  +
                                                                • +
                                                                +

                                                                Chart - Advanced Settings

                                                                +

                                                                The Alternative Text tab allows to specify a Title and Description which will be read to the people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information there is in the chart.

                                                                +
                                                              12. +
                                                              +
                                                              +

                                                              Move and resize charts

                                                              +

                                                              Moving chartOnce the chart is added, you can change its size and position. To change the chart size, drag small squares Square icon situated on its edges. To maintain the original proportions of the selected chart while resizing, hold down the Shift key and drag one of the corner icons.

                                                              +

                                                              To alter the chart position, use the Arrow icon that appears after hovering your mouse cursor over the chart. Drag the chart to the necessary position without releasing the mouse button. When you move the chart, guide lines are displayed to help you position the object on the page precisely (if a wrapping style other than inline is selected).

                                                              +

                                                              + Note: the list of keyboard shortcuts that can be used when working with objects is available here. +

                                                              +
                                                              +

                                                              Edit chart elements

                                                              +

                                                              To edit the chart Title, select the default text with the mouse and type in your own one instead.

                                                              +

                                                              To change the font formatting within text elements, such as the chart title, axes titles, legend entries, data labels etc., select the necessary text element by left-clicking it. Then use icons at the Home tab of the top toolbar to change the font type, size, color or its decoration style.

                                                              +

                                                              When the chart is selected, the Shape settings Shape settings icon icon is also available on the right, since a shape is used as a background for the chart. You can click this icon to open the Shape settings tab at the right sidebar and adjust the shape Fill, Stroke and Wrapping Style. Note that you cannot change the shape type.

                                                              +

                                                              + Using the Shape Settings tab at the right panel you can not only adjust the chart area itself, but also change the chart elements, such as plot area, data series, chart title, legend etc and apply different fill types to them. Select the chart element clicking it with the left mouse button and choose the preferred fill type: solid color, gradient, texture or picture, pattern. Specify the fill parameters and set the Opacity level if necessary. + When you select a vertical or horizontal axis or gridlines, the stroke settings are only available at the Shape Settings tab: color, width and type. For more details on how to work with shape colors, fills and stroke, you can refer to this page. +

                                                              +

                                                              Note: the Show shadow option is also available at the Shape settings tab, but it is disabled for chart elements.

                                                              +

                                                              To delete a chart element, select it by left-clicking and press the Delete key on the keyboard.

                                                              +

                                                              You can also rotate 3D charts using the mouse. Left-click within the plot area and hold the mouse button. Drag the cursor without releasing the mouse button to change the 3D chart orientation.

                                                              +

                                                              3D chart

                                                              +
                                                              +

                                                              Adjust chart settings

                                                              +

                                                              Chart Settings tab

                                                              +

                                                              Some of the chart settings can be altered using the Chart settings tab of the right sidebar. To activate it click the chart and choose the Chart settings Chart settings icon icon on the right. Here you can change the following properties:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • Size is used to view the current chart Width and Height.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Wrapping Style is used to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind (for more information see the advanced settings description below).
                                                              • +
                                                              • Change Chart Type is used to change the selected chart type and/or style. +

                                                                To select the necessary chart Style, use the second drop-down menu in the Change Chart Type section.

                                                                +
                                                              • +
                                                              • Edit Data is used to open the 'Chart Editor' window. +

                                                                Note: to quickly open the 'Chart Editor' window you can also double-click the chart in the document.

                                                                +
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              Some of these options you can also find in the right-click menu. The menu options are:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • Cut, Copy, Paste - standard options which are used to cut or copy a selected text/object and paste a previously cut/copied text passage or object to the current cursor position.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Arrange is used to bring the selected chart to foreground, send to background, move forward or backward as well as group or ungroup charts to perform operations with several of them at once. To learn more on how to arrange objects you can refer to this page.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Align is used to align the chart left, center, right, top, middle, bottom. To learn more on how to align objects you can refer to this page.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Wrapping Style is used to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind. The Edit Wrap Boundary option is unavailable for charts.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Edit Data is used to open the 'Chart Editor' window.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Chart Advanced Settings is used to open the 'Chart - Advanced Settings' window.
                                                              • +
                                                              +
                                                              +

                                                              To change the chart advanced settings, click the needed chart with the right mouse button and select Chart Advanced Settings from the right-click menu or just click the Show advanced settings link at the right sidebar. The chart properties window will open:

                                                              +

                                                              Chart - Advanced Settings: Size

                                                              +

                                                              The Size tab contains the following parameters:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • Width and Height - use these options to change the chart width and/or height. If the Constant Proportions Constant Proportions icon button is clicked (in this case it looks like this Constant Proportions icon activated), the width and height will be changed together preserving the original chart aspect ratio.
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              Chart - Advanced Settings: Text Wrapping

                                                              +

                                                              The Text Wrapping tab contains the following parameters:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • Wrapping Style - use this option to change the way the chart is positioned relative to the text: it will either be a part of the text (in case you select the inline style) or bypassed by it from all sides (if you select one of the other styles). +
                                                                  +
                                                                • Wrapping Style - Inline Inline - the chart is considered to be a part of the text, like a character, so when the text moves, the chart moves as well. In this case the positioning options are inaccessible.

                                                                  +

                                                                  If one of the following styles is selected, the chart can be moved independently of the text and positioned on the page exactly:

                                                                  +
                                                                • +
                                                                • Wrapping Style - Square Square - the text wraps the rectangular box that bounds the chart.

                                                                • +
                                                                • Wrapping Style - Tight Tight - the text wraps the actual chart edges.

                                                                • +
                                                                • Wrapping Style - Through Through - the text wraps around the chart edges and fills in the open white space within the chart.

                                                                • +
                                                                • Wrapping Style - Top and bottom Top and bottom - the text is only above and below the chart.

                                                                • +
                                                                • Wrapping Style - In front In front - the chart overlaps the text.

                                                                • +
                                                                • Wrapping Style - Behind Behind - the text overlaps the chart.

                                                                • +
                                                                +
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              If you select the square, tight, through, or top and bottom style you will be able to set up some additional parameters - distance from text at all sides (top, bottom, left, right).

                                                              +

                                                              Chart - Advanced Settings: Position

                                                              +

                                                              The Position tab is available only if you select a wrapping style other than inline. This tab contains the following parameters that vary depending on the selected wrapping style:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • + The Horizontal section allows you to select one of the following three chart positioning types: +
                                                                  +
                                                                • Alignment (left, center, right) relative to character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin,
                                                                • +
                                                                • Absolute Position measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified at the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) to the right of character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin,
                                                                • +
                                                                • Relative position measured in percent relative to the left margin, margin, page or right margin.
                                                                • +
                                                                +
                                                              • +
                                                              • + The Vertical section allows you to select one of the following three chart positioning types: +
                                                                  +
                                                                • Alignment (top, center, bottom) relative to line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin,
                                                                • +
                                                                • Absolute Position measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified at the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) below line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin,
                                                                • +
                                                                • Relative position measured in percent relative to the margin, bottom margin, page or top margin.
                                                                • +
                                                                +
                                                              • +
                                                              • Move object with text controls whether the chart moves as the text to which it is anchored moves.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Allow overlap controls whether two charts overlap or not if you drag them near each other on the page.
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              Chart - Advanced Settings

                                                              +

                                                              The Alternative Text tab allows to specify a Title and Description which will be read to the people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information there is in the chart.

                                                              +
                                                              + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/InsertContentControls.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/InsertContentControls.htm new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d2a6e1496 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/InsertContentControls.htm @@ -0,0 +1,169 @@ + + + + Insert content controls + + + + + + + +
                                                              +
                                                              + +
                                                              +

                                                              Insert content controls

                                                              +

                                                              Content controls are objects containing different types of contents, such as text, objects etc. Depending on the selected content control type, you can create a form with input fields that can be filled in by other users, or protect some parts of the document from being edited or deleted etc.

                                                              +

                                                              Note: the possibility to add new content controls is available in the paid version only. In the open source version, you can edit existing content controls, as well as copy and paste them.

                                                              +

                                                              Currently, you can add the following types of content controls: Plain Text, Rich Text, Picture, Combo box, Drop-down list, Date, Check box.

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • Plain Text is an object containing text that can be formatted. Plain text content controls cannot contain more than one paragraph.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Rich Text is an object containing text that can be formatted. Rich text content controls can contain several paragraphs, lists, and objects (images, shapes, tables etc.).
                                                              • +
                                                              • Picture is an object containing a single image.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Combo box is an object containing a drop-down list with a set of choices. It allows to choose one of the predefined values from the list and edit the selected value if necessary.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Drop-down list is an object containing a drop-down list with a set of choices. It allows to choose one of the predefined values from the list. The selected value cannot be edited.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Date is an object containing a calendar that allows to choose a date.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Check box is an object that allows to display two states: check box is selected and check box is cleared.
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              Adding content controls

                                                              +
                                                              Create a new Plain Text content control
                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. position the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the control to be added,
                                                                or select a text passage you want to become the control contents.
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar.
                                                              4. +
                                                              5. click the arrow next to the Content Controls icon Content Controls icon.
                                                              6. +
                                                              7. choose the Plain Text option from the menu.
                                                              8. +
                                                              +

                                                              The control will be inserted at the insertion point within a line of the existing text. Replace the default text within the control ("Your text here") with your own one: select the default text, and type in a new text or copy a text passage from anywhere and paste it into the content control. Plain text content controls do not allow adding line breaks and cannot contain other objects such as images, tables etc.

                                                              +

                                                              New plain text content control

                                                              +
                                                              Create a new Rich Text content control
                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. position the insertion point at the end of a paragraph after which you want the control to be added,
                                                                or select one or more of the existing paragraphs you want to become the control contents.
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar.
                                                              4. +
                                                              5. click the arrow next to the Content Controls icon Content Controls icon.
                                                              6. +
                                                              7. choose the Rich Text option from the menu.
                                                              8. +
                                                              +

                                                              The control will be inserted in a new paragraph. Replace the default text within the control ("Your text here") with your own one: select the default text, and type in a new text or copy a text passage from anywhere and paste it into the content control. Rich text content controls allow adding line breaks, i.e. can contain multiple paragraphs as well as some objects, such as images, tables, other content controls etc.

                                                              +

                                                              Rich text content control

                                                              +
                                                              Create a new Picture content control
                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. position the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the control to be added.
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar.
                                                              4. +
                                                              5. click the arrow next to the Content Controls icon Content Controls icon.
                                                              6. +
                                                              7. choose the Picture option from the menu - the control will be inserted at the insertion point.
                                                              8. +
                                                              9. click the Insert image icon image icon in the button above the content control border - a standard file selection window will open. Choose an image stored on your computer and click Open.
                                                              10. +
                                                              +

                                                              The selected image will be displayed within the content control. To replace the image, click the Insert image icon image icon in the button above the content control border and select another image.

                                                              +

                                                              New picture content control

                                                              +
                                                              Create a new Combo box or Drop-down list content control
                                                              +

                                                              The Combo box and Drop-down list content controls contain a drop-down list with a set of choices. They can be created in nearly the same way. The main difference between them is that the selected value in the drop-down list cannot be edited, while the selected value in the combo box can be replaced with your own one.

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. position the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the control to be added.
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar.
                                                              4. +
                                                              5. click the arrow next to the Content Controls icon Content Controls icon.
                                                              6. +
                                                              7. choose the Combo box or Drop-down list option from the menu - the control will be inserted at the insertion point.
                                                              8. +
                                                              9. right-click the added control and choose the Content control settings option from the contextual menu.
                                                              10. +
                                                              11. in the the Content Control Settings window that opens switch to the Combo box or Drop-down list tab, depending on the selected content control type. +

                                                                Combo box settings window

                                                                +
                                                              12. +
                                                              13. + to add a new list item, click the Add button and fill in the available fields in the window that opens: +

                                                                Combo box - adding value

                                                                +
                                                                  +
                                                                1. specify the necessary text in the Display name field, e.g. Yes, No, Other. This text will be displayed in the content control within the document.
                                                                2. +
                                                                3. by default, the text in the Value field corresponds to the one entered in the Display name field. If you want to edit the text in the Value field, note that the entered value must be unique for each item.
                                                                4. +
                                                                5. click the OK button.
                                                                6. +
                                                                +
                                                              14. +
                                                              15. you can edit or delete the list items by using the Edit or Delete buttons on the right or change the item order using the Up and Down button.
                                                              16. +
                                                              17. when all the necessary choices are set, click the OK button to save the settings and close the window.
                                                              18. +
                                                              +

                                                              New combo box content control

                                                              +

                                                              You can click the arrow button in the right part of the added Combo box or Drop-down list content control to open the item list and choose the necessary one. Once the necessary item is selected from the Combo box, you can edit the displayed text replacing it with your own one entirely or partially. The Drop-down list does not allow to edit the selected item.

                                                              +

                                                              Combo box content control

                                                              +
                                                              Create a new Date content control
                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. position the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the control to be added.
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar.
                                                              4. +
                                                              5. click the arrow next to the Content Controls icon Content Controls icon.
                                                              6. +
                                                              7. choose the Date option from the menu - the control with the current date will be inserted at the insertion point.
                                                              8. +
                                                              9. right-click the added control and choose the Content control settings option from the contextual menu.
                                                              10. +
                                                              11. + in the the Content Control Settings window that opens switch to the Date format tab. +

                                                                Date settings window

                                                                +
                                                              12. +
                                                              13. choose the necessary Language and select the necessary date format in the Display the date like this list.
                                                              14. +
                                                              15. click the OK button to save the settings and close the window.
                                                              16. +
                                                              +

                                                              New date content control

                                                              +

                                                              You can click the arrow button in the right part of the added Date content control to open the calendar and choose the necessary date.

                                                              +

                                                              Date content control

                                                              +
                                                              Create a new Check box content control
                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. position the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the control to be added.
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar.
                                                              4. +
                                                              5. click the arrow next to the Content Controls icon Content Controls icon.
                                                              6. +
                                                              7. choose the Check box option from the menu - the control will be inserted at the insertion point.
                                                              8. +
                                                              9. right-click the added control and choose the Content control settings option from the contextual menu.
                                                              10. +
                                                              11. + in the the Content Control Settings window that opens switch to the Check box tab. +

                                                                Check box settings window

                                                                +
                                                              12. +
                                                              13. click the Checked symbol button to specify the necessary symbol for the selected check box or the Unchecked symbol to select how the cleared check box should look like. The Symbol window will open. To learn more on how to work with symbols, you can refer to this article.
                                                              14. +
                                                              15. when the symbols are specified, click the OK button to save the settings and close the window.
                                                              16. +
                                                              +

                                                              The added check box is displayed in the unchecked mode.

                                                              +

                                                              New Check box content control

                                                              +

                                                              If you click the added check box it will be checked with the symbol selected in the Checked symbol list.

                                                              +

                                                              Check box content control

                                                              + +

                                                              Note: The content control border is visible when the control is selected only. The borders do not appear on a printed version.

                                                              + +

                                                              Moving content controls

                                                              +

                                                              Controls can be moved to another place in the document: click the button to the left of the control border to select the control and drag it without releasing the mouse button to another position in the document text.

                                                              +

                                                              Moving content control

                                                              +

                                                              You can also copy and paste content controls: select the necessary control and use the Ctrl+C/Ctrl+V key combinations.

                                                              + +

                                                              Editing plain text and rich text content controls

                                                              +

                                                              Text within the plain text and rich text content controls can be formatted using the icons on the top toolbar: you can adjust the font type, size, color, apply decoration styles and formatting presets. It's also possible to use the Paragraph - Advanced settings window accessible from the contextual menu or from the right sidebar to change the text properties. Text within rich text content controls can be formatted like a regular text of the document, i.e. you can set line spacing, change paragraph indents, adjust tab stops.

                                                              + +

                                                              Changing content control settings

                                                              +

                                                              No matter which type of content controls is selected, you can change the content control settings in the General and Locking sections of the Content Control Settings window.

                                                              +

                                                              To open the content control settings, you can proceed in the following ways:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • Select the necessary content control, click the arrow next to the Content Controls icon Content Controls icon at the top toolbar and select the Control Settings option from the menu.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Right-click anywhere within the content control and use the Content control settings option from the contextual menu.
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              A new window will open. At the General tab, you can adjust the following settings:

                                                              +

                                                              Content Control settings window - General

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • Specify the content control Title or Tag in the corresponding fields. The title will be displayed when the control is selected in the document. Tags are used to identify content controls so that you can make reference to them in your code.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Choose if you want to display the content control with a Bounding box or not. Use the None option to display the control without the bounding box. If you select the Bounding box option, you can choose this box Color using the field below. Click the Apply to All button to apply the specified Appearance settings to all the content controls in the document.
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              At the Locking tab, you can protect the content control from being deleted or edited using the following settings:

                                                              +

                                                              Content Control settings window - Locking

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • Content control cannot be deleted - check this box to protect the content control from being deleted.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Contents cannot be edited - check this box to protect the contents of the content control from being edited.
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              For certain types of content controls, the third tab is also available that contains the settings specific for the selected content control type only: Combo box, Drop-down list, Date, Check box. These settings are described above in the sections about adding the corresponding content controls.

                                                              +

                                                              Click the OK button within the settings window to apply the changes.

                                                              +

                                                              It's also possible to highlight content controls with a certain color. To highlight controls with a color:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. Click the button to the left of the control border to select the control,
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. Click the arrow next to the Content Controls icon Content Controls icon at the top toolbar,
                                                              4. +
                                                              5. Select the Highlight Settings option from the menu,
                                                              6. +
                                                              7. Select the necessary color on the available palettes: Theme Colors, Standard Colors or specify a new Custom Color. To remove previously applied color highlighting, use the No highlighting option.
                                                              8. +
                                                              +

                                                              The selected highlight options will be applied to all the content controls in the document.

                                                              +

                                                              Removing content controls

                                                              +

                                                              To remove a control and leave all its contents, click the content control to select it, then proceed in one of the following ways:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • Click the arrow next to the Content Controls icon Content Controls icon at the top toolbar and select the Remove content control option from the menu.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Right-click the content control and use the Remove content control option from the contextual menu.
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              To remove a control and all its contents, select the necessary control and press the Delete key on the keyboard.

                                                              + +
                                                              + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/InsertDropCap.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/InsertDropCap.htm new file mode 100644 index 000000000..538529e69 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/InsertDropCap.htm @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + Insert a drop cap + + + + + + + +
                                                              +
                                                              + +
                                                              +

                                                              Insert a drop cap

                                                              +

                                                              A Drop cap is the first letter of a paragraph that is much larger than others and takes up several lines in height.

                                                              +

                                                              To add a drop cap,

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. put the cursor within the paragraph you need,
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar,
                                                              4. +
                                                              5. click the Drop Cap icon Drop Cap icon at the top toolbar,
                                                              6. +
                                                              7. in the opened drop-down list select the option you need: +
                                                                  +
                                                                • In Text Insert Drop Cap - In Text - to place the drop cap within the paragraph.
                                                                • +
                                                                • In Margin Insert Drop Cap - In Margin - to place the drop cap in the left margin.
                                                                • +
                                                                +
                                                              8. +
                                                              +

                                                              Drop Cap exampleThe first character of the selected paragraph will be transformed into a drop cap. If you need the drop cap to include some more characters, add them manually: select the drop cap and type in other letters you need.

                                                              +

                                                              To adjust the drop cap appearance (i.e. font size, type, decoration style or color), select the letter and use the corresponding icons at the Home tab of the top toolbar.

                                                              +

                                                              When the drop cap is selected, it's surrounded by a frame (a container used to position the drop cap on the page). You can quickly change the frame size dragging its borders or change its position using the Arrow icon that appears after hovering your mouse cursor over the frame.

                                                              +

                                                              To delete the added drop cap, select it, click the Drop Cap icon Drop Cap icon at the Insert tab of the top toolbar and choose the None Insert Drop Cap - None option from the drop-down list.

                                                              +
                                                              +

                                                              To adjust the added drop cap parameters, select it, click the Drop Cap icon Drop Cap icon at the Insert tab of the top toolbar and choose the Drop Cap Settings option from the drop-down list. The Drop Cap - Advanced Settings window will open:

                                                              +

                                                              Drop Cap - Advanced Settings

                                                              +

                                                              The Drop Cap tab allows to set the following parameters:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • Position - is used to change the drop cap placement. Select the In Text or In Margin option, or click None to delete the drop cap.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Font - is used to select one of the fonts from the list of the available ones.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Height in rows - is used to specify how many lines the drop cap should span. It's possible to select a value from 1 to 10.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Distance from text - is used to specify the amount of space between the text of the paragraph and the right border of the frame that surrounds the drop cap.
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              Drop Cap - Advanced Settings

                                                              +

                                                              The Borders & Fill tab allows to add a border around the drop cap and adjust its parameters. They are the following:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • Border parameters (size, color and presence or absence) - set the border size, select its color and choose the borders (top, bottom, left, right or their combination) you want to apply these settings to.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Background color - choose the color for the drop cap background.
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              Drop Cap - Advanced Settings

                                                              +

                                                              The Margins tab allows to set the distance between the drop cap and the Top, Bottom, Left and Right borders around it (if the borders have previously been added).

                                                              +
                                                              +

                                                              Once the drop cap is added you can also change the Frame parameters. To access them, right click within the frame and select the Frame Advanced Settings from the menu. The Frame - Advanced Settings window will open:

                                                              +

                                                              Frame - Advanced Settings

                                                              +

                                                              The Frame tab allows to set the following parameters:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • Position - is used to select the Inline or Flow wrapping style. Or you can click None to delete the frame.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Width and Height - are used to change the frame dimensions. The Auto option allows to automatically adjust the frame size to fit the drop cap in it. The Exactly option allows to specify fixed values. The At least option is used to set the minimum height value (if you change the drop cap size, the frame height changes accordingly, but it cannot be less than the specified value).
                                                              • +
                                                              • Horizontal parameters are used either to set the frame exact position in the selected units of measurement relative to a margin, page or column, or to align the frame (left, center or right) relative to one of these reference points. You can also set the horizontal Distance from text i.e. the amount of space between the vertical frame borders and the text of the paragraph.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Vertical parameters are used either to set the frame exact position in the selected units of measurement relative to a margin, page or paragraph, or to align the frame (top, center or bottom) relative to one of these reference points. You can also set the vertical Distance from text i.e. the amount of space between the horizontal frame borders and the text of the paragraph.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Move with text - controls whether the frame moves as the paragraph to which it is anchored moves.
                                                              • +
                                                              + +

                                                              The Borders & Fill and Margins tabs allow to set just the same parameters as at the tabs of the same name in the Drop Cap - Advanced Settings window.

                                                              + +
                                                              + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/InsertEquation.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/InsertEquation.htm new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3781d1798 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/InsertEquation.htm @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + Insert equations + + + + + + + +
                                                              +
                                                              + +
                                                              +

                                                              Insert equations

                                                              +

                                                              Document Editor allows you to build equations using the built-in templates, edit them, insert special characters (including mathematical operators, Greek letters, accents etc.).

                                                              +

                                                              Add a new equation

                                                              +

                                                              To insert an equation from the gallery,

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. put the cursor within the necessary line ,
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar,
                                                              4. +
                                                              5. click the arrow next to the Equation icon Equation icon at the top toolbar,
                                                              6. +
                                                              7. in the opened drop-down list select the equation category you need. The following categories are currently available: Symbols, Fractions, Scripts, Radicals, Integrals, Large Operators, Brackets, Functions, Accents, Limits and Logarithms, Operators, Matrices,
                                                              8. +
                                                              9. click the certain symbol/equation in the corresponding set of templates.
                                                              10. +
                                                              +

                                                              The selected symbol/equation box will be inserted at the cursor position. If the selected line is empty, the equation will be centered. To align such an equation left or right, click on the equation box and use the Align Left icon or Align Right icon icon at the Home tab of the top toolbar.

                                                              + Inserted Equation +

                                                              Each equation template represents a set of slots. Slot is a position for each element that makes up the equation. An empty slot (also called as a placeholder) has a dotted outline Equation Placeholder. You need to fill in all the placeholders specifying the necessary values.

                                                              +

                                                              Note: to start creating an equation, you can also use the Alt + = keyboard shortcut.

                                                              +

                                                              It's also possible to add a caption to the equation. To learn more on how to work with captions for equations, you can refer to this article.

                                                              +

                                                              Enter values

                                                              +

                                                              The insertion point specifies where the next character you enter will appear. To position the insertion point precisely, click within a placeholder and use the keyboard arrows to move the insertion point by one character left/right or one line up/down.

                                                              +

                                                              If you need to create a new placeholder below the slot with the insertion point within the selected template, press Enter.

                                                              + Edited Equation +

                                                              Once the insertion point is positioned, you can fill in the placeholder: +

                                                                +
                                                              • enter the desired numeric/literal value using the keyboard,
                                                              • +
                                                              • insert a special character using the Symbols palette from the Equation icon Equation menu at the Insert tab of the top toolbar,
                                                              • +
                                                              • add another equation template from the palette to create a complex nested equation. The size of the primary equation will be automatically adjusted to fit its content. The size of the nested equation elements depends on the primary equation placeholder size, but it cannot be smaller than the sub-subscript size.
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              +

                                                              Edited Equation

                                                              +

                                                              To add some new equation elements you can also use the right-click menu options:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • To add a new argument that goes before or after the existing one within Brackets, you can right-click on the existing argument and select the Insert argument before/after option from the menu.
                                                              • +
                                                              • To add a new equation within Cases with several conditions from the Brackets group (or equations of other types, if you've previously added new placeholders by pressing Enter), you can right-click on an empty placeholder or entered equation within it and select the Insert equation before/after option from the menu.
                                                              • +
                                                              • To add a new row or a column in a Matrix, you can right-click on a placeholder within it, select the Insert option from the menu, then select Row Above/Below or Column Left/Right.
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              Note: currently, equations cannot be entered using the linear format, i.e. \sqrt(4&x^3).

                                                              +

                                                              When entering the values of the mathematical expressions, you do not need to use Spacebar as the spaces between the characters and signs of operations are set automatically.

                                                              +

                                                              If the equation is too long and does not fit to a single line, automatic line breaking occurs as you type. You can also insert a line break in a specific position by right-clicking on a mathematical operator and selecting the Insert manual break option from the menu. The selected operator will start a new line. Once the manual line break is added, you can press the Tab key to align the new line to any math operator of the previous line. To delete the added manual line break, right-click on the mathematical operator that starts a new line and select the Delete manual break option.

                                                              +

                                                              Format equations

                                                              +

                                                              To increase or decrease the equation font size, click anywhere within the equation box and use the Increment font size and Decrement font size buttons at the Home tab of the top toolbar or select the necessary font size from the list. All the equation elements will change correspondingly.

                                                              +

                                                              The letters within the equation are italicized by default. If necessary, you can change the font style (bold, italic, strikeout) or color for a whole equation or its part. The underlined style can be applied to the entire equation only, not to individual characters. Select the necessary part of the equation by clicking and dragging. The selected part will be highlighted blue. Then use the necessary buttons at the Home tab of the top toolbar to format the selection. For example, you can remove the italic format for ordinary words that are not variables or constants.

                                                              + Edited Equation +

                                                              To modify some equation elements you can also use the right-click menu options:

                                                              +
                                                              • To change the Fractions format, you can right-click on a fraction and select the Change to skewed/linear/stacked fraction option from the menu (the available options differ depending on the selected fraction type).
                                                              • +
                                                              • To change the Scripts position relating to text, you can right-click on the equation that includes scripts and select the Scripts before/after text option from the menu.
                                                              • +
                                                              • To change the argument size for Scripts, Radicals, Integrals, Large Operators, Limits and Logarithms, Operators as well as for overbraces/underbraces and templates with grouping characters from the Accents group, you can right-click on the argument you want to change and select the Increase/Decrease argument size option from the menu.
                                                              • +
                                                              • To specify whether an empty degree placeholder should be displayed or not for a Radical, you can right-click on the radical and select the Hide/Show degree option from the menu.
                                                              • +
                                                              • To specify whether an empty limit placeholder should be displayed or not for an Integral or Large Operator, you can right-click on the equation and select the Hide/Show top/bottom limit option from the menu.
                                                              • +
                                                              • To change the limits position relating to the integral or operator sign for Integrals or Large Operators, you can right-click on the equation and select the Change limits location option from the menu. The limits can be displayed to the right of the operator sign (as subscripts and superscripts) or directly above and below the operator sign.
                                                              • +
                                                              • To change the limits position relating to text for Limits and Logarithms and templates with grouping characters from the Accents group, you can right-click on the equation and select the Limit over/under text option from the menu.
                                                              • +
                                                              • To choose which of the Brackets should be displayed, you can right-click on the expression within them and select the Hide/Show opening/closing bracket option from the menu.
                                                              • +
                                                              • To control the Brackets size, you can right-click on the expression within them. The Stretch brackets option is selected by default so that the brackets can grow according to the expression within them, but you can deselect this option to prevent brackets from stretching. When this option is activated, you can also use the Match brackets to argument height option.
                                                              • +
                                                              • To change the character position relating to text for overbraces/underbraces or overbars/underbars from the Accents group, you can right-click on the template and select the Char/Bar over/under text option from the menu.
                                                              • +
                                                              • To choose which borders should be displayed for a Boxed formula from the Accents group, you can right-click on the equation and select the Border properties option from the menu, then select Hide/Show top/bottom/left/right border or Add/Hide horizontal/vertical/diagonal line.
                                                              • +
                                                              • To specify whether empty placeholders should be displayed or not for a Matrix, you can right-click on it and select the Hide/Show placeholder option from the menu.
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              To align some equation elements you can use the right-click menu options:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • To align equations within Cases with several conditions from the Brackets group (or equations of other types, if you've previously added new placeholders by pressing Enter), you can right-click on an equation, select the Alignment option from the menu, then select the alignment type: Top, Center, or Bottom.
                                                              • +
                                                              • To align a Matrix vertically, you can right-click on the matrix, select the Matrix Alignment option from the menu, then select the alignment type: Top, Center, or Bottom.
                                                              • +
                                                              • To align elements within a Matrix column horizontally, you can right-click on a placeholder within the column, select the Column Alignment option from the menu, then select the alignment type: Left, Center, or Right.
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              Delete equation elements

                                                              +

                                                              To delete a part of the equation, select the part you want to delete by dragging the mouse or holding down the Shift key and using the arrow buttons, then press the Delete key on the keyboard.

                                                              +

                                                              A slot can only be deleted together with the template it belongs to.

                                                              +

                                                              To delete the entire equation, select it completely by dragging the mouse or double-clicking on the equation box and press the Delete key on the keyboard.

                                                              + Delete Equation +

                                                              To delete some equation elements you can also use the right-click menu options:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • To delete a Radical, you can right-click on it and select the Delete radical option from the menu.
                                                              • +
                                                              • To delete a Subscript and/or Superscript, you can right-click on the expression that contains them and select the Remove subscript/superscript option from the menu. If the expression contains scripts that go before text, the Remove scripts option is available.
                                                              • +
                                                              • To delete Brackets, you can right-click on the expression within them and select the Delete enclosing characters or Delete enclosing characters and separators option from the menu.
                                                              • +
                                                              • If the expression within Brackets inclides more than one argument, you can right-click on the argument you want to delete and select the Delete argument option from the menu.
                                                              • +
                                                              • If Brackets enclose more than one equation (i.e. Cases with several conditions), you can right-click on the equation you want to delete and select the Delete equation option from the menu. This option is also available for equations of other types if you've previously added new placeholders by pressing Enter.
                                                              • +
                                                              • To delete a Limit, you can right-click on it and select the Remove limit option from the menu.
                                                              • +
                                                              • To delete an Accent, you can right-click on it and select the Remove accent character, Delete char or Remove bar option from the menu (the available options differ depending on the selected accent).
                                                              • +
                                                              • To delete a row or a column of a Matrix, you can right-click on the placeholder within the row/column you need to delete, select the Delete option from the menu, then select Delete Row/Column.
                                                              • +
                                                              +
                                                              + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/InsertFootnotes.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/InsertFootnotes.htm new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7d0dec238 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/InsertFootnotes.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + Inserire note a piè di pagina + + + + + + + +
                                                              +
                                                              + +
                                                              +

                                                              Inserire note a piè di pagina

                                                              +

                                                              È possibile aggiungere note a piè di pagina per fornire spiegazioni o commenti per determinate frasi o termini utilizzati nel testo, fare riferimenti alle fonti, ecc.

                                                              +

                                                              Per inserire una nota a piè di pagina nel documento,

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. posizionare il punto di inserimento alla fine del passaggio di testo a cui si desidera aggiungere una nota a piè di pagina,
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. passare alla scheda Riferimenti della barra degli strumenti superiore,
                                                              4. +
                                                              5. Fare click sull’icona Icona nota a piè di pagina Nota a piè di pagina nella barra degli strumenti superiore oppure
                                                                + fare clic sulla freccia accanto all'icona Icona nota a piè di pagina Nota a piè di pagina e selezionare l'opzione Inserisci nota a piè di pagina dal menu, +

                                                                Il segno di nota a piè di pagina (ovvero il carattere in apice che indica una nota a piè di pagina) viene visualizzato nel testo del documento e il punto di inserimento si sposta nella parte inferiore della pagina corrente.

                                                                +
                                                              6. +
                                                              7. digitare il testo della nota a piè di pagina.
                                                              8. +
                                                              +

                                                              Ripetere le operazioni di cui sopra per aggiungere note a piè di pagina successive per altri passaggi di testo nel documento. Le note a piè di pagina vengono numerate automaticamente.

                                                              +

                                                              Footnotes

                                                              +

                                                              Se si posiziona il puntatore del mouse sul segno della nota a piè di pagina nel testo del documento, viene visualizzata una piccola finestra popup con il testo della nota a piè di pagina.

                                                              +

                                                              Footnote text

                                                              +

                                                              Per navigare facilmente tra le note a piè di pagina aggiunte all'interno del testo del documento,

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. fare clic sulla freccia accanto all'icona Icona nota a piè di pagina Nota a piè di pagina nella scheda Riferimenti della barra degli strumenti superiore,
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. nella sezione Passa alle note a piè di pagina , utilizzare la freccia Previous footnote icon per passare alla nota a piè di pagina precedente o la freccia Next footnote icon per passare alla nota a piè di pagina successiva.
                                                              4. +
                                                              +
                                                              +

                                                              Per modificare le impostazioni delle note a piè di pagina,

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. fare clic sulla freccia accanto all'icona Icona nota a piè di pagina Nota a piè di pagina nella scheda Riferimenti della barra degli strumenti superiore,
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. selezionare l'opzione Impostazioni delle note dal menu,
                                                              4. +
                                                              5. modificare i parametri correnti nella finestra Impostazioni delle note che si apre: +

                                                                Footnotes Settings window

                                                                +
                                                                  +
                                                                • Impostare la Posizione delle note a piè di pagina nella pagina selezionando una delle opzioni disponibili: +
                                                                    +
                                                                  • Fondo pagina - per posizionare le note a piè di pagina nella parte inferiore della pagina (questa opzione è selezionata per impostazione predefinita).
                                                                  • +
                                                                  • Sotto al testo - per posizionare le note a piè di pagina più vicino al testo. Questa opzione può essere utile nei casi in cui la pagina contiene un breve testo.
                                                                  • +
                                                                  +
                                                                • +
                                                                • Regolare il Formato delle note a piè di pagina: +
                                                                    +
                                                                  • Formato numero - selezionare il formato numerico necessario tra quelli disponibili: 1, 2, 3,..., a, b, c,..., A, B, C,..., i, ii, iii,..., I, II, III,....
                                                                  • +
                                                                  • Inizia da  - utilizzare le frecce per impostare il numero o la lettera con cui si desidera iniziare la numerazione.
                                                                  • +
                                                                  • Numerazione - selezionare un modo per numerare le note a piè di pagina: +
                                                                      +
                                                                    • Continuo - numerare le note a piè di pagina in sequenza in tutto il documento,
                                                                    • +
                                                                    • Ricomincia a ogni sezione - per iniziare la numerazione delle note a piè di pagina con il numero 1 (o qualche altro carattere specificato) all'inizio di ogni sezione,
                                                                    • +
                                                                    • Ricomincia a ogni pagina - per iniziare la numerazione delle note a piè di pagina con il numero 1 (o un altro carattere specificato) all'inizio di ogni pagina.
                                                                    • +
                                                                    +
                                                                  • +
                                                                  • Simbolo personalizzato - consente di impostare un carattere speciale o una parola che si desidera utilizzare come segno di nota a piè di pagina (ad es. * or Nota1). Immettere il carattere/parola necessari nel campo di immissione testo e fare clic sul pulsante Inserisci nella parte inferiore della finestra Impostazioni note.
                                                                  • +
                                                                  +
                                                                • +
                                                                • Utilizzare l'elenco a discesa Applica modifiche a per selezionare se si desidera applicare le impostazioni delle note specificate solo a Tutto il documento o alla Sezione attuale. +

                                                                  Nota: per utilizzare la formattazione di note a piè di pagina diverse in parti separate del documento, è necessario aggiungere prima delle Interruzioni di sezione.

                                                                  +
                                                                • +
                                                                +
                                                              6. +
                                                              7. Quando si è pronti, fare clic sul pulsante Applica.
                                                              8. +
                                                              + +
                                                              +

                                                              Per rimuovere una singola nota a piè di pagina, posizionare il punto di inserimento direttamente prima del segno della nota a piè di pagina nel testo del documento e premere Elimina. Le altre note a piè di pagina verranno rinumerate automaticamente.

                                                              +

                                                              Per eliminare tutte le note a piè di pagina del documento,

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. fare clic sulla freccia accanto all'icona Icona nota a piè di pagina Nota a piè di pagina nella scheda Riferimenti della barra degli strumenti superiore,
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. selezionare l'opzione Elimina tutte le note a piè di pagina dal menu.
                                                              4. +
                                                              +
                                                              + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/InsertHeadersFooters.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/InsertHeadersFooters.htm new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1d5a07709 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/InsertHeadersFooters.htm @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + Inserire intestazioni e piè di pagina + + + + + + + +
                                                              +
                                                              + +
                                                              +

                                                              Inserire intestazioni e piè di pagina

                                                              +

                                                              Per aggiungere un'intestazione o un piè di pagina al documento o modificare quello esistente,

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. passare alla scheda Inserisci della barra degli strumenti superiore,
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. fare clic sull'icona Icona intestazioni/piè di pagina Intestazioni/Piè di pagina nella barra degli strumenti superiore,
                                                              4. +
                                                              5. selezionare una delle seguenti opzioni: +
                                                                  +
                                                                • Modifica intestazione per inserire o modificare il testo dell'intestazione.
                                                                • +
                                                                • Modifica piè di pagina per inserire o modificare il testo del piè di pagina.
                                                                • +
                                                                +
                                                              6. +
                                                              7. modificare i parametri correnti per intestazioni o piè di pagina nella barra laterale destra: +

                                                                Right Sidebar - Header and Footer Settings

                                                                +
                                                                  +
                                                                • Impostare la Posizione del testo rispetto all'inizio (per le intestazioni) o alla fine (per i piè di pagina) della pagina.
                                                                • +
                                                                • Selezionare la casella Diversi per la prima pagina per applicare un'intestazione o un piè di pagina diversi alla prima pagina o nel caso in cui non desideri aggiungervi alcuna intestazione/piè di pagina.
                                                                • +
                                                                • Utilizzare la casella Diversi per pagine pari e dispari per aggiungere diverse intestazioni / piè di pagina per pagine pari e dispari.
                                                                • +
                                                                • L'opzione Collega a precedente è disponibile nel caso in cui tu abbia precedentemente aggiunto onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">sezioni al tuo documento. In caso contrario, verrà visualizzato in grigio. Inoltre, questa opzione non è disponibile per la prima sezione (ovvero quando viene selezionata un'intestazione o piè di pagina che appartiene alla prima sezione). Per impostazione predefinita, questa casella è selezionata, in modo che le stesse intestazioni / piè di pagina vengano applicate a tutte le sezioni. Se selezioni un'area di intestazione o piè di pagina, vedrai che l'area è contrassegnata con l'etichetta Uguale a precedente. Deseleziona la casella Collega a precedente per utilizzare intestazioni / piè di pagina diversi per ogni sezione del documento. L'etichetta Uguale a precedente non verrà più visualizzata.
                                                                • +
                                                                +

                                                                Same as previous label

                                                                +
                                                              8. +
                                                              +

                                                              Per inserire un testo o modificare il testo già inserito e regolare le impostazioni dell'intestazione o del piè di pagina, puoi anche fare doppio clic all'interno della parte superiore o inferiore di una pagina o fare clic con il tasto destro del mouse e selezionare l'unica opzione di menu - Modifica intestazione o Modifica piè di pagina.

                                                              +

                                                              Per passare al corpo del documento, fare doppio clic all'interno dell'area di lavoro. Il testo utilizzato come intestazione o piè di pagina verrà visualizzato in grigio.

                                                              +

                                                              Nota: si prega di fare riferimento alla sezione Inserire numeri di pagina per imparare ad aggiungere numeri di pagina al documento.

                                                              +
                                                              + + diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e7225051d --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm @@ -0,0 +1,144 @@ + + + + Insert images + + + + + + + +
                                                              +
                                                              + +
                                                              +

                                                              Insert images

                                                              +

                                                              In Document Editor, you can insert images in the most popular formats into your document. The following image formats are supported: BMP, GIF, JPEG, JPG, PNG.

                                                              +

                                                              Insert an image

                                                              +

                                                              To insert an image into the document text,

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. place the cursor where you want the image to be put,
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar,
                                                              4. +
                                                              5. click the Image icon Image icon at the top toolbar,
                                                              6. +
                                                              7. select one of the following options to load the image: +
                                                                  +
                                                                • the Image from File option will open the standard dialog window for file selection. Browse your computer hard disk drive for the necessary file and click the Open button
                                                                • +
                                                                • the Image from URL option will open the window where you can enter the necessary image web address and click the OK button
                                                                • +
                                                                • the Image from Storage option will open the Select data source window. Select an image stored on your portal and click the OK button
                                                                • +
                                                                +
                                                              8. +
                                                              9. once the image is added you can change its size, properties, and position.
                                                              10. +
                                                              +

                                                              It's also possible to add a caption to the image. To learn more on how to work with captions for images, you can refer to this article.

                                                              +

                                                              Move and resize images

                                                              +

                                                              Moving imageTo change the image size, drag small squares Square icon situated on its edges. To maintain the original proportions of the selected image while resizing, hold down the Shift key and drag one of the corner icons.

                                                              +

                                                              To alter the image position, use the Arrow icon that appears after hovering your mouse cursor over the image. Drag the image to the necessary position without releasing the mouse button.

                                                              +

                                                              When you move the image, guide lines are displayed to help you position the object on the page precisely (if a wrapping style other than inline is selected).

                                                              +

                                                              To rotate the image, hover the mouse cursor over the rotation handle Rotation handle and drag it clockwise or counterclockwise. To constrain the rotation angle to 15 degree increments, hold down the Shift key while rotating.

                                                              +

                                                              + Note: the list of keyboard shortcuts that can be used when working with objects is available here. +

                                                              +
                                                              +

                                                              Adjust image settings

                                                              +

                                                              Image Settings tabSome of the image settings can be altered using the Image settings tab of the right sidebar. To activate it click the image and choose the Image settings Image settings icon icon on the right. Here you can change the following properties:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • Size is used to view the current image Width and Height. If necessary, you can restore the actual image size clicking the Actual Size button. The Fit to Margin button allows to resize the image, so that it occupies all the space between the left and right page margin. +

                                                                The Crop button is used to crop the image. Click the Crop button to activate cropping handles which appear on the image corners and in the center of each its side. Manually drag the handles to set the cropping area. You can move the mouse cursor over the cropping area border so that it turns into the Arrow icon and drag the area.

                                                                +
                                                                  +
                                                                • To crop a single side, drag the handle located in the center of this side.
                                                                • +
                                                                • To simultaneously crop two adjacent sides, drag one of the corner handles.
                                                                • +
                                                                • To equally crop two opposite sides of the image, hold down the Ctrl key when dragging the handle in the center of one of these sides.
                                                                • +
                                                                • To equally crop all sides of the image, hold down the Ctrl key when dragging any of the corner handles.
                                                                • +
                                                                +

                                                                When the cropping area is specified, click the Crop button once again, or press the Esc key, or click anywhere outside of the cropping area to apply the changes.

                                                                +

                                                                After the cropping area is selected, it's also possible to use the Fill and Fit options available from the Crop drop-down menu. Click the Crop button once again and select the option you need:

                                                                +
                                                                  +
                                                                • If you select the Fill option, the central part of the original image will be preserved and used to fill the selected cropping area, while other parts of the image will be removed.
                                                                • +
                                                                • If you select the Fit option, the image will be resized so that it fits the cropping area height or width. No parts of the original image will be removed, but empty spaces may appear within the selected cropping area.
                                                                • +
                                                                +
                                                              • +
                                                              • Rotation is used to rotate the image by 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise as well as to flip the image horizontally or vertically. Click one of the buttons: +
                                                                  +
                                                                • Rotate counterclockwise icon to rotate the image by 90 degrees counterclockwise
                                                                • +
                                                                • Rotate clockwise icon to rotate the image by 90 degrees clockwise
                                                                • +
                                                                • Flip horizontally icon to flip the image horizontally (left to right)
                                                                • +
                                                                • Flip vertically icon to flip the image vertically (upside down)
                                                                • +
                                                                +
                                                              • +
                                                              • Wrapping Style is used to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind (for more information see the advanced settings description below).
                                                              • +
                                                              • Replace Image is used to replace the current image loading another one From File or From URL.
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              Some of these options you can also find in the right-click menu. The menu options are:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • Cut, Copy, Paste - standard options which are used to cut or copy a selected text/object and paste a previously cut/copied text passage or object to the current cursor position.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Arrange is used to bring the selected image to foreground, send to background, move forward or backward as well as group or ungroup images to perform operations with several of them at once. To learn more on how to arrange objects you can refer to this page.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Align is used to align the image left, center, right, top, middle, bottom. To learn more on how to align objects you can refer to this page.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Wrapping Style is used to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind - or edit the wrap boundary. The Edit Wrap Boundary option is available only if you select a wrapping style other than Inline. Drag wrap points to customize the boundary. To create a new wrap point, click anywhere on the red line and drag it to the necessary position. Editing Wrap Boundary
                                                              • +
                                                              • Rotate is used to rotate the image by 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise as well as to flip the image horizontally or vertically.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Crop is used to apply one of the cropping options: Crop, Fill or Fit. Select the Crop option from the submenu, then drag the cropping handles to set the cropping area, and click one of these three options from the submenu once again to apply the changes.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Actual Size is used to change the current image size to the actual one.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Replace image is used to replace the current image loading another one From File or From URL.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Image Advanced Settings is used to open the 'Image - Advanced Settings' window.
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              Shape Settings tab When the image is selected, the Shape settings Shape settings icon icon is also available on the right. You can click this icon to open the Shape settings tab at the right sidebar and adjust the shape Stroke type, size and color as well as change the shape type selecting another shape from the Change Autoshape menu. The shape of the image will change correspondingly.

                                                              +

                                                              At the Shape Settings tab, you can also use the Show shadow option to add a shadow to the image.

                                                              +
                                                              +

                                                              Adjust image advanced settings

                                                              +

                                                              To change the image advanced settings, click the image with the right mouse button and select the Image Advanced Settings option from the right-click menu or just click the Show advanced settings link at the right sidebar. The image properties window will open:

                                                              +

                                                              Image - Advanced Settings: Size

                                                              +

                                                              The Size tab contains the following parameters:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • Width and Height - use these options to change the image width and/or height. If the Constant proportions Constant proportions icon button is clicked (in this case it looks like this Constant proportions icon activated), the width and height will be changed together preserving the original image aspect ratio. To restore the actual size of the added image, click the Actual Size button.
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              Image - Advanced Settings: Rotation

                                                              +

                                                              The Rotation tab contains the following parameters:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • Angle - use this option to rotate the image by an exactly specified angle. Enter the necessary value measured in degrees into the field or adjust it using the arrows on the right.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Flipped - check the Horizontally box to flip the image horizontally (left to right) or check the Vertically box to flip the image vertically (upside down).
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              Image - Advanced Settings: Text Wrapping

                                                              +

                                                              The Text Wrapping tab contains the following parameters:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • Wrapping Style - use this option to change the way the image is positioned relative to the text: it will either be a part of the text (in case you select the inline style) or bypassed by it from all sides (if you select one of the other styles). +
                                                                  +
                                                                • Wrapping Style - Inline Inline - the image is considered to be a part of the text, like a character, so when the text moves, the image moves as well. In this case the positioning options are inaccessible.

                                                                  +

                                                                  If one of the following styles is selected, the image can be moved independently of the text and positioned on the page exactly:

                                                                  +
                                                                • +
                                                                • Wrapping Style - Square Square - the text wraps the rectangular box that bounds the image.

                                                                • +
                                                                • Wrapping Style - Tight Tight - the text wraps the actual image edges.

                                                                • +
                                                                • Wrapping Style - Through Through - the text wraps around the image edges and fills in the open white space within the image. So that the effect can appear, use the Edit Wrap Boundary option from the right-click menu.

                                                                • +
                                                                • Wrapping Style - Top and bottom Top and bottom - the text is only above and below the image.

                                                                • +
                                                                • Wrapping Style - In front In front - the image overlaps the text.

                                                                • +
                                                                • Wrapping Style - Behind Behind - the text overlaps the image.

                                                                • +
                                                                +
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              If you select the square, tight, through, or top and bottom style, you will be able to set up some additional parameters - distance from text at all sides (top, bottom, left, right).

                                                              +

                                                              Image - Advanced Settings: Position

                                                              +

                                                              The Position tab is available only if you select a wrapping style other than inline. This tab contains the following parameters that vary depending on the selected wrapping style:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • + The Horizontal section allows you to select one of the following three image positioning types: +
                                                                  +
                                                                • Alignment (left, center, right) relative to character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin,
                                                                • +
                                                                • Absolute Position measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified at the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) to the right of character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin,
                                                                • +
                                                                • Relative position measured in percent relative to the left margin, margin, page or right margin.
                                                                • +
                                                                +
                                                              • +
                                                              • + The Vertical section allows you to select one of the following three image positioning types: +
                                                                  +
                                                                • Alignment (top, center, bottom) relative to line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin,
                                                                • +
                                                                • Absolute Position measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified at the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) below line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin,
                                                                • +
                                                                • Relative position measured in percent relative to the margin, bottom margin, page or top margin.
                                                                • +
                                                                +
                                                              • +
                                                              • Move object with text controls whether the image moves as the text to which it is anchored moves.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Allow overlap controls whether two images overlap or not if you drag them near each other on the page.
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              Image - Advanced Settings

                                                              +

                                                              The Alternative Text tab allows to specify a Title and Description which will be read to the people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information there is in the image.

                                                              +
                                                              + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/InsertPageNumbers.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/InsertPageNumbers.htm new file mode 100644 index 000000000..215cdf51b --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/InsertPageNumbers.htm @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + Insert page numbers + + + + + + + +
                                                              +
                                                              + +
                                                              +

                                                              Insert page numbers

                                                              +

                                                              To insert page numbers into your document,

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar,
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. click the Header/Footer Header/Footer icon icon at the top toolbar,
                                                              4. +
                                                              5. choose the Insert Page Number submenu,
                                                              6. +
                                                              7. select one of the following options: +
                                                                  +
                                                                • To put a page number to each page of your document, select the page number position on the page.
                                                                • +
                                                                • To insert a page number at the current cursor position, select the To Current Position option. +

                                                                  + Note: to insert a current page number at the current cursor position you can also use the Ctrl+Shift+P key combination. +

                                                                  +
                                                                • +
                                                                +
                                                              8. +
                                                              +

                                                              To insert the total number of pages in your document (e.g. if you want to create the Page X of Y entry):

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. put the cursor where you want to insert the total number of pages,
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. click the Header/Footer Header/Footer icon icon at the top toolbar,
                                                              4. +
                                                              5. select the Insert number of pages option.
                                                              6. +
                                                              +
                                                              +

                                                              To edit the page number settings,

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. double-click the page number added,
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. change the current parameters at the right sidebar: +

                                                                Right Sidebar - Header and Footer Settings

                                                                +
                                                                  +
                                                                • Set the Position of page numbers on the page as well as relative to the top and bottom of the page.
                                                                • +
                                                                • Check the Different first page box to apply a different page number to the very first page or in case you don't want to add any number to it at all.
                                                                • +
                                                                • Use the Different odd and even pages box to insert different page numbers for odd and even pages.
                                                                • +
                                                                • The Link to Previous option is available in case you've previously added sections into your document. + If not, it will be grayed out. Moreover, this option is also unavailable for the very first section (i.e. when a header or footer that belongs to the first section is selected). + By default, this box is checked, so that unified numbering is applied to all the sections. If you select a header or footer area, you will see that the area is marked with the Same as Previous label. + Uncheck the Link to Previous box to use different page numbering for each section of the document. The Same as Previous label will no longer be displayed. +

                                                                  Same as previous label

                                                                • +
                                                                • The Page Numbering section allows to adjust page numbering options across different sections of the document. + The Continue from previous section option is selected by default and allows to keep continuous page numbering after a section break. + If you want to start page numbering with a specific number in the current section of the document, select the Start at radio button and enter the necessary starting value in the field on the right.
                                                                • +
                                                                +
                                                              4. +
                                                              +

                                                              To return to the document editing, double-click within the working area.

                                                              +
                                                              + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/InsertSymbols.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/InsertSymbols.htm new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5d6fa03ba --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/InsertSymbols.htm @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + Inserire simboli e caratteri + + + + + + + +
                                                              +
                                                              + +
                                                              +

                                                              Inserire simboli e caratteri

                                                              +

                                                              Durante il processo di lavoro potrebbe essere necessario inserire un simbolo che non si trova sulla tastiera. Per inserire tali simboli nel tuo documento, usa l’opzione Inserisci simbolo Inserisci simbolo e segui questi semplici passaggi:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • posiziona il cursore nella posizione in cui deve essere inserito un simbolo speciale,
                                                              • +
                                                              • passa alla scheda Inserisci della barra degli strumenti in alto,
                                                              • +
                                                              • + fai clic sull’icona Simbolo Simbolo, +

                                                                Inserisci simbolo

                                                                +
                                                              • +
                                                              • viene visualizzata la scheda di dialogo Simbolo da cui è possibile selezionare il simbolo appropriato,
                                                              • +
                                                              • +

                                                                utilizza la sezione Intervallo per trovare rapidamente il simbolo necessario. Tutti i simboli sono divisi in gruppi specifici, ad esempio seleziona "Simboli di valuta” se desideri inserire un carattere di valuta.

                                                                +

                                                                se questo carattere non è nel set, seleziona un carattere diverso. Molti di loro hanno anche caratteri diversi dal set standard.

                                                                +

                                                                in alternativa, immetti il valore esadecimale Unicode del simbolo desiderato nel campo valore Unicode HEX. Questo codice si trova nella Mappa caratteri.

                                                                +

                                                                i simboli utilizzati in precedenza vengono visualizzati anche nel campo Simboli usati di recente,

                                                                +
                                                              • +
                                                              • fai clic su Inserisci. Il carattere selezionato verrà aggiunto al documento.
                                                              • +
                                                              + +

                                                              Inserire simboli ASCII

                                                              +

                                                              La tabella ASCII viene anche utilizzata per aggiungere caratteri.

                                                              +

                                                              Per fare ciò, tieni premuto il tasto ALT e usa il tastierino numerico per inserire il codice carattere.

                                                              +

                                                              Nota: assicurarsi di utilizzare il tastierino numerico, non i numeri sulla tastiera principale. Per abilitare il tastierino numerico, premere il tasto Bloc Num.

                                                              +

                                                              Ad esempio, per aggiungere ad un paragrafo il carattere (§), premere e tenere premuto il tasto ALT mentre si digita 789 e quindi rilasciare il tasto ALT.

                                                              + +

                                                              Inserire simboli usando la tabella Unicode

                                                              +

                                                              Ulteriori caratteri e simboli possono essere trovati anche nella tabella dei simboli di Windows. Per aprire questa tabella, effettuate una delle seguenti operazioni:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • nel campo Ricerca scrivi 'Tabella caratteri' e aprila,
                                                              • +
                                                              • + in alternativa premi contemporaneamente Win + R, quindi nella seguente finestra digita charmap.exe e fai clic su OK. +

                                                                Inserisci simbolo

                                                                +
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              Nella Mappa caratteri aperta, selezionare uno dei Set di caratteri, Gruppi e Caratteri. Quindi, fai clic sui caratteri necessari, copiali negli appunti e incollali nella posizione corretta del documento.

                                                              +
                                                              + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/InsertTables.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/InsertTables.htm new file mode 100644 index 000000000..836f3c9ee --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/InsertTables.htm @@ -0,0 +1,191 @@ + + + + Insert tables + + + + + + + +
                                                              +
                                                              + +
                                                              +

                                                              Insert tables

                                                              +

                                                              Insert a table

                                                              +

                                                              To insert a table into the document text,

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. place the cursor where you want the table to be put,
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar,
                                                              4. +
                                                              5. click the Table icon Table icon at the top toolbar,
                                                              6. +
                                                              7. select the option to create a table: +
                                                                  +
                                                                • either a table with predefined number of cells (10 by 8 cells maximum)

                                                                  +

                                                                  If you want to quickly add a table, just select the number of rows (8 maximum) and columns (10 maximum).

                                                                • +
                                                                • or a custom table

                                                                  +

                                                                  In case you need more than 10 by 8 cell table, select the Insert Custom Table option that will open the window where you can enter the necessary number of rows and columns respectively, then click the OK button.

                                                                  +

                                                                  Custom table

                                                                  +
                                                                • +
                                                                • If you want to draw a table using the mouse, select the Draw Table option. This can be useful, if you want to create a table with rows and colums of different sizes. The mouse cursor will turn into the pencil Mouse Cursor when drawing a table. Draw a rectangular shape where you want to add a table, then add rows by drawing horizontal lines and columns by drawing vertical lines within the table boundary.
                                                                • +
                                                                +
                                                              8. +
                                                              9. once the table is added you can change its properties, size and position.
                                                              10. +
                                                              +

                                                              To resize a table, hover the mouse cursor over the Square icon handle in its lower right corner and drag it until the table reaches the necessary size.

                                                              +

                                                              Resize table

                                                              +

                                                              You can also manually change the width of a certain column or the height of a row. Move the mouse cursor over the right border of the column so that the cursor turns into the bidirectional arrow Mouse Cursor when changing column width and drag the border to the left or right to set the necessary width. To change the height of a single row manually, move the mouse cursor over the bottom border of the row so that the cursor turns into the bidirectional arrow Mouse Cursor when changing row height and drag the border up or down.

                                                              +

                                                              To move a table, hold down the Select table handle handle in its upper left corner and drag it to the necessary place in the document.

                                                              +

                                                              It's also possible to add a caption to the table. To learn more on how to work with captions for tables, you can refer to this article.

                                                              +
                                                              +

                                                              Select a table or its part

                                                              +

                                                              To select an entire table, click the Select table handle handle in its upper left corner.

                                                              +

                                                              To select a certain cell, move the mouse cursor to the left side of the necessary cell so that the cursor turns into the black arrow Select cell, then left-click.

                                                              +

                                                              To select a certain row, move the mouse cursor to the left border of the table next to the necessary row so that the cursor turns into the horizontal black arrow Select row, then left-click.

                                                              +

                                                              To select a certain column, move the mouse cursor to the top border of the necessary column so that the cursor turns into the downward black arrow Select column, then left-click.

                                                              +

                                                              It's also possible to select a cell, row, column or table using options from the contextual menu or from the Rows & Columns section at the right sidebar.

                                                              +

                                                              + Note: to move around in a table you can use keyboard shortcuts. +

                                                              +
                                                              +

                                                              Adjust table settings

                                                              +

                                                              Some of the table properties as well as its structure can be altered using the right-click menu. The menu options are:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • Cut, Copy, Paste - standard options which are used to cut or copy a selected text/object and paste a previously cut/copied text passage or object to the current cursor position.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Select is used to select a row, column, cell, or table.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Insert is used to insert a row above or row below the row where the cursor is placed as well as to insert a column at the left or right side from the column where the cursor is placed. +

                                                                It's also possible to insert several rows or columns. If you select the Several Rows/Columns option, the Insert Several window opens. Select the Rows or Columns option from the list, specify the number of rows/column you want to add, choose where they should be added: Above the cursor or Below the cursor and click OK.

                                                                +
                                                              • +
                                                              • Delete is used to delete a row, column, table or cells. If you select the Cells option, the Delete Cells window will open, where you can select if you want to Shift cells left, Delete entire row, or Delete entire column.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Merge Cells is available if two or more cells are selected and is used to merge them. +

                                                                + It's also possible to merge cells by erasing a boundary between them using the eraser tool. To do this, click the Table icon Table icon at the top toolbar, choose the Erase Table option. The mouse cursor will turn into the eraser Mouse Cursor when erasing borders. Move the mouse cursor over the border between the cells you want to merge and erase it. +

                                                                +
                                                              • +
                                                              • Split Cell... is used to open a window where you can select the needed number of columns and rows the cell will be split in. +

                                                                + It's also possible to split a cell by drawing rows or columns using the pencil tool. To do this, click the Table icon Table icon at the top toolbar, choose the Draw Table option. The mouse cursor will turn into the pencil Mouse Cursor when drawing a table. Draw a horizontal line to create a row or a vertical line to create a column. +

                                                                +
                                                              • +
                                                              • Distribute rows is used to adjust the selected cells so that they have the same height without changing the overall table height.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Distribute columns is used to adjust the selected cells so that they have the same width without changing the overall table width.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Cell Vertical Alignment is used to align the text top, center or bottom in the selected cell.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Text Direction - is used to change the text orientation in a cell. You can place the text horizontally, vertically from top to bottom (Rotate Text Down), or vertically from bottom to top (Rotate Text Up).
                                                              • +
                                                              • Table Advanced Settings is used to open the 'Table - Advanced Settings' window.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Hyperlink is used to insert a hyperlink.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Paragraph Advanced Settings is used to open the 'Paragraph - Advanced Settings' window.
                                                              • +
                                                              +
                                                              +

                                                              Right Sidebar - Table Settings

                                                              +

                                                              You can also change the table properties at the right sidebar:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • Rows and Columns are used to select the table parts that you want to be highlighted.

                                                                +

                                                                For rows:

                                                                +
                                                                  +
                                                                • Header - to highlight the first row
                                                                • +
                                                                • Total - to highlight the last row
                                                                • +
                                                                • Banded - to highlight every other row
                                                                • +
                                                                +

                                                                For columns:

                                                                +
                                                                  +
                                                                • First - to highlight the first column
                                                                • +
                                                                • Last - to highlight the last column
                                                                • +
                                                                • Banded - to highlight every other column
                                                                • +
                                                                +
                                                              • +
                                                              • Select from Template is used to choose a table template from the available ones.

                                                              • +
                                                              • Borders Style is used to select the border size, color, style as well as background color.

                                                              • +
                                                              • Rows & Columns is used to perform some operations with the table: select, delete, insert rows and columns, merge cells, split a cell.

                                                              • +
                                                              • Rows & Columns Size is used to adjust the width and height of the currently selected cell. In this section, you can also Distribute rows so that all the selected cells have equal height or Distribute columns so that all the selected cells have equal width.

                                                              • +
                                                              • Add formula is used to insert a formula into the selected table cell.

                                                              • +
                                                              • Repeat as header row at the top of each page is used to insert the same header row at the top of each page in long tables.

                                                              • +
                                                              • Show advanced settings is used to open the 'Table - Advanced Settings' window.

                                                              • +
                                                              +
                                                              +

                                                              Adjust table advanced settings

                                                              +

                                                              To change the advanced table properties, click the table with the right mouse button and select the Table Advanced Settings option from the right-click menu or use the Show advanced settings link at the right sidebar. The table properties window will open:

                                                              +

                                                              Table - Advanced Settings

                                                              +

                                                              The Table tab allows to change properties of the entire table.

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • The Table Size section contains the following parameters: +
                                                                  +
                                                                • + Width - by default, the table width is automatically adjusted to fit the page width, i.e. the table occupies all the space between the left and right page margin. You can check this box and specify the necessary table width manually. +
                                                                • +
                                                                • Measure in - allows to specify if you want to set the table width in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified at the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) or in Percent of the overall page width. +

                                                                  Note: you can also adjust the table size manually changing the row height and column width. Move the mouse cursor over a row/column border until it turns into the bidirectional arrow and drag the border. You can also use the Table - Column Width Marker markers on the horizontal ruler to change the column width and the Table - Row Height Marker markers on the vertical ruler to change the row height.

                                                                  +
                                                                • +
                                                                • Automatically resize to fit contents - enables automatic change of each column width in accordance with the text within its cells.
                                                                • +
                                                                +
                                                              • +
                                                              • The Default Cell Margins section allows to change the space between the text within the cells and the cell border used by default.
                                                              • +
                                                              • The Options section allows to change the following parameter: +
                                                                  +
                                                                • Spacing between cells - the cell spacing which will be filled with the Table Background color.
                                                                • +
                                                                +
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              Table - Advanced Settings

                                                              +

                                                              The Cell tab allows to change properties of individual cells. First you need to select the cell you want to apply the changes to or select the entire table to change properties of all its cells.

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • + The Cell Size section contains the following parameters: +
                                                                  +
                                                                • Preferred width - allows to set a preferred cell width. This is the size that a cell strives to fit to, but in some cases it may not be possible to fit to this exact value. For example, if the text within a cell exceeds the specified width, it will be broken into the next line so that the preferred cell width remains unchanged, but if you insert a new column, the preferred width will be reduced.
                                                                • +
                                                                • Measure in - allows to specify if you want to set the cell width in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified at the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) or in Percent of the overall table width. +

                                                                  Note: you can also adjust the cell width manually. To make a single cell in a column wider or narrower than the overall column width, select the necessary cell and move the mouse cursor over its right border until it turns into the bidirectional arrow, then drag the border. To change the width of all the cells in a column, use the Table - Column Width Marker markers on the horizontal ruler to change the column width.

                                                                  +
                                                                • +
                                                                +
                                                              • +
                                                              • The Cell Margins section allows to adjust the space between the text within the cells and the cell border. By default, standard values are used (the default values can also be altered at the Table tab), but you can uncheck the Use default margins box and enter the necessary values manually.
                                                              • +
                                                              • + The Cell Options section allows to change the following parameter: +
                                                                  +
                                                                • The Wrap text option is enabled by default. It allows to wrap text within a cell that exceeds its width onto the next line expanding the row height and keeping the column width unchanged.
                                                                • +
                                                                +
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              Table - Advanced Settings

                                                              +

                                                              The Borders & Background tab contains the following parameters:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • + Border parameters (size, color and presence or absence) - set the border size, select its color and choose the way it will be displayed in the cells. +

                                                                + Note: in case you select not to show table borders clicking the No borders button or deselecting all the borders manually on the diagram, they will be indicated by a dotted line in the document. + To make them disappear at all, click the Nonprinting characters Nonprinting characters icon at the Home tab of the top toolbar and select the Hidden Table Borders option. +

                                                                +
                                                              • +
                                                              • Cell Background - the color for the background within the cells (available only if one or more cells are selected or the Allow spacing between cells option is selected at the Table tab).
                                                              • +
                                                              • Table Background - the color for the table background or the space background between the cells in case the Allow spacing between cells option is selected at the Table tab.
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              Table - Advanced Settings

                                                              +

                                                              The Table Position tab is available only if the Flow table option at the Text Wrapping tab is selected and contains the following parameters:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • Horizontal parameters include the table alignment (left, center, right) relative to margin, page or text as well as the table position to the right of margin, page or text.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Vertical parameters include the table alignment (top, center, bottom) relative to margin, page or text as well as the table position below margin, page or text.
                                                              • +
                                                              • The Options section allows to change the following parameters: +
                                                                  +
                                                                • Move object with text controls whether the table moves as the text into which it is inserted moves.
                                                                • +
                                                                • Allow overlap controls whether two tables are merged into one large table or overlap if you drag them near each other on the page.
                                                                • +
                                                                +
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              Table - Advanced Settings

                                                              +

                                                              The Text Wrapping tab contains the following parameters:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • Text wrapping style - Inline table or Flow table. Use the necessary option to change the way the table is positioned relative to the text: it will either be a part of the text (in case you select the inline table) or bypassed by it from all sides (if you select the flow table).
                                                              • +
                                                              • + After you select the wrapping style, the additional wrapping parameters can be set both for inline and flow tables: +
                                                                  +
                                                                • For the inline table, you can specify the table alignment and indent from left.
                                                                • +
                                                                • For the flow table, you can specify the distance from text and table position at the Table Position tab.
                                                                • +
                                                                +
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              Table - Advanced Settings

                                                              +

                                                              The Alternative Text tab allows to specify a Title and Description which will be read to the people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information there is in the table.

                                                              + +
                                                              + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/InsertTextObjects.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/InsertTextObjects.htm new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c3947d45f --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/InsertTextObjects.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + Insert text objects + + + + + + + +
                                                              +
                                                              + +
                                                              +

                                                              Insert text objects

                                                              +

                                                              To make your text more emphatic and draw attention to a specific part of the document, you can insert a text box (a rectangular frame that allows to enter text within it) or a Text Art object (a text box with a predefined font style and color that allows to apply some text effects).

                                                              +

                                                              Add a text object

                                                              +

                                                              You can add a text object anywhere on the page. To do that:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar,
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. select the necessary text object type: +
                                                                  +
                                                                • to add a text box, click the Text Box icon Text Box icon at the top toolbar, then click where you want to insert the text box, hold the mouse button and drag the text box border to specify its size. When you release the mouse button, the insertion point will appear in the added text box, allowing you to enter your text. +

                                                                  Note: it's also possible to insert a text box by clicking the Shape icon Shape icon at the top toolbar and selecting the Insert Text autoshape shape from the Basic Shapes group.

                                                                  +
                                                                • +
                                                                • to add a Text Art object, click the Text Art icon Text Art icon at the top toolbar, then click on the desired style template – the Text Art object will be added at the current cursor position. Select the default text within the text box with the mouse and replace it with your own text.
                                                                • +
                                                                +
                                                              4. +
                                                              5. click outside of the text object to apply the changes and return to the document.
                                                              6. +
                                                              +

                                                              The text within the text object is a part of the latter (when you move or rotate the text object, the text moves or rotates with it).

                                                              +

                                                              As an inserted text object represents a rectangular frame with text in it (Text Art objects have invisible text box borders by default) and this frame is a common autoshape, you can change both the shape and text properties.

                                                              +

                                                              To delete the added text object, click on the text box border and press the Delete key on the keyboard. The text within the text box will also be deleted.

                                                              +

                                                              Format a text box

                                                              +

                                                              Select the text box clicking on its border to be able to change its properties. When the text box is selected, its borders are displayed as solid (not dashed) lines.

                                                              +

                                                              Text box selected

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • to resize, move, rotate the text box use the special handles on the edges of the shape.
                                                              • +
                                                              • to edit the text box fill, stroke, wrapping style or replace the rectangular box with a different shape, click the Shape settings Shape settings icon icon on the right sidebar and use the corresponding options.
                                                              • +
                                                              • to align the text box on the page, arrange text boxes as related to other objects, rotate or flip a text box, change a wrapping style or access the shape advanced settings, right-click on the text box border and use the contextual menu options. To learn more on how to arrange and align objects you can refer to this page.
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              Format the text within the text box

                                                              +

                                                              Click the text within the text box to be able to change its properties. When the text is selected, the text box borders are displayed as dashed lines.

                                                              +

                                                              Text selected

                                                              +

                                                              Note: it's also possible to change text formatting when the text box (not the text itself) is selected. In such a case, any changes will be applied to all the text within the text box. Some font formatting options (font type, size, color and decoration styles) can be applied to a previously selected portion of the text separately.

                                                              +

                                                              To rotate the text within the text box, right-click the text, select the Text Direction option and then choose one of the available options: Horizontal (is selected by default), Rotate Text Down (sets a vertical direction, from top to bottom) or Rotate Text Up (sets a vertical direction, from bottom to top).

                                                              +

                                                              To align the text vertically within the text box, right-click the text, select the Vertical Alignment option and then choose one of the available options: Align Top, Align Center or Align Bottom.

                                                              +

                                                              Other formatting options that you can apply are the same as the ones for regular text. Please refer to the corresponding help sections to learn more about the necessary operation. You can:

                                                              + +

                                                              You can also click the Text Art settings Text Art settings icon icon on the right sidebar and change some style parameters.

                                                              +

                                                              Edit a Text Art style

                                                              +

                                                              Select a text object and click the Text Art settings Text Art settings icon icon on the right sidebar.

                                                              +

                                                              Text Art setting tab

                                                              +

                                                              Change the applied text style selecting a new Template from the gallery. You can also change the basic style additionally by selecting a different font type, size etc.

                                                              +

                                                              Change the font Fill. You can choose the following options:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • + Color Fill - select this option to specify the solid color you want to fill the inner space of letters with. +

                                                                Color Fill

                                                                +

                                                                Click the colored box below and select the necessary color from the available color sets or specify any color you like:

                                                                +
                                                              • +
                                                              • + Gradient Fill - select this option to fill the letters with two colors which smoothly change from one to another. +

                                                                Gradient Fill

                                                                +
                                                                  +
                                                                • Style - choose one of the available options: Linear (colors change in a straight line i.e. along a horizontal/vertical axis or diagonally at a 45 degree angle) or Radial (colors change in a circular path from the center to the edges).
                                                                • +
                                                                • Direction - choose a template from the menu. If the Linear gradient is selected, the following directions are available: top-left to bottom-right, top to bottom, top-right to bottom-left, right to left, bottom-right to top-left, bottom to top, bottom-left to top-right, left to right. If the Radial gradient is selected, only one template is available.
                                                                • +
                                                                • Gradient - click on the left slider Slider under the gradient bar to activate the color box which corresponds to the first color. Click on the color box on the right to choose the first color in the palette. Drag the slider to set the gradient stop i.e. the point where one color changes into another. Use the right slider under the gradient bar to specify the second color and set the gradient stop.
                                                                • +
                                                                +

                                                                Note: if one of these two options is selected, you can also set an Opacity level dragging the slider or entering the percent value manually. The default value is 100%. It corresponds to the full opacity. The 0% value corresponds to the full transparency.

                                                                +
                                                              • +
                                                              • No Fill - select this option if you don't want to use any fill.
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              Adjust the font Stroke width, color and type.

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • To change the stroke width, select one of the available options from the Size dropdown list. The available options are: 0.5 pt, 1 pt, 1.5 pt, 2.25 pt, 3 pt, 4.5 pt, 6 pt. Alternatively, select the No Line option if you don't want to use any stroke.
                                                              • +
                                                              • To change the stroke color, click on the colored box below and select the necessary color.
                                                              • +
                                                              • To change the stroke type, select the necessary option from the corresponding dropdown list (a solid line is applied by default, you can change it to one of the available dashed lines).
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              Apply a text effect by selecting the necessary text transformation type from the Transform gallery. You can adjust the degree of the text distortion by dragging the pink diamond-shaped handle.

                                                              +

                                                              Text Art Transformation

                                                              +
                                                              + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/LineSpacing.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/LineSpacing.htm new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8ca19e1b5 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/LineSpacing.htm @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + Impostare l'interlinea del paragrafo + + + + + + + +
                                                              +
                                                              + +
                                                              +

                                                              Impostare l'interlinea del paragrafo

                                                              +

                                                              Nell'Editor di documenti, è possibile impostare l'altezza della riga per le righe di testo all'interno del paragrafo, nonché i margini tra il paragrafo corrente e quello precedente o quello successivo.

                                                              +

                                                              Per farlo,

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. posizionare il cursore all'interno del paragrafo che interessa o selezionare diversi paragrafi con il mouse o tutto il testo nel documento premendo la combinazione di tasti Ctrl+A,
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. utilizzare i campi corrispondenti nella barra laterale destra per ottenere i risultati desiderati: +
                                                                  +
                                                                • Interlinea - imposta l'altezza della riga per le righe di testo all'interno del paragrafo. È possibile scegliere tra tre opzioni: minima (imposta la spaziatura minima necessaria per adattarsi al carattere o all'immagine più grande sulla riga), multipla ((imposta l'interlinea che può essere espressa in numeri maggiori di 1), esatta (imposta l'interlinea fissa). È possibile specificare il valore necessario nel campo a destra.
                                                                • +
                                                                • Spaziatura del paragrafo - impostare la quantità di spazio tra i paragrafi. +
                                                                    +
                                                                  • Prima - impostare la quantità di spazio prima del paragrafo.
                                                                  • +
                                                                  • Dopo - impostare la quantità di spazio dopo il paragrafo.
                                                                  • +
                                                                  • + Non aggiungere intervallo tra paragrafi dello stesso stile - seleziona questa casella nel caso in cui non sia necessario alcuno spazio tra i paragrafi dello stesso stile. +

                                                                    Right Sidebar - Paragraph Settings

                                                                    +
                                                                  • +
                                                                  +
                                                                • +
                                                                +
                                                              4. +
                                                              +

                                                              Questi parametri sono disponibili anche nella finestra Paragrafo - Impostazioni avanzate. Per aprire la finestra Paragrafo - Impostazioni avanzate , fare clic con il pulsante destro del mouse sul testo e sceglere l'opzione Impostazioni avanzate del paragrafo dal menu o utilizzare l'opzione Mostra impostazioni avanzate nella barra laterale destra. Passare quindi alla scheda Rientri e spaziatura e passare alla sezione Spaziatura.

                                                              +

                                                              Paragraph Advanced Settings - Indents & Spacing

                                                              +

                                                              Per modificare rapidamente l'interlinea del paragrafo corrente, è anche possibile utilizzare l'icona Interlinea paragrafo Paragraph line spacing nella scheda Home della barra degli strumenti superiore selezionando il valore desiderato dall'elenco: 1.0, 1.15, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5 o 3.0 righe.

                                                              +
                                                              + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/NonprintingCharacters.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/NonprintingCharacters.htm new file mode 100644 index 000000000..81a5feeb7 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/NonprintingCharacters.htm @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + Show/hide nonprinting characters + + + + + + + +
                                                              +
                                                              + +
                                                              +

                                                              Show/hide nonprinting characters

                                                              +

                                                              Nonprinting characters help you edit a document. They indicate the presence of various types of formatting, but they do not print with the document, even when they are displayed on the screen.

                                                              +

                                                              To show or hide nonprinting characters, click the Nonprinting characters Nonprinting characters icon at the Home tab of the top toolbar. Alternatively, you can use the Ctrl+Shift+Num8 key combination.

                                                              +

                                                              Nonprinting characters include:

                                                              + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
                                                              SpacesSpaceInserted when you press the Spacebar on the keyboard. It creates a space between characters.
                                                              TabsTabInserted when you press the Tab key. It's used to advance the cursor to the next tab stop.
                                                              Paragraph marks (i.e. hard returns)Hard returnInserted when you press the Enter key. It ends a paragraph and adds a bit of space after it. It contains information about the paragraph formatting.
                                                              Line breaks (i.e. soft returns)Soft returnInserted when you use the Shift+Enter key combination. It breaks the current line and puts lines of text close together. Soft return is primarily used in titles and headings.
                                                              Nonbreaking spacesNonbreaking spaceInserted when you use the Ctrl+Shift+Spacebar key combination. It creates a space between characters which can't be used to start a new line.
                                                              Page breaksPage breakInserted when you use the Breaks icon Breaks icon at the Insert or Layout tab of the top toolbar and then select the Insert Page Break option, or select the Page break before option in the right-click menu or advanced settings window.
                                                              Section breaksSection breakInserted when you use the Breaks icon Breaks icon at the Insert or Layout tab of the top toolbar and then select one of the Insert Section Break submenu options (the section break indicator differs depending on which option is selected: Next Page, Continuous Page, Even Page or Odd Page).
                                                              Column breaksColumn breakInserted when you use the Breaks icon Breaks icon at the Insert or Layout tab of the top toolbar and then select the Insert Column Break option.
                                                              End-of-cell and end-of row markers in tablesMarkers in tablesThese markers contain formatting codes for the individual cell and row, respectively.
                                                              Small black square in the margin to the left of a paragraphBlack squareIt indicates that at least one of the paragraph options was applied, e.g. Keep lines together, Page break before.
                                                              Anchor symbolsAnchor symbolThey indicate the position of floating objects (those with a wrapping style other than Inline), e.g. images, autoshapes, charts. You should select an object to make its anchor visible.
                                                              +
                                                              + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/OpenCreateNew.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/OpenCreateNew.htm new file mode 100644 index 000000000..02f1a44e4 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/OpenCreateNew.htm @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ + + + + Create a new document or open an existing one + + + + + + + +
                                                              +
                                                              + +
                                                              +

                                                              Create a new document or open an existing one

                                                              +

                                                              Per creare un nuovo documento

                                                              +
                                                              +

                                                              Nell’Editor di Documenti Online

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. clicca su File nella barra degli strumenti superiore,
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. seleziona l’opzione Crea nuovo.
                                                              4. +
                                                              +
                                                              +
                                                              +

                                                              Nell’Editor di Documenti Desktop

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. Nella finestra principale del programma, dalla sezione Crea nuovo che trovi sulla barra degli strumenti a sinistra, seleziona la voce Documento. Un nuovo file verrà aperto in una nuova sheda.
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. Quando tutte le modifiche sono state effettuate, clicca sull’icona Salva Save icon nell’angolo superiore sinistro, oppure clicca sulla voce di menù File e poi scegli Salva come dal menu a tendina.
                                                              4. +
                                                              5. Nella finestra di gestione dei file, scegli la locazione, specifica il nome, scegli il formato desiderato in cui desideri salvare il tuo documento (DOCX, Modello di documento (DOTX), ODT, OTT, RTF, TXT, PDF or PDFA) e poi clicca su Salva.
                                                              6. +
                                                              +
                                                              + +
                                                              +

                                                              Per aprire un documento esistente

                                                              +

                                                              Nell’Editor di Documenti Desktop

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. Nella finestra principale del programma, seleziona nella barra a sinistra la voce di menù Apri file locale,
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. Scegli il documento desiderato dalla finestra di gestione dei file e clicca su Apri.
                                                              4. +
                                                              +

                                                              Puoi anche cliccare col tasto destro sul documento desiderato all’interno della finestra di gestione dei file e scegliere l’opzione Apri con per poi scegliere l’applicazione preferita dal menù. Se il tipo di file documento é già stato associato all’applicazione, puoi anche aprire il documento con un doppio click nella finestra di gestione dei file.

                                                              +

                                                              Tutte le directory a cui hai accesso usando l’editor per desktop verranno visualizzate nell’elenco delle Cartelle recenti in modo da poter avere un rapido accesso in seguito. Cliccando sulla cartella, verranno visualizzati i file in essa contenuti.

                                                              +
                                                              + +

                                                              Per aprire un documento modificato recentemente

                                                              +
                                                              +

                                                              Nell’Editor di Documenti Online

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. clicca sulla voce File nella barra superiore dei menú
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. seleziona l’opzione Apri recenti...
                                                              4. +
                                                              5. scegli il documento desiderato dalla lista dei documenti modificati recentemente.
                                                              6. +
                                                              +
                                                              +
                                                              +

                                                              Nell’Editor di Documenti Desktop

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. Nella finestra principale del programma seleziona la voce File recenti nella barra a sinistra,
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. Scegli il documento di cui hai bisogno dall’elenco dei file modificati recentemente.
                                                              4. +
                                                              +
                                                              + +

                                                              Per aprire la cartella dove sono locati i file in una nuova sheda del browser nella versione online, clicca sulla voce Apri cartellaApri cartella, , che nella versione per desktop si trova immediatamente a destra della testata dell’editor. Alternativamente puoi cliccare sulla sheda File nella barra superiore e selezionare la voce Apri cartella.

                                                              +
                                                              + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/PageBreaks.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/PageBreaks.htm new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3a4f289e7 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/PageBreaks.htm @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ + + + + Inserire interruzioni di pagina + + + + + + + +
                                                              +
                                                              + +
                                                              +

                                                              Inserire interruzioni di pagina

                                                              +

                                                              Nell'Editor di documenti, è possibile aggiungere un'interruzione di pagina per iniziare una nuova pagina, inserire una pagina vuota e regolare le opzioni di impaginazione.

                                                              +

                                                              Per inserire un'interruzione di pagina nella posizione corrente del cursore, fare clic sull'icona Breaks icon Interruzione di pagina o di sezione nella scheda Inserisci o Layout della barra degli strumenti superiore oppure fare clic sulla freccia accanto a questa icona e selezionare l'opzione Inserisci interruzione di pagina dal menu. È inoltre possibile utilizzare la combinazione di tasti Ctrl+Invio.

                                                              +

                                                              Per inserire una pagina vuota nella posizione corrente del cursore, fare clic sull'icona Blank page icon Pagina vuota nella scheda Inserisci della barra degli strumenti superiore. In questo modo vengono inserite due interruzioni di pagina che creano una pagina vuota.

                                                              +

                                                              Per inserire un'interruzione di pagina prima del paragrafo selezionato, ad esempio per iniziare questo paragrafo nella parte superiore di una nuova pagina:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • fare clic con il pulsante destro del mouse e selezionare l'opzione Anteponi Interruzione di pagina nel menu, oppure
                                                              • +
                                                              • fare clic con il pulsante destro del mouse, seleziona l'opzione Impostazioni avanzate del paragrafo nel menu o utilizzare il link Mostra impostazioni avanzate nella barra laterale destra e selezionare la casella Anteponi interruzione di pagina nella scheda Interruzioni di riga e di pagina della finestra Paragrafo - Impostazioni avanzate aperta. +
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              Per mantenere le righe unite in modo che solo interi paragrafi vengano spostati nella nuova pagina (cioè non ci sarà alcuna interruzione di pagina tra le righe all'interno di un singolo paragrafo),

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • fare clic con il pulsante destro del mouse e selezionare l'opzione Mantieni assieme le righe nel menu, oppure
                                                              • +
                                                              • fare clic con il pulsante destro del mouse, selezionare l'opzione Impostazioni avanzate del paragrafo nel menu o utilizzare il link Mostra impostazioni avanzate nella barra laterale destra e selezionare la casella Mantieni assieme le righe nella scheda Interruzioni di riga e di pagina della finestra Paragrafo - Impostazioni avanzate aperta.
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              La scheda Interruzioni di riga e di pagina della finestra Paragrafo - Impostazioni avanzate consente di impostare altre due opzioni di impaginazione:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • Mantieni con il successivo - viene utilizzato per evitare un'interruzione di pagina tra il paragrafo selezionato e quello successivo.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Controllo righe isolate - è selezionato per impostazione predefinita e utilizzato per impedire la visualizzazione di una singola riga del paragrafo (la prima o l'ultima) nella parte superiore o inferiore della pagina.
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              Paragraph Advanced Settings - Line & Page Breaks

                                                              +
                                                              + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/ParagraphIndents.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/ParagraphIndents.htm new file mode 100644 index 000000000..524cbfb3d --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/ParagraphIndents.htm @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + Modificare i rientri del paragrafo + + + + + + + +
                                                              +
                                                              + +
                                                              +

                                                              Modificare i rientri del paragrafo

                                                              +

                                                              Nell'Editor documenti, è possibile modificare l'offset della prima riga dalla parte sinistra della pagina e l'offset del paragrafo dai lati sinistro e destro della pagina.

                                                              +

                                                              Per farlo,

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. posiziona il cursore all'interno del paragrafo che ti interessa o seleziona diversi paragrafi con il mouse o tutto il testo nel documento premendo la combinazione di tasti Ctrl+A,
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. fai clic con il pulsante destro del mouse e seleziona l'opzione Impostazioni avanzate del paragrafo dal menu o utilizza il collegamento Mostra impostazioni avanzate nella barra laterale destra,
                                                              4. +
                                                              5. nella finestra Paragrafo - Impostazioni avanzate aperta, passare alla scheda Rientri e spaziatura e impostare i parametri necessari nella sezione Rientri: +
                                                                  +
                                                                • A sinistra - imposta l'offset del paragrafo dal lato sinistro della pagina specificando il valore numerico necessario,
                                                                • +
                                                                • A destra - imposta l'offset del paragrafo dal lato destro della pagina specificando il valore numerico necessario,
                                                                • +
                                                                • Speciale - imposta un rientro per la prima riga del paragrafo: seleziona la voce di menu corrispondente ((nssuno), Prima riga, Sporgente) e modifica il valore numerico predefinito specificato per Prima riga o Sospensione,
                                                                • +
                                                                +
                                                              6. +
                                                              7. fare clic sul pulsante OK. +

                                                                Paragraph Advanced Settings - Indents & Spacing

                                                                +
                                                              8. +
                                                              +

                                                              Per modificare rapidamente l'offset del paragrafo dal lato sinistro della pagina, è anche possibile utilizzare le rispettive icone nella scheda Home della barra degli strumenti superiore: Riduci rientro Decrease indent e Aumenta rientro Increase indent.

                                                              +

                                                              È inoltre possibile utilizzare il righello orizzontale per impostare i rientri.

                                                              + Ruler - Indent markers +

                                                              Selezionate i paragrafi necessari e trascinate gli indicatori di rientro lungo il righello.

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • L'indicatore Rientro prima riga First Line Indent marker viene utilizzato per impostare l'offset dal lato sinistro della pagina per la prima riga del paragrafo.
                                                              • +
                                                              • L'indicatore Rientro sporgente Hanging Indent marker viene utilizzato per impostare l'offset dal lato sinistro della pagina per la seconda riga e tutte le righe successive del paragrafo.
                                                              • +
                                                              • L'indicatore Rientro sinistro Left Indent marker viene utilizzato per impostare l'intero offset del paragrafo dal lato sinistro della pagina.
                                                              • +
                                                              • L'indicatore Rientro destro Right Indent marker viene utilizzato per impostare l'offset del paragrafo dal lato destro della pagina.
                                                              • +
                                                              +
                                                              + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm new file mode 100644 index 000000000..88818981e --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + Save/download/print your document + + + + + + + +
                                                              +
                                                              + +
                                                              +

                                                              Save/download/print your document

                                                              +

                                                              Saving

                                                              +

                                                              By default, online Document Editor automatically saves your file each 2 seconds when you work on it preventing your data loss in case of the unexpected program closing. If you co-edit the file in the Fast mode, the timer requests for updates 25 times a second and saves the changes if they have been made. When the file is being co-edited in the Strict mode, changes are automatically saved at 10-minute intervals. If you need, you can easily select the preferred co-editing mode or disable the Autosave feature on the Advanced Settings page.

                                                              +

                                                              To save your current document manually in the current format and location,

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • press the Save Save icon icon in the left part of the editor header, or
                                                              • +
                                                              • use the Ctrl+S key combination, or
                                                              • +
                                                              • click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Save option.
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              Note: in the desktop version, to prevent data loss in case of the unexpected program closing you can turn on the Autorecover option at the Advanced Settings page.

                                                              +
                                                              +

                                                              In the desktop version, you can save the document with another name, in a new location or format,

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. click the File tab of the top toolbar,
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. select the Save as... option,
                                                              4. +
                                                              5. choose one of the available formats depending on your needs: DOCX, ODT, RTF, TXT, PDF, PDFA. You can also choose the Document template (DOTX or OTT) option.
                                                              6. +
                                                              +
                                                              +
                                                              +

                                                              Downloading

                                                              +

                                                              In the online version, you can download the resulting document onto your computer hard disk drive,

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. click the File tab of the top toolbar,
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. select the Download as... option,
                                                              4. +
                                                              5. choose one of the available formats depending on your needs: DOCX, PDF, ODT, TXT, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, HTML.
                                                              6. +
                                                              +

                                                              Saving a copy

                                                              +

                                                              In the online version, you can save a copy of the file on your portal,

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. click the File tab of the top toolbar,
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. select the Save Copy as... option,
                                                              4. +
                                                              5. choose one of the available formats depending on your needs: DOCX, PDF, ODT, TXT, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, HTML,
                                                              6. +
                                                              7. select a location of the file on the portal and press Save.
                                                              8. +
                                                              +
                                                              +

                                                              Printing

                                                              +

                                                              To print out the current document,

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • click the Print Print icon icon in the left part of the editor header, or
                                                              • +
                                                              • use the Ctrl+P key combination, or
                                                              • +
                                                              • click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Print option.
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              It's also possible to print a selected text passage using the Print Selection option from the contextual menu.

                                                              +

                                                              In the desktop version, the file will be printed directly.In the online version, a PDF file will be generated on the basis of the document. You can open and print it out, or save onto your computer hard disk drive or removable medium to print it out later. Some browsers (e.g. Chrome and Opera) support direct printing.

                                                              +
                                                              + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/SectionBreaks.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/SectionBreaks.htm new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9586aee1e --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/SectionBreaks.htm @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ + + + + Insert section breaks + + + + + + + +
                                                              +
                                                              + +
                                                              +

                                                              Insert section breaks

                                                              +

                                                              Section breaks allow you to apply a different layout or formatting for the certain parts of your document. For example, you can use individual headers and footers, page numbering, footnotes format, margins, size, orientation, or column number for each separate section.

                                                              +

                                                              Note: an inserted section break defines formatting of the preceding part of the document.

                                                              +

                                                              To insert a section break at the current cursor position:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. click the Breaks icon Breaks icon at the Insert or Layout tab of the top toolbar,
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. select the Insert Section Break submenu
                                                              4. +
                                                              5. select the necessary section break type: +
                                                                  +
                                                                • Next Page - to start a new section from the next page
                                                                • +
                                                                • Continuous Page - to start a new section at the current page
                                                                • +
                                                                • Even Page - to start a new section from the next even page
                                                                • +
                                                                • Odd Page - to start a new section from the next odd page
                                                                • +
                                                                +
                                                              6. +
                                                              +

                                                              Added section breaks are indicated in your document by a double dotted line: Section break

                                                              +

                                                              If you do not see the inserted section breaks, click the Nonprinting Characters icon icon at the Home tab of the top toolbar to display them.

                                                              +

                                                              To remove a section break select it with the mouse and press the Delete key. Since a section break defines formatting of the preceding section, when you remove a section break, this section formatting will also be deleted. The document part that preceded the removed section break acquires the formatting of the part that followed it.

                                                              +
                                                              + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/SetOutlineLevel.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/SetOutlineLevel.htm new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1aef783af --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/SetOutlineLevel.htm @@ -0,0 +1,29 @@ + + + + Impostare un livello di struttura del paragarfo + + + + + + + +
                                                              +
                                                              + +
                                                              +

                                                              Impostare un livello di struttura del paragarfo

                                                              + +

                                                              Il livello di struttura indica il livello del paragrafo nella struttura del documento. Sono disponibili i seguenti livelli: Testo Base, Livello 1 - Livello 9. Il livello di struttura può essere specificato in diversi modi, ad esempio utilizzando gli stili d’intestazione: una volta assegnato uno stile di titolo (Titolo 1 - Titolo 9) ad un paragrafo, esso acquisisce un livello di struttura corrispondente. Se assegni un livello a un paragrafo utilizzando le impostazioni avanzate del paragrafo, il paragrafo acquisisce solo il livello della struttura mentre il suo stile rimane invariato. Il livello di struttura può anche essere modificato nel pannello di Navigazione a sinistra usando le opzioni del menu contestuale.

                                                              +

                                                              Per modificare il livello di struttura di un paragrafo utilizzando le impostazioni avanzate del paragrafo,

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. fai clic con il pulsante destro e seleziona l’opzione Impostazioni avanzate del paragrafo dal menu contestuale o utilizza l’opzione Mostra impostazioni avanzate nella barra laterale destra,
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. apri la scheda Paragrafo - Impostazioni avanzate, passa alla scheda Rientri e spaziatura,
                                                              4. +
                                                              5. seleziona il livello di struttura necessario dall’elenco Livelli di struttura.
                                                              6. +
                                                              7. fai click sul pulsante OK per applicare le modifiche.
                                                              8. +
                                                              +

                                                              Paragrafo - Impostazioni avanzate - Rientri e spaziatura

                                                              +
                                                              + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/SetPageParameters.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/SetPageParameters.htm new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ad64c12bc --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/SetPageParameters.htm @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + Set page parameters + + + + + + + +
                                                              +
                                                              + +
                                                              +

                                                              Set page parameters

                                                              +

                                                              To change page layout, i.e. set page orientation and size, adjust margins and insert columns, use the corresponding icons at the Layout tab of the top toolbar.

                                                              +

                                                              Note: all these parameters are applied to the entire document. If you need to set different page margins, orientation, size, or column number for the separate parts of your document, please refer to this page.

                                                              +

                                                              Page Orientation

                                                              +

                                                              Change the current orientation type clicking the Orientation icon Orientation icon. The default orientation type is Portrait that can be switched to Album.

                                                              +

                                                              Page Size

                                                              +

                                                              Change the default A4 format clicking the Size icon Size icon and selecting the needed one from the list. The available preset sizes are:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • US Letter (21,59cm x 27,94cm)
                                                              • +
                                                              • US Legal (21,59cm x 35,56cm)
                                                              • +
                                                              • A4 (21cm x 29,7cm)
                                                              • +
                                                              • A5 (14,81cm x 20,99cm)
                                                              • +
                                                              • B5 (17,6cm x 25,01cm)
                                                              • +
                                                              • Envelope #10 (10,48cm x 24,13cm)
                                                              • +
                                                              • Envelope DL (11,01cm x 22,01cm)
                                                              • +
                                                              • Tabloid (27,94cm x 43,17cm)
                                                              • +
                                                              • AЗ (29,7cm x 42,01cm)
                                                              • +
                                                              • Tabloid Oversize (30,48cm x 45,71cm)
                                                              • +
                                                              • ROC 16K (19,68cm x 27,3cm)
                                                              • +
                                                              • Envelope Choukei 3 (11,99cm x 23,49cm)
                                                              • +
                                                              • Super B/A3 (33,02cm x 48,25cm)
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              You can also set a special page size by selecting the Custom Page Size option from the list. The Page Size window will open where you'll be able to select the necessary Preset (US Letter, US Legal, A4, A5, B5, Envelope #10, Envelope DL, Tabloid, AЗ, Tabloid Oversize, ROC 16K, Envelope Choukei 3, Super B/A3, A0, A1, A2, A6) or set custom Width and Height values. Enter your new values into the entry fields or adjust the existing values using arrow buttons. When ready, click OK to apply the changes.

                                                              +

                                                              Custom Page Size

                                                              +

                                                              Page Margins

                                                              +

                                                              Change default margins, i.e. the blank space between the left, right, top and bottom page edges and the paragraph text, clicking the Margins icon Margins icon and selecting one of the available presets: Normal, US Normal, Narrow, Moderate, Wide. You can also use the Custom Margins option to set your own values in the Margins window that opens. Enter the necessary Top, Bottom, Left and Right page margin values into the entry fields or adjust the existing values using arrow buttons.

                                                              +

                                                              Custom Margins

                                                              +

                                                              Gutter position is used to set up additional space on the left or top of the document. Gutter option might come in handy to make sure bookbinding does not cover text. In Margins window enter the necessary gutter position into the entry fields and choose where it should be placed in.

                                                              +

                                                              Note: Gutter position function cannot be used when Mirror margins option is checked.

                                                              +

                                                              In Multiple pages drop-down menu choose Mirror margins option to to set up facing pages for double-sided documents. With this option checked, Left and Right margins turn into Inside and Outside margins respectively.

                                                              +

                                                              In Orientation drop-down menu choose from Portrait and Landscape options.

                                                              +

                                                              All applied changes to the document will be displayed in the Preview window.

                                                              +

                                                              When ready, click OK. The custom margins will be applied to the current document and the Last Custom option with the specified parameters will appear in the Margins icon Margins list so that you can apply them to some other documents.

                                                              +

                                                              You can also change the margins manually by dragging the border between the grey and white areas on the rulers (the grey areas of the rulers indicate page margins):

                                                              +

                                                              Margins Adjustment

                                                              +

                                                              Columns

                                                              +

                                                              Apply a multi-column layout clicking the Columns icon Columns icon and selecting the necessary column type from the drop-down list. The following options are available:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • Two Two columns icon - to add two columns of the same width,
                                                              • +
                                                              • Three Three columns icon - to add three columns of the same width,
                                                              • +
                                                              • Left Left column icon - to add two columns: a narrow column on the left and a wide column on the right,
                                                              • +
                                                              • Right Right column icon - to add two columns: a narrow column on the right and a wide column on the left.
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              If you want to adjust column settings, select the Custom Columns option from the list. The Columns window will open where you'll be able to set necessary Number of columns (it's possible to add up to 12 columns) and Spacing between columns. Enter your new values into the entry fields or adjust the existing values using arrow buttons. Check the Column divider box to add a vertical line between the columns. When ready, click OK to apply the changes.

                                                              +

                                                              Custom Columns

                                                              +

                                                              To exactly specify where a new column should start, place the cursor before the text that you want to move into the new column, click the Breaks icon Breaks icon at the top toolbar and then select the Insert Column Break option. The text will be moved to the next column.

                                                              +

                                                              Added column breaks are indicated in your document by a dotted line: Column break. If you do not see the inserted column breaks, click the Nonprinting Characters icon icon at the Home tab of the top toolbar to display them. To remove a column break select it with the mouse and press the Delete key.

                                                              +

                                                              To manually change the column width and spacing, you can use the horizontal ruler.

                                                              +

                                                              Column spacing

                                                              +

                                                              To cancel columns and return to a regular single-column layout, click the Columns icon Columns icon at the top toolbar and select the One One column icon option from the list.

                                                              +
                                                              + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/SetTabStops.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/SetTabStops.htm new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b09b576d9 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/SetTabStops.htm @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + Set tab stops + + + + + + + +
                                                              +
                                                              + +
                                                              +

                                                              Set tab stops

                                                              +

                                                              In Document Editor, you can change tab stops i.e. the position the cursor advances to when you press the Tab key on the keyboard.

                                                              +

                                                              To set tab stops you can use the horizontal ruler:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. Select the necessary tab stop type clicking the Left Tab Stop button button in the upper left corner of the working area. The following three tab types are available: +
                                                                  +
                                                                • Left Left Tab Stop button - lines up your text by the left side at the tab stop position; the text moves to the right from the tab stop as you type. Such a tab stop will be indicated on the horizontal ruler by the Left Tab Stop marker marker.
                                                                • +
                                                                • Center Center Tab Stop button - centers the text at the tab stop position. Such a tab stop will be indicated on the horizontal ruler by the Center Tab Stop marker marker.
                                                                • +
                                                                • Right Right Tab Stop button - lines up your text by the right side at the tab stop position; the text moves to the left from the tab stop as you type. Such a tab stop will be indicated on the horizontal ruler by the Right Tab Stop marker marker.
                                                                • +
                                                                +
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. Click on the bottom edge of the ruler where you want to place the tab stop. Drag it along the ruler to change its position. To remove the added tab stop drag it out of the ruler. +

                                                                Horizontal Ruler with the Tab stops added

                                                                +
                                                              4. +
                                                              +
                                                              +

                                                              You can also use the paragraph properties window to adjust tab stops. Click the right mouse button, select the Paragraph Advanced Settings option in the menu or use the Show advanced settings link at the right sidebar, and switch to the Tabs tab in the opened Paragraph - Advanced Settings window.

                                                              + Paragraph Properties - Tabs tab +

                                                              You can set the following parameters:

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • Default Tab is set at 1.25 cm. You can decrease or increase this value using the arrow buttons or enter the necessary one in the box.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Tab Position - is used to set custom tab stops. Enter the necessary value in this box, adjust it more precisely using the arrow buttons and press the Specify button. Your custom tab position will be added to the list in the field below. If you've previously added some tab stops using the ruler, all these tab positions will also be displayed in the list.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Alignment - is used to set the necessary alignment type for each of the tab positions in the list above. Select the necessary tab position in the list, choose the Left, Center or Right option from the drop-down list and press the Specify button.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Leader - allows to choose a character used to create a leader for each of the tab positions. A leader is a line of characters (dots or hyphens) that fills the space between tabs. Select the necessary tab position in the list, choose the leader type from the drop-down list and press the Specify button. +

                                                                To delete tab stops from the list select a tab stop and press the Remove or Remove All button.

                                                                +
                                                              • +
                                                              +
                                                              + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/UseMailMerge.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/UseMailMerge.htm new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bdb683dca --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/UseMailMerge.htm @@ -0,0 +1,118 @@ + + + + Use Mail Merge + + + + + + + +
                                                              +
                                                              + +
                                                              +

                                                              Use Mail Merge

                                                              +

                                                              Note: this option is available in the online version only.

                                                              +

                                                              The Mail Merge feature is used to create a set of documents combining a common content which is taken from a text document and some individual components (variables, such as names, greetings etc.) taken from a spreadsheet (for example, a customer list). It can be useful if you need to create a lot of personalized letters and send them to recipients.

                                                              +

                                                              To start working with the Mail Merge feature,

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              1. Prepare a data source and load it to the main document +
                                                                  +
                                                                1. A data source used for the mail merge must be an .xlsx spreadsheet stored on your portal. Open an existing spreadsheet or create a new one and make sure that it meets the following requirements. +

                                                                  The spreadsheet should have a header row with the column titles, as values in the first cell of each column will designate merge fields (i.e. variables that you can insert into the text). Each column should contain a set of actual values for a variable. Each row in the spreadsheet should correspond to a separate record (i.e. a set of values that belongs to a certain recipient). During the merge process, a copy of the main document will be created for each record and each merge field inserted into the main text will be replaced with an actual value from the corresponding column. If you are goung to send results by email, the spreadsheet must also include a column with the recipients' email addresses.

                                                                  +
                                                                2. +
                                                                3. Open an existing text document or create a new one. It must contain the main text which will be the same for each version of the merged document. Click the Mail Merge Mail Merge icon icon at the Home tab of the top toolbar.
                                                                4. +
                                                                5. The Select Data Source window will open. It displays the list of all your .xlsx spreadsheets stored in the My Documents section. To navigate between other Documents module sections use the menu in the left part of the window. Select the file you need and click OK.
                                                                6. +
                                                                +

                                                                Once the data source is loaded, the Mail Merge setting tab will be available on the right sidebar.

                                                                +

                                                                Mail Merge setting tab

                                                                +
                                                              2. +
                                                              3. Verify or change the recipients list +
                                                                  +
                                                                1. Click the Edit recipients list button on the top of the right sidebar to open the Mail Merge Recipients window, where the content of the selected data source is displayed. +

                                                                  Mail Merge Recipients window

                                                                  +
                                                                2. +
                                                                3. Here you can add new information, edit or delete the existing data, if necessary. To simplify working with data, you can use the icons on the top of the window: +
                                                                    +
                                                                  • Copy and Paste - to copy and paste the copied data
                                                                  • +
                                                                  • Undo and Redo - to undo and redo undone actions
                                                                  • +
                                                                  • Sort Lowest to Highest icon and Sort Highest to Lowest icon - to sort your data within a selected range of cells in ascending or descending order
                                                                  • +
                                                                  • Filter icon - to enable the filter for the previously selected range of cells or to remove the applied filter
                                                                  • +
                                                                  • Clear Filter icon - to clear all the applied filter parameters +

                                                                    Note: to learn more on how to use the filter you can refer to the Sort and filter data section of the Spreadsheet Editor help.

                                                                    +
                                                                  • +
                                                                  • Search icon - to search for a certain value and replace it with another one, if necessary +

                                                                    Note: to learn more on how to use the Find and Replace tool you can refer to the Search and Replace Functions section of the Spreadsheet Editor help.

                                                                    +
                                                                  • +
                                                                  +
                                                                4. +
                                                                5. After all the necessary changes are made, click the Save & Exit button. To discard the changes, click the Close button.
                                                                6. +
                                                                +
                                                              4. +
                                                              5. Insert merge fields and check the results +
                                                                  +
                                                                1. Place the mouse cursor in the text of the main document where you want a merge field to be inserted, click the Insert Merge Field button at the right sidebar and select the necessary field from the list. The available fields correspond to the data in the first cell of each column of the selected data source. Add all the fields you need anywhere in the document. +

                                                                  Merge Fields section

                                                                  +
                                                                2. +
                                                                3. Turn on the Highlight merge fields switcher at the right sidebar to make the inserted fields more noticeable in the document text. +

                                                                  Main document with inserted fields

                                                                  +
                                                                4. +
                                                                5. Turn on the Preview results switcher at the right sidebar to view the document text with the merge fields replaced with actual values from the data source. Use the arrow buttons to preview versions of the merged document for each record. +

                                                                  Preview results

                                                                  +
                                                                6. +
                                                                +
                                                                  +
                                                                • To delete an inserted field, disable the Preview results mode, select the field with the mouse and press the Delete key on the keyboard.
                                                                • +
                                                                • To replace an inserted field, disable the Preview results mode, select the field with the mouse, click the Insert Merge Field button at the right sidebar and choose a new field from the list.
                                                                • +
                                                                +
                                                              6. +
                                                              7. Specify the merge parameters +
                                                                  +
                                                                1. Select the merge type. You can start mass mailing or save the result as a file in the PDF or Docx format to be able to print or edit it later. Select the necessary option from the Merge to list: +

                                                                  Merge type selection

                                                                  +
                                                                    +
                                                                  • PDF - to create a single document in the PDF format that includes all the merged copies so that you can print them later
                                                                  • +
                                                                  • Docx - to create a single document in the Docx format that includes all the merged copies so that you can edit individual copies later
                                                                  • +
                                                                  • Email - to send the results to recipients by email +

                                                                    Note: the recipients' email addresses must be specified in the loaded data source and you need to have at least one email account connected in the Mail module on your portal.

                                                                    +
                                                                  • +
                                                                  +
                                                                2. +
                                                                3. Choose the records you want to apply the merge to: +
                                                                    +
                                                                  • All records (this option is selected by default) - to create merged documents for all records from the loaded data source
                                                                  • +
                                                                  • Current record - to create a merged document for the record that is currently displayed
                                                                  • +
                                                                  • From ... To - to create merged documents for a range of records (in this case you need to specify two values: the number of the first record and the last record in the desired range) +

                                                                    Note: the maximum allowed quantity of recipients is 100. If you have more than 100 recipients in your data source, please, perform the mail merge by stages: specify the values from 1 to 100, wait until the mail merge process is over, then repeat the operation specifying the values from 101 to N etc.

                                                                    +
                                                                  • +
                                                                  +
                                                                4. +
                                                                5. Complete the merge +
                                                                    +
                                                                  • If you've decided to save the merge results as a file, +
                                                                      +
                                                                    • click the Download button to store the file anywhere on your PC. You'll find the downloaded file in your default Downloads folder.
                                                                    • +
                                                                    • click the Save button to save the file on your portal. In the Folder for save window that opens, you can change the file name and specify the folder where you want to save the file. You can also check the Open merged document in new tab box to check the result once the merge process is finished. Finally, click Save in the Folder for save window.
                                                                    • +
                                                                    +
                                                                  • +
                                                                  • If you've selected the Email option, the Merge button will be available on the right sidebar. After you click it, the Send to Email window will open: +

                                                                    Send to Email window

                                                                    +
                                                                      +
                                                                    • In the From list, select the mail account you want to use for sending mail, if you have several accounts connected in the Mail module.
                                                                    • +
                                                                    • In the To list, select the merge field corresponding to email addresses of the recipients, if it was not selected automatically.
                                                                    • +
                                                                    • Enter your message subject in the Subject Line field.
                                                                    • +
                                                                    • Select the mail format from the list: HTML, Attach as DOCX or Attach as PDF. When one of the two latter options is selected, you also need to specify the File name for attachments and enter the Message (the text of your letter that will be sent to recipients).
                                                                    • +
                                                                    • Click the Send button.
                                                                    • +
                                                                    +

                                                                    Once the mailing is over you'll receive a notification to your email specified in the From field.

                                                                    +
                                                                  • +
                                                                  +
                                                                6. +
                                                                +
                                                              8. +
                                                              +
                                                              + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/ViewDocInfo.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/ViewDocInfo.htm new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8db12c938 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/UsageInstructions/ViewDocInfo.htm @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + View document information + + + + + + + +
                                                              +
                                                              + +
                                                              +

                                                              View document information

                                                              +

                                                              To access the detailed information about the currently edited document, click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Document Info... option.

                                                              +

                                                              General Information

                                                              +

                                                              The document information includes a number of the file properties which describe the document. Some of these properties are updated automatically, and some of them can be edited.

                                                              +
                                                                +
                                                              • Location - the folder in the Documents module where the file is stored. Owner - the name of the user who have created the file. Uploaded - the date and time when the file has been created. These properties are available in the online version only.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Statistics - the number of pages, paragraphs, words, symbols, symbols with spaces.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Title, Subject, Comment - these properties allow to simplify your documents classification. You can specify the necessary text in the properties fields.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Last Modified - the date and time when the file was last modified.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Last Modified By - the name of the user who have made the latest change in the document if a document has been shared and it can be edited by several users.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Application - the application the document was created with.
                                                              • +
                                                              • Author - the person who have created the file. You can enter the necessary name in this field. Press Enter to add a new field that allows to specify one more author.
                                                              • +
                                                              +

                                                              If you changed the file properties, click the Apply button to apply the changes.

                                                              +
                                                              +

                                                              Note: Online Editors allow you to change the document name directly from the editor interface. To do that, click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Rename... option, then enter the necessary File name in a new window that opens and click OK.

                                                              +
                                                              +
                                                              +

                                                              Permission Information

                                                              +

                                                              In the online version, you can view the information about permissions to the files stored in the cloud.

                                                              +

                                                              Note: this option is not available for users with the Read Only permissions.

                                                              +

                                                              To find out, who have rights to view or edit the document, select the Access Rights... option at the left sidebar.

                                                              +

                                                              You can also change currently selected access rights by pressing the Change access rights button in the Persons who have rights section.

                                                              +

                                                              Version History

                                                              +

                                                              In the online version, you can view the version history for the files stored in the cloud.

                                                              +

                                                              Note: this option is not available for users with the Read Only permissions.

                                                              +

                                                              To view all the changes made to this document, select the Version History option at the left sidebar. It's also possible to open the history of versions using the Version History icon Version History icon at the Collaboration tab of the top toolbar. You'll see the list of this document versions (major changes) and revisions (minor changes) with the indication of each version/revision author and creation date and time. For document versions, the version number is also specified (e.g. ver. 2). To know exactly which changes have been made in each separate version/revision, you can view the one you need by clicking it at the left sidebar. The changes made by the version/revision author are marked with the color which is displayed next to the author name on the left sidebar. You can use the Restore link below the selected version/revision to restore it.

                                                              +

                                                              Version History

                                                              +

                                                              To return to the document current version, use the Close History option on the top of the version list.

                                                              +
                                                              +

                                                              To close the File panel and return to document editing, select the Close Menu option.

                                                              +
                                                              + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it_/callback.js b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/callback.js similarity index 100% rename from apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it_/callback.js rename to apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/callback.js diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it_/editor.css b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/editor.css similarity index 100% rename from apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it_/editor.css rename to apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/editor.css diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/3dchart.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/3dchart.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..73cb87169 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/3dchart.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/SearchOptions.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/SearchOptions.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b59d72eac Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/SearchOptions.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/about.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/about.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..36d9f52b4 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/about.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/abouticon.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/abouticon.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..29b5a244c Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/abouticon.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/access_rights.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/access_rights.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cc9312668 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/access_rights.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/addedcontentcontrol.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/addedcontentcontrol.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8b54df3d3 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/addedcontentcontrol.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/addfootnote.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/addfootnote.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..309c55e5e Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/addfootnote.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/addhyperlink.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/addhyperlink.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9ec3b04a3 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/addhyperlink.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/advanced_settings_icon.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/advanced_settings_icon.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..371d2a136 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/advanced_settings_icon.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/align_toptoolbar.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/align_toptoolbar.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1e454ee21 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/align_toptoolbar.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/aligncenter.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/aligncenter.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3cb1d4e12 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/aligncenter.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/alignleft.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/alignleft.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3f78174ec Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/alignleft.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/alignobjectbottom.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/alignobjectbottom.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..beb3b4079 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/alignobjectbottom.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/alignobjectcenter.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/alignobjectcenter.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f7c1d6ea6 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/alignobjectcenter.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/alignobjectleft.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/alignobjectleft.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3ba7ab2d4 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/alignobjectleft.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/alignobjectmiddle.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/alignobjectmiddle.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..848493cf1 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/alignobjectmiddle.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/alignobjectright.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/alignobjectright.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0b5a9d2c2 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/alignobjectright.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/alignobjecttop.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/alignobjecttop.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1c00650c9 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/alignobjecttop.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/alignright.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/alignright.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..62ea0562f Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/alignright.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/anchor.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/anchor.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..89fd1ee20 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/anchor.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/arrow.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/arrow.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..90e8ae3c4 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/arrow.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/back.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/back.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b0eb63cdc Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/back.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/backgroundcolor.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/backgroundcolor.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5929239d6 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/backgroundcolor.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/backgroundcolor_selected.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/backgroundcolor_selected.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..673b22ccf Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/backgroundcolor_selected.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/bgcolor.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/bgcolor.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9816bf1f0 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/bgcolor.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/blankpage.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/blankpage.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..11180c591 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/blankpage.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/bold.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/bold.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ff78d284e Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/bold.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/bookmark.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/bookmark.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7339d3f35 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/bookmark.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/bookmark_window.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/bookmark_window.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1711f4a78 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/bookmark_window.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/bookmark_window2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/bookmark_window2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..82f5380ac Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/bookmark_window2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/bringforward.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/bringforward.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0bdb3cdd5 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/bringforward.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/bringforward_toptoolbar.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/bringforward_toptoolbar.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4e44f88e8 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/bringforward_toptoolbar.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/bringtofront.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/bringtofront.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1dc65e57a Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/bringtofront.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/bulletedlistsettings.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/bulletedlistsettings.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d360da4ab Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/bulletedlistsettings.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/bullets.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/bullets.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..244784ff2 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/bullets.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/caption_icon.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/caption_icon.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fe9dcb22f Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/caption_icon.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/ccsettingswindow.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/ccsettingswindow.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c4a575e37 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/ccsettingswindow.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/ccsettingswindow2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/ccsettingswindow2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..51d1a005c Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/ccsettingswindow2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/cellrow.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/cellrow.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b78676ac7 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/cellrow.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/changecolorscheme.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/changecolorscheme.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9ef44daaf Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/changecolorscheme.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/changecolumnwidth.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/changecolumnwidth.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..53bbb8131 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/changecolumnwidth.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/changerowheight.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/changerowheight.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4a8e4df36 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/changerowheight.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/chart_properties.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/chart_properties.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bcbacae90 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/chart_properties.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/chart_properties_1.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/chart_properties_1.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2fffd7740 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/chart_properties_1.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/chart_properties_2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/chart_properties_2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..775e792d1 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/chart_properties_2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/chart_properties_3.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/chart_properties_3.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..658e8b643 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/chart_properties_3.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/chart_settings_icon.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/chart_settings_icon.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a490b12e0 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/chart_settings_icon.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/charteditor.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/charteditor.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6e5b86e38 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/charteditor.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/chartsettings.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/chartsettings.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b81b33688 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/chartsettings.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/chartsettings2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/chartsettings2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..56c7789ad Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/chartsettings2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/chartsettings3.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/chartsettings3.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e5bf1738e Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/chartsettings3.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/chartsettings4.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/chartsettings4.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..82dc42b11 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/chartsettings4.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/chartsettings5.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/chartsettings5.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..eb13de886 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/chartsettings5.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/chat_toptoolbar.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/chat_toptoolbar.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b378e0df6 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/chat_toptoolbar.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/chaticon.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/chaticon.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..98ba5dd3e Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/chaticon.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/chaticon_new.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/chaticon_new.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b1fb9c038 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/chaticon_new.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/checkboxcontentcontrol.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/checkboxcontentcontrol.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f50796c20 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/checkboxcontentcontrol.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/checkboxcontentcontrol2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/checkboxcontentcontrol2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..33a3160d6 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/checkboxcontentcontrol2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/checkboxsettings.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/checkboxsettings.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..92da0b462 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/checkboxsettings.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/circle.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/circle.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c8b41f4d4 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/circle.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/clearfilter.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/clearfilter.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..40b553863 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/clearfilter.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/clearstyle.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/clearstyle.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..af49a0022 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/clearstyle.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/coeditingmode.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/coeditingmode.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..31cb6f765 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/coeditingmode.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/coeditingmodemenu.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/coeditingmodemenu.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..10f201198 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/coeditingmodemenu.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/collapse.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/collapse.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d299a1667 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/collapse.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/colorscheme.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/colorscheme.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..92c21baa2 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/colorscheme.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/columnbreak.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/columnbreak.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9e735a07a Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/columnbreak.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/columnspacing.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/columnspacing.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2a07aac23 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/columnspacing.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/columnwidthmarker.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/columnwidthmarker.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..402fb9d7a Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/columnwidthmarker.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/comboboxaddvalue.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/comboboxaddvalue.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..27eda6856 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/comboboxaddvalue.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/comboboxcontentcontrol.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/comboboxcontentcontrol.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6bdf9f705 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/comboboxcontentcontrol.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/comboboxcontentcontrol2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/comboboxcontentcontrol2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f538a536b Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/comboboxcontentcontrol2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/comboboxsettings.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/comboboxsettings.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..dcc26fe96 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/comboboxsettings.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/comment_toptoolbar.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/comment_toptoolbar.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..68285e369 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/comment_toptoolbar.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/comments.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/comments.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1c2846ec2 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/comments.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/commentsicon.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/commentsicon.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2c2fb9173 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/commentsicon.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/compare_final.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/compare_final.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b55934c6a Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/compare_final.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/compare_markup.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/compare_markup.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..db2f90fb2 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/compare_markup.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/compare_method.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/compare_method.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e2c7fc5b7 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/compare_method.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/compare_original.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/compare_original.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..15da452aa Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/compare_original.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/comparebutton.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/comparebutton.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..18026984a Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/comparebutton.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/constantproportions.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/constantproportions.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4787f08cd Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/constantproportions.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/constantproportionsactivated.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/constantproportionsactivated.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7e9da62e2 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/constantproportionsactivated.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/copy.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/copy.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..87f716a19 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/copy.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/copystyle.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/copystyle.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..522438ec8 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/copystyle.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/copystyle_selected.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/copystyle_selected.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b865f76ce Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/copystyle_selected.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/createnewstylewindow.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/createnewstylewindow.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..91c50c2e6 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/createnewstylewindow.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/customcolumns.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/customcolumns.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..79df63f09 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/customcolumns.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/custommargins.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/custommargins.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e87a44422 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/custommargins.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/custompagesize.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/custompagesize.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5cc640edb Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/custompagesize.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/customstylemenu.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/customstylemenu.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f7882db1c Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/customstylemenu.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/customtable.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/customtable.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1a891ae28 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/customtable.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/datecontentcontrol.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/datecontentcontrol.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..943693a47 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/datecontentcontrol.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/datecontentcontrol2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/datecontentcontrol2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..141ead3c0 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/datecontentcontrol2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/datesettings.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/datesettings.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bfe89402e Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/datesettings.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/decreasedec.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/decreasedec.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..be92fa39b Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/decreasedec.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/decreaseindent.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/decreaseindent.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..667083b56 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/decreaseindent.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/deletecommenticon.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/deletecommenticon.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..43c48cee5 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/deletecommenticon.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/deleteequation.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/deleteequation.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1129fb73e Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/deleteequation.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/deleteicon.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/deleteicon.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a8b698212 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/deleteicon.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/distributehorizontally.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/distributehorizontally.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..edf546273 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/distributehorizontally.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/distributevertically.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/distributevertically.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..720dab074 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/distributevertically.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/document_language.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/document_language.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e9c3ed7a7 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/document_language.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/document_language_window.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/document_language_window.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d9c0f2b2f Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/document_language_window.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/dropcap_example.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/dropcap_example.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0582db003 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/dropcap_example.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/dropcap_margin.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/dropcap_margin.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a3086bb10 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/dropcap_margin.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/dropcap_none.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/dropcap_none.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..67fabb7d6 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/dropcap_none.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/dropcap_properties_1.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/dropcap_properties_1.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..060f96c06 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/dropcap_properties_1.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/dropcap_properties_2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/dropcap_properties_2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..891cbd5e5 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/dropcap_properties_2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/dropcap_properties_3.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/dropcap_properties_3.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2830b3698 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/dropcap_properties_3.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/dropcap_text.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/dropcap_text.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2c4ffd1a5 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/dropcap_text.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/editcommenticon.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/editcommenticon.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..798cae3b3 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/editcommenticon.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/editedequation.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/editedequation.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3922f469f Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/editedequation.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/editedequation2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/editedequation2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..59b8d219d Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/editedequation2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/editedstylemenu.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/editedstylemenu.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f23731f5b Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/editedstylemenu.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/equationplaceholder.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/equationplaceholder.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1eb632c58 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/equationplaceholder.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/eraser_tool.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/eraser_tool.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a626da579 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/eraser_tool.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/expand.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/expand.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8966c2028 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/expand.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/feedback.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/feedback.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c61246b1e Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/feedback.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/feedbackicon.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/feedbackicon.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1734e2336 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/feedbackicon.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/file.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/file.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c40af0405 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/file.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/fill_color.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/fill_color.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3d411150a Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/fill_color.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/fill_gradient.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/fill_gradient.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..31e87d6f4 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/fill_gradient.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/fill_pattern.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/fill_pattern.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..06480ac11 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/fill_pattern.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/fill_picture.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/fill_picture.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fbe2f71d1 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/fill_picture.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/firstline_indent.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/firstline_indent.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..72d1364e2 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/firstline_indent.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/fitpage.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/fitpage.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2ff1b9ae1 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/fitpage.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/fitwidth.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/fitwidth.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..17ee0330b Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/fitwidth.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/fliplefttoright.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/fliplefttoright.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b6babc560 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/fliplefttoright.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/flipupsidedown.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/flipupsidedown.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b8ce45f8f Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/flipupsidedown.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/floatingcontentcontrol.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/floatingcontentcontrol.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c374bb2ec Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/floatingcontentcontrol.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/fontcolor.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/fontcolor.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..73ee99c17 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/fontcolor.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/fontfamily.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/fontfamily.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8b68acb6d Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/fontfamily.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/fontsize.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/fontsize.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f1570a960 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/fontsize.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/footnotes.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/footnotes.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6d13abc82 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/footnotes.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/footnotes_settings.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/footnotes_settings.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1e485d0ba Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/footnotes_settings.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/footnotesadded.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/footnotesadded.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5aee8e80c Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/footnotesadded.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/footnotetext.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/footnotetext.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e33961d50 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/footnotetext.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/formatastext.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/formatastext.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2d9fc86c6 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/formatastext.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/formattingpresets.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/formattingpresets.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0918685da Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/formattingpresets.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/formula_settings.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/formula_settings.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2d4cfe680 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/formula_settings.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/frame_properties_1.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/frame_properties_1.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6fd05c333 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/frame_properties_1.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/frame_properties_2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/frame_properties_2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..262f7452e Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/frame_properties_2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/frame_properties_3.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/frame_properties_3.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b984407a3 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/frame_properties_3.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/gotodocuments.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/gotodocuments.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7721dc0cf Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/gotodocuments.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/gradientslider.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/gradientslider.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..35318bb1b Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/gradientslider.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/greencircle.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/greencircle.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..327710369 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/greencircle.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/group.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/group.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d1330ed44 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/group.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/group_toptoolbar.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/group_toptoolbar.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cd54ed4ec Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/group_toptoolbar.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/groupup.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/groupup.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..086ec9b07 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/groupup.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/hanging.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/hanging.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..09eecbb72 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/hanging.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/hard.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/hard.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f5ea4c95d Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/hard.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/headerfooter.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/headerfooter.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..550a98117 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/headerfooter.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/help.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/help.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3749be13b Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/help.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/hiderulers.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/hiderulers.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0da9ed71b Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/hiderulers.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/highlight_color_mouse_pointer.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/highlight_color_mouse_pointer.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..08317a86a Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/highlight_color_mouse_pointer.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/highlightcolor.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/highlightcolor.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..85ef0822b Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/highlightcolor.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/hyperlinkwindow.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/hyperlinkwindow.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3bc741433 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/hyperlinkwindow.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/hyperlinkwindow1.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/hyperlinkwindow1.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..952591312 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/hyperlinkwindow1.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/image.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/image.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c692a2074 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/image.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/image_properties.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/image_properties.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..98b71af70 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/image_properties.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/image_properties_1.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/image_properties_1.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5a4cbb161 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/image_properties_1.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/image_properties_2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/image_properties_2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..23f9db190 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/image_properties_2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/image_properties_3.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/image_properties_3.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..73836d2d0 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/image_properties_3.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/image_properties_4.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/image_properties_4.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..59134346d Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/image_properties_4.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/image_settings_icon.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/image_settings_icon.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2693e9fc1 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/image_settings_icon.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/imagespalette.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/imagespalette.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a4775fcf6 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/imagespalette.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/increasedec.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/increasedec.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6cf64f8ec Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/increasedec.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/increaseindent.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/increaseindent.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8e3a4e9f7 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/increaseindent.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/indents_ruler.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/indents_ruler.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..30d1675a3 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/indents_ruler.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/insert_dropcap_icon.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/insert_dropcap_icon.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5213396c9 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/insert_dropcap_icon.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/insert_symbol_sidebar.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/insert_symbol_sidebar.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6474fd572 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/insert_symbol_sidebar.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/insert_symbol_window.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/insert_symbol_window.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b3945e0de Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/insert_symbol_window.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/insert_symbols_window.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/insert_symbols_window.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..dee8c8fae Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/insert_symbols_window.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/insert_symbols_windows.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/insert_symbols_windows.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cb3567c51 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/insert_symbols_windows.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/insertautoshape.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/insertautoshape.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..35a44bae4 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/insertautoshape.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/insertcaptionbox.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/insertcaptionbox.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3e5413a59 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/insertcaptionbox.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/insertccicon.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/insertccicon.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..01255cd54 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/insertccicon.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/insertchart.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/insertchart.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b0b965c50 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/insertchart.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/insertcolumns.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/insertcolumns.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..17fecd7ce Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/insertcolumns.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/insertedequation.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/insertedequation.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d69a4a0d9 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/insertedequation.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/insertedfields.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/insertedfields.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..78597ccbc Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/insertedfields.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/insertequationicon.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/insertequationicon.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2a149b61e Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/insertequationicon.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/insertfunction.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/insertfunction.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3ca330b38 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/insertfunction.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/insertpagenumber.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/insertpagenumber.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3f42bfc41 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/insertpagenumber.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/inserttextarticon.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/inserttextarticon.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7f7ac8280 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/inserttextarticon.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/inserttexticon.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/inserttexticon.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7709e63b7 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/inserttexticon.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/interface/desktop_editorwindow.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/interface/desktop_editorwindow.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1ae219ae7 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/interface/desktop_editorwindow.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/interface/desktop_filetab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/interface/desktop_filetab.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..60132843f Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/interface/desktop_filetab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/interface/desktop_hometab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/interface/desktop_hometab.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..79f336c9d Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/interface/desktop_hometab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/interface/desktop_inserttab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/interface/desktop_inserttab.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9578a3e3e Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/interface/desktop_inserttab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/interface/desktop_layouttab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/interface/desktop_layouttab.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5b2dac8c3 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/interface/desktop_layouttab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/interface/desktop_pluginstab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/interface/desktop_pluginstab.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..af7a93504 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/interface/desktop_pluginstab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/interface/desktop_referencestab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/interface/desktop_referencestab.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e6e5aed74 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/interface/desktop_referencestab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/interface/desktop_reviewtab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/interface/desktop_reviewtab.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..af8ae90fe Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/interface/desktop_reviewtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/interface/editorwindow.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/interface/editorwindow.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8747b067e Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/interface/editorwindow.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/interface/filetab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/interface/filetab.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5cff9d2b8 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/interface/filetab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/interface/hometab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/interface/hometab.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5426c8fa8 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/interface/hometab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/interface/inserttab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/interface/inserttab.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8f8c7ec28 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/interface/inserttab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/interface/layouttab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/interface/layouttab.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..86e01b69e Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/interface/layouttab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/interface/leftpart.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/interface/leftpart.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4887825d6 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/interface/leftpart.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/interface/pluginstab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/interface/pluginstab.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6c0093c7d Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/interface/pluginstab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/interface/referencestab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/interface/referencestab.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bc684d39b Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/interface/referencestab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/interface/reviewtab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/interface/reviewtab.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5de69fe7e Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/interface/reviewtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/italic.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/italic.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7d5e6d062 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/italic.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/justify.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/justify.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b6520db6d Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/justify.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/larger.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/larger.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1a461a817 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/larger.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/leftcolumn.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/leftcolumn.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ae7288952 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/leftcolumn.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/leftindent.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/leftindent.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fbb16de5f Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/leftindent.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/linespacing.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/linespacing.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b9ef8a37a Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/linespacing.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/mailmergeicon.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/mailmergeicon.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f8cc554ab Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/mailmergeicon.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/mailmergerecipients.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/mailmergerecipients.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..78c37064d Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/mailmergerecipients.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/margins.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/margins.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..92f58f589 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/margins.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/mergefields.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/mergefields.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c733ecdf8 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/mergefields.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/mergeto.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/mergeto.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bb4f20ff0 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/mergeto.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/movecontentcontrol.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/movecontentcontrol.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b73ff26f0 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/movecontentcontrol.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/movetable_handle.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/movetable_handle.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9f383bf6e Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/movetable_handle.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/moving_chart.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/moving_chart.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..748f6221b Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/moving_chart.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/moving_image.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/moving_image.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7daf2b777 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/moving_image.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/multilevellistsettings.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/multilevellistsettings.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1e8921519 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/multilevellistsettings.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/navigationicon.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/navigationicon.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5876f69ff Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/navigationicon.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/navigationpanel.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/navigationpanel.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..12770bb44 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/navigationpanel.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/nestedfraction.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/nestedfraction.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f9a30fe84 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/nestedfraction.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/newequation.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/newequation.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d609fe222 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/newequation.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/newslot.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/newslot.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e42fbacb6 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/newslot.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/nextfootnote.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/nextfootnote.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..450c404f9 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/nextfootnote.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/nextpage.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/nextpage.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e30ed59d7 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/nextpage.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/noborders.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/noborders.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..45a5b4b2f Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/noborders.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/nofill.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/nofill.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..614087250 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/nofill.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/nonbreakspace.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/nonbreakspace.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fad613bb1 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/nonbreakspace.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/nonprintingcharacters.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/nonprintingcharacters.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b77249a38 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/nonprintingcharacters.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/numberformat.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/numberformat.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..67adee6d9 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/numberformat.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/numbering.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/numbering.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7975aee90 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/numbering.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/onecolumn.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/onecolumn.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9714d5f78 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/onecolumn.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/orderedlistsettings.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/orderedlistsettings.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a20f73bcc Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/orderedlistsettings.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/orientation.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/orientation.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6296a359a Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/orientation.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/outline.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/outline.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..82291ad51 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/outline.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/pagebreak.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/pagebreak.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4b8067a1e Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/pagebreak.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/pagebreak1.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/pagebreak1.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..18aa6ab48 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/pagebreak1.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/pagemargins.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/pagemargins.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a1047e26d Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/pagemargins.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/pagesize.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/pagesize.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d6b212540 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/pagesize.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/palette.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/palette.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..666af3d7d Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/palette.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/palette_custom.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/palette_custom.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f434ceb7d Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/palette_custom.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/paradvsettings_borders.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/paradvsettings_borders.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..546c861b6 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/paradvsettings_borders.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/paradvsettings_breaks.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/paradvsettings_breaks.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4ec853676 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/paradvsettings_breaks.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/paradvsettings_font.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/paradvsettings_font.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fc027535a Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/paradvsettings_font.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/paradvsettings_indents.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/paradvsettings_indents.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b30c07f75 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/paradvsettings_indents.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/paradvsettings_margins.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/paradvsettings_margins.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..02d5b3955 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/paradvsettings_margins.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/paradvsettings_tab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/paradvsettings_tab.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..14293c7c1 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/paradvsettings_tab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/paste.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/paste.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9e9aacd31 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/paste.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/paste_style.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/paste_style.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f369824f2 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/paste_style.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/pastespecialbutton.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/pastespecialbutton.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..95409ea6a Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/pastespecialbutton.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/pencil_tool.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/pencil_tool.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6e006637a Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/pencil_tool.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/picturecontentcontrol.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/picturecontentcontrol.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7082dcf03 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/picturecontentcontrol.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/previewinsertedfields.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/previewinsertedfields.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..db5c6f66b Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/previewinsertedfields.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/previousfootnote.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/previousfootnote.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4068f95eb Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/previousfootnote.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/previouspage.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/previouspage.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5565de652 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/previouspage.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/print.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/print.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d05c08b29 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/print.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/redo.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/redo.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3b718cb03 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/redo.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/redo1.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/redo1.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e44b47cbf Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/redo1.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/removecomment_toptoolbar.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/removecomment_toptoolbar.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2351f20be Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/removecomment_toptoolbar.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/reshaping.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/reshaping.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..92a6dc3c2 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/reshaping.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/resize_square.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/resize_square.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9c6182b66 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/resize_square.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/resizetable.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/resizetable.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e1428ae3b Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/resizetable.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/resizetable_handle.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/resizetable_handle.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..11eadb006 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/resizetable_handle.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/resolvedicon.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/resolvedicon.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a58d43490 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/resolvedicon.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/resolveicon.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/resolveicon.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e33c13b12 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/resolveicon.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/review.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/review.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..aec0b30fc Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/review.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/review_accept.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/review_accept.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ee3198d58 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/review_accept.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/review_accepttoptoolbar.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/review_accepttoptoolbar.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..312d5ab44 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/review_accepttoptoolbar.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/review_delete.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/review_delete.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..43c48cee5 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/review_delete.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/review_displaymode.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/review_displaymode.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..63314d079 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/review_displaymode.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/review_next.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/review_next.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e960aecdd Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/review_next.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/review_panel.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/review_panel.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..635045919 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/review_panel.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/review_previous.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/review_previous.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..936e0cf5f Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/review_previous.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/review_reject.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/review_reject.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..51b84c6f4 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/review_reject.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/review_rejecttoptoolbar.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/review_rejecttoptoolbar.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4db0a3f2e Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/review_rejecttoptoolbar.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/richtextcontentcontrol.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/richtextcontentcontrol.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a3481ad56 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/richtextcontentcontrol.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/right_autoshape.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/right_autoshape.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..abcb98be1 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/right_autoshape.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/right_chart.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/right_chart.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ecacdc526 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/right_chart.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/right_headerfooter.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/right_headerfooter.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b19d1aa68 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/right_headerfooter.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/right_image.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/right_image.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..89c5100cc Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/right_image.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/right_image_shape.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/right_image_shape.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..16b27052b Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/right_image_shape.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/right_indent.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/right_indent.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0f0d9203f Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/right_indent.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/right_mailmerge.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/right_mailmerge.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2948a6550 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/right_mailmerge.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/right_paragraph.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/right_paragraph.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f54bf0399 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/right_paragraph.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/right_table.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/right_table.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4d1fa5d01 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/right_table.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/right_textart.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/right_textart.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1b30562c1 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/right_textart.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/rightcolumn.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/rightcolumn.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6f0d91762 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/rightcolumn.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/rotateclockwise.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/rotateclockwise.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b985f3052 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/rotateclockwise.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/rotatecounterclockwise.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/rotatecounterclockwise.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..63c313bdb Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/rotatecounterclockwise.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/rowheightmarker.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/rowheightmarker.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..90a923c02 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/rowheightmarker.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/sameasprevious_label.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/sameasprevious_label.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ebb4bc4ca Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/sameasprevious_label.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/save.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/save.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bef90f537 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/save.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/saveupdate.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/saveupdate.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d4e58e825 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/saveupdate.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/savewhilecoediting.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/savewhilecoediting.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a3defd211 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/savewhilecoediting.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/search_options.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/search_options.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a762bb815 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/search_options.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/search_replace_window.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/search_replace_window.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4290729cd Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/search_replace_window.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/search_window.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/search_window.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5a2855ebb Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/search_window.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/searchbuttons.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/searchbuttons.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4bf98a406 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/searchbuttons.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/searchdownbutton.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/searchdownbutton.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4f40e511b Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/searchdownbutton.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/searchicon.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/searchicon.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f5b8213d4 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/searchicon.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/searchupbutton.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/searchupbutton.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..20b8513a2 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/searchupbutton.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/sectionbreak.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/sectionbreak.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7d364fc55 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/sectionbreak.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/select_text_languages.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/select_text_languages.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0013f0f5c Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/select_text_languages.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/selectcellpointer.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/selectcellpointer.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..dad8ca31c Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/selectcellpointer.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/selectcolumnpointer.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/selectcolumnpointer.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1381f0196 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/selectcolumnpointer.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/selectrowpointer.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/selectrowpointer.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d86bad841 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/selectrowpointer.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/sendbackward.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/sendbackward.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d3fd940b9 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/sendbackward.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/sendbackward_toptoolbar.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/sendbackward_toptoolbar.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..26039e511 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/sendbackward_toptoolbar.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/sendtoback.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/sendtoback.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8c55548e4 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/sendtoback.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/sendtoemail.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/sendtoemail.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..863c0f8b4 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/sendtoemail.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/shape_properties.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/shape_properties.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ac4d77834 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/shape_properties.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/shape_properties_1.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/shape_properties_1.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5c66ae839 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/shape_properties_1.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/shape_properties_2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/shape_properties_2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a18189199 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/shape_properties_2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/shape_properties_3.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/shape_properties_3.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ea2b821e5 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/shape_properties_3.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/shape_properties_4.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/shape_properties_4.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1fe869c2a Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/shape_properties_4.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/shape_properties_5.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/shape_properties_5.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3349d1153 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/shape_properties_5.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/shape_properties_6.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/shape_properties_6.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..caf4a8d43 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/shape_properties_6.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/shape_settings_icon.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/shape_settings_icon.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..63fd3063d Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/shape_settings_icon.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/sharingicon.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/sharingicon.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..02635fcbc Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/sharingicon.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/smaller.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/smaller.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d24f79a22 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/smaller.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/soft.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/soft.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1bf50aa18 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/soft.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/sortandfilter.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/sortandfilter.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..394b45a1b Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/sortandfilter.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/sortatoz.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/sortatoz.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7ddac860a Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/sortatoz.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/sortztoa.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/sortztoa.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..10c5a53c6 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/sortztoa.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/space.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/space.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cbbad296b Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/space.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/spellcheckactivated.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/spellcheckactivated.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..65e7ed85c Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/spellcheckactivated.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/spellcheckdeactivated.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/spellcheckdeactivated.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2f324b661 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/spellcheckdeactivated.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/spellchecking.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/spellchecking.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5f0c86a41 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/spellchecking.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/spellchecking_language.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/spellchecking_language.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ff704d56a Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/spellchecking_language.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/spellchecking_toptoolbar.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/spellchecking_toptoolbar.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..14be47e2b Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/spellchecking_toptoolbar.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/spellchecking_toptoolbar_activated.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/spellchecking_toptoolbar_activated.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..dddc2bec6 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/spellchecking_toptoolbar_activated.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/square.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/square.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bbdf95ae2 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/square.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/strike.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/strike.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..742143a34 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/strike.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/sub.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/sub.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b99d9c1df Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/sub.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/sup.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/sup.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7a32fc135 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/sup.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/tab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/tab.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3a9c3eed2 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/tab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/table.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/table.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..373854ac8 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/table.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/table_properties.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/table_properties.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c86c98b11 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/table_properties.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/table_properties_1.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/table_properties_1.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bbb10bee6 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/table_properties_1.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/table_properties_2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/table_properties_2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0e011f1f1 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/table_properties_2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/table_properties_3.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/table_properties_3.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0e17aed4c Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/table_properties_3.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/table_properties_4.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/table_properties_4.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fbbdf23ed Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/table_properties_4.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/table_properties_5.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/table_properties_5.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ee00e2257 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/table_properties_5.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/table_properties_6.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/table_properties_6.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..71ac5d914 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/table_properties_6.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/tabstopcenter.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/tabstopcenter.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d5b631af6 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/tabstopcenter.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/tabstopcenter_marker.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/tabstopcenter_marker.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9a2b0bb1a Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/tabstopcenter_marker.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/tabstopleft.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/tabstopleft.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4fa703b69 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/tabstopleft.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/tabstopleft_marker.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/tabstopleft_marker.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7cf80c3ba Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/tabstopleft_marker.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/tabstopright.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/tabstopright.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cc8627584 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/tabstopright.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/tabstopright_marker.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/tabstopright_marker.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a2c3cfee1 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/tabstopright_marker.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/tabstops_ruler.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/tabstops_ruler.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ade45c824 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/tabstops_ruler.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/text_autoshape.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/text_autoshape.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..baf06e623 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/text_autoshape.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/textart_settings_icon.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/textart_settings_icon.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..46f74302a Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/textart_settings_icon.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/textart_transformation.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/textart_transformation.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4bccb6f01 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/textart_transformation.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/textbox_boxselected.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/textbox_boxselected.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7585011bc Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/textbox_boxselected.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/textbox_textselected.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/textbox_textselected.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..311adb715 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/textbox_textselected.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/threecolumns.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/threecolumns.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c51b78990 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/threecolumns.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/toccontentcontrol.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/toccontentcontrol.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1ac670010 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/toccontentcontrol.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/toccustomize.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/toccustomize.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..165f7b029 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/toccustomize.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/tocicon.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/tocicon.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b7006ced9 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/tocicon.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/tociconmenu.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/tociconmenu.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..76bca6b44 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/tociconmenu.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/tocmove.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/tocmove.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..72e5121b0 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/tocmove.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/tocrefreshcc.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/tocrefreshcc.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..dfc7f820a Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/tocrefreshcc.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/tocrefreshcontextual.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/tocrefreshcontextual.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..809a63e13 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/tocrefreshcontextual.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/tocrefreshicon.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/tocrefreshicon.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6e252e08f Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/tocrefreshicon.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/tocrefreshiconcc.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/tocrefreshiconcc.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..712d438a2 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/tocrefreshiconcc.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/tocsettingscc.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/tocsettingscc.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7ada964a2 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/tocsettingscc.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/tocsettingswindow.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/tocsettingswindow.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7933ea7ea Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/tocsettingswindow.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/tocsettingswindow2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/tocsettingswindow2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5cc4dd17c Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/tocsettingswindow2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/trackchangesstatusbar.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/trackchangesstatusbar.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c39959e6c Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/trackchangesstatusbar.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/trackchangestoptoolbar.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/trackchangestoptoolbar.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7428127df Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/trackchangestoptoolbar.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/twocolumns.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/twocolumns.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..859789aae Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/twocolumns.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/underline.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/underline.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4c82ff29b Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/underline.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/undo.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/undo.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..125fdecb1 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/undo.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/undo1.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/undo1.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..595e2a582 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/undo1.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/ungroup.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/ungroup.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3fd822b68 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/ungroup.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/updatefromseleciton.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/updatefromseleciton.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b0d592de7 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/updatefromseleciton.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/usersnumber.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/usersnumber.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1f1cee612 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/usersnumber.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/vector.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/vector.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8353e80fc Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/vector.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/versionhistory.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/versionhistory.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..47e50bef9 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/versionhistory.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/versionhistoryicon.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/versionhistoryicon.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fe6cdf49f Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/versionhistoryicon.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/viewsettingsicon.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/viewsettingsicon.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e13ec992d Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/viewsettingsicon.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/watermark.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/watermark.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..03a568c03 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/watermark.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/watermark_settings.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/watermark_settings.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5b1f5fa04 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/watermark_settings.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/watermark_settings2.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/watermark_settings2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b79fb3c11 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/watermark_settings2.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/wrap_boundary.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/wrap_boundary.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d6677e175 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/wrap_boundary.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/wrapping_toptoolbar.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/wrapping_toptoolbar.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6da453caa Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/wrapping_toptoolbar.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/wrappingstyle_behind.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/wrappingstyle_behind.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b896c3a1f Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/wrappingstyle_behind.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/wrappingstyle_behind_toptoolbar.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/wrappingstyle_behind_toptoolbar.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c55960390 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/wrappingstyle_behind_toptoolbar.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/wrappingstyle_infront.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/wrappingstyle_infront.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..94326cee0 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/wrappingstyle_infront.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/wrappingstyle_infront_toptoolbar.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/wrappingstyle_infront_toptoolbar.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0abde3256 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/wrappingstyle_infront_toptoolbar.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/wrappingstyle_inline.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/wrappingstyle_inline.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..84850fd50 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/wrappingstyle_inline.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/wrappingstyle_inline_toptoolbar.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/wrappingstyle_inline_toptoolbar.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..48f8c7bc6 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/wrappingstyle_inline_toptoolbar.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/wrappingstyle_square.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/wrappingstyle_square.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f3e7033b8 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/wrappingstyle_square.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/wrappingstyle_square_toptoolbar.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/wrappingstyle_square_toptoolbar.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2d8f18512 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/wrappingstyle_square_toptoolbar.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/wrappingstyle_through.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/wrappingstyle_through.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fd0f92d57 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/wrappingstyle_through.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/wrappingstyle_through_toptoolbar.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/wrappingstyle_through_toptoolbar.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..dc17f6f66 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/wrappingstyle_through_toptoolbar.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/wrappingstyle_tight.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/wrappingstyle_tight.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0e906f090 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/wrappingstyle_tight.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/wrappingstyle_tight_toptoolbar.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/wrappingstyle_tight_toptoolbar.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a5cd45fbc Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/wrappingstyle_tight_toptoolbar.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/wrappingstyle_topandbottom.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/wrappingstyle_topandbottom.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9f78d316d Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/wrappingstyle_topandbottom.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/wrappingstyle_topandbottom_toptoolbar.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/wrappingstyle_topandbottom_toptoolbar.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5be2017dd Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/wrappingstyle_topandbottom_toptoolbar.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/yellowdiamond.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/yellowdiamond.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4e075eb30 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/yellowdiamond.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/zoomin.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/zoomin.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e2eeea6a3 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/zoomin.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/zoomout.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/zoomout.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..60ac9a97d Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/images/zoomout.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/search/indexes.js b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/search/indexes.js new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ab1c70b7d --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/search/indexes.js @@ -0,0 +1,303 @@ +var indexes = +[ + { + "id": "HelpfulHints/About.htm", + "title": "About Document Editor", + "body": "Document Editor is an online application that lets you look through and edit documents directly in your browser . Using Document Editor, you can perform various editing operations like in any desktop editor, print the edited documents keeping all the formatting details or download them onto your computer hard disk drive as DOCX, PDF, ODT, TXT, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, HTML files. To view the current software version and licensor details in the online version, click the icon at the left sidebar. To view the current software version and licensor details in the desktop version, select the About menu item at the left sidebar of the main program window." + }, + { + "id": "HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm", + "title": "Advanced Settings of Document Editor", + "body": "Document Editor lets you change its advanced settings. To access them, open the File tab at the top toolbar and select the Advanced Settings... option. You can also click the View settings icon on the right side of the editor header and select the Advanced settings option. The advanced settings are: Commenting Display is used to turn on/off the live commenting option: Turn on display of the comments - if you disable this feature, the commented passages will be highlighted only if you click the Comments icon at the left sidebar. Turn on display of the resolved comments - this feature is disabled by default so that the resolved comments were hidden in the document text. You can view such comments only if you click the Comments icon at the left sidebar. Enable this option if you want to display resolved comments in the document text. Spell Checking is used to turn on/off the spell checking option. Alternate Input is used to turn on/off hieroglyphs. Alignment Guides is used to turn on/off alignment guides that appear when you move objects and allow you to position them on the page precisely. Compatibility is used to make the files compatible with older MS Word versions when saved as DOCX. Autosave is used in the online version to turn on/off automatic saving of changes you make while editing. Autorecover - is used in the desktop version to turn on/off the option that allows to automatically recover documents in case of the unexpected program closing. Co-editing Mode is used to select the display of the changes made during the co-editing: By default the Fast mode is selected, the users who take part in the document co-editing will see the changes in real time once they are made by other users. If you prefer not to see other user changes (so that they do not disturb you, or for some other reason), select the Strict mode and all the changes will be shown only after you click the Save icon notifying you that there are changes from other users. Real-time Collaboration Changes is used to specify what changes you want to be highlighted during co-editing: Selecting the View None option, changes made during the current session will not be highlighted. Selecting the View All option, all the changes made during the current session will be highlighted. Selecting the View Last option, only the changes made since you last time clicked the Save icon will be highlighted. This option is only available when the Strict co-editing mode is selected. Default Zoom Value is used to set the default zoom value selecting it in the list of available options from 50% to 200%. You can also choose the Fit to Page or Fit to Width option. Font Hinting is used to select the type a font is displayed in Document Editor: Choose As Windows if you like the way fonts are usually displayed on Windows, i.e. using Windows font hinting. Choose As OS X if you like the way fonts are usually displayed on a Mac, i.e. without any font hinting at all. Choose Native if you want your text to be displayed with the hinting embedded into font files. Default cache mode - used to select the cache mode for the font characters. It’s not recommended to switch it without any reason. It can be helpful in some cases only, for example, when an issue in the Google Chrome browser with the enabled hardware acceleration occurs. Document Editor has two cache modes: In the first cache mode, each letter is cached as a separate picture. In the second cache mode, a picture of a certain size is selected where letters are placed dynamically and a mechanism of allocating/removing memory in this picture is also implemented. If there is not enough memory, a second picture is created, etc. The Default cache mode setting applies two above mentioned cache modes separately for different browsers: When the Default cache mode setting is enabled, Internet Explorer (v. 9, 10, 11) uses the second cache mode, other browsers use the first cache mode. When the Default cache mode setting is disabled, Internet Explorer (v. 9, 10, 11) uses the first cache mode, other browsers use the second cache mode. Unit of Measurement is used to specify what units are used on the rulers and in properties windows for measuring elements parameters such as width, height, spacing, margins etc. You can select the Centimeter, Point, or Inch option. To save the changes you made, click the Apply button." + }, + { + "id": "HelpfulHints/CollaborativeEditing.htm", + "title": "Collaborative Document Editing", + "body": "Document Editor offers you the possibility to work at a document collaboratively with other users. This feature includes: simultaneous multi-user access to the edited document visual indication of passages that are being edited by other users real-time changes display or synchronization of changes with one button click chat to share ideas concerning particular document parts comments containing the description of a task or problem that should be solved (it's also possible to work with comments in the offline mode, without connecting to the online version) Connecting to the online version In the desktop editor, open the Connect to cloud option of the left-side menu in the main program window. Connect to your cloud office specifying your account login and password. Co-editing Document Editor allows to select one of the two available co-editing modes: Fast is used by default and shows the changes made by other users in real time. Strict is selected to hide other user changes until you click the Save icon to save your own changes and accept the changes made by others. The mode can be selected in the Advanced Settings. It's also possible to choose the necessary mode using the Co-editing Mode icon at the Collaboration tab of the top toolbar: Note: when you co-edit a document in the Fast mode, the possibility to Redo the last undone operation is not available. When a document is being edited by several users simultaneously in the Strict mode, the edited text passages are marked with dashed lines of different colors. By hovering the mouse cursor over one of the edited passages, the name of the user who is editing it at the moment is displayed. The Fast mode will show the actions and the names of the co-editors once they are editing the text. The number of users who are working at the current document is specified on the right side of the editor header - . If you want to see who exactly are editing the file now, you can click this icon or open the Chat panel with the full list of the users. When no users are viewing or editing the file, the icon in the editor header will look like allowing you to manage the users who have access to the file right from the document: invite new users giving them permissions to edit, read, comment, fill forms or review the document, or deny some users access rights to the file. Click this icon to manage the access to the file; this can be done both when there are no other users who view or co-edit the document at the moment and when there are other users and the icon looks like . It's also possible to set access rights using the Sharing icon at the Collaboration tab of the top toolbar. As soon as one of the users saves his/her changes by clicking the icon, the others will see a note within the status bar stating that they have updates. To save the changes you made, so that other users can view them, and get the updates saved by your co-editors, click the icon in the left upper corner of the top toolbar. The updates will be highlighted for you to check what exactly has been changed. You can specify what changes you want to be highlighted during co-editing if you click the File tab at the top toolbar, select the Advanced Settings... option and choose between none, all and last real-time collaboration changes. Selecting View all changes, all the changes made during the current session will be highlighted. Selecting View last changes, only the changes made since you last time clicked the icon will be highlighted. Selecting View None changes, changes made during the current session will not be highlighted. Chat You can use this tool to coordinate the co-editing process on-the-fly, for example, to arrange with your collaborators about who is doing what, which paragraph you are going to edit now etc. The chat messages are stored during one session only. To discuss the document content it is better to use comments which are stored until you decide to delete them. To access the chat and leave a message for other users, click the icon at the left sidebar, or switch to the Collaboration tab of the top toolbar and click the Chat button, enter your text into the corresponding field below, press the Send button. All the messages left by users will be displayed on the panel on the left. If there are new messages you haven't read yet, the chat icon will look like this - . To close the panel with chat messages, click the icon at the left sidebar or the Chat button at the top toolbar once again. Comments It's possible to work with comments in the offline mode, without connecting to the online version. To leave a comment, select a text passage where you think there is an error or problem, switch to the Insert or Collaboration tab of the top toolbar and click the Comment button, or use the icon at the left sidebar to open the Comments panel and click the Add Comment to Document link, or right-click the selected text passage and select the Add Сomment option from the contextual menu, enter the needed text, click the Add Comment/Add button. The comment will be seen on the Comments panel on the left. Any other user can answer to the added comment asking questions or reporting on the work he/she has done. For this purpose, click the Add Reply link situated under the comment, type in your reply text in the entry field and press the Reply button. If you are using the Strict co-editing mode, new comments added by other users will become visible only after you click the icon in the left upper corner of the top toolbar. The text passage you commented will be highlighted in the document. To view the comment, just click within the passage. If you need to disable this feature, click the File tab at the top toolbar, select the Advanced Settings... option and uncheck the Turn on display of the comments box. In this case the commented passages will be highlighted only if you click the icon. You can manage the added comments using the icons in the comment balloon or at the Comments panel on the left: edit the currently selected comment by clicking the icon, delete the currently selected comment by clicking the icon, close the currently selected discussion by clicking the icon if the task or problem you stated in your comment was solved, after that the discussion you opened with your comment gets the resolved status. To open it again, click the icon. If you want to hide resolved comments, click the File tab at the top toolbar, select the Advanced Settings... option, uncheck the Turn on display of the resolved comments box and click Apply. In this case the resolved comments will be highlighted only if you click the icon. Adding mentions When entering comments, you can use the mentions feature that allows to attract somebody's attention to the comment and send a notification to the mentioned user via email and Talk. To add a mention enter the \"+\" or \"@\" sign anywhere in the comment text - a list of the portal users will open. To simplify the search process, you can start typing a name in the comment field - the user list will change as you type. Select the necessary person from the list. If the file has not yet been shared with the mentioned user, the Sharing Settings window will open. Read only access type is selected by default. Change it if necessary and click OK. The mentioned user will receive an email notification that he/she has been mentioned in a comment. If the file has been shared, the user will also receive a corresponding notification. To remove comments, click the Remove button at the Collaboration tab of the top toolbar, select the necessary option from the menu: Remove Current Comments - to remove the currently selected comment. If some replies have beed added to the comment, all its replies will be removed as well. Remove My Comments - to remove comments you added without removing comments added by other users. If some replies have beed added to your comment, all its replies will be removed as well. Remove All Comments - to remove all the comments in the document that you and other users added. To close the panel with comments, click the icon at the left sidebar once again." + }, + { + "id": "HelpfulHints/Comparison.htm", + "title": "Compare documents", + "body": "Note: this option is available in the paid online version only starting from Document Server v. 5.5. If you need to compare and merge two documents, you can use the document Compare feature. It allows to display the differences between two documents and merge the documents by accepting the changes one by one or all at once. After comparing and merging two documents, the result will be stored on the portal as a new version of the original file. If you do not need to merge documents which are being compared, you can reject all the changes so that the original document remains unchanged. Choose a document for comparison To compare two documents, open the original document that you need to compare and select the second document for comparison: switch to the Collaboration tab at the top toolbar and press the Compare button, select one of the following options to load the document: the Document from File option will open the standard dialog window for file selection. Browse your computer hard disk drive for the necessary .docx file and click the Open button. the Document from URL option will open the window where you can enter a link to the file stored in a third-party web storage (for example, Nextcloud) if you have corresponding access rights to it. The link must be a direct link for downloading the file. When the link is specified, click the OK button. Note: The direct link allows to download the file directly without opening it in a web browser. For example, to get a direct link in Nextcloud, find the necessary document in the file list, select the Details option from the file menu. Click the Copy direct link (only works for users who have access to this file/folder) icon to the right of the file name at the details panel. To find out how to get a direct link for downloading the file in a different third-party web storage, please refer to the corresponding third-party service documentation. the Document from Storage option will open the Select Data Source window. It displays the list of all the .docx documents stored on your portal you have corresponding access rights to. To navigate between the Documents module sections use the menu in the left part of the window. Select the necessary .docx document and click the OK button. When the second document for comparison is selected, the comparison process will start and the document will look as if it was opened in the Review mode. All the changes are highlighted with a color, and you can view the changes, navigate between them, accept or reject them one by one or all the changes at once. It's also possible to change the display mode and see how the document looks before comparison, in the process of comparison, or how it will look after comparison if you accept all changes. Choose the changes display mode Click the Display Mode button at the top toolbar and select one of the available modes from the list: Markup - this option is selected by default. It is used to display the document in the process of comparison. This mode allows both to view the changes and edit the document. Final - this mode is used to display the document after comparison as if all the changes were accepted. This option does not actually accept all changes, it only allows you to see how the document will look like after you accept all the changes. In this mode, you cannot edit the document. Original - this mode is used to display the document before comparison as if all the changes were rejected. This option does not actually reject all changes, it only allows you to view the document without changes. In this mode, you cannot edit the document. Accept or reject changes Use the Previous and the Next buttons at the top toolbar to navigate among the changes. To accept the currently selected change you can: click the Accept button at the top toolbar, or click the downward arrow below the Accept button and select the Accept Current Change option (in this case, the change will be accepted and you will proceed to the next change), or click the Accept button of the change notification. To quickly accept all the changes, click the downward arrow below the Accept button and select the Accept All Changes option. To reject the current change you can: click the Reject button at the top toolbar, or click the downward arrow below the Reject button and select the Reject Current Change option (in this case, the change will be rejected and you will move on to the next available change), or click the Reject button of the change notification. To quickly reject all the changes, click the downward arrow below the Reject button and select the Reject All Changes option. Additional info on the comparison feature Method of the comparison Documents are compared by words. If a word contains a change of at least one character (e.g. if a character was removed or replaced), in the result, the difference will be displayed as the change of the entire word, not the character. The image below illustrates the case when the original file contains the word 'Characters' and the document for comparison contains the word 'Character'. Authorship of the document When the comparison process is launched, the second document for comparison is being loaded and compared to the current one. If the loaded document contains some data which is not represented in the original document, the data will be marked as added by a reviewer. If the original document contains some data which is not represented in the loaded document, the data will be marked as deleted by a reviewer. If the authors of the original and loaded documents are the same person, the reviewer is the same user. His/her name is displayed in the change balloon. If the authors of two files are different users, then the author of the second file loaded for comparison is the author of the added/removed changes. Presence of the tracked changes in the compared document If the original document contains some changes made in the review mode, they will be accepted in the comparison process. When you choose the second file for comparison, you'll see the corresponding warning message. In this case, when you choose the Original display mode, the document will not contain any changes." + }, + { + "id": "HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm", + "title": "Keyboard Shortcuts", + "body": "Windows/LinuxMac OS Working with Document Open 'File' panel Alt+F ⌥ Option+F Open the File panel to save, download, print the current document, view its info, create a new document or open an existing one, access Document Editor help or advanced settings. Open 'Find and Replace' dialog box Ctrl+F ^ Ctrl+F, ⌘ Cmd+F Open the Find and Replace dialog box to start searching for a character/word/phrase in the currently edited document. Open 'Find and Replace' dialog box with replacement field Ctrl+H ^ Ctrl+H Open the Find and Replace dialog box with the replacement field to replace one or more occurrences of the found characters. Repeat the last 'Find' action ⇧ Shift+F4 ⇧ Shift+F4, ⌘ Cmd+G, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+F4 Repeat the Find action which has been performed before the key combination press. Open 'Comments' panel Ctrl+⇧ Shift+H ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+H, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+H Open the Comments panel to add your own comment or reply to other users' comments. Open comment field Alt+H ⌥ Option+H Open a data entry field where you can add the text of your comment. Open 'Chat' panel Alt+Q ⌥ Option+Q Open the Chat panel and send a message. Save document Ctrl+S ^ Ctrl+S, ⌘ Cmd+S Save all the changes to the document currently edited with Document Editor. The active file will be saved with its current file name, location, and file format. Print document Ctrl+P ^ Ctrl+P, ⌘ Cmd+P Print the document with one of the available printers or save it to a file. Download As... Ctrl+⇧ Shift+S ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+S, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+S Open the Download as... panel to save the currently edited document to the computer hard disk drive in one of the supported formats: DOCX, PDF, ODT, TXT, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, HTML. Full screen F11 Switch to the full screen view to fit Document Editor into your screen. Help menu F1 F1 Open Document Editor Help menu. Open existing file (Desktop Editors) Ctrl+O On the Open local file tab in Desktop Editors, opens the standard dialog box that allows to select an existing file. Close file (Desktop Editors) Ctrl+W, Ctrl+F4 ^ Ctrl+W, ⌘ Cmd+W Close the current document window in Desktop Editors. Element contextual menu ⇧ Shift+F10 ⇧ Shift+F10 Open the selected element contextual menu. Navigation Jump to the beginning of the line Home Home Put the cursor to the beginning of the currently edited line. Jump to the beginning of the document Ctrl+Home ^ Ctrl+Home Put the cursor to the very beginning of the currently edited document. Jump to the end of the line End End Put the cursor to the end of the currently edited line. Jump to the end of the document Ctrl+End ^ Ctrl+End Put the cursor to the very end of the currently edited document. Jump to the beginning of the previous page Alt+Ctrl+Page Up Put the cursor to the very beginning of the page which preceeds the currently edited one. Jump to the beginning of the next page Alt+Ctrl+Page Down ⌥ Option+⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+Page Down Put the cursor to the very beginning of the page which follows the currently edited one. Scroll down Page Down Page Down, ⌥ Option+Fn+↑ Scroll the document approximately one visible page down. Scroll up Page Up Page Up, ⌥ Option+Fn+↓ Scroll the document approximately one visible page up. Next page Alt+Page Down ⌥ Option+Page Down Go to the next page in the currently edited document. Previous page Alt+Page Up ⌥ Option+Page Up Go to the previous page in the currently edited document. Zoom In Ctrl++ ^ Ctrl+=, ⌘ Cmd+= Zoom in the currently edited document. Zoom Out Ctrl+- ^ Ctrl+-, ⌘ Cmd+- Zoom out the currently edited document. Move one character to the left ← ← Move the cursor one character to the left. Move one character to the right → → Move the cursor one character to the right. Move to the beginning of a word or one word to the left Ctrl+← ^ Ctrl+←, ⌘ Cmd+← Move the cursor to the beginning of a word or one word to the left. Move one word to the right Ctrl+→ ^ Ctrl+→, ⌘ Cmd+→ Move the cursor one word to the right. Move one line up ↑ ↑ Move the cursor one line up. Move one line down ↓ ↓ Move the cursor one line down. Writing End paragraph ↵ Enter ↵ Return End the current paragraph and start a new one. Add line break ⇧ Shift+↵ Enter ⇧ Shift+↵ Return Add a line break without starting a new paragraph. Delete ← Backspace, Delete ← Backspace, Delete Delete one character to the left (← Backspace) or to the right (Delete) of the cursor. Delete word to the left of cursor Ctrl+← Backspace ^ Ctrl+← Backspace, ⌘ Cmd+← Backspace Delete one word to the left of the cursor. Delete word to the right of cursor Ctrl+Delete ^ Ctrl+Delete, ⌘ Cmd+Delete Delete one word to the right of the cursor. Create nonbreaking space Ctrl+⇧ Shift+␣ Spacebar ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+␣ Spacebar Create a space between characters which cannot be used to start a new line. Create nonbreaking hyphen Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Hyphen ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Hyphen Create a hyphen between characters which cannot be used to start a new line. Undo and Redo Undo Ctrl+Z ^ Ctrl+Z, ⌘ Cmd+Z Reverse the latest performed action. Redo Ctrl+Y ^ Ctrl+Y, ⌘ Cmd+Y, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+Z Repeat the latest undone action. Cut, Copy, and Paste Cut Ctrl+X, ⇧ Shift+Delete ⌘ Cmd+X, ⇧ Shift+Delete Delete the selected text fragment and send it to the computer clipboard memory. The copied text can be later inserted to another place in the same document, into another document, or into some other program. Copy Ctrl+C, Ctrl+Insert ⌘ Cmd+C Send the selected text fragment to the computer clipboard memory. The copied text can be later inserted to another place in the same document, into another document, or into some other program. Paste Ctrl+V, ⇧ Shift+Insert ⌘ Cmd+V Insert the previously copied text fragment from the computer clipboard memory to the current cursor position. The text can be previously copied from the same document, from another document, or from some other program. Insert hyperlink Ctrl+K ⌘ Cmd+K Insert a hyperlink which can be used to go to a web address. Copy style Ctrl+⇧ Shift+C ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+C Copy the formatting from the selected fragment of the currently edited text. The copied formatting can be later applied to another text fragment in the same document. Apply style Ctrl+⇧ Shift+V ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+V Apply the previously copied formatting to the text in the currently edited document. Text Selection Select all Ctrl+A ⌘ Cmd+A Select all the document text with tables and images. Select fragment ⇧ Shift+→ ← ⇧ Shift+→ ← Select the text character by character. Select from cursor to beginning of line ⇧ Shift+Home ⇧ Shift+Home Select a text fragment from the cursor to the beginning of the current line. Select from cursor to end of line ⇧ Shift+End ⇧ Shift+End Select a text fragment from the cursor to the end of the current line. Select one character to the right ⇧ Shift+→ ⇧ Shift+→ Select one character to the right of the cursor position. Select one character to the left ⇧ Shift+← ⇧ Shift+← Select one character to the left of the cursor position. Select to the end of a word Ctrl+⇧ Shift+→ Select a text fragment from the cursor to the end of a word. Select to the beginning of a word Ctrl+⇧ Shift+← Select a text fragment from the cursor to the beginning of a word. Select one line up ⇧ Shift+↑ ⇧ Shift+↑ Select one line up (with the cursor at the beginning of a line). Select one line down ⇧ Shift+↓ ⇧ Shift+↓ Select one line down (with the cursor at the beginning of a line). Select the page up ⇧ Shift+Page Up ⇧ Shift+Page Up Select the page part from the cursor position to the upper part of the screen. Select the page down ⇧ Shift+Page Down ⇧ Shift+Page Down Select the page part from the cursor position to the lower part of the screen. Text Styling Bold Ctrl+B ^ Ctrl+B, ⌘ Cmd+B Make the font of the selected text fragment bold giving it more weight. Italic Ctrl+I ^ Ctrl+I, ⌘ Cmd+I Make the font of the selected text fragment italicized giving it some right side tilt. Underline Ctrl+U ^ Ctrl+U, ⌘ Cmd+U Make the selected text fragment underlined with the line going under the letters. Strikeout Ctrl+5 ^ Ctrl+5, ⌘ Cmd+5 Make the selected text fragment struck out with the line going through the letters. Subscript Ctrl+. ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+>, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+> Make the selected text fragment smaller and place it to the lower part of the text line, e.g. as in chemical formulas. Superscript Ctrl+, ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+<, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+< Make the selected text fragment smaller and place it to the upper part of the text line, e.g. as in fractions. Heading 1 style Alt+1 ⌥ Option+^ Ctrl+1 Apply the style of the heading 1 to the selected text fragment. Heading 2 style Alt+2 ⌥ Option+^ Ctrl+2 Apply the style of the heading 2 to the selected text fragment. Heading 3 style Alt+3 ⌥ Option+^ Ctrl+3 Apply the style of the heading 3 to the selected text fragment. Bulleted list Ctrl+⇧ Shift+L ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+L, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+L Create an unordered bulleted list from the selected text fragment or start a new one. Remove formatting Ctrl+␣ Spacebar Remove formatting from the selected text fragment. Increase font Ctrl+] ⌘ Cmd+] Increase the size of the font for the selected text fragment 1 point. Decrease font Ctrl+[ ⌘ Cmd+[ Decrease the size of the font for the selected text fragment 1 point. Align center/left Ctrl+E ^ Ctrl+E, ⌘ Cmd+E Switch a paragraph between centered and left-aligned. Align justified/left Ctrl+J, Ctrl+L ^ Ctrl+J, ⌘ Cmd+J Switch a paragraph between justified and left-aligned. Align right/left Ctrl+R ^ Ctrl+R Switch a paragraph between right-aligned and left-aligned. Apply subscript formatting (automatic spacing) Ctrl+= Apply subscript formatting to the selected text fragment. Apply superscript formatting (automatic spacing) Ctrl+⇧ Shift++ Apply superscript formatting to the selected text fragment. Insert page break Ctrl+↵ Enter ^ Ctrl+↵ Return Insert a page break at the current cursor position. Increase indent Ctrl+M ^ Ctrl+M Indent a paragraph from the left incrementally. Decrease indent Ctrl+⇧ Shift+M ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+M Remove a paragraph indent from the left incrementally. Add page number Ctrl+⇧ Shift+P ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+P Add the current page number at the current cursor position. Nonprinting characters Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Num8 Show or hide the display of nonprinting characters. Delete one character to the left ← Backspace ← Backspace Delete one character to the left of the cursor. Delete one character to the right Delete Delete Delete one character to the right of the cursor. Modifying Objects Constrain movement ⇧ Shift + drag ⇧ Shift + drag Constrain the movement of the selected object horizontally or vertically. Set 15-degree rotation ⇧ Shift + drag (when rotating) ⇧ Shift + drag (when rotating) Constrain the rotation angle to 15-degree increments. Maintain proportions ⇧ Shift + drag (when resizing) ⇧ Shift + drag (when resizing) Maintain the proportions of the selected object when resizing. Draw straight line or arrow ⇧ Shift + drag (when drawing lines/arrows) ⇧ Shift + drag (when drawing lines/arrows) Draw a straight vertical/horizontal/45-degree line or arrow. Movement by one-pixel increments Ctrl+← → ↑ ↓ Hold down the Ctrl key and use the keybord arrows to move the selected object by one pixel at a time. Working with Tables Move to the next cell in a row ↹ Tab ↹ Tab Go to the next cell in a table row. Move to the previous cell in a row ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Go to the previous cell in a table row. Move to the next row ↓ ↓ Go to the next row in a table. Move to the previous row ↑ ↑ Go to the previous row in a table. Start new paragraph ↵ Enter ↵ Return Start a new paragraph within a cell. Add new row ↹ Tab in the lower right table cell. ↹ Tab in the lower right table cell. Add a new row at the bottom of the table. Inserting special characters Insert formula Alt+= Insert a formula at the current cursor position." + }, + { + "id": "HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm", + "title": "View Settings and Navigation Tools", + "body": "Document Editor offers several tools to help you view and navigate through your document: zoom, page number indicator etc. Adjust the View Settings To adjust default view settings and set the most convenient mode to work with the document, click the View settings icon on the right side of the editor header and select which interface elements you want to be hidden or shown. You can select the following options from the View settings drop-down list: Hide Toolbar - hides the top toolbar that contains commands while tabs remain visible. When this option is enabled, you can click any tab to display the toolbar. The toolbar is displayed until you click anywhere outside it. To disable this mode, click the View settings icon and click the Hide Toolbar option once again. The top toolbar will be displayed all the time. Note: alternatively, you can just double-click any tab to hide the top toolbar or display it again. Hide Status Bar - hides the bottommost bar where the Page Number Indicator and Zoom buttons are situated. To show the hidden Status Bar click this option once again. Hide Rulers - hides rulers which are used to align text, graphics, tables, and other elements in a document, set up margins, tab stops, and paragraph indents. To show the hidden Rulers click this option once again. The right sidebar is minimized by default. To expand it, select any object (e.g. image, chart, shape) or text passage and click the icon of the currently activated tab on the right. To minimize the right sidebar, click the icon once again. When the Comments or Chat panel is opened, the left sidebar width is adjusted by simple drag-and-drop: move the mouse cursor over the left sidebar border so that it turns into the bidirectional arrow and drag the border to the right to extend the sidebar width. To restore its original width move the border to the left. Use the Navigation Tools To navigate through your document, use the following tools: The Zoom buttons are situated in the right lower corner and are used to zoom in and out the current document. To change the currently selected zoom value that is displayed in percent, click it and select one of the available zoom options from the list or use the Zoom in or Zoom out buttons. Click the Fit width icon to fit the document page width to the visible part of the working area. To fit the whole document page to the visible part of the working area, click the Fit page icon. Zoom settings are also available in the View settings drop-down list that can be useful if you decide to hide the Status Bar. The Page Number Indicator shows the current page as a part of all the pages in the current document (page 'n' of 'nn'). Click this caption to open the window where you can enter the page number and quickly go to it." + }, + { + "id": "HelpfulHints/Review.htm", + "title": "Document Review", + "body": "When somebody shares a file with you that has review permissions, you need to use the document Review feature. If you are the reviewer, then you can use the Review option to review the document, change the sentences, phrases and other page elements, correct spelling, and do other things to the document without actually editing it. All your changes will be recorded and shown to the person who sent the document to you. If you are the person who sends the file for the review, you will need to display all the changes which were made to it, view and either accept or reject them. Enable the Track Changes feature To see changes suggested by a reviewer, enable the Track Changes option in one of the following ways: click the button in the right lower corner at the status bar, or switch to the Collaboration tab at the top toolbar and press the Track Changes button. Note: it is not necessary for the reviewer to enable the Track Changes option. It is enabled by default and cannot be disabled when the document is shared with review only access rights. Choose the changes display mode Click the Display Mode button at the top toolbar and select one of the available modes from the list: Markup - this option is selected by default. It allows both to view suggested changes and edit the document. Final - this mode is used to display all the changes as if they were accepted. This option does not actually accept all changes, it only allows you to see how the document will look like after you accept all the changes. In this mode, you cannot edit the document. Original - this mode is used to display all the changes as if they were rejected. This option does not actually reject all changes, it only allows you to view the document without changes. In this mode, you cannot edit the document. Accept or reject changes Use the Previous and the Next buttons at the top toolbar to navigate among the changes. To accept the currently selected change you can: click the Accept button at the top toolbar, or click the downward arrow below the Accept button and select the Accept Current Change option (in this case, the change will be accepted and you will proceed to the next change), or click the Accept button of the change notification. To quickly accept all the changes, click the downward arrow below the Accept button and select the Accept All Changes option. To reject the current change you can: click the Reject button at the top toolbar, or click the downward arrow below the Reject button and select the Reject Current Change option (in this case, the change will be rejected and you will move on to the next available change), or click the Reject button of the change notification. To quickly reject all the changes, click the downward arrow below the Reject button and select the Reject All Changes option. Note: if you review the document the Accept and Reject options are not available for you. You can delete your changes using the icon within the change balloon." + }, + { + "id": "HelpfulHints/Search.htm", + "title": "Search and Replace Function", + "body": "To search for the needed characters, words or phrases used in the currently edited document, click the icon situated at the left sidebar or use the Ctrl+F key combination. The Find and Replace window will open: Type in your inquiry into the corresponding data entry field. Specify search parameters by clicking the icon and checking the necessary options: Case sensitive - is used to find only the occurrences typed in the same case as your inquiry (e.g. if your inquiry is 'Editor' and this option is selected, such words as 'editor' or 'EDITOR' etc. will not be found). To disable this option click it once again. Highlight results - is used to highlight all found occurrences at once. To disable this option and remove the highlight click the option once again. Click one of the arrow buttons at the bottom right corner of the window. The search will be performed either towards the beginning of the document (if you click the button) or towards the end of the document (if you click the button) from the current position. Note: when the Highlight results option is enabled, use these buttons to navigate through the highlighted results. The first occurrence of the required characters in the selected direction will be highlighted on the page. If it is not the word you are looking for, click the selected button again to find the next occurrence of the characters you entered. To replace one or more occurrences of the found characters click the Replace link below the data entry field or use the Ctrl+H key combination. The Find and Replace window will change: Type in the replacement text into the bottom data entry field. Click the Replace button to replace the currently selected occurrence or the Replace All button to replace all the found occurrences. To hide the replace field, click the Hide Replace link." + }, + { + "id": "HelpfulHints/SpellChecking.htm", + "title": "Spell-checking", + "body": "Document Editor allows you to check the spelling of your text in a certain language and correct mistakes while editing. In the desktop version, it's also possible to add words into a custom dictionary which is common for all three editors. First of all, choose a language for your document. Click the Set Document Language icon at the status bar. In the window that appears, select the necessary language and click OK. The selected language will be applied to the whole document. To choose a different language for any piece of text within the document, select the necessary text passage with the mouse and use the menu at the status bar. To enable the spell checking option, you can: click the Spell checking icon at the status bar, or open the File tab of the top toolbar, select the Advanced Settings... option, check the Turn on spell checking option box and click the Apply button. Incorrectly spelled words will be underlined by a red line. Right click on the necessary word to activate the menu and: choose one of the suggested similar words spelled correctly to replace the misspelled word with the suggested one. If too many variants are found, the More variants... option appears in the menu; use the Ignore option to skip just that word and remove underlining or Ignore All to skip all the identical words repeated in the text; if the current word is missed in the dictionary, you can add it to the custom dictionary. This word will not be treated as a mistake next time. This option is available in the desktop version. select a different language for this word. To disable the spell checking option, you can: click the Spell checking icon at the status bar, or open the File tab of the top toolbar, select the Advanced Settings... option, uncheck the Turn on spell checking option box and click the Apply button." + }, + { + "id": "HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm", + "title": "Supported Formats of Electronic Documents", + "body": "Electronic documents represent one of the most commonly used computer files. Thanks to the computer network highly developed nowadays, it's possible and more convenient to distribute electronic documents than printed ones. Due to the variety of devices used for document presentation, there are a lot of proprietary and open file formats. Document Editor handles the most popular of them. Formats Description View Edit Download DOC Filename extension for word processing documents created with Microsoft Word + + DOCX Office Open XML Zipped, XML-based file format developed by Microsoft for representing spreadsheets, charts, presentations, and word processing documents + + + DOTX Word Open XML Document Template Zipped, XML-based file format developed by Microsoft for text document templates. A DOTX template contains formatting settings, styles etc. and can be used to create multiple documents with the same formatting + + + ODT Word processing file format of OpenDocument, an open standard for electronic documents + + + OTT OpenDocument Document Template OpenDocument file format for text document templates. An OTT template contains formatting settings, styles etc. and can be used to create multiple documents with the same formatting + + + RTF Rich Text Format Document file format developed by Microsoft for cross-platform document interchange + + + TXT Filename extension for text files usually containing very little formatting + + + PDF Portable Document Format File format used to represent documents in a manner independent of application software, hardware, and operating systems + + PDF/A Portable Document Format / A An ISO-standardized version of the Portable Document Format (PDF) specialized for use in the archiving and long-term preservation of electronic documents. + + HTML HyperText Markup Language The main markup language for web pages + + in the online version EPUB Electronic Publication Free and open e-book standard created by the International Digital Publishing Forum + XPS Open XML Paper Specification Open royalty-free fixed-layout document format developed by Microsoft + DjVu File format designed primarily to store scanned documents, especially those containing a combination of text, line drawings, and photographs +" + }, + { + "id": "ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm", + "title": "Scheda File", + "body": "La scheda File consente di eseguire alcune operazioni di base sul file corrente. Finestra dell’Editor di Documenti Online: Finestra dell’Editor di Documenti Desktop: Usando questa scheda, puoi: nella versione online, salvare il file corrente (nel caso in cui l’opzione di Salvataggio automatico sia disabilitata), scaricare in (salva il documento nel formato selezionato sul disco fisso del computer), salvare copia come (salva una copia del documento nel formato selezionato nel portale I miei documenti), stamparlo o rinominarlo, nella versione desktop, salvare il file corrente mantenendo il formato e la posizione correnti utilizzando l’opzione Salva o salvare il file corrente con un nome, una posizione o un formato diversi usando l’opzione Salva con Nome, stampare il file. proteggere il file utilizzando una password, modificare o rimuovere la password (disponibile solo nella versione desktop); creare un nuovo documento o aprirne uno modificato di recente (disponibile solo nella versione online), visualizzare le Informazioni documento o modificare alcune proprietà del file, gestire i Diritti di accesso (disponibile solo nella versione online), tracciare la Cronologia delle versioni (disponibile solo nella versione online), accedere all’editor Impostazioni avanzate, nella versione desktop, aprire la cartella in cui è archiviato il file nella finestra Apri percorso file. Nella versione online, aprire la cartella del modulo I miei documenti in cui è archiviato il file in una nuova scheda del browser." + }, + { + "id": "ProgramInterface/HomeTab.htm", + "title": "Scheda Home", + "body": "La scheda Home si apre per impostazione predefinita quando si apre un documento. Permette di formattare caratteri e paragrafi. Qui sono anche disponibili alcune altre opzioni, come Stampa unione e Cambia combinazione colori. Finestra dell’Editor di Documenti Online: Finestra dell’editor di Documenti Desktop: Usando questa scheda, puoi: regolare il tipo, la dimensione, il colore del carattere, applicare stili di decorazione del carattere, selezionare un colore di sfondo per un paragrafo, creare elenchi puntati e numerati, cmodificare i rientri di un paragrafo, impostare l’interlinea del paragrafo, allineare il testo in un paragrafo, mostrare/nascondere caratteri non stampabili, copiare/cancellare la formattazione del testo, cambiare la combinazione colori, usare Stampa unione (disponibile solo nella versione online), gestire gli stili." + }, + { + "id": "ProgramInterface/InsertTab.htm", + "title": "Scheda Inserisci", + "body": "La scheda Inserisci consente di aggiungere alcuni elementi di formattazione della pagina, nonché oggetti visivi e commenti. Finestra dell’Editor di Documenti Online: Finestra dell’Editor di Documenti Desktop: Usando questa scheda, puoi: inserire una pagina vuota, inserire interruzioni di pagina,  interruzioni di sezione e interruzioni di colonna, inserire intestazioni e piè di pagina e numeri di pagina, inserire tabelle, immagini, grafici, forme, inserire collegamenti ipertestuali, commenti, inserire caselle di testo ed oggetti Text Art, equazioni, simboli, capilettera, controlli del contenuto." + }, + { + "id": "ProgramInterface/LayoutTab.htm", + "title": "Scheda Layout di Pagina", + "body": "La scheda Layout di Pagina consente di modificare l'aspetto del documento: impostare i parametri della pagina e definire la disposizione degli elementi visivi. Finestra dell’Editor di Documenti Online: Finestra dell’Editor di Documenti Desktop: Usando questa scheda, puoi: regolare i margini, l’orientatamento, la dimensione della pagina, aggiungere colonne, inserire interruzioni di pagina, interruzioni di sezione e interruzioni di colonna, allineare e disporre gli oggetti (tabelle, immagini, grafici, forme), cambiare lo stile di disposizione testo, aggiungere una filigrana." + }, + { + "id": "ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm", + "title": "Scheda Plugin", + "body": "La scheda Plugin consente di accedere a funzionalità di modifica avanzate utilizzando i componenti di terze parti disponibili. Qui puoi anche usare le macro per semplificare le operazioni di routine. Finestra dell’Editor di Documenti Online: Finestra dell’Editor di Documenti Desktop: Il pulsante Impostazioni consente di aprire la finestra in cui è possibile visualizzare e gestire tutti i plugin installati e aggiungerne di propri. Il pulsante Macro consente di aprire la finestra in cui è possibile creare le proprie macro ed eseguirle. Per saperne di più sulle macro puoi fare riferimento alla nostra Documentazione API. Attualmente, i seguenti plugin sono disponibili per impostazione predefinita: Send consente d’inviare il documento via e-mail utilizzando il cliente di posta desktop predefinito (disponibile solo nella versione desktop), Highlight code consente di evidenziare la sintassi del codice selezionando la lingua, lo stile, il colore di sfondo necessari, OCR consente di riconoscere il testo incluso in un'immagine e d’inserirlo nel testo del documento, PhotoEditor consente di modificare le immagini: ritagliare, capovolgere, ruotare, disegnare linee e forme, aggiungere icone e testo, caricare una maschera e applicare filtri come Scala di grigi, Inverti, Seppia, Sfocatura, Precisione, Rilievo, ecc., Speech consente di convertire il testo selezionato in voce (disponibile solo nella versione online), Thesaurus consente di cercare sinonimi e contrari di una parola e sostituirla con quella selezionata, Translator consente di tradurre il testo selezionato in altre lingue, YouTube consente d’incorporare video di YouTube nel tuo documento. I plugin Wordpress ed EasyBib possono essere utilizzati se si collegano i servizi corrispondenti nelle impostazioni del portale. È possibile utilizzare le seguenti istruzioni per la versione server o per la versione SaaS. Per saperne di più sui plugin puoi fare riferimento alla nostra Documentazione API. Tutti gli esempi di plugin open source attualmente esistenti sono disponibili su GitHub." + }, + { + "id": "ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm", + "title": "Presentazione dell'interfaccia utente dell'Editor di Documenti", + "body": "L’editor di Documenti utilizza un'interfaccia a schede in cui i comandi di modifica sono raggruppati in schede in base alla funzionalità. Finestra dell’Editor di Documenti Online: Finestra dell’Editor di Documenti Desktop: L'interfaccia dell'editor è composta dai seguenti elementi principali: L’intestazione dell’Editor mostra il logo, le schede dei documenti aperti, il nome del documento e le schede dei menu. Nella parte sinistra dell’intestazione dell’Editor ci sono i pulsanti Salva, Stampa file, Annulla e Ripristina. Nella parte destra dell'intestazione dell'Editor vengono visualizzati il nome utente e le seguenti icone: Apri percorso file - nella versione desktop, consente di aprire la cartella in cui è archiviato il file nella finestra Espola file. Nella versione online, consente di aprire la cartella del modulo Documenti in cui è archiviato il file in una nuova scheda del browser. - consente di regolare le Impostazioni di visualizzazione e accedere all'editor Impostazioni avanzate. Gestisci i diritti di accesso al documento - (disponibile solo nella versione online) consente d’impostare i diritti di accesso per i documenti archiviati nel cloud. La barra degli strumenti superiore visualizza una serie di comandi di modifica in base alla scheda del menu selezionata. Attualmente sono disponibili le seguenti schede: File, Home, Inserisci, Layout di Pagina, Referimenti, Collaborazione, Protezione, Plugins. Le opzioni Copia e Incolla sono sempre disponibili nella parte sinistra della barra degli strumenti superiore, indipendentemente dalla scheda selezionata. La barra di stato nella parte inferiore della finestra dell'editor contiene l'indicatore del numero di pagina, visualizza alcune notifiche (come \"Tutte le modifiche salvate\" ecc.), consente d’impostare la lingua del testo, abilitare il controllo ortografico, attivare la modalità traccia cambiamenti, regolare lo zoom. La barra laterale sinistra contiene le seguenti icone: - consente di usare lo strumento Trova e sostituisci, - consente di aprire il pannello dei Commenti, - consente di accedere al pannello di Navigazione e gestire le intestazioni, - (disponibile solo nella versione online) consente di aprire il pannello Chat, - (disponibile solo nella versione online) consente di contattare il nostro team di supporto, - (disponibile solo nella versione online) consente di visualizzare le informazioni sul programma. La barra laterale destra consente di regolare parametri aggiuntivi di oggetti diversi. Quando selezioni un oggetto particolare nel testo, l'icona corrispondente viene attivata nella barra laterale destra. Fare clic su questa icona per espandere la barra laterale destra. I righelli orizzontali e verticali consentono di allineare testo e altri elementi in un documento, impostare margini, tabulazioni e rientri di paragrafo. L'area di lavoro consente di visualizzare il contenuto del documento, inserire e modificare i dati. La barra di scorrimento a destra consente di scorrere su e giù i documenti di più pagine. Per comodità, è possibile nascondere alcuni componenti e visualizzarli di nuovo quando è necessario. Per ulteriori informazioni su come regolare le impostazioni di visualizzazione, fare riferimento a questa pagina." + }, + { + "id": "ProgramInterface/ReferencesTab.htm", + "title": "Scheda Riferimenti", + "body": "La scheda Riferimenti consente di gestire diversi tipi di riferimenti: aggiungere e aggiornare un sommario, creare e modificare note a piè di pagina, inserire collegamenti ipertestuali. Finestra dell’Editor di Documenti Online: Finestra dell’Editor di Documenti Desktop: Usando questa scheda, puoi: creare e aggiornare automaticamente un sommario, inserire note a piè di pagina, inserire collegamenti ipertestuali, aggiungere segnalibri. aggiungere didascalie." + }, + { + "id": "ProgramInterface/ReviewTab.htm", + "title": "Scheda Collaborazione", + "body": "La scheda Collaborazione consente di organizzare il lavoro collaborativo sul documento. Nella versione online è possibile condividere il file, selezionare una modalità di co-editing, gestire i commenti, tenere traccia delle modifiche apportate da un revisore, visualizzare tutte le versioni e le revisioni. Nella modalità di commento, è possibile aggiungere e rimuovere commenti, navigare tra le modifiche rilevate, utilizzare la chat e visualizzare la cronologia delle versioni. Nella versione desktop è possibile gestire i commenti e utilizzare la funzione Traccia cambiamenti. . Finestra dell’Editor di Documenti Online: Finestra dell’Editor di Documenti Desktop: Usando questa scheda, puoi: specificare le impostazioni di condivisione (disponibile solo nella versione online), passare tra le modalità di co-editing Rigorosa e Rapida (disponibile solo nella versione online), aggiungere o rimuovere commenti al documento, abilitare la funzione Traccia cambiamenti, scegliere la Modalità Visualizzazione Modifiche, gestire le modifiche suggerite, caricare un documento per il confronto (disponibile solo nella versione online), aprire il pannello Chat (disponibile solo nella versione online), tracciare la Cronologia delle versioni (disponibile solo nella versione online)." + }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/AddBorders.htm", + "title": "Aggiungere bordi", + "body": "Per aggiungere bordi a un paragrafo, una pagina o l'intero documento, posizionare il cursore all'interno del paragrafo che interessa o selezionare diversi paragrafi con il mouse o tutto il testo nel documento premendo la combinazione di tasti Ctrl+A, fare clic con il pulsante destro del mouse e selezionare l'opzione Impostazioni avanzate del paragrafo dal menu o utilizzare il link Mostra impostazioni avanzate nella barra laterale destra, passare alla scheda Bordi e riempimento nella finestra Paragrafo - Impostazioni avanzate aperta, impostare il valore necessario per Dimensione bordo e selezionare un Colore bordo, fare clic all'interno del diagramma disponibile o utilizzare i pulsanti per selezionare i bordi e applicarvi lo stile scelto, fare clic sul pulsante OK. Dopo aver aggiunto i bordi, è anche possibile impostare le spaziature interne , ovvero le distanze tra i bordi destro, sinistro, superiore e inferiore e il testo del paragrafo al loro interno. Per impostare i valori necessari, passare alla scheda Spaziatura interna della finestra Paragrafo - Impostazioni avanzate:" + }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/AddCaption.htm", + "title": "Aggiungere una didascalia", + "body": "La Didascalia è un’etichetta numerata che puoi applicare ad oggetti, come equazioni, tabelle, figure e immagini all'interno dei tuoi documenti. Ciò semplifica il riferimento all'interno del testo in quanto è presente un'etichetta facilmente riconoscibile sull'oggetto. Per aggiungere la didascalia ad un oggetto: seleziona l'oggetto a cui applicare una didascalia; passa alla scheda Riferimenti nella barra degli strumenti in alto; fai clic sull’icona Didascalia nella barra degli strumenti in alto o fai clic con il pulsante destro sull’oggetto e seleziona l’opzione Inserisci didascalia per aprire la finestra di dialogo Inserisci didascalia scegli l'etichetta da utilizzare per la didascalia facendo clic sul menù a discesa Etichetta e selezionando l'oggetto; o crea una nuova etichetta facendo clic sul pulsante Aggiungi per aprire la finestra di dialogo Etichetta Inserisci un nome per l’etichetta nella casella di testo, quindi fai clic sul pulsante OK per aggiungere una nova etichetta all’elenco etichette; seleziona la casella di controllo Includi il numero del capitolo per modificare la numerazione della didascalia; nel menu a discesa Inserisci, seleziona Prima per posizionare l’etichetta sopra l’oggetto o Dopo per posizionarla sotto l’oggetto; seleziona la casella di controllo Escudere l’etichetta dalla didascalia per lasciare solo un numero per questa particolare didascalia in conformità con un numero progressivo; puoi quindi scegliere come numerare la didascalia assegnando uno stile specifico alla didascalia e aggiungendo un separatore; per applicare la didascalia fare clic sul pulsante OK. Eliminare un’etichetta Per eliminare un’etichetta creata, seleziona l’etichetta dall’elenco Etichetta nella finestra di dialogo Inserisci didascalia, quindi fai clic sul pulsante Elimina. L'etichetta creata verrà immediatamente eliminata. Nota: è possibile eliminare le etichette create ma non è possibile eliminare le etichette predefinite. Formattazione delle didascalie Non appena aggiungi una didascalia, un nuovo stile per le didascalie viene automaticamente aggiunto alla sezione stili. Per modificare lo stile di tutte le didascalie in tutto il documento, è necessario seguire questi passaggi: seleziona il testo da cui verrà copiato un nuovo stile di Didascalia; cerca lo stile Didascalia (evidenziato in blu per impostazione predefinita) nella galleria degli stili che puoi trovare nella scheda Home nella barra degli struemnti in alto; fai clic con il tatso destro e scegli l’opzione Aggiorna da selezione. Raggruppare le didascalie Se si desidera poter spostare l'oggetto e la didascalia come un'unica unità, è necessario raggruppare l’oggetto e la didascalia. seleziona l’oggetto; seleziona uno degli Stili di disposizione testo usando la barra laterale destra; aggiungi la didascalia come menzionato sopra; tieni premuto il tasto Shift e seleziona gli elementi che desideri raggruppare; fai clic con il tatso destro su uno degli elementi e seleziona Disponi > Ragruppa. Ora entrambi gli elementi si sposteranno simultaneamente se li trascini da qualche altra parte nel documento. Per separare gli oggetti fai clic rispettivamente su Disponi > Separa." + }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/AddFormulasInTables.htm", + "title": "Use formulas in tables", + "body": "Insert a formula You can perform simple calculations on data in table cells by adding formulas. To insert a formula into a table cell, place the cursor within the cell where you want to display the result, click the Add formula button at the right sidebar, in the Formula Settings window that opens, enter the necessary formula into the Formula field. You can enter a needed formula manually using the common mathematical operators (+, -, *, /), e.g. =A1*B2 or use the Paste Function drop-down list to select one of the embedded functions, e.g. =PRODUCT(A1,B2). manually specify necessary arguments within the parentheses in the Formula field. If the function requires several arguments, they must be separated by commas. use the Number Format drop-down list if you want to display the result in a certain number format, click OK. The result will be displayed in the selected cell. To edit the added formula, select the result in the cell and click the Add formula button at the right sidebar, make the necessary changes in the Formula Settings window and click OK. Add references to cells You can use the following arguments to quickly add references to cell ranges: ABOVE - a reference to all the cells in the column above the selected cell LEFT - a reference to all the cells in the row to the left of the selected cell BELOW - a reference to all the cells in the column below the selected cell RIGHT - a reference to all the cells in the row to the right of the selected cell These arguments can be used with the AVERAGE, COUNT, MAX, MIN, PRODUCT, SUM functions. You can also manually enter references to a certain cell (e.g., A1) or a range of cells (e.g., A1:B3). Use bookmarks If you have added some bookmarks to certain cells within your table, you can use these bookmarks as arguments when entering formulas. In the Formula Settings window, place the cursor within the parentheses in the Formula entry field where you want the argument to be added and use the Paste Bookmark drop-down list to select one of the previously added bookmarks. Update formula results If you change some values in the table cells, you will need to manually update formula results: To update a single formula result, select the necessary result and press F9 or right-click the result and use the Update field option from the menu. To update several formula results, select the necessary cells or the entire table and press F9. Embedded functions You can use the following standard math, statistical and logical functions: Category Function Description Example Mathematical ABS(x) The function is used to return the absolute value of a number. =ABS(-10) Returns 10 Logical AND(logical1, logical2, ...) The function is used to check if the logical value you enter is TRUE or FALSE. The function returns 1 (TRUE) if all the arguments are TRUE. =AND(1>0,1>3) Returns 0 Statistical AVERAGE(argument-list) The function is used to analyze the range of data and find the average value. =AVERAGE(4,10) Returns 7 Statistical COUNT(argument-list) The function is used to count the number of the selected cells which contain numbers ignoring empty cells or those contaning text. =COUNT(A1:B3) Returns 6 Logical DEFINED() The function evaluates if a value in the cell is defined. The function returns 1 if the value is defined and calculated without errors and returns 0 if the value is not defined or calculated with an error. =DEFINED(A1) Logical FALSE() The function returns 0 (FALSE) and does not require any argument. =FALSE Returns 0 Mathematical INT(x) The function is used to analyze and return the integer part of the specified number. =INT(2.5) Returns 2 Statistical MAX(number1, number2, ...) The function is used to analyze the range of data and find the largest number. =MAX(15,18,6) Returns 18 Statistical MIN(number1, number2, ...) The function is used to analyze the range of data and find the smallest number. =MIN(15,18,6) Returns 6 Mathematical MOD(x, y) The function is used to return the remainder after the division of a number by the specified divisor. =MOD(6,3) Returns 0 Logical NOT(logical) The function is used to check if the logical value you enter is TRUE or FALSE. The function returns 1 (TRUE) if the argument is FALSE and 0 (FALSE) if the argument is TRUE. =NOT(2<5) Returns 0 Logical OR(logical1, logical2, ...) The function is used to check if the logical value you enter is TRUE or FALSE. The function returns 0 (FALSE) if all the arguments are FALSE. =OR(1>0,1>3) Returns 1 Mathematical PRODUCT(argument-list) The function is used to multiply all the numbers in the selected range of cells and return the product. =PRODUCT(2,5) Returns 10 Mathematical ROUND(x, num_digits) The function is used to round the number to the desired number of digits. =ROUND(2.25,1) Returns 2.3 Mathematical SIGN(x) The function is used to return the sign of a number. If the number is positive, the function returns 1. If the number is negative, the function returns -1. If the number is 0, the function returns 0. =SIGN(-12) Returns -1 Mathematical SUM(argument-list) The function is used to add all the numbers in the selected range of cells and return the result. =SUM(5,3,2) Returns 10 Logical TRUE() The function returns 1 (TRUE) and does not require any argument. =TRUE Returns 1" + }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/AddHyperlinks.htm", + "title": "Add hyperlinks", + "body": "To add a hyperlink, place the cursor to a position where a hyperlink will be added, switch to the Insert or References tab of the top toolbar, click the Hyperlink icon at the top toolbar, after that the Hyperlink Settings window will appear where you can specify the hyperlink parameters: Select a link type you wish to insert: Use the External Link option and enter a URL in the format http://www.example.com in the Link to field below if you need to add a hyperlink leading to an external website. Use the Place in Document option and select one of the existing headings in the document text or one of previously added bookmarks if you need to add a hyperlink leading to a certain place in the same document. Display - enter a text that will get clickable and lead to the address specified in the upper field. ScreenTip text - enter a text that will become visible in a small pop-up window that provides a brief note or label pertaining to the hyperlink being pointed to. Click the OK button. To add a hyperlink, you can also use the Ctrl+K key combination or click with the right mouse button at a position where a hyperlink will be added and select the Hyperlink option in the right-click menu. Note: it's also possible to select a character, word, word combination, text passage with the mouse or using the keyboard and then open the Hyperlink Settings window as described above. In this case, the Display field will be filled with the text fragment you selected. By hovering the cursor over the added hyperlink, the ScreenTip will appear containing the text you specified. You can follow the link by pressing the CTRL key and clicking the link in your document. To edit or delete the added hyperlink, click it with the right mouse button, select the Hyperlink option and then the action you want to perform - Edit Hyperlink or Remove Hyperlink." + }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/AddWatermark.htm", + "title": "Aggiungere una filigrana", + "body": "Una filigrana è un testo o un’immagine inserita sotto il livello del testo principale. Le filigrane di testo permettono d’indicare lo stato del tuo documento (per esempio, riservato, bozza etc.), le filigrane d’immagine permetto di aggiungere un’immagine, ad esempio il logo delle tua azienda. Per aggiungere una filigrana all’interno di un documento: Passa alla scheda Layout di Pagina nella barra degli strumenti in alto. Fai clic sull’icona Filigrana nella barra degli strumenti in alto e scegli l’opzione Filigrana personalizzata dal menù. Successivamente verrà visualizzata la finestra Impostazioni Filigrana. Seleziona un tipo di filigrana che desideri inserire: Utilizza l’opzione Testo filigrana e rogola i parametri disponibili: Lingua - selezionare una delle lingue disponibili dalla lista, Testo - selezionare uno degli esempi di testo disponibili nella lingua selezionata. Per l'inglese sono disponibili i seguenti testi di filigrana: ASAP, CONFIDENTIAL, COPY, DO NOT COPY, DRAFT, ORIGINAL, PERSONAL, SAMPLE, TOP SECRET, URGENT. Carattere - seleziona il nome e la dimensione del carattere dagli elenchi a discesa corrispondenti. Utilizzare le icone sulla destra per impostare il colore del carattere o applicare uno degli stili di decorazione del carattere: Grassetto, Corsivo, Sotttolineato, Barrato, Semitrasparente - seleziona questa casella se desideri applicare la trasparenza, Layout - seleziona l’opzione Diagonale od Orizzonatale. Utilizza l’opzione Immagine filigrana e regola i parametri disponibili: Scegli l'origine del file immagine utilizzando uno dei pulsanti: Da file o Da URL - l'immagine verrà visualizzata nella finestra di anteprima a destra, Ridimensiona - seleziona il valore di scala necessario tra quelli disponibili: Auto, 500%, 200%, 150%, 100%, 50%. Fai clic sul pulsante OK. Per modificare la filigrana aggiunta, apri la finestra Impostazioni Filigrana come descritto sopra, modifica i parametri necessari e fai clic su OK. Per eleminare la filigrana aggiunta, fai clic sull’icona Filigrana nella scheda Layout di Pagina della barra degli strumenti in alto e scegli l’opzione Rimuovi filigrana dal menù. È anche possibile utilizzare l'opzione Nessuno nella finestra Impostazioni Filigrana." + }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/AlignArrangeObjects.htm", + "title": "Align and arrange objects on a page", + "body": "The added autoshapes, images, charts or text boxes can be aligned, grouped and ordered on a page. To perform any of these actions, first select a separate object or several objects on the page. To select several objects, hold down the Ctrl key and left-click the necessary objects. To select a text box, click on its border, not the text within it. After that you can use either the icons at the Layout tab of the top toolbar described below or the analogous options from the right-click menu. Align objects To align two or more selected objects, Click the Align icon at the Layout tab of the top toolbar and select one of the following options: Align to Page to align objects relative to the edges of the page, Align to Margin to align objects relative to the page margins, Align Selected Objects (this option is selected by default) to align objects relative to each other, Click the Align icon once again and select the necessary alignment type from the list: Align Left - to line up the objects horizontally by the left edge of the leftmost object/left edge of the page/left page margin, Align Center - to line up the objects horizontally by their centers/center of the page/center of the space between the left and right page margins, Align Right - to line up the objects horizontally by the right edge of the rightmost object/right edge of the page/right page margin, Align Top - to line up the objects vertically by the top edge of the topmost object/top edge of the page/top page margin, Align Middle - to line up the objects vertically by their middles/middle of the page/middle of the space between the top and bottom page margins, Align Bottom - to line up the objects vertically by the bottom edge of the bottommost object/bottom edge of the page/bottom page margin. Alternatively, you can right-click the selected objects, choose the Align option from the contextual menu and then use one of the available alignment options. If you want to align a single object, it can be aligned relative to the edges of the page or to the page margins. The Align to Margin option is selected by default in this case. Distribute objects To distribute three or more selected objects horizontally or vertically so that the equal distance appears between them, Click the Align icon at the Layout tab of the top toolbar and select one of the following options: Align to Page to distribute objects between the edges of the page, Align to Margin to distribute objects between the page margins, Align Selected Objects (this option is selected by default) to distribute objects between two outermost selected objects, Click the Align icon once again and select the necessary distribution type from the list: Distribute Horizontally - to distribute objects evenly between the leftmost and rightmost selected objects/left and right edges of the page/left and right page margins. Distribute Vertically - to distribute objects evenly between the topmost and bottommost selected objects/top and bottom edges of the page/top and bottom page margins. Alternatively, you can right-click the selected objects, choose the Align option from the contextual menu and then use one of the available distribution options. Note: the distribution options are disabled if you select less than three objects. Group objects To group two or more selected objects or ungroup them, click the arrow next to the Group icon at the Layout tab of the top toolbar and select the necessary option from the list: Group - to join several objects into a group so that they can be simultaneously rotated, moved, resized, aligned, arranged, copied, pasted, formatted like a single object. Ungroup - to ungroup the selected group of the previously joined objects. Alternatively, you can right-click the selected objects, choose the Arrange option from the contextual menu and then use the Group or Ungroup option. Note: the Group option is disabled if you select less than two objects. The Ungroup option is available only when a group of the previously joined objects is selected. Arrange objects To arrange objects (i.e. to change their order when several objects overlap each other), you can use the Bring Forward and Send Backward icons at the Layout tab of the top toolbar and select the necessary arrangement type from the list. To move the selected object(s) forward, click the arrow next to the Bring Forward icon at the Layout tab of the top toolbar and select the necessary arrangement type from the list: Bring To Foreground - to move the object(s) in front of all other objects, Bring Forward - to move the selected object(s) by one level forward as related to other objects. To move the selected object(s) backward, click the arrow next to the Send Backward icon at the Layout tab of the top toolbar and select the necessary arrangement type from the list: Send To Background - to move the object(s) behind all other objects, Send Backward - to move the selected object(s) by one level backward as related to other objects. Alternatively, you can right-click the selected object(s), choose the Arrange option from the contextual menu and then use one of the available arrangement options." + }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/AlignText.htm", + "title": "Allineare il testo in un paragrafo", + "body": "Il testo è comunemente allineato in quattro modi: sinistra, destra, centro o giustificato. Per farlo posizionare il cursore nella posizione in cui si desidera applicare l'allineamento (può trattarsi di una nuova riga o di testo già immesso), passare alla scheda Home della barra degli strumenti superiore, selezionare il tipo di allineamento che si desidera applicare: L’allineamento a sinistra con il testo allineato dal lato sinistro della pagina (il lato destro rimane non allineato) viene eseguito con l'icona Allinea a sinistra situata nella barra degli strumenti superiore. L'allineamento al centro con il testo allineato al centro della pagina (il lato destro e il lato sinistro rimane non allineato) viene eseguito con l'icona Allinea al centro situata nella barra degli strumenti superiore. L'allineamento a destra con il testo allineato dal lato destro della pagina (il lato sinistro rimane non allineato) viene eseguito con l'icona Allinea a destra situata nella barra degli strumenti superiore. L'allineamento giustificato con il testo allineato sia dal lato sinistro che da quello destro della pagina (la spaziatura aggiuntiva viene aggiunta se necessario per mantenere l'allineamento) viene eseguita con l'icona Giustificato situata nella barra degli strumenti superiore. I parametri di allineamento sono disponibili anche nella finestra Paragrafo - Impostazioni avanzate. fare clic con il pulsante destro del mouse sul testo e scegliere l'opzione Impostazioni avanzate del paragrafo dal menu contestuale o utilizzare l'opzione Mostra impostazioni avanzate nella barra laterale destra, aprire la finestra Paragrafo - Impostazioni avanzate, passare alla scheda Rientri e spaziatura selezionare uno dei tipi di allineamento dall'elenco Allineamento: A sinistra, Al centro, A destra, Giustificato, fare clic sul pulsante OK per applicare le modifiche." + }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/BackgroundColor.htm", + "title": "Selezionare il colore di sfondo per un paragrafo", + "body": "Il colore di sfondo viene applicato all'intero paragrafo e riempie completamente tutto lo spazio del paragrafo dal margine sinistro della pagina al margine destro della pagina. Per applicare un colore di sfondo a un determinato paragrafo o modificare quello corrente, selezionare una combinazione di colori per il documento da quelle disponibili facendo clic sull'icona Cambia combinazione colori nella scheda Home della barra degli strumenti superiore posiziona il cursore all'interno del paragrafo che ti interessa o seleziona diversi paragrafi con il mouse o l'intero testo usando la combinazione di tasti Ctrl+A aprire la finestra delle tavolozze dei colori. È possibile accedervi in uno dei seguenti modi: fare clic sulla freccia verso il basso accanto all'icona nella scheda Home della barra degli strumenti superiore, oppure clicca sul campo del colore accanto alla didascalia Colore sfondo nella barra laterale destra, oppure fare clic sul link \"Mostra impostazioni avanzate\" nella barra laterale destra o selezionare l'opzione \"Impostazioni avanzate del paragrafo\" nel menu di scelta rapida, quindi passa alla scheda 'Bordi e riempimento' nella finestra \"Paragrafo - Impostazioni avanzate\" e fare clic sul campo del colore accanto alla didascalia Colore sfondo. selezionare qualsiasi colore nelle tavolloze disponibili Dopo aver selezionato il colore necessario utilizzando l'icona , sarai in grado di applicare questo colore a qualsiasi paragrafo selezionato semplicemente facendo clic sull'icona (visualizza il colore selezionato), senza la necessità di scegliere nuovamente questo colore sulla tavolozza. Se utilizzi l'opzione Colore sfondo nella barra laterale destra o all'interno della finestra 'Paragrafo - Impostazioni avanzate' window, ricorda che il colore selezionato non viene mantenuto per un accesso rapido. (Queste opzioni possono essere utili se si desidera selezionare un colore di sfondo diverso per un paragrafo specifico, mentre si utilizza anche un colore generale selezionato con l'aiuto dell'icona icon). Per cancellare il colore di sfondo di un determinato paragrafo, posiziona il cursore all'interno del paragrafo che ti interessa o seleziona diversi paragrafi con il mouse o l'intero testo usando la combinazione di tasti Ctrl+A aprire la finestra delle tavolozze dei colori facendo clic sul campo colore accanto alla didascalia Colore sfondo nella barra laterale destra selezionare l'icona ." + }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/ChangeColorScheme.htm", + "title": "Change color scheme", + "body": "Le combinazioni di colori vengono applicate all'intero documento. Vengono utilizzati per modificare rapidamente l'aspetto del documento, poiché definiscono la tavolozza Temi Colori per gli elementi del documento font, sfondo, tabelle, forme automatiche, grafici). Se hai applicato alcuni Tema Colori agli elementi del documento e poi hai selezionato una combinazione di colori, diversa, i colori applicati nel documento cambieranno di conseguenza. Per modificare una combinazione di colori, fai clic sulla freccia verso il basso accanto all'icona Cambia combinazione di colori nella scheda Home della barra degli strumenti in alto e seleziona la combinazione di colori necessaria tra quelle disponibili: Office, Scala di grigi, Apice, Aspetto, Civico, Concorso, Equità, Flow, Fonderia, Mediana, Metro, Modulo, Odulent, Oriel, Origine, Carta, Solstizio, Technic, Trek, Urbana, Verve. La combinazione di colori selezionata verrà evidenziata nell'elenco. Dopo aver selezionato la combinazione di colori preferita, è possibile selezionare i colori in una finestra tavolozze colori che corrisponde all'elemento del documento a cui si desidera applicare il colore. Per la maggior parte degli elementi del documento, è possibile accedere alla finestra delle tavolozze dei colori facendo clic sulla casella colorata nella barra laterale destra quando viene selezionato l'elemento necessario. Per il carattere, questa finestra può essere aperta usando la freccia verso il basso accanto all'icona Colore carattere nella scheda Home della barra degli strumenti in alto. Sono disponibili le seguenti tavolozze: Tema Colori - i colori che corrispondono alla combinazione di colori selezionata del documento. Colori Standard - i colori predefiniti impostati. La combinazione di colori selezionata non li influenza. Colori personalizzati - fai clic su questa voce se non è disponibile il colore desiderato nelle tavolozze a disposizione. Seleziona la gamma dei colori desiderata spostando il cursore verticale del colore e poi imposta il colore specifico trascinando il selettore colore all'interno del grande campo quadrato del colore. Dopo aver selezionato un colore con il selettore colori, i valori di colore RGB e sRGB appropriati verranno visualizzati nei campi a destra. È inoltre possibile specificare un colore sulla base del modello di colore RGB inserendo i valori numerici necessari nei campi R, G, B (rosso, verde, blu) o immettendo il codice esadecimale sRGB nel campo contrassegnato dal segno #. Il colore selezionato apparirà in anteprima nella casella Nuova. Se l'oggetto è stato precedentemente riempito con un qualsiasi colore personalizzato, questo colore verrà visualizzato nella casella Corrente , in modo da poter confrontare i colori originali con quelli modificati. Quando hai definito il colore, fai clic sul pulsante Aggiungi: Il colore personalizzato verrà applicato all'elemento selezionato e aggiunto alla tavolozza Colori personalizzati." + }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/ChangeWrappingStyle.htm", + "title": "Change text wrapping", + "body": "The Wrapping Style option determines the way the object is positioned relative to the text. You can change the text wrapping style for inserted objects, such as shapes, images, charts, text boxes or tables. Change text wrapping for shapes, images, charts, text boxes To change the currently selected wrapping style: select a separate object on the page left-clicking it. To select a text box, click on its border, not the text within it. open the text wrapping settings: switch to the the Layout tab of the top toolbar and click the arrow next to the Wrapping icon, or right-click the object and select the Wrapping Style option from the contextual menu, or right-click the object, select the Advanced Settings option and switch to the Text Wrapping tab of the object Advanced Settings window. select the necessary wrapping style: Inline - the object is considered to be a part of the text, like a character, so when the text moves, the object moves as well. In this case the positioning options are inaccessible. If one of the following styles is selected, the object can be moved independently of the text and positioned on the page exactly: Square - the text wraps the rectangular box that bounds the object. Tight - the text wraps the actual object edges. Through - the text wraps around the object edges and fills in the open white space within the object. So that the effect can appear, use the Edit Wrap Boundary option from the right-click menu. Top and bottom - the text is only above and below the object. In front - the object overlaps the text. Behind - the text overlaps the object. If you select the Square, Tight, Through, or Top and bottom style, you will be able to set up some additional parameters - Distance from Text at all sides (top, bottom, left, right). To access these parameters, right-click the object, select the Advanced Settings option and switch to the Text Wrapping tab of the object Advanced Settings window. Set the necessary values and click OK. If you select a wrapping style other than Inline, the Position tab is also available in the object Advanced Settings window. To learn more on these parameters, please refer to the corresponding pages with the instructions on how to work with shapes, images or charts. If you select a wrapping style other than Inline, you can also edit the wrap boundary for images or shapes. Right-click the object, select the Wrapping Style option from the contextual menu and click the Edit Wrap Boundary option. Drag wrap points to customize the boundary. To create a new wrap point, click anywhere on the red line and drag it to the necessary position. Change text wrapping for tables For tables, the following two wrapping styles are available: Inline table and Flow table. To change the currently selected wrapping style: right-click the table and select the Table Advanced Settings option, switch to the Text Wrapping tab of the Table - Advanced Settings window, select one of the following options: Inline table is used to select the wrapping style when the text is broken by the table as well as to set the alignment: left, center, right. Flow table is used to select the wrapping style when the text is wrapped around the table. Using the Text Wrapping tab of the Table - Advanced Settings window you can also set up the following additional parameters: For inline tables, you can set the table Alignment type (left, center or right) and Indent from left. For floating tables, you can set the Distance from text and the table position at the Table Position tab." + }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/CopyClearFormatting.htm", + "title": "Copy/clear text formatting", + "body": "To copy a certain text formatting, select the text passage which formatting you need to copy with the mouse or using the keyboard, click the Copy style icon at the Home tab of the top toolbar (the mouse pointer will look like this ), select the text passage you want to apply the same formatting to. To apply the copied formatting to multiple text passages, select the text passage which formatting you need to copy with the mouse or using the keyboard, double-click the Copy style icon at the Home tab of the top toolbar (the mouse pointer will look like this and the Copy style icon will remain selected: ), select the necessary text passages one by one to apply the same formatting to each of them, to exit this mode, click the Copy style icon once again or press the Esc key on the keyboard. To quickly remove the applied formatting from your text, select the text passage which formatting you want to remove, click the Clear style icon at the Home tab of the top toolbar." + }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/CopyPasteUndoRedo.htm", + "title": "Copy/paste text passages, undo/redo your actions", + "body": "Utilizza le operazioni di base negli Appunti Per tagliare, copiare e incollare passaggi di testo ed oggetti inseriti (forme, immagini, grafici) all'interno del documento corrente, utilizzate le opzioni corrispondenti dal menù del tasto destro del mouse o le icone disponibili in qualsiasi scheda della barra superiore degli strumenti: Taglia – seleziona un frammento di testo o un oggetto ed utilizza l'opzione Taglia dal menu di scelta rapida col tasto destro del mouse per tagliare la selezione ed inviarla alla memoria degli appunti del computer. I dati tagliati potranno essere successivamente inseriti in un'altra posizione nello stesso documento. Copia – seleziona un frammento di testo o un oggetto ed utilizza l'opzione Copia dal menu di scelta rapida del tasto destro del mouse o l'icona Copia nella barra superiore degli strumenti per copiare la selezione nella memoria degli appunti del computer. I dati copiati potranno essere successivamente inseriti in un'altra posizione nello stesso documento. Incolla – trova la posizione nel documento in cui è necessario incollare il frammento / l’oggetto di testo precedentemente copiato ed utilizza l'opzione Incolla dal menu di scelta rapida del tasto destro del mouse o l'icona Incolla nella barra superiore degli strumenti. Il testo / l’oggetto verrà inserito nella posizione corrente del cursore. I dati potranno essere precedentemente copiati dallo stesso documento. Nella versione online, le seguenti combinazioni di tasti vengono utilizzate solo per copiare o incollare dati da / in un altro documento o qualche altro programma, nella versione desktop, è possibile utilizzare entrambe le corrispondenti opzioni di pulsanti / menu e combinazioni di tasti per qualsiasi operazione di copia / incolla: Ctrl+X combinazione di tasti per tagliare; Ctrl+C combinazione di tasti per copiare; Ctrl+V combinazione di tasti per incollare. Nota: invece di tagliare ed incollare il testo all'interno dello stesso documento, è sufficiente selezionare il passaggio di testo desiderato e trascinarlo nella posizione voluta. Usa la funzione Incolla speciale Una volta che il testo incollato viene copiato, il pulsante Incolla speciale apparirà accanto al passaggio di testo inserito. Fa’ clic su questo pulsante per selezionare l'opzione Incolla desiderata: Quando si incolla il testo del paragrafo o del testo all'interno delle forme automatiche, sono disponibili le seguenti opzioni: Incolla - consente di incollare il testo copiato mantenendo la formattazione originale. Mantieni solo testo - consente di incollare il testo senza la sua formattazione originale. Se si incolla una tabella copiata in una tabella esistente, si renderanno disponibili le seguenti opzioni: Sovrascrivi celle - consente di sostituire il contenuto della tabella esistente con i dati incollati. Questa opzione è selezionata come impostazione predefinita. Annida Tabella  - consente di incollare la tabella copiata come tabella nidificata nella cella selezionata della tabella esistente.. Mantieni solo testo - consente di incollare il testo senza la sua formattazione originale. Annulla / ripristina le tue azioni Per eseguire le operazioni di annullamento / ripristino , utilizzate le icone corrispondenti nell'intestazione dell'editor o le scorciatoie da tastiera: Annulla – usa l’icona Annulla nella parte sinistra dell'intestazione dell'editor o la combinazione di tasti Ctrl+Z per annullare l'ultima operazione eseguita. Ripristina – usa l’icona Ripristina nella parte sinistra dell'intestazione dell'editor o la combinazione di tasti Ctrl+Y per ripristinare l'ultima operazione annullata Nota: quando si co-modifica un documento in modalità Veloce, la possibilità di ripristinare l'ultima operazione annullata non è disponibile." + }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/CreateLists.htm", + "title": "Create lists", + "body": "To create a list in your document, place the cursor to the position where a list will be started (this can be a new line or the already entered text), switch to the Home tab of the top toolbar, select the list type you would like to start: Unordered list with markers is created using the Bullets icon situated at the top toolbar Ordered list with digits or letters is created using the Numbering icon situated at the top toolbar Note: click the downward arrow next to the Bullets or Numbering icon to select how the list is going to look like. now each time you press the Enter key at the end of the line a new ordered or unordered list item will appear. To stop that, press the Backspace key and continue with the common text paragraph. The program also creates numbered lists automatically when you enter digit 1 with a dot or a bracket and a space after it: 1., 1). Bulleted lists can be created automatically when you enter the -, * characters and a space after them. You can also change the text indentation in the lists and their nesting using the Multilevel list , Decrease indent , and Increase indent icons at the Home tab of the top toolbar. Note: the additional indentation and spacing parameters can be changed at the right sidebar and in the advanced settings window. To learn more about it, read the Change paragraph indents and Set paragraph line spacing section. Join and separate lists To join a list to the preceding one: click the first item of the second list with the right mouse button, use the Join to previous list option from the contextual menu. The lists will be joined and the numbering will continue in accordance with the first list numbering. To separate a list: click the list item where you want to begin a new list with the right mouse button, use the Separate list option from the contextual menu. The list will be separated, and the numbering in the second list will begin anew. Change numbering To continue sequential numbering in the second list according to the previous list numbering: click the first item of the second list with the right mouse button, use the Continue numbering option from the contextual menu. The numbering will continue in accordance with the first list numbering. To set a certain numbering initial value: click the list item where you want to apply a new numbering value with the right mouse button, use the Set numbering value option from the contextual menu, in a new window that opens, set the necessary numeric value and click the OK button. Change the list settings To change the bulleted or numbered list settings, such as a bullet/number type, alignment, size and color: click an existing list item or select the text you want to format as a list, click the Bullets or Numbering icon at the Home tab of the top toolbar, select the List Settings option, the List Settings window will open. The bulleted list settings window looks like this: The numbered list settings window looks like this: For the bulleted list, you can choose a character used as a bullet, while for the numbered list you can choose the numbering type. The Alignment, Size and Color options are the same both for the bulleted and numbered lists. Bullet - allows to select the necessary character used for the bulleted list. When you click on the Font and Symbol field, the Symbol window opens that allows to choose one of the available characters. To learn more on how to work with symbols, you can refer to this article. Type - allows to select the necessary numbering type used for the numbered list. The following options are available: None, 1, 2, 3,..., a, b, c,..., A, B, C,..., i, ii, iii,..., I, II, III,.... Alignment - allows to select the necessary bullet/number alignment type that is used to align bullets/numbers horizontally within the space designated for them. The available alignment types are the following: Left, Center, Right. Size - allows to select the necessary bullet/number size. The Like a text option is selected by default. When this option is selected, the bullet or number size corresponds to the text size. You can choose one of the predefined sizes from 8 to 96. Color - allows to select the necessary bullet/number color. The Like a text option is selected by default. When this option is selected, the bullet or number color corresponds to the text color. You can choose the Automatic option to apply the automatic color, or select one of the theme colors, or standard colors on the palette, or specify a custom color. All the changes are displayed in the Preview field. click OK to apply the changes and close the settings window. To change the multilevel list settings, click a list item, click the Multilevel list icon at the Home tab of the top toolbar, select the List Settings option, the List Settings window will open. The multilevel list settings window looks like this: Choose the necessary level of the list in the Level field on the left, then use the buttons on the top to adjust the bullet or number appearance for the selected level: Type - allows to select the necessary numbering type used for the numbered list or the necessary character used for the bulleted list. The following options are available for the numbered list: None, 1, 2, 3,..., a, b, c,..., A, B, C,..., i, ii, iii,..., I, II, III,.... For the bulleted list, you can choose one of the default symbols or use the New bullet option. When you click this option, the Symbol window opens that allows to choose one of the available characters. To learn more on how to work with symbols, you can refer to this article. Alignment - allows to select the necessary bullet/number alignment type that is used to align bullets/numbers horizontally within the space designated for them at the beginning of the paragraph. The available alignment types are the following: Left, Center, Right. Size - allows to select the necessary bullet/number size. The Like a text option is selected by default. You can choose one of the predefined sizes from 8 to 96. Color - allows to select the necessary bullet/number color. The Like a text option is selected by default. When this option is selected, the bullet or number color corresponds to the text color. You can choose the Automatic option to apply the automatic color, or select one of the theme colors, or standard colors on the palette, or specify a custom color. All the changes are displayed in the Preview field. click OK to apply the changes and close the settings window." + }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/CreateTableOfContents.htm", + "title": "Create a Table of Contents", + "body": "A table of contents contains a list of all chapters (sections etc.) in a document and displays the numbers of the pages where each chapter is started. This allows to easily navigate through a multi-page document quickly switching to the necessary part of the text. The table of contents is generated automatically on the base of the document headings formatted using built-in styles. This makes it easy to update the created table of contents without the necessity to edit headings and change page numbers manually if the document text has been changed. Define the heading structure Format headings First of all, format headings in you document using one of the predefined styles. To do that, Select the text you want to include into the table of contents. Open the style menu on the right side of the Home tab at the top toolbar. Click the style you want to apply. By default, you can use the Heading 1 - Heading 9 styles. Note: if you want to use other styles (e.g. Title, Subtitle etc.) to format headings that will be included into the table of contents, you will need to adjust the table of contents settings first (see the corresponding section below). To learn more about available formatting styles, you can refer to this page. Manage headings Once the headings are formatted, you can click the Navigation icon at the left sidebar to open the panel that displays the list of all headings with corresponding nesting levels. This panel allows to easily navigate between headings in the document text as well as manage the heading structure. Right-click on a heading in the list and use one of the available options from the menu: Promote - to move the currently selected heading up to the higher level in the hierarchical structure, e.g. change it from Heading 2 to Heading 1. Demote - to move the currently selected heading down to the lower level in the hierarchical structure, e.g. change it from Heading 1 to Heading 2. New heading before - to add a new empty heading of the same level before the currently selected one. New heading after - to add a new empty heading of the same level after the currently selected one. New subheading - to add a new empty subheading (i.e. a heading with lower level) after the currently selected heading. When the heading or subheading is added, click on the added empty heading in the list and type in your own text. This can be done both in the document text and on the Navigation panel itself. Select content - to select the text below the current heading in the document (including the text related to all subheadings of this heading). Expand all - to expand all levels of headings at the Navigation panel. Collapse all - to collapse all levels of headings, excepting level 1, at the Navigation panel. Expand to level - to expand the heading structure to the selected level. E.g. if you select level 3, then levels 1, 2 and 3 will be expanded, while level 4 and all lower levels will be collapsed. To manually expand or collapse separate heading levels, use the arrows to the left of the headings. To close the Navigation panel, click the Navigation icon at the left sidebar once again. Insert a Table of Contents into the document To insert a table of contents into your document: Position the insertion point where you want to add the table of contents. Switch to the References tab of the top toolbar. Click the Table of Contents icon at the top toolbar, or click the arrow next to this icon and select the necessary layout option from the menu. You can select the table of contents that displays headings, page numbers and leaders, or headings only. Note: the table of content appearance can be adjusted later via the table of contents settings. The table of contents will be added at the current cursor position. To change the position of the table of contents, you can select the table of contents field (content control) and simply drag it to the desired place. To do that, click the button in the upper left corner of the table of contents field and drag it without releasing the mouse button to another position in the document text. To navigate between headings, press the Ctrl key and click the necessary heading within the table of contents field. You will go to the corresponding page. Adjust the created Table of Contents Refresh the Table of Contents After the table of contents is created, you may continue editing your text by adding new chapters, changing their order, removing some paragraphs, or expanding the text related to a heading so that the page numbers that correspond to the preceding or subsequent section may change. In this case, use the Refresh option to automatically apply all changes to the table of contents. Click the arrow next to the Refresh icon at the References tab of the top toolbar and select the necessary option from the menu: Refresh entire table - to add the headings that you added to the document, remove the ones you deleted from the document, update the edited (renamed) headings as well as update page numbers. Refresh page numbers only - to update page numbers without applying changes to the headings. Alternatively, you can select the table of contents in the document text and click the Refresh icon at the top of the table of contents field to display the above mentioned options. It's also possible to right-click anywhere within the table of contents and use the corresponding options from the contextual menu. Adjust the Table of Contents settings To open the table of contents settings, you can proceed in the following ways: Click the arrow next to the Table of Contents icon at the top toolbar and select the Settings option from the menu. Select the table of contents in the document text, click the arrow next to the table of contents field title and select the Settings option from the menu. Right-click anywhere within the table of contents and use the Table of contents settings option from the contextual menu. A new window will open where you can adjust the following settings: Show page numbers - this option allows to choose if you want to display page numbers or not. Right align page numbers - this option allows to choose if you want to align page numbers by the right side of the page or not. Leader - this option allows to choose the leader type you want to use. A leader is a line of characters (dots or hyphens) that fills the space between a heading and a corresponding page number. It's also possible to select the None option if you do not want to use leaders. Format Table of Contents as links - this option is checked by default. If you uncheck it, you will not be able to switch to the necessary chapter by pressing Ctrl and clicking the corresponding heading. Build table of contents from - this section allows to specify the necessary number of outline levels as well as the default styles that will be used to create the table of contents. Check the necessary radio button: Outline levels - when this option is selected, you will be able to adjust the number of hierarchical levels used in the table of contents. Click the arrows in the Levels field to decrease or increase the number of levels (the values from 1 to 9 are available). E.g., if you select the value of 3, headings that have levels 4 - 9 will not be included into the table of contents. Selected styles - when this option is selected, you can specify additional styles that can be used to build the table of contents and assign a corresponding outline level to each of them. Specify the desired level value in the field to the right of the style. Once you save the settings, you will be able to use this style when creating the table of contents. Styles - this options allows to select the desired appearance of the table of contents. Select the necessary style from the drop-down list. The preview field above displays how the table of contents should look like. The following four default styles are available: Simple, Standard, Modern, Classic. The Current option is used if you customize the table of contents style. Click the OK button within the settings window to apply the changes. Customize the Table of Contents style After you apply one of the default table of contents styles within the Table of Contents settings window, you can additionally modify this style so that the text within the table of contents field looks like you need. Select the text within the table of contents field, e.g. pressing the button in the upper left corner of the table of contents content control. Format table of contents items changing their font type, size, color or applying the font decoration styles. Consequently update styles for items of each level. To update the style, right-click the formatted item, select the Formatting as Style option from the contextual menu and click the Update toc N style option (toc 2 style corresponds to items that have level 2, toc 3 style corresponds to items with level 3 and so on). Refresh the table of contents. Remove the Table of Contents To remove the table of contents from the document: click the arrow next to the Table of Contents icon at the top toolbar and use the Remove table of contents option, or click the arrow next to the table of contents content control title and use the Remove table of contents option." + }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/DecorationStyles.htm", + "title": "Apply font decoration styles", + "body": "You can apply various font decoration styles using the corresponding icons situated at the Home tab of the top toolbar. Note: in case you want to apply the formatting to the text already present in the document, select it with the mouse or using the keyboard and apply the formatting. Bold Is used to make the font bold giving it more weight. Italic Is used to make the font italicized giving it some right side tilt. Underline Is used to make the text underlined with the line going under the letters. Strikeout Is used to make the text struck out with the line going through the letters. Superscript Is used to make the text smaller and place it to the upper part of the text line, e.g. as in fractions. Subscript Is used to make the text smaller and place it to the lower part of the text line, e.g. as in chemical formulas. To access advanced font settings, click the right mouse button and select the Paragraph Advanced Settings option from the menu or use the Show advanced settings link at the right sidebar. Then the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window will open where you need to switch to the Font tab. Here you can use the following font decoration styles and settings: Strikethrough is used to make the text struck out with the line going through the letters. Double strikethrough is used to make the text struck out with the double line going through the letters. Superscript is used to make the text smaller and place it to the upper part of the text line, e.g. as in fractions. Subscript is used to make the text smaller and place it to the lower part of the text line, e.g. as in chemical formulas. Small caps is used to make all letters lower case. All caps is used to make all letters upper case. Spacing is used to set the space between the characters. Increase the default value to apply the Expanded spacing, or decrease the default value to apply the Condensed spacing. Use the arrow buttons or enter the necessary value in the box. Position is used to set the characters position (vertical offset) in the line. Increase the default value to move characters upwards, or decrease the default value to move characters downwards. Use the arrow buttons or enter the necessary value in the box. All the changes will be displayed in the preview field below." + }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/FontTypeSizeColor.htm", + "title": "Set font type, size, and color", + "body": "You can select the font type, its size and color using the corresponding icons situated at the Home tab of the top toolbar. Note: in case you want to apply the formatting to the text already present in the document, select it with the mouse or using the keyboard and apply the formatting. Font Is used to select one of the fonts from the list of the available ones. If a required font is not available in the list, you can download and install it on your operating system, after that the font will be available for use in the desktop version. Font size Is used to select among the preset font size values from the dropdown list (the default values are: 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 36, 48, 72 and 96). It's also possible to manually enter a custom value to the font size field and then press Enter. Increment font size Is used to change the font size making it larger one point each time the button is pressed. Decrement font size Is used to change the font size making it smaller one point each time the button is pressed. Highlight color Is used to mark separate sentences, phrases, words, or even characters by adding a color band that imitates highlighter pen effect around the text. You can select the necessary part of the text and then click the downward arrow next to the icon to select a color on the palette (this color set does not depend on the selected Color scheme and includes 16 colors) - the color will be applied to the text selection. Alternatively, you can first choose a highlight color and then start selecting the text with the mouse - the mouse pointer will look like this and you'll be able to highlight several different parts of your text sequentially. To stop highlighting just click the icon once again. To clear the highlight color, choose the No Fill option. Highlight color is different from the Background color as the latter is applied to the whole paragraph and completely fills all the paragraph space from the left page margin to the right page margin. Font color Is used to change the color of the letters/characters in the text. By default, the automatic font color is set in a new blank document. It is displayed as a black font on the white background. If you change the background color into black, the font color will automatically change into white to keep the text clearly visible. To choose a different color, click the downward arrow next to the icon and select a color from the available palettes (the colors on the Theme Colors palette depend on the selected color scheme). After you change the default font color, you can use the Automatic option in the color palettes window to quickly restore the automatic color for the selected text passage. Note: to learn more about the work with color palettes, please refer to this page." + }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/FormattingPresets.htm", + "title": "Apply formatting styles", + "body": "Each formatting style is a set of predefined formatting options: (font size, color, line spacing, alignment etc.). The styles allow you to quickly format different parts of the document (headings, subheadings, lists, normal text, quotes) instead of applying several formatting options individually each time. This also ensures a consistent appearance throughout the entire document. Style application depends on whether a style is a paragraph style (normal, no spacing, headings, list paragraph etc.), or the text style (based on the font type, size, color), as well as on whether a text passage is selected, or the mouse cursor is positioned within a word. In some cases you might need to select the necessary style from the style library twice so that it can be applied correctly: when you click the style at the style panel for the first time, the paragraph style properties are applied. When you click it for the second time, the text properties are applied. Use default styles To apply one of the available text formatting styles, place the cursor within the paragraph you need, or select several paragraphs you want to apply one of the formatting styles to, select the needed style from the style gallery on the right at the Home tab of the top toolbar. The following formatting styles are available: normal, no spacing, heading 1-9, title, subtitle, quote, intense quote, list paragraph, footer, header, footnote text. Edit existing styles and create new ones To change an existing style: Apply the necessary style to a paragraph. Select the paragraph text and change all the formatting parameters you need. Save the changes made: right-click the edited text, select the Formatting as Style option and then choose the Update 'StyleName' Style option ('StyleName' corresponds to the style you've applied at the step 1), or select the edited text passage with the mouse, drop-down the style gallery, right-click the style you want to change and select the Update from selection option. Once the style is modified, all the paragraphs within the document formatted using this style will change their appearance correspondingly. To create a completely new style: Format a text passage as you need. Select an appropriate way to save the style: right-click the edited text, select the Formatting as Style option and then choose the Create new Style option, or select the edited text passage with the mouse, drop-down the style gallery and click the New style from selection option. Set the new style parameters in the Create New Style window that opens: Specify the new style name in the text entry field. Select the desired style for the subsequent paragraph from the Next paragraph style list. It's also possible to choose the Same as created new style option. Click the OK button. The created style will be added to the style gallery. Manage your custom styles: To restore the default settings of a certain style you've changed, right-click the style you want to restore and select the Restore to default option. To restore the default settings of all the styles you've changed, right-click any default style in the style gallery and select the Restore all to default styles option. To delete one of the new styles you've created, right-click the style you want to delete and select the Delete style option. To delete all the new styles you've created, right-click any new style you've created and select the Delete all custom styles option." + }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm", + "title": "Insert autoshapes", + "body": "Insert an autoshape To add an autoshape to your document, switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, click the Shape icon at the top toolbar, select one of the available autoshape groups: basic shapes, figured arrows, math, charts, stars & ribbons, callouts, buttons, rectangles, lines, click the necessary autoshape within the selected group, place the mouse cursor where you want the shape to be put, once the autoshape is added you can change its size, position and properties. Note: to add a caption within the autoshape make sure the shape is selected on the page and start typing your text. The text you add in this way becomes a part of the autoshape (when you move or rotate the shape, the text moves or rotates with it). It's also possible to add a caption to the autoshape. To learn more on how to work with captions for autoshapes, you can refer to this article. Move and resize autoshapes To change the autoshape size, drag small squares situated on the shape edges. To maintain the original proportions of the selected autoshape while resizing, hold down the Shift key and drag one of the corner icons. When modifying some shapes, for example figured arrows or callouts, the yellow diamond-shaped icon is also available. It allows you to adjust some aspects of the shape, for example, the length of the head of an arrow. To alter the autoshape position, use the icon that appears after hovering your mouse cursor over the autoshape. Drag the autoshape to the necessary position without releasing the mouse button. When you move the autoshape, guide lines are displayed to help you position the object on the page precisely (if a wrapping style other than inline is selected). To move the autoshape by one-pixel increments, hold down the Ctrl key and use the keybord arrows. To move the autoshape strictly horizontally/vertically and prevent it from moving in a perpendicular direction, hold down the Shift key when dragging. To rotate the autoshape, hover the mouse cursor over the rotation handle and drag it clockwise or counterclockwise. To constrain the rotation angle to 15 degree increments, hold down the Shift key while rotating. Note: the list of keyboard shortcuts that can be used when working with objects is available here. Adjust autoshape settings To align and arrange autoshapes, use the right-click menu. The menu options are: Cut, Copy, Paste - standard options which are used to cut or copy a selected text/object and paste a previously cut/copied text passage or object to the current cursor position. Arrange is used to bring the selected autoshape to foreground, send to background, move forward or backward as well as group or ungroup shapes to perform operations with several of them at once. To learn more on how to arrange objects you can refer to this page. Align is used to align the shape left, center, right, top, middle, bottom. To learn more on how to align objects you can refer to this page. Wrapping Style is used to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind - or edit the wrap boundary. The Edit Wrap Boundary option is available only if you select a wrapping style other than Inline. Drag wrap points to customize the boundary. To create a new wrap point, click anywhere on the red line and drag it to the necessary position. Rotate is used to rotate the shape by 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise as well as to flip the shape horizontally or vertically. Shape Advanced Settings is used to open the 'Shape - Advanced Settings' window. Some of the autoshape settings can be altered using the Shape settings tab of the right sidebar. To activate it click the shape and choose the Shape settings icon on the right. Here you can change the following properties: Fill - use this section to select the autoshape fill. You can choose the following options: Color Fill - select this option to specify the solid color you want to fill the inner space of the selected autoshape with. Click the colored box below and select the necessary color from the available color sets or specify any color you like: Gradient Fill - select this option to fill the shape with two colors which smoothly change from one to another. Style - choose one of the available options: Linear (colors change in a straight line i.e. along a horizontal/vertical axis or diagonally at a 45 degree angle) or Radial (colors change in a circular path from the center to the edges). Direction - choose a template from the menu. If the Linear gradient is selected, the following directions are available: top-left to bottom-right, top to bottom, top-right to bottom-left, right to left, bottom-right to top-left, bottom to top, bottom-left to top-right, left to right. If the Radial gradient is selected, only one template is available. Gradient - click on the left slider under the gradient bar to activate the color box which corresponds to the first color. Click on the color box on the right to choose the first color in the palette. Drag the slider to set the gradient stop i.e. the point where one color changes into another. Use the right slider under the gradient bar to specify the second color and set the gradient stop. Picture or Texture - select this option to use an image or a predefined texture as the shape background. If you wish to use an image as a background for the shape, you can add an image From File selecting it on your computer HDD or From URL inserting the appropriate URL address into the opened window. If you wish to use a texture as a background for the shape, open the From Texture menu and select the necessary texture preset. Currently, the following textures are available: canvas, carton, dark fabric, grain, granite, grey paper, knit, leather, brown paper, papyrus, wood. In case the selected Picture has less or more dimensions than the autoshape has, you can choose the Stretch or Tile setting from the dropdown list. The Stretch option allows you to adjust the image size to fit the autoshape size so that it could fill the space completely. The Tile option allows you to display only a part of the bigger image keeping its original dimensions or repeat the smaller image keeping its original dimensions over the autoshape surface so that it could fill the space completely. Note: any selected Texture preset fills the space completely, but you can apply the Stretch effect if necessary. Pattern - select this option to fill the shape with a two-colored design composed of regularly repeated elements. Pattern - select one of the predefined designs from the menu. Foreground color - click this color box to change the color of the pattern elements. Background color - click this color box to change the color of the pattern background. No Fill - select this option if you don't want to use any fill. Opacity - use this section to set an Opacity level dragging the slider or entering the percent value manually. The default value is 100%. It corresponds to the full opacity. The 0% value corresponds to the full transparency. Stroke - use this section to change the autoshape stroke width, color or type. To change the stroke width, select one of the available options from the Size dropdown list. The available options are: 0.5 pt, 1 pt, 1.5 pt, 2.25 pt, 3 pt, 4.5 pt, 6 pt. Alternatively, select the No Line option if you don't want to use any stroke. To change the stroke color, click on the colored box below and select the necessary color. To change the stroke type, select the necessary option from the corresponding dropdown list (a solid line is applied by default, you can change it to one of the available dashed lines). Rotation is used to rotate the shape by 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise as well as to flip the shape horizontally or vertically. Click one of the buttons: to rotate the shape by 90 degrees counterclockwise to rotate the shape by 90 degrees clockwise to flip the shape horizontally (left to right) to flip the shape vertically (upside down) Wrapping Style - use this section to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind (for more information see the advanced settings description below). Change Autoshape - use this section to replace the current autoshape with another one selected from the dropdown list. Show shadow - check this option to display shape with shadow. Adjust autoshape advanced settings To change the advanced settings of the autoshape, right-click it and select the Advanced Settings option in the menu or use the Show advanced settings link at the right sidebar. The 'Shape - Advanced Settings' window will open: The Size tab contains the following parameters: Width - use one of these options to change the autoshape width. Absolute - specify an exact value measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified at the File -> Advanced Settings... tab). Relative - specify a percentage relative to the left margin width, the margin (i.e. the distance between the left and right margins), the page width, or the right margin width. Height - use one of these options to change the autoshape height. Absolute - specify an exact value measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified at the File -> Advanced Settings... tab). Relative - specify a percentage relative to the margin (i.e. the distance between the top and bottom margins), the bottom margin height, the page height, or the top margin height. If the Lock aspect ratio option is checked, the width and height will be changed together preserving the original shape aspect ratio. The Rotation tab contains the following parameters: Angle - use this option to rotate the shape by an exactly specified angle. Enter the necessary value measured in degrees into the field or adjust it using the arrows on the right. Flipped - check the Horizontally box to flip the shape horizontally (left to right) or check the Vertically box to flip the shape vertically (upside down). The Text Wrapping tab contains the following parameters: Wrapping Style - use this option to change the way the shape is positioned relative to the text: it will either be a part of the text (in case you select the inline style) or bypassed by it from all sides (if you select one of the other styles). Inline - the shape is considered to be a part of the text, like a character, so when the text moves, the shape moves as well. In this case the positioning options are inaccessible. If one of the following styles is selected, the shape can be moved independently of the text and positioned on the page exactly: Square - the text wraps the rectangular box that bounds the shape. Tight - the text wraps the actual shape edges. Through - the text wraps around the shape edges and fills in the open white space within the shape. So that the effect can appear, use the Edit Wrap Boundary option from the right-click menu. Top and bottom - the text is only above and below the shape. In front - the shape overlaps the text. Behind - the text overlaps the shape. If you select the square, tight, through, or top and bottom style you will be able to set up some additional parameters - distance from text at all sides (top, bottom, left, right). The Position tab is available only if you select a wrapping style other than inline. This tab contains the following parameters that vary depending on the selected wrapping style: The Horizontal section allows you to select one of the following three autoshape positioning types: Alignment (left, center, right) relative to character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin, Absolute Position measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified at the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) to the right of character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin, Relative position measured in percent relative to the left margin, margin, page or right margin. The Vertical section allows you to select one of the following three autoshape positioning types: Alignment (top, center, bottom) relative to line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin, Absolute Position measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified at the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) below line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin, Relative position measured in percent relative to the margin, bottom margin, page or top margin. Move object with text controls whether the autoshape moves as the text to which it is anchored moves. Allow overlap controls whether two autoshapes overlap or not if you drag them near each other on the page. The Weights & Arrows tab contains the following parameters: Line Style - this option group allows to specify the following parameters: Cap Type - this option allows to set the style for the end of the line, therefore it can be applied only to the shapes with the open outline, such as lines, polylines etc.: Flat - the end points will be flat. Round - the end points will be rounded. Square - the end points will be square. Join Type - this option allows to set the style for the intersection of two lines, for example, it can affect a polyline or the corners of the triangle or rectangle outline: Round - the corner will be rounded. Bevel - the corner will be cut off angularly. Miter - the corner will be pointed. It goes well to shapes with sharp angles. Note: the effect will be more noticeable if you use a large outline width. Arrows - this option group is available if a shape from the Lines shape group is selected. It allows to set the arrow Start and End Style and Size by selecting the appropriate option from the dropdown lists. The Text Padding tab allows to change the autoshape Top, Bottom, Left and Right internal margins (i.e. the distance between the text within the shape and the autoshape borders). Note: this tab is only available if text is added within the autoshape, otherwise the tab is disabled. The Alternative Text tab allows to specify a Title and Description which will be read to the people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information there is in the shape." + }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertBookmarks.htm", + "title": "Aggiungere segnalibri", + "body": "I segnalibri consentono di passare rapidamente a una determinata posizione nel documento corrente o di aggiungere un collegamento a questa posizione all'interno del documento. Per aggiungere un segnalibro all'interno di un documento: specificare il punto in cui si desidera aggiungere il segnalibro: posizionare il cursore del mouse all'inizio del passaggio di testo necessario, o selezionare il passaggio di testo necessario, passare alla scheda Riferimenti della barra degli strumenti superiore, fare clic sull'icona Segnalibro nella barra degli strumenti superiore, nella finestra Segnalibri che si apre, inserire il Nome segnalibro e fare clic sul pulsante Aggiungi - verrà aggiunto un segnalibro all'elenco dei segnalibri visualizzato di seguito, Nota: il nome del segnalibro dovrebbe iniziare preferibilmente con una lettera, ma può anche contenere numeri. Il nome del segnalibro non può contenere spazi, ma può includere il carattere di sottolineatura \"_\". Per passare a uno dei segnalibri aggiunti all'interno del testo del documento: fare click sull’icona Segnalibro nella scheda Riferimenti della barra degli strumenti superiore, nella finestra Segnalibri che si apre, selezionare il segnalibro a cui si desidera passare. Per trovare facilmente il segnalibro necessario nell'elenco è possibile ordinare l'elenco per Nome o per Posizione di un segnalibro all'interno del testo del documento, selezionare l'opzione Segnalibri nascosti per visualizzare i segnalibri nascosti nell'elenco (cioè i segnalibri creati automaticamente dal programma quando si aggiungono riferimenti a una determinata parte del documento. Ad esempio, se si crea un collegamento ipertestuale a un determinato titolo all'interno del documento, l'editor di documenti crea automaticamente un segnalibro nascosto alla destinazione di questo collegamento). clicca sul pulsante Vai a - il cursore sarà posizionato nella posizione all'interno del documento in cui è stato aggiunto il segnalibro selezionato, o verrà selezionato il passaggio di testo corrispondente, fare clic sul pulsante Ottieni collegamento - si aprirà una nuova finestra in cui è possibile premere il pulsante Copia per copiare il collegamento al file che specifica la posizione del segnalibro nel documento. Quando si incolla questo collegamento in una barra degli indirizzi del browser e si preme INVIO, il documento verrà aperto nella posizione in cui è stato aggiunto il segnalibro selezionato. Nota: Se si desidera condividere questo collegamento con altri utenti, è inoltre necessario fornire i diritti di accesso corrispondenti al file per determinati utenti utilizzando l'opzione Condivisione nella scheda Collaborazione. fare clic sul pulsante Chiudi per chiudere la finestra. Per eliminare un segnalibro, selezionarlo nell'elenco dei segnalibri e utilizzare il pulsante Elimina. Per scoprire come utilizzare i segnalibri durante la creazione di collegamenti, fare riferimento alla sezione Aggiungere collegamenti ipertestuali." + }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm", + "title": "Insert charts", + "body": "Insert a chart To insert a chart into your document, put the cursor at the place where you want to add a chart, switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, click the Chart icon at the top toolbar, select the needed chart type from the available ones - Column, Line, Pie, Bar, Area, XY (Scatter), or Stock, Note: for Column, Line, Pie, or Bar charts, a 3D format is also available. after that the Chart Editor window will appear where you can enter the necessary data into the cells using the following controls: and for copying and pasting the copied data and for undoing and redoing actions for inserting a function and for decreasing and increasing decimal places for changing the number format, i.e. the way the numbers you enter appear in cells change the chart settings clicking the Edit Chart button situated in the Chart Editor window. The Chart - Advanced Settings window will open. The Type & Data tab allows you to change the chart type as well as the data you wish to use to create a chart. Select a chart Type you wish to apply: Column, Line, Pie, Bar, Area, XY (Scatter), or Stock. Check the selected Data Range and modify it, if necessary, clicking the Select Data button and entering the desired data range in the following format: Sheet1!A1:B4. Choose the way to arrange the data. You can either select the Data series to be used on the X axis: in rows or in columns. The Layout tab allows you to change the layout of chart elements. Specify the Chart Title position in regard to your chart selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to not display a chart title, Overlay to overlay and center a title on the plot area, No Overlay to display the title above the plot area. Specify the Legend position in regard to your chart selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to not display a legend, Bottom to display the legend and align it to the bottom of the plot area, Top to display the legend and align it to the top of the plot area, Right to display the legend and align it to the right of the plot area, Left to display the legend and align it to the left of the plot area, Left Overlay to overlay and center the legend to the left on the plot area, Right Overlay to overlay and center the legend to the right on the plot area. Specify the Data Labels (i.e. text labels that represent exact values of data points) parameters: specify the Data Labels position relative to the data points selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list. The available options vary depending on the selected chart type. For Column/Bar charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Inner Bottom, Inner Top, Outer Top. For Line/XY (Scatter)/Stock charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Left, Right, Top, Bottom. For Pie charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Fit to Width, Inner Top, Outer Top. For Area charts as well as for 3D Column, Line and Bar charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center. select the data you wish to include into your labels checking the corresponding boxes: Series Name, Category Name, Value, enter a character (comma, semicolon etc.) you wish to use for separating several labels into the Data Labels Separator entry field. Lines - is used to choose a line style for Line/XY (Scatter) charts. You can choose one of the following options: Straight to use straight lines between data points, Smooth to use smooth curves between data points, or None to not display lines. Markers - is used to specify whether the markers should be displayed (if the box is checked) or not (if the box is unchecked) for Line/XY (Scatter) charts. Note: the Lines and Markers options are available for Line charts and XY (Scatter) charts only. The Axis Settings section allows to specify if you wish to display Horizontal/Vertical Axis or not selecting the Show or Hide option from the drop-down list. You can also specify Horizontal/Vertical Axis Title parameters: Specify if you wish to display the Horizontal Axis Title or not selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to not display a horizontal axis title, No Overlay to display the title below the horizontal axis. Specify the Vertical Axis Title orientation selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to not display a vertical axis title, Rotated to display the title from bottom to top to the left of the vertical axis, Horizontal to display the title horizontally to the left of the vertical axis. The Gridlines section allows to specify which of the Horizontal/Vertical Gridlines you wish to display selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: Major, Minor, or Major and Minor. You can hide the gridlines at all using the None option. Note: the Axis Settings and Gridlines sections will be disabled for Pie charts since charts of this type have no axes and gridlines. Note: the Vertical/Horizontal Axis tabs will be disabled for Pie charts since charts of this type have no axes. The Vertical Axis tab allows you to change the parameters of the vertical axis also referred to as the values axis or y-axis which displays numeric values. Note that the vertical axis will be the category axis which displays text labels for the Bar charts, therefore in this case the Vertical Axis tab options will correspond to the ones described in the next section. For the XY (Scatter) charts, both axes are value axes. The Axis Options section allows to set the following parameters: Minimum Value - is used to specify a lowest value displayed at the vertical axis start. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the minimum value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Fixed option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right. Maximum Value - is used to specify a highest value displayed at the vertical axis end. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the maximum value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Fixed option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right. Axis Crosses - is used to specify a point on the vertical axis where the horizontal axis should cross it. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the axes intersection point value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Value option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right, or set the axes intersection point at the Minimum/Maximum Value on the vertical axis. Display Units - is used to determine a representation of the numeric values along the vertical axis. This option can be useful if you're working with great numbers and wish the values on the axis to be displayed in more compact and readable way (e.g. you can represent 50 000 as 50 by using the Thousands display units). Select desired units from the drop-down list: Hundreds, Thousands, 10 000, 100 000, Millions, 10 000 000, 100 000 000, Billions, Trillions, or choose the None option to return to the default units. Values in reverse order - is used to display values in an opposite direction. When the box is unchecked, the lowest value is at the bottom and the highest value is at the top of the axis. When the box is checked, the values are ordered from top to bottom. The Tick Options section allows to adjust the appearance of tick marks on the vertical scale. Major tick marks are the larger scale divisions which can have labels displaying numeric values. Minor tick marks are the scale subdivisions which are placed between the major tick marks and have no labels. Tick marks also define where gridlines can be displayed, if the corresponding option is set at the Layout tab. The Major/Minor Type drop-down lists contain the following placement options: None to not display major/minor tick marks, Cross to display major/minor tick marks on both sides of the axis, In to display major/minor tick marks inside the axis, Out to display major/minor tick marks outside the axis. The Label Options section allows to adjust the appearance of major tick mark labels which display values. To specify a Label Position in regard to the vertical axis, select the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to not display tick mark labels, Low to display tick mark labels to the left of the plot area, High to display tick mark labels to the right of the plot area, Next to axis to display tick mark labels next to the axis. The Horizontal Axis tab allows you to change the parameters of the horizontal axis also referred to as the categories axis or x-axis which displays text labels. Note that the horizontal axis will be the value axis which displays numeric values for the Bar charts, therefore in this case the Horizontal Axis tab options will correspond to the ones described in the previous section. For the XY (Scatter) charts, both axes are value axes. The Axis Options section allows to set the following parameters: Axis Crosses - is used to specify a point on the horizontal axis where the vertical axis should cross it. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the axes intersection point value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Value option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right, or set the axes intersection point at the Minimum/Maximum Value (that corresponds to the first and last category) on the horizontal axis. Axis Position - is used to specify where the axis text labels should be placed: On Tick Marks or Between Tick Marks. Values in reverse order - is used to display categories in an opposite direction. When the box is unchecked, categories are displayed from left to right. When the box is checked, the categories are ordered from right to left. The Tick Options section allows to adjust the appearance of tick marks on the horizontal scale. Major tick marks are the larger divisions which can have labels displaying category values. Minor tick marks are the smaller divisions which are placed between the major tick marks and have no labels. Tick marks also define where gridlines can be displayed, if the corresponding option is set at the Layout tab. You can adjust the following tick mark parameters: Major/Minor Type - is used to specify the following placement options: None to not display major/minor tick marks, Cross to display major/minor tick marks on both sides of the axis, In to display major/minor tick marks inside the axis, Out to display major/minor tick marks outside the axis. Interval between Marks - is used to specify how many categories should be displayed between two adjacent tick marks. The Label Options section allows to adjust the appearance of labels which display categories. Label Position - is used to specify where the labels should be placed in regard to the horizontal axis. Select the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to not display category labels, Low to display category labels at the bottom of the plot area, High to display category labels at the top of the plot area, Next to axis to display category labels next to the axis. Axis Label Distance - is used to specify how closely the labels should be placed to the axis. You can specify the necessary value in the entry field. The more the value you set, the more the distance between the axis and labels is. Interval between Labels - is used to specify how often the labels should be displayed. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case labels are displayed for every category. You can select the Manual option from the drop-down list and specify the necessary value in the entry field on the right. For example, enter 2 to display labels for every other category etc. The Alternative Text tab allows to specify a Title and Description which will be read to the people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information there is in the chart. Move and resize charts Once the chart is added, you can change its size and position. To change the chart size, drag small squares situated on its edges. To maintain the original proportions of the selected chart while resizing, hold down the Shift key and drag one of the corner icons. To alter the chart position, use the icon that appears after hovering your mouse cursor over the chart. Drag the chart to the necessary position without releasing the mouse button. When you move the chart, guide lines are displayed to help you position the object on the page precisely (if a wrapping style other than inline is selected). Note: the list of keyboard shortcuts that can be used when working with objects is available here. Edit chart elements To edit the chart Title, select the default text with the mouse and type in your own one instead. To change the font formatting within text elements, such as the chart title, axes titles, legend entries, data labels etc., select the necessary text element by left-clicking it. Then use icons at the Home tab of the top toolbar to change the font type, size, color or its decoration style. When the chart is selected, the Shape settings icon is also available on the right, since a shape is used as a background for the chart. You can click this icon to open the Shape settings tab at the right sidebar and adjust the shape Fill, Stroke and Wrapping Style. Note that you cannot change the shape type. Using the Shape Settings tab at the right panel you can not only adjust the chart area itself, but also change the chart elements, such as plot area, data series, chart title, legend etc and apply different fill types to them. Select the chart element clicking it with the left mouse button and choose the preferred fill type: solid color, gradient, texture or picture, pattern. Specify the fill parameters and set the Opacity level if necessary. When you select a vertical or horizontal axis or gridlines, the stroke settings are only available at the Shape Settings tab: color, width and type. For more details on how to work with shape colors, fills and stroke, you can refer to this page. Note: the Show shadow option is also available at the Shape settings tab, but it is disabled for chart elements. To delete a chart element, select it by left-clicking and press the Delete key on the keyboard. You can also rotate 3D charts using the mouse. Left-click within the plot area and hold the mouse button. Drag the cursor without releasing the mouse button to change the 3D chart orientation. Adjust chart settings Some of the chart settings can be altered using the Chart settings tab of the right sidebar. To activate it click the chart and choose the Chart settings icon on the right. Here you can change the following properties: Size is used to view the current chart Width and Height. Wrapping Style is used to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind (for more information see the advanced settings description below). Change Chart Type is used to change the selected chart type and/or style. To select the necessary chart Style, use the second drop-down menu in the Change Chart Type section. Edit Data is used to open the 'Chart Editor' window. Note: to quickly open the 'Chart Editor' window you can also double-click the chart in the document. Some of these options you can also find in the right-click menu. The menu options are: Cut, Copy, Paste - standard options which are used to cut or copy a selected text/object and paste a previously cut/copied text passage or object to the current cursor position. Arrange is used to bring the selected chart to foreground, send to background, move forward or backward as well as group or ungroup charts to perform operations with several of them at once. To learn more on how to arrange objects you can refer to this page. Align is used to align the chart left, center, right, top, middle, bottom. To learn more on how to align objects you can refer to this page. Wrapping Style is used to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind. The Edit Wrap Boundary option is unavailable for charts. Edit Data is used to open the 'Chart Editor' window. Chart Advanced Settings is used to open the 'Chart - Advanced Settings' window. To change the chart advanced settings, click the needed chart with the right mouse button and select Chart Advanced Settings from the right-click menu or just click the Show advanced settings link at the right sidebar. The chart properties window will open: The Size tab contains the following parameters: Width and Height - use these options to change the chart width and/or height. If the Constant Proportions button is clicked (in this case it looks like this ), the width and height will be changed together preserving the original chart aspect ratio. The Text Wrapping tab contains the following parameters: Wrapping Style - use this option to change the way the chart is positioned relative to the text: it will either be a part of the text (in case you select the inline style) or bypassed by it from all sides (if you select one of the other styles). Inline - the chart is considered to be a part of the text, like a character, so when the text moves, the chart moves as well. In this case the positioning options are inaccessible. If one of the following styles is selected, the chart can be moved independently of the text and positioned on the page exactly: Square - the text wraps the rectangular box that bounds the chart. Tight - the text wraps the actual chart edges. Through - the text wraps around the chart edges and fills in the open white space within the chart. Top and bottom - the text is only above and below the chart. In front - the chart overlaps the text. Behind - the text overlaps the chart. If you select the square, tight, through, or top and bottom style you will be able to set up some additional parameters - distance from text at all sides (top, bottom, left, right). The Position tab is available only if you select a wrapping style other than inline. This tab contains the following parameters that vary depending on the selected wrapping style: The Horizontal section allows you to select one of the following three chart positioning types: Alignment (left, center, right) relative to character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin, Absolute Position measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified at the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) to the right of character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin, Relative position measured in percent relative to the left margin, margin, page or right margin. The Vertical section allows you to select one of the following three chart positioning types: Alignment (top, center, bottom) relative to line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin, Absolute Position measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified at the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) below line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin, Relative position measured in percent relative to the margin, bottom margin, page or top margin. Move object with text controls whether the chart moves as the text to which it is anchored moves. Allow overlap controls whether two charts overlap or not if you drag them near each other on the page. The Alternative Text tab allows to specify a Title and Description which will be read to the people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information there is in the chart." + }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertContentControls.htm", + "title": "Insert content controls", + "body": "Content controls are objects containing different types of contents, such as text, objects etc. Depending on the selected content control type, you can create a form with input fields that can be filled in by other users, or protect some parts of the document from being edited or deleted etc. Note: the possibility to add new content controls is available in the paid version only. In the open source version, you can edit existing content controls, as well as copy and paste them. Currently, you can add the following types of content controls: Plain Text, Rich Text, Picture, Combo box, Drop-down list, Date, Check box. Plain Text is an object containing text that can be formatted. Plain text content controls cannot contain more than one paragraph. Rich Text is an object containing text that can be formatted. Rich text content controls can contain several paragraphs, lists, and objects (images, shapes, tables etc.). Picture is an object containing a single image. Combo box is an object containing a drop-down list with a set of choices. It allows to choose one of the predefined values from the list and edit the selected value if necessary. Drop-down list is an object containing a drop-down list with a set of choices. It allows to choose one of the predefined values from the list. The selected value cannot be edited. Date is an object containing a calendar that allows to choose a date. Check box is an object that allows to display two states: check box is selected and check box is cleared. Adding content controls Create a new Plain Text content control position the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the control to be added, or select a text passage you want to become the control contents. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar. click the arrow next to the Content Controls icon. choose the Plain Text option from the menu. The control will be inserted at the insertion point within a line of the existing text. Replace the default text within the control (\"Your text here\") with your own one: select the default text, and type in a new text or copy a text passage from anywhere and paste it into the content control. Plain text content controls do not allow adding line breaks and cannot contain other objects such as images, tables etc. Create a new Rich Text content control position the insertion point at the end of a paragraph after which you want the control to be added, or select one or more of the existing paragraphs you want to become the control contents. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar. click the arrow next to the Content Controls icon. choose the Rich Text option from the menu. The control will be inserted in a new paragraph. Replace the default text within the control (\"Your text here\") with your own one: select the default text, and type in a new text or copy a text passage from anywhere and paste it into the content control. Rich text content controls allow adding line breaks, i.e. can contain multiple paragraphs as well as some objects, such as images, tables, other content controls etc. Create a new Picture content control position the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the control to be added. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar. click the arrow next to the Content Controls icon. choose the Picture option from the menu - the control will be inserted at the insertion point. click the image icon in the button above the content control border - a standard file selection window will open. Choose an image stored on your computer and click Open. The selected image will be displayed within the content control. To replace the image, click the image icon in the button above the content control border and select another image. Create a new Combo box or Drop-down list content control The Combo box and Drop-down list content controls contain a drop-down list with a set of choices. They can be created in nearly the same way. The main difference between them is that the selected value in the drop-down list cannot be edited, while the selected value in the combo box can be replaced with your own one. position the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the control to be added. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar. click the arrow next to the Content Controls icon. choose the Combo box or Drop-down list option from the menu - the control will be inserted at the insertion point. right-click the added control and choose the Content control settings option from the contextual menu. in the the Content Control Settings window that opens switch to the Combo box or Drop-down list tab, depending on the selected content control type. to add a new list item, click the Add button and fill in the available fields in the window that opens: specify the necessary text in the Display name field, e.g. Yes, No, Other. This text will be displayed in the content control within the document. by default, the text in the Value field corresponds to the one entered in the Display name field. If you want to edit the text in the Value field, note that the entered value must be unique for each item. click the OK button. you can edit or delete the list items by using the Edit or Delete buttons on the right or change the item order using the Up and Down button. when all the necessary choices are set, click the OK button to save the settings and close the window. You can click the arrow button in the right part of the added Combo box or Drop-down list content control to open the item list and choose the necessary one. Once the necessary item is selected from the Combo box, you can edit the displayed text replacing it with your own one entirely or partially. The Drop-down list does not allow to edit the selected item. Create a new Date content control position the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the control to be added. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar. click the arrow next to the Content Controls icon. choose the Date option from the menu - the control with the current date will be inserted at the insertion point. right-click the added control and choose the Content control settings option from the contextual menu. in the the Content Control Settings window that opens switch to the Date format tab. choose the necessary Language and select the necessary date format in the Display the date like this list. click the OK button to save the settings and close the window. You can click the arrow button in the right part of the added Date content control to open the calendar and choose the necessary date. Create a new Check box content control position the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the control to be added. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar. click the arrow next to the Content Controls icon. choose the Check box option from the menu - the control will be inserted at the insertion point. right-click the added control and choose the Content control settings option from the contextual menu. in the the Content Control Settings window that opens switch to the Check box tab. click the Checked symbol button to specify the necessary symbol for the selected check box or the Unchecked symbol to select how the cleared check box should look like. The Symbol window will open. To learn more on how to work with symbols, you can refer to this article. when the symbols are specified, click the OK button to save the settings and close the window. The added check box is displayed in the unchecked mode. If you click the added check box it will be checked with the symbol selected in the Checked symbol list. Note: The content control border is visible when the control is selected only. The borders do not appear on a printed version. Moving content controls Controls can be moved to another place in the document: click the button to the left of the control border to select the control and drag it without releasing the mouse button to another position in the document text. You can also copy and paste content controls: select the necessary control and use the Ctrl+C/Ctrl+V key combinations. Editing plain text and rich text content controls Text within the plain text and rich text content controls can be formatted using the icons on the top toolbar: you can adjust the font type, size, color, apply decoration styles and formatting presets. It's also possible to use the Paragraph - Advanced settings window accessible from the contextual menu or from the right sidebar to change the text properties. Text within rich text content controls can be formatted like a regular text of the document, i.e. you can set line spacing, change paragraph indents, adjust tab stops. Changing content control settings No matter which type of content controls is selected, you can change the content control settings in the General and Locking sections of the Content Control Settings window. To open the content control settings, you can proceed in the following ways: Select the necessary content control, click the arrow next to the Content Controls icon at the top toolbar and select the Control Settings option from the menu. Right-click anywhere within the content control and use the Content control settings option from the contextual menu. A new window will open. At the General tab, you can adjust the following settings: Specify the content control Title or Tag in the corresponding fields. The title will be displayed when the control is selected in the document. Tags are used to identify content controls so that you can make reference to them in your code. Choose if you want to display the content control with a Bounding box or not. Use the None option to display the control without the bounding box. If you select the Bounding box option, you can choose this box Color using the field below. Click the Apply to All button to apply the specified Appearance settings to all the content controls in the document. At the Locking tab, you can protect the content control from being deleted or edited using the following settings: Content control cannot be deleted - check this box to protect the content control from being deleted. Contents cannot be edited - check this box to protect the contents of the content control from being edited. For certain types of content controls, the third tab is also available that contains the settings specific for the selected content control type only: Combo box, Drop-down list, Date, Check box. These settings are described above in the sections about adding the corresponding content controls. Click the OK button within the settings window to apply the changes. It's also possible to highlight content controls with a certain color. To highlight controls with a color: Click the button to the left of the control border to select the control, Click the arrow next to the Content Controls icon at the top toolbar, Select the Highlight Settings option from the menu, Select the necessary color on the available palettes: Theme Colors, Standard Colors or specify a new Custom Color. To remove previously applied color highlighting, use the No highlighting option. The selected highlight options will be applied to all the content controls in the document. Removing content controls To remove a control and leave all its contents, click the content control to select it, then proceed in one of the following ways: Click the arrow next to the Content Controls icon at the top toolbar and select the Remove content control option from the menu. Right-click the content control and use the Remove content control option from the contextual menu. To remove a control and all its contents, select the necessary control and press the Delete key on the keyboard." + }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertDropCap.htm", + "title": "Insert a drop cap", + "body": "A Drop cap is the first letter of a paragraph that is much larger than others and takes up several lines in height. To add a drop cap, put the cursor within the paragraph you need, switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, click the Drop Cap icon at the top toolbar, in the opened drop-down list select the option you need: In Text - to place the drop cap within the paragraph. In Margin - to place the drop cap in the left margin. The first character of the selected paragraph will be transformed into a drop cap. If you need the drop cap to include some more characters, add them manually: select the drop cap and type in other letters you need. To adjust the drop cap appearance (i.e. font size, type, decoration style or color), select the letter and use the corresponding icons at the Home tab of the top toolbar. When the drop cap is selected, it's surrounded by a frame (a container used to position the drop cap on the page). You can quickly change the frame size dragging its borders or change its position using the icon that appears after hovering your mouse cursor over the frame. To delete the added drop cap, select it, click the Drop Cap icon at the Insert tab of the top toolbar and choose the None option from the drop-down list. To adjust the added drop cap parameters, select it, click the Drop Cap icon at the Insert tab of the top toolbar and choose the Drop Cap Settings option from the drop-down list. The Drop Cap - Advanced Settings window will open: The Drop Cap tab allows to set the following parameters: Position - is used to change the drop cap placement. Select the In Text or In Margin option, or click None to delete the drop cap. Font - is used to select one of the fonts from the list of the available ones. Height in rows - is used to specify how many lines the drop cap should span. It's possible to select a value from 1 to 10. Distance from text - is used to specify the amount of space between the text of the paragraph and the right border of the frame that surrounds the drop cap. The Borders & Fill tab allows to add a border around the drop cap and adjust its parameters. They are the following: Border parameters (size, color and presence or absence) - set the border size, select its color and choose the borders (top, bottom, left, right or their combination) you want to apply these settings to. Background color - choose the color for the drop cap background. The Margins tab allows to set the distance between the drop cap and the Top, Bottom, Left and Right borders around it (if the borders have previously been added). Once the drop cap is added you can also change the Frame parameters. To access them, right click within the frame and select the Frame Advanced Settings from the menu. The Frame - Advanced Settings window will open: The Frame tab allows to set the following parameters: Position - is used to select the Inline or Flow wrapping style. Or you can click None to delete the frame. Width and Height - are used to change the frame dimensions. The Auto option allows to automatically adjust the frame size to fit the drop cap in it. The Exactly option allows to specify fixed values. The At least option is used to set the minimum height value (if you change the drop cap size, the frame height changes accordingly, but it cannot be less than the specified value). Horizontal parameters are used either to set the frame exact position in the selected units of measurement relative to a margin, page or column, or to align the frame (left, center or right) relative to one of these reference points. You can also set the horizontal Distance from text i.e. the amount of space between the vertical frame borders and the text of the paragraph. Vertical parameters are used either to set the frame exact position in the selected units of measurement relative to a margin, page or paragraph, or to align the frame (top, center or bottom) relative to one of these reference points. You can also set the vertical Distance from text i.e. the amount of space between the horizontal frame borders and the text of the paragraph. Move with text - controls whether the frame moves as the paragraph to which it is anchored moves. The Borders & Fill and Margins tabs allow to set just the same parameters as at the tabs of the same name in the Drop Cap - Advanced Settings window." + }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertEquation.htm", + "title": "Insert equations", + "body": "Document Editor allows you to build equations using the built-in templates, edit them, insert special characters (including mathematical operators, Greek letters, accents etc.). Add a new equation To insert an equation from the gallery, put the cursor within the necessary line , switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, click the arrow next to the Equation icon at the top toolbar, in the opened drop-down list select the equation category you need. The following categories are currently available: Symbols, Fractions, Scripts, Radicals, Integrals, Large Operators, Brackets, Functions, Accents, Limits and Logarithms, Operators, Matrices, click the certain symbol/equation in the corresponding set of templates. The selected symbol/equation box will be inserted at the cursor position. If the selected line is empty, the equation will be centered. To align such an equation left or right, click on the equation box and use the or icon at the Home tab of the top toolbar. Each equation template represents a set of slots. Slot is a position for each element that makes up the equation. An empty slot (also called as a placeholder) has a dotted outline . You need to fill in all the placeholders specifying the necessary values. Note: to start creating an equation, you can also use the Alt + = keyboard shortcut. It's also possible to add a caption to the equation. To learn more on how to work with captions for equations, you can refer to this article. Enter values The insertion point specifies where the next character you enter will appear. To position the insertion point precisely, click within a placeholder and use the keyboard arrows to move the insertion point by one character left/right or one line up/down. If you need to create a new placeholder below the slot with the insertion point within the selected template, press Enter. Once the insertion point is positioned, you can fill in the placeholder: enter the desired numeric/literal value using the keyboard, insert a special character using the Symbols palette from the Equation menu at the Insert tab of the top toolbar, add another equation template from the palette to create a complex nested equation. The size of the primary equation will be automatically adjusted to fit its content. The size of the nested equation elements depends on the primary equation placeholder size, but it cannot be smaller than the sub-subscript size. To add some new equation elements you can also use the right-click menu options: To add a new argument that goes before or after the existing one within Brackets, you can right-click on the existing argument and select the Insert argument before/after option from the menu. To add a new equation within Cases with several conditions from the Brackets group (or equations of other types, if you've previously added new placeholders by pressing Enter), you can right-click on an empty placeholder or entered equation within it and select the Insert equation before/after option from the menu. To add a new row or a column in a Matrix, you can right-click on a placeholder within it, select the Insert option from the menu, then select Row Above/Below or Column Left/Right. Note: currently, equations cannot be entered using the linear format, i.e. \\sqrt(4&x^3). When entering the values of the mathematical expressions, you do not need to use Spacebar as the spaces between the characters and signs of operations are set automatically. If the equation is too long and does not fit to a single line, automatic line breaking occurs as you type. You can also insert a line break in a specific position by right-clicking on a mathematical operator and selecting the Insert manual break option from the menu. The selected operator will start a new line. Once the manual line break is added, you can press the Tab key to align the new line to any math operator of the previous line. To delete the added manual line break, right-click on the mathematical operator that starts a new line and select the Delete manual break option. Format equations To increase or decrease the equation font size, click anywhere within the equation box and use the and buttons at the Home tab of the top toolbar or select the necessary font size from the list. All the equation elements will change correspondingly. The letters within the equation are italicized by default. If necessary, you can change the font style (bold, italic, strikeout) or color for a whole equation or its part. The underlined style can be applied to the entire equation only, not to individual characters. Select the necessary part of the equation by clicking and dragging. The selected part will be highlighted blue. Then use the necessary buttons at the Home tab of the top toolbar to format the selection. For example, you can remove the italic format for ordinary words that are not variables or constants. To modify some equation elements you can also use the right-click menu options: To change the Fractions format, you can right-click on a fraction and select the Change to skewed/linear/stacked fraction option from the menu (the available options differ depending on the selected fraction type). To change the Scripts position relating to text, you can right-click on the equation that includes scripts and select the Scripts before/after text option from the menu. To change the argument size for Scripts, Radicals, Integrals, Large Operators, Limits and Logarithms, Operators as well as for overbraces/underbraces and templates with grouping characters from the Accents group, you can right-click on the argument you want to change and select the Increase/Decrease argument size option from the menu. To specify whether an empty degree placeholder should be displayed or not for a Radical, you can right-click on the radical and select the Hide/Show degree option from the menu. To specify whether an empty limit placeholder should be displayed or not for an Integral or Large Operator, you can right-click on the equation and select the Hide/Show top/bottom limit option from the menu. To change the limits position relating to the integral or operator sign for Integrals or Large Operators, you can right-click on the equation and select the Change limits location option from the menu. The limits can be displayed to the right of the operator sign (as subscripts and superscripts) or directly above and below the operator sign. To change the limits position relating to text for Limits and Logarithms and templates with grouping characters from the Accents group, you can right-click on the equation and select the Limit over/under text option from the menu. To choose which of the Brackets should be displayed, you can right-click on the expression within them and select the Hide/Show opening/closing bracket option from the menu. To control the Brackets size, you can right-click on the expression within them. The Stretch brackets option is selected by default so that the brackets can grow according to the expression within them, but you can deselect this option to prevent brackets from stretching. When this option is activated, you can also use the Match brackets to argument height option. To change the character position relating to text for overbraces/underbraces or overbars/underbars from the Accents group, you can right-click on the template and select the Char/Bar over/under text option from the menu. To choose which borders should be displayed for a Boxed formula from the Accents group, you can right-click on the equation and select the Border properties option from the menu, then select Hide/Show top/bottom/left/right border or Add/Hide horizontal/vertical/diagonal line. To specify whether empty placeholders should be displayed or not for a Matrix, you can right-click on it and select the Hide/Show placeholder option from the menu. To align some equation elements you can use the right-click menu options: To align equations within Cases with several conditions from the Brackets group (or equations of other types, if you've previously added new placeholders by pressing Enter), you can right-click on an equation, select the Alignment option from the menu, then select the alignment type: Top, Center, or Bottom. To align a Matrix vertically, you can right-click on the matrix, select the Matrix Alignment option from the menu, then select the alignment type: Top, Center, or Bottom. To align elements within a Matrix column horizontally, you can right-click on a placeholder within the column, select the Column Alignment option from the menu, then select the alignment type: Left, Center, or Right. Delete equation elements To delete a part of the equation, select the part you want to delete by dragging the mouse or holding down the Shift key and using the arrow buttons, then press the Delete key on the keyboard. A slot can only be deleted together with the template it belongs to. To delete the entire equation, select it completely by dragging the mouse or double-clicking on the equation box and press the Delete key on the keyboard. To delete some equation elements you can also use the right-click menu options: To delete a Radical, you can right-click on it and select the Delete radical option from the menu. To delete a Subscript and/or Superscript, you can right-click on the expression that contains them and select the Remove subscript/superscript option from the menu. If the expression contains scripts that go before text, the Remove scripts option is available. To delete Brackets, you can right-click on the expression within them and select the Delete enclosing characters or Delete enclosing characters and separators option from the menu. If the expression within Brackets inclides more than one argument, you can right-click on the argument you want to delete and select the Delete argument option from the menu. If Brackets enclose more than one equation (i.e. Cases with several conditions), you can right-click on the equation you want to delete and select the Delete equation option from the menu. This option is also available for equations of other types if you've previously added new placeholders by pressing Enter. To delete a Limit, you can right-click on it and select the Remove limit option from the menu. To delete an Accent, you can right-click on it and select the Remove accent character, Delete char or Remove bar option from the menu (the available options differ depending on the selected accent). To delete a row or a column of a Matrix, you can right-click on the placeholder within the row/column you need to delete, select the Delete option from the menu, then select Delete Row/Column." + }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertFootnotes.htm", + "title": "Inserire note a piè di pagina", + "body": "È possibile aggiungere note a piè di pagina per fornire spiegazioni o commenti per determinate frasi o termini utilizzati nel testo, fare riferimenti alle fonti, ecc. Per inserire una nota a piè di pagina nel documento, posizionare il punto di inserimento alla fine del passaggio di testo a cui si desidera aggiungere una nota a piè di pagina, passare alla scheda Riferimenti della barra degli strumenti superiore, Fare click sull’icona Nota a piè di pagina nella barra degli strumenti superiore oppure fare clic sulla freccia accanto all'icona Nota a piè di pagina e selezionare l'opzione Inserisci nota a piè di pagina dal menu, Il segno di nota a piè di pagina (ovvero il carattere in apice che indica una nota a piè di pagina) viene visualizzato nel testo del documento e il punto di inserimento si sposta nella parte inferiore della pagina corrente. digitare il testo della nota a piè di pagina. Ripetere le operazioni di cui sopra per aggiungere note a piè di pagina successive per altri passaggi di testo nel documento. Le note a piè di pagina vengono numerate automaticamente. Se si posiziona il puntatore del mouse sul segno della nota a piè di pagina nel testo del documento, viene visualizzata una piccola finestra popup con il testo della nota a piè di pagina. Per navigare facilmente tra le note a piè di pagina aggiunte all'interno del testo del documento, fare clic sulla freccia accanto all'icona Nota a piè di pagina nella scheda Riferimenti della barra degli strumenti superiore, nella sezione Passa alle note a piè di pagina , utilizzare la freccia per passare alla nota a piè di pagina precedente o la freccia per passare alla nota a piè di pagina successiva. Per modificare le impostazioni delle note a piè di pagina, fare clic sulla freccia accanto all'icona Nota a piè di pagina nella scheda Riferimenti della barra degli strumenti superiore, selezionare l'opzione Impostazioni delle note dal menu, modificare i parametri correnti nella finestra Impostazioni delle note che si apre: Impostare la Posizione delle note a piè di pagina nella pagina selezionando una delle opzioni disponibili: Fondo pagina - per posizionare le note a piè di pagina nella parte inferiore della pagina (questa opzione è selezionata per impostazione predefinita). Sotto al testo - per posizionare le note a piè di pagina più vicino al testo. Questa opzione può essere utile nei casi in cui la pagina contiene un breve testo. Regolare il Formato delle note a piè di pagina: Formato numero - selezionare il formato numerico necessario tra quelli disponibili: 1, 2, 3,..., a, b, c,..., A, B, C,..., i, ii, iii,..., I, II, III,.... Inizia da  - utilizzare le frecce per impostare il numero o la lettera con cui si desidera iniziare la numerazione. Numerazione - selezionare un modo per numerare le note a piè di pagina: Continuo - numerare le note a piè di pagina in sequenza in tutto il documento, Ricomincia a ogni sezione - per iniziare la numerazione delle note a piè di pagina con il numero 1 (o qualche altro carattere specificato) all'inizio di ogni sezione, Ricomincia a ogni pagina - per iniziare la numerazione delle note a piè di pagina con il numero 1 (o un altro carattere specificato) all'inizio di ogni pagina. Simbolo personalizzato - consente di impostare un carattere speciale o una parola che si desidera utilizzare come segno di nota a piè di pagina (ad es. * or Nota1). Immettere il carattere/parola necessari nel campo di immissione testo e fare clic sul pulsante Inserisci nella parte inferiore della finestra Impostazioni note. Utilizzare l'elenco a discesa Applica modifiche a per selezionare se si desidera applicare le impostazioni delle note specificate solo a Tutto il documento o alla Sezione attuale. Nota: per utilizzare la formattazione di note a piè di pagina diverse in parti separate del documento, è necessario aggiungere prima delle Interruzioni di sezione. Quando si è pronti, fare clic sul pulsante Applica. Per rimuovere una singola nota a piè di pagina, posizionare il punto di inserimento direttamente prima del segno della nota a piè di pagina nel testo del documento e premere Elimina. Le altre note a piè di pagina verranno rinumerate automaticamente. Per eliminare tutte le note a piè di pagina del documento, fare clic sulla freccia accanto all'icona Nota a piè di pagina nella scheda Riferimenti della barra degli strumenti superiore, selezionare l'opzione Elimina tutte le note a piè di pagina dal menu." + }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertHeadersFooters.htm", + "title": "Inserire intestazioni e piè di pagina", + "body": "Per aggiungere un'intestazione o un piè di pagina al documento o modificare quello esistente, passare alla scheda Inserisci della barra degli strumenti superiore, fare clic sull'icona Intestazioni/Piè di pagina nella barra degli strumenti superiore, selezionare una delle seguenti opzioni: Modifica intestazione per inserire o modificare il testo dell'intestazione. Modifica piè di pagina per inserire o modificare il testo del piè di pagina. modificare i parametri correnti per intestazioni o piè di pagina nella barra laterale destra: Impostare la Posizione del testo rispetto all'inizio (per le intestazioni) o alla fine (per i piè di pagina) della pagina. Selezionare la casella Diversi per la prima pagina per applicare un'intestazione o un piè di pagina diversi alla prima pagina o nel caso in cui non desideri aggiungervi alcuna intestazione/piè di pagina. Utilizzare la casella Diversi per pagine pari e dispari per aggiungere diverse intestazioni / piè di pagina per pagine pari e dispari. L'opzione Collega a precedente è disponibile nel caso in cui tu abbia precedentemente aggiunto onclick=\"onhyperlinkclick(this)\">sezioni al tuo documento. In caso contrario, verrà visualizzato in grigio. Inoltre, questa opzione non è disponibile per la prima sezione (ovvero quando viene selezionata un'intestazione o piè di pagina che appartiene alla prima sezione). Per impostazione predefinita, questa casella è selezionata, in modo che le stesse intestazioni / piè di pagina vengano applicate a tutte le sezioni. Se selezioni un'area di intestazione o piè di pagina, vedrai che l'area è contrassegnata con l'etichetta Uguale a precedente. Deseleziona la casella Collega a precedente per utilizzare intestazioni / piè di pagina diversi per ogni sezione del documento. L'etichetta Uguale a precedente non verrà più visualizzata. Per inserire un testo o modificare il testo già inserito e regolare le impostazioni dell'intestazione o del piè di pagina, puoi anche fare doppio clic all'interno della parte superiore o inferiore di una pagina o fare clic con il tasto destro del mouse e selezionare l'unica opzione di menu - Modifica intestazione o Modifica piè di pagina. Per passare al corpo del documento, fare doppio clic all'interno dell'area di lavoro. Il testo utilizzato come intestazione o piè di pagina verrà visualizzato in grigio. Nota: si prega di fare riferimento alla sezione Inserire numeri di pagina per imparare ad aggiungere numeri di pagina al documento." + }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm", + "title": "Insert images", + "body": "In Document Editor, you can insert images in the most popular formats into your document. The following image formats are supported: BMP, GIF, JPEG, JPG, PNG. Insert an image To insert an image into the document text, place the cursor where you want the image to be put, switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, click the Image icon at the top toolbar, select one of the following options to load the image: the Image from File option will open the standard dialog window for file selection. Browse your computer hard disk drive for the necessary file and click the Open button the Image from URL option will open the window where you can enter the necessary image web address and click the OK button the Image from Storage option will open the Select data source window. Select an image stored on your portal and click the OK button once the image is added you can change its size, properties, and position. It's also possible to add a caption to the image. To learn more on how to work with captions for images, you can refer to this article. Move and resize images To change the image size, drag small squares situated on its edges. To maintain the original proportions of the selected image while resizing, hold down the Shift key and drag one of the corner icons. To alter the image position, use the icon that appears after hovering your mouse cursor over the image. Drag the image to the necessary position without releasing the mouse button. When you move the image, guide lines are displayed to help you position the object on the page precisely (if a wrapping style other than inline is selected). To rotate the image, hover the mouse cursor over the rotation handle and drag it clockwise or counterclockwise. To constrain the rotation angle to 15 degree increments, hold down the Shift key while rotating. Note: the list of keyboard shortcuts that can be used when working with objects is available here. Adjust image settings Some of the image settings can be altered using the Image settings tab of the right sidebar. To activate it click the image and choose the Image settings icon on the right. Here you can change the following properties: Size is used to view the current image Width and Height. If necessary, you can restore the actual image size clicking the Actual Size button. The Fit to Margin button allows to resize the image, so that it occupies all the space between the left and right page margin. The Crop button is used to crop the image. Click the Crop button to activate cropping handles which appear on the image corners and in the center of each its side. Manually drag the handles to set the cropping area. You can move the mouse cursor over the cropping area border so that it turns into the icon and drag the area. To crop a single side, drag the handle located in the center of this side. To simultaneously crop two adjacent sides, drag one of the corner handles. To equally crop two opposite sides of the image, hold down the Ctrl key when dragging the handle in the center of one of these sides. To equally crop all sides of the image, hold down the Ctrl key when dragging any of the corner handles. When the cropping area is specified, click the Crop button once again, or press the Esc key, or click anywhere outside of the cropping area to apply the changes. After the cropping area is selected, it's also possible to use the Fill and Fit options available from the Crop drop-down menu. Click the Crop button once again and select the option you need: If you select the Fill option, the central part of the original image will be preserved and used to fill the selected cropping area, while other parts of the image will be removed. If you select the Fit option, the image will be resized so that it fits the cropping area height or width. No parts of the original image will be removed, but empty spaces may appear within the selected cropping area. Rotation is used to rotate the image by 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise as well as to flip the image horizontally or vertically. Click one of the buttons: to rotate the image by 90 degrees counterclockwise to rotate the image by 90 degrees clockwise to flip the image horizontally (left to right) to flip the image vertically (upside down) Wrapping Style is used to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind (for more information see the advanced settings description below). Replace Image is used to replace the current image loading another one From File or From URL. Some of these options you can also find in the right-click menu. The menu options are: Cut, Copy, Paste - standard options which are used to cut or copy a selected text/object and paste a previously cut/copied text passage or object to the current cursor position. Arrange is used to bring the selected image to foreground, send to background, move forward or backward as well as group or ungroup images to perform operations with several of them at once. To learn more on how to arrange objects you can refer to this page. Align is used to align the image left, center, right, top, middle, bottom. To learn more on how to align objects you can refer to this page. Wrapping Style is used to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind - or edit the wrap boundary. The Edit Wrap Boundary option is available only if you select a wrapping style other than Inline. Drag wrap points to customize the boundary. To create a new wrap point, click anywhere on the red line and drag it to the necessary position. Rotate is used to rotate the image by 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise as well as to flip the image horizontally or vertically. Crop is used to apply one of the cropping options: Crop, Fill or Fit. Select the Crop option from the submenu, then drag the cropping handles to set the cropping area, and click one of these three options from the submenu once again to apply the changes. Actual Size is used to change the current image size to the actual one. Replace image is used to replace the current image loading another one From File or From URL. Image Advanced Settings is used to open the 'Image - Advanced Settings' window. When the image is selected, the Shape settings icon is also available on the right. You can click this icon to open the Shape settings tab at the right sidebar and adjust the shape Stroke type, size and color as well as change the shape type selecting another shape from the Change Autoshape menu. The shape of the image will change correspondingly. At the Shape Settings tab, you can also use the Show shadow option to add a shadow to the image. Adjust image advanced settings To change the image advanced settings, click the image with the right mouse button and select the Image Advanced Settings option from the right-click menu or just click the Show advanced settings link at the right sidebar. The image properties window will open: The Size tab contains the following parameters: Width and Height - use these options to change the image width and/or height. If the Constant proportions button is clicked (in this case it looks like this ), the width and height will be changed together preserving the original image aspect ratio. To restore the actual size of the added image, click the Actual Size button. The Rotation tab contains the following parameters: Angle - use this option to rotate the image by an exactly specified angle. Enter the necessary value measured in degrees into the field or adjust it using the arrows on the right. Flipped - check the Horizontally box to flip the image horizontally (left to right) or check the Vertically box to flip the image vertically (upside down). The Text Wrapping tab contains the following parameters: Wrapping Style - use this option to change the way the image is positioned relative to the text: it will either be a part of the text (in case you select the inline style) or bypassed by it from all sides (if you select one of the other styles). Inline - the image is considered to be a part of the text, like a character, so when the text moves, the image moves as well. In this case the positioning options are inaccessible. If one of the following styles is selected, the image can be moved independently of the text and positioned on the page exactly: Square - the text wraps the rectangular box that bounds the image. Tight - the text wraps the actual image edges. Through - the text wraps around the image edges and fills in the open white space within the image. So that the effect can appear, use the Edit Wrap Boundary option from the right-click menu. Top and bottom - the text is only above and below the image. In front - the image overlaps the text. Behind - the text overlaps the image. If you select the square, tight, through, or top and bottom style, you will be able to set up some additional parameters - distance from text at all sides (top, bottom, left, right). The Position tab is available only if you select a wrapping style other than inline. This tab contains the following parameters that vary depending on the selected wrapping style: The Horizontal section allows you to select one of the following three image positioning types: Alignment (left, center, right) relative to character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin, Absolute Position measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified at the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) to the right of character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin, Relative position measured in percent relative to the left margin, margin, page or right margin. The Vertical section allows you to select one of the following three image positioning types: Alignment (top, center, bottom) relative to line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin, Absolute Position measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified at the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) below line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin, Relative position measured in percent relative to the margin, bottom margin, page or top margin. Move object with text controls whether the image moves as the text to which it is anchored moves. Allow overlap controls whether two images overlap or not if you drag them near each other on the page. The Alternative Text tab allows to specify a Title and Description which will be read to the people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information there is in the image." + }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertPageNumbers.htm", + "title": "Insert page numbers", + "body": "To insert page numbers into your document, switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, click the Header/Footer icon at the top toolbar, choose the Insert Page Number submenu, select one of the following options: To put a page number to each page of your document, select the page number position on the page. To insert a page number at the current cursor position, select the To Current Position option. Note: to insert a current page number at the current cursor position you can also use the Ctrl+Shift+P key combination. To insert the total number of pages in your document (e.g. if you want to create the Page X of Y entry): put the cursor where you want to insert the total number of pages, click the Header/Footer icon at the top toolbar, select the Insert number of pages option. To edit the page number settings, double-click the page number added, change the current parameters at the right sidebar: Set the Position of page numbers on the page as well as relative to the top and bottom of the page. Check the Different first page box to apply a different page number to the very first page or in case you don't want to add any number to it at all. Use the Different odd and even pages box to insert different page numbers for odd and even pages. The Link to Previous option is available in case you've previously added sections into your document. If not, it will be grayed out. Moreover, this option is also unavailable for the very first section (i.e. when a header or footer that belongs to the first section is selected). By default, this box is checked, so that unified numbering is applied to all the sections. If you select a header or footer area, you will see that the area is marked with the Same as Previous label. Uncheck the Link to Previous box to use different page numbering for each section of the document. The Same as Previous label will no longer be displayed. The Page Numbering section allows to adjust page numbering options across different sections of the document. The Continue from previous section option is selected by default and allows to keep continuous page numbering after a section break. If you want to start page numbering with a specific number in the current section of the document, select the Start at radio button and enter the necessary starting value in the field on the right. To return to the document editing, double-click within the working area." + }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertSymbols.htm", + "title": "Inserire simboli e caratteri", + "body": "Durante il processo di lavoro potrebbe essere necessario inserire un simbolo che non si trova sulla tastiera. Per inserire tali simboli nel tuo documento, usa l’opzione Inserisci simbolo e segui questi semplici passaggi: posiziona il cursore nella posizione in cui deve essere inserito un simbolo speciale, passa alla scheda Inserisci della barra degli strumenti in alto, fai clic sull’icona Simbolo, viene visualizzata la scheda di dialogo Simbolo da cui è possibile selezionare il simbolo appropriato, utilizza la sezione Intervallo per trovare rapidamente il simbolo necessario. Tutti i simboli sono divisi in gruppi specifici, ad esempio seleziona \"Simboli di valuta” se desideri inserire un carattere di valuta. se questo carattere non è nel set, seleziona un carattere diverso. Molti di loro hanno anche caratteri diversi dal set standard. in alternativa, immetti il valore esadecimale Unicode del simbolo desiderato nel campo valore Unicode HEX. Questo codice si trova nella Mappa caratteri. i simboli utilizzati in precedenza vengono visualizzati anche nel campo Simboli usati di recente, fai clic su Inserisci. Il carattere selezionato verrà aggiunto al documento. Inserire simboli ASCII La tabella ASCII viene anche utilizzata per aggiungere caratteri. Per fare ciò, tieni premuto il tasto ALT e usa il tastierino numerico per inserire il codice carattere. Nota: assicurarsi di utilizzare il tastierino numerico, non i numeri sulla tastiera principale. Per abilitare il tastierino numerico, premere il tasto Bloc Num. Ad esempio, per aggiungere ad un paragrafo il carattere (§), premere e tenere premuto il tasto ALT mentre si digita 789 e quindi rilasciare il tasto ALT. Inserire simboli usando la tabella Unicode Ulteriori caratteri e simboli possono essere trovati anche nella tabella dei simboli di Windows. Per aprire questa tabella, effettuate una delle seguenti operazioni: nel campo Ricerca scrivi 'Tabella caratteri' e aprila, in alternativa premi contemporaneamente Win + R, quindi nella seguente finestra digita charmap.exe e fai clic su OK. Nella Mappa caratteri aperta, selezionare uno dei Set di caratteri, Gruppi e Caratteri. Quindi, fai clic sui caratteri necessari, copiali negli appunti e incollali nella posizione corretta del documento." + }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertTables.htm", + "title": "Insert tables", + "body": "Insert a table To insert a table into the document text, place the cursor where you want the table to be put, switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, click the Table icon at the top toolbar, select the option to create a table: either a table with predefined number of cells (10 by 8 cells maximum) If you want to quickly add a table, just select the number of rows (8 maximum) and columns (10 maximum). or a custom table In case you need more than 10 by 8 cell table, select the Insert Custom Table option that will open the window where you can enter the necessary number of rows and columns respectively, then click the OK button. If you want to draw a table using the mouse, select the Draw Table option. This can be useful, if you want to create a table with rows and colums of different sizes. The mouse cursor will turn into the pencil . Draw a rectangular shape where you want to add a table, then add rows by drawing horizontal lines and columns by drawing vertical lines within the table boundary. once the table is added you can change its properties, size and position. To resize a table, hover the mouse cursor over the handle in its lower right corner and drag it until the table reaches the necessary size. You can also manually change the width of a certain column or the height of a row. Move the mouse cursor over the right border of the column so that the cursor turns into the bidirectional arrow and drag the border to the left or right to set the necessary width. To change the height of a single row manually, move the mouse cursor over the bottom border of the row so that the cursor turns into the bidirectional arrow and drag the border up or down. To move a table, hold down the handle in its upper left corner and drag it to the necessary place in the document. It's also possible to add a caption to the table. To learn more on how to work with captions for tables, you can refer to this article. Select a table or its part To select an entire table, click the handle in its upper left corner. To select a certain cell, move the mouse cursor to the left side of the necessary cell so that the cursor turns into the black arrow , then left-click. To select a certain row, move the mouse cursor to the left border of the table next to the necessary row so that the cursor turns into the horizontal black arrow , then left-click. To select a certain column, move the mouse cursor to the top border of the necessary column so that the cursor turns into the downward black arrow , then left-click. It's also possible to select a cell, row, column or table using options from the contextual menu or from the Rows & Columns section at the right sidebar. Note: to move around in a table you can use keyboard shortcuts. Adjust table settings Some of the table properties as well as its structure can be altered using the right-click menu. The menu options are: Cut, Copy, Paste - standard options which are used to cut or copy a selected text/object and paste a previously cut/copied text passage or object to the current cursor position. Select is used to select a row, column, cell, or table. Insert is used to insert a row above or row below the row where the cursor is placed as well as to insert a column at the left or right side from the column where the cursor is placed. It's also possible to insert several rows or columns. If you select the Several Rows/Columns option, the Insert Several window opens. Select the Rows or Columns option from the list, specify the number of rows/column you want to add, choose where they should be added: Above the cursor or Below the cursor and click OK. Delete is used to delete a row, column, table or cells. If you select the Cells option, the Delete Cells window will open, where you can select if you want to Shift cells left, Delete entire row, or Delete entire column. Merge Cells is available if two or more cells are selected and is used to merge them. It's also possible to merge cells by erasing a boundary between them using the eraser tool. To do this, click the Table icon at the top toolbar, choose the Erase Table option. The mouse cursor will turn into the eraser . Move the mouse cursor over the border between the cells you want to merge and erase it. Split Cell... is used to open a window where you can select the needed number of columns and rows the cell will be split in. It's also possible to split a cell by drawing rows or columns using the pencil tool. To do this, click the Table icon at the top toolbar, choose the Draw Table option. The mouse cursor will turn into the pencil . Draw a horizontal line to create a row or a vertical line to create a column. Distribute rows is used to adjust the selected cells so that they have the same height without changing the overall table height. Distribute columns is used to adjust the selected cells so that they have the same width without changing the overall table width. Cell Vertical Alignment is used to align the text top, center or bottom in the selected cell. Text Direction - is used to change the text orientation in a cell. You can place the text horizontally, vertically from top to bottom (Rotate Text Down), or vertically from bottom to top (Rotate Text Up). Table Advanced Settings is used to open the 'Table - Advanced Settings' window. Hyperlink is used to insert a hyperlink. Paragraph Advanced Settings is used to open the 'Paragraph - Advanced Settings' window. You can also change the table properties at the right sidebar: Rows and Columns are used to select the table parts that you want to be highlighted. For rows: Header - to highlight the first row Total - to highlight the last row Banded - to highlight every other row For columns: First - to highlight the first column Last - to highlight the last column Banded - to highlight every other column Select from Template is used to choose a table template from the available ones. Borders Style is used to select the border size, color, style as well as background color. Rows & Columns is used to perform some operations with the table: select, delete, insert rows and columns, merge cells, split a cell. Rows & Columns Size is used to adjust the width and height of the currently selected cell. In this section, you can also Distribute rows so that all the selected cells have equal height or Distribute columns so that all the selected cells have equal width. Add formula is used to insert a formula into the selected table cell. Repeat as header row at the top of each page is used to insert the same header row at the top of each page in long tables. Show advanced settings is used to open the 'Table - Advanced Settings' window. Adjust table advanced settings To change the advanced table properties, click the table with the right mouse button and select the Table Advanced Settings option from the right-click menu or use the Show advanced settings link at the right sidebar. The table properties window will open: The Table tab allows to change properties of the entire table. The Table Size section contains the following parameters: Width - by default, the table width is automatically adjusted to fit the page width, i.e. the table occupies all the space between the left and right page margin. You can check this box and specify the necessary table width manually. Measure in - allows to specify if you want to set the table width in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified at the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) or in Percent of the overall page width. Note: you can also adjust the table size manually changing the row height and column width. Move the mouse cursor over a row/column border until it turns into the bidirectional arrow and drag the border. You can also use the markers on the horizontal ruler to change the column width and the markers on the vertical ruler to change the row height. Automatically resize to fit contents - enables automatic change of each column width in accordance with the text within its cells. The Default Cell Margins section allows to change the space between the text within the cells and the cell border used by default. The Options section allows to change the following parameter: Spacing between cells - the cell spacing which will be filled with the Table Background color. The Cell tab allows to change properties of individual cells. First you need to select the cell you want to apply the changes to or select the entire table to change properties of all its cells. The Cell Size section contains the following parameters: Preferred width - allows to set a preferred cell width. This is the size that a cell strives to fit to, but in some cases it may not be possible to fit to this exact value. For example, if the text within a cell exceeds the specified width, it will be broken into the next line so that the preferred cell width remains unchanged, but if you insert a new column, the preferred width will be reduced. Measure in - allows to specify if you want to set the cell width in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified at the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) or in Percent of the overall table width. Note: you can also adjust the cell width manually. To make a single cell in a column wider or narrower than the overall column width, select the necessary cell and move the mouse cursor over its right border until it turns into the bidirectional arrow, then drag the border. To change the width of all the cells in a column, use the markers on the horizontal ruler to change the column width. The Cell Margins section allows to adjust the space between the text within the cells and the cell border. By default, standard values are used (the default values can also be altered at the Table tab), but you can uncheck the Use default margins box and enter the necessary values manually. The Cell Options section allows to change the following parameter: The Wrap text option is enabled by default. It allows to wrap text within a cell that exceeds its width onto the next line expanding the row height and keeping the column width unchanged. The Borders & Background tab contains the following parameters: Border parameters (size, color and presence or absence) - set the border size, select its color and choose the way it will be displayed in the cells. Note: in case you select not to show table borders clicking the button or deselecting all the borders manually on the diagram, they will be indicated by a dotted line in the document. To make them disappear at all, click the Nonprinting characters icon at the Home tab of the top toolbar and select the Hidden Table Borders option. Cell Background - the color for the background within the cells (available only if one or more cells are selected or the Allow spacing between cells option is selected at the Table tab). Table Background - the color for the table background or the space background between the cells in case the Allow spacing between cells option is selected at the Table tab. The Table Position tab is available only if the Flow table option at the Text Wrapping tab is selected and contains the following parameters: Horizontal parameters include the table alignment (left, center, right) relative to margin, page or text as well as the table position to the right of margin, page or text. Vertical parameters include the table alignment (top, center, bottom) relative to margin, page or text as well as the table position below margin, page or text. The Options section allows to change the following parameters: Move object with text controls whether the table moves as the text into which it is inserted moves. Allow overlap controls whether two tables are merged into one large table or overlap if you drag them near each other on the page. The Text Wrapping tab contains the following parameters: Text wrapping style - Inline table or Flow table. Use the necessary option to change the way the table is positioned relative to the text: it will either be a part of the text (in case you select the inline table) or bypassed by it from all sides (if you select the flow table). After you select the wrapping style, the additional wrapping parameters can be set both for inline and flow tables: For the inline table, you can specify the table alignment and indent from left. For the flow table, you can specify the distance from text and table position at the Table Position tab. The Alternative Text tab allows to specify a Title and Description which will be read to the people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information there is in the table." + }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertTextObjects.htm", + "title": "Insert text objects", + "body": "To make your text more emphatic and draw attention to a specific part of the document, you can insert a text box (a rectangular frame that allows to enter text within it) or a Text Art object (a text box with a predefined font style and color that allows to apply some text effects). Add a text object You can add a text object anywhere on the page. To do that: switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, select the necessary text object type: to add a text box, click the Text Box icon at the top toolbar, then click where you want to insert the text box, hold the mouse button and drag the text box border to specify its size. When you release the mouse button, the insertion point will appear in the added text box, allowing you to enter your text. Note: it's also possible to insert a text box by clicking the Shape icon at the top toolbar and selecting the shape from the Basic Shapes group. to add a Text Art object, click the Text Art icon at the top toolbar, then click on the desired style template – the Text Art object will be added at the current cursor position. Select the default text within the text box with the mouse and replace it with your own text. click outside of the text object to apply the changes and return to the document. The text within the text object is a part of the latter (when you move or rotate the text object, the text moves or rotates with it). As an inserted text object represents a rectangular frame with text in it (Text Art objects have invisible text box borders by default) and this frame is a common autoshape, you can change both the shape and text properties. To delete the added text object, click on the text box border and press the Delete key on the keyboard. The text within the text box will also be deleted. Format a text box Select the text box clicking on its border to be able to change its properties. When the text box is selected, its borders are displayed as solid (not dashed) lines. to resize, move, rotate the text box use the special handles on the edges of the shape. to edit the text box fill, stroke, wrapping style or replace the rectangular box with a different shape, click the Shape settings icon on the right sidebar and use the corresponding options. to align the text box on the page, arrange text boxes as related to other objects, rotate or flip a text box, change a wrapping style or access the shape advanced settings, right-click on the text box border and use the contextual menu options. To learn more on how to arrange and align objects you can refer to this page. Format the text within the text box Click the text within the text box to be able to change its properties. When the text is selected, the text box borders are displayed as dashed lines. Note: it's also possible to change text formatting when the text box (not the text itself) is selected. In such a case, any changes will be applied to all the text within the text box. Some font formatting options (font type, size, color and decoration styles) can be applied to a previously selected portion of the text separately. To rotate the text within the text box, right-click the text, select the Text Direction option and then choose one of the available options: Horizontal (is selected by default), Rotate Text Down (sets a vertical direction, from top to bottom) or Rotate Text Up (sets a vertical direction, from bottom to top). To align the text vertically within the text box, right-click the text, select the Vertical Alignment option and then choose one of the available options: Align Top, Align Center or Align Bottom. Other formatting options that you can apply are the same as the ones for regular text. Please refer to the corresponding help sections to learn more about the necessary operation. You can: align the text horizontally within the text box adjust the font type, size, color, apply decoration styles and formatting presets set line spacing, change paragraph indents, adjust tab stops for the multi-line text within the text box insert a hyperlink You can also click the Text Art settings icon on the right sidebar and change some style parameters. Edit a Text Art style Select a text object and click the Text Art settings icon on the right sidebar. Change the applied text style selecting a new Template from the gallery. You can also change the basic style additionally by selecting a different font type, size etc. Change the font Fill. You can choose the following options: Color Fill - select this option to specify the solid color you want to fill the inner space of letters with. Click the colored box below and select the necessary color from the available color sets or specify any color you like: Gradient Fill - select this option to fill the letters with two colors which smoothly change from one to another. Style - choose one of the available options: Linear (colors change in a straight line i.e. along a horizontal/vertical axis or diagonally at a 45 degree angle) or Radial (colors change in a circular path from the center to the edges). Direction - choose a template from the menu. If the Linear gradient is selected, the following directions are available: top-left to bottom-right, top to bottom, top-right to bottom-left, right to left, bottom-right to top-left, bottom to top, bottom-left to top-right, left to right. If the Radial gradient is selected, only one template is available. Gradient - click on the left slider under the gradient bar to activate the color box which corresponds to the first color. Click on the color box on the right to choose the first color in the palette. Drag the slider to set the gradient stop i.e. the point where one color changes into another. Use the right slider under the gradient bar to specify the second color and set the gradient stop. Note: if one of these two options is selected, you can also set an Opacity level dragging the slider or entering the percent value manually. The default value is 100%. It corresponds to the full opacity. The 0% value corresponds to the full transparency. No Fill - select this option if you don't want to use any fill. Adjust the font Stroke width, color and type. To change the stroke width, select one of the available options from the Size dropdown list. The available options are: 0.5 pt, 1 pt, 1.5 pt, 2.25 pt, 3 pt, 4.5 pt, 6 pt. Alternatively, select the No Line option if you don't want to use any stroke. To change the stroke color, click on the colored box below and select the necessary color. To change the stroke type, select the necessary option from the corresponding dropdown list (a solid line is applied by default, you can change it to one of the available dashed lines). Apply a text effect by selecting the necessary text transformation type from the Transform gallery. You can adjust the degree of the text distortion by dragging the pink diamond-shaped handle." + }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/LineSpacing.htm", + "title": "Impostare l'interlinea del paragrafo", + "body": "Nell'Editor di documenti, è possibile impostare l'altezza della riga per le righe di testo all'interno del paragrafo, nonché i margini tra il paragrafo corrente e quello precedente o quello successivo. Per farlo, posizionare il cursore all'interno del paragrafo che interessa o selezionare diversi paragrafi con il mouse o tutto il testo nel documento premendo la combinazione di tasti Ctrl+A, utilizzare i campi corrispondenti nella barra laterale destra per ottenere i risultati desiderati: Interlinea - imposta l'altezza della riga per le righe di testo all'interno del paragrafo. È possibile scegliere tra tre opzioni: minima (imposta la spaziatura minima necessaria per adattarsi al carattere o all'immagine più grande sulla riga), multipla ((imposta l'interlinea che può essere espressa in numeri maggiori di 1), esatta (imposta l'interlinea fissa). È possibile specificare il valore necessario nel campo a destra. Spaziatura del paragrafo - impostare la quantità di spazio tra i paragrafi. Prima - impostare la quantità di spazio prima del paragrafo. Dopo - impostare la quantità di spazio dopo il paragrafo. Non aggiungere intervallo tra paragrafi dello stesso stile - seleziona questa casella nel caso in cui non sia necessario alcuno spazio tra i paragrafi dello stesso stile. Questi parametri sono disponibili anche nella finestra Paragrafo - Impostazioni avanzate. Per aprire la finestra Paragrafo - Impostazioni avanzate , fare clic con il pulsante destro del mouse sul testo e sceglere l'opzione Impostazioni avanzate del paragrafo dal menu o utilizzare l'opzione Mostra impostazioni avanzate nella barra laterale destra. Passare quindi alla scheda Rientri e spaziatura e passare alla sezione Spaziatura. Per modificare rapidamente l'interlinea del paragrafo corrente, è anche possibile utilizzare l'icona Interlinea paragrafo nella scheda Home della barra degli strumenti superiore selezionando il valore desiderato dall'elenco: 1.0, 1.15, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5 o 3.0 righe." + }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/NonprintingCharacters.htm", + "title": "Show/hide nonprinting characters", + "body": "Nonprinting characters help you edit a document. They indicate the presence of various types of formatting, but they do not print with the document, even when they are displayed on the screen. To show or hide nonprinting characters, click the Nonprinting characters icon at the Home tab of the top toolbar. Alternatively, you can use the Ctrl+Shift+Num8 key combination. Nonprinting characters include: Spaces Inserted when you press the Spacebar on the keyboard. It creates a space between characters. Tabs Inserted when you press the Tab key. It's used to advance the cursor to the next tab stop. Paragraph marks (i.e. hard returns) Inserted when you press the Enter key. It ends a paragraph and adds a bit of space after it. It contains information about the paragraph formatting. Line breaks (i.e. soft returns) Inserted when you use the Shift+Enter key combination. It breaks the current line and puts lines of text close together. Soft return is primarily used in titles and headings. Nonbreaking spaces Inserted when you use the Ctrl+Shift+Spacebar key combination. It creates a space between characters which can't be used to start a new line. Page breaks Inserted when you use the Breaks icon at the Insert or Layout tab of the top toolbar and then select the Insert Page Break option, or select the Page break before option in the right-click menu or advanced settings window. Section breaks Inserted when you use the Breaks icon at the Insert or Layout tab of the top toolbar and then select one of the Insert Section Break submenu options (the section break indicator differs depending on which option is selected: Next Page, Continuous Page, Even Page or Odd Page). Column breaks Inserted when you use the Breaks icon at the Insert or Layout tab of the top toolbar and then select the Insert Column Break option. End-of-cell and end-of row markers in tables These markers contain formatting codes for the individual cell and row, respectively. Small black square in the margin to the left of a paragraph It indicates that at least one of the paragraph options was applied, e.g. Keep lines together, Page break before. Anchor symbols They indicate the position of floating objects (those with a wrapping style other than Inline), e.g. images, autoshapes, charts. You should select an object to make its anchor visible." + }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/OpenCreateNew.htm", + "title": "Create a new document or open an existing one", + "body": "Per creare un nuovo documento Nell’Editor di Documenti Online clicca su File nella barra degli strumenti superiore, seleziona l’opzione Crea nuovo. Nell’Editor di Documenti Desktop Nella finestra principale del programma, dalla sezione Crea nuovo che trovi sulla barra degli strumenti a sinistra, seleziona la voce Documento. Un nuovo file verrà aperto in una nuova sheda. Quando tutte le modifiche sono state effettuate, clicca sull’icona Salva nell’angolo superiore sinistro, oppure clicca sulla voce di menù File e poi scegli Salva come dal menu a tendina. Nella finestra di gestione dei file, scegli la locazione, specifica il nome, scegli il formato desiderato in cui desideri salvare il tuo documento (DOCX, Modello di documento (DOTX), ODT, OTT, RTF, TXT, PDF or PDFA) e poi clicca su Salva. Per aprire un documento esistente Nell’Editor di Documenti Desktop Nella finestra principale del programma, seleziona nella barra a sinistra la voce di menù Apri file locale, Scegli il documento desiderato dalla finestra di gestione dei file e clicca su Apri. Puoi anche cliccare col tasto destro sul documento desiderato all’interno della finestra di gestione dei file e scegliere l’opzione Apri con per poi scegliere l’applicazione preferita dal menù. Se il tipo di file documento é già stato associato all’applicazione, puoi anche aprire il documento con un doppio click nella finestra di gestione dei file. Tutte le directory a cui hai accesso usando l’editor per desktop verranno visualizzate nell’elenco delle Cartelle recenti in modo da poter avere un rapido accesso in seguito. Cliccando sulla cartella, verranno visualizzati i file in essa contenuti. Per aprire un documento modificato recentemente Nell’Editor di Documenti Online clicca sulla voce File nella barra superiore dei menú seleziona l’opzione Apri recenti... scegli il documento desiderato dalla lista dei documenti modificati recentemente. Nell’Editor di Documenti Desktop Nella finestra principale del programma seleziona la voce File recenti nella barra a sinistra, Scegli il documento di cui hai bisogno dall’elenco dei file modificati recentemente. Per aprire la cartella dove sono locati i file in una nuova sheda del browser nella versione online , clicca sulla voce Apri cartella, , che nella versione per desktop si trova immediatamente a destra della testata dell’editor. Alternativamente puoi cliccare sulla sheda File nella barra superiore e selezionare la voce Apri cartella." + }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/PageBreaks.htm", + "title": "Inserire interruzioni di pagina", + "body": "Nell'Editor di documenti, è possibile aggiungere un'interruzione di pagina per iniziare una nuova pagina, inserire una pagina vuota e regolare le opzioni di impaginazione. Per inserire un'interruzione di pagina nella posizione corrente del cursore, fare clic sull'icona Interruzione di pagina o di sezione nella scheda Inserisci o Layout della barra degli strumenti superiore oppure fare clic sulla freccia accanto a questa icona e selezionare l'opzione Inserisci interruzione di pagina dal menu. È inoltre possibile utilizzare la combinazione di tasti Ctrl+Invio. Per inserire una pagina vuota nella posizione corrente del cursore, fare clic sull'icona Pagina vuota nella scheda Inserisci della barra degli strumenti superiore. In questo modo vengono inserite due interruzioni di pagina che creano una pagina vuota. Per inserire un'interruzione di pagina prima del paragrafo selezionato, ad esempio per iniziare questo paragrafo nella parte superiore di una nuova pagina: fare clic con il pulsante destro del mouse e selezionare l'opzione Anteponi Interruzione di pagina nel menu, oppure fare clic con il pulsante destro del mouse, seleziona l'opzione Impostazioni avanzate del paragrafo nel menu o utilizzare il link Mostra impostazioni avanzate nella barra laterale destra e selezionare la casella Anteponi interruzione di pagina nella scheda Interruzioni di riga e di pagina della finestra Paragrafo - Impostazioni avanzate aperta. Per mantenere le righe unite in modo che solo interi paragrafi vengano spostati nella nuova pagina (cioè non ci sarà alcuna interruzione di pagina tra le righe all'interno di un singolo paragrafo), fare clic con il pulsante destro del mouse e selezionare l'opzione Mantieni assieme le righe nel menu, oppure fare clic con il pulsante destro del mouse, selezionare l'opzione Impostazioni avanzate del paragrafo nel menu o utilizzare il link Mostra impostazioni avanzate nella barra laterale destra e selezionare la casella Mantieni assieme le righe nella scheda Interruzioni di riga e di pagina della finestra Paragrafo - Impostazioni avanzate aperta. La scheda Interruzioni di riga e di pagina della finestra Paragrafo - Impostazioni avanzate consente di impostare altre due opzioni di impaginazione: Mantieni con il successivo - viene utilizzato per evitare un'interruzione di pagina tra il paragrafo selezionato e quello successivo. Controllo righe isolate - è selezionato per impostazione predefinita e utilizzato per impedire la visualizzazione di una singola riga del paragrafo (la prima o l'ultima) nella parte superiore o inferiore della pagina." + }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/ParagraphIndents.htm", + "title": "Modificare i rientri del paragrafo", + "body": "Nell'Editor documenti, è possibile modificare l'offset della prima riga dalla parte sinistra della pagina e l'offset del paragrafo dai lati sinistro e destro della pagina. Per farlo, posiziona il cursore all'interno del paragrafo che ti interessa o seleziona diversi paragrafi con il mouse o tutto il testo nel documento premendo la combinazione di tasti Ctrl+A, fai clic con il pulsante destro del mouse e seleziona l'opzione Impostazioni avanzate del paragrafo dal menu o utilizza il collegamento Mostra impostazioni avanzate nella barra laterale destra, nella finestra Paragrafo - Impostazioni avanzate aperta, passare alla scheda Rientri e spaziatura e impostare i parametri necessari nella sezione Rientri: A sinistra - imposta l'offset del paragrafo dal lato sinistro della pagina specificando il valore numerico necessario, A destra - imposta l'offset del paragrafo dal lato destro della pagina specificando il valore numerico necessario, Speciale - imposta un rientro per la prima riga del paragrafo: seleziona la voce di menu corrispondente ((nssuno), Prima riga, Sporgente) e modifica il valore numerico predefinito specificato per Prima riga o Sospensione, fare clic sul pulsante OK. Per modificare rapidamente l'offset del paragrafo dal lato sinistro della pagina, è anche possibile utilizzare le rispettive icone nella scheda Home della barra degli strumenti superiore: Riduci rientro e Aumenta rientro . È inoltre possibile utilizzare il righello orizzontale per impostare i rientri. Selezionate i paragrafi necessari e trascinate gli indicatori di rientro lungo il righello. L'indicatore Rientro prima riga viene utilizzato per impostare l'offset dal lato sinistro della pagina per la prima riga del paragrafo. L'indicatore Rientro sporgente viene utilizzato per impostare l'offset dal lato sinistro della pagina per la seconda riga e tutte le righe successive del paragrafo. L'indicatore Rientro sinistro viene utilizzato per impostare l'intero offset del paragrafo dal lato sinistro della pagina. L'indicatore Rientro destro viene utilizzato per impostare l'offset del paragrafo dal lato destro della pagina." + }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm", + "title": "Save/download/print your document", + "body": "Save/download/ print your document Saving By default, online Document Editor automatically saves your file each 2 seconds when you work on it preventing your data loss in case of the unexpected program closing. If you co-edit the file in the Fast mode, the timer requests for updates 25 times a second and saves the changes if they have been made. When the file is being co-edited in the Strict mode, changes are automatically saved at 10-minute intervals. If you need, you can easily select the preferred co-editing mode or disable the Autosave feature on the Advanced Settings page. To save your current document manually in the current format and location, press the Save icon in the left part of the editor header, or use the Ctrl+S key combination, or click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Save option. Note: in the desktop version, to prevent data loss in case of the unexpected program closing you can turn on the Autorecover option at the Advanced Settings page. In the desktop version, you can save the document with another name, in a new location or format, click the File tab of the top toolbar, select the Save as... option, choose one of the available formats depending on your needs: DOCX, ODT, RTF, TXT, PDF, PDFA. You can also choose the Document template (DOTX or OTT) option. Downloading In the online version, you can download the resulting document onto your computer hard disk drive, click the File tab of the top toolbar, select the Download as... option, choose one of the available formats depending on your needs: DOCX, PDF, ODT, TXT, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, HTML. Saving a copy In the online version, you can save a copy of the file on your portal, click the File tab of the top toolbar, select the Save Copy as... option, choose one of the available formats depending on your needs: DOCX, PDF, ODT, TXT, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, HTML, select a location of the file on the portal and press Save. Printing To print out the current document, click the Print icon in the left part of the editor header, or use the Ctrl+P key combination, or click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Print option. It's also possible to print a selected text passage using the Print Selection option from the contextual menu. In the desktop version, the file will be printed directly. In the online version, a PDF file will be generated on the basis of the document. You can open and print it out, or save onto your computer hard disk drive or removable medium to print it out later. Some browsers (e.g. Chrome and Opera) support direct printing." + }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/SectionBreaks.htm", + "title": "Insert section breaks", + "body": "Section breaks allow you to apply a different layout or formatting for the certain parts of your document. For example, you can use individual headers and footers, page numbering, footnotes format, margins, size, orientation, or column number for each separate section. Note: an inserted section break defines formatting of the preceding part of the document. To insert a section break at the current cursor position: click the Breaks icon at the Insert or Layout tab of the top toolbar, select the Insert Section Break submenu select the necessary section break type: Next Page - to start a new section from the next page Continuous Page - to start a new section at the current page Even Page - to start a new section from the next even page Odd Page - to start a new section from the next odd page Added section breaks are indicated in your document by a double dotted line: If you do not see the inserted section breaks, click the icon at the Home tab of the top toolbar to display them. To remove a section break select it with the mouse and press the Delete key. Since a section break defines formatting of the preceding section, when you remove a section break, this section formatting will also be deleted. The document part that preceded the removed section break acquires the formatting of the part that followed it." + }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/SetOutlineLevel.htm", + "title": "Impostare un livello di struttura del paragarfo", + "body": "Il livello di struttura indica il livello del paragrafo nella struttura del documento. Sono disponibili i seguenti livelli: Testo Base, Livello 1 - Livello 9. Il livello di struttura può essere specificato in diversi modi, ad esempio utilizzando gli stili d’intestazione: una volta assegnato uno stile di titolo (Titolo 1 - Titolo 9) ad un paragrafo, esso acquisisce un livello di struttura corrispondente. Se assegni un livello a un paragrafo utilizzando le impostazioni avanzate del paragrafo, il paragrafo acquisisce solo il livello della struttura mentre il suo stile rimane invariato. Il livello di struttura può anche essere modificato nel pannello di Navigazione a sinistra usando le opzioni del menu contestuale. Per modificare il livello di struttura di un paragrafo utilizzando le impostazioni avanzate del paragrafo, fai clic con il pulsante destro e seleziona l’opzione Impostazioni avanzate del paragrafo dal menu contestuale o utilizza l’opzione Mostra impostazioni avanzate nella barra laterale destra, apri la scheda Paragrafo - Impostazioni avanzate, passa alla scheda Rientri e spaziatura, seleziona il livello di struttura necessario dall’elenco Livelli di struttura. fai click sul pulsante OK per applicare le modifiche." + }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/SetPageParameters.htm", + "title": "Set page parameters", + "body": "To change page layout, i.e. set page orientation and size, adjust margins and insert columns, use the corresponding icons at the Layout tab of the top toolbar. Note: all these parameters are applied to the entire document. If you need to set different page margins, orientation, size, or column number for the separate parts of your document, please refer to this page. Page Orientation Change the current orientation type clicking the Orientation icon. The default orientation type is Portrait that can be switched to Album. Page Size Change the default A4 format clicking the Size icon and selecting the needed one from the list. The available preset sizes are: US Letter (21,59cm x 27,94cm) US Legal (21,59cm x 35,56cm) A4 (21cm x 29,7cm) A5 (14,81cm x 20,99cm) B5 (17,6cm x 25,01cm) Envelope #10 (10,48cm x 24,13cm) Envelope DL (11,01cm x 22,01cm) Tabloid (27,94cm x 43,17cm) AЗ (29,7cm x 42,01cm) Tabloid Oversize (30,48cm x 45,71cm) ROC 16K (19,68cm x 27,3cm) Envelope Choukei 3 (11,99cm x 23,49cm) Super B/A3 (33,02cm x 48,25cm) You can also set a special page size by selecting the Custom Page Size option from the list. The Page Size window will open where you'll be able to select the necessary Preset (US Letter, US Legal, A4, A5, B5, Envelope #10, Envelope DL, Tabloid, AЗ, Tabloid Oversize, ROC 16K, Envelope Choukei 3, Super B/A3, A0, A1, A2, A6) or set custom Width and Height values. Enter your new values into the entry fields or adjust the existing values using arrow buttons. When ready, click OK to apply the changes. Page Margins Change default margins, i.e. the blank space between the left, right, top and bottom page edges and the paragraph text, clicking the Margins icon and selecting one of the available presets: Normal, US Normal, Narrow, Moderate, Wide. You can also use the Custom Margins option to set your own values in the Margins window that opens. Enter the necessary Top, Bottom, Left and Right page margin values into the entry fields or adjust the existing values using arrow buttons. Gutter position is used to set up additional space on the left or top of the document. Gutter option might come in handy to make sure bookbinding does not cover text. In Margins window enter the necessary gutter position into the entry fields and choose where it should be placed in. Note: Gutter position function cannot be used when Mirror margins option is checked. In Multiple pages drop-down menu choose Mirror margins option to to set up facing pages for double-sided documents. With this option checked, Left and Right margins turn into Inside and Outside margins respectively. In Orientation drop-down menu choose from Portrait and Landscape options. All applied changes to the document will be displayed in the Preview window. When ready, click OK. The custom margins will be applied to the current document and the Last Custom option with the specified parameters will appear in the Margins list so that you can apply them to some other documents.

                                                              You can also change the margins manually by dragging the border between the grey and white areas on the rulers (the grey areas of the rulers indicate page margins): Columns Apply a multi-column layout clicking the Columns icon and selecting the necessary column type from the drop-down list. The following options are available: Two - to add two columns of the same width, Three - to add three columns of the same width, Left - to add two columns: a narrow column on the left and a wide column on the right, Right - to add two columns: a narrow column on the right and a wide column on the left. If you want to adjust column settings, select the Custom Columns option from the list. The Columns window will open where you'll be able to set necessary Number of columns (it's possible to add up to 12 columns) and Spacing between columns. Enter your new values into the entry fields or adjust the existing values using arrow buttons. Check the Column divider box to add a vertical line between the columns. When ready, click OK to apply the changes. To exactly specify where a new column should start, place the cursor before the text that you want to move into the new column, click the Breaks icon at the top toolbar and then select the Insert Column Break option. The text will be moved to the next column. Added column breaks are indicated in your document by a dotted line: . If you do not see the inserted column breaks, click the icon at the Home tab of the top toolbar to display them. To remove a column break select it with the mouse and press the Delete key. To manually change the column width and spacing, you can use the horizontal ruler. To cancel columns and return to a regular single-column layout, click the Columns icon at the top toolbar and select the One option from the list." + }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/SetTabStops.htm", + "title": "Set tab stops", + "body": "In Document Editor, you can change tab stops i.e. the position the cursor advances to when you press the Tab key on the keyboard. To set tab stops you can use the horizontal ruler: Select the necessary tab stop type clicking the button in the upper left corner of the working area. The following three tab types are available: Left - lines up your text by the left side at the tab stop position; the text moves to the right from the tab stop as you type. Such a tab stop will be indicated on the horizontal ruler by the marker. Center - centers the text at the tab stop position. Such a tab stop will be indicated on the horizontal ruler by the marker. Right - lines up your text by the right side at the tab stop position; the text moves to the left from the tab stop as you type. Such a tab stop will be indicated on the horizontal ruler by the marker. Click on the bottom edge of the ruler where you want to place the tab stop. Drag it along the ruler to change its position. To remove the added tab stop drag it out of the ruler. You can also use the paragraph properties window to adjust tab stops. Click the right mouse button, select the Paragraph Advanced Settings option in the menu or use the Show advanced settings link at the right sidebar, and switch to the Tabs tab in the opened Paragraph - Advanced Settings window. You can set the following parameters: Default Tab is set at 1.25 cm. You can decrease or increase this value using the arrow buttons or enter the necessary one in the box. Tab Position - is used to set custom tab stops. Enter the necessary value in this box, adjust it more precisely using the arrow buttons and press the Specify button. Your custom tab position will be added to the list in the field below. If you've previously added some tab stops using the ruler, all these tab positions will also be displayed in the list. Alignment - is used to set the necessary alignment type for each of the tab positions in the list above. Select the necessary tab position in the list, choose the Left, Center or Right option from the drop-down list and press the Specify button. Leader - allows to choose a character used to create a leader for each of the tab positions. A leader is a line of characters (dots or hyphens) that fills the space between tabs. Select the necessary tab position in the list, choose the leader type from the drop-down list and press the Specify button. To delete tab stops from the list select a tab stop and press the Remove or Remove All button." + }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/UseMailMerge.htm", + "title": "Use Mail Merge", + "body": "Note: this option is available in the online version only. The Mail Merge feature is used to create a set of documents combining a common content which is taken from a text document and some individual components (variables, such as names, greetings etc.) taken from a spreadsheet (for example, a customer list). It can be useful if you need to create a lot of personalized letters and send them to recipients. To start working with the Mail Merge feature, Prepare a data source and load it to the main document A data source used for the mail merge must be an .xlsx spreadsheet stored on your portal. Open an existing spreadsheet or create a new one and make sure that it meets the following requirements. The spreadsheet should have a header row with the column titles, as values in the first cell of each column will designate merge fields (i.e. variables that you can insert into the text). Each column should contain a set of actual values for a variable. Each row in the spreadsheet should correspond to a separate record (i.e. a set of values that belongs to a certain recipient). During the merge process, a copy of the main document will be created for each record and each merge field inserted into the main text will be replaced with an actual value from the corresponding column. If you are goung to send results by email, the spreadsheet must also include a column with the recipients' email addresses. Open an existing text document or create a new one. It must contain the main text which will be the same for each version of the merged document. Click the Mail Merge icon at the Home tab of the top toolbar. The Select Data Source window will open. It displays the list of all your .xlsx spreadsheets stored in the My Documents section. To navigate between other Documents module sections use the menu in the left part of the window. Select the file you need and click OK. Once the data source is loaded, the Mail Merge setting tab will be available on the right sidebar. Verify or change the recipients list Click the Edit recipients list button on the top of the right sidebar to open the Mail Merge Recipients window, where the content of the selected data source is displayed. Here you can add new information, edit or delete the existing data, if necessary. To simplify working with data, you can use the icons on the top of the window: and - to copy and paste the copied data and - to undo and redo undone actions and - to sort your data within a selected range of cells in ascending or descending order - to enable the filter for the previously selected range of cells or to remove the applied filter - to clear all the applied filter parameters Note: to learn more on how to use the filter you can refer to the Sort and filter data section of the Spreadsheet Editor help. - to search for a certain value and replace it with another one, if necessary Note: to learn more on how to use the Find and Replace tool you can refer to the Search and Replace Functions section of the Spreadsheet Editor help. After all the necessary changes are made, click the Save & Exit button. To discard the changes, click the Close button. Insert merge fields and check the results Place the mouse cursor in the text of the main document where you want a merge field to be inserted, click the Insert Merge Field button at the right sidebar and select the necessary field from the list. The available fields correspond to the data in the first cell of each column of the selected data source. Add all the fields you need anywhere in the document. Turn on the Highlight merge fields switcher at the right sidebar to make the inserted fields more noticeable in the document text. Turn on the Preview results switcher at the right sidebar to view the document text with the merge fields replaced with actual values from the data source. Use the arrow buttons to preview versions of the merged document for each record. To delete an inserted field, disable the Preview results mode, select the field with the mouse and press the Delete key on the keyboard. To replace an inserted field, disable the Preview results mode, select the field with the mouse, click the Insert Merge Field button at the right sidebar and choose a new field from the list. Specify the merge parameters Select the merge type. You can start mass mailing or save the result as a file in the PDF or Docx format to be able to print or edit it later. Select the necessary option from the Merge to list: PDF - to create a single document in the PDF format that includes all the merged copies so that you can print them later Docx - to create a single document in the Docx format that includes all the merged copies so that you can edit individual copies later Email - to send the results to recipients by email Note: the recipients' email addresses must be specified in the loaded data source and you need to have at least one email account connected in the Mail module on your portal. Choose the records you want to apply the merge to: All records (this option is selected by default) - to create merged documents for all records from the loaded data source Current record - to create a merged document for the record that is currently displayed From ... To - to create merged documents for a range of records (in this case you need to specify two values: the number of the first record and the last record in the desired range) Note: the maximum allowed quantity of recipients is 100. If you have more than 100 recipients in your data source, please, perform the mail merge by stages: specify the values from 1 to 100, wait until the mail merge process is over, then repeat the operation specifying the values from 101 to N etc. Complete the merge If you've decided to save the merge results as a file, click the Download button to store the file anywhere on your PC. You'll find the downloaded file in your default Downloads folder. click the Save button to save the file on your portal. In the Folder for save window that opens, you can change the file name and specify the folder where you want to save the file. You can also check the Open merged document in new tab box to check the result once the merge process is finished. Finally, click Save in the Folder for save window. If you've selected the Email option, the Merge button will be available on the right sidebar. After you click it, the Send to Email window will open: In the From list, select the mail account you want to use for sending mail, if you have several accounts connected in the Mail module. In the To list, select the merge field corresponding to email addresses of the recipients, if it was not selected automatically. Enter your message subject in the Subject Line field. Select the mail format from the list: HTML, Attach as DOCX or Attach as PDF. When one of the two latter options is selected, you also need to specify the File name for attachments and enter the Message (the text of your letter that will be sent to recipients). Click the Send button. Once the mailing is over you'll receive a notification to your email specified in the From field." + }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/ViewDocInfo.htm", + "title": "View document information", + "body": "To access the detailed information about the currently edited document, click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Document Info... option. General Information The document information includes a number of the file properties which describe the document. Some of these properties are updated automatically, and some of them can be edited. Location - the folder in the Documents module where the file is stored. Owner - the name of the user who have created the file. Uploaded - the date and time when the file has been created. These properties are available in the online version only. Statistics - the number of pages, paragraphs, words, symbols, symbols with spaces. Title, Subject, Comment - these properties allow to simplify your documents classification. You can specify the necessary text in the properties fields. Last Modified - the date and time when the file was last modified. Last Modified By - the name of the user who have made the latest change in the document if a document has been shared and it can be edited by several users. Application - the application the document was created with. Author - the person who have created the file. You can enter the necessary name in this field. Press Enter to add a new field that allows to specify one more author. If you changed the file properties, click the Apply button to apply the changes. Note: Online Editors allow you to change the document name directly from the editor interface. To do that, click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Rename... option, then enter the necessary File name in a new window that opens and click OK. Permission Information In the online version, you can view the information about permissions to the files stored in the cloud. Note: this option is not available for users with the Read Only permissions. To find out, who have rights to view or edit the document, select the Access Rights... option at the left sidebar. You can also change currently selected access rights by pressing the Change access rights button in the Persons who have rights section. Version History In the online version, you can view the version history for the files stored in the cloud. Note: this option is not available for users with the Read Only permissions. To view all the changes made to this document, select the Version History option at the left sidebar. It's also possible to open the history of versions using the Version History icon at the Collaboration tab of the top toolbar. You'll see the list of this document versions (major changes) and revisions (minor changes) with the indication of each version/revision author and creation date and time. For document versions, the version number is also specified (e.g. ver. 2). To know exactly which changes have been made in each separate version/revision, you can view the one you need by clicking it at the left sidebar. The changes made by the version/revision author are marked with the color which is displayed next to the author name on the left sidebar. You can use the Restore link below the selected version/revision to restore it. To return to the document current version, use the Close History option on the top of the version list. To close the File panel and return to document editing, select the Close Menu option." + } +] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/search/js/jquery.min.js b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/search/js/jquery.min.js new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9a85bd346 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/it/search/js/jquery.min.js @@ -0,0 +1,6 @@ +/*! jQuery v2.0.3 | (c) 2005, 2013 jQuery Foundation, Inc. | jquery.org/license +//@ sourceMappingURL=jquery.min.map +*/ +(function(e,undefined){var t,n,r=typeof undefined,i=e.location,o=e.document,s=o.documentElement,a=e.jQuery,u=e.$,l={},c=[],p="2.0.3",f=c.concat,h=c.push,d=c.slice,g=c.indexOf,m=l.toString,y=l.hasOwnProperty,v=p.trim,x=function(e,n){return new x.fn.init(e,n,t)},b=/[+-]?(?:\d*\.|)\d+(?:[eE][+-]?\d+|)/.source,w=/\S+/g,T=/^(?:\s*(<[\w\W]+>)[^>]*|#([\w-]*))$/,C=/^<(\w+)\s*\/?>(?:<\/\1>|)$/,k=/^-ms-/,N=/-([\da-z])/gi,E=function(e,t){return t.toUpperCase()},S=function(){o.removeEventListener("DOMContentLoaded",S,!1),e.removeEventListener("load",S,!1),x.ready()};x.fn=x.prototype={jquery:p,constructor:x,init:function(e,t,n){var r,i;if(!e)return this;if("string"==typeof e){if(r="<"===e.charAt(0)&&">"===e.charAt(e.length-1)&&e.length>=3?[null,e,null]:T.exec(e),!r||!r[1]&&t)return!t||t.jquery?(t||n).find(e):this.constructor(t).find(e);if(r[1]){if(t=t instanceof x?t[0]:t,x.merge(this,x.parseHTML(r[1],t&&t.nodeType?t.ownerDocument||t:o,!0)),C.test(r[1])&&x.isPlainObject(t))for(r in t)x.isFunction(this[r])?this[r](t[r]):this.attr(r,t[r]);return this}return i=o.getElementById(r[2]),i&&i.parentNode&&(this.length=1,this[0]=i),this.context=o,this.selector=e,this}return e.nodeType?(this.context=this[0]=e,this.length=1,this):x.isFunction(e)?n.ready(e):(e.selector!==undefined&&(this.selector=e.selector,this.context=e.context),x.makeArray(e,this))},selector:"",length:0,toArray:function(){return d.call(this)},get:function(e){return null==e?this.toArray():0>e?this[this.length+e]:this[e]},pushStack:function(e){var t=x.merge(this.constructor(),e);return t.prevObject=this,t.context=this.context,t},each:function(e,t){return x.each(this,e,t)},ready:function(e){return x.ready.promise().done(e),this},slice:function(){return this.pushStack(d.apply(this,arguments))},first:function(){return this.eq(0)},last:function(){return this.eq(-1)},eq:function(e){var t=this.length,n=+e+(0>e?t:0);return this.pushStack(n>=0&&t>n?[this[n]]:[])},map:function(e){return this.pushStack(x.map(this,function(t,n){return e.call(t,n,t)}))},end:function(){return this.prevObject||this.constructor(null)},push:h,sort:[].sort,splice:[].splice},x.fn.init.prototype=x.fn,x.extend=x.fn.extend=function(){var e,t,n,r,i,o,s=arguments[0]||{},a=1,u=arguments.length,l=!1;for("boolean"==typeof s&&(l=s,s=arguments[1]||{},a=2),"object"==typeof s||x.isFunction(s)||(s={}),u===a&&(s=this,--a);u>a;a++)if(null!=(e=arguments[a]))for(t in e)n=s[t],r=e[t],s!==r&&(l&&r&&(x.isPlainObject(r)||(i=x.isArray(r)))?(i?(i=!1,o=n&&x.isArray(n)?n:[]):o=n&&x.isPlainObject(n)?n:{},s[t]=x.extend(l,o,r)):r!==undefined&&(s[t]=r));return s},x.extend({expando:"jQuery"+(p+Math.random()).replace(/\D/g,""),noConflict:function(t){return e.$===x&&(e.$=u),t&&e.jQuery===x&&(e.jQuery=a),x},isReady:!1,readyWait:1,holdReady:function(e){e?x.readyWait++:x.ready(!0)},ready:function(e){(e===!0?--x.readyWait:x.isReady)||(x.isReady=!0,e!==!0&&--x.readyWait>0||(n.resolveWith(o,[x]),x.fn.trigger&&x(o).trigger("ready").off("ready")))},isFunction:function(e){return"function"===x.type(e)},isArray:Array.isArray,isWindow:function(e){return null!=e&&e===e.window},isNumeric:function(e){return!isNaN(parseFloat(e))&&isFinite(e)},type:function(e){return null==e?e+"":"object"==typeof e||"function"==typeof e?l[m.call(e)]||"object":typeof e},isPlainObject:function(e){if("object"!==x.type(e)||e.nodeType||x.isWindow(e))return!1;try{if(e.constructor&&!y.call(e.constructor.prototype,"isPrototypeOf"))return!1}catch(t){return!1}return!0},isEmptyObject:function(e){var t;for(t in e)return!1;return!0},error:function(e){throw Error(e)},parseHTML:function(e,t,n){if(!e||"string"!=typeof e)return null;"boolean"==typeof t&&(n=t,t=!1),t=t||o;var r=C.exec(e),i=!n&&[];return r?[t.createElement(r[1])]:(r=x.buildFragment([e],t,i),i&&x(i).remove(),x.merge([],r.childNodes))},parseJSON:JSON.parse,parseXML:function(e){var t,n;if(!e||"string"!=typeof e)return null;try{n=new DOMParser,t=n.parseFromString(e,"text/xml")}catch(r){t=undefined}return(!t||t.getElementsByTagName("parsererror").length)&&x.error("Invalid XML: "+e),t},noop:function(){},globalEval:function(e){var t,n=eval;e=x.trim(e),e&&(1===e.indexOf("use strict")?(t=o.createElement("script"),t.text=e,o.head.appendChild(t).parentNode.removeChild(t)):n(e))},camelCase:function(e){return e.replace(k,"ms-").replace(N,E)},nodeName:function(e,t){return e.nodeName&&e.nodeName.toLowerCase()===t.toLowerCase()},each:function(e,t,n){var r,i=0,o=e.length,s=j(e);if(n){if(s){for(;o>i;i++)if(r=t.apply(e[i],n),r===!1)break}else for(i in e)if(r=t.apply(e[i],n),r===!1)break}else if(s){for(;o>i;i++)if(r=t.call(e[i],i,e[i]),r===!1)break}else for(i in e)if(r=t.call(e[i],i,e[i]),r===!1)break;return e},trim:function(e){return null==e?"":v.call(e)},makeArray:function(e,t){var n=t||[];return null!=e&&(j(Object(e))?x.merge(n,"string"==typeof e?[e]:e):h.call(n,e)),n},inArray:function(e,t,n){return null==t?-1:g.call(t,e,n)},merge:function(e,t){var n=t.length,r=e.length,i=0;if("number"==typeof n)for(;n>i;i++)e[r++]=t[i];else while(t[i]!==undefined)e[r++]=t[i++];return e.length=r,e},grep:function(e,t,n){var r,i=[],o=0,s=e.length;for(n=!!n;s>o;o++)r=!!t(e[o],o),n!==r&&i.push(e[o]);return i},map:function(e,t,n){var r,i=0,o=e.length,s=j(e),a=[];if(s)for(;o>i;i++)r=t(e[i],i,n),null!=r&&(a[a.length]=r);else for(i in e)r=t(e[i],i,n),null!=r&&(a[a.length]=r);return f.apply([],a)},guid:1,proxy:function(e,t){var n,r,i;return"string"==typeof t&&(n=e[t],t=e,e=n),x.isFunction(e)?(r=d.call(arguments,2),i=function(){return e.apply(t||this,r.concat(d.call(arguments)))},i.guid=e.guid=e.guid||x.guid++,i):undefined},access:function(e,t,n,r,i,o,s){var a=0,u=e.length,l=null==n;if("object"===x.type(n)){i=!0;for(a in n)x.access(e,t,a,n[a],!0,o,s)}else if(r!==undefined&&(i=!0,x.isFunction(r)||(s=!0),l&&(s?(t.call(e,r),t=null):(l=t,t=function(e,t,n){return l.call(x(e),n)})),t))for(;u>a;a++)t(e[a],n,s?r:r.call(e[a],a,t(e[a],n)));return i?e:l?t.call(e):u?t(e[0],n):o},now:Date.now,swap:function(e,t,n,r){var i,o,s={};for(o in t)s[o]=e.style[o],e.style[o]=t[o];i=n.apply(e,r||[]);for(o in t)e.style[o]=s[o];return i}}),x.ready.promise=function(t){return n||(n=x.Deferred(),"complete"===o.readyState?setTimeout(x.ready):(o.addEventListener("DOMContentLoaded",S,!1),e.addEventListener("load",S,!1))),n.promise(t)},x.each("Boolean Number String Function Array Date RegExp Object Error".split(" "),function(e,t){l["[object "+t+"]"]=t.toLowerCase()});function j(e){var t=e.length,n=x.type(e);return x.isWindow(e)?!1:1===e.nodeType&&t?!0:"array"===n||"function"!==n&&(0===t||"number"==typeof t&&t>0&&t-1 in e)}t=x(o),function(e,undefined){var t,n,r,i,o,s,a,u,l,c,p,f,h,d,g,m,y,v="sizzle"+-new Date,b=e.document,w=0,T=0,C=st(),k=st(),N=st(),E=!1,S=function(e,t){return e===t?(E=!0,0):0},j=typeof undefined,D=1<<31,A={}.hasOwnProperty,L=[],q=L.pop,H=L.push,O=L.push,F=L.slice,P=L.indexOf||function(e){var t=0,n=this.length;for(;n>t;t++)if(this[t]===e)return t;return-1},R="checked|selected|async|autofocus|autoplay|controls|defer|disabled|hidden|ismap|loop|multiple|open|readonly|required|scoped",M="[\\x20\\t\\r\\n\\f]",W="(?:\\\\.|[\\w-]|[^\\x00-\\xa0])+",$=W.replace("w","w#"),B="\\["+M+"*("+W+")"+M+"*(?:([*^$|!~]?=)"+M+"*(?:(['\"])((?:\\\\.|[^\\\\])*?)\\3|("+$+")|)|)"+M+"*\\]",I=":("+W+")(?:\\(((['\"])((?:\\\\.|[^\\\\])*?)\\3|((?:\\\\.|[^\\\\()[\\]]|"+B.replace(3,8)+")*)|.*)\\)|)",z=RegExp("^"+M+"+|((?:^|[^\\\\])(?:\\\\.)*)"+M+"+$","g"),_=RegExp("^"+M+"*,"+M+"*"),X=RegExp("^"+M+"*([>+~]|"+M+")"+M+"*"),U=RegExp(M+"*[+~]"),Y=RegExp("="+M+"*([^\\]'\"]*)"+M+"*\\]","g"),V=RegExp(I),G=RegExp("^"+$+"$"),J={ID:RegExp("^#("+W+")"),CLASS:RegExp("^\\.("+W+")"),TAG:RegExp("^("+W.replace("w","w*")+")"),ATTR:RegExp("^"+B),PSEUDO:RegExp("^"+I),CHILD:RegExp("^:(only|first|last|nth|nth-last)-(child|of-type)(?:\\("+M+"*(even|odd|(([+-]|)(\\d*)n|)"+M+"*(?:([+-]|)"+M+"*(\\d+)|))"+M+"*\\)|)","i"),bool:RegExp("^(?:"+R+")$","i"),needsContext:RegExp("^"+M+"*[>+~]|:(even|odd|eq|gt|lt|nth|first|last)(?:\\("+M+"*((?:-\\d)?\\d*)"+M+"*\\)|)(?=[^-]|$)","i")},Q=/^[^{]+\{\s*\[native \w/,K=/^(?:#([\w-]+)|(\w+)|\.([\w-]+))$/,Z=/^(?:input|select|textarea|button)$/i,et=/^h\d$/i,tt=/'|\\/g,nt=RegExp("\\\\([\\da-f]{1,6}"+M+"?|("+M+")|.)","ig"),rt=function(e,t,n){var r="0x"+t-65536;return r!==r||n?t:0>r?String.fromCharCode(r+65536):String.fromCharCode(55296|r>>10,56320|1023&r)};try{O.apply(L=F.call(b.childNodes),b.childNodes),L[b.childNodes.length].nodeType}catch(it){O={apply:L.length?function(e,t){H.apply(e,F.call(t))}:function(e,t){var n=e.length,r=0;while(e[n++]=t[r++]);e.length=n-1}}}function ot(e,t,r,i){var o,s,a,u,l,f,g,m,x,w;if((t?t.ownerDocument||t:b)!==p&&c(t),t=t||p,r=r||[],!e||"string"!=typeof e)return r;if(1!==(u=t.nodeType)&&9!==u)return[];if(h&&!i){if(o=K.exec(e))if(a=o[1]){if(9===u){if(s=t.getElementById(a),!s||!s.parentNode)return r;if(s.id===a)return r.push(s),r}else if(t.ownerDocument&&(s=t.ownerDocument.getElementById(a))&&y(t,s)&&s.id===a)return r.push(s),r}else{if(o[2])return O.apply(r,t.getElementsByTagName(e)),r;if((a=o[3])&&n.getElementsByClassName&&t.getElementsByClassName)return O.apply(r,t.getElementsByClassName(a)),r}if(n.qsa&&(!d||!d.test(e))){if(m=g=v,x=t,w=9===u&&e,1===u&&"object"!==t.nodeName.toLowerCase()){f=gt(e),(g=t.getAttribute("id"))?m=g.replace(tt,"\\$&"):t.setAttribute("id",m),m="[id='"+m+"'] ",l=f.length;while(l--)f[l]=m+mt(f[l]);x=U.test(e)&&t.parentNode||t,w=f.join(",")}if(w)try{return O.apply(r,x.querySelectorAll(w)),r}catch(T){}finally{g||t.removeAttribute("id")}}}return kt(e.replace(z,"$1"),t,r,i)}function st(){var e=[];function t(n,r){return e.push(n+=" ")>i.cacheLength&&delete t[e.shift()],t[n]=r}return t}function at(e){return e[v]=!0,e}function ut(e){var t=p.createElement("div");try{return!!e(t)}catch(n){return!1}finally{t.parentNode&&t.parentNode.removeChild(t),t=null}}function lt(e,t){var n=e.split("|"),r=e.length;while(r--)i.attrHandle[n[r]]=t}function ct(e,t){var n=t&&e,r=n&&1===e.nodeType&&1===t.nodeType&&(~t.sourceIndex||D)-(~e.sourceIndex||D);if(r)return r;if(n)while(n=n.nextSibling)if(n===t)return-1;return e?1:-1}function pt(e){return function(t){var n=t.nodeName.toLowerCase();return"input"===n&&t.type===e}}function ft(e){return function(t){var n=t.nodeName.toLowerCase();return("input"===n||"button"===n)&&t.type===e}}function ht(e){return at(function(t){return t=+t,at(function(n,r){var i,o=e([],n.length,t),s=o.length;while(s--)n[i=o[s]]&&(n[i]=!(r[i]=n[i]))})})}s=ot.isXML=function(e){var t=e&&(e.ownerDocument||e).documentElement;return t?"HTML"!==t.nodeName:!1},n=ot.support={},c=ot.setDocument=function(e){var t=e?e.ownerDocument||e:b,r=t.defaultView;return t!==p&&9===t.nodeType&&t.documentElement?(p=t,f=t.documentElement,h=!s(t),r&&r.attachEvent&&r!==r.top&&r.attachEvent("onbeforeunload",function(){c()}),n.attributes=ut(function(e){return e.className="i",!e.getAttribute("className")}),n.getElementsByTagName=ut(function(e){return e.appendChild(t.createComment("")),!e.getElementsByTagName("*").length}),n.getElementsByClassName=ut(function(e){return e.innerHTML="
                                                              ",e.firstChild.className="i",2===e.getElementsByClassName("i").length}),n.getById=ut(function(e){return f.appendChild(e).id=v,!t.getElementsByName||!t.getElementsByName(v).length}),n.getById?(i.find.ID=function(e,t){if(typeof t.getElementById!==j&&h){var n=t.getElementById(e);return n&&n.parentNode?[n]:[]}},i.filter.ID=function(e){var t=e.replace(nt,rt);return function(e){return e.getAttribute("id")===t}}):(delete i.find.ID,i.filter.ID=function(e){var t=e.replace(nt,rt);return function(e){var n=typeof e.getAttributeNode!==j&&e.getAttributeNode("id");return n&&n.value===t}}),i.find.TAG=n.getElementsByTagName?function(e,t){return typeof t.getElementsByTagName!==j?t.getElementsByTagName(e):undefined}:function(e,t){var n,r=[],i=0,o=t.getElementsByTagName(e);if("*"===e){while(n=o[i++])1===n.nodeType&&r.push(n);return r}return o},i.find.CLASS=n.getElementsByClassName&&function(e,t){return typeof t.getElementsByClassName!==j&&h?t.getElementsByClassName(e):undefined},g=[],d=[],(n.qsa=Q.test(t.querySelectorAll))&&(ut(function(e){e.innerHTML="",e.querySelectorAll("[selected]").length||d.push("\\["+M+"*(?:value|"+R+")"),e.querySelectorAll(":checked").length||d.push(":checked")}),ut(function(e){var n=t.createElement("input");n.setAttribute("type","hidden"),e.appendChild(n).setAttribute("t",""),e.querySelectorAll("[t^='']").length&&d.push("[*^$]="+M+"*(?:''|\"\")"),e.querySelectorAll(":enabled").length||d.push(":enabled",":disabled"),e.querySelectorAll("*,:x"),d.push(",.*:")})),(n.matchesSelector=Q.test(m=f.webkitMatchesSelector||f.mozMatchesSelector||f.oMatchesSelector||f.msMatchesSelector))&&ut(function(e){n.disconnectedMatch=m.call(e,"div"),m.call(e,"[s!='']:x"),g.push("!=",I)}),d=d.length&&RegExp(d.join("|")),g=g.length&&RegExp(g.join("|")),y=Q.test(f.contains)||f.compareDocumentPosition?function(e,t){var n=9===e.nodeType?e.documentElement:e,r=t&&t.parentNode;return e===r||!(!r||1!==r.nodeType||!(n.contains?n.contains(r):e.compareDocumentPosition&&16&e.compareDocumentPosition(r)))}:function(e,t){if(t)while(t=t.parentNode)if(t===e)return!0;return!1},S=f.compareDocumentPosition?function(e,r){if(e===r)return E=!0,0;var i=r.compareDocumentPosition&&e.compareDocumentPosition&&e.compareDocumentPosition(r);return i?1&i||!n.sortDetached&&r.compareDocumentPosition(e)===i?e===t||y(b,e)?-1:r===t||y(b,r)?1:l?P.call(l,e)-P.call(l,r):0:4&i?-1:1:e.compareDocumentPosition?-1:1}:function(e,n){var r,i=0,o=e.parentNode,s=n.parentNode,a=[e],u=[n];if(e===n)return E=!0,0;if(!o||!s)return e===t?-1:n===t?1:o?-1:s?1:l?P.call(l,e)-P.call(l,n):0;if(o===s)return ct(e,n);r=e;while(r=r.parentNode)a.unshift(r);r=n;while(r=r.parentNode)u.unshift(r);while(a[i]===u[i])i++;return i?ct(a[i],u[i]):a[i]===b?-1:u[i]===b?1:0},t):p},ot.matches=function(e,t){return ot(e,null,null,t)},ot.matchesSelector=function(e,t){if((e.ownerDocument||e)!==p&&c(e),t=t.replace(Y,"='$1']"),!(!n.matchesSelector||!h||g&&g.test(t)||d&&d.test(t)))try{var r=m.call(e,t);if(r||n.disconnectedMatch||e.document&&11!==e.document.nodeType)return r}catch(i){}return ot(t,p,null,[e]).length>0},ot.contains=function(e,t){return(e.ownerDocument||e)!==p&&c(e),y(e,t)},ot.attr=function(e,t){(e.ownerDocument||e)!==p&&c(e);var r=i.attrHandle[t.toLowerCase()],o=r&&A.call(i.attrHandle,t.toLowerCase())?r(e,t,!h):undefined;return o===undefined?n.attributes||!h?e.getAttribute(t):(o=e.getAttributeNode(t))&&o.specified?o.value:null:o},ot.error=function(e){throw Error("Syntax error, unrecognized expression: "+e)},ot.uniqueSort=function(e){var t,r=[],i=0,o=0;if(E=!n.detectDuplicates,l=!n.sortStable&&e.slice(0),e.sort(S),E){while(t=e[o++])t===e[o]&&(i=r.push(o));while(i--)e.splice(r[i],1)}return e},o=ot.getText=function(e){var t,n="",r=0,i=e.nodeType;if(i){if(1===i||9===i||11===i){if("string"==typeof e.textContent)return e.textContent;for(e=e.firstChild;e;e=e.nextSibling)n+=o(e)}else if(3===i||4===i)return e.nodeValue}else for(;t=e[r];r++)n+=o(t);return n},i=ot.selectors={cacheLength:50,createPseudo:at,match:J,attrHandle:{},find:{},relative:{">":{dir:"parentNode",first:!0}," ":{dir:"parentNode"},"+":{dir:"previousSibling",first:!0},"~":{dir:"previousSibling"}},preFilter:{ATTR:function(e){return e[1]=e[1].replace(nt,rt),e[3]=(e[4]||e[5]||"").replace(nt,rt),"~="===e[2]&&(e[3]=" "+e[3]+" "),e.slice(0,4)},CHILD:function(e){return e[1]=e[1].toLowerCase(),"nth"===e[1].slice(0,3)?(e[3]||ot.error(e[0]),e[4]=+(e[4]?e[5]+(e[6]||1):2*("even"===e[3]||"odd"===e[3])),e[5]=+(e[7]+e[8]||"odd"===e[3])):e[3]&&ot.error(e[0]),e},PSEUDO:function(e){var t,n=!e[5]&&e[2];return J.CHILD.test(e[0])?null:(e[3]&&e[4]!==undefined?e[2]=e[4]:n&&V.test(n)&&(t=gt(n,!0))&&(t=n.indexOf(")",n.length-t)-n.length)&&(e[0]=e[0].slice(0,t),e[2]=n.slice(0,t)),e.slice(0,3))}},filter:{TAG:function(e){var t=e.replace(nt,rt).toLowerCase();return"*"===e?function(){return!0}:function(e){return e.nodeName&&e.nodeName.toLowerCase()===t}},CLASS:function(e){var t=C[e+" "];return t||(t=RegExp("(^|"+M+")"+e+"("+M+"|$)"))&&C(e,function(e){return t.test("string"==typeof e.className&&e.className||typeof e.getAttribute!==j&&e.getAttribute("class")||"")})},ATTR:function(e,t,n){return function(r){var i=ot.attr(r,e);return null==i?"!="===t:t?(i+="","="===t?i===n:"!="===t?i!==n:"^="===t?n&&0===i.indexOf(n):"*="===t?n&&i.indexOf(n)>-1:"$="===t?n&&i.slice(-n.length)===n:"~="===t?(" "+i+" ").indexOf(n)>-1:"|="===t?i===n||i.slice(0,n.length+1)===n+"-":!1):!0}},CHILD:function(e,t,n,r,i){var o="nth"!==e.slice(0,3),s="last"!==e.slice(-4),a="of-type"===t;return 1===r&&0===i?function(e){return!!e.parentNode}:function(t,n,u){var l,c,p,f,h,d,g=o!==s?"nextSibling":"previousSibling",m=t.parentNode,y=a&&t.nodeName.toLowerCase(),x=!u&&!a;if(m){if(o){while(g){p=t;while(p=p[g])if(a?p.nodeName.toLowerCase()===y:1===p.nodeType)return!1;d=g="only"===e&&!d&&"nextSibling"}return!0}if(d=[s?m.firstChild:m.lastChild],s&&x){c=m[v]||(m[v]={}),l=c[e]||[],h=l[0]===w&&l[1],f=l[0]===w&&l[2],p=h&&m.childNodes[h];while(p=++h&&p&&p[g]||(f=h=0)||d.pop())if(1===p.nodeType&&++f&&p===t){c[e]=[w,h,f];break}}else if(x&&(l=(t[v]||(t[v]={}))[e])&&l[0]===w)f=l[1];else while(p=++h&&p&&p[g]||(f=h=0)||d.pop())if((a?p.nodeName.toLowerCase()===y:1===p.nodeType)&&++f&&(x&&((p[v]||(p[v]={}))[e]=[w,f]),p===t))break;return f-=i,f===r||0===f%r&&f/r>=0}}},PSEUDO:function(e,t){var n,r=i.pseudos[e]||i.setFilters[e.toLowerCase()]||ot.error("unsupported pseudo: "+e);return r[v]?r(t):r.length>1?(n=[e,e,"",t],i.setFilters.hasOwnProperty(e.toLowerCase())?at(function(e,n){var i,o=r(e,t),s=o.length;while(s--)i=P.call(e,o[s]),e[i]=!(n[i]=o[s])}):function(e){return r(e,0,n)}):r}},pseudos:{not:at(function(e){var t=[],n=[],r=a(e.replace(z,"$1"));return r[v]?at(function(e,t,n,i){var o,s=r(e,null,i,[]),a=e.length;while(a--)(o=s[a])&&(e[a]=!(t[a]=o))}):function(e,i,o){return t[0]=e,r(t,null,o,n),!n.pop()}}),has:at(function(e){return function(t){return ot(e,t).length>0}}),contains:at(function(e){return function(t){return(t.textContent||t.innerText||o(t)).indexOf(e)>-1}}),lang:at(function(e){return G.test(e||"")||ot.error("unsupported lang: "+e),e=e.replace(nt,rt).toLowerCase(),function(t){var n;do if(n=h?t.lang:t.getAttribute("xml:lang")||t.getAttribute("lang"))return n=n.toLowerCase(),n===e||0===n.indexOf(e+"-");while((t=t.parentNode)&&1===t.nodeType);return!1}}),target:function(t){var n=e.location&&e.location.hash;return n&&n.slice(1)===t.id},root:function(e){return e===f},focus:function(e){return e===p.activeElement&&(!p.hasFocus||p.hasFocus())&&!!(e.type||e.href||~e.tabIndex)},enabled:function(e){return e.disabled===!1},disabled:function(e){return e.disabled===!0},checked:function(e){var t=e.nodeName.toLowerCase();return"input"===t&&!!e.checked||"option"===t&&!!e.selected},selected:function(e){return e.parentNode&&e.parentNode.selectedIndex,e.selected===!0},empty:function(e){for(e=e.firstChild;e;e=e.nextSibling)if(e.nodeName>"@"||3===e.nodeType||4===e.nodeType)return!1;return!0},parent:function(e){return!i.pseudos.empty(e)},header:function(e){return et.test(e.nodeName)},input:function(e){return Z.test(e.nodeName)},button:function(e){var t=e.nodeName.toLowerCase();return"input"===t&&"button"===e.type||"button"===t},text:function(e){var t;return"input"===e.nodeName.toLowerCase()&&"text"===e.type&&(null==(t=e.getAttribute("type"))||t.toLowerCase()===e.type)},first:ht(function(){return[0]}),last:ht(function(e,t){return[t-1]}),eq:ht(function(e,t,n){return[0>n?n+t:n]}),even:ht(function(e,t){var n=0;for(;t>n;n+=2)e.push(n);return e}),odd:ht(function(e,t){var n=1;for(;t>n;n+=2)e.push(n);return e}),lt:ht(function(e,t,n){var r=0>n?n+t:n;for(;--r>=0;)e.push(r);return e}),gt:ht(function(e,t,n){var r=0>n?n+t:n;for(;t>++r;)e.push(r);return e})}},i.pseudos.nth=i.pseudos.eq;for(t in{radio:!0,checkbox:!0,file:!0,password:!0,image:!0})i.pseudos[t]=pt(t);for(t in{submit:!0,reset:!0})i.pseudos[t]=ft(t);function dt(){}dt.prototype=i.filters=i.pseudos,i.setFilters=new dt;function gt(e,t){var n,r,o,s,a,u,l,c=k[e+" "];if(c)return t?0:c.slice(0);a=e,u=[],l=i.preFilter;while(a){(!n||(r=_.exec(a)))&&(r&&(a=a.slice(r[0].length)||a),u.push(o=[])),n=!1,(r=X.exec(a))&&(n=r.shift(),o.push({value:n,type:r[0].replace(z," ")}),a=a.slice(n.length));for(s in i.filter)!(r=J[s].exec(a))||l[s]&&!(r=l[s](r))||(n=r.shift(),o.push({value:n,type:s,matches:r}),a=a.slice(n.length));if(!n)break}return t?a.length:a?ot.error(e):k(e,u).slice(0)}function mt(e){var t=0,n=e.length,r="";for(;n>t;t++)r+=e[t].value;return r}function yt(e,t,n){var i=t.dir,o=n&&"parentNode"===i,s=T++;return t.first?function(t,n,r){while(t=t[i])if(1===t.nodeType||o)return e(t,n,r)}:function(t,n,a){var u,l,c,p=w+" "+s;if(a){while(t=t[i])if((1===t.nodeType||o)&&e(t,n,a))return!0}else while(t=t[i])if(1===t.nodeType||o)if(c=t[v]||(t[v]={}),(l=c[i])&&l[0]===p){if((u=l[1])===!0||u===r)return u===!0}else if(l=c[i]=[p],l[1]=e(t,n,a)||r,l[1]===!0)return!0}}function vt(e){return e.length>1?function(t,n,r){var i=e.length;while(i--)if(!e[i](t,n,r))return!1;return!0}:e[0]}function xt(e,t,n,r,i){var o,s=[],a=0,u=e.length,l=null!=t;for(;u>a;a++)(o=e[a])&&(!n||n(o,r,i))&&(s.push(o),l&&t.push(a));return s}function bt(e,t,n,r,i,o){return r&&!r[v]&&(r=bt(r)),i&&!i[v]&&(i=bt(i,o)),at(function(o,s,a,u){var l,c,p,f=[],h=[],d=s.length,g=o||Ct(t||"*",a.nodeType?[a]:a,[]),m=!e||!o&&t?g:xt(g,f,e,a,u),y=n?i||(o?e:d||r)?[]:s:m;if(n&&n(m,y,a,u),r){l=xt(y,h),r(l,[],a,u),c=l.length;while(c--)(p=l[c])&&(y[h[c]]=!(m[h[c]]=p))}if(o){if(i||e){if(i){l=[],c=y.length;while(c--)(p=y[c])&&l.push(m[c]=p);i(null,y=[],l,u)}c=y.length;while(c--)(p=y[c])&&(l=i?P.call(o,p):f[c])>-1&&(o[l]=!(s[l]=p))}}else y=xt(y===s?y.splice(d,y.length):y),i?i(null,s,y,u):O.apply(s,y)})}function wt(e){var t,n,r,o=e.length,s=i.relative[e[0].type],a=s||i.relative[" "],l=s?1:0,c=yt(function(e){return e===t},a,!0),p=yt(function(e){return P.call(t,e)>-1},a,!0),f=[function(e,n,r){return!s&&(r||n!==u)||((t=n).nodeType?c(e,n,r):p(e,n,r))}];for(;o>l;l++)if(n=i.relative[e[l].type])f=[yt(vt(f),n)];else{if(n=i.filter[e[l].type].apply(null,e[l].matches),n[v]){for(r=++l;o>r;r++)if(i.relative[e[r].type])break;return bt(l>1&&vt(f),l>1&&mt(e.slice(0,l-1).concat({value:" "===e[l-2].type?"*":""})).replace(z,"$1"),n,r>l&&wt(e.slice(l,r)),o>r&&wt(e=e.slice(r)),o>r&&mt(e))}f.push(n)}return vt(f)}function Tt(e,t){var n=0,o=t.length>0,s=e.length>0,a=function(a,l,c,f,h){var d,g,m,y=[],v=0,x="0",b=a&&[],T=null!=h,C=u,k=a||s&&i.find.TAG("*",h&&l.parentNode||l),N=w+=null==C?1:Math.random()||.1;for(T&&(u=l!==p&&l,r=n);null!=(d=k[x]);x++){if(s&&d){g=0;while(m=e[g++])if(m(d,l,c)){f.push(d);break}T&&(w=N,r=++n)}o&&((d=!m&&d)&&v--,a&&b.push(d))}if(v+=x,o&&x!==v){g=0;while(m=t[g++])m(b,y,l,c);if(a){if(v>0)while(x--)b[x]||y[x]||(y[x]=q.call(f));y=xt(y)}O.apply(f,y),T&&!a&&y.length>0&&v+t.length>1&&ot.uniqueSort(f)}return T&&(w=N,u=C),b};return o?at(a):a}a=ot.compile=function(e,t){var n,r=[],i=[],o=N[e+" "];if(!o){t||(t=gt(e)),n=t.length;while(n--)o=wt(t[n]),o[v]?r.push(o):i.push(o);o=N(e,Tt(i,r))}return o};function Ct(e,t,n){var r=0,i=t.length;for(;i>r;r++)ot(e,t[r],n);return n}function kt(e,t,r,o){var s,u,l,c,p,f=gt(e);if(!o&&1===f.length){if(u=f[0]=f[0].slice(0),u.length>2&&"ID"===(l=u[0]).type&&n.getById&&9===t.nodeType&&h&&i.relative[u[1].type]){if(t=(i.find.ID(l.matches[0].replace(nt,rt),t)||[])[0],!t)return r;e=e.slice(u.shift().value.length)}s=J.needsContext.test(e)?0:u.length;while(s--){if(l=u[s],i.relative[c=l.type])break;if((p=i.find[c])&&(o=p(l.matches[0].replace(nt,rt),U.test(u[0].type)&&t.parentNode||t))){if(u.splice(s,1),e=o.length&&mt(u),!e)return O.apply(r,o),r;break}}}return a(e,f)(o,t,!h,r,U.test(e)),r}n.sortStable=v.split("").sort(S).join("")===v,n.detectDuplicates=E,c(),n.sortDetached=ut(function(e){return 1&e.compareDocumentPosition(p.createElement("div"))}),ut(function(e){return e.innerHTML="","#"===e.firstChild.getAttribute("href")})||lt("type|href|height|width",function(e,t,n){return n?undefined:e.getAttribute(t,"type"===t.toLowerCase()?1:2)}),n.attributes&&ut(function(e){return e.innerHTML="",e.firstChild.setAttribute("value",""),""===e.firstChild.getAttribute("value")})||lt("value",function(e,t,n){return n||"input"!==e.nodeName.toLowerCase()?undefined:e.defaultValue}),ut(function(e){return null==e.getAttribute("disabled")})||lt(R,function(e,t,n){var r;return n?undefined:(r=e.getAttributeNode(t))&&r.specified?r.value:e[t]===!0?t.toLowerCase():null}),x.find=ot,x.expr=ot.selectors,x.expr[":"]=x.expr.pseudos,x.unique=ot.uniqueSort,x.text=ot.getText,x.isXMLDoc=ot.isXML,x.contains=ot.contains}(e);var D={};function A(e){var t=D[e]={};return x.each(e.match(w)||[],function(e,n){t[n]=!0}),t}x.Callbacks=function(e){e="string"==typeof e?D[e]||A(e):x.extend({},e);var t,n,r,i,o,s,a=[],u=!e.once&&[],l=function(p){for(t=e.memory&&p,n=!0,s=i||0,i=0,o=a.length,r=!0;a&&o>s;s++)if(a[s].apply(p[0],p[1])===!1&&e.stopOnFalse){t=!1;break}r=!1,a&&(u?u.length&&l(u.shift()):t?a=[]:c.disable())},c={add:function(){if(a){var n=a.length;(function s(t){x.each(t,function(t,n){var r=x.type(n);"function"===r?e.unique&&c.has(n)||a.push(n):n&&n.length&&"string"!==r&&s(n)})})(arguments),r?o=a.length:t&&(i=n,l(t))}return this},remove:function(){return a&&x.each(arguments,function(e,t){var n;while((n=x.inArray(t,a,n))>-1)a.splice(n,1),r&&(o>=n&&o--,s>=n&&s--)}),this},has:function(e){return e?x.inArray(e,a)>-1:!(!a||!a.length)},empty:function(){return a=[],o=0,this},disable:function(){return a=u=t=undefined,this},disabled:function(){return!a},lock:function(){return u=undefined,t||c.disable(),this},locked:function(){return!u},fireWith:function(e,t){return!a||n&&!u||(t=t||[],t=[e,t.slice?t.slice():t],r?u.push(t):l(t)),this},fire:function(){return c.fireWith(this,arguments),this},fired:function(){return!!n}};return c},x.extend({Deferred:function(e){var t=[["resolve","done",x.Callbacks("once memory"),"resolved"],["reject","fail",x.Callbacks("once memory"),"rejected"],["notify","progress",x.Callbacks("memory")]],n="pending",r={state:function(){return n},always:function(){return i.done(arguments).fail(arguments),this},then:function(){var e=arguments;return x.Deferred(function(n){x.each(t,function(t,o){var s=o[0],a=x.isFunction(e[t])&&e[t];i[o[1]](function(){var e=a&&a.apply(this,arguments);e&&x.isFunction(e.promise)?e.promise().done(n.resolve).fail(n.reject).progress(n.notify):n[s+"With"](this===r?n.promise():this,a?[e]:arguments)})}),e=null}).promise()},promise:function(e){return null!=e?x.extend(e,r):r}},i={};return r.pipe=r.then,x.each(t,function(e,o){var s=o[2],a=o[3];r[o[1]]=s.add,a&&s.add(function(){n=a},t[1^e][2].disable,t[2][2].lock),i[o[0]]=function(){return i[o[0]+"With"](this===i?r:this,arguments),this},i[o[0]+"With"]=s.fireWith}),r.promise(i),e&&e.call(i,i),i},when:function(e){var t=0,n=d.call(arguments),r=n.length,i=1!==r||e&&x.isFunction(e.promise)?r:0,o=1===i?e:x.Deferred(),s=function(e,t,n){return function(r){t[e]=this,n[e]=arguments.length>1?d.call(arguments):r,n===a?o.notifyWith(t,n):--i||o.resolveWith(t,n)}},a,u,l;if(r>1)for(a=Array(r),u=Array(r),l=Array(r);r>t;t++)n[t]&&x.isFunction(n[t].promise)?n[t].promise().done(s(t,l,n)).fail(o.reject).progress(s(t,u,a)):--i;return i||o.resolveWith(l,n),o.promise()}}),x.support=function(t){var n=o.createElement("input"),r=o.createDocumentFragment(),i=o.createElement("div"),s=o.createElement("select"),a=s.appendChild(o.createElement("option"));return n.type?(n.type="checkbox",t.checkOn=""!==n.value,t.optSelected=a.selected,t.reliableMarginRight=!0,t.boxSizingReliable=!0,t.pixelPosition=!1,n.checked=!0,t.noCloneChecked=n.cloneNode(!0).checked,s.disabled=!0,t.optDisabled=!a.disabled,n=o.createElement("input"),n.value="t",n.type="radio",t.radioValue="t"===n.value,n.setAttribute("checked","t"),n.setAttribute("name","t"),r.appendChild(n),t.checkClone=r.cloneNode(!0).cloneNode(!0).lastChild.checked,t.focusinBubbles="onfocusin"in e,i.style.backgroundClip="content-box",i.cloneNode(!0).style.backgroundClip="",t.clearCloneStyle="content-box"===i.style.backgroundClip,x(function(){var n,r,s="padding:0;margin:0;border:0;display:block;-webkit-box-sizing:content-box;-moz-box-sizing:content-box;box-sizing:content-box",a=o.getElementsByTagName("body")[0];a&&(n=o.createElement("div"),n.style.cssText="border:0;width:0;height:0;position:absolute;top:0;left:-9999px;margin-top:1px",a.appendChild(n).appendChild(i),i.innerHTML="",i.style.cssText="-webkit-box-sizing:border-box;-moz-box-sizing:border-box;box-sizing:border-box;padding:1px;border:1px;display:block;width:4px;margin-top:1%;position:absolute;top:1%",x.swap(a,null!=a.style.zoom?{zoom:1}:{},function(){t.boxSizing=4===i.offsetWidth}),e.getComputedStyle&&(t.pixelPosition="1%"!==(e.getComputedStyle(i,null)||{}).top,t.boxSizingReliable="4px"===(e.getComputedStyle(i,null)||{width:"4px"}).width,r=i.appendChild(o.createElement("div")),r.style.cssText=i.style.cssText=s,r.style.marginRight=r.style.width="0",i.style.width="1px",t.reliableMarginRight=!parseFloat((e.getComputedStyle(r,null)||{}).marginRight)),a.removeChild(n))}),t):t}({});var L,q,H=/(?:\{[\s\S]*\}|\[[\s\S]*\])$/,O=/([A-Z])/g;function F(){Object.defineProperty(this.cache={},0,{get:function(){return{}}}),this.expando=x.expando+Math.random()}F.uid=1,F.accepts=function(e){return e.nodeType?1===e.nodeType||9===e.nodeType:!0},F.prototype={key:function(e){if(!F.accepts(e))return 0;var t={},n=e[this.expando];if(!n){n=F.uid++;try{t[this.expando]={value:n},Object.defineProperties(e,t)}catch(r){t[this.expando]=n,x.extend(e,t)}}return this.cache[n]||(this.cache[n]={}),n},set:function(e,t,n){var r,i=this.key(e),o=this.cache[i];if("string"==typeof t)o[t]=n;else if(x.isEmptyObject(o))x.extend(this.cache[i],t);else for(r in t)o[r]=t[r];return o},get:function(e,t){var n=this.cache[this.key(e)];return t===undefined?n:n[t]},access:function(e,t,n){var r;return t===undefined||t&&"string"==typeof t&&n===undefined?(r=this.get(e,t),r!==undefined?r:this.get(e,x.camelCase(t))):(this.set(e,t,n),n!==undefined?n:t)},remove:function(e,t){var n,r,i,o=this.key(e),s=this.cache[o];if(t===undefined)this.cache[o]={};else{x.isArray(t)?r=t.concat(t.map(x.camelCase)):(i=x.camelCase(t),t in s?r=[t,i]:(r=i,r=r in s?[r]:r.match(w)||[])),n=r.length;while(n--)delete s[r[n]]}},hasData:function(e){return!x.isEmptyObject(this.cache[e[this.expando]]||{})},discard:function(e){e[this.expando]&&delete this.cache[e[this.expando]]}},L=new F,q=new F,x.extend({acceptData:F.accepts,hasData:function(e){return L.hasData(e)||q.hasData(e)},data:function(e,t,n){return L.access(e,t,n)},removeData:function(e,t){L.remove(e,t)},_data:function(e,t,n){return q.access(e,t,n)},_removeData:function(e,t){q.remove(e,t)}}),x.fn.extend({data:function(e,t){var n,r,i=this[0],o=0,s=null;if(e===undefined){if(this.length&&(s=L.get(i),1===i.nodeType&&!q.get(i,"hasDataAttrs"))){for(n=i.attributes;n.length>o;o++)r=n[o].name,0===r.indexOf("data-")&&(r=x.camelCase(r.slice(5)),P(i,r,s[r]));q.set(i,"hasDataAttrs",!0)}return s}return"object"==typeof e?this.each(function(){L.set(this,e)}):x.access(this,function(t){var n,r=x.camelCase(e);if(i&&t===undefined){if(n=L.get(i,e),n!==undefined)return n;if(n=L.get(i,r),n!==undefined)return n;if(n=P(i,r,undefined),n!==undefined)return n}else this.each(function(){var n=L.get(this,r);L.set(this,r,t),-1!==e.indexOf("-")&&n!==undefined&&L.set(this,e,t)})},null,t,arguments.length>1,null,!0)},removeData:function(e){return this.each(function(){L.remove(this,e)})}});function P(e,t,n){var r;if(n===undefined&&1===e.nodeType)if(r="data-"+t.replace(O,"-$1").toLowerCase(),n=e.getAttribute(r),"string"==typeof n){try{n="true"===n?!0:"false"===n?!1:"null"===n?null:+n+""===n?+n:H.test(n)?JSON.parse(n):n}catch(i){}L.set(e,t,n)}else n=undefined;return n}x.extend({queue:function(e,t,n){var r;return e?(t=(t||"fx")+"queue",r=q.get(e,t),n&&(!r||x.isArray(n)?r=q.access(e,t,x.makeArray(n)):r.push(n)),r||[]):undefined},dequeue:function(e,t){t=t||"fx";var n=x.queue(e,t),r=n.length,i=n.shift(),o=x._queueHooks(e,t),s=function(){x.dequeue(e,t) +};"inprogress"===i&&(i=n.shift(),r--),i&&("fx"===t&&n.unshift("inprogress"),delete o.stop,i.call(e,s,o)),!r&&o&&o.empty.fire()},_queueHooks:function(e,t){var n=t+"queueHooks";return q.get(e,n)||q.access(e,n,{empty:x.Callbacks("once memory").add(function(){q.remove(e,[t+"queue",n])})})}}),x.fn.extend({queue:function(e,t){var n=2;return"string"!=typeof e&&(t=e,e="fx",n--),n>arguments.length?x.queue(this[0],e):t===undefined?this:this.each(function(){var n=x.queue(this,e,t);x._queueHooks(this,e),"fx"===e&&"inprogress"!==n[0]&&x.dequeue(this,e)})},dequeue:function(e){return this.each(function(){x.dequeue(this,e)})},delay:function(e,t){return e=x.fx?x.fx.speeds[e]||e:e,t=t||"fx",this.queue(t,function(t,n){var r=setTimeout(t,e);n.stop=function(){clearTimeout(r)}})},clearQueue:function(e){return this.queue(e||"fx",[])},promise:function(e,t){var n,r=1,i=x.Deferred(),o=this,s=this.length,a=function(){--r||i.resolveWith(o,[o])};"string"!=typeof e&&(t=e,e=undefined),e=e||"fx";while(s--)n=q.get(o[s],e+"queueHooks"),n&&n.empty&&(r++,n.empty.add(a));return a(),i.promise(t)}});var R,M,W=/[\t\r\n\f]/g,$=/\r/g,B=/^(?:input|select|textarea|button)$/i;x.fn.extend({attr:function(e,t){return x.access(this,x.attr,e,t,arguments.length>1)},removeAttr:function(e){return this.each(function(){x.removeAttr(this,e)})},prop:function(e,t){return x.access(this,x.prop,e,t,arguments.length>1)},removeProp:function(e){return this.each(function(){delete this[x.propFix[e]||e]})},addClass:function(e){var t,n,r,i,o,s=0,a=this.length,u="string"==typeof e&&e;if(x.isFunction(e))return this.each(function(t){x(this).addClass(e.call(this,t,this.className))});if(u)for(t=(e||"").match(w)||[];a>s;s++)if(n=this[s],r=1===n.nodeType&&(n.className?(" "+n.className+" ").replace(W," "):" ")){o=0;while(i=t[o++])0>r.indexOf(" "+i+" ")&&(r+=i+" ");n.className=x.trim(r)}return this},removeClass:function(e){var t,n,r,i,o,s=0,a=this.length,u=0===arguments.length||"string"==typeof e&&e;if(x.isFunction(e))return this.each(function(t){x(this).removeClass(e.call(this,t,this.className))});if(u)for(t=(e||"").match(w)||[];a>s;s++)if(n=this[s],r=1===n.nodeType&&(n.className?(" "+n.className+" ").replace(W," "):"")){o=0;while(i=t[o++])while(r.indexOf(" "+i+" ")>=0)r=r.replace(" "+i+" "," ");n.className=e?x.trim(r):""}return this},toggleClass:function(e,t){var n=typeof e;return"boolean"==typeof t&&"string"===n?t?this.addClass(e):this.removeClass(e):x.isFunction(e)?this.each(function(n){x(this).toggleClass(e.call(this,n,this.className,t),t)}):this.each(function(){if("string"===n){var t,i=0,o=x(this),s=e.match(w)||[];while(t=s[i++])o.hasClass(t)?o.removeClass(t):o.addClass(t)}else(n===r||"boolean"===n)&&(this.className&&q.set(this,"__className__",this.className),this.className=this.className||e===!1?"":q.get(this,"__className__")||"")})},hasClass:function(e){var t=" "+e+" ",n=0,r=this.length;for(;r>n;n++)if(1===this[n].nodeType&&(" "+this[n].className+" ").replace(W," ").indexOf(t)>=0)return!0;return!1},val:function(e){var t,n,r,i=this[0];{if(arguments.length)return r=x.isFunction(e),this.each(function(n){var i;1===this.nodeType&&(i=r?e.call(this,n,x(this).val()):e,null==i?i="":"number"==typeof i?i+="":x.isArray(i)&&(i=x.map(i,function(e){return null==e?"":e+""})),t=x.valHooks[this.type]||x.valHooks[this.nodeName.toLowerCase()],t&&"set"in t&&t.set(this,i,"value")!==undefined||(this.value=i))});if(i)return t=x.valHooks[i.type]||x.valHooks[i.nodeName.toLowerCase()],t&&"get"in t&&(n=t.get(i,"value"))!==undefined?n:(n=i.value,"string"==typeof n?n.replace($,""):null==n?"":n)}}}),x.extend({valHooks:{option:{get:function(e){var t=e.attributes.value;return!t||t.specified?e.value:e.text}},select:{get:function(e){var t,n,r=e.options,i=e.selectedIndex,o="select-one"===e.type||0>i,s=o?null:[],a=o?i+1:r.length,u=0>i?a:o?i:0;for(;a>u;u++)if(n=r[u],!(!n.selected&&u!==i||(x.support.optDisabled?n.disabled:null!==n.getAttribute("disabled"))||n.parentNode.disabled&&x.nodeName(n.parentNode,"optgroup"))){if(t=x(n).val(),o)return t;s.push(t)}return s},set:function(e,t){var n,r,i=e.options,o=x.makeArray(t),s=i.length;while(s--)r=i[s],(r.selected=x.inArray(x(r).val(),o)>=0)&&(n=!0);return n||(e.selectedIndex=-1),o}}},attr:function(e,t,n){var i,o,s=e.nodeType;if(e&&3!==s&&8!==s&&2!==s)return typeof e.getAttribute===r?x.prop(e,t,n):(1===s&&x.isXMLDoc(e)||(t=t.toLowerCase(),i=x.attrHooks[t]||(x.expr.match.bool.test(t)?M:R)),n===undefined?i&&"get"in i&&null!==(o=i.get(e,t))?o:(o=x.find.attr(e,t),null==o?undefined:o):null!==n?i&&"set"in i&&(o=i.set(e,n,t))!==undefined?o:(e.setAttribute(t,n+""),n):(x.removeAttr(e,t),undefined))},removeAttr:function(e,t){var n,r,i=0,o=t&&t.match(w);if(o&&1===e.nodeType)while(n=o[i++])r=x.propFix[n]||n,x.expr.match.bool.test(n)&&(e[r]=!1),e.removeAttribute(n)},attrHooks:{type:{set:function(e,t){if(!x.support.radioValue&&"radio"===t&&x.nodeName(e,"input")){var n=e.value;return e.setAttribute("type",t),n&&(e.value=n),t}}}},propFix:{"for":"htmlFor","class":"className"},prop:function(e,t,n){var r,i,o,s=e.nodeType;if(e&&3!==s&&8!==s&&2!==s)return o=1!==s||!x.isXMLDoc(e),o&&(t=x.propFix[t]||t,i=x.propHooks[t]),n!==undefined?i&&"set"in i&&(r=i.set(e,n,t))!==undefined?r:e[t]=n:i&&"get"in i&&null!==(r=i.get(e,t))?r:e[t]},propHooks:{tabIndex:{get:function(e){return e.hasAttribute("tabindex")||B.test(e.nodeName)||e.href?e.tabIndex:-1}}}}),M={set:function(e,t,n){return t===!1?x.removeAttr(e,n):e.setAttribute(n,n),n}},x.each(x.expr.match.bool.source.match(/\w+/g),function(e,t){var n=x.expr.attrHandle[t]||x.find.attr;x.expr.attrHandle[t]=function(e,t,r){var i=x.expr.attrHandle[t],o=r?undefined:(x.expr.attrHandle[t]=undefined)!=n(e,t,r)?t.toLowerCase():null;return x.expr.attrHandle[t]=i,o}}),x.support.optSelected||(x.propHooks.selected={get:function(e){var t=e.parentNode;return t&&t.parentNode&&t.parentNode.selectedIndex,null}}),x.each(["tabIndex","readOnly","maxLength","cellSpacing","cellPadding","rowSpan","colSpan","useMap","frameBorder","contentEditable"],function(){x.propFix[this.toLowerCase()]=this}),x.each(["radio","checkbox"],function(){x.valHooks[this]={set:function(e,t){return x.isArray(t)?e.checked=x.inArray(x(e).val(),t)>=0:undefined}},x.support.checkOn||(x.valHooks[this].get=function(e){return null===e.getAttribute("value")?"on":e.value})});var I=/^key/,z=/^(?:mouse|contextmenu)|click/,_=/^(?:focusinfocus|focusoutblur)$/,X=/^([^.]*)(?:\.(.+)|)$/;function U(){return!0}function Y(){return!1}function V(){try{return o.activeElement}catch(e){}}x.event={global:{},add:function(e,t,n,i,o){var s,a,u,l,c,p,f,h,d,g,m,y=q.get(e);if(y){n.handler&&(s=n,n=s.handler,o=s.selector),n.guid||(n.guid=x.guid++),(l=y.events)||(l=y.events={}),(a=y.handle)||(a=y.handle=function(e){return typeof x===r||e&&x.event.triggered===e.type?undefined:x.event.dispatch.apply(a.elem,arguments)},a.elem=e),t=(t||"").match(w)||[""],c=t.length;while(c--)u=X.exec(t[c])||[],d=m=u[1],g=(u[2]||"").split(".").sort(),d&&(f=x.event.special[d]||{},d=(o?f.delegateType:f.bindType)||d,f=x.event.special[d]||{},p=x.extend({type:d,origType:m,data:i,handler:n,guid:n.guid,selector:o,needsContext:o&&x.expr.match.needsContext.test(o),namespace:g.join(".")},s),(h=l[d])||(h=l[d]=[],h.delegateCount=0,f.setup&&f.setup.call(e,i,g,a)!==!1||e.addEventListener&&e.addEventListener(d,a,!1)),f.add&&(f.add.call(e,p),p.handler.guid||(p.handler.guid=n.guid)),o?h.splice(h.delegateCount++,0,p):h.push(p),x.event.global[d]=!0);e=null}},remove:function(e,t,n,r,i){var o,s,a,u,l,c,p,f,h,d,g,m=q.hasData(e)&&q.get(e);if(m&&(u=m.events)){t=(t||"").match(w)||[""],l=t.length;while(l--)if(a=X.exec(t[l])||[],h=g=a[1],d=(a[2]||"").split(".").sort(),h){p=x.event.special[h]||{},h=(r?p.delegateType:p.bindType)||h,f=u[h]||[],a=a[2]&&RegExp("(^|\\.)"+d.join("\\.(?:.*\\.|)")+"(\\.|$)"),s=o=f.length;while(o--)c=f[o],!i&&g!==c.origType||n&&n.guid!==c.guid||a&&!a.test(c.namespace)||r&&r!==c.selector&&("**"!==r||!c.selector)||(f.splice(o,1),c.selector&&f.delegateCount--,p.remove&&p.remove.call(e,c));s&&!f.length&&(p.teardown&&p.teardown.call(e,d,m.handle)!==!1||x.removeEvent(e,h,m.handle),delete u[h])}else for(h in u)x.event.remove(e,h+t[l],n,r,!0);x.isEmptyObject(u)&&(delete m.handle,q.remove(e,"events"))}},trigger:function(t,n,r,i){var s,a,u,l,c,p,f,h=[r||o],d=y.call(t,"type")?t.type:t,g=y.call(t,"namespace")?t.namespace.split("."):[];if(a=u=r=r||o,3!==r.nodeType&&8!==r.nodeType&&!_.test(d+x.event.triggered)&&(d.indexOf(".")>=0&&(g=d.split("."),d=g.shift(),g.sort()),c=0>d.indexOf(":")&&"on"+d,t=t[x.expando]?t:new x.Event(d,"object"==typeof t&&t),t.isTrigger=i?2:3,t.namespace=g.join("."),t.namespace_re=t.namespace?RegExp("(^|\\.)"+g.join("\\.(?:.*\\.|)")+"(\\.|$)"):null,t.result=undefined,t.target||(t.target=r),n=null==n?[t]:x.makeArray(n,[t]),f=x.event.special[d]||{},i||!f.trigger||f.trigger.apply(r,n)!==!1)){if(!i&&!f.noBubble&&!x.isWindow(r)){for(l=f.delegateType||d,_.test(l+d)||(a=a.parentNode);a;a=a.parentNode)h.push(a),u=a;u===(r.ownerDocument||o)&&h.push(u.defaultView||u.parentWindow||e)}s=0;while((a=h[s++])&&!t.isPropagationStopped())t.type=s>1?l:f.bindType||d,p=(q.get(a,"events")||{})[t.type]&&q.get(a,"handle"),p&&p.apply(a,n),p=c&&a[c],p&&x.acceptData(a)&&p.apply&&p.apply(a,n)===!1&&t.preventDefault();return t.type=d,i||t.isDefaultPrevented()||f._default&&f._default.apply(h.pop(),n)!==!1||!x.acceptData(r)||c&&x.isFunction(r[d])&&!x.isWindow(r)&&(u=r[c],u&&(r[c]=null),x.event.triggered=d,r[d](),x.event.triggered=undefined,u&&(r[c]=u)),t.result}},dispatch:function(e){e=x.event.fix(e);var t,n,r,i,o,s=[],a=d.call(arguments),u=(q.get(this,"events")||{})[e.type]||[],l=x.event.special[e.type]||{};if(a[0]=e,e.delegateTarget=this,!l.preDispatch||l.preDispatch.call(this,e)!==!1){s=x.event.handlers.call(this,e,u),t=0;while((i=s[t++])&&!e.isPropagationStopped()){e.currentTarget=i.elem,n=0;while((o=i.handlers[n++])&&!e.isImmediatePropagationStopped())(!e.namespace_re||e.namespace_re.test(o.namespace))&&(e.handleObj=o,e.data=o.data,r=((x.event.special[o.origType]||{}).handle||o.handler).apply(i.elem,a),r!==undefined&&(e.result=r)===!1&&(e.preventDefault(),e.stopPropagation()))}return l.postDispatch&&l.postDispatch.call(this,e),e.result}},handlers:function(e,t){var n,r,i,o,s=[],a=t.delegateCount,u=e.target;if(a&&u.nodeType&&(!e.button||"click"!==e.type))for(;u!==this;u=u.parentNode||this)if(u.disabled!==!0||"click"!==e.type){for(r=[],n=0;a>n;n++)o=t[n],i=o.selector+" ",r[i]===undefined&&(r[i]=o.needsContext?x(i,this).index(u)>=0:x.find(i,this,null,[u]).length),r[i]&&r.push(o);r.length&&s.push({elem:u,handlers:r})}return t.length>a&&s.push({elem:this,handlers:t.slice(a)}),s},props:"altKey bubbles cancelable ctrlKey currentTarget eventPhase metaKey relatedTarget shiftKey target timeStamp view which".split(" "),fixHooks:{},keyHooks:{props:"char charCode key keyCode".split(" "),filter:function(e,t){return null==e.which&&(e.which=null!=t.charCode?t.charCode:t.keyCode),e}},mouseHooks:{props:"button buttons clientX clientY offsetX offsetY pageX pageY screenX screenY toElement".split(" "),filter:function(e,t){var n,r,i,s=t.button;return null==e.pageX&&null!=t.clientX&&(n=e.target.ownerDocument||o,r=n.documentElement,i=n.body,e.pageX=t.clientX+(r&&r.scrollLeft||i&&i.scrollLeft||0)-(r&&r.clientLeft||i&&i.clientLeft||0),e.pageY=t.clientY+(r&&r.scrollTop||i&&i.scrollTop||0)-(r&&r.clientTop||i&&i.clientTop||0)),e.which||s===undefined||(e.which=1&s?1:2&s?3:4&s?2:0),e}},fix:function(e){if(e[x.expando])return e;var t,n,r,i=e.type,s=e,a=this.fixHooks[i];a||(this.fixHooks[i]=a=z.test(i)?this.mouseHooks:I.test(i)?this.keyHooks:{}),r=a.props?this.props.concat(a.props):this.props,e=new x.Event(s),t=r.length;while(t--)n=r[t],e[n]=s[n];return e.target||(e.target=o),3===e.target.nodeType&&(e.target=e.target.parentNode),a.filter?a.filter(e,s):e},special:{load:{noBubble:!0},focus:{trigger:function(){return this!==V()&&this.focus?(this.focus(),!1):undefined},delegateType:"focusin"},blur:{trigger:function(){return this===V()&&this.blur?(this.blur(),!1):undefined},delegateType:"focusout"},click:{trigger:function(){return"checkbox"===this.type&&this.click&&x.nodeName(this,"input")?(this.click(),!1):undefined},_default:function(e){return x.nodeName(e.target,"a")}},beforeunload:{postDispatch:function(e){e.result!==undefined&&(e.originalEvent.returnValue=e.result)}}},simulate:function(e,t,n,r){var i=x.extend(new x.Event,n,{type:e,isSimulated:!0,originalEvent:{}});r?x.event.trigger(i,null,t):x.event.dispatch.call(t,i),i.isDefaultPrevented()&&n.preventDefault()}},x.removeEvent=function(e,t,n){e.removeEventListener&&e.removeEventListener(t,n,!1)},x.Event=function(e,t){return this instanceof x.Event?(e&&e.type?(this.originalEvent=e,this.type=e.type,this.isDefaultPrevented=e.defaultPrevented||e.getPreventDefault&&e.getPreventDefault()?U:Y):this.type=e,t&&x.extend(this,t),this.timeStamp=e&&e.timeStamp||x.now(),this[x.expando]=!0,undefined):new x.Event(e,t)},x.Event.prototype={isDefaultPrevented:Y,isPropagationStopped:Y,isImmediatePropagationStopped:Y,preventDefault:function(){var e=this.originalEvent;this.isDefaultPrevented=U,e&&e.preventDefault&&e.preventDefault()},stopPropagation:function(){var e=this.originalEvent;this.isPropagationStopped=U,e&&e.stopPropagation&&e.stopPropagation()},stopImmediatePropagation:function(){this.isImmediatePropagationStopped=U,this.stopPropagation()}},x.each({mouseenter:"mouseover",mouseleave:"mouseout"},function(e,t){x.event.special[e]={delegateType:t,bindType:t,handle:function(e){var n,r=this,i=e.relatedTarget,o=e.handleObj;return(!i||i!==r&&!x.contains(r,i))&&(e.type=o.origType,n=o.handler.apply(this,arguments),e.type=t),n}}}),x.support.focusinBubbles||x.each({focus:"focusin",blur:"focusout"},function(e,t){var n=0,r=function(e){x.event.simulate(t,e.target,x.event.fix(e),!0)};x.event.special[t]={setup:function(){0===n++&&o.addEventListener(e,r,!0)},teardown:function(){0===--n&&o.removeEventListener(e,r,!0)}}}),x.fn.extend({on:function(e,t,n,r,i){var o,s;if("object"==typeof e){"string"!=typeof t&&(n=n||t,t=undefined);for(s in e)this.on(s,t,n,e[s],i);return this}if(null==n&&null==r?(r=t,n=t=undefined):null==r&&("string"==typeof t?(r=n,n=undefined):(r=n,n=t,t=undefined)),r===!1)r=Y;else if(!r)return this;return 1===i&&(o=r,r=function(e){return x().off(e),o.apply(this,arguments)},r.guid=o.guid||(o.guid=x.guid++)),this.each(function(){x.event.add(this,e,r,n,t)})},one:function(e,t,n,r){return this.on(e,t,n,r,1)},off:function(e,t,n){var r,i;if(e&&e.preventDefault&&e.handleObj)return r=e.handleObj,x(e.delegateTarget).off(r.namespace?r.origType+"."+r.namespace:r.origType,r.selector,r.handler),this;if("object"==typeof e){for(i in e)this.off(i,t,e[i]);return this}return(t===!1||"function"==typeof t)&&(n=t,t=undefined),n===!1&&(n=Y),this.each(function(){x.event.remove(this,e,n,t)})},trigger:function(e,t){return this.each(function(){x.event.trigger(e,t,this)})},triggerHandler:function(e,t){var n=this[0];return n?x.event.trigger(e,t,n,!0):undefined}});var G=/^.[^:#\[\.,]*$/,J=/^(?:parents|prev(?:Until|All))/,Q=x.expr.match.needsContext,K={children:!0,contents:!0,next:!0,prev:!0};x.fn.extend({find:function(e){var t,n=[],r=this,i=r.length;if("string"!=typeof e)return this.pushStack(x(e).filter(function(){for(t=0;i>t;t++)if(x.contains(r[t],this))return!0}));for(t=0;i>t;t++)x.find(e,r[t],n);return n=this.pushStack(i>1?x.unique(n):n),n.selector=this.selector?this.selector+" "+e:e,n},has:function(e){var t=x(e,this),n=t.length;return this.filter(function(){var e=0;for(;n>e;e++)if(x.contains(this,t[e]))return!0})},not:function(e){return this.pushStack(et(this,e||[],!0))},filter:function(e){return this.pushStack(et(this,e||[],!1))},is:function(e){return!!et(this,"string"==typeof e&&Q.test(e)?x(e):e||[],!1).length},closest:function(e,t){var n,r=0,i=this.length,o=[],s=Q.test(e)||"string"!=typeof e?x(e,t||this.context):0;for(;i>r;r++)for(n=this[r];n&&n!==t;n=n.parentNode)if(11>n.nodeType&&(s?s.index(n)>-1:1===n.nodeType&&x.find.matchesSelector(n,e))){n=o.push(n);break}return this.pushStack(o.length>1?x.unique(o):o)},index:function(e){return e?"string"==typeof e?g.call(x(e),this[0]):g.call(this,e.jquery?e[0]:e):this[0]&&this[0].parentNode?this.first().prevAll().length:-1},add:function(e,t){var n="string"==typeof e?x(e,t):x.makeArray(e&&e.nodeType?[e]:e),r=x.merge(this.get(),n);return this.pushStack(x.unique(r))},addBack:function(e){return this.add(null==e?this.prevObject:this.prevObject.filter(e))}});function Z(e,t){while((e=e[t])&&1!==e.nodeType);return e}x.each({parent:function(e){var t=e.parentNode;return t&&11!==t.nodeType?t:null},parents:function(e){return x.dir(e,"parentNode")},parentsUntil:function(e,t,n){return x.dir(e,"parentNode",n)},next:function(e){return Z(e,"nextSibling")},prev:function(e){return Z(e,"previousSibling")},nextAll:function(e){return x.dir(e,"nextSibling")},prevAll:function(e){return x.dir(e,"previousSibling")},nextUntil:function(e,t,n){return x.dir(e,"nextSibling",n)},prevUntil:function(e,t,n){return x.dir(e,"previousSibling",n)},siblings:function(e){return x.sibling((e.parentNode||{}).firstChild,e)},children:function(e){return x.sibling(e.firstChild)},contents:function(e){return e.contentDocument||x.merge([],e.childNodes)}},function(e,t){x.fn[e]=function(n,r){var i=x.map(this,t,n);return"Until"!==e.slice(-5)&&(r=n),r&&"string"==typeof r&&(i=x.filter(r,i)),this.length>1&&(K[e]||x.unique(i),J.test(e)&&i.reverse()),this.pushStack(i)}}),x.extend({filter:function(e,t,n){var r=t[0];return n&&(e=":not("+e+")"),1===t.length&&1===r.nodeType?x.find.matchesSelector(r,e)?[r]:[]:x.find.matches(e,x.grep(t,function(e){return 1===e.nodeType}))},dir:function(e,t,n){var r=[],i=n!==undefined;while((e=e[t])&&9!==e.nodeType)if(1===e.nodeType){if(i&&x(e).is(n))break;r.push(e)}return r},sibling:function(e,t){var n=[];for(;e;e=e.nextSibling)1===e.nodeType&&e!==t&&n.push(e);return n}});function et(e,t,n){if(x.isFunction(t))return x.grep(e,function(e,r){return!!t.call(e,r,e)!==n});if(t.nodeType)return x.grep(e,function(e){return e===t!==n});if("string"==typeof t){if(G.test(t))return x.filter(t,e,n);t=x.filter(t,e)}return x.grep(e,function(e){return g.call(t,e)>=0!==n})}var tt=/<(?!area|br|col|embed|hr|img|input|link|meta|param)(([\w:]+)[^>]*)\/>/gi,nt=/<([\w:]+)/,rt=/<|&#?\w+;/,it=/<(?:script|style|link)/i,ot=/^(?:checkbox|radio)$/i,st=/checked\s*(?:[^=]|=\s*.checked.)/i,at=/^$|\/(?:java|ecma)script/i,ut=/^true\/(.*)/,lt=/^\s*\s*$/g,ct={option:[1,""],thead:[1,"","
                                                              "],col:[2,"","
                                                              "],tr:[2,"","
                                                              "],td:[3,"","
                                                              "],_default:[0,"",""]};ct.optgroup=ct.option,ct.tbody=ct.tfoot=ct.colgroup=ct.caption=ct.thead,ct.th=ct.td,x.fn.extend({text:function(e){return x.access(this,function(e){return e===undefined?x.text(this):this.empty().append((this[0]&&this[0].ownerDocument||o).createTextNode(e))},null,e,arguments.length)},append:function(){return this.domManip(arguments,function(e){if(1===this.nodeType||11===this.nodeType||9===this.nodeType){var t=pt(this,e);t.appendChild(e)}})},prepend:function(){return this.domManip(arguments,function(e){if(1===this.nodeType||11===this.nodeType||9===this.nodeType){var t=pt(this,e);t.insertBefore(e,t.firstChild)}})},before:function(){return this.domManip(arguments,function(e){this.parentNode&&this.parentNode.insertBefore(e,this)})},after:function(){return this.domManip(arguments,function(e){this.parentNode&&this.parentNode.insertBefore(e,this.nextSibling)})},remove:function(e,t){var n,r=e?x.filter(e,this):this,i=0;for(;null!=(n=r[i]);i++)t||1!==n.nodeType||x.cleanData(mt(n)),n.parentNode&&(t&&x.contains(n.ownerDocument,n)&&dt(mt(n,"script")),n.parentNode.removeChild(n));return this},empty:function(){var e,t=0;for(;null!=(e=this[t]);t++)1===e.nodeType&&(x.cleanData(mt(e,!1)),e.textContent="");return this},clone:function(e,t){return e=null==e?!1:e,t=null==t?e:t,this.map(function(){return x.clone(this,e,t)})},html:function(e){return x.access(this,function(e){var t=this[0]||{},n=0,r=this.length;if(e===undefined&&1===t.nodeType)return t.innerHTML;if("string"==typeof e&&!it.test(e)&&!ct[(nt.exec(e)||["",""])[1].toLowerCase()]){e=e.replace(tt,"<$1>");try{for(;r>n;n++)t=this[n]||{},1===t.nodeType&&(x.cleanData(mt(t,!1)),t.innerHTML=e);t=0}catch(i){}}t&&this.empty().append(e)},null,e,arguments.length)},replaceWith:function(){var e=x.map(this,function(e){return[e.nextSibling,e.parentNode]}),t=0;return this.domManip(arguments,function(n){var r=e[t++],i=e[t++];i&&(r&&r.parentNode!==i&&(r=this.nextSibling),x(this).remove(),i.insertBefore(n,r))},!0),t?this:this.remove()},detach:function(e){return this.remove(e,!0)},domManip:function(e,t,n){e=f.apply([],e);var r,i,o,s,a,u,l=0,c=this.length,p=this,h=c-1,d=e[0],g=x.isFunction(d);if(g||!(1>=c||"string"!=typeof d||x.support.checkClone)&&st.test(d))return this.each(function(r){var i=p.eq(r);g&&(e[0]=d.call(this,r,i.html())),i.domManip(e,t,n)});if(c&&(r=x.buildFragment(e,this[0].ownerDocument,!1,!n&&this),i=r.firstChild,1===r.childNodes.length&&(r=i),i)){for(o=x.map(mt(r,"script"),ft),s=o.length;c>l;l++)a=r,l!==h&&(a=x.clone(a,!0,!0),s&&x.merge(o,mt(a,"script"))),t.call(this[l],a,l);if(s)for(u=o[o.length-1].ownerDocument,x.map(o,ht),l=0;s>l;l++)a=o[l],at.test(a.type||"")&&!q.access(a,"globalEval")&&x.contains(u,a)&&(a.src?x._evalUrl(a.src):x.globalEval(a.textContent.replace(lt,"")))}return this}}),x.each({appendTo:"append",prependTo:"prepend",insertBefore:"before",insertAfter:"after",replaceAll:"replaceWith"},function(e,t){x.fn[e]=function(e){var n,r=[],i=x(e),o=i.length-1,s=0;for(;o>=s;s++)n=s===o?this:this.clone(!0),x(i[s])[t](n),h.apply(r,n.get());return this.pushStack(r)}}),x.extend({clone:function(e,t,n){var r,i,o,s,a=e.cloneNode(!0),u=x.contains(e.ownerDocument,e);if(!(x.support.noCloneChecked||1!==e.nodeType&&11!==e.nodeType||x.isXMLDoc(e)))for(s=mt(a),o=mt(e),r=0,i=o.length;i>r;r++)yt(o[r],s[r]);if(t)if(n)for(o=o||mt(e),s=s||mt(a),r=0,i=o.length;i>r;r++)gt(o[r],s[r]);else gt(e,a);return s=mt(a,"script"),s.length>0&&dt(s,!u&&mt(e,"script")),a},buildFragment:function(e,t,n,r){var i,o,s,a,u,l,c=0,p=e.length,f=t.createDocumentFragment(),h=[];for(;p>c;c++)if(i=e[c],i||0===i)if("object"===x.type(i))x.merge(h,i.nodeType?[i]:i);else if(rt.test(i)){o=o||f.appendChild(t.createElement("div")),s=(nt.exec(i)||["",""])[1].toLowerCase(),a=ct[s]||ct._default,o.innerHTML=a[1]+i.replace(tt,"<$1>")+a[2],l=a[0];while(l--)o=o.lastChild;x.merge(h,o.childNodes),o=f.firstChild,o.textContent=""}else h.push(t.createTextNode(i));f.textContent="",c=0;while(i=h[c++])if((!r||-1===x.inArray(i,r))&&(u=x.contains(i.ownerDocument,i),o=mt(f.appendChild(i),"script"),u&&dt(o),n)){l=0;while(i=o[l++])at.test(i.type||"")&&n.push(i)}return f},cleanData:function(e){var t,n,r,i,o,s,a=x.event.special,u=0;for(;(n=e[u])!==undefined;u++){if(F.accepts(n)&&(o=n[q.expando],o&&(t=q.cache[o]))){if(r=Object.keys(t.events||{}),r.length)for(s=0;(i=r[s])!==undefined;s++)a[i]?x.event.remove(n,i):x.removeEvent(n,i,t.handle);q.cache[o]&&delete q.cache[o]}delete L.cache[n[L.expando]]}},_evalUrl:function(e){return x.ajax({url:e,type:"GET",dataType:"script",async:!1,global:!1,"throws":!0})}});function pt(e,t){return x.nodeName(e,"table")&&x.nodeName(1===t.nodeType?t:t.firstChild,"tr")?e.getElementsByTagName("tbody")[0]||e.appendChild(e.ownerDocument.createElement("tbody")):e}function ft(e){return e.type=(null!==e.getAttribute("type"))+"/"+e.type,e}function ht(e){var t=ut.exec(e.type);return t?e.type=t[1]:e.removeAttribute("type"),e}function dt(e,t){var n=e.length,r=0;for(;n>r;r++)q.set(e[r],"globalEval",!t||q.get(t[r],"globalEval"))}function gt(e,t){var n,r,i,o,s,a,u,l;if(1===t.nodeType){if(q.hasData(e)&&(o=q.access(e),s=q.set(t,o),l=o.events)){delete s.handle,s.events={};for(i in l)for(n=0,r=l[i].length;r>n;n++)x.event.add(t,i,l[i][n])}L.hasData(e)&&(a=L.access(e),u=x.extend({},a),L.set(t,u))}}function mt(e,t){var n=e.getElementsByTagName?e.getElementsByTagName(t||"*"):e.querySelectorAll?e.querySelectorAll(t||"*"):[];return t===undefined||t&&x.nodeName(e,t)?x.merge([e],n):n}function yt(e,t){var n=t.nodeName.toLowerCase();"input"===n&&ot.test(e.type)?t.checked=e.checked:("input"===n||"textarea"===n)&&(t.defaultValue=e.defaultValue)}x.fn.extend({wrapAll:function(e){var t;return x.isFunction(e)?this.each(function(t){x(this).wrapAll(e.call(this,t))}):(this[0]&&(t=x(e,this[0].ownerDocument).eq(0).clone(!0),this[0].parentNode&&t.insertBefore(this[0]),t.map(function(){var e=this;while(e.firstElementChild)e=e.firstElementChild;return e}).append(this)),this)},wrapInner:function(e){return x.isFunction(e)?this.each(function(t){x(this).wrapInner(e.call(this,t))}):this.each(function(){var t=x(this),n=t.contents();n.length?n.wrapAll(e):t.append(e)})},wrap:function(e){var t=x.isFunction(e);return this.each(function(n){x(this).wrapAll(t?e.call(this,n):e)})},unwrap:function(){return this.parent().each(function(){x.nodeName(this,"body")||x(this).replaceWith(this.childNodes)}).end()}});var vt,xt,bt=/^(none|table(?!-c[ea]).+)/,wt=/^margin/,Tt=RegExp("^("+b+")(.*)$","i"),Ct=RegExp("^("+b+")(?!px)[a-z%]+$","i"),kt=RegExp("^([+-])=("+b+")","i"),Nt={BODY:"block"},Et={position:"absolute",visibility:"hidden",display:"block"},St={letterSpacing:0,fontWeight:400},jt=["Top","Right","Bottom","Left"],Dt=["Webkit","O","Moz","ms"];function At(e,t){if(t in e)return t;var n=t.charAt(0).toUpperCase()+t.slice(1),r=t,i=Dt.length;while(i--)if(t=Dt[i]+n,t in e)return t;return r}function Lt(e,t){return e=t||e,"none"===x.css(e,"display")||!x.contains(e.ownerDocument,e)}function qt(t){return e.getComputedStyle(t,null)}function Ht(e,t){var n,r,i,o=[],s=0,a=e.length;for(;a>s;s++)r=e[s],r.style&&(o[s]=q.get(r,"olddisplay"),n=r.style.display,t?(o[s]||"none"!==n||(r.style.display=""),""===r.style.display&&Lt(r)&&(o[s]=q.access(r,"olddisplay",Rt(r.nodeName)))):o[s]||(i=Lt(r),(n&&"none"!==n||!i)&&q.set(r,"olddisplay",i?n:x.css(r,"display"))));for(s=0;a>s;s++)r=e[s],r.style&&(t&&"none"!==r.style.display&&""!==r.style.display||(r.style.display=t?o[s]||"":"none"));return e}x.fn.extend({css:function(e,t){return x.access(this,function(e,t,n){var r,i,o={},s=0;if(x.isArray(t)){for(r=qt(e),i=t.length;i>s;s++)o[t[s]]=x.css(e,t[s],!1,r);return o}return n!==undefined?x.style(e,t,n):x.css(e,t)},e,t,arguments.length>1)},show:function(){return Ht(this,!0)},hide:function(){return Ht(this)},toggle:function(e){return"boolean"==typeof e?e?this.show():this.hide():this.each(function(){Lt(this)?x(this).show():x(this).hide()})}}),x.extend({cssHooks:{opacity:{get:function(e,t){if(t){var n=vt(e,"opacity");return""===n?"1":n}}}},cssNumber:{columnCount:!0,fillOpacity:!0,fontWeight:!0,lineHeight:!0,opacity:!0,order:!0,orphans:!0,widows:!0,zIndex:!0,zoom:!0},cssProps:{"float":"cssFloat"},style:function(e,t,n,r){if(e&&3!==e.nodeType&&8!==e.nodeType&&e.style){var i,o,s,a=x.camelCase(t),u=e.style;return t=x.cssProps[a]||(x.cssProps[a]=At(u,a)),s=x.cssHooks[t]||x.cssHooks[a],n===undefined?s&&"get"in s&&(i=s.get(e,!1,r))!==undefined?i:u[t]:(o=typeof n,"string"===o&&(i=kt.exec(n))&&(n=(i[1]+1)*i[2]+parseFloat(x.css(e,t)),o="number"),null==n||"number"===o&&isNaN(n)||("number"!==o||x.cssNumber[a]||(n+="px"),x.support.clearCloneStyle||""!==n||0!==t.indexOf("background")||(u[t]="inherit"),s&&"set"in s&&(n=s.set(e,n,r))===undefined||(u[t]=n)),undefined)}},css:function(e,t,n,r){var i,o,s,a=x.camelCase(t);return t=x.cssProps[a]||(x.cssProps[a]=At(e.style,a)),s=x.cssHooks[t]||x.cssHooks[a],s&&"get"in s&&(i=s.get(e,!0,n)),i===undefined&&(i=vt(e,t,r)),"normal"===i&&t in St&&(i=St[t]),""===n||n?(o=parseFloat(i),n===!0||x.isNumeric(o)?o||0:i):i}}),vt=function(e,t,n){var r,i,o,s=n||qt(e),a=s?s.getPropertyValue(t)||s[t]:undefined,u=e.style;return s&&(""!==a||x.contains(e.ownerDocument,e)||(a=x.style(e,t)),Ct.test(a)&&wt.test(t)&&(r=u.width,i=u.minWidth,o=u.maxWidth,u.minWidth=u.maxWidth=u.width=a,a=s.width,u.width=r,u.minWidth=i,u.maxWidth=o)),a};function Ot(e,t,n){var r=Tt.exec(t);return r?Math.max(0,r[1]-(n||0))+(r[2]||"px"):t}function Ft(e,t,n,r,i){var o=n===(r?"border":"content")?4:"width"===t?1:0,s=0;for(;4>o;o+=2)"margin"===n&&(s+=x.css(e,n+jt[o],!0,i)),r?("content"===n&&(s-=x.css(e,"padding"+jt[o],!0,i)),"margin"!==n&&(s-=x.css(e,"border"+jt[o]+"Width",!0,i))):(s+=x.css(e,"padding"+jt[o],!0,i),"padding"!==n&&(s+=x.css(e,"border"+jt[o]+"Width",!0,i)));return s}function Pt(e,t,n){var r=!0,i="width"===t?e.offsetWidth:e.offsetHeight,o=qt(e),s=x.support.boxSizing&&"border-box"===x.css(e,"boxSizing",!1,o);if(0>=i||null==i){if(i=vt(e,t,o),(0>i||null==i)&&(i=e.style[t]),Ct.test(i))return i;r=s&&(x.support.boxSizingReliable||i===e.style[t]),i=parseFloat(i)||0}return i+Ft(e,t,n||(s?"border":"content"),r,o)+"px"}function Rt(e){var t=o,n=Nt[e];return n||(n=Mt(e,t),"none"!==n&&n||(xt=(xt||x("